z 


'^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


1.1 


Iii|2j8     |25 
Ui  Ui   g2.2 

Sf   |4£   12.0 

u 


u& 


Hiotogra[Jiic 

Sciences 

Corpcjration 


// 


1-25  11  1.4   ||.6 

< 

6"     

► 

33  WKT  MAIN  STRHT 

WIUTIi.N.Y.  USM 

(7U)«72-4S03 


4^ 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microraproductions  /  institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniquat  at  bibiiographiquas 


Tha  Instituta  haa  attamptad  to  obtain  tha  baat 
original  copy  availabia  for  filming.  Faaturaa  of  thia 
copy  which  may  ba  bibliogranhicaily  uniqua, 
which  may  altar  any  of  tha  imagas  in  tha 
raproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  changa 
tha  uaual  mathod  of  filming,  ara  chacicad  balow. 


D 


D 


D 
D 


D 


Coloured  covara/ 
Couvartura  da  coulaur 


I      I    Covers  damaged/ 


Couverture  endommag^a 

Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaurte  at/ou  pailicul^e 


□   Cover  title  missing/ 
Le 


titre  de  couverture  manque 

loured  maps/ 
Cartes  gAographiquas  en  couleur 

Coloured  inic  (i.e.  other  than  blue 

Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bieue  ou  noire) 


I     I   Coloured  maps/ 

I      I    Coloured  inic  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 


I     I   Coloured  plates  and/or  Illustrations/ 


D 


Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 

Bound  with  other  material/ 
RailA  avac  d'autrea  documtnta 

Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  Interior  margin/ 

La  re  liure  serr^e  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
diatortion  le  long  de  la  marge  IntArieure 

Bianic  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  tha  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajouttes 
lors  d'una  restauration  apparaissant  dana  la  taxte, 
mais,  lorsqua  cela  6tait  possible,  ces  pagea  n'ont 
pas  4tA  filmias. 

Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  supplAmartairas: 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  le  meilleur  exempiaire 
qu'il  lui  a  AtA  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  d^taila 
de  cet  exempiaire  qui  sont  peut-Atre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  mAthode  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indlqute  cl-dessous. 


n 

D 
E 
D 
0 
D 
D 
D 
D 


Coloured  pages/ 
Pagea  de  couleur 

Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagtes 

Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Pages  restaurtes  et/ou  pelliculAes 

Pagea  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 
Pages  dAcolortes,  tachettes  ou  piqutes 

Pagea  detached/ 
Pages  ditachtes 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

Quality  of  print  variaa/ 
Quality  in^gaia  de  I'impresslon 

includes  supplementary  material/ 
Comprend  du  material  suppKmentaira 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Mitlon  diaponibia 

Pagea  wholly  or  partially  obacured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  ref limed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcles  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  una  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  At  A  filmtea  A  nouvaau  da  fapon  A 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  poasibla. 


Thia  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  chaciced  below/ 

Ce  document  eat  filmi  au  taux  da  rAduction  indlquA  ci-daasous. 


10X 

14X 

18X 

22X 

26X 

30X 

y 

1 
1 

12X 

IfX 

20X 

a4X 

28X 

32X 

I)laire 
98  details 
iques  du 
nt  modifier 
xiger  une 
de  fiimage 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanlcs 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Dana  Porter  Arts  Library 
UniMnityofWatarioo 

The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  iegibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


L'exemplaire  film6  f ut  reproduit  grice  A  la 
g6nArositA  de: 

Dana  Porter  Arts  Library 
Univenity  of  Waterloo 

Les  images  suivantes  ont  4tA  reproduites  avec  le 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  at 
de  ia  nettet6  de  l'exemplaire  f  ilm6,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
fiimage. 


d/ 
:|utes 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprlmte  sont  fiimfo  en  commenpant 
par  le  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  ia 
derniire  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'iliustration,  soit  par  le  second 
plat,  salon  le  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  filmte  en  commenpant  par  la 
premiere  page  qL<  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'iilustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  derniAre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  -^  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  V  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 


Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaftra  sur  ia 
dernlAre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  le 
cas:  le  symbols  —►  signifie  "A  SUIVRE",  ie 
symbols  ▼  signifie  "FIN". 


aire 


Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposura  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diegrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  Atre 
fiimte  A  des  taux  de  reduction  difftrents. 
Lorsque  le  document  est  trop  grand  pour  Atre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clich6,  il  est  f  ilmA  A  partir 
de  i'angle  supArieur  gauche,  de  gauche  it  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'images  nAcessaire.  Les  disgrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  mAthode. 


by  errata 
ned  to 

tent 

une  peiure, 

fa9on  it 


1 

2 

3 

32X 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

\ 


\ 


AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT: 

CONTAINING    THE 

COURSES  AND  DISTANCES 

♦  BETWEEN   THE 

PRINCIPAL  HARBOURS,  CAPES,  AND  HEADLANDS, 

/ 

ON    THE 

COAST  or  sroiiTH  Axn>  sovtb  ambuoa: 

WITH  DIRECTIONS  FOR  SMLmG  /JVTO  THE  SJiME; 

Describing  the  Soundings,  Bearings  of  the  Light-Houses  and  Beacons 
from  the  Rocks,  Shoals,  Ledges,  &c. 

"       •  WITH    THE    PREVAILING 

WINDS,  SETTINGS  OF  THE  CURRENTS,  fee. 

AND    THE 

XULTlTXmM  AZSTB  LONCHVUBBS 

OP   THE 

PRINCIPAL  HARBOURS   AND  CAPES. 


^'■■. 


TOGETHER  WITH  A 


TIDE    TA8LS. 


V     i  1  jtV 


J    I  ; 


.•^ 


BY   EDMUND   M.   BLUNT. 


C«lrrect^d  and  Improved  by  Information  derived  from  Cfficud  Documenta,  Jtettud  OktmatimUf 

and  the  most  experienced  Pilots. 


BLBVaiTTH  BDITZOir. 


NEW-YORK: 

PUBLISHED  BT  EDMUND  AND  GEORGE  W.  BLUNT,  154  WATER-STREET, 

corner;  OF  MAIDEN-LANE. 
Gray  ^  Bunce^  Printer$. 

Sept.  1827. 


%. 


*•% 


'  I 


**»*%,  to  wit  r 


k::  ^ 


CA,r*  •/•  fA,  f '^P^RICK  J.  BETT8 


NOTICE. 


EDMUND  M.  BLUNT. 


1 
t 
s 

t 
I 

r 


THE  UBRAIHY 
UIV/VERSITY  OF  WATFRfoh 


REPOUT 


9    • 


0/  Ou  ComntiUu  appointed  to  examine  BltM't  Chart  of  the  Jforth-SUut  CkaU 
iff  Jforth  America,  relative  to  the  SotUh  Shoal  of  Nantucket. 


iitlior,  ia  tlw  wnrda 

tl>e  prineiiM]  Hw. 
«ctioiMfor8wUlBff 
BeKcou  from  thS 
'*Sf^  *c.  ud  tb* 


br  tbe  encoorafc 
'iand  proprtoion 
led  "AnActiiup. 
icurin;  ib«  copiM 
.tbe  timet  therein 
'Kffi  and  etchiDf 

C  J.  BETTS, 


the  sub' 
UND  and 

Maiden- 

)ublished. 

every  in- 

ial  docu* 

UNT. 


rk  com- 


TWe  comnrittee  appointed  to  examine  the  eyidence  relative  to  the  position  of 
Nantucket  South  Shoal, 

Itc4F£CTTULLT  REPORT, 

That  the  South  Shoal  of  Nantucket,  which  has  been  heretofore  placed  in  lat.  40^ 
4!t  N.  or  thereabouts,  on  the  charts  of  the  Coast  of  North  America,  has  been  placed 
in  lat.  41°  4'  N.  on  a  Chart  of  part  of  the  Coast  of  North  America  recently  published 
by  E.  M.  Blunt,  on  the  following  evidence  cf  its  position. 

1st.  A  survey  by  Capt  J.  Colesworthy,  made  in  June  and  July,  1831 ,  for  account 
of,  and  at  the  expense  of  Mr.  £.  M.  Blunt. 

2d.  Observations  of  Capt.  Colesworthy  oo  tbe  1 1th  of  September  following^,  assisted 
by  Mr.  Walter  Folger,  jr.  of  Nantucket,  who  accompanied  him  at  the  instance  of 
several  of  the  inhabitants  of  that  Island,  to  determine  whether  a  mistake  had  -or  bad 
■ot  been  made  by  Capt.  Colesworthy,  in  his  previous  surveys. 

At  this  time,  (1 1th  Sept.)  a  good  observation  was  had  at  noon  half  a  mile  south' of 
the  Shoal,  according  to  the  account  given  by  Mr.  Folger. 

3d.  A  surrey  made  by  William  Coffin,  P.  F.  Coffin,  Jona.  C.  Briggs,  and  sevel«f 
other  experienced  navigators  of  Nantucket,  who  were  provided  with  a  sloop  equip- 
ped at  the  expense  of  the  inhabitants  of  that  Island,  by  subscription,  for  the  expresv 
purpose  of  surveying  tbe  South  Shoal,  to  ascertain  whether  the  Shoal  surrdywllty 
Capt.  Colesworthy  was  the  '*  Old  South  Shoal^*'  or  not. 

This  party  left  Nantucket  on  the  20th  of  October  last  in  the  morning,  and  **  al 
noon  ofititeame  day,  observed  in  latitude  41°  4'  N.  by  four  good  inttrumenti,  ffce  ShbC^ 
east,  hoo  mile*  dietant. 

After  this  they  traversed  to  the  S.  S.  W.  South,  East,  N.  and  E.  and  N.  and  W. 
between  the  paraUels  of  40^  40^  and  41°  4'.  They  "  had  30  fathoms  in  40^  40',  Uid 
running  on  one  hour  to  the  south,  had  35  fathoms.^ 

In  traversing  over  the  position  assigned  tathe  Shoal  on  the  old  Cbarts,>  tbey  found 
30  fathoms,  and  not  less  at  any  time  to  the  south  of  40°  40^ ;  from  that  depttk  the 
soundings  were  found  regular  to  15  fathoms,  near  the  Shoal,  in  41°  4f. 

Mr.  Walter  Folger,  jr.  says,  in  a  letter  dated  October  2l8t,  *' this  evening  the 
vessel  arrived  here  that  was  sent  out  to  find  the  South  Shoal  in  40°  42^,  oA  board  df 
which  were  some  of  those  who  were  most  positive  that  it  lay  in  that  latitude.  TImv 
informed  me,  that  they  could  not  find  less  than  30  fathoms  water  on  that  parallel. 
They  observed  yesterday,  west  from  the  Shoal  that  Capt.  Colesworthy  surveyed 
S4th  June  and  9th  July,  and  that  we  observed  at  the  south  of,  half  a  mile  distant,  cnt, 
the  I'lth  September ;  I  could  then  see  the^esselfrom  my  house." 

This  statement  is  supported  by  the  letters  of  William  Coffin,  P.  F.  Coffin,  Jona. 
C.  Brigg^,  and  several  others,  which  give  particular  accounts  of  Uie  survey,,  aedl 
which  accompany  this  Report. 

Your  Committee  are  therefore  of  opinion^  that  the  positioU  assigned  to  Naiitnckei 
South  Shoal,  by  Mr.  E.  M.  Blunt,  on  the  Chart  recently  published  by  him  (ittrfot* 
41°  4'  N.)  is  the  true  place  of  the  Shoal. 

Your  committee  recommend  the  following  resolutions  for  adoption — 

Resolved,  That  this  Society  is  satisfied  that  the  position  assigned  to  Nantuekot 
South  Shoal,  (lat.  41°  4'  N.)  by  Mr.  E.  M.  Blunt,  on  a  Chart  of  part  of  the  Coast  of 
North  America,  recently  published  bv  him^  is  the  true  place  of  the  Shoal,  and  that 
tbe  position  of  that  Shoal  is  established  by  more  sufficient  testimony  than  that  of 
any  other  Shoal  on  the  Coast  of  North  America. 

Resolved,  That  in  detecting  an  error  of  22  miles  in  the  position  assigned  to 
the  dangerous  South  Shoal  of  Nantucket,  on  the  Charts  heretofore  published,  Mr. 
E.  M.  Blunt  has  rendered  an  important  service  to  the  shipping  interest,  and  to  the 
mariners  of  the  United  States. 

Retohed,  That  the  Secretary  be  directed  to  transmit  to  Mr.  E.  M.  Blunt  a  copy 
of  the  foregoing  Report  and  Resolutions. 

H.  AUSTIN  'i 

ISAAC  WaItE,  (CommUlee. 

E.  FISHER.         J 


«  « 


DIHECTIOKS  TO  THE  BmDEK. 


^'l=r^?Jri.:;::™™o„.n 


ISLES  OP  SHOALS 

oV^i    ®^^^^  HARBOUR 
CAPE  ANN  HARBOUR  ' 

BOSTON  HARBOUR         *    '    * 

CAPE  POGE  HARBOUR  '     *    * 
NEWPORT  HARBOUR  *    ' 

^ONQ  ISLAND  SOUNn   '    *    ' 

f-'^^^E  EGG  HARBOUR     *    ' 

CHART  J"^^:^^  I>^LAWARE    :    .*    *         ' ^ 

'  SAVANNAH  RIVER 
DOBOy  SOUND  *    ' 

PENSACOLA  harbour"    * 
VIRGIN  ISLANDS  '    ' 

VERA  CRUZ     .    .         •    •    •    • 

ISLE  OF  SABLE 


43 
44 
46 
50 
51 
61 
80 
91 
101 
110 
12 
.  114 
•  131 
134 
136 
159 
304 
446 
6S0 


r  .'I ! 


PREFACE 

VO    TBB   SLBVENTB   BDZTXOW 


^/  ,iu '-•»■■ 


OF   THE 


AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


!•■ 


PAGE. 
.  39 

.  43 

.  44 

.  46 

.  50 

.  51 

.  61 

.  80 

.  91 

•  101 

.  110 

.  112 

.  114 

.  131 

.  134 

.  136 

.  159 

304 

446 

620 


THIRTY-ONE  years  have  elapsed  since  the  Author  commenced  this 
wo/k.  To  it  he  has  devoted  his  time,  labour,  and  great  expense ;  and  the 
reception  it  has  met  with  from  that  respectable  class  of  society  by  whom 
it  is  used,  may  be  inferred  from  the  fact,  that  TEN  EDITIONS,  com- 
prising thirty-three  thousand  copies,  have  been  sold,  previous  to  the  pub- 
lication of  the  present  edition. 

The  difficulties  of  procuring  all  the  improvements  incident  to  an  under- 
taking of  this  character,  not  only  intended  to  enable  the  mariner  to  recog- 
nize the  coast  at  a  distance,  but  to  direct  him  into  a  port  when  pilots  cannot 
be  obtained,  renders  it  a  work  of  great  labour  and  responsibility.   The  life 
of  the  most  experienced,  is  more  endangered  when  he  approaches  the 
coast,  than  when  exposed  to  the  tempest  which  agitates  the  mid  ocean. 
Pilots  who  are  not  always  to  be  found  in  the  discharge  of  their  duty, 
are  often  prevented  from  offering  their  assistance  to  vessels  endeavour- 
ing tvi  make  a  harbour,  by  storms  and  violent  winds.     In  such  cases, 
unless  the  masters  are  acquainted  with  the  port,  the  safety  of  the  vessel 
depends  upon  the  accuracy  of  the  Sailing  Directions.     Charts  are  in- 
tended rather  to  give  a  general  idea  of  the  coast,  than  minute  and  ac- 
curate descriptions   of  particular  harbours.     It  is,  therefore,  to  their 
prated  directions  that  they  must  resort,  to  procure  information,  which  at 
such  moments  becomes  vitally  important.     Their  instruments  and  charts, 
by  which  they  have  been  enabled  to  shape  their  course  through  a  trackless 
ocean,  are  rendered  useless  by  their  ignorance  of  the  channel  through 
which  they  are  to  enter  the  harbour,  and  mariners,  who  have  often  es- 
caped all  former  dangers  of  the  voyage,  are  often  shipwrecked  upon  some 
sunken  rock,  or  shoal, 'at  the  entrance  of  their  destined  port.     The 
knowledge  of  such  dangers,  important  as  it  is  to  seamen  generally,  is 
particularly  so,  to  those  of  the  United  States.     Navigating  waters  ^led 
with  banks  and  bars,  which  are  subject  to  change,  formed  in  part  by 
the  Gulf  Stream,  and  by  the  mighty  rivers  which  discharge  themselves 
from  the  r  jast  of  the  Noi  th  American  continent,  they  require  no  ordin- 
ary skill  and  knowledge  to  avoid  those  extensive  and  intricate  shoals 
tha0t  line  our  shores.     This  coast  is  rendered  still  more  dangerous  by 
rapid  tides  and  eddies,  peculiar  to  the  American  seas,  and  by  a  strong 


vi 


PHEPACE. 


authentic  sources-   nn^  r  ^^^^^^  ^e  now  nuhU^h         P ^^^^S^* 

our  ow.„  exertions  WP^    •"•"  ^"''  "^"  ffoverrnfent  1'-"^  ^'*°'"  ™°^« 

publishers,  i,,  desTrlh:      '  .^^^P^'Off  this  ffener J 1?     !^      ^."'^®  ^'^e 
<^uliar  and  local  .T"^  *^^  *=««sts  of  thffr  'f       ^'  *''^*  American 

a^  by  ,1,^  authorr.^„tnn,r ^"■'""™'  "^''-e  Unhid  L'f*  '"'™^'' 

had  to  Pv„„  L_S'*?''™?»  Coort  /..-foi  f„ 

been 


In  prepari„;reX^^r''-™  Publications.         "•'"•  "^  ""srepre 


Ci.csapeaUe,  .,.e  ,,,.■  Da^io^/il^^t-'aC  fe 


PREFACE. 


Til 


mouth,  Boston,  and  Newport  Harbours  j  copies  of  which  ihc  autlior 
hiM  been  permitted  to  take  by  the  politeness  of  the  Honorable  Secre- 
tary of  the  Navy,  and  the  Contiinissioners  of  the  Navy  Department, 
and  has  inserted  them  in  this  edition  of  the  Pilot.     These,  however, 
are  but  part  of  the  improvements.     The  Bahama  Bank,  and  the  adja- 
cent keys,  which  lie  directly  in  the  course  of  all  vessels  bound  to  New- 
Orleans  and  Havanna,  and  have  long  been  the  dread  of  our  West  In- 
dia mariners,  were  surveyed  in  1820,  by  Messrs.  E.  C.  Ward,  a  ma- 
thematician in   the  employ  of  the   United  States,  Edmund  Blunt, 
George  W.^Blunt,  Francis  MALLABY,and  Matthew  Stout, officers  in 
the  United  States  Navy,  who,  with  the  characteristic  enterprise  of  Ame- 
rican seamen,  volunteered  in  that  expedition,  which  was  fitted  out  at 
the  expense  of  the  subscriber.     The  next  year,  the  sloop  Orbit,  a  sur- 
veying vessel  in  his  employ,  was  sent  to  examine  the  South  Shoal  of 
Nantucket,  the  extent  and  situation  of  which  he  had  long  suspected 
were  incorrectly  described.     It  was  then  ascertained  this  Shoal,  which 
had  been  laid  down  in  all  the  English  charts,  as  extending  to  the  south 
as  far  as  lat.  40°  42'  N.  in  fact  terminated  in  lat.  41°  4'  N.     The  im- 
portance of  this  discovery  to  the  navigation  of  the  United  States,  may 
b"  easily  conceived.     Heretofore,  mariners  bound  from  Europe,  or 
from  the  eastern  ports  of  New-York,  Philadelphia,  or  any  of  the  south- 
em  ports,  in  their  desire  to  avoid  this  dangerous  shoal,  kept  so  far  to 
the  south-east,  as  often  to  run  into  the  Gulf  Stream,  and  were  thereby 
retarded  from  60  to  70  miles  per  day.     By  this  survey,  a  clear  aiid 
perfectly  safe  channel,  twenty-two  miles  wide,  is  added  to  the  space, 
supposed  to  be  between  the  stream  and  the  shoal,  which  will  enable 
them  to  keep  more  to  the  north-west,  and  to  take  advantage  of  the 
south-west  current  on  the  inner  edge  of  the  Gulf.     An  average  gain 
oftwenty-four  hours,  may  be  thus  made  in  the  passage  of  most  Eu- 
ropean traders. 

The  accuracy  of  this  survey,  which  was  at  first  disputed,  has  been 
fully  proved,  by  two  different  expeditions  subsequently  sent  from  Nan- 
tucket, to  ascertain  the  extent  of  the  shoal. 

The  surveying  sloop  Orbit,  also  accompanied  a  vessel  sent  by  Capt. 
Isaac  Hull,  at  the  request  of  the  subscriber,  to  examine  St.  George's 
Bank,  and  the  result  is  re-published  in  this  edition  of  the  American 
Coast  Pilot. 

Many  improvements  are  made  in  this,  which  have  increased  its  con^^ 
tents  one-third  over  the  last  edition,  by  sailing  directions  for  every 
harbour  in  the  West  Indies,  Spanish  Main,  &cc.  &c.  with  a  full  descrip- 
tion of  the  many  Beacons,  Buoys,  he.  with  the  new  Light-Houses, 
which  have  been  erected  on  the  coast,  together  with  the  alterations 
which  have  been  made  in  some  of  the  Light-Houses,  which  the  Su- 
perintendants,  from  experience  thought  requisite,  and  a  complete  revi-^ 
sion  of  the  Latitudes  and  Longitudes,  adapted  to  recent  observations. 

These  are  part  of  the  improvements  of  the  present  edition ;  though 
many  material  corrections  have  been  made,  whenever  the  author  was 
satisfied,  by  the  testimony  of  mariners,  or  by  surveys,  that  his  former 


viii 


PREFACE. 


coast  may  0CM.m,..ii  '■'"'  '•"linir  nature  nf  ^...  •        "'"  ?">*« 

ImperfecLn  ?^  "    i?'  ?"*"«  d-^viaiion.  from  ?h  "  '""*'  "'^  "■• 

•ravened  lon^-ir?"  ?f  *  ~««  6000  mi  1,  t'7P"?S «»  »ive  direc- 
V'  such  a  momentous  task  it  !«^\   ^^J^  ™  AN  INDlVimTAr 

been  whoUy  absorbeffn^h?'"*'  **"  ?"«'«  of^ch  ewf,-  ""'f'."" 

from  the  rale  of  a  mp^i?^  ""J*  ''«'»''  ""d  creWlul  L     """'• 
With  such  Dretensfnn.  ♦  ""«oie  to 

September,  1827.  EDJVflJND  M.  BLUNT. 


•I  ^ 

I 


CONTENTS. 

Pttgt- 

GULF  STREAM,  and  STRAIT  of  FLORIDA 1 

CHAPTER  !.•  *• 

COAST  o»'  THK  UNITED  STATES,  from  tiik  BAY  op  PASSAMAQU'^PDY  to  tm 

RIVER  IMISSISSIPPL 

Directions  togu  to  the  cui^twnnl  oT  tlic  Island  or  Cainpo  Bcllo,  between  the  said  island 

and  the  Wolf  Lslamls,  mid  up  the  Bay  of  Passamaquoddj  ....  CI 

Remarks  on  the  Winds  un  the  coast  of  Nova  Scotia 23 

Directions  for  the  Eastern  Const,  when  you  fail  in  with  Grand  Manan  or  Mount  Desert 

Hills SS 

Directions  from  Machias  to  Pas^samnquoddy 24 

for  Titnunan  light-house 25 

from  Mount  Desert  to  Goldsborough  and  Mnchias  ....  26 

from  Long  Island  to  the  southwest  harbou.  I 'f  Mount  Desert         .        .  26 

for  sailing  throug-h  Fox  Island  Passage 27 

for  White  Head  light 28 

■ from  Tcnnant  Harbour  to  the  Muscle  Uidi^c^,  and  thence  up  Penobscot  Bay  29 

[The  reader  is  requested  to  refer  to  note  in  page  ^J,  page  1,  Appendix.] 

Directions  for  sailing  into  George's  River SO 

[See  also  note  to  page  31,  page  1,  Appendix.] 

Directions  from  Bass  Harbour 33 

for  Dyer's  Bay,  kc 33 

from  SImttock  Island 33 

from  Titmanan  light  to  Ladle  Island      .......  33 

for  Cape  Splitt  Harbour 34 

for  Pleasant  River         ....*.....  34 

for  Moose  Peck  Reach 34 

for  going  through  Moose  Peck  Reach 34 

from  ivioosc  Peek  Head  light  to  Machias 35 

■   from  Townsend  to  Manheigin  light 36 

for  Townsend  Harbour  . 36 

for  Kcnnebeck  and  Sheepscut  Rivers 36 

[The  reader  is  also  referred  to  note  to  page  36,  page  1,  Appendix.] 

for  sailing  into  New  Meadows 38 

for  Hussey's  Sound 39 

for  Portland  Harbour 39 

Plan  of  Portland  Harbour 89 

[The  reader  will  also  refer  to  note  to  page  39,  page  1,  Appendix.] 

Notice  to  Masters  of  Vessels 41 

Boon  Island  light 41 

Remarks  on  the  White  Hills 42 

Directions  from  Cape  Porpoise  to  Wood  Island  light 42 

for  sailing  from  Cape  Neddock  to  Cape  Porpoise 43 

for  Portsmouth  Harbour 43 

Plan  of  Portsmouth  Harbour 43 

[The  reader  is  also  referred  to  note  to  page  44,  page  1,  Appendix.] 

Description  of  the  Isles  of  Shoals 44 

Plan  of  the  Isles  of  Shoa'c 44 

Directions  for  Newburyport,  Ipswich  Bay,  &c.  46 

[See  also  note  to  page  46,  page  1,  Appendix,  and  page  663,  Tide  Table.] 

Plan  of  J^ewburyport  Harbour 46 

Signals  for  Vessels  .  49 

Directions  for  Annis  Squam  Harbour  in  Ipswich  Bay  .         .         .        .  50 

Plan  of  ^nnis  Squam  Harbour 50 

Directions  to  go  into  Cape  Ann  Harbour •  51 

Plan  of  Cape  Ann  Harbour .  51 

Ten  Pound  Island  light-house 51 

Bearings  of  several  ledges  from  the  light  on  Ten  Found  Island  ....  52 

Remarks  on  Cashe's  Ledge  .*■...  53 

George's  Shoals  ' 53 

Directions  for  Salem  Harbour 66 

•  For  CHAP.  XIX.  COAST  of  N EWFOUNDLAND,  see  pflf  e  547.— For  CHAP.  XX.  COASl  of  LABBA' 
DOR,  see  page  6l2.-For  CHAP.  XXU  ISLE  of  SABLE,  BANKS,  and  COAST  of  NOVA  SCOTIA,  •#• 
rage  620. 

B 


CONTENTS. 


Direction*  for  Beverly  and  Manchester 58 

— ^— —  for  sailing  into  Marblehead  63 

Bearings  and  distances  of  the  principal  islands,  rocks.,  &c.  in  the  vicinitj  of  Salem,  from 

Bakers'  Island  lights f>0 

Directions  for  sailing  into  Boston  Harbour 61 

[See  also  note  to  page  6l,  page  1,  Appendix.] 

Plan  of  Boston  Harbour 61 

Directions  for  the  Hj'pocrite  Passage,  into  the  Narrows 62 

Marks  taken  on  shore  at  the  old  light-house -         .        •  63 

Bearings  of  sundry  places  from  the  East  Head  of  Nahant 63 

Directions  from  Boston  light  to  Cnpe  Elizabeth 64 

Directions  for  sailing  in  and  out  of  Boston  Bay,  from  Cape  Cod  or  Cape  Ann,  to  Boston 

light-bouse 65 

Directions  for  Scituate  Harbour 65 

for  Plymouth  Harbour 66 

for  Cape  Cod  Harbour 63 

for  entering  Provincctown  Harbour 69 

Billingsgate  Island  light-house 69 

Remarks  on  Barnstable  Bay '      .  70 

Directions  for  entering  Barnstable  Harbour  70 

Description  of  the  eristern  coast  of  the  county  of  Barnstable,  from  Cape  Cod  or  Race 
Point,  in  lat.  41°  34'  N.  pointing  out  the  spots  on  which  the  Trustees  of  the  Humane 
Society  have  erected  huts  and  other  places,  where  shipwrecked  seamen  may  look  for 

shelter  71 

Directions  for  Point  gammon  light  and  Hyannca  Harbour 74 

From  the  south  end  of  Cape  Cod  to  Holmes*  Hole 75 

[See  also  note  to  page  75,  page  1,  Appendix] 

Directions  for  Chatham  Harbour  77 

Tides  77 

Directions  for  sailing  into  Nantucket  Harbour 7S 

Courses  and  distances  from  Nantucket  light-house 79 

Plan  of  Cape  Poge  Harbour 80 

An  Act  for  establishing  the  compensation  for  piloting  vessels  through  the  Vineyard  Sound, 

and  over  Nantucket  Shoals,  in  certain  cases       .        , 84 

Nantucket  South  Shoal,  &c. 84 

Directions  for  New-Bedford 87 

Bird  Island  lighthouse,  in  Buzzard's  Bay 90 

Buoys  in  Buzzard's  Bay  90 

Bearings  and  distances  of  sundry  places  from  Gay  Head  li.^ht-house        ...  91 

Directions  for  those  who  fall  in  with  Block  Island,  when  bound  for  Rhode-Island  .  91 

[See  note  to  page  92,  page  1,  Appendix  ] 
Bearings,  by  compass,  from  Rhode  Island  light  house,  of  several  remarkable  places,  to- 
gether with  the  distances 93 

Directions  for  sailing  from  Newport,  tbrou^'h  the  Sound,  to  Hunt's  Harbour,  near  Hell- 
Gate         .  93 

[Also  see  nctes  to  pages  93  and  95,  in  poge  2,  Appendix.] 

Oyster  Bay  and  Huntington 95 

Huntington  Bay  95 

Hell-Gate  95 

Directions  from  Block  Island  to  Gardner'^  Bay 96 

Marks  for  the  Valiant's,  or  Middle  Race  Rock 99 

Marks  for  the  New-Bedford  Reef 99 

Marks  for  a  bed  of  rocks  off  Plumb  Island •  100 

[The  reader  is  referred  to  note  to  page  ICO,  page  2,  Appendix.] 

Marks  for  a  shoal  in  the  middle  of  Plumb  Gut 100 

Murks  for  anchoring  in  Plumb  Island  Roads  100 

Bearings  and  distances  of  sundry  places  from  the  llgUt-house  on  Montock  Point        .  100 

Chart  of  Long  Island  Smind lOl 

Description  of  Long  Island  101 

Direction  from  Gardner's  Island  to  New-London  102 

for  vessels  coming  from  sea,  and  bound  to  New-London,  or  to  the  westward  102 

[See  also  note  to  page  102,  page  2,  Appendix.  J 

Directions  for  New-Haven  tV      .        .        . 103 

■'  for  sailing  by  the  light-house  on  Fayerw^ather's  island,  at  the  entrance  of  Black 

Rock  Harbour,  on  the  north  shore  of  Long  Island  Sound 103 

(The  reader  is  here  particularly  referred  to  note  to  page  107,  page  2,  Appendix.]  ^ 

Directions  for  vessels  buund  to  New- York 104 

To  enter  Sandy  Hook  Channel-way  .  106 


CONTENTS. 


XI 


nn,  to  Boston 


Bearings  of  buoys  and  distances,  in  New- York  Harbour,  from  Sandy  Hook  light-houM 
Description  of  the  coast  to  the  eastward  and  westward  of  Sandy  Hook 

[See  note  to  page  108,  page  3,  Appendix,  for  entering  Absecum  harbour.] 

Descriptioti  of  New- York  Bay 

Direction    for  sailing  from  Sandy  Hook  light  to  Cape  May  light,  or  light  house  on  Cape 

Henl       a  .   ' 

Little  l.-g  Harbour • 

[The  reader  is  also  particularly  referred  to  note  to  page  108,  and  note  to  page  llO, 
page  3,  Appendix.] 

Plan  of  Little  Egs;  Harbour  

Directions  for  Capo  May  licht 

for  sailing  in  by  Cape  Hcnlopcn  light 

from  Reedy  Island  to  Philadelphia 

Bay  and  River  Delaware 

[See  note  to  page  111,  in  page  3,  Appendix.] 
Directions  from  Cape  Henlopcii  to  Cape  Henry 

[See  note  ♦.o  page  113,  page  3,  Appendix.] 
Remarks  on  the  land  from  Cape  Hcnlopcn  to  Chincoteague  Shoals  • 

Directions  for  vessels  bound  to  the  Capes  of  Vii-ginia 

—— for  Hampton  Roads 

Chart  of  Chesapeake  Entrance 

Directions  for  sailing  in  by  Cape  Henry  light-house 

General  directions  for  the  Horse-shoe     . 

Directions  for  New  Point  Comfort         ... 

Directions  for  running  from  Cape  Henry  up  the  Bay  to  Baltimore 

[See  note  to  puge  117,  page  3,  Appendix.] 
Directions  for  mariners,  bay  craftsmen,  &c.  for  sailing  up  or  down  the  Patapsco 

[See  note  to  page  121,  page  3,  Appendix.] 
Directions  from  New  Point  Comfort  to  Potomac  River 

from  Potomac  River  to  Patuxent  River 

for  going  from  Cape  Henry,  or  Lynhaven  Bay,  to  York  River 


Pag*- 


Bar 


page  130,  pege 


Cape  Hatteras 

[See  note  to  page  124,  page  3,  Appendix  ] 

Cape  Lookout  

Directions  for  Cape  Fear  light-bouse 

NorthBar  of  the  New  Inlet  .        .        .        • 

The  Old  Bar  at  New  Inlet,  or,  as  now  called,  the  South 

The  Main  Bar  of  Cape  Fear  River 

The  Western  or  Oak  Island  Channel 

Other  directions  for  Oak  Island  Channel 

Rates  of  pilotage  for  Cape  Fear  Bars  and  Rivers 

[See  note  to  page  l'.?8,  page  4,  Appendix.] 
From  Cape  Fear  to  Cicorg'-lown 
Directions  for  sailing  into  (ieorgetown  Harbour 
Cape  Roman  ■ 

[For  light  house  cectcd  on  Cape  Roman,  see  note  to 
Directions  for  sailing  into  Charleston  (S.  C.) 
Plan  of  Charleston  Harbour 

Rates  of  pilotage  for  the  Bar  and  Harbour  of  Charleston 
From  Charleston  Bar  to  Port  Royal 
Winds  and  weather  on  the  coast  of  South  Carolina 

St.  Helena  Sound 

From  Charleston  Bar  to  Tybee      .... 

Plan  of  Savannah  River 

Directions  for  Hogohcehco  River  .        .        .        • 

St.  Catharine's  Bar 

Directions  for  Darien 

Plan  of  Doboy  Sound 

Tybee  to  St.  Simon's 

Directions  for  St.  Mary's  atid  Amelia  Bar 

St.  Mary's  to  St.  John's 

St.  John's  to  the  Bay  of  St  Augustine 

Directions  for  St.  Augustine  light,  and  remarks  off  St.  Augustine 

[Sec  note  to  page  139,  page  4,  Appendix.] 
Directions  for  making  a  speedy  passage  through  the  Gulf  to  New-York 
The  setting  of  the  tide  along  the  shore,  from  New-York  to  S|.  Augustine 
General  Remarks 
Description  of  the  Tortugas  Islands 


4,  Appendix.] 


107 
108 

109 

109 
110 


110 
110 
111 
118 
113 

113 

lis 
lis 

114 
114 
116 
116 
116 
117 

131 

138 
188 
183 
184 

185 
185 
18^ 
1?/ 
187 
187 
1B7 
198 

189 
189 
130 

131 

131 

138 

138 

134 

134 

134 

134 

136 

136 

1S6 

1S6 

1ST 

137 

138 

138 

139 

140 
140 
140 
141 


Xll 


CONTENTS. 


Irf' 

I 


Pag*- 

Cn«ikleNer  Islands 142 

[See  note  to  page  142,  page  4,  Appendix.] 

Directions  for  the  River  Mississippi,  and  to  prevent  falling  to  the  westward      .  143 

[See  note  to  page  146,  page  4,  Appendix.] 

Common  error  of  strangers    ...........  144 

On  the  setting  of  the  current 144 

Directions  for  the  entrance  of  the  river           144 

To  sail  up  the  river 145 

On  coming  to  or  bringing  up 145 

Shoals  in  the  river 145 

Directions  for  vessels  bound  down  then fcr                               145 

Rates  of  the  New-Orleans  steam  tow-boats 146 

Banks  and  coasts  of  Florida            147 

Soundings  off  Florida             :  149 

Florida  Reef f  150 

[See  note  to  page  150,  page  4,  Appendix.] 

Channel  of  Florida,  between  the  reef  and  keys 151 

Description  of  the  coast,  from  the  Bay  of  Santa  Rosa  to  Cape  St.  Bias           .        .  152 

Description  of  Cape  St.  Bias 152 

Vessels  bound  to  New-Orleans,  Mobile,  and  Pensacola             154 

Directions  for  vessels  bound  from  the  Mississippi  through  the  Gulf            .        .         •  156 

Directions  for  Mobile  Point  .158 

[See  note  to  page  158,  page  4,  Appendix.] 

Plan  of  Pensacola  Harbour              159 

Sailing  directions  for  vessels  bound  to  Pensacola 159 

Directions  for  Apalache  Bay             160 

CHAPTER  II. 

BERMUDAS  or  SUMMER'S  ISLANDS. 

General  i>istructions  for  making  the  Bermuda  Islands 162 

Other  directions  in  comingf  rom  the  westward 164 

CHAPTER   III. 

DESCRIPTION  OF  the  BAHAMA  BANKS,  ISLANDS,  and  CHANNELS. 

Description  of  Little  Bahama  Bank,  with  its  islands 165 

Directions  for  Providence  Channel,  Bahama  Bank,  with  its  Islands,  Gulf  Passage,  and 

the  Florida  Coast             168 

Directions  for  Providence  N.  W.  Channel,  north  of  the  Great  Bahama  Bank,  &c.  .  174 

The  southern  border  of  Great  Bahama  Bank 177 

Islands,  &c.  to  the  eastward  of  the  Bahama  Banks        .        .         .        .         .        .  179 

Direcuons  for  vessels  bound  to  Ragged  Island,  (one  of  tlic  Bahamas)       .         .  181 

Additional  remarks  on  the  Caycos,  &c.  translated  from  the  French           .         .         .  187 

Particular  observations  on  the  Little  Cajcos,  &c.  from  the  Journal  of  the  Emerald   .  183 

Particular  description  of  Turk's  Islands 190 

Remarks  upon  Sand  Key,  made  on  board  the  Emerald,  a  French  Frigate          .       ..  190 

Description  of  Salt  Key,  or  the  Little  Turk •         .  191 

Description  of  Grand  Key,  or  Grand  Turk I9l 

Remarks  on  the  rest  of  the  keys  which  are  upon  the  Turk's  Tslamls  Bank                 .  192 

Tides  and  Currents  between  Walling's  Island  and  New-Providence          .         .         .  194 

The  Caycos  and  Maynguana  Passages 194 

The  Turk's  Island  Passage             195 

Crooked  Island  Passage 196 

Directions  for  sailing  from  Jamaica  through  the  Windward  Channel-  and  Crooked  Isl- 
and Passage               ....  197 

The  Silver  Key  Passage 199 

Additional  Remarks  on  the  Coasts,  Isles,  &c.  which  form  the  Windward  Passages.  199 

Directions  for  goin<;  tlirousrh  the  Caycos  Passage,  &c.  by  Captain  Hester          .        .  199 

Passage  between  Crooked  Islands  and  Atwood's  Key 201 

Additional  •'cmarks  on  the  Caycos,  &c.            201 

On  Mayeguana  and  Atwood's  Key  Passage  ;  translated  from  the  French          .         .  200 
General  observations  on  Turk's  Islands  and  Turk's  Islands  Passage,  coming  from  the 

northward.    By  Capt.  Hester,  1770 201 

Concluding  remarks  on  the  Windward  Passages-    From  the  DerrAtero  de  las  Antillas  203 
Directions  for  sailing  from  the  Crooked  Islands,  and  from  the  eastward  generally,  to 

'■    New-Pro»idence 203 

Directions  for  sailing  in  over  Nas3au  Bar,  during  stormy  weather                 .        .  205 

C^MFftl  Defections  for  making  and  navigating  on  tlic  Coast  of  Cuba        .                 .  iiOi 


CONTENTS. 


XUl 


&c. 


aid 


142 

143 

144 
144 
144 
143 
145 
145 
145 
146 
147 
149 
150 

151 
152 
152 
154 
156 
158 

159 
159 
160 


162 
164 


CHAPTER  IV. 


i 


Pof*. 


NNELS. 
ssagc,  and 


ccd 


cs, 


Isl- 


165 

168 

174 

177 

179 

181 

187 

188 

190 

190 

191 

191 

192 

194 

194 

195 

196 


in  the 


las 


to 


197 
199 
199 
199 
201 
201 
200 

201 
203 

203 
205 

iiOi 


\  ISLAND   OF   CUBA. 

The  north-east  Coast  of  Cuba 

Remarks  on  the  Harbour  of  Matanzas,  by  Capt.  Livingston,  from  his  own  experience 
Havanna,  with  plan  of  the  Morro  Castle,  Light-house,  and  Entrance  of  Havanna 

Pan  of  Matanzas 

South  Coast  of  Cuba  

The  Isle  of  Pines,  Jardines,  and  Jardinillos  . 

Remarks  on  Cape  Antonio,  the  S.  W.  of  Cuba,  and  the  Isle  of  Pines, by  Capt.  Livingston 
The  north-west  Coast  of  Cuba,  from  Cape  Antonio  to  Point  Ycacos  and  Matanzas 

CHAPTER  V. 

HAYTI  OR  SAINT  DOMINGO. 

The  Mona  Passage  and  eastern  Coast  of  Hayti,  from  Cape  Raphael  to  the  island  Saona 
Remarks  on  Aquadilla  Bay,  &c.  by  Capt.  John  Mackelier,  R.  N. 
The  southern  Coast  of  Hayti,  from  Soan  to  Cape  Tiburon 
Remarks  and  directions  for  St.  Domingo,  by  Capt.  Mackellar 

on  the  anchorages  within  La  Vache,  by  Capt.  Mackellar,  1817 


General  Remarks 

The  northern  Coast  of  Hayti,  between  Cape  Raphael  and   St.  Nicholas' 

Directions  for  those  sailing  in  from  the  eastward 

for  ships  bound  to  Cape  Hatien,  &c.  from  the  westward 

Western  coasts  of  Hayti  or  St.  Domingo,  between  St.  Nicholas'  Mole  and  Capi 
Description  of  the  navigation  between  the  Platform  and  St.  Mark 
Directions  for  making  the  Island  of  Hayti,  and  its  different  ports 
The  Windward  Channel,  between  Hayti  and  Jamaica 

CHAPTER   VI. 

Directions  for  the  Windward  Passages,  &c. 
Sailing  directions  for  the  coast  and  harbours  of  Jamaica 
The  islands  called  the  Caymans,  with  the  neighbouring  shoals 
Albion  Bank,  Misteriosa,  &c 


Mole 


Tiburon 


207 
215 
216 
218 
218 
231 
234 
237 


241 
242 
244 
245 
249 
253 
253 
255 
264 
265 
267 
273 
373 


CHAPTER  VII. 

The  ISLAND  of  PORTO  RICO. 
Description  of  Porto  Rico,  from  the  "  Derrotero  de  las  Antilhs,  &c. 
Remarks  on  Aguada  Bay,  &c.  by  Captain  John  Mackellar,  R.  N. 
Directions  for  making  Porto  Rico,  iic.  


CHAPTER  VIII. 

WINDWARD  AND  LEEWARD  ISLANDS. 

Directions  for  Tortola 

Plan,  of  Virgin  Islands  .  ....... 

Remarks  on  the  passages  in  general,  from  the  "Derrotero  de  las  Antilles" 

St.  Croix  or  Santa  Cruz 

The  Island  of  Sombrero 

Anguilla,  and  the  islets  in  its  vicinity 

Bearings  taken,  and  remarks  made,  in  sailing  between  the  above  islands, 

The  Island  of  St.  Martin's,  &c 

The  Island  of  St.  Bartbolemcw 

Saba  and  St.  Eustatius 

St.  Kitts  and  Nevis  

Remarks  made  in  Basseterre  Road  and  Old  Road  *         .        .        .        . 

The  Island  of  Barbuda 

The  Island  of  Antigua 

Remarks  on  the  Coast  of  Antigua 

Montserrat  and  Redondo     „ 

Avcs  or  Bird's  Island  

The  Island  of  Guadaloupe 

Remarks  on  Guadaloupe -.        .        .        . 

The  Saintes,  Marie  Galante,  Desirade,  &c 

The  Island  of  Dominica 

Remarks  from  the  Derrotero,  &c 

The  Island  of  Martinique  •        •  


276 
277 
290 
292 


297 
298 
300 


303 
304 
306 
307 
308 
308 
309 
310 
311 
311 
313 
315 
815 
315 
318 
330 
381 
381 
338 

sss 

334 
386 
336 


xir 


CONTENTS. 


)!;!■ 


Page. 

Remark!  on  the  navignrioii  about  Martinique,  from  the  Derrotero,  &c  •  328 

The  Island  of  St.  Luria 830 

Remarks  on  St.  Lucin  .  830 

The  Island  of  St.  Vincent's  331 

The  Granidinps,  or  Granidillos 332 

The  Island  of  Grenada  .         .         .         .' 333 

Remarks  on  Grenada  333 

The   !»land  of  Barbadoes  , 336 

The  Island  of  Tobago  337 

The  Island  of  Trinidad 339 

Description  of,  and  directions  for,  the  Gulf  of  Paria,  and  Island  of  Trinidad  341 

Description  of  the  exterior  land  of  Trinidad,  and  of  marks  for  knowing  it  by    .  342 

The  interior  or  western  coast  of  Trinidad 342 

Coast  of  Columbia,  within  the  Gulf 343 

Tides,  anchorages,  and  watering-places 343 

To  make  Trinidad  .        .        .         .        • 343 

Navigation  from  Cape  Galeato  to  the  South  Channel,  and  from  that  channel  into 

the  Gulf,  and  thence  to  the  anchorage  in  Puerta  Espana,  or  Port  Spain  .         .  345 

General  directions  for  the  making  of,  and  navigating  among,  the  Caribbee  Islands  347 

CHAPTER   IX. 

The  COAST  of  COLOMBIA,  prom  the  GULF  op  PARIA  to  CARTHAGENA. 

The  coast  from  Trinidad  to  Cape  Codera  349 

Particular  description  of  the  Coast  of  Cumana,  fee 356 

The  coast  from  Cape  Codera  to  Carthagena 357 

Directions  for  entering  the  Fort  of  La  Guayra 358 

Observations  by  Captain  Don  Torquato  Piedrola 369 

Additional  description  of  the  Coast  and  Places  between  La  Guayra  and  Carthagena  369 

Remarks  on  Carthagena,  kc.  by  Captain  Livingston 373 

Directions  for  proceeding  from  the  south-westward  to  Carthagena,  Magdalena,  he,  374 

Buen  Ayre,  Curacoa,  iic 376 

Particular  description  of,  and  directions  for,  the  Leeward  Islands        .         .  377 
General  directions  for  navigating  on  the  Coasts  of  Colombia,  from  the  Dragon's 

Mouths  to  Carthagena 382 

CHAPTER  X. 

The  COAST  or  COLOMBIA,   from  CARTHAGENA  to  the  PORT  of  St.  JUAN 

DE  NICARAGUA. 

Description  and  directions,  from  the  Derrotero,  &ic.  386 

Remarks  on  going  from  Chagre  to  Porlo  Bello  .  .       '.  396 

CHAPTER   XI. 

The  ISLANDS  and  SHOALS  between  JAMAICA  and  NICARAGUA         .  402 

CHAPTER  XII. 

MOSQUITIA  OR  THE  MOSQUITO  SHORE,   between  CAPE  HONDURAS  and  NI- 
CARAGUA. 

The  Coast  between  Nicaragua  and  Cape  Honduras,  as  described  in  the  Derrotero,  kc.  403 

Cape  Honduras  to  Cape  Gracios  a  Dios 409 

Cape  Gracios  a  Dios  to  the  southward 411 

Directions  for  proceeding  from  Jamaica  to  the  Mosquito  Shore  .  .  412 

CHAPTER  XHI. 

BAY  OF  HONDURAS,  &c.  ^ 

Description  of  the  coast,  from  the  Derrotero,  &c. 414 

The  Coasts  and  Bay  of  Honduras  and  Yucatan,  as  described  by  Navigators,  f^c.  4l6 
Swan  Islands,  Bonaccai  Rattan,  Southern  Four  Keys  and  Reefs,  Turneff,  and  Glo- 
ver's Reef 419 

The  Main  land  and  Keys  of  British  Yucatan,  commonly  called  British  Honduras  423 

Directions  for  sailing  to,  in,  and  from,  the  Bay  nf  Hondu:    ',  by  Capt.  Wm,  Johnson  424 

for  sailing  from  Jamaica  to  Balize 424 

.  for  anchoring  at  the  Sund-bore 426 


CONTENTS. 


xr 


\lc 


rrinidad 
•ing  it  by 


t  channel  into 
pain  . 
ibee  Islands 


Page. 
328 
830 
330 
331 
332 
333 
333 
336 
337 
339 
341 
342 
342 
343 
343 
343 

345 
347 


ARTHAGENA. 

349 
356 
357 
358 
369 
369 
373 
374 
376 
377 


I  Carthagena 
gdalena,  Sic. 

the  Dragon's 


382 


OF  St.  JUAN 


385 
396 


402 


JRAS  AND  NN 


^rotero,  tc.  405 
409 
411 
412 


414 

|»i  4'C-  416 
land  Glo< 

419 

Idiiras  423 
1 Johnson  424 

424 

426 


Page. 
Directions  in  case  of  being  misled  by  currents  .         .         .  426 

for  returning  from  the  Bay  ........         425 

Remarks  on  the  Northern  Trian<;le,  Cosumel,  and  the  Coast  of  Yucatan      .        .        426 
. on  navigating  off  the  Coast  between  Carthagena  and  Cape  Catoche,  &c.     427 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

Ths  COASTS  AND  HARBOURS  of  the  MEXICAN  SE.A,  on  GULF  or  MEXICO. 

Cape  Caloche  to  Point  Xicalango 432 

The  Soundings  or  Bank  of  Campeche 434 

Directions  fur  navigating  on  the  Canipeche  Soundings 439 

' for  those  who  navigate  from  East  to  West      ......         440 

for  navigating  from  West  to  East 441 

for  sailing  to  Campeche,  by  Captain  John  Mackellar  .         .  443 

Remarks  on  sailinv  towards  Campeche,  by  Captain  J.  W.  Monteath     .         .         .         444 
The  southern  Coast  of  the  Gulf,  from  Point  Xicalango  to  Vera  Cruz,  including  some 

general  Remarks,  &lc 444 

Directions  for  Vera  Cruz,  by  Captain  John  Mackellar 447 

Brief  Directions  for  Vera  Cruz,  communicated  to  Captain  Livingston  by  Don  Cayc 

tano  Olivella 449 

Description  of,  and  Directions  for,  the  port  Vera  Cruz,  from  those  of  Don  Bernardo 

de  Orta 449 

Vera  Cruz,  to  the  Bay  of  St.  Barnardo 458 

Sailing  Directions  for  Tampico  River 459 

The  Bay  of  San  Bernardo,  and  Coast  thence  to  the  River  Mississippi  .        .        461 

'^  CHAPTER  XV. 

Thb  COAST  AND  RIVERS  of  GUYANA,  from  the  EQUATOR  ahd  the  AMAZON, 

WESTWARD  TO  THE  GULF  OF  PARIA,  OR  TRINIDAD. 

The  Coast  of  Guyana  in  general 465 

Portuguese  Guyana ' 466 

French  Guyana 466 

General  Directions  for  the  Coasts  of  Dutch  and  British  Guyana           .                  .  466 

Particular  Description  of  and  Directions  for  Surinam,  or  Dutch  Guyana     .  467 

Directions  for  the  River  Surinam 4gg 

Particular  Description  of  and  Directions  for  British  Guyana        ....  470 

Directions  for  the  River  Demarara 470 

Remarks  and  Directions  for  Demarara  and  Berbice,  from  the  Chart  of  Capt.  Thomas 

Walker 470 

. on  making  Demarara,  &c.  by  Captain  Robert  Hildes     .        .        .        [  472 

Spanish  or  Colombian  Guyana 473 

General  Description  of,  and  Directions  for,  the  Coast  of  Guyana          .        •        ,  474 

Directions  for  finding  the  Grand  Mouth  of  the  River  Oronoco,  and  sailing  into  it  480 

General  Remarks  on  the  Coast  of  Guyana 4gQ 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

COAST  OF  BRAZIL— Br  BARON  ROUSSIN 433 

Description  of  the  Coast  comprised  between  the  Island  of  St.  Catharine,  and  th«  JBay 

of  Rio  Janeiro 485 

Description  of  the  Mountains  and  other  objects  which  show  your  approach  toRio 

Janeiro 4g0 

Directions  for  going  in  and  out  of  the  Harbour  of  Rio  Janeiro  ....  486 
Description  of  the  Coast  between  Rio  Janeiro  and  the  Bay  of  All  Saints  .  '.  487 
of  the  Bay  of  All  Saints  on  Bahia,  instructions  to  go  in  and  out  of  this 

Harbour 492 

of  the  Coast  comprised  between  Cape  St.  Antonio,  and  Olinda  Point,' the 

mouth  of  the  St.  Francisco  River,  and  Cape  St.  Augustine       ....        493 

of  Pernanibuco  Bay,  and  instructions  to  sail  in  and  out  of  it           ,        *,  495 

of  the  Cape  and  Banks  of  St.  Roque 497 

of  St  Marco  Bay 497 

Maranham  to  Para .*        ,  49g 

Directions  for  Para \        \  499 

Santos  to  the  Rio  De  La  Plata '         "  ggs 

Rio  De  La  Plata,  or  River  La  Plata [  5qq 

CHAPTER  XVII.  ' 

The  RIVER  PLATA  to  CAPE  HORN,  FALKLAND  ISLAND,  SOUTH  SHET- 

LAND,  Sic gjg 

Directions  for  sailing  fVom  the  Coast  of  Patagonia,  or  Falkland  Isiands,  to  New 

South  Icelandi 


XVI 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


Page. 


W     :    I 


SOUTH  PACIFIC  OCEAN,  frob:  CAl'E  HORN  to  the  EQUATOR,  &ic. 

Cape  Horn  to  Valparaiso 526 

IHrections  for  entering  Talcahnano,  the  Port  of  Conce|itioii  ....  633 

Other  Instructions  for  entering  Port  Talcahuanu 533 

The  Track  of  Don  Alex  Mala  Espina  from  Conception  and  Valparaiso  in  Chili  to  the 

Port  of  St.  Bias,  for  all  seasons  of  the  yea: 537 

Track  from  Conception  in  Chili  to  San  Bias,  L>  Jose  Espinosa,  of  H.  C.  M.  Ship 

Descubieria 537 

Lobos  Island  &:id  Lobos  de  Mcr  539 

Lobos  de  Tierre  and  Sechura  Bay 640 

Tracks  from  the  Corvetts  of  H.  C.  M.  Ship,^,  the  Descubierta,  and  Atrtrido  541 

Track  of  the  Spanish  Corvette  Atrerido,  from  Paytc  to  Guayaquil         .  541 

Gallepagos  islands 54<2 

Track  from  Souronate  to  Acapulco,  16"  65'  N 544 

Track  from  Acapulco  to  Realcho 544 

Track  from  Acapulco  to  San  Bias,  in  20°  30'  N.  KH'^  ftif  W 546 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

COAST  OF  NEWFOUNDLAND. 
Remarks  made  between  the  Island  of  Groias  and  Cape  Bona\i8ta 
Directions  for  navigating  from  Cape  Race  to  Cape  Bonavista,  with  remarks  upon 
the  Fishinsr  Bank  ........ 


for  navigating  part  of  the  Coast  of  Newfoundland,  from  Cape  St.  Mary's 

to  Cape  Spear,  including  St.  Mary's  and  Trespass  Bay 

—  for  navigating  the  Bay  of  Placentia,  on  the  south  Coast  of  Newfoundland, 


from  Cape  Chapeaurouge  to  Cape  St  Mary's 

for  navigating  on  part  of  the  south  Coast  of  Newfoundland 


Description  of  Fortune  Bay 

— — — —  of  Hermitage  Bay  .... 

II  of  the  Bay  of  Despair 

Directions  for  navigating  the  west  Coast  of  Newfoundland 

for  navigating  en  part  of  the  N.  E.  side  of  Newfoundland,  and  in  the 

streights  of  Belle  Isle,  fro.Ti  Red  L.-'y  to  Cape  Blufl',  on  the  Coast  of  Labrador 

CHAPTER  XX. 

COAST  OF  LABRADOR. 
Description  of  part  of  the  Coast  of  Labrador,  from   Grand  Point  of  Great  Mecnti- 

na  to  Shecatiua ■         .         ,         . 

Directions  for  navigating  on  that  part  of  the  Coast  of  Labrador,  from  Shecatinn  to 

Chateaux,  in  the  Straits  of  Belle  Isle 

Description  of  the  Coast  of  Labrador,  from  Cape  Charles  to  Cape  Lewis  . 
Description  of  the  Coast  of  Labrador,  from  St.  Michael  and  Spotted  Island 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

ISLE  OF  SABLE,  BANKS,  and  COAST  of  NOVA  SCOTIA. 
Halifax  Harbour  and  the  coast  thence  westward  to  Cape  Sable 

General  remarks  on  the  coast  westward 

Magnetic  bearings  and  distances  of  places  between  Halifax  and  Cape  Sable,  &c. 

Description  and  directions  

Directions  for  sailing  into  Shelburnc  Hai  bour,  or  Port  Koscway,  N.  S. 

Cape  Sable  to  Cape  St.  Mary 

North  coast  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy  

Farther  directions  for  St.  John's  Harbour 

Remarks  on  St.  John's,  &ic.  by  Mr.  Lockwood 

Remarks  by  Charles  Morris,  Esq 

Variations  by  Compass 


547 

552 

564 

569 
577 
580 

586 
586 
596 

602 


6ia 

615 
617 
618 


CHAPTER  XXII. 


-WINDS. 


CHAPTER  XXIII CURRENTS. 

CHAPTER  XXIV TIDES. 


LATITUDES  and  LONGITUDES 
APPENDIX,  to  which  every  reader  is  referred 


622 
626 
626 
616 
631 
633 
638 
639 
640 
640 
642 

643 

651 

658 

666 
1,  5?,  3,  fc  4 


GULF  STREAM,  and  STRAIT  of  FLORIDA. 


in  Chili  to  the 
H.  C.  M.  Ship 


rcat  Mecati- 
Shecatina  to 


THAT  immense  current,  which  continuHlly  arts  from  the  Gulfs  of  Mexico  and 
Florida,  to  the  northward  and  iiurtli  tastw.nd,  should  he  well  understood,  which 
induces  the  author  to  comnieiice  the  pri'srnt  edition  with  the. important  suhject, 
as  all,  who  navigate  the  coast  of  North  America,  exueriencu  more  or  less  of  its 
influence. 

Three  degrees  to  the  N.  N.  E.  of  Vera  Crnx,  the  current  has  been  found  set- 
ting to  the  N.  E.  one  mile  an  hour.  Then  N.  i\.  E.  and  N-  hy  E.  and  again  N-  E. 
nearly  to  the  parallel  of  a5.P,  loiijritiide  91^0.  Here  it  changes  more  to  the 
East,  and  bccoints,  in  latitude  s:0°  E.  by  S.  cliangini;  southwat'd  to  S.  E.  by  S. 
In  the  direction  of  the  river  Mississippi,  and  hitiliide  25°  30' N.  the  current  seta 
variously  to  the  south-eastward.  Its  extent  arid  exact  direction  are  here  un- 
known, hut  it  is  certain,  that  setting  towards,  the  N.  \V.  part  of  Ciiha,  and  striking 
on  the  hanks  of  habtUa  and  Colora.lus.  a  portion  oi*  it  winds  round  Cape  Anto- 
nio to  ;he  south-eastward,  while  the  great  hody  of  it  sets  eastward,  to  the  north- 
ward of  I'uba,  winding  to  E.  J\.  EI.,  N.  E.  and  North,  through  the  strait  of  Flo- 
rida, into  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

The  Derrotero  de  las  Atitillas  says,  "  By  the  Strait  of  Florida,  we  undcF- 
stand  the  space  included  lietween  the  meridian  of  the  Dry  Tortugas,  and  the  pa- 
rallel of  Cape  Canaveral.  Tlie  simple  inspection  of  the  Chart  will  show  this  to  be 
a  bed  or  course,  which,  like  a  river,  condufts  the  water  to  the  northward. 
This  river,  or  general  cnrr»;rit,  flows  first  to  the  E.  N.  E.  as  far  as  the  meridiaik 
of  the  westtirn  part  of  the  Double  Shot  Keys,  hy  which  Keys  the  stream  id 
diverted  from  E.  N.  E.  to  N.  hy  E.  the  direction  which  it  pursues  on  the  parallel 
of  Csipe  Florida;  thence  to  Cape  Canaveral  it  runs  North,  inclining  a  little  to 
the  East. 

"  As  it  is  undoubted  that  this  general  current  is  caused  by  a  superabundance  of 
waters,  which  seek,  by  this  drain,  to  regain  their  level  in  the  open  ocean,  it  fol- 
lows, that  its  rapidiiy  will  be  greater  uv  less,  according  to  the  said  superabundance 
of  waters ;  but  as  a  ciiange  cannot  bt;  momentary,  on  account  of  tlie  great  reself- 
voir  in  which  the  water  is  contained,  but  progressive,  and,  of  course,  slow,  we 
hold  that,  liaving  once  ascertained  the  velocity  of  the  current,  we  may  calculate  it 
for  three  days,  or  more,  in  advance,  without  much  error,  if  the  wind  remain  in 
the  same  direction  ;  for  an  alteration  it!  the  wind  may  affect  the  force  of  the  cur- 
rent considerably. 

"  On  the  meridian  of  the  Hav.nnna,  stripes  of  current  are,  at  times,  found  set- 
ting  to  the  E.  S.  E.  and  S-  E.  from  the  Tortugas  soundings.  Care  should  he 
taken  not  to  confuse  the  southern  dilTerences,  caused  by  this  branch  of  the  cur- 
rent, with  those  caused  by  the  eddy  current  near  the  Colorados ;  the  one  giving 
eastern  departure,  the  other  west.  Tlie  distinctioi;  is  very  clear,  and  caa  admit 
of  no  douht,  because  the  eddy  current  is  met  only  from  the  meridians  of  Cavanas 
and  Bay  Hunda  t  j  Cape  Antonio,  and  not  further  out  fron  the  coast  than  the 
parallel  of  'i^  degrees. 

"As  the  velocity  of  the  current  varies,  it  is  requisite  for  every  navigator  to  as- 
certain its  strength  as  frequently  as  possible,  w  hile  w  ithin  the  stream.  Every  one 
who  enters  this  channel,  liaving  marked  well  either  the  land?  of  (^uba  or  the  Flo- 
rida Reef,  so  as  accurately  to  establish  this  point  of  departure,  ought  to  deter« 
mine,  in  his,/irs<  day's  work,  the  velocity  of  the  current  by  the  difference  of  lati« 
tude,  by  account  and  observation.  We  say  during  the  first  day's  work,  because 
the  generality  of  common  navigators  make  use  of  meridian  altitudes  of  the  sun 
alone,  to  find  the  latitude  ;  but  it  is  very  clear,  that  altitudes  of  tht  planett  and 
fixed  stars  ought  not  to  be  neglected ;  tint  only  because  by  this  you  cannot  he  m  d<nM 
of  your  real  mitude,  but  also  because  they  may  be  more  exact  than  latitudes  dtdMtd 

'     \ 


IJLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


from  meridional  altitudes  of  the  sun,  token  that  luminary  passes  in  the  proximity  of  the 
zenith,  and  hecattst  these  npeated  observations  during  the  night  assume,  as  much  aa 
possible,  the  situation  of  tlte  ship.  Thus  you  may  go  on,  with  a  clear  idea  uf  the 
operation  of  the  current,  and  the  way  tnat  the  ship  is  making,  llavinj?  ascer- 
tained the  velocity  of  the  current,  use  can  bie  made  of  it  to  find  the  ship's  depw* 
ture,  and  this  knowledge  will  he  most  important  when  you  fail  in  obtaining  ob- 
servations for  latitude;  because  in  such  a  case,  wanting  a  knowledge  of  .*ve 
difference  of  latitude  given  by  the  current,  you  will  he  in  want  of  every  thing; 
but  if  you  know  tlie  vehjcify  of  the  current,  and  with  it  the  course  which  it  fol- 
lows, you  may  find  the  ditference  of  latitude  and  departure  wliioh  the  current 
giv««;  and  which,  though  it  will  not  give  the  position  of  the  ship  with  that  pre- 
cision with  which  it  might  be  obtained  by  latitude  observed,  .;ill  still  upproxinttat© 
sufficiently  to  the  truth  to  enable  one  to  avoid  dauger,  if  prudeiiC/e  an<l  seaman-like 
conduct  are  combi.i^d." 
For  thos(!  who  have  little  experience  in  the  a.*t  of  na^^I^ition,  we  add— 

1.  That  it  is  most  convenient  to  direct  your  cours*  in  ntiid-channel ;  not  enly 
because  it  is  the  farthcHt  from  darynr,  but  because  you  v.  iii  there  have  the  strong- 
est current,  which  is  desirable.  \_See  rtmarks  of  Mr.  Romans  on  the  Gulf  Stream, 
jmge  14.] 

2.  That,  as  you  cannot  ascert:iin  with  all  i-'cessafy  certainty  th«^  position  of 
the  ship,  notwithstanding  the  rules  given  to  dirniniah  the  errors  occasioned  >>y  the 
currents,  you  ought,  with  the  utmost  care,  to  shun  the  eastern  coast  of  Florida, 
as  being  very  dangerous, the  trade-wind  blowing  upon  it;  while  there  is  not  the 
least  risk  in  running  along  the  Salt-Key  Bank,  and  the  edge  of  the  Great  Bank 
of  Bahania.  Upon  the  latter,  also,  you  meet  with  good  anchorages,  very  lit  ^ 
lie  in  during  the  hard  northerly  gaics  experienced  between  November  and  March, 
and  which  do  not  fail  to  cause  much  damage,  and  sometimes  even  force  vessels 
to  bear  away,  which  is  always  dangerous,  for  the  weather  is  generally  thick,  witjl- 
such  winds,  and  thcp;reatest  danger  will  be  to  run,  in  one  of  thein,  aslfore  itpoh., 
the  coast  of  Cuba,  when  hoj/mg  to  have  made  Havanna  or  Matanzas.  There- 
fore, so  soon  as  there  is  an  nppei'rance  of  a  northerly  gale,  the  best  way  is,  if 
near  the  Salt-Key  Bank,  to  anchor  on  it ;  and,  if  near  the  Great  Bank,  to  ap* 
proaoh  the  edge  of  it,  in  order  to  be  able  to  anchor  when  rt  may  be  necessary  ; 
for,  although  you  may  have  a  hjtrd  Northrr,  so  hmg  as  you  can  lie  t"  in  it,  you- 
ought  to  pursue  your  voyage,  as  the  current  will  certainly  carry  the  ship  through 
the  Striiit. 

Si  It  is  very  necessary  to  sight  the  Keys  on  the  Bank,  even  though  yon  hare 
no  fear  of  a  Norther,  and  there  may  be  occasions  in  which  every  exertion  should' 
be  made  to  see  them  ;  especially,  if  from  want  of  observations,  the  situation  ot  the 
ship  is  not  well  known. 

4.  When,  owing  to  cairns  or  lif  it  winds,  a  vessel  not  bound  to  the  northward, 
is  in  danger  of  i)eir;g  carried  thrn\,j;h  the  Strait  by  the  currf^.nt*  she  ought  imme^ 
diately  to  approacli  the  edge  i»f  itio  Salt-Key  Bank,  or  of  the  Great  Bahama 
Bank,  and  return  from  thence  by  the  Santaren  Channel  to  the  coast  of  Cuba,, 
without  trying  to  beat  back  the  lost  ground;  for  by  doing  this,  she  would  only, 
render  the  chance  of  being  carried  through  more  certain. 

6.  Should  y«u  involuntarily  approach  the  coast  of  Florida,  you  should  take 
extraordinary  care  to  examine  whether  you  have  advanced  out  of  the  general' 
current,  and  into  the  ed<ly.  That  you  may  know  this,  observe  the  eddy  fortiiis 
a  remarkable  and  visible  line  between  it  and  the  general  current;  which  Ihie  of  di- 
vision is,  in  many  places,  out  of  sigiit  of  land  ;  that  in  general  you  have  no  sound- 
ings on  it,  and  that  it  shows,  not  only  by  the  change  in  the  colour  of  the  water, 
but  that  also  in  it,  during  the  greatest  ralms,  there  Is  a  kind  of  boiling  or  overfell* 
ing  of  the  water.  From  this  line  of  division  the  water  griidually  changes  colour;, 
so  that  near  the  Florida  Keys  it  is  a  beautiful  sea-green,  and  at  last  it  becomes 
ahnost  as  white  as  milk. 

6.  When  in  the  eddy,  you  have  to  make  the  correction  of  currents  on  courses 
entirely  (Afferent  from  those  m  the  Stream.  This  is  the  more  necessary  to  be, 
attended  to,  because,  from  ignorance  of  this  cuxumstance,  many  have  been  shjp- 
wraeked. 


he  proximity  of  thf 
issume,  as  much  as 
I  cl«ar  idea  of  the 
;.  llaviiijr  ascer- 
the  ship's  depw* 
I  in  obtaining  ob> 
uoivledge  of  ;'ve 
t  of  ev«ry  thing ; 
Lirse  which  it  fol- 
vliioh  the  current 
lip  with  tliat  pro- 
stiil  'ipproximate 
!  and  9i>amat)-like 

we  add — 
Tunnel ;  not  0nfy 
have  the  strong- 
the  Gulf  Streamy 

y  thv  poidtion  of 
ccasioned  hy  the 
coast  of  Florida, 
!  there  is  not  the 
the  Great  Bank 
a^es.  vftry  fit  to 
n  her  and  March, 
i^n  force  reasels 
rally  thick,  wit|» 
!m,  ashbre  upDi) 
tanzas.    Ther^- 

hest  way  is,  if 
t  Bank,  to  ap.'' 

be  necessary ;, 
lie  t".  in  it,  yott 

e  ship  through 

|ough  yon  havie 
xerl  ion  should 
lituatiunotthd 

[the  northward, 
ought  imme^ 
rreat  Bahama 
[oast  of  Cuba,, 
fe  would  only, 

should  take 
bf  the  generaj' 

eddy  (otti(xa 
lich  Ihieofdi-  ' 
fve  no  sound- 
of  the  water, 

or  overfeJN 
[nges  colour;. 

it  becomea 

on  courses 
essary  to  bb, 
[e  beerr  shj{>- 


•J 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  J 

7.  When  you  enter  the  channel,  or  Strait,  froni  the  Tortugas  Bank,  with  the 
intention  of  passing  through,  take  care  to  hecutne  certain  of  the  land  of  Cuba,  or 
some  part  of  the  Reef  of  Florida,  in  order  to  have  a  good  departure ;  fur  al- 
though the  latitudes  and  soundings  on  the  Tortugas  Bunk  are  more  than  sufficient 
to  ascertain  the  place  of  the  ship,  yet  the  variabli-  set  of  the  current  toward  the 
Havanna  may  produce  a  serious  error,  if  not  pri)piM-ly  attended  to.  The  meri- 
dian of  the  liavanna  is,  in  a  word,  the  best  point  of  departure  for  ships  bound  to 
tke  north-eastward. 

At  about  8i  degrees  north  of  Cape  Antonio,  the  current  has,  at  times,  been 
found  setting  to  the  S.  W.  winding  towards  the  northern  edge  of  the  Yucatan 
Bank;  but  at  a  degree  tlience  eastward,  settin;;  nearly  S.  E.  Off  the  west  end 
of  Cuba,  at  ten  leagutis  N.  W.  from  Cape  St.  Antor.io,  it  has  been  found  setting 
S.  W.  by  W.  one  mile  an  hour.  But  these  cannot  be  cuusidercd  as  its  "g'encraJ 
dirtetions,^* 

The  stream  in  mid-channel,  on  the  meridian  of  Havanna,  acquires  the  direction 
of  B.  N.  C.  and  vclocitv  Qf  about  3.J|  miles  an  hour.  On  the  meridian  of  the 
g</t)itheramost  point  of  Florida  its  velocity,  at  about  one-third  over  from  the  Flo- 
ri«ia  Reefs,  is  commonly  4  miles.  Between  the  Bernini  Isles  and  Cape  Florida, 
its  cUrection  is  about  N.  by  E.  and  velocity  more  than  4  miles.* 

Qn  the  Cuba  side  the  stream  is  weak,  and  it  sets  to  the  eastward.  On  the  op- 
aite  side,  along  the  Florida  Reefs  and  Keys,  there  is  a  re- flow  or  counter  current, 
Mtting  to  the  S.  W.  and  West.  By  the  assistance  of  the  latter,  many  small  vcs- 
^Is  have  navigated  through  the  Strait  from  the  northward ;  but  this  navigation 
is  too  dangerous  to  be  attempted  by  strangers.  The  tides  set  strong  among  these 
Reefs,  and  are  more  particularly  described  in  this  work. 

The  winds  are  found  to  affect  the  position  of  the  stream  considerably.  Be- 
tvfeea  Cuba  and  Florida,  northerly  winds  press  it  southward  towards  the  shore 
of  the  former;  southerly  winds  have  a  contrary  effect.  When  turned  to  the 
north,  easterly  winds  press  it  to  the  Florida  side,  and  westerly  winds  nearer  to 
!ii«  Bahamas.  Southerly  winds  cause  it  to  spread,  and  so  may  those  from  the 
north' 

In  the  Strait  of  Florida,  within  the  Bahames,  when  a  northerly  gale  increases 
(o  ^  atorm,  it  opposes  the  stream  in  its  course ;  though  adverse  power  causes  it 
to  fill  all  the  channels  and  openings  among  the  Martyr  Isles  and  Reefs,  and  to 
overflow  all  the  low  coast.  Shipping  have  even  been  carried  over  the  low  Keys, 
and  left  dry  on  shore.f  The  water  is  supposed  at  times  to  have  risen  to  the 
height  of  30  feet;  and  to  have  been  running  against  the  fury  of  the  winds  at  the 
rate  of  seven  miles  an  hour.  During  these  times,  the  Strait  of  Florida  exhibits 
a  Meae  terrific  beyond  deseription. 


Remarhonthe  Stream,  ^c.  hy  Capt.  J.  Steele  Park. 

•♦  SiHed  from  Jamaica  for  London,  on  the  aoth  May,  1 824.  At  noon,  on  the 
£Tth,  was  off  the  S.  W.  side  of  Cuba,  in  latitude  21<^  26',  longitude  by  chronome- 
ters an3  lunars  84°  47'  W.  Here  was  discovered  a  current  setting  to  the  N.  W. 
aw  the  rate  of  two  miles  an  hour.    At  7h.  30m.  Cape  Antonio  bore  N.  W.  5  or  6, 

« '  .  ■ 

*  "  The  calculations  of  the  rolocity  of  the  Gulf  Stream  are  not  to  be  depended  upon.  I 
have  found  it  setting  at  the  rate  of  five  knots,  and  even  upwards.  This  was  on  the  16th  and 
I7tb  of  August,  1817.  On  the  I9th  and  20th  February,  181%  it  seemed  to  be  imperceptible. 
In  September,  1819,  it  set  at  much  i<.boui  the  rate  described  in  the  charts. 

t  In  the  month  of  September,  1769,  there  happened  an  inundation,  which  covered  the  topa 
of  the  highest  trees  on  the  Cayo  Largi,  &c.  and  during  which  the  Ledb^ry  snow,.  John'  Lo- 
rain, master,  was  carried  over  the  Reef  by  the  N.  W.  current  of  the  stream,  caused  by  a  gale 
IVom  N  E.  The  vessel  bilged  in  shallow  water,  but  an  anchor  was  thrown  out,  and  the  next 
dfey  the  resael  vras  found  to  have  grounded  on  Elliot's  Key,  with  its  anchor  among  the  trees. 
DtBnhm'*MavM6PiM, 


\{ 


""Nfs  .„.„„,,  ,„^,^  ^^^^^ 


i  < 


miJcs     The  '^°''- 

^he  current  ru„„i;,;S;  ^^^''^'i  "^./o  ge,  ovi-r  i  Vh  •  n".'"  ''/•/  fe-^  a  litr'/n  ti  tit 
Stream.  «     "•"'^"y  '>PP<.Site  to  th.  furm'r.  hiV.  "'•^'  ^^'"''•*•  '^"  ''"""d 

"  After  mundins  Can*.  An*     •      .  ^  "**"'  '"  t''«  Florida 

(the  latter  d«va  r  r  iV  ^    Antonio,  the  fand  nf  r.  i 

""•g  at  t  oS'  ;^«  ''ad  a  right  to  i-xpect    hf/      ""'•     '"  '^"^  liarrim  st 

meridian  altitude  s  of  if    *  'l?''*''*  '"  thr- /,o..r.    Tl  ?»^''''''*'' '^^  ^'''•><-ify.  i(  w-^jr    f 

«"'es  to  the  northH-a' I  nf  T  ^^  '^"  /•'•v.'^riVe  tn'^f  "^  ^^'••'"-  "fc.„rs,^  drove 

the  N  E  .  the  sh.p  was  in  the  Gu],-  .sT^^.i^^^,  ^"^  ". jaf ft„de 

'ong.^Sro'r  t?^'  V  noon,  h.t.  370  5,,  ,,  ,  '"'  ^""'"^  ""^'y  to 

"orthmg  was  made      T^e  true  d')^'  ""'  '"'^  «"v,. " n  L  'J'c^'  ^  ••««"y  m.,de  46  sV 
«avt>  about  80  only     VhL         d'fference  of  Jafit,,,!,;  L    ,  ^  '     '"  the  samo  tim« 

M=^&?  B>i?«:  HB??^ 

35  and  long,  seo  50',  ^jj^^;' 
Cttww/*  from  the  Bav  of  Ho«^  '  : 

Florida,  0,  o.i.:;,f ^:^- w  .w  .^ ,,,  3^^^.  ^^. 


Jan.i6Lat.i70  55.  Lonj., 

18  14 

19  31 

20  6 

20     47 

22  9 

23  13 

23  2<i 

24  47 
26  52 
28  22 
SO  0 
30     31 


870  30' 


»» 


»» 

»» 

»» 

»» 

f» 

»» 

>• 


18 
19 
20 

21 
22 
23 
24 

25 

26 

«»• 

28 
29 


8 


'    86     .i5 
85     58 
85     17 
85     39 
85     44 
84       8 
82     42 
80     10 
79     54 
79     50 
78     34 
76       6 


Current  16  miles  southerly  in  H    ... 

l4do.    ,    i„"y'"^'^e  24  hours. 


14  do. 

16  do. 

6  do. 

6  do. 

5  do. 
29  do. 
11  do. 


do. 
do. 

n'>rthward.    ? 
do. 

no'La^S'''"^^*^'-^- 
do. 

no  current. 

*"  do.        do. 

fl  i°-        do. 
24  do.         do. 


:,,   .         .  , . •  UO. 


BLU.Nt's  AMERICAN  COAST  I'lLOT. 


S 


From  the  S.  W.  corner  of  the  Tortugas  Bank,  the  ctirrrnt  has,  al  timrs,  been 
found  to  si't  S.  S.  W.  directly  over  to  the  Colorado^.  I'.ut  litlneen  the  Turtu- 
gas  and.Bay  lltmda,  or  Port  Cavaiiaa,  if  taki'S  ita  ri'gu'.ir  .sft  to  ttie  ejiBtward. 

The  bol8te<oii9  East,  N.  R.  and  North  winds,  winch  iiffi  ct  tlie  Gidf  Stream,  ge- 
nerally hetcio  i"  S«'ptemher,  and  continue  itn»il  March;  when,  if  the  moon  hap- 
pens jnst  at  the  time  to  be  on  the  full  or  change,  tiny  commonly  end  wllh  a 

On  the  southern  edge  of  the  Tortugas  Soundings,  lat.  21°  30'  long.  830  30' the 
current  sets  about  K.  by  S.  40  miles  in  the  24  houra ;  aud  iu  latitude  24°  long. 
820  20',  it  sets  Hb«)Ut  E.'by  JS.  42  miles. 


*      Remarks  o«  the  Stream,  by  Capt.  W.  J.  Monteatli. 

Between  latitude  25°  40'  and  i'80  20',  Captain  Monteath  found  the  current  in 
the  Strait  had  set  80  miles  in  the  "ii  hours  of  June  27,  1820.  On  the  southern 
border  of  the  stream,  (northw.trd  of  the  parallel  of  Cape  Hatteras,)  6th  July, 
1820,  lat.  a^t^  20'  to  36'^  30',  long.  72°  30'  to  71°  3',  captain  M.  found  the  current 
setting  N.  R.  7f)  milen  in  the  2i  hoiu-s.  Next  day,  July  7,  to  lat.  37°  40  long. 
60°,  he  foun.l  it  N.  5.S^'  E.  8«  miles  in  24  hours.  On  the  following  d?y,  July  8, 
to  lat.  38°  8«  long.  67°.  it  ran  N.  r)8°  R.  30  miles.  J,uly  0,  to  lat.  39°  10'  long. 
66°  10'  westward,  only  10  miles.  The  observations  were  continued  iach  day  by 
chronometer,  which  agreed  within  a  few  miles. 

The  Stream,  from  latitude  26°  to  28°,.j;enerally  seta  north,  rather  easterly ; 
from  28°  to  about  31°,  it  appears  to  run  north,  inclining  a  little  in  the  dirnction 
of  the  coast,  rather  westerly  ;  it  thence  suddenly  turns  to  N.  E.  by  E.  or  a  little 
more  easterly,  to  latitude  35°,  or  about  the  parallel  of  Cape  Hntteras,  where  it 
runs  within  about  18  miles  of  the  Cape. 

The  Stream,  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  coast  at  Cape  Hatteras,  inclines  more 
to  the  eastward,  at  the  rate  of  about  2i  knots;  then  the  shoals  of  Nantucket  ap- 
pear to  front  it,  and  to  throw  it  off  to  the  E.  N.  E.  and  E.  by  N.  northerly.  In 
about  the  parallel  of  39^°  longitude  63^°,  it  has  been  found  to  run  at  the  rate  of 
two  knots  between  E.  by  N.  and  E.  N.  E. 

Col.  Williams,  in  his  "  Tl>ermometrical  Navigation,"  states  that  the  whirlpools 
of  the  eddy,  on  the  northern  edge  of  the  Stream,  have  been  seen  in  lat.  41°  57' 
long.  65°  r.  He  also  observed  great  quantities  of  weed,  supposed  to  be  on  the 
northern  edge  of  the  Stream,  in  latitude  41°  53'  long.  65°  S3'.  It  has  subse- 
quently been  ascertained  by  Lieut.  Charles  Hare,  R.  N.  that  on  the  meridian  of 
57°  W.  in  the  summer  season,  the  northrrn  edge  of  the  stream  ranges  up  to  42|° 
N.  and  even  in  the  winter  months  to  above  42°  N.  This  has  been  confirmed  by 
twenty-five  voyages  across  the  Atlantic,  assisted  by  chronometer,  thermometer, 
kc.  the  last  of  which  was  made  in  the  fall  of  the  year  1 824. 

It  is,  however,  to  be  considered,  that  a  north,  N.  E.  or  «ast  wind  forces  the 
stream  towards  the  coast,  contracts  its  bread; h,  and  thus  increases  its  rapidity^ 
On  the  con'.rary,  S.  W.  west  and  N.  W.  winds,  force  th»'  stream  farther  into  the 
ocean,  and  diminishes  its  strength.*     It  is  clear,  then,  that  the  stream  fluctuates  in 


*  An  experienced  navigator  before  quoted,  says,  "  It  is  always  found  thnt  the  strongest 
current  is  in  the  warmest  ater.  1  have  observed  the  greiUei>t  degree  of  heat  of  the  (j.uI{, 
between  the  meridian  of  Cape  Hatteras  and  that  of  Niintuckot,  to  vary  at  ilifl'erent  times 
from  7;')'^  to  67*^  of  Fahrenheit,  and  the  Ktrongtstt  current  to  differ  from  3  to  1^  miles  per  hourj 
that  the  breadth  of  the  Stream  current  is  much  les!>  than  is  generally  supposed,  and  that  the 
winds  cause  a  great  effect  on  the  Gulf:  fur  instance,  a  wind  that  wouM  produce  a  current  of 
one  knot,  would  retard  one  of  3  knots  to  2  knots  if  opposed  to  it ,  and  would  accelerntc  the 
same  to  4  knots,  if  in  the  same  direction  ;  and  that  a  wind  crossing  a  current  obliqutlj,  would 
aflect  it  as  the  sine  of  the  angle  at  which  it  is  opposed.  The  direction  of  a  current  cannot;, 
however,  be  matciialiy  changed,  when  forced  against  an  opposing  barrier." 


6 


i 


li 


"I-tWT's.MERrCAN  COAST  P,.OT. 


its  direction  and  force  «rr    ^- 
known  by  its  smoothTnH    ."""'''■""»«'•.  where  k  7        '    ''♦* "«f««m  in  ita  lowe; 

of  the  w«.d  id  O,  If'S':'  I;-"  "o(   Lrkr,   :r''''*''r"'''  ^y  °>«"yl  ixt 


Si.  ?L°i  ^"^  "»«  Stream  .?!  ''''"^  «-'»«a'l  «'?  the  i^. v  ?  ?  t*"**''  °"«  ^^^^  to 
stanl  r^'^K*'  »uch  as  yo?  C^t*^?"  "  T"  ^^^  tKe  water  m'  ^°"''  '^'^^-^ure 
stand  for  the  coast:  vmi  «,:if "^,'*  '^""'d  when  in  »K  ^.  *®  "Jcrease  m  he»* 
^^'ia?  of  the  water;Te„^;/'  ""^^IJiWy  '"-coVor  the  oi^«%"''  heaveaboi  a„d 
Jhen  ,t  isalmostcer  aS,  ?hat  "h  "i^^^*^"'  ""d  »«  o^to  f h  °^  T"^'"'?''  ^y  the 
JJere  were  no  Stream 'fj  J,, "^^  **'f«nce  would  brru^  jt?!  T**  ^^ the\oyage! 
On  the  return  pasaaae  Va  J  '^'"''**  *"«ve  a  f  .vonr^n  •  *.»*'»rter  time  th.rif 
warmest  water^SV  fj^'eXr  ^?'?r^"''«'  «nd  ^n  offTif  "'  ^^^^  ^"•^"nt 

which  come  in  contact  wffh'^iT''"^  ""^  ca'ms  or  JiX' »!  j  *^*l  ^"  ^'"^  n>'dd!e 
«»e  of  the  thermomet!r^^T.'"  *«^«n  days.     r1:i  ."S'  '^'''»  '^"^  same  lilL 

In  navigating  the  roast  of  fU   it  •  Woach  to  soundmw 

•b^ai'ofU."?.''  ■JP"'"  *^  Sitrof  PhVVr"^/      '""Perator.,  will  g,. 
•"■^^  <^  d'^.t""  ",Jf"''°»"&Sfb:ffi'' '"  '"'""■•«  ■•»°  long 


"Xnlwr;  ir«8  »!,„  L  ''".'^""n'l»'.  177«  Cj^      l'  ' '"n""- observ  tJ!^ 


t)T. 

0  absolute  r»l«  can  Ke 
ert'fore  followa,  that  a 
IS  of  more  im|i<trtaiice. 
the  gtream  in  its  lower 
liiJterriiptiidly,  may  be 

The  margin  of  the 

no.  places  appears  like 

of  a  cataract,  even  u) 

ir,  there  are  great  rip- 
ved  by  many  naviga- 
ht.     The  appearance 

1  the  Stream.     This 

iff,  near  the  Bahama, 
d  we  believe  him  cor« 

iY^enture,Andhow 
nd  the  coast,  we  can 
Imightmukeashoit 
a  longer  one  than  to 
take  your  de|)arture 
to  increase  in  heat 
»ra,  heave  about  and 
>f  soundings  by  the 
end  of  the  voyage ; 
shorter  time  than  if 
de  or  eddy  current. 
"  ynu  gwt  into  th« 
take  the  advantage 

lese  directions.  la 
9?age  in  going,  but 
iims,  or  very  light 
was  in  the  middle 
' ;  the  edges  only, 
IS.     After  being  in 

lenry,  (37  leagues 
Jon  the  return  roy^ 
th  the  same  light 
jptain  known  the 

in  going  than  m 


Jore  importance 
|erature,  will  ge- 

S90  long.  560 
the  thermome- 
kbservation  was 
Viliiams,  in  No- 
kesc  three  jour- 
titb  each  other, 
YucQvef  his  op- 
^  abte  easily  to 
Water  over 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  ?ILOT.  7. 

At  the  edge  of  the  grand  Bank  of  Newfoundland,  the  water  has  been  found  5 
decrees  colder  than  the  deep  ocean  to  the  eastward.  The  higbent  part  of  the 
bank  is  10  deg.  colder  still,  or  15  deg.  colder  than  the  ocean  eastward. 

On  the  const  of  New-England,  near  Cape  Cud*,  the  water  out  of  soundings  iu 
8  or  10  deg.  warmer  than  in  soundings ;  and  in  the  stream  it  is  about  8  degrees 
warmer  still,  so  that,  in  coming  from  the  eastward,  a  fall  of  8  deg.  will  indicate 
your  leaving  the  Stream,  and  a  farther  fall  of  8  deg.  will  indicate  your  being  on 
soutulings. 

On  the  coast  from  Cape  Henlnpcn  to  Cape  Henry,  the  water,  nut  of  soundingx, 
is  5  deg.  warmer  than  in  soundings ;  and  in  the  stream,  abni*t  5  degrees  warmer 
still ;  HO  that,  in  coming  from  the  eastward,  a  fall  of  5  deg.  will  indicate  your 
leaving  the  stream,  and  a  farther  fall  of  a  deg.  will  give  notice  of  soundings. 

Mr.  Williams  reconunends  to  seamen  to  take  three  thcrmoroeters.  "L«^ 
them,"  he  says,  *'  be  kept  iu  one  ulace  some  days  previous  to  sailing,  in  order  to 
try  their  uniformity.  The  plate  should  be  made  of  ivory  or  aetal,  for  wood  will 
swell  at  Ilea;  and  a>i  tho  glass  tube  will  not  ^ield,  it  is  from  this  reason  very  liable 
to  break  :  beil-nietal  is  the  best.  Let  the  mstrument  be  fixed  in  a  square  metal 
box,  the  bottom  of  which,  as  high  as  the  mark  30°,  should  be  water  tight;  so 
that,  in  examitiing  the  degree  of  heat,  the  ball  may  be  kept  in  the  water ;  the  re- 
mainder of  the  luiigth  should  be  open  in  the  front,  with  only  two  or  thre^  cross- 
bars to  ward  off  any  ucrideiital  blow,  like  the  thermometer  used  by  brewere. 
Fix  one  instrument  in  some  |t»rt  of  the  ship,  in  the  shade,  and  in  open  air,  hut 
as  much  out  of  the  wind,  and  in  as  dry  a  place,  aa  possible.  The  after  part  of 
one  of  the  after  stanchions,  under  the  quarter  rail,  may  answer,  if  no  better  place 
can  be  fo<jnd. 

Let  the  second  instrument  he  neatly  slung,  with  a  sufficiency  of  line  to  allow  it 
tow  in  the  dead  water  of  the  wake. 

Put  the  other  away  safely,  to  be  ready  to  supply  tlte  place  of  cither  of  the 
others  in  case  of  accident. 

As  the  eddies  about  the  edges  of  the  Stream  must  vary  according  to  circum- 
stances, more  particularly  along  the  outer  edge,  there  is  gciterallv  a  current  run- 
ning iu  a  contrary  direction,  which  is  accelerated  by  the  wind,  m  proportion  l-o- 
its  strength,  blowing  conti'ary  to  the  stream,  and  retarded,  or  perhaps  altogether 
obstructed,  by  the  wind  blowing  in  the  direction  of  the  stieam.  Iu  the  latter 
case,  the  limits  of  the  stream  will  be  extended. 

In  the  winter,  when  the  cold  upon  the  land  is  most  intense;  which  is,  generaHy 
between  December  and  M»rch,  heavy  and  continued  gales  very  frequently  pre- 
vail,  which  commonly  proceed  from  between  the  North  and  West,  across  the 
course  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  from  Cape  Hatteras  unt'l  past  George's  Bank,  and  bend 
its  direction  more  to  the  eastward ;  being  aided  at  the  same  time  by  the  disoharge 
of  the  great  bays  and  rivers,  increased  by  the  force  of  the  wind  blowing  dowm 
upon  them,  and  the  constant  supply  of  stream  that  passes  along  the  coast  of  the 
Carolina^,  the  whole  produces  so  strong  a  current  to  the  eastward  as  to  render  if 
in:iposa)ble  for  a  ship  to  approach  the  coast  until  there  is  a  change  of  w>ind> 

l)uring  the  prevalence  of  a  southerly  or  easterly  wivd,  which  is  not  so  coittmen 
here,  it  has  been  found  that  the  current  is  forced,  close  .o,  and  in  some  parts  upon 
the  soundings.  From  a  scientific  nautical  gentleman  we  received  the  foRowing, 
viz.  while  oflTCape  Lookout,  in  11  fathoms  water,  he  had  a  strong  current  fi-oih 
the  southward,  owing  entirely  to  the  Gulf  current.  This  also  proves  the  Giilf 
influenced  by  winds.  Being  thus  pent  in  between  the  wind  and  tbn  slwal 
grounds  near  the  shore,  the  breadth  it>  greatly  duuinished,  and  the  velocity  pro- 
pqrtionably  increased.    This  ctixumstaoce  has  been»  in  particular^observ^fron> 

*  Tbe  baxik,;firom  Cape  Cod,  extends  almost  as  far  as  Cape  Sable,  where  it  joins  thebaaka 
of'Nora-Spotia,  deepening  gradually  from  20  to  SU  or  55  fathoms,  which  depth  there  is  in 
laf.  43^.  In  crossing  the  bank  between  lat.  40'>  41',  and  lat.  43*^,  ihe  bottom  is  very  remark)* 
abte :  on  the  outside  it  i«  fine  sund,  shoaling  gradually  for  several  leagiies ;  op  the  middle  o(< 
the  bank,  it  is  coarse  sand  or  abingle,  with  pebble  stones  ;  on  the  ii:si  e  it  is  nud^  wiUhfiee 
ees  of  sbelfs,  and  deepens  suddenly  from  45  or  48  to  150  or  160  fathouat 


water.                  6'™'  ■  '"^  '>'  teng  so.n«imV, "^  wavt  "'5"™""'  "'O"™  "'x- 
.   Capt.  Livi„|pi„„„„ .  ,       ""•'""'»'.  "toihcr  limes  the 

:.',.'  f '"'ams  ohservef  «  fn  f h    a.  '^  '^  ^"^  occasion- 

I  ttfefe  r-n-^^^^^^^^  —  .Ha„  the 

observations,  will, i     "P^'-•••'""ity  of  d<.?fn„  1^^^^^^ 

W  am«ys  ,„ade  a  pra^cHce  '  h'^*"'  1'  ^"^  »"*  of  t  e  Gulf ^^  '"'•"•''  *^'«/  '«ay 


By  the  Journals  of  Canl   W   nn-  " "^ — - 

Stream  77        ^^*  ^**''«'nl'eJ".  Coast  47^    ntfl-  '"'^omwaa 


TI.A  <*^J^      ""'™"  »«  <j,„  —  ^""''     >e>tfeani    7 

Tnediifepence  ofheatis  »h»«r„      **''^«'»™  warmer  23 


t  °*  °»««n  teajpcntare  of 


T. 


DLUNl  S  AMERICAN  COAST  I'lLOX. 


itucket  shoals,  thence 

coast  of  Geui'gia  and 

vinds  forced  the  cur- 

2  knots;  and,  in  the 

soundings. 

ed  Some  leagues  far. 

*  houndaries  or  edges 
iderf.ble ;  but  on  the 
ble  rxtent. 
ion,"  written  by  Mr. 
f  nre  informc  d  (hat 
Gulf  Stream,  to  the 
than  one  knot,  and 
f  the  air  and  water 
ffereiice  seldom  ex- 
t,  at  other  times  the 

jree  and  eight  miles, 
irs  b^'  diiad  reckon- 
that  It  set  oceasion- 

h  warmer  than  the 

n  as  you  get  within 

•comes  colder  than 

heshwre*.     Ifma- 

gitude  by  celestial 

1  try  the  tempera- 

^o  hours,  tiiey  may 

itream.     Indeed,  I 

i*mperMtureoCthe 

y  throughout  ifiy 

rent  that  way  go- 

itioiis  for  the  lati- 

;  a  pass.tge  to  nnd 

ceping  in  it  when 

-'hen  returning  t« 

have  frequently, 

iiaequainted  with 

iiid  been  in  port 

'tream,  whereas 


Jin  June,  1791,  the 

|uir  Stream  at  r?"^'. 

on  the  coast  waa 

en  /     Coast  14° 
i  Stream    7 


|e  the  concluding 
of  the  Western 

Jamaira,  Octo- 
if  thu  Oetaivaro, 
lose  pretty  rapid- 
lontinued  till  we 
len  Cuba  aad  St. 
Itempcntttre  of 


i 


they  lengthened  their  passage  by  keeping  in  it.  The  general  course  of  the 
Gulf  Stream  is  marked  on  the  chart  published  by  the  author  of  this  work  in 
1812,  and  improved  to  18£7;  and  I  would  advise  those  who  make  the  north- 
ern passage  from  Europe,  never  to  conic  nearer  the  inner  line  of  it,  by  cluice, 
than  10  or  15  leagues;  and  then  the  probability  will  be,  that  tlieir  passage 
will  be  assisted  by  the  help  of  a  counter  current,  which  oftci»  runs  within  it. 
In  coming  off  a  voyage  from  the  southward,  'le  sure  to  steer  N.  W.  when  ap- 
proaching the  stream,  if  the  wind  will  permit  you ;  and  continue  thai  course  till 
you  are  within  it,  which  may  be  easily  known  by  the  temperature  of  the  water, 
as  before  mentioned.  I  have  always  considered  it  of  (he  utmost  consequence, 
when  bound  in,  to  cross  the  stream  as  speedily  as  possible,  lest  I  should  be  visit 
ed  by  calms  or  adverse  winds,  and  by  these  means  drove  far  out  of  my  way, 
which  would  prolong  the  voyage  considerably,  especially  in  the  winter  season.* 

The  course  of  ships  bound  from  Europe,  to  the  ports  of  tne  United  States,  is 
controlled,  in  a  great  degree,  by  the  operation  of  the  Florida  Stream.  Little, 
therefore,  requires  to  be  added  to  the  subject  here.  Those  bound  ic  the  north- 
ern and  middle  ports,  when  passing  the  shoal  grounds  on  George's  Bank,  should 
take  care  to  pass  between  these  shoals  and  the  Stream.  Also,  when  passing 
the  Nantucket  Shoals,  to  keep  between  them  and  the  Stream.  The  south  part 
of  the  most  dangerous  shoal  on  George's  Bank,  b  in  latitude  41°  34'  N.  and  the 
shoals  extend  to  latitude  41°  53'  30"  N.  and  that  of  Nantucket  South  Shoal  in 
latitude  41°  4' N. 

Ships  crossing  the  Stream,  when  bound  to  the  westivard,  must  get  over  as 
quickly  as  possible ;  or,  it  is  clear  that,  they  will  be  carried  far  out  of  then- 
course*. 

It  has  been  remarked  that,  "  ships  from  sea,  approaching  any  part  of  the  Ame- 
rican coast  between  Long  Island  and  Cape  Hatteras,  if  in  doubt  about  their  reck- 
oning, should  take  notice  of  what  is  commonly  called  the  Gulf-weed,  which  is  in 
greater  plenty,  and  in  larger  clusters,  to  the  eastward  of  the  Gulf  Stream  than  in 
it,  where  the  sprigs  are  but  small  ard  few.  Within  the  Stream  there  is  no  weed, 
unless  in  rare  instances,  and  there  the  colour  of  the  water  changes  to  a  still  dark- 
er and  muddy  colour. 

The  outer  edge  of  the  bank  off  this  part  of  the  coast  appears  to  be  very  steep  ; 
for  it  has  been  frequently  found  tliat,  while  the  lead  has  been  kept  going,  there 
have  been  found  45  fathoms,  soon  after.  35,  and  a  mile  nearer  shore  only  3,5  or 
SO  fathoms ;  from  these  depths  the  shoaling  to  the  shore  varies  in  different  di- 
rections. 

Sir  Charles  Blagden,  M.  D.  and  F.R.  S.  in  the  transactions  of  the  Philosophi- 
cal Society,  says,  "during  a  voyage  to  America,  in  the  spring  of  the  year  1776, 
I  used  frequently  to  examine  the  heat  of  sea  water  newly  drawn,  in  order  to  com- 
pare it  with  that  of  the  air.  We  made  our  passage  fa;-  to  the  southv/ard.  In 
tins  situation,  the  greatest  heat  of  the  water,  which  I  observed,  was  such  as  raised 
tlie  quicksilver  in  Fahrenheit's  thermometer  to  77i  degrees.  This  happened 
twice;  the  first  time,  on  the  10th  of  April  in  latitude  £1°  10'  i>f.  and  longitude,  by 
our  reckoning,  52<^  W.  and  the  second  time,  thrc«i  days  afterwards,  in  latitudf^ 
22<^  7',  and  longitude  55° ;  but  in  general,  the  heat  of  the  sea,  near  the  tropic  of 
Cancer,  about  the  middle  of  April,  was  from  7G°  to  77°. 

"  The  rendezvous  appointed  for  the  fleet  being  off  Cape  Fear,  our  course,  on 
approaching  the  American  coast,  became  north-westward.  On  the  23d  of  April, 
\  lie  heat  of  the  sea  was  74° ;  our  latitude,  at  noon,  28°  7'  N.     Next  day  the  heat 

*  The  following  notice  relative  to  several  short  passages  across  the  Atlantic,  was  given  in 
a  Liverpool  paper,  Januury,  1824,  and  affords  a  i^l'  asing  demonstration  of  improved  know- 
ledge in  the  navigation  of  this  ocean. 

"The  packet-ship  AVw-Forfr,  Capt.  Thomas  Bennet,  arrived  here  on  Thursday  last,  after 
one  of  the  shortest  passages,  we  believe,  yet  made  between  New-York  and  this  port.  She 
sailed  on  the  16th  of  December  and  arrived  here  in  the  morning  of  the  Ist  of  January,  being 
little  more  than  (iilcen  days.  The  Mary  Catliarine,  which  left  Charleston  on  the  16th  De- 
cember, made  her  voyage,  from  port  to  port,  in  nineteen  days.  The  Marniim  arrived  in  thie 
evening  of  the  7(h  of  January,  in  eighteen  days  from  Charleston,  and  two  more  from  that 
town.      The  winds,  &c.  favat,  of  counte,  have  been  favourable. 

f 


\0 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  IMLOT. 


1:  ■*!  ■ 


was  only  71° ;  Ave  were  then  ia  latitude  29^  12' ;  the  heat  of  the  water,  therefoi);^ 
ivas  now  lesseiing  very  fast,  in  proportion  to  the  change  of  latitude.     The  25th, 
our  latitude  was  31°  3' ;  but  though  we  had  thus  gone  almost  2°  farther  to  the 
northward,  the  heat  of  the  sea  was  this  day  increased,  it  heing  72°  in  the  morn- 
ing, and  72iO  in  the  evening.     Next  day,  26th  of  April,  at  half  past  eight  in  the 
nioming,  I  again  plunged  the  thermometer  into  sea-w  ater,  and  was  greatly  sin - 
prised  to  sec  the  quicks;lver  rise  to  78°,  higher  than  I  had  ever  observed  it  even 
within  the  tropic.    As  the  difierence  was  too  great  to  be  imputed  to  any  acciden-^ 
tal  variation,  1  immediately  conceived  that  we  must  have  come  into  the  Gulf 
Stream,  the  water  of  which  still  retained  great  part  of  the  heat  that  it  had  ac- 
quired in  the  torrid  zone.    This  idea  was  congrmed  by  the  subsequent  regular  and 
quick  diminution  of  the  heat ;  the  ship's  run  for  a  quarter  of  an  hour  had  lessened 
it  aP,  the  thermometer,  at  three-quarters  after  eight,  being  raised  by  sea-water, 
fresh  drawn,  only  to  76° ;  by  nine,  the  heat  Avas  reduced  to  73°  ;  and  in  a  quar- 
ter of  an  hour  more,  to  71°  nearly ;  all  this  time  the  Avind  blcAV  fresh,  and  we  were 
going  seven  knots  an  hour  on  a  north-AVestern  course.     The  water  now  began  to 
lose  the  fine  transparent  blue  colour  of  the  ocean,  and  to  assume  something  of  a 
greenish  olive  tinge,  a  well  knoAvn  indication  of  soundings.    Accordingly,  betAveen 
four  and  five  in  the  afternoon,  ground  Avas  struck  with  the  lead,  at  the  depth  of 
eighty  fathoms,  the  heat  of  the  sea  being  then  reduced  to  69°.     In  the  course 
of  the  folh>wing  night  and  next  day,  as  Ave  came  into  shallower  water  and  nearer 
the  land,  the  temperature  of  the  sea  gradually  fell  to  65°,  which  Avas  nearly  that 
ti  the  air  at  the  time. 

Unfortunately,  bad  AVeather  on  the  2Cth  prevented  us  from  taking  an  observa- 
tion of  the  sun ;  but,  on  the  27th,  though  it  was  then  cloudy  at  noon,  we  calcula- 
ted the  latitude  from  tAvo  altitudes,  and  found  it  to  be  3fl^  26'  N.  The  difference 
of  this  latitude  from  that  Avhich  we  had  observed  on  '  m  25th,  being  2°  23',  Avas 
so  much  greater  than  could  be  deduced  from  the  ship's  run,  marked  in  the  log 
book,  as  to  convince  the  seamen  that  Ave  had  been  set  many  miles  to  the  north- 
ward by  the  current. 

On  the  25th,  at  noon,  the  longitude  by  our  reckoning  AA'as  74°  W.  and  I  be- 
lieve the  computation  to  have  been  pretty  just;  but  the  soundings,  together  with 
the  latitude,  Avill  determine  the  spot  Avhere  these  observations  were  made,  better 
than  any  reckoning  from  tiie  eastward.  The  ship's  run,  on  the  26thi  from  nine 
in  the  forenoon  to  four  in  the  afternoon,  Avas  about  10  leagues  on  a  N.  W.  by  N. 
course ;  soon  afterAvards  We  hove  too,  in  order  to  sound,  and  finding  bottom,  Ave 
went  very  SloAvly  all  night,  till  noon  the  next  day." 

From  these  observations,  I  think  it  may  be  concluded  that  the  Gulf  Stream, 
about  the  33d  degree  of  north  latitude,  and  the  76th  degree  of  longitude  Avest  of 
Greenwich,  is,  in  the  month  of  April,  at  least  six  degrees  hotter  than  the  water 
of  the  sea  through  which  it  runs.  As  the  heat  of  the  sea-water  evidently  began 
to  increase  in  the  evening  of  tlje  25th,  and  as  the  observations  shoAv  that  we  were 
getting  out  of  the  current  Avhen  I  first  tried  the  heat  in  the  morning  of  the  26th, 
it  is  most  probable  that  the  ship's  run  during  the  night  is  nearly  the  breadth  of  the 
stream,  measored  obliquely  across  ;  that  as  it  blcAv  a  fresh  breeze,  could  not  be 
less  than  twenty-five  leagues  in  fifteen  hours,  the  distance  of  time  between  the 
two  observations  of  the  heat,  and  hence  the  breadth  of  the  stream  may  be  esti- 
mated at  twenty  leagues.  The  breadth  of  the  Gulf  of  Florida,  which  evidently 
ito'Cinds  the  stream  at  its  origin,  appears  by  the  charts  to  be  tAvo  or  three  miles 
less  than  this,  excluding  the  rocks  and  sand  banks  which  surround  the  Bahama 
Islands,  and  the  shalloAv  Avatcr  that  extends  to  a  considerable  distance  from  the 
coalt  of  Florida ;  and  the  correspondence  of  these  measures  is  very  remarkable^ 
since- the  stream,  from  Avell  known  principles  of  hydraulics,  must  gradually  be- 
come wider  as  it  gets  to  a  greater  distance  from  the  channel  by  Avhich  it  issues. 

"  If  the  heat  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  Avere  knoAvn,  many  curious  calculation? 
might  be  foruied  h;f  comparing  it  with  that  of  the  current.  The  mean  heat  of 
Spanish  t9WD  and  Kingston,  in  Jamaica,  seems  not  to  exceed  81°;*  that  of  St. 


*  Hiitory  of  Jamaica,  London,  1774,  vol.  iii.  page  652,  6S3.  The  different  obBervation9 
of  tb^  heat,  recorded  in  that  ivork,  do  not  agree  together,  but  those  adopted  here  art  tttknn 
ftim  that  scries  which  appear  to  me  mo^t  coriert. 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


11 


Domingo,  on  the  sea  coast,  may  be  estimated  at  the  same,  from  Mons.  God'm's 
observations;*  but  as  tlie  coast  of  the  continent,  which  bounds  tim  Gulf  to  tlu; 
westward  and  southward,  is  probably  warmer,  perhaps  a  degree  or  two  may  l)o 
allowed  for  the  mean  temperature  of  the  climate  over  the  whole  bay ;  let  it  &o 
;jtated  at  82  or  83  degrees.  Now  there  seems  to  be  great  probability  in  the  sup- 
position, that  the  sea,  at  a  certain  comparatively  small  distance  below  its  sur- 
face, agrees  in  heat  pretty,  nearly  with  the  average  temperature  of  the  air,  durinjg 
the  whole  year,  in  that  part ;  and  hence  it  may  be  conjectured  that  the  greatest 
heat  of  the  water,  as  it  issues  out  of  the  bay  to  form  the  stream,  is  about  82f ,  the 
small  variation  of  temperature  on  the  surface  not  being  sufficient  to  affect  mate- 
rially that  of  the  general  mass.  At  the  tropic  of  Cancer,  I  found  the  heat  to  be 
77°;  the  stream,  therefore,  in  its  whole  course  from  the  Gulf  of  Florida,  may  ho 
supposed  to  have  been  constantly  running  through  water  from  4  to  6  degrees  cold- 
er than  itself,  and  yet  it  had  lost  only  4^  of  heat,  though  the  surrounding  wafer, 
where  I  observed  it,  was  10°  below  the  supposed  original  temperature  of  the  i- 
ter  which  forms  the  current.  From,  this  small  diminution  of  the  heat,  in  a  dis- 
tance of  probably  300  miles,  some  idea  may  be  acquired  of  the  vast  body  of  fluid 
which  sets  out  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  of  the  great  velocity  of  its  motion. 
Numerous  observations  of  the  temperature  of  this  stream,  in  every  part  of  it,  and 
at  different  seasons  of  the  year,  compared  with  the"  heat  of  the  water  in  the  sur- 
rounding seas,  both  within  and  without  the  tropic,  would,  I  apprehend,  be  the 
best  means  of  ascertaining  its  nature,  and  determining  every  material  circum- 
stance of  its  movement,  especially  if  the  effect  of  the  current  in  pushing  ships  to 
the  northward,  is  carefully  attended  to,  at  the  same  time  with  the  observations 
upon  its  heat." 

On  the  25th  of  September,  1777,  as  the  ships  which  had  transported  Sir  Wil- 
)iam  Howe's  army  up  Chesapeake  Bay  were  returning  towards  the  Delaware 
with  the  sick  and  stores,  they  were  overtaken,  between  Cape  Charles  and  Cape 
Henlopen,  by  a  violent  gale  of  wind,  which,  after  some  variation,  fixed  ultimately 
at  N.  N.  E.  and  continued  five  days  without  intermission.  It  blew  so  hard  Aat 
they  were  constantly  losing  ground,  and  driven  to  the  southward :  wc  alsc  pur- 
posely made  some  easting,  to  keep  clear  of  the  dangerous  shoals  which  lie  off 
Cape  Hatteras. 

On  the  28th,  at  noon,  our  latitude  was  36°  40'  N.  and  the  heat  of  the  sea,  all 
day,  about  65°.  On  the  29th,  our  latitude  was  36°  £';  we  had,  therefore,  in  thp 
course  of  these  24  hours,  been  driven  by  the  wind  38  nautical  miles  to  the  south- 
ward ;  the  temperature  of  the  sea  continued  nearly  at  65°.  Next  day,  the  30th, 
our  latititude,  at  noon,  was  35°  44',  only  18  miles  farther  to  the  southward, 
though,  in  the  opinion  of  the  seamen  aboard,  as  well  as  my  own,  it  had  blown  ^ 
least  aa  hard  on  this  as  on  any  of  the  preceding  days,  and  we  had  not  been  able 
to  carry  more  sail;  consequently,  it  may  be  concluded  that  some  current  had  set 
the  ship  20  miles  to  the  northward.  To  know  whether  this  was  the  Gulf 
Stream,  let  us  consult  the  thermometer.  At  half  past  nine  in  the  forenoon  of  this 
day,  the  heat  of  the  water  was  76°,  no  less  thi^n  U°  above  the  temperature  ,of 
the  sea,  before  we  came  into  the  current. 


*  Monsier  Godin's  experiments  upon  the  pendulum  were  made  at  the  Petit  Grove.  Tbey 
continued  from  the  24th  of  August  to  the  4th  of  September,  and  the  average  heat  during  that 
time  was  such  as  is  indicated  by  25°  of  M.  de  Reaumer's  thermometer,  (see  Mem.  Acad.  Sci- 
ence, 1735,  p.  5,  7,)  according  to  M .  do  Luc's  calculation,  (see  Modifications  de  1' Atmosphere, 
vol.  i.  p.  378,)  the  25th  degree  of  Reaumer's  true  thermometer  answers  to  about  (he  83th  of 
Fahrenheit's ;  but  the  average  heat  in  Jamaica,  during  the  months  of  August  and  September 
is  atso  85^^,  hence  we  may  conclude  that  the  mean  heat  for  the  whole  year  is  nearly  the  same 
on  the  sea  coasts  of  both  islands. 

t  The  lowest  calculation  of  the  mean  temperature  of  the  Gulf  is  preferred  on  this  occasion, 
because  of  the  constant  influx  of  new  water  from  the  Atlantic  ocean,  produced  by  the  trade 
winds,  which  water,  not  having  been  near  any  land,  must,  I  think,  be  sensibly  colder  than 
that  which  has  remained  some  time  enclosed  in  the  bay.  On  this  subject,  the  observatibns 
made  by  Alexander  Dalrymple,  Esq.  relative  to  the  heat  of  the  sea  near  theiioast  of  Gufiiea, 
ought  to  be  consulted.     (Sec  Phil.  Trans.  Vol.  Ixviii.  p.  394,  !tc.) 


12 


BLUM  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


i  '.'it 


ii 


..fj 


Towards  evening  the  wind  fell,  and  we  stood  N.  W.  by  N.  close  hauled.  As 
the  sea  still  ran  very  high,  and  the  ship  scarcely  went  above  two  knots  an  hour, 
we  did  not  make  less  than  3  points  of  leeway  on  this  tack ;  the  course  we  made 
good,  therefore,  was  W.  N.  W.  which  on  the  distance  run  by  noon  next  day,  gave 
lis  about  16  i.iiles  o(  northing ;  but  that  day,  the  1st  of  October,  our  latitude  was 
36°  22',  38  miles  farther  to  the  north  than  we  had  been  the  day  before,  the  diffe- 
rence, 22  miles,  must  be  attributed  to  the  Gulf  Stream.  This,  however,  is  only 
part  of  the  effect  which  the  current  would  have  produced  upon  the  ship,  if  we 
Jiad  continued  in  it  the  whole  twenty-four  hours ;  for  though  we  were  still  in  the 
Stream,  at  five  in  the  afternoon  of  the  30th,  as  appeared  by  the  heat  of  the  wa- 
fer, being  then  above  75"^,  and  at  eight  in  the  evening  the  heat  being  still  740,yet 
by  seven  the  next  morning,  we  had  certainly  got  clear  of  it,  the  heat  of  the  sea 
being  then  reduced  to  its  former  standard  of  65°.  On  this  occasion,  therefore, 
•iVe  did  not  cross  the  Stream,  but,  having  fallen  in  with  it  obliquely  on  the  west- 
ern side,  we  pushed  out  again  on  the  same  side,  as  soon  as  thfe  gale  abated. 

These  observations  having  been  made  3°  to  the  northward  of  my  former  ones, 
it  is  curious  to  observe,  that  the  heat  of  the  Gulf  Stream  was  2°  less.  The  sea- 
sons of  the  year,  indeed,  were  very  different :  but,  perhaps  under  such  circum- 
stances, that  their  effects  were  nearly  balanced.  In  the  latter  observations,  the 
meridian  altitude  of  ♦he  sun  was  less  ;  but  then  a  hot  summer  preceded  them  ; 
whereas  in  the  former,  though  the  sun's  power  was  become  very  great,  yet  the 
winter  had  been  past  but  a  short  time.  Calculating  upon  this  proportion,  we 
may  be  led  to  suspect,  that  about  tlic  27th  degree  of  latitude,  which  is  as  soon  as 
the  Stream  has  got  clear  of  the  Gulf  of  Fh)rida,  it  begins  sensibly  to  lose  its  heat 
from  82°,  the  supposed  temperature  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  continues  to  lose 
it  at  the  rate  of  about  2^  of  Fahrenheit's  scale  to  every  3°  of  latitude,  with  some 
variation,  probably,  as  the  surrounding  sea  and  the  air  are  warmer  or  colder  at 
different  seasons  of  the  year. 

The  preceding  facts  had  made  me  very  desirous  of  observing  the  heat  of  the 
Gulf  Stream  on  my  passage  homeward,  but  a  violent  gale  of  wind,  which  came 
oh  two  days  after  we  had  sailed  from  Sandy  Hook,  disabled  every  person  ou 
board,  who  knew  how  to  handle  a  thermometer,  from  keeping  the  deck.  The 
master  of  the  ship,  liowever,  an  intelligent  man,  to  whom  I  had  coiltamunicated 
ray  views,  assured  me,  that  on  the  second  day  of  the  gale,  the  water  felt  to  him 
remarkably  warm ;  we  were  then  near  the  70*^  of  west  longitude.  This  agrees 
very  well  with  the  common  remark  of  seamen,  who  alledge,  that  they  are  fre- 
quently sensible  of  the  Gulf  Stream  off  Nantucket  Shoals,  a  distance  of  more  than 
1000  miles  from  the  Gulf  of  Florida !  According  to  the  calculation  I  have  before 
adopted,  of  a  loss  of  2°  of  heat  for  every  3°  of  latitude,  the  temperature  of  the 
Gulf  Stream  here  would  be  nearly  73° ;  the  difference  of  which  from  59°,  the 
heat  that  I  observed  in  the  sea-v,ater,  both  before  and  after  the  gale,  might  easi- 
^y  be  perceived  by  the  master  of  the  vessel.  This  was  in  the  winter  season,  at 
the  end  of  December. 

An  opinion  prevails  among  seamen,  that  there  is  something  peculiar  in  the 
wenther  about  the  Gulf  Stream.  As  far  as  I  could  judge,  the  heat  of  the  air  was 
ccmsiderabiy  increased  by  it,  as  might  be  expxted  :  but  whether  to  a  degree  or 
extent  sufficient  for  producing  any  material  changes  in  the  atmosphere,  must  be 
determined  by  future  observations. 

Perhaps  other  currents  may  be  found,  which,  issuing  from  places  warmer  or 
colder  than  the  surrounding  sea,  differ  from  it  iu  their  ten-^perature  so  much  as 
to  be  discovered  by  the  thermometer.  Should  there  be  m :;!jy  such,  this  instru- 
ment will  come  to  be  ranked  amongst  the  most  valuable  at  sea ;  as  the  difficulty 
of  ascertaining  currents  is  well  known  to  be  one  of  the  greatest  defects  in  tlie 
present  art  of  navigation. 

In  the  mean  time,  I  hope,  the  observations  which  have  been  here  related  arc 
sufficient  to  prove,  that  in  crossing  the  Gulf  Stream,  very  essential  advantages 
may  be  derived  from  the  use  of  the  thermometer ;  for  if  a  master  of  a  ship, 
bound  to  any  of  the  southern  provinces  of  North  America,  will  be  careful  to 
try  the  heat  of  the  sea  frequentiv,  he  must  discover  very  accurately  his  entrance 
into  the  Gulf  Stream  by  tiie  sudden  increase  of  the  heat,  and  a  continuance  of 


-4'-'^ 


BLUNT'S  AMEillCAN  COAST  PILOT. 


13 


.  close  hauled.     An 
two  knots  an  hour, 
the  course  we  made 
noon  next  day,  gave 
•er,  our  latitude  was 
ay  before,  the  diffe- 
is,  however,  is  only 
pon  the  ship,  if  we 
we  were  still  in  the 
the  heat  of  the  wa- 
t  being  still  74°,  yet 
the  heat  of  the  sea 
occasion,  therefore, 
iquely  on  the  west- 
6  gale  abated. 
of  my  former  ones, 
1 2P  less.    The  sea- 
inder  such  circum- 
r  observations,  the 
jr  preceded  them ; 
very  great,  yet  the 
his  proportion,  we 
vhich  is  as  soon  as 
bly  to  lose  its  heat 
1  continues  to  lose 
ititude,  with  some 
arnier  or  colder  at 

ig  the  heat  of  the 

wind,  which  came 

every  person  on 

;  the  deck.    The 

«d  coAnmunicated 

water  felt  to  him 

ide.    This  agrees 

hat  they  are  fre- 

ince  of  more  than 

ion  I  have  before 

perature  of  the 

»  from  590.  the 

;ale,  might  easi- 

vinter  season,  at 

peculiar  in  the 
it  of  the  air  was 

to  a  degree  or 
sphere,  must  be 

ices  warmer  or 
ure  so  much  as 
ich,  this  instru- 
s  the  difficulty 
defects  in  tlie 

ere  related  arc 
iai  advantages 
ter  of  a  ship, 
be  careful  to 
his  entrance 
ntinuancc  of 


the  same  experiments  will  show  him,  with  equal  exactness,  how  long  he  remains 
ill  it.  Hence  he  will  always  be  able  to  make  a  proper  allotranee  for  the  number 
of  miles  a  ship  is  set  to  the  northward,  by  multiplying  the  time  into  the  velocity 
of  the  current :  Though  this  velocity  is  hitherto  very  imperfectly  known  from 
want  of  some  method  of  determining  how  long  the  current  acted  upon  the  ship, 
yet  all  uncertainty  arising  from  thence  must  soon  coase,  as  a  few  experiments 
upon  the  heat  of  the  stream,  compared  with  the  ship's  run,  checked  by  observa- 
tions of  the  latitude,  will  ascertam  its  motion  with  sufficient  precision.  From 
differences  in  the  wind,  and  perhaps  other  circumstances,  it  is  probable  that 
there  may  be  some  variations  in  the  velocity  of  the  current ;  and  it  will  be  curi- 
ous to  observe  whether  these  variations  may  not  frequently  be  pointed  oirt  by 
a  difference  in  its  temperature ;  as  the  quicker  the  current  mm'eis,  the  less  heat  is 
likely  to  be  lost,  and,  consequently,  the  hotter  will  the  water  be.  In  this  observa- 
tion, however,  the  season  of  the  year  must  always  be  considered ;  partly  because 
it  may,  perhaps  in  some  degree,  affect  the  original  temperature  of  the  water  in 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico ;  but,  principally,  because  the  actual  heat  of  the  stream 
must  be  greater  or  less,  in  proportion  as  the  tract  of  the  sea,  through  which  it 
has  flown,  was  warmer  er  colder.  In  winter  I  should  suppose  that  the  heat  of 
the  stream  itself  would  be  rather  less  than  in  summer ;  but  that  the  difference 
between  it  and  the  surrounding  sea  would  be  much  greater ;  and  I  conceive  that 
in  the  middle  of  summer,  though  the  stream  had  lost  very  little  of  its  original 
heat,  yet  the  sea  might,  in  some  parts,  acquire  nearly  the  same  temperature,  so 
as  to  render  it  scarcely  possible  to  distinguish  by  the  thermometer  when  a  ship 
entered  into  tht  current. 

Vessels  may  with  safety  avoid  the  eddy  of  the  Golf,  y^i  make  allowance  for  it 
in  their  calculations ;  tliat  is,  If  they  cannot  help  falling  into  them,  after  they 
hiivc  taken  all  the  precautions  by  soundings  in  blue  water,  and  when  they  had 
bottom,  stood  off,  they  will  naturally  subtract  what  longitude  they  make  in  the 
eddy,  from  what  they  had  made  in  the  stream,  and  begin  a  new  departure,  being 
at  the  same  time  very  precise  in  their  morning  and  meridian  ob&ervations.  Many 
ships  boimd  through  the  Strait  of  Florida,  unacquainted  with  the  stream's  eddy, 
and  ignorant  also  of  the 'soundings  being  under  blue  water,  have  been  lost  in  £air 
weather :  they  were  swept  insensibly  by  the  eddy  to  the  westward,  and  when 
they  found  by  their  calculations,  that  they  had  a  sufficient  offing  east  of  Gape 
Florida,  they  stood  North,  and,  instead  of  entering  the  Strait,  ran  directly  upon 
a  Reef. 

If,  with  adverse  northerly,  easterly,  or  N.  E.  winds,  vessels  happen  to  be  in 
the  mouth  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  that  is  between  the  Hnvanna  and  Cape  Florida, 
they  had  best  endeavour  to  make  the  Bahama  Islands,  or  at  least  the  soundings 
of  them,  and  proceed  under  the  lee«side,  but,  when  they  are  to  the  north  of  them, 
it  is  best  to  keep  in  the  eastern  extent  of  the  stream,  or  else  they  will  not  be  able 
to  clear  their  way  through  the  strait,  nor  along  the  coast  of  East  Florida ;  and 
may  get  on  shore  upon  the  reefs  either  of  Cape  Florida  or  Cape  Canaver&I,  if  not 
upon  the  beach  between  the  two  Capes,  which  is  the  least  evil  of  the  two ;  fur 
thus  the  crew  and  cargo  may  be  saved  ;  and  son?  vessels  may  also  be  brought 
off,  provided  the  storm  ceases  before  the  vessel  is  .uade  a  wreck'  of.  But,  if  at 
any  time  of  the  south  sun,  or  at  any  other  time,  the  winds  are  westwardly,  then 
the  Atlantic  Coast  affords  the  most  eligible  lee  for  navigators,  who  do  not  choose 
to  take  the  stream  ;  but,  if  the  current  in  the  Gulf  is  well  understood.  It  will 
^eatly  facilitate  the  progress,  wheu  boimd  to  the  northward,  as  fully  illustrated 
in  the  following 

RemarJcs  on  Sailing  along  the  Maetyrs,  by  Mr.  Romans. 

'•During  my  several  cruises  within  the  Martyrs  or  Florida  Reef,  I  have  seen 
a  great  number  of  vessels  borrow  so  closs  on  the  reef,  that  they  appeared  to 
be  within  it ;  and  sometimes  I  could  even  see  the  people  with  the  help  of  a  glass: 
those  people,  I  suppose,  were  well  acauainted,  or  very  bold ;  but  let  the  man 

who  does  this  be  ever  so  experienced,  tie  inu«it  be  very  careful  to  kHfp  a  strict 


14 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOIV 


'-  >■' 


4      u 


loiOik-out;  for  my  part,  I  would  not  come  nearer  than  just  to  raise  the  land,  eg. 
pecialiy  as  tides  may  have  their  influence  further  off  than  we  are  aware  uf. 

"  Besides  this  reason  for  standing  longer  off  than  in,  there  is  one  still  greater. 
Every  experienced  mariner  knows  that  a  vessel  will  run  towards  shore  in  IfSii 
time  than  she  can  ran  the  same  distance  from  it;  and  that  the  higher  the  land 
she  works  under,  the  quicker  she  runs  in,  consequently  the  slower  she  runs  off. 
Hence  almost  every  one,  in  bearing  upon  a  lee-shore,  will  stand  out  a  longer  time 
than  in ;  but  few,  even  among  the  most  experienced,  know  the  philosophy  of 
this  phenomenon  against  which  they  guard  so  carefully.  It  is  that  great  law  of 
nature,  whereby  all  light  bodies  must  fall  on  the  heavier  ones.— I  mean,  attrac- 
Him.  To  explain  this  by  an  experiment ;  take  any  vessel,  fill  it  almost  with 
water,  put  a  coiic  or  chip  in  it ;  while  that  remains  in  the  centre,  it  is  attracted 
from  every  side  alike,  and  therefore  stands  fixed;  but  no  sooner  is  it  thrown  out 
of  the  centre,  than  it  will  begin  to  approach  the  side ;  and,  as  it  draws  near,  at- 
traction is  increased,  till  at  last  the  velocity  of  the  chip  becomes  so  great,  as  to 
run  with  considerable  violence  against  the  vessel,  where  it  remains  fixed ;  and,  if 
it  is  an  oblong  piece,  in  shape  of  a  vessel,  the  same  will  happen  as  when  a  ship 
runs  ashore  stern-on,  viz.  it  will  wind  broadside-to.  The  explanation  of  this 
phenomenon  we  owe  to  John  Collins,  Esq.  of  Newport,  in  Rhode-Island,  for- 
merly first  counsellor  of  the  state,  and  a  very  experienced  commander. 

Speaking  of  the  GULF  STREAM,  Mr.  Romans,*  whose  surveys  of  the 
6oast  of  Florida  reflected  great  credit  on  him,  says:  "The  All-gracious  Ruler 
of  the  Universe  has  so  disposed  the  several  shores  of  this  mazy  labyrinth,  as  to 
cause  this  current  to  run  in  a  direction  N.  E.  and  at  the  rate  of  throe,  and  three 
miles  and  a  half  in  an  hour ;  by  which  means  we  are  enabled  better  to  avoid  the 
imminent  dangers  of  the  Reef,  where  it  becomes  a  le-  shore ;  fi»r  the  violence  of 
the  easterly  gales  beats  tho  Gulf-water  over  the  reefs,  so  as  to  destroy  the  effect 
of  flood-tides,  by  causing  a  constant  reverberating  current  from  the  shore  over 
tlie  reef,  insomuch  that  a  vessel  riding  under  the  reef  will  lay  with  her  stern  to 
windward. 

'*  I  once  came  out  from  Matacumbe,  and  was  scarely  clear  of  the  reef,  before 
I  was  overtaken  by  a  gale  from  the  eastward,  which  was  very  violent.  It  was 
five  o'clock  in  the  evening,  and  it  being  dark,  to  attempt  a  re-entrance  of  the 
reef,  I  was  forced  to  heave  the  vessel  to,  which  I  did  under  the  balanced  main- 
sail ;  she  was  a  heavy  schooner  of  about  seventy  tons,  and  a  dull  sailer.  The 
succeeding  night  I  passed  in  the  deepest  distress  of  mind,  seeing  the  burning  of 
ihe  breakers  in  constant  succession  on  the  reef,  till  past  one  o'clock;  the  storm 
continued  till  ten  next  morning,  when  I  made  sail  to  the  northward,  and  at  noon, 
to  my  utter  astonishment,  I  had  an  observation  of  the  sun's  altitude,  which 
proved  me  to  be  in  26^  50"  latitude,  by  which  I  had  made  a  difference  of  lati- 
tude of  118  miles,  in  the  short  space  of  nineteen  hours,  seventeen  of  which  I 
Iny-to. 


*  Mr.  Romans  observes,  "If,  by  keeping  to  the  northward,  the  current  of  the  Mexican 
Ciulf  has  set  you  on  soundings  on  Tortugas  Shoal,  these  soundings,  in  foggy  weather,  may 
be  a  guide,  being  properly  laid  down  in  the  Chart.  You  do  not  change  the  colour  of  your 
water  till  you  get  well  in  with  the  shoal,  but  there  is  generally  an  eddy  current  so  soon  as 
you  are  on  soundings  ;  therefore,  if  you  stand  over  to  the  Florida  shore,  so  soon  as  you  are 
up  to  the  latitude  of  23<>  25',  keep  as  much  to  the  eastward  as  N.  N.  E.  or  N.  £.  by  N.  till 
you  get  soundings.  And,  whatever  terrible  idea  people  may  have  of  that  shore,  if  the  wind 
will  allow  you,  keep  it  on  board,  especially  in  the  autumn  and  winter  seasons,  when  the  N. 
and  N.  W.  winds  arc  frequent,  and  the  current  often  runs  to  leeward.  In  those  seasons,  you 
may  take  an  advantage  of  the  tides  on  soundings,  by  carefully  observing  their  times ;  and 
tbb  conduct  will  tend  to  shorten  your  passage.  When,  however,  you  are  got  as  far  wind- 
ward as  the  south  end  of  Matacumbe  Reef,  endeavour  to  get  all  the  casting  you  can  possibly 
acquire,  in  order  to  get  the  Bahama  shore  on  board,  which  is  the  most  eligible  in  going  north- 
ward. The  proximity  of  the  Reef  of  Florida  will  manifest  itself  clearly  in  day-li^ht  by  the 
white  colour  of  the  water,  and  thus  there  may  be  no  danger  in  approaching  it :  but  this  is 
far  flrom  being  the  case  at  night,  when  it  ought  to  be  carefully  avoided,  and  the  lead  kept 
constantly  going ;  because,  having  soundings  to  the  distance  of  two  miles  without  the  steep 
part  of  it,  they  iv<ill  s'hdvr  tho  proximity  of  dagger  " 


\ 


1.. 

to  raise  the  land,  ea  • 
ve  are  aware  of. 
B  is  one  still  greater, 
owards  shore  in  lena 
the  higher  the  land 
slower  she  runs  ofl". 
nd  out  a  longer  time 
V  the  philosophy  of 
t  is  that  great  law  of 
es. — I  mean,  attrac- 
.  fill  it  almost  with 
entre,  it  is  attracted 
ner  5s  it  thrown  out 
IS  it  draws  near,  at- 
»mes  so  great,  as  to 
mains  fixed ;  and,  if 
)pen  as  when  a  ship 
explanation  of  this 
Rhode-Island,  for- 
commander. 
ose  surveys  of  the 
All-gracious  Ruler 
izy  labyrinth,  as  to 
of  three,  and  three 
better  to  avoid  the 
fur  the  violence  of 

0  destroy  the  effect 
om  the  shore  over 
y  with  her  stern  to 

1  of  the  reef,  before 
^y  violent.    It  was 

entrance  of  the 
i  balanced  main- 
dull  sailer.  The 
ing  the  burning  of 
'dock;  the  storm 
rard,  and  at  noon, 
s  altitude,  which 
difference  of  lati- 
nteen  of  which  I 


nt  of  the  Mexican 
>ggy  weather,  may 
the  colour  of  your 
current  so  soon  as 
so  soon  as  you  are 
i>r  N.  E.byN.  till 
shore,  if  the  wind 
sons,  when  the  N. 
those  seasons,  you 
their  times ;  and 
J  got  as  far  wind- 
;  you  can  possibly 
•le  in  going  north- 
\  day-li/^ht  by  the 
ng  it :  but  this  is 
;nd  the  lead  kept 
Iwilhout  the  steep 


re 
he 


ni.LiVr's  AMERICAN  coAsr  pilot. 


"  f  am  an  utter  enemy  (continues  Mr.  Romans)  to  all  theoretic  and  systematic 
positions,  which  has  caused  in  me  an  indefatigable  thirst  for  finding,  in  my  ex- 
perience, causes  for  all  extraordinary  appearances,  be  they  what  they  may. 
/nd  my  experimental  position  of  the  cause  of  the  increase  of  the  velocity  of 
this  current,  during  the  gales,  that  blow  contrary  to  its  direction,  is  no  other 
than  the  reverberating  current  occasioned,  by  the  swelling  of  the  water  within 
the  reef,  which  in  the  memorable  gale  of  October  1769,  when  the  Ledbury  was 
lost,  (as  mentioned  in  note  to  page  S,)  was  no  less  than  thirty  fuet  above  iCs 
ordinary  level." 

Besides  the  convenience  of  correcting  a  ship's  course,  by  knowing  bow  t» 
make  a  proper  allowance  for  the  distance  she  is  set  to  the  northward  by  the 
current,  a  mrthod  of  determining  with  certainty  when  she  enters  into  the  Gulf 
Stream,  is  attended  with  the  farther  inestimable  advantage  of  showing  her  place 
upon  the  ocean  in  the  most  critical  situation :  for,  as  the  current  sets  along  the 
coast  of  America,  at  places  on  soundings,  the  mariner  when  he  finds  thi«  sudden 
increase  of  h'JAt  in  the  sea,  will  be  warned  of  his  approach  to  the  coast,  and  will 
thus  have  timely  notice  to  take  the  necessary  precautions  for  the  safety  of  his 
vessel.  As  the  course  of  the  Gulf  Stream  comes  to  be  more  Jiccurately  known, 
from  repeated  observations  of  the  heat  and  latitudes,  this  method  of  determining 
the  ship's  place  will  be  proportionably  more  applicable  to  use.  And  it  derives 
additional  importance  from  the  peculiar  circumstances  of  the  American  coast, 
which  from  the  mouth  of  the  Delaware  to  the  southernmost  point  ef  Florida, 
is  every  where  low,  and  beset  with  frequent  shoals,  runnine*  out  so  far  into  the 
sea,  that  a  vessel  may  be  aground  in  many  places  where  the  shore  is  not  to  be 
distinguished,  even  from  the  mast-head.  The  Gulf  Stream,  therefore,  which 
has  hitherto  served  only  to  increase  the  perplexities  of  seamen,  will  now,  if 
these  observations  are  found  to  be  just  in  practice,  become  one  of  the  clfiof 
means  of  their  preservation  upon  this  dangerous  coast. 

Extract  of  a  Letter  from  Francis  D.  Mason,  Esq.  to  Col,  John  JVilliams,  Command' 
ant  of  the  Corps  of  Engineers,  and  Author  of  *'  Thermometrical  Navigation,"  (ft 
New- York  s  dated, 

Clifton,  (Eng.)  20th  June,  1810. 
"  My  voyage  from  New- York  to  Halifax,  in  the  British  packet  Eliza,  was  so 
very  tempestuous  and  unfortunate,  (having  carried  awsy  our  foremast)  that  I 
did  not  make  any  thermometrical  observations ;  but  when  we  sailed  from  Hall- 
hx,  on  the  27th  of  April,  I  began  them,  and  continued  until  I  unfortunately  broke 
both  my  thermometers.  However  short  the  time  was,  you  will  perceive  that 
my  observations  have  been  very  important,  and  I  herewith  send  the  result  of 
them.  You  will  perceive  with  what  fidelity  the  thermometer  indicated  the  banks, 
and  the  approximation  towards  islands  of  ice.  The  captain  was  so  convinced 
of  the  usefulness  of  the  thermon^eter,  that  he  made  regular  remarks,  and  insert- 
ed them  in  his  journal.  I  gave  him  one  of  your  books,  thinking  it  would  Im: 
pleasing  to  y«u  that  I  should  extend  the  knowledge  of  a  discovery  so  useful  as 
yours,  and  I  wish  it  were  more  generally  known.  After  having  miraculously  es- 
caped the  islands  of  ice,  and  several  severe  gales,  we  arrived  at  Falmouth  on  ttic 
S2d  of  3Iav,  1810." 


rr*».*  m'. 


Iti 


BLUNT  i3   AMERICA2<   COAST   PILOT.. 


EXTRACT  FROM  THE  ELIZA'S  JOURNAL. 


Dttt$. 


Ap.  26 


29 


30 


May  1 


15! 


OUTS. 


A.  M.    P.  M 


10 

1 

4 
8 

8 

Noon. 
5 
7 
10 

9 

Noon. 
5 
9 


8 
11 


1 
3 

8 
ID 
Noon. 


3 
4 
5 
6 
8 


4 
6 


3 

6 

9 

12 


8 
10 
Noon. 

I    6 

Midn.  12 

4 

S 

Noon. 
8 
12 
6 
Noon. 


Heat  of 


Air.  Water. 


44c 

40° 

47 

41 

43 

42 

46 

40 

45 

43 

49 

48 

50 

62 

48 

64 

48 

54 

56 

62 

60 

61 

58 

61 

60 

60 

60 

58 

60 

46 

64 

25 

62 

46 

58 

47 

60 

47 

67 

45 

56 

48 

58 

50 

60 

60 

60 

62 

63 

63 

64 

63 

61 

64 

6S 

58 

56 

56 

50 

56 

<i3 

43 

40 

39 

41 
43 
44 
44 
46 
46 
46 
43 
54 
49 
48 
47 
63 


44 
45 
43 
50 
60 
60 
52 
60 
59 
60 
60 
59 
59 


LaL 


N. 


43'=30' 


42  27 


41  25 


41  53 


i«ng. 


W. 


REMMiKS, 


62062' 


60  54 


59  21 


d6  52 


Sable  Baob. 


42    1 


42  54 


13  12 


53    8 


Taoking  towards  edge  of  stnain. 
Steering  in  tUe  stream. 


Sound  in  70  fa.  no  bottom :  the  water  at 
ihat  depth  2°  warmer  tbanon  the  surface. 
An  island  of  ice,  bearing  S.  S.  E.  7m. 
Abreast  of  ice  i  mile  to  leeward. 
Island  of  ice  bears  S.  S.  W.  7  miles. 


50    4 


46    2 


41  43 


Sound  with  70  figithoais,  no  bottoa. 

Sound  with  80  ikthoms,  no  bottom. 

Sound  with  80  flttboms,  ao  bottom. 

An  enormous  island  of  ice  abreast,  100 
yards.  This  was  about  150  ft.  high  and  1 
mile  in  diameter.  When  first  discovered, 
it  was  not  100  yds.  tkom  the  vessel,  utd 
we  were  sailing  directly  towarda  it.  Tlie 
obscurity  was  then  so  grea^  that  at  that 
distance  it  appeat«d  only  like  a  whit« 
cloud,  extending  firoQ  the  9ea  over  our 
masts. 

Passed  several  islands  of  ice,  the  largest 
bearing  S.  W.  7  miles. 

No  bottom  by  SOfathoais. 


Broke  the  thermometers. 


m\ 


REMARKS  ON  THE  FOREGOING  JOURNAL. 

TLe  important  point  of  comparison,  is  the  difference  in  the  heal  »f  the  water  in  d\fftrttit 
places,  in  or  near  the  stream,  in  the  ocean,  out  of  the  stream,  on  the  coast,  and  near  islands 
of  ice,  not  the  difference  between  the  heat  0/  the  water  and  the  air,  as  some  have  imagined. 
The  latter  is  merely  a  concurrent  observation;  it  serves  to  account  for  ordinary  changes,  and 
thereby  to  guide  the  judgment 

From  April  28,  at  10  A.  M,  to  April  29,  at  8  A.  M.  we  see  the  temperature  !  the  sea  in 
tbc  shoftTs  0f  Sablfr,  flrom  40  to  43.  At  5  P.  M.  w^  see  (he  warm  influence  of  tb«  Gulf  Strr am 


RNAL. 


M^KS. 


I  edge  of  stnant. 
trcftm. 


0  bottom :  the  water  at 
lor  than  on  theaiu^ce. 
bearing  S.  S.  E.  7ni. 
mile  to  leeward.  f 

ra  S.  S.  W.  7  miles. 


thorns,  no  bottom. 

loms,  no  botton;. 

loms,  BO  bottom. 

id  of  ice  abreast,  100 

It  IfiO  ft.  high  and  1 

Twn  first  discovered, 

Trom  the  vessel,  and 

Jylowardtit.    Hie 

grea^  that  at  that 

only  like  »  white; 

the  sea  over  our 

ofice,  thelai^gest 
Ihoais. 


%w 


era. 


\w(Uer  in  different 

and  near  islands 

ke  have  imagined. 

}ary  changes,  and 

ire   «'  the  sea  in 
'thie  Gulf  Stream 


BLUiM  S    AMERICAN    COAST   MLOT. 


\ 


It 


Tram  62^  to  64-'.  At  10  P.  M.  we  see  the  temperature  between  the  influence  of  thestreamin 
(Itiep  water  and  the  coast  at  54'^,  which  is  about  a  mean  between  the  two ;  then  standing  oil' 
shore,  at.9  the  next  morning,  30th,  we  see  the  warm  influence  of  the  stream  again. 

If  these  stripes  of  water  had  been  distinguished  by  the  colours  of  white,  red,  and  blue, 
cuuld  they  be  more  distinctly  discoverable  than  they  are  by  the  constant  use  of  the  thermo- 
meter ? 

About  23  hours  afterwards,  May  1,  at  8  A.  M.  we  find  the  water  cooling,  and  in  three 
hours  mote  the  mercury  falls  14  degrees  (46'^.)  Here  no  bottom  could  be  found  by  the  lead, 
and  there  was  probably  an  island  of  ioe,  obscured  by  fog.  (Let  it  be  remembered,  that  the 
coldness  of  ice  condenses  the  atmosphere,  and  of  course  the  consequence  must  be  fog.) — 
Passing  this  {^t2  P.  M.  the  ther^moter  rose  to  54*^,  but  in  one  hour  more  it  fell  to  46°  again, 
aud  an  islaud  of  ice  appeared  elniva  distance  of  seven  miles.  Let  navigators  reflect  on  this, 
and  say  that  a  sudden  fall  of  6^  in  ttil.  part  of  the  ocean,  ought  to  induce  them  to  haul  to 
the  southward,  and  keep  a  good  look  out.  From  May  1,  at  11  A.  M.  to  the  next  morning  at 
1  A.  M.  we  see  the  gradual  changes  as  the  ship  passes  the  ice  and  comes  again  into  ocean 
water;  (50^)  but  in  two  hovfs  more,  the  ship  is  in  the  warm  influence  of  the  stream  again, 
and  the  mercury  rises  10  degrees  (60"^).  She  proceeds  in  a  nearly  regular  degree  of  heat  du- 
ring 17  hours,  till  at  6  P.  M.  the  water  ||^ina  again  to  cool,  falling  to  56^  at  midnight.  Here 
^vas  no  bottom  in  80  fathoms.  May  3cl,  at  4  A.  M.  the  water  was  at  43'^,  still  no  bottom  in  60 
fathoms.  tNow,  from  past  experience,  we  must  say,  here  is  an  island  of  ice  ia  a  less  distance 
than  7  miles,  because  at  that  distance  the  water  was  46*-^.  When  day  appears,  behold  an 
enormous  island  of  ice  abreast,  100  yards,  and  the  beat  of  the  water  reduced  to  39° !  A  ques- 
tion now  occurs.  Had  not  the  thermometer  been  thus  ubc(I,  had  it  not  been  continued  during 
the  night,  what  would  have  been  the  fate  of  the  ship  ?  Let  the  recollection  of  the  miserable 
fate  of  the  ship  '*' Jupiter,  be  an  impressive  answer ;  and  let  it  be  laid  down  as  a  maritime  ax- 
iom, that  want  of  caution,  or  ignorance,  can  alone  cause  such  accidents  in  future. 

JONA.  WILLIAMS. 


Temperature  of  the  air  and  water  on  a  passage  from  New-York  to  Ireland,  March, 
i3l6,  in  the  ship  Grand  Turk,  John  Carlton,  Commander, 


March  7 

Air. 

Water. 

Lttt.  JV. 

Long.  W 

Wind, 

8 

J^oon. 

9 

10 

H 

- 

11 

44  IS 

68  30 

39  8N. 

61  36 

N.  In  the  Gulf. 

12 

46  00 

66  00 

39  36 

69  03 

N.   do. 

13 

47  00 

65  00 

S.&IW.  do. 

14 

56  30 

64  00 

40  36 

54  17 

N.   do. 

15 

64  00 

t59  30 

40  42  . 

62  47 

W. 

16 

•  66  00 

t43  00 

42  00. 

49  51 

S.  W. 

17 

44  00 

§59  00 

42  25 

47  04 

N.  E. 

IS 
19 
SO 

68  00 

61  30 

42  25 

45  42 

S.  and  W. 

47  00 

57  00 

43  44 

39  27 

S.  and  W. 

SI 

52  00 

57  00 

44  22 

37  15 

S.  and  W. 

S2 

56  30 

56  00 

46  43 

S3  44 

S.  and  W. 

23 

24 

51  00 

64  00 

46  46 

31  33 

S.  and  £. 

25 
S6 
27 
28 
29 
30 

52  30 

60  00 

49  11 

21  57 

w. 

47  00 

48  00 

51  24 

.18  13 

S.  and  E. 

48  00 

50  00 

61  15 

17  25 

E. 

31 

48  00- 

60  00 

61  15 

15  66 

N.  and  E* 

April  1 

48  00 

50  00 

50  50 

12  44 

N.  W. 

2 

45  00 

60  00 

50  44 

•  10  24 

S.W. 

3 

48  00 

60  00 

51  17 

10  24 

E. 

4 

48  DO 

50  00 

60  30 

9  13 

E. 

5 

49  00 

50  00 

49  54 

10  46 

N.E. 

6 

49  08 

50  00 

60  18 

10  23 

'N.E. 

t  West  of  the  Bank. 

. <i 

1  On  the  Bank. 

§  Eut  of  the  Bank. 

*  Captain  Law's  protest,  containing  the  particulars  of  the  distrcasfaig  eircuaiBtance  of  this 

ship,  states, 

3 


18 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Off-Set  from  the  Gulf  Stream. 


From  the  superior  elevation  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  its  water,  about  the  Baha- 
mas, appears  to  have  a  declivity  or  tendency  to  the  eastward ;  and  there  is  rea- 
son to  believe  that  an  olT-set  of  the  Stream,  from  without  the  Maternillo  Bank, 
sets,  if  not  {generally,  very  frequently,  to  the  eastward  and  S.  E.  With  the  usual 
set  of  the  currents,  along  the  eastern  range  of  the  Bahama  Islands,  we  are  not 
accurately  acquainted  ;  but,  with  a  N.  W.  wind,  we  have  no  dotibt  that  it  is  in  a 
S.  E.  direction.  The  Europa,  a  ship  of  war,  returning  to  Jamaica,  by  this  pas- 
sage, from  a  cruise  oif  Havanna,  in  1787,  steered  east,  on  the  parallel  of  30°  N. 
with  a  westerly  wind,  until  the  run  was  supposed  to  h".ve  brought  her  on  the  me- 
ridian 'of  Turk's  Islands,  by  which  it  was  intended  to  pass  southward,  but  an 
rasttrl^  current  had  swept  her  along  as  high  as  that  of  the  Mona  Passage. 
Captain  Manderson,  of  the  Royal  Navy,  who  first  not'ced  this  event,  observes, 
"  if  it  were  once  ascertained  that  a  current  was  common  in  that  part  of  the  ocean, 
might  it  not  be  favourable  for  vessels  bound  from  Jamaica  to  the  Caribbee  Islands, 
especially  in  the  summer  months,  during  the  prevalence  of  the  sea  breezes  ?" 

"The  ship  Fame,  Captain  J.  W.  Monteath,  a  good  lunarian,  assu^r  id  me," 
says  Captain  Livingston,  "  that  he  had  been  carried  three  degrees  and  upwards 
ti>  the  eastward,  between  the  time  of  his  departure  from  the  American  coast  and 
making  the  Windward  Passages;  but  this  may  have  been  partly  occasioned  by 
the  Gulf  Stream,  which  he  may  have  crossed  too  obliquely  in  proceeding  from 
Norfolk."  The  Fame,  above  mentioned,  was  bound  from  Norfolk,  in  Virginia, 
to  Kingston,  Jamaica,  in  May,  1816 ;  axnd  in  a  run  of  thirteen  days,  until  in  the 
latitude  of  29°,  and  longitude  61°,  it  was  5ound  that  the  current  had  set  the  vec- 
sel  30  10'  E. 

"  Captain  Hall,  in  the  brig  Lowland  Lass,  passed  to  windv.-ard  of  Porto  Rico, 
when  he  thought  that  he  had  run  through  the  Mona  Passage.  Captain  Patter- 
i:i>n,  of  the  brig  Clyde,  as  I  am  informed,  passed  down  the  Anegada  Passage, 
when  he  intended  to  have  made  the  Mona. 

Capt.  Romans,  before  quoted,  says,  "  within  the  edge  of  the  Stream  is  a 
snitooth  eddy,  gradually  changii.g,  as  it  appronches  Hawke  Channel  and  its 
islands,  from  the  Stream's  deep  blue  to  a  beautiful  sea-green,  and  at  last  into  a 
milk-white.  The  soundings,  under  the  blue  coloured  water,  are  generally  on  a 
fine  white  marl ;  under  the  sea-green,  on  the  said  marl,  you  meet  with  sponge, 
white  coral,  sea-feathers,  turtle-grass,  and,  sometimes,  banks  oT  rocks;  and  un- 
der the  white  coloured  water,  the  soundings  are  on  a  white  marl,  with  banks  or 
vocks,  or  white  sand.  The  eddy  takes  its  current  i.i  an  opposite  direction  from 
that  of  the  contiguous  stream,  .viz.  south-westwardly." 

"April  6,  in  latitude  44°  20',  longitude  49*^,  at  8'A.  M.  saw  several  pieces  of  broken  ice, 
frodi  which  at  11  the  same  day,  we  supposed  ourselves  entirely  clear,  and  steering  W.  by  ti. 
— W. — E.  N.  E.  and  fo^  weather.  At  2  P.  M .  began  to  discover  islands  of  ice  again,  and 
at .  3  o'clock  saw  a  largeneld  ahead,  which  appeared  to  have  no  opening.  We  then  wore 
ejrip,  and  kept  off  t*  the  southward  and  eastward ;  continually  passing  small  islands  of  ice, 
until  5  P.  M.  when  we  found  the  ice  extending  so  far  to  north  and  south  that  we  could  net 
ctiax  it  We  then  hove  about  and  stretched  to  the.  northward  among  the  broken  ice,  till  night 
came  on,  and  no  prospect  of  getting  clear.  We  hove  to  under  three  topsails  doubie  reefed, 
ih  hopes  to  have  sufficient  drift  to  keep  clear  of  the  fields  of  ice  to  leeward,  until  daylight, 
Uut  found  at  about  11  we  were  drifting  fast  upon  a  large  field,  and  were  obligee-  to  wear  ship 
and  haul  to  the  southward  under  easy  sail,  luffing  and  bearing  away  for  the  broken  ice  as  oc- 
casion required,  until  half  past  12,  when  we  struck  a  small  piece,  which  we  found  had  gone 
tbtoogb  the  starboard  bow. 

"  Captain  Law  would  recommend  to  any  vessel  bound  to  Europe,  not  to  go  to  the  north  of 
latitude  39'-',  as  the  information  of  Captain  Guiner  in  the  schooner  that  relieved  him,  had 
been  as  far  to  the  southward  as  41°  30'  and  could  see  no  southern  termination." 

By  a  reference  to  the  journal  of  Capf ,  Carlton,  who  ranks  with  the  first  Navigators  of  the 
a«e>  and  an  ornament  of  the  U.  S.  Navj,  the  importance  of  the  murine  thermometer  is  fully 
iiiustrated.  On  the  l6th  the  ship  crossed  the  bank,  at  which  time  the  temperature  of  the 
water  was  15°  46'  colder  than  the  previous  and  following  days.  A  part^,ular  use  of  this 
iastrument  as  you  approach  the  coast,  will  unquestionably  point  out  the  sounaings,  and  render 
use(tll  aervlces  to  (he  navigator.    (See  page  17.) 


lifcUNX's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT, 


19 


)Oiit  the  Bahfl- 
id  there  is  rea- 
aternillo  Bank, 
With  the  usual 
ids,  we  are  not 
t  that  it  ia  in  a 
;a,  by  this  pas- 
illel  of  SOO  N. 
her  on  the  me- 
hward,  but  an 
ilona  Passage. 
vent,  observes, 
t  of  the  ocean, 
ribbee  Islands, 
sea  breezes  ?" 
,  assu?^d  me," 
3  and  upwards 
rican  coast  and 
occasioned  by 
oceeding  from 
Ik,  in  Virginia, 
ys,  until  in  the 
lad  set  the  \cz- 

of  Porto  Rico, 
!aptain  Patter- 
?gada  Passage, 

Stream  is  a 
lannel  and  its 
1  at  lust  into  a 
generally  on  a 
;  with  sponge, 
ocks;  and  un- 
with  banks  or 
direction  from 


s  of  broken  ice, 

ering  W.  by  N. 

of  ice  again,  and 

We  then  wore 

island?  of  ice, 
it  we  could  not 
can  ice,  till  night 
s  double  reefed, 

until  daylight, 
;e(:  to  wear  ship 
roken  ice  as  oc- 
found  had  gone 

to  the  north  of 
ilicved  him,  bad 
I." 

avigators  of  the 
lumeter  is  fully 
perature  of  the 
ular  use  of  this 
ngs,  and  rvm\ti' 


The  soandjngs  of  the  eddy,  provided  no  reef  be  in  the  way,  between  the 
Stream  and  the  Hawke  Channel,  run  from  20  fathoms  to  2^ ;  anJ  when  the 
reef  divides  the  Stream  and  the  Hawke  Channel,  the  soundings,  in  some  places, 
are  from  bottomless  at  once  to  12  or  11  fathoms.  Hawke  Channel  is  the  chan- 
nel between  Florida  Reef  and  Keys. 

"  In  addition  to  the  above  notices,  I  have  been  assured,  by  an  intelligent  Spa- 
nish navigator,  that,  about  thirty  years  since,  vessels  bound  from  Havanna  ^o 
Europe,  used  generally  to  cut  off  three  degrees  of  longitude  from  their  reckoning, 
on  account  of  this  set,  which,  he  said,  was  considered  then  as  certainly  existing. 
At  tluit  time  the  charts  were  about  a  degree  wrong,  which  would  reduce  the  Spa- 
niard's allowance  to  two  degrees,  or  thereabout. 

"These  notices  tend  to  prove  that  an  easterly  off-set,  from  the  Gulf  Stream, 
sets  to  the  northward  of  the  Bahamas ;  of  this  I  am  so  firmly  convinced,  that 
if,  in  charge  of  a  ship  from  the  Havanna,  or  even  New-Orleans,  bound  to  Ja- 
maica, I  should,  if  allowed  to  follow  ray  own  plan,  run  out  the  Strait  of  Florida-, 
and  attempt  making  my  passage  yith  the  aid  of  this  off-set.  This  is  to  be  under- 
stood in  case  I  should  not  have  westerly  winds  in  the  southern  parallels ;  for 
such  winds  are,  I  am  told,  more  frequent  than  formerly ;  and  I  know  that  they 
are  by  no  means  of  rare  occurrence  on  the  S.  W.  of  Cuba."* 

It  has  been  found  that  Avhen  Cape  Henry,  (the  south  point  of  the  Chesapeake,) 
bore  N.  W.  160  leagues  distant,  a  current  was  setting  to  the  southward,  at  the 
rate  of  10  or  12  miles  per  day,  which  so  continued  until  Cape  Henry  bore  W. 
N-  W.  89  or  90  leagues  ;'*the  current  was  then  found  setting  to  the  N.  E.  at  tht! 
rate  of  33  or  34  miles  per  day,  which  continued  until  within  .S2  or  80  leagues  of 
the  land ;  then  a  current  net  to  tlte  southward  and  westward,  at  the  rate  of  10  or 
15  miles  per  day,  to  within  12  or  15  miles  of  the  land.  This  current,  which  i's 
considered  as  the  eddy  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  sets,  more  or  less,  to  the  S.  W.  ac- 
cording to  the  figure  of  the  coust. 

It  has  also  been  observed  by  others,  that  a  southern  and  western  current  con- 
stantly sets  in  high  latitudes  between  the  Gulf  Stream  and  coast,  more  particu- 
larly in  soundings,  at  the  rate  of  half  a  mile  an  h<lur,  or  lijore,  according  to  .the 
wind. 

An  experienced  officer  of  the  navy,  before  quoted,  has  said,  that  "  In  all  the 
observations  I  made,  during  five  years  cruising  on  t  he  American  coast.  1  never  found 
this  eastern  current  to  the  southward  of  latitude  36^,  and  only  once,  (the  above 
mentioned  time,)  so  far  ^  it. generally  prevailing  between  the  latitudes  of  37*^  and 

<<  Captain  Thomas  Hamlin,  in  the  brig  Ricovery,  dien  in  the  Gulf  Stream,  was  set  lotlie 
northward  104  miles,  in  the  S4  hours  of  the  3<^'.ii  March,  1820.  The  ship's  place,  at  noon, 
28°  4'  N.  79°  50'  W.  To  the  north-eastwardj^  on  the  next  day,  without  the  stream,  in  lat. 
29°  35' long.  77°  25',  the  current  was  found  to  nave  set  only  11  miles  north,  but  considerably 
more  to  the  eastward. 

On  the  l6th  February,  1818,  the  ship  JUiitr.*,  andur  the  same  commander,  was  at  the  back  of 
thd  Maternillo  Bank,  and  no  northerly  current  was  found ;  and  nearly  two  <jegrees  fartficr 
eastward,  in  28°  7'  N.  and  76"  58'  W.  the  current,  in  24  houi-s,  had  set  3'  S.  and  14'  E.  The 
ship  was,  therefore,  evidently  in  the  off-set  from  the  Gulf  Stream. 

In  proceeding  onward,  towards  Ireland,  in  March,  Copt.  Hamlin  passed  about  four  dib- 
greesto  the  northward  of  the  Azores,  and  was  favoured  by  an  easterly  current  from  the  pa- 
rallel of  35^°,  and  meridian  of  57°,  until  he  reached  the  Saltcrs,  on  the  S.  £.  coast,  where 
his  differences  amounted  to  3°  36'  E. 

Captain  Hamlin,  in  the  Recovery,  on  his  passage  outward  to  Halifex,  September,  1S19, 
found  the  current  westerly,  from  45'  th  30'  per  day,  between  the  parallels  of  51"  and  46°, 
long.  29°  to  37°.  A  gale,  from  the  28th  to  the  30th  Sept.  disturbed  the  ship's  course  in  about 
43°  N.  and  41°  W.  after  which,  to  the  eastward  of  the  Newfoundland  Bank,  the  current  wfts 
found  to  set  strongly  to  the  eastward.  The  ship  passed  over  the  bank  in  the  parallel  of  43° ; 
the  current  still  strong  to  the  eastward  ;  apparently  the  Gulf  Stream.  The  ktcovery  thence 
proceeded  to  the  southern  edge  of  Banquereau,  still  finding  a  ^rong  easterly  current,  bui 
with  diminiifihed  strength,  which  continued  thence  to  the  Bank  of  Sable  Island. 

The  brig  afterwards  proceeded  firora  Halifax  to  Jama- ra;  and  on  the  22dof  Nov.  1819,  in 
40°  N.  62°  W.  found  a  slight  current  to  the  southward ;  which,  in  the  parallel  of  26°  to  23°, 
near  the  meridian  of  64°,  had  changed  to  the  eastward ;  but,  on  approaching  the  Silver  Key 
FassHge,  a  el^ht  current  to  the  westward  apce^red  to  prevfil. 


20 


ni.UN'r  S  AMERICAN  COAHt  PII.OI. 


^,« 


■H  I 


40°,  from  the  lonijitudo  of  60°  to  tliat  of  09<^.  And  I  hnvtr  cifffn,  aliout  (lie  lati- 
tml«'  of  86°  or  37^,  and  alioutthe  ahovc  longitudf,  found  a  strong  rurrent  to  th»^ 
«rtuth  and  S.  W.  Therefore  ships  from  Europr,  bound  t«»  Anmiica,  phould  en- 
deavour to  inak»'.  the  passage^either  to  the  southward  of  hititude  37°,  or  to  tlj<^ 
northward  of  latitude  40°;  that  is  to  say,  when  as  far,  or  to  the  westward  of  thr 
Banks  of  Newfoundland,  th^y  should,  as  much  as  possible,  avoid  beating  against 
the  wind  to  the  westward,  between  the  latitudes  of  37°  and  40°. 

Upon  soundings,  along  the  foasts  of  Georgia,  Carolina,  Virginia,  New-Jersey, 
and  New- York,  the  current  runs,  in  general,  parallel  to  the  shore ;  and  is,  in  gene- 
ral, influenced  by  the  wind,  which  mostly  prevails  from  between  the  south  and 
west,  producing  a  slow  current  of  about  one  or  a  half  knot  to  the  N.  E.;  but 
when  the  N.  and  E.  winds  prcvoil,  the  current  along  shore  to  the  S.  W.  will  fre- 
quently run  two  knots;  on  which,  the  pilots  of  this  coast  remark,  that  the  south 
and  S.  W.  currents,  though  they  but  seldom  happen,  yet  they  are  always  strouR- 
cr  than  those  to  the  northward,  which  ajre  more  frecjucnt.  It  is  probable  the 
tides  may  have  some  influence  on  these  curren|(i,  particnkirly  near  the  entrance 
of  the  great  bays  and  inlets.  The  Hood  on  this  coast  coinos  from  the  N.  E.  In 
the  months  of  April  and  May  I  have  observed,  on  crossing;  the  Gulf  Stream,  in 
the  latitude  of  Cape  Henry,  tlnit,  when  near  tlie  inside  of  the  Stream,  the  water 
begins  to  colour  of  a  deeper  green ;  and  thence  to  the  edge  of  soundings  there  is 
a  strong  current  to  the  castwaril.  The  colour  of  the  water  from  green,  turns  to 
muddy  wlu:n  on  soundings,  the  current  still  continuing  until  within  the  influence 
of  the  tide  ;  this  eastern  current  ia,  no  doubt,  occasioned  iby  the  discharge  of  wa- 
ter out  of  tiie  Chesapeake,  by  the  floods  from  the  snow  meiting  in  the  country ; 
and  it  prevails,  in  some  degree,  throughout  thtrycar,  but  its  enect  is  greater  at 
this  time.  It  is  probable  that  a  similar  current  prevails  oif  the  mouth  of  thu 
Delaware. 

Round  the  eii-;t  end  of  Long  Island,  and  thence  to  the  eastward  round  Nan- 
tucket Shoals,  across  George's  Dank  to  Cape  Sable,  a  strong  tide  runs ;  the  flood 
setting  to  the  north  and  we&t,  in  order  to  fill  up  the  bays,  rivers,  and  inlets,  and 
the  ebb  the  contrary.  The  tides  that  set  across  George's  Bank  into  the  Bay  of 
Fundy,  are  very  much  influenced  by  the  winds,  particularly  if  after  a  strong  S. 
or  S.  E.  wind,  it  should  suddenly  change  to  W.  or  N.  W.  (circumstances  that  of- 
ten happen,)  ships  will  then  find  themselves  drifted  by  the  outset  50  or  60  miles 
in  the  24  hours,  or  more,  to  the  S  E.  The  indraught  is  also  grer.t  with  S.  or 
S.  £.  winds,  which  ought  to  be  paid  particular  attention  to. 

Upon  the  Nova-Scotia  coast  the  currents  run  parajfe)  to  the  shore,  but  more 

'frequent  from  the  eastward  than  from  the  westward,  particularly  in  the  spring ; 

the  southerly  wlrl*"  force  them  upon  the  shore  by  the  water  running  in  to  fill  up 

the  bays  and  inleu ;  and  the  N.  and  N.  W.  winds  have  the  same  effect  in  forcing 

them  <  f  shore.    A  regtdar  tide  liere  runsiitlong  shore :  the  flood  from  E.  N.  E. 


•v   • 


OBAF.    Z. 


COAST  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

Directions  to  go  to  the  eastward  of  the  island  q/'Campo  Bello,  between  the 
said  island  and  the  *Wolf  Islands,  and  up  tlie  Bay  of  Passaraaquoildy.f 

THE  Bay  of  Passamaquoddy  divides  the  United  States  from  that  of  the  Bri- 
tisli  territory,  the  western  side  uf  which  is  distinguished  by  a  lij!;ht-h»)use  on  West 
(^iioddy  Head.  If  bound  to  the  river  of  Passamaquoddy,  in  a  large  yessui,  your 
best  way  is  to  go  to  the  eastward  of  Cainpo  Bello,  keeping  your  course  JN.  E.  by 
K.  which  will  carry  you  to  the  Wolf  Islands,  distant  about  8  leagues.  The 
Wolves  lie  about  E.  N-  E.  from  Campo  Belbt ;  and  when  the  passage  between 
Cainpo  Bello  and  the  White  Ilorae  bears  W.  N.  W.  you  must  steer  W.  N.  W. 
leaving  the  White  Horse  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  keep  Campo  Bello  island 
best  on  board.  The  White  Horse  is  a  lurge  white  rock,  which  lies  off  the  N.  E. 
end  of  Campo  Bello.  You  will  see  the  <lne  harbours  of  Harbour  Delute  and 
Fryer's  Bay,  on  the  west  side  of  (Jampo  Bellci  island,  and  at  its  S.  W.  end  lien 
Snug  Cove,  another  good  harbour.  Off  the  N.  E.  end  of  Campo  Bello  also  lies 
Head  Harbour,  easy  of  access.  From  Campo  Bello  Island  to  Moose  Island,  the 
course  is  W.  S.  W.  distant  £  leagues,  where  you  ma/'anchor  in  3  or  10  fathoms, 
muddy  bottom.  Here  is  the  best  harbour  in  the  United  States  for  making  dry 
(locks,  as  you  may  have  them  cither  on  the  south  Of  3Ioose  Island,  or  30  or  40 
miles  up  Scoodic  river.  Common  tides  rise  here  £5  feet.  At  full  and  change  it 
h  high  water  at  half  past  11  o'clock  at  Moose  Island,  and  runs,  when  strongest, 
between  Moose  Island  and  Marble  IsUuid,  and  between  Deer  Island  and  Campo 
Bello,  nearly  5  miles  an  hour.  In  the  western  passage,  common  tides  rise  from 
20  to  25  feet. 

Vessels  from  the  southward,  when  bound  up  for  this  bay,  should  make  for  the 
western  coast,  or  that  of  the  United  States,  as  it  is  the  most  clear,  and  the  flood 
most  favourable,  being  from  7  to  8  miles  wide:  both  shores  bold,  the  depth 
quickly  incr-^asing,  on  each  side,  from  12  to  70  and  75  fathoms;  the  greatest 
depth  near  Manan,  where  you  haul  quickly  from  10  to  75  fathoms. 

There  are  three  passages  into  Pnasaraaquoddy  Bay,  namely,  the  Western  Pas- 
sage, the  Ship  Channel  or  Middle  Passage,  and  the  Eastern  Passage.  The  first 
is  that  between  the  Isle  of  Campo  Bello  and  the  main  land  to  the  west.  Middle 
Passage  lies  between  Campo  Bello  and  Deer  Island  ;  and  the  Eastern  Passage 
is  to  the  eastward  and  northward  of  both  islands. 


*  The  WolveBjOr  Wolf  Island,  which  lie  9  miles  to  the  N.  E.  from  Grand  Manan,  arc  from 
f)0  to  100  feet  in  height,  steep  and  bold.  The  passages  between  them  are  deep,  and  they 
3  Hbrd  temporary  shelter,  in  the  depth  of  from  20  to  1 2  Atthoms.  Between  Manan  and  these 
isles,  the  depths  vary  from  70  to  40  fat1jir>ms,  bottom  of  ooze  and  mud. 

i  There  are  three  rivers  which  fall  into  Passamaquoddy  bay :  the  largest  is  called  by  the 
modern  Indians  the  Scoodic,  but  by  Demons  and  Champlains,  Etchemins.  Its  main  source 
id  near  Penobscot  river.  The  mouth  of  the  river  has  25  fathoms  water,  and  the  land  is  vcrv 
bluir.  ' 

In  November,  1817,  the  commissioners  appointed  by  the  respective  governments  anderthe 
treaty  of  Ghent,  (the  last  treaty  of  peace,)  decided  that  Moose,  Dudley,  and  Frederick  lalands, 
in  the  Bay  of  Passamaquoddy,  do  belong  to  the  United  States ;  and  that  all  the  other  Islands 
in  the  same  bay,  with  Grand  Manan,  in  the  bay  of  Fundy,  do  belong  to  Great  Britain,  by  vir> 
tue  of  the  treaty  of  peace  of  1783.  The  citizens  of  the  United  States  continue  to  enjoy  the 
privilege  of  navigating  through  the  &bip  channels  between  Deer  Ish^>d  and  Oanpo  Bctlo, 


).;> 


1JJ.«NT  S  AKiSRIGAIf  COAST  PIL«T. 


if  buutul  into  the  fTestem  Paaaage,  fivt  a  birth  t>  th?  Sail  Rocks,  whicli  air 
t  \vc)  remnrkable  rocks  that  lie  about  half  a  mile  frotxi  West  Q,uoddy  Head,  and,  at 
a  distance,  resemble  a  sliip.  To  the  eastward  of  these,  there  is  a  whirlpool.  In 
])as^:in{;  here,  it  is  requisite  to  giire  these  objects  a  birth  of  half  or  three-quartern 
uf  a  mile  before  you  haul  in.  After  passing  them,  steer  to  the  westward,  keep- 
iii{;  nearest  to  the  south  shore,  for  two  and  a  half  or  three  miles,  where  you  may 
come  to  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  well  sheltered,  either  by  day  or  night.  You 
must  not  proceed  higher,  as  a  rocky  bar  stretches  across,  which  is  dry  at  low 
water.  Here  a  pilot  may  be  obtained,  on  firing  a  gun,  and  making  the  usual  sig- 
nal, who  will  take  the  ship  to  Snug  Cove,  or  Moose  Island,  whence  another  may 
be  obtained  for  St.  Andrews,  or  the  rirer  of  Scoodic. 

Between  the  Wolves  and  the  island  of  Gampo>BelIo  there  is  a  depth  of  from  50 
to  60  fathoms.  With  the  latter  bearing  S.  S.  E.  or  S.E.  there  \n  a  depth  of  19 
and  SO  fathoms,  where  ships  may  anchor  securely  from  all  winds.  The  course 
thence  to  Moose  Island  is  W.  S.  W.  S  lei^ues. 

If  bound  from  Moose  Island  up  the  river  tScoodic,  as  you  pass  Todd's  Head,  (which 
is  half  a  mile  N.  E.  from  the  town  landing  on  Eastport^)  give  it  a  birth  of  half  a 
mile,  as  a  ledge  of  rocks  lies  off  it.  Having  passed  this  Head,  the  course  and 
distance  to  Cuk  Point  or  Devil's  Head,  will  be  N.  by  W.  8  leagues ;  in  going 
which  distance,  (24  miles,)  you  nass  Fross*  Ledge  on  your  larboard  hand, 
six  miles  from  Todd''s  Head,  ana  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  land; 
when,  continuing  your  N.  by  W.  course  5  leagues,  you  will  come  to  Robinstoum, 
two  miles  above  which,  off  a  small  island,  from  which  It  bears  N.  E.  is  a  shoal 
on  your  larboard  hand,  and  to  avoid  it  you  must  keep  your  starboard  hand 
best  on  board,  till  you  come  up  with  Neutral  'fsland,  which  you  leave  bn  your 
larboard  hand,  one-fourth  of  a  mile  distant ;  and  your  course  from  this  to 
the  Devil's  Head,  (before  mentioned,)  which  you  leave  on  your  larlaard  hand, 
is  N.  N.  W.  3  miles.  WheOjyou  have  passed  the  De^riVg  Head,  your  course  is 
W.  N.  W.  1  league,  when  ^u  will  come  to  a  large  ledge  of  rocks  that  you 
must  leave  your  larboard  hand,  which  is  bare  at  two  hours  ebb,  and  extends 
half  way  across  the  river.  K^ep  your  'starboard  hand  on  board,  and  when  you 
pass  this  ledge,  your  course  is  W.  S.  W.  distant  one  mile  to  Tumer^s  Point ;  attd 
fromsaid  point  to  the  harbour,  your  course  is  N.  W.  by  N.  distant  .5  miles,  and 
the  next  reach  to  the  Falls  is  W.  N.  W.  distant  one  mile ;  the  tide  flows  here  25 
feet,  and  there  are  only  6  or  7  feet  in  the  channel  at  low  water,  with  long  flats 
of  mud  on  both  sides.  The  Devil's  Head  may  be  seen  the  distance  of  10  or  lii 
miles. 

There  are  several  good  harbours  on  the  west  side  of  this  river,  and  all  the  diffi- 
culty is  the  great  depth  of  water,  which  is,  in  general,  from  18  to  24  fathoms. 
There  is  also  a  good  harbour  on  your  starboard  hand  going  into  Deer  Island, 
which  lies  to  the  southward  of  St.  Andrews,  2  leagues  distant.  It  may  be  easily 
known,  as  there  is  a  large  bay  between  the  two  islands,  which  V'^.a  N.  E.  from 
the  river  St.  Croix,  3  leagues  distant.    St.  Croix  lies  in4at.  45°  7'  N. 

St  Anorews.— TAc  tmvnand  harbour  of  St.  Andrews  lie  on  the  eastern  side  of 
tlic  entrance  of  the  Scoodic.  The  town  is  a  pleasant  little  ])lace,  and  the  harbour 
being  good,  many  ships  load  timber  here,  which  is  generally  much  longer  than 
of  Nova- Scotia.  The  merchants  of  tliis  toAvn  load  timber  also  at  other  places; 
viz.  at  Oak  Bay  on  the  Scoodic,  and  at  Rushabe-e,  Didiquash,  and  Magadovick, 
on  the  N.  E.  side  of  Passamaqiioddy  Bay,  all  being  excellent  and  very  convenient 
barbours.    In  the  bay,  in  general^^lhere  are  from  17  to  25  fathoms  water. 

REMARKS. 

The  prevailing  winds  throughout  the  whole  coaet  of  Nova  Scotia  arc  from  W.  S.  W.  to 
S.  W  nearly  as  steady  as  trade  winds,  except  during  the  Bummer  months,  when  they  ore  nt- 
ther  more  southerly,  accompanied  with  but  little  intcrmisxioa,  by  fog.  ^vhich  requires  unortb- 
ivesterly  wind  to  disperse  it.  It  is,  therefore,  recommended  not  to  leave  an  anchorage,  without 
making  arrangements  to  reach  another  before  dark,  or  the  appearance  of  a  fog  coming  on. 
which,  with  a  S.  W.  wind,  is  so  sudden  thut  you  arc  unawares  enveloped  in  it ;  nor  to  keep 
at  sea  during  the  night,  if  it  can  be  avoided.  Whenever  the  wind  blows  dirwtly  off  the  lant^ 
(he  fog  is  soon  dispcrwd. 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


23 


'Birections  for  the  Eastern  Coast  j  when  you  fall  in  with  Grand  Manan*, 
^  or  Mount  Desert  Hills. 

These  places  may  easily  be  known  from  the  western  coast.  IMount  Doaert 
Hills  may  he  seen  20  leagues  at  sea,  and  when  within  i  or  ;» leagues  of  them,  you 
may  see  Scuttoc  Hills  bearing  about  N.  N.  E.  The  tid«>  of  flood  sets  here 
E.N.  E.  and  theebt)  VV.  S.  W.  but  as  soon  as  you  are  9  or  10  leagues  from  the 
land,  the  current  runs  in  general  to  the  S.  W.  westward. 

If  you  fall  in  with  Mount  Desert  rock,  which  lies  S.  6  leagues  from  Mount  De- 
sert hills,  you  must  observe  the  tide  of  flood  sets  W.  S.  W.  along  shore,  till  you 
come  to  the  Fox  Islands ;  but  the  same  flood  runs  up  to  the  northward,  into 
Blue  Hill  bay,  Union  River,  and  flsle-au-haut  bay. 

The  next  remarkable  land  is  Penobscot  hills,  which  you  will  see  over  the  Fox 
Islands,  bearing  from  the  N.  W.  to  the  N.  N.  W.  of  them.     When  yoii  pass  the 


*  Grand  Manan. — Tfala  island,  Hjpmiles  in  lepgth,  by  7  in  breadth,  is  included  in 
Charlotte  Coanty,  in  the  province  of  New-Branswick.  It6  northern  point  is  in  latitude 
44-^  54'  and  longitude  46^  4.5'.  The  nearest  distance,  from  the  opposite  coast  of  Maine,  is 
nearly  9  miles.  The  western  side  is  very  high ;  its  cliffs  being  nearly  perpendicular,  and 
about  600  feet  high  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  On  this  side  is  but  one  little  inlet,  (Dark  Cove,) 
ivhich  affords  shelter  for  boats  only.  The  northern  head  is  equally  abrupt  and  bold :  but  to 
tiie  eastward  of  it  is  Whole  Cove,  having  anchoring  ground,  with  25  to  15  fathoms,  in  which 
ships  may  stop  for  a  tide,  during  a  southerly  gale,  but  it  is  exposed  to  the  easterly  gales. 

To  the  S.  K.  of  Whale  Cove,  on  the  N-  fi.  aide  of  the  island,  is  Long  Island  Bay,  so  call- 
ed from  the  island  on  the  S.  fi.  side  of  iti^  The  N.  E.  point  of  this  bay,  called,  from  its  shape, 
the  Stedlow'a  Tail,  is  high,  bold,  rugged  and  barren.  Tiie  bay  is  open,  but  possesses  all  tht; 
advantages  of  a  harbour ;  the  bottom  is  wholly  of  mud,  excepting  a  ridge  of  rocks  and  gra- 
vel, that  shows  itself  within  the  Swallow's  Tail,  and  the  north  end  of  Long  Island  :  there  is, 
also,  a  small  cluster  of  sunken  rocks,  of  live  feet  at  low  water,  at  half  a  mile  from  Long 
Island  Point. 

Under  Long  Island,  and  opposite  to  the  beach,  ships  may  anchor,  even  locking  in  the  north 
end  of  Long  Island  with  (he  Swallow's  Tail,  oh  a  strong  muddy  bottom,  entirely  sheltered 
from  the  wind  and  sea.  In  the  northern  part  of  the  Bay,  bottom  of  stiff  clay,  vessels  have 
frequently  been  protected  during  a  severe  gale. 

Half  way  down,  on  the  eastern  coast  of  Grand  Manan,  is  Great  Duck  Island,  under  which 
there  is  good  ground ;  but  here  a  pilot  may  bo  required,  as  there  are  hidden  dangers  in  the  vi- 
cinity. To  the  south-eastward  of  Duck  Island  lie  Koss,  Cheney,  and  White  Head  islands  ; 
the  latter  occupied  by  a  skilful  and  uitelligent  pUot:  from  these  the  rocks  and  foul  ground  ex> 
tend  3  leagues  to  the  S.  by  E. 

On  the  southern  bank  of  Grand  Manan,  the  most  dangerous  ledge  is  that  called  the  Old 
Proprietor,  vhich  lies  two  leagues  S.  S.  E.  from  White  Head  lahind,  and  covers  the  space  of 
half  an  acre  at  low  water ;  it  is  dry  at  half-ebb.  When  covered,  the  tide  sets  directly  over  it, 
at  the  rate  of  four  miles  an  hour.  At  three  m'.'es  more  to  the  S.  R.  is  another  shoal.  Clerk's 
Ground;  and  east  from  it,  nearly  four  miles,  lies  the  Roaring  BuU,  a  bank  of  S  fathoms,  over 
^vhich  is  a  heavy  and  dangerons  ripple.  The  S.  W.  head  of  Manan,  open  of  all  the  islets  off 
the  south  side  of  that  island,  will  lead  clear  to  the  southward  of  these  dangers.  I'hc  north- 
easternmost  high  land,  open  of  the  islets  on  the  east,  leads  clear  to  the  eastward  of  them. 
During  an  easterly  wind  the  tide-rips  are  impassable. 

The  TAree  Islands,  {Rents,)  the  southernmost  of  the  Manan  Islets,  are  low  and  ledgy. 
The  eastern  side  of  the  largest  is  bold  to  the  rocks,  which  are  at  all  times  visible.  Off  the 
N.  W.  of  these  rocks  is  a  ledge  called  tke  Cmistable,  dry  at  low  water.  These  islets,  with 
Green  Islets  to  the  no^ward  of  them,  iS6ti  occasional  anchorage,  in  from  14  to  7  fathoms, 
Wood  Island,  on  the  south  side  of  Manan,  and  the  8.  W.  end  of  the  latter,  form  a  bay  con- 
tainmg  exeellent  ground.  The  upper  put  and  hei>'i  nf  it,  in  a  gale  of  wind,  are  places  of  sc» 
curity ;  and  here  supplies,  if  requisite,  may  be  cLcaineL  firom  the  inhabitants. 

Between  Wood  Island,  on  the  West,  and  Russ  Islan<],  on  the  east,  is  tho  passage  to  Grand 
Harbour,  a  shallow  muddy  basin.  It  is  a  convenient  pL>  :e  'br  ships  without  anchor  or  cable, 
as  they  may  lie  in  the  mud,  in  perfect  security.  At  tlie  entrance,  <«  hich  is  narrow,  the  depths 
are  from  7  to  5  fathoms,  bottom  of  clay. 

t  The  Isle-au-haut  is  remarkable  land,  composed  of  high  steep  cliffs,  and  makes  with  a 
large  bay  on  each  side  of  it;  has  good  landing  at  its  eastern  end,  and  anchorage  half  a  iiiilc 
off,  in  18  fathoms,  with  the  low  point  bearing  about  N.  E.  by  N.  where  is  also  a  stream  of 
water  runninp;  into  the  aea     The  b^est  part  of  the  island  is  in  the  middlr.  antl  roi>rcs<<Y»lii  a 


•»,._ 


24 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


y? 

'\^'i 


A 

HWBi 

l'  ^' 

ffl{ 

m 

( 

'IS 

I^le-au-haut,  in  steering  W.  S.  W.  you  will  leave  Mantinicus  Islands,  and  Manfi- 
nicus  Sen!  Islands  to  the  southward  of  you.  If  at  night,  or  thick  weather,  it  is 
advisable  to  go  to  the  southward  of  all  these  islands,  unless  you  are  well  acquaint- 
ed. When  you  pass  to  the  westward  of  Mantinicus  Islands,  the  main  passage 
from  sea  to  Penobscot  bay  lies  about  N.  by  W.  If  you  go  into  this  passage,  you 
leave  Mantinicus  Island  on  your  starboard,  and  the  two  Green  Islands  on  your 
larboard  hand,  steering  north-westerly  4  leagues;  and  if  bound  up  the  bay,  fol- 
low your  directions  for  Penobscot  bay. 

If  you  come  in  from  sea,  and  make  the  island  of  Manheigen,  on  which  is  a 
light-house,  (described  in  page  34,)  when  it  bears  N.  or  N.  N.  W.  it  appears  like 
two  islands,  but  when  it  bears  east  or  west,  it  appears  in  one  island,  Damiscove 
Islands  lie  to  the  W.  by  N.  of  it,  which  are  all  bare  of  trees  except  the  north  part. 
The  rocks  called  Bantam  Ledge,  lie  two  miles  from  Damiscove,  W.  S.  W. 
When  you  are  6  or  7  leagues  off  at  sea,  you  will  have  70  or  80  fathoms  water,  with 
a  S.  S.  W.Vurrent.  In  general,  between  Damiscove  and  Manheigin  island, 
the  flood  tide  parts,  and  sets  E.  N.  E.  to  tfle  eastward,  and  YJ.  S.  W.  to  the 
westward,  as  far  as  the  island  of  Seguine,  and  to  the  northward  up  to  Broad  Bay, 
Shccpscut  and  Kennebeck  rivers,  and  the  ebb  sets  the  contrary'  waj 


Directions  from  Machias  to  Passamaquoddy.*^ 

When  vou  leave  Machias,  and  are  bound  to  Passamaquoddy,  bring  tirass 
Island  to  bear  S.  W.  by  W.  and  steer  N.  E.  byE.  iE.  distant  9  leagues  to  West 
Passamaquoddy  light-house,  near  which  is  an  Alarm  BELii,  which  will,  during 
foggy  weather,  strike  ten  times  in  a  minute,  unless  neglected,  which  is  too  often 
th3  case,  as  the  machinery  is  out  of  order,  and  it  is  now  rung  by  hand ;  but  when 
rung,  the  sound  may,  when  calm,  be  heard  five  miles.  But  if  the  wind  takes 
you  to  the  eastward,  there  is  a  good  harbour,  about  two  leagues  to  the  N.E.  of  Cross 
Island.  This  harbour  bears  due  west  from  tiie  middle  of  Grand  Manan  islar  ?',  and 
is  called  Little  Rivci",  but  you  cannot  see  it  except  you  are  near  the  north  shore. 
You  must  not  run  in  for  it  before  it  bears  N.  W.  or  N.  N.  W.  There  is  a  ItlulT 
point  of  rocks  on  the  starboard  hand,  as  you  go  in,  and  an  island  in  the  middle 
of  the  harbour.  As  you  pass  in,  leave  the  island  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  when 
you  have  passed  it  half  a  mile,  you  may  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  muddy  bot- 
tom, and  remain  safe  from  all  winds.  Your  course  from  this  habour  to  W^st  Pas- 
samaquoddy light,  is  N.  E*.  by  E.  i  E.  distant"?  leagues.  When  you  come  from 
the  S.  W.  and  are  bound  into  West  Passamaquoddy,  you  must  give  the  Sail 
Rocks,  before  mentioned,  a  birth  of  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  before  you  haul  in 
for  the  harbour,  as  there  is  a  whirlpool  to  the  eastward  of  them.  The  bay  is  about 
one  league  from  this  point ;  it  is  high  water  here  at  ftill  and  change  of  the  moon, 
about  half  past  1 1  o'clock. 

There  is  a  good  bay  that  lies  about  W.  S.  W.  from  this  point,  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  distant,  where  you  may  anchor  ;  hut  it  is  not  safe  for  any  stranger  to  go 
over  the  bar  without  a  pilot,  which  may  be  easily  obtained.  The  bar  bears  N.  N. 
W.  from  the  anchoring  ground,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant.'  " 

When  up  as  far  as  Allen's  Island,  if  you  leave  it  with  the  tide  of  flood,  steer  N. 
N.  E.  3  miles,  when  you  will  have  the  tide  againt  you  four  hours ;  and  two  hours  be- 
fore high  water  the  tide  sets  S.^S.  W.  till  you  come  dov/n  to  the  Collectors 
Island,  when  it  sets  over  the  bar  9.  S.  E.  The  tide  rises  here  25  feet.  There  is 
a  fine  cove  on  the  south  end  of  Moose  Island,  where  a  ship  of  500  tons  mav 
he,  moored  head  and  stern,  safe  from  all  winds,  but  the  anchors  arc  very  murK 
exposed  with  the  wind  to  the  south-east. 

*  PaflSKinuquoddy  light  is  situated  on  West  Quoddv  Head.  The  lontern  is  elevated  90 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  net,  and  contains  a  fixrd  ligntj  which  may  be  seen  at  the  distnnee 
df  7  leagues,  in  clear  weather. 


n- 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


25 


Directions  for  Titmanan  Light-House.* 

Ill  coming  from  the  westward,  bound  to  Pigeon  Hill,  or  Bowbear  Harbovr, 
bring  the  light  to  bear  S.  W.  and  run  for  it,  giving  it  a  birth  of  one-fourth  of  a 
mile,  and  then  steer  N.  ^  W.  4  miles  :  in  steering  this  course,  you  will  leave  the 
Egg  Rock  on  your  starboard  hand,  when  you  will  make  the  westerly  shore,  giv- 
ing it  a  birth  of  half  a  mile ;  then  steer  N.  N.  E.  one  mile,  when  you  will  be  op- 
posite Dyer's  house,  where  you  may  anchor  safe  from  all  winds,  in  3  fathol«s 
water. 

In  coming  from  the  eastward,  bound  to  Dyer's  Bay,  give  Titmanan  Island  light 
three-fourths  of  a  mile  birth,  leaving  it  on  your  starboard  hand ;  bring  the  light  to 
bear  N.  E.  three- fourths  of  a  mile  distant,  then  steer  N.  by  W.  which  will  carry 
you  into  the  mouth  of  the  bay,  leaving  a  large  diy  ledge  on  your  larboard  hand : 
when  abreast  of  this  ledge,  which  is  bold  to,  give  it  a  birth  of  &  or  6  rods,  th^'ii 
steer  N.  i  E.  4  or  5  miles,  where  you  may  anchor  safe  from  all  wintls,  in  4  or  i 
fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

Geld^borough  harbour  lies  N.  N.  W.  from  Titmanan  light-house,  two  leagues 
distantyiieaving  one  island,  covered  with  trees,  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  two  on 
your  larboard  hand ;  then  your  course  is  N.  N.  W.  1^  mile,  then  N.  i  E.4  miles, 
which  will  bring  you  up  with  Goldsborough  point,  where  you  may  anchor  safe 
from  all  »vinds,  in  3  or  4  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

In  coming  from  the  eastward,  bound  to  Prospect  harbour,  give  Titmanan 
light  a  birth  of  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  bring  it  to  bear  E.  S.  E.  and  steer 
W.  N.  W.  4  leagues,  which  will  bring  you  up  with  the  western  shore,  or  Birch  head 
harbour.  In  running  the  above  course,  you  will  leave  Cranberry  Rock  point  on 
your  starboard  hand,  Moulton's  ledge,  and  the  two  black  ledges  on  your  Ictrboard 
liand.  Your  course,  from  Cranberry  Rock  point  in,  is  N.  W.  by  N.,  In  case 
you  should  not  make  the  point,  continue  your  ccurse  W.  N.  W.  until  you  make 
the  western  shore,  giving  it  a  birth  of  half  a  mile,  then  steer  N.  N.  E.  until  you 
open  the  harbour,  then  steer  N.  W.  which  course  will  ci  ..y  you  safe  in.  If -you 
fall  in  with  Shuttock  island,  and  are  bound  to  Prospect,  give  it  a  birth  of  three- 
fourths  of  a  mile,  then  steer  N.  N.  E.  Avhich  course  will  carry  you  safe  into  the 
harbour.  In  running  this  course,  you  will  leave  the  two  black  ledges  on  your 
starboard  hand,  giving  them  a  birth  of  three-fourths  of  a  mile. 

Moulton's  ledge  bears  from  the  light-house  W.  by  N.  4  miles  distant;  tliis 
ledge  is  not  bare,  except  at  Ioav  tides:  strangers  should  not  approach  too  near  it; 
it  lies  due  south  from  Goldsborough  llarbour.  There  is  a  sunken  ledge  that  lies 
S.  E.  by  E.  from  the  light-house,  IS2.  miles  distant,  on  which  there  is  but  5  feet,  at 
low  water.  ^ 

S.  S.  W.  4  miles  distant  from  the  light-house,  lies  a  sunken  ledge,  on  which 
there  are  12  feet  at  low  water. 


Directions  from  Mount  Desert,f  to  Goldsborough,  and  laMachias'. 

In  going  from  Mount  Desert  to  Goldsborough,  you  must  steer  E.  ^  N*  for 
§Shuttock  Point,  4  leagues,  where  is  an  island,  which  you  may  pass  either  side  of, 
but  it  is  best  to  leave  it  on  youi'  larboard  hand,  and  then  steer  N.  E.  about  i)i 
leagues,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  Goldsborough  Harbour.    You  will  see 


*  Titmanan  light-honso  stands  on  the  S.  E.  part  of  Titmanan  Island.  It  is  a  stone  build- 
ing, 25  feet  high ;  contains  afixetl  light,  from  lamps  5'i  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

t  Mount  Desert  Island  is  about  15  mileg  long,  and  12  broad.  It  is  intersected  in  the  mid- 
die  by  the  water  flowing  into  the  south  side  from  the  sea.  There  are  two  considerable  islands 
on  the  S.  E.  side  of  Mount  Desert  Island,  called  Cranberry  Islands,  which  assist  in  forming 
n  harbour  in  the  Gulf,  which  sets  up  on  the  south  side  of  the  island. 

t  Machias  light-house  is  built  on  Libby  Island,  which  lies  on  the  western  entrance  to 
Machias  Bay,  bO  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  a  revolving  light. 

§  There  arc  five  bills  on  Shuttock,  remarkable  from  any  hills  in  the  eastern  country,  and  af; 
«.  distance  they  appear  round. 


ie 


BLUNt  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


I 


ii 


m 


ii 

If '  ill 


three  Islands  which  lie  in  the  mouth  of  the  harhour ;  you  must  leave  them  oYi 
your  larboard  hand,  and  go  in  the  eastern  passage.  In  standing  in  for  this  plat^Or 
you  will  see  Titmanan  Island,  which  has  a  light  house  on  it,  containing  a  Jixed 
light,  already  described,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand.  North  from 
Titmanan,  one  eighth  of  a  mile  distant,  lies  a  ledge,  bare  at  half  tide,  which  you 
keep  within  half  a  cable's  length  of  when  going  over  the  bar,  which  you  pass  on 
your  starboard  hand,  when  bound  eastward,  at  which,  as  you  pass  the  bar,  Shut- 
tock  island  will  be  a  handspike's  length  open  to  the  southward  of  ^Shuttock  point, 
hut  to  go  over  this  bar  requires  a  pilot.  When  near  the  bar,  and  up  with  Tit- 
manan Island,  keep  E.  S.  E.  one  half  a  mile  distant,  Avhich  will  clear  a  ledge 
having  9  feet  water  at  low  water,  that  lies  E.  of  the  channel  going  over  the  bar, 
one-fourth  of  a  mile  distant.  There  is  a  bar  that  runs  from  the  shore  to  this 
little  island,  which  is  about  1  league  from  the  land.  This  bar  has  3i  fathoms 
at  high  water,  and  9  feet  at  low  water. 

If  you  are  bound  to  Machias  or  Passamaquoddy,  your  course  from  Mount 
Desert  is  E.  12^  leagues,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  fMoose  Peck  light,  which 
you  leave  on  your  larboa^rd  !iand;  then  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  for  Machias  light, 
4jf  leagues.  In  steering  the  above  courses  and  distances,  you  pass  by  nott^iing  but 
islands  on  your  larboard  hand,  with  inlets  and  sundry  good  harbours,  |>leasant 
rivers,  Moose  Peck  Reach,  and  Chandler's  Hiver,  which  are  all  good  harbours, 
b\it  too  intricate  to  be  described  for  strangers  to  attempt  with  safety.  If  you  cannot 
sftier  your  courses  as  above  directed,  you  must  observe,  after  passing  Moose  Peck 
Headlight,  there  are  three  low  islands  to  the  S.W.  of  Grand  Manan  Island,  which  lie 
due  S.  E.  from  Machias,  called  Seal  Islands,  distant  4  leagues,  which  you  must  be 
carefiri  of  in-the  night.  You  may  see  the  island  of  Grand  Manan'6  leagues  before  you 
come  to  it,  and  when  it  bears  N.E.  these  islands  run  S.W.  from  Grand  Manan,  about 
fileagues  distant,  and  in  thick  weather,  if  you  make  these  islands,  you  may  run  for 
Machias  light,  bringing  the  S.  W.  end  of  Grand  Manan  to  bear  S.  E.  by  E.  and  then 
Tiiti  N.  W.  by  W.  for  the  entrance  of  Machias,  5  leagues  distant,  and  when  you  have 
passed  Cross  Island,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  you  may  steer 
N.  but  in  passing  Cross  Island,  you  must  be  careful  of  some  dangerous  ledges 
lying  off  it  li  miles,  in  a  S.  W.  direction.  In  steering  this  ■eourse,  yoit  will  leave 
a  large  v.hitc  rock  on  your  larboard  hand;  and  if  you  do  not  want  to  go  into  Ma- 
chias harbour,  you  may  haul  to  the  westward.  After  you  have  passed  this  rock 
about  half  a  mile,  bring  a  high  round  island  tliat  is  covered  with  trees  to  bear 
N.  when  you  may  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  muddy  bottom.  This  is  called  Jones' 
harbour,  but  if  you  mean  to  go  up  to  Machias,  you  must  keep  your  course  N. 
till  you  pass  a  round  high  island  on  your  larboard  hand,  when  you  may  shape 
your  course  W.  N.  W.  or  N.  W.  by  W.  for  a  point  that  is  covered  with  young 
birch  trees,  and  a  housd^n  it,  for  on  the  starboard  hand  there  is  nothing  but  flats 
and  shoals.  You  may  keep  your  larboard  hand  after  you  pass  this  house,  until 
the  river  opens  to  the  northward,  when  you  may  run  up  to  Cross  river,  where 
you  may  anchor  in  4  fathoms;  but  if  you  are  bound  up  to  the  S.  W.  mills,  you 
must  haul  away  to  the  westward.  When  you  get  up  with  Mr.  Parker's  house 
and  barn,  which  are  on  the  starboard  hand,  you  must  leave  the  barn  open  to  the 
southwestward  of  the  Pott-head.  This  Pot-head  is  a  large  hill  that  you  leave  on 
yniUr  starboard  hand.     [For  description  of  Grand  Manan,  see  page  23.] 


Sireetians  from  Long  Island  to  the  southwest  Harbour  of  Mount  Desert; 

Your  course  is  N.  N.  E.  distant  8^  leagues.    You  must  leave  the  two  Duck 
Islands  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  three  islands  on  your  larboard  hand.    It  is 


"'  Shuttock  Point  ibrms  the  easteni,  and  Mount  Desert  the  western  extreme  of  French- 
man's Baj. 

t  MooBo  Peck  Head  light  is  built  on  Ship  Harbour  Island,  and  contains  «  revolving  light. 
Ship  Harbour  Island  in  tte  toiddh)  Island  of  the  tbree. 


BLUNTS  ami:bican  coast  pilot. 


27 


not  safe  for  a  stranger  to  run  here  in  the  night,  us  there  ia  a  large  Ipdge  that  is 
covered  at  high  water,  and  bare  at  half  tide.    You  leave  this  ledge  on  your  star- 
board hand,  which  is  about  one  mile  from  the  harbour.    There  is  a  long  ledge 
on  the  larboard  hand,  which  runs  off  half  a  mile,  but  there  is  a  good  turning 
channel  between  them.     The  S.  W.  passage  is  fit  to  enter  even  with  a  large  vessel 
at  low  water,  keeping  nearest  the  starboard  hand  as  you  go  in,  for  there  is  a  long 
point  that  lies  about  half  a  mile  ofT  from  the  larboard  hand.    When  you  pass 
the  point  on  your  larboard  hand,  you  have  the  harbour  open,  and  must  bear  up 
N.  W.  or  W.  N.  W.  and  anchor  well  up  the  harbour  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  muddy 
bottom,  where  you  may  lie  safe  from  all  winds.    If  you  are  in  a  large  vessel,  and 
make  the  Isle-au-haut,  bring  it  to  bear  W.  by  S.  and  steer  E.  by  N.  10  leagi'f  s, 
which  course  and  distance  will  tarry  you  up  the  eastern  passage  going  into  Moiltit 
Desert.     You  must  leave  all  the  islands  to  the  northward,  and  go  to  the  north- 
ward of  Mount  Desert  rock,  which  lies  E.  S.  E.  from  the  Isle-au-haut,  S.  E.  fiom 
Long  Island,  and  S.  from  the  Duck  Islands.    When  you  bring  the  harbour  to  hpar 
W.  N.  W.  you  may  steer  directly  in,  for  you  may  go  about  %vith  a  first  rate  man- 
of-war  in  this  passage.    You  may  steer  m  this  channel,  with  a  fair  wind,  from 
W.  N.  W.  to  W.  by  N.  t5"  you  come  to  Langley's  Island,  which  lies  about  one 
league  up  the  harbour,  and  makes  the  starboard  hand  of  the  river  that  runs 
from  the  N.  E.     Be  careful  of  this  island,  as  there  is  a  sunken  ledge  of  rocks 
abreast  of  it,  near  half  a  mile  off.    The  river  above  mentioned  lias  water  erKTUgh. 
/or  any  ship  to  go  in,  and  is  a  safe  harbour. 


iMount  Desert. 


t^irections  for  sailing  through  Fox  Island  Pas^dgf' 

When  bound  from  the  westward,  and  intend  going  through  Fox  Island  pas* 
sage,  bring  'Owl's  head  light  to  bear  W.  by  S.  and  steer  E.  by  N.  from  Owl'!* 
head,  4  leagues  distant.    If  you  have  a  head  wind,  and  are  obliged  to  go  into* 
the  mouth  of  the  bay,  be  careful  of  a  ledge  of  rocks  that  bears  from  CrubtT^^ 
point  S.  W.  or  S.  W.  by  S.  called  Crabtree  Ledge,  distant  4  or  5  miles.    This  pas- 
sage has  rocks  on  both  sides ;  Crabtree  point  is  on  the  larboard  hand.    It  is  on  Ulte^ 
northern  Fox  Island,  and  there  is  a  long  point  of  rocks  near  one  league  to  the 
S-  W.  of  it.    This  passage  is  not  fit  ts  enter  in  the  night,  unless  you  are  well  ac- 
quainted.   When  you  get  in,  bring  Crabtr^^  point  to  bear  W.  S.  W.  and  steer  £. 
N.  E.  about  .S  leagues,  which  will  bring  you  to  Young's  Narrow.    In  steering  this 
course  you  will  make  two  large  bare  rocks,  called  the^ugar  Loaves,  which  yoru 
may  go  on  either  side  of,  but  to  follow  your  directions  you  must  leave  thein  oii 
your  starboard  hand,  and  also  be  careful  of  a  ledge  that  lies  about  north  one  third 
of  a  mile  from  them.    The  entrance  to  Young's  point  is  narrow  at  low  water,  off 
which  lies  a  ledge  of  rocks,  which  are  covered  at  high  water.   There  is  also  a  ^ustn- 
tity  of  sunken  rocks  at  the  larboard  hand,  near  a  mile  to  the  W.  N.  W.  which  lie 
off  the  Dumplins.   These  Dumplins  are  three  islands,  which  you  leave  on  your  lar- 
board hand.    Your  course  in  this  passage  is  E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.  keeping 
your  starboard  liand  on  boaxd.    When  you  pass  this  point  on  your  starboard 
hand,  you  must  keep  your  starboard  hand  on  board,  and  steer  E.  S.  E.  aboat 
two  miles,  when  you  ^ill  make  Deep  cove  on  your  starboard  hand,  which  lies  to 
the  eastward  of  a  very  high  biuff  of  rocks.    If  you  have  neither  cables  nomn- 
chors,  you  may  run  into  said  cove,  or  secure  your  vessel  with  the  main  or  fote- 
sheet,  OP  come  to  anchor  in  7  fathoms  water  off  the  said  cove.    "There  the  flood 
meets,  one  from  the  W.  N.  W.  the  other  from  the  E.  N.  E.  which  makes  an  eddy 
against  this  cove  and  high'and;  here  you  may  ride  safe  with  any  wind.     When 
you  leave  this  place,  and  are  bound  to  the  eastward,  you  steer  £.  S.  E.  and  keep 

*  Owl's  head,  a  headland  on  the  ivest  side  of  Penobscot  bay,  N.  by  T  from  White  Head 
light  in  the  State  of  Maine.  On  the  eastern  part  of  the  bead  is  a  light-house,  showing  a 
fixtd  light.  It  has  a  good  harbour  on  the  larboard  hand  as  you  go  to  the  eastward.  The  bar- 
bourjgiaftieB  with  a  (Rep  core^  I|aa  4  jhthoms  vnttr,  4iid  a  mq^  bottom.    (See  page  29-1 


Ii8 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  I'lLOT. 


your  starboard  hand  on  board  till  you  come  up  to  a  clear  spot  of  land  uheie  the 
trees  have  been  cut  off.  As  soon  as  said  spot  boars  W.  S.  W.  you  steer  E.  N.  E. 
for  the  middle  narrows.  When  you  draw  near  the  narrows,  you  will  sec  two  large 
white  rocks  in  the  middle  of  the  passage,  unless  at  high  water,  at  whi«h  time  they 
are  covered  about  one  hour,  but  may  be  seen  at  all  other  times  of  tide.  You  may 
go  on  either  side,  but  the  deepest  water  is  at  the  southward  of  them.  Continue 
your  course  E.  N.  E.  about  1  league,  when  you  must  keep  your  starboard  hand  on 
board,  as  there  are  several  sunken  rocks  and  ledges  on  your  larboard  hand,  which 
are  covered  at  high  water.  You  will  make  the  eastern  narrows  on  your  starboard 
hand,  and  as  soon  as  you  bring  it  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  you  may  run  through,  where 
you  will  have  a  fine  harbour,  which  is  safe  to  ride  in  with  all  winds  except  at 
E.  N.  E.  but  you  may  remain  in  the  west  passage  jvith  the  wind  at  E.  N.  E.  or 
anchor  at  the  northward  of  a  bare  island,  that  you  will  see  on  your  starboard 
hand  as  you  go  back  to  the  westward.  When  you  pass  the  eastern  passage  of 
Pox  island,  you  must  steer  E.  N.  E.  about  4  miles,  which  course  will  carry  yon 
into  a  large  bay  that  lies  between  Fox  island  and  the  Isle-au-haut.  This  bay  li«'s 
N.  and  S.  and  about  4  leagues  E.  and  W.  When  you  get  into  this  nay  from  the 
above  mentioned  passage,  and  are  bound  to  the  eastward  of  the  Isle-au-haut,  you 
may  steer  E.  S.  E.6  leagues,  which  course  will  carry  you  to  the  southward  of 
the  Isle-au-haut. 

N.  B.  When  you  come  from  the  westward,  and  pass  the  island  of  Manheigin, 
and  the  entrance  of  Penobscot  bay,  you  may  steer  E.  N.  E.  which  course  will 
carry  you  between  the  Fox  Islands  and  Matinicus  Islands,  leaving  all  the  Fox- 
Istands  on  your  larboard  hand,  but  bring  the  Isle-au-haut  to  bear  W.  N.  W.  and 
steer  E.  N.  E.  7  leagues  to  Long  Island,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand. 
If  you  are  bound  to  Blue  Hill  Bay,  or  Union  River,  as  soon  as  you  pass  Long 
Js'and,  you  will  open  a  large  Sound  to  the  N.  N.  \V.  which  course  you  are  to 

eer  7  leagues,  when  you  will  be  up  with  Robertson's  Island,  leaving  the  Ship 
^»iid  Barge*  on  your  larboard  hand.  Robertson's  Island  is  the  only  Islanc  near 
that  place  that  has  a  house  on  it.  The  south  part  of  the  island  is  clear  of  trees, 
on  which  the  house  stands.  When  you  come  near  the  south  part  of  the  island, 
give  it  a  birth  of  three  quarters  of  a  mile,  as  there  are  several  sunken  rocks  off 
said  point.  When  you  bring  this  island  to  bear  from  S.  W.  to  N.  W.  you  may 
anchor  in  6  or  7  fathoms  water,  muddy  bottom  ;  but  if  you  are  bound  to  Blue 
Hill  Bay,  you  may  stand  to  the  northward  direct  for  the  Blue  Hills,  which  you 
may  sec  10  or  15  leagues  off.  If  you  are  bound  for  Union  River,  you  had  better 
take  a  pilot  at  Robertson's  Island,  for  it  is  not  fit  for  a  stranger  to  go  without  one. 


Directions  for  White  Head  Ldght.jf 

Vessels  bound  from  the  southward,  and  intending  to  fall  in  with  White  Head 
liglit-house,  should  endeavour  to  take  their  departure  from  the  High  Land  of 
Cape  Cod,  on  which  is  a  light-house,  containing  Rjixed  light,  from  which  to  Man- 
heigin light,  the  course  is  N.N.E.i  E.  distant  S5i  leagues.  The  shore  near  Manhei- 
gin is  bold,  with  good  water  on  all  sides,  having  no  shoals  or  sunken  rocks  about 
it ;  there  are  some  dry  islands  and'ledges  on  the  north  side,  but  they  are  bold,  and 
good  water  f.\i  among  them.  From  Manheigin  light  to  White  Head  light, 
the  course  is  N.  E.  distant  about  7  leagues,  with  a  fair  open  sound.  There  is  a 
small  ledge  lies  about  half  a  mile  from  White  Head  light,  bearing  S.  by  E.  which 
is  just  out  of  water  at  common  tides ;  at  low  water  you  pass  between  this  ledge 
and  the  light  to  go  in  the  Muscle  Ridge  channel,  or  into  the  harbour.    You  con- 


*  The  Ship  is  an  island  that  has  thr3e  trcea  on  it,  and  appears  like  a  ship  at  a  distance ; 
and  the  Barge  Is  a  dry  rock,  which  appears  like  a  barge. 

t  White  Head  light  is  situated  at  the  western  entrance  of  Penobscot  Bay.  The  lantern  is 
elevated  50  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  a  fixed  light.  This  light  cannot  be 
seen  more  than  4  or  5  leagues  distant.  • 


IJLUJNT  S  AJIERICAN  COAST  PILQi; 


'2[> 


iiniie  your  course  N.  E.  by  the  light  about  three  quarters  of  a  mile,  when  you 
will  open  the  harbour  on  your  larboard  hand,  between  a  small  ledgy  island  next 
the  light,  and  a  high  white  island  with  some  spruce  trees  on  it.  When  you  open 
the  harbour  N.  W.  you  steer  N.  W.  and  sail  on  till  you  pass  all  the  ledges  on 
your  larboard  hand,  and  anchor  in  about  5  or  6  fatiioms,  good  holding  ground. 

Vessels  of  60  or  70  ton3,  may  double  close  around  the  head  off  the  light,  soon 
iis  it  bears  N.  E.  and  anchor  right  abreast  of  the  store.  This  is  called  Sail  Har- 
bour. Vessels  taken  with  calm  and  ebb  tide,  may  anchor  any  where  off  the 
light,  in  from  12  to  20  fathoms  water.  If  the  wind  takes  you  at  N.  E.  and  ebb 
tide,  that  you  cannot  get  into  Sail  Harbour,  you  may  run  iuto  Tennant  Harbour, 
which  bears  W.  by  S.  about  4  miles  distant.  You  will  continue  your  W.  by  S. 
course,  till  the  first  house  on  tl^  starboard  hand  bears  N.  N.  W.  when  you  may 
anchor  in  about  4  or  5  fathoms  Water,  good  ground. 


Directions  from  Tennant  Harbour  to  the  Muscle  Ridges,  and  thence  Up 

Penobscot  Bay. 

In  sailing  from  this  harbour,  you  may  steer  east  one  league,  to  "White 
Head  light,  but  be  careful  not  to  haul  in  for  it  till  it  bears  N.  E.  aa  there  is  a 
large  ledge  of  rocks  bearing  about  W.  N.  W.  from  said  Head,  one  mile  distant, 
but  within  it,  a  pistol  shot  from  the  shore,  is  safe  navigation.  In  going  in,  you 
must  give  the  larboard  hand  a  birth,  as  there  is  a  sunken  ledge,  "which  extends 
about  two  thirds  across  the  mouth  of  the  harbour,  that  breaks  when  there  is  any 
sea,  unless  at  high  water. 

Your  course  from  White  Head  light  is  N.  E.  to  Ash  Point  or  island,  one  league 
distant,  which  has  a  large  rock  to  the  S.  W.  of  it,  about  half  a  mile  distant,  which 
you  must  leave  on  your  larboard  hand.  It  is  not  in  the  way,  except  you  are 
obliged  to  go  about.  When  you  haul  round  this  island,  give  it  a  small  birth,  and 
steer  N.  N.  E.  or  N.  E.  by  N.  for  the  Owl's  Head,  leaving  two  islands  on  your 
starboard  hand ;  but  when  you  draw  near  the  larboard  shore,  you  steer  about 
E.  N.  E.  for  the  Owl's  Head,  which  has  a  good  harbour  on  the  larboard  hand  as 
you  go  to  the  eastward.  This  harbour  makes  with  a  deep  cove.  You  may  bring 
•A  rocky  point  that  lies  on  your  starboard  hand  to  bear  N.  E.  and  a  ledge  of  rocks 
that  lies  without  said  point  to  bear  E.  N.  E.  and  anchor  in  4  fathoms,  muddy 
bottom. 

This  harbour  is  open  to  the  wind  at  E.  by  N.  and  %,  N.  E.  but  in  all  other 
winds  you  are  safe.  The  tide  of  flood  sets  to  the  eastward,  and  the  tide  of  ebb 
S.  W.  through  the  Muscle  Ridges. 

If  it  is  night  when  you  come  to  White  Head  light,  you  had  better  not  attempt 
going  through  the  Muscle  Ridges.  Your  best  way  is  to  go  by  Two  Bush  Island, 
which  you  must  leave  on  your  larboard  hand,  keeping  your  course  E.  N.  E.  or 
N.  E.  by  E.  [Two  Bush  Island  is  round  and  barren,  but  has  only  one  bush  on 
it.    Formerly  it  had  two  bushes.] 

If  you  are  in  a  large  vessel,  your  best  way  is  to  go  in  this  passage,  as  it  is  the 
most  safe.  You  must  follow  your  course,  as  above  directed,  about  two  leagues, 
when  you  will  have  *Penobscot  Bay  open,  and  then  you  may  direct  your  course 

*  PENOBSCOT  BAY  and  RIVER.— This  extensive  bay  is  included  between  Sedgwick 
Point,  on  the  east,  and  .White  Head  on  the  west :  the  distance  between  these  points  is  aboHt 
11  leagues ;  and  it  therefore  includes  the  Isle-au-Haute,  Peer  Island,  the  Fox  Islands,  Long 
Island,  and  a  number  of  small  isles,  rocks,  and  ledges.  Through  the  bay  to  the  mouth  of  the 
river  of  its  name,  the  western  channel  is  by  the  headland  on  the  west,  called  Owl's  Head  : 
thence,  by  Camden  on  the  west,  and  Cape  Rosarie  on  the  east,  to  Bagaduce  Point  or  Caitine 
River.  The  eastern  channel  is  between  Isle-au-Hayte  on  the  west,  and  the  smnller  isles  on 
the  east,  through  a  channel  called  Long  Reach,  formed  by  the  shore  of  Sedgwick  on  one  side, 
and  Deer  Island  on  the  other,  until  it  unites  with  the  main  channel  between  Cape  Fosarie 
and  Long  Island.  Above  this,  on  the  east,  stands  Fort  Castine,  near  to  which  is  the  town 
of  Castine,  opposite  to  Penobscot.    Castine  is  the  ^Jort  of  entrv.    This  noble  river. 


m 


"HNx'a  AjiERic^j,  CO.WI  „,.„,,. 


leave  Bellast  Bay  and  Rr!^  ^'"  '"ri  romt.     In  8toprl„„    ^j    '  ^°"'"  course  ia 
^aj' a  good  harbo^ur   and  Kr  '  ^''"""^  «"  yoSr  trbS';**  '!?"'*^t'  ^^^  ^^^ 

J'at  ie  to  the  southmtrj  ofVh?''^^'"''^"'^^^  you  mu  1 1  '  ^''  "'^  ^«»g  Cove. 
But  in  going  to  Penobslot  nroi'''^^'  '"^''^  than  ha?f  a  mil'.T^"'  ?!  =""^«  '•«^ks 
*»oard.    When  vn..  1.      .  J'  Pi^oceed  as  afcove  an!l  i  '®  ^''^^n^  the  main  land 

about  threeMiuartersnfn^  ^°"  «^°™e  to  itXf  .  "'' ''^.^*' ^««  no  trees  on 

water.  b„t  baH  4?^  Jj  ™"«  *«  the  E.  S.  loft^ti;^   f^e  of  rocks  C 

^oint,in  smooth  yv^Zl     mi*    ^°"  ""ay  go  within  a  S  ?  ^.^  covered  at  high 

If  you  are  boun^in  P  J'^f"  '"^'^^^  ™4  be  ii  coverpS    l''"6th  of  Old  Fort 

^ncl  the  wind  a-head  ^  ^r.^*'''^*'  ^'^"^  Old  ForrPoin?  ^^fu"  *^  ^'"'^  »>lowa 

i'es  about  E   N    P   *•'  ^^^  ™ay  make  a  eood  h«rL     "*'  ^'th  the  tide  of  ebb 

up  to  Marsh  Bay,  ktS'tr  th/i'^1"^  ^"^  tide  are  in  fevour '  ""^  *''*  starboard 
about  two  leacues  from^n^  i^®  larboard  hand  best  on  1?*^'/°"  ""ay  proceed 
keep  in  the  mTdreofThe^Jf.'ri"'-  J""^'^  you  Ass  tsk  ^^^'^  Bay  Is 
get  up  to  the  falls.     yTu  hit;  Z  ^°".  ^'^^^  ««'ther  rocks™  y**"  ^^y 

way  sometimes  co  tn  f  h«        .   "°  particular  course  ina^-    ^  *^oals  until  you 

,  When  you  ^enfeVpenobTot^R'*^  "^^  ^.'  ^^^^om^melZ^U?  '^?  "^-'  ^u" 
Island,  you  must  steS-  N  E  L  ^^',  ^"^  ^'^  bound  to  the  tj^'^'l^''^  °^  N' 
t^rhich  course  will  r^TlJ  ^  ^'  'saving  Lone  Islan/i         eastward  of  Lon^ 

^our.  as  soo„\ri  be/rTE^^^"  "P  '"  ^*^""«  I  "you  Send  r^  ''•'"'^^'-^  ^a^^T 
«i^e  o>  the  channel  L.f  vn"  ^""  "^'^  ••""  inf steering  E  ^^"1  "L^°  ^'«  ^a»'- 
*»nie:  then  hii.l  t«  h         "  7**"  Pass  the  first  iJan^  ^  •  *  ^'  ^'  keepiuK  tho 

'      *u"  ana  change, 

f  mile,  f„„  ,h„  ..,^0  'iut  vt  T'^f  1„'f  »»"  "Wtioo  irhoS'  .?  »"  "»  ""''• 

01  we  tta,  and  ^oii/Wns  a 


BLTJNT  5  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


31 


your  course  is  N- 
gues,  your  course  ia 
aid  course,  you  will 
hand,  which  islaod 
St  leave  it  on  your 

rboard  hand,  if  the 
u  must  not.  There 
vered  at  high  water. 

called  Long  Cove, 
reful  of  some  rocks 
from  the  main  land. 
ir  larboard  hand  on 
lich  has  no  trees  on 
ledge  of  rocks  lies 
is  covered  at  high 
length  of  Old  Fort 
en  the  wind  blows, 
ith  the  tide  of  ebb, 
e  east  river,  which 
This  river  lies  to 
rill  lie  safe  from  all 
)und. 

on  your  starboard 
Bve  water.  When 
,  00  the  starboard 
I  you  may  proceed 
d.  Marsh  Bay  is 
rsh  Bay,  you  may 
>r  shoals  until  you 

up  this  river,  bui 
|he  eastward  of  N. 

iastward  of  Long 

ur  larboard  hand, 

•ing  into  this  har- 
E.  keeping  the 

it  a  birth  of  half 

IS.  W.  when  you 

om  all  wind. 

ids  on  your  star- 
lust  steer  north, 

|oard  hand :  then 
ot  River,  which 

'ull  and  change, 


[land,  (from  ifs 
flin  light-house, 

kerous  townships, 
labont  130  milfs 
V  Bangor,  abont 

Re  of  this  pluce. 

the  entrance  of 
and  «on,ftin3  a 


that  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  which  you  may  pass  within  a  cable's 
length  of.  When  abreast  of  Franklin  Island  light,  (which  is  on  your  starboard 
Jiand,)  steer  N-  E.  for  Otter  Island,  4  miles  distant,  and  continue  until  within  one- 
quarter  of  a  mile  of  it,  leaving  it  on  your  larboard  hand ;  then  steer  E.  N.  E.  for 
*Cauldwell's  Island,  at  the  S.W.  end  of  which,  is  a  high  round  rock,  culled  Goose 
Rock.  When  abreast  of  said  rock,  which  you  may  pass  within  one  cable's  length 
of,  leaving  it  on  your  starboard  hand,  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  and  N.  E.  keeping 
Cauldwell's  Island  best  on  board,  to  avoid  a  ledge  in  the  middle  of  the  river. 

In  beating  into  George's  Rivet,  you  must  be  careful  of  a  sunken  ledge  which 
bears  E.  N.  E.  from  Franklin  Island  light,  6  miles  distant;  silso  of  a  ledge  off  the  S- 
K.  end  of  Gay's  Island,  which  extends  one-third  of  the  Avay  across  to  Goose  Rock. 

Should  you  fall  in  with  Manheigin  Island  light,  and  bound  to  George's  River, 
you  may  steer  N.  N.  W.  leaving  Manheigin  Island  on  your  starboard  hand,  until 
Franklin  Island  light  bears  N.  E.  by  E.  when  you  may  run  for  it,  and  steer  as 
above  directed.  Franklin  light  may  with  safety  be  run  for  when  bearing  from 
N.  E.  byN.toE.N.E. 

In  running  from  White  Islands  for  George's  River,  be  careful  of  New  Harbour 
Ledges,  which  bear  E.  N.  E.  from  Penme(|uid  Point,  one  league  distant,  on 
which  are  5  feet  water  at  low  water.  After  passing  these  ledges,  you  will  see  a 
large  dry  rock,  called  the  Western  Egg  Rock,  which  bears  E.  N.  E.  fiom  Pen- 
mequid  Point,  two  leagues  distant,  and  W.  by  S.  from  Franklin  light,  one 
league,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand;  you  will  also  see  the  Eastern 
Egg  Rock,  which  bears  south  from  Franklin  light,  one  league  distant,  which  you 
leave  on  your  starboard  hand.  These  Egg  Rocks  bear  E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W. 
from  each  other  one  league  distant,  and  their  apppearance  much  alike,  which 
you  pass  between,  with  a  clear  and  open  channel.  You  may  distinguish  one 
from  the  other  by  their  bearings  from  the  light. 

Should  you  have  the  wind  ahead,  and  be  obliged  to  turn  to  windward,  you 
may  stand  to  the  northward  until  Franklin  Island  light  bears  E.  N.  E.  and  to  the 
south-eastward  until  it  bears  N.  N.  E.  without  danger. 

To  the  northward  of  the  range  of  Penmequid  Point  and  the  western  Egg  Rock 
and  M'Cobb's  Island,  the  ground  is  foul  and  rocky ;  and  also  to  the  eastward  of 
the  range  of  Franl^lin  Island  light  and  the  eastern  Egg  Rock.  [Note.  M'Cobb's 
Island  is  the  western  entrance  of  George's  River,  and  bears  N.  W.  li  mile  distant 
from  Franklin  Island  light.] 

Should  you  fall  in  to  the  eastward  of  Seguine,  and  wish  to  go  outside  of  Da- 
miscove  Islands,  bring  f  Seguine  light  to  bear  E.  i  N.  and  steer  E.  <^  6.  5  leagues 
distance,  to  clear  Bantam  Ledge,  which  lies  east  from  Seguine  SH  leagues  distant, 
and  S.  S.  W.  from  tPumpkin  Rock,  one  league :  you  then  steer  N.  E-  until 
yon  make  Franklin  light,  and  then  steer  as  above  directed,  or  continue  your 
E.  ^  S.  course  until  Pumpkin  Rock  bears  north,  then  steer  N,  E.  for  Franklin 
light.  Your  course  from  Pumpkni  Ruck  to  Franklin  light  is  N.  E.  by  E  fiv- 
leagues  distant.  In  hazy  weather  you  will  do  well  to  get  a  departure  from  'nis 
rock,  as  you  cannot  sec  Franklin  light  more  than  4  miles  distant.  You  m'.y  an- 
chor in  Gay's  Cove,  taking  care  to  avoid  a  sunken  ledge,  which  lies  E.  froM  Gay's 
Cove,  near  the  middle  of  the  channel,  and  has  4  feet  water  at  low  water.  1'his  ledge 
must  be  left  on  your  larboard  hand,  keeping  Cauldwell's  Island  clos^  on  board. 
Gay's  Cove  lies  on  your  larboard  hand,  about  8  miles  to  the  E.  N.  Va.  of  Frank- 
lin's Island  light.  You  may  liiiow  this  Cove,  as  Gay's  house  and  'jam  lie  to  the 
N.  W.  of  it.  But  if  you  are  bound  through  Herring  Gut,  bring  §Capt.  Hender- 
son's house  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  and  steer  S.  S.  E.  for  Herri  i  Gut.    This  Her- 


*  Cauldwell's  Island  lies  on  the  cast  side  of  George's  River,  about  9^  roilea  from  the  en- 
trance ;  it  is  a  high  round  island,  covered  with  trees. 

t  Seguine  light-house  is  situated  on  an  island  near  the  mouth  of  Kcnnebcck  river.  The 
bntern  is  elevated  200  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  a  fixed  light  of  the  first 
magnitude,  and  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  9  or  10  leagues  in  clear  weather,  as  more 
particularly  descr  bed  in  page  36. 

t  Pumpkin  Rock  lies  off  the  S.  B.  point  of  D<>n::dCove  Islands,  half  a  mile  distant.  It  is  a 
ary  flat  rock,  elevated  about  20  feet  above  the  level  of  th^  sea. 

§  Captain  Henderson's  house  is  wUtc  andhlsstorje  wjd,  andbdtli  lie  on  the  larboard  han  J, 


3-2 


«r.uiVT-.  AMERICAN  coAc^r  Pi£or. 


'«ngth  ofthi^rock.  ^vn.f  '**''''««'d  hand,  and  thedZ  ""T^  ""  ^he  bar,  you  w  i 

The  tide  of  flood  sets  tn  thi       ^^thoms,  muddy  botfoi^T'     ^"''^  '"'^y  a««hor  t(. 

.  When  yo„  go  o  ,t  „f  thu  k""?''^^'''^'  ""d  thtf  ebb  t„  /h  ''"^  'r^'*  ^"•'  ^^^  tid  i 

g've  the  larbotd  handVo^      .T-^"'"'''  *»«*  bound  to  tb.?     Z  southward. 

hand  of  the  e^ZTpolT^t?^ '^^  ^^^^  ^^'•^^"J  and 

length.     When  you  areHp.n    f  fu  '""^  ""^e''  Water   ami  r  "^i.°*='^''  «"  the  samo 

.«ne  miJe  to  the^baren  i.tnS  w^^r  '*'^^'«''  ^O"  may  steer' pT  "L""'  '^  ^^'^''''^ 
islands  or  Iedirp«i  nr.  tu  '^'»"a.  which  you  leave  nn  f u^ .    ,     *'•  "y  S.  or  E.  S   V 

quetoIsJandlfTf  bound  t'^t^f  'ij^  ^"'n  you ^  ^^^^^^^^^  f  "^'  «nd  l';,*^ 
an.Hvhen  you  bring  the  th^tnl  "*^^5'<e^o"  may  tier  JV  ^'^'^'^ff »  «"d^I"«- 
S-  W  White  Head:  leave  ft  on  ,'^'.^-  E-  run  for  it  hn;  »n''^  ^'  "  '««6"es, 
rock  that  lies  S  F  fr«I!  i  "  y*"""  'a'hoard  hanH  i\i  u*  ^^^"  yo"  Pass  tho 
fant.     Your  cou;se  th^^  ?^  ^^'t^''"  White  Head  '.k"*!  '''^  ^a^efuf  of  a  sunk" 

Jeeping  nearTKiddn?  thV'^  '^^^^^--d  is  n'  E  and  toTh  ^^'^^'^  ^«"«^^^^- 
you  must  be  careful  nf!        .      Passage.    Before  vm?  .        ^^^  westward  S.  W 

«/  the  passage,  whicJh.r"^"  '•««'^.  whi"h  «es  ^off  r*""  -"^^  '''''^'  Ash  Point 
should  go  through   h^.n       *"*  '^"'•^  than  8  feet  waLrlf  .  P*"'"*'  ^''^"t  one  thhi 
against  \sh  IslS.^abofrsT  w"V^  "'S'^^'  ^^^Potll^^^^^^      u-^"*  '^y«'' 
on  your  starboard  hand  hp;.       ^u  '^^'^  ^t,  and  ba.e  o?^-  '.^'''*''' '"  "S^t 

are  bound  into  Owl's  Hp.S  ""^  ^'''''^-  When  vou  nl  T'  '''"'='»  y^"  leave 
^are  two  islands  on  thfsf.V''"';  ".""'•««»  N  /p  Tn\^^^^^^^  '^'and,  and 
Head  and  bpund  to  pi/^^'^board  hand.     When  vo„   '^''^"t  2  miles,  which  w  1 1 

pass  the  U^:ZXtS:il-l'  ««-h!^ouVc'ourrs  t  ri'^^  *o  Owl's 

•^ur^e  till  you  make  a  llrge  U^rn'r  """  y"""-  'arb"ard  ha^d^'  n^'  ^'  *'"  y^" 

island  to  the  eastward  ontLt      T^  **"  yo"r  starboard  h»l,!?        Continue  said 

your  course  to  the  J?  K   1^   '"''  ^'*."'^'  ^^ich  is  covereS  ^""^  *  "ttle  round 

hand ;  when  you  pass  V^;  ff  y**"  ^'"  make  a  lareeTslnn"''  ^•■'^'-    ^ontinuo 

continueyour  couS  N  E    m'''  ^^^  ^«^«  the  pSe  'n^  /'V."^  starboard 

northward.    In  the  daV  fiml    ^""  P*''  ^y  a"  the  Sfnd? t   *f^«"'^'^'3  Harbour  • 

the  land.     This  passage  ^^r^^y  ^  «'"«  Hi Hs  b:;  W^^  ««"^^hward  and' 

come  Into  thifh«rhL/''uH'"  ^y  a  N.  E.  or  JVP  TU° '"^'^^  a  harbour,  vo'^ 

an  island,^otredti"th'  irut'^-  'f  '^^^"-^-m'^bw^'s  Hea^r '     ^''""  y- 
N.  W.  and  when  you  Ipftni  ^'''*^^'  ^''^es,  on  your  sllnl   ,  .'^  ^5"  """^t  leave 
you  bring  it  to  K s  I  w^'^^^^'-thward  of  sjfd  Land  v'    'f  "^'  '^"«"»g  ^ 
or  5  fathoms,  soft  boliom     w^''"  y**"  ^'"  ^e  land  Sed  ^ ^'''n^' -S-  J^' ti'l 
eastward,  yo^,  steer  <5pVi.^'^^" y°"  'eave  Buck's  H».k     ^'^**™  ^"  ^mds,  in  4 
you  leave  Jn  youHarhn    i'L'  ^""J"  ^^'^'^^  to  a  Se  rn!?t     T;  ^"^  ^"""d  to  the 
for  there  is  a  sCen  t^e  ^h^ ?'  ^l'^''"^  ^^e  sS  ro^klndtl^/  l^'""**«'  '^''i^'' 
island  on  your  starbn,r?k  ^^^  ''^'^  S.  S.  W.  from  thpm      a^  **"*^'  ^""^^  on  board, 
from  said  iSr^e^Tt'^'^L'''^^  ^»^t  trees  on  it     t  J7  ^ "  '"^^^^  a  blaS 
best  on  board?  you  wil^  ""?  ^'"  ""^  ^^^  Pass^e   b';  kl.'  ^^^F  "««  W-  ^^-  E 
leave  two  island^nn        ^"^  *''^^''  «>''  't.    When  von  h     ^P"'^  ^^^^  eas'erp  s.SrJ 

Continue /our  turse^?n';h*'«^";j'-^'  «"d  two  or  thiS^'lP^'^'*  f^»'«  '«dge,  yo,' 
Buck's  Harbour  the  cou^lfe^.;*^"  y'>"  «ake  two 'slanS/h".'"  '^'"''"^••d  ha^nd. 
may  go  between  bothTsland.  ^;^*.^"**  ^'  W.  6  C^f  T^/^^"  ^'^'^^^  and 
ry  you  up  with  Truta  r«n  'k*1^':'"S  ^-  ^y  S.  I  iS'  «!•  k^^  eastward  you 
mile  to  tfe  northXa^J  ;^ffi  J^^^  'f  «»d  ha^s  a  bar  of^^'^kT  hatT"'''  ^'"  ^*'- 
through,  you  will  obser;e  the U  \^^^  *  ^^^^  wind  and  Sp  m-^T  ^^'^^ 
'«  ahvays  above  water  '  '^'  ''^^""«' '«  two  miles  w"de  at  ChZel  S?,!!  *\':"." 
^^en  you  leave  this  Trum  Cap.  steer  F  bv  S      .•  .  "' 

teerE.byS.nto^i,,,,,^ 


r. 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


33 


t  at  two  hours  flood, 
on  the  bar,  you  will 
tcr  is  within  a  cable's 
You  may  anchor  to 
nd  wait  for  the  tide, 
southward, 
vard,  be  careful  and 
[)f  rocks  on  the  samo 
off  about  a  cable's 
E.  byS.orE.  S.  E. 
ird  hand,  and  3  or  i 
esc  ledges  and  3Ius- 
E.  by  E.  2  leagues, 
when  you  pass  tho 
careful  of  a  sunkti: 
e  cable's  length  dis- 
Lbe  westward  S.  W. 
up  with  Ash  Point, 
lint,  about  one  third 
water.    But  if  you 
land,  which  is  right 
5s,  which  you  leave 
•otatoe  Island,  and 
2  miles,  which  will 
le  passage  to  Owl's 
i.  E.  by  N.  till  you 
nd.     Continue  said 
1,  and  u  little  round 
h  trees.    Continue 
on  your  starboard 
to  Buck's  Harbour; 
the  southward  and 
;  E.  N.  K.  over  all 
rate  man  of  war. 
;  a  small  island  on 
ward  of  it.    Your 
a  sunken  rock  (or 
hich  you  leave  on 
ike  a  harbour,  yoti 
urse.     When  you 
,)  you  must  leave 
liand,  steering  N. 
teer  E.  S.  E.  till 
|m  all  winds,  in  4 
nd  bound  to  the 
r  islands,  which 
Is  best  on  board, 
ill  make  a  black 
[ge  lies  N.  N.  E. 
e  eas'^er.^  shore 
this  ledge,  you 
larboard  hand, 
i^een  which  and 
le  eastward  you 
course  will  car- 
llie  near  half  a 
)bliged  to  run 
b1  Rock,  which 

you  bct^vfon 


the  Ship  and  Barge,  and  tbree  islands  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand, 
which  are  covered  with  large  rock-maple  trees.  The  Barge  is  a  bare  rock,  which 
you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand;  but  there  is  a  rock  about  a  cable's  length  to 
the  northward  of  the  Barge.  Continue  your  course  E.  by  S.  for  Bass  Harbour, 
distant  from  Trum  Cap  5  leagues ;  but  you  must  have  some  regard  to  the  tide  of 
ebb,  which  sets  very  strong  to  the  S.  S.  E.  and  the  tide  of  flood  to  the  N-  N.  W. 
If  you  are  bound  into  Bass  Harbour,  you  keep  Rich's  Point  within  a  cable's 
length,  which  you  leave  on  your  Inrboard  hand,  for  there  is  a  large  ledge  of 
rocks,  that  lie  off  about  half  a  mile,  which  is  bare  at  half  tide,  and  bears  S.  E. 
from  Rich's  barn,  and  S.  by  W.  from  the  entrance  of  Bass  Harbour.  You  ^ivc 
the  larboard  hand  a  good  birth  in  going  to  Bass  Hdrbour ;  in  entering  which, 
you  must  give  both  sides  a  birth,  for  at  low  water  it  is  shoal.  When  you  get 
into  this  harbour,  anchor  on  the  larboard  hand,  with  a  cove  to  the  westward  of 
vou,  in  3  or  4  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 


Directions  from  Bass  Harbour. 

When  you  leave  this  harbour,  bound  to  the  eastward,  steer  out  S.  W.  till  you 
bring  Bass  Harbour  bar  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  then  run  S.  S.  E.  keeping  the  larboard 
hand  best  on  board.  This  bar  has  not  water  enough  for  a  loaded  vessel  before 
half  tide,  having  8i  feet  only  at  low  water  ;  but  a  light  vessel  may  go  over  at 
low  water,  keeping  the  larboard  hand  best  on  board.  When  you  get  over  this 
bar,  you  steer  S.  by  S.  till  you  bring  the  S.  W.  entrance  of  Mount  Desert  to  bear 
N.  £.  then  you  may  run  N.  E.  leaving  Cranberry  Island  on  your  starboard  hand. 
But  this  passage  is  shoal  at  low  water,  and  not  fit  for  loaded  vessels  to  go  through ; 
but  at  full  tide  there  is  water  enough,  keeping  the  middle  of  the  passage.  Con- 
tinue your  course  to  the  N.  E.  till  you  pass  Cranberry  Island ;  then  you  may 
steer  E.  S.  E.  and  anchor  between  the  two  Cranberry  islands,  where  you  wilt 
be  safe  from  easterly  or  S.  W.  winds.  You  may  lie  in  from  4  to  7  fathoms, 
good  holding  ground. 

When  you  leave  this  port,  bound  to  the  eastward,  you  steer  E.  by  S.  till  you 
get  up  with  Baker's  Island,  which  lies  to  the  eastward  of  the  Cranberry  islands ; 
then  you  steer  E.  by  N.  4  leagues,  to  Shuttock  Island.  When  you  pass  said  island, 
and  are  bound  to  Goldsborough,  you  must  steer  N.  E.  about  3  leagues,  and  keep 
that  course  till  you  bring  Goldsborough  harbour  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  then  you  must 
leave  three  islands  on  your  larboard,  and  one  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  run 
into  the  harbour,  where  you  may  lie  safe  from  aJi  winds,  and  anchor  in  5  or  6 
fathoms.    (See  page  25.) 


Directions  for  Dyer's  Bay,  ^c. 

This  harbour  lies  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  Goldsborough.  When  you  make 
Titmanan  light,  (page  25)  bound  to  Dyer's  Bay,  leave  it  on  your  starboard  hand, 
and  st'^er  north  for  the  eastern  head.  You  leave  a  large  dry  rock  on  your  lar- 
board iiand,  and,  after  passing  it,  you  will  see  a  small  island,  covered  with  trees, 
which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand;  then  haul  round  said  island,  whero 
you  will  be  safe  from  all  winds. 


Directions  from  Shuttock  Island. 

When  you  come  from  the  westward,  and  bound  to  Titmanan,  you  pass  Shut- 
tock island ;  steer  E.  N.  E.  from  Shuttock  Island  5  leagues,  to  Titmanan  light, 
l»efore  described. 


Directions  from  Titmanan  Light  to  Ladle  Island. 

When  you  pass  the  light,  bring  it  to  bear  S.  W.  and  steer  N.  E.  about  <^ 
leagues,  which  course  will  carry  you  to  Ladle  Island.    This  island  has  a  remarK- 


:i4 


liLU.NT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  '    LOT. 


able  nppeuraiicp,  bcini;  formecl  exactly  like  a  ladle,  and  has  a  large  black  rock  to 
the  S.  W.  a  little  distance  from  it.  You  may  go  any  side  of  this  inland,  but  th»; 
best  chnnnt!  is  to  the  S.  E.  of  it. 


Directions  for  Cape  Splitt  Harbour. 

When  you  pass  Titmanan  light,  bring  it  to  bear  S.  W.  .J  S.  and  steer  N.  E.  ^  N. 
Tor  Cape  Splitt,  distance  fj  leagues,  which  course  will  carry  you  sale,  into  the 
harbour.  In  steering  said  course,  you  will  make  a  black  rock,  which  you  leave 
on  your  starboard  hand,  distance  one  mile  from  Cape  Splitt.  This  harbour  is 
safe  from  all  winds  but  S.  W.  which  blows  right  in  ;  but  if  you  anchor  in  a  cov«j 
on  the  starboard  side,  and  moor  N.  W.  and  ^.  E.  you  will  lie  safe  from  all  winds. 


Directions  for  Pleasant  River. 

When  you  come  from  the  westward,  and  bound  to  Pleasant  River,  in  passing 
Titmanan  light,  bring  it  to  bear  S.  W.  by  S.  and  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  5  leagues 
distance.  In  steering  said  course,  if  it  is  clear  weather,  y«»u  will  see  Capt.  Wasse's 
house  open  between  the  island  and  main  land  ;  hut  this  passage  will  not  do  at  low 
v/ater.  You  must  leave  this  island,  (and  a  high  dry  ledge  of  rocks  that  lie  to  the 
westward  of  it,)  on  your  starboard  hand  ;  wl  en  you  pass  the  bare  ledge,  you  will 
sec  a  bare  isle,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand  ;  then  you  may  haul  up 
for  Capt.  Wassk's  house,  and  anchor,  and  take  a  pil«»t  for  Pleasant  River,  as  it  is 
not  safe  going  without  one,  except  you  are  well  acquainted. 

Aarrow  Guages  is  one  mile  to  the  westward  of  Pleasant  River,  too  difficult  to  be 
described,  as  there  are  sundry  small  islands  at  the  mouth  of  the  harbour  or  bay. 
The  best  way  for  a  stranger,  is  to  go  into  « 'ape  Splitt  harbour  and  get  a  pilot,  as 
there  ia  no  difficulty  in  going  into  Cape  Splitt  in  the  day-time,  keeping  the  lar- 
board hand  best  on  board. 


Directions  for  Moose  Peck  Reach. 


i|5. 


When  you  come  from  the  westward,  and  pass  Ladle  Island  on  your  larboard 
hand,  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  for  Tibbet's  Island,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard 
hand.  When  you  come  to  the  east  end  of  this  island,  give  it  a  good  birth,  for  at 
low  water  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  that  lie  a  cable's  length  to  the  S.  E.  of  said 
island.  When  you  pass  it,  and  bring  Moose  Peck  reach  open,  you  may 
steer  east  for  Mr.  Beal's  house,  but  you  must  keep  the  starboard  hand  best  on 
board,  for  there  is  a  rock  that  lies  about  the  middle  uf  the  sound,  which  has  not 
above  two  feet  of  water  on  it  at  low  water.  You  may  anchor  to  the  westward 
of  Mr.  Bj:al's  house. 


Directions  for  going  through  Moose  Peck  Reach. 

When  bound  to  the  eastward,  over  Moose  Peek  bar,  which  you  must  not  cross 
before  two  hours  flood,  you  steer  for  Kelly's  coffee-house,  wl.ich  lies  on  the  lar- 
board hand,  as  you  go  to  the  eastward,  on  the  N.  E.  point  of  Moose  Peck  reach. 
When  you  are  entering  on  the  bar,  you  will  bring  a  bushy  tree  right  against  Kel- 
ly's bouse,  which  stands  on  the  point.  Your  course  over  the  bar  is  east.  You 
leave  the  Virgin's  Breasts,  one  on  your  starboard  and  one  on  your  larboard  hand ; 
but  if  you  are  bound  to  Chandler's  River,  you  will  leave  the  Virgin's  Breasts  on 
your  starboard  hand,  and  Rogue's  Island  on  the  same  hand.     There  is  a  muddy 

^  - 

Note. — For  a  description  of  Manheigin  Island  light,  see  page  35. 


01. 

8  a  large  black  rock  to 
of  this  iHlnnd,  hut  th« 


.ir.  '■'■'•■  •• ' 

S.  andst«!frN.  E-iN. 
rry  you  anth  into  the 
rock,  which  you  leave 
tlitt.  This  harhuur  is 
y«Mi  anchor  in  a  covo 
ie  safe  from  all  winds. 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  1*1  LOT. 


36 


ant  River,  In  passing: 
.  E.  by  N.  5  leagues 
ill  see  Capt.  Wasse's 
age  will  not  do  at  low 
I*  rocks  that  lie  to  the 
i  bare  ledge,  you  will 
en  you  may  haul  up 
leasant  River,  as  it  is 

ver,  too  difficult  to  be 
"  the  harbour  or  bay. 
ur  and  get  a  pilot,  as 
me,  keeping  the  lar- 


on  your  larboard 

on  your  larboard 

gtiod  birth,  for  at 

the  S.  E.  of  said 

open,  you  may 

oard  hand  best  on 

nd,  which  has  not 

to  the  westward 


^ach. 

»u  must  not  crosis 
[h  lies  on  the  lar- 

jose  Peck  reach. 
|ight  against  Kel- 

*r  is  east.  You 
larboard  hand; 

e;in'3  Breasts  on 

lere  is  a  muddy 

re  35. 


bar  that  lies  between  Rogue's  Island  and  the  main  land,  but  watw  enough  on  it 
at  two  hours  flood.  Rogue's  Island  has  a  good  harbour  at  the  N.  W.  of  it,  safe 
from  all  easterly  winds,  and  a  small  distance  from  Chandler's  River. 

When  you  go  over  Moose  Peck  bar,  l)0uiid  to  Machias,  you  leave  the  Virgin's 
Breasts  as  before  mentioned,  keeping  your  course  east,  and  a  bare  rock,  called 
Pulpit  Rock,  oil  your  starboard  hand ;  you  must  keep  Libby's  Island  light  open  to 
the  southwi  rd  of  this  bare  Rock.  [N.  B.  This  bare  rock,  which  you  leave  tui 
your  starboard,  may  also  be  left  on  your  larboard  hand ;  and  steer  E.  S.  E.  for 
Libby's  Island  light] 


Directions  from  Moose  Peck  Head  *  Light  to  Machias. 

Give  tlie  light  a  birth  of  one  mile,  leaving  it  on  the  larboard  hand,  and  steer  N. 
E.  by  E.  4i  blagues,  when  you  will  be  up  with  Libby's  Island  light  on  your  star- 
board hand;  then  run  N.  N.  E.  2  leagues,  which  will  bring  you  up  with  Stone's 
Island,  on  your  larboard  hand,  having  a  rock  lying  E.  one  third  of  a  mile  from 
the  centre  of  the  island  ;  from  this  steer  N.  for  Round  Island,  from  which  fol- 
low the  eastern  directions  for  Machias,  (page  3G.) 


Directions  from  Townsend  to  f  Manheigin  Light. 

When  you  take  your  departure  from  Squirrel  Island,  you  steer  E.  S.  E.  for 
Manheigin  light,  on  the  north  side  of  which  are  some  small  dry  islands  and 
ledges,  but  good  water  between  them  and  the  other  sides  of  the  island,  keep- 
ing that  course  until  the  passage  between  George's  Island  and  Manheigin  beara 
N.  E.  You  may  then  steer  N.  E.  about  seven  leagues,  through  a  fair  open 
sound,  for  White  Head  light,  (see  page  28,)  leaving  George's  islands,  (which  are 
three  in  number,)  on  your  larboard  hand.  The  eastern  island  has  no  trees  on 
it.  There  are  two  dangerous  rocks,  bearing  due  south  from  the  middle  of  the. 
middle  island,  called  the  Old  Man  and  the  Old  Wtmrnn,  which  are  bare  before 
low  water.  They  lie  about  one  mile  from  the  shore ;  and  at  high  water,  when 
the  wind  blows  off  the  land,  they  do  not  appear.  If  you  are  bound  to  the  east- 
ward, and  the  wind  should  take  you  ahead,  when  you  are  between  Manheigin 
and  George's  islands,  bring  the  middle  of  Manheigin  to  bear  S.  and  run  in  N. 
which  course  will  carry  you  between  the  eastern  George's  Island  and  the  middle 
island.  You  may  rut)  as  near  as  you  wish  to  the  eastern  island,  but  the  middle 
island  has  a  ledge  of  rocks  that  lie  to  the  eastward  of  it,  which  are  always  dry, 
that  you  are  to  leave  on  your  larboard  hand.  When  you  get  to  the  northward  of 
this  island,  you  must  haul  to  the  westward  and  run  up  between  it  and  the  west- 
ern island,  so  as  to  bring  the  body  of  the  middle  island  to  bear  N.  E.  of  you. 
Here  you  moor  your  vessel,  if  you  stny  any  time. 

If  you  are  bound  to  the  eastward  from  this  island,  you  may  go  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  eastern  island,  but  you  must  be  careful  of  a  ledge  that  lies  to  the 
eastward  of  said  island,  which  you  must  leave  on  your  starboard  band;  and 
when  you  bring  Manheigin  light  to  bear  S.  W.  you  may  go  N.  E.  If  night  should 
come  on,  or  the  wind  ahead,  you  may  haul  up  about  N.  E.  by  N.  for  Tenant 
Harbour,  which  lies  about  8  leagues  from  George's  islands.  You  cannot  miss 
this  harbour  in  the  day-time.  You  will  make  Musqueto  Harbour,  which  lies  be- 
tween two  islands,  covered  with  spruce  trees.  The  entrance  of  the  harbour  is 
north.  Having  passed  this  harbour,  you  will  run  about  two  miles,  keeping  your 
course  N.  E.  by  N.  when  you  will  pass  an  island  with  burnt  trees  on  it,  which 
you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  two  islands  on  your  starboard  hand,  which 

*  Moose  Peck  Head  light  is  revolving,  as  described  in  page  26. 

t  Manheigin  Island  light  has  ten  lamps  and  reflectors,  fitted  on  two  sides  of  an  oblong 
square,  one  side  producing  a  blood  red  light,  the  other  a  common  white  light,  and  is  a  reWv 
ing  light. 


36 


""NT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PaoT. 


^■^Aov  PILOT. 
«lso  have  burnt  trees  on  them-  ♦!, 


'"''■""''""  >'-T«wme„d  Harbour. 


■i*c  entrance  of  T„»,       j  ™a  "arbour. 

oucwde  of  Dtmiscove  siLnd  fl^  '""'^'^•''y'  ^om  bSS  "5  ^^  Squirrel  Island. 

"""fS  Bum  Island  light  to  &  N  'h'^S"  J**  «»«"d  "o  fe  tl^    '*  ''^""  ^'^ 
If  the  wind  should  be  ahead  »;  ^  ^'  *^«n  you  mav  n.nV  l'^^'*'^*'"**  ««  to 
«tand  from  shore  to  sh„rp  t^ii,  "^^  >"""  '^^^'e  to  beaflnf??/""  u"  ^'^^«"t  fear. 

SquirrelIsland,andgoroum1;»?  •".'"^y  «"d  good  anc t  ^°  ^f  eastward  or 

^•E.  but  stiH  continue  your  N  E   h"t''^'^^'  «"  B""it  Island  k^""^'  ''*»«»  ^^^ 

fmall  island,  catted  MotriTT'-t  ? '«  «''e T^^'^e"^*^"  '^^boardland!  J|  ^p 
«  bold ;  after  passing  kvo'i.*'!  ''^'''^  y«"  'eave  on  vonn  2  ^t*  ''«'»*'  there  s  J 
your  course  N  by  P^  i  /„  "  ''^"^  "P  N-  E.  for  the  Pn«?     ^^''^oard  hand,  which 

aT/r  '^^"'.y-^'i'ttnt^^^^^^^^^  ft-^Se 

any  where  inside  of  Mouse  r,L!.!i°  ''^''t  in  by  the  land .  ^-  ^-  then  yon 

I'-om  the  land.  '^°"^«  ^^'''"'J.  ««  there  are  neither  roLs'^'J^  "1^^  ^"<=hor 

//.  romjng.  /rom  «Ae  eastward,  .et  M.n.  •  •  '^*'"''  '^'"K  ^^ 

^^^T^^S]^!^'^^^^  ^'  «•  ^-  and  steer  W 

^f  e  Burnt  Wand  |  ghf  J^ti:?.^  ^^^  «-»  ;  and'in^  'eeJln  Jf -J '"'°  ^''^  Sage 

Weg..en,inc^o.niy;;LXrt;^^^^^^ 

I^irections  for  Kennebcckf  an^  Sheepscut  H 
containinff  a  fi^.J,L?P  *"*'  entrance  of  TournTZTTT^ "»*' 


T. 


BI.UNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


37 


larbour  to  bear  W.  N. 
>u  have  neither  cables 
!ie  head  of  it,  on  raud- 


s  to  the  Damiscove 
y  N.  about  2^  miles ; 
e;  and  Burnt  Island*" 
nt  of  Squirrel  Island, 
id  light.  If  you  are 
the  westward  as  to 
For  it  without  fear. 
le  harbour,  you  may 
to  the  eastward  or 
;e  under  the  lee  of 

•  larboard  hand,  giv- 
leagues,  when  you 
d,  bearing  about  N. 
[sland  light  bears  N. 
irboard  hand,  till  up 
the  light,  there  is  a 
rboard  hand,  which 
arbour,  or  continue 
W.  N.  W.  then  you 
or  you  may  anchor 
I  or  shoals  lying  off 

•  E.  and  steer  W. 

>u  into  the  passage 

id  course,  you  wUI 

W.  by  N.  till  you 

ng  it  on  your  lar- 

ow  tlie  directions 


vers. 

►ut  one  fourth  of 
^ack-knife  ledge, 

i>  a  light-house, 

Swan  Island,  4ji 
I  chops. 

y/U  as  before  men- 

ise,  containing  n 

jes  IVom  land,  and 

I  it,  and  Wood 

uine,  which  bear 

of  a  mile — EN 

If  a  mile,  always 

N.  W.  in  mile. 


which  bears  from  Seguine  light  N.  W.  distant  1 J  mile,  and  Ellingwood's  roek, 
Iving  N.  one-fourth  of  a  mile  from  SeRuine.  After  passing  Ellingwood's  rock, 
bring  Seguine  light  to  bear  S.  and  steer  N.  for  Pond  Island  light,*  which  is  24  miles 
'i^  from  Seguine.  Leaving  Pond  Island  a  cable's  length  on  the  larboard  hand,  care 
should  be  taken  on  the  flood  tide  to  haul  quickly  round  Pond  Island  point,  to 
avoid  the  Sugar  Loaves,  (two  small  islands  north  half  a  mile  from  Pond  Island) 
upon  which  the  tide  sets  very  strongly.  The  course  after  passing  Pood  Island, 
is  about  N.  W.  to  the  fort  on  f  Hunnewell's  point,  (which  you  will  give  a  birth  of  a 
cable's  Iength)and  steer  north  for  Coxe's  Head  (on  which  also  is  a  fort)  one  mile. 
The  course  is  then  N.  E.  to  Perkins'  Island,  which  you  will  leave  on  the  star- 
board hand  about  one  mile,  and  you  will  give  it  a  birth  of  a  cable's  length  to 
shun  two  sunken  ledges  that  lie  nearly  abreast  of  Perkins'  Island,  and  about  in 
the  middle  of  the  river ;  then  steering  about  north  one  mile,  you  have  fine  an- 
chorage at  Perkins'  flats,  in  4,  5  and  6  fathoms.  This  is  as  far  as  it  would  be 
prudent  for  a  stranger  to  attt^mpt  with  a  heavy  vessel. 

There  is  good  anchorage  in  moderate  weather  any  where  between  Seguine 
and  Pond  Island,  within  half  a  mile  of  the  latter,  in  from  5  to  8  fathoms.  Should 
the  wind  blow  violently,  or  in  case  of  stress  of  weather,  and  if  far  enough  to 
the  windward  to  weather  Ellingwood's  rock  and  Seguine  ledges,  it  might  some- 
times be  advisable  to  run  to  Townsend  harbour.t 

If  bound  into  Kennebeck,  and  falling  to  the  eastward  of  Seguine,  bring  the 
light  on  Pond  Island  to  bear  N.  W.  by  W.  and  run  for  it  till  within  a  cable's 
length,  then  follow  the  preceding  directions. 

There  is  safe  anchorage  with  an  oflF-shore  wind,  any  where  between  Small 
Point  and  Seguine,  avoiding  Jack-knife  ledge«  before  mentioned. 

Safe  anchorage  may  be  had  from  Coxe'-.  'lead  to  Perkins'  Island,  nearest  the 
eastern  shore.  The  usual  rapidity  of  the  tide,  between  Seguine  and  the  mouth 
of  the  river,  is  3  and  4  knots. 

There  is  also  a  passage  into  Kennebeck  river,  leaving  Pond  Island  on  the  star- 
board hand,  but  only  16  feet  can  be  carried  at  high  water,  and  it  is  not  recom- 
mended. 

You  have  deep  water  to  the  eastward  of  Seguine.  At  the  westward  the  tide 
of  flood  sets  strong  to  the  northward  into  New  Meadows,  and  W.  N.  W.  into 
Broad  Sound,  and  up  to  Portland,  and  the  ebb  tide  the  reverse.  Your  sound- 
ings, between  Seguine  and  Cape  Elizabeth,  are  various;  at  times  you  have  18  or 
20  fathoms,  rocky  bottom,  and  within  a  cable's  length  you  will  And  30  or  s:i 
fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

The  land  between  Seguine  and  Gape  Elizabeth,  is  all  in  islands:  on  the  Cape 
is  a  pyramid,  bearing  S.  1°  W.  from  Portland  light-house,  4  miles  distant,  and  a 
windmill  to  the  westward,  near  Richmond's  Island,  which  is  the  first  windmill 
you  see  when  coming  from  the  eastward.  Richmond's  Island  lies  i  league  west 
of  PorUand,  and  has  a  bad  ledge  lying  about  S.  E.  from  the  N.  E.  end  of  it,  half 
a  mile  distant.     [See  page  39.] 

If  you  are  bound  to  Sheepscut  river  from  the  westward,  and  make  Seguine 
light,  you  may  leave  it  on  your  starboard  hand,  giving  it  a  birth  of  half  a  mile ; 
when  you  pass  it  to  the  eastward  you  must  bring  it  to  hear  S.  W.  by  S.  and  steer 
N.  E.  by  N.  which  course  will  carry  you  to  Ebenicook  harbour,  distant  3  leagues, 
leaving  three  dry  ledges  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  one  on  your  larboard. 
This  harbour  is  very  narrow  at  the  entrance,  but  makes  a  large  basin  when  you 
get  into  it ;  in  the  entrance  it  lies  E.  N-  E.  You  cannot  get  in  here  with  a  N.  E. 
or  easterly  wind,  but  must  have  the  wind  south  or  w«'sterly ;  after  you  get  into 
this  harbour  you  must  haul  up  N.  E.  or  N.  E.  by  N.  for  there  are  several  sunken 

'*'  The  lantern  of  Pond  Island  light-house  is  30  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea  nt  high  wa- 
ter, and  contains  a  fixed  light,  bearing  N.  H  W.  from  Seguine  light,  distant  8^  milts. 

t  A  dry  rock  lies  off  the  eastern  shore,  al)Out  hulf  a  mile  above  the  lower  fort,  calle^l  b.'yag 
Rock,  and  is  the  only  obstacle  between  Hunnewell's  point  and  Cuxc's  head. 

\  With  the  wind  at  N.  W.  and  a  flood  tide,  you  niny,  by  fetching  within  a  cable's  length 
of  the  lower  Sugar  Loaf,  and  leaving  it  on  the  larboard  hand,  run  into  good  and  flafe  anchor- 
age, in  flrom  6  to  3  iMionis,  in  Heald's  eddy. 


38 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


focks  on  the  starboard  hand  as  you  go  in,  which  you  are  to  avoid.  The  best  an- 
chorage  Is  against  Capt.  Smith's  wharf,  where  are  4  fathums,  muddy  bottom ; 
and  you  will  lie>«afe  from  all  winds.  But  if  you  are  bound  up  Sheepscut  river  in 
a  large  vessel,  and  come  from  the  west^vard,  you  must  go  to  the  southward  of 
Seguine  light,  steering  about  N.  B.  or  N.  B.  by  B.  1  league,  and  when  the  river 
bears  north,  or  north  a  little  westerly,  you  may  run  north,  and  must  keep  the 
starboard  hand  best  on  board :  there  are  many  rocks  and  ledges,  some  of  them 
above  and  some  under  water,  which  are  all  to  the  eastward  of  Seguine.  When 
you  get  up  as  high  as  Bbenicook,  you  leave  the  two  Mark  Islands  on  your  lar- 
boaird  hand,  keeping  your  course  north  a  little  easterly,  but  if  you  only  come 
here  to  make  a  harbour,  when  you  get  up  to  Capt.  Hodgson's,  you  will  see  a 
bare  ledge  on  your  larboard  hand,  if  it  is  low  water,  whicti  is  covered  at  high 
water ;  you  may  anchor  in  8  fathoms  to  the  northward  of  it. 

If  you  want  to  go  up  to  Wiscasset  point,  you  must  keep  your  starboard  hand 
best  aboard,  north-easterly,  till  you  come  to  Cross  river,  which  you  leave  on  your 
starboard  hand.  You  will  not  attempt  to  go  up  to  Wiscasset  point  with  a  nead 
wind  and  the  tide  of  ebb,  for  it  is  1}  leagues  from  Cross  river ;  but  when  you  have 
a  fair  wind  and  tide,  you  may  proceed  without  fear.  This  river  is  narrow,  and 
lies  more  to  the  westward :  when  you  are  about  a  mile  or  a  mile  and  a  half  up, 
you  must  keep  your  larboard  hand  best  on  board,  for  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks 
which  reaches  near  half  way  across  the  river^^hich  is  on  your  starboard  hand, 
and  the  rock  near  the  middle  is  covered  at  high  water,  but  may  be  seen  two  hours 
before.  The  river  runs  straight  to  Decker's  Narrows,  then  turns  round  to  the 
westward:  when  you  enter  these  narrows,  you  may  see  the  town.  In  case  you 
should  go  up  in  the  night,  you  must  be  careful  of  two  large  rocks  that  lie  W.S.W., 
of  these  narrows ;  the  tide  of  flood  sets  very  strong  for  them,  and  they  are  cov- 
ered at  half  tide ;  you  may  go  on  either  side  of  them,  and  may  anchor  in  10  or 
12  fathoms  water,  muddy  bottom. 

It  is  high  water  here  at  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  about  lOh.  45m. 


Directions  for  sailing  into  New  Meadows. 


I. 

JO 


This  river  bears  N.  E.  8  leagues  distant  from  the  Pyramid  on  Cape  ETizabetbr 
and  about  one  league  east  from  Cape  Small  Point.  If  you  should  fall  into  this 
bay  with  the  wind  at  S.  B.  or  S.  S.  E.  and  bound  to  the  eastward,  on  may 
make  a  good  harbour  in  the  above  river.  In  standing  to  the  northward,  you  will 
have  a  large  round  island  on  your  starboard  hand,  covered  with  spruce  trees,  to- 
gether with  two  large  rocks,  one  culled  the  Brown  Cow,  and  the  other  the  White 
BuU,  which  are  some  distance  from  each  other.  You  must  leave  the  Brown 
Cow  on  your  starboard,  and  the  White  Bull  on  your  larboard  hand,  the  tatter  of 
which  you  may  go  within  a  cable's  length  of,  and  when  you  have  passed  it,  must 
stand  over  for  Horse  Island,  that  lies  on  the  starboard,  which  has  a  house  on  it, 
that  you  may  go  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  of.  To  the  westward  of  the  island 
lies  a  large  rock,  which  is  covered  at  high  water,  but  bare  at  half  tide ;  you  may 
go  on  either  sid6  of  it  when  it  is  in  sight,  but  the  widest  passage  is  to  the  east- 
ward. When  you  have  passed  this  rock,  steer  N.  by  W.  or  N.  N.  W.  which 
course  will  carry  you  up  with  a  large  island,  called  Bear  Island,  which  is  covered 
with  spruce  and  birch  trees.  When  you  have  passed  this  island  about  one  quar- 
ter of  a  mile,  you  may  haul  in  for  the  starboard  shore,  and  anchor  in  5  or  6  fa- 
thoms water.  This  is  the  best  place  to  anchor,  with  the  wind  at  S.  S-  E.  or 
east,  but  be  careful  of  a  ledge  of  rocks,  that  runs  to  the  northward  of  this  island, 
about  half  a  mile  off.  You  may  anchor  in  this  bay  according  as  the  wind  may 
be ;  if  it  sliould  he  at  the  eastward,  anchor  on  the  east  side.  If  you  have  lost 
your  cables  and  anchors,  there  is  a  large  cove  on  the  starboard  hand,  about  two 
miles  from  Bear  Island,  bearing  about  N.  which  is  sufficient  to  hold  SO  or  40  sail 
of  vessels.  It  is  land-locke^  all  round,  so  that  no  wind  can  damage  a  vessel  after 
she  gets  into  if. 


The  best  M' 
ddy  bottom ; 
ipscut  river  in 
louthward  of 
hen  the  river 
lust  keep  the 
ome  of  them 
uine.  When 
on  your  lar- 
u  only  come 
ou  will  see  a 
ered  at  high 

arboard  hand 
leave  on  your 
;  with  a  head 
rhen  you  have 
}  narrow,  and 
nd  a  half  up, 
edge  of  rocka 
arboard  hand, 
een  two  hours 

round  to  the 

In  case  you 

atlieW.S.W. 

they  are  cov- 
ichor  in  10  or 


\:- 


cm« 


)e  ETizabetby 
fall  into  this 
ird,    ou  may 
rard,  you  will 
•uce  trees,  to- 
»er  the  fVhite 
le  the  Brown 
f,  the  latter  of 
issed  it,  must 
house  on  it, 
of  the  island 
le ;  you  may 
to  the  east- 
W.  which 
ch  is  covered 
)ut  one  quar- 
in  5  or  6  fa- 
|it  S.  S.  E.  or 
>f  this  island, 
k«  wind  may 
rou  have  lost 
1,  about  two 
30  or  40  sail 
,  vessel  after 


*  I- ' 


IS':' 7 


«u 


BLUNT  S  AMEftlfcAN  COAST  PILOT. 


39 


Directions  for  Hussey*s  Sound. 

If  you  come  from  the  eastward,  and  make  Seguine  light,  (see  page  86,)  bring  it 
to  bear  E.  and  steer  W.  for  Hussey's  Sound,  if  you  have  a  fair  wind  and  day- 
light, as  you  have  nothing  but  islands  on  your  starboard  hand.  The  tide  of  flood 
sets  very  s'rong  in  between  these  islands ;  when  you  get  within  two  miles  of  Hus- 
sey's Sound,  you  will  make  two  islands  which  have  no  trees  oi.  them,  called 
Green  Islands.  You  continue  your  course  till  you  make  Hussey's  Sound,  bear- 
ing N.  N.  E.  then  you  may  steer  in  with  your  course  N.  N.  E. 

There  is  a  large  sound,  called  Bro:»d  Sound,  about  half  way  between  Seguine 
light  and  Hussey's  Sound.  You  leave  Merrikeneek  Island  on  your  stxir  oard, 
and  Hulf-Way  Rock  on  your  larboard  hand ;  but  this  Sound  has  several  rocks 
under  water,  and  is  nut  fit  for  strangers  to  go  into. 

When  you  pass  the  two  islands,  after  entering  Hussey's  Sound,  you  leave  three 
islands  on  your  larboard,  and  two  islands  on  your  starboard  hand ;  the  northern 
island,  on  your  starboard,  is  called  Smith's  Island ;  when  you  pass  said  island 
about  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  you  may  haul  away  E.  N.  E.  till  you  shut  in  said 
island  to  the  S.  E.  then  you  may  anchor  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  muddy  bottom  ;  Hog 
island  to  the  S.  W.  Busk^t  Island  to  the  N.  W.  Great  Gabegue  Island  to  the  N. 
E.  and  Smith's  Island  to  the  S.  E'.  Here  you  may  moor  200  sail  of  ships,  safe 
from  all  winds,  and  w^en  wind  and  tide  serve,  you  may  be  out  to  sea  in  one  hour. 


Directions  for  Portland  Harbour. 

Coming  from  the  south-westward,  when  within  half  a  mile  of  Cape  Elizabeth,''^ 
the  red  buoy,  on  Broad  Cove  rock,  may  be  seen;  it  bears  N.N.  E.  from  the 
pitch  of  the  cape,  distance  li  mile,  and  lies  in  24  feet  water.  When  up  with  this 
buoy,  leave  it  on  the  larboard  hand,  half  a  cable's  length  distant,  and  steer 

*  A  column,  or  di&tinguishing  Ian  '-mark,  in  the  form  uf  a  pyramid,  is  erected  on  Cape 
Elizalctlt,  one-(-ightb  of  a  mile  N.  VV.  Pom  the  south  eastern  extremity  of  the  cape.  It  is 
built  uf  stone,  th"  lower  haifpaintrti  wh.te,  the  upper  black,  height  5U  feet  from  the  founda- 
tion, and  125  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

Bearing,  distance,  ^c.  of  several  dangerous  rocks,  near  the  entrtmee  of  Portland  Harbour. 
The  column  bears  from  Portland  light,  S.  1^  VV.  distant  4  miles. 


20^ 

25- 

74° 

41 1 
240 


E.  distant  2^  miles. 


£. 
E. 
E. 
E. 
E. 


do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 


H 
H 
1 
1 


do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 


From  the  column  to  the  outer  part  of  Trundy  Reef,  N. 
do.  to  Broad  cove  rock  N. 

do.  to  New  ledge  N. 

do.  to  Alden's  Rock,  S. 

do.  to  Taylor's  Reef,  E.  point  S. 

do.  to        do.     do.     \\ .  point  S. 

From  S.  E.  point  of  the  Cape,  to  the  outer  part  of  V>  atts'  ledge,  which  tends  off  from  Rich- 
mond island  is  S.  42^    U . 
From  Portland  light  to  New  ledge,                           S.  67*-' 
do.            to  Alden's  rock,                                   S.  20'^ 
do.            to  Trundy  reef,                                   S,  15"^ 
do.            to  Bro'd  cove  rock,                             S.     9 
The  above  bearings  arf  f.y  rompas^  ;  the  variation  ascertained  at  the  same  time  to  be  8°  SC  W. 
The  following  depths  are  calculated  for  low  water  spring  tides :  Trundy's  reef  extends 
from  the  shore,  the  depth  agreeubte  to  the  above  bearing.  15  feet. 

Broad  Cove  ro;  k  is  nearly  dry  ;  there  is  a  channel  between  it  and  the  shore,  with  4  fa- 
thoms, sandy  bottom.     Alden's  rock,  depth  8  feet. 

New  ledge  extends  about  E.  N.  E.  and  VV.  S.  W.  one-quarter  of  a  mile.  Depth  U  tol5 
feet. 

Taylor's  ledge  extends  E.  N.  E  and  W  S.  W.  near  one-quarter  of  a  mile  ;  «n  the  eastern 
end,  5  fathoms,  western  do.  15  feet. 

There  is  also  another  small  rock,  a  cables  length  within  tiie  latter,  depth  15  or  16  feet ;  be- 
tween these  and  the  cape  there  is  a  very  good  and  safe  channel,  with  7, 8,  and  9  fathons, 
one-quarter  or  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  shore. 


E.  distant  6^  miles. 
E.    do.    6^    do. 
£.    do.    2I    do. 
E.    do.     ai    do. 


40 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


N.  by  E.  ^  E.  1  mile,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  the  white  buoy  on  Trundy's  reef, 
which  lies  in  16  feet  water.  Giving;  it  the  same  birth  as  the  other,  you  may  then 
run  N.  by  W.  ^  W.  for  Portland*  light-huusi ,  3  miles  distant.  When  up  with 
the  head,  on  which  the  1i|;ht-hou8e  stands,  give  it  a  small  hirth,  and  steer  N-  bv 
W.  leaving's  Banc's  Island  on  the  starboard  hand,  till  you  come  tu  House  Islandf, 
the  S.  W.  point  of  which  bears  N.  from  the  light-house,  distant  almost  2  miles. 
Before  you  are  up  with  this  island,  the  black  buty  on  Spring  Puitit  ledge  may  be 
seen;  it  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  from  the  S.  W.  part  of  House  Island,  distant  half  a 
mile,  and  lies  in  14  feet  water.  (When  up  with  this  buoy,  you  open  the  town.) 
Giving  the  black  buoy  a  small  birth,  you  may  haul  up  N.  W.  for  the  white  buoy 
on  Stanford's  ledge :  this  buoy  lies  also  in  14  feet  water,  and  one  mile  distant 
from  Spring  Point  ledge  buoy*  Giving  the  white  buoy  a  small  birth,  you  may 
keep  up  midway  the  river,  and  anchor  opposite  the  town,  where  you  please,  in 
safety. 

[N.  B.  All  the  above  mentioned  buoys  are  to  be  left  on  the  larboard  hand,  in 
coming  in,  and  the  depth  of  water  put  down,  is  at  low  water ;  the  courses  are  by 
compass.] 

There  are  also  two  small  buoys,  on  two  ledges  in  Whitehead  passage,  at  the 
N.  E.  part  of  Bang's  Island.  This  passage  is  narrow,  and  but  seldom  used  with 
large  vessels.  By  keeping  midway  between  the  two  buoys,  the  red  on  the  star- 
board, and  the  white  on  the  larboard  hand,  in  coming  in,  you  will  have  not  less 
than  5  fathoms  water.  After  passing  the  buoys,  keep  midway  the  passage,  and 
run  one  mile  distance,  which  will  carry  you  into  Ship  Channel,  the  same  as  if 
you  had  passed  the  light-house. 

Note.  If  by  accident  either  of  the  buoys  should  be  removed,  the  following  di- 
rections for  miling  into  Portland  harbour  will  be  found  useful. 

When  you  come  from  the  south-westward,  and  intend  to  go  into  Portland, 
give  Cape  Elizabeth,  (on  which  is  a  pyramid,  as  before  described,)  a  birth  of  half 
a  mile,  and  steer  N.  N.  E.  until  you  bring  Portland  light-house  to  bear  N.  N.  W. 
when  you  must  haul  up  N.  N.  W.  if  the  wind  will  permit;  but  if  you  are  in  a 
large  ship,  and  the  wind  N.  W.  or  W.  N.  W.  your  safest  way  is  to  continue  your 
course  N.  N.  E.  which  will  carry  3  ou  safe  into  Hussey's  Sound,  allowing  it  to  be 
tide  of  flood,  as  Portland  Sound  is  narrow,  but  bold  between  the  light-house  and 
Bang' s  Island,  the  latter  of  which  is  on  your  starboard  hand.  If  you  should  turn 
into  Portland  in  the  night,  in  standing  to  the  south-westward,  you  must  go  about 
as  soon  ns  the  light  bears  N.  N.  W.  and  in  standing  to  the  eastward,  you  must 
go  about  as  soon  as  the  light  bears  W.  N.  W.  for  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  that 
bears  S.  by  E.  from  Portland  light-house,  and  also  a  low  island,  called  Ram 
Island,  east-northerly,  one  mile  distant  from  the  light-house  :  but  if  you  have  a 
leading  wind,  you  may  go  in  without  fear,  keeping  about  middle  of  the  channel 
way,  and  when  abreast  of  the  light,  steer  about  N.  by  W.  for  House  Island,  which 
you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand ;  when  you  pass  House  Island,  bring  it  to  bear 
S.  Ei  by  E.  and  steer  N-W.  by  W.  or  W.  N.  W.  with  the  tide  of  flood.  In  steer- 
ing the  above  course,  you  will  see  a  round  bushy  tree  to  the  north  of  the  town, 
and  a  house  with  a  red  roof,  and  one  chimney  ;  bring  the  tree  to  the  west  of  the 
house,  which  course  will  carry  you  up  the  channel  way,  in  6  or  7  fathoms  wa- 
ter ;  but  when  you  come  abreast  of  the  fort,  which  stands  on  a  hill,  haul  away 
W.  S.  W.  as  there  is  a  shoal  bank  on  your  starboard  hand  that  has  not  more  than 
10  or  12  feet  on  it  at  high  water,  which  you  are  to  avoid.  Here  you  will  be  care- 
ful of  two  ledges  of  rocks,  one  called  Spring  Point  ledge,  two  miles  N.  by  W.  i| 
W>  from  the  light-house,  and  the  other  three  miles,  bearing  N.  by  W.  h  W.  call- 
ed Stanford's  ledge,  which  has  a  buoy  on  it,  and  stretches  ofl*  from  your  larboard 
hand  near  half  a  mile  in  length.  They  lie  to  the  S.  W.  of  House  Island,  and  are 
all  bare  at  low  water.    If  you  are  obliged  to  turn  in  here,  they  are  much  in  the 


>vAyi 

will  dl 

gener^ 

Ifyoi 

road, 

steer 

boardi 

leave 

steer 

If  it  il 

soon  al 

Ifyl 
it  to  bl 
land  14 
fear. 

N. 
betwed 


*  Portland  light-house  is  on  a  point  of  land,  called  Portlend  Head,  at  the  western  entrance 
of  the  harbour.    It  is  a  stone  edifice,  72  feet  high,  exclusive  of  the  lantern,  which  is  13  feet. 


nnd  contains  a  fixed  lisrht. 


liLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


41 


Trundy's  reef, 
you  may  then 
Vhen  up  with 
id  steer  N.  by 
House  Island, 
Imost  2  miles, 
ledge  may  be 
distant  half  a 
en  the  town.) 
le  white  buoy 
e  mile  distant 
rth,  you  may 
fou  please,  in 

oard  hand,  in 
ourses  are  by 

issage,  at  the 
)m  used  with 
1  on  the  star- 
iiave  not  less 
passage,  and 
le  same  as  if 


following  di- 


tto Portland, 
t  birth  of  half 
sar  N.  N.  W. 
you  are  in  a 
>ntinue  your 
wing  it  to  be 
t-house  and 
should  turn 
«st  go  about 
,  you  must 
rocks  that 
sailed  Ram 
you  have  a 
be  channel 
and,  which 
it  to  bear 
In  steer- 
the  town, 
ivent  of  the 
thoms  wa- 
haul  away 
more  than 
II  be  care- 
by  W.i 
h  W.  call- 
r  larboard 
i,  and  are 
ich  in  the 


g 


M\ay,  and  when  you  are  standing  to  the  southward,  be  careful  of  them.  The  marks 
will  do  in  the  day-time,  but  are  of  no  service  in  the  night.  There  is  a  pilot  who 
generally  attends  here.  This  harbour  is  open  to  the  wind  at  N.  E.  and  E.  N.  E. 
If  you  should  come  in  in  a  dark  night,  your  best  way  is  to  go  into  Hog  Island 
road,  which  may  be  done  by  steering  as  follows : — When  you  pass  tlie  light-house, 
steer  N.  by  W.  until  you  pass  Bang's  Island,  which  you  will  leave  on  your  star- 
board hand ;  in  steering  this  course,  you  will  make  House  Island,  which  you  will 
leave  on  your  larboard  hand ;  when  you  are  between  both  of  these  islands,  you 
steer  N.  E.  by  E.  till  you  come  to  the  second  island  on  your  starboard  hand. 
If  it  is  day-'ime,  you  will  see  a  large  house  on  said  island,  and  may  anchor  as 
soon  as  abre  ist  of  it,  in  10  or  12  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

If  you  sho  dd  fall  into  the  eastward  of  Portland,  and  make  Seguine  light,  bring 
it  to  bear  E.  i  nd  steer  W.  which  course  you  are  to  continue  till  you  make  Port- 
land light  to  bear  from  N-  W.  to  W.  N.  W.  when  you  may  run  for  it  without 
fear.     Var.  8°  00'  W. 

N.  B.  You  must  have  some  regard  to  the  tide  of  flood,  which  sets  very  strong 
between  the  islands  to  the  eastward  of  Portland.     [^C^  See  the  Plate.] 


JVoiice  to* Masters  of  Vessels. 

Masters  who  sail  from  Portland,  or  ports  adjacent,  are  informed,  thut  fi-om  the 
Observatort  on  Fort  Hill,  by  means  of  the  telescope  placed  there,  vessels  aj)- 
proaching  the  coast  may  be  discovered  at  15  leagues  distance ;  and  their  colour:^ 
or  private  signals  can  be  distinguished  8  leagues,  if  the  weather  should  be  clear 
and  the  colours  hoisted,  or  suspended  in  such  a  manner  as  to  present  them  fair 
to  the  observatory.  Should  any  need  assistance,  they  will  set  their  ensign  over 
their  private  signals  ;  and  may  be  assured  if  they  can  be  discerned,  that  their  si- 
tuation will  be  made  known  to  their  owners. 

The  Observatory  bears  N.  N.  W.  k  W.  from  Portland  light-house,  4  miles  dis- 
tance ;  and  these,  in  range,  are  a  good  mark  to  clear  Aldein's  rock  ;  which,  keep- 
ing the  above  in  range,  you  will  be  nearly  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  east- 
ward of. 

The  Observatory  is  on  an  eminence  141  feet  above  high  water  mark ;  and  ihe 
building  32  feet  high,  painted  red,  and  the  telescope  placed  near  the  top. 


Boon  Island  Light. 

Boon  Island  is  very  low  land,  about  one  quarter  of  a  mile  in  length,  and  has  a 
light-house  on  it,  which  bears  S.  E.  ^  &.  from  Cape  Neddock,  distant  2  leagucis. 
It  is  built  on  the  west  part  of  the  island,  where  the  monument  formerly  stood : 
the  edifice  is  stone,  contains  a.  fired  light,  elevated  32  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
sfea,  and  may  be  seen,  in  clear  weather,  6  or  7  leagues.  Two  other  buildings  are- 
erected  near  it :  one  for  a  dwelling  house,  the  other  for  an  oil  house.  From 
Boon  Island  to  Boon  Island  ledge,  the  course  is  east,  distant  one  league.  It  is 
not  safe  for  strangers  to  go  very  near  this  ledge,  for  several  of  the  rocks  are  to  be 
seen  long  before  low  water.  From  Agaraenticus  Hill,  Boon  Island  bears  S.  E-. 
distant  5  or  6  leagues ;  and  when  you  come  in  from  sea,  and  make  Ag^menti- 
cus  Hill,  bearing  N.  W.  by  N.  you  are  then  to  the  westward  of  Boon  Island 
ledge ;  but  when  said  hill  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  you  may  be  sure  you  are  to  tb'e 
fastward  of  it. 


a.vHlj 


n  entrance 
I  is  13  feet, 


4i 


,*»» 


KJ-UiNl'd  AMERICAN  COAST  l^ILOi. 


Remarks  on  the  Wliite  Hills. 

These  Hills  lie  N.  W.  from  Portland,  and  N.  N.  W.  from  *Wood  Island  li^^Iit- 
liouse.  Vou  may  see  them  in  clear  weather  when  no  other  part  of  the  land  is  iii 
sight.  At  the  first  sight  they  aj)j)ear  like  a  cloud,  and  are  always  white,  occasion- 
ed, it  is  said,  by  their  being  ctjvcred  with  white  moss.  They  have  been  seen 
wh"H  in  lat.  43°  10'  N.  (23  miles  S.  from  the  Pyramid  on  Cape  Elizabeth.) 
The  depth  of  water  in  the  above  latitude  is  80  fathoms,  muddy  bottom.  When 
you  steer  N.  W.  or  W.  N.  W.  from  this  latitude,  you  will  make  Agamenticus 
hills,  and  #hen  bearing  W.  by  N.  6  or  7  leagues,  they  appear  like  three  hills,  and 
the  smallest  of  them  to  the  eastward.  At  the  same  time  you  will  make  Wells' 
Hills,  bearing  W.  N.  W.  and  when  you  are  on  the  northern  part  of  Jeffrey's 
ledgef ,  in  45  fathoms  water,  you  will  see  the  hills  of  Agamenticus  bearing  W.  by 
N.  or  W.  N.  W. 

I  would  rccommen'l  to  all  mariners,  in  coming  from  the  eastward,  not  to  go  to 
l!ie  northward  of  Int.  43^  N.  in  thick  weather,  unless  they  are  well  acquainted, 
Jind  judge  themselves  to  be  to  the  westward  of  Boon  Island  ledge,  as  this  has 
proved  fatal  to  many  who  were  unacquainted. 

Between  Jeffrey's  and  the  Isles  of  Shoals  you  will  have  70  and  75  fathoms  wa- 
ter, m)iddy  bottom,  and  a  stroiig  current  settiqgto  the  S#W.  You  may  see  the 
Isles  of  Shoals  5  or  6  leagues  when  you  are  to  the  eastward  of  them,  but  will 
first  see  the  light-house,  which  is  on  White  Island,  and  the  meeting-house  on  Star 
Island,  bearing  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  from  each  other,  distant  seven-eighths  of  a  mile. 


Directions  from  Cape  Porpoise  to  Wood  Isl 


land  Light. 


Wood  Island,  on  whicli  '■'.  light-house  is  erected,  containing  a  repeating  light, 
is  high  woody  land,  very  even,  and  lies  N.  E.  3  leagues  distant  from  Cape  Por- 
poise. In  running  for  the  light,  bring  it  to  bear  K.  N.  W.  or  N.  W^  and  run 
till  within  a  cable's  length  with  safety.  You  may  go  into  this  harbour  either  at 
the  eastward,  or  westward  of  the  Island.  There  are  several  rocks  to  the  west- 
ward of  tlie  island,  and  also  a  long  bar  which  lies  to  the  S.  W.  about  three-quar- 
ters of  a  mile  distant.  When  you  have  the  wind  to  the  southward,  you  nvxy 
lay  your  course  in,  and  anchor  near  St«»ge  Island :  this  is  called  Winter  Har- 
bour. .  You  may  go  in  the  eastern  way,  and  have  room  to  turn  your  vessel  (which 
is  an  advantage  you  cannot  have  in  going  in  to  the  westward ;)  but  here  you  are 
exposed  to  tlie  wind  at  N.  E.  and  E.  N.  E.  but  if  your  cables  and  anchors  are 
not  good,  you  may  run  into  the  Pool,  and  lie  safe  from  all  winds. 

In  running  in  tiie  eastern  passage,  you  open  a  small  channel  for  boats  only,  be- 
tween Wood  Island  and  Negro  Island,  but  no  man  of  experience  would  mista'-e 
it.    Negro  Island  is  small,  with  two  stores  on  it,  and  is  left  on  the  larboard  hai  a. 

SacQ  lies  about  a  league  to  the  northwest,  but  it  is  a  barred  place,  and  has  not 
above  10  feet  at  high  water,  which  makes  it  not  fit  for  a  stranger  to  go  in  ;  there 
is,  however,  considerable  navigation  owned  here,  and  the  inhabitants  are  enter- 
prizing. 

The  next  place  to  Wood  Island  is  Richmond's  Island,  which  lies  about  N.  E. 
northerly  4  leagues.  This  place  is  only  fit  for  small  vessels,  such  as  coasters,  and 
but  few  vessels  put  in  here,  it  being  only  one  league  to  the  westward  of  Portland, 
which  is  the  principal  port  in  the  State. 

In  sailing  by  Richmond's  Island,  you  must  be  careful  of  a  sunken  ledge,  called 

*  Wood  Island  light  is  situated  near  the  entrance  of  Saco  river,  on  the  east  side  of  the 
island.  The  lantern  is  elevated  45  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  a  revolving 
light,  which  may  be  seen  7  or  8  leagues  distant.  When  you  first  make  it,  the  eclipse  will  be 
total,  until  jou  are  within  6  or  7  luiLc  sf  it;  when  the  light  will  not  wholly  disappear,  but  in 
the  revolutions  the  greatest  power  of  light  wili  be  to  the  least  as  24  to  1. 

t  Jeffrey's  ledge  lies  between  42°  20'  and  13^37'  ;J0"  N.  latitude,  and  between  68°  52'  30  ' 
and  69°  45' W.  longitude. 


\:i 


Dod  Island  liglit- 
of  the  land  is  in 
white,  occasion- 
Ijave  been  seen 
ape  Elizabeth.) 
)ottom.  When 
:e  Agamenticus 
B  three  hills,  and 
ill  make  Wells' 
part  of  Jeffrey's 
s  bearing  W.  by 


ird,  not  to  go  to 
veil  acquainted, 
dge,  as  this  has 

75  fathoms  wa- 
ou  may  see  thw 
'  them,  but  will 
;-house  on  Star 
;hths  of  a  mile. 


iight. 

repeating  light, 
I  om  Cape  Por- 
V.  W.  and  run 
irbour  either  at 
ts  to  the  west- 
out  three-quar- 
ard,  you  may 
I  Winter  Har- 
ir  A-^essel  (which 
t  here  you  are 
id  anchors  an; 

joats  only,  be- 
would  mistal--e 
•board  hai  a. 
e,  and  has  not 
o  go  in ;  there 
ints  are  enter- 

s  about  N.  E. 
s  coasters,  and 
d  of  Portland, 

n  ledge,  called 

east  side  of  the 
tains  a  revolving 
e  eclipse  will  be 
lisappear,  but  in 

vcen  68^52' 3(1' 


-.J*'' 


end  of 
faed  not 
,rd. 

prn  and 
I  or  400 
ag-staff 
idge  of 
juart«.'rs 
Iround. 
Mt  high 
0  of  the 
it  to  be 

1136  and 

,oii  Aill 


ie. 

1 

|eap;ii»'e. 
ire  well 
pn  yotir 
iph  land 

JN.  W. 
i  not  go 

ch'Jir  (if 
lout  two 
n  direct 
••.     Tlie 

Isoftllr, 


«onnd  to 
}.  W.  4 
It-house 
".  by  E. 
¥.  until 
torn, 
he  east- 
lie,  then 
ir  direc- 

light  a 
W.  for 

I  to  beat 

jC  of  the 
quarter 

C,  which 

jcr. 


i 


theses, 

f.  hv  W. 


^n,intfi-J  fi'r  thi-.ini>-ii,'>in  t'4'itxf/'i7i\ 


^Ew^^^SmS^HmLZIiMi^^ 


t//.7»» >'.■.//;■/•  th,-.iin,-ii,->nt  <•«'. My /•>'/(■/,  U  '''  kij^ 


IliLi;iliK.1 '.,_B.T -i:  '-^-u.W CIv:71^:T,154 ■WATER.  <!TREET.a827l 


4^i     , 


'l'h( 

ai^ht.  ' 
«-d,  it  I 
fvlicii  i 
Tlie  di 

VOll 

liilla 
the  ami 
J{ilU,  1 
J^dgef. 
N.  or  \ 

I  wq 
llicnof 
and  jxn 
prov"fc(f 

Betvi 
in;  mk 

IsI»'S  of 

first  s<'« 
Island,  4 


e  di 
istj 
9,  aJ 


"  %i 


I.I*.. 


Wool 
is  highj 
poise, 
till  wit)i 
the  east 
M'ard  q 
tcrs  of 'i 
lay  you 
jjour. 
is  an  ad^ 
exposed 
not  gooi 

In  riu 
tween  \ 
it.    Nel 

SacQ* 
nhove 11 
is,  howe 
prizing^ 

Then 
norther} 
l)ut  few 
which  1$ 

In  sail 

*  Woo 
island.  ' 
light,  whi« 
total,  unf 
the  revulf 

t  Jeifii 
and  69°  4 


7W 


J*<VJl 


IlLUM'  a  A.MI:HK  AN    COAST    PILOT. 


i;{ 


Wnlrli  Lf'ds*"'  ^''iit  lit-H  off  about  S.  K.  near  half  a  mile  from  the  N.  T..  out!  of 
tlie  island;  it  does  not  show  it'iolf  except  the  wind  hlows  fresh,  hut  yoii  need  not 
go  so  near  the  island,  unless  you  have  a  srantwiiui,  (i^lurnin)i;  to  winthvard. 

At  the  mouth  of  Kennehunk  harhour  are  two  [)iers,  one  on  the  warttern  and 
one  on  the  western  side  of  the  channel,  rinmin;;  from  the  sliore  ahout  B  or  400 
feet  towards  the  har,  extendin-is;  a  little  beyond  low  water  mark,  with  a  flag-staff 
and  beacon  on  the  top,  which  may  be  seen  ab«iit  one  mile  <liMan1.  A  ledge  of 
rocks  lies  off  the  harf»onr,  called  the  Fithhif^  Rocks,  distant  about  three  quarters 
of  a  mile  from  the  head  of  the  pilars,  b»;t\\eeti  whieli  is  tlie  aneliorint!;  ground. 
The  ledge  bears  due  south  from  the  head  of  the  piers,  and  is  all  covered  at  high 
water.  Vessels  approaching  the  harbour  should  k<'ep  well  to  llie  eastward  of  the 
ledge,  though  there  is  a  toleralde  passa;;e  to  the  westward,  but  it  ou^jlit  not  to  be 
attempted  by  a  large  vessel  without  a  good  pilot. 

Depth  of  water  on  Kennebunk  l)ar,  at  low  water,  from  -2.  to  i\  feet;  ri^e  and 
fall  of  common  tides  from  H  to  9  feet,  iiiereasitig  sometimes  t.*  10  and  1.1  on  full 
andciiange.     Time  of  hi;;h  water,  full  and  changt;,  Uh.  l.^rn. 


Directions  for  sailing  from  Cape  Ncddock  to  Cape  I'orpoiff. 

Your  course  from  Cape  Neddock  to  Cape  Porpoise  isN.  E.  distant  i'i  league*--. 
Cape  Porpoise  is  a  bad  harbour,  and  not  to  be  attempted,  unless  you  are  well 
acquainted  or  in  distress.  In  going  in,  you  must  leave  two  small  ii«lands  on  your 
larboard  hand,  and  three  on  your  starboard.  It  may  be  known  by  the  high  lanri 
of  Kennebunk,  which  Hesto  the  N.  W.  of  it.  VVlien  the  harbiuir*  l)ears  JN.  \V  . 
you  must  haul  in,  but  be  careful  of  the  point  on  your  larboard  IruKi,  and  not  g<> 
too  near  it,  as  it  is  very  rocky.  As  soon  as  you  are  in  the  liarb(»nr,  and  clear  >>( 
the  point  of  rocks  on  your  starboard  hand,  your  coiu'se  must  Ik*  N.  NV.  about  two 
cable's  length,  when  you  must  come  to,  and  moor  N.  K.  and  S.  \V.  or  run  direct 
for  the  wharf.  A  vessel  that  draws  10  feet  will  be  aground  at  io.v  wati^r.  The 
liarbour  is  so  narrow  that  a  vessel  cannot  turn  round;  is  within  100  yards  of  the, 
fea,  and  secure  from  all  winds,  whether  you  havoaiich'iivs  or  no:. 


k 


Directions  for  Portsmouth  Harbour. 

If  you  fall  into  the  eastward,  and  make  Cape  Neddock,  and  are  hound  to 
Portsmouth,  when  within  half  a  mile  of  said  cape,  your  course  is  S.  S.  W.  4 
leagues,  whicli  course  you  v.ill  continue  till  you  hritiji  fPortsmoulh  ii{;!it-house 
to  bear  N.  and  vun  within  one  quarter  of  a  mile  of  the  light,  then  steer  N.  by  E. 
or  N.  N.  E.  until  you  arc  abreast  of  the  ligiit,  when  you  must  steer  N.  W.  until 
the  light  bears  S.  S.  E.  and  anchor  in  9  fathoms,  at  fow  water,  ^otid  bottom. 

If,  Avhcn  coming  I'nuu  sea,  you  make  the  Isles  of  Shoals,  and  are  to  the  east- 
ward of  them,  you  must  run  for  them  till  within  one  mile  of  the  eastern  isle,  then 
steer  W.  N.  W.  until  Port;;mouth  light-house  bears  N.  then  follow  your  direc- 
tions as  above. 

If  you  come  to  the  westward  of  the  Isles  of  Siioals,  give  White  Island  light  a 
birth  of  one  mile  and  a  half,  bring  it  to  bt-ar  east,  and  then  nm  N.  by  VV.  for 
Portsmouth  light,  9  miles  distant.  If  you  have  a  head  wind,  and  obliged  to  beat 
into  the  harbour,  you  must  observe  tiu're  is  a  sunken  rock  at  the  east  side  of  the 
entrance,  called  Kitt's  rock,  which  has  a  buoy  on  it,  and  S.  by  W.  one  quarter 
of  a  mile  from  the  light-house,  li'.!S  a  sunken  ro-:k,  called  Stillman's  rock,  which 
also  has  a  buoy  on  it.     Give  the  buoys  a  good  birth,  and  there  is  no  danger. 

*  At  the  eastern  side  of  the  harbour  lies  a  ledge,  on  .which  it  always  breaks. 

f  Portsmouth  light-house  has  &  fixed  liglit  in  it,  elevated  85  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea, 
and  stands  on  Fort  Point,  (New  Castle  Island)  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour.  N.  by  VV. 
and  S.  by  E.  moon  makes  hic;h  water  at  full  and  chaii;>;e. 


44 


BLUNT  S    AAlEIilCAN    COAST   PILOT. 


The  bay  which  is  now  formed  between  Smutty  Nose,  Cedar,  and  Star  Island?, 
(by  the  Sea  Wall  which  connects  Cedar  and  Smutty  Nose  Islands)  will  afibrd  % 
safe  harbour  for  vessels  bound  to  this  port,  when  a  northerly  wind  and  ebb  tide 
prevent  them  from  entering  the  river.  The  wall  makes  safe  anchorage  also  for 
small  craft,  whenever  the  wind  is  from  south-east  to  north,  and  protects  the  boats 
on  Star  Island  beach  in  an  easterly  storm. 

When  you  come  from  the  S.  W.  and  make  Cape  Ann,  and  to  the  eastAvard  of 
the  Dry  Salvage?,  bring  them  to  bear  S.  by  E.  and  steer  N.  by  W.  or  N.  h  W. 
In  steering  this  course  you  will  make  the  Isles  of  Shoals,  from  which  you  may 
take  a  new  departure,  by  bringing  the  light-house  to  bear  east,  distant  li  mile, 
and  run  N.  by  W.  for  Portsmouth  light.  If  the  wind  should  come  to  the  north- 
ward, and  you  are  obliged  to  turn  into  this  port,  you  must  not  stand  to  the  west- 
ward farther  than  to  bring  the  light  to  bear  N.  \  W.  till  you  get  within  Odiorne's 
point,  and  when  standing  to  the  eastward,  to  go  about  as  soon  as  the  light  bears 
N.  N.  W.  until  you  get  within  Wood  Island.  Be  careful  of  Odiorne's  Point  com- 
ing from  the  south-westward,  for  it  lies  off  more  tiian  half  a  mile,  with  sunken 
rocks,  which  do  not  show  themse'-es  when  the  wind  is  off  the  hmd :  likewise,  in 
standing  to  the  east,  you  must  be  careful  of  the  Whale's  Back,  which  lies  S.  S.  W. 
of  Wood  Island,  and  is  covered  at  half  tide.  If  you  are  bound  to  the  eastward 
from  tills  port,  you  steer  S.  by  E.  one  league  from  the  ligiit-house,  then  steer 
N.  N.  E.  for  Old  York  or  Cape  Neddock,  wliich  is  4  leagues  from  Portsmouth; 
but  if  the  wind  should  come  from  the  northward,  you  nusst  be  careful  of  York 
Ledge,  which  bears  from  Swett's  Point  S.  E.  distant  2  leagues.  There  is  a  sunk- 
en ledge  that  lies  S.  W.  one  mile  from  York  Ledge ;  it  is  never  bare,  but  always 
lireaks  at  low  water,  and  is  called  the  Triangle.  Some  part  of  York  ledge  is 
l)are  at  half  tide,  and  the  N.  E.  breaker  and  Boon  Island  light  bear  E.  by  N.  and 
W.  by  S.  5  miles  distant. 

The  next  you  come  to  is  Boon  Island  (on  which  is  a  light-house  containing  a 
fired  lights  which  lies  S.  E.  h  S.  from  Cape  Neddock,  or  the  Nubble,  so  called.) 
tVhen  you  pass  Boon  Island,  bound  to  the  eastward,  arid  take  the  wind  at  N.  N. 
E.  you  must  take  care  of  a  ledge  of  rocks  due  N.  from  Boon  Island,  one  mile 
distant.  Var.  6°  48'  W. 

[N.  B.  I  have  passed  this  place  several  times,  but  never  discovered  the  ledge 
till  the  year  1783,  when,  being  bound  to  the  eastward,  the  wind  took  me  from 
the  westward,  but  the  vessel  having  no  more  than  steerage  way,  I  hove  over  a 
line  to  catch  fish,  and  found  I  had  24  fathoms  water,  sandy  bottom,  and  in  a  few 
minutes  I  had  but  10  feet  of  water,  and  my  vessel  drawing  9 ;  all  that  saved  me 
from  striking  was,  that  the  water  being  entirely  smooth,  the  current  set  me  to  the 
eastward,  and  I  got  into  24  fathoms  within  the  length  of  the  vessel,  from  where 
I  soimded,  and  had  but  10  feet.]  [fXj^  ^«e  the  Plate,] 


Description  of  the  Isles  of  Slioals. 

By  the  benevolence  of  the  Massachusetts  Missionary  Society,  aided  by  the 
subscriptions  of  several  gCiitlemen  in  Ncwburyport  and  the  neighbouring  towns, 
a  meeting-house  has  been  erected  on  Star  Island  (one  of  the  above  islands.) 

The  following  is  the  description  and  relative  situation  of  the  islands.  White 
Island  (the  south-westernmost  island)  is  a  rocky  island,  tiiree  quarters  of  a  mile 
in  length,  from  S.  E.  to  N.  W.  and  about  one  miJe  and  three  quartere  distant 
from  the  meeting  house.  There  is  a  reef  that  extends  about  one-third  of  a  mile 
from  the  N.  W.  end,  which,  in  passing,  you  must  give  a  pood  birth.  The  S.  E. 
end  bears  from  the  meeting-house  S.  W.  \  S.  the  N.  W.  e:  :  S.  W.  by  W.  |  W. 

On  this  island  is  a  light-house,  with  a  lantern  elevated  67  feet  from  iiigh  water 
mark,  containing  15  patent  lamps  with  rcHectora  on  a  revolving  triangle,  which 
will  make  one  complete  revolution  in  three  minutes  and  thirty  seconds,  exhibiting 
on  one  side  a  bright  red  light,  on  one  side  a  blue,  and  on  the  other  the  natural 
colour  of  the  light. 


I'sMCJ:*.  _ 


1  Star  Island?, 
will  aftbrd  % 
1  and  ehb  tide 
orage  also  for 
ects  the  boats 

e  eastward  of 
iT.  or  N.  h  W. 
'lich  you  may 
stant  1^  mile, 
to  the  north- 
l  to  the  west- 
liin  Odiorne's 
he  light  bears 
's  Point  com- 
,  with  sunken 
:  likewise,  in 
iliesS.S.W. 
the  eastward 
se,  then  steer 
Portsmouth; 
reful  of  York 
iere  is  a  sunk- 
e,  but  always 
Jfork  ledge  is 
E.  by  N.  and 

i  containing  a 

le,  so  called.) 

I'ind  at  N.  N. 

md,  one  mile 

60  48'  W. 

sd  the  ledge 

ok  me  from 

hove  over  a 

and  in  a  few 

at  saved  me 

et  me  to  the 

from  where 

lePUitc] 


led  by  tho 
ring  towns, 
|ands.) 
Is.  White 
Is  of  n  mile 
Itere  distant 

of  a  mile 
iTheS.  E. 

W.  iW. 
Iiigh  water 
k'/e,  which 
lexhibiting 
lie  natin-al 


is 


V  ; 


•••••.•X 

'•.1    vCl.iv  /•  •    •(       -■»• 


z»#»/r 


^ 


so 

T 


o 

(A 


^^  i 


'a 


•C^         *      i? 


••  /«♦ ♦'•■ 


^ 


fiwe  4-t 


z 


I, 


I 


I 


"5. 


^. 


.^1*^ 


■^    ^ 


•^.v: 


•• 


•^* 


t3 


5 


^ 


;:; 


51 


s 


HLUNT  S     AMKIilf  AN     (;0A5T     I'H.ul. 


1./ 


J'.ach  I'lglit  may  he  seen  distinctly  about  :»0  secomls,  at  the  distance  of  nine 
miles;  the  light  will  be  wholly  eclipsed,  about  ten  seconds,  between  each  colour ; 
within  that  distance,  the  light  will  not  entirely  dit.appear  in  clear  weather ;  but 
taking  the  medium,  the  greatest  power  of  light  will  be  to  the  least  as  40  to  1. 
The  brigh*  or  natural  light  will  be  first  discovered,  in  clear  weather,  at  the'dis- 
t.mce  of  about  seven  leagues;  and  on  approaching,  tliered  and  blue  in  succession. 
The  bright  light  may  be  seen  two  or  three  miles  farther  than  the  red,  and  the 
red  about  the  same  distance  ftirther  than  the  blue. 

A  BELL  of  800  lbs.  weight  is  suspended  in  the  tower  of  the  light-house,  which 
will  be  kept  tolling  by  machinery  at  the  rate  of  about  ten  strokes  a  minute,  by 
night  and  day,  whenever  from  fog,  or  any  other  cause,  the  light  or  light-house 
cannot  be  seen  at  least  four  miles ;  at  which  distance  it  is  calculated  the^bell 
may  be  heard  in  moderate  weather. 


%. 


TItP.  fulloicing  bcui'uigs  frum  Jt  hite  Island  Light-lionsi,  urr  Ihr.  mean  of  a  mimkr 

(if  cx})eiiintnts  bij  compass. 

Portsmouth  light-house  bears  N.  N.  W.  distant  nine  miles.  Stpiare  rock  lies 
directly  in  the  range,  distance  from  White;  Island  live-eighths  of  a  mile.  Boon 
Island  light,  N.  E.  by  N.  distant  12  miles.  Cape  xVnn  lights,  S.  I  W.  distant  21 
miles.  Rye  meeting-house,  N.  W.  by  W.  d  W.  distant  9  miles.  Star  Island 
meeting-house,  N.  E.  distant  seven-eighths  of  a  mile.  There  is  a  rock  called  In- 
ii(M-'s  Rock,  bearing  S.  W.  by  S.  from  this  island,  two  miles  distant,  bare  before 
low  water.  North-west  point  of  Hog  Island,  N.  by  E.  I  E.  Cedar  Island  Ledge 
E.  by  N.  :1  N.  distant  U  mile.  Anderson's  Ledge,  S.  E.  by  E.  h  E  distant  Ij 
mile.    White  Inland  Ledge,  W.  S.  W   distant  one  third  of  a  mile. 

Londoner's  (or  Lounging)  Island  lies  about  ih  mile  to  the  northward  of  White 
Lsland,  is  al»out  five-eighths  of  a  mile  in  length  from  S.  to  N.  and  is  high  at  "iacli 
end:  in  high  tides  the  middle  is  sometimes  covered;  a  number  of  rocks  lie  close 
about  the  island,  in  almost  every  direction,  some  of  which  are  always  bare. 
The  south  end  bears  W.  from  the  meeting-house ;  the  north  end  W.  N.  W.  ^  W . 
about  half  a  mile  distant.  About  half  way  between  this  island  and  Star  Island, 
lies  a  rock  which  is  bare  at  low  water;  it  bears  from  the  meeting-house  N.  AV. 
by  W.  ^  W.  one  third  of  a  mile  distant. 

Star  Island  (on  which  the  meeting-house  stands)  is  about  three-fourths  of  a 
mile  in  length  from  S.  E.  to  N.  W.  and  about  half  a  mile  in  breadth ;  it  is  covered 
with  buildings  on  the  north  side.  The  meeting-house  stands  on  an  eminence  a 
little  to  the  northward  of  the  middle  of  the  island ;  is  12  feet  high  from  the  founda- 
tion to  the  roof;  to  the  top  of  the  steeple  is  130  feet  more;  the  whole  height 
from  the  surface  of  the  water  is  about  65  feet;  it  is  painted  white,  and  the  steepb* 
is  placed  in  the  middle  of  the  building ;  it  stands  fronting  the  west,  and  may  be 
seen  at  the  distance  of  eight  or  nine  leagues,  in  almost  any  direction  at  sea;  it 
bears  from  Thatchci-'s  Inland  lights  (Cape  Ann)  N.  d  E.  6i  leagues  distant;  from 
Pigeon  Hill  N.  by  E.  6.i  leagues  distant;  from  Newburyport  light-houses  N. 
E.  h  E.  6  leagues  distant;  from  Portsmouth  light-house  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  3^  leagues 
distant;  from  the  western  Agamenticus  mountain  S.  d  E.  from  the  eastern  do. 
S.  !i  E.  from  Boon  Island  light-house  S.  W.  jl  S.  41  leagues  distant;  from  Boon 
Island  Letlge  (which  lies  one  league  E.  from  Bo(»n  Island)  S.  W.  by  VV.  4  ;I  leagues 
distant.  Off  the  south  end  of  this  island,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from 
shore,  lies  Anderson's  rock,  which  is  bare  at  half  tide ;  in  passing,  give  it  a  good 
birth ;  it  lies  from  the  meeting-house  S.  S.  E. 

Cedar  Island  is  small,  and  about  one-third  of  a  mile  in  length  from  eajt  to 
west,  situated  between  Star  and  Su  'itty-nose  Islands.  A  Sea  Wall,  784  feet  in 
length,  breadth  1 1  feet,  and  6  feet  high  from  full  sea,  sunk  in  2G  feet  water, 
making  an  excellent  causeway,  connects  Cedar  and  Smutty-nose  Islands,  which 
afford  safe  harbour  for  vessels  bound  to  Portsmouth,  when  a  northerly  wind 
and  ebb  tide  prevent  them  from  entering  the  river.    The  w^all  makes  safe  anchor- 


4G 


IJLUNT'a    AMErilCAN     COAST    PILOT. 


j^e  also  for  small  craft  whenever  the  wind  is  from  south-east  to  north,  and  jtro- 
tects  the  boats  on  Star  Island  Beach,  in  any  easterly  stoi  n.  The  east  end  of 
Cedar  Island  bears  from  the  meeting-house  E.  ^  N.  and  the  M'est  end  E.  N. 
E.  i  E.  three-eighths  of  a  mile  distant.  A  rock  lies  off  the  S.  E.  end  of  this 
island,  half  a  mile  distant,  bare  at  half  tide,  bearing  from  the  meeting-house  E< 
by  S. 

Smutty-nose  Island  (connected  as  before  mentioned,  with  Cedar  Island  by  a 
Sea  Wall)  is  about  one  mile  in  length  from  E.  to  W.  and  about  half  a  mile  in 
breadth,  and  may  be  known  by  a  wind-mill  on  the  north  part  of  the  island ;  at  the 
west  end  is  a  fine  harbour,  called  Haley's  Cove,  where  15  or  20  small  vessels  may 
lie  safe  from  all  winds.  There  are  several  buildings  near  this  harbour.  There 
is  a  fine  channel  between  this  island  and  Hog  Island,  which  has  water  sufficient 
for  any  vessel,  keeping  near  the  middle  of  the  passage.  The  west  end  of  Smutty- 
nose  Island  bears  from  the  meeting-house  N.  by  E.  4  E.  and  the  east  end  E.  N. 
E.  about  five-eighths  of  a  mile  distant. 

Hog  Island  is  a  high  island,  lying  to  the  northward  of  Si"utty-nose  Islar.d;  is 
about  one  mile  in  length  from  E.  to  W.  and  five-eighths  of  a  mile  from  N.  to  S. 
The  west  end  lies  from  the  meeting-house  N.  by  W.  i  W.  east  end  of  do-  N. 
N.  E.  seven-eighths  of  a  mile  distant. 

Duck  Island  (the  northernmost  island)  is  a  long,  low,  rocky  island,  some 
parts  of  it  are  covered  at  high  water,  with  rocks  projecting  in  every  direction, 
especially  at  the  N.  VV.  end,  where  a  ledge  runs  off  half  a  mile.  It  is  the  most 
dangerous  of  any  of  the  Isles  of  Shoals,  and  ought  carefully  to  be  avoided ;  it  is 
about  seven-eighths  of  a  mile  in  length  from  N.  \V.  to  S.  E.  The  east  end  bears 
from  the  meeting-house  N.  N-  E.  3  E.  The  west  end  N.  by  W.  5  W.  about 
3i  miles  distant.  [^^j^  See  the  Plate.  ] 


*> 


Directions  for  Newburyport,  Ipswich  Bay,  &;c. 

When  you  come  round  Cape  Ann,  and  are  two  miles  to  the  northward  of 
the  dry  Salvage  Rock,  bring  said  rock  to  bear  S.  E.  and  steer  N.  W.  by.  W. 
3  2-5  leagues,  which  course  and  distiuce  will  carry  you  up  with  Newburyport 
Bar.  In  running  for  the  bar  from  the  eastward,  strangers  should  not  approach 
too  near  Hampton  Harbour,  as  oft"  the  mouth  of  it  lie  several  sunken  rocks. 
Hampton  Harbour  lies  about  five  miles  north  from  the  southern  extremity  of 
Salisbury  Point,  between  which  and  Hampton  Harbour  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  from  the 
liglits  on  Plumb  Island*,  3  miles  distant  lies  another  dangerous  rock,  having  only 


*  Plumb  Island,  so  called,  is  situated  between  the  mouth  of  Merrimack  River,  on  the  north, 
and  Ipswich  Bay  on  the  south,  and  is  separated  from  the  muin  land  by  a  narrow  sound. 
Its  length  is  about  eight  and  a  half  miles,  and  it",  wiath  from  the  sea  to  the  main  not  more 
than  5U0  paces.  On  tae  north  end  of  the  island  are  two  iight-houses,  containii!g/ij-ei/%A(,f, 
which  are  constantly  lighted  at  night,  and  so  constructed  as  to  be  easily  'iioved,  a  circum- 
fitance  requisite,  from  the  frequent  shifting  of  the  bar  at  the  mouth  of  Newburyport  Harbour. 
This  bar  is  probably  formed  by  the  current  of  the  river  in  its  progress  Oi't,  meeting  the  drift 
of  the  sea  and  opposing  winds,  and  by  that  means  forming  a  bank  of  loose  sand,  which  the 
strength  of  the  tide  is  insufficient  to  force  out.  It  extends  across  from  Plumb  Island,  about 
a  mile  below  the  lights,  to  Salisbury  Beach.  The  channel  over  it  is  extremely  narrow,  and 
terminated  on  each  side  by  very  dangerous  shoals;  that  on  the  north,  called  the  Nor'h 
Breaker,  and  that  on  the  south,  the  South  Breaker.  The  light-houses  are  always  so  situa- 
ted as  to  be  brought  in  a  range  by  the  mariner  coming-  over  the  bar ;  and  as  by  the  violence 
of  winds  or  tides,  the  bar  shifts,  the  light-houses  are  shifted  to  conform  to  it.  By  keeping 
the  lights  in  ono,  vessels  may,  by  day  or  night,  come  in  with  safety;  and  find  good  anchorage, 
in  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  abreast  or  between  the  two  lights. 

That  part  of  the  island,  bounding  on  the  sea,  and  extending  above  half  its  width,  consists 
entirely  of  yellow  sand,  nerfectly  smooth  on  the  beach,  but  farther  from  the  sea,  driven  by  the 
wind  into  hillocks,  or  heaps,  of  fantastic  forms,  and  preserved  in  that  shape  by  the  successive 
growth  of  grass  and  shrubs.  On  the  back  part  of  the  island,  where  it  Is  washed  by  the 
sound,  is  an  extent  of  salt  marsh,  bounding  its  whole  length.    The  products  of  riumb  Is'ind 


yi. 


M 


/? 


M 


)rtli,  ami  jmci- 
e  east  end  ul' 
it  end  E.  N. 
3.  end  of  this 
ting-house  E. 

r  Island  by  a 
[lalf  a  mile  in 
island ;  at  the 
II  vessels  may 
jour.  There 
ater  sufficient 
d  of  Sniutf  y- 
ist  endE.  5j. 


,J^', 


tse  Isiar.d ;  Is 
rom  N.  to  S. 
id  of  do.  IV. 

island,  some 
ry  direction, 
t  is  the  most 
ivoided ;  it  is 
ast  end  bears 
5  W.  about 
he  Plate,  I 


r'; 


■yr. 


♦   • 


'■  ^ 


lorthward  of 
W.  by.  W. 
ewburyport 

ot  approach 

mken  rocks. 

xtremity  of 
from  tht! 

having  only 

on  the  north, 
arrow  sound, 
uin  not  more 
g  fixed  lights, 
d,  a  circurn- 
lort  Harbour, 
ting  the  drift 
id,  which  the 
sland,  about 
narrow,  and 
d  the  Nor»h 
ays  so  situa- 
the  violence 
By  keeping 
d  anchorage, 

dtli,  consists 
3ri^en  by  the 
le  successive 
shed  by  tlic 
Inmb  Is'nnd 


r>. 


-:  ■•'■¥?* 


■■<>: 


'i^  ■  ^ 


C 


i 


S.l.    t«!| 

P'luir 

are  8C| 

broor 
ble  abl 
hillocif 
'i'herel 
it  ic  nl 
the  801 
ble  sp(| 
trees, 

Thel 
several 
lire-wc 
IbunJa 


''"■!"w-Wiii, 


/' 


«     tH*-^ 


BLLMS  AMERICAN  (JUAbT  FlLOl.  4< 

.'(.ij  i'«;(;t  water  on  it.  If  you  go  no  fartlier  to  llio  w«^st«anl  than  for  (!io  liglils  on 
J'luinb  Island  to  bear  S.  W.  tlicrc  is  no  danger  from  ••itlier  of  the  above-ujcn- 

are  scarcely  worthy  u/  remark ;  beach  grass  is  the  principal,  and  is  used  only  for  manufacturing 
brooms.  A  species  of  plumb,  from  which  the  island  derives  its  name,  grows  here  in  tolera- 
ble abundance.  It  is  produced  on  low  running  shrubi^,  on  the  summit  and  sides  of  the  sand 
hillocks,  it  is  pleasant  to  the  taste,  and  generally  ia  its  season,  an  article  for  the  market. 
There  is  likewise  the  boach  pea,  of  which  little  or  no  use  has  ever  been  made ;  and  indeed 
it  ii'  not  found  in  sutTicicnt  plenty  to  become  much  more  than  a  rticic  of  curiosity.  At 
the  southernmost  end  of  the  island  there  are  several  houses,  with  "iiilies,  and  a  considera- 
i)le  spot  of  land,  in  good  cultivation.  To  '.he  northward  of  thi  iierc  is  a  grove  of  pine 
trees,  of  a  mile  and  a  half  in  extent. 

The  Marine  Society  of  Ncwburyport  erected  some  years  sincn,  at  their  own  expense, 
several  huts  at  proper  distances  from  each  other,  and  from  the  nhnre,  and  supplied  them  with 
lire-works,  fuel,  straw,  &c.  but  owing  to  the  strong  wiu'ls,  driving  the  sand  from  tbr Ir 
foundations,  and  the  inhuman  conduct  of  people  who  visited  the  islam'  in  summer,  these  huts 
were,  in  a  few  years,  totally  destroyed.  The  misfortunes  attending  this  generous  and  hu- 
mane attempt  in  favour  of  the  shipwrecked  mariner,  deterred  the  Marine  Society,  as  well 
as  other  bodies  and  individuals,  from  a  like  benevolent  attempt,  until  the  establishment  of 
the  Merrimack  Humane  Society  in  1S02,  conceiving  it  absolutely  necessary  that  some  relief 
should  be  aifurded  the  unfortunate  sufferer  on  so  desolate  a  spot,  and  in  the  most  inclement 
:<eason  of  the  year,  the  society  voted  to  build  three  huts  on  the  island,  and  have  already  car- 
ried their  generous  resolutions  into  fili  effect.  The  exertions  of  this  benevolent  institution 
will  be,  in  future,  to  preserve  thes  ut!*  in  repair,  and  in  perfect  supply  of  materials  for  fire, 
and  other  necessaries  for  the  sup^.  >rt  u  !  preservation  of  life.  Many,  no  doubt,  will  owe 
their  lives  to  the  humanity  of  this  des  „  and  with  grateful  feelings  contribute  themselves, 
to  the  preservation  of  others.  ';  'e  cx^^'eiise  and  trouble  will  be  trivial  in  comparison  with 
the  noble  purposes  it  may  answer  -.  and  the  hope  of  its  answering  these  purposes,  will  be 
alone  a  sulHcient  remuneration  to  the  generous  projectors. 

From  the  report  of  a  committee,  ppuinted  by  the  society,  we  have  the  following  descrip- 
tion of  the  huts,  and  directions  to  the  mariner  to  find  them. 

The  house  for  the  keeper  i  the  lights,  erected  by  the  United  States,  is  about  twenty  rods 
south  from  the  lighi-iiouses. 

About  2500  paces,  or  1^  mile  south  from  this  house  and  the  lights,  on  the  inside  of  the 
island*  is  the  first  hut  to  which  the  mariner,  in  day-light,  may  be  directed  by  a  beacon,  about 
300  paces  to  the  E.  with  a  hand  pointing  to  the  hut. 

2900  paces,  or  about  1^  mile  south  from  this  is  the  second  hut,  with  a  similar  beacon,  about 
400  paces  S.  E.  pointing  to  it. 

1700  paces,  or  about  one  mile  south  from  this,  is  a  third,  with  a  beacon,  bearing  E.  500 
paces  distant. 

5000  paces,  or  about  3  miles  S.  of  this,  is  a  house,  occupied  by  Mr.  Spiller  and  family,  which 
is  about  one  mile  from  the  S.  end  of  the  island,  and  about  W.  one  mile  from  the  S.  end  of  the 
inland,  are  two  other  houses  with  families. 

These  huts,  together  with  the  other  houses  mentioned,  form  a  chain  from  one  extremity  of 
the  island  to  the  other.  The  unfortunate  mariner,  whose  fate  may  wreck  him  oii  this  shore, 
can,  by  noticing  the  point  of  compass  from  which  the  wind  blows  at  the  time  of  his  being 
wrecked,  be  governed  in  his  course  across  the  island,  where  he  will  find  himself  under  the 
Ice  of  the  higher  land,  and  protected,  in  some  measure,  from  the  violence  of  the  tempest.  By 
keeping  along  the  mai^in  of  the  island,  where  the  travelling  is  good,  and  before  coming  quite 
to  the  marsh,  cither  N.  or  S.  he  will  be  certain  of  meeting  with  one  of  these  huts  or  houses, 
where  he  may  find  temporary  relief.  To  facilitate  still  further  the  means  of  conveying  imme- 
diate assistance  to  those  unfortunate  mariners  who  may  be  wrecked  on  this  island,  a  num- 
ber of  gentlemen  were  incorporated  for  the  purpose,  and  have  completed  a  bridge  and  turnpike 
road  from  Newburyport  to  Plumb  Island.  This  road  leads  in  a  south-easterly  direction  ft'om 
Newburyport,  and  the  bridge  crosses  Plumb  Island  near  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  to  the 
S.  W.  of  Seal  Island.  An  elegant  hotel  has  been  erected  at  the  east  end  of  the  bridge,  with- 
in 100  rods  of  the  seashore,  one  mile  south  from  the  lights,  and  about  three-fourths  of  a  mile 
northerly  from  the  northernmost  house  erected  by  the  Merrimack  Humane  Society  before- 
mentioned.  The  hotel  is  painted  white,  has  three  white  chimneys,  and  may  serve  as  aland 
mark  for  seamen. 

If  a  vessel,  by  stress  of  weather,  should  be  obliged  to  run  ashore  on  this  island,  and  the 
master  can  make  any  choice  of  place,  it  is  mOst  eligible  to  run  on  as  nearly  opposite  this  bouse 
as  possible,  as  assistance  and  shelter  can  be  more  promptly  afforded,  and  the  communication 
more  direct  with  Newburyport. 

It  rarely  happens  that  any  life  is  lost  on  this  beach,  in  attempting  to  escape  from  the  wreck, 
when  the  crew  remain  on  board  till  low  tide.  Unless  the  vessel  is  in  imminent  danger  of  jro- 
ins  to  pieces  immediately,  the  seamen  sliould  ?ierpr  taJie  to  their  honf. 


/ 


-l« 


BLLM  S     AiMEKK  AN    COAST    riLUl. 


lionetl  rocks,  Imt  Ihiit  course  to  the  bar,  would  run  you  on  the  north  brcjiliiMs  ; 
therefore  you  must  bring  the  lights  to  bear  W.  I»y  S.  and  anchor  in  11  or  12  fa- 
llioms  water,  if  the  tide  will  not  permit  your  coming  in.     No  vessel,  in  cominj:; 
in,  ought  to  go  nearer  the  south  breaker  than  7  fathoms  ^water,  nor  nearer  the 
north  breaker,  in  coming  from  the  eastward,  than  0  fathoms.     There  are  seve- 
ral pilots  belonging  to  this  harbour,  who  will,  if  possible,  be  outside  the  bar,  to 
lake  command  of  any  vessel  wanting  their  assistance.     If  they  cannot,  you  must 
keep  the  lights  in  range,  and  run  for  them  till  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  east- 
ern light,  when  you  must  haul  to  the  westward,  and  anchor  between  the  two 
lights  in  4  fathoms  water.     A  vessel  that  draws  10  feet  water  may  come  in  at 
two-thirds  flood.     They  should  always  keep  to  the  windward  of  the  bar,  unless 
the  wind  should  be  fair.     If  the  sea  is  so  great  as  to  prevent  the  pilots  getting  over, 
a  signal  will  be  made  by  him,  when  you  must  run  direct  for  his  boat,  keeping  th»; 
lights  in  range,  which  will  carry  you  safe  over.     If  your  cables  and  anchors  are 
not  good,  you  may  bring  the  western  light-house  to  bear  S.  E.  by  S.  and  run  N. 
W.  by  N.  for  Salisbury  Point  ;*  but  as  soon  as  you  make  said  point,  you  must 
haul  up  N.  W.  which  course  will  carry  yoQ  clear  of  Badger's  Rocks,f  Black 
Rocks,  and  the  Hump  Sands.     Across  the  channel,  from  the  Hump  Sands  to 
Black  Rock  creek,  lie  7  or  8  piers,  on  which  are  from  7  to  2^  feet  water,  at  low 
water,  which  were  sunk  in  the  year  1776.  and  have  not  since  been  removed  ;  the 
mark  to  pass  between  them  is  to  bring  the  beacon,  at  the  west  end  of  the  town 
of  Newburyport,  (which  may  be  distinctly  seen  in  clear  weather,)  over  the  south 
corner  of  the  north  meeting-house.     The  Hump  Sands  lie  S.  W.  from  Salisbury 
Point,  which  makes  the  channel  very  narrow  and  difficult  for  strangers.     When 
you  pass  the  Black  Rocks,  you  must  haul  up  W.  by  S.  d  S.  which  will  bring  you 
m  channel  way,  and  good  anchorage.     And  if  it  be  m  the  night,  or  dark  weather, 
when  you  judge  yourself  about  half  a  mile  from  Black  Rock,  you  may  come  too 


'*'  In  a  course  nearly  N.  from  the  li|;ht-houses  on  Plumb  Island,  and  about  half  a  mile  dis- 
tant, across  the  mouth  of  Merrimack  river,  is  the  southern  extremity  of  Salisbury  beach,  call- 
ed Salisbury  Point.  From  this  point,  a  sand  beach  extends  on  the  verge  of  the  ocean,  with- 
out an  inlet  or  interruption  of  any  consequence,  until  it  reaches  Hampton  river.  This  beach 
is  connected  with  the  main  land  by  a  salt  marsh  of  considerable  extent,  intersected  by  a  vari- 
ety of  small  rivulets  and  creeks,  which  render  it  impossible  for  a  ship- wrecked  mariner  to 
reach  the  inhabited  parts  of  Salisbury.  Here,  too,  the  hapless  seaman  is  sometimes  destined 
to  suffer  the  misfortunes  of  shipwreck,  and  to  reach  a  desolate  and  inhospitable  shore,  only  to 
aggravate  the  horrors  of  his  death.  If  he  can  attain  the  first  and  wished-for  object,  in  evad- 
ing the  jaws  of  the  angry  ocean,  h^  yet  finds  himself  a  solitary  wanderer  on  the  coast,  with- 
out shelter  and  without  sustenance  ;  and  in  his  fruitless  search  for  them,  must  inevitably  pe- 
rish. As  the  N.  E.  storms  are  generally  most  fatal  to  vessels  on  this  part  of  the  coast,  Salis- 
bury beach  is  not  so  often  a  place  of  shipwreck  as  Plumb  Island.  But  to  guard  aginet  a  possi- 
bility of  accident,  which  must  sometimes  happen  to  the  unskilful  or  inexperienced  navigator, 
the  Marine  Society  erected  a  hut,  similar  to  those  on  Plumb  Island.  Here  they  deposited  every 
thing  necessary  for  the  relief  of  such  as  might  need  it,  and  were  at  the  pains  and  expense  fre- 
quently to  inspect  it,  and  renew  their  generosity  by  replenishing  it ;  but  this  has  shared  tlie 
same  fate  with  those  on  Plumb  Island,  not  so  much,  however,  from  the  insufficiency  of  its 
foundation,  or  the  violence  of  the  winds,  as  from  the  wantonness  of  individuals  and  compa- 
nies who  frequent  this  spot  in  the  warm  season,  on  parties  of  pleasure.  The  Merrimock  Hu- 
mane Society  have  extended  their  benevolent  views  to  this  part  of  the  coast,  and  have  erect- 
ed a  hut  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  north  from  Black  Rocks,  so  called,  and  about  150  pa- 
ces from  the  sea  shore.  This  hut  will  be  maintained  in  commodious  repair,  and  provided  with 
every  thing  suitable  for  those  who  may  be  so  unfortunate  as  to  need  its  shelter.  Others  on 
the  same  coast  will  be  erected  as  speedily  as  the  funds  of  the  society,  and  the  charities  of  in- 
dividuals, will  render  it  possible,  and  will  be  conveniently  furnished,  and  provided  fur  the  same 
laudable  purposes. 

t  Badger's  rocks  bear  N.  W.  ^  N.  from  the  light-houses,  distant  half  a  mile,  and  are  co- 
vered at  two-thirds  flood,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand.  Black  Rocks  bear  N.  W. 
from  the  light-houses,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant,  and  are  always  dry,  which  you  also 
leave  on  your  starboard  hand.  Half  tide  rocks,  (on  which  is  placed  a  pier, )  bear  W.  by  S.  .'( 
S.  from  Black  Rocks,  distant  one  mile  and  a  half,  and  bare  at  half  tide,  which  you  leave  on 
your  larboard  hand.  North  rocks,  (which  also  have  a  pier  on  them,)  bear  W.  by  S.  from  Black 
Kocks,  distant  one  mile  and  a  half,  and  are  seen  only  at  very  low  tides,  wlrich  you  leave  on 
jour  slavboard  liand,  between  which  and  Half  TiJc  ROcks  is  the  channel. 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


49 


►rth  breakers ; 
in  11  or  13  fa- 
iscl,  in  coming 
nor  nearer  tiie 
lere  are  scve- 
de  the  bar,  to 
not,  you  must 
Ih  of  the  east- 
ween  the  two 
ay  come  in  at 
he  bar,  unless 
s  getting  over, 
t,  keeping  the 
d  anchors  are 
S.  and  run  N. 
int,  you  must 
tocks,f  Black 
nnp  Sands  to 
water,  at  low 
■emoved ;  the 
d  of  the  toxvii 
)ver  the  south 
•om  Salisbury 
igers.  When 
vill  bring  you 
lark  weather, 
lay  come  too 

half  a  mile  dis- 
ury  beach,  call- 
be  ocean,  with- 
^-,    This  beach 
ted  by  a  van- 
ned mariner  to 
times  destined 
shore,  only  to 
bject,  in  evad- 
coast,  with- 
inevitably  pe- 
coast,  Salis- 
aginst  a  possi- 
ccd  navigator, 
posited  every 
expense  fre- 
as  shared  tlie 
riciency  of  its 
and  compa- 
rrimack  Hii- 
havc  erect- 
ibout  150  pa- 
)rovided  witli 
Others  on 
arities  of  in- 
for  the  samo 

and  arc  co- 
bear  N.W, 
Ich  you  also 
W.  by  S.  :^ 
rou  leave  on 
'  from  Black 
ou  leave  on 


with  safety.     I  would  recommend  to  all  mastt-rs,  w  hether  they  beton|;  to  New 
buryport  or  not,  to  avoid  attemptins;  that  port  in  a  gule  of  easterly  wind,  except 
they  are  well  acquainted,  and  have  a  good  prospect  of  getting  in,  as  no  pilot  chii 
get  over  the  bar  when  it  blows  a  gale  from  the  eastward.     And  if  you  shouUI 
make  Cape  Ann  lights,  and  bring  them  to  bear  S.  by  K.  or  the  Dry  Salvages  to 
bear  S.  by  E.  you  may  run  with  safety  N.  by  VV.  or  N.  i  W.  distant  10  leagues 
from  Cape  Ann  to  Portsmouth.     In  running  the  above  course,  you  will  make  the. 
Isles  of  Shoals,  if  it  is  any  way  clear,  from   which  you  lake  a  now  departure; 
when  you  pass  the  said  islands,  you  bring  Star  Island,  (on  which  the  meeting- 
house stands,)  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  and  then  steer  N.  N.  W.  distant  from  said  island 
3  leagues  to  Portsmouth  ;  or  give  White  Island  light  a  birth  of  a  mile  and  a  half, 
bringmg  it  to  bear  east,  and  then  run  N.  by  W.  for  Portsmouth  light.     (White 
Island  is  the  south-western-most  island.)     There  is  a  very  good  harbour  in  the 
Isles  of  Shoals  from  the  wind  from  north-easterly  round  to  southerly,  and  you 
may  lie  land-locked  with  any  of  them ;  but  if  t!ie  wind  hauls  to  the  S.  W.  or 
W.  N.  W.  you  may  run  in  between  Smutty-Nose  Island,  wiiich  has  a  wind-mill 
on  it,  and  Hog  Island,  where  there  is  water  enough  for  a  first  rate  man  of  war; 
and  where  you  anchor,  have  12  fathoins,  muddy  bottom.    (For  description  of 
Isles  of  Shoals,  see  page  44.) 

In  going  into  Portsmouth,  you  may  bring  the  light-house  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  till 
you  get  within  Wood  Island.  Then  you  may  haul  away  N.  or  N.  by  E.  till 
you  pass  the  light-house;  you  may  then  haul  up  VV.  N.  W.  or  N.  W.  by  W.  and 
bring  the  light-house  point  to  shut  in  with  Wood  Island,  where  you  will  be  ss^fe 
from  all  winds,  and  may  anchor  in  8  (»r  9  fatlioms  water. 

When  you  come  from  the  eastward,  with  the  wind  at  E.  or  E.  S.  E.  with 
which  wind  you  cannot  weather  away  Cape  Ann  ;  and  you  are  to  the  northward 
of  the  Isles  of  Shoals,  your  only  shift  is  to  Portsmouth,  and  you  are  obliged  to 
run  so  far  to  the  westward  as  to  bring  said  port  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  as,  g^snerally, 
the  wind  at  E.  at  sea,  hauls  two  or  three  points  tq  the  northward,  which  makes  it 
H  head  wind.     [OC?"  See  the  Plate.] 


1  SIGNALS  FOR  VESSELS, 

When  in  sight,  supposed  to  be  bound  for  Newburyport,  and  the  sea  is  so  large 
on  the  bar  that  pilots  cannot  get  out  to  their  assistance. 

When  9.  vessel  comes  into  the  bay,  and  cannot  come  over  the  bar  at  High  Wa- 
ter, owing  to  insutHciency  of  the  tide,  a  IIeu  Square  Flag  will  be  hoisted  up 
and  a  Pendant  under  it,  and  as  soon  as  those  signals  are  seen  from  the  vessel 
in  the  bay,  she  must  keep  '»ff,  and  try  some  other  port. 

When  the  usual  signals  for  vessels  are  kept  up,  the  vi.'ssel  must  lay  off  and  on 
at  the  bar,  keeping  to  windward,  until  sigr)als  be  made  for  her  to  come  in  ;  and 
when  it  is  a  suitable  time  to  come  over  the  bar,  a  tttn  Sqi^vuk  Flag  will  be 
hoisted  half  mast;  she  may  then  come  in,  keeping  tht  lights  in  range. 

When  a  Pendant  is  hoisted  half  mast,  the  vessel  may  come  in,  keeping  the 
lights  a  little  open  to  the  northward. 

When  a  Blue  Burgee  is  hoisted  half  mast,  the  vessel  may  come  in,  keeping 
the  lights  a  little  open  to  the  southioard. 

When  a  vessel  is  seen  in  the  hay,  and  does  not  come  in  before  night  comes  on, 
the  following  lights  will  be  made,  viz. 

^  For  a  vessel  to  keep  off,  and  not  attempt  to  come  in  over  the  bar  during  thr- 
night,  a  Lantern  will  be  hoisted  to  the  top  of  the  flag-staff. 

When  there  is  a  proper  time  for  a  vessel  to  come  in  over  the  bar  during  the 
night,  TWO  Lanterns  will  be  hoisted,  one  at  the  top  of  the  flag-staff,  and  th(>- 
other  half  mast  high.  The  vessel  must  then  lay  off  and  on  at  the  bar  until  a 
light  is  made  in  the  eastern  light-house,  at  a  window  about  eight  feet  below  the 
lantern.  The  vessel  may  then  come  over  the  bar,  keeping  the  lights  in  range., 
and  when  she  gets  abreast  of  the  upper  light,  there  is  'j;(»od  anchorage. 

The  signal  for  a  vessel  in  distress,  is  a  White  Square  Flag,  with  a  largfi 
Mack  ball  in  the  centre,  hoisted  half  mast  high. 

■  7 


jO 


llLBNl's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 
'  Direttions  for  Aniiis  Squam  Harbour*  in  Ipswich  Bay. 


The  masters  of  vessels  out  of  Newburyport  should  generally  be  acquainted 
with  the  harbour  of  Squam;  and  for  their  benefit  a  PLAN  of  the  harbtmr  has 
been  taken  from  actual  survey,  which  will  be  of  the  greatest  importance,  when 
obliged  to  make  a  harbour  from  Ipswich  Bay,  through  stress  of  weather.  When 
a  vessel  at  anchor  off  Newburyport  Bar,  cannot  get  into  port,  or  parts  a  cable, 
with  the  wind  at  N.  E.  or  E.  N.  E.  if  she  can  carry  double  reeeted  s:iils,  she  may 
run  S.  S.  E.  5  leagues,  which  course,  if  made  good,  will  carry  her  a  little  to  the 
eastwaiti  of  Squam  Bar;  and  if  the  weather  is  so  clear  as  to  see  half  a  mile 
when  you  make  the  land  to  the  eastward  of  Squam,  you  may  run  within  a 
i:ablc's  length  of  the  shore;  your  course  is  S.  S.  W. 

Squam  Bar  bears  from  Hallowboat  Point  (the  N.  E.  point  of  Cape  Ann)  from 
W.  S.  W.  to  S.  W.  distant  about  two  leagues.  In  running  from  Hallowboat 
Point,  you  must  be  careful  of  Plumb  Cove  Ledge,  which  shows  itself  till  near 
high  water,  and  bears  from  Squam  light  N.  N.  E.  a  little  northerly,  distance 
live-eighths  of  a  mile.  When  you  have  passed  this  ledge,  you  leave  a  deep  cove, 
called  Hodgkin's  Cove,  and  a  long  point  or  neck  of  land,  called  Davis'  Neck,  on 
your  larboard  hand.  When  up  with  this  neck,  haul  S.  W.  or  S.  W.  by  W.  for 
Squam  Bar.  ^ 

In  sailing  into  this  harbour,  bring  the  light  to  bear  due  S.  when  at  the  distance 
of  one  mile,  and  run  directly  for  it,  leaving  Haradan's  Rock  (which  lies  N.  by 
E.  i  E.  from  the  light,  distant  three-eighths  of  a  mile)  on  your  larboard  hand  ; 
continue  your  course  till  within  5G  yards  of  the  light-house,  then  haul  up  S.  S.  W. 
for  the  Bar  Rock,  leaving  the  light-house  on  your  larboard,  and  the  bar,  which 
Runs  nearly  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  (leaving  the  river  about  80  fathoms  broad,  opposite 
the  light-house)  on  your  starboard  hand.  In  running  this  course  you  will  leave 
the  Loteter  Rocks  (which  lie  S.  by  W.  from  the  light-house,  distant  200  yards, 
and  are  dry  at  low  water)  on  your  larboard  hand.  When  up  v  ith  the  Bar  Rotks 
(which  lie  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  are  dry  till  nearly  high  water)  steer  S.  by 
E.  I  E.  till  you  open  the  houses,  and  you  may  anchor  in  from  3^  to  5  fathoms, 
clear  sandy  bottom ;  or  run  your  vessel  on  shore  on  the  starboarl  hand,  in  case 
you  have  neither  cables  nor  anchors. 

When  a  stranger  is  obliged  to  run  for  Squam  Harbour,  and  is  doubtful  whether 
to  enter  on  account  of  the  depth  of  water,  he  had  best  anchor  baek  of  the  bar, 
and  he  will  immediately  h-ive  assistance  from  the  light  house,  if  it  is  possible  for 
a  boat  to  live;  if  the  weather  is  so  boisterous  that  a  boat  cannot  come  <»T,  a  flag 
will  be  hoisted  on  shore  near  the  light-house,  as  soon  as  there  is  water  enough 
for  a  vessel  on  the  bar,  when  he  may  run  in  as  above  directed. 

A  canal  connects  this  harbour  with  that  of  Gloucester.  It  is  about  120  rods 
in  length,  30  feet  wide,  and  has  for  its  depth  aboiijt  the  whole  flow  of  the  tide, 
which  is  about  12  feet  in  spring  tides,  and  8  feet  in  neap. 

If  you  are  bound  to  Ipswich,  your  course  from  Hallowboat  Point  to  the  mouth 
of  the  channel  that  leads  into  tlie  harbour,  is  W.  ^  N.  distant  about  eight  miles. 
There  are  two  beacons  erected  a  small  distance  to  the  southward  of  Castle  Hill, 
which  may  be  run  for,  but  as  the  bar  is  often  removed  by  storms,  it  is  not  safe 
to  ran  into  the  harbour  unless  acquainted. 

mCf^  See  Plan  of  Annis  Squam.] 

*  Annia  Squam  light-house  is  a  wooden  building,  of  an  octagonal  form,  about  40  (eet 
high,  containing  a  fixed  light,  elevated  about  50  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  water  at  com- 
mon high  tides.  It  is  painted  white,  and  may  be  known  by  being  lower  than  any  other 
light'.house  on  the  ceast  of  Massachusetts,  and  its  inland  situation.  It  bears  from  Ports- 
mouth light-house  about  S.  by  W.  distant  10  or  11  kagues,  and  from  I^ewburyport  Bar  S. 
S.  E.  5  leagues. 


J*   '  ^.rf.sWW*-  *    >• 


.til 


*» 


I  Bay. 

be  acquainted 
he  harbour  has 
portance,  uhon 
nather.  When 
r  parts  a  cable, 
1  sails,  she  may 
r  a  little  to  the 
lee  half  a  mile 
f  run  within  a 

ape  Ann)  from 
m  Hrillowboat 
itself  till  near 
lerly,  distance 
'e  a  deep  cove, 
avis'  Neck,  on 
Vf.  by  W.  for 

>t  the  distance 
ich  lies  N.  br 
rboard  hand'; 
JiupS.  S.  W. 
he  bar,  which 
•oad,  opposite 
you  will  leave 
int  200  yards, 
he  Bar  Rocks 
t)  steer  S.  by 
o  5  falhiims, 
hand,  in  case 

')tful  whether 
If  of  the  bar, 
possible  for 
me  oT,  a  flag 
i^ater  enough 

3ut  120  rods 
of  the  tide, 

o  the  mouth 

eiftht  miles. 

Castle  Hill, 

is  not  safe 

Squam.] 

bout  40  Ceet 
'ater  at  corn- 
9in  any  other 
from  Ports- 
lixurt  Bar  S. 


;€.- 


4'" 


,     fi. 


.?  *v 


1 

; 


^:t: 


V..W  I 


i    I 


'i 


■•?y.  y  *f-.<<.  .-^.._  •■  /.I  ■■ 


Si^ll 

r 

^H 

Ir 

1 

\ 

'Tl 


•* 
>„ 


^ 

N 


I 


%. 


****■'  «.  ™ 


*    *    «<■ 

*  .A* 

.  -^ 

P| 

I**.. 

^i^ 

_        *»*^ 

iS     '^ 

"-X-: 

^S 

BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Directions  'o  go  rnio  Cape   Ann  Ha.bcar. 


51 


-jlK, 


When  you  come  from  the  eastward,  an«l  make  Cape  Ann  liyhii'  u\  th':  "'.ght, 
bring  them  to  bear  S.  W.  and  run  direct  for  them,  which  ccur^f  ^*ill  carr>  you 
within  the  Londoner,  and  when  you  pass  the  said  recks,  hr'ui\^  tlie  Ivo  lights  in 
one,  at  which  time  they  will  bear  N.  by  E.  3  E.  and  thi-n  ti'-  <  S.  S.  ^V^  .|  W. 
keepiii'  said  course  about  one  mile,  which  will  carry  you  cu  r.  of  Mil'f  island, 
which  is  very  low,  and  cannot  be  seen  in  a  darK  ni^ht.  VV!-  •'  y<<u  .'jadge  your- 
self to  the  westward  of  said  island,  you  haul  to  the  westward  ..l\\  sou  bring  th« 
lights  to  bear  E.  N.  E.  when  you  must  steer  VV.  S.  W.  about  five  milea,  which 
course  will  carry  you  to  Eastern  Point.  When  you  pass  said  point,  keep  your 
course  W.  S.  W,  until  you  bring  Norman's  Woe,  which  is  the  highest  land  on 
the  north  side  of  the  harbour,  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  then  run  N.  N.  W.  till  you  shut 
the  lights  in,  then  N.  N.  E.  will  carry  you  safe  in. 

If  you  want  to  go  inside  the  Salvages,  keep  close  aboard  Hallowboat  Point, 
which  has  a  tree  on  the  eastern  pirt  of  it,  and  steer  S.  S.  E.  for  Straight's 
Mouth  Island,  but  be  careful  to  avoid  Avery's  Rock,  by  keeping  the  lights  on 
the  dry  point  of  Straight's  Mouth  Island,  till  you  get  up  close  aboard,  then  haul 
round  the  point,  and  S.  S.  E.  will  carry  you  to  the  lights.  To  avoid  the  Lon- 
doner, you  must  keep  the  lights  close  aboard  the  body  of  the  island,  on  which 
they  stand;  the  Londoner  lies  half  a  mile  off,  breaks  at  all  times  of  tide,  is 
quite  dry  at  low  water,  and  bears  E.  S.  E,  from  the  middle  of  Thatcher's  Island. 
A  long  shoal  runs  off  N.  E.  half  a  mile  distant  from  the  Londoner.  Between 
the  Londoner  and  Thatcher's  Island  there  arc  3.^  fathoms  at  low  water.  From 
the  Salvages  to  Hallowboat  Point  and  Sandy  Bay,  there  lies  a  large  spot  of  flat 
ground,  which  at  low  water  will  take  up  a  small  vessel.  Otitside  the  Salvages  is 
very  bold.  Hallowboat  Point  bears  from  the  Salvages  VV.  N.  W.  U  miles  dis- 
tant, and  the  Salvages  bear  from  the  lights  N.  N.  E.  fJ  miles  distant. 

In  sailing  from  Cape  Ann  lignts  to  Cape  Aim  Harbour,  you  will  first  open 
Braces  Cove,  before  you  cume  up  with  the  harbour,  which  will,  when  open,  bejir 
N.  N.  W.  which  you  must  avoid.  Cape  Ann  Harbour  lies  o;ie  nile  farther  to  the 
westward,  and  when  open,  bears  N.  N.  E. 

We  are  also  requested  by  a  gentleman  in  whom  implicit  confidence  may  be 
placed,  to  state,  that  no  shoal  or  ledge  lies  off  the  west  to  shore  oT  ^his  harbour,  from 
Kettle  Bottom  to  Ten  Pound  Island,  more  than  a  c;.i.iti's  leosr..i;  therefore  giving 
the  western  shore  a  birth  «>f  Li  cable's  length,  and  <■  nuig  "..  E.  keeping  Ten 
Pound  Island  light  open  with  Nornian's  Woe,  unti'  '  .jlfer'^j  iiland  lights  are  shut 
in  with  Norman's  Woe,  then  steer  E.  N.  E.  upti  -^ii  Pound  Island  light  bdars 
from  N.  to  N.  N.  W.  nviII  bring  them  into  as  good 
hour,  to  the  eastward  of  Ten  Pound  Ledge,  in  7  to 
lorn,  and  good  holding  ground. 


ii"!io'Mf^f  as  any  in  the  h.ir- 
io  fati»onis  watu,  clear  hot- 


>^:'' 


Ten  Pound  Island  Light -House. 


'^. 


Vessels  bound  for  Cape  Ann  Harbour,  and  fu'lipg  in  to  the  eastward  of  the 
eastern  poiiit,  must  give  tli.-  point  a  birth  of  about  one  mile,  and  wtien  the  light 
on  Ten  Pound  Island  bears  N.  N.  E.  you  are  then  to  t'  e  westward  of  the  ledge, 
that  extends  off  from  the  point,  on  which  is  a  Spar  Buoy,  the  head  painted  red. 


*  Cape  Ann  light-houses  are  built  on  Thatcher's  Island,  which  li<!a  about  tu'«  miles  out 
of  the  south  east  point  of  Cape  Ann,  and  forms  the  northi^rn  liintts  of  MaBsanbusetU  Bay. 
The  lanterns  urc  clevattvl  ubout  'JO  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  iinr  contain  fixed  c/i/.s, 
which  ^y  be  seen  snveu  or  eight  lugues  distant.  A  ledfjelies  ofi"i'hatther"s  l«liimi,  a~  nns- 
cribe(>       page  58,  tkc.  uuder  ''  iWr  ctions  for  Maiblchead." 

i  .  c.  Pound  Island  lies  in  the  harbuur  of  Cape  Ann.  There  is  a  Wght  house  on  it,  con- 
tiiining  '  fu-ed-light ;  the.  base  of  which  ia  about  2r»  left  al«>ve  the  level  of  the  sea,  Mwl  the 
tower  i'  feet  bigli- 


ULUiM'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


'n  10  Inet  water,  at  low  water,  bearing  from  Ten  Pound  Rock  E.  i  S.  and  may 
hteor  direct  for  the  light:  (this  ledj^e  bears  from  the  light  on  Ten  Poupd  Islantl 
S.  by  W.  i  W.  and  is  about  half  or  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  shore.) 
Running  thisN.  N.  E.  course,  will  carry  you  between  Ten  Pound  Island  and 
Ten  Pound  Ledge,  which  bears  from  the  lighl  S.  W.  ^  W.  about  iv/o-thirds  of 
a  mile  distance,  has  but  aix  feet  water  at  low  spring  tides,  and  is  about  10  fathoms 
diameter.  Passing  between  the  island  and  the  ledge,  you  will  have  13  to  10 
ieet  Witter  at  low  spring  tides ;  the  east  end  of  Ten  P«>und  Island  is  foul  ground, 
;ind  no  safe  passage  :  the  south,  west,  and  north  sides  are  butd,  and  may  be  ap- 
proached within  40  to  80  fathoms  at  low  water ;  give  the  west  end  of  the  island 
H  birth  of  50  to  70  fathoms,  and  steer  in  for  the  inner  harbour  N.  E. ;  you  may 
anchor  at  any  distance  from  100  fathoms  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the 
island,  the  light  will  then  bear  from  S.  to  S.  \V.  anchor  in  6,  5,  4,  or  3  fathoms 
spring  low  tides,  muddy  bottom ;  this  inner  harbour  is  safe  against  all  winds  that 
blow. 

Bound  for  Cape  Ann  Harbour,  and  falling  in  to  the  westward,  as  far  as  Half- 
way Rock,  take  care  not  to  bring  the  light  on  Ten  Pound  Island  to  bear  to  the 
eastward  of  N.  E.  by  N.  until  you  are  a  mile  or  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  eastward 
of  Half-way  Rock,  to  avoid  the  S.  E.  breakers  that  extend  from  Baker's  Island, 
jnd  which  bear  from  the  lights  on  Baker's  Island  S.  E.  h  S.  to  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  and 
about  &\  miles  distant.  On  the  S.  E.  part  of  tiiese  breakers  is  placed  a  spar 
buoy,  painted  black,  bearing  from  Half-way  Rock  N.  E.  by  E.  about  one  mile 
distant,  and  from  the  lights  on  Baker's  island  S.  S.  E.  -i  E.  2i  miles.  When 
}>assed  to  the  eastward  of  these  breakers,  yon  may  then  bring  the  light  on  Ten 
Pound  Island  to  bear  N.  E.  and  run  for  it;  on  tliis  course  you  will  leave  Ten 
Pound  ledge  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  the  ledges  oft"  Norman's  Woe  Rock 
and  Fresii  Water  Cove  on  your  larboard  hand ;  when  up  with  Ten  Pound  Island, 
a1»choras  above  directed. 

The  outer  harbour  of  Cape  Ann  is  a  safe  and  good  anchorage  against  a  north- 
erly or  east  wind,  when  you  may  anchor  in  T-i  to  Gj  fathoms,  low  tides,  muddy 
bottom,  the  Hght-house  bearing  about  S.  E.  by  E.  distant  about  one  mile  or  a 
mile  and  a  half. 

The  S.  E.  ''arbour  is  also  a  safe  and  good  anchorage  against  a  northerly,  east, 
and  to  the  souJi-east  winds;  bring  the  light  to  bear  from  N.  by  E.  to  N.lS.Wan- 
chor  in  9,  «,  7,  or  6  fathoms  at  low  spring  tides,  muddy  bottom;  distance  from 
the  light,  one-eighth  to  half  a  mile. 

Gloucester  canal,  which  cormects  the  harbour  with  Squam  river,  passes  im- 
mediately by  the  west  part  of  the  town,  or  what  is  called  the  harbour  parish.  It 
iS  about  120  rods  in  length,  SO  feet  wide,  and  has  for  its  depth  about  the  whole 
flow  of  the  tide.  It  was  excavated  at  low  water  mark,  spring  tides;  J<ay  in  spring 
iides  12  feet,  neap  tides  8  feet. 

Bearings  of  several  Ledges  from  the  light  on  Ten  Pound  Island,  viz. — 

The  ledge  that  makes  off  from  the  eastern  point,  bears  from  the  light  S.  by  W. 
hW'  about  two  miles  distant,  and  has  from  6  to  10  feet  water  at  low  tides:  thif^ 
'edge  lies  off  from  the  eastern  point  about  half  a  mile. 

There  is  a  single  rock  that  lies  about  midway  between  the  eastern  point  and 
Norman's  Woe,  called  the  Round  Rock,  on  which  is  a  spur  buoy,  in  2i  fathoms, 
low  water.  The  head  of  this  buoy  is  painted  black,  and  bears  from  the  light- 
iiouse  on  Ten  Pound  Island,  S.  W.  i  S.  distant  H  mile.  Round  Rock  and  Ten 
Pound  ledge  bear  from  each  other  S.  S.  W.  :j  \V.  ai;d  N.  N.  E.  i{  E.— Ten  Pound 
rock  and  Cove  ledge  bear  W.  A  N  and  E.  i  S.  from  e.^ch  other-Vllound  Rock 
and  Cove  ledge  bear  S.  by  W.  and  N.  by  K.  from  each  other- 

A  spar  buoy  is  placed  on  Cove  ledge  oi  Old  Fit  Id  rocks,  in  two  fathoms  at  low 
vater.  The  top  is  painted  black,  and  it  bears  from  the  light-house  W.  by  S. 
half  a  miie  distant. 

A  apar  buoy,  placed  on  the  west  end  of  Dog  Bar  ledge,  with  the  top  painted 
whit«N  Jn  two  fathoms  at  low  water,  commqn  tides.  Itenrinu  from  the  licht-hMUfe 


in'fcr 
ledge 
\  W. 
by  W. 

The  I 
stones,! 
tioiied.i 

Abol 
Normn 
this  ru\ 
tides, 
only  81 
2  mile^ 
Half 


nLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


bS 


!•  i  S.  and  mav 

1  Poupd  Islantl 

om  the  shore.) 

und  Island  and 

It  two-thirds  of 

out  10  fathoms 

have  13  to  1& 

is  foul  ground, 

ind  may  be  ap- 

d  of  the  island 

E-;  you  may 

mile  from  the 

,  or  3  fathoms 

all  winds  that 

is  far  as  HaU- 
to  bear  to  the 
>  the  eastward 
{aker's  Island, 
j>-  E.  i  E.  and 
placed  a  spar 
bout  one  mib; 
niles.  When 
■  light  on  Ten 
ill  leave  Ten 
's  Woe  Rock 
Pound  Island, 

jjnst  a  north- 
tides,  muddy 
>ne  mile  or  a 

irtherly,  east, 
)N.iV.Wan- 
li  stance  from 

,  passes  im- 
ir  parish.  It 
ut  the  whole 
say  in  spring 


ju  Ten  Pound  Island  S.  by  W.  h  W.  dJBtant  U  mile— Dog  Bar  and  Ten  Pound 
ledge  buoy  bear  N.  i  E.  and  S.  i  W.— Dog  Bar  and  liound  Rock  N.  W.  by  W. 

1  W.  and  S.  E.  by  E.  i  F— Dog  Bar  and  Cove  Ledge  S.  by  E.  i  E.  and  N. 
by  W.  iW. 

The  shoal  called  Round  Rock,  is  a  shoal  formed  by  large  and  small  popple 
stones,  and  always  has  the  same  uniform  depth  of  water  on  it,  as  before  men- 
tioned.   Dog  Bar  ci insists  of  large  rocks. 

About  30  faihoms  o;T  from  Norman's  Woe  point  is  a  large  high  rock,  called 
Norman's  Woe  Rock,  of  20  to  SO  fathoms  diameter,  and  about  100  fathoms  off 
this  rock,  in  a  southerly  direction,  is  a  ledge  that  has  7  or  8  feet  water  on  it  at  love 
tides.  About  one  quarter  of  a  mile  off  from  Fresh-w  ater  Cove  lies  a  ledge  with 
only  8  feet  water,  low  spring  tides,  bearing  from   the  light  W.  i  N.  distant 

2  miles. 

Half-way  rock  und  the  rock  on  Ten  Pound  Island,  be<ir  S.  "W.  h  W.  and  N. 
Fi.  d  E.  of  each  other  ;  distance  about  8  or  9  miles. 


Remarks  on  Cashe's  Ledge.       ^ 

DT  AN  EXPERIRNOED  NATIOATOn.       '- 

i  took  my  departure  from  Thatcher's  Island,  which  lies  two  miles  to  the  esujt- 
ward  of  Cape  Ann.  The  island  bore  from  me  N.  8  miles  distant ;  from  the 
bearing,  I  steered  E.  |  N.  65  miles,  with  a  fair  wind,  and  fell  in  with  the  north 
part  of  the  bank,  where  Cashe's  ledge  is,  about  two  leagues  to  the  northward  of 
the  shoal,  in  60  fathoms,  hard  black  clay.  This  bank  lies  N.  and  S.  7  leagues, 
and  E.  and  W.  2,  leagues,  and  in  the  centre  of  the  bank  is  the  shoalest  ground. 
Its  length  and  breadth  is  one  quarter  of  a  mile.  There  are  on  it  in  some  parts 
10  fathoms,  in  others  only  4.^,  all  exceeding  rocky.  In  the  length  of  a  boat  yoa 
will  have  from  10  to  4^  fathoms,  and  there  are  17  fathoms  within  a  cable's  length 
of  the  shoal,  which  gradually  deepens  as  you  stand  from  it,  all  over  the  bank,  to 
90  fathoms:  at*  this  sounding  you  are  on  the  edge  of  the  bank.  You  will,  in  ge- 
neral, have  upon  the  bank  oozy  and  sandy  bottom,  with  black  stones  and  broken 
shells,  till  you  get  into  25  or  30  fathoms ;   it  then  becomes  rocky. 

The  current  sets  exceeding  strong  and  irregular;  in  less  than  an  hour  it  will 
run  all  round  the  compass.  All  ships  and  vessels  should  endeavour  to  steer  clear 
of  this  shoal,  for  I  am  persuaded,  that  in  a  fresh  gale  of  wind  they  must  strike; 
if  not,  the  sea  must  run  so  as  to  founder  them. 

By  four  days  observation,  the  weather  being  exceedingly  clear,  found  the  .«hoal 
to  lie  in  lat,  -J  S^  Oi'  N,  long.  6!)°  1 1'  W. 


ind,  viz.- — 

htS.byW. 
tides:  this 

n  point  and 
"Ik  fathoms, 
n  the  light- 
ck  and  Ten 
Ten  Pound 
ound  Rock 

loms  at  low 
W.  by  S. 

op  {»{iiiitert 
lijrhf-hMtief 


GEORGE'S  SHOALS. 

A  Report  relative  to  the  Survey  of  George's  Shoals,  node  in  the  United  Stales 
schooner  Science,  and  the  sloop  OrbU,  by  direction  of  the  Board  of  ^avy  Commis- 
sioners, and  vnder  the  orders  of  Capt.  Isaac  Hull,  in  1821. 

There  are,  properly,  four  shoals  on  George's  Bank ;  the  whole  of  them  in- 
rluded  between  latitudes  41°  34'  N.  and  41°  5.3'  30' N.  and  longitudes  67^  18'  W. 
and  67^  59'  W.     Between  thftm  there  is  from  15  to  35  fathoms  water. 

The  largest,  and  on  which  is  the  chief  danger,  is  the  most  southerly  and 
westerly.  It  is  somewhat  triangular,  with  a  long  and  narrow  spit  making  out 
from  the  S.  E.  angle.  The  S.  E.  point  is  in  latitude  41©  .34'  N.  and  lon- 
gitude 67°  40  W.  The  west  |,(iint  is  in  lat.  41°  42  N.  and  longitude  67°  59'  W. 
The  N.  E.  point  is  in  latitude  41'^  48  N.  and  lontiitud*-  67^  47  W.  The  *ast 
»lin  side  of  this  slioaJ,  aitliough  somewhat  irregular,  runs  nearly  S.  S.  E  and 
v.  N.  W.  having  on  it  from  three  feet  to  nine  IVithoms  at  common  V>w  w  ^ter 


i^l 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


It  is  composed  of  a  great  number  of  sand  spits,  very  narrow,  so  that  the  width  of 
a  narrow  vessel  will  make  several  fathoms  difference  in  the  depth  of  water. 
The  general  range  of  the  spite  is  from  S.  E.  to  N.  VV.  As  there  are  no  rocks, 
they  are  consequently  liable  to  change,  in  some  measure,  their  positions  and 
ranges.  On  the  eastern  edge,  even  in  calm  weather,  unless  it  be  high  or  low  wa- 
ter, the  tides  run  with  great  rapidity,  and  form  considerable  breakers  when  set- 
ting to  the  westward,  and  a  large  waterfall  when  setting  to  the  eastward.  This 
is  accounted  for,  by  a  knowledge  of  the  fact,  that  directly  on  the  edge  of  this 
9h(»al,  there  is  from  twelve  to  sixteen  fathoms  of  water,  so  that  the  edge  forms  a 
species  of  dam,  stoppuig  the  force  of  the  flood  tide,  and  over  which  the  ebb 
falls. 

When  tiiere  was  considerable  wind,  we  observed  that  the  breakers  were  high- 
er within  the  edge,  to  the  westward,  than  on  the  edge ;  and  I  have  no  doubt  that 
the  water  there  was  still  shoaler,  and  that  we  should  have  seen  the  sand,  had  it 
not  been  for  the  heavy  sea.  The  breakers  were  such,  unless  it  were  entirely 
calm,  that  it  was  impossible  to  go  among  them  with  boats  ;  nor  was  it  considered 
safe  to  attempt  it  with  the  vessels.  For,  besides  the  danger  of  striking  on  the 
hard  sand  spits,  the  vessels  would  have  been  liable  to  be  fdled  by  the  breakers. 
Even  on  the  eastern  edge,  and  at  nearly  slack  water,  the  vessels  were  at  times 
nearly  covered  with  them.  And  it  was  not  thought  necessary  to  attempt  it,  as 
the  objects  of  survey,  to  ascertain  if  there  was  danger  on  the  shoals,  and  the  situ- 
ations and  extent  of  them,  could  be  acc«miplished  without  the  risk. 

Had  not  the  sea  been  very  smooth,  arui  at  higli  water,  we  should  not  have  been 
able  to  have  gotten  on  where  we  found  three  feet,  reducing  it  to  low  water.  The 
prevailing  wind  was  to  the  eastward  ;  and  I  have  no  doubt  but  that  this  place 
would  have  been  bare  with  any  continuance  of  aii  off-shtire  wind. 

I  think  there  are  no  rocks  about  the  shoaU.  We  had  one  cast  on  the  S.  W. 
side,  which  indicated  rocky  bottom,  in  lU  fathoms;  but  I  believe  it  to  have  been 
seme  sharp  stone  that  the  lead  struck  on,  although  I  have  marked  it  according 
to  the  appearance,  on  the  chart.* 

The  centre  of  the  nortliern  shoal  is  in  latitude  41°  53'  30"  N.  and  long.  67°  43' 
W.  It  extends  east  and  west  about  four  miles.  The  shoalest  part  having  six 
fathoms,  is  very  narrow,  and  composed  of  hard  sand.  But  there  is'not  more  than 
twelve  fathoms  of  water  for  three  miles  south  of  the  above  latitude.  On  the 
north  side,  at  two  cable's  length  from  the  shoal,  the  sloop  dropped  into  33  fathoms. 
The  breakers  on  this  shoal  are  very  heavy,  and  wiien  there  should  be  a  sulficient 
sea  to  endanger  a  vessel,  they  may  be  seen  some  miles,  and  heard  at  a  very  con- 
siderable distance ;  and  as  the  shoalest  part  is  not  more  than  a  cable's  length  in- 
side, and  no  danger  near  it,  a  vessel  might  avoid  it. 

To  the  eastward  of  the  last  mentioned  shoal,  in  latitude  41°51'N.  and  longi- 
tude 67°  26  W.  is  another  small  shoal,  with  8  fathoms  water,  having,  however, 
considerable  breakers.  There  are  but  17  fathoms  for  three  miles  N.  of  it.  But 
very  near  to  the  east  of  it,  are  31  fathoms,  and  from  twenty  to  thirty  fathoms  to 
the  south  and  west. 

The  centre  of  the  east  shoal  is  in  latitude  41°  47'  N.  and  longitude  67°  19'  W. 
It  is  about  two  miles  long  from  east  to  west,  and  has  several  fathoms  water.  To 
the  south,  there  an;  but  17  fathoms  for  two  miles,  in  other  directions  there  are 
from  twenty  to  thirty  fathoms. 

The  above  described  shoals,  I  am  confident,  are  all  which  are  on  George's 
Bank.  Their  positi<»ns  and  sizes  may  be  relied  on,  as  well  as  the  places  of  the 
sounding  which  1  hnve  laid  down  on  the  chart.  They  were  ascertained  by  a 
Vast  number  of  celestial  observations,  taken  with  good,  and  well  adjusted  instru- 
ments on  board  the  two  vessels,  and  very  carefully  and  faithfully  calcuh'tf-d.  The 
rates  of  the  chronometers  were  found  by  a  ti'ansit  instrument  previously  to  sail- 
ing from  Boston,  and  after  our  return,  and  all  the  observations  re-eah  ulaled  for 
the  small  variation  which  appeared. 

At  anchor,  dilTerent  places,  and  on  different  days,  we  determined  the  set  and 
^strength  of  the  tides,  and  as  nearly  as  possible  their  rise  and  fall.     The  rise  of 

*  This  Chart  is  published  by  the  autUor  of  the  American  Con»t  Pilot. 


them  is 
tide,  sej 
hour,  al 
rially  v| 
which  i| 
and  vai 
When  i| 
ed  far 
were  ur 
nometei 
were  cai 
of  tides! 
nearly ; 
may  be  I 
ledge  of 
And  thel 
In  goil 
86  fathol 
then  grcl 
U'W.  tl 
49  fathol 
shoals  fal 
r>2'  W.  o\ 
In  lat.  4? 
and  long] 
did  not 
point  of 
continue  I 
The  b^ 
racter,  th| 
found  a 
ous  coloiij 
colours,  8 
of  specin 
Notwit 
be  useful, 
bottom  is 
white,  bh 
ly  gravel 
and  long. 
As  th< 
coarse,  a 
much  of 
ous  shoa 
some  of 
characte 
called  se 
no  shelU 
bank,  wi 
rated. 

Thet 
Bank;  i 
northwa 
thing  fn 
rect  in  t 
perfect 

*  Itm 
found  on 
.-jions  <u 


BLCNT's    AMfcRICAN    COAST    fILOT. 


00 


19' W. 
To 
;re  are 


orge's 

of  the 
by  a 

istru- 
The 
sall- 

!d  for 

Tt.  and 
Ise  of 


tlicra  is  from  one  to  one  and  a  half  fathoms.  They  set  round  the  compass  every 
tide,  setting  S.  E.  nearly,  at  full  moon,  and  running  from  one  to  four  knots  per 
hour,  at  a  mile's  distancf  from  the  breakers.  The  n.ean  rate  however,  is  mate- 
rially V'lried  by  the  winds;  they  set  strongest  at  W.  S.  W.  and  E.  N.  E.  and 
which  is  undoubt«dly  the  strength  of  the  flood  and  ebb.  From  these  causes 
and  variety  in  the  tides,  arises  a  principal  danger  in  approaching  the  shoals. 
When  underway  about  the  shoals,  in  a  few  hours  time  we  found  ourselves  drift- 
ed far  out  of  our  reckonings,  and  to  ascertain  our  situitions,  when  both  vessels 
were  under  weigh,  we  took  continued  observations  for  the  longitude  by  the  chro- 
nometers, and  at  the  same  time  double  altitudes  for  the  latitudes  ;  which  latter 
were  calculated  by  Brosier's  new  and  certain  method.  By  allowing  for  the  sets 
of  tides,  as  ascertained  at  anchor,  the  observations  and  reckoning  agreed  very 
nearly  ;  so  that  the  latitude  and  longitude  of  every  sounding  placed  on  the  chart 
may  be  considered  as  certain.  Should  any  vessel  fall  in  with  the  shoals,  a  know- 
ledge of  the  course  and  strength  of  the  tides  would  he  of  the  greatest  importance. 
And  they  cnn  be  calculated  for  any  day  and  hour  by  the  preceding  facts. 

In  going  from  Cape  Cod  to  the  Shoals,  at  5  leagues  from  the  light,  there  are 
86  fathoms,  muddy  bottom.  The  water  gradually  deepens  to  133  fathoms ;  and 
then  gradually  decreases  towards  the  shoals.  In  lat.  41°  51'  N.  and  long.  68° 
11'  W.  there  are  90  fathoms.  In  lat.  41°  50'  N.  and  long.  68°  S'  W.  there  arc 
49  fathoms,  sand  and  gravel,  on  the  western  edge  of  the  bank.  The  water  then 
shoals  fast.  To  the  northward  of  the  shoal,  in  lat.  41"^  59'  N.  and  long.  S?'^ 
52'  W.  on  the  south  side  of  the  north  channel,  there  are  60  fathoms,  soft  mud. 
In  lat.  45°  12'  N.  and  long.  67°  51'  W.  there  are  102  fathoms.  In  lat.  42°  10'  N. 
and  long.  67°  18'  W.  there  is  no  bottom  at  175  fathoms.  To  the  eastward  we 
did  not  ascertain  the  extent  of  the  Bank.  In  two  miles  southward  of  the  S.  E. 
point  of  the  shoals,  there  are  from  20  to  26  fathoms  of  water,  which  soui:>ding!:> 
continue  for  at  least  20  miles  to  the  southward  and  westward. 

The  bottom  on  the  Bank,  so  far  as  we  ascertained  it,  is  of  such  a  narrow  cha- 
racter, that  it  is  difficult  for  a  vessel  to  ascertain  her  situation  by  it.  We  oftca 
found  a  great  variety  of  soundings  in  a  very  short  distance ;  such  as  sands  of  vari- 
ous colours,  and  differently  mixed,  coarse  and  fine,  gravel  pebbles,  of  various 
colours,  stones,  sponge,  and  shells.  Of  all  these  except  sand,  I  saved  a  number 
of  specimens,  with  marks  to  note  the  places  from  whence  they  were  taken.* 

Notwithstanding  this  variety,  some  general  character  of  the  soundings  may 
be  useful.  To  the  westward  of  the  shoals,  and  at  some  distance  from  them,  the 
bottom  is  coarse  sand  and  gravel  of  all  colours ;  to  the  N.  W.  a  mixture  of 
white,  black,  and  yellow  sand ;  to  the  N.  black  and  white  sand ;  to  the  N.  E.  chief- 
ly gravel  and  pebbles ;  to  the  E.  fine  white  and  yellow  sand,  and  in  lat.  41°  57'  N 
and  long.  68°  40'  W.  some  white  moss :  to  the  S.  E.  fine  white  and  yellow  satid. 

As  the  shoals  are  approached,  in  whatever  direction,  the  soundings  become 
coarse,  and  are  frequently  mixed  with  shell?  of  different  kinds.  Near  the  shoal 
much  of  the  bottom  is  pebbles ;  and  to  the  east  of  the  largest  and  most  danger- 
ous shoal,  there  are  stones  of  the  size  of  hen's  eggs,  with  moss  and  sponge  on 
some  of  them.  Near  the  S.  E.  point  is  from  15  to  20  fathoms;  a  prevailing 
character  of  the  soundings  is  green  shells,  and  chiefly  of  the  species  usually 
called  sea-eggs.  If  a  vessel  be  far  enough  south  to  avoid  danger,  she  will  have 
no  shells.  The  quality  of  the  soundings,  as  far  as  we  were  able  to  survey  the 
bank,  will  be  best  understood  from  the  chart,  where  they  have  been  carefully 
rated. 

The  time  and  weather  prevented  making  a  complete  survey  of  all  parts  of  the 
Bank ;  and  although  we  ascertained  the  boundaries  of  it  to  the  westward  and 
northward,  I  have  not  delineated  it  on  the  chart,  being  unwilling  to  borrow  any 
thing  from  charts  which  disagree  so  essentially,  and  which  we  found  very  incor- 
rect in  the  material  points.  Of  the  shoals  themselves,  I  do  not  believe  a  more 
perfect  survey  can  be  made,  unless  in  a  calm  time,  the  mai    ihoal  could  be  pene- 

*  It  may  be  worthy  of  remark,  that  at  one  cast  of  the  lead,  on  examining  the  arming,  I 
found  one-third  black  sand,  one-third  white,  and  one-tbird  green  shells,  in  as  distinct  dimen- 
sions «ui  they  could  have  been  drawn.      . .    - 


ot; 


WLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT, 


trat«!d.  This,  however,  docs  not  seuin  to  ho  an  object,  as  no  vessel  would  be  sair 
in  attempting  to  pass  over  it. 

The  reports  that  rocks  have  been  seen  on  the  Shoals,  are  undoubtedly  incor 
rect.     Had  there  been  any  there,  we  could  not  have  failed  of  discovering  th<'ni. 
At  the  west  part  of  the  bank,  in  strong  tide  rips,  we  saw  large  quantitif  s  of  kelp 
and  sea-weed,  which,  at  a  dist  tnce,  had  the  appearance  of  rocks.     But  on  sound- 
ing, we  found  good  water,  and  a  regular  and  clear  bottom. 

It  will  be  seen  by  the  bottom,  that  the  holding  ground  is  not  good.  But  thi- 
vessel*  employed  in  the  survey,  by  having  a  long  scope  of  cable,  rode  out  a  con- 
siderable gale  of  wind  for  U  hours,  on  tfie  east  side  of  the  main  shoal,  and  ti> 
windward  of  it.     At  this  time  the  sea  broke  very  high  in  10  fathoms  water. 

C.  FELCH. 

Note — In  coming  from  the  southward  for  George's  Bank,  5  ou  will  get  sound- 
ings in  lat.  40°  4'  N.  if  on  the  S.  S.  W.  part  of  the  bank.  Should  you  not  ?et 
soundings  in  the  lat.  of  40°  30'  N.  you  may  be  certain  you  are  to  tlx'  eastward 
of  the  shoal,  when  you  must  direct  your  course  accordingly  to  clear  it,  when 
your  first  soundings  will  be  in  from  75  to  60  fathoms.  When  steering  to  the 
northward,  you  will  shoalon  your  water  gradually  to  20  fathoms,  when  you  will 
be  in  lat.  41°  20  N.  which  depth  of  water  you  will  have  10  or  15i  leagues  distant, 
either  east  or  west. 

Soundings  from  George's  Bank  continue  W.  by  S.  until  you  are  nearly  abreast 
of  the  east  of  Loiig  Island,  then  southward  to  Cape  Hatteras. 


Directions  for  Salem  Harbour. 

Vessels  inward  bound,  and  falling  in  with  Cape  Ann,  must  observe  tiie  foliou  - 
ing  directions,  viz. — When  abreast  of  Cape  Ann  lights,  bearing  N.  N.  W.  about 
two  miles  distant,  steer  W.  S.  W.  about  three  leagues,  which  will  carry  them  up 
with  the  eastern  point  of  Cape  Ann,  then  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S.  7^  miles,  which 
will  carry  them  up  with  the  lights  on  "Baker's  Island. 

Ships  bound  to  Salem,  falling  to  the  southward  and  running  for  the  lights,  must, 
when  they  have  made  them,  keep  the  northern  or  lower  light  open  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  southern  light,  and  run  for  them,  which  will  carry  them  to  the  east- 
ward, and  clear  of  the  south  breaker  of  Baker's  Island,  which  bears  from  the 
lights  S.  E.  by  S.  S,i  miles  distant,  and  is  very  dangerous. 

Vessels  bound  to  Salem,  having  made  the  lights  with  a  westerly  wind,  in  beat- 
ing up,  must  not  stand  to  the  southward  or  westward,  further  than  to  shut  one 
light  iti  with  the  other,  on  account  of  the  south  breaker,  nor  to  the  northward, 
further  than  to  bring  the  lights  to  bear  W.  by  S.  ^  S.  on  account  of  Gale's  ledge, 
which  bears  from  the  lights  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.  H  mile  distant,  having  but  4  feer 
water  at  low  tides. 

In  going  into  Salem  by  the  common  or  ship  channel,  between  Baker's  Island 
and  f  Misery  Island,  being  up  with  Baker's  Island,  you  may  pass  within  100 

*  Eaker's  Island  lied  on  the  south  side  nf  the  principal  entrance  of  Salem  harbour,  is 
about  a  third  of  a  mile  in  length,  from  north  to  south,  bearing  eaitt  from  fort  Pickering,  dis- 
tant about  5  miles  east,  (Votn  the  town  of  Salem.  There  are  now  two  separate  light-huuses 
on  Baker's  Island,  the  bases  of  which  are  about  45  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  One  is 
25  feet,  and  the  other  56^  feet  high,  and  bear  from  each  other  N.  W.  ^  W.  and  S.  E.  ^  E. 
The  southern  light  is  the  highest,  and  may  be  seen  from  6.J  to  7  leagues.  The  water  is  deep 
near  the  island,  but  there  is  no  convenient  landing-place.  The  north  and  east  sides  an; 
high  and  rocky.  There  is  a  small  channel  between  the  south  rocks  and  the  dry  breakers, 
but  it  in  safe  only  to  those  who  arc  acquainted  with  it. 

t  Misery  Island  lies  from  Baker's  Island  about  ont-  mile,  is  joined  by  a  bar  to  Little 
Misery,  which  makes  the  north  side  of  the  channel  opposite  Baker's  Island.  Misery  ledge 
has  eight  feet  water  at  low  spring  tides,  and  bears  from  the  light-house  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W. 
li  mUo«  diatant.  Misery  Island,  or  Great  Misery,  is  174  rods  in  length  from  N.  to  S.  and 
96  rods  in  breadth.  Little  Misery  is  40  rods  in  length,  with  its  most  western  point  projecting 
into  the  channel.  South  part  pf  Little  Misery  Island  beun  from  the  lights  N.  W.  i  N.  three 
iiuarters  of  a  mile  distant. 


iiiinomsl 
clear  ofl 
ditch's  ItT 
Island  a« 
ledge,  01 
then  haij 
fathoms 
liarlioiir,! 
lurboird 
ry  you  \i 
off  fro/n  I 
it;  to  avj 
Abbot's 
Fort  Pic  I 
point  of 
common  I 
not  go  tol 
from  Fori 

When 
to  the  eat 
hirth  of  a 
**Brimbl< 
larboard- 
the  same 
nel,  or  yo 
where  the 

If  vou  i 


*  The  I] 
Baker's  Isk 

t  Hardy' 
distance  fiv( 
tide  tliey  ap 
them,  150  t1 

X  Bowdit 
bears  from  1 
tides. 

§  Cat  Isla 
l;i  milefroi 
neck.  On 
Peach's  poii 
two  other  h 
rocks,  but  r 
of  sand,  ou 
southerly, 
high,  to  the 
sea  20  or  iH 
the  lights  S 

il  Eagle] 
S.  i  S.  dist 
direction,  h 

Tf  Winte 
mile  in  len^ 
the  neck  (v 
It  has  a  sto 
point  stand: 

**  The 
Eagle  Islan 
to  it  is  a  ay. 

ft  Cone; 
from  Marbi 
}  S.  two  ; 


ilii  be  s;u< 

dly  incor • 
iiig  them. 
;!9  Mf  kelp 
on  sound- 
But  the 
)ut  a  con- 
il,  and  to 
if  ate  r. 
ELCH. 

;et  sound  ■ 
u  not  ;;et 
eastward 
it,  when 
ing  to  the 
I  you  will 
es  distant. 

ly  abreast 


le  tbilou  - 
W.  about 
them  up 
es,  which 

its,  must, 
the  east- 
the  east- 
from  the 

,  in  beat- 
shut  one 
rthward, 
s's  ledge. 
It  4  feet 

I's  Island 
Ithin  100 

arbour,  is 
^ring,  dis- 
|ht-huuses 
One  19 
E.  iE. 
br  is  deep 
glides  are 
lireakers, 

to  Little 
Iry  ledge 
Vv.  i  W. 

S.  and 
jrojecting 
i.  three - 


IJI.LNT  S    AMKJlirAN    CUAaf    llLUl. 


O/ 


liiliioniH  of  it,  and  steer  W.  by   N.   for  the  'Ilnste;  this  course  will  carry  you 
clear  of  f  Hardy's  roeks,  leaving  tlieni  to  the  southward,  and   will  leave  JBow- 
ilitrh's  Iedi5e  to  the  northward.     If  you  are  in  the  inid-pussage,  between  Baker's 
Island  and  the  Misery,  you  may  steer  W.  N.  W.  till  you  have  passed  Bowditch's 
ledge,  or   till    you  get   §Cat  Island  open    to  the  westward  of  || Eagle  Island, 
then  haul  up  for  the  Haste      Any  strany;er  may  there  anchor  in  safety,  in  about  r» 
fathoms  of  water,   good  anchorage;  hut  if  you  choose  to   proct'ctl  into  Salem 
harhour,  you  mus'  steer  about  west  lor  the  Ilistc,  wiiich  you  uill  leave  on  your 
larhoiird  hand,  about  half  a  mile  distant,  then  steer  S.  VV.  by  W.  which  will  car- 
ry yuu  into  Salem  harbour;  but  you  nnist  nl)Herve,  that  there  is  a  ledge  runs 
off  from  the  N.  K.  end  of  51  Winter  Island,  and  that  Abbot's  rock  lies  abreast  of 
it;  to  avoid  which  you  must  keep  aiiove  a  ipiarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore- 
Abbot's  rock  is  found  by  bringing  Castle  hill  and  hous<!  into  the  cove  north  of 
Fort  Pickering,  and  Beverly  meeling-housi'  well  in  witii  Juniper  point  (or  S.  K. 
point  of  Salem  neck.)     Abbot's  rock  has  7  feet  at  common  ebb.     The  mean  of 
common  tides  is  12  feet.     In  keeping  oll'sh(U'e,  to  avoid  Abbot's  rock,  you  must 
not  go  too  far  off,  for  fear  of  the  A«pia  Vitie,  which  are  sunken  rocks,  lying  E.S.E. 
from  Fort  Pickering,  distant  nearly  half  a  mile. 

When  coming  from  the  southward,  if  you  are  near  Cat  Island,  you  may  pass 
to  the  eastward  or  westward  of  it;  if  you  are  to  the  eastward,  you  must  give  a 
birth  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  and  steer  \'.  by  W.  A  W.  or  N.  N.  W.  leaving  the 
■**Brimbles  and  Eagle  Island  to  the  starboard,  and  ff  Coney  Island  ledge  to  the 
larboard— that  course  will  can*y  you  cle^r  of  Eagle  Island  bar ;  continue  upon 
the  same  course  till  you  have  passed  the  Hasten  and  get  into  common  ship  chan- 
nel, or  you  may  contiiuie  the  aanie  course  till  you  get  under  the  north  shore, 
where  there  is  good  anchorage. 

If  you  are  to  the  westward  of  Cat  Island,  you  may  pass  in  the  middle  channel 

*  The  Haste  rock  is  a  broken  rock  above  water,  lying  near  the  channel,  bearing  from 
Baker's  Island  lights  \V.  ^  N.  distant  -2^  miles,  and  1,^  mile  from  Salem  rock. 

t  Hardy's  rocks  (on  which  a  beacon  is  erected)  bear  W.  ^  N.  from  Baker's  Island  lights, 
distance  five-eighths  of  a  mile.  They  are  covered  at  high  water,  and  are  dangerous.  At  half 
tide  they  appear  with  7  feet  on  them  at  low  water.  Rising  States  ledge  bears  VV.  i  N.  from 
them,  150  fathoms  distant. 

J  Bowditch's  ledge,  on  ihc  east  end  of  which  a  black  spar  buoy  is  placed,  in  2^  fathoms, 
bears  from  Baker's  Island  light-house,  VV.  N.  VV.  l\  mile  distant,  and  is  seen  at  low  spring 
tides. 

§  Cat  Island  is  situated  about  S.  W.  by  VV.  from  Baker's  Island,  2  miles  distant,  and  about 
1^  mile  from  Marblehead  neck,  and  ranges  from  Baker's  Island  just  clear  of  Marblebead 
neck.  On  the  N.  W.  end  is  a  high  beach,  difectly  opposite  the  point  of  Marblehead,  called 
Peach's  point.  The  shore  is  irregular  and  rocky.  Beyond,  and  in  a  line  with  the  island,  are 
two  other  heads,  of  nearly  the  same  projection ;  and  on  the  southern  side  are  three  high 
rocks,  but  not  sfo  large  as  the  former.  'I'wo  of  them  are  connected  with  the  island  by  bars 
of  sand,  out  of  water  at  the  eob ;  the  other  stands  boldly  up  within  these  two,  but  more 
southerly.  The  Marblehead  Marine  Society  has  erected  on  Cat  Island  rock  a  spar,  40  feet 
high,  to  the  top  of  which  is  annexed  a  cask  of  about  130  gallons  measure,  which  is  seen  at 
vsea  20  or  ,30  feet  above  the  land.  A  black  spar  buoy  lies  oft"  the  S.  E.  end,  bearing  from 
the  lights  S.  E.  ^  S.  to  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  2^  miles  distant. 

II  Eagle  Island  is  about  1^  mile  from  Peach's  point,  and  bears  from  the  light-houses  W.  by 
S.  i  S.  distant  li  mile.  A  bar  runs  o*l'  from  the  western  point  of  this  island  in  a  N.  VV. 
direction,  half  a  mile  distant,  and  has  a  red  spar  buoy  on  the  end  of  it. 

If  Winter  Island  lies  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  of  Salcrn  Harbour,  about  half  a 
mile  in  length ;  the  highest  part  is  on  the  south  of  the  island,  opposite  a  point  of  rocks  on 
the  neck  (which  is  a  point  of  land  running  nonh-easterly  from  the  town,  about  one  mile.) 
It  has  a  store  and  wharf  on  the  southern  end,  at  the  entrance  of  Cat  cove.  On  the  eastern 
point  stands  Fort  Pickering. 

**  The  Brimbles  bear  S.  VV.  by  VV.  from  the  light-house,  distant  1^  mile  S.  S.  E.  from 
Eagle  Island,  nearly  half  a  mile  distant.  They  are  sunken  rocks,  bare  at  low  water:  near 
to  it  is  a  spar  buoy  painted  red.     It  comes  out  of  water  at  half  ebb. 

ft  Coney  Island  is  a  small  island  that  lies  near  the  mouth  of  Salem  harbour :  it  bears 
from  Marblehead  point,  N.  E.  one  mile  distant ;  from  Fort  Pickering  on  Winter  Island,  E. 
}  S.  two  miles  distant ;  and  from  Baker's  Island  light  W.  ^  S.  2^  miles  distant. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-S) 


/. 


V 


4^ 


1.0   s 


I.I 


11.25 


£|2j8     |25 


iU 

IS 
u 


140 


2.0 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WHSTIR,N.Y.  MStO 

(7f*)  173-4503 


ri>^ 


5V 


c\ 


\ 


^"^V"^ 

^^<^ 

^i^.^^ 
^ 


\ 


58 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


betwer:]  that  Island  and  *Marblnhcad  rock,  and  steer  over  north  for  the  ship 
channel,  leaving  fGray's  rock  and  Coney  Island  to  the  westward.  After  pass- 
ing the  Haste,  and  entering  the  ship  channel,  you  may  proceed  as  before  directed. 

If  in  coming  from  the  southward  and  eastward,  you  should  find  yourself  near 
tHaIf-w,iy  rock,  you  may  bring  it  to  bear  S.  E.  and  steer  N.  W.  for  the  Haste, 
passing  near  to  §Satiin,  or  Black  Rock,  leaving  it  on  the  larboard  hand,  and  the 
Krimblcs  and  Eagle  Island  on  the  starboard ;  continue  thi^i  course,  and  you  will 
leave  the  Haste  on  the  larboard  hand,  enter  the  common  ship  channel,  and  pro- 
ceed as  above. 

There  are  several  other  channels  for  entering  Salem  harbour,  but  they  ought 
not  to  be  attempted  without  a  pilot. 


Directions  for  Beverly  and  Manchester. 

To  enter  Beverly  Harboi ",  follow  the  directions  for  Salem  Harbour,  till  you 
bring  the  Haste  to  bear  E.  S.  E.  and  run  W.  N.  W.  about  two  miles,  and  you 
reach  Beverly  Bar,  which  is  a  spot  of  sand  running  out  from  the  southern  or 
Salem  side  of  the  entrance,  and  has  commonly  a  beacon  upon  the  head  of  it, 
above  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore.  The  bar  has  very  shoal  water  on  the 
eastern  or  outward  side  near  it,  but  good  anchorage  within.  There  is  good  wa- 
ter  at  the  head  of  the  bar.  Having  passed  the  bar,  there  is  a  sandy  point  from 
Beverly,  on  the  northern  fiide  of  the  entrance,  and  beyond  this  point  are  the 
Lobster  Rocks,  which  bear  from  the  head  of  the  bar  W.  a  little  S.  and  not  half 
a  mile  distant,  and  they  are  above  water  at  half  tide.  To  avoid  this  point,  after 
having  well  cleared  the  bar,  you  will  steer  towards  Ram-horn  rock,  which  has 
also  commonly  a  beacon,  and  is  to  be  seen  at  half  tide,  bearing  S.  W.  by  S.  from 
the  head  of  the  bar,  one-eighth  of  a  mile  distant.  There  are  several  fathoms  of 
water  within  a  vessel's  !..iig,th  «)f  Ham-horn  rock.  Giving  this  a  good  birth,  you 
then  clear  the  sandy  point,  and  steer  for  the  Lobster  Rock  beacon,  bearing  from 
Ram-horn  beacon  N.  W.  by  W.  distant  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile.  Giving  this 
a  good  birth,  you  are  then  opposite  to  the  wharves,  and  may  anchor  in  deep 
water,  in  a  very  safe  and  excellent  harbour. 

To  enter  Manchester  Harbour,  you  must  bring  the  southern  light  on  Baker's 
Island  to  bear  S.  h  E.  and  run  N.  one  mile  distant,  where  you  may  anchor  on 
good  bottom. 

N.  B.  Eastern  point  bears  from  Baker's  Island  lights  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  74  miles 
distant.  Half-way  Rock  bears  from  the  lights  S.  ;i  E.  2  miles  distant.  Hardy's 
rocks  bear  iVom  the  lights  W.  i  N.  disttnt  five-eighths  of  a  mile.  ^ 


Directions  for  sailing  into  Marblehead.  ■' 

Vessels  inward  bound,  and  falling  in  with  the  lights  on  Thatcher's  Island,  may 
observe  the  following  directions,  viz:  Thatcher's  Island  ledge  bears  from  the 
body  of  the  island  from  E.  S.  E.  to  S.  S.  E.  extending  about  two  miles  from 


*  Marblehead  rock  bears  S.  W.  from  the  western  part  of  Cat  Island,  distant  three-fourths 
of  a  mile.     It  is  above  water,  and  may  be  approached  on  either  side,  very  near,  with  safety. 

t  Gray's  rock  bears  N.  VV.  from  Cat  Island,  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  VV.  by  S. 
J|  S.  flromthe  light  house,  distant  2^  miles,  is  high  out  of  water,  and  may  be  approached  with 
safety. 

t  Half-way  rock  is  about  180  feet  in  diameter,  40  feet  high,  and  bold  to ;  lying  about 
halfway  between  Boston  and  Thatcher's  Island  light-houses,  on  which  a  nyrnmidical  monu- 
ment has  been  erected,  the  etone  work  of  which  is  15  feet  high,  with  a  base  of  ten  feet ; 
above  the  stone  work  is  a  spindle  15  feet  high,  on  which  is  a  copper  ball,  2  feet  in  diameter. 

$  Satan,  or  Black  Rock,  is  above  water,  steep  to,  and  bears  S.  W.  by  S.  from  Baker's 
Ii^lnnd,  distant  1|  mile,  and  from  Half-way  Rock  N.  W.  by  W.  |  W.  a  mile  and  one-sixth. 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


59 


>r  the  ship 
Vfter  pass- 
•e  directed, 
uraeir  near 
the  Haste, 
id,  and  the 
d  you  will 
I,  and  pro- 

they  ought 


ur,  till  you 
s,  and  you 
outhern  or 
head  of  it, 
ater  on  the 
3  good  wa- 
point  from 
tnt  are  the 
[)d  not  half 
point,  after 
wliich  has 
by  S.  from 
fathoms  of 
1  birth,  you 
aring  from 
Giving  this 
ar  in  deep 

on  Baker's 
anchor  on 

J.  74  miles 
Hardy's 


iland,  may 
from  the 
iniles  from 


iree-fourths 
with  safety. 
VV.  by  S. 
oached  with 

lying  about 
dical  monu- 
f  ten  feet ; 
I  diameter. 
)m  Baker'fl 
one- sixth. 


Ihe  island.  After  getting  the  west  light  to  bear  N.  h  W.  you  are  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  ledge :  then  haul  to  the  N.  W.  to  bring  the  lights  to  bear  N.  E.  by  E. 
and  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  for  the  eastern  point,  which  is  about  7i  miles  distant  from 
Thatcher's  Island.  Then  your  course  is  W.  by  S.  distant  7i  miles,  for  the 
lights  on  Baker's  Island. 

Vessels  bound  t<»  Marbleliead,  and  falling  to  the  southward,  and  running  for 
the  lights,  aft«f  making  them,  must  keep  the  north  and  lower  one  open  to  the 
eastward  of  the  southern  light,  and  run  f«»r  th«in,  which  will  carry  them  to  the 
eastward,  and  clear  of  the  south  breakers  off  Baker's  Island,  which  bear  from 
the  lights  from  S.  E.  h  S-  to  S.  S.  E.  4  E.  distant  two  miles  and  one  quarter. 

Having  made  the  lights  with  a  westerly  wind,  and  beating,  when  within 
2J  miles  of  them,  you  must  not  stand  to  the  southward  and  westward  so  far  as 
to  shut  the  north  light  up  with  the  south  light,  on  account  of  the  south  breakers, 
nor  to  the  northward  further  than  to  bring  the  lights  to  bear  W.  by  S.  il  S.  on 
account  of  Gale's  Ledge,  which  bears  from  the  lights  N.  E.  by  E.  I  E.  distant 
IJ  mile.  Drawingjiear  to  the  lights,  tnke  care  of  a  ledge,  called  the  Whale's 
Back,  which  bears  from  the  lights  N.  by  E.  distant  four-fifths  of  a  mile,  and 
comes  out  of  wattr  at  quarter  ebb. 

In  going  into  Marblehead,  and  being  up  with  the  lights,  give  the  north  point 
of  Baker's  Island  a  birth  of  one-quiirter  of  a  mile  or  less.  Having  the  lights 
one  in  with  the  other,  you  are  up  with  the  point.  When  the  south  light  is  open 
with  the  north  light,  you  have  then  passed  the  point  (leaving  the  Misery  Island 
on  your  starboard  hand,  which  btiars  frotn  the  lights  N.  W.  i  N.  three-fourths  of 
a  mile.)  Then  steer  S.  W.  by  S.  or  S.  S.  W.  until  you  bring  the  south  light  to 
bear  \.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  then  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  distant  .i  miles,  for  Marble- 
head  Hiirbour.  You  will  leave  Hardy's  Rocks,  Eagle  Island,  and  Gray's  Rock, 
on  the  starboard  hand ;  Pope's  Head  (which  h  «  larj^e  hij^h  rock,  bearing  S.  W. 
by  W.  from  the  lights,  two-thirds  of  a  mile  distant ;  Brimbles,  and  north  point 
of  Cat  Island,  on  the  larboard  hand.  The  Brimbles  bear  from  Eagle  Island  S.  S. 
E.  i  E.  distant  half  a  mile ;  and  Gray's  Rock  from  the  north  point  of  Cat  Island 
N.  W.  by  W.  seven-eighths  of  a  mile. 

Falling  in  with  the  south  point  of  Baker's  Island,  and  it  blowing  hard  from 
the  eastward,  if  you  cannot  avoid  it,  you  may  pass  the  point  by  keeping  it  well 
on  board,  say  at  the  distance  of  from  20  to  50  fathoms  from  the  shore,  where 
you  will  have  from  4  to  5  fathoms  water.  When  up  with  the  S.  W.  point,  steer 
W.  S.  W.  which  will  carry  j'ou  between  the  north  Gooseberry  Island  (which 
bears  S.  W.  J  S.  from  the  lights,  distant  two-thirds  of  a  mile)  and  Pope's  Head, 
leaving  the  former  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  Pope's  Head  on  your  starboard 
hand,  between  which  you  will  have  from  3i  to  5  filhoms  of  water.  As  soon  as 
you  have  passed  Pope's  Head,  haul  to  the  northward,  until  the  south  light  bears 
N.  E.  by  E.  4  E  then  steer  S.  W.  by  VV.  i  W.  for  Marlilehead  harbour. 

Vessels  coming  from  the  eastward,  and  running  for  Half-way  rock,  which  is  a 
high  bold  rock  of  about  30  fathoms  diameter,  lying  S.  \  E.  from  Baker's  Island 
lights,  distant  two  miles,  (and  described  in  j)age  fiO  )  must  not  bring  the  rock  to 
bear  to  the  southward  of  W.  S.  W.  to  avoid  the  south  breaker,  which  bears  from 
Half-way  rock  N.  E.  i  E.  distant  one  mile.  Being  up  witii  Half-way  rock,  and 
bound  into  Marblehead,  bring  the  rock  to  bear  E.  by  S.  i  S.  and  steer  W.  by 
N.  4  N.  for  Fort  Head,  distant  rJ  miles,  le-iving  Cat  Island  on  the  starboard  hand, 
which  bears  from  Half-way  rock  VV.  N.  W.  dis^tsmt  1:]  mile,  and  *Marblehead 
Rock  on  the  larboard  hand,  which  hears  from  Half-way  rock  W.  5  N.  distant 
two  miles.  Black  Rock  bears  from  Half  way  Rock  N.  W.  by  W.  distant  1^  mile. 
Cat  Island  Rock  and  Point  Neck  bear  east  and  west  of  each  other,  distant  about 
one  mile. 

'*'  On  Marblehead  rock  is  erected  a  monument,  painted  white  at  the  bottom  and  black  at  the  top, 
being  about  8  feet  in  the  base,  and  Ifi  in  height.  Strangers  wilt  observe  that  the  course  from 
Half-way  rock  ttf"  Marblehead  fort  is  W.  by  N.  .}  N.  3  miles  distance,  leaving  the  beacon 
which  is  pliiced  on  Cat  Island  rock  on  tho  starboard  hand,  oiid  tlir  monument  on  the  larboard 
hand;  the  monument  bears  from  the  bencon  W.  by  S.  •"}  S.  diftniirp  j'fvon-oiglilhs  of  a  mile. 


60 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Vcsarls  l)(iiig  up  ill  Boston  Bay,  may,  by  bringing  Boston  light  to  bear  S.  S- 
^V.  run  N.  N.  R.  for  Marblehead  Rock — they  are  distant  from  each  other  about 
li2  miles.  Half-way  Rock  and  Boston  light  bear  of  each  other  S.  W.  and  N.  E. 
distant  1  r>  miles. 

JIardy's  Rocks  arc  covered  at  high  water,  and  may  be  seen  at  quarter  ebb. 
Whale's  Back  is  covered  at  high  water,  and  may  be  seen  at  quarter  ebb.  Gale's 
Rocks  have  but  4  feet  water  at  low  tides,  and  bear  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  from  the 
liglits,  distant  1%  mile.  The  south  breakers,  off  Baker's  Island,  are  always  co- 
vered. The  Brimhles  are  covered  at  high  u  ater,  and  are  seen  at  half  tide.  Black 
Rock  is  always  out  of  water,  but  low.  Cat  Island  Ruck,  Half-way  Rock,  Mar- 
blehead  Rock,  Gray's  Rock,  and  Pope's  Head  nre  large,  and  high  above  water. 
Half-way  rock  is  very  bold  all  round  it.  Eagle  Island  is  bold  only  on  the  '^ouLu 
and  east;  from  the  N.  E.  part  of  it,  quite  to  Hardy  s  Rocks,  is  very  shofi  water, 
and  no  passage  for  ships. 


Bearings  and  distances  of  the  principal  Islands,  Rocks,  SfC,  in  the 
vicinity  of  Salenif  from  Baker's  Island  lights. 


The  lights  bear  from  each  other  N.  W.  4  W.  and  S.  E. 
Eastern  point  of  Cape  Ann  bears  .... 
Gnlcs'  Ledge,  which  has  a  ijirllite  Spar  Buoy  on  the  S. 

VV.  eiul,  and  on  which  ar*8  feet  water,  low  tide  . 
House  Inland,  at  the  mouth  of  At anchester  Harbour 
Saube's  Ledge  in  Manchester        .        I        .        . 

East  part  of  Whale's  Back 

Pi!;;;riin's  i^cdgc  ( 1  '6  feet  low  common  tides)  . 

Great  Misery 

Misery  Ledge  (has  8  feet  at  low  tides)  . 

South  pnrt  of  Little   VJisery 

Whale's  Back  (comes  out  at  two-thirds  ebb)    . 

Bowditch's  Ledge 

North  part  of  Hardy's  Rocks        .... 

North  part  of  Haste  Ilock 

South  part  of  Coney  Island    .        .        .        . 
Nagus  Head,  or  Marblehead  shore .... 

Gray's  Rock 

North  part  of  Eagle  Island 

South  part  of  Marblchead  neck    .... 

North  part  of  Cat  Island 

Middle  of  Pope's  Head 

North  part  of  Western  Gooseberry 

South  Gooseberry 

Satan  or  Black  Itock 

Eastern  Gooseberry 

Half-way  Rock S 

South  Breakers  of  Baker's  Island  .        .         .         .         S 


4  E.  40  feet  distant. 

E.  by  N.  i  N.  7i  milea  distant. 


N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  1|  mile  do. 

N.  N.  E.  1  mile  do. 

N.  i  W.  I  mile  do. 

N.  by  E.  I  mile  do. 

N,  tL.  li  mile  do. 

N.  by  W.  i  W.  1  mile  do. 

N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  14  mile  do. 
N.  W.  i  N.  I  mile 
N.  by  E.  4  E.  I  mile 
W.  N.  VV.  14  mile 


VV. 
W. 
W. 

W, 
VV, 


3  N   I  mile 
I  N.  2j^  mile 
i  S.  2^  mile 
dS. 
by  S.  d  S.  2i  miles 

W.  by  S.  h  S.  1^  mile 
S.  VV .  by  W.  4  W. 
S.  VV.  by  W.  2  miles 
S.  W.  by  W.  S  mUe 
S.  VV.  i  S.  9  mile 
S.  S.  VV.  i  W.  5  mile 
S.  VV.  by  S.  18  mile 
S.  S.  VV.  d  VV.  a  mile 

4  E.  2  miles 
E.  by  S.  24  miles 


do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 

do. 
do. 

do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 


Archer's  Rock,  on  which  is  a  spar  buoy,  painted  red,  has 
■^    7  feet  at  low  tides  .    *    .        .        .        .        S.  VV.  by  W-i  W.  2J  miles  do. 

Outer  Breakers,  known  generally  by  the  name  of  Outer,  Middle,  and  Inner  Breakers ;  this 
is  a  very  extensive  and  dangerons  shoal,  extending  from  Searl'^«  Rocks,  in  a  S.  £.  direction, 
;  bout  two  miles,  and  in  a  westerly  direction  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  bearing  (Vom  the 
1  ;lits  S.  £.  !^  S.  to  S.  S.  E.  i^  E.  3  j  miles ;  to  pass  to  the  eastward  of  this  dangerous  shoal, 
have  the  northern  or  low  light  a  Utile  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  high  light. 

Seari's  Rock.«,  a  small  part  come,  out  of  water  at  low  spring  tides,  and  bears  from  the 
south  light  S.  E.  three-eighths  of  a  mile  distant,  and  from  the  S.  E.  points  of  Baker's  Island 
S.  B,  distant  a  small  one-fourth  of  a  mile.  There  is  a  good  channel  between  the  island  and 
Seari's  Rocks,  by  keeping  the  island  best  on  board,  say  at  the  distance  of  3t)  to  40  fathoms : 
in  thin  channel  i<t  ^  to  !>  futhoms  watef,  nt  low  common  tide°.  m 


to  bear  S.  S- 
1  other  about 

iV.  and  N.  E- 

quarter  ebb. 
ebb.  Gale's 
E.  from  the 
re  always  co- 
tide.  Black 
1  Rock,  Mar- 
above  water, 
on  the  '^ouLu 
r  shori  water. 


Sfc,  in  ihe 


miles  distant. 

13  mile    do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
mile         do.    ' 
li  mile  do.    r 

do. 
ile  do. 

do.    <• 

do. 

do. 


lies 
lile 


A-. 


do. 

do. 
do. 

do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 


I|  miles  do. 
)reakcrs ;  this 

£.  direction, 
|ring  flrom  the 

e;crou8  shoal, 

|ars  Trom  the 

iker's  Island 

ko  island  and 

|40  fathomii : 


t  . 


r* 


m 


Statnte  Miles     „ 


A 


LriH/ui'l'yn H Harrit.m  ■ 


OnimtmejUiui/ 


fUMithed  »/'  Rf^nCBliint  JVtm  Yo' 


Thrttark  sAtuffdUnes  thriv  the^  tt.W ntuik . 
n^se.  tmsAadrd.  fAe  parti  dry  at  JJ¥. 
Tkf  soundtngt  tuf  al/rtt/ur^to  LW . 


J\Miikedh,>Rita^DUint  .Vem  Voi-k, . 


I'tinttJ  Sv  ftrH'i^r 


Plnit  An»  ."'*(/  //,!/,*  . 


V 

^ 

^i    -ij^'        J 

? 

^^  /jjjPv4i^ 

'""'il^ 

KJXy^ 

V- 

L           T^ 

'"^A 

J^<     / 

A 

lp^^->lj^ 

r. 

Statute  Miles 


iom/ftPM  h'fff.i  n\tf  iO/Wf  .  Sprint/ fitfrs  n/etf , 
tAAu/7h  /rff/iit^-fff/ ivirifi/  ^yf/tf  trutt/s. 
///7/A  i/'it/frtft/^t//  i^VAofit/r  ntJi/-  *  . 


Lrt/c/tfi*hiffl  H/farrjtj^n- 


fai 


IJrttwn  htt  a  fihtmi 


Van£Hoi'iv/M<-* 


a 


^.1 


/* 


/:> 


I 


tVhUeiiiutjt 
fardi/m  tAtxAft 

10      ' 


lO 


the^If.Wmaik 
iredto  ZiV. 

tan  Emo  .'  6u  //ntcA . 


BLUNT  9  AMERICAN  COAST  Pll.Oi 


Directions  for  sailing  into  Boston  Harbou 


61 


From  •'Cape  Aun  to  Boston  liglit-hous*',  tlir  coiirsr  is  S.  W.  |e.  iVists'.r.w 
^  It^aguf's.  After  makini;  tln'  light,  wilb  the  nind  fair,  you  will  brinj^i,  lioar 
W.  hy  N.  or  W.  N.  W.  aod  then  run  f<»r  if,  lill  you  come  uilhin  Hv\(i;il>li.'a 
length  of  it.  If  thp  weuiher  i.-.  bad,  and  you  cannot  set  :i  pilot  from  thp Wght- 
housH,  after  running  abr^^ast  of  it  so  as  t(»  bring  it  lo  bear  iS'.  by  E.  you  may  run 
W.  by  S.  about  1^  mile  -o  Nantasket  Road,  where  you  may  anchor  in  from  7  Vo 
r>  fathoms,  in  safety. 

The  main  cnt»nce  into  Bostfui  Harbour  lies  between  tLijj;ht-House  Island  oi 
the  north  side,  and  Point  Alderton  on  the  south,  (nff  which  Vies  a  shoal,  aa  dea- 
crib«d  in  the  Plate,  to  which  the  reader  is  relern  d.) 

To  work  into  Boston  bay,  you  may  stand  to  the  southward  till  yo«i  bring  the 
light  ta  bear  W.  IN-  VV.  and  to  the  northward  till  you  b:i  e  it  to  bear  VV.  S.  W. 
till  you  come  within  one  league  of  the  light;  then  you  must  not  stand  to  the 
northwMsd  any  farther  than  to  bring  it  to  bear  ^V.  by  N.  and  to  the  southward, 
to  brinl^Ho  bcmr  W.  N.  W.     You  mav  anchor  in  the  l»ay  with  safety  if  the  wind 
is  off  shore.     If  you  fall  to  the  southward  of  B(»ston  Harbour,  be  careful  to  avoid 
Cohasset  Rocks,  which  lie  abcve  water  some  distance  from  the  land,  say  from 
li  to  "Z  miles;  the  outer  part  of  which,  called  Mintrt's  Rock,  has  a  black  buo^' 
on  it,  that  lies  in  5  fathoms  water,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  iiand.     This 
rock  comes  out  of  water  at  low  common  tides,  and  bears  from  Boston  light- 
house S.  E.  i  E.  9  miles.     Your  course  from  this  buoy  to  the  light-house  is  N. 
W.  by  W.  distant  3  leagoes.     In  running  the  above  coiu'se  and  distance,  you 
will  pass  a  white  buoy  wiiich  lies  in  4  fathoms  water,  that  is  on  the  N.  E.  part  of 
Harden's  Rocks,  and  bears  S.  E.  ^  S.  from  the  light-house,  distant  U  leagues, 
which  rocks  may  be  seen  two  hours  before  low  water,  that  you  also  leave  on- 
your  larboard  hand.    There  is  another  buoy  on  your  larboard  hand,  which  is 
red,  that  lies  in  tfai^e  fathoms  water  on  tPoint  Alderton.     When  in  the  middle; 
of  the  §Ught-hou3^channel,  steer  W.  by  N.  one  mile  distant,  to  the  beacon  on 
the  Spit,  which  you  may  run  within  one-quarter  of  a  cable's  length  of,  leaving  it 
on  your  starboard  hand,  opposite  tw  which  lies  a  black  buoy  in  2  fathoms  water, 
on  George's  Island  Rocks.     Between  the  light-house  and  George's  Island  lies 
a  rock,  having  a  black  buoy  on  i%  called  the  Centurion,  in  mid-channel,  with  l4 
feet  water  on  it,  bearing  from  the  light-house  W.  S.  W.     Your  course  from  this 
to  Gallop's  Island  Point,  is  N.  W.  by  N.   half  a  mile  distant.     From  thence 

*  We  must  here  remark  the  necessity  of  every  commander's  making  himself  acquainted 
with  the  uiiferiint  ligbt-bouses  on  the  American  cpast,  and  on  first  appearance  know  at  once 
his  situaton,  as  an  eirormay  be  attended  with  disastrou.s  con^-equences ;  nhich  was  the 
case  in  ^0T.  1826,  when  a  tine  brig  of  314  tons,  was  lost,  tvith  one  of  her  officers  and  a 
seaman,  by  mistaking  Scituate  h>.i\r  for  Boston  light.  The  Capt.  says,  "he  made  Cape 
Ann  light,' bearing  N.  two  or  three  leagues  distant,  on  Tuesiiay,  at  6  o'clock,  P.  M.  run  W. 
nnade  Salem  lights,  soon  after  run  b.  VV .  made  a  light  ahead,  supposed  Boston,  thinking  Boston 
a  staniWug  light,  continued  the  course  until  within  abuiu  6  miles,  then  run  southerly  until  the 
light  bore  W.  by  N.  then  run  \V.  until  she  struck  near  the  light.'' 

t  3oston  light-house  is  situated  on  an  island  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour.  The  lantern 
is  elevated  82  "oet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  a  revolving  light,  which  may  be 
seen  9  or  10  leagues  distance.  When  at  the  distance  of  7  or  8  leagues,  the  time  of  dark- 
ness will  be iwice  that  uf  light ;  as  you  approach  it,  the  time  of  darkmus  will  decrtase,  and 
that  of  light  increase,  until  you  get  within  three  leagues  of  it,  when  the  light  will  not  wholly 
disappear,  but  the  greatest  power  of  light  will  be  to  the  least,  as  44  to  ' .  Two  huts  are  erect- 
ed at  Long  Beach  (on  Nantasket)  for  the  aecommudation  of  ship-wrecked  seamen. 

J  Rtmarks  on  the  single  rock  that  lies  off  the  north  pari  of  Point  Jlldcrtott,  viz.  The  rock 
on  with  the  first  fence  that  runs  over  the  east  side  of  Strawberry  Hill-  JS'*)wcomb's  bam  (on 
Gallop's  Ihland)  half  way  between  the  light-house  on  Long  Island  and  the  Beacon  on  the 
Spit.  When 'Newcomb's  barn  is  on  with  tb«^  beftcon,  you  pass  just  to  the  north  of  this  rock^ 
on  the  north  of  vhich  the  buoy  is  placed,  and  near  it. 

^  Marks  for  a  Shoalin  Light  house  Channel. — The  jast  low  point  of  Gallop's  Island  just 
seen  clear  of  the  N.  E.  of  George's  Island:  the  buoy  on  the  Centurion  just  clear  to  the  nortli 
of  the  Great  Brewster:  this  in  something  of  a  shoal ;  on  it,  at  low  water,  are  12  to  13  feet. 
Mr.  Wilson,  Pilot  for  Boston  Harbour,  struck  on  this  shoal  in  a  ship  drawing  14  feet  9  inches 
water.    Then  the  tifle  had. flowed  al)out  three-quarters  of  an  honr. 


I 


62 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


through  the  ♦arrows,  by  Nick's  Mate,  your  course  is  N.  N.  W.  half  a  mile  dis- 
tant.    N^d^  Mate  has  a  monument  on  it,  and  must  be  left  on  your  larboard  hand, 
one  cablr^lciK^h  distant,  and  then  steer  W.  by  N.  for  Castle  Island,  distant  4 
miles.     Ti  running  W.  by  N.  from  Nick's  mate,  you  will  first  lenve  a  white  spar 
buoy  ft  the  Lower  Middle,  on  your  starboard  hand,  distant  3  miles  from  Nick's 
Mat^t  then,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant,  you  will  sec  a  white  buoy,  which  is 
on  'he  Castle  Rocks  in  two  fathoms,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand, 
irhen  abreast  of  the  Castle,  8t«>er  N.  N.  W.  one  quater  of  a  mile,  to  clear  the 
Upper-Middle  Ground,  which  has  a  black  buoy  on  it  in  two  fathoms  water,  that 
jrou  leave  on  jour  larboard  hand;  if  the  buoy  should  be  removJI,  run  N.  N.  W. 
till  you  bring  the  two  northernmost  steeples  in  Boston  a  handspike's  length  open, 
then  steer  N.  W.  hy  W.  «.J  miles,  which  will  carry  you  opposite  the  town. 

Broad  Sound,  which  is  the  north  entrance  of  Boston  harbour,  is  not  a  proper 
channel  for  large  vessels ;  but  those  who  frequent  it,  will  follow  the  directions 
here  given :  when  up  with  the  Graves,  which  are  a  parcel  of  dry  rocks  that  ap- 
pear white,  you  must  leave  them  on  your,  larboard  hand,  two  cable's  length  dis- 
tant, then  bring  them  to  bear  S.  E.  and  run  S.  W.  by  W.  4  miles,  when  you  will 
be  up  with  Long  Island  light,  which  is  elevated  on  a  tower  SO  feet,  on  which  is 
a  lantern  7  feet  high,  bearing  from  the  old  light-house,  W.  i  N.  It  is  lighted 
with  10  patent  lamps.     You  leave  it  on  your  larboard  hand. 

In  passing  from  the  Graves  to  Long  Island  light,  you  will  see  two  buoys  on 
your  larboard  hand,  one  of  which  is  on  a  reef  r.all»>d  the  Devil's  Back,  is  pninted 
red,  and  lies  in  4  fathoms  wat«-r ;  the  other  is  on  Ram'a-head  bar,  painted  black, 
and  lies  in  15  feet  water  on  the  N.  E.  end,  bearing  from  Long  Island  light  E. 
N.  E. ;  you  will  also  pass  a  white  buoy  on  your  starboard  hand,  which  lies  on 
the  N.  E.  point  of  Faun  bar,  in  2^  fathoms,  (at  which  time  Long  Island  head 
light  will  bear  S.  W.)  when  you  must  follow  the  directions  above,  for  the  town. 
A  black  buoy  with  a  white  vane,  has  been  placed  near  to  the  Barrel  Rock, 
which  lies  in  the  Broad  Sound  channel,  at  the  entrance  of  Boston  harbour.*  The 
buoy  is  moored  about  7  fathoms  N.  E.  from  the  rock,  in  3|^  fa|homs  water,  abi>ut 
14  mile  W  by  S.  from  the  body  of  the  Graves,  one-half  mile  N.  W.  from  the 
Devil's  Back,  W.  N.  W.  from  the  house  on  Green  Island,  and  N.  E.  i  E.  from 
the  tree  on  Long  Island  head.  This  rock  is  10  or  12  feet  long,  and  5  or  6  feet 
wide,  ranging  N.  N.  W.  and  S.  S.  E.  having  4  or  5  feet  of  water  upon  it  at  low 
tide,  and  3;^  fathoms  round  it.  Vessels  may  pass  with  safety  either  side  of  the 
buoy,  giving  it  u  birth  of  12  or  15  fathoms,  but  the  eastern  passage  is  said  to  be 
preferable  for  strangers. 

The  Lower  Middle  Ground  lying  in  the  way,  the  directions  are  as  follows,  viz. 
The  Lower  Middle  Ground,  which^  lies  on  the  north  side  of  the  channel,  a 
little  above  Spectacle  Island,  is  in  part  dry  / 1  low  water.  On  the  eastern  part 
is  a  red  buoy,  and  on  the  western  part  is  a  black  buoy,  in  two  fathoms  water, 
both  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  at  which  time  you  may  see  the 
white  buoy  on  the  Castle  rocks,  before  mentioned. 

Pudding  point,  cr  Shirley  gut  entrance,  is  betw'jeo  Faun  bar  and  Winship's 
bar.  You  roust  bring  it  to  bear  S.  W.  and  run  for  i*,  leaving  Shirley  point  on  the 
starboard,  and  '"Deer  Island  on  the  larboard  hand.  The  channel  from  this  gut 
to  Boston  is  so  crooked  and  narrow,  that  no  person  should  attempt  to  go  in  with 
a  large  vessel,  unless  acquainted,  without  a  pilot. 


Directions  for  the  Hypocrite  Passage,  in  to  the  Narrows. 
Coming  fiom  sea,  you  leave  the  Graves,  j Roaring  Btill,  Green  Island,  and  Half 

*  In  consequence  of  part  of  Deer  Island's  washing  aw^,  a  sboal  a  made  off  from  the  8.  or 
S.  VV.  point,  in  about  a  W.  S.  W.  direction,  called  the  Handkerchief,  about  40  or  50  fathoms 
long,  ranging  about  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W.  It  is  covered  at  high  water,  but  dnr  at  very  low 
fiies,  Tvhich  makes  it  dangerous  for  vessels  coming  in  and  going  out  through  Broad  Sound. 
A  black  buoy  is  now  placed  near  the  point,  which  must,  in  passing,  be  left  to  the  northward, 
when  passing  through  Broad  Sound. 

f  The  Roaring  BtM  lies  between  the  west  end  of  the  Graoes,  and  the  east  end  of  Green  Island. 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COA&i'  PlLOl. 


6!S 


a  mile  Ai^- 
)OHrd  hand, 
1,  distant  4 
white  spar 
rom  Nick's 
y,  which  w 
nard  hand. 

0  clear  the 
water,  that 

1  N.  N.  W. 
'ngth  open, 
iwn. 

ot  a  proper 
!  directions 
ks  that  ap- 
hnigth  dis- 
en  you  will 
m  which  is 
t  is  lighted 

»  buoys  on 
,  is  pninted 
itea  black, 
id  li|;htE. 
ich  li^s  on 
sland  head 
'  the  town, 
rrel  Rock, 
our.*  The 
ater,  abi<ut 

from  the 
I  E.  from 

or  6  feet 
at  low 
ide  of  the 
said  to  be 


it 


OWS,  VIZ. 

laniiel,  a 
Stern  part 
ins  water; 
ly  see  the 

iVinship's 

int  on  the 

a  this  gut 

o  in  with 


Tide  Recki,  o  your  starboard,  and  the  Outer  Brewster,  Little  and  Great  Calf 
latand,  on  your  larboard  hand.  [Note. — Half  THde  Roeka  lie  to  the  west  of 
Chretn  Island,  one  third  of  a  mile,  and  opposite  Little  Calf  hland,  distant  about 
half  a  mile,]  and  come  out  at  half  ebb. 

Giving  the  Graves  a  birth  of  one  quarter  of  a  mile,  the  course  up  for  Little  CaJf 
hland's  N.  E-  point  is  about  W  by  S-  distant  1)  mile  from  the  Graves.  As  you 
pass  up,  give  the  south  side  of  Green  Island  a  birth  of  one  qu->irter  of  a  mile  to 
avoid  a  ledge  of  rocks  that  runs  off  ft'om  the  south  side  of  the  island,  about  one- 
eighth  of  a  mile.  When  nearly  up  with  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  Little  Calf,  give 
it  a  birth  of  about  40  or  50  fathoms,  and  after  passing  it,  steer  for  the  north  point 
of  the  Great  Calf  Island,  from  the  west  end  of  which  the  course  is  S.  W.  or 
run  up  by  it,  keeping  the  S.  W.  head  of  Pettick's  Island  open  to  the  west  of  the 
beacon  on  the  spit.  In  passing  between  LuvelVs  Island  and  the  beacon  on  the 
spit,  keep  nearest  the  island,  as  a  ledge  of  rocks  extends  from  the  spit  from  60  to 
80  fathoms,  and  comes  out  of  water  at  half-ebb,  lying  about  one-third  of  a  mile 
N.  B.  from  the  beacon.  There  is  also  a  ledge  (or  rock)  lying  about  midway  be- 
tween ^e  beacon  and  S.  E.  point  of  LoveWs  Island,  having  6  feet  on  it  at  low- 
spring  tides.  After  passing  the  beacon,  you  enter  the  Narrows.  LcveWs  Island 
makes  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  Narrows. 


Marks  taken  on  shores  at  the  old  Light-House. 


White  buoy  of  Harden's  Rocks 
Red  buoy  on  Point  AldertoQ    . 
Black  buoy  on  the  Centurion 
Black  buoy  on  George's  Island  rocks, 
S.  E.  head  of  George**  Island 
Beacon  on  the  spit 
Eaut  head  of  Pettick's  Island   . 
Outer  rocks  of  Cohasset 
Light'house  on  Long  Island  Head 


S.  E.  i  S. 
S.  S.  E. 

w.  s.  w. 

W.  by  S.  i  S. 
W.  by  8. 1  S. 
W.  IS. 
S.  W  by  W. 
S>  E.  by  E.  ^  E. 
W.  4.N. 


Bearings  of  sundry  places  from  the  East  Head  ofNahant. 


South  side  of  Nahant  Rock 
Pig  Rocks  (south  dry  rocks) 
Half  Way  Rock 
Tinker's  Island  (south  point) 
Baker's  Island  Lights 
East  end  of  the  Graves 
Long  island  Light  House 
Nortii  point  of  Deer  Island 


N.  N.  E.  i  E. 
N.  E  i  E. 
N.  E.  by  E. 
N.  E.  i  E. 
N.  E.  i  E. 
S.  by  E.  I E. 
s.  W.  I  s. 
S.  W. 


and  Half 

n  the  S.  or 
0  fathoms 
,t  very  low 
ad  Sound. 
orthward, 

en  Island. 


Vessels  outward  bound,  firom  Boston  light-house,  who  would  wish  to  fall  in 
with  *Cape  God,  the  course  is>S.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.  distant  1 1  leagues,  thence  three 
leagues  to  the  light-house.  W-hen  up  with  the  light-house,  and  it  bears  S.  W. 
two  leagues  distant,  you  may  then  steer  S.  S.  E.  which  will  carry  you  out  of 
the  south  channel. 

Vessels  in  Boston  Bay,  who  put  away  for  Cape  Cod  harbour,  must  endeavour 
to  fall  in  with  Race  Point  light-house,  which  contains  a  revolving  light,  and  run 

*  Cape  Cod  is  low  and  sandy  land.  Cape  Ann  is  middling  high,  with  many  trees  on  it 
On  the  latter  is  a  remarkable  land,  called  Pigeon  Hill,  which  appears  like  a  boat  bottom 
up.    (For  description  of  Cape  Cod  light,  see  page  68.) 


61 


UUhNT  a  AiVIKRK'AN  COAST  PILOT. 


for  it  until  within  half  a  mil« ;  whrn  it  bi-ars  R.  N.  K.  haul  im  II.  S.  E.  or  tk"- 
neap  as  the  wind  will  pi>riiiit,  and  anclior  in  from  U)  to  4  falliomf.  in  Htrrintf 
Cove,  when'  is  a  fjood  Uv,  with  tht;  wind  from  N.  I^.  K.  to  S.  E.  hy  K.  Should 
the  wind  Hliift  to  llm  N.  W.  Proviuci'town  Harbour  in  umU-r  thr  Ifti",  to  whirh  w»* 
r«fcr.  (See  page  GO.)  Should  you  first  Tuakr  Vi\\n'  Cod  light,  bring  it  to  bear 
£.  by  N.  and  run  for  it  (mtil  you  h-tve  soundings  in  1 1  or  t.^  fathoms  water,  then 
steer  N.  R.  until  the  light  bears  R.  by  S.  then  run  in  N.  VV.  for  tlie  harbour.  The 
eourse  from  Boston  light-house  to  *.Sat)dwirh,  Is  first  S.  E.  by  E.  3  leagues  to 
Cohasset  rooks,  thence  to  Sandwich  S.  H.  E.  14  leagues. 

When  between  Cape  Ann  and  Cape  Cod,  you  will  have  !Jf»  to  19  fathoms 
water,  which  latter  sounding  is  within  ^ilenguesof  Boston  light-house  ;  the  quality 
of  the  soundings  is  more  to  be  depended  (mi  than  the  depth  of  the  water.  As  you 
will  find  a  diflVrcnce  of  5  or  6  fathoms  in  running  a  cable's  length,  you  will  ob- 
serve that  the  quality  of  soundings  is  rough  on  Cape  Ann  side,  and  sandy  on  Cape 
Cod. 

At  full  and  change,  it  is  higli  water  oflTRacc  Point  at  10  o'clock  and  45  mimitcs. 
Vessjls  in  Itaving  (*ape  Cod,  botnid  to  Boston,  should  cnlculate  the  tide,  as  the 
flood  sets  strong  to  the  S.  VV.  off  Cape  Cod,  from  the  Ra<*e  to  Chatham  ;  flood 
sets  to  the  south  ;  ebb  to  the  north  ;  southern  tide,  9  hours ;  northern  tide,  S 
hours. 

N.  B.  The  upper  buoys  in  Boston  Harbour  will  be  taken  up  during  the  winter 
season  ;  but  those  in  the  vicinity,  including  Salem  and  Cape  Ann,  are  not  taken 
np  during  the  winter.     (See  the  Plate.)        ,  -      .!f  ■  *.         ,  :•"  / 


nir 


Directions  from  Boston  light-house /o  *Cape  Elizabeth. 

From  Boston  light-house  to  Thatcher's  Island  lights,  which  lie  two  miles  east 
from  Cape  Ann,  the  course  is  N.  R.  h  N.  and  the  distance  81  leagues;  but  to 
clear  the  Londoner,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand  when  bound  to 
Cape  Elizabeth,  the  course  is  N.  R.  by  E.  About  half  way,  and  near  the  north 
shore,  is  a  high  bold  rock,  called  Half-way  rock,  of  about  i^O  fathoms  diameter, 
(on  which  is  a  monument)  bearing  S.  W.  by  W.  distant  7S  miles  from  the  eastern 
point  of  Cape  Ann,  before  described,  (page  5&.) 

From  Thatcher's  Island  E.  S.  E.  one-half  of  a  mile,  lies  a  ledge  of  rocks,  call- 
ed the  Londoner,  which  show  themselves  at  half  tide,  and  extend  E.  N.  E.  and 
W.  S.  W.  distant  tvvo  miles  from  the  island.  If  you  should  be  fiu'ced  to  the  north- 
ward of  C'  pe  Ann,  there  is  a  very  clean  bay,  called  Ipswich  bay,  and  north-east 
from  it  lies  the  harbour  of  Portsmouth,  the  entrance  to  which  is  formed  by  Great 
Island  on  the  west,  and  Gerrish's  Island  on  the  cast,  on  the  former  of  which  the 
town  of  Newcastle  is  built.     (See  pagt  43.) 

From  Cape  Ann  lights  to  the  Isles  of  Shoals,  the  course  is  N.  |  E.  distant  6s 
leagues.  These  Isles  are  low  and  level,  and  near  two  miles  in  length.  South 
from  their  west  end,  half  a  mile  distant,  lies  a  rock,  which  may  be  seen  at  half 
tide,  and  by  giving  the  west  end  of  these  islands  a  birth  of  Ih  mile,  a  N.  by  W. 
course  will  carry  you  to  the  entrance  of  Portsmouth  harbour,  9  miles  distant. 
The  southernmost  of  these  inlands  has  a  light-house  on  it,  as  fully  described  in 
page  44. 

Strangers  should  never  attempt  to  go  round  the  east  end  of  these  islands ;  but 
if  driven  thereto,  give  them  a  birth  of  half  a  rtriilei  and  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  whicli 
will  carry  you  to  Portsmouth.  North-east  from  the  east  end  of  these  islands,  4 
miles  distant,  lies  York  ledge,  which  is  always  to  be  s«en,  and  extends  N.  E.  and 
S.  W.  two  miles.  From  York  ledge  to  Boon  Island  light  the  course  is  E.  N.  E. 
distant  9  miles.  From  Boon  Island  light  to  Boon  Island  rock,  (on  which  the  sea 
always  breaks)  the  course  is  east,  and  the  distance  3  miles.  From  Boon  Island 
light  to  Wood  Island  light,  the  course  is  N.  N.  il.  distant  12  leagues,  and  from 
thence  to  Ca[>e  Elizabeth  the  course  is  N.  E.  ^  E.  distant  4  leagues. 


*  On  Cape  Elizabeth  two  ligbt-houses-are  to  be  bailt,  ^Ht  when  tbey  will  be  completed;  U 
at  present  unknown.    June,  1827.  •     ' 


■?** 


^^ 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


65 


but  to 


istatit  6^ 
South 
at  half 
by  W. 

distant, 
ibed  in 

ids ;  but 
whicii 
lands,  4 
E.  and 

i.N.E. 
the  sea 
Island 
id  from 


)Ieted.  U 


Directions  for  sailing  in  and  out  of  Boston  Bay,  from  Cape  Cod  or 
Cape  Ann,  to  Boston  light-house. 

Boston  light-house,  as  hcfore-mentioned,  (page  61)  stands  on  asranll  island  at 
the  entrance  of  the  channel,  and  is  about  82  feet  high,  including  the  lantern.  To 
steer  for  it  from  Cape  Cod,  when  in  5  fathoms,  off  •Pecked  f  lill  bar,  yowr  course 
ia  N.  W.  by  W.  )  W.  14  leagues.  Should  it  be  thick  weather,  and  you  should 
fall  in  with  the  south  shore  of  Scituiite  in  lf>  fathoms,  steer  north  till  you  get  in- 
to 16  fathoms,  when  Bostrui  liji^ht  will  beai  W.  N.  W. 

From  the  Race  Point  light-house  to  Boston  light-hnuse,  is  about  11  leagues. 
From  Cape  Ann  lights  to  Boston  light,  the  course  is  S.  W.  i  S.  distant  8|  leagues. 

There  are  two  lights  on  Thatcher's  Island.  This  island  contains  about  30  acres 
of  land,  secured  by  an  iron-bound  siiore,  and  is  situ'ited  about  two  milfcs'oast  of 
the  main  laud  of  Cape  Ann.  It  affords  no  harbour,  nor  istliereany  saf^  anchor- 
age very  near  it.  There  is  a  piisssige  between  that  and  the  inain,  through  which 
small  vessels  may  pass  even  at  low  tide,  but  the  water  is  shoal,  and  the  bottom 
covered  by  a  collection  of  large  round  stones.  The  light-houses  were  erected 
there  for  the  benefit  of  vessels  coming  in  from  sea,  as  well  as  for  those  coasting 
around  the  shores.  As  soon  as  these  lights  are  discovered,  they  can  know  their 
real  situation  ;  for  being  two  lights,  they  cannot  be  taken  for  the  sinf^lc  revolving 
light  at  Boston  harbour,  or  for  the  Plymouth  lights,  where  there  are  also  two, 
but  the  distance  between  them  is  only  1 1  feet  R  inches,  while  the  distance  between 
those  on  Thatcher's  Island  is  ^ibout  one-third  of  a  mile,  and  can  be  brought  to 
range  one  with  the  other  when  you  are  abreast  of  th(?  island,  and  bear  N.  by  E. 
I  E.  and  S.  by  W.  %  W.  from  each  other,  and  those  on  Plumb  Island  bear  E.  by 
N.  and  W.  by  S.  from  each  other.  The  lighlson  Thatcher's  island  are  of  great  ust; 
to  all  vessels  in  their  piissagein  or  out,  as  they  point  out  the  situation  of  tV.e  Salvagea 
on  the  north,  and  the  Londoner  on  the  south.  Besides,  from  the  different  bear- 
ings of  the  lights,  a  safe  departure  may  be  takeui'  or  the  different  harbours  in  the 
bay,  as  well  as  for  those  bound  northerly  anj^to  sea.  For  remarks  more  minute, 
you  will  find  them  in  the  directions  for  sailing  to  Boston  light  (page  61)  to  Baker's 
Island  lights  (page  56)  and  to  those  on  Plumb  Island,  at  the  moalh  of  Newhury- 
port  harbour  (page  46.)  Var.  6°  30'  W. 


.,;v      .,v  ■      Directions  for  ■fSciUiSLie  harbour. 

The  light-house  at  the  entrance  of  Scituate  harbour  was  erected  more  for  the 
benefit  of  foreigners,  who  fall  into  the  bay  soutliward  of  Cohasset  rocks,  and  as 
a  guide  to  southern  coasters  to  avoid  Cedar  point,  which  is  flat,  and  projects  into 
the  bay  bey6nd  the  cliffs,  than  for  any  advantages  to  be  derived  from'  the  har- 
bour, which  is  small,  having  only  about  12  feet  water  on  the  bar  at  high  water 
middling  tides.  Scituate"  light-house  is  four  miles  to  the  southward  of  Co- 
hasset rocks,  elevated  thirty  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  showing  two-lights, 
one  above  the  other,  the  lower  on*  red,  and  the  upper  one.  tohite,  distinguishln"  it 
from  Boston  light,  on  the  north,  which  is  a  revolving  %Af,  and  Plymouth  lights 
on  the  south,  which  show  two  lights  (or  lanterns  on  the  same  building.) 

From  the  body  of  the  light-house,  the  northerly  part  of  Cedar  point,  and  a 
ledgecalledLong  ledge,  extends  N.  N.  W.  nearly  one  mile;  so  that  vessels  fall- 

•  Remarks  by  Capt.  Trevett,  o^Cape  Cod.—"  Being  well  in  with  the  lanrJ,  when  the  light- 
house on  the  Highlands  was  abeam,  we  steered  N.  W.  by  W.  about  two  leagues,  whic^s 
brought  us  up  with  Peeked  Hill  bar;  then  W.  S.  W.  3  leagues,  which  broughrus  up  with 
Race  Point ;  then  steered  S,  S.  E.  for  Wood  End  point,  about  3  leagues,  or  until  we  got  tlK 
light  on  the  Highland  to  bear  E.  by  N.  then  run  E.  by  N.  about  4  miles,  to  good  anchorage. 

t  Scituate  light'house  is  erected  on  Cedar  point,  which  makes  the  n«rth  chop  of  the  har- 
bour, the  fjrst  cliff,  (so  called)  making  the  south  chop.  There  an  four  of  these  cliffs  ex- 
teodtog  towards  the  south  main, the  southernmost  of  which  being  the  h^est,  was  consideicd 
the  moat  suitable  site  for  the  light-house  which  will,  we  hope,  prevent  a  repetition  of  asiidl* 
let  disaster  to  the  one  mentioned  in  note  to  page  61,  ana  m  cimteqtienetqfwhkh  tAeottcra- 
flffnoftktttghts(a8cUwUe,tookflactatptmbtrl,m7. 


Ingia  alittlA  iuore  than  one  nils  northward  of  the  light,  may  Wbg'th«  light  to 
bear  south;  and  if  they  make  good  Uielr  course  nor^,  they  will  clear  the  outer 
ledces  of  Cohasset  rocks :  half  a  mile  east  of  the  body  of  the  light  will  clesr 
Cedar  point.  Long  ledge,  and  the  first  Cliff  ledge. 

[NoTK.— There  are  ledges  extending  from  all  the  four  cliffs,  but  none  between 
them ;  and  half  a  mile  from  the  shore  will  clear  all,  except  frigates  and  large 
vessels.] 

Prom  the  body  of  the  lights,  running  S.  S.  E.  will  clear  Branche's  point,  con- 
sequently, giving  the  lights  half  a  mile  birth,  there  will  be  no  danger  in  running 
Ov  8*  £• 

There  is  a  passage  within  Cohasset  rocks,  used  by  coasters,  which  is  found  by 
giving  the  lights  half  a  mile  birth,  and  running  N.  W.  by  N.  to  the  southerly  en- 
tering rock. 

There  is  a  mseting-house  about  two  miles  W.  by  N.  from  the  lights ;  and  a 
farm-house  near  the  north-west  side  of  the  harbour,  with  two  large  barns  a  littl  i 
north.  To  go  into  the  harbour  (the  mouth  of  which  is  about  one-third  of  a  mil<j 
wide)  bring  the  nitdtingrhouse  or  farm-house  to  bear  about  W.  by  N.  from  the 
middle  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  and  run  ip  W,  by  N.  for  the  farm-house, 
until  you  have  pnssed  ^he  bar,  which  is  a  hard  bftd  of  stones  and  gravel  that  does 
not  shift ;  and  aftei  passing  tlie  bar,  and  coming  on  sandy  bottom,  haul  up  and 
anchor  near  the  beach  on  the  south  side  of  tlu  harbour. 


Directions  for  *PIy  mouth  Harbour. 

The  high  land  of  the  Monument  bears  from  the  lights  S.  i  W.  3  miles,  and 
\MonumtrJ  point  S.  S.  E.  B  leagues,  and  Branche's  point  N.  }  W.  about  3  I'iagues, 
Saqunsh  head  W.  i  S.  Smiles,  the  easternmost  part  of  Brown's  Islands  or  shoal 
that  dries,  S.  S.  W.  U  mile,  and  the  Gurnet  rock  from  the  body  of  the  light- 
house E.  by  S.  I  S.  one-third  part  of  a  mile ;  on  this  rock  you  have  but  3  feet 
at  low  water,  at  wliich  time  all  the  soundings  were  taken,  and  3^  fathoms  along 
side  at  the  same  time.  A  white  buoy  is  placed  near  this  rock,  bearing  E.  S.  E. 
from  the  light-house,  distant  about  one-third  of  a  mile.  When  you  have  shut 
in  the  Sandy  hill  with  the  Gurnet  head,  you  are  clear  of  the  rock ;  after  which 
yoa  must  mind  not  to  haui  in  too  close  to  the  head,  as  there  are  many  sunken 
i'ocks  some  distance  from  the  shore.  When  you  bring  Saquash  head  to  bear 
W.  by  N.  you  may  then  steer  up  W.  by  S.  and  if  you  are  bound  for  Plymouth, 
you  must  keep  that  course  for  a  large  red  cliff  on  the  main,  which  is  a  very  good 
mark  to  carry  you  clear  of  Dick's  Hat ;  then  you  must  steer  more  southerly  for 
Beach  point,  or  run  up  until  you  are  abreasi  of  Saquash  head,  giving  it  onc- 
(juarter  of  a  mile  distance ;  then  steer  W.  by  S.  i  S.  which  will  clear  you  of 
Dick's  flat,  and  carry  you  directly  for  Beach  point,  keeping  within  15  or  20  yards 
of  the  Sandy  toint,  steering  away  for  the  southward,  keeping  that  distance  until 
you  have  shut  in  the  lights,  where  you  may  anchor  in  3  and  4  fathoms,  but  the 


'*■  TUis  harbour  is  capacious,  but  shallow,  and  is  formed  by  a  long  and  narrow  neck  of 
land,  called  Salt-house  beach,  extending  southerly  from  Marshfield,  and  terminating  at  the 
Gurnet  head,  and  by  a  smaller  beach  within,  running  in  an  opposite  direction,  and  connected 
with  the  tnain  land  near  Eel  river,  about  3  miles  from  the  town.  There  are  two  light-houses 
on  the  Gurnet,  which  avc  <ibQut  86  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  sea,  15  feet  apart,  contain- 
ing jvced  ligMs,  and  cannot  bo  brou<;ht  into  one,  to  tlie  northwprd,  unless  you  are  on  the  shore  : 
But  to  the  southward  you  may  bring  them  in  one,  which  is  a  very  good  mark  to  clear  you 
of  Brown's  Island  or  sand  bank.  On  Salt^house  beach  is  placed  one  of  the  huts  erected  and 
maintaine4  by  the  Humane  Soriiety  of  Massachusetts,  for  the  reception  and  relief  of  ship- 
wrecked mariners.  There  is  abreacU  in  the  inner  beach,  which  eiposes  the  shipping,  even 
at  the  wharves,  durtog  an  easterly  storm.  The  Gurnet  is  an  eminence  at  the  southern  ex- 
tremity of  the  heach. 

f  Monument  Bay  (fVoui  which  the  point  take^  its  name)  is  formed  by  th?  bending  of  Cap* 
Cod.    It  is  spacious  and  convenient  for  the  protection  of  shipping. 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


67 


tlM  light  to 
ar  the  outer 
t  will  clear 

ne  betwe«iv 
>  and  large 

j^oint,  con- 
in  running 

is  found  by 
utherly  en- 

;ht3 ;  and  a 
iirns  a  littl  i 
d  of  a  milq. 
r.  from  the 
arm-house, 
;1  that  does 
aul  up  and 


g 


miles,  and 
:  3  i-iagues. 
Is  or  shoal 
th«;  light- 
but  3  feet 
>ms  along 
E.  S.  E. 
lave  shut 
ten  which 
sunken 
to  bear 
ymouth, 
ery  good 
lerly  for 
it  onc- 
you  of 
20  yards 
nee  until 
,  but  the 


neck  of 
ng  at  the 
Onnected 
it-houses 

contain- 
e  shore  : 
ilear  you 
cted  and 

of  ship- 
ng,  even 

ern  ex- 

I  of  Cap* 


channel  is  very  narrow,  having  nothing  but  a  flat  all  the  way  to  Plymouth,  ex- 
cept this  small  channel,  which  runs  close  by  this  neck  of  land:  you  will  have  4 
and  5  fatlioms  close  to  this  point.  If  you  are  bound  into  the  Cow-yard,  you 
must  steer  as  before  directed,  which  will  clear  you  of  the  stone  monument  on 
Dick's  flnt,  and  that  on  the  Muscle  bank,  both  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard 
hand,  wheti  you  may  anchor  in  7  or  8  fathoms  water.  If  b(mnd  to  Kinp;ston,  you 
will  keep  the  house  on  Gurnet  hv  '  just  open  with  Saquash  head,  until  you  have 
opened  the  hi);h  pines  with  V\i  vS  Island;  then  you  are  clear  of  the  Muscle 
bank,  when  you  may  steer  N.  \V.  until  you  have  3  fathoms  at  low  water,  not  run- 
ning into  less. 

In  coming  from  the  northward,  bound  into  Plymouth,  you  must  not  bring  the 
lights  more  southerly  than  S.  by  W.  to  avoid  High  Pine  ledge,  which  lies  no*lh 
from  the  Gurnet  hoad,  about  2i  or  three  miles.  When  you  are  on  theshoalest 
part  of  this  ledge,  some  part  of  which  appears  at  low  ebbs,  you  will  have  the  high 
pines  in  range  with  Captain's  hill,  which  will  then  bear  W.  by  S.  This  ledge  of 
rocks  lies  li  mile  from  the  shore,  extending  about  N.  N.  E.  for  near  a  mile,  and 
close  to  this  ledge  you  will  have  4  and  5  fathoms,  which  deepens  gradually  as 
you  run  from  it  to  the  eastward :  within  one  mile  you  will  have  10  and  12  fathoms. 

In  coming  from  the  southward,  bound  into  Plymouth,  you  must  not  open  the 
northern  lig.it  to  the  westward,  but  keep  them  in  one,  which  will  carry  you  in  5 
fathoms  by  the  easternmost  part  of  Brown's  Islands  or  shoal,  keeping  that  course 
until  you  are  within  half  a  mile  of  Gurnet  head,  or  nigher,  where  you  will  have 
but  4  fathoms;  then  Saquash  head  will  bear  W.  by  N.  a  little  northerly,  and  the 
two  outermost  trees  on  the  head  in  one ;  then  you  may  steer  directly  for  them, 
until  you  bring  the  lights  to  bear  E.  N.  F.  and  the  house  on  Saquash  head  to 
bear  N.  W.  just  open  with  the  first  Sandy  beach,  where  you  may  anchor  in  4 
fathoms  in  Sa(|uash  ro:td,  good  clear  bottom ;  but  if  you  are  bound  for  Plymouth, 
or  the  Cow-yards,  you  must  steer  as  before  directed.  If  in  the  night,  it  is  best 
to  anchor  here,  as  it  is  ditlicuit  to  make  Beach  point  (as  it  is  mostly  covered  at 
high  water)  if  dark,  or  to  go  into  the  Cow-yard. 

In  turning  into  Plymouth,  you  must  not  stand  to  the  northward  into  less  than 
3  fathoms,  as  it  runs  a  flat  a  long  way  from  the  Gurnet  head  to  Saquash;  and 
from  both  the  heads  lies  t>ff'  a  point  of  rocks  a  good  way  from  the  shore,  many 
of  them  but  just  under  water  at  low  ebbs.  And  all  the  way  from  Saquash  to 
the  Muscle  bank,  you  have  shoal  water ;  so  that  you  must  not  stand  in  less  than 
before-montioned.  And  in  standing  over  for  the  sands  to  the  southward,  you 
must  go  about  as  soon  as  you  have  shoalen  your  water  to  4  fathoms,  as  it  is  bold 
to,  and  you  may  observe  the  rips,  unless  it  is  very  smooth.  This  sand  extends 
from  abreast  of  the  lights  to  Beach  point,  most  of  which  is  dry  at  low  ebbs. 
From  the  easternmost  part  of  this  sand  to  Dick's  flat,  it  rounds  with  a  consider- 
able sweep;  you  have  but  5  fathoms  water  from  the  easternmost  part  of  Brown's 
Island  to  the  Gurnet  head,  and  not  more  than  7  or  8  until  you  are  abreast  of  Dick's 
flat,  where  you  will  have  13  or  14  fathoms  in  a  deep  hole,  and  then  shoalen  to  D 
fathoms  abreast  of  Beach  point. 

If  you  should  fall  into  the  southward  of  Brown's  Islands  or  shoal,  between 
them  and  the  Monument  land,  where  you  have  SO  fathoms  in  some  places,  you 
must  not  attempt  to  run  for  the  lights,  until  you  have  them  shut  in  one  with  the 
other,  when  they  will  bear  N.  N.  W.  j^  W. ;  if  you  do,  you  may  depend  on 
being  on  Brown's  islands  or  shoals,  as  there  is  no  passage  for  even  a  boat  at 
low  water. 

In  coming  in  froir.  the  northward  in  the  night,  you  must  not  bring  the  light  to 
bear  more  southerly  than  S.  by  W.  to  avoid  High  Pine  ledge,  and  keep  that 
course  until  you  have  them  to  hear  N.  W.  or  N.  W.  by  W.  when  you  will  be 
clear  of  the  rock,  and  may  steer  up  W.  by  S.  until  you  have  the  lights  to  bear  E. 
N.  A.  where  you  had  best  anchor  in  the  night.  Here  the  tide  runs  strong  chan- 
nel course  from  the  Gurnet  to  the  Race  point  of  Cape  Cod;  the  course  is  E'  h 
N.  about  6  leagues  distance;  and  from  the  Gurnet  to  the  point  going  into  Cape 
Cod  harbour,  is  E.  by  S.  7  leagues. 

If  you  should  make  the  lights  in  hard  northerly  or  N.  W.  winds,  and  cannot 
get  into  Plymoutli,  you  may  then  n\n  for  Cape  Cod  harbour,  bringing  th«: 


A 


68 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


lii;hts  to  bear  W.  by  N.  and  steer  directly  for  Race  Point  light,  following  the 
directions  given  for  entering  Provincetown  harbour,  bythe^xerf  light  on  Long 
Point,  and  come  to  anchor.  If  it  should  blow  so  hard  that  you  cannot  turn  up 
the  harbour,  you  may  anchor  off  the  point,  clear  bottom ;  you  have  8  and  9 
fathoms  very  nigh  the  shore,  so  that  there  is  no  danger  of  being  on  it,  unless  verv- 
dark. 

At  the  Gurnet  and  Plymouth,  the  tides  are  much  the  same  as  at  Boston ;  that 
h,  a  S.  E.  moon  makes  full  sea. 


Directions  for  Cape  Cod  Harbour. 

If  you  wish  to  go  into  Cape  Cod  harbour,  you  may  pass  within  half  a 
mile  of  the  light  on  *Race  Point.  After  passing  it.  bring  it  to  bear  M.  N.  W. 
and  run  S.  S.  E. ;  run  until  the  light  on  the  Higliland  bears  E.  by  N. ;  then  i  un 
for  it  2  or  3  miles,  when  you  will  be  clear  of  Wood  End  bar ;  then  N.  E.  to  bring 
the  light  on  the  Highland  to  bear  E.  ^  S.  when  haul  up  N.  W.  fur  the  harbour,  and 
anchor  in  4  fathoms,  when  the  light  will  bear  E.  by  S.  li  S.  5  or  6  miles  distant. 

In  going  into  Cape  Cod  harbour  in  the  night,  you  may  follow  the  above 
directions  till  the  light  on  the  Highlands  bears  E.  by  N.  when  you  may  run  for  it 
till  you  get  into  5  fathoms,  when  you  must  steer  N.  W.  for  Provincetown,  keep- 
ing same  soundings,  about  2  miles  distant. 

Good  anchorage  may  be  found  in  a  N.  E.  gale,  by  running  for  Race  Point  light, 
giving  it  one-third  of  a  mile  distance  as  you  pass  it;  as  soon  as  it  bears  E.  by  N. 
iiaul  up  E.  S.  E.  and  anchor  in  from  10  to  4  fathoms. 

Vessels  inward  bound,  who  fall  u^  with  the  back  of  Cape  Cod,  may  bring  the 
flight  to  bear  S.  W.  2  leagues  distan  ,  and  then  steer  W.  N.  W.  for  Boston  light- 
house, which  contains  a  revolving  tight. 

When  up  with  Race  Point,  you  will  find  it  very  bold  about  one  mile  to  the 
westward  of  the  light-house,  and  it  may  he  known  by  a  number  of  fish-houses  on 
it.  About  one  mile  to  the  southward  of  Race  Point  is  what  is  called  IJeiring 
cove,  where  you  may  have  good  anchorage  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  the  wind 
from  E.  to  N.  N.  E.  in  4,  or  even  in  3  fathoms  water. 

In  passing  Race  Point  to  the  southward,  vou  must  give  it  a  birth  of  one  mile, 
as  there  is  a  long  flat  of  sand  that  lies  to  the  southward  of  said  point.  You  must 
not  haul  to  the  eastward  till  you  come  near  Herring  Cove. 

In  running  from  Race  Point  to  Wood  End,  after  you  pass  the  BlacfC  land  or 
Hummocks,  you  will  come  up  w'h  a  low  sandy  beach  which  forms  the  harbour, 
extending  between  two  and  three  miles  to  Wood  End,  uhich  is  diflicult  to  be 
distinguished  in  the  night ;  it  is  very  bold,  and  you  will  have  'ib  fathoms  water 
within  one  quarter  of  a  mile  of  the  shore. 

In  beating  into  Cape  Cod  harbour,  you  must  keep  the  eastern  shore  aboard  until 
you  get  into  5  fathoms  water.  Stand  no  furlhrr  to  the  wfslward  than  lo  bring 
the  light  to  bear  E.  by  S.  as  there  is  a  long  spit  of  sand  runs  oll'from  th«-  western 
shore,  which  being  very  bold,  you  will  have  1 1  fathoms  water  within  a  stone's 
throw  of  the  shore. 

If  it  blows  so  hard  that  you  cannot  boat  into  the  harbour,  you  will  have  good 
anchoring  without,  in  from  10  to  15  fathoms  water.  Or,  if  it  blows  hard  at  N.  E. 
bring  Race  point  light  to  bear  N.  W.  by  N.  andsteer  S.  E.  by  S.  7  leagues,  which 
course   will  carry  you  into  Wellfleet.     In  steering   this  course,  you  will  make 

*  There  is  a  light-house  erected  on  the  cxtrcoic  point  ol  Jvace  Point,  which  contains  a 
revolving  light  (on  the  same  plan  as  Boston  iii^ht)  )o  distingitinh  it  from  the  one  on 
Highland  of  Cape  Cod,  but  it  cannot  be  seen  from  veHself  coming  Oodi  .sea  until  it  bears  S. 
S.  W.  ^  S.  when  they  run  for  it.  The  light  is  2.'i  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  und  155 
feet  from  high  water  murk. 

t  The  light-house  is  erected  on  land  at  the  Clay  Pounds  (high  luml  of  Cnpe  Cod)  devoted 
about  150  feet,  which,  w  ih  the  elevation  of  the  lantern,  makes  the  wtole  height  200  feet 
ttboft  high  water  mark.    It  contains  a  fixed  light. 


mill 
wilf 
mil) 
fatl 

4tc 
9tc 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


69 


jllowing  the 
ht  on  Long 
not  turn  up 
ive  8  and  9 
I  unless  verv 

loston;  that 


thin  half  a 
r  J\.  N.  W. 
'. ;  then  mn 
E.  to  bring 
lapbour,  and 
!S  distant. 
f  the  above 
ly  run  for  it 
own,  keep- 
Point  light, 
rs  E.  by  N. 

y  bring  the 
oston  light' 

mile  to  the 
3-houscson 
id  IJeiring 
!,  the  wind 

one  mile. 
You  must 

IK  land  or 
harbour, 
:ult  to  be 
fms  water 

)ard  until 
(o  bring 
western 
stone's 

Jive  good 
lat  N.  E. 
Is,  which 
lill  make 


intains  a 
I  one  on 
I  bears  S. 
lund  155 

lelcvnted 
200  feet 


Harwich  right  ahead  :  When  you  open  the  bay,  you  will  bring  Billingsgate  Island 
light  on  your  larboard  hand,  when  you  may  haul  to  the  eastward,  and  anchor  safe 
from  all  winds. 


Directions  for  entering  Provincetown  Harbour. 

In  running  for  this  harbour,  vessels  may  pass  Race  Point  light  within  half  a 
mile ;  then  steer  S.  S.  E.  until  the  light  on  *Long  Point  bears  N.  E.  by  N.  which 
will  clear  Wood  End  bar ;  then  steer  for  the  light  until  within  one-third  of  a 
mile,  at  which  distance  pass  it ;  then  haul  up  N.  N.  W.  and  anchor  in  from  3  to  & 
fathoms  water,  low  tides. 

Beating  into  this  harbour,  vessels  may  stand  towards  the  eastern  shore,  into 
4  to  ili  fathoms,  with  gradual  soundings  ;  the  western  side  is  bold,  having  from 
9  to  10  fathoms,  close  to  Long  Point. 


j[ Billingsgate  Island  Light  House, 

Is  fitted  up  with  eight  Lamps  and  Reflectors.  It  is  a  ^fixed  light,  and  situated 
so  far  up  Barnstable  Bay,  that  it  cannot  be  mistaken  for  any  other. 

Billingsgate  Island  is  about  13  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea  at  high  water, 
Mrhich,  with  the  elevation  of  the  lantern,  makes  the  whole  height  40  feet  above 
high  water  m«irk.  It  is  high  water  in  this  Bay,  at  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon, 
at  11  o'clock  ;  the  rise  of  the  spring  tides  is  from  IS  to  14  feet;  common  tides  9 
to  11  feet.  From  the  west  end  of  Billingsgate  Island  extends  a  long  shoal  of 
hard  sand  10  or  11  miles,  in  a  VV.  by  S.  i  S.  to  W.  by  N.  from  the  light-house, 
and  in  a  N.  W.  to  N.  N-  W.  direction,  5  or  6  miles;  at  the  distance  of  1||  to  £! 
miles  from  'he  light,  is  about  8  feet  at  low  water,  common  tides ;  and  the  meet- 
ing-house wiia  a  steeple  in  Brewster,  S.  by  E  ;  at  the  distance  of  five  miles  from 
the  light-house,  10  to  12  feet,  the  meeting-house  hearing  S.  S.  E.;  at  the  dis- 
tance of  7  miles,  2.J  fathoms  of  water,  the  meeting-house  bearing  S.  E.  by  S. ; 
at  these  depths  of  water  tiie  light-house  bo-e  from  E.  by  N.  to  E.  by  N.  h  N. 
Crossing  this  shoal  point  of  flats,  you  drop  into  4  to  5  fathoms  at  the  distance  of 
40  Oithoms  from  the  edge,  of  this  shoal,  when  the  light-house  will  then  bear  E. 
N.  E.  Vessels  drawing  la  fret  of  water,  or  upwards,  should  bring  the  light- 
house to  bear  E.  IV  E.  to  N.  E.  by  E.  and  steer  in  E.  by  S.  to  E.  S.  E.  until 
the  light-house  bears  N.  by  VV.  when  they  will  have  good  anchorage  in  S  to  4 
fathoms  low  water,  common  tides,  soft  muddy  bottom,  and  distance  from  the 
light-house,  1.^  to  1^  miles;  Brewster  meeting-house  o;i  .vith  a  WMidmill  that 
stands  not  far  from  it,  when  they  will  bear  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  also  the  north  meet- 
ing house,  that  stands  on  a  hill  in  Easthara,  and  no  other  building  near  to  it,  bore 
at  the  same  time,  E.  h  N. 

The  following  hearings  and  distances  taken  from  the  light-house :— The  high 
land  of  the  North  Point  of  the  Monument,  W.  by  N.  \  N.  distance  about  ten 
leagues  ;  entrance  of  Barnstable,  the  Black  Land,  called  by  some  Scargo  hill,  in 
Dennis,  S.  W.  distance  16  miles,  S.  W.  i  S.  about  11  miles,  Brewste.'  meeting- 
house with  a  steeple  to  it,  S.  by  VV.  to  S.  9  miles;  entrance  of  Orleans,  S.  B. 
^  S.  6  miles ;  Eastham  north  meeting-house,  S.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.  4  miles ;  Silver 
Spring  Harltour  of  Eastham,  E.  by  i\.  ^  N.  4  miles.  The  above  places  are  all 
barred  harbours,  and  flats  extend  off  shore  from  1  to  2  miles,  with  little  water 
over  them. 


*  A  light-house,  containing  a  fixed  light,  has  been  erected  on  Long  Point,  at  the  entrance  of 
Provincetown  Harbour,  and  lies  close  to  the  Point, 
t  On  Billingsgate  Island  a  lis^ht-house  is  erected,  which  exhibits  ti, fixed  Hirhf, 


70 


BLUN*r's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


A  Rock  that  is  in  tiie  passage  way  up  to  Wellfleet,  that  is  about  12  feetlongand 
S  feet  broad,  called  Bay  Rock,  on  which  is  about  1  or  2  feet  water  at  low  tide, 
and  round  this  rock  is  9  to  11  feet  water  at  low  tide,  bearing  from  the  light-house 
E.  by  S.  i  S.  distance  M  niile.  When  on  this  Rock,  Chipman's  Windmill, 
which  is  the  South  mill  in  Wellfleet,  a  little  open  to  the  north  of  a  large  rock 
called  Blue  Rock,  by  some,  and  stands  near  the  shore  of  Wellfleet,  ^vhen  it  will 
bear  N.  N.  E.  :^  E.  ;  this  rock  is  covered  iit  high  water;  and  a  Wiiidmili  on  a  hill 
in  Eastham,  over  the  salt  mills,  which  is  near  the  shore  at  Kastham,  these  hearing 
E.  by  S.  from  Bay  Rock.  The  East  point  of  the  Horse  Shoe  bears  from  the 
light-house  E.  N.  E.  distant  about  one-third  of  a  mile.  On  the  south  side  of 
Billingsgate  Island,  the  flats  extend  off  the  distance  of  ^  to  |  mile,  having  on  them 
at  low  water,  common  tides,  6  to  9  feet  water. 

Th^re  is  no  meeting-house  Avith  a  steeple  to  be  seen  to  the  eastward  of  Barn- 
!<tuble,  but  the  one  in  Brewster ;  and  this  meeting-house  is  a  good  mark  to  pass 
over  the  Long  Shoal  Point  that  extends  off"  from  the  light-house. 

From  the  light-house  on  the  Race  Point  of  Cape  Tod,  when  bearing  E.  N.  E. 
the  course  to  BiUingsgate  point  of  flats,  is  S.  by  K.  distance  21  miles.  Vessels 
drawing  12  feet  water  or  uj)wards,  should  steer  from  the  Race  light-house,  south, 
when  distant  from  the  Race,  1  or  2  miles. 


the 
beaci 
abreq 
in  5 
steerl 
soutl* 
T^ 
fathi] 

iW. 


Dtsct 
RhI 
har 
mat: 
look 


■  i    ^'  Remarks  on  Barnstable  Bay. 

-  f 

From  Center  Hill  point  1(  Sauset  inlet,  is  about  4  miles,  bearing  S.  ^  E.  This 
is  a  clean  and  bold  shore,  and  may  be  approached  at  the  distance  of  one-third  to 
half  a  mile,  carrying  3i  to  4  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.  There  is  a  bar  of  sand  that 
lies  parallel  with  the  shore,  nearCent«'r  Hill  point,  extending  to  the  southward, 
and  terminating  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Sausett. 
From  the  sh<»re  over  this  bar  to  .9  fathoms  water,  the  distance  is  240  to  250 
fathoms,  and  the  bar  is  from  lOU  to  140  fathoms  wide,  having  on  it  from  9  to  II 
feet  water,  and  between  that  and  the  shore  from  3  to  3:^  fathoms.  From  the  south 
end  of  this  bar  along  shore  to  the  entrance  of  Sandwich,  is  3  fathoms,  and  distance 
70  to  90  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  and  regular  soundings,  as  you  approach  the 
shore. 

On  the  south  side  of  Sausett  inlet  is  a  low  rocky  point  of  90  fathoms.  Three 
fourths  of  a  mile  offshore  are  3  fathoms,  and  at  the  distance  of  li^  or  2  miles,  are 
9  to  10  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

Passing  from  Sandwich  towards  Barnstable,  the  flats  run  off  shore  100  to  180 
fathoms. 

The  soundings  are  reduced  to  low  wsiter;  the  neep  tider.  8  feet ;  common  tides 
9  to  10  feet ;  spring  tides  12  to  13.  High  water  in  the  t)ay  at  full  and  change  of 
the  moon,  at  1 1  o'clock.  ^ 


Directions  for  entering  Barnstable  Harbour. 

When  coming  from  the  northward,  the  bar  must  not  be  approached  in  less 
than  5  fathoms  water,  until  the  llght-houHe  on  Sandy  Neck  hears  S.  W.  4  W.  as 
there  is  a  long  bar  makes  out  fntm  the  point  3  miles,  in  a  M.  E.  direction,  with  a 
buoy  on  the  eastern  part  of  it,  in  12  i'eet  water,  bearing  from  the  light  N.  E.  h  E. 
3  miles  distan*:.  When  up  with  the  buoy  haul  close  round,  leaving  it  on  your 
starboard  hand,  and  run  about  two  cables'  length  S.  8.  W.  to  clear  the  S.  W. 
part  of  the  bar,  then  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  4  W.  for  about  li  miles,  or  until  the  light 
bears  S.  W.  by  S.  which  will  be  the  case  when  up  with  Yarmouth  flats,  then 
steer  for  the  light.  Be  careful  to  make  the  above  courses  good,  as  the  tide  «> 7 
flood  set?  stronK  over  Yarmouth  flats,  and  the  ebb  stro.ip  to  the  northward  ever 


2  feet  long  and 
jr  at  low  tide, 
he  li^ht-house 
I's  Windmill, 
F  a  large  rock 
,  ivhen  it  will 
dnnili  on  a  hill 
these  hearing 
ears  from  the 
:  south  side  of 
avingonthem 

vard  of  Barn- 
mark  to  pass 

i-ing  E.  N.  E. 
lies.  Vessels 
house,  south. 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


71 


3.  aE.    This 

one- third  to 

r  of  sand  that 

southward, 

of  Sausett. 

i  240  to  250 

Vom  9  to  1 1 

9m  the  south 

and  distance 

proach  the 

ims.     Three 
S  miles,  are 

100  to  180 

imon  tides 
change  of 


fed  In  less 

'.  i  W.  as 

km,  with  a 

JN.E.  4E. 

It  on  your 

Ihe  S.  W. 

lii  the  light 

Iflats,  then 

|he  tide  %,! 

vhM  ever 


the  bar.  Continue  your  course  for  the  light  until  within  a  cable's  length  of  the 
beach,  and  follow  the  shore  round  the  point.  There  is  safe  anchorage  inside, 
abreast  of  the  light,  against  all  winds,  the  light  bearing  from  S.  W.  to  N.  E. 
in  5  to  24  fathoms.  In  proceeding  up  to  town,  pass  the  point  a  cable's  length, 
steer  S.  VV.  by  W.  I  of  a  mile,  then  W.  by  S.  until  the  meeting-house  bears 
south,  when  you  will  have  goud  anchorage  in  2i  fathoms. 

There  are  from  6  to  7  feet  water  on  the  bar  at  low  water,  and  from  2  to  S 
fathoms  in  the  channel. 

Vessels  drawing  8  feet  water,  may,  at  high  water,  bring  the  light  to  liear  S.  W- 
i  W.  and  run  directly  for  it.    Full  sea  at  full  and  change,  1 1  o'clock. 


Description  of  the  eastern  coast  of  the  county  of  Barnstable  from  Cape  Cod,  or 
Race  f»oint,  in  Int.  42^  5'  N.  to  Cape  Malebarre,  or  the  Sandy  point  o/ Chat- 
ham, tn/a^  41°  34'  N.  pointing  out  the  spots  on  which  the  Trustees  of  the  Hu- 
mane Society  have  erected  huts,  and  other  places  where  shipwrecked  Seamen  rip,ay 
look  for  slvelttr. 

The  curvature  of  the  shore,  on  the  west  aide  of  Provincetown,  and  south  of  Race  point, 
is  called  [ierring  cove,  which  is  three  miles  in  len>;th.  There  is  good  anchoring  ground  here, 
and  vessels  may  ride  safely  in  four  or  live  fathoms  water,  when  the  wind  is  from  northeast 
to  south-east. 

On  Race  point  stand  about  a  dozen  fishing  huts,  containing  fire-places  and  other  conve- 
niences. The  distance  from  these  huts  to  Provincetown,  which  lies  on  Cape  Cod  harbour, 
ia  three  miles.  The  passive  is  over  a  sandy  beach,  without  grass,  or  any  other  vegetable 
growing  on  it,  to  the  woods,  through  which  is  a  winding  road  to  the  town.  It  would  be  difli- 
cult,  if  not  impossible,  for  a  stranger  to  find  his  way  thither  in  the  dark ;  and  the  woods  are 
so  full  of  ponds  and  enta'^lini;  swamps,  that  if  the  road  was  missed,  destruction  would 
probably  be  the  consequenne  of  attempting  to  penetrate  them  in  the  night. 

Not  far  from  Race  point  commences  a  ridgt^,  which  extends  to  the  head  of  Stout's  creek. 
With  the  face  t<i  the  east,  on  the  left  hand  of  the  ridge,  is  the  sandy  shore  :  on  the  right  is  a 
narrow  sandy  valley :  beyond  which  is  nuked  sand,  reaching  to  the  hills  and  woods  of  Pro- 
vincetown. This  ridge  is  well  covered  with  beach  grass,  and  appears  to  owe  its  existence  to 
that  vegetable. 

Beacii  grass,  during  the  spring  and  summer,  grows  about  '.wo  feet  and  a  half.  If  sur- 
rounded by  naked  beach,  the  storms  of  autumn  and  winter  heap  up  the  sand  on  all  sides,  and 
cause  it  to  rise  nearly  to  the  top  of  the  plant.  In  the  ensuing  spring,  the  grass  sprouts  anew  ; 
is  again  covered  with  sand  in  the  winter,  and  thus  a  hill  or  ridge  continues  to  ascend,  as  long 
as  there  is  a  sufficient  base  to  support  it,  or  till  the  circumscribing  sand,  being  also  covered 
with  beach  grass,  will  no  longer  yield  to  the  force  of  the  winds. 

On  this  ridge,  halfway  between  Race  point  and  the  head  of  Stout's  creek,  the  Trustees  of 
the  Humane  Society  have  erected  a  hut.  It  stands  a  mile  from  Peeked  hill,  a  land*mark 
well  known  to  seamen,  and  is  about  2^  miles  from  Race  point.  Seamen,  cast  away  on  this 
part  of  the  coast,  will  find  a  shelter  here ;  and  in  north-cast  storms,  should  they  strike  to 
the  leeward  of  it,  and  be  unable  to  turn  their  faces  to  the  windward,  by  passing  on  to  Race 
point,  they  will  soon  come  to  the  fishing  huts  before-mentioned. 

At  the  head  of  Stout's  creek  the  Trustees  have  built  a  second  hut.  Stout's  creelr  is  a 
small  branch  of  East  harbour  in  Truro.  Many  years  ago  there  was  a  body  of  salt  marsh  on 
it ;  and  it  then  deserved  the  name  of  a  creek.  But  the  marsh  was  long  since  destroyed ;  and 
the  crf^ek  now  scarcely  exists,  appearing  only  like  a  small  depression  in  the  sand,  being  en- 
tirely dry,  and  now  principally  covered  with  beach  grass.  The  creek  runs  from  north-west 
to  south-east,  and  is  nearly  parallel  with  the  shore  on  the  ocean,  from  which  it  is  at  no  great 
distance.  Not  far  from  it,  the  hills  of  Provincetown  terminate :  and  should  not  the  hut 
be  found,  by  'walking  round  the  head  of  the  creek,  with  the  face  to  the  west,  the  hills  on  the 
right  hand,  and  keeping  close  to  tlio  shore  on  the  harbour,  in  less  than  an  hour  the  shipwreck- 
ed seaman  would  come  to  Provincetown.  It  is  high  water  at  Truro  about  30  minutes  sooner 
than  at  Boston. 

The  Humane  Society,  several  years  ago,  erected  a  hut  at  the  head  of  Stout's  creek  ;  but  it 
was  built  in  an  improper  manner,  having  a  chimney  in  it,  and  was  placed  on  a  spot  where  no 
beat^h  grass  grew.  The  strong  winds  blew  the  sand  from  its  foundation,  and  the  weight  of 
the  chimney  brought  it  to  the  ground,  so  that  in  January,  1802,  it  was  entirely  demolislMd. — 
This  event  took  place  about  six  weeks  before  the  Brutus  was  cast  eway.  If  it  had  remained, 
it  is  probable  that  the  whole  of  the  unfortunate  crew  of  that  ship  would  have  been  saved,  as 
they  gained  the  shore  a  few  rods  only  from  the  spot  where  the  hut  had  stood. 

The  hut  now  erected  stands  on  »  p4aee  covered  with  beach  gross.    To  prevent  any  accident 


\\ 


72 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


from  happening  to  it,  or  to  the  other  but  near  Peeked  hill,  the  Trustees  have  secured  the  at* 
tention  of  several  gentlemen  in  the  neighbourhood.  Dr.  i'haddeus  Brown,  end  Capt.  ■  ho- 
mas  Smalley,  ofProvincetown,  have  engaged  to  inspect  both  huts,  to  see  that  they  are  sup- 
plied with  straw  or  hay  in  the  autumn,  that  the  doors  and  windows  are  kept  shut,  and  that  re- 
pairs are  made  when  necessary.  The  Rev.  Mr.  Damon  of  Tniro,  has  al'O  prumiaed  to  visit 
the  hut  at  Stout's  creet  twice  or  thrice  a  year ;  and  the  Rev.  Mr.  \V  hitman,  cf  Welltleet,  dis- 
tinguished through  the  country  for  his  activity  and  benevolence,  hua  undeit&ken,  tLiugb  re- 
mote from  the  place,  the  same  charge. 

From  the  head  of  Stout's  creek  to  the  termination  of  the  salt  marsh,  which  lies  on  both 
sides,  and  at  the  hcnd  of  East  harbour  river,  the  distance  is  about  /^  mi  es.  A  narrow  beach 
separates  this  river  from  the  ocean.  It  is  not  so  regular  a  ridge  as  that  before  described,  as 
there  are  on  it  one  or  two  hills  which  the  neij^hbouring  inhabitants  call  islands.  It  may  with- 
out much  difficulty  be  ci  osised  every  where  except  over  these  elevations.  By  these  hills,  even 
during  the  night,  the  beach  may  be  distinguished  from  those  hereafter  to  be  mentioned.  It 
lies  from  N.  W.  to  S.  E.  and  is  in  most  parts  covered  with  beach  grass.  The  bills  have  a  few 
shrubs  on  the  declivities  next  the  river.  At  the  end  of  the  marsh  the  beach  subsides  a  little, 
and  there  is  an  easy  passage  into  a  valley  in  which  are  situated  two  or  three  dwelling  houses. 
The  first  on  the  left  ha'.id,  or  south,  is  a  few  rods  only  from  the  ocean. 

The  shore,  which  extends  from  this  valley  to  Race  point,  is  unquestionably  the  part  of  the 
coast  the  more  exposed  to  shipwrecks.  A  N.  C.  storm,  the  most  violent  and  fatal  to  seamen, 
as  it  is  frequently  iccompanied  with  snow,  blows  directly  on  the  land  ;  a  strong  current  sets 
along  the  shore ;  add  to  which,  that  ships,  during  the  operation  of  such  a  storm,  endeavour  to 
work  to  the  northuard,  that  they  may  get  into  the  bay.  Should  they  be  imable  to  weather  Race 
point,  the  wind  drives  them  on  shore,  and  a  shipwreck  is  inevitable.  Accordingly,  the  strand 
is  every  where  covered  with  the  fragments  of  vessels.  Huts,  therefore,  plated  within  a  mile 
of  each  other,  have  been  thought  necessary  by  many  Judicious  persons.  To  this  opinion  the 
Trustees  are  dispose!  to  pay  tuo  respect ,  an  J  hereafter,  if  the  funds  of  the  Society  increase, 
newhuts  will  be  built  hcie  for  the  relief  of  the  unfortunate. 

From  the  valley  above-menlione<l  the  land  rises,  and  less  than  a  mile  from  it  the  high  land 
commences.  On  the  first  elevated  spot  (the  Clay  Pounds  stands  he  light-house,  which  con- 
tains a  fixed  light,  which  every  navigator  should  impress  on  his  mind.  The  shore  here 
turns  to  the  south;  and  the  high  land  extends  to  the  table  land  of  Eastham.  This  high 
land  approaches  the  ocean  with  steep  and  lofty  banks,  which  it  is  extremely  difficult  to  climb, 
especially  in  a  storm.  In  violent  tempests,  during  very  h.-^h  tides,  the  sea  bteaks  against  the 
foot  of  them,  rendering  it  then  unsafe  to  walk  on  the  stn  nd,  which  lies  between  them  and 
the  ocean.  Should  the  seaman  succeed  in  his  attempt  to  a.jcend  thr^m,  he  must  forbear  to 
penetrate  into  the  country,  as  houses  are  generally  so  remote,  that  they  would  escape  his  re- 
search dur>ng  the  night;  he  must  pass  on  to  the  valleys,  by  which  the  banks  are  intersected. 
These  valleys,  which  the  inhabitants  call  hollows,  run  at  rigiit  angles  with  the  shore :  and  in 
the  middle,  or  lowest  part  of  them,  a  road  leads  from  the  dwelling-houses  to  the  sea. 

The  first  of  these  valleys  is  Dyer's  hollow,  1^  mile  south  of  the  light-house.  It  is  a  wide 
opening,  being  2G0  rods  broad,  from  summit  to  summit.  In  it  stands  a  dwelling-house,  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  from  -the  beach. 

A  mile  and  a  half  south  of  Dyer's  hollow,  is  a  second  valley,  called  Harding's  hollow.  At 
the  entrance  of  this  valley  the  sand  has  gathered,  so  that  at  present  a  little  climbing  is  neces- 
sary. Passing  over  several  fences,  and  takitig  heed  not  to  enter  the  wood  on  the  right  band, 
at  the  distance  of  three-r^uarters  of  a  mile  a  house  is  to  be  found.  This  bouse  stan'ts  on  the 
south  side  of  the  road ;  and  not  far  from  it,  on  the  south,  is  Pamet  river,  which  ru  ns  from  east 
to  west  through  a  body  of  salt  marsh. 

The  third  valley,  half  a  mile  south  of  Harding's  hollow,  is  head  of  Pamet  hollow.  It  may 
with  case  be  distinguished  from  the  other  hollows  mentioned,  as  it  is  a  wide  opering,  and  leads 
immediately  over  a  beach  to  the  salt  marsh  at  the  head  of  Pamet  river.  In  the  midst  of  the 
holhrv  the  sand  has  been  raised  by  a  brush  fence,  carried  across  it  from  north  to  south.  This 
must  be  passed,  and  the  shipwrecked  mariner  will  soon  come  to  a  fence  which  separates  what 
is  called  the  road  from  the  marsh.  If  he  turns  to  the  (eft  hand,  or  south,  at  the  distance 
of  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  he  will  discover  <  house.  If  he  turns  to  the  right  hand,  at  the  distance 
of  half  a  mile,  he  will  find  the  same  house  which  is  mentioned  in  the  foregoing  pariigiaph. 

The  fourth  opening,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  south  of  Head  of  Pamet,  is  Brush  valley. 
This  hollow  is  narrow,  and  climbing  is  necessary.  Entering  it.  and  inclining  to  the  t  ight, 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  will  bring  seamen  to  the  house,  which  is  situated  nt  the  head  of  Pa- 
met. By  proceeding  straight  forwurd,  and  passing  over  rising  ground,  another  bouse  may  be 
discovered,  but  with  more  difficulty. 

These  three  hollows,  lying  near  together,  serve  to  designate  each  other.  Either  of  them 
may  be  used:  but  Head  of  Pamet  hollow  is  the  safest 

South  of  Brush  valley,  at  the  distance  of  3  miles,  there  is  a  fifth  opening,  called  New- 
comb's  hollow,  east  of  the  head  of  Herring  river  in  Weilflret.  This  valley  is  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  wide.    On  the  north  side  of  it,  near  the  shore,  stands  a  fishing  but. 


ULUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


73 


iccurcd  the  at* 
nd  Capt.  ■  ho- 
they  are  sup- 
it,  and  that  re- 
jmiaed  to  visit 
'  Ue::tleet,  dis- 
len,  tLoughrc- 

ch  lies  on  both 
k  narrow  beach 
:  described,  as 
It  may  with- 
icse  bills,  even 
aentioned.  It 
ills  have  a  few 
■bsides  a  Uttie, 
rolling  huusej. 

the  part  of  the 
tal  to  seamen, 
g  current  sets 
,  endeavour  to 
I  weather  Race 
i;ly,  the  strand 
I  with  in  a  mile 
lis  opinion  the 
ciety  increaae, 

the  high  land 
le,  whkb  con- 
le  shore  here 
n.     This  high 
icult  to  climb, 
ks  against  the 
reen  them  and 
uat  forbear  to 
escape  his  re- 
intersected, 
lore :  and  in 
sea. 
It  is  a  wide 
ing-house,  a 

lollow.     At 

)ing  is  neccs- 

right  hand, 

an'ts  on  the 

ns  from  east 

■>w.     It  may 
g,  and  leads 
nidst  of  the 
)uth.     This 
urates  what 
le  distance 
he  distance 
riigiaph. 
sh  valley, 
the  t  ight, 
ead  of  Pa- 
se  may  be 

br  of  them 

llled  New- 
larter  of  a 


Between  the  two  last  valleys  the  bank  is  very  high  and  steep.  From  the  edge  of  it,  west, 
there  is  a  strip  of  sand,  100  yards  in  breadth.  Then  succeeds  low  brush-wood,  a  quarter  of 
a  mile  in  width,  and  almost  impassable.  After  which  comes  a  thick,  perplexing  forest,  in 
which  not  a  house  is  to  be  discovered.  Seamen,  therefore,  though  the  distance  between  these 
two  valleys  is  great,  must  not  attempt  to  enter  the  wood,  as  In  a  snow  storm  they  would  un- 
doubtedly perish.  Tb<9  place,  so  formidable  in  description,  will  however  lose  somewhat  of 
its  terror,  when  it  is  observed,  that  no  instance  of  a  shipwreck  on  this  part  of  the  coast  is 
recollected  by  the  oldest  inhabitants  of  Wellfleet. 

Half  a  mile  south  of  iifewcomb's  hollow,  is  the  sixth  valley,  called  Pearce's  hollow,  it  is 
a  small  valley.  A  house  stands  at  the  distance  of  a  little  moce  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from 
the  beach,  W.  by  S. 

The  seventh  valley  is  Cohoon's  hollow,  half  a  mile  south  of  Pearce's  hollow.  It  is  not 
very  wide.  West  from  the  entrance,  several  houses  may  be  found  at  the  distance  of  a  mile. 
This  hollow  lies  £.  by  N.  from  Wellfleet  meeting>house. 

Two  miles  south  of  Cohoon's  hollow,  the  eighth  valley  is  Snow's  hollow.  It  is  smaller 
than  the  last.  West  from  the  shore,  at  the  distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  is  the  county 
road,  which  goes  round  the  head  of  Blackflsh  creek.  Passing  through  this  valley  to  the  fence, 
which  separates  the  road  from  the  upland  and  marsh  at  the  head  of  the  creek,  a  house  will 
immediately  be  found  by  turning  to  the  right  hand,  or  north-  There  are  houses  also  on  the 
left,  but  more  remote. 

The  high  land  gradually  subsides  here,  and  I^  mile  south  terminates  at  the  ninth  valley, 
called  Fresh  Brook  hollow,  in  which  a  house  is  to  be  found  a  mile  from  the  shore,  west. 

The  tenth,  2.J  miles  south  from  fresh  Brook  hollow,  is  Plumb  valley,  about  300  yards  wide. 
West  is  a  house,  three  quarters  of  a  mile  dbtant.  Between  these  twa  valleys  is  luc  tabic  land. 
After  this  there  is  no  hollow  of  importance  to  Ca\ye  Malebarre. 

From  Fresh  Brook  hollow  to  the  commencement  of  Nauset  beach,  the  bank  next  the  ocean 
is  about  60  feet  high.  There  are  houses  scattered  over  the  plain,  open  country ;  but  none 
of  them  are  nearer  than  a  mile  to  the  shore.  In  a  storm  of  wind  and  rain  they  might  be 
discerned  by  day-light ;  but  in  a  snow  storm,  which  r^es  here  with  excessive  fury,  it  would  be 
almost  impossible  to  discover  them,  either  by  night  or  by  day. 

Not  far  from  this  shore,  south,  the  Trustees  have  erected  a  third  hut,  on  Nauset  beach. 
Nauset  beach  begins  in  latitude  Al°  51',  and  extends  south  to  latitude  41*-*  41'.  It  is  divided 
into  two  parts  by  a  breach  which  the  ocean  has  made  through  it.  This  breach  is  the  mouth 
of  Nauset  or  Stage  harbour ;  and  from  the  opening,  the  beach  extends  north  2^  miles,  till  it 
joins  the  main  land.  It  is  about  a  furlong  wide,  and  forms  Nauset  harbour,  which  is  of  little 
value,  its  entrance  being  obstructed  by  a  bar.  This  northern  part  of  the  beach  may  be  dis- 
tinguished from  the  southern  part  by  its  being  of  a  less  regular  form.  Storms  have  made  fre- 
quent irruptions  through  the  ridge,  on  which  beach  grass  grows.  On  an  elevated  part  of  the 
beach  stands  the  hut,  about  1^  mile  north  of  the  mouth  of  Nauset  harbour.  Eastham  meet- 
ing-house lies  from  it  W.  S.  W.  distant  \%  mile.  Tho  meeting-house  is  without  a  steeple ; 
but  it  may  be  distinguished  from  the  dtvelling-houses  near  it  by  its  situation,  which  is  between 
two  small  groves  of  locusts,  one  on  the  south,  and  one  on  the  north,  that  on  the  south  being 
three  times  as  long  as  the  other.  About  1^  mile  from  the  hut,  W.  by  N.  appear  the  top  and 
«rm3  uf  a  windmill.  The  Rev.  Mr.  Shaw,  and  Elisha  Mayo,  Esq.  of  Eastham,  have  en- 
gaged to  inspect  this  building. 

The  southern  part  of  Nauset  beach,  most  commonly  called  Chatham  beach,  and  by  a  few 
persons  Potanumaqunt  beach,  begins  at  the  mouth  of  Nauset  harbour,  and  extends  8  or  9 
miles  south,  to  the  mouth  of  Chatham  harbour.  It  is  about  50  rods  wide.  A  regular  well- 
formed  ridge,  which,  in  tho  most  elevated  part  of  it  is  40  feet  high,  runs  the  whole  length  of 
it,  and  with  the  exception  of  a  few  spots,  is  covered  with  beach  grass.  This  beach  forms  the 
barrier  of  Chatham  harbour,  which,  from  Strong  Island,  north,  receives  the  name  of  Pleasant 
bay.  A  mile  south  of  the  entrance  uf  Nauset  harbour,  it  joins  the  medn  land  of  Orleans, 
except  in  very  high  tides,  when  the  sea  flows  from  the  north-eastern  arm  of  Pleasant  bay  in- 
to the  harbour  of  Nauset,  completely  insulating  the  beach.  By  those  who  are  acquainted 
with  the  shallow,  it  may  be  safely  forded  at  any  time  but  strangers  must  not  venture  to  pass 
it  when  covered  with  water,  as  below,  the  channel  is  7  feet  deep.  On  this  beach,  about  half 
way  between  the  entrances  of  Nauset  and  Chatham  harbours,  the  Trustees  have  erected  a 
fourth  hut.  The  spot  selected  is  a  narrow  part  of  the  beach :  on  the  west,  the  water  adjoin- 
ing it  is  called  Bass  Hole.  Salt  Marsh  is  north  and  south  of  it,  next  the  beach,  but  is  here 
interrupted.  Orleans  meeting-house  lies  from  it  N.  W.  Tlie  meeting-house  is  without  a 
steeple,  and  is  not  seen ;  but  it  is  very  near  a  wind-mill  placed  on  an  elevated  ground,  a 
conspicuous  object  to  seamen  coming  on  the  coast.  It  may  be  necessary  to  add,  that  there 
are  three  windmills  in  Orleans,  forming  a  semicircle — that  the  mill  referred  to  is  on  the  right 
hand,  or  N.  E.  point— and  that  the  rail!  in  the  middle  ^oint  of  the  semicircle  stands  on  still 
higher  ground.  The  mceting-housc  of  Chatham  is  situated  from  it  S.  W.  This  meeting- 
house is  also  without  a  steeple,  ani  u  concealed  by  Great  Hill,  a  noted  land-mark.  The  hUl 
appears  with  two  summits,  which  aie  a  quarter  of  a  mile  apart.  The  hut  lies  east  from  Samp- 
pon's  Island  in  Pleasant  bay.  TimoVnf  Biacom,  of  Orleans,  has  undertaken  to  inspect  this  hut. 

10 


i 

t  I 

I 


74 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


Leat  seamen  should  miss  this  but,  by  striking  to  the  leeward  ot  it,  the  Trustees  have  ^rect« 
ed  another  on  the  same  beach.  It  standu  a  mile  north  of  the  mouth  of  Chatham  harbour, 
east  of  the  meeting-house,  and  opposite  the  town. 

Anothei  upot  on  the  same  beach  would  be  a  proper  situation  for  a  hut.  It  is  north  of  the 
fourth  but,  and  east  of  the  middle  of  Pochct  Island.  The  highest  part  of  the  ridge  is  near 
it  south.  A  break  in  the  ridge,  over  which  the  sea  appears  sometimes  to  have  flowed,  divides 
this  high  part  from  the  northern  portion  of  the  beach. 

On  the  t<each  of  Cape  Maiebarre,  or  the  sandy  point  of  Chatham,  the  Trustees  have  built 
h  sixth  hut.  This  be<ich  stretches  from  Chatham  10, miles  into  the  sea,  towards  Nantucket, 
and  is  from  a  quarter  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  breadth.  It  is  continually  gaining  south : 
above  threa  mile6  bar;  been  added  to  it  during  the  past  50  years.  On  the  eaoi  side  of  the 
beach  is  a  carve  in  the  shore,  called  Stewart  s  Bend,  where  vessels  may  anchor  with  safety, 
in  3  or  4  fathoms  water,  when  the  wind  blows  from  north  to  S.  W.  North  of  the  bend  there 
are  several  bars  and  shoals.  A  little  below  the  middle  of  the  beach,  on  the  west  side,  is 
Wreck  cove,  which  id  navigable  for  boats  only.  Th.)  hut  stands  200  yards  from  t'\e  ocean, 
S.  £.  from  the  entrance  of  Wreck  cove,  half  of  a  mile.  Between  the  mouth  of  the  cove  and 
hut,  is  Stewart's  knoll,  an  elevated  part  of  the  beach.  The  distance  of  the  but  iVom  the 
commencement  cf  the  beach  is  6  miles,  and  from  its  termination  4  miles.  Great  hill,  in  Cba- 
ham,  bears  N.  by  W.  distant  6  miles,  and  the  south  end  of  Morris'  Island,  which  is  on  the 
west  side  of  the  beach,  N.  by  £.  distant  4  miles.  Richard  Sears,  Esq.  of  Chatham,  has  en- 
gaged to  visit  the  two  last  mentioned  huts.  Two  miles  below  the  sixth  hut  is  <\  tishing-house, 
built  of  thatch,  in  the  form  of  a  wigwam.  It  stands  on  the  west  side  of  the  beacb,  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  from  the  ocean.  Annually,  in  September,  it  is  renewed ;  and  gonerolly  remains  in 
tolerablp  preservation  ducing  the  winter. 

Another  spot,  a  few  rods  from  the  sea,  4  miles  south  from  the  commencement  of  the  *>eaGh, 
and  half  a  mile  north  of  the  head  of  Wreck  cove,  would  be  a  proper  situation  for  a  hut.  A 
little  south  of  this  spot,  in  storms  and  very  high  tides,  the  sea  breaks  over  from  the  ocean  into 
Wreck  cove.  Cape  Maiebarre  beach  may  be  distinguished  from  the  two  beaches  before  des- 
cribed, not  only  by  ^ts  greater  breadth,  but  also  by  its  being  of  a  less  regular  form.  It  is  not  so 
well  covered  with  grass  as  Chatham  beach.  From  Stewart's  knoll,  south,  to  the  extremity,  it  is 
lowest  ir  the  middle.  In  this  valley,  and  in  other  low  places,  fresh  water  may  be  obtained  by 
digging  two  feet  into  the  sand.    The  same  thing  is  true  of  Nauset  and  Chatfaam  beaches. 

The  six.  huts,  the  situation  of  which  has  thus  been  pointed  out,  are  all  of  one  size  and 
shape.  Each  hut  stands  on  piles,  is  S  feet  long,  S  feet  wide,  and  7  feet  high  :  a  sliding  door 
is  on  the  south,  a  sliding  shutter  on  the  west,  and  a  pole,  rising  15  feet  above  the  top  of  the 
building,  on  the  east.  Within  it  is  supplied  either  with  straw  or  hay,  and  is  farther  accommo- 
dated with  a  bench.  The  whole  of  the  caast,  (torn  Cape  Cod  to  Cape  Maiebarre,  is  sandy 
and  fVee  from  rocks.  Along  the  shore,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile,  is  a  bar,  which  is  call- 
ed the  outer  bar ;  because  there  are  smaller  bars  within  it  perpetually  varying-  This  outer 
bar  is  separated  into  many  parts  by  guzzled,  or  small  channels-  It  extends  to  Chatham ; 
and  aa  it  procefcUs  southward,  gradually  approaches  the  shore,  and  grows  more  shallow.  Its 
general  depth  at  high  water  is  two  fathoms,  and  three  fathoms  over  the  guzzles ;  and  its 
least  distance  from  the  shore  is  about  a  furlong.  Off  the  mouth  of  Chatham  harbour  there 
are  bars  which  reach  three  quarters  of  a  mile,  and  off  the  entrance  of  Nauset  harbour  the 
bars  extend  half  a  mile.  Large  heavy  ships  strike  on  the  outer  bar,  even  at  high  water,  and 
their  Ih^gments  only  reach  the  shore.  But  smaller  vessels  pass  ver  it  at  full  sea,  and  v.  hen 
they  touch  at  low  water,  they  beat  over  it  as  the  tide  risr:j,  and  soon  come  to  land.  If  a  ves- 
sel is  cast  away  at  low  water,  it  ought  to  be  left  with  as  much  expedition  as  possible  j  because 
the  fury  of  the  waves  is  then  checked,  in  some  measure  by  the  bar,  and  because  the  vessel 
is  generally  broken  to  pieces  with  the  rising  flood.  But  seamen  shipwrecked  at  full  sea, 
ought  to  remain  on  board  till  near  low  water,  for  the  vessel  does  not  thrn  break  to  pieces, 
and  by  attempting  to  reach  the  land  before  the  tide  ebbs  away,  they  are  in  great  danger  of 
being  drowned.  On  this  subject  there  is  one  opinion  only  among  judicious  mariners.  It  may 
be  necessary,  however,  to  remind  them  of  a  truth,  of  which  they  have  full  conviction,  but 
which,,  amidst  the  agitation  and  terror  of  a  storm,  they  too  frequently  forget. 


Directions  far  *Point  Gammon  light,  and  f  Hyannes  Harbour. 
Vessels  coming  from  the  eastward,  bound  through  the  North  Chnnnei,  must 

I*  Hyannes  light  is  situated  on  Point  Gammon,  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  south  side  of 
Cape  Cod.  The  laiitern  is  elevated  70  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea  and  contains  a  fixed  light. 

f  East  fVom  Hyannts  lies  Baas  river,  at  the  mouth  of  which,  a  BEACON  is  to  be  erected, 
between  the  towns  of  DtnnU  and  Yarmouth,  which  will  be  particularly  described  in  the  Ap- 
FBNBix,  if  completed  before  this  i^ork  is  published,  to  which  the  reader  is  referred.  From 
the  sltnatiqn  of.  the  river,  it  is  presumed  Uie  Beacon  may  be  seen  when  passing  through  the 
Xorth  Chatinil.    ABEACON  or  SPINDLE  is  also  to  be  erected  on  the  Bishop  and  Clerks. 


J3LUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


76 


have  ^rect« 
m  harbour, 

lorth  of  tho 
dge  is  near 
ired,  divides 

I  have  built 
Nantucket, 
ining  south : 
side  of  the 
with  safety, 
!  bend  there 
vest  side,  is 
t.'ie  ocean, 
he  cove  and 
t  tVom  the 
till,  in  Cba- 
sh  is  on  the 
am,  has  ^a- 
hing-house, 
b,  a  quarter 
r  remains  in 

f  the  Seach, 
r  a  hut.  A 
i  ocean  into 
before  des- 

It  is  not  so 
remity,  it  is 
obtained  by 
n  beaches. 
le  size  and 
sliding  door 
B  top  of  the 
r  accommo- 
B,  is  sandy 
hich  is  call- 
This  outer 

Chatham ; 
lallow.  Its 
38;  and  its 
rbour  there 
larbour  the 

water,  and 
,  and  v.hen 
I.  If  a  ves- 
le  i  because 

the  vessel 
it  full  sea, 
ik  to  pieces, 
i  danger  of 
irs.  It  may 
iction,  but 


)our. 

riei,  must 

Duth  side  of 
Ixed  ligkL 
be  erected, 
in  the  Ap- 
ed. From 
iirough  the 
ind  Clerks. 


leave  the  Bishop  and  Clerks  ca  theiarhoard  hand,  and  not  go  nearer  them  than 

4  fathoms ;  they  are  a  dangerous  ledge,  of  rock^,  bearing  S.  hy  E.  from  the  light- 
house, 3  miles  distant,  and  are  always  dry.  When  the  light  bears  N.  by  W.  steer 
W.  N.  W.  keeping  in  4  fathoms  till  the  light  bears  N.  N.  E.  then  steer  N.  W.  or 
N.  W.  by  N.  keeping  in  3  fathoms,  which  will  keep  you  clear  of  a  dangerous 
reef  running  from  the  light  to  a  great  rock  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard 
hand ;  when  abreast  of  this  rock,  the  light  will  bear  S.  £.  1^  E.  then  steer  N.  N. 
W.  and  ^jchor  within  one  mile  of  the  shore,  in  3  fathoms,  soft  bottom.  The 
brig  Monroe,  Capt.  Bears,  in  coming  through  the  Vineyard  Sound,  struck  on  a 
dangerous  rock,  which  is  in  the  direct  track  in  passing  the  North  Channel,  and 
bears  about  W.  S.  W.  from  Point  Gammon  light-house,  distant  two  or  three 
miles.  It  is  a  large  square  rock,  and  it  is  supposed  there  are  on  it  about  three  feet 
of  water,  at  low  water.  Several  vessels  have  struck  on  it  at  different  times,  and 
it  is  extrif mely  important  t«i  the  safety  of  people  and  property,  that  it  should  have 
a  biioy  on  it.  Vessels  should  not  come  nearer  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile  of 
the  light,  as  there  are  -'unken  rocks  that  lie  one-half  a  mile  from  the  land. 

Vessels  bound  to  the  westward  from  Hyannes,  must  run  to  the  southward  t:li 
the  light  bears  E.  by  N.  then  steer  W.  by  S.  which  course  will  carry  them  clear 
of  thesouthwost  rock,  wl.hh  bears  W.  from  the  light,  4  miles  distant,  with  seve- 
ral sunken  pcks  near  it ;  ^aid  f  ock  is  dry  »tt  low  water.  W.  i  S.  8  miles  distant 
from  the  light,  is  adangerous  ledge  called  ^Culler's  Ledge,  Smiles  from  the  shore. 
There  are  3  fathoms  water  round  it,  and  the  ledge  is  part  dry  at  low  water.  In 
running  this  W.  by  S.  course,  (the  light  bearing  E.  hy  N.)  you  will  have  from  3 
to  4  fathoiHJ,  and  sometimes  5,  as  it  is  ridgy.  If  farther  towards  the  Horse-shoe, 
to  the  southward,  you  will  have  4,  5,  6,  7,  10,  and  close  to  the  Horse-shoe,  13 
fathoms ;  northern  part  of  the  Horse-shoe  dry  at  low  water.  On  the  S.  E.  part 
of  the  Horse-shoe  is  a  black  buoy  placed,  in  16  feet  water,  bearing  from  Nan> 
tucket  light  N.  W.  by  W.  4^  leagues,  and  from  Tuckanuck  island,  N.  by  E.  iJ  E. 

5  leagues.  Tide  rises  about  5  feet ;  high  water  at  full  and  change,  at  i  !2  o'clock ; 
and  runs  from  £  to  3  knots  east  and  west  in  the  following  manner,  viz.  ii  begins 
to  run  to  the  westward  at  half  flood,  and  continues  to  half  ebb ;  then  runs  to  the 
eastward,  the  three  last  hours  of  ebb,  and  three  first  of  flood. 

In  proceeding  from  the  Horse-shoe  towards  Holmes'  Hole,  observe  the  follow- 
ing directions,  viz.  When  to  the  northward  of  the  Horse-shoe,  in  12  fathoms 
water,  one  mile  distant  from  the  dry  spots  (at  low  water)  steer  S.  W.  for  Holmes' 
Hole,  3il  leagues  distant.  If  bound  to  the  northward  of  the  Hedge-Fence,  (be- 
tween that  and  Lemedue  shoal,)  get  the  point  on  which  the  wind-mill  stands, 
(which  is  east  of  Wood's  Hole)  to  bear  W.  by  N.  and  run  for  it  till  within  half  a 
mile,  then  W.  S.  W.  will  carry  you  through  the  Vineyard  Sound,  leaving  Tar- 
paulin Cove  and  Cutterhunk  lights  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  Gay-Head  light 
on  your  larboard  Hand.  You  will  not  see  Cutterhunk  light  till  4  leagues  to  the 
westward  «)f  Tarpaulin  Cove  light,  when  it  will  open  on  the  starboard  hand ; 
when  it  bears  N.  E.  by  E.  distant  3<|  miles,  you  may  run  west  for  Point  Judith 
light  (if  bound  up  Sound)  10  leagues  distant.  [For  description  of  Tarpaulin 
Cove  light,  seepage  81,  and  of  Cutterhunk  light,  see  page  87.] 


From  the  south  end  of  Cape  Cod  to  fHolmes'  Hole. 

Brin^  Chatham  lights  to  Hear  N.  N.  W.  then  by  steering  S.  S.  E.  3i  leagues, 
you  will  pass  the  Pollock  Rip,  in  3  or  4  fathoms  water ;  and  if  the  weather  is 

'*'  A  Beacon  is  to  be  placed  on  this  ledge.    [See  Appendix.] 

t  Holmes'  Hole  is  a  harbour  to  which  vessels  resort  during  the  winter  season,  and  as  every 
master  should  embrace  the  first  opportunity  to  advise  his  owner,  we  state  there  is  a  Post-Uf- 
fioe  and  a  regular  mail  made  up  twice  a  week  for  Boston,  &c.  which  is  taken  in  a  passage 
boat  to  Falmouth,  on  the  N.  E.  part  of  the  Vineyard  Sound,  9  miles  distant ;  from  thence  by 
land  carriage  to  Sandwich,  &c.    Fuiengen  will  find  a  speedy  conveyance  from  Falmouth. 


76 


BLL'NT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


clear,  you  will  make  the  *light-house  on  Sandv  Point  (Nantucket  Island)  5) 
leagues  distant,  which  bring  tu  hear  S.  W.  j  W.  then  steer  for  the  Iight-hou8«, 
keeping  it  in  this  direction,  and  you  will  pass  between  the  Great  and  Little  Round 
Shuuls,  on  the  former  of  which  is  a  f  black  buoy,  and  on  the  latter  a  white  buoy, 
with  a  small  pole  in  the  end  of  it,  bearing  N.  W.  by  N.  and  S-  E.  by  S.  from  each 
other,  distant  2^  miles.  Great  Round  Shoal,  partly  dry  at  low  water ;  on  Little 
Round  Shoal  7  feet. 

On  the  east  end  of  Pollock  Rip  is  a  red  buoy,  in  14  feet  water,  bearing  from 
Chatham  lights  S.  i  E.  11  miles:  from  Monomoy  point  E>  i  N.  7  miles,  and 
from  Little  Round  Shoal  buoy,  N.  £•  by  N-  4  miles.    Shoalest  water  on  this 


rip,  5  feet. 

When  you  are  within  about  thret 
you  are  past  the  Point  Rip,  on  the  P.. 
water,  bearing  from  Saacoty  Head,  N. 


:  the  light-house,  steer  W.  h  S.  until 
L,.  end  of  which  is  a  red  buoy  in  14  feet 
by  W .  4  leagues ;  from  Nantucket  light  N. 
E.  by  E.  <|  E.  2  miles,  and  from  the  black  buoy  on  the  Horae-shoe,  E.  S.  E.  6 
leagues.  Shoalest  water  on  Point  Rip  8  feet ;  or  you  may  bring  the  light-house 
to  bear  E.  by  S.  i  S.  and  steer  W.  by  N.  fi  N.  taking  care  to  make  your  course 
good  for  Holmes'  Hole  light,  1 1  leagues  distant,  observing,  while  running  from 
Nantucket  light  to  Holmes'  Hole,  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand  tCape  Poge 
light,  which  must  'near  W.  |  S.  to  clear  the  Cross  Rip,  on  the  north-east  part  of 
which  is  a  white  buoy,  in  15  feet  water,  bearing  from  Cape  Poge  light  £.  by  S. 
5  leagues  ;  from  Tuckernuc  island  N.  by  W.  2  leagues  :  and  from  the  red  buoy 
on  Squash  meadow,  E.  by  S.  I  S.  5  leagues.     Shoalest  water  on  this  rip,  12  feet. 

To  go  through  the  North  Ship  Channel,  bring  Chatham  lights  to  lear  N.  N> 
W.  and  steer  S.  S.  E.  3h  leagues,  when  you  will  pass  the  Pollock  rip  in  3  or  4 
fathoms  water,  r.hen  you  roust  steer  W.  4  S.  5  miles  for  Butler's  hole,  in  15 
fathoms  water,  when  you  will  see  a  white  buoy  to  the  north  of  you,  which  lies 
in  the  S.  S.  W.  passage,  when  you  must  run  W.  S.  W.  for  the  south  part  of  the 
Handkerchief,  which  has  a  white  buoy  on  the  west  end  of  it,  bearing  from 
§  Monomoy  point  light  S.  W.  Smiles,  when  you  will  be  in  S  fathoms  water,  fine 
sand ;  from  Nantucket  light  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  4  leagues,  and  from  the  red  buoy  on 
Pollock  rip  W.  by  S.  ^  S.  3  leagues. 

Crossing  the  Handkerchief,  on  a  W.  S.  W.  course,  in  3  or  4  fathoms  water,  you 
will  run  W.  for  the'  black  buoy  on  the  Horse-shoe,  m  miles,  leaving  it  on  the 
starboard  hand,  when  you  will  continue  your  course  W.  for  Holmes'  Hole  light, 
4^  leagues  distant.  As  you  enter  the  Swash,  in  the  Horse-shoe,  Hyannes  light 
will  bear  N.  N.  E.  Cape  Poge  light  W.  S.  W.  Holmes'  Hole  light  W.  Part  of 
the  Handkerchief  dry  at  low  water. 

There  is  a  channel  of  9  feet,  still  north  of  the  above,  which  may  be  found 
by  bringing  Chatham  lights  to  bear  N.  W.  when  in  7  fathoms,  and  running 
S.  S.  W.  for  Sandy  point  of  Monomoy  light,  till  the  light  bears  S.  W.  then 
run  for  it  till  you  cross  from  3  to  7  fathoms,  when  you  will  be  within  3  cable's 
length  of  the  light,  where  you  may  anchor,  and  continue  till  Ih  hours  flood, 
when,  if  bound  to  the  westward,  continue  the  shore  on  board  round  the  point* 
crossing  a  spit  between  Egg  Island  and  Monomoy  point,  in  2  fathoms;  then 
steer  N.  W.  till  the  light  bears  E.  when  you  must  run  W.  N.  W.  for  Hyannes 
light,  or  haul  into  Stage  Harbour  Bay  and  anchor,  where  you  may  lie  safe 
from  all  winds  except  S.  W.  To  go  through  the  S.  S.  W.  channel,  get  Monomoy 
point  light  to  bear  N.  by  E.  H  E.  and  run  S.  S.  W.  U  miles  into  Butler's  Hole,  in 
7  fathoms,  and  a  S.  S.  W .  course  continued  will  carry  you  to  the  westward  of  Nan- 
tucket Point  light,  5  leagues.     In  the  S.  S.  W.  channel  are  2,  fathoms  at  full  tide« 

*  Nantucket  light-house  is  on  the  north  point  of  Nantucket  Island,  and  ahovra  a  fixed  light. 

t  The  buoys  on  Nantucket  Shoa'ia  mid  the  Vineyard  Sound,  were  placed  by  Capt.  Trevett, 
in  the  Revenue  Cutter,  and  Wm.  Daggett,  Branch  Pilot  for  the  Vineyard  Shoals,  and  from 
their  authority  we  publish  them.  To  the  former  gentleman  we  tender  our  thanks  for  much 
important  information. 

I  Cape  Poge  light  is  situated  on  the  N.  E.  point  of  Martha's  Vineyard.  The  lanletn  is 
elevated  55  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  &  fixed  light. 

§OnMonomoy  point  alight-house  is  erected,  showing  a  j!xe<{itg:A<.  , 


•oMt 
will  cJ 
Bril 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


77 


Island)  5| 
ght-house, 
ttle  Round 
liite  buoy, 
from  each 
I  on  Little 

iring  from 
miles,  and 
er  on  this 

h  S.  until 
in  14  lect 
et  light  N. 
£•  S<  Jbi*  6 
ight-house 
>ur  course 
ning  from 
Jape  Poge 
ist  part  of 
t  E.  by  S. 
red  buoy 
ip,  12  feet. 
fear  N.  N. 
in  3  or  4 
)oIe,  in  15 
(vhich  lies 
)art  of  the 
ring  from 
vater,  fine 
I  buoy  on 

rater,  you 
it  on  the 
ole  light, 
mes  light 
Part  of 

)e  found 

running 

W.  then 

3  cable's 

irs  flood, 

|he  point* 

is;  then 

[yannes 

lie   safe 

fcnomoy 

t  Hole,  in 

of  Nan- 

Ifull  tide. 


ved  light. 

Trevett, 
land  firom 
|for  much 

item  is 


[Notes.— While  passing  Chatham  in  thirk  weather,  approach  no  nearer  than 
5  fothoms  to  cross  the  Pollock  rip  :  edRe  oft"  and  on  fronj  0  to  7  fathoms,  which 
will  carry  you  over  the  Pollock  rip  in  3  fathoms.] 

Bring  Chatham  lights  to  bear  N.  by  W.  on  which  bearing  keep  them  till  you 
cross  the  Pollock  rip  in  3  fathoms  water,  and  deepen  into  7  fathoms  ;  then  steer 
S.  W.  by  S.  which  carries  yon  across  Buthr's  Hole  to  .0  or  4  fathoms ;  then  steer 
W.  S.  VV.  which  will  carry  you  to  the  iiortlnvard  of  the  Little  Round  Shoal  up 
toTuckernuck  channel,  when  you  will  !)»■  up  with  the  S.  E.  end  of  the  Horse-shoe, 
where  you  have  »  fathoms,  then  steer  VV.  by  N.  for  Cape  Poge  light.  From  the 
Stone-horse  to  the  S.  E.  end  of  the  Horse-shoe,  the  distance  is  5  or  6  leagues.  To 
go  through  the  Moskeekett  channel,  bring  the  light  on  Cape  Poge  to  bear  N.  by 
W.  and  steer  S.  by  E.  which  will  carry  you  to  the  eastward  of  SkifTs  Island, 
which  you  may  go  within  half  a  mile  of. 

To  go  through  the  Swash  of  the  Horse-shoe,  bhund  to  the  westward,  after 
passing  the  Stone-horse,  and  you  deej)en  your  water  to  6  fathoms,  steer  W.  till 
you  bring  Cape  Poge  light  to  bear  W.  S.  W.  then  steer  directly  for  it  through  the 
Swash  of  the  Horse-shoe,  till  you  deepen  to  12  fathoms,  then  steer  for  the  East 
chop  of  Holmes'  Hole. 

To  go  to  the  northward  of  the  Horse-shoe,  bring  Point  Gammon  light  to  bear 
E.  N.  E. — Seconset  point  to  bear  W.  N.  W.  when  you  will  see  the  northernmost 
dry  shoal  of  the  Horse-shoe.  Bring  Cape  Poge  light  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  and  run 
for  it.  In  beating  to  windward,  come  no  nearer  the  north  shore  than  3  fathoms  ; 
when  past  the  dry  spot  of  the  Horse-shoe,  steer  S.  W.  by  S.  till  you  bring  the 
East  chop  to  bear  W. 

To  go  through  the  south  ship  chnnnel,  steer  from  Chatham  lights  S.  S.  E.  until 
you  pass  the  Pollock  Rip  in  3  or  4^ fathoms  water  ;  if  the  wrather  be  clear,  yoy 
will  make  Nantucket  Great  Point  liglit ;  continue  your  course  S.  S.  E.  S.  by  E. 
and  S.  until  the  light-house  bears  W.  from  you,  then  steer  directly  for  it,  until 
you  are  within  three  miles  of  it;  you  should  then  steer  N.  W.  until  the  light- 
house bears  S.  W.  by  W.  then  steer  W.  by  S.  till  the  light-house  bears  E.  by  S.  i  S. 
and  then  run  W.  by  N.  i  N.  making  your  course  good  for  Holmes'  Hole  light,  as 
before  directed,  when,  if  you  wish  to  anchor,  run  S.  W.  till  the  light  bears  N.  W. 
by  N*  and  anchor  in  4  and  b  fathoms  water,  soft  mud,  and  out  of  the  tide. 


Directions  for  *Chatham  Harbour. 

There  are  two  light-houses  built  at  the  mouth  of  Chatham  harbour,  on  a  place 
called  James'  Head.  The  lanterns  are  elevated  about  40  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  sea,  and  eontain  fixed  lights,  which  may  be  seen  five  or  six  leagues  distant, 
and  are  very  useful  to  vessels  bound  over  Nantucket  shoals.  They  bear  from 
Nantucket  light-house  N.  N.  £.  distant  10<^  leagues,  and  from  the  shoals  N.  N. 
W.    It  is  a  barred  harbour,  and  not  to  be  described  with  safety. 


TIDES. 


On  the  South  Shoal  the  flood  tidr  sets  north  about  3  hours ;  then  E.  S.  E. 
"When  the  ebb  commences  at  south,  and  continues  till  low  water.  At  Sancoty 
Head  the  flood  sets  N.  E.  and  ebb  S.  W.  In  the  middle  (or  E.  N.  E.  channel) 
the  flood  sets  N.  E.  by  E.  and  ebb  S.  W.  by  W. 

Id  Butler's  Hole  .he  ebb  sets  west,  and  flood  east.  From  Chatham  to  Pollock 
Rip,  the  flood  sets  S.  S.  W.  and  ebb  N.  N.  E. 

*  Chatham  is  situated  on  the  exterior  extremity  of  Cape  Cod,  bounded  E.  by  ibe  Ocean,  S. 
by  Vineyard  Sound,  W.  by  Harwich,  and  N.  by  Pleasant  Bay.  Its  situation  is  convenient  for 
the  fishery,  in  which  they  have  usually  about  40  vessels  employed.  Its  harbour  contains  20 
feet  water  at  low  tide.    The  place  is  remarkable  for  many  ebipwrecka  on  its  shores. 


78 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN   COAST   PK    1. 


Prom  Butler's  Hole  to  the  Horse-shoe,  ebb  VV.  S.  W.  then  W.  by  N.  to 
Holmes' Kale. 

The  depth  of  water  on  Nantucket  Shoal  and  the  Vineyard  Sound,  are  taken 
at  low  tide.  At  Pollock  Rip,  Great  Rip,  Little  Round  Shoal,  Point  Rip  and 
the  Handkerchief,  the  tide  rises  and  falls  5  to  6  feet.  At  the  Horse-shoe,  Cross 
Rip,  Hedge  Fence,  Squash  Meadow  and  Middle  Ground,  the  tide  rises  and  falls 
9  to  4  feet.     S.  h  E.  moon  makes  full  sea  in  the  Sound. 


Directiont  for  sailing  into  Nantucket  Harbour. 

If  the  *Light-House  on  the  south  side  of  the  harbour  cannot  be  seen,  bring 
the  light  on  Brant  Point,  (which  lies  on  the  starboard  hand)  to  bear  S.  by  E. 
(none  to  the  south  of  that)  and  run  fur  it  until  within  about  a  cable's  length,  then 
run  to  the  eastward  for  the  end  of  the  point,  and  pass  it  as  near  as  you  please. 

Nantucket  Bar.— -It  is  understuud  that  a  new  channel  over  this  dangerous  shoal 
has  been  explored  and  buoyed  out,  by  some  uf  our  erterprising  master  mariners, 
and  pilots;  and  that  the  keeper  of  the  light-house  on  the  south  side  of  the  har- 
bour, having  lieen  waited  upon  by  them,  and  several  of  the  principal  merchants 
and  ship  owners,  has  caused  the  removal  of  the  light-house  under  his  care  to  a 
point  designated.  As  this  new  channelis  declared  by  the  pilots  to  be  considera- 
bly deeper  than  that  formerly  used,  and  has  the  advantage  of  being  straight  and 
easy  of  access,  the  public  good  is  greatly  subserved  by  an  alteration  which  will 
facilitate  its  use;  and  which  has  been  made,  we  understand,  without  any  addi- 
tional expense  to  the  United  States. 

Directions  for  ships  bound  over  the  Shoals  of  Nantucket,  from  the  Bar. — From 
Nantucket  Bar,  the  course  is  about  N.  N.  E.  to  the  Great  Point;  if  a  west  tide, 
run  for  the  light-house,  pass  the  Great  Point,  keeping  it  about  two  miles  distance 
from  you ;  an  east  tide  may  set  you  on  the  Point  Rip.  Keep  the  town  open, 
clear  of  Great  Point,  until  you  are  three  miles  to  the  N.  N.  E.  of  the  point; 
then  run  S.  E.  keeping  three  miles  from  the  land,  until  the  light  is  west  from  you; 
then  runnir!^  east  keeping  the  light-house  bearing  west,  will  carry  you  to  sea. 
When  you  are  in  twenty-five  fathoms,  you  are  without  the  Great  Rip.  If  a  light 
wind,  and  a  southern  tide,  there  is  danger  of  being  set  by  the  tide  too  near  the 
Rip;  therefore  it  is  best,  after  being  sure  that  you  arc  without  the  Round  Shoal, 
to  run  E.  by  N.  or  E.  N.  E.  according  to  the  wind  and  tide.  When  you  have 
passed  the  Round  Shoal,  there  is  nothing  to  fear,  from  N.  to  E.  until  you  come 
to  the  State  of  Maine  on  the  one  hand,  or  the  shoal  of  George's  on  the  other. 
Do  not  cross  George's  Bank  north  of  lat.  41°  N.  The  above  is  the  old  Channel 
way. 

After  you  are  three  miles  N.  N.  E.  from  the  Great  Point  light,  run  S.E.  keep- 
ing three  miles  from  the  land,  until  Sancoty  Head  bears  S.  W. ;  you  may  then 
run  N.  E.  which  will  carry  you  channel  way.  The  Round  Shoal  bears  from  the 
Great  Point  light  E.  N.  E.  eight  miles  off. 

When  you  are  three  miles  to  the  N.  N.  E.  of  the  Great  Point  light,  with  the 
town  open  clear  of  the  Point,  run  S.  E.  keeping  three  miles  from  the  land,  until 
the  town  is  over  the  middle  of  the  head  of  the  harbour ;  keeping  it  90,  will  carry 
you  out  channel  way. 

When  the  town  is  shut  in  by  the  highland  of  Pocomo  or  Squam,  you  are  in 
danger  of  the  north  end  of  the  Bass  Rip ;  also  of  the  north  end  of  the~Great  Rip. 

The  tide  turns  at  the  foot  of  the  Shoals,  three  hours  before  it  is  high  water  at 
the  Bar.  Abreast  of  the  Great  Rip,  the  ebb  tide  sets  to  the  S.  S.  W.  and  the 
flood  to  the  N.  N.  E. ;  therefore  it  is  necessary,  in  light  winds,  to  be  careful  that 
you  do  not  get  set  by  the  tides,  on  the  Rip. 

The  Fishing  Rip  bears  about  E.  S.  E.  from  the  Great  Rip,  from  five  to  seven 

'*■  Nantucket  Harbour  Light-House  is  on  the  south  side  of  the  harbour,  on  high  ground, 
■ope  distance  firom  the  shore,  is  a  small  pyramidical  buikUng,  and  contains  a  fixed  light* 


I 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


79 


I'lih  the 
id,  until 
^11  carry 

are  in 

^at  Rip. 

rater  at 

3ind  the 

Iftri  that 

lo  seven 

ground, 
Vight. 


leagues  distance.  It  has  been  said  by  many  experienced  men,  that  there  are  but 
twi>  and  a  half  fathoms  on  the  shoalest  part  of  said  Rip.  From  the  Great  Point 
light  to  the  Great  Rip,  is  £.  by  S.  h  S.  Ave  leagueu  distance;  the  Fishing  Rip 
is  from  ten  to  twelve  leagues  distance  from  the  Great  Point  light ;  between  those 
two  rips  the  bottom  is  uneven,  having  from  12  to  £2  fathoms.  The  two  Rips  lay 
nearly  north  and  south,  and  are  about  twelve  miles  in  length. 

At  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  it  is  full  sea  at  Nantucket  at  about  twelve 
o'clock  noon. 

Couraea  and  diatancea  from  Nantwket  Light-House 
From  light-house  to  the  Handkerchief      .... 


to  the  Snow  Drift 
to  the  Stone  Horse 
to  the  aandy  point  of  Monomoy 
to  the  Little  Round  Shoal 
to  the  Pollock  Rip  buoy 
to  the  Great  Round  Shoal 
to  the  north  end  of  Great  Rip 
to  Nantucket  Harbour  . 
to  Tuckernuc  Shoal 
to  Eastchop  of  Holme's  Hole 
to  Horse-shoe       .... 
to  Hyannes  .... 

to  the  west  part  of  George's  Bank  • 
From  the  East  end  of  Nantucket  (called  Sancoty  Head) 
to  the  South  Shoal 


do. 
do* 
do. 

do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 

im, 

do. 


•House.                                   j 
Ctmraea.        Leagius.              \ 

N.  by  E. 

H 

N.  N.  E. 

* 

N.  N.  E.  ^  E. 

34 

N.  by  £.  4  £. 

H 

N.E. 

34 

N.  E.  ^  N. 

5 

E.  N.  E. 

2} 

E.  by.  8.  ^  S. 

5 

S.  S.  W. 

2| 

W. 

3 

W.byN. 

9 

N  W.  by  W. 

4i 

N.  W  A  N. 

7 

£.  h^' 

32 

S.  by  E. 


(Variation  6°  SC  W.  1921.) 

Directiona  for  entering  the  //iarfcour.— Bring  the  south  light,  and  the  light  on 
Krant  Point  m  one,  at  the  outer  buoy ;  and  the  south  light  should  be  opened  to 
the  westward  on  this  range,  one  handspike's  length,  to  run  the  channel  from  the 
bar  or  outer  buoy,  to  the  shoaling  of  the  water  on  Brant  Point. 

Directions  for  tltoae  running  for  Block  Island  Channel,  to  the  aouthward  of  Mar- 
tha's Vineyard,  Vineyard  Sound,  Nantucket  Island,  and  such  as  are  bound  into 
the  Vineyard  Sound,  and  intend  going  over  the  Shoala  to  the  eaatvmrd. 

In  approaching  the  south  end  of  Block  Island  from  the  southward,  the  water 
shoals  gradually.  When  the  island  bears  from  N.  W.  to  N.  by  W.  the  bottom 
is  mud;  this  is  commonly  called  Block  Island  Channel.  This  island,  if  you 
come  from  the  southward,  appears  round  and  high ;  and  if  you  approach  it  from 
the  S.  E.  it  appears  like  a  saddle,  being  high  at  both  ends,  but  highest  to  the 
southward.  Your  course  from  the  south-east  head  of  Block  Island  to  'Gay- 
Head  light-house  is  E.  by  N.  15  leagues.  The  current  in  Block  Island  Channel 
is  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.  2  knots.  If  you  fall  to  the  southward  of  Martha's 
Vineyard,  and  can  see  f  Noman's-land  Island,  and  intend  going  over  the  shoal 
to  the  eastward,  bring  Noman's-Iand  Island  to  bear  west,  and  steer  E.  by  S.  8 
leagues,  which  will  bring  you  up  with  Nantucket  Island,  to  which  you  must  give 
a  distance  of  two  miles,  until  you  have  passed  Micomic  Reef,  which  extends  one 
mile  from  the  shore,  has  two  fathoms  water,  and  bears  from  the  South  Tower  at 
Nantucket,  S.  by  W.  When  you  get  to  the  eastward  of  this  rip,  you  may  nigh 
the  shore  to  within  one-quarter  of  a  mile,  until  up  with  Tom  Never's  Head, 
which  lies  1|  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  a  small  village,  called 
Sciasconset,  where  you  may  anchor,  if  necessary,  in  4  or  5  fathoms. 

If  you  wish  to  continue  through  the  channel,  which  lies  between  Nantucket 
Island  and  the  Old  Man,  you  may  run  within  three  cable's  length  of  the  shore, 
which  will  carry  you  over  Pochick  Rip,  on  which  there  are  but  2  fathoms,  and 

*  Gay  Head  light  is  situated  on  the  S.  W.  point  of  Martha's  Vineyard,  at  the  entrance  of 
the  Vineyard  Sound.  The  lantern  is  elevated  150  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  con- 
tr^ns  a  revolving  light^  to  distinguish  it  from  Cape  Poge  light,  that  cai^be  seen  at  sea  over 
the  Vineyard,  which  is  9.  fixed  light. 

t  Noman's-Iand  Island  lies  south  from  Gay  Head,  8  miles  distant,  about  three  miles  long, 
and  one  broad. 


80 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


of  course  only  fit  for  small  vessels.  When  on  this  Rip,  haul  to  within  one  caWe^j 
length  of  the  shore,  and  continue  in  5  fathoms  till  up  with  Sancoty  Head,  which 
is  the  highest  eastern  land  of  Nantucket.  Bring  Sancoty  Head  to  bear  (3.  W. 
when  in  5  fatlioms  water,  and  run  N.  E.  till  you  deepen  to  15  fathoms,  when  the 
Round  Shoal  buoy  will  bear  N.  W.  after  which  you  shoal  into  7  and  8  fathoms, 
fine  ridges,  which,  having  passed,  and  come  into  10  fathoms,  a  north  course  will 
carry  you  to  the  High  Land  of  Cape  Cod,  17  leagues  distant.  If  in  a  large  ship, 
and  you  make  the  south  side  of  Nantucket,  bound  over  the  shoals,  you  may 
proceed  either  within  or  without  the  Old  Man,  but  the  latter  is  preferable. 

If  you  wish  to  go  between  the  Old  Mnn  and  Pochick  Rip,  bring  Tom  Never's 
Head  to  bear  N.  W.  by  W.  and  run  S.  E.  by  E.  till  Sancoty  Head  bears  N.  N.  W. 
i  W  v/here  you  will  have  9  fathoms  water,  when  you  will  run  direct  for  Sancoty 
Head,  till  in  5  fathoms,  which  will  be  close  on  board,  then  continue  your  course 
N.  E.  as  before  mentioned,  for  the  Round  Shoal.  In  running  the  S.  E.  by  E. 
course,  you  go  through  a  swash  half  a  mile  wide,  having  7  fathoms. 

If  you  are  coming  from  sea,  and  make  the  island  of  Nantucket  to  the  northward 
of  you,  it  may  be  known  by  two  towers,  and  four  wind-mills,  which  stand  near 
each  other,  upon  an  eminence.  You  may  then  steer  directly  for  the  land,  until 
you  are  within  half  a  mile,  and  may,  if  bound  to  the  eastward,  run  along  the 
shore  in  4,  5,  and  6  fathoms  water,  to  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  island,  where  there 
are  shoals  and  rips,  on  which  you  will  have  only  ^  or  3  fathoms  water.  Sanco- 
ty Head  is  the  easternmost  head  land  of  Nantucket. 

If,  in  coming  from  sea,  you  make  the  South  Shoal,  which  lies  in  41*^  4'  N.  lat. 
give  it  a  birth  of  a  mile.  If  you  intend  to  make  Nantucket  Island,  steer  N.  by 
\y.  and  when  you  come  near  the  island,  you  may  proceed  along  the  shore,  ac- 
cording to  the  former  directions. 

If,  when  you  make  the  South  Shoal,  you  are  bound  to  Boston  Bay,  and  choose 
to  go  to  the  eastward  of  all  the  shoals  and  rips,  pass  a  mile  or  two  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  shoal,  then  steer  N-  E.  by  E.  about  7  leagues,  when  you  will  be  up 
with  the  Fishing  Rip.  In  running  this  N.  E.  by  E.  course,  you  will  deepen  to 
25  fathoms,  which  is  about  midway  of  South  Shoal  and  Fishing  Rip.  From  the 
Fishing  Rip.  in  17  r  18  fathoms,  steer  N.  N.  W.  for  the  High  Land  of  Cape  Cod, 
18  leagues,  on  which  is  a  light-house,  containing  a  fixed  light,  as  more  fully  de- ' 
scribed  in  page  68. 

If  you  come  from  the  eastward,  and  are  bound  for  Long-Island  or  New-York, 
you  should  be  careful  not  to  goto  the  northward  of  41^  N.  latitude,  until  you 
pass  the  South  Shoal  of  Nantucket.  If,  by  stress  of  weather,  you  should  be 
driven  so  far  to  the  northward  as  to  be  near  the  Vineyard,  you  may  pass  through 
the  channel  to  the  westward  of  Nantucket  Island,  by  bringing  Cape  Poge  light- 
house to  bear  N.  by  W.  and  steering  right  for  it,  will  lead  y6u  through,  in  from 
3  to  4  fathoms,  clear  of  all  shoiils,  leaving  Skiff*s  Island,  which  is  a  dangerous 
shoal,  on  your  larboard  hand.  Martha's  Vineyard  Island  lies  in  much  the  same 
latitude  as  Nantucket  Island,  and  may  be  known  by  a  small  round  island,  which 
lies  at  the  southward  of  Gay  Head  light,  called  Noman's  land  Island,  before  men- 
tioned, 8  miles  distant.  You  may  sail  between  this  island  and  Martha's  Vine- 
yard; but  you  must  take  care  to  avoid  a  ledge  of  rocks,  which  bdars  from  Gay 
Head  light  S.  by  E.  5^  miles  distant,  called  the  Old  Man. 

In  bad  weather,  coming  from  the  eastward,  and  you  wish  for  a  harbour,  and 
the  wind  admitting,  you  may  bring  Nantucket  light  to  bear  E.  S.  E.  and  run 
W.  N.  W.  making  your  course  good,  until  Cape  Poge  light-house  bears  W.  by 
S.  if  bound  into  Edgartojvn  harbour,  then  steer  for  the  light  until  you  get  in  fi 
fathoms  water,  then  run  W.  N.  VV.  if  it  shoalens,  haul  to  the  northward;  if  not, 
keep  on  until  the  light  bears  south,  then  run  W.  S.  W.  you  will  have  3  and  4  fa- 
thoms, hard  bottom.  As  soon  as  you  get  5^  or  6  fathoms,  sucky  bottom,  then 
run  S.  S.  W.  until  the  light  bears  N.  E.  ^  E.  then  you  may  anchor  in  about  5  or 
6  fathoms  water  with  safety,  in  case  your  cables  and  anchors  are  sea-worthy ; 
otherwise,  if  you  wish  to  go  into  the  harbour,  when  the  light  bears  N.  E.  h  E. 
you  may  run  S.  W.  by  W.  until  you  get  3^  fathoms,  hard  bottom,  then  run  west 
about  half  a  mile,  and  you  will  be  within  the  flats,  which  you  leave  on  your  star- 
board hand,  coming  in ;  you  will  find  it  smooth,  and  abotit  3  or  4  fathoms  water, 
where  you  may  anchor  with  safety,  though  yoru*  ground  tackling  is  |>oor. 


-gjll^^ww^^ 


I' 


h^>. 


■^. 


^ 


I 


ne  caMe'^j 
id,  which 
sar  S.  W. 
when  the 
fathoms, 
>ur9e  will 
arge  ship, 
you  may 
le. 

1  Never's 
f^.  N.  W. 
'  Sancoty 
ur  course 
E.  by  E. 

orthward 
tand  near 
md,  until 
along  the 
ere  there 
Sanco- 

4'  N.  lat. 
ser  N.  by 
hore,  ac- 
id choose 
tie  south- 
vill  be  up 
leepen  to 
From  the 
ape  Cod, 
fully  de- ' 

5w-York, 
until  you 
hould  be 
through 
>ge  light- 
in  from 
angerous 
the  same 
d,  which 
ore  men- 
1*3  Vine- 
om  Gay 

our,  and 
and  run 
i  W.  by 
get  in  fi 
;  if  not, 
nd  4  fa- 
>m,  then 
out  5  or 
worthy ; 
E.  i  E. 
run  west 
our  star- 
is  water, 


FaffPatff    80 


^ 


i 


r 


s* 


I 


■  -.^-JIJ....-,     ^'^  - 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


81 


If  you  wish  to  go  to  Holme's  Hole,  or  through  the  Sound,  bring  Cape  P6f;e 
light  to  bear  S.  E.  by  E  i  E.  and  run  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  you  will  fun  for  the 
East  Chop,  and  leave  Squash  Meadow  shoal  on  your  starboard  hand ;  get  3  fa- 
thoms water  on  the  Chop,  then  haul  to  the  N.  N.  W.  until  you  deepen  to  7,  8,  or 
9  fathoms ;  then  run  S.  W.  by  W.  for  Holme's  Hole  roadstead,  in  4  or  3i  fathoms; 
or  N.  W.  for  the  Sound,  to  clear  the  West  Chop  and  Middle  Ground. 

Gay  Head  is  the  westernmost  land  of  Martha's  Vineyard.  When  you  come? 
by  Gay  Head  with  a  southerly  wind,  the  south  channel  is  best.  From  Gay 
Huad  to  Nantucket  Point,  the  tide  sets  directly  through  the  Vineyard  Sound 
with  a  little  variation,  after  passing  Cape  Poge  to  the  eastward,  which  is  caused 
by  a  strong  tide  setting  through  Tuckernuck  Channel.  The  land  of  Gay  Head 
is  high,  and  of  divers*  colours,  namely,  red,  yellow,  and  white,  in  streaks.  In 
steering  from  *Block  Island  for  Gay  Head,  you  mu^t  be  careful  to  avoid  the 
Sow  and  Pigs;  they  make  a  ledge  of  rocks,  some  of  which  are  above,  and  others 
under  water.  These  rocks  lie  2i  miles  S.  W.  by  W.  from  the  westernmost  of 
Elizabeth  Isles,  and  N.  W.  by  W.  from  Giiy  Head,  3i  leagues  distant :  the  first  of 
the  flood  tide  sets  strong  to  the  northward  over  them  into  Buzzard's  Bay,  which 
is  very  foul.  Within  Gay  Head  there  is  a  fair  sandy  bay,  called  Nimshe  Bite, 
with  from  5  to  10  fathoms,  in  which  is  very  good  anchoring,  with  south  and 
south-easterly  winds.  Your  course  along  Elizabeth  Isles  is  E.  N.  E.  in  15,  14, 
12,  8,  15,  16,  and  17  fathoms  water;  give  the  isles  a  birth  of  about  three-quar- 
ters of  a  mile.  In  running  from  Gay  Head  light  into  Vineyard  Sound,  if  you 
wish  to  make  a  harbour  on  the  north  side,  bring  Gay  Head  light  to  bear  S.  W- 
and  run  N.  E.  4  leagues,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  fTarpaulin  Cove  light, 
where  you  may  anchor  in  from  4  to  18  fathoms,  on  fine  sand,  the  light  bearing 
from  W.  by  N.  to  S.  W. 

When  coming  from  sea,  you  may  run  for  Gay  Head  light,  when  it  beara 
from  N.  N.  E.  to  E.  S.  E.  giving  it  a  birth  of  two  miles,  to  clear  the  Devil's 
Bridge,  which  bears  from  the  light  N.  W.  by  N.  li  miles  distant.  As  measuring 
the  distance  in  the  night  would  be  uncertain,  you  must  keep  your  lead  going,  and 
if  you  should  have  7  or  8  fathoms  when  the  light  bears  S.  E.  by  E.  or  S.  £. 
haul  up  north  till  you  have  10  or  12  fathoms;  then  with  flood,  steer  N.  E.  and 
with  ebb,  N.  E.  by  E.  3  leagues ;  then  E.  N.  E.  will  be  the  course  of  the  Sound, 
which  will  carry  you  to  the  northward  of  the  Middle  Ground,  which  has  a 
black  buoy  on  the  east  end,  in  16  feet  water,  bearing  from  Tarpaulin  Cove 
light  east,  4  leagues;  from  tWestChop  light  N.  W.  by  W.  h:tlf  amile;  and  from 
the  black  buoy  on  Hedge  Fence  W.  4  N.  3  leagues,  (shoaiest  water  on  Middle 
Ground  two  feet)  when  you  will  see  the  Wt-st  Chop  of  Holme's  Hole  light, 
which  you  may  run  for,  but  keep  one  mile  distant  from  the  shore  till  you  open 
the  East  Chop  one  cable's  length,  and  with  a  flood  tide  steer  direct  for  it,  and 
with  ebb  keep  it  one  point  open,  till  you  open  a  wind-mill  on  the  west  side  of 
the  harbour  about  one  cable's  length,  then  run  up  in  the  middle  of  tho  river,  till 
you  come  to  4  or  3  fathoms,  where  you  may  anchor  on  good  ground.  The  usual 
mark  for  anchoring  is  the  West  Chop,  bearing  from  N.  N.  W.  to  N.  W.  by  N- 
but  if  you  lie  any  time  here,  the  best  anchoring  is  well  up  the  harbour,  and 
close  to  the  shore,  mooring  S.  E.  and  N.  VV.  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water.  In  this 
harbour,  which  is  about  two  miles  deep,  you  will  lie  secure  from  all  winds  except 
a  northerly  one. 

You  must  not  keep  further  than  two  miles  from  the  West  Chop,  as  there  is  a 
shoal,  called  Hedge  Fence,  on  the  east  end  of  which  is  a  black  buoy,  in  16  feet 
water,  bearing  ft'om  West  Chop  east,  6  miles,  and  from  the  black  buoy,  on  Mid- 
dle Ground,  E.  ^  S.  3  leagues.  The  Hedge  Fence  lies  about  3^  miles  N.  E.  by 
N.  from  Holme's  Hole  hght,  and  extends  W.  N.  W.  and  E.  S.  E.  6  miles,  is  about 
half  a  mile  broad,  and  has  4  feet  water  on  the  shoaiest  part.  Between  this  shoal 
:>nd  Holme's  Hole,  there  are  from  8  to  12  fathoms  water. 

*  Block  Island  is  about  9  miles  in  length,  extending  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  and  5  ihiles 
in  breadth. 

t  Tarpaulin  Cove  light  lies  on  the  larboard  hand  as  you  onter  that  harbour,  and  shows  a 
fixed  Ught.  It  bears  about  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Gay  Head  light,  which  is  a  revidmig  tigkt^  4 
leagues  distant. 

t  A  light-house,  showing  a  fixed  light,  is  erected  on  the  West  Chop  of  Holmes*  Hole. 

11 


K..4jkl._.A' 


•i^-'. 


•'^Steii 


8^ 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  coast  PILOT, 


If  you  make  the  Caop  in  the  night,  when  it  bears  S.  E.  you  are  clear  of  the 
Middle  Ground ;  steer  for  the  east  side  of  it  till  you  "trike  in  4  or  3  fathoms  onr 
the  flat  ground  near  the  chop,  then  steer  S.  E.  by  j3.  observing  not  to  go  nearer 
the  land  than  3  fathoms.  If,  in  running  S.  E.  by  E.  you  fall  into  6  or  7  fathdms, 
haul  up  S.  by  W.  or  S.  S.  W.  and  run  into  i  or  3  fathoms,  as  before  directed. 

If  bound  into  Vineyard  Sound,  with  the  wind  at  tite  eastward,  and  you  are 
near  the  south  side  of  Martha's  Vineyard,  to  go  betw<>en  Sqibnocket  and  the 
Old  Man,  run  round  Sqibnocket  in  3),  and  4  fathoms  water,  continuing  N.  N.  VV. 
along  the  beach  till  you  come  to  Gay  Head  light,  and  if  ebb  tide,  anchor  in  5  fa- 
thoms, the  light  bearing  from  N.  to  N.  E. 

In  coming  into  the  Sound  in  the  night,  with  a  strong  north-westerly  whid,  haul 
to  the  northward  till  you  have  smooth  water  under  the  *Eliz«beth  Islands,  where 
you  may  anchor  in  14  or  10  fathoms.     Should  you  have,  the  wind  to  the  south- 
ward, it  will  be  best  to  run  down  through  the  South  Channel,  or  Vineyard  side. 
When  Gay  Head  light  bears  S.  S.  E  your  course  is  N.  E.  by  h\  4  E.  or  E.  N.  E. 
obaervi;.g  not  to  come  nearer  the  land  than  into  7  fathoms  wsiter,  till  you  are 
abreast  of  Lambert's  cove,  in  which  is  good  anchoring,  with  southerly  or  easter- 
ly winds,  and  may  be  known  by  a  high  sand  bank,  called  Neciinkey  cliff,  on  the 
east  side  of  it,  about  midway  the  cove,  opposite  which  yon  may  come  to  in  5  or 
3  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  where  is  the  best  anchoring.*  The   Middle  Ground 
lies  about  two  miles  without  the  cove,  and  has  12  feet  water  on  it.     If  you 
intend  running  down  for  Holme's  Hole,  your  course,  when  oppt»si<e  Necunkey 
point,  is  E.  by  N.  keeping  near  the  land  to  clear  the  Middle  Ground,  the  east 
end  of  which  bears  east  from  Tarpaulin  Cove  light,  4  leagues  distant.     You  may 
track  the  shore  hy  the  lead  in  from  7  to  4  fathoms,  till  you  come  near  the  light; 
but  come  no  nearer  than  3  fathoms,  and  you  may  track  the  (^hop  around,  the  same 
as  running  down  to  the  northward  of  the  Middle  Ground,   which  bears  from 
West  Chop  light  N.  W.  by  W.  half  a  mile,  and  from  the  east  end  of  the  Hedge 
Fence  W.  i  N.  3  leagues.     There  is  good  anchoring  along  this  shore,  in  6  or  4 
fathoms,  after  you  are  to  the  eastward  yf  Necunky  point,  till  you  come  near 
the  West  Chop.     If  you  wish  to  make  a  harbour  after  entering  the  Vineyard 
Sound,  bring  Gay  Head  light  U<  bear  W-  distant  8  miles,  nnd  run  S.  E.  till  you 
come  into  7  fathoms  water,  which  will  be  on  tlie  east  side  of  the  bay  in  Nimshe 
bite,  near  Clark's  spring,  where  the  best  water  may  be  hud  in  great  abundance, 
and  lie  in  good  anchorage.  Gay  Head  light  bearing  W.  by  N.     Your  course  from 
Gay  Head  light  to  Tarpaulin  cove  light,  is  N.  E.  by  N  and  the  distance  4  leagues. 
In  this  harbour  you  may  anchor  in  from  4  to  24  fathoms,  and  lie  safe,  with  the 
•wind  from  N.  E.  by  E.  to  south,     it  will  be  best  to  anchor  iu  3  fathoms,  as  with 
that  water  you  will  be  out  of  the  tide,  where  the  ground  is  good  for  holding.  The 
tide  flows  at  change  and  full  days  of  the  moon,  at  9  u'clock,  but  in  the  channel 
between  Elizabeth  islands  and  Martha's  Vineyard,  the  flood  runs  till  1 1  o'clock. 
In  this  channel  there  is  a  Middle  Ground,  which  is  a  narrow  shoal  of  sand,  the 
eastern  end  of  which  bears  N.  W.  by  N.  from  tb»'  light.  There  is  not  more  than 
3  or  4  feet  water  on  the  eastern  end.     N.  W.  from  Necunkey  olifl"  are  3  and  4  fa- 
thoms across  the  ground.     Opposite  Lambert's  cove  is  12  feet,  and  to  the  west- 
ward of  that,  is  3  or  4  fathoms.    The  shoal  lies  W.  hy  S.  and  K.  by  N. ';  about  4 
leagues  in  length,  and  has  several  swashes  on  it.  When  the  East  Chop  of  Holmes' 
Hole  comes  open  of  the  West  Chop,   yuu  are  to  the  eastward  of  the  Middle 
Ground.  Your  course  from  Tarpaulin  Cove  light  to  Holmes'  Hole  light,  is  E.  i  N. 
distance  3  leagues.     In  steering  this  course,  you  must  have  regard  to  the  tide,  as 
the  ebb  may  set  you  too  far  to  the  southward,  r.nil  the  flood  too  far  to  the  north- 
ward, an.d  stand  in  for  the  harbour,  when  you  have  opened  the  East  Chop  as  be- 
fore directed.  From  Holmes' Hole  light  to  Cape  Poge  light  the  course  is  E.  S.  E. 
and  the  distance  about  3  leagues;  in  the  channel  between  them  there  are  12  and 
II  fathoms  water.     In  going  over  the  slu»als  through  this  channel,  you  must  be 
Careful  to  keep  your  lead  going,  in  order  to  avoid  a  dangerous  sand  which  lies 
On  the  north  side  of  it,  called  the  Horse-shoe,  distant  from  Cape  Poge  3  leagues. 
The  channel  between  this  sand  and  Cape  Poge,  and  also  between  the  former  and 
Tuckcrnuc  shoal,  is  narrow;  in  it  there  are  from  12  to  4i  fathoms  water,  the 
latter  of  which  is  between  the  east  end  of  the  Horse-shoe  and  T'lckernuc  ahoal. 

'*'  The  largest  of  the  Elizabeth  Islands  is  called  Cutterhunk,  on  which  a  light-house  is  built. 
as  itcschbed  in  page  99. 


When 
shoe, 
to  airoi 
The 
in  whic 
CapeP 
d  fathu 
easterly 
fairly  o 
in  half  i 


!ar  of  the 

thorns  onr 

go  nearer 

fathdms, 

ected. 

you  are 

and  the 

N.  N.  W. 

»r  in  5  fa- 

vhid,  haul 
ds,  where 
he  south- 
ard side. 
rE.  N.E. 
I  you  are 
or  easter- 
iff,  on  the 
to  in  5  or 
L^  Ground 
t.     If  you 
Vecunkey 
,  the  east 
You  may 
the  light; 
,  the  same 
ears  from 
he  Hedge 
in  6  or  4 
ome  near 
[Vineyard 
till  you 
n  Nimshe 
)undanc<;, 
nrse  from 
leatjiies. 
with  the 
as  with 
ng.  The 
e  channel 
o'clock, 
sand,  the 
J ore  than 
and  4  fa- 
the  west- 
■•>  about  4 
Htilmes' 
Middle 
E,  i  N. 
e  tide,  as 
he  north- 
op  as  he- 
E.  S.  E. 
12  and 
must  be 
ihich  lies 
leagues, 
•mer  and 
iter,  the 
ic  ahoal. 

sc  is  built. 


1   • 


liLTJNx's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


8;] 


When  Tuckernuc  island  bears  S.  S.  W.  you  are  to  the  eastwiid  of  the  Horse- 
shoe. On  the  south  side  of  the  channel,  also,  there  are  several  spots  of  slioal, 
to  aeoid  which,  you  must  keep  your  lead  going. 

The  harbour  of  Edgartown  lies  between  Martha's  Vineyard  and  Cape  Poge, 
in  which  you  may  anchor.  In  proceeding  for  tliis  harbour,  pass  within  a  mile  of 
Cape  Poge,  and  then  steer  south  along  the  low  sandy  beach  on  the  west  side,  in 
£1  fathoms  water,  until  you  come  to  the  southernmost  part  of  it,  then  sail  more 
easterly  about  a  mile,  until  you  bring  the  town,  which  is  a  bay  to  the  westward, 
fairly  open,  and  then  steer  directly  S.  S.  W.  into  the  harbour,  until  you  get  with- 
in half  a  mile  of  the  town,  leaving  a  black  buoy  on  the  starboard  hand,  where 
you  may  anchor  in  4  or  3  fathoms  water.  This  harbour  is  a  gut  between  Martha's 
Vineyard  and  Cape  Poge,  and  is  formed  by  a  shoal  which  lies  on  the  N.  W.  and 
W.  sides  of  the  entranc* ,  and  the  beach  to  the  southward.  The  tide  runs  strong 
in  this  harbour,  and  affords  excellent  anchorage. 

Or  you  may,  if  bound  from  Holmes'  Hole  to  Edgartown,  bring  the  East  Chop 
to  bear  N.  W.  by  W.  and  run  S.  E.  by  E.  ^  leagues,  which  will  carry  you  over 
the  flats  in  3  fathoms  water,  on  which  lies  a  black  buoy,  which  you  leave  on  your 
starboard  hand,  when  you  will  drop  into  4  fathoms,  and  then  steer  9.  S.  W.  4 
miles,  which  brings  you  up  to  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  from  which  to  the 
wharf,  is  W.  N.  W.  one  mile. 

In  leaving  Holme's  Hole  to  pass  over  the  shoals,  keep  the  West  Chop  open  to 
the  northward  of  the  East  Chop,  until  you  have  passed  Squash  Meadow  shoal,, 
on  the  N.  W.  end  of  which  is  a  red  buoy,  with  a  small  pole  in  the  end  of  it, 
placed  in  16  feet  water,  bearing  from  Cape  Poge  light  N.  W.  j  W.  6  miles;  from 
WestChop  light  S.  E.  by  R.  \  E.  0  miles;  and  from  the  black  buoy  on  Hedge 
Fence  S.  by  E.  2  miles.  Shoalesi  water  .■>  feet.  The  btioy  lies  about  «j  miles 
from  the  East  Chop,  must  be  left  on  the  starboard  hand,  when  your  course  will 
be  E.  by  S.  in  10  or  12  fathoms  water,  which  course  you  must  copiinue  till  you 
pass  Cape  Pogjp  light.  If  it  should  be  tide  of  flood,  you  must  steer  E.  by  S.  {  S. 
as  the  tide  of  flood  sets  very  strong  to  the  northward,  between  Cape  Poge  and 
Tuckernuc  island,  and  the  tide  of  ebb  to  the  southward,  so  that  you  must  govern 
your  course  by  the  tide.  In  clear  weather  you  may  see  Nantucket  light-house 
18  miles,  which  you  must  bring  to  hear  E.  by  S.  J  S.  which  course  you  are  to 
steer  till  you  pass  it  one  league,  when  you  must  bring  It  to  bear  west,  and  steer 
east,  taking  care  to  make  this  course  good,  which  will  carry  you  over  the  shoals 
in  ship  channel;  the  ground  is  very  uneven,  and  you  will  have  from  4  to  8  fa- 
thoms water.  When  you  have  passed  over  the  shoals,  you  will  have  from  10  to 
14  fathoms  water,  and  then,  by  steering  north,  you  will  make  Cape  Cod  light- 
house (which  contains  a  fixed  light)  distant  18  leagues. 

To  go  to  the  northward  of  the  Great  Round  shoal,  on  the  northerly  part  of 
which  is  a  black  buoy,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  placed  in  14 
feet  water,  bearing  from  Sancoty  head  N.  by  fc.  i  E.  5  leagues,  from  Nantucket 
light  E.  N.  E.  i  N.  10  miles,  and  from  the  red  buoy  on  Point  Rip  E.  N.  E.  fi 
leagues,  shoalest  water  5  feet,  you  must  proceed  according  to  the  foregoing  di- 
rections, until  you  pass  the  light-house,  and  bring  it  to  bear  S.  W.  J  W.  then  by 
making  a  N.  E.  J  E.  course  good,  you  will  go  between  the  Great  and  Little  Round 
shoals,  on  the  south  part  of  which  is  a  white  buoy,  with  a  small  pole  in  the  v  I  of 
it,  placed  in  14  feet  water,  bearing  from  Chatham  lights  S.  by  W.  4j  leagues ;  trom 
Nantucket  light  N.  E.  3  leagues ;  and  from  the  black  buoy  on  the  Great  Round  shoal 
N.  W.  by  N.  2 J  miles  :  shoalest  water  7  feet,  in  2i,  3,  4,  and  5  fathoms  water,  until 
you  have  crossed  the  Pollock  rip,  where  you  will  have  about  3  or  4  fathoms  wa- 
ter, on  which  is  a  red  buoy,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand.  The  Little 
Risund  shoal  bears  N.  W.  from  thegreat  one,  distantabout2j  miles.  Continue  your 
N.  E.  i  E.  course,  until  you  deepen  your  water  to  12  or  13  fathoms,  and  then 
steer  north  for  Cape  Cod  light-house  before  mentioned,  and  described  in  page  68. 
As  the  South  Shoal  of  Nantucket  lies  in  lat.  41^4'  N.  and  the  Gulf  Stream, 
southward  from  this  part,  reaches  as  far  to  the  northward  as  lat.  38°  30'  N.  you 
should  pass  Nantucket  Shoals  between  these  latitudes.  The  shoal  on  George's 
Bank  (east  end)  lies  in  long.  61^  42'  W.  and  the  W.  end  in  long.  67*^  50'  AV.  and 
the  South  Shoal  of  Nantucket  in  long.  69^  50'  W. 

By  observing  the  foregoing  directions,  and  keeping  between  the  Gulf  Stream 
and  the  Shoals,  you  will  shorten  your  passsage  to  New-York,  Delaware,  Vir- 
ginia, or  other  western  ports:  for  you  will  have  the  advnntnce  of  tlio  eddy  cur 


84 


liMJN'f  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


leat,  running  contrary  to  the  Gulf  Stream.;  the  latter  would  retard  your  progress 
at  the  rate  of  (50  or  70  miles  a  day.  The  Nantucket  whalemen,  by  their  con- 
stant practice  of  whaling  on  the  edge  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  all  the  way  from  their 
inland  to  the  Bahnrnaa,  are  well  acquainted  with  its  course,  velocity,  and  extent. 
A  stranger  may  know  when  he  is  in  the  Gulf  Stream,  by  the  warmth  of  the 
water,  which  is  much  greater  than  that  on  either  side  of  it.  If,  when  you  are 
crossing  the  Gulf  Stream,  you  are  bound  to  the  westward,  you  should  get  out 
of  it  as  soon  as  possible.     [For  description  of  Gulf  Stream,  inc.  see  page  1.} 


AN  ACT 


For  establishing  the  compensation  for  Piloting  Vessels  through  the  Vineyard 
Sound,  and  over  Nantucket  Shoals,  in  certain  cases. 

^yrom  and  after  the  24th  of  Feb.  1820,  any  person  who  shall  faithfully  and 
skilfully  pilot  any  vessel  through  the  Vineyard  Sound,  over  Nantucket  Shoals, 
to  her  port  of  destination  in  Boston  Bay,  or  eastward  thereof,  shall  be  entitled  to 
receive  the  following  rates  of  Pilotage,  viz.  from  the  first  day  of  November  until 
the  thirty-first  day  of  March,  inclusive,  for  a  vessel  not  drawingmore  than  eleven 
feet  of  water,  three  dollars  and  fifty  cents  per  foot ;  if  drawing  over  eleven  feet 
and  not  more  than  fourteen  ftet,  four  dollars  per  foot;  if  drawing  over  fourteen 
feet,  four  dollars  and  fifty  cents  per  foot ;  from  the  first  day  of  April  until  the 
thirty-first  day  of  October  inclusive,  for  a  vessel  drawing  not  more  than  eleven 
feet  of  water,  two  dollars  and  fifty  cents  per  foot ;  if  drawing  over  eleven  feet, 
and  not  more  than  fourteen  feet,  three  dollars  per  foot ;  if  drawing  over  fourteen 
feet,  three  dollars  and  fifty  cents  per  foot ;  with  an  addition  of  five  dollars  if 
such  person  shall  be  landed  4t  any  place  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Ann,  and  not 
eastward  of  Portsmouth  ;  or  of  ten  dollars,  if  landed  eastw^ird  of- Portsmouth. 

The  provisions  of  this  act  shall  nut  extend  to  any  case  where  an  'agreement  in 
writing  shall  be  made  betyveen  the  master  or  owner  of  a  vessel,  and  the  person 
who  may  undertake  to  act  as  pilot  of  such  vessel,  fixing  any  other  rate  of  pilotage 
or  compensation  for  such  services.  Nothing  contained  in  this  act,  shall  in  any 
way  affect  any  law  respecting  pilotage,  now  in  force,  in  any  part  of  this  Com- 
nonwealth. 


NANTUCKET  SOUTH  SHOAL,  &c. 

Thi.s  dangerous  Shoal,  which  lies  in  lat.  41°  04'  N.  long.  69°  56'  W.  bears  S. 
by  E.  from  Sancoty  Head,  4  leagues  distant.  It  is  composed  of  hard  white  sand, 
over  which  the  sea  breaks  in  the  most  tremendous  manner,  having  on  it  in  many 
parts,  only  3  feet  water,  and  the  tide  meeting  it  obliquely,  passes  over  it  in  dif- 
ferent directions.  The  course  of  the  tide  is  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  beginning  to  run 
S.  W.  at  10  o'clock  on  the  day  of  full  moon,  and  continues  in  that  direction  about 
7  hours.  It  extends  from  east  to  west  one  mile,  and  is  in  breadth  two  cable's 
length.  It  often  breaks  in  5  fathoms,  on  the  east  and  west  of  the  Shoal.  The  rip 
which  extends  from  the  western  end  has  about  7  fathoms  water  on  it.  The  tides 
run  round  the  compass  in  12^  hours,  but  the  southern  tide  has  the  greatest  dura- 
tion, and  runs  the  strongest.  .  , 

Extract  from  the  surveying  sloop  OrbiVs  Journal. 

"^  Sancoty  head  bearing  N.  W.  i  Came  to  a  large  swash  throut^h  the  Bass 

Siasconset  town      .      N.  W.  J  N.  >  Rip,  with  5  fathoms.  Standing  on  the  rip 

.     Southernmost  land       W.  }  had  from  9  feet  to  2  fathoms,  hard  sand. 

•<  Sancoty  head  bearing  N.  by  W. 
Siasconset         .  N.  N.  W.  On  the  south  breaker  of  Bass  Rip,  in  9, 

8  feet,  and  less. 


Tom  Never's  head. 
Southernmost  land, 


N.W.byN. 
W.  N.  W. 


"  Kept  standing  on  to  the  southward  in  a  channel  of  from  6,  7,  and  8  fathomn, 
Sancoty  head  bearing  N.  by  W.  8  miles,  crossed  a  dangerous  Rip  in  2}  fathoms, 
liying  S.  W.  by  S.  From  this  Rip,  E.  S.  E.  3  miles  distant,  is  another  Rip,  be- 
tween which  are  9,  l.*),  17,  14,  6,  and  4  fathoms,  which  is  the  shoalest  water  on 
the  Rip ;  then  standing  east,  had  7  and  9  fathoms ;  thre6  cables'  length  from  this 


Rip,  camt 
to  a  third 
and  S* 
fathoms 
water  wi 
"When  ov( 
4,  11,  18, 
fathoms, 
we  aiicho 
4,  6,  0  an 
when  ove 
2i,  2^,  an 
way  the 
breakers, 
which  til 
7  fathom 
S.iW. 
sounding 
from  the 
fathom  p 
found  28 
69^58  V 
when  yo 
tom  till  t 

NoTfc. 

work  to 

much  in 

men  in  T 

madf  in 

N.  abren 

W.  22  «i 

12  miles, 

30  fathoi 

Mills,  an 

Paul  P 

fathoms: 

Eight 

Stream, 

westwar 

abreast  < 

to  cur  re  I 

Sever 

will  hav< 

channel 

To  th 

nor  tidti 

tion,  an< 

you  wil 

A  SI 

It  comr 

mile,  w 

corner i 

vessels 

to  anotl 

mile  fr< 

one-qu; 

Headt 

Old  IV 

fathom 

black  s 

Betv 

good  r 


,,M- 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


85 


their  con- 
from  their 
nd  extent, 
ith  of  the 
n  you  are 
d  get  out 
age  1.] 


Vineyard 

ifully  and 
et  Shoals, 
entitled  to 
nber  until 
lan  eleven 
even  feet 
'  fourteen 
I  until  the 
an  eleven 
iven  feet» 
•  fourteen 
dollars  if 
,  and  not 
smouth. 
lement  in 
le  person 
f  pilotage 
ill  in  any 
his  Corn- 


bears  S. 
lite  sand, 

in  many 
it  in  dif- 
g  to  run 
on  about 
>  cable's 

The  rip 
:'he  tides 
:st  dura- 


the  Bass 
n  the  rip 
rd  sand. 

ip,  in  9, 


ithomp, 
kthoms, 
lip,  be- 
ater on 
>iu  this 


!tlip,  came  to  another  with  4  fathoms  water ;  from  this,  at  equal  distance,  came 
to  a  third,  then  a  fourth,  all  which  were  within  the  limits  of  3  miles,  and  lay  N. 
and  S.  Although  they  have  the  appearance  of  dangi^r,  there  is  not  leas  than  4 
fathoms  on  the  shoalcst  part.  Aft<!r  crossinj;  the  fourth  Rip,  catiie  ii)to  deep 
water  within  one  mil*-,  viz.  12/^7,  42,  and  25  fathoms,  sand  and  led  grnvel. 
When  over,  had  smooth  watei  with  3  fathoms,  and  made  a  south  course,  having 
4,  11,  18,  and  the..  11  fathoms,  and  crossed  the  east  end  of  tin;  South  Shtial  in  2 
fathoms,  running  down  the  south  side  in  13  fathoms,  }>()  fathoms  distant,  when 
we  anchored  in  10  fathoms.     Got  under  way  and  stood  to  the  wrstvvard;  had  7, 

4,  6,  0  and  7  fathoms;  doubled  rou.id  tlie  west  end  in  3  fathoms,  fine  sand; 
when  over  had  7  fathoms,  the  tide  setting  N.  N.  VV.  Kept  along  the  north  side  in 
2j,  2|,  and  2  fathoms,  one  cable's  length  from  the  breakers.  When  about  mid- 
way the  shoal,  perceived  a  swash,  through  whiih  we  crossed  bi  tween  the 
breakers,  in  a  S.  S.  E.  direction,  had  2^  and  2  faihoms,  and  one  cast  9  feet,^t 
which  time  it  was  about  half-tide.  In  a  few  moments,  dee[)ened  to  4,  5,  6,  and 
7  fathoms,  2  cable's  length  from  the  shoal,  hird  white  sand.     From  this  steered 

5.  i  W.  to  make  a  south  course  gotd,  kept  the  lead  going,  and  increased  the 
soundings  gradually  to  10  fathoms,  fine  hiajk  and  white  sand,  then  one  mile 
from  the  Shoal.  From  this  sounded  every  3  miles,  depth  increasing  about  one 
fathom  per  mile,  till  at  the  distance  of  7  leagues  from  the  South  Shoal,  where  wt". 
found  28  fathoms,  fine  black  and  white  sand.  This  was  in  lat.  40°  42  N.  long. 
69"  58  W.  Tile  same  quality  of  soundinji^s  continue  till  you  get  in  1^.  40°  31'  N. 
when  you  will  have  40  fathoms,  sol!  mud,  from  which  it  continues  muddy  bot- 
tom till  off  soundings,  and  in  40°  00  N.  no  bottom,  with  120  fathoms" 

Note. — The  Orbit  (Capt.  J.  Colkswortuv)  was  sent  by  the  author  of  this 
work  to  ascertain  the  exact  Situation  of  the  South  Shoal,  which  differing  so 
much  in  latitude  from  what  it  had  ever  been  laid  down,  induced  several  gentle- 
men hi  Nantucket  again  to  engai^e  in  the  enterprise,  who  confii.n  the  sm'veys 
made  in  that  vessel,  aid  ioake  the  following  report :  "  Observed  in  lat.  41"^  4'  11" 
N.  abreast  of  the  Shoal,  as  laid  down  by  Capt.  Colksworthv  ;  steered  off  S.  by 
W.  22  milis,  and  regularly  deepened  the  water  to  3.'»  fathoms;  steered  K.  N.  E. 
12 miles,  to  30  fathoms;  N.  W.  20  miles,  to  18  fathoms;  S.  S.  W.  In  miles,  to 
30  fathoms;  and  N.  N.  W.  14  mile8,^regularly  shoaling  until  6  A.  M.  made  the 
Mills,  and  came  in  at  1  P.  M.  These  several  courses  formed  a  track  over  where 
Paul  Pinkham  has  laid  the  South  Shoal  of  Nantucket,  and  on  which  there  are^Z 
fathoma." 

Eight  or  ten  leagues  S.  E.  from  the  south  p^rt  of  George's  Bank,  lies  the  Gulf 
Stream,  where  there  is  a  strong  E.  N.  E.  current,  and  if  you  are  bound  to  the 
westward,  you  had  better  go  very  near  the  Bank,  quite  on  soundings,  till  you  are 
abreast  of  the  South  Shoal  of  Nantucket,  where  you  have  30  leagues  from  Bank 
to  current,  and  by  doing  which  you  will  certainly  shorten  your  passage. 

Seven  leagues  to  the  westward  of  the  South  Shoal,  in  26  or  3;)  fathoms,  you 
will  have  black  mud  of  a  shining  smooth  nature,  when  you  will  be  in  Tuckernuc 
channel.  .  ,. 

To  the  westward  of.  the  South  Shoal  of  Nantucket,  you  have  no  shoals,  rips, 
nor  tide  to  hurt  you,  until  you  come  near  th(!  laud;  but  clear  sea,  good  naviga- 
tion, and  regular  soundings.  To  the  eastward  and  northward  of  the  South  Shoal, 
you  will  have  a  rapid  tide. 

A  Shoal  called  Pochick  Rip,  lies  off  the  S.  E.  part  of  Nantucket  Island. 
It  commences  a  few  rods  south  of  Siasconset  town,  and  then  runs  E.  S.  E.  one 
mile,  when  you  come  to  a  corner  on  which  are  6  feet  at  low  water  ;  between  this 
corner  and  the  island  there  are  a  few  swashes  from2i  to  3  fathoms,  through 'Which 
vessels  may  pass.  From  the  corner  the  Rip  runs  south  1.^  mile,  when  you  come 
to  another  swash,  half  a  mile  wide,  with  7  lathoms;  W.  S.  W.  one-q«iarter,  of  a 
mile  from  this  channel  is  a  very  shoal  spot,  with  6  feet,  which  runs  S.  W.  By  W. 
one-quarter  of  a  mile,  when  you  fall  into  a  swash  40  rods  wide,  Tom  Never's 
Head  bearing  N.  N.  W.  3  miles  distant.  You  then  come  to  the  east  end  of  the 
Old  Man,  which  runs  W.  S.  VV.  about  4  miles,  on  which  are  from  9  feet  to  3 
fathoms  ;  when  over  the  Old  Man,  you  will  drop  into  7  fathoms,  fine  sand,  .w^th 
black  specks. 

Between  the  Old  Man,  Tom  Never's  Head,  and  Pochick  Rip,  there  is  a  very 
good  roadstead  ©r  ancstaorage ;  Tom  Never's  Head  bearing  E.  N.  E.  i  N.  the 


Hi 


^. 


ii 


86 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


1^ 


southfirnmost  land  W.  1^  N.  you  will  have  r»  fathoms,  coarse  sand ;  from  which  to 
the  Old  Man  you  will  have  5,  6,  6i,  7,  8,  9,  10  to  14  fathoms,  red  sand,  then  half 
way  between  the  two  ;  from  this  you  shoalen  to  13,  11,  8,  7,  5,  4  and  3  fathoms, 
fine  sand,  with  hiack  specks. 

The  Grmt  Rip  is  about  4i  leagues  from  Sancoty  Head  ;  on  this  Rip,  about  E.  S. 
E.  from  Sancoty  Head,  there  are  4  feet  water,  and  east  from  Squani  there  are  5, 
but  on  many  other  parts  of  it  there  are  2^,  3  and  4  fathoms  water. 

Fishing  Rip  is  ab(tut  lU  leagues  from  Sancoty  Head,  and  has  from  5  to  7 
fathoms  water  on  it.  Between  this  and  the  Great  Rip,  the  ground  is  uneven ; 
there  are  12,  22,  and  15  fathoms  water.  Thesti  two  Rips  stretch  nearly  north 
and  south,  and  are  about  12  miles  in  length.  Off  the  east  part  of  Nantucket 
Island,  lies  the  Bass  Rip,  about  3  miles  from  Sancoty  Hend. 

Around  the  coast  of  Nantucket  and  the  shoals,  you  will  have  sandy  bottom, 
and  in  moderate  weather  had  better  anchor  than  be  driven  about  by  the  tide, 
which  is  very  rapid.  The  course  of  the  tides  at  and  over  Nantucket  Shoals,  is 
nearly  N.  K.  and  S.  W.  and  regular.  The  N.  E.  tide  makes  flood.  S.  S.  E. 
moon  makes  high  water.     vSouth  moon  makes  full  sea  at  Nantucket  Harbour. 

South  of  Noman's-land  Island,  in  20  or  2i>  fathoms,  you  will  have  coarse  sand 
like  gravel  stones ;  and  S.  S.  W  from  it  in  28  or  30  fathoms,  coarse  red  sand. 
S.  S.  E.  from  Hlock  Island,  which  is  in  Block  Island  Channel,  in  40  or  50  fa- 
thoms, you  will  have  ooay  bottom,  but  as  you  shoal  your  water  to  9,5  or  20  fa- 
thoms, you  will  have  coarse  sandy  bottom. 

S.  S.  E.  and  VV.  N.  VV.  moon  makes  high  water  on  the  Shoals;  the  tide  of 
flood  sets  N.  E.  by  E.  and  ebb  S.  W.  by  W.  from  2  to  3  knots  an  hour.  It  ebbs 
and  flows  about  5  or  6  feet. 

If,  when  coming  from  sea,  you  fall  into  Block  Island  Channel,  you  will  have 
soundings  in  lat.  40°  N.  lOO  fathoms,  mud  and  ooze,  which  ijuality  of  soundings 
continue  decreasing  gradually,  till  you  get  into  40  fathoms.  )n  38  fathoms. 
Block  Island  bearing  N.  by  W.  4.i  leagues  distant,  you  will  have  fine  red  and 
black  sand;  two  and  one-half  leagues  distant,  same  bearing,  you  will  have  28 
fathoms,  coarse  sand.  When  Block  Island  bears  N.  distant  4  or  5  leagues,  you 
cannot  see  any  land  to  the  northward  or  eastward;  but  as  you  approach  the 
island,  you  will  see  Vfontock  Point  to  the  westward,  m^tking  a  long  low  point  to 
the  eastward.  In  sailing  VV.  S.  VV.  you  will  make  no  remarkable  land  on  L<mg- 
Island,  from  the  eastward  of  said  island  to  the  westward,  its  broken  land  ap- 
pearing at  a  distance  like  islands;  but  may  discover  Fire  Island  light-house, 
which  shows  a  revolving  tight,  bearing  E.  by  N.  from  Sandy  Hook  light,  16 
leagues  distant.     From  Fire  Islands  light,  a  shoal  extends  south  one  mile,  which 

15  very  dangerous,  as  it  shoals  suddenly  from  8  to  0^  fathoms,  then  directly  on  the 
Shoal,  on  which  the  flood  tide  stls  very  strong.  When  Fire  Islands  light  bears  N. 
in-  10  fathoms  water,  you  may  steer  W.  by  S.  which  will  ciirry  you  up  with  San- 
dy Hook  light.  The  quality  of  the  bottom  is  various,  viz.  yellow,  red,  brown, 
blue  and  grey  sand,  within  short  distances.  About  south  from  Fire  Islands,  SS 
miles  distant,  and  40  miles  S.  K.  by  E.  from  the  *Ilighlands«'liesa  6ank,extend- 
ing  from  N.  E.  by  E.  to  S.  W.  by  W.  having  on  it  from  10  to  14  fathoms,  peb- 
bles.    Within  this,  a  short  distance,  you  will  get  20  fathoms,  when  it  shoals  into 

16  fathoms,  grey  sand,  which  depth  you  will  carry  till  you  get  into  what  is  called 
the  fMud  Hole,  where  are  from  20  to  36  fathoms  water,  marl  or  green  ooze, 

*  A  law  has  passtd  the  Congress  of  the  United  States,  for  building  two  light-houses  on  the 
Highlands  of  Neversink,  one  of  which  is  to  to  be  a  revolving,  and  the  other  &  fixed  light,  and 
they  will  probably  be  completed  by  December,  1827,  *^and  when  completed,  the  light  ship  now 
anchored  off  Sandy  Hook,  is  to  be  removed  to  Five  Fathom  Bank,  off  the  Capes  of  the  DelC' 
ware."  As  respects  the  removal  of  lights,  when  once  placed,  on  the  exact  bearing  of  which 
the  mariner  depends,  there  can  be  but  one  opinion,  which  is,  that  no  chance  should  ever 
TAKE  PLACE.  Should  thls  light  ship  be  removed  to  the  spot  contemplated,  and  afterwards 
fallen  in  with  by  a  commander,  during  the  night,  accustomed  to  the  bearings  from  Sandy 
Hook  light,  he  shapes  his  course  accordingly,  and  shipivrcck  on  the  Jersey  shore  is  the  con- 
sequence. Five  Fatlums  Bank  lies  close  in  with  Cape  May,  on  which  is  a  light-huuse,  and 
the  passage  over  the  Bank  is  often  safe. 

t  This  Mud  f^ole,  with  the  sounding  oiT  the  Hook,  arc  correctly  laid  down  on  a  Chart  of 
the  Harbour  of  New- York,  with  the  Coasts  of  Long  Island  and  New-Jei'sey,  from  Fire  Isl- 
ands, to  Barnegat  Inlet,  compiled  and  surveyed  by  Edmund  Blunt,  and  published  by  Ed- 
>iPND  &  Geo.  W.  Blcnt,  No.  133,  Maiden  Lnuc,  New-York. 


and  somet 
most  part  i 
light.  Fro 
ally,  as  la 
You  will 
some,  and 
house.:  yoi 
dy  Hook, 


Bring  G 
N.  till  yoi 
which  you 
starboard 
point  of  N 
then  haul 
ing  somev 
ship's  len{ 
of  the  Ho 
distance  f 
is  a  good 
hard  bott( 
on  the  we 
till  in  5h  o 
N.  by  W. 
a  small  isl 
your  star 
westerly  ! 
than  t<)  th 
To  steer 
ward  of  t 
the  clear 
the  flat,  a 
Island,  h; 
this  islan 
tends  out 
As  you  d 
as  a  sma 
the  islani 
when  yo 
channel 
light  wit 
In  cor 
for  stran 
till  Pum 

N.  ivyr 

A  ro< 
times  cs 
Betwee 
channel 
By  tho! 
ly  used 

*  Wh 
fathoms 

t  Cla 
is  eleval 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


87 


5  to  7 
ineven ; 
north 
ntucket 


und  sometimes  pebbles,  the  deepest  part  of  which  bears  east  from  the  northern- 
most part  of  the  Woodland,  10  miles;  and  S.  E.  j  S.  15  inileij  from  Sandy-Hook 
light.  From  the  Mtui  Hole  to  the  Bar  of  Sandy  Hook,  the  water  shoals  gradu- 
ally, as  laid  down  on  the  Chart.     On  the  Bank  are  plenty  of  fish. 

You  will  have  to  or  22  fathoms  water  out-sight  of  the  land,  sandy  bottom  in 
some,  and  clay  in  other  places.  When  you  come  in  sight  of  Sandy  Hook  light- 
house, you  will  see  the  Highlands  of  Neversink,  which  lie  W.  S.  W.  from  San- 
dy Hook,  and  is  the  most  remarkable  land  on  that  shore. 


Directions  for  New-Bedford. 

Bring  Gay  Head  light-house,  which  contains  a  revolving  liirJit,  to  bear  S.  and  run 
N.  till  you  come  to  the  passage  through  the  islnndn,  wliich  forms  Quick's  Hole, 
which  you  must  enter  as  near  the  middle  as  pt)ssibl«' ;  hut  if  you  deviate,  keep  the 
starboard  hand  best  on  board,  to  avoid  a  spit  or  flnt  which  runs  i)ff  from  the  S.  E. 
point  of  Nashawina,'on  the  larboard  hand,  w  hen  you  will  have  from  5  to  6  fathcuiis, 
then  haul  square  into  the  Hole,  keeping  the  larboard  hand  best  on  board,  follow- 
ing somewhat  the  bend  of  the  shore.     You  will  keep  Gay  Head  light  open  about  a 
ship's  length  by  the  S.  E.  point  of  Nashawina,  till  you  art;  at  least  one  mile  north 
of  the  Hole,  which  will  carry  you  to  the  eastward  of  a  ledge  and  rock  that  lie  that 
distance  from  it,  with  only  5  h;  \-i  ffet  water  on  them,  to  the  westward  of  which 
is  a  good  channel,  and  5  fathoms  all  round.     Then  steer  N.  h  W.  till  you  strike 
hard  bottom  in  5  fathoms  water,  on  the  S.  E.  corner  of  the  Great  ledge,  which  is 
on  the  western  side  of  the  channel ;  then  N.  E.  by  N.  about  three-fourths  of  a  mile, 
till  in  5i  or  6  fathoms,  sucky  bottom,  when  the  ligljt  w  ill  bear  N.  N.  W .  then  steer 
N.  by  W.  and  run  into  the  river.*     After  passing  f  Clark's  Point  light,  you  will  see 
a  sm^ll  island,  called  Outer  Egg  island.  Just  above  water,  which  you  will  leave  on 
your  starboard  hand,  giving  it  some  birth,  as  there  are  rocks  which  lie  south- 
westerly from  it,  say  one-third  of  a  mile  distant,  hut  still  keeping  nearer  to  it 
than  t<)  the  main  land,  to  avoid  Butler's  Ibit,  which  makes  ofT  from  the  west  shore. 
To  steer  clear  of  this  flat,  keep  the  light-house  open  a  ship's  length  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  Round  Hills.     As  soon  as  you  open  the  N.  line  of  the  woods  vith 
the  clear  land,  about  a  mile  N.  of  the  light-house,  you  are  to  the  northward  of 
the  flat,  and  may  steer  direct,  either  for  the  hollow,  or  the  high  part  of  Palmer's 
Island,  haulinr  a  little  to  the  eastward  as  you  approach  it.     The  p.issage  between 
this  island  and  Fort  point,  on  the  starboard  Iian4l^  is  narrow.     A  flat,  which  ex- 
tends out  S.  W.  from  tlic  point,  makes  it  necessary  to  keep  nearest  the  isl.ind  : 
As  you  draw  towards  the  N.  end  of  the  island,  give  it  a  birth  of  two  ship's  lengths, 
as  a  small  flat  makes  off  K.  from  its  N.  E.  point.     As  soon  as  you  have  passed 
the  island  one  cable's  length,  the  town  will  appear  open  on  your  larboard  hand, 
when  you  may  run  for  the  end  of  thr  wharf  which  projects  out  farthest  into  the 
channel  (Rotch's  wharf) ;  or  to  anchor  in  the  deepest  water,  bring  Clark's  point 
light  without  Palmer's  Island 

In  coming  into  New-Bedford  from  the  westward,  the  eastern  eiiiinnel  is  safest 
for  strangers.  Give  the  Sow  and  Pigs  a  birth  of  one  mile,  and  run  N.  E.  by  N. 
till  Pune  Island  bea^s  S.  E.  then  E.  N.  E.  till  Gay  Head  light  bears  S.  and  then 
N.  i  W.  as  before  directed. 

A  rock  lies  oflF  N.  W.  from  the  north  end  of  Pune  (or  Puneguese,  as  it  is  some- 
times called)  about  one  mile  distant,  on  which  there  is  only  8  feet  at  low  water. 
Between  this  and  Wilkes'  ledge  (on  which  there  is  a  black  buoy)  is  an  open  ship 
channel,  free  from  danger,  and  courses  may  be  varied  as  circnrnstances  require. 
By  those  who  are  acquainted  with  the  bay,  the  western  channel  is  most  common- 
ly used.     Giving  the  Old  Cock,  Hen  and  Chickens  a  sufhcient  birth,  the  only 

V  *  When  running  from  Quick's  Hole  for  the  N.  ledge,  as  soon  ns  you  find  yourself  in  7 
fathoms  water,  you  may  be  sure  that  you  are  abreast  of  the  Great  ledge,  or  have  passed  it. 

t  Clark's  Point  light  is  situated  at  the  entrance  of  New- Bedford  harbour.  The  lantern 
is  elevated  100  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  Zi  fixed  light. 


I 


88 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


danger  to  be  avoided  in  approaching  Mishnn  point,  is  a  rock  which  lies  about  one 
mile  S.  W.  by  S.  from  it,  on  which  there  i»  only  6  foet  water.*  Having  parsed 
Mishom  poi^t,  you  may  steer  directly  for  the  Dumplin  rocks,  off  the  Round  HillSt 
and  which  may  be  passed  witliin  two  cable's  length  to  the  eastward.  Henc<>  to 
Clark's  point  light  the  course  is  N.  N.  B.  but  to  avoid  the  Middle  let'.ge  (on  which 
there  is  a  red  buoy)  and  which  lies  very  near  in  a  direct  course  from  the  outer 
DuTiplin  to  the  light,  it  is  better  to  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  about  a  mile,  and  then  haul 
up  N.  N.  E.  when  you  will  leave  the  ledge  on  your  laritoard  hand.  You  may 
also  carry  In  4  fathoms  to  the  westward  of  the  ledge,  but  the  channel  between 
it  and  the  Lone  rock,  which  lies  N.  W.  from  it,  is  narrow. 

From  Seaconnet  rocks  (giving  them  a  birth  of  one  mile)  to  the  entrance  of 
Buzzard's  Bay,  the  course  is  R.  i  S.  By  this  course  made  good,  all  the  dangers 
of  the  Hen  and  Chickens  will  be  avoided.  Soundings  generally,  from  9  to  7 
fathoms,  and  mostly  hard  bottom,  till  deepens  to  16  fathoms,  sucky  bottom, 
when  fCutterhunk  Island  light  will  be  upwards  of  a  mile  distant,  and  Clark's 
Point  light  will  hear  N.  N.  E.  and  you  may  run  directly  for  the  light  till  up  with 
the  Dumplin  Rocks,  to  which  a  suflicient  birth  must  be  given.  Or  you  may 
stand  on  this  N.  N.  E.  course  till  in  7  fathoms,  sucky  bottom,  which  will  be  be- 
tween Mishom  Point  and  the  Round  Hills,  and  come  to  anchor;  or  otherwise, 
steer  N.  N.  E.  till  Pune  Island  bears  S.  E.  and  then  E.  N.  E.  for  Quick's 
Hole  channel,  as  before  directed.  It  may  be  well  to  observe,  that  if,  when  you 
have  stood  in  from  Seaconnet  Point  towards  Cutterhunk  Island  light,  and  the 
light  on  Clark's  Point  is  not  to  he  seen,  but  you  can  see  Gay  Head  light,  you 
may  stand  on  your  course  E.  i  S.  till  you  shut  it  in  behind  the  west  end  of  Cut- 
terhunk, but  must  then  immediately  change  your  course  to  N.  N.  E.  If  neither 
light  is  to  he  seen,  the  soundings  are  the  only  dependence,  and  must  be  very  care- 
fully attended  to. 

ADDITIONAL  RExMARKS. 

To  the  S.  E.  of  the  Dumplin  Rocks,  one-half  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile  dis- 
tant, is  a  saind  Spit  with  only  7  feet  of  water  on  it.  Between  this  Spit  and  the 
rocks,  there  are  5  fathoms  water. 

Lone  Rock,  on  wliich  a  black  buoy  lies,  about  35  feet  S.  by  E.  from  the  rock; 
from  which,  Clark's  Toitit  light-house  bears  N.  N.  E.— Outer  Dumplin  Rock, 
S.  b:  W.  i  W.— Round  Hill  S.  W.  3  S.— White  Buoy  at  Hussey's  Rocks  S.  TV. 
by  W.  distance  by  estimation  1  mile — the  entrance  of  Apponeganset  River  N. 
W.  and  N.  W.  of  the  ^Middle  Ledge,  nearly  half  a  mile  distant,  is  nearly  or  quite 
dry  at  low  water,  when  thererlre  Si  fathoms  round  it.  Between  this  rock  and 
the  Hussey  Rock,  is  the  entrance  to  Apponeganset  River;  depth  of  water,  in  the 
channel,  3.J  fathoms.  There  is  also  a  channel  between  the  Hussey  Rock  and 
White  Rock.  Course  from  Quick's  Hole  to  entrance  of  Apponeganset  River, 
N.  N.  W. 
The  White  Rock,  on  which  a  white  huoy  lies,  about  40  feet  S.  S.  E.  from  the  Hus- 
sey's Rucks,  from  which  Round  Hills  bear  S.  S.  W. — White  Rock  south,  and 
distant  by  estimation  1  mile — Clark's  Point  light-house  N.  E.  by  N. — Buoy  at 
the  Lone  Rock  N.  E.  by  E.  and  the  entrance  of  Apponeganset  River  N.  N.  W. 
appears  considerably  high  above  water,  and  the  two  rocks  to  the  westward  of  it, 
called  the  Rugged  Rocks,  are  always  to  be  seen.  *t#« 


A  sr 
the  bu 
the  sai 
it,  wer 
the  bri 

Pad 
mile  01 
bound 

The 
Sowar 
irreguli 

A  SOI 
js  111  kn 


*  There  is  also  a  ledge  directly  south  of  Mishom  point,  one  mile  distant,  on  which  there  is 
not  more  than  3  fathoms  at  low  water,  and,  at  very  low  tides,  still  less.  |tCP  V\'hen 
bound  to  sea,  a  S.  W.  by  S.  course  from  the  Dumplin  rocks  will  carry  you  just  without  this 
ledee,  and  in  fair  channel  way  between  the  Sow  and  Pigs,  and  Hen  and  Chickens. 

f  A  light-house  is  erected  on  the  west  end  of  Cutterhunk  Island,  containing  a  fixed  light, 
with  nine  lamps  and  reflectors.  It  cannot  be  mistaken  for  Gay  Head  light,  which  shows  a 
revolving  light,  bearing  from  it  S.  46"^  E.     Cutterhunk  is  the  largest  of  the  Elizabeth  Islands. 

The  following  are  the  bearings  and  distances  taken  from  the  light-house  (by  the  compass.) 
The  dry  part  of  the  Sow  and  Pigs  Reef,  south  51  degrees  west;  distanc  by  estimation  2^ 
miles.  Missbawen  Point  north  6  degrees  east.  Round  Hills  north  14  degrees  east.  Outer 
Rock,  at  the  Round-hills,.north  18  degrees  east  Clark's  Point  light-house,  north  SO  degrees 
east.    North  west  point  of  Pune  Island  N.  E.  by  N.  i  N.  high  point  of  do.  N.  E.  i  N- 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


ay 


A  small  rock  to  the  S.  W.  o(  the  North  ledge,  (about  one  mile  distant  from 
the  buoy)  with  only  7  feet  water  on  it,  and  another  small  rock  to  the  N.  E.  ot 
the  same  ledge  (about  half  a  mile  distant  from  the  buoy)  with  10  feet  water  on 
it,  were  recently  discovered  by  Capt.  Mosher.  On  the  former  he  struck  with 
the  brig  Commodore  Decatur,  and  on  the  latter  with  the  brig  Elizabeth. 

Packet  Rock,  a  small  sunken  rock,  on  which  there  are  4  feet  water,  lies  half  a 
mile  or  upwards  W.  by  N.  from  Black  Hock.  The  passage  for  coasting  vessels 
bound  from  New-Bedford  up  the  bay,  is  between  Packet  and  Black  Rocks. 

The  soundings  across  the  western  entrance  of  Buzzard's  bay,  between  the 
Sow  and  Pigs,  and  Hen  and  Chickens,  and  some  distance  within  them,  are  very 
irregular,  varying  from  5  to  10  and  15  fathoms,  and  bottom  generally  hard. 

A  south-east  moon  makes  high  water  in  the  bay,  and  the  average  set  of  tide 
is  1&  knots. 

Bearings  of  Ledges  from  Clark's  Point  lig/it. 


North  ledge, 

Middle  ledge 

Great  ledge, 

Wilkes'  ledge, 

West's  Island  ledge  (buoy) 

Other  bearings  from  the  light. 

Old  Bartholemew  rock,  .... 

Quick's  Hole, 

DumpUn  rocks,  ...... 

White  rock, 

Round  Hills, 


S.by  E. 
S.  by  W.  i  W. 
S.  i  W. 
S.  by  W. 
S.  E.  bj  E. 


E.  26°  N.  one-sixth  of  a 

mile  distant. 
S.  9^  E. 

S.21=W.orS.S.W.ncarIy. 
S.  25°  W. 
S.  29°W. 


i 


From  the  iiorth  Ledge. 


The  light-house  bears 
Black  rock, 


Dumplin  rocks, S.  W 

From  Middle  Ledge. 


N.byW. 
N.  E.  by  E. 


Light-house 
Dumplins, 


Light-house, 
Mishom  Point, 
North  ledge, 
Dumplins, 


Light-bouse, 
Mishom  Point, 
Dumplins, 


From  Great  Ledge. 


From  Wilkes'  Ledge. 


From  H'esVs  Island  Ledge. 


Light-house, 
Mishom, 

Little  Black  rock, 
Black  rock. 


N.  by  E.  i  E. 
S.  W.byS.iS. 


N.  i  fl. 

\V.  S.  W. 

N.  N.  E.  2  miles  distant- 

W.  -i  N. 


N.  by  E. 

W.  by  N.  -i  N.  2  miles  dist. 
N.  by  W.  i  W.  about  same 
distance. 


N.  W.  by  W, 
W.  S.  W. 
N.  by  E. 
N.  W.  i  W. 


12 


■vw3El^iS£*Etl;, 


t)0 


BLLNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


*Bird  Island  light-house  in  Buzzardh  Bay. 

Tlie  entrance  of  Buzzard's  Bay  lies  between  Bird  Island  on  the  N.  W.  and 
IFing'sNeck  on  the  S.  E.  Sailing  fur  Monument  River  the  best  water  is  near  to 
fVinir'a  Neck.,  and  from  the  point  of  IVing'a  Neck,  nearly  up  to  the  southernmost 
of  fTobus  Islands,  are  from  4  to  6  fathoms  water.  Near  to  the  Island  (Tobus) 
rommcnces  a  ridge  of  flats  extending  over  to  the  N.  W.  shore,  on  which  are  7  to 
0  feet  water.  Having  passed  over  this  ridge,  yon  will  ha^-e  from  15  to  20  feet 
water,  which  depth  you  may  carry  until  abreast  of  a  largo  single  rock,  crflled  the 
Old  Cow,  which  lies  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  when  you  will 
come  up  with  a  ridge  of  hard  sand,  from  100  to  \.10  fathoms  wide,  on  which  are 
from  7  to  9  feet  water,  which,  after  passing,  you  will  have  from  18  to  24  feet  wa- 
ter, quite  up  to  Back  River  harbour.  The  soundings  are  reduced  to  low  water. 
Rise  from  3  to  6  feet.     High  water  at  full  and  change  of  the  moon  at  8  o'clock. 

BUOYS  IN  BUZZARD'S  BAY. 

There  are  five  buoys  placed  in  Buzzard's  bay,  viz. — A  yellow  buoy  on  the 
S.  E.  part  of  the  north  ledge,  in  Si  fathoms  water;  a  rod  buoy,  lying  in  very 
shoal  water,  on  the  centre  of  the  Middle,  which  is  a  small  ledge ;  a  white  buoy 
on  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  Great  ledge,  in  3  fathoms  water ;  a  black  buoy  on  the 
S.  W.  part  of  Wilkes'  ledge,  in  Si  fathoms  water — all  on  the  w^'stern  side  of  the 
bay  ;  and  a  white  buoy  in  2  fathoms  water,  on  West's  Island  ledge,  on  the  east- 
ern side. 

All  these  buoys,  except  the  one  on  West's  Island  ledge,  are  taken  up  in  the 
winter. 

Bearings  and  distances  from  Bird  Island  light-house. 

The  south  point  of  West's  Island, S.  W.  |  W.  10  miles. 

West's  Island  ledge, S.  W.  4  W.  11  miles. 

The  north  entrance  of  Quick's  hole,  .         .         .        .  S,  W.  by  S.  25  miles. 

Wood's  hole,  due  S.  10  miles. 

The  entrance  of  Monument  river, E.  N.  E.  i  N.  7i  miles. 

Hearings  and  distances  of  sundry  places  in  the  vicinity  of  Buzzard^  s  Bay. 

From  Wing's  Neck  to  the  light-house  on  Bird  Island, 

Minister  s  Neck, 
Trom  (tre;i,t  Rocky  Point  to  the  south  end  of  Mashow  Island, 

Hog  Island, 
Wing's  Neck, 
'  Tobus  Island,  .  - 

Old  Cow  Rock,      . 
From  the  south  end  of  Mashow  Island  to  Bird  I.sland, 

Wing's  Neck,  . 


W,  by  S.  2J  miles. 

S.  by  E.  I  of  a  mile. 

S.  W.  iW.  lofamiie. 

W.  by  S.  J  of  a  mile. 

S.  W.  3  miles. 

S.  S.  W  5  of  a  mile. 

S.  by  E.  J  E.  J  of  a  mile. 

S.W.  by  W.iW.4i  miles. 

S.  W.  I  S.  2|  miles. 


H'est  Island  Ledge  buoy 

West's  Island  ledge  lies  in  Buzzard's  bay,  between  .'>  and  6  miles  S.  E.  by  E. 
from  New-Bedford  light-house,  in  from  4  to  4^^  fathoms  water.  A  large  white 
buoy  has  been  placed  over  the  ledge. 

*  Bird  Island  is  on  the  north  shore  of  Buzzard's  bay,  near  the  east  side  of  Sippican  har- 
bour, in  the  town  of  Rochester,  about  12  miles  E  N.  E.  from  New-Bedford  light-house.  It 
is  small,  not  containing  more  than  three  acres  of  land,  and  is  about  five  feet  above  the  level 
of  the  sea.  The  light  and  dwelling-houses  are  built  of  stone,  and  are  white-washed.  The 
tower  of  the  former  is  25  feet  high,  on  which  is  a  lantern  7  feet  high,  that  is  lighted  with  10 
patent  lamps,  with  a  16  inch  reflector  to  each,  Atted  on  two  sides  of  an  oblong  square,  which 
revolves  round  once  in  3^  minutes,  at  the  distance  of  five  leagues,  which  is  as  far  as  it  can 
be  seen  for  the  land.  The  time  of  total  darkness  is  twice  to  that  of  light.  As  you  approach 
it,  the  time  of  total  darkness  increases,  until  you  get  within  two  miles  of  it,  when  there  will 
not  be  a  total  darkness,  but  the  greatest  strength  of  light  will  be  as  40  to  1  over  that  of  the 
least  light,  in  the  course  of  the  revolution  of  the  apparatus. 

t  There  are  three  of  the  Tobus  Islands,  but  at  low  water  they  are  all  connected. 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


91 


Hearings  and  distances  of  sundry  places  from  Gay  Hcail  light-house. 

Nomaii*3  Land  IsIhiiU,  South,  8  miles  distant. 

Old  Man,  8.  hy  E.  This  i»  a  ledge  of  rocks  whicli  li«;s  two-thircU  of  the  dib- 
tunCK  from  the  Vineyard  to  Noman's-lund  Island,  which  has  a  passai^e  on  hoth 
flidesthaT  is  hut  little  used.  Those  who  gothrouRli,  must  keen  "ear  Noinan'sLand 
Island  till  the  light  hears  north.     You  will  have  7  fathoms  water  in  this  passage. 

Sow  and  Pty«,  N.  W.  hy  W.  dA  leag'ies.  This  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  which  is 
very  dangerous,  and  hears  8.  W.  i  W.  from  Cutterhunk  light. 

N.  E.  from  the  light,  'ih  leagues  distant,  is  a  s|iot  of  shoal  ground,  with  3  fa- 
thoms water  on  it— Mauanshaw  hite,  ii^  miit'.s  distant.  lii  this  harhour  you  will 
have  good  anchorage  in  from  U  to  ti  fathoms,  the  light  hearing  W.  hy  S.or  W.  i  S. 
and  lie  sheltered  with  the  wind  from  E.N.  E.  to  W.  S.  VV. — Block  Island  W.hy 
H.  distant  15  leagues. 

Newport  (Rhode  Island)  light-house  W.  hy  N.  i  N.  distant  11  leagtu^s. 

Bearings  and  distances  from  the  lii^ht  on  Capo  Poge,  aitd  depth  of  wttln-  of  several 
most  dangerous  shonls  in  sis^ht  of  Cape  Poge  tight-house,  and  the  bearings  of 
the  East  Chop  of  Holmes'  Hole. 

East  Chop,    .....     N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  from  said  light,  7j  miles  distant. 

Squash  Meadow  shoal, 

Norton's  shoal, 

Moskeeket  Long  shoal, 

Tuckernuc  sboal, 

South-end  Horse-shoe, 

Dry  Spots  Horse-shoe, 

Swash  of  Horse-shoe 

Tuckernuc  shoal  from 

Nantucket  light, 
Horse-shoe  from  do. 
Coast  from  >(antucket 

light  bound  westw'd 
From  Cape  Poge  to  Skiff's  Island, 
Hawse's  shoal,  the  sboalest  part, 

Directions  for  those  who  fall  in  with  Block  Island,  when  they  are  bound 

for  Rhode  Island  Harbour. 

Fror  the  S.  E.  part  of  Block  Island  to  Rhode  Island  light-house,  tlie  course 
is  N.  by  E.  %  E.  and  the  distance  8  leagues;  about  midway  between  them,  theie 
are  24  fathoms  water.  If  you  are  on  the  west  side  of  Block  Island,  with  the 
body  of  the  island  hearing  E.  N.  E.  in  8  or  10  fathoms  water,  your  course  to 
Point  *Judith  light  is  N.  E.  by  E-  about  G  'icagues.  This  point  appears  lil'^e  u 
Nag's  head,  and  is  pretty  bold ;  between  Block  Island  and  the  Point,  there  are 
from  SO  to  6  fathoms  water,  except  a  small  shoal  ground,  which,  in  thick  weather, 
is  often  a  good  departure,  say  4  to  5  fathoms,  bearing  about  W.  by  S.  from 
Point  Judith  light,  distant  &  miles.  From  Point  Judith,  when  not  more  than 
a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  point  to  Rhode  Island  Harhour,  your  course  is 
N.  E.  and  the  distance  is  about  5  leagu«'s.  When  in  13  fathoms  water.  Point 
Judith  Hght  bearing  W.  or  W.  hy  N.  the  course  to  Rhode  Island  Harbour  is 
N.  E.  by  N.  h  N.  and  the  distance  to  the  light-house  .5  leagues.  The  light-house, 
together  with  the  Dumplins,  must  be  left  on  your  larboard  hand ;  it  stands  on 


N.  VV.  it  VV.  5  feet 

at  low  water, 

51 

do. 

E.  J  S.           9  do. 

do. 

7i 

do. 

E.  i  S.           6  do. 

do. 

8 

do. 

E.  •  S.           7  do. 

do. 

14 

do. 

E.  i  N.          7  do. 

do. 

m 

do. 

N.  E.  1  N.     dry 

10 

do. 

E.  N.  E.      12  do. 

do. 

0 

do. 

W.  ly  N.      7  do. 

N.  W.  by  W. 

W.  by  N.  J  N. 

S.  i  W.          diy 

<^ 

lio. 

S.  E.  J  E.      6  do. 

do. 

3i 

do. 

*  The  light-house  on  Point  Judith  is  a  stone  edifice,  40  feet  high.  !  he  lamps  arc  bO 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contain  a  revbtving  light,  to  distinguish  it  from  JsTewport 
light,  which  stands  on  Conaniiicut  island,  and  is  a  fixed  light.  The  distance  from  the  light- 
house to  high  wiiter  mark,  is  as  follows  ;  E.  from  the  light-bouse  to  high  watermark,  16  rods  ; 
S.  E.  14  rods  ;  S.  18  rods;  S.  S.  W.  23  rods,  which  is  the  extreme  part  of  the  point,  to 
which  a  good  birth  sliould  be  given.  The  light  on  Point  Judith  bears  S.  W.  \  S.  3  leagues 
distant  from  Newport  (Rhode  Island)  light-house.  Point  Judith  light  may  be  distinguished 
from  Watch  Hill  lifiht.  bv  the  litrht  not  wholly  disappearing  when  within  three  lensuos  of  i«. 


S* 


92 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


ihe  south  purt  of  fConaiinicut  Island,  this  point  is  called  the  Beaver's  Tail,  snd 
is  about  3  leagues  distant  from  Point  Judith. 

After  leaving  the  light-house  on  your  hirboard  side,  there  is  a  sunken  rock  due 
south  from  the  light-house,  about  200  yards  distant,  called  Newton  Rock. 

You  must  take  care  to  avoid  the  rocks  which  lie  oflF  south  from  Castle  Hill, 
some  of  which  are  above  water.  Castle  Hill  is  on  the  east  side  of  Rhode  Island 
harbour.  In  coming  from  the  eastward,  to  clear  Brenton's  reef,  bring  Newport 
light  to  bear  W.  N.  W.  run  for  it  until  yuu  see  oiTdcck  Goat  Island  tlight,  w  inch 
will  then  bear  N.  E.  |  E. ;  then  run  for  Goat  Island  light  until  it  bears  E.  (or  con- 
tinue your  course  until  it  bears  E.  S.  E.)  at  the  same  time  keeping  Newport  light 
bearing  S.  W.  by  W.  and  anchor  in  7  to  9  fathoms,  good  bottom.  In  coming 
from  the  west,  after  passing  Point  Judith  (the  light-house  whereon  has  a  revolving 
light)  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  until  you  draw  up  with  Newport  light,  to  which,  giving 
a  birth,  run  for  Goat  Island  light,  and  anchorage  as  above  directed.  Goat  Island 
lies  before  the  town  of  Newport,  extends  about  N.  and  S.  and  has  a  fort  on 
it ;  off  the  N.  E-  point  lies  a  buoy  in  16  feet  water  ;  the  shore  is  hard  and  rocky. 
A  little  within  the  light-house,  and  near  to  the  shore  on  the  west  side,  there  is 
a  cove  called  Mackerel  Cove,  the  entrance  to  which  is  shoal  and  dangerous.  As 
both  ends  of  these  islands  are  pretty  bold,  yoM  may  pass  into  the  anchoring  at  either 
end,  and  ride  nearer  to  Goat  Island  side,  than  to  that  of  Rhode  Island,  as  the 
other  parts  of  the  harbour  are  grassy,  and  would  be  apt  to  choke  your  anchors. 
Rhode  Island  is  navigable  all  round,  by  keeping  in  the  middle  of  the  channel. 

Narraganaet  bay  lies  between  Conannicut  island  and  the  main.  Your  course 
in  is  about  north,  taking  care  to  avoid  Whale  Rock  ;  you  may  pass  in  on  either 
side,  and  anchor  where  you  please.  From  the  light-house  on  Conannicut  island 
to  Gay  Head,  in  Martha's  Vineyard  Island,  the  course  is  E.  by  S.  jj  S.  and  the 
distance  11  leagues. 

If,  after  passing  Point  Judith,  as  before  directed,  you  wish  to  proceed  toward 
Providence  through  the  West  Passage,  your  course  is  N.  E.  leaving  Newport 
light  (on  Conannicut  Island)  on  your  starboard  hand,  half  a  mile  distant,  when 
your  course  will  be  N.  by  W.  li  league  to  Dutch  Island  light.t  which  you  also 
leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  one  quarter  of  a  mile  distant,  from  which  you  steer 
N.  \  E.  14  miles,  for  the  light  on  §Warwick  Neck,  leaving  it  on  the  hirboard 
hand  one-quarter  of  a  mile,  where  you  may  anchor  in  3  fathoms  water,  as  it  is  not 
safe  to  proceed  further  without  a  pilot,  unless  you  choose  to  depend  on  finding 
the  channel,  which  is  marked  out  by  stakes. 

In  little  wind  you  must  take  care  that  the  flood  tide  does  not  carry  you  into 
Buzzard's  Bay,  or  on  the  Sow  and  Pigs.  Providence  is  situated  about  30  miles 
N.  by  W.  i  W.  from  Newport,  and  35  miles  from  the  sea,  being  the  head  navi- 
gation of  Niirraganset  Bay.  Ships  that  draw  from  15  to  18  feet  water,  may 
sail  up  and  down  the  channel,  which  is  marked  out  by  stakes,  erected  at  points 
of  shoals,  and  beds  lying  in  the  river.     [05^  See  the  Plate.] 


tff  I 


i  "IkivUZif, 


*■  Conannicut  Island  lies  about  3  mile  west  of  Newport,  the  south  end  of  which  (called  the 
Beavj^r's  Tail,  on  which  Newport  light-l.  juse  stands/  extends  ubout  as  far  south  as  the  south 
end  of  Rhode  Island.  1'he  light-house  on  Goat  Island  hears  N.  bO*-  E.  from  the  light  on 
Conannicut  Uland,  and  Kettle-bottom  Rock  N.  E.  distant  23  miles.  The  cast  shore  forms 
the  west  part  of  Newport  harbour.  The  ground  the  iight-bousu  stands  upon  is  about  12  feet 
above  the  surface  of  the  sea  at  high  water.  From  the  ground  to  tlie  top  of  the  cornice  is  5U 
feet,  round  which  is  a  gallery,  and  within  that  stands  the  lantern,  which  is  about  11  feet  high, 
and  8  feet  in  diameter.     It  contains  a /xei/  li!i!U. 

I  Goat  Island  lies  before  the  town  of  Newport,  about  5  miles  N.  E.  from  Newport  light,  and 
has  a  liy;ht-bousc  on  the  north  end,  containing  vifixedUghly  from  which  the  following  bearings 
have  been  taken :  Newport  light-house,  bears  S.  tiO  W.  equul  to  S.  W.  by  W .  \  V\ .  distant  .'5 
miles;  west  shore  of  Castle  Hill  S.  54  W.  or  S.  W.  \  VV.  2g  ;  Brenton's  Point,  S.  51  W.  or 
S.W.  half  \V.  1  ;  South  Dumpling  Rock,  S.  70  W.  or  VV.  S.  W.  \\S.  Ife ;  Conannicut  Ferry, 
N.  71  VV.  orV\ .  N.  VV.  i  W.  2^ ;  South  Point  of  Rose  Island,  N.  TiS:  W.  or  N  VV.  by  W. 
4  VV.  5 ;  Gull  Rock,  N.  li^  VV.  or  N.  by  VV.  %  ;  West  ohore  of  Coster's  Harbour  Island, 
N.l|  ;  Buoy  on  north  point  of  Goat  Liland,  N.  50  E.  or  N.  half  E.  \. 

t  Dutch  Island  light- house  is  erected  on  the  south  part  of  the  island,  and  shows  a /xrdiij^Af. 

§  Warwick  Neck  light-hou.se  is  built  on  the  south  part  of  Warwick  Neck,  and  shows  a 
fixed  I'ght. 


10 


iTail,  snd 

1  rock  due 
ck. 

astie  Hill, 
ide  Island 
;  Newport 
ht,  wnich 
i.  (orcon- 
^port  light 
[n  coming 
I  revolving 
'h,  giving 
oat  Island 
a  fort  on 
id  rocky. 
i,  there  is 
rous.  As 
5  at  either 
id,  as  the 
'  anchors, 
hannel. 
ur  course 
on  either 
cut  island 
.  and  the 

d  toward 
Newport 
nt,  when 
lyou  also 
you  steer 
arboard 
it  is  not 
finding 

'ou  into 
30  miles 
id  navi- 
er,  may 
points 


ailed  the 
le  south 

Ight  on 
re  forms 

12  feet 
ice  is  50 
:et  hi^h, 

ght,  and 

)carings 

istant  li 

W.  or 

Ferry, 

by  W. 

Island, 

d  light. 
hows  a 


^wdZij^t.. 


to 


10 


t:./iiMttt  ,i,,'f 


Etitfriived  /i'r  Af  ^nwrii'iui    <\uisf  Ii7of,j 


VftilX,' 


■NT.W-YOI11C;  PUBLISHED   BY  E.ic  G.W BLUNT,  11 


mam 


PfUK     91 


JLISHED   BY  E.ka.W BLUNT,  1827: 


The  fol 
house, 

Block 
Point 
Block 
Block 
Block 
Whale 
Brent( 
South 
Highet 
Brentc 
Fort  01 
South- 
Kettle 
Newto 
N.  B.  T 
N.  E.  by  I 


Direction 


The  firs 
to  Point  J 
Little  *G 
f  Watch  H 
hand,  fron 
S.  W.  whi 
on  your  la 
distance  9| 
light  bears 
§New  Lori 
will  bring 
N.  i  N.  fn 
you  within 
when  you 
4J  miles,  \ 
board  han 


*  Little  G 
through  the 
elevated  50  I 

t  Watch  I 
lantern  is  eli 

t  Stoningt 
t\.^,  and  bea 
Tree  Point  P 
Wicopesset, 
Wamphassro 
84  miles  disi 

§  New'-Loi 
lantern  is  ele 
N.  E.  from  1 

II  There  ar( 
from  the  !igh 
it  is  very  bol 

IT  Eaton's: 
is  50  Tee  t  moi 
300  feet  froix 
from  the  top 

♦*  Sands^ 
Aset  above  thi 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    FILOT. 


03 


The  following  are  the  hearings^  by  compass,  from  Rhode  Island  light- 
house, of  several  remarkable  places,  together  with  the  distances,  viz. 

Block  Island  (S.  E.  point)  S.  W.  by  S.  ^  S. 
Point  Judith  light,  S.  VV.  i  S.  distant  3  leagues. 
.    Block  Island  (S.  E.  point)  S.  VV.  |  S.  or  S.  VV,  by  S.  nearly.        ' 

Block  Island  (middle)  S  W.  ^  S.  distant  S  league.«.  '  :       .. 

Blork  Isl.nd  (S.  E.  end)  S.  W  by  S.  J  S.  .  .,     .. 

Whale  Rock,  VV.  |  S.  ,     .  , 

Brenton's  Reef,  E.  S.  E.  i  E.  '      • 

South  point  i)f  Rhode  Island,  E,  J  S.  -• 

Highest  part  of  Castle  Hill,  E.  N.  E.  i  E. 
Brenton's  Point,  N.  E.  by  E, 
Fort  on  Goat  Island,  E.  N.  E.  J  N. 
South-easternmost  Dumplin,  N.  E.  ^  E. 
Kettle  Bottom,  N.  E. 
Newton's  Rock,  S.  near  200  yards. 
N.  B.  The  anchoring  place  between  the  town  of  Rhode  Island  and  Coster's  Harbour, 
N.  E.  by  E. 


Directions  for  sailing  from  Newport,  through  the  Sound,  to  Hunt's  Har- 
bour, near  Hell-gate. 

The  first  course  from  Newport  light-house  is  S.  W.  by  S.  distant  three  leagues, 
to  Point  Judith  light ;  thence  from  Point  Judith  light,  through  the  Race  to  the 
Little  *Gun  Island  light,  the  course  is  W.  by  S.  16  leagues  distance,  leaving 
tWatch  Hiil  Point  light,  JStonington  light,  and  Fisher's  Island  on  your  starboard 
hand,  from  the  W.  point  of  which  a  dangerous  reef  runs  off  about  one  mi'.e  W. 
S.  W.  which,  in  passing,  you  must  be  careful  to  avoid,  and  the  Little  Gull  light 
on  your  larboard  hand,  which  bear  from  each  other  N.  E.  i  E.  and  S.  W.  |  W. 
distance  9§  miles,  or  you  may  continue  your  W.  by  S.  course  till  the  Little  ©ull 
light  bears  W.  i  N.  3  miles  distant,  and  then  run  N.  W.  2^  miles,  when,  with 
§New  London  light  bearing  N.  distant  2(J  leagues,  you  steer  W.  10  leagues,  which 
will  bring  you  within  2  leagues  of  ||Faulkiand  Island  light,  bearing  about  W.  by 
N.  i  N.  from  you,  when  you  must  steer  W.  S.  W.  12  leagues,  which  will  carry 
you  within  5}  leagues  of  11  Eaton's  Neck  light-house,  bearing  from  you  W.  |  S. 
when  you  must  steer  W.  9  leagues,  then  W.  S.  W.  4  leagues,  after  which  S.  W. 
4J  miles,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  **Sands'  Point  light-house  on  your  lar- 
board hand,  and  the  Execution  Rocks  on  your  starboard  hand,  which  have  a 

*  Little  Gull  light  is  situated  on  Little  Gull  Island,  at  the  entrance  of  Long  Island  Sound, 
through  the  Race.  This  light  may  be  considered  as  the  key  to  the  Sound.  The  lantern  is 
elevated  50  feet  above  the  level  cf  the  sea,  and  contains  a /tree/  light. 

t  Watch  Hill  light  is  situated  on  VVatch  Hill,  at  the  entrance  of  Fisher's  Island  Sound.  The 
lantern  is  elevated  50  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  a  nvohmi;  IWht. 

I  Stonington  light-house  shows  a  fixed  tight,  on  the  extreme  point  of  land  at  Stoning- 
tc.i,  and  bears  from  Watch  Hill  Point  light-house,  N.  W.  ^  VV.  4  miles  distant ;  from  Napon 
Tree  Point  N.  N.  W.  ^  VV.  2i  miles ;  from  Cotomsett  Rocks  N.  by  VV.  I  A  .  3^  miles  ,  from 
VVicopesset,  N.  by  E.  \  E.  3^  miles  ;  from  Latimore's  IJecf,  N.  E.  ^  E.  3^  mi  cs ;  from 
VVamphassrock  Shoal  E.  i  N.  5  of  a  mile  ;  from  North  Hummock  or  Dumplin,  E.  by  N.  |  N. 
84  miles  distant. 

§  New-London  light  is  situated  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  on  the  western  side.  The 
lantern  is  elevated  80  foot  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  a  fixed  light,  and  bears  £. 
N.  E.  from  Little  Gull  light,  about  5  leagues. 

II  There  are  two  of  the  Faulkland  islanils,  on  the  largest  of  which  is  a  light-hotisc;  S.  E. 
from  the  light,  four  miles  distant  you  will  have  'i  and  4  fathoms,  and  on  the  S.  and  E.  sides 
it  is  very  bold.  The  light-liouse  contains  a. fixed  light,  elevated  75  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

IT  Eaton's  Neck  light  house  stands  on  an  eminence,  about  73  Icet  hig^' ;  the  height  of  the  walls 
is  50  feet  more  ;  the  whole  height  fromhigh  water  mukk  to  the  light  is  1?6  feet.  It  stands  about 
300  feet  from  high  water  mark,  is  a  sing\e  fixed  light,  and  painted  black  and  white  in  stripes, 
from  the  top  to  the  bottom. 

♦*  Sands  Point  light-house  is  at  the  head  of  Long  Island  Sonnd,  containing  a  lantern  40 
'eet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  showing  &  fixed  light. 


Hi 


94 


BLUNT  3    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


white  spar  buoy  on  them  in  19  feet  water.  In  case  of  a  flood  tide'and  a  south- 
rrly  wind,  when  you  come  through  the  Race,  your  course  should  be  W.  until 
you  come  up  with  Eaton's  Neck  light,  taiiing  care  to  make  proper  allowance  for 
the  tide,  which  runs  very  strong,  and  Hows  on  the  change  and  full  days  of  the 
moon  half  past  1 1  o'clock,  and  the  water  rises  5  or  6  feet. 

If  you  are  compelled  to  make  a  harbour  in  Stoiiington,  coming  from  the  east- 
ward, bring  the  iiglit  to  bear  N.  by  E.  after  getting  within  Watch  Hill  Point,  and 
steer  N.  but  the  lead  must  be  kept  going,  and  the  passage  is  not  to  be  recom- 
nended. 

If  you  are  bound  into  New-London,  after  getting  to  the  northward  of  the  S. 
W.  part  of  Fisher's  Island,  keep  Neiv  London  light  bearing  from  N.  N.  W.  to 
N.  N.  E.  if  you  are  beating  to  windward,  but  if  the  wind  is  fair,  bring  the  light 
to  bear  N.  when  at  the  distance  of  2  leagues,  and  run  directly  for  it ;  leave  it  on 
your  larboard  hand  in  running  in ;  when  in,  you  may  have  good  anchoring  in  4 
or  5  fathoms  water,  clayey  bottom.  In  coming  out  of  New-London,  when  you 
have  left  the  harbour,  bring  the  light  to  bear  N.  N.  E.  and  steer  directly  S.  S. 
W.  till  you  come  into  15  fathoms  water,  in  order  to  clear  a  reef  that  lies  on  your 
starboard  hand,  when  the  N.  part  of  Fisher's  Island  will  bear  E.  distant  2 
leagues.  If  a  ship  could  have  a  fair  departure  from  the  middle  of  the  Race,  and 
was  compelled  to  run  in  a  dark  night,  or  thick  weather,  the  best  course  would  be 
W.  to  *Stratford  Point,  and  would  afford  the  largest  run  of  any  one  course.  If 
bound  up  Sound,  steer  W.  by  S.  28  leagues, 'which  will  carry  you  past  fOld  Field 
Point  light,  and  up  with  Eaton's  neck,  on  which  also  is  a  light-house,  both 
which  are  on  the  larboard  hand.  If  you  happen  to  get  on  the  N.  shore,  take  par- 
ticular care  to  keep  at  the  distance  of  three  leagues,  in  order  to  avoid  the  reefs  and 
shoals  that  lie  along  the  shore. 

About  8  leagues  E.  by  N.  ^  N  .rem  Eaton's  Neck  light,  S.  by  W.from  Stratford 
Point  light,  and  N.  by  E.  from  Old  Field  Point  light,  lies  a  tShoal  or  Middle 
Grouni,  called  Stratford  Shoal,  on  which  there  are  but  two  feet  of  water  at  low 
water.  On  the  south  side  of  this  shoal  is  a  Avhite  spar  buoy,  and  on  the  north 
side  a  black  spar  buoy,  both  in  nineteen  feet  water.  You  may  go  on  either 
side  of  the  shoal  you  please  ;  on  th^:-.  N.  are  from  3  to  7  fathoms  ;  on  the  S.  aide 
from  12  to  17  fathoms  water.  A  ledge  lies  oflFthe  N.  E.  part  of  Eaton's  Neck,  1 
^ile  distant.  When  up  with  Stratford  Point,  Old  Field  Point  light-house  (which 
contains  a  Jixed  tight)  will  bear  S.  by  W.  and  you  must  not  approach  Long<lsland 
shojre  when  to  the  eastward  of  Old  Field  Point  light,  nigher  than  to  have  this  light 
W.  by  S.  If  bound  up  Sound,  from  the  middle  of  the  Race,  steer  W.  by  S.  28 
leagui  3,  which  will  carry  you  past  Old  Field  Point  light  and  up  with  Eaton's  Neck 
light,  both  of  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand.  In  running  this  course, 
you  will  leave  Faulkland  Islands  on  your  starboard  hand.  You  may  go  as  near 
Long  Island,  generally,  as  2  or  3  miles,  without  any  danger,  and  in  passing  Crane 
Neck,  (or  Old  Field  Point  light)  Eaton's  Neck  light  bearing  W.  i  N.  have  6 
fathoms  water ;  as  soon  as  you  have  passed  the  Point,  you  deepen  into  10 
fathoms.  Eaton's  Neck  light  and  Old  Field  Point  light  bear  E.  and  W.  from 
each  other,  23  miles  distant. 

From  Eaton's  Neck  to  Lloyd's  Neck,  the  course  is  W.  i  N.  5  mUes;  between 
which  lies  a  deep  bay,  called  Huntington's  Bay.  where  a  ship  of  any  size  may 
anchor  with  safety,  keeping  the  eastern  shore  aboard.     From  Lloyd's  Neck  to 

*  On  Strjtford  Point  is  a  light-houst  containing  a  revolving  light.  The  revolution  is  such 
as  to  exhibit  the  light  once  in  90  seconds.  It  bears  from  Old  Field  Point  light  N  by  E.  from 
r>'eiy  Haven  'ight  VV.  S.  W.  distant  about  14  miles  :  and  from  Black  Kock  light  N.  E.  about 
4  miles. 

t  A  light-bo  ise  is  erected  on  Old  Field  Point  (Long  Island)  showing  a  fixed  light,  bear- 
ing S.  by  VV.  from  the  light-house  on  Stratford  Point  and  the  shoal  cdlcd  Middle  Ground, 
which  is  equi-distant  from  the  two  lights,  and  East  from  Eaton's  Neck  light,  23  miles  distant. 

J  Bearings  of  the  &7ioai.~Stratfotd  Point,  N.  N.  \V,  Motnit  Misery  S.  ^  VV.  Grove rs 
Hill,  (near  Black  Rock  harbour)  N.  W.  The  length  of  the  shoal,  1  league,  running  N.  by 
E.  and  S.  by  W.  Light-house  on  Eaton's  neck,  VV.  by  S.  J  S.  The  shallowest  part  is  near 
the  middle  of  the  shoal,  from  whence  the  observations  were  taken,  wLero  there  arc  2  feet 
water  in  common  tides.  The  centre  of  the  shoal  is  near  the  middle  of  the  Sound.  A  light- 
fjouse  is  erected  on  Strntford  Point,  as  above  described. 


Matin 

rowin 

Sand's 

a  bay 

ern  sh 

of  a 

buoy 

avoid. 

Sand's 

which, 


\' 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


9A 


Matinecock  Point,  the  course  is  W.  by  S.  distant  10  miles,  good  soundings,  bor- 
rowing on  Long  Island  to  7  fathoms.  The  course  from  Slutinccock  Point  to 
Sand's  Point  light  is  W.  S.  W.  distant  2  leagues;  between  these  two  points  is 
a  bay  called  Herastead's  Bay,  in  which  is  excellent  anchoring,  kee,iing  the  east- 
ern shore  aboard.  To  the  northward  of  Sand's  Point  light,  distant  one  quarter 
of  a  league,  lie  the  Ei^ecution  Rocks,  (as  before  mentioned,  with  i'  white  spai 
buoy  on  them)  with  a  board  pointing  to  the  S.  W.  which  you  must  take  care  to 
avoid,  leaving  them  on  your  starboard  hand,  about  one-eighth  of  a  mile.  From 
Sand's  Point  light  the  course  is  S.  W.  4  miles  to  Hart  Island,  to  the  west  of 
which,  between  that  and  City  Island,  there  is  good  anchorage  for  vessels  of  any 
size.  If  a  vessel,  in  making  this  course  good,  is  obliged  to  run  to  windward, 
they  must  be  careful  of  two  rocks,  one  called  Gangway  Rock,  which  bears  W. 
28°  S.  from  Sand's  Point  light-house,  distant  about  \\  mila,  with  a  black  spar 
buoy  floating  perpendicular,  in  18  feet  water,  which  should  be  left  on  the  larboard 
hand,  and  the  other  called  Success  Rock,  bearing  N.  W.  by  N.  from  the  east 
bluff  of  Cow  Bay,  half  a  mile  distant,  on  w^hich  an  iron  spindle  is  erected.  On 
Gangway  Rock,  which  runs  quite  to  a  point,  there  are  only  G  feet  at  low  water, 
making  it  very  dangerous.  Success  Rock  is  bare  at  low  water;  between  the  two 
there  is  a  cbaimel  of  about  2^  fathoms ;  they  bear  from  each  other  N.  40*^  W.  and 
S.  40°  E.  distant  about  one-third  of  a  mile.  The  course  from  Hart  Island  to 
*Throg'8  Point  light  is  S.  S.  W.  distant  two  leagues,  taking  care  to  avoid  the 
Stepping  Stones  (on  which  is  a  black  spar  buoy  in  19  feet  water)  which  lie  on 
your  larboard  hand,  and  are  steep  too ;  the  soundings  on  your  starboard  hantl 
are  regular  to  3  fathoms.  In  passing  Throg's  Point  lisjht,  bound  to  the  westward, 
you  must  not  haul  up  until  you  have  passed  it  one-eighth  of  a  mile,  and  when  the 
light  bears  N.  W.  steer  W.  which  will  carry  you  in  mid-channel.  A  Shoal  ex- 
tends S.  S.  E.  15  rods  from  Throg's  Point,  which  will  be  avoided  by  following 
the  above  directions.  From  Throg's  Point  to  Hunt's  Harbour,  the  course  is  W. 
keepinf  as  near  the  middle  of  the  Sound  as  you  can  conveniently. 


Oyster  Bay  and  Huntington, 

"  Are  principal  harbours  on  the  north  shore  of  Long  Island,  al)out  10  leagues  to 
the  eastward  of  Hell-Gate.  The  channel  into  Oyster  Bay  lies  over  towards 
Lloyd's  Neck,  until  you  have  passed  the  tail  of  the  Middle  (which  is  a  sand-flat 
extending  from  Hog  Island  towards  the  neck,  within  the  distance  of  180  fathoms) 
thence  the  bay  is  clear  with  good  anchorage  throughout. 


Huntington  Bay, 

Has  a  fair  entrance  and  sound  ground.  There  are  from  d  to  4  fathoms  of 
water,  muddy  bottom,  within  Lloyd's  Harbour  on  the  W.  and  Cow  Harbour 
on  the  E.  side  of  the  Bay.  Fresh  N.  E.  winds  will  s\vcil  the  tides,  which  com- 
monly rise  about  7  feet  perpendicular  to  1 0  or  11  feet. 


light- 


Hell-Gate, 

And  the  narrow  ^ass  leading  into  Long  Island  Sound,  at  the  time  of  slack  wa- 
ter, and  a  leading  wind,  may  safely  be  attempted  with  frigates.  Small  ships  and 
vessels,  with  a  commanding  breeze,  pass  at  all  time^with  the  tide.  On  the  flood, 
bound  into  the  Sound,  you  pass  to  the  southward  of  the  Flood  Rock,  which  is 
the  southernmost  of  the  three  remarkable  rocks  in  the  passage.  On  the  ebb, 
you  go  the  northward  of  the  Mill  Rock,  thr  stream  of  the  tide  settmg  that  way, 
and  forming  eddies  in  the  flood  passage,  which  at  that  time  is  rendered  unsafe. 
The  Pot,  on  which  there  are  10  feet  at  low  water,  shows  distinctly  by  the 
whirlpools,  as  also  the  Pan,  which  is  a  part  of  the  Hog's  Back. 

*  A  light-house,  showing  a  fixed  light,  is  on  the  eaetem  port  of  Throg's  JVecfr.  The 
height  of  the  tower  is  40  feet  from  the  surface  of  the  ground. 


/ 


% 


BLUNT  S    AMEKICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


Directions  from  Block  Island  to  Gardner's  Bay. 


Montock  Poiat,  the  easternmost  part  of  Long  Island  which  has  a  lisht-house 
on  it,  is  7  leagues  W.  hy  S.  from  the  S.  W.  point  of  Bluck  Island  ;  between  the 
island  and  the  point,  tliereare  16  and  18  fathoms  water.  As  you  approach  the 
point,  you  will  quick!  v  come  into  9,  7,  and  5  fathoms  water.  A  flat  runs  off  from 
the  above  point,  on  the  outer  part  of  which  are  5  fathoms  water,  rocky  bottom, 
and  S.  by  W.  from  the  light,  9  miles  distant,  lies  Frishie's  Ledge,  extendmg  N.  W. 
and  S.  E  4  miles,  with  from  8  to  15  fathoms  on  it,  hard  rocky  bottom,  and  deep 
water  very  near. 

Between  Montock  Point  and  Block  Island,  there  is  a  shoal  with  only  4J  fathoms 
on  its  shoalest  part,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  in  moderate  gales  from  the  south- 
ward. It  lies  nearly  half  way  between  the  point  of  Montock,  and  the  S.  W.  part 
of  the  island.  W.  by  S.  from  the  latter,  and  about  E.  I  N.  from  the  *light-houso 
on  Montock,  distant  H  miles,  you  suddenly  shoal  your  water  from  13  to  6  fa- 
thoms on  the  N.  W.  side  of  the  shoal,  and  before  you  get  a  second  cast  of  the 
lead  you  are  over  the  shoalest  part,  into  7,  8,  10,  and  12,  and  then  into  14  fathoms. 
The  rippling  of  the  tide  is  very  conspicuous  when  approaching  the  shoal  in  fine 
weather,  and  the  sea  breaks  on  it  so  in  bad  weather  that,  even  in  small  vessels,  it 
is  recommended  to  avoid  coming  near  it,  especially  in  southerly  or  S.W.  gales. 
You  will  suddenly  shoal  from  !3  to  9  fathoms,  and  Montock  light  bearing  W.  |  S. 
3  miles  distant,  you  will  have  5i  fathoms.  The  soundings  from  the  shoal  towards 
Montock  are  6,  9,  14,  13,  11,  10  and  9  fathoms.  Towards  the  light-house  when 
it  bears  from  W.  to  S.  W.  by  W.  the  bottom  is  strong ;  towards  the  shoal  the 
bottom  is  coarse  sand,  and  a  very  strong  tide.  A  shoal  runs  off  from  the  north 
side  of  Block  Island,  2  miles. 

From  Montock  Point,  a  Reef  runs  off  in  a  N.  E.  direction.  Si  miles,  having  a 
bed  of  rocks  on  its  outer  end,  with  10  and  8  feet  on  them,  on  which  the  sea 
constantly  breaks  or  the  tide  causes  a  great  rippling.  They  may  be  easily  avoid- 
ed by  keeping  a  good  lead  going.  In  rounding  Montock,  come  no  nearer  than 
9  fiithoms,  or  keep  the  two  bluffs,  or  high  parts  of  the  land  (to  the  westward  of 
Montock)  open  one  of  the  other,  until  Willis'  Point  comes  open  of  Montock 
False  Point.  These  marks  will  carry  you  clear  of  all  the  shoals  in  Si  and  9 
fathoms,  and  a  N.  by  W.  course  will  then  carry  you  clear  of  the  Shagwanganoc 
Reef,  which  lies  N.  W.  h  N.  5i  miles  from  Montock  light-house,  and  has  6  feet 
on  its  shoalest  part,  6  fathoms  on  the  N.  E.  and  N.  W.  side,  3  and  4  fathoms  on 
the  S.  E.  and  S.  W.  side,  and  3,  4,  and  5  fathoms  between  the  shoal  and  Montock 
False  Point.  The  tides  set  strong  round  Montock  Point:  the  flood  N.  E.  and 
ebb  to  the  contrary.  At  the  Sha{,-wanganoc  the  flood  sets  W.  by  S.  and  ebb 
to  the  contrary.  When  on  the  Shagwanganoc  in  6  feet,  anchored  a  boat,  and 
took  the  following  marks. 

1.  Willis'  Point  in  a  line  with  the  westernmost  point  of  Fort  Pond  Bay,  or 
the  bay  closed  by  the  points  being  brought  in  a  line  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W. 

S.  Montock  False  Point  S.  about  3  miles. 

3.  The  White  Cliff,  or  high  sand  hilis  on  the  west  end  of  Fisher's  Island,  call- 
ed Mount  Prospect.    N.  by  W.  i  W. 

4.  The  Gull  Islands  W.  N.  W.  and  the  bluff  sand  cliff  of  Gardiner's  Inland, 
W.  S.  W.  i  W.  Montock  False  Point  is  3  miles  N.  W.  from  the  light-house. 
Willis'  Point  is  the  easternmost  point  of  Fort  Pond  Bay. 

In  rounding  Montock  in  the  night  (when  the  land  or  light  can  be  seen)  with 
westerly  gales,  you  may  anchor  when  the  light-house  bears  S.  W.  by  S.  in  8  or  9 
fathoms,  coarse  sand.  Having  brought  Montock  to  the  southward  of  west,  the 
weather  thick,  you  cannot  clearly  ascertain  the  distance  you  are  from  the  point; 
the  lead  must  be  your  guide.  Steer  as  high  as  W.  N.  W.  until  you  have  got  into 
9  fathoms.  Steer  off  again  into  13,  and  if  you  suddenly  shoal  from  10  to  6. 
steer  off  E.  by  N.  until  you  are  in  11  or  IS,  which  suddenly  deepens  (as  a  bank 

*  The  light-bouse  on  Montock  Point  is  on  the  east  end  of  Long  Island,  bearing  W.  by  S. 
rrom  the  S.  \\.  puint  of  Block  Island,  7  leagues  distant.  From  Montock  light  house  to  the 
west  point  of  Fisher's  Island,  N.  N.  W.  S  leagues  distant.  The  light-house  contains  %  fixed 
ght,  eleyated  100  feet  above  the  Icrel  of  the  sea,  and  may  be  seen  9  or  10  leagues. 


o4"  not  mol 
and  a  goo^ 
ing  off  intq 
having  soi 
and  bounc 
Pond  Bay| 
may  then 
pass  betw<| 
The  Mk 
on  the  slJ 
fathoms  wl 
a4tid  S.  by  [ 
dually  frotl 
miles  froiiT 
by  S.  lOi 
from  Mouj 
The  tide  iiJ 
rocks  in  tlJ 
back  of  N 
to  the  east 
Island)  wil 
and  in  8  or 
calm  or  lit! 
too  near. 

Being  be 
the  lig^t  ot 
Fisher's  Is 


;ap  on 


Pol 
Race  rock 
are  17  feet 
Gull  light, 
eastward  o 
of  the  mid 
then  steer 

About  4 
ing  N.  W. 
dangerous. 

S.  by  W 
10,  11,  an 

In  the  ol 
10,  full  anti 

Montocli 
wanganoc 
viously  del 
bay.  Thii 
clear  and  ^ 
you  may  I 
in  the  mid< 
there  "is  a  ] 

The  N. 
point.  Wl 
sandy:  th 
the  south 
have  12  Ol 
in  Montuc 
N.  froiii  tl 

The  en 
Island,  an 
toward  N' 
«)f  Plumb 

+  A  liarhl 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


97 


or 


S. 
the 

Ixed 


oi  not  more  than  54  fathoms,  extends  from  the  N.  E.  Reef  to  the  Shagesagonuc) 
and  a  good  lead  kept  going  will  prevent  you  going  too  near  these  shoals,  hy  steer- 
ing off  into  12  and  13  fathoms,  before  you  attempt  to  steer  to  the  westward,  after 
having  sounded  in  6  or  7  fathoms.  In  the  day-time,  having  rounded  Mnntock, 
and  bound  to  Gardner's  Bay,  steer  N.  by  VV.  until  you  clearly  discover  that  Fort 
Pond  Bay,  and  the  red  cliff  on  the  western  Point,  are  open  of  Willis'  Point;  you 
may  then  steer  W.  by  S.  for  the  bluff  point  of  Gardner's  Island,  and  you  will 
pass  between  the  Shagwanganoc  and  Middle  Ground  (or  Cerlierus  Shoals.) 

The  Middle  Ground  (or  Cerberus)  is  a  rocky  ishoal,  having  from  2|  to  5  fathoms 
on  the  shoalest  part:  the  north  and  east  sides  are  steep,  having  10  and  15 
fathoms  within  half  a  cable's  length  of  the  shoalest  part.  It  extends  N.  by  E. 
and  S.  by  W.  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  The  south  and  west  sides  shoalen  gra- 
dually from  13,  10,  9,  8,  7,  to  5  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.-  It  lies  N.  W.  by  N.  9.^ 
miles  from  Montock  light-house;  E.  S.  E.  9  miles  from  the  Gull  light;  S.  W. 
by  S.  lOii  miles  from  the  light-house  on  Watch  hill  point;  Gj  miles  8.  by  E.  }  E. 
from  Mount  Prospect,  or  the  high  sand  hills  on  the  west  end  of  Fisher's  Island. 
The  tide  in  general  makes  a  great  rippling  over  the  shoalest  part.  To  avoid  these 
rocks  in  the  day  time,  observe  a  conspicuous  hill  with  a  notch  in  its  centre,  at  the 
back  of  New-London,  called  Pole's  hill.  This  kept  a  ship's  length  open,  either 
to  the  eastward  or  westward  of  Mount  Prospect,  (or  the  sand  hills  of  Fisher's 
Island)  will  keep  clear  of  the  rocky  shoal,  in  10  or  15  fathom'  to  the  eastward, 
and  in  8  or  9  fathoms  to  the  westward.  The  tide  sets  strong  over  the  shoal.  In 
calm  or  little  winds,  ships  should  anchor  before  any  of  the  marks  or  bearings  are 
too  near. 

Being  bound  for  New-Lond(m,  and  having  brought  the  Gull  light  W.  by  N.  or 
the  light  on  Watch  hill,  N.  E.  steer  so  as  to  oP"n  New-London  light-house  of 
Fisher's  Island ;  and  when  the  spire  of  New-London  church  is  in  one  with  the 
gap  on  Pole's  hill,  steering  with  it  in  that  direction  will  carry  you  between  the 
Race  rock  (on  which  is  a  spindle  or  beacon)  and  the  middle  Race  rock,  on  which 
are  17  feet  at  half  flood,  and  lies  about  half  way  from  the  Race  beacon  and  the 
Gull  light,  or  you  may  bring  New-London  light-house  a  sail's  breadth  to  the 
eastward  of  the  church  spire,  bearing  N.  5°  E.  will  carry  you  to  the  westward 
of  the  middle  Race  rock,  or  between  that  and  the  Gull  light-house.  You  may 
then  steer  direct  for  New-London  light-house. 

About  4  miles  within  Montock  point,  IJ  mile  from  the  shore,  lies  a  reef,  bear- 
ing N.  W.  i  N.  from  the  point,  on  which  there  art*.  C  feet  Avater,  which  is  very 
dangerous. 

S.  by  W.  about  9  miles  from  Montock  light,  is  a  small  fishing  bank,  having  8, 
10,  11,  and  15  fathoms  on  it,  before  mentioned. 

In  the  oiling,  between  Montock  and  Block  Island,  it  is  high  water  at  half  past  ' 
10,  full  and  change,  but  on  the  shore  two  hours  sooner. 

Montock  False  point  is  about  S  miles  N.  W.  from  the  true  point.  The  Shag- 
Avanganoc  or  Six  Feet  Rocky  shoal,  lies  N.  3  miles  from  it,  and  has  been  pre- 
viously described.  Willis'  point  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  of  Fort  Pond 
bay.  This  bay  is  very  convenl«Mit  for  wooding  and  watering ;  the  ground  is 
clear  and  good,  and  you  may  anelior  in  any  depth  you  please.  In  a  large  ship 
you  may  bring  Willis'  point  to  bear  N.  K.  and  even  N.  E.  by  N.  and  then  have 
in  the  middle  about  7  fathoms  water.  Near  tlie  shore  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay 
there *is  a  pondof  fresh  water. 

The  N.  E.  part  of  Gardner's  island  is  5i  leagues  W\  N.  W.  from  Montock 
point.  With  westerly  wind^you  may  anchor  off  this  part  of  the  island,  which  is 
sandy :  the  marks  for  anchoring  are  the  high  lands  of  *Plumb  Island  N.  W.  and 
the  south  part  of  Gardner's  Island  in  sight,  bearing  S.  by  W.  or  S.;  you  will 
have  12  or  10  fathoms  water.  The  bottom  is  sind  and  mud.  About  4  miles  with- 
in Montock  point,  one  and  a  half  m>!e  from  the  shore,  lies  a  reef  bearing  N.  W.  J^ 
N.  froni  the  '^ioint,  on  whir'i  tiiere  are  6  feet  water,  which  is  very  dangerous. 

The  entrance  of  Gardner's  bay  is  formed  by  the  north  end  of  Gardner's 
Island,  and  the  south  end  of  Plumb  Island.  If  you  are  bound  through  the  Sound 
toward  New- York,  your  passage  from  Gardner's  bay  is  between  the  wii*.i  end 
of  Plumb  Island  and  Oyster  Pond,  through  which  channel  you  will  imve  from  4 

*■  A  liyht-hoiisc  is  to  be  built  on  the  west  end  of  this  iehnd.    [See  Appendix.] 


m 

1'^ 

r; . 

1' 

/ 

^ 

' 

> 

n 


98 


BLUiNT'S  AMERICAJi  COAST  PILOT. 


fo  20  fathoms  water.  When  Roing  into  the  bay,  you  may  go  within  a  cable'.M 
length  of  Gardner's  Island,  where  you  will  have  10  fathoms  water.  You  should 
be  careful  not  to  go  too  nigh  Gull  rock,  as  there  is  a  rocky  spot  one  and  a  half 
mile  from  it,  on  which  there  are  three  fathoms  at  low  water.  This  shoal  lies 
with  the  following  murks  and  bearings,  vix.—- a  house  on  Plumb  Island,  (standing 
about  one-third  of  the  way  between  the  middle  and  the  N.  E.  end)  on  with  the 
noithernmost  of  liie  two  trees  which  appear  beyond  the  house ;  the  north  end 
of  Gull  Island  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  or  N.  by  W.  i  W. ;  and  the  southernmost  end 
of  Plamb  Island,  on  with  the  northernmost  point  of  Long  Island.  In  order  to 
avoid  this  rock,  when  going  into,  or  coming  out  of  Gardner's  bay,  you  must  be 
sure  to  keep  the  south  point  of  Plumb  Island  open  of  the  N.  W.  point  of  Long 
Island,  whilst  the  house  on  Plumb  Island  is  on  with  the  northernmost  of  the  two 
trees  as  before  mentioned.  There  are  several  trees,  but  they  appear,  when  view- 
ed at  a  distance,  to  be  only  two  trees.  This  shoal  is  called  by  some,  the  Bed- 
ford rock,  because  the  English  ship  Bedford  grounded  on  it,  August  15,  1780. 
E.  by  N.  one  league  from  Plumb  Island,  lies  a  dangerous  reef,  which  extends  to 
the  Gull  Islands,  and  the  passage  between  is  not  fit  to  be  attempted,  as  there  are 
several  rocks,  some  of  which  may  be  seen.  In  Gardner's  bay  you  may  anchor 
in  what  depth  of  water  you  please,  from  5  to  8  fathoms. 

On  the  S.  W.  side  of  Gardner's  Island  there  is  very  good  riding.  If  you  are 
to  the  eastward  of  this  island,  with  an  easterly  wind,  and  wish  to  take  shelter  un- 
der the  S.  W.  side,  you  must  give  the  N.  W.  end  of  the  island  a  large  birth,  as 
above  directed,  and  as  you  open  the  west  side  of  the  island,  you  may  haul  round 
the  N.  W.  point,  and  anchor  where  you  please.    The  soundings  are  regular. 

Ships,  in  turning  up  into  Gardner's  bay,  and  standing  to  the  southward,  will 
observe  a  single  conspicuous  tree  on  the  S.  E.  part  rf  r?umb  Island,  and  tack- 
ing before  it  is  brought  to  touch  the  south  end  of  ^he  wotd  on  Plumb  Island, 
will  avoid  tlie  Superb's  '•eef,  which  lies  E.  by  N.  i  N.  fron'  the  low  point  on 
Gardner's  Island,  one-third  of  a  mile  distant.  It  then  extena  <  S.  E.  by  E.  about 
two-thirds  of  a  mile,  and  is  about  £00  yards  broad  :  Three  fathoms  on  the  mid- 
dle, 6  fathoms  close  to  the  N.  W.  end,  4,  4<|,  and  5  fathoms  close  to  the  S.  E. 
end,  5  and  6  fathoms  close  to  the  east  side,  lying  parallel  with  the  low  point  of 
the  island.  To  avoid  this  shoal,  the  leading  mark  into  Gardner's  bay  is  to  ket-p 
Plumb  Gut  a  ship's  breadth  open.  Stand  to  the  northward  until  Plumb  Gut  is 
nearly  closing  on  the  N.  E.  bluff  of  Long  Island,  nearly  touching  the  S.  E.  point 
of  Plumb  Island,  and  until  New-London  light-house  is  brought  to  the  north  and 
west  of  the  Gull  light-house,  but  tack  before  the  points  close,  or  stand  into  no 
less  than  7  fathoms  water,  otherwise  you  may  shoot  over  on  the  Bedford  reef, 
which  is  a  bed  of  rocks,  about  30  yards  wide  and  400  long,  lying  S.  E.  and  N. 
W.  ;vith  16  or  17  feet  on  its  shoalest  part.  You  may  anchor  in  Gardner's  bay  in 
5  or  6  fathoms.  New-London  light-house  kept  a  ship's  breadth  open  to  the 
eastward  of  Plumb  Island,  will  run  you  up  into  the  middle  of  the  bay,  in  the 
deepest  water,  and  out  of  the  tide.  Ships  going  in  through  the  Race,  or  going 
out  of  New-London,  in  order  to  avoid  the  Middle  Race  rock  (which  has  only  17 
feet  on  it  at  half  flood,  and  lies  about  half  way  from  tlie  Race  beacon  and  thn 
Gull  light-house)  having  from  SO  to  33  fathoms  on  the  north  side,  and  from  10 
to  30  on  its  south  side,  should  observe  the  following  marks: — Going  out  of  the 
roads,  and  to  the  westward  of  the  rock,  which  is  the  best  channel,  bring  the  spire 
of  New-London  church  a  sail's  breadth  open  to  the  westward  of  the  light-house : 
keep  this  mark  until  a  grove  ot  trees,  standing  on  a  high  hill  on  Fisher's  Island, 
comes  on  with  the  east  side  of  Mount  Prospect,  or  the  white  sand  hills,  on  the 
S.  W.  side  of  Fisher's  Island,  N.  60°  E.  or  the  Gull  light  W.  S.  W.  The  tide 
fioi^sat  the  Gull  llh.  30m.  full  and  change. 

T?o  go  to  the  northward  of  this  rock,  and  to  the  southward  of  Race  rock  bea- 
con, bring  New-London  church  spire  in  one  with  the  middle  of  the  gap  on  Pole's 
hill  at  the  back  of  New-London  N.  8°  W.  Keep  this  mark  until  Watch-hill 
light-house  comes  a  little  open  of  the  south  side  of  Fisher's  Island  N.  70°  E.  and 
#h«il  the  Gull  light-house  is  in  one  with  the  middle  of  Great  Gull  Island  S.  7S<^ 
Vf .  you  are  then  to  the  eastward  of  the  rock.  Coming  up  the  Sound  through 
tbte  Race,  bring  Watch-hill  light-house  just  open  of  the  south  side  of  Fisher's 
island,  until  the  south  Buraplin  comes  open  to  the  northward  of  the  north  part 


of  FisI 
to  the 
Londoi 
just  op 
*New- 
you  wi 

Goin 
rock, 
New-L 
house 

The 
don  chi 
You  mt 


bLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAbX  J»ILOT. 


99 


of  Fisher's  laland,  or  until  New-London  light-house  bears  north ;  you  are  then 
to  the  westward  of  the  Race  rock,  and  may  steer  for  the  light-house  of  New- 
London,  and  anchor  in  the  roads,  with  Motitock  li<;ht-house  S.  E.  by  S.  then 
just  open  of  the  west  point  of  Fisher's  Island,  Gull  light-house  S.  W.  by  S.  and 
'New-London  light-house  N.  by  W.  and  the  gap  and  spire  of  the  church  in  one; 
you  \vill  have  12  fathoms,  stiff  clay  bottom. 

Going  to  the  westward  through  the  Race,  and  to  the  southAvard  of  the  Race 
rock,  steer  for  the  Gull  light-house,  keeping  it  to  the  northward  of  west  until 
New-London  light-house  bears  N.  i  E.  then  steer  for  it,  leaving  the  Gull  light- 
house half  a  mile  on  the  larboard  hand. 

The  above  to  be  observed  in  case  the  weather  should  be  thick,  and  New-Lon- 
don church  spire  not  to  be  seen,  or  when  the  Gull  light-house  bears  S.  by  W. 
You  may  then  steer  N.  N.  E.  for  the  roads,  making  allowances  for  tides,  which 
are  very  strong  in  the  Race.  Flood  runs  to  the  westward  till  llh.  SOtn.  full 
and  change  days  of  the  moon  ;  but  in  New-London  roads  only  9h.  30m.  It 
rises  5  or  6  f°!et  spring  tides.  The  flood  sets  through  the  roads,  first  half  flood 
W.  N.  W.  last  half  W.  S.  W.  El)b,  first  quarter,  sets  S.  S.  E.  tlie  last  three 
quarters  S.  E.  for  the  S.  W.  point  of  Fisher's  Island.  \ 

To  go  through  Plumb  Gut  to  the  westward,  give  Pine  point,  which  is  steep, 
a  birth  of  3j  cable's  length,  and  steer  so  as  to  bring  the  north  bluff  of  Plumb 
Island  N.  by  W.  i  W.  Keep  it  in  that  bearing  until  you  have  brought  the  poplar 
tree  clear  of  the  east  end  of  Mr.  Jerome's  house,  or  until  you  have  got  Pine 
point  to  the  southward  of  east ;  you  will  then  observe  a  wood  close  inland  of 
the  high  bluff  of  Long  Island,  which  when  bearing  W.  i  S.  will  be  in  one  witli 
the  rp^y  point,  which  is  the  next  point  to  the  Oyster  Pond  point.  Steering 
with  the  wood  and  this  point  in  one,  will  carry  you  clear  of  the  reef,  which  lies 
off  the  north  bluff. 

In  running  through  to  the  eastward,  keep  the  point  over  the  middle  of  the 
wood  before-mentioned,  until  the  poplar  tree  is  to  the  west  end  of  the  house ; 
then  steer  to  the  southward,  giving  Pine  point  a  birth,  as  before.  Pine  point  E. 
i  S.  will  lead  clear  of  the  shoals  coming  to  the  eastward. 

The  tide  runs  6  or  7  knots  in  the  Gut.  The  flood  sets  about  N.  N.  W.  and 
the  ebb  S.  S.  E.    It  flows  at  10  o'clock  in  the  full  and  diange  days  of  the  moon. 

Marks  for  the  Valiant^ s  or  Middle  Race  rock,  which  has  only  17  ftet  on  it  at  half 
Jlaod,  and  lies  cAout  half-way  from  the  Race  beacon,  and  the  Gull  light-house. 

1.  New-London  li^^ht-house  in  one  wi:jh  two  conspicuous  trees,  which  stand 
on  the  declivity  of  a  hill,  at  the  back  of  New-London,  being  remarkable,  for  a 
gap  on  its  summit,  N.  4°  W. 

2.  The  west  side  of:  the  south  Dumplin  just  touching  with  Ihe  north  bill  or 
point  of  Fisher's  Island  N.  41°  E. 

S.  The  east  bluff  point  of  the  Great  Gull  island  in  one  with  the  west  lower 
extreme  of  Little  Gull  island,  or  the  Gull  light-house,  a  small  sail's  breadth  open 
to  the  eastward  of  the  east  part  of  Great  Gull  Island  S.  64°  W. 

4.  The  north  end  of  Long  Island  just  shut  in  with  the  N.  W.  point  of  Plumb 
Island  S.  76°  W.  Gull  light-he  ise  Si  63°  v/.  and  Mount  Prospect  or  High  White 
sand  hills  on  Fisher's  Island.  N.  60°  E. 

Marks  for  the  New-Bedford  reef,  a  bed  of  rocks  about  30  yards  broad,  and  40)» 
yt'rds  IffAg,  lying  S.  E.  and  N.  W.  with  16  or  17  feet  on  its  shoalest  part. 

I.  TheN.  E.  end  of  the  northernmost  grnve  of  trees  on  Plumb  Island,  touch- 
ing the  south  declining  end  of  the  southernmost  of  the  White  sand  hills  on  PlUmb 
Island.    These  sand  hills  are  the  two  next  south  of  the  houses  in  the  bay^ 

^.  A  large  notch  or  gap  in  the  wood  on  he  main  land,  to  the  westward  of  iPl^ck 
point,  a  sail's  breadth  open  to  the  northwai  d  of  a  single  black  rock,  which  is  between 
the  south  end  of  Great  Gull  island,  and  th «,  N.  R  .;nd  of  Plimih  Island  N.  "W.  bv  N 


Thus  appears  the  roi-k. 


d 


100 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Marks  for  a  bed  ofroeka,  about  40  uards  square,  lying  thrte-qunrlers  of  a  miU  u^ 
shore,  on  the  S.  £.  side  of  Plumh  Island.  At  low  tmtn  the  shoalest  part  has  not 
more  than  three  feet  on  them,  and  about  the  size  of  a  amnll  boaVs  bottom.  It  may 
he  seen  at  low  footer  ;  three  fathoms  all  round,  not  more  than  a  feet  from  the  rode. 
Other  parts  of  the  reef,  8  fathoms  are  around  the  shoal. 

1.  The  largest  house  with  two  chimneys  in  the  bay,  oast  side  of  Phimb  Island, 
in  one  with  a  large  stone  or  rock  on  a.  hill  liehind  the  hous«»  N.  f)3°  VV. 

2.  The  Gull  light-house  touching  the  east  end  of  Great  Gull  Island,  N.  6r*°  E. 

3.  The  White  sand  hills  on  the  south  side  of  F'islit'r's  Island,  or  Mount  Pros- 
pect, half  way  open  to  the  westward  of  Great  Gull  Island.  S.  E.  part  of  Plumb 
Island,  S.  74^  W.  and  the  N.  E.  end  of  same,  N.  45^  E. 

Marks  for  a  shoal  in  the  middle  of  Plumb  Gut,  tvhich  is  a  compound  of  rocks  and 
large  stones,  with  only  16  feet  on  it,  having  16  and  17  Jnlhoms  on  the  N.  E.side, 
20  on  the  N.  W.  and  6  and  7  on  the  south  side.  When  on  the  shoal,  took  the  follow- 
ing marks. 

1.  A  small  poplar  tree  in  one  with  Mr.  Jerome's  door,  N.  N.  E. 

2.  A  single  conspicuous  tree  in  one  with  the  east  side  of  a  gray  cliff  on  Gard- 
ner's Island,  S.  E.  by  E. 

5.  Oyster  Fond  point  W.  j  N.  and  the  S.  E.  or  Pine  point  of  Plumb  Island 
E.  by  N.  and  the  rocky  point  or  bluff  point  of  Plumb  Island,  north.  The  pas- 
sage through  Plumb  Gut  is  to  the  northward  of  this  roek. 

There  is  another  rock,  with  only  24  feet  upon  it,  about  400  yards  from  th« 
rocky  or  bluff  point  on  Plumb  Island. 


&  * 


''^- 


Marks  for  anchoring  in  Plumb  Island  Roads. 

Mount  Prospect,  or  the  high  white  sand  hills  of  Fisher's  Island,  touching  the  Gull  light- 
house, N.  62"  E.  and  the  N.  E.  part  of  Long  Island  in  one  with  the  S.  E.  end  of  Plumb 
Island,  bearing  W. ;  or  the  east  bluff  points  of  Gardner's  Island  in  one  with  the  low  beach 
which  extends  from  the  north  side  of  the  island,  S.  4b'-'  E.  With  these  marks  you  will  have 
from  7  to  S  fathoms,  soft  mud,  and  quite  out  of  the  tide,  and  not  more  than  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  from  the  shore  of  Plumb  Island,  where  there  is  very  convenient  and  good  water. 

From  Block  Island  a  reef  of  rocks  lies  dne  mile  distant  from  the  north  end 
of  the  island. 

South-west  ledge  lies  W.  S.  W.  from  Block  Island,  5  miles  distant,  having  44 
fathoms  at  low  water,  and  breaks  a  heavy  sea.  As  you  open  the  passage  between 
Montock  and  Block  Island,  you  will  deepen  your  water,  and  have  soft  bottom  on 
an  E.  Hi.  E.  course,  and  when  abreast  of  Block  Island,  you  will  shoalen  your 
water  to  sandy  bottom ;  when  past  it,  you  will  again  deepen  to  soft  bottom. 

[For  more  particular  directions  for  passing  Block  Island,  seepage  79.] 


Bearings  and  distances  of  sundry  places  from  the  light  house  on  Montock  Point, 
taken  by  the  officers  of  the  Revenue  Cutter  Argus. 

The  S.  part  of  Block  Island  bears  E.  by  N.  from  the  light-bouse  on  Montock  Point,  20 
miles  distant. 

The  eastern  rips  lie  £.  by  N.  1^  mile  from  the  light-house.  The  northern  rips  lie  N.  £. 
^  E.  3  mfles  from  the  light-bouse.  (These  rips,  although  they  may  appear  to  the  mariner  dan- 
gerous, may  be  crossed  with  any  draft,  in  6,  7,  8  and  9  fathoms.) 

Shagwang&noc  Reef,  on  which  a  spear  is  placed,  bears  N.  W.  J-  N.  from  the  light-house 
nn  Montock  Point,  5|  mites  distant ;  the  reef  ranges  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  about  4  of  a 


J^^: 


■^■ 


«■ 


»      • 


'% 


# 


/w.v  /; 


Ai^iirf;   iiihlithfii  (>\  Hihniinih^CwHi'rt 


Einp'avfti  fir  Ml*  Aiufrtt\in  O'tut  l*tft<t 


4 


V 


^ 


^ 


C    T     I    C     I    T 


4^ 


^ 


--6yv!|^  :.,  \/A -^r:^cz:::^4 «^^^M_c^W^ W^^^^ 

V»  \  Ah  *'y   ^  fMU.  ..'■■  '  L^'  *  V -— 


K 


Hiit'kfr  Sr 


■■'r'vfffll. 


Enyravfii  fir  thf  jitntritan  Ccajt  Pilt't 


uiile 
milei 
Fri 
then 
the  si 
tock. 
Th< 
17  mi] 
Wa( 
Point  1 
Hill  p< 
mile. 
The 
^  mile  1 
dwtant. 
The 
standinj 
on  the  ft 
Oearing 
BartTe 
the  Race 
Little 
the  buoy 
The  lis 
N.  E.  i  I 
The  S. 
<ii'»tant 

The  eas 
flMtant. 
The  ligh 


<l«'nly  ashf 
the 


u«»nly 
Hook 


*  Long  Is 
to  Gull  Islai 
a  "afe  and  c| 

houses  to  gii 


^ 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


101 


!(' 


'I* 


tS 


t 


'ittker  Sc. 


uiile  in  length-  There  is  a  good  channel  way  bet-vcen  the  reef  and  Long  Island,  about  two 
miles  wide,  in  3,  4,  and  5  ratboms  water. 

Frisbie's  ledge  is  only  a  place  of  hard  rorky  bottom  before  you  approach  the  light-house  to 
the  westward,  from  8  to  15  fathoms,  and  no  wise  dangerous  to  any  vensel.  You  may  keep 
the  shore  on  board  from  the  Highlands  (say  three-quarters  of  a  mile)  and  haul  round  Mon- 
tock. 

The  east  end  of  Fisher's  Island  bears  N.by  W.  from  the  light-house  on  Montock  Point, 
17  miles. 

Watch  Hill  Point  light-house  (which  contains  a  repeating  light)  bears  nearly  N.  from  Montock 
Point  light-house,  distant  18  miles ;  there  is  a  reef  extending  from  Fisher's  Island  to  VV  atcb 
Hill  Point,  leaving  a  passage  between  the  E.  end  of  the  reef  and  Watch  Hill  Point,  half  a 
mile. 

The  Race  Rock,  where  there  is  an  iron  spear  placed,  bearing  S.  W.  by  VV.  three-quarters  of 
a  mile  from  the  W.  Point  of  Fisher's  Island,  bears  from  Montock  light  house,  N.  W.  16  miles 
distant. 

The  Gull  Islands  bear  W.  S.  W.  from  the  Race  Rock,  6  miles  distant.  The  light-house 
standing  on  the  west  chop  of  New  London  harbour,  bears  N.  N.  W.  9  miles  flrom  the  spear 
on  the  Race  Rock.  On  the  Little  Gull  Island  there  is  a  light-house  contidning  infixed  light, 
bearing  W.  S.  W.  from  the  west  point  of  Fisher's  Island,  6  miles  distant. 

Bartlett's  Reef,  on  which  a  buoy  is  placed,  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  J  W.  8  miles  distant  from 
the  Race  Rocks. 

Little  Gosheh  Reef,  where  a  buoy  is  placed,  bears  N.  E.  by  E.  about  3  miles  distant  from 
the  buoy  on  Bartlett's  Reef. 

The  light-house  at  New-London  harbour,  bears  from  the  buoy  on  Little  Goshen  Reef,  N. 
N.  E.  i  E.  about  2  miles  distant,  and  contains  a  ^td  light. 

The  S.  W  ledge,  where  a  buoy  is  placed,  bears  N-  by  W.  from  the  Race  Rock,  7|  miles 
diMant 

The  east  ehop  of  New-London  harbour  bears  N.  by  E.  4  E-  from  the  S.  W.  ledge,  1^  mile 
distant. 

The  light-house  bears  from  the  buoy  on  S.  W.  ledge  N.  W.  by  N.  1^  mile  distant. 


■"W 


Description  of  ''^Long  Tsland. 


Long  Island,  from  Montock  Point  to  Red  Hook,  extends  W.  by  S.  about  102 
miles,  and  is  at  the  broadest  part  about  S.*)  miles  across.  The  land  is  generally 
pretty  low  and  level,  excepting  a  few  hills,  which  lie  about  40  miles  to  the  west- 
ward of  Montock  Point,  and  Hempstead  Hill,  which  is  51 9  fert  above  the  level  of 
the  sea.  Along  the  south  side  of  the  Island  a  flat  extends  about  a  mile  from  the 
8h(<  <^. ;  in  some  places  it  runs  out  a  mile  and  a  half.  Your  course  along  this,  flat 
froni  Montock  Point  to  Sandy  Hook,  is  S.  W.  by  W.  \  W.  14  leagues,  and  then 
W.  by  S.  22  leagues.  The  E.  end  of  the  flat  is  sand  ;  the  middle  and  west  parts 
are  sand  and  stones.  About  4  leagues  distant  from  the  Island  there  arc  from  15 
to  18  fathoms  water,  and  from  that  distance  to  20  leagues,  the  water  deepens  to 
80  fathoms  ;  in  the  latter  depth  you  will  have  oozy  ground,  and  sand,  with  blue 
specks  on  it.  About  4  leagues  off*  the  E  end  of  the  island,  you  will  have  coarse 
sand  and  small  stones ;  and  at  the  same  distance  from  the  middle  and  west  end, 
there  is  small  white  snnd  and  gravel,  with  black  specks.  From  the  S.  W.  end  a 
shoal  extends  about  0  miles  tovvards  Sandy  Hook,  which  forms  the  East  Bank. 

We  have  previousi]* mentioned  (page  86^  respecting  Fire  Islands  light-house, 
but  think  it  adviseable  to  repeat,  it  bears  Fi.  by  N.  from  Sandy  Hook  light,  10 
leagues  distant,  and  exhibits  a  revolving  light,  from  which  a  shoal  extends  south 
one  mile,  which  is  very  dangerous,  having  6J  fathoms  very  near  it,  and  then  sud- 
denly ashore,  and  on  which  the  flood  tide  sets  very  rapid.  From  this  to  Sandy 
Hook  the  soundings  are  various,  viz.  yellow,  red,  brown,  black  and  grey  sand. 

'*'  Long  Island  Sound  is  a  kind  of  inland  .sea,  commencing  at  Sand's  Point,  ond  extending 
to  Gull  Island  light.  It  is  from  3  to  25  miles  broml,  dividing  it  from  Connecticut,  and  uflbrda 
a  safe  and  convenient  inland  navigation,  having  good  anchoring  places,  and  several  tine  light- 
houses to  guide  the  mariner. 


^ 


102 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


Directions  from  Gardner's  Island  to  Shelter  Island. 

If  you  fall  in  with  Gardner's  Island,  you  must  sail  oa  the  N.  side  of  it  till  you 
come  up  with  a  low  sandy  point  at  the  W.  end,  which  puts  off  two  miles  from 
the  Highland.  You  may  bring  the  island  to  bear  east,  and  anchor  in  7  or  S 
fathoms  water,  as  soon  as  within  the  low  sandy  point. 


south,  am 
N.  N- W 
The  buoj 
miles,  ste( 
ford  Voin 
frolu  the 
Point.    [ 


'  Directions  from  Gardner's  Island  to  New  London. 

Your  course  from  Gardner's  Island  to  New  London  is  N.  i  E.  about  5  leagues. 
In  steering  this  course,  yoiF.  will  leave  Plumb  Island  and  Gull  Islands  on  your 
larboard,  and  Fisher's  Island  an  your  starboard  hand.  \n  this  pass,  you  will  go 
through  the  Horse  Race,  where  you  will  have  a  strong  ude.  The  flood  sets  W. 
N.  W.  and  the  ebb  E.  S.  E.  This  place  breaks  when  there  is  any  wind,  espe- 
cially when  it  blows  against  the  tide. 

Your  soundings  will  sometimes  be  5  fathoms,  at  others  15  and  20.  In  passing 
the  west  end  of  Fisher's  Island,  you  mustgive  it  a  birth  of  3j  miles,  as  there  are 
several  rocks  to  the  westward  of  it ;  then  your  course  to  the  *light-ho  e  is  N. 
N.  W.  distant  two  leagues  ;  but  in  going  in  here  you  must  not  miake  long  litcbes : 
you  will  leave  a  sunken'  ledge  on  your  larboard,  and  one  on  your  starboard 
hand.  When  within  one  mile  of  the  light-house,  you  may  stand  on  to  the  east- 
ward, till  i,he  light  bears  N.  N.  W.  and  then  run  up  about  N.  N.  E.  till  abreast  of 
th^,  light,  where  you  way  safely  anchor,  or  run  N.  for  the  town.  [See  page  94, 
for  sailing  into  New  London  Harbour.] 


Directions  for  vessels  coining  from  sen,  and  bound  to  New  London,  or  the 

Westward. 

■» 

Keep  Gull  Island  light  to  bear  W.N.  W.  until  you  judge  yourself  within  about 
two  miles  of  the  light ;  your  course  then  to  New  London  light  Rafter  you  pass 
Race  Rock,  which  lies  W.  S.  W.  from  the  point  of  Fisher's  Island,  distance  |of 
a  mile)  is  N.  N.  W.  In  coming  in,  or  going  out  of  New-London,  (when  opposite 
the  Gull  light)  bri.igthe  Goll  light  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  and  New-London  light  N. 
N.  B.  leave  (he  liglit  on  your  larboard  hand  in  going  into  the  harbour ;  keep  well 
to  the  W.  if  it  be  winter  season,  and  the  wind  atN.  E.  and  stormy— your  course 
t6  lireak  off  a  N.  E  gale,  in  good  anchorage,  is  W.  N.  W.  from  the  Gull,  distance 
5  miles,  then  haul  up,  if  the  wind  be  N.  E.  and  steer  N.  W.  until  you  get  into  10 
fathoms  of  water,  muddy  bottom  ;  anchor  as  soon  as  possible— you  will  be  be- 
tween Hatchett's  Reef  and  Black  Point ;  this  is  the  best  place  you  can  ride  in,  if 
you  have  a  N.  E.  gale,  and  thick  weather,  and  cannot  get  into  New-London, 
f  Sayhrook  light,  which  is  9.  fixed  light,  elevated  35  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea, 
will  then  bear  W.  by  N.  or  W.  N.  W. 

What  makes  me  give  these  directions,  is  because  Sayhrook  is  no  harbour  for 
vessels  either  day  or  night,  except  for  such  as  are  well  acquainted ;  it  wi'l  be 
well  to  give  Sayhrook  light  a  birth  of  three  or  four  miles,  and  steer  W.  by  S.  2si 
miles.  You  will  make  Faulkland  Island  light,  which  give  a  birth  of  3j  miles, 
leaving  it  on  your  starboard  hand  ;  your  Sound  course  then  is  W.  S.  W.  |  W.  45 
miles  distant,  which  will  can  y  you  up  with  Eaton's  Neck  light,  leaving  t  Stratford 
shoal  on  the  starboard  hand.    This  shoal,  which  has  a  white  spar  buoy  on  the 

'*'  New  London  li^ht  house  stands  on  the  west  side  of  the  harbour,  and  projects  considera- 
l>ly  into  the  Sound.     It  contains  a  yij;«({  light,  as  before  mentioned. 

\  Sayhrook  light-house  is  built  on  the  western  .side  of  Ihu  harbour,  and  exhibits  a  ./tx?'^ 
light.     It  bears  W.  N.  W.  from  the  Gull  light,  6  leagues  di)«tant. 

t  For  description  of  Stratford  8hoaK  sec  pope  94. 


Ff  om 
lips,  and 
light  c  bir 
bhrth  of  ti 
the  barbo 
distant  l\ 
quarters  o 
the  light  S 
bears  iVon 
on  S.  W. 

Vessels 
West  Led 
keeping  al 
Fall  20  ro( 
On  this  sh 
bottom, 
the  east  sh 
the  harboi 
pier,  a  sm 

Vessels 
hand,  and 
ing  in,  yoi 
than  2  fati 
beating  up 
to  keep  th 
you  will  h 


Directioi 

the  en 

*      Island 

The  ha 
that  no  di 
rect  into  I 

*  New-1 
and  lies  on 
aj'ixed  ligl 

I  Black  J 
larly  displa 
This  edific 
ter  at  the  1 
stone,  are 
of  solid  mi 
is  painted 
is  la  every 
no  little  CI 


BLUNT- S   AMERICAN    JO  A  ST   PILOT. 


103 


south,  and  a  black  spar  buoy  on  the  north,  between  which  you  cannot  go,  bears 
N.  N.  W.  from  Satauket  (Long  Island)  and  S.  by  W.  from  Stratford  Point  light. 
The  buoys  are  placed  in  19  feet  water.  In  leaving  Faulkland  Island  light  three 
miles,  steer  W.  until  you  get  into  5  or  7  fathoms  water,  distance  35  miles  to  Strat- 
ford Foint  light,  hard  bottom,  which  leaves  Stratford  Shoal,  that  bears  S.  by  W. 
frofld  the  light,  on  the  larboard  hund,  then  your  course  is  W.  S.  W.  to  Tinacock 
Point.     [For  sailing  through  the  Sound,  see  page  93.] 


Directions  for  New-Haven. 

Ffom  Faulkland  Island  (E.  S.  E.  from  which  is  a  hard  ridge,  on  which  the  tide 
lips,  and  you  have  bold  water  all  round)  bound  into  New-Haven,  give  the  island 
light  c  birth  of  10  or  12  miles,  then  haul  up  N.  W.  giving  New- Haven  *light  a 
birth  of  two  miles,  on  account  of  a  ledge  bearing  S.  W.  from  the  east  point  of 
the  harbonr,  on  tvhich  is  a  black  bi  ../,  bearing  S.  W  by  S.  from  the  light-house, 
distant  1^  mile,  and  from  the  white  buoy  on  Adams'  Fall  S.  by  W.  distant  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile.  There  is  a  spindle  on  Quickses  Rock,  which  bears  from 
the  light  S.  by  E.  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  The  buoy  on  Adam's  Fall 
bears  from  the  spindle  N.  W.  by  VV.  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  The  buoy 
on  S.  W.  ledge  bears  from  the  spindle  ^Y.  S.  W.  distant  half  a  mile. 

Vessels  hound  in  from  the  eastward,  may  pass  between  the  buoy  on  South 
West  Ledge  and  the  Spindle,  as  there  are  three  fathoms  water  in  this  channel, 
keeping  about  mid-way  between  them,  and  leaving  the  white  buoy  on  Adam's 
Fall  20  rods,  to  the  eastward  of  them,  and  then  steer  for  the  end  of  the  wharf. 
On  this  shore,  rn  channel  way,  you  will  have  3,  4,  and  5  fathoms  water,  muddy 
bottom.  Bringing  the  light  to  bear  S.  E.  you  may  anchor  in  Morris'  Cove,  near 
the  east  shore,  in  two  fathoms  water,  muddy  bottom.  Your  course  from  this  up 
the  harbour,  with  a  fair  wind,  is  north.  Give  the  Fort  Rock,  in  running  for  the 
pier,  a  small  birth. 

Vessels  bound  in  from  the  westward,  will  leave  both  buoys  on  the  starboard 
hand,  and  they  may  pass  'vith  safety  within  20  rods  of  dither  of  them.  If  beat- 
ing in,  your  soundings  will  b"  from  2  to  3  and  4  fathoms.  Stand  in  no  farther 
than  2  fathoms  upon  the  west  shore,  on  which  you  will  have  hard  bottom.  In 
beating  up,  after  getting  in  muddy  bottom,  (which  is  channel  soundings)  it  is  best 
to  keep  the  lead  a  going  often,  on  account  of  bordering  on  the  west  shore,  where 
you  will  have  hard  bottom,  and  soon  aground. 


m 


Directions  for  sailing  by  the  ■flight-home  on  Fayerweather's  Island,  at 
the  entrance  of  Black  Rock  harbour,  on  the  north  shore  of  Long 
Island  Sound. 

The  harbour  of  Black  Rock,  although  safe  and  easy  of  access,  is  so  situated, 
that  no  direct  course  can  be  given  to  stee:-  for  the  light,  that  will  carry  you  di- 
rect into  the  harbour,  as  that  depends  wholly  on  the  distance  you  are  from  the 

*  NeW'Haven  light-house  is  situated  o  Five  Mile  Point,  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour, 
and  lies  on  the  starboard  hand.  The  lantern  is  elevated  33  feet  above  the  sea,  and  c.ontainF 
a  fixed  light. 

t  Black  Rock  light,  c.i  Fayerweather's  Islard,  at  the  enirance  of  Black  Rock  Harbour,  regu- 
larly displays  a  strong  and  brilliant  light,  on  the  improved  plan  of  Capt.  W'inslow  Lewis. 
This  edifice  is  of  an  octagon  form,  built  of  stone,  in  the  most  duralile  manner,  19  feet  diame- 
ter at  the  base,  where  the  walls,  the  exterior  of  \  hich  arc  handsomely  faced  with  hewn  free 
stone,  are  5  feet  in  thickness,  and  rise  to  the  height  of  31  feet,  surmounted  with  a  ptatform 
of  solid  masonry,  which  supports  the  lantern  40  feet  above  high  water  mark.  The  Duilding 
is  painted  white,  defended  from  the  sea  by  a  strong  circular  fortification  of  massy  rocks,  and 
is  IB  every  respect  faithfully  built,  and  prepared  to  withstand  the  storms  of  ages,  and  reflects 
110  little  credit  on  the  faithfulness  and  skill  of  its  enterpriting  builders.    Black-Rock  harbour, 


il!« 


'f 


:* 


1. 


104 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


\  .  \ 


light,  at  the  timo  you  make  for  it ;  therefore,  judgment  is  to  be  used  in  varying 
the  hearing  of  the  light  as  you  draw  near  in,  which  is  easily  done  by  observing 
the  following  rules.  In  coming  fr<jui  the  westward,  if  you  mean  to  harbour,  to 
avoid  the  reef  called  the  Cows,  y^>a  bring  the  light  to  be^r  N.  by  W.  and  run  di- 
rectly for  it,  until  within  three-qiiarters  or  half  a  mile  distance,  when,  if  occasion 
requires,  you  may  stretch  info  the  westward  in  a  fine  beating  channel,  having 
from  9  to  3  fathoms  water,  and  good  ground.  As  you  approach  the  light,  which 
stands  on  the  east  side  of  the  harbour,  the  water  gradually  shoals  to  about  two 
fathoms.  The  mouth  of  the  harbour,  although  not  very  wide,  is  not  dithcult; 
the  lii^ht  bearing  east  brings  you  completely  into  the  harbour.  The  island  on 
which  the  light-house  stinds,  and  the  reef  called  the  Cows  on  the  south  and  west 
side  from  the  harbour  of  Black  Rock.  On  the  easternmost  rock  of  this  reef  stands 
a  spindle,  distant  from  the  light  half  a  league,  and  from  which  the  light  bears  N. 
The  light  stands  44  rods  from  the  south  point  of  said  island,  at  low  water.  From 
this  point  puts  off  a  single  rock  30  rods  distant,  on  which  is  8  feet  at  high  water, 
making  in  all  -ibout  74  rods  distance.  The  light  bears  from  this  rock,  N.  by  E.  i  E. 
As  soon  as  yo'i  pass  this  point  or  rock,  the  harbour  is  fairly  opened  to  the  north- 
ward, in  any  point  from  N.  to  W.  N.  W.  You  can  run  for  the  light  with  safety, 
observing,  as  ycu  draw  nearly  in,  the  above  directions,  and  a  due  attention  to 
the  lead.  The  bottom  for  some  distance  from  this  rock  southerly,  Js  hard,  but 
you  cuay  continue  your  course,  and  it  will  soon  deepen.  !t  is  safe  and  gqod  an- 
chorage to  the  eastward  of  the  light,  for  all  winds  from  VV.  S.  W.  to  N.  N.  E. 
quite  down  to  the  mouth  of  "^Bridgeport  harbour,  which  is  distant  about  two 
miles.  The  shore  on  the  eastern  side  uf  the  light  is  bold  too,  in  3  fathoms, 
close  ab(tard  the  light,  and  so  continues  until  you  arc  quite  down  to  the  south 
point  of  the  island.  This  Bay,  to  the  leeward  of  the  light,  between  that  and 
Bridgeport,  is  one  of  the  best  Bays  for  anchorage  on  the  north  shore  in  Long- 
Island  Sound,  and  affords  from  4  to  3  fathoms  water,  the  light  bearing  west. 
In  coming  from  the  eastward,  crossing  Stratford  Point  light  close  aboard,  your 
course  to  Black  Rock  liglit  is  W.  by  N.  and  you  keep  sounding  on  the  starboard 
hand  not  less  than  4  fathoms,  nor  more  than  8  fathoms,  to  the  north  of  Bridge- 
port harbour,  which  is  distant  about  two  miles.  The  shore  on  the  eastern  side 
of  the  light  is  boM  too,  in  3  fathoms  close  aboard  the  light,  and  so  continues  till 
you  are  quite  down  to  the  south  point  of  the  islands 


Directions  for   Vessels  bound  to  New- York. 

If  you  fall  into  the  southward,  and  make  Cape  May,  on  which  is  a  light- 
house exhibiting  a  revolving  triangular  light,  it  would  be  prudent  to  keep  about 
three  leagues  off,  to  avoid  Herreford  Bar,  which  lies  from  four  to  six  leagues 
from  the  Cape  to  the  northward,  and  8  miles  from  the  inlet  of  that  name.  This 
inlet  is  frequented  by  the  Delaware  Pilots,  having  no  other  harbour  to  the  north- 
ward unlil  they  reach  Kgg  Harbour.  After  passing  Herreford  Bar,  you  may 
then  haul  up  N.  E.  in  9  fathoms  water,  which  course  continued  will  draw  you 
into  5  fathoms  ;  as  you  approach  Egg  Harbour,  you  will  then  have  fine  white  and 
black  sand  nitermixed  with  small  broken  shells;  by  continuing  the  same  course, 
yo'i  will  deepen  your  w.-tter  to  8  or  9  fathoms,  and  so  continue  till  you  draw  near 
Barneg  it,  which  will  alter  your  soundings  materially,  as  there  is  a  channel  runs 
in  a  S.  E.  direction  from  Barnegat.     The  soundings  off  the  shore  is  mud,  shells, 

from  it-  central  Hituation,  is  one  of  great  importance  to  vessels,  navigating  the  Sound,  at  all 
seasons  of  the  year,  especially  in  winter.  Next  to  the  harbour  of  New  London,  it  is  the  most 
safe  an  I  cmvenient  on  the  whole  coast  of  Connecticut,  admitting  vessels  of  a  large  draft  of 
water  at  all  times  of  the  tide.  Puring  the  inclemencies  of  winter,  when  the  commur.iiation 
with  New-Vork  is  obstructed  with  ice,  numerous  vessels,  and  of  all  sizes,  are  not  unfrequent 
ly  compelled  to  seek  a  harbour  here  for  weeks  together,  ivhere  they  ride  secure  from  the 
drifting  ice,  and  the  violence  of  every  wind,  in  the  immediate  neighbourhood  of  a  flourishing 
commercial  village,  capable  uf  furnishing  every  necessary  repair,  stores,  or  refeshtncnts  that 
may  be  required,  ami  on  as  good  terms  as  in  tny  of  our  larger  sea-ports. 
*  A  Buoy  is  to  be  placed  on  Allen's  Fiat,  in  Bridgeport  Harbour. 


and  gral 

.  three  m| 
thorns  y 
dent  in 
The  soil 
above  sJ 
sand, anj 
course 
wind  anl 
bring  yol 
markabl^ 
Highland 
tends  to 


By  paa 
80  far  off 
chored  fr 
of  wood  I 
by  the  na 

Sat,  so  th 
irectly  a 
another  g 
Great  Sw 
that  the 
Swamp  o 
neither  c& 
15  miles  a 
hauling  in 
shore,  kee 
and  shouh 
until  you  c 
Hook;  th( 
north-east 
thorns  wal 
house  to  I 
water,  th( 
point  of  t 
the  Swasl 
starboard 
die,  all  wh 
Spit  is  blai 


Note.  J 
mile  from 

*  Floatin 
S.E.froml 
ced  in  each 
a  large  Bell 
rate  of  one 
course  W.  ] 

t  Notwit 
ces  aisignei 
this,  tbaiN 


M 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT., 


lod 


and  gravel,  mixed  together.  The  ehoal  off  Barncgat  does  not  extend  beyond 
three  miles  from  the  beAch,  and  is  very  steep  too ;  you  may  turn  this  shoal  in  6  fa*- 
thorns  water,  within  pistol  shot  of  the  outer  breaker.  It  would  always  be  pru- 
dent in  night-time  to  keep  in  0  or  10  fathoms  water  at  least,  in  turning  this  shoal. 
The  soundings  are  so  much  to  be  depended  on,  tliat  the  moment  you  lose  the 
above  soundings  you  are  past  the  shoal,  when  youAvill  hav^  fine  black  and  white 
sand,  and  very  hard  bottom;  you  may  then  haul  in  for  the  land  N.  by  E.  which 
course  will  bring  you  along  shore  in  from  15  to  17  fathoms  water;  but  if  the 
wind  and  weather  permit,  1  would  recommend  hauling  in  N.  N.  W.  which  will 
bring  you  in  with  the  southernmost  ^^art  of  the  Woodlands,  which  is  very  re- 
markable, having  no  other  such  lam  i  in  the  distance  from  Cape  May  up  to  the 
Highlands,  and  can  be  distinguished  by  its  being  very  near  the  beach,  and  «x- 
tends  to  Long  Branch.  *• 


Thta  appears  the  south  part  of  the  Woodlands. 
By  passing  Barnegat  in  the  day-time  it  may  easily  be  known ;  ishould  you  be 
80  far  off  as  not  to  see  the  breakers,  ^^u  may  make  the  "^light-ship,  which  is  an- 
chored from  12  to  13  miles  E.  S.  E.  from  Sandy  Hook  light,  or  perhaps  see  a  grove 
of  wood  back  in  the  country,  apparently  3  or  4  miles  long,  kopwn  to  the  coasters 
by  the  name  of  Little  Swampland  lies  directly  in  the  rear  of  the  inlet  of  Barne- 
gat, so  that  by  sailing  to  the  northward,  yom*  having  the  north  end  of  this  land 
directly  abreast  you  are  certainly  to  the  northward  of  Barnegat;  there  is  also 
another  grove  directly  in  the  rear  of  Egg  Harbour,  known  by  the  name  of  tho 
Great  Swamp,  which  has  the  same  references  as  respects  Egg  Harbour— but 
tJiat  the  one  may  not  be  taken  for  the  other,  it  must  be  observed,  the  Great 
Swamp  of  Egg  Harbour  will  appear  much  higher,  and  in  length  8  or  10  miles : 
neither  can  they  be  seen  at  the  same  time,  as  Barnegat  and  Egg  Harbour  are 
15  miles  apart.  Barnegat  hears  due  S.  by  W.  45  miles  from  Sandy  Hook.  In 
hauling  in  for  the  Woodland  before-mentioned,  you  may,  if  the  wind  is  off  the 
shore,  keep  within  a  cable's  length  of  it  all  the  way,  until  up  with  the  Highlands, 
and  should  your  vessel  not  draw  more  than  10  feet  water,  you  may  continue 
until  you  come  up  with  the  northernmost  part  of  the  cedars  that  stand  on  Sandy - 
Hook;  then  you  must  steer  N.  N.  E.  to  give  the  False  Hook  a  birth  (on  tho 
north-east  part  of  vf hich  is  9  white  spar  buoy  with  a  white  fPlag  on  it,  in  3^  fa- 
thoms water)  keeping  about  half  a  mile  from  the  beach  until  you  bring  the  light- 
house to  bear  S.  W.  |  S.  at  which  time  you  will  have  from  6h  to  8  fathoms 
water,  then  steer  W.  by  N.  till  you  bring  the  light-house  open  with  the  east 
point  of  the  Highlands,  then  steer  N.  by  W.  which  will  carry  you  throu;rh 
the  Swash  Channel,  up  with  the  Can  Buoy  of  the  Middle,  leaving  it  on  the 
starboard  hand,  passing  four  Black  Spar  buoys  from  the  Spit  to  the  Mid- 
dle, all  which  you  leave  on  the  starboard  hand.  The  Can  Buoy  of  the  S.  W. 
Spit  is  black,  which  in  coming  up  the  Swash  Channel,  is  left  on  the  larboard  hand. 


'     Highlaiuls,  N.  63°  W. 
Note.  S.  i  E.  from  Sandy  Hook  light,  12  miles  distant,  is  a  ledge,  about  I 
mile  from  the  shore,  with  not  less  than  2}  fathoms  on  it. 

i<  Floating  light. — A  vessel  having  two  masts,  with  Lanterns  on  each,  has  been  moored  £. 
S.  E.  from  12  to  13  miles  from  Sandy- Hook  light-house,  in  14  fathoms  water.  Lights  are  pla- 
ced in  each  lantern  at  sun-set,  and  kept  burning  until  sun-rise.  The  vessel  is  provided  niib 
a  large  Bell  and  clock-work,  which  in  stormj  and  foggy  weather  will  be  kept  tolling  at  the 
rate  of  one  stioketper  niinute.  Vessels  from  sea  making  the  light,  and  steering  from  it  a 
course  W.  N.  W.  will  make  the  White  Buoy  ou  the  Bar. 

t  Notwithstanding  every  possible  exertion  is  made  to  keep  the  Buoys  and  Flags  in  the  pla- 
ces assigned  them,  ctill  accidents  occur,  and  remove  theui  for  a  short  time.  We  mentioq 
this,  that  Navigators  should  not  be  deceived,  when  it  does  happen. 

14 


I' 


:e*i 


1« 
W| 

ng 
0  I 


106 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Ttf  enter  *Sandy-Hook  Channel-way. 


When  up  with  the  Highlands,  keep  3  miles  from  the  shore  to  avoid  the  Outward 
Middle,  steering  to  the  northward  until  you  bring  the  light-house  to  bear  W. 
then  steer  in  for  it;  its  the  flood  outside  sets  to  the  northward,  but  when  a  little 
way  in,  it  sets  to  the  westward.  Having  passed  between  the  two  Can  Buoys, 
(which  is  channel-way)  the  v  hite  on  the  larboard,  and  the  black  on  the  star- 
board hand,  you  also  pass  four  white  spar  buoys  onyour  larboard  hand,  between 
the  white  Can  Buoy,  and  the  point  of  Sandy  Hook ;  and  in  approaching  the  light- 
house, you  niust  not  haul  too  nigh  the  shore,  on  account  of  the  False  Hook,  on 
which  the  four  white  spar  buoys  before-mentioned  are  placed.  By  keeping  a  mile 
from  the  beach,  you  will  avoid  that  shoal;  when  you  have  got  in  so  far  as  the 
poiqt  of  the  Hook,  where  the  beacon  stands,  you  may  then  haul  in  the  bay  W. 
S.  W.  but  if  you  mean  to  anchor  in  the  bay,  haul  in  S.  W.  giving  the  point  the 
distance  before-mentioned,  until  you  bring  the  light-house  to  bear  £.  by  N.  or 
E.  N.  £.  where  you  may  anchor  in  from  5  tp  7  fathoms  water,  soft  muddy  bot- 
tom. But,  should  you  wish  to  proceed  to  New-York,  when  you  have  com?  in 
as  before  directed,  and  gOt  abreast  of  the  beacon,  or  the  point  of  Sandy  Hook, 
steer  up  W.  by  N.  until  you  bring  the  light-house  to  bear  S.  E.  and  Brown's 
Hollow  to  bear  S.  i  E.  leaving  five  black  Spar  Buoys,  and  the  black  Can  Buoy  of 
the  S.  W.  Spit,  on  your  starboard  hand,  when  you  must  steer  up  N.  by  E.  i  E. 
leaving  the  white  jCan  Buoy  of  the  Nole  on  your  larboard  hand,  for  the  bluff  of 
Staten  Island,  which  will,  at  that  time,  bear  exaetly  north  from  you. 

The  above-mentioned  is  intended  for  vessels  coming  up  ship  cj^annel,  but  after 
the  two  lifrhts  on  the  Highlands  of  Neversink  are  completed,  you  will  observe, 
when  the  two  lights  are  brought  in  range,  you  will  be  up  with  the  Can  Buoy  of 
ths  S.  W.  Spit,  and  may  then  alter  your  course  to  N.  by  E.  i  E.  for  the  bluff 
of  St»ten  Island,  where  a  light-house  is  to  be  built  by  December,  1827,  showing 
a  Jixed  light. 

[That  you  may  not  be  deceived  with  respect  to  Brown's  Hollow,  it  is  the  hollow 
which  makes  the  termination  of  the  Highlands  to  the  westward.]  Having  turned 
the  S.  W.  Spit,  continue  steering  N.  by  E.  i  E.  until  you  shoal  your  water,  which 
yon  soon  Avili  do  if  it  is  young  flood,  as  it  sets  from  Si  to  3  knots,  to  the  west- 
ward; here  you  will  observe,  at  the  time  you  turn  the  Spit  before  mentioned,  on 
the  Jersey  shore^  above  the  Narrows,  two  hummocks  of  land,  each  forming  as 

it  were  a  saddle,  thus; 


The  easternmost  of  the  two  is 


the  mark  fov  coming  up  the  channel  so  as  to  av^d  the  Upper  Middle,  on  which 
is  »  black  Can  Buoy,  on  the  starboard  hand,  by  keeping  it  just  open  with  the 
bluff  on  Staten  Island,  which  will  be  the  case  if  you  turn  the  Spit  as  before  di- 
rected; this  will  bring  yon  up  channel-way,  when  you  have  sailed  5  or  0  miles 
the  course  described,  and  with  this  mark  open ;  then  you  haul  more  to  the  east- 
ward, until  you  open  the  other  hummockr  which  is  called  the  Westernmost  Hum- 
mock ;  by  keening  both  easterly  and  westerly  hummocks  open  to  your  view, 
you  avoid  the  Middle  and  ff^est  Banks,  on  the  latter  of  which  is  a  black  Can  Buoy, 
and  on  the  former  a  white  Can  Buoy,  and  come  up  Channel-way  through  the 
Narrows.  Between  the  Can  Buoy  of  the  West  Bank*  and  the  bluff  of  Staten 
Island,  are  four  white  Spar  Buoys,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand. 
When  thus  far,  you  must,  to  pass  Fort  Diamond,  keep  Staten  Island  shore  aboard. 
The  mark  to  pass  Fort  Diamond  is  to  keep  Bedlow's  Island  open  with  the  point 
of  Long  Island ;  for  if  you  can  see  Bedlow's  Island  in  coming  through  the  Nar- 
rows, there  is  no  danger  from  the  Narrows  to  come  up  to  New- York ;  you  will 
steer  up  for  Bedlow's  Island  to  avoid  the  Mud  Flat,  on  which  four  black  buoys 
are  placed,  which  you  leaVe  on  your  starboard  hand;  this  flat  is  a  kind  of  oyster 
bed,  or  bank  of  mud  and  shells,  and  has  not  more  than  11  feet  on  it  at  low  wa- 
ter; but  to  avoid  this  flat  do  not  stand  too  far  to  the  westward,  on  account  6( 

*  The  light-house  on  Sandy  Hook  contains  a  ^fdttgAf.  It  is  lighted  with  18  patent  lamps, 
to  each  of  which  is  fixed  an  eighteen-inch  metallic  leflector.  The  strength  of  light  in  this 
lantern  is  greater  than  any  other  on  the  coast,  and  if  properly  attended,  may  be  seen  at  the 
distance  of  10  leagues.  ^ 


t,-j$,.j^4;.. 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


107 


Hobbin's  Reef,  (between  which  and  Bedlow's  Island  are  three  white  Spar  Buoys) 
which,  to  avoid  running  on  the  west  side  of  the  channel,  the  mark  is  to  keep  the 
point  of  land  up  the  North  River  (on  which  Fort  Lee  stands)  open  with  the  east 
side  of  Bedlow's  Island,  after  which,  there  is  nothing  material  to  obstruct  the 
navigation  to  New- York,  it  being  very  steep  near  the  point  of  Governor's  Island, 
and  the  rocks  near  the  Battery  do  not  exceed  100  yards  from  the  sliure.  There 
are  three  reefs  of  rocks  in  the  East  River,  viz.  one  off  the  north  side  of  Governor's 
Island,  with  15  feet  water  oq  it;  one  off  the  Battery,  having  9  feet  over  it,  and 
one  off  Corlaer's  Hook,  which  is  very  dangerous;  they  may  ger«rally  be  distin- 
guished at  all  times  by  the  rip  of  tide  going  over  them,  both  flooJ  and  ebb. 

Other  Directions.— Or  you  may,  after  making  the  Highlands  u[  ^sversink,  run 
boldly  in  within  3  miles  of  the  beach,  and  in  steering  along  to  the  northward, 
observe  to  keep  in  about «  fathoms  water,  until  you  get  the  lightj-house  to  bear 
W.  i  N.  then,  if  you  have  a  round  hill,  called  Mount  Pleasant,  some  distance  in 
Jersey,  in  one  view  with  the  land  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  southward 
of  the  light-house,  you  are  in  a  situation  to  pass  the  bar ;  steer  in  W.  by  N.  until 
you  are  over  it ;  you  will  have  on  it  at  low  water,  S  fathoms :  when  over,  you  will 
be  in  4|  fathoms— pass  thO'Hook  and  light-house  about  half  a  mile,  at  which  dis- 
tance you  will  have  5  find  6  fathoms.  When  you  have  the  point  ol  the  Hook,  on 
which  the  beacon  stands,  hearings.  S.  E.  you  may  then  haul  to  the  southward,  and 
round  the  Hook,  and  come  to,  from  one  to  two  miles  distant,  the  Hook  bearing 
from  E.  to  N.  E.  in  good  holding  ground,  5  fathoms  water.  When  you  make 
Long  Island,  it  b  necessary  t«  keep  somewhat  in  the  oflingf  on  account  of  the 
East  Bank,  and  observe  the  same  marks  running  in  as  before-mentioned. 

SETTING  OF  THE  FLOOD  FROM  SANDY-HOOK. 

First  quarter,     -     -     -     S  W.  Third  quarter,     -     -     -    N.  W. 

Second   do.      -    -    -    West.  Last       doo         -    .    -    North. 


Directions  for  mUing  in  by  Sandy-Hook,  corresponding  with  tlie  Chart  referred  to 
in  page  86,  pmlishcd  by  Edmund  and  George  W.  Blunt. 

In  coming  up  with  the  Bar,  >vhen  midway  bet'veen  the  Buoys,  steer  W.  by  N. 
till  the  light  on  Sandy-Hook  ranges  with  the  easternmost  of  five  trees  on  the 
Highlands;  you  may  then  steer  W.  till  you  get  the  west  Beacon  on  the  point 
and  the  light-house  in  range,  and  so  keep  them  till  you  make  the  black  buoy  of 
the  S.  W.  Spit:  After  hauling  round  the  Spit,  steer  N.  by  E.  i  E.  until  you 
make  the  buoy  of  the  Upper  Middle,  but  be  careful  of  the  flood-tide,  which  sets 
directly  over  to  the  West  Bank ;  yog,  then  steer  N.  until  up  with  the  Narrows. 
The  mark  to  show  that  you  are  clear  of  the  West  Bank,  is  to  keep  Snake  Hill 
well  open  with  the  bluff  of  Staten  Island,  on  which  the  Telegraph  stands,  and 
where  a  light-house  will  be  erected,  to  exhibit  a  Jixed  light,  by  December,  1827. 


The  following  are  the  bearings,-  courses  and  distances,  of  the  Buoys  placed  in  tht 

harbour  of  New-  York. 

^  *  CAN  BUOYS. 

The  black  buoy  on  the  bar,  bearing  E.  by  N.from  the  light-house,  distant  3^  miles — rangeag 
with  the  light-house,  zjid  Mount  Pleasant  in  Jersey. 

The  white  buoy  on  the  bar,  bearing  E.  i  S.  from  the  light-house,  1|  miles  distant,  and 
S.  from  the  black  buoy,  14  miles  distant;  between  these  buoys  is  the  channel.  This  buol 
ranges  with  the  West  Beacon  and  Block  House. 

The  black  buoy  on  S.  W.  Spit  2i  miles  from  the  light-bouse,  bearing  N.  W.  by  W.  range 
with  the  West  Beacon  and  lightrhouse. 

The  white  buoy  on  the  Nole,  bearing  N.  W.  i^  N.  from  the  light-house,  distant  4 1-10  mil« 

The  black  buoy  of  the  Middle,  distant  5  miles  firom  the  light-house,  bearing  N.  15°  V 
ranges  with  the  East  Beacon  and  light-house. 

The  white  buoy  of  the  AVest  bank  N.  15°  W.  from  the  light-house,  6f  miles  distnnt— rang 
with  Snako  Hill  in  New  Jersey  and  the  bluiTof  Staten  Island,  where  the  light-house  is  to  I 
placed,  as  before-mentioned,  and  where  the  Telegraph  now  stands. 


108 


""""''  ^«^»--  co.„  ,.,„, 


Jiree  black  ipar  bui,  b«r«" ^^' ''"'  buoy  S  the Sn?""  ".'"■.'""'^  °f  'he  Spjt 
"•  «.  As  you  Das*  *h«  r      „  *^  '  bobbins'  Keef  an>i  n  jf       "  "'and. 

*     '  "'  corner  of  Maiden- 

n-^   .  ,. g  ''«''y,  1S27. 

T"^"™  »/  '^«  Coast  to  the  eo.(u,ara  an, 

"Shore:  but  if  •yo^^„„^!^'V''^^^^^ 

When  you  are  up  wUhM'     '^.*''''  direction,  see  S  ^An'^'^.^^^^^'oala  nearer 
enough  to  approach  thTm  .^>'"Sote«gue  Shoals,  in  15  fofj""'^'"^. 

^P  °««'-'y  with  Great  Egg  War.       '*'.''^"'  ''^^^^y>yi''^i-  T^^'^  '^  "  "^^r 
iead  on  approaching  th^ffiT^"''  *»"  the  Jersey shnn/^K'.^'*'*^^^'"  biing  vom 
:  from  Great  Egg  Kou.?'^'  ^"^  *=«««  ««  nSer  .nli  Jl"*  ^^^  ""^t  use^C 

^  nffPfv*""  "*'^'"  't-  "'' '  '"  ^"  this  route  ,0  fi.?h  ^''°"*  ^-  *'y  E-      # 

l^iS^fi^S^^^s  distant,  hearings  S  E  e  ''''''''' ""^'^^-^^^^       ^ 

|«  I^ot,  you  may  stared  on  I,,  .^'S'l^ands  of  JVev^  Jt^^^"  ^"^  'ost  in  1822  / 

^nd   till  you  a^  up  with  fh"*  ^^^P  ^  ""««  off  the  S  "^  ^'*"  '^^  nothing  of      • ' 
pook,  till  you  get  3  faT^  nm-     ^"""^^^^r,  cedar  trees  on  th   ^'"^  °^  Sandy  Hoofe 
[jou  will  be  2  or 4  mul.T!J.^J^'  °"  "»e  Outer  mdJ^% "°°^'  ^^en  near  the 
|n,  ,n  3  or  3i  fathoms  forfc*''l?^"^^-     On  thiffiaok  v^^^^'  ^*  ^^ich  time    ' 
^tte  short  of  its  north  point  t"^, ''«« ''""nding  as  ihe  Hnl^"«'  ^^^g*  off  and 
iKht-house  to  bear  W  f  c  "  ;  W  V^°«  ''*'^o'-«  you  reach^ri"  '*^''  «"d  «tops  a 
f  hich  will  bring  theuAth     ^-  ^^  S.  when  voumf,!^  •  *^^t' ^ou  will  brinic  the 
Beacon  light,  nlar  ti.eS.;  °"''  "  ''"le  on  the  Cbo,..!{  '™™«dlately  steer  if  W 

^-  ^-ription  Of  1^-,- -^^  .ith  ^the'  i^ite^"- ^  t^Z  £1 


% 


4 


♦ 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


109 


iddle. 


'■bay. 
Hook. 
Bank. 


to  be 
J- 


ong« 

the 

tical 
len- 

r. 

f 

)I(. 

ke 

^y  . 

le 

' 

er          :/ 

ir 

' 

u 

ir 

• 

e 

J'* 

•«.  : » 


If  yon  should  fall  in  with  the  east  end  of  Long  Island,  where  there  is  a  lixht- 
house,  which  does  not  differ  much  in  lutituc'te  from  Sandy  Iluok  liglit,  (but  differs 
very  considerably  in  soundings)  and  bound  to  the  westward  for  the  light-house, 
or  the  Highlands  of  Neversink,  you  must  come  no  nearer  to  Long-Ialand  than 
15  fathoms  watar;  in  this  route,  which  is  about  108  miles  from  Muntock  light  to 
Sandy  Hook  light  (and  the  courses  between  W.  by  S.  and  S.  W.  by  W.  |  W.)  it 
is  necessary  to  use  the  lead  after  you  run  80  miles,  at  which  time  you  will  come 
up  with  Fire  Islandik  light,  which  is  revolving,  and  know  how  you  approach  the 
Jersey  shore ;  15  fathoms  water  is  near  enough  at  night. 

If  you  should  pass  Nantucket  Shoals  in  8«3  N.  lat.  or  380  30'  or  39°  00'  or 
99^  SO',  you  will,  if  possible,  observe  when  you  leave  the  Gulf  Stream,  from 
which  about  10  leagues,  you  may  begin  to  expect  soundings,  and  a  S. 
W.  current,  as  soon  as  you  get  soundings ;  then  the  observation  by  lead  and  line, 
is  to  aid  the  navigator. 

If  you  are  on  soundings,  and  running  in  for  the  land  to  the  northward  of  both 
the  Egg  Harbours,  the  northern  one  (which  is  often  called  thp  burning  hole)  lies  in 
lat.  39°  30'  north ;  being  near  the  land,  and  steering  the  above-mentioned  course, 
and  you  find  you  have  suddenly  deepened  your  water  from  less  to  IS^fathoms, 
heave  about  immediately,  for  many  vessels  have  been  deceived  by  a  hole  in  these 
soundings,  of  the  dimensions  of  about  four  acres  of  ground,  and  have  been 
totally  lost.  [See  Chart  of  New-York  harbour,  published  by  Edmund  &6  George 
W.  Blunt,  154  Water-street,  corner  of  Maiden-lane,  New-York.] 

If  you  are  beatingto  windward,  off  the  Hook,  waiting  for  a  pilot,  or  for  a  wind 
(night  or  day)  in  standing  to  the  northward,  when  you  suppose  the  light-house  of 
the  Hook  bears  W.  by  S.  it  is  near  enough.  When  you  approach  L  j>ng  Island, 
the  soundings  are  fine  white  sand  and  siball  pebbles ;  but  on  the  Jersey  shore 
the  soundings  are  coarser  and  darker.  There  is  what  is  called  a  Hook  channel 
in  this  channel;  the  soundings  are  mud  and  sand. 

W.  S.  W.  and  E.  N.  E.  moon  makes  full  sea  at  the  Hook.    Variation  h«V ' 
point  W.       « 


Descriptioh  of  New-York  Bay. 

New- York  Bay  is  9  miles  long,  and  4  broad,  and  spreads  to  the  southward  before 
the  city.  It  is  formed  by  the  confluence  of  East  and  Hudson's  rivers,  and 
embosoms  several  small  islands,  of  which  Governor's  Island  (on  which  are  Castle 
Williams  and  Fort  Columbus)  is  the  principal.  It  communicates  with  the  ocean 
through  the  Narrows,  between  Staten  and  Long  Islands,  which  are  scarcely  two 
miles  wide.  The  passage  up  to  New- York  from  Sandy  Hook  (the  point  that 
extends  farthest  into  the  sea)  is  safe,  and  not  above  18  miles  in  length. 


.*»•: 


Directions  for  sailing  from  Sandy  Hook  light  to  Cape  May  lights 


t.. 


light-house  on  Cape  *Henlopen. 


When  sailing  from  Sandy  Hook  light-house,  soon  as  to  the  eastward  of  tl 
|bar,  steer  S.  if  night,  till  you  pass  Barnegat ;  if  day-time,  when  passing,  yoi 
may  go  nigh  the  breaker,  say  51  fathoms.    In  sailing  between  the  Highlands  ant 
Barnegat  in  the  day-time,  you  may  go  within  one-quarter  of  a  mile  of  the  lam 
if  the  wind  is  off  shore.    When  you  have  passed  Barnegat,  steer  S.  W.  by  S.  Ij 
or  11  league*,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  Great  Egg  Harbour,  which  has 
shoal  bank  one  league  from  the  shore,  that  has  not  more  than  6  feet  water  onit*^ 

This  land  may  be  known  by  itff  appearing  like  broken  islands,  with  the  Higl 
lands  of  f  Neversink  to  the  westward  of  Sandy  Hook,  which  has  a  singular  a| 


*  Cape  Henlopen  forms  the  S.  W.  point  of  Delaware  Bay,  and  is  20  miles  from  Cipc  Mi 
t  Neversink  Hills,  on  which  the  two  light-houses,  mentioned  in  page  86,  are  to  be  bid 

extend  N.  W.  and   S.  E.   about  S.  VV.  from  Sr.ndy   Hook,  on  the  Atlantic  Ocean,! 

Rariton  Bay,  and  u  firequently  the  first  land  dbcovercd  by  mariners,  i>hc.n  they  arri 


<s 


. 


•1 


lei 


high  xvX  Z"^»at  and  Capell,v  fh  ^"'''  ""^'^^  ^i" 

In  runn  rjK  for  r„    V/^®  a"  other  »!«,«  ^'"  ^'''e  12  feef  «f  ir  t!     *^»« 

pass  Ave  inJof^  K  p^'^  ^^-'«y.  M'hi/e«fi     •*'''•  *  '"S**  '^«t«-- 


«ot  more  than  12  ft  .  ^  ^'^ht,  15  01 


Way.  and  from  Cnn^u''^^'' ''"  «.    The  aoutir"^'- ""  '  "'«  J-'atJ 

-.e,  ^M.  E.'r.rs"^;'"^^-  i".  t:»:/ •  1;;"  rz  ;n^  ^„,* 

it  IS  danreroua  for  i.,„„  ™'" 
''*'  ''"^ge  vesseJa. 


during  the  winters         ^^*^^ ^Sg Harbour  ^ 
«ons  ; II  enab i'",! '°'"'"  »  Ph„  of  ?/«>'.  »»  far  a,  p„tibi'"'',1;- ■"?"  "f" 


often 

»nve- 

direc- 


*=«'-'-y  you  throuVr  i^o"^'^  '"  4  fathoms  thif  .^'''^'  ^^^^^i  you  W    '  ^"''/'K 

'ougn  tile  same  channej         '      "  ^^^^r  W.  S.  W  \vW  1      '^PPosite 

.  '  *  >  '  "^"'<^'^  course  wiJl 

^^  See  the  PJate.J 


•^ 


t 


J^'^^ 


•'i 


,m^ 


3 

'■*«!•,  ■ill 


Ui. 


i.n 


.  i"""''' 


# 


me;      '  •^''"  "*'* '«'«er  hoist  some 


i--^ss:^:s^-^gs5g- 


#  * 


V 


I  two 
Vhen 
I  wiii 

nt  nt 
Egg 
liter. 


I'd 


r^i 


¥' 


f 


't .   ■ 


# 


•■v 


'"*■ 


'■■■* 


,1 


V!    f 


••:«*; 


s 


>-# 


*  ♦ 


%••■ 


'^  I-  » 


4 


BLUMt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Ill 


f 


V\ 


■<».* 


bf  li 


"% 


,*4- 


i 


into  the  main  channel,  between  the  Brandywine  light-house  on  your  larboard, 
and  Cross  Ledge  on  your  starboard  hand,  bearing  N.  N.  W.  and  S.  S.  E.  from 
each  other,  distant  3  leagues.  Cross  Ledge  has  a  Beacon  Boat  with  one  mast, 
moored  on  it  in  summer ;  and  in  winter,  a  Buoy. 

In  running  the  above  course,  you  will  have  3,  SJ,  and  3,%  fathoms,  till  you  come 
near  the  main  channel,  when  you  will  deepen  into  r>  fathoms,  which  is  a  swash  that 
runs  up  to  the  eastward  of  the  Cross  ledge  ;  still  keep  your  N.  W.  by  W.  course 
.tlU  you  have  crossed  this  swash,  when  you  will  shoal  your  soundings  into  2j 
fathoms,  and  then  deepen  into  7  fathoms,  which  is  the  main  ship  channel,  when 
you  must  steer  N.  W.  till  you  have  only  5  fathoms,  which  is  on  the  Fourteen  Feet 
Bank,  (which  has  a  buoy  on  the  S.  S.  E.  end)  and  then  alter  your  course  to  N. 
N.  W.  for  Cross  Ledge.  One  league  distant  from  this  ledge  lies  a  slioal,  called 
Joe  Flogger,  bearing  W.  S.  W.  from  the  buoy.  , 


m 


1! 


m 

M 


Directions  for  sailing  in  by  *Cape  Henlopen  flights.' 

Bring  Cape  Henlopen  light  to  bear  W.  and  run  for  it  till  within  two  miles  ;  when 
abreast  of  it,  j'^ou  will  have  1 5  or  16  fathoms  water.  After  you  have  passed  it,  steer 
W.  S.  W.  till  you  bring  it  to  bear  E.  S.  E.  where  you  may  anchor  in  S  or  4 
fathoms.  Vessels  bound  into  the  Delaware,  coming  from  the  northward,  or 
having  fallen  to  the  northward  of  Cape  Henlopen,  should  be  careful  not  to  ap- 
proach nearer  than  12  fathoms  water,  until  they  have  got  into  the  latitude  of 
said  Cape,  to  avoid  the  Shoal  called  the  JFive  Fathom  Bank,  the  south  point 
of  which  bears  E.  h  S.  from  Cape  May,  distance  16  or  18  miles,  and  from  Cape 
Henlopen  E.  by  N.  30  to  32  miles.  The  extent  of  this  shoal  is  not  well  defined 
at  present. — Fifty  years  agojt  had  5  fathoms  water  on  it,  now  not  more  than  12 
feet,  in  a  N.  N.  E.  or  S.  S.  W.  direction.  This  shoal  is  peculiarly  dangerous,  as 
you  have  9  or  10  fathoms  water  close  to  it  on  the  inside,  and  the  same  on  the 
outside.  There  is  a  passage  inside  of  this  Shoal,  by  taking  your  soundings  from 
the  land  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  but  strangers  in  large  vessels  should  not  attempt  it. 

In  running  up  the  Bay,  keep  the  old  light-house  to  bear  S.  h  E.  until  you  pass 
the  Beacon  Boat  with  one  mast,  on  the  Brown,  distant  12  miles,  then  steer  N.  by 
W.  for  the  light-house  on  the  Brandywine  Shoal  until  you  come  within  half 
a  mile,  then  steer  N.  N.  W.  for  the  upper  part  of  the  Brandywine,  on  which 
there  is  a  Beacon  Boat  with  two  masts ;  then  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  for  the  lower 
part  of  the  Fourteen  Feet  Bank,  on  which  there  is  a  small  Buoy.  When  in  5 
fathoms  water,  steer  more  northerly,  until  you  deepen  your  water  into  6  and 
6i  fathoms ;  then  steer  a  point  more  westerly,  until  you  shoal  again  to  5  fathoms 
on  said  bank.  By  keeping  off  and  on  this  bank  you  will  be  certain  you  are  on 
the  western  side  of  the  channel,  until  you  come  up  abreast  of  the  Cross  Ledge, 
which  is  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel,  and  has  on  it  a  Beacon  Boat,  with  one 

*  Cape  Henlopen  lies  in  lat.  38°  47'  N.  and  in  long.  75°  07'  W.  There  is  a  light-house 
here,  a  few  miles  below  the  town  of  Lewis,  of  an  octagon  form,  handsomely  built  of  stone, 
115  feet  high,  and  its  foundation  nearly  as  much  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  containing  u  fixed 
light.  The  lantern  is  between  7  and  8  <eet  square,  lighted  with  8  lamps,  and  may  be  seen  in 
the  night,  10  leagues  at  sea.  Vessels  off  the  Delaware,  upon  hoisting  a  jack  at  the  fore-top- 
mast head,  will  be  immediately  furnished  with  a  pilot.  None,  however,  arc  to  be  depended 
sn,  unless  they  have  branches,  and  a  certificate  from  the  Board  of  Wardens  of  Philadelphia. 

tNoTiCG  TO  Marikgr's. — A.  Bettcoii  liglit-liouse  has  been  erected,  and  is  now  lighted  with  a 
brilliant  light,  that  can  be  seen  six  leagues.  It  stands  on  the  extreme  north  end  of  Cape  Hen- 
lopen, very  near  the  beach."  It  bears  N.  5  W.  J  of  a  mile  from  the  Old  light-house.  Ships 
running  in  for  Old  Kiln  Roads,  may,  when  the  Beacon  light  and  the  light-house  ore  in  one, 
approach  the  Beacon  light  within  a  cable's  length  ;  then  steer  VV.  N.  VV.  until  the  Old  light- 
house bears  S.  E.  and  anchor  in  4  fathoms,  good  holding  ground. 

i  The  ship  China  and  her  cargo,  worth  half  a  million  of  dollars,  were  lost  on  .this  Shoal, 
•nd  many  more  vessels  would  have  shared  the  same  fate,  was  it  not  for  the  vigilance  of  the 
Delaware  Pilots.  Government  contemplates  placing  a  Jioaling  light  vessel  on  or  near  the 
•outh  point. 


'm. 


Hi 


-3| 


t 


il 


-<i: 


l>t( 


112 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


mast,  in  summer ;  and  in  winter,  a  Baoy.  The  channel  here  is  very  narrow, 
not  more  than  li  mile  wide.  You  will  then  be  nearly  up  to  the  upper  end  of  the 
Fourteen  Feet  Bank,  where  there  is  placed  from  March  to  December  a  floating 
Light  Vessel,  with  one  light,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand.  Froqa 
thence  to  Upper  Middle  is  four  miles,  on  which  ther«  is  a  Buoy ;  it  has  S  or 
3i  fathoms  at  low  water  on  it.  You  may  go  to  the  westward  of  the  Middle 
in  4  or  4^  fathoms  soft  bottom ;  to  the  eastward  there  is  6  or  7  fathoms,  hard 
bottom.  This  is  the  main  ship  channel :  The  course  from  the  Mid/le  to  Bom- 
bay Hook  bar  is  N.  W.  twelve  miles — you  must  not  approach  this  bar  nearer 
than  5^  fathoms,  as  it  is  steep  too.  From  Bombay  Hook  to  Reedy  Island,  thtt 
course  is  N.  W.  distant  eighteen  miles.     [See  Appendix.] 


^ 


«        Directions  from  Reedy  Island  to  Philadelphia. 

Being  up  with  Reedy  Island,  (which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand,  to  the 
north  of  which  lies  a  shoal)  you  have  also,  on  the  starboard  hand,  Fort  Delaware, 
in  which  is  a  lantern  erected  to  guide  the  mariner  in  his  passage,  and  which  you 
leave  on  the  starboard  hand.  This  Fort  is  buHt  on  the  Pea  Patch,  and  while 
passing  it,  keep  your  larboard  hand  best  on  board  till  you  bring  the  river  to  bear 
N.  E.  or  N.  E.  by  N.  when  you  may  stand  up  for  New-Castle.  This  place  is  40 
miles  from  Philadelphia.  When  you  have  passed  it  about  a  mile,  you  give  the 
larboard  hand  a  birth,  ^s  there  is  a  flat  shoal  near  half  a  mile  off.  If  you  have  a 
ifair  wind,  you  may  keep  in  the  middle  of  the  river.  This  river  winds  from 
New-Castle  to  Marcus  Hook,  from  N.  E.  to  E.  N.  E.  distant  20  miles.  Your 
course  from  this  to  Chester  Island  is  N.  E.  by  E.  4piiles,  leaving  said  island  on 
your  starboard  hand,  and  Tinicum  and  Maiden  Ishinds  on  your  larboard  hand, 
keeping  your  starboard  hand  best  on  board,  till  you  come  up  with  *Billing's 
port,  (which  is  12  mile^  from  Philadelphia)  when  you  will  haul  i^  for  Mud 
Fort ;  but  before  you  come  up  with  this  fort,  you  will  see  a  black  buoy  in  chan- 
nel way,  which  you  may  go  close  to.  Run  direct  for  this  fort,  which  is  an  E. 
N.  E.  course,  till  you  are  abreast  of  it,  when  you  will  sec  a  «mall  island  on 
your  larboard,  and  another  on  your  starboard  hand,  which  you  must  go  between. 
When  you  have  passed  between  these  islands,  steer  E.  by  N.  two  miles,  when 
you  must  haul  up  N.  E.  by  N.  for  Gloucester  point,  distant  one  mile,  from  which 
you  must  keep  your  larboard  hand  best  on  board,  and  steer  N.  three  miles,  which 
win  carry  you  opposite  Philadelphia. 


TIDE  TABLE. 


MOON  < 


f  8.  E.  by  E. 
S.E. 
S.E. 
S.  S.  £. 
S.  by  E. 


1 


8.  S.  W. 
V  S.  W. 


make  full  sea  at  ' 


Cape  May. 

Cape  Henlopen. 

Brown  and  Brandywinek 

Bombay  hook. 

Reedy  Island.  -y- 

New<Gastle.  ■v«^ 

Chester,  -       .   . 

Philadelphia. 


■  ETTINO   OF   THE   TIDES   WITHIIf   THE   BAT   OF   THE   CAPEf. 


First  quarter  flood, 
Second  to  last  quarter, 
First  quarter  ebb. 
Second  to  last  quarter,  . 

■  t 


W.  N.  W. 

N.  N.  W. 
£.  >^.  E. 
o.  o.  hi* 


*  This  is  a  high  sandy  point  and  bluff. 


K, 


8  . 

9 

6< 


narrow, 

id  of  the 

floating 

From 

las  3  or 

Middle 

18,  hard 

to  Bom- 

ir  nearer 

and,  thft 


•»' 


i,  to  the 
hlatoarct 
lich  you 
nd  while 
r  to  bear 
ace  18  40 
give  the 
u  have  a 
id8  from 
i.  Your 
Bland  on 
rd  hand. 
Billing's 
ur  Mud 
Q  chan- 
is  an  E. 

and  on 
letween. 

;,  when 
which 

I,  which 


InOk 


11 


ETiontwil  ^f\>r    the  Jnifriraii  Cvost  I'ilot . 


/  is 


ItirtfirJ  Mtt 


■■■■■-.  \' \x  A  /  %/y'  i  ^Ku .  # 

^•'--'''V..    >;7/;^  \\n^^^^^^^  t^  7      V\. 


!   V  \ 


\t(f     •••. 


-.^T^ 


M 


\     >< 


t«f 


iU 


ij 


^fflr    the  Jinfrua$i  C<urit  PUot . 


Ftit-fFaot 


mm 


I  • 


When  3 
4  miles,  f. 
£.  i  E.  fr( 
and  3  leag 
former  hai 
from  land 
Chickens, 
you  judg 
steer  S.  I 
league  sh 
lopen,  17j 
are  ^0  am 


^ 


•^ 


Remarks 

Rehobo 
only  for  st 
Finwick's 
rates  Dela 
6  or  7  fat] 
the  southi 
shoalis,  yo 
Charles  n 
good  harh 
leave  Chii 
S leagues 
on  the  ba 
soundii^s 
2  fathoms 

In  runn 
the  larboa 
in  to  the  ] 

To  the 
From  th« 
ter  beds. 

These  ? 
shore  with 
E.  N.  E.  s 
is  to  stand 
into  the  h 
end  of  th< 
ther  on  th 
W.  for  th 
shoals  lies 
part  of  thi 
5  or  6  leaj 
some  plac 
itude  of  3' 
of  Cape  1 
and  a  stro 


In  com 
called  Ho 
andalgolV 

♦  This  ( 
Chesape&b 
containing 


llLUNl's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOJ. 


113 


Directions  from  Cape  Henlopen  to  *Cape  Henry. 

When  you  leave  Cape  Henlopen,  bound  to  Cape  Henry,  give  it  a  birth  of  3  or 
4  miles,  ?.nd  steer  S.  S.  E.  ll-i  leagues,  as  there  is  a  shoal  bank  that  lies  S.  by 
E.  h  E.  from  Cape  Henlopen,  11  leagues  distant,  called  Finwick's  Island  shoal, 
and  3  leagues  from  Finwick's  shoal,  S.  by  E.  lies  Winter  Quarter  shoal:  the 
former  has  10  feet  water,  and  the  latter  13  feet  on  it.  They  lie  about  5  leagues 
from  land.  If  you  turn  in  or  out  by  Cape  Henlopen,  be  careful  of  the  Hen  and 
Chickens,  which  lie  S.  E.  by  E.  from  said  Cape,  two  leagues  distant.  When 
you  judge  yourself  to  the  southward  of  Winter  Quarter  shoal,  then  you  may 
steer  S.  by  W.  5  or  6  leagues,  which  will  bring  you  to  the  length  of  Chinco-^ 
league  shoals,  which  lie  in  lat.  37°  58'  N.  bearing  due  south  from  Cape  Hen-" 
lopen,  17i  leagues  distant,  and  two  leagues  from  land:  between  it  and  the  shore 
are  »0  and  12  feet  water. 


Remarks  on  the  land  from  Cape  Henlopen  to  Chincoteague  Shoals. 

Rehoboth  bay  lies  9  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  light-house.  This  bay  is 
only  for  small  vssiels  that  draw  not  more  than  6  feet  water.  The  north  end  of 
Finwick's  Island  lies  15  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  light-house,  and  sepa- 
rates Delaware  from  Maryland.  It  has  a  grove  of  treeS'On  it,  and  you  will  have 
6  or  7  fathoms  water,  within  a  league  of  the  land,  and  a  strong  current  setting  to 
the  southward.  When  you  arc  within  half  a  mile  of  Finwick  and  Chincoteague 
shoaUi,  you  will  have  12  fathoms  water.  The  land  from  Chincoteague  to  Cape 
Charles  »r<akes  broken  land,  with  islands,  and  several  small  inlets.  There  is  a 
good  harbour  within  Chincoteague  shoals,  which  goes  by  the  same  name.  You 
leave  Chincoteague  shoals  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  ^atomkin  harbour  about 
S  leagues  W.  S.  W.  from  Chincoteague.  Matomkin  harbour  has  12  feet  water 
on  the  bar  at  spring  tides.  In  running  in  for  the  bar,  you  will  have  gradual 
soundii^s  from  7  fathoms.  One  cable's  length  from  the  bar  you  will  have  2|  to 
2  fathoms. 

In  running  over  the  bir,  keep  the  north  shore  on  board,  and  steer  S.  W.  On 
the  larboard  hand,  one  mile  from  the  bar,  give  the  point  a  small  birth,  and  round 
in  to  the  N.  W.  and  anchor  in  4  fathoms  water. 

To  the  northward  of  tlie  bar,  one-quarter  of  a  mile,  lies  the  wreck  of  a  vessel. 
From  th«  bar  up  the  inlet,  the  navigation  is  very  dangerous,  being  filled  with  oys- 
ter beds. 

These  are  very  dangerous  harbours  in  a  gale  of  wind,  but  you  may  ride  along 
shore  with  the  wind  from  N.  W.  to  S.  W.  When  the  wind  blows  hard  at  N.  E.  or 
E.  N.  E.  and  you  are  in  sight  of  Chincoteague  shoals,  your  only  chance  for  safety 
is  to  stand  to  the  southward  ;  for  you  cannot  clear  the  land  to  the  northward  or  go 
into  the  harbour  of  Chincoteague,  which  lies  about  N.  W.  6  miles  from  the  south 
end  of  the  shoals.  When  the  wind  is  to  the  eastward,  it  is  generally  thick  wc  .- 
ther  on  the  coast.  After  you  pass  the  southward  of  Chincoteague,  steer  S.  S. 
W.  for  tha  light-house  on  Cape  Henry,  for  the  northern  part  of  Machapungo 
shoals  lies  4  or  5  leagues  to\he  northward  of  Smith's  Island,  and  the  southern 
part  of  them  comes  near  abreast  of  said  island.  In  steering  to  the  S.  W.  westward, 
5  or  6  leagues  S.  E.  of  Smith's  Island,  you  will  hafre  12  or  13  fathoms,  and  in 
some  places  3  ^nd  4  fathoms.  When  you  are  20  leagues  from  the  land,  in  the  lat- 
itude of  37^  30',  you  will  have  from  30  to  35  fathoms  :  hut  when  to  the  southward 
of  Cape  Henry,  you  will  have  from  7  to  8  fathoms,  within  a  league  of  the  land, 
and  a  strong  southerly  current,  which  in  general  runs  from  2  to  3}  knots  an  hour. 


Directions  for  vessels  boun^io  the  Capes  of  Virginia. 

In  coming  from  sea  and  falling  into  tlie  northward,  you  may  make  an  island 
called  Hog  Island,  which  has  a  ehoal  on  the  N.  £.  side,  5  miles  froih  the  island, 
and  al»o  Machapungo  Island ;  the  latter  is  a  smaller  island.  Hog  Island  and  Smith's 

♦  This  Cape  lies  12  miles  S.  by  W.  of  Cap*  Charles,  both  of  which  form  the  entrance  of 
Chesape&ke  bay.  On  it  is  a  light-house  whose  lantern  is  elevated  130  feet  above  £be  sea, 
containing  a  fixed  light.  i'- 

15 


1 


r 


114 


Island, 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT* 


r^ 


If  you  int> 
you  may  go  ' 
Ibss,  if  you  cii 
way  from  then< 


about  0  or  7  leagues  from  each  other,  and  a  stranger  may  take 
the  one  for  the  other.  Hog  Island  is  longer  than  Smith's,  and  the  trees  stand 
more  open,  and  arc  not  so  thick  as  un  Smith's  Island,  and  in  going  on  to  the  south- 
ward from  off  Hog  Island,  you  will  make  Sand  Hills  which  lie  between  Hog 
Island  and  Smith's  Island,  being  a  sure  mark  you  have  not  passed  Smith's  Island. 
Be  careful  not  to  come  nearer  than  7  fathoms  when  off  the  sand  hills,  as  nearer 
than  that  depth  the  ground  is  broken. 

Smith's  Island  is  the  first  island  after  passing  the  sand  hills  above  mentioned ; 
on  the  northern  end  of  it  there  arc  some  straggling  trees  which  appear  like  a 
grove,  but  which  join  on  to  the  island.     As  you  draw  up  with  Smith's  Island, 
'^Smyou  may  haul  into  6  and  5  fathoms,  till  you  get  near  abreast  of  it. 

Smith's  Island  is  a  good  place  to  anchor  under,  with  the  winds  from  N.  N.  W. 
_t.o  W.  N.  W.  and  /essels  often  come  too  there  if  the  wind  is  coming  out  from  N. 
*and  westward. 

1  to  ati>"hpr  there,  bring  it  to  bear  W.  S.  W.  and  run  for  it,  and 

.''  ,i(:Ki  as  your  draft  of  water  will  admit,  into  three  fathoms  or 

:  ;  .:■  will  have  blue  mud  and  sand,  and  when  you  gei  tinder 

stee.'  K  ,  hy  W.  till  you  cross  the  North  channel  m  71  fathoms; 

keep  on  until  you  raise  y.  "   -round  into  5  fathoms  on  the  Middle  Ground,  then 

steer  S.  W.  Avhich  will  cross  the  Middle  in  4  fathoms ;  keep  on  S.  W.  until  "•'^ou 

deepen  ioto  6  or  7  fathmns,  ship  channel ;  then  with  a  strong  breeze  steer  W.  by 

N.  which  will  carry  you  across  in  deep  water  until  you  raise  your  ground  on  the 

Horse-Shoe.    When  at  anchor  under  Snlith's-  Island,  Cape  Henry  light  bears 

about  S.  g.  W. 

In  coming  in  from  the  southward,  bound  to  Cape  Henry,  keep  in  7  fathoms 
until  ydif. begin  to  draw  up  with  False  Cape,  which  lies  about  7  leagues  from 
Cape  Henry  towards  (^urrituck;  then  9  to  10  fathoms,  is  full  near  enough  to 
False  Cape.  After  you  have  got  to  the  northward  of  False  Cape,  you  may  then 
keep  agam  in  7,  C,  -ind  9  fathoms  (ship  channel)  till  you  get  up  with  Cape  Henry. 
From  off  Roanoke  the  soundings  along  shore  is  hard  sand  all -along  until  nearly 
up  with  Cape  Henry,  when  it  is  sticky  bottom,  and  you  will  be  in  channel  way. 

The  shore  between  False  Cape  and  Cape  Henry  makes  in  like  a  bay,  some- 
thing like  Lynhaven  Bay,  and  in  thick  weather  a  stranger  might  mistake  it  for 
Lynhaven  Bay,  and  False  Cape  for  Cape  Henry,  if  it  is  so  thick  that  the  light- 
house on  the  latter  cannot  be  seen ;  but  in  round  False  Cape  it  is  all  hard  bot- 
tom, and  in  Lynhaven  Bay  it  is  soft  or  sticky  bottom,  and  in  som6^  pMHces  very 
tough  bottom. 

The  passage  between  Cape  Charles  and  Outer  Middle  is  little  kfiown,  and  not 
frequented  by  large  vessels.  It  is  only  used  by  small  vessels'  6f  8  or  10  feet 
water. 


Directions  for  Hampton  Roads. 

When  abreast  of  *Cape  Henry  light  steer  W.  by  N.  or  W.  J  N.  till  you  get  on 
the  Horse-Shoe,  in  5  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.  There  are  no  soundings  at  5  fa- 
thoms on  those  courses  between  Cape  Henry  and  the  Shoe.  The  first  sound- 
ings on  the  Shoe,  on  those  courses,  are  6  or  7  fathoms,  a  sticky  or  tough  bottom, 
and  the  distance  about  4  miles  from  Cape  tftnry  light,  but  the  5  fathoms  sandy 
is  about  a  mile  farther  on  the  Shoe  (say  about  5  miles  from  Cape  Henry  light) 
where  vessels  can  anchor.  Then  steer  west  until  you  get  on  the  south  side  of 
the  channel,  for  an  ebb  tide ;  but  tide  aflood,  steer  W.  J  N.  or  W.  by  N.  Those 
courses  will  carry  you  into  5  fathoms  on  the  south  side,  then  you  may  steer  W. 
N.  W.  which  will  carry  you  into  6  or  7  fathoms,  sticky  bottom,  until  nearly  up 

*  Cape  Henry  ligbt.4iouie  is  situated  on  the  larboard  band  going  in,  is  about  120  feetAom 
the  surface  of  the  wat^r,  containing  a/iored  light,  and  cannot  be  seen  a  great  distance.  There 
is  a  htiuse  erected  near  the  light-house,  for  the  accommodation  of  pilots. 


^^ 


.1-. 


e 


.ii" 


''m 


I  get  on 
Vt  5  fa- 
sound- 
>ttoin, 
I  sandy 
,  light) 
bide  of 

l^hose 
lerW. 

rly  up 

ptiirom 

1  There 


HtvAer  *fuh>*<H. 


^t^nritf  f'T  (f<i  ,imrt"'"  '•••'■-'^  ^'"'■■^  -^  ''•/■■'•L. 


■\t  r^r  (fit-  ,tw"-">  '•■"'■f  i'i'"t  Ji  '''^^•f. 


J'.hy  'ili> 


>v'tth 
W.  by 
care  an 
being  s 
light  to 
anchori 
Sowell' 
in  l4  oi 
up  S. 
fathonii 
fort  beai 
If  re< 
bay,  yc 
lead  to 


\ 


HLlJNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


llo 


^^\til  *WiUouti;hby's  Point:  then  bring;  Old  Point  Comfott  light  to  bear  west,  or 
W.  by  8.  and  run  for  it  until  nearly  up  with  it  (say  withm  half  a  mile)  but  take 
care  and  go  no  nearer  to  Hampton  Baron  the  north  side,  than  10  fathoms,  it 
being  steep  too;  then  haul  up  S.  W.  by  W.  till  you  brinp  Old  Point  Comfort 
light  to  bear  about  N.  W.  then  steer  S.  W.  for  the  Roads,  ft,  fl,  or  7  fathoms,  good 
anchoring,  but  go  no  nearer  to  the  south  shore  than  9  fathoms,  lost  the  bar  off 
Sowell's  Point  hooks  you  in.  Should  you,  after  passing  Willoughliy's  Point,  fall 
14  or  15  fathoms,  fOld  Point  Comfort  light-htuise  bearing  VV.  N.  W.  steer 


m 


up  S.  W.  by  W.  but  go  no  nearer  to  Ifampton  bar  on  the  north  side  than  10 
fathoms,  it  being  steep  too,  until  you  pass  Sowell's  Point,  when  Old  Point  Com- 
fort bearing  N.  E.  you  will  fall  into  7,  8,  and  1)  fathoms,  good  anchoring. 

If  requisite,  when  entering  the  Capes,  and  advisable  to  anchor  in  Lynhaven 
bay,  you  may  run  in  with  the  light-house  bearing  W.  by  S.  as  this  course  will 
lead  to  the  channel  way,  in  from  7  to  10  fathoms,  sticky  bottom.  It  is  then 
proper  to  take  soundings  towards  the  southern  sljore ;  and,  in  order  to  this, 
steer  west  until  you  have  advanced  to  a  short  distance  from  the  light-house,  then 
rounding  the  pomt  you  may  haul  in  the  bay,  and  drop  an  anchor  as  most  con- 
venient, in  from  7  to  4  fathoms. 

RcMAKKB.— In  steering  W.  N.  W.  as  before-mentioned,  should  youdeepenyour 
water  to  9  or  10  fathoms,  or  more,  you  may  know  you  have  passed  the  bar  off 
Willoughby's  point. 

If  going  along  on  the  south  side  you  shoalen  your  water  from  b  fathoms,  haul 
off  to  the  northward  and  keep  in  about  6  or  7  fathoms,  till  you  judge  yourself 
nearly  up  with  Willoughby's  point :  go  no  nearer  to  it  than  7  fathoms.  By 
hauling  to  the  northward  you  willHeepen  the  water. 

On  the  Horse-Shoe  side,  the  bottom  is  hard  sand,  and  on  the  s  >uth  side  it  is 
soft  bottom,  until  drawing  on  to  Willoughby's  point,  where  it  is  hard  :  therefore, 
being  on  the  south  side,  where  the  ground  is  suit,  you  may  always  know  draw- 
ing up  with  Willoughby's  point  as  soon  as  you  get  hard  sandy  bottom.  Then 
haul  off  as  before  directed,  for  Old  Point  Comfort  light. 

Of  the  Thimble. — It  is  a  small  lump  S.  W.  from  the  Horae-shoe,  with  about 
£  fathoms  water  on  it.  It  is  steep,  too,  say  7  fathoms,  but,  being  small,  it  is 
quickly  passed.  It  lies  a  little  below  Willoughby's  point,  on  the  opposite  side, 
to  avoid  which  is  the  reason  why  it  is  necessary  to  get  soundings  first  on  the 
Horse-Shoe.  The  Thimble  is  about  1 J  or  2  miles  off  the  shore.  Near  the  Thim- 
ble you  will  have  sticky  bottom,  and  on  the  Horse-Shoe  liard  sand. 

Back  river  point  bearing  N.  N.  W.  you  are  abreast  of  the  Thimble. 

There  is  good  anchoring  all  ovei;  the  Shoe,  from  34  to  4  miles  from  land  to  the 
tail  or  outer  part  of  it,  and  nigher  in  shore  for  small  vessels. 

As  the  setting  of  the  tide  varied  much  at  different  stages  thereof,  attention 
should  be  paid  as  well  to  the  bearing  of  the  light  as  to  the  soundings,  when  run- 
ning up  from  the  cape  to  Willoughby's  point,  for  fear  you  cross  the  channel. 

From  Hampton  Road  to  Norfolk  the  channel  is  too  intricate  for  strangers  to 
approach  without  a  pilot,  and  they  must  anchor  in  the  Road. 

A  vessel  having  a  light  at  her  mast-head  has  been  placed  at  the  extremity  of 
Craney  island  flats,  in  Elizabeth  river,  in  4i  fathoms  Water. 


Directions  for  sailing  in  by  Cape  Henry  light-house. 

When  coming  from  sea  in  the  latitude  of  Cape  Henry,  you  meet  with  sound- 
ings about  25  leagues  off,  which  you  may  observe  by  the  colour  of  the  water. 

'*'  A  floating  light  vessel  has  been  stationed  off  Willoughby's  Spit,  in  3^  fatbonis  water: — 

Old  Point  Comfortlight bearing  VV.  i  N.  distant 2  n>     s. 

Back  River  Point,  N.  J  W 3i      o. 

Cape  Henry  light,  E.  S.  E.  .        . 13         .». 

WUIeughby's  Bluff,  S.  8.  E 9      do. 

The  Bip  Raps,  W.  S.  W 3      do. 

Vessels  going  out  or  coming  into  Hampton  Roads,  should  not  pass  to  the  southward  of  the 
ligkt  vessel :  she  may  be  distinguished  from  the  light  at  Old  Point,  by  having  two lactenis-'-one 
more  elevated  than  the  other.    A  bell  will  be  mug  in  foggy,  wetter.  j 

t  Old  Point  Comfort  light-house  lies  on  the  starboard  hand,  bears  W.  N.  wS 
Henry  light,  5  leagues  distant,  and  is  the  guide  to  vessels  bound  to  Norfolk  oi^'.*^'^ 
It  contains  a, ^areif /%A^ 


V 


lilG 


BLL'NT'ri    AMERICAN'    COAST    PILOT. 


In  the  south  ed^e  of  the  bank  you  will  have  40  fathoms  water,  which  will  shoal 
to  20,  and  still  decreasras  you  approach  the  shore,  generally  sandy  bottom.  In 
clear  weather,  you  may  see  the  land  when  in  about  10  or  11  fathoms,  regu- 
lar soundings,  rtt  which  time  you  will  be  about  5  leagues  to  the  southward  of 
It.  To  the  northward  of  the  land,  in  6  fathoms,  the  soundings  are  irregular  and 
the  ground  coarser.  In  coming  in,  with  th<i  wind  northwardly,  vou  must  be 
careful  of  the  outer  part  of  the  Middle  Ground,  which  lies  9  miles  E.  N.  E.  from 
Cape  Henry,  and  7  miles  S.  E.  by  E.  from  Cape  Charles.  You  may  go  so  near  it 
as  to  bring  C;ipe  Henry  '  »  bear  W.  i  S.  which  will  carry  you  round  the  tail  of  it, 
in  4i  or  5  fathoms  warer,  when  you  will  deepen  into  11,  12,  or  13  tathoms,  and 
then  haul  aw;iy  for  the  hay,  the  Cape  being  steep  to.  The  channel  between  the 
Cape  and  Middle  Ground,  is  alxuit  4  miles  wide,  and  5  and  6  fathoms  water  close 
to  thft  latter.  When  Cape  Henry  light-house  bears  W.  N.  W.  ^  W.  distant 
about  S  leagues,  it  appears  thus : 


With  a  fair  wind  you  may  bring  the  light-house  to  bear  west;  but  if  you  have 
the  wind  ahead,  and  are  obliged  to  ttu'U  in,  you  may  stand  to  the  southward  till 
the  light-house  bears  N.  W.  by  N.  and  to  the  northward  till  it  bears  W.  by  S. 
You  will  have  9  or  10  fjithoms  Avithin  a  mile  of  the  light-house,  and  from  6  to  .0 
fathoms  close  to  the  Middle  Ground. 


General  Directions  for  the  Horse-Shoe. 

In  coming  in  by  Cape  Henry,  and  no  pilot,  with  a  free  wiud  and  commanding 
bree/.e,  tide  either  ebb  i>r  flood,  bring  Cape  Henry  light  to  bear  E.  S.  E.  and  steer 
W.  ..M.  VV.  and  you  will  ge.;  soundings  on  the  Shoe,  7,  6,  to  5  faihoms,  as  after 
describe  1 ;  after  that,  make  towards  the  south  side,  and  follow  directions  given 
lor  Hampton  Roads,  paj^fi  114. 

Tide. — The  Hood-tide  runs  in  round  Cape  Henry  and  Lynhaven  Bay,  until 
1 1  o'clock,  on  the  full  and  change,  and  out  of  the  way  of  the  Chesapeake  stream, 
it  flows  at  10;  in  Hampton  Roads,  at  10^.  The  tide  varies  considerably  in  its 
direction,  according  to  tlie  time  from  i-bb  to  Hood.  The  ebb  from  James  and 
York  rivers  sets  over  tht;  Middle  Ground  to  the  eastward,  which  renders  navi- 
gation thereabout  dangerous  in  the  night. 


Directions  for  ^New  Point  Comfort. 

When  you  bring  Cape  Henry  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  you  may  steer  N.  N.  W.  t! 
leagues,  which  cotu'se  and  distance  will  carry  you  to  New  Point  Comfort.  There 
is  a  Shoal  which  lies  east  from  the  Point,  distant  two  miles,  and  four  rivers  that 
empty  into  this  bay,  or  harbour,  viz.  Severn  River,  Way  River,  North  River, 
and  East  River.  These  rivers  are  all  navigable  for  vessels  of  50  or  60  tons,  and 
considerable  phioes  of  trade. 

"Vessels  at  anchor  in  Ntnv  Point  Comfort  are  exposed  to  the  wind  from  E.  S. 
K.  to  S.  E.  and  I  would  therefore  rermninend  in  that  case  to  go  into  Severn 
River,  where  they  will  lie  safe  from  all  winds.  Your  directions  for  this  port  are 
to  bring  the  south  point  of  N«'W  Point  Comfort  to  bear  E.  by  S.  and  steer  W. 
by  N.  2  leagues,  which  course  you  will  continue  till  Severn  River  bears  W.  S.  W. 
when  you  must  st<!er  into  the  river  W.  S.  W.  or  S.  W.  by  W.  which  will  carry 
you  safe,  where  you  may  lie  land-locked  from  all  winds.  In  running^  for  this 
river  you  will  make  two  bunches  of  trees  on  your  larboard  hand,  which  at  a 
distance  appear  like  two  islands,  but  as  you  approach  them  you  will  find  they 

*  On  New  Point  Comfort,  whica  forms  the  eastern  aide  of  Mockjack  Bay,  is  a  Hght-house 
containinK  a  fixed  light. 


BLUNTS    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


117 


-irc  on  tlie  main  land.  In  going  into  this  river,  you  must  keep  your  lead  going, 
keep  in  the  niiddle,  and  go  between  two  points  of  marsh,  and  you  will  have 
no  more  than  3  fathoms  hetweiin  New  Point  Comfort  and  Severn  River,  mudd^ 
bottom.    You  may  go  to  sea  from  this  river  with  the  wind  from  S.  W.  to  N.  W  . 


!.|-U>- 


s. 

rem 
are 
W. 

w. 

trry 
this 
t 


Directions  for  running  from  Cape  Henry  up  the  Baij  to  Baltimore. 

When  you  come  in  from  sea,  and  are  hound  up  the  bay,  bring  Cape  Henry- 
light  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  and  steer  N.  N.  W.  about  4  leagues,  which  will  carry  you 
to  the  noithward  and  westward  of  the  Middle  Ground,  that  lies  between  the  two 
capes,  and  when  you  have  Smith's  Island  (off  Cape  Charles)  to  bear  E.  by  S. 
you  will  be  to  the  northward  of  the  shoal  part.  If  you  have  the  wind  ahead, 
and  are  obliged  to  turn  to  windward,  you  must  not  stand  further  to  the  eastward 
after  the  light-house  (or  the  cape)  bears  S.  S.  R.  as  the  western  part  of  the  Mid- 
dle Ground  is  steep.  In  standing  to  the  westward,  you  may  go  into  .SJ  and  4  fa- 
thoms without  danger ;  but  in  standing  to  the  eaHtward,  you  must  not  go  into 
less  than  t  fathoms,  as  you  will  be  near  the  Middle  Ground.  If  you  wish  to 
anchor  at  New  Point  Cowifort,  which  bears  from  the  cape  about  N.  W.  by  N. 
distant  8  leagues,  you  must  take  care  of  the  spit  that  runs  off  the  point  about 
S.  K-  2  miles.  Keep  to  the  westward  of  this  point  of  sand,  and  you  may  run  in 
uiider  the  point  and  anchor  in  4  or  0  fathoms  water,  fine  bottom,  where  you  will 
be  secure  fnnn  northerly  or  N.  E.  Avinds.  In  running  from  York  river,  when 
you  open  Iron  point  east  of  New  Point  light  and  bound  up  the  bay,  you  will 
pass  York  Spit,  in  3  fathoms  water.  After  you  are  clear  of  the  Middle  Ground, 
as  before  directed,  and  have  the  cape  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  and  a  fair  wind,  you  may 
steer  up  the  bay  nortli :  come  not  to  the  westward  of  noith  till  you  have  Gwin's 
Island,  which  "lies  off  Hill's  Bay,  3  leagues  north  from  New  Point  Comfort, 
to  bear  west,  to  avoid  a  dangerous  sh(»al,  called  the  "Wolf  Tr;ip.  which  lies 
N.  N.  E.  2.i  leagues  from  New  Point  Comfort  light,  and  S.  E.  by  E.  IJ|  league 
from  Gwin's  Island,  which  is  small.  From  the  Wolf  Trap  steer  north 
about  15  leagues,  which  will  carry  you  to  the  mouth  of  the  Potouiac.  When 
you  have  New  Point  Comfort  to  bear  west,  you  are  within  10  leagues  of 
Watt's  Island.  In  running  the  above  course  and  distance,  you  will  have 
from  10  to  4  fathoms  before  you  come  up  with  the  islands.  U",  you  should 
come  into  3  fathoms  as  you  approach  these  islands,  you  may  haul  a  little  to 
the  westward,  when  you  will  deepen  your  water.  Off  Wattu"  and  Tangier's 
Islands  the  soundings  slwalen  gradually.  If  you  want  to  go  into  Rappahan- 
nock River,  (at  the  north  entrance  of  wliicli  is  Windmill  Point,  ofl  which 
lies  a  light-vessel,  showing  two  lights,  bearing  E.  S.  E.  from  the  point,  5  miles 
distant,  which  is  about  G  leagues  to  the  northward  and  westward  of  New  Point 
Comfort,  and  li  league  from  Gwin's  Island,)  you  must,  when  it  bears  about  N. 
W.  run  for  it,  leaving  Piahitank  on  your  hirlioard  hand,  where  you  will  have 
from  7  to  3  fathoms.  The  spit  of  sand  S.  E.  from  New  Point  Comfort  extends 
nearly  5  miles  out,  at  which  distatie(>  is  .'i  and  4  fiithomi. 

If  you  wish  to  go  \f\Xo  Tangier  Sound,  bring  Windmill  Point  to  bear  S.  W.  by 
W.  steer  in  N.  E.  by  E.  and  yr)u  will  get  soundings  on  the  Tangier  bar  in  b  fa- 
thoms; the  cluster  of  trees  at  the  Kent  on  the  southern  Tangier  Island  will  bo 
then  seen  bearing  N.  E.  You  may  then  ed^e  off  and  on  the  southern  side  of  the 
bar  in  what  water  you  please,  from  3  to  ir>  fiithoms,  hard  sandy  bottom  ;  but  it 
is  not  adviseable  to  C(une  nearer  the  Tangier  bar  than  0  fati  oms,  as  it  shoalens 
from  6  fathoms  tn  K,  in  300  yards.  It  is  propt-r  to  fake  Hounditig!^  on  the  Walt's 
Island  Spit  side,  as  it  is  v<'ry  gradual.  Should  yon  \\\A\  to  anehor,  there  is  good 
holding  ground  of  sa  id  and  cl.y,  '/,.  Crockett's  house  hearing  N.  W.  and  you 
will  here  have  good  anchorage  for  small  vessels,  secure  from  all  winds  except 
those  from  the  southward  ami  westward.  In  proceeding  farther  up  the  Sound, 
keep  mid-channel  until  you  bring  the  house  on  Kedge  Island  to  bear  West;  then 
steer  immediately  for  the  clump  of  trees  on  it,  until  you  shoalen  your  water 
into£  fathoms,  then  steer  W.  N.  W.  through  the  straits,  and  when  you  bring  Frog 
point  to  bear  S.  by  E.  you  are  clear  of  the  end  of  the  Middle  Ground,  which 
lies  in  the  straits,  forming  two  channels :  Rtinc  then  in  3  fathoms  water,  you  will 


118 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


B^ 


steer  S.  S.  W.  to  clear  a  bar,  makini*  off  from  Holland's  Island  until  you  get  sulli- 
clent  water  to  stand  up  the  bay ;  this  bar  Is  between  4  and  5  miles  in  length,  the 
bottom  is  irregular,  and  of  hard  sand. 

Windmill  foint  is  remarkable,  and  it  appears,  when  bearing  W.  I  S.  7  miles 
distant,  as  represented  beneath. 


Vitw  of  fVindmxU  Paint,  at  (Ac  J^im-th  Entrimcc  of  tht  llapjmhannock. 

This  point  is  just  half-way  between  New  Point  Comlort  and  Smith's 
point.  The  Windmill  reef  now  extends  5  miles  from  the  ]»oiiit  to  the  S.  E.  by  E. 
and  forms  a  broad  shelf  of  2i,  ^,  and  1^  fathoms,  thence  shoaling  to  the  dry 
shore. 

As  you  come  up  with  the  larboard  head  of  the  river,  keep  your  soundings  on 
the  larboard  hand  from  3  to  7  fathoms,  and  not  deepen  your  water  moie  than  7 
fathoins  to  the  northward,  to  avoid  a  lonp;  spit  of  sand  that  runs  off  2  miles  S.  E. 
from  the  northern  head  of  the  river,  which  is  very  steep,  but  koep  round  the 
southern  head,  in  the  above  depth  of  watt-r,  where  you  may  anchor  in  7  or  8  fa- 
thoms, good  bottom,  and  lie  safe  from  all  winds. 

After  you  are  up  the  bay,  as  far  as  Watts'  Island,  and  have  it  to  bear  about  E. 
S.  E.  you  will  deepen  your  water  from  5  fathoms  to  10  and  12,  muddy  bottom. 
Continue  your  course  north,  until  Watts'  Island  boars  S.  E.  and  *Smith's  point 
light  (which  is  the  southern  head  going  into  Potomac  river)  bears  W.  southerly, 
when  you  will  be  in  10  or  12  fathoms  water. 

If  you  deepen  your  water  to  15  or  20  fathoms,  you  will  be  very  near  the  bad 
spit  or  shoal  that  runs  off  from  Smith's  point  into  the  bay  U  league. 

When  Smith's  point  light  bears  nearly  N.  by  W.  :1  W.  9  miles,  and  ap- 
pears as  represented  in  the  annexed  figiin;,  with  a  house  on  its  west  side  open,  it 
leads  in  a  fair  way  up  the  channel,  equally  clear  of  the  shoals  to  the  east  and  west. 

Smith's  Point  Li^kt-hnuff. 


! 


Keep  your  souiuliijj|,s  into  10  or  12  Catlioins  on  ihe  Tnngitir's  side,  as  before  di- 
rected; you  may  then  haul  up  N.  W.  by  N.  for  Point  Lookout,  which  is  the 
northerri  point  oi'  Potomac  river,  and  come  to  within  one  mile  of  tbe  point  on 
the  western  side  of  the  hiy,  and  have  i  or  5  fathoms  water,  muddj  bottom. 
When  you  are  uj)  with  Potomac  river,  and  would  wish  to  harbour,  iiaving  the 
wind  down  the  bay,  yo||irinay  run  in  round  Point  Lookout,  giving  it  a  small 
birth,  and  anchor  in  Cornfield  harbour,  so  called,  where  you  will  he  sheltered 
from  all  northerly  winds. 

When  you  are  up  as  far  as  Point  Lookout,  and  have  the  wind  ahead,  you  have 
a  good  channel  to  beat  in.  up  as  far  as  Patuxent  river.  You  may  stand  on  each 
tack  to  4  or  r*  fathoms,  hut  in  standing  to  the  eastward,  when  you  have  9  or  10 
fathoms,  it  is  best  to  tack,  as  the  ground  rises  suddenly  to  4  or  r>  fathoms,  and 
then  lessens  into  two,  hard  sand  ;  the  western  side  'is  more  regular-  Your 
course  from  Point  Lookout  to  Patuxent  river,  with  a  fair  wind,  is  N.  by  vV.  i  W. 

♦  A  light  house  is  erertcd  on  Smith's  point,  at  the  entrance  of  the  Potomac,  containing  a 
fixed  light.  From  this  point  a  lone;  shoal  or  bar  (  xttnils  out  into  the  bay,  on  the  end  of  which 
a  floating  light- vessel  has  been  stationed,  in  4jj  I'alhonis  wuter,  showing  but  one  light.  It  bears 
from  Smith's  point  light  E.  i^  N.  4J  miles. 

Vessels  passing  up  or  down  the  bay,  should  avoid  going  between  the  light-vessel  and  Smith's 
point.  A  light-house  will,  in  all  probability,  be  ereotcd  on  Fog's  point,  which  is  the  northern 
end  of  Smith'.s  Island,  during  the  year  1827.  From  the  spot  where  the  light-house  is  to  be 
placed,  Snuth'8  point  light  bears  S.  38'^  W.— Windmill  point  bears  S.  16"  W.— Stingray 
point  bears  S.  15^  45'  W.— -Point  Lookout  bears  S.  85^^  20^  W.     fSec  Appendix.] 


and  tl 
up  wi 
ent  ri 
(whic 
4  fath 

Pat 
the  n( 
give 
open, 
This  i 
and  C( 
In  bea 
to  3 
will  hj 
will 
soon 
that 

If 
safe 

If  si 


JiLUJMT's 


AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


119 


and  the  distance  5  leagues,  in  6,  7,  and  10  fiithoms  water,  which  will  carry  you 
up  with  Cedar  point,  which  is  pretty  hold  and  makes  the  south  point  of  Patux- 
ent  river.  If  the  wind  is  to  the  northward,  and  you  cannot  get  into  Patuxent 
(which  is  often  the  case)  you  may  run  in  under  Cedar  point,  and  anchor  in  3  or 
4  fathoms  good  bottom,  and  seciu-e  from  the  wind  d(»wn  the  bay. 

Patuxent  U  as  remarkable  a  river  as  any  in  the  bay,  having  very  high  land  on 
the  north  side  of  the  river,  with  red  banks  or  clifls.  If  you  go  into  this  river, 
give  Cedar  point  a  small  birth,  and  stand  to  the  northward  till  you  have  the  river 
open,  when  you  may  run  in  for  Drum  point,  which  is  on  your  starboard  hand. 
This  is  a  low  sandy  bold  point,  with  some  small  bushes  on  it.  Double  this  point, 
and  come  to  in  2J  and  3  fathoms  water,  where  you  will  be  secure  from  all  winds.  ,{! 

In  beating  into  this  place,  you  iiiay  stand  on  the  nortii  side  for  the  high  red  clifts  ii' 

to  3  fathoms,  and  to  the  south  side  to  5  fathoms  water,  and  in  the  channel  you  ]..X 

will  have  7  fathoms  water.     When  standing  to  the  south  side  of  the  river,  you  'fi 

will  see  some  buildings  on  the  north  aide  of  the  river,  above  Drum  Point;  as 
soon  as  these  buildings  come  on  with  Drum  Point,  you  must  tack  to  avoid  a  spit 
that  runs  off  from  the  south  side  of  the  mouth  of  the  river.  i^ 

If  you  cannot  get  up  the  bay,  you  may  anchor  under  the  high  cliffs,  and  lie 
safe  from  northerly  winds,  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water. 

If  you  should  harbour  in  Patuxent,  when  you  come  out,  bound  up  the  bay,  I 

give  the  high  land  on  the  northern  side  of  the  river  something  of  a  birth,   and  ,; 

not  haul  to  the  northward  until  you  have  got  into  9  or  10  fathoms  water,  as  a  jj 

large  spit  runs  off  from  the  Patuxent  Cliffs  about  S.  E'.  extending  from  Drum 
Point  to  *Cove  Point,  which  should  be  avoided.  Wiien  in  9  or  10  fathoms, 
you  will  be  in  mid  channel,  and  your  course  is  then  N.  by  W.  i  W.  to  Poplar  , 

island,  distant  8  or  9  Icagyes,   uhich  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand.     In  ''H' 

running  this  course-,   you  will  have   from  10  to    15  fathoms.     When   Sharp's  ilj'; 

Island  bears  E.  you  n)ay  find  18  fathoms  muddy  bottom.  After  leaving  Pa- 
tuxent river,  if  you  intend'  going  into  Gn-at  Choptank  river,  you  must  leave 
James'  island  (or  point)  on  your  starboard,  and  Sharp's  island  on  your  larboard 
hand,  giving  both  a  good  i)irtli,  as  tliere  are  long  spits  off  from  both  these  places. 
After  you  have  passed  Janu^s'  point,  steer  away  about  N.  N.  E.  in  7  and  8 
fathoms,  which  will  carry  you  in  undtT  Sliarp's  island,  where  you  may  anchor 
within  half  a  mile  of  the  island,  and  lie  secure  from  northerly  and  N.  W.  winds, 
and,  if  you  wish  it.  take  a  pilot  at  this  place.  After  you  are  up  with  Popft.  •'sland, 
and  it  bears  E.  you  may  then  steer  &way  about  N.  distant  5 J  leagues,  which 
will  carry  you  up  to  Annapolis  roads,  which  affords  f5ne  anchorage,  and  protec- 
tion from  N.and  N.  W.  winds.  The  cliaimel  into  Annapolis  is  difficult  and  narrow; 
few  vessels  ever  attempt  it.  The  State  H(juse  at  Annapolis  is  remarkable  for 
having  a  large  ste"plc.  I)y  which  it  may  be  known,  and  may  be  seen  when  abreast 
of  the  h(  ad  of  Poplar  Island. 

In  running  N.  and  N.  W.  from  Poplar  Island,  for  Annapolis  lloads,  you  pass 
Thomas'  Point  light-house,  sht)wing  a  /frerf  light,  on  your  larboard  hand,  off 
which,  in  a  S.  P>.  dircctif>n,  lies  a  sho;il,  which  sliould  be  avoided,  as  it  is  bold 
too,  making  it  more  dangt-roua.  The  dwelling  house  of  the  keeper  stands  be- 
tween tw-lars;e  walnut  trees,  near  the  light  liouso  ;  you  will  also  pass  in  this 
distance,  on  your  larboard  hand,  three  small  islai.ds,  called  the  Sisters,  lying 
below  South  River. 

After  leaviiig  Poplar  island,  the  next  you  come  to  is  Kent  island ;  you  may  rati 
in  under  it  opposite  Po|(lar  island,  and  anchor  in  6  or  7  fathoms  water,  and  he  je- 
cure  from  all  \vinds,  excrpt  S.  W. 

NoTK. — The  land  on  the  western  side  of  the  bay,  from  Patuxent  to  Annapolis 
river,  is  something  high,  with  several  b  lys,  such  as  Herring  and  West  river  bays,  jib  I    j] 

where,,  the  soundings  are  gradual  on  both  sides,  near  which  there  are  Hhoals  which 
should  be  avoided. 

You  also  have,  in  running  from  Poplar  Island  to  Annapolis  or  Talley's  Point, 
Ovhich  is  the  southern  point  of  Annapolis  river)  from  7  to  15  fathoms.     If  you 

♦  A  light-bouse  will  probably  \>e  erected  on  Cove  Point  the  present  year,  (1827.)  [.See 
Appendix.] 


120 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    Pl'.C;. 


go  into  Annapolis  River,  give  Talley's  Point  a  good  birth,  a..  I  haui  iiiia  ihe  v.  e^t- 
ward  of  *  he  mouth  of  the  river,  talcing  your  soundings  off  the  Sjfita  f^idivin  f^  .nd  4 
fathoms  iV^ter,  and  pass  in  between  Talley's  and  Greenifrry  Poin'  i,  ■"hinl;  you 
ieave  on  >oar  starboard  handv  giving  said  points  a  birth  of  ar  equ»!  ^ridtl',  and 
ru'i  jusi  above  them,  where  you  may  anchor  in  3  or  4  fathoms,  and  !iL  secure 
from  all  winds. 

After  you  are  up  with  Annapolis,  and  bound  to  Baltimore,  when  in  the  middle 
of  the  channel,  your  course  is  N.  by  E.  i  E.  which  will  give  the  best  water, 
until  you  get  the  Bodkin  light-house  to  bear  W.  N.  W.  then  due  N.  till  the  Bod- 
kin light-house  bears  W.  I  S.  and  the  two  light-houses  at  *North  Point  in  on«:,  or 
nearly  so,  keeping  the  east  a  little  open  with  each  other,  until  the  Bodkin  light- 
house bears  S.  W.  by  V*'.  when  you  will  steer  W.  by  N.  until  you  get  the  eastern 
light-house  at  North  Point  to  bear  N.  when,  if  at  night,  you  can  anchor  in  the 
best  water;  or  you  may  bring  the  North  Point  lights  a  little  open  with  a  gap  of 
woods  on  Sparrow  Point,  which  will  carry  you  in  3  fathoms  water,  being  the 
most  you  will  have  in  this  channel,  common  tides,  soft  bottom.  Keep  these 
marks  till  Bodkin  Point  light  bears  S.  S.  W-  then  steer  W.  or  W.  by  N.  into  the 
river,  giving  North  Point  lights  a  birth  of  about  one  mile,  by  which  you  avoid  a 
shoal  off  the  point,  of  12  '^et,  hard  bottom,  near  which,  in  18  feet,  soft  bottom, 
is  a  black  spar  buoy,  whit.,  ^ou  leave  on  your  starboard  hand.  When  abreast  of 
North  Point  light,  steer  away  for  the  White  Rocks,  which  you  will  see  on  the 
south  side  of  the  river,  until  you  are  abreast  of  them,  when  you  must  haul  to  the 
southward  till  you  bring  Leading  Point,  (which  is  high  bluff  wood^)  within  two 
sails'  breadth  of  Hawkins  Point,  and  keep  it  till  you  are  almost  abreast  of  the 
rocks,  when  you  must  again  haul  to  the  southward,  till  you  bring  the  -aid  points 
within  a  small  sail's  breadth  of  each  other,  which  mmtit  lead  you  up  ;  )  Hawkin's 
Point,  to  which  give  a  birth  of  one-quarter  of  a  mile. 

There  are  several  small  shoals  of  about  two  fatjpoms,  on  each  riide  of  the 
channel,  which  are  steep,  and  the  channel  between  them  not  mofp  than  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  wide.  When  you  come  up  with  Hawkin's  Point,  you  may  steer  away 
for  the  Narrows  (on  which  the  fort  str>nds)  about  N.  W.  by  N.  which  course  has 
nothing  to  obstruct  you ;  you  will  h.,«  from  2^  to  5  fathoms.  Wht  n  you  are  up 
with  the  Narrows,  pass  between  the  ..^vo  points,  and  give  the  )nboard  side  a 
good  birth,  to  keep  clear  of  a  shoal  just  above  th*  Narrows ,  Chen  haui  to  the  S. 
W.  up  fbr  the  wharves,  or  the  point  which  is  on  the  starboard  huiid,  and  there 
anchor,  or  proceed  to  Baltimore.  If  you  leave  th«^  point,  keep  your  larboard 
hand  on  board,  when  you  will  find  good  '"^itom,  from  which  you  may  proceed 
to  ihe  wharves,  or  come  a»  with  safety.  iff?"  See  Chart  of  Chesapeake.] 

Rates  of  t^ilotage. 


Diri 


TJ 
and 
lieu  tl 
mast  I 
give 

Thl 


-I 


American  vessels  pay 

S3  00 

down,  and     $A  00     up,  per  foot 

Foreign       do.     do. 

4  00 

do.             4  33    up        do. 

BUOYS  IN  SHIP-CHANIIEL.— (No.  1)  A  mast  buoy,  painted  white,  to  the  westward 
of  which  you  should  not  go.  Another  white  buoy  (No.  2)  to  range  with  it,  and  No  4,  which 
last  will  be  red,  and  placed  exactly  on  the  ^hip-Channel  range,  so  that,  by  observing  it,  you 
will,  without  farther  notice,  know  when  to  run  in  fo>'  the  river,  as  it  will  range  precisely  with 
the  two  light-houses  on  North  Point.  No.  3,  a  white  buoy,  upon  or  near  a  small  knoll  of  16 
feet  hard,  on  the  larboard  side  of  the  Ship  Channel.  No.  5,  a  black  and  white  buoy  on  a  hard 
knoll  of  1 5  feet,  which  lies  in  the  Ship  Channel,  with  the  marks  nearly  pn.  It  is  best  to  leave 
it  on  the  starboard  hand  going  up.  Nos.  9  and  iU,  two  !)lack  mast  buoys,  marie  the  southern 
extremity  of  the  Mau  of  War  Shoals  :  Vessels  beating  through,  must  not  pass  this  range. 
No.  6,  and  No.  7,  two  white  buoys,  designate  the  southern  or  l&rboard  ^ide  of  the  Ship 
Channel,  »-  i  will  range  with  No.  3,  before  mentioned.  No.  S,  a  white  buoy,  on  the  end  of 
the  Bodkin  bar. 


*  '"'■.or'  *re  t  .v<  light-houses  on  North  Point,  which  exhibit  -ahHe  lighlf,  bearing  N.  by  W.  > 
ftci  n  tae  Bodkin. 


ijt  .i.-^  ...j-n,.j 


bllnt's  amkuican  coast  pilot. 
NAVIGATION  OF  THE  PATAPSCO. 


121 


Directions  for  Mariners,  Bay  Craftsmen,  S/-c.  for  sailing  up  or  down  iM 
Patapsco,  and  for  passing  through  the  Swash  Channel, 

The  Can  and  Log  Buoys  heretofore  used  to  buoy  off  the  Swash  Channel 
and  River  Patapsco,  having  been  removed,  and  spar  or  mast  buoys  adopted  in 
lieu  thereof,  as  being  more  conspicuous  from  tlieir  erect  position,  and  shewing  a 
mast  of  from  nine  to  twenty  feet  above  the  water,  it  is  conceived  necessary  to 
give  due  notice  of  tlie  changes,  viz. 

The  Buoys  now  moored  are  numbers  5,  and  from  1 1  to  20,  and  are  painted, 
some  of  them  entirely  white,  others  entirely  black,  and  others  again  black  at  the 
surface  of  the  water,  and  at  the  head,  with  white  between.  The  white  buoys 
''lesignate  the  south  or  larboard  side  of  the  channel,  coming  up — the  black  buoys 
the  north  or  starboard  side — and  the  white  and  black  buoy  denote  the  knolls  that 
lie  in  the  channel  way,  or  elsewhere,  and  to  be  avoided.  Their  particular  posi- 
tion are  as  follows : 

No.  ft.— A  buoy  painted  black  and  white  allernaiely  on  the  edge  of  a  hard  knoll 
of  15  feet,  immediately  on  the  Ship  Channel  range,  abreast  of  the  easternmost 
Man  of  War  Shoal,  in  3  fathoms,  sticky  bottom. 

No.  12. — A  white  buoy  is  placed  on  the  larboard  side  of  the  channel  to  mark 
the  south-east  bar. 

No.  13 — Shows  the  starboard  side  of  the  channel,  and  is  placed  just  at  the 
edge  of  the  7  feet  knoll. 

No.  11 — A  white  buoy  in  18  feet  soft,  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  Rock  Point 
Shoal. 

No.  14.— A  white  and  black  striped  buoy,  in  18  feet  soft,  on  the  edge  of  a  hard 
knoll  of  14  feet,  between  North  Point  and  Rock  Point. 

No.  15. — A  black  buoy,  in  18  feet  soft,  denotes  the  shoal  off  North  Point. 

No.  16. — A  white  and  black  striped  buoy,  in  18  feet,  just  outside  of  the  Rock 
knolls. 

No.  17.— A  black  buoy,  in  1"  feet  soft,  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  Spa.  "ott's 
Point  knolls,  of  12  feet  hard. 

No.  18. — A  white  buoy,  in  4  fathoms  soft,  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  shoa',  % 
tending  from  Hawkin's  Point  bar. 

No.  19. — A  black  buoy,  in  20  feet  soft,  on  the  outer  ed^e  of  a  shoal  Oi  c  feet 
hard,  extending  from  Soller's  Point  bar. 

No.  20 — A  black  buoy,  in  18  feet  soft,  on  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  rfboai. 
extending  from  the  Lazaretto. 

No.  22. — There  is  a  buoy  painted  black  and  white  ;  ernately,  on  the  sr.  ken 
rock  between  North  Point  and  Sparrow's  Point. 

Note.— No.  0  shows  J 2  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  water;  all  the  othrrs 
show  from  12  to  14  feet,  except  No.  19,  which  does  not  show  as  high. 

A  good  birth  should  be  given  to  the  stripe  buoys,  as  they  are  expressly  placed 
to  mark  the  shoals. 

The  black  buoys  mdicate  the  northern  extremity  of  the  channel. 

The  white  buoys  indicate  the  southern  extremity  of  the  channel,  so  that  it  is 
dangerous  to  attempt  to  pass  to  the  northward  of  the  first,  or  to  the  southward  of 
the  latter. 

Besides  the  above  enumerated  buoys,  there  will  be  placed  a  black  and  white 
buoy  at  the  old  wharf,  abreast  of  Fort  McHer.ry,  which  will  be  No.  21. 

Spar  or  mast  buoys  will  also  !>e  placed  as  soon  as  they  can  be  completed*  to 
buoy  off  the  Ship  Channel,  h'ading  from  the  Chesapeake  Bay  into  the  rivnr  Pa- 
tapsco, of  whicli  due  notice  ^    II  be  given.     [See  Appendix. 1 


'M\ 


f 


10 


122 


BLtif<T  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOt. 


Directions  from  New  Point  Comfort  to  Potomac  River. 

From  this  point  a  Spit  extends  S.  E.  2  miles,  wliich  yon  will  avoid  by  not 
going  into  less  than  4  fathoms  %vater.  About  2^  leagues  N.  N.  E.  from  PTew 
Point  Comfort,  and  two  leagues  E.  from  Iron  Point,  lies  the  Wolf-trap  rock,  on 
which  there  are  12  feet  at  common  tides ;  between  this  rock  and  Point  Comfort, 
there  are  8  and  9  fathoms.  From  the  Spit,  which  runs  off  from  New  Point 
Comfort,  to  the  entrance  of  Rappahannock  River,  the  course  is  ^.  by  W.  and 
the  distance  6  leagues.  You  may  keep  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water.  Near  the 
Wolf-trap  rock,  there  are  7  fathoms. 

From  the  entrance  of  Rappahannock,  off  which  is  a  light  vessel  showing  two 
lights,  to  the  flat  which  runs  off  from  *Smith's  Point  light  (which  is  the  south 
side  of  Potomac  River)  the  course  is  N.  and  the  distance  6  leagues.  You  may 
run  in  5,  6,  or  7  fathoms  water.  When  you  draw  ne.'ir  the  shoal  which  runs  off 
from  Smith's  Point,  you  should  not  go  into  less  than  7  fathoms.  This  shoal 
extends  about  2i  miles  E.  S.  E.  from  Smith's  Island ;  on  its  extremity  there  are 
only  2  fathoms  water,  and  very  near  to  it  eastward,  there  are  10  oi*  12  fathoms. 
The  mark  for  the  shoalest  part  of  this  sand,  is  a  house  with  a  white  chimney, 
standing  among  the  tress  on  the  shore  within  Smith's  Island,  open  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  island,  and  bearing  west.  When  this  house  bears  W.  by  N.  you 
are  to  the  southward  of  the.  extremity  of  the  shoal ;  and  when  it  bears  W.  by  S. 
you  are  to  the  northward  of  it.  That  which  adds  considerably  to  the  danger  of 
this  shoal,  in  going  either  up  or  down  the  Chesapeake,  is  the  broken  islands  which 
lie  on  the  east  side  of  the  channel,  and  the  flats  of  sand  which  extend  from  5  to 
8  miles  to  the  westward  from  them. 

The  Tangier  Islands  lie  to  the  southward  of  Cooper's  Island,  and  the  Tangier 
Islands  and  Watts'  Island  make  the  entrance  of  Pocomoke  Bay,  which  bay  sepa- 
rates Virginia  from  Maryland  on  the  eastern  shore. 

Potomac  River  separates  Virginia  from  Maryland ;  its  entrance  is  form'sd  by 
Smitii's  Point  on  the  south  side,  and  Point  Lookout  on  the  north  side;  the  dis- 
tance between  these  two  points  is  about  3i  leagues.  On  Smith's  Point  is  a  light- 
bcuse,  as  described  in  page  118,  to  whi    i  the  reader  is  referred. 

If  you  are  bound  to  St.  Mary's  River,  you  must  give  Point  Lookout,  and 
also  the  shore  about  it,  a  good  birth  ;  and  when  you  approach  St.  George's  Isl- 
and, you  must  keep  ndrer  to  the  main  than  to  the  shoal,  which  extends  from 
the  island.  Your  course  into  the  river  is  N.  W.  and  as  it  is  all  open  to  your  view, 
you  may  anchor  when  you  please  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water. 

If  you  are  bound  to  Wicomack,  in  Potomac  River,  your  course  from  the  east 
end  of  St.  George's  Island  to  Ragged  Point  is  N.  W.  i  W.  and  the  distance  4 
leagues.  On  th-^  jouth  or  larboard  side,  there  are  flats  lying  ofi'from  the  shore, 
which  in  some  places  extend  one  mile ;  come  no  nearer  to  them  than  7  fathoms : 
in  the  middle  of  the  channel,  you  will  have  11,  10,  13,  10,  and  8  fathoms.  You 
must  give  Ragged  Point  a  good  birth,  to  avoid  the  shoal,  which  extends  from  it 
nearly  one  milr .  From  Ragged  Point  to  Clement's  Island  your  course  is  W .  ^  N. 
and  the  disii  ice  2  leagues.  In  the  middle  of  the  channel  you  will  have  6,  5,  4jJ, 
and  7  fathoms  water.  On  the  south  side,  a  little  below  Clement's  Island,  is  No- 
TaineBay.  Fron  abreast  of  Clement's  Island  steer  W.  N.  W.  in  6,  5,  and  4  fa- 
thoms witer,  u'lL'  you  have  Wicomack  River  open,  Ihen  pass  pretty  near  to  the 
island,  '^hich  ;s  ou  -'.\b  east  side  of  the  entrance,  in  order  to  nvoid  the  sljoal  which 
runs  ofi'  ifom  th"  por  <  the  west  side.  Steer  about  iiorlli  into  the  river,  and  an- 
chor on  the  soiUi  siu^-  of  Newton's  Point,  in  5,  or  4^  fathoms  water. 


;>03i| 
narr 
issti 
Poiif 
Abol 
ther 
sideJ 
Ci 
islo{ 
aflal 
this 
side 
and 
Higli 

may  I 
deep! 
c-iall^ 
sand. 


Dire*,  'ions  from  Potomac  River  to  Patuxent  River. 

From  Point  Lookout  a  flat  runs  off  a  considerable  way,  which  you  must  be 
careful  to  avoid,  by  not  coming  any  nearer  to  it  than  7  or  8  fathoms  water.     Op- 


♦  Sec  note  to  f^igc  118. 


/ 


'j,H, 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT 


123 


p03itc  this  point,  the  flat  of  Tangier  Islands  extends  so  far  to  the  westward  as  to 
narrow  the  channel  of  the  Chesapeake  to  ahout  4i  miles.  This  part  of  the  flat 
is  steep,  and  has  13  fathoms  close  to  it.  Ahout  two  leagues  to  the  northward  of 
Point  Lookout  is  Point  Again,  oft"  which,  above  two  miles,  there  lies  a  ahoai. 
About  3  leagues  to  the  northward  of  Point  Again,  is  Cedar  Point.  Between 
them,  7  or  8  fathoms  is  a  good  depth  to  keej)  in  ;  nearer  to  the  flat  on  the  east 
side,  there  are  10,  16,  9,  and  11  fathoms. 

Cedar  Point  is  on  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  of  Patuxent  River :  the  ground 
is  low  and  sandy,  and  has  some  straggling  trees  standing  on  it.  From  this  point, 
a  flat  extends  to  the  eastward,  and  also  to  the  northward.  On  the  north  side  of 
this  river  there  are  high  hills,  called  Clifts,  with  trees  on  them;  and  fiom  this, 
side  also  a  flat  extern^  but  the  shoalings  on  each  side  of  the  channel  are  gradual 
and  the  ground  soft,  ^n  the  middle  of  the  channel  there  are  8  fathoms  water. 
Higher  up  is  Ronsly's  Point  on^be  south  side,  and  Drum  Point  on  the  north  side ; 
the  latter  is  a  low  sandy  point.  You  maj'  anchor  without  these  points,  or  you 
may  go  fiu-ther  up  the  river,  always  tihserving  the  following  general  rule  in  all  the 
deep  bays  throughout  Virginia  and  Maryland,  viz.  to  every  point,  more  espe- 
cially \vli"n-  the  laini  is  low.  giv<>  a  good  birth  in  passing,  because  Spits,  or  flats  of 
sand,  extend  from  taem,  and  consequenUy  the  water  is  shoal  in  such  places. 


Directions  for  going  from  Cape  Henry  or  Lynhaven  Bay,  ta 

•        York  River. 

As  Cape  Henry  S.  S.  E.  would  lead  you  near  tiie  tail  of  the  Middle  Ground, 
and  as  the  proceeding  with  it  at  S.  E.  would  cany  you  on  the  tail  and  nqrth  ^dge 
of  the  Horse-Shoe,  your  keeping  the  Cape  on  any  bearing  between  S.  S.  E.  and 
S.  E.  will  carry  you  through  between  the  two  shoals.  On  the  tail,  and  along  the 
nf  rth  side  of  the  Horse-shoe,  the  shoahngs  are  gradual.  With  Cape  Henry  bear- 
ing S.  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  S.  steer  N.  N.  W.  or  N.  W.  by  N.  until  you  bring  Cape 
Charles  to  bear  E.  by  N.  you  arc  then  to  the  northward  of  the  Horse-shoe,  and 
may  steer  N.  W.  or  N.  W.  by  W.  according  as  you  have  the  wind  and  tide.  As 
the  ebb  sets  strong  out  of  the  Chesapeake  over  the  Horse-shoe,  you  must  not, 
with  a  northerly  wind  and  ebb  tide,  approach  .iny  nearer  to  the  shoa]  than  5  or  6 
fathoms  water.  When  y(ju  have  brought  New  Point  Comfort  to  bear  north, 
and  Back  River  Point  to  bear  S.  by  W.  you  arc  then  on  the  tail  of  York  Spit» 
in  3  fathoms  water.  When  you  are  a  little  above  Long  Isle,  you  must  not  come 
any  nearer  to  the  shore  than  5  fathoms,  until  you  enter  the  river  above  the  marsh, 
then  keep  in  9  or  10  fathoms,  and  run  up  and  anchor  between  York  and  Glouces- 
ter, in  what  depth  you  please. 

With  a  contrary  .vind,  stand  towards  the  Horse-shoe  in  4A  or  5  fathoms,  and 
from  it  into  6J  or  7  falhoins,  until  you  are  abreast  of  the  entrance  of  Pocasin, 
where  there  is  a  gut  of  7  fathoms,  which  runs  close  to  the  entrance  ;  you  should 
therefore  be  careful  to  avoid  going  too  far  in,  and  thereby  getting  on  the  tall 
that  extends  from  Toes  Marsh.  When  you  have  got  tlius  far  up,  you  should  go 
no  nearer  to  the  shore  on  this  side,  than  7  or  (ij  fathoms,  ail  the  way  up  to  York 
Town.  On  the  other  side,  you  should  not  stand  any  nearer  to  the  small  isles 
on  York  Spit,  than  10  or  11  fathoms:  close  to  the  tail  of  this  spit  there  are  6 
fathoms:  close  to  the  middle  of  it  Ihert.  are  10  fathoms  ;  and  close  to  it,  abreast 
of  the  islands,  you  will  have  13  fathoms,  and  before  you  can  get  another  cast 
of  the  lead,  you  will  be  ashore.  When  you  have  entered  the  river,  you  must 
not  come  any  nearer  to  the  flat  than  8  or  9  fathoms  water.  This  flat  extends 
from  thenoith  shore,  almost  one-third  over  the  river. 


it 


•'%i 


II 


124 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 

*Cape  Hatteras. 


i. 


This  Cape  lies  about  S.  S.  E.  37  leagues  from  Cape  Henry  ;  between  them 
lie  the  inlets  of  Currituck,  which  are  shoal,  and  New  Inlet,  on  which  are  5  feet 
water.  About  six  leagues  N.  by  E.  from  the  Cape  lie  the  Wimble  Shoals,  on 
which  are  3  and  4.i  fathoras  water,  extending  N.  by  W.  and  S.  by  E.  about  3 
miles,  and  is  about  3  miles  wide.  The  inner  edge  of  this  shoal  is  about  3  miles 
from  the  shore,  and  the  soundings  between  thorn  8,  10,  and  7  fathoms.  About 
Smiles  N.  by  W.  from  the  north  end  of  this  shoal,  and  3  miles  S.  E.  from  the 
north  end  of  Hatteras  Island,  there  lie  some  small  knowls,  on  which  are  only  9 
,feet  at  low  water. 

Cape  Hatteras  shoals  extend  8  miles  in  a  soulh-easter^tdirection,  with  5  and 
6  fathoms  on  the  extreme  parts.  The  most  dangerous  shoal  lies  in  lat.  85°  10'  N. 
the  middle  of  which  is  4  miles  distant  from  the  (Tape,  and  has  barely  9  feet  wa- 
ter. This  is  calk'd  the  Diamond  shoal,  between  which  and  the  Cape  there  is  a 
good  passage  for  small  v»'ssels,  in  moderatt'  weather,  or  when  the  wind  is  off  the 
land,  but  it  would  be  always  safest  to  go  round  the  shoal  in  10,  12,  and  15  fa- 
thoms. 

The  light-house  at  Cape  Hatteras  exhibits  a  fine  light  when  in  order,  and  can 
be  seen  very  plainly  in  9  and  10  fathoms  water  on  the  outer  part  of  the  shoals, 
when  only  10  feet  above  the  level  of  tiie  sea  ;  but  when  on  board  a  large  vessel, 
it  might  be  seen  in  20  or  25  fathoins.  The  soundings  from  the  Cape  are  2,  3,  4, 
4i,  5,  6,  and  7  fathoms,  and  then  deepens  to  9,  on  the  S.  S.  E.  part. 

Off  Cape  Hatteras  is  a  floating  light,  showing  two  lights,  one  of  which 
is  60  feet  high,  and  the  other  45  feet,  moored  in  20  fathoms  water,  with 
soundings  of  blue  sand,  shell  and  clay.  The  vessel  containing  these  lights  is  up- 
wards of  300  tons,  and  bears  E.  S.  E.  from  the  light-house  on  Cape  Hat- 
teras, 1.5  miles  distant,  and  from  the  South  Shoal  N.  78^  45'  E.  distant  4j 
miles.  The  light-boat  is  sufficiently  far  from  the  shoals  that  vessels  can  pass 
without  risk  between  them  and  the  boat.  The  distance  from  the  boat  to  the 
Gulf  Stream  is  not  above  7  miles.  There  is  a  current  with  a  south  wind  whiAi 
runs  N.  N.  E.  2  miles  per  hour,  and  with  a  north  wind  S.  S.  W.  2  miles  per 
hour.  W.  S.  W.  from  Cape  Hatteras,  eight  leagues  distant,  lies  fOcracock  In- 
let, on  which  are  12  feet  water. 

From  Cape  Hatteras  to  Cape  Henry  the  ground  is  fine  sand,  and  to  the  north- 
ward of  Cape  Henry,  coarse  sand  with  some  shells  among  it. 

It  i'>  high  water  at  Cape  Hatteras  shoals,  on  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  at  S 
o'clochv  md  45  minutes,  and  the  tide  flows  from  4  to  5  feet,  being  governed  by 
the  winds  in  the  offing,  and  in  easterly  gales  it  runs  several  feet  higher. 

*  On  the  pitch  of  this  Cape  (which  is  low  sandy  land)  a  light-house  is  erected,  which  i> 
painted  white,  97  feet  above  the  level  of  the  seu,  containing  a  fixed  light:  there  is  a  good 
channel,  3  miles  from  the  light,  keeping  the  land  on  board.  The  light  bears  from  the  S.  VV. 
part  of  the  outer  shoals,  N,  by  VV.  ^  W.  and  from  the  S.  E.  part  N.  W.  distant  3  leagues; 
from  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  middle  shoals,  within  which  vessels  bound  along  the  coast  general- 
ly pass,  the  light  bears  N.  N.  W. 

The  light  at  Cape  Hatteras,  being  95  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  will  be  seen  froma 
considerable  distance  without  the  outer  shoals,  and  to  a  vessel  steering  from  Ocracock,  W. 
by  N.— VV.  N.  W,  or  even  N.  W.  by}W.  the  light  on  the  Cape  will  first  show,  and  will  con- 
tinue to  be  seen  till  the  light  appears  within  the  bar. 

The  poiilt  of  Cape  Hatteras  having  made  out  into  the  sea  since  the  light-house  waa  built, 
the  light  now  stands  l\  mile  back  from  the  point  of  land  that  makes  out  from  it. 

Though  the  bearings  of  the  Brown  at  Shell  Castle  Island  from  Ocracock  bar,  has  been 
fltated,  yet  it  is  not  expected  that  apy  ves^  will  attempt  to  cross  in  the  night ;  it  has  been 
mentioned  merely  that  the  master,  in  coming  up  with  the  bar  in  the  night,  may  be  enabled 
thereby  to  take  that  situation  which  may  be  most  favourable  for  receiving  a  pilot  and  crossing 
in  the  morning. 

t  At  the  entrance  of  Ocracock  Inlet,  a  light-house  is  erected,  exhibiting  a  revolving  light, 
which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand  entering  the  Inlet. 


(whi 
exte| 
far 
theni 
are 
the  I 
TJ 
HattI 
Sev€ 


BI.UNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


125 


*Cape  Lookout. 

t'apf  Lookout  lies  in  34°  37'  N.  lat.  and  76^  33'  W.  long,  and  the  Cape  ^voods 
(where  the  light-house  is)  in  lat.  34<^  39'  N.  and  long.  76°  32'  W.  The  shoals 
extend  fronr\  the  Cape  10  miles,  in  a  S.  S.  E.  direction,  being  Ijroken  ground  as 
far  as  lat.  31°  28'  N.  In  that  latitude  there  are  14  fathoms  water,  and  from 
thence  to  the  Gulf  Stream,  the  soundings  ;ire  gradual,  9!^  fathoms ;  the  tracks 
are  faithfully  laid  down  in  the  chart,  (publish«'d  by  the  author)  together  with  all 
the  soundings  from  the  outer  part  of  the  shoal  to  the  edge  of  the  Gulf  Stream. 

The  outer  part  of  Cape  Loukout  slioals  iif!s  S.  W.  i  W.  22  leagues  from  Cape 
Hatteras,  and  22  leagues  S.  W.  3  W.  from  tlit;  outer  part  of  Cape  Hatteras  shoals. 
Seven  miles  from  Cape  Lookout  light  lies  a  shoal  which  is  dry  at  low  water,  bear- 
ing S.  i  E.  from  the  light,  the  sea  btgaks  constantly  S.  E.  from  this  shoal  for 
the  distance  of  two  miles,  which  is  the  S.  E.  point  of  breakers.  Between  this 
shoal  and  the  shore,  there  are  numerous  spots,  on  which  arc  li  and  li  fathoms; 
south  of  this  shoal  the  least  water  is  2 J  fathoms.  On  the  eastern  part  of  Cape  ^ 
Lookout  shoals  there  are  2d  fathoms,  near  them,  on  the  northern  and  southern 
sides,  are  4,  5,  and  9  fathoms.  On  the  N.  and  E.  of  Cape  Lookout  shoals  you 
will  have  7  and  8  fathoms,  dead,  dark,  broken  shells,  with  sand. 

Old  Topsail  inlet,  or  entrance  to  Beaufort,  lies  about  3  leagues  W.  N.  W.  from 
Cape  Lookout.  It  has  2^  fathoms  water,  but  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  is 
formed  by  a  long  spit,  extending  westward.  The  channel  in  lies  first  N.  E.  by  E. 
and  then  alters  gradually  round  the  flat,  wl.ich  extends  from  the  larjpoard  or 
western  side  to  the  N.  N.  W.  In  proceeding  up  to  Beaufort,  you  will  have  3, 
4,  and  3  fathoms  in  the  channel,  and  may  anchor  in  3  fathoms  at  low  water. 

If  you  wish  to  come  within  the  shoals  of  Cape  Lookout,  after  making  Beau- 
fort, keep  along  the  shore  at  the  distance  of  two  miles,  until  you  come  up  with 
the  point  of  sand  forming  a  pretty  good  harbour,  with  the  wind  from  the  N.  W. 
to  E.  for  small  vessels.  If  bound  to  tlie  northward,  keep  as  near  as  you  can 
judge  the  same  distance,  or  a  little  less  from  the  beach,  until  you  bring  the  light- 
house to  bear  N.  W.  by  N.  you  will  at  that  distance  have  not  less  than  a  quarter 
less  three ;  then  keep  N.  E.  and  you  will  deepen  to  5  and  6  fathoms  in  a  few 
minutes. 

West,  10  leagues  from  Cape  Lookout,  liesBougue  Inlet,  on  which  are  8  feet  wa- 
ter: W.  by  S.  i  S.  4ii  leagues  from  Bougue  Inlet,  lies  fNew  River,  on  which  you 
have  8  feet  water:  S.  W.  I  W.  6  leagues^rom  New  River  light,  lies  New  Topsail 
Inlet,  on  which  are  10  feet  water.  S.  W.i  W.  from  New  Topsail  Inlet,  3  leagues 
distant,  you  make  Deep  Inlet,  on  which  are  7  feet  water.  S.  S.  W.  from  Deep 
Inletf  6  leagues,  lies  New  Inlet,  on  which  are  7  feet  water.  This  lulct  is  between 
the  sea  coast,  and  N.  E.  end  of  Smith's  Island.  It  will  admit  vessels  drawing 
6  feet,  and  is  about  two  miles  wide  at  its  entrance,  having  7  feet  water  at  low  tide 
over  the  bar.  It  continues  its  breadth  to  the  flat,  and  is  navigable  for  large  ves- 
sels 21  miles  from  its  mouth,  and  20  miles  to  Wilmington,  to  which  town  ves- 
sels drawing  10  or  12  feet  can  reach  without  any  risk.  S.  by  E.  8  leagues  from 
the  New  Inlet,  will  carry  you  into  15  fathoms,  south  from  the  Frying-pan  Shoals. 


'ii 


I  been 
(been 
kled 


•       Directions  for  Cape  Fear  light-house. 

Bald  Head,  a  noted  bluff  at  the  mouth  of  Cape  Fear  River,  on  which  a  light- 
house is  erected,  after  described,  is  at  the  S.  W.  end  of  Smith's  Island,  which. 
*  —  y .1  ■■ 

*  Cape  Lookout  light-house  contains  a  fixed  light,  100  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea  ■ 
the  tower  is  wood,  painted  in  stripes  horizontal,  alternately  red  and  white.  At  a  distance  it 
has  the  af  4)earance  of  a  ship  of  war,  with  her  suils  clewed  up.  TBelight  may  be  seen  from 
the  outer  end  of  Cape  Lookout  shoals,  but  vessels,  passing  it,  ought  rather  to  trust  to  the 
lead  than  to  making  the  li^ht. 

t  On  Federal  Point,  which  forms  the  starboard  entrance  to  New  Inlet,  a  light-houte  is 
erected,  exhibiting  a  fixed  light,  (The  light-house  is  on  the  spot  where  the  Beacon  formerly 
stood.) 


1-i 


126 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


with  Oak  Island,  form  the  main  entrance  into  t)ic  river,  on  the  most  eastern 
part  of  which  (Federal  point)  is  the  light-house.  Oak  Island  is  long  and  nar- 
row.    On  the  bar,  at  high  tide,  you  have  14i  feet,  and  its  rise  is  5  feet. 

The  light-house  on  Bald  Head  is  painted  black,  in  order  to  distinguish  it  from 
the  light-house  op  Federal  Point,  from  which  it  bears  about  S.S.W.  It  stands  one 
mile  from  the  sea,  ia  90  feet  high,  and  contains  a/xcrf  light.  The  lamps  are  100 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  50  feet  above  the  tops  of  the  trees  which  stand 
on  the  hills  between  the  light  and  the  sea.  The  iron  lamp  is  10  feet  9  inches  in 
diameter,  and  about  15  feet  0  inches  in  height  from  the  floor  to  the  top  of  the 
roof. 

From  the  point  of  the  Cape,  the  light-house  bears  N.  W.  distant  four  miles ; 
and  from  the  extremity  of  the  Frying-pan  Shoal,  N.  W.  by  N.  i  N.  5  leagues. 

It  may  be  necessary  to  observe  to  strappers,  that,  in  passing  the  shoals,  espe- 
cially in  a  dark  night,  it  is  most  prudent  to  steer  W.  in  lat.  33°  20'  or  25'  at  most, 
until  they  shoal  their  water  to  7  or  8  fathoms :  by  doing  this  they  may  be  sure 
of  being  to  the  westward  of  the  bar. 

Your  course  from  Cape  Fear  bar  when  in  9  fathoms  water,  to  clear  Cape 
Roman  shoal,  is  S.  W.  and  flistaiice  T2.  miles.  ^Vhen  sailing  towards  these 
coasts,  it  13  prudent  to  keep  nearly  a  degree  to  the  southward  of  the  latitude  of 
the  place  you  intend  to  mak*;,  until  you  reckon  yourself  on  the  edge  of  the  Gulf 
Stream,  when  you  must  be  directed  by  judgment,  according  to  circumstances. 
Do  not,  if  possible  to  avoid  it,  sail  to  the  northward  of  33°  20';  or  at  highest  SS'^ 
25',  until  you  obtain  10  fathoms  water.  In  this  depth  you  will  be  within  the 
south  or  outer  end  of  the  Frying-pan  Shoal,  whirh  lies  in  latitude  33°  .SB'.  In 
approaching  the  coast,  in  33°  20',  your  first  soundings  will  be  from  30  to  35  fa- 
thoms ;  in  this  depth  you  will  Jjp  very  near  to  the  edge  of  the  Gulf  Stream ;  you  will 
have  fine  gray  sand,  with  l)lack  spots,  when  y»»u  will  get  into  17  fathoms,  there 
is  a  long  flat  in  this  depth  of  water.  In  steering  west  you  will,  for  the  first  5  or 
6  leagues,  shoalen  the  water  very  little.  When  you  come  in  14  fathoms,  you 
shoalen  your  water  quicker  but  gradually.  You  will  see  the  land  from  10  fa- 
thoms water,  if  the  weather  be  clear,  and  may  then  be  sure  that  you  are  within 
theFrying  Pan,  from  the  out  side  of  this  shoal.  To  the  westward  of  north  west 
no  land  can  be  seen,  when  Avithout  the  siioals. 

The  currents  on  the  coast  of  North  Carolina  are  governed  mostly  by  the 
wind — during  the  summer  months,  the  prevailing  winds  are  south-westerly,  and 
the  currents  then  set  the  direction  of  the  coast  to  the  eastward,  and  when  the 
southerly  winds  cease  bIovvii)j?,  it  changes  suddenly  to  the  contrary  direction, 
which  is  a  sure  precursor  of  a  north-east  wind. 

The  land  on  Caj)e  Lookout  is  very  low,  and  cannot  be  seen  more  than  a  iMgue 
in  the  clearest  weather  from  on  I)oard  a  small  vessel. 

[We  decline  giving  directions  for  sailing  into  many  ports  in  North  Carolina,  as 
all  the  harbours  are  barred,  and  always  sulyert  to  alteration  by  every  gale,  ,)ar- 
ticularly  in  the  equinoctial  storms ;  but  the  bars  create  only  a  part  of  the  danger 
in  saiHng  into  those  ports;  it  is  the  vast  bed  of  shoals  that  lie  within  the  bars, 
with  their  innumerable  small  channels  which  give  to  tide  so  many  different  di- 
rections that  even  the  pilots  who  live  on  the  spot,  find  it  difficult  to  carry  a  vessel 
in  without  some  accident.  Here  also  the  westerly  variation  appears  to  cease,  and 
at  Savannah  becomes  easterly.] 


2%e  North  Bar  of  the  New  Inlet. 

To  enter,  the  marks  are,  to  bring  the  west  end  of  Buzzard's  Bay  point  of  sand, 
on  H.  Helly's  large  white  house  in  Smithville,  and  the  bearings  will  be  S.  W.  by  W. 
keeping  the  point  of  Smithville  with  these  bearings  until  over  the  bar,  then  keep 
the  spit  of  sand  or  beach  that  makes  off  from  Federal  Point  light  close  on  board, 
which  will  carry  you  into  the  river  channel,  where  there  is  good  anchorage  all 
along  this  sand,  in  three  and  four  fathoms  water.  On  this  bar  there  are  10  feet 
at  low,  and  12  at  high  water. 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


127 


The  Old  Bar  at  New  Inlet,  or  as  now  called^  the  South  Bar. 

In  running  in,  wlien  the  light-liousc  on  Federal  Point  hears  W.  or  W.  hy  S.  you 
will  make  a  thick  and  high  hummock  of  woeds,  called  Merryck's  wood  bluff,  be- 
fore you  make  the  light ;  but  should  it  bear  to  the  north  of  west,  you  will  make 
the  light-house  and  blufl  at  the  same  time,  the  former  of  which  may  be  seen  in 
clear  weather,  about  15  miles  from  a  ship's  deck,  in  about  10  or  11  fathoms 
water,  and  when  first  discovered,  has  the  appearance  of  a  distant  sail.  As  you 
approach  the  light,  the  water  becomes  gradually  shoal.  In  4  to  5  fathoms 
water,  one  mile  and  a  half  from  the  light-house,  bearing  W.  S.  W.  to  W.  there 
i«  good  anchorage,  soft  bottom. 

In  running  In,  bring  the  light-house  on  with  the  south  end  of  the  barracks, 
which  you  will  continue  till  over  the  bar,  and  near  the  beach,  and  so  along  the. 
beach,  until  you  are  in  the  river.  On  the  bar,  at  high  water,  11  to  12  feet ;  at  low 
water,  6  feet  only.  The  depth  of  water,  and  channel,  however,  are  subject  to 
variation,  so  that  it  is  not  adviseable  for  strangers,  except  in  cases  of  necessity, 
to  run  in  without  a  pilot. 

The  li;5ht-house  on  Federal  Point  is  40  feet  high,  painted  white,  and  stands  on 
the  main  land,  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  of  Cape  Fear  River,  on  the  spot 
where  the  beacon  formerly  stood. 


ma,  as 
|e,  ,)ar- 

langer 
bars, 

int  di- 
J  vessel 
le,  and 


I  sand,. 

Uw. 

keep 

loard, 

le  alt 

feet 


The  Main  Bar  of  Cape  Fear  River.  • 

Vessels  running  down  from  the  westward,  should  not  approach  nearer  the 
Middle  Ground,  than  to  bring  the  Cape  (w  hich  is  the  most  eastern  part  of  the 
Bald  Head  Woods)  to  bear  E.  by  N.  When  you  bring  the  light-house  to  bear 
N.  I  E.  in  about  4  fathoms  water,  steer  immediately  for  it,  which  will  be  a 
little  open  to  the  eastward  of  a  Pole  Beacon,  with  a  cask  on  the  top,  paint- 
ed black.  A  continuation  of  this  courso  will  carry  you  clear  of  the  Fingers, 
when  you  will  see  a  buoy  ahead,  or  a  little  on  the  larboard  bow,  which  you  will 
pass,  leaving  it  on  the  larboard  hand  ;  as  soon  as  you  leave  the  buoy  steer  N.  W. 
or  keep  the  breakers  close  on  board  the  larboard  side,  when  you  will  luff  or  bear 
away,  as  the  water  may  deepen  or  become  more  shoal,  to  be  ascertained  by 
heaving  the  lead.  This  will  carry  you  clear  of  a  long  sand  shoal,  that  makes  off 
the  point  of  Bald  Head,  which  is  dangerous  to  ground  upon,  as  the  flood  tide 
sets  directly  over,  and  breaks  upon  it  with  the  wind  from  the  S.  W.  In  approach- 
ing Bald  Head,  caution  is  necessary,  as  the  shoals  on  both  sides  are  very  steep, 
frequently  from  6  to  3  fathoms  at  one  cast  of  the  lead.  Keep  close  to  this  shoal 
by  sounding  as  above  directed,  until  you  reach  Oak  Island,  when  you  may  steer 
direct  for  Smithville.  Outside  of  the  bar,  iri  r»  or  6  fathoms  water,  the  light- 
house bearing  N.  there  is  good  anchorage  in  soft  bottom.  There  is  on  the  bar,  at 
low  water,  10  feet,  and  at  high  water  14i  feet;  and  the  sea  is  scarcely  ever  so 
rough  as  to  prevent  a  pilot's  boarding  a  vessel  at  the  buoy. 


The  Western  or  Oak  Island  Channel, 

Is  to  bring  the  point  of  Oak  Island  to  bear  N.  E.  by  E.  keeping  this  course 
until  you  get  close  in  Avith  the  beach,  thence  along  the  beach  until  you  pass  Oak 
Island.    There  are  7  feet  at  low,  and  1 1  feet  at  high  water  on  this  bar. 


M' 


Other  directions  for  Oak  Island  Channel. 


Vessels  drawing  not  more  than  9  feet  water,  running  into  Wilmington  through 
Oak  Island  Channel,  may  bring  the  easternmost  part  of  the  lump  of  trees  on 
the  east  end  of  Oak  Island  to  bear  N.  E.  by  E.  and  run  for  it,  which  will  carry 


I  ' 


I     .!-i 


^. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


l^|28     125 

™     13.6       ■■■ 

Iti 
lit 

u 


■  40 


IL25  flu  1.4 


1^ 

I 


i 


1.6 


Riotographic 
.Sciences 
Corporation 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WnSTM.N.Y.  14SM 

(716)I72-4S03 


<^\ 


W\^ 


V 


V" 


v> 


^ 


•^X^"^ 


128 


BLUM  S  AM£RICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


them  over  in  the  best  of  the  water,  7^  Teet  at  low  water,  and  11  feet  at  high 
water ;  as  soon  as  you  deepen  your  water  over  the  bar,  steer  for  the  end  of  the 
sandy  point  of  Oak  Island,  till  close  up  with  it,  then  steer  E.  S>  E.  for  opening 
Cape  Greek,  till  you  deepen  into  4  fathoms,  then  haul  up  N.  or  N.  N.  W.  along 
the  beach,  till  you  get  up  with  Fort  Johnson,  where  you  may  anchor. 

NoTX.— A  law  has  passed  the  Congress  of  the  United  States,  and  appropria> 
tions  made  for  building  a  light-house  on  the  Point  of  Marsh,  near  the  mouth  of 
Neause  River,  and  for  placing  a  light-vessel  of  140  tons  on  the  S.  W.  point  of 
Roval  Shoal  in  Pamtico  Sound.     [See  Appendix.] 

[The  only  correct  survey  of  the  coast  of  North  Carolina,  by  authority  of  an 
act  of  Congress,  under  the  direction  of  Jesse  D-  Elliot,  U.  S.  Nav^,  is  published 
by  Edmunb  ii  Gkoroe  W.  Blunt,  to  whom  permission  was  given  to  copy, 
in  a  Chart  of  the  Coast,  on  a  square  scale.] 


RATES  OF  PILOTAGE  for  Cape  Fear  Bars  and  River. 

BARS. 

For  ^  .ssels  drawing    6    feet,  and  under    7    feet, 
7 
8 

1^ 
11 

12 
•    ,        12i 
13 

14 

144 

IS 

IH 

16 

164 

17 

174 

19 

181 

19 

194 

That  80  per  cent,  upon  the  present  e.  tablished  rates  of  pilotage,  as  above,  be  allowed  to 
Peeked  boats,  piloting  vessels  into  this  port  and  out  to  sea,  (which  is  comprised  in  the  last 
ctflomn.) 

For  the  RIVER,  from  Fort  Johnson  to  Wilmington. 

For  resseb  drawing    6    feet,  and  under  7  feet,  .  $7  00 

8  00 

9  00 
10  00 
U  00 

12  00 

13  00 

15  00 

16  00 
18  00 

80  00    : 
8S  00 
34  50 
26  00 

From  Fort  Johnson  to  Brunswick,  or  flrom  Brunswick  to  Wilmington,  or  vice  vena,  one 
half  the  pilotage  from  Fort  Johnson  to  Wilmington. 

From  Fort  Johnson  to  Five  Fathoms  Hole,  IVom  Five  Fathoms  Hole  to  Brunswick,  from 
Uranswiek  to  Campbetl's  Island,  and  from  Campbell's  Island  to  Wilmington,  or  vice  versa, 
one  fottffh  of  the  pilotage  from  Fort  Johnson  to  Wilmington. 


Open  Boat. 

Decked. 

7  feet, 

$5  60 

$8  SB 

8 

6  25 

9  37 

9 

7  25 

10  87 

10 

8  37 

12  53 

11 

10  00 

15  00 

12 

12  00 

18  00 

124 

13  33 

19  99 

13 

14  27 

21  40 

134 

15  33 

22  99 

14 

16  53 

24  89 

14) 

17  73 

26  59 

15 

21  80 

32  70 

15} 

23  10 

34  66 

16 

25  5 

37  57 

164 

26  70 

17 

28  60 

174 

32  70 

IS 

39  90 

18J 

42  00 

19 

44  80 

I 

194 

48  65 

80 

52  50 

6  feet,  and  under  7  feet. 

7    . 

8 

8 

9 

9 

10 

10 

104  • 

10}   .    . 

11 

11 

111 

114  . 

12 

12    .    . 

12} 

18}   .    . 

13    . 

13 

13} 

134   • 

14 

14 

14} 

14}   . 

16 

pa 
tal 


t  nt  high 
nd  of  thn 
r  opening 
W.  along 

ippropria- 
inouth  of 
'.  point  of 

rity  of  an 
published 
to  copy, 


'.ked, 

I  58 

I  37 

I  87 

!  53 

I  00 

I  00 

I  99 

40 

99 

89 

59 

70 

66 

157 


allowed  to 
in  the  laat 


00 
00 
OO 
DO 
OO 
OO 
90 
)0 
)0 
M) 
)0 
)0 
0 
10 

ena,  one 

ick,  from 
ice  versa, 


BLUNT's   AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 

From  Cape  Fear  to  Georgetown. 


129 


Georgetown  entrance  is  18  leagues  S.  W.  i  W.  from  Cape  Fear;  between  lies 
e  bank,  on  which  there  are  5  faUioms  water.  The  north  end  of  this  bank  lies 
about  5}  leagues  S.  W.  by  W.  from  Cape  Fear ;  it  thence  extends  S>  W.  j  S. 
8||  leagues.  The  inner  or  N.  W.  side  of  this  bank  is  about  4  leagues  from  the 
shore;  near  to  this  edge  there  m<ti  10,  9,  and  8  fathoms  water:  it  shoals  gradual- 
ly as  you  advance  towards  the  shore ;  this  is  called  Long  Bay.  Near  to  the 
north  end  of  this  bank,  there  are  10  fathoms;  along  its  S.  E.  side  there  are  8, 
7,  and  6  fathoms :  to  the  southward  of  this  bank  there  ar»-several  ahoals. 

In  sailing  to  Little  River  inlet,  which  divides  North  from  South  Carolina,  you 
pass  Lockwood's  Folly  Inlet,  which  lies  W.  from  Cape  Fear  light  3§  leagues  dis- 
tant.    The  land  appears  broken,  and  contains  no  safe  harbour. 

In  continuing  your  course  towards  Georgetown,  several  other  inlets  may  be 
discovered  in  clear  weather,  and  at  length  you  pass  North  Inlet,  about  S  leagues 
from  Georgetown  light-house :  this  inlet  is  the  northern  boundary  of  North 
Island,  on  which  island  the  light-house  is  situated.  The  entrance  into  this  inlet 
is  from  the  northwapd,  the  south  breaker  forming  nearly  a  crescent,  runs  appa- 
rently across  the  mouth  of  the  inlet :  there  is  generally  not  less  than  six  feet 
"(vater  on  the  bar  at  low  water,  but  the  depth  varies  with  the  direction  and  vio- 
lence of  the  prevailing  winds.  The  direction  of  this,  channel  has  been  witliin  a 
few  years  considerably,  though  gradually  changed  by  the  elongation  and  curve 
of  the  south  breaker,  throwing  the  channel  more  to  the  northward.  In  entering 
it  in  its  present  situation,  Georgetown  light-house  will  bear  about  S.  by  W.  dis- 
tant 3  leagues :  a  small,  but  distinct  sand  hill,  (the  most  northern  on  the  north 
end  of  the  North  Island)  S.  W.  ^  S.  the  most  southern  building  on  the  south  end 
of  the  opposite  island  \V.  by  S.;  you  may  then  run  in  between  the  heads  of  the 
two  breakers,  rounding  h\i\nf:  the  edge  of  tiie  south  breaker,  and  thus  passing 
between  the  breakers  into  the  harbour.  The  flood  tide  comes  in  from  the  S.  E. 
and  sets  across  the  south  breaker  towards  the  north  breaker.  On  the  north  end 
of  North  Island,  about  3  leagues  from  the  light,  there  is  a  village  of  about  20  or 
SO  dwelling  houses,  (a  summer  residence)  which  is  distinctly  seen  from  sea,  and 
often  mistaken  for  Sullivan's  Island  near  Charleston ;  there  are  several  houses 
on  the  north  point  of  the  opposite  island.  To  small  vessels  this  inlet  affords  a 
safe  harbour ;  there  are  two  passages  leading  from  it  up  to  Georgetown,  but  from 
the  shoalness  of  the  water,  they  cannot  be  conveniently  navigated,  except  by- 
boats  :  in  cases  of  necessity,  however,  vijssels  of  6  or  7  feet  draught  may  be 
navigated  with  some  delay  through  the  most  southern,  which  is  the  deepest  pas* 
eage  into  the  bay,  or  river,  leading  to  the  town. 


Directions  for  sailing  into  Georgetown  Harbour. 

Georgetown  light-house  is  a  lofty,  circular,  white  tower,  erected  on  North  Isl- 
and, which  is  on  the  northern  and  eastern  sides  of  the  harbour,  at  the  entrance  of 
Winyaw  bay,  on  a  low  sandy  spot,  and  exhibits  a  fixed  light,  90  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea  at  high  water,  bearing  N.  i  W.  from  the  entrance  of  the  bar,  6 
miles  distant.  From  the  easternmost  part  of  Cape  Roman  shoal,  to  the  en- 
trance of  the  bar,  the  course  is  N.  N.  E.  and  the  distance  15  miles,  and  from 
the  southernmost  part  of  Cape  Roman  shoal,  it  bears  N.  by  E.  j^E.  20  miles  dis- 
tant. On  the  out  Cape  shoal  is  5  feet  at  low,  and  9  feet  at  high  water,  and  a 
channel  within,  at  high  water,  of  2)  fathoms,  from  lj|  to  2  miles  wide,  and  5  fa- 
thoms outside,  close  on  board  the  shoal. 

In  approaching  Georgetown  bar  from  the  northward,  the  harbour  is  shut  out 
from  view  by  North  Island,  and  the  light-house  appears  to  be  situated  in  a  low 
wood. 

In  passing  the  light,  either  nertherly  or  southerly,  vessels  will  find  5  fatlioms 
water  within  5  miles  of  tiie  l&hd:  on  this  shoal  there  arc  about  71  feet  at  low 

17 


■K 


M 
i 

,■' 


*.:     - 


130 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT* 


water,  about  It  feet  at  high  water,  and  5  fathoms  all  round  it  The  principal 
entrance  into  the  harbour  fies  to  the  southward  of  the  light-house. 

There  are  several  spar  buoys  placed  in  the  best  water  on  the  bar,  and  in  the 
channel,  in  sailing  by  which,  the  following  directions  must  be  observed,  viz.  The 
first  buoy  on  the  bar  lies  directly  in  the  channel,  which,  of  course,  may  be  pass- 
ed on  either  side,  close  to ;  from  this  to  the  second  (channel)  buoy,  the  course 
is  about  N.  W.  one  mile  distant,  and  when  up  with  it,  immediately  steer  N.  E. 
1^  miles  distant,  which  is  also  m  the  channel,  to  the  third  buoy,  when  vou  will 
immediately  steer  N.  by  W.  for  the  light-house,  4  miles  distant,  keeping  that 
course  until  within  100  fathoms  of  the  light,  leaving  it  on  the  starboard  hand, 
Hvhen  you  will  be  in  good  anchorage. 

The  North  Inlet  channel  into  Georgetown,  cannot  be  recommended,  under 
any  circumstances. 

Vessels  at  sea  will  find  deep  water,  and  when  the  v/ind  is  to  the  southward 
and  westward,  convenient  and  safe  anchorage  near  the  land,  about  U  or  2  miles 
to  the  northward  of  the  light-house.  A  conmion  fiood  tide  rises  nearly  4  feet: 
it  is  high  water  on  the  bar  at  the  fuU  and  change  of  the  moon,  about  7  o'clock. 


Cape  Roman. 

Cape  Roman  is  rdhy  low  land ;  it  has  neither  tree  nor  bush,  and  appears,  when 
seen  at  a  distance,  to  be  a  sand  left  dry  by  the  tide.*  From  tbe  south  entrance 
of  Santee  river,  to  about  two  miles  S.  W.  of  Cape  Roman,  there  is  a  shoal^ 
which  extends  to  a  considerable  distance  from  the  land :  the  S.  E.  point  of  it 
lies  about  &  leagues  S.  by  E.  from  Georgetown  light-house,  and  the  S.  W.  point 
lies  about  2|  leagues  S.  £.  from  Cape  Roman.  Close  to  this  dangeroue  sand» 
tliere  are  4  and  3  fathoms ;  the  land  is  so  low  that  you  cannot  see  it  from  the 
deck  of  a  ship,  at  the  extremity  of  the  shoal. 

The  outer  shoal  of  Cape  Roman  bears  (as  described  in  page  129)  from 
Georgetown  bar.  The  entrance  of  Santee  nver  lies  between  the  shoal  and  the 
Hght-house.  The  south  entrance  is  2^  leagues  from  the  entrance  of  Georgetown 
river,  and  S  leagues  from  Cape  Roman.  Ships  that  faH  in  with  the  shoals  of 
Georgetown  entrance,  should  not  come  into  less  than  4  iathoms  water ;  and  al- 
though the  mudiness  of  the  water  is  apt  to  frighten  strangers,  there  is  no  real 
danger  to  be  apprehended.  The  land  here  is  low,  and  appears,  when  viewed  at 
a  distance,  in  hummocks,  like  a  range  of  islands. 

By  steering  W.  N.  W.  from  the  3.  W.  part  of  Cape  Roman  shoal,  you  will 
soon  see  the  island  called  Racoon  Keys ;  it  is  a  long  narrow  island,  and  lies 
about  W.  by  S.  from  Cape  Roman.  When  you  see  Racoon  Keys,  steer  W.  S. 
W.  or  S.  W.  by  W.  in  about  5  fathoms  water.  As  there  is  a  shoal  runs  off  about 
5  miles  S.  E.  by  £.  from  the  N.  E.  end  of  Bull  s  Island,  you  should  take  care 
to  avoid  it  in  passing.  Senee  I!ay,  or  Bull's  Harbour,  lies  between  Racoon  Keys 
and  Bull's  Island.  There  are  shoals  lying  off  the  west  end  of  Racoon  Keys, 
and  you  should  anchor  near  to  Bull's  Island,  in  6  fathonu  water. 

From  the  shoal  off  the  N.  E.  end  of  Bull's  Island  to  Cnarleston  bar,  the  course, 
to  go  clear  of  the  Rattle  Snake,  is  S.  W.  by  W.  ^nl)  the  distance  7  leagues. 

*  A  wind-mill  is  srectecl  oa  the  point  of  Cape  Jiloman,  which  at  a  distance,  having  tbe  sp- 
psaranee  of  a  light-house,  especially  in  hazy  weather,  wiH  easily  deceive  stiaagsn,  who, 
urom  want  of  exact  latitude  in  approaching  the  coast,  may  mistake  it  for  Charkstoo  light- 
house. In  feditng  in  with  this  wind-mill,  you  mast  not  come  into  less  than  7  fathoms  water, 
bringing  it  to  bear  W.  N.  VV.  Then  you  are  abreast  ef  the  Cape  Shoals,  and  Chariestaa 
light-house  will  bear  W.  8.  W.  about  16  leagues.  In  consequence  or  its  resemblance  to  Charles- 
ton light-house,  it  has  engaged  the  notice  of  the  leg^lature  of  South  Carolina,  who  have  passed 
a  resolution  appointing  certain  penotu  to  fix  a  mark  of  distinction  upon  the  building,  to  pre- 
vent the  repeution  of  accidents  to  vessels  on  that  coast  TlUa  law  wm  pautd  i»  18S1,  md 
l»tkitlim(M,  1637)  ne  dUtntim  hat  betn  made.    [S«9  itpendix.] 


*i 


« 


V 


.4)1 


ff"^^ 


/•«,,/'-/>/.  /.J/. 


til, mil  J  At  //..    .till, 11,1111  I',  lit/  lil,t 


charleston 
h:\kbouk 


•••:■       tj  ■•.  \      >.V".j.-:.\<-        N^  > 


..........  .-...$. 

'''ittvA..-:ii>-"-""  ,\?  '       .  ... 

i/,„r/,  r/,ii  ('/ii/rf/ir.e  n/i/'ntrin,/  tr  .VofAminl  rf^  SiilUmii.t  f.llun  hiH  /><  .JJ  J-'af/u'tiit 
\\  en  tAf  Aa/Uf-*'n,i/ir 


miumimimm^Mmmm 


Chi,rl,Mti„  Chiii-i-hfr  ii/if',„niui  /4,frn/fiH,ii;i  ctJ\tllntnit  J.  ti.ii  dun  th,    Jliiltlr  .liiiti. 


\  \ 


^iltmWm, 


'i^^WW'*^^^W|pi(wBtCTBBiW)H^^(w^«4^ 


^'^ 


U,;kfl-    .f,. 


XfwHirh      Puti^krJ  Am 


fc  (H;'r„f  rrBf>ifir.Jfi97. 


t 


Hit 


fr  •  t'nuit 


H,:-kir  .1,- 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


131 


There  are  four  island*  between  Senee  Bay  and  Charleston  bar,  viz.  Bull's, 
Cooper's,  Oevles,  and  Long  Island.  Flats  extend  from  all  the  islands,  along 
which  the  soundings  are  regular.  With  Charleston  churches  northward  of 
Sulliran's  island,  you  will  be  in  5)  fathoms  water,  on  the  edge  of  the  Rattle 
Snake ;  and  when  the  churches  are  open  to  the  southward  of  SulliTan's  Island, 
you  are  clear  of  that  shoal.  You  should  approach  no  nearer  to  this  bank  than 
i  fathoms  water. 


*:j''" 


Dirtctions  for  tailing  into  Charleston,  (S.  C.) 

The  entri^nce  of  Charleston  bar  lies  in  lat.  SSP  44'  N.  In  running  in  for 
Charleston  *light-house,  which  may  be  seen  some  distance  at  sea,  you  will  have 
gradual  soundings.  When  you  come  near  the  bar,  you  may  see  the  north  and 
f  south  breakers,  between  which  is  the  entrance  over  the  bar.  In  running  over 
the  bar,  you  bring  the  light-house  to  bear  N.  W.  by  W.  and  stund  for  it,  and  when 
you  make  the  Beacon,  bring  it  to  bear  about  two  handspikes  length  north  of  the 
light ;  this  will  bring  you  up  with  the  South  Breaker  Buoy  ;  give  this  buoy  a 
birth  to  the  southward  of  you,  of  about  a  cable's  length,  and  the  middle  buoy 
a  birth  to  the  northward  of  you,  of  about  half  that  distxince.  After  passing  the 
latter,  stand  more  to  the  northward  for  the  North  Breaker  Buoy,  giving  it  a 
birth  of  half  a  cables'  length  to  the  northward  of  you—in  passing  which  the 
Beacon  should  be  nearly  touching  the  north  side  of  the  light.  You  may  tlien 
stand  up  for  Sullivan's  Island.  The  Beacon  on  with  the  light  carries  you  on 
the  North  Breakers ;  care  should  therefore  be  taken  to  keep  it  open  to  the 
northward. 

In  crossing  the  bar,  care  should  be  taken  that  the  flood  tide  does  not  set  you 
on  the  north  breaker,  till  you  come  within  half  a  mile  of  the  light-house,  when 
jou  may  anchor  in  3  fathoms  water.  Buoys  are  in  general  placed  on  the  bar, 
in  IS  feet  water  at  low  tide.    The  buoys  are  black. 

There  is  another  ship  channel  to  the  southward  of  thi^s^  called  Law  ford's  chan- 
nel, where  you  will  have  from  10  to  12  feet,  according  as  the  tide  may  be.  In 
going  into  this  channel,  the  course  is  N.  N.  W.  There  is  a  buoy  here  also. 
This  anchorage  is  called  Five- fathom  hole,  but  it  has  no  more  than  3^  fathoms. 
From  thence  your  course  is  about  N.  by  E.  3}  miles,  in  6  or  8  fathoms  water, 
which  will  carry  you  abreast  of  Cumming's  point ;  when  this  point  bears  W. 
half  a  mile  distant,  steer  N.  N.  W.  for  the  S.  W.  part  of  Sullivan's  Island ;  you 
will  have  from  7  to  10  fathoms  water.  You  may  go  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile 
of  Sullivan's  Island,  as  it  is  bold.  Your  course  from  thence  to  Charleston  is 
about  W.  i  N.  and  the  distance  4i  or  5  miles.  When  you  bring  Hog  Island  to 
bear  N.  and  Fort  Johnson  to  bear  S.  by  W.  you  are  up  with  the  eastern  end  of  the 
Middle  Ground,  which  you  must  not  go  nearer  to  than  3  fathoms.  You  may 
then  steer  nearly  W.  keeping  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  which  will  carry  you  be- 
tween the  Marsh  or  Shut's  Folly,  and  the  Middle  Ground.  This  channel  is  nar- 
row, not  being  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  broad,  as  the  flats  lie  o£f  from 
Shut's  folly  one-quarter  of  a  mile.  Continue  your  west  course  till  you  come  up 
to  the  town,  where  you  may  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water>  In  running  up 
from  Sullivan's  Island,  stand  no  nearer  to  the  southward  than  till  you  come  into 
S  fathoms,  for  fear  of  the  spit  (a  Middle  Ground  that  lies  off  to  the  N.  £.  and. 

*  Charleston  light-house  contains  a  revolving  l^ht,  which  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  8 
or  9  leagues.  The  time  of  darkness  will  be  twice  to  that  of  light ;  as  you  approach  it,  the  time 
of  darkness  will  decrease,  and  that  of  light  increase  until  you  get  within  three  leagues,  when 
the  light  will  not  wholly  disappear,  but  the  greatest  strength  of  the  light  will  be  as  1  to  44, 
to  the  least. 

t  The  south  breaker  has  a  buoy  on  the  east  end,  in  12  feet  water,  and  in  the  middle  of  this 
channel  is  a  buoy  with  a  small  white  flag  upon  it,  in  10  feet  water,  low  tide— en  either  side 
of  which  you  may  go  when  running  in. 


it 


I 


i^ 


*■ 


i 


..:f 
.1 


«i 


132 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


E.  from  Fort  Johnson's  Point)  as  far  as  Cumming's  Point,  nor  to  tlie  nortii- 
ward  nearer  than  9  or  4  fathoms. 

After  sailing  from  Sullivan's  Island,  as  before  directed,  you  must,  if  bound 
through  the  S.  W.  channel,  or  by  Fort  Johnson's  Point,  bring  the  point  of  land 
on  which  the  fort  is,  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  and  run  directly  far  it,  where  you  will  have 
from  4  to  G  fathoms.  When  abreast  of  this  point,  direct  your  course  about  N. 
W.  by  W.  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  about  one  mile,  or  till  yuu  bring  c'  point  of  wood- 
land to  the  northward  of  the  town,  of  Coopfir's  Rivtr  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  when 
you  may  run  N.  W.  b^  N.  about  one  mile,  which  will  carry  you  up  to  the  town, 
and  anchor  as  above  directed. 

You  may  see  Charleston  light-house,  in  clear  weather,  in  10  fathoms  water. 
The  winds  on  the  soundings  govern  the  current.    Var.  4<^E.  1819. 

[(^  See  the  Plate.] 

[N'oTE.— As  St.  Michael's  church  steeple  has  been  newly  painted  a  very  bril- 
liant white,  and  can  be  seen  SO  miles  at  sea,  mariners  are  informed  of  the  cit- 
rumstance,  to  prevent  any  mistake.]  •  ,  , 


,-» 


beti 
ingsl 
If 


HATKS  OF  PILOTAGE, /or  the  Bar  and  Harbour  of  Charleston. 


•'or  6  feet  water,  or  under,  . 

$8  00 

For  13J  feet  water,     . 

$23  00 

7 

do 

9  00 

14 

do 

25  00 

8 

do 

10  00 

141 

do 

29  00 

fl 

do 

11  00 

15 

do 

SI  00 

10 

do 

14  00 

15i 

do 

.95  00 

11 

do 

16  0 

16 

do 

42  00 

12 

do 

19  00 

16i 

do 

50  00 

12J 

do 

20  00 

17 

do 

60  00 

13 

do        .          .        . 

21  00 

From  Charlesion  i?ar  to  *Port  Royal. 

From  5  fathoms  water,  off  Chariest .m  Bar,  to  North  Eddisto  inlet,  the  course 
Is-  S.  W.  by  W.  I  W.  and  the  disti  nee  5}  leagues  ;  this  course  will  carry  you 
clear  of  the  shoals,  which  lie  off  Stono  inlet,  which  lie  further  off  than  any  that 
are  in  your  way  to  Eddisto.  Stono  inlet  is  about  two  leagues  from  the  south 
channel  of  Charleston ;  between  them  lie  two  islands,  viz.  Morris  Island,  on 
which  the  light-house  stands,  and  the  island  called  the  Coffin  Island.  With  the 
light-house  open  of  the  Coffin  Island,  ^ou  will  go  clear  of  the  Stono  shoals,  in  0 
fathoms  water ;  but  if  you  shut  the  light-house  in  with  Coffin  Island,  you  will 
not  have  more  than  5^  fathoms  off  Stono  Shoals  ;  you  v/ill  pass  close  to  the 
breakers,  and  consequently  be  in  danger :  the  breakers,  unless  the  sea  be  smooth, 
show  where  the  shoal  is.  In  Stono  ml^t  there  are  9  or  10  feet  of  water,  at  low 
water,  but  it  was  not  much  frequented  until  Charleston  was  blockaded,  in  the 
year  1775. 

From  Stono  inlet  to  North  Eddisto  inlet,  the  course  is  S.  W.  by  W.  j  W.  an«T 
the  distance  11  miles  ;  between  them  the  Roundings  are  regular,  and  the  shoal- 
ings,  when  you  are  coming  from  the  offing  towards  the  shore,  are  very  gradual ; 
the  bar  of  Nortli  Eddisto,  and  the  shoals  which  are  contiguous  to  it,  lie  off  about 
4  or  5  miles  from  the  land.  Close  to  the  bar  and  shoals  there  are  3  and  4 
fathoms  water ;  on  the  bar,  there  are  9  and  10  feet  at  low  water.  South  Eddisto 
is  3  leagues  W.  S.  W.  from  North  Eddisto.    The  shore  of  the  islands  which  lie 


*  Port  Royal  is  6  leagues  N.  E.  i  E.  from  Tybee  light-house,  at  the  entrance  of  Savann-ah 
riVCT,  vnd  has  a  hnrbour  stifficient  to  contain  the  largest  fleet  in  the  worl'1. 


■■^*^.:,.— .Aajkj^ 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


133 


between  them  may  be  approached  with  your  lead  without  danger.    The  shoal* 
ings  towards  it  are  gradual. 

If  bound  to  the  southward  or  northward,  and  obliged  through  stress  of 
weather,  to  make  a  harbuur  in  North  Eddisto,  tou  muf^t,  when  within  about  5 
miles  of  the  land,  open  a  tree  (which  resembles  an  umbrella)  witi)  the  south 
point  of  the  harbour,  and  then  steer  in  N.  W.  without  any  danger,  and  anchor  in 
6  fathoms  water  on  the  northern  side  of  the  harbour.  [Tiu  tide  here  is  vary 
Topid.]    In  the  harbour,  4  miles  west  from  anchorage,  you  may  get  good  water. 

When  you  are  coming  from  sea,  for  Purl  Royal  harbour,  you  should  get  into 
the  latitude  of  St.  Michaers  head,  which  is  3£°  6  N.  then  steer  W.  for  the  head, 
and  when  you  come  within  \'j  leagues  of  it,  you  will  have  from  30  to  25  fathoms 
water.  Continue  your  west  course  until  you  make  the  la  id,  which  you  will  do, 
if  the  weather  be  clear,  at  a  distance  of  6  leagues,  in  W  fathoms  water.  The 
land  hereabouts  is  generally  low,  but  the  trees  are  high.  Port  Royal  entrance  is 
known  by  a  small  grove  of  trees,  which  stand  on  the  north  side  of  it,  and  tower 
above  all  the  other  trees,  like  a  hig)  «;iowned  hat ;  hence  this  grove  is  called  the 
Hat  of  Port  Royal.  Continue  to  steer  as  before,  keeping  your  lead  going  until 
you  get  into  8  fathoms  water,  when  you  will  be  about  3  leagues  from  St.  Mi- 
chael's head.  You  may  then  steer  a  point  to  the  oouthward  of  west,  until  you 
get  into  r«  fathoms  water ;  then  steer  more  southerly  taking  care  not  to  bring  St. 
Michael's  head  to  the  northward  of  N.  W.  by  N.  until  you  see  the  great  north 
breaker,  called  Cole's  Care,  close  to  which  there  are  4  fathoms  water :  this  shoal 
must  be  left  on  the  starboard  side.  As  you  approach  this  breaker  from  the 
northward,  you  will  see  another  breaker  to  the  southward,  called  Martin's  In- 
dustry :  between  these  two  breakers  lies  the  entrance  of  the  channel  into  Port 
Royal  Harbour,  which  is  about  a  mile  wide.  The  mark  to  go  cle<ir  of  the  north 
breaker,  is  a  parcel  of  high  trees,  which  stand  near  the  mouth  of  the  river  May, 
and  appear  like  an  island,  kept  just  open  of  Elizabeth  point.  Your  course 
through  between  the  two  shoals,  is  W.  \  N.  or  W.  by  N.  In  this  channel  there 
arenot  less  than  3|  or  4  fathoms,  at  low  water.  Continue  to  steer  as  aforesaid, 
between  the  two  breakers,  until  you  bring  Phillip's  point  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  then 
steer  directly  for  it,  and  you  will  have  as  you  proceed,  9,  8  and  7  fathoms  water. 
When  you  are  abreast  of  Phillip's  Point,  give  it  a  small  birth,  and  steer  up  in  a 
N.  by  W.  i  W.  in  6  and  5  fathoms  water ;  in  the  latter  depth  you  may  anchor 
very  safe  harbour. 

There  iv<  also  a  channel  between  Martin's  Industry  and  Caskin  bank,  called 
the  South  channel,  in  which  there  are  not  less  than  IS  feet  at  hiw  water.  In 
order  to  go  in  through  this  channel,  you  must,  when  in  7  fathoms  water,  bring 
Hilton's  head  to  bear  N.  W.  by  N.  and  then  steer,  with  an  ebb  tide,  N.  W.  and 
with  a  flood  tide  N.  W.  by  N.  .until  Phillip's  Point  bears  N  by  W.  J  W.  You 
may  then  steer  for  the  Pomt,  and  proceed  as  before  directed. 

About  8}  miles  S.  E.  from  Hilton's  head,  and  4  miles  S.  by  E.  from  Phillip's 
point,  lies  the  east  end  of  the  Joiner's  hank ;  it  thence  extends  W.  N.  W.  about 
Si  miles,  and  has  Sj  fathoms  on  it  at  low  water.  Hilton's  head  is  on  the  south 
BJde  of  the  harbour,  and  is  a  higher  blulT  point  of  land  than  any  thereabouts. 

Tybee  inlet  lies  6  leagues  S.  W.  i  W.  from  the  entrance  of  Port  Royal  south 
channel ;  between  them  is  Hilton's  head  island ;  it  is  large,  fertile  and  well  in- 
habited. From  this  island  the  Gaskin  bank  extends  abupt  8  miles  on  the  broad- 
est part.  You  may  proceed  along  this  hank,  in  5  fathoms  water.  Some,  when 
bound  to  Port  Royal,  reckon  it  best  to  make  the  land  about  Tybee,  because  the 
light-house  makes  that  part  of  the  coast  distinguishable  from  any  other  part. 
Tybee  inlet  is  the  entrance  of  Savan-ah  river.  Ships  which  draw  14  or  15  feet 
water,  may  go  in  at  Tybee,  and  proceed  through  land  to  Beaufort  in  Port  Royal 
Islands,  and  from  Beaufort,  vessels  of  8  or  9  feet  water,  may  go  through  land  to 
Charleston.  From  Charleston,  ve83»;is  drawing  7  or  8  feet  water,  may  go  through 
land  to  the  rive^  Medway,  in  Geor(;ia,  which  lies  30  miles  south  of  Savannah. 

On  this  coast  it  is  observed,  that  N.  E.  easterly,  and  S.  E.  winds  cause  high- 
<Rr  tides  than  other  v;inds,  and  also,  somewhat  alter  their  course.  At  Port 
Royal  entrance  the  tide  flows  on  the  change  and  full  days  of  the  moon,  k  past  " 


1 

f 

A 

\ 


..s 


134 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


o'elock.  AbQ^t  6  ItegHes  from  the  land,  in  IS  Iktboms  water,  the  flood  sett 
strongly  to  the  southward,  and  the  ebb  to  the  northward,  further  off  fronrthe 
•hore  ther^  m  no  tide  at  aH.  Near  to  the  entrance  of  the  harbour  thece  it  a 
strong  indnui|ht  during  the  flood  tide,  and  an  outset  with  an  ehb  tide. 


Windt  and  weather  on  the  coast  of  ^outb  Carolina. 

When  the  wind  blows  hard,  in  the  N.  E.  quarter,  without  rain,  it  conuBonhr 
continues  to  blow  violent  for  some  time,  perhaps  3  or  4  days ;  birt  if  such  winds 
are  attended  with  rain,  they  generally  shift  to  the  E. — E.  S.  E.  and  8.  E. 

S.  £.  winds  blow  right  in  on  the  coast,  but  they  seldom  blow  dry,  or  continue 
lon|(;  in  8,  8,  or  10  hours  after  their  commencement,  the  sky  begins  ta  look  dirty, 
which  soon  produced  rain.  When  it  comes  to  blow  and  rain  very  hard,  you  may 
be  sure  that  the  wind  will  fly  round  to  the  N,  W.  quarter,  and  blow  very  hard  for 
20  or  SO  hours,  with  a  clear  sky. 

N.  W.  winds  are  always  attended  with  clear  weather.  They  sometimes  blow 
very  hard,  but  seldom  do  so  longer  than  30  hours. 

Gales  on  the  coast  of  South  Carolina  frequently  increase  much  in  violenco 
toward  thdr  conclusion,  and  then  break  off  at  once,  leaving  a  cross  sea,  with  aJr 
most  no  wind. 

The  most  lasting  winds  are  those  which  blow  from  the  S.  S.  W.  and  W.  N. 
W.  and  from  the  N.  to  the  E.  N.  E.  When  the  wind  is  in  any  of  these  cpiar- 
ters,  the  weather  is  the  most  settled. 

Thunder  gusts  are  very  common  on  this  coast  in  the  summer  time ;  they  al- 
ways come  irom  the  N.  W.  quarter,  and  are  sometimes  so  heavy  that  no  canvass 
can  withstand  their  fury ;  they  come  on  so  suddenly,  that  the  greatest  precau> 
tioDS  are  necessary  to  guard  against  the  effects  of  their  viol  tnce. 


St.  Hdtna  Sound, 

The  entrance  of  this  Sound  lies  between  South  Eddisto  Island,  and  the  north- 
ernmost Hunting  Island ;  it  is  about  2  leagues  wide.  This  place  is  navigable  by 
vessels  of  7  or  8  feet  water  only ;  it  is  full  of  sand  banks,  manjr  of  which  are  dry 
at  low  water.  Six  rivers  empty  themselves  intoJUs  Sound,  viz.  South  Eddisto, 
Ashappo,  Cumbahaw,  Gb  oshaw.  True  Blue,  andx^orsaw.  These  rivers  are  all 
navigable ;  some  of  them  come  200  miles  down  the  country,  but  few  of  them 
can  be  navigated  by  vessels  of  6  feet  water,  for  more  than  SO  or  40  miles  from 
the  Sound.  From  the  entrance  of  St.  Helena  Sound,  along  the  Hunting  Islands 
to  the  entrance  of  Port  Royal,  the  course  is  S.  W.  i  S.  and  the  distance  about 
Si  leagues.    The  soundings  are  regular:  you  will  have  5  or  6  fathoms  water. 


From  Charleston  Bar  to  Tybee. 

When  over  the  bar,  in  8  fathoms  water,  the  course  is  S.  W.  distance  22  leagues. 
As  you  come  near  the  latitude  of  Port  Royal  entrance,  which  is  39P  8'  N.  be 
careful  to  avoid  a  very  dangerous  shoal,  called  Martin's  Industry;  it  lies  4  leagues 
from  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  of  Port  Royal,  which  is  the  north  side  of 
Hilton  Head,  the  highest  land  in  sight :  come  no  nearer  than  7  fathoms,  keeping 
^our  lead  going ;  and  in  the  night  or  thick  weather,  do  not  approach  nearer 
than  10  fathoms :  the  tide  of  flood  sets  boldly  in.    When  you  get 'to  the  south- 


H 


* 


dMtt 
nor  the 
e  is  a 


nonly 
windk 

ntinue 
dirty, 
umay 
irdfor 

(blow 

otence 
ith  air 

W.N. 
I  (par- 
ley al- 
anvass. 
irecau- 


lepmg 

learer 

>uth- 


■ijcK  l!f»rtUoi\. 
rk  by  TfcnMip. 


Pruited  B  v  WILvluf  tOi  Wakr Str.-et  Jk  f  l^^r^  iSi7. 


m 


I 


/h,t,r„  f;,K/l/llllt   . 


/h/<h\ih,;l  tni  K. »/' fV/ittuU/J^Mr }^r* 


■^ 


*  <t, 


wd  hit  E.  ft-r.  i\riUiMt'j\,  "tur  loi* . 


rnirM  Jiv  WI£-yK,fr  ti'-iW.thrStr,;-r.A\-y  i.''.>  /'.''V.' 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAFT   PILOT. 


135 


H 


1  :. 


TTard  of  Hilton  Head,  you  will  see  the  light-house  which  stands  on  the  iiLtand 
of  •Tybee. 

If  in  the  night,  and  you  are  to  the  northward  of  Tybee,  be  careful  of  going 
nearer  the  Gaskin  Bank  than  5  fathoms.  In  fresh  winds  you  take  a  pilot  abreast 
of  the  light-house — ^in  moderate  weather,  without  the  bar.  In  clear  weather  you 
may  see  the  lip;ht-house  at  the  distance  of  12  miles. 

Near  the  (  kin  bank  and  Martin's  Industry,  the  flood  runs  strong  into  Port 
Royal,  to  wluch  may  be  attributed  the  loss  of  so  many  vessels  on  these  banks. 

Off  Tybee  there  are  two  large  coppered  buoys,  one  on  the  tail  of  the  knoll  in 
2  fathoms  water,  bearing  from  the  light-house  N.  N.  W.  the  other  in  4i,  bear- 
ing N.  E.  by  N.  from  the  light-house,  in  mid-channel,  where  large  vessels  may 
anchor  with  safety,  when  wind  and  tide  will  not  permit  to  proceed  higher  up. 

A  Beacon  is  erected  on  Tybee  Island,  which  is  lighted,  and  bears  £. )  S.  from 
the  light-house. 

The  Beacon  light  on  with  Tybee  light,  'j  the  direct  course  over  the  bar.  The 
best  anchoring  ground  is  with  Tybee  light  bearing  from  S.  S.  W.  to  S.  the  for- 
mer to  he  preferred,  and  distant  about  one  cable's  length  from  the  beach.  On 
the  bar  is  a  buoy  with  a  white  top,  in  4^  fathoms  water,  distant  4||  miles  from  the 
light-house.  The  deepest  water  is  between  the  buoy  and  the  south  breaker 
head. 

On  Savannah  bar  there  are  18  or  19  feet  at  low  water.  On  the  south 
breaker  there  are  not  more  than  7  or  8  feet  water;  and  U  mile  from  the  light, 
it  is  bare  at  low  tide.  On  the  north  breaker  there  is  not  less  than  IS  feet  for  the 
distance  of  a  mile. 

After  getting  into  4  fathoms  water  you  will  be  over  the  bar,  when  you  must 
haul  up  W.  N.  W.  until  the  light-house  bears  S.  S.  W.  then  anchor. 

The  point  of  sho^^l  which  runs  down  from  Cockspur  Island,  and  separates  that 
channel  from  the  :>hip  channel,  bears  N.  i  W.  from  the  light,  and  has  not  more 
than  5  feet  on  it  at  low  tide.  When  to  the  northward  of  thb  point,  the  li|^t 
bearing  S.  S.  E.  you  may  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms. 

Vessels  drawing  not  more  than  8  or  9  feet  may  keep  the  light  or  island  side  on 
hoard,  and  run  into  Cockspur  and  anchor,  as  they  cannot  pass  the  upper  end 
of  the  island  until  half  flood,  there  being  only  7  or  8  feet  at  low  tide. 

There  are  three  bars,  having  from  two  to  3  fathoms,  on  the  back  of  TyL"«  and 
Cabbage  Islands ;  but  they  are  never  to  he  attempted  but  in  absolute  necessity. 
_  Note. — Sailing  into  Savannah  you  will  observe  the  following  marks  and  buoys, 
viz.  a  large  buoy  lies  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  bar  in  the  deepest  water,  havmg 
all  the  leading  marks  on  the  beacon  and  light-house  in  one,  bearing  W.  ^  N«  dis- 
tant .4  miles.  Another  buoy  lies  in  the  same  direction,  one  mile  within  the  bar; 
a  third  buoy  lies  one  mile  farther  W.  by  N.  from  the  second,  a  fourth  buoy  lies 
N.  W.  by  W.  from  the  third ;  after  passing  which  there  is  safe  anchorage  for 
a  large  fleet,  in  4  or  Ave  fathoms,  at  low  water,  the  li^ht-house  bearing  S.  S.  W. 

The  buoys  lie  and  lead  in  the  deepest  water,  having  a  channel  half  a  mile  to 
the  northward,  and  one-quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  them,  (in  the  nar- 
rowest place)  nearly  the  same  depth  of  water,  and  there  are  20  feet  on  the  bar 
at  lowest  tides  :  you  may  sail  either  side  of  the  buoys,      [tt/*  See  the  Plate.] 

Tybee  creek  has  11  feet  through  it,  at  low  water.  Forty  miles  south  of  Sa- 
vannah lies  Sunbury,  a  port  of  entry,  at  the  head  of  St.  Catharine's  Sound,  be- 
tween Medway  and  Newport  rivers,  about  15  miles  south  of  Ogechee  river. 
There  is  a  bar  here,  but  the  harbour  is  capacious  and  safe,  and  has  water  suffi- 
cient for  ships  of  great  burthen. 

Warsaw  has  10  feet  on  the  bar,  but  it  is  too  intricate  for  strangers. 


*  Tybee  Island  lies  at  the  mouth  of  Savannah  River,  to  the  southirard  of  the  bar.    It  k 
very  pleasant,  with  a  beautiful  creek  to  the  west  of  it,  where  a  ship  of  any  burthen  mav  lie 


in  safety  at  anchor.    A  light-house  stands  on  the  island,  80  feet  high,  contuning  a)i«ecl  %4(, 
is  17  miles  E.  S.  E.  ^  E.  from  Savannah,  and  6  leagues  S.  W.  |  W.  flrom  Port  Royal.    ~ 
saw  Sound  is  formed  by  the  southern  end  of  this  island. 


»w 


nm'    iiiii<i«»''«^ppwi>i^ 


If 


.1., 


136 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Directions  for  Hogohcehee  River. 


Hosaba  bar,  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  Hognheehee,  has  18  feet  water  On  it, 
to  cross  which,  bring  Green  Islaod  to  bear  N.  W.  by  W.  steer  in  W.  by  N.  till 
you  deepen  your  water,  then  haul  up  N.  W.  by  N.  and  you  will  soon  get  in  8  or 
9  fathoms,  when  your  eye  and  lead  will  be  your  best  directions;  at  the  extremi- 
ty of  the  channel  you  will  keep  Hnsaba  nearest  on  board,  until  nearly  up  with 
the  lower  part  of  Buzzard  Island,  when  the  channel  will  be  close  under  the  star- 
board shore. 

Green  Island  (the  seat  of  hospitality)  is  much  higher  land,  has  taller  timber 
than  the  surrounding  forests,  containing  soreral  hundred  acreSt  covered  with 
pine,  which  generally  has  a  greenish  appearance.  ** 


■i-li 


St.  Catharine's  Bar,  *' 


*rt« 


Which  is  dinicult  for  strangers,  lies  one  mile  south  of  the  north  point  of  the  isl- 
and, has  but  81  feet  at  low  tide ;  channel  not  more  than  200  yards  wide,  the 
shoals  generally  dry  each  side  of  the  bar.  It  is  better  for  vessels  bound  to  New- 
j)ort,  Sunbury,  or  up  these  streams,  to  enter  at  Sapelo  or  Hosaba,  and  go  the 
inland  passage,  which  is  not  difficult.  >  •   '         ■     .»    ■  -^^        — -■ 


Directions  for  Darien.       w* 


•r, 


Doboy  bar  lies  in  lat.  .Sio  21'  N.  long.  81°  26'  W.  Vessels  making  the  land, 
when  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  will,  during  clear  weather,  see  the  beacon  on  Wolf 
Island,  which  must  be  brought  to  bear  W.  \  S.  Run  exactly  in  this  course  tilL 
the  buoy  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  bar  is  made,  which  may  be  passed  on  either 
side.  Continue  this  W.  {  S.  course  till  near  the  inner  buoy,  opposite  the  north 
breaker,  by  which  you  will  pass  the  8  feet  Knowl  on  your  starboard  hand,  fn 
passing  them,  the  north  breaker  is  to  be  kept  on  the  starboard,  and  the  buoy 
on  the  larboard  hand,  taking  care  at  the  same  time  that  the  flood  tide  does 
not  set  ''le  vessel  on  the  north  breaker.  In  running  this  course,  the  bar  is 
crossed  with  not  less  than  12  feet  at  low  water.  When  abreast  of  the  inner 
buoy,  run  from  it  IJ  mile  in  a  direction  exactly  N.  W.  by  W.  where  the  anchor- 
age IS  excellent  in  4  fathoms  at  low  water,  which  will  bnng  the  vessel  in  the  vi- 
cinity of  the  *light-house.    The  neap  tide  ebbs  7  feet. 

The  following  are  the  depths  of  water,  bearings,  and  distances  to  two  buoys,  t 
placed  in  Doboy  Inlet,  leading  to  Darien,  Georgia — 

Buoy  No.  l,8unk  in  18  feet  water,  at  low  water,  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  bar, 
bearing  B.  J  N.  from  the  beacon  on  Wolf  Island,  Si  miles  distant,  and  4i  miles 
from  the  south  point  of  Sapelo,  in  an  E.  S.  E.  direction. 

Buoy  No.  2,  sunk  in  21  feet  water  at  l(»w  water,  off  the  north  breaker  head, 
bearing  E.  h  N.  from  the  beacon  aforesaid,  about  i\  miles,  and  in  a  S.  E.  by  E< 
direction.  Si  miles  from  the  south  point  of  Sapelo.  This  buoy  is  S.  E.  by  £.  \  E. 
54  miles  from  Doboy  Island,  and  from  the  most  southern  part  of  the  north  break- 
er, one-third  of  a  mile  W.  by  S.  ||  S. 

*  The  light-house  ia  erected  on  the  south  poiat  of  Sapelo  island.  The  lantern  is  elevated 
74  feet  above  the  level  of  the  ^ea,  and  contains  a  revolving  light,  which  revolves  once  in  every 
five  minutes,  during  which  period  the  greatest  power  of  light  and  a  total  darkness  will  be 
produced  three  times,  each  alternately,  at  any  distance  between  10  miles  uiid  d  leagues :  when 
you  approach  the  light  within  3  leagues,  it  will  not  totally  disappear,  but  the  greatest  itrength 
of  light  is  to  that  of  the  least  as  40  to  1. 

To  distinguish  thi&  light-house  from  any  other  on  the  neighbouring  coasts  in  the  day,  the 
■t<  wer  is  painted  with  stripes  horizontally,  red  and  white,  which  gives  it  Uio  appearance  of  a 
ship  with  the  sails  clewed  up. 


la 
Ltt 


..  Jr.  ■      .. 

water  6n  it, 
\r.  by  N.  till 
n  get  in  8  or 
the  extremi- 
irly  up  with 
[ider  the  star- 
taller  timber 
covered  with 


int  of  the  isN 
Is  wide,  the 
und  to  New- 
and  go  the 


;ing  the  land, 
icon  on  Wolf 
is  course  till 
led  on  either 
lite  the  north 
■d  hand,    fn 
nd  the  buoy 
d  tide  does 
the  bar  is 
lof  the  inner 
the  anchor- 
el  in  the  vi- 

two  buoys, 

of  the  bar, 
|ind  4J  miles 

jaker  head, 
E.  by  E. 
f.  byE.jE. 
torth  break- 


|rn  is  elevated 
jiice  in  every 
InesB  will  be 
[agues;  when 
\teBt  strength 

I  the  day,  the 
Icorance  of  a 


/•^//z*   tAt>\ 


\ 


*i>  'j/3  l»i  »0  W 


M'ap  ti'ifes  n 


1 


; 


\^-; 


»f«t     i»  ut  1*1  '♦*  !*•' "' 

tl  10      A*  /'  / 


\//  A- 


"*■«>.      "^S'y- — ^TT?/ 


\SJiMfCjifl'r. 


■gJl^lMlgiJttM^j 


/■.'h./IMII'.-i/   fi'r  //'.•   ^1lll,'liU\IU     t'l'll.tf  /'!/,•/■,    tl . 


n_f:  w -yijRK,  pr.Tj3  l  i s n e i)  n  y  k.  &  a w blunt,  i 


^  M^^rt>>Mi^MkMril 


ii.mii'.-il  fi'r  /A-  ,/«/<v'/ji///    t'l'iittf  /'i/,'/-,  tl  !^  Jilt. 


Paof  lAtf. 


/ 


/ 


ABAIUTA  I.     ^/ 

1/ 

^ 

V 


u 

-fir        f 

I 


1 "^f^^JV,,,^ 


i 


* 


**''"*,'*' 

"^^v 


Vv ..•'•»£5* 


4^ 


V 


'=H-* 


■•v.. 


''^<^vO 


-•■•v.  At 


(<:* 


*•  '*     '3   „ 

\  »ar.t        t^  ..     '* 

\  \  u  Jlotfoni     If 


"    '  /<•;  ;iP'**>' 


/«» 


^^ — ^•~-~J^        ."   ■■■•■■4j»  / 

^sr> ttvv 


mBLISHEl)  BY  K.ftoG. W BLUNT,  1827.. 


M^mi* 


rfiMfeirttyfeJ 


■^ 


m 


w 


■/,•*• 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


Tybee  to  St.  Simons. 


137 


Bring  Tybee  light-house  to  bear  N.  W.  when  in  10  fathoms  water,  and  steer  S. 
W.  by  S>  distance  S4  leagues,  to  go  clear  of  the  shoal  of  *St.  Simons,  which  lies  off 
'  St.  Simons  £.  S.  E.  4  leagues.  There  are  4  and  5  fathoms  ^osc  to  this  sboaU 
''O  avoid  which  come  no  nearer  than  8  or  9  fathoms.  The  Isluid  uf  St.  Simons 
is  on  the  north  side  of  the  sound  or  harbour  of  the  same  name,  which  lies  in  lat. 
31^  1'  N.  and  may  be  known  by  four  trees  standing  thus,  ft  1 1*  O"  ^* 
south  side  of  that  harbour  lies  Jeicyl  Island,  on  which  are  remarkable  trees,  ap> 

E earing  like  umbrellas,  and  thence  called  the  umbrella  trees.     St.  Simons  and  Je- 
yl  Island  beaches  are  remarktibly  white.    The  bar  at  tho  entrance  of  St.  Si- 
mon's Sound  lies  9  miles  from  the  light. 


Other  Directions.    ' 

» 

"  Bring  the  li^ht-house  on  St.  Simons  to  bear  W.'  N.  W.  northerly,  and  steer 
right  for  it^until  you  get  within  the  bar,  which  will  be  known*  by  the  southern 
extremity  of  Je^l  Island  bearing  S.  W.  by  S.— you  will  give  the  point  of  th« 
light-house  a  birth  of  about  a  cnble's  length. 

The  tide  of  fl«od  sets  S.  S.  W.  and  the  ebb  N.  N.  E.  It  flows  at  ftiU  and 
change,  at  St.  Simons  bar,  E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.  7h.  30m. 

From  St.  Simons  to  St.  John's  the  flood  sets  S.  by  W.  and  ebb  N.  by  E. 

The  tide  flows  on  the  change  and  full  days  of  the  moon,  as  follows,  viz.  in  the 
Sound  9  o'cFock ;  on  the  bar,  half  past  7  o'clock ;  and  in  the  oifing,  thrse-fjuar" 
ten  past  6  o'clock.  v 


Direction* /or  St.  Mary's  a7irf  Amelia  Bar. 

Vessels  from  the  northward,  after  passing  Jekyl  Island,  which  lies  in  lat  51^» 
ought  to  keep  in  7,  6,  or  5  fathoms  water,  as  weather  and  size  of  the  vessel  may 
permit.  As  you  proceed  towards  the  southern  part  of  Cumberland,  you  will 
open  Dungeness  House,  which  is  about  1|  miles  distant  from  the  south  point  of 
Mud  island,  and  is  the  only  conspicuous  large  building  on  this  coast,  and  19  hid 
by  the  trees  when  you  are  to  the  northward.  Southward  of  this  house  there  is 
a  space  of  about  two  miles,  with  no  trees  on  it,  which  makes  the  south  point  of 
the  island  appear,  at  a  distance,  like  an  island  of  about  two  miles  in  length.' 

There  are  placed  on  Amelia  Island,  two  Beacons  for  crossing  what  is  termed 
the  Old  Channel ;  they  must  be  brought  in  one,  when  they  will  face  W.  i  N.  and 
a  buoy  on  the  inside  of  the  bar  will  be  in  range.  There  are  6h  feet  water  at 
Tow  water— tide  rises  6  feet ;  high  water  about  8  o'clock  full  and  change  of  tho 
moon.  In  crossing  the  bar,  bring  the  beacons  in  one,  until  up  with  the  buoy- 
then  steer  for  the  north  point  of  Amelia  Island,  giving  the  shore  a  good  birth; 
when  between  the  points  of  Amelia  and  Cumberland,  there  is  good  anchorage 
near  to  Cumberland.  This  bar  lies  2^  miles  north  of  the  main  bar,  where  there 
are  \%}k  feet  at  low  water,  pnd  a  buoy  on  the  inside  of  the  north  breaker  head. 
The  course  over  that  bar  is  W.  N.  W.  leaving  the  buoy  on  the  starboard  hand: 
but  strangers  should  bring  the  buoy  to  bear  N.  W.  by  W.  when  they  may  run 
wHh  safety,  allowing  for  tide  and  the  draft  of  water  of  the  vessel.  After  passing 
ih»  buoy,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  2|  miles,  which  will  bring  you  to  the  upper  buoy 
A>f'  Old  Channel ;  this  may  be  run  for  from  one  buoy  to  the  other,  and  can  be 
passed  on  either  side,  when  the  course  will  be  as  directions  f  jr  Old  Bar  before-i 
mentltoed. 

I*  Allght-house  is  erected  on  the  S.  W.  end  of  St.  Simons  Island,  containing  t^jixedUgM^ 
It  ii  a  stooe  edifice,  50  feet  high,  the  lamps  60  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

18 


•iW"«ai||)*"t"f" 


1S8 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Tn  ruoning  southwardly  for  the  bur,  keep  in  6  or  7  fathoms  water,  until  the 
fight-house*  bears  N.  W.  k  W.  then  steer  for  it;  when  on  the  bar  there  will  be 
IS  feet  at  low  water;  within  the  bar,  where  a  buoy  is  placed,  8  fathoms. 
Leaving  the  buoy  on  your  starboard  hand,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  3  miles,  which 
will  brin^-  you  on  the  tail  of  the  Middle  Ground,  lying  on  the  larboard  hand, 
keeping  in  9  fathaltis  water.  When  the  south  point  of  Cumberland  bears  N.  E. 
distant  half  a  mile,  there  is  good  anchorage. 

F-'ll  sea  at  St.  Mary's  bar  on  full  and  change  at  haL'past  7  o'clock— slack  wa- 
ter at  8.    ATetage  tides  7  feet. 


?!« 


St.  Mary's  to  St.  Johns. 


H, 


The  course  is  S.  \  E.  distance  8  leagues  to  St.  John's :  in  making  this  place 
when  bound  into  St.  Augustine,  there  is  a  round  high  bluff,  at  the  south  side  of 
the  river,  known  by  the  name  of  the  General's  Mour.t ;  the  small  craft  running  in 
from  Amelia  to  St.  Augustine  generally  make  it,  and  take  their  departure.  On 
the  north  side  of  the  harbour  is  Talbot's  Island,  full  of  trees,  lymg  north  and 
south,  and  about  the  same  height  witl^  the  General's  Mourt;  j^ere  are  11  feet 
water  on  the  bar  at  high  water.  In  running  in,  the  Mount  should  bear  about  W. 
S.  W.  and  when  on  that  bearing,  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  you  yrill  see  a  small 
hut  bearing  about  W.  N.  W.  and  back'  of  that  a  cluster  of  trees,  which  appear 
like  one  tall  tree:  bringing  this  over  the  hut,  and  running  for  it,  will  carry  you 
over  the  bar — the  western "^shore  is  bold.  The  latitude  is.^S0O  m!  N.  The  St. 
John's  is  a  long  and  broad  bay,  which  receives  the  impressions  of  the  tide  at 
more  than  150  miles  from  its  mouth,  running  parallel  with  the  ocean.  This  bay 
affords  the  finest  navigation  that  I  am  acquainted  with :  you  will  find  in  all  parts 
of  it,  after  passing  the  bar,  up  to  the  entrance  of  Lake  George,  20  feet  water ; 
this  lake,  to  its  south-east  extremity,  is  upwards  of  10  feet  in  depth. 

Lake  George  is  a  little  sea,  of  nearly  sixty  miles  in  circumference,  at  the  ex-> 
tremity  of  which  is  found  a  bank  of  shells,  on  which  you  have  only  about  5  feet 
water ;  but  at  two  or  three  miles  above  this,  the  branches  of  the  St.  John's  re- 
unite, and  a  broad  and  deep  channel  conducts  you  to  a  lake.  At  full  and  change 
it  flows  S.  E.  by  S.  and  N.  W.  by  N.  9h.  45m. 

Note.— The  brig  Toung  Maria  struck  several  times  on  a  sunken  rock,  and 
immediately  after  had  5  fathoms  water,  while  running  between  St.  Augustine 
•nd  Amelia  Island,  but  the  particular  "ituittion  of  the  rock  we  are  ignorant  of. 


CO 


St.  John's  to  the  B&y  of  St.  Augustine. 


Should  a  vessel  be  obliged,  in  consequence  of  some  accident,  or  any  particular 
raason,  to  stand  in  for  a  harbour,  the  port  of  St.  Augustine  is  the  nearest  and 
most  advantageous  place. 

St.  Augustine  is  situated  on  the  Main,  about  two  miles  within  the  bar,  imme- 
^ately  oppoute  the  inlet:  it  is  not  passable  for  vessels  drawing  over  15  feet  of 
water.  The  island  of  Matanzas  runs  parallel  with  the  ocean,  and  forms  a  poinl: 
of  the  south  end  of  St.  Augustine  inlet.  When  in  9  fathoms  water,  off  the  bar 
of  St.  John's,  the  course  is  S.  S.  E.  distance  10  leagues.  The  northernmost 
land  of  the  bay  is  called  Point  Cartel.  When  you  are  as  far  to  the  soutliward 
pji  this  point,  you  will  see  the  islan^  Anastasia,  in  length  18  miles,  and  on  the 
south  side  of  the  bay,  on  the  north  end  of  which  is  a  light-house,  showing  a 
Jbxd  light.  i 
. ^ ^ ^ 

*  The  light-house  is  on  the  south  point  of  Cumberland  island. 


BLUNT's   AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


139 


Th«  pilots  who  attend  the  *bar,  l^ard  vessels  outside,  when  the  weather  trIH  per- 
mit, but  if  not,  they  bring  them  in  by  signal,  which  they  wave  as  they  wish  th« 
vessel  to  steer.  Rate  of  pilotage  two  dollars  per  foot.  The  bar^of  St.  Aucua- 
tine  has  no  more  than  8  or  9  feet  M'ater  on  it  at  high  water,  spring  tides,  and  at 
low  water  5  feet,  which  at  times  makes  it  impossible  for  boats  to  pass.  There 
ik  A  swash  to  the  northward  of  the  bar,  with  11  and  12  feet  water;  but  the  sand 
shifting  often,  and  the  passage  being  so  narrow  and  crooked,  the  pilots  seldom 
attempt  it.  It  flows,  at  full  and  change  S.  E.  by  S.  and  N.  W.  by  N.  9h.  4Sm. 
The  variation  off  St.  Augustine  7°  E.  1819. 


«.-* 


^  Directions  for  St.  Augustine  flight 

Vessels  bound  to  this  port,  if  running  down  from  the  north,  must  not  bring 
the  Hght  farther  to  the  westward  than  S.  W.  by  W.  If  the  wind  bo  to  the  south, 
brii.^  the  light  to  bear  west;  if  moderate,  come  to  and  anchor  in  from  7  to  9 
fathoms  water,  muddy  bottom. 

All  vessels  bound  to  this  port  will  show,  when  off  the  bar,  how  much  water 
they  draw,  byjugnal,  hauling  down  the  flag  and  hoisting  it  again  e^ual  to  the 
number  of  feet  tney  draw. 


REMARKS  OFF  ST.  AUGUSTINE. 

From  the  first  of  November  to  the  last  of  February,  the  hardest  gales  prevail 
that  blow  on  this  coast,  and  in  general  from  N.  N.  E.  to  S.  S.  E.  the  wind  anjr 
way  easterly  comes  on  very  suddenly  to  a  gale  during  the  season  .above-men- 
tioned ;  and  these  gales  give  but  very  little  warning.  An  experienced  navigator 
says,  "  In  the  year  1777  I  was  at  anchor  in  St.  Augustine  Bay,  when  it  came  Oft 
to  blow  at  E.  N.  E.  and  in  fifteen  minutes  time  I  was  obliged  to  slip,  and  had  we 
not  carried  sail  to  the  utmost,  we  should  not  have  cleared  the  lana  to  the  south" 
ward."  When  the  wind  backs  against  the  sun,  with  a  small  rain,  you  will  per- 
ceive  the  sea  to  rise  before  the  wind  comes ;  then  prepare  for  a  gale  whicn  in 
general  will  last  50  or  60  hours.  If  you  should  be  obliged  to  cut  or  slip,  carry 
all  the  sail  you  possibly  can,  to  get  an  offing  before  it  increases,  so  as  to  put  yott 
past  carrying  any  sail,  whicli  is  always  the  case,  and  observe,  that  the  flood  tide 
setting  to  the  southward  will  be  of  no  service  to  you  farther  out  than  IS  fathomt 
water,  when  you  will  be  in  the  southern  current  until  you  get  into  46  fathoms, 
which  is  about  15  leagues  from  the  land,  and  in  the  Gulf  Stream,  where  the 
current  runs  strong  N.  N.  E.  as  far  to  the  northward  as  latitude  Sb^  15'N.  when 
it  sets  more  easterly,  or  about  N.  E.  by  N.  as  far  as  latitude  37^  N.  from  thence 
as  far  as  the  Capes  of  Delaware,  its  direction  is  about  E.  N.  £.  and  from  lati* 
tude  d8<^  57'  N.  it  sets  nearly  east.     [See  Gulf  Stream,  page  1.] 

I*  An  appropriation  is  made  for  placing  three  buoys  on  the  bar,  at  the  entraitce  of  St*  Ao> 
gustine  b  vbour,  which  will  be  described  in  the  Appendix,  if  done  before  this  work  b  pub- 
lished. 

t  St.  Augustine  light-house  is  built  on  the  north  end  of  St.  Anastasia  istand,  lat  99^  6V  N. 
long.  81°  30'  W.  and  shows  a  fixed  light.  It  is  a  square  tower,  built  of  shell  stone,,  and 
painted  white.  The  tower  u  70  feet  high  from  the  ground,  exclusive  of  the  huhtem,  wUeh  ia 
7  feet ;  the  top  of  the  building  is  arched,  with  a  stone  cornice  and  a  granite  stone  dedij  19 
feet  diameter.    The  lantern  is  of  iron,  and  contns  six  patent  lamps. 


*' 


/ 


;  • 


140 


BLUNt'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


||f 


■V 


Dinciions  for  making  a  speedy  passage  through  the  Gulf  io  Nevr-York. 

When  in  Bjght  of  Memory  Rock,  (described  hereafter)  steer  N.  N.  W.  to 
lat.  89°,  then  N.  to  lat.  30°,  (allowing,  however,  for  the  effects  of  atronp  breezes 
any  way  to  clear  dangers  on  both  sides)  which  will  Iceep  you  in  the  whole 
force  of  the  stream,  then  N.  E.  till  in  the  lat.  of  33P,  then  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  un* 
til  you  get  into  the  ?'if'''  ^-  of  Cape  Hatteras,  which  is  in  35°  14'  N.  then  yoa 
may  haul  up  more  :y  half  a  point,  till  you  get  on  soundings  in  or  near 

the  latitude  of  the  ^^a^^a  of  Virginia.  When  in  18  or  SO  fathoms,  and  near 
that  latitude,  steer  N.  by  E.  78  lengues,  and  look  out  for  the  •Highlands  of  Never- 
sink,  which  lie  in  lat.  40<^  28'  N.  and  very  remarkable,  being  282  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea,  and  lie  S.  W.  from  the  entrance  of  the  harbour  of  New- 
York,  as  described  in  note  to  page  109.  When  you  have  nearly  made  the  dis- 
tance before-mentioned,  be  careful  not  to  run  in  the  oight  or  thick  weather ; 
come  no  nearer  than  12  or  14  fathoms.  To  come  into  the  Bay  of  New-York, 
brinsc  Sandy  Hook  light-house  W.  by  N.  or  W.  N.  W.  in  10  fathoms,  and  the 
louthernmost  part  of  the  Highhinds  of  Neversink  S.  W.  by  S. 

NoTB.— Along  the  southern  coast  of  America  you  will  find  no  tide  farther 
out  from  the  shore  than  10  or  12  fathoms  water;  from  that  depth  until  the  edge 
-•f  loundings,  you  will  have  a  current  setting  to  the  HouthwaYa^  at  the  rate  of 
one  mile  per  hour:  when  out  of  soundings,  you  will  have  the  Qulf  Stream  set- 
ting to  the  N.  E.  quarter,  and'thfte  farther  you  get  to  the  northward,  it  sets  more 
easterly,  but  not  so  strong  as  before-mentioned ;  and  when  you  get  to  the  north- 
ward of  39",  it  sets  about  east.     [See  page  1  for  Gulf  Stream.] 

fTlfi  teUing  of  the  tide  along  the  shore  frov9>  New- York  to  St.  Augustine, 

From>the-4ve9t  end  of  Long  Island  to  Cape  May,    . 

From  Cape  Henlopen  to  Cape  Charles,  . 
'  From  Cape  Charles  to  Cape  Hatteras,    .        . 

From  Cape  Hatteras  to  Cape  Looliout,  . 
-  From  Cape'Lookout  to  Cape  Fear,  .        .     -    . 

From  Cape  Fear' to  Cape  Roman,  .        .        . 

From  Cape  Roman  to  Charleston,  .  •     .        . 

From  Charleston  to  Tybee,  ... 

From  Tjbee  to  St.  Simon's,  .... 

From  St.  Simon's  to  St.  John's       .... 

From  St.  John's  to  the  Bay  of  St.  Augustine,  . 


Flood. 

Ehh. 

W.  by  S. 

E.  by  N. 

S.  by  W. 

N.  by  E. 

.      s.  s.  w. 

N.  N.  E. 

S.  W.  by  W. 

N.  E.  by  E 

S.  W.  by  W. 

N.E.  byE 

W.  S.  W. 

£.  N.  E. 

W.  S.  W. 

E.  N.  E. 

W.  S.  W. 

E.  N.  E. 

S.  S.  W. 

N.  N.  E. 

S.byW. 

N.  by  E. 

South. 

North. 

GENERAL  REMARKS.        i^ 

'Bouiitl  from  ihe  Atlantic,  over  the  bank,  for  New-Orleaiis,  you  may  shorten 
your  distance  very  much  by  running  down  the  Florida  Reef,  keeping  in  colour- 
ed water  in  day-time,  and  off  into  the  Stream  by  night,  as  a  strong  eddy  or 
counter  current,  sets  westwardly  along  outside  of  the  reef,  between  it  and  the 
regular  set  of  tb.e  Gulf.  To  do  this  with  advantage,  you  must  calculate  to  fall 
in  vith  the  Florida  coast  as  early  in  the  forenoon  as  possible,  that  you  may  fake 
advantage  of  the  eddy  through  the  remainder  of  the  day.  Your  best  way,  there- 
fore, will  be,  on  leavmg  the  bank  in  lat.  24°  40'  with  a  good  breeze,  to  steer  W. 
S.  W.  25  leagues,  and  if  at  day  light  fFlorida  Reef  is  not  in  sight,  steer  west, 
W.  by  N.  or  W.  N.  W.  and  make  theni  at  once ;  you  will  fall  m  with  them  be- 
. 1 «| , — ■ 

*  Two  light-houses  are  to  be  built  on  the  Highlands  of  Neversiok,  previous  to  December, 
1887.    See  Appendix.  '«»•... 

t  A  light-house,  containing  a  fixed  light,  is  built  on  Key  Biscayno,  which  lies  a  little  to  the 
aouthward  of  Cape  Florida.  The  lantern  is  70  feet  above  the  lev^J  of  the  sea,  and  exl  ibita 
*Jmd  light,  *         ^  -^>' 


**  " 


*  » 


'«*:■*».  ar 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


141 


tween  *Key  Largo  and  Old  Matncumbe,  which  has  high  trees  on  its  north  end* 
the  tops  of  which  are  quite  level,  and  at  first  sight  appear  like  table  land ;  Keep 
down  in  coloured  water  by  daylight,  and  at  niglit  haul  out  at  a  respectful  dis- 
tance, until  fairly  daylight  again,  when  you  may  haul  into  the  northward,  and  again 
■    make  the  land.    Or,  should  you  be  so  far  to  the  westward  as  between  the  Mar- 

Juls  keys  and  the  f Tortugas  light,  where  you  cannot  see  tlie  land  ualcss  within 
leagues  of  the  one  or  the  other,  you  must  keep  a  lookout  for  coloured  water» 
and  when  fairly  into  it,  keep  down  to  the  westward  and  make  the  Tortugas, 
which  vou  may  pass  at  a  respectful  distiince  either  to  windward  or  leeward,  as 
best  suits  your  fancy,  and  as  the  winds  will  admit  of.  Between  Sombrero  Key 
and  Sand  Key  light,  you  may  sec  the  Beacon  on  Looe  Key,  which  is  SO  feet  high, 
and  on  which  is  a  large  ball  painted  red ;  and  between  Looe  Key  and  the  west 
end  of  Florida  Reef  you  may  make  the  light-house  on  Sandy  Key,  which  ex- 
hibits a  revolving  light,  bearing  about  S.  by  W.  from  Key  West,  9  miles  distant. 
Should  the  wmd  be  far  southerly,  or  light,  it  would  be  most  advisable,  on  leav- 
ing the  bank,  to  keep  to  tlie  southward  and  get  under  Double-headed  Shot  Bank, 
out  of  tlift  force  of  the  Stream ;  and  with  light  and  westerly  winds  (which  some- 
« times  Continue  for  several  days  during  the  summer)  it  is  usual  to  get  on  the 
Double-headed  Shot  Bank,  and  lay  on  its  western  edge  for  a  breeze,  or  cross 
over  into  St.  Nicholas  channel,  and  take  advantage  of  the  land  breeze  from  the 
Island  of  Cuba«|||b  get  to  the  westward. 


.^. 


0m 


Description  of  the  {Tortugas  Islands. 

Upon  the  southern  edge  of  the  soundings,  which  runs  off  from  the  western 
coast  of  the  promontory  or  peninsula  of  East  Florida,  there  lie  ten  keys  or  islands, 
called  Tortugas,  which  is  the  westernmost  land,  and  which  announces  the  prox- 
imity of  the  Great  Florida  Reef,  that  borders  the  whole  southern  part  of  these 
soundings,  and  which  in  uneven,  but  nearly  parallel  lines,  continues  to  the  east- 
ward, doubling  with  the  before-mentioned  promontory,  as  far  as  Cape  Florida^ 
showing  the  different  lights  previously  described. 

On  Bush .  Key,  (one  of  the  Dry  Tortusas,)  is  a  light-house,  elevated  70  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  sea,  showing  a  Jixea  light- 

The  Tortugas  occupy  a  space  E.  and  W.  of  9  miles,  and  N.  and  S.  6  miles; 
the  land  is  low,  but  being  covered  with  mangroves,  makes  them  visible  at  the  dis- 
tance of  12  miles.  Tou  should  never  get  within  two  miles  of  them,  as  they  have 
some  rocky  spits,  which,  in  places,  extend  that  distance  from  thehi.  There  is  a 
bank  of  white  sand  and  gravel,  which  is  spotted  with  coral  rocks,  lying  to  the 
westward  of  the  west  Tortuga,  the  soundings  on  which  is  very  irregular,  but  as 
the  bottom  shows  itself  plainly,  there  can  be  no  danger.  The  least  water  on  this 
bank  is  said  to  h&H  fathoms,   but  "  I  found  less  than  9  on  the  coral  rocks,  and 

*  On  the  reef  off  Key  Lai^  is  a  Flo(Uing  Ligh^  Vessely  showing  Ivro  fixed  lights,  one 
about  50  feet  hiKb,  the  other  40  feet,  bearing  from  the  highest  land  on  Key  Largo  E.  by  S.  7 
miles  distant;  from  the  elbbw,  of  Carysfort  Reef  N.  ^  E.  distant  3  or  4  miles:  the  outer 
reef  (aay  14  fatiioms  water)  bearing  east  2i  miles  distant,  lat.  25*^  6'  N.  long.  80°  28'  W. 
In  hazy  weather,  a  bell  will  be  struck  frequently,  to  warn  vessels  to  keep  off. 

t  A  Bf^c  bucy,  painted  white,  in  15  or  18  feet  water,  showing  3  feet  above  the  water,  i» 
placed  at  the  west  end  of  the  quicksands,  (Dry  Tortugas)  15  miles  E.  i  S.  from  East  Key, 
which  u  the  most  easternmost  Key,  and  where  there  is  a  shoal  of  not  more  than  7  ov  8  feet 
water.  * 

tin  August,  1776,  Mr.  Romans,  (before  quoted  in.  our  description  of  the  Gulf  Stream)  od 
hit  rout§  from  the  Havana, '  was  becalmed,  in  foggy  weather,  near  the  Tortugas,  and  was 
drifted  by  the  flood  tide  over  a  coral  bank,  soon  a^r  which  the  ship  struck.  He  says,  *'  the 
two  following  days  we  were  employed  in  lookingTor  a  passage  out,  through  which,  on  the 
morning  of  the  third  day,  we  warped  out  to  the  east.  It  was  on  the  following  day,  the  full 
moon  in  August,  when  we  struck ;  we  observed  the  tide  to  rise  and  fall  6  feet,  and  the  place 
where  we  struck  at  first,  to  have  between  6  and  7  feet  of  water  on  it,  when  the  Jde  was  out, 
it  being  nine  o'clock,  ,/hen  it  began  to  ebb.  I  thence  fixed  the  full  sea  at  about  eight  o'clock 
on  the  full  or  change,  or  a  S.  £.  by  E.  i  £.  moon.  ^ 


»•» 


# 


142 


BLUNT  9  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


ust^lly  heAveto  in  pe.sing  over  it,  for  15  or  SO  niinutei.  to  flsh,  in  which  time  I 
get  as  many  nsl  can  dispoae  or,  principally  groupers." 

Between  this  hank  and  the  Tortiigas  therS  ia  a  clean  channel  of  3  miles  wide, 
with  water  from  13  to  17  fathoms. 

Eighteen  miiea  to  the  eastward  of  the  eastern  Tortuga,  the  General  Florida 
Reef  begin*,  between  which  there  is  a  good  channel  of  9  fathoms  water,  but  you 
must  take  care  of  a  coral  shoal  uf  1<2  feet,  which  lies  11  miles  from  the  Tortugas, 
on  which  the  shifi  Rebecca,  of  New- York,  lost  part  of  her  cargo  in  1820.  To  go 
through  this  channel,  you  must  keep  the  eastern  Tortuga  in  sight  off  deck,  so  as 
to  pass  at  two  or  three  leagues  from  them. 

The  proximity  of  the  Florida  lleef  is  shown  clearly  in  day-time  by  thewMte- 
ness  of  the  water,  so  that  there  can  be  no  danger  in  dr»wlog  in  wjth  it ;  but  if 
safe  by  day,  it  is  not  so  by  night,  nor  in  *iad  weather,  when^oi  shpuM  carefully 
avoid  it,  and  be  sure  to  keep  the  lead  g9ing,  by  which  means  you  cati  Avoid  dan- 
ger at  the  distance  of  two  miles  from  the  edges  of  the  keys  &r  feflfa.  * 

In  passing  the  promontory.,  of  Florida,  it  is  not  the  reef  alone  which  you  see, 
but  an  innumoruble  quantity  of  keys  and  islands  raised  upon  a  hank  n&rth  of  it. 

•Var.  6°  85'  E.  S^ 


0,  Chandelier  glands.  "  ^       "  ,,  '"''' 

From  Passe  a  I'Outre,  (one  of  the  entrances  of  the  Mississippi)  tne  coast 
doubles  to  the  westward,  and  soon  to  the  northward,  to  the  parallel  of 
sgo  2T  in  which  latitude  lies  Isle  au  Breton,  which  is  a  group  of  small  keys, 
whose  western  limits  are  5  miles  distant  from  th6  coast,  so  that  it  forms  a  bay, 
called  Poza  Bay,  ki  which  there  are  4  or  5  &thoms,  with  some  shoals  of  less 
water.  East  of  Isle  au  Breton  is  the  isle  of  Grand  Grosier,  from  which  a  ledge 
runs  N.  N.  E.  and  breajcs  to  the  isle  of  Palos,  which  is  the  southernmost  of  the 
Chsindeliers.  There  is  a  good  passage  inside  the  Chandeliers  with  8  to  11  feet 
*  water,  but  a  good  pilot  is  requisite.  From  Isle  au  Breton  a  shoal  stretches  two 
miles  S.  W.  bold  at  the  very  point.  '  Shelter  can  be  had  from  a  N.  E.  wind  inside 
this  island,  but  the  navigation  is  ^fficylt  for  strangers,  and  requires  much  survey 
to  describe  it  properly.  a^ 

The  whole  of  the  Chandelier  Islams  are  very  low,  with  some  myrtle  bushes 
upon  them,  and  form  a  chain  of  coast  very  injurious,  and  to  be  dreaded  by  navi- 
gators, not  only  that  you  cannot  see  them  at  a  regular  distance,  but  because  the 
winds  at  S.  E.  (which  blow  hard  in  winter)  are  right  on  the  coast ;  nevertheless, 
there  is  good  shelter  for  all  ships  to  the  westward  of  the  north  extreme  of  the 
Chandeliers,  called  the  Road  of  Naso,  where  the  heavy  English  men  of  war  lay 
during  the  siege  of  New-Orleans.  This  is  the  only  good  shelter  for  large  men  of 
war  in  the  whole  coast  of  Florida  (Tampa  Bay  and  Pensacola  for  small  sized 
frigates  excepted)  not  onl}'  because  it  is  defended  from  windAn  shore,  but  be- 
cause there  is  no  bar,  breakers,  nor  impediment  wh^ver,  to  your  entering  it  in 
all  weathers.  To  enter  the  Roadtf  Naso,  you  have  only  to  run  so  as  to  double 
the  north  point  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  which  will  be  one  mile  fromthe  land,  and 
then  navigate  from  west  round  to  south,  keeping  in  4,  5  or  ^  fathoms,  according  to 
the  draft  of  the  ship,  and  yoli  may  anchor  in  4  fathoms,  when  the  north  point 
bears  N.  N.  E.  distant  2  miles ;  but  if  you  wish  deeper  water,  you  must  not  run  so 
far  south,  but  anchor  when  the  north  point  bears  E.  N.  E.  in  5  to  6  fathoms  water. 
In  the  Chandeliers,  and  almost  the  whole  coas^of  the  Mexican  Gulf,  you  can^^et 
water  by  digging  wells  in  the  beach,  but  there  is  no  other  wood  on  the  Chande- 
liers than  the  drift  logs  left  in  abundance  on  the  beach.  Its  lands  produce  nothing 
but  the  myrtle,  from  which  the  green  \m\  is  produced.  ^ 

Northwesterly  of  the  north  extregaity  of  the  Chandeliers,  14  miles  distant,  is 
Ship  Island,  west  of  which,  8  miles,  is  Cat  Island,  and  to  the  southward  of  tk>s, 
various  keys,  called  St.  Miguel,  run  and  extend  oufefrom  the  coast  of  the  islands ; 
between  these  and  Cat  Island  is  the  pass  into  BUnd  Lake,  iind  Lake  Ponche> 
train,  in  both  of  which  there  is  very  little  water,  especially  in  Blind  Lake.  Be- 
tween Cat  and  Ship  Islandl  there  is  a  large  shoal  running  out  from  the  east 


tt 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


143 


vrhich  time  I 
S  miles  wide, 


point  of  the  flrat,  wliich  leaves  a  channel  of  less  than  half  a  mile  widn  to 
enter  to  the  northward  of  them ;  this  channel  hns  good  13  feet  water;  the 
anchorage  id  N.  and  S.  with  the  west  end  of  Ship  Island  |  of  a  mile  distant,  in  4 
'  and  6  fathoms.  Ship  Island  is  long  E.  and  W.  and  very  narrow,  and  widest  in 
the  middle,  which  is  partly  covered  s^ith  pines,  hut  barren  at  both  ends.  The 
hurricane  of  1819  cut  a  small  channel  through  Ship  Island  1)  miles  from  its  west 
«nd;  In  it  is  a  well  of  good  water,  which  is  on  its  north  coast,  and  about  midway 
the  island.  East  from  Ship  Islond,  5  miles  distant,  lies  the  west  end  of  Horn 
Island,  and  between  the  two  lies  Dog  Island ;  from  the  first  a  sh(^nl  runs  out  to 
the  east,  which  not  only  embraces  the  Dogs,  but  leaves  a  channel  of  only  150 
fathoms  wide ;  the  bar  has  2^  fathoms,  when  you  immediately  drop  mto  5 
fathoms.  East  of  Horn  island  lies  Massacre  Island,  then  Dauphin  Island,  which 
is  on  the  W.  side  of  the  entrance  into  Mobile. 


Directions  for  the  river   Mfssissippi,   and  to  prevent  falling   to   the 
^         •  westward.  .,  ■* 

Should  you  take  your  departure  from  the  flTortugos,  on  one  of  which  (Gor- 
den  Key)  is  a  light-house,  (see  page  141,)  on  leaving  them  make  a  N.  W.  coum 
good,  and  you  ^1  fall  into  the  latitude  of  |he  Balize,  SO  leagues  to  the  east- j 
ward;  Jteep  on  to  lat.  29°  20',  whdh  you  may* steer  W.  or  W.  li  S.  to  45  fa- 
thoms, then  haul  to  S.  W.  for  the  Balize,  taking  care  not  to  pass  its  latitude 
in  the  night  time,  and  you  may  make  sure  of  seeing  Frank's  Island  light.  Should 
the  weather  be  thick,  keep  in  16  fathoms,  and  you  will  fall  in  off  Passe  a  TOutre, 
where  ]Silots  are  always  stationed ;  but  should  you  see  the  land,  or  vessels  at 
anchor,  if  the  wind  will  permit,  haul  to  S.  S.  'W.  or  more  soythwardly,  and  lead 
along  in  IS  fathoms,  until  you  see  the  two  masts  of  a  sunkien  brig,  lying  half  a 
mile  to  the  northward  of  the  channel ;  bring  her  to  bear  W.  N.  W.  and  anchor ; 
by  this  time  you  will  have  a  pilot. 

Should  it  be  very  foggy,  as  it  sometimes  is  in  summer  and  fall,  either  anchor 
in  12  or  15  fathoms  water,  or  stretch  to  the  nor.thward,  as  the  currents  to  the 
southward  of  the  bar  set  strong  «long  the  lanclito  the  southward,  and  by  keeping 
to  the  southward  you  will  be  liabl(^  to  bejib-iven  to  the  southward  of  the  south 
point,  in  the  latitude  of  which  you  will  nave  35  fathoms,  within  three  miles 
of  the  land.  A  large  bell  has  been  provided,  which  will  be  kept  tolling  by 
night  and  by  day,  wnenever  from  fog,  or  any  other  cause,  the  light  or  light-house 
cannot  be  seen  at  least  four  miles,  at  which  distance  it  is  calculated  the  bell  may 
*  be  heard  in  modenate  weather. 

In  coming  from  sea,  the  S.  W.  Pass  is  said  to  have  advantages,  there  being 
but  few  shoals.  The  water  is  very  deep  close  to  the  bar,«and  the  softness  of  the 
mud  such  as  to  do  little  harm  to'a  vessel,  even  should  she  ground.  Vessels,  after 
making  the  light,  ''bre  often  blown  to  the  southward  of  the  Balize,  where  they 
have  been  known  to  lie  emi|payed  for  days'and  weeks  together.  Profiting  of  thi» 
Pass,  these  delays  may,  in  a  great  measure,  be  avoided. 

Alight-house  has  been  erected  oh  Frank's  Island,  at  tlie  mouth  of  the  N.  E. 
Pass  of  the  Mississippi ;  the  lantern  is  at  an  elevation  of  80  feet  above  the  water, 
contains  30  patent  lamps  and  reflectors,  and  gives  a  bright  and  clear  light,  which 
may  be  seen  *in  good  weather  at  the  distance  of  between  six  and  seven  leagues. 
It  exhibits  a  fixed  light.  , 

The  following  bearings  from  prank's  Island  light-house,  are  the  mean  of  a 
number  of  experiments  by  compass. 

^  Passe  a  I'Outre,  N.  N.  W.  distance  two  leagues ;  S.  E.  Pass,  or  main  Ship 
Channel,,  S.  S.  W.  one  and  a  half  league;  The  best  anchorage  is  off  the  bar^  or 
S.  E.  Pass,  in  8  or  12  fathoms  water. 

From  the  entrance  of  the  channel  on  the  bar,  the  Block  House  at  the  Balize, 
bears  N.  W.  by  W.  h  W.  distent  5  miles. 

The  principal  entrance  iit  the  river  Mississippi  is  in  lat.  20°  5'  N.  but  vessels 
bound  there,  should  always  run  down  2  or#S  leagues  to  the  northward,  by  so 
doing  you  will  have  good  soun^ogs  to  guide  y cu.    When  you  have  struck  sound- 


■,>■ 


*■%'• 


1. 


144 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


ingi^ifjfou  may  run  in  the  parallel  above  directed  into  18  or  even  16  fathoms,  and 

Sou  will  then  see  the  light-house  on  Frank's  Island,  and  have  the  Block  House  (or 
lalize)  bearing  south-M'esterly ;  the  anchorage  is  good  every  where,  and  should 
it  fall  calm,  a  light  kedge  will  prevent  being  drifted  by  the  current,  which  is 
sometimes  pretty  strong  on  the  coast,  but  it  is  much  stronger  in  the  latitude  of 
the  river's  mouth  than  elsewhere,  and  no  soundings  until  you  come  close  in  with 
the  land.  In  running  from  Passe  a  I'Outre  for  the  main  bar  at  the  S.  £.  Pass,  in 
the  night,  it  is  not  safe  to  keep  in  less  than  15  fathoms  water;  in  the  day-time 
vessels  may  approach  within  8  or  10  fathoms,  observing  to  keep  the  lead  going... 
Being  off  Passe  a  I'Outre  in  15  fathoms,  in  order  to  go  around  tne  N.  E.  Pass  in 
10  fathoms,  the  course  is  S.  S.  £.  distant  2  leagues  ;  from  thence  to  the  an- 
chorage off  the  bar  S.  S.  W.  li  leagues.  The  Block  House  at  tjfie  Balize  bears 
from  the  best  anchorage  to  wait  for  a  fair  wind  to  come  over  the  bajr  W .  by  N.  i  N. 
distant  3,  leagues,  where  will  be  found  &  to  11  fathoms.  At  the  entrance  of  the 
S.  E.  channel  on  the  bar,  the  Block  House  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  distant  5 
Kiles. 


Common  error  of  strangers. 


#  Captains  not  acquainted  on  the  cqast,  are  frequently  alarmej|||Krhen  they  come 
near  the  river,  by  the  appearance  of  the  wat#-,  particularly  during  the  first  sum- 
mer months,  when  the  river  Is  high,  for  at  that  time  the  fresh  water  of  the  river 
rushes  out  with  great  force,  and  being  lighter  than  the  ocean  water,  floats  on  the 
top,  making  an  appearance  altogether  singular  and  alarming,  for  where  the  fresh 
water  has  not,  entirely  covered  the  salt  water,  but  leaving  spots,  it  has  the  appear^- 
ance  of  rocks,  the  river  water  being  of  a  milky  colour,  while  the  other  is  quite 
dark,  and  changes  suddenly.  When  the  river  is  low,  the  white  muddy  water 
'  extends  about  3  leagues  off,  and  when  high  about  5.  On  coming  into  it,  it  ripples 
like  shoal  breakers,  but  your  soundings  are  regular. 

On  the  seating  of  the  Current, 

TTke  current  sets  with  very  little  vacation  to  the  east ;  and  when  any  variation 
u  experienced,  it  is  either  to  the  N.  or  3.  of  the  river's  mouth.  It  is  very  evident 
to  every  man  of  reflection,  that  so  large  a  column  of  water,  rushing  into  the 
ocean,  must  spread  when  it  is  no  longer  confined,  and  produce  different  currents, 
until  it  has  found  its  level,  and  will  be  found  to  vary  from  the  original  course  in 

Eroportion  as  you  approach  the  edges :  allowing  the  current  to  set  due  east,  I 
ave  known  two  ships  to  come  into  the  river  at  the  same  time,  and  the  one  com- 
plain of  a  southerly,  and  the  other  of  a  northerly  current,  and  that  because  the 
one  had  been  to  the  south  and  the  other  to  the  north  of  the  ri^pr's  mouth ;  how- 
ever, as  every  stranger  should  get  into  |he  proper  latitude  before  he  comes  with- 
in the  influence  of  its  current,  I  do  not  think  it  neceaikry  to  say  any  thing  more 
on  that  subject. 

Directions  for  the  entrance  •  of  the  River, 

The  land  at  the  entrance  of  tke  Mississippi  river  is  nothing  more  thaii  mud 
banks;  continu»illy  increasing  with  reeds  and. rushes  growing  upon  it,  to  the  ^^ 
height  of  10  or  12  feet  above  the  water.  The  light-house  on  Frank's  Island,  or 
vessels  at  anchor,  are  generally  the  first  you  discover.  The  general  winds  am  ^ 
from  the  N.  E.  and  you  should  avoid  getting  to  the  southward.  Thi#  winds 
make  a  difference  over  the  bar,  at  the  entrance  of  the  Mississippi,  and  the  gene- 
ral depth  of  water  is  from  11  feet  6  inches,  to  14  feet.  ,  *< 

In  lat.  «90  18'  N.  vou  will  strike  soundings  in  46  or  50  fathoms,  small  gray 
sand,  with  black  specks.  The  Balize  bearing  W.  by  S.  <(  S.  40  miles  distance, 
when  in  15  or  18  fathoms,  soft  stinky  mud,  you  will  see  the  Balize  bearing  S.W. 
(if  clear  weather).    With  the  Balize  bearing  S.  W.  run  not  into  less  than  12 


^' 


4    •. 


• 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


145' 


fathoms,  on  account  of  some  small  mud  banks,  scarcely  discernible  ahove^.  tlie 
surface,  until  the  Balize  bears  W.  N.  W.  and  N.  N.  W.  in  10  f)B[thoras.  The  Ba- 
lize  bearing  N.  W.  and  an  old  sunken  brig's  mast  bearing  N.  is  good  ground  to 
anchor,  and  advantageous  for  getting  under  way  to  go  over  the  bar.  In  foggy 
weather  run  no  further  in  for  the  land  than  15  fathoms,  and  it  is  preferable  an- 
choring in  light  breezes  to  being  drifted  .ihoftt  by  the  currents,  which  are  uncer- 
tain. From  the  bar  (or  entrance  of  the  Mississippi  river)  to  New-Orleans,  is 
ISO  miles. 

To  sail  up  the  River. 

In  sailing  up  the  river,  if  you  have  a  fair  wind,  run  from  point  to  point,  care- 
fully avoiding  the  bends,  and  by  doing  so,  you  will  shorten  the  distance,  have 
less  current,  and  what  is  of  more  consequence,  you  will  avoid  the  danger  of  hav- 
ing your  vessel  sunk  by  the  trees  which  frequently  lie  under  water.  As  you  are 
coming  up  to  and  passing  a  point,  it  will  he  wel!  to  heave  a  cast  of  the  lead ; 
with  light  winds,  or  when  tlie  wind  is  scant,  always  keep  on  the  Icewaid  side 
of  the  river. 


On  coming  to  or  bringing  up. 


ft- 


■M- 


Every  vessel,  while  in  the  river,  should  have  their  boat  along  side,  with  a  good 
hawser  in  it,  according  to  the  size  of  the  ship,  ready  to  run  out  to  a  tree,  whjch 
method  of  bringing  up  is  always  preferable  to  letting  go  an  anchor,  for  you^are 
sooner  under  way,  and  avoid  the  danger  of  losing  your  anchors. 

Every  vessel,  while  in  the  river,  should  have  a  haulubout-block  lashed  under 
the  bowsprit  to  reeve  a  rope  througli,  which  rope  should  be  bent  to  the  crown 
of  the  anchor,  in  the  same  way  as  a  buoy-rope,  and  be  strong  enough  to  weigh 
it;  the  crown  line  should  be  of  length  sulFicient,  that  when  the  anchor  is  let  go, 
you  may  veer  it  away  with  the  cable  ai.d  always  have  the  end  on  board,  as  l>y 
this  means,  if  you  should  get  foul  of  any  thing  with  your  anchor  (which  fre- 
quently happens)  you  will  get  it  again ;  otherwise  you  will  be  obliged  to  cut 
your  cable  and  lose  your  anchor.  If  >ou  are  obliged  to  let  go  anchor,  it  should 
be,  if  possible,  at  a  point,  for  you  wiil  be  more  likely  to  find  clear  bottom.  In 
the  bends  the  bottom  is  always  foul,  being  full  of  sunken  trees,  and  there  lire 
few  instances  where  an  anchor  need  be  let  go  in  the  bi^nds,  because  you  may  al- 
ways run  a  fast  to  a  tree. 


Shoals  in  the  River. 

About  three  miles  above  the  Look-out  house,  and  opposite  what  Is  called  the 
Pas  Aux  Cautres  (one  of  the  outlets  of  the  river)  there  is  a  flat  makes  out  full 
half  way  ove<*  the  river ;  this  should  be  avoided  by  keeping  r  oar  the  pass,  inta 
which  you  must  take  care  not  to  get  drifted  ;  this  is  what  may  be  called  die 
first  shoal ;  the  next  is  about  seven  miles  above  the  fort  at  Plaquemine,  on  the  lar- 
board side  of  the  river  as  you  are  coming  up ;  to  avoid  it  you  must  keep  nearer 
to  the  marsh  on  the  starboard  side ;  the  marsh  is  the  first  land  you  come  to  with- 
out trees  after  leaving  Plaquemine;  here  the  land  is  very  narrow,  and  by  going 
a  few  steps  up  the  shrouds,  you  may  see  the  sea  at  not  more  than  a  musket  shot 
distance ;  by  these  marks  you  may  know  when  you  are  coming  up  with  the 
shoal.  The  fort  lies  opposite  the  marsh,  and  runs  full  one-third  of  the  way 
over;  these  are  the  only  shoals  that  may  b(^  <'  'led dangerous,  but  as  I  have  be- 
fore observed,  the  lead  should  be  cast  whenever  you  are  approaching  a  point. 

-  Directions  for  vessels  bound  down  the  River. 

Vessels  going  down  the  riirer,  should  always  have  sufficient  sail  on  theni  to  be 
able  to  keep  clear  of  the  shore ;  without  great  care  you  will  be  driven  into  the 

19 


f*f 


* 


146 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


b^n^b  and  lose  your  rudder,  and  this  has  frequently  happened  with  experienced 
seamen.  I  would  observe  also,  that  every  vessel,  unless  the  wind  is  fair,  and 
settled  weather,  should  bring  to  at  sunset. 

We  are  confident  that  the  great  depth  of  water  at  the  South  West  Pass  will 
have  more  important  bearings  upon  the  commerce  of  New-Orleans  than  all  may 
imagine. 

Going  down  the  river,  a  slight  ipflexion  to  the  right  takes  you  to  the  head  of 
the  pass,  which  runs  S.  W.  almost  as  straight  as  an  arrow.  The  shores  on  each 
side  are  very  bold,  there  being  7  fathoms  water,  in  many  places,  almost  touching 
•  the  bank.  A.  vessel  can  often  proceed  this  way,  when  it  would  be  dangerous  or 
impracticable  to  drop  down  the  bend  at  the  most  frequented  channel,  past  the 
Middle  Ground.  "Sj 

About  the  same  distance  has  to  be  gone  over  in  order  to  reach  the  bar  at  the 
N.  E.  or  Old  Ship  Channel  (via  the  Baiize)  or  to  go  down  the  S.  W.  Pass ;  but 
the  course  to  the  latter  is  direct,  and  there  is  no  such  dangerous  shoals  as  the 
Middle  Ground  in  going  to  it.  The  latter  bar  has  4  or  5  feet  more  water  than 
the  other,  and  the  bottom  is  soft  mud  ;  whereas  that  of  the  N.  E.  Pass  is  rather 
ha«d  and  gravelly  in  many  places.  During  flood  tide  there  are  never  less  than 
SOj^eet  water  in  the  S.  W.  Pass,  about  18  at  low  water.  Var.  QiP  E. 


Rates  of  the  Kew-Orleans  Steam  Tow  Boats.  ^-r. 

The  undersigned,  masters  of  the  tow  boats  established  for  the  purpose  of  tow- 
ing vessels  to  -and  from  the  Baiize,  have  agreed  to  the  following  r^^   :s : 


From  the  Ltvee  to  Sea. 

Vessels  of  300  tons  and  upwards,  each 

do.  do.  to  the  Baiize,  I'/o 

do.  of  150  tons,  or  less  than  300,  to  sea,  125 
do.  do.  to  the  Baiize,  100 

do.  under  130  tons,  to  sea,  100 

do.  under  150  tons,  to  the  Baiize,  75 

ICP"  All  vessels  taken  astern  will  be  charged 
at  the  same  rate,  and  in  proportion  to  the 
distance  they  may  be  towed,  in  case  they  are 
dropped  in  consequence  of  bad  weather, 
From  the  B^ize  to  Sea. 

Vessels  of  200  tons  and  upwards,  each 

All  vessels  under  200, 

From  the  Bar  to  the  City. 

Vessels  of  200  tons  and  upwards,  each 
do.  100  to  200  tons, 

do.  under  100  tons, 

Prom  the  S.  W.  Pass  to  the  CUy. 

Vessels  of  200  tons  and  upwards,  each, 
do.  of     100  to  200  tons, 
do.  under  100  tons, 

Frotn  Fort  Jackson  and  Grand  Prmrie 
CUy. 

Vessels  of  200  tons  and  upwards,  each, 
do.         100  to  200  tons, 
do.  under  100  tons, 

Frotn  *Poverty  Point  to  the  CUy. 

Vessels  of  200  tons  and  upwards,  each 
do.         100  to  200  tons, 
do.  under  100  tons. 


I         From  the  English  Turn  to  the  City. 
$150  Vessels  of  300  tons  and  upwards,  each,  $100 
"     do.  100  to  200  tons,  80 

do,  under  100  tons,  SO 

For  towing  through  the  English  Turn. 
Vessels  of  300  tons  and  upwards,  each,    $75 
do.         100  to  200  tons,  60 

do.  under  100  tons,  40 

For  towing  vessels  of  all  sizes  on  or  on  the 
Levee,  16 

For  towing  vessels  with  anchors  down,        80 
For  towing  vessels  up  to  the  Point,  85 

do.        do.    any  distance  above  the 
Point,  per  mile,  5 

Cabin  pass^ige  from  the  Baiize  to  the  City,  IS 
do.        from  Fort  Jackson,  lO 

do.        from  the  City,  half  price. 

ICP*  For  services  rendered  to  any  vessel  in 
distress,  such  charges  will  be  made  as  cir- 
cumstances at  the  time  may  require. 
Each  master  binds  himself  to  the  other,  to 
adhere  strictly  to  the  foregoing  rates,  under 
the  penalty  of  two  hundred  dollars,  for  each 
deviation,  to  be  divided  between  the  other 
two. 

BENJAMIN  STARK, 

Master  of  the  Post  Boy, 
'■■  SAMUEL  MORRISON, 

Master  qf  the  (Hive  Branch. 
JOHN  J.  NARTIGUE, 

Master  of  the  Hereul'^. 


975 
50 

$300 
200 
150 

$250 
175 
125 

to  the 

$200 
150 
100 

$150 
80 
60 


*  A  dangerous  shoal  is  said  to  have  grown  up  off  this  point,  in  consequence  of  80m||^es>- 
■els  having  ip-ounded  there,  and  been  obliged  to  heave  out  •tone^ballast. 


A      '^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


147 


experienced 
is  fair,  and 

it  Pass  will 
han  all  may 

the  head  of 
ires  on  each 
tst  touching 
angerous  or 
el,  past  the 

e  bar  at  the 
'.  Pass ;  but 
loals  as  the 
water  than 
'ass  is  rather 
sr  less  than 
ir.  64°  E. 


•pose  of  tow- 

s: 

the  City. 
Is,  each,  $100 
80 
1  60 

liah  Turn. 
Is,  each,    $75 
^  60 

40 

on  or  ofTthe 
15 

down,       20 
nt,  S5 

above  the 

6 

0  the  City,  15 
lO 
half  price, 
any  Teasel  in 
made  as  cir- 
squire. 

the  other,  to 
rates,  under 
lars,  for  each 
en  the  other 

RK, 

e  Post  Boy. 

ISDN, 

{(Hive  Branch. 

JUE, 

i(  Herevi*^. 


lof  som^ret'- 


Banks  and  Coast  of  Florida. 

Twenty  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  easternmost  Tortuga,  is  placed  the 
W.  edge  of  a  bank,  called  the  Marques  Bank,  and  13  miles  farther  E.  are 
placed,  on  this  bank,  the  key  called  Marques  Key,  which  is  the  westernmost 
of  a  group,  of  which  the  northernmost  is  called  Boca  Grande  Key  ;  this  key  is 
the  largest  of  the  group,  and  is  near  six  mites  E.  and  W.  About  one  mile  to  the 
eastward  of  this  key  the  first  bank  ends,  whose  eastern  edge  runs  about  N.  and 
S.  The  first  bank  is  separated  from  the  following  by  a  channel  of  two  miles 
wide,  with  10  or  12  feet  water,  sandy  bottom.  This  channel  is  called  Boca 
Grande,  but  no  man  who  is  not  well  acquainted,  should  ever  attempt  to  take  the 
channel,  as  there  are  some  shoals  in  it. 

The  second  bank,  called  the  Mangrove  Islands,  is  like  the  first,  upon  which  is 
raised  a  portion  of  islands,  of  which  the  three  southernmost  have  white  sandy 
beaches.  This  second  bank  may  be  viewed  as  distinct  from  the  following,  al- 
though they  are  united  on  their  northern  part  by  an  isthmus  of  half  a  mile  wide, 
otherwise  they  are  separated  by  a  channel  of  one  mile  in  breadth,  which  contains 
from  10  feet  to  IS  fathoms  w»ter,  low  tide. 

The  third  bank  is  called  Key  West  and  Pine  Islands,  on  the  former  of  which 
is  a  *light-house,  showing  a  fixed  light,  as  after  described  ;  the  western  part  is 
called  by  the  first  name,  and  the  eastern  by  the  second.  i 

The  first  island,  on  its  western  edge,  is  Key  West,  which  lies  E.  %  N.  and  W. 
by  S.  6  miles  in  length,  N.  and  S.  2  miles  in  breadth,  and  about  56  miles  from 
the  main  land  of  Florida,  and  its  southern  coast  is  very  sandy.     This  island  is 
covered  with  trees,  especially  on  its  western  part,  in  which  there  is  a  secure  an- 
chorage, with  a  channel  of  4i  fathoms  to  enter  it,  and  2i  fathoms  within,  well 
sheltered.    To  enter  this  channel,  you  must  observe  the  following  directions, 
viz.  In  running  along  the  Gulf  Stream,  you  must  not  attempt  to  pass  the  reef, 
which  is  about  six  miles  from  the  island,  until  you  bring  Whitehead  Point  light- 
house, which  is  on  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  island,  and  which  exhibits  afred  light, 
••         to  bear  N.  N.  W.  then  steer  for  the  harbour,  which  lies  at  the  N.  W.  point,  leav- 
ing Sandy  Key  light-house,  which  exhibits  a  revolving  light,  on  your  larboard 
hand,  as  you  cross  the  reef,  and  taking  care  to  give  Whitehead  Point  a  birth  of  one 
mile  on  account  of  a  reef  that  makes  off  from  it.   The  light-house  on  Sandy  Key 
bears  from  Key  West  light-house  S.  b)"^  W.  nine  miles  distant.    After  you  pass 
'  the  reef  (at  the  inner  edge  of  which  a  buoy  has  been  placed,  as  before-men- 
tioned) haul  up  for  the  flag-staff.     You  will  have  3h  to  4  fathoms  water  crossing 
the  reef,  and  then  from  6  to  7  fathoms  until  you  enter  the  harbour,  where  you 
toay  anchor  with  perfect  safety.     There  is  a  powerful  tide  here,  rising  and  fall- 
ing about  4  to  5  feet,  and  setting  alternately  N.  E.  and  S.  W.     [A  Collector  of 
the  Custom  has  been  appointed  at  Key  West,  warehouses  erected  for  the  con- 
venience of  commerce,  the  harbour  large  and  <:ommo<li<»U3,  admitting  vessels  of 
the  largest  class,  where  they  are  protected  from  all  winds  within  200  yards  of  the 
♦iN.  W.  point  of  the  island,  and  several  ponds  of  fresh  water,  which  for  nine 
months  in  the  year  produce  excellent  water.    There  are  also  several  large  and 
some  smaller  salt  water  ponds.]  * 

From  Key  West  to  eastward  for  24  miles,  there  are  nothing  but  low  mangrove 
islands,  in  whose  channels  nothing  hut  canoes  can  pass.  This  third  bank  termi- 
nates at  Bahia  Honda,  and  the  islands  to  the  eastward  are  somewhat  larger,  and 
covered  with  pine  trees,  but  are  low  and  drowned  like  the  others,  and  their 
channels  are  navigable  only  fur  boats.  Of  the  whole  of  these  islands  there  is  but 
one,  which  is  13  miles  from  Key  W^est,  which,  although  small,  is  of  tolerable 

*  A  light-house  is  built  on  Key  West,  containing  a /tjeti  liglU,  and  a  number  of  buoys  arc 
placed,  viz. 

A  White  Buoy,  showing  3  feet  above  the  water,  on  the  Reef,  in  86  feet  water,  bearing  flrom 
the  light-house  on  Whitehead  Point,  S.  S.  E.  and  from  the  lieht-house  on  Sandy  Key,  E. 
by  N.  J  N. 

/nVhite  Buoy,  showing  3  feet  above  water,  moored  in  27  or  S3  feet,  and  bearing  S.  8. 
W.  i  W.  flrom  the  light-house  on  Whitehead  Point,  (Key  West)  near  the  dry  rocks  which 
lie  to  the  W.  of  Sandy  Key,  to  show  the  wost  channel  into  Key  West. 


//I 


140 


BLUJiT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILel. 


hfiight,  is  rough  and  covered  with  t.ees,  and  in  whatever  direction  you  see  it,  ap- 
pears in  the  form  of  a  saddle. 

The  next  bank  is  called  Bahia  Honda,  separated  from  the  last  by  a  channel  of 
half  a  mile  wide,  which  channel  is  called  Bahia  Honda,  and  in  which  there  is  an.>- 
nhorage  in  3  and  3)  fathoms.  This  channel  is  easily  Hnown,  because  on  its 
western  part,  and  on  the  very  eastern  part  of  the  last  bwk  of  Key  West  and 
Pine  Islands,  there  arc  three  small  islands,  and  on  its  eastern  part,  upon  this 
fourth  bank  of  Bahia  Honda,  there  is  one  called  Palm  Island,  whidh  is  large,  and 
has  a  sandy  beach,  and  is  reiiiarknblc  by  the  many  high  palm  trees  with  which  it 
is  covered,  and  are  the  (irst  j^oii  see  coming  from  the  westward.  This  bank  of 
Bahia  Honda  has  but  ftjw  keys,  nsid  extends  E.  about  four  leagues. 

From  the  fourth  the  fifth  follo\;s,  called  Key  Vacas,  or  Cow  Keys,  extending 
to  the  eastward  about  5  leagues,  upon  "ivliich  bank  a  group  cnlled  by  the  same 
name,  are  raised,  the  easternmost  of  which  is  called  Duck  Key,  or  Cayo  Holan- 
des  ;  between  this  Key  and  Key  Bivoras  is  one  leiigue.  This  Key  is  remarkable 
by  its  white  sandy  beach,  and  by  a  tolerable  high  hill  covered  with  trees,  which 
is  on  its  western  part. 

Concerning  the  whole  of  tlie  channel  to  the  westward  of  the  Cow  Keys,  it  may 
be  necessary  to  state  the  follo-.ving  remarks,  namely,  that  you  will  have  three 
fathoms  water  all  the  way  within  a  mile  of  the  keys,  and  will  always  find  the 
deepest  wateiK^earest  to  the  reef.  That  ths  usual  method  of  navigating  between 
the  reef  and  the  ke;^,  is,  to  proceed  in  the  d:iy,  and  lie  at  anchor  in  the  night ; 
and  that  should  you  be  obliged  to  anchor  where  there  is  any  coral,  it  will  some- 
times be  necessary  to  buoy  up  your  cable  to  prevent  its  being  rubbed. 

From  the  eastern  extreme  of  Key  Bivoras  to  the  westernmost  part  of  Old 
Mutecumbe,  Is  iih,  miles.  Old  Matecumbe  is  4  miles  long  in  the  direction  of  N. 
E.  and  S.  W.  and  its  N.  E.  point  is  covered  !)y  some  very  high  trees,  appearing 
like  table-land.  On  the  nrirth  end  of  Old  Matecumbe  is  a  natural  well,  in  a  rock 
containing  CTcclisnt  t'«itfjr. 

One  mile  eust  of  0!(?  Mat:'c:unJie,  lies  Indian  Kej',  to  the  eastward  of  which 
there  is  a  cbcnncl  rnnii-H,^  to  Ui?"  northward,  with  10  and  12  feet  water,  where, 
by  doubling  the  N.  E.  point  of  Old  Bratecimibe,  you  may  anchor,  sheltered  from 
all  winds.  This  chaiv.iel  is  ea.si';-  discovered  by  the  white  shoals  of  only  2  or  3 
feet,  bordering  both  sidc!»  of  it,  v/hlch  serve  as  an  excellent  beacon. 

Two  miles  H.  E.  of  Old  Matecumbe,  you  Avill  find  Little  Matecumbe,  which^ 
in  this  same  direction  has  4  miles  in  length :  this  key  is  covered  with  high  trees.  ' 
Off  its  N.  E.  part  there  is  a  small  mangrove  island,  separated  by  a  channel  of 
half  a  mile  wide,  and  N.  ^il.  ot'  the  !ast,  there  :a  another  of  tolerable  size,  separa- 
ted by  another  channel  of  the  same  breadth.    This  is  also  separated  by  another 
channel,  like  the  oihers,  frcm  Long  Island. 

N.  E.  from  Long  Island  lies  "^Key  Largo,  separ«ted  like  the  others  by  a  small 
narrow  channel.  Nearly  east  from  this  channel,  1 J  mile,  lies  Key  Tavernier,  to  the 
northward  of  which  thore  is  excellent  anchorage  for  vessels  drawing  not  over  8 
feet  water,  and  i«i  one  of  the  anchorages  much  frequented  by  the  fishermetf? 
About  N.E.  by  N.  from  Key  Tavjprnier  lies  the  Key  M  Jchor  Rudrigues,  which  is 
an  island  of  tolerable  extenbion,  and  th?  land  so  spongy  that  the  roots  of  the 
trees  are  discovered. 

The  coast  runs  from  Melchor  Rodrigues  to  Key  Largo  (which  appears  like 
main  land)  N.  N.  E. — N.  by  E.  and  N.  on  which  last  course  there  are  various 
keys  for  bome  distance,  of  which  the  last  is  called  fKey  Biscayno ;  a  little  to 
the  northward  of  this  key  there  is  an  islaad  of  moderate  size,  off  the  main  land, 
the  eastern  point  of  which  is  called  tCape  Florida ;  from  this  cape  to  the  north- 


♦  A  Floating  Light  is  placed  off  Key  Largo,  bearing  from  the  highest  land  on  the  Keyffi.  by 
S.  distant?  miles,  from  the  elbow  of  Caryefort  Reef  N.  i  E.  distant  3  to  4  miles.  The  outer 
Rsef  (say  14  fathoms  water)  bears  E.  distant  2^  miles.     Lat.  S5»  6'  N.  loog.  80°  28'  W. 

t  Key  Biscayno  lies  a  little  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Florida.  On  it  is  a  light-house,  the 
lantern  elevated  70  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  exhibits  a  fixed  light.  ** 

%A  White  Buoy,  showing  three  feet  above  water,  is  placed  on  a  reef  near  Cape  Florida  ; 
Soidier's^y  bears  from  it  W.  by  N.  and  Saunder's  Hat  bean  S.  S.  W. 


-,f  '* 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


14 


ivard,  it  is  clear  of  keys  and  reefs,  and  is  all  low  and  drowned.  The  shores  of 
this  coast  are  lined  with  a  bank  of  regular  soundings,  which  run  off  a  good  dis- 
tance ;  this  regularity  of  soundings  expends  from  Cape  Florida  to  Gape  Cana- 
veral, and  is  of  great  benefit  to  navigators,  except  in  about  the  lat.  of  36^  30'  N. 
where  the  soundings  narrow,  and  scarcely  extend  two  miles  from  the  coast. 
From  fi6°  30'  the  soundings  widen  from  the  coast,  and  the  whole  is  very  clean, 
with  the  exception  of  C.ipe  Canaveral,  from  which,  at  a  long  distance,  you  will 
find  upon  the  same  soundings  various  shnals  ;  but  as  the  soundings  run  further 
out  to  sea  than  these  shoals,  he  who  navigates  here  must  run  with  care,  and  have 
his  lead  at  hand. 

From  Cape  Canaveral  the  coast  runs  N.  W.  by  N.  26  leagues,  to  the  en- 
trance of  New  Smyrni!,  which  is  barred  and  only  fit  for  boats  and  launches; 
the  coast  is  very  clean,  and  you  may,  without  danger,  keep  within  two  mile^ 
of  it. 

Seven  leagues  N.  25°  W.  from  New  Smyrna,  is  the  entrance  of  Matanzas,  but 
only  vessels  of  very  light  draft  can  enter  it:  this  bar  has  8  feet,  at  high  water. 
From  this  entrance  there  is  an  inland  navigation  to  St.  Augustine,  formed  by 
the  island  of  St.  Anastasia  and  the  main :  the  tide  rises  4  feet  at  spring  tides, 
and  it  is  high  water  at  full  and  change  at  7h.  l.'im.  The  whole  of  this  piece  of 
coast  is  equally  clean  with  the  anterior.  You  have  8  fathoms  one  league  from 
the  land. 

From  Matanzas  to  St.  Augustine  is  12  miles,  and  the  island  ofTW.  Antastasia 
extends  the  whole  length;  you  may  keep  along  it  at  two  miles  distance,  in  5  and 
<i  fathoms.'  Yo»i  can  see  this  island  from  lf>  fathoms,  as  it  in  oretty  high,  and 
also  distinguished  by  the  light-house,  showing  a  fixtd-lig<  ;  the  coast  to  the 
northward  is  very  low,  and  y(3u  can  aee  it  but  at  a  short  distance,  so  that  it  makes 
a  good  mark  to  know  if  you  are  N.  or  S.  of  St.  Augustine. 

From  the  foregoing  observations  it  clearly  appears  that  there  can  be  no  great 
difficulty  in  getting  fresh  water  on  most  of  the  islands ;  and  except  the  Tortugas, 
there  is  plenty  of  firewood  upon  the  whole  of  them.  ^Vith  respect  to  water,  it 
may  be  observed  that  just  within  the  sandy  beach,  the  islands  are  generally  bor- 
dered with  mangrove  swamps,  of  about  100  yards  broad;  beyond  these  swimps 
the  ground  rises  higher,  and  is  generally  of  a  rocky  bottom,  where  you  will  often 
find  fresh  water  ponds  or  natural  tanks,  which  receive  and  retain  the  rain 
water. 


SOUNDINGS  OFF  FLORIDA. 

The  whole  of  the  coast  from  Cnpe  St.  Blass,  sends  off  a  bank  of  sound- 
ings which  stretches  a  long  distance  from  the  land,  and  the«e  soundings  are  gene- 
4^ally  known  by  the  name  of  Tortugas  soundings,  and  are  so  clean  that  other 
dang<  r  is  not  known  in  the  whole  of  it  than  a  spot  or  knowl  of  sand  in  lat.  28° 
35'  and  lies  about  12  miles  east  of  the  meridian  of  ^•^.  Blass.  This  knowl  has 
but  3' feet  on  it,  and  bo  steep,  that  from  100  fathoms  _  ju  will  be  upon  it,  and  is 
probably  what  was  called  in  ancient  charts.  Providence  Island.  The  whole  of 
these  soundings  are  very  equal,  diminishing,  gradually  towards  the  shore. 

When  you  enter  on  these  soundings,  without  a  sure  knowledge  of  the  latitude, 
and  in  parallels  near  the  Tortugas,  it  is  necessary  to  run  carefully  to  get  sound- 
ings on  its  edge,  and  not  get  into  less  than  40  or  35  fathoms,  which  is  a  depth  to 
keep  clear  of  the  Tortugas,  which  lie  in  30  fathoms,  that  is,  if  they  did  not  exist 
the  regular  soundings  of  the  bank  would  be  80  fathoms  where  they  are  placed; 
on  the  western  part  of  these  keys,  the  soundings  are  steep. 

You  should  take  the  same  precaution  when  entering  on  soundings  in  parallels 
north  of  the  Tortugas.  You  should  take  this  same  precaution  when  navigating 
to  the  southward,  that  you  may  leave  soundings  witii  safety  off  its  southern  edge ; 
so  that  what  is  said,  is  sufficient  to  liberate  you  from  all  danger  offered  by  the 
Tortugas. 


lao 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


On  the  edges  of  this  bank  the  waters  run  lively  to  the  southward,  so  that 
when  navigating  from  the  westward^  with  intention  of  sounding  on  its  edge,  the 
ship  will  be  retarded  by  the  wind,  which  fixes  itself  at  E.  N.  E.  or  east;  but 
when  for  two  days  you  experience  a  difference  of  latitude  to  the  southward,  of 
90  miles  more  than  account,  you  may  be  sure  that  you  are  in  the  vicinity  of 
soundings,  in  which  case  you  may  suppose  yourself  in  the  meridian  of  the  edge, 
and  calculate  an  error  if  not  exceeding  30  miles,  and  theiice  take  your  route 
with  security.     [For  Tortugas  see  page  141.] 


FLORIDA  REEF. 

The  Reef  begins  in  the  meridian  of  the  first  bank,  that  is,  at  the  same  distance 
from  the  Tortugas ;  its  breadth  is  about  3  miles,  and  it  preserves  the  same,  or 
nearly  the  same  breadth,  as  far  as  the  eastern  meridian  of  Boca  Grande,  and  thus 
far  has,  at  least,  3  fathoms  water  over  it,  and  you  may  cross  this  portion  of  the 
reef  with  any  ship  of  16  feet  draught:  but  you  should  ever  remember,  that  over 
white  shoals  you  always  endanger  the  ship  if  she  is  large,  especially  if  the  wea- 
ther is  thick,  when  the  bottom  does  not  show  itself  clearly.  You  may,  in  such 
weather,  soolil  encounter  a  coral  shoal  of  only  one  fathom,  or  even  less;  so  that 
when  we  say,  that  the  least  water  is  3  fathoms  on  this  portion  of  the  reef,  it  is 
because  it  is  so  generally,  and  that  the  inequalities  found  on  the  other  parts  of 
the  same  reef  to  the  eastward,  is  not  found  here  on  this  portion  of  it. 

F|om'  the  eastern  meridian  of  *Boca  Grande  the  navigation  is  safe,  till  within 
4i  miles  of  Sandy  Key,  on  which  is  a  light-house,  showing  a  revolving  light, 
hearing  S.  by  W.  from  Key  West  light,  distant,  as  before  mentioned,  nine  miles. 
From  Sandy  Key  W.  j  S.  on  the  outer  edge  of  tlie  reef,  lies  a  gruup  of  dry 
rocks,  and  N.  E.  by  E.  from  these  rocks  is  another  group  of  dry  rucks,  and  be- 
tween them  in  the  same  direction,  are  two  or  three  shuals  with  only  9  feet  on 
them.  One  and  a  half  mile  east  from  Sandy  Key  is  another  group  of  dry  rocks, 
on  a  bank  which  extends  four  miles  east  from  Sandy  Key,  on  which  there  are 
from  2  to  31  fathoms  water.  Six  miles  E.  by  N.  i  N.  from  Sandy  Key,  is  a 
coral  shoal,  with  3  fathoms  on  it,  between  which  and  Sandy  Key  lies  the  Eastern 
Channel  into  Key  West  (see  page  147.)  From  this  shoal  ihe  reef  leads  E.N.E. 
and  is  very  dangerous,  being  full  of  coral  rocks,  on  which  there  is  as  little  as  two 
feet  water,  till  you  come  up  with  Looe  Key,  on  which  is  a  Beacon  with  a  red 
ball  on  the  top.  Off  Looe  Key  the  hank  is  very  steep.  Sixteen  miles  from 
Looe  Key  lies  Sombrero,  which  is  the  easternmost  Key  on  the  reef.  To  the 
eastward  of  this  Key  is  very  dangerous,  being  cut  up  by  coral  rocks,  with  channels 
which  should  only  be  attempted  through  necessity,  and  in  day-light,  as  nothing 
is  so  useful  in  the  navigation  of  this  reef,  as  a  good  lookout.  S-  S.  W.  to  S.  by  W. 
ii  miles  distant  from  Duck  Key  (the  easternmost  of  Cow  Keys)  are  two  groups 
of  dry  rocks.  South  4J  miles  from  the  west  end  of  Old  Matacumbe  is  a  coral 
bank,  with  only  8  feet  on  it.  S.  E.  by  E.  4^  miles  from  the  eastern  end  of  Old 
Matacumbe  is  another  shoal,  with  only  2  feet,  cnlltMl  Alligator  Shoal,  from  the 
circumstance  of  the  U.  S.  schooiHT  Alligator  being  l"st  on  it,  and  on  which  the 
ship  Spermo  waslatply  lost.  Between  lat.  24*^  51'  aiid  Key  Tavernier,  which  is 
in  lat.  24°  56'  lies  the  great  inlet  of  the  Florida  lle*f.  From  this  Inlet  the  reef 
takes  a  sudden  bend,  and  makes  what  is  called  Carysfort  R«ef,  on  which  the  cur- 
rent sets  very  strong.  From  this  the  reef  tends  N.  N.  E.  till  up  with  Cape  Flor- 
ida, passing  Key  Biscayno,  on  which  is  a  light-house  showing  a  fxtd  light.  (See 
page  140.) 

Having  observed,  in  the  course  of  long  experience,  that  several  n)asters  of 
vessels,  who  had  the  misfortune  to  be  cast  away  on  the  Martyrs,  and  the  const 
of  Florida,  ignorant  of  the  existence  of  any  settlement  at  Cape  Florida,  have 
attempted  to  proceed  to  the  northward  in  their  boats,  deprived  of  every  assist- 
ance, I  feel  it  mcumbent  upon  me  to  inform  such  as  may  hereafter  experience  a 
like  misfortune,  that  if  they  pass  to  the  north  side  of  Key  Biscayno,  on  which 


ts'  .^iititefei 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


161 


ne  distance 
le  same,  or 


»... 


a  light-house  is  erected,  as  before-roentiuned,  they  will  find  the  entrance  of  Boca 
Ratones,  through  which  they  can  safely  go  with  their  boats,  and  they  will  Bee 
the  houses  in  front,  on  the  main  land. 

In  case  of  shipwreck  to  th  northward  of  Boca  Ratones,  at  the  distance  of 
two  miles  therefrom,  they  will  perceive  mangroves  thinly  scattered,  from  whence 
the  houses  may  be  seen,  and  in  that  situation,  on  making  a  signal  with  fire,  ur 
otherwise,  they  will  obtain  assistance. 

If  it  should  happen  to  the  southward  of  New  River,  they  may  proceed 
southwardly  along  the  beach,  where  they  will  meet,  every  four  miles,  with  posts 
fixed  in  the  ground,  on  which  is  an  inscription  in  English,  French  and  Spanish, 
informing  where  wells  of  fresh  water  have  been  purposely  dug  for  relief. 


Channel  of  Florida,  between  the  Reef  and  Keys. 

The  western  part  of  this  channel  begins  with  a  breadth  of  Si  or  4  miles,  and 
you  will  find  in  it  from  6^  to  10  fathoms  water,  sand  and  mud  or  ooze,  as  far  as 
Boca  Grande,  from  which  to  Key  West  light,  it  is  generally  about  three  miles  wide, 
and  its  depth  6  and  7  fathoms,  fine  sand  and  mud ;  in  this  last  piece  of  the  chan- 
nel there  are  two  shoals ;  the  one  nearly  north  and  south  with  the  easternmost 
part  of  Key  Boca  Grande,  and  the  other  S.  S.  W.  from  the  westernmost  part 
of  Key  West,  and  both  in  the  middle  of  the  channel. 

From  these  shoals,  the  channel  continues  with  a  breadth  of  four  miles  as  far  as 
Samboes  Keys,  from  which,  to  the  eastward,  its  breadth  diminishes,  and  the 
reef  increases  in  the  same  proportion,  so  that  the  channel  is  only  1}  mile  wide  at 
the  distance  of  5  miles  west  of  Looe  Key  Bcaco^,  and  this  is  the  narrowest  part  of 
the  channel,  but  drawing  up  with  Looe  Key  Beacon,  the  channel  begins  to  widen, 
so  that  north  and  south  of  Bahia  Honda,  it  is  three  miles  wide.  The  depth  in  these 
narrows  is  three  fathoms,  and  continuing  to  the  eastward,  you  augment  your 
depth  to  6  fathoias. 

From  Looe  Key  the  channel  continues  to  its  end  with  a  breadth  of  two  to  three 
miles,  but  its  depth  varies  remarkably,  so  that  as  far  as  Cow  Keys,  you  have  4 
to  6  fathoms,  and  from  thence  to  the  eastward  it  goes  on  diminishing,  and  when 
abreast  of  Old  Matecumbe,  you  have  but  3  fathoms,  and  abreast  of  Key  Toba- 
no  only  2,  and  2^ ;  besides  which,  from  Looe  Key,  the  channel  has  many  coral 
shoals,  which  although  by  day  they  ofier  no  risk  (as  the  dark  colour  shows  their 
place)  yet  by  night  they  are  very  dangerous ;  and  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to 
anchor,  and  lie  by  for  the  night,  throughout  all  parts  of  this  channel. 

In  Bahia  Honda  you  get  excellent  water  by  digging  wells,  and  on  the  south 
side  of  Cow  Keys,  about  8  miles-from  its  western  end,  you  again  have  a  fine 
^spring. 

These  are  the  only  places  among  the  keys,  where  you  can  find  water  from 
natural  springs,  but  there  are  many  natural  tanks,  where  rain-water  is  preserved 
till  evaporated. 

On  the  north  side  of  Cow  Keys,  and  about  6  miles  east  of  the  west  end.  you 
will  find  a  natural  pond,  that  never  wants  water,  which  is  in  a  valley,  distant 
from  the  beach  about  one  hundred  yards,  and  the  landing  is  something  to  the 
westward  of  three  small  mangrove  islands,  called  Stirrup's  Keys.  You  may, 
also,  at  times,  find  water  on  the  western  extreme  of  Key  Vacas  (Cow  Keys)— 
also,  in  some  of  the  keys  in  its  vicinity,  and  on  Dutch  Key,  and  generally  m  all 
those  places  where  the  earth  is  rocky,  you  will  find  water,  especially  after  rains. 


Description  of  the  coast  from  the  Bay  of  Santa  Rosa  to  Cape  St.  Bias. 

Santa  Rosa  Island  being  described  in  th^  following  page,  we  proceed  to  ob- 
serve,  that  from  the  bay  the  coast  runs  S.  S.  £.  and  S.  E.  by  E.  48  miles,  to 
the  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  St.  Andrews.  On  this  coast  the  trees  are  very  thick, 
and  near  the  beach  there  are  also  many  red  and  white  sand  hillocksv 


im 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  entrance  to  the  Bay  of  St.  Andrews  is  formed  to  the  westward  by  a 
long  narrow  neck  of  land,  which  runk  off  from  the  main  land,  and  to  the  east- 
ward by  a  sinall  island  called  St,  Andrews,  off  which  is  a  sand  shoal  of  4  feet 
water,  eztemting  S.  S.  E.  14  mile,  lying  6  miles  from  the  coast.  From  the  neck 
or  tongue  of  land,  a  shoal  stretches  more  than  two-thirds  of  the  distance  be- 
tween it  and  the  island,  leaving  a  channel  in  which  there  is  a  bar  of  10  feet  on- 
ly. ^  You  must  also  take  care  of  another  shoal,  which  runs  off  the  island,  which 
having  passed,  and  between  the  two  points,  you  must  haul  round  N.  W.  to  get 
sheltered  by  the  tongue  in  4  or  5  fathoms.  This  bay  is  vei-y  large,  but  as  yet 
there  can  be  no  motive  for  ships  to  call  here ;  but  should  you  do  it  for  shelter 
in  bad  weather,  you  have  only  to  run  in  as  far  as  the  place  mentioned  above. 

From  Bay  St.  Andrews  the  coast  runs  S.  S.  JG.  29  miles,  to  Cape  St.  Blass, 
which  is  the  southernmost  point  of  a  very  long  neck  of  land  that  stretches  from 
the  coast  five  or  six  miles,  and  forms  the  Bay  of  St.  Joseph. 

The  shoal  which  lies  off  this  bay  (before  described)  may  be  easily  discovered 
by  the  whiteness  of  the  water.  The  S.  E.  extreme  of  this  shoal,  and  the  above 
tongue,  form  the  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  St.  Joseph,  which  has  a  bar  of  9  feet  wa- 
ter ;  the  tongue  of  land,  which  is  fourteen  milep.  in  length,  is  so  narrow  that  in 
places  it  is  only  two  cables  length  wide:  th.^re  are  various  breaches  in  it,  by 
which  (in  time  of  rains)  the  water  of  the  bay  unites  with  the  ocean.  This  pfece 
of  coast  presents  good  anchorage,  sheltered  from  easterly  winds,  in  6  or  7  fa- 
thoms, which  depth  you  will  have  at  1)  mile  from  the  beach. 

To  enter  this  bay,  you  must  coast  along  the  tongue  of  land  in  4  or  5  fathoms, 
imtil  you  pass  a  tongue  of  sand,  a  little  before  you  come  to  the  mouth,  from 
whence  you  steer  N.  E.  and  E*  N.  E.  till  within,  always  coasting  the  tongue 
which  is  the' deepest  water.  The  bay  of  St.  Joseph  is  entirely  without  shelter, 
especially  in  winter,  by  the  previdling  winds  from  S.  to  W.  and  from  W.  to  N. 
that  make  a  heavy  swell,  which  always  exists  on  the  bar. 


Description  of  Cape  St.  Blass.  .^j 

Cape  St.  Blass  is  a  low  point,  which  runs  to  the  southward  two  miles :  from 
that  part  where  trees  end  on  this  point,  a  shoal  of  sand  runs  S.  S.  E.  four  miles, 
bearing  from  S.  S.  £.  to  S.  S.  W.  from  the  point.  Various  shoals  and  small 
spots  of  sand,  having  less  than  S  fathoms  water  on  them,  also  lie  off  the  same 
point,  the  southernmost  of  which  is  14  miles  distant ;  between  these  shoals  there 
are  7,  8,  and  9  fathoms  water. 

The  whole  coast,  from  the  Mississippi  to  Cape  St.  Blass,  sends  off  a  bank  of 
soundings,  whose  edge  runs  out  to  lat.  28^  50'  but  the  depth  is  very  unequal ; 
this  inequality  is  very  clean.  If  you  except  ,the  spots  of  sand  that  are  in  the 
vicinity  of  Cape  St.  Blass,  you  will  find  no  danger  in  the  whole  of  it  that  can- 
not be  prevented  by  care  and  the  use  of  the  lead,  and  as  the  whole  of  the  coast 
is  very  low,  having  few  visible  marks  to  distinguish  it  in  its  whole  extension,  and 
besides  is  often  cloudy  and  foggy,  exposed  by  the  continuation  of  winds  from 
S.  to  W.  and  from  W.  to  N.  which  blow  with  great  force  in  winter,  and  by  hurri- 
canes in  August  and  September,  all  which  create  the  necessity  of  saying  some- 
thing on  the  method  of  making  the  land,  and  navigating  its  coast. 

If  your  destination  is  Mobile  or  Pensacola,  you  should  run  in  for  the  land  to 
the  eastward  of  them  respectively,,  not  only  to  avoid  passing  the  port,  but  be- 
cause land-marks  are  so  wanting,  and  the  coast  so  low,  that  a  stranger  has  no- 
thing to  guide  himself  by  except  the  light-houses,  the  former  of  which  shows  a 
Jixtd,  and  the  latter  a  revolving  light,  which  may  be  some  guide  to  the  Navigator, 
nevertheless,  the  soundings  uidicate  suiliciently  well  the  meridian  in  which  the 
ship  is  found ;  a  little  more  or  less,  if  you  attend  to  the  quality  of  coarse  sand 
ana  coral  found  outside  of  land,  which  is  a  sure  indication  that  you  are  off  the 
east  end  of  Santa  Rosa  Island,  where  you  find  the  same  quality  of  soundings 
as  off  Tampa  Bay  and  other  parts  of  East  Florida,  but  can  cause  no  equivo- 
cation, because  the  points  are  so  distant  from  the  one  now  treated  of. 


BLL'NT*S   AMEllICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


153 


The  Island  of  Santa  Rosa  extends  alongthe  coast  40  miles,  and  in  its  great- 
est breadth  is  not  more  than  half  a  mile.  There  are  many  lumps  of  white  sand 
upon  it,  and  some  scattering  trees.  The  eastern  extreme  of  this  Island  is  the 
western  point  of  Santa  Rosa  Bay,  very  sandy  and  low.  The  east  point  of  this 
bay  is  known  by  some  bright  reddish  coloured  bluffs,  which  are  upon  it.  The 
channel,  or  mouth  of  the  bay,  is  very  narrow,  and  a  bar  of  only  5  or  6  feet  im- 
pedes its  entrance.  To  enter,  steer  N.  till  you  pass  the  east  extreme  of  the  isl- 
and, whence  steer  N.  W.  and  anchor  as  soon  as  you  have  shelter.  This  bay  is 
'  of  extraordinary  length,  extending.24  miles  to  the  eastward,  with  a  breadth  of  4  to 
6  miles.  The  best  water  in  it  is  three  fathoms,  which  is  only  found  when  you  are 
■  E.  and  W.  with  the  red  cHtfs  at  the  entrance,  about  two  iniles  from  the  bar.  The 
other  part  of  the  bay  is  full  of  shoals  and  palisadoes,  navigable  only  for  boats. 

From  Cape  St.  Blass  the  coast  runs  east  to  St.  George's  Island,  and  from  St. 
Blass  to  point  Josef,  which  is  the  south  point  of  the  island,  is  17  miles;  from 
which  point  the  coast  and  islands  double  round  to  N.  E.  in  which  direction  you 
lind  three  other  isles  ;  about  E.  N.  E.  from  the  last,  lies  Point  Minessess  on  the 
main,  and  is  distant  from  St.  Blass  about  IS  leagues  ;  from  point  Minessess  the 
coast  bends  to  the  northward,  and  after  to  the  eastward,  and  forms  a  large  bay, 
in  which  the  river  Apalache  is  emptied. 

This  river  is  shoal,  and  obstructed  at  its  entrance,  and  for  a  long  distance  off, 
by  many  oyster  banks,  which  are  dry  at  low  water ;  the  tide  rises  4^  feet. 

St.  Joseph's  Bay,  nprth  of  Cape  St.  Blass,  and  to  the  eastward  of  Pensacoln, 
is  very  extensive,  and  affords  secure  anchorage  to  vessels  drawing  not  more  than 

1 7  feet :  it  is  formed  b}'  a  low  narrow  neck  of  sand  extending  in  a  northerly  di- 
rection from  Cape  St.  Blass  to  St.  Joseph's  Point,  the  distance  from  which  to 
the  nearest  part  of  the  main  land  is  more  than  three  miles.  About  eight  miles 
up  the  river  from  the  bar  is  the  fort  of  St.  Marks,  situated  on  a  point  which  forms 
the  confluence  of  the  river,  of  which  the  east  branch  is  called  St.  Marks,  and 
the  other  Warcaller.  The  shoal  water  which  is  found  in  this  river  is  also  foun( 
all  over  this  large  bay,  and  8  feet  is  the  best  water  in  the  channels. 

From  Apalache  Bay.  the  coast  bends  off  to  the  southward  and  eastward  to  th 
river  St.  Johns,  which  is  23  leagues  distant  from  the  river  of  Apalache.  St.  John' 
river  is  navigable  for  large  merchantmen  a  great  distance  ;  for  vessels  of  30  ton 
to  Lake  George  and  for  steam-boats  as  far  south  as  28°  30'.    For  the  fir; 
hundred  miles  from  its  mouth  it  is  two  miles  wide  on  an  average,  and  frequcn' 
ly  expands  into  lakes  four  miles  across.    The  River  flows,  almost  the  whol 
length  of  its  course,  through  public  lands.    From  the  river  St.  Johns  to  th 
southward,  you  lose  sight  of  the  land,  as  only  canoes  can  get  nigh  enough 
discover  the  keys  called  Sabinas.    Fifty  miles  south  of  the  Sabinas  lies  t 
key  Anclote,  or  Anchor  island,  and  before  you  come  to  it,  you  may  discov  . 
the  coast.    The  whole  of  the  coast,  from  Point  Minessess  to  thid  Key,  is 
shoal,  that  at  ten  leagues  from  land  you  have  but  5  and  6  fathoms,  and  tv 
leagues  you  will  have  from  6  to  7  feet.    Key  Anclote  is  distant  across  from  1 
main  land  five  miles,  and  iii  length  about  eight  miles  north  and  south :  it 
divided  into  3  parts,  and  its  south  part  has  good  anchorage  in  3  fathoms  watci 

From  Key  Anclote  the  coast  runs  S.  E.  by  E.  thirty  miles  to  the  entrance 
Tampa  Bay,  or  Baye  del  Espirituo  Santo.  The  coast  between  is  clear  and  dee 
er  than  the  anterior.  At  three  leagues  from  the  land  you  will  have  6  fathoi 
water  and  no  impediment  to  your  keeping  in  with  it  by  the  lead.  Oft' this  co; 
there  are  various  keys,  which  lie,  at  most,  only  five  miles  from  the  main. 

The  entrance  of  Tampa  Bay  is  obstructed  by  various  sand  shoals,  upon  whit 
are  raised  some  islands.  Between  these  shoals  there  are  three  channels  to  ente. 
called  the  West,  South  West  and  South  East ;  the  two  first  have  plenty  of  ws 
ter  on  their  bars  :  on  the  first  (at  low  water)  there  are  23  feet,  and  in  the  secon 

18  feet.    The  best  entrance  is  said  to  be  by  the  southern  pass  of  Egmont  Isl 
ands,  on  the  bar  of  which  there  is  never  less  than  16  feet  water  ;  the  channel  i? 
a  mile  in  width,  and  very  plain.    The  channels  are  frank,  and  to  take  thent 
there  is  no  necessity  of  advice,  as  at  high  water,  the  shoals  show  themselves, 
^and  at  low  water,  are  dry. 

From  Tampa  the  coast  continues  S.  E.  by  S.  22  leagues,  to  the  bav  of  St 

«o  - 


V*ierl:l 


154 


BLUNT's    AUCltlC'AX    COAST  I'liOl. 


C/irlos ;  all  this  piece  of  coast  i"  bordered  with  keys  >vhich  lie  about  i'our  miles 
off  froBi  the  main  land;  the  whole  is  clear  with  the  exception  of  a  sand  bar, 
which  runs  off  from  what  is  called  Boca  Quarazotc,  which  is  an  opening  formed 
by  twool'  the  above-mentioned  keys,  and  is  distant  from  Tampa  21  miles.  On 
this  bar  there  are  2  fathoms  water,  and  all  along  the  coast  you  will  have  6  fa- 
thoms at  five  or  six  miles  from  it,  so  that  there  is  no  danger  in  keeping  in  with 
it  by  the  lead. 

Carlos  Bay  is  a  lar:re  entrance  made,  in  the  coast  in  which  are  emptied  various 
rivers,  whoe  mouths  are  cove,  ed  hv  man}  keys  a.. d  shoals,  wl.ich  leave  between 
them  channels  more  or  less  wide  ;  the  nortlieriimost  is  calle(!  Fiinr  GaS|  ar,  and 
has  6  feet  water;  the  next  called  Boca  Griin<le,  is  the  dee|  est,  haxing  14  leet 
water.  This  bay  is  only  good  for  vessels  ot  8  feet  draught,  by  the  little  shelter 
which  it  affords  in  gales  in  winter;  and  although  the  holding  ground  is  good,  jrou 
are  obliged  to  look  for  the  bends  of  the  bay  to  shelter  you  from  the  wind  which 
blows.  The  tide  rises  two  feet,  and  when  the  wmd  is  off  shore,  it  runs  with 
great  velocity. 

The  key,  whose  north  extreme  forms  Boca  Cautivo,  is  the  same  whose  south- 
ern extreme  forms  what  is  calleil  Boca  Ciega,  which  is  the  opening  which  said 
key  forms  to  the  northward,  and  Sanibal  to  the  southward.  This  opening  ex- 
tends to  shoal  Lagoon,  which  communicates  by  various  shoal  channels  with 
Bay  St.  Carlos. 

Key  Sanibal  has  good  anchorage  on  its  south  part  in  3  fathoms,  sheltered 
from  all  winds.  This  anchorage  of  Sanibal  is  known  by  a  palm  tree,  two  leagues 
to  the  i^uthward  of  it,  and  is  the  only  one  you  see  on  the  whole  coast.  To 
anchor  in  Sanibal,  it  is  necessary  to  run  with  care,  and  the  lead  in  hand,  that 
you  may  avoid  the  shoal  bottoms  which  run  off  four  miles  from  Sanibal,  and 
the  keys  S.  E.  of  it. 

From  Sanibal  the  coast  runs  S.  E.  by  E.  eleven  leagues  to  Point  Largo,  of 
Key  Roman.  This  piece  of  coast  is  clean,  having  3  fatnoms  at  two  miles  from 
the  land.  Point  Largo  sends  out  S.  and  S.  E  of  it  a  Shoal,  which  runs  from 
it  seven  miles,  and  the  coast  bending  U  the  eastwaru  forms  a  bay  of  13  feet 
water,  in  which  vessels  of  light  draft  may  enter  and  find  shelter  from  winds  any 
way  on  the  northern  board. 

The  coast  from  hence  runs  S.  S.  E.  twenty-five  leagues  to  Point  Tancha, 
which  is  the  southernmost  promontory  of  the  Peninsula  of  East  Florida. 

The  whole  of  the  coast  has  regular  and  clean  soundings,  whence  the  lead  is 
the  best  guide. 


Vessels  hound  to  New-Orleans,  Mobile,  and  Pensacola. 

The  only  three  points  of  destination  on  this  part  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico ;  to 
0  to  either  of  which  it  is  best  to  make  well  to  the  eastward  of  them  respective- 
y,  when  coming  from  any  place  S.  E.  of  ihem,  that  is  when  you  have  the  winds 
easterly  which  is  the  wind  which  predominates  here  ;  but  if  you  come  from  the 
westward  of  them,  you  have  no  other  resource  but  to  beat  to  windward  from 
that  point  of  the  coast  which  you  have  made,  and  the  greater  or  less  distance 
of  it,  according  as  you  are  best  accommodated,  with  respect  to  the  season,  the 
quality  and  size  of  your  ship,  &.c. 

The  making  to  the  eastward  of  your  destination  is  necessary  to  be  more  or 
less  distant,  according  to  the  cot  fidence  and  security  you  have  in  the  situation 
of  the  ship,  so  that  bound  uito  the  Balize,  you  will  look  for  soundings  in  the 
meridiHn  of  29"  Sty,  or  thereabouts :  and  if  bound  to  Pensacola  or  Mobile,  in 
the  meridian  of  Cnpe  St.  Blass. 

Should  you  strike  soundings  in  lat.  29°,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  a  while,  so  as  to 
make  it  E,  northerly  of  it,  that  is,  to  make  its  bearing  W.  southerly,  to  prevent 
falling  in  to  the  southward  of  its  parallels,  especially  in  winter,  when  it  is  best  to 
run^  Heading  for  the  middle  of  the  Chandeliers :  in  this  route  you  find  no  regu- 


..jeaasat: ^-.^  . 


11LV5T  S   AM£HICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


155 


larity  in  soundings,  as  whatever  tlie  parallel  may  be,  you  will  as  often  get  tnord 
water  as  less ;  nevertheless,  from  20  fnthonis  down,  the  soundings  arc  very 
regular  ;  and  from  the  meridian  of  Pensacola  westward,  to  the  souti.em  liniiti 
of  the  Chandeliers,  you  will  get  10  fiithoins,  ten  miles  from  the  coa»t ;  iVom 
Pensacola  eastward,  you  have  ten  fathoms  at  four  miles  from  the  coast,  and  25 
fathoms  at  ten  or  twelve  miles. 

But  as  navigating  for  the  Balize  you  may  want  an  observed  lotitudr,  and 
have  it  so  cloudy  and  foggy  as  to  impede  making  the  l.ind,  in  sue'  riirumstances, 
or  to  run  for  it  in  the  night,  the  sou  dings  will  serve  as  a  secure  ^^uiffo,  for  which 

J^ou  must  recollect  that  navi?ating  to  the  westward,  if  you  find  40  to  jO  lathoms, 
oose  mud,  sticking  to  the  touch,  mixed  at  times  with  small  hiark  and  white 
sand,  it  is  a  certain  signal  that  you  arc  in  the  parallel  of  the  Balize,  and  from 
that  depth  to  less  water  you  will  al  wnys  find  the  same  quality  of  soundings :  but 
if  from  40  to  50  fathoms  to  less  waier,  you  get  bottom  of  fine  sand,  with  very 
little  mud  or  without  it,  you  will  be  in  the  parallel  of  between  the  BhIIzc  and 
Breton  Key  or  Island :  if  you  get  small  »vliite  san<l,  yon  are  in  the  parallel  of  said 
key,  and  if  coarse  sand  and  snail  shells,  you  willbe  in  a  parallel  between  said 
key  and  Ciandeiic-s ;  and  if  you  get  coarse  sand,  with  gravel,  small  stones,  and 
large  shells,  you  will  oe  in  front  of  the  Chandeliers.  From  the  Balize  to  the 
westward,  the  bottom  i-^  of  ^.ind  alone,  so  that  those  from  the  southward  who 
look  for  the  Balize,  sanil  alone  will  be  a  signal  that  they  are  west  of  it. 

When  navigating  N.  W.  and  north,  from  the  getting  40  or  50  fathoms  sand, 
and  in  diminishing  (he  bottom  or  depth,  the  quality  of  soundings  does  not  vary 
till  in  10  or  12  fathoms  you  are  to  the  southward  of  the  Balize  :  but  if  in  this  N. 
or  N.  W.  route,  you  have  crosfsd  mud  or  ooze,  and  entered  in  10  or  12  fathoms, 
you  find  sand,  then  it  is  a  signal  that  you  have  crossed  the  mouth  of  the  Balize, 
and  drawing  in  with  Breton  Island,  and  the  Chandeliers.  The  better  to  explain 
these  soundings,  we  shall  place  them  in  form  of  a  table. 


In  the  parallel  of  the  Balize.  1      Loose  mud,  sticky  io  the  touch, 

Crossing  these  sounJin^s,  you  cross  S         mixed  at  timts  with  small  fine 
this  parallel.  )  black  and  white  sand. 


In  parallel  of  between  the  Balize  and  }    Fine  sand  with  very  little  mud,  or 
Breton  Island  or  Key.  >  sand  alone. 


In  the  parallel  of  Breton  Island. 


Fine  white  sand. 


'"  ""  "'Id'.:'  cCdelif^"'"  '^•""''  \  Co.r,e  s,„d  and  snail  sOelh. 


,    .,  11  1      <>  ii.    ^1       1  !•  >  Coarse  sand  with  gravel,  small  stones, 

In  the  parallels  of  the  Chandeliers.     ^  ^^^  larie  shells. 


West  of  the  Balize,  the  bottom  is  sand  alone. 


When  you  come  in,  looking  for  the  Balize,  either  in  its  parallel,  or  that  of  ttie 
Chandeliers,  you  must  take  care  not  to  get  foul  of  the  land  at  night,  but  main- 
tain your  position,  in  15  or  20  fathoms,  at  anchor  or  underweigh  ,  but  if  you  do 
not  wish  to  delay  for  more  safety,  you  may  stretch  in  towards  the  Balize,  to  an- 
chor in  10  or  12  fathoms  outside  the  bar. 

If  the  running  in  for  the  land  has  been  in  the  parallel  of  the  Chandeliers,  as 
soon  as  you  get  10  or  12  fathoms,  you  will  steer  S.  S.  W.  trying  to  maintain 
this  depth  without  danger  of  running  aground,  or  among  shoals,  as  is  shown  by 
the  following  breakage  in  the  soundings  :— 

In  this  S.  S.  W.  route  there  is,  in  the  middle  of  soundings,  a  good  mark  to 


150 


ttLVST  S   AMEUICAX    COAST    l'ILUT« 


know  the  place  of  the  ship,  which  is  m  soon  as  as  you  arrive  in  a  parallel  wHli 
the  S.  end  of  the  Chandeliers,  which  is  as  far  up  as  Alcatraces,  the  depth  besins 
to  augment  to  12,  14,  and  18  fathoms,  which  is  athwart  with  the  Poza.  This 
augmentation  ceases  as  soon  as  you  arrive  abreast  of  Passe  I'Outre.  where  you 
find  anew  the  10  fathoms  ;  this  kno\v'lcd;;e  is  of  importance  in  looking  for  the 
Balize  with  security,  so  as  not  to  nass  \o  the  southward  of  it. 

In  running  as  above,  l)e  careful  not  to  get  into  less  than  ten  fathoms,  when 
stretching  from  F'.  or  S.  or  from  S.  to  W.  because  from  this  depth  to  less,  you 
cannot  weather  the  Balize  with  the  wind  at  east,  and  you  have  no  opportunity 
for  running  for  the  road  of  Naso  as  follows  : 

Placed  in  10  fathoms  water,  in  a  S.  E.  gale  (and  no  appearance  of  the  wind's 
ceasing)  and  getting  into  less  water,  you  have  the  resource  of  navigating  to  the 
northward,  sounding  continually  to  maintain  S  or  10  fathoms,  so  as  to  coast  the 
Chandeliers,  and  you  will  know  you  have  passed  the  northernmost  point ;  if  you 
loose  the  oozy  soundings,  sometimes  mixed  with  white  shells,  which  is  found  off 
the  Chandeliers,  and  finding  fine  white  and  black  sand,  you  may  steer  W. 
and  run  in  10,  8  and  6  fathoms  to  anchor,  under  shelter  in  the  road  of  Naso,  as 
the  atmosphere  is  cloudy ;  in  such  weather  you  can  discover  nothing,  and  to  get 
to  this  ancnorage,  there  is  no  other  guide  than  the  lead  ;  but  if  you  can  see  the 
land,  you  will  easier  get  to  the  anchorage,  as  you  have  only  to  double  the  spit 
of  sand  which  runs  on  the  N.  E.  end  of  the  Chandeliers,  and  on  which  the  sea 
breaks,  with  easterly  or  southeasterly  winds. 

This  convenient  resource  will  be  better,  if  embraced  as  soon  as  you  consider 
the  passing  or  weathering  the  Balize  doubtful ;  as  here  you  have  your  choice  of 
water  from  3  to  7  fathoms,  sheltered  from  winds  in  3  fathoms  from  N.  E.  and  in 
7  fathoms  from  winds  from  E.  round  to  the  southern  board  to  S.  W.  It  is  also 
necesi^ary  to  advise,  that  as  soon  as  the  winds  haul  round  to  between  W.  and  N. 
you  should  lose  no  time  in  getting  out  of  this  roadstead,  as  the  water  will  fall 
from  4  to  6  feet. 

It  is  a  good  rule  in  running  for  the  Balize  to  get  soundings  in  any  parallel  be- 
tween 29°  10'  and  29°  30'  or  35, to  get  into  25  fathoms,  from  whence  the  Ba- 
lize will  bear  S.  W.— from  25  fathoms,  in  any  parallel  between  29°  10'  and  29° 
85',  the  Balize  bears  S.  W.  and  by  steering  that  course  you  will  hit  the  Balize, 
about  the  N.  E.  Pass. 

I  am  suspicious  of  a  shoal  or  shoals  near  the  edge  of  soundings,  in  about  lat. 
26'  N.  having  once  passed  quickly  through  two  coloured  patches,  in  about  that 
latitude,  and  was  clear  of  the  appearance  before  I  had  time  to  sound.  They 
looked  like  shoal  coral  ^  Is,  and  I  passed  between  them  with  a  ship  drawing 
17  1-2  feet.  I  had  sounded  in  45  fathoms  water  shortly  before,  and  had  no  bot- 
tom shortly  after. 


directions  for  vessels  hound  from  the  Mississippi  through  the  Gulf, 

On  leaving  the  Balize,  your  best  way  is,  in  winter,  between  the  months  of 
October  and  March,  to  keep  well  to  the  eastward,  say  E.  by  S.  (as  in  this  time 
the  trades  blow  mostly  from  E.  N.  E  and  N.  E.)  until  on  soundings  on  the  coast 
of  East  Florida,  by  which  you  may  make  a  free  wind  all  the  way  to  the  Tortu- 
gas ;  but  in  the  other  parts  of  the  year,  you  will  do  quite  as  well  to  make  a  direct 
course,  as  you  may  make  sure  of  some  beating  to  get  to  them,  and  by  keeping 
along  netir  the  edge  of  soundings,  you  will  have  a  set  in  your  favour  of  15  or  18 
miles  per  day.  You  may  double  the  Tortugas  within  3  miles,  by  which  you  will 
as  soon  as  you  leave  soundings,  strike  into  an  E.  b'S.  current  of  li  knots,  from 
September  to  March,  and  2  knots  from  March  to  September.  I  have  doubled 
the  Tortugas  in  very  dark  nights,  by  sounding  every  hour,  and  taking  care  not 
to  get  less  than  forty  fathoms. 

Every  vessel  bound  through  the  Gulf,  on  leaving  the  river,  should  avoid  get- 
ting too'fast  to  the  southward,  for  you  will  meet  with  the  trade  wind,  and  by  that 


BLUNT's   AMEltlCAV   COAST   TILOT, 


137 


loint;  if  you 


means  lengthen  your  passages.  If  the  wind  will  permit,  you  should  steer  E.  S. 
Ft.  which  course  will  carry  you  soon  enough  into  the  trade  wind.  If  you  can 
get  soundings  to  the  northward  of  the  'I'ortugas,  so  much  the  helter,  but  you 
should  cume  no  nearer  in  than  r>0  fathoms,  and  should  then  steer  south,  and  it* 
you  should  find  the  water  shoaler  in  this  course  you  should  keep  a  little  to  the 
westwanl  until  you  find  it  deeper.  On  leaving  the  Tortugas,  the  current  sets 
rapidly  over  towards  the  Colorados  ;  to  this  the  greatest  attention  must  be  paid, 
to  avoid  danger. 

On  leaving  80undin:;s  oiT  the  Tortugas,  with  the  wind  to  the  northward  of  N. 
E.  by  E.  keep  on  your  larboard  tack,  and  make  the  Island  of  Cuba  ;  stand  no 
nigher  in  than  to  raise  it  so  distinctly  as  to  know  it,  by  which  you  will  keep  in  the 
whole  force  of  the  current,  which  allow  in  the  low  stage  one  and  a  half,  and  in 
the  high  two  knots  per  hour,  «lue  east,  as  far  as  li  leagues  west  of  Double-headed 
Shot  Keys.  [  A  light  house  is  erected  on  Bush  Key  (one  of  the  Dry  Tortugas) 
for  description  of  which  see  page  141.] 

After  making  the  land  which  will  probably  be  in  sight  of  the  Pan  of  Matan- 
z,is,  should  the  N.  E.  wind  continue,  beat  along  the  Cuba  shore,  and  make  the 
Double-headed  Shot  Keys,  taking  care  not  to  fall  in  with  them  in  the  right-time, 
as  they  are  very  low,  and  the  soundings  do  not  run  more  than  a  hundr^id  fathoms 
off  them  on  this  side  or  point. 

On  approaching  the  Florida  side,  the  eddy  currents  and  tides  setting  througk 
the  different  channels  in  the  reef  and  inlets,  are  very  variable,  and  frequently  ex- 
tends a  greater  distance  into  the  Gulf  than  mariners  are  aware  of,  insumuch  that 
the  most  expert  of  the  Bahama  pilots  are  often  deceived  in  the  night.  Gene- 
rally a  strong  S.  W.  eddy  |)revails,  and  the  transition  from  the  stream  to  the 
eddy  is  sometimes  \ery  visible,  by  causing  what  those  pilots  call  rip  raps ;  at 
other  times  it  is  not  to  be  discovered  ;  a  strict  look  out  is,  about  this  part,  par- 
ticularly recommended ;  and  if  beating  on  that  shore  in  the  night,  st^ml  four 
hours  off  and  two  on,  and  when  you  can  come  up  with  the  S.  E.  corner  of  the 
Florida  shore,  and  an  E.  N.  E.  wind,  stand  off  until  you  have  day-light.  [See 
page  140,  which  explains  the  pro|)riety  of  this  remark.] 

From  these  cbservations  it  certainly  appears  most  advisable  to  incline  to  the 
Cuba  shore,  and  from  the  Fan  of  Matanzns,  if  the  wind  be  favorable,  to  make 
the  Double-headed  Shot  Keys,  or  if  scant,  to  beat  up  towards  Point  Jacko ; 
there  is  no  danger  hereabouts,  before  you  stretch  across  to  Double-headed  Shot, 
and  from  thence  shape  your  course. 

A  corroboration  of  these  facts  will  appear  manifest,  when  there  are  an  average 
of  eight  vessels  lost  annually  on  the  Florida  shore,  and  the  captains  have  reck- 
oned themselves  on  the  Bahani.i  ?idf ,  and  only  three,  for  several  years,  lost  on  the 
latter.  I  would  also  recommend,  when  passing  througii  the  Gulf,  to  have  the 
anchor  clear  for  letting  go  at  a  moment's  warning,  should  they  find  themselves 
in  soundings,  and  not  perfectly  satisfied  with  their  reckoning,  to  anchor  immedi- 
ately, which  can  only  be  attended  with  loss  of  (he  anchor  and  cable,  and  is  no 
consideration  when  the  vessel  might  thereby  >>e  saved. 

After  getting  as  far  as  12  leagues  to  tht.  westward  rf  Double-headed  Shot 
Keys,  the  current  hauls  to  the  northward,  and  abreasi  of  the  Shots,  it  runs  N. 
E.  in  the  low  If,  and  in  the  high  stage  2i  knots. 

After  leaving  Double-headed  Shot  Keys,  make  a  N.  E.  course  to  latitude  24° 
36',  when  you  may  try  to  make  the  islands  and  keys  on  the  Great  Bahama 
Bank,  for  a  fresh  departure  ;  from  the  sight  of  which  steer  N.  by  W.  to  lat. 
27"  50'  then  N.  by  E.  to  29°  when  you  will  be  clear  of  every  thing.  But  in 
doubling  the  Tortugas  with  the  wind  easterly,  beat  along  the  Florida  shore, 
standing  no  nigher  than  to  raise  the  land  as  far  as  Old  Matacumbe.  From 
thence  make  a  good  stretch  off  so  as  to  fetch  clear  of  every  thing  on  the  next 
tack.  The  ea-.t  part  of  the  reef  off  the  Florida  coast  lies  in  longitude  SO^  6'  W. 
When  in  the  narrows  from  between  Orange  keys  and  Carysford  reef  to  between 
Maranilla  and  *Hiilsborough  inlet,  the  current  runs  nearly  north,  in  the  low 

*  Good  water  may  be  found  on  IliUshorovgh,  about  10  miles  north  of  the  inlet,  just  back  of 
the  ridge,  by  digging  from  10  to  12  feet.  Fish  are  to  be  found  in  great  abundance  inside  of 
the  miet,  along  side  of  the  mangmvf's :  and  plentv  of  shell  bait  on  the  beach  in  the  river. 


:)J 


158 


blunt's  amebican  coast  pilot. 


2|  knots,  and  in  the  high  stage  of  the  water  4  knots,  .'rem  about  10  or  12 
leagues  to  the  westward  of  Double-headed  Shot  Keys  to  lat.  25  the  current 
bends  from  east  to  north,  and  when  in  this  space  you  must  allow  its  natural 
bend,  vhich  is  in  a  parallel  line  with  the  Florida  coast.  Marinilla  reef  lies  in  lat. 
27*  49',  longitude  79^  10',  and  Canaveral  Shoals,  on  the  coast  of  J'lorida,  lie  in 
lat  29"  20',  longitude  80  19 ,  tj.«^  laMt-r  of  which  is  dangerous,  and  the  former  is 
only  a  tide  race,  but  still  to  be  avoi.it-d. 

The  Gulf  stream  acls  in  the  same  rnnnner  as  a  river,  only  on  a  larger  scale  : 
and  the  old  channel  of  Bahama  and  Santaren  channel,  when  running  to  leeward, 
has  a  proportionable  effect  upon  the  stream  in  the  same  maimer  as  a  small  river 
emptying  into  a  large  one  has  upon  the  current  of  the  larger  river,  by  driving  it 
to  the  other  side.  The  wind  also  has  a  great  effect  to  drive  the  current  to  the 
lee-shore.  This  may  be  seen  every  day  in  the  Mississippi :  on  the  lee-siHe  the 
current  runs  stronger  than  in  a  calm,  and  on  the  weather-side  weaker,  yet  you 
will  find  the  lee-side  to  have  the  strongest  eddy,  though  very  narrow,  and  near 
in  shore ;  and  the  Gulf  Stream  acts  in  the  same  manner,  for  which  proper  allow- 
ances should  be  made. 

From  the  curr  nt  frequently  varying  in  course  as  well  as  rapidity,  and  the 
eddy  currents  likewise,  various  and  uncertain,  the  ablest  navigators  an<i  pilots 
are  often  deceived,  after  passing  the  Havanna,  and  getting  up  as  high  as  the  Pan 
of  Matanzas,  from  which  a  departure  is  generally  taken. 

In  the  winter,  3'ou  are  liable  to  have  very  heavy  gales  from  about  N.  when  it 
will  be  best  to  keep  the  Florida  shore  on  board,  when  you  will  have  smooth 
water,  as  fur  a?  Carysfordreef;  but  should  you  be  caught  on  the  Cuba  shore, 
with  one  of  these  gales  blowing  dead  onshore,  you  will  harHly  be  able  to  clear 
the  land' on  your  larboard  tack,  when  if  you  tack  ship  and  take  (he  current  two 
points  on  your  lee-bow,  and  can  carry  as  much  sail  as  to  go  through  the  water  3 
knots,  you  may  make  sure  of  gaining  ofTtlte  land,  although  you  may  make  2^  or 
3  points  lee- way,  and  lie  but  two  points  off  the  land. 

The  Salt  Key  Bank  and  coast  of  Cuba,  from  Point  Ycacos  to  Double-headed 
Shots  makes  a  deep  bay,  and  the  Cuba  shore  is  very  foul  for  3  or  4  leagues  off  the 
land  ;  in  case  you  are  caught  here  in  a  heavy  norther,  ynur  only  chance  is  to  run 
up  the  Old  channel  of  Bahama,  or  on  the  Salt  Key  Bank. 

After  being  sure  of  getting  to  the  northward  of  the  N.  W.  point  of  Little  Ba- 
hama Bank  reef,  if  you  fear  you  are  far  to  the  westward,  you  will  do  well  to  haul 
more  easterly  to  clear  the  shoals  of  Canaveral ;  but  if  you  are  not  in  sight  of  the 
Florida  shore,  in  lat.  26^  80',  you  can  have  no  danger  from  Canaveral  shoals,  in 
steering  N.  by  Bi  after  passing  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  bank,  you  must  (if  yott 
wish  to  keep  in  (he  force  of  the  stream)  steer  N.  to  latitude  30~^.    [See  page  140.] 

Point  Ycacos  is  low,  and  the  whole  coast  of  Cuba  to  the  eastward  is  bordered 
by  reefs  and  keys,  consequently  dangerous. 

There  is  sometimes  a  strong  current,  or  set  from  the  Tortugas,  or  rather  the 
S.  W.  ^  oint  of  soun<lings,  which  sets  right  over  to  the  Colorados. 

"  I  once,  in  19 '2,  found  a  set  S.  S.  W^  of  near  24  knots,  but  when  once  as  far 
to  the  eastward  as  the  Tortugas,  you  will  be  sure  of  the  regular  set  of  the  Gulf." 


'  Directions  for  *yLoh\\e  Vomt, 

Tliose  ofi'  Mobile  should  rerollect  the  necessity  of  getting  an  offing  as  soon  as 
there  are  appearances  of  a  gale  on  shore,  either  to  weather  'he  Balize,  or  which 
is  better  to  take  in  time  the  road  of  Naso,  as  destruction  is  inevitable  if  you  come 
to  anchor  outside  Mobile  bar  during  the  gale. 


*  A  light-houfe  is  erected  on  Mobile  Foint.  The  lantern  is  55  feet  above  the  ocean  level, 
and  shows  a  Jixed  light,  which  may  be  seen  13  or  14  miles  oflFin  good  weather,  S.  5"  E.  from 
iheliRht,  Ave  miles  distant,  y«(i  have  3  fathoms  on  the  bar.  The  east  end  of  Dauphin  Island 
will  then  bear  N.  N.  \V.  3-4  W.  and  Sand  Island  (just  above  water)  will  be  on  th«  middle  of 
Dauphin  Island.  ' 


r. 


k^ 


\. 


m  about  10  or  12 
lat.  25  the  current 
t  alluw  its  natural 
•ilia  reef  lies  in  lat. 
t  of  J'lorida,  Jie  in 
s.  and  the  former  is 

on  a  larger  scale  : 
unning  to  leeward, 
er  as  a  small  river 
river,  by  driving  it 
i  the  current  to  the 
)n  the  lee-siHe  the 
B  weaker,  yet  you 
'  narrow,  and  near 
hich  proper  allow- 

rapidity,  and  the 
igators  and  pilots 
IS  high  as  the  Pan 

about  N.  when  it 
will  have  smooth 
»  the  Cuba  shore, 
'  be  able  to  clear 
:e  Ihe  current  two 
•ough  the  water  3 
I  may  make  2i  or 

J  Double-headed 
'  4  leagues  off  the 
'  chance  is  to  run 

lint  of  Little  Ba- 
ll do  well  to  haul 
lot  in  sight  of  the 
laveral  shoals,  in 
on  must  (if  you 
[See  page  140.] 
ward  is  bordered 

IS,  or  rather  the 

38. 

when  once  as  far 
set  of  the  Gulf." 


offing  as  soon  as 
Jalize,  or  which 
ibleifyoucome 


■e  the  ocean  leve), 
er,  S.  5°  E.  from 
•f  I'atiphin  Island 
e  on  th«  middle  of 


41 


blunt's 


AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


159 


■an   ^^"^ 

ft    '^SJ 


f5 
St 


i 


Ik 


-4 


l 


Strangers  bound  to  Mobile  Bay,  or  approaching  the  Point,  should  keep  in  10 
fathoms  water,  until  the  light-house  bears  north,  to  avoid  the  dangerous  sands 
lying  to  the' eastward,  and  the  shoals  off  Pelican  and  Sand  Islands  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  Bar. 

In  running  in  for  the  land,  should  you  make  it  to  the  westward  of  the  bar,  it 
will  appear  broken,  as  it  consists  of  small  islands,  which  occasion  several  open- 
ings. More  to  the  westward  the  land  is  very  level.  Dauphin  Island,  on  the 
western  point  of  the  bay,  appears  high  and  bluff;  Mobile  Point,  low  and  sandy, 
with  a  single  tree  on  the  extremity. 

On  steering  in  with  the  light  house  northwesterly,  you  will  suddenly  shoal 
your  water  from  7  or  S  fathoms  to  3  fathoms.  Then  having  the  bearing,  &c.  as 
before  stated,  should  necessity  compel,  steer  N.  N.  W.  until  abreast  of  Sand  Isl- 
and on  your  larboard  hand,  two  cables  distKnt.  On  the  last  course,  after  crossing 
the  bar,  you  will  have  6,  7  and  8  fathoms,  the  deep  water  being  close  to  the  east 
breakers.  From  the  last  position  the  point  will  bear  nearly  due  north — steer  up, 
keeping  it  a  little  open  on  your  starboard  bow,  and  pass  it  at  a  cable  and  a  half 's 
distance. 

Afler  leaving  Mobile  Point,  to  run  up  the  bay,  steer  N.  by  W.  night  and  day, 
as  there  is  no  Hanger  in  the  wa^.  When  you  have  run  about  25  miles,  you  will 
then  be  in  10  feet  water.  Here,  as  there  are  stakes  in  the  channel,  you  had  better 
come  too  for  a  river  pilot,  which  you  will  have  to  send  your  boat  on  shore  for,  to 
the  distance  of  about  four  miles,  the  town  being  in  sight. 

In  running  for  the  land  during  night,  your  soundings  will  be  mud  till  you  ap- 
proach, when  you  will  find  sand  and  mud  mixed,  then  sand  in  8  fathoms. 

[Pelican  and  Sandy  Islands  are  only  one,  but  in  very  high  tides  they  are  sepa- 
rated, appearing  like  two  islands,  as  laid  down  on  the  chart.]  High  water,  9 
o'clock,  A.  M.  daily. 


SAILING  DIRECTIONS, 

For   Vessels  bound  to  Pensacola, 


.'<>■'■ 


Vessels  coming  from  the  eastward,  should  keep  in  7  fathoms  water  until  the 
*light-house  bears  by  compass  N.  by  W.  when  they  can  stand  in  for  the  bar, 
until  in  3^  fathoms,  which  is  the  shoalest  water  on  the  bar  at  low  water,  with 
the  light  bearing  N.  by  W.  After  arriving  on  the  bar,  agreeably  to  the  above 
directions,  you  must  then  steer  N.  W  until  the  S.  W  end  of  St.  Rosa  Island 
bears  E.  by  S.  and  the  light-house  N.  4  W.  when  tliey  can  steer  for  the  light 
until  within  the  Island,  and  haul  up  into  the  passage  and  steer  for  the  bay,  free  of 
danger. 

The  above  directions  .are  applicable  for  large  vessels  coming  from  the  west' 
ward,  with  the  exception  that  they  need  not  keep  in  more  than  5  fathoms, 
water. 

Small  vessels  drawing  not  more  than  14  feet,  can  bring  the  light  to  bear  N.  l 
W.  and  steer  for  it  in  the  night  until  within  half  a  mile  of  it.  where  they  can  an- 
chor with  an  off-shore  wind.  But  if  they  have  a  fair  wind,  they  can  steer  E.  by 
N.  until  sheltered  by  St.  Rosa  Island,  where  they  can  anchor  in  a  good  harbour 
until  day-Ught,  as  it  is  every  where  excellent. 

The  ebb  tide  sets  S.  W.  and  the  flood  N.  E.  which  should  be  carefully  ob- 
served Uy  all  vessels  coming  in,  as  the  ebb  will  carry  you  on  the  Caucus  shoal, 
and  the  flood  sets  directly  in  over  the  Middle  Ground. ' 

On  the  appearance  of  a  gale  on  shore,  when  off  Pensacola,  you  must  try  for 

*  The  light'house  is  built  on  a  bluff  which  you  leave  on  the  larboard  iiand,  entering  the  har> 
hour.  The  bluff  is  49  feet  from  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  the  lantern  eleval^^'<  30  feet,  con- 
taining ten  lamps,  and  shows  a  revolving  lightf  completing  a  revolution  in  three  minutes. 


ulunt's 


AMERICAN    COAST   riLOT. 


an  ofrais,  as  you  are  greatly  exposed  outside  the  bar.  A  S.  W.  course  made 
good  will  weather  the  Baii/e. 

The  bay  of  Pensacola  is  a  good  port,  having  at  low  water,  on  the  bar,  21  feet 
water.  The  eastern  point  of  its  entrance  is  called  Point  Siguenza,  and  is  the 
western  point  of  the  island  of  Santct  Rosa,  which  extends  E.  by  N.  and  W.  by 
S.  14  leagues,  and  connpletely  fronts  the  whole  Bay  of  Pensacola  ;  it  is  so  low 
that  the  seas,  in  gales,  wash  its  top,  and  is  no  where  more  than  one-fourth  or 
one-third  of  a  mile  wide.  1'here  are  some  red  bluH's  on  the  main  coast,  which 
are  higher  than  the  rest  of  i(,  and  one  cf  which,  and  the  largest  of  all,  is  on  the 
eastern  side  of  Pensacola  bay ;  and  in  or  tiear  the  front  of  the  entrance,  are 
three  red  bluffs,  adjoining  each  other,  and  called  the  Barancas.  On  the  beach 
under  these  bluffs,  lies,  or  did  lie,  a  half-moon  battery,  called  also  Barancas ; 
and  the  pilots  reside  in  a  few  small  houses  right  over,  and  a  little  east  of  the 
fort.  After  passing  the  bar,  the  entrance  to  the  bay  is  between  these  Barancas 
and  Point  Siguenza,  and  runs  nearly  E.  and  W.  '1  his  j-.orl  would  be  difficult  to 
recognize,  were  it  not  for  the  light-house  »nd  bluffs,  nhich  consisting  of  three 
adjoining  each  other,  cannot  be  easily  mistaken. 

A  shoal,  called  the  Angel,  runs  ofl  to  the  W.  of  Point  Siguenza,  and  has  two 
small  sand  keys  on  it,  level  with  the  water's  edge  ;  this  shoal  stretches  to  the 
southward  about  1^  mile,  and  a  bank  of  only  12  feet,  hard  sand,  runs  out  one 
mile  farther  south,  and  runs  to  the  eastward,  traversing  the  whole  coast  as  far  as 
the  isle  of  St.  llosa ;  and  the  western  part  of  this  shoal  forms  the  bar  of  Pensa- 
cola, which  is  one  mile  wide  ;  and  after  crossing  it,  you  soon  fall  into  5,  6  and  7 
fathoms  water.  The  bar  is  not  the  only  difficulty  in  entering  l^ensacola,  as  there 
is  on  the  inner  part,  and  as  high  up  as  Point  Siguenza,  a  shoal  only  10  feet,  very 
stee'  and  distant  from  the  point  near  one  mile,  <'md  consequently  runs  out  to 
mid-i.iiannel  of  the  entrance. 

To  enter  this  port,  you  must  do  it  to  the  westward  of  the  shoal,  and  observe 
what  follows,  which,  with  a  plan  of  the  port,  will  give  you  a  correct  idea  of  its 
configuration. 

The  bar  runs  out  to  the  southward  of  Point  Siguenza  about  two  miles  ;  whence 
in  coming  fiom  the  eastward  it  is  necessary  to  keep  as  much  as  7  fathoms  till  you 
bring  the  light-house  to  bear  N.  by  W.  when  you  may  stand  in  for  the  bar  until 
in  3?  fathoms,  as  before  directed.  Pensacola  is  decidedly  the  best  harbour  in 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  has  local  advantages  over  every  oilier  place. 


Directions  for  Apalaclie  Bay. 

When  the  south  point  of  St.  George's  Island  (which  lies  to  the  westward  of 
Apalache  Bay)  bears  north,  two  leagues  distant,  yon  will  be  in  2^  fathoms.  From 
these  bearing  and  depth  of  water,  steer  N.  N.  W.  or  N.  by  W.  until  you  make 
Flag  Island,  which  is  low  and  sandy,  and  cannot  be  discovered  from  the  deck 
to  be  an  island  at  a  greater  distance  than  i  wo  miles.  Bring  the  east  point  of 
that  island  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  and  steer  directly  for  it  until  you  get  within  20 
yards  of  it,  which  course  will  carry  you  over  the  bar,  where  there  are  1 1  feet 
water  at  high  tide,  close  to  the  north  breaker.  The  entrance  then  bei  ig  fairly 
open,  steer  for  the  point  of  St.  George's  Island,  or  between  the  point  of  that 
island  and  St.  Vincent,  you  will  have  3  fathoms  when  oyer  the  bar,  deepen- 
ing gradually,  and  between  the  islands  of  St  George's  and  St'.  Vincent,  you  have 
8  fathoms  when  fairly  in.  When  past  the  point  of  St,  George,  haul  to  the  east- 
ward, and  keep  from  one-half  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant  from  St. 
George's  Island.  The  water  will  shoal  in  this  course  to  2  fathoms,  soft  bottom, 
when  you  had  better  come  to  anchor  and  wait  for  a  pilot,  which  you  will  obtain 
hy  hoisting  the  usual  signal. 

When  off  the  entrance  in  6  fathoms,  no  inlet  can  be  discovered  between  the 
two  islands,  but  the  place  may  be  known  by  the  bearings  of  the  land,  and  the 
following  marks :  from  the  south  point  of  St.  George's  Island  to  Flag  Island  the 
shore  runs  N.  N.  W.  It  is  a  low  sand  beach,  heving  a  hummock  of  bushes 
about  one  mile  from  the  west  point  of  St.  George's  Island,  to  the  westwar*^  of 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


161 


.  course  made 

he  bar,  21  feet 
nza,  and  is  the 
N.  ami  W.  by 
1 ;  it  is  so  low 

one-fourth  or 
in  coast,  which 
f  all,  is  on  the 

entrance,  are 

On  the  beach 
tlso  Barancas ; 
tie  east  of  the 
hese  Barancas 

be  difficult  to 
isting  of  ihree 

I,  and  has  two 
:retches  to  the 
runs  out  one 
coast  as  far  as 
bar  of  Pensa- 
nto  5,  6  and  7 
acola,  as  there 
!  10  feet,  very 
ly  runs  out  to 

I,  and  observe 
tct  idea  of  its 

liles ;  whence 

homs  till  you 

the  bar  until 

it  harbour  in 


westward  of 
loms.  From 
lil  you  make 
om  the  deck 
last  point  of 
et  within  30 
arc  II  feet 
bei  ig  fairly 
toint  of  that 
)ar,  deepen- 
it,  you  have 
to  the  east- 
it  from  St. 
soft  bottom, 
will  obtain 

etwecn  the 
id,  and  the 
Island  the 
:  of  bushes 
estwar*^  of 


which  are  four  umbrella  trees,  the  two  easternmost  standing  6  or  8  feet  apart, 
the  top  connected,  and  at  a  distance  having  the  appearance  of  one  tree.  To 
the  west  of  these  trees  is  a  hummock  of  Palmetto  trees,  which  stand  nearly  on 
the  extreme  west  end  of  St.  George's,  which  are  considerably  larger  than  the 
hummock  of  bushes  before  mentioned,  and  these  when  distant  so  far  that  you 
cannot  see  the  beach  that  bearing  N.  E.  appears  a?  separated  from  the  other 
land,  and  to  form  an  island  by  itself,  but  when  bearing  N.  W.  appears  connected 
with  the  island  of  St.  Vincent,  which  is  thickly  wooded  on  the  eastern  end. 
This  hummock  is  however  on  St.  Geoi-^e's. 

The  south  point  of  the  islund  of  St.  George's  is  thicMy  wooded,  and  can  be 
discerned  when  in  10  fathoms  bearing  N.  E. 

When  Flag  Island  hears  N.  N.  W.  3  to  4  miles  diitant,  there  are  5  fathoms 
which  continue  with  these  bearings  until  you  are  within  two  miles  of  that  island, 
then  it  shoals  gradually.  Should  you  have  a  foul  wind,  and  be  obliged  to  turn 
to  the  windward,  keep  the  island  of  St.  George's  on  board,  when  fairly  to  the 
westward  of  the  south  point,  the  water  is  good  near  the  beach,  and  soundings 
regular. 

Directly  off  the  south  point  of  St.  Georges,  there  is  a  dangerous  shoal  of  2  or 
3  leagues  extent.  .^ 


W* 


;ii 


•  Ix. 


s 


v> 


s 


■!■ 


v.- 


•f'-:» 


J'N 


*        .H 


*■ 


%! 


21 


162 


BLUNI'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


y. 


CHAP.  IZ. 

BERMUDAS  OR  SUMMERS'  ISLANDS. 

1 

.    General  instructions  for  making  the  Bermuda  Islands. 

Latitude.         Longitude, 

Saint  George's  town  at  the  eastern  end,     .     .     .     3.2°  22'  N.       64°  33'  W. 

Wreck  Hill^iat  the  western  end, 32     1 8 j  64    50 

S.  W.  Freakers, 32     10  64    45 

Varialion  3°  W. 

High  water  full  and  change  ^t  St.  Gf^orgie's,  one  quarter  past  8.  Common 
tides  rise  about  4  fet't :  hut  on  the  sprliij^s,  or  in  };al(s  of  wind,  frequently  to  6  and 
7  feet.  The  floods  in  the  oiWv.^  set  to  the  N.  E.  and  ehh  to  the  S.  W. ;  but  near 
the  shore  they  run  in  various  directions.  These  islands  being  surrounded  with 
innumerable  shoals,  much  precaution  is  necessary  in  approaching  them.  The 
principal  dangers  lie  to  the  westward  and  northward,  and  extend,  from  the  land, 
between  3  and  5  leagues,  in  a  due  west  line,  from  their  south-western  point  (round 
northerly)  to  a  N.  N.  E.  one,  from  David's  head,  their  eastern  extreme.  The 
remainder  of  the  coast,  forming  their  southern  and  eastern  boundary,  may  be 
approached  in  every  part  within  a  mile,  and  in  several  places  to  less  than  half 
that  distance. 

On  account  of  the  prevalence  of  westerly  winds  in  the  Atlantic,  it  has  become 
the  general  practice  for  all  vessels  bound  to  the  Bermudas  to  make  the  land  from 
the  westward,  by  getting  into  their  latitude  about  the  68th  degree  of  longitude, 
and  then  steering  an  east  course  till  they  become  visible. 

When  running  down  a  parallel  for  Bermudas,  with  a  large  wind,  and  not 
making  the  land  towards  night,  but  expecting  to  be  near  it,  no  vessel  in  this  situ- 
ation ought  to  lie  to,  but  should  rather  turn  to  windward  under  an  easy  sail  until 
daylight,  because  of  a  probable  current  which  is  variable,  and  it  is  known  that 
vessels  have  been  carried  by  it  out  of  their  reckoning  to  the  distance  of  many 
leagues,  and  brought  them  unexpectedly  among  the  rocks.  The  land  not  being 
high  (for  Gib's  Hill,  the  highest  land  in  the  islands,  is  but  little  more  than  180 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea)  it  cannot  be  seen  at  any  great  distance  from  a 
small  vessel ;  add  to  this,  the  thick  haze  that  frequently  prevails  here,  particularly 
in  fine  weather,  renders  making  the  land  somewhat  difficult,  and,  at  times,  preca- 
rious, unless  the  latitude  be  accurately  ascertained,  for  instances  have  happened 
of  vessels  missing  the  islands ;  and,  after  a  fruitless  sei  vch,  steered  for  the  Ame- 
rican Coast,  in  order  to  take  a  fresh  departure  for  running  down  the  latitude 
again. 

The  rocks  and  islands  of  Bermudas  lie  N.  E.  by  E.  and  S.  W.  by  W.  about  9 
leagues,  and  in  breadth  about  5.  Wreck  Hill  forms  the  West  Point,  and  St.  Da- 
vid's Head  the  East.  Round  the  West,  N.  W.  and  North  sides,  it  is  a  continued  and 
very  dangerous  ledge  of  rocks,  beginning  at  the  Long  Bar,  the  south  part  of  which 
lies  6  miles  W.  S.  W.  from  Gib's  Hill :  tending  then  N.  E.  it  is  called  the  Chvh- 
Heads,  which,  off  Wreck  Hill,  lies  9  miles  from  the  shore  :  the  ledge  hence  rounds 
to  E.  N.  E.  and  joins  the  North  rock,  which  is  always  above  water,  and  lies  N. 
N.  W.  12  miles  from  Catharine  Point.  From  the  North  Rock  the  reef  rounds 
E.  and  E.  S.  E.  and  ends  in  MilVs  Breaker,  which  dries  at  low  water,  and  lies  at 
N.  £.  6  miles  from  Catharine  Point,  and  N.  N.  E.  from  St.  David's  Head.   The 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


16S 


DS. 


ids. 

Longitude, 
640  33'  Yf, 

64     50 

64    45 
m  30  W. 
8.     Common 
?ntly  to  6  and 
W. ;  but  near 
'ounded  with 

them.  The 
om  the  land, 

point  (round 
treme.  The 
iry,  may  be 
ss  than  half 

;  has  become 
he  land  from 
of  longitude, 

id,  and  not 
1  in  this  situ- 
isy  sail  until 
known  that 
ice  of  many 
nd  not  being 
)re  than  180 
ance  from  a 
particularly 
mes,  preca- 
happened 
>r  the  Ame- 
the  latitude 


'1 


W.  about  9 
and  St.  Da- 
ntinuedand 
irt  of  which 
[the  Chub- 
ence  rounds 
and  lies  N. 
reef  rounds 
and  lies  at 
lead.   The 


outer  edge  of  this  ledge  is  close  and  compact,  leaving  no  passage  through  it  for 
ships,  excepting  a  small  one*  near  Wreck  Hill,  another  by  the  North  Rock,  and 
one  round  Catherine  Point.  Round  the  outer  ed;j"  of  this  ledge  is  a  margin  of 
soundings,  of  from  on«to  two  miles  broad,  hciviti^  from  9  to  14  fathoms  on  it ; 
there  are,  likewise,  soundin[:;9  for  two  miles  from  the  shore  round  the  N.  E.  East 
and  S.  E.  sides  of  the  island  ;  but,  as  the  water  here  is  deeper,  it  would  be  pru- 
dent for  those  who  suspect  themselves  near  the  longitude  of  Bermudas  in  the 
night,  or  in  thick  weather,  while  between  the  latitudes  of  32°  and  32°  40',  to 
keep  a  lead  constantly  going;  being  assured,  that,  at  l4  fathoms,  they  will  strike 
the  ground  in  time  to  avoid  danger.  The  lead  might  be  incased  with  tallow,  for 
the  greater  certainty  of  striking  ground  :  this  precaution,  I  am  persuaded,  would 
prevent  many  of  the  wrecks  that  constantly  happen  here. 

There  is  a  rocky  bank  lying  from  S.  S.  W.  to  S.  W.  from  Gib's  Hill,  or  (S. 
W.  part  of  Bermudas)  from  3  to  5  leagues  distant :  various  depths  from  17  to  45 
fathoms  are  on  it,  and  on  others  large  ships  have  grounded. 

The  latitude  of  32P  8'  N.  being  two  miles  to  the  southward  of  every  danger, 
seems  best  adapted  in  fine  clear  weather  for  this  purpose,  and  will  bring  you  in 
sight  of  Wreck  Hill,  which  being  of  a  conic  form,  and  having  a  volcanic  appear- 
ance, is  the  more  remarkable.  The  moment  this  hill  becomes  shut  in  with  the 
other  lands,  or  is  no  lunger  distinguishable,  you  will  pass  the  only  danger  to  be 
apprehended  off  the  southern  part  of  these  islands,  called  the  S.  W.  breakers, 
(which  do  not,  howevf.,  lie  more  than  li  mile  from  the  land)  and  ma^  then  im- 
mediately close  in  'Ath  and  steer  along  the  south-eastern  shore,  within  a  mile, 
till  you  have  got  tne  length  of  Castle  Harbour,  or  brought  David's  Head  to  bear 
about  N.  by  E.  where  you  must  wait  to  receive  your  pilot,  taking  care,  during 
that  time,  not  to  be  drifted  to  leeward,  as  the  currents  generally  set  to  the 
eastward. 

Should  you  meet  with  a  contrary  wind,  or  the  weather  be  extremely  hazy,  be- 
fore you  have  got  sight  of  land,  it  will  be  prudent  in  the  night  not  to  stand  to  the 
northward  of  32°  4'  or  5' ;  and  if  the  wind  should  be  inclining  to  the  southward, 
I  would  recommend  not  beyond  32°. 

If  bound  to  Bermudas  from  England  or  from  any  part  of  Europe,  I  should 
recommend  a  direct  course  to  be  steered  as  long  as  the  winds  permit;  but  the 
moment  they  become  contrary,  to  get  to  the  southward  into  the  trades,  and  then 
run  down  the  remaining  longitude,  taking  care  to  haul  to  the  northward  in  suffi- 
cient time  to  reach  the  latitude  of  32°  8',  about  the  68°  of  longitude,  and 
then  proceed  as  above  described ;  but  should  fair  winds  continue  the  whole  pas- 
sage, the  land  may  be  made  with  equal  safety  from  the  eastward,  by  steering  for 
them  in  the  latitude  of  32°  18'  N.  which  is  two  miles  to  the  southward  of  Da- 
vid's Head,  their  south-eastern  extreme ;  and  off  which  Head  there  is  no  danger 
beyond  half  a  mile,  care  being  taken  not  to  come  to  the  northward  of  that  lati- 
tude until  you  have  brought  the  Head  to  bear  W.  S.  W.  on  which  bearing  it  may 
be  approached  with  safety  till  within  one  mile  thereof,  or  till  you  receive  your 
pilot. 

In  the  course  of  making  the  land  from  the  eastward,  should  the  wind  becomr 
contrary,  or  the  n-eather  prove  dark,  hazy  and  tempestuous,  come  not  during  ♦.iie 
niglit  to  the  northward  of  32°  or  32°  6',  in  which  latitude,  if  you  should  be  ^jund 
to  have  run  past  the  islands,  you  must  proceed  as  before  described,  in  '^Aaking 
them  from  the  westward. 

Ships  bound  from  the  southern  ports  of  America,  within  the  GuK  Stream, 
should  steer  well  to  the  southward,  perhaps  as  much  as  S.  S.  E.  iKitil  they  get 
within  3  or  4  miles  of  the  latitude  of  Cape  Hatteras,  and  then  s^^c.  S.  E.  by  E. 
until  they  get  into  the  latitude  of  32°  5'.  Thus  you  will  avoid  crossing  the  Gulf 
Stream  where  it  is  very  broad,  and  its  direction  far  to  the  eastward,  and  pass  it 
wherf>  II  affects  your  latitude  more  than  your  longitude  ;  and,  of  course,  be  of 
less  consequence  to  the  ship's  nickoning  ;  and,  by  steering  thence  so  far  to  the 
southward  us  S.  E.  by  E.  you  will  fall  into  the  latitude  of  Bermudas,  at  4  or  5 
degrees  of  longitude  to  the  westward. 

You  should  by  no  means  run  for  these  isb^ds  unless  sure  of  your  latitude  ; 
and  always  make  them  from  the  S.  W.  if  possible,  looking  out  m  time  for  th« 


t^ 


164 


JJLIJM  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


I 


land  ;  as,  ouiiig  to  the  set  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  and  the  general  tendoucy  of  th« 
nirrents  to  the  eastward,  ships  from  the  coast  of  America  will  almost  always  be 
fur  ahead  of  their  reckoning. 

Having  ascertained  your  latitude,  and  being  well  to  the  westward,  get  into  the 
parallel  of  Qi'^  5',  and  steer  due  East;  this  course  will  bring  you  to  the  island, 
passing  about  4  miles  clear  of  the  south  end  of  Chub-heads,  a  very  dangerous 
shoal,  lying  across  the  west  end,  about  eight  miles  from  the  land,  with  not  more 
than  12  feet  on  it  at  low  water,  as  well  as  the  S.  VV.  breakers,  which  lie  about  one 
mile  and  a  half  S.  S*  W.  from  the  southernmost  land,  being  the  shoalest  part  of  a 
ledge  of  rocks  of  considerable  length,  lying  parallel  with  the  shore.  Should  the 
wind  in  the  night  incline  to  the  northward,  keep  in  32^  7'  N.  but,  if  to  the  south- 
ward, in  32°  2'.  " 

You  must  avoid,  by  all  means,  running  in  the  night,  without  having  a  good  ob- 
servation the  preceding  day,  and  being  pretty  sure  of  your  longitude.  Follow 
these  directions,  and  you  will  first  make  Wreck  Hill  (which  is  high  land  on  the 
western  extreme  of  the  islands)  and  the  land  trenching  from  it  to  the  S.  E. 
Having  passed  the  S.  W.  breakers,  the  land  li«!9  about  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W. 
having  danger  no  more  than  hulf  a  mile  off,  and  that  generally  visible  ;  you  may 
run  safely  along  shore  at  a  mile,  until  you  pass  Castle  Harbour,  which  is  easily 
known  by  the  castle  on  an  island  on  the  starboard  hand.  You  should  bring  too 
off  the  eastern  jpoint  of  this  harbour,  and  wait  for  a  pilot,  who  will  soon  come  off, 
and  carry  Jrou  mto  St.  George's  Harhour.  But,  should  you  be  pressed  for  time, 
or  the  pdot  not  come  off,  you  may  haul  round  by  the  breakers,  after  having 
passed  the  islands  which  form  the  south  part  of  Castle  Harbour,  into  St.  George's 
Road,  bringing  on  the  following  marks: 

A  high  island,  next  to  the  N.  E.  part  of  the  small  ones  off  Castle  Harbour,  has, 
at  its  eastern  extreme,  a  bluff  rocky  point,  called  St.  David's  Head,  having  break- 
ers off  it  about  half  a  mile  :  the  northernmost  land  in  sight  after  you  haul  round 
St.  David's  Head,  is  called  St.  Catharine's  Point ;  bring  this  point  to  bear  W.  N. 
W.  and  St.  David's  Head  S.  i  W.  and  you  >\ill  be  in  as  good  a  birth  as  any  in 
the  road,  with  7  or  8  fathoms  water  ;  but,  in  every  part  of  these  roads  you  must 
be  guided  by  the  eye  where  to  drop  your  anchor,  clear  of  foul  ground,  which  is 
every  where  easily  seen,  owing  to  the  clearness  of  the  water,  and  the  whiteness 
of  the  sand,  where  the  anchorage  is  safe. 

In  case  you  have  been  driven  to  the  eastward  of  the  islands  (a  situation,  how- 
ever, which  you  are  to  avoid  with  the  utmost  care)  you  may  run  for  them  in 
latitude  Sfi,'^  14'  N.  which  will  bring  you  to  them  5  or  6  miles  to  the  southward  of 
St.  David's  Head,  for  which  you  may  haul  up  upon  making  the  land ;  but  you 
are  not  to  run  in  till  you  are  far  enough  to  the  S.  W.  to  follow  the  directions  be- 
fore given  for  coming  from  the  westward,  should  you  make  sail  for  Bermudas 
from  any  part  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  or  without  it. 

Great  allowance  is  recommended  for  being  to  the  eastward  of  your  reckoning, 
and  try  to  fall  into  the  parallel  of  latitude  above  mentioned,  in  longitude  70°  or 
710W. 

As  the  soundings  do  not  extend  more  than  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  land,  on 
the  southern  side  of  the  islands,  a  correct  latitude,  and  a  good  look-out,  together 
with  a  strict  attention  to  these  Instructions,  is  absolutely  necessary. 


Other  directions  in  coming  from  the  loestward. 

On  coming  from  the  westward,  the  S.  W.  points  of  the  land  ought  to  bear  E. 
N.  E.  before  you  come  within  four  leagues  of  the  land,  when  you  may  steer  di- 
rectly for  it  without  danger.  The  breakers,  on  the  south  side,  always  show 
themselves,  so  that  a  ship  may  safely  approach  within  gun-shot  from  the  S.  W. 
end  to  the  S.  E.  and,  when  getting  to  the  eastward  of  the  castle,  round  into  St. 
George's.  Do  not  go  farther  to  the  northward  than  to  keep  Cooper's  Island  open 
within  St.  David's  Head  till  you  take  a  pilot,  and  the  subscriber  engages  no  ship 
will  ever  strike,  if  this  be  attended  to.  THOMAS  LEAN. 


BI.HNT's  AMKRITAN  coast  I'll-O'J. 


165 


'III 

1.-        I    I      "     '; 


#■ 


«>' 


CBAP.   HI. 


(■> 


DESCRIPTION   OF  THE 


BAHAMA  BANKS,  ISLANDS,  AND  CHANNKLS. 


Under  the  general  denomination  of  the  Bahamas,  are  included  all  those  groups 
which  appear  on  the  banks  between  the  Matanilla  Bank  on  the  N.  W.  and  the 
Square  Handkerchief  on  the  S.  E.  The  principal  islands  are  situated  on  those 
remarkable  flats  called  the  GREA.T  and  LITTLE  BANKS  of  BAHAMAS, 
which  are  divided  by  the  channel  of  Providence,  and  of  so  much  ipiportance 
did  we  consider  a  correct  description  of  its  navigation,  being  the  passage  for 
vessels  from  the  ports  of  the  United  States  to  those  of  the  Mexican  sea,  as  to 
induce  the  author,  in  1820,  to  send  the  sloop  Orbit,  under  the  direction  of  E. 
C.  Ward,  U.  S.  Navy,  to  make  surveys. 

The  banks  are  generally  of  sand,  with  coral.  The  islands  are  low,  flat,  and 
interspersed  with  porous  rocks,  of  fresh  water,  but  the  supply  is,  however,  scan- 
ty, it  being  obtainable  only  from  pools,  formed  during  the  ruins,  or  from  wells 
dug  in  the  sand,  into  which  the  sea-water  filters.  In  the  woods  are  found  the 
wild  hog  and  the  Agouti. 

Within  the  jurisdiction  of  the  Bahamas  are  therefore  included  the  Great  Ba- 
hamas and  Abacd  Isles,  New  Providence,  Andros,  the  Berry  Isles,  *Eleutheraor 
Ethera,  Guanuhani,  otherwise  St.  Salvador  or  Cat  Island,  Watland's  Island, 
Kxuma,  tYuma  or  Long  Islands,  the  Crooked  Islands,  Mayuana,  the  Caycos, 
the  Inagues,  and  many  smaller  groups. 


Description  of  Little  Bahama  Bank,  with  its  Islands. 

The  Hole-in-the-Wall,  which  is  the  soiuliernmost  extreme  of  the  Island  of  Aba- 
ro,  bears  N.  N.  W.  from  Egg  Island,  7i  leagues  distant,  and  the  two  form  the 
mouth  of  what  is  called  the  Northeast  Channel  of  Providence ;  and  the  Hole-ln- 
the^Wail,  with  Stirrup's  Key,  forms  the  eastern  mouth  of  what  is  called  the 


*  Eleuthe-a  or  Ethera,  to  the  northward  of  the  Exuma  Keys,  is  one  of  the  largest  islands 
on  the  bank.  It  is,  as  shown  on  the  Chart,  of  very  irregular  shape,  and  being  on  the  edge  of 
the  Grand  Bank,  its  eastern  shore  is  washed  by  the  blue  and  fathomless  ocean,  while  on  the 
west,  is  the  white,  shallow  and  smooth  water  of  the  bank.  "  The  force  of  the  Atlantic  waves 
has  pierced  a  magiiiiicent  arch  through  the  rock  of  the  island,  which  is  the  greatest  curiosity 
of  the  archipeiugo.  The  island  is  moderately  high,  and  the  cast  side  is  very  foul,  having  a 
reef  called  the  Mabaster  Rocks,  and  other  dangers. 

Harbour  Island  is  close  'o  the  north  end  of  Eleuthera,  and  has  a  settlement  on  the  south 
side  of  the  Inland. 

The  current  isles  to  thr  westward  of  Harbour  Island,  are  RusseU  Island,  Royal  Island,  and 
Egg  Island.  They  are  h  ivv,  and  between  them  and  Ethera  is  a  channel  through  which  small 
vessels  may  pass.  On  the  north  a  bank  extends  about  two  miles  out,  with  9^,  11,  IS,  and 
13  fathoms  on  it.  Fro'a  Egg  Island,  (the  most  western)  the  anchorage  off  New  Providence 
bears  S.  30'^  W.  true, '/  leagues  distant. 

t  Yuma  or  Long  Island  is  about  17  leagues  in  kngtb,  from  S.  E.  to^  N.  W. 


166 


BLUNT  S    AlVIRRICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


i 


> 


Northwest  Chanmi  of  Providcnct;  and  this  N.  W.  Channel's  mouth  is  formed  by 
the  Great  Isaac,  and  the  westttrn  extremity  of  the  Ishmd  of  Great  or  Grand 
Bahama.  About  one  mile  west  of  the  N.  K.  point  of  Abaco,  is  u  fine  bay,  call* 
ed  Hurricane  IJay,  with  watcir  en()u;;h  for  sm;ill  vessels. 

After  j)asHiu^  the  Hi)le-iu-tlie-\V.ill,  the  land  is  indented,  both  on  its  surface 
and  heaclj,  and  ttnids  nearly  ("ast  and  west,  forming  a  slope,  the  highest  land  to 
the  eastward.  Two  njiies  W.  by  S.  from  it,  lies  the  southernmost  point  of  the 
Island  of  Abaco,  and  Liltle  iJaliania  Bank. 

Prom  the  soiith  point  of  Great  Abaco  to  Rock  Point,  the  bearing  and  distance 
are  N.  W.  by  W.  16  miles ;  the  latitude  of  the  latter  is  exactly  26°,  from  Rock 
Point  to  Key  Gorda,  on  which  fresh  water  may  be  found,  is  N.  W.  by  W.  \  W. 
9  miles.--  Along  the  edge  of  thelJankrN.  VV.  i  N.  from  Key  Gorda,  in  an  ex- 
tent of  6  leagues,  is  a  continued  aeries  of  keys  and  reefs,  and  within  these  on 
the  bank  is  Moose  Island.  In  this  distance  you  will  have  a  dangerous  rocky 
shore,  on  the  west  end  of  the  bank.  About  half  way  between  Moose  Island  and 
the  S.  E.  end  of  Great  Bahama  Island,  are  Burrow's  Keys. 

The  Island  of  Abaco  is  divided  into  two  parts  by  a  small  shoal  channel,  and 
when  it  is  seen  to  the  eastward,  it  forms  two  pretty  high  lumps.  There  are 
commodious  aiichoraKcs  on  the  western  ;uid  southern  edges,  well  sheltered  from 
the  sea,  one  of  which  is  on  the  western  i)art  of  Abaco,  which  from  the  Hole-in- 
the-Wall  bears  N.  W.  ami  terminates  in  a  bay,  !>  miles  from  the  point. 

This  bay,  with  w  iiid:-,  at  N.  W.— N.  N.  K.— E.  and  even  S.  E.  affords  a  good 
shelter  witli  a  deptii  of  Tj,  8,  and  9  fatlioms  water,  and  although  the  wind  at 
S.  E.  is  along  sliore,  it  makes  no  sea,  and  it  is  excellent  holding  ground. 

In  the  bottom  of  this  bay  is  tiie  channel  which  divides  the  Island  of  Abaco 
into  two  part*",  and  a  nuniljur  of  houses  are  erected  there  by  people  from  New 
Providence,  who  v-ome  to  cut  wood.  This  anchorage  is  safer  in  winter  than  In 
summer,  as  during  the  latter  you  have  constant  stjualls  from  the  southward,  from 
which  the  lightning  often  does  harm,  and  eartlKjuakes  arc  frequent,  which  drive 
off  the  people,  who  retire  to  Providence  and  Eleuthera. 

From  the  west  |)art  of  this  bay,  a  chain  of  Keys  extends  20  miles  W.  by  N. 
after  which  you  will  see  the  east  end  (»f  the  Island  of  Great  Bahama,  which  con- 
tinues on  nearly  the  same  direction  for  19  leagues,  and  the  whole  of  these  two 
spaces  of  the  bank  are  foid  with  reefs  and  rocks,  as  far  as  the  n^lddle  of  Great 
Bahama,  from  whence  it  is  clean  and  has  a  smoom  bottom. 

The  S.  E.  side  of  GREAT  BAHAMA  ISLAND,  which  is  wholly  bordered 
with  a  reef,  forms  a  bight,  which  is  14  leagues  in  length,  and  very  dangerous 
with  strong  S.  W.  winds.  AVithin  the  S.  E.  or  more  properly  the  South  Point 
there  is  fresh  water;  and  at  this  point,  in  lut.  26'^  2!;',  long.  70°  40',  is  a  narrow 
spot  of  good  anchoring  ground,  having  10  or  11  fathoms.  Towards  this  coast 
there  is  generally  ati  outset  from  the  Florida  Stream  on  the  west,  which  howe- 
ver varies  according  to  the  wind,  fcc.  and  at  all  times  it  is  necessary  to  give  the 
west  end  of  Great  JJahama  a  good  birth,  not  only  on  account  of  its  shoals,  for 
if  the  wiitd  should  hang  to  the  southward,  you  would  be  embayed. 

On  the  western  edge  of  the  LIl'TLE  BAHAMA  BANK,  are  several  keys 

and  dangerous  reefs.     Off  the  N.  W.  point  of  Great  Bahama  Island,   are  the 

Wood  and  Indian  Keys,  at  a  league  to  the  northward  of  which  is  Sandy  Key, 

and  at  two  leagues  to  the  N.  by  W.  of  Sandy  Key  is  Memory 

Rock,  which  stands  about  half  a  league  within  the  edge  of  the 

Mcnory  Rock-  N.N  E  ^=^"'^'  '^"^  appears,  when  bearing  N.  N.  E.  as  represented  in 

a  milts.''  ■  ■  ■  the  margin. 

From  Memory  Rock  the  edge  of  the  bank  tends  to  the  N.  W.  and  at  four 
miles  from  the  rock,  is  the  soutii  end  of  a  reef  which  is  even  with  the  water's 
edge;  this  reef  is  two  leagues  in  length,  and  is  succeeded  by  several  others,  to 
the  distance  of  three  leagues  more  to  the  north.  Between  these  and  the  Mata- 
nilla  Reef,  the  ground  a|)pears  to  be  clear,  with  soundings  on  the  bank  in  the 
northern  half,  18,  19,  and  20  fathoms. 

In  the  extreme  western  part  of  the  Great  Bahama  there  is  exsellent  anchor- 
age, from  whicli  the  soundings  of  the  bank  run  off  five  miles.  N.  N.  W.  from 
the  west  end  of  Great  Bahama  lies  a  small  clean  key  called  Tombado. 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


167 


is  formed  by 
eat  or  Uranu 
fine  bay,  call- 

n  its  surface 
ghest  land  to 
;  point  of  the 

and  distance 
^,  from  Rock 
by  W.  }  W. 
da,  in  an  ex- 
lin  these  on 
;erou9  rocky 
su  Island  and 

channel,  and 
There  are 
jcltered  from 
the  Hole-in- 
nt. 

Ifords  a  good 
1  the  wind  at 
lund. 

nd  of  Abaco 
e  from  New 
inter  than  in 
hward,  from 
which  drive 

s  W.  by  N. 
,  which  con- 
)f  these  two 
lie  of  Great 

ly  bordered 

dangerous 

South  Point 

is  a  narrow 

this  coast 

t^hich  howc- 

to  give  the 

shoals,  for 

leveral  keys 
id,  are  the 
Sandy  Key, 
is  Memory 
edge  of  the 
resented  in 

nd  at  four 
he  water's 
others,  to 
I  the  Mata- 
ank  in  the 

snt  anchor- 
L  W.  from 


The  west  edge  of  tliis  bank  runs  N.  N.  W.  to  latitude  ti?'^  fjO'  N.  and  is  clean 
nnd  regular,  without  citbtjr  keys  or  danger,  if  you  exorcise  the  Iradsmen;  all 
the  other  keys  to  the  northward  of  Tombado,  Tu*  on  this  side  of  the  bank  N.  E. 
from  it,  so  that  there  is  no  danger  in  sailing  on  w  ofl'  this  pait  of  the  bank,  called 
Matanilla.  When  there  is  a  sea  from  the  N.  K.  on  the  N.  W.  point  of  this  bank, 
in  that  part  of  it  in  25°  SO'  and  40  fathoms,  it  makes  at  (lood  tide  a  race,  and 
whirlpoolfl  produced  by  its  encountering  with  the  (Jiilf  current,  so  as  to  cause  it 
to  break  heavy,  and  makes  it  appear  like  shoal.s  but  tliere  are  none  ;  on  the  con- 
trary, getting  to  the  southward  of  this  race,  you  will  have  smooth  sea,  and  may 
keep  in  15,,  16,  14,  13,  8,  and  ^  fathoms  water;  tlie  bottom  is  sand,  gravel,  and 
some  stones,  upon  which  you  may  occasionally  anchor.  On  this  bank  the  wa- 
ter is  green,  and  you  cannot  see  the  bottom  mitil  in  2j  and  3  t'athoms,  upon 
which  or  in  the  green  water,  there  never  has  been  any  current  experienced,  there- 
fore the  Gulf  Stream  dops  no  more  than  touch  along  llie  edge  of  soundings. 

The  Matanilla  should  be  avoided  on  a  flood.  It  has  been  represented  in  the 
old  charts  as  extending  to  27°  50'  N.  It  has  been  sought  for  in  that  parallel,  and 
not  having  been  found  there,  presumed  not  to  exist,  but  still  we  think  it  should 
be  avoided.  The  OiiniT  entered  on  the  bank  in  lat.  20°  45'  N.  long.  79°  12' W. 
from  thence  she  steered  north,  ten  leagues,  leaving  Memory  Rock  to  the  east- 
ward, and  the  Western  Reefs  to  the  westward:  from  the  lat.  of  27°  15',  long. 
79°  12',  she  steered  N.  E.  twenty-seven  miles,  having  20,  16,  15,  13,  10,  and  on 
the  centre  of  the  bank,  4j  fathoms ;  from  thence  to  the  eastern  edge,  the  water 
deepened  to  23  fathoms,  and  then  no  bottom,  lat.  27°  33',  long.  78°  42'.  The 
"  Derrotero  de  las  Antillas"  says,  "  It  lias  been  generally  believed  that  this  bank  ter- 
minates in  a  great  reef;  but  the  truth  is,  that  there  is  none  :  only  the  shock  of  the 
conflicting  cur^pnts,  particularly  when  the  wind  is  from  the  northward  and  west- 
ward, causes  heavy  overfalls,  and  the  sea  to  break  much,  which  led  to  this  mistake." 

Capt.  Livingston,  in  adverting  to  this  passage,  says,  "  I  have  been  informed 
that,  after  Capt.  Laso  de  la  Vega  discovered  there  Avas  no  reef  on  the  Matanilla 
Bank,  the  ship  of  war  El  Angel,  of  80  guns,  was  sent  from  Havanna,  under  the 
command  of  Don  Dionisio  Aicola  Galiano,  to  examine  it,  and  did  so  most  mi- 
nutely as  far  as  27°  51',  and  found  no  danger  whatever.  I  have  also  been  told 
by  an  intelligcnt^baster  of  a  New-Providence  wrecker,  that  he  has  been  at  an- 
chor on  it,  and  that  it  is  all  perfectly  safe,  with  a  fine  sandy  bottom." 

The  DerroUrp  also  says,  "  When  there  is  a  N.  E.  swell  on,  upon  the  edges  of 
the  Matanilla  Bank,  and  in  25,''30,  and  40  ftithoms,  the  sea  is  jumbled  up  much 
by  the  shock  of  the  current,  and  so  forms  ovcrfalls^or  breakers,  which  seem  to 
indicate  a  shoal,  but  there  is  none ;  on  the  contrary,  to  the  southward  of  these 
overfalls,  you  may  find  smooth  water,  with  16,  15,  18,  and  7  fathoms." 

De  Maine,  who  surveyed  the  Bahama  Banks  by  order  of  the  British  govern- 
ment, says,  "he  struck  on  the  Matanilla  Bank,  and  knocked  off  his  keel."  We 
have  given  all  our  authorities,  and  submit  to  the  judgment  of  the  reader. 

The  extensive  chain  of  keys  which  borders  the  northern  side  of  tlie  Little 
Bahama  Bank,  extends  from  the  Elbow  Reef  34  leagues  W.  N.  W.  and  the  late 
delineations  prove  how  very  inaccurately  they  have  ever  before  been  represent- 
ed. The  bank  which  supports  these  keys  is  generally  shoal,  but  there^s  a  pas- 
sage between  them  and  the  Abaco  Isles,  having  from  4  to  2  fathoms,  which 
leads  to  the  centre  of  the  bank.  The  entrance  to  this  passage  is  close  to  the 
west  of  Great  Guana  Key,  and  the  Whale  Key  Rocks  in  lat.  26°  45',  long.  77°  6'. 
To  small  vessels  it  affords  excellent  shelter  between  the  keys  and  Abaco. 

But  it  is  to  be  noted,  generally,  that  a  very  heavy  swell  commonly  sets  upon 
this  coast;  and  it  is  never  advisable  for  a  stranger  to  advance  nearer  than  two 
leagues,  as  the  wind  is  mostly  from  the  eastward.  This  is  the  case  along  the 
whole  of  the  northeastern  keys ;  and,  therefore,  when  sailing  in  this  part,  whe- 
ther beating  up  or  running  down,  a  too  near  approach  is  both  unnecessary  and 
dangerous. 

We  now  return  to  ABACO,  (or  the  HOLE-IN-THE-WALL)  and  describe 
the  coast  to  the  north,  east,  &.c. 

The  N.  E.  point  of  the  Island  of  Abaco  lies  in  lat.  26°  17'  N.  long.  76°  57' W. 
The  first  island  to  the  northward  of  the  N.  E.  point,  is  Little  Harbour  Key; 
north  of  this,  Linnyard's  Key,  and  still  farther  north.  Little  Gttana  Key.    Linn- 


.  ^ 


» 


168 


BLUNT  S   AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


yard  and  Pelican  Keys  run  S.  by  W.  h  W.  and  N-  by  E.  <|  E.  The  distance 
between  Linnyard's  Key  and  Abaco  is  about  two  miles,  fine  sandy  bottom,  clear 
of  rocks,  and  good  anchorage,  and  bears  north  from  Uie  N.  E.  point  of  Abaco. 

On  the  N.  £.  side  of  the  Island  of  Abaco,  in  a  direction  N.  N.  W.  from  said 
point,  N.  W.  from  the  south,  and  S.  W.  by  S,  from  the  north  end  of  Linnyard's 
Key,  is  a  good  watering  place,  called  Weatherford's  well.  To  enter  the  channel 
leading  to  the  watering  place  which  lies  between  Linnyard's  Key  and  Little  Gu- 
ana Key,  you  must  keep  a  smell  island  which  forms  the  north  side  of  the  chan- 
nel (about  800  yards  from  Linnyard's  Key)  well  on  bttard  on  your  starboard  hand, 
and  you  will  pass  the  bar  in  3  fathoms,  and  find  );oud  anchorage  in  4  or  ft  fa- 
thoms water,  within  about  two  miles  west  from  the  north  point  of  Linnyard's 
Key.  This  channel  is  far  preferable  to  the  one  at  the  N.  E.  point  of  Abaco,  in- 
dependent of  its  safety  and  facility  in  letting  water,  as  you  may  approach  with- 
in a  mile  and  a  half  of  the  watering  place  with  3  fathoms,  or  come  immediately 
abreast  in  S  fathoms,  within  300  yards  of  Ihe  shore.  Wood  may,  be  had  in 
abundance  among  the  keys,  together  with  shell  and  scale  fish. 

The  water  breaks  where  there  is  danger,  with  the  wind  to  the  eastward,'  and 
it  is  advisable  to  have  a  lookout  aloft  while  going  in. 

The  eastern  part  of  the  coast  is  completely  iron-bound,  and  fragments  of 
wrecks  are  found  on  all  its  shores  and  keys. 

The  first  point,  south  of  the  N.  E.  point  of  Abaco,  is  called  Rocky  Point; 
S.  S.  W.  i  W.  from  this  point,  six  miles  distant,  is  a  reef  of  rocks  lune  miles  in 
length,  and  one  and  a  half  in  breadth,  running  in  the  same  direction  as  the  shore, 
inside  of  which  is  Cheeric  Sound,  which  makes  a  channel  between  the  two. 

After  passing  the  reef  which  lies  off  Rocky  Point,  the  water  is  bold  to  within 
half  a  raile  of  the  shore,  till  up  with  the  Hole-in-the-wall.  ^ 

The  land  between  Rocky  Point  and  the  Hole-in-the-wall  forms  a  deep  bay,  in 
which  you  must  be  careful  not  to  be  caught  with  a  south-easterly  winfl. 


Directions  for  Providence  Channel,  Bahama  Bank,  vnth  it.  Islands, 
Gulf  Passage,  and  iJte  Florida  Coast.  «> 

inpre^'erence  to  running  down  for  Rocky  Point,  (which  lies  about  two  miles 
S.  S.  V  .  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  Island  of  Abaco)  where,  if  fou  get  embay- 
ed, you  must  He  up  S.  S.  E^  and  S.  E.  by  E.  to  run  parallel  with  the  land,  it  is 
more  prud^t  lo  run  into  the  latitude  of  the  Hole-in-the-wall,  and  with  the  wind 
any  w:y  to  me  southward  of  cast,  it  is  presumed  every  nan  would  do  it. 

The  N.  E.  point  of  the  Island  of  Abaco  lies  in  latitude  26°  17'  N.  looKitude 
76°  57'  W.  When  in  its  latitude,  distant  nine  miles,  steer  S.  by  W.  }  W.  Iti! 
leagues,  which  will  carry  you  on  the  bank  off  the  Hole-in-the-wall,  in  about  14 
fathoms  water.  The  Hole-in-the-wall  lies  in  latitude  S5°  51'  N.  longitude  77° 
10'  W.  and  is  the  S.  E.  point  of  Abaco.  By  making  Rocky  Point  in  the  day- 
time, you  may  have  a  safe  run  on  your  S.  by  W.  |  W.  course,  12  leagues,  and 
then,  if  you  do  not  choose  to  run,  lav  by,  should  it  be  in  the  night.  The  gene- 
rality of  vessels  make  the  land  too  far  north  in  the  lat.  of  26*^  10'  or  26*3  20', 
because  an  opinion  prevails  that  the  land  thereabouts  is  soonest«een,  not  aware 
of  its  forming  a  bay  to  the  south  and  west.  If,  at  night,  thev  make  the  land  in 
the  parallel  of  26*^  10',  with  a  strong  breeze  from  the  N.  E.  they  are  so  close  in 
shore,  before  they  can  discover  the  land,  that  it  is  almost  impossible  to  clear  it, 
for  the  land,  in  that  latitude,  tends  a  little  to  the  westward,  forming  a  bay,  a  few 
miles  north  of  the  Hole-in-the-wall,  with  a  reef  of  rocks  outside,  in  one  part, 
half  a  mile  from  the  shore :  and  should  they  make  the  land  farther  north,  the 
danger,  with  a  scant  wind,  is  still  greater,  as  there  is  constantly  a  heavy  swell 
setting  on  the  shore. 

Vessels  should  run  down  their  longitude  in  the  parallel  of  25°  50',  or  from 
that  to  26*^,  and  not  further  north.  By  keeping  in  this  latitude  they  cannot  miss 
the  Hole-in-the-wall,  and  they  will  likewise  avoid  the  land  on  the  South  or  Har- 
bour Island  side.    See  note  to  page  165,  for  description  of  Harbour  Island. 

Oft  the  Ilole-in-thfl-wall  lies  a  bank,  in  a  S.  E.  direction,  7  or  8  miles  in  length, 


BLUMT  d  AMKRICAN  COAbT  PILOT 


J  69 


The  distance 
bottom,  clear 
tint  of  Abaco. 
W.  from  said 
of  Linnyard's 
^r  the  channel 
ind  Little  Gu- 
<!  of  the  chan- 
arbonrd  hand, 
in  4  or  5  fa- 
o(  Linnyard's 
of  Abaco,  in- 
iproach  with* 
;  immediately 
ly,  be  had  in 

eastward,'  and 

fragments  of 

tocky  Point; 
lune  miles  in 
I  as  the  shore, 
the  two. 
lold  to  within 

deep  bay,  in 
nnd. 


^^   Islands, 


ut  two  miles 
u  get  embay- 
he  land,  it  is 
vith  the  wind 
do  it. 

N.  loi^itude 
W.  IW.  Ifi 
,  in  about  14 
mgitude  77° 
in  the  day- 
leagues,  and 
The  gene- 
or  aeo  20', 
not  aware 
the  land  in 
so  close  in 
to  clear  it, 
bay,  a  few 
n  one  part, 
north,  the 
heavy  swell 

0',  or  from 
cannot  miss 
uth  or  Har- 
sland. 
is  in  length, 


;»ml  about  4  miles  broad  iu  the  middle,  ending  with  a  point  at  the  S.  K.  extronii! y. 

Souiulings  taken  on  the  Bank. 
llole-ii)-the-Wall,  W.  2  miles, 


do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 


W.  J^  N.  .»  niile!<, 

W.  7  miles, 

W.  by  S.  «  miles, 

W.  i  S.  3  miles, 

W.  A  N.  tJ  miles, 

W.  by  N.  S-i  miles, 

N.  W.  k  N.  :\  miles, 

N.  W.  by  N.  .'3  miles,  oil*  tiie  liauk. 


12  fathoms 

. 

1:.       do. 

fiO      do. 

no  bottom 

;>()      do. 

no  bottom 

1.)      do. 

li      do. 

1 1      do. 

15      do. 

Beyond  1.^  fathoms  there  were  no  soiiiuVmjjs  with  !i()  fatlioms.  You  may  know 
>vhen  on  this  bank,  as  the  water  ehaiiges  at  once  from  a  dark  sea  blue,  to  a  beau- 
tiful vivid  ureen,  is  more  agitated  by  a  i;>'ound  swell,  and  discoven^d  the  moment 
you  are  off,  particularly  with  a  S.  E.  wind,  at  which  time  the  above  soundings 
were  taken. 

The  Hole-in-the-wall  (or  llole-in-the-rock)  is  an  arch  through  the  land,  about 
10  feet  wide,  and  1  or  5  feet  bii?h,  the  bottom  nearly  one  foot  above  the  water, 
which  breaks  through  the  Hole,  and  may  be  seen  whtMi  bearing  S.  S.  W.  to  W. 
S.  W.  and  N.  N.  F..  to  E.  N.  E.  and  at  first  si^ht  apix'ars  like  a  sand  bluff,  but 
at  8  or  4  miles  distance  may  be  plainly  distin;?uished  to  be  an  arch-way  through 
the  land. 

South  from  {he  Hole-in  the-wall  100  yards  distant",  is  a  rock,  60  or  70  yards 
long,  hollowed  oiit  all  rcnmd  at  its  base  by  the  water,  which  may  be  doubled 
%vithin  half  a  mile. 

On  the  south  point  of  the  main  land  is  another  eorrespondinj:;  projection,  both 
which  appear  to  have  l»een  caused  by  some  convulsions  of  nature,  of  which  th«T 
whole  coast  bears  evident  marks.  It  is  covered  with  fragments  of  vessels,  spars, 
&ic.  and  the  western  side  has  a  complett^  harrier  of  stones,  formed  on  the  beach, 
above  the  tide  mark,  both  by  nature  and  tht^  S.  W.  gales,  which  at  times  blow* 
very  hard. 

Five  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  Hole-in-the-wall,  an»!  about  300  yards  from 
the  shore,  the  soundings  are  regular,  2}  and  3  fathoms,  and  deepening  rapidly 
as  you  leave  it. 

One  quarter  of  a  mile  off  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  island,  you  %vill  have  tww 
fathoms,  fine  level  sandy  bottom.  The  land  here  is  low,  and  covered  with  brush 
wood.     Here  the  ebb  sets  N.  E.  and  tide  rises  three  feet. 

Vessels  of  any  draught  oughr  not  to  approach  the  land  nearer  than  about  400 
y.irds,  where  they  will  lie  in  about  4  fathoms  water.  Inside  Hns  the  water  shoals 
suddenly  to  two  fathoms. 

Vessels  in  the  night,  or  in  foggy  wenlher,  may  ruii  (o  (he  westward,  when  in 
latitude  2J>°  HV  N.  and  soiuid  till  they  g(>t  in  14  or  1 5  fathoms,  and  be  then  sure 
to  clear  the  Hole-in-the-wall  by  a  west  course,  six  miles,  when  it  will  bear  north, 
and  then  rim  W.  4  N.  sixteen  leagues,  when  *Slirrup  Key  will  bear  south  six 
miles  distant.  Vess«'ls  running  down  in  tlie  latitude  of  the  Hole-in-the-wall,  will 
not  get  soundings  till  up  with  it. 

In  taking  your  dep  n-tin-e  from  the  Hole-in-the-wall  fm*  the  Great  Rahama 
Bank,  steer  west,  twelvi-  leagues,  and  if  (he  land  Ite  not  insight,  haid  W.  S.  W. 
or  S.  W.  by  W.  and  make  the  fBerry  l.slantls,  keep  down  past  these  islands,  and 

♦  Off  Stirrup  Key  there  is  good  anchorage  in  7  fathoms.  To  get  shelter  (Vom  strong  east- 
erly wiiulii,  in  order  to  repair  any  <hun:i^i'  or  to  obtain  water,  you  inny  anchor  to  the  west  of 
the  westernmost  island,  in  7i^  or  8  lathonis,  on  good  holding  ground. 

t  The  Berry  Islands  consist  of  nhout  tiiirty  large  keys,  with  innumerable  smaller  ones : 
(hey  lie  to  the  N.  I''.,  of  Andres  Isliind,  the  south-easternmost  of  which  is  Frozen  Key,  ami 
the  northernmost  Stirrup  Knj,  There  nre  soundings  nil  round  the  group;  and  20  fathomi* 
may  be  found  at  two  mites  from  any  of  the  keys.  The  siirfacn  of  the  bottom  is  sand,  and 
below  that,  a  kind  of  linicstunc.    The  isles  form  several  small  harbours,  whcr^i  water  an<l 

22 


170 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


keep  a  good  iook-out  for  the  westernmost  key,  called  Stirrup  J^et^,  before  men-- 
tioiicd,  which  lies  in  latitude  25°  48'  N.  and  longitude  78°  2'  W. 

Extract  from  the  log-book  of  the  surveying  sloop  Orbit. 

'•  In  approaching  the  Berry  Islands,  the  water  is  bold  close  in:  two  and  a  hali* 
jniics  from  the  shore,  11  fathoms;  two  miles,  9  fathoms;  one  mile,  8  fathoms; 
the  northernmost  part  of  Stirrup  Key  bearing  W.  by  N.  three  and  a  half  miles, 
7  fathoms ;  W.  N.  W.  two  and  a  half  miles,  8  fathoms,  rocky  bottom ;  west, 
one  mile,  7  fathoms ;  W.  S.  W.  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  9  fathoms ;  and  all 
along  to  the  westernmost  key,  8,  9,  and  10  fathoms,  generally  fine  sandy  bottom. 
The  moment  you  get  on  soundings,  in  approaching  the  Berry  Islands,  the  water 
changes  colour. 

*'  Sailed  around  the  Berry  Islands  till  they  bore  N.  N.  £.  two  miles,  and  had 
5,  4,  S,  and  S^  fathoms ;  and  far  as  five  miles,  4,  S,  4,  4,  3},  4,  S|, and  3i  fathoms; 
'N.  by  E.  six  miles,  2i  fathoms.  West  Berry  bearing  N.  N.  E.  and  Blackwood's 
Bush  S.  S.  E.  (course  W.  N.  W.)  the  soundings  were  3,  4,  and  5  fathoms:  at 
23h.  steered  W.  4  fathoms ;  at  3h.  S.  S.  W.  7  fathoms;  at  Sih.  S.  S.  W.  7  fa- 
thoms; at  35h.  6i  fathoms;  at  4h.  6  fathoms;  at  4ih.  5i  fathoms;  at  4jh.  4^ 
fathoms ;  at  4iih.  3J  fathoms ;  at  5h.  3  fathoms  ;  at  5ih.  3  fathoms ;  at  5ih.  2i 
fathoms ;  at  5Hh.  2^  fathoms ;  at  6h.  2^  fathoms ;  at  6ih.  2i  fathoms ;  at  6|h. 
iii  fathoms;  at  7h.  only  11  feet,  and  came  to  anchor  among  black  patches, 
whicli  we  sounded  and  found  to  be  flat  rocks,  about  one  foot  high,  covered  witlv. 
weeds.  Tlie  water  was  shoal  far  to  the  westward  of  this.  Vessels  should  not 
go  among  these  black  patches  ;  the  regular  channel  is  quite  free  from  them,  and 
the  water  is  muddy,  having  a  milky  appearance,  which  prevents  the  bottom 
being  easily  seen." 

The  best  courses  for  crossing  the  Bahama  Bank  are  the  following,  viz.  when 
Stirrup  Key  bears  S.  8  miles  distant,  (at  which  time  it  can  be  just  seen  from 
•deck)  steer'W.  S.  W.  6  leagues ;  then  haul  to  S.  W.  by  S.  10  leagues :  thence 
S.  S.  W.  or  between  that  and  S.  W.  by  S.  to  latitude  24°  55',  when  you  may 
keep  away  W.  and  make  *Orange  Keys,  or  continue  on  your  course  to  latitude 
i;4°  45',  when  you  may  keep  down  west,  and  leave  the  bank  without  danger. 
In  case  you  should  prefer  to  haul  too  sooner  than  directed,  in  crossing  the  bank, 
and  find  your  water  shoaling,  you  may,  by  keeping  off  W.  3  leagues  or  more,  find 
the  deep  water  of  the  channel,  which  is  5  leagues  in  breadth  ;  bear  up  as  soon  as 
you  get  but  ilk  fathoms,  as  it  shoals  suddenly  and  irregularly  from  that  depth. 


other  refreshments  may  be  had,  but  are  seldom  frequented  by  any  other  than  the  people  of 
New  Providence.  At  the  Bcriy  Islands  the  tide  rises  two  feet  more  when  the  sun  is  to  the 
northward  of  the  equator,  than  it  docs  when  to  the  southward  of  it.  In  the  anchorage,  or 
little  harbour  of  these  islands,  the  tide  runs  with  strength  among  the  rocks,  in  a  N.  W.  di- 
rection. 

*  Oraiifl-e  Keys  is  a  cluster  of  rocks  and  keys,  lying  near  the  west  edge  of  the  Great  Bahama 
Bank,  extending  from  latitude  24^  53'  to  24*^  58^  N.  and  longitude  79^  6'  W.  The  main  rocR 
is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  length,  and  the  broadest  part  about  120  yards,  highest 
part  20  feet,  and  narrowest  S  yards.  It  is  a  barren  rock,  the  eastern  side  quite  straight,  and 
runs  is.  S.  W.  and  N.  N.  E. — S.  by  W.  of  the  main  island,  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile, 
arc  two  rocks,  6  feet  out  of  water,  about  15  feet  in  length  ;  and  one  half  a  mile  S.  by  W.  of 
these,  lie  two  smaller  rocks,  It  is  dangerous  to  pass  between  either  of  these  rocks,  and  the 
principal  island,  as  reefs  run  out  and  connect  them,  30  or  40  yards  broad,  and  soon  as  over  4 
fathoms.  One  mile  south  of  these  rocks,  you  may  sail  with  safety.  They  are  a  mass  of 
solid  rock,  and  may  be  approached  at  the  westward  to  their  very  edge  in  11  feet  water.  N. 
W.  of  them  is  good  anchorage  in  8^  fathoms,  foul ;  there  is  also  a  good  anchorage  S.  E.  of 
Orange  Keys  in  6  fathoms,  without  other  danger  than  the  eye  announces.  To  the  northward 
it  is  not  safe  to  approach  within  three  miles,  as  the  water  breaks  and  has  a  ridge,  projecting  to 
a  very  considerable  extent.  There  is  no  sign  of  verdure  on  these  key  a,  lut  round  them  plenty 
of  tish. 

iVlany  persons  mistake  Orange  Keys  for  the  Riding  Rocks,  north  of  which  you  cannot  go  ; 
but  north  from  Orange  Keys,  ^^  mile*  distant,  you  will  find  a  passage,  although  it  is  not  safe 
for  strangers  to  go  this  way,  neither  should  it  be  attempted  by  any  one,  as  you  are  obliged  to 
pick  your  way  through  bluek  patches,  which  are  sometimes  shoal.   Var.  4^  26'  £.  1S20. 


,  before  men- 


wo  and  a  half 
e,  8  fathoms ; 
1  a  half  miles, 
)ottom;  west, 
loms;  and  all 
sandy  bottom, 
ids,  the  water 

niles,  and  had 
id  3i  fathoms ; 
1  Blackwood's 
)  fathoms:  at 
1.  S.  W.  7  fa- 
s;  at  4ih.  4^ 
IS ;  at  5ih.  Sk 
oms;  at  6|h> 
lack  patches, 
covered  witli, 
els  should  not 
Dm  them,  and 
ts  the  bottom 

ng,  viz.  when 
ust  seen  from 
igues :  thence 
hen  you  may 
■se  to  latitude 
hout  danger, 
ing  the  bank, 
or  more,  find 
up  as  soon  as 
lat  depth. 

the  people  of 
sun  is  to  the 

anchorage,  or 
a  N.  W.  di- 

Great  Bahama 
The  main  rocfi 
rards,  highest 

straight,  and 
ters  of  a  mile, 
eS.by  W.  of 
ocks,  and  the 
con  as  over  4 
are  a  mass  of 
et  water.  N. 
irage  S.  E.  of 
the  northward 

projecting  to 
d  Uiem  plenty 

lu  cannot  go ; 
it  is  not  safe 
■re  obliged  to 
E.  1S20. 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


171 


You  may  ever,  run  7  leagues  on  your  W.  S.  W.  course,  after  leaving  Stirrup 
Key,  without  danger  ;  be  caref"!  to  allow  for  the  tide.  On  the  north  side  the 
flood  sets  S.  S.  E.  and  ebb  N.  W.  and  as  you  draw  on  the  bank,  the  force  of  the 
tide  decreases,  for  when  you  have  got  4  or  5  leagues  on  the  bank,  the  tide  is  but 
a  slight  set. 

By  crossing  the  Bank  as  above  directed,  you  will  see  few  or  no  spots  of  sponge, 
and  the  bottom  is  with  difficulty  discerned,  and  may  be  sure  of  3  fathoms  all 
the  way. 

Be  careful  of  Orange  Keys  in  the  night-time,  as  they  are  very  low,  and  cannot 
be  seen  until  on  board  of  them,  and  the  soundings  are  deep  and  regular,  until 
very  near  them  on  their  east  side. 

S.  W.  from  Orange  Keys,  5  or  6  miles  distint,  is  good  anchorage  in  20  fa- 
thoms water.  When  up  with  these  keys,  a  passage  is  secured  through  the  GuU", 
for  then  you  may  make  sail  either  in  the  morning  or  at  midnight,  steering  S.  W. 
10  or  11  leagues,  that  will  enable  you  to  foil  in  with  *Salt  Key  Bank,  which  for 
10  leagues  on  the  north  side  stretches  E.  and  W.  and  consequently  the  current 
sets  stronger  as  you  come  to  the  westward.  In  coming  over  you  have  good 
soundings  ail  along  by  it.  There  is  anchorage  by  spots  all  the  way  in,  but  the 
soundings  are  narrow  at  the  Double-headed  Shot,  the  N.  W.  point  of  which  lies 
in  latitude  23°  52'  N.  This  route,  however,  demands  the  most  zealous  care,  in 
order  to  avoid  any  shoal  which  may  exist,  although  unknown. 

The  edge  of  soundings,  between  the  f  Riding  Rocks  and  Orange  Keys,  is 


♦  Salt  Key  Bank  lies  between  the  Great  Bank  of  Bahama  and  the  Island  of  Cuba,  and 
forms  the  channel  of  Santaren  and  Nicholas.  Its  greatest  extent  is  from  N.  W.  to  8.  E. 
On  its  S.  E.  end  is  the  island  of  Anguilla,  which  may  be  seen  four  lea[;ues  otf.  The  N.  £. 
part  of  this  island  is  foul,  but  the  v/estern  side  is  clear,  with  good  anchorage.  From  Angnila 
Isle  to  theN.  ^V.  are  several  groups  of  keys,  which  rise  almost  on  the  very  edge  of  the  bim'f, 
and  between  which,  in  general,  tiiere  are  clear  passages  of  not  less  than  4  fathoms,  for  any 
vessel,  and  behind  them  anchorage  except  neir  Salt  Key,  on  the  east  side  of  which  4  miles, 
and  on  the  north  side  3  miles,  lie  some  sunken  rocks,  with  some  shoals  stretching  from  them 
towards  the  Key. 

The  several  groupes  are  denominated  Miertos,  (Deadmen's)  Damas,  (Ladies)  Plrdras, 
(Rocky)  which  are  on  the  N.  E.  The  northern  are  Perros,  or  Dog  Keys :  Jl(iua,  or  Water 
Keys,  and  the  Roques,  or  Double-headed  Shot  Keys,  the  west  end  ol'  whioli  lies  1'2  n»i!es  to  the 
westward  of  the  eastern  part  of  East  Florida.  Var.  5*-'  30'  E.  1820.  'I'he  straits  between 
these  groups  afford  free  passage ;  but  not  so  the  straits  which  the  keys  of  each  group  form 
among  themselves,  as  they  are  very  narrow.  The  keys  and  rocks  on  the  N.  and  N.  E. 
sides  of  the  bank  lie  in  clusters ;  they  are  more  than  fifty  in  number,  but  at  a  distance  appear 
like  one  island.  On  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  bank  there  is  only  one  islet,  named  Cayo  Sal  or 
Salt  Key,  and  so  named  from  various  natural  salt-ponds  on  it,  which  produce  very  good  salt. 
This  key  may  be  descried  at  10  miles  of)',  and  water  may  easily  be  procured  at  it,  though  titere 
is  none  on  Anguila,  and  the  other  keys  in  its  vicinity.  Tlie  bank  has  three  rocky  shoals 
upon  it,  but  vessels  may  navigate  upon  it  without  danger  in  7.^>,  S  or  9  fathoms,  from  the 
months  between  October  and  May.  Whenever  the  sky,  Sic  announce  a  hard  Jfortker,  it  is 
advisable  to  enter  on  the  bank,  and  apchor  under  the  sJieltcr  of  the  keys,  or  you  may  lie  to 
here  without  other  trouble  than  that  of  the  lead,  until  the  wind  changes,  and  becomes  fa- 
vourable  for  your  voyage. 

The  current  does  not  always  set  through  Nicholas  channel  to  the  westward,  but  a  regular 
tide  of  ebb  and  flood  prevails  throughout  ;  the  flood  setting  eastward  and  the  ebb  westward 
at  the  rate  of  about  one  mile  an  hour. 

In  the  Santaren  Channel,  between  the  Great  Bank  of  Bahama  and  the  Salt  Key  Bank, 
there  is  said  to  be  rarely  any  current,  unless  after  heavy  gales,  when  it  runs  with  great  vio- 
lence up  and  down.  If  it  predominates  in  one  direction  more  than  aiiuthcr,  it  is  to  the  N.  N. 
W.  and  about  one  mile  an  hour. 

The  times  of  high  water  on  full  and  chi.nge  days,  at  different  places,  are  from  8  to  9  o'clock. 
In  the  Narrows  the  tide  rises  several  feet,  but  it  cannot  be  expected  to  be  perfectly  regular. 

A  Bank  is  said  to  lie  off  the  N.  E.  part  of  Salt  Key  Bank,  from  which  the  Keys  are  in 
sight. 

t  Riding  Rocks  lie  6  leagues  north  of  Orange  Keys,  consisting  of  one  rock  or  key,  about 
half  a  mile  long,  and  12  yards  wide  in  the  broadest  part,  which  is  nearly  divided  one*lhird 
from  its  south  point  by  a  bay.  This  key  is  very  irregular  in  its  height,  anl  more  uneven  than 
Orange  Keys ;  about  2^  miles  to  the  northward  of  this  rock,  is  a  small  island,  about  2  J  milea 
long,  and  830  or  300  yards  broad  in  the  broadest  part.    To  the  northward  of  the  southern- 


172 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


clean  ;  you  may  enter  on  it  without  other  care  than  that  of  the  lead.    From 
1  Orange  Keys,  which  are  the  southernmost  keys  on  this  side  of  the  bank,  the 

I  edge  of  soundings  run  about  S.  by  E.  very  clean  to  24°  10',  and  more  or  less 

deep;  it  forms,  with  the  keys  on  Salt  Key  Bank,  a  channel,  which  is  bottomless, 
and  called  Santaren.  The  above  observation,  in  entering  on  to  the  bank  be- 
tween Orange  Keys  and  Ridrng  Rocks,  means  only  the  edge  ;  as  you  get  further 
on,  you  find  the  soundings  obstructed  in  their  regularity  by  many  coral  shoals, 
but  by  day,  and  with  a  free  wind,  you  can  pick  your  way. 

There  is  said  to  be  a  rock  at  the  waters'  edge,  somewhere  to  the  westward  of 
'*Cat  Key,  w  ith  8  or  10  feet^ivater  on  it ;  but  I  have  never  been  able  to  ascertain  its 
position.  There  are  fcAV,  even  of  able  navigators,  who  can  distinguish  these  nu- 
merous keys  by  name,  therefore  it  is  not  possible  to  state  the  situation  of  this 
rock,  without  personal  examination.  It  exists,  and,  I  expect,  about  200  fathcms 
from  t.h<    -niddle  of  Cat  Key,  in  a  ■*"■.  direction,  but  never  saAv  it. 

In  star-light  nights  the  bnnk  re'^i.  ts  a  bright  light  into  the  air,  which  may  be 
seen  at  4  or  5  leagues.  You  nv.y  observe  this  reflection  all  over  both  the  Bahama 
hanks,  but  not  on  Salt  Key  bank  ;  neither  can  you  see  it  while  on  the  bank;  but 
when  in  the  Gulf,  you  can  plainly  distinguish  the  Providence  channel,  having 

most  key  lie  three  small  rocks,  about  10  or  12  yards  long,  >  ch  running  N.  W.  by  N.  The 
southern  key  runs  N.  by  W. — the  one  next  to  this  key  is  .  yards  from  it :  this,  ICO  yards 
from  the  third,  and  the  third  100  yards  from  the  second.  These  rocks  are  about  3  or  4  feet 
high.  Sou«H  of  this  key  are  two  haycock  rocks,  just  out  of  water,  6  or  8  yards  from  the  land. 
There  are  also  two  rocks  which  lie  half  a  mile  cast  of  the  southernmost  key,  the  largest  80 
feet  long,  and  the  smallest  50  feet  long,  about  one  hundred'  feet  asunder,  and  12  feet  high. 
These  two  rocks  lie  N.  and  S.  There  is  a  rock  as  big  as  a  small  boat  about  half  a  mile  to  the 
northward  of  these  two  rocks.  A  reef  extends  ttil  along  between  these  rocks,  with  the 
southernmost  of  the  Pi'ling  Rocks  bearing  N.  N.  VV  distant  1^  mile,  5  fathon  ;•  Eastern 
Rock  and  the  northern  key,  in  aline  bearing  N.  by  VV.  2^  miles,  4^  fathoms  fine  level  sandy 
bottom  ;  i^  fathoms  immediately,  and  3  miles  distant,  3  fathoms.  Northern  Riding  Rocks 
bearing  W.  5  miles,  3\  fathoms.  Southern  Key,  bearing  S.  W.  by  W.  2  miles,  3^  fathoms. 
Main  or  Northern  Key  bearing  AV.  N.  W.  2^  miles,  3  fathoms.  There  is  a  shoal  runs  out 
from  this  key  in  a  I..  N.  E.  direction,  on  which  are  6  feet  water.  You  will  not  have  a  passage 
to  northward  of  the  Riding  Rocks  for  vessels  drawing  6  feet  water.  Ebb  sets  N.  E.  1^  mile 
per  hour.  S.  by  E.  1<^  mile  from  the  east  lump  of  the  Riding  RocLs,  there  is  a  sizeable  isle, 
with  various  small  keys  in  its  vicinity,  called  Rock  Key  ;  there  is  good  anchorage  on  its  west 
part,  in  7j  and  8  fathoms,  sand  ;  and  the  edge  of  soundings  lies  1 J  mile  ofl'. 

In  steering  from  the  Orange  Keys  to  the  Riding  Rocks,  the  deepest  soundings  are  SJ,  and 
the  shoalest  4^  fathoms.  The  western  edge  of  the  bank  is  an  iron  bound  shore,  being  con- 
nected by  one  grand  chain  of  rocks,  extending  under  water  from  Key  to     ey. 

Extract  from  the  Orbit's  log-hook. — "Laying  at  anchor,  among  these  shoals,  at  low  water 
had  12  feet,  and  at  high  water  13  feet ;  had  a  light  wind  at  W.  S.  VV.  and  could  seethe  edge 
oF  soundings  off  deck,  not  more  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant :  got  under  way  at  first 
ebb,  and  in  making  a  tack  crossed  over  some  shoals  with  only  1 3  feet  water  on  them,  on  which 
there  could  not  be  more  than  7  or  S  feet  at  low  water ;  and  I  have  no  doubt  but,  at  times,  after 
heavy  gales,  these  shoals  may  be  above  the  waters'  edge. 

High  Water,  at  full  and  change  on  the  edges  uf  the  bank,  at  8h.  50m.  On  the  north  side 
the  rise  is  2  feet ;  on  the  west,  to  the  northward  of  Orange  Kfys,  3  feet ;  to  the  southward  of 
Orange  A'eys,  4  feet ;  and  in  lat.  24°  10'  5  and  6  feet-  The  flood  and  ebb  set  from  three- 
qunrters  of  a  mile  to  two  miles,  on  and  off  the  bank. 

*  The  Cat  Keys  are  thus  described  in  the  Spanish  Derroterc,  "  The  northern  one  is  Dog 
Key;  the  second,  Wolf  Key;  and  the  third.  Cat  Key,'  The  northern  point  of  Dog  Key  has 
a  mangrove  thicket,  and  to  the  west  of  its  south  point  there  is  anchorage  in  8^  fathoms. 
Wolf  Key  has  (or  had)  on  its  southern  part,  two  palm-trees,  of  an  equal  size,  which  serve  as 
m  distinguishing  mark  ;  between  it  and  Cut  Key  are  two  round  rocks,  close  to  the  west  of 
which  there  is  anchorage  in  5^  and  6  fathoms.  From  Dog  Key  the  edge  of  the  bank  sweeps 
to  the  west,  and  leaves  a  clear  space  of  soundings  of  about  two  miles  broad  ;  but  at  Cat  Key 
it  narroirs  so  much  that  there  is  not  above  half  a  mile,  and  then  the  edge  of  the  bank  tends 
to  the  S.  S.  £.  To  the  S.  W.  cf  the  south  part  of  Cat  Key  arc  some  islets,  at  the  distance  of 
two-thirds  of  a  mile- 

At  two  miles  S.  ^  E.  from  the  south  end  of  Cat  Key,  are  the  Rocky  Keys,  {Cayos  Piedros) 
three  in  number,  and  occupying  an  extent  of  two  miles,  to  the  S.  £.  At  a  league  to  the  S.  S. 
£.  of  these,  is  a  larger  key,  called  Beak's  Key,  distinguished  by  a  sand  hill,  and  from  this  a 
range  uf  barren  rocks  extend  24  leagues  to  the  S.  S.  E.    Var.  3°  22'  F. 


tl 

CI 


y 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


173 


lead.  From 
lie  bank,  the 
more  or  less 
s  bottomless, 
the  bank  be- 
•u  get  further 
coral  shoals, 

westward  of 

0  ascertain  its 
ish  these  nu- 
ation  of  this 

200  fathcms 

hich  may  be 

1  the  Bahama 
le  bank ;  but 
mnel,  having 

^  by  N.  The 
his,  ICO  yards 
out  3  or  4  feet 

from  the  land. 

the  largest  80 
d  12  feet  high. 
If  a  mile  to  the 
cks,  with  the 
>n  5.  Eastern 
ne  level  sandy 

Riding  Rocks 

Si  fathoms. 

hoai  runs  out 

lave  a  passage 

N.  E.  1  j  mile 

sizeable  isle, 
•e  on  itf,  west 

gs  are  8j,  and 
e,  being  con- 

at  low  water 
1  see  the  edge 
?r  way  at  first 
lem,  on  which 
at  times,  after 

le  north  side 

southward  of 

from  three- 

n  one  is  Dog 
)og  Key  has 
1  8|  fathoms, 
hich  serve  as 
the  west  of 
bank  sweeps 
t  at  Cat  Key 
c  bank  tends 
e  distance  of 

lyos  Piedros) 

i  to  the  S.  S. 

from  this  a 


f 


none  of  this  reflection  between  the  two  reflections  of  the  Great  and  Little  Baha- 
ma banks. 

An  experienced  navigator  (the  late  Capt.  Parke,  of  New-York)  while  crossing 
the  Bahama  bank,  made  the  following  remarks,  which  we  know  are  entitled  to  full 
credit :  "  Having  been  three  days  detained  by  light  S.  W.  winds  and  calm  wea- 
ther on  my  last  passage  across  the  bank,  I  made  the  following  observations  on  the 
tide,  viz.  the  flood  tide  sets  south,  veering  to  S.  W.  and  the  ebb  north,  veering  to 
N.  E.  For  three  days  in  succession  the  tide  set  nearly  two  knots  in  each  direc- 
tion, and  very  regular ;  on  the  third  day  the  weather  being  still  and  calm,  i  weigh- 
ed anchor,  and  drifted  with  the  tide  south,  S.  S.  fV.  and  .S.  W.  When  tiie  ves- 
sel stopped  drifting,  I  anchored  in  3  fathoms  water,  and  rode  the  ebb  :  when  the 
tide  slack>^d,  I  again  measured  the  depth  of  the  water  in  the  .same  place,  and 
found  15  feet." 

It  is  not  presumed  the  same  depth  of  water  can  always  be  carried  over  the 
bank,  even  in  the  same  track,  as  it  must  occur  to  the  mind  of  every  person  that 
a  strong  eas'^-'-ly  wind  will  drive  the  water  off  the  bank,  as  well  as  a  strong  norther- 
ly increase  its  quantity ;  in  all  parts  of  the  channel  the  bottom  is  of  a  sticky 
quality,  whereas  to  windward  the  bottom  is  h;ird  and  the  spots  thicken  as  you 
shoal  your  water.  Almost  every  regular  tradei*  has  a  different  course  to  run 
across  the  bank,  but  the  principal  object  is  to  clear  *Sheep  Key  Shoals ;  with 
the  wind  scant,  ''nd  not  drawing  a  heavy  draft  of  water,  you  should  haul  too  a 
little  sooner,  but  not  without  a  leadsman  constantly  in  the  chains,  and  should 
bear  up  as  soon  as  you  shoalen  your  water  to  2.^  fathoms.  With  the  v*ind  steady 
and  free,  so  that  you  cor.ld  lay  to  »vindward  of  south,  you  should  always  make 
sure  of  westing  to  clear  the  shoals  to  windward,  taking  care  not  to  run  so  far  as 
to  get  among  the  shoals  which  stretch  off  from  the  east  side  of  the  keys  which 
border  the  bank  on  its  western  edge. 

There  are  scarcely  two  men  who  cross  the  Bahama  bank  that  agree  as  to  the 
latitude  of  the  Orange  Keys,  and  many  doubt  their  existence ;  this  difference  of 
opinion  hi»d  some  effect  in  sending  the  sloop  Orbit :  the  subject  is  now  at  rest,  as 
marine  and  land  surveys  have  been  made  by  her  officers  of  the  Orange  Keys, 
Riding  Rocks,  Cat  Keys,  Great  and  Little  Isaac,  with  the  rocks,  &tc.  adjoining, 
all  which  are  previously  described. 

On  the  Bahama  Bank,  in  latitude  24°  10'  to  latitude  24°  20'  it  is  shoal  near  the 
edge.  The  tide  rises  6  feet,  and  there  are  many  spots  in  this  space  with  less  than 
10  feet  at  low  water.  The  shoal  lies  within  one  mile  of  the  edge  of  the  bank  ; 
they  are  of  quick  sand,  and  of  course  the  depth  of  water  on  them  must  alter 
with  every  gale. 

Should  you  prefer  running  down  the  Cuba  shore,  you  may  steer  S.  W.  after 
leaving  the  bank  in  latitude  24°  40'  and  when  sure  of  having  past  the  Double- 
Hcaded  Shot,  haul  a  little  more  southerly,  say  S.  W.  by  S.  and  make  the  island 
of  Cuba ;  but  to  do  this  you  must  sail  more  than  4  miles  an  hour,  otherways  you 
may  be  carried  out  of  the  straight;  this  ought  to  be  avoided  with  the  greatest 
care  ;  and,  hence  we  recommend  the  route  by  the  Snntaren  Channel  as  at  all  times 
preferable.  Keep  down  in  shore  as  far  as  the  table  land  of  Mariel,  which  can- 
not be  mistaken,  when  you  may  run  over  N.  W.  and  if  not  i.ore  than  24  hours 
in  the  Gulf,  you  will  clear  the  Tortugas ;  but  if  you  are  a  longer  time  in  cross- 
ing, it  would  be  prudent  to  keep  a  look  out  for  coloured  water  and  the  Tortugas. 
The  Pan  of  Matanzas  bearing  S.  S.  W.  to  S.  appears  like  one  round  hill,  but  at 
any  other  bearing  you  will  see  another  each  side  of  it,  net  so  high  and  adjoining 
to  it.  If  you  are  near  in  shore,  on  passing  tlio  Havanna,  /ou  will  see  the  shipping 
in  the  harbour,  .;nd  the  Moro  Castle  light  may  be  seen  8  leagues  off.  The  table 
of  Mariel  is  0  leagues  from  the  Havanna. 

When  you  anchor  on  any  part  of  the  edge  of  the  bank,  in  order  to  pass  the 
night,  or  for  a  favourable  tide,   you    ought  to   have  every  thing  ready  to 

*"'  '  ■  »— —       ,■———  —  ,,         ,—■      M       , I      *  ,  ,,  ■  I  I  ■  I.       ,.      ., 

*  Sheep  Keys  bear  S.  S.  W.  4  W.  7  or  8  leagues  from  Slinup  Key,  and  lie  off  the  N.  W. 
,  part  of  Andros  Islands ;  from  these  keys  it  is  as  before  observed,  very  foul  to  the  westward, 
and  the  shoal  extends  quite  round  to  Stirrup  Key  ;  the  bottom  covered  with  spots  of  sponge 
and  rqcks,  the  size  of  a  barrel  or  the  bead  of  a  hogshead  ;  anH  any  object  on  the  bottom  nmf 
as  plainly  be  seen  as  if  no  water  intervened,     Here  the  tide  rises  4  fcefr 


171 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


make  sail  thei.'  oment  it  may  be  necessary;  and  also,  if  the  sky  looks  ill.  you 
should  have  th^  topsails  reefed.  From  any  one  of  these  anchorages  you  may 
make  sail  with  any  wind ;  and,  generally  speaking,  every  one  in  these  parts,  who 
requires  to  anchor,  may  find  a  proper  place  to  do  so  in,  and  in  which  he  may  be 
sheltered  from  the  winds  that  molest  him,  or  which  he  foresees  coming;  and 
without  eddy  winds  to  leeward,  which  cause  trouble  in  case  of  fouling  the  anchor, 
though  they  only  require  vlgilence  and  p  Seaman-tike  dexteritr 

On  leaving  the  bank,  you  must  be  careful  not  to  fall  in  with  the  Florida  Shore 
or  Double-headed  Shot  Keys  in  the  night-time ;  but  v/ith  day-light  and  a  breeze, 
there  is  no  danger  in  making  either. 

High  water  at  full  and  change  on  the  edges  of  the  bank  at  8h.  50m. — on  the 
north  side  it  rises  two  feet;  on  the  west  to  the  northward  of  Orange  Keys,  3  feet; 
to  the  southward  of  Orange  Keys,  4  feet ;  and  in  latitude  24<^  10',  it  rises  5  and 
6  feet.  The  flood  and  ebb  set  from  three-quarters  to  two  knots  on  and  off  the 
bank. 

WE  AGAIN  RETURN  TO  THE  HOLE-IN-THE-WALL,  AND  ANNEX  i 

Directions  for  sailing  through  Providence  JV*.  TV.  Channel,  north  of  the. 
Great  Bahama  Bank,  and  through  the  Gulf  of  Florida,  ^c. 

VESSELS  drawing  over  13  feet  water,  should  not  attempt  crossing  the  Bank; 
the  best  passage  is,  when  up  with  the  Hole-in-the-Wall,  to  steer  W.  by  N.  36 
leagues,  which  will  carry  you  to  the  west  edge  of  the  bank,  and  about  2§  leagues 
from  the  Great  Isaac,  taking  care  to  keep  in  12  or  16  fathoms,  in  which  you 
ought  to  pass  two  miles  from  the  Great  Isaac ;  then  shape  your  course  through 
the  Gulf,  exercising  the  utmost  care,  so  as  not  to  get  far  out  from  the  edge  of 
soundings,  because  the  moment  you  leave  the  edge,  and  get  into  blue  water,  you 
will  be  in  the  general  current  or  Gulf  Stream,  which  sets  strongly  to  the  north- 
ward; therefore,  if  the  wind  does  not  permit  steering  along  the  edge  of  the 
bank,  you  ought  to  anchor  on  it  and  \vait  till  the  wind  be  favourable.  He  who 
has  no  pilot,  ought  not  to  leave  the  bank  at  the  Great  Isaac  by  night,  but  may 
.  anchor  on  it.  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  centre  of  die  island,  in  from  7  to  10  fathoms, 
on  sand,  and  wait  fur  day-light. 

To  run  along  the  edge  of  these  banks,  y  ou  have  only  to  attend  to  the  lead ; 
with  which  gu^de,  and  the  notice  we  have  given,  you  will  have  suiHcient  informa- 
tion to  enable  you  to  avoid  all  danger.  On  the  edge  of  soundings,  although  you 
do  not  feel  the  gv^.neral  current,  yet  there  is  a  set  of  the  tide,  which  may  either 
run  a  vessel  oit  the  edge,  or  upon  the  Keys ;  but  this  cannot  happen  if  the  lead^ 
which  ought  to  be  kept  constantly  going,  is  properly  attended  to,  as  it  will  warn 
whether  to  keep  to  starboard  or  larboard,  in  order  to  preserve  the  proper  depth, 
but  be  carefsl  not  to  go  on  the  west  part  of  the  bank,  as  there  is  a  dangerous 
rock,  on  which  the  English  brig  Moselle  struck,  that  lies  in  latitude  £5<^  50'  N. 
by  De  Mayne.  It  is  adviseable,  when  bound  through  the  Gulf,  to  get  a  sight 
of  land  either  one  side  or  the  other  towards  night :  it  will  give  safety  to  the  ship,, 
and  relieve  the  Master's  anxiety.    In  this  passage  you  will  pass  *LitAe  Isaac, 

*  Little  Isaac  consists  of  three  islands  or  rocks,  running  in  an  E.  S.  £.  direction  ;  the 
western  rock  is  about  40  feet  in  length :  the  eastern  rock  rather  larger,  about  5  miles  from  the 
western  one  ;  between  these  two  in  a  direct  line,  is  a  smaller  rock,  about  one  mile  distant  from 
the  eastern  Isaac,  on  the  same  line ;  they  lie  about  5  or  6  miles  in  on  the  bank ;  outside  of 
them  the  soundings  are  clean,  you  will  have  14  fathoms  on  the  edge,  dimitiishing  gradually, 
so  that  one  mile  from  them  you  have  6  futhoms.  In  all  the  distance  between  Stirrup  Key 
and  Little  Isaac,  the  edge  is  clean,  and  you  may  navigste  down  it  by  the  hand  lead.  S.  E. 
tVom  the  Little  Isaac  you  may  anchor,  good  holding  ground,  but  a  heavy  sea.  The  shoal 
ground  on  which  these  rocks  exist,  is  called  the  Gingerbread  Ground;  it  extends  5  leagues 
E.  by  S.  firom  the  western  rock,  and  has  some  dangerous  rocky  heads  upon  it,  with  only  7  to 
9  feet  of  water.  Under  the  S.  W.  end  of  the  Gingerbread  Ground,  within  the  Little  Isaac, 
you  may  anchor  in  3}  and  4  fathoms ;  the  holding  ground  is  good,  but  there  is  often  much, 
sea ;  there  is  also  good  anchorage  in  8  and  9  fathoms  off  the  east  end  of  the  Gitigerbread 
Ground,  at  12}  leagues  to  the  westtvard  of  Little  Stirrup  Key,  which  may  be  found  useful 
during  a  northerly  wind. 

Too  much  caution  cannot  be  used  in  sailing  between  Great  Isaac  and  the  BeminT  Isle?,  a» 
the  wRt^sboals  suddenly,  and  there  are  many  rocka  under  irater. 


looks  ill,  you 
ages  you  may 
ese  parts,  who 
ich  he  may  be 
I  coming;  and 
ing  the  anchor, 

Florida  Shore 
t  and  a  breeze, 

50m.— on  the 
e  Keys,  3  feet ; 
',  it  rises  5  and 
3n  and  off  the 

^D  ANNEX: 

north  of  the. 
da,  ^c. 

ing  the  Bank; 
W.  by  N.  36 
out  2§  leagues 
in  which  you 
Jurse  through 
m  the  edge  of 
ue  water,  you 
to  the  north- 
e  edge  of  the 
>le.  He  who 
ght,  but  may 
>  10  fathoms, 

to  the  lead ; 
ient  informa- 
although  you 
h  may  either 
n  if  the  lead^ 
s  it  will  wara 
)roper  depth, 
a  dangerous 
e  250  50'  N. 

0  get  a  sight 
y  to  the  ship,^ 
'LitAe  Isaac, 

direction ;  the 
miles  from  the 
ie  distant  from 
ik ;  outside  of 
ling  gradually, 
n  Stirrup  Key 

1  lead.  S.  £. 
a.  The  shoal 
nds  5  leagues 
with  only  7  to 
!  Little  Isaac, 
ia  often  much. 
J  Gingerbread 
i  found  useful 

mitiT  Isl(«<,  a» 


.  BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


175 


f  Great  Isaac,  and  tBemini  Isles,  a  particular  description  of  which  we  give  in 
the  notes. 

The  bearings  of  the  land,  he.  Vihere  the  ship  Moselle  struck,  were  as  follow : 

The  N.'E.  point  of  Bernini  Isles  S.  S.  E.  j  E.  5  or  6  miles.  The  southernmost  part 
in  sight  S.  by  W.  i  W,  The  ground  water  rock  (which  appears  above  water, 
and  lies  to  the  northward  of  Bemini)  S.  E.  i  S.  1 J  mile  distant. 

This  reef  is  upwards  of  a  mile  in  length,  and  about  60  feet  wide.  It  lies  in  a 
S.  by  W.  and  N.  by  E.  direction,  and  has  3  and  4  fathoms  close  to  it  on  both 
sides.  In  some  spots,  there  is  not  more  than  10  feet  at  high  water,  the  tide 
rising  and  falling  between  3  and  4  feet;  flood  setting  to  the  N.  E.  and  ebb  to  the 
S.  W.  forming  a  rppling,  like  the  meeting  of  two  currents.  Position,  when 
aground,  latitude  i5^  46'  N.  longitude  79<^  19'  W.  De  Mayne  places  the  rock  in 
25°  50'  N.  and  lok  g.  79°  15' W. 

The  flood  here  %^U  at  the  rate  of  about  1),  and  the  ebb  Smiles  an  hour. 

The  I1V1.ET  or  Harbour,  between  theBeminis,  has  throughout  from  12  and  11 
to  10  and  9  feet  at  low  water. 

From  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  Southern  Bemini,  a  chain  of  low  keys  and  rocks, 
called  the  Thirtle  Rocks,  extend  about  three  miles  to  the  south.  Some  of  tbem 
do  not  rise  to  the  level  of  the  water.  Here  the  bank  is  very  steep  :  as,  at  the 
distance  of  a  pistol-shot,  no  bottom  is  to  be  found,  and,  at  the  half-length  of  a 
ship,  are  l4  and  15  fathoms,  on  sand.  BarntWs  Harbour,  a  hole  in  the  hank,  of 
2^  fathoms,  divides  this  from  a  succeeding  group  of  keys,  called  the  Cat  Keys, 
which  extend  to  the  south,  nearly  to  25°  30'  N.  as  previously  described,  page  172. 

Extract  from  the  Journal  of  Capt.  Story,  in  ship  Louisa  Matilda,  May  13, 
J 822.— At  2h.  20m. P.  M.  bore  away  S.  W.  by  S.  At  3  P.  M.  struck  soundings 
on  the  Bahama  Bank  in  5  fathoms  ;  at  lOh.  45m.  P.  M.  lost  soundings ;  at  6  A. 
M.  made  the  Dog  Keys,  bearing  S.  distance  4  leagues ;  at  7  A.  M.  made  the 

t  GretU  Isaac  is  a  key  of  moderate  height,  about  half  a  league  in  extent  from  eait  to  west, 
in  lat.  2fP  1'  long.  79*^  2',  and  bears  about  W.  N.  W.  from  Little  Isaac,  distance  5}  leagues. 
A  cluster  of  little  Islets  and  rocks,  called  the  Hen  and  Chickens,  lies  at  the  distance  of  two 
miles  to  the  S.  S.  W.  of  its  western  point.  There  is  also  a  round  rock,  about  20  yards  broad 
at  the  distance  of  two  miles  N.  E.  by  N.  firom  the  N.  E.  point,  and  a  reef  caUed  the  BrothtrSf 
at  the  distance  of  a  league  to  the  east,  firom  the  east  point.  The  ground  in  other  parts  ia  clear, 
and  to  the  N.  W.  and  S.  W.  of  the  isle  is  good  and  extensive  anchoring  ground,  with  regu- 
lar  soundings  from  13  to  5  fathoms,  with  soft  lime-stone  bottom  and  broken  shells.  The 
Brothers  are  two  haycock  rocks,  lying  W.  S.  W.  and  E.  N.  E.  1^  mile  distant,  the  eastern- 
most being  about  5  miles  from  the  Great  Isaac.  On  the  Great  Isaac  there  are  weUs  of  fresh 
water  and  abundance  of  large  shell-fish.  The  Hen  and  Chickens  have  good  anchorage  on  the 
west  side  of  them  in  5i|  or  6  fathoms  of  water,  fine  sand.  The  bank  of  soundings  extends  6 
miles  to  the  west  of  the  Great  Isaac,  with  increasing  depths,  from  7  to  lb  fathoms ;  and  to 
the  S.  W.  nearly  6  leagues  with  7,  6,  7, 6,  10,  and  17  fathoms,  and  from  the  Great  Isaac  to 
Bntnini  Islands  the  soundings  are  9,  9, 8,  7,  71^,  8,  S,  8  fathoms.  On  the  bank  you  can  anchor, 
the  Great  Isaac  bearing  S.  £.  in  8,  5,  and  10  fathoms.  Nedr  the  Great  Isaac,  at  the  N.  W. 
extremity  of  the  Providence  Channel,  the  current  runs  to  the  east  at  the  rate  of  two  miles 
an  hour. 

X  The  Bemini  Isles  are  low,  with  some  small  trees,  or  rather  bushes  on  them,  particularly 
on,  the  |S.  E.  part  of  the  South  Isle.  They  are  the  westernmost  isles  of  the  Great  Bank, 
and  Ue  in  lat.  25'^  44'  N.  long.  79°  4'  W.  Under  the  S.  point  there  is  a  bay,  with  some  low 
keys,  lying  S.  S.  E.  and  S.  E.  of  it,  in  which  you  can  anchor  and  have  shelter  from  winds  at 
N.  round  to  S.  E.  with  4i^,  5  and  6  fathoms,  or  you  can  pass  the  night  here  when  bound  south- 
ward.  On  these  keys  and  islands,  there  is  some  wood  and  water. 

These  islands  arc  represented  from  a  plan  made  by  ^.he  officers  of  the  British  (Ugate  JlfoscUe, 
in  July,  I81O,  which  exhibits  the  shoal  on  the  south  side  of  the  Southern  Bemini,  as  having 
only  3  feet  of  water,  white  sand  and  sponge.  On  the  edge  of  the  bank,  south  of  the  S.  W. 
point  of  the  same  isle,  there  are  no  soundings  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  rocks  ;  but,  west- 
ward of  the  same  point,  is  the  anchorage  above  described,  extending  outward  about  oae 
league :  and  the  edge  of  the  bank  thence  continues  in  a  N.  N.  E.  direction,  but  having  with- 
in it  similar  soundings  to  the  distance  of  5  leagues.  Beyond  this,  is  a  diry  rock,  and  a  le^, 
on  which  the  Moselle  grounded. 


176 


•BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Double-headed  Shut  Keys,  hearing  S.  W.  by  W.  distance  3  leagues ;  at  loii. 
Double-headed  Shot  Keys  bore  E.  distance  5  leagues.  Latitude  by  observation, 
23°  52'  N.  In  crossing  the  bank,  the  least  depth  of  water,  16  j  feet ;  the  lead 
and  strop  not  included. 


H. 

K. 

F. 

* 

Courses. 

Winds. 

1 

8 

w.  s.  w. 

N.  E. 

2 

8 

3 

8 

4 

S.  W.  by  S. 

do. 

4 

8 

4 

do. 

,- 

5 

8 

4 

S.  W.  h  s. 

do. 

6 

8 

4 

7 

8 

4 

S.W.  byS. 

do. 

8 

10 

9 

10 

S.  s.  W. 

do. 

10 

10 

4 

S.  by  W. 

do. 

11 

10 

4 

s.  s.  w. 

12 

9 

S.W. 

1 

9 

2 

9 

4 

do. 

3 

9 

4 

do. 

4 

10 

■ 

5 

9 

6 

8 

4 

S.  W.  by  W. 

do. 

7 

8 

4 

8 

8 

4 

S.  W.  by  W.  i  W. 

N.  E.  by  E. 

9 

8 

4 

l^ .  s.  w. 

do. 

10 

8 

11 

8 

do. 

12 

8 

do. 

E.  N.E. 

Miles  213 

distance  per  log. 

>'■#• 


Note.— 7^  particular  depths  and  shoal  spots  on  the  Great  Bahama  Bank,  can 
be  best  understood  by  a  reference  to  the  new  Chart  of  "  BAHAMA  BANKS  and 
GULF  of  FLORIDA,"  on  a  square  and  large  scale,  published  by  E.  Sz.  O.  W. 
BLUNT,  by  which  it  will  be  seen,  that  there  is  on  its  northern  part,  a  Middle 
Ground,  of  8  to  12  feet  of  water,  partly  of  hard  sand  ridges.  This  Middle 
Ground  was  not  exhibited  on  any  of  the  old  charts  ;  but  it  is  now,  with  other  dis- 
coveries, given  from  the  late  survey  of  the  Orbit ;  among  others,  the  Bank  off 
the  Hole  in  the  Wall,  and  also  from  those  of  Mr.  De  Mayne.  To  the  southward 
of  the  Middle  Ground  are  several  dangerous  spots,  not  given  in  Mr.  De  Mayne's 
chart,  but  which  were  discovered  by  the  American  schooner  Brilliant,  Capt.  W. 
TuKock,  on  the  19th  of  February.  1819,  on  the  passage  of  that  vessel  over  the 
bank,  from  the  Stirrup  Keys  to  the  south-westward.  Mr.  Livingston  was  then 
a  passenger  on  board,  and  the  description  is  extracted  from  his  journal. 

First  two  Shoals. — "  At  2h.  30m.  P.  M.  the  man  on  the  look-out  at  the  mast 
head,  discovered  two  shoals  on  the  larboard  bow.  Captain  Tullock  called  me, 
and  both  of  us  went  aloft,  and  saw  them  plainly.  We  passed  the  most  northerly, 
which  seemed  to  have  more  water  on  it  than  the  other  had,  at  2h.  4dm.  going  six 
knots ;  and  the  southern  one  we  passed  at  2h.  50m.  therefore  they  lie  about 
three  quarters  of  a  mile  apart.  Captain  Tullock  and  I  both  thought  it  probable 
that  the  southern  shoal  was  nearly  ury  at  low  water. 

"  Positions  of  the  centres  :  Northci  a  ShcaK  lat.  25°  1 1'  46",  long.  78°  49' 
45"  ;  Southern  Shoal,  lat.  25°  10'  58",  long.  78°  49'  57". 

We  passed  about  2}  miles  west  of  the  northern  shoal,  and  2  miles  west  of  the 
southern.    They  are  both  of  an  oval  form.    Their  length  seeming  to  stretch 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


177 


about  S.  S.  W.  and  N.  N.  E.  and  their  breadth  W.  N.  W.  and  E.  S.  E.  They 
are  of  but  small  extent ;  the  southern,  which  is  the  largest,  not  being  (I  think) 
more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  length." 

7%e  third  iShoal. — "  Again,  at  3h.  10m.  the  man  at  the  mast  hc.id  ])erceived 
another  shoal  to  leeward  or  westward.  Captain  Tullock  and  I  again  went  aloft, 
to  see  it  more  distinctly.  At  3h.  24m.  wo  had  its  northern  end,  which  was  lan- 
cet shaped,  abeam  of  us ;  and  at  8h.  31m,  wc  passed  the  southern  extremity  of 
the  shoal,  at  about  1^  or  2  miles  to  the  eastwa»'l  of  it.  This  shoal  appeared  to 
have  deeper  water  than  either  of  those  above  ("trscribed  ;  but  three  sj)ots  on  it, 
one  at  the  north  point,  one  on  the  west  branch,  and  one  on  the  eastern  branch, 
showed  whiter,  and  seemed  shoaler  than  the  rest.  It  has  two  branches,  #  legs, 
united  toward  its  northern  extremity,  but  open  toward  the  South  or  S.  by  E. ; 
and  in  the  centre  between  them  the  water  appeared  to  be  as  deep  as  on  the  rest 
of  the  Bahama  Bank  thereabout ;  that  is,  3  fathoms,  which  depth  we  carried 
past  the  shoals." 

North  end  of  the  shoal,  lat.  25^  8'  28" ;  south  end,  lat.  25°  7'  43"  ;  long,  of 
centre,  78°  56'^7". 

Old  Wrcck,-~On  the  next  morning,  at  9,  the  Brilliant  passed  about  30  or  35 
fathoms  to  windward  of  a  black  spot,  seemingly  an  old  wreck.  Latitude  by 
account  and  a  doubtful  meridian  altitude  of  the  noon,  at  24°  4C' ;  long,  of  the 
wreck,  79°  18',  by  observation  of  sun  and  moon  at  7h.  33m.  A.  M.  When 
abreast  of  the  black  spot,  we  had  5  fathoms  water,  and  in  ten  minutes  thereafter 
ran  off  the  bank  into  blue  water.  Lat.  and  long,  of  the  ;;.  •  <ve  spot,  subjcct«;d  to 
re-calculation,  24°  47'  N.  and  79°  15'  27''  W.  By  subsequent  ol)servationi,  and 
re-computation,  24^  43'  N.  and  79^  12'  44"  W.  Mean,  24°  45'  N.  and  79°  14'  Vf. 


The  southern  border  of  Great  Bahama  Bank. 


Key  Verde  ic  the  south-easternmost  key  of  the  Great  Bahama  Bank,  in  lat. 
23*^  0'.  It  is  only  a  mile  and  a  hall"  in  lenj^tli,  and  about  two  cables'  length  broad, 
extending  E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.  and  is  destitute  of  fresh  water.  From  this 
key  the  edge  of  the  bank  (extends  W.  S.  W.  l4  leagues,  to  the  Key  of  St.  Do' 
mingo,  in  the  moutli  of  the  Bahama  Channel.  The  ground  between  Key 
Verde  and  St.  Domingo's  Key  is  generally  clean  :  but  there  are  two  shoals,  one 
at  13  miles  from  Key  Verde,  on  the  edge  of  the  bank,  is  called  St.  VinccnVs, 
and  does  not  exceed  a  cable's  length  in  extent  from  N.  N.  W.  to  S.  S.  E.  by  half 
a  cable  at  its  greatest  breadth,  with  only  3  feet  over  it :  the  second  shoal  is  also 
on  the  edge  of  the  bank,  nine  miles  from  St.  Vincent's,  and  22  from  Key 
Verde :  it  is  formed  of  rocks,  is  not  so  large  as  the  former,  and  has  one  fathom 
over  it. 

The  Key  of  St.  Domingo  is  arid ;  it  is  a  cable's  length  long,  and  half  a  one 
broad,  and  its  middle  forms  a  smalMiill,  covered  with  the  Indian  fvsh-huah,  which 
looks  like  an  upset  ^  esscl,  and  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  3  leagues.  A 
breaker  extends  from  the  S.  S.  W.  side  to  the  distance  of  3  leagues  ;  and  W.  by 
S.  from  its  middle,  at  the  distance  of  two  or  three  cables,  there  is  a  bank  of  6  a^d 
7  fathoms,  with  very  clear  water,  where  shelter  from  the  br^/cs  may  be  found. 

On  the  southern  part  of  the  Bank,  to  the  westward  of  the  Key  of  St.  Domingo, 
there  is  no  particular  object  which  is  not  sufficiently  described :  the  only  spots  above 
water  are  the  two  keys,  called  i^oftos  and  Gtdncho,  or  Wo// and  Ginger  Keys,  both 
of  which  have  foul  ground  about  them,  from  North  round  by  East  to  South,  so 
that,  in  these  directions,  they  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  a  mile. 
Both  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  C  or  8  miles.  The  shoal  grounds  named 
the  Mucaras,  which  arc  about  tAventy  miles  to  the  south-eastward  of  Lobos,  havo 
weeds  or  grass  at  the  bottom,  and  it  is,  therefore,  requisite  to  notice  that  the 
water  on  them  remains  as  dark-colourdd  as  in  the  mid-channel.  Without  them 
are  no  soundings,  and  they  should,  therefore,  be  approached  with  great  caution, 
for  without  this  a  vessel  may  easily  be  lost,  even  in  day -light.    On  the  very  cUg9 

23 


/  / J 


178 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


i 


of  the  bank,  between  Lobos  and  Guincho,  thnrc  nro  Bome  other  Rhoal  spots  {  and 
vcssnia  of  great  draught  Bhould  not  venture  upon  the  bank.    Th<^re  are,  Hkewise,   ' 
some  rocky  upota  to  wcHtward  of  Guincho,  so  that  caution  here,  is  also  required. 

Remarks. — ^To  communicate  some  idea  of  the  force  of  the  current  in  the  Gulf 
Stream,  and  disnsfrous  conflcquencea,  wo  copy  the  following  from  various  au- 
thorities : — *•  We  took  our  departure  from  the  westward  of  Cut  Key,  and  steered 
S.  S.  W.  24  leagues  ;  then  S.  S.  W.  j  S.  SJ  leagues,  when  we  altered  our  course 
to  S.  S.  W.  {  W.  6  leagues,  with  the  wind  squally  at  N.  W.  going  at  the  rate  of 
8  knots;  while  in  the  act  of  leefing  to|)sail3,  judging  ourselves  near  the  Douhle- 
headeiShot  Keys,  we  struck  On  *CaryHfort  reef."  The  course  steered  by  com- 
pass was  S.  S.'W.  whereas  the  drift  nuide  her  course  W.  S.  W. 

"  I  left,"  says  an  experienced  navigator,  "  the  Bahama  Bank  in  latitude  24° 
S3'  N.  and  steered  S.  W.  by  S.  by  compass,  and  in  the  morning  discovered  my- 
self within  0  miles  of  the  Double-headed  Shot  Keys,  which  bear  from  the  lati- 
tude I  took  my  departure  from  S.  W.  by  W." 

"Aug.  29,  1810.  At  midnight  left  the  bank  with  the  wind  touth  and  south- 
westerly, run  28  miles  W.  S.  W.— 22  miles  W.  by  S.  closie  hauled  upon  our  lar- 
board tack ;  and  found,  by  meridian  altitude  of  the  sun,  our  latitude  to  be  24° 
50' N. 

Aug.  30.— Winds  westerly  and  light,  still  on  the  wind  on  our  larboard  tack  ; 
run  25  miles  west  to  midniglit,  sounded,  no  ground  ;  continued  W.  and  W.  by 
N.  4  miles,  to  3  A.  M.  tlie  ship  Tliree  Sisters,  eaptiiin  Armington,  being  then  on 
our  weather  bow,  distant  one  nii!(',  raadt;  a  signal  she  was  ashore  ;  hove  the  lead 
and  had  but  5  fathoms,  taeked  ship  and  stood  off  ten  minutes,  sounded  quarter 
less  3,  tacked  again  and  stood  in,  sounded  with  4i  fathoms,  when  we  let  go  our 
anchor  and  brought  iip  at  4  A.  M.  Manned  the  boat  and  run  out  east  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile,  when  the  boat  struck  on  a  reef,  the  ship  Three  Sisters  th<!n 
bearing  W.  S.  W.  one  mile.  Went  off  in  the  boat  again  in  a  N.  E.  by  E.  direc- 
tion, and  found  a  narrow  channel  of  12  feet ;  tried  again  in  a  S.  S.  E.  direction, 
where  we  found  a  passage  of  15  fintt,  one  mile  wide,  current  setting  N.  N.  E. 
This  must  have  been  the  channel  which  we  fortunatf-U''  got  in  at,  there  being  but 
two  channels  to  by  found  :  the  wide  ciiannel  was  the  only  one  which  wouldL  ad- 
mit us  both  in  the  same  direction  we  then  were.  Got  under  way,  the  captain  of 
the  ship  being  on  board,  the  wind  veering  from  S.  S.  W.  to  N.  W.  and  stood 
out,  but  on  approaching  the  passage,  found  the  current  to  set  strong  on  the  S.  end 
of  the  N.  reef,  which  set  us  into  11  feet  water,  in  about  the  length  of  the  vessel, 
when  it  deepened  to  3,  4,  6,  7,  16,  25  fathoms  and  off  soundings,  the  lead  being 
hove  as  quick  as  possible. 

•'  The  place  we  got  in  at,  appears  to  be,  by  the  chart,  Buller's  inlet  and  outlet, 
lying  between  Biscayno's  and  Ledburg's  reef,  in  latitude  25°  24'  N." 

Notes.— Many  vessels  have  got  over  the  Florida  reef  in  the  night,  before  they 
knewitf  and  afterwards  brought  up  in  safety  on  the  inside;  but  when  daylight 
came,  they  have  been  at  a  loss  as  to  the  way  in  which  they  came  in,  seeing 
nothing  but  breakers  on  the  opposite  point,  by  which  he  steered  in,  and  have 
given  some  thousands  of  dollars  to  the  Bahama  wreckers,  to  take  them  out  again,  t? 
In  prefe?;ence,  I  would  advise  the  master  who  unfortunately  gets  caught  in  this 
trap,  to  place  himself  on  the  fortop-sail  yard,  after  getting  under  way,  and  run 
to  the  westward,  bar  the  range  of  the  Florida  keys,  until  he  discovers  a  probable 
passage  out,  when  Tie  may  bring  too,  and  try  the  channel  Avith  his  boat.  Every 
danger  can  be  seen  from  aloft  in  this  channel,  keeping  clear  of  the  black  patches 
of  coral,  and  white  patches  of  shoals  of  sand,  he  will  not  run  long  before  he 
finds  a  safe  channel  to  go  out,  and  save  his  thousands  of  dollars.  I  would  not 
write  thus,  but  for  the  impositions  of  many  of  the  wreckers,  on  persons  in  such 
circumstances.  Their  trouble  is  no  more  than  a  few  hours'  work^  and  equally 
as  easy  for  them  as  it  is  for  a  branch  pilot  to  take  a  vessel  over  a  difficult  bar. 
They  ought,  under  such  circumstances,  to  charge  well ;  but  hundreds  instead  of 
thousands,  and  tens  instead  of  hundreds,  would  be  quite  sufficient. 

♦  N.  i  E.  distant  3  or  4  miles  from  the  elbow  of  Carysfort  Reef,  a  light  vessel  is  moored, 
Jbowing  tvo  fixed  lights.    [See  page  141.] 


BLUNT^S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


179 


Navigators  whould  l)e  cuuUous,  whilo  crossing  the  Bahama  bank,  n«tcr  to  ft>I- 
low  v<'sa«(li,  if  tliey  alter  their  c<»ursH  often,  us  the  New  Providence  wreckcri 
have  frequently  decoyed  them  for  thn  purposo  of  plunder ;  a  crimo  which  the 
most  barbarous  nation  would  treat  with  the  ejreatest  severity.  This  Is  not  pub- 
lished to  give  offence  to  any  one,  but  it  applies  to  some  of  the  New  Providence 
navigators,  and  it  is  our  duty  to  point  out  danger  to  mariners,  frona  which  the  edi- 
tor will  never  deviate,  or  hide  from  investigation. 

I  would  also  inform  every  person  who  may  be  so  unfortunate  as  to  lose  his 
ship  any  where  within  the  reach  of  the  Bahama  wreckers,  that  he  has  no  occa- 
sion to  make  any  agreement  with  them  to  save  any  thing,  but  to  refer  them  to 
the  Chamber  of  Commerce  at  Nassau,  who  will  settle  all  this  business  for  him 
in  a  Very  just  manner.  There  is  as  little  partiality  among  those  gentlemen,  as 
any  equal  number  of  men  on  earth ;  and  for  their  decisions  on  such  cases  they 
are  justly  entitled  to  the  thanks  of  every  commercial  man.  They  are  always 
the  judges  where  no  agreement  is  made,  but  in  case  of  agreement  for  a  price* 
you  throw  it  out  of  their  power,  and  it  muat  be  complied  with. 


hlet  and  outlet. 


tcssel  is  moored, 


ISLANDS,  fyc.  to  the  eastward  of  the  BAHAMA  BANKS. 

Having  already  described  the  Islands  on  the  Great  Bank,  tuo.  we  now  pro- 
ceed with  those  to  the  eastward,  that  is  to  say,  Guanahani  or  Cat  Island,  Wat- 
ling's  Island,  the  Crooked  Islands,  he. 

St.  SALVADOR,  to  the  S.  E.  of  Eleuthera  Is  worthy  of  notice,  from  tts 
being  the  first  land  seen  by  Colon,  (Cnlombus)  who  landed  on  its  eastern  coast 
on  the  12th  of  October,  1492.  By  Colon  it  was  named  St.  Salvador.  Its  length 
is  nearly  sixty  miles,  although  narrow,  as  represented.  The  eastern  side  is  lined 
by  a  reef,  on  which  the  ocean  waters  burst,  and  render  it  ieaccessible.  On  the 
S.  W.  in  Port  Howe,  is  good  anchorage. 

LITXJ.E  St.  Salvador  rises  on  the  same  bank,  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  larger 
island.    The  bank  itself  is  foul  and  unequal. 

WATLING'S  ISLAND,  which  lies  thirteen  leagues  to  the  east  of  the  9.  E. 
point  of  St.  Salvador,  is  about  four  and  a  half  leagues  in  extent  from  N.  E>  to  S< 
W.  and  is  of  moderate  height.  It  has  a  pretty  little  town  on  the  south  side* 
and  on  approaching  in  that  direction,  you  will  see  several  houses  on  the  summit 
of  a  hill,  and  appearing  nearly  in  the  centre  of  the  island.  Off  the  S.  E.  point 
are  two  remarkable  rocks,  called  the  Pigeon's  Rocks.  On  the  east  side  of  the 
island  are  a  number  of  sandy  spots.  It  is  one  of  the  most  dangerous  reefs  of 
the  Bahamas,  extending  about  seven  miles,  having  several  rocks  or  heads  which 
cannot  be  perceived  by  the  colour  of  the  water  before  you  are  close  upon  them, 
and  which  have  5, 4,  7,  9,  and  10  fathoms  water  between  them,  and  a  current  set- 
ting west  and  W.  S.  W.  into  Exuma  Sound.  Off  the  north  side  are  the  dan- 
gerous rocks  called  the  White  Rocks,  and  a  reef  extends  outward  four  or  five 
miles  to  the  N.  W. — vessels  ought,  therefore,  to  be  very  careful  in  rounding  thsm. 
There  is  a  small  reef  projecting  from  the  S.  W.  point,  but  it  always  shows  itself. 

Captain  Dowers  of  the  navy,  has  stated  that,  in  the  route  from  New  Provi- 
dence to  Jamaica,  in  1814,  when  "  passing  along  the  Avest  side  of  Watling's  Isl- 
and, about  one  and  a  half  mile  from  the  sandy  beach,  with  the  |j.  W.  point  bear- 
ing S.  by  W.  just  at  dusk  we  discovered  a  ledge  of  breakers,*Xabout  a  ship's 
length  east  and  west)  close  to  us. 

"  When  about  a  cable's  length  to  the  westward  of  the:Ti.  .we  had  the  following 
bearings,  viz.  a  remarkable  black  rock,  close  to  the  shore,  and  breakers  in  one, 
E.  S.  E.  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  island  east,  the  S.  W.  point  S.  by  E. 

«'  We  had  5  fathoms  at  about  two  cable's  length  to  the  northward,  and  deep- 
ened our  water  gradually  as  we  increased  our  distance  to  the  westward.  No 
bottom  with  hand-line,  about  half  a  mile  outside;  the  water  of  the  same  colour 
as  the  ocean :  at  this  time  land  was  distinctly  seen  from  the  mast  head,  bearing 
S.  W.  and  very  low. 


180 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Rum  Key  is  about  ten  miles  long,  from  east  to  west,  three  broad,  and  at  first 
sight  appears  hilly.  It  has  one  of  the  best  salt  ponds  in  the  Bahamas,  where 
there  is  always  a  considerable  quantity  of  largo  grained  salt. 

The  anchorage,  which  is  on  the  south  side,  near  the  east  end  of  the  island  is 
good,  about  half  a  mile  from  the  beach,  and  will  admit  vessels  of  any  size,  af- 
fording shelter  from  the  S.  E — E.  N.  E.  and  round  to  N.  W.  no  accident  having 
ever  happened  to  vessels  loading  here  at  all  seasons. 

On  making  this  island  from  the  eastward,  several  houses  on  its  highest  summit 
will  be  seen ;  and  on  a  nearer  approach,  the  cliffs  above  mentioned :  a  little  to 
the  wd^tward  of  the  latter  is  a  small  bay,  called  Fort  Nelson  or  St.  George's 
Bay.    This  side  may  be  approached  with  safety. 

The  course  from  the  Bird  Rock  (Crooked  Island)  to  Rum  Key,  is  fi.  W.  by  N. 
distant  nineteen  leagues ;  from  Watliiig's  Island,  S.  W.  distance  ei^ht  leagues, 
and  from  Great  harbour,  (Long  Island)  north,  twelve  leagues.  Pilots  will  go 
to  vessels  approaching,  on  making  the  usual  signal,  and  every  despatch  is  given 
while  loading  ;  a  few  minutes  after  weighing  anchor,  a  vessel  will  be  out  at  sea, 
iiyth  almost  any  wind,  and  soon  clear  of  these  islands.  Var.  5°  E. 

jPONCEPTION  is  a  little  island,  surrounded  by  a  reef,  and  lies  half-way 
between  Rum  Key  and  Cat  Island.  From  its  N.  E.  side  a  reef  extends  seven 
miles  to  the  N.  N.  E.  which  was  not  known  till  the  year  1812,  at  which  time 
the  Bi'itiah  frigate  Southamj)ton  was  wrc^ked  upon  it.*  This  reef  is  accounted 
one  of  the  most  daiiyjerous  in  thn  Bahamas,  having  several  dangerous  rocks  or 
heads,  which  cunnot  be  perceived  by  the  colour  of  the  water  before  you  are 
close  to  them.  Conception  m  not  yet  considered  as  finally  determii^ed,  but  it 
appears  to  he  in  about  23°  50'  N.  and'75°  3'  W.  with  the  extremity  of  the  reef 
in  lat.  24°  1',  and  long.  74°  57'. 

ATWOOD'S  KEY  lies  in  the  parallel  of  23=^  10'  N.  with  its  west  point  in 
longitude  73*^  47'.  It  is  three  leagues  from  east  to  west,  and  narrow  from  north 
to  south.  The  island  is  surrounded  by  a  white  shoal,  bordered  with  a  reef.  Off 
the  west  end  the  reef  extends  out  one  league ;  and  under  this  point,  in  the  ex- 
tent of  another  league,  along  shore,  there  is  an  opening,  or  interval,  in  the  reef; 
and  here  vessels,  may  anchor  in  the  white  ground,  in  7  or  8  fathoms,  but  very 
close  to  the  shore.  Off  the  edge  of  the  white  ground  no  soundings  are  to  be 
found.  To  the  east  of  the  island  are  two  small  islets ;  the  outer  one  at  a  league 
and  a  half  from  shore :  these  are  surrounded  with  reefs  and  white  shoals. 

Atwobd's  Key  is  low,  with  bushes,  and  presents  the  same  appearance  as  the 
other  isles  in  this  passage.  Its  greatest  breadth,  which  is  in  the  middle,  is  about 
8  miles ;  for  each  extreme  terminates  in  a  point.  The  reef  on  the  north  side 
breaks,  and  extends  above  two  miles  from  the  land.  The  same  reef,  continuing 
to  the  west,  forms  a  head,  which  is  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  southward  of  the 
point.  "  On  the  south  side,  about  two  miles  from  the  west  point,  you  may  an- 
chor at  three  cables'  length  from  the  land,  and,  for  half  a  league  at  least,  along 
the  shore,  sheltered  from  westerly  and  N.  E.  winds.  Having  brought  the  west 
end  N.  N.  W.  about  one  mile  off,  we  saw  that  end  was  a  point  only,  and  that  the 
other  side  rounded  aivay  E.  N.  E.  full  of  breakers,  wliich  were,  at  least,  two 
miles  from  it ;  we  also  saw  some  ahead  of  us,  and  to  leeward :  we  were  obliged 
to  haul  our  wind,  and  stand  for  the  anchorage  afore-mentioned,  on  the  south  side 
of  the  island.  This  anchorage  extends  about  a  mile  each  way  from  whence  wc 
were,  and  about  three  cables'  length  from  the  island.  You  may  let  go  your  an- 
chor in  8  fathoms,  sand  and  broken  shells,  but  it  is  not  good  holding  ground. 

The  CROOKED  ISLANDS— Of  tliis  singular  group  the  best  idea  may  be 
formed  by  referring  to  the  particular  plan  of  them.  The  positions  appear  to  be 
well  ascertained;  and  particularly  of  Castle  Isle,  or  ttfe  South  Key.  Pitt's 
Town,  a  settlement  on  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  northern  island,  is  the  port  of 
entry. 


*  Upon  enquiry,  some  time  after,  we  were  informed  by  Capt.  Herd,  Ilydrographer  to  Uie 
Admiralty,  tiiut  tlio  situation  of  this  shoal  was  not  known  ut  the  oflicc,  and  the  first  notice 
of  it  which  wc  artorward:^  met  with  waa  on  a  Spanish  chout,  of  lbl7. 


m.(mT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


181 


GABTiiE  Island  is  an  ialot  lyin^  off  tho  south  nnd  of  the  southern  Crooked 
Island  :  between  are  several  white  rocks,  one  of  which  is  very  remarkahle,  ap- 
pearing, when  you  first  make  it,  like  a  white  furt  or  castle,  Troni  which  the  islet 
takes  its  name.  The  position  of  the  islet,  previously  Riven,  was  Si'i^  T  45''  N. 
and  740  17'  30"  W.  Mr.  De  Mayne,  in  1815,  made  it  2iO  7'  37"  n.  and  74^  17 
52"  W.  So  that  its  position  may  be  considered  as  Anally  determined.  Varia- 
tion, 40  40'  E. 

Between  Castle  Island  and  Fortune  Island,  the  land  forms  a  great  indent, 
named  the  Great  Bay,  at  the  entrance  of  which  lie  the  Fish  Keys.  These  kejrs 
arc  not  to  he  approached  too  near.  Between  Oastle  Island  and  Salina  Point  is 
a  flne  sandy  bay,  called  Jamaica  Bay,  wherein  ships  may  anchor  in  0  fathoms, 
well  sheltered  from  S.  W.  winds.  To  tho  N.  E.  of  this  bay  are  two  wells,  with 
excellent  water,  and  wood  may  be  obtained. 

Fortune  Island,  distinguished  by  its  suit-ponds  and  wharfs,  is  rather  more 
than  10  miles  in  length  and  1}  in  breadth.  It  lies  nearly  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W. 
The  south  end  is  very  bold.  Off  its  north  end  are  two  islets ;  and,  a  little  to 
the  north  of  these  islets  is  a  sandy  point,  known  by  the  name  of  French  IVella. 
From  this  a  small  settlement  will  be  seen  on  the  high  land  to  the  northward.  A 
vessel  may  anchor  in  8  fathoms,  with  the  French  Wells  due  East,  2  miles.  Tho 
anchor  phould  be  let  go  immediately  when  on  the  bank,  only  taking  care  to  jnpk 
out  a  clear  spot.  At  this  place  are  several  wells  of  excellent  water,  which  give 
name  to  the  point :  stock  and  wood,  also,  may  be  obtained  here. 

The  Bird  Rock,  or  Passage  Islet,  is  a  low  islet  off  the  N.  W.  point  of 
Crooked  Island.  A  very  dangerous  reef  extends  2  miles  from  it,  in  a  N.  N.  W. 
direction ;  it  then  tends  in  a  circular  direction  lb  the  E.  S.  E.  c  towards  the 
slbore^  This  reef  forms  the  Bird's  Rocks  anchorage,  which  is  rather  indifferent, 
tho  ground  being  partly  foul. 

Southward  of  the  Bird  Rock  is  a  sandy  bay  called  Portland  Harbour,  in 
tlie  middle  of  which,  close  to  the  beach,  is  a  %vell  of  spring-water.  The  best 
anchorage  in  this  place  is  off  the  first  rocky  point  to  the  southward  oi'  the  sandy 
bay,  at  about  three  cables'  length  from  the  shore,  in  7  or  8  fathwms.  You  may 
andior  as  soon  as  you  are  on  the  bank,  with  the  Bird  Rock  bearing  nearly  N.  N. 
W. ;  but,  without  great  caution,  the  anchor  will  be  lost.         -f 

If  you  anchor  in  the  sandy  bay  above  mentioned,  you  must  be  careful  to  avoid 
a  rocky  head,  having  only  16  feet  water  on  it,  and  which  lies  off  the  centre  of 
that  bay,  at  about  three-fourths  of  the  distance  bctw4ii;a  the  beach  and  the  edge 
of  sDuadings. 


DirectioiM  for  vessels  bound  to  Ragged  Island,  (one  of  the  Bahamas,) 
•  on  which  there  is  always  plenty  of  Salt  for  sale. 

It  lies  in  lat.  22°  8'  N.  and  long.  75°  20'  W.  of  Greenwich.— If  bound  to  it 
from  the  Windward  Islands,  a  N.  W.  course  from  Cape  Maiz,  will  fetch  it,  dis- 
tance 45  leagues.  Vessels  bound  to  Ragged  Island  should  pass  to  the  northward 
of  Key  Verde,  in  lat.  22*^  00'  N.  tliencc  steer  W.  .4  N.  by  compass  for  Ragged 
Island.  The  island  is  surrounded  by  innumerable  dangers,  whose  local  positions 
are  but  little  known.  I  would  advise  all  masters  of  vessels  bound  to  it  in  coming 
up  the  straits,  to  keep  the  Cuba  shore  on  board  until  they  run  up  as  high  as  the 
well  noted  high  hills  of  Givara,  which  is  a  Saddle  Hill ;  then  steer  as  above  di- 
rected, and  if  they  exceed  8  feet  draft  of  water,  keep  the  Island  under  their  lee, 
and  nin  the  shore  close  on  board  until  ihcy  bring  the  flag  staff  and  houses  to  bear 
due  south,  then  you  will  open  the  entrance  into  the  harbour,  when  you  must  haul 
in  S.  W.  then  ahead  of  you  a  small  Key  with  store  houses  on  it  will  appear,  and 
at  your  entrance  into  the  harbour  a  low  Black  Rock  will  appear  on  your  stai"- 
board  side  ;  give  it  a  birth,  and  in  running  in  you  will  observe  a  large  red  Canal 
Batik  on  your  larboard  side,  which  you  may  run  eloae  to  until  you  come  abreast 
of  a  low  Bluck  Point  uf  Rock  ua  the  same  (|uarler,  and  whea  yuu  cumc  abreast 


182 


BLUNT  3    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


It 
1) 


of  a  coiipio  of  cannon  mounted  thereon,  you  mny  drop  your  anchor  in  8  or  4 
futhoms  water  until  a  pilot  boards  you,  unless  he  may  have  met  you  on  the  out- 
side. Ragged  Island  is  distinguishable  from  all  other  sounding  Keys  by  a  lofty 
Hill  about  the  middle  of  it,  the  number  of  houses  and  inclosurcs  as  well  as  the 
flag  staff  that  appears  on  it.  Vessels  running  far  from  Cape  Maiz  or  Barracoa 
e"inerally  make  Key  Verde,  close  up  to  which,  either  to  windward  or  leeward, 
there  is  plenty  of  water  for  vessels  of  any  draft.  Due  south  of  Ragged  Island, 
distance  4  leagues,  there  are  three  small  Keys  close  to  each  other,  called  the 
Brothers,  that  have  from  2  to  3  fathoms  water  close  up  to  them.— Kiobano  or  St. 
Domingo  Key  lies  S.  by  E.  of  Ragged  Island,  distance  12  leagues,  to  leeward 
of  which  there  is  plenty  of  water,  but  no  vessels  should  attempt  to  edge  the 
Bank  to  windward  of  it  until  you  are  close  imder  the  Ice  of  Key  Verde,  as  there 
are  many  dangerous  ledges  of  rocks  betwixt  them  on  the  edge  of  the  Straits,  on 
which  many  vessels  have  been  lost. 

American  vessels  subject  to  the  following  port  charges.— At  Ragged  Island, 
which  is  a  branch  of  tlie  port  of  Nassau  Fee  of  entry  (Bahama  currency)  £3 
12 — do.  do.  clearance,  do.  do.  £7  11:  King's  tonnage  duty  29,  6d.  sterling  per 
ton,  4s.  6d.  to  the  dollar ;  colonial  tonnage  duty  Is.  6d.  Bahama  cu«TeDcy,  8s.  to 
the  dollar;  duty  on  Salt,  Id.  per  bushel  Bahama  currency. 

Remarks  on  the  action  of  the  ebb  and  flow  of  tides  at  Ragged  Island,  by 
Duncan  TAriiOR: 

From  the  first  of  January  to  the  last  of  April  they  flow  from  16  to  18  inches, 
and  the  tide  that  flows  an  hour  after  the  rising  of  the  moon,  is  uniformly  6  or  8 
inches  higher  than  the  tide,  which  flows  after  the  setting  of  the  moon. 

I  have  frequently,  during  th#ahove  months,  observed  them  not  to  flow  more 
than  from  6  to  12  inches;  the  spring  tides,  during  the  above  months,  generally 
rise  from  6  to  10  inches  higher  than  the  common  tides. 

From  the  beginning  of  May  to  the  first  of  October  both  tides  gradually  flow 
till  they  arrive  at  the  height  of  from  10  inches  to  2  feet  4  inches,  and  from  18 
inches  to  3  feet  0  inches,  and  then  continue  diminishing  un^il  the  month  of 
January. 

WINDS. — ^The  N.  E.  trade  generally  prevails  here,  except  from  October  to 
April,  which  are  considered  as  the  winter  months :  during  these  months  you  have 
sometimes  strong  gales  from  the  N.  W.  and  very  variable  weather ;  particularly 
about  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  which  ought  to  be  guarded  against. 

DIANA  REEF. — In  the  Crooked  Island  Passage  there  is  a  reef,  discovered 
in  iao5,  called  the  Diana  Reef..  This  shoal  appears  to  lie  N.  W.  i  N.  9  leagues 
from  Castle  Isle. 

In  the  year  1805,  his  Majesty's  packet  Dianai  when  passing  through  Crooked 
Island  Passage,  and  meeting  a  westerly  current,  made  Fortune  Island,  and  after- 
wards, standing  to  the  S.  E.  struck  soundings  on  a  shoal,  of  which  no  notice  had 
been  taken  in  any  chart.  On  the  5th  of  December,  the  latitude  observed  was 
22°  56'  N.  and,  on  the  Gth,  22°  54'  N.  •,  by  which  it  appears,  the  edge  of  the. 
Bahama  Bank  is  farther  to  the  northward  than  it  is  laid  down  in  most  charts. 
At  3,  A.  M.  on  the  0  Lh,  aounded  in  20  fathoms,  hauled  and  sounded  regularly, 
12  fathoms  from  N.  W.  to  S.  E.,  the  bottom  j)lainly  to  be  seen  ;  then  suddenly 
had  no  soundings,  with  25  futlinins.  The  shoal  is  composed  of  sand  and  rocks, 
as  the  anchoraj^u  at  Crooked  Island  :  it  is  about  2  miles  in  length.  Captain 
Edgecumlu>,  of  tiie  Nassau,  government  schooner,  says,  he  was  once  becalmed 
near  it,  and,  rowing  round  in  his  boat,  in  one  place  found  only  4  feet  of  water. 
[Since  this  (in  ll!20)  the  Bahama  Bank  has  been  surveyed,  and  a  Chart  publish- 
ed by  E.  Si  0.  W.  BLUNT,  New-York,  introducing  all  recent  improvements.] 

The  r'lRA-POR-VOS,  an  assemblage  of  barren  rocks,  with  one  low  sandy 
islet,  lie  to  the  W(>st  <»f  Castle  Island,  in  22°  7'  N.  on  a  shoa .  similar  to  that 
of  the  Hn;;sties.  On  the  westc  rn  side  is  an  indifferent  anchorage  :  the  east  side 
is  b(»ld  ;  and,  on  the  S.  E.  side,  at  a  mile  distant,  there  are  from  20  to  25  fathoms, 
coral  and  rocky  ground.  As  these  keys  are  to  leeward,  they  are  not  often  seen 
by  vessels  in  ranging;  along  Castle  Island;  however,  if  it  be  necessary  to  turn, 
y»»u  may  approach  the  hank  nilhin  half  a  league.  All  the  dangerous  parts 
break,  and  the  while  j;,rouiid  will  give  you  notice  in  good  tunc.    You  may,  if  you 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


/ 


183 


choose,  pass  to  the  westward  of  the  Mira-por-vos,  with  the  precaution  only  of 
not  approaching  too  near.  Captain  William  Dowers  was  passinR  this  way  in  an 
evening  of  January,  1814,  and  came  suddenly  on  a  reef  stretching  out  from  th« 
S.  W.  key,  which  bore  East,  2i  mile.     Captain  Dowers  says, 

"  We  had  10  fathoms,  sand,  while  in  stays  ;  but  observed  black  rocks  and  less 
water  in  many  places. 

"  This  reef  appears  to  run  off  west,  for  3  miles,  and  then  extc  Is  to  the  S.  S. 
E.  for  some  distance.  We  counted  ten  above  water.  They  are  all  barren  rocks, 
excepting  the  S.  W.  which  is  a  low  sandy  island,  about  half  a  nitle  in  length, 
and  covered  with  brush-wood." 

The  Mira-por-vos  range  nearly  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  The  middle  of  the  group 
beat's  W.  1 1  miles,  from  Castle  Island.  In  making  them  you  will  gain  soundings 
in  11  fathoms;  and  at  three-quarters  of  a  mile  thence  may  pass  tft  the  west- 
ward of  them ;  but  the  general  channel  is  between  them  and  Castle  Island. 

HOBART'S  BREAKERS.— These  breakers  lie  to  the  south-eastward  of  the 
Mira-por-vos,  and  were  first  discovered  by  Mr.  William  James,  commander  of 
the  packet  Lord  Hobart,  who  gives  the  following  account  of  them  : 

"  Thursday,  Sept.  13,  1821 — At  1  h.  SOm.  P.  M.  saw  Castle  Island  bearing 
N.  by  W.  14'  or  15  miles ;  at  Sh.  30m.  P.  M.  saw  heavy  breakers  ahead ;  at  4, 
tacked  to  the  eastward;  the  Mira-por-vos  bearing  N.  \V.  Castle  Island  N.  E. 
nnd  the  breakers  N.  W.  by  N.  distance  from  the  latter  half  a  mile. 

"The  above  shoal  I  saw  on  a  former  voyas^e,  on  the  213th  of  March,  1818, 
when  working  up  the  passage  from  Jamaica  :  the  weather  was  fine,  water  quite 
smooth;  it  did  not  break,  and  not  seen  until  the  vessel  was  on  the  outer  part  of 
the  bank,  in  5  fathoms  water  :  the  shoalost  water  wo  had,  in  crossing  the  outer 
edge,  was  4  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  which  was  plainly  to  be  seen." 

BROWN'S  SHOAL. — For  out  knowledge  of  this  danger  we  are  indebted 
to  Captain  Livingston,  who  has  given  us  the  following  account  of  it: — ^^ Ihowti's 
Shoal,  ten  leagues  S.  S.  E.  by  compass  from  Key  Verde,  was  seen  by  Caj>t. 
William  Brown,  of  the  schooner  Union,  of  Plymouth,  Mass.  who  stated  to  me 
that  it  is  of  considerable  extent,  and  that,  from  the  manner  in  which  the  sea 
broke  over  it,  he  does  not  suppose  there  can  be  more  than  2  or  3  feet  of  water 
on  tlie  shoalest  part.  Latitude  and  longitude,  inferred  from  tile  positlftn  of  Kej[ 
Verde,  21°  30'  N.  and  74^  52'  W." 

The  HOGSTIES  are  three  low  keys,  encompassed  to  the  eastward  by  an  ex- 
tensive reef.  They  lie  at  the  distance  of  ten  leagues  N.  by  W.  1  W.  from  tho 
N.  W.  point  of  Ileneaga.  About  them  are  many  rocks  and  broken  ground,  and 
when  it  blows  hard  the  sea  breaks  ever  thf^m  all.  The  southernmost  is  the 
smallest,  and  bears  from  the  middle  key,  which  is  the  largest,  S.  S.  E.  Tho 
smallest  requires  a  good  birth,  it  being  shoal  all  round ;  but  you  may  sail  close 
to  the  largest,  and  anchor  in  4  or  6  fathoms,  with  that  key  bearing  E.  S.  E. 
About  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  Hogsties  is  a  depth  of  18  and  20  fathoms. 

GREAT  HENEAGA. — Great  Heneaga  is  rather  low,  and  cannot  be  seen  at 
a  considerable  distance,  in  consequence  of  the  haze  which  constantly  prevails  in 
these  latitudes.  In  making  the  west  end  there  is  no  danger  whatever.  Two 
sandy  bays  at  that  end  afford  good  anchorage.  From  the  trade-wind's  blowing 
over  the  island,  the  northernmost  bay  is  the  best.  Stand  in,  and  you  will  per- 
ceive the  line  of  soundings  by  the  colour  of  the  water,  extending  about  half  a 
mile  from  the  beach.  So  soon  as  you  are  in  soundings,  let  go  your  anchor,  in  6 
or  7  fathoms. 

This  island  is  about  fifteen  leagues  in  length  and  ten  miles  in  breadth.  Tho 
body  of  it  lies  in  lat.  21^  ft'  N.  Fresh  water  may  bo  procured  in  the  northern- 
most bay,  on  the  west  side,  at  a  small  distance  from  the  beach. 

A  shoal,  marked  doiibtful,  which  is  exhibited  on  some  charts  as  lying  off  the 
8.  W.  end  of  Great  Heneaga,  has  been  carefully  sought  for,  and  said  not  to  ex- 
ist, but  we  think  otherwise. 


M.  Cfuistcnct.  (If  Pi 


"  GreaC  Heneaga,  like  all  the  islands  which 


bound  the  Windward  Passages,  is  very  low,  with  small  hummocks,  which,  at  a 
distance,  appear  like  detached  islets.  The  land,  in  clear  weather,  may  be  seen  at 
the  distance  of  five  or  six  leagues,  and  you  need  not  fear  coining  witlun  half  a 


184 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


league  on  tho  western  side.  In  a  fino  bay  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard 
side,  when  going  through  the  passage,  you  may  anchor,  on  white  bottom,  choos- 
ing your  ground  by  your  eye ;  as,  in  many  parts  of  such  bottom,  there  are  stones, 
which  sometimes  rise  to  a  considerable  height  above  the  level  of  the  sand." 

There  are  some  rocks  about  the  southwest  point,  with  a  reef  which  stretches 
out  to  nearly  the  extent  of  a  mile.  In  the  bay  between  this  and  the  west  point, 
called  Shallow  Bay,  you  may  anchor  close  in.  The  bay  is  surrounded  by  a  reef, 
which,  however,  shows  itself,  although  there  are  2  or  8  fathoms  over  it ;  with- 
out the  reef  is  a  white  sand,  to  the  distance  of  th  'ee  cable's  length,  and  on  this 
is  the  anchorage,  in  7  or  8  fathoms.  Farther  out,  in  a  line  between  the  two 
points,  which  lie  S.  S.  E.  and  N.  N.  W.  from  each  other,  in  15  fathoms,  is  rocky 
ground.  This  bay  is  not  so  deep  as  the  Great  Bay ;  but,  as  the  bank  is  less 
steep,  ships  are  not  so  liable  to  drive  here ;  neither  is  the  landing  so  easy,  but 
there^  are  clear  places  in  the  reef.  There  is  no  water  but  in  the  rainy  season ; 
then  it  is  not  very  good,  as  it  lies  among  the  mangrove  bushes. 

The  Great  Bay  is  sheltered  from  the  north  by  the  northwest  point,  and  from 
the  south  by  the  west  point.  This  bay  is  two  and  a  half  leagues  wide,  and  one 
deep;  and  all  along  the  shore  there  is  a  border  of  sand  four  cables'  letigth  wide, 
on  which  you  will  have  r»  fathoms,  at  a  pistol-shot  from  the  shore,  to  1 5  J  fathoms ; 
and,  at  half  a  cable's  length  from  that,  45  fathoms  of  water.  If  you  should  be 
there  in  the  season  of  tlie  Norths,  you  may  anchor  under  the  north-west  point, 
so  as  to  be  sheltered  from  the  \V.  N.  W. ;  and  if  there  when  the  southerly  winds 
prevail,  you  may  anchor  under  the  south  point,  so  as  to  be  sheltered  from  the  W. 
S.  W.  There  are  not  more  than  fotu'  or  five  points  of  the  westerly  winds  which 
could  hurt  you ;  but  they  are  not  to  be  feared,  as  they  seldom  blow,  and  ncer 
violently.     It  is  easy  landing  all  round  the  bay. 

Having  rounded  the  N.  W.  point,  you  will  see  a  little  islet  to  the  E.  N.  E.  and 
a  ledge  of  reefs  for  more  than  a  league  along  the  shore,  and  upwards  of  a  mile 
from  it.  This  coast  will  be  known  by  a  hummock,  (k  Mornet}  the  only  one  on 
the  north  side,  which  is  lower  than  the  south,  and  covered  with  bushes. 

At  the  (^astern  part  of  the  north  side  of  Henoaga  is  a  bay,  three  leagues  wide, 
and  nearly  on«  deep,  where  you  may  anchor,  but  will  be  sheltered  from  souther- 
ly winds  dniy.  "llliis  bay  is  little  known.  At  about  a  mile  from  the  S.  E.  point 
is  a  little  islet,  and  around  it  the  bottom  appears  white  :  upon  this  you  may  an- 
chor, at  about  a  musket-shot  from  the  island.  The  white  bottom  continues  along 
the  south  part,  with  here  and  there  some  reefs  with  breakers. 

BISHOP'S  REEF. — This  is  a  very  dangerous  reef,  bearing,  by  compass,  E. 
S.  E.  from  the  rock  at  the  N.  E.  point  of  Great  Heneaga.  Captain  Livingston, 
who  has  given  us  the  information,  says,  "I  saw  it  in  September,  1816,  on  my 
passage  from  Jamaica  to  Charleston,  S.  C  in  the  brigantine  Agnes,  of  Greenock, 
then  under  my  command.  The  sea  broke  very  heavy  on  it;  and,  from  appear- 
ances, I  cannot  suppose  that  there  are  more  than  3  to  5  feet  water  on  the  shoal- 
est  part  of  it.  The  white  water  showed  at  a  considerable  distance  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  breakers,  arid  I  am  disposed  to  think  the  shoal  extends  fully  two 
leagues  out,  from  the  N.  E.  end  of  Great  Heneaga ;  but  I  conjecture  therp  k  a 
passage  between  it  and  the  island. 

•'  I  was  informed  by  the  late  Francis  Owen,  Master-attendiint  at  Port  Royal, 
Jamaica,  that  tho  Statira  frigate,  was  lost  upon  this  shoal ;  and  Mr.  Owen  men- 
tioned that  it  had  been  seen  many  years  ago  by  Mr.  Bishop.  The  variation  here 
is  only  about  one  (|uarter  of  a  point  easterly,  but  it  increases  near  St.  Domingo." 
In  his  notice  of  a  rock,  supposed  to  be  this,  Mr.  Bishop  says,  when  it  bore  N. 
W.  4  W.  disti\nt  about  two  leagues,  they  saw  th«  ground  under  them,  having  no 
more  than  3J  fathoms  water ;  therefore  hauled  up  S.  S.  E.  and  kept  the  lead  go- 
ing till  they  had  from  iih  to  4,  4.i,  8,  10,  fathoms,  and  tlien  no  ground. 

LITTLE  HENEAGA.— This  island,  which  lies  to  the  northward  of  the  N.E. 
point  of  Great  Heneaga,  is  low  and  uneven,  »!xcept  a  little  mount  or  hummock, 
which  is  at  an  equal  distance  from  the  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  points ;  not  far  from  tho  , 
shore,  almost  round  the  island,  it  is  sandy,  except  at  the  S.  E.  point,  where  a 
ledge  of  rocks  stretches  oil'  and  breaks,  nearly  one  mile  and  a  half.  On  the 
south  side  there  is  a  white  bottom  bordered  with  a  reef,  at  the  foot  of  which  i$ 


H^ 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


185 


a  depth  of  40  fathoms.    This  island  is  divided  from  Great  Heneaga  by  a  deep 
channel,  a  league  and  a  half  in  breadth. 

CIUDADO  REEF.— The  shoal  thus  named  lies  to  the  northward  of  th« 
eastern  side  of  Little  Heneaga,  bearing  N.  J  E.  by  compass,  six  leagues,  from 
the  body  of  that  island.  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  10^  leagues  from  the  S.  W.  point  of  Mo-- 
gane,  and  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  ten  leagues  from  the  West  Cayco,  is  a  very  danger- 
ous reef  of  sunken  rocks,  called  by  the  Spaniards  the  Ciudado  Reef.  The  body 
of  it  lies  in  about  21°  53'  N.  and  72^  55'  W.  This  reef  was  seen,  in  passing, 
by  Mr.  De  Mayne,  in  the  Landrail,  surveying  cutter,  1816,  and  is  particularly  to 
be  noticed  as  lying  in  a  direct  line  between  Little  Heneaga  and  the  east  end  of 
Mayaguana,  and  only  a  few  miles  to  the  west  of  a  line  between  the  West  Cayco 
and  the  S.  W.  point  of  Mayaguana,  being  nearly  in  mid-channel  between  each. 

MAYAGUANA  is  an  island,  8  leagues  in  length,  between  the  parallels  of  £4° 
18'  and  22°  30'  N.  It  is  surrounded  by  a  reef,  which  runs  above  a  league  and  a 
half  to  the  eastward :  on  the  eastern  part  of  this  reef  are  several  keys,  and  5  or 
6  huge  rocks  above  water.  Near  the  northernmost  point  of  it  is  an  islet,  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  long,  with  a  small  key  to  the  S.  W.  of  it.  The  rest  of  the 
reef  is  bordered  with  rocks  under  water,  on  which  the  sea  breaks.  On  the 
south  side  is  a  passage  for  small  vessels  to  go  through,  and  be  sheltered  by  May- 
aguana on  one  side,  and  the  reef  on  the  other.* 

From  the  S.  W.  to  the  N.  W.  point  of  Mayaguana,  the  coast  is  clear,  and 
forms  two  bays,  the  bottoms  of  which  are  of  white  sand,  where  you  may  anchor 
at  about  two  cable's  length  from  the  land.  The  two  points  lie  N.  N.  E.  and  S. 
S.W.  from  each  other,  distance  seven  miles.  It  is  very  necessary  to  be  acquaint- 
ed with  these  anchoring  places,  as  you  might  be  caught  here  with  a  north ;  then 
it  would  be  better  to  anchor  under  the  N.  W.  point,  where  you  would  be  shel- 
tered from  the  N.  N.  W.—N.  E.— E— S.  E.  and  as  far  as  the  S.  S.  W.  and 
that  by  the  island  and  the  reefs,  which  run  a  long  league  to  the  N.  W.  and  on 
which  the  sea  breaks  with  great  violence.  From  the  N.  W.  point  the  coast  in- 
clines to  the  E.  and  E.  S.  E.  forming  a  kind  of  bay,  bordered  by  reefs  threo 
miles  from  land,  and  having  some  passages  for  very  small  vessels.  At  the  east 
point  of  this  bay,  a  little  inland,  are  two  little  hillocks ;  then  the  coast  tends  E. 
S.  E.  full  five  leagues  to  the  east  point,  which  we  have  already  described.  May- 
aguana and  Caycos  Islands  form  the  Caycos  passage. 

The  FRENCH  KEYS,  between  Mayaguana  and  the  Crooked  Islands,  have 
been  described  by  the  pilot  of  the  Eagle,  a  French  bark,  as  follows:  "These 
keys,  hitherto  but  little  known,  have  been  said  to  be  three ;  but  what  probably 
gave  rise  to  that,  was  a  rock  which  appeared  out  of  water  as  high  as  aboat.  ills 
about  half  a  mile  to  the  N.E.  of  the  largest  island,  among  the  reefs  and  banks  which 
run  from  one  to  the  other.  '  Having  made  Acklin's  Isle,  (the  southern  Crooked 
Island)'  says  the  Pilot,  *  we  stood  for  the  French  Islands,  and  anchored  in  the 
white  water,  on  the  west  side  of  the  largest,  about  two  cables'  length  from  it* 
sheltered  by  a  reef,  which  runs  to  the  north  and  N.  W  two  miles.' 

"This  island  is  no  more  than  throe  miles  north  and  south,  and  half  as  much 
east  and  west ;  the  east  and  north  sides  are  surrounded  by  reefs,  which  break. 
The  anchorage  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  south  point,  near  which 
is  a  landing-place;  and,  by  digging  two  or  3  feet  in  the  sand,  you  will  get  good 
fresh  water.  Some  English  people,  who  were  wrecked  hero,  had  made  a  pond, 
which  dried  up  on  the  Eagle's  filling  four  casks  out  of  it.  ftut  in  a  quarter  of  an 
hour  it  was  as  full  as  ever.  It  is  very  surprising,  that,  at  about  ten  p.-ices  from  it, 
there  is  a  salt-water  pond.  This  island  is  low  and  almost  even,  though,  when  you 
are  at  a  distance,  there  appear  some  small  risings,  which  diversify  a  little  its  ap- 
pearance: the  ground  is  Bothing  but  sand  or  rock,  wilh  some  bushes  upon  it,  nt 
only  for  firing.    The  other  island,  which  is  the  smallest,  lies  east  and  west,  about 


*  Captain  M'Gowan  was  lately  cast  away  on  Mayaguana  Koef.  He  says  it  lies  a  mile  and 
three-quarters  farther  out  than  the  cliurts  show.  I  previously  considered  that  it  did,  a  mil« 
and  a  half.  He  ha?,  I  understand,  determined  the  position  of  surae  points,  in  the  PtMags 
InlandS)  and  found  a  spring-well  on  Heneaga ;  a  matter  of  much  impoitance  undar  ■  Iropieal 
•un.  .        , 

34 


1^6 


BLUNT  8   AMERICAN  COAST   PILOT. 


two  tnilefl  to  the  eastward  of  the  first ;  but  the  passage  between  them,  ttiade  rorr 
narrow  by  the  reefs  on  both  sides,  is  not  a  mile  wide,  and  is  fit  only  for  small 
craft." 

The  CATCOS.— The  Gaycos  are  an  assemblage  of  several  islands  and  islet** 
which  inclose  a  white  bank,  some  parts  of  which  are  very  shallow,  and  others 
tolerably  deep.  There  are  four  principal  islands,  viz.  the  Grand  Cayeo,  the 
North  Cayco,  the  Northttest  or  Providence  Cayco,  and  the  Littk  or  fVeat  Cayco : 
These  form  a  semi-circle  from  the  east  to  the  west,  round  by  the  north,  and  are 
terminated  on  the  south  part  by  a  great  bank,  on  which  there  is  from  9  to  15  feet 
of  water. 

The  northern  part  of  these  islands  is  bordered  with  a  white  shoal,  on  which 
is  a  reef,  extending  half  a  league  from  shore;  at  the  N.  E.  part  the  white  shoal 
extends  outward  a  whole  league ;  and,  at  its  extremity,  is  a  reef  called  Basse  St. 
Philippe,  or  St.  Philip's  Reef,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  with  violence.  At  a  ca- 
ble's length  to  the  north  and  the  east  of  this  shoal,  you  will  not  have  less  than  7 
fathoms.  South  of  it  the  white  bottom  extends  to  the  south,  and  approaches 
imperceptibly  towards  the  shore ;  you  find  4  or  6  fathoms  between  it  and  the 
shore,  which,  in  an  urgent  case,  leaves  a  sure  passage. 

From  the  south  point  of  the  Little  Cayco,  a  chain  of  breakers  extends  to  the 
east  three  leagues,  after  which  they  decrease,  tending  southward,  to  join  a  sandy 
islet  called  French  Key.  This  is  low,  with  some  bushes  on  it,  and  bears  from 
the  south  point  of  Little  Cayco  nearly  E.  S.  E.  five  leagues.  The  reef  from 
the  French  Key  stretches  to  the  south  seven  and  a  half  leagues,  to  join  another 
sandy  islet,  which  has  net  more  than  2,0  paces  extent,  and  is  entirely  drowned  at 
high  water :  all  this  part  of  the  reef  is  bold,  and,  as  the  water  breaks  pretty 
strongly  upon  it,  you  readily  see  it;  but,  south  of  the  sandy  islet,  there  are  no 
breakers,  and  you  cannot  have  notice  of  the  edge  of  the  bank,  but  by  the  white- 
ness of  the  water. 

From  this  sandy  islet  the  bank  sweeps  a  short  league  to  the  south,  then  to 
the  S.  E.  six  leagues,  whence  it  trenches  to  the  east  five  and  a  half  leagues,  and 
N  N.  W.  two  and  a  half  leagues  to  abreast  of  the  southern  islets,  which  I  ": 
situated  more  than  a  league  within  the  white  water. 

From  the  sandy  islets,  as  far  as  abreast  of  the  sor.'jern  ones,  the  bank  is  very 
dangerous;  you  cannot  sec  any  land,  and  come  suddenly  from  a  sea  without 
bottom  into  2  or  3  fathoms.  The  colour  of  the  water  is  the  only  thing  tb'.c  can 
warn  you  of  the  danger;  and  this  is  by  no  means  certain,  for  navigators,  accus- 
tomed to  see  on  the  surface  of  the  water  the  shadow  of  clouds,  which  sometimes 
has  the  appearance  of  shoals,  are  often  lulled  into  a  fttal  security.  No  motive 
then  ought  to  induce  you  to  approach  this  part  of  the  bank,  and  you  will  do 
right  to  keep  at  a  good  distance. 

If,  after  having  been  turned  to  windward  several  days  in  this  neighbourhood^  you 
have  not  seen  the  land,  the  safest  way  is  never  to  cross  thf  latitude  21°  :t  the 
night,  but  to  wait  for  day-light;  then,  should  you  perceive  any  change  in  the  wa- 
ter, which  indicates  white  grounds,  without  seeing  either  land  or  breakers,  you 
may  be  sure  you  are  on  the  western  side;  when  you  may  steer  N.  V/.  i  W.  to 
fetch  the  Little  Cayco,  and  go  through  the  passage  to  leeward  of  these  islands. 

Should  you  see  the  southern  islets  bearing  about  north  or  N.  W.  you  may 
stand  on  upon  the  white  water,  in  from  7  to  12  fathoms;  then  make  a  tack  or 
two  to  get  to  windward,  and  go  through  the  Turk's  Island  Passage,  which  is  to 
windward  of  the  Caycos. 

So  soon  as  you  see  the  southern  islets,  the  bank  is  no  longer  dangerous,  and 
you  may  go  on  it  as  far  as  one  or  one  and  a  half  league :  south  and  S.  W.  of 
these  islands  you  will  not  have  less  than  7  fathoms,  and  generally  from  Oto  11. 

The  channel  betioeen  the  Caycos  and  Turk's  Islands  is  six  leagues  across  in  the 
narrowest  part :  it  ia  a  £;ood  passage,  and  without  any  danger;*  you  may  corns 

*  A  ahoal,  called  the  Swimmer  Bank,  lies  on  the  western  side,  as  shown  on  the  Chart. 
This  shoal  was  discovered,  some  years  since,  by  Mr.  Cooper,  master  of  the  vessel  Speedwell 
And  bears  flrom  Grand  Key,  S.  W.  by  W.  six  and  a  half  leagues.  It  ia  dangerous,  and  should 
M(  be  approached  without  great  caution. 


^« 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


187 


Wttiiin  lialf  a  league  of  the  Caycos,  and  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Meti  with- 
out fear.  Through  this  passage  you  may  turn  with  great  safety,  and  will  not 
feel  the  current,  if  you  do  not  come  within  one  and  a  half  league  of  the  shore. 

You  ujUI  find  an  anchorage  on  the  white  shoals,  near  the  south  point  of  the 
Great  Gayco,  which  may  shelter  ships  that  do  not  draw  more  than  15  or  16  feet  t 
west  of  this  ^t  int  there  is  a  fresh  water  lagoon. 

The  best  anchorage  for  small  vessels  is  to  the  w<^st  of  the  North  Gayo,  near  .the 
small  Island  of  Pines,  in  the  inlet  which  that  island  makes  with  Providence  Isl- 
and. Within  the  reefs  that  border  that  part  of  the  coast,  lies  L'Anse  it  TEau, 
(Watering  Bay)  where  you  anchor  in  3  fathoms,  upon  a  white  bottom :  there  is 
good  water,  and  it  is  the  watering-place  of  the  Provldenciers.  You  will  disco- 
Ter  the  entrance  of  the  bay,  by  coasting  along  the  reef,  from  the  rounding  in  of 
Che  coast,  after  passing  the  west  point  of  the  Three  Maries  and  Booby  Bocks. 
When  you  perceive  a  great  extent  of  white  water  within  the  reef,  you  must  send 
your  boat  to  find  the  channel,  and  moor  her  in  it,  making  use  of  your  lead :  and,  if 
you  want  to  get  in,  be  not  afraid  of  coming  near  the  reef.  When  you  are  once 
within  the  reef,  you  may  let  go  your  anchor  in  3  fathoms :  you  may  go  farther  in, 
by  towing  or  turning  with  caution :  the  entrance  is  not  more  than  half  a  league 
or  two  miles  from  the  shore. 

At  the  N.  'V.  point  of  Providence  Key  the  reef  terminates.  There  h  an- 
chorage off  this  coast  in  8  or  10  fathoms,  but  you  must  range  the  shore  pretty 
close  to  be  on  the  White  Shoals,  bringing  a  steep  hummock,  seen  a  quarter  of  a 
league  inland,  to  bear  S.  W.  then  you  will  see  the  shoul  recede  a  little  from  the 
•bore,  and  afford  a  large  space  for  the  turning  ot  the  shi]).  Four  miles  south  of 
,  the  N.  W.  point  a  reef  commences  from  the  coast,  running  S.  W .  westerly, 
2|  leagues :  this  reef  is  terminated  by  a  small  sandy  islet,  almost  under  water. 

From  this  sandy  islet  the  reef  runs  in  to  the  ciistward,  and  afterwards  trenches 
out  to  join  the  north  part,  off  the  Little  Cayco,  which  is  surrounded  with  white 
shoals. 

The  Little  Cayco  bears  S.  W.  by  S.  from  the  N.  W.  point  of  Providence  Cayco^ 
which  is  of  a  middling  height,  and  of  a  white  colour;  you  may  range  along  the 
N.  W.  part,  close  to  the  edge  of  the  white  grounds  ;  the  west  part  is  very  bold  lo 
the  south  point,  where  you  may  ancbor  in  from  5  to  7  fathoms  on  the  whito 
bottom. 


Wi'v.' 


Additional  Remarks  on  the  Caycos,  &ic.  translated  from  the  French. 

The  Little  Cayco  extends  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.  about  7  miles,  being  its  whole 
length.  You  may  anchor  all  along  the  western  side,  Ihere  being  4  or  5  fathoms 
water  close  to  the  land;  but  it  is  a  hard  bottom,  and  too  near  the  shore.  At  the 
N.  E.  point  is  a  bank  of  rocks,  extending  to  the  N.  E.  near  a  mile,  on  which  the 
sea  breaks  ;  there  are  2,  and  3  fathoms  close  to  it. 

The  length  of  the  Little  Cayco  has  been  measured  in  a  boat  in  a  fresh  breeze, 
and  smooth  water ;  the  log  hove  frequently,  and  there  was  not  any  difference  in 
the  going  and  coming  back,  therefore  it  is  probably  very  exact.  This  island  is  o 
low  land,  whose  border  is  of  sharp  stones,  which  resound  like  a  bell :  it  is  the 
worst  ground  which  can  be  seen  ;  there  are  neither  salt-pits,  savannas,  nor  fresh 
water.  On  the  north  side,  about  SOO  paces  from  the  shore,  there  grow  in  the 
sand  a  few  Lataniers,  which  always  denote  a  bad  ground :  the  inland  parts  are 
covered  with  bushes.  There  are  some  ponds  with  brackish  water ;  and,  as  rain  is 
not  uncommon  here,  people  who  have  the  misfortune  to  be  cast  away  on  this  isle 
may  obtain  fresh  water. 

By  good  observations,  the  latitude  of  the  S.  W.  point  is  21°  36',  longitude 
71°  20' ;  you  may  run  along  the  south  side,  very  close  to  it,  upon  the  White 
Bank,  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  and  no  reef.  When  that  point  bears  N.  you  have  a  full 
view  of  all  the  Caycos  Bank.    This  elbow  is  a  sneltcr  against  the  North,  for 


188 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


ttmt9  are  B  or  6  fathoms  of  water  close  to  the  breakers,  which  are  very  near  the 
land. 

AKbough  the  west  side  of  the  Little  Cayco  is  quite  clear  of  rocks,  and  there 
are  6  or  7  fathoms  within  musket-shot  of  the  sl][ore,  so  that  you  may  anchor 
there,  yet  the  best  place  to  anchor  (and  which  is  most  known)  is  under  the  N^  W. 
point,  rather  within  it,  in  8  fathoms,  sandy  bottom  ;  there  you  are  sheltered  from 
theeasterly  breezes,  it  is  prudent,  however,  to  have  another  anchor  S.  by  W. 
io  14  fathoms,  clear  ground  ;  this  precaution  will  secure  you  against  a  sudden 
westerly  wind ;  and  by  that,  in  case  it  should  continue,  you  get  easier  under 
wei^h. 

The  north  side  of  the  Little  Cayco  is  covered  by  a  reef,  beginning  off  the  N* 
W.  point,  and  stretching  as  far  as  the  Great  Cayco.  This  reef  is  the  only  difficulty 
in  the  Passage  between.  It  is  nearly  4  leagues  from  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  Little 
Cayco  to  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  Great  Cayco,  and  the  reef  extends  along  that 
space;  that  is,  as  far  as  the  western  point  of  the  Great  Cayco,  which  is  about 
H  miles  distant  from  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  island  ;  to  the  southvard  of  the  last 
point  is  Canoe  Cove,  {L'Anse  au  CanotJ  the  only  good  anchorage  in  this  western 
part,  of  which  wc  shall  speak  hereafter. 

On  the  west  side  of  the  reef  there  is  a  Little  Key,  called  Sand  Key,  bearing 
north  westerly,  from  the  east  part  of  the  Little  Cayco  :  it  is  very  low,  and  has  a 
reef  on  its  north  part.  Many  ships  have  been  lost  on  it,  by  its  not  having  been 
laid  down  in  the  Charts  :  for,  after  their  running  along  the  west  side  of  the  West 
Cayco,  they  have  hauled  to  the  eastward  for  the  Providence  Cayco ;  whereas, 
ivhen  you  have  run  along  the  former  about  a  league,  you  should  make  a  N.  by 
W.  course,  to  give  a  birth  to  the  Little  Key,  and  the  reef  which  stretches  to  the 
northward  of  it. 

To  the  southward  of  the  islet,  between  that  and  the  reef,  is  a  passage  of 
about  H  mile,  to  the  Bank;  without  the  islet  are  10,  8  and  6  fathoms;  in  the 
middle,  4  fathoms,  and  within  it,  3 ;  but  then  you  immediately  come  into  1 
fathoms. 

From  Sandy  Key,  the  reef  runs  N.  N.  E-  2  leagues,  being  bordered  with  white 
water,  on  which  you  have  10  fathoms,  within  musket-shot  of  the  reef  that  joins 
theN.  W.  part  of  the  Great  Cayco,  a  little  to  the  southward  of  Canoe  Cove. 


Particular  observations  on  the  Little  Cayco,  inc.  from  the  Journal  of  the 

Emerald. 

"Being  at  noon,  with  the  Hope,  a  small  vessel,  off  the  S.  W.  point  of  the 
Little  or  West  Cayco,  a  mile  from  it,  wc  ran  along  the  west  side,  at  that  distance, 
and  then  made  the  Hope  anchor  in  7  fathoms,  hard  sand,  within  half  a  cables' 
length  of  theN.  W.  point.  Seeing  that  the  vessel  drove,  the  bank  being  very 
steep  and  narrow,  and  the  weather  inclined  to  be  squally,  we  preferred  keeping 
under  sail,  and  made  several  trips,  keeping  well  in  with  the  land,  at  one  mile  dis- 
tance. Along  the  reef,  on  the  west  side,  we  landed  very  easily  in  some  hollow 
places,  filled  with  sand,  and  made  by  the  sea  in  the  sandy  stones  which  compose 
the  island :  opposite  these  holes,  at  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  N. 
W.  point,  is  the  best  anchoring. 

"The  west  side  of  the  Little  Cayco  runs  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  about  five 
miles  and  a  half.  On  this  side  is  the  anchoring,  sheltered  from  the  trade-winds  : 
nearer  the  N.  part,  (which  is  nothing  but  a  steep  border  of  sand)  at  a  cable's 
length,  you  anchor  at  about  a  pistol-shot  from  the  shore,  in  8  fathoms ;  at  two 
ship's  length,  there  are  1  &  fathoms ;  and  at  half  a  cable's  length  farther,  there 
was  no  ground  under  the  ship.  If  you  want  to  stay  there,  the  best  way  will  be 
to  have  the  outer  anchor  in  15  fathoms  water,  and  to  carry  another  on  shore. 
There  is  no  swell  with  the  E.  N.  E.  and  E.  S.  £.  breezes,  however  hard  they 
may  blow." 

CANOE  COVE — This  little  bay  is  on  the  west  side  of  Providence  Cayco, 
and  may  be  of  great  use,  as  there  is  water  enough  for  all  sorts  of  ships,  sheltered 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COA?T    PILOT. 


189 


1  % 


from  the  Norths,  which  you  should  always  guard  against  in  tliis  Passage.  The 
largest  ships  may  anchor  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  on  a  sandy  bottom,  loolcing  out  for  a 
clear  ground,  and  here  and  there  you  will  And  it  rocky.  You  are  sheltered  from 
the  N.  to  the  £.  and  to  the  S.  E.  by  S.  The  anchoring  is  within  the  west  point, 
which  you  bring  to  bear  N.  taking  care  not  to  come  near  the  reef,  which  runs 
tround  this  point  for  a  quarter  of  a  league ;  the  reef  ends  there,  and  does  not 
begin  again  till  near  two  miles  farther  to  leeward ;  then  it  must  bear  S.  by  W. 
from  you. 

From  the  north-west  point  of  the  Little  Cayco  to  this  cove,  is  N.  N-  W. 
3^  leagues ;  but  you  must  make  a  more  westerly  course,  in  order  to  avoid  tho 
reef  and  the  Little  Key  already  spoken  of. 

WATERING  BAY  and  PINE'S  KEY.— To  the  N.  E.  of  the  N.  W.  point 
of  Providence  Cayco,  the  coast  forms  a  bight,  the  two  points  of  which  are  five 
leagues  asunder ;  between  them  is  Watering  Bay  and  Pine's  Key. 

At  this  anchoring  you  are  sheltered  from  theN.  E.  to  the  S.  S.  W.  passing  by 
the  East. 

The  greatest  advantage  of  Pine's  Key  is  a  great  lagoon  of  fresh  water,  suffi- 
cient for  fifty  ships :  it  is  very  drinkable,  and  not  far  from  the  beach. 

The  bottom  is  too  white  near  the  land,  and  in  the  Cove,  for  you  to  catch  large 
fish  with  the  seine  ;  but  you  must  go  in  a  boat  on  the  edge  of  the  reef  without ; 
and  you  will  succeed  still  better,  if  you  sail  over,  with  your  lines  afloat. 

From  the  east  part  of  Pine's  Key  you  may  descry  all  the  islands  and  keys, 
which  are  scattered  within  the  Cayco,  from  N.  to  S.  E. 

The  following  Remarks  on  the  Caycos,  &ic.  have  lieen  written  by  Captain 
Livingston : — 

"  The  whole  of  the  north  side  of  the  Caycos  is  bounded  by  a  reef,  through 
which,  though'there  are  various  openings,  they  ought  not  to  be  attempted  by  a 
stranger  without  a  pilot.  Vessels  ought  not  to  near  the  land  within  a  league  and 
a  half,  in  running  down  to  the  northward  of  the  Caycos.  Watering  Bay  isextremely 
dangerous,  and  is  most  incorrectly  laid  down  in  every  chart  I  have  seen.  The 
Providence  Caycos  is  bordered  to  the  eastward,  and  northward,  and  westward, 
by  as  dangerous  reefs  a'S  I  ever  saw  ;  among  which,  if  a  vessel  once  gets  embay- 
ed, it  is  next  to  impossible  that  she  can  escape.  The  American  sloop  of  war 
Chippewa,  the  ship  Aimwcll,  of  London,  and  brig  Messenger,  Knubley,  were  all 
lost  upon  these  reefs  in  1816,  within  a  few  weeks  of  each  other ;  and  two  days 
after  the  Aimwell  was  lost,  a  vessel  narrowly  escaped  the  same  fate ;  to  this  I 
was  an  eye-witness,  as  I  had  observed  the  Aimwell  on  shore  before  dark,  and 
laid  too  all  night,  with  the  view  of  rendering  her  assistance  :  and,  when  day-light 
came,  I  perceived  a  brigantine  completely  embayed ;  but  those  on  board  of  her 
seemed  to  discover  their  error,  and,  profiting  l)y  the  wind's  being  at  the  time  off- 
shore, escaped. 

"  After  rounding  the  north-west  point  of  the  Caycos,  and  bound  to  the  south- 
ward through  the  Passage,  having  brought  the  N.  W.  point  to  bear  E.  or  E. 
by  N.  you  may  run  safely,  even  in  the  darkest  ni";ht,  steering  at  first  S. 
W.  i  W.  by  compass,  for  5  leagues,  and  then  S.  by  W.  ill  day-light.  By  these 
courses  you  will  clear  the  elbow  reef  off  Sand  Key,  between  the  Providenciers 
and  Little  Caycos,  and  at  the  same  time,  keep  sufficiently  to  windward  of  the 
Heneaga  and  Bishop's  Shoal. 

The  Caycoses  are  connected  by  a  reef  of  coral  rocks,  and  there  is  no  danger  of 
them  in  the  day,  as  the  white  water  shows  itself.    Vessels  making  the  land  about 
dark,  should  never  attempt  to  run  through  this  passage  in  the  night,  unless  sure 
of  their  situation. 

TURK'S  ISLAND  PASSAGE.— There  are  three  principal  islands.  Grand 
Turk,  Salt  Key,  and  Sand  Key  ;  which  they  always  make  who  go  through  the 
passage. 

The  western  side  of  these  islands  is  bold,  and  they  may  be  approached  very 
near,  although  there  is  a  white  shoal,  with  many  rocky  spots,  which  extends 
about  a  quarter  of  a  league  from  the  shore. 

You  may  anchor  in  two  places  off  the  Grand  Turk ;  one  towards  the  middle  of 
the  island,  opposite  the  huts,  the  other  off  the  south  part  of  the  island ;  but  neither 


190 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


of  tlieit)  ran  be  considered  <ts  good.  Vou  let  go  your  anchor  so  Boon  as  youare- 
0n  the  n'hitc  ground,  and  take  care  to  And  out  a  clear  bottom  ;  as,  in  some  pla- 
ces, the  points  of  rocks  rise  to  witiiin  0  or  10  feet.  After  you  have  let  go  your 
anchor,  and  veered  to  half  a  cable  under  your  stern,  you  will  not  get  any  ground- 
Off  the  south  part  of  the  island  the  anchorage  is  of  more  extent,  and  you  will 
find,  on  the  point  near  which  you  anchor,  a  lagoou  of  water  that  may  serve  for 
cattle.  The  white  shoal  S.  W^  of  Sand  Key  decreases  gradually  to  5  fathoms, 
half  a  league  from  the  shore. 

East  of  these  islands  are  several  islets,  which  are  connected  by  white  grounds, 
with  very  little  water  on  them  :  they  are  bold  on  the  east  side,  and  surrounded 
with  a  white  ground  that  extends  to  the  southward  and  S.  W. 


Particular  description  of  Turk's  Islands. 

Sand  Key  is  one  mile  long ;  and,  in  fine  weather,  may  be  seen  three  leagues 
o*^-.  when  you  are  to  the  southward  of  it,  you  would  take  it  for  two  islands,  its 
II  c'lle  part  biding  a  low  drowned  land.  On  the  west  side  are  7  or  8  fathoms,  up- 
on tk!^  ■  ank  which  l)or(lers  the  key  at  the  distance  of  three  leagues,  and  joins  a 
reef  uy   i.^xtcnds  a  mile  from  the  north  point  of  it. 

The  south  point  has,  at  about  two  cable's  length,  th.ee  rocks  cl»8e  to  each 
other,  by  which  it  may  be  known ;  but,  to  have  them  open  and  clear  of  the  land, 
you  must  not  be  far  olf,  nor  bring  them  to  the  eastward  of  N.  E. 

The  most  certain  mark  by  which  you  may  know  Sand  Key  is,  that  from  the 
N.  E.  and  the  W.  N.  W.  you  will  see  no  other  island,  and  the  santl  upon  it  is 
quite  white  in  the  sun.  The  anchorage  is  only  known  by  the  white  water,  from 
6  to  4  fathoms,  within  swivel  shot  of  it ;  but  ships  which  draw  much  water  must 
anchor  about  half  a  mile  off,  bringing  the  south  point  to  bear  S.  E.  and  the  mid- 
dle of  it  from  east  to  E.  by  N. ;  the  north  rocks  there  cover  you  as  far  as  N.  N» 
E.  and  you  may  easily  get  under  weigh  with  any  wind;  as  the  norths,  which 
are  most  to  be  feared,  blow  only  along  the  coast,  so  that  the  west  side  may  be 
reckoned  a  good  roadstead.  A  ship  which  may,  by  some  accident,  have  been 
prevented  from  sailing  through  the  Passage,  would  find  good  shelter  here,  and 
inight,  without  difficulty,  wait  for  a  more  favourable  wind.  The  reef,  on  t'le 
north  part  of  the  key,  stretches  from  it  north,  a  little  westerly,  a  long  mile,  when 
it  makes  a  little  hook  to  the  S.  W.  but  breaks  every  where,  and  within  pi.»tol- 
shot  there  are  8  fathoms;  though  you  must  not  come  so  near  on  the  other  parts 
of  the  island,  for  here  and  there  are  some  rocks,  which  have  only  two  fathoms 
water  upon  them.    The  cast  side  has  high  l)reaker3  quite  to  the  shore. 

Sand  Key  is  Ioav  and  barren,  being  burnt  by  the  sun,  and  continually  beaten  by 
the  winds  and  the  sea  :  it  produces  some  small  bushes  only. 

Remarks  upon  Sand  Key,  made  on  board  the  Emerald^  a  French  Frigate. 

Sand  Key  may  be  seen  about  S  leagues  off;  it  makes  at  first  like  three  islands, 
being  formed  of  two  little  hillocks,  and  a  rock  known  by  the  name  of  the  Split 
Rock,  tliough  there  is  Avater  knee-deep  between  it  and  the  key.  This  rock  serves 
to  distinguish  Sand  Key,  over  which  it  is  probable  that  the  sea  breaks  in  all  the 
norths,  and  other  impetuous  winds,  for  it  is  very  low  ;  you  may  easily  land  upon 
it  under  the  hillock,  wln^re  there  was  formerly  a  pyramid. 

This  key  is  scarcely  more  than  1300  geometrical  pjices  (of  5  feet  each)  long. 
From  the  south  end  the  reef  runs  off  three-quarters  of  a  mile  S.  and  S.  by  W.  at 
the  end  of  which  are  three  rocks,  which  always  break  and  show  themselves. 
The  hillock  on  the  south  part  is  joined  to  that  of  the  middle  part  by  a  low  land, 
which  looks  like  a  savanna ;  and  from  that  to  the  west  point  the  land  is  also  very 
low  and  even  :  you  cannot  laud  here,  nor  must  you  anchor  near  this  part,  but  to- 
wards the  south  wiiere  all  the  dangers  show  themselves.  From  the  N.  W.  point 
is  a  reef  to  the  N.  by  W.— N.  N.  W.  more  than  2  miles  ;  and,  about  a  swivel-shot 
from  the  end  of  tliis  reef,  is  a  large  rock  always  above  water ;  three-quarters  of 


BLBNt'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


191 


ft  mile  from  ivhich  you  have  6  fathoms  rocky  gruund.  You  cannot  land  at  tlie 
east  aide,  which  is  surrounded  with  roclis.  Tiie  anchorage  may  Uo  made  very 
convenient,  by  carrying  an  anchor  with  two  or  tliree  hawsers  to  the  westward, 
and  then  you  would  ch-ir  the  island  with  every  wind.  But  in  the  months  of  May 
and  June,  you  had  better  anchor  about  a  mile  or  a  milu  and  a  half  ofl',  to  be  less 
exposed  to  the  swell  sent  in  by  the  S.  E.  breeze,  which  is  ji;etiurally  violent. 

Te  the  south-westward  of  Sand  Key  lies  the  Endymion  Reef  or  Shoal,  upon 
which  the  British  ship  Endymion,  commanded  Ity  Liciitnnaiit  Woodriff,  was 
lost  in  1790.  The  following  remarks  upon  this  danger  were  ligingly  commu- 
nicated by  the  commander  himself. 

The  danger  of  this  shoal  is  but  of  smr.ll  extent:  it  consis .  of  seven  or  eight 
heads  of  rocks,  one  of  which  has  only  8i  feet  of  water ;  and  this  is  the  rock 
whereon  the  British  ship  Endymion  was  wrecked,  on  the  28tli  of  August,  1790, 
and  till  then  undiscovered.  Some  of  the  rocks  have  2,  B,  and  4,  fathoms  on 
them,  and  between  them  7,  8,  and  9,  fathoms  of  water.  The  exact  soundings 
between  the  key  and  the  shoal  could  not  be  ascertained,  by  reason  of  the  blow- 
ing weather,  and  from  want  of  time.  There  are  some  rocks  which  lie  off  to  the 
eastward  of  the  south  end  of  Sand  Key  ;  two  of  them  appear  above  water,  and 
two  others  are  even  with  it.  The  reef,  from  the  north  end  of  the  key,  stretches  off 
to  the  northward  1|  or  2  miles,  and  has  some  rocks  out  of  the  wat«;r.  The  chan- 
nel between  the  shoal  and  the  key  appears  to  b«  clear  and  spacious. 

"The  north  part  of  Sand  Key  !  a  from  the  Endymion,  wlieri  aground  N.  N. 
E.  and  the  south  part  N.  E.  aboi>  '/  r.  'es  distant.  The  rocks  extended  about 
a  cable's  length  from  the  ship,  which  h      on  the  eastern  and  shoalest  |)art." 

South-west  of  Sand  Key  is  a  \>  ,i<e  s,iioal,  extending  about  3i  miles  from  shore, 
on  which  may  be  found  from  7  to  9  fathoms. 


.I>5<^ 


Descrij^iion     "  Salt  Key,  or  the  Little  Turk. 


"When  you  leave  Sand  Key,  and  steer  for  Salt  Key,  you  must  make  a  north 
course  along  the  reef,  which  rims  off  more  than  one  mile ;  on  these  bearings 
from  you,  you  come  almost  within  a  stone's  throw  of  it ;  for  at  that  distance, 
there  are  8  fathoms.  Having  gotten  round  the  head  of  it,  you  aic  to  make  aN. 
N.  E.  course  to  the  Little  Turk,  which  you  may  then  see;  and  you  will  lose  the 
soundings  so  soon  as  you  have  brought  the  reef  any  tiling  to  the  southward  of 
you.  It  is  two  leagues  from  the  reef  to  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  Salt  Key,  near 
which  you  may  anchor  :  but  the  bank  is  very  steep;  for,  when  your  anchor  is 
gone  in  5  fathoms,  within  musket-shot  of  the  shore,  you  will  find  the  ship  in  20 
fathoms,  and  no  ground  a  very  little  way  astern.  You  bring  one  point  N.  N.  E. 
or  N.  E.  by  N.,  and  the  other  point  S.  by  W.  or  S.  S.  W. ;  you  must  look  for  clear 
ground,  or  you  will  have  your  cable  cut  with  the  rock*  These  places  are  fit  only 
when  the  trade-wind  is  settled  ;  for  you  must  not  be  caught  here  with  any  other. 

Salt  Key  is  N.  by  E.  from  Sand  Key,  and  lies  N.  by  E.  like  the  two  others; 
it  is  of  a  triangular  form,  its  length  something  more  than  three  miles  :  it  is  higher 
than  Sand  Key,  and .  you  will  see  hero  and  there  some  little  risings  or  hillocks* 
and  a  great  many  bushes  and  small  trees,  fit  only  for  fire-wood. 


Description  of  the  Grand  Key,  or  Grand  Turk. 

Having  advanced  to  the  north  point  of  Salt  Key,  you  will  see  the  Great  Key 
bearing  N.  N.  E.  2i  leagues:  so  soon  as  you  are  clear  of  the  reefs,  which  stretch 
off  from  the  Little  Turk,  two  cables'  length,  it  will  be  found  that  the  bank  con- 
tinues from  this,  N.  E.  by  N.  to  the  south  point  of  the  Great  Key,  for  which  you 
should  make  a  N.  N.  E.  course,  though  you  migjjt  run  along  the  west  edge  of 
the  bank  in  4  fathoms,  or  might  indeed  anchor  upon  it,  as  you  would  be  sheltered 


192 


blunt's 


AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


from  the  trade-wind  by  the  bank  and  Its  keys.  You  must,  however,  be  cautious, 
in  steering  N.  E.  of  a  reef  that  runs  off  from  Cotton  Key  W.  by  N.  seldom  Bhow> 
ing  itself  in  moderate  weather,  and  stretching  as  far  as  the  South  Point  of  tho 
Great  Key. 

If  you  mean  to  anchor  on  the  west  side,  which  is  much  like  that  of  Salt  Key, 
(though  not  so  good  as  at  Sand  Key)  you  had  better  keep  along  the  Bank,  lest 
you  get  too  far  to  the  leeward,  and  haul  in  west  from  an  hillock,  which  may  be 
plainly  distinguished  when  nearly  in :  the  bank  is  very  steep,  and  looks  shoal ; 
but  you  will  find  4  or  5  fathoms  water  very  close  to  the  land.  You  must,  how- 
ever, stand  in  only  upon  white  water,  till  you  bring  English  Point  E.  by  N. ;  off 
that  point  are  some  breakers  quite  close  to  the  shore,  and  tiiere  is  shoal-water. 
When  the  before-mentioned  hillocks  bear  E.  by  S.  you  may  anchor  within  half 
a  cable's  length  of  the  island,  looking  out  for  clear  ground;  English  Point  will 
then  bear  North,  and  the  South  Point  S.  E.  your  anchor  will  be  in  4  or  5  fathoms, 
the  ship  in  9  or  10,  and  her  stern  in  20,  23,  or  perhaps  no  ground  to  be  found.  It 
will  be  prudent  in  staying  here  to  observe  when  the  trade-wind  dies,  for  you  have 
very  little  room  to  turn  ;  you  should  also  always  buoy  your  cables,  for  the  sandy 
bottom  is  full  of  large  stones,  among  which,  cables  and  anchors  have  often  been 
lost. 

The  vessels  which  load  salt  generally  anchor  to  the  northward  of  English 
Point,  that  being  nearer  to  the  Salt  Pond  ;  but  neither  the  shelter  nor  the  ground 
are  so  good  as  at  the  other  place.  No  passage  is  to  be  found  to  the  southward 
of  this  island,  but  for  a  boat;  as  there  is  a  reef,  which  is  a  branch  of  that  sur- 
rounding the  weather  side  of  these  keys  and  banks.  The  Great  Key  has  the  best 
ground  of  the  three  islands. 

Of  the  two  Salt  Ponds  which  are  on  the  key,  one  only  furnishes  salt ;  it  is 
about  4200  yards  wide,  and  its  middling  breadth  above  200.  It  produces  three 
times  as  much  as  the  pond  of  Salt  Key  ;  but  the  grain  of  the  salt  is  coarser,  and 
not  so  bright  as  that  of  the  latter. 

The  latitude  of  the  Grand  Turk,  by  a  very  accurate  astronomical  observation, 
is  21°  26'  12". 


Remarks  on  the  rest  of  the  Keys  which  are  upon  the  Turk's  Islands 

Bank. 

To  the  windward  of  the  Turk's  Islands  (that  is  to  say,  to  the  eastward)  are 
several  little  barren  keys.  The  northernmost  of  these  are  three  rocks,  called  the 
Twins  ;  they  lie  three-<(uarters  of  a  miles  east  from  the  south  part  of  the  Great 
Key,  and  are  very  nearly  together.  S.  E.  one  mile  from  these  is  Pelican's  Key, 
lying  north  and  south,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  long,  and  very  narrow. 
Bird  Key,  which  is  larger,  is  about  2i  miles  in  the  same  line.  A  reef,  with  great 
breakers,  runs  from  one  to  the  other  of  these  keys,  ending  at  another  small  one, 
called  Breeches  Key,  which  has  two  rocks  at  the  south  end,  and  is  close  to  the 
S.  E.  of  Bird  Key.  To  the  southward  of  these  you  might  come  in  upon  the 
bank,  there  being  from  10  to  6  fathoms  of  water.  Between  the  N.  E.  point  of 
Salt  Key  and  Bird  Key  is  another,  called  Cotton  Key  ;  it  lies  nearly  south  from 
the  Great  Key,  4J  miles,  and  is  the  largest  of  all. 

SQUARE  HANDKERCHIEF.— This  shoal  is  very  dangerous  and  exten- 
sive. On  the  northwest  edge  there  is  a  key,  on  which  you  find  but  8  or  10  feet. 
From  this  shoal  the  bottom  runs  E.  by  N.  seven  leagues,  to  a  rocky  spot,  where 
the  water  breaks  with  great  violence.  It  is  natural  to  suppose  that  all  this  inter- 
val is  full  of  sunken  keys,  which  render  its  approach  very  dangerous ;  on  the  S. 
and  S.  W.  parts  the  grounds  give  warning,  and  you  will  find  from  10  to  15  fa- 
thoms ;  however,  the  best  way  is  to  bear  up,  and  pass  to  leeward,  unless,  being 
on  the  eastern  edge,  you  perceive  the  end  of  the  white  grounds,  and  can  wea- 
ther them  the  next  tack. 

Having  entered,  on  the  third  of  June,  1785,  at  six  o'clock  in  the  morning,  the 


liLLNT'S  AMERICAN  COAi?!  PILOT. 


193 


white  grounds  of  the  Square  Handkerchief,  on  the  S.  W.  edge,  we  found  from 
U  to  14  fathoms,  smooth  coral  bottom.  ^  Stood  to  the  N.  N.  E.  at  50  minutes 
after  seven ;  sounded  in  14  fathoms ;  saw  ahead,  and  a  little  to  windward,  a  bot- 
tom, which  appeared  nearer  the  surface :  we  bore  up,  but  too  late,  for  the  vessel 
was  stranded  on  a  key  iu  9  feet  of  wate  r.  This  may  show  how  dangerous  it 
would  be  to  run  on  these  grounds.  Close  to  the  N.  W.  edg-e  of  this  key,  we 
could  I'.ot  get  bottom  in  40  fathoms.  This  key  lies  in  the  latitude  of  20°  59'  40", 
and  longitude  70^  37'. 

The  SILVER  KEY  BANK.— This  shoal  has  more  extent  than  the  Square 
Handkerchief;  the  southern  point  is  in  the  latitude  of  20<^  IS',  aivd  the  northern- 
most part  in  20°  32'.  It  is  very  white  ground  in  many  places,  especially  in  the 
north  part,  and  very  brown  in  the  south  and  S.  E.  parts. 

The  north  and  N.  N.  W.  parts  have  some  keys,  with  no  more  than  8  or  9 
feet  of  water,  and  perhaps  less ;  but  it  appears  that  these  keys  are  not  exactly 
on  the  edge.  The  master  of  a  schooner,  drawing  9  feet  of  water,  found  himself 
ashore  on  the  Silver  Keys,  in  coming  down,  after  he  had  run  near  a  mile  S.  W. 
on  very  white  grounds.  The  east,  or  rather  the  N.  E.  edge  is  very  dangerous. 
In  this  part  there  are  three  keys  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  edge,  which  hav» 
no^  more  than  10  or  12  feet  or  water. 

The  east  part  of  the  Silver  Keys  was  explored  and  sounded  in  1753,  by  Mons. 
Lc  Compte  de  Kerusoret,  who,  at  that  time,  commanded  the  king's  ship  I'Eme- 
lande :  in  following  the  details  of  his  route,  and  trying  his  longitude,  soundings, 
bearings,  Uc.  I  found  them  to  agree  so  well,  that  nothing  remains  to  desire  on 
the  exact  position  of  the  eastern  part  of  this  shoal.  The  western  side  is  safe, 
and  there  is  a  great  depth  of  water;  but  at  about  one  and  a  half  league  on  the 
eastern  side  the  bottom  decreases,  and  you  see  shoals  in  the  N.  E.  which  rise 
very  near  the  surface. 

Ships  ought  never  to  venture  within  any  part  of  the  white  grounds,  because 
they  may  often  fall  from  14  fathoms  to  10  feet:  if,  by  accident,  they  find  them- 
selves in  the  middle  of  them,  the  best  way  is  to  tack,  and  go  out  the  same  way 
they  came  in,  ranging  along  the  grounds. 

The  Silver  Key  is  eleven  leagues  long,  east  and  west,  and  seven  leagues  broad, 
north  and  south,  in  the  greatest  dimension :  the  westernmost  part  liea  north  and 
south  from  Old  Cape  Frangois. 

You  experience  on  the  edges  of  the  shoals  weak  currents,  which  generally 
follow  the  directions  of  those  edges.  On  the  Square  Handkerchief  they  are 
scarcely  felt ;  on  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  Silver  Keys  you  find  them  setting  to  tlie 
west  and  N.  W.  but  a  short  league  from  the  grounds  their  effect  is  not  perceiv- 
able. 

In  general  you  ought  not  to  mind,  in  your  reckoning,  the  weak  currents  which 
exist  m  these  passages,  they  being  no  where  to  be  feared. 

The  BANK-BLINK  of  the  Caycos  and  Bahamas.— In  a  letter,  dated  Sep- 
tember 30,  1819,  Captain  Livingston  asks,  "Has  Mr.  De  Mayne  taken  any 
notice  of  the  Bank-bhnk  ?  I  name  this  from  the  Ick-blink,  to  which,  I  pre- 
sume, it  bears  a  resemblance.*  On  the  Caycos  Bank  I  have  seen  it  very  dis- 
tinctly in  a  dark  night.  On  the  Bahama  Banks  I  have  not  had  the  same  oppor- 
tunity of  observing  it  distinctly,  though  I  have,  also,  noticed  it  there.  Once,  o» 
approaching  the  Caycos,  when  coming  from  the  United  States,  I  saw  it  appear- 
ing extremely  beautiful,  during  sun-shine,  and  consider  it  as  arising  from  the  rays 
of  light  reflected  by  the  white  sand  of  the  banks  in  day -light,  and  the  reflection 
of  the  white  sandy  bottom  on  the  atmosphere  at  night." 

Another  voyager,  on  passing  over  the  Great  Bank,  has  made  similar  remarks 
on  the  reflection  of  light  from  the  white  sand  of  the  bank  to  the  atmosphere. 
His  words  are,  "  It  was  a  novel  situation  to  behold  an  expanse  of  sea,  unbound- 
ed by  any  land,  and  the  bottom,  at  the  same  time,  distinctly  visible  at  the  depth 
of  a  few  feet,  although  the  day  was  cloudless,  and  the  atmosphere  uncommonly 

*  The  Ice-blink  is  an  effulgence  or  reflection  of  light,  seen  over  lue  congregated  iee$,  and 
even  about  individual  ice-bergs.  It  enables  the  moriaer  to  distinguish  them  at  some  distance, 
even  in  the  darkest  night. 

25 


194 


ULUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  FILUT. 


pure,  the  azure  of  the  horizontal  sky  Hecmed  flushed  with  an  infusion  of  pink 
colour,  producing  an  effect  as  beautiful  as  it  was  singular.  We  now  drew  near 
to  New  Providence." — M'Kinnoti'a  Wett  Indies,  1804. 

In  allusion  to  this  passage,  Captain  Livingston  says,  "  There  was  a  greenish 
rather  than  a  pink  tinge  thrown  up  over  the  Caycos  Bank  ;  at  the  time  I  most 
particularly  remarked  it.  Some  of  the  fainter  hues  of  the  rainbow  come  the 
nearest  to  its  appearance  at  that  time." 


Tides  and  (^rrcnts  between  Watling's  Island  and  New  Providence. 

The  tides  or  currents  between  Watling's  Island  and  the  Hole-in-the-wall  arc 
generally  found  to  set  to  the  S.  W.  About  Egg  Island  they  set  in  various  direc- 
tions. Off  Douglas  Rocks,  New  Providence,  the  tide  runs  very  regular ;  and  at 
the  entrance  of  the  New  Anchorage  it  flows,  on  the  full  and  change,  at  8h.  SOm. 
The  flood  sets  to  the  N.  C  and  very  strong  between  the  rocks.  The  vertical  rise  of 
*a  spring-tide  is  4  feet.  In  the  passage  between  Egg  Island  and  Nassau,  the 
litream  has  been  found  to  set  at  the  rate  of  4^  knots;  the  flood  setting  east,  and 
running  strongly  over  the  reefs.  Near  Egg  Island  the  current  is  very  uncertain ; 
great  attention  should  here  be  paid  to  the  lead. 

The  stream  sets  strongly  over  the  Egg  Inland  Reef,  when  the  wind  is  from  N. 
W.    The  flood  sets  very  strongly  between  the  rocks  to  N.  W. 

The  tide  about  the  Berry  Islands  rises  2  feet  higher  when  the  sun  advances  to 
northward  of  the  line,  than  it  does  when  it  is  to  the  southward.  The  flood  sets 
strongly  over  the  bank,  and  the  ebb  over  the  bar.  In  the  N.  W.  Channel  of 
Providence,  the  current  generally  runs  to  the  eastward  two  miles  in  an  hour. 


The  Caycos  and  Mayaguana  Passages. 

Tiie  Caycos  Passage  is  that  which  lies  between  Mayaguana  and  the  Caycos. 
The  first  of  these  isles  have  been  described  in  page  185  ;  the  latter,  in  pages  186 
to  189.  Of  this  Passage  Captain  Livingston  has  said,  "For  vessels  bound  from 
North  America  to  Jamaica,  I  consider  the  Caycos  Passage  preferable  to  that  of 
Turk's  Islands,  which  has  been  commonly  used ;  because,  if  you  can  only  dis- 
tinctly make  out  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  Caycos,  and  bring  it  to  bear  E.  or  E. 
by  N.  however  dark  the  night  may  be,  vou  may  run  safely,  steering  at  first  S. 
W«  i  W.  by  compass,  5  leagues,  and  then  S.  by  W.  till  day-light ;  by  which 
courses  you  .run  no  risk,  either  from  the  Caycos  Reefs  or  the  Heneagua;  and, 
however  fast  your  vessel  may  sail,  you  hate  more  distance  than  you  can  run  in 
one  night  before  you  can  make  Hayti  or  St.  Domingo.  By  steering  this  course, 
or  rather  these  courses,  you  also  avoid  all  danger  of  being  dragged  by  a  lee  cur- 
rent down  upon  the  coast  of  Cuba." 

We  have  already  shown,  in  the  description  of  the  Caycos,  page  186,  that 
nothing  short  of  a  S.  Wi  }  W.  course  will  take  you  in  safety  clear  of  the  elbow 
of  the  rocky  reef  abreast  of  the  Sandy  Key. 

The  Caycos  Passage  is  also  recommended  as  the  best  passage  for  ships  bound 
from  Cape  Haytien,  formerly  Cape  Francois,  when  the  winds  are  not  steady 
from  the  E.  S.  E.  You  will  always  go  with  a  large  wind,  which  is  of  great  ad- 
vantage ;  and  will  avoid  all  the  white  grounds  to  the  S.  E*  of  the  Caycos,  which 
it  has  been  customary  to  make.  This  custom  of  coming  to  the  white  grounds  is 
very  dangerous ;  but  there  is  no  risk  in  making  the  land  some  leagues  to  leeward 
of  the  Little  Cayco. 

In  leaving  the  Cape,  you  must  steer  a  N.  by  W.  course ;  and  after  having  thus 
run  35  leagues,  you  will  find  yourself  2i  leagues  S.  W.  of  the  Little  Cayco ; 
then  you  may  haul  your  wind,  first  as  high  as  north  only,  on  account  of  the  reefs 
of  Sttidy  K«y,  which  lies  to  the  north  of  the  Little  Cayco ;  after  which  you  may 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  TILOT. 


195 


id  is  from  N. 


Mecr  N.  by  E.  5  or  6  leagues,  when  you  may  haul  up  N.  E.  or  continue  to  steer 
north  without  any  fear.  Having  run  10  or  12  leagues  on  this  course,  you  will  be 
out  of  the  Passage. 

//*,  when  you  are  two  leagues  S.  W.  of  the  Little  Cayco,  the  winds  do  not  permit 
you  to  steer  N.  by  E.  or  to  make  good  a  north  course,  after  having  run  18 
leagues,  without  getting  sight  of  Mayaguana,  the  best  way,  if  night  comes  on,  is 
to  tack  and  stand  to  the  S.  E.  3  or  4  leagues  ;  then  tack  again  to  the  north, 
and  you  will  weather,  by  3  or  4  leagues,  the  breakers  off  the  east  point  of 
Mayaguana. 

If,  when  you  are  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  Little  Cayco,  two  or  three  leagues,  and  the 
wind  will  not  suffer  you  to  lay  north,  you  must  not  attempt  to  go  to  windward  of 
Mayaguana,  but  must  fetch  the  channel  between  it  and  the  French  Keys.  [See 
page  185.1  You  steer  for  it  N.  W.  \  N.  Having  run  18  leagues,  you  will  come 
in  sight  of  the  S.  W.  point  of  Mayaguana,  which  ought  to  be  north  of  you,  two 
leagues  distant :  you  do  not  run  any  risk  in  approaching  this  point,  which  is  safe. 
A  small  white  shoal  extends  from  it,  with  three  fathoms  water  on  it,  almost  cloise 
to  the  shore.*  * 

When  you  have  doubled  the  west  end  of  Mayaguana,  so  as  to  bring  it  to  be^h- 
East,  you  may,  if  the  wind  permits,  steer  N.  In  that  case  you  will  pass  4  or  ."» 
leagues  to  the  windward  of  Atwood's  Key  ;  but,  if  your  course  is  not  l)etter  than 
N.  by  W.  after  having  run  on  12  or  1.9  leagues,  and  the  night  comes  on  before 
you  can  see  that  i&land,  tack,  and  stand  on  for  5  or  6  leagues.  Then,  if  you  can 
make  good  a  N.  by  W.  course  on  the  other  tack,  you  will  weather  the  eastern 
breakers  of  Atwood's  Key,  at  about  9  leagues.  Should  you  be  2  leagues  from 
the  west  point  of  Mayaguana,  and  the  wind  will  permit  you  to  make  a  course 
only  N.  N.  W.  after  having  run  thus  6  leagues,  you  will  see  the  French  Keys, 
bearing  nearly  W.  N.  W.  2  leagues.  You  may  pass  to  windward  or  to  leeward 
of  them,  as  the  wind  may  admit.  When  you  are  2  leagues  N.  N.  W.  or  N.  W. 
by  N.  from  them,  upon  running  in  that  direction,  12  or  IS  leagues,  you  will  be 
out  ol  the  passage.  You  must  not  go  in  the  least  to  the  northward  of  this  course, 
as  the  breakers  off  the  west  point  of  Atwood's  Key  bear  nearly  N.  N.  W.  from 
the  westernmost  of  the  French  Keys. 

The  French  Keys  are  very  low ;  they  bear  from  the  S.  W.  point  of  Mayaguana 
N.  W.  i  N.  8  leagues.  You  may  go  pretty  close  on  the  east,  north  and  south 
sides:  the  white  bottom,  which  encloses  them,*being  pretty  steep.  On  the  N. 
W.  of  the  large  island,  the  reef  running  out  £(Ome  little  way,  it  is  necessary  to 
give  it  a  good  birth.  You  may  anehor  in  the  S.  W.  part  on  the  white  bottom^ 
but  very  close  to  the  shore.  There  is  a  small  lagoon  of  fresh  water,  supplied 
entirely  by  the  rain.     The  isles  haV^  been  described  in  page  185. 

On  leaving  Cape  Haytien,  you  will  generally  find  the  wind  at  S.  E.  or  E>  S. 
E.  and  near  the  shore  the  current  runs  to  windward :  these  are  two  powerful  in- 
ducements to  engage  you  to  steer  N.  E.  or  N.  N.  E.  for  the  Turk's  Island  Pas" 
sage  :  but,  at  about  10  or  ll  o'clock,  the  wind  generally  chops  round  to  the  £. 
N.  E.  or  N.  E.  Being  then  5  or  6  leagues  from  the  coast,  and  the  current  no 
longer  felt,  you  would  necessarily  make  the  white  grounds  to  the  southward  of 
the  Caycos.  This  circumstance  has  caused  many  shipwrecks,  merely  from  the 
eagerness  of  going  20  leagues  to  windward,  in  a  voyage  of  perhaps  1 500  leagues. 
TTndur  these  circumstances,  I  would  advise  mariners  from  the  Cape  to  steer  at 
once  for  the  Little  Cayco. 


.,  V 


The  Turk's  Island  Passap-*^. 

This  passage  is  very  short  and  good ;  but  you  can»  '  always  be  sure  of  fetch- 
ing it  from  Cape  Haytien.    You  ought  to  steer  N.  H..  k  E.  and  the  wind  often 

'*'  The  Ciudado  Reef,  which  lies  to  the  westward  of  the  Caycos  Passage,  has  been  noticed 
in  page  185.  It  lies  in  a  direct  line  between  Little  Heneagua  and  the  east  end  of  Mayagiiana. 


^■1 


J, 


19.(5 


liLCM  S  AJIEIIICAN  COAST  PILOl. 


If 


ivill  not  admit  running  so  much  to  the  eastward;  it  is  therefore  reaommended^ 
in  leaving  the  cape,  to  keep  the  wind  as  close  as  yoti  can,  with  the  early  breeze, 
and  tack  so  as  to  fetch  the  Grange  before  night.  You  will  generally  bring  it  to 
bear  S.  E.  or  S.  S.  E.  If  the  ship  sails  Avell,  or  has  been  favoured  by  the  breeze, 
you  may  bring  it  to  bear  S.*  whence,  making  good  a  N.  N.  E.  course,  you  need 
not  tack  until  you  have  ran  18  or  19  leagues.  If  your  last  course  should  not  have 
been  better  than  N.  by  E.  or  N.  you  must  be  particularly  cautious  not  to  pass 
the  latitude  of  21°.  In  the  night,  when  you  think  that  yoU  are  near  that  lati- 
tude, be  sure  to  sound  ;  and  the  moment  you  have  bottom,  about-ship,  and  stand 
the  other  way  till  morning,  when  you  may  again  tack,  and  fetch  to  windlVard  of 
tne  white  shoals  of  the  Caycos. 

The  white  bottom  is  very  readily  seen  :  you  may  run  on  the  edge  of  the  bank 
to  the  southward  of  the  Southern  Keys,  for  a  league,  or  perhaps  a  league  and  a 
half,  in  from  7  to  l4  fathoms ;  but  farther  on  there  are  rocks,  with  3  fathoms  at 
the  most  on  them.  In  the  day-time  you.  may  stand  on  to  the  northward,  (sup- 
posing that  you  have  not  seen  the  land,)  and  you  will  descry  the  Southern  Keys 
of  theCaycos;  or,  if  farther  to  windward,  Sandy  Key.  Youjmust  be  careful 
i3ipt  to  go  to  leeward  of  the  white  shoals  which  extend  south  of  a  small  sandy  islet, 
which  is  entirely  dr()wned  at  high  water.  It  is  very  difficult  to  be  seen,  and  your 
lead  even  cannot  give  you  warning,  as  you  fall  suddenly  into  3  fathoms. 

To  the  southvvestward  of  Sandy  Key  lies  the  Endymion  Reef  or  Shoal,  which 
has  been  described  in  page  191. 

When  you  have  Sand  Key  hearing  East,  at  tlie  distance  of  2,  3  or  4  leagues, 
steering  N.  by  E.  or  N.  N.  E.  8  or  10  leagues,  will  entir'ily  clear  you  of  the 
passage.  In  going  through,  keep  the  Turk's  Islands  side  on  board,  in  order  to 
avoid  the  reefs  of  St.  Philip,  which  extend  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  Grand 
Cayco.-f  ,       ...  ...    ■  '  •f*!' 


'.       Crooked  Island  Passf\ge.  .'    '.-.. 

Of  the  Crooked  Island  Passage,  the  Count  Chastenct  de  Puyscgur  says,  thi? 
is  the  longest  of  those  passages,  but  it  is  far  the  most  convenient  for  ships  com- 
ing out  of  the  bay  of  Gonaives,  or  from  the  southern  ports  of  Hayti,  and  for 
those  which  are  bound  to  the  United  States.  These  commonly  take  their  de- 
parture from  Cape  St.  Nicholas ;  and  being  2  leagues  from  the  CApe  in  the 
offing,  must  steer  N.  by  W.  23  leagues,  to  make  the  S.  W.  point  of  Great  Hene  • 
agua.    This  course  will  generally  lead  2  leagues  to  the  westward  of  the  point. 

Great  Heneugua  has  already  been  described  in  pages  183  and  184.  The  Hog- 
sties  and  Brown's  Shoal,  in  page  183.  The  Mira-por-vos  and  Hobart's  Breakers, 
in  pages  182  and  liiS. 

When  you  are  opposite  the  west  point  of  Grfeat  Ileneagua,  at  2  leagues  ofT, 
steer  N.  N.  W.  2°  or  3*^  W.  for  twenty-five  leagues,  when  you  will  make  Castle 
Isle,  which  you  may  approach  within  two  miles,  or  nearer,  without  fear.  If 
you  should  depart  from  Heneagua  in  the  evening,  it  would  be  better  to  steer  N. 
W.  I N.  for  17  leagues,  to  avoid  the  Hogsties ;  then  to  haul  up,  and  make  a  good 
N.  by  W.  course  ;  when,  having  run  8  leagues,  you  would  be  one  league  to  the 
westward  of  Castle  Island.^: 

Should  you  make  Heneaga  toward  noon  or  afternoon,  it  will  be  best  to  drop 
anchor  in  the  N.  W.  or  f  J  rent  Bay,  and  get  <mder  way  at  midnight,  or  two  in 

'*' On>  approaching  the  Grange,  be  cautious  in  reipcct  to  the  reefs,  after  described. 

t  The  Swimmer  Bank,  which  lies  on  the  western  side  of  this  passage,  is  described  in 
page  186. 

;  The  Hobart  Breakers  lie  about  3  leagues  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  Cattle  Island,  as  shown  in 
p«ge  183. 


I; 


3r  Shoal,  which 


BLUr^T  S    AMHRICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


the  morning,  according  to  the  strength  of  the  breeze,  and  steer  N.  W.  h  N.  until 
you  have  run  sixteen  or  seventeen  leagues;  then  haul  up  N-  N.  W.  or  N.  by  W. 
when  there  will  be  daylight  for  any  thing  through  the  rest  of  the  passage.  But 
should  there  be  light  bafRing  winds  in  the  night,  w  ith  probably  a  weather  cur- 
rent, keep  the  lead  going,  and  yon  will  avoid  the  Hogsties ;  as,  in  advancing  to- 
wards them,  there  wUl  be  found  soundings  of  50  to  30  and  20  fathoms. 

From  the  west  end  of  Castle  Isle  you  steer  north  or  N.  by  W.  seven  and  a  half 
leagues,  to  make  the  west  end  of  Long  Key.  This  course  and  distance  will  lead 
within  a  league  of  it.  Continue  in  the  same  direction  to  make  Bird  Rock,  off 
the  western  extreme  of  Crooked  Island.  Having  thus  run  six  leagues,  you  will 
be  one  and  a  half  league  west  of  this  islet ;  so  that  the  direct  course  from  Cas- 
tle Isle  to  the  end  of  the  passage,  is  N.  5°  W.  fourteen  leagues. 

When  you  are  come  to  this  place,  you  suppose  yourself  out  of  the  passage ; 
nevertheless,  should  the  wind  happen  to  the  N.  E.  or  E.  N.  E.  you  have  to  fear 
Watling's  Island,  which  bears  from  Bird  Island  N.  4^  W.  true,  twenty-three 
leagues ;  therefore,  to  avoid  it,  you  ought,  in  leaving  the  passage,  to  keep  as 
much  to  the  eastward  as  the  wind  will  permit ;  but,  should  the  wmd  be  at  S.  E. 
and  you  steer  at  N.  E.  you  would  make  Atwood's  Key  ;  so  that,  keeping  the 
wind  when  you  are  out,  you  must  observe  not  to  steer  higher  to  the  eastward 
than  N.  E.  nor  more  to  leeward  than  N.  by  E. 

CURRENTS.— -You  have  little  occasion  to  fear  the  currents  in  this  passage, 
which,  in  a  fresh  breeze,  are  scarcely  perceptible  ;  but,  in  calms  and  light  winds, 
they  may  set  you  to  the  westward,  but  slowly  and  so  feebly,  that  in  a  passage 
so  short  you  need  not  to  mind  them,  especially  as  you  generally  make  it  with  a ' 
large  wind.  Nevertheless,  in  the  mouths  of  June,  July,  and  August,  when  calms 
or  light  westerly  winds  are  common,  you  may  experience  a  current  setting  to 
the  west  strong  enough  to  alter  your  course;  which  effect  only  can  happen  in 
this  passage,  and  is  occasioned  by  the  proximity  of  the  extensive  shoals  forming 
the  channel  of  Bahama  and  those  of  Providence  Island.  In  this  season  it  would 
be  proper,  if  you  have  not  wind  sufficient  to  make  you  go  more  than  two  knots 
an  hour,  to  allow  a  quarter  of  a  mile  per  hour  for  the  ciu-rent  setting  to  the  west- 
ward ;  if  you  go  three  knots  ami  upwards,  tins  allowance  will  be  unnecessary. 


w 


t* 


[](l,  as  shown  in 


Directions  for  sailing  from  Jamaica,  through  the  Windward  Channel 

and  Crooked  Island  Passage. 

To  those  who  are  bound  from  Jamaica  to  Europe,  or  any  part  to  the  north-east- 
ward, it  is  recommended,  if  possible,  to  take  the  Crooked  Island  Passage  in  pre- 
ference to  any  other.  From  Point  Morant,  Jamaica,  you  should  endeavour  to 
gain  easting  as  soon  as  possible ;  and,  by  taking  advantage  of  the  wind's  shifting 
from  N.  N.  E-  to  east,  which  it  generally  does  in  the  night,  you  will  gain  ground 
very  fast ;  and,  by  working  up  under  Cape  Dame  Marie,  on  Hayti,  you  will  avoid 
a  strong  set  to  the  S.  W.  caused  by  the  trade-wind. 

There  is  found,  however,  at  times,  great  difficulty  in  working  around  Cape 
Maize,  owing  to  the  strong  lee-current,  which  generally  prevails  with  a  strong 
N.  N.  E.  wind,  particularly  in  the  months  of  January,  February,  March,  and 
April,  during  which  months  the  strong  northerly  winds  prevail.  This  current  is 
found  to  run  strongest  between  Cape  Maize  and  Cape  Dame  Marie  (or  Donna 
Maria) ;  the  stream  occupying  a  space  in  breadth  equal  to  the  distance  between 
the  contracting  points,  and  runs  at  the  rate  of  two  knots  in  an  hour,  setting,  du- 
ring the  strong  N.  E.  winds,  to  the  S.  W.  between  the  N.  E.  end  of  Jamaica 
and  the  Morant  Keys. 

Some  commanders,  after  clearing  the  east  end  of  Jamaica,  have  stood  over 
to  the  Cuba  shore,  in  order  to  round  Cape  Maize ;  but  they,  also,  have  found  a 
strong  lee  current;  and  having  little  or  no  land-wind  to  assist  them  in  working 
along  the  south  side  of  that  land,  in  the  months  above  mentioned,  they  have,  at 
last,  been  obliged  to  bear  up  for  the  Gulf  Passage,  „-- , ;   ,  . 


I* 


198 


BLUNX'S 


AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


It  is  to  be  understood  that  the  following  directions  are  not  intended  as  a  stand- 
ing rule  for  working,  at  all  timeSy  around  Cape  Maize.  In  the  fine  season  there 
are  variable  winds,  and  the  current  is  sometimes  in  your  favour,  of  which  every 
advantage  should  be  taken,  according  to  circumstances. 

In  sailing  between  Gape  Maize  and  Cape  St.  Nicholas,  the  Montagnes  de  la 
Hotte,  or  Grand  Anse  Mountains,  (the  westernmost  high  land  of  Hayti)  are  of- 
ten seen.  They  may  be  descried  at  the  distance  of  thirty  or  forty  leagues ;  and 
by  their  situation  and  bearing,  become  a  good  guide  in  working  up  the  Windward 
Channel. 

In  sailing  from  Port  Royal  to  windward,  and  finding  a  strong  lee  current  against 
you,  stand  well  out,  and  work  in  the  stream  of  the  Morant  Keys,  endeavouring 
to  get  to  the  eastward  of  those  keys  as  soon  as  possible.  The  Morant  Keys  are 
by  no  means  dangerous ;  as  they  can,  at  all  times  of  the  day,  be  seen  at  a  suffi- 
cient distance  to  avoid  the  danger  that  surrounds  tiiera :  under  the  N.  W.  side  is 
anchorage. 

Having  made  the  Morant  Keys,  stand  well  to  the  eastward,  and  keep  working, 
in  a  direct  line,  for  the  Iiighlahd  over  Point  Bpucan,  which  is  to  the  E.  S.  E.  of 
Cape  Tiburon ;  and,  by  not  standing  farther  to  the  westward  than  with  Cape 
Tiburon  bearing  N.  E.  you  will  avoid  the  stream  of  the  current,  and  gain  ground 
very  fast.  "When  you  have  advanced  as  far  to  the  northward  as  17°  40',  you 
will  sometimes  meet  with  a  counter  current,  and  it  frequently  happens,  particu- 
larly in  the  night,  that  squalls  are  met  with  from  the  southward,  which  are  caus- 
ed by  the  high  lands  of  Hayti.  In  this  case,  keep  well  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Isle  Navaza,  between  it  and  Cape  Tiburon.  With  frequent  flaws  of  wind  in  your 
favour,  endeavour  to  get  close  under  Cape  Tiburon,  and  keep  working  along 
that  shore,  which  is  very  bold,  to  Cape  Dame  Marie ;  and,  by  not  standing  far- 
ther off  shore  than  seven  or  eight  miles,  you  find  a  very  little  current.* 

In  the  channel  between  Cape  Nicholas  and  Cape  Maize,  the  current  sets  with 
great  strength,  particularly  on  the  Cuba  side,  where  it,  however,  varies  with  the 
seasons.  It  is,  therefore,  necessary  to  work  up  for  Cape  Nicholas,  before  you 
attempt  to  weather  Cape  Maize ;  and,  by  keeping  within  the  line  of  Cape  Nicho- 
las and  Cape  Dame  Marie,  you  will  work  to  windward  very  fast.  When  Cape 
Maize  is  brought  to  the  westward  of  north,  you  may  venture  j  stand  across  the 
channel  to  the  northward,  and  you  will,  generally,  as  you  and  over,  find  the 
wii.d  more  easterly.  Fetch  over  to  the  Great  Heneaga,  as  ;iat  island  should  al- 
ways be  made  if  possil>le.     (See  the  description,  page  1 83.) 

In  proceeding  from  off  Cape  Maize  for  the  Crooked  Island  Passage,  make  the 
land  of  Heneaga,  if  it  be  possible,  as  short  departures  are  best  in  navigating 
amongst  these  islands,  particularly  as  the  currents  are  found  in  various  direc- 
tions. 

On  proceeding  from  Great  Heneaga  to  Castle  Island,  you  should  leave  Heneaga 
so  as  to  allow  sufficient  time  for  entering  the  Crooked  Island  Passage  before 
dark ;  or  in  the  evening,  so  as  to  arrive  there  by  day-light  in  the  morning.  The 
latter  is  generally  preferred.  The  course  from  Great  Heneaga  tu  Castle  Island 
i?  N.  W.  by  N. 

Having  entered  between  Castle  Island  and  the  Mlra-por-vo«,  the  course  to 
Long  Key  is  N.  by  W.  i  W.  seven  or  ei;'"ht  leagues.  Towards  the  northern  end 
\i{  Long  Key  is  a  rise  of  land,  with  a  dag-staff  on  the  summit.  In  advancing 
toward  this  place,  you  will  perceive  the  sandy  point,  called  the  French  JVells,  off 
which  there  is  good  anchorage  for  men  of  war,  in  7  fathoms,  about  two  miles 
from  shore. 

From  abreast  of  Fish  Keys  to  the  Bird  Rock,  off  the  N.  W.  point  of  Crooked 
Island,  the  course  and  distance  are  north,  eigh'.  and  a  half  leagues.  You  may 
run  along  shore,  there  being  no  danger  but  what  may  be  seen  in  the  day.  The 
Bird  Rock  lies  in  latitude  iiii'^^48'  OU  ,  longitude  74°  10'  £5". 

When  you  get  abreast  of  this  key,  you  may  with  safety  haul  up  N.  E.  if  the 


'*'  It  has,  however,  been  observed  that,  by  keeping  too  close  in  with  the  land  about  the  S.W. 
md  of  Hayti,  you  may  be  becalmed  for  a  month. 


»* 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


199 


wind  permits,  to  go  clear  of  Watling's  Island.  It  is  very  dangerous  to  approach 
Watling's  Isle  in  little  wind  or  calms,  the  current  setting  wholly  on  it ;  as  it  is 
very  rocky  and  steep-to,  there  would  be  no  possibility  of  saving  the  ship.  Cap- 
tain Hester  observes,  in  his  Journals,  that  it  had  been  remarked  of  late  years,  by 
those  who  have  passed  both  ways  through  the  Crooked  Island  Passage,  that  in 
going  to  the  northward  you  can  seldom  clear  Watling's  Island,  after  you  are 
past  Crooked  Island,  without  beating  to  windward ;  and  going  to  the  southward, 
after  you  are  past  the  Mira-por-vos  and  the  Hogsties,  it  is  difficult  weathering  or 
rounding  Cape  Maize. 

It  appears,  from  the-  preceding  remark,  that  the  safest  passage  may  generally 
be  made  to  the  westward  of  »Vatling's  Island.  The  course,  by  compass,  from 
the  Bird  Rock  to  this  island  is  N.  I  W.  distance  twenty-three  leagues,  and  to 
Rum  Key,  N.  W.  by  N.  nineteen  leagues.  The  current  hereabout  generally 
sets  to  the  westward. 

On  leaving  the  Bird  Rock,  when  bound  for  New  Providence,  it  is  best  to  make 
Watling's  Island,  proceeding  along,  the  west  aide  of  that  island,  or  between  it 
and  Rum  Key,  for  a  good  departure.  You  must  be  careful  not  to  approach  the 
little  island  called  Conception  Island,  because  a  long  and  dangerous  reef  extends 
in  a  N.  N.  E.  direction  from  that  Island,  above  seven  miles,  as  already  shown  in 
page  180. 

[The  Croolced  Islands  have  been  described  in  pages  180, 181 ,-  JVatland's  Island, 
and  Guanahani  or  Cat  Island,  in  page  179  ,•  Rum  Key,  and  Ativood'a  Key  in  page. 
180.] 


*  ■■# 


The  Silver  Key  Passage. 


Sliould  you,  by  any  circumstances,  be  forced  to  go  from  Cape  Uaytien,  through 
the  passage  between  the  Square  Handkerchief  and  the  Silver  Keys,  you  must, 
at  the  departure,  make  your  course  good  N.  E.  by  E.  and  E.  N.  E.  If  the 
winds  suffer  you  to  steer  that  course,  you  would  pass  in  the  mid-channel;  but  if 
yoQ  are  forced  to  turn,  and  should  not  get  sight  of  the  Haytien  shore,  after  you 
have  once  got  into  the  longitude  of  70°  20',  yoi!  must  not  pass  the  latitude  of 
20°  25',  without  frequently  heaving  the  lead.  If  you  come  as  far  as  20°  35', 
without  getting  ground,  you  have  nothing  to  fear  from  the  Silver  Keys,  and 
must  only  look  out  for  the  Square  Handkerchief,  which  is  not  dangerous  on 
the  south,  the  bottom  giving  you  notice  in  10  and  x.'  fathoms.  In  the  latter 
case,  continue  to  get  to  the  north-eastward;  and  when  you  come  into  the  lati- 
tude of  21°  20'  N.  you  will  be  entirely  out  of  the  Passage. 


ip  N.  E.  if  the 


I  about  the  S.W. 


Additional  remarks  on  the  Coasts,  Isles,  &£C.  which  form  the  Windward 
Passages  ;  hy  several  French  and  English  Navigators. 

Directions  for  going  through  the  Caycos  Passage,  &c.  5y  Capt.  Hester. 

After  having  cleared  the  east  end  of  Jamaica,  says  the  Captain,  I  would  en- 
deavour to  get  to  the  eastward  as  fast  as  possible,  takinf,  every  advantage  of 
wind.  In  so  doing,  when  advanced  to  Cape  Nicholas,  I  >,rould  prefer  the  beat- 
ing up  aa  high  as  the  island  of  Torlue,  (or  Tortuga,  or  Turtle  Island)  and  take 
my  departure  for  the  Caycos  Passage,  thinking  it  less  tedious  and  difficult  than 
the  passage  by  Crooked  Island. 

From  the  Mole  to  the  west  end  of  Tortue,  in  latitude  20°  5'  20",  the  course  is 
N  E.  hy  E.  about  eleven  leagues.  It  ii»all  a  bold  clear  shore,  giving  it  two  or 
three  miles  birth.  The  N.  E.  part  is  foul  three  or  four  miles,  but  from  that  part 
down  to  the  vvi-st  end  it  is  bold ;  and  the  west  end  is  as  steep  as  a  house-side. 
When  the  high  hill,  which  is  seen  over  Port  Paix,  beara  Si  W.  by  S.  then  the 
pa^t  end  of  the  island  is  between  you  and  it.  ■  =^ 


9 


•• 


.*'*« 


.Ji^^ .^m.^ 


200 


BLUNT's   AMERICAN   COAST    I'lLOT. 


From  off  the  middle  of  the  Isknd  Tortue,  to  ^o  between  Heneaj  a  u^-.u  tiiti 
Gaycos,  take  your  departure  in  tlie  ..  ninj?;  r^ei  rv.:^  north  by  com],':i. ,  tukiiig 
care  not  to  run  more  than  eighteen  le:ig^«':r  at  the  mfc^t  before  liaylight,  with 
the  distance  off  from  it  included,  ^t  takinj^  juur  departure;  when,  if  you  see 
nothing  of  the  east  end  of  Great  Hcneajja.  CO- tihue  y»,ur  course  for  seven  or 
eight  leagues,  and  you  will  not  fafl  of  sec /ig  ti«j  Li^tie  Caycos,  or  Little  He- 
ntaga. 

You  may  borrow  near  to  the  Caycos,  and  haul  your  wind  to  N.  E.  which 
will  clear  you  of  Mayaguana,  and  its  reef,  the  outer  point  of  which  lies  in  Uti- 
tud6  S,SP  20',  then  you  are  in  the  open  ocean,  clear  of  every  thing. 

If  you  find  a  leeward  current,  or  a  scant  wind,  betwern  Heneaga  and  the  West 
Gayco,  so  that  you  cannot  weather  Mayaguana  and  its  reef,  ypu,  may  bear  up 
and  sail  under  the  lee  or  west  end  of  Mayaguana^  there  being  no  danger  but 
what  you  may  see,  to  sail  between  Mayaguana  and  ^:he  French  Keys,  which  is 
a  wide  and  fair  channel.*  Then  you  hauj  your  wind  to  windward  of  At- 
wood^s  Key,  which  lies  in  latitude  of  23°  11'.  In  going  through  either  of  these 
passages,  there  is  a  greater  advantage  gained,  with  less  trouble,  and  sooner,  than 
by  Grooked  Island  Passage.f  Though  f  think  that,  in  time  of  war,  it  would  be 
very  tedious  and  difficult  to  attempt  any  of  them  with  a  convoy :  not  only  be- 
cause you  are  infallibly  exposed  to  be  annoyed  by  cruizers  and  privateers,  but 
also  .cause  of  the  almost  impossibility  of  keeping  a  number  of  vessels  together 
in  these  narrow  channels.  As  for  the  Turks'  Island  Passage,  in  sailing  to  the 
northward,  I  would  not  offer  to  mention  k,  looking  upon  it  to  be  both  tedious  and 
hazardous;  but  incoming  from  the  northward,  it  is,  in  my  opinion,  a  very  easy, 
safe,  and  expeditious,  passage. 


On  Mayaguana  anc2  Atwood's  Key  passage;  translated  from  the  French. 

This  passage  may  be  very  useful  and  convenient : 

1.  For  ships  'ntended  for  Grooked  Isluui  Passage,  and  meeting,  after  they  are 
past  Heneagu..  nth  the  wind  at  North,  N.  N  W.,  or  N.  W. ;  then,  not  being 
able  to  sail  up  to  Castle  Island,  they  are  ob!i|.xd  to  sail  to  the  southward  of  these 
islands,  going  along  the  Fluias  or  French  Keys,  and  between  Mayaguana  and 
Atwood's  Key. 

2.  For  those  intending  to  go  through  the  Caycos  Passage ;  who,  when  ad- 
vanced to  the  W^.^'"  •  !ayco8,  if  the  wind  is  at  N.  N.  E.  would  be  obliged  to  sail 
to  the  southwar.  iayaguana,  and  to  pass  between  this  island  aria  Atwood^s 
Key. 

3.  When  they  are  about  passing  between  the  two  islands,  if  the  N.N.  E.  wind 
IS  too  near,  they  may  advance  westward,  and  sail  between  Atwood's  Key  and 
the  Grooked  Islands. 

It  is  therefore  of  great  importance  that  you  should  beacquainled  with  the  dan- 
gers, and  also  with  the  places  where  you  may  anchor  about  these  islands.  If,  in 
going  for  Grooked  Island  Passage,  the  wind  obliges  you  to  pass  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  Grooked  Islands  and  the  French  lOys,  it  is  usual  to  sail  mid-chan- 
nel, between  the  Hogsties  (of  which  see  page  183,)  and  Castle  Island,  from  which 
they  are  distant  U  leagues,  and  then  make  thePlanas,  which  are  in  latitude  22^ 
43',  or  thereabout.  They  bear  N.  by  E.  from  the  Hogsties,  about  ao  leagues, 
and  lie  5  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  the  N.  E.  point  of  Crooked  Inlands.  Tou 
may  safely  pass  them  and  the  latter,  keeping  mid-channel,  or  rather  over  to 
the  French  Keys ;  for,  in  case  of  necessity,  you  may  anchor  on  the  west  side  of 
the  largest  of  them. 


*  But  we  the  description  of  theCijdado  Veef,  pa^e  185.  This  reef  lies  with  the  S.  W. 
pfitt  of  Mayaguana  bearing  by  compass  N.  N.  W.  4  VV.  distant  ton  and  a  half  leagues,  and 
the  S.  £.  point  of  the  stune  nearl;  N.  N.  E.  nioe  leagues. 

t  This  is  wry  different  from  the  opinion  of  Mr.  De  Muyne,  and  other  modern  navigators, 
»s  shown  in  the  preceding  directions.  n»  . 


.-=!'*- 
^#^5 


•f 


BLUWT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


201 


iieaj 


:o\u 


tiie. 


Uayiight,  with 

len,  if  you  see 

;  for  seven  or 

or  Little  He- 

>  N.  E.  which 

lich  lies  in  )dti- 

g. 

5a  and  the  West 

)u.may  bear  up 

no  danger  but 
Keys,  which  is 
ndward  of  At- 
\  either  of  these 
ind  sooner,  than 
far,  it  would  be 
f.  not  only  be- 

privateers,  but 
vessels  together 
in  sailing  to  the 
loth  tedious  and 
on,  a  very  easy, 


om  the  French. 


after  they  are 

then,  not  being 

ithward  of  these 

Mayaguana  and 

who,  when  ad- 
obliged  to  sail 
id  and  Atwood's 

leN.N.E.wind 
wood's  Key  and 

ed  with  the  dan- 
e  islands.  If,  in 
ss  to  the  south- 
sail  mid-chan- 
,nd,  from  which 
;  in  latitude  22<^ 
out  SO  leagues, 
I  I^J|ands.  You 
rather  over  to 
the  west  side  of 


Passage  between  Crocked  Islands  c/nd  A.twf  of^'s  Key. 


BB  with  the  S 
I  half  leagues. 


and 


•  tiio  er  3tvy ard  of 
'  ou  v.;  !  then  get 
,ipp''  >ac|.i  lioiirer 
Jea^jiip. ,  there  «» 


Those  who  are  obligta  to  pass  to  the.  w<  qtward  of  the  i/rea^h  Key?,  vn.iy  jjo 
betweer.  Crooked  Island  and  Atwood'3  Key,  which  is  a  vei*y  j^ood  ras'^^R,  5 
leagues  wide.     After  having  the  French  Keys  about  a  leaji:ue 
you,  make  your  course  N.  N.E.  a  little  eastwardly,  10  leagues 
sight  of  the  East  point  of  Atwood's  Key,  which  you  must  n 
than  4  or  5  miles ;  but,  having  brought  it  S.  W.  fr  myou,  2  o. 
nothing  to  he  feared. 

It  is  necessary  to  observe  that  the  Norths  in  this  passage  are  very  dangerous 
winds,  and  may  throw  you  upon  the  reefs,  which  border  all  the  banks  on  the 
east  side  of  the  Crooked  Islands  :  this  happened  to  the  French  man  of  war,  the 
Orox,  in  1736,  which  was  very  near  being  wrecked,  and  was  obliged  to  anchor 
close  to  them  in  foul  ground. 

Being  in  sight  of  the  French  Keys,  you  may  also,  according  to  circumstances, 
pass  to  the  southward  of  them,  giving  them  a  birth  of  4  or  6  miles :  and,  having 
cleared  them,  stand  away  to  the  northward,  to  sail  between  Atwood's  Key  and 
Mayaguana,  which  is  a  fine  clear  passage. 

For  the  description  of  Atwood's  Key,  see  page  180.  For  the  French  Keys, 
jpage  185.  # 


Additional  remarks  on  the  Caycos,  &c.  translated  from  the  French. 

It  has  happened  that  ships,  intending  to  go  through  the  Caycos  Passage,  have 
made  Little  Heneagua,  either  by  inattention,  or  from  the  currents.  To  make  sure 
of  being  far  enough  to  the  windward,  when  bound  from  Cape  Haytien,  you 
should  make  your  course  good  N.  or  N.  by  E.  25  or  26  leagues,  and  you  will  see 
the  white  water  on  the  banks,  which  you  may  run  along  at  the  distance  of  a  league 
without  fear.  On  the  western  edge  of  the  bank  is  the  islet  call  -d  Sandy  Key, 
which  you  may  approach  within  that  distance;  then  make  a  N.  /,'.  course,  and, 
four  leagues  from  Sandy  Key,  you  will  see  French  Key  ;  when  the  latter  is  North 
from  you,  thence  steer  W.  by  N.  6j  leagues,  which  "U!  bring;  ;  ou  south  from 
the  Little  Cayco ;  and,  being  past  this,  you  are  t<;  "lake  r.  N.  or  N.  by  E. 
course,  as  before  directed. 

According  to  the  survey,  made  with  great  care,  th  v  uite  K"-nk  and  the  Reef 
continue  between  the  French  Key  and  the  Little  C;.^  ">.  You  may  run  along 
them  very  near,  in  10  fathoms,  and  you  will  see  the  opciv-igs  iu  the  reef  'hrough 
which  small  vessels  go  in  upon  the  bank. 

The  reef  which  borders  the  White  Bank,  from  the  l4ittlf> «.''  '^^  >  to  frnnch  Key, 
begins  one  league  Eaat  from  the  fi  ner,  and  it  alway?  '  ■oaks.  You  may  st:^nd 
very  near  it  coming  from  sea ;  but,  if  you  are  upon  the  nank,  you  must  take 
great  care,  for  half  a  mile  within  you  will  find  but  3  faihoms  water ;  and,  »n 
getting  nearer,  it  shoalens  very  quickly.  Here  is  a  great  deal  of  swell,  it  being 
open  to  the  breezes ;  the  bottom  is  sand  and  good  holding  ground. 


'^- 


Ledern  navJga?or», 


Genitral  Observations  on  Turks'  Islands  and  Turks'  Islands  Passage, 
j*i         coming  from  the  JVorthward.     By  Captain  Hestor,  '770. 

"  When  bound  to  the  Old  Riding  Place  at  the  Grand  Turk,  your  eye  must  be 
your  pilot,  or  you  will  come  from  no  ground  immediately  into  white  water,  whe« 
you  must  'le  vitv  brisk  in  letting  go  your  anchor,  as  it  is  very  little  more  trait 
one-third  f  a  mile  from  no  groin.  ^  to  the  boacii,  with  not  more  th..ii  ■♦  or  5  feet 
water  c  ;  and  from  the  outer  edge  of  the  hank  to  the  reef  not  above  a  cable's 
h-Dgth  dis*  incc.     It  is  very  rocky  ground  all  in  and  about  the  anchorage.    Bm>ff. 

26 


V 


202 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


the  centre  of  tlie  highest  hill  you  see  in  the  bajr  to  bear  East ;  then  steer  right  for 
it,  till  ron  come  into  white  water,  and  you  will  have  4J  fathoms,  white  sand. 

•'From  October  6th  to  October  9th,  the  North  point  of  the  Grand  Turk  bore 
North,  and  the  South  point  S.  E. ;  Salt  Key  S.  by  W.  i  W.;  the  body  of  the 
town  East;  the  extremes  of  ditto  N.  E.  by  E.  to  S.  E.  distance  off  shore  H  mile ; 
distance  of  the  reef  IJ  cable:  depth  of  water  at  the  anchor,  a  quarter  less  seven: 
veered  out  to  half  a  cable,  tlien  had  17  fathoms  under  the  stern.  The  Grand 
Caycos  from  W.  J  N.  to  N.  W.  by  W. ;  wind  at  E.  by  N. ;  latitude  21°  28',  va- 
riation 6°  40'  E.  Tides  rise  and  fall  about  3  and  4  feet ;  a  N.  N.  E.  moon  makes 
high  water.  Currents  very  uncertain.  The  autumnal  equinox  subject  to  north 
winds,  and  rain  very  variable ;  the  vernal  equinox  to  the  contrary. 

"  Wood  may  be  cut  with  leave  at  Grand  Turk ;  water  is  scarce  and  very  bad. 
They  have  no  provisions;  but  turtle  and  fish  may  be  caught  at  times.  The  trade 
consists  in  salt,  with  which  they  load  for  America  and  the  adjacent  islands. 

"  The  North  point  of  the  Grand  Turk  lies  in  latitude  21°  30'.  To  make  this 
island,  coming  from  the  sea,  run  down  in  the  parallel  of  21°  40';  when  you  think 
you  draw  nigh  them,  night  coming  on,  and  seeing  nothing,  stand  off  to  the  north- 
ward, under  an  easy  sail,  endnavouring  to  be  as  near  the  same  place  at  day-light, 
as  you  were  the  preceding  evening  ;  but  do  not  sail  farther  to  the  westward  than 
what  you  could  see  the  night  before,  and  keep  running  down  in  the  above  lati- 
tude. It  may  so  happen  that  you  will  be  obliged  to  do  the  same  thing  the  stM 
coud  night,  if  not  the  third  ;  but  that  depends  on  the  justness  of  your  reckoning. 
You  cannot  well  pass  the  Turks'  Islands,  in  the  latitude  above  said,  without  seeing^ 
them ;  likewise  you  would  make  the  N.  E.  part  of  the  Great  Cayco,  which  lies 
to  the  N.  W.  of  the  Grand  Turk.  There  is  a  reef  which  runs  to  the  northward 
of  the  latter  about  2  miles,  but  nothing  but  wliat  is  discernable.  The  course 
through  \!i  S.  S.  W.  7  leagues,  and  then  you  will  be  in  the  open  channel,  between 
all  tlie  islands  and  the  north  side  of  St.  Domingo,  and  may  shape  your  course  as 
you  please. 

"It  is  true  that  the  channel  between  the  Caycos  and  Mayaguana  is  wide  ;  but 
when  I  consider  the  difficulties  which  will  arise  from  thick,  blowing,  hazy  weath- 
er, and  night  coming  on  ;  from  your  being  more  in  the  stream  and  way  of  cur- 
rents, between  the  :af  off  tl>e  S.  E.  end  of  Mayaguana  and  the  back  of  the  Cay- 
cos ;  from  the  possibility  of  driving  or  passing  between  them  without  seeing  them, 
&,c.  all  this  would  make  me  give  the  preference  tb  Turks'  Islands  Passage.  In 
srttempting  tlie  Caycos  Passage,  coming  from  the  northward,  you  will  not  be 
able,  (at  least,  it  would  not  be  advisable,)  to  run  in  the  night  any  more  than  in 
endeavouring  for  tlie  other ;  and  in  case  of  a  continuation  of  blowing  hazy 
weather,  you  might  be  puzzled  and  at  a  loss  how  to  behave,  if  (which  could 
very  well  happen)  you  viere  surprised  with  the  breach  of  the  Hogsties  ;  whereas, 
by  endeavouring  for  the  Turks'  Islands,  though  you  should  pass  them,  you  would 
be  sure  of  making  the  Great  Cayco ;  and  then  it  would  be  but  running  down 
a-back  of  that  isle,  and  choose  ypur  channel  and  time,  cither  to  windward  or  lee- 
ward of  Hen^^agua,  having  a  known  departure  to  go  from." 


Concluding   Remarks  on   the    Windward   Passages.      From   the 
'  Derrotero  de  las  Antillas.'  . 

The  choice  of  either  of  these  Passages  depends  entirely  on  the  situation  the 
vessel  is  in,  and  the  wind  you  have  to  take  it;  for,  if  you  are  at  St.  Nicolas' 
Mole,  with  the  breeze  at  E.  N.  E.  it  is  indispensable  to  take  the  Crooked  Islanda^' 
Passags ;  and  he  who  sails  from  Guarico,  or  Cape  Haytien,  may  take  the  Caycos 
Pa.fsas^e,  thou'^h  the  breeze  should  be  N.  E. ;  and,  if  it  be  from  E.  S.  E.  he  may 
take  the  Turks'  Islands  Passage :  so  that  tb**  passage  he  ought  t«  choose  is  that 
which  he  can  fetrh  npon  u  Hiretch,  and  better  still  if  the  wind  be  free.  It  must 
not  be  thought,  from  this,  that  there  is  any  difficulty  in  varying  the  channels  or 
»he  route,  if  the  wind  changes;  even  before  that  it  may  often  be  adviseable  to 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


203 


do  BO  for  the  convenience  of  the  voyage  itself.  In  the  option  which  we  have  re- 
commended, we  have  preferred  stating  general  principles  in  place  of  fixed  rules; 
and  this  liberates  us  fronj  havin;;  to  trace  out,  as  if  with  a  finger,  theri)ute  which 
ought  to  be  followed.  On  the  contrary,  let  every  one  follow  the  way  most  suit- 
able to  circumstances. 


f 


Directions  for  Sailing  from  iJae  Crooked  Islands,  and  from  the  Easitvardf 

generally^  to  New  Provi'dence. 

On  leaving  Watling's  Island,  particularly  if  late  in  the  evening,  you  should 
«teer  N.  i  W.  until  you  get  into  the  latitude  of  25  degrees,  before  you  stee-  to   - 
the  westward,  on  account  of  a  very  strong  indraught  which  sets  to  the  w^nirard 
between  Cat  Island  and  Eleuthera,  through  the  passage  called  the  Ship  Channel. 

Having  arrived  at  25°  N.  you  m.iy  haul  more  to  the  westward,  towards  Pal- 
metto Point,  and  then  endeavour  to  make  the  land  to  the  westward  of  Har- 
bour Island.  The  land  here  referred  to  is  very  remarkable,  particularly  the 
Cmt)  and  Bull,  two  rocks,  situate  on  a  base  of  sand,  and  appearing  like  two  large 
trees.  A  little  to  the  westward  of  them  is  a  gap  or  separation  of  the  land,  which 
ISb  also  very  conspicuous.  This  is  the  best  route,  if  the  wind  be  to  the  eastward 
and  fine  weather;  but,  if  blowing  strong  from  the  northward,  make  the  tlhole 
in  the  Wall,  at  the  south  end  of  Abaco.     [See  page  165.]  ' 

The  remarkable  perforated  rock,  called  the  Hole  in  the  Wall,  stand?,  as  already 
shown  in  page  169,  in  latitude  25°  51',  and  longitude  77°  10'.  Eleuthera,  Har- 
bour Island,  the  Current  Isles,  and  Egg  Island,  have  been  noticed  on  page  16|}. 
From  the  Hole  in  the  Wall  to  the  west  end  of  Hog  Island,  or  the  entrance  of  the 
Harbour  of  New  Providence,  the  bearing  is  South  and  the  distance  15  leagues. 
But  allowance,  in  sailing,  must  be  made  for  the  current,  which  generally  sets, 
with  considerable  strength,  between  Abaco  and  the  Lerry  Islands.  At  Great 
Egg  Island,  and  in  its  vicinities,  the  currents  are  very  uncertain,  and  there  much 
caution  is  necessary. 

Vessels  from  the^astward,  in  general,  had  best  make  the  coast  of  Eleuthera, 
in  a  tract  between  file  parallels  of  25°  20'  and  25°  30',  not  exceeding  the  latter, 
or  the  parallel  of  Harbour  Island. 

On  leaving  the  Bird  Rock,  when  bound  for  New  Providence,  it  is  best  to  make 
Watlings  Island,  proceeding  along  the  west  side  of  that  island,  or  between  it  and 
Rum  Key,  for  a  good  departure.  You  must  be  careful  not  to  approach  the  little 
island  called  Conception  Island,  because  a  long  and  dangerous  reef  extends  in  a 
N.  N.  E.  direction  from  that  island,  above  7  miles,  as  already  shown  in  page  180. 

Harbour  Island  lies  in  lat.  25°  31',  but  a  reef  extends  about  three  miles  from 
its  north  shore,  to  which  a  birth  must  be  given,  there  being  several  rocks,  near 
the  outer  edge,  nearly  even  with  the  surface  of  the  water.    The  water  is,  how- 
ever, perfectly  clear,  and  they  may  be  seen  from  the  fore-yard  or  bowsprit  end 
in  time  to  be  easily  avoided.     The  Bank  extends  West  and  W.  by  N.  to  Egg 
Island,  a  distance  of  7i  leagues,  and  a  reef  extends  from  that  island  nearly  4  miles 
in  a  N.  N.  W.  direction.     Having  advanced  to  the  northward  of  the  Cow  and 
Bull,  off  Harbour  Island,  the  cour<^    to  Egg  Island,  the  westernmost  isle  of  the 
range,  is  W.  by  N.  and  the  distance,  to  clear  the  reef,  8  leagues.     On  running 
along  shore,  you  will  pass  some  rocks,  calUd  the  Perno  Rocks;  but  the  islands 
are  too  closely  connected  to  be  particularly  distinguished. 
jdfc,  EoG  Island  is  a  small  island,  covered  with  brush-wood,  with  a  rise  of  land  in 
J^the  middle  of  it.     Being  off  this  island,  keep  well  out  to  avoid  the  reef,  the  pitch 
IP  of  which  lies  with  the  centre  of  the  island  S.  S.  E.  J  E.     On  rouodingthe  reef, 
ytta  will  open  a  small  rocky  island,  situated  to  the  south  of  Egg  Island,  called 
Ijittle  Egg  Island.     The  course,  by  compass,  hence  to  the  light-house  or  Nassau 
Bar,  will  be  S.  W.  by  S.  10  leagues,  and  to  the  Douglas  Passage,  eastw.'rd  of 
■^  the  harbour,  S.  by  W.  8  leagues. 

4       The  keys  between  Egg  Island  and  Providence,  upon  the  edge  of  the  bank, 
form  a  bay,  as  represented  on  the  Chart,  and  the  rtef  is  steep-to.     0<"  eo  ipte. 


204 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


Tessela  pasning  in  the  winter  or  during  the  prevalence  of  northerly  winds,  must 
cautiously  avoid  being  embayed  there ;  h?  the  only  shelter  is  an  inlet  between  the 
eastern  end  of  Rose  Island  and  the  Booby  Rocks,  w  here  there  is  a  depth  through- 
out of  37  feet.  But,  in  summer,  as  northerly  winds  then  seldom  prevail,  and  the 
trade-wind  generally,  the  shore  may  be  kept  well  on  board ;  and,  especially,  be- 
cause the  current  may  sweep  you  past  the  Harbour  of  Nassau,  which  could  not 
be  regained  without  difficulty. 

The  town  ia  on  the  north  side  of  the  island,  sheltered  on  the  north  by  Hog 
Island,  and  stands  at  the  westward  of  the  harbour.  It  may  be  distinguished,  at 
a  distance,  by  means  of  the  Government-House,  which  is  a  large  white  house, 
upon  the  top  of  a  hill,  seen  over  Hog  Island.  Bring  this  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  or  S. 
S.  W.  i  W.  By  keeping  it  so  until  within  2  or  3  miles  of  Hog  Island,  or  per- 
haps sooner,  a  pilot  may  be  obtained. 

The  entrance  into  the  harbour  is  at  the  western  end  of  Hog-Island,  which  is 
distinguished  by  the  light-house.  It  has  18  feet  of  water,  with  sandy  ground. 
The  latter  is  not  good  for  holding.  In  the  middle  of  the  harbour  there  is  a  bank 
■of  3  or  4  feet  water ;  but  there  is  a  channel  on  each  side  of  considerable  extent. 
The  Douglas  Passage  and  New  Anchorage  are  situated  on  the  east  and 
south  side  of  Rose  Island,  to  the  eastward  of  Nassau  Harbour.  The  entrance 
is  denoted  by  beacons,  fixed  on  two  rocks,  called  Douglas'  Rocks,  tvhich  form 
the  entrance,  and  a  black  buoy,  which  is  placed  at  the  end  of  a  reef  stretching: 
from  those  rocks,  and  situate  at  N.  by  E.  i  E.  179  fathoms  from  the  high  or  up- 
per beacon.  These  beacons  can  be  seen  from  the  deck  of  a  frigate,  when  steer- 
ing in  a  line  between  Egg  Island  and  Nassau. 

The  black  buoy,  above  mentioned,  is  placed  in  0  feet  water;  but,  at  a  boat's 
length  from  it,  there  is  a  depth  of  4  fathoms.  Opposite  to  it  is  the  end  of  a  reef 
which  extends  from  Booby  Island,  leaving  a  passage  of  160  fathoms  in  breadth, 
which  has  a  depth  of  4  fathoms  at  very  low  tides. 

To  steer  for  this  anchorage,  bring  the  beacons  in  a  line,  bearing  nearly  S.  E. 
by  E.  and  steer  directly  for  them  until  you  bring  Booby  Island  end  on  :  then 
haul  up  for  the  buoy,  passing  it  on  the  starboard  side,  and  to  the  eastward,  at  the 
distance  of  about  SO  fathoms.  When  past  the  buoy,  every  danger  may  be  seen, 
and  you  may  haul  round  to  the  westward,  and  anchor  in  4i  ^thorns,  good  hold- 
ing ground,  with  the  beacons  in  one,  bearing  N.  W.  by  W.  d^tant  about  3  miles^ 
where  you  will  be  well  sheltered  from  N.  W.  windrf. 

A  frigate,  drawing  18  or  20  feet  of  water,  may  proceed  to  the  S.  E.  side  of 
Rose  Island,  and  anchor  in  a  quarter  less  live,  at  about  6  miles  from  the  town  of 
Nassau,  well  sheltered  from  N.  W.  winds,  and  from  the  S.  E.  by  the  Bank. 

The  DIRECT  bearing  from  the  Hole  in  the  Wall  to  Providence  Bab  or 
Light-house,  is  S."  |  W.  15  leagues.  The  bearing  and  distance  from  the  Hole 
in  the  Wall  to  the  pitchi  of  Egg  Island  Reef  arc  S.  E.  |  S.  20  miles. 

Those  bound  to  New  Providence,  who  are  unacquainted  with  the  Douglas 
Pi'ssage  and  the  New  Anchorage,  should  not  attempt  to  pass  the  Hole  in  the 
Wall  with  a  N.  W.  wind,  when  blowing  strong,  there  being  no  safe  anchorage 
hereabout. 

In  the  event  of  making  the  Hole  in  the  Rock  or  Egg  Island  in  the  afternoon, 
with  a  strong  wind  from  the  N.  E.  you  bould  haul  close  around  Egg  Island 
Reef,  and  steer  S.  by  W.  8  leagues,  for  the  Douglas  beacons ;  and,  having  mado 
the  beacons,  bring  them  in  one,  bearing  nearly  S.  E.  by  E.  and  steer  for  them. 
Keep  your  lead  going,  and  you  will  have  gradual  soundings.  When  in  9  fathom:^, 
you  may  anchor,  with  the  marks  in  one,  fine  sandy  bottom,  well  sheltered  fk'dm 
northerly  winds,  by  the  rocksj  &ic.  -  4 

At  Nassau,  New  J^rovidenc^,  and  in  the  entrance  of  the  New  Anchor  »ge,  and  *%, 
in  its  channels,  the  tides  run  at  the  rate  of  4J  miles,  and  rise  4  feet  at  the  ipringo^  " 
and  the  currents  have  much  force. 

For  the  Tides  and  Currents  between  Watling's  Island  and  New  Providencct      * 
tee  page  194.     General  Directions  for  coming  in,  towards  the  Hole  in  the  Wall, 
Uc.  have  been  given  in  pages  165,  167  and  174. 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


205 


winds,  must 
t  between  the 
;pth  through- 
evfiil,  aHtl  the 
specially,  be- 
lich  could  not 

north  by  Hog 
Linguished,  at 
white  house, 
\.  S.  W.  or  S. 
[sland,  or  per- 

land,  which  is 
sandy  ground, 
here  is  a  bank 
lerable  extent. 
I  the  east  and 
The  entrance 
s,  vrhich  forKi 
■eef  stretching; 
he  high  or  up- 
te,  when  steer- 

!)ut,  at  a  boat's 
e  end  of  a  reef 
ms  in  breadth, 

ig  nearly  S.  E. 
[  end  on  :  then 
HStward,  at  the 
r  may  be  seen, 
ns,  good  bold-  - 
about  S  milest 

J  S.  E.  side  of 
m  the  town  of 
the  Bank. 
DENCE  Bab  or 
■rem  the  Hole 

,h  the  Douglas 
:he  Hole  in  the 
iafe  anchorage 

the  afternoon, 
|)d  Egg  Island 

I,  having  made 
3teer  for  them, 
[n  in  9  fathom?, 
Isheltered  from 

Inchor.igiB,  and    jj 
[at  the  iprlngo* 


I 


Providence, 
in  in  the  Wall, 


Directions  for  tailing  in  over  Nassau  Bar,  during  stormy  weather^ 

when  a  pilot  boat  cannot  go  out. 

Vessels  approaching  Nassau  in  tempestuous  weather,  when  the  pilot  cannot 
cross  the  bar,  by  obseiving  the  following  directions,  may  come  safe  over,  when 
the  pilot  will  be  ready^  to  receive  and  conduct  them  to  their  anchorage. 

On  a  white  flag  being  hoisted  on  the  point  of  Hog  Island,  near  the  light-house, 
a  small  white  flag  flying,  will  be  in  readiness  within  the  bar,  the  vessel  will  then 
steer  in,  giving  the  point  of  Hog  Island  about  80  fathoms  distance,  and  keeping 
Toney's  rock  (a  small  rock  within  the  bar,  on  which  a  beacon  is  erected)  and 
the  west  end  of  Fort  Charlotte  barracks  in  one ;  keep  this  course  until  you  bring 
the  white  flag  on  the  point  to  bear  east ;  then  put  your  helm  to  the  starboard  and 
keep  for  the  boat.  It  sometimes  happens  that  the  sea  breaks  from  pointy  to 
point,  even  in  moderate  %veather.  Wlien  this  is  the  case,  and  the  wind  should - 
be  to  the  south  or  east,  it  would  not  be  prudent  for  vessels  of  a  large  draught  of 
water  to  enter,  as  there  are  not  more  than  17  feet  water  at  low  tide  on  the  bar. 
By  order  of  the  Commissioners  of  Pilotage. 

[We  recommend  to  every  navigator  to  make  himself  acquainted  with  the  set 
of  the  currents  through  the  whole  extent  of  the  Gulf,  and  with  a  description  of 
all  the  Islands  and  Keys  which  compose  the  Bahama  Banks,  as  at  times  a  know- 
ledge of  them  may  be  highly  important.] 


*a 


General  directions  for  making,  and  navigating  on,  the  Coast  of  Cuba. 

In  the  rainy  season,  or  season  of  the  southerly  winds,  vessels  bound  from  Eu- 
rope to  Cuba  ought  to  pass  to  the  northward  of  Porto  Rico  and  Hayti  ^,r  St. 
Domingo ;  and  during  the  season  of  the  norths,  they  should  pass  to  the  south- 
ward of  these  islands,  unless  their  port  of  destination  requires  them  to  do  other- 
wise. There  are  other  reasons  for  adhering  to  this  mode  of  navigating.  In  Cu- 
ba the  ports,  to  which  vessels  are  bound  from  Europe,  may  be  reduced  to  two : 
these  are  St.  Jago  de  Cuba  and  the  Havanna.  If  bound  te  the  first,  it  is  neces- 
sary, in  every  season,  to  direct  your  course  directly  to  it;  that  is,  in  the  season 
of  the  norths  to  steer  from  Cape  Tiburon,  the  S.  W.  point  of  Hayti,  in  order  to 
make  some  point  on  the  south  side  of  Cuba,  to  windward  of  the  intended  port, 
or  even  to  windward  of  Guantanarao;  and,  in  the  season  of  the  souths,  to  steer 
from  Cape  Nicholas'  Mole,  on  the  N.  W.  coast  of  Hayti,  almost  west  for  the 
port,  marking,  in  the  first  place,  the  various  poirts  of  the  coast  of  Cuba,  which 
are  after  described.  (See  pages,  207,  8>tc.)  But  if  bound  to  Havanna,  atten- 
tion should  always  be  paid  to  the  season  ;  that  is,  if  your  passage  is  made  in  the 
time  of  the  norths,  you  should  go  to  the  south  of  Cuba,  although  you  have  to 
return  the  distance  between  Cape  Antonio  and  Havanna  ;  because  this  inconve- 
nience is  not  comparable  to  that  which  might  be  occasioned  on  the  north  side 
by  a  hard  north,  which  would  not  only  expose  a  vessel  to  heavy  risks,  but  might 
retard  the  voyage  much  longer  than  the  time  required  to  reach  Havanna  from 
Cape  Antonio  ;  for  this  distance  maybe  worked  up  in  a  short  time,  as  you  may 
have  the  assistance  of  tRe  current  to  the  eastward,  as  more  particularly  describ- 
ed in  the  directions  for  the  Strait  of  Florida,  page  156,  &ic. 

Those  navigating  on  the  south  of  Cuba,  who  have  no  occasion  to  touch  at  Trin- 
idad, or  any  other  part  of  that  coast,  should  give  it  a  good  ofling,  and  proceed 
^6  the  west  from  Cape  de  Cruz.  Here  it  may  be  observed  that,  at  the  distance 
Of  thirty-five  leagues  from  that  Cape  is  the  western  end  of  t^  low  island  called 
the' Cayinanbrack,  the  N.  E.  end  of  which  is  surrounded  hj  an  extensive  reef, 
the  making  of  which  is  dangerous  by  night,  because  a  reef  extends  from  it,  four 
miles  out  to  sea ;  and  allowance  must  always  be  made  for  the  current,  which, 
although  variable,  is  generally  prevalent  here.  The  safest  course  appears  to  be 
to  the  northward  of  the  Caymans  ;  but  even  here  it  is  requisite  to  beware  of  a 
thoal,  on  which  14  fathoms  have  been  found,  and  which  was  discovered  by  a 


%i 


206 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Spnnish  packet,  bound  to  Trinidad,  in  1 800,  and  there  is  reason  for  suspecting 
that  it  has  spots  of  very  little  water.  The  position  of  this  shoal,  according  to 
the  last  Spanish  chart,  is  lat.  20°  ll'N.  long.  80°  38'  W.  It  had  previously  been 
represented  more  than  half  a  degree  farther  to  the  eastward.* 

Th£.  navigation  on  the  North  of  Cuba  is  that  of  the  Bahama  or  Old  Channel. 
For  this  channel  it  is  customary  to  take.a  pilot,  who  may  be  engaged  either  at 
Aguadilla,  on  the  N.  W.  coast  of  Porto-Rico,  or  at  Baracoa,  in  Cuba,  as  no- 
ticed hereafter.  If  approaching  Baracoa,  for  this  purpose,  it  will  be  requi- 
site to  determine  the  ship's  place  in  the  vicinity  of  Cape  Maysi ;  for  otherwise 
you  may  happen  to  fall  in  to  leeward  of  Baracoa ;  and  even,  without  the  necessi- 
ty of  calling  for  a  pilot,  it  will  be  proper  to  make  the  land  in  the  neighbourhood 
of  the  cape,  for  the  sake  of  a  departure  hence  to  the  westward,  and  for  correct- 
ing any  error  produced  by  current.  The  remarkable  points  of  all  this  coast  will 
^  be  described  in  the  next  chapter.  The  Bahama  Bank,  with  its  keys  and  reefs,  in 
Chap.  III.  pages  165,  &i.c.  These  descriptions  must,  of  course,  be  especially  re- 
garded, and  strictly  attended  to. 

We  have  already  noticed  that  in  this  channel,  independent  of  any  current,  there 
is  a  regular  tide.  The  current  itself  is  very  uncertain,  and  no  doubt  fluctuates 
according  to  the  variations  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  winds,  fcc  It  sometimes  sets 
E.  S.  E.  at  other  times  W.  N.  W.  and  again  ceases.  With  every  precaution,  a 
vessel  ought  not  to  cross  the  meridian  of  Point  Maternillo  without  having  made 
and  remarked  it  well ;  as  all  the  care  of  the  mdst  zealous  and  attentive  navigator 
may  otherwise  be  of  no  avail  to  keep  him  clear  of  the  Mucaras  Shoal,  on  the. 
north  side  which  shows  no  symptom  of  its  existence  until  «  vessel  is  aground 
upon  it.  (See  page  177.)  If  obliged  to  beat  up  at  night,  it  ought  to  be  done  so 
as  not  to  prolong  the  tack  more  than  will  completely  and  certainly  clear  the 
Mucaras.  Having  passed  over  the  night  in  this  manner,  so  soon  as  it  is  clear 
day,  steer  so  as  to  make  the  coast,  and  recognize  it  well.  If  it  be  not  in  sighiit 
steer  to  the  south  until  you  make  it.  y^y 

Having  once  recognized  Maternillo  Point,  direct  your  course  so' as  to  past 
Guincho  or  Ginger  Key,  at  the  distance  of  two  leagues,  if  by  night;  or  make  it 
by  day,  and  thence  keep  over  toward  the  edges  of  the  Great  Bank  and  Salt-key 
Bank,  rather  than  to  the  keys  of  the  Coast  of  Cuba,  which  offer  few  marks  that 
can  be  depended  on  ;  and  an  approach  to  which  is,  therefore,  dangerous.  You 
will  have  passed  all  these  keys  when  abreast  of  Point  Ycacos,  and  may  thence 
proceed  according  to  the  descriptions  already  given  in  page  173.  But  the  safest 
way,  as  before  noticed,  is  towards  the  southern  edge  of  the  Salt-key  Bank,  pass- 
ing thence  to  the  westward,  according  to  judgment,  the  state  of  the  current,  &c. 

'*'  The  .^ame  chart  represents  another  shoal  o(  Sj^  fathoms  to  the  north-eastward,  in  lat. 
20O30',aninong.  80O27'. 


m- 


ULUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


207 


#         OBA?.  ZV. 

ISLAND    OF    CUBA. 


■it' 


eastward,  in  lat. 


;  ^  THE  NORTH-EAST  COAST  OF  CUBA. 

Cape  Maize,  the  most  easterly  point  of  the  south  part  of  Cuba,  is  situate  inr 
or  near  lat.  20°  13i'  N.  and  long.  74°  l' W.  The  point  itself  is  a  low  beach,  and 
cannot  be  clearly  seen  until  you  are  nearly  up  Avith  it.  Landing  on  it  is  extremely 
dangerous,  for  a  reef  extends  from  it  nearly  a  mile  to  the  eastward ;  and  advan- 
cing towards  it  during  the  night  is  very  unsafe,  unless  you  have  previously,  in 
day-light,  marked  the  high  lands  of  the  interior  country,  either  of  Cuba  or  of 
Hayti.  From  this  point  the  coast  tends  to  the  N.  W.  and  rounds  to  the  river 
Maysi,  at  a  mile  from  the  cape.  From  this  river  to  Point  Azules,  which  is  ano- 
ther mile,  nearly  ir^the  same  direction,  the  coast  is  bounded  by  a  reef,  which  ex- 
tends out  about  a  cable's  length,  ii.id  has  a  break  at  the  mouth  of  the  Maysi. 
From  Point  Azules  the  land  begins  to  rise,  and  the  coast  is  clean,  and  tends 
about  W.  N.  W.  for  five  miles  to  Punta  Frayle  or  Friar's  Point,  whence  it  ex- 
tends west,  six  miles  to  the  river  Yatnuri,  and  continues  in  the  same  direction^ 
two  miles  more,  to  the  harbour  of  Mata.  AH  this  coast  is  very  clean,  and  you 
may  run  along  it  within  half  a  mile. 

The  Harbour  of  Mata  is  very  small,  and  too  shallow  to  admit  vessels  drawing 
more  than  12  feet.  To  enter  it,  you  have  only  to  keep  in  mid-channel,  and  an- 
chor in  from  l4  to  18  feet  Avater,  almost  in  the  middle  of  the  bay.  All  the  shores 
have  shoal  water  from  them,  so  that  there  is  a  space  of  only  two  cables'  length 
in  diameter,  in  which  therein  sufficient  depth  for  anchopng. 

From  Puerto  de  Mata,  the  coast  tends  nearly  N.  W.  6  miles  to  Port  Majana, 
and  at  2  short  miles  from  it  is  the  mouth  of  the  river  Boma.  This  piece  of  coast, 
as  well  as  the  preceding,  is  very  clean. 

_  Point  Majatta  and  Baracoa  Point,  which  lie  nearly  east  and  west,  two  miles 
distant  from  each  other,  form  a  bay,  in  the  east  part  of  which  is  the  anchorage 
of  Ptaya  de  Mid  (Molasses  Beach) :  and  in  the  west,  the  mouth  of  the  port  of 
Baracoa  ;  in  the  middle,  between  these  two  anchorages,  is  the  town  of  Baracoa^ 
btanding  on  the  S.  E.  point  of  the  harbour  of  the  same  name.  In  this  town 
dwell  the  Pilots,  for  the  Bahama,  or  Old  Channel,  and  therefore  vessels  which 
have  not  previously  engaged  one,  at  the  Agadilla  in  Porto  Rico,  come  here  for 
one. 

The  anchorage  of  Playa  de  Miel  is  very  open  to  the  norths.  To  anchor  in  it, 
you  have  only  to  approach  Point  Majana,  and  anchor  something  to  the  south  of 
it,  in  from  10  to  SO  fathoms,  on  a  sandy  bottom,  taking  care  not  to  get  to  the 
east  of  that  point,  where  you  would  immediately  be  in  4,  or  even  in  less  than  4 
fathoms  of  water.  The  general  object  of  coming  to  Baracoa,  being  only  to  ob- 
tain a  pilot,  there  is  no  necessity,  in  that  case,  to  anchor  ;  but,  approaching  Point 
-Majana,  even  within  two  cable's  length,  if  you  choose,  fire  a  cannon  or  gun,  and  a 
pilot  will  come  off  directly.  As  the  Playa  de  Miel  is  entirely  open  to  the  norths, 
in  the  season  of  them  it  is  much  exposed ;  and,  therefore,  any  vessel  under  the 
necessity  of  anchoring,  should  steer  at  once  for  Baracoa,  to  the  entrance  of 
which  there  is  no  obstacle,  as  it  is  completely  clean,  having  no  danger,  but  what 
may  be  seen  ;  and  consulting  the  plan  of  it,  you  may  choose  the  spot  to  anchor 
in  which  best  suits  the  draught  of  water  of  your  vessel. 


d2. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


A 


Co 


^  .^. 


k 


/.^ 


A* 


1.0 


I.I 


11.25 


ijg  ^^   nil 

Z.  lift    "^ 
Lfi    12.0 


us 

u 


IJ& 


6"    - 


Photographic 

..Sciences 

Corporation 


<v 


■1>^ 


fV 


as  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WnSTIR.N.Y.  USM 

(7I«)  •72-4503 


208 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


\ 


^ARACOA  HARBOUR,  though  secure  and  sheltered,  has  the  great  incon- 
venience of  presenting  its  mouth  to  the  breeze,  and  a  great  swell  consequently 
Sets  \-< ;  and,  being  able  to  get  out  of  it  with  the-land  breeze  only,  vessels  are 
often  detained  much  time  in  it  during  the  norths,  when  the  land-breeze  is  not 
frequent ;  but,  in  the  rainy  season,  you  may  almost  reckon  on  having  it  every 
night.  The  Anvil  Hill  of  Baracoa  (El  Yunqat  de  Bomcoa)  which  is  a  little 
mountain  about  5  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  harbour,  is  an  excellent  mark  to 
recognize  it  by,  as,  in  clear  days,  it  may  be  discovered  at  a  distance  of  more  than 
]^  leagues,  and  appears,  over  the  other  high  land,  like  tlie  flat  top  of  an  anvil. 

From  the  Harbour  of  Baracoa,  the  coast  tends  almost  true  north,  3  milps  to 
Point  Cdnas,  which  although  very  clean,  ought  not  to  be  approached  ;  because, 
being  completely  open  to  the  breeze,  there  is  always  a  heavy  swell  settiiig  upon 
it.  From  Point  Canus  to  the  harbour  of  Maravi  is  two  miles :  the  col&t  tends 
nearly  west,  and  is  very  clean. 

Port  Mamvi,  though  small,  is  well  sheltered  from  the  Norths.    Its  entrance  is  % 
not  difficult,  for  ^ou  have  only  to  keep  in  mid-channel,  which  is  less  than  <»  ca- 
ble's length  in  width,  and,  running  in  for  the  middle  of  the  bay.  anchor  as  soon 
as  an  islet,  which  is  on  its  western  side,  bears  in  the  same  direction. 

From  Maravis  the  coas.  tends  nearly  north,  making  a  bend  (or  bight)  to 
Point  Fan,  and  from  thence  it  runs  to  the  W.  N.  W.  forming  another  bend  to  Port 
Navas,  which  is  an  opening  of  about  two  cable's  length  in  extent,  in  all  direc- 
tions, with  its  mouth  to  the  north,  therefore  useful  only  as  a  shelter  from  tho  - 
breezes.    To  enter  it,  no  more  is  necessary  than  an  inspection  of  the  plan.* 

From  Port  Novas  to  Port  Cayaguantqut,  the  distance  is  odb^fwo  short  miles. 
Gayagui)neque  is  fit  for  very  small  vessels  only,  and  its  entranc^  is  only  40  yards 
wide.  The  Plan  will  give  a  perfect  knowledge  of  it,  and  of  the  difficulties  which 
present  themselves  in  taking  it. 

TACO. — ^Three  and  a  half  miles  from  Cayaguaneque  is  the  harbour  of  Taco. 
It  is  well  sheltered ;  but  though,  in  its  interior,  there  is  depth  for  any  class  of 
vessels^  yet  its  entrance  has  a  bar  with  only  from  13  to  18  feet  on  it,  and  it  is  also 
obstr;ucted  by  rocky  shoals,  with  little  water  on  them,  which  stretch  out  from 
both  shores ;  but  as,  on  account  of  the  bar,  vessels  drawing  only  10  or  IS  feet 
water  should  go  in,  those  will  run  no  risk  it>  running  over  the  shoals,  and  there- 
fore may  take  this  harbour  by  keeping  in  mid-channel ;  and,  when  once  past  tho 
entrance,  they  may  direct  themselves  to  that  part  of  the  harbour  which  suits  them 
best.  ^ 

From  the  Harbour  of  Tato  to  Point  Jaragua  is  2^  miles  :  and  the  coast,  which 
is  a  sandy  beach,  is  clean.  At  Point  Jaragua  it  ceases  to  be  so,  though  all  be- 
tween it  and  Cape  Maysi  may  be  run  along  at  a  wile's  distance.  Point  Jaragua 
sends  out  a  reef,  which  stretches  to  the  N.  W.  of  it ;  this  point  is  the  eastern  one 
of  the  anchorage  of  the  same  name,  which  is  only  an  opening  in  the  reef,  by 
which  a  vessel  may  enter  upon  the  bank  or  shoal,  and  find  shelter  from  the  sea, 
behind  the  reef.  The  break  or  mouth  is  only  two-thirds  of  a  cable's  length 
wide ;  and  from  it  to  some  islets  which  are  to  the  S.  W.  of  it,  the  distance  is  two 
cables.  The  islets  are  three  in  number ;  the  southern  one  is  the  largest ;  the 
anchorage  for  large  vessels  extends  only  till  you  are  E.  and  W.  true,  with  the 
south  part  of  the  middle  islet ;  as  farther  in,  there  is  only  from  1£  to  18  feet  of 
water.  To  take  this  anchorage,  it  is  necessary  to  sail  outside  the  reef,  which 
extends  out  from  Point  Jaragua  until  the  east  part  of  the  great  islet  bears  nearly 
S.  W. ;  then  steer  directly  for  it :  and,  if  the  vessel  be  large,  anchor  as  soon  as 
you  are  E.  and  W.  with  the  mir'.ai.^  islet  in  6  fathoms,  on  a  sandy  bottom ;  bidk,  if 
the  vessel  draws  not  more  than  :  1  feet,  you  may  run  farther  in,  keeping  if  you 
choose,  within  a  <|uarter  of  a  table  of  the  great  islet,  and  about  a  cable's  length  ^ 
from  the  middle  of  it,  you  may  anchor  in  19  feet,  on  clay.  You  may  (.Iso  enter 
the  mouth  without  attending  to  the  given  raaikation  of  S.  W.  because  the  reef 
itself  shows  the  opening.  This  harbour  should  never,  be  taken  except  in  a  case 
of  necessity,  as  there  can  be  no  other  motive  for  vessels  boming  to  it. 


*  Tks  Plans  referred  to  in  tbeie  directiona,  ve  those  oC  the  PmrtuUmo  4»  la  «flmmca  EaUH' 
trimd,  published  at  Madrid  in  1S09.  i 


BLUNT^S   AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


£09 


From  Point  Jaraqua  the  coast  tends  flrat  to  the  N.  W.  and  afterwarda  to  tl|% 
North,  forming  a  great  bay  to  Point  Gnarico,  which  is  7  miles  distant  from  the 
former.  The  reef  which  extends  from  Point  Jaragua  rounds  the  whole  of  it, 
and  stretches  out  about  two  miles  from  Point  Guarico.  In  approaching  this  side 
of  Cuba,  be  careful  not  to  mistake  Guarico  Point  for  Cape  Maize,  it  being  dan- 
gerous at  night  and  in  tMbk  weather,  when  you  cannot  recognize  and  use  as  marks 
the  eastern  lands  of  the  island,  and  particularly  when  you  are  uncertain  of  your  j^ 
latitude.  ^^ 

From  Point  Guarico  the  coast  tends  nearly  N.  W.  8  miles  to  the  River  Moa ; 
it  is  all  bordered  by  a  reef  which  extends  about  two  miles  out  to  sea.  Almost  N. 
by  W.  from  the  mouth  of  that  river,  and  between  the  reef  and  the  shore,  is  an 
islet,  na^ed  Cayo  Moa,  which  offers  an  excellent  anchorage,  sheltered  from  all 
sea.  ^  It%  entered  by  an  opening  in  the  reef  almost  due  north  from  the  mouth  of 
the  river.  This  opening  is  about  two  cable's  length  in  width,  and  continues  W. 
by  S.  forming  the  channel  and  anchorage,  until  the  east  part  of  Cayo  Moa  bears 
north.  To  take  it,  run  along  the  east  side  of  the  reef  until  up  with  the  opening, 
which  will  be  when  the  eastern  part  of  Cayo  Moa  bears  W.  by  S.  and  then 
steer  S.  W.  until  the  south  part  of  Cayo  Moa  bears  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  then 
steer  W.  ^  S.  and  continue  so  till  you  anchor  to  the  southward  of  the  eastern 
part  of  Cayo  Moa,  in  6^  or  7  fathoms,  upon  clay.  The  plan  of  the  port  will  give 
a  perfect  idea  of  this  anchorage ;  for  recognizing,  or  finding  which,  some  moun- 
tains about  4  leagues  inland,  named  the  Sitrras  dt  Moa,  may  serve  as  land- 
marks. 

From  the  JlncJlNn^e  of  Moa,  the  coast  tends  about  west ;  it  is  all  bounded  by 
a  reef,  which  extehdb  £  or  3  miles  from  it,  as  far  as  Port  Yagitaneque,  which  is  11 
miles  distant  from  the  /ormer.  On  this  part  of  the  coast,  and  between  it  and 
the  reef,  are  two  keys,  the  eastern  one  named  Burros  (Asses,)  and  the  western 
Arena  (Sand) :  these  keys  may  serve  a'^  Anarks  for  knowing  this  part  of  the 
coast.  The  harbor  of  Yagtianeque  is  fit  ftr  small  vessels  only,  because  its  bot- 
tom is  shiillow  and  unequal,  and  its  entrance  narrow  and  diflicult  to  take,  for  the 
month  is  formed  merely  by  a  break  in  the  reef.  To  take  tiiis  port,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  follow  the  edge  of  the  reef  to  windward,  until  you  come  to  the  opening, 
which  lies  N.  W.  two  thirds  of  a  mile  from  Arena  Key  ;  then  steer  to  the  south- 
ward, keeping  along  the  edge  of  the  weather-reef,  because  the  lee-reef,  which 
commences  when  you  are  west  from  Arena  Key,  narrows  the  entrance  so  much, 
that  there  is  scarcely  a  cable's  length  of  width  m  the  channel.  It  is  fit  for  smalj 
craft  only. 

CANANOVA.— A  mile  and  a  half  from  Yaguaneque  is  the  port  of  Cananotfo^ 
which  is  properly  an  opening  of  the  coast  only,  and  must  be  entered  by  another 
opening  through  the  reef. 

Three  miles  to  the  westward  of  Cananova  Harbour  is  that  of  Cebollas,  which 
is  alike  most  difficult  to  enter,  or  to  get  out  of,  and  therefore  unfit  for  large 
vessels. 

TANAMO.— Ten  miles  west  from  Cebollas,  is  Port  Tanamo,  and  the  inter- 
mediate coast  is  foul,  with  a  reef  which  extends  out  about  two  miles 
from  it.  Tanamo  is  a  large  harbour,  and  fit  fur  vessels  of  any  denomination  ;  to 
enter  it,  you  must  run  along  the  edge  of  the  windward-rec^  until  you  find  the 
opening  in  it ;  then  steer  S.  1  £.  until  you  have  passed  the  leeward 
point,  when  you  may  keep  away  up  the  elbow  which  the  channel  makes,  in  the 
middle  of  which  you  ought  to  keep  ;  but  no  more  is  necessary  than  to  give  a  birlh 
of  a  third  of  a  cable  to  all  fhat  is  visible.  With  the  Pkai,  and  your  eye,  no  farther 
directions  are  needful.  | 

CABONICO  and  LIVISA. — From  Tanamo  the  coast  tends  west,  10  miles,  ^ 
to  the  entrance  of  the  harbours  o(  Cabpnico  and  Livisa ;  a  reef  extends  also  two 
jjiiles  from  this  piece  of  coast.  These  two  harbours  have  one  common  entrance, 
which  divides  within  into  tv^  branches  ;  one  to  the  eastward,  leading  to  Cabonico, 
and  the  ether  to  Uie  wefttward,  leading  to  Livisa.  To  enter  theB»  harbours,  you 
must  go  in  by  the  opt^nf?*  in  the  reef,  and  then  steer  for  the  windward  point, 
until  it  bears  S.  &  E.  and  being  then  near  it,  keep  mid-channel,  avoiding  a  reef 
which  runs  out  from  the  windward  ^Qr«f  and  which  lies  out  about  a  cable's 

27 


I 


I.  ^ 


aj 


^i^- 


'f  M; 


210 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  FILOT. 


If"     N 


llngth  from  the  interior  point.  You  may  approach  within  a  third  of  a  cable  of 
the  leetvard  shore ;  once  abreast  of  the  interior  points,  steer  for  the  channel  of 
the  harbour  you  wi»h  to  take,  without  any  other  cnre  tlian  to  Itecp  mid-channel. 

NIPE. — From  these  ports  the  coast  contiiuies  foul,  having  a  reef  about  W.N. 
W.  5  miles  to  the //ffr/wwr  of  Nipe.  This  bay,  for  its  magnitude  and  depth,  is 
very  extensive,  and  has  a  spacious  entrance.  The  harbour  is  always  accessible, 
for  with  either  the  breezes  or  the  norths,  you  will  run  in  with  a  free  wind  ;  com- 
ing nut  is  (juite  the  reverse,  for  this  requires  the  land-breezes,  which,  as  we  have 
said  before,  is  often  very  rare  in  the  season  of  the  norths. 

To  distinguish  this  part  of  the  coast,  the  mountains  of  Cristal  may  serve  as 
marks :  these  are  a  continuation  of  the  Cordillera  (or  range)  which  comes  from 
Baracoa,  and  extends  to  the  south  from  Port  Livisu,  at  about  IS  miles  in!?,pd. 
The  Pan  of  Soma,  to  the  west,  is  also  another  excellent  mark  of  reco^fiizance ; 
its  figure  being  such  that  it  cannot  be  mistaken,  because  the  summit  oi  it  forms 
a  table.  It  rises  on  the  land  to  the  north  of  Nipe  and  Banes,  and  is  almost  N. 
and  S.  (true)  with  the  harbour  of  Sama  ;  and  a\s  the  mountains  of  Cristal  termi- 
nate to  the  east,  and  the  Pan  of  Sama,  which  begins  to  rise  gradually,  almost 
from  Point  Mulas,  form  an  opening  or  break  in  the  chain  of  hills  or  mountains,  it 
is  almo''.  impossible  fur  any  one  to  mistake  the  place.  The  Pan  of  Sama  may 
be  seen  20  miles  off. 

BANES.— From  the  harbour  of  Nipe  the  coast  tends  N.  W.  l1  miles,  to  the 
port  of  Banes:  it  is  all  clean,  and  may  be  run  along  at  half  a  mile's  distance. 
The  harbour  of  Banes  has  its  entrance  in  the  middle  of  a  bsiy,  f<||rmed  by  the 
coast,  and  which  has  2^  miles  of  opening,  whence  it  narro\ml In  to  the  entrance 
of  the  port,  which  is  only  a  cable  and  a  half  in  width,  so  tliat  it  resembles  a 
funnel.  The  shores  of  both  the  bay  and  channel  are  ^uncommonly  clear  and 
deep-to,  and  you  have  to  fear  nothing  but  what  is  seen.     Only  thus  could  this 

Eort  be  entered  with  facility,  as  its  entrance  is  so  tortuous,  and  with  such  el- 
ows  and  tiu'nings,  that  you  must  alter  your  course,  almost  in  an  instant,  from 
S.  to  N.  It  is  excellent  as  a  place  of  shelter,  for  any  class  of  vessels.  It  is  ex- 
tremt'ly  diflicuit,  however,  to  get  out  of ;  because  its  mouth  stands  open  to  the 
trade-wind,  and  it  is  necessary  to  avail  yourself  of  the  land-breeze  to  get  out 
clear  :  at  any  rate  as  far  as  the  middle  of  the  bay,  that  you  may  have  room  to 
tack  and  clear  yourself  from  the  rest  of  it,  as  well  as  of  the  coast,  which  there 
tends  aiiout  N.  by  E.  10  miles,  to  Point  Mulas,  and  which  is  foul,  with  a  reef 
|hat  stretches  a  mile  from  it. 

POINT  MULAS. — To  enable  any  one  to  recognize  Point  Mulas,  which  on 
account  of  its  being  very  foul,  and  lying  farther  to  the  northward  than  any  of 
the  anterior  coast,  may  be  very  suspicious  ;  the  marks  already  given  may  suffice : 
these  being  the  mountains  of  distal  and  Pan  of  Sama. 

About  5  miles  N.  W.  from  Point  Mulas  is  Point  Lucretia,  which  is  clear  and 
high ;  the  coast  thence  continues  to  the  v^est,  with  some  inclination  to  the  South, 
for  Id  miles,  to  the  Port  of  Sama  forming  a  bay  named  Rio  Seco  {Dry  River.) 
All  this  coast  is  very  clear  and  scarped,  excentingthe  bay,  which  has  a  beach. 

The  PORT  of  SAMA  is  fit  for  vessels  only  which  do  not  draw  more  than  12 
feet  of  water :  and,  as  the  shores  both  of  its  entrance  and  the  interior  are  very 
clean,  the  inspection  of  the  Plan  will  afford  all  the  necessary  instruction  for  tak- 
ing it.  You  may  know  this  part  of  the  coast  and  harbour,  by  the  Pan  of  Sama, 
and  a  hill  or  mountain  near  its  western  part,  which  is  pretty  long,  and  lies  N.  W. 
and  S.  E.  and  the  top  of  it  seems  to  be  plain  and  equal,  and  at  its  west  end  are 
scarped  rocks,  which  seem  white,  and  where  much  hoi^'.y  is  made.  From  this 
slope  a  sandy  beach  named  Guardulaboca,  continues  to  the  west :  to  the  south  of 
it  may  be  seen  a  detached  'lill,  in  the  form  of  a  sugar-loaf,  and  to  tha  S.  W.  a 
small  mountain,  covered  with  trees,  the  top  of  which  forms  a  table,  and  which  is 
named  the  Mcsata  de  Neranjo  (Little  Orange  Table.)  Between  the  hill  and 
the  mountain  is  Port  Naranjo,  which  is  5  miles  disUnt  from  Sama. 

PORT  NARANJO  is  a  good  harbour  for  vess^s  of  every  class.  Its  wind- 
ward point  may  easily  be  known  by  being  high  and  scatped,  while  the  rest  is  of 
beach.  To  take  the  harbour  you  must  sail  vrithout  the  reef,  until  the  windward 
point  bears  S.  i  E.  when  you  may  sjultowards  it,  taking  care  to  give  it  a  cable'* 


bigl 

10 

be 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


211 


length  birth,  to  keep  clear  of  a  shoal  which  surround!)  it,  and  stretches  out  about 
two-thirds  of  a  cable  from  it.  It  is  also  necessary  to  he  cautious  of  another  shoal 
which  stretches  out  from  the  leeward  coast,  and  which  sallios  out  to  the  north  of 
the  exterior  slopini;  point,  uhnut  one  cable  and  one  third.  What  ought  to  be  done 
is,  to  run  in  mid-channel,  until  ynti  are  past  the  two  points  of  the  entrance ;  and 
so  soon  as  you  are  well  past  that  to  windward,  yon  may  InfT  up,  and  anchor  in  a 
bif^ht  formed  by  the  east  coast,  at  about  two-thirds  of  a  cable  from  it,  and  in 
10  fathoms  water,  opposite  the  spot  where  the  mangroves  come  down,  so  as  to 
be  bathed  with  the  water. 

This  Itarbour  has  the  peculiar  advantige  that  a  vessel  may  sail  either  in  or  mtt 
with  the  breeze. 

Prom  Port  Naranjo,  the  coast,  which  is  a  foul  beach,  tends  W.  2i  miles  to  Point 
Ptsqttera  Nuevo,  which  is  sloj)ing  and  clean ;  thence  it  descends  W,  S.  W.  three 
wiles  to  Port  Vita,  and  is  very  clean.  This  little  port  is  very  good  for  vessels 
which  do  not  draw  more  than  18  feet,  and  the  inspection  of  the  Chart  of  it  will 
be  a  sufficient  guide.  Three  miles  to  the  west  of  Vita  is  another  small  harbour, 
named  Bariay,  at  the  mouth  of  which  there  is  shelter  from  the  breexfis,  but  only 
in  the  interior  from  the  norths.  Very  small  vessels  only  can  get  up  there.  The 
coast  between  Vita  and  Bariay  is  very  clean.  A  mile  to  leeward  of  Bariay  there 
is  another  port,  named  Jururu,  the  entrance  to  which  is  very  difficult,  being  very 
narrow :  and  although  vessels  drawing  90  feet  may  enter  it,  only  small  vessels 

ought  to  do  SQ.  *  '  J 

UlBARAvOr  XIBERA. — Five  miles  west  from  Jururu  is  the  harbour  of  Cft- 
baxa.  Its  entrance  is  5  cable's  in  breadth,  and  completely  open  to  the  north. 
The  coast  between  it  and  Jurnru  is  very  clean.  To  find  the  port,  three  hills  cr 
mi>unts,  which  are  to  be  seen  to  the  south  of  it,  and  which,  at  a  great  distance, 
appear  to  be  islands,  are  excellent  marks.  The  first  and  most  easterly  of  these 
is  named  Silla  of  Qibara  (Saddle  of  Gibara) :  the  middle  one  resembles  the 
shape  of  a  sugar-boiler ;  and  to  the  west  of  the  third  are  some  hills  of  a  regular, 
height. 

From  Port  Gibara,  the  roast,  which  is  clean  and  sloping,  tends  to  the  north,  two 
miles  to  Point  Brava,  from  which  follows  N.  W.  10  miles,  of  thte  same  kind  of 
coast,  to  Punta  Mangle  (Mangrove  Point) :  and  from  it  continues  0  miles  in  the 
same  direction,  but  is  a  sandy  beach  and  clean.  From  this  point  it  tends  west, 
but  is  foul,  with  a  reef  of  six  miies,  to  Puerto  del  Padre:  all  this  land  is  low,  and 
on  the  coast  maybe  seen  some  small  palm  trees,  called  Miraguanaa :  at  the  west 
«id3  of  Port  Padre,  there  are  two  little  mounds  very  close  together. 

PUERTO  DEL  PADRE— The  harbour  of  Padre  it  excellent,  and  fit  for 
any  class  and  number  of  vessels  :  its  entrance  is  long,  and  only  two  cables  in 
width  ;  but  its  shores  are  very  clean  and  have  deep  water.     To  enter  this  bar-     * 
buur,  it  is  necessary  to  navigate  outside  the  reefs,  until  the  east  point,  named 
Jarro,  bears  S.  by  E.  ^  E.  when  you  may  p|j»ce  the  prow  to  the  outer  leeward 
point  of  the  entrance  channel ;  and,  it  is  necessary  not  to  confound  this  point 
with  another,  which  is  to  the  N.  E.  upon  the  same  coast,  and  which,  for  dis- 
tinction, is  named  Guinchos:  the  last  has  an  islet  of  the  same  name,  very  clos% 
to  it,  and  it  may  assist  much  in  finding  the  mouth  of  this  harbour.    Running  fo#:; 
the  before  mentioned  point  to  leeward,   and  then  close  past  the  S.   E.  part  of 
Ouinchos,  no  more  remains  than  to  steer  for  the  channel,  without  its  bemg  ne- 
cessary to  beware  of  any  more  than  what  is  visible. 

From  PORT  PADRE  the  coast  follows  to  the  west,  5  miles,  to  Point  Pie- 
dras,  or  Rock  Point.  Here  is  the  entrance  of  the  great  bay  of  Malagueta,  which 
is  no  more  than  a  lagoon,  formed  in  the  interior,  in  consequence  of  the  land  being  4 
low  and  wet.  The  coast  thence  tends  N.  N.  W.  5  miles,  to  the  Point  of  Co- 
varrubias,  from  which  it  tends  W.  N.  W.  10  miles,  to  the  harbour  of  Manati. 
All  this  coast  is  foul,  with  a  reef  which  stretches  out  from  it  about  two  miles.         v 

PUERTO  DE  MANATI.— The  harbour  of  Manati  may  bo  known  by  a 
mount,  which  may  be  discovered  inland  from  it,  shaped  like  a  sugar-loaf;  it  is 
called  the  Manueco,  and  may  be  seen  at  the  distanee  of  15  or  30  miles.  Close  to 
the  west  of  this  may  be  seen  another  hill  not  quite  so  high  as  it,  which  is  called 
Fordo,  or  the  Table  of  Manati,  wbicL'  when  iQ«a  in  one,  or  shut  ia  with  th« 


«  '-'%'■ 


»'i 


U 


\ 


1  ^^^■■^■■.tfc, 


212 


BLUNT'8    AMfiRICAir   COAST    PILOT. 


iM- 


t 


H 


Manueeo,  looks  like  one  hill,  and  presents  to  the  view  the  appearance  of  tho 
Saddle  of  Ctftoro,  which  appearance  has  deceived  many,  and  is  dangerous  to 
navigation. 

This  harbour  of  Manati  may  be  considered  as  a  lagoon,  formed  in  low  wet 
land,  with  a  long,  narrow  and  crooked  channel  in  it,  and  in  which  there  is  depth 
of  water  for  small  vessels  only  ;  as  this  channel,  throughout  its  extent,  is  bordered 
frith  shoals  of  6  and  8  feet  of  water,  it  is  running  much  risk  to  enter  it  with 
ibiddling  sized  vessels,  and  much  more  so  with  ships  of  war.     ' 

Three  miles  N.  N.  W.  from  Point  Manati,  is  Point  Brava,  which  is  foul, 
with  a  reef;  the  coast  thence,  which  is  also  foul,  with  a  reef,  tends  about  west(|^- 
for  five  miles,  to  the  port  of  Nuevas  Grandas  (Greai  News.)  To  enter  this  port,  % 
which  is  fit  only  for  vessels  of  12  feet  draught,  it  is  necessary  to  go  in  at  a  break 
in  the  reef,  and  the  reef  lies  out  six  ca^es  or  two-thirds  of  a  mile  firom  the 
coast,  and  follow  in  afterwards  all  that  distimce  by  a  channel  which  the  reef  forms, 
and  which,  in  some  places,  is  only  half  a  cable's  length  in  breadth.  This  chan- 
nel is  very  crooked,  and  therefore  mny  one  who  is  not  well  acquainted  runs  much 
risk.  So  soon  as  you  are  abreast  of  the  points  of  the  harbour,  you  may  riin 
along  the  coast,  at  the  distance  of  one-quarter  of  a  cable,  withdut  any  fear. 

NUEVITAS  DEL  PRINCIPE.— From  Nuevas  Grandes  the  coast  tends 
about  N.  W.  eleven  miles,  to  the  harbour  of  Nutvitas :  it  is  all  ftftil,  with  a  reef, 
and  may,  as  well  as  the  harbour,  be  recognized  by  three  mounts,  of  short  extent, 
which  rise  within  the  harbour;  there  are  also  three  illetsin  the  harbour,  named 
the  Ballanates :  these  seem  high  to  the  east,  and  diminish  t  'Vaj^s  the  west. 
Nuevitas  Harbour  is  a  large  bay,  with  many  shoals,  but  fit  fbi  any  number  and 
class  of  vessels.  To  enter,  it  is  necessary  to  avoid  its  windward  or  east  point,  to 
which  you  ought  not  to  approach  nearer  than  a  cable's  length,  but  approaching 
if  you  choose  within  half  a  cable's  length  of  the  leeward  point :  but  the  best 
way  is  to  keep  in  the  middle  of  the  channel,  which  is  very  long  and  crooked. 
^  From  mid-lengtfa^  of  the  channel,  going  in  the  coasts,  send  out  shoals,  to  keep 
'^lear  of  which  requires  good  practice ;  which  practice  is  equally  necessary  in 
the  interior  of  the  bay. 

From  Nuevitas  the  coast  tends  about  N.  N.  W.  to  the  point  of  Matemillos, 
and  is  very  clean.  From  Point  Mater.iillos  it  tends  about  W.  N.  W.  and  is  bor- 
dered with  a  reef,  which  stretches  out  a  mile  and  a  half.  All  the  coast  from 
Maternillos  rises  ■n  little ;  and  nearly  at  the  end  of  it,  and  about  fourteen  miles 
from  Maternillos,  there  is  a  little  mount,  called  that  of  Jmin  Damie,  which  forms 
a  kind  of  table.  At  this  point  commences  a  great  white  shoal  or  bank,  ifhich 
extends  far  to  the  west,  and  Upon  which  are  mafty  keys;jihd  reefs.  Here  we 
cease  from  de^ciibing  the  coast,  as  being  of  no  use  to  navigation,  and  begin  to 
describe  the  edge  of  the  white  ground  or  shoal,  with  i^ts  and  keys  upon  it. 

About  W.  N.  W.  from  the  point  of  Juan  Danue,  but  almost  joined  to  it,  there 
is  a  little  islet,  and  in  the  same  direction,  and  at  the  distance  of  six  miles,  is  the 
Island  Guojaba;  this  island  may  be  known  by  fourlittte  mounts,  which  lie'almust 
in  a  line,  east  and  west ;  the  first  three  may  readily  be  s^en,  but  it  is  not  so  with 
the  fourth,  which  being  of  less  elevation  than  the  third,  remains  hidden  by  it, 
P>ut  as  you  ad\'ance  to  the  westward  it  opens  out,  and  the  whole  four  may  be  per- 
ceived. At  about  four  or  five  leagues  beyond,  these  hillocks  appear,  as  it  were, 
many  islets,  caused  by  the  lower  lands  of  the  coast  being  invisible  above  the 
horizon. 

KEY  R,OMANO,  &&c.— To  the  west  from  Gu^aba  at  tFie  distance  of  eight 
miles,  lies  Key  Romano,  an  island  stretching  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  m  which  direction 
it  is  sixteen  leagues  in  extent.  This  land  properly  consists  of  two  islands,  sepa- 
rated by  a  channel,  half  a  mile  wide ;  the  eastern  isle  has  some  heights,  wjhich, 
in  the  middle  of  it  form  a  kind  of  saddle.  The  western  isle  is  of  low,  wet, 
mangrove  land.  Key  Romano  lies  considerably  within  the  White  Grounds, 
and  two  small  keys,  called  Key  Verde  and  Key  C9nfites,  lie  Jiearly  N.  u  W. 
from  its  easternmost  height ;  the  first  at  the  distance  ofccven,  and  tn%  second  at 
twelve  miles.  Key  Verde  lies  N.  W.  i  W.  from  the  west  part  of  Guajaba,  and 
Key  Confltes,  N.  W.  by  N. :  between  tbtese  two  keys  ia  an  anchorage,  which 
may  be  taken  in  caae  of  necessity. 


r 


^p 


BLUNT  S   AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


213 


% 


The  Key  Verde  or  Green  Key,  lies  four  and  three-quarters  miles  S.  by  E.  from 
Key  Confites,  and  a  reef  ext(>.n(i>)  frutu  it,  nnrthwani,  to  the  distance  of  a  mile 
and  a  half.  Fiora  Key  Conliu^H  a  reuf  likewise  extends  to  the  southward,  one 
mile,  and  there  is  a  clear  passage  of  more  than  two  miles  within  these  reefs. 

In  order,  therefore,  to  gain  this  anchorage,  when  coming  from  the;  eastward, 
you  must  stand  in  for  the  passage  formed  by  these  reefs,  keeping  a  little  nearer  to 
Confites  than  to  Key  Verde  ;  and,  when  the  middle  of  Confites  bears  due  N. 
W.  by  N.  and  the  middle  of  Key  Verde  S.  by  W.  you  will  be  on  or  nearly  ;0n' 
the  edge  of  the  bank.  Then  lay  the  ship's  head  W.  N.  W.  and  stand  on  in  this 
direction,  i:ntil  the  southernmost  part  of  Key  Confites  bears  north,  when  you 
will  stand  N.  N.  W.  or  a  little  more  to  the  northward.  Having  at  length  brought 
the  south  end  of  Confites  JS.  N.  E.  half  a  mile  distant,  you  may  let  go  the  ao- 
chor,  in  S^  or  4  fathoms,  on  sandy  ^i'oi|nd. 

In  getting  under  way  from  this  anchorage,  should  the  wind  not  allow  you  to 
stand  to  the  S.  E.  you  must  bear  away  to  the  N.  W.  by  N.  until  you  have  clear- 
ed a  reef  of  rocks  extending  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  N.  W.  from  Confi- 
ties  Key;  after  which  you  may  stand  to  the  north,  in  order  the  sooner  to  gain 
the  main  channel. 

West  from  Key  Verde  there  is  a  round  key,  named  Palomas,  (Pigeon's)  with 
various  other  small  ones  in  its  neighbourhood :  to  the  northward  is  the  island 
nntned  Key  de  Cruz,  (Key  of  the  Cross)  which  is  dbout  thirteen  miles  in  extent* 
N.  by  W.  and  S.  by  E.  To  the  N.  E.  of  this  isle,  and  at  the  distance  of  three 
miles,  there  is  on  the  very  edge  of  the  grounds,  %8hoal  named  Tnhutario  de  Mi- 
nerva, which  lies  N.  41°  W.  from  Key  Confites,  at  twelve  miles  distance. 

The  Edge  of  the  Grounda,  which  is  ree'*,  stretches  out  a  mile  and  a  half  from 
Juan  Danue,  two  and  a  half  miles  from  Guajaba,  and  from  the  E.  N.  E.  to  N« 
£.  from  the  high  part  of  Key  Romano,  forms  an  opening,  by  which,  accordini; 
to  report,  a  vessel  may  enter,  apd  anchor  in  6  fathoms,  upon  sand,  but  good  hold 
ing  ground;  but  as  we  cannot  guarantee  this,  any  one  who^inakes  the  attemj 
ought  to  exert  great  caution.  * 

From  this  opening  the  reef  rises  again,  but  makes  the  opening  already  describ- 
ed between  Key  Verde  and  Key  Confites ;  and  thence  the  edge  of  the  ground 
continues,  sometimes  foul,  and  at  others  without  reef,  to  the  Tributario  Shoal : 
this  shoal  breaks  with  a  fresh  breeze,  and  shows  above  the  surface  at  low  water. 
Six  miles  VV.  by  N.  from  it  is  Key  JBaril,  (Barrel  Key)  and  farther  to  the  west 
is  Great  Paredon  Key.  •  The  edge  of  the  grounds,  which  is  sometimes  foul,  and 
soi^etimes  clean,  lies  out  two  miles  from  Key  Baril,  and  one  and  a  half  mile 
fron^e  north  part  of  the  Great  Paredon.  The  latter  key  alTords  good  anchor- 
age nl  either  the  time  cf  breezes  or  land-winds.  To  ascertain  and  take  it,  re- 
member that,  at  a  cable\i  length  to  the  north  of  its  north  point,  there  is  a  small 
round  key,  which  you  ought  to  leave  on  the  larboard  hand  when  going  in,  and 
passing  within  from  half  a  cable  to  a  cable's  length  from  it.  You  anchor  so  soon 
as  yoti  are  sheltered  by  the  land  of  the  Great  Paredon,  in  the  depth  of  water 
that  suits  the  vessel's  draught.  On  entering,  you  will  leave  to'starboard  another 
key,  rather  larger  than  the  one  you  leave  to  larboard ;  it  is  called  the  M\ 
Paredon,  and  lies  about  two  and  a  half  miles  from  the  first. 

From  the  Middle  Paredon  to  the  west,  there  is  another  large  key,  called  Coci 
from  the  middle  6f  which,  to  the  west  end,  there  is  anchorage  on  its  north  side. 

To  the  westward  of  Coco,  follow  the  groups  of  keys  called  St.  Phillip'*  GuU- 
krmo^s,  and  Santa  Maria't ;  to  the  west  of  these,  and  at  the  distance  of  sixteen 
leagues  from  Coco  Key,  lies  that  called  Key  Frances,  which  may  be  known 
from  its  having  three  round  mounts ;  two  of  them  very  close  together,  and  the 
thii^  separate.  These  are  named  Tetas  de  Viuda  (Widow's  Papa.)  Westward 
from  this  key  is  anotlier  portion  of  keys,  one  of  which  cannot  be  distinguished 
from  another  without  difficulty,  as  they  are  so  much  alike. 

The  edge  of  the  Groundt  from  Key  Frances,  and  even  something  before  that, 
is  clean,  lind  the  lead  wW  there  warn  you  before  you  are  in  any  danger  upon  it. 
Nevertheless,  there  is  considerable  risk  from  the  Baxo  Niculao  or  Nicholas  Shoal, 
which  is  a  spot  of  saod,  lying  at  a  considerable  distance  to  the  north ttrtrd  of  the 
«ther  kejf,  and  is  4A  fathoms  long,  and  i  fathoou  wide ;  it  is  surrouqdad  by  a 

•     »  i        * 


'iiier 
iddU 

m 

UocoT^ 


214 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


reef  to  the  N.  E.  — N.  and  N.  W.  to  the  distance  of  a  cable  and  a  half.  Two 
miles  to  the  west  from  it,  another  shoal  breaks,  which  is  named  the  AkatraceSf 
and,  as  these  shoals  present  great  dangers  to  the  navigator,  it  is  necessary  to 
give  some  marks  to  recognize  them  by,  and  which  will  indicate  the  position  of  a 
vessel  in  respect  to  the  shonls. 

Among  other  mountains  which  are  on  the  land  of  Cnha,  a  id  about  S.  S.  E. 
and  south  from  these  shoaU,  the  Sierra  Morena  (Black  Mountain)  is  the  best 
known  ;  it  is  long,  and  lies  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  The  S.  E.  head  oftit  is  moderately 
high,  and  upon  its  extremities  are  various  points  or  peaks  (pichachos)  ;  of  these 

Ceaks  the  two  which  are  on  the  N.  W.  extremity  of  the  Sierra'  (mountain)  are 
igh,  and  lie  N.  and  S.  true,  with  Nicolao  Shoal.  A  little  more  to  the  west  of  "^^ 
the  Sierra  Morena  rises  another  mountain,  with  three  heights  on  it,  of  which  the 
middle  one  is  the  highest ;  it  lies  S.  by  |^  true  from  the  Nicolao  Shoul.  These 
heights  are  named  the  Tet^ta  de  la  Bella  (Belle's  Paps) ;  and  being  N.  and  S.  true 
with  the  middle  one  of  them,  you  will  be  also  N>  and  S.  with  the  Bay  of  Cadiz 
Key,  and  past  both  the  Nicolao  an(j^.Alacatraces  Shoals. 

To  the  west  of  the  Tetas  de  la  Bella,  two  mountains  are  seen ;  the  first  is  of 
regular  extent,  the  second  or  westernmost  very  long,  and  at  the  end   of  it  are 
two  hills,  named  Sierra  de  Limones,  (Lime  Mountain)  which  runs  S.  by  W.  true     - 
with  the  western  extremity  of  the  Bay  of  Cadis  Key.     Farther  to  the  west  lies 
out  another  mountain,  of  proportioned  extent,  named  Santa  Clara;  and  some- 
'       thing  to  the  west  of  it  may  be  seen  the  I^aps  of  Camaricoa,  oj"  %vhich  there  are     ^ 
li       four,  though  in  some  positions* there  do  not  appear  to  be  so  many.    The  middle 
t       one  is  the  largest,  and  lies  S.  W.  with  the  westernmost  part  of  Key  Cruz  del  Pa- 
dre (Key  of  the  Father's  Cross.)     Ti.ese  mountains  are  the  highest  which  are 
on  the  north  coast  of  Cuba;  but  it  is  to  be  remarked  that  those  which  are  to 
the  east  and  west  of  them  are  very  equal  (•  those  to  the  wt-st.  indeed,  are  little 
less  elevated  than  ."-.hese  mountains  themselves.    Such  arc  i'w  {..nds  that  are  seen 

«the  interior  of  tb*  island,  from  the  proximities  of  the  Nicoliio  Shoal. 
The  fVhite  Ground  still  ti^nds  to  the  w^t :  there  are  many  keys  upon  the  edge 
or  border  of  it,  and  the  edge  is  dangerous,  having  some  reefs  on  it     The  Qrnnnd 
and  Keys  terminate  at  Point  Jacos.     The  keys  named  Mono,  Pi'dras,  and  Mo' 
nillo,  are  the  westernmost  on  the  reef;  these  afford  y.oo  1  anchorage  where  shelter 
''■'        from  the  swell  of  the  norths  may  be  found. 

The  YCACOS  KEYS.— To  the  north-eastwaro  of  Vort  Ycacos,  at  the  dir,- 
tance  of  about  a  mile  from  the  edge  of  the  bank,  lie  tf^e  three  islets  called  !>y 
the  Spaniards  Cayo  Mono. 

PiEDRAS  and  MoNiLLO.  These  keys  afford  convenient  anchorage  to ^aimela 
which  cannot  advantageously  use  the  harbour  of  Matanzas.  The  southenRndlt 
and  smallest  is  the  Monillo,  which  lies  at  the  distance  of  three  miles  from  Point 
Ycacos ;  from  the  Monillo  to  the  Cayo  de  Piedras,  (Rocky  Key)  the  -distance  is 
only  half  a  mile,  and  from  the  latter  to  Mono  Key  it  is  two  miles.  At  a  mile  and 
a  quarter  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Mono,  there  is  a  dangerous  reef.  * 

The  anchorage,  in  regular  soundings  of  5  to«7  fathoms,  bottom  of  sand,  is  to 
the 'SOU  til  ward  of  Mono,  and  on  the  east  and  south  of  Piedras,  where  ships  may 
Mk  defended  from  any  sea  coming  from  the  northward.  The  ground  is  sandy 
Wnd  clean,  with  from  5  to  6  fathoms,  and  vessels  here  may  at  all  times  get  under 
sail.  To  take  the  anchorage,  so  soon  as  you  discover  the  keys,  stand  for  the 
middle  of  either  passage,  and  let  go  the  ancnor  at  pleasure.  It  is  only  necessary 
that  in  approaching  from  the  N.  E.  you  must  take  care  to  avoid  the  reef  above 
mentioned,  lying  to  the  north-eastward  of  Mono. 

MATANZAS.— From  Point  Ycacos  the  coast  ten  is  to  the  iS.W.  and  W.S.  W. 
*  fourteen  miles,  to  the  Point  of  Maya,  which  is  the  eastern  point  of  the  gpreat 
Bay  of  Matnnzas.    You  may  rui  along  this  coast  at  the  distance  of  a  league. 
*,The  Pan  of  Matanzas,  which  distinguishes  the  bay,  appears  from  this  direction 
like  an  inHuIated  mountain,   having  a  round  surface,  and  without  pea^^s,  water- 
courses, precipices,  or  other  inequalities,  excepting  a  small  fissure  near  the  S.  E. 
part  of  the  summit,  which  can  hardly  be  noticed  at  a  distance,  being  of  so  little 
•  ^        depth.    When  bearing  from  S.  S.  W.  to  south,  It  appear.s  like  one  round  hill; 
but  00  any  otlier  bearing,  another  appears  on  each  side  of  it,  adjoiding,  and  not 

Ik- 


* 


I 


St 


• 


^ 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


216 


ilf.    Two 

[IccUraceSt 
esaary  to 
ition  of  a 

S>  S«  E. 

the  best 
oderately 

of  these 
itain)  are 
B  west  of 
ivhich  the 
I.  Theae 
id  S. true 
of  Cadiz 

first  is  of 
of  it  are 
y  W.  true 
west  lies 
tid  some- 
there  are 
le  middle 
tz  delPa- 
vhich  are 
:h  arc  to 
,  are  little 
t  are  seen 
I. 

1  the  edge 
e  Grniuid 
and  Afo- 
re shelter 

the  di^- 
cailed  !>y 

todpisela 

nm  Point 

istance  is 

mile  and 

ind,  is  to 
hips  may 
is  sandy 
et  under 
d  for  the 
lecessary 
!ef  above 

w.s.w. 

he  great 
league, 
direction 
8,  water- 
he  S.  E. 
so  little 
ind  hii!; 
and  not 


€, 


# 


m 


so  high.  The  land  to  the  eastward  is  even,  though  not  very  low  ;  but  it^egjfVs 
to  rise  ar  Matanzas  with  a  gradual  slope,  and  to  the  west  the  coast  may  be  seed 
at  the  distance  of  eight  leagues,  hut  it  is  alike  even  or  level,  withoutJ^y  remark- 
able height,  other  than  the  Pan.  which  apuears  over  it.  •J^' 

The  Harbour  of  Matanzas,  which  is  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  is  wm  she'.iered 
from  the  norths ;  but  it  has  scleral  reefs.  The  Dtrrottrn  says  it  is  difficult  to  get 
oui  of  this  place  ;  for,  as  there  is  not  room  to  beat  out,  it  is  necessary  to  get  clear 
of  it  with  the  lai^  breeze,  which,  during  the  season  of  the  norths,  occur  but  sel^ 
dom.  The  harbour  is  of  easy  entrance  ;  but  it  is  necessary  to  avoid  some  shoals 
which  lie  almost  in  the  very  anchorage ;  to  accon)piish  this,  it  is  advis.ible  to 
keep  along  the  leeward  coast,  at  the  distance  of  two  or  three  cables'  length; 
passing  Point  Maya  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  and  a  half,  while  it  bears  to  iie 
southward.  With  the  vessel's  head  neafly  south,  you  pass  the  western  shore  at 
the  distance  above  mentioned ;  and  so  soon  as  you  see  the  Citstk  of  St.  Severino, 
bearing  W.  i  S.  steer  in  that  direction,  until  the  houses,  which  will  be  seen  in 
the  S.  W.  eorner  of  the  bay,  bear  S.  35°  W.^rhen  you  ;"iist  sleer  towards  them, 
and  anchor  so  soon  as  the  Castle  of  St.  Severino  bo:ir&  between  N.  W.  ^  W.  and 
N.  W.  4  N.  where  you  will  have  5  or  6  fathons  of  ualer,  on  loose  clay  or  ooze. 

To  get  out  of  this  harbour  it  is  best  to  clear  yoursell"  by  towinj;,  or  by  the  aid  of 
the  land  breefee,  if  you  have  iny,  at  a  time  when  you  cons-iiltr  the  weather  as 
settled,  and  there  is  no  appearance  of  norths  coming  on.  If  agreeable,  you  may 
cross  over,  and  come  to  an  anchor  on  the  bank  or  Shoal  Point  of  Maya,  which 
will  be  a  proper  si^ation  to  make  sail  from,  when  cMivcnient. 


Remarka  on  the  Harbour  of  Matanzas,  by  Captain  Livingston,  from  hii 

own  experience. 


• 


••  Vessels  drawing  not  more  than  12  or  13  feet,  may  keep  about  2^  cable's 
length  from  the  west  shore,  all  along,  until  past  the  Castle  of  St.  Severino,  which 
lies  on  the  starboard  hand,  about,  or  rather  more  then  a  mile  from  the  town ;  by 
this  they  will  pass  between  the  castle  and  the  Baxo  Nuevo  or  New  Shoal,  and 
will  soon  have  from  3i  to  21  fathoms,  when  rounding-to  :  with  the  vessel's  head 
to  the  eastward,  they  mayjau'ihor  in  3  or  3}  fathoms,  on  fine  sand,  inside  of  the 
shoals,  and  in  the  best  place  for  getting  loaded.  AH  vessels  are  loaded  by 
laur^^es;  cargoes  ar6  also  landed  by  means  of  them.  The  tide  rises  about  two 
feettmir  inches— at  least  it  did  so  in  1818,  but  I  have  been  told  that  prior  to  1817, 
it  dii  not  rise  more  than  from  nine  inches  to  one  foot.  I  cannot  vouch  for  the 
accuracy  of  this  information.  Vessels  may  obtain  very  good  water  in  Matanzas 
River,  but  boats  can  get  out  with  it  only  at  high  water;  and,  to  obtain  it  good, 
it  is  necessary  to  ascend  tho  river  5  or  6  miles,  or  even  up  to  the  falls,  which  are 
caused  by  walls  built  across  to  r|jee  the  wate^V  suHiciently  high  to  supply  some 
mills.  If  any  personi  agrees  with  a  Spaniard  to  water  his  vessel,  he  should  sehd^ 
someone  in  tiu;  Spanish  launch  to  see  it  taken  in,  otherwise  they  will  not  be  afl|k 
the  trouble  of  ascending  the  river  far  enough  to  get  good  water.  ^r 

From  *he  harbour  of  Matanzas  io  the  N.  VV.  the  coast  rounds  to  Point  Guanos^ 
whi<;h  is  about  four  miles  distant  from  the  i;nouth  of  the  bay  or  harbour.  From 
Point  Guanos,  the  coast  tends  nearly  true  West  to  the  Moro  of  Havana,  as  al- 
ready noticed.  The  coast  is  mostly  clean  and  bold-to ;  but  a  little  to  the  west  of 
Arco  de  Cana^i,  a  kiitd  of  reef  lies  out,  about  one  cable'°  length,  and,  at  a  mile 
N.  N^.  E.  from  the  Moro  Castle,  is  the  shoal  on  which  the  Mariner  grounded,  in 
1815.  A  vessel  may,  however,  run  along  at  the  distance  of  a  league,  or  less,  if 
required.  There  is  a  rocky  shoal,  with  little  water  on  it-  which  extends  from  the 
coast  between  the  Rincon,  or  Corner,  and  the  Point  of  Tdraru  or  Cobre ;  but  it 
will  be  avoided  by  sailing  as  above.  On  this  part  of  tlie  coast  are  various  small 
harbours  to  which  droggors  resort,  such  as  Puerto  Escondido,  Arco  de  Canatif  and 
SoiUa  Cruz,  but  they  are  not  fit  for  vessels  drawing  above  6  feet  of  wi^r.  All 
along  th§  coast  are  soundings  on  sand,  which  extend  more  or  less  from  shore; 


jf- 


216 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


'•V*. 


but  the  edge  is'so'stcep,  as  immediately  to  pass  from  100  fathoms  to  10  ;  but, 

witli  the  U'jui  going,  tluiie  is  no  danger  in  running  along,  because  the  soundings 
will  warn  any  one  of  the  limits  they  may  stand  into  without  danger;  and,  in 
pood  weafher,  you  may  even  pass  tiie  night,  letting  go  a  kt'dg«?  upon  the  sound- 
ings, a  mnnoBiivTe  which  m:iy  somelimeH  be  very  convenient,  either  to  avoid 
{lassing  your  port,  if  the  breeze  blows  fresh  at  nigV,  or  nrttto  lose  ground  if  the 
and-breeze  is  lijiht,  or  it  is  calm.  The  hills  or  mountains  of  Jarucn,  which  rise 
nearly  in  the  middle  of  this  coast,  serve  to  recognize  it  by,  and  determine  your 
situation. 

HAVANA. — This,  as  noticed,  is  in  point  of  importance,  the  principal  harbour 
of  Cuba,  and  has  been  described  as  one  of  the  best  in  the  world,  being  deep 
enough  for  vessels  of  the  largest  class,  sutficlently  capacious  to  receive  a  thousand 
ships  of  war;  and  so  safe  that  vessels  ride  securely  without  cable  or  anchor. 
The  cntrance'is  by  a  chinnel  half  a  mile  long,  so  narrow  that  only  a  single  ves- 
sel can  enter  at  once,  and  fortified  through  the  whole  distance  with  platforms, 
works  and  artillery.  The  mouth  of  this  channel  is  secured  by  two  strong  cas- 
tles, as  exhibited  in  the  figure  beneath.  That  on  the  eastern  side  called  Morro 
Castle,  h  built  in  the  form  of  a  triangle,  fortified  with  bastions,  and  mounted  with 
forty  pieces  of  cannon,  almost  level  with  the  water.  On  the  opposite  side  of  the 
channel  is  another  strong  fort,  called  the  Punta  Castle,  connected  with  the  Cr'-stle 
town,  on  the  north.  The  city  is  situated  on  the  western  sids'of  the  harbour, 
and  is  surrounded  by  ramp^ts.bastions,  and  ditches.  ^ 


The  Morro  Castle,  Light-house,  and  Entrance  of  Havanna. 

You  enter  under  the  Monro  Castle,  situated  on  a  high  rock,  on  the  south  end 
of  whieh  is  a  light-house,  containing  reflecting  lamps,  which  make  a  brilliant  ap- 
pearance, showing  a  revolving  light,  whi^h  may  be  seen  twenty-five  miles,  past 
which  the  channel  is  so  narrow  that  you  may  nearly  touch  the  side  with  a  boat- 
hook  :  the  top  of  the  fo/t  overtops  the  masts  of  the  stoutest  ship.  After  enter- 
ing through  this  pass,  you  arrive  at  a  second,  only  one  hundred  yards  wide,  on  one 
side  of  which  is!  the  Punta  Fort,  (before  mentl'ioed)  and  on  the  other  Castle 
^Blanca,  a  prodigious  strong  fort,  directly  oppos'te  the  city ;  having  passed  these 
jPworks,  you  enter  a  harbour  almost  unrivalled. 

Ill  passing  the  first  castle,  (Morro)  you  must  not  come  to  anchor,  as  a  reef  lies 
off  the  starboard  hand  as  you  ester,  which  is  dangerous. 

It  is  stated  that  the  entrance  to  tha  harbour  of  Havanna  is  rapidly  filling  up. 
The  channel  by  which  three-deckers  formerly  entered,  will  now  barely  permit 
fourty-four  gun  ships  to  pass. 

The  harbour  of  Havanna  may  be  distinguished,  at  a  distance,  by  the  paps  of 
Managua,  which,  as  already  stated,  lie  on  the  meridian  of  the  entrance ;  while 
the  land,  both  to  the  eastward  and  westward,  is  low  and  equal,  with  the  excep- 
tion only  of  the  Morro,  or  little  hill,  surmounted  by  the  fortificatipns  and  light- 
house. At  six  leagues  to  the  eastward,  the  Hills  of  Jaruco  or  Iroo  Hills,  may 
be  seen.  These  are  of  moderate  height,  and  detached.  The  tables  of  Mariel 
are  about  six  leagues  to  the  westward ;  and,  in  advancing,  not  only  these,  but 
the  Hill  of  Cavanas  may,  at  times,  be  seen.  The  form  of  the  harbour  can  be 
best  understood  by  rcfereoce  to  the  parUcuiar  plan  of  it,  from  the  survey  of  Don 


'W 


t 


Tm' 


or,  as  a  reef  lies 


wjiit's 


AMElj^K^AN 


COAST   PH-^T.  ^ 


f>? 


/  cad  iiil  Into -"^-^^^  *^ 
,  breeze  m  froi 
ifibettiMre 


by  whom  the  position'of  tho  Murro  Castle  his  beeg' determioi^ 

'  on  a  «h«;rt^|wblMhe<l^by  K.  &i,  Q.  W.  BLUNTfliPe  entrance  hi 

and  I|mi%n)l  itM^h»reibre/iJ|»F  difficult  t(Anter  when  the 

ii6rthw«krd  {MflbJ^-  ^  The  We«ze  toters  at  about  lOh.  A. 

;  and,  t^fflTore,  fti^Iy  between  these  hours  that  you 

BTV  difficult,  if  not  impoesitM,  to  sail  in  when  th 

•j^'wbich  ii,0lt$tfiB  V^^^  ftiny  season,  kvA  sol 

'  "~}Aer  w«li  circlhnflfmi^'the  only  resource  is 

^^•JK^#nterin^y  tuw^ig  or  warping,  w' 

,  h  at  i^ht. «  A!^n<entering,  ^^ 


becdbse 
'tvtion 
miArda' 
tiarltt 


you 


the  bill 

aurpi 
r chapneL 


n^,1t  iibestftto  enlbr  aboui 
uld  the  ^nd'be  scant  for  <get- 


fl»e        ,      . 
posed  to  danger.  ^^^hei^Uifbtt 
0  out  «(^  the^WBkOf  ^^^  ^^ 

bUi  to  anchlir  6ii|||peuro  Mmto,  an<MI|^  or  ftrarp  in  at  night.* 

"ncihnTMtogtfjionfl|i[j;h  ii\''tHiuinie  of  the  ertUnary 

muc^^kpPMjtH^l^  slMori  €t,  the  north8v<and  in 

iherliODre,  ^^MmhWw  tbichor  do  as  to  have jjthe 

»nd Jcyhaii^pxtremel j^'^'tyli^*'  '*^^|  y^  shoula^be 


If  inlb- 


rBour: 


F»f«H%Wa|.; 


the  4mir 


linger  tfaia|l  iQb  shall 
sid%   That  on  th^  Morrok  iHde  does  not  e 
^    shtlL    To  avdid  tbe|be   ord  gl|wK  it  i^equtiii 
W«toasteTfi,  "  ,    '  '        ^     .'      "    „ 
tj|&  caU^  Imst^  froiilthti^aat  on 
"^IhreMiafteMof  a^ti|lby 
i|   Ba)^^  on th0NJB.Jwhidi 
^   aide  oC  tiieifllM 

tjie  city,  alf^r^VUnn 
^     ^^wh  to  Uy  Tfmik  on 
}       At  a  ^ort  distance  ^yitl 
c  ^ahoaL^witllillRthoms 
*     swelron ;  at  ot^ —  ^'~' 
^       'Sven  when  th» 
igthprc 
MS3  ya, 
"which  w 
iroii  will  be 
}§|ctabl» 

I  ^o  soonlisvoa  i 

/aaa  ■h?'!id  jmh^ 

foAorklii  vM,  and  ve^r  cHl 
bow  Wntii  ^ery  good  for 


/4» 


moor  beid  and  stfrii.' 
hies*  lengthy*  wUh^^  UH 


Ca^Mbore 
Mb(|^o(^r«  wbft 

.  t  the  <C|Mbm  fai , 
leiil|b'from&e  lkbt4ioMML 


^ay  sinRce;  for  jifthe 
ich  Mret^  put  from  each  « 
hird^f  a  cable  frotfk  the 
t  to  go  far(!|ier  from  the 
il  so  as  to  run  along  ofH 
id-channel  beipg  at  about 
ti  ctf  <t^  middle  9f  CAltI«  -  ] 

itfltt^he;  eesternifMrrbilP 
may ''approach'  near 

iS^  ^Mp  iitaall''. 
pismuchr^ 
out  *  fouellinjb- 
of  it,  9S^  half}  r 
Finally^  if  you 

IfontikCai 
oi 


^'^ 


'» 


V 


iCat  tlfe  ehti 
in  the 


'^TJi 


itWCaj*t»h'    7f 
>ii^o!^,^J 

ayanMii  lias  said, 
tojke  Morro  JM 
ivWand  varta^ 
ould  bc'taken    >> 
le  of  the-hai^ 
of  the  lagi^li^^ 
flIaMtitb  ca-* 
Iqt  JjAieys,  with 


theii^ 

R  gi^neirally  waroj^p  the^^arboup, 

M  V  .  '  .1    >    I  iiiiV  4  III*' 

the%jla8t\fard,  cah^ 


and 


av^  a/ihoal 
,,  and  on  which -^'^diB^Wj^P;*  ofvorfGlas- 
lit  17  feeler  ^pg^pfllQpib  the  shoal,  the^ 

"df  ^4|ip.  Ane,  of'(^wgow,«Bin  company  with  th» 

rCbout 


r 


sHfilf  within  the  Morro,  aflbout  a  eaUa's 
ia^Kher,i%'0n  the  same  sidS,  ii  ihoFum^^  ^ 


■^■,- 


218 


■.»'« 


«    ^LV^T^fi   AMERICVV^ COAST    PILOT. 

*    anchor  o(r'tB|ft|^ers  or  arsenal,,  where  there  is,iuAcIent  room  for  a  Armt  num- 

l>er  of  ships  WPhor,  in  from JN^o  5  fatliojbllli       <•     >  •  .^^A  0 

From  the  Mbrro,  or  Ca^liof  I}avanrTnt,CiD  Piitnn <Avycocoi».(iVTacoi^  t|i'e 

distance  is  twenty  leagues,  anct  t^  i||urse  ij^rly  R.  ^  N.    From  this  ppii)l  mny 

be  seen  the  Loaf  or  ^an  of  Mntt^nsaft.to  thf^.  dTvV.    This  hill,  whimi  is  the  < 

^northernmost  that  you.will  descryjto  the  ea^fward^of  UiJItlayanniif  Ucb  overthe 

Jlkiy  of'Matanzes,  §nd  cop^jtuteiH  lh)|j;rand  poipt^tftaepartu^  foe  ships  bound 

^^nce  to  the  nort>wurd,  thl|bgli  the  STtriit  of  l^ldnda.       -  -1|      "l      *i  * 


it 


We  now  cormncncp  wit] 
in^  Regularly  vvestwrfrd  to^ 
.Gape  Antonio  we  ccrotin 
Haj/jyina.  •  • 

The  greater  portidi^oi 
clear  are  tlie  8outhen][i'cc  _ 
from  Cape  Maize  to  Punta 


jlStAND.OF  CUB:| 


9outh  e 


i  of  Cuhn^mm  C<Mte  MaizeJ"  proceed- 
Antonio,  iilcluding  the  Isle  ofPiiateSt^c.  From 
scribe  the  coast  aastwacd  aJong  thte  north  side  to 

tijasts  of  C^  are  extrerrtely  foi#.    Those  most 
Maize  to' CapeLOruz,  t||e  N.  ^  coast 

m  the 

s,  keys,  and 

they  form 


:,f||sliCape 
[Plat]  Slaterp; 


fVizttto'0|ipet,OTuz,  tjie  N.  ^ 
%\Oj^M^  "the  N.  W.  cOas^,  fWi 


;  The  land  to  ^e  s40(^H|iE^^''d  of  C4||e  Mfgze,j^  about  HaTf  a  mile  from  i^ 
,*begh)s|p^e  hi^jfiid^lairnid  it  tendsln)Out  S.  W-  i  W.  64  miles,  forming  a 
-  emi^ll  bay,  Arty^|Ju\dy^ach,  ntfhaed  Cci^fh^  Ovaitaio.    From  this  olKa  or  pove, 
th^hore  tend?ab(|(p  S.  S.  W.4  miip<  tO'J^MHta  Jfi^gr^^ 

It  winds  more  to  the  W.  ^Wi^about-4  mifpRnore,  to  P^jgKrCaltta ;  S8  riiijes 
W.  J  S  from  whHSh  lielftpipt  Sdnarutda-.l 


firofti  thp4ktter,  is  t|i^i«||(>r(|Hl£at'ft'9i^ 
.<-The  'I^7To<«^»^a3^tha|p*F|rdj|pCtt 


the 


not 'to  be  aif^ro4^^dtiiearer'thai^ttt:o  I 

approach  It,  surely  <fi^^iid>uld'lDe  fo 

l^etely  opeii  to  thtjfb'reefl^  and  4 

n  (lear,  and^aura  u||8een  dan^cii^i^  !^ 

risk  in  runniMMKng  {ihD^!^:  at  the 
j^o  leeward  ofrni  vaii|(U8^olhtrtihr^ 
vBlfbich  suits  you,  f|om  SS^to  7  rati 

wherfe  y»u  ViUJie  It  a  goj^'distl^te  off  sh^ri^ 

charge.'froin  ijwlncl^yoji  my,  prOvMfe  youns4||f  Y 

of  firewood  may  be  procured-"       >  !a*^ 

The  Cap^Bueno.  or  Ocoa  !^.oint  of  the  EnriuJl 

the  Punta  deja  Salela  of  the  Spaniih:  kndirlKs 


Maize  to  Fpiot  l|e|||^ht^  sho^RlKt 

es Wfor,  a^jHiere ui»iio  indueemiyit to 

nfllllF\]pon  a  a>i^t  wH||hj^s  com- 

there  i^^po  ftttihoracer  aWtou^h  it 

oint  Negra  to  Baitiqueri  tl^ptje'ii  no 

^  a  mik^  ahd  along  thjli  part,  and 

;f ou jBtij  afbhor  |n  the  de|l)i  of  water 

f6 -ntd 


>est  bottpm  is  in 


itiioms, 


i#Dlac^  several  rivers  dis- 
oleat  w«terr  and  ;plenty 


exc< 


tof, ."  Within  this  ti\\ 
miak&  f(M-  ancltdrini 
and  a  half,  Avheij 
tsiMp  point.    You  may  1^1 
•  j>ut  16  and  18  are 


s  bci 


j|^lu|Bay  of  Ocoa,  inj?i?hich 
^)^e  e!}sternmo|t      '  "'" 


■1 


I^nd  of  S% 
>r  Id  ahy  wateji  i!hw!%()|Rs  being 
best;  and  plllhuibf  fish  b^  ""* 


line.'    Two^llpesh-water rivulets runintotli^s lyy^  the 


WwMw  Atve^  lyin^  2  rfr  3  miles 
which  lies  nearer,  is  to  tl)c  ^l^jf^i 
but  is  generally  dry,  from  ||yFurifi 


w 


stwaiSj  qT 
ttl«>5 


the?%astward'of 

aUpe  tnffl[the 
35  ^  7  fathdoify. 
c^ght  witlpiook  iid 
"^^taQ^Rkkdo  Met,  or 
ani^ora^  >  the  other, 
~  c  easteraiftost  ^l}y, 


■*. 


•*  ♦ 


The  If « 

OMtrowe 

BainSjyffie, 


BLUNT^g  AMERICAN  COABT*Pir.OT. 


of  Baitiqueri,  already  mentioned,  ia  VKry  amhU,  am 
HImb  on)wroin  l ^tn  W  f«ut  of  watir,  and  .l#|#> 
:  fflf  veir  shf^ltei^d  fron»  aft  Vipds,  and  tneTivi 


|19 


"has  a  VBl^ 
)re  iii  At  (o0 
ulet,  of  the 


'.! 


runs^rtto  the  !n|crior  (^the  harnutir,  nSbrds  an  opportunity 
rfna.    There  ifi/iitluM^itiort^aii  a  ckfaft'S  len^tli  hetwct^n  thr  two  outer 
'  |)ointa*of  the  entriitice  flbut  a  rocky'Wifeel,  with  trom  10  to  ^t  feut  on  the  edge  of 
It,  i^ns  out  from  tHl^wincHrara^c^nt ;  and  ^<|rc  is,  a)so,  a  reef  running  out  abo  ^ 
^    '  -   •  jjj^    Bctwien  thesi  two  rwefs  li«B  tL, 

widc,  ana  continijiefl  thuH  narrow  foi 


rATO^cnnt ;  and  ^<|rc  is,  a|so,  a  reel  running  out  anovML 
a  quartMof  ^ca||Q,'from  tll^t^ard  point.    Bctwien  thes($  two  niefs  li«B  tfaiSr 
c^j|Mi|knneC^tch  is  only  tiO  yt^dj^^idc,  ana  continiiefl  thuH  narrow  for 
acaN4|Si1erigal,.aftor\vhich  itailvidlemi  as  yen  approach^the  two  interior 


■g^m 


Baiti 
tla,^r 
(les.'is  Poini 
dida  (Hidden 
clean,  an 

of  it  are 


tVor  ^yaterfi(i4(n)iBlkf  approacliing  the  shore. 
^   '  oast  teildaabout W>  S;'^.  tnie for  5  mj^evlo Point 'tkc- 
'  follows  tI^  tree's  miles,  t^he  river  Yamtis;  S.  \v.  4 
_      ;  and  at  aRfcndsSrest  .(from  the  la^r  lies  Puerto  JBwon- 
)    AH  the  coasrb^twi^br PaitiquM  aniLPort  Eacondido  is' 
n^||b|X^  J!tfely  salled'flong  at  tMmktance  of  a min. 
flImMVo  focms  an  artchtofage  sh#tered^from  all'jvinds :  in  the  interior 
BTari(nff)tj 


row,  for 
of  thetn 
thil'cliiinnelh 
whole  length  o 
you  must  steerj^/ 
breeze  is  .-ifNAE. 


but  iifUfintrance  is  very  nar- 
e  cable'9  iM\ath  ;  «nc(^  as  each 
olrJ^Kes  out  a  tliird  of  a  cable, 
j^ide:  i^hflWevcr,  luc1{i1^,iM»no  windings,  and  {he  * 
it  flfhot  morV^Hki  a  cable  lum 'aikalf ;  .and  as  to  enter  it 
W.  it  may  alwajjl  be  donA'^Aha  (Vee  wind,  even  if  the 
Aj^i.    ijbemost  prudent  mode  of  enter^  thit  harbour,  is  to  orofet 
a  b(4i  to  he  placed  on  the  outer  point  of  the  windwurd  reef,  whichis  nearly  jff 
mid-length  of  t||e  channel,  and  which  wJU  servQ<JmH||arlc^to  sail  in  b^.     You 
^ave  inen  only  to  briffg  nie  vessel^  he^  intOj^l'qBecdon  iibove  given,  and 
run  onUn  that'^lirectiorf,  pai||l|UC  closeJ>  ^heMati^lfntiryou  have  passed  the 
inner  point  to  |eewar(),  where  yq|i  lAfhrSnchar  in4iior  6^  fallj|m|.^clav  groutid^il 
As  there  is  fttfe-iJHtb.'on  this  barbo^v  nnr  ^ny^pVoper  leadin|fmai|'kfe  for  runnk^PP 
in,  it  is  propli!]^mn||p  thai  vessel  sufficient  rbtfm^oaltiirjier  course  from  wind- 
ward to  N.  43*5  WT^e  course  fpr  «ntSHng  |he  haAi|||M||^e^tli^^  re- 
commend, although  t}^  windward  colllt  of  the  en«MSM^OTy%e«a8Sc4^Mlf  a^. 
cable's  lena^h  that  it  should  not  be  n|kiltied  at  leas  than  ft>pr  4"^  J«||gg.iftiu8,  al- 
though icrfiifli^  ^g,  thl  vesiaellimt^Qrass  ^l^e  denoUrcation  gten  (!RI||90^W.)'yet     • 

Etlf^  thI#,;flpMuSng  to  n^indward  berore  you  are  b^ween^ 
t^e  pTttD^pAarijig,  v^hicl^  b  i|yibl6t(iiy^  necessary ,^s  the'  ■*" 

;e  be  (MfLd  1il^o|)t  <l^<^Eif|M^AiM^''*^i  ^^'^^^IVE  ^  ^"V 
ar,  instiBad  of  bringing-ta  in''tIp^ancDailgMvhicJ||hvc  have    * 

i-i'lfVbbure  •■   -.wT;*     .^ 

is  sekl<tm^lilf  «|t  v^|iel  is  bound 
is  obligelcl(^^t4^el|||^aiwora       we 


y  ^o  by  tke 

coilblta)fl|l< 
Ijhaviog  no  cotti 


ito1 


le  in*ord4rt0!i 


next  harbour 


tl^re  will 
thfejjMinjSt  so  as 
oraBBphnot  o 

menUODe(},  ma 

"  this  Ifc  iajnecessar 

Pua^^pnabdiddiiuivmg 
intajtj  Vnd  iffin  aiiy  motih  or  hurrl 
wou^^^^hfr  advise  •f ery.  asertion 
to  the  wi^s^jaamed'  Guanthm^J  bi 
dido'i^lfPw^eatber,  it  mu^t^iiucn  more  SQbnrstoj&js 
and  it  will  be  by%io,  meaaa  str^fiuHf,  wit^iOutApilp£Jp^  eve 
might  J)e  drivgn  ononc  ofthi|iHil^Qjr  the  enttancea"w?ithateft 
get  on  the  roiHcs^t  some  ]^tMMt  tH^  qoemt,  Awbich  Uolghtlle  mis|uilcSa|f«!r  tha  en- 

*  trapeaoftibiilforbour.     yL  1^.      "  .       .   *  ^ 

GtJANtANAMSfc^?«miiR^  e^Ci^sive  and 

,  extflU^t||||ttl>uvJ^Mn^  than 24  leaguesA  the Y(eat»gtliL6( C%(e  MauK,  aAd 
'^klkll*^^^''liP^'^^^4?#  The  coast,  in  th«^|ft^cH$an^l^raM  eiiiie 
v^PHplU  sandy'c^Si'lind  itJ^agaMm;*  TH^ent^tpa^ljtf  Jjtijfflitaolta  be- 
twe^  the^two  o4||lP'-|)oints,^^|p(nOPnL  a  milff'bi^l^  ^^Sf^errQffiTo  says, 
"VJjeteastii^nt  maaipe  jnp^aelfrea^i^ovt  fear,  ailher^HiJB^.^gc^  hut  what. 


ie»*?#^iffiS»jJ|^o  eriWrp*rt  Escon-^ 
uch  m1>re  sokir  stbfl^s^4  obscure  i^^athqjMp 


ifv^  VlBe^a  t^iel 
vh  Ipyv^irsill  might 


.*tinho  £econdido  01 
aUl#  dCtha  sfttrance  of  itj^ 


l1'   ■^■jLliii 


.» •' »! 


t<<] 


have  been 


:l. 


witht  less  than  t  ^ 


3MS-i.: 


J'sti 


S 


Bi- 


220 


BLUNtI   AMERICAN   coast  PILOT. 


#       9 


*  M  visible.    The  coa^t  tends  iiearjy  ^orth,  about  a  mile  ai^  a  quarter,  Whence  it 
Changes  to  t%)%  E.  to  fornj  &e  harbour.    Oi>;#B  wiolprtirUde  pf  the,ei|*^ 
trance,  and  at  about  three  querfiM's  of  a  mile  >rttJjkiD  uie  cnfSi  poiOT,  a  rdckjiihGU 
stretches  from  shore,  upon  the  edlge  tff  wiiicl^  are  ft^om^  to  5  fil£ho^)S  tff  wa^,; 
this  shoal  is  ruther  more  than  a  <^l^s  lengdi  brcwB,  anctmay  be  eabMy  im^ided  ,^ 
by  attending  to  the  subseq^rft^  direittions.  Oti  t|^  weaKrn  JMd« 

'  jMleef  of  rocks  ;  hut  it  is  navrot^  i3l(A^  that  on  th 

tK  neiessary  only  to 
ianc^  of  one  or  two 
course  you  rrtust^  continue 
Augusta  River,   bears  West 

unHil  you  have  tlie  interior  npint  of  the  ^indwaijd  sliofe 
^  will  be  c'ear  of  the  reef,  ivlich  stretch/es  ft^oiBa  it.    Yov^Mf^h^  hauljby 
;virind,  and  anchor  wl^erc  it  ma/suit  you  biist }  or,  if  pKJpHjsbi^  run  into  t'c.< 
Interior  of  the  harbour,  antf'the  breblfe  wUI  !*Bt  allow  you  to  lay  through,  you  may 
beat,  in  with  thr  assnjtance  of  the  Ifad'bmy.  »^  -"^ 

^       The  following  reniarfts  on  the  Hai^bour  of  Chiantanamb  werttjQnm^  ^a  offi- 
cer on  the  Jamaic  station,  in  iteo  :  A  ,  . 

"  Theappei^rnice  of  a re^iarkable  spot  6f  land,  on  the,sid^ci|,«  h9H,'at  a  dis- 
tance in-shore,  determines  ike  situation  of  Curabertafid  itarbottt,  WhkJh,  if  you 

*  fall  in  to  the  wo  ;\vard,^actly  resembles  a  kite,  ao^  to  t<StalH|r  ojic^  y;hen  it  blurs 
N.  E.  k  E.  but,  if-  }'9u  areiar  to  the  sfutHward,  it  will  «i|Mt'%  partly  or  en- 
tii;ely  hid,  unless  you  are  hu-  enough  to  t&o<<ire6twar4  to  bnng|lt|»irer  the  hills  on 


^de  tjiiere  is  alio  a 

drejj^ter  this  harboor  it 
ji^ce  y«!ur  visssel  so  as  to  pa^ffff  windwil^  pokit  fl  the  dis 
cable's  length,  and  ttffence  juff up  to  JJ*  W.  bylPpfen  W  '  ' 
lOntinue  until  the  Nort^  point  of  the  K^^jr  Ou|Htaiuana 
you  may^then  change  yotff  ujiJIt '-lb"  -W  .tty 


that  side  of  it.' 
*  The  following  direcfio 
from  observations  made 
*'  On  coming  in,  you  # 


foKtailing  in,  hate  been  git«tt  by  Mr.  J.  Town, 
in  1817:     ^.        r  1  ^ 

9  Ma  tire  middle  of  (he%ay,  a  remarkaUe  light 


ellow"  (or  brown  and  ivhrfo)  ciPT:  %HI|||>^  this  cttfT  te  bear  about  N.  by  W  or  N. 

?ink 


mm  W^  {  W.  andjjin  in  with^at  bearing  until  you  open,  ojt.ibe  eaitern  side,  a 

^Kuill  sandy  poinf|'with  two  huts  on  Mt    This  point,  call^^shiV  nan's  Point, 

cannot  be  mistaken,  as  ther^  M  no  other  sandy  point  mi  ^  East  side  of  the 

*  harbour.    Aftek  y(|ttftui^||opened  Fifihermaii's  Point,  vrith  tlie  bearing  abov% 

^  *deseribe4f  yo"  •niJjrlller  SK-W.  E. ;  and^Wheh  Fisherman's  Point  bears  E.  by 

S.  haul  up""  —         -       ■ 

'♦^Th^  best 

Westvhead  of  the  Tl^^-^l^ 
*  jfathortis.  .•."'■  -If -4  '<»,.^JtM 

**  On.  (^ming  in  fir0i^th«^eAstward^  you  may  Iri^p  in  a»  nlMji  to  th«>'<BlM|pid 
of  Ihe'en^ancQ^  as  1t()iv])leat(<e,  there  beiqg  10  fatllbmsclos^  |y||:  itfter  (P^lig, 
run  to  the  westward,  and  bring  the  afore-liineiitioned  h|||'ing8  yiTwhii^  wW  clear 

to  rile  mf'IV.  o^isheWna 


the  reef  that  lies  c^^T  the  point  a  little 
marks  for  the  sok^i'  end  of  this  reef. 


ian 


o^cSppf 


The 

he  sokttii'  end  of  this  reef,  %hii93^ha8  ht;retofi|||l^heen  dl^aciAMl 
single  rocfc,'are,tKe  t>v<i  huts  on  Fiiho^din's  Point  ori  wUi  each  othe^bearing 
N.  E.  by  E.  ana^ie  point  within  tl»lS  J|^  Head  S>  ^y  E. ;  West  jleaJl  S.  W. 

c  manka  for  the  oo?fti  %d  o?  the  reetare,  tj^J^*  E'  hut  crboutits  Wfeallth  open 

4)y».  i  %;»t«t  point  within 


as  a  f 


*AitPan|Mo£ Augusta  Kl^r,  W.  J  S. ;  ^e  yellow  cliff„Jf.  W.  by  N. 


*wrhc  mai 

totht!  Bta-thward  of  tlie  S.  W;  hji»tjil>eari|jg  I^i  i 
th.^.  ^mt  HeaA  8.  i  E.-;  the  entra^lfee  of  A«|gui 
Hep  N.  by  W.  and.S.  bjr  E»^about'lj  cable'sHsn 
It  has  17  fee);  water  on  its  showiest  part,  9i  Ml 


w: 


to  the  outer^ejige,  whieh  ia  about  ^cable'snel 

••  On  coming  in  rf^tex  waetward,  )^  may  approach  tl 
as  iMs  steep-tOT  but,'  (top  the^appearapee  of  HJl^pointra 


''     would  suppose  there  wasSi  reet  cxtehd^  ftoH 
K  a  quarter  of  aisllfne,    After  you  are  w||Mn  iKis,'; 

as  there  is  a  flat  tUft  extends  from  the 

direction  for  the  yellow  cliff: 

tcross  the  harbour  towards  Tij&i 

it  are  very  regular. 
'  If  the  wind  is  off  t! 


4 


'.  ^Vv .    The  reef 

li<lbd  i20  fa^n.b  ip  breadth.^ 

s  within  \i,  and  5  fethbms  clpse*^ 

fi'oil  tliMBore.  ,^  ' 

%.j^niper 

it,  haul  mPe  to'tbhe  eastfrard, 
,sfl^  River,  |k  a  straiiht 
xtend9^arl;*|Qn«r«^ir^  <of  the  dUstance 
Point;  but 


at  lca«|,'wbcfn  yp'i»r#1 
iou|t,  haul  mire 
ratice  of^Ai 


C 


\m 


\  wundfl^s  to  and.  fldpng 
1iU|l«i4rark  tt/your  la«d  will  Se  the    '''* 


^• 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


m 


*  * 


Volt  pilot  wh«n  atanding  to  the  weytwarcl  |  but,  in  standing  to  the  eastward, 
dbecarefu^.i^ddyai|.qb[>FP9<]ib  the  land  hearer  than  three  caUfei^cngth,  as  tha 
^wf^lre«dy  l||cpFt|9|l,4s  vteep  „to.  ^  ^ 

■^Vln  running  1^,  with  |he  marks  described,  you  will  be  within -the  points  he- 
fore$DU  §et  aouodin^;  aftdlwhiqh  the  sdiindings  are  Very^regular,  from  |8  to 
6  l^tlioms^  ^   ^         * 

Augusta  tliver  ^  oarrow  rfr 
about  oj^e  qyfirtei|||^ra  mile^i^ . 

ird  ^Kdnron  tios^  or  go 'tnt 

Vh^  the.;  ehtjraqii^  of  the 

MQ;'4o  Ifiiei^stWard  of  tY 
lilba  will  be inCliQjti^  beari^g'-^ 

F^om  Guapten^nn^to  Point  Qprr^citf  the  co|ist  tends  nearly  true  West,  fA 
miles ;  it  is  generaQy  clean,  and  jj^tt  map  run  alOUg  it  at  ^  mile  fron|  shor^ 
Poj[|it  BrtapcgftmaY  be  known  by  a  mJlrrttt,of  lulli  which  vffbs  on  it.  Fropi  thi| 
pohit  tln^B^ij||bends  to  the  norUi-westw«^,  and  form^the  Bay  of  Gabo  Baxa 
(JCfOw  Ccp€,^miwnce  it  tends  we^t  to  the  Rfver  ^ragua.  The  space  between  Ca||fe 
Baxo  AtFi^urac^is  pamed  foa  Altara,  or  the  Altars,  because  the  coast  forms 
three  b^itt^y  if Ajs,  separated  froQi  lAch  other  b;^  high  searjped  mounts.  The 
ri?(^  luragua^io  miles  db^t  fioiu  Point  Berracos.  ^ 

From  the  rivtl'rfjuragusraie  coast  continues  nearly  Wi^l(f  12  miles,  to  the  m-  ^n 
trance  of  ths^^l^or  St.  Jago  de  Cuba':  it  is  all  cleaW,  and  may  be  run  along  at 
the  distance  of  a  mile;  the  rivers  De  Sardhero  and  tDe  Aquadores  disembogive 
upon  it ;  and  near  this  last  may  be  aee.i  somj^malMiousea  inhabited  by  water- 


e  entrance,  |nd'vhns  only  12  or  14  Teet  water  at 

You  may' go  up  the  river  by  keeping  the*  staiP^ 

ajarge  lagoon  on  the  i^mkourd  side. 

">our  b^ars  nearly  North.  5  ,or  ^  miles  distant^ 
arbour  and  the  Af  orro  Castle  of  St.  Jago  de 
i  Nf  and  tb'*-  outermost  land  to  the  eastward 


earners. 


^' 


The  HARBOUR  of  St.  JAOODElC^BysVf^gopd  ;  but  the  entrance, 

kef  c      '     " 


1*5^1 


Mono  Castk,  and  a  little  farther  in  JEstreUa  (^tg!r)  C!a«</e,'^which  is  seQ^rat^jk 
from  the  Mojito  mr^  bay,  atk^the  end  of  which  is  another  sm^ll  fort  or  battei||Pl 
A  rocky  shoal  Hlpt  OAt  n'Om  the  windward  coas^which  extends  about  Sj  cables** 


length  from  the  Morro  Point :  and,  on  the  leeward  ji%i^|||pth«ar  shoal  runs  out^* 
about  e  cable's  length  to  the  south  o^he  ptfint.  'iHe  craAn^ifls  betw^n  these*' 
two  shoals.^  /At  its  entrance  it  is  a  caflfe's  length  in  width,  AndWth!^  fti,  48  redu- 
ced •by  about «  third  of  a  cable  ;^  that,  when  abreast  otJhe  \fay,  iipMfth  is  be- 
tween the  Morro'aild  Estrella  CaM|eB,  which  is  the  ipdf^Wwt  part,  it1s  of^^two- . 
thlB^  e|^  cableJn  ifjjdth ;  andftroni  this  it  continues/with  t^e  smnewidpi,  (intil .' 
Copq^^»l(Af  when  thj^harteurbegifis  to  oj[|Mi.  «  *0'^ 

e^^iariHftyou  ought  to  sail  half  a  league  or  ywp  miles  o^-in^  «l|ii>Cje,  ^^ 

JntilTRe  BsirlnfpI^stli^earB  I^^.)  when,  placing  the  Vessel's  ^nmHlit  that 
IrecthHBt^jmd  steering  me  8ani|P«ourae,  you  will  enter  th».  chanrtel.formed  by 
<^#w  Im,  so  sott|  aftyou  are  abr^st  of  the  M<||p^o*P«|&(,  wilMn  a  quarter 
of  a«ffre's  length  5r*Whiclj  you  maV  jjiss,  you  may  begttfto  kcep'e^ay ;  so 
that;  WMen  4ip  with  rae  battery,  whicl^ts  #€he  bottom  of  th#^ay,  between  the  ^ 
Mom>«nd|:strella  Castles,  the  vessel's  head  QhaRbfJN.IJiy.  «i^li|:(>ur88  it  ii^ 
necessai-ylib  fujbw  tintil  you  are  past  Cl^e  S0itn«  wj^n^ou  may  antdlpr.   ..  ^  4f^ 

The  necefcttf-jbiu  ar%under^qt>m  the  6raoJRedji4^  of  the  entrance^  of4r«tep- 
ing  *way  four^HTts*  viz.  |^ai'!^.  E.  tb  NJ(ender»  It  almost  noeijEuLthM^a  large 
vessel  should  Wre  sufficif^  spae«<|o  uake^he  tuao  ilk :  t«^his  eim  |re  tadvise 


tlM^t,  so  6000  ?s  you, are  ahf^a^  o^lfte  Morro  Poip(f,'yow  ought  to  begin  to  keep 
away ;  for,  withc1t|^is,^o^nNiy  ilry  eaujV  g«t  ashore  at  the  Eiw^Ua  Gas^. 
Itij^st  h|l||ibe  rero|y(pr>  that  it  would  bfVmproper^to  ktfM^  tttfr^lgsel's'^prow 
awglj^  to  tmKorOt  ^Ipiioe,  thiMlli  it  mai^  sometimes^er^ dote|ikdtr  faroiiyable  ^ 
cifeitestences (  fot,  by'doiiig'^ipn  y0u  incur  1^  rlsk'^of  .Kettl«|^  liiore  dn«th«  ^ 
coriier  or  the  lee^rd  reef.  ,,  *'"     "  •*  §  '  .  .         ui*.  ^^ife'i*  ^ 

,|^edistince  betweet^e  Morl^PoiatTitnd  aMbastof  to^nii-^  bot- 

tom #r  the  bay,  onTth^  KitBt,  i>  .phlR  CRbtfji  Jemcth  1^  with  the  |;n(nH«dg^  of  tl|ia, 
the  PHot  Witt  «now  i(Ar«gu^ate  l^l^'^''*"'*^"^ '"-*^  "*^-     -* 
nec^riary.td  gain  hiam^rposfi^a^tf 
can  be  worju d.     .  fl^ 


J:< 


'^^^ 


dtrittt^e  sails,  Ibc.  «•  way  jbe 
'   lytf  with  wtitbhjhe  ypmei  ^ 


\r    ■« 


222 


BlUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


«^       • 


At  the  bottom  of  this  harbour,  on  the  N.  E.  is  the  City  of  St.  Jago,  or  of  Cuba,  '' 
which  is  the  ni.est  ancient  city  in  the  island.  ,  4    .-.    ,  t^ 

From  St.  Jngo  de  Cuba,  the  coast  continues  to  tfie  west,  (pirriiing  various  bays, 
with  anchorages  of  little  importance,  the  knowledge  of  which  is  alone  useful  to 
coasters.  Upon  this  coasj;  are<the  high  Copper  Mttuntains  (Sierras  del  (M>Tt,) 
wiiich  are  al^vti.  11  miles  ^stant  fronq^St.  Jago :  ^  cleavtweotlfeK,  these  moun- 
tains have  been  seen  33  |^  •'  •-  -" 
#  Forty  miles  W.  by  S. 
tain,  named  the  Pealrof 
is  the  last  place  on 
than  30  leagues  from 
coast  at  the  distance 


.  wbta  St.  tlTago  de  Cuba  rlve^  anotS^very^high  moun-   . 
Tarqu'mo,  which  is  an  excisllent  land-toark.*  Gapt  diniz^ 

fdiatpP 


to  m^ 


evan 

^iduce  one  to  appruximnte  it  sd'mjich,  4|B^ems  dftoVe  advisable  f<^  %ose  bound  t6  ^ 
'^  vtestward  to  run  along  at  2  or  3  leagifes  distance  from  Itap  shoce.  ^^r  ^ 

At  Cfupe  de  Cruz  commences  a  Wljiite  ^ank,  which  extenas  60  leagues  td  the 

ijiprth-^estward,  andterminates  ait  TVmtAuf.    Upon  this  baii'k  are'k^Ts  tund  reefe 

without  number,  which  form  channels  of  moi%  or  lesfVidth ;  of  u^  1(^1^  on  tlie 

ef ge  of  the  bank,  the  principal  are  those  ca|led  the  Ca^  de  laawSte  Leguaa^  or 

the  Twelve- League  Keys,  the  whole  rang^of  which  extend  ^t  less  man  20 

leagues  in  a  W.  N.  W.  directiop,         ^v     W       '       ■  /  4       i.     *  ^ 

^o  coast  along  the  Doce  Leguas  Keys,  and  being  3  miles  to  the  southyrara  6f 

#  Cape  de  Cruz,  steer  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  mtH  y^Jbioh  cour9(b  yoiji  will  run  along  the 

edge  of  the  bank ;  and,  having  run  12}  mileii  |h  this  direction,%\t|pr^our  course 

to  N,  W.  i  N.  with  which  you  v'ill>  enter  upon  the  bank  in  40  J^iOms,  on  sand 

and  rocks ;  keep  this  course  for  |i¥>pilej,  when,  with  the  edge  Ifmaht,  you  Will 

leave  it  in  naarlv  50  fathotntt'    Cfitinume  the  same  counte,  17  VffJ^  more,  you 

^will  again  Rivfl^O  fathoips,  dir  lesk,  adpMlon  afterwards  will  see  Levesa  Key  to 

the  N.  N.  E.  atida^ead  will  se  i|ij||.i  tne  Eastern  Head  of  th^Dbce  iieguas 


m'-' 


iHaving  recognized  these  two  points,  you  must  rut^along  on  the  tank,  6ut  with- 
out getting  into  less  than  4  fathom^  until  you  find  yourself  3  Ogtiles  to  the  3outi\ 
of  the  Eastern  HeadMMd  in  7  fathoins  water,  over  a  bottom  of  sand ;  you  must 
theh  ru#W;  1^^  Wrai  t1hiia»cours«  you  jrall  shortly  rdn  off  the  bank,  and  may 
coast  Motfl  the  DdceXeguas  Keys,  at  the  H^tance  of  a  league,  without  any  fear ; 
and  having  run<^l)  oJ^i  steer  W.  N.  W.  18i  miles,  and  you  will  then  hav^the  • 
.Boeckde  CahaUoim  (^^Hssi^  ^^  ^^  CahaUones  Channel)  open^  ^d  it  may  be 
t^^  known,  as  it  is  brwffllflr  than  any  <^^  to  the  eastward,  and  because  the 
Si  uJd  ^>,point  of  its  entrance  is  very  low,  |ipd  the  edges  ait  t]^|<i|ater  of  ^j^o-  ' 
rnco  rock.  .    '     .  -^  ■  Jfo.     ^  .       ^'%^ 

Having  ascertained  your  situation,  from  seeing  this  boca  or  iHihn|||^  you  Ynq^v^  " 
continue  coasting  along  the  keys,  at  the  distqfice  of  ^.ittiles,  contiQuingontfaSi 
preceding  cmirse;  aqd- havings  run  £1  m%s,  you  will  settto^e  northil^arda  0^'  ., 
opening,  f6|j1ued  by  the  keys,  which  is  Uie'^oca  Grande  Fpassing  hy  it^urstie 
the  samfi  course.  Keeping'  the  Cinco*  J%i2d%  or  FivH^  Balls'  lieys  in  sighi  at  the 
distance  of  >S  jieagues,  ibd  notiAg  ^t  a  reef  extends  3  miles  to  the  S.,  W.  of 
^WTej/  £r«tQn.  The  latler  i&  the  westfcrilhiost  of  the  Doce  ttcgiias  Keys.  Near- 
ly in  a  Hne  betT^een  Key  Breton  and  Pwrto.  Catiiidm,  pn  th(i^ifaiot.<>f  Cuba,  is 
the  PUaxr  ^  IgtPut,  ^  sand-bank,  4i«rin(|  on  its  eastern  pafft^iraanchoiage, 
and  no  where  less  than  44  fstthoras,  on  sand* iipd  shelfs.  'nP'   «      .  > 

ADMONITION^— If  nlj!^  comes  on,  whep  jtou*arein  the  riclijUy  of  Cape    ' 
de  Cruz,  orlo  the  south  of  it,  as  as^ufned  in  th6  preceding  cUrecti(i0s,  ydit  must  T 
steer  W^  !^  S.for  wfmiles,  and  tHlnce  N.  W.-4  W.  to'  keep  oona|ilB|i4y  fflBe  <^f  ^ 

fthe  Doce  Leguas  Keys,  continue  this  course  tiH  day-light,  W9nl^ivuv!«ftep^i^ 
«o  t|S  to  ma^e  and  recognize  these  keys,  and  tlntt  include  yourselrlnl^fii^oiite  ' 
.«;  already  recom.  jended.  ^^j.      ■*     ')t.'  V    ' 

Sho\|ld  dlkht  overtake  you^in  the,  travertfe  beCWeen  Cape  de  Cruz  and  the 
EAstem  Hlad,' when  it  might  suityouto  Anchor  on  tho  hank,  youma^  do  so  on 
any  part  of  it  obsp  'ing,only  tha^lttkdjScsjpf  the  banto'are  ro0ks«'&nd  that  to, 
get  clett%  ground,  yo^  ou^gpgPI^|||{|>oft  it  int^  20,  or  even  10  fathoms,  on 
•and.' 


/v 


Mf"^ 


• 
i 


*  t 


.-I,* 


the' 
.TWs- 


part 


nay 

f 


'H    -m 


BLUIfT'S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


223 


If  night  falls  when  you  are  coasting  alopg  the  Doce  Leguas  Keys,  as  already; 
•^  'directed,  steer  true  IPT^  until' you  oonsider  yourself  from  3  to  3 J  leagues  Rova 
**  them,  and  tven  then'continue  me  same  course,  considering  that  Jiereabout  the 
c^ropts  set  N.  E.  and  S.  W^^;  and,  if  the  tidb  h^ppensr  to  set  in,  it  is  very  po»- 
.  sible  fo  get  abound  on  thj^reef :  hence  no  precaution  bught  to  bc^  omitted  which 
-  8im\|ar  cases Ttquire.  '       *V  '"^   .     ii;  '  lit  * 

'  he  Gwpil  de  Cabiillon^f,  f^4%h  tcT  anchor  in  its  mouthfi 


4- 


<* 


If^  when  in  sighJ^^Atl 
y  froma  ca^ge'Vf  emerfency,  you  can  do  so  without  gettiltg||Ro  less  than  3  fathoms. 

«slhd;  anid,  in  case  of.  being  ttnublu  to  continue  your  course  to  the  south  pf  the 
^J^l*"  can  ^^^e  your  course  so  |f  |d  des«ry  tlttlatid  of  t^uba,  passing  be-, 
ear th<^Be^«p  And  Manual  Goii|^lKeys)  in  lliathoms,  on  clay ;  following 
laiterwards  to  tb?irortii,  to  itoke  the  AoHMaria  Keys,  and  giving  a  birth^to  the 
I  s^oal  of  Yaga4,  Whkh  you  ^ave  1^  la^Mlrd,  abd  to  sqme  heads  whjch  ftK  te>, 
%,.  tl^  east  of  iti'indivhich  should  beJefl^tosterboard.  paving  seen  the  lajt  keyi^. 
and  placed  5^ourself  about  half  a  leagu^|^^«t|juem,  ydu  mtMt  steer  for  thf  coas^; 
or  Act  afLj^reij^  in  the  instructions  for  this  inlftior  navigation.  "* 

The  City  ^I^RINIilAD,  b  utuiUed  in  lat  21°  4^)',  long.  8Q9  4'.  m  lies  ob 
high  grpund,  ao^  th^^e  n|^s  firoin|^e  tea :  tiia  River  Guanrabo,  or  of  Trior- 
\,i  dad,  passes  rathormdre  twSj^  hiUf  alpifle  to  the  northward  of  it,  and  falls  intj 

tt^e  4e#  at  B  litf^tat^e  south  of  it.  Trinl^d  communicates  with  the  sea  by  tl 
ririfer,  frdqpi  the  moatibi  of  which  it  is  three  short  miles  distairt; ;  by  Puerto  G 
da,  from  wl^ch^itMfl^istant  two  nau*  and  &  half;  and,  by  PuertoUXasio,  the  dh" 
tance  from  "iijbliwiyi^ miles  The  mouth  of  the  River  Guanrabo  is  to  the  nprtl| 
of  ^he  point  p^^jpflR^gui/ar,  at  wliich  the  white  grounds  extending  from  Cape 
de  Cruz  ternftnate.  T||e  harbours  of  CftisildaOTd  Mttsio  are  to  the  eastwards  of 
this  point,  and  lb  arrlvPat  them  a  vessflHJM^t  eMer  ipon  the  whitt  j^rounds. 

Direction^  for  ssdling  from  Cape  de  CSua^^tl^  n§ighl^iv%oodfbf  the^  ports  " 
have  already  been  given.    We  have  only  to' repeat  thayt  is  always  advisable  to. 
keep  a  good  Ip9k-Qut,  and  the  lead  going,  es^eci«ill^l^  night.    Having  i^eogj|| 
nizfed  Keg  GrtMti  continue  the  N.  W.  course  until  Kty  Breton  bears  N.  £., 
bringing  it  to  the  distance  of  9  miles.    From  this  spot*  a  Ntjtf.  W.  ^  W.  course, 
38  taMes,  will  bring  you  to  another,  from  which  |he  J^oe  Atmati  onij^ugar- 
loaf  Hill,  will  appear  on  with  the  most  *feasterly  of  the  ^lls  of  fonM^  which 
are  some  high  ridges  immediately  to  the  westward  of*  it.   Ih  this  jn^vigation  the 
keysTcalled  the  Zarza  ,and  Machos  will  be  ^  seen  from  ttf1!Mikt#''And,  when  the  , 
leadiijlg  mark  above!  given  is  on,  yoijiwMI  still  be  in  ial|||Vof  the  j>|achos,  an#qf^' 

*  ^"''^IfV  ^'^  ^f^^  ^^'  named  Pugi:  the  latter  is  rendered  remarkablei^y^i 
breopg  of  thi^n  upon  it,  and  it  will  bearal^utN.  i-W.  a  mile  distant.  Ftbm 
the  wipie  sn|^t.^ikA^  Mlanco  will  be  seen,  bearing  about  N.  N.  W.  i  W. 
:T)us  Kef  isWo&rlcable,  kfith  as  ti|e  westernmost  key  on  the  bank,  jind  because 
Uf^ore  IsVtlirderecfwithjvhitefRks.  ^  !^  . /*   ^      ^ 

*  '^Tmlti^ce  where  you  onght  to  eMor  d^son  the  W'  '.te«  ,Oroiki)d  is  hItWeen  the 
^yk  Pngaa\id  Blaqco,to  do#h)ch  youtn«|^Btecr  so  as  t«  pass  about  Ifolfamile, 
or  rather  less(  frotn  the  reef  qf  Puga,lvhich  reef ^al way sjmows ;  and  in  ^e  pas- 
sage  yotl  wiilalway^  have  6  fathoms  of  w«te^.  Hayiiig  paised  Pu|$a,  yo^u  mtj^  J|| 
steer  N.  k  1^,  in^,,!^^  to  anchor  in  4'  fathoms,  sand^and  w^edf  with  the  if>uth  • 
part  of  Key«>!$tailbo  W.^fS.  that  is,  ^f  thevappr^ch  of  night,^  waiting  for 
apildl,r«nd#iliipe88ary.  >    *  ^    »#  ^*        ^* 

V^  Oit'thttjr^telSelwfBen  Key  Graffle  and  Key  B)i|Ibo,  no  one  need  be  at  any- 

^DSBj^lilp^llffi^e  Ds^i^^^  chaicWtif  the  navigation  betwedfthe  Rio.  Guanrabo 
and  thi  Boca Sralra0.V^y  it  may  tre^sei^that  any  onea|kid  ^n^s  to  fpter 

tujkMol^llje  bii|wW  the  Jt^a  Grande  may  always  do  so,  provi^dims  vessel  does 
;iot  dlre^m^^an'i*  feet  of  lyaflfer ;  and  it  may  even  spmeti^^ies  b«  tonvenlettt'    1^ 

"to  run  In  here  to-MChOr,  undej^hctB^^^^^L^^^  ^^Y  Oraiiide  or  .tho^  orj^  Ginco 
Balasf  in  case  o|  Hid  weather  "cbliiing  (Hl^  -whicli  wii^  frequef  tlyHtppen,  and 
whieh  is  much  to  be  feared  in  August,  September,  and  October:  or,  ik  he  dot$ 
not  choose  to>anohor  ip  the  Inelterjj^f  thaUjMfejK  h#  ma;^|un  in  vntillte  recog- 
nizes the  key  .called  liabi-horcado,  ^H^ch^uNHMjaon  IKe  larboard  &arid,  and 
will  afterwards  see  Cayo  Burgab :  l^mi|WE|M|^|||||eiltward  of  the  Inter,  he 
may  run  N.  IttW.  witltout  fear,  be{hgjM(H^l|fl^l^th^5S        draught 


ri 


m 


• 


224  BLUNi;'9    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT!l'% 

of  water;  and,  storing  by  the  Machos  Channel,  he  may  ruA W Masio  or  Puer- 
to Casilda,  as  he  sees  proper. 

The  key  cafed  Bkmco  de  Zona  lifi^lf.  by  W.  8  miles  from  the  Crf^o  Zar^sa  de 
fuera,  and  half  a  lAgd^  to  t^  'm>uthward  of  Punta  del  Canty.    Between  this 
key  and  the  cgast  ^re  li^n^horage,  as  there  also  is  io^Tarious  otk^  places  herea- 
aic^Vill  b#tbY 


."'f 


bout,  t^rhicTw^l  b« 


or  leits  copamodious,' according  tvthe  winds  and 


dr>«.ught1|y9ie  vessiL  I'f^pil^ '  f^ys,  in  ^eral,  are  but  littlf  ajbiove  the  surface  of 


.»« 


'    ^xhro 


the  wate^nd  their  raS|r  jtfitres  haT^  nf»  extent  of  beach ;  but  rocky  brinks  sketch ' 
out  to  a  short  distance  from  their  poinds;  excepting,  howeverf  those  Which  Ibr' 
the  Maehos  Channel,  wb^  within  tf^ygfait,  are  very  clean. 

The  Coast  m>ra  the'  ^6r  /atibo^JMr  westward,  to  Ptift  Gasilda,  Trih^ 
^^  /#  4f *^t  ^^' — ^^^  coast  betweep  PotHyl^atibonico  and  Point  PasafeMUiao,  in  a 
nskihce^f  two  leagues,  forms  ii  bfjft^vith  9^  cito^.  3  fathoms.    This  shore  is 

owi^d  an<J[t:overed  witjh  mangrovfea.        At  Point  Jatibonko  tbe  river  of  fh%^  ^ 

tame  YanM»  enters  the  sea.  "[Gd ''iirater  411'  it,  you  miist  ascend  ttfe  river  for  a 
Sagaei  Mahj-  ced^r  and  Mahi^ny  trees  are  brought  down  thft  ri%rt  .and  many 
Vessels  like  hi(pargoes  here.  Thlree  milei^to  the  ^st  of  Pasali^oa  is  the  Ea- 
ttro  dejas  Gaovas,  (Maho^ny  Creek^in  Jrhich'smMl  c#dftuy>i  drawing  !^ve 
6  feet,  may  find  shelter  fronUhe  south-efH  wii^^  After  EWra  de  las  Ci^as, 
|t  3  miles,  follows  Potnt  Mcmi|||»  q^T  which  there  are  som«  wella  of  tm4|9bJy 
sl^et  water.  Point  ManatU  with 'Point  3^fc,  which  lies  two  leag|ie%  to  the 
Wpst  of  it,  fom  a  small  bay,  in  thefniddltii^  #hich  is'theidf^tib^f  th«  Estero 
JVi^  (New  Cre^k.)  Point  Tol^e  and  PoitU  Zarza^  JklBimfEiistant,  form 
■;an^er  buy,  in  which  is  the  Es^ojk  St^  Marcos,  with^l^ifliltle 


V 


K^Hiltle  water  at  its 


in  which  is  the  EaWo  de  San  Marcos,  with* 
edtrance^pn  the  eastera^arttjIPPoiat  Zairza,  the  river^iieinbogues  itself.    By 


'A* 


this  rivcnMlIt  is  mudi  ^raffle  carrie^^g^ith  the  townW  Sanclt  Espiritu,  which 
is  13  j^pagues  Ifilanll    *IVest  of  ,'2aia|  Point  is  the  creek  of  the  sam«  name,  with 

.  V7  feet  water,  where  simll  vessels  may  find  slielter  from  the  South-e^sters,  as 

HJNhey  may  als6  to  the  wwi 
runs  out  to  the  W.  S.  W. 


L^'* 


Clayey  bottom  of  S^dTSf  fathoms. 
A  Ifligue  to  |he  wfsf  < 


itward  of  Point  Zarza,  under  the  lee^oC  a  reef,  jphich 
.  of  it  for  nearly  a  mile,  and  which  forms  ■fi'^bay  With  a 


K 


of  Point  Zarza  is  Point  Canty,  between  is  a  sitffip  bay, 
witl)  3  and  5  -fathoms,  clay  and 'grass  bottomr  Ob  tiie  west  of  Point  Caney  is 
the  Este^  (QlrtiikkV]Cf  the  same  name,  with  7  feet  of  Water.    To  the  soudi  of 


A  DjMht  is  Cdy0  miim  de  Zarza  j(the  White  Key  of  Z|rza ;)  and  bdwedn  the 
»<ii^  w^iich  Ains  ^ut  f)m^  it,  and  the  p4dipti.there  is  a  good  channel,  navigable  J|r' 
,1  j>  l^oy  vessel,  which,  as  before  said,  may  fln#good  shelter  io  the  niest  6f  tb«  kly. 
'•    Beyond  Point  Caney,  ^||  thei^e|it,  js  the  Deaemharsadtrp  de  Mangle  (Maif 


4!»« 


I'-U 


igrove 

MoutM.  Two  ISsfeiguairWest  d^f  Point  Caney  is  Point  Otego ;,. between  is;«  ba)( 

with  tmtn  3  to  5  fethoms:  in  the  middle  of  it  is  the  river  Taild^uslk,  whit^h^iiaii, 

very  little' watei^  in  ^  dry  ^asori|||andtha|  4(|a  bitopk,  at  a  very  riioii;  dii(Mi)ice 

to  theiVrestward  of  •Pdnt  Ciego,  is  aliH%8  tor^ierable.    After  Point  Ci«|^pi|(ies 

that  olT*  Yguanojo^  |pich  is  the^ver  of  the  ssn^  name,  ijie  water  bf  WliicA  is 

«|celI^ntT  Hut,  to '  pracu^p*  U,  it  is' nec6is'ary  to^^cend  the  river  for  a  l^ue. 

Jl^  ne  lopigite/anda  iudT^esfrfrtmoi  Point  Yuanojq|is  that  of  Agabama,  to  the  east- 

,    wa^  0t  which  ru^i^ut  the  Cavi§  de  THerra  (Keys  of  the  ]pand,)^which,  with 

Point  Tf00mfp,  fornl  a  ba;^  ciuled  St.  ^edro%  h&vl|g  from  8j|  to  6  fatho«is»  on 

clay.        '■ ,  'if  ■'.■'«  '-*  • 

*     The  efgos  4e  3]j^mi,  with  Point  Agabama,  form  another  sn&ll  bay,  having  7, 

0,  aiini4,  lati^oia^ttclay  and  sand.  ^•Point  Agafapina  is^the  rivtf'of  the  Mta(f 

,       The  sboi'#A'a«rAgabama  to  Point  Casildk  are  drowned,  and  covcmmI  with 

'   mangi-ovel  (ut^ally  ^jAteiT  mangrove  land:)  and,  from  Casilda  tti  Po)Bt  Ouan- 

rabo,  the/  tire  of  ^a;i)fftind  scarpe^^rock.    R^ative  to  the  interior  of  the  land,* 

we  shall  <9ltily  aotice  that  fh<^u(t'ei't1io,  wt^his  the  highesf  point  of  theinoun- 

*  '       •    -^  ^  '  ' »   '  »^      be  ggeii  fij  clear  iiayn  at  £1  leagues  off,  and  the  Susar- 

■  avttmttKlh'^t  mftrks  for  ad!uMteI]6  aseeiltaioing  /our 

^eMtei^ng  on  dii^lMink'  as  far  as  the  Qnter 
lacttOft  there  i|;i^spacioul^ntrit>ice,  vnth 


pe8itiq||«:    **  ; 

From  Boca  Grande, 
Zarza,  bttweei^^  which; 


r^AV 


r|r 


M 


« 


t 


^i^  mlBLUNt^'  AMERICAN    COAST 


R*™t. 


i 


2^ 

depth  tor  anyifK/W'  Nevertheless,  i{^  when  in  sight  of  Key  Breton,  and  to  leeward 
of  Boca  Grande,  you  wish  to  anchor  upon  the  bank,  in  o|(^er  to  fegulate  the  time 
for  making  Puga  and  Cayo  Bkmco,  or  (^itf^ny  other  couMfe,  it  may  be  done  hy 
s^ering4owards'Key  Breton, '  until  the  N.  W.  part  ol  ttnt  key  bears  E.  i  N.;    , 
but  in  runninKi^hus,  sound  frequently;  until  yoii  haYft^from  4  to^  3  fathoms,  en 
.i^and.  when  ym  may  anchor.    If  the  wind  will  botMIow  y^u  to  at(^  in  for  the 
'    anchorage  directiv  «»st,  and  Tou  are  6C9it;ed  to  Mat^  wiadwartf,  obMlre  not  to 
'   prolong  thjB  tacks  to  the  northward  longer  |han  until  the  N.  W.  partraf  the  key     ' 
;  bears  E.S*.E.  or  the  south  tack  farther  than  until  the  same  point  of  the  key  bears 
Jm.E.  by  E. ;  between  these  bearings  jou  may  work,^ck  and  tack^till  yoif  reach    ^ 
^fthe  imchorage,  in  which  there  is  a  sheUifer  from  the  winds  from  N.  by  E.  to  S.  W. 
caused  by l^he  cordon  of  j^efs  and  keys'  v||ich  lie  in  these  djre^tiona.    AU  these  ^ 
.;  vcifs  shdw  above  water,  anflihe  outer  pan  of  th^m  lies  nearly  three  miles  S.  W.4 
from  the  West  p^t  of  Key  iSreton.  >       *  nP' 

A^  large  vesnl  aukmg  ahelter^  fironi  'the*Weather  of  any  other  cause,  ^on  tho  * 
bank,  may.|nter  between  the  Outer  Zai:iBa  anvouter  Machos,  and- may  rdh  ov^r 
the  whole  of  4he  interior  of  the  bank ;  there  being  sufficient  depth  forlressels  of 
,  amr  class;  andtorthistheihartistieb^  guide.     ^ 

%(]>KSi>— We  sttall  no|v  terminate  lliis  part  of  the  subject  \yy  remarkhfig  that 
tj^jufyilfes  produce, streams  more  or  less  raild,  jUBd%i  various  directions,  accord- 
iojl'lo  Jhe  channels  which  the  reefs  fdrm  ;%ut^ey  are  of  very  little  importance, 
becatiiB  the  neatest  rise  of  water,  which  is  at  tls  t^ime  of  the  new  moon,  isHiot 
more  tb^  liwM  and  a  half,  except  with  S.  E.  winds,  when  it  sometimes, 

3  feietf    ••  Jtyk, 

;vMasio,  pOUr.CASiLDA 

hntm  the  bank,  steer  JV.  I W. 
inwhich  situation  you  will  iSnd  4  fathoinSjlDn 

■  From  l^nce  roiN.  50°  W.  with  #hich  c^rse  you  will  run  along  the  mMdIe  of 
the  channel  of  Af  asio,  which  is  formed  by  a  shoal  extending  N.  W.  by  W.  froQ|^  ; 
;Key "Blanco,  add  a  shoal,  ifith  some  heads  nearly  even,  with  the  water,  dn  the 
land-side ;  sui4  you  must  continue  thus  till  you  have  PokU  Jpbdko  N.  I  W*   This 
poio^liijay  easily,  be  known  by  a  sandy  beach.    Yo||  mmilMben  Ju£f  up  ^ith  ij^e 
prow  to  the  west  point  of  the  harbour ;  and  steering  N.  N.  W.  take  i^VM^  i<«ep    '« 
A  ye^y  Jittle  away  until  you  are  past  the  Guard-house  Poiill^  tb)il|yoa  may^'Seep    , 
cleur  of  the  reef  which  runs  oUtfivm  it;  being  pa%tthisd(q(i||,l^^roi^,U!abov4^-,; } 
^.rected,  tjS  the  west  |>oint,  until  nea(;the  entrance,;  W^n  yog  mtfyru^^p^thm 
iiiid((le  of  it  i|^  the  ey£,  becau#%thetlKdges  af  the  shdals  showVistinctly,  and  ti**'    ; 
eye  Ipd  lea4  ai«  the  nest  guides.    Havii^  run  up  tfa^  middle  of' the  entrance,  ^ 


m 


^lulTiipN.by  E.  vntil,  having'passed  the  points,  rad  beni|;  ^i  4  or  Sj|  fathoms,  you 
^^Illa]i5«ncllo|HlrhefiB  itiuits  you,  being  SautioiUi  solelv  of  a  clay-bank,  wlpch  rubs 
^butJlSrom  the  lapdingi|place  on  the  west  shore,  and  the  ei^remity  of  which  is  in 

dnef  wil)l|  the  west  {mint  of  the  port,  at  ^th.     '  . '   ,  '  \ 

ji\l(tnhf,in  /or  muio^  yoideave  the  Bay  o^  C^tbaUonei^Q  the  starboawl^r  and, 
4f  x%u  wish  to  ancbor  in  it ^Ibr  shelter  froin  the  If. ^andS..'^ 

d»  so  by  keeping  in  the  arn(l4|e  between  the  twi^'pfints-Whi 


are .  HI  (4  fsiWoms  j  clay  -or  ^ 
« TomtUer  Port  fftailda,  observe  the  same  route  as^at^i 

'until  the  south  fkrt  of  Key  G4ayon  on  with  the'sQuth  par 
gPtditiilDh  >ii)  wbich  direction  is  the  m<MiUi  or  opening  of  ., 
^ught  ttt^otfr^  and,  keeping  away  in  tns  position  t»fu^i 


wintjlfll  you  ma^ 

. , ^  _„  -.    .^^  ichform  jtv  and^Jk-ij^ 

recting  yoiirs^lf  nudostrait,  aiw  with  die  proiv^N.  E.f)bj  lO.  anchor  ii^en*;^)^ 

(iven  fd^  Inri  Afosto; 
:(f  the  main  land  of 
»,*by^hiib  you 
^^  muldle  of  it,  the 
ey^aQftlea^WUl  fociHt|ite  th  entrance,  v^hioh  is  110yard3^l|l!(i^,with4fetboms 
of  water.  ^ ,  l^ing  at  the  wc^c  of  this  opening,  at  a  cable's  distance^  i^eer  W.  3>  W.  *! 
<  sailing  in  6,  7,  and  8  fa^oms,  (day)  until  you  bring  ff^  Canlm  oh  wkh  the  ^ 
north^point  of  CaM  Ratones,  at  whie||  moment  plaoe  tiie  prow^o  the  western- 
'tnoit  part  of  the  City  of  Trinidad,  avoiding  the  ilef,  which  runs.ottt^S.  8.  W. 
frtfm  Cayo  fluayo^  and  which  will  be  pass 
of  this  key  on  with  UK  MUth  pA<r  or  T 
eMterncpost  part'^f  tbe«||y,  untihy<it|} "' 
wiih  the  westernmost  part  of  the  faigt 


r  ^ 


>on^s  yoii  luring  J|^  |bath  pirt 

lerwwds  steiKtowards  the 

. ,  Jjj^  pkirtof  lay  Rdltofu$  on 

N|ij|S|.Hondaf  wne%  you  will 


226 


B£l 


Vfi%S 


AMERICA 


COA 


« 


steer  towards  thede  bbjects  until  you  pass  the  shoal  l?ume4!^pPhil«  folloMring 
the  same  mark,  with^t  precaution  ofkeeping^a  little  to  starb<!^rd  }  ou  M\\  pa^ 
lear  of  Point  Casil^pWjbich  is  ral|ie?'rahil :  and,  passing  on  i^jf  the  interfor.  g<ip«^ 
to  thesouth  of  Key.Ratc^jaes,  givmg  a  birth  to  the  point  of'it;  having paasedL 
which  you  jpay  stegF  N.' '^M  W. -aofl  shortly  aftenvards  anchofin  S  &r  Hi  taC^ 
thorns,  oncW^^.     ^     j^t^^t>  '#'  '      *%* 

You  aWMptehor  \n' 8%  part  of  the8#channell,  if  circumaiinces  require  it, 
upon  a  clti^^  bottom.    Yonttnay  als#1|i^e  Port  Cayilda,  enterkig  fhonvthe  chan- 
nel ot^gMoma,  by  the  nortii  of  Key  0uayo,  or  from  the  west  of  Key  Blanco,  >; 
and  by  the  breaks  ity  moutql  fn  this  part  of  t^e  reef,  as  Boca  Qrande,  ^NegrU-  n\ 
la  wnaMidateu ;  \0t  the  entx-anceskare  dangerous,  and  there  are  no  proppiftleading 

marks.  "*'     -^^      -  '%  «     *  #*  l^^'        *■ 

f»  To  enter  ^  the  mouth  of  (Mtfaho  or  TruSdad  Rivet,  'gteer  outside  the^hk,  ^n'% 
Jtin  :n  vdthout  fear,  even  within  a  mii|ket|Bhot  of  the  shore,  Whkh,  in  tk<r  place, 
is  .very  clean ;  and,  running  en  at  |jb)e  same  distance,  you  will  seethe  bay  of  the^ 
entrance,  formed  by  tUi^  Point  of  CiriaM  to  the  south,  and  the  ]^oinf  of  the  Ri^ 
ver  Canarto  the  north ;  anUi  when  youthavfi  it  weHm>en,  direct  yourself  (with  - 
little  sail  Edit)  so  as  to  pass  nearer  PoiriPbai||8  than  Fmnt  €iria|;ss,  for  it  is  inQ|h 
cleaifer :  sound  frequently,  iibwever,  ^fid,  if  m  a  large  velfpel,  anchor  imntediate- 
ly>  upon  getting  bottom,  because  ^  cp^orage  is  of  very  small  extent.    If  Uli^ 
vessipl  is  smaH,  you  iiiay  ruir  ^V'steering  towan|l  the  south  j^ore  of.  tlM^  b^y, 
keeping  the  prow  between  two^andy  beaches,  wnich  are  1^  on^^nes  on  it; 
|^^«^fc  6  or  8  fath6ml;*sandyb*>ttom,  you  rony  anchcK       i^    '     ^ 
llmgmw^  de3cRbed<'this  navigation,  it  is  necessary  only  td'add  that  Mash 
ferable  jto  Caailib,  not,  only  on  ac^^nt  of  its  deeper  w^ter,  and  thattf  yoo^ 
cin  sail  outpfit  w^thjth|ffrade-wind^ut^that  itisjnoreeasy  to  and  does 

^  not  reqHire  a  pilot ;  whire,  on  the'  coijpiry,  JP^  Casilda  cannot  fee  entered  with-  . 
*  Qut  one;  its  anchorage  is  not' more' than  lour  ■'tables'  lengthen  extent;  if  is  very 
l^flicuUjto  get  out  of,  jt  with,  the  trade-wind :  and  fiiially,to%btait>  w;iter,it  is 
necessJiPy  to  send  boatsto  the  River  Guarabo.    Port^Rosio  is,  thereipi*fe,  the  oS-  ' 
ly  i)he  Which  vesitels,  igjlellcftng  to  load  or  discharge,  er  remam  any  tiine  at  l^ini- 
ought  to  tahe.     *^       -#••.  * 

very  «Iean,  and  yoji  may  run 
„  miles  it  tends^W.  |  ^r^^^  as 
Kui  mid  j^iver  nuuus)  irujiu  tuiB  iicon^nues  N.  W.  bjf  W^^fiV.' nino 
e  Poinil^of  Sfto  Juan,  wl^eh  is  wall  marked,  as  the  coist  tfterWardl* 
tAls  N.  by  W.  i  W.  for  a  HAig  mile,  t^B  Rive^  Guaigindc^.        '^ 

Between  ^ifffRiver  Guauraboiipd  the  Point  of  San  Jtfan,  the  nyewi  Giut|ia- 
3rwat  Cidipgan,  Honda, ■$'aguanl[bb,4an^  Stt  Juan,  run  into  the  sea:  in^alktnfese,  '' 
vcoastingwessels,  which  do  not  draw  more  than  6  fe^t,  sonuKtimer  attchor.    To  il^ 
get  fresh  t^ater,  Jn  any  of  p^ejta,  i(  is  tt0ceiBsary  to  proceed  aleitgue  up  firoip  their 
nMutlhii<'«^     ■'  •    ^|-  .#    ,.,''>       -.  ,    '  ^    i' . 

Aloii^  IHte  part  o^  the  coasi-the  \flter  is  deep,  and  the  bottom  clean,  eseci]^^  ^ 
inca  little  rec«|  which  stitches  out  between  the  RivefsTaguankbp  and  San  Ju^|^ 
lfMBrbid[^o«s  no>t  extend  flridtti^ltep  coatt  so  mu^i  as  half  j^^miler  The  shore 
ia!wm^fganif*bt  ^ollprtii^  >0(ek.  '^he  land  is  monntainoin  or  hill^i  ^pr  » little 
fQ^  the  yrwIfU  @a^  Juan's^ ibiot,  and  at  it  combienlfes  the  Mountains  bJLSao 
Juan  «r  of  Trinidad.      *"    ^' f  ,  *      *. 

''From  the  River  Qdftgimico  the  c^i^^t  tends  fourte^  milds  N.  W.  by  W.  toihe 
Cidomdafi  rhint,  wMtiris  ij^e  east  j^int^pf  Port  ^«|i|^iind  is  so  cleiin  that  it 
nay  |«rrun  aloag  aflpos'  Mbiihalf  a  cal>1e's  length^:  (Bl  land  is  le^et,  idthout 
B>ouq|ains,  andmit  the  i-ivers  Gavilan,  Qavilancit^  a^d  Atimao,  arc'pipt  with; 
jPut£niS|ar»  of  lilile  importance.        ^- ,  '  v,  '    a     *  .  ♦ 

The7orf  br  Harbwr  of  JHufgua,  9r  Jagva,  ii  very  spacious,  secuf^s  sn  all  times, 


our  of  JSntigm,  ^r  Jagva,  ii  very  spacious, 
.  but  its  dnvan^e  .is  ye>y  narrow  and  c 


#  "^and  hag^dipen  ^4Lter.  but  its  £n1^an|e  Js°ye>y  narrow  and  crookf^..  The  east 
ti  «biilt,  nMkta  0»lorados,  and  thQ'ii^t4i.ySiA(milla  or  de'la  Vwiff,  are  the  exterior 


points  oT  this  M|K,  arid  the  dis 
■^'  maid  shttne,  firdii  Point  Colon 
CabaOot,  whence  tt  si^psji^^the 


1^     MUpOt  whidi  is  tm  intorigr^asterj^ 


Mtweon  them  is 
nd#*N.  W.  i  N.  I 

I&&  ahout  two 
it  of  the  strait. 


Ipqief  mile.  The  wind- 
Ittdles,  t0  Point  Ptba 
tdh  of  <a;|t)ile,  to  Poki»$ 

/]%e.  lee%ard  shore  ** 


**. 


%<* 


* 


I 


• 


the  entrance 
the  channel 


■^ 


AMEIUCAN 


COAST  yL(]^.  227 

8  nearly  the  same  direction  as  the  windward,  and  narr<fWt 
h,  that,  opposite  Point  Pasa  Cahallos^  it  is  only  a  caMe  and 


3ft  third  in  wi^nt,  and  thus  it  continues  to  jPoint  Milpa.  t 

v*^'  To' enter  Porti^agiui,  pass  Point  Cnbtadps  at  the  fottpi  of  a  cable's  length  j 

•  ,«Jiiut  ahun  th«  exterior  coast  to  windward,  ■d»*h  reef  stretcTOf, from  it,  and  it  can- 

JMOt  be  approached  nearer  than  a  mile^    You  r^toh,  inwards,  p^serring  the 

^ame  distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  cable^unul  yo)|i.lri|Te  at  roir^i^  ^sa  Gaballos, 

when  you  must  luff,  for  the  pifrpose  orkeepingin  niidNfe|ianneI,  or>|iflier  nearer 
'  j.  to  the  leeivard  sid6 ;  and,  so  joon  as  abreast  4lf  the  interior  points,  pRe  the  ▼es* 
y  sel's  hea(|  towards  the  S.  E.  point  of  Cayo  de  Carenas,  and  proceed  thus,  in  or- 
«  der  to  avoid  a  sboal  which  lies  to  the  northward  of  Point  I^ilpat  and  of  which 

you  will  be  clear  when  the  northern  point  of  iSie  Key  Alcatr(&hears  east.  When 

,once  the  interior  ])oint8  ttre  passed,  yuu^^ay  anchorwheee  you  please,  a  chart 
^    of  the  oarttour  being  a  su£^cient  guide.'" '  '    <f** 

■  The  coast  westot  Xagua,  br  Jagua^h  all  of  Sobo^uco  rock,  and  without  any 
^  bank  or  shoal,  for  neaily  twenty-one  and  a  half  miles,  to  the  point  of  Ctdeta  Bu- 

eno\6ood'  Co;i^e) ;  it  thence  tends  W.  N.  W.'i  W.  six  sftid  three-quarters  miles 

to  the  eastpointof  Coduaps  orSwine\J3«Jf''         ,  * 

*~OCHIN"OS  BAYisfflrmed  bij,th#  point  above  mentioned,  and  another 


■(  ■ 


^W^ 


% 


t  tvhich  lies  W.  bj^N.  from  it :  the  la^t  is  named  Puntg,  del  Padre  (Father's 
ipt^)  The  bay  extends  thirteen  milfv  tot^the  N.  Nt  W.  The  edge  of  its 
eastek'n  Qoast  is  t>i  S(ob6ruco  J|^ck,  wittfout  a  bank,  un^ll  <it  about  halt  a  mile 
tirom  vthe  jl^ore,  Wnen  bottrai-  is  found  in,  1*  fathoms,  on  sand  and  rooki 
dSminl<SJ|^g the  depl^  rapidly  towards  the  cokst.  fl^heVestern  coaft  i&  a  saii4T 
bdacht  Itnd  sends  out  a  bank  to  a  short  distance,  but  alrH)f  it  a  rocky  blMbolh :  % 

^Ihe  northern  part  of  the  bay  is  a  landing-place,  which  leads  to  the  stock'  famj^ 
(Hackndaa  de  Qanado)  but  it  is  little  freqnedted,  on  ag^uni  of  it#^aVingj|p  Utile 

;    bank,  and  th^  little  that  is  havingjfpneralljl'' a  bottom  orshl^p  rocks.'      ^.. 

Point  Padre  is  very  Ipw,  with  a  siandy  beach.    S.  E.  from  ij,  "at  the  idistanqp  * 
of  six  an^«thii«e-quartei^nliles,  Ues  Pkdrcfi  Key,  which  is  low,  and  of  gmall  ex^ ' 
tent.    A  htide  to  the  east  of  the  point,  the  bank'whlfh  borders  the  westWast  of 
thebay  coa^nues  towar<ls  the  south*  and  along  the  edjf^^  it  is  fi  reef,  whicii^l- 
mcit  j^os  ^e  north  part  of  Piedras  Key.    The  easternllile  o(  this^r^  H  WJ 
ateep-to,  and  has  sqpe  openings,  of  3  and , ^fathoms,  tvych,«UQt|<r  irpasaage  i)h  * 
to  the  bank,    "[the  most  frequented  om  is  that  fonh^  bfHnw^Kithern  extr^i- 
tjf  of  tfre.refef  and  Piedras  Key,  both  because  the  Kfeyae    ~        "^  ^  '     '" 


iref.  as 


'^pind  because  il  has  a  greater  depth  pf  w^r  than  arif  ^if  the  j^hera^  J^  ^eak 
which  terminates  this  reef  endl  to  the  we'fttw^jnd  aitbe  Irowzncfei^  (WasheqjJIi- 
man)  JJocASi,  which  lid'ibout  four  leagues  W.i^.  fironj  Piedras  WSy',         '  '  i 

F£<Mn  Pa4re  Point  to  that  of  DonChHsttnim^att  thq^^oaat  is  brokf!BiMthJ^<3 
poDns,  brining  many  keys,  with  groups  r>t  Mangroves,  having  their  r(pts  gro 
.  ing  in  tbi^  water,  or  sd  plose  to  it  tnatt^e  water  wa^hi|s  in  among  them,  and  ha, 
ing  BO  navipble  channels.    In  this  large  spacev^is  ^pmj^rehended  CftiyaSka^ 
^itJoutb  side  of  ^hich  is  a  sandy  beadi ;  ftnliiihire  is  fresh  water,  ln^^les«  at 
Jm  easiteri  >  part.   On  that  side,  at  the  distance  of  a  mil«|  and  a  half  froia  tne 
is  the  LamnderaReef,  whipk«xtend#  two  ^h&r  e^t  atid  west.  '  '^^,irest 
of  it  lies  west,  fifreitti  and  tjaree-quarters  »^from^  Point.  Pall^e  *' 
another  key,  whidh  lies  t#the  N.  W.  foni^%e  Barron  (Lil£le  Mi 
vano,  Whiieit  h|9  little  depth.  .      »   j'^"'^ 

,.  ^he  BpqueroQ  of  Oahranot  with  die  so\it^rn;e3i(tremity, 
vvhicb  lies  six  mifiesja^iiMfrom  it  a  W.  t^^W.  0mB  ti 
extfen^  i^od  N.  W-I^TW.  for  abM  seven *i<rfl<4  'A1 


f,Pkgo  Perez*  jlSwf, 
y  of  Cdiones,  whico 
e  Wbfiom  of^iris 


QckHy^ut  ith  of^no  use,  |here  boing  nopoi 
f  C^a.    At  the  distance  of  n 


roc; 

bf  d|Pa.    At  the  distance' of  more  t^&n  AV^ 
;giiuth  point  of  Dlidglh^erez  Key, «  reef 

tol'the  S.  E.  united  wi||ii!lie  eastern  gait 
Mtween  the  3ai^^{>oint  6f  Diego  iPercz  aqid  ll 


# 


iwfion  thepce  tathe  main  'and," 

and  a  )ialf  |o  the  tiasdj^Jfromk  tli% 

wliich,  stretchin||«ut  with  ^urn 

JH^jiineUoa^  and^8teep-to.    Be.- 

epjijiiencetiient  of  the  reef,  there 


•     4 


Hp  ■ 


'•'If 


>< 


•2^8 


AMERtCAl!i^rOA8l^^j^Q1 


;♦» 


jn  a  short 
.  ^_..tt  there  »s.  i" 
(Q):  thereois  nflB^   ' 


!«• 


u 


b^ 


h  I  passa^f''  on  to  the  western  bank,  whioh  begins  with  Tfathoi 
distance,  has  only  14  feet.    Four  miles  to  the  S.  E.>of  the 
Hoother  chann%l,  withitfgt  3  fathoms,  ^A^ry  soon  af^r  on! 
good  mark  far  it,  ani^Pe  foi^ierlsinosrfreduented. 
'       S  W.  by  W.  a^Ie  and  nine-tenths  from  thepojfnt  of  Diego  Perei,  lie*  th«ta 
.    southeriimoat  part  ^>i|Pai9nc»Key  i  «%f  whichiUklvir  iri  «Ml«rto  the  N.  W.  b«A 
*  W.  true,,j^<»Wi  drk^  named  Sal  pgi  Fo^r^,  and  which;  connecting  with  ^ 
the  "°'&i<nflHM'  oi  Cuba,  alt  Don^  dMutioprs  Boint^  form  innuaier^He  passages,^   i 
hut  with  t<e^  tittle  water.    The  routh^most  keys  of  this  chatQ,  nanaedBtomto,  ' 
Cacao,  and  Pafanca,  arp  the  inarks  for  vessels  sailinjg.jgilong  the  fwtni^  tlhi^h  has 
^  nqt  more,  in  *aiany«|)laces,  thati  11  feet  of  water;  and  its  bottom,  of^^(| white 
sand,  is  studded  fijl(h  heads  of^rocks,  ^ith  only  afeetMer  them,  buVllJteir  co- 
lour indicates  where  "the)||^e..    I^is  p^sage  h  bbunaelH  by  ^he  m|^ 
mentioned,  another  key,  Rmnhorcado,  to  the  south^^nd  the  edg^  of  l9|  Jardir  »s 
Bank.  ,       ■  '«,  4»,  ^  _^  ■*  /# 

From  Palancg^,  \ey,^hich  lies  tw^rive^nd  a  hqilLmiles  «lf  vivNI  W.  trtiej^^m   <* 
Flamctoco  Key,  <  uc  w«stern  Fabrics  Kc^s  take  a  wro  to  Ni|*E.  >iy  N.  true,^  to- 
wards the  main  ,  ind,  and>they  foira  tm'BSfsSH  or  chapel  .with  atitHher  chuN|^6f 
keys,  to  the  west  of  thf>in.  called  Don  ChristoxaPB.  /'  '  5' 

Don  ChristovaV*  Poinilies  N.  N,  W.  two  mttesfrom.  Bi^nci  Key  i,and  Irtvm  »- . 
it  the  coast,  which  4^l%»r  ^d^wiiinp,yft$!nda«lti^^.  W.  ^m^wkhjteelir  arnJ  hin**-^  ^ 
tenths  miles  to  a  little  ker  which  lies  at  the  entraqp  ofhwimnfik^  caIUpi|/«tm->.v 
hamkre.    This  interior  o|  tJj^  cougtry  along  this  part^of  tiVcoast  is  :rairlan(V!r^' 
3van|(i4to/  JtMui  t,ui»:  to  the  noutn^of  it,ext^df  «^|^n  ^^ 
.^called  Vt^fi  Luis'  JSm/s.    Thtere  ii'  a  passttge  Mtw^n  lhem« 


^iSMM  ^^  SavariM^of  Juan  LuU:  to  the  nouta^of  ,it,ext«adf 
a,  ilEqeh ^e  alsu^alledVt^!!  Luis'Kgus.    Thtere  ii'a  passttge  b6tw^n»:|fit;iq«^^ 
4he  toast;  as  ^l|f^  is,^als6,  bftween  the  etfst|>art  ofvtn6tti,''«Hi4  the  -ivi>j|!paftvr  |' 
of  Do|.|L€h^istovari:^•n|^,  huweiter,  ia  anyiof^the  c^noels,  fii^^^elsjiiiich    '^"* 
,  do  not  drav/  more  tha|j,  10  fe^.  ,  %»*  ^ 

i.N.  Wrat  the  distance  voftb^e  and^  hi|If  miie^  froft^  WUttl 
!%the^i>uth  of  Matlokambre,  the, Great  Mange6v#Foiap<#iil , 
ce^e^Hlrrom  this  piiNi^Hie  coast  tends  to  the  N«  N.  ||,  arra'^lf 


diguice ;  and  tlftntlp  Ip  east,  to  form^the  EfitnadaW^^!/  "f 
tej|a4nl«p|l,1nrtJ|a|^<dirci(iMiK>hBUt  se«|^  lea|^e».    Cfn  thtfiiprf 
py^t^e  Point  of  Mayoieft^^i^tile^  li»K.  bf^.  fifteen  mUePil 
'roikthrfiur  <A  Gorda.    "ifi^htias of  this ba^are^ll  of  ms 
dl^id^n  its  n^^h  sij^ar^  the  ||anche8ofythe  €tfic«rgdor 
tnemati^M  of^tfal^  ^ti<Mtt^  haye<U«tingui«^^  by  tki  n^mes 
(huusimM,  Mihvft'^NW^i^ltaA  J04^,  as  f^4  MffiUP'que'] 
sa^welfaPip  the  wholff aMMf  g^.  ^^  compreber  ^^.p^llW^fl^ 
.  >anl»»iand  the  keys  in  front'Wit,'^  fiati-  as.tbe  Ca^  ;iii^  chann< 
fro^  S  to  4  fathoms  GO  ci^jfi  .:  »%■      j^r^,        "        ^  ^/ ^      V- 

Tlo  tl^e  N,J^^  and  a)i!Oura!N^e  (U^liiif'fromi^the  f  pint  of  9j(ayafaeqii^  » the 
river  of  thajt  imme,  in  whicM'<l|ii<to  ttading^to  Batat abo  can  e»my  ptovUki'thf^  m 
se]#es  WiUi  i^ater.,    i'ronci^tniaifim  the  bi>|Bt  tends  W.  i  S.  p^^the  ancb6ttie<rflM  * 

"-' •■^hicW8eight%idaha4ftiiea|ii|tantf^^  ^  ^       " 

'     ^fke<;o^t6ndBtf|ie|p8lthirte 
^IfUate  spa^e,  Ksu^^^f^U  of  Cc 
tha  Batavapo  vipyiawibetimes  a 

e,»ia  1(m1ch«%jMi^#lSP<ite  <^atiffce« 
ief^^ieiMgat  cdmi 


■■^1 


ag*e  q/.  that  m 


ftthpips  ,M|ater  are  foito.d»  < 
li<JiriJ|ont  of  it.   ,T#big 


ntofit.   .Ti-     „  ,,  ,,,^, _  _  _  ., 

hiain  land|:is'hiore  eKtensivelh^J|i^iipff  B^l^ao  or  Afai^fil: 


'tiie4Mt74^ 


IC  Al 

BtJrflli  ii^t#[  . 
t  t>1t  l^eys  whieh 
between^jits  mouth 
«&.  «  -T -**-'      -,„.™^.       »r  Mftliiabillue,  and 

bs  lonMreulfd  irare  wdU'^ultivate^   ^^        ^       '    J 
f oj^^tbfsifbtni,  and  the  el^a  bf  J^j^yl  th  the  aouth  of  it,  fl^ta 
tt,ie  sams  jgimii,  which  has  7  f^^^t^JM^ciiy  this  chaifi  .oli|l^||^ii^ds 
t<k{D(t|t^ip  S.  B.  by^S.'  aboutS^Sm^Miwev,.  when  it  fornMjp*  channel .,.  .—^ 
lyMaeka,  .which  dttidestt'  from  apotlp«tMilli  tf  keys,  sMi^ei^d  from  U){|# 
l>lfcc«  as  far  9§pmz  ^ey,  lying  thi|1ieeb.iwlc*  9'!^y  i^'  sllp^f*^ 
rono/  dfta  HachahM  1 1  fefi|  o^  water«|ind  is  much  frequej^M 


vano. 
essels  trad 


t 


inj  to  BataVi^, 
o/  Pines  a^ 


^). 


LU«iy^.  AMERICAN    COAST    HLOT.  '  '     229 

h      r  ^     ^  .'        • 

iVi  they  either  enter  or  Bail  out  to  the  westward  of  the  Isle 
de^an  Felipe  (St.  Philip's  Keys,) 


jjtM  a^shprt  dkj||ihc«r  to'tbe  we^ward  «4l!^uz  Key,  Ups  ^M^^''  cafle{(  Redondo, 
under  Whieb  tfiip^essels  helonging#o  BaCavanu  secure  the^pelves  in  the  season 
when  the  fresh  (or  stormy)  9Quth-eaBf:wind8  blow  ;  tl.-atis,  ia"%he  months  from 
^.  ly  till  Ouioi>er,,(hi|cricanc>iilpnths,)  yj;|)lch  are  much  to|||e  feared  on  all  this 

Ito  the  solitliward  of  Cruz  Key,  at  the  distance  of  tviQ  leagues,  lieti  Afonfe  Bey 
Key ;  and  between  is  a  channel,  with  2)  fathoms,  cny.  This  chahttel  is  the 
largest  of /those  Ifading  toBatavano,  although  care  must  be  taken  (o  keep  clear 
of  a  spit,  which  runs  out  abput  7  miles  to  the  S.  W.  of  the .  key  ;  and  tQ  the 
heads,  r:\iA^  are  to  the  south  of  those  key^s,  jfbrming  tlie  aorth  side,  of  the 
•channeK-'t^  ,  ^ :       •  J^'      * 

From  Gaykir"a8  Point  tbec^ast  of  Cuba  ten^sW.  IJyN.  J  N.  forming  a  regular 
bay,  called  iinseiutdadf.  Majana,  and'^hich  terminates  tq  the  South  at  Point 
5a/iR4i;,  whic^li|»4w^jB-10thsJitile8to  theV|k  S.  W.  froii^  the  fprmer.  In  the 
interibediatesptfelro  ^d  near  Cayamas  I^oiat.  is  the  mouth  of  the  river  Guanima, 
at  iKhiih  the  Cienega^r.idaii  /^l       ^ 

^  S^^il  i  W.  12  0-l6tHs  miles  fr9^  SsdinaA  Pointy  a  little  point  stretches  out- 
ivard*,;    At  a  lihtfrt.'di8fME|aef  <to  thenorlb  of  it  is  the  Creek  of  Savanna  la  Mar, 

*<by  trad^g  vessels.    Frotn  tlie^ame  point  the  coast 
ij||(i  Sftdiaeeua  Point,  which  lies  15  4-lOths  miles  to  the 


Whl^'^is  mudi  f| 
r.ontiauMstf^rinirtl 

BelnfPK  this^feoa^t  and  the  Bank  or  Middle  Groun^,  on  which  $^M||  ^''C 
keys  td«  w^  noithwaurd  of  the  Isle  <^  Pines,  the  depth  of  Vftter  is  froi^p^  to  4^ 
^    rauioh^L'on  a  bottom  pf  day ;  excej^  a  sptt  With  pne  and  a  taf^nind  two  fatfaojn^ 
'  -.    which  iavetches^ut  from^  the  southernmost  key,  about  two  <«tigues  to  ^  S. 
^      '^  W.i  W.  of  the  iSuaDio^a  Keys.    Theextreraitv  of  the  spitLlies  S-  l  E.  5i  miles 

B^  ai^  ibe{uded  in  the  group  which,  to*the  westwarwtfprh^  ™ 
mcha,  ana  are  situated  to  the  southward  ,of  the  rivefflpGu- 

VBSselwtraiS^^fltt^^q^  Dips  Key 

extent;  U  is  detl^tied,  andilhe^id;  qn  whlcti  it  stands  turns 
and  ui^tek  withthat  whi^surrduDjIk^e  keys  to  t;l|»iM|^pd; 
of  Pitiiis.    It  Jk9  forrns  i  chaHiiC^itlf .  tha  Indian  Keys  and 
ftOij},  lAfrom^W  4  fatittma  Ji^^  Jk.  Jv 

ll»sa  J^ini  the  coa^  teht^  VV^^  W^  abo^PRlo  lefguejji 

jfoUowinR  b*^nd  S.  W.  if  %inina^  at  Fisga  Powt,  foriQiiig;  tMi 
:  tmS'poioitliesp^.Wu^S.  distimtllQl  miles  from  the  former.  ' 
^     ||lQil^  froi^f  wg^  Fbi^it  lies  th«^»ster{imost  6|  the  K^ys  j||f 

S, Felipe,  from%hich  this' chain  of ^eys  cPniJnlili'finia  westerlj^^direption  as 
8  the  meridia^^f  Guaina  Point;  l^j^een th«8» k^\ts  and  thttlnaiao  Keyl, 
,i  ill>a  passage,  W^li  two  ftitho^  of  ii|At^^and  the  ^pth  m  the  9p^  of^a  ^ 
conlipr^!h6|ul(#oetf|g||)|he  cdist  and  the  nilgBijHyrt  qf^Ahjem  is  geii^tm^  frdflU  4 
to  5-fi|tholiron  cl#iind  we%.  '^■■fsm^i  ^  '       ,,.t'  *     »      ^^ ^ 


la  l^of  )h(^.  coast  follows 
lej^d^  Ouipn^t  yhttte  the  Bi 

^/;^J(|ip(bast  mp  yf.  ^^j^SkHjIill^^f^'^^'^  ^^^ 
b^y ;  and  th|»  incoint^^|gPpT|yenr|tf§S)an 
hogue  in  it 


mi 


if^^he 

J^fiffiUf  F^m  this  plaice 

to:  tnl  boltoifa  of  the  said 

«*nd'  4Eqto/re,.di!sen3^ 


About  Wr&.  W.  triic^^  # iiie  disUaHyol, three  leagues  from  tke  I^oi'nt  of 


■*fc 


^no,  diseQt)K|^|p|i|s  therivei:  Cuyajflti$i 
about :ftf  pile,#^mjhree  Ijtf    '~^ 
'}re%the  Sal^  .|oV '^oift  a  league 
on  of  Corteay^ivhieh  has  abou|> 
led  by  the  kbysTipllMipt  more  ~ 
on  them  by  pdi^ne'^MPish  for  fi[a' 
the  tortoise-sl 


.    , ^  S.  E.  of  which,  Jfl  iM  distalP  ofj  i- 

ee  Ime  k«|(^i  Si^el]L^^ztend|ng'thomselve8  fjfi  the  tu^ 


V 


^> 


tl^  main  land  of 
|hbni^  wtiter ;  but  the  11 
^t    Some  huts  Kave  fttlbn 
ll'Turt^e,  or  the  turtle  whl 


M*^ 


''^ 


230 


Mf  begins  t! 
60  1^  rocky 


the' keys  of 
fthe  Bay 
AboU§* 


tv 


BLUHfTS  AMERICAN  COAS^  PIl-OTi 

The  flOlbthern  extremity  Af  this  lagoon,  which  is  on  a  pai 
San  Felipe,  and  about  5  leagues  distant  from  them,  b  thele: 
of  Cor^,'4Dfrhich  ti^e  are  S  and  4^thoms  w^rj!4n;^ri 
I  the  eavir  th^|lK)uth  end  df  BaidJj^op 
<*tpe{^;  It  begins  with  7  and  SifyffMvM^ti 
as  to  join  the  coast  cldse  io  tmhotthma 


two  mileCto 
edge-  is  very 
tinues  on  so  as  to  join  the  coast  clds^ 

Point  Pieflras  lief  about  8-  bvflT.  f^  the 
the  coas^  whTcA  is  Ki^fTft  o&moa  ladd  "And  Jtoclqfr,  with  space 
at  the  8llBi^«running  n^|il|||^Q  the  f**^    "reilion.  *"'  £ 

From  Point  Piedras,'the  coast,  aas  m  ■  bM^ik*  fuM:n(Uirly  S^W.  by  S. 

to  t^  Point  Llanq,  dtttant  about  5  rUucs.  This  pdiqit  is  low,  wid^JbMcjio  other 
luarlr?  to  distingqiah  it  than  thfe  different  dir(|cfi9ns  of  the  coaq|iM||^w^e  hut3 
near  it,  and  to  the  west  of  it  ulerHf  ^  a  small  sMidir  i>each.-  T«  then^B,  a  reef, 
which  is  very  steep-to,  extends  ^jtat  about  tWocampVl0ngtlf.   '•^^S^         r 

From  Liana  Point  the  coast  tends  «9^.  8.  'W.^  W.  and  mQi^y^iitheriyt^to' 


water ;  th< 
-amlcon- 

,  7&Ie^ii$tant ; 
s  orfRnay  bMkch 


'•rock, 


Point  or  Cape  Leonesif  and  then  again  foUpwi  .the  first  of^_ 
as  Cape  Corrietitts.    All  this  piece  or  coast  is  of  hi^h  BoboriTci 
out  danger  at  a  stonc^s  throw  dlsttH|n>..i|H.       '        ^'^      ''■*'■ 

CAPB  OORlUENTEimii^ds  in^^a  IqiV  point,  w 
S.  W.  of  it  a  short  bhnk  stretches  off,  orfHhrtldge 
close  to  the  shor<e  there  j^  some  rocks,  orifwH^ 

From  the  cape  tlie^asftends,  without  any  bank 
luague,  to  Qape  CoT/man^the  pcanttfili  Maria- G^cf 

so^theiI^|Ii'40O  E.  *!n|uplacff  call^  Maria  GoL 

SobocdR  rock,  scarped,  andf  hi<^het!i>9haii  any  o|lW|Mift  of  1fe 


ktnke^in  bednsJlLruivoff,  m|k  b jft  haldn%  jrouo^,  the  bottomJ) 
altlioi^h  fatthcitfHlllife  Noi^.^d  from  the  ^cll,<i^VKrch  ttjg^o 
Ihe  bOTtomls^and^and  veiv  rifear  the  heach  an  i^nch()rteay  beiel 


9  far^* 
ith- 


"  'It 


thom8,.,v^thtl| 


prQjt|H^ion*%f;liS^ing  a 

'r'*^"  the  Only  ancsh^^r 

,  ari^  8.  S.  wi 

iluthin  the 


y  hiw  j«)^ 
buTfhe 


thafi>dir^eti(uif  about: 

■the  coast,  ffnd  is  yer^ 

having  a  f^iMMiiblance 

aliout  two  mifas ;  bisyoi 
,,  sjiojb  contia^  woody  i|fter 
JL  jponi#fenf  HoT ' 
^(ToWoli^lillh  is 

f^eUs  Point  i 

orlhereaboufj 

portb-eastwarat 
i^^y^a  eastward  of,  an<^ 
f,  surrc^ds  tlie  cape,  hal^a 
I  Jirhefiit  formi  th^  jgoloradmBi 

tlfNiii|oi^  rocky  hottom,  i|n 


h  hav^i^ysandy^oi 
of  Cape  Atitdbii 
streaks  of  Soboruco 
^fa  Sorrfo,  (Deaf-W 
ant,  v^A  of  good  quality.  <% 


Bhor^dfe. 
Bi  cdilled  thi 
e  Wells) 


■•* 


£.  -» 


# 


"3^ 


> 


■v 


AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


231 


^  ^•'  &if^  Ai|lonio,  ii^JIfltting  W.W.  | JV.  tnu,  iUtant b^e$. 

Gape  Cor^entes  looks  very  much  like  Cape  Antonidl^aifd  in  order  to  aicer- 
^  tain  It,  observe  it  ifrather  letel  lanll,  of  moderate  height;  but,  being  near  it,  or 
off  It,  in  c|sar  weather,  some  hill^in  Cuba,  named  the  Smras  del  Romxrio,  which 
Btond  to^M^^lhe'^oorth  coaft,  miy  he  seen,  beftring  nearly  truq  North.  They 
are  the  ^InlBVfolhat  oah  bi  seen  frpm  a  similar  sit|H(tion,  i^d-Rreseot  two  tum- 
mita  onljitp  ilie  view.  **%•.  *, 

m  *  ■  ^  ■■•■        —    ■« 


'^, 


C%4^to<^^C^Ue#<ngW.  35P  E.  M^,  diatmtAmUes. 


k 


itfai 


''MI 


'*«»■ 


IH'o'i?  this 
e  north  e 


^0*  7%e  Isle^Fl^es,  Jarditie^^  an9  Tardinillos. 

m  of  ithe  Bank  i»nd  Rcfef,  whteh^suncOand  1hc»isU&  kpys  called  the 

d  by  reference  to  the  c^lP  Toward  the  N. 
,  already  notice^,  (page227)  and  the  edge  of 


Jarc^niii^^c.  '6«hi  bo.1>e»^nderstood  by  reference  to  the  cl^f0^  Toward  the  N, 


ank  is  Diei 
«Kfei 


.^nd  theitank  extends,  iav^'i^^d<ipEe 
%nd  soJUNirith  Ijltpfh  qf  1 5  M 
tiil|f{b«i|ppx     ' 


«^rming  a  J)ig}it  at  the  Megoiap  or  Sand  lakt 
'lb(6^  ea^teriiipbst  key  Qf?tH«^rdii\es.    Froth 


Jfoximity  of' the 


|Wher( 
>ihi<4i 


s  but  'to  t^e  ea^twardi  aboutM0;iliile  ; 

•^ut  3  lea|;ue8i  sSil47ie«>3iy  £  north 

■* '       C^nd  7  ob/8  on  the  Wh'olfe  of 

are  foiudr  on  sand  ana  > 

le  wef£wa((^.under  the 

,  are  regifl^ilpirgh,  «ikl>|ir 


iy,*aswell  a^  all  thosi 

tUos,  which  extend  as  far^^tf  Key 
iShore8.^j^         ^f         •-/,,,. 
~>.  abovE^'teagues  fromjhe^eas 

?^itinlTOa|terly  directlo#t!^f|,^^  ,_ ^^^  .  ^ 

i^,  recf9,>OTfar  js  a  key  wMeh  heiii^li^gue  to^thewe^  of  tVffbuco 
miles,  Ui^^amci^ge  forms  liiend,  mt  nriiP](>roximate^tJie  east*end 


St  kiey,  folio 
it  for  4  leag 


;tbe  edge  of     '-^ 
'  ii  studded 


'y 


^S^'     '  ...... .-. 

go^ey,  v(5||Jdi  extends  W.  S.  W;  and  IE/ N?^.  13  SilOth^lHlles,  is  the 
eilitcrn/ilostpf  tbe|ffl(ltdines,  under  whichiiame  arei(iDmprehetided  s^  those  wlydh 
follow  i|t9  tl^west^  aflt^|ar  as  tEe  Isle  ofePj^^  The  south  fude  of  KieyLa^o 
is  a  sandy^teh,  b«^i>«!d  ^m  a' reef,  ivh|<g^mB^,outat)>outamil|'froiB  % 

^,  Jindr.aAd^^^^  ajlproachev'v  nearer,  so^ki^hiott  to  join  the  west  «ioLthe 

J  ^;  li£y«  whiK^rtii9^Bao(iei.reef  conti  lues,  without  any  break|^^.,%  S^jandWF  by 
''le,  to  the  itqsario^^^^anjel,  which  is  5jes^e^ii^;^ntiro]ip  Key  Largo. 
he  ve«y.  reef,  airafi^|raNll|we|t  point  of  LargckKey,  ther^  are  two  Vocky 
keys,  named  the  £ralmffi|n|,  distam'  &  league  fromM|jui>h  dther,  and  they  are  qf 
moderate  heigh  I.    In  all  tne  spiice  co)|;^renende^inQp^n  the  Eastern  HMd  of 
the  JardiiMos,  and  the  R^imrio  Chahxglrithe  bank,  .'which  extends  along  te^  the^ 
south  sldirbf  ibe^k||rs,'  does  not'vxfeeM  farth^  out  than  one  or  two  miles : 
edge  htiiilttsij^h  l.'r.^^.lS  fathodlsDf  watfr^  si,  rocky  bottom,  and  the  ($# 
"^ 'pish^^s  rapidly  to  the  vety  reef  itse]|L0j^^^^     >,   ^    **  t^-^    . 

^  osario  Key^  th4»vi»st  end  of  w^  tig|il  Nortft,  fru6,  from  the  dptond^tcv 
iich  it  gives  ciam^*&l||^  a  tilmuQ^^f  ^  and  4  fathoms  of  water,  wiAia«oi||eP 
ra  of  reTnameffiEbntt/M ;  but  its  outlet  on  tothe  intoror  SaiH^ 
i(  the  Passage  Keys^  has  hot  more  than  10  fef  t  of  wateV^^TUlK^ 


_/^o  the  west 
to'tl^iwestwi 


rt 


% 


J"'^ 


9  «' 


232  BLUMT*S  AMERICAIf  COAST  ^JLOT.] 

opening,  or  channel,  throupK  the  reef,  ^  a  third  oC  a  ml 


depth  of  S  fliChoMa  in  the  iniddle :  it  Is  itecp  at  the  lidei,  and 
ita  north  part4here  iMy^k,  whieh  d)owa  abo 
Cuba  generally  entlfPVQd  itfl  outfby  thia  pa 


|idth,  with  a 
mile  from 
sling  jnt|^ 


From  the  RoBario'CbaipM^I,  tl 
*W.  i  W,  19  milei,  to  joiiTthe  ei 
included  thekeya  rii^ned  ilMo, 
others  whkh  have  naniSea.  ^^JITUe  outei 
and  generjilly  extendaout^HMutt  qnUea, 
runs  out  aimoat  S  ^nilia;  at  about  7  mitea 
water  on  all  thia  bank4a  9  C^hucAa, 

The  ISLE  of  i»INES.  .Whtn  Mil  teen,  *^ 
moderite  height,  and  th«>MH^  oMa.moun 
the  south  coast  tendi^  W.  j  8.  for  9  f^1<N 
a  point;  which'may  bTeasity  koowag  |eingl)C 
detailed  rock  (JinalXb^)  very  nekrk.  ;  Vtiii^ 
out  any  bank  along  it, 'for  T^O^ea,  "*^- *^ 
^Ipollit,  are  the  ^boundariea  Mtti 
Lottg  Beach.)  ,^ 

From  th«  westerq  Mjdt.of  Phya  'Larga, 
triie,  for  8  leagues,  tu  ^im^airOitf  («r  |Pj 
qt  the  island;  and  ft*oin^«n|tter 
<>J%  jij^i"  cove  fisljRfjPipli^ 
N.  W^  <  7-lOtha  miles,  t^i 
tttn  wot  parti  of  wmf^  Mil)  ' 
sdid  may  be  <!Mst|£lkii£Mt.1fei 
coast  bihds'(fdrmIn^|.BIiv)  N.  pf.  tly 
westernmost  poipt^qi^  islaAdi^*  9feiM^ 


VTj   10 

F||^|i tJiFtlli  8 


«  maiUu^  and  many 
Ihe  btpk  it  paraUir  to  the  reef. 


Key 

west  point 
S.'E.  for  5  1 
i£ur^,to  ^e 
#illMf 

thte  not 

orSiguanea 
l^m  the  beacM'fiM'^i 
^  From  the  L«jf(ooD  of 
mnes,  to  a  Utile  point 

Indian  River,)  whe'i 
1^^,  which  h  the 
~i>Viiawhs;niites  N.3I.  E.  fro 
r.  ty^aodjA^Jl.  and^iaji  fro 
■BSMH^KWeea  Kef  Frai 
aVtvOjI'liithoms,  on  sandy  apd  „ 
j^he^inlfflqi' &ey|i» aepantted  ^ysmaRlihMii 
thj^^-  fl'bn^lCmiijouthenligaoBtof  t1iem,«wl 

.It    ^ 


blurt's    AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


233 


with  a 
lie  from  . 

m  ar« 
I  ftitny     "V 
h«  reefv 
Ihwreifr  1K 


lee 


A< 


Iilh    * 


t 


northernmost.    The  southom  extremity  lies  N.  i  W.  from  the  point  of  Key 
Fruncea,  9  2-lOths  milea  distant,  and  4  6-lOths  miles  W.  |  S.  from  Buenavlsta 
I^Puint ;  in  the  channel  between  them  and  the  latter  there  afe  from  4  to  5  fathomt 
water,  on  clayey  and  Krassy  bottom. 

Frpm  the  Pomt  or  Buenavista  the  coast  inclines  to  the  eastward  as  far  as  the 
Cove  of  Barcoa,  and  the  uoint  of  that  name,  which  terminates  it  to  the  north, 
and  lies  4  leagues  N.  E.  by  B.  from  the  former.  From  the  last  point  the  coast 
tends  N.  N.  E.  i  E.  to  a  short  distance,  and  afterwards  E.  N.  E.  true,  to  the 
northernmost  part  of  the  island,  which  lies  3  l-lOths  miles  distant  from  Barcos 
Point.  From  the  northernmost  point  the  coast  continues  E.  }  N.  5  £-10ths  miles 
to  a  little  point  ivhich  lies  to  the  N.  E.  of,  and  close  to  Nuevaa  River ;  theoce  it 
follows  E.  by  S.  true,  about  5  miles,  to  the  high  hill,  called  Ojos  del  Agtta.  This 
hill  or  mdldntain  is  one  of  the  highest  in  the  island,  scarped  or  precipitous  on  the 
north  side ;  and  close-to  are  3  fathoms  water.  Nearly  in  the  middle,  between 
this  point  and  the  former,  is  the  mouth  of  the  Rivtr  of  Caias,  which  rises  at  tlie 
foot  of  the  hills  of  the  same  name,  and  which,  together  with  Nuevas  River,  are 
the  most  frequented  in  the  Isle  of  Pines  by  those  carrying  on  trallic  with  Cuba. 
'  In  the  same  direction,  ft*ra  the  mountain  of  Ojos  de  Agua,  at  the  distance  of 
5  miles,  is  the  hill  of  Vimtragua,  also  precipitous  and  of  moderate  height:  from 
this  hill  the  coast  runs  S.  E.  by  E.  4}  miles,  to  Salinas  Point,  and  thence  con- 
tinues S.  E.  by  E.  7  S-lOths  miles  to  another  point,  to  the  north  of  the  River 
Guayabo,  and  betw^a  the  two  disembogues  the  river  of  Santa  Fe,  which  has  ex- 
^  cellenf  vjrater.  Froni  the  first  a  spit  runs  out,  which,  separating  about  2  miloa 
from  the  toast,  joins  it  again  at  the  river. 

From  the  last  point,  the  coast  winds  to  the  southward  as  far  as  the  eastern 
mouth  of  the  Cienegn.  This  part  is  named  San  Juan  ;  and  in  the  space  is  com- 
prehended Mulutas  Point,  and  the  River  Guayabo,  which  disembogues  close  to 
the  north  of  it.  From  the  eastern  mouth  of  the  Cienega,  (which  divides  the  island 
in  two,)  the  coast  tends  S.  E.  to  Piedra  Point,  which  lies  N.  by  W.  true,  from 
the  east  point  of  the  Isle  tt  Pines,  distant  two  miles. 

From  the  Bay  of  Siguanea  to  Nuevas  River,  the  shore  is  all  watery,  and  cov- 
ered with  mangroves  ;  and,  from  this  river  to  that  of  Santa  Fe,  it  is  firm  land, 
f  continuing  generally  so,  though  witli  sortie  vif^tery  places,  as  far  as  the  east  head 
j^   ofjthe  island. 

From  the  Bay  of  Siguanea,  as  far  ns  the  river  Guayabo,  the  coast  may  be  run 
along  at  two'  miles  distance,  in  3  and  3^  fathoms  watei^  on  a  clayey  and  grassy  bot- 
tom ;  but  a  passage  farther  to  the  eastward  is  prevented  by  the  shallow  bank 
which  surrounds  the  Jardine  Keys,  and  is  nere  connected  with  the  Isle  of  Pines* 

INDIAN  KEYS,  &.c. — From  Key  Frances,  the  edge  of  deep  water  follows 
nearly  N>!'^.  IIJ^  miles,  as  far  as  the  parallel  of  .the  southernmost  Indian  Keys, 
and  at  7 kojles  to  the  west  of  it;  and,  continuing  from  thence  to  the  northward 
and  N.  W.  so  as  to  approximate  the  most  northerly jAf  the  Indian  Keys,  it  the^ 
• .  extends  so  as  to  pass  about  a  league  to  the  southwara  of  the  easternmost  of  the 
keys  of  St.  Felipe,  running  parallel  to  those  keys,  as  far  as  the  middle  oi  the 
chain  ;  whence  it  nears  them  to  within  a  mile,  and  continues  along  them  at  that 
distance,  as  far  as  the  westernmost  key,  on  the{  parallel  of  which  it  runs  off  to  join 
the  main  land  of  Cuba,  near  Point  Piedras.  Generally,  from  Fram^Kejr  to 
the  parallel- of  the  southernmost  Indian  key,  from  13  to  25  fathoms  are  found 
at  the  edge  of  the  bank :  from  the  last  named  key  to  the  meridian  of  the  eastero- 
mdst  of  the  St.  Felipe  Keys,  Srom  SO  to  50  fathoms.  To  the  southward  of 
these  keys,  as  far  the  westernmost,  •  to  10  fathoms ;  and  between  it  and  the  main 
land  of  Cuba,  about  26  fathoms,  except  in  the  proxiilkiity  of  the  latter,  where  it 
shoalens  to  7  or  8  fathoms.  The  bottom  of  the  whole  is  rocky ;  and,  very  soon 
after  entering  on  the  bank,  the  depth  diminishes  to  5,  4,  and  9  fathoms,  on  sand. 
j£     All  these  keys  have  sandy  beaches  towards  the  south.     < 

*  .  This  Great  Bank,  which  we  have  now  descij^ed,  from  east  to  west,  is  stud- 
ded with  keys,  which,  with  the  coast,  and  amo^  themselves,  form  the  outer 
dhannels  of  Diego  Peres,  of  the  Rosario,  of  Siguanea,  and  of  Cortes ;  which 
aSbrd  a  passage  to  Batavano,  by  the  inner  narrows  of  Don  Christoval,  Las  Gor- 
das,  Monte  Rey,  and  of  La  Hacha,  all  with  a  depth  of  11  feet,  except  Monte 
Rey  or  Redtfftdo  Key  Passage,  which  has  'ii  fathoms,  on  clay. 

30  'W 


ll 


I 


/ 


f.:^ 


2H 


BLUKT'b   AMERICAN   COAST    PIEOT. 


Remark$  on  Cape  Antonio,  ifA«  &.  W.  of  Cuba,  and  ^^Isle  of  Plnes^ 

by  Captain  lAvmgEton, 

At  flhotit  two  cubtcs'  length  to  the  northivard  of  thr  pitch  of  the  Cnpe,  you 
may,  when  the  weather  is  modet-ato,  land  with  yuur  boatfl,  picking  out,  bgr  the 
eye.  the  heflt  place  among  the  rocku.  At  about  50  yard»  within  the  first  tre4;8  or 
hutiheA,  jou  will  perceive  a  spase,  of  about  two  acres  in  extent,  clear  of  wood. 
On  the  oftpositc  Hide  of  that  o])eriing,  where  the  wood  ogain  commences,  and 
about  iOor  IS  yards  Into  the  wood,  you  will  meet  with  v.;ry  sharp  coral  rocks, 
amon^  which  are  two  wells,  in  cavities  of  the  rocks,  of  about  7  feet  deep.  The 
wutfT  of  the  nortliernmoHt  well  h  excellent ;  that  of  the  HontiieriilDost  not  so 
good,  but  yet  very  palatable.  There  is  a  good  rolling  way  from  ihfitn  to  the 
bench ;  but  bonling  large  caHks  off  in  attended  with  dilliculty,  from  0oarp  rockii 
which  lie  under  water.  We  filled  five  or  nix  puncheons  at  these  wells,  on  tho  '^ 
ISth  of  August,  lt!17,  and  were  not  delayed  altogether  more  than  three  hours. 

There  are  pJeiity  of  excellent  gray  land-crabs  at  Cai»o  Antonio,  which  are 
quite  safe  to  eat,  there  being  no  inanchioneal  trees  hereabout:  also  plenty  of  pi- 
geons, and  olInT  birdH,  some  of  which  are  likewise  etcellcnt. 

There  is  a  fi.Hhernian's  hut  and  a  turtle-crawl  on  the  Houthemmost  pJirt  of  the 
cape,  at  which  you  may,  in  the  fiKliing  season^  generally  find  a  person  to  point 
out  the  wells;  but  what  I  have  said  will  enable  any  person,  wiio  looks  carefully, 
to  find  them  ;  thrtugli  a  person  may  be  within  II  or  10  yards  of  them,  and  not 
perceive  them,  without  a  good  look-out.  Men  sent  for  water  should  always  hav«^ 
their  shoes  on,  to  protect  their  feet  fr'»m  the  sharj*  rockH.  There  is  abundance 
of  sponge  to  be  found  at  the  cajie,  although  it  i»,  by  no  means,  of  the  first-rute 
quality. 

The  fisherman's  hut  is  one  of  the  best  marks  for  Cape.|Antonio,  wlien  coming 
from  the  eastward.  i)iT  the  cape,  about  two  miles  out,  t^o  current  often  sets 
very  strong  to  the  H.  K-  When  the  current  sets  tUuf,  it  is  advisable  for  handv* 
w«nking  vessels  to  ke^  pretty  close  in  shore ;  by  doing  which,  they  will  avoid 
the  strength  o'"  the  current;  this,  however,  iato  be  understood  as  applying  only 
lo  vessels  coming  from  the  eastwr.rd.   f 

Capr.  CorimteH  and  Point  Pvdrnawnrc  formerly  cxliibitcd  on  the  charts  consi- 
derably to  the  southward  of  thelf  real  oositiona ;  but,  having  lost  my  memoran- 
dums of  their  positions  1^  my  own  observations,  I  cnn  only  say  that  I  think 
P«»int  Piedrns  is  placed  nearly  eight  minutes  south  of  the  truth,  and  Cane  Corrien- 
t«»  betweefj  five  and  six  minutes.  The  coast  between  partakes  of  the  same  er- 
ror, but  Cape  Antonio  is  v«!ry  cornict.*  • 

ISLK  OF  PINES,«— The  most  dangerous  error  in  the  elmrts  and  tidiles,  of 

the  positions  of  {il.'iees  on  the  soulli  side  of  Cuba,  is  that  of  the  latitude  of  the 

4»le  of  Pines,  which  is  uniformly  stated  as  lying  in  &i'''  22'  N.;  wh«!ren9  the  S.  E. 

point  lies,  by  a  very  oxcellfpt  observation,  taken  on  tin-.  !)th  of  August,  IJil?,  in 

2lOsi'37"]>I.:  my  observation,  and  my  mate.'s  also,  agreeing  exactly  in  making 


*  Captain  .lames  Wallace  Montenth  ban  made  norac  abecrvntionii  on  the  Cnpcs  Antonio 
and  Cordtntcs,  which  corroborate  tbale  of  ()a|itain  I.ivinghlun.  Cnptaiii  Montcath  bu\h, 
"In  April,  1H20,  I  incnaured  the  distance  bctwocn  tlio  two  capcH  by  chronometer.  Tho  uii- 
tancc  gained  was  only  28  minutes  of  lonf;ilu(lc.  Thu  Intiludc  of  Cupc  Corricntci  ((iven  in 
thetnlftcM,  21^^41' 3(i"N.  If  incorrect;  no  I  observed  in  21"43'N.  when  upward*  of  t)ireo 
roilea  south  of  the  cnpc :  it  should  be,  at  lenat,  2J  '46'  30".  On  tho  liith  of  Pcccmbcr,  1880, 
by  nine  ohacrvntionfl,  lunnr  and  cbronometric,  the  tongitudo  ofCapc  ('orricntCM,  as  cotnputod 
by  Captain  Montcath,  appeared  to  be  84' 2')'.20":  it  had  previously  been  placed  in  84"  2.T  .10", 
being  6"  50^'  more  to  the  east.  By  similar  observations  made  on  the  next  day,  (he  mean  lon- 
gitude of  Capo  Antonio  was  84<^  .'>9' »'.  Wo  had  previously  given  it  as  84^  .07'  30",  from  tho 
Upaniab  observers.  Here,  it  willbe  observed,  the  diiroronco  is  only  1'  3t^':  and  if  from  84^  &7' 
,/  .SO"  wo  subtract  28^,  as  nbove,  the  longitude  of  Cnpc  Corrientes  will  bo  84'^'29'30",  wbicb  ad- 
mirably verifies  the  preceding  rcsutt  of  Captain  Montcath,  12th  of  Peccinbcr,  1H20. 

Tbese  remarks  are  more  particularly  to  do  regarded,  because  tiey  show  the  inaccuracy  pt 
a  Bpanish  chart  of  tho  south  side  of  Cuba,  published  at  Madrid,  in  1621,  wbicb  might  otiiw- 
wiM  be  convidcrod  as  the  itundord  authority  fur  this  coast. 


4s 


1% 


« 


BLU2IX  e  AMERICAN  C0A6T  PILOT. 


235 


our  own  inUtu<U|Jil^  21)'  07",  nnd  lioth  of  ua  n^^rcelng  In  opinion  thnt  the  Iwid 
wnH  fully  two  minnt.<!H  «lno  north  from  ua, 

Tills  error  of  hti(,ud«i,  and  tho  prcvaljint,  though  most  erroneous,  Jdoa  (hat 
tho  current  setstilwayH  from  the.  eantw.ircl  towiirdsthe  cliifhncl  of  Yucatan,  has, 
I  have  re.  HOn  to  believe,  deceived  many;  »»,  after  Hi^hting  tho  Caymani,  and 
shaping  their  course  for  Cape  Antonio,  (more  generally  for  Cape  CoFriantea)  the 
easterly  current,  which  often  runs  very  strong,  causes  them  to  make  the  We  of 
Fines;  and,  finding  the  latitude  quite  diiTt^rent  from  that  assigned  to  It,  are  corn* 
pletely  at  a  loss  to  know  what  land  they  have  made,  or  fall  into  the  more  CfitaL 
error  of  supposing  it  Capo  Antonio ;  and,  hauling  round  the  S.  W.  point  of  tho 
Isle  of  Pines,  get  embayed  among  tlia  Cayoa  de  los  Indioit;  and,  perhaps,  are 
finally  lost  In  the  bay,  as  was  the  case  with  a  very  fine  ship  a  f«-w  years  since.  I 
have  twice  made  the  Ihle  of  Pines  wiien  I  consldfred  myself  to  the  westward  of 

j^  It;  oiic<i  when  I  expected  to  have  mide  C.tpe  CorrientefJ,  and  agJiin,  when,  had 
?  it  not  been  for  n  lunar  of»Hervation,  I  should,  from  the  rourses  steer^nl,  have 
thouy;ht  UH  abreast  of  Capt;  Antonio.  On  tiie  latter  ocrnsion  my  mate  and  my- 
self cnleulaled  the  prohaMe.  elfcct,  of  the  current,  from  the  courses  steered,  dis- 
tance run  by  log,  latltiub-s  observed,  and  time  el-ipHcd,  after  we  jKissed  ttie  Grand 
Cayman,  taking  also  tlie,  land.'all  made  into  account.  My  mate,  an  intelligent 
young  man,  made  the  current  set  S.  i>7^^  K.  Jit  the  rate  of  Hixty-ihree  knots  per 
day.  The  result  <lf  my  own  calculation,  jicrliapH  not  ho  carcriilly  worked  as  liis, 
gave  E.  B.  K.  and  two  and  a  half  knots  per  hour,  wlii<vh  nearly  corn^sjuirids  with 
Mr.  O'Hara's.  * 

I  h,'td,  some  time  Hinre,  the  misfort'ine  to  be  njiHif  in  a  Hinall  '<cliooner,  belong- 
ing to  Kingston,  .lamaic.H,  about  tw(»  leagues  from  liie  houIIi  co;ut  of  the  Isb;  of 
l*incs:  twoladicH  {pasHenj^ers)  and  one  man  wen;  drowned;  and  the  remainder 
of  ns,  with  (lifTiculty,  m.ide.  tht;  land,  (owing  to  tlic  mrn-nt's  carrying  us  oflT 
shore  and  to  tin:  r.nstward)  afteraliout  Hi  lionrs  of  nnei-aHing  exertion.  As  many 
vesHcIs  have  bein  cast-iway  f»n  this  i.O.'ui'l,  williinthe  la^l  ?onr  vearH,  and  many 
more  probal)ly  may  be,  while  the  eliarls  eontinnc  ho  ictuccurate,  1  subjoin  the 
following  re.m;n'kK,  lin-.  resnils  of  my  own  jmiiiful  ••\|)(«f^rir. 

The  Isle  of  J'ines  \h  very  tliiniy  inlial)il(  d,  but  1  foinid  it  very  diiricult  to  ob- 
^tJiiii  any  evact,  acconnt  of  the  actifil  jiopol  ition.  Most  oftlie  inliiibitatitM  reside 
In  tiie  north  p.irt  of  the  island  f  iixbed,  ho  far  uh  I  conid  learn,  there  are  «mly 
three  honweHon  tin-  sonlli  hkIc,  in  an  evdnl  r>r  |\venf.y-one  leagues.  ()nc  of  these 
is  sitUiileil  n(;;tr  (/thilmsli  |5;iy,  at  tiie  last  enM  of  tl^  island,  and  the  other  two 
nearly  t^f»  leagueK  from  I'lirrlo  Frdnrrfi,  or  |Si/,naiu*  Bay.  'J'here  is  also  n  fish- 
erman's hut  on  Ki'ii  rrftv'ts,  fi!)iTiefin)es  called  //i/,-://  An/ ;  but  it  is  inhnbited 
only  aboni  five  moniliH  iil^he  year,  \i/..  from  March  lo  An^imt,  being  the  season 
f(W catching  the,  liawkM-i»il|  tnclie,  from  wliirli  the  torloiHe-sliell  h  (jot. 

Tlie  hi^sen  are  very  )i;n'd  to  Hnd,  beint;  "ill  c«uiceal«-d  amcMi;:^  the  trees,  at  f) 
conHidernble  di  tance  from  tbeKlmre;  and  it  is  perfectly  in  vain  fora  Htranger  to 
attempt  findin;;  tliem,  a!<  the  pnllm  u  Jiieh  lead  to^tlmn  are  no  better  than  cattle- 
tra<ks;  iind  lliere.  are  'm\  many  oC  the.  hitter,  intersecting  the,  uomlH,  in  ev«'ry  direc 
lion,  that,  nnle<<'',  a  per.snn  iHii"|nainied  with  the.  place,  he  muHt  run  much  risk 
of  losing  himseir  in  {\if  wooda,  and  ol'  being  utarved  ti»  di;ath;  but  he  may  pos- 
sibly fall  in  will)  <^ome  of  the.  inli;il>il;int.-(  or  tftlhir  ilog>t :  the  latter  are  vtry  saga- 
cious, and  1  have  known  one  of  them  to  save,  two  men'H  lives,  by  condiictniK 
them  to  his  master's  boiiHe. 

Water  h  to  be  fmnid  in  some  j)l  icim,  but  in  very  few  <(nile  fresh.  There  is 
none  «|uite  close  to  tlie  west  end,  Cj^^epi  at  Puerto  Fran<es,  where,  aboni  fifteen 
yardM  to  the  westward  of  the  iuont  wesierly  cliflH  in  the  island,  .i  Mmall  |iafh  leads 
into  till',  wood,  by  followin;^  wliieli,  a  \\(\\  nf  exrellcnt  v\,il(  r  ir  v  be^  found,  at 
about  inilf  a  inile'.n  diMtanee  from  the  beach  :*  it  i:;  in  a  IikIIoW  iil. ire,,  about  I!  or  10' 
feet  bel(»w  the  .inTonndiniT  grmind  ;  and,  urdess  when  the  nnn  ih  almost  vertical,  is 

1^       little  afft'elcd  by  if^  be.ini;,  and  i,  <()nSe(|Ui  nlly,   ni   nener  d  <  xtremely   coot  iiud 
i  ^         riiffeshing.     Catkseaiinol  be  rolled  frtmi  the  wil^bnt  all  the.  watc  miHtl  be  car- 


■  ! 


*  A  fallen  (rr.n  lien  acrufin  tlic  path  about  half  way  to  tbs  well,  and  may  |trobably  remain 
there  for  nittiiy  yearn-  ^ 


236 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


lied  by  men  In  small  casks,  buckets,  or  demijohns.  There  Is  nfl||iiufliclent  water 
tosnpply  a  vessel  of  any  size;  but  it  may  atiord  seasonable  relief  in  case  of  ne- 
cessity, and  I  dare  sav  supply  two  puncheons  in  6  or  8  hours.  )^y 

There  is  a  kind  of  fmall  beans,  which  grow  upon  a  species  of  vine  along  the 
ground,  and  are  inclosed  in  a  rough  pod :  they  are  sweet  to  the  taste,  bxf^  ex- 
tremely poisonous,  and  are  therefore  to  be  avoided.%  To  persons  who  may  un- 
fortunately be  in  the  same  predicament  as  I  was,  that  is,  destitute  of  food,  or 
the  means  of  procuring  it,  it  may  be  interesting  ta.  know  that  the  thatch-tree,  a 
spedes  of  palmetto,  grows  on  the  south  coast  of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  in  the  most 
arid  places,  and  is  sometimes,  as  far  as  I  can  judge,  60  feet  high«  This  tree,  when 
young,  affords  a  wholesome  and  not  unpalatable  food.  Cut  or  break  over  a 
thatch-tree,  of  7  or  8  feet  in  height,  and  tearing  down  the  leaves  in  tiiieiAeck,  or, 
more  properly  speaking,  at  the  junction  of  the  leaves  to  the  trunk,  yoq^  will  find 
a  part  of  the  inside,  about  as  thick  as  a  man's  wrist,  very  white,  of  considerable  |^  ^. 
length,  and  which  tastes  like  something  between  a  Swedish  turnip  and  the  com-  ^ 
mon  cabbage.  I  did  not  know  this  when  I  remained  five  days  witho^it  anything 
to  eat,  excepting  some  raw  shell-fish ;  and  for  four  days  out  of  the  five,  we  were 
constantly  passing  thatch  bushes. 

During  the  nine  days  I  remained  on  the  south  side  of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  the 
current  constantly  set  strongly  to  the  eastward.    The  whqje  coast,  from  tWe' 
east  end  of  thi;  island  to  the  S.  W.  point,  is  Itold  close-to;  but  oil"  the  S.  W. 
point,  and  between  that  and  Puerto  Frances,  dangerous  reefs  extend  out  to  sea, 
to  a  considerable  distance.  *  ,  "*.. 

I  regretted  much  that  the  loss  of  my  instruments  did  not  permit  me  to  renew 
ray  observations  for  latitude  on  shore;  but  the  day  before  the  vessel  upset  I  had 
a  good  observation,  corroborative  of  that  of  Ihe  Dth  Augnst<  1817.  I  am,  there- 
fore, certain  that  the  latitude  is  Incorrect  in  all  charts  1  have  seen. 

The  Ri«j  de  Santa j,Fc  is  on  the  north  side  of  the  island:  on  the  south  side 
there  are  no  rivers,  unless  it  may  bctpossible  some  small  ones  may  empty  them- 
selves into  some  of  thttiigteros,  or  salt  lagoons.  We  Waded  across  all  those  that 
we  met  with,  excepting^ne,  near  their  junction  with  the  sea.  Tiiere  are  one  or 
two  other  rivers  on  the  north  side,  but  that  of  Santff  Fe  is  the  only  one  that  has 
two  fathoms  of  water  at  its  entrance;  though  some  have  much  more  than  that 
^epth  inside^  but  with  bars  at  their  entrances.  ^ 

There  is  some  mahogany  and  plenty  of  ligiium-vitJe  in  the  island  ;  also,  I  be- 
/  lieve,  very  fine  lancewood.|i 

In  Puerto  Frances,  or  Sigvanra  Bay,  I  am  of  ojiinion  that,  with  good%round- 
tftckle,  a  vesi^el  may  ride  out  almost  any  '^nUi :  so  far,  however,  as  I  could  judg* 
from  its  appekKincc  from  the  shore;  and  shelter  inayoe  found  under  the  jee  of 
\tlie  reefs.  A  Spanish  fisherman  informed  me  that  it  was  n  much  better  place 
than  it  was  generally  thought  to  lie,  and  had  clean  ground,  bottom  of  flue  white 
sand  all  over,  within  there^,  with  from  3  to  3h  ajjid  4  Ciitiioms. 

On  approaching;  the  Isle  i^Pines  from  the  sotitlnvard,  the  first  objects  you  will 
discover  are  three  very  remarkal)le  jieaked  hills  or  mountains,  on  what  are  calhid 
the  Sierras  de  St.  Pedro.  The  land  aj)pears  extiemely  arid  and  barren.  The 
greater  part  of  it  on  the  south  sidiLis  covered  with  wood,  among  which,  however, 
many  cattle  and  pigs  find  pastura^. 

Between  thii  Isle  of  Pines  and  Batnvano,  tlieic  is  a  {^reat  ntunber  of  l^feys,  with 


mangrove-trees  on  them 


shoal  water  between  them.     Among  the  roots  of  tin 
are  many  and  excoHent  cruy-fish. 

The  Spanish  master  of  v  schooner  told  up;  that  he  had  entered  among  the 
Jardines,  and  went  quite  thftQUf^h,  carrying  not  less  than  7  fathoms;  and  1  am 
disjHised  to  believe  him;  only  1  consider  its  entrance  must  be  much  narrower 
than  what  wefound  the  deep  water  between  the  Hatavano  and  the  Isle  of  Pines 
Keys;  as,  from  the  deck  of  a  schooner  of  about  forty  tons,  we  could  not,  when 
in  mid-channel,  see  both  at  tlie.^Bme  time.* 

In  the  neighbourhood  of  it  we  immense  qmantilles  of  die  Palmetto  Rea||fa)r 
cabbage  tree.  W  ^f 


♦  These  bcan»  grow  on  open  ^'p^l  near  the  shore. 


V 


J/ 

4ng 
Feli[ 
Ontl 
have 
the 
cribe 


The 


-.ifwir 


blunt's 


AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


237 


JARDINESll-In  all  the /arrffwes  excellent  fresh  water  may  be  found,  by  dig- 
ging a  few  inches  deep  Jn  the  sand,  at  a  very  short  distance  from  the  sea,  accord- 
mn^  to  my  information,  "  not  more  than  half  a  yard  :"  while  in  the  Cayos  de  San 
ii'elipe,  to  the  westward  of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  no  fresh  \TOter  can  be  procured. 
On  ti^p  Jardines  are  also  plenty  of  thatch-trees.  Some  of  the  Spanish  fishermen 
Jiave  remained  six  or  seven  days  at  a  time  on  one  of  the  Jardines,  living  upon 
the  heart  of  the  thatch-tree,  and  upon  the  witter  got  by  digging,  as  before  des- 
cribed. "-  *, 


■i 


uf 


The  Nprth  West  Coast  of  Cuba, /rom  Cape  Antonio  to  Point  Ycacos 

ancif  Matanzas. 

» 

Having  already  given  the  description  of  Cape  Antonio,  &.c.  from  the  Derrotero 
and  the  notfllk  of  Captain  Livingston,  we  shall  here  only  ncticc  thjit  the  cape  has 
since  been  described  as  a  low  sandy  point,  with  a  fla^^-staff  upon  it  and  several 
huts.  From  jCape  Antonio  the  coast  sweeps  to  the  N.  E.  and  thence  to  the  E. 
and  E.  N.  E.  in  a  broiien  and  variegated  form,  which  can  be  best  understood  by 
"Tefereqce  to  the  chart.  Without  this  coast,  to  the  West,  W.  N.  W.  and  North, 
is  the  extensive  bank  and  reef  cabled  those  of  the  Coforados,  after  described,  which 
are  naturally  divided,  and  odp;lit,  therefore,  to  be  distinguislied  by  different 
names,  that  is  to  say,  the  Antonio  Bank  and  Cohrados, 
■^  FoJIowing  the  Colorados,  to  the  East,  are  the  Banks  and  Reefs  of  Isabella, 
.ivhich  termmate  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour  called  Uahia  Honda,  in  longitude 
'83°  7'.  A  too  near  a))proach  here  is  very  dangerous,  as  the  reefs  are  generally 
very  steep,  and  the  current  from  the  gulf  sets  aloiis  them  mostly  from  the  N. 
W.  to  W.  and  S.  W.  whence  it  svvee})3  alonp  the  edge  of  tiie  bank,  near  the 
shortt,  around  Cape  Antonio,  and  thence  eastward  towards  Cape  Ct)rrient.<'s,  hv. 

The  Dnrotero  says  that,  "  between  the  bank  (thatjrf  St.  Antonio)  and  the 
reefs. and  keys  U#  the  Colorados,  there  is  an  interior  pa^il^e,  for  vessels  (^11  or 
12  feet  draught,  but  much  experience  is  required  for  taking  it;  and  all  vessels 
jfare  rMommended  to  pass  outsidc^^keeping  well  away  from  the  edge  of  the  reef, 
wluch  is  very  steep-to  ;  and  near  it  a  vessel  may  be  entangled  by  eddies  |)ro- 
ceeding  from  tlie  general  current  of  the  strait.'* 

Mr.  Gauld  says  it  is  high  water  at  Cape  AntoniQ,  on  full  aid  change  days, 
about  m^.  33m.  and  that  the  vertiele  rise  is  Itt  iiicTies.  The  flood  sets  to  the 
southward,!  a"d  the  ebb  northward.  The  velocity  is  about  tln'ee,quarters  of  a 
mile  In  an  hour.  vt* 

From  Cape  Antonio,  the  bank,  which  appears  of  a  whitish  colour,  with  only 
10  or  l^.Jfeet  water  on  it,  tt^nds  North  by  compass,  about  8  nii'es,  whcnc(!  th(#' 
edge  turns  gradually  round  to  N.  E.  by  N,  and  north-eastwjini  lo  !a(.  2'i'^  «',  with 
very  uneven  soundinftB,  froni^fi  to  .'3  fathoms,  rocks'll&d  sand.  To  tin;  eastward 
and  southward,  the  soundings  decrease  from  (i  faflicnis,  very  gradually  to  the 
shore,  all  fine  sandy  ground.  The  late  Mr.  Ovveii  of  Jamaica  said  the  ^ge  of 
the  bank  is  clean  all  along,  and  steep-to,  and  that  lie  had  run  along  it,  at  a  very 
short  dist.ince,  in  a  line  of  battle  ship,  guided''f)y  the  eye,  and  himself  keeping  at 
the  mastohead. 

In  proceeding  from  Cape  Antonio  to  the  northward,  it  is  requisite  to  be  j^ware 
of  a  shoal,  seen  in  17!J7,  and  which  is  represented  at  14  miles  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  from 
the  eape.l     In  the  day  time  you  m|y  safely  lake  the  passage  between  tliis  shoal 

-.'i  iiiji  _— _ 

♦  lyir.  Finlaison  says,  when  you  arc  abreast  of  Capo  Antonio,  you  will  perceive  thfc  du* 
coloured  water  on  the  bank,  ana  slionld  tiilic  care  not  to  tippronch  too  near,  particularlyTin 
light  winds,  the  edge  bninp;  steep-to,  with  generally  a  current  setting  over  it. 

I  The  flood  therefore  blonds  with  a  soutlicrly  currcj^ ;  and  thus  it  appears  to  continue 
eastward,  within  the  Isle  of  Fines,  &.c.   ,  9 

I:  It  seems  that  Mr.  Biil^op  was  un 

^pe  Antonio,  to  the  N.  N.  W.  nbuut  5  leagues,  he  had  s 


ad|:It  seems  that  Mr.  Biiliop  was  onc^ncar  this  rock.  lie  saya  that,  having  worked  from 
^pe  Antonio,  to  the  N.  N.  W.  nbuut  5  leagues,  he  had  soun 

went  up  to  the  mast-head,  being  the  main-top-gallant  mast  m  the  Sphynx,  a  20  gun-ship,  and 
from  tnenec  ^r  the  tops  of  three  small  bills  lo  the  caslivard,  with  Cape  Antonio  bearing  S. 
S.  E.  distant  StagucB. 


indings  in  15  fathoms.     lie  then 


^ 


238 


BLUNT-S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


and  the  edge  of  the  bank ;  hut  in  the  night,  or.  in  thick  wenthq|r  it  rs  better  to 
make  sure  of  pasainp;  outside  of  it.     It  is  silso  proper  not  to  forget  the  bank  of 
Sancho  Pardo,  which  lies  about  6  leagues  to  the  W.  by  N.  froni  Cape  Antonio,  »v 
near  approach  to  which  is  unnecessary. 

If,  when- at  Cape  Antonio,  the  wind  comes  to  the  north,  it  will  be  bedtto  main- 
tain yourself  to  leeward  ef  the  caoe,  either  on  short  boards,  or  by  coming  to  an- 
chor ;  because,  with  such  a  wind,  In  place  of  advancing  on  your  passage,  you 
would  probjably  be  caught  in  a  gale  or  storm. 

The  Colorados  Reefs  and  Keys  are  very  extensive.  The  S.  W.  extremity  lies 
in  about  2,2P  19'  N.  and  84°  45'  W.  The  whole  are,  in  general,  steep-to.  Of 
the  principal  rocks,  or  keys,  the  westernmost  or  Black  Key  shows  itself  above 
water  like  the  hull  of  a  ship,  and  maybe  seen  4  miles  off;  the  other  two,  Colo- 
rados or  Red  K«;ys,  are  not  seen  unless  the  weather  be  quite  calm  ;  they  have 
not  above  two  feet  of  water  on  them  ;  and  to  tlvi  westward  no  ground  is  to  be 
found  ;  t  a  short  distance,  or  less  than  a  mile.  The  channel  between  is  half  a 
mile  wide.  Between  the  Black  and  Red  Keys  is  #depth  of  4  fathonii,  but  very 
foul  ground.  Capt.  Street,  in  his  account  of  these  rocks,  gives  the  following 
detail :  "  We  took  our  departure  from  4  or  5  leagues  abreast  of  Cape  Antonio, 
and  made  our  way  good  N.  E.  by  N.  15  leagues,  and  then  fell  upon  the  Colo- 
rados ill  3  feet  water.  They  were  about  me  dry  in  several  places,  without  any  '; 
distinction  of  swells  and  breakers;  we  saw  flocl^  of  pelicans  sitting  on  the  red' 
white  sand.  In  Uiis  place  we  could  see  no  dryland  from  the  top-mast  head, 
though  very  clejir  weatheis,  but  we  saw  to  the  east  of  us  three  hummocks  on 
Cuba  ;  the  inncnnost,  or  higj^cEt,  bearing  E.  by  N.  so  near  us,  that  we  could  see 
other  hummocks  within  and  without  these  three,  and  low  land  tending  away 
from  the  innermost  hurnmoeks  to  the  southward,  and  likewise  the  hummocks 
almost  join  with  tlie  low  land  hetivoon  them.  All  this  we  could  see  on  deck,  or 
hut  two  or  three  ra1flins':s  up  ;  l»ut  the  three  aforesaid  hummocks  we  raised  upon 
oeek,  when  wo  Avei-e  about  ."  or  10  leagues  off  our  aforesaid  station  of  5  leagues 
to  tlie  westward  of  Caae  Antonio. 


The^high  lands  nf  Curo  are  in  many  plarrs  particularly  marWid.  The  princi- 
pal lands,  thus  rtMTiarkahlti,  in  rp[!;ular  surecsidon  froftn  "\V»'^t  to  East,  hay^  been 
enumorated  as  follow  :  the  Ilii!;?!  Laiufs  o^ BfifMivhta,  the  Cor  ComK*  the  Saddle  * 
Hill,  Dolphin,  mil,  Tables  of  Mg,rhl,  Mf7/,'/(w'.s  VV/jjs,  to  the  southward  of  the 
Havanna,  Iron  Hills  in  tlie  eastward  of  the  llavanna,  and  the  Pan,  or  Loaf,  or 
WH  of  Malanzas,  to  the  S.  |V .  ftl'  tjio  port  of  that  namo.  The  appearances  of  all 
these  may  Ite  seen  on  t.h(^  new  chart,  pi"  the  Gnlf  and  Windward  Passageaiias  well 
9s  on  tho  o^d  chart  by  Mr.  Romans.  Those  iioficed  in  the  11  rrotero,  are  the 
Hills  nf  JlosfWio,  (noticed  in  paipe  :i)1,)f  ihc  Gap  of  Voldal, — we  presume  the 
*notrli  ill  the  (;"ock'ij  comb  ;  the  Pan  of  Caranas,  or  i)o1j>irm  Hill;  the  Tables  of  , 
iMariel ;  the  Tetas  dc  IManajjna,  or  Maiden's  Paps;  thti  Sirrrn de  Siiruco,  or 
western  part  of  tlie  Ivon  IlUls,  and  the  Pan  of  l\i|utanzas.     These,  it  is  added. 


w 


ar0  all  points  from  whi<(P  a  siiip's  situation"  inay  he  ascertained  in  clear 
w^eather;  hut  it  frequently  lusppons,  in  hazy  Aveather,  that  they  cannot  be  seen 
from  sea  at  ft  leagues  off. 

BAHIA  HONDA,  fcc— The  harhonr  called  Bahia  ITonda,  or  Deep  Bay,  is 
situated  at  the  eastern  end  of  that  ¥nn;j;e  of  islands  and  vv.cl's  distinguished  by  the 
name  of  Isabdla.  \U  eiiM-ance,  aeeording  to  tim  Spanish  ollieers,  i8»ln  latitude 
22°  O'.V,  long,  ll.'j'^  71'.  When  you  are  Ix-fore  that  entrance,  it  hears  nearly 
South,  hut  yuu  cannot  gel,  in  till  tiie  sea-hreezc  comes  on,  at  about  ten  in  the 
morning.  ^ 

Bahia  Honda  is  a  spncio|ks||nd  well-sheltered  harbour,  but  the  points  which 
form  its  tiit.rance,  as  'ivell  ,is  the  iiilrrior  jioints,  are  bordoird  with  a  reef  and  edge 
rtlsiiallou  wattT.  Tiie  ontcr  point,  on  tii(!  east  or  ^Vindwaul  side,  is  n.iinefl  FA 
Morillo,  (Little  Morni)  IVuiu  its  pri^senliiig  a  rising  ground  :  from  tiiisa  shoal  ex- 


o\coinbMount»in  bearings 


,  A  E.  you  will  be  in  loi 


+  Mr.  FiiiIai:ion  says,  **  Willi  the 
tiulc  81 '  W." 

i  Prol),il)Iy  tlic  high  lands  of  DWnavidto :  for  the  charts  of  this  pai  I  arc  yet  inaccurate  and 
contradictory.  ^ 


'».! 


# 


,f''»> 


BLUNT*8    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


239 


tends  two-thlrdi  of  a  mllo  to  t^ie  N.  W.  having,  however,  at  Its  extremity,  a 
depth  of  five  fathoms.  The  outer  point,  on  the  west,  is  Punta  Peaeadorea^ 
<j|(Fi9herman'9  Poiat)  from  which  a  reef  extends  to  the  N.  N.  E.  about  one-third 
of  a  mile.  The  distance  between  the  two  points,  which  are  nearly  East  and 
West,  true,  from  each  other,  is  about  two  tjiirds  of  a  mile ;  but  the  channel 
formed  by  the  edges  of  the  shoals  is  only  a  cable  and  a  half  in  width.* 

At  a  third  of  a  mile  within  the  exterior  points  are  two  others,  Punta  del  Cay' 
man  on  the  west,  and  Punta  del  Real  on  the  east ;  and  between  these  the  breadth 
of  the  channel  does  not  exceed  two  cable's  length.  From  Point  Real  the  edge 
of  the  bank  extends  at  the  distance  of  two-third's  of  a  cable ;  but  from  Point 
Cayman,  not  more  than  half  a  cable's  length.  At  half  a  mile  farther  in,  the  har- 
bour opens,  and  you  arrive  off  Punta  del  Carenero,  which  is  on  the  eastern  side. 
At  a  third  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  Point  Carenero  is  an  island.  Key  Largo 
or  LongtCey,j  the  west  point»f  which  {Punta  de  Defuntos)  lies  a  little  more  to 
the  west  than  Point  Carenero,  and  it  may  therefore  be  seen  from  the  sea. 

To  enter  this  port,  it  is  requiaite  to  keep  at  some  distance  from  the  coast,  and 
outside  the  edges  of  the  reefs,  till  you  are  N".  ^  W.  from  the  mouth,  when  you 
may  run  for  it.  When  near  it,  or  at  about  the  distance  of  a  mile,  you  may  per- 
ceive Point  Difuntos ;  and,  placing  your  vessel  most  carefully  to  S.  %  E.  you 
,  may  steer  in  that  direction  ;  as  with  that  course,  keeping  Point  Difuntos  open,  in 
the  mid-channel,  you  will  run  i#with  suflicient  water,  18  to  6  fathoms.  When 
abreast  of  Point  Carenero,  you  will  see  to  the  W.  S.  W.  a  long  point  on  the  west 
side  of  the  harbour,  named  Punta  de  Mangles,  or  Mangrove  Point :%  with  this  in 
sight  you  may  now  steer  to  the  S.  \\.  and  when  you  have  arrived  on  a  linf  '  •  • 
twfeen  it  and  Point  Difuntos,  you  may  anchor  in  7  fathoms  upon  clay  ;  or,  if  i.-ure 
convenient,  you  may  lulf  up  to  the  south-eastward  of  Point  Difuntos,  and  drop 
your  anchor  in  6  fathoms,  same  ground.  There  is,  also,  anchorage  to  the  north- 
ward of  Key  Largo,  between  it  and  Punta,  del  Carenero,  in  6  or  7  fathoms, 
Which  may  be  found,  after  sailing  in  by  the  lead,  along  the  reef  on  the  eastern 
side. 

The  BAHIA%ANK  lies  rather  more  than  5  leagues  to  the  N.  W.  %  N. 
from  |he  mouth  of  Bahia  Honda.  It  extends  nearly  East  and  West  a  league 
*in  length,  and  is  about  half  a  league  broad.  On.this  bank  you  may  come 
to  an  anchor,  taking  care  that  you  do  not  go  loo  near  the  rock  that  lies  in  the 
middle  of  it.  There  is  no  water  on  the  rock,  and  when  the  breeze  blows  strong, 
the  sea  breaks  over  it ;  but  on  the  bank  are  6,  5,  and  4  fathoms  of  water.** 

PUflRTO  DE  CABANAS,  or  Porto  de  Cavanas.— Thisliarbour  lies  rather 
more  than  four  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Bahia  Honda.  It  h«||.an  extensive 
reef  on  each  side  of  its  entruuce  ;  yet  it  is  a  ilni  bay  to  sail  into,  Fmving  5  and  6 
fathom»*t"  the  ontranct;,  due])ening  to  a  and  10  within,  with  room  enough  for 
several  Intridred  sail«of  ships.  The  Dcncioro  says,  you  may  run  along  the  coast 
between  Bahia  Honda  and  this  place,  at  the  distaiice  of  two  miles.  Port  Cava- 
nas is  a  gooil  arichoragu,v€helrercd  IVuiii  all  winds,  aUdlitfor  any  class  of  vessels. 
It  may  be  known  by  a  round  liill,  Avliich  forms  a  gap  or  break,  and  upon  the 
simimit  of  which  ttifivc  is  a  t;;rovc  of  trees,  and  by  .ludthrf  hill,  luuued  ^''c  Pan  of 
Cuvanas  (Dolphin  Hill.)  The  latter  dcsCtfuds  gradually  towards  the  >  ..st,  until 
it  ends  in  low  level  laud,  which  contiiiiub  for  a  long  h  .igue,  until  it  meets  with 
the  Table  land  of  Mariel.  In  addition  to  those  luurks,  yon  may  sec  upon  the 
coast  two  rows  of  hillocks,  wiiieli  resenihh;  sheplierd's  huts,  and  from  which  the 
place  has  derived  its  name.  Tiiese  hillocKS  I'ni  to  the  eastward  of  Bahia  Honda, 
'    and  the  Pan  of  Ca\  anaaiPppoars  n»  if  in  tlio  middle  ol'  them. 

To  enter  this  hurhuur,  you  ought  to  ojten  the  mouth  well  out,  until  you  are  on 
its  meridian,  and  that  of  the  cast  part  of  an  island  (Isla  Larga,)  which  is  withiD 


*  In  a  late  description  of  Bahia  Hondo,  by  a  British  utHccr,  it  in  said  that  it  may  bu  known 


remarkable  tower  and  u  email  hut  on  the  caHtcru 
in  on  a  round  hill  just^n  Ihc  back  of  it,  and  two 

'rd  of  tho  west  point  orthc  entrance. 

t  Wood  Inland  of  the  old  En^^UsUlihtU'ts. 

j  Long  Poiiit  uf  the  old  cLatt». 


tot'  tUu  onlrancC;  and 
dl  hula  about  1^  iiiile 


large  plan- 
lu  the  west- 


■m 


#. 


^# 


240 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


the  harbour  oo  Its  west.  Steer  In  S.  I  B.  until  past  the  reef  of  punta  Longa,  on 
the  east  side,  when  you  may  luff  up,  and  anchor  in  from  7  to  9  failioms.  Be  cau- 
tious, in  ari trancing,  not.  to  touch  od  the  reefs  on  either  side ;  that  to  windwar(||i 
extends  cut  more  thati  half  a  mile,  and  that  to  leeward  about  two  cable's  length. 
At  the  extremity  of  Punta  Longa  the  reef  extends  out  only  two  thirds  of  a  cable ; 
but  the  channel  here  is  only  two  cables'  in  breadth.  Another  reef  extends  to  the 
same  distance,  northward,  from  tMb  eastern  point  of  Larga  Island. 

PUERTO  DEL  MARIEL,  oV  PortMariel,  which  is  4^  leagues  to  the  eastward 
of  Port  Gavanas,  is  large,  well  sheltered,  and  fit  for  any  class  of  vessels.  You 
may  know  when  you  are  to  the  north  of  it  by  the  Tables  of  Mariel,  which  are 
moderately  high,  and  form  very  broad  table-lands  or  hills.  On  approaching 
these,  you  will  perceive  various  white  patches.  The  Goas|:  hence  tends  to  the 
eastward,  towards  the  Havanna,  and  is  very  low.  In  proceeding  towards  the 
latter,  you  may  descry  the  Papa  of  Manaefua,4Commonly  called  th^  Maiden*a 
Papa,  which  are  two  round  hillocks,  lying  on  the  meridian  of  the  port.  To  the 
westward  of  Mariel  the  coast  is  likewise  low,  fo|^  long  league,  untH  it  rises  and 
forms  the  hill  of  Cavanas.  Farther  to  the  west  may  be  distinguished  other 
high  lands  in  the  vicinity  of  Bahia  Honda,  and  which  seem  to  rise  from,  or  to  be 
surrounded  by,  the  water.  .      > 

To  enter  Port  Mariel,  you  have  only  to  steer  towards  the  western  extremity  ot 
the  Tables  ;  and,  having  recognized  it,  may  run|||n,  along  the  windward  shore,  at 
the  distance  of  a  cable's  length.  This  will  lead  cfbar  of  the  reef,  which  borders 
the  coast,  and  on  whichijth^  sea  breaks.  Having  the  mouth  of  the  harbour  weH 
open,  place  your  vessel's  head  towards  a  small  rocky  key,  which  lies  off  the  lee- 
wafd  point;  and,  so  soon  as  you  are  within  two-thirds  of  a  cable  from  it,  steer 
S.  I  £.  or  what  amounts  to  the  same,  steer  in  that  direction,  when  the  leeward  . 
poiut  of  the  interior  part  of  the  entrance  has  the  same  bearing  :  continue  this 
course,  until  you  pass  the  round  tower,  which  you  will  see  on  the  wind- 
ward side ;  you  may  then  luff  to  port,  (larboard)  so  as  to  maintain  yours^f 
at  a  cable's  length  from,,the  eastern  shore,  and  you  may  anchor  upon  it,  where 
you  p^se,  in  8  or  10  f|$homs  water.  If  more  agreeable,  you  tfcay  run  into  the 
interior  of  the  ^arbour,  for  which,  a  reference  to  the  plan  of  the  harbour  will 
be  a  sufficient  guide.  We  only  add,  thit,  as  the  narrowest  part  of  the  entranceN? 
is  only  59  yards  wide,  it  is  requisite  to  be  very  cautious  on  entering  with  a  large 
▼essel. 

It  soralltimes  happens  that  strangers  mistake  tl]fd  land  to  the  westward,  and 
about  Bahia  HondaTor  the  table  land  of  Mariel ;  but  it  is  to  be  observed^hat  the 
latter  is  not  afiyiigh,  and  is  more  regular  than  any  land  near,  or  to  the  westward 


iMti 


of  Bahia  HblNa 

1 


:% 


,M/^ 


lN» 


W 


♦  ^\ 


♦ 


% 


t  * 


'♦ 


^ 


• 


.# 


#*, 


4      * 


son; 


^m^ 

'  .%'H 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


241 


CHAP.  IT. 


i'f 


HAYTI  OR  iSAINT  DOMINGO. 

This  Islam,  once  more  called  Hayti,  its  original  name,  was  discovered  by  Co- 
lombo, (Colon  or  Columbus)  in  1492.  By  Colombo  it  was  caWed  Hispaniola; 
but  giving  the  name  of  St.  Domingo  to  a  city  which  he  founded  in  1494,  the 
whole  island,  in  process  of  time,  came  to  be  so  called.  At  length  the  island  was 
44ivided  into  two  parts,  under  the  respective  governments  of  Spain  and  France* 
(  when  the  name  of  Hispaniola  w^s  limited  to  the  eastern  or  Spanish  portion ; 
and  finally,  the  whole  ia  now  independent,  under  the  title  of  the  Aepui/tc  of 

•  Hayti.* 

To  the  natives  the  climate,  though  hot,  is  healthy ;  yet  it  is  exceedingly  per- 
nicious to  Europeans,  and  the  shore  of  Hayti  has  been  the  grave  of  thousands, 
who  have  been  the  victims  of  its  heat  and  moisture :  many  of  the  inhabitants 
are,  nevertheless,  said  to  live  to  a  great  age.  The  thermometer  in  the  plains, 
rises  as  high  as  99°,  but  the  country  is  continually  refreshed  by  breezes  and  rains, 

*  and  its  salubrity  is  increased  by  the  beautiful  variety  of  its  surface,  exhibiting 
hills  and  valleys^woods  and  rivulets.  Its  highest  elevations  are  about  6000  feet 
above  the  level  W  the  sea,  and  its  hills  are  covered  with  foresta  of  mahogany, 
Brazil-wood,  palms,  elms,  oaks,  pines,  walnut,  gayac,  maple,  iron-wood,  iedar, 

»ebony,  fac.  The  island  is  said  to  have  its  mines  of  gold,  silver,  copper,  quick- 
silver, iron,  lead,  precious  stones,  and  chrystfil. 

The  rivers  are  numerous,  but  none  are  navigal>Ie,  even  by  boats,  in  the  dry  sea- 
son ;  in  the  rains,  they  often  rise  25  feet  perpendicular,  and  sometimes  spread 
destruction  over  the  plains. 

The  principal  towns  are,  the  city  of  Cape  Haytien,  formerly  C^Ope  Francois, 
in  the  N.  W.  the  city  of  St.  Domingo,  in'*the  S.  E.  Port  au  Prince,  lieogane,  and 
the  MoZ^f  St.  Ificholas,  in  the  west. 

We  commence  the  description  of  the  shores  of  Hayti  with  the  Mona  Passage 
and  Eastern  Coast,  and  thence^proceed  in  successioojwith  the  southern,  nojfthem, 
and  western  coasts,  as  this  seems  to  be  for  the  mffiner,  the  most  convenient 
mode  cf  arrangement.  ^ 


M  The  Monli  Passage  and  Eastern  Coast  of  Hayti  from  Cape  Raphael 

to  the  Island  Saona. 


«>. 


The  ehannel  called  the  Mona  Passage,  between  l^orto  Rico  and  Hayti,  is  twen- 
ty-six leagues  in  breadth,  and  generally  clear  and  safe,  with  the  exception  of 
shoals  in  the  vicinity  of  the  coasts  of  the  two  islands.  On  the  N.  E.  side,  the 
land  of  Porto  Rico  is  low,  to  the  westward  of  the  harbour  of  Arrecibo,  until  it 
reaches  Punta  de  Pena  Agtijereada,  (or  Point  of  the  Holed  Rock)  where  a  kind 
ofVclifTy  high  land  begins,  which  tends  S.  VV.  ral^br  more  than  a  mile,  to  Point 
"  uen,  the  north-wq|ternmost  poitjt  of  Porto  Rico.    The  coast  again  declines 


*  The  whole  was  united  under  one  government,  General  Boyer,  President,  in  1822* 


rhgjg 


^    1 


242 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


in  height,  and  forms  a  convex  bow  to  Punta  de  Penaa  Blaneas,  (Whitestone 
Point)  the  north  point  of  Aguadilla  Bay. 

AGUADILLA  BAY. — From  the  Point  Penas  Blanco,  the  little  town  of  Agua- 
dilla bears  S.  S.  E.  two  miles.  In  the  btiy,  before  the  town,  or  rather  village,  is 
anchorage  for  the  largest  ships,  with  shelter  from  the  sea-breeze.  This  bay  may 
be  entered  at  any  hour  of  the  day,  with  facility  and  safety,  but  not  at  night,  as 
the  breeze  then  dies  away,  and  a  calm  ensues.  There  is  excellent  water  to  be 
obtained  at  a  rivulet  which  passes  through  the  middle  of  the  village.  The  situa- 
tion of  the  latter,  as  given  by  the  Spanish  officers,  is  lat.  18"^  25'  53",  long.  67°^ 
6^  20". 

This  bay  is  much  frequented  by  vessels  bound  from  Europe  to  Cuba,  both 
on  account  of  the  facility  with  which  they  can  procure  refreshments,  and  be- 
cause pilots  for  Ihe  Bahama  or  Old  Channel  may  always  be  found  here.  If  in- 
tending to  anchor  in  Aguadilla  Bay,  after  rounaing  Point  Brugifen,  keep  about  * 
three  cables'  length  from  the  shore,  in  order  to  give  birth  to  a  shoal  which  spits 
out  from  Punta  de  laa  Pcdmas,  whence  to  that  of  Penas  Blaneas  ycu  may  ap- 
proach the  coast  nearer,  as  it  is  very  clean ;  and,  at  half  a  cable's  length  fronf 
the  shore,  you  may  find  four  fathoms  of  water. 

The  best  anchorage  is  in  front  of  a  house,  (noticed  hereafter)  which  is  in  the  * 
extreme  north  part  of  the  village,  and  named  La  Caheza  de  Zereza,  in  from  1]« 
to  15  fathoms  of  water,  at  two  and  a  half  or  th^  cable's  length  from  the  shore; 
but  the  nearer  the  shore  the  better,  as  the  bank  is  very  steep,  and  anchors  are 
apt  to  drag  off  it.  ♦ 

At  S.  W.  by  W.  seven  and  a  half  miles  from  the  village  of  Aguadilla,  is  Punta 
St.  Francisco,  with  various  rocks  about  it.  AH 'the  coast  between  has  a  beach, 
with  many  shoals  formed  by  the  rivers  that  empty  themselves  into  the  sea.  At 
two  cable's  length  from  tlie  coast  are  4  fathoms  of  water,  with  bottom  of  rocks 
and  sand,  but  there  is  no  anchorage.  At  S.  W.  by  S.  rather  less  than  half  a  -. 
mile  from  Point  St.  Francisco,  is  Point  Guigero,  the  westernmost  point  of  Porto# 
Rico,  otherwise  nailed  El  Rincon.  About  it  the  ground  is  shoal,  with  many 
rocka.    The  preceding  description,  Sfc.  is  fxom  the  "  Denotero. 

..   _'  ^ 


% 


Remarks  on  Aguadilla  Bay,  he.  by  CapU  John  Mackellar,  R.  JV*. 

"  The  town  is  in  latitude  18°  24'  57",  and  longitude  67°  8'  15".  In  proceeding 
for  the  anchorage,  from  the  northward,  you  may  run  round  the  N.  W.  point  of  the 
island,  about  S.  W.  or  S.  S.  W.  within  a  mile  of  the  shore ;  your  defrth  of  wa- 
ter will  be  20  or  25  fathoms.  Point  Bruguen,  the  N.  W.  point,  is  a  ^h  steep 
cliff;  about  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  it  is  Point  Pahnas,  a  low  sandy  point,  co- 
vered with  trees.  The  lattlt  forms  the  north  side  of  the  bay ;  and  in  rounding, 
you  must  give  it  a  birth  of  a  mile,  as  a  reef  stretches  off  to  that  distance.  Hav- 
ing rounded  this  reef,  with  the  bay  fairly  open,  you  will  see  the  town,  lying  in 
the  N.  E.  side  of  the  bay,  with  straggling  houses  to  the  S.  W.  for  tWo  miles. 
The  anchorage  is  before  the  town,  and  near  the  shore.  The  whole  of  the  bay  is 
perfectly  clear,  with  the  exception  of  the  white  reef  (Penas  Blaneas)  extending 
from  Point  Palmas;  and  you  may  stand  to  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  shore  any 
where,  for  the  depth  of  water  will  not  be  less  than  7  or  8  fathoms.  The  marks 
for  anchoring  are,  a  large  house  standing  by  itself,  about  a  cable's  length  from 
the  north  end  of  the  town.  Between  it  and  the  town  is  a  small  battery  of  three 
guns.  Bring  this  house  to  bear  N.  E.  i  N.  the  church-steeple  E.  i  S.  and  the 
nerth  point  of  the  bay  N.  by  W.  Here  you  will  have  18  fathoms,  and  very 
good  bottom,  at  about  half  a  mile  from  shore.  The  anchoffeige  is  very  good 
^rther  in  shore,  in  from  10  to  13  fathoms.  If  you  moor,  lay  your  anchor  in  10 
fathoms,  and  outer  one  in  froi^5  to  18.  There  is,  also,  good  anchorage  in  fip^ 
SO  to  24  fathoms,  but  there  you  are  more  liable  to  drive  m  the  bank.  In  shlf^ 
Vie  anchorage  is  so  extensive  that  you  can  hardly  err  in  anchoring  any  way  be- 
fore the  town.    The  winds  arc  frequently  variable,  and  render  it  difficult  to  get 


%-' 


M 


w  » 


*  . 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


243 


^gua"^              ■ 

ge,is                ■ 

may                ■ 

it,  as                ■ 

to  be                ■ 

situa-    ^          ■ 

.  67°'                ■ 

both                1 

JV 

d  be-                H 

* 

If  in-                H 

I   4. 

about  -             H 

^ 

i  spits                H 

y  ap-                ^M 

from              ,  H 

^ 

in  the               H 

« 

om  11               H 

}hore;               ■ 

»rs  are               ■ 

Punta               B 

l)each,               H 

At               H 

rocks               H 

3 

half  a               ■ 

i 

Porto  1*,^     '   ■ 

.    J 

rasiny       ^      M 

M 

^%\ 

rr0 

JV*                  1 

'  ♦■ 

ceding        j|  H 
of  the        ~    ■ 

1 

T 

f  wa-   ^f       H 

/       # 

steep              H 

nt,  CO-              B 

• 

nding,  '           S 

Hav-              B 

>■■ 

ing  in              jS 

miles.             ,S 

Ijayi*    .1        ■ 

nding  4        •■ 
e  any  V^        ■ 

» 

■    '» 

[narks             ■ 

■-- 

from             fl 

three             H 

' 

d  the       4     fl 

,r« 

very            <fl 

good  •          ■ 

in  10  ^         ■ 

^    *  1 

.t 

y  be-              H 

.  , 

0  get              ■ 

up  to  the  anchorage.    At  times  the  0ca-breeze  blows  fresh  over  the  Ikmd  from 
the  N.  E. ;  then  you  may  beat  in  with  ease. 

t  "  In  the  winter  months,  when  the  north  winds  blow  strongly,  there  is  a  heavy 
^well  into  the  bay,  and  great  surf  on  the  beach.  Large  ships  ought  not  then  to 
anchor  farther  in  than  from  23  to  25  fathoms :  they  will  thus  have  room  to  get 
under  weigh  and  work  out,  in  the  event  of  its  coming  on  to  blow ;  and  as  the 
west  point  of  the  bay  bears  from  the  anchorage  S.  W.  i  W.  a  ship  will  lay  out 
with  the  wind  at  N.  W.  and  may  run  tlirough  between  Zacheo  and  the  S*  W. 
point  of  the  island. 

'*  Ships  coming  frem  the  southward  for  Aguadilla,  may  also  pass  between 
Zacheo  and  the  island,  and  when  Zacheo  bears  W.  by  S.  tney  will  have  the  bay 
fairly  open,  and  may  work  up  as  above,  taking  care  to  keep  the  west  point  of 
the  island  bearing  to  the  southward  of  east,  for  off  it  there  is  foul  ground  all  the 
way  to  southward  as  far  as  Cape  Roxo,  but  all  clear  to  the  northward.  ^ 

"Here  js  plenty  of  good  water  and  wood,  cattle  and  stock  of  all  kinds,  of  a 
superior  quahty,  but  not  cheap.  Fruit  and  vegetables  may  be  procured  in  great 
plenty,  by  remaining  forty-eight  hours,  the  time  required  for  it  to  be  brought 
from  the  cpuntry." 

DESECHO  or  ZACHEO— This  little  island,  nearly  covered  with  trees, 
stands  like  a  beacon  in  the  oCean,  at  the  distance  of  eleven  and  a  half  miles 
^.  1  N.  from  Point  St.  Francisco  on  Porto  Rico.  It  appears  like  a  green  moun- 
tain, 800  or  1000  yards  broad  at  the  base,  and  is  so  high  as  to  be  seen  at  twelve 
ti  leagues  off.  The  coast  is  generally  clean',  and  there  is  no  danger  but  what  may 
be  seen. 

MONA  and  MONITO.— These  isles  lie  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  Mona 

Passage,  towards  the  south.    On  the  large  one,  Mona,  there  is  fresh  water.  You 

may  pass  both  isles  to  within  the  distance  of  twot  miles ;  and  at  a  league  and  a 

half  to  the  leeward  of  Mona,  you  may  come  to  anchor  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  with 

jjLthe  N.  W.  point  of  that  island  N.  by  E.  distant  two  miles;  the  S.  W.  point,  a 

*^ow  sandy  point,  off  which  is  a  small  reef  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  E.  a  mile  and  a  half, 

and  Monica  N.  by  W.  about  five  miles.    The  bottom  is  here  of  whiti  sandi  with 

black  spots  of  turtle-grass. 

j^.    ISLE  of  MONA.— The  following  remarks,  luadeoa  the  1st  of  May,  1814, 

'are  from  the  pen  of  Mr.  John  Bragg,  master  of  the  brig  James,  of  Lancaster. 

"  The  S.  E.  and  east  ends  of  Mona  are  steep  and  bluff,  of  a  white  colour,  and 
on  the  cast,  southerly  side,  are  in  some  places  of  a  brick-red,  or  fire-stone  colour. 
The  island  is  nearly  an  even  plane,  and  of  moderate  height  when  near  to.  It 
shows  no  high  wood  upon  it,  but  presents  a  dark  green  colour,  at  the  distance 
of  two  or  three  leagues;  and  with  the  glass  towards  the  west  or  S.  W.  small' 
shrubs  or  pushes  are  visible,  but  no  signs  of  inhabitants.  It  is  in  extent,  from 
appearai]||6,  three  leagues,  but  does  not  measure  two  from  the  bearings. 

"  When  the  N.  E.  end  bore  by  compass  N.  50°  W.  distant  five  miles,  or  near- 
ly two  leagues,  and  the  S.  W.  end  N.  83°  W.  di^jfit  tiir«'.e  leagues,  or  a  litUe 
more ;  the  S.  W.  end  seemed  to  run  to  a  lowish  point ;  but,  on  coming  abreast, 
on  a  W.  S.  W.  compass  course,  found  it  to  be  uf  good  height,  (though  not  so 
high  as  the  east  end)  and  to  a  steep  rugged  point  of  a  darker  colour.  On  the 
south  side,  near  a  third  of  the  wry  from  the  N.  E.  end,  saw  a  white  sandy  beach 
from  deck,  and  here  the  steep  bluff  seemed  to  end,  and  the  beach  within  a  point. 
Farther  to  leeward,  a  long  landing  seemed  as  if  safe ;  and  though  so  close  in,  we 
did  not  discolour  our  water,  nor  could  we  see  it  anywise  about  discoloured,  there- 
fore suppose  that  the  island,  on  these  south  and  east  sides,  may  be  closely  ap- 
proaclied,  and  from  our  view,  the  island  appeared  longest  in  a  S.  W.  by  W.  and 
N.  E.  by  E.  direction,  tapering  from  the  S.  E.  headland  more  to  the  northward 
to  the  N.  £.  point    The  south  shore  is  a  plain  coast,  without  any  acute  bays. 


5.y.  End, JV.83°>r.    Iilio/ Jtf(»ia,^mfAe£.S.E.  aadeseribed abm.    K.E. End,  J^.50°W, 

"  When  the  above  bearings  were  taken,  the  island  Desecho  bore  also  N.  E.  by 
N.  apparon^  7  or  8  leagues  off,  and  is  high  land,  Porto  Rico  in  sight.    Close  to 


x4 


2AA 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


the  N.  W>  point  of  Mona  is  a  high  perpendicular  roclc,  making  exactly  like  a 
sail,  which  is  iust  open  clear  to  the  westward  of  tiie  lavid,  when  it  bears  North 
or  N.  i  E.  ana  with  this  iSitter  bearing  the  island  of  Monito  is  open  with  the  N. 
W.  point  of  Mona,  (at  our  distance,  say  about  3  leagues,)  about  half  a  cable's 
length  to  view.  Monito  is  nearly  of  the  same  height  as  Mona,  but  from  this  di- 
rection, appeared  like  a  hill,  which  is  here  sufficient  to  distinguish  it,  as  Mona 
now  makes  like  an  even  plane,  ending  with  steep  bluffs  at  each  end.    Var.  S^  £. 

The  Derrotero  says,  Mona  is  almost  level,  is  nut  high,  and  has  no  prominences 
on  it :  it  is  not  inhabited,  and  its  surface  seems  covered  with  brush  wood,  without 
trees  of  any  considerable  height;  its  N.  E.  and  W.  coasts  are  of  white  rock, 
perpendicular  to  the  water,  and  may  be  approached  as  close  as  you  choose ;  the 
south  coast  is  considerably  lower,  but  as  clean  as  the  former.  Near  the  west 
point,  however,  some  vessels  anchor,  in  order  to  procure  grass,  when  engaged  in 
carrying  cattle.    The  island  may  be  seen  at  the  distunco  of  six  leagues. 

Monito  is  an  islet,  the  greatest  extent  of  which  scarcely  reaches  to  ^wo-thirds 
of  a  cable's  length ;  it  is  much  lower  than  Mona,  and  in  shape  resembles  a  shoe- 
maker's last ;  on  its  surface  no  bush  is  seen,  and  it  is  the  perpetual  resort  of  im- 
mense numbers  of  booby  birds.  The  pilots  of  these  coasts  state  that  there  is  a 
clean  and  deep  passage  between  it  and  Mona. 

Capt.  Livingston  says,  I  have  seen  some  directions  by  the  master  of  H.  M.  S. 
Burveillante,  for  landing  on  Mona,  to  cut  grass,  in  which  it  was  expressly  stated 
that  the  boats  had  to  pick  their  way  through  a^reef ;  and  from  memory,  I  am 
disposed  to  think  it  was  also  staled  to  have  water  on  it.  I  had  a  copy  of  the  MS, , 
but  lost  it  in  the  Jane ;  I  received  it  from  the  late  Francis*  Owen,  Esq.  Master 
Attendant  at  Port  Royal. 

EASTERN  COAST    of  HAYTI    or    of  ST.  DOMINGO. —The  eastern 
Bhore  is  generally  low,  but  the  land  may  be  descried  at  the  distance  of  10  leagues. 
Cape  Enganno,  the  easternmost  point,  lies  in  latitude  18<^  84}',  and  longitude 
68°  20i'.    From  this  point  the  land  of  Porto  Rico  may,  in  clear  weather,  be^^ 
seen. 

From  Cape  Enganno  to  Cape  Raphael,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.  W.  by 
W.  14  leagues ;  at  about  3  leagues  to  the  south-eabtward  of  the  iatter  the  land 
rises,  and  sa  continues  to  the  cape. 

Cape  Raphael  is  of  moderate  height,  and  appears  at  a  distance  like,  an  island^ 
It  is  distinguished  by  a  conical  peak  island,  which  resembles  a  sugar-ioaf,  and  is 
commonly  called  the  Round  Hill.  The  shore  eastward  is  not  only  low  but 
foul,  and  ought  not  to  be  approached  nearer  than  a  league.  At  rather  more  than 
half-way  from  Cape  Raphael  towards  Cape  Knganno,  is  Point  Macao,  on  the  S. 
W.  of  ivhich  is  a  little  town  of  the  same  name. 

Cape  Enganno  is  low  by  the  sea,  and  a  shoal  extends  from  it  nearly  3  miles  to 
the  N.  E.  This  shoal,  having  little  water  on  it,  must  have  a  good  birU;i.  Cape 
Enganno  bearing  W.  by  S.  6  leagues,  makes  with  tw(^  heads  like  a  wedge. 

From  Cape  Enganno  the  coast  tends  to  the  S.  W.  and  South  to  Point  Espada, 
which  is  low,  and  bordered'  by  a  white  shoal  and  reef.  From  this  point  to  the 
S.  W.  the  ceast  forms  a  bay  called  Higuey,  and  a  smaller  one,  Catamite ;  both 
are  very  foul,  with  reefs.  To  the  southward  of  the  latter  is  the  island  Soan, 
having  a  channel  of  considerable  breadth  between  it  and  the  land  of  Hayti ;  but 
it  is  so  obstructed  as  to  be  impassable  fur  any  but  small  craft. 


:» 


The  Southern  Coast  of  Hayti,  from  Soan  to  Cape  Tiburon. 


The  Isle  of  Soan,  which  lies  off  the  S.  E.  coast  of  Hayti,  is  about  13  miles 
in  length  from  east  to  'West.  It  is  covered'with  trees,,.|Uid  is  surrounded  bjf* 
white  shoal  to  the  distance  of  nearly  two  miles.    The  position  of  the  eastern 


m~^ 


■^ 

S- 


'  -jtjrs 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


245 


{loint  of  this  isle,  according  to  the  Spanish  observers,  is  latitude   18°  12',  and 
on^itude  68°  Sli'.     At  the  western  end  are  several  islets  on  the  bank. 

From  the  S.  W.  extremity  of  Soan  to  Point  Caucedo,  on  the  eastern  side  of 
the  bay  of  St.  Domingo,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  W.  ^  N.  16}  leagues.  The 
coast  oetween  is,  in  general,  tolerably  clean ;  for  there  is  only  one  place,  the 
Playa  de  Andres  (Andrew's  Beach)  which  has  a  reef,  and  this  stretches  out  to 
sea  about  a  league ;  but  at  four  leagues  from  Soan,  is  the  little  island  of  Santa 
Catalina  (St.  Catharine)  the  eastern  part  of  which  is  narrow,  and  the  western 

$>ul- 

^  On  the  West  of  Cape  Caucodo  is  an  anchorage,  named  La  Caleta^  which  af- 
fords shelter  from  the  breeze.  The  coast  hence  sweeps  to  the  westward,  to  form 
the  great  bay  of  St.  Domingo,  at  the  bottom  of  which  the  river  Ozama  disem- 
bogues. On  the  western  bank  of  this  river,  stands  the  City  of  St.  Domingo. 
Along  all  the  front  of  the  bay  is  a  sand-bank  the  Estudeos,  having  5,  6  and .  8  fa- 
thoms of  water,  and  extending  about  half  a  mile  out  to  sea.  On  this  bank  ves- 
sels anchor,  but  with  some  risk,  especially  in  the  season  of  the  souths,  which 
raise  a  heavy  swell,  and  there  is  no  shelter  from  these  winds,  added  to  which  the 
coast  is  wild  and  rocky,  without  any  beach,  and  the  sea  breaks  on  it  with  violence. 
The  safe  anchorage  is  within  the  river,  but  it  has  a  bar  of  rock,  which  prevents 
vessels  drawing  more  than  13  feet  from  taking  it ;  and  even  these  are  in  danger 
of  striking  during  the  souths. 

To  anchor  on  the  Eatudioa  Bank,  it  is  necessary  to  coast  the  windward  land 
from  Cape  Cauceda,  at  the  distance  of  from  three  cable's  length  to  half  a  mile ; 
it  is  very  clean  and  deep,  and  only  on  the  eastern  point  of  the  river  is  there  a 
shoal  of  little  water :  this  stretches  out  -ibout  two  cable's  length,  and  to  keep 
« lear  of  it  you  must  not  haul  to  the  northward,  in  any  degree,  until  the  west 
point  of  the  river  bears  North. 

The  Cit^  of  St.  Domingo,  which  is  the  metropolis  of  the  eastern  division  of 
*,Hayti,i3  situate,  according  to  t>he  late  observations,  in  latitude  18°  28',  and  long. 
69^  50^.  It  stands  on  the  right  or  western  bank  of  the  river  Ozama,  the  entrance 
to  which  may  be  known  by  a  great  fort  on  that  pide.  To  the  westward  of  this 
fort  is  a  large  savanna,  which  forms  an  amphitheatre,  and  makes  a  beauMful  pros- 
pect. The  harbour  is  very  commodious,  and  ships  may  lie  close  to  the  shore  to 
take  in  their  lading,  by  planks  from  the  wharves. 

The  city  is  built  on  a  rocky  point.  The  streets  are  at  right  angles,  N.  and  S. 
and  E.  and  W.  and  have  footways  of  brick.  The  greatest  part  of  the  town  is 
built  of  marble  found  in  the  neighbourhood,  and  in  the  style  of  the  ancient  houses 
of  France  and  Italy.  The  more  modern  houses  are  of  clay,  which  acquires  the 
hardness  of  stone,  or  of  wood  thatched  with  the  leaves  of  the  palm-tree.  The 
cathedr^  is  spacious  and  magnificent.  The  population  is  computed  at  more  than 
20,000.^  Phe  fortifications  have  been  judiciously  constructed,  and  the  town  is 
surrounded  by  a  thick  walL 

To  sail  into  the  harbour,  run  in  directly  towards  Ae  church  with  a  fiat  steeple, 
and  to  within  a  mil  3  of  it :  here  you  will  have  15  utthoms  of  water,  nearly  op- 
posite the  eastern  point,  and  a  little  within,  off  a  small  fort  on  the  larboard.  Run 
m  directly ;  you  cannot  do  amiss,*    Towards  the  sea  there  is  no  danger. 

In  navigating  off  this  coast,  allowance  must  always  be  made  for  the  currents, 
which  set,  most  frequently,  to  the  eastward ;  and  there  is,  very  commonly,  an 
indraught  into  the  Bay  of  Nave,  to  the  west,  which  must,  of  course,  in  some  de- 
gree, affect  the  navigation  towards  that  of  St.  Domingo. 


Remarks  and  Directions  for  St,  Domingo  by  Capt.  Mackellar. 

"  The  anchorage  is  about  ti^ree-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  is  open 
to  all  winds  from  S.  S.  £  i^  E.  to  ^<.,W.  by  W.  and,  whei||^he  sea-breeze  is  at  all  to 


*  If  naa  been  aaid,  that  since  this  description  was  written,  the  depth  of  the  harbour  has  been 
reduce-*  by  an  accumulatioo  of  sand ;  caution  in  entering  it  is  therefore  necessary. 


.  « 


246 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


tho  southward,  there  ia,  of  course,  n  very  heavy  swell.  The  bottom  is  of  Mack 
sand  and  mud,  apparently  a  good  holding  ground.  Ships  intending  to  anchor 
here,  and  being  round  Point  Niaao,  with  the  tower  in  sight,  ought  to  keep  well 
to  tho  eastward;  and  when  the  tower  bears  N.  N.  W.  thev  may  steer  for  It, 
keeping  it  in  that  bearing,  until  within  a  mile  and  a  half  of  it;  then  bring  the 
west  point  of  the  entrance  of  the  river,  on  which  stands  a  signal-tower,  to  boar 
N.  i  E.  and  in  a  line  with  some  hoiiHes  on  the  east  side  of  the  riveo;  these 
houses  stand  within  the  river's  mouth  on  a  small  ssndy  beach ;  and,  by  keeping 
them  in  one  with  the  west  point  of  the  river  bearing  N.  <!  E.  will  carry  you  intijf 
the  best  anchorage. 

"On  coming  within  a  mile  of  the  town,  you  will  get  soundings  of  40  or  50  fa- 
thoms ;  the  next  cast  15;  then  10,  and  from  that  it  shoalens  gradually  to  the 
shore.  The  bank  being  very  steep,  I  should  recommend  to  ships  having  tho 
wind  free,  to  shorten  sail  in  good  time,  and  run  in  with  their  sails  clued  up,  by 
doing  this  you  will  get  your  soundings  true  :  and,  so  soon  as  in  8  or  9  fathoms, 
let  go  your  anchor,  not  waiting  to  round  to,  as  there  is  but  little  room. 

"The  east  point  of  the  entrance  of  the  river  is  a  flat  rocky  point,  and  stretches 
considerably  out  farther  than  the  west  point.  The  east  pomt  will  be  the  nearest 
land  to  you  when  you  anchor,  bearing  about  N.  E.  The  whole  of  the  town  is 
on  the  west  side  of  the  river,  and  has  been  well  fortified,  but  the  fortifications  at 
present  are  out  of  repair.  The  river  forms  an  excellent  harbour  inside,  but  has 
a  bar  of  solid  rock  at  its  entrance,  with  never  more  than  13i  feet  water  on  it. 
The  pilots  here  aflirm  that  the  anchorage  outside  is  perfectl3'  safe ;  in  my  opinion 
it  may  be  well  enough  to  stop  a  day  or  two  in  that  season  of  the  year  when  the 
weather  is  settled ;  but  not,  on  any  account,  should  a  ship  anchor  here  during  the 
hurricane  months. 

"  I  had  no  opportunity  of  determining  the  situation  of  this  place,  while  lying 
here.    I  got  the  latitude  at  anchor  by  two  stars,  one  on  the  north,  and  the  other 
on  the  south ;  they  gave  the  anchorage  18°  27',  and  the  town  vas  nearly  a  mile,^; 
north  of  us.    I  should  say  the  latitude  of  the  town  was  about  18°  28',  but  not  to 
be  depended  upon. 

Point  Nisao  is  the  western  point  of  the  Bay  oPSt.  Domingo;  and  to  clear  it  in 
going  out  from  that  anchorage,  you  must  steer  S.  by  W.  6r  S.  S.  W.  and  having 
run  14  miles  on  either  of  these  courses,  you  will  be  to  the  southward  of  it. 

From  Nisao  Point  the  coast  tends  about  S.  W.  and  W.  S.  W.  and  is  so  clear 
that  you  may  run  along  it  at  less  than  two  miles.  It  then  swigifps  to  the  west- 
ward towards  Nave  Bay,  in  which  there  are  various  harbours  ana  anchorages. 

Salinas  Point,  on  the  east  side  of  Nave  Bay,  is  in  latitude  18°  12',  long.  70° 
36'.  From  this  point  the  coast  exte-ds  to  the  N.  E.  a  mile  and  a  half,  to  Caldera 
Point,  where  a  large  bight  begins  to  tui-m.  Here  is  an  inlet  of  two  mile^  to  the 
east,  in  which  every  class  of  vessels  may  anchor  in  the  greatest  securitj^  sheltered 
from  both  wind  and  sea.  The  mouth  of  this  harbour  (that  is,  tho  space  which 
intervenes  between  Calderj^.Point  and  the  nearest  land)  is  half  a  mile  wide,  but 
the  pood  and  deep  channel  is  reduced  to  a  cable's  length ;  for  a  rocky  shoal,  at 
the  edge  of  which  there  are  4^  fathoms  water,  stretches  out  about  three  cable's 
length  from  the  coast ;  and  another  of  the  same  kind,  and  with  the  same  depth 
of  water  at  its  edge,  runs  out  to  half  a  cable  from  Caldera  Point.  Tfie  depth  of 
water  in  this  channel  is  from  7  to  8  fathoms,  on  oozy  sand.  Although  this  har- 
bour is  large,  the  ledge  of  rocks  which  border  the  coast  rounds  the  whole  interior 
of  it,  and  reduces  it  much  ;  it  is  also  farther  reduced  by  various  rocky  shoals  in 
the  very  anchorage,  but  they  have  between  them  good  and  deep  channels.  As 
these  shoals  obstruct  it  so  much,  it  is  extremely  difficult,  even  with  a  good  knowl- 
edge of  it,  to  enter  it  under  sail,  and  totally  impossible  if  you  are  not  acquainted 
witii  it.  In  addition  to  this,  on  account  of  the  narrowness  of  the  channel,  you  ' 
cannot  work  in,  and  therefore  no  one  should  enter  into  this  bight  otherwise  than 
by  warping  or  towing ;  having  previously  anchored  to  the  north  of  Caldera  Point, 
and  at  about  a  cable's  length  from  it.  In  order  to  this,  you  must  keep  wit^n 
two  cable's  length  fromnSalinas  Point,  and  preserve  the  sfeme  distance  unj^  J^ 
are  past  a  small  point,  which  the  coast  forms  between  Salinas  and  Caldera  Pointy 
which  is  foul,  and  sends  out  a  rocky  shoal,  on  which  there  is  not  more  than  2  or 


SfatI 
you 
mak^ 
foroj 
tacki 
outsit 
and 
farthi 
'♦FrJ 
Ocoal 
whicll 
the  ar 
loose  I 
nearl 
trees 
whicll 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


247 


» 


9  fathoms  water.  Having;  passed  that  point,  which  is  called  Rancheraa  Point, 
you  may  run  within  Icsa  than  one  cable's  length  or  the  coast,  if  you  choose  to 
make  Caldcra  Point,  and  anchor  in  its  vicinity.  If  the  wind  is  not  favourable 
for  obtaining  this  situation,  you  may  tack  in,  but  take  care  on  both  boards,  to 
tack  in  8  or  10  fathoms,  that  you  may  keep  clear  of  the  ledges.  If  once  anchored 
outside,  you  must  get  a  warp  carried  out  b^  your  boats  (which  must  also  examine 
and  ascertain  the  proper  channel)  and  having  warped  two  or  three  cable's  length 
farther  in,  you  will  be  in  a  very  secure  and  well  sheltered  anchorage. 
^  From  Caldera  Point  the  coast  tends  towards  the  N.  W.  to  the  Point  and  River  of 
Ocoa  ;  whence  it  returns  towards  the  N.  E.  and  forms  a  very  extensive  roadstead, 
which  is  sheltered  from  the  brcev;s :  but  the  bank,  which  is  of  sand,  is  so  steep,  that 
the  anchors  arc  apt  to  drag,  and  the  cables  sometimes  fail,  being  damaged  by  tlie 
loose  stones  which  are  in  the  bottom.  From  these  reasons  vessels  anchor  very 
near  the  land,  and  send  a  cable  ashore,  which  they  make  fast  to  some  of  the  palm 
trees  that  are  on  the  bunk,  having  also  a  cable  laid  out  for  the  changes  of  wind 
which  take  place  in  tiie  night  from  the  W.  and  W.  N.  W,  and  which  render  it 
necessary  for  those,  who  take  this  anchorage,  to  wait  until  the  breeze  comes  in, 
which  happens  at  10  A.  M.     With  tlio  breeze  you  leave  Ocoa  Point  well  pre- 

Ertred  to  receive  the  gusts  of  wind  which  come  oil*  the  coast,  for  they  are  very 
eavy. 

From  Ocoa  Roadstead  the  coast  follows  to  the  North  for  4  miles,  and  then  to 
the  west  eight  more,  where  it  begins  to  take  to  the  South,  to  farm  tlie  west  coast 
or  shore  of  the  great  bay. 

Near  (lie  turn  where  the  coajt  begins  to  descend  to  the  South,  there  is  a  har- 
bour named  Escorulido  or  Hidden  Ilarbour,  which  lies  nearly  N.  W.  from  Sa- 
linas Point.  The  mouth  of  this  is  jmore'tiiaa  half  a  mile  in  width,  and  to  enter  it 
you  must  keep  near  its  south  points  which  is  clean  ;  and  the  water  is  so  deep  that 
at  half  a  cable  from  it  there  are  5^  and  6  fathoms.  A  reef  stretches  out  a  cable's 
length  from  the  north  point.  Half  a  mile  within  the  harbour,  and  in  the  direc- 
'  tion  of  the  middle  of  its  mouth,  there  is  a  rocky  shoal,  which  is  two  cables  in 
extent  fr«m  N.  to  S.  and  one  from  E.  to  W.  and  upon  which  a  vessel  must  run, 
if  keeping  in  the  middle  of  the  harfiour,  and  steering  N.  W.  To  avoid  it,  yoit 
must  keep  within  two  cable's  length  of  tlie  south  shore,  and  anchor  about  half  a 
mile  within  the  harbour,  but  not  farthar  in  with  large  vessels,  for  the  depth  di- 
minishes so  that  at  two  cables  farther  in,  there  arc  only  ITi  feet  of  water.  You 
can  also  anchor  tf  the  north  of  the  shoal,  in  5  fathoms,  taking  care  not  to  run 
farther  in  than  3  or  4  cables'  ieiuth  from  the  mouth.  In  fine  weather  this  harbour 
IS  excellent  for  vessels,  which  ao  Bot  draw  more  than  13  feet,  which  may  enter, 
and  be  sheltered  from  all  winds.  Frigates  and  ships  of  the  line  remain  always 
exposed  to  some  swell  from  the  S.  ^.  and  had  better  be,  in  this  case,  near  the 
south,  than  the  north  part  of  it. 

BEAT  A  POINT,  or  LITTLE  CAPE  MONaON,  is  the  southernmost 
point  of  Hayti.  Its  bearing  and  distance  from  Fuilta  de  Salinas  are  about  S. 
W.  i  W.  sixteen  leagues.  Of  the  coast  between  we  have  no  particular  descrip- 
tion. Eight  miles  to  the  north-eastward  of  Bcata  Point,  is  Cape  Mongon,  and 
between  th^e  points  appears  the  high  mountainous  land  of  Bauruco. 

ISLE  of  BEATA. — This  island  lies  to  the  south  of  Beata  Point,  and  is  one 
league  and  a  half  in  length  from  north  to  south,  and  about  two  miles  broad  from 
east  to  west.  It  is  low  and  covered  with  bifehes.  There  is  a  breaker  off  the  N. 
by  E.  side  of  it,  stretching  towards  Cape  Mongon,  at  the  extremity  of  which  is 
a  white  shoal,  that  veiy  much  narrows  tlie  passage  between  Beata  and  the  shore. 
In  the  passage  are  but  three  fathoms  of  water.  There  is  anchorage  to  the  west- 
ward of  Beata,  between  it  and  the  shore,  in  7,  8,  and  10  fathoms,  sandy  and 
weedy  bottom,  with  the  N.  W.  end  bearing  about  N.  by  E.  or  N.  N.  E.  one  mile, 
and  the  S.  W.  end  S.  by  W.  four  miles. 

East  of  the  isle  the  water  is  deep,  and  there  is  no  ground  at  a  short  distance 
froq^  it  wjth  50  fathoms  of  line.  There  is,  nevertheless,  «  shoal  stretching  from 
the  S.*W.  point,  to  which  a  small  birth  should  be  giv'en,  as  there  are  no  more 
than  4  fathoms  of  water  west,  three  cables'  lengths  from  tlie  point.    When  the 


I 


■■  » 


248 


BLUNrS   AMERICAN   COAST   PltX>T. 


latter  bears  E  B.  E.  you  may  haul  up  from  the  N.  W.  end.    In  the  <  achurage 
.there  is  good  fishing. 

The  Frayles  or  Friars,  a  number  of  steep  rocks  above  water,  He  weet  three 
leagues  from  Beata.  The  sea  breaks  over  part  of  them,  and  they  are  so  bold-to, 
that  vessels  may  sail  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  vound ;  but  it  will  be  prudent 
not  to  approach  within  a  mile. 

Near  ail  the  isles  off  the  main  coast,  die  bottom  may  generally  be  seen ;  but 
near  the  shore  of  Hayti  the  water  is  very  deep.  The  coast  hereabouts  is  a  flat 
of  white  and  hard  rocks,  about  4o  feet  high,  in  which  appear  large  holes  a^ 
breakings  with  some  prickly  shrubs. 

ALTAVELA,  or  tlie  Little  Mount,  a  high  rocky  islet,  lies  at  the  distance  of  , 
five  leagues  south  from  Beata  Point,  in  latitude,  17*^  28',  and  longitude  about 
7lo  23/,    rp[,Q  isigt  is  peaked,  but  its  summit  has  a  rotundity  resembling  the  up- 
per part  of  a  bell.    It  is  generally  seea  before  any  othei^and  in  the  vicinity^mr-  - 
ticularly  from  the  southward,  and  appears  like  a  dome  emerging  above  a  mist''* 
or  fog.    Being  very  bold,  it  may  be  approached  with  safety. 

At  the  distance  of  two  and  a  half  leagues  N.  N.  £•  from  Altavela,  lies  fhe% 
south  end  of  Beata  Island.  Bet  ;een  is  a  good  and  vory  deep  channel.  There 
cannot,  however,  be  any  motive  for  preferring,  a  passage  between  these  Islan^s^o 
passing  southward  of  Alto  Vela ;  and,  therefore,  vessds  bound  to  the  westward 
from  Ocoa  Bay,  may  steer  S.  S.  W.  twenty-two  and  a  half  leagues,  and  a  west 
course  will  then  lead  well  to  the  southward  of  Alta  Vela ;  a  more  southerly 
course  is,  however,  to  be  preferred,  in  order  to  avoithdangeri  shouldkthe  wind 
become  scant,  with  a  westerly  or  W.  by  N.  current,  whi^h  has  often  win  found 
to  prevail  here  with  considerable  strength. 

POINT  AGUJAS,  or  the  False  Cape,  bears  from  Beata  Point  W.N.'W.JW.  .'^ 
six  leagues,  and  from  the  Frayles  N.  W.  by  N.  three  leagues.     Cape  Lopez  l^ars  ' 
north,  true,  five  miles  from  Point  Agi^as.    The  coast  betwedh  forms  a  bay,  af- 
fording good  anchorage.    From  Gape  Lopez,  Cape  Roxo  bears  N.  by  W.^twfl' 
and  a  half  leagues,  and  between  is  the  Ensenada  sin  Fondo,  or  Bottomless  'Bay  ;'   ' 
from  this  bay  the  coast  tends  to  the  N.  W.;  apd  at  five  leagues  from  Cstpo  I^oxo, 
4»  the  mouth  of  the  Rio  de  Pedernales,  or  Petre's  Cove,  which  constituted  the  old 
limit  between  Hispaniola  and  Hayti.    At  this  pliice  h  a  good  anchorage,  which  it 
is  easy  to  take,  a  bank  here  extending  along  shore,  and  there  is  no  risk  in  nearing 
the  coast.  jg. 

From  Gape  Lopez,  the  promontory  called  Mome  12<mg-e,  a|.Red  Hill,  bears 
N.  W.  twelve  leagues.  A  league  and  a  half  to  %e  eastward  of  Mome  Rouge, 
is  the  village  of  Sale  Trou,  or  Foul  Hole,  whete  there  is  a  good  anchorage  for 
vessels  drawing  less  than  16  feet:  larger  ships  may  anchor  there,  buttj^ey  must 
lie  farther  out,  where  the  ground  is  not  so  good. 

From  Morne  Rouge  the  coast  trenches  in  a  little  to  the  northward,  then  out 
again,  E.  S.  E.  to  the  Anses  a  Pitres,  or  Pitrc  Coves.  All  the  coast  is  clear,  and 
may  be  approached  witl.  gi«at  safety,  as  noticed  above. 

There  is  good  anchorage  at  the  Anses  a  Pitres,  and  of  very  easy  access.  At 
two  miles  from  the  shore  the  water  is  very  deep.  All  the  coast  hereabout  ap- 
pears white,  being  chalky.  You  may  anchor  either  before  the  pli^n  of  Anses 
a  Pitres,  or  southward  of  a  small  cape,  before  the  mouth  of  a  river,  which  js 
considerable  enough  to  be  easily  distinguished.  The  water  is  smooth,  and  you 
will  be  well  sheltered  in  6  or  8  fathofns,  good  ground,  or  in  4  fathoms  and  better 
ground  nearer  shore. 

From  Morne  Rouge  the  coast  round  to  Gape  Jliqucmel  or  Jacmel,  <  which 
bears  from  the  former  W.  S.  W.  {  W.  twenty-nine  miles.  From  Cape  Jaqueme^ 
Gape  Marechaud  bears  N.  by  E.  {  E.  distant  rather  less  than  two  miles. 

In  approaching  Morne  Rouge  from  Gape  Jaqucmel,  it  may  be  known  by 
its  white  humtnock;}.   The  coast  in  the  space  between  fomris  several  little  creeks,    , 
wherein  small  vessels  may  anchor;  but  in  none  of  them  will  they  be  sheltered. 

JAG^UEMEL  or  JAGMEL.—Betwccn  Gape  Jacquemel  ind  Ca#e  Mare- 
chaud lies  the  Bay  of  Jacquemel,  in  the  upper  part  of  which  there  is  an^horag* 
for  shipping  of  every  class.    The  town  of  Jacquemel  stands  |t  the  head  of  th« 


BLDNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


249 


bay,  to  the  east  of  the  Rivtr  Gunche,  whicii  has  several  moutlis  in  the  beach. 
Thia  bay,  vfhich  is  two  miles  in  depth,  was  siuvtycil  by  Captain  Mackellar  and 
the  officers  of  the  British  ship  Pi«iue,  in  1817;  and  from  this  survey  it  appears 
that  in  the  middle  of  it  no  bottom  could  be  foutid  at  70  and  80  fathoms ;  but  the 
bank  around  the  coast,  which  is  about  three  cables  in  breadth,  has  from  20  to  S 
fathoms,  shoaling  to  the  land.  On  this  bank,  upon  the  N.  E.  side  of  the  bay,  is 
a  dangerous  reef,  nearly  half  a  mile  long,  the  outer  edge  of  which  is  three  ca- 
bles' length  from  the  shore.  To  the  westward  of  this  reef,  and  opposite  the 
^town,  is  the  anchorage,  having  from  5  and  7  to  3,  and  in  one  spot  i^  fathoms. 
You  may  sail  in  witli  a  remarkable  white  cliff,  the  last  oliff  on  the  western  side* 
bearing  from  W.  it  N.  to  N.  W.  i  N.  until  the  wharf,  near  the  middle  of  the  town, 
comes  on  with  the  eoatern  side  of  an  old  battery,  bearing  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  and, 
'With  this  mark  on,  you  luff  up  to  the  anchorage,  which,  at  half  a  mile  to  the 
southward  of  the  towp,  has  the  depths  above  mentioned. 

^'  Jacquemel  Harbour  may  be  distinguished  at  a  distance  by  the  sudden  cut-off 
or  drop  of  a  hill,  seen  over  another  long  hill  at  tlie  upper  part  of  the  harbour. 
Running  in  towards  that  drop  will  lead  directly  to  the  entrance. 
BAYENETTE.— From  Cape  Jacquemel,  CJape  Bayenette  lies  nearly  W. )  S. 
*  distant  Ave  leagues.  The  latter  may  be  known  by  the  white  hummocks  and  cliffs, 
on  its  extremity.  This  cape  forms  the  south  side  of  a  bay  of  the  same  name, 
which  is  open  to  the  S.  Er  Its  name  Bayenctte,  signifies  Clear  Bay,  and  is 
iiilppospd  to  have  been  given  from  its  great  dVpth  of  water,  and  being  entirely 
clear  of  shoals.  This  b^  is  unsheltered,  but  there  is  anchorage  on  the  north  side 
near  the  shore. 

LA  VACHE. — From  Cape  Bayenette  to  the  east  point  of  La  Vache,  the 
bofuiing  and  distance  are  W.  S.  W.  i  W.  thirti-en  and  a  half  leagues.  The  isle 
is^iree  leagues  long,  and  about  one  broad;  it  is  hilly,  and  at  tlic  distance  of  six 
^r  seven  leagues,  appears  like  an  assemblage  of  small  islands.  The  south  side  is 
,^m>ld,  and  along  the  north  a  reef  extendi  to  the  distance  of  a  cable's  length. 
Trom  off  the  east  p^t  is  a  white  shoal,  <'onnected  with  a  reef,  extending  from 
an  islet  to  the  N.  "Wr  called  La  Folte,  or  the  Fool's  Rock. 

From  the  Fool's  Rock  to  the  N.  VV.  end  of  La  Vache,  there  is  a  range  of  islets 
and  shoals,  among ,«vhieh  are  some  narrow  passages.  On  the  north  side  of  La 
Vache  is  a  bay,  called  the  Bale  de  Feret,  where  there  is  good  anchorage,  but  it 
is  accessible  only  to  those  who  are  well  acquainted.  The  northernmost  of  the 
islets  above  meiponed,  is  Grosse  Caye,  called  also  Caye  de  I'Eau  or  Water  Key, 
which  is  readily  known  by  a  great  tuft  of  large  trees.  It  is  bold-to ;  and  at  some 
distance  from  its  north  side  tlier<>  is  good  anchorage,  in  from  15  to  SO  fathoms. 
The  western  end  of  La  Vache  forms  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  great 
bay,  called  Bay  of  the  Cayes ;  and  from  its  S.  W.  point  called  Point  Ditmant, 
Point  Abacou  bears  nearly  W.  by  S.  five  miles.  In  miu-channel  between,  there 
is  a  depth  of  25  fathoms,  thence  decreasing  towards  the  island.  From  the  S.W. 
point  of  the  isle  a  white  rocky  spit  extends  to  the  south,  having  from  7  to  5  fa- 
thoms over  it,  at  about  two  miles  from  shore. 


Remarks  on  the  anchorages  wUhin  La  Vache,  by  Captain  Mackellar, 

1817. 


•*^"  The  N.  W.  point  of  La  Vache  is  in  latitude  IRO  5'  12" N.  longitude,  hy  chro- 
nometer, &c.  730  43'  1 5"  W.  Variation,  6°  20'  E.  Ships  coming  ft  '»m  the  west- 
ward, and  intending  to  anchor  here,  ought  to  round  Aboucou  Point,  Hi  ?  good 
mile  off,  as  a  reef  stntclies  to  the  S.  E.  to  nearly  that  distance  from  it.  Having 
rounded  this  reef,  tliere  is  nothing  in  the  way,  and  you  may  steer  for  the  N.  W. 
point  of.  La  Vache.  At  halfway  between  it  and  Aboucou  Point  there  are 
noundings  in  15  fathoms,  and  the  bottom  thence  shoalens  gradually  to  the  island. 
The  best  anchorage  here  is  with  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  island  bearing  E.  N.  E. 
in  5  fathoms ;  vou  will  then  be  about  three-quarters  of  n  mile  from  the  shore,  on 
4  32 


«t%i 


'250 


liLUM   :?  AMKKICAN  COAST  I'lLOT. 


H  wliite  sandy  boltom.  The  somnlinga  all  over  this  part  are  so  very  regular, 
that  3'ou  can  hardly  err  in  anclioring  anywhere,  so  long  as  you  keep  the  N.  W- 
point  of  the  island  bearing  to  the  northward  of  cast.  From  the  N^W.  point 
to  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  island  the  soundings  are  not  so  regular,  and  strangers 
ought  not  to  come  nearer  than  in  7  fathoms,  especially  near  tlie  S.  W.  point,  for 
a  reef  stretches  from  it  to  the  southward  not  less  than  two  miles,  having  very 
foul  ground,  with  irregular  soundings,  to  tipwards  of  a  mile  or  more.  There- 
fore, ships,  coming  from  the  eastward,  and  intending  to  anchor,  ought  to  keep 
Aboucou  Point  bearing  west  until  the  west  point  of  La  Vache  bears  north.| 
They  may  then  haul  in  to  the  northward,  and  steer  for  the  anchorage. 

"  About  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  town  of  Aur  Cayes,  which  stands  to 
the  north,  there  are  three  small  white  cliffs,  close  to  the  sea-side ;  and  the  mark 
I  have  generally  run  in  and  out  by  is,  the  easternmost  cliff  bearing  north,  apd  m*' 
a  line  with  a  small  round  hill,  on  the  highest  land  behind  it;  and  anchoring  'V^ftK 
this  mark  nearly  on  the  N.  W.  point  of  La  Vache  bearing  E.N.E.  orN.E.byEv 

'•  The  whole  of  this  large  bay  to  the  westward  of  La  Vache  is  clear,  Jind  the 
soundings  very  regular,  while  you  keep  the  M'est  end  of  the  island  bearing  to  the 
northward  of  east.    To  the  northward  of  this  1  had  no  opportunity  of  sounding, 
although  I  am  well  aware  that,  between  La  Vache  and  Aux  Cayes,  the  b«y  is  * 
covered  with  large  reefs,  and  several  are  above  water."  •  ,. 

Tiie  CAYES,  St.  LOUIS,  &c.— Point  Aboucou  is  composed  of  two  poin# 
or  reefs,  which  stretch  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  seaward ;  but  you  m^y  pass, 
without  fear,  at  the  distance  of  half  •e^,  league,  and  will  fin^  no  ground  witi^  a  line 
of  40  fathoms.    The  town  of  the  Cayes  bears  from  Aboucou  Point,  neany  north, 
four  leagues.     In  sailing  towards  this  place,  and  approaching  Point  Diamant, 
1)cfore  notired,  you  will  not  find  the  white  ground  for  more  than  a  quarter  of  a 
lea;5ue  from  it;  and  the  ground  is  good  in  6  or  7  fathoms.     With  Point  Diam^i 
l>eai'ing  east,  thcr«  are  soundings  all  across.     There  is  good  anchorage  to  the,, 
■westof  Diamant  Point,  and  farther  to  the  norlhward,  eppositc  a  "^andy  cove,  irj^ 
from  6  to  7  fathoins,  bottom  of  mud  and  sand.  ^ 

To  go  into  Aux  Cayes,  you  range  along  the  N.  W.  point  of  La  Vache,  in  six 
•fathoms  water ;  and  you  steer  nearly  N.  by  E.  to  make  on  your  starboard  hand 
the  white  hummocks  oTCavaillon.  You  will  then  leave  on  the  larboard  hand  a 
large  reef,  suri-ounded  with  a  white  shoal,  which  takes  up  almost  all  the  middle 
of  the  bay.  When  you  have  brought  the  town  to  bear  N.  ^^iW.  you  must 
liaul  up  two  points  to  windward  of  the  town,  standing  towardilNhe  Company's 
Islet,  where  you  may  anchor  if  you  do  not  mean  to  go  into  the  road  ;  if  you  do, 
you  shorten  sail  a  mile  from  the  shoi-e,  and  wait  for  a  niiot  The  channel  is 
two-thirds  of  a  cable  in  breadth.  Ships  drawing  more  than  IS  feet  vfHter  can- 
not go  in;  thoseof  15and  17  feet  water  always  anchor  at  Cbateaudin,  half  a 
league  to  the  westward,  and  which  is  separated  by  shoals  from  the  port. 

To  anchor  in  the  road  of  Cbateaudin,  (coming  from  the  mooring  of  La  Vache) 
W.  or  W.  N.  W.  off  Diamant  Point,  in  8  or  11  fathoms,  you  must  steer  direct- 
ly for  Torbcc,  which  is  a  small  town,  very  easily  distinguished  in  the  cod  of  the 
hay  :  this  track  will  be  about  N.  \V.  "When  you  are  within  about  two  miles  of 
the  shore,  you  will  discover  a  little  white  flag,  which  is  on  a  shoal;  you  double 
it  to  the  westward  at  about  half  a  cable's  length,  leaving  jt  on  the  starboard  hand ; 
when  you  have  brought  it  to  bear  south,  you  steer  along  the  coast  for  the  road 
of  Cbateaudin,  and  anchor  in  0  or  7'  fathoms  mud.  In  all  this  passage,  if  you 
keep  the  proper  channel,  you  cannot  h.ive  less  than  from  7  to  9  fathoms,  and  of- 
ten 12  and  16,  muddy  ground. 

In  advancing  towards  the  Tapion  of  Cavaillon,  you  must  hot  approach  too 
near  its  S.  E.  side,  as  a  shoal  of  only  6  feet  water,  called  Le  Mouton.  or  the 
Sheep,  lies  S.  E.  fr«.m  i!ie  eastern  point,  »i  the  distance  of  about  half  a  mile. 
There  is  a  depth  of  «  fatlroms  between  it  and  the  coast. 

CAVAILLOIS  BAY  is  spacious,  although  its  ai'tliorage  is  of  sniall  extent. 
The  coast  on  the  western  side  i»  very  sleep,  at.d  tire  bottom  fUll'of  rockb  ;,  but 
there  is  anchoring  ground  on  tlic  eastern  side,  opposite  a  roast  covered  vithman- 
gn  veF,  which  may  be  approached  without  fear,  the  botlwm  beii.g  clean,  with  & 
fathoms  close  to  the  shore.    This  bay  afiords  shelter  from  the  sea-breeies  by  the 


^fea 

nc 

Bi 

an 

is 

mi 

^thi 

'¥ 

*      *• 

erl 

wa 

fvri 

■■•*•■ . 

m 

/* 

let 
Th 

l^fc.'. 

vei 

'      «* 

.>j 

§ 

% 

Ke 

Jor 

• 

* 

tw 

th< 

'S'V.    ^ 

ha 

.     •»' 

mi 

^thi 

i 

^Lo 

« ■» . 

*  Vi| 

•    >' 

Mil 

■*     ■■ 

Po 

1 

Pa 

"!i      * 

*  tui" 

J' 

mil 

bet 

•►,  # 

1 

de 

-  1 
nit 

,  Th 

Ol 

of 

, 

801 

Yc 

i- 

on 

K« 

# 

wi 

Ci 

a 

an 

T 

' 

th 

•       • 

— 

so 

th 

BLUNT  S    AM£KICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


251 


0 


^,T 


eastern  point  of  an  island,  which  leaves  a  passage  into  the  Baie  dts  Flamands, 
nett  d(^«crthed. 

BaU  ie$^lamanda,  or  Flamingo  Bay,  lies  a  quarter  of  a  league  from  Cavaillon 
Bay,  and  «xt»*nd8  upwards  towards  the  S.  E.  Its  entrance  and  shores  are  clear 
and  hold,  and  it  is  the  pl»ce  where  ships  lie  up  in  the  hurricane  months.  There 
is  a  good  careening  place,  and  anchorage  in  every  part. 

^AIB  DE  MESLE — From  Flamingo  Bay  the  raast  extends  E.  by  N.  two 
miles  to  the  Grand  Bale  du  Mesk,  all  over  which  the  anchorage  is  good ;  but,  as 
|*h6  entrance  is  broad  and  open  to  the  southward,  there  is  no  shelter  from  south- 
erly winds.     The  coast  hence  continues  its  direction  to  Point  Pascal,  half  way  to- 
wards which  is  the  Petite  Baie  du  Mesk,  in  which  a  vessel  may  anchor,  but  it 
'Vill  not  be  sheltered  even  from  the  sea-breeze. 

'%  Off  the  Great  Bay  du  Mesle  is  a  shoal,  lying  like  a  bar  across  the  bay,  and  ex- 
tending opposite  the  point,  which  is  to  the  westward  of  the  Little  Bay  du  Mesle. 
This  bank  has  ntt,  in  some  places,  more  than  from  15  to  18  feet  water ;  it  in 
Very  narrow,  and  leaves  a  passage  of  three-quarters  of  a  mile  only  between  it 
£id  the  coast.     To  the  southward  it  extends- about  half  a  league  from  shore. 

To  go  into  the  Great  Bay,  with  a  ship  drawing  more  than  15  feet,  you  must 
Keep  close  to  the  shore  on  the  western  side,  steering  by  l^oint  a  Paulin,  which 
.forms  that  side  of  the  entrance. 

•*  BAY  of  ST.  LOUIS.— The  great  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  St.  Louis  lies  be- 
tween Point  Pascal,  which  is  steep  and  wide,  and  a  little  isle  called  Orange  Key: 
-the  bearing  and  distance  from  one  to  the  othf  r  being  E.  k  N.  rather  more  than 
half  a  league.     This  isle  may  be  seen  from  th**.  entrance  of  the  Cayes,  thirteen 
'     miles  distant,  whence  it  appears  nearly  in  a  line  with  the  southern  extremities  of 
^tlie  intermediate  coant. 

About  two-thirds  of  a  mile  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Pascal  Point  is  the  Vigie  or  Ol4 

.  ^Xookout  Point ;  between  is  a  cove,  called  the  Bat  du  Paradis.     When  off  the 

f^Vigie   Point  you  will  have  th^.  whole  of  the  Bay  of  St.  Louis  in  sight.    Th6 

U6y  is  shut  in  on  the  eastern  side  by  Cape  Bonite,  which  bears  from  the  Vigio 

Point  N.  E.  i  B.  distant  one  mile  and  three  quarters. 

In  proceeding  to  the  anchorage  of  the  Bay  of  St.  Louis,  run  along  past  Point 

Pascal  and  Point  Vigie,  and  thence  along  the  western  coast  of  the  bay,  in  8  or  10 

<^  fathoms  water.    The  anchorage  is  west  of  the  Old  Fort*  about  a  quarter  of  a 

mile  from  the  western  shore,  and  so  situate  that  the  town  may  be  seen  from  it, 

between  the  OB  Fort  a-id  shore,  in  the  bottom  of  the  bay. 

tn  the  anchorage  before  the  town,  cllled  the  Little  Anchorage,  the  greatest 
4ep£h  is  5  fathoms. 

-  3.  S.  B.  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  Old  Fort,  and  west  of  Cape  Bo- 
nite, at  nearly  ^ha  same  distance,  is  a  shoal  called  Le  Mouton  (The  Sheep.) 
^  There  is  a  good  passage  between  it  and  the  shore,  as  well  as  between  it  and  tho 
Old  Fort ;  but  the  depth  of  water  is  less  on  the  eastern  than  on  the  western  sida 
of  the^bay. 

Between  Orange  Key  ^nd  the  shore,  in  a  N.  E.  direction,  there  are  two  islets  and 
some  shoffi  ground;  tne  first  of  which  next  to  Orange  Key,  is  called  Rat^a  Kty. 
¥ou  may  pass  into  the  bay  of  St.  Louis,  through  a  small  passage,  immediately 
on  the  north  side  of  this  Key. 

AQUIN  BAY.— 'One  mile'and  a  half  E.  by  N.  from  Orange  Key  is  Moustiquo 
Key,  a  little  'island  clear  of  shoals,  unless  very  close  in  shore.  You  may  pass 
without  or  within  it  at  the  distance  of  one-eighth  of  a  league,  in  10  Ijithoms. 
Cape  St.  George  is  north  of  ,\Ioustique  Key,  and  N.  W.  of  a  key,  called  Cayo 
a  Ramiers  (or  Pigeon's  Key)  which  bears  E.  by  N.  2  miles  flrom  Moustique  Key, 
and  is  known  by  a  white  hummock  rather  steep,  and  seen  at  some  distance. 
There  is  a  deep  passage  between  it  and  Moustique  Bay,  by  which  ships  pass  into 
the  great  Bay  of  Aqum. 

I      ■  t- 

*  The  Uld  Fort  ii  on  an  island  of  rocks  towards  the  middle  of  the  bay,  half  a  mile  to  tha 
aoutbwari  of  the  town.  lu  the  posaage  between  it  and  the  shore  there  is  a  depth  of  six  fti< 
thorns. 


'# 


,**: 


262 


blunt'3 


AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Souih  of  Caye  a  Raniiers  is  a  eboal  extending  half  a  league,  which  has,  on  its 
middle  part,  only  9  fathoms.  East  of  the  same  key  is  a  small  isle,  called  L'An- 
guille,  or  the  Eel,  and  to  the  N.  E.  is  another,  called  Le  Ragale;  the  three  form 
an  equilateral  triangle,  having  each  side  half  a  league  in  length. 

£•  N.  E.  three-quarters  of  a  league  from  Caye  a  Ramiers,  lies  the  west  end  of 
the  Great  Key  of  Aquin,  which  is  two  miles  in  length,  and  distinguished  by  two 
very  remarkable  white  hummocks.  It  extends  E.  and  £.  hy  N.  true,  and  it^ 
south  side  is  hold-to  ;  but  the  white  shoals  of  L'Anguiile  extend  to  its  western 
point,  so  as  to  prevent  a  passage  between  it  and  Caye  a  Ramiers,  for  ships  that;,  ' 
draw  more  than  12  or  14  feet. 

East  of  Aquin  Key,  at  the  distance  of  a  short  quarter  of  a  league,  is  a  white        , 
insulated  rock,  called  Le  Dmmant,  or  the  Diamond ;  to  the  eastward  of  this,  at^ 
the  distance  of  two  cables'  length,  is  the  point  of  Morne  Rogvs,  or  Red  Hill. '  '     '^ 
Thus  the  eastern  end  of  Aquin,  the  Diamond  Rock,  and  the  point  of  Morne     ^ 
Rouge,  form  the  two  passages  into  the  bay.    All  the  i'-Jands  and  shores  are  bold.     4 
In  the  Morne  Rouge  Passage  are  5  and  6  fathoms  water ;  and  m  that  between 
Aquin  Key  and  the  Diamond,  6,  7  and  8.    The  bay  is  extensive,  and  trenchdl 
considerably  inland,  but  the  water  is  shallow,  and  there  are  only  3  fathoms  at  a    ,  ^ 
distance  from  shore.  4 

The  point  of  Morne  Rouge  may  be  readily  known  at  a  distance  by  three  very  , 
high  white  hummocks,  called  the  Tapions  of  Aquin,  which  together  form  agrei^ 
cape,  imder  which  is  anchorage  in  10  and  12  fathoms,  at  a  distance  from  land. 
This  bottom  continues  as  far  as  the  Petite  Bale  des  Flamands,  or  Littles  Flamingo 
Bay,  which  is  W.  N.  W.  a  league  and  a  quarter  from  the  Tapions  of  Aquin.  '  • 

To  enter  the  passage  into  Aquin  Bay,  between  Caye  a  Ramiers  and  Moustique    '^ 
Key,  before  mentioned,  steer  N.  N.  E.  so  as  to  get  into  the  mid-channel  between  ^ 
the  shore  and  the  island.    Having  doubled  Key  a  Ramiers,  you  will  see  La  Ra- 
Kde,  which  is  a  very  low  isle  of  sand ;  leave  this  on  the  starboard  side,  keeping  '^.  ,^ 
in  mid-channel  between  it  and  the  shore ;  then  haul  up  for  Aquin  Key,  as  much  « ' ,. . 
as  the  wind  will  permit,  and  an-  hor  to  the  northward  of  it,  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  <k     #. 
farther  in,  at  pleasure.  ;         ^ 


GENERAL  REMARKS.  ^ 

Observe  that  from  Point  Pascal  all  the  capes  are  broken  und  steep,  and  fjTom 
the  S.  ai  d  S.  E.  and  as,  on  all  this  coast,  the  land  is  white,  many  white  hum-" 
mocks  v«  ill  be  seen.  Aquin  has  two,  above-mentioned ;  but  the  easternmost  and 
highest  are  those  of  Morne  Rouge,  and,  with  attention,  it  will  bfe  impossible  to 
misttike  them.  From  the  point  of  Morne  Rouge,  or  the  hummocks  of  Aquin, 
the  true  direction  of  the  coast,  after  having  trenched  in  to  form  the  Petite  Bale 
des  Flamands,  is  East,  southerly,  10  leagues  to  Cape  Baienet.  The  whole  of 
this  coast  is  free  from  danger,  and  bold-to,  but  has  no  bay  or  anchorage,  or  shelter 
firom  the  common  breeze.  Two  leagues  and  a  half  westward  of  Baienet,  the 
CoaKt  is  iron-bound,  and  the  water  near  it  of  great  depth. 

POINT  ABACOU  to  CAPE  TIBURON— From  Point  Abacou  to  Point  a 
Oravois,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  west,  southerly,  9,!^  leagues.  The  latter 
Is  iow,  not  easily  distinguishable,  and  has  frequently  been  mistaken  for  the  land 
of  Portmlut,  a  small  cove,  lying  a  league  farther  to  the  N.  N.  W. 

From  1*0101  Gravios,  N.  W.  by  N.  4  leagues,  there  is  a  bight  of  half  a  league, 
in  which  anchorage  may  be  found.  This  bight  lies  about  two  miles  to  the  south- 
ward of  Les  CotteauT..  From  thia  spot  to  a  large  hummock  called  Les  Chardon- 
tritrSf  which  is  very  remarkable  at  a  distance,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  nearly 
W.  N.  W.  10  miles. 

From  Les  Chardonnisto  the  Fond  des  Anghis,  or  English  Bottom,  the  coast 
extends  W.  by  N.  4  miles,  and  a  bay  thence  rounds  to  within  a  league  and  a  half 
of  PoinU  du  Finn  Boucan  or  Boucan  Point.  All  this  part  is  safe,  but  it  has  no 
anchorage ;  a  siiip  may  indeed  anchor  very  near  the  land,  but  is  every  where  ex- 
posed  to  the  sea  breeze. 


•0 


>• 


BLUNT^S    AMBRlCAN    COAST    PILOT. 


263 


From  Boucan  Point  to  Point  Burgos  which  is  a  low  point,  the  coast  tends  west- 
Ward  4  miles.  Between  these  places,  off  a  point  called  Aigrettes  Point,  there 
are  some  white  shoals,  rocks  and  breakers ;  but  their  extent  is  not  more  than  half 
a  league. 


The  Northern  Coast  qjrHayti,  or  St.  Domingo,  between  Cape  Raphael 

and  St.  Nicolas'  Mole. 

[Variation,  generallyt  ahout  5°  East.] 

CAPE  RAPHAEL  is  of  moderate  height,  and  lies  in  or  about  lat.  19*^  «',  and 
long.  68°  5£'.  It  has  already  been  described  in  page  244.  From  this  cape  to 
Cape  Samana  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.'  W.  ^  W.  nearly  7  leagues.  Be- 
tmreen  the  two  is  Samana  Bay,  about  10  leagues  deep,  so  that  you  can  scarcely 
see  the  land  at  the  bottom  of  it ;  but  what  appears  to  the  eye  is  very  high  double 
land. 

CAPE  SAMANA  is  a  broken  rugged  point  of  land,  which  appears,  from  a 
great  distance,  like  a  ship  with  her  topsails  down,  and  seems  not  to  Join  the  main, 
but  on  a  nearer  approach,  this  shape  changes.  The  cape  makes  with  two  points* 
both  alike,  bluff  and  steep,  about  the  height  of  Beachy  Head,  in  the  English 
Channef,  ^ut  not  so  white :  they  are  4  or  5  miles  asunder,  with  a  small  bay  and 
harbour  between  them.  nAt  two  or  three  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  western- 
moat  point,  there  is  very  high  land,  which  falls  down  to  the  water-side,  and  is 
t^tMe  as  high  as  Cape  Samana. 

SAMANA  BAY. — There  is  good  anchorage  in  Banistreor  Levantados  Road, 
on  the  south  side  of  the  peninsula  of  Samana.  In  advancing  for  this  place,  ob- 
serve that,  when  Cape  Samana  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  about  a  league,  it  appears 
like  ttoro  points,  the  westernmost  of  which,  as  you  come  farther  in,  you  should 
bring  open  with  a  white  spot  of  sandy  ground,  .rhich  may  at  first  be  mistaken 
for  one  of  the  sand-keys,  although  it  is  connected  with  the  main  shore.  In  order 
to  ascertain  the  true  point,  observe  that,  in  coming  about  it,  it  will  appear  :is  if  a 
small  rock  were  lying  off  it,  which,  on  a  nearer  approach,  will  be  found  to  join 
to  the  land.  The  soundings  are  uncertain.  Having  well  shot  into  the  bay,  you 
may  have  10  fathoms,  and  then  no  ground  in  20. 

..  Or,  being  off  Cape  Samana,  and  intending  for  this  port,  sail  S.  S.  W.  three  or 
four  miles,  along  shore,  (you  may  go  within  a  mile,  for  it  is  bold-to,)  to  Poini 
Felandras  or  Btm  Point,  which  has  two  or  fhree  black  rocks  lying  near  it.  When 
at  the  length  of  this  point,  steer  thence  west  about  half  a  mile,  and  you  will  leave 
three  keys,  which  are  high  and  woody,  a  mile  from  you  on  your  larboard  side. 
With  tine  westernmost  of  the  three  keys  bearing  S.  S.  W.  you  may  anchor  In 
15  fathoms,  half  a  mile  from  shore,  and  have  good  water:  then  Levantados  or 
Banistre  Key  will  bear  W.  by  N.  one  mile  off. 

There  is  good  easy  riding  in  this  harbour,  in  from  7  to  S  fathoms :  you  may 
also  find  good  fresh  water  in  many  places,  with  plenty  of  fish  and  fowl.  Hers 
is  commonly  a  fresh  breeze  from  the  eastward  all  day,  apd  open  to  the  north. 

The  preceding  paragraphs  are  from  the  French  of  the  Count  Ckastenet  de 
Puysegur,  &;c.    The  following  from  the  Spuiiish  Derrotero. 

SAMANA  BAY. — From  Cape  Raphael  the  coast  tends  nearly  West,  and 
forms  a  gulf,  nhut  in  to  the  N.  W.  by  the  peninsula  of  Samana.  The  east  point 
of  this  peninsula,  named  Cape  Samana,  lies  7  leagues  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  fl'om 
Cape  Raphael.  This  bay,  which  is  more  than  11  leagues  in  extent,  from  East 
to  West,  and  4  from  North  to  South,  is  obstructed  and  almost  shut  up  by  a  great 
reef,  which  extends  from  the  south  coast,  and  so  far  to  the  north,  that  a  channel 
of  only  S  miles  in  width  remains  between  it  and  the  peninsula  of  Samana:  The 
northern  extremity  of  this  reef  is  marluidby  seme  keys  or  islets,  the  largest  of 
which,  called  Cayo  Levantfidos,  must  be  left  on  the  larboard  hand  on  going  into 
the  bay.    Within  there  arc  several  anchorages,  but  little  frequented,  as  there  i» 


254 


BLUNt's    AM£RICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


scarcely  any  commerce  here.  The  first  anchorai;e  is  on  the  coast  of  the  periin- 
4(ilA,  and  near  the  entrance  of  the  bay ;  it  is  named  the  Carenero  Chko,  (or  Little 
Carenas;e) :  to  enter  and  anchor  here,  it  is  nt^essary  to  approach  within  half  a 
mile  of  Point  Velandras,  which  is  the  S.  E.  point  of  the  peninsula,  »n(\  to  keep 
along  the  eds;*  of  the  coast  at  this  distance,  until  sheltered  by  Vinos  Point  when 
you  may  anchor  in  6  fath<»ms,  takiiig  care  to  keep  half  a  mile  from  a  key,  named 
the  Key  of  the  Caren-ro  Chico.,  which  is  at  the  west  part  of  the  road,  and  has,  to 
the  south  of  it,  either  four  or  five  small  islets.  Behind  this  key,  and  btttwecn  it 
and  the  coast,  is  the  proper  anchorage  ;  but  it  is  much  narrowed  by  shoals,  and 
must  be  entered  by  warping.  Point  Vinas  is  easily  known,  as  it  bears  true  North 
from  the  west  part  of  Levantados  Key.  In  the  entrance  there  is  nothing  to  be 
feared,  because  there  is  no  danger  but  what  may  be  well  seen  ;  and  only  inward", 
from  Point  Vinas  is  there  a  shoal,  having  on  it  two  feet  of  water  :  to  keep  clear  ,■  ^ 
of  this  shoal,  bear  in  mind  that  it  bears  Rast,  a  long  mile  from  Vinas  Point.  By 
following  the  coast,  as  we  have  directed,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile,  you  will  '^ 
go  safe  from  it ;  but,  for  greater  certainty,  keep  something  to  starboard,  when 
you  sound  in  5  fathoms  water ;  for  in  the  channel,  between  it  and  the  coast,  there 
are  6}  and  7  fathoms. 

A  league  and  a  half  to  the  west  of  the  Carenero  Chico,  is  the  Puerto  de  Sta.- 
Barbara,  or  of  Samana :  the  anchorage   here   is   very   narrow  at  the  entrance,    ^ 
which  is  formed  by  a  great  reef,  that  runs  out  to  the  east  from  Point  Escondido, 
the  S.  W.  point  of  the  harbour  ;  and  on  this  reef,  rise  several  keys  or  islets,  of 
which  the  outermost  is  named   Tropes/on ;  the  second  is  tjje  Greater  Carenero^ 
and  the  third,  Cayo  Esc- 'dido,  is  very  near  the  Point  Esedndido,  on  the  west. 
There  is  not  only  thi     -eef  at  the  entrance,  for  the  nkorth  coast  sends  off  two, .  > 
which  stretch  far  to  the  south,  and  form   two  bays:  of  theSPthe  first  is  called  !^* 
Aguada,  or  Watering  Bay,  and  it  has  Point  Gomero  for  the  N.  E.  point  of  itd  en^ 
trance.     The  second  rnadsted  lies  between  the  two  reefs.     In  Aguada  Bay  there 
is  good  anchorage,  in  6  fat!4oms,  clay ;  the  second  anchorage  is  very  narrow,  but    ' 
has  7  fathoms  water.    To  tl  -3  west  of  those  two  reefs  and   roadsteads,  lie^  the   ** 
principal  harbour  and  anchorage  of  Samana,  with  a  depth  of  5  and  6  fa|lfems,  «< 
on  clay,  which  is  found  to  the  south  of  the  town.    To  enter  this  harbour  it  is 
necessary  to  run  along  the  north  coast,  at  half  a  cable's  distance,  and  steer  to  the 
west,  taking  care  neither  to  get  nearer  to,  nor  farther  from  Point  Gomera,  than 
half  a  cable;  for  you  will  thus  run  in  mid-strait;  and.  by  keeping  farther  off,  you 
would  incur  the  risk  of  getting  on  the  southev  reefs,  or  by  coming  nearer,  get 
on  those  of  Point  Gomera,  which  lie  out  bne-ihirdof  a  cable.     So  soon  as  past 
Point  Gomera,  you  may  see  a  little  rivulet  in  Aguada  Bay  ;  and  then  you  ought 
to  place  the  prow  direct  for  the  western  extremity  of  Carenero  Key,  until  Point 
Escondido,  or  its  key,  bears  W.  j  S.  when  you  may  run  about  W.  by  N.  towards 
the  bottom  of  the  harbcmr,  and  perfectly  free  from  the  northern  re<  fs,  and  may 
anchor  to  the  south  of  the  town,  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  upon  clay.     If  you  wish 
to  anchor  in  Aguada  Bay,  you  must  run  in,  luffing  up  to  the  northward  so  soon 
as  past  Point  Gomera,  in  order  to  anchor  in  the  middle  of  it.  and  about  S.  d  E. 
from  the  rivulet  of  Aguada.  % 

From  this  anchorage  the  coast  of  f\ie  Peninsula  continues  bold,  and  with  road-  "• 
steads,  in  which  th<>re  is  nothing  to  fear,  except  the  south  winds,  witieh  in  their 
season  are  often  violent.  Two  leagues  to  the  west  of  Samana  lies  Point  Espa- 
noiot  with  an  islet ;  and  thence,  in  the  interior  of  the  bay,  there  is  no  esj^ablish- 
ment  Wh-ttever.  A  large  clay  bank,  in  the  interior  of  the  bay,  runs  out  more 
thait  two  leagues. 

Ftom  Bspanola  Point,  in  which  you  will  be  well  to  the  west  of  the  reef  att^e 
entrakice  of  thr  Bay,  you  should  steer  to  the  south  for  the  Bay  of  Ferlas  or  of 
St.  Lorenzo,  in  which  ihern  is  no  necessity  to  run  far.  in  ;  and  it  may  suffice  to 
anchor  at  its  entrance,  and  about  south  of  Arenas  Point,  which  is  the  north  point 
of  this  bay ;  for  althouKh  farther  in  theie  is  sufficient  depth,  yet  there  are  sand> 
banks,  on  whicii  >ou  might  easily  get  aground.  To  ftna  this  bay  it  is  better  to 
make  the  land  to  the  east  than  to  the  west ;  for  the  south  coast  of  Samana,  from 
PerlasBay  to  the  went,  is  very  wild  and  unsafe,  on  account  of  the  many  islets 
aloogit.    Steering  irom  said  Point  Espanola  to  tl|e  S.  i  E.  you  will  fall  to  the 


-■A 


"'■■  ■  '"-jjtiil-  itltMi: 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


255 


east  of  the  bay,  and  make  a  little  town  named  Savanna  de  la  Mar,  which  affords 
anchoragi'  lor  very  small  vessels ;  and  thus,  so  soon  as  you  discover  Arenas 
Point,  when  crossing  over,  stt^er  towards  it,  and  you  may  approach  within  a  ca- 
ble's length  of  it. 

The  entrance   of  Samana  Bay  is  affected  with  the  regular  breezes ;  but  you 
can  get  out  with  the  land  breezes  only,  which  blow  by  night. 

Cape  Samana  is  of  tonsiderahle  bright,  and  steep  d(»wn  to  the  water's  edge; 
on  ne«ring  it,  you  may  also  discover  Cape  Cabron,  which  is  N.  W.  from  it, 
nearly  3  lea{!;iies :  this  is  even  more  high  and  scarped,  or  steepr^r,  than  the  former, 
and  the  coast  between  is  green,  and  covered  with  large  trees:  on  it  there  are 
rome  islets,  and  as  it  is  foul,  it  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  one  league. 
^From  Cape  Cabron  the  roast  takes  to  the  west,  and  forms  a  great  bay  called 
Escocesa  Bay  ;  the  coasts  of  this  bay  are  low,  and  very  foul ;  from  which  reason, 
and  as  there  is  neither  town  nor  establishment  in  it,  to  induce  vessels  to  visit  it, 
they  ought  to  proceed  direct  from  Cape  Cabron  to  Cape  Viejo  Fransois,  or  Old 
C*pe  Francois,  whH:h  lies  15  leagues  from  it,  W.  N.  W.  \  W.  Old  Cape  Fran- 
5oi8  may  be  seen,  in  clear  Aveather,  at  the  distance  of  ten  leagues.  It  is  known 
by  a  mountain  inland,  which  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  15  leagues. 


# 


*  Dirtciiona  for  those  sailing  in  from  the  Eastward. 

Ships  coming  frem  the  eastward,  towyrds  the  N.  E.  coast  of  Hayti,  should. 
previ<ias  to  their  oinking  the  island,  run  down  between  the  latitudes  of  19*^  "',0' 
and  19°  50',  takings  particular  care  not  to  pass  either  to  the  northward  or  south- 
ward of  these  latitudes.  In  tliis  track  they  will  make  the  land,  either  by  Cape 
Cabron,  or  Girl  Cape  Francois,  and  they  will  pass  clear  of  the  Silver  Key  Bank 
on  the  one  side,  and  the  current  commonly  setting  towards  Samana  Bay  on  the 
other.     For  a  descrijition  of  llie  Silver  Key  Bank,  see  page  193. 

EJ|^,E.  from  Silver  Key,  40  miles  distant,  lies  the  East  Reef,  in  a  N.  E.  di- 
rectiOT,  having  from  6  to  !.'»  fathoms  water,  with  the  appearance  of  a  dangerous 
reef  on  the  N.  en<],  which  is  said  to  extend  from  lat.  19^  45'  N.  to  20°  85'  N. 

In  passing  to  the  northward  of  Porto  Rico,  a  look-out  should  be  kept  for  a  rock 
or  shoal,  (if  not  more  than  one,)  >vhich  certainly  exists  there,  although  its  exact 
situation  is  not  yet  known.  This  danger  has  been  noticed,  where  it  is  stated  that 
an  American  schooner  struck  upon  !♦  in  1817,  in  latitude  about  20^  north ;  and 
we  have  since  met  with  another  notice,  which  states  that,  "  At  fifty  miles  north 
frdm  P  rlo  Rico,  Captain  Baxt»  r,  in  the  brig  Robert,  struck  on  a  rock,  and  re- 
mained several  hours." 

Capt.  Miles,  in  the  schooner  Dick,  of  Bultlthore,  struck  on  the  Morillos  rocks, 
south  side  of  Porto  Kico,  at  midnir^ht,  on  *he  <3th  June,  and  was  totaJylost. 

OLD  CAPE  FR  ANC«1S — 'i  lie  point  of  the  Old  Cape  is  rather  low,  and 
stretches  out  in  the  form  of  the  snout  oj^a  porpoV-e;  at  5  tr  6  leagues  distance 
to  t!  J  N-'  N.  W.  of  Cape  Cabron,  in  a  clear  day,  the  Old  Cape  is  seen  making 
like  an  island,  whose  ends  slope  gradually  into  the  sea.  When  you  have  made 
Cape  Cabron,  being  4  or  5  leagues  to  the  north-westward  of  it,  you  must  sail  1,S 
or  14 leagues  N.  W.  4  W.  and  you  will  pass  5  leagues  to  the  northward  of  the 
Old  C|pe;  then  steer  W.  by  N.  when»havinp  run  15  leagues,  you  will  see  Point 
Casrouge  at  about  3  leagues  distance  from  you;  continue  on  for  5  leagut  s,  when 
Ysabelica  or  Tsubella  Point  will  bear  S.  W.  i  W.  distant  4  leagues  ;  having  ad- 
vanced thus  far,  you  have  nothing  to  fear,  and,  if  necessa^,  you  may  keep  with- 
in half  a  league  of  the  shore,  tli«'  coast  being  very  cler  % 

At  about  4  leagues  off,  to  the  northward  of  Old  Cape  Francjois,  its  point  ap- 
pears like  a  porpoise-snouj,  pn  je»  ting  to  the  eastward  ;  and  3  leagues  tarther 
west  is  a  point  named  Cahodt  la  Roca,  or  Rocky  Cape,  very  much  resenibling  it, 
and  projecting  toithe  westward.  The  coast  between  lies  W.  |  N.  and  E.  j  S. 
it  is  lt>w,  rather  sleep  to  the  sea-side,  and  covered  with  trees,  remarkably  gieen. 
Towa  d^  the  point  ..f  the  Old  Cape,  A  mountain  is  perceived  inland,  which, 
in  clear  weather,  c»yi  be  seen  {p  leagues  off,  and  is  a  good  mark  to  point  it  out. 


'? 


t:.j;^^w, 


IT 


256 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


V 


t 


Then  ii  some  foul  ground  laying  off  the  pitch  of  the  Cape,  and  a  harbour  a 
little  to  the  westward  of  it  for  small  vessels.  When  sailing  from  Cape  Samana 
to  Old  Cape  Franijcois,  which  is  about  6  or  7  hours  sail,  ycu  see  a  point  of 
land  on  the  east  side  of  the  Cape,  which  oftentimes,  at  first  sight,  you  suppose 
to  be  the  Cape,  but  coming  nearer,  you  will  see  your  mistake.  And  when  you 
are  due  north  of  Old  Cape  Francois,  you  will  perceive  to  the  eastward  o*  the 
Cape  a  very  steep  ^oint,  which  seems  to  be  divided  from  the  main,  and,  running 
off  the  land,  rises  higher  and  higher,  in  such  a  manner,  that  the  highest  part  of  it 
lies  open  to  the  sea,  so  high  that  you  cannot  see  the  land  within. 

When  from  Old  Cape  Frangois  you  sail  for  Monte  Cbristi,  observe  to  steer  a 
more  northerly  course  in  hauling  off,  giving  a  good  distance  between  you  and  the 
shore,  because  the  currents  always  set  upon  it;  and,  unless  you  do  this,  you  will 
run  the  hazard  of  being  ashore.  * 

From  Cope  de  la  Roea,  the  land  trenches  in  to  the  distance  of  2  leagues,  and, 
forms  a  bay  pretty  dteep,  which  is  sheltered  by  reefs.   This  coast  thence  tends  to*  - 
the  W.  N.  W.  and,  rising  in  height  to  the  northward,  cdmes  to  PunUi  Mqcuris  or  ^ 
Point  Maaeoury,  which  bears  W.  i  N.  from  Cape  de  la  Roca.  This  point  is  hi^h, 
and  its  shore  bold :  it  serves  as  a  mark  for  the  small  harbour  of  St.  .^Ago,  which 
is  S  leagues  distant  from,  and  to  the  eastward  of,  Puerto  de  Plata,  ^  ^ 

PUERTO  DE  PLATA,  or  Port  Plata,  lies  17  leagues  from  the  point  o^  the   ^ 
Old  Cape,  and  bears  from  it  west.    It  is  bnown  by  a  mountain  at  some  distance 
inland,   which  appears  insulated  like  the   Grange,   (see  page  257)    although  ^ 
not  in  so  precise  a  manner.    The  anchorage  is  good,  and  the  entrance  nearly 
covered  with  mangrove  islets,  which  you  range  along,  leaving^hem  on  your  lar-  . 
board  hand  ;  when  you  are  within  these  islets,  you  anchoiHn  17  to  20  fathoms, l' 
good  bottom.     Observe,  when  sailing  in,  to  keep  diose  to  th^ipoiilt  of  land  on ^* 
your  larboard  side,  which  will  see  to  be  bi'oken  and  rugged.    When  coming  abpiit  -' 
the  said  point,  luff  up  round,  and  run  up  as  far  as  you  can,  with  your  sails  alodipst 
shivering  in  the  wind;  thus  you  will  gain  the  best  place  in  the  road. 

On  approaching  the  coast,  you  will  descry  to  the  westward  a  great  cape,  very  . 
high  and  steep ;  the  extremity  of  this  is  Punta  del  Algarroba,  or  Point  C^jt^t 
which  is  readily  known  by  its  magnitude.  ^^ 

The  bight  from  Port  Plata  to  Point  Casrouge  is  <bo(dered  with  reefs  close  to. 
the  shore,  and  ^oes  not  admit  of  any  ancliorage. 

Old  Cape  Frangois,  and  the  Qreat  Point  of  Algarroba,  or  Casrouge,  bear  from 
each  other  W.  j  N.  and  E.  i  8. 19}  leagues.  When  at  the  distance  .of  about  3 
leagues  to  tiie  northward  of  Casrouge,  you  will  see  alow  point  projecting  outto 
the  westward,  which  is  remarkable  by  its  having  the  appearance  of  being  de- 
tached from  the  coast  like  an  island :  it  is  Ysabclica  or  Isabella  Point,  the  norA-* 
eromost  point  of  Hayti. 

TSABJSlilGA,  or  ISABELLA'POINT,  according  to  the  late  observations^ 
lies  in  latitude  19°  59,'  longitude  71°  lO'  30",  and  at  th^  distance  of  4}  leagues 
W.  N.  W.  i  W.  from  Algarroba  or  Casrouge  Point.  •  To  the  eastward  of  it  lltes 
the  deep  bight,  called  Puerto  Caballo,  of  Port  Cavallo.  In  the  bight  between 
these,  is  an  anchorage  for  vessels  drawing  12  or  13  feet  water,  and  sheltered' by 
the  reef9 :  the  entrance  is  readily  known  by  running  to  it  along  the  reefs. 

On-the  western  side  of  Isabella  Point  is  a  more  extensive  anchorage,  andmore 
easy  to  gain  than  that  of  the  east,  but  the  ground  in  many  places  is  foul :  there  is 
a  depth  of  lirom  5  to  7  fathoms  water.        * 

From  laabella  Point  to  the  iSrange,  the  liearing  and  distance  are  W.  S.  W.  |  W. 
10  leagues.  The  coast  between  is  bordered  with  reefs,  among  which  the  entran- 
ces are  narrow  and  dangjerous. 

West  of  Isabella  PomMb  Punta  Rueia,  or  Rocky  Point,  to  the  westward  of 
which  is  an  anchorage  for  large  vessels,  which,  being  very  bad,  ought  to  be  used 
only  in  case  of  necessity. 

To  gain  this  anchorage,  you  must  haul  very  close  to  Rocky  Points  and  anchor 
80  soon  as  you  are  in  It  fathonis,  white  bottom.  i 

This  anchorage,  which  is  sheltered  by  the  reefs  that  stretch  N.  N.  W.  from 
Punta  Rueia,  liM  about  four  leagues  from  Isabella  Point. 


•e.  n 


-«;d^ 


m 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


267 


The  GRANGE. — The  Grange  Point  is  linown  by  the  mountain  of  that  namct 
and  is  seen  at  a  great  distance,  before  you  perceive  the  sea-coast.  This  moun- 
tain, which  is  insulated,  and  stands  upon  a  low  peninsula,  has  very  much  the  ap- 
pearance of  the  roof  of  a  barn,  from  which  it  takes  its  name,  Grange.  The 
northwest  part  of  it  is  bold,  and  you  may  ajiproach  it  within  a  quarter  of  a 
league,  or  even  less.  Close  to  the  west  part  of  the  Orange  Point  is  a  rocky  isl- 
et, named  the  Frayle,  or  Friar  ;  and  from  its  S.  W.  part,  at  three  cables'  lengthy 
is  another,  somewhat  larger,  and  named  Cobras,  or  Goats'  Islet.  These  are  the 
islets  of  Monte  Christi. 

Haut-Fond — Two  leagues  to  the  N.  N.  E.  of  the  Grange  Point  lies  a  white 
shoal  of  not  more  than  two  cables'  length  each  way,  called  the  Haut-fond:  there 
is  a  small  spot  on  the  shoal,  with  only  25  feet  of  water,  on  which  the  Ville  de 
Paris  struck  in  1781.  Close  to  it  is  a  depth  of  6  fathoms,  then  10  and  15,  ami 
suddenly  no  ground.  The  white  ground  has  generally  scattered  rocks,  so  that 
it  cannot  be  ascertained  whether  there  may  not  be  some  spots  on  it,  even  with 
less  than  25  feet.  When  you  are  on  this  shoal,  the  Grange  bears  S.  by  W.  i  W. 
you  will  then  have  the  islets  of  Monte  Christi  open  of  each  other,  the  western- 
most of  them  bearing  S.  S.  W.  i  W. 

Monte  Christi  Reef. — About  three  leagues  to  the  westward  of  the  Haut-fond, 
f,  lies  another  reef,  on  which  the  British  shif)  Torbay  struck,  and  lost  her  rudder, 
in  1783.  It  extends  nearly  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  is  about  three-quarters  of  a 
mile  in  length,  and  half  a  mile  broad.  On  the  shoalest  part  the  points  of 
rocks  stand  up  like  sharp  spires.  On  other  parts  were  seen  white  patches  of 
sand.  The  shoale|t  water,  3  fathoms  ;  thence  3  to  4,  .0,  6,  and  7  fathoms.  It  is 
steep-to,  and  has  from  15  to  17  fathonis  close  to  it,  and  20  to  25  all  round.  The 
bottom  is  soft  in  20  fathoms  ;  and,  in  some  places,  you  will  have  coarse  sand. 
The  water,  when  smooth,  is  very  clear,  so  that  you  may  see  the  pinnacles  of  the 
rocks  a.i  you  pass  over  them  in  a  boat.  From  the  shoal,  in  3  fathoms,  the  east- 
ern end  of  a  grove  of  trees  open  to  the  south-westward  of  Monte  Christi  (and 
between  it  and  the  key)  bore  S.  E.  and  the  Mount  of  Cape  Francois  (now  Cape 
Hav^p)  S.  W.  by  W.  The  variation  at  the  same  time  was  6°  20'  E. 
't ^  IWi^sabeMa  Point  bearing  S.  W.  distant  four  leagues,  the  course  and  distance 
to  pass  without  the  shoals  called  the  Ilaut-fond  and  Monte  Christi  Reef,  will  be 
a  few  degrees  to  the  northward  of. west,  seventeen  leagues;  and  then  the  latter 
will  bear  about  S.  E.  But,  should  you  be  up  with  Isabella  Point,  and  prefer  the 
mid-channel  between  these  shoals  and  the  coast,  a  W.  by  S.  course,  sixteen 
leagues,  will  clear  the  shoals,  and  bring  you  in  sight  of  the  high  land  of  Cape 
Haytien,  (formerly  Cape  Francois)  at  the  distance  of  about  five  leagues. 

In  sailing  betiveen  Old  Cape  Frangois  and  the  Grange,  be  careful  to  keep  suffi- 
ciently to  the  northward  in  hauling  off,  that  you  may  not  be  driven  ashore  by 
the  .current,  which  always  sets  upon  the  coast. 

There  is  anchorage  under  the  Grange  to  the  weft:  to  take  it  you  must,  range 
along  the  Frayle,  or  islet  of  Monte  Christi,  and  let  go  your  anchor  so  soon  at 
you  have  6  fathoms ;  but  under  the  south  side  of  Cabras,  the  westernmost  islet,j 
joii  majianchor  farther  in,  with  4  fathoms.  From  the  Grange  you  may  see 
the  mountains  above  Cape  Haytien. 

In  approaching  this  anchorage,  you  must  be  cautious  of  a  shoal,  which  lies 
W.  by  S.  from  Cabras  Isle,  at  the  distance  of  a  long  mile  :  to  keep  clear  of  it, 
on  entering  and  leaving  the  anchorage,  take  care  not  to  bring  Cabras  Isle  to  bear 
any  thing  to  the  northward  of  E.  i  N.  but,  on  the  contrary,  keep  it  rather  to 
the  southward  of  that  bearing. 

The  Shoal  or  Bank  of  Monte  Christi  extends  fourteen  miles  to  the  we?*,  and 
to  the  south  as  far  as  Manzanilla  or  Manchioncal  Poijgit,  and  it  thence  continues 
to  border  the  coast,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile,  more  or  less,  according  to  its 
sinuosities.  Cu  this  bank  rise  the  islets  named  the  Seven  Brothers,  which  are 
low,  and  covered  with  mangroves.  The  islet  named  Monte  Grande  is  the  most 
remarkable  of  all  of  them :  it  is^he  second  from  the  eastward,  and  has  high 
trees  upon  it.  This  bank,  as  well  as  many  others  in  these  8e»s,  has  a  very  white 
bottom,  and  is  very  dangerous,  because  the  bottom  i?  very  irregular  In  its  depth» 
with  stones  and  rocks ;  you  may  have  eight,  and  immediately  after  three  fa- 

4  3^  v<i 


•*   # 


238 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


thonia.    You  should,  therefore,  avoid  sailing  on  this  or  similar  banks,  unless 
they  have  been  well  examined  and  sounded. 

MANZANILLA  BAY,  Sec— To  the  east  of  Manzanilla  Point  there  is  an  ex- 
cellent anchorage,  in  Manzanilla  Bay;  from  this  bay  the  coast  tenda  in  to  the  S. 
E.  and  then  turns  to  the  west,  in  which  direction  it  continues  to  a  distance  of 
eight  leagues,  when  it  ascends  to  the  north,  and  terminates  with  Point  Picolet. 
The  Grange  Point,  with  Point  Picolet,  form  a  great  bay,  in  which,  besides  Man-  * 
zanilla  Bay,  there  are  two  harbours ;  the  first  of  these,  named  Bayaha,  or  Port 
Dauphin,  is  to  the  S.  W.  of  Manzanilla  Point,  and  about  two  leagues  from  it; 
and  the  second,  at  the  western  extremity  of  the  bay,  is  known  as  Guarico,  or  tho 
city  of  Cape  Haytien,  or  City  of  the  Cape. 

The  coast  from  Bayaha  to  the  west  is  bounded  by  a  white  bank  and  reef,  on 
the  edge  of  which  there  are  from  50  to  80  fathoms :  between  the  reef  and  the 
coast  is  a  channel,  with  two  or  three  fathoms  of  water,  to  which  there  are  va- 
rious passes  in  the  reef,  known  to  the  coasters  and  pilots  only. 

The  navigation  from  Grange  Point  to  Manxanilla  Point  should  be  made  on  the 
white  bank  of  the  Seven  Brothers  ;  it  is,  therefore,  very  necessary  to  know  the    1 
channel ;  and,  though  you  may  proceed  on  the  outside  of  the  islets  and  the  bankt   ** 
extending  to  the  westward,  it  follows  that,  in  doing  this,  vessels  must  get  much 
to  leeward,  and  are  then  obliged  to  beat  up  to  the  ancnorage.     The  delay  in  fol-  ^ 
lowing  this  route  is  not  so  great  when  bound  to  Bayaha,  or  Port  Dauphin  ;  but  ' 
the  channel  for  crossing  the  bank,  which  we  are  about  to  describe,  being  very 
safe,  it  does  not  seem  requisite  that  any  one  should  go  round  about,  but  that  all  *■ 
should  proceed  as  follows. 

Having  passed  near  the  Grange  Point,  steer  W.i  S.  withoutgoing  to  the  south-  ,• 
ward  of  that  bearing  until  you  are  to  the  north,  or  on  the  ii;ieridian  of  Yuna 
Point  ;*  the  vessel,  having  arrived  at  this  situation,  should  now  steer  towards 
Yuna  Point,  until  the  islet  named  Monte  Chico,  which  is  the  easternmost  of  the 
Seven  Brothers,  bears  west ;  whence  you  must  steer  S.  W.  leaving  to  starboard 
the  islet  or  key  Tororu,  which  is  the  southernmost  of  the  Seven  Brothers;  and, 
when  you  mark  it  at  about  N.  by  E.  you  must  steer  S.  i  E.  until  you  haveMan- 
zanillo  Point  E.  i  N.  when  you  must  haul  to  the  wind,  on  the  larboard  tl^,  to 
take  the  anchorage,  if  you  can ;  and,  if  not,  you  must  prolong  the  stretch  to  the  ,^*-' 
southward,  as  far  as  necessary,  to  enable  you  to  get  into  the  bay  upon  the  other 
tack,  in  the  understanding  that  you  may  run  along  the  whole  of  the  south  shore 
at  half  a  mile,  or  even  less.  In  running  by  the  way  we  have  pointed  out,  you 
will  find  upon  the  bank  7  to  8  fathoms  of  water,  on  sandy  clay,  and  you  may  "■' 
anchor  on  any  part  of  it  coramodiously,  especially  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  eastern 
keys,  Monte  Chico,  and  Tororu;  and  it  may  even  be  convenient  to  anchor,  in 
case  of  night  coming  on,  by  which  the  inconveniences  arising  from  darkness  may 
be  avoided. 

The  edge  of  this  bank  is  so  steep  that,  from  12  to  20  fathoms,  you  rapidly 
pass  to  100  fathoms;  and  of  the  same  nature  is  Manzanilla  Bay  ;  for,  from  7  fa- 
thoms, you  pass  to  100  in  the  short  distance  of  5  cables'  length;  from  which 
reason  an  anchor  should  never  be  let  go  until  the  depth  has  been  prevjbusly  as- 
certained by  the  lead,  keeping  in  mind  that  the  best  anchorage  is  in  from  6  to  10 
fathoms,  on  a  stiflF  clay  bottom,  which  the  anchors  catch  well,  and  at  less  than 
balf  a  mile  from  the  shore. 

In  the  River  Tapion,  (E.  S.  E.  of  Manzanilla  Bay)  and  also  in  that  of  Axabon, 
to  the  S.  E.  water  may  be  conveniently  got,  and  you  may  cut  wood  on  any 
part  of  the  coast  that  is  desert  and  uncultivated.  In  this  bay  there  are  always  , 
fresh  land-breezes,  which  facilitate  much  the  communication  between  Bayaha 
and  Monte  Christi ;  for  t^^ose  to  whom  the  breeze  is  contrary,  navigate  at  night, 
by  aid  of  the  land-breeze';  In  Manzanilla  Bay  no  hurricanes  are  felt,  which  is 
an  advantage  of  great  consideration. 

The  Harbour  of  BAYAHA  or  PORT  DAUPHIN  is  one  of  the  finest  ports 
in  Hayti;  for  to  its  great  extent  it  adds  shelter  equal  to  a  dock,  with  an  excellent 


« 


I 


*  Tuna  Point  is  a  low  point,  which  bears  S.  W.  tru«,  five  miles  from  the  Grange  Point. 


i 


p 


.». 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


259 


r 


clay  bottom,  and  the  depth  does  not  exceed  la  fathoms,  nor  is  It  less  than  5  fa- 
thoms, which  are  found  at  half  a  cable  from  the  shore;  but  notwithstanding  these 
singular  qualities,  if  the  difficulty  of  entering  and  getting  out  of  it,  in  consequence 
of  the  narrowness  and  foulness  of  the  channel  or  mouth,  is  considered,  it  will  be 
seen  that  it  would  not  answer  for  any  vessel  on  actual  service  to  enter  and  be 
shut  up  in  a  harbour  from  wiiich  she  could  not  sail,  unless  at  night,  with  the  land- 
,  breeze  ;  and  thus  exposing  herself  not  only  to  the  danger  of  getting  aground  on  the 
shoals  of  the  entrance,  but  also,  in  case  of  the  land-breeze  failing,  she  may  both  lose 
the  time  for  getting  out  and  the  object  for  doing  so.  The  interior  of  this  harbour 
needs  no  description,  more  than  the  chart,  by  which  it  may  be  seen  that  its  en- 
trance is  only  a  cable  and  two-thirds  in  width ;  and  this  narrow  breadth  conti- 
nues iHwards,  to  the  distance  of  a  short  mile.  The  several  points  which  are  in 
this  passage  render  the  entry  still  more  difficult :  the  risk  of  this  consists  in  a 
shallow  ridge,  which  borders  both  sides  of  the  channel,  and  which,  at  the  points, 
stretches  out  more  than  half  a  cable,  and  reduces  the  channel  to  one  cable's 
length  in  width.  Again,  this  channel  being  serpentine,  it  is  necessary  that  a  ves- 
sel, in  running  in,  should  take  the  turns  with  much  dexterity  and  promptitude, 
in  order  to  avoid  getting  aground.  It  is  therefore  necessary  to  enter  this  har-. 
hour  when  the  breeze  is  to  the  northward  of  E.  N.  E. ;  for,  if  more  scant,  an  at- 

*  tempt  to  take  the  entrance  will  be  impracticable.  Keeping  well  in  the  middle 
of  the  channel,  you  pass  close  to  the  White  Shoal,  which  runs  out  from  the 

•^■windward  point  of  it;  and,  when  abreast  of  it,  you  must  luff  up,  so  as  to  place 
the  prow  towards  the  second  point  on  the  windward  side,  so  as  to  free  yourself 
from  the  ledge  which  lies  off  the  second  point  to  leeward :  and,  so  soon  as  you 

*  have  this  a-beam^  on  the  larboard  side,  you  must  luff  up  for  the  last  point  to 
windward,  till  you  have  passed  the  third  leeward  point,  when  you  may  run  in 
and  anchor  between  Port  Dauphin,  and  the  little  isle  called  Tonantes  Island,  with- 

,  out  approaching  near  the  N.  E.  part  of  the  latter,  because  a  shallow  bank  stretch- 
es off  it.     From  what  has  been  said,  it  may  be  seen  that  the  harbour  requires  no 
other  .direction  than  that  of  an  eye  accustomed  to  run  in  mid-channel  through  a 
t  "^  devMliJiui  passage ;  and  he  who  knows  how  to  do  this,  need  never  get  ashore  here ; 
'  for  his  eyes  will  direct  him  when  to  luff  and  when  to  bear  away,  without  particu- 
lar leading  marks.  From  the  mouth  to  the  third  leeward  point  you  cannot  anchor, 
from  want  of  space  to  turn  the  vessel,  and  because  the  bottom  is  of  sharp  rocks. 
^        The  tide  at  fyM  and  change  of  the  moon,  flows  here  at  7h.  A.  M.  and  spring 
'^1      tides  rise  5^  feet,  but  neaps  only  3J  feet. 

*The  HARBOUR  of  GUARICO,  or  CAPE  HAYTIEN,  is  no  more  than  a 
';  «.  bay,  formed  by  the  coast,  and  shut  to  the  east  and  north  by  a  group  of  reefs 
■which  r'tse  upon  the  White  Bank,  extending  outwara,  at  this  place,  more  than  a 
league.  Those  bound  to  this  port  ou^ht  to  run  from  the  Grange  Point  tow.irds 
PiColet  Point,  outside  the  Seven  Brothers,  and  to  place  themselves  so  that  they 
may  run  down  towards  Point  Picolet,  with  the  vessel's  head  to  the  south  or  S. 
S.  W.  In  this  direction  they  may  approach  without  fear,  within  the  distance  of 
a  musket-shot,  and  may  wait  for  a  pilot,  as  convenient ;  but,  if  obliged  to  take 
"*'  %he  ancnorage  witiiout  one,  they  must  steer  from  Point  Picolet  S.  E.  and  S.  E. 
by  E.  leaving  a  white  flag  (if  there)  on  the  larboard  hand,  and  which,  placed  up- 
on the  northern  extremity  of  a  reef,  serves  for  a  beacon,  taking  care  to  carry 
plenty  of  sail  to  clear  a  red  flag,  which  they  will  see  a  little  afterwards,  and  which 
must  be  left  half  a  cable's  length  to  the  starboard;  and,  so  soon  as  they  have 
this  flag  on  their  beam,  they  may  steer  for  the  city,  and  anchor  in  from  7  to  9 
fathoms. 

Those  who  go  cat  from  Minzanilla  or  Bayaha  (Port  Dauphin)  to  the  Cape, 
ought  to  steer  to  the  northward  until  Picolet  Point  bears  to  the  southward  of 
.  the  true  west,  and  then  dirct  their  course  to  the  west  as  convenient;  for  they 
■will  be  clear  of  the  white  ba  ak  off  Point  Picolet ;  but,  if  bound  to  the  east,  they 
must  run  to  the  northward  until  the  Grange  Point  bears  to  the  southward  of  the; 
true  east,  in  order  to  clear  .he  Seven  Brothers'  Bank. 

The  Count  Chastenet  de  Puysegur,  in  his  Directions  for  the  Coasts  of  Hayti, 
gives  the  following  for' Cape  Haytien,  &;c.    These  were  written  in  1767,  but 


»i.f 


n 


ae 


260 


BLIJNI  3    AMKRICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


' , 


K 


they  include  Boinf;  doscrlptioii  not  Riven  in  the  Derrotero,  and  w<s  UuTcfore,  in- 
sert them  here,  with  a  trilling  correction. 

'*  Ships  bound  from  the  eastward  to  Cape  Francois  always  make  the  Grange  ; 
for  the  coast  in  the  environs  of  the  Cape  offers  notliing  remari^able,  unless  they 
be  near  enough  to  distinguish  the  hummock  of  PicoU^t,  and  the  rock  of  that  name, 
lying  to  the  north,  and  very  near  the  iiummock.  Having  bi'ought  Monte  Ciiristi 
to  the  south,  distance  about  a  league  and  a  half,  the  proper  course,  in  order  to 
fail  a  little  to  the  northward  of  Picolet  Point,  is  between  tlie  W.  S.  W.  and  S.  W. 
by  W.  distance  nine  leagues. 

"The  inark  is  surer  when  you  approach  the  Cape  from  tiie  Grange,  in  steer- 
ing W.  S.  W.  and  S.  W.  by  W.  for,  in  this  last  position,  the  hummock  of  Pi- 
colet must  appear  to  project  in  the  sea  more  than  the  rest  of  the  coast.  The 
best  mark  that  can  be  given  is,  that  the  hummocks,  which  are  to  the  %vest  of  the 
road  of  the  Cape,  are  the  highest  of  all  this  part;  besides  you  can  distinguish  in 
them  large  whito>spots.  With  some  attention  you  will  discover  Point  Picolet, 
which  is  lower  than  the  said  luimmocks,  and  seems  to  lose  itself  among  them. 
This  point  terminates  the  road  of  the  Cape  on  the  west  side  ;  in  coming  near 
you  descry  Fort  Picolet  itself,  built  upon  the  point,  at  whose  end  lies  the  rock 
of  the  same  name,  which  is  not  discernible  at  a  greater  distance  than  a  league. 

♦♦  So  soon  as  you  have  descried  Fort  Picolet,  you  steer  directly  against  it,  be- 
cause you  must  sail  very  near  that  fort  to  enter  the  road,  whose  opening  is  border- 
ed with  dangers  or  keys,  which  you  leave  on  the  larboard  in  coming  in.  We 
would  advise  no  stranger  to  attempt  the  channel  without  a  pilot,  for  wliom  he 
must  wait  in  the  offing. 

"At  half-past  ten  the  wind  comes  to  the  E.  S.  E.  but  it  must  blow  from  tlie 
N.  E.  to  carry  you  into  ths  harbour,  for  you  are  obliged  to  steer  S.  E.  and  even 
E.  S.  E.  The  breeze  is  very  regular.  The  land-wind  blows  in  the  evening,  and 
often  during  the  night;  but,  about  10  or  11  in  the  morning,  after  an  interval  of 
calm,  it  turns  to  the  E.  N.  E.  or  N.  E.  So  that  <it  twelve  o'clock  ships  are  able 
to  enter  the  harbour. 

"The  city  of  Cape  Haytien  is  under  Picolet  Mount:  there  is  no  dangct  in 
running  in  for  Picolet  Point,  if  you  keep  it  bearing  from  S.  S.  W.  to  S.  S.  E. 
Should  you  not  have  time  to  wait  for  a  pilot,  you  must  range  along  Picolet 
Point,  having  it  about  south,  or  S.  S.  W.  at  the  distance  of  u  short  musket-shot. 

"  To  sail  into  the  harbour,  bring  Point  Picolet  to  bear  S.  by  W.  4.W'  ^md  steer 
S.  i  W.  A  remarkable  mountain,  called  the  Bishop''s  Cap,  will  then  be  seen  di- 
rectly ahead;  bring  this  mountain,  which  appears  in  three  points,  in  a  line  wf^h 
a  remarkable  hummock,  by  the  water-side,  in  the  harbour,  which  will  bear  S.  by 
Vf.  Steering  in  thisr  direction  will  lead  to  the  westward  of  the  outer  reef,  nam- 
ed Le  Coque  Veille.  The  water  generally  breaks  on  this  reef,  which  has  (or  had) 
a  buoy,  or  white  flag  upon  it.  Continue  in  the  same  direction,  leaving  the  buoy 
at  the  distance  pf  about  15  fathoms  on  the  larboard  side,  until  a  small  rock,  stand- 
ing detached  a  little  from  Picolet  Point,  appears  just  open  of  that  point.  Now 
Ibaul  to  the  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  S.  keeping  the  rock  just  open,  and  you  will 
pass  between  the  Coque  Veille  and  le  Grand  Mouton  Bank,  a  bank  havi^  a  buoy* 
or  flag  on  its  eastern  edge,  which  is  left  on  the  starboa^  side ;  the  Petit  Mouton, 
a  danger  that  always  breaks,  and  a  shoal  named  the  Trompeuse,  with  a  buoy  or 
white  flag  on  it,  are  to  be  left  on  the  larboard  side.  You  must,  therefore,  have 
sufficient  sail  out  to  weather  roUnd  the  Grand  Mouton  Bank,  giving  the  buoy  or 
flag  upon  it  a  birth  of  half  or  two-thirds  of  a  cable's  length ;  and,  having  passed 
it,  steer  for  the  town,  and  you  may  anchor  where  you  please,  in  8  or  9-fathoms, 
good  ground. 

"  A  ship  cannot  enter  the  harbour  unless  the  wind  be  at  N.  E.  as  she  is  obliged 
to  Bteer  S.  E.  by  S.  and  even  S.  S.  E.  The  breezes  are  very  regular;  they 
come  from  the  land  in  the  evening,  and,  very  ofterl,  during  night;  but  at  about  10 
or  11  in  the  morning,  after  an  interval  of  calm,  they  chop  about  E.  N.  E.  or  N.  E. 
Strong  norths  heave  a  great  swell  into  the  bay." 

The  town  is  on  the  western  side,  about  two  miles  from  Point  Picolet,  in  lati- 
tude 10O  46'  20",  longitude  72°  14'  0". 

PORT  FRANCOIS.— -From  Point  Picolet  the  coast  tends  west  to  Honorat 


III.UNt's  AMERICAN  COA^T   PILOT. 


2GI 


Point,  wliic.li  is  the  north  point  of  Port  Fr.uujois ;  whence  ii  roef  Ntrutcht's  out, 
a  oabie'a  length  to  the  N.  VV.  at  iH  »'xtr(Mnity  aro  thme  fathoms  of  w;it.er.  Tin* 
anchornxt;  olT  Port  Fran^jois  is  in  a  small  Itay,  and  al»out  two  caMes  in  t'xtcnt; 
between  the  points  of  tljc.  hay  then;  is  ^!;oo(l  shelter  from  tlie  hreezes.  To  enter, 
you  must  rim  along  tlie  edj^e  of  the  rerf  of  llonoral,  wliicli  is  on  th(!  north  side;; 
and,  after  having  gone  about  two  cal)les  to  the  S.  S.  E.  you  may  anchor  in  V,  or 
10  fathoms,  on  clayey  sand,  about  S.  W.  by  W.  from  tiie  fort. 

BAY  of  ACUL. — From  the  south  point  of  Port  Fratujois,  a  reeft'xteuds  »h 
far  as  the  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  Acul,  without  leavin'^  any  |)ractieabie  pass.  The 
Bay  of  Acul  is  extensive.  It  has  three  entrances,  but  the  wes((u"n  is  the  best; 
the  east«ru  l)eing  narrow  and  devious.  The  first  entrance  is  between  Rat  Islet 
and  Sandy  Islet,  situated  on  tlw  reefs  extending  from  Port  Fran«]ois,  and  which 
shut  in  the  entrance  to  the  N.  and  N.  E.  That  to  the  N.  VV.  is  shut  in  by  other 
reefs  and  shoals,  whicli,  though  among  themselves  they  have  only  dillictdt  and 
narrow  passages,  form  an  excellent  channel  with  the  west  coast  of,  the  bay. 
The  three  channels  into  the  harbour  arc  called  the  East,  the  Middle,  and  the 
ifest,  or  Limbe,  Channels.  To  enter  any  one  <tf  these  channels,  it  is  necessary 
to  approach  on  the  outside  of  the  White  Bank,  extending  along  shore  between 
Port  Frangois  and  the  Bay  of  Acul,  until  Rat  Islet  bens  S.  by  W.  }  W.;  and, 
'  so  soon  as  you  are  a  league  from  the  Sandy  Islet,  you  Avill  plainly  see  Trois  Ma- 
ries^ Point,  which  is  the  eastern  point  of  the  bay  ;  and,  approaching  nearer,  you 
ilwill  also  see  a  low  point  on  the  western  side,  in  the  interior  of  the  bay,  named 
Point  Belie,  which  is  known  by  a  clump  of  trees  that  is  upon  it :  having  recog- 
nized these  points,  bring  them  in  a  line,  and  steer  in  with  this  mark,  keeping,  by 
small  variations  of  course,  the  depth  of  10  fathoms.  Thus  you  will  run  in  mid- 
channel,  which  is  not  more  than  a  cable's  length  wide,  and  the  bottom  of  clay : 
on  both  (h;s  of  it  there  are  ^Mhite  banks,  with  four  fathoms  of  water  on  their 
edges.  It  is  necessary  to  notice  tiuit  you  must  have  recognized  the  tAvo  points 
which  serve  for  the  leading-mark  at  tAVO  miles  from  Trois  Maries'  Point ;  for, 
from  that  distance,  it  is  necessary  to  come  in  by  the  mark  described.  In  thick 
or  tktiay  weather,  when  these  objects  cannot  be  seen  at  the  proper  distance,  you 
must  not  attempt  to  enter  by  this  channel.  At  about  four  cables'  lengths  with- 
in, the  channel  begins  to  widen ;  so  that  when  Rat's  Islet,  which  you  leave  to 
starboard,  bears  N.  W.  you  may  anchor  in  from  14  to  18  fathoms.  All  the  reefs 
which  lie  within  Rat  Island  are  visible. 

To  enter  by  the  Middle  Channel,  you  must  run  outside  the  bank  until  Rat  Islet 
bears  S.  by  E.  6  E.  and,  placing  the  prow  in  that  direction,  steering  that  course, 
and  keeping  in  9  fathoms  of  water,  you  will  pass  very  near  to  some  reefs  which 
are  about  one-quarter  of  a  league  to  tlie  northward  of  Rat  Islet :  these  are  easi- 
ly seen,  and  it  is  necessary  to  approach  them  within  a  cable's  length,  on  the  lar*-- 
board  hand,  and  to  luff  up  to  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  E.  to  pass  along  the  north  side 
of  that  which  stretches  to  the  east  from  Rat  Islet,  and  which  must  be  left  to  star- 
board. Having  once  got  to  the  S.  E.  of  Rat  Islet,  you  may  anchor,  as  above 
stated.  All  the  reefs  show  clearly,  and,  therefore,  there  is  no  danger  in  taking 
wthis  channel  when  the  winds  allow  you  to  shape  the  proper  courses;  but,  if  you 
•  cannot  do  this,  you  ought  not  to  take  it,  as  there  is  not  room  for  working  in:  in 
case  the  wind  becomes  scant  in  the  channel,  you  must  anchor  in  a  moment,  and 
you  will  be  free  from  danger;  for  the  holding  ground  is  very  good,  being  hard 
clay,  and  you  are  sheltered  from  the  swell  of  the  sea. 

The  West  or  Limbe  Channel  is  the  best  and  widest,  for  you  may  work  in  it,  if 
requisite.  To  enter  by  this  channel,  run  outside  the  banks  or  shoals,  until  Point 
league,  on  the  west  side,  bears  south^  this  point  lies  between  Limbe  and  Grand 
Boucand  Points.  That  of  Limbe  is  the  north-westernmost,  and  has  an  islet  at 
its  base. 

Point  IcagvK.  is  easily  known  by  the  scarped  or  bluff  rocks  which  form  it ;  and 
from  its  being  the  only  one  of  any  elevation  lying  to  the  south  of  Limbe.  So 
soon  as  Point  league  bears  south,  steer  towards  it;  and,  as  you  get  nearer  it, 
you  will  see,  to  larboard,  the  breaking  of  a  reef  of  considerable  extent,  named 
Cocqueveille,  on  the  edge  of  which  there  are  5  fathoms  of  water;  having  recog- 
oized  this  reef,  taking  care  to  pass  in  mid-channel  between  it  and  Point  league. 


262 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


in  10  or  15  fathoms  of  water,  and  with  nearly  a  S.  E.  course,  with  which  you 
must  run  in,  amending  successively  a  little  to  the  east,  to  pass  about  three  or  four 
cables'  lenj^ths  from  Grand  Boucand  Point.  You  may  then  anchor  to  the  west 
of  Trois  Maries'  Point.  If  obliged  to  tack,  you  must  prolong  the  tacks  until 
very  near  the  reefs,  on  the  supposition  that  their  breakers  afford  the  best  marks 
for  avoiding  them  ;  and  that,  at  the  very  edge  of  them,  there  are  5  and  6  fa- 
thoms of  water.  You  may,  also,  prolong  the  tacks  to  a  cable  from  the  coast, 
without  any  risk ;  for,  though  Boucand  Point  is  foul,  the  reefs  show  above  wa- 
ter, and  have  8  and  10  fatlioms  up  and  down  at  their  edge.  The  anchorage,  or 
place  which  we  have  assigned  for  anchoring,  between  Rat  Islet,  Trois  Maries* 
Point,  ana  Boucand  Point,  is  not  properly  that  which  is  called  the  Bay  of  Acul ; 
but,  as  there  is  good  shelter  in  it,  those  who  have  no  occasion  to  make'a  long  de- 
lay, or  to  discharge,  may  avoid  entering  the  bay. 

To  enter  the  Bay  of  Acul,  you  must  not  approach  Trois  Maries'  Point  nearer 
than  three  cables'  length,  for  it  is  foul  and  shallow ;  and,  so  soon  as  you  are  past 
it,  steer  towards  the  ])oint  of  Morne  Rouge,  (Red  Hill)  on  the  east,  M'hich  you 
must  pass  at  about  half  a  cable's  length,  in  order  to  give  a  birth  to  a  shoal  which 
lies  off  Belie  Point,  opposite  :  having  passed  Morne  Rouge  Point,  you  will  see 
a  fine  cove,  on  the  same  side,  called  the  Lombard  Cove,  in  which  you  may  anchor 
■  in  7  fall  jms  water,  at  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore.  From  this  cove 
southv  ":i'd,  into  the  interior  of  the  buy,  there  are  many  shoals ;  and  no  one  should 
pass  ths  cove  who  has  not  a  practical  knowledge  of  them.  In  the  route  above 
de.  cribed,  you  will  always  find  from  10  to  15  fathoms  of  water,  on  clay. 

Between  Trois  Maries'  Point  and  that  of  Morne  Rouge,  in  a  line  with  them, 
tind  about  half  a  mile  from  the  first,  there  is  a  shoal  of  small  extent,  which  you 
will  shun  by  taking  care  to  pass  at  not  less  than  three  cables'  length  from  Trois' 
Maries'  Point,  and  not  to  place  the  ship's  head  towards  Morne  Rouge  Point, 
until  you  are  at  half  the  distance  between  the  two  points.  The  anchorage  of 
the  Lombard  Cove  is  a  natural  dock.  In  Acul  Bay  it  is  difficult  to  get  water  : 
the  best  is  oi  the  eastern  side  of  the  cove,  between  Tros  Maries'  and  Mprn« 
Roug^  Points.  ^* 

AN; 'E  A  CHOUCHOU,  or  Chouchou  Bay.— To  Point  Limbe  follows  that  of 
Margot,  v^hich  h  j  a  round  islet,  lying  rather  farther  out  than  that  of  I<imbe.  It 
is  very  uscO'l  to  make  this  islet,  in  order  to  direct  yourself  to  Chouchou  Bay, 
which  lies  i»vo  miles  we,  t  from  it.  In  this  bay  there  is  a  gcod  depth  of  6  or  7 
fathoms:  to  entc  it,  joa  must  keep  towards  the  east  point,  which  has  6  fathoms 
close  to  it;  and,  so  soon  as  you  have  passed  it,  and  the  vessel  oegins  to  lose 
head- way,  you  may  anchor;  for,  tlie  moment  you  enter  under  the  point,  tho 
breeze  calms,  and  the  little  you  have  comes  a-head :  this  happens  even  when  the 
wind  is  very  fresh  without  the  bay.  To  the  west  of  this  bay,  there  is  a  small 
one,  called  Lalliviere  Salee,  or  Salt  River  Cove,  which  has  httle  depth,  and  is 
fit  for  small  craft  only. 

FOND  LA  GRANGE. — Four  miles  west'vard  from  the  Bay  of  Chouchou  is 
that  of  Fond  la  Grange,  or  the  Grange  Bottom,  600  fathoms  broad,  and  the  west 
point  of  which  named  Palmiste,  is  distinguished  by  a  chain  of  reefs  extending 
nearly  a  league  to  the  west,  and  almost  to  Point  d'lcamt.  Fond  la  Grange  is  a 
good  roadstead,  and,  in  case  of  necessity,  a  ship  of  the  line  may  ride  in  it ;  for 
throughout  it  there  is  not  less  than  G  fathoms  water,  and  at  less  than  a  cable's 
length  from  the  shore.  To  enter  in  it,  you  must  pass  near  the  cast  point,  and 
anchor  in  about  the  middle  of  the  bay,  on  clayey  sand.  At  a  siiort  league  west- 
ward from  Palmiste  Point  lies  that  oi  league;  the  coast  between  is  foul,  with 
sunken  reefs,  which  advance  half  a  league  4)ut  to  sea. 

PORT  PAIX.—Elight  miles  from  Point  d'Icague  is  that  of  i\\Q  Carenage, 
which  is  the  northernmost  headland  of  this  part  of  the  coast,  and  which,  from  a 
distance,  may  be  mistaken  for  Point  d'Icague.  The  coast  between  is  very  clear. 
From  this  point  the  coast  tends  S.  W.  by  S.  to  form  the  cove  of  Port  Paix. 
To  enter  here,  you  must  avoid  the  east  short) ;  because,  from  a  point  which  lies 
a  little  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  town,  a  reef  stretches  out  about  a  cable's  length,  and 
immediately  without  it  there  is  a  depth  of  13  fathoms,  with  oozy  sand.  To 
avoid  this  reef,  keep  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance,  which  has  only  3  cable's 


1' 

k( 


ELUNT^S   AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


263 


» 


length  in  breadth,  and  anchor  to  the  N.  W.  from  the  town,  in  12  or  13  fathoms, 
on  clayey  sand,  and  about  a  cable  and  a  half  from  the  shore. 

CHANNEL  of  TORTUE— Nearly  north  from  Point  d'Icague  is  the  east 
point  of  Tortue  or  Tortugas  Island,  •which  extends  nearly  east  and  west,  and,  in 
that  direction,  is  about  6  leagues  in  extent,  but  only  one  from  N.  to  S.  all  its  north 
side  is  iron-bound,  and  steep-to :  and  the  south-side  is,  for  the  most  part,  bounded 
by  a  white  shoal  and  reefs.  The  only  good  aucljorage  in  Tortue  is  that  oi Basse- 
terre, on  its  south  side,  at  a  league  and  a  half  from  the  east  point :  it  is  formed  by 
the  shore,  and  the  reefs  which  run  out  from  it,  and  no  vessels  draw  ing  more  than 
14  or  15  feet  can  enter  it.  The  passage  is  narrow,  but  easy  to  fetch.  You  must 
keep  the  weather  reefs  on  board,  leaving  them  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  steer 
N.  N.  W.  and  N.  to  double  the  reefs  you  leave  on  the  larboard  hand :  do  not 
be  afraid  of  coming  near  the  land,  and  anchor  in  good  ground  so  soon  as  you 
have  brought  the  lee  reef  to  bear  S.  W.  Large  ships  may  come  to  an  anchor 
outside  the  reef,  upon  white  ground,  a  mile  to  leeward  of  Basseterre. 

To  the  eastward  of  Basseterre,  towards  Portugal  or  the  east  point,  there  are 
several  bays  or  coves,  in  which  boats  or  schooners  may  anchor,  but  nothing  of  a 
larger  size. 

The  channel  which  the  Isle  Tortue  forms  with  Hayti  is  6  miles  wide,  and  fit 
for  every  class  of  vessels,  which  may  commodiously  beat  in  it,  and  often  with 
great  advantages  for  getting  to  windward,  when  the  currents  in  it  run  to  the  east- 
ward, which  they  do  for  the  greater  part  of  the  year  ;  for  rarely  and  only  during 
souths  do  they  change  their  direction  to  west.  In  the  latter  case,  it  is  necessary 
to  advance  northward,  and  get  6  or  7  leagues  from  the  Tortue,  to  beat  to  wind- 
ward. When  beating  in  the  Tortue  Channel,  you  ought  to  stand  on  within  less 
than  a  mile  of  the  coast  on  e\  ery  tack ;  for  towards  the  coasts  the  current  is 
stronger,  and  the  wind  more  favourable,  than  in  mid-c.  '.inel.  As  there  are  se- 
veral bays  on  each  :::de,  the  setting  of  the  current  is  neithcjr  uniform  nor  in  the 
same  direction.  You  will  sometimes  see  it  run  in  numerous  directions ;  and» 
sometimes,  in  the  middle  of  the  channel,  it  will  run  contrary  to  the  current  in 
sliorc 

PORT  PAIX  to  ST.  NICOLAS'  MOLE.— Four  leagues  from  Port  Paix  lies 
Port  Moustique :  the  coast  between  is  clear,  and  bluff  or  scarped.  Port  Mousti- 
que  has  scarcely  an  opening  of  4  cables'  length  ;  its  bottom  is  unequal,  and  impe- 
ded with  rocks,  which  render  it  necessary  to  examine  it  with  the  load  before  you 
let  go  an  anchor ;  for  between  the  two  outer  points  you  cannot  find  bottom  with 
40  fathoms  of  line. 

At  a  league  and  a  half  from  Port  Moustique  is  Port  a  I'Ecu,  and  the  coast  be- 
tween the  two  is  rocky,  steep-to,  and  bluff.  This  cove  is  better  than  Port  Mous- 
tique, but  not  so  easy  for  large  ships,  as  its  entrance  is  narrow,  in  consequence  of 
a  reef  which  stretches  off  about  two  cables'  length  from  its  eastern  point,  and  upon 
which  there  is  not  more  than  3  fathoms  water.  To  take  this  anchorage,  it  is  ne- 
cessary to  keep  near  to  the  reefs  off  the  east  point,  and  haul  by  the  wind,  rang- 
ing along  the  reef,  to  anchor  in  8  or  10  fathoms  in  the  centre  of  the  cove,  on  clay, 
and  about  N.  N.  E.  from  a  house  which  is  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay. 

Six  miles  from  Port  a  I'Ecu  is  the  anchorage  of  Jean  Rabel,  which  is  good, 
safe,  and  easy  to  take:  on  approaching  this  place,  you  ought,  without  any  fear,  to 
approximate  the  reef  on  the  east  side,  which  has  10  fathoms  close  to  its  edge. 
The  anchorage  for  large  ships  is  about  two  cables'  length  from  the  eastern  break- 
ers, in  12  or  15  fathoms ;  and  care  must  be  taken  not  to  shut  in  the  two  i)oints, 
which  are  on  the  east  coaat,  for  though  it  is  possible  to  run  farther  in,  yet  it 
is  not  adviseable:  for  the  depth  suddenly  diminishes,  and  the  bottom  is  not  very 
clean. 

Should  you  be  to  the  north-Avest  of  Joan  Rabel,  at  a  sliort  league's  distance 
from  the  land,  and  have  half  the  island  of  Tortue  open  with  the  point,  you  will 
find  60  fathoms  of  water,  oozy  ground,  and  a  little  farther  out  80  fathoms. 

From  Jean  Rahel  the  coast  forms  a  great  bight  to  the  southward,  as  far  as  the 
peninsula,  called  Presqu'  Isle,  or  the  Mole,  the  western  point  of  which,  called  tho 
Molo  Point,  lies  13  miles  W«  S.  W.  from  it.    All  the  bhutc  between  is  rocky,  and 


264 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


»lo«',3  not  ofifer  any  shelter.  At  all  times  the  currents  here  are  very  perceptible 
near  the  shore,  and  generally  set  on  it;  at  two  leagues  in  the  offing,  they  are  less 
so,  and  run  to  the  north-east;  near  the  peninsula  they  are  much  stronger,  and 
commonly  set  towards  the  north. 

ST.  NICOLAS'  MOLE,  BAY  or  HARBOUR— This  harbour  is  large  and 
spacious  at  its  entrance,  but  narrows  towards  the  town,  which  you  will  descry  a» 
soon  as  you  have  doubled  the  cai)e.  You  may  stand  very  close  to  either  shore, 
but  it  is  adviseable  to  allow  on  the  south  side  more  room  for  veering  than  on 
the  north  side,  as  thei-e  is  no  anchoring  ground,  which  you  have  on  the  north  side, 
though  very  near  the  shore.  The  anchorage  is  before  the  town,  and  under  the 
l)arracks,  in  15  or  IfJ  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.  In  going  in,  you  must  be  prepared 
against  the  puils  or  scjualls  which  come  down  from  the  land  with  such  violence  as 
to  endanger  the  masts. 

Within  the  bay  or  harbour  you  will  be  sheltered  from  every  wind.  There  is 
a  fine  rivtT  to  water  at,  and  places  w  here  a  ship  may  be  careened  with  her  side  to 
the  shore.  When  it  l)lows  hard  it  is  difficult  to  get  to  the  anchorage  ;  and,  if 
you  are  not  quick  in  letting  go,  the  anchor  may  fall  from  6  to  30  and  35  fathoms. 

The  Derrotero  says,  that  the  north  coast  from  Cape  St.  Nicolas,  sends  out  a 
white  bank,  which  stretches  about  one  third  of  a  cable  from  the  shore,  and  on 
which  there  are  3  and  4  fathoms  water.  The  south  shore  has  also  its  white  bank, 
which  extends  out  about  a  (•.a])U''s  length  from  an  interior  point  S.  W.  of  the 
town,  upon  which  there  is  a  battery;  from  this  point,  the  white  bank  extends 
directly  to  the  Fort  Point,  the  N.  E.  end  of  the  town  ;  and,  therefore,  when  to 
the  northward  of  that  point,  you  must  not  prolong  the  tack  to  the  south  farther 
than  to  bring  the  north  part  of  the  town  to  bear  east.  You  should,  also,  be  aware 
that,  on  the  south  coast,  and  a  little  to  the  west  of  the  above  mentioned  point, 
no  bottom  has  been  found,  th(a"efore  you  ought  to  look  out,  and  tack  in  time. 
On  the  northern  tack,  there  is  not  so  much  danger;  for  itis  possible  to  let  go  an 
anchor,  although  it  must  be  done  very  near  to  the  shore.  In  the  anchorage, 
which  is  well  sheltered  from  all  w  inds,  vessels  pass  the  dangerous  season  of  the 
hurricanes. 

In  going  out,  you  will  see,  to  the  southward,  the  point  of  the  cape  which  forms 
its  entrance  ;  and,  fartlier  to  the  southward,  you  will  then  descry  the  Point  du 
Cap  a  Four,  or  of  Fool's  Cape.  The  latter  lies  5i  miles  to  the  southward  of  St. 
Nicolas  I'oint;  and  the  coast  thence  tends  2i  leagues  more,  nearly  in  the  same 
direction,  to  the  Point  a  la  Perle,  or  Pearl  Point.  t 

The  sea  breeze  at  the  Mole  is  from  N.  E.  by  N.  it  comes  on  at  8  in  the  morn- 
ing, and  blows  v(!ry  strong  till  10  or  11  at  night.     The  land-breeze  comes  on 
moderately  at  S.  i'l.  it  continues  till  G  in  the  morning,  then  dies  away,  and  it  is 
calm  till  8.     If  bound  to  the  northward,  ships  generally  weigh  .at  8  or   10  at 
night,  when  the  sea-breeze  begins  to  slacken  enough  to  run  them  out. 


»■• 


Directions  for  Shij)shou7id  to  Cape  Hay  tien,  Sfc.from  the  Westward. 

In  advancing  from  the  westward,  towards  Cape  Haytien,  give  the  N.  E.  part 
of  Tortuc  Island  a  goci  birth ;  and  after  you  get  to  windward  of  the  east  end  of 
the  island,  you  will  descry  the  cape. 

The  land  to  the  west  of  Port  Paix  shuts  to  the  northward  a  low  point,  and 
rises  gradually  towards  the  south  to  a  high  mountain,  with  a  sugar-loaf  top,  and 
then  it  declines  on  the  same  sidi;  to  a  large  valley,  whence  it  rises  (piick'y  to  a  pro- 
digious high  mountain,  smooth  at  the  top,  and  the  highest  land  in  this  part  of 
llayti.  The  high  land  after  this,  to  the  southward,'  is  of  sugar-loaf  form,  with  a 
little  one  to  the  south  of  it,  which  an;  both  ten  or  twelve  miles  in  the  country. 
The  next  high  land,  or  point,  which  is  seen  by  the  water  side,  is  Cape  Hay- 
tien. The  land,  at  first,  makes  like  a  saddle;  but  on  nearer  approach,  a  low 
point  will  appear,  which  shuts  from  the  eastward  the  eastern  part  of  the  saddle- 
land.  Tliis  is  I'oint  Picolet,  or  the  Cape  Laud,  the  extremity  of  the  cape  already 
described. 


t 


BLUNT*S    AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


265 


MANZANILLA  BAY.— Ships  from  the  westward  may,  with  safety,  proceed 
to  Manaanilla  Bay.  It  is  quite  clear,  and  you  may  approaeh  "WithiD  one  third  of 
a  mile  in  every  part  of  it. 

The  Seven  Brothers,  which  have  been  described,  (page  257,)  are  mostly  barren, 
with  reefs  about  them.  There  is  some  ;vood  upon  them,  and  plenty  of  fish  all 
round.  You  need  not  approach  the  western  part  of  them  nearer  than  two 
leagues,  until  you  see  the  bay :  on  advancing  into  this,  there  will  be  found  ten 
fathoms  water,  at  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  fron;  shore. 

The  River  Massacre,  formerly  a  boundary  of  the  Spanish  and  Haytien  territo- 
ries, fall  into  the  bay,  to  the  eastward  of  Port  Dauphin :  but  it  will  be  very  dif- 
ficult, if  not  impossible,  to  water  there,  as  you  must  go  up  the  river  nearly  two 
leagues  to  obtain  it. 

To  anchor  properly,  so  as  to  have  the  best  shelter,  run  along  the  inside  of 
Manzaniila  Point,  and  drop  it  in  6  fathoms,  muddy  bottom.  All  the  anchoring 
plactB  are  within  the  Spanish  line,  where  the  land  is  low,  marshy,  and  covered 
with  mangroves.  The  bay  is  as  easy  to  go  in  as  to  get  out,  having  regular  land 
aind  sea  breezes,  and  being  quite  secure  from  any  swell.  A  ship,  having  lost  her 
anchors,  may  run  in  upon  the  muddy  shore.  The  landing  is  very  easy.  Here 
is  game  and  fish ;  and  bullocks,  cows,  and  hogs,  may  be  purchased. 

The  ROAD  OF  MONTE  CHRISTI  is  more  open  than  Manzaniila  Bay,  al- 
though in  it  there  is  good  anchorage,  well  sheltered  from  the  N.  E.— >East,  and 
S.  E.  which  are  the  strong  breezes ;  and,  during  the  norths,  you  may  anchor  in 
5  or  4  fathoms,  under  Cabra,  the  islet  of  Monte  Chriati.  The  same  resources 
may  be  found  here  as  in  Manzaniila  Bay. 

''  The  anchorage  at  the  Grange,"  says  an  able  navigator,  "  is  less  spacious  than 
that  under  Point  Ysabelica,  but  it  is  more  sheltered  from  the  norths  by  the  islet. 
Ten  ships'of  war  might  easily  be  anchored,  in  from  5  to  7  fathoms,  within  pistol 
shot  of  this  islet,  which  makes  half  a  league  distance  from  the  islet  to  the  reef 
that  is  as  far  from  the  shore.  We  had  four  strong  breezes,  which  might  be 
called  gales  of  wind,  yet  we  rid  with  only  half  a  cable,  and  had  not  occasion  to 
freshen  hawse.     See  the  description,  page  ^257. 

"  The  islet  Cobras,  or  Cabra,  is  nearly  half  a  circle  of  200  fathoms  diameter, 
and  has  a  hillock  about  the  height  and  length  of  SO  feet,  with  a  cut  in  the  mid- 
dle, of  near  10  fathoms;  and  this  is  what  breaks  off  the  sea  and  winds.  The 
French  had  made  there  a  very  good  salt-work,  which  the  Spani<irds  have  let  go 
to  ruin.  It  differs  from  those  at  Turks'  Islands,  produces  better  salt,  and  is  more 
convenient,  as  you  may  introduce  the  salt  water  as  you  want  it,  in  the  several 
pans. 

"The  landing  is  easy  every  where.  Very  good  hay  is  made  on  the  island ;  it 
is  a  kind  of  Dog's  Grass,  which  they  pull  up  by  the  roots ;  that  which  grpws 
by  the  river's  side  is  coarser.  The  river  (St.  Jago)  is  one  league  from  the  island, 
to  the  S.  W.  of  the  town,  and  marked  by  a  tuft  of  trees.  The  water  is  very 
good,  and  easil3r  got ;  the  boat  may  go  in  at  high  water,  and  at  about  half  a 
cable's  length  within,  you  will  find  it  fresh,  the  current  being  so  strong  that  the 
salt  water  cannot  get  in ;  you  have  commonly  a  quarter-wind  to  fetch  it  in,  and 
bring  it  back.  Here  is  very  good  fishing,  and  you  may  haul  the  seine,  as  well 
as  near  the  shore.  On  the  larboard  side  of  the  town,  about  a  league  from  the 
shore,  it  is  good  shooting ;  you  will  find  plenty  of  wood-pigeons  and  India  fowls." 


The  western  coasts  of  Hayti  or  St.  Domingo,  between  St.  Nicholas^ 

Mole  and  Cape  Tiburon. 

In  proceeding  from  St.  Nicholas'  Mole,  as  already  observed,  you  wiU  descry 
to  the  southward  the  Point  du  Cap  au  Four,  or  of  Fool's  Cape,  which  lies  ft| 
miles  to  the  southward  of  St.  Nicholas*  Point;  and  the  coast  thence  tends  tk 
leagues  more,  nearly  in  the  same  direction,  to  the  Point  de  la  Perle,  or  Pearl 
Point. 

34 


*,  * 


MM 


1^6 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


This  part  of  the  coast  is  steep,  without  any  shelter ;  but  here  it  is  generally  a 
calm.  The  currents  in-shore  set  to  the  northward,  and  two  leagues  in  the  offing, 
to  the  west  and  W.  S.  W. 

PLATTE-FORME  or  PLATFORM,  fcc— From  Point  de  la  Perle  the 

coast  rounds  to  the  south-eastward  and  east,  to  the  point  of  the  Platform,  which 
is  at  the  distance  of  three  leagues  from  the  former.  This  point  is  easily  distin- 
guished, as  well  by  its  flat  form,  as  by  its  being  the  souttiernrnostof  this  part  of 
the  island.  The  anchorage  is  before  a  small  sandy  cove,  at  the  bottom  of  which 
some  houses  are  seen.  You  anchor  near  the  shore  in  8  or  10  fathoms,  weedy 
bottom.  At  this  place,  water  may  be  obtained  after  rains,  but  there  is  none  to 
be  had  at  other  times. 

To  anchor  nnder  the  Platform,  bring  its  southernmost  point  E.  by  S.  the  west- 
ernmost point  in  sight  W.  N.  W.  the  watering-place  N.  N.  E.  Then  come  to 
in  about  9  fathoms.  In  deeper  water  the  ground  is  foul ;  and  the  nearer  the 
shore,  the  clearer  Uie  bottom.  The  bank  very  steep  for  two  cables'  llffgth. 
Without,  10  fathoms  soundings  will  not  be  1.  und.  The  bay  is  very  convenient 
for  cruising- ships  to  heel  and  b">ot-top  in,  Uc. 

From  the  Platform  Point  to  Point  a  Pierre,  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance 
of  the  Port  of  Gona'tves,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  E.  18^  S.  ten  leagues.  The 
point  is  high  and  steep ;  and  all  the  coast  between  is  safe,  and  may  be  ranged 
very  near:  there  is  anchorage,  even  for  large  ships,  at  Hen*-e  Bay  and  at  Port 
Fiment,  but  it  jought  to  be  used  only  in  case  of  necessity.  .  i  the  winter  months 
there  are  tornadoes  or  gales  of  wind  almost  every  night,  coming  from  the  S.  E. 
sonae  of  which  are  violent;  and  unless  you  have  business  on  this  part  of  the 
coist,  It  is  best  to  stand  off  two  or  three  leagues,  so  that  you  may,  with  any 
wind,  keep  to  the  westward. 

GONAIVES. — The  bay  of  Gonaives,  or  Gona^'^^eves,  as  the  French  pro- 
Bounce  it,  is  very  large  and  fine,  the  anchorage  excellent,  and  the  entrance  very 
easy.  You  range  along  the  shore,  at  half  a  league  or  two  miles  distance,  steer- 
ing nearly  east,  and  let  go  your  anchor  in  from  10  to  6  fathoms,  ooze:  you  will 
find  from  the  entrance  under  Gonaives  Point,  which  is  1o\y>  and  one  mile  east 
of  Point  Pierre,  15  and  13  fathoms:  the  water  decreases  as  ydu  get  into  the 
bay.  When  you  are  a  good  half  league  from  the  land,  and  two  miles  from  the 
Debercadaire,  (or  landing-place)  you  will  have  6  fathoms.  -After  you  have  dou- 
bled the  point,  leaving  it  on  your  larboard  hand,  you  will  see  Fort  Castries  on  a 
point  of  land,  which  you  must  not  approach  too  near,  as  there  is  a  key  that  lies 
about  a  mile  south  of  the  point. 

Observe  that,  from  the  south  point  of  the  entrance,  a  reef  e.;tends  to  the  N.E. 
to  the  distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile.     It  is  nearly  steep-to  from  6  fathoms. 

Captain  Mackellar  says  that  the  harbour  of  Gonaives  is  an  excellent  one,  and 
capable  of  containing  any  number  of  ships  of  the  largest  size,  completely  shut 
from"  all  winds ;  it  is  of  very  easy  access,  and  generally  clear,  excepting  a  small 
reef  that  extends  about  two  cables'  length  from  Fort  Castries,  on  the  north  aide. 
The  latitude  of  the  town  is  19°  26'  41",  and  its  longitude  720  41'  7'/  w.  Var.  5° 
50"  E.  1817. 

Ships  intending  to  anchor  at  Gonaives,  and  having  advanced  to  Point  Pevis, 
on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance,  will  gain  soundings  in  15  or  16  fathoms,  and 
have  the  town  in  sight,  bearing  about  E.  by  N.  tUey  may  proceed  for  the  town 
on  that  bearing,  keeping  in  mid-channel,  or  any  way  near  it;  then  soundings 
will  be  very  regular.  When  well  up  the  harbour,  you  will  eee  Fort  Castries, 
which  stands  on  the  north  side,  on  the  top  of  a  small  hill,  about  a  mile  without 
the  town.  When  tiiis  fort  bears  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  you  will  have  7  fathoms  in 
mid-channel,  fine  soft  mud.  When  it  bears  N.  by  W.  <^  W.  in  5i  or  6  fathoms, 
this  seems  to  be  the  best  anchorage,  and  as  close  m  as  a  ship  of  war  ought  to  go. 
I  have  been  so  far  up  the  harbour  as  to  have  Fort  Castries  bearing  N.  W.  In  4  fa- 
thoms ;  but  the  best  anchorage  is  with  it  bearing  N.  by  W.  <|  W.  and  the  middle 
of  the  town  E.  |  N.  nearly  in  mid-channel. 

The  sounding  all  over  the  harbour  is  so  very  regular,  that  it  is  not  necessary 
to  have  marks  fur  running  in  and  out  by ;  but  in  the  event  of  having  to  beat 
with  the  se^-breeze,  you  must  not  stand  too  near  Fort  Castries,  as  there  is  a 


■  „---' -J8t":r 


BLUNrS    AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


267 


small  reef  extending  i'rom  it  to  the  southward :  the  mark  for  keeping  clear  of 
this  reef  is,  a  large  tree  behind  the  town  on  with  the  northernmost  hou'^es,  bear- 
ing E.  by  N.  but  this  reef  stretches  to  so  short  a  distance,  that  a  ship  will  scarce- 
ly stand  so  near  the  shore  as  to  touch  it.  In  standing  to  the  south  side  of  the 
harbour,  give  the  shore  a  goc  1  birth  till  without  the  inner  point ;  and,  after  that, 
you  may  stand  from  shore  to  shore,  by  your  lead,  with  safety. 

St.  marc,  or  St.  MARK.— From  Point  St.  Pierre,  without  the  entrance 
of  t^'  Bay  of  Gonaives,  the  distance  to  Cape  St.  Mark,  in  a  direction  nearly 
south,  is  nearly  seven  leagues.  A  league  and  a  half  to  the  northward  of  St. 
Mark's  Bay  ia  a  low  point,  which  appears  at  a  distance  like  an  island,  and  forma 
a  cape  that  is  called  La  Point  du  Mome  au  Diable,  or  the  Devil's  Bluff  Point :  it 
points  out  the  mouth  of  the  River  Artibonite,  which  falls  into  the  sea  two  miles 
northward  of  the  point.  There  is  an  anchorage  the  whole  length  of  this  coast  for 
small  vessels  only. 

Cape  St.  Mark  is  high,  and  of  a  round  form ;  you  will  descry  at  a  great  dis- 
tance the  hillock  which  forms  it,,  and  stands  only  one  mile  from  the  sea-side. 

The  opening  of  th«  Bay  of  St.  Mark  lies  to  the  north  of  the  cape :  it  extends 
one  league  within  the  land,  and  the  water  in  it  has  a  great  depth.  Ships  anchor 
in  the  bottom  of  the  bay  under  the  town,  in  15  or  18  fathoms  of  water;  small 
vessels  may  come  into  less  water,  but  they  will  be  very  near  the  shore.  In  the 
south  side  of  the  bay  is  a  piece  of  foul  ground,  extending  two  miles  from  a  bluff 
point  to  the  S.  E.  and  on  which  a  reef  stretches  out  about  two  cables'  length 
from  the  coast. 


The  following  description  of  the  navigation  between  the  Platform  and 
St.  Mark,  is  given  by  Copt.  Hester ^  an  eminent  English  navigator. 

"  About  nine  leagues  eastward  of  the  Platform  is  the  fine  bay  and  harbour  of 
Gonaives.  All  along  this  coast  you  are  sure,  about  ten  o'clock  in  the  forenoon, 
to  have  the  sea-brtteze,  which  lasts  till  night,  and  then  you  have  the  wind  off- 
shore; therefore  you  may  stay  till  that  lime,  hefore  which  there  is  little  or  no 
wind  at  all.  If  you  intend  to  go  into  Gonaivos,  you  must  keep  a  good  distance 
off  the  south  point,  which  is  flat  for  a  considerable  distance.  When  you  are 
about  the  point,  open  with  the  bay,  you  will  descry  a  small  island,  which  you 
must  leave  on  your  larboard  side,  and  run  in  Avith  your  lead  in  10  or  12  fathoms 
of  water.  You  may  also  rur>  along  close  by  the  iJand,  if  you  choose,  in  4  or  5 
fathoms. 

"About  two  leagues  to  the  southward  of  Gonaives  is  Artibonite  Point,  and 
two  leagues  farther  south,  Artibonite  River.  In  sailing  from  Gonaives  to  the 
latter  place,  it  is  good  to  keep  your  lead ;  for,  as  you  come  near  the  river,  you 
will  find  the  water  shoalen  to  about  4  fathoms,  and,  after  that,  deepening  again 
to  7  or  8  fathoms. 

"This  place  is  very  remarkable,  the  land  being  high  and  uneven,  and  a  bold 
clear  shore  all  along  to  the  northward,  from  the  Platform  to  Gonaives.  When 
you  have  run  8  or  9  leagues  E.  S.  E.  i  E.  you  will  then  see  the  land  ,head,  or 
eastward,  very  low  by  the  water-side,  and  prodigious  mountains  over  it:  this 
low  land  reaches  from  Gonaives,  to  the  southward  of  Artibonite  River,  about  a 
mile :  and  its  south  end,  somewhat  higher  than  the  rest,  appears  like  a  table- 
land, overgrown  with  weeds  and  grof  n  trees :  this  is  the  Devil's  Bluff:  routid 
its  south  end  is  the  Bay  of  St.  Mark,  the  other  point  of  which  y  JU  can  see  to 
the  S.  W.  of  the  Devil's  Bluff.  To  anchor  off  the  river,  bring  t\\A  south  end  of 
the  low  land  to  bear  south,  three  milos  distant,  and  as  you  run  in,  you  will  see 
five  or  six  small  houses  by  the  water-side ;  bring  them  to  bear  E.  S.  E.  two 
miles ;  then  the  river  will  bea;  S.  E.  On  the  starboard  side,  or  south  side  of  the 
entrance  of  the  river,  there  is  likewise  a  small  hole,  which  you  may  see.  Be  sure 
to  keep  these  hearings,  and  you  will  be  upon  a  fine  level  bank,  where  you  may 
anchor  in  what  water  you  please,  from  20  to  6  fathoms.  But,  if  you  go  within 
two  miles  of  the  shore,  you  will  drop  off  that  bank  from  6  fathoms  to  £0,  thft 
next  cast ;  then  50  or  60,  and  then  90  or  100  fathoms,  within  less  than  half  a 


268 


BLUNT^fl   AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


jnile  of  the  ihore,  and  ^Vom  that  to  i  at  once.    When  you  are  at  anchor  at  Ar- 
tibonite,  you  may  see  i!ie  Platform,  bearing  W.  N<  W.  about  ten  leagues. 

**Artib6nite  River  is  not  a  place  of  great  note,  because  it  ebbs  almost  dry  at 
low  water ;  neither  Js  there  any  town  in  this  place,  but  only  some  plantations 
■five  or  six  miles  up  the  river :  there  you  can  have  good  water,  but  no  wood. 
The  sea- wind  comes  on  at  noon  at  N.  W.  till  10  at  nij^ht,  and  the  land-wind  at 
E.  by  S.  till  8  in  the  morning." 

From  St.  Mark's  Point,  the  coast  of  Hayti  tends  nearly  S.  E.  true,  six  and  a 
half  leagues,  to  La  Soifjjfriere,  or  Fazes  Point,  and  thence  B.  S.  E.  five  leagues, 
to  Port  au  Prince.  The  coast  is  generally  clean  and  bold,  and  you  may  run 
alon^  it,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,  in  10,  15?  and  2,0  fathoms  of  water.  In  pro- 
ceedmg  thus,  you  will  first  perceive  the  Magazine  of  Moutroui,  and  afterwards 
the  villages  of  Arcahais  or  Arcahaye,  and  Boiicassin ;  and  finally,  the  city  of  Port 
au  Prince.  Off  the  coast,  at  about  half-way  between  St.  Marks  Point  and  Port 
au  Prince,  are  three  small  islets,  called  the  Arcadins,  which  are  situate  at  nearly 
la  league  from  the  shore,  and  separated  by  channels  about  half  a  mile  in  breadth. 
fiesi.'  these  islets,  on  every  side,  the  depths  are  Si  and  6  fathoms. 

To  the  E.  by  S.  of  Boucassin,  and  very  near  the  coast,  is  Mouton  or  Sheep 
Key.  A.  passage  ought  never  to  be  attempted  within  this  key :  near  it,  on  the 
outside,  the  coast  is  clear,  and  water  deep.  A!;  out  two  leagues  to  the  southward 
of  this  island  is  the  roadstead  o(  Foso:  this  to  the  N.  E.  and  Lamentiu  Point  to 
the  S.  W.  form  the  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  Port  au  Prince.  To  the  westward 
of  this  roadstead  is  an  extensive  bank,  with  a  cluster  of  islets,  of  which  the 
easternmost  is  distant  about  two  miles  from  Foso  Roadstead,  and  the  southern- 
most three  miles  from  Lamentin  Point.  There  are,  besides,  two  other  islets, 
which  lie  almost  in  the  direction  of  the  two  points  of  the  bay,  and  which  are 
four  miles  from  Foso  Road,  and  two  from  Lamentin  Point. 

PORT  AU  PRINCE — The  shore  at  the  bottom  of  Port  au  Prince  Bay  is 
very  foul,  and  has  a  large  group  of  islets.  These  form  the  inner  anchorage ;  and 
to  gain  this,  the  aid  of  a  pilot  is  indispensible ;  but  the  Grand  Road  is  without 
the  reefs,  and  may  be  entered  without  a  pilot. 

Those  bound  to  Port  au  Prince,  from  the  N.  W.  after  having  made  St;  Mark's 
Point,  may  shape  their  course  either  to  pass  between  the  Arcadins  and  the  coast, 
or  between  them  and  the  island  Gonave:  the  fir  it  appears  to  be  the  best  route, 
for  thus  the  foul  grounds  on  the  S.  E.  side  of  Go  lave  must  be  avoided :  it  is  al- 
so to  be  observed  thi.t  the  wind  in  the  channel  is  generally  from  the  N.  E.  the 
nearer,  therefore,  you  pass  to  the  main-land,  the  more  free  will  you  run  to  the 
eastward.  Again,  a'most  every  afternoon,  in  the  rainy  season,  there  are  torna- 
does in  the  channel,  which  compel  vessels  to  lie-to,  and  to  keep  on  boards  or 
tacks,  that  they  may  not  fall  upon  the  reefs  of  Gonave.  If  you  can  foresee  the 
gale,  it  will  be  best  to  gain  an  anchorage  near  Arcahais  Point,  and  ther<i  ride  it 
out.*  When  past  the  Arcadins,  your  course  will  be  about  S.  E.  by  S.  to  get 
near  Lamentin  Point.  If  caught  by  night  to  the  eastward  of  this  point,  here 
you  may  anchor.  From  the  point  to  the  anchorage  of  Port  au  Prince,  the  dis- 
tance is  four  miles ;  and,  to  make  it,  you  must  steer  towards  the  city,  and  anchor 
aibout  half  a  mile  outside  the  islets,  in  10  or  15  fathoms. 

The  channel  between  the  Arcadins  and  coast  is  two  miles  wide,  and  in  the 
middle  of  it  you  will  never  have  more  than  28,  nor  less  than  10  fathoms.  The 
water  decreases  towards  the  Arcadins  to  6  or  &  fathoms,  corally  ground ;  at  the 
fame  distance  from  the  opposite  shore  is  the  like  depth,  with  muddy  bottom. 

From  Pearl  Point  to  the  entrance  of  St.  Mark's  Channel,  midway  between 
Cape  St.  Mark  and  the  Island  of  Gonave,  the  course  and  distance  are  S.  E.  i,  E. 
sixteen  leagues.  This  will  bring  you  to  the  westward  of  Cape  St.  Mark,  for 
which  you  may  steer ;  or,  you  may  continue  the  same  course  six  leagues  farther, 
which  will  lead  clear  of  the  Arcadins. 

Should  it  be  night  when  you  enter  the  channel  of  St.  Mark,  you  should  steer 
S.  S.  E.  ^  E.  in  order  to  clear  the  Arcadins  and  the  eastern  end  of  Gonave  Island. 
Having  run  about  four  leagues  on  this  track,  the  course  will  be  about  S.  E.  by  E. 

*  Or  you  may  anchor  to  the  northward  of  Lcog^ane,  on  the  south  side  of  the  channel,  up- 
Qo  (he  gcouod  extending  firom  Gonave  island,  as  shown  in  the  chart. 


BLUf^T  S   AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


269 


five  leagues,  to  make  Point  Lamentin,  which  is  on  the  south  side,  to  the  west- 
ward of  Port  au  Prince.  You  may  range  along  this  coast  without  fear,  only 
avoiding  the  shoals  of  the  sandy  key,  which  lies  at  a  short  league  northward  of 
the  point.  Should  you  pass  this  point  in  the  night,  you  would  do  right,  after  you 
have  run  a  mile  or  a  mile  and  a  half,  to  anchor;  you  will  find  12  or  18  fathoms 
water,  the  ground  good,  and  the  water  always  smottth. 

You  may  be  forced  to  turn  in  this  channel,  but  you  must  not  go  so  near  to  the 
Gonave  as  to  the  St.  Domingo  side ;  the  latter,  being  safe,  may  be  approached 
any  where  within  half  a  league. 

The  Arcadins,  as  before  noticed,  are  not  to  be  feared ;  a  shoal  stretches  out  from 
them  a  mile,  or  half  a  lea  ;ue  at  most,  with  5  or  6  fathoms  on  it:  on  the  edge  of 
the  west  and  south-wesf  sides  you  will  have  from  12  to  15  fathoms,  corally 
ground:  but  there  is  gooi  ground  to  be  found  in  8,  12,  and  13  fathoms,  coarse 
sand  and  shells. 

GONAVE  ISLAND.— The  greatest  length  of  Gonave  Island  is  ten  leagues 
E.  S.  E.  and  W.  Jf .  W.  its  breadth,  which  is  very  regular,  is  nearly  two  and  a 
half  leagues. 

This  island  was  surveyed  in  1787,  by  ]VJ[.  de  Lieude  de  Sepmanville,  who  has 
given  the  following  description  of  its  coasts,  and  the  adjacent  dangers. 

The  most  dangerous  reefs  are  those  which  lie  to  the  S.  E.  of  Petite  or  Little 
Gonave,  which  is  situate  near  the  S.  E.  point  of  the  great  island.  These  seem 
to  be  joined  with  the  land  of  the  Little  Gonave,  and  stretch  more  than  a  league 
into  the  oifing,  laying  at  about  800  toises,  or  nearly  a  common  English  mile  from 
the  shore.  A  vessel  may  pass,  in  an  urgent  case,  between  them  and  the  Little  Go- 
nave, but  the  attempt  would  be  imprudent,  especially  if  the  wind  be  not  well  set 
in,  as  the  currents  are  very  strong  and  irregular.  I  have  observed,  however,  that 
in  this  part,  they  run  more  generally  to  the  N.  N.  E.  and  between  the  two 
Gonaves. 

Small  vessels,  drawing  8  or  9  feet  of  water,  may  find  a  good  anchorage  to  the 
west  of  the  Little  Gonave,  which  may  be  best  entered  from  the  southward. 
*«.  TheN.  E.  point  of  Gonave,  called  Galet  Point,  is  low,  and  bordered  with  a 
reef,  which  stretches  along  the  east  coast,  towards  the  south,  and  extends  1100 
toises  (1170  English  fathoms)  opposite  the  place  called  Trou  a  I'Eau,  or  Water 
Hole :  within  is  a  white  ground,  where  there  are  from  4  to  6  fathoms  of  water. 

To  sail  near  this  reef,  which  every  vessel  can  do  that  draws  9  or  10  feet,  you 
must,  in  coming  from  the  east,  take  a  channel  which  is  opposite  to  a  fisherman's 
hut.  There  are  several  other  channels,  which  are  easily  known  by  the  non-ap- 
pearance of  white  ground.  About  88  fathoms,  within  the  reef,  you  may  range 
along  the  coast  as  far  as  Anae  a  Galet,  or  Galet  Cove,  in  case  the  wind  should  fail. 
There  is  anchorage  every  where,  but  the  places  to  be  preferred  are  Piron  Cove, 
Constantin's  Hole,  and  especially  Galet  Cove,  which  are  very  convenient :  the 
hold  is  good,  and  the  reefs  shelter  you  from  the  swell  of  the  sea. 

The  several  anchorages  on  the  north  coast  for  boats  or  schooners  are,  L'Isleta 
Marc,  Grand  Lagoon,  and  Bahama  Channel,  where  you  are  equally  sheltered ; 
the  remainder  of  the  coast  is  likewise  bordered  \  ith  reefs,  but  they  are  very  near 
the  shore,  and  you  find  therft  no  anchorage. 

The  western  part  is  an  iron-bound  coast,  along  which  you  may  range  pretty 
near;  but  it  is  not  so  from  the  S.  W.  point  to  Point-a-Retoures,  where  you  may 
find  a  number  of  small  detached  reefs,  almost  even  with  the  water.  Several 
small  vessels  may  anchor  in  that  part,  on  the  spot  named  Les  Baleioes,  or  the 
"Whales,  but  not  without  a  pilot  well  acquainted. 

The  only  place  where  two  or  three  huge  ships,  such  as  frigates,  can  anchor,  is 
La  Bale  du  Pare,  or  Park  Bay,  Avhich  lies  to  the  N.  W.  of  Point  Fantasque,  the 
south  point  of  the  island :  but  coming  into  it  is  dangerous,  on  account  of  several 
detached  reefs,  which  are  never  seen. 

ROCHELOIS.— The  reef  called  RocMois  had  been  fatal  to  many  ships,  and 
was  iitill  much  feared  by  navigators,  its  true  situation  having  never  been  well  as- 
certained: it  lies  in  the  channel  which  separates  the  south  coast  of  the  Gonave 
from  thatof  Hayti.  M.  Le  Compte  de  la  Luzerne  ordered  me  to  survey,  and  deter- 
mine the  position  of  that  reef.  I  went  and  anchored  within  a  cable's  length  of  the 
rocks,  which  are  above  water:  I  landed  on  these  rocks,  where  I  took  fourobier- 


270 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


''■m- 


vationfl'of  latitude,  as  well  as  the  bearing  of  all  the  objects  in  sight ;  and,  ha^ng 
measured  the  whole  extent  of  the  shoal,  I  found  its  breadth  to  be  SOOO  toises, 
(2130  fathoms)  in  a  direction  N.  and  S.  nearly,  and  its  length  3155  toises  (3360 
fathoms)  from  E.  to  W. 

The  rocks,  called  Pirogues,  which  are  towards  the  middle  of  this  reef,  were 
already  known;  J  found  theif  extent  to  be  125  toises  (133  fathoms) ;  they  are 
quite  uncovered  at  low  tide,  but  three  heads  onlj'  are  perceived  at  high  water. 
M.  Le  Compte  de  Ghastenet  Puysegur,  who  had  no  occasion  to  explore  the  ex- 
tent of  this  reef,  says,  in  his  account  of  the  navigation  along  the  coast  of  St. 
Domingo,  that  the  rocks,  which  show  themselves  at  low  water,  are  the  only 
things  to  be  feared  on  the  Rochclois ;  but  I  have  found  two  other  shoals  of  very 
small  extent,  which  are  very  dangerous,  since  they  have  only  two  fathoms  water. 
They  lie  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  rocks  in  the  middle,  one  at  800  toises  distance,  and 
the  other  at  300.  There  may  be  some  other  dangers  on  the  Rochelois,  but  I  could 
not  make  myself  sure  of  it,  having  been  only  four  days  on  that  expedition. 
Prudence  requires,  that  with  a  large  ship  you  should  avoid  it  entirely :  there  is 
more  room  for  tacking  to  the  north  of  that  reef  than  to  the  southward  of  it .  you 
are  only  to  keep  at  the  distance  of  one  mile,  at  least,  from  Gonave,  if  you  pass 
by  the  north  ;  whereas,  in  passing  by  the  south,  you  may  range  along  the  Hay- 
tien  coast,  which  is  clear  and  safe. 

The  latitude  of  the  middle  of  the  Rochelois,  deduced  from  the  four  observa- 
tions, is  I8O37'  20"  N. 

PORT  AU  PRINCE,  to  the  WESTWARD.— On  leaving  Port  au  Prince, 
when  bound  to  the  Petite  Goave,  you  may  range  along  the  south  coast,  at  the 
distance  of  one  or  two  miles,  all  the  shore  being  bold  and  safe,  as  far  as  Point 
Leogane. 

From  Point  Lamentin  to  Leogane  Point  there  is  no  anchorage ;  but.you  will 
find  a  good  bottom  for  anchoring  betwe^  l>  the  latter  point  and  the  anchorage  off 
the  town  of  Leogane. 

From  Leogane,  the  coast  tends  to  the  south,  and  forms  the  bays  of  Grand 
Goave  and  Petit  Goave,  which  are  separated  by  a  point  and  a  hill,  named  the  Ta- 
pion  or  Hummock  of  Goave.  You  enter  into  Petit  Goave  Bay,  by  leaving  on 
the  larboard  hand  an  islet,  which  is  very  near  the  coast,  and  which  lies  to  the 
north  of  the  town :  to  the  westward  of  this  islet  you  may  anchor  in  9,  12,  and 
\5  fathoms.  Petit  Goave  is  10  leagues  from  Port  au  Prince,  but,  as  you  are 
forced  to  double  Point  Leogane,  the  run  is  longer. 

MIRAGOANE.— -From  the  Hummock  of  Petit  Goave,  to  the  Tapion  du 
Trou  Chouchou,  or  Hummock  of  Miragoane,  the  coast  runs  West  eight  miles, 
then  W.  1  S.  six  and  a  half  miles,  to  the  careening  island  of  Miragoane  Bay. 

To  anchor  at  Miragoane,  you  come  within  a  mile  of  the  careening  island, 
when  you  perceive  a  small  town  at  the  foot  of  a  mountain,  and  some  mangrove 
islands  to  the  westward.  You  keep  the  mid-channel,  between  the  first  islet  and 
the  shore,  where  the  village  is  situated,  and  come  to  an  anchor  within,  in  from 
18  to  8  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.  This  anchorage  ought  not  to  be  taken  without 
a  pilot ;  the  channel  is  not  more  than  a  cable's  length  in  width,  and  you  must  an- 
chor so  soon  as  you  are  within.  •  ^ 

From  Miragoane  Careening  Island,  the  coast  bends  in,  and  foi-ms  the  bay  of 
that  name.  It  is  shut  in  on  the  north  by  Frigate  Island,  a  small  islet,  from  which 
a  white  shoal  extends  half  a  league  to  the  eastward,  and  nearly  north  to  the  an- 
chorage at  Miragoane,  which  obliges  you,  in  coming  in  or  going  out,  to  keep  the 
island  shore  very  close  aboard.  From  this  place  the  coast  tends  west,  to  the 
village  of  Rochelois,  which  is  situated  at  the  foot  of  a  large  hummock. 

From  Miragoane  the  coast  to  the  westward  is  clear  and  deep ;  and  beyond 
Rochelois  are  seen  the  towns  of  VAnse-a-Veau  and  Petit  Trou.  From  the  last, 
the  coast  forms  a  large  bay,  Baradaires. 

BARADAIRES  BAY — From  the  village  of  Rochelois  to  the  entrance  of  the 
Bay  of  Baradaires,  the  coast  runs  W.  5  leagues.  Baradaires  Bay  is  formed  on 
the  S.  E.  by  Roitelets  Point,  and  on  the  N.  W.  by  the  Bee  du  Marsouin,  or  the 
Porpoise  Snout:  these  points  bear  from  each  other  nearly  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  four 
miles.  Near  the  east  coast  of  the  bay  there  is  an  island,  with  several  islets, 
which  seni  out  a  reef  and  Ah&How  that  almost  joins  the  western  coast,  leaving  a 


#■ 


BLUNT^S  AMEBICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


271 


bur  observa- 


pass  or  channeS,  of  only  five  or  six  cables'  length  in  breadth.  To  proceed  into 
the  bay,  you  keep  along  the  peninsula  of  the  Bee,  and  come  into  from  8  to  10 
fathoms.  There  is  a  good  depth  of  v^ater  in  the  middle  of  the  bay,  which  is  of 
great  extent ;  but  there  are  several  weedy  shoals,  which  prevents  your  going  in 
without  a  pilot,  well  acquainted. 

THE  CAYMITES,  fcc— The  northern  extremity  of  the  Bee  de  Marsouin, 
and  the  north  part  of  Grand  Caymite  Island,  bear  nearly  VV.  N.  W.  and  E.  S.  £. 
fuur  leagues. 

The  coast  west  of  the  peninsula  of  the  Bee  b<>n('.s  in  to  the  southward,  and 
forms  a  bight;  thence,  rounding  out  a  little,  it  tends  W.  by  N.  as  far  as  Point 
Jeremie.  This  bight  and  Great  Caymite  Island  form  a  large  bay,  called  Caymite 
Bay,  where  there  is  very  good  anchorage  f»r  all  sorts  of  vessels.  You  may  come 
to  it  without  a  pilot,  and  anchor  under  the  island  in  what  depth  you  choose. 
You  may  also  proceed  to  Flamand's  Bay,  near  the  peninsula,  ranging  along  the 
peninsula  side,  and  anchor  opposite  a  sandy  beach,  in  what  depth  you  please. 

The  Bay  of  Cay  mites  presents  several  very  fine  anchorages,  very  easy  to  come 
at  with  the  assistance  of  the  lead  alone  ;  but  there  is  not  a  good  passage  between 
the  Grand  Caymite  and  the  shore  ;  and  you  will  not  find  more  than  13  feet  water 
upon  the  white  shoals  of  the  Little  Caymite,  or  of  Foucaud  Islet ;  and  then 
there  are  several  coral  rocks,  which  rise  within  two  or  three  feet  of  the  surface 
of  the  water,  so  that  no  vessel,  but  very  small  ones,  ever  attempt  it  without  a 
pilot.  These  white  shoals  extend  three  leagues  W.  S.  W.  f^om  the  Grand 
Caymite. 

JEREMIE. — From  the  north  part  of  the  Grand  Caymite  to  the  Point  Riviere 
iSfoZee,  or  Cape  Rosa,  which  is  one  and  a  half  league  W.  N.  W.  of  Point  Jeremie, 
is  nine  atid  a  half  leagues :  this  Salt  River  Point  is  the  northernmost  point  west- 
ward from  Port  au  Prince.  Under  Point  Jeremie  is  the  village  of  that  name, 
whose  anchorage  is  very  small,  and  not  proper  for  large  ships ;  schooners  and 
small  vessels  may  arjchur  within  the  reef,  but  no  ships  which  draw  upwards  of 
twelve  or  fourteen  feet  should  ever  anchor  here,  except  in  case  of  necessity, 
» there  being  no  shelter  for  them ;  in  short,  it  is  a  bad  anchorage  which  must  be 
avoided  during  the  noi'ths. 

From  Cape  Rosa,  or  Salt  River  Point,  to  Cape  Dame  Marie,  or  Donna  Maria, 
the  coast  tends  W.  S.  W.  thirteen  miles. 

All  this  shore  is  safe  and  bold,  within  a  quarter  of  a  league ;  it  does  not  present 
any  shelter,  although,  in  case  of  necessity,  you  might  anchor  in  the  Anae  a 
Claire,  or  Clair  Bay,  which  is  U  league  from  Salt  River.  This  bay,  or  rather 
cove,  is  so  very  small,  that  two  ships,  100  feet  long,  would  be  embarrassed  by 
each  other :  it  can  only  serve  as  a  shelter  to  very  small  vessels,  and  is  easily  dis- 
covered by  keeping  along  shore. 

CAPE  DAME  MARIE,  or  DONNA  MARIA.— So  soon  as  you  descry 
Cape  Dame  Marie,  by  the  False  Cape  of  that  name,  and  are  half  a  league  distant 
from  it,  you  will  strike  soundings  of  from  15  to  ISjfathoms,  and  may  range  along 
this  cape,  at  the  distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  league,  in  from  8  to  12  fathoms,  weedy 
bottom. 

To  anchor  in  the  Bky  of  Dame  Marie,  you  must  keep  the  shore  on  board,  steer- 
ing about  S.  E.  the  wind  being  generally  adverse ;  and,  with  your  lead,  you 
come  to  an  anchor  W.  N.  W.  of  a  large  white  tapion  or  hummock,  on  which 
stands  a  battery,  and  within  a  musket  shot  of  which  you  will  find  five  fathoms. 
There  is  auchoring  bottom  all  over  this  bay ;  a  mile  from  the  shore  you  will 
have  from  4  to  6  fathoms ;  and,  at  two  miles,  from  6  to  10.  You  will  be  shel- 
tered from  the  winds  between  the  north  and  south,  passing  by  the  east ;  notwith- 
standing which,  ships  that  lie  in  8  or  10  fathoms  will  feel  the  swell,  if  there  is  a 
fresh  breeze  without.  In  entering,  keep  about  half  a  mile  oflF,  but  not  less,  in 
order  to  keep  clear  of  a  reef  which  extends  to  the  length  of  a  cable  and  a  half 
to  the  west  from  the  cape.  Preserve  this  distance  from  the  coast,  until  past  the 
False  Cape,  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Dame  Marie,  and  which  is  ako  foul. 
When  once  past  False  Cape,  you  may  haul  to  the  wind,  which  is  generaFly  scant 
in  the  bay,  to  get  the  vessel's  head  to  S.  E.  with  which  course,  and  keepuig  the 
lead  going,  you  may  gain  the  anchorage,  as  above. 


m  \ 


^!Mk^-- 


# 


272 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


t 


From  Ccq)e  Dame  Marit,  the  coast  runs  S.  by  W.  5  leagues,  to  Point  des  Irois, 
and  forms,  at  that  distance,  several  bays  and  coves,  where  vessels  may  anchor. 
In  general,  a  frigate  may  run  in  along  this  coast,  with  her  lead,  and  anchor  in 
any  part,  there  being  no  shoals,  or  any  danger  under  water,  the  ground  gradually 
increasing  towards  the  shore. 

To  the  S.  by  W.  of  Cape  Dame  Marie,  2i  leagues  distant,  and  about  half  a 
league  off  Point  Ministre,  or  Minister  Point,  are  some  rocks,  called  La  Beleines, 
or  the  Whales.  These  rocks  are  abovw  ' vater,  and  surrounded  with  a  white  shoal 
which  does  not  extend  more  than  half  a  cable's  length  from  them,  and  on  which 
are  four  fathoms  ;  a  ship  can  sail  between  it  and  the  shore ;  in  the  mid-channel 
she  will  have  6  fathoms,  and  may  go  as  close  as  she  pleases  to  take  them  on  the 
offside:  the  sea  always  breaks  on  this  shoal. 

One  league  to  the  S.  S.  E.  from  the  Whales,  lies  Pierre  Joseph's  Islet,  where 
a  convoy  may  anchor :  the  anchorage  is  very  good  and  easy ;  and  large  ships 
anchor  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  islet. 

All  along  this  western  coast  you  have  ground  at  two  leagues  from  the  shore, 
the  depth  gradually  increasing  as  you  leave  the  land ;  so  that,  in  general,  you 
n'lA  find  four  and  Ave  fathoms,  at  one  mile  distance ;  10  or  12  at  two  miles,  and 
regularly  from  15  t»  17,  at  three  miles  :  when  you  get  into  80  fathoms,  you  will 
lose  soundings  suddenly.  ^^ 

POINT  des  IROIS,  or  Irish  Point,  as  the  English  sailors  call  it,  is  the  wes- 
ternmost point  of  Hayti ;  it  is  not  very  high,  though  remarkable,  from  a  small 
hummock  on  its  extremity,  which  appears  detached  from  the  coast,  and  makes 
like  an  island :  this  point  forms  the  north  part  of  the  Bay  des  Irois,  or  Irish  Bay  : 
you  may  range  very  close  to  the  land  on  the  north  side  of  the  bay,  there  being 
from  9  to  18  fathoms,  touching  the  shore. 

The  anchorage  is  to  the  N.  W.  of  a  black  rock,  which  is  seen  a  little  way  to 
the  southward  of  the  town  ;  it  is  in  from  9  to  10  fathoms,  shelly  ground.  You 
may  anchor  likewise  to  the  southward  of  the  rocky,  islet,  N.  N.  W.  of  a  small 
hummock,  towards  the  middle  of  the  bay:  the  depth  is  here  from  8  to  9  fathoms, 
sand  and  muddy  ground. 

The  bay  is  exposed  to  southerly  winds :  there  is  always  a  great  sea  within,  and 
the  Debercadaire,  or  landing-place,  is  of  course  a  bad  one.  It  is  situated  in  the 
eddy  of  the  currents,  which  set  to  the  northward,  on  the  west  side,  and  to  the 
S.  E.  on  the  east  coast.  Besides,  the  sea  in  the  offing  is  alternately  agitated 
with  violence  by  the  N.  E.  and  east  breezes,  which  prevail  on  the  west  coast,  and 
by  the  S.  E.  winds  that  blow  on  the  south  coast.  Irois  Bay  is  terminated  to  the 
south  by  Cape  Carcasse,  which,  with  Cap-a-Foux,  or  Fool's  Cape,  forms  a 
large  roundish  point,  whose  end  is  at  Cape  Tiburon. 

CAPE  TIBURON. — These  three  capes,  seen  at  a  distance,  form  but  one, 
which  is  called  Cape  Tiburon,  and  is  very  easily  known  by  its  form  and  height. 
It  is  a  large  mountain,  very  lofty,  whose  top  is  rounded  like  the  back  of  a  dosser, 
or  French  band-basket,  ancL  comes  gradually  down  towards  the  sea. 

Cape  Tiburon,  properly  speaking,  is  five  miles  S.  25°  E.  of  Irish  Point,  and 
forms  the  entrance  of  Tiburon  Bay,  which  is  to  the  eastward  of  it.  Its  situa- 
tion is,  latitude  18°  19' 25",  longitude  74°  27' 32".  You  Will  get  no  ground  at 
50  fathoms,  two  cables'  length  ftora  the  coast,  between  Cape  Carcasse,  and  very 
near  Cape  Tiburon :  but  off  the  latter,  at  that  distance,  you  will  have  from  24 
to  30  fathoms,  and  a  little  farther  out,  quickly  lose  soundings. 

On  the  north  shore  of  Tiburon  Bay,  the  water  is  deep  to  within  2  or  3  cables' 
length  of  the  rocks,  and  within  half  a  cable's  length  you  have  6  and  7  fathoms, 
stiff  clayish  ground.  On  the  east  and  S.  E.  shores,  you  have  4  and  4^  fathoms, 
fine  muddy  ground,  within  a  cable's  length,  all  round.  The  edge  of  soundings 
runs  as  the  bay  forms,  half  a  mile  from  its  head.  You  may  anchor  any  where 
in  the  hay ;  but  bring  Point  Bureos,  the  south  point,  (which  is  foul)  S.  by  E.  and 
the  pitch  of  Cape  Tiburon  W.  N.  W.  in  4  or  5  fathoms ;  from  that  to  8  or  9  is 
very  good  ground.  Wooding  and  watering  in  plenty.  You  may  either  land 
^our  casks,  and  roll  them  over  a  narrow  neck  of  land,  into  the  river,  or  fill  them 
in  your  boats  and  buckets. 


m 


^^m 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


273 


Virectioru  for  making  the  Island  Hayti,  and  its  different  PorU* 

[From  the  Derrotero  de  laa  Antillas,  ifc]  « 

If  a  vessel  is  bound  to  a  port  on  the  north  coast,  she  may,  as  we  have  already 
shown,  (page  255)  at  once  get  into  the  latitude  of  Cape  Cabron,  without  makinf 
any  of  the  Carribee  or  Virgin  Islands;  by  this  she  will  go  clear  of  the  danger- 
ous isle  of  Anegada,  and  be  sure  of  not  getting  to  leeward  af  her  port  of  destina- 
tion. Having  made  Cape  Cabron,  no  more  is  to  be  attended  to  than  to  follow 
the  coast,  at  a  proper  distance  from  the  projecting  points,  and  without  getting 
into  the  bays  it  forms,  until  approaching  your  destined  port,  when  you  may 
keep  so  near  to  the  coast,  to  windward  of  ii,  as  to  make  sure  not  to  pass  it.  If 
bound  to  a  port  on  the  south  coast,  it  is  proper  to  make  the  island  of  St.  Bar- 
tholemew,  passing  its  south  side,  and  run  down  by  the  south  of  Porto  Rico,  to 
make  the  island  of  Saona,  if  you  are  bound  to  the  harbour  of  St.  Domingo,  or 
to  Ocoa  Bay;  but,  if  not,  you  may  proceed  at  once  to  make  Beata  and  Alto- 
vela,  passing  to  the  south  of  th^m,  and  so  directing  yourself  as  to  approach'the 
coast  to  windtoard  of  your  port  of  destination,  in  sufRcient  time  to  be  certain  of 
not  overrunning  it.  Those  bound  direct  for  harbours  on  the  west  end  of  the 
island,  ought  to  make  the  north  side  in  the  rainy  season,  or  season  of  the  souths, 
and  the  south  side  in  the  dry  season,  or  that  of  the  norths;  thus  they  free  them- 
selves from  the  dangers  and  anxieties  which  the  souths  cause,  in  tha  Jirst  instance, 
and  which  the  norths  cause  in  the  second ;  for,  it  is  well  known  to  every  seanian 
that,  not  only  is  an  off-shore  wind  not  dangerous,  but  that  it  allows  of  continuing 
your  voyage ;  for,  though  it  may  blow  very  hard,  it  can  ra'se  no  sea,  and  you 
can  regulate  the  sail  according  to  circumstances. 

In  navigating  from  leeward  to  windward,  this  island  affords  the  very  great  ad- 
vantage of  land-breezes.  -  It  is  well  known  that  the  nearer  you  are  to  the  land, 
the  fresher  these  winds  are,  and,  therefore,  the  farther  you  can  run  with  them  : 
thus,  in  tliis  case,  it  answers  to  keep  as  near  along  shore  as  you  can,  which  i» 
sufficiently  easy;  and,  keeping  in  mind  the  particular  description  of  it,  you  need 
not  fear. 

If  it^be  a  matter  of  indifference  to  you,  %vhether  you  beat  up  the  north  or  south 
side,  you  ought  to  choose  the  Jirst  in  the  season  of  the  souths,  and  the  second  in 
the  season  of  the  norths;  and  this  is  the  more  requisite,  as,  when  you  are  run- 
ning from  windward  to  leeward,  you  have  not  the  same  necessity  to  keep  near 
land,  as  when  bound  from  leeward  to  windward ;  and  it  is  very  certain  that,  in 
the  latter  case,  if  either  a  nof  th  or  a  south  catch  you,  when  very  close  on  their 
respective  coasts,  fatal  consequences  may  ensue ;  butflf  it  be  not  a  matter  of 
indifference  to  you,  which  side  you  work  to  windward  on,  or  that  you  must  of 
necessity  take  one  in  preference  to  the  other,  notwithstanding  the  obstacles,  the 
risk,  at  greatest,  is  not  such  as  ought  to  .thwart  a  navigator  from  this  track,  who 
knows  that,  in  proportion  to  the  difficulty,  must  be  his  vigilance  and  activity. 

Relative  to  the  currents,  which  may  be  found  along  the  shores  of  Hayti,  we 
may  add  that  their  effects  may  be  looked  upon  as  inconsiderable ;  some,  howe- 
ver affirm,  and  suppdfee,  that  there  are  currents  of  a  mile  an  hour  setting  to  the 
westward ;  but,  for  ourselves,  we  can  only  say  that  we  have  no  foundation  for 
such  an  assertion,  but  rather  have  grounds  for  thinking  them  of  little  importance. 


,# 


The  Windward  Channel  between  Hayti  and  Jamaica. 

By  the  Windward  Channel  is  meant  that  channel  which  lies  between  Hayti  on 
the  one  side,  and  Cuba  with  Jamaica  on  the  other.  The  coasts  which  form  it  on 
the  east  and  north  have  already  been  described,  and  the  coasts  of  Jamaica  are 
described  hereafter.  The  breadth  of  the  channel  between  Cape  Tiburon,  in 
Hayti,  and  Morant  Point,  the  eastern  end  of  Jamaica,  is  31  leaguei,  in  a  W.  S. 

*  ''  25  ^ 


,^-|^,^-'* 


•» 


274 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


W.  direction ;  and  to  the  northward  of  this  line  is  the  little  isle  called  Namvt, 
and  a  dangerous  shoal  bank  called  that  of  the  Formigas  ;  to  the  southward  is  a 
^ank  of  soundings,  hut  clear  of  dangers,  and  the  Morant  Keys,  with  their  sur- 
rounding hank  :  these  we  shall  describe  in  order. 

NAVAZA. — This  is  a  small  uninhabited  island,  and  bold-to  all  round,  which 
lies  with  Cape  Tiburon  hearing  E.  i  S.  12  leagues ;  Cape  Dame  Marie,  N.  E. 
by  E.  I  E.  13  leagues;  and  Morant  Point,  Jamaica,  S.  W.  by  W.  J  W.  twenty 
leagues.  Its  latitude  is  18^  S13\\  and  its  longitude,  according  to  the  mean  of  se- 
veral objervations,  75°  6'.  Under  the  N.  W.  point  there  is  anchorage,  within  a 
quarter  or  half  a  mile  of  the  rocks,  in  from  12  to  17  fathoms,  sandy -bottom : 
but  there  is  a  great  swell,  with  strong  sea  breezes,  and  very  bad  landing. 

The  east  of  the  island  Navaza  appears  as  if  deposited  in  three  different  layers 
or  strata  ;  the  undermost  white  cli/T  with  (in  some  places)  apparently  pretty  large 
white  stones  lying  above  it.  The  middle  and  upper  strata  resemble  each  other ; 
but,  in  some  places  the  upper  is  precipitous,  forming  small  cliffs,  perceptible  on 
a  close  approach.  The  next  end  is  of  a  different  character,  scemuigly  a  kind  of 
cliff  from  top  to  bottom  ;  part  of  it  appears  in  a  shade. 

There  seems  to  be  some  scrubby  brushwood  on  the  island ;  on  a  close  ap- 
proach, when  steering  S.  W.  to  weather  the  west  end  of  the  island,  its  appear- 
ance remained  much  the  same,  and  its  greatest  height  may  be  about  70  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  sea  :  it  is  about  one  Teague  in  length.  When  about  a  mile 
distant  from  Navaza,  it  loses  the  appearance  of  three  strata,  and  what  appeared 
loose  white  stones,  on  the  top  of  the  low  cliff,  seems  now  to  be  merely  the  upper 
part  of  the  rocks,  washed  bare,  as  far  as  it  is  subject  to  the  action  of  the  water  in 
gales  of  wind. 

When  near  the  island,  it  does  not  appear  one  league  in  length,  and  is  very 
narrow  from  north  to  south.  Navaza,  we  have  been  informed,  has  Ofarly  thn 
appearance  of  Mona,  as  represented  in  page  243. 

The  FORMIGAS,  or  ANTS,  are  some  dangerous  coral  spots,  upon  a  sand 
bank,  nearly  nine  miles  in  length,  extending  in  a  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  tlirection, 
about  ten  leagues»to  the  westward  from  Navaza.  Its  eastern  part  bears  N.  E. 
by  N.  forty  miles  from  Morant  Point,  Jamaica  ;  and,  from  the  body  of  the  shoal 
the  north-east  end  of  Jamaica  bears  S.  W.  by  W.  38  miles.  The  eajitern  part  is 
the  shoalest,  not  having,  in  some  places,  more  than  13  or  14  feet  of  water.  The 
edge  here  is  nearly  steep-to,  and  there  is,  generally,  a  great  swell  upon  it.  In 
standing  over  the  bank,  when  the  depth  increases  to  7  or  7j  fathoms,  there  will  be 
a  sudden  increase  to  13  and  15  fathoms,  and  thence  no  bottom  at  20.  On  the 
eastern  edge  the  bottom  is  dark,  and  not  easily  seen  in  hazy  weather ;  but,  to  the 
westward,  the  water  is  discoloured,  and  appears  lighter. 

The  centre  of  the  bank  is  in  about  18°  30'  N.  and  75°  40'  W.  The  fall  of  the 
high  land  over  Plaintain  Garden  River,  which  is  the  easternraoft  high  land  on 
Jamaica,  bearing  S.  W.  by  S.  leads  directly  on  the  bank.  *"'** 

BANK  of  SOUNDINGS.— This  bank,  which  is  yet  imperfectly  known,  lies 
nearly  on  the  direct  route  of  vessels  botind  from  the  south  side  of  Hayti  to  Ja- 
maica. In  the  year  1805,  the  Renard,  brig  of  war,  passed  over  it,  whence  its 
breadth  was  computed  at  16  miles.  In  latitude  17*^  44',  a10  or  9  leagues  to  the 
N.  E.  of  the  Morant  Keys,  and  in  the  distance  of  five  miles  on  an  cast^  course, 
was  a  regular  depth  of  18  fathoms. 

The  MORANT  KEYS.— These  keys,  which  lie  at  the  distance  of  thirty-two 
miles  S.  S.  E.  fronikthe  east  end  of  Jamaica,  consist  of  four  low  islets  or  keys, 
situate  in  form  of  a  crescent,  and  are  surrounded  by  a  dangerous  reef.  They  are 
distinguished  by  N.  E.  Key,  Sand  Key,  Savanna,  or  Bird  Key,  and  S.  W.  Key. 
You  may  approach  within  S,i  miles  of  any  of  them.  The  reef  on  the  eastern  side  is 
a  most  dangerous  ledge  of  coral.  The  keys  lie  between  lat.  17°  24',  and  17°  28', 
long.  75°  55'.  To  the  N.  W.  of  them  is  good  anchoring  ground,  in  5  or  6  fathoms, 
white  sand  and  shells.  To  anchor,  give  the  N.  E.  Key  a  birth  of  li  or  2  miles ; 
and  when  the  S.  W.  Key  bears  S.  by  E.  steer  directly  for  it,  and  you  will  pass  close 
to  the  westward  of  the  rocky  spit,  that  extends  to  the  westward  from  the  N.  E. 
Key,  and  has  but  little  more  than  3  fathoms  over  it.  When  the  N.  E.  Key  bears 
E.  by  N.  or  J^.  N.  £.  you  may  haul  more  to  the  eastward,  and  anchor  with  tho 


.it 


*SsB*l*i>*ii 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  FILOT. 


276 


# 


#■ 


S.  W.  Key  bearing  South,  or  S.  by  W.  and  Sovanna  Key,  thfc  next  to  it,  S.  E.  In 
from  5  to  U  futhoins,  sandy  bottom.  As  there  are  some  spota  of  coral,  it  is  re- 
quisite to  ascertain  that  the  bottom  be  clear. 

These  keys  are  only  seven  or  nine  feet  above  the  water.  The  body  of  theih 
lies  from  Port  Mor.uit,  Jamaica,  S.  S.  E.  i  £.  about  11  leagues.  With,  the  keys 
bearing  S.  W.  nearly  four  miles,  there  are  about  18  fathoms  water,  stony  ground, 
mixed  with  fine  red  speckled  gravel.  With  them  S.  W.  by  S.  about  four  miles, 
there  are  IG  fathoms;  and  when  S.  S.  W.  i  W.  six  miles,  there  are  23  fathoms, 
with  ground  as  above. 

In  ordter  to  ascertain  when  you  are  to  the  eastward  of  the  keys,  observe  that 
Morant  Point,  or  the  east  end  of  Jamaica,  and  the  north-east  end  of  the  same, 
bear  from  each  other  N.  W.  i  N.  and  S.  E.  i  S.  so  that,  when  the  north-cast  end, 
which  is  high  and  blufT,  is  to  be  seen  en  that  bearing,  or  to  the  westward  of  it, 
you  will  be  to  the  eastward  of  the  keys. 

Also,  when  coming  in  from  the  southward  for  Jamaica,  by  keeping  Yallah's 
Hill,  hereafter  noticed,  to  the  northward  of  N.  W.  |  N.  you  will  pass  clear  of  the 
keys  to  the  westward. 

Be  very  cautious,  on  approaching  the  keys  in  the  night,  lest  you  be  driven  on 
them  by  the  current. 

In  turning  between  the  Morant  Keys  and  the  east  end  of  Jamaica,  there  is  a 
good  eight  leagues  of  turning  ground ;  and,  as  it  seldom  happens  that  the  land 
is  not  descried  before  night,  its  bearings  may  direct  in  turning  or  sailing. 

Capt.  Mackellar  tells  us  that  the  coco-nut  trees  formerly  on  Morant  Kcy« 
have  been  cut  down  since  1816,  and  there  is  not  u  shrub  of  any  kind  to  be  seen, 
except  a  few  small  coco-nut  bushes  on  the  N.  E.  Key.  Very  great  care  should 
be  taken  in  approaching  the  N.  E.  Key,  on  either  side,  as  it  is  foul  to  a  great  dis- 
tance off;  and  vessels  intending  to  anchor  at  the  keys,  ought  not  to  come  on  the 
white  water  at  all ;  that  is,  to  the  westward  of  the  N.  E.  Key,  until  they  nre 
far  enough  to  the  southward  to  have  the  south  part  of  the  N.  E.  Key  bearing  E.  Sy 
N.  they  may  then  haul  up  to  the  eastward  for  Savanna  or  Bird  Key  ;  and,  wheh 
it  bears  S.  E.  and  the  S.  W.  Key  S.  or  S.  i  W.  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathoms.  If  it 
is  necessary  to  work  up  to  this  anchorage,  with  the  wind  east,  you  may  stand  to 
the  S.  W.  Key,  by  your  lead,  not  going  nearer  than  5  or  6  fathoms  :  but  the  reef 
off  the  N.  E.  Key  is  steep-to,  and  you  will  have  6  fathoms  at  one  cast,  and  the 
next  3,  or  perhaps  less ;  therefore,  in  working  up,  keep  the  point  of  the  N.  E. 
Key  always  to  the  northward  of  E.  by  N.  after  you  are  in  the  white  water. 


41 


/:'».-• 


»■■ 


f 


276 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


0 


OBAT.  VX. 


Direetiont  for  the  Windward  Passages,  which  ia  the  principal  channel  to 
the  northeastward  o/*  Jamaica,  including  thoae  for  sailing  to  and  from 
Jamaica,  and  thence  to  New-Pl'ovidence,  Uavanna,  Europe,  Uc. 

Ships  from  Europe,  when  bound  to  Jamaico,  generally  take  the  broad  and  safe 
channel  between  tlie  islands  and  Guadaloupe,  but  they  may  pass  with  equal 
safety  between  St.  Bartholomews  and  Saba,  or  St.  Eustatias,  and  thence  make 
the  parallel  of  17*^  20',  to  the  southward  of  Hayti,  or  on  the  meridian  of  70*^ 
W.  When  thus  far  advanced,  they  may  continue  W.  i  S.  until  they  make  Alto- 
Vela  or  the  Little  Mount,  which  lies  ofi'  the  southern  point  of  Hayti,  as  already 
described  in  page  348.  They  will  thus  avoid  the  dangers  in  the  vicinity  of  Neiva 
Bay,  towards  which  there  is  frequently  an  indraught,  as  before  noticed. 

Should  you  happen  to  miss  Alto- Vela,  you  may  probably  make  the  land  of 
Jaquemel,  or  Jacmel  (described  in  page  248)  or,  if  not,  with  the  next  great  pro- 
montory, of  which  Point  Abacou  and  Point  a  Gravois  are  the  extremities.  (See 
page  252.)  Jacquemel  may,  as  already  shown,  be  distinguished  from  sea  by  the 
sudden  cut  off,  or  drop  of  a  hill,  seen  over  another  long  hill  at  the  upper  part  of 
the  harbour.    This  mark  leads  directly  to  the  harbour's  mouth. 

The  Isle  a  Vache,  described  in  page  249,  lies  to  the  eastward  of  Point  Abacou, 
and  forms  the  channel  to  Aux  Caves,  k.c.  From  Alto-Vela  to  the  east  end  of 
the  Isle  a  Vache,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  W.  by  N.  42i  leagues  :  from  the 
east  end  of  the  Isle  a  Vache  to  Point  Abacou,  W,  by  S.  14  miles  :  theiif^e  to  Point 
a  Gravois,  W.  ^  S.  2i  leagues. 

When  off  at  sea,  abreast  of  the  Isle  a  Vache,  the  middle  of  a  saddle-mountain 
over  Port  St.  Louis,  bears  nearly  N.  by  E.  and  then  the  eastern  end  of  a  Vache 
is  between  it  and  the  ship.  The  island  is  low,  thoiigh  hilly,  and  lies  so  under 
the  land  of  the  main,  that  it  is  not  distinguishable  rrom  it  at  any  considerable 
distance.  At  6  leagues  off,  it  appears,  as  already  said,  like  an  assemblage  of 
small  islands.     The  water  towards  it  shoalens  gradually. 

The  saddle-mountains  over  St.  Louis,  which  are  called  the  GnfM  Anse  Mour- 
tains,  are  the  second  high  range  from  the  wustend  of  Hayti.  The  westernmost, 
which  is  the  highest,  ma;/  J>c  3een  in  clear  weather  80  or  40  leagues  off,  on  both 
sides  of  the  island.  Observe,  however,  that,  after  noon,  the  exhalation  of  vapour 
is  sometimes  so  great  as  to  render  chem  invisible.  Be  cautious,  at  such  times, 
of  making  the  land,  lest  you  run  on  the  dangers  of  the  Isle  s;  Vache. 

From  Point  a  Gravois  to  Cape  Tiburop.;  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.  W* 
by  W.  J  W.  13  leagues.  The  land  about  Cape  Tiburon  is  so  high  as  often  to  be 
seen  at  more  than  20  leagues  off. 

Morant  Point,  tile  easternmost  extremity  of  Jamaica,  already  noticed,  bears 
from  Point  a  Gravois  W.  |  S.  42  leagues ;  and,  from  Cape  Tiburon,  W.  S.  W. 
81  leagues. 

In  running  for  Jamaica,  from  the  west  end  of  Hayti,  or  Ihe  Isle  ot  Alto-Vela, 
be  cautious  of  running  too  far  north,  lest  you  should  get  on  Morant  Point,  this 
point  being,  as  already  shown,  extremely  low.  In  thick  hazy  weather  it  may 
possibly  be  approached  so  near  as  to  make  it  difficult  to  weather ;  the  wind  setting 
right  on,  and  the  current  always  going  ^o  leeward.  By  keeping  the  proper 
parallel,  (17°  45',)  you  will  rundown  without  danger,  and  make  Yallah's  Point, 
off  which  ^ou  are  sure  tc  meet  with  pilots,  who  will  conduct  you  to  Port  Royal 
Harbour,  if  required. 


w 


ULUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Sailing  direction*  for  the  coatt  and  harbours  of  Jamaica. 


277 


m 


MORANT  POINT  to  KINGSTON.— The  southernmost  high  land  of  Jamaica, 
to  the  eastward  of  Port-Royal,  is  Yallah^s  Hill,  which  is  very  remarkahle.  The 
middle  of  this  hill  is  twenty  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Port-Royal  Point.  When 
the  fall  of  this  hill  bears  W.  h  N.  steering  W.  by  S.  will  carry  a  vessel  ;  league 
or  more  to  the  southward  of  the  east  end  of  the  island,  which  is  very  low.  The 
latitude  at  noon  will  be  a  guide ;  for  when  Yallah's  Hill  bears  W.  i  N.  eleven  or 
twelve  leagues  distant,  the  ship  will  be  in  lat.  17°  50'  or  17°  51'. 

Should  you  make  the  southernmost  high  land,  bearing  VV.  S.  W.  nine  or  ten 
leagues  distant,  when  bound  to  the  south  side  of  the  island,  you  must  haul  up 
S.  W.  to  clear  the  cast  end,  which  will  not  be  in  sight  at  a  greater  distance  than 
four  leagues ;  and  observe,  also,  that  a  current  frequently  sets  to  the  northward 
around  this  end  of  the  island. 

From  off  Morant  Point,  or  the  east  end  of  Jamaica,  when  bound  to  Port-Roy- 
al, ships  should  keep  at  the  distance  of  four  miles  from  shore,  until  past  Morant 
Bay  ;  as  the  coast  from  the  east  end  to  the  southward  of  Rocky  Point  is  lined 
with  a  reef  that  stretches  nearly  two  miles  outward,  and  over  a  part  of  which 
the  sea  generally  breaks. 

To  the  westward  from  Rocky  Point,  the  coast  continues  rocky  to  about  ono 
mile  from  the  shore,  as  far  as  Morant  Bay  ;  it  is  then  clear  to  the  white  cliffs, 
called  the  HTiite  Horses,  off  whicli  there  ar«!  some  rocks,  at  about  half  a  mile 
from  shore. 

From  the  White  Horses  to  Yallah's  Point,  the  distance  is  one  league.  In  run- 
ning down,  when  the  former  bear  north,  and  Yallah's  Point  west,  you  will  have 
soundings,  and  fn'(|uently  see  the  bottom  in  7i,  8,  9,  and  10  fathoms;  and,  on 
approaching  Yallali's  Point,  the  water  will  be  found  to  deepen  until  you  lose 
soundings. 

From  Yallah's  Point  to  Cow  Bay  Point  there  is  no  danger ;  the  latter  is  bold- 
to,  as  well  as  all  the  toast  to  the  westward,  as  far  as  Plum  Point.  The  course 
and  distance  between  the  two  points  are  W.  by  N.  eight  miles ;  but  should  you 
be  three  QjLfpur  miles  from  Cow  Bay  Point,  you  must  steer  more  to  the  north- 
ward,     iw 

Plum  Point  is  the  S.  K..  point  of  the  Palisadoes  ;  you  may  run  in  boldly  for 
It,  and  .ipproach  its  extremity  within  half  a  cable's  length,  having  nothing  to 
fear  until  abreast  of  it,  or  between  it  and  the  Middle  Ground,  in  the  entrance  of 
the  eastern  channel  to  Port  Royal. 

When  you  have  brought  Rock  Fort  N.  by  E.  you  will  come  on  a  cross  ledge 
without  the  entrance  of  the  channel,  and  must  the.n  bring  the  leading  mark  on  ; 
which  is,  tl^e  north  part  of  the  Apostles' Battery  and  the  magazine  of  Fort 
Charles  in  a  $ie.  This  mark  is  to  be  kept  on,  until  you  are  abreast  of  Lime 
Key.  When  thus  far  advanced,  steer  a  little  to  the  southward  towards  Rackham 
Key,  giving  Lime  Key  a  good  birth,  until  Port-Royal  Point  comes  open  between 
Gun  Key  and  Rackham  Key.  Now  steer  in  mid-channel  between  these  keys, 
and,  immediately  after  passing  them,  proceed  directly  towards  Port-Royal  Point, 
till  you  bring  the  fall  of  Yallah's  Hill  on  the  centre  of  Gun  Key,  which  will  bring 
you  between  the. Knoll  and  Port  Royal  Point;  you  may  approach  the  point 
within  half  a  cable's  length,  and,  by  sailing  close  to  it,  you  will  also  pass  between 
it  and  the  Harbour  Knoll,  which  lies  to  the  westward,  about  the  length  of  a  ca- 
ble and  a  half,  with  19  feet  on  it.  * 

H'lving  passed  tlic  point,  steer  to  the  northward,  till  the  Admiral's  Penn  comes 
to  the  north  of  Gallows  Point.  This  mark  leads  you  clear  of  Old  Port-Royal, 
where  you  may  anchor  abreast  of  the  Dock-Yard,  or  even  before  you  come  to 
it.  With  a  land  or  north  wind,  the  channel  between  Gun  Key  and  Port  Royal 
is  to  be  preferred ;  then  the  Twelve  Apostles'  Battery  on  the  south  angle  of  Fort 
Charles  leads  you  clear  of  Gun  Key  reef. 

Strangers,  in  case  of  necessity,  may  pilot  their  ships  down  to  the  anchorage, 
in  the  channel,  even  when  the  marks  are  not  to  be  seen,  as  nothing  is  to  be  fear- 
ed on  the  side  of  the  Palisadoes,  whirh  is  low  and  bushy.  They  must  oir\y  keep 
within  half  or  thr^e-quarters  of  a  mile  of  Plum  Poiiit,  and  s<tcrr  down  by  the 


mr 


278 


BLUNT*8    AMERICAN   COAST    PJLOT. 


Palisadoes,  till  they  bring  Lime  Key  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  S.  then  they 
anchor  in  15,  16,  or  17  fathoms,  near  the  middle  of  the  channel. 

SHOALS  in  the  EASTERN  CHANNEL  of  Port  RoYAi..—The  most  re- 
markable shoal  in  the  Eastern  Channel  is  the  Middle  Ground,  or  Eastern  Middle 
Ground,  which  lies  one  and  a  quarter  mile  S*  S.  W.  from  Plum  Point ;  it  consists 
of  two  patches,  rocky  bottom  ;  the  east  patch  having  IS  £eet,  and  the  west  patch 
(about  70  fathoms  to  the  W.  N.  W.  of  the  other)  having  9  feet ;  they  are  divided 
by  a  narrow  swatch,  10  fathoms  deep,  and  both  break  with  strong  sea-breezes. 
You  may  sail  within  the  Middle  Ground,  or  without  it  t'  the  southward,  as  ne- 
cessity requires ;  but  to  the  northward  is  the  best  and  safest  channel.  The  sound- 
ings in  that  channel  are  uneven,  from  7  to  19  or  20  fathoms ;  but,  when  you  are 
past  the  Middle  Ground,  they  are  regular  from  19  to  13  fathoms  between  Rack- 
ham  and  Gun  Keys. 

The  first  key  you  meet  with,  in  steering  from  the  Middle  Ground  towards 
Port  Royal,  is  Liine  Key,  from  the  north  end  of  which  a  reef  stretches  about  a 
cable's  length ;  your  eye  is  the  best  mark  for  it,  as  it  is  generally  seen  :  to  the 
westward  of  the  key  lies  another  shoal,  with  8  or  10  feet  upon  it. 

The  knoll  off  Port  Royal  Point  is  the  third  shoal ;  it  is  a  smalt  hard  coral  bank 
to  the  southward  of  the  point,  with  only  16  feet  water  upon  it.  If  your  ship 
draws  12  or  13  feet  water,  you  must  be  careful  to  keep  clear  of  it. 

To  go  within  the  knoll,  the  leading-mark  is,  to  bring  the  highest  bush  on  Gun  , 
Key  (which  is  near  the  middle  of  it) in  one  with  Yallah's  Point;  you  have  therf 
10  fathoms  water,  and  the  channel  is  70  fathoms  wide.  The  mark  to  strike 
the  knoll  is,  the  south  point  of  Gun  Key  on  the  high  hill  of  Yallah's,  or  a  ship's 
length  open  of  Yallah's  Point :  the  breast-mark  is,  the  church  on  the  seventh  or 
eighth  embrazure  of  the  Fort,  Sandy  Key  just  open  with  Lime  Key,  and  you 
will  have  16  or  17  feet  of  water. 

To  go  bettoeen  the  knoll  and  the  Western  Middle  Ground,  which  lies  about  300 
fathoms  to  the  south-westward  of  it,  the  leading-mark  is,  True  Land's  Hummock, 
within  Yallah's,  on  the  southernmost  part  of  Gun  Key,  or  Yallah's  Point  well 
open  to  the  northward  of  the  north  point  of  Rackham's  Key.  Thi*  channel, 
which  is  the  widest,  and  has  12  fathoms  of  water,  is  mostly  used  when  taken 
with  the  land-wind.  4^^ 

The  anchorage  is  good  all  over  Port-Royal  Harbour ;  but  the  best  anchoring 
for  ships  that  are  bound  to  sea  is  in  9  fathoms,  with  a  notch  on  the  east  side  of 
a  high  mountain,  called  the  Leading  Notch,  a  little  open  to  the  eastward  of  Fort 
Augusta,  and  Rackham  Key  in  one  with  Port-Royal  Point. 

SOUTH  CHANNEL  of  Pout  Royal.— To  goto  sea  from  Port-Royal,  you 
make  use  of  the  South  or  the  Neio  Channel ;  the  small  craft  generally  go  through 
the  East  Channel,  but  it  is  to  be  avoided  by  large  vessels,  unless  they  are  prime 
sailers,  and  have  a  strong  land  breeze  or  north,  with  an  appearance  of  its  lasting 
long  enough  to  carry  them  fhrough. 

When  bound  through  the  South  Channel,  you  should  get  under  weigh  with 
the  land-wind,  so  soon  in  the  morning  as  you  can  sec  the  marks,  observing  that 
the  current  then  sets  most  commonly  to  the  westward.  The  general  leading- 
mark  is,  the  Leading  Notch  in  one  with  the  magazine  of  Fort  Augusta,  which 
is  the  easternmost  building  of  the  fort.  This  mark  leads  ships  of  16  or  17  feet 
water  clear  through  ;  but,  in  n  line  of  battle  ship,  the  notch  should  be  kept  very 
little  to  the  eastward  of  the  magazine,  until  Hellshire  Hummock  comes  open 
with  Fort  Small. 

To  keep  well  to  the  westward  of  rhe  Middle  Ground,  be  careful  not  to  bring 
the  church-steeple  upon  the  corner  of  the  wall  with  embrazures,  until  Yallah's 
Hill  is  brought  in  one  with  Lime  Key.  In  case  you  should  not  see  Yallah's  Hill 
Point,  look  out  for  a  hummock  on  Hellshire,  and  when  it  iij  open  of  Salt-Pan 
Hill,  you  will  be  to  the  southward  of  the  Middle  Ground. 

This  Middle  Ground  is  a  large  coral  bank,  which  often  breaks,  with  only  three 
feet  on  it  in  the  middle ;  the  north  and  west  sides  are  almost  steep.  On  its  N.  W. 
edge  lies  a  buoy,  whose  marks  are,  Port-Royal  Tower  on  the  fourth  embrazure 
of  Fort  Charles,  counting  from  the  westward,  and  Hellshire  Hummock  on  the 
flag-stair  of  Fort  Small. 


*t, . 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


279 


ffhen  you  ham  opened  Hellshire  Hummock  with  Fort  Small,  you  steer  out  with 
the  Leading  Notch,  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  the  magazine,  which  carries  you 
between  the  Drunlten  Man's  Key,  the  Turtle  Heads,  and  the  South  Knoll ;  or, 
to  avoid  these  heads,  you  are  to  haul  up  so  as  to  bring  the  church-steeple  to  the 
easternmost  part  of  the  fort,  and  continue  to  keep  that  mark  until  the  South 
Key  is  brought  on  with  Yallah's  Point.  Then  you  may  haul  to  the  westward,  if 
the  wind  will  permit.  But  if  you  should  not  keep  up  the  leading-mark,  and  the 
*  church-steeple  should  come  near  the  corner  of  the  fort,  you  must  then  come  to, 
I?  or  tack  and  stand  in.  The  mark,  when  ashore  on  the  Turtle  Heads,  is,  the 
church-steeple  upon  the  magazine  of  the  fort  and  Spanish  Town  land  just  open. 

Hlien  Maiden  Key  is  open  a  ship's  length  to  the  southward  of  Drunken  Man's 
Key,  you  will  be  to  the  southward  of  the  South  Knolls,  and  should  bring  the 
Leading  Notch  in  a  line  with  the  magazine,  which  will  bring  you  close  to  the 
westward  of  the  Little  Portuguese,  in  8  or  9  fathoms  :  when  Yallah's  Hill  comes 
to  the  southward  of  South  Key,  you  are  then  clear  of  the  Portuguese,  and  may 
haul  to  the  S.  E.  giving  South  Key  a  birth  of  about  a  mile. 

Drunken  Man^s  Key  is  a  narrow  ledge  of  rocks  just  above  water,  covered  with 
some  loose  sand,  that  gives  St  the  appearance  of  a  sand-bank.  To  the  southward 
of  it,  about  half  a  mile,  there  is  a  shoal  which  breaks  with  strong  sea-breezes; 
and  between  it  and  Drunken  Man's  Key  is  a  channel,  having  6  or  7  fathoms  of 
water. 

The  Turtle  Heads  arc  three  dangerous  spots,  with  10  or  11  feet  of  water  on 
their  shoalest  part,  and  deep  water  close  to  them.  The  South  Knolls  to  the  S. 
E.  of  these  heads,  are  two  small  patches,  about  70  fathoms  asunder,  with  23 
feet  water  on  them.  And  to  the  S.  by  W.  of  these  lies  One-Bush  Reef,  which 
always  breaks,  and  is  almost  steep-to.  The  Three-Fathom  Bank  is  a  large  cor- 
al shoal,  with  19  or  20  feet  of  water,  which  breaks  with  strong  sea-breezes.  A 
small  patch,  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  tne  S.  S.  E.  of  it,  has  20  feet  of  water ; 
it  is  called  the  Warrior's  Bank,  from  the  British  ship  Warrior  having  lost  her  rud- 
der there  in  1782. 

The  Little  Portug^uese  is  the  southernmost  shoal  on  the  eastern  side  of  the 
south  channel.  It  has  from  22  to  39  feet  water  over  it,  and,  in  general,  a  great 
swell. 

When  Portland  makes  as  an  island,  open  about  three-cjuarters  of  a  point,  or 
a  point,  with  Hellshire,  you  will  be  to  the  southward  of  the  Three-Fathom  Bank 
and  ^Warrior. 

Jt  frequently  happens  that  tlie  land-breeze  fails  before  a  ship  can  get  clear  of 
the  channel ;  and  there  is,  sometimes,  a  long  interval  of  calm  between  the  land 
and  sea-breezes.  Should  this  occur,  it  would  be  requisite  to  anchor  so  soon  as 
the  breeze  fails,  or  there  will  be  danger  of  being  set  by  the  swell  on  the  Three- 
Fathom  Bank  pr  One-Bush  Reef.  By  inattention  to  this  precaution,  there'  have 
been  instances  of  ships  slipping  or  cutting  their  cables,  when  the  sea-breeze  ha» 
come  on,  and  running  into  Port-Royal  to  save  the  ship. 

The  best  anchorage  is  within  the  length  of  the  Little  Portuguese,  with  the 
leading-notch  a  little  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  magazine  of  Fort  Augusta. 
Then,  if  the  wind  changes  southerly,  a  ship  may  easily  return  to  Port-Royal,  or, 
wilh  the  common  sea-breeze,  may  proceed  to  sea. 

When  clear  of  the  channel,  if  bound  to  leeward,  you  may  steer  S.  by  W.  or 
not  farther  to  the  westward  than  half  a  point  more  westerly,  in  order  to  avoid 
some  shoal  spots  that  lie  to  the  south-eastward  of  Wreck  Reef. 

JFreck  Reef  always  breaks.  This  danger  lies  about  a  mile,  or  little  more,  to 
the  S.  E.  from  Hellshire  Point,  and  is  about  a  mile  in  length  from  N.E.  to  S.W. 
There  is  a  channel  for  small  craft  between  il  and  Hellshire  Point.  About  a  mile 
to  the  S.  W.  of  the  reef,  there  is  a  shoal  spot  of  3i  fathoms  with  7  fathomft 
around  it. 

To  sail  through  with  the  sea-breeze. — Ships  of  war,  or  those  that  sail  well,  may 
safely  proceed  to  sea  from  Port-Royal,  if  they  can  lay  S.  by  E.  or  a  little  to  the 
eastward  of  it,  if  th§  foregoing  precautions  be  strictly  attended  to.  When 
through  the  channel,  soundings  will  be  found  of  10  and  11  fathoms,  if  steerinc 
S.  by  W.  until  Portland  bears  W.  N.  W. 


*■ 


280 


BLUNX'a  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


'Jill 


ill 


The  shoals,  in  general,  when  the  gea-breeze  prevails,  may  be  distinctly  seen 
from  the  mast-head.  They  appear  of  a  brownish  colour,  being  covered  with 
large  branches  of  coral.  The  greatest  part  of  them  is  very  steep,  having  a  depth 
of  several  fathoms  close  to  them.  The  bottom  of  the  channels  between  is  most- 
ly soft  mud  or  clay. 

SHIPS  BOUND  to  WINDWARD  from  Port-Royal,  if  they  can  weather 
the  Middle  Ground  by  the  time  the  sea-breeze  comes  on,  may  pass  through  the 
Eastern  or  Windward  Channel,  and  thus  they  may  gain  6  or  7  miles  more  to 
windward  than  by  going  through  the  South  Channel.  Small  sloop-rigged  ves- 
sels generally  pass  this  way;  but  to  others  it  is  hazardous;  because,  if  the  land- 
breeze  fails,  with  an  interval  of  calm,  a  swell  may  come  on  ahead,  and  be  ex- 
tremely dangerous. 

NEW  CHANNEL  of  Port  Royal— The  New  Channel  lies  to  the  eastward 
of  the  South  Channel,  and  almost  parallel  to  it ;  it  is  certainly  preferable,  on 
many  accounts,  to  the  South  Channel;  it  has  smooth  water  till  you  come  to 
South  Key,  with  good  anchoring  ground,  easy  riding,  and  a  facility  of  going  to 
sea  to  the  southward  with  the  sea-breeze,  as  far'as  S.  E.  &c. 

The  leading-mark  to  enter  this  channel  is,  a  remarkable  flat  hummock  on  the 
mountain  to  the  N.  N.  W.  of  Port  Royal.  When  the  middle  of  this  hummock 
is  in  a  direct  line  with  the  White  House,  standing  to  the  N.  W.  of  Fort  Augusta, 
it  leads  to  the  westward  of  the  Harbour  and  Point  Knolls,  as  well  as  between  the 
east  edge  of  the  Western  Middle  Ground,  and  the  west  end  of  Rackham's  Key 
Shoal.  Steer  with  these  maiks  on  till  a  remarkable  round  hillock  to  the  west- 
ward of  Stony  Hill  Barracks  comes  open  to  the  eastward  of  Gun  Key. 

After  you  have  opened  this  hummock,  you  steer  away  to  the  southward,  keep- 
ing it  open  till  a  saddle  in  the  mountains  to  the  N.  W.  comes  in  a  line  with  Fort 
Small.  Then  you  bring  the  same  hummock  on  the  centre  or  west  edge  of 
Gun  Key,  which  marks  carry  you  to  the  westward  of  the  shoals  on  the  east  side 
of  the  channel,  and  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  Great  Por- 
tuguese. So  soon  as  Portland  appears  like  an  island,  you  may  haul  to  the  east- 
ward, being  clear  of  the  reef  and  shoals  of  South  Key. 

The  shoals  in  this  channel  are,  1.  The  Western  Middle  Iround,  (on  the  east 
side  of  which  there  is  a  buoy,)  and  the  small  shoals  to  the  southward  of  this 
ground. 

2.  The  Great  Bay  Shoal,  which  has  16  feet  least  waier,  and  a  floating  beacon 
in  18  feet. 

3.  The  Four  Fathom  Knoll,  a  very  small  spot,  with  no  ltjs3  than  24  feet  water 
on  it,  and  deep  water  all  round.  Ships  of  £0  f^et  draught  may  sail  over  it,  as  the 
water  is  smooth. 

Between  Great  Bay  Shoal  and  South  Key  Breakers  there  are  two  shoals ;  the 
northernmost,  at  about  half  a  mile  S.  by  W.  from  the  former,  is  s^  ep,  and  a  small 
part  of  it  appears  just  above  the  surface  of  the  water.  This  shoal  almost  shows 
itself  by  the  rippling  on  it.  >.bout  half-way  between  this  and  the  breakers  lies 
tue  second  shoal,  having  only  16  feet  of  water. 

The  South  Key  Breakers  have  a  buoy  upon  them.  The  marks  for  the  west 
edge  of  this  reef  is  the  leading  notch  open  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  the  capstan- 
house,  and  a  saddle-mountain  to  the  N.  W.  and  Fort  Small  in  one. 

Half  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  these  breakers  is  the  Eighteen  Feet  Reef,  re- 
markable by  the  great  swell  upon  it.  To  the  westward  of  that  reef,  Ties  the 
Oreat  Portuguese,  which  is  the  southernmost  shoal  on  the  west  side  of  the 

OLD  HARBOUR,  LONG'S  WHARF,  fee— Mr.  Leard's  directions  for 
these  harbours  are  as  follow :  Being  clear  of  the  South  or  New  Channels,  steer 
to  the  southward,  or  S-  hy  W.  and  give  Wreck  Reef  a  birth  of  two  miles;  and 

*  The  preceding  Description  of,  and  Directions  for,  the  South  Channels,  may  be  considered 
as  more  for  the  use  of  the  pilot,  than  of  the  general  navigator.  Captain  Livingston  has  said, 
"  I  think  the  Derrotero  is  right  in  omitting  directions  for  any  of  the  channels  at  Port  Royal, 
Jamaica,  excepting  the  Eastern  one,  as  directions  for  the  Southern  Channels  arc  absolutely 
useless :  because  no  one  who  is  unacquainted  ought  to  be  fool  hardy  enough  to  attempt  car^ 
rying  any  vessel  in  or  out,  except  by  the  Eastern  Channel,  even  with  the  most  correct  in« 
stnictions  and  moat  accurate  chart.'* 


J^ 


J".. 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


281 


then  edge  away,  and  bring  the  fall  of  Braziletto  Hill  to  bear  W.  |N.  OK  W.  by 
N.  and  steer  for  it :  this  will  lead  you  to  the  southward  of  the  foul  ground  on 
the  Pelican  Keys,*  and  as  you  approach  thena,  you  will  see  Pigeon  Island,  which 
is  low  and  bushy,  in  a  direction  with  the  fall  of  Braziletto  Hill;  keep  it  go,  and 
pass  the  Pelican  Keys  ia  7j,  7,  and  6j^  fathoms ;  and,  as  you  steer  down  with 
those  ntarks  on,  you  will  see  a  remarkable  hummock  on  the  mountain  to  the 
.4  ^northward,  called  Cudjoe  Hill,  (it  is  like  a  jockey's  cap.)  When  this  hummock 
comes  on  the  west  extremity  of  the  slant  fall  of  Goat  Island,  and  will  bear  N.. 
^  W.  then  haul  to  the  N.  W.  by  N.  for  Old  Harbour.  This  last  mark  leads  yon 
clear  to  westward  of  Dry  Shoal,  part  of  which  is  even  with  the  surface  of  th» 
water,  and  you  will  see  it.  You  will  have  from  6i  to  6,  or  5)  fothoms ;  and,  after 
you  hive  passed  Dry  Shoal,  continue  steering  N.  W.  by  N,  and  you  will  deepen 
your  water  to  8  fathoms. 

And,  as  you  approach  Careening  Keyi  will  shoalen  it  to  seven  and  six  fothoiiM,. 

y<>u  must  give  Careening  Key  a  birth  of  nearly  half  a  mile,  to  avoid  a  reef  that 

runs  from  it  to  the  south-east ;  and  steer  direct  for  the  wharfs  at  Old  Harbour,, 

Mad  anchor  in  4!^  or  4  fathoms,  keeping  clear  of  the  reef  on  the  south  siide  pf  the. 

^Barbour,  which  generally  shews  itself. 

Long's  Wharf  and  Salt  River. — If  you  are  bound  to  Long's  Wharf,  in  salling^ 
*  to  the  northward  of  '  igeon  Island,  there  is  a  small  white  s4}oaI  of  only  18  feet 
on  it ;  it  shoalens  gradually  on  the  east  end,  and  bears  north  from  Pigeon  Island,. 
dista!ice  one  mile.  The  south  edge  of  Round  Hill  just  open  with  Braziletto  Hill, 
Iea,.''s  oti  it.  You  may  sail  between  this  shoal  and*  Pigeon  Island,  in  8,  7, 6,  or  Si 
fathonis ;  but  to  the  northward  is  the  straighest  course.  After  passing  Pigeon 
Island,  steer  to  the  northwest,  and  bring  the  top  house  about  one  third  from  the 
north  side  of  the  large  opening  or  ga^  in  the  mountains  :  this  mark  leads  beN 
tween  the  reefs  to  the  anchorage  at  Long's  Wharf,  in  4  or  3i  fathoms. 

Salt  River  Anchorage.— U  you  are  bound  to  Salt  River,  after  passing  Pigeon 
Island,  keep  the  south  part  of  Braziletto  Hill  open  a  little  on  youi;  larboard  bow, 
tfhich  will  lead  you  close  to  Sa\j|^sland^  you  may  go  either  to  the  northward  or 
southward  of  Salt  Island,  but  the  north  passage  is  the  best.  Yoti^  may  pass  with- 
in a  cable  and  a  half's  distance  of  Salt  Island,  on  the  north  andnrestpart :  on  the 
south  part  is  a  reef,  which  shows  itself,  and  is  steep  close  to  it.'  'There  is  a  reef, 
extending  along  on  the  east  side  of  Long  Island,  which  you  see;  and'also  a  reef 
extending  Trom  the  Salt  River  shore  to  the  eastward,  which  sometimes  breaks. 
Therefore,  steer  round  the  north  end  of  Salt  Island,  at  about  U^o  or  two  and.  a 
half  cables'  distance  from  it ;  and  then  steer  towards  the  entrance  of  Salt  Rivera 
until  you  bring  the  south  edge  of  Pigeon  Island  almost  in  a  line  with  the  south 
edge  of  Salt  Island:  keep  them  in  that  direction,  and  when  you  are  in  4^,  4,  dr 
S|  fathoms,  anchor  according  to  the  size  of  your  ship.  If  you  are  in  a  low  vet- 
sel,  it  will  be  necessary  to  go  a  little  up  the  shrouds,  to  see  Pig«^n  Island  over 
Sait  Island.  The  south  end  of  Pigeon  Island  a  little  ope^td  thd  southward  at 
Salt  Island,  leads  on  the  edge  of  the  Salt  River  reef.  There  is  good  aneherag^ 
under  the  west  part  of  Salt  Island,  in  five  fathoms  and  a  h&lf,  good  holding 
ground.  w  ,       , 

Peake  Bay.— To  sail  into  this  bay,  give  the  fcef  that  runspifiRocky  Point  a 
birth  of  aeaUe's  length  or  more,  and  steer  towards  the  north  jiart  of  the  Sandy 
Beacht  arid  «adior  in  4i,  4,  or  Si  fathoms,  good  holding  gradnd.  The  reef  off 
Rocky  Point,  and  the  reef  on  the  south  side  of  the  hay,  are  ntisbrly  even  with  the 
surface  of  the  Water,  so  that  you  generally  see  them.  There  isa  gref^  seninthia 
bay.  with  strong  sea  breezes.  jf .  7ji  :. 

West  Harbour, — ^The  entrance  into  this  harbour  is  between  two  eora!  rfefeft,  that. 


*  The  most  frequented  and  best  channel  for  enteriot  >n^o  ibis  great  b«f  it  between  ?elioai\ 
and  Bare'Bush  Keys  ;  and,  to  take  it,  those  who  come  from  Cow*  Peintmust  stc^rW.  S«  W, 
i  W.  9  leagues,  and  until  the  slope  of  the  Urazllt  '0  Mountain  bear*  W.  by  N.  WUk  this 
mark  and  bearing  you  proceed  to  Pigeon  Island,  &e.  The  Btaeilatto  MttuhtaiB  oaimol  be 
mistaken  ;  it  being  the  northernmost  of  the  two,  which  are  seen  t«  the  west,  yndtbe  amith* 
era  is  of  a  round  shape.  *The  opening  which  these  mountains  ibrml*  the  point  to  be  os^daa 
the  ]eading>marl'  beering  W.  by  N.  as  above.— 'J[)err«rif»,  ^, 

36  « -   ■  '--■■■    .^1  .  ^ 


#1 


"\ 


3r-  IHR' 


'  liiftdlf 


'  *••■»     


282 


BLUNT  S  AMEIIICAff  COAST  PILOT. 


M 


i 


€ 


f 


are  iirady  eren  with  tb«  sarfkce  of  the  water ;  and  the  heads  of  coral  (Veqaently 
show  above  water.  The  channel  between  the  reefa  13  above  half  a  mile  wide, 
with  6  and  6  j  fathoms  in  it.  There  is  very  good  anchorage,  with  smooth  water, 
just  to  the  westward  of  the  north  reef,  in  5i,  5  or  4  fathoms,  good  holding  ground. 
The  land  to  the  westward  does  not  show  any  mark  that  I  could  find  to  guide  you 
into  this  anchorage,  but  it  is  not  difficult.  As  you  go  to  the  westward  in  the 
west  harbour,  the  water  shoaiens  to  8  or  9  feet.  It  is  also  shoal  on  the  south  side^^ 
towards  the  mangroves,  and  smooth  water. 

Going  to  sea  from  Old  Harbour,  Long's  Wharf,  ifc. — Ships  generally  get  under^ 
way  with  the  land  wind,  so  as  to  get  clear  of  the  reefs  near  the  anchorage,  before 
the  sea  breeze  comes  on.     Being  clear  of  the  reefs,  you  may  turn  out  with  the 
sea  breeze,  and  may  go  on  either  side  of  Pigeon  Island.    The  channel  between 
Pigeon  Island  and  the  reef  of  the  Half-Moon  Keys  is  two  miles  wide,  with  deep 
water;  but  the  smoothest  water  is  to  th|»  northward  of  Pigeon  Island.    You  may 
stand  towards  Goat  Island  and  Cabarita  Point  by  your  lead ;  the  soundings  are 
grad'ual,  and  tack  when  you  come  to  5  or  4^  fathoms.     If  the  sea  breeze  should 
b^  very  strong,  you  may  anchor  under  Dry  Shoal,  and  wait  for  the  land  wind* 
But,  with  moderate  sea  breezes,  any  ship  may  turn  out  between  the  keys  and 
reefs.:  'Being  as  far  to  the  eastward  as  Dry  Shoal,  and  in  standing  to  the  south- 
ward, your  leading  mark  for  the  channel  between  Bare  Bush  Key  and  Morris' 
Bhoai,  is  Cudjoe  Hill,  on  the  slant  fall  of  Goat  Island,  the  same  as  for  Dry  Shoal; 
keep  it  so  until  the  Half-Moon  KeyS' come  in  one;  thenyouare  to  the  eastward  of 
Morris'  Shoal,  land  may  edge  awHy  a  little,  keeping  the  Cudjoe  Hill  about  a  large 
sail's  breadth  on  the  lower  part  from  the  slantiof  Goat  Island,  which  mark  will 
Idad  you  along  the  white  water  on  Bare-Busn  side  to  se'>.     But  if,  in  standing 
•toithe  southward  from  Dry  Shoal,  you;  find  that  you  cannot  weather  Morris^ 
Shoal,*  which  you  will  know  by  the  fall  of  Cudjoe  Hill  not  being  within  a  sail's 
breadth  of  the  fall  of  Goat  Island ;  in  this  case  you  must  tack  to  the  northward, 
when  Bare-Bush  Key  bears  E.  S.  E.  or  when  a  saddle  l\iil  to  the  northwest  of 
Pigeon  Island  is  just  coming  on  the  northend  af  Pigeorf  Inland.     And,  in  8t<M|4- 
ihg  to  the  m>rtUward,  tack  when  the  faff  of  Braziletto  Hill  comeg  on  the  centfii, 
or  near  the  nouth  end  of  Pigeon  Island  :*you  may  approach  the  white  watej* 
,on  the  side  of  Bare  Bush  to  5  fathoms.     There  is  a  good  <thannel  between  Mor- 
ris' Shoalhand  Half -Moon  Keys,  but  it  is  dangerous  to  approach  the  latter  on  the 
sdutheast  side,  ;fur  you  will  have  from  6  or  7  fathoms  to  1£  feet  in  one  or  two 
icdstsof  the  lead.     To  the  E.  S.  E.  and  S.  E.ibf  Bare  Bush  Key,  distance  about 
.one  mile,  are  some  spots  of  coral,  with  from  Q\  to  5  fathoms  en  them,  and  7  fa- 
ithomsclosei  to  them.     And  to  the  southward  and  S.  S.  E.  of  the  Portland  Keys, 
"idistaRti  about  two  miles*  are  some  spots  of  3j  and  4  fathoms  on  them.,    After 
■you  have  pass^  those^keys  in  sailing  to  the  westward,  come  no  nearer  Portland 
•than  two  or  t^iw  attd  a  half  miles,  or  7  or  8  fathoms ;  for  the  reef  ofiF  Rocky  Point, 
iwbich.is  the  westipart  of  Portland,  extends  nearly  two  miles  from  the  point  to 
■.the^duthward^  h\  * .  » 

:i;-:PORT  ROYAL  to  PORTLAND.!— In  proceeding  towards  Portland-  observe 
that  Wreck  Reef,  which  is  a  larglfehoal,  composed  of  dry  rocks  ancJ  breakers, 
iieBahonthiiiIfw«y  between  Port  Royal  and  Old  Harbour,  «tt  the:.'^jlistance  of 
moreithkh  a  milf  Irom  the  shore.  This  danger,  which  appcargif^  tlb|^,day,  con- 
B}stsi«<rtw6  pii^s;,  having  between  them  a. channel  of  4  fathonH^qiter.  Ships 
piistilHg  in  the.', hight  should  approach  no  nearer  than  in  1£  fathi^nM^orcome  to 
(iiltarichorBge  unUl  morning.  Within  the  reef  there  is  good  sheltfcr,  apd  tolerable 
anchorage  in  4  and  5  fathoms,  bottom  of  sand,  with  shells  and  mud.  Here  ves- 
sels obcasionally  ride  durit)^  the  prevalence  of  a  breeze,  i^c. 

*  it  is  said,  that  about  thirty  years  ago,  ships  sailed  over  this  shoal ;   if  so,  it  must  have 

i§roMrn  fast,  fo.**  there  is  not  at.'present,  more  than  nine  or  ten  feet  on  t'lie  north  edge  of  it, 

k'M^a  great  swdlin  general.    1  larks  for  the  east  end  of  it :  Cudjoe  Hill,  about  half  way  from 

Htte  Alii  of  GdaiJsland,  upon  the  loir  and  bushj  land  towards  the  rising  to  tbewestward  (this 

t«idiag[U.coiiMnoal]r  calM  Little  Goat  )fl»nd)  ;  an'd  the  Half-Moon  K^s  about'four  degrees 

dM«(  atidl  nor^  part  of  Bare  Bush  Key:  bearing  E.  |  S.     Marks  for  the  west  end  is,  Cudjoe 

HiUf  ion^  th«  afiice^iR«ntioDed  rising  of  Little  Goatlsland,  and  Bare^Bush  Key  bearing  E.  f  S. 

It  i>  in  length  little  niore  than  a  quarteir  of  •  mile,  and  in  breadth  about  one-aizth  of  a  mils, 

ttA  shoatsnt  too  •i^den  for  yeur  Aead  to  b«  a  guide  ij^  ataixUng  towards  it. 


^mm 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


283 


From  Port  Royal  to  Portland,  the  distance,  on  acircuitouicoura<B,  i«  9  leagues. 
In  thia  track,  when  clear  of  the  South  Channel,  give  Wreck  Reef  a  birth  of  two 
miles. 

There  are  soundings  outwards  so  far  as  with  the  easternmost  land  of  Hellshir* 
bearing  N.  4  E.  and  Rocky  Point,  or  the  southernmost  land  of  Portland,  N. 
,W.  i  N.  With  these  bearings,  soundings  have  been  found  of  from  17  to  S3  fa- 
thoms, and  the  next  cast  no  ground  at  80  fathoms,  although  not  at  a  ship's 
length  from  the  former. 

PEDRO  SHOALS.--From  Portland  S.  S.  W.  thirteen  leagues,  lies  the  Port- 
land Rock,  which  is  a  single  key,  a  little  higher  than  Drunkenman's  Key  off 
Port  Royal,  and  having  small  bushes  on  it.  This  rock  is  in  latitude  17°  7'  N. 
longitude  77°  29'  W.  Sixteen  leagues  S.  W.  by  W.  fro:  >.  this,  on  the  southern 
edge  of  the  Key  is  a  rock,  5  feet  above  water ;  between  this  and  the  Port- 
land Rock  lie  a  number  of  dangerous  shoals  and  keys,  which  are  delineated  on 
the  Chart  of  the  West  Indies,  published  hy  E.  &t  G.  W.  Blunt. 

The  Pedro  Shoals  (Bivora  Bank  of  the  Spaniards)  have  been  regularly  sur- 
veyed, and  the  representation  of  them  in  the  Charts  is  to  be  relied  on.  Of 
the  Cascabel,  or  Rattlesnake,  which  is  supposed  to  distinguish  the  N.  W.  end  of 
the  Pedro  Bank,  it  does  not  exist,  as  there  has  been  an  accurate  survey  of  the 
Bank,  and  it  was  not  to  be  found. 

CARLISLE  or  Withy- Wood  Bay,  to  the  west  of  Portland,  is  an  open  bay, 
winds  from  W.  to  S.  E.  Its  S.  E.  extremity  is  the  rocky  point  of  Portland, 
from  which  a  spit,  of  12  feet  of  water,  extends  about  three  quarters  of  a  mile  to 
the  S.  W.  Westward  of  Rocky  Point  is  a  bank,  called  Robertson's  Shoal,  on 
some  part  of  which  there  are  only  6  feet  at  low  water.  The  outer  edge  of  this 
shoal  is  one  mile  and  a  half  west  from  Rocky  Point.  The  form  of  the  shoal 
is  nearly  oval,  from  E.  to  W.  Its  breadth,  N.  and  S.  is  three  quarters  of  a 
mile. 

To  sail  into  the  bay,  bring  a  remarkable  round  hill  to  bear  nearly  north,  and 
steer  for  it,  until  Rocky  Point  croies  almost  on  with  the  east  point  of  Portland. 
•'^Hercc,  rounding  Robertson's  Shoal,  you  may  come  to  an  anchor  in  from  5  to  4 
falftoms.  With  the  hill  above-mentioned  N.  by  E.  there  is  a  spot  of  3}  fathoms, 
at  about  2j  miles  from  the  beach.  With  the  fort  N.  E.  or  N.  N.  E.  is  the  best 
place  to  anchor  in  for  loading,  because  your  hoats  can  sail  both  ashore  and  aboard 
with  the  sea-winds.  No  tides  here,  but  a  strong  westerly  current  generally  runs 
in  the  offing.     Var.  6°  50'  E. 

Along  the  coast  to  the  westward,  to  the  distance  of  nearly  twenty  miles  from 
Carlisle  Bay,  at  a  mile  or  a  mile  and  a  half  from  shore,  there  is  a  regular  depth 
of  4  and  4,J  fathoms. 

ALLIGATOR  POND  KEY.— Alligator  Pond  Key  is  a  key  just  above  the 
surface  of  the  water,  with  a  reef  all  round  it.  Its  distance  from  the  shore  is 
about  four  miles,  and  vessels  may  approach  it  by  the  lead,  or  on  seeing  the 
breakers.  There  is  good  anchorage  for  small  vessels  along  shore,  between  it 
and  the  main,  in  3  and  4  fathoms.  i| 

BRUNE  BANK,  a  small  bank,  having  oiHt  little  more  than  4  fathoms,  with 
IS  or  13  close  to  it,  lies  six  miles  S.  E.  by  compass,  from  Alligator  Pond  Key. 
The  shoal  is  about  a  mile  and  three-quarters  in  extent,  from  east  to  west,  and 
one  mile  and  a  half  in  breadth ;  it  has  from  4  to  6  fathoms  water  on  it,  and  the 
outer  edge  is  about  eight  miles  from  the  shore. 

PEDRO  BAY,  &c.--In  Pedro  Bay,  to  tlie  westward  of  Pedro  Bluff,  there 
is  good  anchorage  for  any  vessels,  but  it  is  open  to  southerly  winds.  The  lead 
is  here  the  best  guide  for  anchoring.  The  coast  hence  to  the  westward,  nearly 
to  Parratee  Point,  is  bold-to.  Off  Parratee  Point  is  a  small  reef;  and  to  the 
N.  W.  of  this  point  is  Black  River,  which  is  formed  by  extensive  reefs.  To 
dear  these  reefs,  keep  Pedro  Bluff  open  with  Parratee  Point. 

Tht  entrance  of  Black  River  is  between  two  reefs,  and  has  not  more  than  18 
feet  water.    To  sail  into  the  river,  when  advancing  from  the  eastward,  keep  Pe- 
dro Bluff  open  of  Parratee  Point,  till  you  bring  the  church  on  with  a  gap  in  the 
high  land,  or  to  bear  N>  E.  then  steer  directly  in  for  the  church,  which  will  ear- 
.  ry  you  into  the  best  of  the  channel.    It  is  full  of  heads  of  coral  rocia. 


*?•., 


S84 


BLCNT^S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


M 


I 


PORT  ROTAL  to  BLACK  RIVER,  bv  Mr.  Town,  l817.~On  leaving  the 
South  Channel  of  Port  Royal,  when  bouna  to  the  westward,  you  may  clear 
Wreck  Reef  by  keeping  the  magazine  of  Fort  Johnson  open  of  St.  George's 
Rocks,  until  Portland  bears  west ;  thence  you  may  alter  your  course  along  the 
land,  as  there  are  no  dangers  to  be  apprehended,  until  you  approach  Alligator 
Key,  about  four  miles  S>  £.  i  £.  from  which  is  the  Brune  Reef,  already  des- 
cribed. 

Pedro  Bluff  is  very  remarkable,  and  may  be  known  from  any  other  land  on 
the  coast.  At  4  or  5  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  Bluff,  tiiere  is  a  remarkable 
white  spot  in  the  cliff,  called  the  White  Horses;  which,  when  you  first  make  it 
from  the  eastward,  appears  like  a  schooner  under  sail,  close  to  the  land. 

From  Parratee  Point  to  Luana  Point,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.  W*  V 
W  4  W.  nine  miles.  The  coast  between  forms  the  Bay  of  Black  River,  which  is 
obstructed  by  a  number  of  reefs,  all  of  which  lie  within  the  line  of  the  two  ex- 
teriov  p<>intti,  and  a  course  N.  W.  by  W.  h  W.  will,  therefore,  had  clear  of  theair , 
rfcobaj  does  not  appear  to  have  been  regularly  surveyed.  The  main  channeK 
:     v,b   '  between  two  reefs,  has  only  18  feet  of  water. 

"i  g  ■L-fC,  to  Black  Rivtr,  or  its  Bay,  when  advancing  towards  Parratee  Poii^ 
V  - '.  care  -  ■:  to  approach  the  point  nearer  than  one  mile,  as  there  is  a  reef  ex- 
tending oil,  Ij  the  S.  W.  nearly  a  mile.  Your  leading-marks  into  this  bay,  to 
the  anchorage  where  merchant-ships  load,  will  be  the  churca  just  open  to  the 
eastward  of  a  large  cotton-tree ;  run  in  with  this  mark,  until  you  are  within  half 
ft  mile  of  the  town,  and  anchor  in  about  18  feet.  Large  ships,  that  cannot  ap- 
)[>roach  so  near  the  town,  should  anchor  under  the  eastern  shore,  in  8  or  9  fa- 
thoms. Your  best  mark  for  anchoring  is,  Pedro  Eluff  shut  in  about  a  cable's 
length  of  Parratee  Point,  in  9i  fathoms,  with  the  town  bearing  about  N.  E.  by 
E.  h  E.  There  is  a  very  dangerous  reef  lying  on  the  western  side  of  this  bay, 
with  only  4  feel  of  water  on  the  shoalest  part ;  there  is,  also,  a  coral  bank,  near- 
ly in  the  middle  of  the  bay,  with  only  2^  fathoms  over  the  shoalest  part. 

From  Litana  Point,  the  coast  continues  clear  for  a  league  and  a  half  to  the  a» 
W.  but  it  thence  becomes  foul,  and  so  continues  to  Bluefield's  Bay,  inc.    The. 
direct  course  and  distance,  clear  of  danger,  from  Luana  Point  to  South  Negrili 
the  S.  W.  end  of  Jamaica,  are  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  nearly  ten  leagues.  /"^ 

•  BLUEFIELD'S  BAY.— This  part  of  the  coast  is  environed  by  reefs;  and 
the  anchorage  here  for  large  ships  is  without  a  rocky  ledge,  which  stretches  from 
Crab  Pond  Point  to  the  west  of  Biuefieids,  and  joins  the  reef  of  Savannah  la 
Mar.  Vessels,  coming  from  the  eastward  to  anchor  in  thtfbay,  must  keep  down 
by  the  outside  of  the  reef,  or  keep  the  land  to  the  eastward  open  of  the  point,  un- 
til the  leading-mark  is  brought  on,  which  is  the  overseer's  house  a  little  open  to 
the  eastward  of  the  tavern,  bearing  N.  E.  by  £.  ^  £.  For  anchoring,  bring  the 
overseer's  house  and  tavern  in  a  line,  N.  E.  by  ^.  k  E.  and  the  easternmost  point 
£.  S.  E.  Ships,  drawing  16  or  17  feet  of  water,  may  sail  over  the  rocky  ledge, 
\n  Si  or  4  fathoms,  with  the  overseer's  house  and  tavern  as  above,  until  over  ue 
ledge,  which  may  be  known  by^  Aiding  ^  sandy  bottom,  and  a  depth  of  5i  or  6 
fathoms.  The  watering-place  is  t9the  northward  of  the  Bluff  Point,  on  the  lee 
side  of  the  bay :  water  may  also  be  obtained  at  a  stream  off  Bluefield's  River, 
near  the  tavern. 

In  steering  ip,  keep  the  lead  going,  and  be  ready  to  anchor,  as  the  water  shoal- 
«ns  rather  suddenly.  # 

SAVANNA  LA  MAR.— The  coast  from  Biuefieids  to  Savanna  la  Mar  is 
tocky,  in  some  places  to  the  distance  of  two  miles  from  the  shore.  The  en- 
trance to  Savanna  la  Mar  is  very  narrow,  and  lies  between  a  small  reef,  ^called 
the  Middle  Ground,  (on  which  there  is  a  depth  of  only  4  feet)  and  ai^other  reef 
having  7  or  8  feet  over  it.  In  the  channel  there  is  a  depth  of  1 9  or  20  feet.  The 
leading-mark  in  is,  a  large  gap  on  the  high  laud,  called  the  Dolphin  Head,  in  a 
line  with  a  remarkable  large  tree  on  the  low  land,  to  the  eastward  of  the  town, 
and  bearing  N.  I  W.    This  mark  leads  close  to  the  Middle  Ground,  which  will 

*  South,  four  leagues  from  Bliufiolds,  lie*  a  rocky  bank,  diacoTeredin  1821,  with  (Vom  13 
WM&tboaurait. 


\- 


.  v^ 


BLUNT*8    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


205 


n  leaving  the 
u  may  clear 
St.  George's 
rse  along  the 
ich  Alligator 
already  des* 

)ther  land  on  > 
I  remarkable 
first  make  it 
and. 

ire  N.  W.  by 
iver,  which  is 
f  the  two  ex- 
:lear  of  theoir 
nain  channelv 

arratee  Poii^ 
\  is  a  reef  ex- 
)  this  bay,  to 
t  open  to  the 
ire  within  half 
lat  cannot  ap- 
in  8  or  9  fa- 
)out  a  cable's 
bout  N.  E.  by 
le  of  this  bay, 
ral  bank,  ncar- 
t  part.  : 

half  to  the  M» 
ay,  &.C.    The, 
South  Negrilt 

by  reefs;  and 

stretches  from 

Savannah  la 

ust  keep  down 

the  point,  un- 

little  open  to 

■ing,  bring  the 

:ernmost  point 

rocky  ledge, 

until  over  me 

th  of  5i  or  6 

lint,  on  the  lee 

field's  Rlv^r, 

e  water  shoal- 
ma  la  Mar  is 
»re.  The  en- 
II  reef,  ^called 
aiiotber  reef 
20  feet.  The 
in  Head,  in  a 
of  the  town, 
d,  which  will 

II,  with  (torn  13 


be  seen.    After  passing  the  latter,  haul  to  the  eastward,  and  anchor  In  17,  l6,,or 
15  feet  of  water.    This  ch  mnel  should  never  be  attempted  without  a  pilot. 

A  mile  and  a  half  to  the  westward  of  the  former  channel,  is  the  Great  Chamul 
of  Savanna  la  Mar,  which  is  a  mile  in  breadth,  and  has  a  depth  of  24  to  19  and 
19  feet  towards  the  shore.  To  sail  through,  in  mid-channel,  it  is  only  requisite 
to  bring  the  fort  on,  bearing  N.  N.  E. 

On  the  southern  extremity  of  the  bank  extending  from  shore,  bi  een  Savan- 
na la  Mar  and  John's  Point,  the  British  ship  Monarch  struck,  in  ) '  tf2,  upon  a 
bottom  of  coral.  This  extremity  lies  with  John's  Point  bearing  \.  W.  by  W. 
d  W.  and  will  be  avoided  by  keeping  one-half  of  the  high  land  of  South  Negril 
open  to  the  southward  of  John's  Point.    " 

In  traversing  hereabout,  it  is  necessary  to  be  very  particular  in  the  use  of  the 
lead;  for  the  bank,  which  extends  along  the  front  of  Bluefields,  and  thence  to 
opposite  Savanna  la  Mar,  &c.  is  rocky,  and  has,  on  its  edge,  from  20  to  24  feet 
of  water;  and  on  it,  as  on  the  White  Banks,  there  are  many  shoals,  with  little 
wa^er  on  them,  some  of  which  uncover,  and  many  have  breakers.    Without  the 
edge  of  the  reef,  and  very  near  to  it,  are  5  fathoms  of  water,  which  augments  to 
13  fathoms,  at  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  edge  of  the  bank ;  the  depth, 
therefore,  is  the  best  guide,  for,  when  you  get  from  8  to  10  fathoms,  you  will  be 
from  one-third  to  half  a  mile  from  th-    .d^'e  of  the  reef;  and  when  you  get  IS 
fathoms,  you  will  be  three-quarters  of  .  m      from  it ;  and,  pursuing  your  route, 
you  should  not  keep  in  the  depth  of  8  to      '  fathoms,  but  in  that  of  13  to  15; 
for  only  in  the  vicinity  of  the  anchoi   ^p  tLey  are  for  taking,  should  vessels  get 
into  the  first  of  these  depths.    The  anchoriige  of  Savanna  la  Mar  is  of  the  same 
nature  as  that  of  Bluefields :  large  ships  must  anchor  outside  the  reef,  and,  in  such 
a  situation,  they  will  not  be  sheltered  f  jm  the  sea,  from  east  round  to  S-  by  W. 
II:  seems  probable  thut  such  will  ve-  -  seldom  come  to  this  place,  because  they  heie 
run  much  risk  of  losing  th*^  ancho.      as,  the  instant  there  is  the  least  appearance, 
of  the  wind  freshening,  they  must  make  sail.    Such  vessels  as  do  not  draw  more 
J^an  12  or  13  feet  of  water,  may  anchor  upon  the  barfk,  and  behind  (or  in  the  lee 
tff )  the  reefs,  in  15  or  16  feet  of  water,  with  the  town  bearing  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  near-  ' 
ly  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant.  You  may  cross  over  the  edge  of  the  bank  so 
soOn  as  the  wharfs  at  Savanna  la  Mar  bear  N.  W.  by  W.  which  will  be  Chree-quar- 
ters  of  a  mile  to  windward  of  the  Eastern  Channel,  (that  is,  if  the  vessel  is  on  the 
edge  of  the  reef,  or  near  it)  and  sending  a  boat,  to  be  placed  to  the  westward  of 
the  Middle  Ground ;  it  will  serve  for  a  guide  and  buoy ;  and  then  you  have  only 
to  shave  close  to  the  boat,  as  the  mean  to  keep  clear  of  the  reef  to  leeward. 
The  boat  may  proceed  with  the  leading-mark  a»  above,  or  may  steer  northerly 
Hntil  she  comes  to  the  edge  of , the  reef,  which  runs  along  to  the  east  of  the  an- 
chorage; and,  keeping  along  the  southern  edge  of  this  reef,  she  must  thence 
steer  N.  W.  i  N.  >so  soon  as  tlfil  wharf  of  Savanna  la  Mar  bears  on  that  rhumb ; 
with  this  course*  she  will  pass  over  the  rock. 

WESTERN  END  of  JAMAICA— From  St.  John's  Point  to  South  NegrU. 
the  coast  is  bold-to,  or  high  and  steep.  T^  indent  between  South  and  Norttt 
Negril  is  called  Negril  or  Long  Bay,  and  affbrds  tolerable  anchorage.  Close  t« 
the  south  side  of-  North  Negril  is  Negril  Harbour,  a  small  harbour,  with  good 
anchoring  ground  for  small  vessels ;  and,  to  the  north,  are  Orange  Bay  and 
Half-moon  Bay,  places  fit  for  Droggers,  &c.  Six  miles  to  the  N.  E.  from  North 
Negril  is  Green  Island  Harbour,  and,  about  2|  miles  from  the  latter,  is  Davis' 
Gove.  These  are  places  seldom  resorted  to,  but  by  those  who  go  thither  on 
purpose  to  load,  and  have  pilots.* 

Between  Negril  and  North  Pedro  the  coast  is  bold,  excepting  at  Green  Island, 
which  is  low,  and  environed  by  a  reef,  nearly  even  with  the  water.    From  Pedro 
Point  to  the  harbour  of  Lucea,  vessels  may  stand  within  a  mile  of  the  shore. 
Mr.  Town  says,  a  ship  being  off  the  west  end  of  Jamaica,  and  bound  to  any 

Sort  on  the  north  side,  should  endeavour  to  round  the  points,  called  South  and 
Forth  Negril,  as  close  as  she  can;  for  the  current,  in  general,  sets  to  the  N.  E* 

*  A  rock,  witb  %4  feet  water  on  it,  wai  aeen  some  years  since  by  one  of  the  dnps  in  a 
eonvoy  lying-to,  about,  as  well  as  I  can  recollect,  40  mites  west  of  Negril  Point,  Junaica; 
Md  I  am  pretty  certain  it  was  in  lat  19^  84'.  It  was  netioed  in  public  orders  at  Port  UojA 


m 


286 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


If  proceeding  fu  -  the  Harbour  of  Lucea,  you  may  kno\t  its  entrance  by  a  re- 
markable notch  in  the  mountain,  called  the  Dolphin-Head.  At  a  little  to  the 
westward  of  the  harbour  there  is,  also,  a  remarkable  white  spot  in  the  land, 
which  may  be  seen  eif;ht  or  ten  miles  off. 

HARBOUR  of  LUCEA.— This  harbour  is  one  of  the  best  on  the  north  side 
of  the  island.     It  is  safe,  there  being  little  danger  in  sailing  in  or  out.    The  N.  E. 

Eoint  is  called  Lucea  Point,  and,  on  the  western  point,  stands  the  fort.  Vftssela, 
aving  opened  the  harbour,  steer  directly  in,  only  giving  the  Fort  Point,  on  the 
western  side,  a  birth,  as  a  reef  stretches  from  it,  on  the  extremity  of  which  there 
is,  generally,  a  buoy.  To  sail  in,  bring  the  remarkable  mountain,  called  the 
Dolphin  Headi  open  to  the  westward  of  Barbara  Hill,  which  has  a  house  on  the 
top  of  it,  and  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  harbour,  bearing  nearly  S.  by  E.  Con- 
tinue on,  in  this  direction,  until  the  fort  bears  West,  when  you  will  be  within 
the  Fort  Reef.     Hence  proceed  towards  the  town,  on  the  west,  and  anchor  in 

6  or  6  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  with  the  fort  bearing;  from  N.  by  W.  to  Ni,  N.  W.' 
and  Lucea  Point,  at  the  eastern  sideof  the  entrance,  from  N.N.  E.  to  N.N.  E-i^. 

Those  approaching  this  place  from  the  eastward,  muat  observe  to  keep  at  lef&st 
three  miles  from  shore,  until  passed  Buckner's  Reef,  which  lies  off  Mosquito 
Cove,  and  sometimes  breaks.  It  is  also  to  be  observed  that,  around  Lucea 
Point,  and  to  the  north-eastward,  there  is  a  rocky  flat,  extending  out  to  a  con- 
siderable distance. 

Within  the  point,  the  reef  extends  to  a  cable's  length  from  shore.  It  is  nearly 
steep-to,  and  the  heads  of  coral  sometimes  appear  above  water. 

For  passing  clear  of  the  edge  of  the  eastern  bank,  the  mark  is,  Malcolm  House, 
which  stands  on  a  small  hill  or  rising  at  the  east  end  of  Lucea  Town,  brought  on 
the  east  end  of  the  fort,  and  kept  go  until  you  bring  the  Dolphin  Head,  as  al- 
ready mentioned,  to  the  westward  of  Barbam  Hill.  This  mark  leads  through 
8,  7,  and  6,  fathoms,  then  deepening  to  13,  and  shoaling  again  into  the  harbour. 

MOSQUITO  COVE,  an  excellent  harbour,  lies  three  and  a  half  miles  to  the 
eastward  of  the  harbour  of*  Lucea.  Here  a  hundred  sail  of  merchant- ships  may 
lie  securely  from  all  winds.  The  channel,  at  the  entrance,  is  little  more  thaii' 
a  cable's  length  in  breadth,  but  widens  inward,  to  where  the  harbour  has  from 

7  to  4i  fathoms.    The  bottom,  in  general,  is  muddy.     To  sail  in,  you  may  pass 
to  the  eastward  of  Buckner's  Reef,  or  over  its  eastern  end*,  in  5  j  or  6  fathoms.V 
The  course  into  Mosquito  Cove  is  nearly  S.  E.  by  S.  but  it  should  not  be  at- 
tempted by  a  stranger  without  great  caution,  as  the  entrance  is  much  contracted 
by  a  reef  from  the  eastern  side. 

MONTEGO  BAY.— The  northern  point  of  Montego  Bay  lies  in  latitude 
18°  8i£j'.  This  is  a  good  bay  with  the  wind  from  N.  N.  E.  to  the  eastward  and 
southward;  but  it  is  open  to  the  north  and  west;  and  the  northerly  wind,  in 
December  and  January,  has  frequently  driven  vHsels  on  shore. 

To  sail  in,  from  the  eastward,  give  the  point,  on  coming  down,  a  birth  of  two 

iniles,  in  order  to  avoid  a  reef,  which  extends  from  it,  and  which  may  be  dis- 
inctly  seen  from  the  bows,  Vrhen  in^  or  5  fathoms.  When  you  open  the  town, 
rou  may  approach  the  reef,  which Jrpretty  steep,  into  10,  9,  or  8,  fathoms,  and 
will  see  the  bottom.  You  now  haul  round  towards  the  town,  but  must  not  ven-  * 
ture  to  anchor,  until  you  have  well  shut  in  Sandy  Point  (without  the  bay  on  the 
north)  with  Old  F'  ft  Point.  For,  with  Sandy  Point  in  sight,  there  arc  from 
35  to  30  fathom',  and  the  bank  is  so  steep  that  the  anchor  will  not  hold.  If  a 
ship  drives  off,  she  will,  with  a  sea-breeze,  be  in  danger  of  grounding  on  the  lee 
reefs.  The  mark  for  the  best  anchorage  is  the  barracks  upon  the  hill  in  a  line, 
or  nearly  so,  w;th  Ti,edwick'8  Stone  Wharf,  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  the  bay.  The 
ground  here  is  good,  in  11,  10,  and  9,  fathoms.  On  entering  from  the  westward, 
with  a  fair  wind,  the  church  bearing  east,  leads  directly  to  the  anchorage. 

The  following  description  and  directions  are  those  of  Mr.  Town : — Montego 
Bay  affords  good  anchorage  for  20  or  30  vessels;  except  during  the  prevalence  of 
strong  north  winds,  which  generally  commence  in  the  beginning;  of  November, 
and  end  in  the  latter  end  of  February.     With  the  general  trade-wind,  which  »  | 
from  the  N.  E.  to  the  E.  N.  E.  ships  will  ride  here  with  perfect  safety.    There  - 
is  a  small  harbour,  or  cove,  in  the  N.  E«  part  of  the  bay,  which  will  hold  from 


J5f"*"  -i- 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


287 


10  (o  14  TcMcls.    This  is  the  only  safe  place  for  ships  during  the  strong  north 
winds. 

On  coming  into  this  bay  with  the  sea-breeze,  which  is  from  N.  E.  to  E.  N.  E. 
you  should  endeavour  to  get  well  to  the  eastward  before  you  attempt  to  run  in. 

The  leading-mark  for  clearing  the  Old  Fort  Reef,  which  extends  from  the 
anchorage  in  the  bay  to  the  northward  of  the  northernmost  point,  is  the  Boge 
Road  end  on,  bearing  South,  or  South  a  little  westerly.  Troceed  with  this 
mark  until  Montego  Church  comes  open  of  Old  Fort  Point;  then  haul  in  for 
the  S.  E.  part  of  the  town,  and  when  Sandy  Point  is  shut  in  with  Old  Fort 
Point,  you  may  anchor  in  from  17  to  10  fathoms,  fine  sand  and  mud.  The  reef 
off  and  to  the  northward  of  Old  Fort  Point  lies  nearly  one  mile  and  a  quarter 
from  the  shore ;  advance,  therefore,  no  nearer  to  the  point  northward  of  Old 
Fort  Point  than  two  miles. 

About  5  miles  to  the  westward  of  Montego  Bay  is  a  small  creek,  a  bay  with- 
out, which  is  called  Great  Roads.  In  this  bay  merchant-vessels  lay  to  load ; 
there  being  a  shoal  extending  nearly  the  whole  of  the  way  across,  which  aflfords 
good  shelter  for  ships  lying  here  during  the  north  winds. 

All  ships,  lying  either  in  Montego  Bay  or  at  Great  Roads,  pay  harbour  dues, 
at  the  rate  of  one  shilling  per  ton,  register  tonnage ;  and,  in  the  event  of  any  ship's 
going  into  the  Inner  Harbour,  at  Montego  Bay,  she  is  cliargcd  one  half-penny 
per  ton,  for  every  day  that  she  may  lie  in  this  harbour,  in  addition  to  the  fee 
that  is  paid  for  anchoring  in  the  bay. 

If  bound  from  Montego  Bay  to  the  eastward,  I  would  recommend  leaving  the 
bay  in  the  evening,  so  soon  as  the  land-wind  comes  off,  which  will  generally  run 
you  clear  of  the  bay,  and  in  a  good  offing  for  the  sea-breeze.  It  is  generally  recom- 
mended to  beat  to  windward  close  to  the  land,  in  order  to  have  the  advantage  of 
the  eastern  currents;  but  I  am  of  opinion  that  the  only  advantage  you  have  by 
keepingv/in  shore  is,  that  you  meet  the  land-wind,  which  somemnes  will  carry 
you  w«il  to  the  eastward  during  the  night;  for  th<i  current  sets  to  the  westward 
^as  often  as  to  the  eastward.  If  your  destination  be  Falmouth  Harbour,  endea- 
'^ur,  if  by  night,  to  keep  the  shore  close  aboard,  and  the.  land-wind  will  lead 
you  to  the  eastward. 

J^EAK  or  TARQUINO.— In  worJcina  hftnce  to  windward,  in  clear  weather, 
iiwhen'Cuba  is  visible,  a  remarkable  hill  will  be  discerned.  This  is  the  Pico  de 
Tarquino,  the  highest  land  on  this  side  of  Cuba,  which  bears  from  Montego  Point 
N.  E.  I  N.  distant  thirty-five  leagues ;  from  St.  Anne's'  Bay,  N.  by  E.  twenty- 
eight  and  a  half  leagues ;  and  from  tlie  east  end  of  Jamaica,  N.  N.  W.  forty 
leagues,  by  which  you  may  judge  how  far  you  are  to  windward  on  any  oth^r 
bearings.     The  Peak  of  Tarquino,  &ic.  have  already  been  described  in  page  222. 

FALMOUTH  HARBOUR,  or  MARTHA  BRAE— This,  harbour,  which 
lies  six  leagues  to  the  eastwa|^  of  Montego  Bay,  is  a  bar-harbour.     Its  channel' 
or  entrance,  is  very  narrow,  not  more  than  16  or  17  feet  inlSepth,  and  too  intri- 
cate to  be  attempted  without  a  pilot.    The  town  of  Falmouth  is  situate  on  the 
western  side  of  the  harbour,  throughout  the  greatest  part  of  which  there  is 
regular  depth  of  from  5  to  10  fathoms.        | 

MARABONA  BAY. — At  about  three  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  FalmontI 
is  Marabona  Bay,  which  is  very  remirkable.  It  has  a  low  pleasant  plantation 
close  to  it;  and  on  the  hill  over  it,  is  a  large  house  or  castle,  formerly  the  resi- 
dence of  Brian  Edwards,  Esq.  the  historian  of  the  West  Indies.  Within  a  league 
to  th    eastward  of  this  is  the  small  harbour  of  Rio  Bueno. 

RIO  BUENp  and  DRY  HARBOUR.— i2to  Bucno,  which  lies  nearly  four 
leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Falmouth,  is  a  bay,  exposed  to  all  winds  between  N. 
and  W.  N.  W.  and  has  but  indiflferent  anchorage,  the  bank  being  steep.  It  is  sel- 
dom visited  by  other  than  merchant-vessels,  which  go  there  to  load.  From  the 
entrance  to  the  place  of  anchorage,  the  distance  is  about  two  miles.  The  har- 
bour is  formed  by  two  reefs.  A  ship  may  lie  with  the  point  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  in 
8,  or  7,  fathoms.  Dry  Harbour,  which  lies  three  miles  more  to  t'  <  eastward,  is,' 
however,  a  good  harbour  for  small  vessels,  although  its  channel  be  narrow,  and 
has  a  depth  of  only  16  feet. 


4 


■\.,%- 


dk.j.j£ti^ 


2ee 


BLUNT'S    AM^RlOAIf   COAST    PILOT. 


'1. 


i'  M'tf 

m 


f 


St.  ANNE'S  BAY— The  entrance  of  this  bay  lies  in  lat.  180  s\\  long.  n° 
15'.  It  is  narrow,  and  lies  betwc^en  two  reefs,  which  have  on  their  ridges  3  and 
8^  fathoms,  deepening  abruptly  in  the  channel  to  10  und  11  fathoms.  The  en- 
trance is  less  than  half  a  cable's  length  in  breadth,  and  lies  with  the  barracks,  on 
the  rise  of  the  hill,  bearing  nearly  S.  I E.  but  it  is  not  tu  be  attempted  without  a 
pilot.  With  a  northerly  wind,  a  stream  of  considerable  strength  sets  outwarHs 
through  the  channel :  tnis  is  occasioned  by  the  great  (juuntity  of  water  thrown 
over  tne  reefs  by  the  swell.  In  passing  in,  as  the  water  is  clear,  vessels  generally 
pass  close  to  the  western  reef,  on  the  starboard  side. 

Mr.  Town  says,  St.  Anne's  Bay  lies  about  twelve  miles  to  the  eastward  of 
Dry  Harbour.  This  bay  may  be  known  by  its  having  a  very  regular  row  of  co- 
coa-nut trees  around  it,  close  to  the  water's  edge,  and  the  town  of  St.  Anne, 
which  stands  on  the  side  of  a  hill  on  the  S.  E.  side  of  the  bay.  The  houses  stand 
close  to  the  water's  edge  on  the  western  side,  and  the  plantations  are,  in  appear- 
ance, in  a  state  of  cultivation  much  superior  to  any  >vestward  of  this  place.  The 
harbour  of  St.  Anne  is  small,  and  is  close  to  the  town.  You  may  anchor  here, 
in  from  6  to  9  fathoms,  good  ground. 

OCHO  RIOS,  which  lies  seven  miles  to  the  eastward  of  St.  Anne's,  is  an  an- 
chorage open  to  north  and  N.  W.  winds.  To  enter,  you  sail  by  a  reef  which  spits 
off  from  the  eastern  side  uf  the  bav,  hauling  up  and  bringing  the  westernmost 
part  of  it  N.  N.  W.  j  W.  to  N.  W.  m  7  fathoms.  There  is  another  reef  to  the 
southward,  but  as  the  water  is  very  clear,  it  will  be  seen.  Thi&  is  a  small  har- 
bour, frequented  by  merchant  vessels  only,  which  go  there  to  loatl. 

ORA  GABECA,  10  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Ocho  Rios,  is  another  anchor- 
age, exposed,  like  the  former,  to  N.  and  N.  W.  winds.  To  sail  in  here,  when 
advancmg  from  the  eastward,  first  make  Galina  Point ;  in  order'  to  which,  when 
off  at  sea,  bring  the  westernmost  high  land  of  the  Blue  Mountains  S.  S.  E.  wl.kuh, 
thus  kept  on,  will  lead  to  the  point.  To  anchor,  give  the  small  reef  oiv  the  east 
side  a  birth,  and  when  the  westernmost  bluff  point  bears  west,  or  W.  by  N.  an- 
chor in  5j|t  6,  or  7,  fathoms.  ^ 

Captain  Livingston  says,  it  is  not  generally  known  that,  in  Allan's  HoljIi 
which  is  formed  by  reefs  level  with  the  water  on  the  one  side,  and  the  eastern 
shore  of  the  bay  on  the  other  side,  vessels,  drawing  from  10  to  12  feeti  inr^y  ite 
AS  secure  as  in  any  harbour  in  Jamaica.  When  once  inside  the  reefs,  the  buttonv 
js  quite  clear,  and  the  reefs  completely  break  the  sea  off.  Vessels  drawing  not 
more  than  tS,  feet  of  water  may  warp  into  this  place.  At  the  north  end  of  the 
reef  is  an  isltt,  with  bushes  on  It,  divided  from  the  main  land  by  a  narrow  and 
shallow  channel.  Allan's  tlule  has  two  entrances ;  one  through  the  reef,  which 
is  extremely  narrow,  and  one  by  the  point  of  the  reef;  but  neither  ought  to  be 
attempted  without  a  pilot. 

GALINA  POINT  liea  four  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Ora  Cabega.    This 

point  is  low,  biit  the  land  to  the  southward  of  it  is  hi^h ;  and,  in  making  it  from 

the  westward,  a  remarkable  round  hill,  that  stands  within  the  point,  will,  on  its 

^rst  appearance,  form  the  point ;  but,  on  a  nearer  approach,  the  land  slopes  off 

^o  the  northward  to. a  low  point. 

PORT  MARIA.— The  entrance  of  this  harbour  lies  in  lat.  18°  27',  and  long. 
76°  53'.  Its  anchorage  is  open  to  N.  N.  ^.  north,  and  N.  W.  winds.  In  com- 
ing in,  the  high  island,  named  Cabarita  Island,  must  be  seen,  and  its  northern 
part  should  have  a  birth  of  two  cables'  length.  You  may  haul  into  the  bay,  and 
snchorwith  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  island  N.  E.  or  N.  E.  by  N.  at  the  distance 
of  about  a  cable  or  a  cable  and  a  half's  length.  Small  vessels,  drawing  10  feet 
4>f  water,  may  anchor  between  the  island  and  the  main.  The  bottom  is  foul  in 
the  outer  part  of  the  bay,  and  many  ships  have  injured  it  by  heaving  over  their 
ballast.    There  is  not  room  for  more  than  10  or  12  vessels  to  lie  here,  as  the  foul 


^^^round  extends  nearly  over  the  whole  harbour. 

jUr  p    ----- 


i     /"^^    From  Port  Maria  the  coast  tends  E.  S.  E.  six  miles,  to  Blowing  Point ;  thence 

1t^       it  continues  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.  about  five  miles,  to  Anotta  Bay. 

^  ANOTTA  BAY,  which  lies  about  eleven  miles  to  the  S.  £.  of  Port  Maria, 

has  its  anchorage  open  to  north  and  N.  W.  winds.    To  sail  in,  give  the  reef  on 

the  eastern  aida,  which  is  called  the  Sckoolmtutert  a  sufficient  birth ;  then  steer 


DLUNT^B  AMBRICAIf  COAST  PILOT. 


289 


■:* 


r^own  until  you  brin^  tho  tavern,  a  building  easily  known,  B.  by  Vf.  or  south. 
When  advanced  within  the  Schoolmastei,  haul  a  little  to  tbft  eastWardi  and  have 
the  anchor  clear,  the  bank  beini;  steep  and  narrow.  The  first  soundinc  will  be 
10  or  9  fathoms.  Let  go  in  7  Tathoms,  which  is  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from 
yhore,  with  good  holding  ground.  Be  cautious  of  andioring  on  the  western  edge 
of  the  bank,  as  it  will  not  hold,  and  you  may  be  in  danger  of  getting  on  shoro 
to  the  westward.* 

Of  Anotta  Bay,  Captain  Livingston  says,  **  This  is  the  wildest  road  I  ever  sav. 
No  vessel  ought  to  enter  it,  without  being  uncommonly  well  found  in  ground- 
tackle.  They  ought,  by  all  means,  to  have  cliain  cables.  The  following  isflrom 
memory  onl^ :  The  reef  off  Gibraltar  Point,  the  Sehooimaater^  is  much  more  dan- 
gerous than  is  generally  supposed.  The  late  Mr.  Angus  McDonald,  the  harbour- 
master, informed  me  that  it  extends  fully  four  and  a  half  miles  out ;  and  some 
places  have  only  from  6  to  9  feet  of  water,  while  there  are  gaps,  or  gat-ways, 
through  khem,  with  as  many  fathoms." 

.,  PORT  ANTONIO,  which  lies  about  eight  miles  Arom  the  N.  E.  end  of  Ja- 
maica, was  formerly  a  king's  port  where  there  are  still  to  be  seen  the  remains 
of  a  earfeening  wharf,  be.  It  is  formed  by  nature  into  two  harbours,  divided  by 
a  pieninsula,  on  which  stands  the  town  of  Htchffeld,  to  the  north  and  N.  W.  of 
wnich  lies  flie  island  called  Navy  Island,  extending  east  and  west,  and  about 
half  a  mile  in  length. 

To  sail  into  the  eastern  harbour,  first  bring  the  eastern  part  of  the  Blue  Moun- 
tains to  bear  about  S.  S.  W.  and  steer  in  that  direction  until  you  approach  near 
Foll^  Point,  the  oast  point  of  the  eastern  harbour.  Next  bring  the  church 
(which  is  a  large  square  building  on  the  side  of  a  hill  in  the  S.  W.  part  of  the 


aula)  to  open  the  church  to  the  eastward  of  the  wharf.  When  the  fort  bears  N.W. 

u  may  anchor  in  8,  9,  10,  or  11  fathoms,  good  holding  npiind.  The  bottom 

^indeed,  so  stiff,  that  it  is  rather  difficult  to  get  up  the  alNhors. 

The  preceding  directions  must  be  particularly  attended  to,  in  order  to  avoid  a 
reef,  which  stretohes  from  the  eastern  end  of  Navy  Island,  as  well  as  from  the 
<|>oint  of  the  pr.  'nsula.  The  eastern  side  of  the  harbour  is  shoal ;  and  there  ii 
a  reef  nearly  in  the  middle,  having  over  it  only  8  or  10  feet  of  water. 

To  tail  into  tht  teeatem  Harbour,  after  having  brought  the  chureh  well  open  to 
the  eastward  of  the  fort,  proceed,  under  easj  sail,  into  the  entrance  of  the  jhan- 
rid- between  Navy  Island  and  Titchfleld,  bringing  a  long  building,  whicn  is  • 
atore-^hopse,  standing  on  &  hill  to  the  westward,  open  of  the  south-western  point 
of  Navy  Island.    This  mark  is  to  be  kept  on  until  the  ehurch  appeara  open  to 

M 

■*  . 

* ,  A  brig  of  war  was  lost  on  the  outer  reef,  a  feir  yean  ago.  I  have  <rflea  bterd  bar  naiiMj 
during  my  residence  at  the  bay,  but  it  has  escaped  lay  niemonr.  She  was  so  flir  out,  that  ac 
one  had  any  sujqpieion  that  she  was  in  the  least  danger :  and  it  was  only  in  eonseqoence  ol 
her  loss  that  they  discovered  the  reefs  lay  so  (hr  mit.  Mr.  M^)onald,  harbour-master  ant 
senior-pilot  at  tiuB  bay,  surveyed  the  reefs ;  bathe  informed  me,  his  sun^  was  forwarded  to 
Port  Royal,  to  be  produced  at  the  trial  of  the  oflkers  of  tiie  brig  whloh  was  lost.  What  I 
hare  stated  above  was  iWrni  his  information. 

The  earthquake  felt  inJamaica,in  1811,  was  particularly  severe  atAaottaBay.  Part  of  the 
bottom  of  the  bay,  about  one*quarter  of  a  mile  frdln  the  shore,  sunk ;  and  where  vessels  used 
te  anchor,  there  is  now  no  bottom  to  be  found ;  or,  at  least,  I  have  beia  assured  none  has  been 
found,  thou^  I  heard  soAn^dy  at  the  bay  say  that  it  has  been,  at  170  ftthoms.  When 
this  spot  sunk,  a  vessel  wis  riding,  with  a  hedge  i^ut  in  that  directioi^  to  steady  her ;  in  an 
instant,  as  an  eye-witness  assured  me,  she  seemed  as  if  gofail||;  down  s'  'n  foremost,  and  then 
suddlbnly  rising  again,  swang  round  at  once.  *  This,  it  was«oon  disr  red»  was  vuMwiuned 
by  her  kedge  being  swallowed  by  the  bottom  of  the  bay  When  it  sii  v  a^i  the  sodden  fise 
of  the  vessd  again  was  caused  by  the  hawser,  bent  to  the  hadgB*  gi^t»a  way,  or  the  tia|N»  tO 
whM|  it  was  attached,  yielding.  "^ 

Mlbtta  Bay  is  an<  extreliely  unhealthy  place ;  so  Is  Port  Maria ;  But  Ota  Cabegii  is  a  tel* 
eraUy  healtiiy  situation. 


i-t 


4* 


t't 


ft<  to'*  :h' 


290 


BLUNl's   AM£RICAM    COAST   PiLOT. 


as 


the  westward  of  the  pcnIiMula;  then  haul  round  to  the  8.  W.  wA  anchor  hi  from 
7  to  4  fathoms,  whare  there  is  good  aground. 

A  channel,  called^the  Hog  Channel,  leads  directly  from  sea  into  the  western 
harbour,  from  the  west  end  of  a  long  reef  that  extends  from  Navy  Island ;  but 
it  is  crooked  and  narrow,  has  only  13  or  14  feet  of  water  in  the  western  part  of 
it,  and  is  therefore  used  only  by  small  vessels.  u  .    ,' * 

The  tides  here  are  not  regular,  being  influenced  by  the  winds.  The  variauop 
in  1771  was  7°  1 5'  E-  and  it  is  still  nearly  the  sam^^  "  ■* 

Qf  ?ort  Antonio,  Mr.  Town  says,  the  western  nlirbour  is  the  best;  the  east- 
ern oeing  open  to  the  north  winds.  When  entering  the  port,  with  the  sett-breeze, 
keep  as  nearly  in  mid-channei  between  Navy  Island  and  the  main  as  you  can. 
Rva  Hn  with  the  Eeading-mark  on,  and  anchor  in  about  6  or  7  fatiroma.  If  vf  h. 
small  ship,  anchor,  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  as  the  ground  without  the  latter  depth  is 

foul.        B  k,  * 

PORT  MORANT.— This  is  a  good  harbour,  but  the  reefs  extend  t»  the  dis- 
tance of  half  a  mile  from  shore,  on  each  dde  of  the  entrance,  and  the  breadth 
of  the  channel  between  is  only  a  cable's  length  and  a  half.  As  the  direetton^of 
the  entrince  is  N.  i  W.  it  can  be  attempted  only  with  the  sea-breeze,  oi'lbet^tten 
the  hours  of  ten  and  two  in  the  day.  To  sail  in,  a  ship  must  lie  north  or  N.  by 
E.  until  th  leading-mark  is  on.  This  mark  is  a  remarkable  house,  which  stands 
upon  a  hill,  iu  a  line  with  the  cast  end  of  the  easternmost  red  cliff,  bearing  N.i 
W.  With  this  mark  you  may  sail  into  the  bay  with  safety.  Take  c&re  not  to 
approach  top  near  the  i-e':fs,  but  bring  the  marKS  exactly  as  described.  Toh  will 
thus  havL>  9,  8,  7[|,  7,  6^,  6,  5,  and  quarter  less  5  to  4  fathoms  of  water.  .There 
is  ancliorage  in  6i^  and  7  fathoms,  with  the  leading-mark  on,  and  Fero  Battc^ry, 
which  is  on  the  eastern  side,  bearing  £.  S.  E. 


The  Islanda  called  the  Caymans,  loiih  (he  neighbouring  Shotda,  ife# 

The  CAYMANS  are  three  islands,  lying  between  the  meridians  of  TO^  30'; 
and  81<^  35'  W.  and  parallels  of  19°  10',  and  19°  45'  N.    The  larger  and  wesi-' 
erninost  is  named  the  Grand  Cayman,  the  second,  the  Little  Caymani  and  th# 
easternmnst,  the  Cayinan-bruck.       ^  ' 

The  Grand  Cayman  was  regularly  surveyed  by  Mr.  George  Q^uld,  in  the  year 
1773;  but  that  gentleman  ascertained  neither  its  true  latitude  nor  its  longitude. 
Ca|miin  Livingston,  however,  by  observations  taken  5th  August,  1817,  proves 
*  the  key  near  the  S.  W.  point  to  lie  in  19°  14' N.  and  the  longitude  o^the  east 
end  has  been  determined  by  more  than  one  observer;  it  is  81°  5'  W.  hence  we 
gain  that  of  the  S.  W.  key,  by  survey,  81°  s,Q'M 

A.. ..  ', ',.    r 

*  ObsorvatioDsby  Captain  James  Wall&ceMonteath:—"  In  latitude  19^13',  the  N.!!. 
Ipoiiit  of  Grand  Cayman,  bearing  N.  20°  W.  S.  W.  point,  S.  84°  W.  and  Eastern  Reef,  btrtb, 
*truc. 

"  Longitude  of  skip,  in  time,  81°  5' 45" :  by  lunar*,  81°  9f  l":  mean  longitude  of  the 
East  Reef,  81°  3'  63''.  Longitude  of  the  east  end  of  the  Cayman,  by  Captain  Wilson,  of 
Greenock,  81°  5':  by  clironomet«r,  81°  3':  Mean  longitude,  by  Captain  Wiuon,  as  in  Nauti- 
cal Almanac,  81°  4'.  "  '  ,  <■ 

"  Alter  these  obRcrrations  were  made,  Ibe  ship  ran  on  a  west  course  for  16  minutes,  at  the 
rate  of  four  kn^ts,  6  (Itthoms ;  which  giv<s  nearly  one  and  a  quarter  mile  departure ;  equal 
to  1°  SO'  difference  of  longitude :  which,  added,  places  the  east  and  of  the  island  in  81°  ft' 

Captain  Munteath  repeated  Ms  observations  in  latitude  19°  13',  when  the  easternmost 
point  of  Grand  Cayman  bore  north  i  end  here  his  lunars  and  chrotnometer  exactly  agreed. 
Again,  in  latitude  19°  15',  with  the  east  end  of  the  island  bearing  VV.  by  N.  five  mile*,  the 
results  of  four  sets,  lunar  and  chronometrio,  gave  a  difftltance  of  only  8'  52".  The  longitudo 
of  the  Caymans  may,  therefore,  be  considered  as  finally  H#Ued. 

"At  the  time  the  positions  of  these  points  were  ascertained,  the  atmosphere  in  genstol 
was  clear ;  the  barometer  nnd  thermometer  stood,  on  an  average,  fVom  S9.15  to  30  inches, 
and  from  60°  tc  70°,  from  which  moxknum  Uie  a|^i^tions  for  nficfstion  were  made,  the  in 
struownts  being  excellently  adjusted."  »  ^  '  '■*■ 


in- 


irj 


♦  :* 


.•^'v,t2 


,  jL-  J. 


iVbid 


iiiii'\Aiifi  I  ' 


BLUNl's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


291 


ncbor  In  from 


The  variatioo 


i  minutes,  at  the 


W 


The  GRAND  CAYMAN  18  about  eight  Iea;;uc6  long,  and  two  and  a  half 
broad.  The  B.  E.  end  lies  in  latitude  190 IQ'  N.  and  the  ^j^£.  point  in  latitude 
igo  22*.  The  eastern  end  la  surrounded  by  a  reef,  extending  a  mile  and  a  half 
from  shore,  which  thence  extends  along  the  north  and  south  coasts.  Off  the 
S.  W.  point  there  is,  also,  §  key  and  reefs,  to  which  a  good  birth  must  be  given. 
The  N.  W.  OP  west  point  is  three  leagues  from  the  3.  W.  point,  and  between  is 
the  spot  called  the  Hogaiies,  Tvhere  there  is  a  small  village,  off  which  you  roar 
anchor,  in  froiA  12  to  7  fat^ic^ms,  by  bnnging  the  southernmost  h'ouse  to  bear  iL 
by  S.  at  half  a  mile  from  m>re.  The  bottom  is  rocky,  but  you  may  see  tbv 
ground,  where  you  let  go,  as  the  water  is  very  clear ;  it  wiH,  however,  be  proper 
to  buoy  up  the  cables,  and  steady  the  ship  with  a  small  anchor. 

0aptain  Dalxel,  in  some  observations  on  passing  the  Grand  Cayman,  has  said, 
"  Tbe  island  is  low,  covered  with  coco-nut  and  other  trees,  and  of  greater  ex- 
tent than  people  who  never  saw  it  generally  uuagine.  The  north  sicfe  forms  a 
bay,  across  the  mouth  of  which  runs  a  reef  of  sunken  rocks,  which  mav  be  nea- 
dily  seen  in  the  day-time,  before  yo^  are^pear  enough  to  run  any  kind  of  risk. 
ti  is'titttally  impossible  for  any  thing  but  small  craft  to  anchor  on  ^k  side,  fdr 
there  ar6  no  soundings  dope  to  the  reef,  and  the  deepest  water  over  it  is  ft  feel^ 
although  there  are  2  or  8  fathoms  within  it.  The  small  vessels  of  the  island  igo 
in  here,  ttS  they  do,  likewise,  on  the  south  side,  which  is  also  foul,  and  Rot4K>  bie 
approached  by  strangers. 

"The  West  end  of  Grand  Cayman,  which  is  best  inhabited  and  mostly  resort- 
ed to,  is  the  only  place  where  large  vessels  can  corou  to ;  lliough,'even  here,  it  is 
but  indifferent  anchorage :  for,  without  the  utmost  care,  you  are  in  danger  of 
getting  your  cables  cutbjr  the  rocks;  or  may,  perhaps,  let  go  your  anchor  in  a 
place  where  it  cannot  be  purchased.  Our  anchor  got  under  the  shelf  of  a  rode, 
and  we  had  two  days  hard  work  to  purchaHe  it ;  nor  could  we  have  weighetrit 
at  all,  if  we  had  not  borrowed  a  small  anchor,  (we  rode  by  our  only  anchor)  and 
backed  wi^h  a  swivel.  This  luckily  hooked  another  shelf:  we  hove  upon  the 
~^,ble  that  was  fast  to  it,  and  Uien  with  much  difficulty  purchased  our  own  an- 

ibp  from  under  the  rock.  We  came  to  in  11  fathoms,  but^iost  of  the  inhabit- 
ants say  that  8  fathoms  is  the  anchorage. 

'^iTour  first  soundings  going  in  are  about  17  fathoms,  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
^ff  shore ;  after  which  you  shallow  your  water  2  or  3  fathoms,  every  shin's 
length,  till  you  get  into  8  fathoms,  where  you  may  come-to  in  one  of  the  white 
holes.  These,(iole3  are  patches  of  sand  among  the  rocks,  which  you  can  easily 
see  when  looking  over  the  side.  Let  a  careful  person  look  out  forward,  to  pick 
a  large  hole,  and  be  sure  ypu  let  go  your  anchor  well  towards  the  weather  me  of 
it,  that,^hen  you  veer  ^way  cable,  it  may  not  come  upon  the  rocks.  If  it  should 
come  to  blow,  and  you  'are  in  danger  of  dragging  your  anchor  towards  any  of 
the  shelves,  you  must  heave  It  up  again.  You  can  plainly  see  your  anchor  as 
often  as  you  please,  and  you  can  easily  distinguish  the  rocky  botto|n  from  the 
whUe  holes,  by  its  blackness.  Observing  the  above  directions,  you  cannlot 
get  amiss :  perhaps  you  will  do  best  not  to  take  a  pilot,  as  they  aru  not  ove 
careful. 

"The  west  end  forms  a  kind  of  double  bay;  the  southernmost  is  the  road. 
Give  the  middle  point  a  good  birth,  as  some  rocks  lie  off  it:  you  need  not  heave 
the  lead  until  you  see  the  bottom,  for  you  will  get  no  ground  till  then." 

The  Grand  Cayman  is  inhabited  by  many  persons,  descended  from  the  old 
buccanniers,  exclusive  pf  negroes.  The  climate  and  soil  are  s^pgularly  salu- 
brious; the  iieople  art^  vigorous,  and  commonly  live  to  a  great  age.  They  raise 
various  produce  for  their  own  use,  and  havu  some  to  npari*.  As  navigatorB, 
their  chief  employment  is  to  fit>h  for  turtle,  and  to  pilot  vessels  to  the  ad)aocut 
parts.  ^ 

Refrttshment^  may  be  obtaii^tnl  here ;  as  fowls,  turtle,  yams,  plantains,  coco- 
nuts, &LC.  but  no  beef  nor  mutton.  Water  is  procured  by  filling  a  bucket  about 
twenty  yards  from  tlie  bealAi,  the  will  bearing  N.  N-  E.  or  N.  by  E.  from  the 
Anchoring  place.' 

From  the  S.  W.  end  of  the  Grui^  Caymjui  to  Cape  Corriontes,  the  true  beam- 
ing and  distance  Rre  N^  17"^  W.  74  lliigiies  ;  and,  to  Cape  Antonio,  N.  ftl°  W. 


1!4  leuguvf. 


#*.rr. 


^ 


hcrj^ 


292 


BLUNT  B  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOf. 


Of  the  filttle  Cdyman  ai^d  Cayman-Brack,  we  possess  no  parttculer  descrtp'- 
tlbn,  more  tban-they  are  low,  resorted  to  by  the  turtlers,  &c.  and  separated  by  a 
good  and  deep  chatfibel.  From  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  Grand  Cayman,  the  west 
end  of  the  Little  Cayman  bears  N.  76°  £.  true,  18  leagues. 


Albion  Bank)  Mist^riotfa.  &c. 


'' 


i\ 


•  -^i 


:;iij 


Of  the  scfvemtl  shoals  lately  di^OTered  In  diOerent  parts  of  the  West  Indies, 
one  of  the  most  remarkable  lies  between  Jamaica  and  the  coast  of  Yucatan,  and 
was  discovered  in  1816,  by  the  ship  Albion,  of  New- York,  commanded  by  Geo. 
Randall,  |hen  on  a  royage  from  Liverpool  to  New-Orl(>!ans^  Captain  Randall's 
description  is  as  follows : 

On  the  8th  of  November,  1816,  (nautical  account)  at  noon,  the  latitude  li^  69/ 
N.  the  mean  of  three  observations,  und  lorigitude  83*^  13'  W.  by  lunar  observa- 
tions taken  by  me,  at  16, 12, 2,  Nov.  7,  nautical  account,  the  angular  distance  being 
OMMured  between  the  moon  and  the  star  Regulus,  with  a  sextant  I  have  used 
for  several  years,  and  found  correct.  At 'Oh.  40m.  P.  M.  discovered  a  banM;  at  one 
P.  Bf^  the  ship  went  off  its  west  extremity ;  tacked  ship,  and  steered  E.  N.  E. 
found  the  bank  extending  from  iy.  S.  W.  to  E.  N.  E.  2  leagues.  My  soundi^ngs 
commenced  on  its  east  extremity,  and  continued  to  its  west.  The  depth  of  wa- 
ter ran  thus:  25  fathoms,  20,  17,  15,  11, and  10),  for  three  miles;  thence  bold- 
enedto  19,  17,  19, 25, 35,  and  then  no  bottom  at  60  fathoms.  This  bank  I  think 
proper  to  denominate  the  Albion  Bank.  On  the  two  extremities  of  it,  the  jbot- 
tom  exhibited  coarse  white  sand,  mixed  with  broken  shells,  and  the  body  of  the 
nank,  for  three  miles,  coral  rock,  with  a  small  admixture  of  green  moss,  &c. 
The  appearance  of  this  bank,  throughout  its  whole  extent,  was  strikingly  singu- 
lar, presenting  the  semblance  of  a  marble  sky ;  insomuch  that,  after  I  discovered 
it,  the  psssengers  and  officers  were  doubtful,  for  a  moment,  whether  it  wr.s  n9tf 
the  reflection  of  wlkat  is  called,  in  the  sea-phrase,  a  mackerd-sky ;  in  from  10|ito 
1 5  fiithoms,  the  bottom  is  so  very  plainly  to  be  seen,  that  a  person  would  imagine 
there  was  not  more  than  5  fathoms  of  water.  The  position  of  the  /.  S.  W.  part 
may  be  depended  on,  as  the  lunar  and  meridional  observations  v  i  carefully  tar 
ken  and  worked. 

Maud's  Bofiib  was  discovered  on  the  21st  of  May,  1757,  by  Captain  Joseph 
Maud,  on  his  passage  from  the  Mosquito  shore  to  Jamaica;  on  the  19th  of  that 
monith.  Swan's  Islands  were  in  sight  at  N.  N.  E.  i  E.  3  leagues;  next  day,  at 
noon,  latitude  observed  IS^^l'.  At  6  A.  M.  on  the^2l3t,  saw  a  ^*Dry  Sand- 
Bankt  about  a  mile  in  length ;  at  the  same  time  saw  the^ground  under  us :  sound- 
ed ground  from  12  to  14  fathoms,  flne  white  sand.  At  7  A.  M.  sounded,  no 
X-ound.  ^hisbank  lies  in  latitude  18*^  35'  and  longitude  from  London,  es'^  1£'. 
t  noon,  latitude  observed,  18*^  46' N.  If  Maud's  position  he  correct,  the  two 
I  banks  are  5  leagues  apart  N.  by  W.  and  S.  by  £.  on  a  true  bearing,  or  about  N. 
byW.lW. 

The  Spanish- officers  say  that  the  Misteriosa  Bank  wna  Tound  by  DonTomas 
Nicolas  de  Villa,  when  sailing  from  Truxillo  to  Batavano,  in  April  1787,  he  hav- 
ing sounded  in  13  fathoms,  on  white  sand  and  rock.  He  inferred,  from  his  lati- 
tude observed  at  noon,  that  the  bank  lay  in  latitude  18*^  48'  4ii",  and  he  deduced 
his  longitude  from  that  of  the  Punta  de  Castilla,  of  Truxillo,  as  previously  given 
by  Don  Tomas  Ugarte,  which,  with  a  requisite  correction,  gives  for  the  longitudit 
of  the  bank  83°  47*^  Again,  in  April  1805,  Don  Josr  f  Maria  Merlin,  command- 
ing the  merchant  ship  La  Flecha,  (the  Arrow)  sounded  on  thi&  bank  on  his  voy- 
age from  Cadiz  to  Vera  Crua.  He  found  10  and  14  fiithoms  in  lat.  18°  5S/  42 ", 
and  long.  18°  53'  36". '  His  longitude  he  deduced  from  liie  eastern  edge  of 
the  Seranilla  Bank,  latitude  15°  45',  on  which  he  sounded  in  irf  fathoms  ;  and  he 
Ejves  the  longitude,  uftei  corrections  for  current,  Ssc.  aw  83^  57.'     The  mean  lon- 

gitude,  it  will  be  observed,  according  to  the  preceding  descriptions,  ia  ii.S^  &2' ; 
ut  the  corrected  longitude  of   Punta  CjibtiHa  (ciKht  milt-a  nior«  east)   gives 
BUO  44'  W.  -f  *      '    "     #  f 


.*i»  ■♦ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


293 


-*r-l 


her  it  wr.s  notr 


■^■' 


OHAP.  VIZ. 

THE  ISLAND  OF  PORTO  RICO. 

■4  ■ 

This  island  is  thirty  leagues  in  length  ;  und  throughout  this  extent  from  east 
to  west  is  a  chain  of  mountains,  with  branches  diverging  to  the  north  and  south, 
and  extending  to  the  coasts.  The  whole  arc  covered  with  wood,  and  in  the  in- 
tervals are  fertile  valleys  and  plains,  watered  by  more  than  fifty  rivulets,  in  the 
•ands  of  which  gold-dust  has  been  found.  The  highest  summits  of  the  moun- 
tains are  called  the  Peaks  of  Layoonita.  They  are  ofter.  covered  with  snow,  and 
may  be  seen  from  a  great  distance. 

The  capital,  St.  Jtian,  stands  on  the  western  part  of  an  island  on  the  north 
side,  which  forms  a  good  harbour,  defended  by  a  citadel,  called  the  Morro  Cas- 
tle, and  other  works.  The  town  h  populous  and  well  built ;  the  see  of  .\  bishop, 
and  the  residence  of  the  governor. 

The  northern  coast,  which  extends  like  the  southern  coast,  nearly  east  and 
west,  is  but  imperfectly  known.  It  is  rugged  and  uneven,  having  many  rocks  and 
islets,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  heavily.  Fifty  miles  north  from  Porto  Rico, 
Gapt.  Baxter,  in  brig  Robert,  struck  on  a  rock,  and  remained  several  hours. 
The  town  of  St.  Juan,  which  stands  at  the  distance  of  9  leagues  from  Cape  St. 
Juan,  is  the  N.  E.  point  of  Porto  Rico.  ^ 

There  are  no  large  bays  either  on  the  northern  or  southern  coast,  arid  a  vessel 
may  generally  run  along  the  former  without  any  risk,  at  the  distance  of  three 
miles,  and  along  the  south  coast  at  five  ;  only  observing,  in  the  latter  case,  to  givo 
a  sufficient  birth  to  the  small  isle  called  Dead  Chest,  whic^  lies  about  half  way 
between  the  S.  E.  and  S.  W.  points  of  Porto  Rico. 

The  Harbour  of  St.  Juan  is  very  capacious,  and  the  largest  ships  may  lie  there 
with  the  utmost  safety,  in  5,  6  and  7  fathoms.  The  entrance  is  along  the  island 
on  which  the  town  is  erected,  and  between  the  Morro  Point  and  three  islets,* 
called  the  Cobrcu  or  Goat  Islands.  South  of  the  latter  is  a  smaller  islet,  occupied 
by  a  little  square  fort  or  castle  called  the  Canuelo,  which  defends  the  western  side 
of  the  harbour.    The  channel  is  generally  buoyed. 

The  western  and  southern  sides  of  the  harbour  are  Oat  and  shoal.  The  west- 
ern side  of  the  entrance  is  rocky,  but  in  the*  channel  the  ground  is  generally  o£ 
gravel  and  sand,  with  a  depth  of  5,  6, 7  and  8  fathoms.  From  the  south  side  of 
the  town,  a  low  point  of  land  extends  to  the  southward,  and  is  surrounded  by  a 
shoal.  Ships  generally  ride  to  the  eastward  of  tliis  flat,  and  out  of  the  wash  of 
the  sea,  occasioned  by  the  trade  wind,  which  commonly  sets  directly  into  the 
harbour. 

If  you  make  the  harbour  with  the  wind  southerly,  you  must  run  into  the 
channel  with  ill  the  upper  sails  well  set,  in  ,drdor  to  preserve  your  way,  whun 
you  come  under  the  li'c  of  the  Morro,  and  have  a  boat  out  l»r  towing,  or  to  carry 
out  a  warp,  both  of  which  are  frequor^'  r.cccoiiaiy.  Ii  is  higti  water  in  the  har- 
boiu"  at  feh.  21m.  an  the  full  and  change,  and  the  greatest  ris*  is  about  one  foot 
Hilda  hi! If. 

Off  the  Eastern  ('oust  of  Porto  Rico,  arr  numerous  keys  and  rocks  which  can- 
not be  approached  hy  large  vessels,  and  therefore  sin-ve  as  u  rendezvous  for 
5mut;,gU'rs,  hv..  Jtoh»re  tii<'3«>  are  tlie  isles  Culrbra  and  Fieque,  or  Stuikc  uiid  Crah 
fsUmat.  The  passages  apiong  these  iale-s  and  rocks  are  generally  deep  ;  hut 
one  may  ventuif  in  whf>  i"  neK  int'irtfct-<Jy  nc^pminUHl  with  the  \V\i\vv. 


no 


#«• 


'I 


294 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN  COABT  "ILOT. 


i     !'{i!;"i 


41^ 


S.  W.  of  Thomae  Harboar,  7  or  8  iioagu« ..  inA  P  cr  ■•  pr^nth  of  Oreat  Paf  ::,7C 
Island,  lies  CrcA  hland,  sccalled  from  the  gr.^  nmriit^iii -68  of  r/ahs  foun^i  '.';ue; 
is  of  a  moderate  height,  has  a  rich  soil,  and  is  ..cirfy  cavcvl  i  witli  trees.  The 
west  end,  on  the  N.  E.  sideislow  andsm  oth;  but'.  wudc<  i!  8  &.  W«  are  hills, 
and  from  those  hills  westward,  low  broken  hutriuio^kA. 

From  the  west  end  of  Little  Passage  Iiland  to  the  ei\3t  eod  of  Crab  Island,  the 
course  is  S.  i  W.  5  leagues,  5^  fathoms  one  mile  from  the  shore.  In  goin|  to 
Crab  Island,  be  sure  to  run  down  the  south  side  of  ft,  for  the  north  part  of  it  is 
foul.  You  may  sail  within  two  or  three  miles  of  the  shore  all  the  way  down,  till 
you  come  to  this  west  end,  and  then  you  will  see  a  low  sandy  point ;  anchor  on 
the  south  side  of  that  point ;  you  lyill  not  have  above  8^  or  4  fathoms,  S  mUes  off. 
You  may  run  in  till  you  bring  that  low  sandy  point  to  bearN.  by  £.  h  E.  and  the 
south  point  of  the  bay  S.  E.  then  you  will  be  one  and  a  half  mile  from  the  shore, 
in  4  fathoms  water.  Here  is  plenty  offish  to  be  caught  wittk  a  seine  on  the  north 
side  of  the  low  sandy  point,  in  the  morning,  and  good  wood  of  differect  kinds: 
water  is  to  be  had  about  half  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  low  sandy  point,  a 
little  way  from  the  west  side. 

Crab  Island  is  about  5  or  6  leagues  long,  and  fi  broad,  and  lies  about  5  leagues 
from  For*'"  Rico. 

C ALlw  - ,  or  SERPENT'S  ISLAND,  sometimes  called  the  Great  Passage  Id- 
and,  is  more  than  sijc  miles  in  length.  It  has  numerous  reefs  and  keys  about  it,  whijh 
require  a  large  birth,  when  passing.  Off  its  eastern  side  is  Cukbrita  or  Little  Pas- 
sage Island,  from  the  south  end  of  which  a  dangerous  reef  extends  to  the  S.  S. 
W.  and  S.  W.  three  miles.  To  the  west  of  the  Si^utherr  part  of  this  reef  is  the 
harbour  of  Cukbra,  which  is  two  miles  in  extent  from  the  entrance.  There  are 
two  channels  into  this  harbour,  which  are  divided  hj  n  bed  of  rocks,  and  bordered 
with  reefs,  but  the  interior  is  clear  and  secure.  Gjfv>;  caution  is  required  when 
entering ;  but  a  pilot  lives  in  the  port.  Plenty  of  v/ood,  water  and  fish,  may  be 
obtained.  The  neighbouring  keys  are  famous  for  the  great  number  of  tropic 
birds  which  breed  here. 

The  course  throug;h  the  Virgin's  Passage,  on  tlie  east  of  Vieque  and  Calrit, 
is  N.  W.  by  N.  or  -.  her  N.  N.  W.  in  case  of  a  calm  and  lee-current;  the  west- 
ern side  being  foul,  a  1  without  wind,  it  is  daugero\(S.  Continue  on  this  course 
until  Cape  St.  Juan,  the  N.  E.  point  of  Porto  i?.(f,o,  bears  W.  by  S.  or  W.  S. 
W.  and  you  will  be  clear  of  all  danger. 

The  SOUTHERN  COAST — The  following  remarks  have  been  abstracted 
from  the  journals  of  Crn».  Liiu  Hester,  and  of  the  Iris,  French  frigate,  in  1769,  fac. 

"  At  about  four  mi        .   oi  the  coast,  half  way  down  the  island,  is  the  small, 
'  but  remafki\ble  and  '.cuous  isle,  named  Caxa  de  Muertos,  or  the  Coffin. 

From  a  ceru.in  point  hus  isle  appears  like  twfi  ;!;i-eat  flattened  balls,  separated  by 
a  broad  valley.  The  shore  of  the  isle  towards  Porto  Rico,  is  flat  and  sapdy  ; 
the  south  side  is  high  and  stony  ;  there  is  no  fresh  water  on  ;(,  nor  trees  of  any 
kind,  but  for  fuel.  Father  Laval  has,  however,  remarked,  that  by  digging  the 
''-  sand  u  little  below  the  mark  of  the  highest  tides  and  surf,  fresh  water  might  be 
found  here,  as  in  the  other  sandy  bays.  Caution  must  be  observed  in  not  digging 
too  deep,  as,  at  too  great  a  depth  the  water  is  brackish.  The  fresh  water  thus 
found  is  supposed  to  be  rain  water,  which  having  strained  through  the  sand,  has 
been  kept  by  its  specific  gr<*vity,  above  the  sea  water,  which  is  always  found  when 
the  bottom  of  the  hole  is  on  the  level  with  the  ocean.  This  is  a  good  place  for 
fish  and  turtle,  as  the  latter  lay  their  eggs  in  the  great  sandy  bays.  Toe  island 
is  much  liequented  by  the  inhabitants  of  Porto  Rico. 

Ships  suiling  aloiig  tiiis  coast  are  expcb«d  to  sudden  ca'ms,  as  the  island  inter- 
cej)t3  all  breezes  between  the  north  hud  nast. 

If  you  are  Ijound  down  the  south  side  of  Porto  Rico,  observe  you  will  ate.  the 
S.  E.  1  oint  of  that  island  when  lyiny;  at  anchor  at  Crab  Island;  it  bears  from 
thenc  .-3.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  or  W.  8.  W .  about  li  Joague«,  and  is  called  Pasqua  (.r 
S.  K.  Cape.  Vou  may  run  .lovvn  fill  you  come  abreast  of  that  cape,  within 
thi '  ■  or  lour  nuiles  of  i-,  and  then  steer  W.  and  by  the  time  you  have  run  thrjM; 
leaj;ue3  down  past  the  « -ipe,  and  it  bears.  N.  E.  you  will  yeea  large  breach,  or 
shtKil,  two  or  tUite  luilea  in  iLiiglh,  whith^es  three  or  four  mile^  from  the  coast. 


# 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN   C0\9T    PILOT. 


296 


r  Great  Pitf:i?;c 
jg  four.;i  t'iue ; 
lUi  trees.  The 
3«  W.  are  bills. 

Drab  Island,  the 
■e.  In  goin|  to 
rtb  part  of  it  is 
B  way  down,  till 
oint;  anchor  on 
oms,  a  miles  off. 
£.  iE.andthe 
5  from  the  shore, 
ine  on  the  north 
cUfferect  kinds: 
n  sandy  point,  a 

8  about  6  leagues 

freat  Passage  {«t 
ysaboutit,whi'jh 

ttoorLi«fcJPa»- 

snds  to  the  S-  S. 
of  this  reef  is  the 
lace.  There  are 
cks,  and  bordered 
is  required  when 
and  fish,  may  be 
number  of  tropic 

eque  and  Calrit, 
urrent;  thewest- 
lue  on  this  course 
.  by  S.  or  W.  S. 

e  been  abstracted 
gate,  in  1769,  &.c. 
land,  is  the  small, 
>s,  or  the  Coffin- 
lalls,  separated  by 
Is  flat  and  sapdy; 
,  nor  trees  of  any 
jiat  by  digging  the 
h  water  mi^ht  be 
ved  in  not  digging 
Wfresh  water  thus 
ugh  the  sand,  has 
ways  found  when 
a  good  place  for 
[ays.    TIk?  island 

Is  the  island  inter- 

you  will  HtfC.  d>e 
lid ;  it  bears  from 
\  calied  Pasqua  <.r 
flljiat  cape,  withiu 
bvi  havo  run  thre«5 
it  hirge  broach,  or 
li  iVotsi  the  coast. 


By  keeping  a  mile  or  two  without  tho  hrcav^h,  i.i  running  'I'wn,  yw. 
a  small  building  by  the  watir  P'»'a,  <.«(uicli  ii.  a  gut.  rd- house  :  a.dt 


;^  -  un'>in^' 
down,  as  Hrected,  until  the  guard-bouse  bear"  N.  ;'  a  little  to  the  eastward  )f 
thnt  btiariing,  yen  mny  haul  in  N.  or  N.  by  E.  for  it,  and  anchor  in  4  f»i>':tti  s, 
witn  tlie  house  bearing  N.  or  N.  oy  E.  one  mile  distant,  and  the  west  en  1  cr  Ih  • 
breach  S.  by  E.  This  place  is  called  Guayamo  or  Yamma  Bay,  and  i.  >'  cii  ire- 
quented,  though  there  is  no  other  shelter  from  the  effects  of  sea  b\-e(  a*  ^us^""  iif'^ 
reef.  In  going  in,  although  you  give  the  west  end  of  the  r  uef  a  good  'ih,  y'>  a 
must  keep  the  lead  going ;  tile  soundings  are  irregular,  from  5  to  7  or  C  i;tlj:>ats, 
whence  it  shoalens  gradually  in  shore.  The  land  by  the  water  side  is  loir,  but 
u^  in  the  country  high  and  uneven  as  before  explained,  fh  going  out  of  Guaya- 
mo Bay,  run  S.  S.  W.  or  S.  W. 

From  GuayavM  Bay,  the  next  trading  place  is  Salinas,  a  good  place  to  lie  in. 
The  Caxa  de  Mnertos  or  Dead  Chest  may  b^  seen  from,  and  is  a  guide  to  it. 
When  at  the  distance  of  from  two  to  three  leagues  from  Guayamo  Bay,  you 
may  steer  W.  i  S.  passing  several  keys  to  the  northward,  which  lie  near  the 
shore ;  then  having  run  to  a  sufficient  distance,  haul  in  for  the  western  end  of  the 
outermost  of  these  keys,  and  about  a  mile  or  a  mile  and  a  half  off  that  end  is  a 
reef,  or  sunken  key,  which  cannot  be  seen,  but  the  sea  breaks  over  it ;  leave  this 
to  the  westward,  and  run  with  the  weathermost  key  on  board,  within  a  cable's 
length ;  this  key  is  bold-to,  but  shoaler  to  leeward  towards  the  breach.  The 
guu^-house  is  three  or  four  miles  from  this  key,  and  may  be  seen  before  you  get 
within;  you  may  run  in  boldly  for  two  miles  towards  the  guard-house,  and  an- 
chor within  a  mile  of  the  same,  in  4  or  .*>  fathoms,  good  ground,  and  moor  to 
the  N.  W. 

When  at  anchor  at  Salinas,  with  the  guard-house  bearing  N.  j  E.  there  is  a 
good  watering  place  close  to  the  water  side,  a  kind  of  lagoon  which  will  be  about 
N.  by  W.  from  the  ship,  and  iialf  a  mile  to  westward  of  the  guard-house.  Tho 
water  appears  white  to  nearly  a  league  without  tlie  key  :  the  soundings  arc  from 
12  to  7  fathoms,  very  gvaduaf,  and  there  is  no  danger. 

Within  the  key  above-mentioned,  there  are  several  other  keys  a  HtUc  to  tiie 
eastward  of  it;  and  in  running  in,  you  will  see,  at  about  three  leagues  ♦  west- 
ward, two  small  keys  at  a  little  distance  from  each  other,  one  appearing  double, 
the  other  single ;  you  leave  them  to  \wndward. 

In  quitting  SaHnas,  steer  outward  in  the  same  way  as  you  entered.  When 
without  the  key,  steer  S.  S.  W.  until  the  Dead  Chest  bears  wwat .  /t  u  r  xy  then 
run  down  boldly,  giving  that  isle  the  birth  of  a  mile.  There  i-  r  -i^aii  i< .  y  about 
a  cable's  length  from  the  S.  W.  end  of  the  Dead  Chest,  to  Tich  a  birth  of  a 
mile  and  a  half  should  be  given.  You  may  then  h;uil  in,  and  irUio"  „p.der  the 
lee  of  the  isle,  at  pleasure,  in  from  7  to  12  fnthoms.  With  tli(; 
small  key  S.  by  E.  i  E.  one  mile  and  a  haif  distant,  and  f'o  nori  ^a  I  of 
Dead  Chest  N.  E.  1  E.  there  are  10  fathon    of  water,  at  a^miii*  <".  r»m  siiore. 

In  proceeding,  on  a  west  course,  towards  Cape  Roxo,  'that  cap*,,  vvhen  first 
seen,  appears  low,  gray,  and  like  two  keys.  A  shoal,  called  the  *ffh.iit  Grounds, 
encompasses  the  cape,  nnd  extends  to  the  S.  W.  At  two  or  thret  leagues  to 
the  eastward  and  westward  of  this  cape,  there  are  10,  la  and  15  fittnoms.  It  is 
a  coral  baok,  and  close  to  the  outer  edge  no  bottom  is  to  be  found.  The  south- 
ern extremit^'^  bears  from  the  cape  S.  W.  k  W.  eight  or  nine  milos. 

The  schooner  Dick,  Capt.  Miles,  ot  and  fur  Baltimore,  from  La  fUiayra,  with 
a  cargo  of  coffee,  struck  on  the  Morillos  rocks,  south  side  of  Porto  iJi*^o,  at  mid- 
night, on  the  13th  of  June,  and  was  totsilly  lost. 

Nearly  half  way  !>etween  tlio  Caxa  de  Muortos  and  Capo  Roxo  h  i\w  smalt 
but  secure  Harbour  of  Gugama  which  is  described  hereafter.  P^cur  ie&^'jes  mora 
to  tlie  east,  u  the  vilhige  and  road  of  Ponce,  of  which  we  possess  no  nnrticular 
description. 

To  enter  Mmia,  «?.?,  (Porto  Rico)  bring  Ae  island  of  2^^cheo  to  b,iar  W.  N  W. 
and  steer  E.  S.  >       ¥ou  may  approacli  iW\  island  within  50  fathoms.    TJiere  it, 


at  point  of  t'ue 
the 


*TIh3  tracks  a«d  i«  ndi«g«  on  this  aboal^ttrc  those  of  the  U,  S.  frigate  Cojigress,  Ckarles 
Morm,  cojamaaUor,  ai.ii  may  S^  depended  tm. 


iM 


tf 


■m 


»2d6 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


a  reef  which  bei^lns  about  1}  mile  from  Zacheo,  and  extends  to  Cape  Roxo,  (hrm- 
inK  a  chain  uitii  only  10  feet  Tvater,  and  not  to  be  attempted  but  by  small  vessela. 
Id  steering;  E.  S.  E.  you  will  perceive  a  gully  running  from  the  mountain,  made 
by  frequent  rains,  without  a  tree  or  bush  on  it. 

To  anchor  in  Mayagua  Bay^  bring  the  island  of  Zacheo  to  bear  W.  N.  W.  then 
steer  E.  S.  E./^hic'h  will  bring  you  in  sight  of  the  town.  Going  in,  you  will  see 
a  reef  on  your  starboard  hand ;  when  abreast  you  will  have  soundings  in  19,  18, 
and  10  fathoms ;  you  may  run  into  7  fathoms  and  anchor ;  the  extreme  points  of 
the  bay  will  bear  from  S.  by  W.  to  N.  W.  the  east  part  of  the  reef  about  N>  W. 
2f  miles :  there  is  a  gc^d  river  (br  watering. 

f 

Extract  from  the  Journal  of  an  experienced  Navigator  ^  along  the  touth  aide  ofP&rto 
Ricot  and  in  the  channel  between  Porto  Hico  and  St.  Domingo,  ifc. 

"May  19th,  at  5  o'clock,  P.  M.  we  thought  we  descried  to  N.  W.  and  N.  W. 
by  N.  the  little  islahu  of  Boriquem  (Crab  Island)  situated  near  the.S.  E.  end  of 
Porto  BJco.  At  11,  we  saw  the  land  on  the  larbpuJ  hand ;  I  supposed  it  to  be 
the  east  point  of  Porto  Rico,  which  bore  from  us  N.  W.  and  N.  W.  by  N.  dis- 
tance about  3  leagues :  \  steered  west  to  run  along  its  south  side. 

"  May  20th.— At  half  past  5,  A.  M,  we  saw  Porto  Rico,  and  the  Dead  Chest, 
which  is  a  small  Island  dctatched  from  the  main  one,  and  having  the  form  of  a 
coffin.  It  lies  very  near  the  middle  of  the  south  coast,  and  I  have  Ueen  assui^ed 
that  there  is  a  passage  for  the  largest  ships  between  it  and  the  mam  land. 

"I  ran  along  the  land,  with  an  offing  of  3  or  4  leagues,  to  fetch  Cape  Roxo, 
the  westernmost  of  the  south  coast  of  Porto  BJco,  and  which  forms,  with  the 
S.  E.  point  of  St.  Domingo  and  Saona  Island,  a  channel  from  15  to  20  leagues 
broad.  ' 

"  About  10  A.  M.  we  saw  the  water  uiscoloured  f  we  were  upon  a  shoal  called 
the  White  Grounds,  which  encompasses  Cape  Roxo,  and  extends  3  or  4  leagues 
to  the  S.  W.  and  2  or  3  leagues  to  the  eastward  and  westward  of  this  cape.  You 
have  there  10, 12  and  15  fathomb.  The  sand  at  the  bottom  is  of  such  a  shining 
whke,  that  it  pierces  'hrough  the  water.  We  caught  plenty  of,fi^  with  the 
line. 

^'  At  11,  we  distinguished  a  cape,  whi€h  lies  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  Cape 
RoKO :  it  is  terminated  to  the  south  by  four  little  islands,  which  seem  to  «be  one 
league  distant  from  it.  To  the  east  of  this  cape  is  a  small  bay,  called  in  Van 
Keulan's  chart,  by  the  name  of  Porto  Guonica.'  ThiSi  West  India  sloops  can 
moor  there ;  we  saw  two  of  them  at  anchor.  This  cape  is  low,  and  appeared  at 
llrst  as  a  detached  land,  but  we  soon  discovered  the  low  land  by  which  it  is  con- 
nected with  the  main  island.  Cape  Roxo,  which  you  soon  descry  to  the  west- 
ward of  thi^,  and  which  is  the  westernmost  point  of  the  island,  is  still  lower  than 
the  former.  Betweea  the  two  you  distinguish  a  flat  and  very  white  sandy  shore ; 
it  consists  of  the  same  sand  that  composes  the  White  Grounds,  throupi  #hich 
you  may  sail,  but^ou  must  not  come  nearer  the  coast  than  two  leagues. 

"  In  the  western  part  of  the  channel,  between  Porto  Rico  and  St.  Domingo, 
and  near  mid-channel,  are  two  small  islands ;  the  easternmost,  which  is  likewise 
iiie  sovithernmost,, is  called  Mona:  the  second  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  former,  dis- 
Mnce  about  2}  leagues,  is  called  Monica.  You  must  pass,  if  possible,  to  the 
\*  'ndward,  that  is  to  the  eastward  ofthose  two  islands,  in  order  to  double  witli 
J  ?Gfc  facility  Cape  Enganno,  that  forms  the  going  out  of  the  channel,  to  the  west 
Oi?  he  side  of  St.  Domingo.  When  you  have  doubled  Cape  Roxo,  you  descry 
to  th'i  northwat'd  of  Zacheo,  a  little  island  lying  8  or  9  leagues  to  the  N.  E.  by 
N.  of  Mona.  You  leave  Zacheo  tb  windward,  to  pass  between  it  and  the  sroall 
island  of  Mona,  very  nearmid-cliannel :  therr  is  no  danger  hut  what  you  cae  see. 
When  the  wi«d  coro«J3  from  the  E.  13.  E.  or  only  from  the  east,  you  are  not 
obliged  to  tock,  you  cross  the  channel  with  a  quarter  wind.  It  it  suflJcient  to 
steer  N.  W.by  N.  to  fetch  Caj»e  Rnphat'.t,  which  is  the  N.  E.  point  of  St.  Do- 
iningo,  or  even  Cape  Samana,  that  lins  about  8  leagues  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  for- 
mer. Saman«  Islend,  whence  this  cape  takes  its  name,  extendi)  from  east  to 
wea*.  12  leaijiws:  it  is  so  viear  St.  Dumingo,  that  it  »|pp««f?  to  be  juined  with  it 


jpears 

Ipnr  ' 


4 


mJ^ 


■•:,-  .a;..i&, 


blurt's 


AMERICAK  COAST  PILOT. 


297 


"  At  noon,  Cape  Roxo  bore  N.  by  W.  distance  Si  leagues.  It  wat  not  pos- 
Bible,  on  account  of  the  cloudy  r/e>ither,  to  take  the  meridian  altitude  of  the  sun. 
We  steered  N.  W.  by  N.  to  enter  the  channel. 

"At  half  an  hour  after  12,  I  could  see  Z/icheo  very  plainly  i  I  continued  the 
same  course  to  run  along  it,  at  one  or  two  leagues  distance.  Thjs  island  appears 
to  be  800  or  1000  yards  long  ;  it  is  nothing  more  than  a  green  mountain,  on  seve- 
ral parts  of  which  you  see  some  woods.  I  was  too  much  to  windward  to  see 
the  islands  of  Moiia  and  Monica,  from  the  deck,  but  they  could  be  perceived 
from  the  mast  head.  The  wind  kept  to  the  S.  E.  till  4  o'clock.  It  is  very  sel- 
dom that  ifi  sailing  through  the  channel  of  Porto  Rico,  you  go  before  the  wind 
as  I  did." 


•  Description  of  Porto  Rico,  from  the  "  Derrotero  de  las  Antillas^'**  9fe, 

'  ^**  This'island  is  31  leagues  in  length  from  east  to  west,  and  11  leagues  in  breadth 
in  the  broadest  part.  TbeN.  E.  point  of  it  is  named  Juan,  (St.  John*s  head) 
where  the  range  of  mountains  called  Luquiltos  commences.  The  highest  part  of 
these.  El  Yunqw,  or  the  Anvil,  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  68  miles.  The 
rangecontinues  to  the  westward,  with  many  intervals  or  openings,  until  it  ends 
at  the  hill  named  Silla  de  Cahallo,  (Horse's  Saddle,)  which  is  to  the  southward 
of  Arrecibo. 

The  iiarbour  of  San  Juan  requires  a  pilot.  The  harbour  of  Arrecibo  is  about 
8^  leagues  more  to  the  west ;  it  has  a  small  town  on  it^^  western  side,  and  a  good 
river,  but  is  little  frequented,  being  open  to  the  north  winds.  Prom  Arrecibo 
the  coast  tends  nearly  true  west  to  the  N.  W.  end  of  the  island.  The  land 
here  is  generally  low,  until  it  reaches  Punta  de  Perm  Agujereada  (o^  Point  of  the 
Holed  Rock)  where  a  kind  Of  cliffy  high  land  begins,  which  tends  S.  W.  rather  , 
more  than  a  mile  to  Point  BLruguen,  the  north-westernmost  p..int  of  Porto  Rico. 
The  coast  again  declines  in  height,  and  forms  a  convex  bow  to  Punta  de  Penas 
Blancas,  (Whitestone's  Poiht)  the  north  point  of  Aguada  Bay. 

AOUABA  BAY — From  the  Point  Penas  Blancas,  the  little  toWn  of  Aguada 
bears  S.  S.  £.  2  miles.  In  the  bay  befp,r:c  the  town,  or  rather  village,  is  anchor- 
age for  the  largest  ships,  with  shelter  from  the  sea-breeze.  This  bay  may  be 
entered  at  any  hour  bf  the  day,  with  facility  and  safety,  but  not  at  night,  as  the 
breeze  then  dies  away,  anc^a  calm  ensues.  There  is  excellent  water  to  be 
obtained  at  a  rivulet  which  passes  through  the  middle  of  the  village.  The  situa- 
tion of  .the  latter,  as  given  by  the  Spanish  officers,  is  lat.  18*^  35' 5S",  long. 
67O0'  20". 

This  bay  is  much  frequented  by  vessels  bound  from  Europe  to  Cuba,  both  on 
accourft  of  the  fiicility  with  which  they  can  procure  refreshments,  and  because 
piloti  fdr  the  Bahama  or  Old  Channel  may  alvrays  be  found  hpre.  If  intendiag 
to  ancfrot  in  Aguada  Bay,  after  rounding  Point  Bruguen^|)^«e]^  about  three ;| 
cable?  length  from  the  shore,  in  order  to  give  birth  to  a  shoal  which  spits  out 
from  Pm^de  lasPalmas;  whence  to  that  6f  Penas  Blancas  you  may  approach 
the  coast  nearer,  as  it  is  very  clean ;  and  at  half  a  cables'  length  from  the  shore, 
you  may  find  four  fathoms  of  water. 

To  amihor,  bring  Point  Aguada  N.  N.  W.  2  or  3  miles;  the  church  tower  E. 
N.  E.  the  island  of  Zacheo  tv.  by  S.  when  you  will  be  in  10  fathonas  water,  about 
three  cables'  length  from  the  shore;  there  is  a  good  river  of  fresh  water ;  the  sea 
in  general  smooth,  with  usual  trade  wind;  but  should  the  wind  incline  to  the 
northward,  avoid  anchoring,  or  weigh  as  soon  as  it  sets  in. 

At^S.  W.  by  W.  7i*,miles  from  the  village  of  Aguada,  is  Point  St.  Frandaco, 
with  various  rocks  about  it.  All  the  coast  between  has  a  beach,  with  many 
shoals  formed  by  the  rivers  that  empty  themselves  into  the  sea.  At  two  cables' 
length  from  the  coast  are  4  fathoms  of  water,  with  bottom  of  nodes  and  sand ; 
but  there  is  no  anchorage.  At  S.  W.  %  8.  rather  less  than  half  a  mib  from 
Point  St.  Francisco,  is  Point  Guigero,  the  westernmost  jwint  of  Porto  Ricait 
otherwise  called  FA  Rincon.     About  if  the  ground  is  shoal,  with  manyrocks. 


« 


298 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST  PILOT. 


A.. 


m 


Remarks  on  Aguada  Bay,  &tc.  by  Cavt.  John  Mackellar,  R.  JS*. 

"The  town  isiin  latitude  18^  24'  57",  and  long.  67°  8'  15.''  In  proceeding  for 
the  anci^orage  from  the  northward,  you  may  run  round  the  N.  W.  point  of  the 
island,  about  S.  W.  orS.  S.  W.  within  a  mile  of  the  shore;  your  depth  of  water 
will  be  20  or  25  fathoms.  Point  Bruguen,  the  N.  W.  point,  is  a  high  s^eep  cliff; 
about  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  it,  is  Poini  Palmaa,  a  low  sandy  point,  covered 
with  trees.  The  latter  forms  the  north  side  of  the  bay,  and  in  rounding,  you 
must  give  it  a  birth  of  a  mile,  as  a  reef  stretches  off  to  that  distance.  Having 
rounded  this  reef,  with  the  bay  fairly  open,  you  will  see  the  town,  lying  in  the  N. 
£.  side  of  the  bay,  with  straggling  houses  to  the  S.  W.  for  two  miles.  The  an- 
chorage is  before  the  town,  and  near  the  shore.  The  whole  of  the  bay  is  perfect- 
ly clear  with  the  exception  of  the  white  reef  (Ptnas  Blancaa)  extending  from 
Point  Palmas;  and  you  may  stand  to  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  shore  any  where, 
for  the  depth  of  water  will  not  be  less  than  7  or  8  fathoms.  The  nwrks  for  an- 
choring are,  a  large  house  standing  by  itself,  about  a  cable's  length  from  liie 
north  end  of  the  town.  Between  it  and  the  town  is  a  small  battery  of  three 
guns.  Bring  this  house  to  bear  N.  E.  ^  N.  the  ctiurch  steeple  E.  iS^  nd  (he 
"north  point  of  the  bay  N.  by  W4  Here  you  will  have  18  fathoms,  and  verj  good 
bottom,  at  about  half  a  mile  from  shore.  The  anchorage  is  very  good  farther  in 
shore,  in  frotai  10  to  15  fathoms.  If  you  moor,  lay  your  anchor  in  10  fathoms, 
and  outer  one  in  from  15  to  18.  There  is  also  good  anchorage  iii  flroin  20toM 
fathoms,  but  there  you  are  more  liable  to  drive  off  the  bank.  In  shqre,  the  an- 
chorage is  so  extensive,  that  you  can  hardly  err  in  anchoring  any  way  before  the 
town.  The  Winds  are  frequently  variable,  and  render  it  diiScultto  get  up  to  the 
anchorage.  At  times  the  sea-breeze  blows  fresh  over  the  land  from  the  N.  E. " 
then  you  may  beat  in  with  ease. 

In  the  winter  months,  when  the  north  wind  blows  strongly,  there  is  a  heavy 
Swell  into  the  bay,  and  great  surf  on  the  beach.  Large  ships  ought  not  then  to 
anchor  farther  in  than  from  23  to  25  fathoms;  they  will  thus  have  room  to  get 
under  weigh,  and  work  out  in  the  event  of  its  comfhg  on  to  blow ;  and,'  as  the 
west  point  of  the  bay  hears  from  the  anchorage  S.  W.  i  W.  a  ship  will  lay  out 
wil!h  the  wind  at  N.  W.  and  n.ay  run-through  between  Zacheo  and  the  ».  W. 
point;  of  the  iisland.  ^  ^    J  , 

"Sihips  coming  from  the  southward  for  Agliada,  may  alio  pass  between  Za- 
cheo  and  the  island,  and  when  Ziicheo  bears  W.^by  S,  they  will  hav6  the  bay 
fairly  open,  and  may  work  up  as  above  ;  taking  c4re  to  kelep  the  west  point  of 
the  island  bearipg  to  the  southward  of  East;  for  off  it  there  is  foul  groun*  all  the 
way  to  the  southward,  as  far  as  Caper  Roxo,  but  all  clear  to  the  northward. 

"  From  Point  Guiguera  (says  ihe  Derrotero)  the  coast  tends  S.  E.  by  S.  three 
and  a  half  miles  to  Puntake  la  Cadma,  having  one  small  bay,  named  (fe2  Rincon, 
which  {dthou^h  well  sheltered  from  the  sea-breeze  has  a  very  unequal  bottom^ 
and  is  full  of  rocWf*  After  Punttt  de  la  Cadcna,  follows  that  of  Algarroha,  which 
lies  S.  E.  i  S.  froih  the  former.  Between  these  points  lies  the  Bay  of  Anaseo, 
fit  for  vessels  of  any  ^ize,  in  which  fliey  will  be  completely  sheltered  from  the 
Norths,  or  noi;|h  winds.  The  coast  is  all  beach,  and  the  bank  or  shallow  water 
which  extendi  from  it,  about  half  a  mire,  is  probably  formed  by  the  river  Anasco, 
which  disembpgueS*ftt  this  place.  ^,  ' 

"The  Punta  de  Algarroba  is  the  north  point  of  the  Bay  of  Mayaguez  and  lies 
nearly  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  with  the  south  point*  named  Puntade  Guamgivo : 
the  distance  between  tliem  being  about  four  miles. 

•'The  Anchorage  of  Mayaguez  is  well  sheltered  from  the  Norths*  AM  It  for 
brigs  and  ships,  provided  they  are  not  very  large;  b|it  a|p)od  knowledge  of  its 
entrance  is  necessary,  in  order  to  avoid  a  shoal,  vfhich  stretches  out  aboit  half  a 
mile  from  Punta  del  Algarroba.  It  iLoecessary  also  to  give  a  birth  to  the  Pun- 
tilla  or  Link  Point,  for  a  reef  stretches  out  about  two  cables'  length  from  it. 

"To  the  Westward  of  Punta  del  Al^rroba,  and  about  a  large  mile  from  tht; 
coast,  there  is  a  rocky  shoal  named  las  Manchas,  with  4  fathoms  of  water  on  it : 
but  vessels  may  pass  very  well  between  it  and  Ihe-shore. 


BLUiNl  S  AMERICAN  COASl    PILOT. 


299 


*'  A  liUle  without  tlie  lino  of  the  two  {)()int3,  and  nbout  half  way  between  theni, 
is  a  rocky  shoal,  stretching  nearly  N.  and  S.  Its  len^^th  is  about  half  a  mile,  and 
its  greatest  breadth  not  much  less  :  it  is  named  Baxo  de  Rodriguez,  (Roderego's 
Shoal.) 

To  anchor  in  the  part  of  the  bay  which  is  best  sheltered,  having  rounded  the 
Little  Point  (Puntilla)  place  your  vessel  in  such  a  situation  that  when  the  island 
Desecheo  is  directly  astern,  you  will  have  the  hlf;iiway  of  the  town  of  San  Ger- 
man exactly  ahead.  St.  German  is  upon  a  hill  wiiich  is  pretty  high  and  pointed. 
The  highway  is  of  red  earth,  and  winding  like  a  snake,  and  there  can  be  no  daii- 
gerof  mistaking  it,  as  there  is  no  other.  Run  thus  until  being  something  to  the 
southward  of  the  Little  Point,  you  may  luff  up  and  anchor  within  it,  in  either  3 
or  4  fathoms,  as  you  may  think  proper.  The  river  of  Mayaguez  runs  into  the 
sea  at  the  bottom  of  this  bay,  and  in  it  the  schooners  and  sloops  for  the  most  part 
winter,  as  it  is  the  best  anchorage  on  the  west  coast  of  the  island.* 

"South  fi|Dm  Punta  de  Guanagivo,  about  5i  miles,  is  Puerto  Real  de  Caho 
Roxo  :  its  figure  is  alrafost  circular,  and  the  extent  from  w^St  to  east  is  about 
three-quarters  of  a  mil^.  At  its  entrance  are  three  fathoms  of  water,  and  in  its 
middle  16  feet.  The  entrance  is  by  a  very  narrow  channel  near  the  south  point 
of  the  harbour,  and  from  the  northspoint,  a  great  reef  stretches  out,  whV.h,  doub? 
VingCayo  Fauduco,  ends  at  Puxta  de  Varaf^    ^.. 

"S.  S.  W.  from  this  port,  at  the  distantly  oftwo  miles,  is  the  Punta  de  Gtumi- 
guilUi,  which,  is  the  north  point  of  a  bay  named  del  Boqueron:  this  is  so  full  of 
reefs  ap  not  to  allow  anchorage.  PwnM  rfeMe/oHe«  (Melon  Point)  which  is  the 
south  point  of  the  bay,  is  distant  from  the  first  (Guaniquilla)  about  two  miles  and 
a  half,  or  a  little  more  ;  and  nearly  west  from  this  point,  at  about  six  and  a  half 
miles  distance,  is  the  Baxo  de  Gallardo  (Gilliard's  Shoal,)  of  which  we  shall  speak 
hereafter.  Along  the  whole  of  the  west  coast  the  Monte  (or  Hill)  dt  la  Atataya, 
may  be  seen.  It  is  the  highest;,  and  most  Northerly  peak  of  the  two,  which  are 
seen  on  the  highest.part  of  the  mountain  range,  and  which  stands  S.  E.  by  E. 
true,  from  the  Punta  de  San  Francisco,  and  which  does  not  alter  the  appearance 
of  its  shape  even  when  you  are  to  the  southward  of  the  isle  Desecheo." . 

SHOALS -iOFP  THE  WEST  COAST.— Besides  the  shoals  on  this  coast 
already  noticed^  there  are  several  others,  which  we  shall  now  describe. 

"  Ist.  Tha|  denotaitiated  Baxo  Ne grd^  (BlA^ik  Shoal)  which  is  h  reef  of  very 
small  extent,  and  upon  which  the  sea  always  breaks.  It  is  distant  from  the  near- 
est coast,  about  3^  miles,  and  lies  W.  S.  W*.  i  W.  from  Punta  Guanagivo,  and 
S.  I  E.  from  Punta  de  Guigu%ra. 

*'Sd.  That  called  Media  Luna,  (Half  Moon)  which  is^  reef  of  about  two-thirds 
of  a  mile  in  length,  north  and  south,  and  about  two'^nd  a  R^If  cables'  length. 
Theses  always  break*  upon  it;  it  is  about  five  miles  from  the  coast:  half  a  mile 
from  il^' about  ^.  N.  E.  there  are  three  rocks  Xfhicii  show  abdve  water,  and  on 
whidi  the  aea  alveays  breaks.  The  northern  extremity  of  the  i«Bef  is  yearly  S.- 
W.aby  W.  from  Punttrde  Guanagivo,  and  soiitb  from  Puntajfe  Guiguera.  i 

"•♦M.  That  named  las  Coronas,  (the  Crowns)  which  are  shoals  of  sjind,  onil 
which  at  .times  the  sei|  breaks,  and  the  extent  of  \vhich,  in  all  directions,  is  scarce- 
ly a  miie.'  It  is  about  three  and  a  half  mil^s  distant  from  the  coast,  and  bears 
nearly  S.  W.  by  S.  from  Runta  de  Guanajttioi  and  S.  ^  E.  fromsJPunta  dp  Guiguera. 

*'  4th.  A  shoal  which  lies  to  the  westward  from  Punta  dti^Gudmgnilla,  at  the 


r.^ 


iii&S 


*  TiiiS  following  is  a  former  description  of  the  Bight  of  Maynf^iez :  On  the  western  side  of 
Forto  mco  i/t  the  ^guadd'^tt^,  one  of  the  finest  roadsteads  for  shipping  in  the  West  Indies, 
being  sheltered  from  the  trade  winds  by  the  island.  Here  the  galleons  an  flota  geaerally 
anchored  and  obtained  refreshments  when  they  came  fror.  Spain.  Ships  •  y  anchor  in  the  . 
road  in  from  23  to  8  fathoms,  good  ground.  4il$8  fathoms,  soft  oozy  ground,  the  northern- 
most point  bears  N.  N.  VV.  3  miles,  the  other  pe}nt  S.  by  E.  about  two  leagues,  and  a  small 
village  among  the  trees  is  distant  about  one  n\^.  In  coming  into  this  road  from  th«  north- 
ward, you  may  sail  withto  a  mile  of  the  show  to  the  southward  of  the  noith  point;  there 
being  10, 12  and  15  fathoms  of  water ;  and,  having  passed  that  point,  you  will  have  26  and 
30  fathoms,  soft  oozy  ground.  Some  part  along  the  ground  is  flat  and  rocky,  but  you  may 
■ail  all  round  within  half  &4nile  of  the  shore. 


■H: 


*  ',*] 


aoo 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


dlMADOtf  of  two  miles.  It  may  be  about  two  cables'  leneth  iti  extent,  and  there 
iur« 0 ftthoms  of  water  upun  it:  the  bottom  is  rocky,  ft  bears  S.  by  W.  |  VI. 
ftom  the  Punta  de  Ouanftgivo,  and  S.  I  E.  from  Punta  de  Guiguera. 

*'  5th.  Baxo  (UGaUardo,  which  is  almost  due  west  from  Punta  de  Melones, 
and  six  miles  and  a  half  distant  from  it.  Its  extent  is  about  three  cahles'  length, 
^J*i'  and  the  least  dept^  of  water  on  it  is  9  fathoms,  with  rocky  bottom.  It  lies  with 
'f  the  isle  Desecl^o  bearing  N.  by  W.  |  W.  Monte  de  Atalaya  S.  by  W.  I  W.  and 
'  the  southern  extremity  of  the  Morillos  E.  S.  E." 

J%e  South  Coast,  from  loeat  io  east.-or'From  the  Morilloa  or  Little  Hills,  in  the 
8.  W.  to  Cape  Malapasqua,  which  is  the  S.  E.  extremity  of  the  island,  th"  soast 
is  of  double  land,  and  is  very  foul,  with  reefs,  islets,  and  shoals,  <  which  stretch 
out  from  it.  In  the  middle  of  ifriathe  i^nnd  Coxa  de  Muertos,  or  Ooffin  Island, 
distant  from  the  coast  four  miles,  and  foul  both  on  its  N-  E.  and  on  its  S.  W.  sides. 

On  this  coast  the  best  anchorage  is  ifi  the  harbour  of  Gua^ama,' five  leagues  to  . 
the  eastward  of  the  Morillus:  it  is  fit  for  vessels  of  all  classes,  with  fipMU  6^  tttS 
fathoms  of  water,  ^ich  latter  depth  is  found  ii;|  its  interior.  The  bMtom  >  of 
«and  and  gravel.  The  mouth  of  this  harbour  is  in  the  ,na|^dle  of  a  bay,  formed 
«  by  Uie  pomt  and  cliff  of  Brea,  (Pitch  JPoint)  on  the  w«it,  and  thut  of  Picua  on 
t||e  east*  In  the  neighbourhood  pf  this  last  are  tw<l  isle|l,  and  from  thein  to 
Pttnta  ie  la  Meseta,  which  ia  the  ^^^tj^Ji^t  of  the  entraiic^  of  the  harbour^  there 
is  a  reef,  which  reaches  out  from  mblnRist  about  a  mile,  and  nearly  foVms  a  cir-' 
cle,  uniting  at  one  end  with  the  islets,  and  at  the  other  with  Punta  ^  la  Meseta«  '^' 

Between  Punta  de  Brea  and  Punta  de  los  Pescadores,  (Fisherman's  Po^jt) 

which  last  is  the  west  point  of  the  moiith  of  the  port,  the  coast  formsi  aiionier 

bay,  of  whichrthe  mouth  is  shut  by  a  reef  that,  running  out  from  Punta  d«  Pfes- 

^^cadores,  ends  on  the^outh  side  of  tlie  bay,  about  a  mile  within  the  point  and 

^  cliff  of  Brea.    It  is  necessary  not  only  to  give  a  birth  to  the  reef  which  runs  from 

■^  Punta  de  Pictia  to  Punta  de  la  Meseta^ut,  also,  to  a  rocky  alroal,  which  stretch- 

d^'  es  out  a  short  half  mile  from  it.  ''  i 

To  enter  this  harbour,  you  miist  steer  on  the  outside  of  these  banks  or  reefs. 

'  rTo  do  this,  bring  the  Punta  de  la  Meseta  exactly  in  one  with  one  of  the  Paps 

of  Cerro  Gordon  which  are  at  some  dfetance  inland.    If  you,  ruap|p  >with  the 

Eoint  in  one  with  the  Western  Pap,  you  will  ^liaVe  the  bai^  verytclbse,  but  %ill 
ave  10  fathoms  of  water;  but,  if  you  f\in  in  wiUi  Punta  de  la  Mfeseta  in  oiiie 
"^with  the  eastern  Pap,  you  will  pass  without  any  risk  whatever.    Toll  will  l|ave 
'    passed  the  shoatwhen  theislets^t  Punta  Picua  bear  fe.  ^  N.  or  pefiiaps  a  little 
"    toonet."'         '  \         '  '       ■'"   ?" 

If  you  advance  to  the  harbour  by  Pbnta  de  Brea  or  Pitch  Point,  yoa  niay 
pass  tbh  point  or  bluff  atlb  cables*  length,  and  thence  steer  to  within  the  Punta 
dela  Meseta,  passing  it,  if  necessary,  at  a  quarter  of  a  cable's  length,  and$hence  t'« 

K Deeding  for  the*!mteridr^of  |5e  harbour,  only  observing  that  ](ou  maf^make 
Ider  with  the  «outh  than  wiu  |he  north  side  of  th<|^fnj[#nce.    You  may  an- 


chor whefe  y«iu 


I  in  4  or  5  fa^homa  of  water^^ 


^^B» 


/?.* 


f 


*■    £,fli»'«c^«o»w  for  nutJMg  Porto  Hico,  l^c. 

]3y  those  advtlntlng  from  the  eesttrard^  and  bound  te  Porto  Rico,  every  pro- « 
<Uiution  must  he  taken,  so  as  to  avoid  the  dangers  of  Anegada,  describicl  in 
page  SOS.  This  island,  the  last  of  the  Virgins  to  the  ]%£.  is  so  loi<:^at  It 
may  bo  considered  ra^r  as  a  dangerous  shoal,  than  aa  an  island.  If  6at1f(atihg 
with  care,  and  wl^  certainty  of  the  situation  of  the  v^sel,  nothing  is  easier  than 
to  cross  the  meridlaii  of  Anegada  on  «<parallel  above  19°,  and  so  to  nib  down 
afterwards  on  I^rto  BJco,  as  to  make  Uie  land  to  windward  of  voyf^^desti^d 
port:  thds  you/wHl  hot  be  obliged  to  ftuit  up  again  for,  a  distance  oVerrdn,  at 
the  expense  of  bcfth  time  and  labour.  But  as  it  may  hspnen^iamong  the  multi- 
tude of  those  who  navigate,  that  some  one  may  be  misleaDyan|,erfpneou8  reck- 
oning, and  find  |iimself  in  this  predicament,  we  reeomm^nd  it  ib  such,  in  order 
that  they  n|iy  i^idlhe  dangers  of  A^ada,,  and  al«o^j||d4^»niuuioj.P6rt9^ 


V 


->; 


?#^v 


BLUNT  S    AMCKICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


301 


nioo,  that  thejr,  at  all  timet,  ihape  a  course  to  make  tb«  Ulandi  of  St.  Bartho- 
lemew  and  St.  Martina,  (or  the  p:  rallel  of  18°)  because  tlieM  islands  ar»  high 
and  clean,  and  there  is  no  danger  of  being  wrecked  on  them,  although  saiHng  67 
night,  or  in  thick  weather,  so  that  you  have  a  league  of  horizon ;  tor  that  dis- 
tance here  affords  time,  either  to  steer  so  as  to  take  some  of  ih^  channels,  or  in 
case  you  pvefer  it,  to  haul  by  the  wind,  and  wait  for  day-light«  vr  for  clear  wea- 
ther. Neither  is  there  a  risk  of  passing  them  without  aeeing  them ;  and  even  if  > 
by  a  combination  of  circumstances,  which  will  be  very  strange,  tnis  should  hap-  *^ 
pen,  they  could  not  fail,  on  the  following  day,  to  see  some  of  the  Virgin  Islands, 
oy  which  the  situation  of  the  vessel  might  be  rectified.  In:  choosing  either  of 
the  channels  between  St.  Bartholcmew  and  St.  Martin's,  or  between  the  latter 
and  Anguilla,  we  should  prt^fer  the  latter,  because  it  has  no  detached  islets  lying 
off  from  the  principal  lands ;  and, therefore,  running  through  it,  even  at  nigl^,  it 
is  not  so  unsafe.  Having  run  through  any  of  these  channels,  the  course  must  be 
made  to  the  south  of  the  Virgins,  and  thence  to  the  N.  W.  so  as  to  make  ihb 
Gape  of  St.  Juan  of  Porto  Rico,  and  having  recognized  tms,  you  have  only  to 
run  afterwards  as  ma^  best  answer  for  your  port  of  destination. 

JProm  the  Island  of  Porto  Rico  you  may  escape  from  the  region  of  the  general  ^ 
or  trade  winds,  into  that  of  the  variables,  merely  by  steering  to  the  .north;  and, 
as  this  island  is  so  ^rjo  'windward,  it  is  ^Asy  |o  gain, all  the  easting  that  is  neces- 
sary for  going  to  the  Ksser  Antilles  or  Ci^Mlfe  Islands.    You  may  gain  thus  to 
windward,  ud  beating  with  the  breeze  without  being  under  the  necessity  of  run- 
ning into  higbi  latitudes  to  catch  the  variables.    On  Porto  Rico  you  cannot  count 
on  land-breezes  to  facilitate  the  getting)  to  windward,  for  on  the  next  coast,  tbii  ,«^ 
utmost  is,  tliat  the  breeze  calms  at  night,  biut  no  land-breeze  proceeds.    Lastly,*  ' 
from  this  island,  you  may,  on  one  stretch,  catch  any  poi|pt  of  the  ColoinbiMt^*^^ 


Main,  from  Laguayra  to  leewar^. 


'f^ 


.t 


-l^jV 


■'•^v 


.-t^' 


'^Xfi 


# 


t 


.«; 


m 


1 


f 


'$ 


«^0:^^. 


<Sfm 


■%. 


% ' 

'•' 

[ 

Mi,-!*'. 

%■ 

.*  t 

> 

# 

**...• 

■%. 

•    -^ 

J^^, 

'  * 

'1 

' 

•     # 

■•■ 

.••I- ' 

■:      .'^ 

> 

i^. 


^■..-i 


-7  M' 


^ 

.^^1^. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


&^ 


A 


^ 


1.0 


1.1 


I^|2j8    |Z5 


lU 

lit 


140 


■  2.0 


ippilj^ 

^ 

6"     

» 

Rjotograiiiic 

Sciences 

CorporatiGn 


^ 


1 

4'. 


SJ 


fV 


^ 


:\ 


\ 


^  V 


-^^ 


23  WBT  MAIN  STRUT 

WmSTIR.N.Y.  MSSO 

(716)  t72-4S03 


302 


BLUWT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT, 


•<«(■ 


"m"' 


»■•■ 


onAP.  vzxz. 


•■I. 


j%. 


H 


i 

■^ 


WINDWARD  A^D  LEEWAJID  ISLANDS'. 

Under  the  d^nonrfnation  of  Windward  Islands,  we  incl|kle  the  Hhole  rWBgf 
from  the  Virgins  to  Trinidad ;  and,  uoder  ||b<>t  of  Leeward  Islands,  the  ra)f)g« 
which  exists  htitweep  Trinidad  and  the  Gulf  of  Mar^caybtf* 

The  windward  islands  appear  ^t  a  distance  |^if  united  together ;  but  there  a|« 
many  deep  ebannela  between,  them,  thfough  which  thine  acquainted,  sail  with 
•afety.  1  '-'    '    ^    '       "*•      iflfc.'i-'^^  M.  I  •■ 

The  Paaaage  Isktt  which  are  d^erideniBies  of  Porto  Ric6,  and  tj^  Isle  of  St. 
Croix,  or  Santa  Cru^  -"  "  " '         "^       "  "  •    "--^a^-  -    — - 

e  general  name 

The  western  divirio 

^hn,  with  the  numerous  islets,  as  thos«  of  St.  James,,  Iffontlilran,  or  Little  3abav 

avanna  or^recn  laltnd,  the  Brass  Isjln  Hansoetic,  and  others.  The^atem 
livision  (BiTitish)  includes  Tortola,  Vl^n  Goi#i,  Anegada,  Jost  VanS^keU 
ales,  the  Thatch  Ines,   Normand's,  Poller's,  Silt,  Cooper'%  Ginger,  Beet,  Ga- 

anoa,  Sorub>  and  Guana  Isles,  with  a  number  ^f  islets  in  their  vicinity.  ^  ,^e 

hole  group,  Anegada  cxccpte(l,48  high,  craggy,,and  mostly  bold-to.  .^t 

TortoUif  a  few  aiiles  to  the  N.  E.  of  St.  John,  is  the  prlQCJipal  (wj|tf  English 
Virgiau,  iBland*':  it  ilMiearlS  lea^s  long,  and  S,  broad,  but  badly^tered,  and 
}has  the  pame  of  being  uhhcilthy.^  The  «iitrai1cc  is  widei,  w}fttplei^.of  water.. 
4«i  The  town  is  situated  on  the  south  sid^  at  the  ^ottom  of  a  oay,  f^iiles  d<^p, 
■4^  with  a  pretty  good  K>ad  at  the  entrance,  with  i^  fathoms  water,  gofiid  ground. 


iKv,  iwuicn  are  uepenaenjBies  oi  jrorio  xuco,  ana  im  isie  oi  isi. 

>u4  ^i^hich  He  to  the  aoul^Vard,  were  originally  ii^pided,  u^dp 

of'rae  Virgin  Islaniilll%.  ■■^'  ™    |^         % 

divirion  (Danish)  isiptioes  tb6  islandsof  j|t.  Thomas^odilK. 


Virgt^  G^im,  that  is,  th4i  Great  Virgin,''  or  Penniston,  iafM  comnsflnly  Span- 
I^Jjditown  Island,  fyingto  the  eastward  of  ^Ortola,  is  formed  or  elevated  lipid,  mi  ^■'' 
'Mt  watei^d l^vea  fff^e  than  Toitola.    Iliis  island  ha.<  tno  good  harbours,  the 
largest  of  whith  isthat  called  £ew(  Bay,  qpi  the  northern  side,  wherein  you  may  », 
'f  aoior  very  safely  ip  from  5  to  10  fr  IS  fi^oma,  to  leeward  of  the  island.i«alWa 
he  PHIlfkly,  t^iar ;  bujt  the  eotmnce  is  narrow,  being  obstM^d  by  a  reef  on  each 
1^.    Thia  neitt  harbour  is  ^t  called  the  Great  oi;^l^Si|i|nHf'«  whicleis  if  soine 
legree  sheitefod  to Jbe  west  bg  the  islets  called  the  Jiflg*  I  the  r,oadste8d  here     , 
as  very  I^A  holdfln;  grounc^  of  sand^nd  ooz^,  jn  6  to  ^fathiitts  of  wrtfr,    . 
n  the  smJmer  bay^i  called  Thomas  Bay,  iViSre  to  t^a  S.  W.  Wsscis  maj-"  aa^or 
^fore  thetOWn.jn  6  or  8  fathoms :  bnt^erc  is  a  jfi^ef  in  thQ.middle  of  the  bay, 
irhich  stretcfaealBortli^ftd  south ;  and'Hilpc  atej  Ukewisi;,  many  rqfi^s  in  the  |iot- 
|om,  wjiich  ehm  tMB«able8.  -W     "        ^  i  v.  ♦ 

Tb«  course  li^onl^  Saba  to  Virgin, Gor|ia  is  N.  Vf.  by  W*  northnliy,  ^liove  Id  ,^ 
(aftgues.  yfbm  Virglp  Gorda  bearf  a.  ^  you  N.  W.  by  N.  7  leagues  oCfthf  ,^ 
Virgins  appear  like  tor«e  islands,  witu  u  great  man^  sijaall  ^es  abotHiM|t!^t  tha>4|i 

fiddlemost  is  the  lon^t,  and  when|^  you  come  within  3  IjQigues,  thejnbeem  as 
th^y  were  join^drtoeither.  *^..    ,\      f 

The  best  mark  for  Vii^in  Gorda  is  «p  hsulat^d  hill,  of  moderate  heigM^  stapd- 


itand- 


tjpS  "C"!'  the  vbj/jkik)  of  it,  and  which  «|^«aaily  known  by  its  being^lOnfb.    Tltj 
nfXn,  in  clfar  weiither,  may  be  seen  at  th^liltaq|ee  of  se-vin  llaiues. 

Mr.  Lockw<^d^  who  surveyed  thesaji«li  says  tliat,  u^lgpthj^  lee  ofVUgi 
Oorda,  the  ground  is  *o  clear,  ikat  SOOsait  might  anchor  in  th^  space  betw~ 
^       the  Dogs  and  the  Valley.    The  North^Sound,  he  ad4i|  If  a  jpCrfectly  8c< 


BLUNt^S    AMERICAN   COAST    t^lLOt. 


308 


ttort,  and  of  great  capacity ;  the  entrance  between  the  two  reeCi  li  dot  difficult  to    "^^ 
diMOver.  ^   ' 

Anegade,  cnt  the  Drowned  Island,  which  lies  to  the  northward  of  Virgin  Gorda. 
is  of  equal  mtgnitude,  but  so  low  tliat  its  coasts  are  inundated  at  hij^trddaSt  and 
it  has  not  even  the  smallest  hummock  on  its  surface.    You  may  diseeni  wet  it 
two  high  hills  on  Virgin  Oorda,  which  appear  like  a  great  hummock,    ^ere  is, 
good  water  on  the  low  part,  near  the  south  point. 

The  whole  of  the  windward  side  of  Anegada  is  borde.-'ed  with  a  dangereilB  retf*^ 
which  thence^  continues  under  the  name  of  the  Hor$e  Shoe,  about  four  lei^giies  tf>|^i 
the  S.  £.  an^^terminates  at  E.  N.  E.  7  miles  from  Point  Pejaro,  the  eastjMid  o^ 
Virgin  Gorda.    There  are  swashes  in  the  reef,  but  on  many  parts  only  two  to  si^ 
^t  of  waten    On,  approaching  the  isle,   from  the  north-eastwaj^,  the  hill  oiiii' 
Virgin   Gorda  will  appear  ove^  it  like  a  greftt  hummock,  and  by  mis  mark  Ihd 
relative  situation  of  a  vessel  may  be  known.  ^  '' 

.    On  the  reef  which  borders  the  windward  side  of  the  idiind,  iHth 
Shoo  Reef,  which  stretches  from  it  to  the  south-eastward  bay  in  18 

^ftlnainsof  ae  following  wrecks  :-^Four  American  schoodlttit  wrecl- 
aad  1809 ;  an  Amerifpm  sloop,  ifith  candleii,  cordage,  be.  1808 ;  a  8; 
With  dry  gpods,  1799;  a  French  aloop  privateeai;  an  American  brig 
Jbt»a  nigatBi  I808j  a  Spanish  felucca,  1808 ;  an  English  $clioonOr 
ship,  1810 ;  an  Engffiih  bng,  1 79t ;  Stdp  Ocean,  an^  a  brig  from  Lo 
on  the  leeward  side  4>ftheN.  W.  end,  an  AmgHcan  brig,  18^11.    Thi 
Will  surely  h^j^  sufficient  caution  to  those  agproaching,  espdciallv  froi^  the  N.  B.  ^ 
l^e  wreckf^  of  the  island  are  stated  to  fa^  constantly  on  the  alert,  and  tray^^  -^ 
t(mh  their«mallops  the  n^row  passages  o^he  reefs  with  ail  astonishing  celfii^tpffif 
While  actuated  by'jthe  hope  of  j>lunder„  they  have  saved  many  vtiduabhB  lives. 
The  currents  in  thl)  neighbourhood  getteVally  tend  to  '^e  westwwd,  and  thj "^ 

'   strangn  should  never  lie-to,  particuladvJn  the  night,  to'  the  eastward  of  thi 
ishiDd.?^  ■■  -^•-  ^'         -'■■'■■, 

i  FALLEN  CITY,  or  OLD  JERUSSILEM.— A  verj^markabl*  cluster . 
broken  rocks,  to  the  southward«df  Virgin  GoMu,  bears  tn||.  name.  TlteyAppeai^^ 
to  have  beejjUthus  left  by  some 'great  convulsion  of  nature*    To  tW  soumwaH||i 
of  these  ikl|arge  blufl' rock,  caNed  Round  Rock^  ndjct  to  which  follows  Ginger 
Iriand.    Between  the  two  latter  is  the  general  efftraoce  \a(iS  Sir  Francis  3nKe*i 
Chikmel,  wbi^b  is  called  the  King's  Channel,  it  beirifthe  best  passage  inward  foi 
those  bouiRl  to  the  Road  of  Tortola. 


the  Moi>s«^ 
1,  are  th<i' 
in  1800 
lish  brif, 
9S{  the 
fipanish' 
,1%1«; 
itement 


'-'**•  !tf*?'  .  <■#»■■ 


IK- 


r  »f  \^-ii  /  Direction  for  Tortota. 


-»^^*** ''^"^'^'"S  *^#tldj|»  for  ^ing-throiigh  the  Kihg4  Ohannel  to  Toriol 
JAve  l^n  eoihmuil^atedby  Mr.  Backlibusc.  *  ^  . '# 

"To  ruyhrotigh  Sir  Francis  DrakfCs  or  tha^^King's-bKannel,  bftwecti  thi 
R4»und  Ro«  and  linger  lala^nd  towards  TortdM,  su  soon^s  you  miiWi  tliierl^hd 
,  of  Virgin  Obrda,  steer  for  ihe  S.  W.  end  of  It,  Vf.  N.  W.  flortherl;^^  and  wh'^ 
you  are  withioL^jx  t*  seven  leagucA  of  it,  you  will  raise  thfi  Wgfi  lar»|l  Qf  Tortol^ 
and«IsofJie  n|(hest  keys  and  isbinds  to  the  eastward  andlkiutHi^ra  ofM'ithal; 
is,  beginning  ilKith  the  easternmost  or  Routfd  Rock,  GingS*  Island  jboopefi^Jal- 
^imd*SaIt  Island,  Dead  Chest,  Peter's  I^laoil,  and  Normaod's  Isb«i4 
»-  Havi||g  these  keys  ip  sight, ^teer  for  the  south  end  ofRound  R^k,  whifch  you 
"^  cannot  miitalM,  for  iN'Uhiti  three  or  four  leaffues  of  Roopd  Rock,  you  will  rais^ 
thelowkeys'ralled^e  Broken  City  or  Old  Jerusalem,  wjiich  keys  extend  froiri 
the  S.  WTend  of  Virgin"  Gorda,  in  a  S.  SftW.  direction  to  wWHn  two  ciU)les' 
loogth  of  the  north  side  of  Round  Rock:  these  keys  a^the  jnore  remarkiblev  \ 
not  having  thte  least  eaith  or  verdhre  6#  Wiem,  but  are  merely  heaps  of  largtf^i 
stones,  resemblin^the  ruins  of  a.©ityo>  island,  *•■ 

,       men  at^he  diSlMice  of  two  or  three  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  th«»e  keys, 
having  the  Round  Rock  N.  W    westerly,  stuer  for  the  south  side  of  the  rock, 


U 


j^    ^'*:  '^  '-;. 


904 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


kaqMoK  It  on  beard  as  you  run  through ;  that  is,  keep  about  one-tliird  of  (he 

,^  jbreadth  of  the  channel  f^om  it  towards  Ginger  Island :  this  caution  is  necesiuy 

^'Jpi  cast  of  light  wiodSf  wbibn  strong  leeward  currents  may  hurry  you  close  to  Gin- 

er  UJm^  The  course  thilQugh  is  nearest  N.  W.  by  W.  by  cdfopaw.    The 

touod  Roek  is  a  barren  sla0|  rock,  and  the  eastern  cliffs  of  Ginger  Island  are, 

^alsoi  AiU  of  slate.    The  channel  is  about  ^a|f  a  mile  over :  you  may  pass  safely 

'within  i,  cabjii*s  length  of  Round  Rock,  at  Which  distance  we  sounded  14  and  15 

t.v.lMMMilis,  no  grouno. 

,    Having  passed  Round  llock  to  the  W.  N.  W.  of  you,  on  the  island  of  Tortola, 
^"^you  wi)I  see  a  negro-town,  a  white  dwelling-house,  and  a  fort.  ^!]p[eep  to  the 
westward  ofthis  markt  spring  W.  by  N.  and  west.    As  you  run  down  towards 
^ortola,  the  easternmost  point  of  Tortola  Road  bears  neare^  westi-  by  comna8i| 
ttoln  the  RoiMid  Roi^llB,  and  makes  as  shoifn  in  tAe  plate.    You  may  see  wxth  « 
^glass,  at  the  same  time,  the  fort  and  ila^-staff  on  the  west  point  of  the  b^rbOur, 
from  which  extends  dangerous  reef:  the  eastern  point  is  a  craggy  bluf,  with  a  , 
foot-path  ^^  road  winding  around  it.    The  first  soundings  in  tunning  :^own  (with 
the  hanr  |j«  ,e)  wefttjpund  abreast  of  the  east  end  of  Ginger  IslantjfcflS,  IS,  It  , 
(fatl^>m8.,.{|>i^  courSi  from  W.  to  W»  by  S.w^ich  soundings  continued  nearly   ' 
totfM»e8|ts|ointof  theroad.   (^  .*  *  * 

f'   **huni^fieubirljf  to  be  obmvtd^  that  there  it  a  bay  to  thr  westwara  of  RosjC' 
Harbour*,  oi^led  Sea-eow  or  Rogues'  Ba||' wliieh,  by  straoglto,  maiylbe  mistak(^|^^ 
for  (he  r(»)>  ^  as  the  fMiints  mike  alike,    TKerefore,  when  ^^wingnear  the  east- 
em  side  of  Road  Pipiour,  if  you  ha|«  auy  doubt,  look  to  the  S^W.  quartef, 
1^  .  Aildjroft  wlHiee  foucremarkable  peifendkjiilar  rocks,  called  the  mMtmSt  oif^ 
P>jr.WY«ndof  Nbrmftia's  Island,  and|bekring  S.  W.   by  S.    (See^%  Pl<^^ 
f»  W  this  time  the  eiiternmost  poiiMfW  TortoIai^Road  vHll  bear  newest  to 
r.  N.  W.  I  W.    Wiwthis  bearing  ctti^w*  sounde^^,  and  hM-  8  fathomSt  about 
jif  a  mile  from  TDrHla.    Come  no  fttrer.    l^^e^  found  no  eround,  aft^  9  fft- 
loms,  on  Che  4next  cift,  with  14  fa^flWs  of  !>>#;  and,  thihlolig  it  bold,ilttbw- 
»wed  to  the  shore,  h||^ng  the  poiiftlK. If  •  W.  but  again  fouiMl  that  it  had  sud- 
lebly  shoi^ned  to  4  nthoms,  the#at  9  cables*  length  from  the  shore.    Haule^; 
W/6.  W^.  and  dee]pened  in  |wo  or  three  castito  7  fathoms ;  aQd.«  the  fifth 
%,  no  ground  at  if  fatlufms.'i^  Be  cautious  to  keep  at  least  halfirmile  from 

^theneiot.  "■••^'-     jl_*  .     ■•  - 

roll  now  open  tiia  Road  nfWoTtoUi,  and  keen  your  eye  on  the  eil|fl»mmost  or 
reaUi«r  ihore  of  the  Itt y.  Qn  the  third  bhiffpoint  in  you  witt  desory  a  battery, 
Fort  Shhrley)  abre&rof  wibh  ships  of  war  anchor.  Keep  .to  r|||  westward, 
litfil  %^  opon  the  neit  point  to  the  nortli^Ward  of  thi8,lp%i^ich  itands  Fort 

•r  tho  citadi^  wkh  k  fltt-staff:  Ifing  this  citedet two  the  plat#4io|itir,  * 
I^e8t4%,  tttm  haul  i^  anif  ijbeer  for  it. 

A9*|P0liirteerinfortii«'ilslt|ael,  on  the  above  bearing,  keep  in  10  fathoms  <||r^ 
witart  indOed  tbe  nu^ffc  will  lead  you  in  14f  IS,  10  fathoms.  You  anchof^hreist 
Ibe  lieii^  otihe  flrst4|lttlrf,Mth  the  battery  bearingllvS.  but  the  mirk  for 
Abe  jSo  like  Anchor,,  ttthel^-staff  of  tpbatn^^  ppkit%fthe  bi^ 

InlMtilrwit^-^  south  IGii  of  the  guard-house,  which  is  closer  tehindthellattery; 
depth  to  ii^onM,  and  about  dihocable*i%ngth  froan  the  sh<»re.  The  westerns 
hattery  imjbear  nearUt  S.  W.  by  |Wr.  wdJIerly.  Moor  with  your  stftom  to  the 
:N.  N.  £.  SMauiotl^ ground  is  foul;  ap^,  should  you  p«^ your  bower,  your 
itream  will  oheek  yott'into  the  bay,  ind  deaf  the  reef  off  the  w4|om  point  of 
therM^'     ■  .^      ■'*<  %  J_.... 

•SSSaA  merchaiits'  anchorage  is  in  froni  10  to  18  fathoms,  on  the  western  sidei*' 
¥it  Bfoc^eM  OMftMni;  from  Tortili;  |du  saiKoutwardp  through  the  souther^ 
ohfdnneMietwehn  the  imit«nd  of  NOrmand's  Island  and  thtf  east  aide,  of  Thiaa-? 
^  ^rbetweon  the  latter  an  i  the  <«pt  end  of  St.  John's  IslMd.*    ^ 

-Jm jB. it— ■ ^* '  ■ 


jyir. 


Loekww^^Mys,  #n  the  patti 


i'^lqf  iuiok  ever  the  (iMil  groand,  cauaea 
1iiiuiUiora|»  it  Tortola  k  not  good ; 


hoed,  eiperienead  mastert  of  merekaataBen  lunially 
Islands,  both  of  irhieh  hers  good  bays.** 


alM  In  Drake's  Channel,  the  ^pmnt,  H^- 

—r--,  'W«k  'wa^  *•»•  apimiranca  ftf  ttofer.  The 

an4,  iriien  Iha  coi^s  rendasvoajf  in  that  MigbboiiN 
lantaen  umially  anlhiMl  usdef  w*fiter*i  or  Normania 


^-y* 


e-third  of  the 
I  is  necesMiy 
t  close  to  Gin- 
^pan.  The 
er  Island  are, 
ly  p.is8  safely 
ded  14  and  15 

id  of  Tortola, 
H^l^eep  to  the 
lown  towards 
i  by  compass^ 
lysee  wxth  « 
r  the  h'drbOuri 
f  Wuf ,  wltl^  t  J. 
ii;:^owo  (with' 
\ifli,  IS,  It  , 
itinued  ne«rlj  ' 

wald  of  BxaSt' 
ybe  inistak<9i , 
near  the  east- 
t^W.  quartaf, 
IpoM,  or  til 
e^%  Pla^ 
!ar  nesrest  to 
athomi,  about 
ad,  afl^  a  fft- 

at  it  had  sud- 
B.  Hauled 
.«theftftti 

rp^mile  flrom 

i|temmo8t  «r 
Mnrya  battery, 
db  westward, 
ih  Itands  Fort 
B  plat#«ol^,  '^ 

10  fatbppms  ojT^ 
inchor>abreMt 
t  the  mirk  for 
kit!%fthe  Cn^  ' 
idtheHatterf; 
The  weswn 
st9%am  to,  the 
ir  bower,  your " 
l|cm  point  of 

estemaidei*' 
h  l^e  a^tiulpi^ 

,r 


lore. 


Hfth, 


•"HP  M**' 


I." 


itt»- 


.«i^' 


iB^' 


I         ^ 


■/4. 


&': 


■*W. 


t 


the  #frent,  h|B- 

i&ftiiigar.  TIm 

that  a«ighbOHr> 

•  or  Kormani'a 

Wv       ■     *• 

::%       ..  ... 


F»irr  I'uth'  3C4. 


^^RGl]v  1SJ.ANOS 


:Xtw  York,  PiiNishiii  hv  ediunnA  AGf  o.W  Blunt.  1S4-  iratrrSinvt. 


■.^j 


V5, 


4 


*v 


6 

'S 


if 


1 


73 
.1 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  cbAST*FILbT. 


3or 

CURRENT,  kc— About  Virgin  Gorda,  and  the  pasMges  of  th«  yir|L  I»l- 
and^tiwcuiTMitrumrcciilariy,  setting  eastwaM  d|»ln|  the  moon's  JM|Mge. 
(htm  tte  iNkrisoD  t   her  lenith,  liitt  fiMi^  |||r  uttjic^jrfie  «rrif ei  at  niliirapd; , 
to  tho  jfit^rA  while  the  0li6o%j)aMeB  IN>nrtBilflth  Jl  i^ioJioiitoii^aim  '- — ' 


nadir  ii  Iwr  rising.    The  rate  vmfles,  according  t^tMl^breaAih  of  ti|  eh(»;aod|[^ 
frooi  tjhro  to*  five  hod  a  half  ko<itfi,  and^the  riaeb  drum,  90  to  40  Inehls. 
I8X.J^  of  St.  JOHK.WThis  blaitd  is  two  leagueoltroodigoft  fiuiriiyenfth, 
,/ll«9  HoWi^ts  or  eU|inenees  of  importance.    The  noi^h  Mil  soiDilli  Mim 
*^  fli/Q^)  Mid  thtt  formorfather  foul;  as  is,  also,  the  etst  oM^tAUm  is  1. 
to  te  tie  beg^watered  of  anv  of  the  Virgin  Islamb,  and  i%  h«fi|Mi^|  i#N  <^ 
TOL  Bav,  is  ilkorted.to  afford  as  goo#lA)elter  at  an;  hiirbour  in  tMlCm  lll4N»i 
An  gilet  oaAle  w^  having  4  fatiMna  withjujl  i*  «  c^l^li^ipwk^i^ 
'Mp  %|niin  may^jtereen  or  r^^  ^ 

^    tie  ipoll^g  de8»flp^|H9v^r|mia^a  wmk  place  haUM 


^ 


^ 
5 


I 


fa's 

C  94 


•1  -a 
*■  t 

•-At 


I 

SI 


s 
EC 


62 


.^.'«^^ 


306 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


4  ] ' 


I  J 

leav*  these  keys  to  the|oulbward  of  ^oii*  about  one  mile,  and  then  steer  N.  W. 
tihen'you  bring  them  S.  ^,  irni)  contmue  .tjfiat  N.  W.  cnuryr  about  two  or  three 
;iRUei  till  you  bring  the  han>oiir  6pen ;  then  haal  in  fur  the  town  N.  hy  W.  or  N. 
rf.  W.  givir)^  the  east  ahorei  all  along  a  gooJ  birth,  and  run  within  half  a  tnile  of 
the  furt,  which  is  white,  «ud  plaiHVy  seen  at  the  east  of  thn  town.  You  anchor 
in  5  fathoms  water,  fine  ck^ar  giouiid ;  it  is  a  fine  harbour,  where  you  are  land- 
lo':kediroin  all  winas,  but  firom  the  S.  by  W  to  S.  C  hy  S.  wh'ch  part  liesopei) ,, 
tQ  theser  :  but  the  vHdd^elduni  bluws  in  unless  it  is  in  th^.  hurricane  months, 
frhera  kM  a  r«i|4K  abuve  wat^.*  in  the  harbuur's  mouth,  (called  Prince  Rupert's 
^  Cliff)i  which  y<^  leave  t(|the  eastward  of^you  ;  you  may  niake  biMd  with  the 
.#W!lideofJt,*but 


thfrc  is  «i0  passage  witmp. 
,  l^rdm  iSt.  iBIkDinas'^Hharbuur,*  if  bound  to  Porto  Riro,  being  in  th( 


ing,  steer 
wbirhis 


rj»^y»^*jUU  jruii  collie  down  the  loogth  df  the^west  eird  uflhe  isli 
p^abottt  S'leraueil^.from  the  harbour,    lou  lyill  s«ei  a  small  islaml  called  Little  Pai- 


ttMt.  ThuHlfts  ii 


W!:, 


Mil  (llan 
E«a*tiV>ndj  l^relll^mall  ope 
«eiris«  ^ cnannel oifmall  iqlp^irtfiiee^ 
^Ittmiarf  bnt  there  &%  two  ot^r  Island 
of  tha|^|g||Uftd^    The  Iftfternniop,  just  ti 
^fshind,  MmiWkii 
^t,  is  a  TOO 
^r««  and'is^liedXI^e  Sabffi ;  it  is 
the  i^ore  along^Ple  islands  mui, 
idewQ  tUlc^oii  pap  Littl^«8sa|( 
|p  flMnelpla«ea.  '         ■■^*' 
"    jyT.  S!r  Wf )  S.  from  the  mouth  o^ 
<W.  by  S«,7  ipilea  ffom  the  we|t  jx)i 
mi^e  of  th«>  chim^el.    It  is  r^jiifd^ 


the  westward  of  t^ie  west  end  itfd 


joins  with 
WeDi,  but  oi 
Little  P 
ou  coine 
ofihebai 

-      V  .     '■  W     •         -       ,r^JttWO# 

tkfkt,  is  a  rooky  js^d,  chout  ^ang  mil*  round,  which 


little  St.  ThOmKf. 

iii  west  fliid  of  the 

o  not%^  There  is 

e  anc|Xittle  9U 

to  ti|i^west  ew 

r,  H  eirtied  Wa^ 

e  miles  to  leewara 

_   sa  oaile  from  the 

un^t  MiS  muslMiavl  iykdod  birth. 

on  ^oijbstajl^oaM  Jfal^.    In  ru»> 

v&a6undi|||i||Udhe  way,  QJHtdeep 

lomas*  B{^ibour,jsl^ve  4  feagucM,  aifd 
if  the  Ml|nd,  lies'tt  vpujirkable  i!Ock  {q 
^e4^tnd  double  Mlntlsd,  as  high  as 


chy  H^,  and  mny  be  seen  i^i^t  leagues Jofi,  being  alli«|nte;  it  appears  tt^'   .a« 
le  dli^ince  like  a  A  wheQr|bit  has  been  c|ille|l  St.  Thoj^s'  carveVpr  St.  ^ 
homas' hoy.    Thbrock  iaJltolPballrofuid,  afiiappilttrs  ati^ 

iPteag%soff.;     „  m 


This  rock  \|^olPj^  all  roiutd,  afiiappKttrs  at'^jre 
ft^sail,  |iad  maybese«gBoi     -  - 


liamrh  on  the  Paitiltg^  in  gene 

The  f traits  betareeii  the^||l^*  Jstcs  and 
'"^  iiy  whicli^  the  ^q||»n||^|o  Drake's 
>  tharniris  to  the  sPBth^MMve,  that 
kP^ter's  blaiit;  thallMCwc^lpeter's  «i 
ffl)?w*'J^«ndPt^f|«|»J^f    The 


'«rro 


^like 


»n^' 


used  forjpAiig  ouf  (»^  I^rak 


p£Jd^ 


^.ar#^ 
<ird. 
lead'Hhaiil'''   . 
..^...^i—,..^.  ....ithlstween  . 

,,, ie  IMiid^Chttt  and'  Salt 

tiDiiel,  requiii^lhe  br^«h^t«  ^ 


Jp  Oorda  aroVall  excellent, 

lan^et  ^ J»yfcfroW  t|i>'e  no 

'^'  "i3the*De 

mdlhlt 


Plt^miQkenri 


laiq  iilsi 
%ay,lles 
^of  wb; 
ottbe 


lUncl 
rt  and 
whole  shoafiii  coi 


to  &ii 

fto  tkvi  jipl 


y  iMIftlbA' 
Its  position' 


ifasilebriNal, 
kahsrd 

'6:ibeiflvatei%^K.'^. 
^lsXi8gtli»  wiih^  a 


I  to  kt 
eiag  oaiHhirid  tie 


rislaid.  'the  pmsat  IttMnsn^  bu^d  roctTaad  Buk  Itm/iU 
od  soandbigi  fr^  10  to  1^  l^eoaV.TThe  way  ie  elMt  th^sho^i 


m  ?^ 


'^'\%r 


#  ♦! 


w 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


307 


steady,  that  it  pass  not  from  E.  S.  E-  toward  S.  for  othervdse  you  %viU  be  apt  tn* 
g»t  m'tangled  with  I^eter's  iHlnnd,  as  the  water  sets  jftrunsly  towardt  the  strath^ 
which  it  forms  with  the  Dead  Chest,  and  the  8W«>H  ano  bids  (which  is  likewis«/j 
heavy,  when  there  is  a  fresh  wind)  as  it  diminiBhesthe  veis^'s  way,  tud  increase!^, 
ber  fce-way.* 

Vessels  which  navigate  hy  the  south  of  the  Virgins,  commonly  priii  betweM 
Jird's  Key  or  Frenchman*8  Cnp,  and  Buck  leland;  and  aHtthose 'who' run  fro| 
th«  southwiird  of  the  Virgins  for  St.  Juan's  Head,  inii^Purth.Ri^,  passihrouK 
the  ehaiin«|  between  the  Sail  Rucl<  nnd  Sayanna,  or  <ireen  Ishiml.       ^^  y$ 

The  seailung  thu  whole  of  the  west  coast  of  Vircm  Oorda  ^Ib-anqtiil  (|urinf, 
the  time  o(|he  breezes,  and  you  may  anchor  along  ineT  wlm|ib  l«|*    ' 
certiuiity  olnot  having  more  than  16  futhoms«  nor  less  thfii  t|^t 
from  theihbre,  and  theqii;iKtyj|^f  thei4k>ttom  is  cominonl]^%aoilf 

On  Ui«  w«st  coatt  of  NuniwM  Isiqifid  0ejre  is  u  h:irb(|ur, 
which  is  ^indi  het|pr^sheltered  an^  mttie  pecure,  than  th- "' 


iFlan«|(aD 
rbour  tf 
ffi  it  is 
Qf  Its 

Shc'il^^ 


ur's 


£*  I  it,  andfiasTar 
atb.    Within  this 
CHrs  thsi|,the  bn 
rbour  «!^  win 
Itige  veslw  cano  ^ 
It  in  necessary  thai 
^H  middlejifithe  6i 
^  makfrs^ng  aUtf;  for  if  not,  th 
not  in  ^e  ifprricane  MWsun.    On  < 
dM  U:^  to  the  nMd|i  m,  the  certaii 
whe4;^r  enough  Jmli^  must  nsive 
rtfsdmdirected.  W'^  ^>^  ^>t^ 
be  frim  the  oortn.^l'Att  mayjun  fiirll 
tmouj  to  furl  yofr  mils  smanjl^ :  for 


.  tb^iea,,.  during  thr 
[o  not  0tpertence  gun 
~  heni^  is  f«iesh;put^d 
f.  ft  w;^dint  more 


h  of  it,  in  ] 
omSf  atf 

n  of  Wm 
n  Qordat  fq 
,  as  ealiB  SB 
and  it  abid  i 
t^lteribr  of  tl 
a  mile  wi<)( 


en  thett  come  frorc  ^%  north. 


luffim  aftd  «||i^4li>  in  aboui 
towing  in  aAerwaras,^f  the^  hovj 
very  well  at  dh  ▼ei'yjmmth,  ifi%l 
from  the  80Ut(|:,  i||yejr  iotist  probki 
ley  will  find  no-un^tSeiidaii^r;  ai' 
,^^  .   manoeuvre,  oi]!  the  soutb  tack,  «Hi 
ji^Tou  run  to  take  tbjs  !iar(Mui|  sHlii 
faj^if,  apd  lie  as  if  ife  a  dock't^ut  it  is  { 
l^|l  norths  there  «uS^flav<%  9rv^'ii|jd  wb 


aight  cause'you'ffiilHTe,  an^tbsrejs  no  lltafn  for  maosiicvring.  1[(eey  in  mil 
that  about  a  leatfoAto  the  ^  j&f  B..of  the  S.  F*  poin|||f  Non^d'sjslani 
^«i^  is4iH»ckol  small  exteriliwhiclt  has  noi^ibore  than  bb«  f«etJlNli|k 


On  this 
tttuation  % 

OSver 


€■ 


ifly^under^   '^^. 
e  brigantiinil'  tmde 


theiE^te  Santa  Mpiiies  a^ck.lind  , 
bis  J^luek  is  not  wellascatsiiied  ^ for,  tin  ._ 
id  ol^DoD  Cusme  Cbi^ca  D|«de  i^iftty  exertion  fo  flnd^^t^ii 


-4^ 


ST.  CR^, 


h 


I 


f 


St^roixor 

I^flroBiSan 

J  ^flukimbci 

r|beS.  W.«n( 

._-iinffl|s;-j'.ndi^^ „ 

iM^p^mch  dail|ji|^^i)S«n^^ 
i«io4  \P«ig||caQ  p|»r<»«(lriid^ 

Theri^«miivtii«|a»riHii  one 
mat  a«d:  litr  is^&r<9i 
lybf  oti  tlli«outi 

b/ebief  town  MtMl  C^tDmsm^if 
nor^h  ««Nis||  undei^i^«MMi%«s  of  A,(m' 


SAJsiri 

mmost«#tllCiVi 
S%lMiM   It 


*;-;»'»1i 


ftAl^txk^> 


The  (i%er  town 
struck. 


dlF^ifdenfiksiwi 


eit  si#i'!The 


siVieleel 


Mand  iffl^Mtitf  fri 
price.    ,,  *# 

theotbfrM 
f  tb^  Damsh 

icted  fio^t^WB^^  |t)^ 

ftted  «t  thmlfi^lj^of  a  bay  on<the 
^hfch  defu«li|]|^fnifcipul  harbour. 
Bn'the  wsst^e^  ^fi^^  half  l^ay  ugib, 

^■f  y^-^'^V- — ^-* — 4i 

A  that,  ataStM'  kalf  imUtito  the  E.  N.  »  ^  ^  HmMI  Chest,  tei|l^ 
tS]b#sa«^  osi  wUbI*  jbrnjMds  frigate, ,s«l%«nl  wauls  have 


:^^' 


\i 


-•^.i'^' 


4 


4 


308 


nr.l'NT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


on  the  middle  of  a  spacious  Itay,  wherein  ships  may  anchor  at  pleasure,  in  frotii 
3  to  10  fathoms. 

From  th^  town  of  ChristianstKd  to  the  S.  W.  point  of  St.  John's  Isliind,  the 
course  is  N.  b^  E.  about  10  leagues.    In  the  cnannel,  about  six  miles  8.  by  W. 
of  this  point,  iieea  remarkable  round  rock,  culled  Bird  Key,  which  is  about  one 
quarter  M  large  as^ledondo,  near  Montserrat. 
The  harbourpf  Cltristi|n8tstd  is  difficult  of  access,  and  shoal  in  several  places. 
^ (iritis  deffnded  kijrthefort'of  Louisa  Augusta,  situated  on  ajieck  of  hnd,  which/ 
^    tend*  from  th^Wstwurd,  aod  by  that  of  Sophia  Fredrica,  situate  oi|^oot*s  Key, 
,.aq  islet  north  of  the  town,  under  the  guns  of  both  of  which  yesselsj^ust  pass  to 
Jthe  anchorage^    T^  is  one  of  the  handsomest  towns  in  lite  Welt  Indies :  its 
Yprineipai  streets  being  wide,  long,  and  straight,  and  intersect  each  ttther  at  right 
angles. 

The  greatest^length  of  St.  Croix  fi^ooi  £•  to  W.  is  tO  miles.    On  ailivaneing,its 

north  side  preMtnts  4  cHain  of  emiijeneiM,  almpstlike  those  |f  the^ijgio  Islands. 

it  about  a  lealiie  toithe  W.  N.  W.  o^tho  Bait  Point,  and  liilf  a  leaf^  from  the 

forth  coast!  tDia|e  iii  an  islet  nam^  Bk^kken  Jtif  Ooat  ItlanA^yrhich  appears  at  a 

distance  like a^'ljj^ft  of  the  coast^  Bo^een  ^island  aii8j|t.  Cn^tbereisa 

passage,  but  it  19  bad  and  litUe<mK|u€»|{ed.    T^  eiMt  poin^rGoat  wand  sends 

_^«»uta  ree^  ajdnile  and  a  quarfir.to  the  fivS.  ES^  theire  are  oners  stretddng  to  the 

WandN.'^  »     \^      m^^     ,"»  '^i 

•/The  west  ^oast  of j^t.  Croix  is  cleWM  tKi>  south  coast  is  Tejry  tbtili,and  require^ 
^much  practice  eithM*.  to  navigate  neam,  ai<tu  enter  into  its  bays,  q^^which  there 
i#lirR  (wo,  as'shovmqh  the  Chart.        "*% ',  j"  '       • 

To  enter  Aq  port  Of  Christianstsd  ibilcn  pif^tke  is  reqiilied,  and  then^fore  a 


Dihst  must  be  laRen. ' 
% 


of.Sodnbtero. 


aboutttwo 

u^jatraolr^ar 
*  This  ^irr«tchtd  island  is 
.are-  the  q^nly  fegetal^e  pn 
^at  k>djc6Wiil  fheca||M«%»^ 

rdarlNMiK  tbo  BiHi  and  quio  becat 
,     ^heladUHJ^J^^er^^ 
Ukafues  df«oi|jibre.&,  when  TfHariJirQii 

11  &tb^tta^«neve|^|(ro^pd  and  rocky 


agues 

;ed,  steep  aJQd  iiiSlto;  a' JittliyBamftl^  And  grass 

,_tiq|i  that  appears  on  its  iiiinp ;  the  littlt  wat«r 

'■^fpefk  d^rfoff^ins,  soon  evaporates;    You  itfay  an- 

st|ifp*to,  aiiQj,are  trom  4b  to  yi5  feet , 

it,i^her«r^  crept  from  b^i^  ^ 

liertMl^  aoiiyidfW  down  ItpVlrglD 

PTIM  twMilltBlBkftrSe  i 

n<91^Pi|ii#680  SO'  m    T#t>« ' 

.  t^-m^p  f  •  IsiS.  is  found  nrom  «5 
m^^^ftl^im^l*  leagMM  ^^hy^ 
firon'|ii^#lai^  9f  ^iiagada,  aoCl^^HSuea due  fast  from  the  t^^hvut^pV  , 
a  S.  B.  e(#of  %!fc>  gomg  bet^^mp  imp  you  haT«,», 3  7,  8  iitfillOa- 
^eti»i>f  wat«r^   Wl  «<>>^e  fVom  jpilllo  figibrero  is  N;  Tf  IlKl^i  ^^^*' 
ta|ti»'le|g»^.    '■  .    .„,^a'^-.  .    ?r    .     v    %.-'''^-i      ^     .- 

,«Thepassag«i^irerd  or  yvindirA)^lK^s0am^  anlaafe  :.C|ere 

it  no  swell.   JIm»  5irli|d»  ar^  gen^rally^^bura^^  llr  §(#g  out,  and  W^en,'  «hce 
you  are  past  S^ntbreril  all  obstaclesjire  at  i|n  end'.  v    ■  ^     )||^ 


0 


Aoguilla,^ 


if- 


Awuilla  M^^  N.  I  j^.  aad  W.  )i]tS.  i  8.  iibeire  two  Ig^i^  tfi  the  woitli  of 
»,  St.  Martins :  it  is  iHow,  flut  andtritheifd  island,  nHthout  a|^  mountains,  so  that 
Jl  it  cRnnot  be  |ieen' fart|\pr  off  ti^an  4  or  5  l^iagucs.    The  an^borii^  ground  is  good- 

^r~"  .         '       /^      I   f-'  '-  ■     ■  ,'■■  ^     .L        <*  ' ''       t  '■  '' 


umint's  amrrican  coast  pilot. 


309 


on  the  anutb  r'^.e,  hecaute  the  current  there  hns  no  force,  on  account  of  a  long 
Isdge  tfhieb  stretches  olt  S.  E.  from  the  eMt point.  On  the  south  partof  the  west 
point  therelkss,  about  one  milv  frnm  the  shore,  a  small  iaiand,  not  ab^e  100  fa- 
thoms In  length.  To  the  If.  W.  ny  W.  of  the  west  point  of  AnguillSi  distance 
aboat  4  leagues,  lie  several  small  islands,  the  principal  of  wbidi  a^  Dog  and 
Prifsklj  Pear  Islands,  between  which  isa  good  channel.  Th»|^tiB  the  eai^tera- 
mcst  i  the  second,  which  is  the  largest  of  all,  liea  farther  than^any  of  them  to  tbe 
yfest,  save  a  little  rocli  tl^at  is  almiist  ioinfd  with  it  on  the  west  side.  It  is  about, 
one  mile  in  l^gth,  aod  nas  a  few  inhabitants.  All  these  islands  af«  very  loWi  aod 
ranhot  be  seeb  further  off  than  4  or  5  leagues. 


J^earings  taken  and  remarkf  made  I'n'.'j^tn^ between  thehbope  mentioned 
"^         M9nd»i  by  am  txperiefieid  ^avigatf^ 

"  "^        .■  t 

*•  When  we  eame  t^liilao  (Wr  out,  I  foypd  that  the  bighe^^^^  St.  fiuatatia 

of  Bl  Km 
time  Port  1 

'  <Mr)|lw  iiort)iejmni#s- , _ 

'  ***Shtt  dir^  course  from  tbe  west  en^o^t.  Kitts  is  N.  N."  W.  t*'^  Slartin*^ 
weM  endi;«nd  so  tbH)ugh  betiveen  the  ubftiind  Prickly  Pear:-;  Fqr  wfiten  vou  are*!" 
jiitnin  jMuif  a  mile  of  thp  west  end»of  f  t;r'>i|iartin8,  the  soutlppmi^OflAb  land.of  St. 
BaiCtholomeW,  cotAf*  ib^qe    vith  thifr'iMlitbernniost  land  in  si|||t  of  S^  Mar- 
tlik%  ^ni}  they  bear  ^£,<b^JB;  and  then  aiba  will  bear  S.  \a  W*>  weaMy-    B|&p|' 
theaf(M«said  bearinniif  St,.  BultfiolfNnem     S*ba,  if  voi%ed  Qithjar  ofthemt  lj^ 
voumay  by  themlknow  how-to  direct  y^iur.  course  for  <pe  >w«iA>{part  of  St. 
^  M  ariint.  ^ 

V  TM  1|!Bat  part  of  «t.  Ma* 

7b^D  #|^N.  E.  parr  of  Angiiyla,  tjt^nortbjiide  of  PriclHy  iPeij-,  and 


northoriy, 
th^jlilddl 

afiiilo' e: 

E.  S.  E>,  |d 


rt  of  St.  Ma^Q's  and  the  WCil^d  of  An|(ffi^llat  b«af  jr,jp.  W. 
^D  ti^N.  E.  pari^of  AngiiHia,  Utf*  northjiide  of  PricMyiPeSj',  and 


bseqfaat  nodn,  #d  (UHtTd  Ai,lat.  1/|0  26^  If.  Md  t^«  Tafiation 
the  Kiilno  time  St. llart&'8  ehoiittd  |(seU  bejTMNl  ADsaill»4ftolli 


I* 

ir.  tillai 


«rrgtej|b^detui  An- 


Animi 

tqhi^ojlMil.  (|f ' 

jiel^Ubj^tlStlii^llest  U^  •^llpil  #6j0iio« 
c^tt^^^ipigbr  an<^llit|ii^ft  yenr » 
« "llheT^.lKf  itntf  f  »t  b-vpry  lilhaH,  and  hi 


.  <^btirahr  ^|mi  reefs, 

"  eno^lEmJIs  an  islet, 

8dfra:)iiJ|kjnd  has 

it  fiMm  ipguilla; 

^  neifwinimi  running 

and  tibe  ttriit  Mtiir* 


.Martin's,  and 
miitos  ;  it  is  e. 

Its  soil  ii  ?dW 

,  T''l9iefown|s<«|| 
^jlVPn^erce.    1^ 


>^ 


from  i|^T  a 

)#»)>  aM  baa 

sterile,  aod 

It  side,  near 

8  shut  almost 

e  yalue.    T%lk)rN.  fc.  of  the  £. 


I^miffih  lower jj^l^i^  dean  on  its 

ndM  the  cf4|ttpi|  Hrhich  separates 

bain  itelle  lnfrMlfi.  4>f»  passing 

— -j.-^ — -uillilai       -  * - 

:beegai'un^i(iuar« 


nd«H  the  c^ttptiil  Hrhich  separates 

— yhainitolle  lnfrMlfi.  4)9  passing 

leow«rd»  uii^uillila  seamt  jNgt  of  Aoguilla, 

toUbk  wastwaraofthe 


^*1ieHM|Mi  runningi|§n%iq«M  of  Aoguilla,  •     .  1 

and;  tbe  ttriit MtWeil them ^^ot beeS^un^,^ ar«  tothl  wastwardo/the         | 
Qi«|idianoftherflirm#.    Offthefasteiffl  of  AnpOHta.ire  ft>ur«pcka,  on  wfakh    ;    jj 

♦  '  »"  ,     *      4    *'f*     '*l  *       .     \.       .*.  r,  V'.jc-  '.<» 

k  '  '  -•  '  »■*■,,■.''■■•  '  iM 

-'%itMia  »y>     #•••     .»  '-    ■  .*         '*»'js  ■■    ■       •      X 


aiQ 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOl. 


"■M 


% 


the  tea  breaks  with  violence,  but  they  do  not  lie  farther  out  thnn  two  cableVs 
length,  and  at  ieaa  than  h  mile  there  are  t4  fathomi,  on  land,  gradually  increaaing 
to  80  fatbomt  at  4  milei. 

The  channel  between  St.  Martin'f  and  An||tiilla  la  excellent,  and  fit  for  any  class, 
or  numlHsr  of  feaaels;  for  it  hik  not  Insa  than  IS  fathoms  uf  water,  and  the  depth 
is,  ill  general,  fiym  IS  to  tO  fathoms  of  sand  and  gravel;  and  nenr  bothconstnit 
4oMi  not  dvcrease  to  leMthaii  7  fHthoms.  The  only  thing  which  is  to  be  avoided 
•  is  the  Spaniik  Roek,  lying  within  «  mile  from  the  S.  1^  end  of  Rt.  MartiD*8,on 
the  south  side. 


^M* 


The  Itlandft^  St.  Martin*!,  |*«. 


'•i' 


ti 


St.  Martinis  is  A'vided  firom  AnguWa  bj  the  channel  above  deAribed.  It  is 
divided  betwi^en  the  Dutch  and'the  ErenchMaitid  contains  a  gr«'at  numlier  of  (liliiv 
or  rather  huge'rocka  cov^rt^d  with  hoigh,  v^eh  may  be#en  above  tO!.^Suei  off. 
The  shape  ia  vt^ry  irreguhir.  amd  the  wpstehf  coast  iiicii»|QpQrativelyJ«W.  Rains 
vei^  seld^fp  fall  here,  and  as  tjie  SMil  9f  the  plains  aiM|i.V|ilh»ys  is  v/ttm^  they-are, 
consequehtfy,  unfruitfuL  The  llblliilt  destitute  of  riveNi  has  f<|iMlitMliip  And  ds- 
^terns,  wl{^ich  aflord^uodand  driiil^blfiiliviitwr^for  the  plantecs.  The  air  is  f  err 
healthy,  4(0cshire' full  of  flsh,  the  pajfan-ly  disturbed,  and  thePMlorsf^  Im' 
every  where  about'  the  island,  atpHmiw  witA  a  N.  £.  wiad.  Wuo||i  it  scarce 
and  dear.''  **'■-■      -  * 


Tde  priiipiDal  town,  PhUinshurg.  jlln  o^  the  a 
,P%-Ortat  Bag,  which  .has  8r»and  lu  fattromH,  good  Mg 
^  '  aaltponds,  ivhtji'reifr!  great  quantity  oj^lt  is  madw>* 
^     Dutch  quarter,  thiFrench  quartejc  i»«nig  to  th#jhortb 
The  Otrroterd  sars.  Sit.  Martin^i  ^'maoy  l|i|Khts  «i 
tainVbf  cuivieq|ue|iSR.    On  tl^i^.''  1^.  side  fn  rbnipfb 
IDore  ,coinmQdi.otis>y  th^  in  a/iy  otber  in  the^'liflaod. 
the  Dutch  part,  ea|*ndrln  the  (|fr|^fuon  of  the  shore. 
.^       bafbnur.  stands  an  eifrlittgun  f|»rt;  ^ii^  StlPeUi^i,  p^^ 
^    ''!Ain0i!rdam  Fortk    The|<'  twt^forti^  detfrnd  Vm  efftrafice. 

j^S  to  4  fatlioms  of  •water, 'jlvi  fl^it  ipull,  but  oA^hf  li|W%  Mtween 
points^R  e  iQnlm  6vtb  0  J|Ri^uis,'ii)ie|  vt<tst*ls  uf  a  larg(||^y^ht  gi 

.^    ward  tn;tii  thtM  ttii<^    AWllla^ 

*     thr  Man^^ffyjl^,  whi^ms  od 
^      Ringtt  iq  citiiHg||iferen^.,(f»Th(i 
""     miup. be  foniid  by  bringim  th^] 
*W.  of  Phiili»i^hJ|&J9a>v  ^  Wi 
@t.  M ii#tin'a  ;  kra^n  the  o[ 
▼ernur's  Vrwl^,' v#cb  is  tatith^  ««' 
house  wUchVtaiids'bn  the  to^i^NlM^ 
may  be  known  by  its  stai'ding  to  |;be 
Uted'^nd  j^paraj^  firom  the  otherit! 
lind  Ihfftjhe  shual  is  exa 


Vsld«  inaharboiilrUued 
rQHlid.  NearlUi^thlree 
^iTthc  chief  pl^  of  th« 

Hows,  hut  1^  jilDUl^- 

veasda  iiichor 

Itiiil^pitiilof 

^I4ij^fthl8 

int  is 

>|{| 

two  eai^or 

^     d^farthi^  in- 

the  S.  W.  of 'tHMlNiy,  is  a  riTlk  qfAied 

it  of  i)At«r  on  ^  aodTs  about '»|  cabl^* 

t  Of)  which  ^evib  ia  the  ieait  #atei^ 

It  of'SimsoD'a  ^ayl  whidib#ji/Ml«  IV; 

...  ..  -^  "-Wernnatfst  m^t|ii^in 

}  flagstaff  it  tlii^Go- 

ivith  anbdier,  #rge 

bay.  The  ia^tltouse^ 

I  tree,  which  >  i^sttjj 

esD  maijb itliaay  he 

ielfAt<e|M!i<v««hich 

For^oitenlam.  At 

and'i^Oi^Qn^  w^ 


kept  in  mil 

is  the  weste^ijiKipt  uf  the  bay,  an^^'^ 

a  third  (if  a  ewQle's  length  around 

rocky  buttu^  ^Ve  founS.  iMsiSi*"  "^  <i  i.  ' 

Oil  the  X.'W.  coast  there  is  ft  bay  t^ed  Mq/^yStMS^^  on&a  U>J^m,:y^\n^ 
and  hiiviiig  ai^pt hr,t>f  from  4  to  %^i^vn%,  on  sand";'  ft  t|^(»  butto^  «lfMwAi^<i 
the  town  of  MHrjKS^t,  whioh  belongtt>'to  the  Fr^acfay|»d  Mhich  is  dAfian^iid  by  %. 
fort  to  the  n^th  .4 it.  *  -      ".  '   ■        -s-^i^^-'^m  k-^-^' 

To  the  east  oflhe  N.  V:..  MB  of  St#li»i^if^  *^  M^^*^*'  ^^"^^^il^^'^^'* 
is  very  bare,  iml  surroundetniy  reefs  do8l|.ruuirai|t't*tll^D 
St  Martia'^sjf  mile  hhtad,  and  passable.  '^Mftfhbii  nwed  the  i^pudBftfftock^ 
lies  nearly  two  miles  to  the  W.  ^.  W.  of  Hat  Wand*  <' 1%i^ib  tL^iery  8tni«1I%ocli« 
the  least  watiK*  on  whiph  i|s  feet    When  |>assing  to  tie  Mr^i  of  Hat  Island, 


'^ 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  riLOX. 


311 


und  near  to  it.  in  order  to  steer  to  the  N>  W  lie  careFul  to  ((ive  » fiufficient  hirth  to 
th«'  rorlc  Th«  ittrait  between  thia  island  and  St.  BurtlioioAiewg,  iu  10  miles 
wide;  it  is  without  shoius,  sunken  rocka,  or  any  other  invisible  dangnni;  but 
those  l)<kii«id  Ihrough  it,  and^nAt  dnsUned  for  any  of  iheot*  islatids.  ought  fo  leave 
to  th«s«uth  all  the  islets  to  thw  K.  W.  of  St.  Bartholomew's,  and  to  the  north 
•Jl  those  of  St.  iMartins.  The  nhvigable  j^hanoel  is  thuH  reduced  ro  a  league  and 
■  bait  in  width.  The  t>rdinary  depth,  until  touchini;  the  ishiii,  thfrom  19  to  40 
fall|<|ms,  but  almost  always  upon  rocks,  and  you  <n:iy  saruly  run  Within  h  'If  a 
roMe  of  the  islets.  Th«  irat^gaUon  of  this  cb)inn«|is  excellent,  not  i>nly  for  tliose 
going  ftroin 'Windward  ;|n  leeward,  hut  also  for  tliose  bound  fr«t^  h-eward  to 
winowMtl ;  but  attention  must  be  paid  to  keep  clear  uf  the  ruck,  called  the  Man 
of  Woi.  befori  dewiribMl. 


»i, 


TisBHand  9f  St.  Bartholemew. 


xf. 


»f» 


Jiifll«l«fl9l|%  l|^W^>ndbear%flrom  Sandy  Point  iovSt.'Chi^itophef'i 


lfl:^l4ilteM^&>i|p£^  It  lie*  iEt.  and  W.  #id  is  five  or  %\x  lerfguealo 
ThtPUininNllt  l*;*«iT^H^  tfi  thohp^ilnijnKtre'iiely  daivcerous,  cflieny 

ontl||J<Mlrjwi«#lt«i«tliera  ar«  many  ?odltt1tlN>?e  ainl  undir  Water,  and  the 
aMriMlehtil|pimiili%uirea  an  eipp ri«iic<i4'^trut ;  but  it  enjoyi  the  advantage  of* 
liafiqgt  a  y^rvKood  Qarhour,  of  Ja  «xc^|M|  hold,  in  which  shipi^  «f  'any  sise    *  '^jj 
aril  p^Hllny  aheiU^rell  froni  ali'  winda..  -  ':til/k  itland  of  St.  B  irtholninew  appeaH     ♦ 
al  m^aMMit  rauiMl,  and  can  be  seeo  niiiB»or  tmi  leii|ues  off.    B.  1 1^.  tburteeo 
IMunii^lsipft^fcl^  tKa  llfauid.  lies  i^  l«fi«  hod  of  rorits,  about  CO  j^At  SifiaK^  . 
OifTOeJRaBt  aide  of  1(^1  ai&l«l(,  .Tne  rook  is  sbacp  >iinte4  awl  satmetiineii^i 
2U«f«W^heftth*  saa-feKiril)!  al^^^  t.  ^•^       t     # 

OiliMa  weatefn  a^deTof  ttei»  \*\m\  tli«l^  laMoud  itarb6ur,  #]ln  PXtt^Hent  hold- 
*«ILI#P,  In  whiehliatpt  of  4iBf  jliKe  a  a)^#  perfectly  sh«#erad  in  all  winds. 
iWWiiaour  ia^ealieduf^  Oimafpi^  and'oi^iill^iiliMted  the  |fwO  naniedi  «ui- 

A^iki^Mni  q/M  BorihaHiiim  the  JdM^at  oew«id  fil  ^mooV,  rant  9.  B. 
W<lifi#Piiii  «^#^^*i^#t*  F^%bit)B  tllV^siln  Is  iWlthest  to  ih« 
'^tflBntur,  Pili(Ni«Mliy|iit  two.luit^  the  ihHtowing  mmiths/^ 

4<«(|'(|nha|t|o  tbc  alii,  sHien  itllj^^^^  aortj.  A-  M.«« 

and  lt>nM|i\'aflerwar^||pg1the  same  pjriiportiop  tael^  a|^n^  !%«  Winds,  whicbt 
ar»«<ltoigcooMnj||an&/iOipeti»i|^  toake  fttTJ%|  dgfereneJiS  Thehorteon  is 
also  bw^t  at  the  Hfoe  when  tlHi  s«in  Is  l^MpW  the  jidrffi  of  tip^  lim^ :  atxl  so 

t$he:«i^rary.    The  greatest  diflfefeiMPlil  «i|llMag#»4  flowite  li  ii  iiiibest 
t^  lil  ^mfaI.  nnlv  10  inshM.  \    '.^^.  ^        ^       ^         .    ' 


UBi^Ffti,  only  10  iaabaa. 


called  fft 


■-4f,, 


.^ry,!^ 
Ba;|be  cef 

h  it 

jihiah 
itteoni 
itlbe 
iftia 

leaguai 
having  on* 
these  fouadhig8»  ta  |j 


> 


«li)«Sirfti.lli#'|ptiBi*-    Itiflvery 
mi  a^ailiall  town,  built  0 
ce0t^  Hie  southward.  j|' 


4  J 


I 


-f 

4 


ii^lmd  its  ilhores 

aiitlain,  but  ^id 

high  moun> 


ijlhe  island.  ^I^e  island" adiiearf4»l9^^  steep  rock, 


e  mitea  ii 


imferenc 


he  N.W|^de  there  b 

tisket-ifait  $1^  sboret  and 
sf      "     "     ' 


aaMMifafa  only  on  the 

'liH^tricalo  i»|d^tiftci%l  path  lbdh}g  |o  the  sum- 

""■     a  tilno*  i^;      *    .  ^         '"  v,*"" 

seen  aA^und.*^  On  thc|f.  JPl^ 

tijpimt  a 

leriW-an  exiSRsiye  bank  ^  loun^ip,  ex- 

^Hildand.S.  S«  W.  of  the  i4a«l>  M  •hoT^co.on 

Ait  distanei^  fSrofm  tt  to  17  ^'onrn.    B^ood 

no  bottom  ia  to  bejiuiHl.    At »(»  miles  to  tha» 

. •*•  *  '         ' 

.■■*•'■'       «      ..     .  T. ,  •    .  jfe..  -. 


r 


312  BLUNT's    AMKRICAN    COAST    PILOT. 

sottthmurd  of  tiie  idand  there  is  a  shoal  spot  of  8  or  4  fiithoms,  on  which  the 


„    -  — o—  -. — iseendwp    , 

but,  on  < Bea|rer>#p>proii«b,  itsifEure ehanms, andit  appears  loager.  " Tlw mnek  is 
,.     eomposed  of  Uth  mowitahM,  whose  mA|iKe  Oaiid  is  pretfcjf  even.    Th«  i|isier%> 
"     mountain  is  im><#  higher  than  that  to  tfera  N.  W.  it  irholMw  kt  the  niddlii,  Ikm^ 
W  ^fOftaTalion  bemf^tlM  crrfknr  of  jia  exhausted  voksaim.  wMefc.  has  ftotsahly  mm 


stjtqtedthe  isM:  the  MtoiA  Vnre|tfriMmrly  0!i,a  Hid^rlth  th»tewai*Mli 
i/re<HieotedbyifidrtsiBenfn|NihHmof  game.        ,.       :«^i^'       ^  .    ,««.     >' s^^., 
'Hie  tOwa  sttodayo  the  south  sMe,  airfiia#Tid«d  fart»  tis»  paHty  crfNt  tlw^ 
E,^^  Upper  and  Lower  'ftiwos.    Tho  |itte|r  is  oa  the  shore ;  H^cinsli     -^ '    *  '* 
"ware-housev.  and  is  fohabited  ia  thf  dey^mhr,  as  iWlt^htM/tmbt 
^^      and  holidays  to  thefipi^  town,^da||».f||li|«hd1^ih»  jlfiil  bf 
th^  climb  bjNttiealM  of 
shude  sfreet,  gtfd  i*^ei7 
*      The  anchorage,  fniieli 

^Wh^  Uowl^llgNn 
> .  the  jmit  and  confiiM 
tfaiaiMtd,  give  I  le  atttim 
tketafo.  i?Che 
up  thd(Hahl«l. 
,'«^E.ah0#thiW 


*    Ijrevis  aim  St 
tanee  of   *  " 
aleapte 

MdM,«ll4jt< 

athwart  i^ 
phintat^MIs  aft 
twobro^ 

amrttatht 


BLUNT^S    AMERICAN    C0A3T    PILOT. 


313 


inR  off  to  the  distance  of  nearly  half  a  mile,  which,  of  course,  must  also  be  caret 
fully  avoided.* 

The  Narrows,  or  straits  between  St.  Kitts  and  Nevis,  is  rather  more  than  half 
a  league  broad,  and  lies  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  Neurly  in  mid-channel,  at  the  eastern 
end,  there  is  a  remarkable  hig;h  rock,  called  Booby  Island ;  and  nearly  one  mile 
and  a  half  to  the  S.  W.  of  this  island  are  two  others,  called  the  Coios.  The  channel, 
which  has  a  depth  of  from  8  ti  2  f;tthom3,  is  between  these  rocks  and  St,  Kitts, 
for  on  the  southern  side  ther    .<re  several  shoals. 

An  extensive  shoal,  from  a  mile  to  a  mile  and  a  half  in  breadth,  and  Rve  miles 
long,  from  N.  W.  to  S.  E.  lies  without  the  eastern  end  of  ^the  Narrows.  The 
passages  in  are,  therefore,  between  its  north  end  and  St.  Kitts,  and  between  its 
south  end  and  Nevis.  The  southern  half  of  the  shoal,  which  is  the  broadest,  is 
rocky,  and  has  not,  in  some  parts,  a  greater  depth  than  10  feet.  There  is  also  a 
dangerous  patch  of  18  feet  of  water,  near  the  north  end. 

In  sailing.up  to  the  Narrows,  between  this  bank  and  tha  Isle  of  Nevis,  bring 
Booby  Island  W.  N.  W.  and  keep  it  so  until  the  Cows  bear  S.  W.  by  W.  This 
leads  clear  of  the  reef,  whence  you  may  proceed  as  shown  hereafter.  In  sailing 
in  from  the  northward,  before  arriving  at  the  Narro%vs,  Booby  Island  will  be  seen 
nearly  in  midway  of  the  channel.  In  sailing  downwards,  that  isle  is  to  be  kept  on 
the  larbfe  ird  side,  keeping  over  towards  the  shore  of  St.  Kitts.  The  south  part 
of  Nevis,  kept  open  to  the  westward  of  Booby  Island,  will  clear  the  reef.  The 
Cows  are  also  to  be  left  on  the  larboard  side,  keeping  over  to  the  shore  of  St, 
Kitts,  in  4^,  5,  or  6  fathoms,  good  ground. 

The  Road  of  Nevis  is  on  the  west  side  of  the  island.  In  approaching  it  (Vom 
the  southward,  give  the  Fort  Point  near  Charleston  the  birth  t>f  a  mile,  to  avoid 
a  shoal  which  lies  to  the  southward  of  that  point ;  then  luff  up  and  anchor  in  from 
10  to  7  fathoms,  good  ground,  with  the  fort  bearing  S.  E.  the  S.  E-  purt  of  Sit* 
Kitts  N.  h  E.  distance  offshore  about  one  mile. 

In  running  from  Nevis  to  Basseterre,  you  will  cross  a  bank,  on  the  shoalest  part 
of  which  there  are  5  fathoms,  or  quarter  less  5.  It  is  not  quite  a  mile  over,  and 
its  middle  lies  S.  by  W.  westerly  fiom  the  Nag's  Head,  or  the  soqti)  end  of  St. 
Kitts,  two  miles. 

St.  KJTTS. — ^The  centre  of  this  island  is  occupied  by  a  great  number  of  high 
and  barrerKinountains,  intersected  by  rocky  precipices,  almost  impassable,  and 
among  which  there  are  several  hot  springs.  Mount  Misery,  which  is  an  ex« 
hausted  volcano,  whose  head  is  hidden  in  the  clouds,  is  the  highest  of  all  these 
mountains,  its  perpendicular  height  bein^STU  fect.f  The  assemblage  of  hills 
makes  the  island  appear,  on  an  approach  fVom  the  sea,  like  a  huge  nr^ountaln, 
covered  with  wood  :  but  advancing  nearer,  the  coast  becomes  less  abrupt,  and 
the  ascent  of  the  mountains,  rising  one  above  anoilier,  will  be  seen  cultivated  as 
high  as  possible.  The  S.  E.  side,  on  sailing  along  at  two  leagues  distance,  appears 
like  several  detached  islands.  The  N.  W.  part  is  the  highest,  but  declines  gra- 
dually to  the  sea. 

The  principal  town  is  that  of  Basseterre,  on  the  south  coast,  situate  at  the 
mouth  of  a  river,  which  opens  into  the  bay  called  Basseterre  Road.  Sandy  Point 
Town,  towards  the  N.  W.  is  also  a  town  of  consequence.  There  is  no  harbour 
whatever,  and,  on  the  contrary,  a  surf  cqntinually  beats  on  the  shore,  which  is 
sandy,  and  prevents  any  tree  or  tvharf  being  erected  upon  it,  and  also  makes 
landing  always  inconvenient,  sometimes  dangerous.     Owing  to  this,  the  inhabit^ 


*  The  Denrotero  reports  that  there  is  a  ahijal  off  the  windward  coast  of  Nsvis,  the  situation 
of  which  has  not  beeu  made  known  ;  all  that  is  known  of  it  being  that  an  English  sloop 
touched  OR  it,  at  two  leagues  frooi  the  shore.  It  is  added  thai  an  English  ship  of  the  line  also 
touched  upon  a  rock,  nearly  two  miles  S.  S.  E.  from  Nevis.    This  may  probably  be  the  same. 

t  The  bottom  of  the  great  crater  of  Mount  Misery  is  a  level  of  fifty  acres,  of  which  se- 
ven are  coveted  with  a  lake,  and  the  rest  with  grass  and  trees ;  amongst  the  latter  is  the 
uountain-cabbsge.  Streams  of  hot  water,  impregnated  with  sulphur,  still  issue  llrom  tliQ 
Assures.  ^r: 

40 


^i 


m 


314 


BLUIfT'8    AMERICAir   COAST   PILOT. 


tnts  are  under  the  necessity  of  landing  and  shipping  heavy  gocds  in  the  manner 
practised  at  Montserrat,  as  described  in  page  320. 

SOUTHERN  SID'M  of  St.  KITTS.— In  sailing  off  the  southern  coast  of  St. 
Kitts,  the  following  lands  are  to  be  particularly  noticed,  namely,  the  Nag^s  Head, 
or  south  end  of  St.  Kitts,  on  which  there  is  a  high  hummock  ;  the  high  lands  on 
each  side  of  Frigate  Bay,  the  bay  at  the  northern  end  of  the  isthmus  which  con- 
nects the  northern  and  southern  parts  of  St.  Kitts;  Monkey  Hill,  a  high  moun- 
tain to  the  northward  of  tl)e  town  of  Basseterre ;  and  Brimstone  Hill,  another 
high  mountain,  with  a  square  fort  on  it,  to  the  eastward  of  Sandy  Point  Town 
in  the  west. 

In  proceeding  from  the  southern  side  of  Nevis  towards  Basseterre,  you  may 
cross  a  bank  lying  off  the  Narrows,  on  which  the  least  depth  is  about  4  fathontf 
It  is  rather  more  than  a  mile  in  breadth,  and  its  middle  part  lies  nearly  two  milev 
S.  S.  W.  westerly,  from  the  Nag's  Head,  above  mentioned.  Advancing  towards 
Basseterre,  and  having  passed  the  south  end  of  Nevis,  the  course  will  be  N.  W. 
by  N.  When  off  Frigate  Bay,  run  in  until  the  Nag's  Head  appears  t6  the  south- 
ward of  the  mountain  i4i  Nevis,  or  until  the  hummock  on  the  Na^'s  Head  ap- 
pears on  with  the  southern  part  of  the  top  of  the  same  mountain ;  keep  this 
mark  on  until  a  single  tree  on  the  green  ridge  behind  the  town  of  Basseterre 
comes  on  with  the  edge  of  Monkey  Hill,  or  begins  to  shut  in  behind  it;  you  may 
then  anchor  in  10  or  9  fathoms,  mud  or  clixy,  with  the  fort,  on  the  east  side  of 
the  town,  bearing  north,  about  half  a  mile  distant,  and  the  west  point  of  the  bay 
W.  by  N.  Vessels  from  the  westward,  when  bound  for  the  road,  may  run  in 
with  the  single  tree  above  mentioned  just  open  to  the  eastward  of  Monkey  Hill ; 
and,  when  the  points  of  higL  land  on  each  side  of  Frigate  Bay  begin  to  shut  in 
on  each  other,  the  water  will  L  e  found  to  deepen  from  7  to  10  fathoms,  after  hav- 
ingiiassed  over  a  rocky  ridge  into  clean  ground. 

The  follmoing  remarks  on  sailing  from  Nevis  to  Basseterre,  have  been  made  by 
Mr.  Backhouse.  *'In  sailing  past  the  island  of  Nevis  for  Basseterre  Bay,  give 
tlie  S.  W.  point  a  birth  of  a  mile  and  a  half,  and  steer  N.  N.  W.  and  N.  W.  by 
N.  and  there  is  no  danger.  You  may  anchor  in  7,  8,  or  9  fathoms  of  water, 
coarse  sandy  bottom,  with  Fashion  Fort  bearing  N.  E.  the  Half  Moon  Battery 
N.  W.  by  W.  and  the  town  N.  N.  W.    You  cannot  wood  nor  water  here. 

Old  Road  lies  five  and  a  half  miles  to  the  westward  of  Basseterre.  In  sailing 
_  close  along  shore  to  this  place,  the  embrazures  of  the  low  battery  on  Stony 
Point  (the  eastern  point  of  the  bay)  will  first  appear.  The  town  on  low  ground 
will  then  come  in  sight,  'v>ith  its  houses  intermixed  with  trees.  The  anchoring- 
place  is  nearly  midway  between  Stony  Point  and  the  town.  In  sailing  to  this 
spot,  run  first  so  far  to  leeward  as  to  fetch  it  upon  a  wind,  or  nearly  so ;  and 
then  stand  in  under  easy  sail,  directly  for  the  gully  to  the  eastward  of  the  town ; 
and  when  the  church  of  St.  Thomas,  standing  nearly  a  mile  to  the  westward,  is 
brought  on  with  the  flag-staff  on  Brimstone  Hill,  you  may  anchor,  at  about  a  ca- 
ble's length  from  the  beach,  in  9  or  10  fathoms,  stony,  but  good  ground.  Fresh 
water  here  is  obtained  by  the  casks  being  landed  and  rolled  about  100  yards,  then 
filled  at  the  running  gullet,  and  floated  off  to  the  boat.  There  is  a  great  surf  on 
the  rocky  shore. 

The  reratrks  made  by  Mr.  Backhouse  on  Old  Road  are  as  follow :  "  Give  the 
eastern  point  a  small  birth,  and  aachor  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  a  red  house, 
abreast  of  a  large  gully,  in  10,  11,  or  13.  fathoms  of  water.  If  you  go  abreast 
of  the  town,  you  will  soon  be  off  the  bank.  The  mark  for  anchoring  is  Old 
Road  Fort  by  the  RedHouse  N.  by  W.  half  a  mile«  and  the  extreme  points  S. 
E.  and  W.  N.  W.  You  cannot  wood  here,  but  watering  is  extremely  convenient." 

Sandy  Point  Toion  lies  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  Brimstone  Hill.  Off  this 
town,  and  to  the  eastward  of  it,  the  bank  is  narrow,  and  the  ground  roeky ;  the 
anchortng-nUce  is  consequently  to  the  westward,  at  about  a  cable's  length  flrom 
shore,  in  from  0  to  13  fathoms,  and  ^e  mark  for  anchoring  is,  the  street  extend- 
ing from  the  landing-place,  through  the  middle  of  the  town,  end  on.  In  running^ 
along  shore  to  the  anchorage,  you  must  cautiously  avoid  a  reef,  stretching  half  a 
JUila  from  Ohi  ..es  Fort  Point. 


4#' 


BLVNT^S   AMERICA!f    COAST    PILOT. 


315 


the  manner 

coast  of  St. 
Sag's  Headt 
gh lands  on  * 
wbich  con- 
high  moun- 
m,  another 
Point  Town 

•e,  you  may 
1 4  fathomf 
ly  two  milew 
cing  towards 
ill  be  N.  W. 
to  the  south- 
's  Head  ap- 
n;  keep  this 
>f  Basseterre 
[it;  you  may 
!  east  side  of 
ntofthe  bay 
,  may  run  in 
If  onkey  Hill ; 
r'm  to  shut  in 
oas,  after  hav- 

jeen  made  by 
re  Bay,  give 
ind  N.  W.  by 
ms  of  water, 
MouD  Battery 
irhere. 

e.    In  sailing 
iry  on  Stony 
m  low  ground 
Se  anchoring- 
lailing  to  this 
iarly  so;  and 
of  the  town; 
westward,  is 
it  about  a  ca- 
lound.    Fresh 
jO  yards,  then 
great  surf  on 

;  »'  Give  the 
la  red  house, 
ou  go  abreast 
goring  is  Old 
kme  points  S. 
r  convenient." 
lill.    Off  this 
iid  rocky ;  the 
[s  length  firom 
Weet  fixtend- 
b.    In  runnings 
fetching  half* 


Remarks  made  in  Basseterre  Road  and  Old  Road. 

lo  Basseterre,  which  is  a  large  open  bay,  the  marks  of  the  anchorage  are  at 
follow :  The  long  point  of  Nevia  S.  S.  E.  Nag's  Head  S.  E.  Bluff  Point,  W.  j  N. 
the  town  of  Basseterre,  north,  distance  offshore,  half  a  mile,  depth  of  water  7 
&thoms,  wood  purchased,  water  better  and  easier  got  at  Old  Road,  about  one 
and  a  half  league  from  hence,  tides  none. 

In  Old  Road  the  following  are  the  marks  of  the  anchorage,  viz :  the  Long 
Point  of  Nevis,  S.  E.  southerly  ;  Stony  Fort,  E.  S.  E.  the  westernmost  point  of 
Old  Road,  N.  W.  by  N.  Ston^  Point,  S.  E.  i  E.  Depth  of  water  where  th«  an- 
chor lay,  101  fathoms,  one-third  of  a  cable  out — ^wind  off  the  land ;  IS  fathoms 
under  the  stern— west  distance  off  shore,  two  thirds  of  a  mile.  You  land  your 
casks,  roll  them  about  100  yards,  and  fill  them  at  a  running  gullet;  then  float 
Ihem  off  to  the  boat.    A  great  surf  and  a  rocky  shore. 


The  Island  of  BarhudB.. 

The  greatest  extent  of  Barbuda,  from  S.  E.  to  N.  W.  is  15  miles.  Its  highest 
land  cannot  be  discerned  at  more  than  six  leagues  off.  The  greater  part  of  the 
coasts  of  this  island  are  very  foul  and  dangerous.  In  its  proximities,  it  is  not  un- 
common to  sound  with  50  or  60  fathoms  at  the  prow,  and  have  only  4  or  5  fa- 
thoms at  the  stern;  the  reef  extends  several  miles  to  the  S.  E.  from  the  island, 
and  the  rocky  soundings  continue  to  the  south  as  far  as  mid-strait  between  it  and 
Antigua,  where  9  fathoms,  on  the  same  kind  of  bottom,  have  been  found.  To 
the  N.  and  N.  W.  the  reef  extends  outward  to  the  distance  of  5  miles,  and  here 
lie  the  wrecks  of  the  British  ship  Woolwich,  and  of  a  brig,  which  was  under  the 
conv«y  of  that  ship. 

There  is  anchorage  in  a  well  sheltered  road  on  the  western  side,  where  ships 
may  ride  in  9,  l£or  14  fathoms  of  water;  or  within  the  reef  in  S}  fathoms,  four 
miles  above  Palmeto  or  the  S.  W.  Point.  There  is  also  anchorage  off  the  S.  W. 
coast,  in  5i  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  with  Palmeto  Point  N.  W.  by  W^  three 
miles,  and  Cocoa  Point,  the  south  point  of  the  island,  E.  by  S.  4  miles  distant. 


The  Island  o/*  Antigua. 


4 


Antigua  has,  in  general,  a  rocky  shore,  and  is  surrounded  by  many  dangerous 
reefs.  The  climate  of  this  island  is  commonly  hotter,  less  healthy,  and  the  hur- 
ricanes more  frequent  than  those  of  Barbadous.  There  being  no  rivers,  and  but 
few  8prin{[s,  and  those  brackish,  the  inhabitants  are  obliged  to  preserve  the  rain 
water  in  cisterns.    Excessive  droughts  frequently  imp^  a  and. destroy  vegetation. 

Antigua,  however,  derives  considerable  ad vantiiges  from  the  circumstance  of 
having  several  excellent  harbours,  particularly  English  Harbour  un  the  south  side, 
which  is  capable  of  receiving  the  largest  ships  of  war  in  the  navy ;  here  also  is  a 
dock-yard,  with  stores  and  all  other  materials  and  conveniences  for  repairing, 
heaving  down,  and  careening  ships.  To  the  westward  of  English  Harbour  is  the 
harbour  of  Falmouth,  and  to  windward  is  fVilloughby  Bay.  At  the  eastern  end 
of  the  island  is  Nonsuch  Harbour ;  and,  on  the  north  side,  is  the  town  and  har- 
bour of  Parkham,  toe.  The  coasts  are,  in  general,  very  foul,  esuceially  on  the 
N.  and  N.  E.  whence  many  reefs  extend  out  to  the  distance  or  mote  than  a 
league. 

The  town  of  St.  John,  on  the  N.  W.  side,  is  the  capital.  Tl.is  town  is  situa- 
ted on  the  harbour  of  the  same  name,  in  which  there  is  a  sufficient  depth  for 
merchant  vessels,  and  perfect  security  in  all  winds.  Ships  from  the  eastward 
generally  make  for  the  S.  E.  coast  of  the  island. 


516 


BLUNl's  AMERICAN  COAST  PlLUt. 


WILLOUGHBT  BAY— The  first  harbour  on  the  S.  E.  side  is  that  called 
Willoughby  Bay,  on  the  western  side  of  which  is  a  little  island,  called  Sandy 
Island,  environed  to  a  short  distance  by  sunken  rocks.  From  the  eastern  side  of* 
the  bay  a  long  narrow  reef  extends,  more  than  two-thirds  over  the  entrance,  and 
to  within  half  a  mile  of  Sandy  Island.  The  passage  in  is  therefore  between  the 
island  and  the  reef;  and  even  in  mid-channel  between,  there  is  a  shoal  having 
only  9  feet  over  it,  called  the  Weymoutli,  which  lies  only  half  a  mile  from  Sandy 
Island,  on  which  the  Mail  Packet  Maria  was  lost,  and  20  persons  drowned,  in 
March,  1820.  Between  Sandy  Island  and  this  shoal,  there  is  a  depth  of  4  fa- 
thops ;  between  it  and  the  west  end  of  the  reef  there  are  7  fathoms,  and  the 
channel  is  wider.  At  a  mile  within  the  entrance  there  is  good  anchorage,  in  4 
and  5  fathoms  t  in  going  up,  it  is  recommended  to  borrow  towards  the  larboard 
shore. 

ENGLISH  HARBOUR.— This  harbour  is  perfectly  safe,  and  lies  close  under 
the  west  part^f  the  easternmost  high  land,  so  as  to  afford  a  shelter  in  all  winds  ; 
and  ships  of  war  commonly  lie  here  during  the  hurricanes.  In  the  bay  without 
the  harbour,  ships  may  anchor  in  5,  6  or  7  fathoms.  They  mast  warp  in,  and 
cannot  lie  excejtling  N.  N.  E>  There  are,  generally,  flutterings  of  wind  from  the 
high  land. 

In  entering  the  harbour,  give  the  O^d  Horse  Shoe,  or  loW  battery  point,  on  the 
Starboard  side,  a  good  birth,  and  keep  as  nearly  as  possible  in  mid-channel,  be- 
tween that  and  the  opposite  point,  on  which  stands  Fort  Barclay,  until  you  get 
tnto  the  bay  on  the  eastern  side,  called  Freeman's  Bay.  In  this  bay  there  are 
moorings  for  shipping,  and  good  anchorage  hence  up  to  the  store-houses  on  the 
Western  side,  in  S,  4  and  5  fathoms.  The  water  is  generally  smooth.  It  is  not, 
howevef,  perfectly  sa^e  for  a  stranger  to  conduct  a  ship  in,  as  the  entrance  is  nar- 
I'ow,  and  rather  shoal.  When  you  arc  off  the  harbouf,  a  pilot,  or  the  master  at- 
tendant, tvili  borne  on  board. 

Large  ships*  li(%  at  proper  moorings,  but  small  ones  lie  with  one  anchor  to  the 
£.  S.  E.  and  the  other  made  astern,  on  shore.  There  are  four  moorings  for 
ships  in  Freeman's  Bay^  just  within  the  harbour's  mouth,  the  best  bower  to  the 
westward^  and  the  moorings  on  shore  to  the  eastward. 

Wood  and  water  are  not  to  be  obtained  here.  You  may,  however,  obtain  the 
latter  at  Falmouth,  about  a  mile  and  a  half  to  leeward.  It  is  not^yery  good, 
being  soft,  muddy  and  brackish. 

FALMOUTH  HARBOUR.— To  sail  into  this  harbour,  run  close  in  towards 
the  western  point,  calle^  Proctor*s  Point,  and  you  will  pass  clear  of  a  ledge  of 
sunken  rocks,  called  the  Bishops,  which  lie  toward  the  middle,  just  within  the 
entrance,  and  terminate  a  shoal  extending  from  the  eastern  point,  on  which  there 
is  a  redoubt  for  the  protection  of  the  harbour  ;  beyond  these  rocks  there  is  good 
anchorage  in  from  3  to  6  fathoms  of  water.  There  is  a  battery  on  an  islet  with- 
in, for  the  defence  of  the  town,  on  the  western  side  of  the  harbour ;  beyond  which 
there  is  a  spring  of  fresh  water. 

Vessels  bound  to  St.  John's  Harbour,  from  the  eouth  side  of  the  island,  onap- 
))roaching  westward,  must  give  the  coast  a  birth  of  three  or  four  miles,  until  they 
come  abreast  of  Johnson's  Point,  (the  S.  W.  point  of  the  island)  ip  order  to 
avoid  the  dangerous  reefs  which  lie  about  2  miles  from  shore,  eastward'ftnd  north- 
westward of  that  point.  If  bound  to  the  north-westward  from  English  Harbour, 
the  course  to  abreast  of  Johnson's  Point  is  first  W.  by  S.  or  W.  S.  W.  about  8 
miles ;  then  hauling  towards  the  N.  N.  W.  and  keeping  the  lead  going,  still  keep- 
ing at  the  above  mentioniftd  distance  from  the  island,  steer  for  Sandy  Island,  the 
little  island  lying  to  the  westward  of  St.  John's  Jload,  and  about  seven  miles  N. 
by  W.  fVom  Johnson's  Point. 

Or,  in  sailing  from  off*  English  Harbour,  to  the  westward,  when  to  leeward  of 
Tahnruth  Harbour,  keep  the  small  battery  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  of 
that  harbour  open  with  the  western  point  of  the  same,  until  you  are  off  Carlisle 
Bay,  or  Old  Road.  The  bluff  land  of  English  Harbour  being  then  kept  open 
without  that  of  Old  Road*  will  lead  clear  of  Johnson's  Reef,  in  a  depth  of  about 
If  fathoms>  ^ 


BLUNT  9    AMERICAN    COAST    FtLOT. 


SIT 


On  the  western  side  of  Antigua,  at  about  half  way  up,  and  nearly  a  league  to 
the  southward  of  Sandy  Island,  is  a  large  harbour,  called  Five  Islands  Harbour^ 
and  so  called  from  a  cluster  of  five  remarkable  little  islands^  which  lie  nearly  in  a 
line,  about  half  a  mile  east  and  west,  off  the  point  on  its  south  side.  About  three 
quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  harbour,  and  close  in-shore,  is  another 
conspicuous  little  island  called  the  Hawk's  Bill.  When  you  have  approached  so , 
far  to  leeward  with  the  mark  above  mentioned,  namely,  the  bluff  of  English 
Harbour  kept  open  without  that  of  Old  Road,  as  to  have  the  Hawks'4  Bill  opeih 
to  the  westward  of  the  Five  Islands,  you  will  be  clear  of  the  reefs,  and  may  tack 
up  towards  Sandy  Island.  In  approaching  this  island,  keep  it  on  your  starboard 
bow,  in  order  to  avoid  several  shoals  extending  to  the  distance  of  a  mile^rom 
shore,  to  theN.  W.  of  Five  Islands  Harbour. 

Should  the  wind  permit,  you  may  run  within  Sandy  Island ;  but  it  is  better  for 
strangers  to  go  to  leeward  of  it,  at  the  distance  of  not  less  than  two  cables'  length, 
so  as  to  avoid  a  reef  which  stretches  from  its  southern  side  to  the  S.  W.  Be° 
careful  not  to  stand  above  three  miles  to  the  northward  of  this  island,  lest  you  be 
caught  by  a  lee-current,  or  touch  on  the  shoals,  which  lie  to  the  northward.  By 
keeping  in  15  fathoms,  you  may  pass  clear  of  the  island  in  the  night. 

ROAD  of  ST.  JOHN'S.— This  roadstead  lies  about  one  mile  and  a  half  east, 
a  little  northerly,  from  Sandy  Island.  It  lies  in  latitude  17°  10',  or  very  nearly 
so.  The  western  point,  on  the  south  side,  which  forms  the  bay,  is  called  the 
Ship's  Stern,  at  about  a  mile  north  of  which  there  is  a  dangerous  ledge  of  rocks, 
with  not  more  than  three  feet  water  over  them,  called  the  Warrington.  Here  are' 
breakers  in  a  wind. 

The  road  lies  to  the  southward  of  the  Warrington  Rocks,  and  has  a  depth  of 
from  6  to  10  fathoms.  The  anchorage,  which  is  two  or  three  cables'  length  with- 
in the  rocks,  lies  with  the  Ship's  Stern  S.  W.  by  W.  Fort  James  on  the  north 
point  pf  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  E»  S.  E.  and  the  Warrington  N.  by  W.  or 
with  the  flag  staif  of  Fort  James  on  with  the  north  side  of  the  island  in  the  har- 
bour, called  12at  Island,  where  there  are  from  5  to  7  fathoms  water,  and  good 
holding  ground. 

The  middle  of  the  Warrington  Rocks  lies  with  the  northern  part  of  the  build- 
ings on  Fort  James  on  with  Rat  Island  above  mentioned.  Close  to  the  west- 
ward of  tbyem,  in  the  depth  of  9  fathoms,  the  largest  of  the  Five  Islands  appears 
open  to  tbib  westward  of  the  Hawk's  Bill.  The  western  part  shoalens  about  a 
cable's  length  from  the  breakers,  but  the  eastern  part  is  bold-to. 

Ships  bound  to  the  Road  stand  on  upon  a  wind  for  half  a  mile  above  Sandy 
Island ;  then  tack,  and  run  close  in  to  the  Ship's  SteVn ;  but  be  sure  not  to  get 
farther  to  windward  than  to  open  the  Hawk's  Bill  without  the  land,  or  to  bring  it 
in  a  line  with  the  easternmost  of  the  Five  Islands.  When  thus  far  in,  if  standng 
to  the  northward  towards  the  Warrington,  you  must  tack  so  soon  as  the  flagstan 
of  Fort  James  appeal's  on  with  the  middle  of  Rat  Island. 

To  sail  up  within  Sandy  Island,  bring  the  westernmost  of  the  Five  Islands  N.  hf 
E.  {  E.  and  keep  them  open  on  the  starboard  bow,  which  will  lead  clear  of 
danger. 

At  the  distance  of  a  mile  from  the  westernmost  of  the  Five  Islands,  you  wilf^ ' 
be  in  the  channel ;  keep  Sandy  Island,  as  before  mentioned,  on  tlie  starboard 
bow,  until  you  open  the  Hawk's  Bill,  and  then  luff.     The  eastern  side  of  Sandy 
Island  is  nearly  bold-to,  and  in  the  day,  the  shoalings  may  be  seen.    The  Ship's  • 
Stern  is  bold-to;  after  the  Hawk's  Bill  bears  E.  by  S.  you  may  haul  up  as  near 
to  it  as  you  choose,  there  being  11  fathoms  of  water  close  to  it.    In  steering  for' 
the  harbour,  keep  along  the  sQ^uth  shore,  which  is  all  ofi^ar. 

There  is  a  bar  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  which  stretches  from  the  north: 
side  S.  W.  to  the  land  on  the  south  side.  The  deepest  water,  14  feet,  is  on  the^ 
southernmost  part  of  the  bar :  the  depth  on  the  northern  part  is  about  13  feet. 

NORTHCRN  SIDE  of  the  ISLAND.^The  northern  and  western  coasts 
of  Antigua  are  environed  by  numerous  reefs,  (as  shown  on  the  chart)  betwecn- 
which  and  the  land  there  is,  however,  a  good  channel  for  shipping.  At  the  Nv 
E.  part  there  are  also  a  number  of  small  islands,  of  which  two  or  three  of  the 
outermost  are  called  the  Birdjslands ;  the  whole  are  encompassed  by  reef9,  whieki 


« 
** 


^mtk 


Al^^I 


4  M: 


3te 


nLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILUT. 


render  them  Inacceesible  to  ihipping.  Of  the  latter,  the  northernmost  Is  a  nar- 
row ledge,  part  of  which  is  sometimes  dry:  this  ledge  stretches  N.  E  about  a 
mile  from  the  northernmost  Bird  Island.    A  sho»l  of  3  fathoms  lies  about  three- 

auarters  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  end  of  the  ledge,  between  which  and 
le  Bird  Islands  Reef  there  is  a  clear  channel  of  8  and  6  fathoms.    The  white 
water  from  the  shoal  may  frequently  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  and  r.  half. 

The  HARBOUR  of  PARHAM  lies  at  the  distance  of  two  miles  westward  of 
the  Bird  Island's  ledge.  This  harbour,  though  large,  will  admit  smal'  vessels 
only.    The  town  is  situated  on  the  south  nide  of  the  harbour. 

A  little  island,  called  the  Prickly  Pear,  lies  off  the  west  point  of  the  entrance 
of  Pafham  Harbour,  and  about  4  miles  due  west  from  the  north  end  of  the  Bird 
Island's  ledge.  In  advancing  towards  this  island,  and  thence  to  Boon's  Point 
two  miles  to  the  westward  of  it,  be  sure  not  to  get  over  to  the  northward,  &r  the 
reefs  on  that  side  are  extremely  dangerous,  and  in  some  parts,  not  more  than  a  - 
mile  from  the  coast. 

From  Boon's  Point  to  go  clear  of  the  Warrington  Rocks,  on  the  northern  aide 
of  St.  John's  Road,  the  course  and  distance  are  W.  S.  W.  southetly  4  miles. 

The  NORTHERN  LEDGES,  off  the  north  coast  of  Antigua,  commence  with 
the  rock  ciMed  Addison' 9  Rock  on  the  east,  and  terminate  with  the  reef  called  the 
Diamond  Reef  on  the  west.  Addison's  Rock  is  a  shoal,  having  on  some  part  on- 
ly 4  feet  of  water,  and  lying  nearly  north  of  the  fort  on  Barnacle  Point,  upon  the 
western  side  of  the  entrance  to  Parham  Harbour.  It  has  a  depth  of  about  3 
fathoms  around  it.  Within  a  short  distance  N.  by  W.  westerly,  from  Addison's 
Rockt  there  are  two  other  shoals  of  about  3  fathoms;  and,  half  a  mile  thence, 
west,  is  a  reef,  sometimes  above  water,  and  called  the  Horse-Shoe.  This  reef 
bears  N.  one  mile  and  a  quarter  distant  from  the  Prickly  Pear,  close  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  Horse-shoe,  and  between  it  and  the  great  cluster  of  reefs  which 
stretch  to  the  westward,  there  is  a  channel  of  .^  fathoms.  ^ 

At  a  short  distance  to  the  westward  of  Beggar's  Point  (the  point  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  Prickly  Pear,)  there  is  a  windmill ;  a.'d,  at  the  distance  of  one  third 
of  a  mile  to  the  S.  W.  there  is  another.  These  u/dls  form  the  mark  for  sailing 
through  the  channel  on  the  western  side  of  the  Horse-shoe ,  and  steering  S.  by 
W.  between  them,  will  lead  a  vessel  through. 

A  small  shoal  of  only  5  feet  of  water,  lies  S.  W.  by  W.  at  the  distance  of  near- 
ly a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  Horse-shoe,  and  nearly  at  the  same  distance  N. 
W.  by  W.  from  the  Prickly  Pear.  There  is  also  a  shoal  stretching  half  a  mile 
from  the  western  side  of  the  Prickly  Pear,  which  may  be  seen  during  the  day. 

Captain  Bradshaw  has  observed,  that  there  are  so  many  shoals  and  rocky 
spots  without  the  great  reefs  above  mentioned,  that  it  is  dangerous  to  come  too 
hear.  That,  in  pai  ticuiar,  called  the  Diamond,  lies  a  mile  to  the  west  of  the  reef, 
•nd  in  the  channeii  between  you  have  6  and  5i  fathoms.  You  wjU  be  in  this 
channel  whilst  you  keep  the  western  side  of  the  leeward  Sister  in  a  line  with  the 
lag-staff  of  tf^Mues  Fort.  The  Diamond  is  of  a  circular  form,  and  one  mile  in 
extent:  the  depth  of  water  over  it  is  from  one  to  nine  feet.  To  avoid  it,  when 
|;oming  in  from  the  N.  W.  bring  the  Ship's  stern  to  bear  S.  by  E.  before  you 
haul  up  with  the  fort,  and  then  look  out  for  the  Warrington  Rocks.  If  the  wind 
will  serve,  you  may  pass  close  to  the  westward  of  the  westernmost  sister,  and 
you  will  thus  weather  the  Warrington,  which  bears  north,  above  a  mile,  from  the 
Ship's  Stern.  The  westernmost  part  shoalens  from  the  breakers  a  full  cable's 
length,  but  to  the  eastward  it  is  bold-to."  » 


Remarks  on  the  Coast  of  Antigua. 
[From  the  Derrotero  de  las  AntilUUo] 

On  approaching  Willoughby's  Bay,  upon  the  S.  E.  coast,  great  caution  is  re- 
<iuired,  in  order  to  avoid  its  Rocky  shoals,  and  a  Pilot  will  be  requisite  for  stran- 
gen  who  enter  here.  ^ 


■/•a 


*•    *\ 


•*! 


BLUNT'S  AfiilRICAIf  COAST  PILOT. 


S19 


From  this  bay  the  coast  to  the  westivard  continues  rery  clear,  and  In  It  you 
will  aooij  find  ENGLISH  HARBOUR,  which  is  an  excellent  port,  having  a 
dock-yard  and  careening-place  for  vessel:)  of  any  size.  The  strait  of  this  harbout 
is  about  a  cable's  length  in  width,  and  in  the  middle  of  it  there  are  from  4  to  5 
fathoms,  and  3  fathoms  at  a  quarter  of  a  cable  from  the  Points.  After  English 
Harbour,  that  of  FALMOUTH  follows,  ana  thence  the  coast  begins  to  be  foul* 
sending  out,  to  ir  ore  than  2  cables  length  from  it,  very  dangerous  rocky  reefs. 
Thus  it  continues  to  CARLISLE  BAY,  or  the  Old  Road.  From  Carlisle  Bay 
to  Johnson's  Point,  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  island,'the  coaM  extends  to  the  Dortb* 
but  has  a  rocky  shoal  of  the  length  of  2|  miles,  which  lies  at  a  mile  and  a  half 
from  the  coast.  Between  this  shoal  and  the  coast  there  is  a  passage  fit  for  any 
vessel,  but  it  ought  not  to  be  attempted  without  a  pilot. 

From  Johnson's  Point  the  coast  continues  to  the  north,  to  the  FIVE  IS- 
LANDS, on  the  south  side  of  the  harbour  of  that  name :  and  another  shoal  of 
rocks  and  sand  extends  between  these  points,  which  lies  out  about  a  mile  and  a 
half  from  the  coast :  the  depth  between  is  very  unequal,  and  the  navigation  there- 
fore dangerous. 

From  the  Five  Isles  the  coast  forms  a  great  Bay,  named  Five  Islands  Harbour, 
of  which  the  north  point  is  called  Pelican  Point.  At  about  two  miles  to  the  N. 
N<  E.  of  this  point,  is  the  point  called  the  Ship's  Stem,  which  is  the  S.  W.  point 
of  St.  John's  Bay.  Between  the  two  points  is  a  sand-bank  which  extends  out 
above  a  mile  from  the  coast,  and  its  edge  is  nearly  on  the  me;idian  or  south  of 
Sandy  Island,  an  islet  two  miles  to  the  west  of  the  Ship's  Stem.  A  reef  sur- 
rounds Sandy  Island,  and  is  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  extent  from  N.  £.  to 
the  S.  W. 

Two  miles  to  the  N.  E.  by  N.  of  the  Ship's  Stem  are  two  islets,  named  the 
Sisters^  which  are  three-quarters  of  a  mile  N.  W.  by  W.  from  Corbizon's  Pomif 
on  wmch  there  is  a  fort. 

Between  the  two  Sisters  and  Sandy  Island,  and  just  within  this  line  of  direc- 
tion, is  the  rocky  shoal  called  the  Warrington,  which  has  in  its  shoaler  part,  not 
more  than  3  feet  of  water. 

The  town  of  St.  John,  situated  at  the  bottom  of  a  bay  of  the  same  name,  is 
the  capital  of  the  island,  and  centre  of  its  commerce.  We,  therefore,  give  di- 
rections which  may  guide  any  one  to  the  anchorage.  The  north  coast  of  this 
island  is  very  foul,  as  already  noticed ;  it  is,  therefore,  more  advisable,  on  advan- 
cing, to  make  the  island  on  the  south  side,  and  direct  your  course  so  as  to  pass 
about  two  miles  to  the  south  of  its  southernmost  points,  and  continue  steering^ 
true  west,  but  nothing  to  the  north,  until  the  westernmost  part  of  tlM  Five  Isi-;^ 
ands  bears  north,  when  you  may  luff  up  to  N.  N.  W.  with  which  course  yoii' 
will  pass  aboiit  a  mile  from  the  outermost  part  of  the  Irish  Bank,  a  shoal  of  sand 
and  rock,  and  you  will  follow  it  until  the  Five  Islands  bear  east,  wHsn,  if  the 
wind  allows,  you  will  steer  so  as  to  pass  about  two  cables'  length  from  the  S.  E. 
side  of  Sandy  Island,  taking  care  not  to  pass  to  the  eastward  of  N.  E.  by  N. 
that  you  may  keep  clear  of  the  sand-bank,  which  extends  from  the  coast  be-, 
tween  Pelican  Pomt  and  the  Ship's  Stern,  until  Sandy  Island  bears  north,  when^ 
you  may  luff  to  the  wind  all  you  can ;  and,  if  you  can,  place  the  vessel's  head  to- 
wards the  Ship's  Stern  Point,  which  is  very  clean,  and  follow  on  towards  the 
Road  within,  and  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  nearly  south  from  the  War- 
rington Shoal.  If,  when  passing  betwee  .  Sandy  Island  and  the  coast,  the  wind 
will  not  permit  your  approach  to  the  Ship's  Stbrn  Point,  you  may  follow  the 
tack  until  Fort  HamUton,  which  is  the  middle  one  of  three  standing  on  the  coast 
to  the  north  of  the  town,  bears  east ;  then  go  about  on  the  other  tack,  and  con- 
tinue b  mating,  taking  care  not  to  prolong  the  north  tack  more  than  until  Hamilton 
Fort  bears  east ;  or  go  about  even  rather  sooner ;  but  the  south  tack  you  may 
follow  until  you  are  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  shore  of  Ship's  Stern  Point, 
for  it  is  very  clean. 

If,  when  to  the  west  of  the  Five  Islands,  the  wind  will  not  permit  you  to  pass 
to  the  S.  E.  of  Sandy  Island,  you  must  steer  to  the  north  until  the  north  point 
of  Sandy  Island  bears  east,  southerly,  and  then  you  will  haul  b^  the  wind,  ^^d 
prolong  the  stretch  until  you  xan  weather  Sandy  Island  on  the  other  tack,  an4 


-^ 


9 
% 


I 


%. 


320 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


having  m  :^thered  it,  you  will  beat  in  as  above  stated :  that  is,  on  the  north  tack, 
until  you  are  nearly  west  of  Fort  Hamilton,  and  on  the  south  tack,  to  within  a 
cable's  length  of  the  coast,  near  the  Ship's  Stern. 

^  To  proceed  to  the.  nf*rthtcard,  from  the  road  of  St.  John,  it  is  necessary  to  give  a 
Wrth  to  the  rocky  shoal  cailed  the  Diamond  and  others,  which  extend  west  al- 
most to  the  meridian  of  the  Warrington,  and  the  northernmost  part  of  which  is 
nearly  five  mile  •  d>:*ant  from  the  Ship's  Stern  Point.  To  effect  thi-^,  you  must 
steer  from  the  anchorage  about  N.  W.  by  N.  but  nothing  to  the  north  of  that, 
until  Sandy  Island  bears  from  south  towards  east,  and  then  you  may  steer  north, 
which  you  V7ill  continue  until  the  Sisters  bear  S.  E.  by  S.  when  you  m?j  haul 
to  the  wind,  and  pursue  your  route,  according  to  destination. 

U,  JuLving  made  the  north  part  of  Antigua,  you  wish  to  anchor^at  St  John's, 
you  ought  to  ^teer  true  west,  passing  outside  of  all  the  shoals;  that  is,  .woidir;^ 
the.,north  coast  by  about  four  niiles,  until  Sandy  Island  bears  South,  a  little  eajt- 
«rly,  when  you  may  steer  towards  it,  until  you  are  due  west  from  the  northeni* 
most  land  of  Antigua ;  thence  steer  for  Ship's  Stern  Point,  and  so  run,  until,  be- 
ing somethifig  to  the  south  of  Fort  H  imilton,  you  may  haul  by  the  wind,  or 
shape  the  most  convenient  course  to  gain  the  anchorage. 

The  Channel  between  Qwidaloupe  arid  AntigiM  is  most  excellent,  and  does  not 
offer  the  least  danger.  •    • 

The  Channel  between  Antigua  and  Barbuda,  on  the  contrary,  is,  at  times,  dan- 
gerous, particularly  between  May  and  November,  during  which  season  no  one 
should  pass  through  it,  because  there  are  many  calms  in  it,  alternating  with  very 
heavy  squalls  of  wind;  and,  as  the  depth  of  the  channel  is  so  unequal,  and  the 
bottom  frequently  rocky,  an  anchov  cannot  be  let  go  when  the  calms  come  on, 
and  the  risk  is  incurred  of  being  driven  upon  the  rocks,  either  on  one  side  or  the 
.other,  bjf  currents  that  may  occasionally  prevail  here.  ,^ 


i;- 


Montserrat  and  Redondo, 


There  is  no  harbour  in  the  island  of  Montserrat,  and  the  greater  part  of  the 
4:oast  is  so  encompassed  with  rocks,  as  to  render  riding  dangerous,  in  case  of  a 
hurricane  or  tornado.  The  principal  roadstead  is  off  the  town,  and  there  are  two 
«  others,  shown  in  the  chart,  namely  Old  Road  and  Kef  8  Bau ;  but  in  all  these  a 
.,3urf  beats  continually  on  the  shore :  large  heavy  goot^  i  are  ther'^fore  landed  and 
shipped  by  means  of  a  boat,  called  a  Moses,  mannLi  by  expert  rowers,  who, 
when  they  see  what  is  termed  a  lull,  or  abatement  or  the  surge,  push  ashore, 
and  lay  me  broad-side  of  the  Moses  on  the  beach,  so  as  to  roll  out  or  admit,  the 
hogsheads,  &cc.  Cotton,  rum,  and  other  commodities,  which  will  bear  the  wa- 
ter, are  generally  floated  off  or  ashore. 

It  has  been  recommended  to  those  who  lie  near  this  island,  when  the  state  of 
the  atmosphere  indicates  an  approaching  tornado,  to  get  under  way  for  Antigua 
or  St.  Christophers,  according  to  the  wind  and  other  circumstances. 

The  Spanish  description  says,  "  Montserrat,  which  lies  nearly  S.  S.  E.  and 
N^  N.  W.  is  a  great  rock  formed  by  two  mountains :  the  N.  E.  part  is  remarka- 
bly high,  scarped  or  cliffy,  and  clean.  The  island  has  not  the  smallest  bay,  nor 
any  breakers,  except  the  break  upon  the  very  shore,  which  you  may  come  so 
near  as  almost  to  touch  it  without  the  least  risk,  the  N.W.  point  is  also  high 
and  scarped,  (or  cliffy)  and  bluff.  The  highest  parts  of  the  island  may,  in  clear 
Weather,  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  fifteen  leagues.  The  S  E.  part  is  higher 
than  the  N-  W.  but  it  has  a  gentler  declivity,  and  where  it  joins  the  sea,  is  rather 
low:  the  south  part  is  also  very  dean ;  but,  when  the  6r««;e  wuth-easts,  the  sea 
breaks  upon  it  with  much  force.  The  road  is  an  opening  of  some  depth,  which 
affords  shelter  only  when  the  breeze  is  N.  E.  This  renders  it  impossible  for 
large  vessels  to  anchor  in  it,  and  none  frequent  it  bul^some  small  ones,  to  carry 
Mray  the  produce  of  the  island,  which  they  take  to  Antigua. 
W  REDONDA,  which  lies  three  leagues  to  the  W,  W*  from  the  north  end  of 


.-  u 


BLUNT'f  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


d21 


the  north  tack, 
ck,  to  within  a 

essary  to  give  a 
extend  west  al- 
art  of  which  is 
thi-^;  you  must 
,  north  of  tliat, 
nay  steer  north, 
I  you  ms»y  haul 

•at  St.  John's, 
that  is,  avo'diPi 
jth,  a  little  ea^t- 
m  the  northerii* 
10  run,  until,  be- 
)y  the  wind,  or 

it,  and  does  not 

3,  at  times,  dan- 
\i  season  no  one 
mating  with  very 
unequal,  and  the 
calms  come  on, 
»n  one  side  or  the 


|{ 


^,  ■"■■ 


eater  ^Jart  of  the 

jrous,  in  case  of  a 

land  there  are  two 

jut  in  all  these  a 

'ftfore  landed  and 

jert  rowers,  who, 

fee,  push  ashore, 

out  or  admit,  the 

Iwill  bear  the  wa- 

,vhen  the  state  of 
way  for  Antigua 
iances. 

Irly  S.  S.  E.  and 
1.  part  is  reraarka- 
amallest  bay,  nor 
^ou  may  come  so 
[point  is  also  high 
land  may,  in  c]ear 
T:.  part  is  higher 
the  sea,  is  rather 
4th-eastSt  the  sea 
jme  depth,  which 
it  impossible  for 
lall  ones,  to  carry 

the  north  end  of 


Montserrat,  is  a  very  high,  round,  barren,  and  uninhabited  rock,  having  the  ap- 
pearance of  a  hay-ceck,  and  which  may  be  seen  from  the  distance'of  mne  or  ten 
leagues.  There  is  anchorage  on  the  west  side  of  it,  in  the  depth  of  U  fathomi, 
Tou  may  approach  the  isle  on  either  side,  it  being  steep-to.     On  the  S.  E>  tide 


IS  a 


1  may  approach  the  isle  on  either  side,  it  being  steep-to. 
little  iaiet,  nailed  the  Pinnacle,  which  is  nearly  joined  to 


the  lend. 


•n 


,v 


1' 


;.',  *• 


^" 


^ 


:ei  or 


Birds*  Island. 
"^8  little  vlitary  isle,  which  takes  its  name  firom 


*9? 


^f^whiph  iMa^alwais  covered,  lies,  accordinj;  to  the 
|{»«>50^iih|^  long.  6^043'.  Itise 


•inulptude  of  lea-fowl, 
iisb  chart,  in  latitude 


,ed  by  a  sandy  ^eo^; 
anbes.; 


andhas  some 
-  _       ,^-_jd^Aut  toe  short dii 
T^*len|th  |i  Jiitovit  tHVee  caSil 
,.  /  ^    -^^Q  helghUs  r  •^ 
of  it||jferdisg( 
s  of  l^atc; 


^J^pm  eait  t%ve9t» 
^%Jt  the  ^eSMJi-n  p&rt 


extremely  low,  iind  sur 
ii^be  mldjpUe  iiiria  iiomewhet^ygber  than  at  its  ej 
There  4<^  r^^i^in  <>l.4l^  eno^.  W.  iMes,  whi^  ei 
taDceHaitd  W.litiui  i..e  e^i  alway;e  breaks. 
fronKitoriltoioutb^and  neatly  tJ||^|m^J 

Ml?  Of  l&/eet  abi^i^'the  level  tj^imidtaf,^'^  ,, , 

I,  ajpeltermm  the  see,  where^alHI^JH^  ^ae^  aiicho|;Jivli)  or  l£  ibth^ 
IKrajihdy  Mtom.    Thk^SlaAi^itey  be  seen." iti||||iBr  day,  at  tpSfe^and  a  haf 
or  war  ]^9f^'M  od;  huttib&^flightcif  tpbiKds,  at'^ptetting  ^jf  thejmp,  ijcillalWaya 
p6i*  out  its  sHiWtioiis  te*^  *       ->   *    4  **^  '    i^  ' 

V  Faither  Lam^lifmtWtt  there  is  encshprage  on, the  S.'^^L^de.  at  half^  pistol- 
Ihot  from,  shore,  in  SP^  laihoms,  whive  sancU,^  He  adcfai.'inHI  is  neither  piond  nor  ' 
-.      ^     A  -4    ..     ,    .    ......  -iKbydte^thedls. 

,^,_  _  _^  .. ,  .  barren  poeks^wnMlmitli  the 

dun^f  birdst^hlchiiesort  there!    Tbe«|e  i3lap;.d%ai'e  co^e^ed  tdi'^Afbs  by  shoaJ# 
and  breakers,  which  may  he  seen.  w  *      JL'        •%«,  -'  ^ ' 

}t,  Btr.  James  t'inlaisoB^l  R.  N.)  describesihe  I^W  Aves,  as1roIlow»i^".The  ... 
sland  of  Av^ies  »»uaS#^°,^  N.  >Q|B^|89'83'jr.  Tariation  4°  BO'  J^.  it  is  af  * 
^Ipw  si^lLisiahdj,1bl^u^pP^^uarteiB  o^^^       m^Ai^nyth ;  you  wi^Mt  fee  it'^ 
Warther^owhan  sjx  or  eignt  tn|[es ;  br6,ken  titter  extends  j[rom.  both  enaS'  or  tt^^ 
island,  atouit  ^alf'i^  mile  fromlt.    Ships  must  be  c^eftil  liAt  lliif y  d&  fkeep»  Aeaw  ' 
._..-_  _,?i^i ... .  *^    It  la  i^pjrtpble  to  efeelt,  b^ipjg  so  very  low. ; 


tlji^p^jl^llel,  in  the  ni^ht-time,^ 

there  IS  aslightVovenn^  of  gr^s 

_iu*The  pAsition  of  A^b,  as  giV.ei 


if«The  pfifiition  (rf  Atob,  as  giyen  in jM-^Frenw  Ta^^  15O80feaf8"N 

IffJ  38>  ir  W."  ifhrmfeaft  oT  tfifi  tl|^  flftteWferits  is  19°  40'  N.  apd  630  8 
^pqsfUv«idetchpinaepifcse%i9^^^  ^^,    '  « 


i^' 


.W  {ifk.,    «£ 


«r-. 


.».V 


pupe,.    ^ 


.the 


4 


art^nd  the 


.t  Tne  forili  of  Ckiadaloupe  is  very  imi^^l^,  as  shown 
HrvA  is  divided  into  twoi^partr^  by  UD'ann  of  the,  sea,  etfHedlie|t|viere  Sake,  or 
Bait  River;  s^ stream  dimiaisfe||ig^1n  wTdi^dRmm  50  ^19  fot%ms,4ind  of  which 
^  the  soundings  arc  iasqrae  places  deep  enottglr  for  a' sb^:  of  ^re  hundred  tons, 
%  whilst,  in^tthi^l.  there tf8q|j|^y%af#  enough<for  a  baric  of  Mtj.  *a^  leitgth 
ofjj^his  Btra^is  abou(  t|TO\Jiifuel^,,  aAd  no*sceaa,ean  be  more  pheasant  than  the 
piisage ;  the  water  being  dfear  and  jtttU,  ^o4;i^^»imk8.<Qiveadh  aide  lined  with 
mangrovelii  and.  palmettwi;  whicb<affS9|>ft  excdiMl  refreahuient  «|id  shelter  from 
t^eheat.  >     #^:       A    jte     % /^  1;   *  P  .• 

T^ritwesterrfdivisidifi  dt  theislani''"^--'^-  ^^ -'- ^  -^  '-  -'---'^'-'« 

two  parts,  by  a  ridge  of  Mry  hig^  n 
80  high  iiifdeed^hat  tho^p' 
useless  ]b-u^  covered  wi 


eh  IB  the  mo^t  Important,  is  divide^  i 

meitq|aifts,  extending  north  and  soulh ; 

il  ^old^sufTerlpli^n^  to^grow  Imt  fern,  andsMDe 

Tpv^fds  tbieiij^jith  point  thm  appears^  innpe 


41 


H. 


,liL" 


; 


»4    . 


v»* 


522 


BLUNT's   AMERICAN   COAST    riLOT. 


Mk 


jniddl«  ragloa  of  tb«  air,  a  moantain  called  La  Souffkkre,  or  the  Sulphur  Hill, 
which  it  about  5,500  feet  in  height,  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  This  mountain 
exhales  a  thick  black  smoke,  mixed  with  sparks,  visible  in  the  ni|ht.  From  the 
mountains  flow  rr:.\ny  streams,  that  carry  fruitfulness  into  the  plains,  and  attem- 
Dor  the  burning  air  of  th«  climate. 

The  eastern  divisioi^of  the  inland,  distinguished  by  the  name  of  Grande  Terre, 

^as  not  been  so  much  favoured  by  nature  as  the  western  part ;  indeed  it  is  lese 

rough,  anr*.  mor<;  level,  but  it  wants  sr-'  -~s  and  rivers;  the  soil  more  sandy  b 

noil  so  fertile,  nor  is  its  climate  si>  /.    Its  principal  town,  Port  a  Petrtf 

or  St.  Louis,  is  a  piac#of  consideraiu.ti  ..ade. 

Tlie  chief  town  of  Guadaloupe  is  that  named  Baate  Terre,  rftuated  on  tha^ 
west  side,  he^  the  south  end  of  the  island. 

The  English  ship  Tev^le,  being  at  anchor  at  Basseterre  Road,  hald  the  western- 
most part  of  the  Sain^  and  some  part  of  the  western  side  of  DominiM  in  one, 
.tbei^g  S<  E.  by  S.  ^Montserrat,  at  the  same  time,  bore  N.  \^,  nortlimirly,  and 
*tbe  westernmost  parTof  Basseterre  Bay  M.  W.  by  N.  distirtit  ohe  miW         "*  "■ 
%'9he  Flare,  Frendh  frigateq^eing  itidored  N.  N.  E?.  and  S.^^W.  in  Oiis  i^d, 
iiVl77!2,  in  7  fathoOill  sandy  ground,  and^l)4r  small  adcbor in  S7  fathomi  lipiilar   ^ 
fpoundfliad  the  following  bearings  by  compass :— The  forrto  the  S.^W.  df  th|L*„ 
town  8.  BAy  E.  the  church  N.  E.  the  N.  W.^iHd  of  the'towb  N.  by  W.  Poii^ 
Irois  N.  N.nNT.  and  the  southernmost  point  of  tij^miniea,  S.  E.  by  S^  "K* 

Should*you  b*  bound  froii^'the  road  of  Basseterre  to  Anti|;ua,  the  best  way 
is  to  weigh  at  night,>-ieind  sjtH  a^  such  a  distance  from  tte  shore  as  to  keep  the  land 
wind,  that  it  msf  carry  f  ou  to  the  northern  part  of  theK/ismiiid  by  morning,  where 
you  wiN  have  the  d^M^ind  to  carry  you  aliiross.  Should  ylliii  act  otherwise,  yoH 
may  be  caught  by  thVoaflling  windl  from  under  the  high  jjBtnda. 


QIT  the  N.  W.  point  of<^uadaloupe.tl^e  is  a  smtdl  but  remarkable  high  rock, 
callf|d  1|b^,«iiifl(  j4n^(oi«,  cr  Engli$hmon*»ntiad ;  it  appeal 
^distioguisn^  t^s  coas^  and  theite  Is  no  passage  within  it. 


appears  gray,  and  partieularly 


H» 


^  S 


A 


♦v.* 


Jw 


[From  the  Derroteto  de  la$  Antillat,  tfc]  * 

*    '  .  1.  *     '  *'  ' 

ThisJsland,  t|i9  mountains  of  wnich  may  bf  seen,  in  clear  weigher,  i^t  the  ifts- 
^UAice  of  j^wenjy' leagues,  is  divided  into«t#o  tdmost  equal  parts,  by  a  channel 
j|i|£igable  sdlely  for  boa^  and  etihpes.    The  east€fn  pArtititt«med  Graud  Terri39|L. 
aralthe  we^rn^part  is  subUiviiled  inljp  tWK),  Hy  tiro  mountains :  the  east-  being. 

Ktem'^The  ^pital  of  this  island  is 

sterJni':paft  otGrtmde  Terre,  and  at  the 

'  lannel^wnibh  sefiarates  it  from  Gab«« 

liheltered,  and  vessHs  which  havi^  to 

ain  al^  Guadaloupe"  winter  iiHiijilj^l^n  th#^rricane  seast^n,- it  is  nece|sary  ^ 

»  a  pilot  to  iak^his  anchorage^ -^^If  bound  **»  '*^*  ^*"'  "■"»«•»*"'  tnnrai.*!  *ka 


$^the  we^rn  part  is  subUivided  m 
named  Qm^  Te)m,>»nd  the  We^t 
St.  Louaflir  Point  a  Piii^  oi*lhe 
south  entrance  of  the  Rivierre  S|lel|'< 
Terre.    The  anchoi^age  of  .PoinlwBiti 

h 


ragf^«^If  bound  tf^r  ]pl>u  proceed  toward  the 
toWn  of  St.  Loui9,  Itakicg  care  t^||kp  get  to  the  l|esti)f  it,  but  keeping  ty  the 
southiwrd  aim  eastward :  that  is,  ^i  must  make  it  to  the  north-west  of  you. 

Onine  S.  W.  P#Dt  of  Bassciterre,  stands  the  town  of  the  same  name,  which 
is  the  most  cqnsid^rable  in  the  isiandit  aiid  the  centre  of  its  commerce;  this  is  the 
reason  why  it  is  generaUgr  :.^:orted  to!.  The  andhorage  here  is  a  very  incommo- 
dious unsheltered  roadstead,  wiliere  tiiereis  a  con|^nlr|]W€ll :  its  boMNa,  at  thC 
edge,  is  so  steep,  that  at  two  ca\j|)e6'  leng^  frofan  f^  sHOTe,  there  ai%80  and  UM) 
fathpms.  The  ground  is  notfl^od,  and  tbes^  circupistances  make  it  necessary 
to  keep  close  to  the  shore,  anffjet  go  one"^  a^iMhor  in  SO  or  30  fathon^»  on  clay, 
and  hang  to  it;  ^ithout  lettipg  go  an»thlM|that,you  nHy^be  reiidy  to  make  s^  < 
Aie  moment  thaUwinds  from  the  S.  E.  qwlter  come  on.  ' 

From  the  anchorage  of  Basletme  y6u  m^  approaek  as  near  to<he  jrest  coast 
as  jou  choose,  s6  far  to  the  nq|lhWard  as  the  bill  noWd  Gfro*  Afonir,,which  is 
th|N.W.  extremity  of  this  furt  of  th«  Island,    Jl 


%* 


4> 


blunt'i  ambrican  coast  pilot. 


323 


dtuated  on  iStitT 


# 


Erery  one  bound  to  Guadaloupe  ought  to  make  the  louth  part  Qf  \U  for  the 
principal  commercial  ports  ure  on  it :  if  hound  to  Point  a  Pitre,  you  ought  to 
approach  within  two  miles  of  the  south  coast  of  Grande  Terre,  and  Continue  atf 
that  distance  to  the  Point  and  Bay  of  Fergeaut,  on  which  is'the  towD  of  St.  Louis, 
whence  you  ought  to  talce  a  pilot  to  earry  you  into  PoAilNi  Pitre.  f 

On  this  coast  there  are  two  roadsteads,  with  towns  at  tirem,  the  firsts  called  SC^^ 
franeoia,  and  the  second  St.  Anne*a:  between  the  last  and  Fort  LoutI,  there  if* 
another  town,  a  little  island,  named  Le  Gosier,  which  i8*nearl|r  north  from  an 
Island  of  the  same  name;  from  this  islet  to  the  West,  in  llwiut  two  miles  of  i!h« 
coast,  are  6  or^  fathoms  of  ^ater.  T    j>       . 

'*  If  bound  toVort  Royal,  or  Basseterre,  direct  your  course  u  a|  t4,  approach 
Cabes  Terre  about  Point  St.  Sauveur ;  then  follow  ^e  coait,  at  the  distance 
of  a  mile  or  thereabouts,  and  pass  about  half  a  cables*  length  from  Point  du 
Vma  fyrt,  or  Old  Fbrt  Point,  which  is  the  sotlthernmo^biot  of  Petit  Teri^p, 
•and  lu(^1||>  imnopdiately  when  round  it,  in  order  to  kwpM  the  same  disfat^p, 
of  half  a  jiables  ^ngth  frqju  the  coast,  unil)i  you  axp  qppesijte  the  town,  whcjrt^ 

you  puisf  anchor.  ..  -  #>*       *t »  "^ 

It O|j|ght«o«be  obseored  timt,  wheniiaiffng  either  totbe  aortnWard  or  southward 
ytt^  leewara  of  Oui)|dsra|ipe,  you  fM^t  to  keep  within  two  miles  of^e^shori^i ' 
CI.  by  doing  so,  you  may  hav^^£advantago  of  a  light  land -breezellihicl^ will 
liflklmost  always  sufficienC  to  ^|w  it  before  day  ^  but,  getUne  faftner  off  t^e 
coist,  ft  is  no  uncommon  thjng  to  be  four  or  five  days  libsolutetylroealmed.    Any    . 
one  who  is  not  able  to  ge^t^ar  the  land  of  Guadaloupe.  that  is,^  within  the  dis-    - 
tance  of  two  miles,  must  polkively  pai^at  seven  freight  Iq^igues  from  it  ta  a  v^id 
the  calms.  '    *    '  ' 


I. 


'€*i' 


^ 


'  -The  Saintes,  Marie-Galante,  Pesirade,  he.    '  * ' 

These  Island  are  dependencies  of  Ggidliloupe,  from  which  IslaricT,  Marte- 
Galante,  the  principlj||rli  el|ren  miles  i|U|l|nt.    The  chijtnqds  between  lU«<n^ra 
llbieraliyj^r  and^eep.  .  ^  ^  •   /       j.  •• 

^THE  STftNTES^-The  assemblage  of  little  islands,  called»tl?e  Saintcsf  ftr 
Saints,  weHfe  so  denominated '        "      '  ~  ..      .     _ 


id  from  having  Been  disc«prered  by  the  Spaniards 
alLm^-to,  ai^dso  happiry  arrangeftas  to  form  a% 
intbelieHUibow'hoo^    ,f  '^      * 


All 

on  K!^  faints'  Bagr.    They  are 

fii^e  a  road  for  shipping  as  any  in  thelleHUibow'hoo^  "J 

JTThe  twoMlargestfislandi  ure  ^lled^trre^en  Imuf,  of.the  Upper  Land,  and^^ 
TVrre  d'en  Jfc»,  or  the  Lmeef  I^anS  %h&Arst  is  the  easCernm6fet,  atll  contains 
the  town  or  rfither.ViHtige,  whieh  is  situat^^jfabut  halfway  flown,  onkagfestern 
side..  Between  thji  toWjo  and  a  sma^  islanij^the  N.  W  is  the  anehoraP,  ^hich 
is  nearly  half  a  mile  brobd,  ahd  l|aai«  dq^lilft  Mto  14J 10,  aqd  6  fathoms:  On 
the  T^re  d'en  Bas  is  a  neat  w»o^n  xhurch.«[h  tVo  (Convenient  er^eks  fbr 
anchoragf  and  la^n^f.    ,^    ^    J^^      ff^       '    '   '     ,^     _ 


The  islands  hava  constantly  j||tosfa  teeezeflettbe  wind  bla^om^wtiat  qu 
teritipay*  \  /    fT  '         „   .^    .-.'.^v   •    'Jife     '  '' 

On  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  upfd^r  island  i»  a  mountain,  called  Mowit  deFUles, 
the  summit  of  which  is  818  feet  aho^  the  jevel  orthe  $ea ;  and  which  is  t!*re- 
fore,  a  proper  stttion  fora  slgnal-^ost.  To  theN.  W.  pf  jthls  mountain,  on  the 
n(^th  coast  of  this  islam,  is  a  remarkaKle  prpmontc^,  dAled  the  Sugar  Loaf, 
.VtRich  serves^as  a  -niide  ta^shiwkcojmirig;  in  ft-omlFhe  northward;  for,  bearing 
S.  \y;.  by  S.  itrleads  betweS^A  i^k,  called^the- Wkofc,  and  a  bank  Mng  more  to 
the  north-westwai-d,  at  th«  entrance  of  the  chaonoljiivithin  whichflups;nay  hatll 
round  to  th«#oad.  ."' ,  *^  -i 

In  passiag  out  hance  to  the  westiSl^r<|Psep|bTer  towards  the  sauth  shore,  ^   J 

der  to  avoid,a  shoal  Which  lies  at  tbfr  distance  dfiA  cable's  leneth  from  the  . 


order  to  avoid,  a  shoal  Which  lies  at  tbWHIst'ance  dfi,a 
south  point^f  the  island  to^e  north -wesfward^^ 

It  is  said^at  there  is  a  Mift^ock  lyifg  alaild  and  a 
or  gies«.u|ndi,  of  which  We  ig^^lars  ar«  un^om 


x^ 


,*• 


•9 


tRlni( 


length  from  the 
half  to  the  nort^jprard* 


<..  ~ 


924 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


MARIE  OALANTE.— The  land  of  Marie  Galanto  is  of  moderate  height, 
and  it  rises  gradually  towards  the  north.     On  the  south  and  eastern  sides  are 

<^veral  sunken  rocks  and  dangerous  reefs,  some  of  which  extend  nearly  a  lea(;ue 
to  sea ;  but  the  western  side  is  a  faii-  shore,  with  good  anchorage  in  several  pla- 
ces. The  town,  BlKSMlj^rre,  which  is  protected  by  a  fort,  stands  on  the  S.  W. 
point  of  the  island.     'C  , 

•  Along  the  eust^rit  shore  are  lofty  perpen'^tcular  rocks,  that  shelter  vast  num- 
tusrsof  tropical  {^Ifda..  The  western  shore  is  flat,  and  the  ground,  in  general,  ia 
proper  for  cultivationi^  It  haMeveral  large  caVerns,  where  crabs  are  found  with 
many  UttleAtreaiiM  and  pondrof  fresh  water.  -^  .       * 

.  DESII\ADE  or  DE8EADA.*— This  is  ajimall  rocky  islandildestitute  l)Oih 
ttf  wdod  and  freih  water,  but  whereon  sonie  cotton  is  cultivated. ''The  island 
Ms  nearly  E.  N.  E.  aiid  W.  S.  Yt:  shaped  like  i^galley,  :he  eastern  end  making 
like  the  head  or  prow,  and  the  Weitem  end  like  the  tilt.  Bnt,  on  advancing  to* 
illta^s  the  north  side,  some  white  broken  patches  will  appear,  like  heapH  of  aandi 
with  red  streaks  in  them.    On  this  ^e  there  arr  aom^  rocks  under  water, 

^  There  is  anchorage  oiFlh(^.  W.  fart,  at  a  mile  and  a  naif  firom  soro«  hpusea 
tandinc  near  theslmre.  'i^may  ancHbr  in  from  5  to  7  futhoras««f  wat^  tak- 
'  ffig  cai#  to  look  out  (or  a  clear  spot,  as  the  ground  js  roikf.    "When  at  anchor.  ^^ 
P«ti(|  Terp  will  bear  south,  easterly,  vnd  Point  Chuteank  W.  by  S.  The  latter 
is  th^eastlrnmost  ^oint  of  Guadaloupe,  and  may  be  known  by  a  hummock  on  it. 
Bttwecn  it  and  De^irade  there  are  2S  and  stf  f&thoms  of  water. 

*  PETITB  TERRS'  is  a  small  sandy  island,  dividod  into  two  parts  by  a  shal- 
'  low  channel.    It  lies  directly  in  the  Air* way,  or  in  i  line  between  the«astern 

CO  At  (i(  Marie  Galan^e  and  the  isle  Desinrae.'  Captain  Bishop  has  said,  '*  There 
is'dretty  good  anchoring  by  Petite  Terrc,  to  the  westward,  at  two  miles  from 
sholl,ip  7  fathoms  of  water."'       m      ,-  *       \  ^    >  ,*••    ^^ 

•  .*  Thejsland  of  TioTtAtncny  ;"    ' 

^das,  properly  speaking,  no  harbour,  but  there  is  g<<bd  atid  i^fe  anchorage 
aloDff  the;  >veij|tt;rn  side,  all  of  whicJt  is  bold.    Ships  a^e,.|iow ever,  exposed  to 
wfl^rly^inds,  as  in  the  other  islands ;  but  those  winds  prevail  only  in  the  wiiij||)i 
„terJM0nth8.  *  *•      '  -    ^       '     ^'  *'^ 

*ne  chief  town  is  that  called  Rafeau,pr  Charlotte  Town,  on  the  S.  W.  side  of 
the  island. 


Ihe  island.    In^ts  roa^.vessels  may  anchor  infifrom  15  to.S5  fatk^^s,  g^ood  hdid 
ftgground.f  , '        A  \  , Hf    -  ^  ^ 

Between  three  anCrfourtuiles  from  the  Aorth  ifhd  lie<^  noble  bay,  called  Prmdi 


Rupert's  Bj|^,  frofn  the  famous  Prin(>B'llu|iert?s  anchonns  there ;  which,  b'esideti 
its  safety,  Its. mafnitudn,  the^  depth  ofmvater,  and  the  goodness  of  th<$  anchorage, 


ri^nnin^^^ 


it.     (Ueets  ^estined  to 

in  tnis  bay,  for^the 

ex- 


has  the1^vanta^e<)f  threo  fresh  ri^lets 

other  ^arts  of  the  West  indie&  cotriln<{tri|y  co\pe  4. ^..■' ^.-  ..~j,  .».  ^>. 

purpose  of»8upplying  thopoAelvei  with,  wood  and  water,  f^r  whidi  there  4r9  e 
cellent  conveniences.  '  ' '% '^        '  '  '•  1       *' 

l^cot'sHeaa,  or  .point  CacftAbrotii  the  south  pdi^f  tlominiea,  is  a  hi^' rock, 
liavingaflag$faff  on  it,  which,  fi'oipiNf  distance,  9|Hh;s  like  an  island. 

The  town , of  Roseau  is  abcjyjtsix^miles  to  the  lui^pnwal'd  of  Scot's  Head,  and 
will  be  readily  discerned  wheliniiling  along'^shore.    Merctuint-ships  generally  an'^  ^ 
chor,  in  the  i/lty  off  the  south  «pd  of  the  town,  but  ships^f  war  in  the  smaller 
bay  to  the  northward,  called  WuTodhritlglf  Bay,  abreast -am  gibbet  erected  near" 
the  beach,  and  appearing  on  tvflti'^the  niiddle  of  a^laijge  cane-iield.    To  cornip  t^ 

'  %  ■      ■  '    '  ,  '  ;  '      ■  ■ 

*  Fropeicly  Desi^ada :  it  was  t|[ie  first  land  ithlcli  Colotabo  made  on  his  secoad  voyage  to 

America,  and  he  gave  it  the  name  of  th«  Verired  Island,  beoAulb  he  had  for  a-^ng  time  tSs- 

jTore  been  heating  about  in  this  vast  tra^||pf  «tt|^rs,  without  seeing  any  thing  pi^  sea  and 

t  This  ia.the  description  fo^nerl^r  given,  hat  Mr.  fiachhonse  describes  as  {f/thvra :  "TUbrdf 
k  no  danger  in  going  in,  ^d  there  arc  6ianl7  fathoms  at  half  a  cable's  length  -A'bm  -  shore.  ^ 
Yau  hqUMe  anchor  f-  "   -°  '-'^ —    -"^    -^^^  '-  "■ '  -■•-Aj* ft  i-j  .-Jk-^ii.    «»«. 

cMringlnrk  is  i 


V**» 


:hor  in  7  or  e  fat^ma,  the  otlpl^  in  .46  fatttodii^^erf  had  'gmmMt^  The  an- 
to  bring  the  foTllN.  £."  '  A  "      M         % 

4# 


m 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILUY. 


«26 


hummock  o>iMt« 


ir 


an  anchor  here,  run  in  under  cany  Bail,  nearly  o)ipositfl  to  the  gibbet,  and  let  f^o 
the  moment  you  get  proper  soundings. 

The  course  and  distance  from  Roseau  to  Prince  Rupert's  Bay  are  nearly  N. 
N.  W.  Bfiventeen  miles.     The  coast  between  is  g«!m:rally  hold  and  st<M'p. 

BARBaDOES  to  DOMINICA,  &tc.— If  you  are  bmrndUo  Dominica  from 
Barbfdoes,  you  must  steer  N>  N.  W.  tilt  you  have  p:)»8e#Martiuique,  and  u  N.^ 
W.  course  will  then  cany  you  to  the  northward  of  Dominiftt.^  Leaving  IVfarie^ 
Oalante  ohithe  slDrboard  side,  haul  up  close  in  with  the  nortlf  f^int  of  Dominica  t 
Tou  will  fee  a  round  bluff  inaking*like  an  island,  a|jomu  distance.;  go  round  that 
bluQ^  and  you  open  the  Imy ;  turn  into  the  north  pOTt,  and  anchor  in  7, 8,  or  9  fa- 
thoms. You  ^1  see  the  mouth  of  a  large  r|ver,  which  ai^chor  to  the  northward 
of,  half  a  rfkilcv  and  you  will  be  opi^osite  to  a  small  rivcrf  which  y6u  watar  a)* 
the  best  in  th^  bay;  the  great  river  Ih  brackish.  There  is  another  river  to  tkt 
southward,  where  you  may  anchor  in  6  fathoms,  clear  ground ;  butin  10  fathonffe 
47QU  will  l^kve  coral  rooks.  X^ 

Th^  north  ^oint,  above  referred  to,  is  th%^  called  Cave  Mdville ;  and  the  bluiT 
'  is  Pripce  Rupert'^  Healf^  which  forms  the  nfVrth  si^  ^L^^*^  ^'"^^'f'  f 

When  tuf4ioginto  the  bay,  its  southdin  side  wilWdl'llR  sight;  which  is  a  tow 
point,  with  a  remai^krfble  high  hill  over  it,  called  Rolld's  Heful  and  Hill.  Prihca 
Rupert's  Head,  on  the  north  side*  is  distinguished  bv  two  fortified  bills,  culbd 
the  Cabrits,  which  are  conkiectcd«  to  the  Kiaio  by  a  low  marshy  necfi.  Jifl  the 
bottom  of  the  bay,  which  is  a  mile  deea,  is  the  town  of  Portsmouth,  consisting 
of  houses  irregularly  placedU  westwijira  of  Portsmouth,  on  a  rising  ground  at 
the  innar  part  o^  the  marslr^hicb  «5nu«ct8  the  Cal^rits  to  the  main,'  there  is  a 
small  plantation,  called  Cotton  Hill,  vmh  a  few  small  house.8'  Over  the  t<fhrn 
appear  two  hiffh  sugar-ldaf  hills,  to  the  southward  oftwhirh  tsahigh  mountaki, 
whose  summing  involved  in  (;|ouds.  To  the^iouthward  of  Pqftamouthaativiie 
distance  of  nearhra  mile'and  a  half,  and  on  low  g||j^und  near  4he  bea^h  J||[  pUn- 
tatioD,  called  PWxrde.  Eatatti^n^  nearly  midway  between  Picarde  |$s!Xe  and 
Rolla's  Hertd  is  aiftpe  plantation,  called  that  of  3l^ra2^/^n.  *^  '  ' 

Nearly  mtd^ny  between  Portsmouth  and  Picard<j,E8tate,  in  the  valley  on  ti|^ 
southern  side  jpf  tifc  two  sugar-lonf  hills  that  appear  over  the  town,  is  the  rfvcr 
called /ndi«nJ8iw!r,''ii«*ich  falls  into  the  bay.  ^  ,         ^i' ^ 

{■HVhea  workingjpto  the  bay,- you  (nay  stand  boldly  over,  Q-om  sidl^to^e, 
which  is  a'  distance  gf  nearljutbree  miles.  The  bay  is  rather  wore  thim  a  juilo 
dee|».  •  Prince  ilupert's  Head  and  Rulla'S  Head  are  both  so  -steep,  that  eithfc^  ' 
may  be  apjpro»c|)fid  to  the  dietance*of  a  shij>'9  length.  "When  off  Mount  Allen, 
you  may  stand  tojprards  it -so  as  to  bring  a  amgle  tamarind-ti;ee,  Which  stands.to 
,JI^  northward  of  the  raidiUiB.of  ^ortsMOMjth,  on  with  <h§  highest  land  behind  it., 
»ou  may  stand  toward^  Picarde  Estaj»,  yWil^a  little  hill  to  the  wdi|k  begins  to 

^,,  of 
Cot- 


»  f 


Frpm  the  inn|^r.parW>f  the  CJabrits,  round  thffbayfliji  thetwestern  ■♦ide  of  tJio 
cultlvatefl  partof  Moont  ^llen  Estate,  a  ilfcelf  stre^shes  from  the  hooch,  w\\\<  H 
is,  in  general,  a (itaWe^sleoigthttpad ;  off  Indiap.Rfll^r  it  is  a  cable's 4ength  amiijik 
half ;^at about  that  distaricajer^  are  rf fathl^s' of  water;  thenc#<t  gradually 
dfeepens  to  5,  7,  and  10  fatho^,  and  then  suddejUr,  to  ♦S,  ao,  and  25  fathoms. 
The  clearest  ground  is  in  the  shoal  water ;  for  w^out  the  de^)th  of  io  fatlloras, 
it  is  rocky.    The  best  anchorage  is  off  the  tamarind-tree,  as  abotejnentioned, 
•od  4^  coast  seen  over  the  low  land  wilWp  the  Cabrits  on  with  the  western  part 
^  of  €^on  Htll,  or  on  with  the  dfainrnt  the  westeW  etid  of  it.  ■  Slwiild  you  be  to 
*  the  southward  of  the  tamarind-tree,  you  must  »un  in  until  the  highest  ground 
"  onthe  wewern  side  of  the  cultivated  ^telft.ofMouVit  Allen  Plantatijnris  open  with- 
out the  werifern  side  ef  R8lfte»a  Hill.    With  eRhe^  of  these  marks  the  ground  is 
muddy,  Itna  the  dppth  is  from  9  to  i  tii^ortl^    There  is  anchor/ge  farther  oui, 
10  fro^  12  tou|0  fathoms,  fine  dark  sandy  bicittomfc,at  from  one  to  three  cable's 
jjength  fijonj  slftre,  with  tha(lamarind<.tree  E.  N.  E. 
^There  b- ge6d  ,fi*Hh&««ld  good,  hai^g  fSr  the  seinelhroughout  tlw  bay. 


T^  watj^of  iie  small  mors  ^yto 


\  hai^ 


rred,  thal^f  thclarger  being  bWbkish. 


<\, 


i 


H'l 


0 


326 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAIf   COABT   PILOT. 


Remarks  from  iht  Derroteroy  fyc. 

The  Derrotero  says,  that  Dominica  is  the  highest  of  all  the  Antillas :  it  has 
much  wood  and  is  very  fertile.  All  its  coasts  are  clean,  and  you  may  approach 
within  les^s  th|in  a  mi^^f  them.  On  the  west  coast  they  experience  great  calms, 
,  which  extend  six  mil£8  out  to  sea;  and  here  it  is  necessary  to  navigate  under 
moderate  sail,  and  with  much  cautidn,  on  account  of  the  heavy  guits  that  ab- 
ruptly proceed  from  the  openings  ^nd  valleys  of  the  mountains;  for,  if  caught, 
you  may  sustain  serious  damiige  from  them.  This  island  hss  neither  harboyr 
nor  secure  ancharages;  the  faiest  are  those  of  Roseau,  on  the  sc^ith  part  of  the 
west  coast,  and  Rupert's  Bay,  in  the  northern  part  of  the  same  coast ;  in  both 
rcwdltbads  they  anchor  at  less  than  two  cable's  length  from  the  shore,  and  in 
f^ont  of  the  towns :  there  is  no  need  of  instruction  for  gobg  to  them,  for  there 
Is^p  hidden  danger. 

After  what  has  been  said  of  the  calms  and  gusts  of  wi^  on  th^  west  side,  it  * 
seems  that  the  best  way  to  avoid  them  jvill  be  for  those  ^nd  to  Rupert's  Bay 
"to  make  the  north  part  of  Jh^island;  and  for  those  bound  to  Roseau,  to  malce 
the  south.    The  channel  between  Martii^que  and  this  island  blTerii  no  danger 
whatever,  and  the  currents  set  to  the  N.  W.  but^they  are  of  little  importance. 


«..  The  Island  of  Mdatin'iqjuj^ 

Martinique  is  about  twelvl  leagues  in  length,  and  lies  fh  W.  by  N.  and  S.  ^. 
by  1^.  Its  breadth  is  extremely  unequal,  and  scarcest  any  where  tnorie  than  four 
or  five  leagues ;  and  if  you  inchide'  the  promoptories,  which  pfoject  in  iqany 
places  one  or  two  leagues  Beyond  the  |0st  df  the  island,  its  circumference  will 
incluae^ove  80  leagues.  T^Iand  is  very  uneven,  and  every *where  intersect- 
ed «with  large  hummOcks,  in  tilie  form  of  sugar-loaves.  Thr<|A  mountains  rise 
above  these  innumerable  hummocks,  the  highest  of  which  has  been  a  volcano; 
imppears  like  he  crown  of  'a  bat,  and  may  be  plainl^^seen  fH-om  every  side  of 
the  island.  , 

1^  principal  towns  are  those  named  St.  Pieri^  (St.  Peter,)  find  Fort  Royal^ 
both  on  the  western  side,  q{  the  islflnd.  The  latter  w^ich  is  very  advipntageously 
situated,  near  an  excellent  harbour,  and  under  cover  ot  a  j^ninsula  entirely  oc- 
cup^d  by  a  fort,  is  the  residence  of  the  Goyemor.  It  stands  on  the  north  side 
of  t  deep  ba]^  called  Qtl  de  Sac  or  RoycU  Bay^  and  is  situfted  to  the  N.  W.  of 
the%rt.  A  little  harbour  on  the  east  q£  it  is  called  th^&arenog'e.  Here  are  all 
the  convi|niences  for  refi^ng  ships  of  wvr. 

On  efery  side  of  the  island  are  large  bays  containing  good  harbours  and  sandy 
coves,  but  some  of  them  do  not  aSbi€  protection  c|wpi£  the  hurricanes. 

The  DIRFCf  wid  TRUE  course  from  the  norOT^nd  of  Barbadoes  to  PoAU 
Salines,  the  south  ptjint  of  Martiniaue,  is  N.  W.  distance  31  leagues :  but "ure 
course  to  be  taken  should  be  N.  W."  by  N.  to  allow  for  a  lee-current.  Point  Sa- 
lines is  low,  and  has  off  it,  ^reCiropW  islets ;  when  these  bear  west,  you  may  see 
between  thcigjlind  the  pomt.  To  me  westward  or  the  islets,  there  are  several 
dangers.  m  v   ^^^ 

The  Diamond  Rock,  whicnUes  off  the  S.  W.  point  is,  according  to  the  de- 
scription of  Ctiptain  Heater,  about  twice  the  size  of  the  cupola  of  St.  Paul's  in 
London,  and  nearly  ashi|h.  To  the  N.  E.  of  it  'u  Great  Diamond  Cove.  There 
is  no  sailing  within  the  rock,  but  on  the  south  side  it  is  bold.  <  *      W^ll^ 

Ptint  SdtMt.        *  Dimnond  JZaeir.  ^ 


ii 


^AIortMfHC  tht  Diamond  faring  ir,  kg  m,<md  Point  Salinti  ditttmtttr  9  Uijgvth  ^ 


4 


#i 


BLUIfx'S  AMERICAN  COABT  PILOT. 


327 


Hating  math  the  Diamond,  the  course  thence  to  Port  Royal  Bay  is  N.  N.  W. 
3  leagues.  The  tract  is  free  from  danger,  and  the  shores  bold.  When  you  se« 
the  bay  open,  haul  up,  and  the  fort  viiM  be  in  sight ;  turn  up  towards  it  until  it 
bears  N.  by  E.  or  N.  when  you  may  anchor  on  a  bank  in  8  fathoms,  or  off  t^« 
bank  in  from  14  to  17  fathoms,  which  is  the  best  ground;^  The  b|pk  ha«  OQfeal 
on  it,  but  is  not  rocky.  •, 

Althougl^the  harbour  off  Port  Royal  is  included  among  the  be^  harbours  in 
the  Caribbee  Islands,  yet  it  is  so  impeded  by  several  keys  or  shoals  composed  of 
hard  gravel,  limestone,  and  coral,  that  no  stranger  should-^attempt  to  sail  among 
them  in  a  largct  ship.  There  is  a  ground  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  harbour, 
the  lower  end  of  which  lies  a  mile  and  a  half  below  the  fort,  whence  it  runs  to  a 
considerable  distance  above  it.  The  least  water  oh  this  bank  is  3  fathoms,  bdt 
on  either  side  are  from  10  to  20.  Belovir  this  ground  ships  may  stand  over  from 
side  to  side.  To  anchor,  you  may  bring  the  church  to  bear  northras  above-min- 
tioned;"  but  8|«er  directly  in,  as  a  bank  of  not  more  than  6  feet  of  water  lies  off 
tfauB  fort.  The  watertnE-place  is  River  j)Itfnsieur,  to  the  eastward  of  the  forf. 
The  tides  are  not  regulftr,  but  ther  never  rise  abov^  7  inches. 

Betifiten  the  Diamond  Rock  and  PortR^ai  Harbour,  there  are  three  small  coves, 
the  southernmost  of  which  is  called  Little  Diamond  Cove,  and  the  others  Grand 
and  Petite  Anee  d'  Arlet,  or  A/Iet  Coves*  Atthe  S.  W.  corner  of  the  harbour  there 
is  a  small  green  islet,  strongly  fortified,  called  lakt  Aur^Raimers,  or  Pigeon  Island, 
from  which  the  fort  bears  nearly  N.  by  E.  In  working  into  the  harbour,  ,.by  kei^ing 
the  lead  going,  and  having  wfathered  Pigeon  Island,  you  may  anchor  at  pleasure. 

Oft  the  So^h  Sideof^ig^on  Island  there  is  a  littlefoadstead  for  small  vessels. 
In  oMerto  gain  this  pUce,  those  #ho  are  well  acquainted  go  round  tne  N.  E}» 
point  of  the  islei,  ana  turn  ik*  The  south  shore  is  steep.  The  anchorage  Ues 
with  the  westorn  part  ot  thtii  isle  bearing  North,  N.  by  Vi,  or  N.?N.  W.-in^?,  8 
and  0  fathoms,  clear  ground.  BdcautiotA  of  ap^aching  to9  near  the  lilaiterQ 
shore,  as  a  banir  stretches  ffbnp^t,  which  breaks  with  a  great  swell.  ^  « 

PORTROTA'E  to  ST.  PIERRE.— The  N.  W.  point  of  Port  Royal  Har- 
bour is  low^  though  bold ;  and  Has  a  masked  battery  on  it.  To  the  N.  W.  df 
this  poiitft,  distant  a|>out  £  miles,  there  is  a  rivuilbt  of  fresh  water,  and  a  village 
called  Com  dea  Namrea,  off  which  there  is  excellent  anchorage,  from  abreas^of 
itfwesterningst  houses  to  abr^asrof  a  battery  eaist  of  it.  The  anchoring-ground, 
or  bank,  reaMee  only  to  the  distaiffte  of  a  cable's  length  and  a  half  ft>om  shoQe. 
Within  half  a  cable's  l^^th  of  the  beadh  the  water  is  shobl,  deepening  thence^o 
3  fathoms  oh  the  ^utef  ^art,  an<i  to  5;  7,  10,  15,  18  and  2$  futhoms^i  at  a  cable's 
length  distance ;  Off  the^lrattery  the  ground  is  ctei^n,  softei^gto  soft  ihud  abreast 
of  the  westernmost  housesitvW.ithout  thci  d<[^th  of  34  fathoms,  the  groundishard 
and  gravelly.  , 

In  order  to  anchor  in  this  road,  vmi  must  turn  t6  windward,  before  you  stand' 
in,  until  the  easternmost  cluiti||l^  of  houses  in  the  village  appear^ou  with  the  mid- 
dle ^t|ie  valley  behind  them  f  then  steer  iq  with  this.marit;  When  the  point 
between  Ca^  acs  Navires  and  the  next  village,  called  Ca^^FUote,  opens  without 
the  land  to  the  N.  W.  you  will  bo  entering  on  tl^  bi^nk  in  43  fathoms;  then 
steer  so  as  to  have  the  Westernmost  house  o(jthefiusf|r,  above  ii||tioned,  or 
with  the  middle  of  the  valley ;  and  with  Le  Groaae  Pointe,  on  the  south  side  of 
.  Poi-t  Royal  Harbour,  jliut  in  behind  Point  Negrc^gkoA  may  anchor  a  lj^;ge  ship 

eeMls  may  Aand  fi^ne 


mark, 


in  18  or  20  fathoms,  ^mall  veeMls  may  Aand  fd^er  in,  with  the  same 
to  the  depth  of  9  or  7  fathoms.  .^  » 

ST^ERRfi,  {St.  Peter)  the  trading  town  of  Martinique,  lies  about  4  leagues 
to  thfeW.  W.  ofjPort  Royal.'  It  is  built  partly  upon  the  rising  grounds  at  the  foot 
of  a  ridge  of  hilis^  and  partly  along  the  fhore  of  a  spacious  circular  hay,  which 
forms  an  open  road  to  the  southward  lAid  westward. 

The  be^ancboring-place,. called  the  Frigatt*a  Anchorage,  lies  in  the  southern- 
most parf'o|the  road,  (when  you  see  some  steep  cliffs  and'rocks)  in  7  fathoms, 
gravcllf  grouHjd.  If  jrou  bring  the  highest  steeple  of  the  town  N.  |  E.  and  Point 
Car6e(  (on^e  south  sidQ^t)f  the  road)  south,  you  will  have^  fathoms,  cozy  ground. 

The  French  frigate  La  Flore,  being^ii|ored  in  this  road,  in  1772,  mA  one 
anchor  in  25  fathoms,  ftne  sand,  and  the  other  in  4|  fathoms,  same  grount^  had 
the  following  bearings  by  compass. 'The  nriatio|^at  the  s^ie  time  was  S^Sft'E. 


i 


328 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


•  *Poth<  Precheur,  N.  W.  by  N.  3°  N. :  thp  Galky's  End,  N.  9©  W, :  the  Black 
:]Priaii»  Tower,  N.  3°  W. :  the  Negr»ea'  Chupd,  E.  2°  N. :  PointCarbet  S.  4P  W. 

«  If  |rou  intend  to  stay  some  time  fn  this  road,  it  is  proper  you  should  lie  with 
/^(ttie  i^nchor  close  to  the  shore,  to  the  &.  E.  or  E.  N.  E.  (or  even  on  shore)  and 
I    ia»folhert<^heN.Wj, 

^-  |ntthe  hurricane  months,  that  is,  from  the  15th  of  July  to  the  15th  of  Octo- 

<     bM/^hips  cannot  lie  with  safety  in  this  road,  and  ttie  French  ships  i^re  generally 

'    obli^jRl  to  leave  i^on  the.)dth  of  July  at  farthest.    If  they  are  to  remain  for  a 

*  longer  time  at  Martinique,  they  retire  into  Port  Royal  Bay,  wh^mijthey  ^B  secure 
against  %he  hurricanes ;  they  may  also  find  shelter  in  Trinity  .'}E»y  to  the  wind- 

.     warc^  and  on  the  north  side  of  the  island. 

*..  Mr.  Backhouse,  in  his  description  of  the  Road  of  St  Pierre,^ha8  ob« 
^*  there  are  30  and  40  fiithoms  at  two  (Abie's  length  from  the  shoiHij 


e^  that 
t  farther 
ofilthan  that  ytc^  will  be  o£f  tlm  b«iiik.  They  generdly  lay  one  aiil^or  in  25  or 
SO  fathoms,  and  the  other  in  12.  ■  <!I!|t(>  'marks  with  mrhioh  we  iMK<!^red  were  iiie 
ibrt  S.  by  £ ;  the  great  chyrch  N.  <^f|bore]»(U|  cab^'j  |[^ngth,  in^Aithoms.^ 

In  sailing  from^^iJase  Navtts  to  St.  PWfii  ybiii  wOt  pil»the  viHi|g«i  and  battery 

of  Case  Mbte^  «nd  those  0rft»ft  IDaftk  MdCar^t    Bel^een  ^ipt(|«  is  "the 

called 'Morne  a«&1ioB|ir»f  iMlkh  belY^^^^^  N.|ir  iW.<4f^ee  5} 

ly  from  the  Diamond  Rock.  ^^  :    .."^    '       T' '^ 


promontmy  cal 
league9^early 


NORTHFE ASTERN  SIIM  of 
§  vancing  frooii  the  j^stwai^d,  o^t^c 
departure  froti^  JLa  Cimxi)«^,  oir  tiii 
li  nm-if!^  the  N.  E.  p<i^ft,    In* 

Susly  avoid  the  ejETeetof  ttijjfjri 
uuently  proceed  from  the  pij^wlBDenln^^^ 
gi,%)i^  ate. Up,  you  must  kei^4  g4d»a  ro(^  cmtiyn 
be  aMlrved,iene^ly,  thatJp^  faoliliaim  |ntJ»1tejA 
.«a0d  conseqiilntly  <^ccaa^n%Inw«MyariaU^wii^ 
<      ThiS>iMdfe  of  the  isiani  is^^  Q^lN^ift<^^^l^i 
|o  the  wy  supm^t  Qf  we  Bipi,  which  j^]l|P&)ii 


lo  j|5^1PIIS^>-#^  ad 


l^ass  e||^ptin|^oniy  0im/M(mt']l^ke,  or 
«ili  the  only  one  Jliatis.liarn^iif^j   ,  /   < 
,     PoinifMaetniba,  ijag  no|thelitm^  point 
i^tfrp,  itr  kind^^n^Ljy^  in^|t| 
ci|^t.    About  5  n^inwll^  ml^.^.^.'$^4m 
detached  frdhi  the  landL  c||led  tb^jPe^l, 
Bo^inse  of  Wri 


tii^piitii:%< 

;etheuri.^j^««!^er.  ^^';|fe3|i.fdl!] 


isles,  caltcd^Hnse  of  ] 

namc.J^Qpn  aflyJ^jiiht  Freclieur  presetits  itself, iwWch  endtlD  a  ^t'hummock, 
^atij^tion^b^t:  then  the  to:wo  of  Ze'Atec^eur.    Beyond 


with 
*you  lIKll  discern  twootj^^r^n  A 


•lid  E.  Ni  E.  will 


♦ 


\i 


- »  i 


iel^e  thelir 

-       bdtit 

u- 

^flfffiid,  #bich 

iDiliif  #>e  top- 

orltist 

the  tMi^-wind, 

leew^.'^i'i  * 

i|p|lCinh  iiie  i^antations 

, ;<ipywr(id  %ilh  ^es  and 

/Hinrntojiv,  l^ejb^liieBt  (h  tntnae  hills, 


eisbtttd,  if  di8dD||iiihed  bf  a 

iejteiw  from  the  top  |rvKigU  rocky 

~       *  "^  "-  -^ba,  Hm*.  round  rock 

[jof  wjb^iflre  the  little 

"  I  the  pio^t^f  the  saintie 

'' '    a  ftlt'hummock, 

Precheur  Point 

iWtoelyf  the  l^orne  aux  Bceuft,  before 

meqtibned,  to.,th^  8oiithjvard|b!fiMierbad  or  St  ^||gi^  wad  the  Diarhoad  Rock, 

to  the  southward  of  Port  ]^yw*j»     ,  ,  >•  »  ♦''. 

Between  the  norn^iii^  bf^the  wand' and  St.  Pierre  tb#e  are  seieral  villages, 
protcctect  by  batterie»>  ^luLfipan  is  .very  steep  i^nd.de^f  of  dagger. 

Having  djwbM  BoimPre^u^  y6u  wiU  descry  tli^  ships  which  lie  at  anchor 
in  the  RocPof  St.  l^ierr^  jM  they  alt  have  I|trt|iing8  to  protect  them  from  the 
intensQ.heat  of  the«iin.  ^Jii|:  would  take  them  %t  firgt  sjg^  for  so  maay  whits 
bouses,  whose  ro'ofs  are  buutlBce  a  t#race ;  ^u^cannot  come  to  anchor  close- 
hauled  ;  for  J.he  windtp  whieh  afways  prevm^r^  the  E 
compel  you  to  traverse  up  to  the  roMd.  3k         ' 


Remarks  on  the  JSTavigation  about  Martinique,  j^om^As  JhrrtHtro  delas 

Antil^i  fyc.  ^2 

The  land  of  this  ialan^d  is  high  and  rocky,  und  may  be  di»cornllia  at  M>out  15 
leagues  off.     Its  eastern  part  is  full  of  bays,  but  they  afford  little  shelWir,  and  are  ' 
freqmiited  by  coasters  ohly.    From  0if  South  Point,  or  PoiiU  Salinea,  along 
the  western  coast,  to  the  North  Point,  Point  Macouba,  you 'may  approach  wiUj^ 
in  a  mile  of  tht*  cuant'^rithout  aay  danger.     i         *  ^ 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


329 


'  The  principal  anchorages  of  Martinique  are  those  of  Port  Royal  and  St.  Pi- 
erre. That  of  St.  Pierre  is  an  open  roadstead,  which  affords  shelter  from  the 
general  breezes  only ;  and  vessels  that  are  obliged  to  remain  in  Martinique  during 
the  hurricane  season,  go  to  Port  Royal  to  pass  it  over.  The  Fortress  called 
Port  Royal,  is  on  a  tongue  of  land,  which  runs  nearly  half  a  mileito  the  south 
into  the  sea ;  from  the  S.  W.  part  of  this  tongue,  a  shoal  of  sand  and  rock 
stretches  out,  but  it  may  be  easily  discovered  by  the  colour  of  tht  water.  By 
the  eastern  side  of  this  point  is  the  harbour  and  arsenal,  where  vessels  anchor  in 
the  greatest  safety ;  but  they  enter  into  it  only  in  the  season  of  hurricanes,  or  for 
the  purpose  of  careening :  its  bottom  is  excellent,  with  a  depth  of  from  6  to  10 
fathoms.  The  city  is  about  one-fourth  of  a  mile  to  the  north  of  this  point,  and 
at  the  sea-side,  on  the  west  part,  in  Flamingo  Bay,  which  is  therefore  the  an- 
chorage for  merchant  vessels ;  and,  indeed,  generally,  for  all  vessels  which  are 
not  to  remain  long  at  Martinique.  ^ 

If  you  approach  Martinique,  on  the  north  side,  and  mean  to  anchor  in  the  Road 
of  St.  Pierre,  you  may  haul  in  as  close  as  you  choose  for  Macouba  Point, 
and  should  run  along  the  coast  afterwards  so  as  to  pass  outside  of  the  Islets  du 
Seron,  which  lie  on  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  island;  and  from  these  you  mu?t 
shave  the  Point  du  Precheur  (Preachers  Point)  within  half  a  cable's  length,-  in  or- 
der to  run  and  anchor  in  front  of  the  town  of  St.  Pierre,  or  a  little  to  the  south 
of  it ;  keeping  in  mind  that  the  coast  is  so  steep,  that  at  half  a  cable's  length  from 
it,  you  will  have  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  and  35  or  40  fiithoms  at  3  cable's  length.  * 
Vessels  moor  with  two  anchors,  one  to  the  west,  in  35  or  40  fathoms,  and  one  to 
the  east  in  4  or  5  fathoms ;  it  is,  however,  better  to  have  a  cable  on  shore  in  place 
of  the  anchor  to  the  east,  that  you  may  not  drag  with  the  strong  gusts  of  wind 
which  come  over  the  land. 

If  you  are  bound  to  Port  Royal,  you  will  steer  from  Pointe  Precheur  to  Morne 
aux  Boeufs,  which  is  the  south  point  of  the  Bay  of  St.  Pierre :  and  from  it  you 
will  sweep  along  the  coast  to  shave  Point  des  Negres  (Negro  Point)  from  which 
you  must  haul  to  the  wind  all  you  can,  in  the  understanding  that,  from  the  said 
Point  to  Flamingo  Bay,  you  may  shave  the  coast  without  any  risk. 

As  it  is  necessary  to  beat  up  from  Negres  Point  to  the  anchorage,  keep  in  mind 
that  the  shoal,  which  runs  out  from  Port  Royal  Point,  extends  to  the  west  as  far 
as  the  meridian  of  a  brook  which  runs  into  the  sea,  to  the  westward  of  the  city:  ^ 
and  thus,  when  you  mark  the  said  brook  at  i^brth,  you  must  pot  prolong  the  south 
tack  further  than  to  bring  Port  Royal  Point  a  little  to  the  north  yard  of  east,  but 
ought  rather  to  go  about  before  you  bring  it  to  bear  east,  and  anchor  on  the  other 
tacK  opposite  the  city.  If  you  have  to  enter  the  harbour,  it  is  advisable  to  take 
a  pilot. 

Those  approaching  Martinique  from  the  southward,  must  steer  so  as  to  pass  close 
to  the  Diamond  Rock  and  Point,  and  shave  Cape  Solomon,  whe  e  the  course  ig 
nearly  north,  but  nothing  to  the  east  of  it,  until  Pointe  Noire  bears  east ;  from 
this  situation  you  will  haul  by  the  wind  to  take  Flamingo  Bay,  or  enter  into  the 
harbour  as  may  be  requisite,  it  being  well  understood  that  you  can  anchor  in  any 
part  of  the  great  bay.  , 

If  coming  from  the  south,  and  bound  to  St.  Pierre,  you  must  ste#  from  Solo- 
mon's Cape  to  Morne  aur  Bumfs,  hauling  in  to  andior  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  town 
as  already  directed.  ^ 

It  is  almost  a  matter  of  indifference  what  part  of  Mar^nique  you  make :  only, 
in  case  of  the  winds  being  free  from  the  N.  £.  you  may  consider  h  preferable  to 
make^he  north  side. 

The  strait  between  St.  Lucia  and  Martinique  is  clear  of  all  danger ;  the  breeze 
is  always  iteady  in  it,  and  its  current  is  scarcely  perceptible. 


^■ 


• 


f 


42 


330 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COASt  PILOT. 


The  Island  of  St.  Lucia. 


ft.  Ltuia  beariitg  It.  W.  ty  IF.  9  or  4  UagM^ 

About  a  mile  and  half  to  the  west  of  the  Sulphur  Hill,  on  the  sea-shOre,  stand 
two  high  peaks,  called  by  the  Fjs^nch  L,es  Pitons,  and,  by  the  English,  the  Sugar- 
loaves  :  they  lie  very  near  each  other,  but  between  them  there  is  opening  enough 
to  distinguish  both,  on  coming  from  the  southward. 

On  the  western  side  of  the  island,  at  the  distance  of  about  three  leagues  from 
its  northern  cape,  is  Port  Castries,  or  the  Carenage,  one  of  the  harbours  in  the 
Windward  Islands,  having  deep  water  and  good  ground  all  over  it.  These 
careening-places  have  been  formed  by  nature,  which  require  no  wharfs,  and  only 
a  capstan  to  turn  the  keel  above  ground.  Thirty  line-of-battle  ships  mi|ht  Ke 
securely  here,  unmoored  during  the  hurricanes.  No  ships  can  enter  without 
warping  in ;  but  there  is  always  a  breeze  to  carry  them  out :  and,  in  less  than  an 
hour,  the  largest  squadron  may  b(>  in  the  offing.  The  shores  are  so  bold,  that  a 
first  rate  man-of-war  may  approach  within  six  yards  of  them. 

Nearly  a  league  to  the  southward  of  the  Carenage,  lies  the  Grand  Cul  de  Sac, 
or  Oram  Bay :  and,  nearly  two  leagues  to  the  northward  of  the  same,  is  the  Bay 
of  Gros  Islet :  these  places  form  excellent  roads  for  ships  of  war. 

When  bound  from  the  northward  to  the  Carenage,  you  will  see  a  bluff  two 
leagues  to  the  leeward,  which  may  be  approached  boldly ;  you  must  haul  close 
in  to  see  the  harbour,  then  run  into  it  as  far  as  you  can  fetch  and  warp  in. 
When  the  sun  shines  a.11  the  dangers  may  be  seen. 

Should  you  have  occasion  to  anchor  off  the  south  coast,  you  may  do  so  in 
Old  Fort  Bay  {Anse  de  Vieux  Fort)  under  the  S.  E.  bluff,  unto  which  you  may 
turn  till  you  bring  Point  Moulacique,  the  southern  Point,  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  and 
then  anchor  in  7,  8  Oi'  10  fathoms  good  ground.  At  the  north  part  of  this  bay 
there  is  a  river,  which  runs  into  the  sea.  If  you  water  here,  it  must  be  by  pro- 
ceeding h^lf  a  mile  up  with  the  boat ;  unless  after  great  rainB*  when  you  may  fill 
at  the  ^trance. 


# 


^  Remarks  on  St.  Lucia. 

*  [Frotn  the  Dtrrotero,  ifc.] 


«> 

^ 


The  Island  of  Santa  Lucin  shows  high,  and  in  detatched  hills,  with  various 
peaks  sufficiently  visible :  in  particular  two,  at  its  extreme  S.  W.  part,  called  the 
Pitons,  which  may  ba  seen  at  the  distance  of  sixteen  leagues ;  they  are  black* 
and  covered  with  wood. 

At  the  N.  W.  point  of  thh  island  there  is  an  islet,  named  the  Groa  Islet,  which 
is  rather  more  than  a  mile  distant  from  Point  Salines,  to  the  S.  W.  Between 
Salines  Point  and  the  Gros  Islet,  there  is  a  rock  named  Burgaux.  To  the  south 
of  I'ne  islet  is  the  Bay  of  Gross  Islet,  or  Roadstead  of  St.  Croix,  with  excellent 
anchorage  for  every  class  of  Tesaels,  having  a  depth  of  from  17  fathoms  down 
to  5  fiithoms,  which  are  found  at  half  a  mile  from  the  coast ;  bet^'een  the  coast 
and  the  Gros  Islet,  there  is  a  passage  for  small  vessels  only,  it  being  impeded  by 
a  shoal,  on  which  there  ere  only  2  fathoms  of  water.  The  Gros  Islet  is  fouK  and 
you  ought  not  to  approach  nearer  to  It  than  two  cables'  length. 

^'  m  '  -9:    *  .0 


BLUNT*9  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


331 


Near  Bnlott*  Point,  to  the  south  of  Qros  Islet  Bay,  there  is  an  islet,  which 
forms  a  strait,  practicable  for  any  vessel,  it  having  7  fathoms  of  v«rater  in  it. 
This  islet  is,  like  the  Gros  Islet,  foul,  and  you  must  not  approach  nearer  to  it, 
than  two  cables'  length ;  the  coast,  on  the  contrary,  is  clean,  and  a  rock,  which  Is 
also  clean,  lies  about  a  cables'  length  out  from  it.  On  all  this  coast,  there  are 
from  8  to  10  fathoms,  at  half  a  mile  from  it,  and  you  may  anchor  in  any  part, 
though  the  safest  anchorage  is  in  the  road  of  St.  Croix,  where  there  is  good 
shelter  from  the  sea. 

About  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  S.  by  E.  of  Bretotte  Point,  there  is  a  rocky 
shoal,  extending  nearly  in  that  direction,  which  is  a  mile  in  length  and  about  two 
cables  in  breadth ;  its  distance  from  the  coast  is  more  than  half  a  mile.  This  is 
the  only  danger  on  all  the  western  side  of  St.  Lucia,  on  which  there  are  excel- ' 
lent  anchorages,  but  principally  in  the  Carenage,  which  is  two  leagues  to  the  S. 
by  W.  of  the  great  islet,  and  the  best  harbour  in  tlie  Lesser  Antillas,  with  ex- 
cellent anchorage,  very  clean,  and  three  natural  coves  in  the  interior,  and  such 
Bteep  shores,  that  they  might  serve  as  wharves,  or  moles,  at  which  the  largelt 
men  of  war  may  be  hove  down.  This  harbour  has,  however,  the  disadvanta^ 
that  you  cannot  enter  it  except  by  towing  or  warping,  it  being  impossible  to  beat 
in,  on  account  of  its  narrowness ;  but,  in  exchange,  it  it  easy  to  get  out  of  it  even 
with  a  large  squadron ;  as  you  must  enter  either  by  towing  or  warping,  it  is  suffi- 
cient to  say  that  the  south  point  sends  out  a  very  shallow  tongue  of  sand  to  the 
N.  W.  and  that  the  North  Point  is  deep  and  clean,  and  you  may  approach  with- 
in a  quarter  of  a  cable's  length  of  it  without  giving  a  birth  to  more  than  the  rocks 
which  are  seen. 

The  strait  between  this  island  and  St.  Vincent's  is  subject  to  tornadoes,  ar^' 
strong  currents  to  the  W.  N.  W.  and  as  Port  Castries  and  the  Bay  of  St.  Croix 
are  towards  the  northern  extremity  of  the  island,  it  is  advisable  to  make  the  land, 
when  bound  tp  them,  from  the  northward. 


The  Lland'hf  St.  Vincent's. 


«:•  ^ . 


ft.  nmont  htaHng  S.byW.  tAmii  4  Uaguu, 


From  Bequia  to  St.  Vincent's,  the  course  is  north  about  t\?o  leagues.  The 
channel  between  these  two  islands  is  very  good  to  come  through,  if  bound  from 
Barbadoes  to  the  Salt  Tortuga,  or  the  Spanish  Main ;  and  there  are  smal'  ♦rading 
vessels  which  work  up  through  it.  St.  Vincents  is  about  five  leagiies  lo>  o,  and 
lies  nearly  N.  and  S.  and  E.  and  W.— the  north  end  which  is  much  higher  than 
the  south  part,  is  inhabited  by  about  SOOO  natives  or  Caribs.  On  the  north  end 
there  is  a  volcano,  called  La  Souffriere,  or  Sulphur  Hill,  near  Spanish  Point. 
On  the  west  side  of  the  is^d,  which  is  bold,  are  several  bays,  having  all  of  them 
fresh  water  rivers,  and  <|||fl^  S.  W.  side  you  make  good  anchorage,  as  near,  or 
as  far  off,  as  you  pleasej^^ecially  in  Kingston  Bay,  where  the  chief  town  is 
Situated.  But  (he  best  bay  of  the  island  is  Balair  Bay ;  when  you  turn  up  be- 
tween 9t.  Vincents  and  Bequia,  you  will  see  a  large  bluff  of  land,  and  ju3t  to 
windward  of  that  is  Balair  Bay  or  Calliaqua ;  the  shore  is  bold  or  each  side ;  run 
into  10,  20  or  16  fathoms  ana  anchor:  there  are  two  rivers  which  run  into  the 
flea. 

The  course  from  Carlisle  Bay  to  the  south  end  of  St.  Vincents,  is  W.  norther- 
ly thirty-three  leagues.    If  you  intend  to  anchor  in  Kingston  Bay,  you  will  see 


m 


332 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


a  small  high  peaked  island,  called  Young's  Island ;  pass  the  bay  to  leeward  of 
this  island,  and  go  round  a  long  sloping  point;  you  may  borrow  within  pistol 
shot;  but  if  the  wind  takes  you  short,  you  may  anchor  in  85  fathoms  and  warp 
in.  Thera  is  a  small  ledge  of  rocks  close  on  the  weather  shore,  within  6  fathoms. 
On  t'.e  west  side  of  the  island,  which  is  bold,  there  are  several  bays,  all  of  them 
having  fresh-water  rivers  ;  and  on  the  S.  W.  side,  ships  may  anchor  at  pleasure, 
especially  in  Kingston  Bay,  on  which  the  chief  town  of  the  island  is  situated. 

The  best  bay,  however,  for  shipping,  is  that  called  Calliaqua,  or  TyrreVs  Bay, 

at  the  south  end  of  the  island  :  this  may  be  known  by  a  high  bluff,  which  will  be 

seen  when  turning  up  between  St.  Vincent's  and  Bequia,  and  which  lies  on  the 

leeward  side  of  the  bay.    The  shore  is  here  bold  on  each  side  :  run  into  19,  20 

'Of  15  fathoms,  and  anchor.    There  are  two  rivers,  which  run  into  the  sea. 

Kingston  Bay  is  completely  open  to  the  S.  W.  and  is  mor^  than  a  mile  in 
breadth.  The  town  is  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  close  to  the  water-side ;  the 
anchorage  good,  and  the  soundings  regular,  with  a  bottom  of  dark  sand,  appa- 
rently clear,  and  forming  a  good  holding  ground.  The  water  is  deep  on  each 
side  of  the  bay,  and  you  may  round  the  eastern  head,  called  the  Old  Woman's 
Pomt,  as  close  as  you  please,  there  being  £0  fathoms  at  not  more  than  200  feet 
from  the  shore.  The  best  anchorage  for  a  frigate  is  with  the  Court-House 
bearing  north,  in  19  or  20  fathoms,  not  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the 
beach.  There  is  a  light  current  setting  along  the  bay,  but  it  is  not  regular : 
the  tide  rises  about  4  feet.    Fresh  water  is  good  and  easily  obtained. 

PRINCESS  or  BARAWALLY  BAY.— This  little  bay  lies  5}  miles  to  the 
north-westward  of  Kingston,  and  its  ndrth  side  is  formed  by  rocks  called  the 
Bottle  and  Glass,  between  which  and  the  main  there  is  a  passage  for  boats. 
There  is  no  danger  in  going  in  ;  and,  in  coming  from  the  northward,  you  may 
haul  close  round  the  Bottle  and  Glass.  When  round  this  point,  luff  up  as  much 
as  possible,  and  you  will  open  the  town-barracks,  bearing  N.  £.  by  E.  i  E.  which 
may  be  kept  thus  until  the  Bottle  and  Glass  Point  bear  N.  W.  you  will  then  be 
in  about  22  fathoms,  with  sandy  ground. 

All  along  the  Bottle  and  Glass  side,  is  rocky,  but  the  bottom  of  the  bay  all 
sandy  and  good  ground.  If  you  moor  in  and  out,  which  is  usual  for  ships  of 
war,  you  muy  warp  in,  and  lay  your  inner  anchor  in  12  or  13  fathoms  of  water, 
and  your  outer  anchor  will  be  in  32  fathoms.    Moor  a  cable  each  r/ay. 


The  Granidines,  or  Granidillos. 

The  Granidines  form  a  chain  of  innum#ahle  rocks  and  barren  spots,  good  for 
little,  which  extend  to  N.  E.  by  N.  for  about  16  or  18  leagues.  Some,  however, 
are  of  considerable  size  and  value,  particularly  Cariuacou  and  Bequia,  both  in- 
habited, and  producing  good  coffee  and  cotton.  Cariuacou  lies  about  6  leagues  N. 
by  E.  i  E.  from  the  N.  W.  of  Grenada;  it  is  of  a  circular  form,  of  about  6  miles 
in  length  and  breadth,  and  has  a  commodious  harbour. 

Bequia,  called  also  Little  Martinique,  is  the  northernmost  of  the  Grenadines, 
and  lies  about  2  leagues  S.  from  St.  Vincents ;  on  the  W.  side  it  has  a  very  good 
sandy  bay,  where  you  may  ride  occasionally ;  and  wood  is  to  be  got  there,  with 
plenty  of  fish,  but  no  water.  The  little  islands  to  the  southward  of  Bequia,  are 
very  fair,  and  near  them  you  may  stand  boldly,  havingneither  rocks  nor  dangers 
you  need  to  fear.  ,j||^ 

N.  by  E.  course  from  Point  Laurent,  or  the  N.  vWpitnt  of  Grenada,  will  car- 
ry you  clear  along  the  Grenadines. 

Observe  that,  towards  the  south  part,  it  is  rather  dangerous  to  come  near  in 
the  night. 


I  »•■ 


't' 


.♦       '^ 


..c 


^   -*'•*     J 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


333 


2%e  Island  of  Grenada. 

There  is  good  anchoring  ground  along  the  coasts,  and  on  the  eastern  and  west- 
ern sides  are  several  small  bays  and  creeks,  commodious  for  vessels,  as  well  as 
for  the  landing  and  shipping  of  goods 

The  principal  town  is  that  of  St.  GEORGE,  in  the  S.  W.  quarter  of  the  is- 
land, which  is  situated  on  a  bay  of  the  same  name,  formerly  called  La  Grand- 
Bay.  This  bay  is  formed  by  a  point,  called  MoUniefs  Point,  on  the  north,  and 
Caorit  or  Goat  Point  on  the  south.  The  distance  between  these  points  is  S| 
miles.  The  space  between  is  not  e  itirely  clear,  as  a  coral  reef  extends  out  to  a 
considerable  distance  from  Point  St.  Eloi,  which  lies  a  mile  to  the  south-east- 
ward of  Molenier's  Point ;  and  then  is  a  sand-bank,  of  only  17  or  18  feet  of  wa- 
ter, on  which  coral  is  beginning  to  grow,  at  some  little  distance  oflf  the  fort  point, 
on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbour. 

The  chief  bay,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  island,  is  that  called  Greenville  Bay, 
which  is  open,  and  protected  by  extensive  reefs. 

The  town  of  GREENVILLE  is  a  port  of  entry,  having  its  distinct  custom- 
house establishment.  The  villages  are  generally  on  the  shipping  bays  around  the 
island. 

On  the  south  side  of  the  island,  immediately  on  the  western  side  of  the  Point 
of  Fort  Jeudy,  and  2  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Salines  de  Point,  lies  the  har- 
bour called  Calavine,  or  Egmont  Hariour,  which  is  very  deep,  and  where,  it  is 
said,  sixty  men  of  war  could  ride  in  safety,  without  anchors.  The  entrance  is* 
iDearly  half  a  mile  in  breadth.  Within,  its  peculiar  conformation  is  such,  .that  it 
may  be  considered  as  forming  two  harbours;  namely,  the  Outer  and  Inner  Po_' 
The  entrance  into  the  latter  is  narrow,  and  its  length  rather  more  than  half  a  mile. ' 
The  depth  in  the  greater  part  is  7  fathoms,  with  excellent  holding  ground,  being 
everywhere  a  soft  oozy  bottom.  The  ships  may  here  lie  along  side  of  the  ware- 
housesj  and  take  in  their  lading  with  great  ease  and  convenience ;  after  which, 
they  may,  with  very  little  trouble,  be  towed  into  t^  otiter  harbour,  which  en- 
joys this  peculiar  advantage,  that  ships  can  sail  in  or  oIl  with  the  common  trade- 
wind. 

In  sailing  off  the  south  side  of  the  island,  there  is  little  danger  until  you  get  to 
the  westward  of  Fort  Jeudy  Point.  But  thence  to  the  rocks  named  the  Gram- 
puses, it  is  necessary  to  keep  a  good  offing,  as  the  ground  in-shore  is  very  foul, 
and  full  of  reefs.  The  Grampuses  lie  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  off  the  land, 
with  the  Point  called  Pirogue  Point  bearing  N.  i  W.  they  appear  just  above  the 
surface,  and  there  is  a  passage  within  them,  but  it  is  not  deemed  safe. 

Off  the  norik  side  of  the  island,m  the  channel  between  it  andRedonda,  or  Round 
Island,  there  stands  a  remarkable  rock,  called  London  Bridge,  (from  its  having  a 
natural  arch  in  it)  and  from  the  south  side  of  which  extends  a  reef.  This  rock 
may  be  easily  avoided  by  keeping  over  to  the  north  side  of  the  channel.  Hence, 
and  along  the  west  coast  of  the  island,  the  shore  is  bold,  all  along,  to  the  point 
of  St.  Eloi,  whence  a  coral  reef  extends,  as  before  explained. 


come  near  m 


Qriton. 


Reionda. 


ta  Tenl$. 


Pt.D<teid. 
Piened  Rati.         M 


^  ^  JsIefA  q|f  (Ae  A*or(&  End  0/ Gretuula. 

ST.  GEORGE'S  BAY — When  sailing  into  St.  George's  Bay,  from  the  north- 
ward, give  Molenier's  Point  a  small  birth.  You  may  run  within  half  a  cable's 
length  of  it,  in  b  or  9  fathoms.  The  point  is  low,  with  some  straggling  trees  en 
it,  and  makes  Jike  an  island.  When  near  the  point  you  will  see  St.  George's 
Fort,  bearing  S.  S.  E.    Keep  your  luff  for  the  fort,  and,  when  you  cannot  fetch 


334 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


near  enough  to  anchor,  with  the  fort  bearing  east,  taclc ;  or  you  will  be  In  danget 
uf  running  on  t'le  threo-fathom*bank,  before  notioed.  The  soundings  are  very 
regular  from  Moleniers  Point, — some  casts  20,  13,  9  and  12  fathoms ;  and  in- 
shore, towards  the  fort,  from  9  to  5  fathoms,  the  bottom  is  foul. 

To  sail  within  the  three-fathom  banic  or  middle  ground,  you  may  be  directed 
hjt^two  white  houses,  over  the  town,  about  half  way  up  the  hill.  Keep  them  open 
with  the  north  end  of  the  fort,  and  run  directly  in,  until  you  see  a  single  tree  to 
the  southward,  upon  a  little  hill,  open  a  good  sail's  breadth  to  the  northward  of 
a  large  tree  close  to  the  shore ;  you  will  then  be  within  the  bank,  and  may  pass 
the  fort  point,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  cables'  length,  in  4  and  5  fathoms.  In 
the  mouth  of  the  harbour  there  are  1 5  fathoms  of  water,  but  it  shoalens  very 
fast  to  the  southward. 

The  best  anchoring  ground  in  St.  George's  Bay,  is  off  the  mouth  of  the  harbour, 
at  about  a  cables'  length  from  the  fort,  with  the  two  white  houses,  above  Oien- 
tioned,  open  to  the  southward  of  the  fort ;  but,  if  you  anchor  in  the  bay,  oflT  the 
town,  the  houses  must  be  open  to  the  northward  of  the  fort  and  bear  E.  S.  E. 

In  advancing  towards  St.  Georgc^s  Harbour  from  the  southward,  it  must  be  ob> 
served  that,  after  passing  Point  de  Salines,  there  is  a  very  dangerous  coral  reef 
lying  between  that  Point  and  Goat  Point,  with  only  2  or  3  feet  over  it,  in  the 
shoalest  part.  This  bank  lies  with  thesignal-staff  of  Fort  St.  George  in  one  with 
a  house  that  has  two  little  turrets  or  pavilions,  situated  on  the  top  of  a  hill  a  little 
to  the  eastward  of  the  redoubts  on  Hospital  Hill.  With  this  mark  you  will  be  in 
a  line  with  the  reef,  and  must  give  it  an  offing. ,  The  bank  is  about  a  mile  in 
length,  lying  parallel  with  the  shore ;  within  it,  there  is  a  narrow  channel,  through 
^  which  small  craft  frequently  pass. 

In  running  from  the  eastward,  towards  Point  de  Salines,  you  will  see  islet  Ra- 
a  very  small  island  lying  rather  more  than  half  a  mile  from  the  nearest 

lore,  and  nearly  a  mile  from  the  point.  Give  that  islet  a  birth  of  a  mile,  and 
do  not  attempt  to  pass  within  it,  as  the  passage  is  shoal.  To  Point  de  Salines  it 
is  sufficient  to  give  a  birth  of  half  a  mile,  as  at  that  distance,  there  are  7  fathoms 
water.  So  soon  as  you  pass  the  point,  the  bay  will  be  open.  You  must  now 
carefully  avoid  the  bank,,  above  described,  which  you  will  have  passed,  when  a 
remarkable  house,  like  a  uunmer  house,  upon  a  high  point  close  to  the  end  of  the 
r^ef,  bears  S.  E.*  On  thAank,  the  sea  frequently  breaks. 

To  sail  into  the  harb<Ar,  you  leave  the  three  fathom  shoal,  as  before  directed, 
on  the  starboard  hand,  and  run  in  close  under  the|fort ;  and  then  warp  up.  The 
ground  is  all  clear,  and  the  harbour  capabk  of  containing,  with  the  utmost  safe- 
ty, a  large  fleet  of  ships  of  the  line. 

You  will  generally,  be  obliged  to  work  up  into  the  bay,  as  it  lies  open  to  the 
westward,  and  the  trade-wind  blows  directly  outward.  The  true  entrance  of 
the  port  is  from  W.  S.  W.  !^ 

GRENVILLE  BAY.— This  port  lie^  alHout  halfway  down  the^Und,  on  thcT 
eastern  side,  and  all  those  bound  for  it  must  be  very  cautious,  and  not  goto 
leeward  of  it ;  for,  if  they  do,  they  must  pass  round  Point  de  Salines,  and  turn 
to  windward,  on  the  other  side  of  the  island ;  as  the  current  sits  so  strongly  to 
the  southward,  that,  with  the  prevailing  winds,  the  fastest  sailine  vessel  cannot 
lead  up.  They  should  heave  to  a  little  to  windward  of  the  Grenville  Rock, 
which  lies  to  the  north-eastward,  (off  Telescope  Point,)  and  is  round,  pretty  high 
and  steep  on  all  sides.  Upon  firing  a  signal,  a  pilot  will  come  off,  and  take  charge 
of  the  ship. 

The  marks  for  going  in,  are  two  white  beacons,  formed  at  the  head  in  shape 
of  a  diamond.  One  stands  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  south  end  of  the  town,  at 
high-water  mark ;  the  other  a  little  inland  on  the  side  of  the  road  leading  over 
the  mountains.  They  bear,  when  in  a  line,  N.  74*^  W.  By  keeping  them  thus 
you  may  run  directly  in,  under  an  easy  sail.  Be  careful  to  steer  very  small,  as 
the  channel  between  the  rocks  is  very  narrow,  not  being  a  ship's  length  across. 
After  you  are  through  the  narrow,  if  your  ship  d^aws  more  than  19  feet,  yon 
must  come-to  at  the  mooring-chain,  and  lighten. 

This  harbour,  to  those  acquainted  with  it,  is  safe  and  commodious,  bein|  shel- 
tered from  all  winds.    Yet  it  is  impracticable  to  a  stranger,  the  lead  being  no 


1; 
■I 


e  In  dangei 
58  are  very 
iS;  and  in- 

be  directed 
them  open 
igle  tree  to 
rthward  of 
d  may  pass 
thorns.  In 
salens  very 

le  harbour, 
ibove  men- 
}ay,  off  the 
Fm  S'  £• 
nust  be  ob- 
a  coral  reef 
er  it,  in  the 
in  one  Tvith 
I  hill  a  little 
u  will  be  in 
it  a  mile  in 
leK  through 

ee  islet  Ror 
the  nearest 
a  mile,  anc^ 
e  Salines  it 
3  7  fathoms 
I  must  now 
led,  when  a 
>  end  of  the 

re  directed, 
up.  Tho 
tmost  aafe- 


BLUNT  9    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT.. 


336 


I 

lis 


gtflde;  and,  If  you  once  get  too  near  the  rocks,  tlie  current  sets  so  strongly  that 
you  cannot  get  off  again. 


.* 


>  Remarks  on  Grenada, 

*  [From  the  Derrotero  de  laa  Antillas,  ifc] 

Any  part  of  Grenada  may  he  safely  approached  to  within  less  than  two  miles. 
On  its  western  coast  are  many  bays  fit  for  anchoring  in,  but  the  principal  is 
that  in  which  stands  the  town  and  harbour  of  St.  GEORGE,  or  Port  Royal, 
This  bay  is  about  one  league  from  the  Salines  or  the  S.  W.  point.  Between  that 
Point  and  Fort  St.  George,  there  is  a  rocky  shoal,  and  banks  of  sand,  with  coral. 
The  rocky  shoal  is  half  a  mile  in  extent  from  N.  E.  to  S.  W.  and  its  greatest 
breadth  is  two  cable's  length ;  o«  all  its  edges  there  are  6  and  7  fathoms ;  it 
bears  N.  25°  E.  true,  three  quarters  of  a  mile  distant  from  Point  da  Salines,  and 
the  northernmost  part  of  it  lies  nearly  west,  or  W.  by  N.  from  Goat  Point,  at 
about  three  cable's  length.  Goat  Point  is  the  southernmost  point  of  St.  George's 
Bay.  The  first  sand-bank  is  a  mile  in  extent,  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  and  its 
greatest  breadth  is  3  cable's  length :  the  least  water  on  it  is  3^  fathoms,  and  close 
to  it  are  6i  and  7  fathoms ;  between  it  and  the  coast  the  depth  increases  to  10 
fathoms.  The  western  extremity  lies  nearly  north  from  Goat  Point,  and  at  the 
distance  of  half  a  mile.  The  second  bank,  on  which  there'  is  not  more  than  3 
fathoms  of  water,  lies  S.  59°  W.  true,  from  the  Fort,  at  the  distance  of  half  tui^ 
mile ;  the  greatest  extent  of  this  bank  is  three  cable's  length. 

Behind  the  point  on  which  the  fort  stands,' is  the  Harbour,  which  is  only  three 
cables'  length  m  depth,  and  into  which  vessels  go  to  load  and  unload,  or  to  be 
careened :  this  place  is  as  well  sheltered  as  the  best  harbour  can  be,  and  vessels 
of  the  greatest  burthen  can  haul  along-side  the  shore,  in  a  depth  of  8  or  10  fa- 
thoms. 

Grenada  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  seven  or  eight  leases;  and  as  the 
principal  harbour  is  by  the  S>  W.  point,  the  best  way  is  to  make  and  haul  in  for 
its  south  side. 

To  the  i  '>uth  of  Point  Pirogue,  on  the  south  coast,  there  are  some  robks  even  ^ 
with  the  water's  surfac<>,  which  are  called  the  Grampusea,  and  which  lie  out  about 
two-thirds  of  a  mile  from  the  point.  At  night,  it  is  necessary  to  be  certain  how 
you  run,  that  you  may  keep  clear  of  them.  To  the  westward  of  Pirogue  Point,  ' 
nearly  half  al«ague,  there  is  an  islet  named  Glovefs  Island,  which  is  very  clean, 
and  has  4^  fal^oras  of  water,  at  a  cable's  length  from  it.  To  take  St.  George's 
Bay,  you  ought  to  pass  about  a  mile  without  Glover's  Island,  and  at  half  a  mile 
with  Point  de  Salines ;  steering  to  the  north  so  soon  as  you  have  passed  the  lat- 
ter, until  Goat  Point  bears  east;  then  luff  to  the  eastward,  and  place  the  prow  to 
Point  St.  Eloi,  which  is  about  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  Fort  St.  George. 
Thus  you  will  pass  safely  outside  the  shoals.  So  soon  as  the  point  on  which 
the  fort  stands  bears  east,  you  will  have  passed  the  last  shoal,  and  may  beat  up 
between  it  and  Point  St.  Eloi,  taking  care  neither  to  prolong  the  tacks  to  the 
south  of  the  fort,  nor  within  less  than  two  cable's  length  of  St.  Eloi's  Point, 
which  sends  out  some  rocks  to  the  west. 

The  anchorage  is  to  the  west  of  the  town,  at  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the 
coast,  where  you  may  let  go  an  anchor,  in  6  or  9  fathoms.  The  bottom  is  very 
various,  fpr  you  may  equally  find  clay,  sand,  or  rocks.  Vessels  intending  to 
make  a  short  stay  only,  bring-to  in  this  place,  with  only  one  anchor ;  but  those 
which  have  to  make  a  stay  and  unload,  go  into  the  harbour,  where  they  moor 
with  four. 

Some  charts  depict  a  bank  and  shoal  to  the  S.  W.  of  Point  de  Salines,  with 
13  and  45  fathoms.  In  the  strait  between  Grenada  and  Tobago,  the  water  has 
been  found  to  set  S.  70°  W.  with  the  velocity  of  a  mile  and  a  half  in  an  hour. 


(I'»^5« 


'*>*K 


336 


BLUNrS    AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 

The  Island  of  Barbadoes. 


"<  J 


Barbadoes  bearing  W.  N.  W.  aitmii  6  Uaguet. 

Barbadoes,  which  lies  out  of  the  line,  and  to  windward  of  the  Caribbee  Islands, 
is  of  moderate  height,  and  generally  level,  although  there  are  a  few  hills,  of  ea^y 
ascent.  The  island  may  be  seen  in  flne  clear  weather  ten  or  eleven  laagues  on. 
The  east  end  is  much  lower  than  the  other  parts;  but,  on  coming  f^om 
the  eastward,  or  when  the  north  end  of  the  island  bears  W.  by  N.  and  the  S.  W 
point  about  W.  S.  W.  then  the  eastern  part  appears  the  highest.  From  the  eastern 
part  to  the  southward,  the  land  is  even,  and  decline^  towards  the  sea ;  but  be- 
tween the  eastern  and  northern  points,  it  is  unever\,  rugged  and  broken. 

Tl»e  S.  E.  coast,  from  South  Point  to  Kitriagjfes  on  the  eastern  point*^  is  en- 
closed by  a  ledge  of  rocks,  called  the  Cobblers,  from  one  of  the  most  remarka- 
ble among  them.  They  extend  about  a  mile  from  shore,  and  you  must  be  care- 
ful to  avoid  them  in  the  night.  At  South  Point,  where  the  rocks  terminate, 
there  is  a  flat  spit,  which  must  have  a  birth,  as  it  runs  off  above  a  mile  to  the 
W.  S.  W.     In  the  day-time  you  may  s»:e  how  far  it  extends.by  the  white  water. 

7%e  piinci;pal  town  of  Barbadoes  is  that  called  Bridgetown,  situated  at  the 
mouth  of  a  little  rivulet  on  the  north  side  of  Carlisle  Bay,  upon  the  S.  W.  side 
''of  the  island.  <  • 

Those  bound  to  Bridgetown,  should  always  endeavour  to  make  tlie  south  side 
of  the  island  by  sailing  on  or  near  the  parallel  of  13^.  In  the  latitude  of  Barba- 
does, at  about  seventy  or  eighty  leagues  to  the  eastward,  you  will  find  the  water 
discoloured  and  thick*  as  if  there  were  soundings,  (hough  there  are  none :  by 
this  indication,  if  met  with,  your  situation  will  be  nearly  ascertained.*^  When 
▼ou  approach  the  island,  you  may  run  along  within  three  mifes  of  the  shore,  un- 
til you  advance  towards  Needham's  Point,  which  forms  the  south  side  jf  Car- 
lisle Bay.  You  mayliaul  up  and  anchor  in  Osten''3  Bay  to  the  westward  of 
South  Point,  by  avoidingthe  spit  above  described,  where  you  will  find  ground 
in  7,  8,  9,  or  10  fathoms  water.  This  bay  is  rocky;  but  the  best  ground,  which 
is  tolerably  good,  lies  wi<th  a  mill  close  by  the  water-side,  at  the  head  of  the  bay, 
bearing  E.  by  N.  or  E.  N.  E. 

In  Carlisle  Bay,  also,  the  ground  is  foul,  and  apt  to  chafe  the  cables.  In  haul- 
ing in  for  this  place,  give  Needham's  Point  a  birth  of  a  quarter^f  a  mile,  to 
avoid  a  reef  which  stretches  from  it,  and  «,lways  breaks.  You  mii^  then  run  in 
till  you  bring  Charles  Fort,  on  Needham's  Point,  to  bear  S.  E.  and  the  steeple 
N.  N.  E. 

There  is,  also,  anchorage  in  this  bay,  in  25  fathoms,  fll^e  sandy  bottom,  witll 
Needham's  Point  S.  E.  i  S.  the  church  N.  N.  E.  and  tne  N.  W.  point  of  the 
bayN.  W.byW. 

The  long  mark  for  the  reef  of  Needham's  Point  is  a  bouse  standing  upon  the 
hill  above  the  north  end  of  the  town,  open  with  the  outermost  or  southernmost 
flag-staff  on  Needham's  Point ;  and  the  thwart-mark  is  the  three  ^fig-staSs  in 
one.  With  the  above-mentioned  house  on  the  hill  open  to  the  northward  of  the 
church,  the  ground  is  foul,  but  to  the  southward  it  is  more  clear;  and  with  that 
house  just  open  to  the  southward  of  the  church,  there  is  an  anchorage  in  about  12 
fathoms ;  the  other  marks  for  which  are,  a  road  to  the  eastward  of  the  town  di- 
rectly open,  the  fort  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  and  Pelican  Point  N.  W.  by  N.  The  tide  is 
almost  imperceptible. 

On  the  leeward  side  of  the  island,  N.  N.  W.  from  the  northern  part  of  Car- 
lisle Bay,  are  several  shoals,  called  the  Pelican  and  Half  Acxe  Shoals,  the  outer- 
most of  which  lie  about  three-ouarters  of  a  mile  off. 

Before  Speightstown,  which  hes  between  eight  and  nine  miles  to  the  northward 
of  Bridgetown,  and  which  is  defended  by  three  forts,  vessels  occasionally  ride 


•  ift. 


V 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


837 


There  is  a  bank  lying  about  three  hundred  miles  to  windward  of  Barbadoes, 
called  Glasaionieres,  from  the  name  of  the  French  Admiral  who  first  reported  it, 
but  subsequent  information  confirms  it  to  1808. 


^    T7ie  Island  of  Tobago. 

Tobago,  like  Barbadoes,  lies  out  of  the  line,  and  to  windward  of  the  Caribbee 
Islands.  The  land  in  the  northern  part  is  so  high  as  to  be  seen,  in  clear  weatherr 
at  the  distance  of  fifteen  leagues. 

Though  Tobago  does  not  possess  any  harbours,  properly  so  called,  yet  it  has 
several  good  bays,  which,  considering  that,  from  their  southern  latitude,  thay 
are  never  exposed  to  dangerous  gales  of  wind,  are  equally  convenient  and  secure 
to  shipping.  From  this  reason,  the  men  of  war  stationed  at  the  Caribbee  Islands 
frequently  repair  hither  for  safety  in  the  hurricane  months. 

The  principal  towns  are  Scarborough  and  Georgetoum,  situated  on  the  south 
side  of  the  island,  and  its  best  roadstead  is  in  Man  of  War  Bay,  on  the  noHh 
side.  The  vertical  rise  of  the  tide,  on  the  full  and  change,  is  only  four  feet. 
The  currents  near  the  island  are  very  strong  and  uncertain,  especially  between  it 
and  Trinidad.     The  N.  E.  trade-wind  prevails  all  the  year  round. 

The  course,  usually  taken  from  the  island  of  Barbadoes  to  the  S.  E.  side  of 
Tobago,  is  south,  rather  easterly,  so  as  to  allow  for  the  current,  which  sets  most 
frequently  to  the  N.  W.  and  so  as  to  get  several  leagues  to  windward  of  the 
island. 

If  you  make  Tobago  towards  the  evening,'  and  are  afraid  of  running  in  with 
it,  3'ou  must  not,  by  any  means,  lie  to,  but  stand  to  the  southward  uqder  an  easy 
sail ;  otherwise  the  current,  which  always  sets  either  to  the  N.  W.  or  N.  E.  may 
occasion  your  losing  sight  of  the  island ;  and  it  is  possible  that  a  N.  W.  current 
may  carry  you  so  far  to  leewfUPd  as  to  render  it  difficult  to  regain  it. 

Ships  bound  to  the  bays  on  ike  N.  IV.  side,  should  always  endeavour  to  make 
the  north  end  of  the  island,  Which  is  bold  and  clear.  A  cluster  of  large  bold 
rocks,  called  MelvHWs  BocA:#  lies  off"  the  N.  E.  point.  Of  these  the  western- 
most is  very  remarkable,  having  a  large  hole  in  it,  from  north  to  south.  You- 
may  run  as  near  to  these  rocks  as  you  choose,  and  along  the  coast  hence  to 
Man  of  War  Bay. 

MAN  OF  WAR  BAY.— This  bay  is  not  only  the  best  in  Tobago,  but  i»  one 
of  the  best  harbours  in  the  West  Indies,  having  sufficient  depth  for  the  largest 
ships  close  to  tiie  s}iore.  The  distance  from  Melville's  Rocks  to  I^orth  Point 
on  the  N.  E.  C(Me  of  this  bay,  is  about  three  miles.  In  sailing  in,  haul  round  this 
point,  when  ybu  will  have  the  bay  open,  and  you  must  be  careful  not  to  be  takea 
aback,  the  wind  being  very  fluttering  under  the  high  land^ 

You  will  find  no  soundings  until  close  up  in  the  bay,  and  then  from  40  to  10 
fathoms.  Having  entered,  turn  in  and  anchor  as  far  to  windward  as  you  can. 
After  you  are  shut  in,  you  will  see  the  little  bay  on  the  eastern  side,  called  Pi- 
rate's Bay ;  get  as  near  to  that  bay  as  you  can :  you  will  find  all  clear  ground,  and 
may  anchor  in  from  12  to  14,  16  or  17  fathoms.  If  you  cannot  turn  in,  you 
may  anchor  in  35  or  40  fathoms,  and  warp  up.  In  Pirate's  Bay  is  the  water- 
ing-place in  the  rainy  season. 

On  the  south  shore  of  the  bay  you  may  anchor  in  16  or  18  fathoms,  at  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  from  shore,  and  have  good  water  at  all  times,  half  a  mile  from 
the  anchorage  ;  but  there  is  a  great  surf,  which  makes  watering  hazardous. 

The  western  side  of  the  bay  is  a  good  place  for  fishing ;  but  there  is  a  small 
shoal  called  the  Cardinal,  lying  within  half  a  mile  of  the  shore  on  that  side,  about 
half-way  down  the  bay. 

Nearly  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  Point  Corvo,  the  western  point  of  Man 
of  War  Bay,  are  some  bold  rocks,  called  the  Brothers ;  and  in  the  same  direc- 
tion, at  a  league  and  a  half  from  that  point,  are  some  others  of  the  same  descrip- 
tion, called  the  Sisters,  close  to  which  there  is  a  depth  of  40  fathoms.    AH  the 

43 


338 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


coast  hereabout  Is  l>old-to.  From  abreast  of  th«  rocks,  the  south-west  end  of 
the  island,  which  is  low  and  sandy,  may  be  sttni. 

COUUTLAND  BAYS.— Thci  fnat  hay  from  the  northward,  on  tho  western 
side  of  the  island,  excepting  a  few  for  small  vessels,  is  that  called  Great  Court- 
land  Bay,  the  northern  point  of  which,  calhul  Guatu;  Point,  lies  thirteen  miles 
to  the  south-westward  of  tiie  Sislcrs.  To  this  j)()int  a  hirtli  must  be  given,  as  a 
rock,  called  the  linf  Burnt,  wliich  breaks  at  low  wator,  lies  just  off  it.  There 
is  anchorage  in  (i  f.itiuuns,  but  good  fishing  In  9  or  10  fathoms,  either  with  the 
seine,  or  with  tiie  hook  and  line.  The  ground  is  clear,  only  that  there  are  a  few 
stumps  of  trees  close  up  to  the  mouth  of  the  river.  If  the  wind  hangs  to  the 
southward  of  east,  you  will  ride  very  roughly,  and  if  at  N.  E.  will  roll  very 
much.  In  the  bay  you  will  have  the  common  trade-wind  all  day,  and  an  off- 
shore breeze  during  night.  If  you  arrive  in  the  night,  and  do  not  care  to  push 
for  the  bay,  you  may  find  very  good  anchorage  to  windward  of  the  cliff,  in  from 
0  to  20  fathoms,  regular  soundings. 

To  the  southward  of  Great  Courtland  Bay  is  LiltU  Courtlnnd  Bay,  having  ve- 
ry good  anchorage  within  the  windward  pomt,  which  is  pretty  bold.  Vessels 
ride  more  safe  and  smoothly  here  than  in  the  former. 

Between  Man  of  War  Bay  and  Courtland  Bay  are  the  bays  called* B^orfy 
Bay,  Pakiuvkfs  Buy,  Englishman's  Bay,  and  Castana  Bay,  which  have  safe  an- 
chorage for  vessels'of  one  hundred  and  fifty  tons. 

At  the  S.  W.  end  of  Tobago  is  Sandy  Point  Bay,  in  the  bottom  of  which 
ships  may  anchor  in  6  fathoms.  When  you  weigh  for  this  place,  be  sure  of  a 
breeze  to  carry  you  without  the  reef,  called  the  Buckoo,  which  extends  from 
Little  Courtland  Bay  to  Brown's  Point,  and  is  dry,  In  some  places,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  two  miles  from  shore.  If  it  be  calm,  the  current  may  set  you  on  this 
reef.  At  the  distance  of  two  cables'  length  from  the  breakers  you  will  be  safe. 
To  enter  Brown's  Point  Bay,  haul  close  round  the  reef,  and  having  passed  the 
point,  anchor  as  above. 

EASTERN  COAST.— About  three  and  a  half  miles  S.  S.  E.  from  Melville's 


ar  which  there  are  several 

rrtVs  Bay,  in  the  bottom  of 

oms.     The  ground  between 

Currents  very  strong  and  un- 

,  slum  must,  therefore,  keep  well  to 

t,  wlwch  almost  constantly  prevails 


Rocks  lies  the  small  island  called  Little  Tobago 
islets  and  rocks.  Within  tht.-se  is  the  bay  called 
which  vessels  of  150  tons  may  anchor  in  7 
Little  Tobago  and  the  main  is  very  foul,  and  th 
certain.  In  sailing  off  this  part  of  the  coast,  shi 
the  southward,  allowing  for  a  N.  W.  current 
about  Little  Tabago.    ^' 

At  the  distance  of  three  and  a  half  .  .^s  to  the  southward  of  Little  Tobago 
is  Pedro  Point,  and  rather  less  than  two  miles  from  Pedro  Point,  lies  a  high 
rocky  islet,  called  Queen's  Island.  Between  these  points  is  the  bay  called  King^s 
Bay,  which  has  good  anchoring-ground  in  every  part  within  the  wlftdw.ird  point, 
in  from  6  tO  20  fathoms  of  water.  The  land  on  the  eastern  side,  being  high,  inter- 
cepts the  trade-wind,  and  the  swell  from  the  eastward  is  a])t  to  set  a  vessel  down  to 
the  leeward  point ;  the  best  time  to  sail  out  i«  early  in  the  morning,  about  day- 
break, when  the  Avind  blows  fresh  from  the  land  on  the  northward. 

South-westward  from  Queen's  Island  at  the  distance  of  a  league,  lies  a  simi- 
lar islet,  called  Richmond  Island;  and,  one  ! league  and  a  half  from  the  latter,  in 
the  same  direction,  is  a  lesser  islet,  called  Smith's  Island.  These  islets,  being 
situated  off  projecting  points  of  the  coast,  are  conspicuous.  Nearly  a  mile  west 
of  Queen's  Island  is  a  large  dry  rock,  called  the  lioxhurg,  and  between  lies  the 
bay  named  Queen's  Bay.  Between  the  Roxburg  Rock  and  Richmond  Island  is 
Hog  Bay,  in  which  the  ground  is  foul.  To  the  N.  W.  of  Richmond  Island  is  the 
little  bay  called  Halifax  Bay,  which  is  noticed  hereafter.  From  Halifax  Bay, 
extending  nearly  to  Smith's  Island,  there  is  a  dangerous  bank  and  ncf,  half  a 
league  broad,  called  Great  River  Shoal,  on  which  the  depth,  in  several  places,  is 
only  three  fathoms. 

In  running  down  for  Queen's  Bay,  which  lies  within  Queen's  Island,  as  above 
mentioned,  give  the  latter  a  good  birth  until  you  open  a  large  house,  having  a 
gallery  on  a  rising  ground  fronting  the  quay,  which  is  the  only  one  of  that  de 
scription  in  the  bay.     Continue  on  this,  without  borrowing,  until  you  bring  this 


HI-UNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


3d9 


vcit  end  of 


ive  safe  an- 


t 

I 


house  in  a  liiiu  with  onu  on  tht;  liill  iihovu  ;  and  kui'p  this  mark  on,  If  thu  wind 
permits,  until  you  aro  two  cables'  Icinj^th  from  tho  Hhure ;  tluMi  haul  your  wind, 
and  anchor  ut  about  i:>0  fathoiny  from  sliorc  in  0  fatiiomB,  llnu  ground,  abreast 
of  thf!  watrh-himso  on  th(^  btiach.  Slionid  liie  wind  be;  adverse,  you  must  let  go 
an  anchor,  and  warp  up.  In  saliinn  outward,  attend  to  the  same  mark  as  is  in 
sailing;  in,  without  gettinj^over  to  windward. 

The  dangers  are  so  nunmrous,  from  Queen's  Bay  to  the  west  end  of  the  island, 
tiiat  no  stranger  should  venture  witliout  a  pilot.  The  most  accessible  bays  are 
those  descril)ed  as  ff)llow. 

Halifax  Buy,  to  the  N.  W.  of  RiclinKmd  Island,  as  before  mentioned,  iaagood 
bay  for  vessels  of  1.0O  tons,  hut  a  shoal  lies  in  the;  middle  of  the  entrance.  The 
next  is  called  Barhadoes  Bajf,  and  lies  to  the  leeward  of  Smith's  Island.  To 
atoid  Great  River  Shoal,  in  sailing  for  Uarbadoes  Bay,  or  to  the  westward  of  it, 
keep  Little  Tobago  open  without  Richmond  Island,  with  Smith's  Island  bearing 
N.  W.  you  may  lutF  nj)  for  the  bay,  on  cautiously  avoiding  a  reef  of  coral  rocks, 
whicli  stretches  to  the  distance  of  a  cable's  length  from  Granby  Fort  Point,  on 
the  windward  side.  Within  this  *eef,  before  Georgetown,  there  is  a  good  ground 
in  from  12  to  7  fathoms;  particularly  with  a  silk-cotton-tree  on  the  beach  in  a 
line  with  the  flag-staff  on  the  top  of  the  hill. 

Rocklji  Batf,  on  which  the  town  of  Scarborough  is  situated,  is  a  deep  bay,  gene- 
rally safe ;  but  a  heavy  swell  rolls  in  with  the  breeze,  especially  when  it  is  to  the  south 
of  cast.  It  lies  five  and  a  half  miles  to  the  Avestward  of  Barhadoes  Bay.  In: 
sailing  towards  this  place,  keep  Little  Tobago  open  of  Richmond  Island,  as 
above  directed,  to  avoid  Great  River  Shoal:  and  next  observe,  that  the  Chester- 
field Rock  is  a  danger  which  must,  also,  be  cautiously  avoided.  This  is  a  sunken 
rock,  having  only  7  feet  over  it,  and  on  which  the  sea  frequently  breaks.  It 
lies  at  half  a  mile  from  shore,  jiboui  two  and  a  half  miles  to  the  southward 
of  Granby  Fort  Point,  and  at  the  same  distance  to  windward  of  the  east  side  of 
Rockly  Bay.  You  may  sail  clear  within  it,  with  Richmond  Island  open  between 
Smith's  Island  and  the  main ;  and  without  it,  by  keeping  Richmond  Island  open 
without  Smith's  Island ;  for  Jfcichmond  and  Smith's  Islands,  in  a  line,  lead  directly 
on  it.  ' 

When  past  the  ChesterfiAi  Rock,  you  haul  in  for  Scarborough  Point,  which* 
is  a  bold  bluiT  point,  with  a  mvi  on  the  hill.  There  is  no  danger,  provided  you 
keep  the  weather-shore  well  pn  board,  til!  you  open  the  main  street,  which  ex- 
tends directly  up  the  hill.  With  this  mark  you  may  anchor,  in  from  7  to  9  fa- 
thom? being  the  only  clear  part  of  the  bay.  It  is  requjieite,  even  here,  to  buoy 
up  the  cables.  No  stranger  should  attempt  to  leave  the  harbour  witliout  a  pilot, 
as  it  would  be  extremely  hazardous.  The  channel  between  Scarborough  Point 
and  the  reefs  is  less  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  breadth,  and  the  dangers  ex- 
tend thence  to  the  end  of  the  island. 

In  the  Channel,  between  Tobago  and  Trinidad  is  a  bank  or  shoal,  on  which 
5)  fathoms  have  been  £i>und,  and  the  pilots  assert  that  there  are  places  on  it  with 
still  less  water;  it  has  been  sounded  with  great  care,  but  less  than  5^  fathoms 
have  not  been  found.  It  is,  however,  advisable  to  run  with  caution  ;  for  it  is  not 
impossible  that  there  may  be  some  rock,  of  small  extent,  which  has  escaped  no- 
tice. Iivthis  channel  or  strait,  the  current  runs  to  the  westward  at  the  rate  of 
two  miles  per  hour;  but  so  that,  when  approaching  Trinidad,  the  direction  of 
the  current  is  towards  tlie  N.  W.  and  near  Tobago,  towards  the  S.  W.  On  the 
N.  E.  part  of  Tobago  the  current  sets  to  the  north-westward  with  more  veloci- 
ty than  is  stated  above. 


« 


.^       Tht  Island  of  Trinidad. 

There  are  four  ranges  of  mountains  on  the  island ;  exclusive  of  which  the  soil 
is  generally  very  fertile,  and  abundantly  produces  sugar,  coffee,  indigo,  ginger, 
cotton,  and  maize. 


840 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


The  land  In  the  noriiheni  part  is  high,  and  almost  covered  with  woods,  said  to 
be  incorruptible,  upon  a  range  of  high  mountains  extending  nearly  across  tV  ^ 
island.  Near  the  centre  are  two  remarkable  mountains,  of  which  that  named 
Tamanaco  or  Tamany  is  the  hiThest. 

The  most  elevated  summits  on  the  northern  coast  have  been  estimated  at  about 
3000  feet  in  height,  and  some  peaks  of  the  interior  are  supposed  to  be  still 


higher. 


The  Principal  Harbour,  which  is  one  of  the  finest  in  the  world,  is  called  Cha- 
guaramas  or  Port  Royal,  and  is  situated  under  the  north-western  peninsula  of  the 
island,  where  there  is  a  space  of  about  70  square  miles,  on  which  ships  may 
anchor ;  the  depth  of  water  throughout  being  from  12  to  5  fathoms,  and  the  lat- 
ter, in  some  parts,  only  one  mile  from  shore.  The  landing-place,  or  port,  is  that 
called  Puerto  Espana,  or  Port  Spain,  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  Chaguaramas  Bay, 
and  the  capital,  St,  Joseph,  atAnds  on  the  bank  of  a  small  river,  about  7  miles  to 
the  eastward  of  the  port,  r 

The  current  sets  very  strongly  from  the  S.  E.  upon  the  southern  and  eastern 
coasts  of  the  island,  and  is  particularly  rapid  in  the  strait  between  the  southern 
coast  and  the  continent,  through  whirh  it  sets  into  the  Gulf  of  Paria?  another 
current  sets  along  the  northern  coast  from  the  eastward,  through  tlfe  channel 
between  Trinidad  and  Tobago,  in  a  W.  by  S.  direction.  The  effect  of  these 
currents  isf  an  accumulation  of  water,  which  seeks  an  escape  to  the  northward 
from  the  Gulph  of  Paria,  and  which  must  naturally  be  increased  in  the  rainy 
seasons  by  the  influx  from  the  surrounding  lands. 

As  the  water  seeks  its  escape  through  the  Bocas  to  the  northward,  it  meets  the 
westerly  current  from  the  north-eastward,  which  so  far  opposes  it  as  to  cause  a 
perpetual  agitation  of  the  sea.  It  was  from  this  circumstance  that  Colombo  call- 
ed these  passages  Bocas  del  Drago  or  Dragon's  Mouths. 

Shipping  in  general,  bound  for  the  port,  formerly  ran  down  to  the  northward 
of  the  island,  with  theadvantage  of  wind  and  current,  for  the  BOCA  GRANDE, 
or  DRAGON'S  MOUTH,  passing  to  the  westward  of  the  Isle  of  Chacacharreo. 
This  passage  is  more  than  5  miles  broad,  with  a  depth  of  not  less  than  100  fathoms. 
In  entering  this  way  you  must  be  very  cautious  n(4  to  get  too  far  to  leeward; 
for  otherwise  the  current  may  be  so  strong  as  to  render  it  impossible  for  you  to 
gain  the  port.  It  is  therefore  recommended  that  you  haul  round  the  western 
side  of  Chacacharreo,  not  however  within  the  distance  of  a  mile  from  the  south- 
westernmost  land.  Having  passed  the  rock*  laid  down  in  the  Chart,  and  now 
called  the  Diamond,  ma^e.  a  long  board  to  the  S.  E.  and  then  as  the  wind  per- 
mits, to  the  N.  E.  for  the  road,  wherein  you  may  anchor,  at  pleasure,  in  3,  4  or 
5  fathoms.    The  ground  in  general,  is  good  holding  ground,  covered  with  mud. 

The  best,  shortest,  and  most  convenient  passage,  for  ships  bound  inward,  is 
that  called  BOCA  DE  HUEVOS,  or  Egg  Passage,  which  is  sometimes  called 
the  Umbrella  Passage,  from  the  appearance  of  a  remarkable  tree  upon  a  rock, 
which  is  said  to  resemble  an  nnbrella,  and  which  stands  on  the  lee  side. 

The  BOCA  DE  NAVIOS  or  Ship's  Passage  is  considered  as  the  best  channel 
for  ships  sailing  outwards.  It  is  about  one  mile  and  a  half  broad,  and  steep-to 
on  each  side.  Here,  as  in  the  Boca  Grande,  it  is  proper  to  keep  the  eastern  land 
on  board.  To  ships  which  may  attempt  this  passage,  from  the  northward,  the 
wind  will  be  favourable  until  within  the  head,  but  (laws  from  the  high  land  may 
then  be  expected. 


♦  The  Diamond  Rock,  which  lies  to  the  S.  VV.  of  Chacacharreo,  is  about  40  yards  in  circutn- 
fertnce,  and  is  said  to  Imve  only  9  feet  over  it,  on  tlic  shoalest  part,  at  low  water.  On  the 
morning  of  the  26th  of  June  1809,  the  ship  Samuel,  Cnpt.  Sughree,  of  London,  drawing  17 
feet  of  water,  etruck  upon  it,  and  remained  fast  upon  it  for  several  hours.  While  this  ship 
was  aground,  two  others  passed,  one  on  each  side  without  touching,  although  not  at  25  fathoms 
distant,  the  water  being  very  deep  all  round.  The  bearings  by  compass  from  the  ship  were, 
Chacacharreo,  S.  W.  point,  E.  N.  E.  El  Pato,  or  Goose  Island  S.  W.by  W.  i  W.  the  S.  E. 
point  of  Camana  or  Paria  W.  by  S.  The  current  was  setting  very  strongly  from  the  south- 
ward, with  light  variable  winds. 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


341 


The  BOCA  DE  MONAS,  or  Apes'  Passage,  h  the  Boca  next  to  Trinidad. 
This  passage  is  narrow,  and  dangerous  in  several  places ;  yet  there  is  ground,  in 
which  ships  may  anchor  in  25  fathoms.  The  currents  are  here  strong  and  ir- 
regular, and  the  winds  generally  scant. 

In  all  cases,  those  who  come  into  the  Gulf  of  Trinidad  must  be  attentive  to 
hauling  the  wind  in  time :  for,  otherwise,  with  a  light  wind  and  northerly  cur- 
rent, they  may  be  whirled  round,  with  the  stream,  and  forced  back  to  sea. 

If  a  ship  within  the  bay  should  happen  to  drive  from  its  anchors,  she  will  go 
on  shore  upon  soft  ground,  and  may  be  gotten  off  without  damage.  The  best 
ground  is  in  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  bay.  The  town.  Port  Spain,  hasa^stone  jetty, 
and  is  defended  by  batteries ;  a  white  half-moon  battery,  just  aboVe  the  town, 
on  the  brow  of  the  hill,  is  a  good  mark  for  the  bay,  and  may  be  seen  a  long  way 
off.     Large  ships  should  bring  this  battery  to  the  northward  of  N.  N.  E. 

The  Harbour  of  Chaguaramas  is  capable  of  receiving  the  largest  ships  of  war, 
its  depth  being  from  4  to  40  fathoms.  The  shores  are  bold  and  steep  ;  the  bot- 
tom is  gravel  and  ooze.  There  is  good  riding  within  half  a  mile  of  the  eastern 
shore,  in  from  20  to  5  fathoms.  The  careenage  is  shallow,  having  only  from  2 
to  4  fathoms,  and  therefore  adapted  to  merchant-ships,  only.  It  is  high  water  at 
Port  Spain,  on  full  and  change  days,  at  half-past  foiir ;  spring  tides  rise  6  or  7 
feet. 

Having  arrived  within  the  Bocas,  and  well  into  the  Gulf  of  Paria,  you  will  see 
the  harbour  of  Port  Spain  and  the  shipping,  which  opens  to  the  southward  of  the 
isle.Gaspar  Grande.  When  ^n  the  harbour,  you  will  see  St.  David's  Tower 
or  citadel,  which  is  of  white  stone,  and  was  built  by  the  late, Governor  Picton, 
in  the  interior  of  the  fortifications  upon  Ahercromby  Heights.  In  sailing  up, 
with  the  tower  about  E.  by  N.  you  will  see  the  forts  on  Gaspar  Grande  and 
Punta  Gorda  which  protect  the  careenage  and  Chaguaramas  Harbour. 

The  Gulf  of  Paria  is  so  abundant  in  fish,  as  to  be  capable  of  supplying  th&. 
greater  part  of  the  West  India  Islands.    It  has  plenty  of  sbell-fish,  particularly^ 
oysters,  together  with  lobsters,  crabs  and  prawns.    The  southern  entrance  of  the 
Gulf,  called  BOCA  DE  SIERPE,  or  the  SERPENT'S  MOUTH,  is  eleven 
leagues  broad  at  the  eastern  entrance ;  but  on  the  west  is  impeded  by  an  island, 
with  some  rocks,  called  SOLDADO,  or  the  SOLDIERS.   Ships  never  attempt'' 
an  egress  from  the  Gulf  by  this  channel,  because  the  current  from  the  eastwarfl 
sets  so  strongly  through,  as  to  render  a  passage  impracticable. 

Off  point  Ikaqu<^  lies  a  rock  on  which  a  Brig  from  New  London  struck  in  1824, 
called  ROCK  LOO.  It  is  almost  round,  90  feet  in  diameter,  and  lies  from  1  to 
1 }  mile  from  the  point.  You  may  find  a  good  channel  inside  op  outside  of  this 
rock  of  about  five  fathoms,  and  10  fathoms  within  30  or  40  feet  of  it.  In  passing 
either  side  of  this  rock,  you  must  keep  a  good  look-out,  as  you  cannot  see  it  a 
great  distance  even  in  smooth  sea.  Off  point  Cedeer  you  find  the  rock  called 
BARREL  OF  BEEF,  which  is  also  roun^  and  but  6  or  8  feet  in  diameter  hav- 
ing a  floating  BUOY  on  it,  bearing  south-westerly  |  of  a  mile  from  point  De 
Bray,  with  5  fathoms  water  inside,  but  the  outside  passage  is  preferable.  Port 
Spain  bears  about  north  from  Point  De  Bray.  , 


n     Description  of  and  Directions /or  the  Gulf  o/*  Paria  and  Island  of 

Trinidad; 


iiM 


[From  the  "  Derrotero  de  las  Antillas"  ^c] 

Between  the  Island  of  Trinidad  and  the  Coast  of  Colombia  there  is  a  great 
gulf,  named  the  GULF  of  PARIA,  which  offers  safe  shelter  to  vegsels,  because 
they  may  anchor  in  any  part  of  it  without  the  least  risk,  and  in  the  depth  of  wa- 
ter whicli  suits  them.    This  gulf  liaa  two  channels,  one  to  the  north,  and  the 


342 


liUJNl's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


other  to  the  soutli.  Tlie  northern  channel  is  divided  into  various  hranches  by 
some  islands,  and,  in  the  southern,  there  is  an  islet,  from  which  extends  some 
dangerous  rocky  shoals.  In  the  whole  circuit  of  this  gulf  there  is  no  other  Eu- 
ropean establishment  than  that  of  PUERTO  ESPANA,  (Port  Spain)  on  the 
western  coast  of  Trinidad,  of  whicli  it  is  the  metropolis  :  and  here  centres  the 
whole  of  both  the  import  and  export  trade  of  Trinidad.  It  is,  therefore,  the  place 
to  which  almost  all  those  who  enter  the  gulf  are  bound,  and  whence  they  subse- 
quently direct  their  course. 

Nothing  would  be  more  Cv^sy  than  to  enter  the  Gulf  of  Paria,  either  from  the 
north  or  south,  and  to  navigate  in  it  were  it  not  for  the  currents  which  are  expe- 
rienced in  it ;  these  emanate  not  only  from  the  general  current,  which  runs  to  the 
westward,  along  ail  the  coast  of  Guyana,  but  also  from  another  produced  by  the 
tides,  which  offer  some  obstacles,  that  should  be  provided  against  by  a  know- 
ledge of  the  effects  which  the  currents  cause  in  the  different  parts  of  the  gulf. 

From  July  to  November  is  here  the  season  of  the  rains,  in  which  the  breezes  or 
general  winds  are  very  light,  and  are  from  E.  S.  E.  and  S.  E.  In  the  other 
months  the  breeze  blows  fresh  from  N.  E.  or  E.  N.  E.  This,  and  the  having  two 
entrances  into  the  Gulf  of  Paria,  induces  a  preference  to  be  given  to  the  southern 
channel  in  the  rainy  season,  and  to  the  northern  in  the  dry  season  ;  it  is,  therefore, 
proper  to  make  the  land  of  Trinidad  according  to  the  season  in  which  you  go 
there  ;  viz.  from  December  to  June,  you  ought  to  make  Punta  de  Gcdera  or  N. 
E.  point ;  and  from  July  to  December,  you  should  direct  your  course  for  Punta  de 
Galeota,  the  S.  E.  point;  these  two  points  may  be  easily  and  certainly  recognized. 


Description  of  the  Exterior  Land  q/"  Trinidad,  and  of  Marks  for  know- 
S$  ingitby. 

The  Cordillera,  or  branch  of  elevated  mountains  which  extend  all  along  the 
north  coast  of  this  island,  from  East  to  West,  is  highest  to  the  northward,  nearly 
wn  the  meridian  of  Las  Cuebas,  and  to  the  eastward  near  Point  Salive. 

Although  from  the  parallel  of  the  middle  of  the  Island  of  Tobago,  on  the  east 
side,  the  Island  of  Trinidad  may  be  seen  distinctly  in  clear  weather,  the  Punta  de 
Galera  (Galley  Point)  cannot  be  recognized  at  more  tlianthe  distance  of  S  leagues, 
it  being  low,  and  projecting  from  the  coast;  but,  on  coming  from  the  east,  the 
mountains  near  Punta  de  Galera  may  be  seen  at  1 1  or  12  le:igues.  All  the  rest 
of  the  eastern  coast,  from  Salive  to  Punta  de  Galeoto,  is  about  two-thirds  lower 
than  the  former,  except  near  Punta  ManzanUla,  (Manchioneal  Point,)  whence 
four  mountains  rise  to  the  W.  S.  W.  and  between  a  part  of  Manzanilla  Point  may 
be  seen  at  from  8  or  9  leagues ;  and  this  part  is  named  the  Barrancas  of  Mansa- 
nilla. 

POINT  GUATARO  may  be  known,  from  5  or  6  leagues  off,  by  its  stretching 
out  to  sea,  and  by  the  almost  equal  height  of  the  tongue  which  forms  it ;  and 
Cape  Galeota  may  be  distinctly  seen  at  the  distance  of  fi  or  7  leagues.  From  the 
last  the  mountains  again  begin  to  rise,  along  the  whole  of  the  south  coast ;  and 
the  largest  is  situated  a  little  to  the  westward  of  the  Punta  de  Casa  Cruz ;  in  the 
S.  E.  they  diminish  so  considerably  from  near  Punta  de  Hcrin,  or  Erin,  to  Pun- 
ta de  Ycacos,  the  S.  W.  point,  that  the  last  is  a  low  beach. 


The  Interior  or  Western  Coast  of  Trinidad. 

All  th<!  western  coast  of  Trinidad  is  low :  the  mountain  of  Naiwrima  is  tlie 
only  one  on  the  ^hole  of  it.  This  mountain  may  be  seen  at  the  aistanco  of  ten 
leagues  on  clear  days ;  it  is  high  and  round,  .-md  may  serve  for  a  mark  when  you 
are  within  the  Gulf. 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


343 


'^  Coast  of  Colombia,  within  the  Gulf. 

The  coast  of  Colombia  is  low,  wet,  and  divided  hy  n  great  number  of  chan- 
nels and  rivers,  which  discharge  their  waters  into  the  Gulf.     Of  these  the  deep- 
est and  most  frequented,  is  that  of  Guarapiche,  in  the  west;  for  by  it  the  com- 
merce of  the  interior  of  Cumana  is  carried  on,  and  it  is  fit  for  tho  largest  hchoo 
ners  and  balahoos. 


Tidesj  Anchorages^  and  Watering-Places. 

The  best  anchorages  on  the  northern  coast  of  Trinidad  are  the  bays  of  Tofo, 
Rio  Grande,  Punta  de  Chuparas,  Las  Cuebas,  and  Maracas,  and  to  leeward  of 
the  Point  of  Maraharal,  in  which  water  may  be  procured,  and  there  is  a  beach 
which  facilitates  the  obtaining  of  it.  Along  the  whole  coast,  and  for  three  leagues 
outside,  the  water  runs  to  the  N.  E.  or  east  with  the  ebb-tide,  and  N.  W.  with 
the  flood-tide.  Out  of  these  limits  the  current  sets  always  to  the  N.  W.  but 
with  more  rapidity  during  the  flood  than  during  the  ebb ;  and  it  follows  the  same 
direction  in  the  channel  between  this  island  and  Tobago. 

On  all  the  east  coast  there  is  no  watering-place,  for  the  large  rivers  discharge 
themselves  into  the  bays  of  Manzanilla  and  Guataro ;  yet  the  bars  at  their  en- 
trances will  not  allow  even  a  canoe  to  pass.  On  all  this  coast  the  current  sets 
constantly  about  north,  but  with  much  less  force  during  the  ebb  than  the  flood: 
there  is  on  it,  also,  always  a  heavy  swell,  caused  by  the  breeze,  and  which  ren- 
ders it  very  diflicult  to  approach. 

You  can  obtain  water  only,  and  that  at  the  expense  of  some  labour,  on  thi 
south  side,  to  the  west  of  the  point  of  Casa  Cruz,  and  about  a  mile  from  it^ 
where  n  torrent,  precipitating  itself  from  the  mountains,  falls  into  a  well,  or  hole 
upon  the  shore.    The  current  on  this  coa3t  (the  south)  runs  always  nearly  west, 
and  its  ordinary  velocity  is  two  or  two  and  a  half  miles. 

Oil   the  western  coast  there  are  many  places  where  you  may  obtain  water.  * 
From  Punta  Fcacos*to  Punta  de  Brea  or  Pitch  Point,  the  #ood-tide  sets  to  the 
southward  and  westward,  and  the  ebb  to  the  northward  and  (eastward.    From 
Punta  de  Brea  to  Puerto  Espana,  it  follows  the  direction  of  tne  coast  with  very 
liillc  difterencc  ;  that  is,  the  flood-tide  sets  south,  and  th^  ebb-tide  north. 


^ 


To  make  Trinidad. 


The  soundings,  which  extend  to  the  distance  of  seventeen  leagues  from  the 
eastern  coast  of  this  island,  offer  a  secure  means  of  rectifying  the  situntiou  of 
any  vessel  bound  to  it,  and  renders  it  unnecessary  to  lie-to  or  use  the  other  pre- 
cautions to  which  recourse  is  generally  had  at  night,  or  in  thick  weather;  for 
when  placed  in  the  parallels  of  Trinidad,  you  will  find  soundings  without  more 
trouble  than  that  of  casting  the  lead  at  every  twenty  miles,  as  you  advance,  when 
in  the  proximity  of  it;  for  it  is  very  certain  that  the  soundings  and  the  latitude 
will  give  you  the  ship's  place,  and,  this  kr.own,  you  have  only  to  shape  your 
course  for  Point  Galera  or  Point  Galeota  to  enter  the  Gulf  either  by  the  north 
or  south  channels,  according  to  the  season ;  but,  if  it  should  so  happen  that  two 
or  three  days  pass  without  being  able  to  obtain  a  meridian  altitude,  it  is  very  pos- 
sible that,  while  the  mariner  believes  himself  on  the  parallels  of  Trinidnd,  ho 
may  find  himself  on  those  of  Tobago,  or  even  of  Grenada;  for  tho  waters 
run  with  violence  towards  the  N.  W.  and  therefore  it  is  very  necessary  to 
omit  no  opportunity  of  observing  the  latilude,  whether  by  the  stars  or  by  the 
sun,  when  not  on  tlie  meridian ;  and  it  is  j^lso  better  always  to  make  the  point 
to  which  he  dinicts  his  course,  from  the  southward  rather  than  from  the  north 
ward,  because  the  cunenta  always  favour  the  gcttj^g  to  windward  to  the  north- 


4 


•  « 


^0§- 


344 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


f  \ 


t 


ward;  and  you  will  go  with  more  facility,  and  in  less  time,  to  the  N.  E.  from 
Point  Galeotn  to  Point  Galera,  than  you  can  from  tlie  latter  to  the  former, 
though  there  is  generally  no  difficulty  in  doing  this  also.  One  or  other  of  these 
points  being  recognized,  you  must  direct  your  navigation  towards  the  Gulf  as 
follows : 

From  Punta  de  Galera  you  ought  to  run  along  the  coast  at  the  distance  of  two 
miles.  It  is  all  clear,  and  you  may  keep  within  half  a  mile  of  it,  if  necessary, 
as  far  as  Punta  de  Corozal,  where  it  is  advisable  to  approach  the  shore,  in  order 
to  enter  the  Bocas  pr  mouths  with  greater  facility. 

The  Bocas  or  Mouths  are  four :  the  first  is  called  Bocas  de  Monas,  (or  Ape's) 
which  is  formed  by  the  N.  W.  extremity  of  Trinidad  and  the  Isla  de  Monas 
(Ape's  Island) ;  the  second  is  Boca  de  Huevos,  (Eggs)  formed  by  the  Islade  Mo- 
nas and  Isla  de  Huevos ;  third,  Boca  de  Navios,  (Line-of-battle  ship's  Boca)  form- 
ed by  the  islands  of  Huevos  and  Chacacharreo ;  and  the  fourth  Boca  Grande, 
(the  Great  Mouth)  is  formed  by  the  island  of  Chacachaireo  and  the  coast  of 
Colombia. 

In  the  Boca  de  Monas  the  waters  run  out  with  the  ebb-tide,  at  the  rate  of 
from  one  to  two  miles  an  hour,  and  something  less  with  the  flood-tide,  but  the 
water  always  runs  out  of  it.  As  this  passage  is  much  exposed  to  calms  from 
the  height  of  its  shore,  as  it  is  the  most  crooked,  the  longest,  and  narrowest  of 
all  the  passages,  as  well  as  being  full  of  whirlpools,  and  the  only  one  of  the 
mouths  which  has  shoals,  we  recommend  it  to  every  person  to  give  the  prefer- 
ence to  any  of  the  other  passages,  although  this  be  the  farthest  to  windward. 
In  this  passage  the  tide  flows  at  Sh.  50m.  on  the  days  of  the  full  and  change. 

The  water  runs  out  from  the  Boca  de  Huevos  during  the  ebb-tide,  with  some- 
thing less  velocity  than  it  does  from  the  former ;  and  with  the  flood  it  is  almost 
stationary.  As  this  passage  is  the  shortest  of  all,  a,:,  it  is  to  windward  of  the  two 
Jbllowing,  and  as  it  is  perfectly  clean,  we  consider  it  as  the  most  proper  to  enter 
the  Gulf  by ;  in  doing  which  it  is  better  to  keep  near  the  Isle  de  Huevus  than 
the  Isle  de  Monos,  because  the  current  inclines  to  the  N.  E. 

In  the  Boca  de  Navios  the  water  always  runs  out,  during  the  flood-tide,  at  the 
rate  of  a  mile  and  a  half,  but,  during  the  ebb,  it  runs  almost  four  mileb  an  hour. 
It  is  high  water  here  on  the  full  and  change  days  of  the  moon,  at  3h.  39m.  The 
entrance  of  this  motth  is  accessible  at  high  water  only ;  but,  in  exchange  it  is 
the  best  to  sail  ou<^  *'.'ough. 

In  the  BocaG.iv.:e  the  ebb-tide  runs^  with  less  velocity  than  in  any  of  the 
other  three,  and  with  the  flood-tide  the  water  is  almost  entirely  at  rest.    It  is 
,.  very  clean;  .'iid  being  of  such  amplitude,  it  allows  of  working  through,  if  neces- 
sary ;  but  a^  it  is  to  the  leeward  of  all  the  others,  those  only  enter  by  It  who 
have  been  unable  to  make  the  island. 

In  none  of  the  mouths  can  you  find  bottom  with  100  fathoms  in  mid-channel, 
and  a  ship  of  the  line  may  run  so  close  to  any  of  the  isles,  as  almost  to  touch  the 
shore  with  its  yard-arms ;  except  at«  those  points  marked  on  the  charts  with  pro- 
jecting stones  or  reefs. 

After  what  we  have  said  relative  to  the  Bocas,  it  will  be  known  that  the  se- 
cond, or  Boca  de  Huevas,  ought  to  be  preferred  for  sailing  inward,  and  you 
ought  to  calculate  so  as  to  enter  it  with  the  flood-tide,  and  with  a  breeze  that 
will  ensure  the  vt  asel's  being  under  command ;  but,  if  the  wind  is  such  that  you 
can  lie  through  it  on  one  stretch,  and  that  you  can  run  more  than  four  miles  an 
hour,  there  is  no  necessity  to  wait  for  a  favourable  tide.  At  night,  if  it  be  clear, 
there  is  no  Inconvenience  or  risk  in  entering  this  Boca,  excepting  that  of  running 
foul  of  some  of  the  islets,  and  that  is  next  to  impossible;  but  if  calm,  or  little 
wind,  or  the  tide  does  not  suit,  or  the  night  is  obscure,  or  from  an  excess  of  cau- 
tion, though  it  may  be  clear,  you  resolve  to  wait  for  a  mora  fit  or  adequate  oppor- 
tunity to  enter,  you  can  anchor  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile  from  the  shore  in  22 
fathoms,  unless  the  wind  be  at  N.  E.  which  heaves  in  much  sea ;  and  it  is  better 
to  keep  your  situation  by  making  short  tacks  upon  the  same  coast,  along  which, 
from  Punta  del  Toco  to  Punta  du  Ghupara,  the  bottom  is  of  mud;  to  the  south- 
ward of  that  it  is  of  fine  gravel  and  coarse  sand ;  and,  from  the  west  of  that, 
to  the  Bocas,  it  is  of  green-coloured  mud.    These  diflcrences  of  bottom  will  vc- 


l 
\ 

,1* 


»    .' 


« 


BLBNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOTS 


^r 


345 


ry  well  enable  any  one  to  know  the  part  of  the  coast  on  which  he  is.  8a  aoon 
as  you  are  within  the  Bocas,  you  ought  to  haul  by  the  wind  on  the  larboard  tack, 
both  to  get  away  from  the  Bocas,  and  to  get  nearer  to  the  coast  of  Trinidad; 
and  in  general,  this  tack  ought  to  be  followed  while  the  flood-tide  lasts,  and  take 
the  starboard  tack  so  soon  as  the  ebb  begins,  when  you  will,  to  a  certainty,  fetch 
into  the  anchorage,  or  want  very  little  of  getting  into  it. 

It  may  appear  to  some  better  to  work  tack  and  tack,  after  you  have  entered 
the  Gulf,  especially  if  the  tack  to  larboard  is  not  the  most  favourable  ^  but  it 
ought  to  be  remembered  that  the  currents  always  run  strongest  opposite  to  and 
tiearthe  straits;  and,  thus,  having  begun  to  tack  very  near  the  Bocas,  it  ivill  not 
be  strange  if  the  ebb-tide  carries  them  out  again,  or  that  they  may  be  obl^d  to 
anchor,  to  present  this ;  or,  if  neither  of  these  happen,  they  will  meet  with  the 
ebb-tide,  which  is  against  getting  into  Port  Spain.  But  on  the  contrary,  having 
prolonged  the  tacit  well  into  the  Gulf,  even  if  necessary,  ta  the  parallel  of  Mount 
Naparima :  from  that  situation  the  ebb-tide  will  be  most  advantageous  to  the 
starboard  tack,  so  that  they  may  either  proportion  their  course,  so  as  to  fetch  the 
anchorage,  or  will  gain  it  by  making  a  short  tack.  Whenever  it  is  calm,  or  tlie 
win^is  so  light,  that  you  can  gain  nothing,  come-tc  "vith  your  kedge,  which  will 
be  safficieat  to  hold  you  against  the  strength  of  the  tide.  When  you  possibly 
can  avoid  it,  always  avoid  using  your  large  anphors,  because  they  take  such  a 
hold  of  the  clay,  that  it  is  diffij^lt  to  purchase  them  again.  In  Puerto  Espaaa 
you  anchor  in  the  S'.  W.  of  it,  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  according  to  the  size  of 
your  vessel,  and  moor  with  your  bowers  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  and  a  stream-cable 
and  anchor  out  asteroi 


The  Navigation  from  Cape  Galeato  to  the  South-Channel,  and  fro^^ 
that  Channel  into  the  Gulf,  and  thence  to  the  Anchorage  at  Puerta 
Espana  or  Port  Spain. 

Aaving,  recognised  Cape  Galeota,  run  along  the  coast  at  two  miles  off,  where  ' 
you  will  have  from  8  to  10  fathoms  of  water,  free  from  all  risk;  and  although  you 
may  observe  a  change  in  the  colour  of  the  water,  particularly  to  the  eastward  of 
Pomt  Erin,  and  near  to  it,  you  need  not  be  alarmed,  for  this  is  caused  by  the 
current.  So  soon  as  you  pass  Punta  Q;iemada  (Burnt  Point)  ruh  along  within  a 
quarter  Of  a  mile  of  the  shore,  without  fear,  and  take  the  channel  which  suits 
you  best  according  to  circumstances. 

The  FIRST  CHANNEL  is  that  forined  by  Punta  de  Ycacos,  and  a  shoal 
which  lies  to  the  west  of- it,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile,  i'his  shoal  is  about 
two  cable's  length  in  extent,  from  east  to  west,  and  there  are  9  feet  of  water  on 
it,  over  rocks.  This  channel  has  a  depth  of  10  fathoms ;  and  Punta  de  Ycaoos, 
which  is  a  tongue  of  sand,  stretching  into  the  sea,  in  a  circular  form,  is  so  bold  that, 
at  half  a  cable's  length  from  it,  there  are  3  and  9  fathoms  of  water.  The  current 
in  this  channel  runs  to  the  S.  W.  with  the  flood-tide,  at  thfe  rate  of  2J  miles;  with 
the  ebb-tide  it  sets  to  the  N.  W.  and  with  the  velocity  of  3  or  3i  miles  an  hour. 

The  SECOND  CHANNEL  is  formed  by  the  above-mentioned  shoal  or  rochs, 
and  by  another  shoal  of  gravel  and  rocks,  which  lies  to  the  N.  W.  of  it,  and  on 
which %ere  are  4  fathoms  water.  This  shoal  lies  from  Punta  del  Gallo  S.  66° 
W.  true,  distant  3  miles,  and  from  Punta  de  Ycacos  N.  73°  W.  true,  two  miles 
distant;  the  greatest  extent  of  it  is  three  quarters  of  a  mile  in  the  direction  of 
N.  W.  and  S.  E.  The  currents  in  this  channel  take  almost  the  same  direction  ag 
in  the  former;  and  the  channel  is  a  mile  in  width.       * 

The  THIRD  CHANNEL  is  formed  by  the  said  shoaK  and  the  islet  De  Sol4a- 
do^  (Soldier's  Island,)  with  its  reefs  and  shoals  to  (he  South  and  S.  E.    This 
Channel  is  two  short  miles  in  extent  from  E.  to  W.    At  two  and  a  half  cable's      * 
length,  from  the  reefs  of  the  eastern  part  of  the  Soldado,  T  fathoms  of  water  are 
found;  in  the  middle  of  the  channel,  9  fathoms;  and  near  the  shoal,  6  fathom!. 

.  44 


•  •• 


^  ^.\j. 


346 


ULUNT'S  AUEBiCAN  COAS'f  FILOX. 


With  the  flood-tide  the  waters  run  W.  by  S.  at  the  rate  of  S  and  Sj  miles  \  and 
with  the  ebb  they  run  N.  W.  and  W.  N.  W.  with  the  velocity  of  4  and  4j  miles 
per  hour. 

The  FOURTH  CHANNEL  is  formed  by  the  hkt  del  Soldado,  with  its  reeft 
and  shoals  to  the  south  of  it,  and  the  coast  of  Colombia.  It  is  4  miles  in  extent ; 
the  current  in  it  always  runs  N.  W.  or  W.  N.  W.  at  the  rate  of  4^  or  5  miles  an 
hour ;  in  the  middle  of  the  channel,  and  near  (he  Soldado ;  but  at  half  a  mile 
from  the  Colombian  coast  its  velocity  is  only  1}  mile. 

To  ENTER  BY  THE  FIRST  CHANNEL,  you  have  only  to  rotind  Punta 
de  Ycacos  at  less  than  a  table's  length,  luffing  up  in  proportion  as  you  double  it, 
until  you  are  close  hauled ;  or  steer  to  the  north  to  pass  at  a  convenient  distance 
from  the  Points  of  Coral  and  Gallos.  This  cbannel  Cannot  be  dangerous  cither 
by  day  or  night,  especially  with  the  ebb-tide,  the  current  of  which  aids  you  in 
passing  the  ^oal  to  leeward.  You  can  anchor,  if  necessary,  and  can  never  run 
any  risk  of  getting  ashore,  leaving  the  shoal  at  least  9  cable's  length  from  the 
vessel. 

To  ENTER  BY  THE  SECOND  CHANNEL  it  is  necessary,  after  youfaave 
made  Punta  Quemada,  and  run  along  the  coast  at  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  to  steer 
towards  the  Soldado ;  and  keep  on  the  same  course  until  the  tvhole  of  Point  Gal- 
lo  is  open  past  Coral  Point,  when  you  may  Iu|[up ;  but  not  higher  than  to  the 
N.  N.  E.  until  you  are  E.  and  W.  with  Point  Coral,  when  you  may  haul  close 
to  the  wind,  to  nCvir  the  coast  of  Trinidad. 

To  ENTER  BT  THE  THIRD  CHANNEL,  you  must  steer  towards  the 
Soldado,  as  if  to  enter  the  ^cond  channel,  and  continue  that  course  until  Punta 
del  Gallo  bears  N.  E.  by  ]  \  E.  after  which  you  may  luff  North,  until  the  south 
front  of  Punta  de  iTcacos  bears  E.  S.  E.  )  E.  and  Punta  del  Oallo  E.  by  N.  and 
then  haul  up  to  fetch  the  coast  of  the  island. 
0K  To  ENTER  BY  THE  FOURTH  CHANNEL  you  must  steer  so  as  to  pass 
two  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  Soldado;  and  when  it  bears  N.  E.  luff  up 
North,  and  run  afterwards,  luF.ng  up  successively,  by  little  and  little,  until  you 
haul  by  the  wind  to  gain  the  coast  of  the  island.  Much  care  should  be  taken  not 
to  get  nearer  to  the  Soldado,  than  the  two  miles  above  mentioned  i  gtving  nduch 
^  consideration  to  the  current,  which  will  hurry  you,  with  great  force,  towards  the 
N.  W. 

From  all  that  has  been  stated  if  results  that,  at  whatever  time  you  can  enter 
into  the  Gulf  by  the  SOUTHERN  BOCAS,  and  even  by  night,  if  it  be  clear, 
that  the  first  Boca  is  the  best;  not  only  becaust;  it  is  to  windward,  but  also  be- 
cause, by  simply  luffing,  you  pass  all  the  danger  in  your  way,  espedally  with 
the  ebb-tide ;  mdeed  there  can  be  no  danger  if  you  keep  an  anchor  ready  to  let 
go,  in  the  event  of  its  suddenly  falling  calm ;  or  any  other  accident  happening, 
which  might  drive  the  vessel  towards  the  shoal.  By  night  none  of  the  other  Bo- 
cas  can  be  so  easily  taken  as  this,  because  you  have  to  pass  at  less  than  a  cable's 
length  from  the  point ;  at  any  rate,  this  renders  the  obscurity  of  the  night  of  lit- 
tle importance,  as  it  is  welI,|^nown  that  you  can  see  with  sumcieot  distinctness  at 
80  short  a  distance. 

But  if,  notwithstanding  the  facility  of  entering  the  Gulf  by  some  of  these 
mouths,  circumstances  should  occur  to  oblige  you  to  defer  it,  be  it  from  calms 
or  10  wait  for  day-light,  you  can  anchor  on  the  south  coast  of  Trinidad ;  but  do 
not  liave  recourse  to  lying  off  and  on ;  for,  with  the'current,  which  always  runs 
in,  it  would  be  difficult  to  maintain  your  ground  at  any  determinate  pomt^ 

Th.^  channel  once  passed,  and  finding  yourself  wUhin  the  Gulr,  shape  your 
course  to  gain  the  west  coast  of  the  island,  which  you  rciy  coast  along,  at  the 
distance  of  Sj^ior  S  miles,  to  Cabo  dc  la  Brea,  or  Pitch  Cape.  From  this  cape 
Puerto  Espana  is  scarcely  distant  9  leagues,  and  by  steering  N.  N.  E.  you  will 
very  soon  see  the  buildii^gs  in  it.  In  case  you  cannot  steer  that  course,  you  must 
beat  up,  tack  and  tack ;  but  do  not  stand  closer  in  than  th<'ee  miles,  as  there  is 
shallow  water  along  the  coast ;  and  if  you  choose  to  prolong  your  tacks  into  the 
bay  of  Naparima,  you  must  tack  at  four  iailes  from  the  coast  and  give  ft  wide 
bifth  to  t^vo  ehoafe  which  are  in  it :  Ae  one  W.  J  S.  from  the  Mount,  about  t^'o 


»LUNT  S   AMERICAN   COASX   FltO'i'. 


"'^.W 


«>i 


3)  milea  i  and 
t  and  4}  miles 

with  its  reeft 
iiles  in  extent ; 
I  or  5  miles  an 
It  half  a  mile 

>  round  Punta 
you  double  it, 
intent  distance 
ngerous  cither 
ich  aids  you  in 
can  never  run 
ngth  from  the 

« 

after  youliave 
I  mile,  to  steer 
e  of  Point  Gat- 
ler  than  to  the 
may  haul  close 

tr  towards  the 
rse  until  Punta 
until  the  south 
lo  E.  by  N.  and 

>r  so  as  to  pass 
B  N.  E.  luffup 
ittle,  until  you 
Id  be  taken  not 
i  giving  nduch 
ce,  towards  the 

you  can  enter 
;,  if  it  be  clear, 
•d,  but  also  be- 
especially  with 
or  ready  to  let 
ent  happening, 
f  the  other  Bo- 
I  than  a  cablets 
he  night  of  lit- 

distinctness  at 

some  of  these 
i  it  flrom  calms 
•inidad ,'  but  do 
:h  ahray's  runs 
e  pointy 
jlr,  shape  youf 
It  along,  at  the 
rom  this  ca^e 
N.  E.  you  will 
urse,  you  must 
lies,  as  there  is 
r  tacks  into  the 
id  give  a  wide 
unt)  about  two 


and  a  half  miles ;  and  the  other  W.  S.  W.  |  W.  from  it,  at  the  distance  of  four 
miles. 

From  the  Island  of  Trinidad,  where  the  easterly  variation  is  about  4°,  that 
variation  is  found  to  increase  to  the  eastward.  By  observations  in  1816,  at  Cape 
Vela,  end  thence  to  Chagre,  from  6°  to  61^  E.  in  the  Bay  of  Honduras;  at  Vera 
Cruz  about  9*^  E.  and  at  Tampico,  8^  east. 


General  Directions  for  the  making  of   and  navigating  amon^,  thia 

Caribbee  Islands. 

[From  the  Derrotero  de  las  AntiUas.] 

As  to  choosing  the  north  or  south  part  of  any  of  theseisles  for  making  your 
land-fall,  you  ought  to  consider,  firstly,  which  point  is  nearest  to  the  port  or  road 
to  which  you  are  destined ;  and,  secondly,  the  season  in  which  you  go.  In  the 
dry  ^easQU,  it  is  to  be  remembered  that  the  winds  are  generally  frdm  the  north- 
eastward, and  in  the  rainy  season  they  are  often  fk'om  the  south-eastward.  Thus, 
in  the  dry  season,  it  is  best  to  make  the  north  side,  and,  the  wet  season,  the  south, 
but  without  losing  sight  of  the  0rst  consideration. 

There  can  be  no  mistake  in  recognising  any  of  the  Antilles ;  end,  in  making 
St.  Bartholomew'' s  and  St.  Martifi's  alone,  can  there  be  any  doubt  on  seeing  at 
once  the  eminences  or  heights  of  various  islands.  That  this  may  not  mislead 
any  one,  they  must  remember  the  following  instructions : 

When  in  the  parallel  of  St.  Bartholomew's,  at  less  than  four  leagues  off,  if  there 
be  no  fog  or  haze,  the  islands  of  St.  Eustatius,  Saba,  St.  Kitts,  Nevis,  and  St> 
Martin's  appear  plainly.  ^ 

The  mountain  of  St.  Eustatius  fonqs  a  kind  of  table,  with  uniform  declivities 
to  the  east  and  west:  the  top  is  level;  and  at  the  east  part  of  this  plain  a  peak 
rises,  which  makes  it  very  remarkable.  To  the  west  of  the  mountain  seems  to  be  a 
great  strait,  in  consequence  of  the  lands  near  it  being  under  the  horizon,  (or 
seeming  drowned,)  and  to  the  west  of  that  there  then  appears,  as  it  were,  ano- 
ther long  low  island,  the  N.  W.  part  of  which  is  highest ;  hut  it  is  necessary  not 
tq  hig  deceived,  for  all  that  land  is  part  of  the  land  of  St.  Eustatius.  Prom  this 
station  Saba  appears  to  the  N.  W.  rt  is  not  so  high  as  St.  Eustatius,  and  apparent- 
ly of  less  extent  than  the  western  part  of  St.  Eustatius,  which  is  seen  insulated. 

The  N,  W.  part  of  St.  Kitts  is  also  seen,  formed  by  great  mountains,  in  appear- 
ance as  elevated  as  St.  Eustatius,  with  low  land  to  the  east ;  to  the  eastward  of 
this  low  land  Nevis  will  be  seen  apparently  higher  than  alt  the  others. 

The  lands  of  St.  Martin's  are  notably  higher  than  those  of  St.  Bartholomew's  ; 
and  this  island  appears  also  when  you  are  some  leaf  ^es  farther  distant  from  it 
than  from  St.  Bartholomew's. 

When  there  are  any  clouds  which  hinder  St.  Martin's  fk-om  lieing  seen,  there 
may  be  some  hr  It^tion  in  recognising  St.  BartholoiH^sw's ;  and  thus  it  is  proper 
to  notice  that  tli#  latter,  seen  upon  its  own  parallel,  appears  small,  and  with  four 
peaks,  tending  north  and  south,  and  occupying  almost  its  whole  extent ;  and,  if 
you  are  not  more  than  eight  leagues  f^om  it,  you  will  see,  also,  the  appearance 
of  an  islet  to  the  north,  and  another  to  the  south,  at  a  very  short  distance.  A^ 
this  island  has  neither  trees,  high  mountains,  nor  thickets,  it  is  not  subject  to  fogs ; 
and  it  may  therefore  be  seen  oftener  than  St.  Martin's,  St.  Kitts,  Nevis,  St  Eus- 
tatius, and  Saba ;  it  is  therefore  adviseable  to  keep  its  apj^arance  in  mind. 

At  eight  leagues  to  the  east  of  St.  Bartholomew's  you  may  r  e  Nevis,  very 
high ;  from  it  to  the  west  the  strait  called  the  Narrows,  and  then  the  lands  of  St. 
Kitts,  appearing  to  rise  out  of  the  water,  and  which  continue  increasing  in  height 
to  the  westward,  so  that  the  westernmost  of  two  mountains,  which  are  at  the 
west  part  of  it,  il  the  highest.  This  mountain,  which  is  higher  than  that  called 
Mount  Misery,  has,  to  the  weal  of  ii,ii  gentle  declivity,  tenninating  in  low  land ; 
and  it  c«nnot  be  mftt)ik«n  fbr  any  ofher.    To  Clre  ivesi  0f  fhi^  joii  imty  alwa  see 


•^:mm... 


^•'"^^lik&JLi^: 


54«8 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


the  large  strait  towards  St.  Eustatius ;  but,  from  this  situation,  you  will  see  only 
the  high  S.  E<  part  of  that  island ;  or,  rather,  its  mountain,  in  consequence  of 
which  it  appears  like  a  very  small  island,  while  its  mountain  seems  to  be  lower 
than  Mount  Misery ;  but  it  is  easily  known  from  the  table,  which  its  top  forms, 
by  the  uniform  declivities  to  the  east  and  west,  and  by  the  peak  on  the  S.  E.  part 
of  it.  Saba  seems,  from  this  situation,  equal  in  size  to  the  visible  part  of  St. 
Eustatius ;  but  it  shows  only  an  eminence  without  peaks,  with  uniform  declivi- 
ties, and  almost  round. 

If  a  small  islet  appears  to  the  west  of,  and  very  near  to,  St.  Eustatius,  that 
must  not  confuse  you ;  for  it  is  the  N.  W.  extremity  of  that  island :  and,  on  get- 
ting nearer,  you  will  perceive  the  land  which  connects  it  with  the  S.  E.  part. 
Mount  Misery,  on  St.  Kitts,  which  has  a  very  high  and  sharp  peak,  on  the  eastern 
part  of  its  summit,  seems  at  a  distance  to  be  the  summit  of  Mount  Eustatius ; 
but  it  cannot  be  mistaken  fur  such,  if  you  attend  to  its  surface  being  more  unequal 
than  the  table-land  at  the  top  of  St.  Eustatius;  and  that  there  is  another  less 
elevated  mountain  to  the  east,  and  with  gentle  declivities,  which  show  much  land 
*  to  the  east  and  west  of  the  high  peak. 

On  no  part  of  Mount  Misery  can  any  resemblance  be  traced  to  a  man  carrying 
another  on  his  back ;  and  whiph,  according  to  a  saying,  was  the  reason  why 
Colombo  named  this  island  St.  Kitts. 

When  you  are  six  leagues  to  the  east  of  St.  Bartholomew's,  its  N.  W.  extremi- 
ty appears  insulated,  and.has  the  appearance  of  a  pretty  large  island ;  on  the  top 
of  which  there  are  four  small  steps,  (like  steps  of  stairs,  Escatones,)  with  a  con- 
siderable strait  to  the  south,  between  it  and  the  principal  island :  in  the  middle  of 
this  strait  you  may  also  see  a  smaller  islet :  this  is  really  one  of  the  islets  which 
surround  the  island ;  but  the  first  is  only  the  N.  W.  point,  to  the  north  of  which 
YOU  will  see  also  some  islets ;  all  these  are  much  nearer  St.  Bartholoniew's  than 
Stf  Martins. 

*^  Finally,  to  navigate  frona  one  of  the  Antillas  to  another  of  them,  there  is  no 
Ihore  trouble  than  what  a  simple  navigation  requires ;  but  it  is  something  greater 
when  you  have  to  get  from  leeward  to  windward  ;  yet  this  will  be  reduced  to  a 
'  trifling  consideration,  if  the  navigation  is  made  by  the  straits  which  are  to  the 
north  of  Martinique,  and  in  which  the  currents  are  weakest ;  but  the  same  does 
not  follow  in  the  southerly  straits,  in  which  the  waters  set  with  more  vivacity 
towards  the  west ;  and  it  would  be  impracticable  by  the  straits  of  Tobago, 
Grenada,  and  St.  Vincent,  in  which  the  waters  run  at  the  rate  of  not  less  than 
two  miles  an  hour.    . 


^v 


W- 


nr^ 


% 


i,-        --'^S; 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT, 


349 


CHAF.  XZ. 


The  Coast  of  COLOMBIA, /rom  the  Gulf  of  PARIA  to  CARTHAGENA. 

Having  already  described,  in  Chap.  VIII.  under  Windward  and  Leeward  Isl- 
landa,  (pages  302  to  348)  the  navigation  of  the  Island  of  Trinidad  and  Gulf  of 
jParia,  we  now  proceed  with  the  Continental  Coast,  from  Trinidad  westward. 


The  Coast  from  Trinidad  to  Cape  Codera.    -^ 

The  Boca  Grande,  or  Great  Dragon's  Mouth,  is  formed  by  the  Island  of  ChaT 
cachacares  and  tb«>  coast  of  Faria.  The  N.  E.  point  of  that  coast  is  a  high, 
scarped  or  cliffy  islet,  named  the  Morro,  whence  the  coast  tends  W.  by  sL 
eighteen  miles,  to  the  cove  of  Mexillones,  thence  west  to  Copt  Tres  PutUas,  (Thrw- 
Points)  which  is  about  fifty  miles  from  the  Morro  Islet.  All  this  land  is  ven^ 
high  and  hilly,  and  the  coast  is  remarkably  clean :  you  may  run  along  it  at  half 
a  mile  distance,  and  at  a  mile  from  the  shore,  you  will  have  from  20  to  40  fa- 
thoms of  water,  with  muddy  sand. 

CAPE  THREE  POINTS  is  the  most  northerly  part  of  all  this  coast,  and 
from  it  the  bottonp,  which  is  equally  clean  and  deep  as  the  former,  extends  for 
two  miles  to  the  cove  of  Unare. 

The  ENSENADA  or  COVE  or  UNARE  affords  good  anchorage  and  shel- 
ter from  the  sea-breeze ;  and  to  enter  it,  you  must  steer  a  mile  from  its  N.  E. 
point,  around  which  a  rocky  shoal  extends  out  half  a  mile.  Directing  your 
course  afterwards  for  the  interior  of  the  bay,  you  may  anchor  in  5  fathoms,  on 
a  sandy  botrom,  so  soon  as  you  have  well  rounded  the  point.  A  small  river 
runs  into  this  cove ;  and  to  the  eastward  of  it,  upon  a  small  hill,  there  is  an  In- 
dian village,  named  San  Juan  de  Unare.  The  S.  W.  point  of  this  cove  has  also 
a  reef,  which  stretches  out  half  a  mile,  and  has  some  islets  on  it.  By  passing 
outside  of  these,  at  about  two  cable's  length  from  the  westernmost,  you  will  go 
safe  from  all  danger. 

From  Unare  txiB  coast  tends  nearly  W.  S.  W.  four  and  a  half  leagues,  and  af- 
terwards turns  gently  towards  the  north,  for  the  space  of  eight  miles,  to  Cape 
Malapasqua.  All  the  coast  between  Cape  Three  Points  and  Cape  Malapasqua 
is  clean,  and  you  may  run  along  it,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,  at  which  distance 
you  will  have  8  fathoms  of  water,  on  a  sandy  bottom. 

From  Ccpe  Malapasqua,  the  coast  tends  W.  i  S.  eight  miles,  to  the  Morro  or 
hill  of  Puerto  Scmto.  This  Morro  is  united  to  the  main  land  by  a  low  sandy 
tongue.  On  the  west  of  th"  Trlorro,  and  very  near  to  it,  is  the  islet  of  Puerto 
Santo :  a  id  about  tho  coanecting  tongue  above-mentioned,  there  is  anchorage, 
sheltered  from  the  sea-breeze,  in  5  and  6  fathoms  of  water,  the  bottom  of  sand 
and  mud.  You  may  approach  the  northp^rj  part  of  the  Morro  and  its  islet,  with- 
in two  cables'  length,  if  requisite ;  %|iid  then,  to  take  the  anchor^j^o,  bteerS.  or 
S.  by  W.  and  after  having  passed  the  islet,  you  may  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  so 
soon  as  you  see  that  you  are  sufficiently  sheltered.    Take  good  care  not  to  get 


■mk'.f  ■^m. 


550 


fiLUNrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


to  the  eastward  of  the  western  meri(]jan  of  the  islet,  for  there  is  a  shoal  of  S  fiit 
thorns  to  the  south  Of  the  Morro.  About  two  leagues  inland,  there  is  a  inoun-« 
tain  named  Monte  de  Puerto  Santo. 

From  the  Ruadstead  of  Puerto  Santo,  the  coast  tends  W.  S.  W.  and  a  shoal 
of  little  water  stretches  along  it,  which,  opposite  the  point  of  Htman  VaaqwZt 
reaches  about  half  a  mile  out  to  sea.  This  point  of  Hernan  Vasquez  forms  a 
little  bay,  with  anchorage  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  sheltered  from  the  breezes.  A  ri* 
ver,  from  which  water  may  be  procured,  runs  into  this  bay  ;  and  in  the  bend  of 
the  west  point,  in  which  there  is  a  small  islet,  is  the  village  of  Carvpano,  to  the 
westward  of  which,  at  the  distance  of  two  miles,  is  the  point  and  morro  of  Sali- 
nas, or  del  Tarro,  which  has  also  an  islet  close  to  it.  This  bay  of  Hernan  Vas- 
quez has  two  shoala,  rather  to  the  northward  of  the  true  parallel  of  the  point  of 
that  name,  and  to  the  westward  of  the  meridian  of  thft  village  of  Carupano ;  there 
is  also  a  place  of  little  depth,  extending  out  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile  from 
the  west  part  of  that  village. 

From  the  PoiiU  and  Morru  of  Salinas  the  coast  is  dear ;  but  there  are  some  rocks, 
almost  joining  the  shore,  as  far  as  Morro  Blanco,  which  is  about  three  miles  from 
Morro  de  Salinas.  The  Mountain  of  San  Jose,  (St.  Joseph,)  which  is  three  leagues 
inland,  nearly  on  the  meridian  of  the  Morro  Blanco,  may  hence  be  seen. 

A  shoal  stretches  out  to  the  westward  of  Morro  Blanco  (White  Hill) ;  it  has  so 
little  water,  that  it  is  unsafe  to  approach  the  coast  hereabout  nearer  than  two 
miles.  On  this  coast  you  see,  1st,  the  Pomt  and  Morro  of  PatiUa,  which  may 
be  known  by  an  islet  and  cluster  of  rocks,  that  lie  out  a  very  short  distance  from 
it :  2d,  the  Point  and  Morro  oSTaquien,  which  lies  a  little  more  to  the  northward 
than  the  former,  and  which  has  also  some  islets  close  to  it :  Sd,  the  Morro  of 
Lebranche,  which  is  un:l;:d  to  the  main  land  by  a  low  and  wet  tongue  of  land  and 
sand :  and,  4th,  the  Morro  of  Esmeralda,  which  is  an  islet,  separated  from  Uie 
main  land  by  a  littlt  channel,  of  about  half  a  cable's  length  in  width. 

Between  Lebranche  and  Morro  Esmeralda,  at  a  considerable  distance  from  the 
coast,  are  some  islets  named  Garrapatas,  between  which  you  cannot  pass,  on  ac- 
count of  rocky  shoals ;  and,  althoujgh  there  is  a  good  passage  between  the  souths 
em  one  and  the  coast,  yet  it  is  adv^eable  always  to  go  outside  uf  them ;  especially 
with  a  large  vessel. 

Bettpeen  Morro  Blanco  and  Ei^meralda,  the  distance  is  11  miles ;  andv  about  4 
leagues  inland,  to  the  southward  of  the  last,  (E^smeralda,)  there  is  a  mountain,, 
named  Redondo,  or  the  Round  Hill. 

To  the  westward  of  Morto  Esmeralda  is  the  Ensenada,  or  Bay,  of  the  same 
name.  This  is  obstructed  by  a  shoal  of  very  unequal  depth,  whi^h,  stretching 
out  from  the  middle  of  the  Morro,  and  lying,  as  it  were,  N.  and  S.  extends  along 
the  coast  about  one-third  of  a  mile.  In  this  bay,  or  cove,  and  upon  this  shoal, 
there  are  three  little  islets,  which  lie  nearly  E.  and  W.  and  are  called  the  Casea- 
bel,  or  Rattle- Snake  Islets.  To  anchor  in  this  bay,  it  is  necessary  to  steei;,  as 
close  as  you  please,  to  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  Morro,  and  to  anchor  under  the 
shelter  of  it,  at  about  two  cable's  length  from  it,  in  6  or  7  fathoms  of  wat^r ;  the 
bottom  there  being  of  mud,  mixed  with  sand> 

From  the  Ensenada  de  la  Esmeralda  the  coast  tends  to  the  west,  about  5  miles, 
to  the  Point  and  Morro  of  Manzanilla ;  and  the  shoal,  which  stretches  out  from 
Esmeralda,  extends  along  it,  at  the  distance  of  about  a  third  of  a  mile.  Ptmta 
Manzanilla  forms  a  cove,  but  it  is  completely  shut  up  by  the  shoal  of  which  we 
have  spoken,  aiid  which  ends  at  the  first  scarped  point  to  leeward  of  this,  and  at 
the  distance  of  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  The  shoal  lies  so  that  it  not  only  pre- 
vents entering  into  the  cove,  but  it  hinders  one  from  keeping  any  thing  to  the 
southward,  until  to  the  westward  of  this  scarped,  or  cliffypoint.  To  the  wes^ 
ward  of  it  the  coast  is  very  clean,  for  eight  miles,  to  Point  Guarapoturo,  at  wfaiich 
begins  a  shoal,  which  stretches  out  from  the  coast  about  twe-thirds  of  a  milje. 

To  the  N.  £.  of  Point  Guarapoturo,  at  about  a  mile's  distance,  there  is  ^  rock, 
covered  with  water,  to  which  it  is  necessary  to  give  a  wide  birth.  Something  to 
the  eastward  of  this  point,  and  at  about  a  league  inland,  a  peaked  motiDtain  rises, 
named  the  Pico  del  Este,  or  Peak  of  the  East, 


■'4 


%*■ 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOt. 


351 


'three  miles  west  from  Point  Ouarapoturo  is  the  Point  del  Escttdo  ^nMt 
(White  Shield,)  and  the  coast  between  is  cliffy  and  high,  hut,  thence  tending 
about  N.  W.  it  is  very  low  and  swampy,  for  3)  miles,  to  the  Morro  of  ChacopaUtt 
which  forms  a  point  extending  out  to  sea  almost  two  miles.  From  this  point 
the  coast  tends  south,  forming  a  great  bay,  in  which,  at  about  a  mile  and  a  half 
to  the  westward  of  the  middle  of  the  Morro,  there  is  an  islet,  named  the  Caribes 
Jsk ;  west  from  this  islet,  at  about  a  mile,  there  is  another  very  small  islet,  named 
ZoAm,  or  fVolvta'  Islet,  and  which  has  a  rock  (farallon)  lying  close  to  its  eastern 
end* 

The  r£«f,  or  shoal,  which  we  have  already  mentioned,  as  running  out  from 
Point  Ouarapoturo,  borders  all  this  coast ;  and,  stretching  out  from  the  Morro 
Point,  about  the  third  of  a  mile,  continues  thence  to  Caribbee  Islet,  from  which  it 
inclines  towards  the  south,  and  nears  the  coast  so  much,  that,  at  the  Point  and 
Aforro  de  Cayrrum,  which  is  the  S.  W.  point  of  this  bay,  it  does  not  reach  farther 
out  than  half  a  mile. 

From  the  Point  and  Morro  de  Cayman,  the  coast  tends  nearly  west ;  it  is  mode- 
rately level,  and  without  any  other  points  than  that  of  Tuna,  which  is  a  mile  anA 
a  half  distaut  from  the  former,  and  the  Point  and  Morro  del  Castillo,  (Castl^ 
Point,)  which  is  two  miles  westward  from  Point  Tuna.  ' 

From  Punta  de  CastUlo  th&,coast  bends  little  towards  the  north,  as  far  as  the 
Point  and  Morro  de  la  Pena,  which  is  about  four  miles  distant  from  the  former ; 
and  it  thence  inclines  something  towards  the  south,  to  Punta  Gorda,  whence  it 
forms  a  bay,*the  shores  of  which  are  beachy  and  low,  to  Point  £ftMic^in,or  OuO' 
ranche.  Point  Guachin  is  formed  by  a  spot  of  land,  high  and  cliffy,  which  rises 
above  this  low  land,  and  is  insulated  by  it.  In  the  bottom  and  middle  of  the  bay 
there  is  a  small  scarped  point,  of  very  little  extent,  named  Purtta  de  Ids  Minax. 
From  Punta  Oorda  to  Point  Guachin,  nearly  west,  the  distance  is  6^  miles. 

From  Point  Ouachin,  or  Guaranche,  the  coast  is  a  low  beach,  to  Point  EscarceOf 
Which  rises  a  little,  and  is  31  miles  distant  from  the  former.  Point  Escarceo 
forms  a  front  for  about  half  a  mile  about  it ;  and  the  west  part  of  this  cliff  is  named 
Point  Cordon,  from  which  the  coast,  which  is  a  very  low  sandy  beach  tends  S.  W. 
about  two  miles,  to  Punta  de  Araya,  upon  which  there  are  some  small  houses, 
ivhe.rein  the  people,  who  look  after  the  salt-ponds,  live. 

AK  the  Coast,  from  PoinI  Cayman  to  Point  Escarceo,  has  a  reef  extending 
plong  it,  at  about  half  a  mile  from  it ;  but,  opposite  the  latter  point,  it  extends  to 
the  westward,  about  four  miles,  and  forms  the  shoal,  named  the  Shoal  of  Araya. 
The  southern  edge  of  this  shoal  is  about  half  amile  to  the-southward  of  the  Pomt 
o(  Araya;  so  that,  by  keeping  the  most  southerly  houses  upon  its  b/aring  E.  i 
N.  you  will  go  perfectly  safe  and  clear  of  the  shoal,  and  may  «'un  along  the  shore, 
at  two  cable's  length,  if  necessary ;  for,  although  the  shore  '.a  a  low  sandy  beach, 
you  will  have  6  fathoms  of  water  at  that  distance.  This  beachy  shore  continues 
S.  S.  E.  two  miles,  to  /Hinto  de  Piedras,  which  is  formed  by  the  extreme  west- 
ernpart  of  the  mountain  of  Gvaranehe. 

Point  Piedras  forms  a  cliff,  or  precipice,  for  half  a  mile,  and  then  unites  itself 
with  the  high  land  of  the  mountam,  on  the  south  part  of  which  there  is  a  sanctu- 
ary, named  Samstuario  de  Nutstra  Senora  de  Agua  Santa  (Sanctuary  of  our  Lady 
of  Holy  or  Good  Water.)  The  coast  still  tends  S.  S.  E.  to  Point  Barrigon,  which 
•f*.  at  first,  p.  low  sandy  beach,  and  thence  scarped  or  cliffy ;  but  it  is  all  clean, 
and  jr;«{i  may  run  along  it,  at  the  distance  of  a  cable's  length.  This  coast  forms 
the  little  Bay  of  Araya,  on  the  south  point  of  which,  where  the  scarped  shore  of 
Barrigon  begins,  there  is  a  castle.  Froimg'l'oint  Barrigon,  the  coast,  which  is 
scarped  and  clean,  tends  about  S.  E.  twowiies,  to  Point  Canty;  it  then  turns  to 
the  E.  S.  E.  for  a  long  mile,  to  Punta  d;  Arenas,  (Sandy  Point,)  which  is  the 
most  southerly  point  of  this  coast,  and  the  northern  point  of  the  entrance  of  the 
CTttZ/'of  Cariaco. 

To  anchor  at  Araya,  it  is  necessary  to  r^lve  a  birth  to  the  shoal  which  extends, 
as  already  noticed,  about  S.i  miles  to  the  N.  W.  of  Punta  de  Araya.  This  may 
be  done  by  taking  care  to  be  more  than  three  miles  from  the  point  before  yott  run 
at  all  to  the  southward ;  (^,  what  Is  the  same,  not  to  steer  at  all  to  the  southward 
until  you  hare  lost  soundu^ :  but,  if  you  wish  to  guide  yourself  by  ]and-mark§>, 


.1- 


9&9I 


BLUIfT^S  AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


to  take  care  not  to  cross  the  parallels  of  Punta  Escarceo  until  the  Inst  peak  on 
Margarita,  to  the  westward  of  four,  which  tiie  mountain  of  Macaneo  forms,  bears 
to  the  eastward  of  North ;  understanding  that,  when  that  peak  bears  North, 
you  will  pass  half  a  mile  from  the  edge  of  the  shoal. 

The  Island  Gubagua  may,  also,  serve  as  a  mark  ;  lor,  when  the  west  point  of  it 
bears  true  N.  £.  you  will  pass  two  miles  from  the  western  edge  of  the  shoal. 

To  what  has  been  already  stated,  we  add,  that  he  who  goes  to  Axaya,  coast- 
ing the  mainland,  and  running  between  it  and  the  islands  of  Coche  and  Cubagua, 
ought  to  pass  about  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Funta  Escarceo,  and  then  steer 
west  until  the  western  point  of  Cubagua  bears  N.  E.  and  then  steering  true 
south,  he  will  pass  at  two  miles  from  the  edge  of  the  shoal :  or,  if  one  wishes  to 
pass  nearer  it,  in  order  to  avoid  getting  so  far  to  leeward,  he  need  only  steer 
west  until  the  western  peak  of  Macaneo  bears  north,  or  something  more  to  the 
eastward,  when  he  may  steer  S.  h  E.  and  pass  the  shoal  at  the  distance  of  a  mile, 
keeping  that  course  until  abreast  of  the  southernmost  small  house  upon  the 
Point  of  Araya,  and  th<^.n  haul  by  the  wind  to  approach  the  little  Bay  of  Araya, 
which  may  be  known,  r>ot  only  by  the  castle  at  the  south  side  of  it,  but  also  by 
the  Sancitumo  de  Nitestrd  Serwra  de  Agua  Santa,  already  noticed,  and  which  is 
in  the  north  part  of  it,  and  upon  the  douth  cliff  of  Guaranche.  In  all  this  bay, 
as  well  as  along  all  the  coast  to  Point  Arenas,  you  may  anchor  in  the  depth  which 
is  most  convenient,  and,  if  you  choose,  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  shore. 

In  the  same  way,  all  those  who  have  to  double  Punta  Araya  from  the  north- 
ward, that  is,  from  Cubagua^  or  Margarita,  ought  not  to  cross  the  parallel  of 
Funta  Escarceo,  without  attending  to  the  preceding  directions.  If,  by  any  ac- 
tident,  you  get  within  the  proper  marks  before  you  arrive  at  the  place,  you  most 
immediately  steer  in  the  opposite  direction,  until  you  are  due  west  from  Punta 
Escarceo,  when  you  may  steer  to  the  southward ;  and,  so  soon  as  you  are  abreast 
of  the  southernmost  small  house  on  Punta  Araya,  (before  described)  you  may 
liaul  up..  The  soundings  may  also  guide  those  who  come  from  the  northward, 
taking  ca^e  either  to  keep  out  of  soundings,  or  not  to  shoalen  the  water  to  less 
than  35  fathoms,  until  they  have  crossed  the  parallel  above  prescribed. 

A  shallow  bank  and  reef  stretch  out  about  half  a  mile  to  the  south  of  Punta 
Arenas,  which,  as  already  stated,  is  the  north  point  of  the  Gulf  of  Cariaco. 

GULF  OF  CARIACO  and  PORT  of  CUMANA.— This  gulf,  which  is  about 
thirty-five  miles  in  length,  and,  in  general,  about  eight  miles  wide,  may  be  consi- 
dered as  a  large  and  secure  harbour ;  for  you  ma^  anchor  in  any  part  of  it,  the 
deepest  water  being  40  fathoms.  The  shores  of  it  are  very  clean,  and  you  may 
run  along  them,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile,  or  even  less,  with  the  exception 
of  the  vicinity  of  Cumana,  where  a  shallow  shoal  stretches  out,  two-thirds  of  a 
mile  from  the  river.  On  the  north  coast  are  two  harbours,  named  Laguna  Chi- 
ta, and  Laguna  Ch-ande :  the  latter  is  also  called  Laguna  de  Obispo  (the  Bishop's 
Lagoon.)  The  first  is  very  ^mall ;  and  the  second,  which  is  spacious  enough, 
has  from  9  to  20  fathoms  of  water,  and  is  so  very  clean,  that  to  navigate  it,  you 
have  only  to  keep  clear  of  what  you  see. 

Within  the  gulf  there  is  no  town  of  any  consequence,  nor  is  there  any  motive 
for  vessels  entering  it,  as  the  point  to  which  all  of  them  direct  their  course  is 
Cumana,  situated  on  the  south  point  of  the  mouth  of  the  gulf.  This  point  is  of 
sand,  and  very  low ;  and  a  shoal  stretches  out  W.  by  S.  from  it,  whjch  is  so 
8tcep-to,  that,  from  1 1  fathoms,  you  get  at  once  into  5  fathoms ;  and,  from  the 
latter  depth,  you  may  be  immediately  aground.  The  edge  of  the  bank,  (which 
is,  literally,  of  little  depth)  running  jjk  from  it  to  the  east,  keeps  almost  E.  and 
W.  with  the  point,  and  tends  along, Urout  four  'miles,  to  Punta  Jklgada,  whence 
it  tends  to  the  S.  E.  the  same  as  the  coast,  and  nears  the  coast  in  the  vicinity  of 
Monte  Blanco,  where  it  is  clear. 

The  edge  of  the  shoal  extends  to  the  south-westward  from  the  point  of  Cu- 
mana, very  close  to  the  coast,  and  forms  with  it  the  mouth  of  the  Eiver  Manxa- 
nares.  On  the  low  land,  and  nearer  to  the  shore,  there  is  an  Indian  town,  which 
is  separated  from  Cumana  by  the  river.  The  anchorage  is  in  front,  'and  to  the 
Westward  of  the  mouth  of  the  river. 
To  sail  to  the  anchorage  of  Cumana,  Uteer  from  Punta  del  Caney  towards  the 


IS  a 

let 

the 


,.L.:,J 


.J»!:J^ 


j|  Ajl^Mit-iy ,  ■.■^> 


(<-.«•,* 


BLUWrS    AMKRICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


S53 


h  of  Punta 


Eacarpado  Rozo,  (Red  ClifT)  but  not  more  to  windward  until  clear  of  the  thoal 
which  extends  out  from  Punta  de  Arenas :  having  passed  the  latter,  you  may 
haul  by  the  wind  for  the  moulh  of  the  river,  on  the  south  point  of  which  there 
is  a  fitrt.  Keep  the  lead  constantly  going,  and,  when  you  find  the  proper  depth, 
let  go  your  anchor,  and  .ifterwards  moor  with  your  kedgc  ashore.  But,  should 
the  wind  be  scant,  or  the  current  drag  you  to  leeward,  so  as  to  render  it  neces« 
sary  to  beat  up  to  the  anchorage,  it  U  proper,  in  order  to  keep  clear  of  the  outer 
point  of  the  shoal,  not  to  prolong  the  tack  to  the  southward  more  than  to  bring 
the  castle  of  San  Antonio  (which  is  the  highest  building  you  see  in  the  town  of 
Cumana)  to  bear  east.  Upon  the  tack  to  the  northward,  you  may  stand  as  long 
as  you  think  advantageous,  and  on  it  there  is  no  danger  whatever. 

To  the  south  of  the  Escarpado  Roxo,  and  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  Punta 
de  Piedras,  the  River  Bordones  disembogues. 

From  Point  Piedras  the  coast  tends  almost  W.  h  S.  in  some  places  scarped, 
and  at  others,  having  beaches  and  sand,  for  three  and  a  half  miles,  to  Puerto  Et' 
condido,  (Hidden  Port)  which  is  an  inlet  formed  by  the  coast.  It  is  about  half  a 
mile  in  depth,  and  the  entrance  is  about  three  cables'  length  in  width.  In  the 
middle  of  it  there  is  5  fathoms  of  water,  %vith  a  sandy  bottom ;  but,  near  its 
shores,  not  more  than  2  or  S  fathoms.  There  are  some  rocks  lying  off  the  west 
point  of  it;  and,  to  avoid  them,  it  is  necessary  to  give  the  point  a  birth  of  rather 
more  than  a  cable's  length. 

Prom  the  west  point  of  Puerto  Escondido,  the  shore  tends  W.  I  S.  one  mile 
and  a  quarter,  to  Punta  del  Campanarito ;  this  point  is  scarped  and  clean,  with* 
out  any  other  danger  than  a  sunken  rock,  which  lies  out  about  half  a  cable's 
length  from  the  shore,  and  about  two  or  three  cables'  length  to  the  westward  of 
the  west  point  of  P  lerto  Escondido. 

MOCHIMA. — 1  rom  Punta  Campanarito  to  the  Moiro  and  Vigia  (Look-out) 
of  Mochima  is  three-auartcrs  of  a  mile ;  and  between  the  two  is  a  large  and 
handsome  bay,  with  from  18  to  6  fathoms,  which  you  will  find  at  less  than  a  ca- 
ble's length  from  the  shore.  The  whole  of  this  bay  is  remarkably  clean,  except 
that,  N.  by  W.  from  Punta  del  Campanarito,  there  are  a  few  rocks,  which  do 
not  even  lie  out  half  a  cable's  length.  It  is,  however,  advisable  to  pass  at  least 
a  cable's  length  from  the  point. 

A  small  tongue  of  land,  stretching  out  from  the  Morro  and  Vigia  of  Mochi- 
ma, forms  the  east  point  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  which  is  large,  hand- 
some, and  well  sheltered.  Within  are  various  coves,  which  form  natural  docks. 
The  depth  of  water  is  so  equal,  that,  in  no  place,  does  it  exceed  15  fathoms; 
nor  is  there  less  than  5  fathoms,  at  a  cable,  or  a  cable  and  a  halPs  distance  fVom 
the  shore.  The  greater  part  of  it  has  very  clean  ground.  Take  care  to  pass  a 
cable  and  a  halPs  length  from  all  that  is  visible,  and  you  will  be  safe  from  all 
danger.  These  advantages,  added  to  the  circumstance  tha^  its  entrance  lies  so 
as  enables  vessels  either  to  enter,  or  sail  out  with  the  regular  breeze,  render  this 
the  best  harbour  in  all  this  part  of  America,  and,  indeed,  one  of  the  best  in  tb« 
world. 

PUERTO  MAN  ARE. —About  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  Mochima  is  the 
harbour  of  Manure,  which  is  also  very  fine.  Throughout  you  will  find  from  15 
to  5  fathdms  of  water,  which  latter  depth  is  found  at  half  a  cable's  length  from 
its  shores,  aad  these  are  very  clean.  As  its  entrance  is  wide,  a  vessel  can  sail  in 
or  out  with  the  regular  breeze,  at  any  hour. 

The  west  point  of  Puerto  Manare  is  called  Cape  Mamre,  and  from  it  the  coast 
tends  about  W.  S.  W.  nearly  a  mile  and  a  half,  to  Punta  de  TigriUo.  A  r©ef 
extends  around  this  point,  to  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore.  The  coast 
hence  inclines  to  the  south  and  eastward,  two  and  a  half  miles,  when  it  turns  to 
W.  by  S.  five  miles,  to  Punta  Gorda,  which  terminates  the  bay  of  Tigrillo. 
There  is  a  small  channel,  by  which  Puerto  Mochima  communicates  with  it.  On 
the  north  of  Tigrillo  Bay  are  three  islands :  the  first,  or  eastern  one,  is  named 
Venados;  the  second,  or  middle  one,  Caraca  del  Este ;  and  the  third,  Caraea 
del  Oeste :  all  the  shores  of  the  bay,  as  well  as  of  these  islands,  are  very  clean ; 
only,  at  the  north  point  of  Isia  de  Venados,  which  is  called  Punta  Campanaria^  a 
rock  lies  out  at  about  a  cable's  length ;  and  thie  western  front  of  the  same  island 

46 


354 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


has,  also,  at  the  same  distance  from  it,  a  small  shoal  with  but  little  water 
on  it.  All  the  passes  or  straits  between  these  islands,  and  that  between  them 
and  the  main  land,  are  safe  for  any  class  of  vessels ;  and,  although  some  are  ra- 
ther narrow,  yet  the  soundings  in  all  of  them  are  such,  that  an  anchor  may  be 
let  go  in  case  of  need.  All  that  is  particularly  to  be  regarded  is  a  rocky  shoal, 
named  Baxo  del  Caracas,  which  lies  to  the  north-westward  of  the  Eastern  CaracOf 
and  at  a  long  mile's  distance  from  it :  this  shoal  is  about  half  a  mile  long  from 
E.  to  W.  and  presents  no  risk ;  for,  if  you  want  to  pass  between  it  and  the  Ca- 
raca  isles,  you  have  only  to  keep  near  to  the  lutter :  and  if  you  want  to  go  out- 
side of  it.  keep  to  the  northward  of  Punta  Manare,  and  you  will  go  clear  of  it. 

GULF  OF  S/  ^TE  FE'.— To  the  south  of  Punta  Gorda  is  the  point  of  Red 
Cliff  {Escarpado  Roxo,)  and  these  two  form  the  mouth  of  the  Gulf  of  Santa  Fe'^ 
which  extends  in,  to  the  eastward,  about  6  miles.  All  its  coasts  are  very  clean, 
and  at  tiie  entrance  only,  about  a  third  of  a  mile  from  the  north  coast,  is  there  a 
foul  rock  which  you  ought  to  keep  one  and  a  half,  or  two,  cable's  length  distant 
from.    This  gulf  has  from  20  to  30  fathoms  of  water,  on  a  muddy  bottom. 

From  the  point  of  Escarpado  Roxo  the  coast  inclines  to  the  southward,  and 
afterwards  to  the  westward,  2i  miles,  to  Point  de  la  Cruz ;  thus  forming  a  bay, 
which  makes  a  clean  and  excellent  anchorage  :  this  is  called  the  Ensenada  de  la 
Cruz. 

At  aboiit  oi:g  mile  W.  N.  W.  from  Punta  de  la  Cruz,  is  the  easternmost  of  the 
little  islands  n^tnied  Arapos,  which  are  about  half  a  mile  in  extent,  in  that  direc- 
tion ;  they  jvre  very  clean,  except  in  the  strait  between  them,  which  cannot  be 
passed,  an  account  of  the  reefs  and  shallows  which  unite  them.  The  passage 
between  the  eastern  isle  and  the  coast  is  very  clear,  and  without  danger ;  there 
arc  two  small  rocks  which  lie  out  from  the  west  part  of  the  western  islet,  but 
they  are  also  very  clean. 

From  Punta  de  Cruz  the  coast  tends  to  the  westward,  about  four  miles,  to  Pun- 
ta Comona,  and  it  is  all  clean,  with  a  good  depth  of  water.  You  may  run  along 
it  at  the  distance  of  two  cable's  length  without  any  danger. 

To  the  WeU'vaid  oi  Punta  Comona,  at  the  distance  of  two  short  miles,  is  the 
Punta  de  Pert^^altU,  and  between  the  two  is  a  handsome  buy,  in  which  there  are 
13  fathoms  ot  v>  iter,  at ;-  cable's  length  from  the  coast.  The  bottom  of  this  bay 
is  a  sandy  beach,  .nd  two  little  rivulets  run  into  it.  All  of  it  is  very  clean,  except 
the  eastern  part,  v.hich  has  a  rcif  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore. 

In  front  of  this  bay,  and  at  a'ooutlhree  cable's  length  to  the  north,  from  Punta 
Pertigalete,  is  the  south  faiiore  of  the  Isla  de  Monos,  or  Gudraco :  all  the  fides  of 
it  are  very  clean,  but,  at  about  two  cable's  length  from  the  north  part  of  it,  there 
is  a  rock,  which  is  foul,  with  a  reef,  and  it  must  not  be  approached  nearer  than 
to  half  a  cable's  length.  The  strait  between  this  rock  and  Isla  de  Monos  is  clean, 
and  has  28  fathoms  of  water ;  and,  to  pass  through  it,  you  must  keep  nearest  the 
island.  The  passage  between  the  island  and  tho  main  land  is  also  very  clean,  and 
has  50  or  55  fathoms  in  its  middle,  and  nearly  the  same  depth  close  to  the  island, 
which  it  is  best  to  keep  near  to,  unless  you  wish  to  pass  in  the  middle  of  the 
strait. 

At  a  mile  and  half  west  from  Punta  Pertigalete  is  Punta  de  Guanta,  and  be- 
tween them  is  the  Cove  of  Pei  tigalete,  in  which  are  various  islets,  and  a  rivulet 
runs  into  it.  In  case  any  on»  wishes  to  anchor  in  this  bay,  it  is  necessary  to 
avoid  the  western  part  of  Point  Pertigalete,  passing,  at  least,  a  cable's  length  from 
it,  to  clear  a  reef  which  stretches  from  that  part.  It  is,  also,  needful,  to  beware 
of  a  reef  and  shoal  that  project  out  in  the  centre  of  the  bay  :  and  you  will  be  safe 
from  it  so  long  as  you  do  not  get  any  thing  to  the  westwa/d  of  the  first  islet  to 
the  northward.  Attending  to  this,  you  may  anchor  to  the  north  of  the  mouth  of 
the  rivulet,  in  5  fathoms  of  water,  about  a  cable  and  ahalPs  length  from  the  east- 
ern beach. 

ffesfward  from  Punta  de  Guanta,  and  at  the  distance  of  three  miles,  Is  the  Pun- 
ta del  Bergnntin :  between  the  two,  and  at  about  a  mile  from  the  first,  is  the  Cove 
of  Guanta,  in  the  mouth  of  which  are  several  rocks  and  islets,  forming  very  nar- 
row passes,  although  with  deep  water,  and  quite  clear.  Within  the  cove  there  i» 
from  16  to  OJ  liithuma  of  water,  which  is  found  at  half  a  cable's  length  from  the 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


355 


little  water 
;ween  them 
ome  are  ra- 
[lor  may  be 
rocky  shoal, 
Item  Caracas 
e  long  from 
and  the  Ca- 
it  to  go  out- 
clear  of  it. 
point  of  Red 
if  Santa  Fe\ 
e  very  clean, 
ist,  is  there  a 
ength  distant 
tottom. 
Lithward,  and 
rraing  a  bay, 
]nsenada  de  la 


miles,  is  the 

hich  there  are 

►m  of  this  bay 

clean,  except 

iliore. 

.  from  Punta 
I  the  fides  of 
irt  of  it,  there 
I  nearer  than 
'onos  is  clean, 
ip  nearest  the 
iry  clean,  and 
to  the  island, 
niddle  of  the 


3,  is  the  Pun- 
it,  is  the  Cove 
iiig  very  nar- 
cove  there  i» 
igth  from  the 


there.  On  the  western  front  of  the  cove  there  is  a  reef,  which  stretches  out 
about  two  cable's  length ;  to  avoid  it,  you  have  only  to  run  along  the  eastern  bhure, 
which  is  very  clean. 

The  Punta  del  Bergantin  is  foul,  with  a  reef,  which  stretches  out  about  a  cable's 
length,  and  extends  to  the  south  nearly  a  mile  :  at  its  S.  W.  part  there  is  also  an 
islet,  which  is  foul  all  round,  and  which  docs  not  allow  a  free  passage  between  it 
and  the  point.  From  the  latter,  the  coast  tends  on  to  the  westward,  making  the 
JEnsenada,  or  Cove,  of  tlie  Bergnnlin,  tlie  east  side  of  which  is  very  foul,  with  a 
reef  and  shoal  that  continue  to  border  ail  the  coast  as  far  as  the  Mono  of  Barce- 
lona. 

BARCELONA.— The  iMorro  of  Barcelona  is  high  hnd,  stretching  N.  and  S. 
about  a  mile,  and  it  is  united  to  the  axain-land  by  an  isthmus,  or  narrow  tongue 
of  sand,  which  is  a  large  mile  in  length.  The  distance  from  tlie  Mono  of  Barce- 
lona  to  the  Point  of  the  Bergantin  is  about  4J  miles  ;  and  the  coast,  which  turns 
to  the  southward,  forms  a  great  bay,  named  that  of  the  Pozuelus.  Along  all  this 
part  of  the  coast,  which  is  a  sandy  beach,  and  very  low  land,  the  shoal  extends 
about  a  mile  out  to  sea ;  and,  therefore,  it  is  adviseable,  when  sailing  along  it,  to 
steer  direct  from  Punta  de  Bergantin  to  the  north  part  of  the  Morro,  which  is 
clean  and  steep-to,  and  which  you  may  pass  at  a  cable's  length  :  or,  if  wishing  to 
enter  the  bay,  you  must  keep  the  lead  going,  and  take  care  not  to  get  into  less 
water  than  8  fathoms,  with  a  sandy  bottom. 

The  western  coast  of  the  Morro  of  Barcelona  is  foul,  and  ought  to  be  avoided 
by  about  two  cable's  length.  From  the  north  p-iintof  this  Morro  to  Punta  de 
Mangles,  (Mangrove  Point,)  which  is  to  the  south  of  it,  is  about  four  miles ;  and 
the  coast,  which  is  a  low  sandy  beach,  turns  to  the  east,  and  in  it  the  river  of 
Barcelona  disembogues  its  waters,  forming  a  great  shoal  of  sandy  "li'V.  At  about 
a  mile  and  a  half  inland,  upon  the  left  bank  of  the  river,  is  the  City  of  Barcelona. 

To  anchor  in  this  bay,  the  lead  is  the  only  guide  :  for,  being  very  shoal,  every 
one  may  anchor  in  that  depth  of  water,  which  will  best  an»wer  the  vessel's 
draught. 

CHIMANA  and  other  ISLES.— Off  the  coast,  between  Cape  Manare  and 
Barcelona,  besides  the  islands  already  noticed,  there  are  various  others,  which 
are  named  the  Picudas,  the  Chimanas,  and  the  Borrachas.  The  Great  Picuda 
lies  to  tile  westward  of  the  Western  Caraca,  with  which  it  forms  a  channel  of  a 
long  mile  in  width,  and  so  clean  that  you  have  only  to  beware  of  a  sunken  rock, 
which  lies  about  two  cable's  length  east  of  the  east  point  of  the  Picuda.  This 
island  lies  S.  W.  and  N.  E.  in  which  direction  it  is  rather  more  th^n  a  mile  in 
length  :  its  coasts  are  very  clean,  but  to  the  northward  of  its  extreme  east  point 
there  are  two  rocks,  the  first  of  which  Ilea  out  at  about  one  cable'^  length,  and 
the  second  about  three^ 

At  about  S.  VV.  by  W.  from  the  Great  Picuda,  3j  miles,  is  the  second  Picuda, 
«n  islet  of  a  circular  /igure,  and  about  three  cable's  length  in  extent,  and  clean  fill 
round.  One  mile  from  it,  about  S.  S.  E.  is  the  Chimana  del  Este  (Eastern  Clii- 
mana,)  which  is  another  islet ;  and,  though  less  than  the  furmei',  it  is  etiuaily 
clean.  West  from  it,  at  the  distance  of  two  miles,  is  the  east  point  of  the  S(cflnd 
Chimana,  which  lies  East  and  West,  and  is  about  IJ  mile  in  extent.  It,  also,  is 
very  clean.  OlTits  east  end  are  two  small  islets;  the  nearest  at  a  cable's  kiigtii, 
and  the  farthest  at  five  cable's  length,  from  it.  Off  its  west  end  there  is,  also,  a 
▼ery  small  islet,  at  a  cable's  length  distance. 

At  two  cable's  length  from  the  western  point  of  the  Second  Chimana,  is  the 
eastern  part  of  the  Great  Chiinana,  which  island  is  of  a  very  irregular  figure,  and 
its  greatest  extent,  nearly  east  and  west,  is  3{  miles.  To  the  west  of  it,  at  the 
distance  of  one-third  of  a  mile,  is  the  Western  Chimana,  which  is  united  to  the 
Great  Chimana  by  a  shoal  of  rocks  and  sand,  stretching  out  to  the  northward,  a 
large  half-mile  from  the  north  part  of  the  Great  Chimana :  upon  this  shoal,  in  the 
middle  of  the  strait,  h  avery  small  islet;  and  there  is  also  another,  at  a  very  short 
distance  from  the  western  part  of  the  Weatern  Chimana.  Finally,  to  the  south  of 
the  most  easterly  part  of  the  Great  Chimana  is  the  South  Chimana,  tlie  greatest 
extent  of  which  is  about  two  miles  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  This  island  forms  two 
channels ;  one  to  the  northward  of  it,  with  the  Great  Chimana,  a  cable's  length 


..Mk 


S56 


BLUKT'S    AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


'J 


and  a  half  in  width,  and  perfectly  clean,  with  a  depth  of  22  fathoms,  muddy  hot- 
torn.  The  south  channel  lies  between  the  island  and  Point  Bergantin  ;  it  is  half 
a  mile  in  width,  and  also  very  clean  :  for,  you  have  only  to  be  sure  that  you  are 
clear  of  the  reef,  which  lies  out  to  about  a  cable's  length  from  Point  Bergantin, 
as  already  noticed.  Various  very  small  islets  lie  between  the  Great  and  South 
Chimanas,  but  they  are  all  very  clean. 

It  will  be  seen,  from  what  has  been  said,  that  the  Picudas  and  the  Chimanas 
are  very  clean,  with  deep  water  around  them.  There  are  no  other  dangers  among 
them,  than  the  ruck  which  is  to  the  east  of  the  Great  Picud%i,  and  the  shoal  which 
lies  in  the  strait  between  the  Great  and  West  Chimanas.  All  the  other  channels 
among  the  islands  and  islets  are  navigable  ;  and,  although  some  of  them  are  not 
very  free,  on  account  of  their  narrowness,  especially  for  large  vessels,  the  mari- 
ner must  judge  of  this  for  himself,  and  he  has  only  to  take  care  to  keep  clear  of 
what  is  visible. 

The  IstaBorracha  (Drunken  Woman's  Isle)  lies  about  three  miles  to  the  west 
of  the  Westorn  Chimana.  It  is  about  two  miles  in  length,  from  north  to  south, 
and  about  l|i  mile  in  its  greatest  breadth.  The  N.  E.  side  of  it  is  very  clean,  but 
the  N.  W.  very  foul,  wiCh  a  rocky  shoal,  which  is  very  shallow,  and  upon  which 
there  are  various  islets.  On  the  outside  of  these  islets  it  is  always  necessary  to 
pass,  and  at  about  two  cable's  length  from  the  westernmost. 

The  south  part  of  this  island  sends  out  {de»pide,)  to  the  S.  S.  E.  a  great  shoal 
of  sand,  on  which  rises  an  islet  named  £2  Barracho  (the  Drunken  Man,)  and  two 
very  little  islets  named  the  Borrachitos ;  the  latter  lie  two  long  miles  from  the 
Borracha,  and  you  ought  always  to  pass  to  the  south  of  them,  keeping  three  ca- 
ble's length  from  the  southernmost ;  for,  between  them  and  the  Borracho,  and 
almost  in  the  middle,  between  the  latter  and  the  principal  islet,  there  is  very 
little  depth  of  water. 

From  the  anchorage  of  Barcelona  the  icoast  tends  W.  by  S.  32  miles,  to  the 
Motto  of  Unart ;  and  it  thence  inclines  W.  by  N.  and  W.  N.  W.  57  miles,  to 
Cape  Cordera.  All  this  coast  is  low,  and  upon  it  are  seen  the  Morros  of  Piritu 
and  of  Unare,  which  are  distant  from  each  other  about  8  miles.  The  water  along 
it  is  shallow,  but  the  shore  is  clean  ;  so  that,  in  running  along  it,  you  require  no 
«ther  guide  than  the  lead.  Off  it  are  only  two  isles,  named  Pirittt,  which  are  10 
miles  to  the  westward  of  the  anchorage  of  Barcelona,  and  three  long  miles  out 
ft-otn  the  shore.  These  isles  lie  nearly  east  and  west;  they  are  low,  as  the  coast, 
and  have  a  reef,  which  stretches  outf  to  about  the  length  of  'a  cable  and  a  half, 
from  them.  There  is  a  passage  between  them,  but  it  is  incommoded  by  reefs, 
which  stretch  from  both  islands,  and  which  leave  a  clear  channel  of  only  two 
cable's  length  in  breadth,  with  a  depth  of  6  fathoms.  The  channel  between 
these  isles  and  the  coast  is  fit  for  any  class  of  vessels ;  and  to  take  it,  no  other 
guide  than  the  lead  is  required. 


on 
Mo 


Particular  Description  of  the  Coast  of  Cumana,  &c. 

The  Northern  Coast  of  Cumana  appears,  in  general,  like  a  continued  Sierra, 
«r  ran|e  of  mountains,  approarhing  to  tho  sou.  These  are  very  barren,  and  the 
«oil  is  impregnated  with  nitre. 

Of  the  (iu{f  of  Cariaco  the  navigation  has  been  described.  This  gulf  is  formed 
hy  the  low  peninsula  o(  Araya  on  the  north,  and  on  the  side  of  the  main  it  is  sur- 
rounded by  liigh  mountains.  The  City  of  Cumana^  et  the  entrance  of  this  gulf, 
was  built  b^  the  Spauiaids  in  the  year  1520,  and  is  the  most  ancient  town  of  the 
main-land  in  those  parts.  It  stands  on  a  sandy  soil,  in  a  healthy  situation,  upon 
the  River  Manzanares,  as  before  shown,  at  about  a  mile  from  the  sea.  The  river 
admits  boats  only,  and  vessels  anchor  within  a  mile  to  the  wet<t  of  the  river's 
mouth. 

BARCELONA,  to  the  westward  of  Cumana,  was  founded  in  1654.  The 
town  is,  or  was,  very  disagreeable.    It  is  situated  on  tiie  west  bank  of  the  River 


-:\^-    ia.,-v.^ 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


357 


Neveri,  at  the  distance  of  two  miles  from  the  sei.  Tlie  hay,  or  road,  terminates 
on  the  south  by  a  low  point,  called  Point  Manrico,  and  on  the  north  by  the 
Morro,  connected  to  the  main  by  a  reef  and  neck  of  sand.  These  bear  from 
each  other  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  3  miles  distant :  hence  the  bay  is  entirely  open 
to  the  west.     Its  depths  are  from  3j  to  2  fathoms. 

The  PIRITU  ISLES,  or  Dispirited  Keys  of  the  sailors,  are  low  sandy  keys, 
with  some  mangroves  upon  them,  but  no  fresh  water.  From  off  the  N.  VV.  end 
of  these  keys  you  may  run  inside,  in  6,  7,  and  8,  fathoms  water,  one-quarter  of  a 
mile  from  shore,  good  ground,  and  land-locked  from  all  winds. 

PIRITU  ISLES  to  CAPE  CORDERA.— The  coast  between  these  two  places 
is  so  clear,  all  along,  that  you  may  run  down  within  2  leagues  or  less,  from  it, 
until  you  arrive  at  the  entrance  of  Carenero  Bay,  which  is  2  leagues  to  the  S.  S. 
W.  of  Cape  Cordera.  Here  you  may  anchor  in  what  water  you  please,  with 
good  ground.  It  is  usual  to  run  so  fiir  in  as  to  bring  Cape  Cordera  bearing  North 
or  N.  by  E.  where  there  are  5  fathoms  of  water,  at  2  miles  from  shore.  When  at 
anchor  with  these  bearings,  there  will  be  a  lagoon  to  the  W.  S.  W.  where  good 
fresh  water  may  be  obtained.  With  a  table-land  on  the  main  bearing  W.  S.  W. 
or  S.  W.  by  W.  you  may  run  into  that  bay  by  the  lead,  and  anchor  at  pleasure. 
The  inland  country  is  very  mountainous,  though  the  water-side  or  shore  is  low. 
The  country  abounds  in  cocao. 


The  coast  from  Cape  Cordera,  to  Carthegena.^ 

Capt  Cordera,  a  well-known  head-land,  is  a  round  hill,  on  the  north  of  which, 
and  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  out,  extends  a  tongue  of  low  land,  but  which  is  so 
clean  that,  at  half  a  cable's  length  from  it,  there  are  10  fathoms  of  water  with  a 
sandy  bottom.  This  tongue  forms  to  the  westward  a  very  excellent  anchorage, 
named  Corsarios  or  Privatter's  Road  ;  and  to  enter  this  you  have  only  to  double 
the  west  point  of  the  tongue,  which  has  a  rock  above  water  very  close  to  it,  and 
then  anchor  so  soon  as  you-'find  you  are  sheltered  from  the  wind,  in  a  convenient 
depth  ;  understanding  that,  at  two  cables'  len;;;th  from  the  shore,  you  will  have 
8  fathoms  of  water,  on  a  sandy  bottom.  In  the  south  side  of  this  bay,  you  will 
see  a  piece  of  shore,  with  a  low  wet  sandy  beach,  of  about  three  cables'  length  in 
extt  t,  whence  the  coast,  towards  the  west,  is  foul,  having  a  reef  which  strelches 
out  abqut  half  a  cable's  length  from  it.  The  western  point  of  this  bay,  named 
Punta  Caracoles,  has  a  rock  off  the  north  part  of  it,  very  close  to ;  and  a  reef  ex- 
tends about  a  cable's  length  out  from  it. 

From  Cape  Cordera  y»>u  begin  to  see  the  mountains  of  Caraccas,  which  extend 
east  and  west  for  many  leagues. 

CENTINELA.  or  SENTRY  ROCK— To  the  northward  of  Cape  Cordera, 
at  the  distance  of  thirteen  and  a  half  miles,  there  is  an  islet  which  resembles  a 
ship  under-sail ;  it  is  very  clean  except  on  its  north  part,  from  which,  at  the  dis- 
tunce  of  a  musket-shot,  there  are  some  sunken  rocks ;  between  these  and  the 
islet  there  is  a  very  deep  channel. 

From  Point  Caracoles,  the  western  part  of  Corasios  Bay,  the  coast  tends  W.  N. 
W.  ten  and  a  half  miles,  to  Point  Maspa :  whence  it  continues  about  W.  by  S.  two 
and  a  half  miles,  to  Point  Chuspa,  and  it  is  not  advisable  to  run  along  it  nearer 
than  two  miles. 

The  Anxkoragt  of  Chuspa,  westward  of  the  point,  is  excellent :  from  Point 
Chuspa,  which  is  the  N.  E.  point  of  it,  the  shore  tends  about  S.  W.  a  mile  and  a 
half,  to  the  mouth  of  the  Rivir  Chuspa ;  on  the  east  bank  of  which,  at  about 
two  ca1)le8'  length  from  the  beach,  is  the  town,  or  village  of  the  same  name. 
From  the  mouth  of  fhe  river,  the  coast  rounds  towards  the  west,  a  mile  and  a 
half,  to  Point  Curuau  :  to  the  south  of  which,  at  about  a  third  of  a  mile  inland, 
is  the  town,  or  village,  of  Curuau.  All  the  shore  from  Point  Chuspa  to  Point 
Curuau,  is  so  clear,  that  to  enter  into  this  anchorage,  you  need  no  other  guide  than 
the  lead ;  but  from  Point  Curuau,  a  reef,  which  stretches  out  about  two  cables' 


5L 


S68 


BLUNT^S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


length,  renders  the  iihore  foul ;  and  it  continues  the  same  to  Punta  del  Trayle 
(Friar's  Point,)  which  has,  at  about  a  cable's  length  from  it,  a  rock  of  the  same 
name.  This  point  is  about  four  miles  distant  from  Point  Curuau  :  and  between 
the  two  points  there  is  a  cliff  stretching  out  to  the  northward,  named  the  Fronton 
de  Sabana.  North  from  tiiis  there  is  a  shoal,  the  south  edfje  of  which  lies  out 
a  long  mile  from  the  shore,  and  its  greatest  extent  is  a  mile  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  It 
is  rocky,  and  although,  in  general,  it  has  from  9  to  5  fathoms  of  water  on  it,  yet 
there  are  souic  spots  of  it  on  which  there  is  not  more  than  3  and  4  fathoms,  and 
therefore  it  should  be  avoided.  It  is  three  milesdistantfrom  the  anchorage  of  Chus- 
pa ;  and  to  enter  that  anciiorage,  it  is  necessary  to  approach  the  Point  of  Chuspa, 
which  you  need  not  b3  afraid  of;  for  by  this  you  will  always  shun  the  shoal,  if 
you  take  care  to  be  clear  to  the  north  of  Point  Chuspa  before  you  cut  the  meri- 
dian of  Curuau. 

From  Punta  del  Tray;  ,  the  coast  which  is  high,  >nd3  to  the  westward,  inclining 
something  to  the  south,  twenty-nine  miles,  to  tht  ;  ichorage  of  La  Gttayra ;  and 
along  the  whole  of  it  you  may  anchor  at  half  a.  mde  from  the  shore,  or  even  at 
the  distance  of  a  musket-shot. 


Directions  for  entering  the  Port  of  La  Guayru. 

Vessels  from  St.  Thomas,  Barbadoes,  &c.  in  running  for  this  harbour,  should 
vhape  their  course  so  as  to  make  cither  Blanquilla  to  the  east  or  Orchilla  to  the 
west.  Both  these  islands  are  tolerably  high,  and  may  be  s<^<;n  six  or  seven  leagues 
off.  From  a  fair  birth  between  them,  steering  down,  they  ought  to  endeavour  to 
make  in  with  the  main  land  six  or  seven  leagues  to  windward  of  La  Guayra, 
and  run  along  shore  for  the  roads. 

The  land  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  port  is  very  high.  It  rises  gradually 
from  Cape  Cordera  to  the  famous  Silla  of  Caraccas. 

La  Guayra,  in  every  direction  from  the  sea,  appears  to  be  immediately  beneath 
the  Silla.  The  town  and  fortifications,  (which  are  white)  may  be  seen  distinctly 
at  five  or  six  leagues  distance. 

Cape  Blanco,  about  four  miles  to  the  westward  of  La  Guayra,  is  only  a  small 
tongue  of  land;  and  strangers  approaching  La  Guayra  must  not  depend  upon 
making  it  <is  a  cape,  without  they  are  close  in  shore,  and  within  three  or  four 
leagues  of  it. 

The  land  between  Cape  Cordera  and  Porto  Cavello  may  be  approached  with- 
out the  least  danger,  witliin  two  miles  during  the  day  ;  but  from  sunset  to  eight 
or  nine  o'clock  in  the  morning,  during  which  time  there  is  no  breeze,  vessels 
should  give  it  a  wide  birth,  say  six  mil.j3,  lest  the  swell  and  current,  both  of  which 
have  a  tendency  to  the  shore,  should  drive  them  on  the  rocks.  It  is  highly  ne- 
cessary to  observe  this,  as  instances  are  not  wanting  of  ships  driving  past  the 
harbour  in  the  night. 

Vessels  making  La  Guayra  in  the  evening,  should  haul  their  wind  in  time,  L/c 
fear  the  wind  should  fail  them,  before  they  come  to  an  anchorage. 

Tiiie  town  of  La  Guayra  is  situated  on  the  easternmost  part  of  a  small  bay. 
Goods  are  landed  and  shipped  by  means  of  canoes  or  boats,  holding  about  two 
tons,  from  a  wooden  pier,  which  runs  out  from  ths  midule  of  the  town.  This 
operation  is  sometimes  difficult,  and  often  very  dangerous,  on  account  of  the 
fiurf. 

Vessels  bound  to  the  anchorage  must  be  careful  to  have  as  many  of  their 
«quare-sails  furled  as  they  can  possibly  spare,  and  a  good  scope  of  both  cables  in 
readiness,  as  the  regirlar  brtvzcs  are  generally  very  strong,  and  the  ground  in 
many  places  foul.     Chains  are  to  be  recommended. 

From  La  Guayra  the  coast  tencis  W.  by  S.  twenty-six  miles,  to  the  little  har- 
hour  of  La  Cruz :  it  is  so  clean  that  you  may  run  along  it  at  a  mile's  distance. 
The  port  of  La  Cruz  is  a  little  bay,  which  h  about  a  cable  and  a  halfs  length 
•ride  at  the  mouth,  and  two  cable's  length  in  depth :  it  is  uncommonly  clean 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


359 


:  rises  gradually 


ind  in  time,  kx 


throughout,  with  such  desp  water,  that,  at  half  a  vessel's  length  from  the  shore, 
on  all  sides  of  it,  you  will  find  5  fathoms  of  water.  In  the  south  part  of  the  in- 
tenor  of  this  harbour,  a  river  runs  into  it ;  and  the  east  point,  which  is  named 
Point  La  Cruz,  has  a  rock  lying  close  t  >  the  point.  Tliis  would  be  an  excellent 
anchorage  if  it  were  larger;  but,  as  it  is,  small  vessels  only  can  use  it. 

From  this  port  the  coast  tends  W.  by  S.  twenty-three  miles,  to  the  Cove  of 
Cata;  it  Is  all  v«!ry  clean,  and  you  may  run  along  it  a  mile's  distance,  or  even  at 
less,  If  you  choose.  At  two  leagues  to  the  east  of  the  Bay  of  Cata,  and  five 
miles  inland,  is  a  mountain,  named  La  Meseta  (the  Little  Table ;)  and,  at  true 
south  from  Cata,  and  the  same  distance  inland,  is  another  mountain,  n^med  Ocu- 
mare,  which  may  serve  as  a  landmark  either  for  the  cove  of  Cata,  or  that  of 
Ocumare,  which  is  the  first  inlet  to  the  west  of  Cata. 

The  Ensenada  or  Cove  of  Cata  is  about  half  a  mile  wide  at  its  entrance,  and 
about  the  same  in  depth.  The  east  point  of  it  has  an  islet,  almost  joined  to  it, 
whence  the  coast  tends  to  the  south,  to  the  bottom  of  the  cove,  where  a  river 
disembogues;  and  there  is  a  shadow  place  extending  from  the  mouth  of  the  ri- 
ver, rather  less  than  a  cable's  length.  The  rest  of  the  cove  has  very  clean 
ground,  with  from  27  to  5  fathoms  of  water.  The  latter  depth  is  found  within 
a  cable  and  a  halfs  length  of  the  shore. 

To  the  westward  of  the  western  point  of  Cata,  at  about  two-thirds  of  a  mihs 
from  it,  is  the  eastern  point  of  the  Ct.ve  of  Ocitmare,  which  has,  also,  a  very  good 
anchorage.  To  the  N.  W.  of  the  east  point  of  the  Ocumare  is  an  islet,  between 
which  and  the  point,  is  a  strait  of  lialf  a  cable's  length  in  width,  quite  clear,  and 
the  least  water  in  it  is  7  fathoms. 

To  enter  the  anchorage  of  Ocumare,  steer  close  to  the  islet,  and  then  to  tho 
southward  until  you  are  sheltered,  when  you  may  anchor  in  7  fathoms,  on  a 
sandy  bottom,  to  the  southward  of  the  islet,  and  about  a  cable's  length,  or  a  lit- 
tle more,  distant  from  it.  This  bay  is  shallow,  and  the  lead  is  a  good  guide  for 
it ;  but  take  care,  &s  the  anchorage  has  but  Mttle  extent  from  north  to  south, 
and  a  large  vessel  may  easily  get  aground,  if  she  does  not  luQ'  up,  and  deaden  her 
way  in  dutficient  time.  At  a  little  south  froin  the  islet  a  rivalet  runs  into  the  sea, 
and  upon  its  banks  are  dome  fishermen's  huts. 

Two  miles  and  a  half  from  the  islet  of  Ocumare  is  the  east  point  of  the  inlet, 
called  the  Cknaga  of  Ocumare,  which  is  little  better  than  a  swampy  opening  of 
the  land ;  in  which,  between  two  shallow  parts  of  the  reef,  there  is  a  channel  of 
phout  a  cable  or  a  cable  and  a  haWa  length  in  width,  and  which  has  from  13  to  5 
fathoms  of  water.  The  western  point  of  this  bay  is  formed  by  an  insulated  hill 
(Mom  Aislado)  which  rises  on  the  low  land.  This  anchorage  is  very  bad,  and 
fit  for  coasting  vessels  only. 

PUERTO  TURIAMO—At  a  mile  and  «  half  west  from  the  Morro  of  the 
Cienaga  is  Puerto  Turiamo,  which  is  an  excellent  harbour,  fit  for  any  clasa  of  ves- 
sels. Between  the  two  outer  points  of  it  the  opening  is  a  mile  wide,  and  within 
it  narrows  to  two-thirds  of  a  mile.  It  is  two  miles  deep,  from  north  to  south, 
and  throughout  the  whole  of  it  are  20  fathoms  of  wator,  on  a  bottom  of  mud 
and  sand.  All  the  shore  of  it  is  bordered  by  a  reef,  which  extends  out  about 
one-third  of  a  mile;  and,  if  you  take  care  not  to  approach  nearer  than  to  half 
a  mile,  you  will  go  free  from  all  danger.  At  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  which  is  a 
sandy  beach,  the  river  of  the  same  name  disembogues,  and,  at  a  cable's  length 
off  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  outer  eastern  point,  there  is  an  islet,  called  the  Ilote  de 
Turiamo. 

POIITO  CABELLO.— To  the  wMward  of  Port  Turiamo,  at  the  distance  of 
nine  miles,  is  Porto  Cabello.  This  part  of  the  coast  is  all  clean,  and  you  may  run 
along,  at  a  mile  from  the  shore.  Along  it  are  several  detached  islets;  to  sail 
amon§  which  yoti  need  only  consult  the  p:.rticular  chart  of  this  harbour,  in  which 
these  islands  are  represented. 

Porto  Cabello  is  a  harbour  formed  by  several  islets  and  low  tongues  of  man- 
grove-land. To  steer  in,  you  must  proceed  by  the  eye.  The  largest  vessels  are 
here  made  fast  alongside  the  Mole,  and  you  need  neither  plank  nor  board,  in 
order  to  get  on  shore.  The  entrance  of  the  channel  leads  into  a  very  spacious 
bay,  which  is  sheltered  from  the  reguhr  breeze,  and  ha9  excellent  depth  of  water, 


t^''» 


360 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


from  12  to  5  fathoms,  the  bottom  of  mud  and  sand.  In  5  fathoms,  you  are 
near  enou);h  to  the  shore,  whiuh  is  nut  very  good,  there  being  some  rocks.  The 
best  anchorage  lies  E.  and  V/.  with  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  and  is  about 
three  or  four  cable's  length  from  it- 
Porto  Cabello  has  heretofore  been  the  carecning-place  of  all  the  Spanish  ves- 
sels trading  to  La  Guayra,  and  the  place  where  they  wintered,  after  having  dis- 
charged their  cargoes  at  La  Guayru,  in  order  to  he  more  secure,  to  make  what 
repairs  were  necessary,  and  take  in  part  of  their  return-cargo,  with  which  they 
returned  to  La  Guayra,  to  finish  loading,  and  complete  their  manifests. 

Tae  only  thing  which  ships  of  war  can  require  to  enter  Porto  Cabtllo  for  is,  to 
careen,  or  give  their  bi>ttom  any  repairs  which  may  be  needful :  but  fur  this  they 
ought  to  anchor  in  the  bay,  as  it  is  not  only  unnecessary  to  go  in  to  the  harbour, 
but  is  very  prejudicial. 

The  Coael  to  Leeioard,  or  West,  of  Porto  Cabello,  forms  an  extensive  bay,  call- 
ed Bahia  dt  Tucacc^a,  or  Golfo  Triste.  In  this  bay  are  several  islets,  and  the  regu- 
lar breeze  blob's  right  into  it,  which  render  it  rather  dangerous ;  and,  as  vessels 
which  go  from  Europe  have  no  call  to  enter  it,  they  ought  to  shun  it. 

The  north  point  of  this  bay,  named  Point  Tucaccu,,  bean  N.  W.  by  N.  from 
the  entrance  of  Porto  Cabello,  and  is  twenty-five  mile;^  cUstant  from  it :  thus, 
those  ivho,  from  Porto  Cabello,  are  bound  to  thei  westward,  ought  to  steer  N.  by 
W.  i  W.  until  they  are  abreast  of  Point  Tucacas;  or  N.  N.  W.  h  W.  if  they  wish 
to  go  near  that  point,  and  take  the  anchorage  named  Chichirivicki. 

Point  Tttcacas  is  ti  low  swampy  mangrove  point,  which  extends  out,  about  a 
mile,  from  the  high-land.  To  the  east  of  it  there  i%a  key,  named  Cayfi  Sombrero 
(Hat  Key)  which  is  about  a  mile  in  extent  ff.  W.  and  S.  E'.  it  forms  a  channel 
with  the  shore  of  a  short  half-m.Me  in  breadth,  which,  although  there  is  a  depih 
of  12  fathoms  in  it,  is  obstructed  by  shoals;  and  the  reefs  extending  from  the 
shore  render  it  also  more  dingeruus.  The  N.  E.  part  of  the  key  is  also  surround- 
ed by  a  reef,  which  extends  out  two  cables'  length,  and  it  is  not  adviseable  to 
approach  nearer  it  than  to  a  mile. 

From  Point  Tucacas,  or  that  point  which  is  to  the  west  of  the  most  northerly 
part  of  Cayo  Sombrero,  the  coast  tends  about  N.  W.  low  y.nd  foul,  with  a  reef, 
which  stretches  out  about  half  a  mile  from  it  to  the  mouth  of  the  harbour  of 
Chichirivicki,  which  is  three  miles  distant  from  the  point. 

The  Harbour  of  Chichirivicki  is  formed  by  low  mangrove  lands ;  and,  although 
well  sheltered  from  all  winds,  and  with  7  fathoms  of  water,  and  a  clay  bottom,  it 
is  difficult  to  take,  being  obstructed,  at  the  entrance,  by  shoals  and  reefs.  Its  east 
point  named  Chichiriviehi,  is  steep  to  nearly  a  mile;  and  a  reef  extends  from  it 
to  about  three  cables'  length.  Upon  this  reef  are  some  islets,  which  you  must 
pass  on  the  outside.  To  the  norths  of  them  is  a  key  named  Peraza,  the  whole 
of  which  is  foul,  being  surrounded  by  a  reef  that  stretches  out  half  a  cable's  length 
from  it.  This  key,  and  the  islets  at  the  point,  form  a  channel  of  two  cables' 
length  in  width,  and  having  more  than  8  fathoms  of  water.  Three  cables'  length 
to  the  west  of  Cayo  Paraza  there  is  another  key  named  Chichirivicki,  which  is 
larger,  and  is  also  equally  surrounded  by  a  reef  which  stretches  out  to  half  a  ca- 
ble's length:  between  these  two  there  is  a  channel  of  two  long  cable's  length  in 
width,  with  a  tlepth  of  7  or  8  fathoms.  In  this  channel,  however,  there  are  two 
shoals  which  have  not  more  upon  them  than  2  fathoms  of  water. 

To  he  north  of  Cape  Chichirimchi,  at  less  than  half  a  mile  from  it,  there  is  a 
larger  key,  named  Cape  de  Sal,  (Salt  Key,)  on  account  of  the  salt-ponds  which 
are  on  it.  This  key  is  surrounded  by  a  rfeef,  Which  stretches  out  to  a  cable's 
length  from  it,  except  on  the  S.  W.  side.  Finally,  about  N.  by  E.  and  at  the 
distance  of  a  mile  and  a  half  from  Cape  de  Sal,  lies  Cape  Borracho,  wliich  has  so 
bad  a  reef,  that,  off  its  N.  E-  and  south  points,  it  extends  half  a  mile  outi  All 
the  coast  hereabout  is  so  shuul,  and  the  bottom  so  equal,  that,  at  half  a  mile,  or  a 
little  more,  from  the  shore,  you  find  7  fathoms,  and  deepen  the  water  so  gradually 
that,  at  two  mites  north  of  Cayo  Borracho,  you  will  get  15  fathoms,  mud  and 
r>and. 

To  enter  the  port,  after  you  are  abreast  of  the  northernmost  part  of  Cayo 
Sombrero,  outside  of  which  you  must  always  pass,  steer  towards  Cape  Peraza, 


#  # 


BLUNT^S  AMElllCAN  COAST  PILOT. 


361 


In  order  to  pass  through  the  middle  of  the  strait  between  it  and  the  islets  off  di« 
point,  and  then  steer  to  the  westward  until  Cape  Peraza  bears  N.  E.  |  E.  when 
you  must  run  S.  W.  i  W.  which  course  you  will  change  to  south,  so  soon  as  the 
largest  islet  of  those  at  the  point  of  Chichirivichi  bears  E.  d  N.  and  with  that 
course  you  can  run  in,  and  take  the  shelter  of  the  point ;  or,  if  you  choose,  you 
may  alter  the  course  to  S.  S.  E.  and  anchor  in  7  fathoms,  on  clay. 

From  the  Harbour  of  Chichirivichi,  the  coast  tends  about  N.  N.  W.  eighteen 
miles,  to  Punta  de  San  Juan,  (St.  John's  Point,)  and  continues  all  so  shoal  that 
you  may  find  15  fathoms  of  \vater  •  t  four  miles  from  the  land.  Along  it  there 
is  no  other  danger  than  a  shoal,  of  v  .jry  short  extent,  which  lies  four  miles  to  the 
southward  of  Punta  do  San  Juan,  o>^  a  little  point  named  Punta  Maitatie ;  but  it 
does  not  extend  from  the  coast  more  than  a  mile. 

The  Point  of  San  Juan  is  the  western  point  of  a  bay,  which  is  so  shallow  that* 
at  a  mile  from  the  coast  there  is  not  more  than  3  fathoms.  To  the  N.  W.  of  th© 
point  there  arc  two  keys :  the  first,  which  is  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile,  it 
named  Cayo  de  San  Juan  ;  and  the  second,  which  is  about  two  miles  from  the 
former,  is  called  the  N.  N.  W.  kev.  A  reef  stretches  out  about  two  cables'  leiigtb 
from  the  N.  W.  part  of  Point  Saii  Juan,  and  the  key  of  St.  Juan  is  also  surround- 
ed by  a  reef,  which  extends  out  a  cable's  length.  The  other  key  is  also  shut  in 
by  a  reef,  which  projdtts  from  its  S.  E.  point,  about  half  a  mile,  and  upon  which 
reef  rise  numerous  keys  and  islets.  The  anchorage  is  to  the  S.  W.  of  San  Juan's 
key ;  and,  to  go  into  it,  you  must  pass  to  the  N.  W.  of  that  key,  and  anchor  in 
that  depth  which  suits  the  vessel's  draught  of  water.  We  say  that  you  ought 
to  pass  outside  the  key  of  San  Juan,  because  small  vessels  only  can  pass  through 
the  channel  between  it  and  the  point ;  not  only  because  it  is  narrow  and  foul)  but 
also  because  the  deepest  part  of  it  has  only  3j  fathoms  of  water. 

From  Point  San  Juan,  the  coast  tends  about  W.  N.  W.  19  miles,  to  JPunta 
del  Ubero,  and  is  all  shallow  and  very  clean.  To  the  iVestward  of  Point  Uberd 
it  forms  a  short  bay,  which,  on  account  of  the  shoalness  of  the  water,  will  iiardly 
allow  large  vessels  to  run  in  fur  enough  to  be  sheltered  from  the  breeze.  About 
N.  N.  W.  i  W.  from  this  point,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  and  a  half,  there  is  a  shoal, 
the  least  water  on  which  is  5  fathoms :  it  has  some  loose  stones  on  it. 

From  Punta  de  Ubero  to  Punta  de  Zamuro  is  twelve  miles,  the  coast  tendin|( 
in  the  same  direction  as  the  former.  From  Zamuro  Point  the  coast,  to  the  di»s- 
tance  of  forty  miles,  forms  vai  ious  bends  {senosidades)  to  tie  bay  of  La  Vela  dt 
Cora :  all  of  it  is  shallow  and  clean,  and  you  may  coast  along  it,  at  the  distance 
of  half  a  league,  keeping  the  lead  going.  On  this  coast  rise  various  high  moun- 
tains, which  are  plainly  seen  from  the  sea. 

VELA  DE  CORO.-^In  the  bay  La  Velade  Coro  there  is  anchorage;  and,  td 
direct  yourself  to  it,  all  that  is  necessary  is  the  lead ;  for  the  bottom  is  shallow 
and  clean.  On  the  east  side  of  this  bay  is  the  town  named  La  Vela  de  Cortf ; 
and,  at  about  two  miles  inland,  and  to  the  eastward  of  it,  is  an  Indian  village^ 
named  Carriwl.  At  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  westward  of  the  "own  of  La  VeJk 
de  Coro,  the  River  Coro  discharges  its  waters.  From  this  river  the  coast  turns 
suddenly  to  the  northward,  forming  a  chain  of  sand-hills  for  nineteen  miles,  when 
It  unites  with  the  Peninsula  of  Paraguana. 

PARAGUANA. — The  eastern  coast  of  the  Peninsula  of  Paraguana  tends 
N.  i  W.  fifteen  miles,  to  Punta  Aricula,  which  lies  N.  N.  W.  |  W.  from  the  Bay 
of  Coro,  thirty-one  miles.  All  this  coast  is  very  shoal ;  and,  at  ten  miles  from 
shore,  the  depth  is  only  20  fathoms. 

From  Punta  Aricula  the  coast  tends  about  N.  N.  W.  seventeen  miles,  to  the 
Point  of  Tumatey ;  from  which,  to  Cape  St.  Roman,  the  northernmost  point  of 
the  peninsula,  the  distance  is  four  miles,  and  the  coast  here  tends  nearly  W.  N.  W. 
A  nriountain  named  that  of  Santa  Anna,  rises  in  the  south-eastern  part  of  th6 
peninsula,  and  is  seen  many  leagues  out  at  sea. 

From  Cape  St.  Roman  the  coast  tends  nearly  S.  W.  twelve  miles,  to  Punta 
Macolla,  which  is  the  middle  point  of  a  head-land,  of  which  Punta  del  MedanO 
is  the  north,  and  Punta  del  Bergantin  the  south  point.  The  distance  betweea 
the  extreme  points  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  is  two  miles.  It  is  shallow  and  clean,  and 
you  may  safely  run  along  it  by  the  lead.  This  point  (Macolla,)  and  that  named 
Punta  de  Espada,  (Sword  Point,)  which  lie  about  fifty  miles  distant  from  each 


46 


%' 


362; 


BLUNX'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Other,  nearly  true  East  and  West,  form  the  entrance  of  the  Gulf  Venezuela,  or 
of  Maracaybo. 

GULF  OF  VENEZUELA In  th«  south  part  of  this  Gulf  are  the  mouths 

of  the  Great  Lagoon  or  Lake  of  Maracaybo,  lyin";  in  a  delta;  of  these  mouths 
one  only  is  navigable,  and  that  not  for  vessels  drawing  more  than  12  or  13  feet  of 
water,  it  having  a  bar  upon  which  there  is  not  more  than  14  or  15  feet. 

Although  no  survey  of  the  coasts  of  tiiis  Gulf  have  been  taken,  nor  the  position 
Of  the  Baj  accurately  determined,  yet  it  is  well  for  the  mariner  to  know  the 
course  which  he  ought  to  steer,  in  order  to  gain  it,  whether  from  Punta  Macolla, 
.Of  Punta  de  Espi.da.  The  Hydrographic  Commissioners,  under  the  command 
of  Don  Joaquin  Fr.  Fidalgo,  surveyed  the  eastern  coast  of  the  Gulf,  from  Punta 
de  Macollo  to  Punta  de  Arems,  which  is  to  the  eastward  of  the  Bar,  and  the 
cburse  may  be  gained  by  inspection  of  the  Chart ;  and  as  the  water  is  shallow, 
^  but  without  shoals  or  detached  islands,  the  lead  will  be  the  best  guide.  The  same 
■  remark  applies  to  the  west  coast,  which,  though  not  surveyed,  has  been  explored 
and  examined,  and  you  may,  ^vith  safety,  approach  it  into  5  or  6  fathoms  of 
Water,  in  every  part.  Those  who  enter  this  Gulf  have  gcmerally  no  other  object 
in  view  than  to  go  into  the  lake  to  load  cocao,  tobacco,  and  other  articles;  there- 
fore we  now  direct  our  attention  to  giving  some  directions,  by  which  they  may 
.make  it  out. 

Being  four  leagues  to  the  west  of  Capo  St.  Roman,  and  thence  steering  S.  S. 
TV.  i  W.  you  will  proceed  so  as  to  sight  the  Mcsus  of  Borojo,  which  are  some 
level  hi'.locks,  or  heaps  of  sand,  sit^jatcd  to  the  eastward  of  the  bar:*  from  this 
situation  the  course  to  the  bar  will  be'ncarly  west,  keeping  at  the  distance  of  two 
leagues  from  the  coast,  and  in  from  5  to  6  fathoms  of  waiter,  until  you  gain  sight 
of  the  castles  of  Zapara  and  San  Carlos,  which  defend  the  entrance  of  the  La- 
goon, and  are  placed,  the  first  on  the  eastern  poiut,  •>ud  the  second  on  the  western. 
You  will  not  then  be  on  the  bar,  but  considerably  to  the  south  of  it ;  for  it  is  form- 
ed by  the  shoals  which  stretch  out,  from  two  and  a  half  to  three  miles,  to  the  Vv'. 
N.  W.  of  the  Bajo  Scco  (or  Dry  Shoal.)  On  all  thoKe  shoals  the  sea  breaks,  and 
the  deeper  wjiter  is  easily  distinguished  by  its  having  no  breakers.  To  find  this, 
you  have  only  to  keep  at  a  cable  and  a  half's  length  from  the  outermost  breakers 
pff  Bajo  Seco.  The  last  is  an  islet  of  sand,  which  is  about  a  cabin  and  a  half  in 
every  di«<^ction  ;  it  lies  one  mile  and  a  half  N.  N.  R.  from  San  Carlos'  Castle, 
ai.'d,  at  about  E.  j  N.  from  it,  you  will  se«  another,  named  Zapara.  The  islet 
of  this  n.'ime  has  some  very  hi;;h  mangroves  ;  and,  outside  of  it,  in  6  or  7  fathoms, 
the  bottom  is  of  hard  mini,  mixed  with  sand ;  and  this  is  where  you  ought  to  anchor, 
in  case  of  necessity;  observing  that  you  ought  to  come-to  Avith  good  ground- 
tackle,  as  the  breeze  blows  very  fresh  at  this  place. 

If  bound  to  the  Bar,  and  being  olT  Espado  Point,  and  at  the  distance  of  two 
leagues  from  it,  steer  ^.  S.  W.  with  which  course  you  will  make  to  the  N.  E.  of 
„  the  islet,  named  Bajo  Seco. 

On  this  course,  as  well  as  the  former,  the  depth  diminishes  very  regularly  as 
you  advance  to  the  south  ;  and  it  Avill  be  adviseable  not  to  approach  the  Bar  by 
night,  but  to  run  out  again,  or  keep  on  short  boards  or  tacks,  about  four  leagues 
from  it,  until  day-light  comes  on.  The  ftreezes  in  this  gulf  are  fresh,  and  from 
N.  N.  E.  which  cause  a  heavy  sea  iipon  the  bar,  and  all  the  south  shore  ;  so  that 
the  risk  of  getting  aground  is  considerable,  and  must  be  guarded  agaiost. 

High-water  on  this  Bar  takes  place,  at  full  and  change  days,  at  Hh.  in  the  af- 
ternoon ;  and,  with  spring-tides,  the  waters  rise  from  2  to  2^  feet:  the  least  wa- 
ter on  the  bar,  at  higli-wAtcr,  in  the  time  of  the  breezes,  is  15  feet,  and  17  feet  in 
the  rainy  season,  which  is  in  August,  September,  October,  and  November. 

You  cannot  go  over  this  bar  without  a  pilot ;  and,  therefore,  so  soon  as  your 
vessel  is  nearly  N.  andS.  with  the  castle  of  San  Carlos,  and  in  5 J  fathoms  of  wa- 
ter, you  ought  to  alter  your  course  to  the  west,  until  you  gain  4h  fathoms,  when 
you  will  see  the  sea  breaking  on  the  shoals  in  a  line,  about  W.  N.  W.  In  the  said 
depth  of  4j  fathoms,  you  will  continue  to  the  west,  luffing  or  keeping  away,  as 
may  be  necessary,  so  as  to  keep  the  same  depth  until  you  are  abreast  of  the  last 
breakers,  which  will  be  near  the  mouth ;  and  heaving-to,  on  the  starboard  tacks, 

■*■  It  appears,  from  t'^e  Spanish  Chart,  ok  1S]>7,  that  the  Punta  and  Rio  Borojo  lie  about  18 
leagues  Am  the  Bar,  to  the  eastward 


blunt's 


AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


36» 


or,  what  is  better,  maintaining  yourself  in  your  situation  by  short  tacks,  you  must 
wait  for  a  pilot. 

Steering  with  a  course  for  the  bar,  the  Hrst  thing  you  Avili  discover,  on  account 
of  its  being  the  higlieat  thereabout,  will  be  tlie  Isla  de  Todos,  whi-.h  lies  nearly 
south  from  tlie  castle  of  St.  Carlos ;  ami  j'ou  ought  to  steer  towaru  .  that  island 
until  you  discover  tlie  castles  and  the  Bajo  Seco,  when  you  mu'<t:  set  as  already 
directed. 

It  is  very  necessary  to  knov/  that  the  situation  of  the  mouth  of  the  bar  is  to  the 
tbest  of  the  meridian  of  San  Carlos  ;  for,  without  so  knowing,  every  one  would 
think  it  wa^  l)etween  Btijo  Seco  and  the  Eastern  coast,  where  Zapara  Cas- 
tle stands;  under  this  mistake  they  jn'.ght  be  cast  away  on  the  shoals ;  or,  if 
attempting  to  ent(M-,  it  would  he  a  j)ro(iigy  if  every  person  on  board  did  not  pe- 
rish ;  for  this,  in  several  instances,  has  been  the  case. 

Vessels,  dra^viug  from  10  to  \6  feet  of  water,  ought  to  calculate  so  as  to  enter 
at  high-water,  that  they  may  evade  all  danger  of  even  touching;  as,  if  a  vessel 
■should  lose  her  rudder,  sliipwreck  would  be  inevitable,  on  account  of  the  narrow- 
ness of  the  channel. 

You  ought  to  take  a  pilot  on  going  out,  over  the  Bar,  until  you  are  free  from 
the  shoals ;  after  tliat,  no  particular  instructions  are  necessary  for  sailing  out  vf 
the  gulf;  for,  although  you  must  beat  out,  yet  every  mariner  knows  how  to  rti- 
gulate  his  tacks,  so  th-it  they  may  be  more  or  less  favourable;  and  in  this  gulf  he 
may  prolong  eitlier  tack  without  any  other  guide  than  the  lead.  Those  who 
proportion  these  with  most  judfrment,  will  advert  to  the  circumstance,  that,  at 
four  or  five  o'clock  in  the  evening,  tlie  wind  generally  comes  to  north,  ornearly 
north,  wliich  renders  it  advantageous  to  be  near  the  western  shore  about  that 
time,  in  order  to  get  a  long  tack  to  the  E.  N.  E :  and,  so  soon  as  the  wind  again 
rounds  back  to  the  eastward,  it  will  be  adviseable  to  tack,  not  only  to  gain  north- 
ing by  it,  but  also  to  get  over  on  the  ivcstcrn  shore,  before  the  wind  again  hauls  to. 
the  northward. 

PUNTA  ESPAD.Y  to  CARTIIACENA.— It  has  already  been  shown,  that 
Punta  Espada  is  th.e  Avestern  point  of  the  entrance  of  the  Gulf  of  Venezuela. 
From  it  the  coast  tends  about  N.  W.  h  N.  Id  miles,  to  Cape.  Chichibacoa,  and  is 
all  so  clean  and  shallow  that  the  lead  is  a  good  guide ;  and,  although  the  coast 
is  low,  there  are  various  peaks  and  mountains  Avhich  rise  inland,  the  highest  of 
which  are  named  Sierras  de  Accyte. 

LOS  MONGE3,  or  the  Mo//7v,s.— Nineteen  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  Cape  Chichi- 
bacoa, are  the  Manges  del  Stir,  (Southern  Monks,)  which  are  two  very  small  and 
perfectly  clean  islets,  that  you  may  pass  at  the  distance  of  half  a  cable's  length, 
without  any  fear.  About  E.  N.  E.  from  them,  at  the  distance  of  three  miles, 
there  ■"  another,  named  Monge  del  Estc,  (Eastern  Monk,)  Avhich  is  also  very 
clean  ,  and,  at  N.  t  ^^^-  from  the  first,  eight  miles  distant,  is  another  group,  call- 
ed Monges  del  Norte,  (Northern  Monks,)  Avhicli  are  foul,  with  a  reef;  audit  is 
not  proper  to  approach  them  nearer  tlian  a  mile.  The  passages  which  the 
Northern  Monks  form  with  the  Eastern  and  Southern  Monks,  as  well  as  with  the 
mainland,  are  so  free  and  clear,  tliat  no  class  of  vessels  run  any  risk  in  passing, 
them. 

CAPE  CIIICniBACOA  to  BAHIA  HONDA— From  Punta  Chichibacoa 
the  coast  tends  nearly  W.  N.  W.  2,i  miles,  to  Punta  de  Gallinas,  which  is  the 
northernmost  part  of  the  whole  of  it.  From  Punto  de  Gallinas  the  coast  falls  to 
the  southward  to  Punta  de  la  Aguja,  off  which  the  water  is  shpal  to  a  mile  out  to 
sea.  At  Punta  Aguja.  the  coast  bends  to  the  southward,  forming  a  small  bay, 
named  Bahia  Honda  Chica,  (Little  Bay  Honda,)  which  has  very  shallow  water, 
and  affords  no  she.lter :  next  follows  the  harbour  of  Bahia  Honda,  the  eastern 
point  of  which  is  four  miles  from  Punta  de  la  Aguja. 

Bahia  Honda  is  a  bay  of  great  extent,  and  its  mouth  is  three  miles  wide.  In 
entering  this  bay,  you  have  only  to  keep  clear  of  a  shoal  which  is  in  the  mouth  of 
it,  and  in  a  line  with  the  two  points  of  tlie  entrance,  and  which  lies  a  mile  from  the 
west  point,  and  a  mile  and  two-tiiirds  from  the  east  point.  This  bank,  of  which 
the  greatest  extent  lies  about  E.  and  W.  is  about  a  third  of  a  mile  in  length,  or 
perhaps  a  little  more,  and  the  least  water  on  it,  wh'u  is  at  its  eastern  end,  (caftefia, 


364 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


literally  head,)  Is  only  om  foot ;  and,  with  very  little  wind,  the  sea  always  breaks 
upon  it. 

This  bay  is  so  shallow  and  clear,  that  no  other  guide  than  the  lead  is  necessary 
for  any  one  choosing  to  anchor  in  it.    The  coast  from  Cape  Chichibacoa  to  this 

Iilace  is  low  and  bare,  but  clean  and  shallow,  so  *h  jt  you  may  run  along  it  by  the 
ead. 

BAHIA  HONDA  to  CAPE  LA  VELA.— From  the  western  point  of  Bahia 
Honda  the  coast  tends  about  S.  W.  11  miles,  to  a  bay,  named  El  Porttte,  the  en- 
trance of  which  is  remarkably  narrow,  and  the  depth  of  water  in  the  interior  ad- 
mits small  vessels  only.  From  El  Portete  the  coasts  tends  W.  i  S.  14  miles,  to 
Cabo  la  Vela.  The  coast  is  clean,  and  from  Bahia  Honda  the  land  begins  to  rise 
higher.  One  league  before  you  come  to  Cape  La  Vela,  there  is  a  small  hill,  in 
the  shape  of  a  sugar-loaf,  against  which  the  sea  beats,  and  which  projects  about 
half  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  rest  of  the  shore.  From  this  hill  the  land  con- 
tinues pretty  high,  and  rounds  to  the  south  to  the  west  point,  which  is  that  properly 
Called  Cape  La  Vela :  to  the  westward  of  this,  at  the  distance  of  two.  cable's  length 
and  a  half,  there  is  an  islet  or  rock,  very  clean,  round,  and  steep-to,  and  you  may 
pass  within  a  ship's  length  of  it,  if  you  please.  The  strait  between  this  islet  and 
the  cape  is  sufficiently  clear,  and  there  is  uo  risk  in  passing  it,  but  it  is  better  to 
keep  nearer  the  islet  than  the  cape ;  for,  close  to  it,  you  will  find  B  '"athoms  of  water, 
and  immediately  4,  or  even  only  a,  fathoms.  The  land  at  Cape  La  Vela  is  very 
sterile ;  and,  S.  E.  from  it,  at  about  seven  miles  inland,  rises  a  mountain,  named 
Sierra  de  Carpenteros  (Carpenter's  Mountain.) 

From  the  Cape  the  coast  turns  to  the  southward,  and  forms  a  large  bay,  where 
there  is  shelter  from  the  breezes  :  to  anchor  in  it  you  need  no  other  guide  than 
your  lead,  as  the  whole  bottom  is  clean,  and  so  sliallow,  that,  at  two  miles  from 
the  coast,  you  will  find  6  fathoms,  and  from  that  it  very  gradually  shoalens  to- 
wards the  land. 

CAPE  LA  VELA,  to  RIO  DE  LA  HACHA,  &c.— The  coast  from  Cape  La 
Vela  tends  South  and  S.  W.  23  miles,  to  Castiltetes  Point,  on  which  there  is  a 

Sove,  or  clump,  of  mangroves.  From  this  point  it  tends  W.  S.  W.  14  miles  to 
anare  Point,  and  between  the  two  forms  a  slehderbay,  with  several  projections. 

At  13i  miles,  nearly  W.  S.  W.  from  Mnnare  Point,  is  the  Punta  de  la  Cruz. 
The  intermediate  coast  is  nearly  straight,  although  the  poipts  of  Almidones,  Pajaro, 
and  the  Fronton  de  Jozote,  stretch  out  a  little.  Between  the  two  latter,  at  a  mile 
and  a  half  to  seaward,  lies  the  Pajaro,  or  Bird's  Shoal,  having  two  fathoms  over 
}t,  with  sandy  ground. 

From  the  Punta  de  la  Cruz,  at  four  miles  S.  W.  i  W.  is  Vela  Point ;  and,  at 
seven  miles  from  it,  S.  W.  I  S.  are  the  city  and  river  of  La  HacJia.  The  coast 
thence  stretches  S.  W.  by  W.  and  F.  W.  |  W.  to  Punta  Dibulle,  which  is  31 J 
miles  distant  from  the  city  of  La  Hacha.  From  Dibulle  Point  the  coast  tends 
West  and  W.  |  N.  to  Cape  San  Juan  de  Guia,  which  is  S8J  miles  distant  from 
Pibulle  Point.  All  this  coast,  from  Cape  La  Vela  to  1£  miles  to  the  east  of  San 
Juan  de  Guia,  sends  out  a  bank  of  soundings,  (as  is  shown  in  the  new  Charts,) 
but  it  is  dangerous,  on  siccount  of  several  shoals  on  it,  which  extend  considerably 
out  to  sea.  The  first  s|ioal,  already  noticed,  is  that  called  the  Pajaro  ;  the  second 
^s  named  the  Navio  Qiiebrado.  (or  Wrecked  Ship,)  and  is  situated  at  2j  miles  fi'ora 
the  coast  between  thd  Laguna  Grande  and  the  Laguna  Navio  ^uebrado,  in  lati- 
tude 11*^  26'  15",  and  longitude  73°  15'.  Vessels  should  not  approach  the  coast 
nearer  than  four  leagues  ;  and  care  should  be  taken  not  to  get  into  less  than  10 
fathoms  of  water. 

This  coast  is  generally  low ;  but  something  to  the  west  of  the  city  of  La  Ha- 
cha, the  celebrated  Sierrea  Nevadas  (Snowy  Mountains)  of  Santa  Martha  begin 
to  rise  inland.  These  mountains  are  "well  known,  not  only  from  their  great  "le- 
vation,  but  because  the  summit  terminates  in  two  peaks,  like  sugar-loaves,  which 
are  always  covered  with  snow.  These  mountains  extend  to  the  west,  and  end 
in  the  meridian  of  Cape  Aguja. 

Although  we  have  said  that  it  is  not  adviseable  to  approach  this  coast,  but  to 
make  a  direct  course  from  Cape  La  Vela  to  Cape  Aguja,  and  that  no  vessel 
should  get  into  less  than  10  fathoms;  nevertheless,  vessels  bound  to  La  Hachsf 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


366 


must  approach  it ;  and  it  becomes  necessary  to  give  some  rule  by  which  they 
may  do  this  with  siiftdy.  To  take  the  anchorage,  at  the  city  of  La  Hacha,  and 
being  near  the  roclc  (farallon)  at  Cape  La  Vela,  it  is  necessary  to  steer  S.  W. 
W.  with  which  course  you  will  run  in  sight  of  the  coast;  and,  havl-.j;  run  51 
miles,  you  will  be  to  the  north  of  the  city  of  La  Hacha,  in  G  or  7  fathoms,  on 
sandy  bottom,  and  may  direct  yourself  for  the  anchorage  without  more  attention 
than  the  chart  shows  to  be  necessary.  Large  vessels  ought  to  effect  this  to  the 
N.  N.  W.  of  the  city,  in  5  or  0  fathoms ;  and,  when  the/  make  sail  from  it,  they 
ought  to  follow  this  course  until  they  are  three  leagues  out. 

The  taking  of  the  anchorage  off  Rio  Hacha,  as  well  as  all  others  which  have 
no  secure  distinguishing  marks,  demands  some  vigilance ;  and,  as  a  case  may 
happen  in  which  a  vessel  may  pass  it,  the  bank  of  5  and  5^  fathoms,  on  a  bot- 
tom of  gravel,  sand,  and  rock,  which  lies  15i  miles  to  the  west  of  the  city  of 
La  Hacha,  may  serve  for  ascertaining  a  vessel's  situation.  The  snowy  moun- 
tains of  Santa  Martha  may  also  be  useful  marks. 

From  Cape  San  Juan  de  Guia  the  coast  tends  W.  N.  W.  west,  and  W.  S.  W. 
twelve  and  a  half  miles,  to  the  north  point  of  the  islet  of  Cape  Aguja,  which  forms 
a  prominent  front  of  high  hilly  land,  scarped  or  precipitous,  and  with  deep  wa- 
ter nearly  close  to,  with  various  coves  or  bights,  or  small  bays,  and  good  anchora- 
ges. The  islet  of  Cape  Aguja  forms,  with  a  cape,  a  strait  of  three-tenths  of  a 
mile  in  breadth;  but  the  passage  is  very  narrow,  as  reefs  extend  out  bol^  from 
the  cape  and  the  south  part  of  the  islet,  so  that,  though  there  is  water  encugh  for 
any  vessel,  none  should  attempt  it,  as,  by  doing  so,  they  would  run  the  risk  of  be- 
iqg  lost. 

To  the  N.  W.  of  the  islet  of  Cape  de  la  Aguja  there  are  three  rocks  (farallons) 
very  near  each  other ;  and  the  largest,  which  is  also  the  one  that  extends  farthest 
out,  is  at  three  cables*  distance :  there  is  another  to  the  westward  of  the  west 
point,  which  is  higher  than  either  of  the  former ;  this,  also,  is  at  only  a  short  dis- 
tance.    They  are  all  clean  and  steep-to. 

From  Cape  Aguja  the  coast  tends  S.  S.  W.  iW.  three  and  a  half  miles,  to  Be- 
tin  Point;  which  is  the  north  point  of  the  bay  of  Santa  Martha,  and  the  south 
point  of  the  Cove  or  Bight  (Ancon)  of  Taganga.  Tiie  coast  is  high  and  preci- 
pitous, with  some  beaches  and  indents. 

SANTA  MARTHA,  fee— The  Harbour  of  Santa  Martha  maybe  considered 
as  one  of  tiie  best  on  this  coast.  At  about  half  a  cable's  length  to  the  west  of  its 
northern  point  there  is  a  small  but  high  rock,  which  is  very  clean,  so  that  you 
may  pass  it  within  half  the  length  of  a  line-of-battle  ship,  if  you  choose :  between 
it  and  the  point  are  from  5  to  8  fathoms  of  water ;  but  we  advise  that  no  one 
should  attempt  a  passage  which  is  so  very  narrow,  and  offers  no  advantage.  At 
from  four  to  five  cables'  length  more  to  the  westward  of  the  same  point,  there  is 
an  islet,  named  the  Morro,  also  very  clean,  as  you  may  pass  within  half  a  cable's 
length  of  any  part  of  it:  upon  this  islet  there  is  a  fortification,  which,  with  other 
batteries  on  the  shore,  defends  the  harbour  and  city.  The  strait  between  the 
Morro  and  the  rock  off  the  point  is  very  open,  clean,  and  with  a  depth  of  froit| 
14  to  30  fathoms.  The  bay  is  also  very  clean,  and  has  a  good  depth ;  and  the 
only  thing  to  keep  clear  of,  or  give  a  birth  to,  is  a  bank,  which  stretclies  out 
about  half  a  mile  in  front  of  the  city  ;  but,  as  the  depth  at  its  edges  diminishes 
gradually,  no  one  can  incur  any  damage  from  it,  if  the  hand-lead  be  kept  going. 

Thi  best  amhorage  is  to  the  northward  of  the  city,  running  in,  as  far  as  you 
can,  into  the  basin ;  and,  to  do  this,  you  should  endeavour  to  run  in,  about  half 
a  cable's  length  from  the  rock  off  the  north  point,  and  steer  so  afterwards  as  to 
pass  at  the  same  distance  from  some  rocks,  which  stretch  to  the  south  of  the 
point ;  and,  so  soon  as  you  are  past  them,  luff  all  you  can,  and  anchor  where  it 
suits  you  best ;  being  on  your  guard  against  the  edges  which  extend  from  the 
coast  and  the  points.  On  entering  into  this, anchorage,  be  particularly  wary  as 
to  your  sails,  fee.  for  the  gusts  of  wind  which  come  off  the  land  are  very  heavy. 
The  River  Manzanares  disembogues  a  little  to  the  south  of  the  city ;  and,  though 
it  is  not  large,  its  water  is  good. 

MA6DALENA  RIVER.— From  Gaira  Point,  which  is  the  south  point  of 
Santa  Martha.,  the  coast  tends  south,  thirteen  and  a  half  miles,  to  the  Cienaga^ 


'»» 


366 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


which  ia  a  laguon,  fornied  by  some  or  the  brarichcH  of  tho  River  Magduluiiu- 
From  this  Cienaga  it  tends  to  tlie  west  and  W.  by  N-  thirty-four  mile»,  to  tlie 
western  mouth  of  this  celebrated  river,  whieh  is  named  the  Horn  Senizn,  leaving 
at  eight  miles  to  the  eastward  anrttiur  Boea,  that  of  the  Rio  Vhjo  (or  Old  River.) 
These  streams  form  an  island,  in  tlie  f(»rm  of  a  delt.i,  of  six  miles  from  N.  to  S. 
and  eight  miles  from  K.  to  VV.  which  is  named  the  Isla  de  los  Gonuz. 

By  the  two  directions  which  tin!  coast  takes  from  Santa  Martha,  it  forms  a  ve- 
ry large  bay,  the  bottom  of  which  is  the  Cienairn.  All  this  coast  is  low,  and  has 
a  bank  along  it;  and,  from  the  Ciena{;a  towards  the  west,  it  forms  the  Isla  dc 
Salamanca,  the  western  extremity  of  which  is  formed  by  liie  Rio  Viejo  ;  the  wa- 
ters of  the  Cienaga,  and  those  wliich  form  this  island,  communicating  with  the 
Magdalena  by  several  small  channels. 

The  current  of  this  great  river  is  of  such  force,  that,  at  more  than  five  leagues 
out  at  sea,  it  causes  tlie  water  to  appear  green,  as  if  you  were  sailing  along  a 
shallow  bank.  You  may  rim  aloni^  all  tliis  bay  by  the  hand-lead,  for  it  is  all 
clean.  The  east  part  of  the  Isla  Verde,  (Green  Island)  and  the  west  part  of  that 
of  the  Goinez,  form  the  Ceniza  Mouth  of  the  River  Magdalena;  and,  in  the  mid- 
dle of  this  mouth,  there  are  two  keys.* 

The  Isla  Verde  stretches  from  E.  to  W.  five  miles;  and,  to  the  south  of  it, 
there  is  another,  of  greater  extent,  named  Sahanilla.  At  the  S.  W.  end  of  the 
latter  is  the  harbour  of  the  same  name,  Avith  5,  C,  and  7  fathoms  of  water,  on 
sand  and  oo/.e,  or  mud. 

From  the  Isla  Verde  the  coast  tends  S.  W.  i  W.  thirty-three  miles,  to  the  Ga- 
lera  de  Zamha,  or  Zamba  Point ;  and  the  shore  between  forms  a  bay,  of  from 
five  to  six  miles  in  depth,  all  of  it  having  a  bank ;  for,  at  three  leagues  from  the 
shore,  you  will  find  atJ  fathoms,  on  ooze  or  mud.  On  this  bank  arc  Cascabel 
and  PalmarUo  shoals :  the  first  very  near  the  coast,  in  the  little  bay  formed 
by  the  Morros  (hills,  or  rather  round  hills)  of  Damas  and  Inasco ;  the  second  is 
more  dangerous,  for  it  lies,  at  a  league  oft'  shore,  N.  W.  by  N.  from  Morro  Pela- 
do  (or  Bald  Hill.) 

The  Galera  de  Zamba,  or  Zamba  Point,  is  so  low,  that,  when  the  fcreeze  is  fresh,, 
the  sea  washes  over  the  greater  part  of  it.  To  the  West,  W.  N.  W.  and  N.  W. 
of  its  western  extremity,  and  at  the  distance  of  two  miles  from  the  part  of  it  which 
extends  farthest  out,  there  are  four  small  banks,  of  difterent  sizes,  with  6  fathoms 
of  water,  on  black  sand :  between  these  banks,  and  between  them  and  the  coast, 
there  are  7,  8,  and  9  fathoms,  on  black  sand.  The  Galera  de  Zamba,  which  ex- 
tends out  to  sea  about  eight  miles,  forms  to  the  south  an  anchorage,  sheltered  from 
the  breezes;    but,  in  taking  it,  much  caution  is  required,  on  account  of  the  banks 


♦  Notes,  by  Captain  Livingston. — "  The  land  between  Santa  Martha  and  the  Cienaga  is 
mountainous  ;  but,  between  the  Cienaga  and  Isla  Verde,  it  is  very  low. 

"A  considerable  trade  ia  carried  on  betveen  Santa  Martha  and  J\Iompox',  a  city  about  140 
miles  up  the  Magdalena,  in  pirogues,  or  large  canoes,  by  the  Cienaga  and  river.  The  Cie- 
naga is  so  shallow  that  they  push  the  canoes  along  with  poles. 

"I  have  seen  the  sea  discoloured  (in  the  month  of  June,  1317)  more  than  20  leagues  from 
the  mouth  of  the  river,  but  the  hue  is  rather  a  dirty  whitish  colour  tlian  green  ;  it  realiy 
looks  verj  alarming  to  a  stranger.  At  the  time  I  saw  it,  many  large  trunks  of  trees,  &c.which, 
I  presume,  had  come  down  the  river,  were  floating  about,  and  kept  me  very  uneasy  lest  the 
vessel  (a  schooner  of  100  tons)  should  strike  on  any  of  them  in  the  niglit. 

"  At  about  three  miles  north  from  Isla  Verde,  we  found  no  bottom  with  20  fathoms  of 
line.  The  quantity  of  water  this  immense  river  discharges  is  prodigious  ;  and  I  have  heard 
it  disputed  by  intelligent  persons,  who  knew  botli  rivers,  whether  it  or  tiie  Mississippi,  dis- 
charged most  water.  Mr.  Eckhardt,  an  English  gentleman,  and  iNIr.  i'iiulien,  a  French  one, 
both  of  whom  knew  both  rivers  well,  assured  me  they  thought  that,  on  account  of  the  supe- 
rior depth  and  rapidity  of  the  Magdalena,  they  were  of  opinion  that  the  quantity  of  water 
discharged  by  it  was  greater  than  that  of  the  JNIississippi ;  while  Mr.  ^Viiliam  Davy,  an  En- 
glish gentleman,  who  has  been  to  a  great  distance  up  the  Magdalena,  and  I  believe  as  far  up 
the  Mississippi  as  New-Orleans,  considered  it  much  inferior  to  tlie  Mississippi.  Mr.  Eck- 
hardt is  naturalized  at  Carthagena ;  has  long  resided  in  that  part  of  the  country,  and  is  very 
intelligent ;  and  Mr.  Paulicn  is  a  young  man  of  superior  education,  and  resided  for  some 
time  at  Barrancas,  on  the  banks  of  the  Magdalena,  as  well  as  at  Carthagena." 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


367 


Vlagdalr.iiu- 
ilea,  to  tlitj 
izn,  leiiving 
Old  River.) 

)in  N.  to  S- 

forms  a  ve- 
o\\,  and  has 
tlic  Isla  dr 
•jo;  tlu!  wa- 
I'lig  witli  the 

five  leagues 
ling  along  a 

for  it  is  all 
:  part  of  that 
,  in  the  n»id- 

B  south  of  it, 
r.  end  of  the 
of  water,  on 

es,  to  the  Ga- 
hay,  of  from 
ues  from  the 
are  Cascabd 
e  bay  formed 
the  second  is 
1  Mono  Pela- 

breezt  is  fresh,, 
and  N.  W. 
rt  of  it  which 
ith  6  fathoms 
land  the  coast, 
pa,  which  ex- 
heltered  from 
of  the  banks 


the  Cienaga  is 

la  city  about  140 
liver.    The  Cie- 

I20  leagues  from 
trccn;  it  realiy 
Irccs,  &c.wUich, 
luncasy  lest  the 

20  fathoms  of 
lid  1  have  heard 
Mississippi,  dis- 
L  a  French  one, 
Int  of  the  supe- 
lantity  of  water 
h\  Davy,  an  En- 
lelieve  as  far  up 
Ippi.  Mr.  Eck- 
Itvy,  and  is  very 
[sided  for  some 


'in  it,  and  the  IMade  Aren^,  (Sand  Island,)  which  lies  in  the  middle  of  the  bay; 
therefore  every  one  attempting  to  enter  this  bay  should  pay  great  attention  to 
the  band-lead. 

At  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  l4i  miles,  from  the  point  of  Gahm  de  Zamba,  is  the  Point 
of  Cdiionn,  which  is  low  at  thir  water's  e(l';;e,  but  has  billy  ground  very  close  to 
it:  between  the  two  points  the  coast  is  of  moderate  height;  and,  at  about  one- 
third  from  Punta  de  C'Uioivs,  rises  a  bill,  wliieh  forms  a  kind  of  table  at  its  top, 
and  has  s.  V(>ral  barrancas,  or  reddisb-enloured  scaurs,  or  ravines,  upon  it. 

This  fiill  is  named  the  liujlo  del  Gato.  On  the  intermediate  coast  there  are 
several  danu;erous  spots:  of  these,  the  Cascnjid  Islet,  Ixung  the  first,  bears  S.  by 
Fj.  from  Gulera  de.  Zamhn  Point,  and  lies  at  the  distance  of  six  miles  from  that 
point,  being  one  long  mile  and  a  half  distant  from  the  shore.  N.  i  W.  fromtho 
K.imu  iHlet,  at  tlie  distance  of  one  mile  and  three-tenths,  is  a  little  bank,  with  4 
fathoms;  at  IV.  by  W.  eight  tenths  ofa  mile,  is  a  similar  one  of  4  fathoms;  and 
there  is  anr)tlier,  of  equal  depth,  at  N.  W.  by  W.  I  VV.  from  the  Cascajal,  at  the 
distance  of  two  short  miles.  At  S.  .^  W.  fnun  the  Gnltra  de.  Zamba  Point,  and 
at  the  distance  of  seven  short  miles,  is  the  west  rock  of  liujiodel  Goto  Shoal, 
which  extends  a  long  mile  from  N.  to  S.  At  about  N.  by  E.  i  E.  from  its  north 
end  there  i^  another  rock,  called, the  N.  E.  llock,  or  Unia  del  Gato  (Cat's  Claw  :) 
the  depth,  on  the.  oiitaide  of  this  shoal,  is  from  7  and  8  up  to  16J  fathoms,  at  the 
distance  of  2i  miles.  There  is  also  a  bank  of  3  fathoms,  on  a  rocky  bottom,  at 
the  distance  of  rJ^  miles,  N.  E.  H  N.  from  Camas  Point,  which  lies  in  the  middle 
of  Hujio  del  Goto  hmj. 

At  nearly  S.  \V.  from  Canoas  Point,  and  at  the  distance  of  one  long  mile  and 
a  quarter,  there  is  a  siioal,  named  the  Ne!i;rillo;  it  is  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  extent, 
and  is  composed  of  three  rocks,  at  no  grtnit  distance  from  each  other,  lying  in  a 
triangular  form,  with  from  2  to  D  feet  of  water  on  them.  Round  these  rocks, 
and  very  nyar  to  them,  there  are  (\,  !!,  and  9,  fathoms  of  water,  on  a  bottom  of 
rocks,  small  gravel,  and  sand ;  and  the  channel  between  the  shoal  and  the  coast 
would  be  practicable,  were  it  not  for  three  sunken  rocks,  which  render  it  diffi- 
cult to  pass.  From  the  Negrillo  Shoal,  the  hill  of  La  Pnpa,  .ibove  Carthagena, 
bears  S.  \  E.  distant  75  miles;  and  this  bearing  may,  if  necessary,  serve  to  guide 
you  clear  of  it.  At  S.  W.  a  short  mile  from  the  southernmost  Morrito,  ^Little 
Ilill,)  is  the  Cnbeza  Shoal,  with  2  feet  of  water  on  its  shoalcst  part. 

CARTHAGENA,  kc — From  Canoas  Point,  the  coast  tends  to  the  eastward 
for  a  long  mile,  and  thence  to  the  south  three  miles;  then  rise  some  little  hills, 
named  the  Morritos,  whence  the  coast  which  is  low  and  covered  with  mangroves, 
tends  S.  S.  W.  i  W.  5J  miles,  to  th(!  city  of  Carthagena,  which  is  built  upon  the 
western  part  of  this  humid  land.  At  about  a  mile  and  three-quarters  from  the 
city,  to  the  east,  rises  the  hill  of  La  Popa,  on  the  summit  of  which  there  is  a  con- 
vent of  Augustines,  and  the  Sanctuary  of  Niiestra  Senora  de  la  Popa  (Our  Lady 
of  La  Popa.)  This  hill  may  be  seen,  in  a  clear  day,  at  10  leagues  from  the 
quarter-deck  of  a  line-of-battle  ship. 

The  little  tongue  of  land  on  which  Carthagena  is  built,  extends  S.  by  W.  }  W. 
two  short  miles  from  the  city;  it  then  turns  to  the  east,  and,  with  the  main  land, 
forms  a  basin,  which  is  the  anchorage  or  harbour,  and  which  is  as  well  sheltered 
as  the  best  dock.  At  one  mile  south  from  the  outer  part  of  the  little  tongue  of 
which  we  have  just  spoken,  is  the  north  point  of  the  island,  named  Tierra  Bom- 
ba,  and  the  pass  between  the  two  is  named  Boca  Grmnde. :  it  is  artificially  shut, 
so  that  boats  and  vessels  only,  which  draw  very  little  water,  can  enter  by  it. 
Titrra  Bomba  is  about  four  miles  from  north  to  south,  and  its  south  point  is  the 
north  point  o(  Boca  Chica,  which  is  the  only  entrance  to  the  harbour  of  Cartha- 
gena. The  southern  point  of  this  entrance  is  the  northern  one  of  another  large 
island,  called  Baru,  and  which  is  separated  from  the  main  land  only  by  the  creek 
called  Pasa-Caballos,  and  which  is  navigable  by  canoes  only.  On  both  points  of 
the  £oca  Chica  are  castles,  which  defend  the  entrance:  the  one  on  the  north  side 
is  called  that  of  San  Fernando;  and  the  southern  one,  San  Josef:  the  mouth  or 
entrance  is  rather  more  than  two  cable's  length  in  width  ;  but  there  are  places  in 
which  the  bank  and  shallow  water,  stretching  from  the  south^^rn  castle  (San 
Josefs,)  narrow  it  one-half. 


368 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN    COAST    PlLOt. 


fiiy  this  entrance  you  come  first  into  a  large  sheltered  bay,  where  there  id  jl 
depth  of  14  and  16  fathoms  of  water.  On  the  north  side  of  this,  the  east  coast 
ofTierra  Bomba  inclines  towards  the  main  land,  and  leaves  a  channel  of  a  mile 
in  width ;  at  the  entrance  of  which,  and  in  its  middle,  are  some  shoals,  which  lie 
to  the  westward  of  an  islet,  named  De  Brujas,  (Witch's  Island,)  and  which  is 
very  near  to  the  main  land. 

Having  passed  this  strait,  you  enter  into  a  second  bay,  which  is  opposite  to 
Boca  Grande,  and  in  which  there  are  also  15  and  16  fathoms  of  water.  To  th« 
north  of  this  second  bay  there  is  a  passage  of  about  half  a  mile  in  width,  defended 
by  other  castles,  and  which  conducts  into  the  harbmir.  This  channel,  or  entrance, 
has  a  shoal  in  the  middle,  which  forms  it  into  two  narrow  channels,  but  of  suffi- 
ciently deep  water,  as  there  are  from  9  to  13  fnthoms  in  them  :  while,  over  the 
whole  of  the  harbour,  you  will  not  find  more  than  10  fathoms.* 

From  Punta  de  Camas  to  Boca  Grande  there  are  st  undings  a!l  along,  which 
diminish  gradually,  and  you  will  find  9  fathoms,  at  four  miles,  or  something  less, 
from  the  land.  The  bank  of  soundings  along  shore  is  called  the  Playa  Grande, 
and  you  may  anchor  on  it,  iu  7  or  8  fathoms  of  water,  on  a  bottom  of  spotted 
sand,  in  front  of  the  city.  After  you  are  abreast  of  the  north  part  of  Tkrra  Bomba, 
the  depth  augments  to  20,  .SO,  and  40  fathoms.  To  the  westward  of  Tierra  Bom- 
ba, jaind  at  four  leagues  distance  from  it,  there  is  a  shoal,  named  the  Salmedina, 
which  has  been  much  spoken  of,  on  account  of  the  loss  of  ships  which  it  has  cau- 
sed. This  shoal,  which  is  a  mile  and  a  half  in  extent,  from  north  to  south,  and  a 
little  less  from  east  to  west,  lies  with  the  following  marks  and  bearings : 


■I-   r  ...  •  I    '-. 


From  the  North  Edge  of  the  Shoal. 


The  Castillo  del  Angelf  bears 
The  Mountain  of  La  Popa  . 
N.  W.  Point  of  Tierra  Bomba 
Punta  de  Canoas      .... 


E.  S.  E.  h  E- 
N.  E.  by  E.  i  E. 
E.  N.  E.iE. 
N.  N.  E.  i  E. 


From  the  South  Edge  of  the  Shoal, 


The  Tower  of  the  Cathedral  bears 
Mountain  of  La  Popa  .... 
N.  W.  Point  of  Tierra  Bomba  . 
Punta  de  Canoas 


N.E.iE. 
N.  E.  %  E. 
E.  N.  E. 

N.  .N.  E. 


In  addition  to  these  marks,  which  will  surely  direct  you  clear  of  it,  you  may 
recollect  that  the  north  end  of  it  lies  nearly  true  west  from  the  north  part  of  Bo- 
ca Grande,  and  that,  in  running  from  Playa  Grande  for  Boca  Chica,  you  ought 
to  get  into  from  6  to  3  fathoms,  to  the  west  of  the  city,  at  the  distance  of  three 
short  miles  from  it,  and  steer  afterv.'Hrrls  S.  i  E.  without  inclining  more  to  the 
westward ;  and  so  soon  as  you  increase  the  depth,  keep  more  to  the  larboard 
hand  to  run  along  Tierra  Bomba,  at  the  distaiice  of  half  a  mile  :  you  may  run 
thus,  or  even  within  a  pistol-shot  of  the  north  shore  of  Boca  Chica,  shunning 
the  south  coast  of  it,  as  it  is  foul.  To  enter  Boca  Chica,  and  navigate  inside 
the  ba}'s,  requires  a  pilot,  and  one  may  generally  be  engaged  at  Boca  Chica. 

As  the  port  of  Carthagena  ma]/  be  made,  on  coming  from  the  southward,  it  is 
now  lequisite  to  give  some  description  of  the  southern  coast  as  far  as  the  Roaario 
Islands. 


*  Note,  by  Capt.  Livingston. — "  The  Castillo 
point  of  Boca  Chica,  but  is  completely  insulated. 


de  St.  Josef  does  not  stand  on  the  souco 
The  water  between  it  and  the  south  shor" 
M  too  shallow  to  permit  any  thing  larger  than  boats,  or  canoes,  to  pass ;  but,  to  a  vessel 
coming  in,  it  shows  as  wide  as  tlie  passage  to  the  northward  of  Fort  St.  Josef.  There  is  also 
another  castle  about  one-third  of  a  mile  from  the  castle  of  San  Fernnndc,  on  the  Island  of 
Tierra  Bomba,  named  Caatillo  del  Angel. 

"  Opposite  the  Islote  de  Briyas,  there  is  a  kind  of  mangrove  islet,  or  busU,  near  the  coabtof 
Tierra  Bomba,  off  which  there  is  a  verv  bad  coral  reef;  and  which,  from  the  appearance  of 
the  madrepores,  seems  to  be  growing  fast. 

t  A  fort,  or  redonbt,  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  of  Boca  Chica,  as  already  noticed. 


^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


369 


ere  there  is  rf 
;he  east  coast 
inel  of  a  mile 
►als,  which  lie 
and  which  is 

is  opposite  to 
iter.  To  th« 
idth,  defended 
>1,  or  entrance, 
Is,  but  of  suffi- 
kvhile,  over  the 

I  along,  which 
iomething  le^s^ 
Playa  Grande, 
.ova  of  spotted 

Tierra  Bomba, 
of  Tierra  Bom- 
the  Salmedina, 
hich  it  has  cau- 

to  south,  and  a 
rings : 


E. 
iE. 
E. 
E. 


E. 
E. 


of  it,  you  may 
lorth  part  of  Bo- 
iMca,  you  ought 
[istance  of  three 
ing  more  to  the 
to  the  larboard 
you  may  run 
Jhica,  shunning 
navigate  inside 
iBoca  Chica. 
1  southward,  it  is 
ir  as  the  Rosario 


ttanil  on  the  souifl 

nd  the  south  ■hor" 

,;  but,  to  a  vesiel 

l)scf.  There  is  also 

on  the  Island  of 

p,ncar  thecoabtof 
[the  appearance  of 

already  noticed. 


We  have  already  shown  that  the  south  coagt  of  Boca  Chica  is  the  north  coast 
of  the  island,  named  Bom.  From  the  point  of  the  latter,  which  forms  the  en- 
trance of  Boca  Chica,  the  exterior  coast  of  it  tends  S.  S.  W.  |  W.  thirteen  and 
and  a  half  miles  to  Baru  Point.  This  coast  is  sufficiently  clean  until  you  come 
to  an  islet,  named  the  Farallon  of  Perico,  from  which,  to  the  south,  it  is  verv 
foul,  with  reef:  to  the  west  of  the  coast,  between  Perico  Islet  and  the  south 
point,  are  the  Rosario  Islands,  of  which  there  are  four  principal  ones,  with  some 
small  islets :  the  southernmost  of  these,  which  is  also  the  smallest,  is  called  Isla 
de  Arenas,  and  it  is  a  short  mile  and  a  half  distant  from  the  Baru  shore ;  but  the 
shoals  and  reefs  which  extend  from  both,  narrow  the  passage  so  as  not  to  leave 
a  breadth  of  more  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile. 

At  W.  by  N.  from  Arenas  Island,  three  and  a  half  long  miles,  is  the  Island  of 
Rosario ;  and  to  the  northward  of  these  two,  is  that  named  Isla  Largu,  or  Long 
Island,  which  is  the  largest  of  the  group,  and  which,  with  its  shallow  water,  isl- 
ets, Scco  extend  out  to  the  west  even  farther  than  Rosario  Island. 

To  the  northward  of  the  middle  of  Isla  Larga,  at  rather  more  than  three  miles 
distant,  lies  thi;  islet  Tesoro,  with  a  reef  towards  the  west.  There  is  a  channel 
between,  with  from  18  to  28  fathoms  of  water,  on  sand  and  rocks,  from  which 
Boca  Chica  bears  N.  E.  by  E.  distant  ten  and  a  half  miles. 

The  Rosario  Islands  are  very  foul,  and  no  one  should  get  amOng  them,  unless 
well  acquainted ;  but  keep  at  a  sufficient  distance  to  the  westward,  in  order  to 
avoid  the  shallows  stre^jbing  from  them.  At  about  seven  miles  S.  S.  W.  from 
Rosario  Island  there  is  #  ishoal  named  the  Tortuga. 

The  Rosario  Islands  are  fertile  in  trees,  and  to  the  south  of  them,  there  is 
good  shelter  from  the  breeze.  Besides  the  bank  of  Rosario  Island,  there  are 
two  others :  one  three  and  a  half  miles  to  the  W.  N.  W.  and  another  two  and  a 
half  miles  S.  W.  by  S.    Both  are  rocky,  with  6  and  7  fathoms  of  water  on  them. 

Observations  by  Captain  Don  Torquato  Piedrola. 

On  the  coasts  of  Cartkagena  de  las  Indios,  of  which  I  can  speak  with  cer- 
tainty, the  breezes  do  not  set  in  until  the  end  or  latter  days  of  November,  and 
they  are  not  strong  until  the  middle  or  end  of  December,  from  which  time  they 
are  powerful  both  day  and  night;  only  they  often,  though  not  constantly,  mode- 
rate a  little  between  sun-rise  until  nine  or  ten  in  the  morning,  when  they  regain 
their  ordinary  force.  When  you  are  very  near  the  coast,  especially  if  It  be  high, 
you  may  often  find  them  moderate  at  the  dawn  of  day,  and,  at  sun-rise,  take 
to  E.  N.  E.  until  nine  or  ten  o'clock,  when  they  again  blow  from  their  usual  di- 
rection, which  on  this  coast  is  from  N.  N.  E.  to  N.  E.  Of  these  variations, 
those  who  know  the  coast,  and  sail  near  it,  mav  well  take  advantage ;  and  it 
may  even  be  better,  at  night-fall,  to  anchor  at  the  various  points  which  offer, 
even  for  large  vessels.  In  the  season  which  is  not  of  the  breezes,  that  is,  from 
April  or  May,  to  December,  they  experience  what  has  been  already  described 
in  the  Derrotero ;  but  not  at  the  other  seasons,  as  has  been  shown ;  adding,  that 
any  vessel  which  attempts  to  get  to  windward  outside,  or  out  from  the  land,  will 
not  effect  it  without  great  difficulty  and  damage ;  as  much  from  the  strength  of 
the  breeze,  as  because  the  sea  is  very  short  to  thirty  or  forty  leagues  Arom  the 
coast,  when  it  becomes  longer ;  and  because,  being  forced  in  the  night  to  take  In 
reefs,  and  that  the  current  draws  towards  the  N.  W.  quadrant,  it  follows  that 
the  little  gained  by  tacking  is  lost.  These  facts  have  been  proved  by  continued 
experience. 


Additional  Description  of  the  Coast  and  Places  between  Lh  Guayra 
and  Carthagena:  chiefly  from  the  Journals  of  British  ^avigatort^  ^c. 

In  the  preceding  division,  we  have  given,  in  an  unbroken  form,  the  description 
of,  and  directions  for,  these  coasts,  from  the  Derrotero  de  las  Antilku ;  and  we 
now  add,  in  a  supplementary  form,  some  other  descriptions,  which  may  be  gra- 
tifying and  useful. 


47 


#. 


v-f  Ay. 


•C^-^i:^ 


370 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


The  coasts  which  have  been  described  under  the  present  head  constitute  the 
most  important  portion  of  the  coasts  of  Colombia,  a  country  of  which  the  soil 
is  fertile  in  all  the  richest  productions  of  the  temperate  and  torrid  zones. 

LA  GUAYRA. — The  remains  of  La  Guayra  are  situate  on  a  small  bay,  about 
four  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Blanco,  as  shown  on  the  chart.  On  the  Si- 
erra de  Caracas,  or  high  back  land  to  the  south-eastward  of  this  port,  is  the  re- 
markable high  mountain  called  La  Silla,  or  the  Mountain  of  Caracas,  which 
seems  almost  as  high  as  Tenerife. 

Cape  Blanco  is  so  low,  that,  at  four  leagues  off,  in  a  south-easterly  direction, 
you  cannot  possibly  distinguish  it  from  that  mountain.  Beinj;  off  Cape  Blanco, 
within  a  league  or  two  of  the  land,  you  may  see  the  fort  and  batteries  of  Guay- 
ra, which  appear  of  a  whitish  gray,  while  the  soil  in  the  vicinity  seems  red. 
Cape  Blanco,  from  the  distance  of  about  four  miles,  looks  like  a  town  under  the 
high  land,  and  has  a  gray  and  rugged  appearance.    The  shore  is  bold  and  clear. 

Westward  of  Cape  Blanco,  the  land  continues  high  and  mountainous,  to  the 
distance  of  thirteen  or  fourteen  leagues,  when  it  begins  to  decline  in  height :  the 
coast  all  along  is  bold  and  clear ;  you  may  stand  within  a  mile  of  the  shore  all 
the  way  down  from  La  Guayra  to  Porto  Cabello. 

PORT  CATA,  fee— At  fiftc*!n  leagues  to  leeward  of  Cape  Blanco,  and  five 
and  a  half  to  windward  of  Port  Cabello,  is  the  fine  bay,  or  rather  harbour,  call- 
ed Port  Cata :  there  is  not  less  than  10  fathoms  in  its  entrance ;  and,  when  you 
have  entered,  you  may  anchor  in  what  water  you  please,  from  5  to  20  fathoms^ 
land-locked  from  all  winds  but  those  from  N.  N.  W.  tll^'N.  N.  E.  which  winds 
seldom  prevail  here.  There  h  a  regular  sea-breeze  all  day,  and  a  fine  land- 
breeze  all  night,  with  plenty  of  wood  and  fresh  water.  A  town  is  situated  at 
four  or  five  miles  from  the  harbour ;  and  many  planters  and  other  people  live  in 
the  neighbourhood,  who  have  abundance  of  cocao,  &lc. 

PORT  CABELLO.— From  Cape  Blanco  to  Port  Cabello,  (the  sea-port  of 
Valencia)  the  course  and  distance  are  W.  by  S.  twenty-one  leagues.  The  land, 
as  already  noticed,  is  very  high  to  the  distance  of  about  one  league  to  leeward 
of  Port  Cata,  and  then  it  declines  towards  Port  Cabello,  which  is  situated  in  a 
large  valley. 

Port  Cabello  is  the  next  place  of  consequence  from  La  Guayra  westward,  and 
its  distance  thence  is  about  twenty-two  leagues.  Of  the  province  of  Venezuela 
the  trade  centres  here ;  but  its  exports  of  cocao,  &lc.  have  been  chiefly  to  Cura- 
zao  and  Jamaica. 

This  is  the  only  harbour  in  the  province  that  is  perfectly  sheltered  from  nor- 
therly winds;  it  being  formed  on  the  north  by  a  very  irregular  and  narrow  isth- 
mus, and  sheltered  on  the  south  by  a  range  of  hi^h  hills.  Ships  of  the  largest 
size  may  lie  alongside  a  handsome  k«y.  The  town  is  said  to  contain  only  7500 
or  8000  inhabitants,  and  is  rendered  unhealthy  by  the  confinement  of  the  air  and 
the  vicinity  of  marshes.  The  mouth  of  the  harbour  is  defended  by  a  strong  fort, 
called  the  Castle  of  St.  Philip,  on  the  north  side,  and  the  south  side  by  moles 
and  batteries.  There  is  also  a  fort  on  Piinta  Brava  to  the  N.  N.  E.  for  the  pro- 
tection of  the  road. 

Id  the  vicinity  of  Port  Cabello  are  several  low  islets,  surrounded  by  reefs,  both 
to  the  eastward  and  westward;  particularly  the  Isia  Larga,  Isia  del  Medio  or 
Domingo,  Isia  del  Rey,  and  Isia  Guaiguaza.  Each  is  about  one-quarter  of  a 
mile  in  length,  and  the  latter  is  the  westernmost,  as  it  lies  nearly  west,  one  mile 
and  th^ee-quartprs  from  Punta  Brava,  the  N.  E.  point  of  Port  Cabello.  The 
Isia  del  Rey  (King's  Island)  lies  E.  N.  E.  one  mile  from  the  same  point :  the 
Isia  del  Medio  (Middle  Island)  E.  ^  N.  one  and  a  half  mile  from  Isia  del  Rey : 
and  Isia  Larga,  half  a  mile  E.  S.  E.  half  a  mile  from  Isia  del  Medio :  so  that  the 
easternmost  (Larga)  is  three  and  a  quarter  miles  to  the  leeward  or  eastward  of 
Punta  Brava. 

Coast  westward  of  Port  Cabello. — From  Point  Tucacas  to  the  Punta  Savanas 
Altas,  (Upper  Savannas)  to  the  southward  of  Curazao,  the  coast  is  generally 
low ;  but,  towards  Coro,  it  becomes  higher.  On  this  coast,  very  little  lee-cur- 
rent will  be  found  until  you  have  advanced  without  the  stream  off  the  Savanas 
Point.    At  most  tifnes  there  is  fine  weather  and  variable  winds. 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


371 


CORO.— There  is  but  one  trading-place,  of  any  consequence,  between  Port 
Cabello  and  Cape  St.  Roman,  the  N.  E.  end  of  the  peninsula  of  Paragoana. 
This  is  Coro,  at  the  south  end  of  the  isthmus,  which  is  said  to  contain  10,000 
people,  who  subsist  by  the  exchange  of  cattle  and  skins  for  imported  goods. 

GULF  of  VENEZUELA,  or  MARACAYBO.— The  form  of  this  gulf  can 
be  best  understood  by  reference  to  the  charts ;  whence  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
eastern  side  is  formed  by  the  peninsula  of  Paragoana,  which  is  connected  to  the 
main  by  a  narrow  isthmus :  this  peninsula  is  inhabited  by  Indians  and  a  few 
whites,  who  breed  cattle  for  exportation  to  Curazao,  &tc. 

The  City  of  Maracayho  is  situated  on  the  western  side  of  the  strait,  between 
the  gulf  and  the  lagoon  of  the  same  name. 

■  The  Lagoon  or  iMke  of  Maracayho  is  forty-two  leagues  in  length  from  north 
to  south,  by  about  twenty-eight  in  breadth,  and  is  navigable  for  the  largest  ships. 
Its  water  is  perfectly  fresh,  unless  with  a  prevalence  of  northerly  winds,  when 
it  acquires  a  nauseous  flavour.  The  lake  abounds  with  all  the  salt-water  fish  of 
the  Caribbean  Sea,  but  turtle  do  not  enter  it. 

On  the  N.  E.  shore  of  the  lagoon,  at  a  part  called  Mena,  there  is  an  inexhaust- 
ible store  of  mineral  pitch,  from  which  the  gas,  or  the  exhalation,  appears,  at 
night,  like  a  bluish  vivid  flame,  and  serves  to  guide  the  fishermen,  who  call  it 
the  Lantern  of  Maracayho.  The  banks  of  the  lagoon  are,  in  general,  barren  and 
unhealthy:  hence  the  Indians  preferred  constructing  their  dwellings  on  floating- 
stages  upon  the  watery  the  great  number  of  which,  observed  by  the  Spaniards 
in  their  first  visits  to  this  coast,  caused  them  to  give  it  the  name  of  Venezuela, 
or  Little  Venice.  At  present  but  four,  if  four,  of  these  floating  villages  remain; 
and  their  inhabitants  subsist  solely  on  fish  and  wild-ducks,  with  which  the  lagoon 
abounds.  The  western  bank  is  the  most  fertile,  and  here  are  some  plantations 
of  cocao.  The  south  and  S.  E.  banks  are  uninhabited,  or  nearly  so,  and  are 
entirely  covered  with  wood. 

Gibraltar,  which  is  situated  at  thirty-four  leagues  to  the  S.  S-  E.  of  Maracay- 
ho, has  been  distinguished  as  the  centre  of  trade  between  that  town  and  Truxillo, 
Marida,  andVarinas ;  the  latter  being  inland  towns  to  the  southward.  Many  rivers 
enter  the  lake  near  this  place,  and  it  is  often  overflowed  in  the  rainy  season, 
which  renders  it  very  unwholesome. 

Between  Point  Gallinas,  to  the  west  of  the  Gulf  of  Venezuela,  and  Cape  La 
Vela,  lie  the  harbours  called  Bahia  Honda  and  El  Portete :  these  have  no  settle- 
ments, but  are  sometimes  visited  by  traders,  who  purchase  pearls  from  the  In- 
dians. 

RIO  DE  LA  HACHA. — At  the  entrance  of  this  river,  which  is  situate  at  19 
leagues  to  the  south-westward  from  Cape  la  Vela,  are  the  remains  of  the  city  of 
Hacha,  which  appear  upon  a  little  bill  near  the  sea-coast. 

In  Mr.  JeSereys'  description  of  this  place,  published  in  1762,  he  stated  that, 
in  consequence  of  the  irruptions  of  the  buccannuers,  the  Spaniards  deserted  it  in 
1682;  but  that,  within  a  s!iort  time,  they  settled  here  again,  and  fortified  it.  He 
adds, 

"  In  the  open  country  the  Indians  are  free  from  the  Spanish  yoke,  though 
they  permit  the  priests  to  visit  them.  They  subsist  chiefly  by  grazing  their  cat- 
tle, every  man  marking  his  own,  and  thereby  securing  his  property  ;  but.  as  to 
the  lands,  they  are  common  to  all ;  and  they  have  a  property  only  in  the  ground 
around  their  houses,  which  is  inclosed  by  a  fence.  The  district  is  very  fruitful ; 
produces  much  gold  and  precious  stones,  and  abounds  in  salt.  Formerly  a  pearl- 
fishery  was  carried  on  near  this  town,  which  brought  great  riches  to  its  inhabi- 
tants. 

Since  the  abandonment  of  tne  pearl-fishery,  the  town  is  gone  to  ruin.  It  is, 
nevertheless,  defended  by  a  regular  castle,  dedicated  to  St.  George.  To  the 
westward  is  the  dangerous  shoal,  called  the  Wrecked  Ship  Bank,  already  de- 
scribed on  page  364.  » 

SANTA  MARTHA,  although  a  poor  and  decayed  place,  is  the  capital  of  a 
province  of  the  same  name. 

The  harbour  is  safe,  and  has  very  good  anchoring-ground,  and  a  place  very  fit 


372 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


for  careening  vessels :  there  is,  also,  good  conveniency  for  watering  of  ships  and 
cutting  of  wood. 

RIO  DE  LA  MAGDALENA.— The  great  River  Magdalena  divides  the  pro- 
vince of  Gartbagena  from  that  of  Santa  Martha.  It  has  a  course  into  the  interior 
above  200  leagues;  and  is  navigable  to  the  town  of  Honda,  at  130  leagues  from 
the  sea.  It  falls  into  the  sea  by  six  bocas  or  mouths,  forming  a  delta,  and  with 
great  velocity,  as  already  noticed.  Currents  found  in  the  neighbourhood  have 
peen  distinguished  as  the  effect  of  its  streams,  which  may  be  perceived  embrown- 
ing or  discolouring  the  waters  of  the  sea  to  considerable  distances,  as  to  Santa 
Martha,  &c. 

The  following  is  from  the  description  of  Mr.  Jefferys,  1762  :— The  Rio  Grande 
de  la  Magdalena  is  a  very  noble  river,  by  far  the  best  in  all  Terra  Firma,  and 
rises  in  the  mountains  of  Fopayan  :  it  is  navigable  almost  from  its  source,  and 
receives  the  Rio  de  Cauca,  which  springs  from  the  same  mountains,  and  is  little 
inferior  to  it  in  extent  or  magnitude.  A  branch,  called  El  Dimte,  enters  the  sea 
about  10  leagues  to  the  south  of  Carthagena,  which,  though  filled  with  reeds,  is 
navigable  through  a  fine  populous  country. 

By  this  river  the  produce  and  treasure  of  all  the  country  between  Popayan 
and  Carthagena  is  carried  on  ;  and,  for  more  than  SOO  miles  from  the  sea,  this 
river  runs  through  a  very  fine  plain,  extremely  well  settled,  with  several  con- 
siderable towns  and  villages  on  its  banks ;  from  some  of  the  principal  of  which 
are  many  good  roads  to  Carthagena  and  other  parts  on  the  western  coast  of  this 
province :  but  the  finest  is  that  from  Zl  Retiro  to  Tolu,  through  a  very  pleasant 
valley,  for  about  20  leagues. 

BAY  of  ZAMBA,  fcc— This  bay,  to  the  northward  of  Carthagena,  affords  ex- 
cellent shelter  within  the  four  Arenas,  or  Sandy  Isles,  the  channels  between 
which  are  all  safe :  Hence  this  place  has  been  called  Arenas  or  Sandy  Bay. 

Ships  bound  from  Jamaica  to  this  part  of  the  Main,  must  work  up  to  Yallah's 
Point,  or  to  the  east  end  of  that  island,  and  then  steer  so  as  to  make  good  a  S. 
S.  E.  course,  allowing  sufficiently  for  currents,  which,  it  is  to  be  observed,  most- 
ly prevail  to  the  westward.  With  this  precaution,  you  will  probably  fall  in  with 
the  high  land  of  Santa  Martha,  or  the  River  Magdalena,  and  the  '  Ul  called  Mor- 
ro  Hermoso,  on  the  west  side  of  that  river,  in  latitude  10°  58',  longitude  75^4^'. 
The  distance  from  Jamaica  to  the  latter  spot,  on  a  true  S.  by  £<  bearing,  is  141 
leagues.  On  approaching  the  Magdalena,  the  light  or  discoloured  water  may, 
at  times,  be  found  at  30  leagues  off.  The  high  land  of  St.  Mariha  is  the  highest 
hereabout;  but  Point  Occa,  on  the  west  of  the  Magdalena,  is  alsi>  a  bluff  point. 
Coming  in  with  the  coast  h\  the  night,  approach  no  nearer  than  in  22  fathoms. 

The  land  between  Morro  Hermoso  and  the  Bay  of  Zamba  is  distinguished  by 
its  high  hills.  The  arm  of  land  which  forms  the  north  side  of  the  bay  is  called 
the  Galera  de  Zamba.  The  landjs  all  low,  excepting  a  volcano  upon  the  east 
side  of  the  bay,  which  appears  flat  and  round*  The  hill  of  Zamba  appears  like 
Maiden's  Paps,  and  there  is  another  which  appears  like  a  barn. 

The  fk-llowing  directions  for  sailing  into  and  out  of  the  bay  have  been  compo* 
sed  from  those  of  the  late  Admiral  Sir  George  Young:— 

The  danger  of  going  in  is  a  reef  at  the  N.  3.  part;  give  it  a  birth  of  two  or 
three  miles,  and  steer  S.  S.  W.  and  S.  W.  by  S.  in  7  or  8  fathoms  of  water. 
The  next  shoal  is  a  bank  of  4  fathoms,  bearing  W.  N.  W.  about  three  miles ; 
steer  S.  by  W.  and  South,  around  the  point,  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  keejiing  at  the 
distance  of  half  a  mile  or  a  mile :  then  steer  up  S.  E.  and  E.  S.  £.  and  you  may 
anchor  in  what  depth  you  please,  from  3  to  20  fathoms,  good  holding  ground. 

The  bay  is  six  or  seven  miles  deep,  and  five  broad.  It  has  many  lagoons, 
wherein  smaller  vessels  lie,  in  2  or  3  fathoms  of  water.  Large  ships  generally 
lie  in  8  or  10  fathoms.  There  are  t.vo  small  keys  above  water  in  the  bay;  one 
bearing  S.  E.  from  Zamba  Poik^t;  the  other  about  S.  by  E. 

As  the  bay  lies  about  N.  E.  by  E.  and  S.  W.  bv  W.  no  winds,  except  from 
the  N.  W.  can  hurt  you  here ;  but  they  blow  very  hard.  It  sometimes  happens 
thatN.  E.  winds  prevail  during  the  greatest  part  of  the  year.  Variation  6*  22' 
E.  1770. 

?    '-^     *    '^  .  •.  .. 


Wf.UNrS  AMKRICAN  COA3T  PILOT. 


373 


If  sailing  out  of  thia  bay  for  Carthagena,  fii-Ht  steer  to  tiie  W.  N.  W.  to  get  two 
or  three  leagues  off:  then  steer  S.  S.  W.  lint,  if  bound  to  the  eastward,  or  to 
Jamaica,  you  must  work  up  as  far  as  the  River  Magdalena  or  Point  Occa,  to 
make  sure  of  fetching  the  cast  end  of  Jamaica. 

There  is  good  anchorage  with  Zamba  Point  N.  W.  and  the  vol^no  N.  E.  or 
N.  E.  by  E.  and  Zamba  Hill  E   S.  E.  to  East. 

CARTHAGENA. — ^Thiscity,  once  so  oi>lebrated,  is  situated  on  a  sandy  islandt 
connected  to  the  main  by  two  broad  artificial  causeys.  Its  situation,  according 
to  the  late  observations,  is  latitude  10^  !^i>'   19",   longitude  75°  37'  0  . 

The  Harbour  of  Carthagena  is  one  of  the  best  on  the  coast.  It  extends  two 
leagues  and  a  half  from  North  to  South,  and  has  safe  anchorage,  though  the  shal- 
lows at  the  entrance  and  other  parts  make  a  careful  steerage  necessary. 


Remarks  on  Carthagena,  he.  by  Captain  Livingston. 


;en  compo- 


Vessels  from  the  northward,  in  particular,  should  be  very  cautious  in  approach- 
ing that  low  dangerous  point  Funta  de  Zamba. 

When  the  v.  ity  bears  about  East,  it  makes  a  fine  appearance  from  the  sea.  At 
about  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  southward  of  the  city,  is  Boca  Grande  (called  in 
some  Charts  Boca  Cerrada  or  Short  Port.)  When  the  English  attacked  Car- 
thagerta  in  1774  this  was  the  principal  entrance  to  the  harbour;  but  it  has  since, 
(I  think  in  1776,)  been  blocked  up  with  old  vessels,  stones,  &tc.  There  is,  how- 
ever, still  a  passage  for  small  craft;  as,  during  the  siege,  a  few  years  since,  (when 
besieged  bv  Murillo)  the  American  schooner  fFave,  having  been  lightened  so  as 
to  draw  only  about  8  feet  of  water,  passed  through  it. 

After  passing  Boca  Grande  you  may  make  as  bold  as  you  please  with  the  shore 
of  the  Island  Tierra  Bomba,  all  along  to  Boca  Chica;  this  entrance  is  very  nar- 
row, and,  as  you  approach  it,  the  castle  of  San  Joac/* appears  situated,  as  it  were, 
in  ihe  very  middle  of  the  entrance. 

*^  In  running  down  from  opposite  the  city  to  Boca  Chica,  the  shoal,  called  the 
Salmedinas,  ought  to  be  carefully  avoided,  which  is  easily  done  by  keeping  near 
the  bold  shore  of  Tierra  Bomba.  The  Salmedinas'  shoal  lies  S.  W.  true,  from 
the  Cathedral  Church  of  Carthagena,  and  N>  W.  true,  from  the  point  to  the 
westward  of  Boca  Chica,  on  which  there  is  a  kind  of  breast-work  of  stone,  built 
about  40  feet  above  the  level  of  thf^ater,  and  having  two  guns  mounted  on  it. 

"  Vessels  bound  in,  may  get  a  pnM  at  Boca  Chica ;  but,  as  it  sometimes  hap- 
pens that  they  do  not  come  off  untn  you  are  in  the  narrows,  it  is  necessary  to 


keep  the  larboard  shore  close  on  board,  which  is  bold-to,  though  low  and  sandy. 
A  stranger,  when  he  first  comes  in  sight  of  the  Castle  of  St.  Josef,  at  Boca  Chica, 
which  stands  on  a  detached  shoal,  is  apt  to  suppose  the  passage  in  lies  to  the 
southward  of  that  fort;  a  mistake  which,  if  not  discovered  in  time,  might  prove 
fatal;  as  the  water  between  it  and  the  southern  shore,  or  that  of  Baru  Island,  is 
all  shoal. 

••  Luff  up  close  round  the  Fort  which  stands  on  your  larboard  hand,  (on  Tierra 
Bomba,)  keeping  the  Castle  of  St.  Josef  on  your  starboard  side. 

"  You  will  L  J  hailed  from  the  Castle  on  Tierra  Bomba ;  and,  as  soon  as  you 
are  round  it,  must  shoot  up  your  vessel  into  a  little  bay,  formed  by  the  Castle^s 

Soint  and  a  point  about  three  cables'  length  above  it,  at  a  kind  of  village  named 
*eubla  de  los  Angeks.  Here  you  must  come-to,  till  you  are  visited  by  the  guard- 
boat,  and  receive  permission  to  proceed  up  the  harbour,  to  fhe  city.  It  is  ad- 
viaeable  always  to  come-to  with  your  best  bower,  in  bout  17  fathoms,  as  you 
cannot  give  much  scope  of  cable;  and  there  are  often  very  heavy  squalls  or 
gusts  of  wind,  jparticularly  from  2  to  6  A.  M> 
,__  "  I  say  nothing  of  going  up  to  the  city,  as  you  must  take  a  pik>t/' 


'U^9m-' 


374 


I3I,UNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Directions  for  proceeding  from  the  South-westward  to  Carthagena,  the 
Magdalena,  Santa  Martha,  and  Cape  La  Vela.  By  Cap.  J.  Mac- 
kellar  and  Mr.  J.  Town,  R.  JV. 

On  comina^up  from  the  south-wes'.ward,  towards  Carthagena,  you  will  make 
the  Isles  of  Rosario,  which  may  always  be  known  from  those  of  St.  Bernardo, 
lying  more  to  the  southward,  as  they  have  a  triangular  form,  and  are  long  and 
low.  Having  passed  these  islands,  in  fine  weather,  you  may  see  the  hill  over 
Carthagena,  called  the  Popa,  with  its  convent,  castle,  and  signal-staflF.  The  land 
here  appears  in  a  triangular  form,  not  unlike  a  gunner's  quoin.  In  going  to  the 
anchorage,  you  must  steer  to  the  northward,  until  you  open  the  town  of  Car- 
thagena to  the  southward  and  eastward  of  the  Popa,  which  may  be  seen  from 
sea  at  ten  or  twelve  leagues  ofiF.  In  coming  in  from  sea,  never  bring  the  Popa 
to  bear  to  the  northward  of  east.  Either  of  the  above  bearings  or  marks  will 
lead  you  clear  of  the  Salmedina  shoal,  which  has,  on  its  shoaler  part,  only  8  feel 
of  water :  it  bears  from  the  Popa  S.  W.  by  W.  seven  to  eight  miles. 
^  The  anchorage  oflf  Carthagena  is  very  good,  sand  and  mud,  and  from  eight  to 
six  fathoms  of  water.  Here  you  are  about  three  and  a  half  or  four  miles  from 
the  city,  and  may  observe  a  gateway,  where  you  may  land,  keeping  a  little  to 
the  westward,  where  there  is  a  good  beach  of  sand.  In  the  fine  season,  the  winds 
generally  blow  alongshore,  and  seldom  bring  in  much  sea.  The  marks  for  anchor- 
ing are,  the  Citadel  on  with  the  lower  south  part  of  the  Popa,  and  the  Boca  Chica 
S.  i  E.  and  the  Popa  E.  by  S.  The  current  generally  goes  with  the  wind,  but 
after  you  get  to  the  eastward  of  the  Rosario  Isles,  you  will  find  a  current  setting 
to  the  N.  W.  and  N.  N.  W.  at  the  rate  of  from  one  to  two  miles  in  an  hour. 

Ships  anchoring  off  Carthagena,  with  the  general  trade-wind,  should  bring  the 
citadel  of  San  Lazara  and  the  Popa  on  with  each  other,  bearing  about  east,  or 
E.  ^^  N.  with  the  Boca  Chica  south,  Point  Canoas  N.  by  E.  i  E.  in  about  6  or  7 
fathoms,  fine  sand. 

CARTHAGENA  to  the  MAGDALENA.— In  leaving  the  anchorage  off 
Carthagena,  with  the  wind  from  the  westward,  you  seldom  carry  it  to  the  east- 
ward of  Galera  de  Zamba,  after  passing  which  you  may  expect  light  winds  and 
variable,  or  a  strong  trade-wind. 

Between  the  months  of  May  and  November,  you  cannot  put  any  dependence 
on  the  winds  or  currents ;  but  from  November  to  May  the  trade-wind  blows 
home. 

You  may  find  as  good  anchorage  within  three  miles  from  the  shore  between 
the  Galera  de  Zamba  as  at  Carthagena;  and,  in  my  opinion,  there  is  much  supe- 
rior anchorage  within  the  Zamba  than  in  any  other  part  of  this  coast. 

Being  off  Galera  de  Zamba,  when  bound  to  the  eastward,  with  tho.  general 
trade-wind,  which  is  from  N.  E.  to  E.  N.  EJlfpu  may  stand  in  towards  the  shore, 
near  the  Zamba,  to  12,  or  15  fathoms,  or  wfinih  four  miles  ;  to  tha  eastward  of 
the  Zamba  you  may  stand  in  to  7  fathoms.  Towards  the  high  land  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  entrance  of  the  Magdalena  the  shore  is  steep ;  therefore  tack  in  1 1 
fathoms. 

hhips  may  anchor  any  where  between  the  east  part  of  the  Galera  de  Zamba 
and  the  westernmost  low  land  of  the  Magdalena,  in  from  15  to  7  fathoms,  fine 
sandy  bottom.  In  turning  to  windward,  from  Galera  de  Zainba  towards  Santa  . 
MarUia,  close  to  the  shore,  and  the  lead  constantly  going,  we  had  regular  sound- 
ings, from  50  to  7  fathoms,  until  near  the  higji  land  to  the  westward  of  the  Mag- 
dalena, where  the  shore  becomes  steep-to,  but  the  ground  is  clear  and  good  for 
anchoring.  During  tiie  time  we  remained  between  the  Zamba  and  tl>e  Magdale- 
na, we  had  occasion  to  anchor  twice  with  the  following  bearings :  First  anchorage, 
the  extreme  point  of  Galera  de  Zamba  S.  W.  by  W.  ten  or  twelve  miles ;  the 
S.  E.  part  of  the  Zamba  south,  7  miles ;  the  extreme  of  the  land  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E. 
Pigeon  Hill,  S.  E.  by  E.  4  E.  distance  Irom  the  shore  four  miles,  in  9J  fathoms, 
fine  sandy  bottom.  Second  anchorage,  in  12  fathoms,  the  extremity  of  the 
Magdalena  N.  E.  by  E.  4  E.  Pigeon  Hill,  S.  ^  W.  distance  f^rom  the  shore,  3|  miles. 
Durmg  the  time  the  ship  lay  at  anchor,  I  sounded  in  different  directions  from  the 
shipi  and  found  tbe  soundings  very  regular,  and  the  ground  clear. 


BLBNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


376 


Mr.  Town  adds,  I  should  recommend,  if  turning  to  windward,  with  strong 
trade-winds,  to  keep  the  shore  close-to  :  whereas,  by  going  off  from  the  land, 
you  will  not  only  have  a  heavy  sea,  but  also  a  strong  N.  W.  current.  If  you  have 
light  variable  winds,  approach  uu  nearer  to  the  land  than  four  or  five  leagues,  as 
you  may  be  certain  of  an  easterly  current. 

CARTHAGENA  to  SANTA  MARTHA — On  leaving  Carthagena,  and  going 
to  Santa  Martha,  in  the  rainy  season,  (May  to  November,)  you  will  generally  have, 
when  in-shore,  the  winds  light  and  variable,  accompanied  with  heavy  rains,  and 
violent  thunder  and  lightning.  OS  the  Magdulena  River  you  will  find  the  water 
very  much  coloured  by  the  water  from  the  river ;  and,  during  the  rain,  you  may 
observe  the  colour  of  the  water  change  at  four  or  five  leagues  from  the  land. 
On  approaching  Santa  Martha,  a  stranger  will  have  some  difficulty  in  making 
out  the  harbour.  When  coming  in  from  the  northward  and  westward,  you  may 
see  the  Pico  de  Gaira,  or  high  land  of  Santa  Martha,  at  sixty  or  seventy  miles 
off.  On  advancing  near  to  the  land,  you  will  observe  a  remarkable  aivision  in 
the  mountains,  between  which  is  the  harbour.  When  close  to  the  land,  you 
will  loose  sij;ht  of  this  division,  and  the  harbour  is  then  to  be  known  by  the 
highest  mountain  that  stands  to  the  southward  of  the  harbour.  In  going  in,  you 
may  pass  on  either  side  of  the  Morro  Islet,  which  lies  at  the  entrance ;  but  ap- 
proach no  nearer  to  this  islet  than  one-fourth  of  a  cable's  length.  There  arc  a 
few  sunken  rocks  lying  close  to  it,  on  each  side.  When  within  the  islet,  you  may 
anchor  any  where,  in  from  25  to  15  fathoms,  soft  mud. 

SANTA  MARTHA,  and  thence  to  CAPE  LA  VELA.— Being  off  the  har- 
bour, and  going  in  with  a  fair  wind,  you  may  pass  to  the  Morro  on  either  side,  as 
above  directed.  I  should  recommend  the  Western  Passage  to  a  stranger,  when 
coming  in,  because  it  is  the  largest ;  for,  in  passing  it  on  the  west,  you  have  room 
either  to  veer  or  tack,  if  taken  aback  by  the  sudden  flaws,  which,  at  times,  come 
oif  from  the  high  land ;  the  main  being  steep-to,  as  well  as  the  Morro. 

There  are  no  d'tngers  to  be  apprehended  by  going  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Morro,  if  you  can  depend  on  the  wind.  On  passing  through  either  passage,  so 
soon  as  you  are  within  the  Morro,  bring  the  two  church-towers  in  one,  or  the 
round  tower  just  appearing  in  sight  to  the  right  of  the  square  tower;  and,  so 
soon  as  you  have  shut  in  the  whole  of  the  land  to  the  northward,  or  about  two 
cables'  length  within  the  Little  Morro,  (Morro  Chica,)  you  should  bring-to,  direct- 
ly under  the  fort  on  the  point  within  the  Little  Morro,  in  from  22  to  25  fathoms, 
and  moor  to  the  southward  and  westward  in  17  or  20  fathoms. 

In  a  small  vessel,  you  may  go  well  up  the  river  to  the  northward  and  east- 
ward, observing  to  keep  the  larboard  shore  close-to  until  you  have  shut  in  the 
Little  Morro.     You  may  then  anchor  in  from  14  to  20  fathoms,  soft  mud. 

When  coming  in,  by  the  Western  Passage,  you  will  not  obtain  soundings  untH 
you  have  opened  the  small  passage  between  the  Morro  and  the  main.  You  will 
then  gain  soundings  in  mid-channel,  betwf.  n  the  Morro  and  Fort  Fernando, 
from  30  to  25  fathoms ;  but  it  frequently  happens  that  soundings  are  not  ob-- 
taitied  before  it  be  time  to  let  go  the  anchor. 

If  turning  in,  you  may  stand  towards  Fort  Fernando  to  within  half  a  cable's 
length;  as  the  shore  is  steep-to  until  you  are  up  to  the  watering-place,  which  is 
about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  town.  From  this  part,  a  shoal  extends  in  a 
dn-ection  for  the  point  or  the  fort  within  the  Little  Morro.  Ships  coming  in 
should,  therefore,  be  very  careful,  and  not  anchor  far  within  the  point,  until  they 
have  brought  the  round  church-tower  open  to  the  left  of  the  square  tower  ;  as 
tlnre  are  9  fathoms  close  to  the  bank,  on  which  there  are  not  more  than  12  or 
14  feet.  You  may,  also,  anchor  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  this  bank,  in 
from  16  to  20  fathoms;  but  close  to  the  shore,  and  at  about  li  cable's  length 
from  the  watering-place.     The  bank  is  called  the  Santo  Domingo  Bank. 

Captain  Mackellar  says,  that  St.  Martha  is  by  far  the  best-calculated  port  of 
any  that  he  has  remarked  on  these  coasts  for  men  of  war  to  refresh  their  crews 
in,  as  a  fine  river,  on  the  western  side,  runs  into  the  Harbour,  at  about  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  from  the  anchorage,  where  a  fleet  of  twenty  saH  of  the  line  could  water 
in  a  day. 

SatUa  MartlM,  Eastward.— When  off  Santa  Marthi,  and  bound  to  the  east 


376 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


ward,  it  will  be  most  a^vidcable  to  keep  the  land  aboard,  as  it  is  seldom  that  you 
will  find  any  other  wind  than  the  general  trade,  which  is  from  East  to  N.  E. 
After  you  have  advanced  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Guia,  you  may  stand  in  to- 
wards the  shore  to  7  or  10  futhoma,  and  off  to  50  or  60,  as  the  land  here  be- 
comes low,  and  the  soundings  towanis  it  very  regular.  Wreck  Reef*  lies  nearly 
E.  by  N.  50  miles  from  Cape  Guia,  and  from  two  to  three  miles  from  the  land. 
There  is  no  part  of  this  shoa!  to  be  seen  above  water ;  give  it  therefore,  the  birth 
of  A  mile,  and  do  not  stand  nearer  to  it  than  15  fathoms,  until  you  are  to  the 
eastward  of  Rio  de  la  Hacha ;  vou  may  then  stand  in,  towards  the  shore,  to  8 
or  10  fathoms,  and  off  to  60,  which  is  near  the  outer  edge  of  the  bank. 

At  about  eleven  miles  N.  E.  (rom  Punta  de  Piedras,  or  Rocky  Point,  is  the 
small  shoal,  called  by  the  Spaniards,  Bajo  del  Pejaro,  the  outer  edge  of  which 
lies  about  thn^e  miles  from  the  shore,  and  may,  at  times,  be  seen.  During  a 
strong  breeze,  approach  no  nearer  to  it  than  in  10  fathoms;  but,  afterwards,  to 
what  dcj'  th  yo\i  pinase  When  to  the  eastward  of  this  reef,  you  may  stand  to- 
wards til  \v.i\  u(  to  Cape  La  Vela,  into  6  or  7  fathoms,  and  anchor  in  what 
water  yc  -       *csf 

Cape  L'  V  3Jia  a  ai  the  westward,  on  its  first  appearance,  makes  like  a  num- 
ber of  smat.  '"lands  id  you  cannot  distinguish  the  cape  from  an  island  until 
you  are  within  seven  ;  *  uight  miles  of  it,  as  the  land  is  very  low  within  it,  ex- 
cepting a  few  hills,  which  stand  at  some  distance  within  the  land.  There  is  a 
small  islet  or  rock  at  about  two  cables'  length  from  the  cape,  between  which 
and  the  cape  small  vessels  may  pass  in  mid-channel :  the  depth  is  5  fathoms,  and 
close  to  the  rock  3^. 

From  Cape  La  Vela,  the  land  tends  to  the  southward,  forming  a  bay,  with 
good  anchorage  for  any  number  of  ships.  The  best  anchorage  is  a  little  within 
the  cape,  in  from  7  to  12  fathoms.  With  the  islet  or  rock  bearing  about  N.  by  E. 
or  N.  N.  E.  two  and  a  half  miles,  there  is  fine  sandy  bottom,  and  soundings  ve- 
ry regular,  in  from  4  to  7  fathoms.  There  are  here  no  other  inhabitants  than 
the  Indians,  of  whom  you  may  procure  stock ;  but  I  have  not  seen  fresh  water 
on  any  part  of  this  coast. — ^Yar.  near  Cape  La  Vela,  by  amplitude,  6^  S8'  E. 
1817. 

ARCHILLA,  LOS  ROQUES,  Uc^ArchUla  lies  at  the  distance  of  £4 
leagues  N.i  W.  from  Cape  Cordera.  It  is  about  six  miles  long  from  East 
to  West,  and  has,  off  its  N.  E.  part,  several  low  islets,  separated  by  nfir- 
row  channels,  and  appearing  like  one  island.  It  has  no  fresh  water,  and  is  uAln- 
habited.  The  north  side  is  foul,  hut  the  south  so  bold  that  a  ship  may  lie  along 
side  the  rocks.    The  whole  is  more  particularly  described  hereafter. 

The  Roca  lies  as  represented  On  the  Charts,  to  the  westward  of  Archilla,  dis- 
tant about  7  leagues.  These  keys  are  very  imperfectly  known.  The  northern 
one  has  a  high  white  elevation  on  the  west  end.  There  is  a  stream  of  fresh  wa- 
ter on  its  south  side,  but  it  is  impregnated  with  some  aluminous  mineral.  AH 
the  keys  are  low  and  uninhabited,  and  are  distinguished  only  by  the  production 
of  salt. 

The  AYES  oiuBIRDS'  Islands  are  five  in  number,  and  described  page  S2l. 
They  are  composed  of  two  groups,  comprising  two  larger  and  three  lesser  is- 
lets. The  eastern  lies  10  league?  W.  by  N.  from  the  nearest  part  of  the  Roca, 
and  28  leagues  N.  N.  W.  from  La  Guayra. 


Buen  Ayre,  Curocoa,  &c, 

BUEN  AYRE,  or  BONAIR.— This  island  is  about  six  leagues  in  length,  from 
N.  W.  to  S.  E.  It  is  a  dei^ndency  of  Curocoa.  The  island  yields  nothing  but 
wood  and  salt,  there  is  a  road  on  the  western  side,  which  lies  within  a  smaU  islet, 
called  LUtU  Bwn  Ayre,  but  it  is  rather  difiicult  for  strangers.  ^ 

♦  Sec  page  364. 


aij 


^M 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


377 


Vessels  passing  the  south  side  of  the  island  have,  been  directc.d  to  keep  4  ur  & 
miles  from  shore,  as  there  are  some  rocko  and  foul  ground,  ^vhich  may  be  dan- 
gerous. 

The  port  is  called  St.  Anna :  it  is  situated  on  the  south  sid(^  and  is  defend- 
ed by  Fort  Amsterdam.  The  entrance  to  the  road  is  very  crooked  and  narrow, 
being  only  60  fath^tins  wide. 

Vessels  from  the  raaiu  have  bci;n  directed,  when  bound  to  Curacoa,  to  make 
the  Island  Buen-ayre,  before  proceeding  farther  westward ;  atid  then  -passinp 
Little  Curacoa,  to  make  the  south  side  of  the  island.  In  thr  night  approach  no 
nearer  than  3  leagues  ;  because  Little  Curacoa,  a  low  sandy  isle,  cannot  be  soon. 
The  latter  lies  4  miles  from  the  S.  E.  end  of  the  greater  ish; :  it  is  v(M'y  little 
above  water,  has  nothing  but  prickly  bushes  upon  it,  and  is  steep-to  on  every 
side. 

The  following  description  is  chiefly  from  the  pen  of  Captain  Hester. 

Curacoa  is  low  ;  the  eastern  side  having  no  high  land,  except  a  mountain  in 
the  N.  E.  part,  and  another  of  great  height,  which  makes  like  a  table-land  in  the 
S.  E.  part;  on  the  western  side  there  are  some  high  hills,  but  all  the  rest  of  the 
island  is  lower  than  Uarbadoes.  The  table-land,  on  the  S.  K.  part,  bears  W.  N. 
W.  from  Little  Curacoa,  distant  7  or  C  miles.  After  giving  the  eai^tern  point  a 
birth  of  half  a  mile,  you  may  keep  as  near  to  the  isia  as  you  please,  the  south 
side  being  steep  all  along. 

The  haven  of  St.  ANNA  is  on  the  S.  W.  of  the  islar;^  there  is  (or  was)  a 
white  buoy  on  a  ledge  that  lies  on  the  starboard  or  ^.  K.  side  of  the  entrance ; 
and  is,  of  course,  to  be  left  on  that  side,  when  going  in.  Haul  close  round  the 
biioy  into  the  harbour,  the  passage  being  narrow,  and  steep-to  on  both  sides. 
You  must  not  let  go  an  anchor  when  going  in,  but  she  Jd  have  a  hawser  in  your 
boat,  ready  to  run  to  the  south  shore,  or  to  somr  )f  the  ships  ;  for  although  the 
entrance  is  not  broader  than  the  lengtl;  of  a  74  :n  ship,  yet  there  are  60  fa- 
thoms of  water;  but,  if  the  wind  be  large,  it  is  best  to  run  up  above  town,  and 
«bove  the  shipping,  where  you  may  let  go  your  anchor ;  it  being  there  broader 
and  clear  of  craft. 

The  town  lies  on  the  south  side,  but  there  are  many  buildings  on  the  north 
side,  as  well  as  all  over  the  island,  which  is  populous.  This  is  a  very  good  har- 
tour  to  heave  down  in,  as  there  is  neither  sea  nor  swell. 

On  the  N.  W.  and  North  sides  of  the  island,  the  coasts  are  foul  to  a  short  dis- 
tance, tio  that, it  is  best  to  keep  oh  the  south  side,  that  being  bold  and  clear.  At 
4  or  5  miles  to  the  south-east  of  the  harbour  is  a  fine  cove,  called  Sta.  Barbara, 
or  Spanish  Cove  :  a  fort  stands  at  the  entrance. 

If  bound  to  the  windward,  beat  up  along  the  south  side  of  the  island,  and  work 
up,  under  the  western  part  of  Buen-ayre,  before  you  reach  over ;  for  there  pre- 
vails, at  most  times,  a  current  running  to  leeward,  and  the  western  aide  of  Buen- 
-ayre is  clear  and  bold-to. 

The  Island  ORUBA,  or  Orum,  requires  no  other  description  than  that  given 
hereafter,  as  it  afibrds  nothing  but  wood,  and  is  uninhabited. 


Particular  Descriptions  of,  and  Directions /or,  the  Leeward  Islands. 

[From  the  "  Derrotero  de  laa  Antillas,"  Sfc] 

MARGARITA.— The  Island  of  Margarita  is  thirty-eight  miles  long,  from  E. 
to  W.  and  forms,  with  the  main  coast,  a  channel  of  eleven  miles  in  breadth,  but 
having  in  the  middle  of  it  the  isles  of  Coche  and  Cubagua.  Margarita  is  moun- 
tainous, and,  at  some  distance  to  the  northward,  appears  as  if  it  formed  two  isl- 
ands ;  it  having  a  great  break  of  low  and  marshy  land  in  the  middle  of  it.  In 
the  eastern  part  of  the  island  are  various  hills,  which,  in  clear  weather,  maybe 
seen  from  the  Cabo  de  Tres  Puntas,  (Cape  Three  Points,*)  and  in  the  western 

*  More  than  seventy  miles  off,  to  the  £.  S.  E. 
48 


378 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


part  rises  a  mountain  named  Macanao.  Its  east  point,  named  PwUa  de  la  Bal- 
lem,  (Whale  Point,)  is  almost  on  the  same  meridian  as  the  Morro  of  Chacopata, 
on  the  main  land.  From  Punta  de  la  Ballena,  the  shore  tends  N.  W.  hy  N. 
thirteen  miles,  to  Caho  de  la  Isla,  (Cape  of  the  Island,)  forming  the  N.  E.  side 
(fronton)  of  the  island,  which  may  he  considered  as  clean  ;  it  having  only  a  shoal, 
or  reef,  stretching  along  it  to  about  three  cable's  length. 

From  Caho  de  la  Isla  the  shore  tends  S.  W.  7  miles,  lo  Punta  de  la  Galera 
(Galley  Point :)  this  part  Is  also  clean.  Three  miles  S.  W.  by  S.  from  Punta  de 
la  Galera  IS  the  Punta  de  Maria  Libre  :  between  these  two  points,  is  a  bay,  bor- 
dered all  round  with  a  reef,  which,  in  the  middle  of  the  bay,  extends  out  about 
h  mile.     On  the  shore,  near  the  middle  of  this  bay,  are  a  number  of  Indian  huts. 

From  the  point  oi  Maria  Libre,  at  the  distance  of  eleven  and  a  half  miles  West, 
is  the  Punta  del  Tunar  ;  and,  between  these  two  points,  is  a  very  large  bay,  which 
is  about  five  miles  in  depth:  it  is  all  very  clear,  having  no  other  danger  than  a  reef, 
which  borders  the  coast,  and  which  at  the  utmost,  does  not  stretch  out  more 
than  half  a  mile  from  the  shore.  Th«.  shore,  at  the  bottom  of  this  bay,  is  a  low 
and  wet  beach. 

From  Point  Tunar  the  coast  tends  W.  S.  W.  .]  W.  eight  miles,  to  Putita  del 
Tigre  (Tiger  Point :)  it  is  all  very  clean,  and  you  may  sail  along  it,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  half  a  mile.  From  Tiger  Point,  the  coast  inclines  more  to  the  south  ; 
and,  at  two  and  a  half  miles  from  it,  is  the  Morro  of  Rnbledar,  from  which  it 
turns  south,  for  four  miles,  to  Punta  de  Arenas,  (Santa  Point,)  which  is  the  most 
westerly  point  of  the  island.  The  reef,  which  here  borders  the  coast,  extends 
out  about  a  mile  and  a  half. 

N.  W.  from  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  island,  at  the  distance  of  five  miles,  is  the 
eastern  edge  of  a  rocky  shoal,  Placer  dil  Ostial,  upon  which  the  h-ast  water  is 
five  fathoms.  This  shoal  lies  nearly  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  in  which  direction  it  is 
about  three  miles  in  extent.  The  channel  between  the  coast  and  this  shoal  is 
wide  and  clear,  and  has  not  less  than  7  fathoms,  with  the  bottom  of  sand. 

On  the  Eastern  Coast,  at  three  and  a  half  miles  S.  W.  i  S.  from  Punta  de  la 
Ballena,  (Whale's  Point,)  is  the  point  of  the  Morro  Moreno ;  and  between  the  two 
points  is  a  spacious  bay,  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  which  is  the  village,  or  town,  of 
PampatuT.  Almost  on  a  line  with  the  two  points,  and  midway  between  them, 
is  an  islet  named  Isleta  Blanco,  (White  Islet,)  which  is  clean  all  round,  and  you 
may  pass  between  it  and  the  shore  without  any  danger.*  In  all  this  bay  you  may 
anchor  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  upon  sand,  at  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile  from  the  shore. 
This  anchorage  affords  very  little  slielter,  with  fresh  breezes ;  and,  although 
•there  is  seldom  much  sea  with  the  regular  breezes,  yet  it  is  adviseable  to  anchor 
so  that,  should  it  be  necessary,  you  can  lay  out  again  and  weather  Morro  Moreno, 
to  the  eastward  of  which  you  may  pass  within  a  cable's  length,  if  requisite. 

From  Morro  Moreno  the  coast  tends  in  a  curve  S.  W.  6  miles,  to  Punta  de  Mos- 
quitds,  j(M.osquito  Point:)  between  these  points  is  a  bay,  on  the  north  side  of 
ivhich  was  the  village  named  Pueblo  de  la  Mar,  which  is  no^v  reduced  to  a  few 
-cottages  or  huts  of  straw  (paja.)  The  shore  between  Morro  Moreno  and  Mos- 
ijuitu  Point  is  (ou\,  and  ought  not  to  be  aj)proached  nearer  than  two  miles  ;  as  is 
also  the  case  with  the  coast  which  succeeds  it  to  the  westward. 

Prom  Mosquito  Point  to  Punta  de  Mangles  (Mangrove  Point)  is  ten  and  a  half 
■miles,  and  the  shore  tends  W.  by  S.  and  E.  byN.  and  is  foul,  with  a  rocky  reef, 
Vhich  extends  out  about  a  niile. 

From  Punta  de  Mangles  the  coast  bends  to  the  northward,  forming  a  bay  with 
'Punta  de  Piedras,  which  is  tliree  miles  distant  fiom  the  former.  From  Point 
'Piedras  the  coast  tends  more  to  the  northward,  and  forms  another  bay  with  Pun- 
tadel  Pozo,  (Well  Point,)  which  is  six  and  a  half  miles  distant  from  Punta  de  Pie- 
dras: 'and,  from  Punta  del  Pozo,  the  coast  extends  about  W.  by  N.  twelve  miles, 
to  Punta  db  Arenas,  \vhich,  we  have  already  stated,  is  the  west  point  of  the  is- 
land. All  the  S.  W.  coast,  from  Punta  de  Mangles,  is  as  foul  as  that  more  to  the 
*easttv'ar«,  and  it  is  not  adviseable  to  approach  nearer  to  it  than  two  mile?. 

FRAYLES,  or  i-Vtara.— Eight  miles  E.  by  N.  from  the  north  point  of  Marga- 
rita are  some  islets,  named  the  Frayles  (Friars.)  The  southernmost  is  the  largest, 
and  tliey  are  all  very  cl«an,  except  the  northern  one,  which  is  surrounded  by  a 
teefi  that  extends  out  abont  two  cables  length  from  the  islet. 


k1^4k,'.^ 


BLUNT^S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


979 


LA  SOLA,  or  Solitary  /.?/^7.— Nearly  N.  E.  twelve  miles  from  the  Frayk$,i» 
an  islot  niimcd  La  Sola,  which  is  very  clean.  Between  La  Sola  and  the  Testigoi 
(described  hereafter)  the  distance  is  twenty-six  miles  ;  and  the  passages  between 
the  Testigos  and  La  Sola,  between  La  Sola  and  the  Frayles,  and  between  the 
Frayles  and  Margarita,  are  so  clear,  that  you  may  take  either  of  them,  at  any 
time,  and  with  any  class  of  vessel  whatever. 

COCHE  and  CUBAGUA. — In  the  channel  between  Margarita  and  the  mam 
land  are  the  two  islands,  named  Del  Coche  and  Cubagwi,  or  Cuagua.  The  east- 
ern one,  or  Isla  Cache,  is  low,  and  lies  nearly  W.  N.  W.  and  E.  S.  E  :  it  is  sur- 
rounded by  a  rocky  shojil,  and  a  reef  stretches  out  from  its  N.  W.  and  S.  E. 
points,  from  a  mile  and  a  half  to  two  miles.  There  are  thus  two  channels  ;  the 
one  t()  the  northward,  towards  the  Island  of  Margarita,  which,  at  the  narrowest 
part,  is  two  miles  wide  ;  and  the  other,  to  the  southward,  towards  the  coast  of 
the  inai7i-land,  and  which  also  is  two  miles  wide  at  the  narrowest  part.  You  may 
pass  through  either  of  these  channels  freely ;  for  they  have  very  good  bottom,  on 
which  you  may  anchor,  and  lie  as  secure  as  if  you  were  in  harbour.  The  Island 
of  Cuhagua  is  something  less  than  Coche  :  it  lies  nearly  W.  by  S.  and  E.  by  N ; 
and  a  reef,  with  a  shoal,  stretch  from  its  eastern  point  about  a  mile.  The  north 
and  south  coasts  of  Cuhagua  are  very  clean  ;  but,  on  the  western  side,  is  a  rocky 
shoal,  which  extends  out  about  one-third  of  a  mile.  This  island,  also,  forms  two 
channels ;  one  to  the  northward,  with  the  Island  of  Margarita  ;  and  one  to  the 
southward,  with  the  peninsula  of  Araya :  both  are  very  free.  In  the  narrowest 
part  of  the  northern  channel,  which  is  between  the  shoal  and  reef  stretching  off 
from  the  east  point  of  Cubagiui,  and  the  shoal  stretching  off  from  the  Punta  d» 
Mangles,  (Mangrove  Point,)  of  Margarita,  the  breadth  is  three  miles. 

To  sail  through  the  channel  to  the  northward  of  these  islands,  no  more  is  ne- 
cessary than  to  give  a  birth  to  the  shoals  which  stretch  out  from  the  shore  of 
Margarita ;  that  which  projects  from  the  N.  W.  point  of  Isla  Cocke,  and  that 
extending  from  the  east  point  of  the  island  Cuhagua ;  but,  for  greater  certainty, 
you  may  bring  the  little  and  most  northerly  point  of  Cubagua  to  bear  W.  k  S, 
and  run  with  it  so  until  you  ar«i  well  past  the  Punta  de  Mangles,  when  you  may 
edge  away  a  little  to  the  northward  ;  it  being  well  understood,  at  the  same  time, 
that  you  may  pass  the  north  point  of  Cubagua,  at  the  distance  of  a  cable'si 
length,  without  any  risk. 

To  sail  through  the  south  channel,  keep  over  to  the  Isla  des  Caribes  and  hla 
de  Lobos,  which  lie  to  the  westward  of  the-  Morro  de  Chacopata,  by  which  you 
will  run  clear  of  the  shoal  extending  to  the  south  end  of  Isla  Coche.  You  may 
then  steer  W.  i  S.  without  any  fear,  for  the  three  islets  which  lie  off  Punta  de 
la  Tuna,  and  which  are  calliid  Islotes  de  la  Tuna  :  these  are  v^ry  clean,  and  yon 
may  pass  between  them,  if  necessary.  From  these  islets  the  channel  opens  to 
the  westward,  and  of  cpurse  requires  less  caution.  In  all  these  channels  it  is 
adviseable  to  anchor  in  the  night,  in  whatever  part  of  them  you  may  happen  to 
be,  and  whether  your  object  is  to  go  to  Araya,  or  to  Cumana;  for  the  current 
may  very  easily  carry  you  to  leeward ;  and  besides,  it  is  improper  to  run  for 
these  porta  without  day-light,  and  when  you  can  see  to  give  a  birth  to  the  shoal 
at  the  point  of  Araya,  and  also  that  which  extends  from  Cumana,  as  showri 
hereafter. 

The  TESTIGOS,  a  cluster  of  islets  and  rocks,  lie  at  the  distance  of  forty 
miles  to  the  N.  b;  W.  of  Cape  Malapasqua,  on  th«-  main,  and  forty-six  miles 
W.  N.  W.  from  the  Cabo  de  la  Isla,  the  north  point  of  Margarita.  There  are 
seven  principal  islets,  with  some  other  detached  rocks.  The  channels  between 
the  islets  are  clear,  and  may  be  taken  without  any  risk :  but  this  is  not  the  case 
with  the  channels  formed  by  the  rocks,  for  they  are  very  narrow.  You  may  ap- 
proach the  isiets  within  two  cables'  length,  or  even  less,  if  necessary,  excepting 
the  northern  one,  which  has  a  reef  around  it,  extending  out  about  half  a  mile.* 


*  The  Baron  Alexander  de  Humboldt,  on  approaching  the  Testigos,  14th  July,  1799,  says, 
"  During  a  calm  the  current  drew  us  on  rapidly  towards  the  west.  Its  velocity  was  three 
miles  an  hour,  and  increased  as  wc  approached  the  meridian  of  the  Testigos,  a  heap  of  rucl^i 
which  rise  up  amid  the  waters."  This  is  an  additional  reason  for  approaching  them  with  caution. 


380 


ULUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


Betvreen  these  iaiets  the  bottom  is  of  »nnd,  on  which  you  muy  anchor,  in  case 
of  necessity.  The  largest  Testip^o  Grande,  extends  N.  VV.  and  S.  E.  and,  in 
these  directions,  may  be  alxiut  two  and  one-third  miles  in  extent.  On  its  south- 
ern part  there  is  an  anchorage,  -heltered  from  the  sea-breeze,  with  soundings  of 
from  9  to  17  fathoms,  the  bottom  coarse  sand.  You  may  sail  to  tliis  anchorage 
cither  by  the  N.  W.  or  S.  E.  part  of  the  islet:  if  you  go  by  the  first,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  pass  outside  the  rocks,  which  lie  out  from  that  part;  and,  if  you  run  in 
by  the  second,  you  must  pass  between  the  Great  Islet  and  another  which  is  to 
the  S.  W.  of  it :  the  channel  between  is  sufliciently  spacious;  the  narrowest 
part  is  formed  by  a  rock,  which  lies  to  the  eastward  of  the  little  islet,  and  ano- 
ther which  lies  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  Great  Testlgo. 
The  channel  is,  however,  half  a  mile  wide,  with  from  9  to  10  fathoms  of  water, 
and  the  bottom  is  of  red  gravel. 

Between  the  Testigos  and  the  main  land  there  are  soyndings;  and,  about  live 
miles  to  the  S.  by  E.  of  them,  is  the  Baxo  Verde,  or  Green  Bank,  a  large  sand- 
bank,  of  4i  to  6  fathoms  of  water:  large  Hhips  ought  to  shun  it. 

BLANQUILLA,  fcc — At  nearly  N.  h  W.  forty  miles  from  the  most  westerly 
part  of  Margarita  Island,  are  the  Seven  Brothers ;  all  of  them  are  clean,  and  sur- 
rounded with  such  deep  water  that  you  cannot  get  sojndings  in  the  straits  be- 
tween them.  To  the  westward  of  the  Northern  Brother,  at  the  distance  of  se- 
ven miles,  is  the  Island  Blanca :  it  is  six  miles  in  extent  from  N,  to  S.  and  three 
miles  from  F].  to  \V.  This  island  is  very  low  and  sterile;  its  shores  are  very 
clean,  Avith  the  exception  of  the  S.  W.  side,  which  has  several  reefs  and  rocks, 
extending  out  about  three  cables'  length  from  the  shore,  and  some  points  on  the 
west  side.  The  Norlh  Point,  also,  has  some  loose  rocks  or  stones,  about  two 
cables'  length  from  the  shore.  On  the  N.  W.  side  there  is  anchorage  in  from 
20  fathoms,  which  depth  is  found  at  about  a  mile  from  the  shore,  to  7  or  8  fa- 
thoms, which  are  got  at  about  three  cables'  lengths  from  it.  All  the  bottom  of 
the  anchorage  is  of  sand.  At  about  the  middle  of  the  western  coast  there  is  a 
rill  (cazimbn)  of  fresh  water,  where  vessels  may  tte  supplied. 

TORTUGA — To  the  west  of  Margarita,  and  at  the  distance  of  forty-seven 
miles,  is  the  Island  Tortu^a,  stretching  E.  and  W.  in  which  direction  it  is  twelve 
mihs  in  extent,  and  its  greatest  breadth  is  five  and  a  half  miles.  All  the  east  andi 
N.  E.  sides  of  it  are  very  clean  ;  the  N.  E.  point  alone  (Punta  Delgada)  sending 
out  a  reef  to  about  two  cables'  length.  The  south  side  is  also  very  clean,  and  has 
some  islets  towards  its  eastern  end.  The  west  point  of  this  island  is  named  Pun- 
ta de  Arenas ;  and  from  it  to  the  north  point,  named  Punta  Norte,  the  water  is 
very  shallow,  which  renders  it  necessary  to  run  along  this  part  by  the  lead.  On 
this  side  there  is,  1st,  to  the  eastward,  Cayo  Anguilla,  (Eel  Key)  which  lies  half 
a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  the  channel  between  is  very  foul ;  2d,  Cayo  Herradu- 
ra,  which  forms,  with  the  coast,  a  channel  of  a  mile;  but  which  ought  not  to  be 
attempted  w-ith  a  large  vessel.  A  rocky  reef  projects  about  two  and  a  half  ca- 
bles' length  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  this  key ;  3d,  Cayos  del  Fondeadero,  or  the 
TortuguUlos,  of  which  there  are  two  surrounded  by  a  shoal.  The  anchorage  of 
Tortugas  is  between  the  Tortuguillos  and  the  const ;  and  j'ou  may  run  in  to  it 
either  to  the  southward  or  westward  of  the  Key  Herradura.  In  all  this  anchor- 
age, and  the  channels  into  it,  you  will  not  find  more  than  7  or  8  fathoms,  with 
sandy  bottom  in  the  middle  ;  and,  to  direct  yoiu-Rclf  in,  you  need  only  take  care 
not  to  get  into  less  water  than  7  fathoms. 

ORCHILLA. — At  N.  i  W.  twenty-four  leagues,  from  Cape  Cordera,  is  the 
Island  of  Orchilla,  the  greatest  extent  of  which  is  from  E.  to  W.  It  is  low ;'  but 
there  are  some  peaks  which  rise  towards  its  Avest  end,  the  highest  of  which  is 
almost  in  the  very  westernmost  part  of  the  island.  From  the  extreme  eastern 
point  a  key  extends  to  the  norlh,  about  three  and  a  half  miles;  and  to  the  west 
of  it  there  is  a  great  reef,  which  extends  to  the  westward,  almost  as  far  as  the 
middle  of  the  island  :  apon  this  reef  are  numerous  keys :  all  the  rest  of  the  coast 
13  clean,  and,  if  necessary,  you  may  run  along  it  at  the  distance  of  a  cable's 
length.  On  the  S.  W.  aide,  and  almost  close  to  the  west  end,  there  is  a  very 
clean  sandy  beach,  in  front  of  which  you  may  anchor,  sheltered  fromjthe  breezes, 
{n  7  or  8  fathoms,  sand,  at  the  distance  of  a  cable  and  a  half's  length  from  the 


:  ' 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


381 


beach.  OfT  the  west  point  of  thu  island,  at  the  distance  uf  half  a  mile  to  the  W. 
by  N.  there  is  a  rock,  (farallon)  which  la  quite  clean  and  bold-to.  The  strait 
between  It  and  th«  island  is  fit  for  any  class  of  vessels, 

LOS  ROQUES.— To  the  westward  of  Orchilla,  and  at  the  distance  of  twen- 
ty-two miles,  are  the  Rom,  which  are  a  cluster  of  hiw  keys  that  rise  upon  a 
very  dangerous  reef.  This  group  extends  twelve  miles  from  N.  to  S.  and  twen- 
ty-four miles  from  R.  to  W.  You  ni:iy  pass  within  a  mile  of  all  the  outer  keys, 
which  lie  upon  the  edj^e  of  (he  reef,  except  at  the  oastern  part,  where  the  reef 
extends  more  than  three  miles  outxide  them.  You  may  not  venture  amon{;  the 
keys,  in  general ;  for  the  piisses  between  them  are  shut  hy  the  reef;  and  only  by 
the  western  part  of  Cayo  Roque,  on  the  north  side,  can  you  enter  into  a  large 
and  handsome  basin  formed  by  the  keys  and  leef.  In  this  basin  are  10  and  20 
fathoms  of  water;  but  the  b(»ttom  is  rocky  and  foul,  and  apt  to  chafe  the  cables. 
The  anchonigc  is  at  the  west  part  of  the  key,  called  El  Roque,  in  10  or  iiO  fa- 
thoms, on  sand  anci  mud,  at  about  three  cables'  length  from  the  beach.  Cayo 
Roque  is  one  of  the  most  northerly  islets,  and  may  be  easily  known,  because 
there  are  various  hillocks  (picaclios)  upon  it,  which  may  be  seen  at  a  good  dis- 
tance. The  best  way  is,  never  to  approach  this  group,  but  to  pass  at  a  distance, 
as  it  offers  no  advantages  whatever  to  any  vessel,  and  is  very  dangerous,  especial- 
ly at  night. 

ISLAS  DE  AVES. — To  the  westward  of  the  Roques,  at  the  distance  of  thirty 
miles,  are  the  Islas  de  Aves,  Avhieh  are  two  groups  of  keys,  rising  upon  two  dis- 
tinct reefs,  and  having  between  them  a  chatmel  of  nine  miles  in  breadth.  These 
keys  are  very  low ;  and,  as  the  reef  extends  out  about  four  miles  to  the  north 
from  thf!  eastern  isle,  and  six  miles  in  the  same  directit^n  from  the  western,  it  re- 
sults that  an  approach  to  them,  especially  from  the  north,  is  extremely  danger- 
ous, and  therefore  it  is  best  to  give  them  as  wide  a  birth  as  you  ought  to  give  to 
a  dangerous  shoal. 

BUEN-AYRE. — To  the  westward  of  Aves,  at  the  distance  of  thirty-three 
miles,  is  the  Island  Buen-ayre.  The  land  of  this  island  is  sufficiently  high,  and 
there  are  various  mounts  and  hillocks  upon  it,  of  which  the  highest  is  very  near  to 
the  west  point.  TJie  south  point  of  the  island  is  very  low,  and  is  named  Punla 
Rasa  del  Lacre :  in  the  middle  of  it,  and  upon  the  western  side,  there  is  a  village 
with  a  small  fort;  and  at  this  place  is  the  anchonige,  which  is  steep-to  that, 
within  a  cable  .'»nd  a  half's  length  of  the  beach,  there  are  18  fathoms;  and  the 
depth  afterwards  augments  so  rapidly,  that,  at  a  cable's  length  farther  out,  there 
are  60  fathoms  of  water;  hence  it  is  needful  to  have  a  cable  ashore,  and  to  have 
it  ready  in  your  boats,  that  you  may  not  drag;  for,  if  you  once  begin  to  drive, 
yoi!  soon  lose  the  anchorage,  and  have  the  trouble  of  gaining  it  afresh. 

Upon  the  western  part  of  the  anchorage,  and  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,  there 
is  an  islet  named  Little  Buen-ayre ;  and,  although  th^;  strait  it  forms  to  the  N. 
E.  is  fit  for  any  class  of  vessels,  yet  it  is  belter  either  to  enter  or  sail  out  by  the 
S.  W.  of  it,  as  there  is  a  greater  space  free. 

You  may  pass  at  a  cable's  length  from  any  of  the  coasts  of  Buen-ayre  without 
any  risk,  except  at  the  eastern  part,  whence  a  reef  extends  in  some  places,'more 
tl..in  half  a  mile ;  but  both  the  N.  E.  and  S.  E.  points  arc  very  clean. 

CURACOA. — To  the  westward  of  Buen-ayre,  and  at  the  distance  of  twenty- 
seven  miles,  is  the  Island  of  Curacoa,  extending  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  in  wliich  di- 
rection it  is  thirty-five  miles  in  extent;  but  its  greatest  breadth  does  not  exceed 
six  miles.  This  island  Is  moderately  high,  and  has  hills  on  it,  which  are  seen  at 
a  considerable  distance  from  sea.  All  its  coasts  are  very  clean,  and  you  may  run 
along  them  at  the  distance  of  a.  cable's  length,  without  any  risk  whatever. 

At  S.  E.  4  miles  from  the  S.  E.  point,  named  Point  Canon,  lies  a  vei  low 
sandy  islet,  called  Little  Curacoa;  which  although  clean  around,  is  dang :<  is  in 
the  night  or  in  thick  weather. 

The  Island  of  Curacoa  has  plenty  of  harbours ;  the  principal  of  which,  and 
thiough  which  all  the  commerce  of  the  island  is  carried  on,  is  that  of  Santa  Anna, 
or  St.  Anne,  situated  on  the  west  coast,  fourteen  miles  from  Port  Canon  ;  before 
reaching  it  you  meet  with'another  harbour,  named  St.  Barbara.  Those  bound 
to  the  harbour  of  St.  Anne  ought  to  make  Point  Canon,  and  run  down  the 


S82 


■  5o 


BLUNl'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


coast  at  one  or  two  miles  distance,  that  tlioy  muy  not  »ixpose  themselves  to  the 
risk  of  getting  to  the  leeward  of  the  t-.ntraHce.of  the  harbour,  for  the  current 
runs  strongly  to  the  westward. 

The  entrance  of  the  harbour  of  St.  Anne  is  uncommonly  narrow,  and  is  form- 
ed by  very  low  tpngues  of  land,  which  in  the  interior  part,  form  some  lagoons. 
On  the  eastern  point  is  the  fort,  named  Fnrt  Amsterdam  and  the  principal  town, 
where  the  Protestants  and  Jews  reside; 'and  on  the  western  side,  is  the  town  in 
whi«h  the  Catholics  live.  On  an  islet  immediately  off  the  west  point  is  a  bat- 
tery, which   tuj^ether  with  Fort  Amsterdam,  defends  the  mouth  of  the  harbour. 

The  channel  leading  to  the  bay  extends  about  N.  N-  E.  it  is  about  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  in  length,  and  only  a  cable's  length  in  width;  and,  between 
the  firts,  at  tne  entrance  of  the  harbour,  it  is  scarcely  half  a  cable's  length  wide. 
Th^  towns,  wharfs  and  warehouses,  are  on  the  banks  of  the  channel,  where  the 
ves^eh  nnchor,  and  also  cHreen. 

To  enter  this  harbour,  it  is  essentially  necessary  to  nm  down  the  coast  from 
windr/ard,  but  not  nearer  th:in  half  a  cable's  length,  as  there  are  rocks  and  a  reef, 
which  He  out  about  one-third  of  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore  ;  and,  after  you 
are  abreast  of  the  batteries  oii  the  point  at  Fort  Amsterdam,  (the  east  point,)  luff 
up  towards  the  bat^'ery  which,  is  on  the  west  point ;  and,  keeping  in  mid-channel, 
run  in.  The  Dutcu  have  always  a  launch  ready  for  towing  vessels  into  the  har- 
bour. 

ORIjBA. — To  the  westward  of  the  north  part  of  Curacoa,  at  forty-three 
miles  distant,  lies  the  island  of  Orubn;  its  extent  from  N.  W.  to  S.  E.  is  seven- 
teen miles ;  although  this  island  is  low,  it  has  some  hills  which  may  be  seen  at  a 
good  distance,  particularly  that  named  Pan  de  Axucar,  (Sugar  Loaf,)  on  account 
of  its  shape.  All  its  east  coast  is  clean,  though  there  are  some  small  islets,  lying 
close  off  it.  On  the  western  coast,  there  is  a  chain  of  keys,  which  extend  along  to 
thev/estern  point,  and  you  may  run  along,  outside  them,  at  two  cables'  length, 
if  you  choose.  This  island  which  lies  to  the  north  of  Cape  Roman^  forms  with 
the  coast,  the  main-land  a  channel  of  thirteen  miles  in  Avidth,  all  which  is  per- 
fectly clean.  ■> 


General  Directions  for  JVavigating  on  the    Coasts  0/ Colombia, /rom 
the  Dragon's  Mouths  to  Carthagena. 


.  fv;  jj  •.■;  ( 


[From  the  Derrotero,  Sfc] 


On  examination  of  what  has  been  stated,  relative  to  the  winds  on  this  coast, 
nothing  appears  necodsary  to  add  to  the  description  already  given,  to  en^ible  the 
mariner  to  direct  himself  with  the  greatest  safety  ;  in  fact,  they  have  little  else 
on  his  coast  than  the  regular  breeze  (trade-wind.)  There  is  nothing  to  fear  on 
it,  either  from  hurricanes  or  hard  norths:  as  the  first  are  alisolutely  unknown; 
and  the  second,  if  they  do  at  any  time  occur,  never  exceed  the  strength  of  the 
ordinary  breeze  :  and  in  the  rainy  season,  which  is  from  May  to  November,  they 
ever  have  southerly  winds,  which  are  sometimes  very  strong  ;  but  we  must  con- 
sider them  only  as  squalls  of  short  duration,  and  which  are  not  likely  to  do  much 
harm,  as  they  blow  off  shore. 

With  ait  this  we  may  look  upon  th»!  whole  of  this  coast,  especially  to  Cape  La 
Vela,  as  a  continued  port ;  for  the  climate  renders  it  equal  to  that;  and  no  more 
is  necessary,  to  enable  us  to  free  ourselves  from  the  dangers  upon  it,  than  to  con- 
sult the  particular  description  :  for  we  are  sure  that  the  loss  of  a  vessel  upon  it  is 
very  rarely  the  effect  of  a  storm. 

It  is  on  the  cojist  from  Cape  La  Vela  that  it  is  proper  to  give  some  notices;  for 
the  breezes  especially  from  Cabo  de  Aguja,  or  rather  from  Point  San  Juan  de 
Quia,  (near  Santa  Martha,)  are  uncommonly  strong :  so  much  so,  indeed,  that 
they  may  be  looked  upon  as  real  gales,  and  therefore  it  is  proper  to  present  some 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


S85 


m selves  to  the 
)r  the  current 

V,  and  is  form- 
some  lagoons. 
)rincipal  town, 

is  the  town  in 
point  is  a  bat- 
f  the  harbour. 
i  about  three- 

and,  between 
s's  length  wide, 
inel,  where  the 

the  coast  from 
tcks  and  a  reef, 
and,  after  you 
east  point,)  lufiF 
n  mid-channel, 
ils  into  the  har- 

at  forty-three 
S.  E.  is  seven- 
lay  be  seen  at  a 
)af,)  on  account 
nail  islets,  lying 
extend  along  to 

I  cables'  length, 
lan,  forms  with 

II  which  is  per- 


rnleS  for  making  the  harbour  hereabout;  to  prevent,  if  possible,  those  inadverten- 
cies wliich,  with  winds  so  uninariageable,  nii^ht  he  of  great  importance.  There 
may  also  be  some  doubt  in  the  making  of  tliw  various  places,  and  general  navi- 
gation of  the  coast,  arising  from  the,  vari^ition  of  the  wind,  which,  as  we  have 
said,  sometimes  changes  to  S.  and  S.  W.  from  June  to  November.  From  these 
reasons  the  following  rellections  will  not  be  useless  ;  for,  should  Uiey  be  unneces- 
sary for  thosi!  who  are  actjuainted   sliii  they  may  assist  those  who  are  not  so. 

The  principal  establishments  for  commerce  on  this  coast,  and  towards  which 
vessels  in  general  direct  their  course,  are  Cumana,  Barcelona,  La  Guayra  and 
Porto  Cabello,  Marncaybo,  S.mta  Martha,  and  Carthagena;  and  Pampatar,  in 
the  Island  of  Margarita;  and  Santa  Anna,  in  tiie  Island  of  Curacoa,  It  being  a 
gencrr'.l  rule  on  this  coast,  as  well  as  in  the  whole  sea  of  the  Antilias,  (Caribbean 
Sea,  or  Sea  of  Colon,)  to  make  the  land  to  windward  of  the  port  of  destination, 
as  a  mode  necessary  to  jn-event  the  falling  to  leeward  ;  we  can  say,  with  safety, 
that,  having  once  entered  into  the  Sea  of  the  Antilias,  they  ought  to  make  the 
land  about  Cape  Mala  Pascpia,  or  about  Cape  Three  Points ;  all  those  who  are 
bound  to  either  Margarita  or  Cumana,  preferring  the  channel  which  the  island 
forms  with  the  main  land,  as  we  have  stated  in  the  description:  this  route  also 
seems  better  for  those  who  are  bound  to  Barcelona;  though  to  those  it  can  be 
nowise  inconvenient  tr»  run  to  the  northward  of  Margarita. 

Those  who  are  bound  to  La  Guayra,  from  Cumana  or  Barcelona,  will  make  a 
straight  course  to  Cape  Cordera,  passing  alyvays  between  the  Island  Tortuga  and 
the  coast ;  but  those  who,  from  Europe,  or  any  of  the  Antilias,  are  bound  to  La 
Guayra,  will  run  to  the  northward  of  Tortuga,  to  approach  the  coast  about  the 
same  cai)e,  or  a  little  to  leeward  ;  taking  care  to  make  out,  if  they  choose,  the  rock 
called  the  Centinella,  which  lies  to  the  northward  of  the  cape.  Those  bound  to 
Porto  Cabello  are  not  under  the  same  necessity  of  making  Cape  Cordera,  but  may 
make  any  other  point  of  the  coast  that  answers,  so  that  they  keep  far  enough  to 
windward  of  their  port. 

To  make  Cape  Cordera,  or  any  other  point  up<.»n  the  coast  to  leeward  of  it,  every 
one  will  be  right  to  do  it  in  the  mode  that  is  easiest,  or  that  he  considers  best ; 
and  he  may  also  run  in  by  any  of  the  straits  or  passes  which  tiie  islands  to  the  north- 
ward form ;  and,  to  guide  th«<in  in  d(;ing  this,  nothing  more  is  necessary  than  to 
attend  to  the  description  of  tlie  one  they  may  take. 

Those  hound  to  Maracaybo  from  the  east,  will  make  Cape  San  Roman  ;  while 
those  from  the  westward  will  make  Punta  de  Espada.  They  may  pass  either  to 
the  northward  or  southward  of  Curacao,  in  running  down  for  Cape  Roman  ; 
and,  from  that  cape,  they  nmst  run  along  the  coast  till  they  place  themselves  at 
two  miles  west  from  Point  Macolla,  Avhich  is  the  situation  in  which  they  can  be 
sure  of  'he  course  to  the  bar,  as  already  stated  in  the  description. 

If  the  navigation  to  Cape  Roman  is  made  outside  of  the  islands,  it  ought  always 
to  be  kept  in  mind  that  the  Roques,  and  the  Islets  of  Aves,  arc  very  dangerous 
on  their  north  sides ;  to  the  end  that  they  may  take  care  to  keep  themselves  at  a 
sufficient  distance  from  them,  e  pecially  in  the  night,  and  they  must  not  forget, 
at  night,  to  correct  their  dead-reckoning  for  the  currents  which  they  experienced 
through  the  day,  and  the  effect  of  them  as  deduced  from  dead-reckoning  and 
the  points  of  demarmtion  (/.  <:.  points  of  departure  and  land-falls.)  This  advice 
cannot  fail  to  be  of  iffcful  importance  ;  for,  in  this  place,  the  currents  require  par- 
ticular attention. 

Those  bound  direct  for  Santa  Martha,  or  Carthagena,  ought  unquestionably  to 
navigate  outside  of  all  the  islands,  so  as  to  make  that  of  Oruba  and  the  lands  about 
Cabo  la  Vela  :  for,  having  found  their  situation  exactly  by  the  last,  they  can 
securely  shape  a  direct  course  for  Cabo  de  Aguja,  in  order  to  take  the  anchorage 
of  Santa  Martha,  as  already  directed. 

We  have  said  that  they  ought  to  pass  to  northward  of  the  islands,  because, 
thus,  they  take  the  most  direct  course,  and  make  the  shortest  distance.  Those 
who,  without  touching  at  Santa  Martha,  go  to  Carthagena,  will  shape  a  direct 
course  from  Cabo  d(!  Aguja  to  the  mouths  of  the  River  Magdalena;  whence, 
taking  care  to  pass  two  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Point  Zamba,  and  one  and  a 
'half  to  the  westward  of  Punta  Canoas,  they  will  direct  their  course  to  the  Boca 


I  i 


ifft°-  -i"'i.'  iktkMittmmaa^tUmj'  ^-        


384 


BI.UNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Ghica,  or  anchor  at  Punta  Canoas,  or  on  the  Playa  Grande,  if  they  hare  not 
time  to  make  Boca  Cliica  with  day-light.  The  land-fall  of  Punta  de  Zamha 
ouglit  to  be  made  with  consideration,  so  aa  to  be  able  to  take  the  entrance  of  the 
Boca  Chica  by  day,  or  the  anchoraj5e  at  Punta  Canoas,  or  on  Playa  Grande,  in 
order  to  be  able  to  proportion  ihu  distance  to  the  rate  the  vessel  sails  at;  or,  to 

EroportioM  the  sailing  of  the  vessel  to  tlie  distancti  to  be  run  ;  in  order,  if  possi- 
le,  to  avoid  the  necessity  of  hauling  by  the  wind  for  the  night,  which  will  be 
sufficiently  molt^sting  and  laboursomu  for  the  vussel  and  her  apparel  in  the  time 
of  the  hard  breezes  ;  but,  if  then)  be  no  remedy,  you  must  do  this,  and  maintain 
your  place  by  short  tacks ;  oi  alwaijs,  ivhen  the  ivind  and  thb  sea  will  permit  it, 
come  to  anchor  for  the  night  in  that  situation. 

When  we  advise  always  shaping  a  course  from  point  to  point,  it  is  not  merely 
because,  by  doing  this,  the  distiince  is  shortened,  which  would  be  much  length- 
ened by  following  every  turn  of  the  coast ;  but  also  because,  by  so  doing,  the  va- 
rious shoals  and  dangers  which  lie  between  Cape  La  Vela  and  Cabo  de  Aguja 
will  l)c  avoided,  as  well  as  tliose  l)etween  Punta  de  Zamba  and  Punta  de  Cano- 
as; among  which  we  advise  no  one  to  go  with  a  large  vessel. 

If,  during  the  season  of  the  breezes,  it  is  necessary  to  take  the  route  already 
described  to  Carthagena,  from  any  place  situated  to  the  eastward  of  it,  in  the 
time  of  the  rains,  you  ought  to  steer  true  West  from  Cabo  La  Vela  in  the  par- 
allel of  12°,  or  sitmetliing  more,  for  the  purpose  of  retaining  the  breeze  until  you 
gain  the  longitude  7j°  lO',  or  76°  If*',  in  (U'der  to  steer  from  tliat  situation  to  the 
South,  which  course  may  be  altered  to  S.  E.  as  you  enter  into  the  limits  of  the 
ruins;  observing,  also,  that,  at  this  season,  it  is  better  to  make  the  Boca  Chica 
from  the  southuard  than  from  the  northward ;  as,  in  this  season,  the  waters  di- 
rect their  c(»urse  to  the  nortliward,  tliough,  in  the  season  of  il;e  breezes,  they  run 
i(\  the  S.  W  ;  also,  it  is  indis|)eniiable  not  to  run  in  upon  the  land  by  night,  but 
by  day  ;  for,  in  such  a  time,  the  land  is  very  deceiving. 

To  get  to  fVindward  ow  this  coast,  as  from  Carthagena  to  Margarita,  or  Trini- 
dad, you  must  haul  by  the  wind,  and  make  as  long  tacks  as  you  can.  The  time 
of  tacking  ought  to  be  decided  by  the  daily  variation  of  the  breezes,  which,- at 
about  12  at  uiglit,  or  something  before  it,  come  off  the  shore  fr(/m  about  E.  S. 
E.  or  from  S.  E.  if  it  has  been  raining  before,  and  the  ground  is  wet;  and,  <"  Jm 
nine  to  eleven,  in  the  forenoon,  the  sea-breeze,  or  that  from  E.  N.  E.  com  on. 
At  all  distances  from  shore  these  changes  take  place,  and  the  mariner  ir  and 
ought  to  take  advantage  of  them  to  get  on  from  leeward  to  windward  :  t.  is,  so 
soon  as  the  breeze  inclines  to  the  S.  E.  in  the  evening,  he  ought  to  follow  the 
off-sliore  tack :  and,  so  soon  again  as  the  wind  begins  to  change  in  the  morning, 
to  the  niu'thward  of  east,  he  ought  to  tack  in-shore  :  and  if,  on  account  of  Hear- 
ing the  land,  he  cannot  continue  on  the  same  stretch  until  the  breeze  changes, 
he  ought  to  keep  as  wtll  to  windward  as  he  can,  by  working  short  tacks  along 
shore,  until  the  breeze  again  returns  to  K.  S.  E.  when  he  may  again  stand  out  to 
sea  ;  and,  in  this  manner,  may  be  able  always  lo  make  two  long  stretches ;  one 
to  the  N.  E.  and  the  other  to  the  S.  E ;  tiiat  is  to  say,  he  may  make  the  two 
within  eight  points.  In  making  short  tacks  along  shore,  to  get  to  windward,  he 
has  not  that  advantage;  for  the  breeze  runs  always  along  the  coast,  unless  some- 
times there  may  be  a  slight  land-breeze  in  the  night,  and  before  the  sun  rises  in 
the  morning,  in  the  season  of  the  rains  :  but  they  do  n»)t  last ;  nor  can  he  avail 
himself  of  them  as  he  may  of  the  before-mentioned  variations. 

Very  small  vessels  cannot  follow  this  regular  system,  when  the  breezes  are  too 
fresh;  as,  from  Cabo  de  Aguja  to  Isla  Verde,  beyond  the  Magdalena,  where  the 
breezes  are  like  storms  ;  and,  in  these  cases,  it  is  better  for  them  to  keep  along 
shore,  where  the  water  is  smoother;  but  in  large  vessels,  ca  able  of  resisting 
these  gales,  and  which  have  good  tackle,  or  when  the  breezes  are  moderate,  they 
ought  to  muke  long  tacks,  when  the  wind  will  admit  of  it,  as  we  have  already 
^explained.  .  .     , 


blunt's   amf.iucan   coast   pilot. 


385 


jy  hare  not 
de  Zamba 
ranee  of  the 
I  Grande,  in 
Is  at ;  or,  to 
ler,  if  possi- 
hich  will  be 
I  in  the  time 
ind  maintain 
ill  permit  it, 

a  not  merely 
nuch  lengtli- 
uing,  the  va- 
ibo  de  Agiija 
nta  de  Cano- 

route  already 
d  of  it,  in  the 
;l;i  in  the  par- 
M'Mi  until  you 
ituation  to  the 
e  limits  of  the 
le  Boca  Chica 
the  waters  di- 
ezcs,  they  run 
I  by  night,  but 

arita,  or  Trilli- 
on.    The  time 
L'zes,  whichvat 
>m  about  E.  S. 
•et ;   and,  <"  Jm 
E.  com     on. 
iner  tv.      and 
kvard  :  t;  is,  so 
It  to  follow  the 
n  th(!  morning, 
count  of  near- 
•cezc  changes, 
>it  tacks  along 
n  stand  out  to 
stretches ;  one 
make  the  two 
windward,  he 
,  unless  some- 
he  sun  rises  in 
av  can  he  avail 

hr(!ezc3  are  too 
jna,  where  the 
to  keep  along 
ble  of  resisting 
Inoderatf,  they 
1  have  already 


„,j  -,.) 


!      .(    ■ 


;-i 


CBAF.  X. 


The  Coast  of  COLOMBIA  from  CARTHAGENA  to  the  Port  of 
St.  JUAN  DE  NICARAGUA. 


Description  and  Directions  from  the  Derrotero,  fye. 

The  Rosario  Isles  and  the  sontli  end  of  Barn  iiave  been  described  In  the  pre- 
ceding chapter,  and  it  has  been  noticed  that  the  last  is  separtited  from  the  main- 
land by  a  narrow  channel,  which  is  called  Pasa  Caballos  (Horses'  Pass.)  The 
north  end  of  this  channel  opens  into  tiie  first  bay  of  Carthagena,  and  the  South 
end  of  it  into  the  Golfete,  or  Little  Gulf  of  Barti,  which  is  formed  by  the  Island 
Baru  and  the  coast  of  the  main.  This  gulf  or  bay  extends  inward  to  the  north- 
eastward, nearly  twelve  miles.  The  points  which  form  it  on  the  south,  are,  the 
S.  W.  end  of  Baru  to  the  west,  and  Punta  Barbacoas  on  the  east.  It  has  several 
shoal  spots  on  it,  but  is  generally  clean,  with  water  from  10  and  9  to  3  fathoms, 
on  fine  sand  and  ooze  ;  the  most  general  de})th  is  from  5  to  4  fathoms.  There  is 
good  shelter  from  the  breeze  in  it;  and,  in  entering,  care  must  be  taken  to  keep 
clear  of  the  edges  of  the  bank  which  extends  from  the  Rosario  Tales,  and  not  to 
forget  the  Tortuga  Bank,  which  lies  to  the  S.  W.  with  Rosario  Island  bearinc 
N.  B.  I  N.  ten  miles  distant:  this  shoal  has  7ii  fathoms  over  it,  and  is  of  sand 
with  rock. 

Shoals  in  the  Golfete  de  Baru. — At  one  mile  N.  W.  i  W.  from  Barbacoas  Point 
is  a  shoal,  the  least  water  on  which  is  two  fathoms.  There  is  another  at  two  and 
one-third  miles  W.  S.  W.  i  W.  from  the  same  point,  witJi  from  1 J  to  2  fathoms. 
These  are  named  the  Barbacoas  Shoals.  In  addition  to  these  ai'e  two  others, 
named  Atillo  and  Matunillo ;  the  first  lies  three  and  a  half  miles  N.  N.  W.  |  W. 
from  Barbacoas  Point,  with  only  one  foot  of  water,  over  rock ;  and  the  second 
lies  nearly  five  miles  N.  E.  ^  N.  from  the  same  point,  and  has  very  little  water 
on  it. 

From  Barbacoas  Point  the  coast  tends  about  S.  2°  W.  fifteen  and  a  half  miles, 
to  the  Fronton,  or  bluff  of  Tigua.  The  latter  may  be  easily  known,  because 
the  highest  hill  on  this  portion  of  coast  rises  on  it.  From  the  Fronton  de  Ti- 
gua, a  bank,  with  little  water  on  it,  extends  to  the  N.  by  VV.  four  miles,  and  its 
extremity  is  opposite  Punta  Coaiisario,  whence  it  extends  two  and  a  half  railes 
from#3liore. 

From  the  bluff  of  Tigua  to  the  Boqueron,  or  the  point  of  San  Bernardo,  thf 
coast  tends  S.  by  W.  •{  W.  Olftlie  coast,  b»4\ve(-n,  are  two  islets;  the  first  and 
northern  one,  1:1/ la  de  Jesus,  and  the  second,  Cabrunaz  ;  these  lie,  respectively, 
at  four  andthiee  miles  from  Point  San  Bernardo. 

The  Point  of  San  Bernardo  is  the  S.  W.  point  of  a  drowned  mangrove  key; 
between  it  and  the  coast  there  is  a  small  channel,  frequented  by  canoes  and  pi- 
rogues. At  S.  S.  E.  i  I',  two  short  miles  from  Point  Sun  Bernardo,  lies  the 
rock  called  the  Pajarito  (Little  Bir<i  Rork  ;)  the  least  water  on  which  is  3J  fa- 
thoms, and  the  most  4i  fathoms. 

ISLES  OF  SAN  BERNARDO.— To  the  west  of  San  Bernardo  Point  lie  th# 
islands  of  that  name,  which  are  eleven  in  number,  including  those  of  Jeaua  and 
Cabrunaz,  already  mentioned ;  but  without  including  some  other  little  inlets. 

49 


986 


BLUNT  9    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


These  islands  extend  themaelvt'S  to  the  westward  -  ^  I'y  tifltrn  miha,  and  nea- 
Yj  ten  from  north  to  south.  Bi-tweeu  them  av-  various  1  Ult  chM.iels.  There 
in  also  a  channel  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  groui-,  between  '-'■  :ia;l  Ihf  coast.  The 
depth  on  the  bank,  to  the  west  and  south  of  thfse  isl.^,  U  vv  vy  un  qual ;  for,  iti 
an  instant,  you  may  pass  from  shallow  into  deep  water.  Al!  ttic  islands  are  low, 
and  covered  with  trees. 

The  channel  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  islands  is  between  the  eastern  islet, 
Salamanquitla,  on  the  west,  and  the  islet  Cabnuiaz  on  tin;  east;  or,  ratlier,  be- 
tween the  banks  which  surround  these  islands.  T!i«  dinu-tion  t»f  tl\e  channel  is 
N.  41°  E.  and  S.  41°  W.  Its  narrow  pnrt  is  only  three-tenths  of  a  mile  bro.id, 
but  the  depth  is  from  10  to  13  fatlioms,  clay  bottom,  with  0  futhoms  at  the  vd'^L'i 
of  the  bfinks.  The  banks  bavt;  very  little  water  on  thorn,  and  (luTOlbre,  unless 
exactly  in  the  passage,  there  is  much  danj;er  of  groiiiuliii;:.  Tae  diannel  lies 
nearer  to  Salanian(juilia  than  Ciibrunaz;  therefore  it  is  imcesHiiry  to  keep  near- 
est the  former;  and,  if  tlie  wcathi-r  he.  ch.Mr,  you  m;iy  S'.-i!  it;^  l;aiik,  wh;c!i  will 
enable  you  to  pass  through  with  ks^s  risk :  but,  in  thick  v.eather,  the  hand-lead 
is  the  only  guide. 

To  pass  tliis  ch-nnel,  (Salamnnqui'Ia  Channel)  on  comirij;  from  the  north,  so 
soon  as  you  hav,  ,„.ssed  to  the;  wt^stward  of  lIi!'.  Ilusiirio  Isiaiul.s,  steer  tonards 
the  hill  of  Tigua  ;  keeping  in  mind  th:it  the  shallow  hunk,  railed  tiie  Tortuga, 
lies  N.  W.  by  \V.  from  that  hill,  %vliich  hearinsz;  v/i!l  enabli!  you  to  give  it  a  suit- 
able birth;  that  is,  you  may  not  run  towards  Ti;:ua  Hiil  wlion  in  that  direction, 
but  either  to  the  northward  or  soutliward  of  tiii!  givoii  b!ar:'!'^;  and  run  thus 
until  you  bring  tht;  islet  Sahunan(inii!a  to  bear  S.  i  II.  tVoni  whicli  situation  you 
may  steer  S.  S.  E.  .^  E.  until  the  hill  of  Ti^^ua  bears  N.  F.-  h  E.  tiieii  steer  S. 
W.  true,  and,  keeping  the  same  mark  always  on,  you  wvy:  .-.itend  to  what  has 
been  previously  said  of  tills  channel ;  and  keep  persons  o.i  .'ae  look-out  for  the 
banks,  which  stretch  out  on  both  sides,  and  which,  as  we  luive  already  said,  show 
plainly. 

Having  passed  through  Salamanquilla  Channel,  and  being  abreast  of  San  Dn- 
nardo's  Point,  you  will  ent  •  the  great  B  ly  of  Tola,  wiiich  is  named  the  Gulf  of 
MorrosquUlo,  and  which  is  u  tinguished  by  the  islands  of  Fj;ui  Bernardo  to  the 
north,  and  that  of  Fuerlt  to  the  south.  The  lattei-  lies  wilh  the  southernmost 
key  of  the  former  bearing  N.  E.  A  N.  distant  twtinty-six  miles.  All  tl.ii  gulf  has 
a  good  depth  of  water ;  it  having  from  lo  to  25  fathoms,  on  green  ooze  ;  so  that 
you  may  let  go  an  anchor  in  any  part  of  it  in  the  season  of  light  breezes,  calms, 
and  variable  winds. 

TOLU.— At  S.  E.  h  S.  -.iurr.- 'H  miles,  from  the  Point  of  San  Bernardo,  in 
the  bottom  of  the  Gulf,  stanc  i.'  town  of  Santia2;o  de  Tolii,  situated  on  the 
Very  shore.  This  town  lies  thirteen  miles  N.  E.  by  E.  from  the  mouth  of  the 
harbour  of  Cispata,  and  is  in  lat.  9°  30'  50 '.  The  land  in  the  vicinity  of  this 
town  is  plain,  with  savannas,  which  extend  to  the  north,  east,  and  south,  ternn- 
natedto  the  east  by  a  chain  of  mountains,  over  which  rises  one  mount,  forming; 
two  round  hummocks,  called  the  Tetas  de  Tolu :  these  lie  twelve  miles  to  the 
east  of  the  town,  but  they  are  useful  marks  for  recognizing  this  coast. 

In  order  to  pass  to  the  westward  of  the  Islands  of  San  B-rnardo.  it  is  neces- 
sary to  keep  about  six  miles  oft'  from  the  northernmost  one,  named  Tinlipan, 
ard  not  to  advance  at  all  to  the  east  until  San  Burnardo  Point  bears  P,.  N.  E.  i  E. 
on  which  course  you  may  run  for  it,  if  you  choose.  It  is  very  convenient  for 
those  bound  to  Santiago  de  Tolu,  to  enter  by  the  Salamanquilla  Channel;  and, 
80  soon  as  abreast  of  the  point  of  San  Bernardo,  they  will  see  th^  Tetas  dti  Tolu, 
with  which  mark  they  can  direct  themselves  to  that  town;  of  otlnir  hill^j\'hicli 
may  be  seen  to  the  south,  the  easternmost  is  called  Santcro,  and  it  is  twejiry-one 
miles  distant,  bearing  south  from  San  Bernardo  Point.  The  westernmost  hill, 
named  that  of  Cispata,  is  twenty-flve  mile^  S.  by  W.  .1  W.  from  the  same  point. 
Uiiier  thir,  hiti,  and  to  the  northwa^-d  of  it,  is  i,he  harbour  of  Cispata.  The  vil- 
Ifc^  open  between  the  hills,  bearing  S.  by  W.  will  lead  to  the  entrance  of  this 
harbour. 

PUERTO  DE  CISPATA.— The  mouth  of  Clupaia  Harbour  lies  at  the  dis- 
tfliaee  of  seventeen  and  a  half  miSea  nearly  3.  by  W.  from  San  Bcrnado's  Point) 


high  r 


west, 
bagp 


^^1,  • 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


387 


iili'3,  and  nea'-- 
.imels.  There 
hf  coast.  The 
n,  qual ;  for,  in 
,=1      ■ 


ilandd  are  low, 


J  eastern  islet, 
or,  rather,  he- 
r  the.  channel  is 
f  u  mile  hro.id, 
ms  at  the  edt^es 
u-rftt'are,  uiil»;93 
,1(5  channel  lies 
y  to  keep  near- 
auk,  \vh;ch  will 
,-,  the  hand-lead 

n  the  north,  so 
-i,  stei-r  t;>\vards 
^■d  the  Tortuga, 
to  give  it  a  suit- 
1  that  direction, 
;  and  rnn  thus 
oil  situation  you 
,.  tiien  steer  8. 
jnd  to  what  has 
luok-out  for  the 
ready  said,  show 

east  of  San  Picr- 
amedthe  Gulfi>f 
Bernardo  to  the 
le  ^^o•.ltherl)m^)st 
All  thd  gulf  has 
en  ooze  ;  so  that 
t  breezes,  calms, 

an  Bernardo,  in 

situated  on  thu 

|he  mouth  of  the 

vicinity   of  this 

11(1  south,  termi- 

luount,  forming 

llvti   miles  to  the 

coast. 

ardo,  it  is  neces- 
amed  Tintipan, 
(arsr..N.  E.iE. 
convetiient  for 
Channel;  and, 
[e  Tetas  de  Tolu, 
hitr  hill%jvhicli 
it  is  twcjiry-one 
esternmost  hill, 
the  same  point, 
ispata.    Thevd- 
(Mitrance  of  this 

■r  lies  at  the  dis- 
Icrnado's  Point) 


ofld  Zapote  Point,  wli'tch  is  the  eastern  point  of  the  harbour,  lies  in  lat.  8^  •■  ^ 
19",  and  lent;.  TS*^  ftii'-  The  western  points  arc  called  Ttrrepku  and  Balandra, 
between  whie-;  "t!ie  distance  is  a  lonp;  mile-  Terrapleu  and  Balandra  Points  are 
covered  with  hij^h  mang;roves,  extending  out  into  the  water:  from  its  mouth  the 
Iiarbonr  extends  in,  to  the  S.  W.  by  W.  7  miles.  This  harbour  is  sheltered  from 
liarbours  and  winds,  and  the  best  anchorapje  is  on  the  northern  shore,  between 
Balandra  and  Navins  Points.  The  last  point  is  remarkable  from  it?  extending 
out  to  the  south.  The  hills  of  Santero  and  Cispata  maj'  serve  to  find  this  har- 
bour exactly  ;  the  middle  and  the  lii^^hest  part  of  the  former  lies  four  miles  S.  E. 
:{  K.  from  Zapote  Point;  near  this  hill,  and  to  the  westward  of  the  north  part  of 
it,  is  the  village  of  Santero,  at  the  distance  of  two  miles  from  the  little  bay  of 
Z-ipofe.  Tile  top  r)f  Cispata  hills  lies  eight  long  miles,  nearly  S,  S.  W.  from  the 
j)oint  or  front  of  Zapote. 

The  River  Sinu  falls  into  the  interior  of  Cispata  Harbour.  This  river  forma 
almost  a  semicircle  towards  the  south  and  west,  passing  by  the  southern  slope  of 
the  hills  of  Cispata.  At  about  two  leagues  from  the  bay,  on  the  left  bank  of  the 
river,  is  the  village  of  ,S'(7«.Wcrnanrfo</e/  Viento;  and  higher  up,  on  the  right  bank, 
are  the  villages  of  San  Nicolas  and  Santa  Cruz  de  Lorica. 

From  Mestizos  Point,  which  is  the  northernmcst  point  of  Cispata  Harbour, 
the  coast  tends  W.  S.  W.  5  YV— S.  W.  by  W.  i  W,  andrS.  W.  by  VV.  seventeen 
and  two  thirds  miles,  to  Point  Piedras  :  in  the  inlormcdiate  space,  and  on  th» 
hearings  mentioned,  are  found  the  Cienaga  de  Venados,  (Deer's  Lagoon,)  and 
Punta  del  Viento,  (Wind  Point,)  between  which  is  the  place  where  the  bank  ex- 
tends furthest  from  the  coast;  for  there  it  stretches  three  and  a  half  miles  to  the 
north;  while  its  extent,  east  and  west,  is  six  and  two-thirds  miles,  with  a  deptiv 
of  3,  4,  and  .')  fathoms,  on  sand  and  rock,  and  also  on  sand  and  ooze. 

Punta  de  Piedras  forms  a  front  S.  W.  by  S.  for  three  miles :  it  is  moderately 
high.,  precipitous,  and  foul,  at  the  shore  or  crater's  edge  :  at  its  N.  E.  end  it  form» 
»  small  hay,  at  the  distance  of  two  cable's  length  to  the  north  of  which  is  a  littl* 
high  rock,  with  some  shoals,  half  a  mile  to  the  N.  W.  of  it:  these  shoals  extend  a 
short  mile  from  N.  E.  to  S.  \V :  or  they  iiave  some  rocks  above  water,  and  others 
which  show  only  at  low  water  ;  the  general  depth  is  from  li  to  51  fathoms.  Who- 
ever runs  along  near  this  coast  ought  to  keep  the  hand-lead  constantly  gong. 

The  S.  W.  end  or  extremilj  of  the  bluff  of  Point  Piedras  is  called  Rada  jr'iwnf  ; 
at  the  distance  of  five  long  miles  S.  W.  by  S.  from  which  is  Punta  Braqy  '«*.', 
which  is  low  and  rocky,  with  a  reef,  which  extends  out  about  two  cable''-  i-gth 
to  the  north.  Near  this  reef  lies  the  Toro  or  Bull  Shoul.  Between  i-  fquele» 
Point  and  Rada  Point  is  th(!  hay  named  Ensenada  de  la  Rada,  ^\hich  has  n  'aw 
beachy  shore  :  it  is  shallow,  with  .S|  fathoms,  on  an  oozy  bottom.  At  el ,;.:  or 
nine-tenths  of  a  mile  to  the  S.  E.  of  this  bay  is  a  hill,  stretching  from  N.  K.  i*; 
S.  W  ;  and  farther  inland  are  three  peaks,  the  highest  id  largest  of  whict  lies 
about  five  miles  to  the  south-eastward  from  Broqneles  Point. 

Isla  Futrtt'. — The  N.  E.  end  of  Fuerte  Island  lies  twenty-one  ^nd  a  half  miles 
W.  hy  S.  from  Point  Mestizos,  and  six  and  a  half  miles  N.  W.  by  W.  %  W.  from  the 
north-easternmost  part  of  Piedras  Point.  This  island  is  one  mlie  and  a  quarte? 
in  length  from  north  to  south,  and  about  t!n-ee-(iuarters  of  a  mile  from  east  to 
west.  It  is  hiicli  in  the;  n  iildle,  and  covered  with  trees  and  royal  palms,  or  cab- 
bage-palms, w  Inch  rise  ahov(>  the  othi'rs  :  it  can  be  approached  by  vessels  at  its 
Routh  p«)i  It,  named  Arenas  Point,  only;  for  It  is  .iurrounded  by  reefs,  with  va  i- 
ous  scattered  mcks.  son>«-  of  which  show  above  water,  and  others  do  not.  On 
the  bank,  outside  of  the  reefs,  ;.nd  even  on  them,  thi're  are  from  2  to  4  favhoma 
of  water,  on  rock  and  coarse  s;md.  In  additinu  to  these  banks,  which  surround 
the  island,  tliere  ar;^  two  other  sm.dl  ones:  the  one  a  mile  S.  by  W.  i  W.  from 
the  island,  with  0  fitiioms  of  water,  on  sand;  and  (he  other  a  long  mile  S.  E. 
by  S.  from  Arenas  i'oint,  will  T  fathoms,  on  sand  and  gravel.  The  channel  be* 
tween  this  island  and  tin;  m;'  land  has  from  7  lo  ir>  fathoms  of  water.  The 
island  i.iay  !t(<seen  twenty  ion  s  olf,  from  the  deck  of  a  brig  or  schooner. 

ISLA  FUl'.RTE  to  the  Gl  'jV  of  DAHIEN.— S.  VV,  3  W.  from  Punta  Bro- 
qucles,  at  thp  distance  of  aliout  \x  miles,  lies  Punta  de  Carabana,  which  is  th« 
northcrnmojt  point  of  the  Gulfo{  Uraba,  or  of  North  Darien:  the  intermediate 


388 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


'4' 

*  'Mr:-: 


Wa 


\\ 


cdait  furms  bays,  tendini;  inward  six  miles,  or  rathnr  less ;  and  in  this  ipiiee 
is  the  bluff  or  hill  of  Tortugon,  which  is  remarkable  ;  the  points  of  ArhoUtea,  (or 
Little  Tree:-,)  San  Juan,  and  Savanilla :  tliat  of  San  Juan  is  high  and  scarped, 
the  others  are  low  to  the  water's  edge,  with  beaches  from  point  to  point.  The 
land  in  the  interior  is  a  low  hilly  range,  which  terniiiiates  near  the  cerros  or  hills 
of  Savanilla,  which  are  about  four  nuW»  S.  S.  I-^.  from  the  point  of  that  name. 
All  this  coast  has  a  bank  along  it;  so  that,  during  the  season  of  light  breezes,  or 
of  variable  winds  and  calms,  you  may  drop  an  anchor  on  it,  at  more  or  less  dis- 
tance from  the  coast,  as  the  size  of  the  vessel  may  require.  There  are  no  other 
impediments  on  it  than  a  high  rock  which  li«>s  a  long  mile  and  a  half  S.  W.  by 
S.  from  Broqueles  Point :  TortuguiUa  Island,  which  lies  sixteen  miles  S.  S.  W. 
I  W.  from  that  point,  and  nt*arly  west  from  the  Fronton,  or  bluff,  and  hill,  of 
Tortugon,  distant  about  four  long  miles  ;  and  the  Gigantoiies  Shoal,  which,  being 
near  the  coast,  and  along  to  th'j  S.  VV.  from  Savanilla  Point,  presents  no  danger, 
ttqless  you  run  near  that  point,  or  Gigantones  Point.  Tortiguilla  Island  is  low, 
small,  and  covered  with  trees;  and  to  the  north  from  it  extends  a  reef,  with  very 
little  water. 

The  GULF  of  URABA,  or  DAlllEN.— Carabana  Point,  as  already  noticed, 
is  the  northernmost  point  of  the  Gulf  of  Umla  :  it  is  low,  with  trees,  and  sur- 
rounded by  rocks.  It  is  easily  known,  becauye,  from  it,  the  coast  tends  to  the 
south  to  form  the  guif,  and  the  Cerro  de  Af^uila  (liagle  Hill)  is  near  it :  this  hill 
lies  in  lat.  8°  37'  DO"  ;*  and  from  itCupeTiburon,  whirli  is  tiie  westernmost  point 
that  forms  the  Gulf  of  Darien,  hears  West  twenty  nine  miles  distant. 

i4/S!'Uj7a  i/<7/,  although  only  of  a  moderate  height,  is  remarkable  from  being  in- 
sulated in  the  centre  of  low  land. 

The  shoals  about  Carabana  Point  are  at  the  S.  W,  end  of  the  bank,  which  has 
already  been  described,  as  generally  extending  along  the  coast.  The  outer  cor- 
ner of  this  bank,  with  &  fatlioms  of  water,  is  four  miles  N.  VV.  J  N.  from  th(! 
point.  In  that  direction,  nearly,  there  are  two  rocks:  one,  at  only  a  short  ills- 
tance  from  the  point,  partly  si'ows;  and  the  other,  only  a  little  separated  fnun 
it,  has  very  little  water  over  it.  From  the  edge  of  the  bank,  in  f)  fathoms,  tlie 
di'pth  increases  outwards  to  6  and  7,  on  a  bottom  of  sand,  and  successively  to 
more ;  so  that,  at  six  long  miles  to  the  N.  W.  of  Carabana  Point,  you  may  find 
JO  and  11  fathoms,  on  oozy  sand:  at  eleven  miles  22J,  ooze  ;  and  last,  at  four- 
teen miles,  35  fathoms,  also  on  ooze.  These  soundioj^s,  and  the  bearings  ol' 
Aguila  Hill,  maj  serve  to  guide  those  bound  to  this  Gulf;  observing  that,  so  soon 
as  Aguila  Hill  bears  east,  they  will  be  entirely  free  from  the  shoals  of  Carah-»na 
Point,  aid  may  run  freely  for  the  Gulf  of  Uarien,  nearly  to  Arenas  Point,  which 
lies  five  miles  and  one-third  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.  from  Carabana  Point;  all  this  |>art 
having  a  BM^cient  depth  of  water. 

The  entrance  of  this  Gulf  is,  as  stated  above,  between  Carabana  Point  to  the 
east  and  Cape  Tiburon  to  the  west.  All  the  eastern  and  southern  coasts  of  it, 
ti>  the  Bay  of  Candelaria,  offer  safe  anchorage  at  every  season  of  the  yi-ar  ;  but 
the  rest  of  it,  to  Cape  Tiburon,  is  very  wild  in  the  season  of  the  breezes,  and 
wittro^'t  any  shelter,  except  for  very  small  vessels;  but,  in  the  season  of  the  light 
brcfi.!  >;  variable  winds,  and  calms,  (season  of  the  rtndnvales,)  you  may  anchur 
5jj  .."ij  p  rt  of  the  gulf,  without  eitli  t  wind  or  sea  to  incommode  you. 

Thf  tv  •  points  of  Punta  Arenas  form  a  iow  front  of  two  miles  in  extent,  and 
they  '»eu.  from  each  other  S.  S.  E-  i  E.  and  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.  These  two  points 
fc'tu  t'lt.  vy(>stera  paitof  the  Aguila  Lagoon,  which  extends  E.  and  W.  five  and 
two-thirdsmiles,  and  from  N.  to  S.  three  miles,  with  various  low  islets  in  it.  Thin 
lagoon  commences  at  tiie  southern  extremity  of  Aguila  Hill,  which  has  beenhere- 
tofoi "  described. 

From  Arenas  Point,  towards  the  south,  the  coast  tends  to  the  east,  r>i  miles,  to 
thei2io  Salado,  and  thus  forms  a  tongue  of  sand,  extending  out  to  the  aeu,  and 
which,  althougii  it  is  low,  has  sulhcient  water  neurit,  and  may  be  run  along  at 
less  than  a.  mile. 


♦  The  Derrotero  gives  the  longitude  of  this  hili  m  70^  36'  45"  west  of  Cadiz  ;  but  the  late 
Chftit  of  Captain  Fidalgo  has  it  in  70    39*,  or  7o   56i',  from  Greenwich.     The  last,  we  pre 


iwm«,  is  t>  be  preferred. 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


389 


in  this  tpaer 

AihoUtta,  (or 

I  ami  scarped, 

0  point.  The 
cerros  or  hills 
of  that  name. 

ght  breezes,  or 
ore  or  less  dis- 
re  are  no  «>lher 

half  S.  W.  by 
miles  S.  S.  W- 
uff,  and  hill,  of 
il,  which,  being 
ents  no  danger, 
X  Island  is  low, 

reef,  with  very 

already  noticed, 

1  trees,  and  sur- 
ast  tends  to  the 
Hiar  it :  this  hill 
ester  a  most  point 

taut. 

le  from  being  in- 

bank,  which  has 
T\n'  outer  cor- 
L  I  N.  Iiom  thti 
only  a  short  dis- 
t;  separated  from 
n   f)  fathoms,  tlie 
A  successively  to 
nt,  you  may  find 
md  last,  at  four- 
the  bearings  of 
rins  that,  so  soon 
)als  of  Carab^na 
nas  Point,  which 
/mt;  all  this  part 

)ana  Point  to  tlie 
lern  coasts  of  it, 
>f  the  year  ;  but 
the  bretzta,  and 
>ason  of  the  liftlit 
[you  may  anchor 
le  you. 

jes  in  extent,  and 
Jhcse  tw(»  points 
and  W.  five  and 
islets  in  it.  This 
|ch  has  been  here- 
east,  r>i  miles,  to 
it  to  th«'  sea,  and 
be  run  along  at 


m 


ICadiz  ;  but  the  late 
The  last,  we  pre  • 


From  the  Rio  Salado  the  coast  tends  nearly  S.  S.  E.  It  has  aome  hillocks 
at  intervals,  and  the  depth  on  the  bank  ofl'  it  is  so  rcsuiar,  and  the  bottom  hO 
clean,  that  it  may  be  run  along  by  the  hand-lead.  Tu  tin;  s(»uthward,  from  Cay- 
man Point  and  Hill,  which  an;  fourteen  miles  from  thu  Jtio  Salado,  the  shores 
on  both  sides  of  the  Gulf  are  swampy,  and  continue  so  as  far  as  the  principal 
mouth  of  the  Bio  Atrato,  without  showing  any  hill  on  it;  and,  from  the  River 
Suriquilla,  (which  is  in  the  southernmost  pi>rt  of  the  Gulf)  to  the  north  and 
west,  may  be  considered  as  the  delta,  where  the  great  river  Atrato  or  Damn  dis- 
embogues. 

The  Bay  of  Candilaria,  which  is  formed  by  the  wet  land  at  the  mouth  of  the 
river,  bears  about  S.  W.  from  the  Point  and  Morro  of  Cayman,  at  the  distance 
«f  twelve  miles.  For  sailing  along  all  this  coast  of  the  bottom  of  the  gulf,  from 
Point  Cayman  on  the  east,  to  the  bay  of  Candelaria  on  the  west,  there  are  no 
rules  nor  guide  but  tlie  lead  ;  nor  is  there  any  danger,  for  you  may  anchor  wher- 
ever it  suits,  oris  necessary. 

The  priiicipal  or  only  Dhject  for  entering  in  the  Gulf  of  Darlen  can  only  be  to 
avail  yourself  of  tlie  fucilify  whicii  the  River  Atrato  affords  for  conducting  arti- 
cles int()  or  fr(»ni  the  interior  of  the  countr}^;  thus,  notwithstiuiding  this  rJver 
branches  into  liie  sea  by  many  mouths,  which,  for  so  great  a  distance,  form  the 
watery  and  inuodaU'd  lands  of  which  we  have  spoken,  yet  only  eight  of  them 
are  navigable  for  boats  and  launches;  and  none  of  them  offer  the  same  advanta- 
gei  as  the  Little  Fai/sau,  whicii  runs  into  the  soutlu^rn  part  of  the  Bay  of  Can- 
delaria; because,  wlien  anchored  in  the  bay,  vessels  will  find  shelter  from  the 
sea,  and  will  be  near  the  mouth  or  entrance  by  which  the  effects  they  bring  must 
ascend. 

The  coasts  of  the  Bay  of  Candelaria  ate  so  very  low,  that  tliey  are  n'ostly 
inundated,  even  at  low  water,  and  bordered  with  maogroves,  reeds,  rushes,  &tc. 
so  that  only  the  N.  \V.  point  of  the  bay  shows  itself  dry.  The  mouth  or  en- 
trance of  the  bay,  from  the  N.  W.  point  to  the  S.  E.  where  the  Little  Faysan 
runs  in,  is  about  two  miles  in  width  ;  but  the  bay  is  bordered  by  a  bank  and 
shoal  of  sand,  which  extends  out  a  niile  to  the  S.  E.  of  the  iV.  W.  point,  and 
reduces  and  straitens  the  bay  to  scarcely  a  mile.  This  shoal  also  stretches  out 
from  the  S.  E.  ponif,  but  only  for  a  cable  and  a  half's  length;  and  in  the  bay  it 
keeps  near  the  southern  coast,  but  runs  out  considerably  from  the  N.  W.  Tho 
space  of  good  depth  which  remains  is  about  a  mile  and  a  third,  in  all  directions. 
To  take  this  bay,  the  utmost  attention  to  the  lead  is  necess.iry,  taking  care 
not  to  get  into  less  than  ICi  or  19  fathoms  in  its  entrance,  nor  la  fathoms  with- 
in it.  This  caution  is  very  necessary,  for  the  sand-bank  which  surrounds  it  is  so 
steep,  that,  from  14  fathoms,  you  pass  to  5,  and  from  r»  to  be  aground.  Taking 
care  to  preserve  the  proper  depth,  you  will  go  in  mid-channel,  wiiich  you  will  find 
at  about  four  cables  from  the  S.  E.  point.  It  will  also  be  good  to  have  a  person  on 
the  look-out  upon  the  yard,  for  the  colour  of  the  water  shows  both  the  channel  and 
shoal.  This  arm  of  the  river,  namely,  the  Little  Faysan,  has  three  feet  of  wa- 
ter on  its  bar,  and  the  tides  rise  two  feet  throughout  the  whole  of  the  Gulf  of 
Darien. 

From  the  N.  W.  point  of  Candelaria  Bay,  the  coast,  which  is  low  and  cover- 
ed with  mangroves,  tends  N.  by  W.  i  W.  five  miles,  to  Rtvesa  Point;  thence 
seven  miles  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  are  the  Tarena  Keys:  on  all  this  coast  the  bank  of 
shallow  water,  formed  by  the  mouths  of  the  river,  extends  outward.  The  chief 
mouth  of  the  Atrato  lies  about  one-third  of  the  distance  between  Revesa  Point 
and  Tarena  Keys ;  and  it  is  necessary  to  keep  at  two  miles'  distance  from  the 
coast.  Revesa  Point,  w  hich  has  also  been  called  Choco  Point,  forms  a  bight, 
wherein  there  is  good  anchorage,  well  sheltered  from  the  norths  and  breezes; 
and,  to  take  it,  you  have  only  to  run  within  a  cablo  and  a  half's  length  of  the 
south  part  of  that  point;  and,  so  soon  as  you  are  abreast  of  it,  o:,  what  is  the 
same,  to  the  west  of  it,  or  something  farther  into  the  bay,  you  may,  if  you  choose, 
anchor  in  14  or  lo  fathoms. 

On  this  coast,  and  to  tiie  soutli  of  the  Tarena  Keys,  may  be  seen  a  mount  or 
hill,  named  the  Peak  of  Tarena,  whence  rise  some  very  high  mountains,  which 
cxt»<nd  to  the  N.  W.  and  have  various  peaks  :  of  these  the  southernmost  is  named 


/ 


390 


BLUNT'3    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


Candelaria,  and  the  northernmost,  which  is  over  Cnpc  Tiburon,  h  called  th© 
Peak  ofthe  Cape  (Pico  del  Cabo ;)  the  peak  next  it,  the  south,  being  named 
Gandi. 

From  Tarena  Keys  the  coast  tends  about  N.  W.  by  N.  ten  miles,  to  the  Bo- 
landeros:  all  of  it  is  his;h,  and  then'  are  various  islets  n!on(!;  it;  of  these,  the 
first,  named  Tutumah,  is  :i  group  of  throe  i-ilcts,  v(  ry  riciii,  Avhicli  lie  out  half 
a  mile  from  the  coast.  To  thcs"  follous  that  named  Tamhor,  (tiie  Drum)  which 
also  lies  ratiu-r  more  than  half  a  mile  from  the  coasl.  Aitli()ii;;h  this  is  clean,  it 
inust  be  kept  in  mind  tint,  at  liaH'.i  mile  ri-i>m  its  N.  N.  V..  part,  there  is  a  rocky 
shoal  which  sliows:  between  this  an'l  the  islet  tiiere  is  a  pMsswy;'',  hnt  it  is  better 
always  to  run  outside.  To  the  Avesl  oC  t!iis  i.-^ht  \h('.  coast  ft)rnis  a  bay,  called 
Puf.rtn  EacnndiJo,  (Miihh)!!  11  iihonr)  whic!»,  on  aceount  of  its  sinall  capacit}', 
admits  small  vensel^  only:  to  Tainhor  nii|.»w  \\\i^  Bolandcra.'s,  which  arc  a  Tirj^er 
islet,  with  smaller  on«!S  at  its  south  pyrt :  these  an>  all  clean,  and  with  snlficient- 
Jy  deep  water  around  them,  and  do  not  lie  out  from  the  coast  more  than  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile. 

At  N.  W.  by  \V.  ^W.  thren  miles,  from  the  Great  Rolandero,  and  at  about  half 
a  mile  from  the  coast,  lies  Pitoii  hkl,  which  is  very  clean  ;  thence  W.  N.  W,  \  W. 
six  miles,  is  Gandi  Point,  forming  the  western  part  of  a  beachy  bay  (Ensenada 
Tripo  Gandi:)  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.  one  and  two-thirds  miles  from  Gandi  Point,  is 
the  point  of  the  River  Gandi,  Avhich,  with  Gandi  Point,  forms  the  cove  of  Estola 
or  Gandi,  in  Avhich  the  rivers  of  these  names  disembogue.  This  place  is  of  lit- 
tle importance. 

Six  and  a  half  miles  N.  N.  W.  from  Gandi  Point  is  Tonel  Islet,  which  is  very 
clean,  and  has  good  deep  water,  especially  on  its  eastern  side:  it  is  about  one. 
lonj;  mile  from  the  coast.  From  this  islet  to  Cape  Tiburon  the  distance  is  six 
and  a  half  miles,  N.  W.  i  W. 

All  this  coast,  from  Tarena  Keys  to  Cape  Tiburon,  is  high  and  precipitious, 
with  deep  water  off  it;  and  it  is  very  wild  in  the  season  of  the  breezes.  It  is 
very  adviseable,  therefore,  at  these  seasons,  to  shun  it,  and  keep  over  to  the 
eastern  side  of  the  gulf;  for>,  on  that  side,  you  have  not  only  convenience  and 
safety,  in  anchoring  where  you  please,  but  you  can  also  heat  easier  to  windward, 
on  account  of  having  less  sea  or  swell,  and  vou  may  thus  save  much  time. 

CAPE  TIBURON,  the  N.  W.  boundary  of  the  gulf,  is  high  and  precipitious: 
it  extends  out  to  the  N.  N.  E.  in  form  of  an  isthmus,  which  forms  two  small  har- 
bours; the  first  of  these  is  so  narrow  as  tu  be  of  little  importance;  the  second 
is  larger,  and  called  Miel  Harbour:  the  latter  has  good  holding-ground,  and  its 
greatest  depth  is  from  12  to  13  fathoms,  on  sand  and  clay. 

At  thirteen  miles  W.  N.  W.  from  Cape  Til>uron  is  the  point  and  peak  of  Car- 
reto,  which  is  the  eastern  point  of  a  small  harbour  of  that  name.  Hetween  the 
two  points  the  coast  forms  a  bay,  of  about  two  and  a  half  miles  in  depth,  which 
iscalli'd  tl),e  Bay  of  Annchitcunn :  all  the  shore  here  is  beachy  to  the  foot  ofthe 
high  mountains,  without  any  remarkable  point.  At  about  two  miles  to  the  south- 
ward of  (jarret.i  Point  is  a  little  harbour,  fit  for  fimugi|;lers  only,  and  named 
Puerto  Escondido. 

Tlie  Point  and  Peak  of  C'am;to  are,  as  before  stated,  at  the  eastern  part  of 
the  hurbour  of  that  name  ;  the  western  j»art  is  formed  by  a  cluster  of  islets ;  and 
hetr/een,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  and  a  half,  is  the  widest  part;  the  narrowest 
part  being  only  one  mile.  This  iiari)our  is  of  a  semi-circular  form,  and  falls  in 
about  a  mile:  its  deplh  of  water  is  not  less  than  .TJ  fathoms,  nor  dots  it  exceed 
Ci  f illioms :  notwitlistauding  tiiest;  good  qualities  it  is  open  to  the  N.  E-  breezes 
and  the  seas  they  raise,  and  has  litlle  shelter  from  t\m  N.  AV.  It  is,  therefore, 
only  of  use  in  the  season  of  the  calms  and  variable  winds. 

To  the  north  of  this  harbour,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,  are  the  DajoT,  de  Car- 
veto  :  these  are  two  little  shoals,  near  each  other;  they  lie  from  each  other  nearly 
N.  E.  and  S.  W.  There  are  6  fathoms  of  Avater  on  th(!m,  over  rocks,  and  near 
them  from  iiO  to  25  fathoms :  the  sea  breaks  on  them  with  fresh  breezes. 

AtN.  W.  3  W.  seven  miles,  from  the  point  and  peak  of  Carreto,  is  the  Punta 
Escosces  (Scots'  Point :)  cutting  this  line  (N.  W.  3  W.)  there  are  clusters  of  islets, 
of  different  sizes,  which  extend  out  from  tlia  Punta  de  los  Motes  (Point  of  the 


v^ 


BLUNt'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


391 


is,  tlicrefore, 


islets)  a  long  mile,  about  N.  N.  E.  To  this  point,  which  is  three  miles  distant 
from  Punta  Escosces,  the  coast  is  high  and  scarpud,  but  it  becomes  lower  and 
beachy  thence  to  that  point. 

Punta  Escosces  is  the  S.  E.  point  of  Caltdonia  Bay,  the  greater  islet  of  Santa 
Catalina  or  de  Oro  (Gold)  being  the  N.  VV.  Bt-tween  point  and  point  the  distanc« 
is  four  miles,  and  the  points  lie  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  from  each  other;  and,  in  respect 
to  tills  line,  the  bay  falls  in  one  mile  and  two-thirds.  In  the  S.  E.  part  of  this 
bay  is  Puerto  Escosces,  (or  Scotish  Harbour)  which  extends  inward  two  miles 
in  that  direction,  and  forms  j^uod  shelter.  Tliere  are  various  shoals  in  it,  which 
are  represented  in  the  particular  plan  of  the  harbour,  by  which  plan  any  vessel, 
may  run  in,  for  the  depths  are  5,  6,  7,  and  D  fathoms  of  water,  over  a  bottom  of 
sand. 

Tlie  Isla  Grande  de  Oro  is  high  ;  and,  at  a  mile  and  four-fifths  to  the  south  of 
it  there  is  a  smaller  ishind,  called  San  Augustin  ;  and,  on  the  same  direction,  ra- 
ther more  than  a  cable's  leujjtli  fnun  St.  A.ugUi-tin,  isPiedras  Islet,  which  doubtless 
take  its  name  from  the  many  rocks  with  wiiichitis  surrounded. 

Between  Piedras  Islet,  to  the  north,  the  west  point  of  A^latomate  River  to  the 
south,  and  that  of  San  Ful;;encio  to  the  S.  W.  is  formed  the  Ensenadaor  Bay  of 
Caledonia,  and  the  Channel  of  Sasardi. 

The  Bcuj  of  Caledonia  is,  strictly  speaking,  formed  by  the  points  already  men- 
tioned, which  lie  with  each  other  iV.  N.  W.  i^  W.  and  S.  S.  E.  3  E.  one  mile  dis- 
tant. This  bay  is  clean,  and  ii!\s  pood  deep  watcT  ;  the  j;reater  part  of  its  coast 
is  a  beach ;  and,  near  the  middle  of  it,  disembou^^es  the  River  Aglaseniqua.  The 
point  of  San  Fuljxeneio  is  salient,  scarpetl,  and  clean;  audit  also  forms  an  indent, 
•with  little  depth  of  water,  bordered  by  maugroves  and  various  keys  at  its  west- 
ern part. 

Between  San  Fulgcncio  Point,  the  Great  Oro  Island,  Piedras  Islet,  and  the 
Mangrove  Keys,  which  are  to  the  west  of  them,  the  channel  of  Sasardi  is  formed: 
the  S.  E.  entrance  of  the  thannil  is  olT  and  on,  with  four  cables'  lengths  in  ex- 
tent, from  edge  to  edge,  and  with  iVom  9  to  lii  fathoms  depth,  on  ooze;  and  far- 
ther in,  from  a  to  10  falhoms:  as  al-so  between  the  turn  of  the  bank  off  Piedras 
Islet,  and  the  Bay  of  Caledonia,  the  depth  is  from  7  to  la  fathoms;  aud  the 
piece  of  sea,  which  intervenes  between  this  bay  and  the  Porto  Escosces,  is  of  a 
good  depth  of  water;  but,  at  a  short  mile  S.  E.  by  E.  J  E.  from  Piedras  Islet, 
the  sea  breaks  v/hen  the  breeze  blows  fresh. 

These  harbours  are  equally  sheltered  from  the  winds  and  seas  of  both  seasons, 
and  have  a  good  depth  of  water;  but  the  Channel  of  Sasardi  and  Bay  of  Cale- 
donia are  preferable,  because  you  can,  with  all  winds,  either  enter  or  sail  out  from 
them  with  more  facility  and  less  risk,  than  into,  or  from,  Puerto  Escosces. 

N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  four  and  two-third  miles  from  the  east  end  of  Great  Oro 
Island  is  the  western  extremity  of  two  larger  islands,  which  with  the  reefs,  shoais, 
and  multitude  of  islets,  thence  to  the  N.  W.  form  with  the  coast,  the  channel  of 
Sarsadi.  The  N.  W.  mouth  of  this  channel  is  formed  by  the  west  end  of  the  two 
greater  islands  and  the  point  of  Sasardi, with  an  opening  of  three-quarters  of  a 
mile.  This  channel  has  too  many  shoals  to  be  of  utility  ;  nor  is  there  any  popu- 
lation near  it. 

Between  the  eastern  point  of  Great  Oro  and  the  N.  \V.  channel  of  Sasardi  some 
reefs  project  out,  with  two  islets  at  the  extremity,  which  bear  N.  N.  W.  |  W.  from 
tlie  eastern  point  of  Great  Oro  Island,  two  miles  distant,  and  about  N.  E.  from 
the  south-easternmost  extremity  of  the  large  isles  already  mentioned.  There  is 
also  a  shallow  bank,  at  a  mile  aud  a  half  to  the  west  of  the  fronton  or  point  '"f 
Sasardi. 

The  Fronton  of  SararJi  is  salient,  round,  scarped,  and  surrounded  with  reeia 
near  the  shore.  From  the  outer  part  of  it,  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  Isla  de  Pinoa 
bears  N.  by  VV.  two  miles  distant ;  and,  in  the  intermediate  space,  the  coast  forms 
various  bights ;  the  points  of  which  are  scarped  and  surrounded  by  reefs.  Off 
the  west  part  of  the  island  is  the  Cienaga  of  Navagandi,  the  mouth  of  which  is 
shut  by  reefs  ;  aud  the  coast  here  forms  with  the  island,  a  channel  of  two  cables' 
length  in  width,  where  narrowest,  aud  it  has  from  IJ  to  5i  fathoms  of  water. 


592 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  hla  de.  Pinoa  is  liigh,  with  a  liill  stretchini;  along  it,  on  which  rines  two  re- 
markable points,  covered  with  wood :  its  greatest  extent  lies  N.  W.  by  N.  and  S.  E. 
by  S.  one  mile,  and  its  greatest  breadth  is  three-quarters  of  a  mile  :  its  S.  E.  and 
N.  E.  sides  are  high,  scarped,  and  l)ordered  by  reefs,  very  near  shore.  N.  by  W. 
two  and  a  half  miles,  from  the  northern  extremity  of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  is  the  Isia 
de  PajaroH,  (Bird's  Island,)  which  is  low,  narrow,  and  covered  with  brush-wood, 
surrounded  by  reefs,  which  have  from  7  to  8  fathoms  of  water  at  their  ed^fs,  on 
rocky  bottom.  At  this  place  commences  the  immense  Archipelof^o  of  the  Mulatas, 
composed  of  islands,  keys,  shoals,  and  rocfs,  formin*;,  between  themselves  and 
the  main-land,  many  anchorages  and  sheltered  channels,  secure  in  all  weathers, 
and  terminating  at  San  Bias'  Point.  The  interior  land  is  high,  being  a  mountain 
range,  with  notable  peaks,  which  may  serve  as  leading-marks  ro  the  various  an- 
chorages, &LC. 

The  channels  formed  in  this  space  are  those  of  Pinos,  Mosquitos,  Cuiti,  Zam- 
hogandi,  Punta  Brava,  Cocos,  Rio  Monos,  Rjitones,  Great  Playon,  Puyadas, 
Arcbalo,  Mangles,  Moron,  Caobos,  Holandes,  Chichime,  and  San  Bla?.  A  ves- 
sel, being  a  league  distant  to  the  north  of  Pajaros  Islet,  and  running  N.  W.  twenty- 
five  miles,  and  W.  N.  W.  4o  miles,  w  ill  pass  clear  of  those  dangers,  and  will  be  to 
the  north  of  the  easternmost  keys  of  the  Holandes  Group,  at  the  distance  of 
four  and  a  half  miles:  with  these  courses  you  will  pass,  at  the  beginning,  atone 
and  a  half  to  two  miles  outside  the  reefs,  and  afterwards  four  and  five  and  a  half 
miles ;  but  it  remains  in  the  option  of  any  navigator  to  pass  at  a  greater  distance, 
if  it  suits  him. 

GULF  of  SAN  BLAS.— Seventeen  miles  to  the  west  of  the  easternmost  keys 
of  the  Holandes  Group  lies  Point  San  Bias,  in  lat.  9°  34' ."36"  N.  and  long.  79°  1'  30" 
W.  it  is  low,  and  forms  the  N.  E.  boundary  of  the  Gulf  of  San  Bias,  the  mouth 
of  which  extends  north  and  south  to  the  anchorage  of  Mandinga,  six  miles,  and 
from  that  line  as  much  to  the  west.;  its  coasts  arc  low,  and  covered  with  man* 
groves,  which  run  into  the  sea. 

From  San  Bias'  Point,  to  the  distance  of  a  mile  and  three-quarters,  extend 
some  reefs,  with  various  keys,  the  easternmost  one  of  which  is  named  Cayo 
Frances :  from  this  the  other  keys,  to  the  number  of  twelve,  extend  to  the  S.  W. 
and  West ;  and  to  the  eastward  of  them  are  many  banks  and  islands,  which  make 
part  of  the  Arcliipela;:;o  of  the  Mulatas,  and  form  various  channels. 

To  run  into  and  anchor  in  the  Gulf  of  St.  Bias,  whether  it  be  in  Bahia  Inglesa, 
(English  Bay,)  which  lies  to  the  S.  W.  of  San  Bias  Point,  or  in  that  of  Mandin- 
ga, which  is  on  the  south  coast,  the  best  and  most  commodious  passage  is  by  the 
channels  of  Chichim.e  and  San  Bias.  Tiiat  of  Chichime  is  formed  to  the  west  by 
the  keys  off  San  Bias  Point,  to  the  east  by  the  reef  and  group  of  keys  of  Chi- 
chime, and,  to  the  south,  by  another  group  surrounded  by  reefs,  which  some  call 
the  Lemon  Keys  (Cayos  de  Limon.)  Tlie  latter  form  the  channel  of  San  Bias 
to  the  S.  E.  and  those  of  San  Bias  bound  the  same  channel  to  the  N.  W.  The 
first  are  three  miles  in  extent  between  the  edges  of  the  shoal  water,  and  the 
second  a  mile  and  three-quarters. 

To  enter  the  Gulf,  it  is  necessary  to  open  the  mouth  of  the  channel  of  Chichime 
until  you  bring  it  on  the  meridian  of  the  second  islet  (counting  from  the  west- 
ward) of  the  Lemon  Keys  ;  from  which  situation  steer  to  the  south  until  abreast 
of,  or  rather  more  to  the  north  than,  Cayo  Frances  :  then  steer  S.  VV.  on  pur- 
pose ta  run  in  the  middle  of  San  Bias  Channel,  Avhicli,  as  already  noticed,  is  a 
mile  and  three-quarters  in  width,  between  the  westernmost  of  the  Lemon  Keys, 
called  Gallo  or  the  Cock,  and  the  reef  which  extends  to  the  southward  from  Cayo 
Frances;  directing  yourself  to  the  anchorage  as  advised,  whether  that  be  on  the 
north  side  of  the  Gulf,  or  in  Mandinga  Bay.  To  run  to  the  latter,  the  keys 
which  lie  to  the  north  of  Mandinga  Point  may  serve  for  a  m;irk :  the  outermost 
of  these,  named  Cobra,  lies  a  mile  from  the  point;  ami  it  is  to  be  noticed  that, 
at  a  short  mile  N.  by  VV.  i  VV.  from  that  key,  there  is  a  little  sandy  key,  to  which 
a  birth  ought  to  be  given ;  and  there  is  a  bank,  with  1  and  1^  fathoms,  VV.  N. 
W.  I  W.  from  the  Islet  Cabra,  one  mile  and  a  half  distant,  and  you  ought  to  paw 
between  them. 


PLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


393 


rises  two  re- 
^'N.andS.E. 
its  S.  E.  and 
•e.  N.byW. 
aes,  is  the  Isla 
I  brudli-wood, 
leir  ed^t'S,  on 
f  tlie  Mulatas, 
lemselves  and 
I  all  weathers, 
ig  a  mountain 
le  various  an- 


iternmost  keys 
long.  790 1'  30" 
las,  the  mouth 
,  six  miles,  and 
red  with  man« 

larters,  extend 
s  named  Cayo 
ndtotheS.W. 
Is,  which  make 


The  Anchorage  of  Mawiinga  Is  aheltered,  and  has  water  deep  enough  fof 
any  class  of  vesHcls.  In  the  Gulf,  and  on  running  out  from  the  bottom  of  it,  to 
the  distance  of  3i  miles,  there  are  various  islets  and  keys,  with  banks ;  the  out- 
ermost key  in  the  Gulf  is  named  Maceta,  in  lat.  0°  31'  IS".  A  birth  must  be 
given  to  all  these,  if  )ou  wish  to  run  far  into  the  Gulf. 

The  channel,  named  the  Canal  de  Holandes,  is  thti  largest  of  all  those  formr 
ed  by  the  Mulatas,  and  its  mouth  is  formed  towards  the  east  by  the  western 
extremity  of  the  reefs  of  the  Holandes  Group,  and,  to  the  south-west,  by 
Ycacoa  Key ;  the  two  keys  are  2|  miles  distant  from  each  other,  N.  E.  i  E.  and 
S.  W.  i  \V.  The  least  depth  in  this  channel  is  15  fathoms,  on  a  sandy  bottom; 
but  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  from  Holandes  Key,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  and  three- 
quarters,  there  is  a  shoal  extending  half  a  mile,  N.  and  S.  with  6  and  7  fathoms 
of  water,  over  rocks ;  with  a  little  swell  the  sea  brenka  on  it-  You  may  pass 
this  shoal  either  on  the  east  or  west ;  but  it  will  be  always  best  to  pass  it  to  tho 
eastward,  near  the  reefs  of  tlie  Holandes  Group,  the  breakers  of  which  serve 
for  marks.  Run  afterwards  towards  the  east  part  of  Ycacos  Key,  which  is  of 
firm  ?and,  covered  with  high  wood,  and  named  from  having  abundant  of  the 
Ycacos  plum-tree  growing  on  it.  From  the  meridian  of  Ycacos  Key.  by  the 
south  of  it,  the  Holandes  channel  extends  W.  S.  W.  }  W.  to  the  middle,  even 
to  th*"  bottom,  of  the  Gulf  of  San  Bias.  It  is  c'.ean,  and  has  from  23  to  27  fa- 
thoms of  water,  on  ooze,  with  a  breadth  of  2J  and  3  miles,  among  groups  of 
keys,  single  or  detached  keys,  and  reefs  ;  but  free  and  fit  to  turn  in,  in  case  of 
need,  towards  the  anchorages  alrendy  described. 

PUNTA  S.  BLAS  to  PORTO  BELLO.— At  N.  W.  by  W.  lialf  a  mile  from 
Point  San  Bias  is  the  northern  part  of  its  front,  which  is  low  and  covered  with 
mungroves ;  and,  in  the  intermediate  space,  is  a  little  key,  Piedras,  and  other 
shoals,  which  are  connected  with  those  off  Cayo  Frances.  At  a  quarter  of  a  mile 
N.  W.  I  N.  from  the  north  point  of  S.  Bias,  is  the  Cayo  Perro,  a  key  connected 
to  the  reefs  extending  in  a  westerly  direction  from  Cayo  Frances,  and  which 
terminate  at  an  island,  lying  in  front  of  a  Cknaga,  at  the  distance  of  a  mjle  an4 
^  quarter. 

From  Perro  Key  the  coast  continues,  nearly  W.  I  S.  ten  miles,  to  Cocos  Point. 
The  latter  is  to  the  eastward  of  Escribanoa  Harbour.  The  intermediate  coast  is 
almost  alike  low,  with  reefs  along  shofe,  and  something  of  a  bay.  The  most 
visible  objects  along  it  are  Mogote  Point,  which  is  small,  projects  a  little,  and  has 
a  hillock  on  it ;  that  of  Cerro  Colorado,  which  is  round,  sc^r|^ed,  and  extends  out 
but  little,  and  that  of  Playa  Colorado,  which  is  round,  and  surrounded  by  reefs, 
running  out  to  a  cable's  length. 

Cocos  Point  advances  out  to  sea,  and  from  it  the  point  of  Escribanos  bears  W. 
S.  W.  i  W.  one  and  a  third  mile,  and  in  this  space  the  coast  forms  a  hay,  in  th« 
middle  of  which  is  Escribanos  Harbour.  The  lr>st,  from  its  mouth,  extends  half  a 
mile  to  the  south.  This  harbour  is  very  shallow,  having  only  1  and  li  fathoms 
of  water :  outside  of  it,  on  both  sides,  there  are  reefs,  with  very  little  water  on 
them  ;  and,  in  the  channel  formed  by  them,  from  3J  to  7  fathoms  are  found. 

To  the  N.  E.  of  the  mouth  of  this  port  lie  the  shoals  called  the  Escribanog, 
(Lawjrers,)  two  in  number,  composed  of  reefs,  with  very  little  water  on  themi 
and  lying  near  each  other :  the  islet  on  the  reef  nearest  to  the  coast  is  rather  less 
than  two  miles  distant  from  Cocos  Point,  anli  it  extends  a  mile  between  W.  S. 
W.  and  E.  N.  E  :  the  other  reef  lies  about  W.  N.  W.  from  the  said  islet  orrockj 
and  extends  a  short  mile  from  East  to  West :  both  are  steep-to,  with  3  and  4 
fathoms  of  water ;  and,  on  the  bank,  are  from  9  to  13  fathoms,  on  gravel  and 
coarse  sand.  In  the  channel  between  the  south-easternmost  shoal  and  Point 
Cocas  there  are  from  10  to  13  fathoms,  which  diminish  to  6  and  5  on  each  side 

Escribanos  Bank  lies  nearly  N.  W.  by  W.  from  the  shoal  of  the  same  name' 
distant  five  and  a  half  miles :  it  extends  from  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  to  S.  E.  by  E, 
\  E.  nearly  two  miles,  with  from  5i  to  8  fathoms  of  water,  on  rocks.  At  about 
two  cables'  length  to  the  northward  of  its  edge,  from  18  to  34  fathoms  are  found. 
In  heavy  seas  the  water  breaks  on  this  bank,  and  may  serve  as  a  guide ;  and  at 
other  times,  when  the  seals  smooth,  the  look-out  men  must  be  at  the  mast  heads. 
In  the  channel  between  this  bank  and  the  Escribano»  Shoal  there  are  from  9  to 

50 


^. 


V^     ^t'^      ^^\V 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


h 


/. 


10      ■^lii  U£ 


I.I 


mm  m22 

2f  Kit   "^ 

2.0 


us 

lU 

u 


IL25  i  1.4 


I 


1.6 


PhotDgraphic 
.Sciences 
Corporation 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WnSTSR.N.Y.  l4StO 

(716)  S7a-4S03 


m 


n^' 


r<\^ 


<^ 


'^ 


394 


blunt's 


AMERICAN    COAST    I'lLOT. 


K 


18  fathoms  of  water,  on  sand,  gravel,  and  rocks.    Tlie  N.  W.  part  of  it  is  N.  W. 
i  N.  eight  and  a  qunrter  iiiiles  from  Escribanos  Poiiit. 

W.  J  N.  from  Cocos  Point  lies  Ttrrin  Point  and  Pascador  Islet.  Between 
Terrin  Point  and  Quingongo  Point,  which  are  eight  and  a  half  miles  distant  from 
each  other,  and  on  the  meridian  of  the  Escribanos  Bank,  in  Culcbra  Islet,  which 
is  about  two-tliirds  of  a  mile  from  its  point,  about  N.  N.  VV.  Continuing  to  the 
West,  the  point  and  isl«';t  of  Quengo  are  met  with.  Port  Escondido,  which  is 
something  to  the  West  of  this  point,  is  only  a  litlle  Cienaga,  or  lagoon  ;  Points 
Cha^uachagua  and  MacoUa  being  its  most  notable  points. 

The  mountains,  which  continue  along  this  coast,  from  those  of  Darien  to  those 
of  Porto  Bello,  are  sufficiently  remarkable ;  that  called  the  Cerro  de  Lotna^  or 
Cerro  Gorda,  being  rather  more  so  than  the  rest ;  this  lies  S.  W.  |  S.  from  Cu- 
lebra  Islet,  at  the  distance  of  full  seven  miles,  and  may  serve  as  a  mark  for  keeping 
clear  of  the  Escribanos  Bank  and  Shoals.  This  hill  is  not  much  higher  than  the 
Cordillera,  in  which  it  stands  ;  its  top  is  large,  and  of  some  extent. 

Pescador  Islet  lies  about  two  cables'  length  N.  E.  i  N.  from  Terrin  Point,  and 
the  point  is  surrounded  by  reefs,  which  extend  a  cable's  length  to  the  North,  and 
half  a  mile  to  the  West,  continuing  to  the  S.  S.  W.  to  encircle  three  islets,  which 
are  between  the  point  and  the  N.  E.  of  the  harbour  of  Nombre  de  Dios. 

Between  Terrin  Point  and  Martin  Pescador  Islet,  and  Manzanillo  Point,  from 
which  the  first  bears  W.  N.  W.  \  W.  distant  four  long  miles,  and  the  second  W. 
by  N.  distant  five  miles,  a  great  bay  is  formed,  which  falls  in  about  three  miles 
to  the  S.  W.  and  to  the  West  and  N.  W.  two  miles,  to  the  bottom  of  the  bay  of 
San  Christoval :  at  the  eastern  extremity  of  this  bay,  and  at  one  and  a  half  mile 
S.  W.  i  S.  lies  the  western  point  of  the  harbour  of  Nombre  de  Dioa;  surrounded 
with  reefs;  as  is  also  the  eastern  point,  although  at  this  part  they  stretch  farthest 
out.  The  harbour  is  small,  and  the  greater  part  of  its  shores  are  bound  by  reefs 
and  shallows :  its  clear  depth  is  .5^,  4,  and  5  Tathoms,  in  the  mouth  ;  but  the  rest 
of  the  bay  is  useless  in  the  season  of  the  breezes,  and  the  reefs  from  the  bottom 
of  it  stretch  out  nearly  a  mile  towards  Point  San  Christoval. 

From  Point  San  Christoval,  to  the  N.  E.  distant  two  long  cables'  length,  He» 
an  islet,  named  Juan  del  Poxo,  (John  of  the  Well,)  surrounded  with  rocks ;  and, 
about  S.  E.  from  it,  half  a  mile  distant,  is  a  bank  named  the  Vibora  :  between  this 
shoal  and  the  islet  of  Juan  de  Pozo,  and  between  the  latter  and  San  Christoval 
Point,  there  isa  depth  of  10,  U,  and  14,  finthoms,  on  gravel  and  coarse  sand.  San 
Christoval  Point  lies  three,  and  two  third  miles  distant,  W.  |  S.  from  Terrin 
Point;  also,  from  this  point,  the  Buey  Shoal  bears  W.  N.  W-  distant  nine-tenths 
of  a  mile  :  between  this  shoal  and  the  reefs  of  Terrin  Point  there  is  \.  om  10  to  13 
fathoms  of  water,  on  rock,  sand,  and  clay  ;  and  10,  13,  and  15  fathoms,  with  the 
satne  quality  of  ground,  between  the  Buey  and  Vibora  Shoals.  The  coast  be- 
tween San  Christoval  and  Manzanillo  Points  is  high  and  scarped. 

Manzanillo  Point  is  the  northernmost  of  all  the  coast  of  Porto  Bello  ,*  it  is  also 
high  and  scarped,  projecting  out,  with  two  hummocks  on  it :  near  this  point 
vhere  are  various  islets  and  a  shoiil ;  the  greater,  named  also  Manzanillo,  is  high 
and  scarped,  and  lies  two-fifths  of  a  mile  to  the  East:  to  the  North  it  has  three 
f.irallons,  of  whfch  the  farthest  out  is  distant  along  cable's  length.  There  is,  also, 
.-•nother  small  one,  distant  a  cable's  length  and  a  half  to  the  East :  and,  finally,  to 
the  N.  by  E.  i  E.  of  Manzanillo  Islet,  at  the  distance  of  two-fifths  of  a  mile,  is 
the  islet  of  Martin  Pescador,  which  extends  about  a  cable's  length  from  North  to 
South:  All  these  islets  are  high  and  scarped,  an^i  b-tween  those  of  Manzanillo 
and  Martin  Pescador  there  are  from  11  to  15  fathuuis  of  water. 

Manzanillo  Shoal  lies  two-fifths  of  a  mile  from  the  point  of  the  same  name  to 
the  N.  VV.  It  has  very  little  water  on  it,  and  5  and  6  fathoms  near  it ;  and  in  the 
strait  between  it  and  the  point  are  l4  fathoms  of  water. 

Among  the  Mountains  of  this  coast  those  of  Snxino  and  Nombre  de  Dioa  are 
most  remarkable,  and  may  serve  as  marks  for  recognizing  the  harbour  of  the  last 
name:  the  first,  which  is  high,  ends  in  two  peaks  near  each  other,  and  the  north- 
easternmost  of  them  is  about  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  from  Terrin  Point,  distant  seven  short 
milpis.  That  of  Nombre  de  Dios,  which  lies  to  the  South  of  the  harbour,  termi- 
nates in  a  peak,  and  is  eight  miles  to  the  S.  S.  W.  from  Terrin  Point. 


% 


mm 


BI.UNT  S  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


395 


At  W.  N.  W.  4  VV.  one  and  a  half  mile  from  Manzanillo  Point,  lies  the  highest 
part  of  Tambor  Islet,  which  is  high,  round,  and  scarped  :  it  is  connected,  by  a  reef 
of  two  cables'  length,  with  the  northernmost  part  of  Vinados  or  Jiastimmtos  Island. 
This  island  stretches  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  a  short  mile,  forming,  with  the  main-land, 
the  N.  E.  channel  of  Bastimentos  Harbour,,  the  greatest  extent  of  which,  between 
the  reefs,  is  three-twentietlis  of  a  mile,  with  from  5J  to  6  futlioms  of  water,  on 
sand.  Bastimentos  Ishnul  is  fmil  on  its  S.  E.  South,  an<l  S.  W.  sides;  and  the 
latter,  witii  Cabra  Islet,  which  lies  a  little  to  tin;  South  of  West,  form  theN.  W. 
channel:  the  greatest  width  of  this  channel,  hotween  tlie  rnvSi,  is  three-tenths  of 
a  mile  with  from  4  to  10  fathoms,  on  clay,  or  r,\\\h\r  sticky  mud.  The  harbour  of 
Bastimentos  is  of  little  importance,  although  sheltered,  and  with  a  depth  of  from 
4  to  7  fathoms.  All  its  shores  are  bounded  by  reefs ;  and  the  usual  anchorage  is 
to  the  S.  W.  South,  and  S.  E.  of  the  South  or  Sandy  Point  of  Bastimentos 
Island. 

Garrote  Harbour. — S.  W.  from  the  highest  part  of  Tambor  Islet,  two  and  a  third 
miles,  lies  the  mouth  of  Garrote  Harbour,  formed  by  the  main-land  to  the  South, 
by  Garrote  Island  to  the  East,  and  by  Pelade  Island  (and  other  Islands)  to  the 
West;  the  latter  extends  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  West,  as  far  as  Boquerones.  The 
mouth  of  Garrote  Harbour  is  three-tenths  of  a  mile  wide,  or  scarcely  so  much, 
betlvcen  the  reefs  to  the  West  of  Great  Gorrote  Island  and  Pelado  Islet:  it  first 
extends  from  North  to  South,  and  afterwards  to  S.  E.  with  a  depth  of  from  7  fa- 
theais,  in  the  interior  of  the  harbour,  to  13  and  19  in  the  mouth,  on  sticky  mud. 
It  is  sheltered  from  the  seas  and  winds  of  the  N.  E.  breeze.  The  Hill  of  Garrote 
rises  between  this  harbour  and  that  of  Bastimentos:  it  is  of  middling  height,  its 
top  terminating  in  apeak,  and  is  seven-tenths  of  a  mile  distant  from  the  coast. 

S.  by  E.  i  E.  three  and  a  half  miles  from  the  little  Bay  of  Garrote  is  the 
Mountain  of  Cmpiro  or  Capira,  high  and  almost  always  co'  '^rvd  with  clouds. 
Capira  lies  nearly  east  from  the  city  of  San  Felipe,  of  Porto  Bello. 

A^t  a  little  to  the  south  of  Capira  is  the  Mountain  of  Llorona,  stretching  nearly 
east  and  west.  It  is  the  highest  of  all  on  this  part  of  the  coast;  on  the  eastern 
part  of  its  top  it  appears  as  if  cut  down  vertically,  forming  a  peak  called  Cam,' 
pana,  or  the  Bell ;  from  this  peak  the  mountain  spreads  to  the  west,  descending 
gradually  to  near  the  Peak  of  Guache ;  the  appearance  of  the  latter  is  such  that 
it  cannot  be  mistaken  for  any  other;  iti  clear  weather  it  may  be  seen  at  the 
distance  of  forty-five  miles;  hut  in  the  season  of  the  fresh  breezes  it  is  usually 
covered  with  haze ;  and,  in  the  season  of  the  rains  and  variable  winds,  it  may  of- 
ten be  seen  between  eight  and  nine  in  the  morning,  and  four  and  five  in  the  after- 
noon, though  in  the  rest  of  the  day  it  is  covered  with  clouds. 

The  Lavandera  Shoal  lies  north  seven-tenths  of  a  mile  from  the  north  end  of 
Pelado  Islet,  and  west  from  Cabra  Islet,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Bastimentos  Har- 
bour. This  shoal  is  of  rock,  with  very  little  water  on  it,  and  steep-to,  with  8  or 
9  fathoms,  close  to  a  rock  on  which  the  water  breaks ;  the  channels  between  it 
and  Cabra  Islet,  and  Pelado  arc  deep,  with  from  15  to  18  fathoms  of  water,  on 
sticky  mud. 

S.  W.  by  W.  from  the  highest  part  of  Tambor  Islet,  three  miles  and  eight- 
t^Ms,  lie&the  Point  of  Boquerones,  which  is  salient,  high  and  blutl';  and  from  it, 
alnRst  on^e  opposite  bearing,  viz.  N.  E.  by  E.  are  five  islets,  called  the  Boque- 
rones, which  extend  out  about  three  cables'  length.  The  reefs  and  islets  which 
follow,  from  Pelado  to  the  westward,  terminate  here. 

Boquerones  Point  has,  to  the  south,  at  a  long  mile's  distance,  a  hill,  named 
Casique,  which  terminates  in  a  point,  and  is  of  middling  height;  it  may  serve  as 
a  mark  for  keeping  clear  of  the  Foul  Farallon,  a  rock  which  lies  N.  W.  i  N. 
two  short  miles  from  Boquerones  Point.  The  Foul  Farallon  forms  the  west 
end  of  two  groups  of  islets  and  shoals,  which,  from  S.  W.  to  N.  E.  extend 
thirteen-twentieths  of  a  mile,  forming  a  channel  between  both,  with  4^  to  6<|  fa- 
thoms o,f  water;  the  north-easternmost  islet  or  farallon  bears  W.  <^  S.  from  the 
iiighest  part  of  Tambor  Islet,  nearly  four  miles;  and  in  this  space  there  are  from 
18  to  33  fathoms  of  water,  on  clay  and  sand,  ||nd  17,  23,  24,  and  37,  betwe«(b 
the  said  farallon,  the  islets  of  the  coast,  and  tK6  Lavandera  Shoal. 

Three  miles  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  (torn  Boquerones  Point  is  the  nondi  end  of  the 


0m 


#•  "w 


396 


BLUiNl  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


FaraUana  or  Islets  of  Duarte',  which  are  four  in  number,  and  extend  nearly  S.  fc; 
by  S.  and  N.  W.  by  N.  three-fifths  of  a  mile.  From  the  northern  one  a  reef 
extends,  in  the  same  direction,  a  cable's  length.  The  southernmost  of  these  isl- 
ets is  separated  little  more  than  two  cables'  length  from  the  Point  of  Duarte, 
which  is  TO  the  south,  on  the  main-land,  and  from  that  of  Sahanilla,  which  is  to. 
the  N.  E.  by  E.  nearly  half  a  mile;  between  the  two  straits  there  is  a  depth  of 
from  3 J  fathoms,  close  to  the  islet,  to  IGJ.  The  intermediate  coast  is  high  and 
scarped,  with  some  b..ys;  the  Point  of /ose/" Poire' (which  is  surrounded  by 
rocks  and  reefs)  extends  farthest  out.  Sabaniila  Point  has  equally  a  reef,  with 
borne  rocks. 

Two  long  miles  S.  by  W.  }  W.  from  the  northernmost  part  of  Duarte  Wet* 
is  Drake's  Point,  which  is  the  N.  W.  point  of  Porto  Bello ;  the  intermediate 
coast  is  high  and  scarped,  with  a  little  harbour  called  Leon,  of  little  importance, 
and  bordered  by  reefs,  which  end  to  the  N.  N.  W.  at  a  little  farallon,  distant 
four-tenths  of  a  mile  from  its  mouth. 

PORTO  BELLO — The  name  of  this  port  expresses,  at  brice,  the  excellence 
t)f  the  harbour,  for  ail  classes  of  vessels.    Its  widest  entrance,  which  is  between 
H^  Drake's  Point  on  the  north,  and  that  of  Buenaventura  on  the  south,  is  rather 
more  than  a  mile,  and  these  lie  nearly  on  the  same  meridian ;  the  harbour  with- 
in is  not  more  than  half  a  mile  broad,  and  the  land  on  both  sides  is  mountainous. 
Its  direction  inward  is  E.  by  N.  one  mile  and  a  half,  to  the  mangroves  at  its  bot- 
tom.   The  north  shore  is  clean,  hut  some  reefs  and  rocks,  with  little  water  on 
them,  stretch  off  from  the  south  shore  to  between  one  and  one  and  a  half  ca- 
ble's length;  and,  in  the  bottom,  or  east  part,  of  the  harbour,  there  is  a  sand- 
bank, which  advances  two  and  a  half  cables'  length  from  the  mangroves,  towardi 
the  west ;  and  at  N.  W.  by  N.  from  the  city  mole,  three-twentieths  of  a  mile, 
there  is  a  very  little  sand-bank,  with  one  and  one  and  a  half  fathoms  on  it.     The 
rest  of  the  harbour  is  clean  and  deep  enough,  diminishing  regularly  from  17  to  8 
fathoms.     Ships  of  the  line  ought  to  enter  this  harbour  by  warping  or  towingv 
because  there  are  regularly  either  head-winds  or  calms.    The  best  anchorage  is 
near  the  middle  of  the  harbour,  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  battery  of  Santiago,  in  10 
or  11  fathoms,  on  clav  and  sand;  but  smaller  vessels  may  go  nearer  to  the  city, 
taking  care  to  shun  the  little  shoal  already  mentioned.    The  reefs  of  the  south 
shore  continue  to  the  W.  by  S.  to  the  Farallon  de  Buenaventura,  a  rocky  islet  of 
{    -which  the  N.  W.  end  bears  S.  W.  {  W.  three  long  cables'  length  from  the  point 
of  the  same  name.     Between  this  islet  and  the  point  there  are  two  smaller  one», 
and  all  connected  by  reefs.     At  nearly  S.  W.  by  S.  from  Drake's  Point,  one- 
fifth  of  u  mile  distant,  is  the  middle  of  Drake's  Rock,  which  is  clean  all  round, 
and  has  a  break  in  the  middle  that  seems  to  divide  it  into  two  parts.     At  a  little 
liidre  than  half  a  mile  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  from  the  break  of  this  rock,  is  the  north 
end  of  the  Halmedind  Shoal,  which  has  Some  rocks  covered  with  water,  and 
over  these  the  sea  breaks.     On  the  other  parts  of  the  shoal  there  are  2  and  3) 
fathoms  of  water  on  the  rock ;  the  water  is  deep  enough  around  it,  and  between 
)tand  Drake's  Rock  there  are  from  12  to  £8  fathoms  on  clay. 

S.  jl  E.  seven-tenths  of  a  mile  from  Drake's  Rock,  and  west,  seven-twentieths 
'of  a  mile  from  Punta  del  Cocal,  or  Farnesio,  is  the  Farnesio  Shoal,  of  a  triangu- 
lar form ;  upon  it  are  4  and  5  fathoms  of  water,  on  rock,  and  there  is  no  pasiflte 
between  it  and  the  coast.  In  tiie  channel  between  it  and  the  SalmeAna  Sma\ 
there  are  from  18  to  23  fathoms  on  clay. 

This  harbour  is  surrounded  by  hills,  from  which  some  rills  or  brooks  uescend 
'on  both  shores ;  at  these  rills  vessels  may  procure  water,  particularly  from  that 
Vhich  runs  into  the  bay  of,  and  to  the  west  rf  the  batteries  of,  San  Fernando,  ott 
•the  north  side. 


Remarks  on  going  from  Cliagre  t>o  Porto  Bello. 

From  the  roads  of  the  River  Chagre  to  Porto  Bello,  the  course  is  N.  E  i  N-. 
unless  you  run  three  or  Aiur  m^  to  the  northward,  for  then  a  N.  £.  course 
will  take  you  into  the  harbour.    Th&  distance  is  about  twenty-eight  or  thirty 


'^ifw 


#'# 


IBLUNT's  AMERICAS   COAST  PILOT. 


397 


•arly  S.  fc: 
)ne  a  reef 
if  these  isl- 
of  Duarte, 
n'hlch  is  to. 
a  depth  of 
s  high  and 
ounded  by 
I  reef,  with 

iiarte  Islets 
itermediate 
mportance, 
on,  distant 

1  excellence 
1  is  between 
h,  is  rather 
rbour  ivith- 
ountainous. 
IS  at  its  bot- 
le  water  on 
1  a  half  ca- 
e  is  a  sand- 
res,  towards 
s  of  a  mile, 
on  it.    The 
rom  17  to  8 
;  or  towingi 
nchora^e  is 
tiago,  in  10 
I  to  the  city, 
the  south 
cky  islet  of 
m  the  point 
nailer  ones-. 
Point,  one- 
all  round. 
At  a  little 
is  the  north 
water,  and 
re  2  and  3) 
nd  between 


twentieths 
f  a  triangu- 
opaa 
ina  Bf 


iangu- 

bRi 


>ks  uescend 
from  that 
erruaido,  oA 


N.  E  i  N-. 

,  E.  course 

or  thirty 


miles,  i  strongly  recommend  should  light  winds  prevail,  which  is  generally  the 
case  from  May  to  the  end  of  NovtMnber,  that  ships,  bound  to  the  eastward,  should 
obtain  a  good  offing,  as  the  current  tlnm  sets  at  the  rate  of  from  one  and  a  half 
to  two  and  a  half  miles  au  hour,  to  the  northward  and  eastward,  and  it^ts  right 
on  the  rocks  to  the  N.  E.  of  Porto  Hollo,  parlicuiariy  in  the  rainy  months,  which 
are,  as  before  staled,  from  May  to  November.  In  tliis  season,  the  River  Chagre 
has  a  discharge  which  discolotii-'?  tlio  sea  ?,Ix,  seven,  and  ei^!it  miles  off;  and  the 
Water  from  the  river,  by  meeting  the  sea-rurrent,  causes  a  strong  set  to  the  east- 
ward. If  you  intend  to  go  into  Porto  Bell<t,  the  entrance  of  the  harbour  may 
be  known  by  two  remarkable  trees,  on  the  top  of  the  hill  on  the  starboard  side; 
and  on  a  hill,  oil  the  larboard  or  north  side,  is  a  small  signal-post.  In  coming 
from  the  r-Cotv/ard,  keep  within  three  miles  of  the  shore,  until  you  open  the  town 
of  Porto  Bello,  on  the  starboard  hand,  or  on  the  south  side  of  the  harbour;  this 
will  lead  you  intoth^,  harbour;  but  observe,  should  you  have  light  winds,  fo  keep 
well  up  for  the  Salmedina  Shoal,  which  lies  in  a  line  with  the  islet  called  Drake's 
Rock,  on  the  larboard  hand,  when  going  in,  as  the  current  may  set  you  down 
upon  it.  Take  care  not  to  shut  the  town  of  Porto  Bello  in  with  the  land  on  the 
south  side,  as  a  shoal  extends  from  the  islet  Buenaventura,  on  that  side.  You  may 
anchor  in  from  10  to  18  fiithoms,  soft  mud.  There  are  no  other  dangers  in  going 
into  the  harbour,  beside  those  stated.  The  Salmedina  is  frequently  visible,  and 
generally  breaks.  The  bearing  of  this  rock  is  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.  it  is  from 
50  to  00  fathoms  in  extent,  and  ^0  in  breadth,  with  6  fathoms  all  round  it,  at  25 
fathoms  distance  from  the  breakers.  The  Salmedina  bears  from  Drake's  Rock, 
on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance,  W.  j  S.  disttnt  about  SOO  fathoms;  and  be- 
tween is  the  passage  generally  taken  by  ships  ::oming  from  the  eastward  for 
Pdrto  Bello. 

During  the  N.  E.  trade's  blowing  home,  that  is,  from  December  to  May,  there 
is  no  dariger  to  be  apprehended  from  going  through  this  passage,  and  you  may 
keep  within  a  ship's  length  of  the  islet,  and  within  half  a  cable's  lengtl  of  th6 
Salmedina ;  between  these  we  found  7,  14,  and  to  22  fathbihs  of  water.  In 
turning  into  Porto  Bello,  great  caution  must  be  observed,  when  within  three  or 
four  miles  of  the  harbour's  mouth  that  you  never  shut  the  town  in  with  the  land 
'on  the  south  or  starboard  side  of  the  harbour ;  for,  by  keeping  it  open,  you  will 
avoid  the  sunken  rocks  off  the  Islet  Buenaventura. 

There  are  no  particular  marks  for  anchoring :  hut  when  ships  require  refresh- 
ments, and  supplies    >f  wood  and  water,  I  should  recommend  their  anchoring 
About  a  quarter  of  a  mile  below  Fort  Fernando,  which  stands  on  the  north  shore 
and  is  easily  seen  ;  you  will  then  be  abreast  of  the  only  watering-place  in  the 
harbour. 

In  going  in  with  a  leading  wind,  keep  the  town  well  open  on  the  starboard 
side,  and  anchor  in  from  30  to  15  fathoms,  or  even  with  12  or  10,  according  to 
the  size  of  youi*  ship. 

During  the  months  from  May  to  November,  light  winds  prevail  in  the  harbonr^ 
from  the  S.  W.  and  West;  and  early  in  the  morning,  light  winds  fi-om  the  N.  E. 
down  the  harbour:  therefore  be  prepared,  with  boats  ahead,  to  be  under  way 
by  the  dawn  of  day.  In  mooring,  lay  the  small  bower  to  the  northward,  and 
best  to  the  south. 

At  the  distance  of  a  long  half  mile  to  the  southward  of  Porto  Bello  is  the  En- 
senda  or  Cove  of  Buenaventura,  much  bordered  by  reefs,  and  consequently  of 
little  use.  ^ 

To  enter  Porto  Bello,  when  appoaching  from  the  north-eastward,  it  is  advisea- 
ble  to  make  the  Farallons  of  Duarte,  and  from  them  to  shape  a  course  so  as  to 
run  at  a  cable's  length  to  the  N.  W.  of  Drake's  Rock ;  but  never  try  to  pass  be- 
tween this  rock,  or  islet  and  the  main.  So  soon  as  you  have  passed  the  rocki 
uteer  to  the  south  and  east,  so  as  to  run  up  the  middle  of  the  harbour ;  or  rather 
nearest  to  the  north  shore. 

If  bound  out  of  this  port  to  the  southward,  pass  at  about  a  cable  and  a  half  or 
two  cables,  from  the  Farallon  of  Buenaventura,  and  thence  steering  towards  that 
of  Drake,  you  will  bring  it  to  the  N.  E.  and  EastHiks  y«^  run  out  keep  in  mid- 
*ohaiifielt>or  nearest  the  north  shore,  and  take  care  to  avoM  the  Salmediqa  Shoah 


il 


t'^ 


g  ,jir--. 


.Jii£j<^ 


% 


^,..».-  ,•  .<i» 


3^8 


IlLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


PORTO  13KLLO  to  CHAGRE.— At  about  fifteen  miles  S.  W.  from  Punta 
S.  Felipe,  or  Drake's  Point,  is  the  west  end  of  the  Fronton  of  Longarremos, 
which  nith  tlie  north-easternmost  of  the  Naranjos  or  Orange  Isles,  form  a  bay, 
into  wlnfeh  enter  the  two  creeks  called  those  of  Minas.  The  Orange  Isles  lie  four 
and  three-quarter  miles  to  the  N.  E.  by  E.  from  Longarremos  Point.  The  creeks 
of  Minas  are  form«d  among  mangroves  ;  the  eastern  one  extends  inward  three 
miles  to  the  S.  S.  E.  its  breadths  are  very  un'^jual.  and  its  shores  bordered  with 
reefs.  The  western  creek  is  narrower  and  shorter  extending  to  the  south  rather 
■  more  than  a  mile.  The  Oninge  Isles  are  low,  covered  with  trees,  and  bounded 
by  reefs ;  but,  at  the  S.  E.  part  of  them,  there  is  anchorage,  5,  6,  and  7  fathoms, 
on  sand.  In  the  intermediate  part  of  this  coast  is  Punta  Gorda,  the  most  pro- 
jecting point,  with  several  coves.  To  Punta  Gorda  the  coast  is  high,  with  banks 
or  ridges ;  and  between  it  and  Buenaventura  Cove  the  River  Guanche  disembo- 
gues. Guanche  Hill  is  an  eminence  which  stands  three  and  three-quarter  miles 
E.  N.  E.  5  E.  from  Punta  Gorda. 

Fro-^  ^unta  Gorda  to  the  S.  W.  the  coast  gradually  declines  in  height;  and 
the  r.  .)der,  from  Rio  Grande  Point  and  the  creeks  of  Minas,  is  a  low  coast, 
with  mangroves :  the  point  of  Longarremos  is  likewise  low,  with  mangroves, 
and  bordered  with  reefs  ;  as  are,  also,  the  points  which  form  the  Minas  Creeks. 
The  reefs  extend  more  than  a  cable's  length  from  the  coast :  they  are  steep  '  y, 
and,  at  one-third  of  a  mile  out,  are  IS  fathoms  of  water,  on  clay. 

From  the  Fronton  of  Longarremos,  the  mangroves  extend  to  the  S.  W.  nearly 
a  mile  and  a  half,  to  Manzanillo  Point,  which  is  also  of  mangroves,  round,  and 
bordered  by  reefs,  to  the  distance  of  a  long  cable ;  and  a  little  shoal  lies  three 
miles  distant  from  it,  N.  W.  i  N. 

Manzanillo  Harbour  is  formed  between  the  islet  of  that  name  to  the  west,  and 
tlic  main-land  to  the  east,  extending  in  two  short  miles  from  Manzanillo  Point  i 
this  harbour  is  clean,  with  from  3  to  6^  fathoms  of  water.  The  best  anchorage, 
for  all  vessels,  is  a  little  to  the  south  of  its  mouth,  on  the  east  coast,  in  5|  fathoms, 
on  sand  and  clay. 

S.  W.  l)y  W.  i  W.  five  miles,  from  the  Fronton  of  Longarremos  is  Toro  Pointy 
which  is  the  western  point  of  Naos  Harbour ;  the  eastern  one  being  the  north  end 
of  Manzanillo  f stand,  and  these  two  lie  2|  miles  distant  from  each  other.  Toro 
Point  is  salient,  high,  scarped,  and  bounded  by  reefs,  which  stretch  out  to  about 
two  cables'  length,  with  an  islet  near  them.  This  harbour  extends  inward,  near- 
ly four  miles,  to  the  south,  f.-om  tlie  middle  of  its  mouth :  its  breadth  is  nearly 
equal,  though  it  narrows  a  littie  from  two-thirds  of  the  said  distance  :  it  is  clean 
to  the  parallel  of  Punta  Limon,  with  from  Si  to  7  fathoms  of  water,  on  sand  and 
clay.  As  this  harbour  is  open  to  winds  from  N.  E-  to  N.  W.  round  by  North,  it 
Can  be  of  use  in  the  season  of  the  variable  winds  and  calms  only. 

From  Toro  Point  the  coast  tends  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  nearly  2i  mileSj  to  Brujas 
Point,  which  is  moderately  high,  and,  like  the  intermediate  coast,  bordered  by 
reefs,  which  do  not  extend  lar  out,  but  surround  the  islet,  named  Mogote  de  Bru- 
jas, which  lies  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  point  of  the  same  name,  about  two  cable's 
length. 

From  Brujas  Point  the  coast  is  lower  than  before  ;  tending  S.  S.  W.  i  W-  two 
miles,  to  Batata  or  Vigia  Point,  so  named,  on  account  of  having  a  guard-house 
on  it:  from  this  point  that  of  Chagre  is  a  cable's  length  distant,  and  is  lower 
tlian  the  former,  bounded  by  low  rocks  which  show  above  water,  and  reefs 
which  extend  out  to  a  short  distance  only. 

CHAGRE. — The  west  point  of  the  Penon,  a  great  rock,  on  which  stands  the 
castle  of  San  Lorenzo,  is  about  J  J  cable's  length  S.  by  E.  i  E.  from  Chagre  Point. 
The  Penon  is  scarped  to  the  N.  W.  and  South.  The  castle  of  San  Lorenzo 
stands  in  lat.  9°  20'  57"  N.  and  long.  80°  4'  O".  The  Penon,  to  the  N.  E.  with 
Punta  Arenas  to  the  S.  W.  form  the  mouth  of  Chagre  River,  which  is  two  cables' 
length  across  where  widest  and  li  at  the  narrowest. 

To  the  E.  S.  E.,  at  a  short  distance  from  the  castle  cf  S.  Lorenzo,  is  the  little 
town  or  village  of  Chagre,  coaMosed  of  huts,  covered  with  thatch.  The  mouth 
of  the  river  narrows  between  the  Penon  and  a  bank,  which  extends  out  from 
■Armas  Pvint,  to  the  distance  of  a  cable's  length.    On  the  mcridiian,  or  to  the 


i^.4^ 


xq~ 


ulunt's  amkrican  coast  I*  I  lot. 


39^ 


eouth,  of  the  Penon,  there  are  '2\  and  3  fallioins  of  waiter ;  the  same  depth  con- 
tinues, with  little  variation,  half  a  mile  uj>  the  river.  At  9ii  English  fathoms 
west,  from  the  castle  of  San  Lorenzo,  is  the  shoal  named  Laja,  which  extends 
70  fathoms  frotn  north  to  south,  and  is  of  rocit,  with  very  little  water  ^it- 
It  is  very  dangerous  either  to  enter  into  or  sail  out  fnmi  Chagre  Rivilt  and  a 
passage  can  be  effected  only  by  very  manageable  vessels,  which  do  not  draw 
more  than  12  feet:  both  operations  must  l>e  performed  wilii  a  fair  wind  ;  for, 
otherwise,  the  current  of  the  river,  and  the  various  *'ddies  it  forms,  from  the  op- 
position of  the  Penon,  Laja,  and  west  shore,  will  carry  vessels  on  one  or  other  of 
these  dangers. 

From  Arenas,  or  the  sandy  point  of  the  Rivet-  Chagre,  the  coast  tends  S.  W. 
by  W.  i  W.  to  the  Morrito  or  Little  Hill  Point ;  i.nd  from  thence  S.  S.  W.  ^  W. 
scarcely  two  miles,  to  the  Point  of  Animas ;  all  the  shore  being  low,  and  with  a 
beach. 

At  S.  S.  W.  4  W.  from  the  last-mentioned  point,  and  at  the  distance  of  two 
lon^  miles,  there  is  another  equally  low ;  and,  as  this  is  the  last  point  included  iqi 
the  Burveyij  of  Captain  Fidalgo,  it  may,  with  strict  propriety,  bear  the  name  Of 
this  excellent  surveyor. 

From  Punta  Fidalgo  the  coast  tends  about  S.  W.  by  W.  J  W.  53  miles,  to 
BeUn  River,  whence  it  tends  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  8  leagues,  to  Point  Esciido,  and 
then  West,  8  leagues,  to  Valeneia  Point.  All  this  coast  is  generally  lo\y,  though 
some  parts  rise  a  little.  The  water  along  it  is  so  shallow,  that,  at  3  or  4  miles 
from  it,  you  may  have  from  20  to  40  fnthoms,  the  bottom  mostly  being  mud  and 
sand.  Several  rivers  disembogue  upon  it,  the  principal  being,  to  the  westward 
of  Chagre,  that  of  Coclet  or  Code.  Chagre  is  9  leagues  to  the  westward  of 
Porto-Bello,  and  Coclet  27  leagues  from  the  same  port.  Between  these  two  ri- 
vers there  are  four  remarkable  mountains,  two  of  them  inland,  and  the  other  twoi 
on  the  coast ;  and  as  they  may  serve  for  recognizing' the  land  by,  we  give  their 
marks,  Sko. 

1.  Caladeros  Altos  of  Chagre.— These  are  two  mountains  situated  upon  the 
Rio  Chagre,  and  well  inland.  They  lie  E.  N-  E.  and  W.  S.  W.  and  appear  se- 
parate from  each  other  as  ydu  run  towards  Porto-Bello  ;  they  seem  only  as  one 
when  they  bear  S.  E. :  and  thus  apparently  united  they  have  the  same  bearing 
from  the  castle  of  San  Lorenzo,  at  Chagre.  Those  bound  to  the  river  Chag-re 
have  only  to  bring  the^e  two  mountains  in  ono,  and  then  steer  S.  E.  by  which 
they  will  find  the  port. 

2.  The  Piton  of  Miguel  de  la  Borda. — This  hill  is  so  named  from  its  resem- 
blance to  a  sugar-loaf;  it  is  inland,  and  about  9  leagues  to  the  S.  W.  by  S.  of 
Chagre.  When  this  mountain  bears  S.  \  W.  it  will  be  in  one  with  the  Rio  de 
Indios  (Indian  River,)  which  is  5  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Chagre. 

3.  The  Sierra  de  Miguel  de  ta  Borrfa.— This  is  of  a  middling  height,  and  rises 
upon  the  same  coast :  it  stretches  N.  and  S.,  and  is  13  leagues  to  the  westward 
of  Porto-Bello. 

4.  The  Sierra  of  Coclet,  which  is  rather  lower  than  the  former,  lies  to  the  S. 
S.  W.  of  the  river  Coclet. 

The  Cordillera  of  Veragua  and  Mountain  Range  of  Salamanca. — Besides  the 
four  mour.iains  above  described,  there  are  others  about  7  leagues  inland,  which 
are  well  knowB,  and  celebrated  for  their  great  elevation,  named  the  Cordillera  de 
Veragua,  which  commence  nearly  to  the  south  of  the  river  of  Coclet,  and  unite 
with  the  Serrania  of  Salamanca,  nearly  on  the  meridian  of  the  Bocas  del  Toro, 
(Bull's  Mouths,)  and  which  ends  a  little  to  the  westward  of  the  River  Matina. 
Both  are  so  elevated  as  to  be  seen  36  leagues  <»ut  at  sea  in  clear  weather.  At  the 
east  end  of  the  Mountains  of  Veragua  there  is  a  gap,  resembling  a  riding  saddle, 
and  which  is  called  the  Silla  (i^ddlo)  of  Veragua.  This  is  to  the  south  of  the 
river  Coclet ;  to  find  which  yAi  have  only  to  bring  the  Silla  to  bear  true  South, 
and  run  in  for  the  shore.  To  the  westward  of  the  Silla  there  is  a  Mount,  on  the 
very  top  of  the  Cordillera,  which  appears  like  a  house  or  castle  ;  and  which  is 
called  the  Castb  of  Choco.  Upon  the  western  part  of  the  same  mountain  may 
be  seen  a  remarkable  peak,  named  the  Pan  de  Swsrr^,  which  is  so  called  from  the 
yillaf^e  at  its  base.    Thip  may  serve  as  a  mark  for  fiqding  Mqtim, 


^  "*■ 


^'  ' 


I 


400 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


The  hill,  called  the  C>i8tle  of  Choco,  lies  S.  E.  from  th^  island  named  FMudt^ 
dt  Feragua,  (Shield  of  Veragiiii,)  su  that,  when  the  mountain  bears  in  this  direc- 
tion, ^|W  vk'ill  have  the  island  right  ahead.* 

l^h^Mta  del  Escud'j  is  low,  but  covered  with  cocoa  and  other  trees,  and  is  sur- 
rounded to  the  N.  E.  with  various  k^ys,  on  a  hard  red-coloured  bar.  These  keys 
are  also  shaded  with  trees,  and  to  the  east  of  them  a  reef  projects  about  half  a 
league,  and  the  sea  breaks  on  it.  All  the  island  and  keys  are  surrounded  by  a 
shoal  of  sand  and  gravel,  which  extends  out  about  5  miles :  but  there  are  5  fa- 
thoms on  it  very  near  land,  and  it  deepens  progressively  outward.  The  island  is 
about  S  leagues  from  the  main  land ;  and,  in  case  of  emergency,  water  may  be 
obtained  in  it  from  diOeVent  rills,  but  the  procuring  it  is  attended  with  much  la-> 
hour ;  fur  it  is  not  abundant,  and  is  at  somt  distance  above  the  beach.  On  tba 
l^outh  and  S.  W.  of  this  island  there  is  an  anchorage,  which  is  well  shelterjed 
from  the  breeze,  or  general  wind,  and  Norths.  On  the  sboal  to  the  east  tliere  is 
likjewise,  anchorage ;  but  it  is  not  so  commodious,  not  only  because  it  is  not  sbeU 
tfettd  from  the  breeze,  but,  also,  because  the  bottom  is  roi^^y,  and  apt  to  clifje 
the  cables.  ^ 

From  POINT  VALENCIA,  already  noticed,  follow  the  Jstemfy  and  Lagoon 
of  Chiriqui,  to  which  succeed  the  Admiralty  Bay  and  l8k$.  In  a  distance  of  IS 
leagues,  the  general  line  of  coast  tends  W.  N.  W.  i^  W.  to  J^wtte-Gonbt^ntn  the 
western  side  of  the  Boca  del  Drago,  the  wttsteni  mouth  of  Admirajlty  Bli|u 

You  may  enter  the  Lagoon  of  Chiriqui  by  the  channel  formed  b^  ^*^^  Y"^ 
Icncia,  and  the  eastern  keys  of  the  group,  where,  acc'irding  to  our  mforfliation, 
although  shallow,  there  is  as  much  depth  as  what  is/to  be  found  in  the  interior 
of  th^e  lagoon,  and  which  Is  sufficient  for  vessels  of  alt  burthens. 

The  entrance  to  Admiralty  Bay  is  by  the  mouth  or  channel  whicH  Point  Gor- 
da  forms  with  the  westernmost  key ;  and  in  this  mouth,  aad  also  ivithm  the  bay, 
it  appears  there  is  depth  for  any  class  of  vessels.  This  mouth  is  named  the 
Dragon's  Mouth  {Bocaikl  Drago,)  to  distinguish  it  fl^rn  another,  more  to  the 
east,  which  is  called  th();;^uli's  pouth,  (Boeo  del  TiA^tmd  by  wtiich  small  ves- 
sels only  can  enter.       ^'  *i  W:'  ' 

^yithin  both  bays  the  anchorage  is  well  sheltered,  and  as  seoire  es  in  the  best 
harbours;  but,  as  we  have  no  particular  description  of  them,  we  i  ball  tontent 
ourselves  witli  saying,  that,  to  entir  in  or  go  out  by  the  Dragon's  Morth,  you 
should  give  a  good  birth  to  the  west  coast,  or  that  of  Puuta  Gorda,  or  account 
of  a  vocky  reef  which  runs  out  from  it  to  mid-channel. 

From  Punta  Gorda  the  coast  tends  about  N.  N"  W.  true  81  leagues  to  Pxmta 
d$  Arenas ;  which  forms  the  south  side  of  the  harbour  of  S.Juande  Nicaragua. 

The  bearing::,  &cc.  of  intermediate  points,  between  Punta  Gorda  and  St.  Juan, 
are,  to  Carreta  Point  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  14  miles;  this  is  the  eastern  point  of  a 
bay  which  fulls  into  the  S.  W.  West,  and  N.  W>  thirteen  miles,  to  Blanca  or 
White  Point,  which  is  ma|irked  by  an  islet,  thence  the  coast  tends  N.  |  W.  twen- 
tv-six  miles,  to  the  Arenas  Poin|  of  Nicaragua. 

All  this  cou.st  is  clean,  am  the  water  deep,  and  nui:(||l|ous  rivers  disembogue 
mto  it,  the  (Principal  of  i«ll)>ch  ure  that  of  Matina  or  Port  Cartago,  and  that  of 
S^n  Juan  or  St.  John.  The  last  disnhar^  Its  waters  by  several  mouths,  of 
which  one  enters  thqi  very  harbour.  ^ 

SAN  JUAN  DE  NICARAGUA  -rTlie  harbour  of  San  Juan  is  formed  by  a 
low  island,  which  forms  a'bay  with  tbitf  coast,  to  which  it  sometimes ^oins  t\t  the 
eastern  end.  This  island,  in  n  stjUftircircuiar  form,  with  its  back  to  ine  north,  is 
half  a  league  long  from  east  to  west,  by  a  cajble  And  a  half  i<n  breadth.  Punta  de 
Arenas  is  its  western  point,  and  is  situated  in  11°  O'  N«  At  tiie  east  end  the  is- 
land is  nearly  united  to  the  n^ain  land.  The  bajMFithin  the  Island  i|i^l|»acious, 
but  is  incommoded  by  a  great  shelf  on  the  east  ani  south,  W^r  which  tibere  is 
little  water:  and  this  shelif reduces  the  extent  of  the  anchorage  to  Ave  cables* 
length  from  north  to  so^th,  and  ih  from  east  to  west. 

To  take  the  harbour,  you  have  only  to  coast  Point  Areoas  at|i  hal£|  ^ole,  0|r 


jiiiH'     >i 


mm: 


*  Thel«|ieB^  ^o3w  sipe  doubt  as  (6  the  beari|ig«it«|dJitti 


Wi 


oald'be  used  wjth  eaal 


ifion. 


•%-f 


f* 


1^ 


bLUiNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


401 


cable  and  a  halfs  length  from  it,  according  to  the  water  your  vessel  dravra,  and 
proceeding  inwanl  toward  tlu"  east,  in  order  to  take  the  round  of  the  point.  At 
a  cable's  length  from  the  siinri!  where  yoii  ought  to  anchor,  there  are  5  fathomi 
of  water.  The  lc:id  is  the  only  and  best  guide  into  the  harbour.  Vessels  in  it  are 
Svicurely  sheltered,  tht-e  being  a  swell  with  winds  from  the  north  to  the  west  only ; 
bat  these  winds  are  common  on  this  coast,  from  September  to  the  end  of  Janu- 
ary or  beginning  of  February. 

The  mouth  of  the  River  of  SanJuaUt  is  exactly  on  the  meridian  of,  or  true 
south  from,  Punta  Arenas,  distant  rather  more  than  a  mile.  Boats  ascend  hence 
into  the  Lake  of  Nicaragua.  At  a  little  to  the  east  of  Punta  Arenas,  upon  the 
island,  are  some  pits  or  wells,  where  fresh  water  may  bo  obtained.  It  may,  also, 
be  procured  in  the  river. 

The  river  of  San  Juan  falls  by  four  mouths  or  channels  into  the  sea.  Its  cur- 
rent is  so  strong,  that  the  flat-bottomed  boats  and  canoes  which  navigate  U,  are 
about  nine  days  in  ascending,  and  but  thirty-six  hours  in  descending,  to  and  itrna 
the  lake ;  boats  are  obliged  to  unload  at  the  Falls,  near  which  is  situated  ttie 
Castle  of  San  Juan,  built  on  a  hill,  and  capable  of  defending  with  a  few  men,  this 
entrance  to  the  lake.  It  was  taken  by  the  F^nglish,  under  Nelson  and  Col.  Des- 
pard,  after  a  fortnight's  siege,  and  although  a  Gibralter  in  miniature,  it  has  never 
been  garrisoned.  Here  nre  three  rapids  besides  the  Falls,  which  render  the 
navigation  ditficult;  and  the  quick-sands,  which  extend  nearly  one  half  the  length 
of  the  river  (from  the  mouth  of  the  river  San  Carlos,  to  the  mouth  of  the  San 
Juan,)  will  prevent  the  her''  of  this  river  being  used  when  this  country  shall  take 
her  rank  among  civilized  nations.  At  the  entrance  of  the  Lake  of  Nicaragua^'a 
fort  stands  in  ruins,  showing,  at  on«e,  what  this  country  has  been  under  a  regu- 
lar government.  This  Lake,  which  is  more  than  two  hundred  miles  in  circum- 
ference, and  contributes  greatly  to  the  beauty  of  the  country,  approaches  to  with- 
in sixteen  miles  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  promises  at  some  future  time,  to  be 
the  channel  of  communication  between  these  two  seas— Granada  is  the  port  of 
entry,  and  principal  place  on  the  Lake  ;  is,  situated  on  the  N.  W.  side  about  one 
mile  from  the  shore,  near  which  this  Lake  is  connected  to  that  of  Marraguai 
(called  Lake  of  Leon  in  most  maps,)  by  a  small  stream. 


'  ' ' ' ' 


.    :« 


■.1«     .,      ,        .J 


I't-  u ; 


U   fr 


:  s     '.:    t^i 


,»•!.■.  ■   ■I'.:. 


;  1 


51 


402  BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT.  ^ 


llllH   ,. 


■  .  :'r 


,■1  .     •/,  ■•  r  -    ;•  ■ 


^"    .    :  ■  •! 


OHAP.  ZZ. 


■">#•'" 


The  Islands  and  Shoals  hetween  JAMAICA  and  NICARAGUA. 


PEDRO  SHOALS.— Of  the  shoals  which  are  to  be  described  in  the  present 
chapter,  the  flrst,  in  order  from  the  north,  are  the  Pedro  Shoals,  which  lie  to  the 
'S.  W.  of  Jamaica,  on  an  extensive  banl<,  forty  leagues  in  length  from  east  to 
yte-jU  In  the  Spanish  charts  this  bank  appears  under  the  name  of  Placer  dt  la 
'Bivora,  or  the  Serpent's  Shoal.  The  dangers  which  exist  upon  it  have  not  yet 
been  regularly  surveyed,  and  the  representation  of  them  in  the  charts  is  not  to 
be  relied  on.  The  N.  E.  extremity  is  distinguished  by  a  rock  above  water, 
named  Portland  Rock,  and  to  the  westward  of  this  are  numerous  rocks  and  keys. 
On  or  near  the  N.  W.  end  there  is  also  supposed  to  be  a  rock,  the  Ctucabel  or 
Raitle»rtake,  but  its  situation  is  doubtful. 

The  Portland  Rock  lies  at  the  distance  of  ten  leagues,  nearly  south,  from 
Portland,  in  Jamaica.  It  is  a  single  key,  a  little  higher  than  Drunkenman's  Key, 
ofif  Port  Royal,  and  has  small  bushes  on  it.  From  this  rock  the  Pedro  Shoals 
extend  to  the  westward.  It  bears  from  Portland  Point  S.  2*^  E.  distant  twenty- 
nine  or  thirty  miles. 

Of  the  Cascabel  or  Rattlesnake,  which  is  supposed  to  distinguish  the  N.  W. 
end  of  the  Pedro  Bank,  the  Derrottro snys,  "This  key  has  been  introduced  from 
very  ancient  notices,  and  we  have  even  reason  to  suspect  that  it  does  not  exist." 
BAXO  ISUEVO,  or  NEW  SHOAL,  the  New  Boar  of  the  old  charts,  was 
examined  by  the  Spanish  brigantines  Empresa  and  Alerta,  in  1804,  and  the  posi- 
tion of  n  sandy  key  upon  it  has,  consequently,  been  given;  this  is,  latitude  15° 
52'  20",  longitude  78°  37'  58".  The  extent  of  the  shoal,  according  to  the  Span- 
ish officers,  is  about  seven  miles  from  north  to  south,  and  fourteen  miles  from 
east  to  west.  Ail  the  eastern  part  is  a  reef,  very  steep-to ;  but,  on  the  west,  the 
depth  diminishes  gradually.  At  a  mile  and  a  half  from  th  >■  northern  extremity, 
is  the  sandy  key  above  mentioned.  You  may  anchor  to  ihe  W.  N.  W.  of  this 
key,  at  the  distance  of  three  or  four  miles ;  but  take  care  not  to  get  into  less 
than  10  fathoms  of  water;  for,  at  two  miles  and  a  half  W.  N.  W.  frora  the  key, 
there  is  a  rock,  having  only  7  feet  over  it ;  atid  at  S.  by  E.  fron*.  it,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  a  mile,  there  is  another,  with  only  4  feet  of  water.  Both  rocks  stand 
in  5  fathoms  of  water :  they  are  very  steep,  and  not  larger  than  a  boat. 

The  Baxn  del  Comboy,  represented  in  some  charts  us  existing  about  thirteen 
leagues  to  the  E.  S.  E.  from  tlie  Baxo  Nuevo,  has  been  particularly  searched  for, 
hut  it  could  not  be  found. 

SERRANILLA. — This  shoal,  with  its  keys,  appears  on  the  old  charts  like  a 
picture  of  fears  and  apprehensions,  being  magnified  into  ten  times  its  real  extent. 
It  has,  however,  lieen  examined  by  the  Spanish  surv«'yors,  who  place  the  east 
md  in  15°  45'  20"  N.  and  79°  48'  20"  W.  The  shoal  and  keys  thence  extend 
n^.arly  west,  fifteen  miles.  Further  particul<irs  are  unknown,  exc^pling  that 
lliere  is  an  extensive  bank  of  soundings  to  the  west,  having  from  7  to  18  fathoms. 
A  rock  above  water,  >\ith  a  Burrounding  bank  of  9  to  12  fathoms,  is  represented 
<jn  some  charts  w  latitude  15°  40',  and  longitude  79°  20',  while  the  Serranilla  is 
exhibitef*.  in  the  sa.Tie  charts  at  nearly  a  degree  more  to  the  W.  N.  W.  There 
can,  however,  be  scarcely  a  doubt  that  these  are  one  and  the  same. 

Another  Shoal  h  exhibited  in  the  same  charts,  on  the  parallel  of  15°,  at  two 
degrees  to  the  east  of  Cape  Gracios  a  Dioa.    In  the  Spanish  chart  it  is  laid  down, 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


403 


at  therein  slatetl,  from  an  English  chart  of  1780,  and  we  know  of  no  other  au- 
thority.   The  shoalest  p.irt,  having  3  fathoma  ov«;r  it,  appoara  in  long.  80°  27'. 

SERRANA. — Th«  Serrana  Bank,  visitod  hy  the  Spanish  ollirers  in  1804,  is 
reprviieiitcd  as  six  leagues  in  length  from  east  to  west,  and  three  leagues  from 
north  to  south,  with  two  islets,  one  on  the  nortli,  and  the  other  on  the  south  side. 
Willi  the  particulars  of  these  we  are  unac«|uainted,  and  can  a«ld  only  that  the 
north  side  is  given  in  lat.  IP  20'  46",  the  south  side  in  Vl^  18'  7",  the  cast  end 
in  long.  80°  s?  3',  and  the  weat  end  in  80°  21'  04". 

Half  a  degree  to  the  west  of  the  Serrana  is  the  (Inita  Sueno  or  Guana  Retf, 
of  which  we  havj  no  (tther  description  tlian  that  on  the  charts.  Itappcara  to  bo 
very  dangerous,  witii  two  fathoms  close  to  its  western  edge,  and  to  extend  S.  S. 
E.  and  N.  N.  VV.  fouiteen  lengues. 

ISLAiNOS  of  PROVIUKNCK  and  CATALINA— The  Island  of  Provi- 
dence is  situated  in  lit.  l;)^  hili'.  and  in  or  near  the  longitude  of  80°  30'.  It  is 
six  miles  long  from  nortli  to  south,  and  three  miles  in  hreadtli.  Catalina  is  an 
isle  at  the  north  end  of  Providence,  two  miles  from  north  to  south,  and  one 
broad,  and  is  divided  from  tlie  larger  iMlund  by  a  very  narrow  channel,  over 
which  a  bridge  formerly  existed.  These  isles  are  nearly  surrounded  by  danger- 
ous reefs,  of  which  thut  to  the,  N.  E.  extends  about  two  leagues  out,  in  that  di- 
rection. These  reefs  are  detached  from  the  shore,  so  that  there  is  n  channel 
within  them,  all  round,  which  may  be  considered  as  n  harbour.  A  breai(  in  the 
reef,  on  the  western  side,  admits  vessels  to  an  anciiorago  in  4,  3,  and  5  fathoms. 

In  proportion  to  its  size.  Providence  may  be  considered  as  one  of  the  best 
islands  in  the  West-Indies,  both  on  account  of !' ,  fruilfulness,  and  the  salubrity 
of  its  air  ;  to  which  may  he  added  the  facility  of  fortifying  its  shores. 

The  Dtrrottro  states  that  Providence  and  Catalina  may  be  considered  as  one 
island:  that  the  last  is  remarkably  rocky,  its  surface  being  almost  covered  with 
stones.  It  rises  into  a  mountain,  full  of  inequalities,  and  is  too  sterile  to  be  of 
any  value.  Providence  rises  gradually  from  the  sea  to  an  amphitheatre,  formed 
by  four  hills,  crowned  by  a  high  mountain.  On  the  cusp  or  head  of  the  moun- 
tain is  a  spring,  which  supplies  four  rivulets,  and  these,  in  different  directions, 
run  down  to  the  sea.  The  water  is  light  and  excellent.  The  rivulet  which  runs 
down  to  thb  western  shore  is  the  most  abundant,  and  it  falls  into  a  cove  called 
Ensenada  de  Ag^ua  Duke,  or  Freshwater  Bay.  The  island,  in  clear  weather, 
may  be  seen  at  ten  or  twelve  leagues  oif ;  but  vessels,  in  passing,  should  not  ap- 
proach nearer  than  a  league ;  and,  on  the  N.  E.  not  nearer  than  two  leagues. 
The  entrance  to  the  port  is  on  the  N.  W.  and  here  it  is  requisite  to  have  a  pilot. 

RONCADOR.— The  keys  and  reef  bearing  this  name  were  represented  by 
the  Spanish  surveyors,  1804,  in  13°  33'  N.  and  80°  0'  W.  The  north  end  of  the 
reef,  according  to  the  Derrotero,  is  in  13^  .15'  7"  N.  and  80°  3'  VV.  In  the  Span- 
ish chart  of  1805,  it  was  represented  18'  more  to  the  eastward;  but,  from  ob- 
servations made  in  1810,  in  the  Sheerwater,  sloop  of  war,  by  Mr.  Kicholls,  the 
master,  it  appeared  that  the  key,  on  the  west  end  of  the  reef,  which  is  6  feet 
above  water,  lay  in  13°  33'  N.  and  80^  7'  VV.  and  the  south  end  of  the  reef  in 
l3P  28i'  N.  and  80°  4'  W.  There  were  two  chronometers  on  board  the  Sheer- 
water,  but  it  is  said  that  neither  could  be  depended  on  :  this  point,  therefore,  re- 
quires farther  examination. 

St.  ANDRE'S  or  St.  ANDREW'S  ISLAND.— This  island  V,  represented 
by  the  Spanish  officers  as  lying  between  the  parallels  of  \2P  27'  and  \2P  33'  N. 
in  longitude  80°  57'.  Its  true  bearing  from  Providence  Isle,  as  given  in  the  Der- 
rotero, is  S.  30°  W.  and  the  distance  eighteen  leagues.  On  the  S.  VV.  side  of  the 
island,  it  has  been  stated  that  there  is  good  anchorage,  in  sandy  ground.  At  a 
short  distance  from  shore  are  6  fathoms  of  water;  and,  farther  off,  from  12  to 
15  fathoms.  You  may,  therefore,  come  to  an  anchor  in  what  water  you  please. 
Take  care,  on  sailing  frcm  the  island,  not  to  be  carried  by  the  current  to  leeward. 

The  Deirotero  states  that  the  coasts  of  St.  Andrew's  are  generally  of  reck, 
with  the  exception  of  the  points  on  the  west ;  and  that  the  bank  on  the  west 
aide  is  so  steep,  that,  at  half  a  mile  from  it,  the  bottom  is  not  to  be  found.    The- 
eastern  coast  is  bordered  by  a  reef,  which  renders  it  almost  inaccessible,  and 
which,  in  some  places,  projects  out  more  than  a  mile.    St.  Andrew's  is  7  miles 


404 


BI.UiNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


in  extent  from  north  to  nouth,  and  about  two  from  east  to  ivcsi.  The  spot  on 
which  v«88cla  anchor  is  on  tlm  westfrn  side,  near  i\n'  pliice  wh«T('!  thi^re  are  two 
mountains  pre-eminpnt  over  th«  rest  of  the  ishuid,  u  hich  is,  gKnorally,  hilly, 
without  precipices,  .nil  the  declivities  being  very  gradual.  The  mountains  may 
be  seen,  in  clear  weather,  at  ten  or  twelve  leagues  off. 

To  make  this  island  no  pilot  is  r 'quired;  for,  by  shunning  the  eastern  roast, 
nearer  to  which  you  should  never  pass  than  three  or  four  miles,  )'ou  may  freely 
direct  yourself  to  any  part  of  the  western  shore ;  but,  if  you  intend  to  anchor, 
place  your  prow  towanis  the  south  part  of  the  island,  without  any  fear  of  ap- 
proaching it  within  half  n  cable's  length,  if  required;  and  so  soon  ns  you  see 
the  bay,  named  /f  e«t  Hay,  which  is  formed  by  the  westernmost  point  of  the  isl- 
and, steer  towards  it,  and  anchor  in  10  fathoms,  or  less,  on  sand.  The  10  fa- 
thoms arc  found  at  only  a  cable  and  a  half's  length  from  the  land.  This  anchor- 
age is  well  sheltered  from  the  breezes ;  but,  in  tlie  time  of  the  norths,  it  is  abso- 
lutely necessary  to  be  ready  to  make  sail  the  moment  there  is  the  least  appear- 
ance of  a  gale. 

Mr.  Weutherhcad,  a  medical  onicer,  attached  to  the  corps  of  General  Macgre- 
gor,  in  1810,  in  his  account  of  the  expedition  against  the  Isthmus  of  Darien, 
(London,  1821)  has  described  the  Island  of  St.  Andrew.  This  gentleman  de- 
scribes it  as  having,  on  the  west  side,  a  fine  harbour  called  the  Cove,  where  large 
vessels  may  anchor  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  shore  :  the  water  is  here  ao 
deep  that  the  Monarch,  a  ship  of  600  toas,  anchored  with  a  cable  astern,  within 
a  few  yards  of  the  shore. 

Besides  the  ancliorage  on  the  S.  W.  side,  there  U  a  break  in  the  reef  on  the 
east,  within  which  is  a  good  roadstead  in  Cuco-Plum-Tret  Bay.  The  entrance 
is  between  two  small  islets  or  keys.  The  depth  on  the  bar  is  iiJi  fathomii.  This 
is  an  excellent  retreat  for  vessels  of  less  than  200  tons.  Up  tlie  harbour,  towards 
the  north  end,  there  is  good  shelter,  and  plenty  of  wood  and  water  may  be  ob- 
tained. 

The  E.  S.  E.  KEYS.— Nearly  E.  by  S.  six  leagues  from  the  south  end  of  St. 
Andrew's,  are  three  keys,  called  the  E.  S.  E.  Keys.  They  «ire  surrounded  by  a 
reef  and  shallow  bank ;  and  although  there  is  anchorage  on  it  for  small  vessels, 
it  is  not  safe  to  attempt  it  without  a  pilot.  The  keys  have  a  reef  of  loose  stones 
to  the  north  and  N.  N.  E.  of  them,  which  extends  seven  miles  out,  as  shown  by 
th«  narrative  of  Don  Miguel  Patino,  commander  of  a  Spanish  gun-boat,  which 
was  sent  to  exphn-e  the  Mosquito  Coast  in  1804.  He  says,  "when  navigating  iri 
lat.  12°  35'  N.  and  long.  4°  55'  W.  of  Carthagena,  at  half-past  eight,  A.  M.  bodi 
the  day  and  the  water  being  clear,  the  rudder  of  the  gun-boat,  which  drew  six 
feet  three  inches,  of  Burgos  measure,  guve  a  leap  of  about  a  foot,  without  our 
haviiig  felt  any  shock  or  rub  against  any  part  of  the  hull.  The  vessel  was  going 
at  the  rate  of  six  knots,  and  neither  the  man  at  the  mast-head,  nor  those  who 
were  upon  the  deck,  saw  any  spot,  breaker,  or  other  appearanee  of  a  shoal;  nor 
could  1  make  any  eKamination  of  the  place,  as  it  was  not  possible  to  do  it  in  the 
little  canoe,  which  was  the  only  thing  of  the  boat-kind  that  we  had  on  board. 
At  9h.  we  saw  from  the  mast-head  the  E.  B.  E.  Keys ;  and,  at  1(?,  the  Island  of 
St.  Andrew's  i^ppenred,  though  indistinctly." 

The  S.  S.  W.  KEYS,  or  Keys  of  Albuquerque,  are  three  islets,  which  afford 
good  anchoring-ground.  There  is  nt)thing  to  fear  livre ;  the  water  about  them  is 
deep  and  clear,  and  every  thing  may  be  s<!en.  There  are  a  few  rocks  above  wa- 
ter, close  by  the  keys,  but  they  will  be  avoided  by  keeping  the  Island  of  St.  An- 
drew N.  by  VV.  until  the  S.  S.  W.  Keys  bear  S.  W.  by  S.  whence  you  may  pro- 
ceed as  convenient. 


BLUM  9    AMRUU  AN    C().\?T    I'lLOl. 


405 


•fi' 


MOSQUITIA,  or  the  IMOSQUITO  SHORE,  beiwccn  Cai-e  Hondu- 

KAS  and  Nicaragua. 


The  Coast  between  Ni«;aragua  iml  Cape  Honduras,  as  described  in  the 

Derrotero,  &£C. 

From  the  Harbour  of  Snn  Juan  de  Nlrarngua,  the  coMt  tends  (o  the  north,  a 
little  westerij',  80  leagui'S,  to  Cape  Gracion  n  Dios,  and  h  that  properly  termed 
the  Mosquito  Shore.  It  is  all  low  land,  intersected  hy  many  rivers  and  lagoons  : 
a  bank  of  soundings  extends  all  along  it,  and  out  to  the  eastward  to  the  distance 
of  10  leagues:  to  the  N.  K.  considerably  more ;  as  it  is  here  supposed  to  include 
the  Seranillaand  other  shoals.  Upon  the  bank  are  many  keys  and  reefs,  imper- 
fectly known,  and,  therefore,  the  more  dangerous  to  strangers. 

Punta  Gorda  lies  N.  W.  by  N.  lOi  leagues,  from  Puntsi  Arenas  of  Nicaragua. 
The  coast  between  forms  an  extensive  bay,  called  the  Gulf  of  Mntinn.  About 
PUnta  Gdrda,  and  near  it,  are  various  islets.  All  this  coast  is  so  clean  and  regu- 
lar, that  you  may  safely  run  along  it,  by  the  use  of  the  lead  only. 

From  Punta  Gorda  the  coast  tends  to  tlie  N.  E.  a  league  and  a  half,  to  Punta 
Monos  (Monkey's  Point.)  On  the  S.  E.  of  this  point  are  a  number  of  clean 
keys,  between  which  and  the  coast  there  is  anchorage  in  three  fathoms  of  water. 
'to  this  anchorage  you  should  enter  by  the  south  of  the  islets.  To  the  north  of 
these  islets  are  others,  which  rise  upon  a  shoal  and  a  reef,  called  the  Pigeons,  and 
which  extend  from  north  to  south  about  twelve  miles.  To  the  eastward  of 
all  these,  and  without  the  shoal,  is  a  key,  which,  with  the  Pigeons,  forms  a  chan- 
nel :  but  it  is  best  to  avoid  it,  by  going  outside,  as  you  will  thus  clear  the  Pigeons' 
Reef,  which  extends  from  the  north  part  of  the  keys  about  two  miles. 

BLUEFIELD'S  LAGOON.— Abreast  of  the  Pigeons,  upon  the  coast,  is  the 
southern  point  of  Bluefield^a  Lagoon,  a  gulf  extending  inland  about  ten  miles,  and 
receiving,  In  its  northern  part,  a  considerable  river,  of  the  same  name,  by  several 
outlets.  From  the  southern  point  of  the  Lagoon  to  the  northern  one,  called  Blue- 
field's  Point,  the  distance  is  thirteen  miles.  Nearly  on  the  line,  between  the  two 
points,  is  a  key  tending  N.  N.  E.  eleven  miles  in  length,  and  which  forms  two 
channels  between  the  points :  of  these  the  northern  is  the  principal  one  ;  and  it 
liQS,  in  the  season  of  the  breezes,  about  two  fathoms  of  water ;  but  it  then  has  a 
vertical  fidl  of  about  three  feet.  In  the  rainy  season,  it  has  constantly  more  than 
two  fathoms. 

Having  ^passed  the  Bar  of  Bluefields,  you  may  find  within  the  lagoon,  5  or  6  fa- 
thoms of  Water,  upon  clay.  The  anchorage  is  near  the  town,  upon  the  eastern 
side.  To  enter  the  lagoon,  you  have  only  to  keep  along  Bluefield's  Point,  at  the 
distance  of  a  stone's  throw.  The  shore  here  is  very  clean,  and  the  point  may  be 
knov^rn  from  its  being  the  highest  land  on  this  coast.  When  within,  continue  on 
near  the  north  shore,  the  southern  being  very  foul,  and  requiring  a  wide  birth. 
It  is,  also,  indispensably  necessary,  on  entering  this  place,  to  have  the  anchor^ 
ready  to  let  go,  at  the  instant  you  find  that  a  strong  current  is  setting  against  ytfu. 

PEARL  LAGOON — From  Bluefield's  Point  the  coast  tends  north,  with  some 
incRttaliih  to  the  west,  Iwfenty-six  miles,  t6  thfc  enttaiice  of  the  Pearl  tago&n. 


408 


BLLXT'«^    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


OITthis  coast  h  a.  key,  ii'imed  the  Cayman,  which  lies  at  the  distance  of  neTen 
miles  from  Blucfield's  Point,  and  ruther  more  than  half  a  league  from  the  nearest 
coast.  A  reef  extends  from  the  north  part  of  the  key  to  the  distance  of  four 
miles  ;  but  as  every  one  ought  to  pass  to  the  east  of  it:  there  can  be  no  danger 
if  the  lead  be  kept  guing. 

The  entr.mce  of  Pearl  Ligoon  has  deeper  water  than  that  of  Bluefield's,  and 
some  vessels  anchor  outside  of  it,  under  shelter  of  the  north  coast,  which  sweeps 
eleven  m'lcs  to  the  N.  E.  to  Point  Loro.  To  the  E.  by  S.  from  this  entrance, 
and  well  out  from  the  coast,  lies  the  Pit  Key,  which  is  seven  leagues  from  it: 
and,  at  twelve  miles  N.  E.  by  E.  from  the  Pit  Key,  is  Seal  Key  (Lubo  Marino.) 
The  Corn  Islands  (Cayos  Mangles)  lie  without  the  latter,  at  about  twelve  miles  to 
the  eastward. 

The  Pit  and  Sefil  Keys  are  rather  foul,  and  it  is  not  safe  to  approach  them 
nearer  than  half  a  mile.  They  arc  the  mors  dangerous,  as  they  lie  in  15  fathoms 
of  water,  and  have  no  shoal  water  near  them  :  a  proximity  toward  them  cannot, 
therefore,  be  ascertained  by  the  lead  in  the  night,  or  thick  weather.  The  channels 
they  form  with  the  Corn  Islands  and  the  coast  are  free  and  clean. 

The  CORN  ISLANDS  are  two  islands,  which  bear  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W. 
from  each  other,  and  are  six  ..liles  asunder.  The  southrjrn,  which  is  the  largest, 
is  two  long  miles  from  north  to  soutli,  and  two  miles  from  east  to  west,  in  ex- 
tent. The  northern  is  one  and  a  half  mile  from  N.  W.  to  S.  E.  and  from  east 
to  west,  where  broadest,  is  scarcely  a  mile.  They  are  fourteen  miles  distant 
from  Bluefield's  Point.  The  greater  isle  has  three  small  hills  on  it :  the  central 
one  of  which  is  the  highest,  and  may  be  seen  six  or  seven  leagues  off.  Its  coasts 
are  foul,  with  a  reef,  which  strtttches  out  a  mile  from  them ;  but  the  reef  has 
some  clear  places,  by  which  you  may  approach  the  coast,  and  which  serve  for 
anchorages.  Of  the  latter,  the  two  principal  ones  are  on  the  west  coast  of  the 
island.  The  first,  or  westernmost,  lies  east  and  west  with  the  central  hill;  and 
the  second  is  in  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  island,  separated  from  the  former  by  a 
reef,  which  extends  along  to  the  S.  W.  The  first  anchorage,  named  the  Brig- 
antine''3,  U  the  most  frequented  ;  and,  to  direct  yourself  to  it,  you  must  not  ap- 
proach nearer  the  coast  than  two  miles ;  or,  what  is  the  same,  you  must  not  get 
into  less  than  11  fathoms  of  water,  until  the  middle  hill  bears  about  East,  when 
you  may  steer  that  course  towards  the  shore,  and  anchor  iu  the  depth  most  con- 
venient, on  sand ;  knowing  that  you  will  have  5  fathoms,  at  about  two  cables' 
length  from  the  beach.  In  the  soi^thernmost  part  of  the  S.  W.  anchorage  there 
are  three  wells,  holes,  or  pits,  of  good  water  :  this  anchorage  of  the  Brigantine, 
which  we  have  described,  is  sheltered  from  all  winds,  from  north  to  south,  round 
by  east ;  but,  in  the  season  of  the  norths,  you  ought  to  be  extremely  vigilant  lest 
a  gale  should  catch  you  in  the  anchorage.  These  islands  afford  plenty  of  good 
fresh  watfir,  which  may  be  obtained  by  digging  small  holes  in  the  sand. 

The  Little  Corn  Island  is  very  clean  on  its  west  side,  and  you  may  sail  along 
it,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile,  without  any  care,  excepting  attention  to  the 
lead ;  but,  from  its  S.  }i.  point  to  the  N.  W.  one,  it  sends  out  a  reef,  which  ex- 
tends out  about  a  mile  and  a  half,  at  the  end  »f  which  there  are  4  fathoms  of 
water.  On  the  west  coast,  you  may  let  go  an  anchor,  in  shelter  from  the  breezes, 
an  5  fathoms  of  water,  which  you  will  find  at  half  a  mile  from  the  beach. 

To  the  south  of  the  Great  Corn  Island,  at  the  distance  of  about  seven  miles, 
there  is  a  rock,  which  shows  above  water,  and  the  utmost  caution  should  be  used 
on  account  of  it;  for  we  neither  believe  that  its  situation  is  correctly  known,  or 
that,  even  if  it  were,  it  would  cease  to  be  dangerous  at  night,  or  in  obscure 
weather. 

From  Point  Loro,  already  noticed,  the  coast  tends  about  uorth,  22  miles,  to 
Rio  Grande,  or  Great  River.  This  piece  of  coast  is  very  foul,  with  a  reef,  which 
stretches  from  it  about  six  miles.  On  the  southern  edge  of  the  reef,  and  east 
from  Point  Loro,  there  are  two  keys,  of  which  the  eastern  one  is  named  Maroon: 
to  the  north,  a  little  westerly,  from  this  key,  at  the  distance  of  nine  miles,  there 
is  another,  which  is  outside  the  reef.  Without  these  two  keys  there  are  others, 
of  which  the  southernmost  are  called  the  Pearls ;  to  these  follow  three,  named 
The  King'a  Keys,  which  lie  east  and  west  with  the  mouth  of  Great  River,  and  at 


.^MAtaMhi 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


407 


I  distance  of  neren 
le  from  the  nearest 
le  distance  of  four 
;:  can  be  no  danger 

of  Bluefield's,  and 
oast,  wiiich  sweeps 
I'om  this  entrance, 
>n  leagues  from  it: 
ey  (Lubo  Marino.) 
>out  twelve  miles  to 

to  approach  them 
;y  lie  in  15  fathoms 
•vard  them  cannot, 
:her.  The  channels 
tan. 

.  E.  and  S.  S.  W. 
'hich  is  the  largest, 
sast  to  west,  in  ex- 
.  E.  and  from  east 
teen  miles  distant 
on  it :  the  central 
;ues  off.  Its  coasts 
1 ;  but  the  reef  has 
id  which  serve  for 
west  coast  of  the 
e  central  hill ;  and 
,  the  former  by  a 
named  the  Brig- 
yon  must  not  ap- 
I  you  must  not  get 
about  East,  when 
depth  most  con- 
about  two  cables' 
anchorage  there 
of  the  Brigantine, 
1  to  south,  round 
mely  vigilant  lest 
plenty  of  good 
le  sand, 
may  sail  along 
attention  to  the 
reef,  which  ex- 
Te  4  fathoms  of 
'om  the  breezes, 
e  beach, 
out  seven  miles, 
should  be  used 
ectiy  known,  or 
or  in  obscure 

|th,  22  miles,  to 

th  a  reef,  which 

|e  reef,  and  east 

lamed  Maroon : 

Ine  miles,  there 

|iere  are  others, 

three,  named 

It  River,  and  at 


about  19  miles  from  it.  Finally,  to  these  follow  the  Mosqtdto,  Man  of  H'ar,  and 
Seal  Keys  ;  the  last  being  to  the  westward  of  the  Man  of  War  Keys.  The  west- 
ernmost of  the  Man  of  War  Keys  is  about  15  miles  to  the  norlh-tastward  of 
Great  River.  Between  all  these  keys  there  are  good  channels,  of  from  6  to  10 
fathoms,  on  clean  clay ;  but,  to  take  them,  it  is  cesRary  to  have  a  pilot,  and,  if 
you  have  not  one,  to  go  outside  the  whole  of  :  om.  To  enter  the  anchorage  at 
Great  River,  you  ought  to  pass  between  the  Seal  keys  and  the  coast ;  in  which 
channel,  and  until  you  arrive  at  Great  River,  you  have  nothing  to  fear,  if  you 
are  careful  with  the  lead. 

To  the  N.  by  W.  from  Great  River,  at  the  distance  of  11  miles,  there  is  ano- 
ther river,  named  Amilca,  or  Littlt  Snook  Creek,  from  which,  in  the  same  direc- 
tion, and  at  the  distance  of  nine  miles,  is  the  Black  Rock  River,  or  Great  Snook 
Creek:  from  this  the  coast  continues  nearly  North,  11  mih'S,  to  the  River  Ton- 
gula,  in  front  of  the  mouth  of  which,  and  to  about  five  miles  to  the  east  of  it, 
there  are  some  rocky  shoals,  (Fores Reef,)  which  are  the  only  dangers  along  the 
vrhole  coast  comprised  between  this  river  and  Great  River. 

From  the  River  Tongula,  the  coast  tends  about  N.  by  W.  17  miles,  to  the  River 
Wava ;  whence  the  coast  continues  to  the  north,  nine  miles  more,  to  Bragman^a 
River ;  and  from  thence  the  coa^t  sweeps  to  the  N.  E.  eight  miles,  to  Bragman's 
Point:  this  last  piece  of  coast,  which  is  named  the  Barrancas,  or  Braginan's  Bluff, 
forms  a  bay  sheltered  from  norths  and  westerly  winds,  and  in  it  you  may  anchor 
in  any  depth  you  choose;  understanding  that,  at  two  miles  from  land,  you  will 
have  4j  fathoms,  upon  coarse  gray  and  shelly  sand.  To  land  on  this  shore  re- 
quires great  caution  ;  for  there  is  a  bay,  before  you  arrive  at  it,  on  which,  with  the 
least  of  the  breeze,  the  sea  breaks  with  great  force. 

From  Bragman's  Bluff  the  coast  tends  about  N.  N.  W.  six  miles,  to  the  River 
Tupapi,  or  Housetana,  which  is  known  by  a  town  that  lies  about  three-quarters 
of  a  league  from  the  beach,  and-which  can  be  Avell  seen  from  the  sea,  the  groimd 
being  plain  and  bare.  From  Tupapi  the  coast  tends  about  N.  by  E.  i  E.  20  miles, 
to  the  Governor's  Point ;  which  is  known  by  being  the  one  that  extends  farthest 
to  the  east  on  all  this  coast,  and  being  very  thickly  covered  with  wood.  From 
this  point  the  coast  tends  to  the  N.  N.  W.  10  miles,  to  the  mouth  of  Sandy  Bay, 
in  which  there  is  so  little  water,  that,  in  the  time  of  the  breezes,  launches  pass  with 
difficulty;  but,  within,  the  bay  is  deep  and  spacious. 

From  Sandy  Bay  the  coast  tends  to  the  north,  12  miles,  to  the  River  Gitanason, 
or  Sintipoco;  and  thence  to  the  Bay  of  Gracios  a  Dios,  is  13  miles,  in  the  same 
direction. 

BAY  OF  GRACIOS  a  DIOS— The  Bay  of  Gracios  a  Dios  is  formed  by  a 
tongue  of  land,  which  stretches  out  to  the  east,  more  than  four  miles,  and  which 
affords  a  good  roadstead  during  winds  from  S.  S.  W.  round  by  north  to  S.  S.  E. 
The  easternmost  and  southernmost  point  of  the  tongue  of  land,  is  that  w  hich  is 
named  Cape  Gracios  a  Dios ;  and  from  it,  to  the  south,  ihere  are  various  islets,  of 
which  the  last  is  named  San  Pio,  and  the  south  point  of  it,  called  Sandy  Point, 
is  also  the  east  point  of  the  bay. 

The  depth  in  the  bay  is  from  22  feet,  which  are  found  at  the  entrance,  to  17, 
which  are  gained  well  within  it ;  and,  in  all  parts  of  it,  you  will  find  a  loose  slimy 
clay,  and  clean  bottom.  To  anchor  in  this  bay,  if  you  come  from  the  North  and 
West,  you  have  only  to  pass  Key  San  Pio,  and  make  afterwards  for  the  bay,  and 
anchor  in  the  number  of  feet  suitable  to  the  vessel's  draught  of  water ;  for  all  of 
which  you  have  only  to  attend  to  lii;  lead.  The  only  thing  which  demands  a  lit- 
tle attention  is,  not  to  mistake,  for  th/^  Key  San  Pio,  that  which  cornea  before  it, 
named  TroncoM ;  for,  having  a  strait  of  a  mile  in  breadth  between  them,  and  the 
San  Pto  Kty  being  very  low,  any  one  coming  from  si  a  may  be  deceived,  and 
take  the  strait  between  the  keys  for  the  emranee :  but  this  mistake  may  be  avoid- 
ed, If  you  keep  in  mind  that  Key  Troncoso  is  very  small ;  and  that,  on  the  con- 
trary, Key  San  Pio  is  a  mile  in  extent  fVom  N.  E.  to  S.  W.  farthermore,  in  this 
channel,  there  is  so  liitle  water  that  scarcely  a  canoe  can  pass,  which  is  the  cause 
Of  the  sea  generally  breaking  in  it.  To  those  coining  from  the  South,  in  order 
to  enter  this  bay,  we  have  nothing  to  recommend. 

Such  ia  the  description  of  this  bay,  given  in  the  year  1788,  by  Don  GonzcUo 


408 


BLUM'S   AMKRICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Valltjo  whoanchoHMl  in  it,  in  tluicni  vitteiS««  Pio,  commanded  by  him;  but  we 
ought  to  add  wh:it  Don  Josef  dd  Rid  snys  of  it,  for  he  also  visited  it  ia  the  year 
1703:  "  I  remark  that  tliu  .iiicliora-e  iti  tlic  bay  of  Cnpe  Gracios  a  Dios  is  gra- 
dually becoming  lost,  for  the  cut  of  commuiiicaLion  which  the  English  made  with 
the  Gnat  River  Segovia,  (Vaiikes  or  Capo  River,)  through  the  tongue  of  land 
which  forms  the  bay,  for  the.  purpose  of  getting  into  it  the  trees  which  they 
brought  down  the  river,  has  widened  so  much,  that  from  a  narrow  canal  it  has 
become  a  branch  of  the  river,  and  brings  in  so  much  earth  and  so  many  trues,  as 
f  i  to  have  so  much  diminished  the  depth  of  the  bay,  that,  since  the  year  1787,  they 

I    ]  find  three  feet  less  water  in  the  vicinity  of  Key  San  Pio;  and  it  is  very  possible 

I    i  that,  in  a  few  yeiirs,  the  depth  will  be  filled  up,  and  vessels  will  be  obliged  to  re- 

•*  main  outside  without  the  shelter  they  at  present  have,  and  which  is  of  much  uti- 

lity to  those  who  navigate  on  this  coast  in  the  time  or  season  of  the  Norths.    On 
entering  the  bay  a  small  village  presents  itself  on  the  starboard  side. 

Alt  the  Coast  from  the  River  Tongula  is  clean  ;  and  upon  the  bank,  or  sound- 
ings, which  lie  along  the  shore,  there  are  no  other  keys  nor  reefs  than  those  we 
hare  described,  and  those  which  are  between  the  parallels  of  Governor's  Point 
and  Cape  Gracios  a  Dios.  The  latter  are  named  the  Mosquito  and  Thomases  Keys 
and  Reefs,  and  have  about  them  many  others,  under  particular  names.  These 
keys,  fcc.  with  the  coast,  form  a  channel  four  leagues  in  breadth,  where  narrow- 
est ;  and,  although  between  them  there  are  passes,  with  7  fathoms  or  more  wa- 
ter, yet  it  is  best  not  to  attempt  them,  but  run  always  on  the  west,  between  them 
and  the  coast ;  for  there  can  be  no  risk  in  this  pass,  as  the  lead  will  warn  you  in 
time,  equally  whether  you  are  running  before  the  wind  or  turning  to  windward; 
for,  from  half  a  league  from  the  coast,  there  are  5  fathoms,  and  10  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  keys  ;  and  thus,  taking  care  not  to  get  into  shoaler  water  than  5  fathoms, 
on  an  in-shore  tack,  or  into  deeper  than  9  fathoms,  on  the  off-shore  tack,  or  5 
fathoms  on  the'west  tack,  and  9  fathoms  on  the  east  tack,  you  need  not  fear  the 
slightest  danger.  From  the  bay  of  Gracios  a  Dios  you  may  steer  to  the  S.  S.  E. 
with  v;hich  course  you  will  pass  in  sight  of  the  westernmost  key  of  this  group, 
which  is  a  black  rock,  that  may  be  descried  at  five  or  six  miles'  distance.  On 
this  route  you  will  catch  from  8  to  9  fathoms  ;  and  do  not  keep  any  thing  to  the 
east  until  you  |pckon  yourself  well  past  the  southern  keys ;  the  surest  guide  for 
which  will  be  your  getting  liL  fathoms  on  the  same  course ;  and  thence  you  may 
shape  your  voyage  course. 

The  islands  and  frontier  shoals  of  this  coast,  which  lie  outside  the  soundings, 
have  already  been  described  in  pages  402  to  404. 

CAPE  GRACIOS  a  DIOS  to  the  WESTWARD.—"  From  Cape  Gracios 
a  Dios,  the  coast  tends  to  the  N.  W.  10  leagues,  to  the  False  Cape,  which  may 
be  known  as  being  the  highest  land  on  this  piece  of  coast.  From  the  False  Cape 
a  bank,  or  shoal,  with  little  water,  projects  out  to  the  N.  E.  to  the  distance  of  6 
miles ;  but  the  soundings  of  the  coast  keep  very  regular,  and  it  even  seems  as  if 
they  extended  on  this  part  to  the  Serranilla ;  but  be  that  as  it  may,  this  is  so  little 
known  that  you  ought  not  to  navigate  hereabout  in  more  than  10  fathoms  of  wa- 
ter ;  because  there  are  various  shoals,  of  which  the  situation  is  very  doubtful;  and, 
therefore,  to  make  your  navigation  safely,  you  ought  not  to  get  into  deeper  wa- 
ter than  10  fathMTis,  nor  into  less  than  6  fathoms  ;  and  this  rule  you  should  ob- 
serve, whether  you  be  navigating  your  course  or  beating  to  windward,  for  you  will 
thus  be  sure  of  navigating  in  a  clean  channel  of  twenty  miles  in  width. 

From  False  Cape  the  coast  tends  about  W.  N.  W.  35  miles,  to  the  Lagoon  of 
Caratasca,  which  is  easily  known  by  its  wide  mouth.  All  this  coast  is,  likiftbe 
former,  clean,  with  regular  soundings  along  it;  and,  to  navigate  along  it,  the  lead 
is  a  sutiicient  guide  :  so  that  you  may  not  get  into  less  than  6  fathoms  on  the  in- 
shore tack,  or  into  more  tha  i  10  fathoms,  standing  ofi"  shore,  doing  which  you  will 
evade  falling  on  the  Cayman  or  Alligator  Keys,  which,  as  may  be  seen  on  the 
Chart,  are  to  the  North  of  the  Coast,  and  about  8  leagues  distant  from  it. 

BLACK  RIVER.— -From  C  atasca  Lagoon  the  coast  tends  about  W.  N.  W. 
and  West,  eighteen  and  a  half  leagues,  to  Brewer's  Lagoon ;  and  thence,  almost 
in  the  latter  direction,  at  the  distance  of  nine  leagues,  is  the  Rio  Tinto,  or  Black 
River.    This  river  is  known  by  the  mountains  of  La  Cruz,  (the  Cross,)  which 


1} 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


409 


are  very  higli,  and  are  the  first  which  are  seen  after  passing  Nicaragua.  These 
mountains  are  something  to  the  east  of  tlie  month  of  the  river ;  and  at  the  river 
itself  there  is  a  summit  or  peak,  named  the  Sugar-Loaf,  because  it  is  in  that 
shape.  To  anchor  in  front  of  this  river,  bring  the  mouth  about  south,  and  Cape 
Camaron  West,  without  running  into  shoalcr  water  thin  in  12  fathoms;  for  in 
less  depth  there  are  many  lost  anchors,  which  vessels  have  left  when  they  have 
been  obliged  precipitately  to  make  suil  on  the  Norths  coming  to  blow.  This  an- 
chorage is  a  roadstead  so  open,  that,  even  with  the  winds  of  the  breeze,  you 
must  have  two-thirds  of  the  cable  outside  the  hawse-holes;  and  so  soon  as  the 
wind  calms  you  must  heave  in,  till  the  anchor  is  almost  a-peak,  in  order  to  avoid 
fouling  the  anchor.  When  in  this  anchorage,  in  the  season  of  the  gales,  which 
is  from  October  to  February,  much  attention  to  the  weather  is  necessary ;  and,  so 
soon  as  you  see  the  wind  come  to  S.  E.  and  from  that  pass  to  south  and  S*  W. 
you  ought  immediately  to  weigh  the  anchor,  and  get  out  to  sea,  well  clear  from 
the  land;  as  you  are  sure  to  have  a  gale  or  storm.  In  the  above-mentioned 
months,  also,  all  thickening  or  bad  appearance  towards  the  N.  W.  is  a  certain  in- 
dication of  an  approaching  gale  ;  nor  is  a  swell  from  the  northward  (which  nets 
in  a  considerable  time  before  a  gale)  less  so:  at  any  of  the  times  of  the  gales, 
the  loss  of  any  vessel  remaining  at  anchor  is  certain ;  and  many  times  the  wind 
will  not  give  time  to  weigh  the  anchor;  in  which  case,  cither  slip  the  end,  leav- 
ing it  buoyed,  or  cut  the  cable,  that  you  may  immediately  make  sail,  and  get  clear 
•  1^  from  the  land,  so  that  you  may  keep  under  sail  till  the  storm  is  past.    The  gales 

,  f  are  very  hard,  and  raise  a  heavy  sea;  and  thus,  if  any  vessel  is  very  much  dis- 

f'  tressed  at  sea,  she  has  the  resource  at  option  of  running  to  the  anchorage  of 

Gracios  a  Dios,  and  taking  shelter  there  during  the  rough  weather.  There  is 
nothing  to  prevent  her  doing  this ;  for,  as  we  have  already  said,  the  lead  is  a 
guide  which  there  will  carry  you  clear  of  all  danger.  As  the  storms  are  gene- 
rally from  N.  N.  W.  or  West,  the  result  is,  that,  ordinarily,  the  anchorage  of 
Gracois  a  Dois  may  be  considered  as  one  to  which  you  can  keep  away,  or  to 
leeward  ;  and,  in  doing  this,  you  will  also  find  your  advantage  in  being  to  wind- 
ward of  the  Black  River,  when  the  gale  or  storm  ceases ;  because  then  the  breeze 
blows  from  the  east,  and  therefore,  in  a  short  time,  and  almost  without  trouble, 
you  can  return  to  your  forrheranchornKe.  The  bar  of  Black  River  is  uncommon- 
ly dangerous,  and  boats  run  much  risk  of  oversetting  on  it;  and  the  people  on 
board  of  them  of  perishing,  on  account  of  the  heavy  sea  which  is  in  general  on  it. 
Thus,  either  on  entering  or  sailing  out,  it  is  necessary  that  you  should  do  so  with 
the  calm  of  the  morning,  before  th«  breeze  comes  on,  and  that  the  land-breeze 
should  have  blown  from  the  time  it  became  dark  ;  and  also  thus,  if  the  breeze 
has  been  too  fresh,  you  can  neither  get  in  nor  out;  so  that  the  communication 
with  the  shore  is  far  from  frequent,  and  is  always  troublesome  and  dangerous. 

From  Black  River  the  coast  tends  west,  with  some  inclination  to  the  north,  to 
Cape  Camaron,  which  is  formed  by  a  small  tongue  of  land  projecting  out  to  sea. 
From  this  cape  the  coast  tends  nearly  west,  eighteen  leagues,  to  Punta  Castilla^ 
or  Cape  Honduras  :  it  is  all  clean,  and  also  deeper  than  the  anterior  coast,  so  that 
you  should  not  venture  in  less  than  8  fathoms  of  water  on  it. 


Cape  Honduras  to  Cape  Gracios  a  Dois. 

Cape  Honduras  forms  the  northern  part  of  the  Bay  of  Truxillo,  described  in 
the  next  chapter.  The  coast  between  is  irregular :  there  are  gradual  soundings 
in  approaching,  but  there  are  some  patches  of  rocks  along  shore. 

The  point  forming  the  north  side  of  Truxillo  Bay  is  low,  and  a  considerable 
reef  of  coral  rocks,  with  sand,  stretches  from  it  to  the  westward.  The  land  of 
the  interior,  hence  to  the  eastward,  appears  high  and  variegated ;  being  compos- 
ed of  the  hills  called  by  the  Spaniards  the  Sierras  de  la  Cna,  and  by  the  English 
/^yai$  or  Povtrs  Hills.  This  high  land  terminates  with  a  rcmnrkabie  sugur-loaf 
hill,  supposed  to  have  been  a  volcano,  which  stands  several  leagues  inland,  upon 

52 


410 


BLUNT's  AMKftlCAN  COAST  PILOT. 


the  eastern  side  of  Black  River,  and  nearly  south  from  the  entrance.  When 
bearing  S.  S.  W.  it  appears  nearly  as  represented  beneath,  and  is  an  excellent 
mark  for  the  coast.  Eastward  of  Brewer's  Lagoon  the  land  is  generally  low, 
^U  appears  as  described  in  the  preceeding  extracts  from  the  voyage  of  Captain 


Sugar-loa/  S,  S.  W. 


Jppearancf  of  the  Land  over  Dlack  River,  at  seen  at  ahout  i  leagues  from  the  coMt. 

If  the  land  be  low,  on  making  it  from  the  N.  E.  you  may  conclude  that  it  is 
as  far  to  the  eastward  as  Plantain  River  between  Black  River  and  Brewer's  La- 
goon ;  and  gradual  soundings  will  be  found  on  approaching,  from  40  to  9  fathoms. 
Should  you  raise  the  land  over  Black  River,  the  Sugar-loaf  hill  will  be  seen. 
With  this  object  bearing  S.  by  E.  or  S.  i  E.  you  may  anchor  in  8  or  9  fa- 
thoms.* The  swell  here  from  the  N.  E.  commonly  makes  the  bar  very  danger- 
ous ;  boats  cannot  pass  it  unless  in  calms,  or  in  the  morning  before  the  sea-breeze 
sets  in.  If  a  ship  anchors  here,  and  shows  her  colours,  one  of  the  craft  belong- 
ing to  the  place  generally  comes  off:  these  vessels  are  manned  with  Mosquito 
Indians,  who  are  very  dexterous  in  managing  them.  There  is  only  6  feet  of 
water  on  the  bar,  and  8  feet  within  it.  All  the  way  between  this  place  and  Cape 
Camaron  the  surf,  as  already  shown,  runs  high  on  the  shore. 

On  the  first  appearance  of  a  northerly  wind,  or  bad  weather,  on  this  coast,  it  is 
proper  to  get  under  way,  and  either  stand  out  to  sea,  or  run  for  the  harbour  of 
the  island  Bonacca.f  If  you  cannot  fetch  into  that  harbour,  run  for  the  south 
side  of  Rattan.  Or,  if  a  north  wind  comes  on  before  jou  caif  get  an  offing,  if 
you  can  wejither  Cape  Camaron,  you  may  proceed  for  Truxilio  Bay,  which  is  a 
very  good  road,  well  sheltered.  There  is  nothing  to  fear  in  going  in  here,  and 
giving  the  point  a  birth  ;  when  you  may  stand  up  in  the  bay  as  far  as  you  can 
fetch,  and  bring  a  small  island,  which  will  be  sctf  n,  to  bear  S.  S.W.  orS.  W. 
There  are  here  8  or  9  fathoms,  soft  mud.  It  is,  however,  to  be  observed  that 
this  is  a  leeward  situation  to  those  bound  to  any  point  eastward. 

There  is  an  anchorage  at  Poytr  River,  about  five  leagues  to  the  westward  of 
Cape  Camaron,  which  may  be  gained  by  keeping  close  in-shore,  in  5  or  10  fa- 
thoms, until  you  have  run  as  far  to  the  westward  as  to  bring  the  Sugar-lOaf, 
above  described,  to  bear  S.  E.  i  E.  On  the  west  of  the  bay  or  road  is  the  'ngh 
rocky  coast  called  the  Great  Rocks,  with  foul  ground  :  withm  this,  you  will  see 
a  fall  or  opening  in  the  beach,  which  is  the  River's  Mouth.  To  the  eastward  of 
tiiC  bay  is  a  smaller  river,  called  Poyer  Creek. 

Here  may  be  seen  the  inland  round  hvll,  called  Plcacho,  which  must  be  kept  a 
sail's  breadth  optjn  of  Great  Rocks.  To  anchor,  bring  the  white  sandy  spot  on 
the  beach,  which  is  between  the  river  and  Great  Rocks,  to  bear  S.  W.  ft  S.  and 
you  will  be  in  9  or  10  fathoms,  muddy  ground,  with  Poyer  River  S.  by  W. 
Great  Rocks  W.  S.  W.  and  the  round  bill  just  open.  As  there  is  much  foul 
ground  hereabout,  try  the  bottom  before  y  ou  bring  up. 

Here  you  must  observe  the  weather,  as  at  Black  River;  for  it  is  more  difficult 


*  It  is  said  to  be  the  safest  to  anchor  in  12  fathoros  ;  as,  farther  in,  some  anchors  have  been 
lost.  The  north  winds  generally  begin  in  October  or  November,  and  frequently  continue 
until  March.    See  the  remarks  from  the  Derrotero,  page  409. 

t  It  is,  however,  here  proper  to  notice  that  some,  ^vho  have  attempted  a  passage  from  Black 
River  to  Bonacca,  have  not  been  able  to  get  in,  the  ^entrance  of  the  harbour  lying  nearest  to 
north  and  south:  and  some  who  have  got  in  have  been  four  or  five  weeks  before  they  could 
get  to  Black  River  again,  finding  a  strong  current  settirg  to  the  westward,  and  the  trade-wind, 
at  the  same  time,  from  the  eastward. 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


411 


to  obtain  ail  oiKng  Trom  this  than  from  tliut  piace  ■*  fur  you  cannot  lie  ofi'-shore 
here,  if  you  lie  till  the  wind  comes  to  the  northward  of  N.  W. 

From  BLACK  RIVER  to  the  Eastward.— U  at  anchor  off  Black  River,  and 
the  wind  comes  to  the  S.  E.  and,  baffling  about,  changes  to  the  westward,  get 
up  your  anchor  as  quickly  as  possible,  stretch  off  to  the  northward,  and  get  a 
good  offing ;  for  you  may  then  be  sure  you  will  have  a  north  wind,  which  gen- 
erally blows  very  hard,  and  makes  so  K''«^"t  J^  s*i!»»  that  it  is  impossible  for  any 
vessel  to  ride  at  her  anchors.  If  your  anchor  start,  it  is  extremely  dangerous, 
as  the  rocks  and  shoals  lie  at  a  distance  from  the  main.  If  you  cannot  get  up 
your  anchor,  slip  oi  cut  your  cable  immediately.  If  the  sky  looks  black  to  the 
N.  W.  it  will  not  be  long  before  you  have  it,  and  then  it  will  not  be  possible  to 
get  an  offing.  Should  this  be  the  case,  before  the  gale  comes  on,  if  you  can 
weather  Point  Patook,  which  lies  to  the  eastward  of  Brewer's  Lagoon,  run 
away  for  Cape  Gracios  a  Dios,  for  which  you  have  a  fair  wind  all  the  way,  taking 
care  to  avoid  the  reefs,  which  lie  as  hereafter  described.  Having  arrived  at  the 
Cape,  do  not  attempt  to  work  in,  but  briny  up  off  the  Sandy  Point,  in  2,  3,  or  4 
fathoms,  all  clear  ground  and  very  smooth  riding.  Here  you  will  be  ready  to 
return  to  Black  River  so  soon  as  the  North  wind  is  over,  which  may  be  known 
by  its  changing  to  the  N.  N.  E.  and  N.  E. 

To  sail  from  Black  River  to  Cape  Gracios  a  Dios,  with  a  westerly  wind,  the 
course  is  nearly  East,  until  you  are  past  Patook  River.  From  the  point  of  the 
latter,  the  sharp  end  of  a  sand-bank  extends  for  a  mile  and  a  half  into  the  sea. 
Approach  no  nearer,  by  day  or  night,  than  in  9  fathoms  of  water. 

Brewer^s  Lagona,  lies  about  8^  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Black  River.  In  the 
middle  of  the  haven,  about  :ii  luitguu  up,  is  an^sland,  that  appears  like  two  hills, 
whereon  some  English  people  formerly  resided.  Vou  may  proceed  from  Black 
River  by  the  lead,  and  turn  up  as  far  as  Brewer's  Lagoon,  and  as  near  as  you 
please  to  the  main.  There  is  anchorage  off  the  entrance  of  the  lagoon,  in  from 
12  to  8  fathoms. 

CARATASCA  LAGOON. — The  Entrance  of  Caratasca  Lagoon  lies  about 
14  leagues  from  Patook  River.  The  course,  with  a  westerly  wind,  is  E.  by  S. 
This  place  is  easily  known ;  for,  as  the  mouth  of  the  river  is  very  wide,  the 
opening  may  always  be  seen. 

The  FALSfi  CAPK  of  Gracios  a  Dios  is  \i  leagues  from  the  entrance  of 
Caratasca  Lagoon.  On  sailing  fjr  it,  with  a  westerly  wind,  take  care  to  avoid 
the  False  Cape  Bank,  extending  to  the  N.  E.  To  pass  clear,  keep  at  least  three 
leagues  off  from  the  shore,  and  approacli  no  nearer  than  in  5  or  6  fathoms. 

From  the  False  Cape  to  Cape  Gracios  a  Dios,  you  may  proceed  by  the  lead, 
and  will  fmd  6,  5,  4i,  4,  3],  3.\,  s\,  and  2{  fathoms.* 


Cape  Gracios  a  Dios  to  the  Southward. 

In  proceeding  to  the  anchorage  under  Cape  Gracios  a  Dios,  so  soon  as  you  are 
clear  of  the  Cape  Bank,  you  will  be  in  3,  3^,  4,  S3,  4|,  and  &  fathoms ;  then  keep 
in  5,  or  a  quarter-less  5,  very  close  along  the  low  sandy  point :  This  point  is  to 
the  windward  or  eastward  of  the  river :  give  it  a  good  birth ;  ajd,  so  soon  as  you 
have  well  opened  the  bay  of  Cape  Gracios,  then  steer  directly  in  to  the  west.  To 
come  to  an  anchor  here  it  is  best  to  let  go  in  4i  or  4  fathoms,  good  muddy 
ground.  The  depths  in  the  bay  are  from  6  to  2}  fathoms,  and  this  is  a  safe  and 
convenient  place  of  shelter  during  the  North  winds. f 


'■'The  nature  of  the  Shoals  to  the  northward,  eastward,  southward,  of  Capo  Gracios  a  Dios 
can  bo  best  understood  by  reference  to  the  Charts.  But  it  is^to  be  noticed  that,  in  the  late 
Spanish  Charts,  and  some  others,  many  dangers  have  been  entirely  omitted,  of  the  existence 
of  which  no  doubt  vtm  be  entertained.  All  this  coast  is,  indeed,  very  inaccurately  represen'* 
f,d  in  the  Spanish  Charts. 

t  See,  however,  the  descriptions  of  this  place,  in  page  407. 


M2 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


SANDT  bay  ia  nearly  10  leagues  from  Cape  Oracios  a  Dios,  on  a  courss 
S. }  E.  Keep  along  the  shore,  with  the  lead  going,  6,  7,  and  8  fathoms  of  wncer. 
Tou  may  come  to  an  anchor  in  Sandy  Bay  in  as  deep  or  as  little  water  as  y^u 
choose.  In  6  or  7  fathoms  there  is  good  muddy  ground,  and  fit  for  ships.  In 
from  5  fathoms,  or  less,  ia  sandy  ground,  fit  fur  smaller  vessels. 

Rocky  Kcv,  or  Stony  Islet,  ia  a  rock  that  appears  above  water  to  the  height  of 
a  ship's  hulCand  quite  black.  It  lies  E.  S.  E.  from  Sandy  Bay,  at  the  distance 
of  about  4  or  5  leagues.  Vessels  bound  out  from  Sandy  Bay,  to  the  S.  £.  should 
shape  a  S.  E.  course,  so  as  to  make  and  pass  to  the  southward  of  Rocky  Key, 
which  may  he  seen  5  or  6  miles  oflP.  You  may  approach  to  the  distance  of  a 
mile  from  Rocky  Key,  and  have  6  fathoms,  bottom  of  white  sand. 

To  the  south  of  Rocky  Key,  at  the  distance  of  about  4  leagues,  is  a  little  sandy 
key,  with  a  few  trees  upon  it,  by  the  Indians  called  fVaniessa,  and  by  the  English 
DeviVs  Key.  This  key  may  not  be  seen ;  but,  if  bound  towards  Carthagena,  you 
may  continue  on  a  course  S.  E.  by  S.  until  you  arrive  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  Corn 
Islands,  and  thence  proceed  according  to  circumstances. 

If  you  pass  close  by  Rocky  Key,  and  thence  steer  E.  S.  E.  so  as  to  pass  to  the 
eastward  of  Waniessa,  you  may  see  the  latter,  if  the  weather  be  clear  :  and,  when 
you  are  close  in  with  the  land  of  Waniessa,  you  may,  in  clear  weather,  see  Rocky 
Key.  In  approaching  Waniessa  be  cautious,  and  keep  the  lead  going.  In  steer- 
ing from  Rocky  Key,  on  an  E.  S.  E.  course,  you  will  have  7  fathoms  of  water 
all  along.  Close  to  V/'aniessa  there  are  less  than  7  or  6  fathoms,  and  immediate- 
ly after  dry.  It  is  proper  always  to  strive  to  keep  in  from  7  to  IS  fathoms,  until 
you  arrive  in  sight  of  St.  Andrew's,  or  of  Providence  Island. 

The  course  from  Waniessa  to  Providence  Island  is  about  E.  S.  E.  distance 
nearly  40  leagues. 

WAVA  ov  Bragman's  Bluff,  to  the  W.  S.  W.  of  Waniess;',  is  composed  of  the 
highest  sandy  hills  on  the  coast  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Grai  ios  a  Dios.  These 
are  three  or  four  whitish  hills  which  cannot  be  missed.  The  c'>ursc  Lence  to  the 
Seal  Keys,  within  the  Ship  or  Man  of  War  Keys,  is  S.  {  E.  On  this  course  two 
sand-banks  will  be  avoided,  which  lie  oiT  the  shore,  the  southernmost  at  the  dis- 
tance of  nearly  3  leagues. 

The  navigation  hence  to  the  southward  is  too  intricate  to  be  comprehended 
from  verbal  description  only. 


Directions  for  proceeding  from  Jamaica  to  the  Mosquito  Shore, 

If  bound  from  the  Island  of  Jamaica  to  Cape  Gracios  a  Dios,  take  your  de- 
parture from  Pedro  Blu?'.  or  the  west  end  of  Jamaica.  From  the  latter,  a  true 
course  S.  W.  by  W.  75  leagues,  will  lead  to  the  Bank  of  Soundings,  whence  Cape 
Gracios  a  Dios  will  bear  about  S.  W.  by  S.  true,  at  the  distance  of  30  leagues. 
The  variation  to  be  allowed  on  the  compass  course  is  7°  East. 

In  approaching  the  main,  the  greatest  caution  must  be  taken,  in  order  to  avoid 
the  Caratasca  and  other  reefs,  and  particularly  attending  to  the  current,  which, 
at  times,  sets  to  the  eastward  as  well  as  to  the  westward.  The  east  end  of  the 
Caratasca  Reefs  lies  at  the  distance  of  15  leagues  from  False  Cape,  on  the  main, 
and  is  steep-to.  The  safest  way  is,  therefore,  to  proceed  more  to  the  west  than 
the  first  course  above  given,  so  as  to  pass  to  the  westward  of  these  dangers,  rather 
than  attempt  to  find  a  channel  through.  The  west  end  lies  nearly  north  from  the 
entrance  of  Caratasca  Lagoon,  the  appearance  of  which  has  already  been  de- 
scribed. The  bank  is  of  shoal  and  broken  ground  quite  up  to  the  Hobby  Keys, 
and  it  is  very  diflicult  for  a  stranger  to  pick  his  way  through. 

If  ^ou  come  in  to  the  westward  of  Caratasca  Shoals,  when  bound  to  Cape 
Gracios  a  Dips,  endeavour  to  make  the  main ;  and,  if  you  can  lay  through,  keep 
your  lead  going,  especially  in  the  night,  and  come  no  nearer  to  the  shoals  than 
StO  fathoms :  you  will  then  be  about  4  or  5  miles  off  them,  and  out  of  sight  of  the 
main,  which  cannot  be  seen  till  you  are  in  1£  or  13  fathoms :  you  may  run  down, 
keeping  the  main  on  board,  in  6  and  7  fathoms,  till  you  come  to  the  False  Cape. 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


413 


When  you  are  come  near  the  False  Cape,  you  will  ahoalen  your  water,  but  you 
may  run  along  the  spit  in  5  fathoms  in  safety.  It  stretches  from  the  main  about 
N.  £.  two  leagues  off,  as  before  described.  The  False  Cape  makes,  when  you 
are  to  windward  of  it,  like  the  Main  Cape,  with  high  mangroves.  From  the 
False  Cape  to  the  Main  Cape,  t'  e  course  is  S.  E. 

When  off  the  pitch  of  the  Main  Cape,  you  will  see  the  land  tending  nearly 
North  and  South.  The  cape  ends  in  &  low  sandy  point,  tending  to  the  southward, 
with  keys,  as  shown  in  page  407.  Old  trees  are  frequently  drifting  out  of  the 
river.  The  water  shoalens  a  good  way  off,  till  you  double  the  pitch  of  it,  and 
then  jon  may  borrow  as  close  as  you  please,  into  2,  3,  4,  t.nd  5  fathoms,  soft 
grouud.  Do  not  proceed  higher  up  in  the  bay  than  in  3  or  4  fathoms ;  although 
it  is  all  clear  good  ground. 

If  EOUND  to  BLACK  RIVER,  from  Jamaica,  the  best  way  is  to  make  the 
Santanitla  or  Stoans*  IsUvnda,*  and  thence  proceed  on  a  S.  by  W.  or  even  a  South 
course;  as  the  latter  will  lead  to  the  eastward  of  the  river. 

The  CURRENTS  generally  are  very  uncertain ;  therefore,  when  you  make 
the  land,  in  proceeding  for  Black  River,  if  you  see  any  high  land  to  the  eastward 
of  you,  you  are  to  leeward  and  westward,  and  the  current  has  deceived  you :  for, 
as  already  shown,  in  the  description  of  the  coast,  there  is  no  high  land  to  the 
eastward  of  Brewer's  Lagoon. 

The  appearance  of  the  Sugar-Loaf  Hill .  to  the  southward  of  the  entrance  of 
Black  River,  has  been  already  given  on  page  410. 


*  These  islands  are  described  in  ttte  next  chapter. 


414 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


CHAP.  XIXZ. 


The  BAY  or  HONDURAS,  ^c.  from  Cape  Honduras  and  Cape 
Camaron  to  Ca?e  Catoche  and  the  Bank  of  Campeche'. 


Description  of  the  Coast,  from  the  Derrotero,  fyc. 

In  this,  as  in  tne  lust  chapter,  tvc  shall  describe  the  coasts,  as  given  in  the 
Dtrrotero. 

TRUXILLO  BAY The  poaition  of  Capt  Honduras  or  Delgado,  the  Punta 

Costilla  of  the  Spaniards,  has  been  already  given  on  page  409.     This  point  is 
low,  and  a  small  sand-bank,  with  very  little  water,  extends  from  it,  one-quarter 
of  a  mile  to  the  west.    From  the  point,  which  is  the  north  point  of  the  Bat/  of 
Trurillu,  the  mou'h  of  that  bay  is  seven  miles  in  breadth.     This  bay  is  easily 
entered,  it  having  no  other  shoal  than  that  about  the  point,  as  noticed  above. 
On  the  south  coast  of  the  bay  is  a  high  mountain,  named   Guaimoreto,  which 
may  be  seen  twenty-four  leagues  out  at  sea.    This  is  a  good  mark  for  running 
in  by;  for,  by  bringing  it  to  bear  between  S.  S.  E.  and  S.  E.  by  S.  you  will  run 
clear  of  Cape  Honduras,  and  may  anchor  almost  in  front  of  Crystal  Rivr,  upon 
the  S.  E.  shore.     This  anchorage  seems  preferable,  not  only  because,  being  near 
the  river,  you  can  readily  obtain  water,  but  because,  from  this  spot,  you  can  ea- 
sily clear  the  north  poin' ,  in  case  of  being  obliged  to  get  under  way,  by  a  storm 
from  W.  S.  W.  or  W.  N.  W.  whence  it  blows  oftenest  from  October  or  Novem- 
ber until  February.     With  such  winds,  it  may  be  plainly  seen,  by  a  glance  at 
the  plan,  there  must  be  much  sea  in  the  bay ;  and  this  the  ship  Maria  experi- 
enced in  December  and  January,  1800,  when,  having  rode  out  one  or  two  of 
these  gales  at  anchor,  she*  was  under  the  necessity  of  quitting,  ai  I  running  to 
Port  Royal,  in  the  Island  Rattan.     Thus  the  commandant  rf  this  vessel  fouod, 
contrary  to  what  is  generally  supposed,  that  the  anchorage  of  Truxilh)  is  much 
exposed  in  the  season  of  the  norths,  which  was  the  season  he  was  in  it. 

To  enter  in,  or  sail  out  from,  Truxillo,  there  is  little  difficulty ;  for  you  may 
work  in  or  out  without  any  other  precaution  than  to  keep  at  least  half  a  mile 
from  St.  Luke^s  Key,  which  is  off  the  south  coast,  and  about  two  rniles  outside 
the  bay ;  as  a  shoal  surrounds  this  islet,  the  best  guide  towards  which  is  the  lead. 
Take  care  not  to  get  into  less  than  6  fathoms  of  water,  when  near  it,  and  yon 
will  go  free  of  all  danger.  The  islet  is  rather  more  than  a  mile  from  the  coast ; 
and  you  may  rrn  through  the  channel  between  without  any  other  guide  than 
the  lead. 

It  was  heretofore  believed  that  the  bay  of  Truxillo  was  well  rheltered,  and  a 
good  place  of  refuge  during  storms  in  the  winter;  but  it  is  not  so:  every  vessel 
on  this  coast,  at  that  season,  ought  to  prefer  Port  Royal,  in  Rattan,  to  this  bay. 
From  Crystal  River,  (Rio  de  Crystalis)  in  the  Bay  of  Truxillo,  the  coast  tends 
nearly  W.  S.  W.  i  W.  thirty  leagues,  to  Cape  Triumfo.*  Here  the  navigation 
is  rendered  unsafe  by  several  reefs  and  shoals  existing  to  the  southward  and 
eastward  of  the  Island  Utila.  Between  Cape  Honduras  and  Utila  are,  also,  the 
Cochinos  or  Hog  Islands,  consisting  of  two  large  islands  and  numerous  keys,  foul, 
with  reef  to  the  south,  but  clean  on  the  north  side.    On  the  N.  W.  ia  anchorage. 


Or  Triwifo  de  la  Cruz,  Triumph  of  the  Cross. 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


415 


and  Cape 

che'. 


jiven  in  the 

0,  the  Punta 

'his  point  is 

one-quarter 

f  the  Bit}/  of 

lay  is  eusily 

ticed  ahove. 

oreto,  which 

for  running 

you  will  run 

I  Rivr,  upon 

le,  heing  near 

you  can  ea- 

,  by  a  storm 

r  or  Novem- 

a  glance  at 

aria  experi- 

or  two  of 

running  to 

essel  foufttl, 

:ilh)  is  much 

1  it. 

'or  you  may 

half  a  mile 

niles  outside 

is  the  lead. 

it,  and  you 

the  coast ; 

guide  than 


UTILA. — The  island  Utila  lies  about  W.  }  N.  seven  leagues,  from  the  Cochi- 
nus.  The  north,  south,  and  west  coasts  of  this  island  are  very  foul :  on  the 
eastern  coast,  however,  there  is  good  anchorage,  l)ut  not  to  he  attempted  by  a 
stranger.  To  the  S  W.  of  ths  island  is  the  extensive  shoal  called  the  Salmedina, 
which  is  not  less  than  five  miles  over. 

Those  bound  to  the  westward,  who  are  not  obliged  {o  run  along  shore,  will 
most  safely  pass  to  the  northward  of  the  Cochinos  and  Utila :  but  observe  not 
to  approach  nearer  to  the  latter  than  two  leagues,  until  you  are  abreast  of  its 
"'cstern  points,  whence  you  may  steer  towards  Punta  Sal,  to  the  S.  W.  or  ac- 
coiding  to  circumstances ;  noting  only  that  the  current  here  commonly  sets 
towards  the  N.  VV 

TRIUNFO  de  la  CRUZ.— From  the  point  which  we  call  Cape  Triumfo,  the 
coast  sweeps  to  the  soiitii,  and  forms  a  bay,  whence  it  tends  about  four  leagues 
to  the  N.  W.  There  is  anchorage  in  the  bay  for  vessels  of  every  class,  sheltered 
from  the  breezes.  To  the  north  of  Cape  Triumfo,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile, 
are  some  islets,  called  the  Bishop  an  I  Clerks:  two  of  these  are  rather  large,  «nd 
may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  two  leagues  :  they  are  clean  ;  and,  by  passing  at 
half  a  mile  clear  of  all  that  is  visible,  you  may  proceed  to  anchor  in  the  eastern 
part  of  the  bay,  at  a  little  to  the  southward  of  the  point,  in  6  or  8  fathoms,  on 
sand. 

Punta  Sal  (Salt  Point)  has  off  it,  distant  above  half  a  mile,  some  high  rocks, 
which  form  a  channel  navigable  for  boats.  This  point  appears  with  some  hillocks 
of  broken  ground,  and  has  on  the  S.  W.  a  little  harbour,  Puerto  Sal,  of  which  we 
can  say  only  that,  in  front  of  its  entrance,  and  at  the  round  of  Punta  Sal,  you 
may  anchor  in  shelter  from  the  breezes,  but  may  not  come-to  in  more  than  13 
fathoms;  for  in  15,  16,  17,  and  18  fathoms,  the  bottom  is  of  rock;  while,  on 
the  contrary,  in  less  than  13,  it  is  of  clean  clay. 

From  Punta  Sal  the  coast  tends  about  W.  S.  W.  three  leagues,  to  the  River 
Lua  or  Ulua,  which  is  large.  In  front  of  this  river  you  may  anchor,  on  excellent 
holding-ground  of  clay,  but  without  the  least  shelter  from  the  norths.  At  about 
eight  miles  W.  by  S.  from  the  River  Lua  is  th^i  named  Chamalucon,  at  which 
you  ma^  likewise  anchor  on  good  holding-ground,  but  equally  unsheltered  from 
the  norths. 

CABA.LLOS,  OR  CAVALLOS At  about  W.  by  S.  from  Chamalucon  Ri- 
ver, and  at  the  distance  of  4  or  5  leagues,  is  the  Harbour  of  Caballoa.  This  har- 
bour is  formed  by  a  low  sandy  point  to  seaward,  on  the  S.  W.  of  which  there  is 
anchorage  in  7,  6,  or  5,  fathoms,  on  sand.  Caballos  Harbour  may  be  known  by 
a  round  and  high  hillock,  which  lies  close  to  the  sea  on  the  coast,  about  two  leagues 
to  the  eastward  of  the  harbour.  To  enter  this  port  you  have  only  to  keep  clear 
of  what  is  visible. 

OMOA. — From  Port  Caballos  to  Omoa  is  seven  miles  S.  W.  byW.  on  the 
way  there  is  a  little  shallow  shoal,  which  lies  to  the  north  of  some  red  gullies  or 
broken  ground,  which  are  seen  on  the  coast,  and  it  lies  out  from  it  a  league  and 
a  half:  to  keep  clear  of  it,  take  care  not  to  get  into  less  than  8  fathoms,  until  you 
are  past  the  red  gullies,  when  you  may  direct  your  course  to  Omoa. 

The  Harbour  of  Omoa  is  formed  by  low  land  covered  with  mangroves,  which 
extends  out  to  sea :  upon  this  point  tliere  is  a  watch-tower  or  lookout,  which  is 
well  seen  from  the  sea,  and  serves  as  a  mark  to  recognize  the  harbour  by;  for 
this  the  high-land,  which  rises  and  extendj  to  the  west  from  Omoa,  may  also 
serve :  for,  to  the  eastward  af  Omoa,  the  land  is  all  low. 

To  enter  into  Omoa,  we  have  only  to  say  that  you  may  pass  at  a  cable's  length 
from  the  mangrove  point,  which  forms  the  harbour;  and,  so  soon  as  you  are  to 
the  west  of  it,  you  ought  to  luff  to  south  and  east  all  that  you  can,  approaching 
the  south  part  of  the  mangrovo  point,  with  the  object  of  seeing  whether  you  can 
enter  under  sail  into  the  basin,  which  is  in  the  N.  E.  corner.  For'this  you  must 
steer  to  the  north  ;  and  the  best  way  will  be  to  gain  as  much  to  the  east  as  you 
can,  until  you  are  abreast  the  mouth  of  the  basin,  when  you  may  anchor,  and 
afterwards  warp  in. 

From  the  anchorage  of  Omoa,  you  may,  in  clear  weather,  see  Caho  Tres  Puntaa 
(Cape  Three  Points)  which  bears  about  W.  h  N.     All  this  land  to  the  west  of 


416 


BLUNT  8  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Omoa  is  verj'  high,  and  upon  it  rise  three  or  four  summits,  like  sugar-loaTes ; 
but  the  coast  is  vnry  low.  ind  continues  the  same  to  the  Gulf  of  Honduras.  From 
Omna  to  Cape  Three  Points,  the  distance  is  about  eleven  leaf^ues,  and  the  inter- 
mediate coast  sweeps  somethinp;  to  the  south,  so  that  it  forms  a  bight,  in  which 
there  must  surely  be  much  dashing  of  the  sea ;  and  therefore  it  is  adviseable  not 
to  come  too  near  it,  but  rather  to  steer  W.  N  '"  or  N.  W.  by  W.  to  get  well 
clear  of  Cape  Three  Points.     After  standii  t  time  on  these  courses,  you 

may  jee  to  the  N.  W.  the  Southernmost  Ki.,8,  .vhioh  lie  out  from  the  coast  of 
Bacalar,  .md  which  are  about  Ave  leagues  distant  from  C^pe  Three  Points. 

The  N.  W.  extremity  of  Cape  Three  Points  is  Punta  Manabique,  which  has  to 
the  west  of  it,  at  a  league  and  a  half,  a  shoal  named  the  Buey  or  Ox,  to  which  a 
birth  must  be  given.  Point  Manabique  and  the  Southern  Keys  of  the  coast  of 
Bacalar  form  the  entrance  of  the  Gulf  of  Honduras,  within  which,  and  to  the 
South  or  S.  by  E.  of  Point  Manabique,  is  the  Bay  of  St.  Thomas  dt  Costilla  (St. 
Thomas  of  Castile ;)  and  S.  W.  by  S.  or  S.  W.  from  the  same  point,  lies  the 
mouth  of  Rio  Dulce.  All  this  gulf  is  shoal,  hut  with  sufficient  depth  for  any  class 
of  vessels ;  and,  to  navigate  in  it,  you  should  run  with  the  lead  always  in  hand,  and 
the  anchors  ready  to  let  go,  if  needful ;  or  if  you  wish  to  anchor.  The  mouth  of 
the  Rio  Dulce  may  be  known  by  a  little  insulated  hill,  which  is  something  to  the 
west  of  it :  the  anchorage  is  to  the  N.  N.  E.  of  the  river's  mouth,  in  the  number 
of  fathoms  that  best  ansv/ers,  and  you  must  have  your  cable  N.  E.  and  S.  W. 


The  Coasts  and  Bay  of  Honduras  and  Yucatan,  as  described  by 

JSTavigators,  &tc. 

TRUXILLO  BAY.— Of  Truxillo  Bay,  within  Cape  Honduras,  a  description 
has  been  given  on  page  414.  The  course  and  distance  to  this  bay,  from  the  S. 
W.  end  of  the  Island  Bonacca,  is  S.  by  W>  8)  leagues ;  but  as  the  current,  unless 
when  the  wind  blows  strongly  from  the  north,  sets  with  some  strength  to  the 
westward,  you  should  steer  S.  |  E.  The  point  forming  the  north  side  of  the  bay, 
as  already  shown,  is  low,  and  requires  a  large  birth  in  passing,  so  as  to  avoid  the 
coral  resf,  with  sand,  which  stretches  from  it  to  the  westward.  This  is  a  good 
place  for  the  obtainment  of  wood  and  water.  The  latter  may  be  had  on  the 
south  shore,  to  the  eastward  of  St.  Luke's  Key,  where  the  old  town  and  fort  of 
Truxillo  formerly  stood ;  or  at  the  Crystal  River. 

COAST  from  C4PE  CAMARON,on  the  East,  to  Truxillo  Bay.— Black  Ri- 
ver, to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Camaron,  is  situated  as  described  in  the  preceding 
chapter,  page  409<  The  following  is  a  detailed  description  of  the  coast  thence 
westward  to  Truxillo  Bay. 

Praunow  Cteek  lies  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Camaron  River :  the 
opening  of  the  latter  may  be  plainly  seen,  as  the  eastern  side  is  distinguished  by 
a  high  sand-hill,  and  on  the  western  side  a  spit  stretches  a  mile  into  the  sea. 

Two  miles  W.  by  S.  from  Praunow  Creek,  is  Sierra  Leon,  or  Lion's  Creek. 
The  high  land,  right  over  it,  has  the  form  of  a  sugar-loaf,  not  unlike  that  over 
Black  River,  but  distinguished  by  a  saddle-mouatain  a  little  to  the  westward. 
The  Little  Rocks  are  one  league  distant  W.  by  S.  from  Lion's  Creek;  the  land 
over  them  is  double,  not  very  high,  anJ  die  southernmost  appearing  above  the  other. 

Four  miles  W.  S.  W,  from  these  are  the  Great  Rocks,  which  show  themselves 
like  a  round  bluff,  close  to  the  sea-side,  at  about  a  mile  from  shore  :  the  ground 
here  is  very  foul,  mixed  with  sand  and  stones,  which  you  may  avoid.  The  bluff 
point  of  the  Great  Rocks  to  the  eastward,  and  old  Roman  Point  make  Limehouse 
Bight.  Between  the  Little  and  Great  Rocks  are  the  two  rivers,  called  Foyer  Ri- 
ver and  Poyer  Creek.* 

Limehouse  Rivtr  is  three  miles  distant,  S.  W.  by  W.  from  the  Great  Rocks : 

-■  -■  - -.-■...  ■  ■  . .^      III 

*  The  anchorage  between  these  rivers  has  been  already  described  in  the  preceding  section, 
pace  411. 


P 


it  is 

•Ug!l 

L 

whi( 

Rom 

Betf 

the 

ofth 

pass 

and 


BT.UNl's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


417 


ugar-loaTes ; 
uraB.  From 
nd  the  inter- 
ht,  in  which 
Iviaeable  not 
.  to  get  well 
courses,  you 

the  coast  of 
Points, 
which  has  to 
r,  to  which  a 

the  coast  of 
h,  and  to  the 

Ccutilla  (St. 
|)oint,  lies  the 
for  any  class 
I  in  hand,  and 
;'he  mouth  of 
lethin;;  to  the 
n  the  number 
nd  S.  W. 


crihed  by 


a  description 
f,  from  tne  S. 
urrent,  unless 
rength  to  the 
de  of  the  bay, 
s  to  avoid  the 
his  is  a  good 
had  on  the 
[n  and  fort  of 

^.— Black  Ri- 

\he  preceding 

coast  thence 

River :  the 

Linguished  by 

the  sea. 

lion's  Creek. 

like  that  over 

le  westward. 

|ek;  the  land 

»ve  the  other. 

themselves 

the  ground 

.   The  bluff 

ce  Limehoiae 

^dPoyerRi- 

reat  Rocks : 


leding  section. 


it  is  known  by  a  saddle-monntain,  with  u  sugar-loaf  on  one  side  ;  and  by  another 
■ug;ir-loaf  on  the  other  M*%  whose  top  appears  to  he  broken  oflf. 

Little  or  East  Roman  Riwr  lies  five  miles  farther  W.  N.  W.  Near  to  its  mouth, 
which  is  very  wide,  and  always  open,  are  two  or  three  black  sand-hills.  Great 
Roman  River,  whose  opening  is  also  very  wide,  is  four  miles  W.  N.  W.  from  this. 
Between  the  two  rivers  you  meet  with  a  bank  of  stones  and  sand,  two  miles  from 
the  shore,  and  about  three  miles  long  :  it  lies  nearly  east  and  west :  to  get  clear 
of  this  bank,  you  steer  from  Little  Roman  River  out  of  the  Bight  W.  N.  W.  and 
pass  to  the  northward  until  you  come  to  Cabbage  Tree  or  Three  Leagues  Pointy 
and  then  you  steer  right  for  Cape  Hondunis.  The  p(tint  is  eauily  known  by  a 
round  sand-hill,  covered  with  many  palmcto-trees  of  an  inferior  size.  The  coast 
without  it  is  rocky. 

Cape  Honduras  lies  nearly  seven  leagues  W.  i  N.  from  Great  Roman  River. 
In  salting  from  Cape  Camnron  to  this  cape,  the  general  course  is  about  W.  h  N. 
and  the  distance  eighteen  leagues. 

TRUXILLO  BAY,  Westward.— Sir  George  Young,  in  his  directions  for 
saiiiug  on  this,  coast  has  said,  "  On  coining  from  the  eastward  to  Truxillo  Bay, 
be  sure  to  make  the  land  to  the  eastward  of  the  cape :  it  is  low  by  the  water- 
side, but  up  in  the  country  it  rises  high  :  when  you  have  run  down  your  distance, 
and  got  the  cape  to  bear  S.  W.  and  Bonaccu  North  or  N.  by  W.  the  soundings 
along  shore,  at  a  mile  distance,  will  be  20  fathoms,  muddy  ground.  Run  in  S.  W. 
and  S.  S.  W.  till  you  bring  the  Point  Castilla  N.  N.  E.  or  N.  by  E.  from  you, 
giving  Ijie  point  a  good  birth  ;  then  haul  up  E.  and  E.  S.  R.  You  may  come  to 
an  anchor  in  what  depth  you  please,  with  muddy  ground  :  but  the  best  part  is 
with  Point  Castilla  N.  N.  W.  to  N.  W.  about  a  mile  from  shore.  The  tide  is  not 
perceptible  here.  The  easterly  winds  prevail  during  the  greater  part  of  the  year." 
Variation  about  8°  E. 

COCHINOS,  or  Hog  Islands. — These  islands  lie  about  nine  leagues  to  the  , 
westward  of  Cape  Honduras :  the  group  is  composed  of  two  high  islands,  with 
eighteen  little  sandy  keys,  which  extend  on  the  south,  from  the  S.  E.  of  the  east- 
ernmost island  to  the  western  part  of  the  westernmost  one.  To  the  north-west  of 
the  westernmost  isle  there  are  three  or  foiyr  of  these  sandy  keys,  which  afford 
no  passage,  but  you  may  pass  between  the  dfhers.  A  rocky  reef  stretches  along 
to  the  southward  of  thei<e  islands,  two  miles  distant  from  the  shores,  and  from 
E.  S.  E  to  N.  W.  You  must  not  come  nearer  on  any  side  of  the  westernmost 
island  than  one  league ;  l)ut  you  may  approach  the  easternmost  as  near  as  a 
mile ;  and,  at  its  west  end,  small  vessels  may  come  to  an  anchor  with  a  sea-breeze* 
but  it  is  very  hazardous  with  a  north.  On  the  north  side  of  this  island  is  the  best 
channel  to  anchor  in,  at  the  west  end:  you  may  sail  in  boldly;  and,  keeping  r 
good  look-out  for  a  few  rocks,  under  water,  which  are  close  to  the  shore,  yon 
come  into  an  anchorage  in  6  or  7  fathoms  of  Avater,  good  sandy  ground.  Thei^ 
is  a  channel  on  the  south  side;  but,  to  gain  it,  you  pass  between  the  reef  ant' 
keys,  and  must  be  well  acquainted  with  the  place. 

Quemada  Point  and  the  Horse  Race  lie  nearly  seven  leagues  S.  W.  i  W.  frof  , 
Cape  Honduras.  The  latter  is  a  rocky  reef,  stretching  from  the  point  four  miles 
to  the  N.  W.  and  has  been  named  from  the  ro  igh  appearance  of  the  sea,  as  it 
runs  over  it. 

Cutchabutan  Point  at  the  distance  of  six  and  a  half  leagues  to  the  westward  of 
the  Horse  Race,  fornis  with  the  latter,  a  bay,  called  the  Bay  of  Cutchabutan. 
Here  ships  may  anchor  in  5,  4,  and  3  fathoms  of  water,  but  entirely  exposed  to 
the  north  winds.  The  Hog  Islands  lie  to  the  northward  of  it.  The  point  on  the 
western  side  is  low. 

The  coast  hence  to  the  westward,  in  a  distance  of  about  16  leagues,  is  veiy 
imperfectly  known.  It,  however,  affords  no  harbour,  although  anchorage  may 
be  found  in  several  places  along  shore.  The  coast  is,  in  general,  bluff,  and  the 
land  in  the  interior  very  high.  Over  the  River  Congriero,  or  Congrehoy,  which 
is  about  five  leagues  from  Cutchabutan  Point,  it  is  remarkably  so,  and  serves  as  a 
mark  to  (hips  when  to  the  westward  of  Rattan,  at  the  distance  of  fifteen  or  six- 
teen leagjes  from  the  main. 


m 


418 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    IMLOT. 


Til  I'      ■  .        I 


I)u| 


Appearnnce  nf  ihe  Mgh  land  of  C'ongriero,  btaring  S.  by  }V,  12  or  13  leagvti 


The  Keys  called  the  Bishop  and  Clerks  lie  at  the  distance  of  about  fifteen  leagues 
to  the  westward  of  Cutchabutan  Point.  These  are  three  or  four  rocks,  above 
water,  noticed  in  the  preceding  description.  The  River  Leon,  about  a  league 
and  a  half  to  the  eastward  of  the  Bishop  and  Clerks,  was  formerly  a  noted  place 
of  trade  with  the  Spaniards. 

Punta  Sal,  described  in  page  4 1 5,  is  about  five  and  a  half  lej  »ne3  W.  N.  W.  |  W. 
from  the  Hishup  and  Clerks.  This  point  may  be  known  by  three  or  four  rocks, 
pretty  high  above  water,  and  larger  than  the  Bishop  and  his  Clerks:  they  lie 
about  half  a  mile  off  the  shore,  and  form  a  little  channel  practicable  for  small 
craft:  the  point  off  the  main  shore  appears  with  little  hills,  as  broken  land,  high 
and  low. 

The  anchorage  is  under  this  point  to  the  westward,  and  right  before  the  open- 
ing of  Puerto  Sal,  a  little  harbour  for  small  vessels.  In  18,  17,  16,  and  15,  fa- 
thoms of  water,  there  is  rocky  ground;  but  from  13  to  1£,  and  less,  you  may  corao 
with  safety  to  an  anchor,  in  fine  muddy  ground. 

The  Low  Point  of  Puerto  Caballos  lies  about  11  leagues  W.  by  S.  from  Point 
Sal ;  there  is  no  hi;^h  land  between  the  two  points  :  and  you  meet  with  twojarge 
rivers,  vi'i.  Rio  de  Ulua,  commonly  called  Rio  Lua,  and  Chamalugon,  at  both  of 
which  you  may  anchor,  in  very  good  muddy  ground,  with  a  sea-breeze.  To  the 
westward  of  the  Low  Point,  the  anchorage  lies  in  7,  6,  5,  fathoms  of  water, 
sand  ;  but  without  the  po'^t  you  have  muddy  ground. 

From  Puerto  Caballos  lo  Puerto  Omoa,  which  is  about  eight  or  nine  miles  far- 
ther to  the  S.  W.  by  W.  it  is  all  very  high  land  :  five  or  six  broken  hills,  appear- 
ing red,  lie  close  to  the  sea  between  the  two  places ;  and,  off  these  Red  Hills,  a 
stone  bank  stretches  to  the  northward  into  the  sea,  about  one  mile  and  a  half. 
You  should  go  no  nearer  in  shore  than  in  8  fathoms  of  water. 

From  Omoa  to  Golfo  Dulce,  the  sea-port  is  generally  very  low ;  but  the  inte- 
rior exhibits  very  high  land.     This  has  been  already  noticed. 

Captain  Hester  says,  "  The  windv/ard,  or  larb(>ard,  side  of  Omoa  is  a  low 
sandy  point,  running  off  towards  the  sea,  full  of  high  mangrove-trees;  and  hav- 
ing a  look-out  house,  which  is  very  discernible.  This  makes  the  Bay  of  Omoa 
very  safe  in  a  north,  and  equally  secure  in  all  winds.  You  may  come  as  nigh 
the  Windward  Point  as  you  please:  quite  close  to  it  there  are  6  fathoms;  and, 
about  a  cable's  length  from  it,  17,  16,  15,  14,  12,  9,  8,  7,  6,  5,  4^,  and  3,  fathoms 
of  water :  this  depth  runs  from  the  point  as  far  as  the  river  :  you  will  have  from 
17  to  12  fathoms,  when  you  come  to  sail  in,  and  you  luff  as  near  as  you  can  to 
the  point.  If  you  cannot  lie  in  the  bay,  it  is  best  to  come  to  an  anchor  in  12  fa- 
thoms, and  warp  up  in  the  bay,  and  moor  the  ship.  You  must  not  come-to  near 
on  the  side  of  the  river,  nor  where  the  houses  of  the  town  stand,  but  you  may 
go  as  nigh  as  you  please  to  windward.  You  will  have  12  fathoms  of  water  near 
the  wharf  at  the  fort.  The  river  lies  to  the  westward  of  the  town,  and  has  the 
following  depths:  from  12  to  9,  8,  7,  6,  5,  4ii,  3,  and  2i,  fathoms  of  water;  about 
a  cable's  length  from  off  its  mouth,  you  will  have  7  fathoms,  and  so  ou  to  2j. 
When  you  are  at  anchor  at  Omoa,  if  the  weather  be  clear,  you  may  see  Cape 
Tres  Puntas  about  W.  by  N.  or  W.  N.  W.  The  land  to  the  westward  of  Omoa 
is  very  high,  and  remarkable  by  three  or  four  peaks  or  sugar-loaves  considerably 
higher  than  the  rest." 

Port  Omoa  to  Golfo  Dulce,  at  the  S.  W.  end  of  the  Bay  of  Honduras,  from 
Captain  Speer. — "  The  course  is  westerly  to  Point  Buenavista,  which  is  very  low. 
Then  it  is  W.  N.  W.  to  Cape  Tres  Puntas:  between  the  two  points,  about  4 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


419 


miles  from  the  ra»ln  shore,  you  may  come  to  anchor  in  eo  or  15  fathoms,  and 
less  water,  muddy  [ground.  Having  passed  Capi!  Tres  Puntas,  you  open  Golfo 
Duice,  and  steer  for  it  S.  S.  VV. 

The  S.  W.  bottom  of  the  Onlfof  Honduras,  into  wliicli  you  enter,  after  hav- 
ing doubled  Cape  Tres  Punfas,  is  generally  iinown  by  the  n;iinc  of  the  Gulf  of 
Amati(|ne;  and  the  moutli  of  the  Rio  Duke  lirs  about  «  leamies  S.  by  W.  from 
Capo  Tres  Puntas;  you  must  ro  by  your  lead,  and  will  have  from  9  to  3J,  or  3, 
fathoms.  The  mouUi  of  the  river  shows  itself  very  plainly  ;  you  bring  it  to  bear 
S.  S.  W.  and  an«.-hor  in  what  water  you  please,  mooring  the  ship  S.  E.  and  N.  W. 

Five  or  six  leagues  N.  II.  by  E.  of  Rio  Dolce,  and  within  the  land,  is  the  Ool- 
feto,  or  Little  Gulf,  called  formerly  Pirates'  Lagoon,  and  Lake  St.  Thomas  :  it  is 
three  or  four  leagues  broad,  and  as  many  deep ;  the  laud  round  it  being  very  low 
near  the  sea,  with  large  manchioneal  bushes,  but  very  high  within  the  country. 
This  gulf  is  known  by  a  remarkable  table-mountain  to  the  southward  of  it. 


Swan    Islands,   Bonacca,    Rattan,    Southern   Fonr   Keys  and  Reef, 

Turneff,  and  Glover's  Reef. 


but  the  inte- 


SWAN  ISLANDS,  the  Santanilla  of  the  Spaniards,  are  two  small  low  islands, 
with  bushes,  and  of  importance  only  as  a  point  of  departure.  The  position  of  the 
middle  of  them,  as  deduced  from  the  observations  of  Captains  J.  Burnett  and  W. 
J.  Capes,  is,  latitude  17°  25',  in  longitude  83°  35'.  The  bearing  and  distance,  from 
the  S.  W.  end  of  Jamaica,  are  W.  S.  W.  J  W.  ninety-six  leagues.  They  are 
surrounded  by  a  reef,  excepting  on  the  S.  W.  side,  where  there  is  anchorage. 
The  isles  are  uninhabited  ;  but  they  are  occasionally  visited  by  people  from  the 
Grand  Cayman  to  the  N.  E.  for  the  purpose  of  catching  turtle :  and  there  is 
some  fustic  here.  Upon  the  reef,  on  the  south  side  of  the  isles,  there  are  several 
small  keys.  As  the  current  here  commonly  sets  to  the  W.  N.  W.  the  course 
from  the  west  end  of  Jamaica  should  be  W.  S.  W.  about  eighty-eight  leagues,  or 
until  you  get  into  the  parallel  of  the  islands,  whence  you  pursue  a  more  westerly 
course. 

BONACCA,  the  Guanaja  of  the  Spaniards,  lies  at  the  distance  of  forty-four 
leagues  S.  W.  by  W.  i  VV.  from  the  Swan  Islands,  and  will  be  made  by  steering 
S.  W.  \  W.  thirty-nine  leagues,  the  land  being  high.  The  east  end  of  this  island 
is  ten  and  a  half  leagues  N.  by  E.  I  E.  from  Cape  Honduras,  and  is  situated  in 
lat.  16°  30',  long.  85°  47'.  A  reef  incloses  the  north  and  west  coasts  of  the 
island. 

The  interior  of  this  island  is  highly  picturesque,  and  profusely  covered  with 
trees.  The  harbour  is  on  the  south  side.  On  coming  in,  run  to  the  southward  of 
the  island,  and  be  sure  not  to  approach  within  less  than  a  mile  of  the  east  end. 
You  will  then  see  a  range  of  ten  small  keys  ;  run  close  to  them.  They  nearly 
join  to  each  other,  in  form  of  a  half  circle,  on  the  edge  of  the  reef.  The  west- 
ernmost of  the  range,  called  Half-moon  Key,  is  the  largest,  and  has  coco-nut 
trees  on  it :  run  close  to  the  west  end  of  this  key,  and,  bring  the  key  to  bear  S.  E. 
let  go  your  anchor  in  6  fathoms  of  water.  About  half  a  mile  to  the  S.  W.  of 
this  place  there  is  a  dangerous  shoal,  on  which  the  Swift,  a  sloop  of  war,  struck, 
in  1764,  and  was  thereby  obliged  to  throw  her  guns  overboard.  This  shoal 
stretches  S.  W.  towards  a  large  key,  called  South-west  Key. 

There  are  several  keys  within.  To  go  to  the  watering-place,  you  must  steer 
west  from  the  Half-moon  Key,  for  the  Middle  or  Trolan  Key.  Keep  close  to 
the  west  p  int  of  the  latter,  in  passing,  in  order  to  avoid  a  bed  of  rocks  that 
stretches  N.  E.  up  the  harbour.  From  Trolan's  Key  steer  W.  by  N.  for  the 
key  which  is  nearest  to  the  island,  and  called  Frenchman's  Key.  Run  round  the 
north-east  side,  between  it  and  the  island,  observing  to  keep  close  to  the  reef,  to 
keep  a  good  look-out,  to  fetch  as  near  as  you  can  to  the  key,  and,  when  it  bears 
east  from  you,  to  let  go  your  anchor.    There  are  several  patches  of  rocks  lying 


420 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


i| 


to  the  southwanl  and  westward  ;  but  as  the  water  is  very  clear,  those  dangers 
may  be  avoided. 

Of  Bonacca  the  Derrotero  says,  It  lies  nearly  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  in  which  direc- 
tion it  is  about  three  leagues  in  extent,  nearly  surrounded  by  keys  and  reefs, 
extending  a  league  outward.  The  anchorage  at  the  east  end  is  very  good  during 
norths.  It  may  happen  that,  on  any  one's  taking  this  anchorage,  with  a  storm 
from  N.  or  N.  W.  or  W.  he  may  not  be  able  to  enter  on  one  stretch  ;  but,  in  this 
case,  he  may  tack  or  work  between  the  keys,  «n  the  supposition  that  it  will  be 
sufficient  to  give  thoni  a  birth  of  a  cable's  length. 

RATTAN. — This  island,  lying  to  the  westward  of  Bonacca,  was  visited  by 
Captain  Hendeison,  in  1804,  is  considerably  larger  than  many  of  the  West-India 
Islands  which  are  cultivated.  Its  soil,  and  the  natural  advantages  connected  with 
it,  might,  perhaps,  be  found  in  no  degree  inferior  to  any  of  them.  It  abounds 
with  deer,  wild  hogs,  Indian  rabbits,  and  birds  of  many  species  :  parrots  are  in- 
numerable; and  tliHir  incessant  noisy  chattering  may  be  heard  at  a  considerable 
distance  from  the  shore.  Tlie  Spaniards  have  a  kind  of  military  station  or  look- 
out post  on  this  island  :  tliis,  liowever,  may  rather  be  considered  Jis  intended  to 
establish  tlwir  rii^ht  to  it  by  occupancy  than  as  a  mean  of  defence,  as  the  force 
does  not  consist  of  more  tiian  five  or  six  men.  The  small  isles  to  the  east  of 
Rattan,  nanitd  Helena,  Moratte,  and  Barburat,  are  situated  on  a  flat,  extending 
from  the  former,  and  separated  from  each  other  by  narrow  channels.  They  are 
frequented  liy  turtles.  Captain  Henderson,  on  his  return  from  Mosquita,  was 
driven  by  str<;ss  of  weather  to  take  shelter  under  Barburat,  on  the  beach  of  which 
he  constructed  a  hut,  but  could  not  gain  the  interior  without  great  diflicuUy  ;  the 
surface,  though  high,  being  nearly  covered  with  impenetrable  underwood.  In 
the  vicinity,  pieces  of  wreck,  masts,  spars,  &,c.  ik,c.  presented  themselves  in  every 
direction  :  and,  from  an  elevavion,  subsecpiently  gained,  the  high  dark  mountains, 
of  tile  continent,  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Truxiilo,  were  distinctly  seen.  The 
distance  between  Barburat  and  Moratte  is  about  one  league.  Oil'  the  eastern 
part  of  Barburat  are  several  low  keys ;  and  care  must  be  taken,  especially  in  the 
night,  not  to  haul  in  too  soon. 

The  Harbour  of  Rnltan,  named  Port  Royal  Harbour,  is  on  the  S.  E.  side  of 
the  island.  It  is  formed,  on  the  south,  by  several  islets  and  shoals,  which  form 
two  entrances.  The  largest  of  thvan  is  called  Georg-e's  Isle  ;  and  the  best  chan- 
nel is  at  the  west  end  of  it.  On  proceeding  from  the  eastward,  give  the  isles  of 
Barburat,  8ic.  a  good  birth.  Endeavour  then  to  make  George's  Isle,  which  lies 
abreast  of  the  (irst  high  land,  and  may  be  known  by  the  water's  appearing  be- 
tween it  and  Rattan.  Keep  close  to  tiie  reef  which  lies  on  the  south  side  of  this 
isle;  and,  when  you  are  at  the  west  end,  steer,  between  the  reefs,  N.  W.  by  N. 
or  N.  N.  W.  It  is  bfst  to  kt.'ep  close  to  the  island  reef,  because  that  is  the 
weather-side.     The  lepths  are  from  7  to  12  fathoms. 

As  the  water  is  clear,  the  reefs  and  sands  may  easily  be  seen,  provided  that 
you  keep  a  good  look-out.  When  yon  have  advanced  within  the  reefs,  bring 
the  west  end  of  George's  Isle  to  bear  south,  and  anchor  in  9  or  10  fathoms. 
You  must  anchor  near  the  isle,  because,  f»n  the  north  shore,  and  thence  towards 
(lie  middle  of  the  harbour,  there  are  rocks  and  broken  ground,  on  which,  how- 
ever, there  is  not  less  th  in  3  fathoms  of  water. 

At  the  N.  K.  end  of  tlie  hiirbour  there  is  a  small  key,  called  Careening  Key, 
where  vessels  may  he  cleaned  and  repaired.  This  is  llie  best  anchorage  for  ves- 
sels that  come  in  to  stay  for  any  considerable  time. 

The  currents,  henvihout,  are  very  uncertain.  With  a  north  wind  the  current 
runs  strongly  to  I  lie  [<).  S.  E.  from  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  and  up  along  the  coast 
of  the  main.  Tiie  commanders  of  vessels,  on  the  first  appearance  of  bad  weather, 
ou::,ht,  therefore,  to  get  into  this  harbour  as  soon  as  possible. 

\ii  Port  Royal  Harbour,  ships  formerly  obtained  wood ;  and  they  procured 
water  from  a  rivulet  in  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  harbour.  The  harbour  is  capa- 
cious  enough  to  contain  twenty  or  twenty-five  sail  of  the  line.  The  heights  of 
Rattan  command  such  an  extensive  prospect,  that  no  vessel  can  pass  to  the  Bay 
of  Honduras  without  being  seen  front  them. 

Rattan  is  ubuut  aj  leugues  in  length,  nearly  in  a  true  east  and  west  direction. 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


421 


r,  those  dangers 


;."i 


l^ 


! 


west  direction. 


On  its  south  coast  there  are  several  small  harbours  to  the  westward  of  Port-Roy- 
al ;  particularly  one,  formerly  called  Dixon's  Cove,  about  ai4  leagues  from  the 
west  end,  and  just  to  lecvard  of  the  second  [)oiutthat  comes  in  sight  in  running 
down  from  Port  Royal.  This  is  a  convenient  place,  during  north  winds,  for  ships 
to  shelter  in,  when  bound  to  the  bay,  or  to  British  Yucabm. 

To  enter  Dixon's  Cove  from  the  eastward,  run  to  loeward  of  the  above^en- 
tioned  point,  and  you  will  see  a  kt^y  just  to  leeward  of  it:  keep  round  the  bank 
that  lies  off  this  key,  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  and  you  will  open  the  harbour,  which 
lies  N.  by  W.  and  S.  by  E.  In  running  in  you  will  aee  another  key  to  leeward 
of  you,  with  a  reef  running  to  the  eastward,  which  always  shows  itself.  Keep 
mid-channel,  which  is  all  deep  water,  from  20  to  ID  fathoms.  Run  in  till  you 
bring  the  west  end  over  the  key  on  which  the  little  hut  stands,  and  anchor  in  the 
middle  of  the  harbour  in  about  15  or  16  fathoms,  clay  ground,  and  moor  with  a 
kedge  to  the  eastward ;  you  will  then  be  abreast  of  a  creek  on  the  east  side  of  the 
harbour.  The  banks,  on  both  sides  of  the  harbour,  are  very  steep,  from  12  to  3 
fathoms,  not  half  a  ship's  length  from  the  deep  water  to  the  shoalest.  This  is  a 
fine  outlet,  as  you  may  be  at  sea  in  ten  minutcjs  ;  and,  in  case  of  accidents,  a  ves- 
sel may  be  saved  here  without  anchors  or  cables,  by  running  up  to  the  N.  E. 
part  of  the  harbour,  which  is  all  soft  mud.  The  latitude  of  this  harbour  is  16<^ 
20'  N.     If  your  vessel  work  well,  you  have  room  to  turn  in. 

In  going  down  to  the  bay,  if  you  meet  with  northerly  or  N.  W.  winds,  come 
in  for  this  harbour.  In  coming  in  from  the  westward,  you  will  see  the  above- 
naentioned  point  about  Si  leagues  from  the  west  end.  Run  in  well  with  the  west 
key  until  you  come  on  the  bunk  into  7  fathoms:  keep  along  in  that  depth,  hauHng 
round  the  key  until  you  open  the  small  key  ;  then  edge  oflF  into  deep  \yater,  as  the 
reef  is  very  steep,  and  luii'  in  till  you  are  abreast  of  the  creek  on  your  sUirboard 
hand,  or  the  west  end  over  the  small  key  ;  anchor  in  about  16  fathoms  and  moor, 
as  before  directed,  but,  if  you  anchor  in  the  middle  of  the  harbour,  you  have 
room  to  swing  any  way,  and  come  to  sail  from  your  kedge,  when  you  go  out. 

When  bound  from  the  bay,  with  a  good  sea-lireeze,  you  need  not  go  out  of  this 
Iftirbour  before  two  o'clock,  P.  M.  as  you  will  be  down  to  the  west  end  time 
enough  to  take  your  departure  in  the  evening. 

Right  olfthis  harbour,  to  the  southward,  at  four  miles  ofT,  is  a  dangerous  shoal, 
which  h;»s  not  above  10  feet  on  it. 

Running  along  this  bank,  about  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  harbour,  and 
about  the  same  distance  from  the  shore,  a  shoal  spot  has  been  passed  over,  of  a 
foot  less  than  3  fathoms,  when,  in  a  cast  or  two,  it  deepened  to  3}  and  4  fathoms, 
then  to  6  and  7  fathoms.  Loaded  vessels  of  a  great  draught  of  water,  when  run- 
ning up  or  down,  should  not  come  .nearer  the  land  than  four  or  five  miles,  to 
keep  clear  of  these  banks.  There  is  a  good  channel  between  them  and  the  is- 
land, but  it  is  very  narrow.  When  you  bring  the  west  key  of  Dixon's  Cove  N. 
N.  E.  you  are  then  to  the  eastward  of  the  foul  ground,  and  may  haul  in  for  the 
harbour.  When  you  come  within  four  mile',  of  the  west  end,  going  to  the  west- 
ward, you  are  to  the  westward  of  the  bank. 

This  harbour,  Dixon's  Cove,  has  been  the  more  particularly  described  frora  its 
great  utility  for  siiips  that  may  want  a  place  of  safety  in  bad  weather. 

The  Deirotero  describes  RatUin  Jis  extending  nearly  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  N.  W. 
aboi't  10  leagues,  with  the  reef  to  the  eastward  of  its  east  point  twelve  miles  more. 
It  adds,  tliat  the  north  side  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  a  league,  and 
those  unaccjuainted  should  even  give  it  a'wider  birth.  "  The  south  coa°t  has 
many  good  anchorages,  but  they  are  difficult  to  take,  on  account  of  their  entran- 
ces being  foni,  with  reefs.  Port-Royal  is  a  very  proper  place  to  pass  the  sc  i- 
son  ol  the  norths  in.  The  entrance  to  it  is  by  a  narrow  channel,  which  the  reefs 
leave  open,  and  which  is  scarcely  half  a  cable's  length  broad.  The  eastern  side 
of  this  little  channel  is  a  reef,  extending  to  the  West  from  George's  Island,  which 
cannot  be  mistaken  fbr  either  of  the  other  keys,  as  they  are  very  small.  To  take 
this  harbour,  not  having  a  pilot,  it  is  necessary  to  buoy  the  entrance,  which 
ought  always  to  be  taken  with  the  wind  from  the  N.  E.  to  East,  or  from  West  to 
South,  in  order  to  enter  quickly. 

"  On  making  Rattan  from  the  South  or  S.  W.  care  must  be  taken  so  as  to 


422 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


avoid  the  rocky  shoal  which  lies  off  the  S.  W.  coast,  at  the  distance  of  four  miles  ; 
the  channel  between  which  and  the  shore  is  obstructed  by  several  shallow  spots." 

Directions  for  Sailing  hence  to  the  Bay,  or  to  British  Yucatan,  are  given  here- 
after. We  shall  here  only  add  that,  in  proceeding  from  R.^ttan,  on  a  course  to 
the  southward  of  west,  the  island  UtUa  must  be  carefully  avoided,  and  should  not 
be  approached  within  the  distance  of  two  leagues,  as  the  north  side  is  surrounded 
by  dangerous  reefs. 

The  SOUTHERN  FOUR  KEYS  and  REEF— The  islets,  kc.  thus  denomi- 
nated, are  the  easternmost  of  those  lying  off  the  Coast  of  British  Yucatan. 

The  Eastern  Reef,  on  which  these  keys  are  situated,  is  about  9  leagues  in 
length,  from  North  to  South.  On  the  north-east  part  of  it  is  a  key,  called  the 
Northern  Key,  which  is  covered  with  mangroves.  The  Four  Southern  Keys, 
above  mentioned,  are  those  on  th'?  southern  end  of  the  reef;  and  of  these  the 
westernmost  i^  round  and  small,  and  has  tho  app-earance  of  a  man's  hat ;  it  is  cal- 
led Hat  Key,  and  may  he  known  by  its  having  no  tree  upon  it.  To  the  north  of 
Hat  Key  is  Long  Key,  which  is  covered  with  trees.  About  two  leagues  to  the 
eastward  of  Long  Key  is  Saddle  Key  ;  and  to  the  S.  E.  of  this  is  Half-moon  Key, 
now  distmguished  by  a  light-house. 

From  the  west  end  of  Rattan,  Half-moon  or  the  Easternmost  Key  bears  N.  W. 
i  N.  21  leagues  distant;  being  situated  in  17°  12J' N.  and  87°  26' W.  From 
Half-moon  Key,  westward,  the  edge  of  the  reef  or  bank,  which  may  be  seen, 
forms  an  indented  curve  ;  and  as,  to  the  southward  of  Hat  Key,  it  extends  in  a 
S.  S.  E.  direction,  it  altogetiier  forms  a  bay,  in  the  shape  of  a  half-moon.  Here 
you  must  be  cautious  not  to  get  embayed ;  as,  with  the  wind  blowing  at  East  or 
E.  S.  E.  the  swell  is  great,  and  the  sea  breaks  very  high.  Hat  Key  bears  nearly 
S.  VV.  by  W.  i  W.  eight  miles  from  Half-moon  Key.  The  extremity  of  the  reef 
bears  from  the  latter  S.  W.  3  leagues. 

TURNEFF,  the  Torranof  of  the  Spaniards,  lying  to  the  westward  of  the 
Eastern  or  Four  Keys  Reef,  is  a  considerable  extent  of  low  land,  now  broken 
into  various  forms,  and  so  far  overflown  by  the  sea  as  to  appear  like  an  assem- 
blage of  small  islands.  It  is  surrounded  by  a  reef,  or  very  nearly  so,  and  its  ex- 
tent north  and  south,  is  about  thirteen  leagues.  Key  Bokel,  the  southernmost 
part  of  this  land,  may  be  known  by  its  being  round,  low,  and  small,  with  bush- 
es on  it.  The  course  and  distance  from  the  end  of  the  Southern  Keys  Reef  to 
this  key  are  W.  by  S.  seven  leagues. 

Vessels  coming  in,  may  keep  close  round  Key  Bokel,  and  anchor  on  the  bank 
within  it,  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  looking  out  for  a  clear  spot  to  let  go  the  anchor  iu, 
as  there  is  much  foul  ground,  Avith  heads  of  coral  rocks.  Bring  the  key  to  bear 
E.  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  E.  or  for  anchorage  you  may  run  to  the  northward,  along 
Turneff,  until  you  open  the  third  boca  or  lagoon,  and  there  anchor  in  4  fathoms ; 
and  you  will  have  smoother  riding,  in  case  of  a  north  wind. 

GLOVER'S  REEF.— This,  as  well  as  the  other  parts  of  the  bay,  already 
described,  has  been  very  erroneously  represented.  The  bank  is,  in  generai,  very 
dangerous.  With  tlie  common  trade-wind  the  current  sets  strongly  over  it  to 
the  westward.  The  following  description  has  been  communicated  by  Captain 
J.  Burnett. 

"  Glover's  Reef,  which  has  two  sand  spots  on  the  north  end,  lies  nearly  south 
from  Hat  Key,  distance  fifteen  miles,  tending  thence  S.  S.  W.  i  W.  to  the  south 
end  of  the  reef,  on  which  there  are  five  islands  or  keys.  These  may  easily  be 
known  from  the  Southern  Four  Keys,  as  they  are  quite  bold  on  the  south  side; 
the  keys  are  very  little  detached ;  and  nearly  all  of  the  same  height,  with  nume- 
rous coco-nut  trees  on  them.  If,  from  want  of  observation,  and  strong  current, 
you  may  have  gotten  to  the  southward  of  Glover's  Reef,  and  the  wind  be  so  far 
to  norihward  that  you  cannot  sail  north  for  Key  Bokel,  night  coming  on,  you 
should  anchor  to  leeward  of  the  key,  where  therjws  good  ground,  in  from  7  to 
17  fathoms,  within  half  a  mile  of  the  keys,  and  there  either  wait  for  a  wind,  oir 
till  you  send  into  English  Key  fur  a  pilot."  ' 


« 


;  4' 


i 

I 


Of 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN     COAST     PILOT. 


433 


of  four  miles ; 
halLuw  spots." 
re  given  here- 
on a  course  to 
and  should  not 
i  is  surrounded 

.  thus  denomi- 
''ucatan. 
t  9  leagues  in 
ey,  called  the 
outhern  Keys, 
il  of  these  the 
}  hat ;  it  is  cal- 
'o  the  north  of 
leagues  to  the 
'alf-moon  Key, 


itward  of  the 
,  now  broken 
ke  an  assem- 
90,  and  its  ex- 
southernmost 
11,  with  bush- 
Keys  Reef  to 

r  on  the  bank 
he  anchor  iu, 
6  key  to  bear 
iward,  along 
in  4  fathonas ; 

bay,  already 
general,  very 
y  over  it  to 
by  Captain 

nearly  south 
to  the  south 
ay  easily  be 
e  south  side; 
with  nume- 
ong  current, 
ind  be  so  far 
ling  on,  you 
in  from  7  to 
r  a  wind,  or 


The  Main-Land  and  Keys  of  British  Yucatan,  commonly  called  British 

Honduras. 

Of  the  variegated  keys,  reefs,  and  flats,  which  lie  between  Turneff  and  the 
main  land  of  Yucatan,  no  adequate  idea  can  be  gained,  but  by  reference  to  the 
chart;  and,  with  such  reference,  an  enlarged  description  becomes  unnecessary. 
In  all  directions  the  approach  to  the  coast  is  attended  with  anxiety  and  danger ; 
and  the  difficulty  of  the  navigation  is  demonstrated  by  the  numerous  renniins  of 
vessels  that  have  been  wrecked  en  the  keys  and  reefs.  During  the  continuance 
of  the  north  winds,  the  danger  becomes  increased :  the  weather  in  that  season 
being  usually  hazy  and  thick  ;  and  the  currents,  which,  in  this  part  of  the  world, 
are  peculiarly  governed  by  the  influence  of  the  winds,  run  with  such  extraordi- 
nary and  unequal  rapidity  as  frequently  disappoints  all  calculation,  and  renders 
every  precaution  ineffectual.  Another  particular,  worthy  of  remark,  is  that,  so 
deceitful  in  appearance  are  the  different  keys,  from  the  general  resemblance  that 
they  bear  to  each  other,  that  the  most  experienced  seaman,  when  placed  among 
thera,  frequently  becomes  distressingly  perplexed  from  the  impossibility  of  ac- 

jituation.     To  strangers,  on  making  this  coast,  it  is  sel- 


On  taking  a  departure  for  the  eastward, 


curately  ascertaining  his  situation, 
dom  safe  to  proceed  without  a  pilot, 
the  hazard  appears  to  be  still  greater. 

The  Town  of  Balize,  which  is  situated  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  of  the  same 
name,  is  the  only  regular  establishment  which  the  English  settlers  have  formed 
in  this  country.  It  is  immediately  open  to  the  sea.  The  regularity  of  the  winds 
which  prevail  here,  and  which  impart  salubrity  to  the  settlement,  will  be  hereaf- 
ter noticed. 

The  River  Balize,  from  which  the  establishment  takes  its  name,  and  from  hav- 
ing the  oldest  and  most  valuable  mahogany-woods  connected  with  it,  claims  the 
first  consideration.  Some  of  the  wood-cutters  have  placed  themselves  as  high 
up  this  river  as  SJOO  miles  from  its  entrance :  from  the  sea  to  this  distance  it  is 
perfectly  navigable  for  all  the  purposes  required ;  the  continuance  of  it  beyond 
this,  though  conjectured  to  be  great,  is  not  accurately  known. 

The  Sibun,  or  SIteboon,  as  it  is  usually  called,  is  the  next  river  of  importance 
in  the  colony.  The  navigation  of  this  is  much  bolder  than  that  of  the  Balize, 
and  vast  quantities  of  mahogany  are  floated  down  its  main  stream  and  the  nu- 
merous branches  Avhich  fall  into  it.  Its  entrance  from  the  sea  is  little  more  thin 
three  leagues,  to  the  southward,  from  the  town  of  Balize. 

Many  of  the  keys  contiguous  to  the  coast  are  of  considerable  extent ;  and  in 
some  of  them  particular  spots  are  cultivated,  chiefly  by  the  people  engaged  in 
turtling  and  fishing. 

St.  George's  Key,  (the  Cayo  Casina  of  the  Spaniards)  about  four  leagues  dis- 
tant, in  a  N.  E.  direction,  from  Balize,  is  a  most  agreeable  and  healthful  spot,  and 
contains  a  number  of  good  houses. 

The  long  isle,  called  Ambergris  Key,  to  the  northward  of  Balize,  is  said  to 
abound  with  extensive  fresh-water  lakes ;  to  produce  logwood,  and  the  more 
valuable  kind  of  dye-wood,  named  Brasiletto.  In  most  seasons  it  is  plentifully 
stocked  with  many  kiuds  of  game. 

At  the  beginning  of  October,  the  Norths,  or  north  winds,  commence,  and  ge- 
nerally continue,  with  little  variation,  till  the  return  of  February  or  March. 

Captain  Henderson  says  that,  *'  whilst  these  winds  last,  the  mornings  and  eve- 
nings are  cold,  frequently  unpleasantly  so;  and  what  in  this  country  is  under- 
stood by  a  wet  north,  might,  perhaps,  furnish  no  very  imperfect  idea  of  a  No- 
vember day  in  England ;  a  dry  north,  on  the  contrary,  is  healthful,  agreeable, 
and  invigorating.  The  state  of  the  weather,  during  the  norths,  is  extremely  va- 
riable; for  a  depression  of  more  than  15"^  in  the  thermometer  has  been  remark- 
ed in  the  space  of  a  few  hours.  Thunder-storms  are  frequent  during  the  greater 
part  of  the  year ;  and  in  the  hottest  montlas  are  often  tremendously  violent." 


424 


ULUNrs  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Directions  for  sailing  to,  tra,  and  from,  the  Bay  of  Honduras,  by  Oapt 

fVm.  Johnson  Capes, 

Directions  for  sailing  from  J amaicA  to  BaMze.  » 

Take  your  departure  from  the  west  end  of  Jamaica,  and  steer  W.  S.  W.  by 
compass,  until  you  get  into  latitude  16°  S5',  then  run  on  that  parallel  till  you 
make  the  island  of  Bonacca,  the  latitude  of  which  is  16°  33',  longitude  85°  47' 
W.  (The  northern  and  easternmost  part  of  the  island  is  here  meant.)  Bonac- 
ca is  a  bold  high  island,  and  may  be  made  by  night,  if  required,  as  I  do  not  know 
of  any  danger  that  extends  more  than  one  or  two  miles  off  on  the  north  side. 
Some  navigators  endeavour  to  make  Swan  Islands,  but'  that  cannot  be  of  any 
advantage  to  *hera,  and  is  the  contrary ;  for  if  you  ertpect  to  be  near  them  in  the 
night,  you  get  very  anxious,  as  they  are  very  low,  and  you  may  run  on  them  be- 
fore you  perceive  your  danger.  I  always  give  them  a  good  birth,  that  is,  keep 
to  the  southward,  for  the  current  about  these  islands  is  very  deceiving  and  un- 
certain, but,  for  the  most  part,  sets  to  the  northward  and  westward.  In  one  of 
my  voyages  to  the  bay,  I  was  set  thi«  ly-four  miles  to  the  northward,  and  sixty- 
ty-four  miles  to  the  westward  of  account. 

Bonacca  ought  to  be  made  early  in  the  day,  so  that  you  may  run  down  to  the 
middle  or  west  end  of  Rattan  by  the  close  of  the  day,  to  be  ready  to  take  your 
departure  for  the  Southern  Four  Keys,  at  six,  seven,  or  eight  o'clock,  according 
to  the  breeze  you  have. 

If  you  take  your  departure  from  the  middle  of  Rattan,  steer  W.  N.  W.  i  W. 
and  on  no  account  whatever  run  more  than  forty-five  miles  from  Rattan  before 
day-light :  if  you  run  more  than  that  distance,  you  are  in  danger  of  running 
your  Vw^d  on  the  reef,  where  there  is  no  possibility  of  paving  her;  for  in  a 
short  time  she  will  be  a  perfect  wreck.  At  daylight  make  all  sail  possible,  and 
if  you  do  not  see  the  keys,  you  will  soon  lift  them.  The  principal  key  >s  called 
Half-Moon  Key,  owing  to  its  having  a  sandy  bay  in  the  shape  of  a  half-moon  ; 
on  this  key  there  is  a  light-hotise,  elevated  about  fifty  feet  from  the  surface  of 
the  sea:  its  latitude  is  17°  12'  N.  and  longitude  87°  26'  W.  On  this  key  the 
pilots  live ;  a  set  of  useful,  active,  steady,  sober  men.  These  keys  ought  to  be 
made  as  early  in  the  day  as  possible,  in  order  to  insure  you  an  anchorage  before 
night. 

It  frequently  happens  that  vessels,  after  leaving.  Rattin,  are  becalmed  during 
the  night,  and,  in  consequence,  they  will  not  make  Half-Moon  Key  before  the 
afternoon.  In  this  case.  I  would  advise  the  master  to  brace  sharp  up  on  a  wind, 
and  beat  to  windward  all  night,  tacking  every  two  hours;  for  it  is  to  be  particu- 
larly noticed  that  the  current  sets  strongly  down  on  the  Southern  Four  Keys 
Reef.     Several  vessels  have  been  lost  on  this  reef,  owing  to  their  lying-to. 

If  it  should  happen  that  the  pilots  are  all  in  Batize,  (which  is  very  seldom  the 
case)  you  must  make  all  sail  possible.  Keep  a  man  at  the  mast-head,  and  yo'^ 
vrill  soon  discern  the  key  called  Hat  Key ;  it  is  about  the  size  of  a  long-boat, 
without  any  trees  upon  it.  You  may  round  the  reef,  within  two  or  three  cables' 
length,  as  there  is  no  danger  but  what  you  may  see ;  for  soundings  extend  but  a 
short  distance  from  the  blue  water.  After  you  have  rounded  the  elbow  of  the 
reef,  steer  west  a  liltle  southerly,  and  you  will  very  soon  lift  the  Island  of  Tur- 
nefiT:  at  the  south  end  of  this  island  is  the  little  key,  called  by  the  pilots.  Key 
Bokel.  (At  one  time  the  pilots  used  to  reside  on  this  key,  and  now  frequently 
rendezvous  here.)  You  may  round  this  key  by  your  lead ;  and,  if  it  be  later 
than  3  P.  M.  you  must  anchor  here  for  the  night.  The  anchorage  iu  about  one 
mile  from  the  key  ;  that  is,  bring  the  key  to  bear  about  S.  E.  but  your  lead  and 
your  eye  is  the  best  pilot  for  this  anchorage.  You  anchor  on  a  fme  white  sand- 
bank ;  the  first  sounding  you  >vill  get  is  about  10  fathoms :  run  into  3  or  4  fa- 
thoms, clewing  your  sails  up  as  fast  s'l  possible,  and  giving  the  vessel  at  least  40 
fathoms  of  cable ;  for  the  sand  is  so  very  hard,  that,  with  a  short  scope,  you 
will  certainly  drift  off  the  bank;  then  you  have  no  bottom.  If  this  should  be 
Ihe  case,  you  roust  heave  up  immediately,  and  make  sail  again,  to  get  on  the 


BLUNT  S  AMCiUCAN  COAST  PILOT. 


426 


hank.  I  nnchoretl  here  one  Anu  ni;$ht  about  11,  P.  INI.  let  f;o  iny  anchor  In  i  fli* 
thorns,  gave  the  ship  30  fathoms  of  cable ;  shit  never  looked  at  it,  but  droTc  off 
the  hank.  It'  it  hud  not  been  a  fine  night,  I  should  have  been  compelled  to  cut 
from  my  anchor.  I  would  not  recommend  any  commander  to  anchor  on  this 
ground  with  a  chuin-cabie ;  at  any  other  part  of  the  bay  a  chain  is  preferable. 
This  hank  abounds  with  fish.  In  the  morning  (if  you  have  not  by  this  time  got 
a  pilot)  get  under  way  at  daylight,  and  steer  N.  W.  for  English  Key,  distaact 
about  twenty  miles. 

English  Key  is  situated  on  the  soutli  side  cf  the  channel,  and  is  a  small,  loir, 
sandy  key,  with  two  or  three  tiistched  houses  on  it.  A  pilot  lives  on  it.  On  th« 
opposite  side  of  the  channel,  that  is,  on  the  north  side,  is  another  key,  about  the 
same  size,  called  Goff's  Key  ;  about  half  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  which  is  a  lit- 
tle sand-patch,  nearly  even  with  the  water,  called,  by  the  pilots,  the  Sand  Sort, 
This  is  the  place  you  rauyt  anchor  at,  fur  it  is  impossible  for  a  stranger  to  pro- 
ceed any  farther  without  a  pilot ;  for  the  channel  becomes  so  very  intricate,  and 
the  various  keys  have  such  a  similitude  in  their  appearance,  that  a  description  of 
them  would  be  a  loss  of  time,  and  of  no  use  to  the  commander  of  a  vessel** 

Directions  for  anchoring  at  the  Sand-hore* 

When  you  have  made  out  English  "Key  and  GofTs  Key,  run  for  them ;  but 
mind  and  keep  nearer  to  Golf's  Key  than  to  English  Key,  as  there  is  a  dangerous 
reyf  off  English  Key.  Bring  Goff's  Key  to  bear  about  N.  N.  W  ;  keep  your  lead 
going,  and  you  will  come  on  a  fine  sand-bank  ;  then  anchor  in  five  or  bix  fathoms, 
good  holding  ground.  The  pilots'  mark  for  anchoring  here  is,  to  bring  three  lit- 
tle keys,  situated  to  the  northward  of  Goff's  Key,  called  Curlew,  Serjeant's,  and 
Pancligut  Keys,  a  little  open  to  the  eastward  of  Goff's  Key.  I  have  rode  very 
frequently  with  them  all  in  one.  From  this  anchorage  your  ship  can  be  seen 
from  the  Govornnient-House,  and  in  a  few  hours  you  will  have  a  pilot. 

Directions  in  case  of  being  misled  by  current.       '^ 

In  case  the  current,  or  any  other  casualty,  should  set  you  to  the  northward  of 
Half-moon  Key,  and  you  fall  in  with  the  middle  of  the  Southern  Four  Keys  Reef, 
I  would  still  recommend  you  to  haul  the  ship  to  the  northward,  and  go  round  the 
north  end.  On  the  north  end  of  this  reef  is  a  key,  called,  by  the  pilots.  North 
Key ;  after  you  round  this  key,  make  all  sail  for  Mauger  Key,  the  northernmost 
key  on  Turneff :  after  you  round  Mauger  Key,  steer  S.  S.  W.  and  you  will  soon 
lift  English  and  Goft'*s  Key ;  then  anchor  us  before  directed. 

Directions  for  returning  from  the  Hay, 

On  your  leaving  Balize,  I  would  recommend  your  taking  the  pilot  as  far  as 
Mauger  Key,  as  I  have  known  many  vessels  run  upon  Turneff  Reefs,  owing  to 
their  having  discharged  the  pilots  at  English  Key.  Endeavour  to  leave  Mauger 
Key  at  the  close  of  the  day,  so  as  to  be  the  length  of  the  Triangles  by  day-light. 
There  is  a  very  dangerous  shoal  on  the  west  side  of  the  Triangles,  that  has  pick- 
ed up  many  ships. 

The  current,  in  general,  sets  rapidly  to  the  westward,  by  the  south  end  of  the 
Triangle  ;  a  ship  should,  therefore,  never  attempt  to  pass  to  windward  of  this 
reef.     On  a^tproaching  the  western  edge  of  the  Triangle,  keep  your  lead  going. 

From  the  channel  within  Mauger  Key,  if  the  wind  is  free,  steer  north;  if  not, 
steer  north  by  east.  After  you  are  to  the  northward  of  the  Triangles,  shape  your 
course  for  Cape  Antonio.    From  the  Triangles  the  current  runs  from  ten  to 

"  '"    '  "''        '■  ■  ■'■      ■  — —    ■      ■  III      ■        I  I  ■■■■!  .      I  H    ■    !■       ■■■     »^lMI»Wi1^^^— — MM^^W^I     11^- 

*  Copt  of  a  Notice,  dated  Lloyd's,  10th  May,  1823.— Many  vessels,  at  different  times, 
having  been  lost  on  the  Mnin  Reef,  when  going  into  Honduras,  from  being  unable  to  distin* 
f;uisb  English  and  Goii''8  Keys,  (between  winch  is  the  only  ship-channel  into  Balize,)  from  the 
many  other  keys  on  the  Main  Reef,  Major  General  Codd,  Li»  Majesty's  Superintendant,  hM 
eaased  a  flagstaff,  sixty  feet  high,  with  an  octagon  figure  on  the  top,  to  be  erected  on  Englidl 
^«7-  (Signed)  John  Yovno,  Ageat  for  Honduru. 

54 


m 


BLUM'  S  AMERICAPI  COAST  PILOT. 


thirtj  mileii  per  day  to  the  northward  :  this  I  have  ascertained  from  the  mean  of 
twelve  voyages. 

N.  B.  It  will  srmetimps  occur  that  persons  offVr  themsplvps  for  pilots,  whoarr 
entirely  ignorant  of  tlie  channels  into  Balize :  guard  against  this,  as  much  as 
possible. 

It  was  observed,  in  formrr  Directions,  that,  "  should  a  A-essel  be  constrained 
to  come  out  by  the  southern  passage,  or  to  the  southward  of  Turneff,  the  wind 
which  prevents  her  progress  northward,  may  also  prevent  her  from  lying  up  east 
from  Key  Bokel.  In  this  case,  bear  up  and  run  to  the  southward,  between  To- 
bacco Key  and  Glover's  Reef,  especially  if  you  liave  not  day-light  to  get  to  the 
northward  and  eastward  of  the  north  end  of  the  reef.  Run  to  the  southward  till 
you  see  the  small  keys  on  the  soutii  end  of  the  reef,  and  there  you  may  bring 
up  till  morning,  bringing  the  keys  about  N.  E.  There  is  mostly  a  strong  lee- 
current  about  Glovers  Reef,  which  has  deceived  many,  who  have  lost  their  ships 
in  the  night,  expecting  to  have  weathered  the  north  end  of  Glover's  Reef,  which 
is  steep-to  in  most  places." 


Remai'ks  on  the  Northern  Triangle,  Cosumel,  and  the  Coast  of 

Yucatan. 

The  shoal  called  the  NORTHERN  TRIANGLE  lies  at  the  distance  of  13 
leagues  to  the  northward  of  Mauger  Key.  Captain  Burnett  says,  when  the  trade- 
wind  prevails,  a  current,  often  very  strong,  sots  down  between  Mauger  Key  and 
the  Triangle ;  there  dividing  itself,  it  sets  to  the  southward,  between  Turneff 
and  the  Main  Reef,  and,  to  the  northward,  between  the  Triangles  Reef  and  Am- 
bergris Key.  With  a  wind  from  East  to  E.  S.  E.  as  you  sail  to  leeward  of  the 
Triangle,  you  will  have  a  strong  current  in  your  favour. 

The  south  end  of  the  Triangle  Reef  is  from  four  to  five  miles  broad  ;  it  makes 
in  two  points,  between  which  there  is  a  snndy  ppot.  From  the  S.  \V.  point,  the 
reef  tends  N.  by  W.  J  W.  to  the  great  key  on  the  centre  of  the  reef;  from 
thence  N.  by  E.  to  the  two  keys  on  the  north  end.  The  course  along  shore  to 
Cosumel  is  N.  by  E.  i  E.  and  tiie  ^horc  pretty  hold. 

COSUMEL. — This  island,  which  has  been  variously  represented,  is  celebrated 
as  the  spot  whereon  mass  was  first  said  by  a  monk  in  the  suit  of  Cortez.  It  is 
covered  with  timber,  cocoa-nut,  and  ban-.ina-trees,  and  is  said  to  be  inhabited  by  a 
few  Indians,  of  whose  ancestors  it  was  a  sacred  place  of  pilgrimage.  Captain 
Burnett  says,  "  The  south  point  of  Cosumel  is  in  latitude  20°  4'  N.  the  north 
point  in  latitude  20'^  .Sfi',  longitude  80'^  50'.  There  is  a  good  channel  between  it 
aud  the  main,  being  quite  bold  on  both  sides;  but  a  reef  extends  to  the  north- 
ward of  Cosumel,  from  the  N.  W.  point,  which  may  always  be  seen  in  daylight, 
with  northerly  winds.  The  current  runs  nearly  two  and  a  half  miles  an  hour  in 
this  channel,  and  along  shore,  till  lost  in  the  Mexican  Sea.  If,  after  leaving  the 
Northern  Triangle,  you  can  lay  N.  E.  by  N.  you  may  fetch  to  windward  of  Cape 
Antonio,  and  may  thence  pursue  your  course  through  the  Strait  of  Florida,  &.c." 

COAST  OF  YUCATAN.— The  last  edition  of  the  Spanish  Directory  describes 
the  N.  E.  coast  and  Isles  of  Yucatan  as  follow  : 

The  land  or  corner  of  Yucatan,  called  Cape  CnlocJn\  sends  out  various  .islets  at 
a  short  distance  from  it,  named  Cancuv,  Muscens,  lilanquUla,  and  Coiitoy :  the 
last,  which  is  the  northernmost,  and  separated  from  the  coast,  is  tliirteen  miles 
from  Cape  Catoche :  its  north  end  lying  truR  east  and  west  with  the  cape:  it 
stretches  from  N.  by  W.  i  W.  to  S.  by  E.  5  E.  five  miles.  A  bank  stretches  o\it 
two  miles  from  its  north  end,  in  the  same  direction,  with  frwm  S  to  4  and  H  fa- 
thoms depth  of  water,  on  rock.  From  its  soutli  pjirt  a  spit  also  projects  towards 
the  north  end  of  Mugeres  Island,  leaving  a  {)assage,  with  three  fathoms  of  water. 
to  the  anchorage  of  the  last-named  island.  Contoy  has  an  anchorage  for  frigates, 
nearly  on  the  parallel  of  its  northern  point,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  find  a  half. 
in  4,  4j,  and  .O  fathoms,  on  sand ;  the  depths  decrease  towards  the  south  to  a  mile 
and  a  half,  where  2i  fathoms  are  found,  near  the  edge  of  the  bank;  the  latter 
continues  from  the  north  point  of  the  Contoy.  and  afterwards  turns  to  the  west, 
towards  Cape  Cntorhe.     Those  bound  to  this  anchorage  should  kf-ep  in  mind 


V^.i 


1' 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


427 


om  the  mean  of 


that  tlie  waters  ordinarily  rua  to  th«  N.  VV.  and  lint  at  W.  i  S.  five  miles  from 
the  north  end  of  Conto; ,  there  is  a  shoal,  with  two  iathoma  of  water.  The  tides 
here  are  irregular,  and  fall  18  inches  in  the  season  of  the  breezes,  or  trade-winds. 
This  anchorage  is  safe ;  bur  at  other  times  you  ought  to  be  aware  of  on-shore 
winds.    At  the  south  end  water  in  holes  may  be  found. 

Blanquilla  Island  dues  not  properly  deserve  tlie  name,  as  it  is  united  to  the 
coast  by  a  small  tongue  or  sand,  and  therefore  it  is  properly  a  peninsula. 

Cancun  is  nearly  united  to  the  sliore,  forming  two  mouths ;  the  southern  named 
Nisuro,  and  the  northern,  v/liicii  has  an  islet  in  the  middle,  Cancun:  we  know 
nothing  of  any  anchorages  here,  though  some  charts  represent  anchorages  at  the 
southern  part  of  Cancun. 

Mugerts,  or  Woman's  Island,  stretches  six  and  a  quarter  miles  S.  S.  E.  I  E.  and 
N.  N.  VV.  .^  W.  with  two  islets,  one  at  each  end  of  it.  It  is  three  miles  from  tho 
coast.  On  the  west  side  of  this  island,  and  at  its  middle,  there  is  a  cove,  formed 
hy  two  islands,  where,  according  to  report,  there  is  a  good  anchorage,  an  English 
frigate  having  been  in  it  careening  in  loOl. 

Cape  Catoche  has  two  islets  along  its  shore,  which  extend  out  scarcely  &  mile 
from  it,  and  form,  with  Jolvas  Island,  two  uiouths,  called  Joujon  and  Nueva,  fit 
for  canoes  only.  From  the  cape  to  the  west  the  coast  bends  something  to  tho 
south,  eighteen  miles,  to  the  western  extremity  of  Jolvas  Island,  which  forms 
the  Bocas  of  Conil.  This  coast  is  foul,  for  a  rocky  bank,  with  little  water,  ex- 
tends out  two  miles.  The  Island  Jolvas  and  the  coast  form  a  lake,  obstructed 
by  various  islets  and  grassy  3])ots,  and  fit  for  small  canoes  only. 

From  the  Bocas  or  Mouths  of  Conil,  the  coast  tends  ^V.  ^  S.  eighteen  and  a 
half  miles,  to  Monte  Cuyo  Point,  whence  it  follows  W.  iN.  thirteen  and  a  half 
miles,  to  the  Colorados  Point ;  and  from  llience,  \V.  i  S.  nine  miles,  and  S-  W. 
by  VV.  J  W.  eight  miles,  to  the  west  point  of  the  Lagoon  of  Mursinic,  or  Lagar- 
tos,  in  which  small  canoes  only  navi^jate. 

From  Colorados,  or  lied  Point,  a  bank  stretches  out  to  the  N.  W.  with  2,  3, 
and  4  fathoms  of  water,  on  a  rocky  bottom,  and  on  which,  in  1780,  the  frigate 
Santa  Marta  was  lost,  at  the  distance  of  18ii7  varas  (nearly  840  English  fathom») 
from  the  coast. 

A  point  extends  W.  S.  W.  J  W.  seven  and  a  half  miles,  from  the  west  point 
of  Lagartos,  or  Lizard's  River,  and  tlience  the  Look-out  (Vigia)  of  Igil  bears 
VV.  S.  VV.  distant  sixty-four  miles;  and  in  the  intermediate  space  are  the  Bocus 
of  Silan,  and  the  Vigias  (Lookouts)  of  Silan,  Santa  Clara,  and  Telchaac :  at  the 
first  and  last,  wafer  may  be  |)rocured. 

From  the  Vigii*  of  Igil  the  coast  follows  S.  W.  by  VV.  \  VV.  thirty-one  miles,  to 
the  east  ])oint  of  the  Castle  of  Sisal,  and  forty  miles  to  the  western  front  of 
Mount  Note-Perdcras,  at  the  foot  of  which  is  Piedras  Point.  On  the  interme- 
diate coast  are  the  Vigias  of  Chujulu,  Chuhurna,  and  finally,  that  of  the  Castlq 
of  Sisal. 

All  the  coast  from  Cape  Catoche  is  very  low,  with  shoal  'vater,  and  without 
any  remarkable  objects,  excepting  the  cairn,  called  Monte  Cuyo,  at  the  River 
Lagartos,  Avhich  is  only  a  heap  of  stones,  raised  by  the  Indians  for  a  mark,  and 
is  known  by  its  resemblance  to  the  figure  of  a  hat ;  and  the  little  wooded  hills 
of  Angostura,  Yalcopo,  and  Puerto  de  Mar,  which  are  between  the  vigia  of  the 
River  Lagartos  and  the  cairn  or  Monte  Cuyo,  which  is  fourteen  miles  to  the 
west  from  the  west  end  of  Jolvas  Island. 

Near  the  west  end  of  Jolvas  Island  is  the  Corsario  Shoal,  which  has  been  de- 
scribed. 


Remarks  on  navigating  off  the  Coast  between  Carthagena  and  Cape 
Catoche,  and  on  the   General  JVavigation  of  the   Caribbean  Sea, 
from  leeimrd  to  windward. 

[From  the  "  Derrotero  de  las  Antillas,"  ifc] 

It  has  been  shown  that,  between  Carthagena  and  Nicaragua,  there  is  a  change 
•f  wind,  which  comes  to  the  westward  ir  th».  months  Irom  July  to  January,  and 


428 


BLV.fT'S    AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


I 


whfeh  duM  not  axtend  out  to  tea  higher  thnn  Iti^  or  IS°  of  latitude.  We  have 
alto  said  that,  in  general,  the  currents  on  this  cuust  follow  the  course  of  the  winti!); 
and  ire  bare  aUo  inculcated  th<>  necessity  there  is  of  making  some  point  to  wind- 
ward of  your  port  of  destination,  in  places  where  tiu;  winds  blow  constantly 
from  a  certain  point  of  tlie  horizon  ;  auid,  keeping  all  this  present,  or  in  remem- 
brance, it  will  naturally  occur  to  consideration,  that,  in  order  to  navigate  from 
Carthagena  to  any  point  of  the  c(»ast,  situated  to  tlie  west,  in  the  season  of  the 
breezes,  it  is  only  necessary  to  shape  n  direct  course,  and  without  more  care  than 
is  requisite  to  prevent  any  injury  from  errors  of  situ:>tion,  hy  keeping  sii'licicntly 
to  windward :  thus,  also,  to  gain  way  from  Cartiuigena,  to  the  west,  in  the  rainy 
season,  you  ought  to  ascend  to  the  parallel  of  1-Ji^  or  hP,  in  order  to  get  into  the 
breezes,  so  that  with  them  you  may  }!;ain  the  necessary  longitude  ;  having  made 
which,  you  can  run  down  to  make  your  destined  port,  hut  takii:g  care  to  make 
your  land-fall  to  windward  of  it;  that  is,  at  some  point  to  the  westward  ot  it. 
This  advice  comprehends  all  wt!  can  state  on  this  head  without  descending  to 
fuinutio),  which  is  not  necessary  :  and  wo  shall  only  »dd  that,  hy  genera!  prac- 
tice it  Is  known  that  it  is  sutlieieut  to  gain  the  longitude  of  the  Escudode  '  eragua. 
In  order  to  make  the  west  point  of  Porto  litllo,  and  to  enter  or  to  make  the  port 
with  certainty. 

In  the  same  way  this  advice  may  he  usefid  to  those  who,  from  the  westward., 
■e«:k  to  make  Cartha^rna ;  for  thus,  in  the  rainy  st-ason.  they  ought  to  make  di- 
rect courses  :  thus,  niso,  in  the  time  of  the  hrcites,  it  is  necessary  to  increase  your 
latitude ;  for,  although  in  higher  parallels  you  may  not  hive  the  wind  decidedly 
free,  yet  so  that  you  can  avail  yours«'lves  of  the  winds  from  N.  to  W.  which,  in 
that  season,  are  common  on  theMoscpiito  coast;  and  farther  <»iit,  from  the  prox- 
imities of  that  coast,  the  breezes  are  neither  so  stroni^,  nor  th(?  currents  so  lively.  We 
remark  here  that,  on  the  meridian  of  Kscudo  de  Veragua,  the  norths  from  the 
Mosquito  const  arc  felt,  and  so  sharply  sometimes,  as  to  render  it  necessary  to 
lie-to;  from  hence  arises  the  knowledge  (or  rather  evi-.h-nce)  that  If,  with  the 
breezes,  you  take  the  starboard-tuck,  whr-ther  sailing  from  Darim  or  Vurto  Bella, 
it  will  lead  the  vessel  to  places  where  the  winds  from  N.  to  W.  are  more  frequent, 
and  with  them  the  larboard-tack  may  be  taken,  in  order  to  g;«in  Carthagena  with 
convenience,  and  iu  a  moderate  space  of  lime.  It  does  not  appear  correct  to 
dictate  rules  on  subjects  which  have  not  been  sufiiciently  tried  ;  but  we  are  com- 
pletely convinced  that  such  is  the  practice  which  ought  to  be  followed,  and  even 
ID  far,  as  we  tliink,  that  the  starboard-taek  should  be  prolonged  even  to  the 
length  of  getting  upon  the  soundings  utf  the  Mosquito  coast;  for  ascertaining  weii 
your  situation  on  it,  and  making  for  the  Island  «»f  St.  Andre,  or  that  of  Provi- 
dence, you  m.iy,  from  either  of  them,  catch  Carthagena  on  one  stretch  ;  or  even, 
if  it  could  not  be  done  on  one  stretch,  it  nuiy  be  done  in  very  few  days.  We  know 
that  this  was  done  by  Captain  Manuel  tie  Castillo,  who,  having  the  brigantiiie 
AUrto  under  his  command,  dismasted,  on  an  expeditiim  he  made  in  January, 
1805,  for  the  purpose  of  ascertaining  the  situations  of  the  frontier  shcats  of  the 
Mosquito  shore,  got  up  to  the  Island  of  Santa  Catalina,  whence,  having  raised  a 
jury-mast  in  place  of  his  main-mast,  h.e  made  sail  iu  the  beginning  of  February, 
■od  made  the  Rosario  Islands  on  the  tith  of  the  same  month  :  bo  that  he  made  his 
whole  navigation  in  less  than  eight  days  :  and  this,  being  in  the  month  of  Febru- 
ary, shows  well  that  the  winds  are  sulhtiently  free  to  shape  a  course.  We  have 
nothing  farther  to  add  to  what  we  have  already  saiil  in  the  description  of  this 
coast,  and  shall  only  mention  that,  to  make  St.  Juande  JSicaragua,  it  is  necessary 
to  be  very  sure  of  your  latitude ;  and  that,  at  all  seasons,  it  is  better  to  make  the 
land  to  the  north  than  to  the  south  of  it. 

For  what  relates  to  the  Mosquito  Coast  and  its  frontier  sea,  we  shall  say,  that 

Erudence  recommends  it  to  the  mariner  not  to  risk  himself  in  the  tract  compre- 
ended  between  the  soutliern  parallel  of  Providence,  and  the  northern  one  of  thf 
Baxo  Nucvo  (New  Shoal ;)  nor  between  the  hieridian  of  that  shoal  on  the  cast, 
and  the  western  meridian  of  the  Mosquiio  Keys  ;  for  in  this  tract  are  many  shoals, 
of  which  the  situations  are  doubtful,  and  you  may  run  much  risk  of  falling  (or 
rather  stumbling)  upon  some  of  them. 
Thus  all  that  we  huru  to  advance  on  tiie  matter  is,  that  cither  the  said  paral 


^'" 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


459 


iide.  We  have 
e  of  tho  wimls; 
i  point  to  wind- 
ow constantly 
t,  or  in  remcni- 
)  navigate  fronn 
ti  season  of  the 
more  cnre.  tKan 
ling  sufficiently 
i"st,  in  the  rainy 
:  to  get  into  the 
;  having  made 
'.'^  care  to  make 
westward  of  it. 
I  descending  to 
y  g;etier.il  prac- 
udude  1'eragtia, 
I  make  the  port 

1  the  westward^ 

ght  to  make  di- 

:(i  increase  yonr 

wind  decidedly 

:o  VV.  which,  in 

from  the  prox- 

itssolivdy.  We 

lorths  from  the 

•  it  necessary  to 

lat  if,  with  the 

I  or  rurio  Bdlo, 

:  more  frequent, 

arthu^enu  with 

;)ear  correct  to 

ut  we  are  com- 

wed,  and  even 

led  oven  to  th»; 

icertaining  well 

that  of  Trovi- 

|retch  ;  or  even, 

nys.  V\'e  know 

tlie  hrigantiiie 

le  in  January, 

Y  siiiials  of  tho 

laving  raised  a 

of  Fehruary, 

It  he  made  his 

|)nlh  of  Febru- 

se.     We  have 

ription  of  this 

it  its  necessary 

r  to  make  the 

[shall  say,  that 

tract  compre- 

lern  one  of  the 

M  on  the  cast, 

smanyshoaU, 

of  falling  (or 

le  said  paral 


Ida  should  be  croiscd  well  to  windward  of  the  eastern  shoals,  or  by  the  channel 
which  the  coast  forms  with  the-iMosquito  Keys.  Vessels  from  Cartliagena  may 
always  pads  to  windward  of  the  easternmost  hanks;  (uit  those  from  points  farther 
to  the  west,  who  seek  to  navigate  to  the  nortli ;  for  instance,  those  that  sail  from 
Duritn  and  Porto  lidlo,  must  go  by  the  channel  of  the  coast  to  ilouble  Cttpe 
Cracias  aDios,  and  get  to  the  west  of  the  Carattisca  Shoals,  whence  they  can 
shape  the  courses  that  suit  to  make  Cuba.  The  navigation  of  thij  chaimel  is 
very  safe,  as  before  noticed  ;  for  the  lead  is  an  infallible  guide  in  it,  at  all  times, 
and  Under  all  circimistances.     {Set  poff t.f  4{)ij  and  41'i.) 

J'rom  what  wo  have  said,  it  follows  that  every  one,  bound  to  any  port  of  tho 
Mosquito  coast,  should  shun  getting  among  the  frontier  shoals  of  it ;  and,  to  go  to 
it,  it  is  necessary  to  go  either  to  the  south  or  n(»rth,  as  may  best  suit,  from  the 
place  the  vessel  is  in.  To  go  to  the  coast  by  the  south,  you  ought  to  get  up«)n 
the  soundings  of  it,  on  the  parallel  of  the  Corn  Islands,  n  little  more  or  less ;  and, 
once  aware  of  your  situation  on  the  soundings,  you  have  only  to  direct  yoiu'self 
on  them  to  your  point  of  destination,  keeping  in  mind  what  we  have  said  in  tho 
description. 

To  go  to  this  coast  by  the  north,  it  is  necessary  to  approach  the  shore  of 
Black  River,  by  the  nieritlian  of /Jreiccr's  Lagoon,  in  order  to  be  clear  of  the  Cay- 
mans and  Caratasca  Reefs,  which,  being  steep-to,  are  very  dangerous.  To  make 
the  land-fall  with  certainty,  it  is  adviseable  to  sight  the  Swan  Islands  ,*  and  from 
thence,  with  a  south  course,  you  will  fetch  the  coast  on  the  proper  meridian. 

To  make  this  coast,  with  or  without  seeing  the  Swan  Islands,  and  being  satis- 
fied as  to  your  longitude,  and  that  you  are  to  the  west  of  the  Caratasca  shoals, 
you  have  nothing  more  to  attend  to  than  the  lead  ;  for,  as  we  have  shown  in  the 
description  of  this  coast,  it  has  such  resrular  soundings,  and  the  depth  diminishes 
so  gradually,  that  it  is  impossible  for  any  one  who  sounds,  to  he  lost ;  and  yon 
have  only  to  place  yourself  in  suitable  depth  to  run  to  the  eastward  to  double 
Cope  Gradas  a  Dios,  in  the  mode  and  form  we  have  stated  in  the  description,  to 
which  we  have  nothing  to  add. 

If  bound  to  the  Black  Rieer,  it  is  also  adviseable  to  make  the  Sican  Islands, 
and  to  steer  thence  S.  by  W.  TliC  currents  on  this  coast  are  very  uncertain,  al- 
though with  the  breeze  they  usually  run  to  the  N.  W.  and  thus  you  sometimes 
cannot  make  the  desii^d  point;  but  the  difference  cannot  be  great,  and  therelore 
the  error  may  be  easily  amep-.'.iu.  Those  who,  for  the  first  time,  g(»  on  this 
coast,  may  be  in  doubt  as  to  the  point  of  it  on  which  they  find  themselves ;  from 
not  knowing  the  land,  though  there  is  no  reason  for  doubt,  because  the  land,  from 
Brewer's  Lagoon  to  the  east,  is  all  low  land ;  and,  on  the  contrary,  to  the  we«t, 
it  is  very  high. 

In  the  navigation  which  is  made  to  tho  westward,  for  the  purpose  of  taking 
Puerto  Cavallo,  Omoa,  or  the  Gulf  of  Honduras,  it  is  necessary  to  pass  lo  tho 
fouth  of  Rattan,  and  north  of  Utila;  and,  having  aecertained  your  position  i»y 
the  latter,  steer  to  make  Poj'nf  ,!>«/,  as  we  have  shown  in  the  description,  in  order  to 
run  along  the  coast  from  it  to  the  port  of  destination  :  hut  much  attention  ought 
to  be  paid  to  the  weather  in  the  season  of  the  storms,  so  as  to  proportion  it  so  aa 
to  have  the  steady  breize  to  sail  in  from  Rattan  to  Port  Cavallo  or  Omoa  ;  for,  if 
you  are  caught  by  a  storm  to  the  west  of  Rattan,  it  will  not  fail  to  be  an  uncom- 
fortable time  to  any  one  obliged  to  spend  it  in  this  sea,  which,  in  all  directions, 
will  be  dangerous  at  night ;  as  it  would  also  be  to  run  to  take  the  slielter  of  Rat- 
tan, or  any  of  its  ports,  the  only  choice  that  remains  to  the  navigator ;  for  this 
requires  day-light  to  do  it  in  with  safety.  With  still  better  reason  every  one 
ought  to  proceed  from  Om«>a  to  the  Gulf  of  Honduras  Avith  the  established 
breeze;  and  every  one  sailing  in  this  sea,  in  the  vicinity  of  Omoa  or  Cavallo,  who 
perceives  any  appearances  of  a  coming  storm,  ought  to  go  into  one  of  these  har- 
bours, In  order  to  pass  the  storm  while  at  anchor,  and  sail  from  it  on  a  good  op- 
portunity  offering,  f.)r  the  purpose  of  doublirig  Cape  Three  Points  and  Point  Mo. 
nabique  in  good  weather. 

If  these  precautions  be  necessary  in  entering  the  Gidf,  they  are  the  same  in 
going  out  of  It ;  and  this  navigation  ought  to  be  made  by  taking  advantage  of  the 
iaad-brceze,  and  beating  to  windward  Avith  the  breeze  until  you  are  abreast  of 


430 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Omoii  or  Cavallo.     From  Onioa,  if  it  he  in  the  season  of  the  hiuezea,  or  from 
March  to  the  end  of  August,  you  ought  to  beat  to  windward  in  the  proximity  of 
the  coast,  as  far  as  the  meridian  of  Uarhurat,  prolonging  the  olT-shore  tacit  to 
eight  or  nine  leagues,  in  order  to  tack  in-shore  at  mid-day,  wliich  is  the  hour  the 
breeze  enters,  and  keep   on  till  the  beginning  of  the  night ;  when,  on  the  land- 
wind's  coming  off,  you  shi)uld  again  return  to  the  oir-shorc  tack  :  in  this  way  you 
may  contrive  to  make  your  tacks  iu  eight  points,  or  evyn  less,  with  evident  utili- 
ty.    On  this  navigation  you  ought  to  proceed  with  the  greatest  caution  ;  which 
we  need  hardly  remark,  as  the  inspection  of  the  Chart  will  show  the  necessity  of 
it.     In  the  season  of  the  norths,  when  you  think  the  weather  settled,  you  ought 
to  proportion  the  time  of  sailing  from  Onioa,  so  as  to  make  Rattan  with  good 
weather.     In  this  season  the  land-w>nds  blow  during  the  whole  of  the  night,  and 
the  greater  part  of  the  day,  and  allow  of  courses  being  made  to  the  east :  but  you 
ought,  in  the  first  place,  to  steer  to  the  N.  E.  for  the  purpose  of  getting  to  sea, 
and  rendering  the  in-shore  tack  with  the  breeze  longer  :  but  if,  in  this  situation, 
the  breeze  does  not  enter,  and  the  land-wind  continues,  you  ought  then  to  steer 
E.  by  N.  that  you  may  pass  to  the  north  of  Utila,  and,  if  the  weatlier  seems  set- 
tled, to  go  also  to  the  north  of  Rattan.     Being  so  far  advanced,  in  any  of  the  sea- 
sons, as  to  the  meridian  of  Barburat,  you  must  haul  by  the  wind  for  Cape  Cor- 
rientes,  in  the  Island  of  Cuba,  in  case  you  should  have  to  go  to  the  north;  keep- 
ing in  mind  that,  as  the  waters  generally  draw  toirards  the  N.  VV.  it  is  not  ad- 
viseable  to  follow  the  tack  to  the  west  with  winds  from  N.  E.  to  N. ;  but  you 
must  change  the  tack  to  E.  S.  E.  or  E-  that  you  may  not  approximate  too 
much  to  the  Northern  Triangle,  or  the  Island  of  Cosumel,  which  might  be  unsafe. 
To  conclude  this  subject,  we  shall  now  say  something  of  the  route  which  it  is 
adviseable  to  make  to  go  from  the  western  meridians  of  Cuba,  to  any  point  of 
the  coasts  of  the  Caribbean  Sea.     That  which  generally  has  hitherto  been  done, 
was,  to  run  out  by  the  Strait  of  Florida,  and  steering  by  high  latitudes  to  gain 
sufficient  longitude  afterwards  to  de.cend  to  the  south,  and  make  land  either  in 
the  Greater  or  Lesser  Ant'llas,  or  the  coast  of  Cumana  and  Carac.as,  after  the 
same  mode  as  vessels  bound  from  Europe.    This  navigation  is  undoubtedly  very 
good,  anu  well  considered;  but  it  has  been  taken,  in  general,  without  meditating 
on  the  advantages  of  the  navigation  within  the  Caribbean  Sea,  not  only  for  short- 
ness, but  for  safety. 

To  proceed  with  certainty  [on  the  subject,  it  is  necessary  to  remember  that, 
in  the  season  of  the  Norths,  there  is  much  facility  in  navigating  to  the  eastward 
bjf  the  south  of  Cuba,  llayti  or  St.  Domingo,  and  Porto  Rico;  and,  in  addi- 


tion, there  is  not  that  danger  which  might  occur  in 


to  the  north,  to  run 


out  through^the  Strait  of  Florida;  for,  although  in  the  Strait,  if  a  vessel  be  ma- 
naged with  skill,  there  is  no  great  risk,  yet,  before  entering  the  Strait,  there  is 
some ;  and,  with  a  north,  you  may  very  suddenly  get  upon  the  coast  of  Cuba, 
which  is  then  much  exposed,  and  unsafe.  With  such  Avinds,  also,  the  navigation 
by  the  strait  is  much  obstructed ;  while,  on  the  contrary,  it  is  facilitated  and  short- 
ened within  the  Caribbean  Sea:  and,  added  to  this  is,  the  greater  length  of  the 
voyage  by  the  strait,  than  l.»y  the  sea.  It  is,  therefore,  very  possible  that  shorter 
voyages  may  be  made  by  the  latter.  It  is  true  that  the  norths  are  neither  so 
strong,  nor  so  frequent,  to  the  eastward  of  tlie  eastern  meridian  of  Cuba,  as  they 
are  to  the  westward,^and,  therefore,  much  cannjt  be  reckoned  upon  them ;  and 
you  have  to  gain  upon  a  bow-line  all  the  longitude  that  remains  between  them 
and  the  meridian  of  your  place  of  destination  ;  but,  if  the  vessel  be  moderately 
tveatherly,  by  taking  advantagejof  the.daily  variations  of  the  breeze,  you  may  make 
very  advantageous  boards  or  tacks,  and  choosing,  tlw  parallels  between  15°  and 
16°,  in  which  the  currents  have  little  or  no  influence,  it  will  be  very  easy  to  gain 
the  required  longitude  in  a  short  time. 

From  March  to  June  is  the  time  when  it  is  adviseable  to  run  out  by  the  Strait 
of  Florida ;  for,  in  these  months,  the  breezes  are  very  strong,  especially  on  the 
Southern  Coast,  from  St.  Juan  de  Guia,  or  longitude  74°  W.  to  leeward  :  and, 
however  well-found  a  vessel  may  be,  some  damage  is  to  be  expected. 

In  the  other  months,  during  which  the  breezes  are  moderate,  the  land-winds 
more  fresh  and  certain,  and  the  currents  very  weak,  the  navigation  within  seems 


nLUNT  8  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


431 


lizea,  or  from 
proximity  of 
ihore  tacic  to 
the  hour  the 
on  the  land- 
thia  way  you 
evident  utili- 
ution  ;  whicli 
e  necessity  of 
;d,  you  ougiit 
m  with  good 
he  nighi,  and 
east:  hut  you 
getting  to  sea, 
this  situation, 
t  then  to  steer 
ler  seems  aet- 
ny  of  the  sea- 
br  Cape  Cor- 
north;  keej)- 
.  it  is  not  ad- 
I)  N.;  but  you 
)roximate  too 
ijrlit  be  unsa'e. 
ite  whicli  it  is 
)  any  point  of 
rto  been  done, 
titudes  to  gain 
I  land  either  in 
c.as,  after  the 
louhtedly  very 
put  meditating 
only  for  short- 
member  that, 
the  eastward 
and,  in  addi- 
north,  to  run 
essel  be  ma- 
trait,  there  is 
oast  of  Cuba, 
le  navigation 
ted  and  short- 
ength  of  the 
e  that  shorter 
,re  neither  so 
Cuba,  aslliey 
n  them ;  and 
ictween  tliem 
c  moderately 
ou  may  make 
veen  15°  and 
easy  to  gain 

by  the  Strait 
icialiy  on  the 
Eeward :  and, 

Id. 

]e  land-winds 

(within  seems 


|>rcferahle  :  for,  by  keeping  near  to  the  main  land.  In  the  south,  the  nay'igator  will 
keep  clear  of  the  hurricanes  ;  a  circumstance  which,  of  itself  alone,  is  enough  to 
induce  one  to  take  this  determination  ;  but,  in  this  case,  it  is  necessary  to  stretch 
across,  so  soon  as  you  can  )>as3  to  windward  of  the  frontier  shoals  of  the  Mos- 
quito shore,  so  as  to  reach  the  coast  of  the  main,  and  make  your  navigation 
along  it. 

From  what  has  been  stated,  it  results  that,  in  the  time  of  the  moderate  breeze» 
and  of  the  norths,  that  is  to  say,  from  July  to  March,  it  is  adviseable  to  prefer  the 
route  mthin  ;  and,  in  that  of  the  strong  breezes,  or  from  March  to  June,  without, 
l)y  running  through  the  Strait  of  Florida. 

As  practical  illustrations  of  this  subject,  we  will  cite  the  route  iiv7/jmraade  by 
the  Naval  Lieutenant,  Don  Josef  Prima  de  Rihera,  commanding  a  merchant- ves- 
sel, which  he  conducted  from  Vera-Cruz  to  La  Guayra,  in  January,  1803;  and 
the  route  without,  made  in  March,  1795,  by  the  squadron  under  the  command  of 
Lieutenant-General  Don  Gabriel  de  Aristizabnl,  which,  when  compared,  will  af- 
ford a  good  idea  of  both,  and  he  examples  for  those  who  may  practise  either. 

1.  Don  Josef  Primo  de  Ribcra  sailed  from  Vera-Cruz  on  the  30th  of  December, 
1803,  and,  upon  the  7th  of  January  following,  at  dark,  he  found  himself  10  miles 
to  the  west  of  Cape  Corrientes,  in  Cuba  ;  from  this  point  he  continued  working 
to  windward,  on  both  tacks,  availing  himself  of  the  variations  of  the  breeze  un- 
til the  10th,  Avhen  a  north  came  on,  with  which  be  m;<de  a  course  to  the  south  of 
the  Bivora  Bank;  or  Pedro  Hhoals,  having  previously  made  (he  Great  Cayman. 
On  the  llth,  in  the  evening,  the  north  terminated,  leaving  him  !ii  lat.  16°  3'  and 
long.  78°  17' :  until  ihc  19th,  he  continued  to  beat  to  windward  on  both  tacks,  in 
between  16°  and  1 7^  of  latitude,  on  which  day,  having  good  observations  for  lon- 
gitude, which  placed  him  in  74^  40',  he  determined  to  cross  over  to  the  Spanish 
Main,  which  he  did;  and  on  the  22d,  before  dark,  he  then  recognised  the  Snoity 
Mountains  of  Sta.  Marta,  whicii  he  marked  at  S.  19°  W.  true;  and,  on  the  fol- 
lowing day,  he  made  Cape  la  Vela :  thence  he  persevered  in  beating  to  windward; 
and,  not  being  able  to  get  through  the  strait  between  the  Island  of  Oruba  and  tho 
coast  of  Para^uana,  he  went  outside,  prolonging  tb.e  stretch  well,  in  order  to 
shun  the  currents  which  are  in  tlic  vicinity  of  tliat  strait :  he  afterwards  follow- 
ed the  other  tack,  in  order  to  pass  between  Oruba  and  Cura^oa,  and  then  conti- 
nued beating  up,  between  these  islands  and  the  coast,  to  La  Guayra,  which  was 
his  port  of  destination,  and  in  which  he  anchored  on  the  4th  of  February,  at  8 
A.  in  the  morning :  thus  his  voyage  from  Cape  Corrientes  was  made  in  twenty- 
seven  days. 

2.  The  squadron  of  General  Arisliznhal  sailed  from  Havana  on  the  27th  of  Fe- 
bruary, 1795.— On  the  5th  of  M.ircli,  they  found  themseives  clear  of  the  Strait  of 
Florida,  and  continued  between  the  latitude  of  28°  and  29°,  until  the  14th  of  the 
same  month ;  when,  finding  they  were  in  longitude  60°  17',  they  began  to  reduce 
their  latitude,  by  steering  about  S.  S.  E.  with  which,  being  on  the  21st  in  lat.  19°, 
and  near  the  longitude  of  54°,  they  mended  their  course  to  S.  S.  W.  with  which, 
on  the  27th,  they  were  in  lat.  11°,  and  longitude  57°,  whence  they  proceeded  to 
the  Avest,  and  anchored  in  Trinidad,  on  the  29th  of  March,  in  thirty  days  passage. 

It  is  to  be  understood  that  these  reilections  have  not  been  given  so  much  with 
the  view  of  persuading  mariners  to  adopt  the  route  proposed,  within  the  Carib- 
bean Sea,  as  with  the  view  of  promoting  future  consideration  and  experiments  on 
the  subject. 


i-n: 


■4* 


I  t 


432 


RX.U.N1  9    AUEBICAM    COAST    PILOT. 


OBAV.  ZZV. 


-»•#••••• 


Tht  COASTS  and  HARBOURS  of  the  MEXICAN  SEA  or  GULF 

of  MEXICO. 


[This  chnptcr  includes  all  the  n;ivi;;ntion  of  the  Mexican  Sea  or  GuU*  of  Mex- 
ico, from  Cape  Catochc  to  the  Mississippi.] 

Cape  Catoclie  to  Point  Xicalango. 

The  N.  E.  land  or  knee  of  Yucatan  has  several  islands  at  a  short  distance  from 
It,  as  represented  on  the  new  chart ;  the^e  are  Cancun,  Mugeres,  Blanquilla,  and 
Contoy;  the  last,  n-jiich  is  the  nortiiernmost  one,  lies  about  seven  miles  from  thft 
main  coast;  its  shore  is  clear,  and  you  may  pass  at  two  miles  from  it,  in  d  fa- 
thoms :  between  it  and  the  coast  there  appears  to  he  anchorage;  but  this  part  Is 
imperfectly  known.  The  north  point  of  Contoy  lies  nearly  east,  true,  twelve 
miles  from  Cape  Catoche. 

From  the  Hocas  de  Conil,  the  coast  continues  to  the  W.  bvN.  about  fifty 
miles,  to  tlie  Rh  Las^artos,  (Lizard  lliver)  whence  it  inclines  W.  S.  W.i  W.  the 
distance  of  thirty-live  leagues  to  Punta  Piedias,  or  Rocky  Point.     All  the  coast 
fronj  Cape  Catoche  is  very  low  and  flat,  witiiout  any  remarkable  objects  upon  it, 
<;xc»'pting  a  Cairn,  or  little  mount  of  stones,  intentionally  raised  by  the  passing 
Indians  on  the  very  beach  of  La});artos,  which  may  be  known  by  its  resemblance 
to  a  hat :  to  this  follows  the  Vigia,  or  Look-fH'*,  of  the  River  Lagartos;  next 
to  it  is  that  of  SUuii,  where  w;Uer  may  be  procii.>-u  with  facility.  To  the  Look- 
out  of  Silan  follows  thiit  of  Santa  Clara,  to  which  succeeds  that  of  Tetchaac, 
where,  also,  water  may  be  procured ;  next  comes  that  of  Ygil,  then  that  of  Chu- 
burna,  and  to  this,  finally,  the  Castle  of  Sisal.     None  of  these  Look-outs  fVi' 
gias)  nor  the  cairn  of  Lagartos,  nor  Castle  of  Sisal,  can  be  seen  farther  off  the 
shore  than  from  6  fatiioms  of  water.     From  the  Cuyo  or  Cairn  at  Lagartoa,  to 
Chuburna,  you  may  anchor  without  four  in  from  4  fathoms  outward ;  but  not 
nearer  land,  as  there  are  many  stones,  shoals,  and  banks  of  rocks,  w^hich  cannot 
be  easily  .ascertained  by  the  lead,  because  they  are  covered  with  a  coat  of  sand, 
and  thus  they  cut  the  cables,  whereby  anchors  are  lost;  in  addition  to  which  the 
depth  often  suddenly  diminishes  upon  them,  and  therefore  vessels  are  in  much 
danger  of  getting  aground,  and  of  being  lost. 

Upon  Point  Piedras  there  is  a  little  mount,  named  Nole-perderas,  (Do  not  lose 
yourself)  which  serves  for  a  good  mark  to  know  it  by,  and  which  is  seen  from 
Sisal  Shoal,  or  at  fourteen  miles  off.  From  this  point  the  coast  rounds  about  to 
the  S.  W.  for  thirty  miles,  to  Point  Descondida,  which  forms  the  N.  W.  front 
of  the  Peninsula  of  Yucatan  :  this  coast,  as  well  as  the  former,  may  be  seen  well 
from  6  fathoms  of  water,  and  is  commonly  named  the  Palmares ;  for,  among 
the  wood  with  which  it  is  covered,  many  Palniitos  (Cabbage  Palms)  are  seen, 
though  there  are  none  on  the  other  parts  of  this  coast.  On  the  coast  of  Pal- 
mares no  one  ought  to  anchor;  for  the  bottom  is  of  stones,  covered  with  a  thin 
coat  of  sand,  which  deceives  the  lead. 

From  Point  Descnndida,  the  coast  tends  to  the  south,  hut  rather  inclining  to 
the  cast,  true,  twenty-two  miles,  to  Laa  Bocaa,  (The  Mouths)  which  are  two  lit- 


tle 111 

iaiets 

to  th 

inlet 

tlieri! 

and 

I'r. 
to  thi 
is  fou 
on  all 

Th. 
seen 
with 
low  il 
whole 
lies  to 
navigii 


'   .K     ^     t^'^JA- 


ULUNT  8  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


iS3 


:A  Of  GULF 


r  Gulf  of  Mox- 


t  distance  from 
Blanquilla,  and 
miles  from  the 
am  it,  in  d  fa- 
but  this  part  is 
t,  true,  twelve 

N.  about  fifty 

S.W.iW.  the 

All  the  coast 

ibjects  upon  it, 

y  the  passing 

ts  resemblance 

lagartos;  next 

To  the  Look- 

t  of  Telchaac, 

nthatof  Chu- 

ook-outs  fVi' 

arther  off  the 

t  Lagartos,  to 

ivard ;  but  not 

which  •.•annot 

coat  of  sand, 

II  to  which  the 

are  in  much 

(Do  not  lose 
is  seen  from 
inds  about  to 
N.  VV.  front 
be  seen  well 
.,  for,  among 
Ims)  are  seen, 
coast  of  Pal- 
with  a  thin 

Ir  inclining  to 
Ih  are  two  lit- 


tle Inlets  formed  by  the  coast;  In  front  and  Tery  near  to  thnm  are  two  rery  Httlo 
islets.  From  tliu  B'ichs,  the  coast  continues  to  the  south,  with  lume  inclination 
til  the  west,  true,  to  thu  distituco  of  fifteen  miles,  or  t(t  Jayna,  which  is  another 
Inlet  of  till!  coast,  at  tin?  mi»nih  of  ii  river;  in  front  of  this  there  is  another  iilft; 
there  is  also  an  iilet,  named  Piedras  (or  Uucky)  Isltt,  half-way  between  the  Bocait 
and  Jiiynii. 

I'rom  Jaynn  the  coast  cotjiinucs  %vitli  some  inclinrilion  towards  the  west,  true, 
to  the  distance  nf  twenty-one  miles,  towards  the  river  of  St.  Francisco,  which 
is  four  and  a  h;df  miles  to  the  N<  C  of  Campeche,  thu  (udy  point  of  cummercM 
on  all  tliis  coast. 

The  coast  between  Point  Descondida  and  the  River  of  St.  Franris  cannot  b« 
seen  farther  off  than  from  S  or  4  fathoms  depth,  and  then  it  appears  to  the  view 
with  various  breaks,  which  look  like  very  low  keys;  all  of  it  is  remarkubly  shal- 
low and  clean,  su  tiiat,  with  the  lead  in  hand,  tliere  is  not  the  least  dan^or  on  the 
whole  of  it,  excepting  that  whicli  arises  from  tlie  hull  of  a  sunken  vessel,  which 
lies  to  the  west  of  the  Isle  Piedras.  and  in  ii\  fathoms  of  water,  to  which  vessels 
navigiiting  in  litis  depth  oii'^ht  to  :;;ve  a  birth. 

From  tlie  River  of  St.  Franciseo,  the  co  »st  continues  to  the  S.  W.  for  twelve 
miles,  to  Point  Morrow,  oij  wliich  the  CasiK-  of  St.  Josef  is  the  first  thing  do- 
scried ;  afterwards  th-.'  city  of  Cimpeehu;  t*  it  follows  the  castle  of  St.  IMiguel, 
next  comes  the  town  «»f  Li'iin  i ;  affer  it  snrceeds  a  point  of  the  coast  extend- 
ing out  to  the  sea,  and  which  is  named  Point  Martin  ;  tlie  next  to  it  is  Point 
Morros:  all  this  front  of  coast,  which  forms  the  anchorage  of  Campeche, 
may  he  seen  jilainly  from  5  fathoms ;  hut  t!ie  water  is  so  sliallow  that  you  will  find 
4  fathoms  at  fifteen  miles  from  t!u'  land,  and  2.J  fathoms  at  four  mileH  from  it. 
This  anchorage,  therefore,  needs  no  pilot,  nttr  any  partictdar  advice  f«»r  taking 
it;  for,  once  arrived  at  the  depth  convenient  for  the  vessel's  draught  of  water, 
you  may  let  go  your  anchor,  remainin;;  as  if  in  the  middle  of  the  ocean:  hence 
results  an  immense  labour  in  discharging  and  loading  cargoes;  for  even  those 
vessels  which  can  approach  nearest  to  the  land,  remain  four  and  a  half  miles  dis- 
tant  from  it.  In  order  to  diiniiTish  th's  labour,  and  to  ninnage  so  that  boats, 
lighters,  or  launchi's  m;iy  go  to  and  return  from  the  shore  under  sail,  they  an- 
ch(»r  to  the  west  of  the  tower.  In  this  anchorage,  althor.gh  open  entirely  to  the 
north  and  N.  W.  winds,  which  in  tlie  season  blow  with  great  force,  there  is  not 
any  thing  to  fear,  for  they  do  not  raise  any  sea  of  cousetpience,  and  vessels  re- 
main at  anchor  with  sufiicient  safety. 

To  the  west  of  Point  Morros.  and  rather  more  to  the  south,  it  is  not  so  shal- 
low;  and,  according  to  informntiun,  4  fithoms  may  be  found  there,. at  a  league 
from  the  shore.  Any  one  who  approaches  this  coast,  witii  the  oI)ject  of  wood- 
ing and  watering,  on<;ht  to  endeavour  to  take  this  last  anchorage,  in  the  vicinity 
of  which,  and  something  to  tlie  south,  is  the  town  of  Champoton,  where  they 
may  provide  themselves  with  tiie  articles  required. 

From  Point  Morros,  forty -four  miles  S.  by  W.  is  the  River  Escatalto;  tlio 
coast  hence  begins  to  round  itself  to  about  S.  W.byVV.  to  Point  Xiealnngo, 
which  is  the  western  extreme  oJ'  the  Lagoon  or  Lake  of  Terminns.  This  la- 
goon is  a  great  bay,  about  forty  miles  wide,  and  having  about  thirty  miles  of 
bight:  between  its  two  outer  and  extreme  points  are  tw«»  islands,  which  shelter 
it;  the  western,  named  Carmai,  is  the  largest.  At  the.  western  extremity  of 
Carmen  is  a  garrison,  named  that  of  San  FtUp  (St.  Philip.)  Between  this  and 
Point  Xicalango  is  the  principal  entrance  to  the  lag<mn,  with  rather  more  than 
two  fathoms  uf  depth,  and  of  it  wc  arc  informed  only  that  it  is  very  difficult  to 
enter,  and  that  it  is  alis<.lutely  necessary  to  have  a  pilot. 

SHOALS  OFF  THK  NoRTHKKN  KoGK  OF  Campkchk  Bank. — The  first,  which 
wo.  have  distinguished  by  the  name  of  the  Argus,  was  seen  by  a  lieutenant  of 
thu  Spanish  navy.  Don  Sebastian  Rodriguez  de  Ariis,  commandant  of  the  brig- 
antine  Argns.  in  sailing  from  Vera  Cruz  to  Havanna,  at  2  P.  M.  llth  <»f  July, 
18IC,  being  then  in  latitude  240  2',  and  lonjitude  89°  44',  (from  Greenwich)  dis- 
covered a  break,  which,  on  examination,  disclosed  a  small  bank,  of  about  a  ea* 
ble  and  a  half's  length,  in  all  directions,  with  u  breaker  of  from  12  to  15  toiset 
ia  the  eeotre,  ua  which  tUo  water  broke  heavily,  although  the  sea  was  otber* 

55 


434 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


wise  very  smooth,  and  the  winJ  very  calm.  At  mid-day  the  commandant  had 
observed  in  latitude  24°  4' ;  and  at  5  P.  M.  he  found  the  longitude,  by  lunar  dis- 
tances, 89°  56',  both  observations  to  be  depended  on,  and  corrected  to  2  P.  M. 
and,  referred  to  the  situation  of  the  shoal,  he  made  it  in  lat.  24°  3'  SO",  and  long. 
89°  42'.  This  shoal  appears  to  be  the  same  which  was  seen  on  the  19th  of  JNo- 
Tember,  1800,  by  Don  Narcisso  Riera,  captain  of  the  Spanish  merchant  schoo- 
ner Catalina,  hound  from  Campeche  to  New-Orleans  ;  but,  as  his  longitude  was 
deduced  from  dead  reckoning,  we  have  more  confidence  in  the  position  assigned 
to  it  by  Arias :  nevertheless,  navigators  sailing  on  this  parallel,  ought  to  be  on 
their  guard,  lest  the  two  dangers  should  really  exist. 

Don  Manuel  Bozo,  pilot  of  the  Spanish  bombard  Nuestra  Senora  del  Carmen, 
in  sailing  from  Vera  Cruz  and  Ttrmims  Lagoon,  towards  Havanna,  on  the  8th 
of  December,  1817,  at  day-break,  saw  a  breaker  or  rock  off  the  starboard  gang- 
way :  the  sea  being  smooth,  and  the  wind  moderate  from  the  eastward,  there 
was  no  doubt  of  its  being  a  shoal,  the  extent  of  which  ho  estimated  at  from  two 
to  three  cables'  lengths,  extending  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  and  on  its  ends  he  saw  two 
rocks  or  pinnacles,  about  three  feet  high,  and  his  distance  from  it  was  from  three 
to  three  and  u  half  cables'  lengths,  where  he  sounded,  and  found  no  bottom 
with  70  fathoms :  and  although  he  thought  to  examine  it  with  his  boat,  he  could 
not  effect  it,  on  account  of  the  heavy  break  in  the  vicinity  of  the  shoal ;  but  he 
saw  the  spit  of  rocks,  of  which  it  was  coir. posed,  running  the  whole  length  of 
the  danger.  Having  corrected  his  reckoning,  for  6h.  A.  M.  the  hour  at  which 
he  saw  the  shoal,  he  found  it  lay  in  latitude  24°  6',  and  longitude  91°  7'.  At 
noon,  he  observed  in  latitude  24°  22',  with  certainty,  and  this  was  only  one  mi- 
nute north  of  his  D.  R.  and  referring  this  to  the  shoal,  by  his  run  for  six  hours, 
he  found  its  latitude  by  this  to  he  24°  7',  and  longitude  84°  49'  west  of  Cadiz; 
nor  could  there  be  any  considerable  error  in  his  reckoiiing,  in  three  days  sailing 
from  the  Viffia  of  Chuxulu,  off  which  he  had  been  at  anchor. 

This  shoal  appears  to  be  different  from  the  former,  although  its  latitude  is  so 
nearly  the  same :  the  short  time  which  intervened  between  his  departure  from 
the  Vigia  of  Chuxulu  and  his  making  of  the  Tortugas  Bank,  when  he  found  on- 
ly 13  minutes  of  error  in  his  longitude  by  dead  reckoning,  shows  that  its  situa- 
tion, as  to  longitude,  cannot  be  materially  wrong.  The  shape  and  circumstances 
of  the  shoal,  as  described  by  Bozo,  also  shows  it  to  be  different.  Many  old 
charts  indicate  a  danger,  with  the  word  doubtful,  almost  in  the  same  position, 
which,  also,  tends  to  confirm  the  belief  of  its  existence. 


The  Soundings  or  Bank  of  Campeche. 

The  Campeche  Bank  is  a  great  shoal,  which  extends  from  the  north  coast  of 
Yucatan  almost  as  far  as  lat.  24°,  and  from  the  coast  of  Campeche,  to  the  west, 
as  far  as  the  meridian  of  92°  30' ;  the  depth  as  well  as  the  quality  of  the  sound- 
ings on  it  arc  so  uncertain,  that  it  is  not  possible  to  ascertain  your  situation  on  it 
hy  the  lead  :  it  will  be  sufficient  to  take  a  glance  at  the  chart  to  convince  your- 
self of  this  fact;  nevertheless,  the  soundings  from  20  fathoms  towards  the  shore 
are  so  regular,  that  you  may  navigate  along  it  with  all  safety;  for  having  once 
caught  that  depth,  which  you  will  find  at  ten  or  twelve  leagues  from  the  coast, 
the  depths  will  be  found  to  run  uniformly  with  the  coast  until  you  are  to  the  N. 
W.  of  Point  Piedras,  when  it  suddenly  diminishes  two  fathoms.  The  same  re- 
gularity is  remarked  all  along  these  soundings,  from  20  fathoms  to  4  fathoms; 
and  you  will  always  find  the  diminution  to  the  N.  W.  of  Point  Picvlras,  which  is 
undoubtedly  caused  by  some  spit  of  rocks  that  extends  out  from  the  point ;  for 
upon  it  the  soundings  are  always  on  stones.  From  4  fathoms  to  the  shore,  in 
all  tlie  tract  of  coast  between  the  Cayo  or  Cairn  of  Lagartos  and  the  Lookout 
tower  of  Chuburna,  we  have  already  said  that  there  are  various  stones  and 
fihoals,  most  perilous  to  navigation. 

The  quality  of  soundings,  from  20  fathoms  towards  the  shore,  does  not  pre- 
serve regularity ;  for  some  times  it  is  gray  aand  with  gravel,  at  others  gravel  alone, 


■isa. 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


435 


and  at  others  sand  with  shells  and  coral ;  thus  it  alternates  until  to  the  N.  W.  of 
Point  Piedras,  where,  as  we  have  already  said,  the  soundings  are  on  stone  or 
rock,  which  make  a  very  good  mark  to  know  a  vessel's  situation  by,  and  to  en- 
able her  to  shape  a  course  with  security,  so  as  to  pass  between  the  Triangles  and 
New  Shoal,  (Triangulo  y  Baxo  Nuevo,)  which  is  the  channel  that  ought  to  be 
preferred  for  running  off  the  bank  on  its  western  side  :  but  it  is  still  better  to 
asccrtiiin  the  vessel's  place  by  the  course  which  is  necessary  to  preserve  the  depth 
of  20  fathoms;  for,  if  you  reta'hi  that,  steering  W.  S.  W.  i  AV.  it  is  a  proof  that 
you  are  between  the  meridians  comprehended  between  the  Cairn  of  Lagartos  and 
Point  Piedras ;  but,  if  you  augment  the  depth  on  this  course,  it  is  nect'ssary  to 
change  it  to  S.  W.  by  W.  j  W.  and  S.  W.  3  S.  it  is  a  proof  that  you  have  passed 
the  meridian  of  Point  Piedras,  and  that  you  are  abreast  of  the  N.  W  front  of 
the  coast,  or  between  Point  Piedras  and  Point  Descondida ;  and,  dnally,  if,  in 
order  to  retain  the  same  depth,  you  are  obliged  to  steer  south,  you  need  not 
doubt  that  you  have  passed,  or  arc  at  least  abreast  of,  or  on  the  parallel  of.  Point 
Descondida.  What  we  have  said  of  20  fothoms  depth  applies  also  to  any  lesser 
depth  on  this  coast ;  but  on  the  rest  of  the  soundings,  or  bank,  that  is,  from  20  to 
22  fathoms,  into  deeper  water,  ihere  is  no  regularity  whatever,  either  in  the  depth 
of  water  or  quality  of  soundings,  especially  on  the  north  part  of  it ;  and  this 
necessarily  follows,  for  it  is  sown  with  shoals  most  dangerous  to  navigation,  of 
which  we  shall  speak  in  order. 

Baxo  del  Corsario  (the  Privateer  Bank)  has  been  explored  by  Don  Ciriacode 
Cevallos  and  Don  Juan  Lopez  de  Aguila.  It  extends  N.  N.  W.  from  the  west 
point  of  the  island  Jolvas,  and  has  near  it  10  fathoms  of  water ;  there  are  breakers 
on  it  only  when  there  is  a  heavy  sea. 

The  last  Edition  of  the  "  Derrotero  de  las  AntUlas,''  says,  the  shallowest  part 
of  the  Corsario  B^nk,  is  situated  according  to  the  survey  of  Don  Ciriaco  C«val- 
los,  inlat.  £1°  37'  30",  and  long.  87°  16',  from  Greenwich,  giving  it  an  extent  of 
three  miles  from  east  to  west,  and  about  half  a  mile  from  north  to  south  ;  its 
west  end  being  on  the  meridian  of  the  west  end  of  Jolvas  Island,  four  and  a 
half  miles  distant.  The  shoal  has  been  examined  by  the  pilot  Josef  Gonzales 
Ruiz,  who  gives  the  following  description : 

I'  The  Corsario  Shoal  is  u  rocky  spit,  which  begins  to  the  eastward  of  Mos- 
quitos  Point,  with  a  turn  of  about  three  leagues  to  the  north  and  to  the  west- 
ward of  that  point ;  it  extends  about  N.  W.  by  N.  to  that  or  rather  a  less  distance, 
and  ends  in  7  or  8  fathoms  of  water.  All  this  bank  is  of  rocky  spots,  which 
shoalen  towards  the  land,  until,  at  about  three  and  a  half  miles  from  Mosquitos 
Point,  there  is  a  shoal  extending  about  two  miles  east  and  west,  and  lens  than 
half  a  mile  in  breadth.  This  shoal,  at  low  water,  has  11,  12,  and  13,  palms  of 
water;  and,  at  high  water,  13,  14,  and  15,  palms.  Some  of  the  rocks  rise 
higher  than  others.  The  shoal  is  of  Mucara  Rock,  with  black  spots,  and  some 
red  ones,  which  seem  to  be  sponges.  Those  spots  farthest  to  the  cast  bear  from 
the  west  part  of  the  island,  two  leagu/is  from  Mosquitos  Point,  N.  N.  E."  It 
may  be  observed  that  the  situations  giwn  by  this  pilot  do  not  accord  with  those 
of  Cevallos,  and  the  latter  are  supposed  to  be  entitled  to  the  greater  coritidence. 

Bajo  Sisal  (Sisal  Shoal)  is  a  large  tract  of  rock,  on  which  there  is  »  'jpot  of 
about  two  cables  in  extent,  in  all  directions,  which  has  not  more  than  13  feet  of 
water  on  it :  this  point  is  the  danger  to  navigation  ;  and  to  keep  clear  from  it, 
take  care  not  to  get  into  less  than  12  fathoms  if  you  go  to  the.north  of  the  shoal,, 
or  into  more  than  7  fathoms  if  you  go  to  the  south  of  it,  or  between  it  and  the 
land ;  for  its  edges  on  this  side  are  in  8  fathoms,  and  on  the  outi^dc  in  1 1  fathoms. 
Soundings  on  rock  arc  also  a  secure  indication  of  the  proximity  of  this  shoal ; 
but  the  best  mark  for  it  by  day  is  the  bearing  of  the  Mount  Note-perderas,  which 
lies  true  south  (S.  7°  E.)  from  the  shoal,  and  from  the  shoal  itself  this  mount 
can  be  seerv  in  clear  weather  :  the  situation  of  this  shoal  is  well  ascertained. 

The  ••  Derrotero  de  las  Antillaa,'"  says  "  This  shoal  was  sought  for  and  found 
by  Don  Ciriaco  Cevallos,  on  running  from  the  anchorage  at  Sisal.  He  says, 
the  least  water  on  it  is  2  fathoms,  according  to  the  traditionary  information  of 
the  people  of  the  country;  but  he  could  find  only  18  feet,  surrounded,  very 
near,  on  all  sides,  by  6,  8,  and  10  fathoms.    Between  it  and  the  contiguous  landi 


4)3 


BLUNT  3    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


of  the  continent  is  n  rhanncl  of  \Z  miles,  fit  for  the  largest  vessels.  It  is  trtt«», 
when  he  found  18  f«;ef,  we  were  ignorant  of  the  state  of  the  tide,  wiiich,  at  that 
time,  rose  from  3  to  4  feet  at  high  water,  from  tlje  shoiil  iVI(»iint  Note-perderas 
(».  e.  Don't  luse  yourself )  bears  true  S.  7°  E.  14  miles:  and  this  mount  is  the 
best  mark  of  keeping  clear  of  it,  wjjether  passing  to  the  northward  or  south- 
w«rd.»  f        o 

The  Ahcran  Is  a  shoal  of  great  extent ;  it  is  thirteen  miles  from  north  to  south, 
and  ten  miles  from  east  to  west:  in  its  south  part  there  is  a  little  saf«i  and  well- 
eheltcred  harbour,  in  which  vessels  drawing  11  f<!et  may  anchor.  This  harbour 
I?  frequented  only  by  the  Campeehe  coasters,  who  make  oil  fr«im  the  immense 
quantity  of  fish  which  they  find  here.  All  others  ought  to  shun  the  proximities 
of  the  ahoal ;  no  one  should  ever  sail  here  about,  from  the  east  to  the  west,  in 
28  fathonm  depth  or  upwards  ;  but  should  alxvayt;  pass  in  from  aO  to  22  fathoms. 
The  tiitualion  of  this  shoal  has  been  wt-ll  ascertained  by  the  survey  of  Don 
Ciriaco  de  Cevalloii,  who  says,  the  shoal  extends  fourteen  miles  from  north  to 
south,  and  eleven  from  east  to  west.  Tiie  islets  upon  its  southern  part  are  nam- 
ed Perez,  Chica,  and  Pajaros,  and  it  has  various  hanks  and  reefs,  rising  more 
or  less  above  the  surface  of  the  water.  The  harbour  is  formed  by  the  reefs, 
which  extend  aroimd  Perez  and  Pajaros.  At  its  entrance  the  depth  is  muTi  2} 
to  7  fathoms  and,  farther  in,  from  2?  to  7:|  fatiioms.  The  best  anchorage  is  to 
the  eastward  of  the  middle  of  Perez  Isle,  in  Gi  fathoms,  on  sand  and  shells, 
having  to  the  south  the  rocky  bank,  which  extends  from  the  S.  W.  end  of  that 
isle  towards  tlie  E.  and  F..  S.  E.  about  six  cables'  length." 

The  Arcns  are  three  islets,  which  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  five  miles; 
they  are  tiiesoullicrnmost  upon  the  western  edge  of  these  soundings,  and  lie  al- 
most nearly  W.  by  N.  twenty-seven  leagues  from  Campeche.  They  form  of 
themselves  a  good  harh«ur,  which  may  be  entered  at  any  side  as  is  moat  cohvo- 
nient,  and  without  any  other  care  than  to  avoid  the  spits  stretching  from  them. 
The  N.  W.  entrance  may  be  taken  by  hauling  round  the  south  part  of  theN.  E. 
island,  (which  is  also  the  larges')  and  passing  the  east  part  of  the  S.  E.  island; 
this  will  carry  you  clear  of  a  spit  which  runs  out  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  greater  isl- 
and, and  which  is  the  object  thatshellers  the  anchorage  from  the  northerly  swell. 
To  enter  by  the  S.  W.  you  ought  to  give  a  birth  ti»  a  reef  which  stretches  out 
nboutone  and  u  half  cable's  lengtli  to  the  south  of  the  westernmost  inland.  The 
west  shore  of  the  larger  inland  also  sends  out  a  reef  about  a  cable's  length  from 
it;  and  as  this  lies  within  the  shelter  of  the  anchorage,  the  sea  does  not  break 
upon  it,  and  th<'refore  you  may  very  easily  run  upon  it;  but  you  will  avoid  this 
by  not  approaching  the  west  coast  of  that  island  nearer  than  two  cables'  length. 
This  anchorage  is  very  superior  in  northerly  gales  to  that  of  Campeche;  and  as 
there  is  depth  in  it  for  all  classes  of  vessel:^,  he  who  under  such  circumstances, 
can  catch  it,  will  find  liimself  well  sheltered  and  secure.  These  islands  are  cor- 
rectly placed  in  the  new  chart. 

These  isles  Inve  been  surveyed,  and  a  plan  of  them  published  at  Madrid.  The 
new  directions  state  that,  in  entering  by  the  N.  W.  Passage,  you  should  bring 
tJic  south  end  of  the  northernmost  isle,  which  is  also  the-  largest,  on  with  the 
middle  of  the  S.  E.  isle:  this  nun-k  will  lead  clear  of  the  spit,  which  extends  to 
the  north  and  west  from  the  larger  islet,  and  which  is  that  affording  shelter  to 
the  anchorage  from  the  northerly  swell.  Tlie  S.  E.  Area  is  surrounded  by  reefs, 
separated  from  it  by  a  space  of  about  a  cible's  length  in  breadth.  This  islet, 
with  the  reefs  at  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  large  one,  (orm  a  channel  of  two  short  ca- 
bles' lengtl),  with  from  5  t(»  16  fathoms,  on  sand,  stone,  and  gravel ;  by  which,  in 
case  of  necessity,  and  according  to  the  situation  u  vessel  is  in,  an  entrance  to  the 
Mijchorage  may  be  attempted. 

The  Cabezo,  a  head  of  rock,  which  lies  thirteen  and  n  half  miles  to  the  S.  W. 
hj  S.  of  the  Areas,  having  only  one  ftthom  over  it,  must  be  cautiously  avoidfcd. 

About  N.  by  VV.  from  the  Areas,  at  the  distance  of  seven  leagues,  there  is  a 
•hoal  of  small  extent,  named  the  Baro  del  Obispo,  (the  Bishop's  Shonl,)  on 
which  it  appears  there  Is  some  rock  that  may  be  seen,  but  which  cannot  be  dis- 
covered at  more  thm  two  miles  off,  by  day,  in  clear  weather,  and  with  great 
▼i|SiUioc«;  tlicrefore  it  ought,  at  all  times,  to  have  a  wide  birth.    Its  situation 


..  J*- 


BLUNT  3   AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


487 


els.  It  is  trit<», 
,  which,  at  that 
,  N«»tt*-perilt'ra» 
s  mount  is  the 
ward  or  souili- 

norlh  to  south, 
i:  safo  and  wi'jl- 

This  liiirhour 
m  the  immnise 
the  |»i-flxiii)itifs 
to  the  west,  in 
)  to  22  fathoms, 
siirvi')'  «»f  Don 

from  north  to 
n  part  are  nam- 
kif«,  rising  more 
n!  hy  the  reefs*, 
t'ptli  is  from  i% 
iinchora(;e  is  to 
and  and  sliells, 
W.  end  of  thut 

R  of  five  miles; 
inj;s,  and  lie  al- 

They  form  of 
is  most  co^ivo- 
ing  from  them, 
art  of  thoN.  E. 
e  S.  E.  island; 
the  greater  isl- 
lortherly  swell, 
h  stretches  out 
)st  inland.  The 

s  length  from 
loes  not  hrealc 
will  avoid  this 

a  hies'  lenp;th. 
perhc ;  and  as 

ircumstances, 

ands  ure  cor^ 

Madrid.  Thn 
should  hring 
on  with  tho 

ich  extends  to 
ing  shelter  to 

mded  by  reeft, 
This  iNlct, 
two  short  en- 
hy  which,  In 

ntrunce  to  ths 

to  the  S.  W. 
)usly  avoided, 
ues,  there  isi  a 
*8  Shoal,)  on 
cannot  he  dis- 
nd  with  great 

Its  situation 


has  heen  well  ascertained,  and  to  he  a  fiiit  rock  or  stone,  witli  !i  fathoms  of  water 
nu  it,  and  so  steep  that,  tip  avd  down  at  its  fd;;i',  there  are  27  fathoms  ;  and  this 
cnuses  this  sea  to  hreuk  heavily  on  it ;  wherefore  at  ail  event.'*,  it  should  he  avoid- 
ed. The  Placer  or  Baxo  Nuevo,  lies  !>  leagues  N.  E.  Ity  E.  i  E.  from  the 
0!u4po :  and  to  this,  also,  a  hirtli  ou^ht  to  he  ;;iven. 

To  the  north  of  the  Ohi^po,  at  th«;  distance  of  3!  miles,  is  the  Triangle,  (Rl 
Triangnlo.)  which  consists  of  three  islets,  lying  alxuit  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  in  which 
direction  they  extend  ahi»ut  seven  miles.  They  are  visihie  at  seven  miles  dis- 
tunce,  and  send  out  spits  and  shallows,  which  render  it  improper  to  pass  hetween 
them,  or  to  approach  them  nearer  thati  two  miles  to  the  W.  N.  W.  of  tiie  nnrlh- 
ernmost.  At  six  miles  from  the  latter  there  is  another  islet  of  sand,  of  alxMit 
half  a  mile  in  extent,  which  is  very  clear  on  the  south  p:irt,  and  which  sends  out 
n  spit  to  the  north  ;  it  is  very  low,  and  iscoveretl  with  hirdaand  some  drift  wood. 
The 'toation  of  these  islands  has,  also,  hten  accnrately  ascertain*  d.  and  the 
Derrotero  de.  las  AntUtas,  says,  the  Triangle  lies  to  the  nurtlt  nf  the  0'tisp«>,  at 
the  distance  of  twenty-four  miles.  It  is  composed  of  three  islets,  of  which  the 
ttvo eastern  are  two  miles  distant  from  each  other,  hut  they  are  connect«'d  hy 
re<>fs.  Tiie  westernmost  h.-ars  from  tlie  easterntnost  wliich  is  thi-  largest,  W. }  N. 
eight  long  miles ;  and  hetween  the  w»!stern  and  middly  one  is  a  channel,  six 
miles  hroad,  having  lr.»m  18  to  30  fathoms,  on  sand,  gravel,  and  rock.  From 
the  easternmost  islet  a  reef  extends,  with  a  large  ruck  ahove  water,  first  to  the 
N.  N.  E.  and  then  to  tlie  N.  W.  forming  n  l)ow  or  crescent,  two  miles  in  length. 
From  the  north  and  cast  of  the  western  island,  shoals  also  extend  to  a  short  dia< 
tance. 

"  The  soundings  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Triangle  are  20  fathoms,  on  fine  sand,  at 
two  miles  E.  hy  S-  from  the  larger  islet;  25  fathoms,  sand,  gravel,  and  rock,  at 
seven-tenths  of  a  mile  ;  28  fathoms,  sand  and  clay,  at  nearly  a  mile  to  the  S.  E. 
to  fathoms,  sand  and  gravel,  at  two  cables*  length  to  the  south  ;  21  fathoms,  from 
three  to  six-tenths  of  a  mile  to  the  souih  of  the  reefs  which  connect  the  eastern 
island  to  th<  middle  one.  To  the  W.  S.  \V.  of  the  middle  isle  are  21  fathoms, 
on  sand  and  gravel," 

The  Bajo  Neuva  (Ncto  Shoal)  is  a  head  of  sand,  which  shows  at  low  xvater, 
with  various  rocks,  which  also  show  a  little ;  the  sea  breaks  uoon  it  in  ordinary 
breezes,  >md  it  is  so  steep  that,  from  30  fathoms,  in  running  two  miles,  you  pass 
lo  10  fathoms,  and  from  that,  in  two  cable's  length  more,  you  may  be  aground. 
This  shoal  is  hardly  of  the  extent  of  a  cable  -jnd  a  half  from  north  to  south, 
isnd  four  cables  from  east  to  west.  Its  given  situation  is,  as  yet,  rather 
doubtfid ;  for  the  observatiims  of  latitude  made  in  the  two  ships  of  the  Spanish 
line,  San  Leandro  and  Dragon,  when  the  latter  was  lost  on  it,  differ  six  minutes ; 
being,  according  to  the  one,  in  21°  .^0',  and,  according  to  the  other,  in  21°  4V, 
Its  longitude,  although  n.-)t  deduced  from  particular  observations  made  on  the 
spot,  cannot  vary  much  from  the  truth.  Since  the  preceding  was  written,  the 
shoal  has  been  placed,  by  Don  Ciiiaco  de  Cevallos,  in  lat.  21°  50',  and  long.  91^ 
50',  which  is,  we  presume,  correct. 

Isla  Arenas  (Sandy  Island)  is  placed  according  to  the  situation  assigned  to  if, 
by  Don  Ciriaco  de  Cevallos;  it  iiad  been  previously  seen  by  Captain  Miguel  de 
Alderete  and  l.ieut.  Andres  Valderram-i,  on  their  voyage  in  search  of  the  Negril- 
lo, in  1775.  The  eastern  side  is  bordered  by  a  reef,  which  continues  to  extend,  in 
two  long  spits,  lo  the  West  and  N.  W.  10  miles.  Between  these  spits,  on  the 
west  of  the  isle,  there  appears  to  be  anchorage,  between  the  reefs,  in  from  7  to  4 
fathoms ;  but  of  this  ground  we  have  no  correct  d(!scription.  Cevallos  has  de- 
termined the  situation  of  the  island,  which  is  22°  8'  N.  and  01°  16'  W.  this  isle  is 
low,  and  forms  nearly  a  parallelogram,  in  the  direction  of  N.  48°  E.  to  S.  48°  W. 
true,  S  miles  ;  its  greatest  breadth  being  two.  It  is  foul  all  round,  and  a  great  sto- 
ny spit  extends  from  its  north  end,  with  some  rocks  above  water,  to  N.  3J>°  W. 
true,  0  miles.  From  the  S.  W.  part,  another,  of  a  Kke  kind,  extends  N.  64°  W. 
•nd  S.  89°  W.  (true)  6  and  0  miles.  Between  the  reefs  there  is  a  good  harbour, 
to  the  \V.  N.  W.  of  the  island,  sheltered  from  winds  from  th».  North  round  by 
East  ts  S.  W.  wiih  a  depth  of  from  S)  futtioroi,  at  t  miles  from  the  island,  to  7 
fiUboms  between  the  poiots  of  the  reef. 


438 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  island  Bermtja  is  placed,  as  given  by  Alderete  and  Valderrama,  to  the 
northwiird  of  Arenas ;  but  these  uflicers  did  not  see  it,  though  they  sought  for  it, 
nnd  thus  we  are  not  i^urc  either  of  its  situation,  nor  any  particular  relative  to  it. 
Cevallos  also  sought  fur  it  in  vain.  It  seema  possible  that  this  and  Arenas  may 
be  one  and  the  same. 

The  Negrillo  is  a  sho^l  of  which  many  have  spoken,  virithout  knowing  its  true 
situation.  In  the  ship  ..  the  Spanish  line,  San  Julian,  commanded  by  Don  Juan 
Joaquin  Moreno,  the  declaration  of  the  gunner,  Manuel  Sandoval,  was  taken, 
who  said  that,  sailing  in  the  ship  of  the  line,  Bucn  Consejo,  commanded  by  Don 
Joaquin  Oiivareo,  on  his  voyage  from  Vera  Cruz  to  the  Havana,  and  nine  days 
after  sailing  from  the  former  port,  they  saw,  about  2  P.  M.  the  sea  breaking ;  and 
having  examined  it  with  the  long-boat,  in  which  the  declarant  went,  they  found 
a  rock  of  about  half  a  boat's  length  in  extent,  to  which  they  hung  by  the  boat- 
hook,  until  they  sounded  at  the  boat's  stern ;  with  120  fathoms  they  found  no 
bottom ;  and  though  they  repeated  this,  with  equal  diligence,  round  the  whole 
circumference  of  the  rock,  they  found  the  same  results.  Upon  the  rock  there 
was  not  more  than  3  or  S|  fathoms  of  water :  he  added,  that  he  had  heard  the 
officers  and  pilots  say  that  this  was  the  Negrillo. 

The  prime  object  of  the  expedition  of  Alderete  and  Valderrama,  in  1775,  was 
to  search  for  this  shoal ;  but  they  never  could  find  it,  though  they  cruised  for  it 
over  the  whole  space  of  sea,  in  which  it  ought  to  have  been  found,  according  to 
the  old  charts  :  subsequent  information,  however,  which  was  given  to  Don  Tho- 
mas Ugarte,  proved  its  existence ;  and  latterly,  Captain  Cevallos  has  communi- 
cated information  which  he  gained  from  the  declarations  of  Don  Domingo  Cas- 
salo,  captain  of  the  schooner  Villavoniisa,  who  saw  it  cr  the  14th  of  November, 
1806,  at  3  P.  M.  iind  it  turns  out  to  be  in  230  25'N.  lat.  deduced  from  an  obser- 
vation taken  at  mid-day,  with  all  care,  and  long.  83°  55'  W.  of  Cadiz,  or  90°  la' 
£7"  W.  of  Greenwich,  an  deduced  (roir  the  points  of  departure  from  the  Cam- 
peche  soundings  and  the  making  of  Vera  Cruz,  which  leaves  the  longitude  ques- 
tionable only  to  an  error  of  4  minutes.  According  to  the  description  of  the  cap- 
tain, this  shoal  is  no  more  than  a  rock  of  one-quarter  of  a  cable  in  extent,  N.  £. 
and  S.  W.  over  '.vhich  the  water  washes,  except  at  the  two  extremities,  which 
show  a  little ;  but  these  could  not  be  seen  above  a  cable  and  a  half  off,  and  at  less 
than  a  cable  from  it,  no  !.  •>  im  could  be  found  with  75  fathoms. 

In  addition  to  the  shoaia  already  described,  it  seems  that  there  is,  someTdiere 
about  the  uorthrrn  part  of  the  great  bank,  a  shoal  of  some  extent,  and,  in  part, 
very  shallow.  1;  is  described  to  have  been  found,  in  1768,  by  the  sloop  Podrfl 
de  Dios,  (Power  of  God,)  but  the  account  is  so  confused  as  to  afford  no  satisfac- 
tory result  as  to  its  longitudinal  position.  It  must,  however,  lie  to  the  eastward 
of  the  Negrillo.  In  lat.  23<^  15',  50  fathoms  were  found;  afterwards,  on  an  un- 
defined course  to  the  N.  E.  14  fathoms,  on  a  rocky  bottom.  Here,  at  one  A.  M. 
they  anchored  until  day-light,  after  which  they  weighed  and  continued  to  the  N. 
E.  sounding  frequently,  and  in  a  short  time  found  six  fathoms,  and  saw  in  the 
bottom  great  heads  of  black  rocks,  with  some  patches  of  sand,  which  were  avoid- 
ed by  steering  to  the  East.  On  this  course,  in  two  hours,  they  had  50  fathoms, 
bottom  of  sand  ;  resuming  a  N.  E.  course,  the  water  increased  to  70  fathoms ; 
but,  at  mid-day,  they  ibund  40  fathoms  on  rock,  when  their  latitude,  well  ob- 
served, was  28°  28'.  From  noon  until  day-light  of  the  next  morning,  the  vessel 
sailed  always  upon  an  unequal  bottom  of  38  to  47  fathoms,  over  rocks,  and  af- 
terwards on  sand,  thence  increasing  the  depths,  so  that  at  noon,  by  observation 
in  23°  46'  N.  they  had  74  fathoms,  with  the  prow  to  the  N.  N.  E.  Th«y  pre- 
served the  same  depth  until  midnight,  when  they  got  38  fathoms  on  rock,  and 
continued  on  this  shoal  until  day-light,  when  they  had  soundings  oa  sand;  the 
water  again  increased ;  and,  at  mid-day,  observed  in  l(>titude  24°  3',  and  found 
116  fathoms,  sand  bottom,  whence  they  shaped  a  course  for  the  Tortugas  sound- 
ings, on  which  they  entered  without  any  new  differences  in  their  reckoning. 

From  the  ambiguous  relation,  of  which  the  preceding  is  an  abstract,  we  can 
only  make  out,  tkat  the  soundings  which  this  vessel  ran  over  were  from  the  me- 
ridian of  the  Alacranes  to  the  Eastward ;  that  the  edge  of  them  reached  lat.  S4° ; 
and  that  on  the  soundings  were  found  various  unknown  skoals,  which  seem  like- 
ly to  be  dangerous  to  navigation. 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


439 


rama,  to  the 
sought  for  it, 
relative  to  it. 
i  Arenas  may 

>^ving  its  true 
by  Don  Juan 
,  was  taken, 
inded  by  Don 
ind  nine  days 
)reaking;  and 
:,  they  found 
;  by  the  boat- 
ley  found  no 
td  the  ivhole 
le  rock  there 
ad  heard  the 

,  in  1775,  was 
cruised  for  it 
according  to 
to  Don  Tho- 
las  communi- 
)omingo  Cas- 
af  November, 
•om  an  obser- 
liz,  or  90°  1£' 
om  the  Cam- 
ngitude  ques- 
on  of  the  cap- 
extent,  N.  E. 
mities,  which 
',  and  at  less 


roil 
off, 


somewhere 
and,  in  part, 
sloop  Podr«» 
no  satisfac- 
le  eastward 
ds,  on  an  un- 
it one  A.  M. 
led  to  the  N. 
d  saw  in  the 
were  avoid- 
50  fathoms, 
70  fathoms ; 
ide,  well  ob- 
g,  the  vessel 
cks,  and  af- 
observation 
Th«y  pre- 
rock,  and 
ii  sand ;  the 
,  and  found 
ugas  sound- 
koning. 
act,  we  can 
om  the  roe- 
id  lat.S40; 
seem  like- 


In  December,  1801,  Don  Dlonislo  Gallano  passed  over  an  extensive  sand- 
bank, exhibited  on  the  new  Charts,  which  lies  about  24  leagues  to  the  eastwai-d 
of  the  Negrillo,  and  having,  on  its  S.  W.  part,  164  fathoms.  As  it  docs  not  ap- 
pear to  be  dangerous,  it  requires  no  farther  description.  The  situation  seems  well 
ascertainfed. 

These  are  the  Shoals,  which,  down  to  the  present  time,  have  been  known  as 
existing  on  the  Campeche  Bank  of  Soundings.  He  who  navigates  on  it,  in  SO 
fathoms,  will  go  clear  of  the  Corsario,  Alacranes,  and  Sisal  Reefs ;  and  in  a  se- 
cure track  for  passing  through  the  channels  formed  by  the  shoals  on  the  western 
edge.  Of  all  these  channels,  the  best  is  that  between  21*^  and  22°,  formed  by  the 
Triangle  and  New  Shoal,  (Bajo  Neuva,)  because  it  is  the  clearest ;  and  we  re- 
commend it  always  to  be  taken  by  those  bound  to  the  west.  The  soundings 
which  conduct  the  mariner  through  the  middle  of  it,  and  clear  of  th«i shoals  on 
each  side,  are  tolerably  regular ;  for,  after  he  is  to  the  north-west  of  Point  Pie- 
dras,  if  he  continues  the  course  W.  S.  W.  and  W-  by  S.  true,  he  will  increase  the 
depth,  in  a  short  time,  to  23  and  24  fathoms,  on  fine  wh?' '  sand,  or  coarse  white 
sand  with  gray  spots  ;  and  thus  he  will  run  progressively  to  30  and  35  fathoms, 
in  which  depth  he  will  find  some  clay ;  and,  so  soon  us  he  gets  40  and  4,5  fa- 
thoms, the  bottom  will  be  of  loose  clay,  a  certain  sign  of  being  to  the  west  of  the 
shoals.  In  this  channel,  and  almost  in  the  middle  of  it,  there  is  a  shoal  of  29  fa- 
thoms, hard  gravel,  with  a  spot  of  rock  of  10  fathoms,  which  can  alarm  those 
only  who  sound  on  it,  by  the  idea  that  they  may  be  near  some  danger.  But  they 
need  not  to  be  alarmed ;  for,  sounding  a  short  time  afterwards,  they  will  find  tho 
bottom  sand  and  clay;  and  those  who  find  this  change  will,  of  course,  have  a 
new  mark  lor  their  situation,  as  this  shoal  is  in  mid-channel,  and  almost  in  a  Tine 
with  the  shoals. 


Directions  for  JVavigating  on  the  Campeche  Soundings. 

It  is  undoubted  that  the  eastern  edge  of  this  bank  is  an  excellent  corrector  for 
the  longitude  of  a  ship :  on  running  nearly  north  or  south,  every  one  who  gets 
soundings  on  this  edge  may  consider  himself  as  in  86^  20'  W.  of  Gieenwich,  and 
thus  those  who  sail  from  the  eastward,  to  enter  on  the  soundings,  or  bank,  ought 
to  sound  frequently,  in  order  to  catch  bottom  at  the  edge,  or  in  its  proximity,  in 
order  to  have  this  correction  of  longitude. 

But  this  excellent  mean  of  rectifying  the  longitude  ceases  to  be  so  when  there 
is  great  uncertainty  in  the  latitude  ;  for  as  the  water  between  Cape  Antonio  and 
Cape  Catoche  at  times  runs  to  the  northward,  at  the  rate  of  3  miles  in  an  hour, 
it  is  necessary  to  allow  for  this,  so  as  to  enter  on  the  soundings  in  a  convenient 
parallel  from  which  you  may  make  a  course  to  the  S.  W. 

It  is  clear  that,  by  steering  S.  W.  or  4:hereby,  you  may  not  only  get  soundings 
on  the  eastern  edge,  but  also  on  the  northern  edge,  in  which  case,  having  no  cer- 
tainty of  the  longitude,  it  would  be  very  dangerous  to  direct  the  subsequent  na- 
vigation by  making  courses  to  the  S.  W.  in  order  to  obtain  the  depth  of  20  fa- 
thoms, and  to  pass  at  a  proper  distance  to  the  east  of  the  Alucranes.  Such  an 
attempt  was  the  cause  of  the  loss  of  a  merchant-vessel  named  the  St.  Rafael, 
which  got  a-ground  on  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  Alacran  Reefs ;  from  which 
the  other  vessels  of  the  same  convoy,  escorted  by  a  ship  of  the  line,  Santiago  la 
Espana,  passed  about  2  miles  clear.  This  loss,  which  happened  in  1795,  autho- 
rises us  in  recording  it,  and  in  pointing  out  the  necessary  means  of  preventing  si- 
milar mistakes  in  future. 

Once  on  the  Bank  of  Soundings,  and  having  ascertained  your  latitude,  or  si- 
tuation on  its  eastern  edge,  you  may  make  the  rest  of  the  navigation  by  it  with 
much  security ;  for,  placed  on  it,  you  have  a  mean  of  keeping  a  very  exact  reck- 
oning,  and  free  from  the  errors  produced  by  currents,  la  pla(^M>f  a  log-chip, 
in  heaving  the  log,  make  use  of  a  lead ;  for  the  lead,  by  resting  OTm  on  the  bot- 
tcm,  will  show  the  whole  distance  or  rate  that  the  vessel  runs,  whether  that  rat* 


._...<L^ 


440 


BLDNT  8  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


be  caused  by  the  wind  or  by  the  current ;  and  mnrkins;  the  bearings  of  the  Ime, 
the  oppnsiittt  direction  will  he  the  correct  course  which  the  shi|>  makes  good,  and 
which  requires  no  Tarlher  correction  than  for  mnRnetic  variiition.  It  is  true,  that, 
if  there  he  much  depth,  this  practice  will  he  vi^ry  dillicult;  hut  as,  in  general,  on 
this  hank,  you  ouijht  not  to  sail  in  more  than  20  fathoms,  and  in  the  rest  from 
Point  Descondiila  to  the  slioals,  t!i«'re  is  no  part  so  deep  as  30  fathoms;  there  can 
b'j  no  reason  why  this  useful  method  of  ascertaining  the  vessel's  place  should  not 
be  adopted.  Nor  is  the  frequent  use  uf  the  hand-leud  cf  less  importance ;  it  ought 
to  he  constantly  going. 

Many  neglect  sounding,  because  they  are  not  aware  of  its  importance.  If,  In 
fact,  a  vessel,  wiiich  has  to  sound  in  30  fathoms,  has  to  take  in  sail,  in  order  to  heave 
the  topsails  ah.ick,  she  cannot  sound  frequently ;  for,  in  d(»ing  so,  half  the  day 
would  be  consumed  in  sounding ;  but  it  is  well  known  that  there  is  no  neces«ity 
for  so  much  work,  in  order  to  sound,  even  in  more  than  80  fathoms,  as  those  well 
know,  by  practice,  who  manoeuvre  tjieir  vessels  with  propriety.  In  depths  be- 
tween If)  and  20  fathoms,  they  ought  to  make  use  of  more  than  the  lead  hove  or 
flown  by  hand ;  and  for  this  it  is  indispensahle  to  have  seamen  acquainted  with 
this  work;  without  wliiih  every  vessel  might  be  lost,  that  has  to  navigate  over 
■hual  places,  on  which,  usually,  the  dangers  are  only  discoverable  by  the  tead. 


Directions  for  those  "  \o  Navigate  from  East  to  West, 

1st.  You  ought  to  shape  courses,  so  as  to  compensate  as  much  as  possible  for 
the  effects  of  the  currents  which  prevail  between  Cuba  and  Yucatan,  and  so  that 
you  may  enter  upon  the  Bank  in  22^^  15',  a  little  more  or  h'ss.  To  be  al'Ie  to 
correct  your  course  with  judgment,  and  in  good  time,  you  should  omit  no 
means  of  observing  thii  hu'itude ;  nci,  contenting  yourself  solely  wi<th  w\vtt  the 
meridian  altitude  of  the  sun  gives,  but  taking  also  those  of  any  stars  of  the  first 
magnitude,  or  of  planets,  when  an  opportunity  offers. 

2d.  Attending  to  your  reckoning,  sound  in  time,  that  you  may,  at  any  rate, 
not  pass  far  from  the  edge  of  the  bank,  without  having  obtained  soundings  on  it ; 
and,  so  soon  as  you  have  got  them,  correct  your  longitude  by  them,  establishing 
thus  a  new  point  of  departure. 

3d.  So  soon  as  you  are  in  30  fathoms,  heave  your  log,  with  a  lead  in  place  of 
the  log-chip,  that  you  may  thus  keep  a  more  accurate  reckoning,  and  free  from 
the  cfftcts  of  currents. 

4th.  In  the  season  of  the  Norths,  you  should  be  directed  by  the  depths  of  20  or 
S3  fathoms,  which  you  will  find  in  the  parallel  of  22<^.  Sail  on  this  depth  imli( 
you  are  on  the  meridian  of  Point  Descondida,  when  you  will  steer  \V.  S.  W. 
true,  until  you  arc  on  the  parallel  of  21*^  25',  when  you  must  run  to  the  west, 
to  pass  between  the  Triangle  and  New  Shoal. 

5lh.  It  is  very  adviseable  to  know  the  latitude  by  observation,  for  passing  be- 
tween  these  shoals,  or  in  default  of  being  v.ry  sure  of  the  situation  hy  your 
course,  and  the  quality  of  the  soundings  ofi'  Point  Pedras  to  the  N.  W.  which 
ofiVr  a  good  mean  of  knowing  the  vessel's  place  :  and,  if  both  these  data  fail  you, 
and  you  arj  ia  consequence  doubtful  of  the  situation  of  the  vessel,  you  ought 
not  to  attempt  p'Jssing  between  the  shoals  during  the  night,  but  to  keep  your 
situatiou  dui'ing  it  upim  the  20  fathoms,  in  order  to  take  the  passage  by  day,  in 
which  you  will  run  no  risk,  especially  if  you  incline  your  course  to  the  direction 
of  the  Triangi'e ;  for  that,  as  we  already  explained,  may  be  seen  at  the  distance 
tif  five  miles. 

6th.  If  a  North  comes  on,  while  you  are  on  this  bank,  the  only  alarm  you  can 
be  under  is,  wlier.  the  vessel  is  to  the  eastward  of  the  meridian  of  Point  Piedras, 
when  it  will  be  necessary  t<»  carry  sail  sufficient  to  proceed  to  the  westward, 
without fallinggiuch  from  the  depth  of  20  fathoms,  in  order  that  you  may  pass 
the  said  point  cffnrly  and  without  danger  fnmi  the  Sisal  Bank  or  Shoal :  liut  this 
offers  no  great  difficulty ;  for  there  is  little  sea  on  this  bank  (Carapeche  Bunk  or 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


U\ 


Soundings ;)  and,  as  the  winds  from  the  north  are  generally  free,  with  very  lit- 
tle difficulty  you  may  clear  the  point. 

7th.  If  the  navigation  is  made  in  the  season  of  the  rains,  or  from  May  till  Sep- 
tember, you  may  sail  nearer  the  coast,  in  12  fathoms  ;  and  you  may,  also,  from 
the  time  you  are  in  20  fathoms,  abreast  of  the  River  Lagartos,  steer  S.  W.  (true) 
with  which  course  you  will  run  to  make  the  lookout  tower  of  Chuburna,  from 
which,  with  your  course  parallel  to  the  land,  you  will  pass  between  it  and  the 
Sisal  Shoal,  without  any  other  care  than  to  keep  in  5,  5J,  or  6,  fathoms,  accord- 
ing to  the  vessel's  draught ;  for,  with  ships  of  the  line,  and  not  having  to  anchor 
at  Sisal,  it  will  be  best  to  pass  outside  of  the  shoal.  At  this  time  it  is  preferable 
to  leave  the  bank  by  the  south  side  of  the  Areas ;  and,  to  effect  this  wkh  more 
certainty,  you  will  keep  in  the  depth  of  10  or  15  fathoms,  until  you  cross  the 
parallel  of  Cam]:)eche,  when  you  will  steer  so  as  to  leave  tlie  soundings  in  19° 
•00'  or  19*^  40'.  The  reason  of  approximating  the  coast  more  in  the  summer,  is 
because,  having  in  that  season  many  calms,  with  squalls  and  continual  rains, 
which  at  times  deprive  you  of  observations  for  two  or  three  days,  it  follows,  that 
the  navigation  among  shoals  is  very  unsafe.  On  the  contrary,  near  the  coast 
they  enjoy  more  land-breezes,  and  the  changes  of  the  breezes  are  more  certain. 

8th.  Until  now  we  have  supposed  you  to  have  entered  on  the  bank  with  a  good 
knowledge  of  your  latitude,  and  for  so  much  also,  to  have  ascertained  your  posi- 
tion on  the  edge  of  it ;  but,  if  you  enter  on  the  bank  with  great  uncertainly  as  to 
your  latitude,  which  must  always  be  the  case  when  you  are  without  observa- 
tions for  one  or  two  days  ;  in  such  a  case,  so  soon  as  you  have  caught  soundings, 
steer  S.  E.  true,  or  as  near  to  that  as  the  wind  will  permit :  with  this  course  it 
is  clear  you  vill  either  catch  the  20  fathoms  soundings,  or  you  will  lose  bottom 
very  soon.  If  the  ^rsf  happens,  you  will  have  attained  your  object  by  getting 
into  the  proper  depth  to  navigate  with  safaty ;  having  happily  freed  yourself 
from  the  dangers  of  the  Alacranes,  upon  which  you  would  indubitably  have  gone 
with  any  south-westerly  course ;  for  you  will  have  caught  the  soundings  on  the 
northern  edge  of  the  bank,  and  in  about  88^  47'  W.  of  Greenwich :  in  this  case, 
from  the  time  you  catch  20  fathoms,  you  will  run  to  the  west,  in  order  to  retain 
them  ;  and  you  cannot  be  certain  of  your  longitude  until  you  are  abreast  of  Point 
Piedras,  in  consequence  of  having  failed  of  observing  your  true  situation  by  the 
soundings  on  the  east  edge  of  the  bank.  If  the  second  of  these  cases  happens, 
namely,  running  soon  out  of  soundings,  not  the  least  doubt  can  remain  that  you 
are  on  the  eastern  edge  of  the  bank,  and  you  must  steer  to  the  S.  W.  to  get  the 
20  fathoms  depth,  as  we  have  already  advised. 

9th.  You  may  also  steer  to  the  west,  taking  soundings  in  23°  30'  of  latitude, 
and  running  along  that  parallel  in  50  and  60  fathoms  ofwateron  a  sandy  botlom, 
keeping  afterwards  so  as  to  pass  to  the  north  of  the  Bermejj»  i  but  we  are  very 
far  from  advising  this  route  to  be  followed,  from  two  reasons  ;  first,  because  we 
have  seen  that  there  are  well-founded  fears  of  shoals  on  the  north  edge  of  this 
bank,  which  as  yet  is  i»^porfectly  explored  ;  and  second,  because,  in  the  sum- 
mer, you  could  not  enjoy  the  advantage  of  the  land-breezes,  and  the  changes  of 
th'i  breezes,  which  you  might  have  in  the  proximity  of  the  land,  and  your 
voyage  would  thus  be  rendered  longer. 

As  we  have  said  all  that  is  necessary  to  be  kept  in  mind  for  navigating  on  this 
bank  from  east  to  west,  we  shall  now  give  some  notices  for  sailing  ia  a  contrary 
direction. 

Directions  for  JVavigating  from  fVcst  to  East.  f 

1st.  It  is  evidinit  that,  to  enter  on  the  Campeche  Bank  by  its  western  edge, 
nothing  more  is  necessary  than  the  latitude ;  for,  running  on  a  free  parallel,  you 
proceed  without  risk  of  shoals  on  the  bank ;  and,  whatever  may  be  the  error  of 
longitude,  you  can  correct  it  so  soon  as  you  strike  soundings :  but  it  must  he  re- 
membered that  the  tract  between  the  New  Shoal  (Bajo  Neuva)  and  Bermeja  Is- 
liuid,  cannot  bo  considered  as  clear ;  for  we  neither  know  the  situation  of  the^lat- 
ter,  nor  are  we  even  certain  of  its  existence. 

56 


'••y(Siii:£'^ka^   jati^^s. 


5*.#^ 


442 


BLUM'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


^'- 


£tl.  Having  entered  on  the  bank,  It  will  itself  indicate  when  you  are  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  shoils,  which  will  be  when  you  have  less  than  27  fathoms,  and  then 
the  quality  of  the  bottom  will  be  of  sand,  if  you  have  entered  to  the  north  of  the 
Areas  ;  but  if  you  have  entered  to  the  south  of  them,  you  will  keep  on  clay  to 
12  and  10  fathoms. 

Sd.  But,  if  you  have  to  enter  on  the  bank,  while  uncertain  of  the  latitude,  and 
in  obscure  weather,  as  there  often  is  when  the  Norths  blow,  it  is  adviseable  to 
bhun,  as  much  as  you  can,  entering  on  it  by  night,  and  endeavouring  to  make  it 
by  day,  between  the  Triangles  and  Areas ;  or  it  is  even  better  to  keep  to  the 
south  of  the  Areas,  as  a  little  more  or  less  than  the  latitude  by  account  will  an- 
swer for  this ;  but  you  must  remember  that  the  north  winds  always  produce 
currents  to  the  south  :  and  from  this  you  will  always  find  your  vessel  more  or 
less  to  the  south  of  the  reckoning  :  under  this  circumstance  you  may  expect  the 
effects  of  the  current  to  be  about  eighteen  miles  in  24  hours. 

4th.  If  in  this  case,  when  running  to  the  east,  you  have  soundings  on  the  edge 
of  the  bank,  you  may  continue  to  the  east,  although  it  be  by  night,  so  long  as 

?rou  find  clay  ;  but  the  greatest  attention  must  be"  paid  to  sounding  frequently,  so 
ong  as  you  do  not  consider  yourself  to  the  eastward  of  the  shoals  ;  which,  as 
we  have  said,  will  be  so  soon  as  you  have  less  than  27  fathoms.  This  remark  is 
most  essential,  and  of  itself  will  save  any  vessel  from  being  lost;  for  if,  sounding 
in  more  than  27  fathoms,  you  find  gravel  and  ssind  or  reck,  it  is  an  infallible  sign 
that  you  are  near  some  shoal ;  which  known,  you  should  immediately  steer 
S.  W.  in  order  to  get  again  upon  the  clay  soundings,  when  you  may  steer  again 
to  the  east ;  and  so  soon  as  you  are  past  the  shoals,  and  to  the  east  of  them,  you 
need  take  no  other  care  than  to  steer  in  to  the  east,  because  the  bottom  is  the 
only  object  you  have  to  guide  you,  whether  it  be  to  go  to  anchor  at  Campeche  ; 
to  lie-to  till  a  North  blows  over ;  or,  beating  to  windward  on  the  bank,  until  you 
can  leave  it  by  its  eastern  channel. 

_  5th.  Beating  to  windward  on  this  coast  is  very  easy,  and  the  navigation  expe- 
ditious, especially  in  April,  May,  June,  July,  and  August,  because  in  these 
months  the  winds  during  the  day  are  changeable  from  N.  W.  to  N.  E.  and  the 
land-breezes  are  from  E.  S.  E.  to  S.  E.  during  the  night ;  with  which  you  may 
navigate  towards  the  east  with  very  advantageous  tracks,  which  tracks  ought  to 
be  80  managed  as  to  stand  offshore  into  20  or  22  fathoms  with  the  land-breeze, 
and  turn  towards  shore  with  the  sea-breeze  as  far  as  6  fathoms. 

6th.  On  this  bank  the  sea  is  very  moderate,  even  with  heavy  norths ;  and  thus 
even  a  vessel  which  finds  herself  between  the  coast  of  Vera  Cruz  and  this  bank, 
ought  not  to  forget  that,  when  a  North  comes  on,  she  may  find  security  on  it, 
either  to  lie-to,  is  from  20  to  8,  or  6  fathoms  ;  or  to  anchor  in  8,  6,  or  4  fathoms, 
according  to  the  draught  of  the  vessel ;  and  if  she  find  herself  in  about  the  pa- 
rallel of  20°,  and  is  afraid  of  falling  to  leeward  and  getting  ashore  on  the  coast  of 
Tabasco,  she  ought  immediately  to  prefer  steering  east,  in  order  to  get  upon  the 
bank,  and  take  advantage  of  it. 

7th.  We  shall  conclude  these  directions  with  one  about  the  mode  of  leaving 
^his  bank,  when  you  navigate  from  Campeche  to  the  north,  bound  to  any  of  the 
harbours  on  the  northern  coast  of  the  Gulf.  In  the  manuscript  directions,  (those 
formerly  called  Pilot  for  the  Mexican  Gulf,)  and  which  are  the  only  ones  com- 
piled until  now,  it  is  advised  that,  sailing  to  the  north  until  you  pass  the  parallels 
of  Sisal,  you  should  then  steer  N.  N.  E.  on  purpose  to  run  out  between  the  Ne- 
griUo  and  Alacran,  following  the  said  course  to  the  24°  of  latitude  :  here  it  is 
proper  to  remark,  how  arbitrary  these  directions  are  ;  for  they  are  written  as  if 
the  writers  were  certain  of  the  situation  of  the  Negrillo,  which  they  were  not ; 
and  even  if  they  had  known  it,  they  ought  (it  seems  to  us)  to  have  been  a  little 
more  cautious  in  giving  their  directions,  than  to  have  advised  passing  bv  a  strait 
foYmed  by  two  shoals  ;  of  which,  if  the  one  is  dangerous  on  account  of  its  great 
extent,  the  other  is  no  less  so  on  account  of  its  smallness ;  for  it  cannot  be  seen 
till  you  are  almost  on  it.  By  following  this  route,  the  brigantine,  in  which  went 
the  mariner,  by  whose  account  we  have  placed  the  Negrillo,  got  within  it;  and 
it  is  very  wonderful  that  this  shoal  has  not  laid  navigation  under  a  severe  tribute, 
by  causing  the  loss  of  many  vessels. 


'''--"*«^-**^^aMft>iir-ifMfc'-- 


r,»e  -.jigra 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


443 


are  to  the  east- 
homs,  and  then 
he  north  of  the 
keep  on  clay  to 

lie  latitude,  and 
is  adviseahlc  to 
iring  to  make  it 
r  to  keep  to  the 
iccount  will  an- 
ilways  produce 
vessel  more  or 
may  expect  the 

ngs  on  the  edge 
light,  so  long  as 
g  frequently,  so 
oals ;  which,  as 
This  remark  is 
for  if,  sounding 
an  infallible  sign 
iraediately  steer 
may  steer  again 
ast  of  them,  you 
le  bottom  is  the 
»r  at  Campeche ; 
I  bank,  until  you 


lorths;  and  thus 
z  and  this  bank, 
1  security  on  it, 
6,  or  4  fathoms, 
n  about  the  pa- 
e  on  the  coast  of 
to  get  upon  the 

node  of  leaving 
id  to  any  of  the 
irections,  (those 
only  ones  com- 
ass  the  parallels 
etwee  n  the  Ne- 
;ude  :  here  it  is 
re  written  as  if 
;hey  were  not ; 
lave  been  a  little 
ising  by  a  strait 
unt  of'its  great 
cannot  be  seen 
in  which  went 
within  it ;  and 
severe  tribute, 


It  appears  to  us  proper  to  advise,  that  those  who  wish  tu  leave  this  bank,  by 
its  northern  edge,  shcuild  steer  to  the  north,  and  so  as  to  pass  to  the  east  of  Are- 
nas Island  ;  and  leaving  the  bank  at  such  an  hour  as  to  be  able  to  cross  the  pa- 
rallel of  23°  30' ;  with  day-light  they  ought  to  keep  the  same  course,  until  they 
pass  that  of  24°,  when  they  may  shape  their  course  as  convenient ;  due  caution 
being  taken  to  avoid  the  Negrillo,  &ic. 


Directions  for  Sailing  to  Campeche,  by  Captain  John  Mackellar,  oftJie 

British  JVavy,  (1817.) 

In  sailing  from  Jamaica  for  Campeche,  be  sure  to  make  Cape  Antonio,  and 
steer  to  the  West,  so  as  to  gain  the  latitude  of  22°  0':  then  steer  W*  J^  S.  100 
miles,  sounding  frequently,  and  having  good  soundings  on  the  bank.  You  may 
then,  with  great  confidence,  keep  in  the  soundings  laid  down  in  the  new  Chart, 
either  in  going  within  the  shoal  of  Sisal  or  without  it;  but,  in  fine  weather,  I 
should  always  prefer  making  the  land  to  the  eastward,  and  then  run  down  along 
the  coast,  in  5  or  6  fathoms.  On  approaching  Sisal,  keep  the  land  freely  on 
board,  by  your  soundings  ;  and,  in  doing  so,  you  avoid  the  risk  of  running  on  it, 
either  by  day  or  night ;  for  you  will  see  the  castle  of  Sisal  five  or  six  miles  off, 
and  you  may  run  down  in  5  or  6  fathoms.  The  grt.il  advantage  of  this  will  be, 
the  certainty  of  land-winds  off  shore,  from  about  four  o'cJock  in  the  afternoon 
until  seven  or  eight  the  next  morning ;  the  sea-breeze  setting  in  generally  from 
the  northward  and  eastward.  If  you  are  in  a  vessel  drawing  more  than  twelve 
feet  water,  avoid  a  shoal  laid  down  in  the  Spanish  chart,  on  which  2i  fathoms 
only  have  been  found  :  this  shoal  lies  off  the  village  of  Jayna,  about  sixteen  miles, 
which  village,  or  any  part  of  the  coast,  cannot  be  seen  off  deck;  therefore  great 
caution  is  necessary  in  running  for,  or  leaving  Campeche. 

The  town  of  Campeche  is  situated  in  lat.  19°  51'  15"  N.  and  long.  90°  28'  15" 
W.  of  Greenwich.  Proceeding  for  the  anchorage  from  the  northward,  and 
having  advanced  towards  Point  Descondida,  un  the  N.  W.  part  of  Yucatan,  dis- 
tant from  it  eight  or  nine  miles,  your  depth  of  water  will  be  from  5  to  6  fathoms  ; 
from  this  proceed  to  the  southward,  about  S.  by  W.  observing  that  you  must  not 
go  nearer  to  the  shore  than  six  fathoms,  until  you  are  as  far  as  the  lat.  of  20°  0' 
N :  then,  being  in  that  latitude,  and  your  depth  of  water  six  fathoms,  if  clear 
weather,  you  will  see  the  land,  which  is  very  low  and  difficult  to  make  out ;  from 
this,  if  the  wind  will  allow  you,  steer  E.  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  E.  until  you  make 
the  land  out  plainly.  The  most  remarkable  spot  on  it  is  Fort  St.  Michael,  which 
is  a  large  white  fort,  on  the  very  toj)  of  the  hill.  This  is  the  first  part  of  the  land 
you  can  make  out,  and  it  may  be  seen  in  lat.  19°  56',  in  5}  fathoms.  So  soon 
as  this  is  made  out  plainly,  bring  it  to  bear  E.  by  S.  and  steer  for  it:  you  will 
then  be  in  the  deepest  channel  for  Campeche,  and  may  choose  your  depth  of 
water  to  anchor  in.  When  you  have  45  fathoms,  the  steeples  of  Campeche  are 
just  in  sight,  from  a  frigate's  deck  ;  and  when  in  4.i,  the  church  at  Lerma  can  be 
seen  from  tlio  deck;  the  Point  Morros,  which  is  the  S.  W.  extreme  of  the  Imd, 
will  bear  S.  S.  E.  and  Campeche  East;  and,  when  in  24  feet,  which  is  the  depth 
I  should  propose  for  a  frigate  to  anchor  in,  the  tops  of  the  houses  at  Campeche 
are  just  well  in  sighf  from  the  deck,  bearing  S.  83°  E.  Fort  St.  Michael  S.  73° 
E.  Lerma  Church,  it  the  bottom  of  the  hill,  S.  66°  E.  and  Point  Morros,  the 
S.  W.  extreme  of  ihe  land,  S.  19°  E  :  ^our  distance  from  the  town  will  then  be 
nine  and  a  half  miljs,  and  lat.  10'"  y3'  47",  and  long.  90°  37'  30"  W.  Should  your 
ship  be  of  less  drtught  of  water  than  a  frigate,  proceed  on  for  fort  St.  Michael, 
keeping  it  bearing  as  above,  and  anchor  in  what  depth  you  please,  but  within  Si 
fathoms;  in  this  direction  the  bottom  is  bad,  being  covered  with  large  shells,  nn  J, 
of  course,  dangerous  to  anchor  in. 

In  the  event  of  rimtiing  for  Campeche,  in  hazy  weather,  which  often  is  the 
ciise  on  this  coast,  in  the  fore  part  of  the  day,  I  should  recommend  proceeding 
as  follows  :— After  you  reach  the  lat.  of  20"^  0'  N.  haul  up  to  the  E.  S.  E.  keeping 


444 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


your  lead  going ;  and  should  you  not  sec  the  land,  endeavour  to  get  into  the  lat, 
of  19°  54'  b  jfore  you  are  in  loss  than  4^  or  5  fathoms  of  water.  So  soon  as  you 
consider  yourself  m  this  latitud»>,  proceed  to  the  eastward,  until  you  shoalen  your 
water  to  what  may  appear  hi-st  to  anchor  in  ;  taking  care,  if  you  have  to  beat  up, 
not  to  pass  to  the  southward  of  19°  52',  nor  to  the  northward  of  19°  56',  for  be- 
tween these  two  latitudes  is  the  deepest  water,  and  anchor  as  near  the  latitude  of 
19°  54'  as  possible. 

In  lat.  20°  12'  and  long.  90°  41',  there  is  a  small  spot  of  ground  with  only  fif- 
teen feet  of  water  on  it ;  but,  running  along  shore,  and  keeping  in  6  fathoms,  you 
will  pass  to  the  westward  of  it :  the  soundings  near  this  part  are  very  irregular, 
altermg  sometimes  a  fathom  and  a  half  between  two  casts  ;  there  is  no  other 
part  on  the  bank  where  this  is  fhe  case. 

The  town  of  Campeche  is  a  walled  town  with  four  gates,  N.  E.  and  S.  W. 
the  North  gate  leads  into  the  town  from  the  sea  by  a  pier  of  about  50  yards 
long ;  but  the  water  is  so  shallow  that  small  boats  only  can  land,  and  then  only 
at  high  water ;  the  rise  ia  about  three  feet. 


Remarks  on  Sailing  towards  Campeche,  by  Captain  J.  W.  Monteatli. 

On  rounding  the  bank  of  Sisal,  in  12  fathoms,  I  hauled  up  South,  until  we 
had  attained  the  latitude  of  Point  Descondida,  and  the  depth  of  water  5  fathoms : 
steering  in  this  depth,  the  first  object  I  observed,  was  a  large  white  building  on 
the  second  lump  of  hign  land  visible,  and  which  is  a  fort  (St.  Michael's,)  two 
miles  S.  W.  from  the  city.  Steering  on,  the  next  objects  that  appeared  were  the 
steeples  of  the  churches  in  the  city.  Steer  directly  for  the  fort,  until  in  3^  fa- 
thoms, when  you  will  observe  the  village  of  Lamos,  which  lies  five  miles  S.  \V. 
of  Campeche.  Steer  in,  keeping  the  church  of  Lamos  on  your  starboard  bow, 
until  you  bring  it  to  bear  South,  and  Campeche  E.  by  N.  when  you  may  anchor 
in  from  eighteen  to  sixteen  feet  of  water,  at  the  distance  of  four  and  a  half  miles 
from  Campeche  ;  in  this  position  the  depth  of  water,  for  above  a  mile,  does  not 
vary  more  than  12  or  15  inches. 

During  my  stay,  (from  June  10th  to  July  10th,  1817,)  I  observed  the  tides 
were  very  irregular,  and  greatly  influenced  by  the  wind  ;  so  that  ships  (with  the 
wind  off  shore)  must  pay  attention,  if  drawing  much  water,  to  get  under  weigh, 
and  i  un  out  farther  into  deeper  water.  On  the  2d  of  July,  the  Fame,  then  draw- 
ing 17  feet,  and  lying  in  3^  fathoms,  grounded  with  an  off-shore  wind,  and  in  a 
few  hours  had  only  14  feet  alongside,  and  for  three  days  never  more  than  16i| 
feet,  until  the  wincl  shifted  to  the  northward  ;  and,  had  she  not  been  a  remark- 
ably strong  vessel,  would  have  strained  very  much. 

Vessels  with  hempen  cables  ought  to  be  careful  in  picking  out  a  clear  birth,  as 
n  number  of  vessels,  were  formerly  in  the  habit  of  heaving  out  stone-ballast  where 
they  lay  :  this  is  now  prevented,  by  a  fine  of  .'jOO  dollars  being  laid  on  any  vessel 
that  does  so.  Sand  ballast  is  allowed  to  be  thrown  overboard,  by  shifting  the 
vessel  often,  bo  that  there  is  no  danger  of  banks  being  formed  by  it. 


CI 

Poir 
are 
S.  71 
der 
the 

Fi 
Rivel 
(Mu\ 
stanci 
the 

Frl 
Icagul 

q«ie,  11 
feet ;  I 
Bueyj 
can  s^ 
that 
two  p 
All 
to  Ch 
Chilte 
and  C 
from 
CupiU 
mouth 
bars. 


The  Southern  Coast  of  the  Gulf,  from  Point  Xicalango  to  Vera-Cruz, 
including  some  general  Remarks,  i^c. 

The.  Province  of  Tabasco,  adjoining  that  of  Yucatan,  is  bounded  on  the  west  by 
Vera  Cruz. 

The  principal  harbours  to  be  described  within  this  division  nre  those  of  Alvara- 
do  and  Vera  Cruz;  the  last  being  the  emporium  of  the  Mexican  Provinces.  Am- 
ple directions  for  sailing  over  the  Bank  of  Campeche,  to  the  westward,  have  been 
already  given ;  but  we  shall  here  introduce  some  general  remarks,  which  may  ae 
acceptable  to  those  who  arc  strangers  to  this  sea. 


./:-...St 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


Uu 


W.  Monteath. 


)n  the  west  bv 


COAST  between  the  Lagoon  of  Terminos  and  Vvra  Cruz. — From  Xicalango 
Point,  the  distance  to  the  River  of  S.  Pedro  is  3Z  miles.  The  high  lands  between 
are  the  Altos,  or  Heights,  of  St.  Gabriel.  From  S.  Pedro  River,  the  coast  tends 
S.  75°  W.  true,  HH  miles,  to  Cupiico  River:  it  forms,  from  this  hearing,  a  slen- 
der hay,  only  5  miles  in  depth.  From  Cupiico  River  to  the  bar  of  Santa  Anna, 
the  coast  tends  more  to  the  south,  forming  a  bay,  S.  52*^  W.  true,  31  miles. 

From  Point  Jicalango  the  coast  tends  nearly  west,  (true,)  10  leagues,  to  the 
River  of  St.  Peter  and  Paul ;  and  all  this  portion  of  it  is  named  the  Lodamr 
(Muddy  Place,)  for  the  bottom  is  of  such  loose  soft  clay,  that  there  have  been  in- 
stances of  the  hulls  of  vessels  being  sa<ved  which  had  been  driven  ashore  on  it  by 
the  Nortlis. 

From  the  River  of  St.  Peter  and  St.  Paul,  the  coast  tends  about  W.  S.  W.  28 
leagues,  to  the  River  Santa  Anna,  and  on  this  coast  are  the  rivers  Tabasco,  Chilte- 
peque,  Dos  Bocas,  and  Cupiico.  The  bars  of  St.  Peter  and  Paul,  and  Chiltepe- 
que,  have  7  to  «  feet  of  water,  and  those  of  Dos  Bocas  and  Rio  Cupiico  about  4 
feet ;  that  of  Tabasco,  which  is  deeper,  forms  two  mouths,  separated  by  the 
Buey  Islet;  in  the  eastern  one  there  are  8  feet,  and  in  the  western  10  feet;  we 
can  say  nothing  of  the  channels  of  these  bars,  which  are  changeable,  excepting 
that  of  St.  Peter  and  St.  Paul,  which  remains  fixed  in  the  middle,  between  the 
two  points  of  the  river. 

All  the  coast  from  Jicalango  to  Santa  Anna  is  clean,  so  that,  from  the  Lodazar 
to  Chiltepeque  there  are  4  and  5  fathoms,  at  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  10  from 
Chilte|)cque  to  Santa  Anna ;  the  quality  of  the  bottom  between  the  Lodazar 
and  Chiltepeque  is  mud ;  from  Chiltepeque  to  Dos  Boi-as,  mud  and  rotten  shells; 
from  Dos  Bocas  to  Rio  Cupiico,  coarse  sand,  of  an  olive  colour;  and  from  Rio 
Cupiica  to  Santa  Anna,  coarse  sand,  with  some  shells,  and  partly  gravel.  In  the 
mouths  of  these  rivers  there  is  mud,  u,itil  clear  of  the  heads  or  points  of  the 
bars.  All  this  coast  is  ratlier  low  than  otherwise,  and  is  covered  with  palms  and 
mangroves,  from  two  leagues  to  windward  of  St.  Pedro  to  Chiltepeque;  and 
thence  to  Santa  Anna,  with  mangroves  and  thatch-pulms. 

From  the  River  Santa  Anna,  the  coast  tends  west,  true,  for  thirty-eight  miles, 
to  that  which  is  named  Barrilla ;  and  in  the  intermediate  coast  the  rivers  Tonala 
and  Goazacoalcos  discharge  iheir  waters:  the  last  has.  or  lately  had,  15  feet  of 
water  on  its  bar. 

The  River  Gozacoalcos  is  tw<jnty-five  miles  to  the  west  from  the  bar  of  S?.nta 
Anna.  This  river  may  be  easily  known  ;  for  its  eastern  point  forms  a  scarped 
mount,  while  the  western  is  very  low.  At  S.  34°  W.  true,  nearly  four  ar  d  a  half 
miles,  you  may  see,  on  an  eminence,  a  vigia,  or  look-out  tower,  witii  a  iiouse  at 
the  foot  of  it,  which  serves  for  a  powder-magazine,  and  rather  more  to  the  east  is 
a  guard-housp.  and  battery,  the  flag-staff  of  which,  at  its  east  end,  serves  for  a 
mark  for  the  bar  of  the  river.  The  depth  on  the  bar  is  about  2i  fathoms,  and 
once  over,  it  increases  to  8,  14,  and  IG  iathoms. 

Barilla,  or  the  little  bar,  is  thirteen  miles  to  the  west  of  Gozacoalcos :  the  two 
rivers  form  an  island.  At  N.  N.  W.  i  V,'.  ten  miles  from  Barilla,  is  the  Point  of 
Sail  Juan,  with  an  islet;  and  seventeen  miles  from  it,  N.  W.  is  Zapotilan  Point, 
from  which  the  coast  tends,  in  a  bight,  eleven  miles,  to  the  Point  of  Morillos, 
followin';  afttrward?,  to  W.  N.  W.  seven  miles,  to  Roca  Partida  (i.  e.  the  split  or 
parted  lock.)  One  league  to  the  Avestward  of  Zapotilan  Point,  is  the  mouth  of 
the  Lagoon  of  Sontecomapa;  and  to  the  S.  S.E.  of  Morillos  Point  there  is  a 
vigia  or  look-out.  The  coast  between  Barrilla  and  Roca  Partida  forms  the  base 
of  the  Mountains  of  St.  Martin,  the  highest  peak  o'  which,  the  volcano  of  Tux- 
tla,  is  twenty-five  leagues  from  Vera  Cruz.  At  W  i  S.  thirty-seven  miles  from 
Roca  Partida,  is  the  Bar  of  Alvarado,  admitting  vessels  of  10  feet  draught.  On 
the  intermediate  coast  are  the  vigias  of  Tuxtla  ana  Barrancas. 

From  Barrilla  the  coast  tends  about  N.  W.  thiny-seven  miles,  to  Point  Moril- 
los, from  which  it  follows  to  the  west,  forty-four  more,  to  the  Bar  of  Alvarado, 
forming  thus  a  kind  of  promontory,  upon  which  rise  the  Sierras  (mountains)  of 
St.  Mariin  ;  on  the  highest  summit  of  these  mountains  is  the  volcano  of  Tuxtla, 
which  broke  out  in  March,  1793,  and  its  eruptions  continue  :  the  Sierra  is  plainly 
seen  from  Vera  Cruz,  which  is  twenty-seven  leagues  distant,  when  it  is  in  a  state 


.">-^ 


UG 


blunt's  amkkican  coast  pilot. 


«)!"  smoke  hy  tlay  ;  no  tliiit  it  is  iin  t\( client  laiid-niiuk.    From  the  Bar  of  Al\a 
rado  till!  coast  ti'iitis  irrf»!;ularly  t(»  tlur  N.  W.  for  sixteen  niilea,  to  Point  Sala*)- 
cliico,  whirli  is  the  southern  part  of  the  anehorn(;e  of  Juan  Lisardo. 

ALVAUADO,  which  is  one  of  the  hest  harhoura  in  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  is  si- 
tuated Ihirty-six  miles  S.  E.  from  Vera  Cruz,  in  lat.  18°  45',  lonj;.  \):P  4'i'.  Its 
bar  admits  vessels  of  12  feet  water,  which,  within  the  bar,  are  sheltered  from 
every  wind.  The  entrance  of  the  river  is  very  narrow,  and  cannot  he  seen  imlil 
bearing  from  S.  hy  E.  to  S.  by  W.  and  at  a  short  distance;  it  is,  however,  very 
easily  found  by  a  remarkable  sand-bUifT about  one  mile  to  the  east  of  the  bar. 
The  high  laud  of  St.  Martin',  called  on  the  Spanish  charts  El  Voloon  de  Siintkt, 
which  is  twenty-five  inilert  east  of  tli(!  meridian  of  Alvarado,  affords  a  very  re- 
markable land-full,  and  a  sure  indication  for  this  port.  With  the  high  lands  of 
St.  Martin  E.  S.  E.  by  compass,  twenty-five  or  thirty  miles,  and  the  sand-hill  of 
Alvarado  S.  K.  by  E.  one  and  a  half  mile,  the  bar  of  Alvarado  will  be  south,  dis- 
tance one  mile.  Yessbls  bound  here,  on  making  the  usual  signals  for  a  pilot, 
firing  a  gun  and  hoisting  colours,  will  be  furnished  without  delay.  The  pilot 
proceeds  from  the  town  in  a  long  pirogue,  or  canoe,  manned  by  eight  or  ten 
rowers. 

All  the  coast,  from  the  bar  of  Santa  Anna  to  Anton  Lisardo,  (westward  of 
Point  Salao-chico)  is  as  clear  as  that  to  the  eastward ;  but  in  every  part,  from 
the  Lagoon  of  Terminos,  to  the  point  last  mentioned,  it  is  highly  dangerous  to 
anchor  from  October  to  April,  on  account  of  the  strong  north's  blowing  right  on 
shore ;  and  you  ought  even  to  avoid  approaching  it  with  any  vessel  that  cannot 
enter  over  the  bars  which  have  been  described ;  for  it  may  very  easily  happen,  in 
spite  of  all  exertions,  that  you  may  be  driven  upon  the  coast ;  for  the  norths  are 
very  strong,  and  it  may  be  easily  seen  that,  with  them,  there  is  no  clear  way  of 
getting  off. 

The  ANCHORAGE  of  ANTON  LISARDO,  which  is  about  four  leagues 
S.  E.  I  S.  from  Vera  Cruz,  is  formed  by  various  shoals  and  reefs,  which  form 
among  them  several  channels  :  the  latter  are  not  only  clear,  but  are  of  easy  ac- 
cess ;  especially  when  a  fresh  wind  causes  the  sea  to  break  on  the  shoals,  fee. 
These  shoals,  although  they  do  not  aflford  any  shelter  frow  the  wind,  break  the 
sea  so  much,  that,  even  during  the  hardest  norths,  vessels  may  lie  very  safely  at 
their  anchors.  The  anchorage  is  spacious,  and  fit  for  all  classes  of  vessels;  the 
knowledge  of  it  Is  of  the  utmost  importance,  to  those  who  happen  to  be  to  lee- 
ward of  Vera  Cruz  during  a  north,  and  to  those  who  cannot  enter  Vera  Cruz 
with  these  winds.  This  anchorage  has  been  surveyed  by  the  captain  of  a  frigate, 
Don  Francisco  Murias,  who  jnade  a  plan  of  it  in  1818,  which  has  been  publish- 
ed a|  Madrid.  The  following  are  the  directions  for  it,  given  by  Captain  Murias: 
"  To  run  to  this  anchorage,  although  it  has  tlie  advantage  of  having  four  en- 
trances, with  a  sufficient  depth,  the  two  which  the  shoals  form  with  the  coast 
ought  to  be  preferred  ;  and  of  these  the  western  is  the  best.  To  enter  the  latter, 
steer  midway  between  the  coast  of  Blanquilla  Island,  on  a  true  east  course,  con- 
tinuing so  until  some  way  within,  when  the  course  may  be  altered  to  north,  for 
the  purpose  of  anchoring  where  it  suits.  The  best  anchorage  is  to  the  N.  VV. 
and  W.  N.  W.  of  Anton  Lisardo  Point,  (upon  which  there  are  some  houses,)  in 
1  i  fathoms,  on  gray  sand,  and  sand  with  shells."  The  castle  of  San  Juan  de 
Ulua  is  about  four  leagues  N.  W.  I  N.  from  the  point  of  Anton  Lisardo. 

VERA  CRUZ. — ^The  harbour  of  Vera  Cruz  is  not  a  commodious  or  a  con- 
venient port,  but  a  mere  roadstead,  covered  with  several  islands,  on  one  of  which, 
(the  fortress  of  Juan  de  Ulua)  on  the  north-west  corner,  a  light-house  is 
erected,  showing  a  revolving  light,  elevated  79  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 
The  light  is  from  21  lamps,  having  reflectors,  7  on  each  side  of  a  triangle,  which 
make  the  revolution  as  follows  :  From  the  first  appearance  of  light,  it  appears 
bright  for  about  six  seconds  ;  then  a  faint  glimmering  for  forty  seconds,  and  so 
on  alternately,  which  may  be  seen  twelve  miles  off  alternately.  The  access  to 
the  port  is  difficult  and  dangerous,  but  subjoin  such  as  we  are  in  possession  of. 

The  north-western  range  of  reefs,  he.  are  the  Reef  and  Isle  of  Blanquilla,  the. 
Reef  of  Galleguilla,  and  the  Reef  of  Gallega.  On  the  S.W.  side  of  the  latter 
stands  the  Castle  of  St.  Juan  de  Ulua,  (before  mentioned)  which  forms  the  east- 


BLUNTS    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


447 


crn  Hide  of  tlic  harbour.  Tl)e  soiiMi-castern  rang*;  art'  the  inefradit  de  adentro, 
the  Ueef  of  Isla  Verde,  the  Reef  of  the  Islet  Ptijarna,  that  of  the  tsla  Sacrafmns, 
and  two  small  shoals.  Besides  these  there  are  several  dangers  near  the  shon;. 
The  outer  edge  of  the  outer  reef,  Ancfrada  dc  adintro,  is  five  miles  to  tin;  E.N.E 
of  the  city  of  Vera  (Jru/.  These  reefs,  &.e.  are  commonly  called  the  Innrr 
Shoals  of  Vera  Cruz.  The  Outer  Shoals  aire  those  which  lie  ahout  Civm  leagues 
to  the  south-eastward  of  Vera  Cruz,  to  the  north-eastward  of  the  Point  of  An- 
ton Lisardo  and  the  adjoining  coast. 

M.  Chappe  D'Auteroche,  in  his  "  Voyage  to  California,"  to  observe  the  transit 
of  Venus,  &cc.  1709,  described  the  port  of  Vera  Cruz.  The  entrance  of  the 
harbour,  he  says,  is  very  dangerous ;  especially  with  the  gusts  of  wind  so  fre- 
quent in  the  Mexican  Sea :  as  the  channel  between  the  rocks  is  so  narrow,  thai 
there  is  room  for  only  one  ship  at  a  time.  The  wind  from  the  north,  bearing 
full  upon  the  rocks,  raakes  it  exceedingly  dangerous,  at  such  times,  to  anchor  in 
the  passage.  On  the  arrival  of  M.  Chappe,  6th  of  3Iarch,  1769,  the  north  wind 
prevailed,  and  blew  so  vehemently,  as  to  render  landing  dilHcult ;  and  he  had 
no  sooner  entered  the  town  than  it  blew  a  most  furious  hurricane.  All  inter- 
course with  the  ship  was  then  cut  off,  and  she  had  barely  time  to  run  for  shelter 
behind  the  castle  of  St.  Juan  d'Ulua,  the  only  place  where  a  ship  can  be  screened 
from  the  north  wind.  M.  Humboldt  says,  that  the  north  wind  here  is  announced 
by  a  great  change  in  the  barometer  :  during  this  wind,  the  mercury  rises  six  or 
seven  lines. 

The  principjil  land-marks  to  vessels  advancing  towards  Vera  Crira  are  the  high 
mountains  called  the  Cofie  or  Coffer  of  Perote,  and  the  Peak  of  Orizaba,  both 
of  which  are  far  inland,  to  le  westward  of  Vera  Cruz.  Still  farther  from  the 
city  to  the  E.  S.  E.  but  much  nearer  shore,  is  the  volcano  of  Tuxtia,  on  the'east- 
ern  part  of  the  Sierras  or  mountains  of  St.  Martin.  The  first  of  these,  the  Co- 
fre  de  Perote,  is  elevated  2,548  Spanish  toises,  or  2,332  English  fathoms,  above 
the  level  of  the  sea.  It  stands  in  lat.  Id^  29',  and  about  thirteen  leagues  from 
the  nearest  part  of  the  coast.  It  is  the  highest  of  the  mountain  ranges.  The 
Peak  of  Orizaba  may  be  readily  known;  it  stands  in  about  19'^3'N.  sixty-one 
miles  W.  9°  S.  true,  from  Vera  Cruz,  and  is  always  covered  with  snow.  This 
mountain,  of  a  conic  form,  became  volcanic  in  l.')45,  and  continued  in  action  for 
twenty  years,  since  which  time  there  has  been  no  appearance  of  inflammation. 
Though  the  summit  be  covered  with  snow,  the  sides  below  are  adorned  with 
beautiful  forests  of  cedars,  pines,  and  other  trees.  Its  height  has  been  given  by 
the  surveyors  as  3,258  Spanish  toises,  or  2,981  English  fathoms,  above  the  level 
of  the  sea.  It  may  be  readily  known,  as  it  shows,  at  a  great  distance,  in  the 
form  of  an  isosceles  triangle,  and  may  be  seen  to  tl»e  distance  of  twenty-five 
leagues  from  the  coast.  The  eastern  part  of  the  Sierras  of  St.  Martin  lies  about 
twenty-seven  leagues  S.  E.  by  E.  true,  from  the  port  of  Vera  Cruz.  The  light 
or  fire  of  the  volcano,  if  not  always,  may  be  occasionally  seen. 


Directions  for  Vera  Cruz,  6y  Captain  John  Mackellar,  R.  JV.  1817. 

1.  The  harbour  of  Vera  Cruz  is  formed  by  the  walls  of  the  town  on  the  south 
side,  and  by  the  walls  of  the  castle  of  St.  Juan  de  Ulua,  where  the  light-house 
stands,  on  the  north.  The  castle  is  built  on  a  small  island  opposite  the  town, 
and  has  a  large  reef  of  rocks  running  off  from  it  to  the  N.  by  E.  for  nearly  two 
miles :  this  reef  is  called  the  Gallega,  and  always  shows  a  part  above  water.  The 
harbour  is  bounded  on  the  S.  E.  and  E.  sides  by  three  or  four  small  islands  and 
reefs,  with  good  passages  through  between  them.  On  the  N.  W.  side  is  the 
principal  entrance,  on  account  of  the  ships  getting  easier  in  and  out,  and  that  is 
the  only  side  which  is  clear  and  open  to  seaward. 

2.  In  running  for  this  port,  I  should  recommend  to  you  to  get  into  the  latitude 
of  19^^  20',  before  you  pass  the  95th  degree  of  longitude,  and  from  that  proceed  to 
the  westward,  keeping  in  that  latitude  :  by  so  doing  you  will  pass  10  miles  to  the 


44.8 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


northward  of  Anegada  de  fuera,*  b  leagues  to  the  E.  by  S.  from  Vera-Cruz,  and 
upproach  Vera-Cruz  six  miles  to  the  northward  of  all  the  shoals  that  lie  off  from  it. 
If,  in  the  night-time,  a  good  look-out  must  be  kept  for  the  light,  on  the  larboard 
bow;  and,  on  making  it,  stand  on  to  the  westward,  until  it  bears  S.  S.  W.  from 
you ;  then,  if  in  the  lat.  of  19°  20',  you  will  be  8  miles  from  the  N.  N.  E.  side  of 
the  shoals  off  the  harbour:  here  bring  to,  with  the  ship's  head  to  the  northward, 
observing,  during  the  night,  not  to  approach  nearer  to  the  light  than  5  or  6  miles, 
and  to  keep  it  bearing  from  yoii  between  S.  S.  W.  and  South;  the  S.  S.  W.  bear- 
ing will  keep  yc.  clear  of  any  shoals  that  may  lie  to  the  eastward  of  the  light; 
that  is,  more  than  two  miles  from  it :  and  the  South  bearing  will  keep  you  clear 
of  the  N.  W.  shore.  At  day-liglit,  in  getting  sight  of  the  town,  steer  foi  it,  ob- 
serving the  following  directions. 

3.  Before  you  approach  nearer  than  3  or  4  miles  of  the  town,  bring  the  largest 
domed-top  steeple,  in  the  centre  of  the  town,  to  bear  S.  \  E.  it  will  then  appear 
with  two  sharp  spire-top'd  steeples  close  to  it,  on  the  west  side,  and  on  the  small 
hill  behind  the  iDwn.  There  is  a  division  between  part  of  tlve  hill  that  is  cov- 
ered with  grass,  and  part  that  is  covered  with  sand  ;  this  division  will  be  on  with 
the  steeples  b'^aving  as  above  ;  the  grass  part  to  the  S.  E.  and  the  part  covered 
with  sand  to  Tn- N.  W.  With  this  mark  jM-oceed  on  to  the  southward,  along 
the  west  side  vi  the  Gallega  Reef,  your  soundings  here  will  be  regular,  from  10 
to  5  fathoms  ;  and,  when  you  are  so  far  as  to  bring  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  square 
building  t!iat  the  look-out  house  stands  on  in  the  fort  to  touch  the  N.  E.  side  of 
the  light-house  bearing  about  E.  S.  E.  steor  for  it,  taking  care  not  to  open  the 
light-nouse  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  Look-out  house,  until  you  are  close  to  the  Castlo : 
this  mark  will  carry  you  up  to  the  light-house;  then  steer  round  it  to  the  south- 
ward, and  anchor  close  to  the  south  side  of  the  castle,  in  from  5J  to  4i  fathoms. 

During  the  months  of  November,  December,  January,  February,  and  March, 
the  strong  northerly  winds  prevail,  and  at  times  blow  very  strong,  which  occa- 
sion a  considerable  ?i.a  in  the  harbour;  and,  as  the  ground  is  not  good  for  hold- 
ing, I  should  !-com'aend  mooring  in  these  months  with  the  small  bower  to  the 
N.  W.'  and  besi  tw  the  N  E.  in  order  that  you  may  ride  by  both  anchors,  with 
the  wind  at  North,  and  Ly  your  sti'eam-anchor  astern,  which  will  be  sufficient 
to  hold  you  with  th'i  land-wind,  which  seldom  blows  with  any  force.  During 
other  months  of  the  year,  moor  t'ith  your  small  bower  to  the  N.  W.  and  best  to 
the  S.  E.  in  order  to  have  on  open  hawse  to  the  eastward. 

4.  There  is  no  regular  tide  here,  but  in  moderate  weather  ;  there  i«  one  ebb  and 
one  flood  in  twenty-four  hours,  or  rather  one  rise  and  one  fall  in  that  time ;  for 
it  is  the  case  sometimes,  that  the  tide  runs  to  the  N.  W.  for  three  or  four  days, 
and  the  same  to  the  S.  E.  but  it  appears  to  be  governed  chiefly  by  the  winds 
blowing  in  the  same  direction  ;  as  the  w-ind  blows,  its  rise  and  fall  is  from  two 
to  three  feet ;  buL  in  strong  breezes,  sometimes,  there  is  neither  rise  nor  fall  for 
three  or  four  days. 

5.  The  anchorage  at  Vera  Cruz'is  extremely  bad,  and,  if  once  you  part,  there  is 
no  chance  of  saving  your  ship,  having  nothing  but  broken  ground  to  leeward  of 
you. 

The  men  of  war  of  the  country  always  moor  with  the  small  bower  to  the  N. 
W.  in  f)  fathoms,  and  the  best  bower  cable  to  the  rings  in  the  castle  of  S.  Juande 
Ulua,  with  a  cable  over  the  stern  to  tho  S.  S.  W.  in  6  fathoms,  by  which  mode 
they  Ik;  so  close  under  the  castle,  that  they  are,  in  a  great  measure,  slicltered 
from  the  violence  of  the  North  and  N.  W.  winds.     I  anchored,  in  June,  1817, 

*  In  these  directions,  Captain  Mackellar  seems  to  have  assumed  that  circumstancee  arc 
favourable.  In  order  to  guard  against  the  eilccts  of  an  unexpected  J^Torth,  or  a  northerly 
wind.  Captain  Hester,  in  some  former  directions,  written  in  1764,  says  explicitly,  that  none 
should  fall  to  the  southward  of  19"^  50',  or  between  that  and  I'J^  40',  until  the  summit  of  Ori- 
zaba is  seen,  and  that  care  should  be  taken  not  to  bring  that  mountain  to  the  westward  uf  W. 
S.  VV.  The  Captain  of  the  port,  Don  Bernardo  dc  Orta,  says,  as  shown  hereafter,  that  the 
course  should  be  made  to  windward  on  the  parallels  of  19  '  30',  or  19"  40',  and  CBpccially  so 
in  the  months  of  May,  .lune,  and  July,  when  the  sun  is  in  the  proximity  of  the  zenith-  It 
is,  at  least,  clear,  that  the  safest  course  is  to  the  northward,  particularly  to  such  as  cannot  rcW 
on  (heir  observations. 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


449 


\  Vera-Cruz,  and 
hat  lie  oif  from  it. 
t,  on  the  larboard 
rs  S.  S.  W.  from 
;N.N.  E.  side  of 
to  the  northward, 
than  5  or  6  miles, 
le  S.  S.  W.  bear- 
I'ard  of  the  light ; 
ill  keep  you  clear 
n,  ateer  foi  it,  ob- 

,  bring  the  largest 
t  will  then  appear 
,  and  on  the  small 
s  hill  that  is  cov- 
)n  will  be  on  with 
I  the  part  covered 
southward,  along 
B  regular,  from  10 
side  of  the  square 
t  the  N.  E.  side  of 
e  not  to  open  the 
lose  to  the  Castle : 
md  it  to  the  soutli- 
i  5J  to  4J  fathoms, 
ruary,  and  March, 
rong,  which  occa- 
not  good  for  hold- 
imall  bower  to  the 
)oth  anchors,  with 
will  be  sufficient 
ny  force.  During 
W.  and  best  to 


"I 


\re  ie  one  ebb  and 
in  that  time ;  for 
iree  or  four  days, 
icfly  by  the  winds 
[d  fall  is  from  two 
;r  rise  nor  fall  for 

you  part,  there  is 
Lnd  to  leeward  of 

bower  to  the  N- 
btle  of  S.  Juan  d»! 
|,  by  which  mode 
leasure,  slu'lteretl 
III,  in  June,  HU7. 

circumstances  arc 
rth,  or  a  nortlicily 
bxplicitly,  that  none 
1  the  summit  of  Ori- 
Ihc  westward  of  W. 
J  hereufter,  that  the 
I',  and  especially  so 
of  the  zenith.  H 
aucb  as  cannot  rcW 


by  bringing  the  S.  W.  angle  of  fort  S.  Juan  to  bear  N.  E.  by  E.  {  E.  about  000 
yards  off;  from  which  bearinj;  only  four  guns  from  the  castle  or  out-works  coidd 
be  brought  to  benr  on  the  niiip.  This  position  may  he  taken  by  running  in  to 
the  southward  of  the  castle,  between  tbe  shoals  of  Galleguilia  and  Blanquilia, 
which  always  siiow  themselves,  and  round  the  Galhga  Reef,  in  &  fathoms,  until 
you  bring  the  bastion  of  St.  Crispin  (on  the  south  corner  of  the  castle)  to  bear 
N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  Drop  your  anchor  on  a  quarter-spring,  to  act  according  as 
the  wind  and  circumstances  ni;»y  require. 

The  town  of  Vtira-Cruz  fiu-nishes  no  certain  supply  of  any  kind  for  ships,  cj:- 
cepling  water,  mhI  that  bad  ;  atul,  during  the  winter  months,  difficult  to  get  off; 
as  tbe  sea  breaks  with  so  much  violence  on  the  pier  as  to  prevent  boats  from 
landing  f(»r  three  or  four  days  at  a  time.  As  the  sea  and  land  breezes,  through- 
out the  year,  are  regular,  there  is  seldom  any  difficulty  in  going  in  or  out  of  the 
harbour.  During  the  months  of  August,  September,  and  October,  th«  rains  set 
in,  with  close  sultry  Aveather,  and  the  vnpours  arising  from  the  marshy  ground 
makes  the  season  extremely  subject  to  the  yellow  fever,  of  which  many  hun- 
dreds die  yearly,  equal  to  a  tenth  part  of  the  whole  population,  particularly 
strangers. 


Brief  Directions  for  Vera-Cruz,  communicated  to  Captain  Livlngitoni 
by  Don  Cayetano  Olivella,  1819.* 

Run  in  for  Punta  Gorda  (lat.  19°  l\V)  until  the  castle  of  S.  Juan  de  Ulua 
bears  S.  E.  by  S.  and  then  keep  away  to  the  south-eastward  until  you  bring  that 
castle  to  bear  S.  E.  You  will  then  steer  so  as  to  keep  the  foremost  shroud  of 
the  vessel  always  on  with  the  castle  ;  that  is,  the  foremost  shroud  of  tbe  larboard 
side  ;  the  bearings  to  be  from  the  wheel  or  tiller  of  the  vessel :  keeping  it  so  will 
lead  you  clear  round  the  reef  into  the  anchorage. 

In  case  of  parting  one  anchor,  never  attempt  to  let  go  another,  but  make  sail 
immediately,  and  run  the  vessel  right  for  the  Mole  :  the  current,  which  runs  with 
great  velrjcity,  will  not  allow  you  to  fetch  the  Mole;  but,  steering  for  it,  you  will 
fetch  the  beach  at  the  S.  E.  end  of  the  city;  by  which,  at  least,  the  lives  of  those 
on  board  will  be  saved:  whereas,  were  yuu  to  take  lime  to  let  go  another  an- 
chor, it  would  not  bring  you  up,  but  you  would  infallibly  go  on  either  the  La- 
vandera  Shoal,  the  Isle  of  Sacrilioios,  or  the  reef  of  rocks  off  the  Punta  de  Hor- 
nos,  in  either  of  which  cases  not  a  soul  could  be  saved. 

You  anchor  under  the  castle  of  S.  Juan,  and  near  to  it;  the  ccmro  of  the  cas- 
tle-walls bearing  N.  N.  E.  %  E.  or  thereabout. 

Vessels  should  always  keep  their  fore-topmast  staysails,  and  such  others  ai 
may  bo  required  to  run  them  on  the  beach,  ready  iieiit. 

The  reefi  generally  show,  either  by  breaking,  or  by  the  Water's  being  disco- 
loured; you  moor  with  the  bower-anchors  to  the  N.  W.  and  North,  and  a  stream-  , 
anchor  out  astern  to  tlie  S.  W. 


Description  of,  and  Directions  for,  the  Port  of  Vera-Crux,  from  thou 
of  Don  Bernardo  de  Orta,  1798. f 

The  Sierras  of  San  Martin,  the  eastern  part  of  which  lies  about  27  leagues  to 
the  S.  E.  Iiy  E.  true,  from  the  harbour,  near  the  coast,  the  Peak  of  Orizaba,  and 
the  Cofrede  Ptride,  both  of  which  stjuul  a  distance  to  the  west,  and  which,  from 

"       '  "  ■—■■-■■■        .1—       ■  I  .,  ■!■■  -,—    l„l    ■       — I,..   ,    ..    — ,-        — .    .._. .  _ ■■     —      11       II     f» 

♦  These  directions  for  entering  np|iear  to  bo  particularly  adapted  to  small  vessels. 

t  Don  Bernardo  do  Orta  wasOuplain  of  the  port,  or  harbour  master,  an  intelligent  man, 
and  one  of  the  few  nho  got  forwnrd  by  merit  in  Spain,  without,  what  ia  called,  nobl*  blood. 
Us  was  lately  ■uporiuleiideat  of  the  posts  at  Vcra-Cru2. 

.07 


«r; 


450 


blunt's 


AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


f  ' 

1 


their  great  elevation,  are  seen  a  long  way  out  at  sea,  in  clear  weather,  are  objects 
which  facilitate  the  making  of  Vera-Cruz.  Should  neither  of  the  two  latter  be 
seen,  the  light  or  fire  of  the  volcano  of  Tuxtla  may  happen  to  come  in  sight. 
After  seeing  either  of  these  objects,  the  course  will  he  regulated  according  to  its 
bearing  and  circumstances,  by  reference  to  the  Chart. 

2.  It  is  assumed  that,  on  quitting  Campeche  Bunk,  you  will  in  the  season  of  the 
Norths  ;  direct  your  course  to  Point  Delgada,  (latitude  19°  51' ;)  but,  even  in  the 
summer,  you  should,  on  no  account,  run  in  on  the  parallel  of  Vera-Cruz,  as  some 
directions  recommend,  lesL  you  meet  with  its  tempestuous  Norths  :*  With  these 
gales,  and  even  before  they  come  on,  there  are  currents  towards  the  south,  which 
may,  in  some  cases,  lead  vessels  on  the  outer  or  inrier  shoals  of  Vera-Cruz,  and 
particularly  on  the  Anegnda  de  fuerrt.,  or  the  Anegada  de  Adentro ;  the  course 
should  therefore  be  made  to  Avindward  on  the  parallel  of  19^  SO',  or  19°  40',  of 
latitude,  and  especially  so  in  the  months  of  May,  June,  and  July,  when  the  sun 
h  in  the  proximity  of  the  zenith. 

S.  Having  oiice  seen  the  coast  near  Point  Delgada,  you  will  pass  to  the  east  of 
that  point,  Bernal,  Bernal-chico,  Juan  Angel,  &.c.  at  the  distance  of  from  4  or  5 
leagues,  and  steering  from  S.  S.  E.  to  S.  E.  by  S.  until  you  gain  sight  of  Vera- 
Cruz,  or  of  the  castle  of  San  Juan  de  Ulua,  without  embaying  yourself  in  the 
Bayof  Antigun. 

4.  If,  from  circumstances,  you  come  in  from  a  lower  latitude  than  19°  30',  the 
ship's  place  will  be  first  known  from  some  of  the  outer  shoals,  the  breakers  on 
which  will  be  soen,  if  not  obscured  by  thick  weather,  which  is  often  the  case  du- 
ring the  norths,  and  even  after  the  rains  commence.  Here,  on  approaching,  the 
colour  of  the  v.ater,  and  the  lead,  if  attended  to,  will  give  warning  what  ought  to 
be  done. 

5.  To  the  most  remarkable  objects  and  points,  on  the  coast  above  described,  may 
be  added  the  point  which  projects  from  that  part  of  the  coast  named  the  Sierra 
of  Maria  Andrea,  three  leagues  to  the  southward  of  Point  Delgada  ;  and,  when- 
ever this  or  one  of  the  other  points  of  the  coast  is  recognized,  you  will  proceed, 
according  to  judgment,  for  gaining  the  first  leading  mark  for  entering  the  harbour 
by  the  castle  of  St.  Juan  de  Ulua. 

G.  If,  on  approaching  the  harbour,  you  should  see  any  of  the  edifices  of  Vera- 
Cruz,  or  masts  of  shipping,  or  the  inner,  shoals,  to  the  westward,  you  must  of 
course  be  to  the  east  of  the  given  marks  for  entering,  and  also  of  the  harbour; 
and,  consequently  it  becomes  necessary,  according  to  where  you  may  be,  to  shape 
your  course  to  tlie  S.  W.  or  N.  W. 

7.  If  the  wind  should,  at  that  time,  be  free  from  the  eastward,  it  will  answer  for 
running  in  at  a  prudent  distance,  around  the  Galleguilla,  and  Gallega  Shoals,  for 
the  purpose  oT  gaining  the  marks;  but  if  it  docs  not  pass  from  E.  by  N.  towards 
the  North,  it  will  be  hardly  sufficient  to  ch^ar  the  Soldado  Point,  or  western  part' 
of  the  Gallega  Shoal,  on  advancing  into  the  harbour.  If,  therefore,  you  find  a 
scant  wind  on  the  starboard  tack,  or  a  North,  you  must  luff,  to  pass  the  Anegada 
de  adentro  ;  an  J,  effecting  this,  you  will  with  ease  also  clear  the  Galleguilla.  The 
northernmortt  points  of  these  two  shoals  lie  nearly  east  and  west  from  each  other, 
distant  three  and  a  quarter  miles.  Blanquilla  Island  lies  between  them,  but  some- 
thing to  the  south  of  that  line  of  bearing. 

8.  Should  you  happen  to  be  uius  situated  when  the  north  wind  will  not  permit 
your  clearing  the  Inner  Anegada  by  tacking  to  the  west,  nor  the  Outer  Anegada 
by  tacking  to  the  east,  there  will  be  no  other  resource  than  to  keep  away  to  the 
S.  or  S.  W.  to  take  the  possible  shelter  of  Isia  Verde,  (Green  Island,)  or  of  the 
Isla  de  Sacrificios,  (i.  e.  Sacrifice  Island)  and  riding  in  from  G  to  14  or  IC  fathnrns 
on  good  holding  ground,  with  two  or  three  anchors  down,  until  tiu^  wind  returns  to 
the  regular  breeze ;  but  if,  in  consequence  of  your  having  anchored  wide,  the 


*  From  the  miJdiu  of  September  until  the  month  of  March,  caution  is  necessary  in  mak- 
u\g  Vera-Cruz,  for  the  norths  are  then  very  heavy.  The  narrowness  of  this  harbour,  the  ob- 
struction formed  by  the  shoaU  at  its  entrance,  and  the  slender  shelter  it  affords  from  th* 
norths,  render  an  attempt  to  make  it,  during  one  of  tliem,  extremely  dangerous,  for  it  will  be 
impossible  to  take  the  anchorage. — (8ee  winds  ajler  described. ) 


blunt's 


AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


451 


;  yourself  in  the 


'.helter  should  be  insufficient,  while  you  have  a  pilot  on  hoard,  and  the  wind  so 
/Ived  a  head  that  you  cannot  gain  the  harbour,  or  more  shelter  here,  you  will  do 
well  to  avail  yourself  of  a  fit  moment  to  run  for  the  sheltor  which  thelsia  Blanca, 
(White  Island,)  lying  to  the  west  of  the  Pointof  Anton  Lisardo,  affords  from  th« 
sea. 

9.  Some  have,  from  their  temority,  incurred  misfortunes  which  they  might  have 
avoided;  for,  having  recognised  the  Outer  Anegada,  (Anegada  defuera,)  they 
have  followed  the  tack  to  the  west  with  a  scant  wind,  persuiided  that  they  could 
free  themselves  :  this  does  not  always  succeed,  and  never  if  the  water  runs  with 
such  velocity,  as  it  does,  with  head  winds,  towards  the  channels  of  the  shoals. 
The  safest  way  is,  considering  the  situation  and  the  hour,  if  the  wind  does  not 
permit  a  certainty  of  passing  the  Inner  Anegada,  (which  lies  about  5  leagues  W. 
i  N.  from  the  Outer  Anegada,)  and  of  catching  the  harbour  with  day-light,  to 
tack  out  to  the  eastward.  You  will  thus  leave  the  shoals  astern,  having  been 
favoured  by  the  current. 

10.  If,  being  more  to  the  west,  you  cannot  on  that  tack  weather  the  Galieguilla, 
near  the  Anegada  de  adentro,  on  the  east  tack,  you  ought,  without  a  moments' 
hestitation,  to  keep  away  S.  AV.  or  S.  S.  W.  so  as  to  run  in  mid  channel  between 
Anegada  and  Blanqullla;  leaving  the  latter  on  the  starboard,  and  Anegada  with 
the  Isla  Verde  on  the  larl)oard,  side,  keeping  clear  of  ail  the  breakers ;  and,  steer- 
ing successively  to  §.  W.  by  W. — W.  S.  VV.  and  W.  you  will  run  along  the 
south-east  side  of  Gallega  Shoal,  leaving  it  to  starboard,  and  the  Levandera 
Shoal  on  the  larboard  ;  the  shoal  part  and  edges  of  which  the  breakers  will  plain- 
ly show  ;  hauling  up  more  or  lesa  to  anchor,  seaman-like,  where  you  see  others 
moored  with  two  anchors,  and  you  must  let  go  the  starboard  anchor  first. 

In  the  same  case,  being  more  to  the  west,  you  may  take  the  resolution  to  keep 
away  to  the  south,  to  pass  away  between  the  Galieguilla  and  the  Blanquilla  Is- 
land, and  successively  in  sight  of  the  Gallega,  by  which  you  will  run  in,  rounding 
it  to  the  very  anchorage.  In  good  weather,  with  a  middling-sized  vessel,  and  a 
knowledge  of  the  place,  you  can  run  in  by  these  diannels  more  commodiously 
than  by  the  N.  W.  channel,  and  will  not  have  the  trouble  of  warping,  if  the 
breeze  comes  to  the  S.  E. 

11.  Those  who  are  acquainted  with  the  inner  Shoals  will  not  often  incur  misfor- 
tunes ;  because,  at  the  Isla  Verde  and  Pajaro  Reef,  there  is  as  good  anchorage  ai 
at  the  /.v ' «  da  Sacrlficios  ;  as  there  likewise  is  in  the  shelter  afforded  by  the  Blanca 
Island,  oii  the  point  of  Anton  Lisardo,  and  that  formed  by  the  same  point  and 
some  of  the  Outer  Shoals  ;  the  channels  of  which,  during  a  fair  wind,  and  with  a 
knowledge  of  them,  are  clear  :  thus  you  may  run  in  by  them,  as  among  the  In- 
ner Shoals,  to  direct  yourself  to  the  harbour  by  the  S.  E.  channel,  if  your  vessel 
does  not  draw  more  than  twenty  feet ;  for  the  breeze  raises  some  sea ;  and  between 
the  Gallega  and  Lavandera  Shoals,  in  the  narrowest  part  of  the  southern  en- 
trance, there  is  not  more  than  twenty-three  feet  of  water. 

12.  If,  in  consequence  of  any  irregular  navigation  or  mistake,  you  should  have 
passed  through  any  of  the  channels  formed  by  the  Outer  Shoals,  among  them, 
or  between  them  and  the  Pointof  Anton  Lisardo,  with  a  vessel  of  larger  draught 
of  water  than  twenty  feet,  and  are  obliged  to  enter  by  the  N.  W.  channel,  you 
must  proceed  as  directed  in  the  6th  paragraph,  by  shaping  your  eourse  to  tlie  S. 
W.  or  N.  W. 

13.  Having  thus  described  the  entrance  into  the  harbour  by  the  S.  E.  entrance, 
and  the  incidents  which  may  oblige  you  to  enter  it,  we  shall  proceed  to  explain 
all  that  relates  to  the  N.  W.  or  principal  channel. 

14.  N.  W.  Channel. — All  the  just  fear  caused  by  this  harbour  may  be  avoided, 
by  not  coming-to  with  a  fresh  or  strong  north ;  or  by  securing  your  vessel  well,  or 
mooring  her  well,  before  you  wait  to  hand  your  sails.*     The  Inner  Shoals  do 


*  Promptitr.de  indoing  every  thing  in  coming  into  this  port,  with  any  vessel ,  is  of  the  great- 
est importance ;  as  this  harbour  may  be  -"onsidcrcd  as  one  of  the  most  dangerous  known.  If, 
in  entering,  you  have  time,  after  getting  ready  cables,  anchors,  &c.  to  get  out  your  boats,  do 
so ;  keeping  the  capstans  clear,  and  every  thing  ready  for  the  necessary  manoeuvres  in  coming 
to. 


r    I  jjjh  I  ' 


4^2 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


not  miieh  Rffect  rcssels  that  do  not  draw  more  than  sixteen  feet  of  water :  for 
the  only  dangers  which  are  in  the  channel,  to  those  of  greater  draught,  are  the 
Outer  and  Inner  Laxaa,  (i.  e.  flat  stones,  like  flags  or  pavement  stones.)  The 
extensive  shoals  of  the  Gallega  and  Galleguilla  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  en- 
trance, and  the  reef  of  Gorda  Point  on  the  west,  (which  lie  a  league  asunder,) 
form  the  mouth  called  thait  of  the  Outer  Channel,  while  Point  Soldado  upon  the 
Gallega,  on  the  east,  Jind  the  Reef  of  Caletaon  the  west,  form  the  mouth  of  the 
Inner  Channel :  the  two  latter  are  visible,  piirticulariy  when  there  is  any  wind  to 
raise  the  brealcers.  You  may  safely  pass  at  a  cable's  length  from  them  ;  and,  if 
there  is  no  sea  or  swell  on,  when  the  water  is  high,  and  hides  the  rocks  which 
terminate  or  bound  the  onter  edge  of  the  Galleg.i  ahd  Galleguilla  shoals,  with  a 
kind  of  visible  cordon  or  bolder,  a  moderate  degree  '  vigilance  will  enable  you 
to  know  thera  with  facility,  by  the  colour  of  the  watc/,  as  they  can  never  have 
over  them  more  than  three  feet  in  the  morning  in  the  summer,  and  in  the  after- 
noon during  winter,  wliich  is  the  order  most  generally  remarked  in  the  irregular 
rise  that  the  sea  takes  at  this  place.  At  night,  they  are  most  dangerous,  if  high 
water,  darkness,  and  little  wind,  so  that  the  sea  does  not  break,  all  concur. 

15.  If,  in  consequcfce  of  an  error  in  reckoning,  you  should  have  proc  eded  too 
far  to  the  west,  as  to  Antigua  Bay,  the  coast  itself,  or  low  land,  will  \l  icate  that 
you  should  run  along  it  to  the  S.  E.  or  E.  S.  E.  toward  the  harbour,  which  will 
show  itself  ahead ;  but  you  uiust  not  go  into  less  than  9  fathoms  abreast  of  the 
Points  brava  n:id  Gorda,  the  reefs  of  wliich  show  themselres  l)y  breaking  with 
:J1  winds ;  and  if,  on  this  passage,  it  happens  at  day-light,  or  in  the  morning,  that 
the  land-breeze  is  from  S.  to  S.  E.  you  must  continue  on  tli'  sUu-board  tack  all 
you  possibly  can,  so  that,  when  the  brcfv.e  enters,  j  ou  may  be  to  the  nortii  of  the 
harbour;  and  observe,  also,  to  lose  no  tiine,  by  following  something  to  the  east, 
to  the  end  that  you  may  take  the  harbour  when  the  wind  comes  more  to  the  N. 
E.  when  making  for  it  you  may  fetch  the  anchorage  on  one  tack,  thus  free- 
ing yourself  from  the  necessity  of  having  to  anchor  outside,  and  of  having  to 
warp  in. 

16.  Again,  if  day  breaks  when  you  are  to  the  N.  or  N.  N.  E.  of  the  city, and  in 
Bight  of  it,  with  the  wind  from  tiie  land,  you  must  not  pass  to  the  west  of  the  me- 
ridian of  the  port,  nor  of  ihe  fust  mark  for  entering  ;  for  if  the.  bvoeze  takes  to 
the  S.  E.  and  no  land-l;reeze  comes  on,  or  if  the  breeze  is  very  light,  it  may  cost 
days  to  ,juin  it;  for  with  such  winds  from  the  eastward,  the  waters  diaw  with 
force  to  the  N.  W.  It  will  be  well  if',  l>y  day,  you  keep  some  object  in  view,  by 
the  bearings  of  wliich  you  may  know  how  the  current  operates ;  and  at  night 
you  may  ascertain  your  place  either  by  tin;  deep-sea  or  hand  lead. 

17.  Being  to  the  ccstimrdof  the  port,  and  seeing  the  city  and  castle,  as  well  as  the 
Anegada  de  adentro,  Blanquilia  Isle,  fcc.  with  the  wind  from  the  east,  which,  as 
we  have  said,  (paragraph  7lh.)  may  be  scant  from  the  Soldado  Point  of  the  G»\- 
lega  to  within ;  you  must  direct  your  course  according  as  the  wind  may  be  more  or 
less  free,  so  as  to  pass  the  higli  tower  of  the  castle  to  the  south,  on  which  course 
Tou  will  leave  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  Gallega ;  and  seeing  it  as  well  as  distinguish- 
ing the  two  towers  of  St.  Francisco  and  the  cathedral  in  the  city,*  you  will  fol- 
low or  keep  away  until  you  bring  them  in  a  line  at  S.  ij  E.  or  very  nearly  so ;  but 
you  must  be  cautious  on  approaching  the  Gallega  and  Galleguilla  shoals.  This 
direction  of  the  towers  of  tlie  two  churcheb  is  the  first  mark  given  in  the  plan  of 
the  port ;  but  ifyoti  are  to  the  west  of  this  line  hauled  by  the  wind,  on  the  larbo-.rd 
tack,  it  w  ill  be  sufficient  to  get  on  it,  and  afterwards  follow  it ;  tlius  entering,  as 
already  directed. 

18.  Being  to  the  west  of  t,h<;se  shoals,  in  £5  or  30  fathoms  of  water,  with  the  two 
towers  in  one,  and  also  seeing  the  tower  of  the  cathedral  to  the  S.  E.  of  that  of 
St.  Francisco,  if  the  wind  shouhl  be  from  E.  N.  E.  or  E.  by  N.  (as  said  in  para- 

*  TbesG  towers  have  been  alrcad*  noticed,  see  pnge  4'18.  Don  Bernnrdo  says,  They  nre 
the  fiirtiiest  west ;  that  i,f  Sdh  t'rnncisco  is  a  complcce  lower;  the  other  js  not,  for  it  has 
neither  the  third  story  nor  spire,  and  it  terminates  in  n  square.  'Ihc  little  towpr  and  cupola 
of  the  Hermitage  of  rastoia,  Avhich  is  farther  to  the  west  than  these  two  towers,  cannot 
c&u:!e  any  mistake,  as  it  is  no  small,   ' 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


453 


:y,*  you  will  fol- 


graph  7,)  you  will  run  for  the  entrance  by  the  first  mark,  diminisliing  the  depth 
to  about  6  and  5  fathoms,  on  good  holding;  gn  and,  until  the  siilicnt  angle  of  the 
battery  of  St.  Crispin,  or  the  S.  E.  angle  of  the  castle,  opens  beyond  the  eipially 
salient  one  of  St.  Pedro,  which  is  on  the  N.  W.  (second  leading  mark  of  the  plan,) 
or,  what  comes  to  the  "ime,  opening  the  whole  of  Sacrifieios  Island  to  theB.  E. 
of  the  castle  ;  you  will  then  direct  the  ship's  head  to  Point  Horiios,  and  suecea- 
sively  as  you  run  in  to  Point  Mocambo,*  or  to  Sacrificios  Island;  on  which  di- 
rection, having  passed  between  the  Caleta  Keef  and  the  Soldado  Point,  and  lufiing 
up  or  keeping  away,  as  may  be  necessary  to  keep  in  the  channel,  you  will  go  into 
the  harbour  clear  of  the  Outer  Laxa,  which  is  the  most  dangerous,f  and  also  of 
the  Inner  one,t  running  close  to  their  buoys  or  marks,  if  priced,  until  the  angle  of 
St.  Pedro'^  Baulion  bears  nearly  E.  N.  E.  when  you  will  luh*  up  to  let  go  the  lar- 
board anchor,  which  ought  to  lie  out  to  the  N.  W.  and  you  ought  to  occupy  tlie 
first  place  ;  or,  if  you  pass  on  to  another,  you  must  run  in  and  let  go  your  anchor 
where  the  pilot  directs,  and  where  you  must  bring-to,  or  act  according  to  circum- 
stances.  You  ought  to  have  every  thing  ready  for  anchoring;  because,  when 
once  ofl'  the  breast-work  of  the  castle,  you  should  drop  the  anchor  instantaneous- 
ly ;  for,  if  you  do  not,  the  least  risque  is  that  you  will  have  to  weigh  the  anchor, 
and  carry  it  out  again,  which  you  cannot  alwi.ys  do,  as  you  may  wish. 

lU.  Prtventions. — When  the  anchor  is  gone  in  its  place,  and  the  wind  is  from 
E.  N.  E.  or  thereabout,  you  must  carry  out  to  the  S.  E.  a  warp  of  at  least  two 
stream-cables,  to  get  the  vessel  immediately  into  the  place  she  ought  to  occupy ; 
and,  passing  the  warp  aft,§  with  no  little  trouble,  as  both  wind  and  current  will 
be  against  you,  haul  on  it  to  make  the  turn,  (by  hauling  the  vessel  stern  round,) 
when  you  must  carry  out  the  stern-fast,  and  receive  on  the  starboard  side  the 
bend  of  a  cable,  which  is  kept  ready  ;  and,  if  you  do  not  get  this  assistance,  you 
must  send  a  stream-cable  (or  hawser)  to  be  made  fast  to  the  ring,  to  haul  close 
in,  and  which,  serving  for  a  guy,  the  launch  can  carry  ends  or  fasts  ashore  after 
the  vessel  is  hauled  close  in. 

20.  If,  on  account  of  the  scaninessof  the  wind,  'he  anchor  is  not  let  go  in  its  pro- 
per place,  the  warp  ought  to  be  longer ;  or  you  should  prepare  another,  by  hauling 
on  which  when  the  cable  weighs  the  anchor,  you  will  nsturn  to  anchor  where 
you  ought,  and  pursue  the  rest  of  the  necessary  duty  of  the  ship. 

21.  If  the  winds  be  from  N.  E.  to  N.  or  north  westerly,  it  is  adviseable,  if  possi- 
ble, to  have  on  board  the  hawser,  which  is  made  fast  to  the  ring,  or  to  the  end  or 
bight  of  the  cable  prepared  in  it,  to  haul  in  by,  before  you  do  any  thing  with  the 
cattle ;  in  this  case,  us  it  requires  that  the  current  should  be  running  in,  it  will  cost 
little  or  no  troul)la  to  make  the  turn,  and  you  may  even  carry  out  the  sternfast 
without  a  warp. 

2t.  It  is  necessary  to  be  especially  careful  with  the  N.  W.  anchor,  when  anchor- 
ing with  the  wind  from  E.  N.  E.  to  E.  S.  E.  because,  as  you  must  let  it  go  on  bear- 
ings opposite  to  the  vessel,  when  in  her  place,  the  least  error  that  may  happen  will 
be  th^t  of  letting  it  go  with  the  arms  towards  the  ship,  when  it  would  not  turn  itself 
until  the  vepsel  came  to  hang  by  it  in  some  north :  this,  however,  is  a  thing  which 
ought  instantly  to  be  attended  to  ;  and,  if  it  is  let  go  wrong,  it  will  cost  but  little 
trouble  to  '.veigh  it,  and  let  it  go  again  clear  and  right.     This  same  anchor  will  be 

*  They  are  the  two  which  are  seen  to  the  S.  E.  of  the  city. 

t  It  has  18  feet  on  it  at  low  water :  it  is  at  the  inner  part  of  Soldado  Point.  Its  first  mark 
is  the  flag-statf  of  the  castle  on  with  the  second  merlon,  or  waii  between  the  embrasures  or 
gun-ports,  near  the  angle  of  the  visible  shoulder  of  the  bastion  of  St.  Pedro  ;  and  the  thwart 
mark  is  the  first  two  poles,  which  are  seen  on  the  larboard  hand,  upon  the  Gallega  shoal,  in 
one. 

X  This  has  24  feet  of  water  upon  it :  it  is  almost  in  the  channel,  near  the  salient  nn|;1e  of 
San  Pedro's  Bastion.     Its  mark  is,  the  said  angle  of  the  shoulder  on  with  a  smitll  turret, 
which  is  upon  the  parapet,  and  fifth  merlon  of  the  contiguous  curtain  that  looks  to  the  N.  W. 
end  the  secoinl  or  thwart  mark  is,  the  two  second  poles,  which  stand  also  on  the  same  shoal,'- 
in  one. 

§  This  is  to  be  understood  of  hdving  to  baul  into  a  place,  with  a  cable  to  the  ring,  or  an 
anchor  on  the  shoal,  and  moored  with  3  fathoms ;  but,  if  you  have  to  anchor  upon  the  turn, 
you  may  lay  it  out  to  the  east  as  far  as  suits  you,  after  having  let  go  the  N.  vV<  on*  in  ita 
plaos,  or  tho  contrary  way. 


'#"■   -la-  ,^, 


454 


blunt's 


.^MERICAK    COAST   PILOT. 


Iwtter  let  go  with  the  bill  dov/nwards  than  the  stock,*  for  you  cannot  do  nny  thing 
without  the  cable  to  the  north-eastward,  which  may  be  replaced  from  the  castle, 
or  the  vessel ;  but  the  N.  W.  cannot  be  replaced  from  either,  and,  if  it  fails,  a  tra- 
gical catastrophe  may  ensue. 

23.  After  what  has  been  said  in  regard  to  the  winds,  it  is  obvious,  if  you  are 
hound  to  this  harbour,  that  you  ought  to  have  four  anchors  ready,  with  your  best 
cables  bent  to  them,  and  ought  never  to  think,  when  in  it,  that  you  are  not  in  the 
season  of  the  norths ;  for,  as  has  been  said,  they  sometimes  come  on  so  quick, 
and  blow  with  such  fury,  out  of  their  proper  season,  that  they  do  not  give  ves- 
sels, at  sea,  time  to  furl  their  sails ;  and,  in  harbour,  they  render  it  in  a  moment 
impossible  to  get  on  board,  and  much  more  to  get  any  assistance,  unless  it  is  given 
from  the  v^alls  of  the  castle,  between  the  two  bastions,  which  you  cannot 
always  reckon  on  being  done  with  the  requisite  promptitude  ;  or  it  may  be  im- 
possible, on  axount  of  the  vessel's  distance  from  the  wall,  or  of  other  ships  in- 
tervening ;  anu,  if  the  N.  W.  cable  should  fail,  there  is  no  remedy. 

24.  From  these  seasons,  every  mariner,  who  is  acquainted  with  the  want  of 
shelter  in  this  place,  and  how  confined  or  narrow  it  is,  can  infer  how  very  dan- 
gerous it  must  be  for  any  line-of-battle  ship,  or  other  large  vessel,  which,  in  the 
season  of  the  norths,  anchors  at  night-fall  within  sight  of  the  city.f  or  afterwards 
in  sight  of  the  light  in  the  light-house,  and  also  in  the  moutli  of  the  interior  chan- 
nel, that  is,  as  far  advanced  as  Point  Soldado ;  as  it  happens  that,  when  the  breezes 
take  to  the  S.  E.  that  they  cannot  run  in  to  secure  themselves  (as  expressed  in 
the  paragraphs  from  19  to  21,)  and  thus,  whenever  they  have  to  anchor  here,  they 
ought  directly  to  prepare  the  warp,  and  the  moment  the  breeze  will  permit,  tw 
com'mence  warping,  without  waiting  or  hoping  for  any  thing ;  for,  whether  there 
have  been  appearances  of  a  north  or  not,  it  may  come  on ;  as,  when  you  least 
expect  it,  it  comes  suddenly,  and  never  more  fiercely  than  in  the  serenest  night 
and  clearest  sky. 

25.  If  you  anchor  on  a  sight  of  Vera  Cruz,  or  of  the  light-house,  or  outside 
of  these  situations,  on  account  of  a  calm,  oa  the  coast  of  C^acalacas,  Juan  An- 
gel, Stc,  in  from  50  to  20  fathoms,  on  good  holding  ground,  you  ought  to  reef, 
and  merely  stop  the  topsails ;  and  ought  to  be  most  attentive  to  heave  up  at  the  least 
breath  of  wind,  or  cloud  coming  from  the  north,  which  ought  to  warn  you ;  or 
to  cut,  if  it  comes  suddenly,  that  you  may  manoeuvre  or  work  ship  as  you  ought, 
in  consequence  of  its  force,  according  to  the  place  in  which  you  are,  the  size  of 
the  vessel,  and  other  circumstances,  be  it  either  to  haul  to  the  east,  with  all  pos- 
sible sail,  which  is  the  most  adviseable,  in  order  to  repass  the  Anegada  de  fuera, 
or  Outer  Anegadilla,  from  Avhich  arises  the  greatest  risque ;  or,  to  keep  upon 
boards  until  day-light,  and  then  to  run  for  the  harbour ;  or,  to  run  for  the  har- 
bour under  sail  proportioned  to  the  distance  and  hour:  but  these  last  two  deter- 
minations ought  only  to  be  taken,  in  case  you  should  be  so  entangled  that  you 
cannot  repass  the  Anegadu  de  ardcnto  ;  and  the  second,  in  case  of  being  in  want 
of  provisions,  or  having  sustained  damage,  &lc.  k,c.  You  ought  always  to  keep 
in  mind  the  risque  there  is,  particularly  with  a  large  vessel,  in  coming  into  the 
Larbour  with  much  wind ;  for  if  it  blows  harder  in  it,  than  outside ;  and  it  is  to  be 
considered  that  casualities  may  disconcert  the  best  takeki  measures  for  anchoring 
in  8U?h  critical  circumstances,  as  much  wind,  sea,  current,  narrowness  of 
anchorage,  the  quantity  of  anchors  scattered  over  it,  the  vessels  in  it,  and  the 
want  of  assistance.  On  these  occasions,  too,  you  may  be  prevented  from  work- 
ing freely,  by  finding  vessels  whose  anchors  and  cables  do  not  hold  them,  or 
getting  athwOTt  others,  so  as  to  drive  upon  the  reefs  at  Homos  Point,  or  on  the 
Lavendera  Shoal,  and  lose  some  of  the  lives. 

26.  Those  who  do  not  apparently  expose  themselves  to  he,  thus  entangled, 
yet  sometimes  are  so ;  as  liappens  to  those  who,  sighting  Vera  Crun  at  the  dawn 
of  day,  follow  towards  the  harbour,  persuaded  that  the  breeze  will  blow,  which 
13  not  always  the  case  ;  for  though  it  blows  something  regularly,  it  rounds  to  the 

*  The  commodore's,  or  or  whoever  occirpies  the  first  rings  or  place,  ought  certainlj  to  be 
so,  for  tlve  stock  might  catch  the  edge  of  the  inner  Laxa. 

t  To  be  on  clear  bottom,  you  must  take  care  that  it  bears  nothing  to  the  west  of  south ; 
for,  more  to  tho  •astirard,  there  are  spots  of  goad  and  bad  gtound. 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


455 


land  from  west  to  Boutb,  i%'hen  it  announces  good  weather ;  and,  if  bad,  from 
north  to  west :  it  may  also  become  calm  ;  and,  therefore,  as,  both  in  tht:  first  and 
last  of  these  cases,  it  is  impossible  to  enter  the  port,  tliey  consequently  remain 
outside  and  exposed. 

27.  Knowing  this,  and  that,  even  if  the  land-breeze  comes,  there  is  no  cer- 
tainty of  its  continuing,  so  as  to  enable  you  to  repass  the  Gullega  and  Galleguilla, 
and  to  clear  the  mouth  of  the  harbour;  it  is  necessary  that,  at  the  setting  of  the 
sun,  when  the  monceuvres  made  can  be  s  en  from  the  lookout,  or  before  that 
time  according  to  the  season,  appearance  ff  the  weather,  distance  from  Vera 
Cruz,  or  from  its  shoals,  and  the  number  ol  vessels  which  may  be  in  it,  the  suc- 
cessive navigation  should  be  resolved  on;  ant,  In  case  there  is  the  least  doubt  of 
catching  the  port  before  dark,  if  in  the  time  of  the  norths,  it  will  be  best  to  haul 
out  on  the  starboard  tack,  until  you  consider  yourself  seven  or  eight  leagues  to 
the  N.  N.  W.  or  N.  E.  of  it :  here  you  will  be  in  a  proper  situation  for  re- 
ceiving a  north,  if  it  comes  on  by  night;  and,  if  not,  to  work  early  in  the  morn- 
ing, so  as  to  see  the  castle,  city,  inc.  but  if  you  have  not  a  large  vessel,  and  if  it 
be  not  in  the  season  of  the  Norths,  this  precaution  admits  of  .some  modification. 

28.  From  the  preceding  remarks,  it  may  be  inferred  how  far  from  proper  it  is 
to  enter  this  harbour  by  night,  especially  with  ships  of  the  line,  or  others  approach- 
ing to  their  draught  of  water.  Some  have  entered,  and  others  may  enter,  suc- 
cessfully; but  if  any  one,  on  any  circumstance  apparently  favourable,  attempt» 
this  entry,  he  may  find  the  occurrence  but  momentary,  and  disagreeable  conse- 
quences may  ensue. 

29  Notw'ithstanding  what  has  been  said  relative  to  the  winds,  if,  in  the  good 
season,  there  can  be  any  confidence  in  them,  it  may  be  expected  in  the  months 
of  May,  June,  July,  and  even  in  August ;  in  which,  if  you  wish  to  make  for  the 
harbour,  at  most,  with  a  large  vessel,  when  towards  the  vicinity  of  the  inner 
channel,  the  following  instructions  must  be  observed  :  If  the  wind  i»  favourable, 
and  if  not,  according  to  the  greater  or  less  distance  you  may  be  from  the  harbour 
when  a  contrary  wind  or  calm  ensues,  you  will  anchor  or  not,  reckoning  that  eve- 
ry possible  assistance  will  be  given  you  ;  and  that  you  will  have  a  pilot  off  so 
soon  as  in  his  power,  upon  your  firing  two  guns  precipitately,  as  an  indication 
•  both  for  your  intention  to  enter,  and  of  your  being  in  want  of  a  pilot :  the  castle 
will  answer  you  with  two  guns  fired  ueliberately,  both  to  indicate  it-  you  that  you 
are  understood,  and  that  you  shall  have  the  desired  help.  At  the  second  shot 
you  may  fix  the  bearings,  if  you  had  not  gut  them  before. 

30.  Night  then  coming  on,  when  you  are  in  sight  of  Vera  Ciuz,  and  of  its 
lights,  and  to  the  eastward  of  the  harbour,  and  at  one',  two,  or  three,  miles  to  the 
northward  of  Anegada  de  adentro,  or  of  Blanquilla  Island,  or  of  the  Galleguilla, 
you  must  steer  so  as  to  run  for,  and  to  open,  the  mouth  of  the  harbour  about 
W.  N.  W.  until  the  light  bears  S.  by  W.  i  W.  from  thence  steer  west  until  it 
bears  S.  |  E.  and  afterwards  S.  W.  until  it  bears  S.  by  E.  I  E.  wh«  n  you  will 
steer  S.  |  E.  being  now  included,  or  nearly  so,  in  the  first  leading-mark  of  the 
plan,  and  in  the  Outer  Channel,  diminishing  the  depths  to  nearly  5  fathoms ;  and, 
when  the  light  remains  at  S.  E.  by  E.  you  will  be  in  the  place  where  it  is  usual 
to  take  a  pilot.  If  you  have  to  conduct  a  vessel  of  war,  or  one  of  great  draught 
of  water,  and  determine  not  to  enter,  you  will  anchor  to  wait  for  day-light.  If 
■your  vessel  is  of  middling  size,  and  you  have  no  pilot  to  direct  your  entering,  but 
wish  to  go  in,  you  must  steer  S.  E.  i  S.  r>r  the  purpose  of  passing  the  Outer 
Laxa,  until  the  light  bears  E.  i  S.  when  you  will  run  in  E.  S.  E.  |  E.  going  clear 
of  the  N.  W.  buoys,  to  work  afterwards,  as  is  directed  in  from  paragraphs  18  to 
21,  or  seaman-like,  according  to  circumstances. 

31.  If  night  comes  on  when  you  are  to  the  N.  N.  W.  of  the  light,  you  must 
steer  so  as  to  get  it  S.  by  E.  |  K.  and  from  thence  you  must  steer  S.  I  E.  being 
included  in  the  first  leading-mark  of  the  plan,  and  successively,  as  has  just  been 
stated  in  the  nreceding  paragraph. 

Finally.  Ifcaughi  hy  night  to  the  N.  W.  by  N.  of  the  light,  which  will  be  near 
to  the  shore,  jrou  must  steer  to  the  East,  to  keep  clear  of  Points  Brava  and  Gor- 
da ;  and,  having  passed  the  last,  place  the  ship's  head  to  the  S.  E.  or  towards  the 
light  itself,  until  you  find  from  6  to  5  fathoms,  when  you  must  steer  S.  S.  E.  |  E. 


>«»v»(«Hf, 


'-^••-.-H.:ai*r- 


45S 


UI.UN'l'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.' 


until  the  light  bears  E.  ^  S.  when  you  miiy  stKcr  E.  S.  E.  |  E.  for  the  interior  of 
the  harboifr;  hut,  if  you  have  to  conduct  ;i  vessel  drawin;;  less  than  16  feet  of 
water,  having  once  pissnd  Point  Gorda,  you  mny  continue  the  course  of  S.  E.^S. 
without  dan;rer  from  Point  Soldado,  or  from  the  Oiiter  Laxa,  over  which,  in 
such  a  case,  you  may  pass. 

Directions  for  the  S.  E.  Channel,  hy  Don  Fabian  AH  Ponzoni,  who  surveyed 
the  harbour  ii  1807.  The  S.  E.  Channel  is  that  between  the  Gallcga,  on  which 
the  castle  is  erected,  upun  the  north,  and  the  shoal  called  the  Lavaiidera,  on  the 
south.  The  latter  ii  mure  dangerous  than  the  other  shoals,  which  are  generally 
steep-to  ;  and  particular  caution  is  required  in  regard  to  it,  as  it  is  covered  by  the 
water,  and  not  di:»tiugiii.<ihiible  to  the  eye,  unless  there  is  so  much  sea,  that  the 
water  breaks  on  it,  wiiich  is  particularly  the  case  with  north  winds.  On  enter- 
ing by  the  S.  E.  Channi-I,  it  is  necessary  to  pass  near  this  shoal ;  and,  therefore, 
observe  that,  you  may  keep  clear  of  it,  by  keeping  Punta  Gorda  alwjiys  a  little 
open  past  the  most  salient  angle  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  low  fortification  of  the  Cas- 
tle of  San  Juan  de  Ulua,  until  you  bring  an  insulated  stone  edifice,  which  serves 
as  a  slaughter-house,  on  with  a  salient  angle  of  the  city,  upon  the  wall  and  only 
point  of  which  is  built  an  edifice,  of  considerable  extent,  for  barracks  for  the 
troops.  When  arrived  at  this  position,  you  will  be  sufficiently  past  the  Lavande- 
ra  to  incline  your  course  towards  the  vessels  in  the  anchorage,  but  without  get- 
ting too  near  the  shallow  water  at  the  south  end  of  the  bank,  which,  at  this 
place,  terminates  the  Gallega  Reef. 

The  only  channel  which,  although  deep,  is  to  be  shunned,  on  account  of  its 
narrow  breadth,  unless  by  those  who  have  a  practical  knowledge  of  it,  is  that 
foi  med  between  the  Pajaros  and  Sacraficios  Reefs.  The  leading  mark  through 
it  is  that  already  given  for  the  S.  E.  Channel;  that  is  Punta  Gorda  kept  open 
past  the  north-easternmost  part  of  the  Castle  of  St.  Juan  de  Ulua.  Tiie  shoal- 
er  part  of  the  channel  admits  the  passage  of  vessels  no  larger  than  with  two 
masts,  and  directed  by  a  pilot. 

Considering  that  the  Port  of  Vera  Cruz  is  far  to  leeward,  we  shall  here  add 
the  mode  of  navigating /rom  it,  and  coming  out,  both  by  the  Qhannel  of  Yuca- 
tan towards  the  Caribbean  Sea,  and  by  the  Strait  of  Florida  towards  the  ocean. 

In  order  to  this,  remember  first,  that  the  winds  in  the  Mexican  Sea  are,  gene- 
rally, from  the  eastward  ;  that,  from  October,  the  easterly  winds  are  interrupt- 
ed by  the  hard  Norths,  which  often  blow ;  that,  after  the  Norths  cease,  which  is 
from  March,  you  may  count  upon  the  regular  changes  of  land  and  sea-breezes, 
along  the  whole  of  the  coasts,  and  especially  on  those  of  Yucatan  and  Campe- 
che;  and,  finaUy,  that,  on  the  north  coast  of  the  Gidf,  in  the  months  of  August 
and  Septemlier,  there  are  frequently  furious  hurricanes,  which  descend  as  far  as 
latitude  26^,  or  even  sometimes  to  25°. 

On  departing  from  Vera  Cruz,  in  the  season  of  the  Norths,  you  should  first 
steer  north  orN.  N.  E.  but  taking  care  never  to  keep  vi;ry  close-hauled:  this  is 
enjoined,  that  you  may,  so  soon  as  possible,  gain  the  parallel  of  25'^,  on  which 
you  may  keep  as  close  to  the  wind  as  you  can,  for  the  purpose  of  gaining  longi- 
tude ;  for,  in  such  a  case,  you  not  only  avoid  all  danger  of  getting  entangled 
with  the  Tabasco  coast,  in  the  south,  in  case  of  a  north  coming  on,  but  you  mtiy 
also  run  to  the  east,  without  danger  from  the  Negrillo,  or  other  shoals,  on  the 
Bank  of  Campeche.  This  plan  is  the  most  judicious,  because  the  first  thing  is 
to  get  well  clear  of  the  Bight  of  Vera  Cruz,  wherein,  if  C4ught  by  a  north,  you 
must  carry  sail  to  it,  in  order  to  avoid  being  driven  on  the  coast  to  the  south,  in 
which  you  might,  very  probably,  get  shipwrecked  by  a  continuance  of  the  wind; 
and,  besides,  it  is  of  importance  to  be  in  such  a  situation,  wiien  a  north  sets  in,  as 
allows  you  to  take  advantage  of  it,  for  running  to  the  east,  and  thus  to  shorten 
your  passage. 

In  the  months  when  the  norths  are  weaker,  you  may  calculate  that  one  of 
them  will  facilitate  your  passage  to  the  Tonugas  soundings,  and  will  have  only 
to  gain  all  you  can  to  the  east,  after  you  have  gain«d  the  parallel  of  25*^,  by  beat- 
ing up  in  that  latitude ;  for,  in  this  season,  (part  of  March,  until  the  end  of  April) 
it  will  be  little  adviseable  to  run  up  into  the  vicinity  of  the  north  coast,  upoo 
which  the  E.  S.  E.  and  s^uth  winds  blow  «fitu  much  force,  before  a  north  comM 


-^trS^lt 


BLL'Nt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


457 


on.  With  tlic  north  you  must  haul  up  for  the  Tortugas  Bonk,  which  you  Khould 
not  leave,  iii  order  to  maku  the  sliore  of  Cuba,  either  with  light  winds  or  norths; 
in  the  first  case,  because  tlie  current  may  carry  the  vessel  up  the  Strait  of  Flori" 
da,  or  even  through  it;  and,  in  the  second,  because  the  Cuba  shore  is  (|-enera]ly 
much  obscured  by  such  winds,  which  are,  in  general,  not  very  manageahi),  and 
you  may,  thd^cfore,  get  so  entangled  on  the  coast,  as  ultimately  may  cairje  you 
to  be  wrecked.  If  not  bound  to  Havana,  but  directly  through  the  Strait  of  Flo- 
rida, with  a  liglit  wind,  you  may  leave  the  soimdings,  and  proceed  according  to 
circumstances,  or  rather  as  hereafter  directed.* 

The  course  fi>r  runnin;;  across  to  the  coast  of  Cuba  must  be  such  as  to  com- 
pensate the  eifuct  of  the  current :  in  general,  to  make  Havanna,  it  is  sufficient  to 
steer  S.  by  E.  H  E.  if  the  vessel  does  not  run  more  than  three  miles  an  hour,  and 
S.  S.  E.  if  she  run  six  mUes  an  hour:  this  is  counting  upon  two  miles,  hourly,  of 
current,  which  is  what  we  may  generally  expect  in  this  place.  If  the  vessel  runs 
more  th:in  three  miles,  but  less  than  six,  you  can  shape  a  course  between  the  two 
above  stated ;  or,  if  she  goes  more  than  ^ix  miles,  you  may  luff  to  S.  E.  by  S. 

If  you  sail  from  Vera  Cruz  between  the  end  of  March,  and  the  middle  or  end 
of  June,  you  need  not  then  keep  close-hauled  to  the  breeze,  nor  exert  yourself 
to  gain  to  the  eastward,  when  you  have  reached  the  parallel  of  25° :  for,  with 
this  route,  you  would  be  crossing  the  middle  of  the  Gulf,  where  you  would  then 
find  fixL'd  winds  from  the  eastward  only,  and  many  calms,  which  lengthen  the  na- 
vigation much;  what  at  this  season  ought  to  be  done,  is,  to  steer  always  to  the 
north  or  N.  N.  E.' keeping  the  breeze  well  ^rse,  until  you  get  into  the  vicinity  of 
the  northern  coast,  when  you  may  advance  to  the  eastward,  about  the  parallel  of 
i^o  or  S9°,  with  the  assistance  of  the  variations  of  the  sea  and  land-breezes,  un- 
til you  get  on  the  Tortugas  soundings,  when  you  may  run  to  the  south,  in  order 
to  run  oiT  the  bank  to  the  west  of  the  Tortugas.  At  this  season,  also,  you  raay 
run  for  the  Campeche  Bank,  in  order  to  get  to  windward  of  it  by  the  aid  of  tho 
changes  of  the  sea-breeze  and  land-breczC;  until  you  gain  the  eastern  edge  of  it, 
when  you  may  steer  for  the  coast  of  Cuba,  taking  care  to  quit  the  edge  of  the 
bank  as  far  to  the  south  as  you  can,  with  ti>e  vessel's  head  to  the  S.  E.  in  pre- 
ference to  the  N.  E.  unless  the  latter  should  be  very  advantageous;  for  you  will 
thus  shun  the  current,  which,  on  the  N.  E.  portion  of  this  bank,  sets  with  con- 
siderable force  towards  the  N.  W.  then  advancing  to  the  east,  and  next  taking  the 
other  tack,  follow  the  latter  to  get  into  the  general  current,  which  runs  to  the 
eastward,  between  Cuba  and  Florida. 

Finally,  between  the  middle  or  end  of  June  and  the  month  of  October,  you 
ought  to  shun  the  middle  of  the  Gulf,  because  you  would  there  be  exposed  to 
calms  and  contrary  winds ;  and,  at  the  same  time,  avoid  the  northern  coast,  on 
account  of  '^lie  hurricanes ;  and  you  ouifht  then,  therefore,  to  take  the  route  by 
the  Campeche  Bank. 

To  go  from  Vera  Cruz  to  Campeche,  if  it  be  in  the  time  of  the  Norths,  you 
must  endeavour  to  gain  the  parallel  of  21°,  and  beat  to  windward  by  it,  to  get 
on  the  bank,  either  to  the  northward  or  southward  of  the  Areas,  as  we  have  al^ 
ready  shown  in  page  372 ;  and  if  a  North  comes  on  while  you  are  in  this  part, 
by  steering  the  same  it  will  enable  you  to  make  your  passage  in  less  time ;  but* 
in  the  summer-season,  having  once  cleared  the  Outer  Shoals  of  Vera  Cruz,  you 
may  keep  along  the  coast  of  Tiibasco,  availing  yourself  of  the  changes  of  tho 
sea-breeze  and  land-breeze  to  get  to  windward. 

We  shall  conclude  by  saying  that,  when  bound  to  Vera  Cruz,  in  the  time  of 
the  Norths,  in  case  that  wind  should  take  you  on  the  Campeche  Bank,  you 


*  Six  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  Dry  Tortugas  lies  the  centre  of  the  Tortugas  Bank,  al< 
ready  noticed  in  page  141.  Although,  from  the  clearness  of  the  water  on  this  bank,  itappaara 
dangerous,  it  is  not  so  in  reality.  The  extent  of  the  bank  is  nine  miles  from  north  to  south, 
and  six  from  east  to  west.  If,  when  bound  to  the  eastward,  from  any  port  in  the  Mexican 
Sea,  and  you  meet  with  a  fierce  storm  about  this  part,  which  is  very  common  in  the  summer 
season,  you  may  safely  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  to  tha  north  of  the  Southwest  Key,  at  the 
distance  of  one-quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  west  side  of  the  long  sandy  key  called  Turtle 
K«y. 


58 


468 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


should  BO  arrange,  that,  calculating  on  the  time  the  North  may  probably  last, 
which  you  may  do  by  its  greater  or  less  violence,  you  may  make  the  coast  when 
the  north  has  ceased;  availing  yourself  of  the  favourable  conjuncture  for  taking 
the  harbour  when  the  breeze  is  established. 


Vera  Cruz,  io  the  Bay  of  St.  Barnardo. 

prom  the  harbour  of  Vera  Cruz  the  coast  tends  nearly  N.  W.  by  W.  eleven 
miles,  to  the  River  Antigua ;  thence  forming  something  of  a  bend,  it  extends  to 
the  N.  N.  W.  to  the  point  and  river  of  Chacalacas,  and  forms  also  a  bay  named 
that  of  Antigui ;  from  Chacalacas,  it  follows  the  same  direction  of  N.  N.  W. 
six  miles,  to  Zempoala  Point,  forming  also  a  bight  to  the  west  between  th«  two 
points.  F'i'om  Zempoala  the  coast  sweeps  to  the  N.  W.  forming  a  regular- bay, 
with  Point  Bernal,  which  lies  N.  N.  W.  ten  miles  from  Zempoala  Point. 

To  the  S.  E.  of  Bernal  Point,  and  at  the  distance  of  about  a  mile,  there  is  an 
islet,  named  Bernal-chico,  which  as  well  as  the  shore  of  the  ba}s  is  very  clean; 
and  you  may  pass  between  it  and  the  point,  without  fear,  in  5  or  6  fathoms  of 
water.  On  the  south  of  it  there  is  shelter  from  northerly  and  westerly  winds ; 
but  none  from  winds  to  the  eastward  of  north.  To  anchor  in  this  bay  there  is 
no  need  for  any  other  guide  but  the  lead,  and,  at  half  a  mile  from  the  beach,  there 
is  5  fathoms  of  water. 

Off  the  coast  between  Zempoala  and  Bernal,  there  is  a  shoal,  which  breaks : 
this  shoal  bears  nearly  north  from  Point  Zempoala,  at  the  distance  of  four  miles, 
and  at  the  same  distance  athwart  from  the  coast :  it  is  necessary  to  beware  of  it, 
especially  at  night.  With  a  large  vessel  you  should  always  pass  outside  of  it ; 
for  between  it  and  the  coast  there  is  a  spit,  which  runs  off  from  the  shore,  with 
only  4  fathoms  depth  upon  it. 

From  Bernal  Point  the  coast  tends  north  (true)  four  miles,  to  Mariandrea 
Point ;  from  thence  N.  N.  W.  by  compass,  ten  miles  to  Point  Delgada,  from 
which  it  follows  N.  58*^  W.  twenty-five  leagues,  to  the  River  Tuspan  ;  from  the 
River  Tuspan,  it  continues  nearly  N.  N.  W.  eighteen  miles  to  the  Bar  of  Tangujo; 
from  thence  northerly,  bending  to  Cape  Roxo,  nine  leagues;  and  from  that  U> 
the  River  Tampico,  nearly  N.  W.  seventeen  leagues.  The  coast  comprehended 
between  Tangujo  and  Tampico,  and  which  is  that  which  forms  Cape  Roxo,  is 
no  more  than  a  narrow  tongue  of  land,  which  separates  the  Lagoon  or  Lake  of 
Tamiagua  from  the  sea. 

Between  Cape  Roxo  and  the  River  Tuspan  there  are  various  shoals  and  islets, 
which  lie  out  at  a  distance  from  the  coast,  and  form  excellent  roadsteads,  in 
which  vessels  may  be  sheltered  during  the  norths.  The  first  to  the  southward  is 
the  shoal  of  Tuspan,  which  is  about  ten  miles  to  the  E.  N.  E.  of  the  niver  of  the 
same  name;  upon  this  shoal  is  a  group  of  islets,  and  on  the  S.  W.  part  of  it  is 
good  anchorage  in  8  or  10  fathoms  of  water,  on  coarse  sand,  which  is  found  at 
two  cables'  length  from  its  edge.  About  N.  W.  (true)  from  this  shoal,  and  at 
the  distance  of  five  miles,  lies  the  shoal  named  Bajo  del  Medio,  or  Middle  Shoal, 
which  is  seven  miles  distant  from  the  coast.  This  shoal  is  much  smaller  than 
the  former;  but  it  also  affords  anchorage  on  the  S.  W.  part  in  6,  8,  or  10,  fathoms 
on  sand.  To  the  N'.  W.  of  this  shoal,  and  at  the  distance  of  two  and  a  quarter 
miles,  is  that  named  Tangujo  Shoal,  at  the  S.  W.  part  of  which  there  is  also  a 
better  anchorage  than  at  the  other  two.  The  channels  formed  by  these  shoals 
are  clear  and  deep,  and  between  them  and  the  coast  there  is  no  object  of  danger 
which  is  not  visible. 

Off  Cape  Roxo  arc  the  islets  and  reefs  of  Blanquilla  and  Lobos ;  the  first, 
which  is  a  reef,  with  a  cluster  of  islets  on  it,  lies  to  the  east  of  the  Cape,  and 
about  five  miles  from  it ;  to  the  S.  E.  of  it,  and  at  the  distance  of  six  miles,  is 
the  islet  Lobos,  from  the  north  part  of  which  a  great  rocky  shoal  stretches  out, 
which  leaves  only  a  strait  of  three  miles  between  it  and  Blanquilla  ;  there  is  also 
a  shoal  in  the  middle  of  this  strait,  so  that  much  caution  is  required  in  passing 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT* 


459 


through  it.  To  the  S.  W.  of  these  islets  there  is  excellent  anchorage,  sheltered 
from  the  norths;  and,  to  take  it,  there  is  no  necessity  for  particular  instructions. 

All  the  coast,  i^enerally,  from  Vera  Cruz  to  Tatnplco,  is  clear  and  deep,  and 
Tvithout  any  oth^r  danpers  than  the  spits,  (restingaa,)  which  stretch  out  from 
Juan  Angel,  in  the  Bay  of  Bernal,  and  at  Point  Gorda  ;  and,  along  the  jvnule  of 
it,  the  soundings  extend  from  shore  from  eight  to  ten  leagues,  and  the  water  so 
shoalens,  that,  at  two  miles  from  the  shore,  you  will  find  from  5  to  7  fathoms. 
The  land  is  not  very  high,  and  almost  all  terminates  in  a  sandy  beach ;  it  is  cover- 
ed with  brambles  and  small  trees,  which  are  very  thick  upon  it,  and  look  green 
at  a  considerable  distance.  There  are  no  particular  marks  to  distinguish  the 
land  by ;  and  observations  for  the  latitude  are,  therefore,  especially  required 
here. 

The  River  Tampico  is  considerable,  and  has  commonly  a  depth  for  any  vessel 
which  draws  less  than  2  fathoms.  Its  bar  stretches  nearly  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  and 
the  depth  over  it  is  more  or  less,  according  to  the  floods  of  the  river.  Two  miles 
from  the  bar,  (up  the  river,)  there  is  a  little  channel  in  the  south  side  of  it,  which 
leads  to  a  lagoon  or  lake,  named  Zapote ;  at  a  league  from  the  entrance  of  it, 
there  is  a  village  called  Old  Tampico;  and,  at  two  leagues  from  it  lies  that  of 
Tampico,  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  channel  of  Zapote :  there  is  another  channel,  at 
the  distance  of  a  league,  by  which  you  can  go  to  the  village  of  Altamira,  and 
ten  leagues  up  the  river  Tampico  lies  the  village  of  Panuco.  At  all  these  towns, 
abundance  of  provisions  may  be  found. 


Sailing  Directions  for  Tampico  River. 

As  it  is  sometimes  difficult  for  strangers  bound  for  Tampico  to  hit  exactly  upoa 
the  entrance  of  the  river,  the  land  in  its  neighbourhood  being  low  and  uniform 
in  its  appearance,  it  would  be  well  always  to  approach  as  nearly  in  the  latitude 
of  the  river  as  possible. — The  soundings  gradually  shoalen  as"  you  near  the  land, 
no  danger  is  therefore  to  be  apprehended  from  running  even  in  the  night. 

Navigators  in  approaching  Tampico  River  will  observe  as  a  mark  a  few  houses 
situated  on  the  pomt  forming  the  southern  entrance  of  the  river.  From  this 
hamlet,  pilots  can  at  all  times  be  procured  when  the  weather  will  permit. 

A  dangerous  bar  obstructs  the  entrance  of  tliis  river,  forming  a  narrow  chan- 
nel upon  the  left,  or  southern  shore.  In  this  channel  the  depth  of  water  varies 
from  7  to  11  feet. 

The  anchorage  outside  the  bar  is  entirely  exposed,  and  on  the  commencement 
of  a  Norther,  vessels  should  invariably  put  to  sea :  they  ought,  therefore,  always 
to  ride  at  single  anchor,  with  their  sails  reefed,  and  slip-buoys  on  their  cable. 

The  best  and  safest  anchorage  in  winter  (during  which  season  the  Northers 
prevail)  is  to  bring  the  houses  on  the  south  point  to  bear  S.  W.  and  anchor  in  8 
or  9  fathoms  water.  In  summer  you  may  anchor  K.  N.  E.  from  the  south  point, 
in  7  fathoms.  The  first  mentioned  birth  is  about  three  miles  from  the  point, 
the  latter  two  miles.  The  object  of  anchoring  well  to  the  northward  is  to  allow 
sufficient  room  to  slip  and  make  sail. 

From  the  Bar  of  Tampico  the  coast  tends  to  the  N.  N.  W.  towards  Ciego  Bar, 
which  is  six  leagues  from  it.  The  coast  is  clear,  and  with  good  depth  for  twelve 
miles,  when  you  begin  to  find  pointed  rocks  in  the  bottom,  but  which  do  not  run 
out  above  two  miles  from  the  shore.  From  Tampico  Bar  to  the  north  you  will 
find  no  more  high  land  on  the  shores  than  the  rising  grounds,  (medanos)  which 
extend  to  Point  Jlicacos,  and  a  doyih\e  hill  inland,  which  is  named  Matanma; 
from  which,  in  the  interior,  the  mountain  range  extends  to  the  N.  W. 

Cingo  (».  c.  Blind)  Bar  has  only  3  feet  of  water  on  it ;  and  within  it  there  is  a 
shallow  lagoon,  which  communicates  with  that  of  Altamira.  True  west  from 
Ciego  Bar  is  the  hill  of  Metate,  which  is  inhabited  by  wild  Indians.  From  Cie- 
go Bar  to  that  of  Trinidad,  the  coast  tends  nc-^rly  N.  N.  E.  for  two  leagues : 
in  its  proximities  the  bottom  is  rocky,  like  the  preceding:  the  bar  of  Trinidad 


*!«)#«> 


AGO 


BLUNT  S    AMERKCAN    COAST    PILOT. 


hns  onlv  two  feel  on  It  at  low  water.  From  Trinidad  Bar  to  Barra  del  Tordn, 
or  Tordo  B.'ir,  is  twelve  miles  N.  by  W.  and  all  good  depth,  nilh  llie  exreption 
of  Bonic  pointed  rocks,  which  also  do  not  lie  farther  out  than  two  miles.  Ou 
Tordo  Bur  there  is  only  4  feet  of  water  at  low  sea,  and  within  it  are  various  shal- 
jow  lagoons:  all  this  coast  is  bordered  with  low  hills,  or  hillocks;  and  two  leagues 
inland  from  these  there  are  some  which  rise  a  little,  and  are  named  the  Com- 
niandanrs.  To  the  northward,  near  the  parallel  of  23°,  are  three  double  hills, 
•een  when  near  the  coast,  which  are  named  Cerros  loa  Marlinez,  which  serve  as 
land-mark«  to  those  bound  to  Tordo  ;  for  the  southern  part  is  nearly  we^t  from 
the  bar :  farther  inland  than  these  hills  are  seen  the  Skrraay  or  Mountains  of 
Tamaolimpioy  which  tend  to  the  N.  W.  and  which  serve  as  a  haunt  for  the  wild 
Indians. 

From  the  bar  of  Tordo,  northward,  the  lagoons  become  more  numerous;  they 
are  all  of  salt  water,  and  fresh  water  is  to  be  found  only  in  hollows  between  the 
hummocks,  where  it  has  remained  after  rain. 

From  the  bar  of  Tordo  to  the  River  Marina,  or  Bar  of  Santander,  the  coast 
tends  nearly  N.  by  W.  eighteen  leagues,  and  is  all  of  a  good  depth  until  within 
three  leagues  of  the  bar,  when  various  pointed  rocks  are  met  with,  which  lie  out 
about  two  miles  from  the  beach :  six  leagues  to  the  north  of  the  bar  of  Toido, 
is  a  place  named  Osiiotial,  by  which  the  Lagoon  of  Morales  communicates  with 
the  sea  whenever  it  is  a  little  risen :  in  this  lagoon  there  is  abundance  of  fish,  and 
there  is  a  watering-place  in  front  of  Ostional.  The  Lagoon  of  Morales  commu- 
nicates with  the  River  Marina. 

The  bar  of  the  River  Marina  has  7  feet  of  water,  and  the  Hills  of  Palma  and 
Carrizo,  between  which  lies  the  neck  of  the  river,  serve  as  marks  for  it;  before 
this  the  river  forms  a  great  lake,  of  which  the  shores  are  low.  Six  leagues  up 
the  river  is  the  town  of  Soto  la  Marina,  which  is  ten  leagues  distant  from  the 
colony  of  New  Santander,  at  which  all  necessary  provisions  may  be  found.  The 
lake,  which  is  within  the  bar,  and  below  the  neck  of  the  river,  is  full  of  shallows, 
and  has  solely  a  channel  of  1%  or  14  feet  of  water ;  but  in  the  river  there  are  3 
and  4  fathoms.  All  the  coast  here  consists  of  very  low  sandy  bsaches,  and  on 
no  part  of  it  is  there  fresh  water  to  be  found ;  but  it  may  be  obtained  in  the  inte- 
rior country. 

From  the  bar  of  Santander,  the  coast,  which  is  very  low  and  of  sand,  tends 
twenty-five  leagues  N.  by  E.  to  the  Bocas  Cerradas,  which  are  four,  within  the 
distance  of  a  league  :  by  these  the  sea  enters  when  there  are  storms  ;  and  they 
may  be  distinguished  at  three  or  four  leagues  off  at  sea :  they  communicate  with 
the  Madre  Lagoon,  whiclj  thence  extends  to  the  river  San  Fernando  or  Tigre. 
At  eight  leagues  to  the  north  of  the  River  Marina,  the  interior  high  land  ends, 
and  thence  the  land  continues  low.  The  lagoons,  in  many  parts,  form  a  horizon. 
From  the  Bocas  Cerradas  to  the  river  of  San  Fernando  or  Tigre,  the  coast  bends 
to  the  N.  N.  E.  and  continues  of  the  same  description  as  that  last  described. 

The  bar  of  San  Fernando  has  3  feet  on  it  at  low  water:  the  water  of  this  river 
is  salt,  owing  to  the  communication  it  has  with  the  lakes  or  lagoons,  and  fresh 
water  is  to  be  found  only  at  the  time  of  the  rains  :  but  on  the  south  coast  of  its 
bay  there  is  a  pool  of  standing  water,  at  which  any  urgent  necessity  may  be  sup- 
plied. From  this  bar  the  coast  follows  to  the  N.  N.  E.  for  fourteen  miles,  and 
afterwards  north  for  sixteen  miles  ;  and  then  about  two  leagues  before  arriving 
at  the  River  Bravo  del  Norte,  it  directs  itself  to  the  N.  N.  W. 

The  bar  of  the  River  Bravo  is  good  and  very  straight;  it  extends  east  and 
west,  and  has  7  feet  on  it  at  low  water:  this  river  is  of  fresh  water,  and  has  a 
regular  current  the  whole  year,  which  is  more  or  less  strong  according  to  the  wa- 
ters it  receives :  within  the  bar  there  are  3  and  4  fathoms.  As  all  the  land  hcre- 
Hbout  is  equal  and  low,  it  offers  no  distingiiishing  marks,  excepting  a  small  lagoon, 
which  extends  from  the  Tigre  to  this  liver,  and  the  bar  of  which  stretches  a 
league  out  to  sea.  At  a  greater  distance,  it  may  also  be  noticed,  that  the  fresh 
water  changes  the  colour  of  the  sea ;  a  thing  unknown  at  any  other  bar  off  this 
coast. 

From  the  Rio  Bravo,  the  coast  tends  N.  N.  W.  for  five  miles,  where  there  is  a 
•hallow  bar ;  thence  N.  by  W.  to  the  distance  of  six  miles  farther,  and  to  another 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


461 


bar  of  13  or  16  feet;  but  with  very  littlo  shtlJcr,  having  a  very  witle  mouth,  and 
the  coast  bKing  very  low;  while  th«  lagoon  with  which  it  commuiiitat^'s  leaves 
merely  a  short  space  of  aliout  4  fathoms  in  depth,  when'  you  nnay  anchor  in  case 
of  necessity;  hut  all  the  rest  of  the  la|;oon  formt*  n  horizon,  having;  only  i  and  3 
feet  of  water  to  the  main  land,  which  is  at  a  good  distance.  It  is  necessary  to 
be  much  on  your  guard  in  this  place,  on  account  of  th(!  Indians,  who  come  down 
to  the  sea-shore  In  periaguas  or  pirogues..  On  no  part  of  this  coast  is  there  fresh 
water.  To  find  ibis  bar,  which  is  called  Barra  de  Santiago,  you  have  no  other 
guide  than  the  latitude,  and  observing  that,  to  the  northward  of  it,  the  lagoon 
begins  to  get  wider.  The  entrance  of  the  bar  is  very  near  to  the  north  point, 
and  lies  CN.  V,.  and  W.  S.  VV.  to  the  anchorage  of  4,  or  perhaps  5  fathoms, 
which  is  about  a  league  in  length.  From  this  bar  the  coast  follows  to  the  true 
north,  all  very  low  and  of  sand,  the  main  land  being  distant  five  or  six  leagues 
from  the  beach,  forming  a  lagoon  of  3  or  4  feet  of  water,  with  much  clay.  This 
lagoon  l»egins  to  be  still  broader  in  latitude  ST'^SO'N.  where  it  is  nearly  seven 
leagues  in  width.  The  cmbrochure  of,  or  channel  to,  this  lagoon,  in  the  south, 
is  by  the  bar  of  Santiago  ;  and  towards  the  north,  by  the  Pa»a  del  Cahallo ;  and 
when  its  waters  are  very  high,  they  open  various  mouths  or  passages  in  the  beuch, 
which  is  of  sand  and  very  low.  From  lat.  27°  30',  the  coast  continues  nearly 
true  north  to  lat.  28°  10',  or  the  shoal  bar  of  the  Paaa  Cahallo:  to  the  N.  W.  of 
the  latter  is  the  Lake  of  St.  Joseph,  (H.  Josef)  distant  about  sixteen  miles.  From 
the  latitude  of  27^.^0',  the  lagoon  narrows  towards  the  Bay  of  San  Bernardo. 
From  Pasudel  Cahallo,  the  coast  tends  to  the  eastward  of  north,  to  the  Bay  of 
San  Bernado,  and  all  of  it  is  low,  with  sandy  beaches;  so  that,  with  hard  gales, 
the  aea  covers  the  little  tongues,  which  serve  as  barriers  to  the  lagoons,  and  uniteti 
entirely  with  them. 

All  the  coast  which  we  have  described,  from  Tampico  to  the  Bay  of  San  Ber- 
nardo, is  very  clean,  and  3  or  4  fathoms  are  found  at  a  league  from  the  shore. 
The  quality  of  the  bottom  is,  in  general,  either  of  coarse  or  fine  sand,  and  in 
some  places  mud  :  on  the  bars  of  the  rivers  very  fine  sand  is  always  found ;  but 
also,  sometimes,  sand  and  ooze.  Tlie  greater  part  of  the  lagoons  on  this  coast 
have  not  more  than  8  or  4  feet  of  water,  where  deepest,  and  parts  of  them  are 
dry,  except  in  the  season  of  the  rains.  In  the  season,  from  August  to  April,  the 
navigation  is  very  dangerous  on  these  coasts,  on  account  of  the  heavy  sea  which 
is  on  them,  and  which  renders  it  impossible  for  a  vessel  to  ride  at  her  anchors; 
for,  in  that  season,  the  E-  S.  E.  winds  blow  with  much  force,  before  the  wind 
conies  to  the  north,  for  three  days ;  but  in  the  other  months,  from  April  to  Au- 
gust, the  navigation  is  very  good  and  secure,  and  currents  are  always  found  to 
the  north  and  N. E.  which  facilitate  an  increase  in  the  latitude;  and  although 
the  easterly  winds,  which  prevail  from  April  to  June,  raise  much  sea,  yet  you 
may,  in  a  case  of  necessity,  ride  at  anchor  in  7  or  8  fathoms,  but,  if  you  can 
keep  under  sail,  do  so,  in  7  or  8  fathoms,  when  you  will  be  in  si^ht  of  the  coast. 
The  land-breezes  are  frequent  in  the  summer,  from  midnight  till  9  or  10  in  the 
morning,  when  the  breeze  comes  on :  but  this  is  only  the  case  to  the  latitude  of 
26<l°,  which  is  where  the  mountain  range  ends;  for  all  the  rest  of  the  land  is  very 
level,  low,  and  swampy,  or  watery ;  and  there  are  few  showers  on  it,  which  are 
the  causes  of  the  land-wind. 


The  Bay  of  San  Bernardo,  and  Coast  thence  to  the  River  Mississippi. 

The  Bay  of  San  Bernardo  is  in  the  N.  W.  corner  of  the  Gulf  or  Sea  of  Mexi- 
co ;  4ts  entrance  is  formed,  on  the  west,  by  the  low  land  which  tends  up  from 
the  S.  W.  and  on  the  east,  by  the  west  point  of  the  Isle  of  San  Luis:  there  is 
not  more  than  7  feet  of  water  on  the  bar,  which  extends  W.  N.  W.  and  E.  S.  E. 
Within  the  exterior  points,  there  is  a  depth  of  3  fathoms ;  but  it  so  soon  dimin- 
ishes, that  the  bay  may  be  generally  considered  as  a  lake  of  3  or  4  feet  in  depth : 
from  the  bar  there  is  a  strong  current  to  the  S.  W.  when  the  tide  ebbs ;  so  that 


-Timni^livos 


462 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


it  is  necessary  to  anchor  and  wait  until  the  flood  favours  the  entrance.  The  tide 
rises  5  feet.  Before  pnssing  inward,  it  is  necessary  to  mark  or  buoy  the  bar ; 
for,  as  there  is  always  a  swell  upon  it,  striking  would  be  dangerous. 

AH  the  land  of  this  bay  is  low,  and  without  trees.  The  island  of  San  Luis,  or  St. 
Louis,  of  which  the  west  point  is  the  east  point  of  the  bay  of  San  Bernado,  fol- 
lows E.  N.  E.  42  miles ;  all  very  low  and  marshy,  without  wood;  and  the  south 
coast  is  a  very  fine  white  sandy  beach.  This  island  is  very  narrow,  and  the  in- 
ner part  of  it,  with  the  main  land,  forms  a  lagoon  of  about  two  leagues  in  width : 
it  is  studded  with  keys,  and  it  is  so  shallow  that  there  is  no  passage  through,  except 
for  canoes.  The  eastern  extremity  of  San  Luis'  Island  sends  a  spit  out  for  two 
leagues  to  the  E.  N.  E.  between  which  and  a  shelf,  stretching  out  from  the  main 
land,  is  the  entrance  of  Galveston  Bay,  the  exterior  po.iit  of  which,  to  the  south, 
ia  Culthras  Point,  or  the  eastern  point  of  the  island  of  San  Luis;  and  that  to  the 
north,  on  the  main  land,  is  Foint  Arcokisas.  In  order  to  enter  this  bay,  it  is  re- 
quisite to  round  the  reef  at  Culebras  Point,  and  to  go  in  by  the  channel  which 
the  north  edge  of  that  reef  forms  with  the  south  edge  of  the  shelf,  stretching  from 
the  main  land  to  about  lour  miles  to  the  south  of  it.  This  channel  is  a  mile  in 
width;  and,  at  its  entrance,  has  a  bar  of  about  fifteen  feet  of  water;  and  this, 
which  is  the  greatest  depth,  will  be  found  nearer  the  edge  of  the  spit  than  that  of 
the  shelf.  Within  the  bay,  5  and  6  fathoms  are  found.  So  soon  as  you  are 
abreast  of  Culebras  Point,  within  the  channel,  you  must  luff  up  to  N.  W.  and  N. 
by  W.  until  the  point  of  Arcokisas  bears  east,  when  you  may  anchor  in  4  or  5  fa- 
thoms, on  clayey  sand.  More  to  the  north  you  will  find  3  fathoms.  This  bay 
is  good  for  the  shelter  it  affords ;  but,  although  very  large,  its  coasts  have  shal- 
lows to  a  long  distance  out,  on  which  boats  only  can  pass  :  in  the  northernmost 
part  of  the  bay,  and  almost  N.  by  W.  from  Arcokisas  Point,  and  about  seventeen 
miles  from  it,  is  the  mouth  of  the  river  Arcokisas,  or  Trinidad,  the  land  at  which 
is  good  and  wooded  :  this  is  the  only  place  in  which  fresh  water  can  be  procured 
in  tlua  bay,  or  even  on  the  exterior  coast,  along  way  to  the  eastward. 

This  coast,  which  is  that  ofthe  province  of  Tejas  or  Texas,  has  been  described 
as  generally  low  and  marshy,  with  small  isles,  inclosing  bays  of  more  or  less  ex- 
tent :  the  country,  however,  imperceptibly  rises  to  the  northward,  and  becomes 
-dry,  broken,  and  healthy. 

The  discordancy,  in  different  representations  of  the  coast,  between  Galveston 
Bay  and  the  Sabine  Lake,  are  rather  extraordinary,  owing  to  the  want  of  a  regu- 
lar survey.  In  the  late  Spanish  chart  ofthe  gulf,  the  differenco  of  longitude  be- 
tween Galveston  Bay  and  the  mouth  ofthe  Sabine  is  only  1°  14',  the  latterbeing 
laid  down  in  94°  45',  while  in  the  new  surve3''  of  Louisiana,  by  Mr.  Darby,  it  is 
given  in  93°  57',  and  in  the  marine  survey  of  Mr.  Gauld,  as  in  9iiP  30'  only. 

From  the  consideration  that  the  interior  land  has  been  actually  measured 
across  the  state  of  Louisiana,  it  can  hardly  be  questionable  that  Mr.  Darby's 
longitude  is,  at  least,  a  near  approximation  ;  but  of  the  true  figure  of  the  coast, 
thence  to  Galveston  Bay,  we  know  nothing ;  even  after  an  examination  of  many 
charts,  &c.  several,of  which  agree  only  in  one  commor  error,  that  which  origna- 
ted  in  the  Spanish  chart  of  1799,  and  since  copied  into  others  of  later  date. 

"We  may  now  question  whether  an  inlet  or  lake  appenring  at  its  entrance  iilie 
the  Sabine,  has  not  been  mistaken  for  the  latter.  Mr.  Gauld  has  represented  the 
Sabine,  under  the  Indian  name  Chicowansh,  and,  as  above  noticed,  in  93^  SO'. 
Fifty  miles  more  to  the  W.  S.  W.  or  in  94°  18',  (94^'  48'  corrected,)  he  givt 
the  entrance  of  a  lake,  studded  with  many  isles,  which  might  possibly  be  mis- 
taken for  Galveston  Bay,  would  the  difference  of  longitude  admit :  but  the  differ- 
ence between  the  Sabine  and  Galveston  Bay  is  more  than  two  degrees.  The 
supposition  cannot,  therefore,  be  allowed. 

The  Derrotero  dt  las  Antillas  says  that,  ••  between  Galveston  Bay  and  the  Sa- 
bine, no  fresh  water  is  to  be  found,  even  in  pits  or  holes :"  but  the  distance  is 
given  as  only  22  leagues.  Within  this  space  several  rivers  appear,  on  the  old 
charts,  which  arc  not  bore  admitted  to  exist.  Th«jee  are,  the  river  of  St.  Su- 
sanna, the  Rio  de  Florcs,  Rio  Dulce,  the  Magdalena,  and  Mexicano :  but  the 
question,  Vvhether  they  do  or  do  not  fexist)  remains  to  be  determined. 

The  Sabine,  or  Uie  Inlet  fifty  mile$  to  the  weBtward  of  it,  as  noticed  above,i%  thus 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


463 


described  in  the  Derrotero.  "  Ttiis  raoutli  or  entrance  may  be  Icnown  by  the 
width  of  it,  which  is  not  les$  than  four  miles.  To  enter  it,  you  nnuat  open  out  the 
bar,  which  extends  to  the  south  about  two  miles,  and  lies  in  an  E.  N.  E.  and  W. 
S.  W.  direction,  and  has  not  more  than  six  or  seven  feet  of  depth,  until  clear  in- 
to the  first  lake,  where  there  is  more  depth.  Having  passed  the  first  lake,  you 
enter  into  another,  much  greater,  of  four  leagues  in  extent,  into  the  extremity  or 
north  corner  of  which  falls  the  river  Sabine,  and  ten  miles  to  the  S.  W.  of  it  that 
named  Nieves  :*  In  these  rivers  there  is  a  good  fresh  water  ;  the  lands  are  low, 
and  liable  to  be  flooded,  and  are  covered  with  trees  clear  of  underwood.  The 
general  depths  of  this  great  lake  are  only  four  and  five  feet." 

RIVER  SABINE  to  the  MISSISSIPPI— The  greater  part  of  the  country  be- 
tween the  rivers  Sabine  and  Missisippi  was  formerly  that  of  the  Indian  tribes  Ope- 
lowsas  and  Attacapas.  Honce  it  appears  on  the  Spanish  charts  as  the  Tierraa  dt 
los  Opelusas  y  Attacapas,  and  a  great  part  now  forms  two  western  districts  of  the 
State  of  Louisiana  • 

The  coasts  generally  are  very  low,  marshy,  broken,  and  in  some  parts  entirely 
inundated  during  the  rainy  season.  The  country  is  intersected  by  many  lakes, 
rivers,  and  lesser  streams.  In  Attacapas,  on  the  western  bank  of  the  River 
Teche,  are  two  small  towns.— Neiv  Iberia,  in  lat.  30^  3',  and  St.  Martin's,  in  30° 
9' ;  but  neither  are  entitled  to  particular  notice.  The  Teche  falls  into  the  Atcha- 
falaya,  and  thus  communicates  with  the  Mexican  Sea.  The  great  body  of  the 
present  inhHl)itant3  of  Attacapas  are  settled  along  the  Teche,  this  being  a  supe- 
rior part  of  the  country ;  but  there  are  also  many  beautiful  settlements  on  the 
Vermilion  River,  more  to  the  west. 

The  mouth  of  the  Rlvtr  Calcasiu  is  about  twenty-five  miles  to  the  eastward  of 
that  of  the  Sabine.  The  coast,  in  the  interval,  is  generally  without  wood,  and 
in  some  parts  very  marshy.  The  bar  of  the  Calcasiu,  which  extends  a  mile  out, 
has  only  four  feet  over  it  at  low  water,  and  the  great  lake  within  has  only  three 
feet.  The  banks  of  the  latter  are  not  more  than  four  feet  above  the  level  of  low 
water;  and  at  high  spring  tides  are  frequently  overflown.  To  enter  the  river, 
keep  nearest  to  the  west  point,  until  you  open  the  neck,  which  has  a  lake  on  the 
western  side,  communicating  with  it  at  high  water.  The  water  here  is  fresh  and 
good. 

The  mouth  of  the  Mermentau  is  aboout  27  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  Calca- 
siu. The  coiist  between  continues  low  and  marshy.  The  bar,  like  the  former, 
has  only  4  feet  on  it  at  low  water ;  but  the  depth  within  is  much  greater.  The 
interior  lake,  Mermentau,  like  the  Lake  Calcasiu,  has  a  general  depth  of  only 
3  feet  at  low  water.  A  few  low  marshy  islands  chequer  its  surface,  while  the 
general  monotony  of  its  shores  are  relieved  only  by  clumps  of  live-oak. 

Between  the  Mermentau  and  the  Atchafalaya,  an  extent  of  about  80  miles, 
the  land  is  variegated  in  its  shape,  and  forms  Vermilion  Bay,  Cote  Blanche  Bay, 
and  tiiat  of  Atchafalaya,  the  figures  of  which  have  been  variously  represented, 
and  can  be  best  understood  by  reference  to  our  New  Chart  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 
The  River  Atchafalaya  is  a  considerable  branch  of  the  Mississippi,  or  rather  an 
outlet  from  that  river,  and  its  waters  fall  into  the  bay  with  great  rapadity. 

The  ^^  Derrotero"  says  that  the  Bayou,  or  Creek,  of  Constante  lies  21  miles  to 
the  eastward  of  the  bar  of  the  Mermentau,  and  has  about  7  feet  at  its  entrance, 
with  a  greater  depth  Avithin.  The  coast  thence  is  evidently  described  inaccurate- 
ly ;  but  the  point,  called  Tigre  Point,  westward  of  Belle  Isle,  "  may  be  known 
by  a  great  row  of  oak-trees."  The  southern  coast  of  Belle  Isle  tends  nearly  E. 
by  S.  25  miles.  Within  the  isle,  on  the  east,  is  a  range  of  keys,  which  divides 
Cote  Blanche  from  atchafalaya  Bay.  The  great  lagoon,  within  Belle  Isle,  which 
forms  Vermilion  and  Cote  Blanche  Bays,  has  a  general  depth  of  only  5  to  10 
feet,  and  its  western  strait,  which  is  the  clearest,  kas  a  bar  of  about  5  feet. 

The  River  Atchafalaya,  or  Chafalaya,  has  been  already  noticed.  This  river 
may  be  considered  as  a  boundary  of  the  great  Delta  of  the  Mississippi.  Beyond 
the  distance  of  four  leagues  inland,  within  the  Atchafalaya,  the  land  is  elevated 

*'  Mr.  Darby  represents  the  Nutcbes,  or  western  branch  of  the  Sabine,  as  falling  into  the 
lake  at  only  five  miles  from  the  main  or  eastern  branch. 


^■■"a 


464 


BI.UNr*S 


AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


and  fertile  ;  but  thence  to  the  8<>a  It  h  liable  to  be  flooded,  and  has  no  wood,  ex- 
cept upon  two  mounts,  which  are  to  the  eastward  of  it.  Almost  S.  by  E.  4 
leagues  from  the  mouth  of  the  Atchafalaya,  is  Point  Fkrro ;  and  the  intermediate 
space  forms  a  iarge  bay,  much  impeded  by  oyster-banks.  Opposite  to  this  bay, 
on  the  west,  extensive  oyster-banks  also  extend  from  the  southern  shore  of  Belle 
Isle.  From  Fierro  Point  the  coast  tends  to  the  E.  S.  E.  30  ailes,  to  Racoon 
Point,  the  west  point  of  an  isle,  called  Buey  Island.  The  c6ast  all  along  is  bor- 
dered with  oyster-banks,  some  of  which  have  scarcely  3  feet  of  water  upon  them ; 
and,  indeed,  there  is  a  chain  of  them  all  the  way  from  Bayou  Constante ;  and 
they  are,  in  some  parts,  uncovered  at  low  water.  It  is,  therefore,  here  necessa- 
ry to  navigate  with  much  caution,  taking  care  not  to  go  into  less  than  7  fathoms, 
in  order  to  keep  clear  outside  of  all  the  banks.  Between  the  shoals  there  are 
channels  of  8  feet,  which  lead  to  the  Atchafalaya,  but  they  can  be  taken  only  by 
vessels  of  a  light  draught,  and  with  a  good  pilot. 

The  island  Timballier,  which  is  about  7  leagues  to  the  S.  W.  of  Barataria  Bay, 
is  ten  miles  in  length,  and  tends  nearly  east  and  west.  At  its  east  end  is  the  bar 
of  the  river  Lafourche,  on  which  there  is  not  more  than  6  feet  of  water ;  and  the 
interior  does  not  afford  shelter  from  a  storm.  The  coast  hence  to  Barataria  Bay 
is  formed  by  a  chain  of  isles,  of  which  the  N.  £.  and  largest  is  Grand  Isle. 

BARATARIA  BAY  is  a  great  lake,  communicating  with  the  Mississippi  by 
two  creeks,  which,  at  the  time  of  the  floods,  have  much  water  in  them.  At  the 
entrance  is  a  bar  of  9  feet  water,  and  within  the  depth  increases.  This  harbour 
is  well  sheltered,  but  there  is  a  strong  current  in  it  when  the  river  is  in  flood,  and 
a  vessel  here  requires  to  be  moored  with  good  cables.  The  entrance  may  be 
known  by  three  distinct  clumps  of  trees,  on  the  east  side.  There  is,  also,  here 
a  look-out,  with  a  flag-staff,  and  a  cannon  for  making  signals  to  vessels,  by  which 
the  situation  of  the  bar  is  indicated.  A  vessel  may  gain  a  pilot,  by  firing  guns,  as 
a  signal  for  the  same,  until  answered  from  the  look-out. 

In  advancing  up  the  bight,  to  the  bar  of  Barataria,  whether  from  the  East  or 
West,  be  cautious  not  to  go  into  less  than  4  fathoms,  especially  after  passing  the 
S.  W.  pass  of  the  Mississippi ;  for  the  N.  E.  part  of  the  outer  bay  is  very  de- 
ceiving, it  having  many  oyster-banks.  The  coast  is  low,  and  mostly  covered 
with  bullrushes.  Without  the  bar  there  is  anchorage  in  4,  5,  or  6,  fathoms,  in 
sight  of  land ;  but  it  can  be  taken  only  in  good  weather  :  in  bad  weather  it  k 
better  to  keep  under  sail,  keeping  in  mind  that,  on  this  shore,  the  water  runs  much 
to  the  west,  which  is  caused  by  the  discharge  from  the  branches  of  the  Missis- 
sippi.    The  tide  here  regularly  rises  4  feet. 

GENERAL  REMARKS,  from  the  Derrotero  de  las  Antillaa,  he— All  the  coast, 
which  has  been  described,  from  San  Bernardo  to  the  Bayou  of  Constante,  is  clean 
and  of  good  depth  ;  and  you  may  run  along  it,  by  the  lead,  understanding  that, 
at  5  miles  from  it,  you  will  have  3  and  4  fathoms  of  water ;  and,  although  it  is 
low,  you  may  see  it,  in  clear  days,  from  8  fathoms  of  water ;  but,  from  the  Ba- 
you of  Constante  to  the  isles  Buey  and  Vino,  it  is  most  commonly  foul  and  full 
of  oyster-banks,  most  dangerous  to  navigation ;  to  avoid  which,  on  passing,  ap- 
proach no  nearer  than  lO  fathoms,  in  which  depth  you  proceed  safely.  The  Cur- 
rent, from  St.  Bernardo  to  the  Bayou  of  Constante,  is  weak ;  but,  from  the  latter 
to  the  S.  W.  pass  of  the  Mississippi,  it  runs  with  strength  to  the  West  and  S.  W. 
especially  during  the  floods  of  the  river. 

In  the  morning  you  have  the  land-breeze ;  but,  when  day-lighi  is  well  come, 
the  wind  comes  to  the  East  and  E.  S.  E.  and  in  the  evening  it  rounds  to  S^  W. 
This,  however,  is  varied  in  the  time  of  the  Norths;  for,  when  they  blow,  which 
generally  is  with  much  force,  there  is  neither  land-breeze  nor  change.  The  fore- 
runner of  a  North  is  the  wind  from  South,  which  blows,  with  force,  for  twenty- 
four  or  thirty  hours  before  tlie  other  comes  on.  The  weather,  in  the  months  of 
August,  Septenr.ber,  October,  and  November,  is  most  to  he  feared  on  these  coasts ; 
for,  in  addition  to  having  winds  dead  on  shore,  there  are  violent  hurricanes ;  and 
thus,  in  such  seasons,  you  should  never  go  into  less  than  20  fathoms,  cither  in 
beating  to  windward  or  in  sailing  along  it. 

[For  •'  Directions  for  vessels  bound  from  the  Mississippi  through  the  Gulf"  See 
page  156.] 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


m 


IS  no  ivood,  ex- 
lost  S.  by  E.  4 
;be  iatermediate 
)3ite  to  this  bay, 
■n  shore  of  Belle 
jiles,  to  Racoon 
all  along  is  bor- 
ater  upon  them ; 
Constante;  and 
e,  here  necessa- 
tban  7  fathoms, 
shoals  there  are 
e  taken  only  by 

f  Barataria  Bay, 
st  end  is  the  bar 
•water ;  and  the 
to  Barataria  Bay 
Grand  hie. 
e  Mississippi  by 
n  them.  At  the 
}.  This  harbour 
iv  is  in  flood,  and 
entrance  may  be 
ere  is,  also,  here 
essels,  by  which 
by  firing  guns,  as 

from  the  East  or 
after  passing  the 
r  bay  is  very  de- 

mostly  covered 
or  6,  fathoms,  in 

ad  weather  it  is 
Iwater  runs  much 
les  of  the  Missis- 

;c. — All  the  coast, 
lonstante,  is  clean 
lerstanding  that, 
id,  although  it  is 
|ut,  from  the  Ba- 
tnly  foul  and  full 
on  passing,  ap- 
ifely.  The  Cur- 
t,  from  the  latter 
IWest  and  S.  W. 

IhJ;  is  well  come, 
Irounds  to  S-  W. 
Ley  blow,  which 
Inge.  The  fore- 
Irce,  for  twenty- 
In  the  month:)  of 
|on  these  coasts ; 
Jiurricanes ;  and 
^homs,  either  in 

the  Gulf,"  Stt 


CHAV.  s:v. 


ITie  Coast  and  Rivers  of  GUYANA,  from  the  Equator  and  ihi 
AMAZON,  westward  to  the  GULF  of  PARIA,  or  TRINIDAD. 


The  Coast  of  Guyana  in  general* 

The  country  comprehended  under  the  name  of  Guyana,  extends  southward 
from  the  river  Oronoco  to  the  river  of  Amazons.  The  coasts  of  it  are  generally 
low ;  as  the  numerous  rivers  bring  down  vast  auuntities  of  alluvial  matter^ 
which,  accumulating  on  the  shores,  has  formed  a  oorder  of  low  ground.  This 
ground,  betwc<^n  the  high  and  low  water  marks,  is  commonly  covered  with  man- 
groves ;  at  low  water,  it  appears]  like  an  inaccessible  bank ;  but«  with  the  rising 
tide,  it  is  inundated^ 


Portuguese  Guyana. 

The  Amazon,  is  considered  as  the  first  or  largest  river  in  the  world.  Mr.  Pin-* 
kerton  has  said,  "  among  the  grand  rivers  which  water  the  globe,  and  diffuse  fer-' 
tility  and  commerce  along  their  shores,  the  Amazon  will  ever  maintain  the  pre- 
ference." The  truth  of  this  averment  seems  to  be  unquestionable ;  the  sources 
of  this  river  being  within  two  degrees  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  about  the  parrallel 
of  lio  g.  and  several  great  rivers  fall  into  it,  these  again  having  innumerable 
branches.  The  course  of  its  grand  stream  is  nearly  east,  across  the  continent.  Un- 
til it  falls  into  the  Atlantic,  under  the  equinoctial  line.  The  river  is  said  to  be  navi- 
gable through  nearly  its  whole  length,  though  impeded  by  many  banks  of  sand, 
some  of  which  extend  SO  or  40  leagues.  Below  its  confluence  with  tlW  rirer 
Xingu,  at  40  leagues  from  the  sea,  its  opposite  banks  are  invisible  from  each 
other.  At  Ovidoa,  more  than  140  leagues  from  the  sea<  its  breadth  is  about  1000 
fathoms.    The  tide  is  perceptible  to  the  distance  of  150  leagues. 

The  declivity  of  the  bed  of  the  river,  from  Ovidos,  has  been  cottiputed  at  only 
four  feet;  yet  the  immense  body  of  interior  water  gives  it  an  astonishing  im- 
petus;  so  that  it  rushes  into  the  sea  with  amazing  velocity;  and  is  said  to 
freshen  the  ocean,  at  times,  to  the  distance  of  nearly  80  leagues  from  the  shore. 
This  rapidity,  on  the  return  of  tide,  occasions  a  bore,  called  by  the  Indians  poro" 
roca,  which  is  chiefly  observable  towards  Cape  North,  and  which  surpasses  those 
of  other  great  rivers.  This  phenomenon  always  occurs  two  days  before  and  af- 
ter the  full  and  change  of  the  moon;  when,  at  the  commencement  of  the  flood, 
the  sea  rushes  into  the  river,  forming  three,  or  four  successive  waves,  that  break 
mountains  hi^h  on  the  bar,  and  rai<4e  the  tide  within,  to  its  greatest  elevation  in 
one  or  two  minutes.  It  has  been  said  that  the  .elevation  of  these  ridges  of  water 
has  amounted  to  not  less  200  feet ;  but  the  ordinary  rise,  over  the  bar,  is  from  12 
to  15  feet.  The  noise  of  th«  irruption  may  be  heard  at  the  distance  of  two 
leagues. 

.69' 


466 


BLUKT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


French  Guyana. 


The  coasts  of  French  Guyana  are  much  like  those  of  the  Portuguese  or 
Brasilian  territory,  already  describtd,  and  present  nothing  remarkable  to  the  na- 
vigator ;  the  whole  being  lined  by  drowned  mangrove  isles  and  mud  banks,  which 
bar  the  mouths  of  the  numerous  rivers.  The  rains  on  this  coast  prevail  from 
January  to  June,  and  form  stagnant  ponds,  and  marshes,  which  render  the  cli- 
mate very  unhealthy.    The  currents  along  the  coast  are  strong  and  irregular. 

The  only  town  is  that  of  Cayenne,  situated  on  an  isle  or  rather  delta,  called 

Cayano ;  hence  the  whole  territory  is  commonly  styled  Cayenne.     The  situation 

of  this  place  was  ascertained  by  M.  la  Condamine,  in  1774,  from  four  eclipses  of 

the  first  satellite  of  Jupiter,  &,c.  who  has  given  it  as  in  4°  56'  15"  N.  and  52°  16' 

■  30"  W.  a  position  since  generally  adopted. 

The  coast  is  in  many  places  dangerous ;  having  extensive  banks  of  sand  and 
mud,  with  numerous  rocks.  Some  of  the  shoals  reach  to  the  distance  of  two 
leagues  from  shore.  The  isle  Cayano  lies  between  the  rivers  Ouya  and  Cayenne, ; 
the  latter  has  near  its  entrance,  only  12  and  13  feet  of  water  Avith  soft  mud  inter- 
spersed with  rocks.  The  town  is  situated  on  the  N.  \V.  side  of  the  island ;  it  is 
generally  described  as  a  wretched  pl.ice,  the  streets  steep  and  narrow,  and  paved 
with  sharp  stonfs.  The  harbour,  which  is  a  tolerable  one,  is  supposed  to  have 
determined  the  choice  of  settlers,  in  fixing  on  this  situation. 

There  are  several  islets  oft'  Cayenne,  as  exhibited  on  the  charts;  of  these  the 
outer  ones,  called  the  Constables  or  Gunners,  are  the  most  conspicuous ;  they 
being  barren  rocks,  whitened  with  birds'  dung.  The  Malingre,  and  other  Isles 
to  the  eastward  of  Cayenne,  are  very  steep.  On  one  of  these  is  an  hospital  for 
lepers,  a  malady  very  common  on  the  Cayano  Island.  These  isles,  &c.  are  more 
particularly  described  hereafter. 


Dutch  an  J  British  (Guyana. 

Dutch  Guyana,  or  Surinam,  extends  as  already  noticed,  from  the  Marrowyne 
to  the Corantine,  an  extent  of  170  miles;  and  British  Guyana,  from  the  Cor- 
antine  to  the  Essc({uebo,  an  extent  of  about  120  miles. 

General  Directions /or  the  Coasts  of  Dutch  and  British  Guyana. 

Ships  bound  from  the  windward  or  Caribhee  Islands  to  th  .se  coasts,  should 
steer  as  far  to  the  eastward  as  S.  E.  if  the  wind  will  permit,  on  account  of  the. 
strong  indraught  or  current,  setting  at  all  times  of  the  year  to  the  westward,  into 
and  through  the  gulf  of  Paria.  The  moment  you  come  on  to  the  outward  edge 
of  the  ground,  you  will  perceive  the  colour  of  the  water  change  to  a  light  green, 
and  will  have  from  35  to  45  fathoms.  If  in  that  depth  you  should  be  so  far  to 
the  southward  as  7^  25'  or  7°  30'  north  latitude,  you  may  steer  in  S.  W.  and 
make  the  land ;  but  if  more  to  the  northward,  keep  your  wind  till  you  attain  that 
latitude.  You  will  have  very  gradual  soundings  (juite  to  the  shore,  but  very 
shallow ;  you  will  be  in  9  fathoms  whtM  you  fust  get  sight  of  the  land  about 
Demerara ;  but  you  may  run  in  without  fear  in  4  fathoms,  being  attentive  to  your 
lead.  As  it  is  the  general  opinion  that  there  are  many  unexplored  sand  banks  on 
this  coast,  a  great  attention  to  the  lead  and  «]uality  of  the  ground  will  be  neces- 
sary, as  by  that  only  you  will  be  apprised  of  the  danger;  for,  on  most  parts  of 
this  coast  to  the  eastward  of  the  river  Oronoco,  the  bottom  is  of  very  soft  mud, 
if,  on  a  sudden,  you  find  hard  sandy  ground,  be  assured  some  danger  is  near, 
and  immediately  haul  off,  till  you  again  find  soft  ground,  as  before. 

The  making  of  the  Irrfid  all  the  way  from  the  Oronoco,  as  far  to  the  eastward 
as  Cayenne,  is  very  low  and  woody,  and  therefore  appears  in  ail  parts  so  much 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


467 


i  Portuguese  or 
rkable  to  the  na- 
)ud  banks,  which 
last  prevail  from 
h  render  the  cli- 
;  and  irregular, 
ther  delta,  called 
a.  The  situation 
n  four  eclipses  of 
>"  N.  and  52°  16' 

anks  of  sand  and 
J  distauce  of  two 
\iya  and  Cayenne. ; 
:h  soft  mud  inter- 
f  the  island ;  it  is 
arrow,  and  paved 
supposed  to  have 

arts ;  of  these  the 
onspicuous;  they 
>,  and  other  Isles 
>  is  an  hospital  for 
6les,  &.C.  are  muro 


H  the  Marrowyiif 
from  the  Cor- 


ish  Guyana. 

se  coasts,  should 

m  account  of  the 

le  westward,  into 

le  outward  edge 

to  a  light  green, 

lould  be  so  far  to 

er  in  S.  W.  and 

ill  you  attain  thiil 

e  shore,  but  very 

if  the  land  about 

attentive  to  your 

■ed  sand  banks  on 

nd  will  be  ncces- 

on  most  parts  of 

f  very  soft  niml. 

danger  is  near, 

ire. 

to  the  eastward 
11  parts  50  much 


alike,  that  the  most  experienced  pilots  are  frequently  deceived.  Your  chief  de- 
pendance  therefore  is  in  a  true  altitude ;  if  that,  by  reason  of  thick  weather, 
cannot  bo  obtained,  it  will  be  adviseabic  t(>  anchor  in  about  six  fathoms,  which 
yen  may  do  with  great  safety,  having  good  ground,  and,  in  general,  mc derate 
gales  and  smooth  water. 

The  making  of  the  land  about  Demarara  is  the  most  remarkable  of  any  part 
of  the  coast;  the  woods  in  many  places  being  burnt  down,  and  cleared  for  cul- 
tivation, makes  the  land  appear  in  large  gaps,  where  the  houses,  kc.  are  plainly 
to  be  seen;  and  if  there  are  any  ships  lying  at  the  lower  part  of  the  river,  their 
mast-heads  may  be  plainly  seen  above  the  trees,  from  some  distance  at  sea. 

If  bound  into  the  Demerara,  you  must  run  to  the  westward  till  you  bring  the 
entrance  of  the  river  S.  S.  W.  or  S.  by  W.  and  either  lie  to,  or  anchor  for  the  tidte, 
in  4  fathoms  of  water ;  but  be  very  cautious  not  to  be  hauled  farther  to  the  west- 
ward than  these  bearings,  for  the  flood  runs  very  strongly  into  the  river  Essequi- 
bo  ;  at  the  mouth  of  which,  and  at  a  great  distance  from  the  land,  lie  many  very 
dangerous  sand-banks,  on  some  of  which  there  is  not  more  than  3  er  10  feet  of 
water,  and  the  flood  tide  sets  directlj  .  n  them. 

On  many  parts  of  this  coast,  particularly  oflT  Point  Spirit,  a  league  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  Demerarp.,  the  flood  tide  sets  directly  on  the  shore,  and  the  ebb  sets 
off  to  the  N.  E.  It  nill  be  adviseabic,  when  calm  and  near  the  land,  to  anchor 
there. 

In  the  month  of  December,  there  is,  at  times,  particularly  in  shoal  water,  on 
the  coming  in  of  the  flood,  a  great  sea,  called  the  Rollers,  and,  by  the  Indians, 
Pororoca  ;  it  is  often  fatal  to  vessels  at  anchor.  The  early  navigators  have  been 
puzzled  to  assign  a  cause  for  this  phenomenon,  which  is  occasioned  by  the 
northern  winds  blowing  on  the  shoal  water. 

''  is  to  he  observed,  generally,  that  on  a  great  extent  of  the  coast  of  Guyana, 
Iho  sides  of  tlio  rivers  and  creeks  are  almost  every  where  covered  with  thick 
forests  ;  the  immense  plains  of  natural  salt  swamps,  which  lie  between  these  for- 
ests and  the  sea  coast,  (commonly  called  Savannas)  were  also  formerly  covered 
with  forerts  which  have  been  destroyed  by  means  of  fire ;  much  brush  wood, 
liowever,  has  since  grown  up,  the  branches  and  roots  of  which  are  so  interlaced 
with  each  other,  as  to  prevent  penetrating  through  them  even  in  boats.  The 
greatest  part  of  these  savannas  contain  so  much  water,  which  flows  into  them 
during  the  rainy  season,  that  the  greatest  heat  of  the  dry  season  is  insufficient 
to  drain  them  ;  the  land  therefore  cannot  be  cultivated. 

At  the  distance  of  between  12  and  40  leagues  from  the  coast,  the  wind  gen- 
erally prevails  from  the  E.  S.  E.  but  within  twelve  leagues  the  wind  is  variable  ; 
in  the  morning  S.  E.  and  E.  S.  E. ;  towards  noon,  drawing  round  to  the  East; 
and,  between  two,  and  eight,  it  is  generally  to  the  N.  E.  and  N.  N.  E.  or  North. 
In  the  night  it  varies  from  E.  by  N.  to  E.  by  S. 

To  get  to  the  windward  on  this  coast,  care  must  be  taken  not  to  suffer  the 
southerly  winds  to  take  you  more  than  10  leagues  from  the  land  ;  at  which  dis- 
tance you  should  be  about  noon  ;  for,  by  two  hours  after,  the  wind  may  prevail 
so  far  to  the  north  as  to  lay  you  along  shore.  By  eight  in  the  evening  the  North 
wind  has  generally  subsided,  and  the  wind  then  blows  along  shore  from  the  east- 
ward ;  therefore,  with  a  whole  ebb  before  you,  it  may  be  best  to  anchor,  and 
stop  for  a  tide.  By  d'  y  light  the  wind  will  be  found  to  have  changed  to  west, 
southerly ;  hence  t!ie  advantage  of  being  near  shore.  Thus  proceeding,  and 
taking  advantage  of  the  tides,  a  ship  may  beatfrom  Demerara  to  Surinam  in  the 
Rpace  of  three  or  four  days. 


Particular  Description  of  and  Directions  for  Surinam,  or  Dutch 

Guyana. 

TheRIVV^.  MAROWYNE,  forma  the  eastern  boundary  of  the  province. 
This  Hvcl  :h  is  but  little  frequented  empties  itself  into  the  sea  by  channels 


m 


BLUNrS    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


formed  bctwceo  several  alluvial  banks.    The  mouth  of  the  river,  above  these,  is 
three  miles  in  breadth,  and  the  stream  is  navigable  to  a  great  distance. 

Of  SURINAM  RIVER,  the  entrance  is  three  miles  broad,  and  there  is  a 
depth  over  the  bar  of  from  twelve  to  eighteen  feet  at  low  water,  and  from  twen- 
ty one  to  thirty  at  high  water.  The  depth  within  is  greater ;  but  this  is  inter- 
rupted by  tvfQ  bars,  within  the  river  wiruli  are  exhibited  on  the  Charts. 

PARAMARIBO,  the  cl^ief  town,  ia  pn  the  western  side  of  the  river,  between 
4  or  5  leagues  from  sea, 

_  The  approach  to  the  town  is  defended  by  several  works  on  each  side  of  the 
river.  Of  these,  Fort  Amsterdam,  at  seven  miles  up,  on  the  eastern  side,  is  the 
most  considerable.  Fort  Zeetandia,  below  the  town,  is  separated  from  it  by  an 
esplanade,  and  protects  the  sliipping,  in  the  reach  of  the  river  before  it,  which 
will  contain  one  hundred  sail. 

The  river  is  navigable  for  large  ships  to  the  distance  of  twelve  miles  within  land, 
and  sixty  miles  higher  for  small  vessels.  The  banks,  quite  down  to  the  waters 
edge,  are  covered  with  evergreen  mangroves,  xyhich  render  its  navigation  eX" 
^remely  pleasant. 


Directions  for  the  River  Surinam.   '' 

Itis'adviseublc  for  ships  bound  for  Surinam,  when  coming  from  the  eastward. 
or  long  voyages,  ta  get  into  latitude  r»o  55'  N.  in  the  long! •  vide  of  50  degrees  (un- 
less they  have  a  time-keeper,  or  lunar  observation,  which  may  be  depended 
upon.O  »s  by  that  mean  they  will  have  an  opportunity,  from  observation  to  ob- 
servation, of  ascertaining  the  current,  which  almost  constantly,  off  the,  Maro- 
wyne,  runs  to  the  N.  W.  and,  you  are  also  to  observe  that,  during  the  rainy  sea- 
son, you  cannot  always  depend  on  a  meridional  observation. 

When  you  have  gained  ground  in  the  above  latitude,  (and  be  sure  to  sound  in 
time)  GO  to  40  fathoms,  fme  sand,  you  will  be  40  to  20  leagues  to  eastward  of 
Marowyne  Shoals ;  and  you  may  not,  in  the  night,  approach  nearer  to  them  than 
10  fathoms,  when  the  soundings  will  be  gradually  coarser.  In  hauling  to  tiie 
northward,  you  will  have  deeper  water  and  fliner  sand;  and,  in  10  fathoms  water, 
heaving-to  with  your  head  to  the  northward,  you  will  drive  clear  enough  of  the 
shoals  to  the  N.  W.  You  will  always  know  whether  you  are  to  the  eastward, 
and  consequently  to  the  windward,  by  those  soundings ;  for  the  ground,  six 
leagues  to  leeward,  of  the  Marowyne,  all  the  Avay  to  Brams  Point*  h  soft  mud. 
Your  best  land-fall  will  be  between  Post  Orange  and  the  Marowyne  ;  indeed  it  is 
absolutely  necessary  that  you  should  make  the  land  thereabout.  The  Maro- 
yry^c  is  known  by  the  only  high  land  near  the  coast,  and  appears,  when  you 
va^kf  it,  at  a  great  distance  in-land;  and  bringing  it  to  bear  south  of  you,  you 
will  be  clear  of  its  shoals ;  and  had  better  then  stand  in  until  you  are  in  3  fa- 
thoms of  water. 

In  making  Post  Orange,  which  has  often  been  mistaken  for  Brams  Point,  and 
which  error  has  occasioned  the  loss  of  many  ships.f  observe  that  there  are  ninny 
large  white  houses,  which  ace  barracks;  and,  in  the  middle  of  them,  appears  a 
large  tree,  which,  when  bearing  south  of  you,  makes  like  a  ship  with  top-gallant- 
studding-sails  set;  and  the  flag-staff  also  appears  among  the  trees;  and  tliose 
trees  show  to  be  nearer  the.  houses ;  whereas  Brams  Point  has  two  large  houses, 

*  Brams  Point  is  the  eastern  point  of  the  entrtnce  of  Surinam  River.  A  beacon,  seventy 
feet  high,  has  been  erected  about  a  mile  to  windward  of  the  point,  on  which  is  a  broad  tin 
vane,  ptUntcd  white.  When  this  vane  is  first  distinguishable  from  any  vessel  coming  ft'om 
the  eastward,^  she  may  be  reckoned  on  the  edge  of  the  mud-bank.  The  body  or  frame  of  the 
beacon  is  boarded  around  and  painted  white.  There  arc  also  two  ilng-stafls,  the  eastern  one 
for  signals,  and  on  the  western  the  colours  are  hoisted,  and  at  a  distance  appear  to  be  almost 
in  the  water. 

t  Ai  the  name  of  Post  Orange  does  not  appear  on  somoChartS)  it  maybe  proper  to  notice 
that  it  lies  13  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Brams  Point. 


,:a_:.^j_>  -J..--.'    -■mi^ 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


46d 


above  these,  is 
ance. 

and  there  is  a 
and  from  twen- 
l)ut  this  is  inter- 
ChJ\i'ts. 
a  river,  between 

!ach  side  of  the 
tern  side,  is  the 
d  from  it  by  an 
before  it,  which 

iles  within  land, 
tn  to  the  waters 
J  navigation  e:i^' 


in  the  r4istward» 
50  degrees (un- 
ly  be  jlepended 
iservation  to  ob- 
,  off  tiio  Maro- 
g  the  rainy  sea- 

Hirc  to  sound  in 

to  eastward  of 

er  to  them  than 

haiiHng  to  the 
fathoms  water, 
r  enough  of  the 
0  the  eastward, 
he  ground,  six 
it*  h  soft  mud. 
ne;  indeed  it  is 
The  Maro- 

ars,  when  you 
ith  of  you,  you 
rou  are  in  3  fa- 

»ma  Point,  and 
there  are  many 
lem,  appears  a 
ith  top-gallant- 
es ;  and  those 
o  large  houses, 

.  beacon,  seventy 
ch  is  a  broad  tin 
ssel  coining  (torn 
Y  or  frame  of  the 
the  eastern  one 
lear  to  be  almost 

proper  to  notice 


a  beacon  erected  in  1817,  and  the  trees  are  on  the  other  side  of  the  river,  as  ahowtv 
on  the  Chart  of  Surinam. 

SURINAM— You  will  then  keep  on  the  edge  of  the  Mud  Bank,  (well  descri- 
bed on  the  Chart,)  in  from  3  to  24  fathoms,  or  as  near  as  your  draught  of  water 
will  permit ;  and  you  need  be  under  no  apprehension  in  sttiering  along  the  coast, 
if  you  touch,  as  the  mud  is  very  soft;  and,  on  the  Mud  Bank,  the  moment  you 
haul  to  the  northward,  you  deepen  your  water ;  for,  ou  the  whole  of  this  bank,. 
it  deepens  gradually,  from  3,  to  3^  fathoms,  and  then  you  are  on  the  outward  edge 
of  it. 

The  next  mark  you  have  (for  you  must  be  very  attentive  in  keeping  a  good' 
look-out)  is  a  break  in  the  land,  which  has  been  cleared  for  a  plantation  with  two 
houses;  the  trees  on  each  side  having  beerx  burnt,  appear  very  brown, .and,  in 
making  it  in  3  fathoms  of  water,  4  leagues  off,  you  will  be  from  3  to  4  leagues  ta. 
the  eastward  of  Brams  Point,  which  forms  the  eastern  entrance  of  Surinam  River. 
If  it  be  evening,  or  ebb-tide,  you  had  better  haul  to  the  northward,  and  must  an- 
chor when  you  have  4  fathoms  of  water,  as  the  current  would,  during  the  night, 
drift  you  (should  you  lie-to)  as  far  to  the  westward  as  the  Saramacca ;  and  many 
ships  have  been  three  or  four  weeks  beating  back  to  Brams  Point,  although  the 
distance  is  only  seven  or  eight  leagues.  Nay,  heavy  sailers,  after  beating  many 
weeks,  have  borne  up  for  Berbice,  finding  it  unavailing  to  contend  against  wind 
and  current. 

BRAMS  POINT  may  be  readily  known  by  the  beacon  with  a  vane,  at  a  milo 
to  the  east'vard  of  it,  and  two  flag-staffs,  which  have  already  been  noticed.  You 
will,  on  the  flood,  whdn  it  bears  S.  S.  E.  haul  in,  keeping  the  point  open  to  the 
larboui'd  bow.  Steering  thus,  you  will  clear  the  shoal  that  runs  out  to  the  north- 
ward, of  it ;  and  you  are  in  the  fair  channel  way,  and  may  go  within  hail,  whea 
there  is  good  anchorage  in  4  fathoms  of  water ;  observing  the  best  anchorage  is 
within  the  point  half  a  mile.  The  course  up  the  river  from  its  entrance  to  Fort 
Amsterdam  is  S.  E.  On  getting  within  this  point,  keep  the  eastern  shore  on 
board,  as  then,  all  the  \'.  ay  up,  until  you  reach  Paramaribo,  is  the  deepest  water. 
About  tliree  miles  within  the  point  you  have  only  2  fathoms  at  low  water  ;  and 
from  thence  to  within  two  miles  of  the  entrance  of  the  Comowinie,  may  not  be 
improperly  termed  the  lower  bar ;  it  extends  about  three  miles. 

In  appi*oaching  close  to  Brams  Point  from  the  sea,  you  xnay  naturally,  if  a 
stranger,  apprehend  danger  from  several  wrecks  that  lie  on  the  point;  but  these 
are  old  vessels  that  have  been  brought  from  Paramaribo,  and  placed  there  as 
break-waters ;  as,  at  some  seasons,  the  sea  breaks  upon  the  point. 

Having  reached  nearly  to  the  entrance  of  the  Cai  .awina,  which  branches  from 
the  Surinam,  you  must  be  very  particular  in  guarding  against  the  flood,  which 
sets  strongly  into  the  Camawina,  and  which,  without  great  precaution,  would 
set  you  on  a  spit  of  sand,  which  extends  from  Fort  Amsterdam,  almost  across 
the  Camawina.  On  the  other  hand,  you  must  guard  against  some  sunken  rocks, 
which  lie  a  Uitle  below  Fort  Amsterdam,  on  the  western  shore,  so  as  to  keep  be- 
tweei  the  two.  Having  passed  the  flag-staff,  you  will  have  eighteen  feet  at  low 
water ;  and  from  thence  to  the  edge  of  the  bar,  the  deepest  water  in  the  river.. 
It  is  here  that  those  ships  complete  their  lading,  which  draw  too  much  water  ta 
pass  over  ♦he  bar. 

At  Tiger's  Hole  there  are  6  fathoms  of  water,  which  is  just  above  Governor 
Frederici's  Plantation,  called  Voorburg;  here  you  will  then  have  a  leading  wind 
up ;  and,  by  keeping  three-quarters  over  to  the  eastern  shore,  you  will  have  the 
deepest  water,  eleven  feet  at  low,  and  eighteen  feet  at  high  water.  You  may 
anchor  abreast  of  Paramaribo,  in  4  fathoms,  observing  that  the  deepest  water  ia. 
close  to  the  town. 

We  shall  conclude  by  these  general  descriptions  .'—That  you  will  be  near,  and  ta 
%vindward  of  the  Marowyne,  Avith  coarse  ground ;  that,  hauling  to  the  northward, 
the  ground  will  gradually  become  finer  and  the  water  deeper ;  and,  to  leeward 
of  the  shoals,  a  sandy  coast  and  ooze.  That  it  is  necessary  to  keep  on  the  edge. 
of  the  bank,  in  from  2<^  to  3  fathoms ;  and,  in  the  rainy  season,  rather  anchor 
too  soon ;  or,  if  you  are  in  the  least  doubtful,  or  should  you  sail  a  few  leagues  t(X 
Reward,  even  in  a  fast-sailing  vessel,  you  would  have  much  difficulty  and  lengtlv 


470' 


BLUNr's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


of  time  in  turning  bs,ck,  and  that,  in  observing  these  precautions,  you  cannot  fail 
to  make  the  land  properly. 

Is  is  high  water,  at  full  and  change,  at  Brams  Point,  at  six  o'clock ;  the  flood 
Hets  to  the  westward,  ebb  to  the  eastward. 


Particular  Description  of  and  Directions  for  British  Guyana. 

The  River  Btrbice,  as  a  harbour,  is  of  minor  importance,  there  being  a  depth 
of  only  seven  feet  on  the  bar  at  low  ebbs.  This  bar  is  two  leagues  from  the  en- 
trance of  ti  •>  rive.-,  The  low  isle  within,  called  Crab  Isle,  is  so  named  from  the 
number  of    !,d".iabs  w.hich  are  found  upon  it. 

New-Am-i'vrcis;!'  'he  chief  town,  is  situated  at  two  miles  above  Cr"b  Island, 
on  the  eastei  :  ank  It  is  intersected  by  canals,  which  have  the  advantage  of 
the  tide.  Tht  .  ■vernir"  ,t,  and  public  houses  are  of  brick,  and  handsomely 
built.    The  entrance  is  y.  lected  by  three  batteries. 

The  River  Deraarara  is  half  a  league  wide  at  the  entrance,  but  is  obsti  acted 
by  a  bar,  on  which  there  are  only  from  9  to  11  feet  at  low  tide,  and  18  or  19  at 
high  water.  The  chief  town  is  Georgetown,  formerly  Stabrook,  on  the  east 
bank  of  the  river,  at  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  fort  defending  the  entrance. 

The  great  River  Esscquebo,  to  the  westward  of  the  Demarar..,  is  much  ob- 
structed by  shoals  and  islands,  and  little  frequented.  The  best  idea  of  it  may 
be  gained  from  an  inspection  of  the  charts.  There  is  no  town  of  conS'equence 
upon  this  river. 


Directions  for  the  River  Demarara. 

.  A  flat  mud  bank  stretches  off  from  each  point  of  the  river,  at  least  three  leagues 
into  the  sea,  on  many  parts  of  which  there  are  not  more  than  from  8  to  12  feet 
of  water,  at  high  water.  Between  these  banks  lie  the  entrance  and  bar  of  the 
river,  on  which,  at  the  highest  spring-tides,  there  is  not  more  than  20  feet  of  wa- 
ter, but  all  very  soft  ground.  If  the  wind  should  cast  out,  be  very  cautious,  and 
not  stand  too  near  the  west  bank,  as  the  flood-tide  sets  on  it,  in  an  oblique  direc- 
tion, and  the  ground  in  some  parts  is  hard  sand;  but  you  may  borrow  on  the 
east  bank  at  pleasure,  lieing  all  soft  mud,  and  receive  no  hurt  by  touching  the 
ground. 

About  six  miles  up,  on  the  west  side  of  the  river,  stands  a  remarkable  lofty 
tree  by  itself,  the  branches  of  which  appear  to  be  withered ;  and  three  or  four 
miles  above  that,  there  is  a  tuft  of  trees  or  bush,  which  is  very  remarkable. 

In  running  into  this  river,  the  leading-mark  is  to  keep  the  withered  tree  on 
the  westernmost  part  of  the  tuft  or  bush,  which  will  carry  you  in  the  best  water, 
and  about  mid-channel,  steering  at  the  same  time  S.  by  W.  The  breadth  of  the 
channel  going  in  is  about  two  miles,  shoaling  graduallj'  on  each  side.  The  best 
anchoring  ground  is  within  the  east  point,  in  4  fathoms  at  low  water,  soft  mud; 
keep  the  eastern  shore  on  board,  the  western  side  being  flat  and  shoal :  it  is  ne- 
cessary to  weigh  the  anchors  once  every  ten  days,  or  they  will  bury  so  much  as 
to  be  supposed  to  be  lost. 


Remarks  and  Directions  for  Demarara  and  Berbice, /row  the  Chart  of 

Captain  Thomas  Walker,  1798. 

Vessels  coming  from  Europe  or  North  America  should  run  within  a  degree  and 
a  half,  or  two  degrees,  of  the  longitude  of  Barbadoes,  in  consequence  of  which 
they  will  have  a  steady  wind,  and  avoid  the  currents  which  prevail  from  Cape 


_/^ 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAHT  PILOT. 


471 


rou  cannot  fuil 
ock ;  the  flood 


Orange  to  the  nouths  of  the  Amazon.  Many  have  run  in  three  or  four  degrceH 
of  latitude,  and  frequently  suffered  severely  by  meeting  strong  currents  and  light 
winds,  by  which  their  voyages  have  been  prolonged  to  80  or  ao  days,  which 
might  have  been  avoided  by  this  track. 

Vessels  directly  from  Europe  to  Demarara  should  not  be  too  anxious  to  make 
the  land,  but  endfeavour  to  fall  in  with  it  to  the  westward  of  Ber'jice  River,  as 
the  coast  to  windward  of  it  is  dangerous  in  several  places,  and  with  great  reason 
to  suppose  that  banks  exist  which  occasionally  shift.  ,  It  is  easily  to  be  known 
when  a  vessel  is  to  leeward  of  Berbice,  by  seeing  houses  and  plantations.  To 
windward  all  is  bush,  for  cultivation  is  not  yet  begun,  and  you  are  sure  to  meet 
colony  craft  parsing  and  repassing.  The  figure  of  the  land,  from  time  to  time, 
alters  much,  by  washing  away  in  many  places,  and  in  others  growing  farther  out 
into  the  sea.  There  are  some  white  houses  between  the  Berbice  and  the  Cou- 
rantin ;  and  this  part  of  the  coast  is  dangerous,  owing  to  a  sand-bank  that  lies 
to  the  N.  E.  of  Devil's  Creek,  on  which  the  sea  sometimes  breaks. 

Vessels  coming  from  the  Islands  should  keep  well  to  the  eastward,  and  by  no 
means  give  up  their  easting  until  they  get  well  to  the  south  rd  ;  for  the  strong 
current  that  runs  through  the  Gulf  of  Paria  is  apt  to  set  the  '\  t,  3«ward ;  more 
particularly  when  they  are  to  the  southward  of  Tobago ;  and  ;..  ire  so  during 
the  rainy  season,  when  the  freshets  set  so  strong  out  of  tb'.  c  large  rivers.  This 
precaution  is  also  necessary  during  the  hurricane  months,  v.'hen  the  winds  are 
commonly  light.  In  lat.  7°  40',  or  thereabout,  the  water  botins  to  colour.  The 
vessel  may  then  steer  in  south,  to  lat.  7°,  and  have  5  fathoi.iS  by  the  lead,  when 
she  may  be  certain  to  be  abreast  of  Leguan  Island,  \o  ^\i&  Essequebo ;  haul  in, 
upon  this,  for  the  eastern  coast,  sounding  frequently,  i  .ot  constantly,  in  order 
to  avoid  the  Essequebo  Banks.  After  getting  well  in,  keep  the  coast  aboard, 
with  3|  or  Si  fathoms  of  water.  A  look-out  must  be  made  for  a  remarkable 
bush  vlI  the  mouth  of  Mahaica  Creek,  Avhich  when  brought  south,  the  vessel 
must  haul  off  gradually,  to  avoid  a  bank  which  advances  or  runs  out  from  Point 
Spirit  and  Corobana  Point.  Fort  William  Frederick,  on  Corobana  Point,  will 
then  soon  be  perceived  bearing  S.  i  W.  Mahaica  Bush  is  now  the  only  one  remain- 
ing on  this  coast,  that  of  Corobana  having  been  cut  down ;  and  Point  Spirit, 
which  was  formerly  a  leading  object,  having  been  so  encroached  upon,  as  hard- 
ly to  be  noticed  from  a  ship.  When  you  bring  the  shipping  open  of  the  flag- 
staff of  the  fort,  bear  up,  and  stand  in  that  direction.  There  is  good  and  safe 
anchorage  off  the  fort,  which  all  vessels  arc  obliged  to  take,  and  report  to  the 
commandant.  It  is  not  adviscable  for  ships  of  U  large  draught  attempting  to 
pass  the  bar  until  the  water  is  tolerably  high ;  because,  when  the  vessel  drags 
through  the  mud,  she  will,  in  a  measure,  be  ungovernable,  and  apt  to  fall  on  the 
lee-4vard  bank,  which  is  vexatious  and  dangerous :  large  ships  running  down  the 
coast,  should  sail  in  3  fathoms  of  water,  not  less,  which  is  about  three  leagues 
distant.  Vessels  drawing  less  water  may  keep  in  2i  fathoms.  Off  Corrobana 
Point,  in  2i  fathoms,  you  cac.inot  discern  any  land  to  the  westward,  until  such 
time  as  you  get  Demarara  River  open. 

About  eighty  leagues  in  the  latitude  of  Demarara,  you  will  have  35  fathoms 
of  water.  Ships  obliged  to  anchor  on  the  outside  of  the  bar  will  have  good  an- 
chorage in  4  fathoms,  the  fort  bearing  S.  S.  W. 

The  dangerous  banks,  which  lie  off  the  mouth  of  the  great  River  Essequebo, 
make  it  adviseable  for  all  vessels  bound  for  it,  to  anchor  off  Demarara,  and,  if 
possible,  get  a  pilot.  If  she  cannot  procure  one,  the  lead  must  constantly  be 
kept  going ;  and  whenever  hard  ground  is  found,  be  sure  that  danger  is  at  hand, 
for  the  channel  is  in  soft  mud.  The  course  is  S.  S.  W.  between  the  outer  bank, 
which  properly  is  the  continuation  of  the  Sugar  Bank  and  the  Leguan  Bank  ; 
keeping  as  your  mark,  right  ahead,  a  bush  or  clump  of  trees,  called  Millburn's 
Bush :  after  running  a  certain  distance,  edge  off,  and  proceed  up  the  river. 

Should  vessels  bound  to  Demarara  have  the  misfortune  to  fall  to  leeward  of 
it,  they  may  coast  it  up,  even  from  the  Oronbco,  by  observing  never  to  tack  off 
from  the  land  more  than  in  5  fathoms  of  water ;  for,  if  they  stand  farther  off, 
they  may  be  sure  to  be  swept  away  by  a  strong  gulf-current.  By  making  short 
iacks,  in  the  depth  recommended,  there  is  a  chance  of  land-winds  and  smooth 


47a 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


Dvater ;  and  the  coast  is  of  a  soft  muddy  bottom  all  the  way.  Within  this  depth, 
towards  Dcmarara,  it  becomea  dangerous,  by  the  projection  of  the  Essequebu 
Banks.  It  therefore  is  not  prudent  to  come  nearer  than  in  4  fathoms  of  water ; 
observing  to  anchor  on  the  flood,  or  it  may  set  you  in  among  the  banlis.  If  you 
can  jay  S.  E.  with  the  ebb  tide,  it  will  carry  the  vessel  clear  of  every  thing ;  ob- 
serving when  she  deepens  her  water,  to  keep  away  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  until  she 
gets  to  the  eastward  of  Demarara,  when  she  must  follow  the  directions  already 
given  for  the  river. 

"  The  land  about  Berbice  may  be  known  by  its  appearing  like  a  number  of  is- 
lands. Vessels  standing  for  this  river  may  run  in  as  far  as  3i  fathoms,  when  they 
will  see  houses  on  the  coast :  on  this  they  must  haul  their  wind  until  they  open 
the  eastern  channel  of  the  river,  then  steer  in  S.  h  W.  From  the  east  point 
there  runs  out  a  large  shell-bank,  upon  which  the  sea  breaks  very  high.  Do  not 
be  alarmed,  for  the  water  is  very  bold  close  to  it.  On  the  west  side  there  is 
another  large  bank,  but  of  mud,  upon  the  edge  of  which  there  is  not  more  than  2 
fathoms  at  high  water ;  indeed  during  the  springs  it  is  quite  dry  for  nearly  six 
miles  from  the  shore.  The  bar  is  about  two  leagues  distant  from  the  mouth  of 
the  river :  it  has,  at  low  water,  7j|  feet  upon  it,  and  is  remarkable  for  the  sound- 
ings varying  from  sand  to  mud.  Sufficient  water  to  pass  it  is  absolutely  necessa- 
ry to  be  attended  to,  and  the  lead  not  neglected.  Crab  Island  makes  two  chan- 
nels in  the  mouth  of  the  river ;  the  lee  one  has  generally  been  thought  sufficient 
only  for  small  craft,  or  vessels  drawing  little  water ;  but  lately  a  vessel  of  thir- 
teen feet  draught  has  passed :  however,  it  is  adviseable  for  all  ships  to  use  the 
eastern  one :  it  is  deeper,  and  anchorage  can  be  easier  chosen.  On  sailing  in, 
keep  Crab  Island  just  open  with  the  pomt  of  Canje  :  by  this  she  will  avoid  the 
middle  ground,  or  bank,  which  runs  out  from  Crab  Island. 

"  Captain  Thompson  remarks  that,  at  the  entrance  of  Demerara  River  an 
E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W.  moon  makes  full  sea,  and  that  the  highest  spring-tide 
does  not  rise  more  than  8  or  9  feet.  With  respect  to  tides,  we  found  that,  in 
1796,  the  neaps  were,  generally,  from  8  to  9  feet.  The  springs  rose  11,  and,  in 
the  month  of  September,  just  before  the  equinox,  they  rose  from  14  to  15  feet. 
In  September,  1797,  again,  and  nearly  on  the  same  days,  the  tide  rose  almost  16 
feet ;  a  circumstance  never  known  before,  but  accounted  for  from  the  freshes  and 
a  strong  northerly  wind  which  prevailed  at  both  times.  In  March,  1798,  they 
Were  very  high.  The  flood  sets  strongly  to  the  westward,  and  the  ebb  to  the 
eastward. 

It  is  generally  high  water  upvn  Demarara  Bar  at  half-past  four  o'clock,  and  at 
Corroban  Point,  at  flve  o'clock. 


Remarks  on  making  Demarara,  Sic.  by  Capt.  Robert  Fildes^  of 

Liverpool. 

•'  Vessels  frequently  fall  to  leeward  of  Demarara,  and  it  has  generally  taken  some 
time  as  well  as  caused  much  anxiety  to  regain  their  lost  ground ;  as  the  mouth 
of  the  Essequebo  is,  to  strangers,  rather  dangerous.  A  commander  may  always 
know  when  he  is  to  windward  or  leeward  of  Demarara ;  for,  if  he  makes  the 
land  to  the  westward,  when  he  is  to  the  northward  of  7°  12',  he  may  be  sure  he 
is  to  leeward,  and  should  then  haul  on  a  bowline  directly  to  the  southward  and 
eastward.  If  land  be  not  seen  to  the  westward,  when  in  the  parallel  of  7°  12' 
you  may  be  certain  of  being  to  %vindward  of  Demarara. 

'♦  Those  who  unfortunately,  fall  to  leeward,  should  find  which  way  the  current 
is  running ;  for,  if  it  be  flood,  the  Essequebo  tide  will  carry  them  still  farther  to 
leeward ;  they  should,  therefore,  immediately  come  to  an  anchor,  and  wait  for 
the  Essequebo  ebb,  which  runs  strongly  and  long  to  the  northward,  particularly 
after  very  heavy  rain&.  By  weighing  at  the  first  of  the  ebb,  and  taking,  by  turn" 
ing  to  windward  in  its  stream,  the  advantage  of  the  whole  tide,  a  vessel  ma^ 
always  gain  offing,  sufficient  to  fetch  Demerara  Bar,  on  the  larboard  tack;  parti' 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  FILOT. 


475 


bin  this  depth, 
the  Essequebo 
onris  of  water ; 
banks.  If  you 
ery  thing ;  ob- 
oms,  until  she 
ections  already 

I  number  of  is- 
ims,  when  they 
until  they  open 
the  east  point 
high.  Do  not 
ist  side  there  h 
lot  more  than  2 
r  for  nearly  six 
n  the  mouth  of 
J  for  the  sound- 
>lutely  necessa- 
lakes  two  chan- 
.ought  sufficient 
1  vessel  of  thir- 
ships  to  Hse  the 
On  sailing  in, 
e  will  avoid  the 

erara  River  an 

;hest  spring-tide 

I  found  that,  in 

rose  11,  and,  in 

ji  14  to  15  feet. 

rose  almost  16 

the  freshes  and 

irch,  1798,  they 

the  ebb  to  the 

o'clock,  and  at 


Fildesj   of 


ally  taken  some 
;  as  the  mouth 
^er  may  always 
he  makes  the 
nay  be  sure  he 
jouthward  and 
fallel  of  70  12' 

V3.y  the  current 

still  farther  to 
Ir,  and  wait  for 
Id,  particularly 

aking,  by  turn* 
a  vessel  may 

Wtack;  parti- 


cularly if  sho  come  to  an  anchor  again  when  the  ehh  Is  done,  and  then  make  a 
long  iitretch  to  the  eastward,  with  the  Arst  of  the  following  ebb.  This  method 
the  droggers  all  pursue,  and  find  little  or  no  more  difficulty  in  going  from  th^ 
Poumaron  to  the  Denierara,  than  in  going  from  the  Demarara  to  the  Pou- 
maron. 

"  I  had  an  opportunity  of  acquiring  this  useful  fact  by  an  excursion  I  made  in 
a  d'rogger  from  Demcrara  to  the  leeward  of  the  Esscquibo,  and  wondered  that 
the  common  practice  of  all  the  droggers  had  not  been  before  noticed.  By  con- 
sulting the  Chart,  you  will  see  the  reasonableness  of  the  practice ;  for  the  Esse- 
quebo ebb  runs  far  to  seaward  ;  and,  in  a  great  measure,  preserves  the  direction 
of  the  river,  particularly  near  its  mouth." 


Spanish  or  Colombian  Guyana. 

The  most  remarkable  feature  of  Spanish  Guyana  is  the  course  of  the  Riref 
Oronoco.  A  great  part  of  the  upper  portion  of  this  river  was  explored,  in  tho 
year  1800,  by  the  celebrated  Humboldt,  who  proved  its  communication  with  the 
Rio  Negro,  and,  consequently,  with  the  Amazon.  The  mouths  of  the  Oronoco 
are  of  dangerous  navigation,  and  require  an  expert  pilot.  Seven  of  them  aro 
navigable  ;  but  the  chief  is  the  Great  Mouth,  (Boca  Grande,  or  Boca  de  Nnrios,) 
which  is  about  six  miles  in  width.  This  is  most  to  the  southward,  and  in  the 
direct  course  of  the  river.  The  isles  of  the  Oronoco,  or  rather  its  Delta,  which 
is  of  prodigious  extent,  are  possessed  by  the  Guaraunas  and  the  Mariusas,  two 
independent  tribes  of  Indians.  The  northern  part,  opposite  to  Trinidad,  is  over- 
flowed from  the  middle  of  January  to  the  middle  of  June  ;  and,  during  this  season, 
the  Guaraunas  dwell  upon  the  palm-trees  with  which  it  is  covered. 

The  seven  navigable  channels  into  the  river,  already  mentioned,  have  been 
described  as  follow,  commencing  northward  : 

The  flrst  of  the  navigable  mouths  is  the  Grand  Manamo,  in  the  Gulf  of  Faria : 
the  second  is  the  Cano,  or  Canal,  of  Pedernales,  three  leagues  south  of  the  Sol- 
dier's Island,  at  the  entrance  of  the  Gulf :  it  is  fit  for  long-boats  only:  the  third 
mouth,  named  Capura,  is  seven  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Pedernales,  and,  like- 
wise, is  fit  only  for  boats :  the  fourth,  named  Macareo,  is  six  leagues  eastward 
from  Capura,  and  is  navigable  by  small  craft:  Mariusas,  the  fifth,  is  12  leagues 
to  the  south-eastward  of  the  fourth  ;  but  between  are  many  mouths  navigable 
when  the  river  is  high :  the  sixth  mouth  is  eighteen  leagues  to  the  southward  of 
Mariusas,  and  is  navigable  for  small  vessels  ;  the  seventh,  Boca  Grande,  or  Greajt 
Mouth,  is  eif^ht  leagues  S.  E.  from  the  sixth  ;  its  breadth  is  six  miles  between 
the  islands  Congrejo,  (Crab  Isles,)  on  the  N.  W.  and  Point  Barma,  on  the  S.  E. 
but  the  navigable  channel  is  not  above  three  miles,  and  is  crossed  by  a  bar,  with 
17  feet  at  low  water  :  the  approach  to  this  entrance  is  dangerous,  from  the  shoals 
running  off  seven  miles  eustward  from  Congrejo  Island,  and  two  miles  northward 
fro/n  Point  Barma. 

The  Flux  and  Reflur  of  the  Tide,  are  felt  in  the  month  of  April,  when  the  ri- 
ver is  lowest,  beyond  Angostura,  at  a  distance  of  more  than  85  leagues  in-land. 
At  the  confluence  of  the  Carony,  60  leagues  from  the  coast,  the  water  rises  one 
foot  three  inches.  These  oscillations  of  the  surface  of  the  river,  this  atupension 
of  its  course,  must  not  be  confounded  with  a  tide  that  flows  up.  At  the  Great 
Mouth,  near  Cape  Barma,  the  tide  rises  to  a  height  of  two  or  three  feet ;  but 
farther  to  the  N.  W.  towards  and  in  the  Gulf  of  Paria,  the  tides  rise  7,  8,  and 
even  10  feet.  Such  is  the  eflect  of  the  configuration  of  the  coast,  and  of  the 
obstacles  presented  by  the  Bocas  del  Drago,  &tc. 

The  Currents  on  the  whole  of  this  coast  run  from  Cape  Orange  towards  the 
northwest ;  and  the  variations  which  the  fresh  waters  of  the  Oronoco  produce  in 
the  force  of  the  general  current,  and  in  the  transparency  and  the  reflected  colour 
of  the  sea,  rarely  extend  farther  than  three  or  four  leagues  E.  N.  E.  of  Congrejo, 
or  Crab  Island.    The  waters  in  the  Gulf  of  Paria  are  salt,  though  in  a  less  de- 

^60 


474 


UI.UNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PIUOT. 


free  than  Iiitho  rciit  of  the  Cnribheaii  Sea,  attiibated  lo  IheBmall  mouths  {Bo- 
eaa  Chicas)  of  the  Oronoco,  and  tl.^  mass  of  water  furnished  by  the  River  Gua- 
rapiche.     From  theai*.  reasons  there  are  no  salt-plts  on  this  const. 

The  n:ivi(;.itina  of  the  river,  whether  vesseU  inter  by  the  Grcnt  Mouth, or  by 
the  hibyrinth  of  the  Bocas  Chicns,  requires  various  precautions,  acconiing  as  tho 
l)ed  may  be  full  oi-  the  watera  vtry  low.  The  regularity  of  thcst^  periodical  rinings 
of  (he  Oronoco  h«s  long  been  an  object  of  iidmiratiori  to  travi-llers,  as  the  over- 
flowings of  the  Nile  furnished  the  philosophers  of  antiquity  with  a  problem  diffi- 
cult to  solve.  The  cause  is  similar,  and  acts  erjually  on  all  the  rivers  that  take 
their  rise  in  the  torrid  zone.  After  the  vernal  equuiox,  the  cessation  of  the  breezes 
announces  the  season  of  rains.  The  increase  of  the  rivers  is  in  proportion  to  the 
quantity  of  water  that  falls  in  the  difierent  regions.  This  quantity,  in  the  centra 
of  the  forests  of  the  upper  Oronoco,  and  the  Rio  Negro,  uppeared  to  me  to  ex- 
tend 90  or  100  inches  annually.  The  following  is  the  usual  progress  of  the  oscil- 
iations  of  the  Oronoco.  Immediately  after  the  vernal  equinox,  (the  people  say 
on  the  25th  of  March,)  the  commenevment  of  the  rising  is  perceived.  It  i5,  at 
first,  only  an  inch  in  twenty  four-hours ;  s/utietimes  the  river  again  sinks  in 
April:  it  attains  its  maximum,  or  greatest  height,  in  July  ;  remains /u2/,  (at  the 
same  Jeviil.)  from  the  end  of  July  till  the  Slith  of  August,  and  then  decreases  pro- 
gressively, Sut  more  slowly,  than  it  increased.  It  is  at  its  minimum^  or  least  depth, 
m  January  and  February. 

The  River  Amazon,  according  to  the  information  which  I  obtained  on  its 
banks,  is  much  less  regular  in  tht*  periods  of  its  oscillations  than  the  Oronoco ;  it 
generally  begins,  however,  to  increase  in  December,  and  attains  its  greatest  height 
m  March.  It  sinks  from  the  month  of  May,  and  is  at  the  lowest  height  in  the 
months  of  July  and  August,  at  the  time  when  the  Lower  Oronoco  inumkitesall 
the  surrounding  land.  As  no  river  of  America  can  cross  tlie  equator  from  south 
to  north,  on  account  of  the  general  contiguratiiui  of  the  ground,  the  risings  of  the 
Oronoco  have  an  influence  on  the  Amazon  ;  but  those  of  the  Amazon  do  not  al- 
ter the  progress  of  the  oscillations  of  the  Oronoco.  It  results  from  these  data, 
that,  in  the  two  basins  of  the  Amazon,  and  the  Oronoco,  the  concave  and. convex 
summits  of  the  curve  of  progressive  increase  and  decrease  correspoful  very  regu- 
larly \vith  each  other,  since  they  exhibit  the  difference  of  six  months  which  re- 
sults from  the  situation  of  the  rivers  in  opposite  hemispheres.  The  commence- 
ment of  the  risings  only  isi  less  tardy  in  the  Oronoco.  This  river  increases  sensi- 
bly so  soon  as  the  sun  has  crossed  the  equator;  in  the  Amazon,  on  the  contrary, 
the  risings  do  not  commence  till  twr  months  after  the  equinox. 

Foreign  pilots  admit  ninety-feet  fo^r  the  ordinary  rise  in  the  Lower  Oronoco. 
M.  ()e  Pons,  who  has,  in  general,  collected  very  accurate  notions  during  his  stay 
at  CaraccHS,  fixes  it  at  13  fathoms.  The  heights  naturally  vary,  according  to 
the  breadth  of  the  bed,  and  the  ninnber  of  tributary  streams  which  the  princip«l 
trunk  receives.  It  appears  that  the  mean  rise  at  Angostura  does  not  exceed 
twenty-four  or  twenty-five  feet. 

When  vessels,  that  draw  much  water,  S'lil  up  towards  Angostura,  in  the  month* 
of  January  and  February,  by  reason  of  the  sea-breeze  and  the  tide,  they  run  the 
risk  of  taking  the  ground.  The  navigable  channel  often  ch  mges  its  breadth  and 
direction  ;  and  no  buoy  has  yet  been  laid  down  to  indicate  any  deposit  of  earth 
formed  in  tlic  bed  of  the  river,  where  the  waters  liave  lust  their  original  velocity. 


.   General  Description  ofj  and  Directions  forf  the  Coast  of  Guyana, 
[from  the  *•  Derrotero  de  las  Antillas"  Sfc] 

Tb-J  Coast  which  extends  from  Cape  North,  to  the  Great  Mouth  of  the  Oronoco, 
whicais  in  latitude  8°  41',  N.  is  very  low,  and  soundings  off  it  reach  out  a  great  way 
to  sea.  This  circumstance  is  the  only  mean  of  ascertaining  with  csrtainty  the 
proximity.    Any  other  mode  of  recoguising  tho  coast  is  very  difficult ;  for,  in  the 


—  '        ■«: 


\Ltxi.,  ^  .  .^.' 


BLUMS  AMCRICAM  C0A3T  PILOT. 


4?5 


clearest  duj,  it  U  not  possible  to  discern  the  land  at  Are  leat^ies  ofti  and  the  na* 
tiire  of  the  const  itself  impedes  a  nearer  approach  than  two  li^agues,  on  accour  * 
of  the  shoalness  of  tlie  water,  and  the  banks  of  s<ind  and  mud,  of  great  extent, 
with  wliich  it  is  obstructed. 

The  harbours  on  this  coast  are  the  mouths  of  rivers  only,  ail  of  which  hav« 
bars,  more  or  less  uavi^alile  ;  and,  to  enter,  a  practical  knowledge  \<^  necesiiHry. 

From  North  Cape  to  Cape  Cussiipana,  the  land  h  very  low  and  wet,  and  co« 
vered  with  a  thick  wood,  without  any  other  mark  to  ret'o^nise  it  by,  than  the  liiil 
or  Mount  of  Mayes;  a  kind  of  plHtfonn,  insulated  and  hilly,  whir.h  may  be  seen, 
in  clear  weather,  .-.t  the  distance  of  five  or  six  leajcues.  Its  latitude  is  3'^  5'  N. 
Tne  soundings  hereabout  extend  far  out  to  sua.  You  may  sail  along  the  coast 
at  three  leaj^ues  from  it,  and  at  that  distancu  have  from  8  to  10  fathoms.  At  10 
leagues  from  laud,  the  depth  increases  to  Ift  and  20  fathoms ;  and,  at  15  and  20 
leagues  distance,  there  are  from  '25  to  30  fathoms,  with  bottom  of  soft  clay,  or 
of  flue  sand  of  various  colours.  The  current  runs  N.  N.  W.  but,  close  to  tha 
shore,  varies  according  to  the  tide,  of  tvhich  the  fluod  rtms  W.  N.  W.  and  the  ebb 
N.  E.  at  the  rate  of  about  three  miles  an  hour.  It  flows  at  six  o'clock,  on  full 
and  change  days,  and  rises  from  twelve  to  fifteen  feet. 

The  general  velocity  of  the  current,  outside  the  influence  of  the  tides,  may  b» 
estimated  at  two  miles  an  hour.  On  this  account,  in  making  this  coast,  it  is  aU 
ways  Dcccssary  to  make  it  in  less  latitude  (i.  e.  more  to  the  southward)  than  that 
of  your  port  of  destination.  It  is  the  custom  of  those  bound  to  Cayenne,  to  eu" 
deavour  to  strike  soundings  about  N.  E.  from  Cape  North,  and  20  or  SO  leagues 
from  it,  at  which  distance  they  find  from  40  to  &0  fathoms  of  water. 

Cnpe  iJassepour  lies  iii  latitude  3^  50' :  near  it  there  is  a  great  bank,of  clay, 
which  extends  5  or  6  leagues  out  to  sea:  its  extent  from  N.  to  B.  is  about  4 
leagues;  with 4  and  H  fathoms  of  water  upon  it.  On  account  of  this,  vessels 
from  the  southward,  makin;;  this  cape,  ought  not  to  run  along  the  shore  nearer 
than  5  or  6  leagues.  After  having  passed  this  bank.  Cape  Orange  bears  W.  by 
N.  distant  from  6  to  7  leagues ;  and  although,  from  this  place,  it  cannot  be  dis- 
covered,  yet  its  proximity  may  be  ascertained  without  any  doubt :  for,  steering 
North,  you  will  deepen  the  water  from  5  to  10  fathoms  in  running  less  than  a 
mile ;  when  you  find  this  latter  depth,  you  ought  to  steer  W.  N.  W.  (or  even 
West,  if  necessary.)  to  preserve  tlie  same  depth.  It  is  to  be  remarked  that,when 
a  vessel  is  near  Cape  Cassepour,  and  in  5  fathoms  of  water,  she  ought  not  to  b« 
steered  so  as  to  maiotain  that  depLh  ;  but  that  it  Is  necessary  to  steer  North,  or 
even  N.  by  C.  until  you  get  7  fatlioms  of  water,  when  you  will  no  longer  be  able 
to  see  the  land  from  the  deck,  as  it  is  very  low.  After  steering  tlie  same  course 
for  a  short  time,  in  7  fathoms,  you  may  steer  N.  N.  W.  and  N-  W.  with  the 
same  de(^th :  with  these  courses  you  will  near  Cape  Orange  insensibly,  and  make 
it  at  the  distance  of  2  or  3  leagues,  when  in  8  or  U  fathoms  of  water.  Between 
this  capr  and  Cape  Cassepour  the  river  of  that  name  disembogues  itself. 

Cape  (grange  may  he  ktuiwn  by  a  Cut  Point,  (Punta  Cortndo,)  or  rather,  more 
properly,  a  point  which  seems  to  have  been  cut  or  shortened,  which  is  on  the 
«ide  next  the  sea,  and  is  the  highest  land  to  the  S.  E.  of  the  same  cape  ;  and  also 
by  the  Silver  Mountains,  which  form  various  peaks,  appearing  insulated  and  de< 
tached  the  one  from  the  otiier,  and  which  are  the  mure  remarkable,  as  they  are 
the  first  high  land  discovered  in  coming  from  Cape  North.  Approaching  Cape 
Orange,  you  may  discover  various  remarkable  hills  over  the  point  which  formf. 
the  entrance  of  the  River  Oyapoc. 

Beyond  Cape  Orange  the  coast  forms  a  bay,  of  4  leagues  in  breadth,  in  whitl* 
the  great  river  Oyapoc  disembogues  itself,  and  into  which  also  two  other  rivers 
of  small  consideration  discharge  their  waters ;  tba  one  to  the  eastward  is  named 
Coripe,  and  that  to  the  westward  is  called  Wanary.  The  Silver  Mountains  serve 
not  only  a^  a  mark  for  Cape  Orange,  but  also  for  this  bay;  because,  beginning  to 
rise  on  the  west  coast,  in  a  swampy  country,  they  cuipedowa  alupst  to  the  edge 
of  the  sea. 

The  River  Oyapoc  is  two  leagues  wide  at  its  entrance ;  and  you  may  anchor  in 
it  in  4  fathoms,  clayey  bottom,  keeping  Wanary  west,  at  the  distance  of  three- 
quarters  of  a  league.     Olount  Lutas  isaimall,  but  tolerably  high  hill,  on  the 


476 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


fioint  which  dirides  th«  rivers  Ouanari  and  Oyapoc.  One  league  up  the  river 
Oyapnc)  there  is  a  low  inland,  named  lata  de  Venados,  wiiich  is  coveied  by  very 
high  tides.  You  may  pass  to  the  westward  of  it,  where  you  will  have  4  fathoms 
of  water  close  to  the  shore.  After  the  Isla  de  Venados,  there  are  some  other 
small  islands,  which  do  not  embarrass  the  navigation  of  the  river.  After  sailing 
up  the  river,  5  or  6  leagues,  there  is  a  fine  bay,  which  serves  as  a  harbour,  and 
in  which  you  may  anchor  in  4,  5,  or  6  fathoms  of  water,  and  as  near  the  shore 
as  you  please.     At  this  place  there  is  a  small  fort  and  a  country-house. 

About  1-  leagues  to  the  N.  W.  from  the  River  Oyapoc  is  the  River  Apronak, 
which,  also,  is  of  some  importance.  Its  entrance  is  two  leagues  wide,  and  it  has 
from  3  to  4  fathoms  of  water.  The  lands  >vhich  form  it  are  very  low,  marshy, 
iMfl't  covered  with  mangroves.  Two  leagues  up  the  river,  and  in  the  middle  of 
it,  Ihere  is  a  low  and  very  narrow  island,  of  about  half  a  mile  in  length,  covered 
•w'tu  v»o','d,  and  named  Fisherman's  Island.  To  the  north  of  it  a  bank  of  sand 
utrtt^hes  out  move  than  two  miles,  to  which  it  is  necessary  to  give  a  birth  when 
you  enter  into  the  river.  There  is  a  channel  on  each  side  of  the  island.  The 
one  to  the  east^-.'ard  lias  3  fathoms  of  water,  but  that  to  the  '.vestvvard  not  more 
than  2  fathoms. 

Five  leaj/ws  North  of  the  mouth  of  this  river  there  is  a  tolerably  high  bare 
Island,  in  shape  resembling  a  half-orange :  it  is  called  the  Great  Constable,  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  a  smaller  island,  which  lies  half  a  league  from  it  nearer  the  coast, 
almost  level  with  the  water,  and  which  is  called  the  Little  Constable.*  The 
Great  Constable  (or  Gunner)  may  be  discovered  8  or  1 0  leagues  out  at  sea. 
Vesselc  bound  to  Cayenne  direct  their  course  to  these  islands  from  Cape  Orange, 
from  off  which  they  be-ar  N.  N.  W.  distant  18  leagues.  In  this  passage  it  is 
necessary  to  keep  in  8  or  9  fathoms.  The  Great  Constable  has  3  fathoms  of 
water  ail  round  it,  and  is  very  clean.  The  Little  one  lies  K.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  VV. 
with  the  Great  one.  You  may  p'ass  between  them  in  8  or  9  fathoms  of  water, 
observing  to  keep  within  two  musket-sliots  of  the  Great  one,  and  to  leave  the 
little  one  on  the  larboard  hand. 

N.  N.  W.  from  the  Great  Constable  there  is  a  rocky  shoal,  which  some  place 
at  two,  others  at  three,  and  others  even  at  four  miles  distance  from  it.  To  Avoid 
this  shoal  is  the  principal  reason  for  passing  between  the  Constables.  The 
French  ship  of  war  La  Gironde,  bound  to  Cayenne,  in  1738,  after  having  passed 
between  the  Coubtablcs,  leaving  the  (ireat  one  on  the  starboard  hand,  steered  N. 
W.  by  W.  for  tlie  Mother  and  Daughters,  and  soon  aftor  discovered  the  water 
breaking  upon  what  appeared  to  he  rocks,  which  bore  N.  by  VV.  about  a  league 
distant.  At  the  same  time  the  Great  Constable  bore  K.  by  S.  and  the  Little 
one  S.  by  E.  From  this  it  jippears  that  the  shoal  lies  N.  39°  W.  true,  from  the 
Great  Constable,  at  tiic  distance  of  lour  miles.  Its  extent  may  be  about  five 
cable's  length,  and  it  ties  N.  W.  and  S.  E. 

The  course  from  the  Great  Constable,  to  pass  outside  the  Mother  and  Daugh- 
ters, which  lie  about  6  leagues  distant  from  it,  is  N.  W.  by  \V. ;  with  this  course 
you  will  slioalen  the  water,  and  will  not  have  more  than  6  fathoms  near  the  Ma- 
lingre,  (one  of  the  Mother  and  Daughter,)  near  the  N.  N.  E.  part  of  which  you 
may  anchor  in  3  fathoms,  at  low  water. 

Four  leaguesf  N.  W.  from  the  Apronak  is  Kan  Rivor,  and  from  it  to  the  River 
Orapu  is  reckoned  5  leagues  more.  The  River  Orapu  separates  Cayenue  on 
the  east  from  the  main  hind.  It  is  a  fine  liver,  its  entrance  being  about  a  league 
wide,  and  has  3  fathoms,  at  low  Avater.  The  banks  are  pretty  high,  and  cover- 
ed with  large  trees. 

CAYENNE. — The  Island  of  Caj'enne  is  about  six  leagues  in  extent,  from 
north  to  south,  and  its  greatest  breadth  may  be  three  or  four  leagues.  On  the 
north  it  is  bounded  by  the  sea;  on  the  west  by  the  River  Cayenne;  on  the  east 
by  the  River  Orapu  ;  and  on  the  south,  by  a  branch  formed  by  the  rivers  Orapu 
and  Cayenne,  which  here  unite. 

The  City  and  Fortress  of  Cayenne  are  flituated  on  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  is- 

'''  These  are  the  GiinneiD  of  the  English  charta. 

i  The  original  says  six  leagues,  which  distance  appears  to  be  too  srcat. 


BLUNTS    AMKRICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


477 


W.  point  of  the  is- 


land, the  norlh  part  of  which  haa  vurioiis  hills  a.id  emiacnces,  but  the  south  part 
is  low  and  wet,  in  th»^  season  of  1  lie  rains.  Tiie  Inrhonr  is  to  the  westward  of  the 
city,  in  the  month  of  the  River  Cayenne.  The  hills,  or  high  lands,  of  which  we 
have  spoken,  are  named  Dn  Pont,  llumontah(»,  Monnt  Joly,  and  Mahuri ;  and 
ail  these  are  close  to  the  nttrtli  coast.  A  little  inland  are  those  of  liadnel,  Ti- 
gres,  Papaguay,  and  Mathory ;  and  upon  the  hanks  of  the  Onya,  that  of  the 
Franciscans. 

At  about  a  league,  or  league  and  a  half,  or  something  more,  from  the  Island  of 
Cayenne,  are  the  Islets  of  llemire:  they  are  five  in  number,  vi/..  liie  CItild,  the 
Father,  the  Mother,  and  the  Two  Daughters.  The  last  are  two  little  rocks,  very 
close  together,  and  about  a  mile  distant  from  the  Mother,  to  the  E.  S.  K.  The 
Father  is  the  largest  of  all  these  islets,  and  hears  E.  N.  K.  true,  from  Monnt 
Joly,  ou  the  eastern  coast  of  Caycniu;  Island  4  miles  distant.  It  may  be  about 
half  a  mile  long,  E.  S.  E.  and  VV.  N.  W. 

The  Child  is  very  small,  and  lies  about  a  league  E.  N.  E.  from  Mount  Re- 
inontabo,  and  four  miles  from  the  Father.  You  may  pass  without  them  at  three 
miles,  or  a  little  less  distance,  without  .•».ny  risk,-  and  with  a  certainty  of  not 
having  less  than  5  or  6  fat'^oms  of  water.  Betwixt  these  islets  and  the  coast  there 
is  about  fifteen  feet  of  water,  at  low  ebb,  but  the  passage  is  dangerous, 
on  account  of  a  rocky  shoal  which  lies  ia  mid-channel,  almost  even  with  the  sur- 
face of  thu  water.  There  is  also  a  shallow,  which  extends  between  the  Father  and 
Child:  this  shoal  lies  N.  N.  VV.,from  Mount  Joly,  and  nearly  East  from  Moiu)t 
Remontabo.  Round  theMalingrc  the  bottom  is  very  shallow,  and  it  is  said  that 
a  reef  stretches  out  about  two  cables'  length  N.  N.  W.  from  its  western  ex- 
tremity. 

Besides  these  isles  there  is  another,  at  about  three  leagues  to  the  W.  N.  W.  of 
the  Child,  called  tiie  Forlorn  Hope,  or  the  Lost  Child,  which  lies  nearly  on  the 
meridian  of  the  town  of  Cayenne,  at  the  distance  of  seven  miles. 

In  order  to  enter  Cayenne,  it  is  first  absolutely  necessary  to  anciior  between 
Malingre  and  the  Forlorn  Hope,  botli  for  the  purpose  of  receiving  a  pilot,  and  to 
wait  for  the  tide,  so  as  to  pass  the  shallows  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour.  Be- 
tween the  Child  and  the  Father,  the  anchorage  is  very  incommodious  ;  ftu'  the 
N.  E.  winds  raise  mucii  sea  in  it,  which,  catching  vessels  on  the  beam,  makes 
them  roll  as  if  in  a  storm.  An  anchor  is  very  apt  to  drag,  and  it  is  necessary 
to  have  another  all  ready  to  h't  go;  and  often  three  or  four  days  elapse,  in  which 
no  communication  can  be  had  with  the  shore.  In  this  anchorage  there  are  from 
twenty  to  twenty-five  feet,  at  low  water,  the  bottom  being  of  clay. 

In  general,  vessels  anchor  to  the  E.  N.  E. — N.  B.  or  North,  of  the  Child,  at  the 
distance  of  two  miles;  but  there  are  some  who  anchor  to  the  K.  N.  E.  or  N.  E. 
of  the  Forlorn  Hope,  at  about  two  miles  distance  from  it.  From  the  cast  to  the 
south  of  the  latter,  the  depth  of  water  diminishes  to  15,  12,  or  even  10  feet;  and 
you  must  take  good  care  not  to  pia<  e  yourself  between  it  and  the  coast,  because 
there  is  even  less  depth.  In  thia  place  the  tides  rise  seven  or  eight  feet ;  and  it  is 
liiijh-water,  on  full  and  change  days,  at  five  o'clock. 

N.  W.  by  N.  from  the  Forlorn  Hope,  at  the  distance  of  eight  or  nine  leagues, 
are  three  small  islets,  which  are  so  placed  as  to  form  a  triangle.  They  are  called 
the  Devil's  Islets.  They  form  a  fine  and  well-sheltered  harbour.  The  best  an- 
chorage at  them  is  E.  S.  E.  of  the  most  southerly  islet,  in  &  or  0  fathoms  of  wa- 
t<!r,  with  a  hard  clay  bottom,  at  about  a  musket-shot's  distance  fram  the  islet. 
In  this  islet  there  is  a  reservoir  of  fresh  water  ;  but  it  is  necessary  to  get  the  wa- 
ter with  small  kegs,  which  can  be  carried,  as  the  roughness  and  steepness  of  the 
ground  render  it  impossible  to  get  it  with  large  casks. 

Between  these  islets  and  the  Forlorn  Hope  there  are  Ji,  G,  and  7  fathoms  of  wa- 
ter, at  three  or  four  leagues  from  the  land :  near  the  Devil's  Isicts  are  9,  and 
leaving  them  to  the  S.  or  S.  E.  you  will  have  iO,  30,  and  40  fathoms,  increasing 
your  depth  us  you  increase  your  distance  from  the  islets. 

Six  leagues  N.  W.  from  Cayenne  is  the  River  Macourin.  The  coast  between 
is  low,  level,  and  has  many  liandaome  houses.  At  fifteen  leagues  N.  W.  frona 
Macouria  is  the  River  Sinamari :  this  river  aObrds  excellent  anchorage,  at  two 
or  three  leagues  from  its  mouth,  in  which  vessels  are  not  incommoded  by  th» 
sea,  bec«u8e  the  bottom  1$  of  vary  soft  clay. 


478 


BLUNT»S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


Nineteen  leagues  N.  W.  by  W.  from  Sinanmri  is  the  River  Maroni,  which  U 
very  considerable;  its  entrance  is  about  two  Ifaguesi  wide,  but  is  of  difficult  ac- 
cess, on  arcouBt  of  the  shoals  of  sand  and  clay  which  are  in  it.  In  this  space 
of  coast  the  rivKrs  Cinamnri,  Aracouho,  and  Amanibo,  disembogue  themselves, 
and  shoals  and  banks  of  clay  stre t,«:li  out,  about  three  leagues  to  sea,  along  the 
whole  of  it;  so  that  it  is  indisptinsably  necessary  to  keep  at  least  four  leagues 
from  tiie  land,  In  5  nr  6  fathoms  of  water.  It  is  also  to  be  remarked  that,  be- 
t»veen  Cayenne  and  the  Maroni,  there  are  many  single  or  detached  rocks,  some 
al  which  are  even  two  leagues  from  the  shore. 

From  the  River  Maroni  to  Surinam  Uiver,  the  distance  is  about  thirty-foup 
leagues;  the  coast  tends  W.  by  N.  it  is  all  so  much  alike,  and  so  low,  that  it  it 
totally  impossilile  to  distinguish  one  part  from  another,  so  as  to  rectify  the  posi- 
tion of  any  vessel :  hence  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  make  the  Maroni,  in  or- 
der to  be  sure  of  f>dling  in  correctly  with  Surinam.  This  roast,  also,  has  various 
banks  of  clay  stretching  from  it,  which  render  it  necessary  to  keep  at  four  leagues 
off  it.  The  entrance  of  the  River  Surinam,  when  coming  from  the  eastward, 
may  be  known  by  its  Crow's-bill  point,  which  may  be  seen  at  four  or  five  leagues 
off,  and  is  the  only  land  which,  under  these  circumstances,  can  be  discerned. 
It  has  a  beacon  ou  it,  as  before  mentioned,  page  46G.  The  east  shore  is  that 
which  is  first  seen;  the  opposite  cannot  be  discerned  until  you  are  in  the  en- 
trance of  the  river,  it  being  remarkably  low  land,  which,  as  it  were,  hides  itself 
to  the  west. 

To  anchor  in  the  entrance,  it  is  necessary  to  bring  the  cast  point,  of  which  we 
have  spoken,  to  bear  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  S.  at  the  distance  of  three  leagues,  an- 
choring then  in  3i  fathoms,  at  lo»v  water.  The  tides  flow  at  six  o'clock,  on  full 
and  change  days;  and  at  the  anchorage,  at  the  entrance  of  the  river,  the  flood- 
tide  sets  from  S.  to  S.  S.  E.  and  the  ebb  from  N.  to  N.  N.  \V.  The  least  water 
is  two  fathoms  and  a  hiilf.  When  the  wind  is  favourable  for  enterinR  the  river, 
iteer  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  E.  until  the  east  point  bears  east;  then  steer  E.  S.  E.  to 
anchor  in  5  fathoms,  on  a  clay  bottom,  at  a  quarter  of  a  league  from  th'  east 
point,  which  is  named  Brams  Point,  with  that  point  bearing  N.  9<^W. 

At  one  league  up  the  River  Surinum  the  River  Commowinie  discha  s  its 
waters  into  it.  The  entrance  is  defended  by  Fort  Amsterdam,  on  the  sou.ii  side, 
and  by  a  battery,  which  is  on  the  north  part,  so  situated  as  to  defend  the  River 
Surinam  also :  on  the  wt;St  bank  of  the  latter  there  are  various  batteries,  which 
•cross  their  fires  with  those  of  Fort  Amsterdam.  A  little  farther  up  is  the  bar, 
upon  which  there  is  not  more  than  two  fathoms  at  low  water.  After  passin; 
this,  y«u  find,  on  the  west  shore,  Fort  Zeeland,  and  the  town  of  Paramaribo, 
which  is  the  c.ipital  of  this  colony. 

Four  leagues  west  of  the  River  Surinam,  the  Rivers  Saramncaand  Copename 
enter  the  sea  by  the  same  mouth.  Their  banks  are  uniuh^'biled,  and  in  their 
mouth  are  two  fathoms  at  low  water. 

Ten  leagues  west  from  thes-e  rivers,  the  River  Corentine  disembogues  itself. 
Its  entrance  is  about  a  league  in  width,  but  of  difficult  access,  on  account  of  the 
sand-banks  off  it.  which  extend  three  leagues  out  to  sea.  Within  the  river  are 
three  islands,  which  are  very  clean,  running  north  and  south  ;  between  you  may 
anchor  in  5  fathoms  of  water.  The  entrnuce  and  anchorage  are  on  the  west 
•ide.  The  small  river  Nikesu  also  discharges  its  waters  by  the  same  mouth  ai 
tlie  Corentine. 

Five  leagues  west  from  the  Corentine  is  the  river  of  Berbi  o  :  its  mouth  i» 
about  a  league  in  witllh  ;  its  banks  are  very  low,  and  covered  with  troes.  In  the 
very  mouth  lies  Crab  Island,  which  divides  the  entrance  into  two  channels.  This 
island  is  low  and  bushy,  and  is  surrounded  by  a  bank  of  sand  and  clay,  which  pre- 
vents a  nearer  approach  to  il  than  at  l<-ast  a  long  musUet-shot.  It  id  in  length  about 
a  raile,  and  half  a  mile  in  breadth.  The  bank  which  surrounds  i*  stretches  about 
a  league  to  the  northward  of  it.  A  rocky  shoal  extends  from  its  east  point,  to 
.which  if  is  necessary  to  give  much  attention,  as  you  must  enter  by  the  east  chan- 
nel, on  the  bar  of  which  there  is  not  more  than  two  fathoms,  at  low  water. 

[pirectionM  for  ihe  Dtmarura  have  already  been  full j  given  in  pages  470  to  471.] 

The  Rive/-  Essequebo  is  very  large;  its  mouth  is  three  miles  wide,  but  it  ii 
/uU  of  islands  and  shoals,  which  olMtruct  the  passage,  and  render  it  difficult  tf. 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAIC  COAST  PILOT. 


479 


\Iaroni,  ivhlch  U 
is  of  difficult  ac- 
it.  In  this  space 
)gue  themselves, 
to  sen,  along  the 
oast  four  leagues 
marked  that,  be- 
ched  rocka,  some 


nboiit  thirty-four 
o  low,  that  it  it 
>  rectify  the  posi. 
le  Maroni,  in  or- 
,  also,  has  various 
?ep  at  four  leagues 
im  the  eastward, 
i»ur  or  five  leagues 
an  be  discerned, 
ast  shore  is  that 
u  are  in  the  en- 
were,  hides  itself 

•oint,  of  which  we 
hree  leagues,  an- 
ix  o'clock,  on  full 
li  river,  the  llood- 

The  least  water 
fintering  the  river, 

steer  E.  S.  E.  to 
uc  from  th'    east 
.  9OW. 
lie  discha      s  its 

on  the  sou.  ii  side, 
defend  the  River 

batteries,  which 
ler  up  is  the  bar, 

r.     After  passin; 

n  of  Paramaribo, 

:a  and  Copename 
led,  and  in  their 

Isembogues  itself. 

^n  account  of  the 

lin  the  river  are 

[etween  you  may 

ire  on   the  west 

same  mouth  as 

In :  its  mouth  ii 
li  troes.  In  the 
Ichannels.  This 
Iclay,  which  pre- 
In  ill  length  about 
stretches  about 
Its  east  point,  to 
ly  the  east chan- 
low  water. 
rea  470  lo  47t.] 
fwide,  but  it  i» 
er  it  difficult  tr 


enter ;  and  although  the  islands  and  shoals  form  channels  deep  enough  for  »\V 
classes  of  vessels,  yet  it  requires  m\ich  care  and  practical  knowledge  to  enter 
them.  The  islands  are  numerous,  low,  and  bushy ;  the  greater  part  of  them 
are  a  league  or  two  in  length,  but  very  narrow,  and  lie  north  and  south.  There 
are  two  principal  channels  for  entering  the  river,  viz.  the  east  and  west  channels: 
the  eastern  is  the  best ;  there  are  in  it  from  15  to  35  fatliomij.  After  having 
passed  the  islands  at  the  entrance,  you  will  see  another  cluster  of  them  which 
it  is  proper  to  pass  on  the  east  side,  where  they  form  so  deep  a  channel  that 
there  are  from  40  to  70  fathoms  in  it. 

At  ten  leagues  from  the  entrance,  the  fort  is  situated,  upon  an  island  in  the 
middle  of  the  river.  The  town,  or  rather  village,  is  situated  on  the  west  side, 
in  front  of  the  fort. 

At  fifteen  or  sixteen  leagues  from  the  River  Essequebo  is  the  mouth,  of  the 
River  Pauroma,  which  is  about  half  a  league  in  width ;  its  shore.i  are  low,  and 
covered  with  trees.  The  east  point  of  the  entrance  is  named  Cape  Nassau. 
Six  leagues  up  the  river,  011  the  eastern  side,  is  the  fort  named  New  Ze'-land ; 
the  town  or  village,  named  Middleburg,  stands  at  the  foot  of  the  fort. 

From  the  River  Pauroma  the  coast  tends,  without  varying  its  appearance, 
to  Coco  Point,  wliieh  forms  a  bay  to  the  south,  and  to  the  westward  has  some 
very  high  coco-nut  trees,  which  are  the  only  onus  on  ail  this  coast,  on  which,  io- 
general,  there  is  nothing  else  than  mangroves. 

From  Coco  Point,  you  ought  to  steer  N.  W.  and  N.  N.  W.  with  the  precau- 
tion 0^  keeping  in  5  or  6  fathoms  of  Avater,  in  order  t(»  shun  a  bank  of  mud, 
which  lies  about  two  and  a  half  leagues  N.  N.  W.  from  it.  Having  run  twelve 
leagues  on  these  courses,  you  nill  sec  the  mouth  of  the  Guayama,  situate  in  8^ 
25' N.  latitude.  The  making  of  this  mouth  is  very  necessary  for  those  who 
seek  the  great  entrance  of  the  Oronnco,  as  there  is  no  other  point  which  can  be 
used  with  certainty  as  a  mark,  arul  it  cannot  be  mistaken;  not  only  because  it  is- 
the  sole  entrance  or  opening  which  can  he  seen,  l)Ut  also  on  account  of  three  lit- 
tle hills  or  hillocks,  wliich  may  be  seen,  if  the  day  be  clear,  bearing  about  S.  W. 
at  some  distance  inland. 

N.  E.  fn»m  this  mouth,  about  thrpe  leagues  distant,  there  is  a  shoal  of  ..-e 
sand,  with  two  and  a  half  fathoms  of  water  on  it ;  and  to  avoid  it,  you  must 
take  good  care  not  to  shoab>n  the  water  more  tha.i  to  5  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

From  the  mouth  of  the  Guayama  the  coast  is  woody,  level,  and  low,  aiul  tends 
for  eight  leagues  about  N.  \V.  t(»  the  point  of  iMocomoco;  after  which  comes 
the  coast  named  S  ibi'.neta,  which  tends  west  about  four  leagues:  if,  also,  is  cov- 
ered with  wood,  levol,  and  lower,  and  tbo  water  on  it  shallower,  than  the  for- 
mer. All  this  coast  is  bounded  by  a  shallow  bank  of  soft  clay  and  shells,  and 
sand,  with  clay  and  shells. 

RIVER  OliONOCO.— The  IsleCongrejo  (Crab  Island)  of  which  the  N.K. 
point  is  in  lat.  8*^  51' N.  has  a  shoal  of  hard  sand,  of  the  colour  of  ground  cof- 
fee, which  extends  six  leagues  from  its  eastern  part,  and  about  two  leagues  from 
the  northern  part  of  the  island;  and  this  renders  the  entrance  of  the  river  dan- 
fierous  :  for  between  it  and  the  coast  of  Sabaneta  is  formed  the  Bar  of  the  Grand 
Entrance  of  the  River  Onuioco,  the  depth  of  which  at  low  water  is  15  feet,  and 
»t  high  water  only  18  feet;  the  bottrun  soft  clay.  The  bar  is  about  three  leagues 
in  extent  from  N.  to  S.  and  a  little  leas  from  E.  to  W. 

The  coast,  which  is  rather  higher  than  the  former,  though  still  Avoody,  tends 
S.  W.  from  Point  Sabaneta,  about  three  leagues,  and  ends  at  Cape  B'lrme^,  which 
forms  the  boundary  of  this  line  of  coast ;  as  aRvr  this  it  forms  a  great  l>ay,  into 
which  the  river  empties  itself. 

The  coast  which  follows,  from  Isla  de  Congrejo  to  leeward,  is  very  distinct 
from  the  former  ;  low,  and  all  broken,  forming  different  mouths,  by  which  tho 
small  branches  of  the  Oronoco  discharge  their  waters.  They  are  fit  for  small 
vessels  only,  which  have  pilots,  because  they  are  full  of  dangerous  sand-banks. 


480 


ijlunt's 


A  M  K  R  r  C  A  N     C ' ,  '  3  f    I'  I !  .O  T . 


'Directions  for  finding  ilie   Grand  Mouth,  of  the  '^'r.  cr  O?onoco,  and 

v..  ii'.!-.  .    ^    -  Sailing  info  it    ,  ,»;  "        »  ^  t     '. 

•  After  what  has  been  stated,  wc  need  oi)ly  say  that,  having  recognized  the  Boca 
de  Guayama,  you  may  run  along  the  coast  at  the  distance  of  five  or  six  leagues, 
in  4  or  5  fathoms,  in  soft  clayey  bottom,  until, Cape  Barma  bears  S.  by  W.  when 
you  may  shape  your  course  for  the  bar;  still,  however,  keeping  t'le  lead  going, 
in  order  to  preserve  the  soft  clayey  bottom,  although  even  in  shallow  water;  as 
it  is  better  to  ^et  ashore  on  the  clayey  mud,  than  to  run  the  risk  of  falling  on  the 
shoal  of  hard  sand  oflf  Isia  Congrejo.  If  you  catch  that  qualit'-  of  soundings, 
(hard  sand,  like  ground  coffee,)  you  must  immediately  steer  south,  to  recover 
the  soft  bottom.  Following  these  directions,  you  will  near  Cape  Barma ;  and, 
when  about  two  leagues  from  it,  you  will  see  a  large  inland  covered  with  trees, 
which  is  that  called  Isia  de  Congrejo ;  and,  having  passed  the  bar,  yoti  will  begin 
to  augment  the  depth  of  water  until  you  find  5  fathoms.  When  it  is  proper  to 
steer  from  S.  W.  by  S.  to  S.  W.  by  W.  to  keep  mid-channel,  understanding  that, 
if  you  are  in  L  Mian  5  fathoms,  soft  bott')m,  you  are  too  much  on  the  main- 
land-side of  the  channel,  and  must  steer  more  to  the  westward  to  recover  the 
mid-channel ;  but,  if  you  find  less  than  5  fathoms  of  water,  Avith  a  sand  bottom, 
you  are  getting  upon  the  shoal  off  the  Isia  de  Congrejo  ;  and,  in  this  case,  must 
steer  more  to  the  southward  to  recover  the  mid-channel.  With  these  directions, 
and  attention  to  the  soundings,  you  may  run  in,  until  the  P.  E.  point  of  Isia  de 
Congrejo  covers  some  woody  islets,  which  lie  off  the  N.  E.  pf>int  of  it;  you  may 
then  run  close  to  the  island,  and  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathom?'  oT  water,  the  bottom 
soft  clayey  mud.  Moor  with  a  cable  ashore,  and,  in  thia  situation,  every  vessel 
will  be  secure  and  well-sheltered  ;  and  it  is  necessary,  at  this  place,  to  wait  for  a 
pilot,  to  conduct  any  vessel  up  the  river;  for,  without  one,  they  may  be  certain 
of  experiencing  some  misfortune  or  other.  A  pilot  raay  be  engaged  from  any  of 
the  small  vessels  of  the  cr-    >try. 

On  all  this  coast  the  tides  ire  rapid  and  irregular.  Thcj  are  faid  to  be  felt  as 
high  up  the  river  as  Imataca,  a  village  of  the  Gnaraunas  iiaians.  As  t'»  the  times 
of  high  water,  all  that  the  pilots  remark  is,  that,  at  one-t!r>rd  ebb  at  the  rising  of 
the  moon,  the  water  of  the  Oronoco  incn-ases  from  April  to  September,  and  de- 
creases during  the  other  months,  of  the  year.  It  is  navigable  for  large  vessels  up 
to  the  capital  only,  between  ;*  onths  of  May  and  December;  during  the  rest 
of  the  year,  they  must  stop  ■  ■^n  leagues  farther  down,  not  being  able  to  as- 
cend hifijher,  in  coajoquence  ^  u  har  or  pass,  namerl  del  Mamo,  which,  at  that 
time,  has  not  more  than  4  or  5  feet  of  water  on  it;  and  large  merch'mt-vessels, 
therefore,  miist  employ  lighters  to  load  and  unload  them,  which,  although  there 
are  plenty  of  them,  occasions  much  expense. 

The  magnetic  variation,  at  the  Mouth  of  the  River,  is  4°  flast. 

From  this  mouth  the  Delta  of  the  River  Oronoco  extends  itself  to  the  interior 
of  the  Gulf  of  Paria,  rendering  this  portion  of  tlie  coast  useless,  either  for  trade 
or  navigation,  being  no  more  than  a  labyrinth  of  low  muddy  isles,  which  are 
drowned  in  the  season  of  the  floods,  in  the  river.  The  number  of  them  is  un- 
known ;  and  it  is  not  easy  to  make  a  plan  of  them,  for  they  are  all  formed  by 
the  various  channels  into  which  the  Oronoco  divides,  and  which  may  be  consi- 
dered as  useless  for  any  thing,  except  boats  and  canoes.  The  termination  of 
this  coast  may  thus  be  fixed  at  the  Grand  Mouth  of  the  Oronoco,  which  we  have 
described ;  and  we  now  proceed  to  make  some  General  Remarks,  as  foUotv  : 


General  Remarks  on  the  Coast  of  Guyana- 

Although  the  wh«le  of  this  coast  may  have  no  great  errors  in  the  situation  on 
the  charts,  yet  it  must  be  supposed  that  every  point  of  it  is  accurately  placed  : 
for  instance,  Point  Bariraa  had  an  error  of  22  minutes  of  latitude  in  its  position 


'^k^..  X 


^  -^^i*" 


blunt's  amkrican  co/.sr  phot. 


yi 


Ovonoco,  and 

-.  vT      •■ 

ognized  the  Boca 
ire  or  six  leagues, 
rsS.  by  W.  when 
r  t'le  lead  going, 
hallow  water ;  as 
of  falling  on  the 
ty  of  soundings, 
south,  to  recoter 
ipe  Barma ;  and, 
^ered  with  trees, 
ir,  you  will  begin 
an  it  is  proper  to 
derstanding  that, 
uch  on  the  main- 
d  to  recover  the 
■  h  a  sand  bottom, 
a  this  case,  must 
1  these  directions, 
.  point  of  Isla  de 
it  of  it;  you  may 
irater,  the  bottom 
tion,  every  vessel 
ace,  to  wait  for  a 
y  may  be  certain 
aged  from  any  of 

;  j?aid  to  be  felt  as 
As  t'^  the  times 
)b  at  the  rising  of 
)tember,  and  de- 
r  large  vessels  up 
during  the  rest 
being  able  to  as- 
0,  Avhirh,  at  that 
erch-mt-vessels, 
,  altiiough  there 


elf  to  the  interior 
either  for  tride 
lisles,  which  are 
of  them  is  un- 
\re  all  formed  by 
|i  may  be  consi- 
termination  of 
I,  which  we  have 
Is,  as  follow  : 


[he  situation  on 
[trntely  placed  : 
in  its  position 


The  points  which  have  been  obscfved  are  inserted  in  the  table  of  latitudes  and 
ionj^itudes  :— 

The  mariner  may  confide  in  the  situation  of  these  points ;  and  it  is  necessary 
to  remark,  also,  that,  on  a  coast,  of  which  there  is  scarcely  a  possibility  of  recog- 
nising the  different  places,  except  by  the  latitude,  it  is  very  easy  to  ma'«e  a  mis- 
take, and  get  to  leeward  of  your  port  of  destination.  From  this  reason,  it  i» 
proper  to  run  down  the  coast  from  windward  to  leeward,  taking  good  care  to 
make  the  various  places  out  distinctly.  It  is  also  proper  to  examine  the  mouths, 
or  embochures,  of  the  rivers ;  and  what  renders  this  more  and  more  necessary 
is,  that,  in  the  season  of  the  rains,  there  are  often  days  on  which  the  latitude 
cannot  be  observed. 

Sd.  If  such  is  the  uncertainty  as  to  the  positions  of  the  points,  it  is  no  less  in 
respect  of  the  soundings  at  the  mouths  or  entrances  of  the  rivers.  It  ought 
always  to  be  remembered  that  all  these  rivers  form  bars,  and  that  the  bars  gene- 
lally  have  very  little  water  on  them.  The  best  way  for  those  who  have  not  a 
practical  knowledge  of  these  entrances,  is  either  to  obtain  such  by  means  of 
their  boats,  or  not  to  enter  a  river  without  a  pilot. 

8d.  The  wind,  which  from  £.  N.  E.  to  N.  E.  or  E.  S.  E.  and  IS.  E.  always 
prevails  upon  this  coast,  and  the  current,  which  ahrays  runs  W.  N.  W.  make 
the  lesser  latitude  to  windward ;  and  hence,  on  all  this  coast,  it  is  very  easy  to 
increase  your  north  latitude  but  almost  impossible  to  decrease  it. 

4th.  The  general  current,  of  which  we  have  spoken,  must  be  confounded 
with  that  which  is  produced  by  the  tides,  the  influence  of  which  is  princtpally 
elt  near  the  coast ;  and  twelve  leagues  out  at  sea,  or  9  fathoms  of  water,  may 
be  considered  as  their  limits;  as,. at  that  distance  out  at  sea,  no  other  current 
but  the  general  one  is  felt ;  but,  between  that  and  the  land,  no  other  currents 
than  those  caused  by  the  tides  are  felt.  The  flood  sets  towards  the  coast,  and 
the  ebb  away  from  it :  the  tide  flows  on  full  and  change  days,  at  Cape  North,  j«t 
7  o'clock  ;  on  the  coast  of  Mayez,  at  6  o'clock  ;  at  Cayenne,  at  5  o'clock  ;  and, 
at  Surinam,  at  6  o'clock. 

5th.  In  addition  to  what  has  already  been  said,  it  is  adviseable  for  vessels  be  ^nd 
from  Europe  to  Guyana,  to  makr  the  land  about  the  coast  of  Mayez;  shunian^ 
the  vicinity  of  the  River  Amazon,  because  it  produces  vast  swellings,  which  ?i'i^. 
felt  a  great  distance  out  at  sea  ;  and  which,  near  the  mouth  of  the  river,  rri  tc 
prove  most  fatal  to  a  vessel.  This  phenomenon,  which  is  known  in  the  *5&i  ,.-3, 
and  other  great  rivers,  by  the  name  of  a  Bore,  is  here  called  the  Pororoca,  ?5 
already  noticed  in  page  465. 

6th.  Having  made  and  recognised  the  coast,  it  is  necessary  to  ruii  alorsg  it, 
keeping  the  lead  constantly  going,  so  as  to  keep  in  7,  r  or  9  fathoms,  taktr  j 
care  not  to  get  into  less  water,  from  fear  of  striking  on  soi.ie  of  the  shoals  whicn 
stretch  out  from  the  coast ;  and  although  with  that  depth,  in  some  place»,  the 
land  cannot  be  seen  from  the  vessel,  even  in  clear  weather,  this  can  occasion 
little  or  no  inconvenience  ;  as,  when  near  the  latitude  of  your  place  of  destina- 
tion, it  is  easy  to  put  the  vessel  on  the  larboard  tack,  and  run  in  to  sight  the  land. 
Nor  is  there  any  difficulty  in  examining  it,  when  necessary,  Jis  vou  liave  only  to 
keep  more  away  on  the  larboard  tack ;  but,  in  such  cases,  "t  is  very  necessary 
to  be  extremely  careful  with  the  lead.  When  night  comes  on,  and  you  are  nea 
the  port  of  your  destinatioa,  it  is  proper  to  anchor ;  as  also  when  it  is  ca'm, 
within  the  limits  of  the  tides,  (described  before.)  as  the  current,  or  set  of  the 
flood-tide,  carries  a  vessel  towards  the  coast. 

7th.  Getting  aground  on  this  coast  is  not  t;enerally  attended  with  much  dan- 
ger, as  the  bottom  is  always  of  clay,  more  or  less  soft.  Notwithstanding  this, 
no  one  ought  to  navigate  this  pa  ^  without  due  care,  as  ., siting  ashore  not  only 
causes  a  ios>s  of  time,  but  occasi  s  much  work  in  carryi^^  out  anchors,  Sac.  to 
get  a  vessel  oflT.  We  notice  he  .  hat,  even  when  a  vessel  is  in  the  regular  track, 
although  in  9  fathoms  of  water,  r  le  will  raise  the  mud,  as  if  ploughing  it  with 
her  keel.  This  may  cause  uneasm  ^ss  to  those  who  witness  such  a  thing  for  the 
first  time,  though  it  is  the  conseque.ice  of  a  very  natural  nauae. 

8th.  The  islands  of  Rerairo,  the  Constabii^s,  and  the  Health  Islands,  are  lhf« 
<'"'y  points  of  thii  coast  whi<:h  are  likely  to  cause  the  lois  of  a  vessel,  »f  it  gets 

61 


482 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


ashore  on  them.  In  order  to  avoid  this,  it  is  needful  to  pay  attention  to  the  cur- 
rents, that  they  do  not  drive  you  upon  them ;  and  not  to  attempt  to  pass  be- 
tween the  Gonstahles,  unless  with  a  free  wind;  with  the  contrary,  it  is  better  to 
anchor  at  three  leagues  from  them,  or  to  pass  outside  of  them,  taking  care  to 
give  the  shoal,  of  which  we  have  already  spoken,  a  sufficient  birth. 

9th.  On  the  whole  of  this  coast  there  are  no  other  harbours  than  those  form- 
ed by  the  mouths  of  rivers,  the  greater  part  of  which  require  practical  know- 
ledge to  enter  them,  on  account  of  the  bars  and  shallows  which  run  out  from 
all  of  them ;  but  as,  on  all  this  coast  storms  are  unknown,  and  there  is  not  the 
smallest  risk  in  anchoring  where  one  deems  it  to  be  necessai'y,  there  can  be  no 
necessity  to  run  rashly  for  one  of  these  anchorages,  but  rather  wait  at  anchor 
outside  for  a  pilot,  or  till  such  time  as  you  can  obtain  a  sufficient  practical  know- 
ledge of  the  place  by  means  of  your  boats ;  so  as  to  be  able  to  take  the  vessel 
in  safety  yourself. 

10th.  When  any  one  wants  to  beat  to  windward  on  this  coast,  or,  what  is  the 
same,  wishes  to  go  from  the  Oronoco  or  Surinam  to  Cayenne,  he  must  work 
along  the  coast,  with  the  ebb-tide,  in  from  3i  or  4  fathoms  water,  out  to  8  or  9 
fathoms :  for  though  you  may  be  shouldered  away  by  the  current  to  the  N.  E. 
you  will  gain  very  well  on  the  tack  to  the  S.  E.  or  E.  S.  E.  but  with  the  flood, 
it  is  necessary  to  anchor ;  for  then,  both  wind  and  current  being  against  you, 
you  will  irremediably  be  driven  upon  the  coa»t. 

11th.  Those  who  from  the  Antiilas  are  bound  to  any  port  in  Guyana,  ought 
to  keep  their  larboard  tacks  on  board,  until  in  a  convenient  latitude  to  make  the 
land  to  the  southward  of  their  port  of  destination,  which  ought  to  be  more  or 
less  to  the  southward,  according  to  the  practice  and  knowledge  of  the  navigator 
who  directs  the  vessel :  but,  upon  all  this  coast,  especially  from  Cayenne  to  the 
Oronoco,  even  the  most  experienced  are  unable  to  ascertain  the  places  where 
they  find  themselves ;  and  without  the  assistance  of  observations  for  latitude, 
and  of  prudent  conjectures  on  the  different  appearances  to  Avindward  and  lee- 
ward, they  would  often  comm'^  very  serious  mistakes. 

The  environs  of  Deraarara  are  the  parts  of  the  coast  easiest  known,  on  ac- 
count of  th«  trees  being  burnt  and  cut  down  to  clear  the  land  for  cultivation; 
and  where  these  trees  have  been  cleared  away,  there  are  clear  spots  or  gaps  in 
which  (as  already  stated)  houses,  &cc.  may  be  plainly  seen.  When  at  a  loss,  it 
is  best  to  anchor  till  you  can  clear  up  your  doubts  ;  as,  although  you  lose  the 
time  in  which  you  are  to  anchor,  yet  you  keep  still  to  windward,  which  is  what 
interests  you  most ;  and  which,  if  lost,  it  would  cost  you  much  time  and  labour 
to  recovtr. 

12th.  DEAD-RECKONING  in  Shoal  Water,  agon  the  Coast  of  Guyana,  &c. 
—As  the  greatest  uncertainty  in  the  attention  of  a  vessel  arises  from  the  errors 
in  the  dead-reckoning,  caused  by  currents,  to  diminish  such  errors,  and  render 
the  computation  more  coirect,  it  is  adviseable  to  take  off  the  log-chip  from  the 
log  -'ine,  and  to  substitute  a  leaden  weight,  weighing  4,  6,  or  8  pounds,  as  may 
be  judged  necessary :  this,  taking  the  bottom,  (when  the  log  is  hove  with  it,  in 
place  of  a  log-chip)  will  not  so  easily  follow  the  vessel,  or  be  influenced  by  cur- 
rents. Vy  this  mode  it  is  clear  that  the  log  will  show  the  whole  distance  which 
thv  ■  ^4s<;!  -uns,  whether  caused  by  winds  or  by  currents.  Then,  having  mucte 
i'ast  thf  !oi.j  line,  before  you  haul  it  in,  mark  the  bearing  of  it,  and  the  opposite 
point  Gi-  diivrtion  will  be  the  course  which  the  vessel  makes  good.  It  is  clear 
that,  bji  this  mode,  the  course  and  distance  ought  to  be  as  exactly  found  as  if 
no  current  existed.  If  you  heave  the  log  with  a  chip,  in  the  usual  manner,  as 
well  Hs  a  log  with  a  lead  attached  to  it,  and  compare  the  distance  by  it,  and  tho 
course  which  the  vessal  appears  to  make  by  compass,  with  th*^  distance  aimi 
course  found  by  the  proposed  method,  you  will  be  able  to  ascertain  the  direction 
»r^d  velocity  of  the  current. 


^'^ 


tention  to  the  cuv- 
impt  to  pass  b^* 
ary,  it  ia  better  to 
in,  taking  care  to 
:)irth. 

than  those  form- 
j  practical  know- 
lich  run  out  from 
I  there  is  not  the 
,  there  can  be  no 
er  wait  at  anchor 
li  practical  know- 
o  take  the  vessel 

st,  or,  what  is  the 
le,  he  must  work 
ter,  out  to  8  or  9 
•rent  to  the  N.  E. 
ut  with  the  flood, 
eing  against  you, 

in  Guyana,  ought 
itude  to  make  the 
ht  to  be  more  or 
e  of  the  navigator 
m  Cayenne  to  the 
the  places  where 
tions  for  latitude, 
indward  and  Icc- 

3t  known,  on  ac- 
A  for  cultivation; 
•  spots  or  gaps  in 
rVhen  at  a  loss,  it 
ugh  you  lose  thn 
rd,  which  is  what 
time  and  labour 


BLUNT'3    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT 


•-  ii.,\.  v  .• 


483 


CBAP.   ZVX. 


COAST  OF  BRAZIL— By  Bakon  Roussin. 


The  appearance  of  the  coast  of  Brazil  is  very  different.  From  the  island  of  ^ 
Santa  Catharina  up  to  Olinda  Point,  (sixty  leagues  north  of  Cape  Frio) 
the  land  is  very  high  and  woody,  and  can  be  discovered  in  fine  weather  from 
fifty  to  sixty  miles  distance,  and  consequently,  with  little  care  a  vessel  can  make 
land  without  danger.  North  of  this,  in  many  places,  the  land  is  very  low,  and 
not  to  be  perceived  from  that  distance,  as  for  example,  between  Espirito  Santo 
and  Mount  Pascal;  between  the  bay  of  Porto  Seguro  and  the  Bay  of  All  Saints  ; 
between  the  Torre  de  Gracia  de  Arila  and  Cape  St.  Augustine ;  and  finally, 
every  where  between  Oiinda  and  the  Island  of  Maranham :  In  all  these  places  the 
land  is  more  or  less  low,  few  mountains  can  be  perceived,  being  so  far  in  thj  in- 
terior. 

Sounding  in  general  is  of  very  little  service  to  indicate  the  distance  from  the 
land,  particularly  from  Point  Santa  Catharina  Island  up  to  Oiinda,  on  account  of 
the  great  depth,  even  at  a  short  distance  from  the  shore,  except  ir>  the  neighbour- 
hood of  the   Abrolhos.     It  may  be  generally  stated  that  the  depth  under  the 
following  parallels  is  nearly  this ;  70  fathoms  at  eighteen  leagues  distant  from 
the  lind  of  Santa  Catharina ;  40  f:ithoms  at  12  leagues  from  the  Paranagua;  50 
fathoms  at  12  leagues  east  from  the  island  of  San  Sebastian  ;  35  fathoms  at  5 
leagues  south-east  of  Joatinger  Point ;  77  fathoms  at  18  leagues  south-east  of  Rio 
Janerio  entrance  :  Finally,  more  than  60  fathoms  at  7  leagues  only  from  Cape 
Frio.    The  depth  of  the  sea  is  very  great  N.  E.  of  Cape  Frio,  for  at  30  leagues 
distant,  in  a  direction  E.  i  S.  of  Cape  St.  Thomas,   we   did  not  find  the  bot- 
tom even  with  100  fathoms.     Soundings  increase  again  E.  and  S.  E.  of  Abrol- 
hos; generally  speaking,  it  is  in  few  instances  not  to  be  depended  on,  that  a 
less  depth  than  100  fathoms  is  to  be  met  at  thirty  leagues  from  the  coast. 

No  bottom  is  to  be  met  even  with  200  fathoms,  eight  leagues  only  S.  E.  of  St. 
Salvadore,  nor  ut  twelve  miles  South  of  this,  although  at  a  distance  of  four 
miles,  there  are  but  SiO  fathoms;  and  finally,  E.  from  Tape  Morro  San  Palo, 
we  did  not  find  the  bottom  with  120  fathoms,  although  at  nine  leagues  distant. 
From  Bahia  to  Oiinda  the  coast  is  n(>t  less  bold,  for  at  nine  leagues  East  of 
Torre  de  Gracia  de  Avilia  the  sounding  is  over  130  fathoms  ;  at  the  same  dis- 
tunce  9  leagnes  East  of  the  bar  of  Itapierucu  it  ia  over  200  fathoms  ;  the  sound- 
ings are  over  190  fathoms  20  leagues  from  Rio  Real,  and  15  fathoms  are 
found  ten  leagues  East  of  Rio  San  Francisco.  Finally,  every  where  up  to  Per- 
nanibuco,  there  is  not  less  than  SO  to  40  fathoms  at  9  or  10  leagues  distant  from 
the  shore,  and  between  Oiinda  and  Pernambuco,  from  18  to  20  leagues  distant 
from  the  shore,  the  bottom  is  not  met  over  120  fathoms.  Though  the  soun- 
ding be  less  north  of  Oliuda,  yet  it  is  too  great  at  a  small  distance  to  be  of 
service. 

North  of  Cape  San  Roque,  the  land  being  more  low,  and  extending  into  the 
sea,  the  sounding  decreases  gradually  towards  the  shore. 

From  Monte  Melanci  t  up  to  the  village  of  Amufadas  there  are  but  15  fathoms 
at  16  leagues  distant,  and  farther  north  the  soundings  increase,  but  it  may  be 
taken  as  a  gineral  rule,  that  10  fathoms  are  to  be  met  with  at  the  distance  often 


484 


ULUNT  8  AMKRICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


to  twelve  miles,  between  Amuradas  and  Jericacoara.  Opposite  the  village  of  Ca- 
raca,  there  is  a  spot  where  twenty-four  to  twenty-five  feet  only  of  water  are  to 
be  met,  over  an  extent  of  three  leagues,  but  it  is  the  only  place  up  to  Maranham. 

The  coast  of  Brazil  offers  this  particular,  viz.  that  there  are  two  banks  or 
shoals  at  no  great  distance  from  the  shore,  the  first  of  which  is  not  far  distant 
from  the  land,  and  in  many  places  rises  over  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  in  some 
other  places  form  the  breakers  or  shallow  waters.  The  other  bank,  farther 
distant  from  the  shore,  is  not  equally  distant  any  where  :  It  cannot  be  stated  as 
forming  shallow  water,  but  it  is  a  fact  that  between  this  bank  and  the  former, 
there  is  a  deep  channel  separated  from  the  main  sea  by  this  bank  and  the  small 
islands  of  Figuera,  Castillo,  Guemado,  los  Alcatroses,  los  Abralhos.  Manuel 
Luis  Shoal  may  be  considered  as  the  prominent  point  of  this  second  bank. 

The  temperature  uf  Brazil  varies.  In  the  southern  latitudes  the  winter  is 
pretty  severe.  Frost  and  snow  are  not  uncommon  at  Rio  Grande.  The  sea- 
sons may  be  divided  into  two,  viz.  the  rainy  season  and  d^-y  season,  the  last  of 
which  is  from  September  to  February.  The  rainy  season  continues  from  March 
to  September,  but  the  only  months  in  fact  which  may  be  considered  as  rainy  are 
May,  June  and  July. 

On  the  Brazil  coast  die  south  monsoon  is  from  March  to  September.  The 
northern  one  from  September  to  March.  The  prevalent  winds,  according  to  the 
saying  of  the  natives,  during  the  south  monsoon,  are  from'E.  S.  E.  andS.  S.  E. 
and  during  the  northern  monsoon  are  from  E.  N.  £.  and  N.  N.  E.  this  may  be 
the  case  at  sea.  I  will  not  oppose  this  fact,  having  no  reason  for  it ;  but,  I  can 
assure  from  my  own  observation,  that  at  a  short  distance  from  the  shore  I  did  not 
find  the  monsoon  so  regular  as  it  is  supposed,  in  fact  the  most  prevalent  wind  at 
all  times  is  from  the  Eastern  part  of  the  compass.  The  Rabajos  are  very  strong 
winds,  blowing  from  the  S.  W.  during  the  rainy  season  ;  they  last  three  or  four 
dajrs  with  great  force,  not  so  great  when  it  rains,  but  very  heavy  in  dry  weather. 
This  begins  at  the  change  of  the  moon.  The  grains  are  souaiis  und  are  met  more 
frequently  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Abrolhos  Islands,  ana  called,  for  this  reason, 
Abrolhos  squalls.  They  are  more  frequent  in  the  months  of  May,  June,  July 
and  August,  and  in  very  rainy  seasons  they  blow  from  E.  S.  E.  They  say  they 
arise  from  a  white  cloud  of  a  round  shape,  and  of  a  little  appearance  at  first,  and 
by  and  by  increase  to  such  a  force  as  to  be  dreadful. 

Land  breezes  are  very  regular  on  the  whole  extent  of  Brazil  Coast,  but 
iiot  equally  regular  and  strong ;  but  more  so  as  you  approach  the  equator.  At 
Rio  Janeiro  they  are  not  very  regular,  and  very  often  not  at  all  felt.  The  land 
breezes  are  more  powerful  in  the  northern  monsoon,  and  in  the  southern  mon- 
soon, very  often  the  land  breeze  has  quite  the  same  direction  as  the  sea  breeze, 
this  part  coming  from  the  South  West. 

It  is  a  general  rule,  that  the  land  breeze  will  be  more  powerful  in  proportion 
as  the  sea  breeze  is  so.  It  may  be  stated,  that  a  vessel  can  depart  from  Erazii 
any  day  it  pleases. 

generally  the  more  you  proceed  south  along  the  coast,  the  more  you  must 
expect  to  find  the  wind  coming  from  the  south  and  west  in  the  rainy  season.  In 
this  time  of  the  year,  from  Abagoados  Patos  up  to  Cape  Frio,  they  blow  with 
great  violence  from  S.  E.  to  S.  W.  and  even  N.  W.  In  this  case  they  turn  into 
hurricanes,  and  are  called  Fampeiros.  In  the  river  Plata  they  are  very  dange- 
rous. If  at  sunset,  foggy  clouds,  and  the  land  appears  more  distinct  at  a  small 
distance,  it  is  an  omen  the  wind  will  blow  from  the  S.  or  S.  W.  and  they  will 
be  powerful  in  general.  They  last  in  proportion  as  they  are  more  heavy,  and 
last  longer  if  not  so  dreadful.  yi\i&a  they  turn  into  a  hurricane,  they  will  never 
last  over  twenty-ifour  hours.  When  the  wind  hauls  towards  the  East,  you  may 
expect  fine  clear  weather.  It  is  to  the  contrary  when  it  nears  towards  the  west, 
ilasterl^  winds  bring  clear  weather,  Westerly  winds  bring  fogs. 

Nothing  positive  can  be  said  respecting  the  regularity  of  the  currents ;  they 
generally  follow  the  direction  of  the  wind,  for  there  is  no  river  of  a  sufficient 
magnitude  on  the  whole  extent  of  the  Brazil's  coast  capable  of  causing  a  cur- 
rent, according  to  numerous  observations.  The  average  running  of  the  currents  is 
at  the  rate  of  six  tenths  of  a  mile  an  hour ;  in  the  monsoon  time  never  over  that  rate, 


.•;mS^, 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


485 


be  village  of  Ca- 
f  of  water  are  to 
p  to  MHranham. 
re  two  banks  or 
is  not  far  distant 
lea,  aud  in  some 
;r  bank,  farther 
nnot  be  stated  as 
and  the  former, 
nk  and  the  small 
ralhos.  Manuel 
:ond  bank. 
les  the  winter  is 
ande.  The  sea- 
>ason,  the  last  of 
lues  from  March 
ired  as  raioy  are 

eptember.  The 
according  to  the 
.£.  andS.  S.  E. 
.  E.  this  may  be 
for  it ;  but,  I  can 
le  shore  I  did  not 
trevalent  wind  at 
s  are  very  strong 
last  three  or  four 
f  in  dry  weather, 
nd  are  met  more 
I,  for  this  reason. 
May,  June,  July 
I  They  say  they 
ance  at  first,  and 


le 


razil  Coast,  but 
equator.    At 
felt.    The  land 
southern  mon- 
the  sea  breeze, 

il  in  proportion 
)art  from  Praxil 

more  you  must 
ainy  season.  In 
they  blow  with 
J  they  turn  into 

re  very  dange- 
tinct  at  a  small 

.  and  they  will 

ore  heavy,  and 
|they  will  never 

East,  you  may 
ards  the  west, 

currents;  they 

of  a  sufficient 

■causing  a  cur- 

I  the  currents  is 

over  that  rate, 


ind  in  many  instances  below  it,  even  no  current  at  all.  |lt  is  only  north  of  *Per- 
uambuco,  that  the  current  can  be  considered  as  permanent,  and  capable  of  cau- 
sing some  errors  in  the  day's  work  of  a  ship,  and,  even  in  this  case,  it  is  only 
when  you  go  along  the  coast  at  no  great  distance,  for  if  distant  at  sea,  no  current 
exists.  From  what  has  been  said  respecting  winds  and  currents,  we  may  infer 
that  no  impediment  exists  in  navigating  the  Brazil's  sea,  from  Santa  Catharina 
to  Olinda  Point,  and  it  is  entirely  useless  to  endeavour  to  make  land  more  south 
than  the  place  bound  to,  as  formerly  prescribed.  If  going  to  Qlinda,  or  any 
other  place  more  north,  up  to  Maranham,  it  is  better  to  keep  East  of  the  place 
bound  to,  in  order  to  counteract  the  effects  of  the  currents,  which  run  generally 
W.  N.  W.  as  will  bo  more  particularly  stated  when  describing  the  several 
harbours,  and  the  manner  to  reach  them. 


Description  of  the  Coast  comprised  between  the  Island  of  St.  Catharina 

and  the  Bay  of  Rio  Janeiro. 

The  Island  of  Santa  Catharina,  is  of  such  height  as  to  be  discovered  in  fine 
weather  from  forty-five  miles  distant,  at  which  distance  there  are  70  fathoms  wa- 
ter, diminishing  gradually  towards  the  shore.  Nearing  it  from  the  East,  it  ap- 
pears with  high  mountains,  and  deep  valleys ;  taking  the  whole  together,  the 
southern  part  appears  higher  than  the  northern  side.  The  Morro  Camborello 
is  a  Mountain  which  appears  above  every  other ;  vessels  may  go  round  this  Island 
with  safety ;  the  channel  between  the  main  land  affords  good  anchorage,  but  the 
best  place  to  cast  anchor  is  on  the  northern  part. 

Santa  Catharina  affords  the  best  place  to  refit  a  vessel ;  tliere  is  an  inexhausti- 
ble quantity  of  good  water,  to  be  got  without  any  expense  ;  fuel  and  provisions 
of  every  kind  at  a  cheap'  rate— such  as  beef,  pork,  poultry,  corn,  sugar,  dried 
beef,  arack,  &tc.  &lc.  It  is  then  the  most  conven>»<^t  place  for  a  ship  to  stop,  in 
vc^se  of  want  and  for  repairs.  W  hen  taking  on  board  wood  for  fuel,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  take  young  branches  only,  and  even  to  let  them  fioat  in  the  sea  water,  in 
order  to  destroy  the  numerous  worms,  as  their  eggs  are  very  dangerous  on  board 
of  a  ship. 

The  coast  north  cf  Santa  Catharina  is  every  where  very  high.  Woody  moun- 
tains and  deep  valleys  are  to  be  discovered  all  round.  From  Santa  Catharina,  to 
the  bay  of  San  Francisco,  you  meet  several  small  islands  and  rocks,  and  the  last 
are  the  small  Garcia  Islands,  two  miles  distant  from  Joao  Diaz  Point,  (which 
point  forms  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  River  S.  Francisco.)  San  Francisco  River 
is  not  very  deep.  Its  mouth  is  turned  N.  N.  E.  and  empties  in  a  large  bay,  in 
which  you  may  anchor  any  where.  The  shore  of  this  bay  is  flat,  the  surround- 
ing land  not  very  high,  but  from  place  to  place,  small  hillocks  are  to  be  seen, 
which  renders  that  place  remarkable ;  particularly  by  the  chain  of  a  very  h*!.!. 
mountain  to  be  seen  at  nearly  nine  miles  in  the  interior.  The  Island  of  San  Se- 
bastian is  to  be  seen  forty-five  miles  distant ;  the  shores  are  very  bold ;  the 
whole  Island  taken  together  seems  of  a  triangular  shape ;  the  channel  affords  good 
anchorage,  but  is  not  to  be  followed  in  a  straight  line  from  end  to  end.  Banks 
onnected  with  the  main  land,  existing  nearly  two  thirds  of  the  whole  extent,  in 
the  direction  of  N.  to  S.  and  consequently,  when  coming  from  the  north,  and 
starting  from  a  point  situated  one  half  mile  from  the  Armacao,  which  is  con- 
structed at  the  head  of  the  island,  it  is  necessary  to  steer  first  five  miles  S.  16^^ 
W.  and  from  thence  S.  45°  W.  until  you  are  out.  This  route  is  nearly  eleven 
miles,  and  the  depth  of  water  from  10  to  20  fathoms.  The  greatest  distance  be- 
tween the  opposite  lands,  is  nearly  three  miles,  but  two-thirds  of  that  space  is 
not  safe  for  navigating.  It  is  necessary  to  near  the  shore  of  San  Sebastian  Island, 
at  no  less  distance  than  from  ten  to  twelve  hundred  yards.  The  southern  en- 
trance is  more  narrow,  the  natives  say  that  very  large  ships  may  pass  through. 
San  Sebastian  harbour  is  one  of  the  safest  in  the  world,  and  offers  the  same  facili- 
ties as  Santa  Catharina  for  provisions  of  any  kind. 

'"  Alight-house,  which  exhibits  &  revolving  light,  has  been  erected  at  tbe  entrance  of  Per* 
nambuco/  by  which  that  part  of  the  coast  may  be  recognized. 


486 


BLUNT  3    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


Detcription  of  the  Mountaim  and  other  objects  tvhich  show  your  approach 

to  Rio  Janeiro. 

At  the  eastern  end  of  the  beach  of  Maranbaya  stands  the  large  point  of  Gua- 
ratiba,  where  begin  the  high  mountains  which  surround  the  Bay  of  Rio  Janeiro. 
From  this  point,  in  clear  weather,  the  Island  Redonda  (Round  Island)  can  be 
seen,  although  eight  leagues  distant.  That  island  stands  at  the  entrance  of  the 
Bay  of  Rio  Janeiro,  and  is  easily  distinguished  by  its  round  shape,  and  by  the 
green  nnd  white  colour  of  its  shores.  From  the  same  point  the  mountain  called 
the  Gabia  or  Main-top,  which,  by  its  peculiar  shape,  cannot  be  confounded  with 
any  other,  and  is,  by  this  reason,  the  surest  mark  of  Rio  de  Janeiro.  When  ar- 
rived near  Round  Island,  there  is  not  the  least  difficulty  in  reaching  Rio  Janeiro. 
It  is  unnecessary  to  undertake  the  course  toward  that  place,  unless  you  are  sure 
to  reach  it  before  night  time,  and  for  that  to  wait  for  the  sea-breeze,  which  gene- 
rally begins  at  12  or  1  o'clock. 

Some  say  that  it  is  better  to  make  land  near  Cape  Frio,  when  bound  for  Rio 
Janeiro ;  though  it  will  do  well  for  vessels  coming  from  the  north  or  east,  yet  in 
every  other  instance,  it  will  be  wasting  time. 

The  Grand  Island,  the  Morro  Marambaya,  and  particularly  the  Main-top 
mountain,  are  the  Hurest  guides  for  nearlng  Rio  Janeiro,  as  they  may  be  seen  at 
a  great  distance,  and  no  fear  in  nearing  the  land. 

There  is  something  peculiar  which  distinguishes  the  appearance  of  the  Bay  of 
Rio  Janeiro  from  every  other  place.  When  coming  from  the  E.  S.E.  up  to  the 
S.  W.  the  tops  ot'  the  mountains  bear  a  perfect  resemblance  to  a  man  lying  on 
his  back,  in  a  direction  W.  S.  W.  .nnd  E.  N.  £.  the  Mount  Main-top  seeming  to 
form  the  head,  and  Mount  Sugar-loaf  the  extremities  of  the  feet. 

The  Main-top  Mount  is  flat  on  its  top,  and  seems  not  so  large  at  its  base  as  at 
its  top,  from  whence  it  derives  its  name.  Eight  miles  distant  from  this  mountain, 
lies  the  Paoofasucar  (Sugar-loaf)  Mount,  a  large  rock  which,  although  generally 
indicated  as  the  best  iirark  to  ascertain  the  Bay  of  Rio  Janeiro,  is  not  so,  accord- 
ing to  iny  obsc  vations,  being  not  so  high,  so  distinct,  or  so  near  the  shore,  as 
the  Main-top  Mount:  it  offers  this  particular,  that  its  shape  is  very  conical,  and 
it  appears  above  all  xhe  other  mountains  of  a  like  shape  around  it,  and  it  seems 
to  incline  a  little  tow.irds  the  N.  W. 

It  is  very  prudent  to  keep  at  some  distance  from  the  shore,  when  navigating 
between  Rio  Janeiro  and  Cape  Frio,  because  the  sea-breeze  blows  generally  to- 
wards the  shore,  and  in  like  manner  the  waves  generate  a  current,  having  the 
same  tendency,  particularly  when  it  blows  from  S.  W.  and  then  in  case  of  a 
sudden  storm,  there  will  be  some  danger  in  the  ancliorage,  not  being  there  very 
safe. 

We  must  repeat  that  it  is  very  prudent  never  to  approach  too  near  the  islands 
which  stand  at  the  entrance  of  the  bay  of  Rio  Janeiro,  except  in  case  you  are 
certain  to  reach  the  harbour  during  day  time;  for  if  engaged  amongst  them 
you  may  be  dangerously  situated,  in  case  of  a  squall  of  wind,  whicli  is  often  the 
case,  then  if  not  enabled  to  reach  the  harbour  in  daylight,  it  is  better  to  put  to 
sea  again.  i 


Directions  for  going  in  and  out  of  the  Harhonr  of  Rio  Janeiro. 

To  enter  the  harbour  of  Rio  Janeiro  it  is  preferred  generally  to  pass  between 
the  Island  Rasa  (Bare  Island)  and  the  Island  of  Para,  (Father  and  Mother)  the 
first  one  nearly  seven  miles  from  the  Sugar-loaf,  the  two  last  five  and  a  half  miles 
N.  41°  E.  of  Bare  Island:  they  have  bold  shores,  and  may  hd  approached  very 
near;  and  even,  if  necessary,  a  vessel  can  pass  between  them  and  the  shore. 
The  depth  of  water  between  these  islands  is  from  13  to  23  fathoms.  Standing 
one  mile  west  of  Bare  Island,  you  must  perceive  the  western  end  of  the  most 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


487 


western  island  (PaVa)  N.  47°  E.  from  this  point;  direct  your  course  during  seren 
and  a  half  miles  N.  5<^  E.  until  you  arrive  at  800  yaids  west  of  the  fortress  of 
Santa  Cruz,  situated  at  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  entrance :  during  that  course 
you  will  have  passed  on  your  larboard  hand  several  small  rocks  and  small  islands, 
which  lie  between  the  Round  Island  and  the  land  on  the  Main-top  Mount  side, 
and  you  will  pass  at  one-half  mile's  distance  from  the  small  island  Toucinho, 
(Ham  Island)  which  is  not  distant  from  the  Sugar-loaf  Mount ;  there  is  not  the 
least  danger;  you  have  only  to  keep  at  a  proper  distance  from  the  rocks  which 
are  to  be  seen.  The  least  depth  of  water  is  7  fathoms  at  the  bar ;  but  when  in 
the  .  arbour  it  increases  very  fast,  and  at  a  few  yards  from  the  Santa  Cruz  bat- 
tery, there  is  over  12  and  16  fathoms. 

The  way  we  prescribe  to  go  into  the  harbour  possesses  many  advantages : 
first,  it  enables  you  to  approach  the  Santa  Cruz  fortress  sufficiently  near  to  an- 
swer the  questions  put  to  you  by  the  guard ;  second,  to  keep  the  ship  at  a  rea- 
sonable distance  from  the  flat  island,  lying  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance,  on 
which  is  built  the  fort  Lage;  and  thirdly,  to  correct  the  effect  of  the  current, 
which  sets  towards  the  N.  W.  with  the  tide. 

The  passage  between  fort  Santa  Cruz  and  fort  Lage  is  the  only  one  used  in 
passing,  and  the  one  formed  by  San  Joao  Point  is  never  used ;  not  on  account 
of  deficiency  of  water,  but  because  it  is  narrower,  more  crooked,  and  the  bot- 
tom being  rocky,  is  not  safe,  in  case  of  necessity,  to  anchor.  They  say  the  pas- 
sage through  it  is  prohibited. 

When  at  600  yards  distance,  west,  from  fort  Santa  Cruz,  the  course  to  reach 
the  best  anchorage  is  N.  35°  W.  until  you  ifrrive  at  E.  N.  E.  of  fort  Villegagnon, 
which  you  may  pass  at  only  600  yards  distance;  from  that  place  you  will  steer 
toward  the  Island  dos  Ratos,  (Rat  Island)  and  now,  being  in  sight  of  the  city, 
you  may  choose  your  anchorage  in  from  10  to  20  fathoms. 

If  you  draw  a  line  from  the  flag  of  fort  Villegagnon  to  the  Cobras  (Snake) 
Island,  that  line  will  separ^.te  the  anchorage  for  vessels  of  war  from  that  of  the 
merchant-vessels.  The  best  for  vessels  of  war  is  towards  the  E. N. E.  of  the 
palace,  and  south  of  a  line  drawn  from  Rat  Island  to  the  main  church  in  the 
city  ;  and  the  best  for  merchant-vessels  is  near  the  city ;  the  largest  reach  that 
place  by  passing  north  of  Snake  Island,  and  they  are  separated  from  the  vessels 
of  war  by  a  bank,  or  shallow  water,  where  boats  only  can  pass,  and  over  which 
the  sea  is  constantly  breaking  at  low  water. 

The  sea  and  land-breezes  are  regular,  and  each  last  one  half  of  the  day.  The 
land-breeze  begins  in  the  evening,  continues  during  the  night,  and  stops  at  nine 
or  ten  in  the  morning;  a  calm  of  one  hour  generally  sucreeds  it,  and  at  about 
eleven  the  sea-breeze  commences. 

Vessels  going  to  sea  will  follow  the  course  opposite  to  that  pursued  when  go- 
ing in.  It  is  best  to  take  your  departure  in  the  morning,  in  order  to  take  advan- 
tage of  the  land-breeze,  which,  lasting  three  or  four  hours  during  daylight,  ena- 
bles you  to  clear  all  the  small  islands,  and  reach  the  open  sea.  Vessels  used, 
sometimes,  to  go  at  some  distance  from  the  city  the  day  previous  to  their  de- 
parture, in  order  to  have  a  better  chance  of  getting  to  sea  the  day  after,  with  the 
land-breeze.   In  case  the  breeze  should  subside,  it  would  be  better  to  cast  anchor. 


Description  of  the  Coast  between  Rio  Janeiro  and  the  Bay  of  All  Saints, 
showing  the  Anchorage  in  the  Harbour  of  Espirito  Santo,  Porto  Se- 
guiro,  Sfc.  fyc.  and  near  Capes  Frio,  Thomas,  St.  Paul,  and  St.  An- 
tonio, with  a  description  of  the  Banks  and  small  Islands  of  Abrolhos. 

Leaving  the  Bay  of  Rio  .Janeiro  to  proceed  eastward,  .fourteen  miles  distant, 
E.  15°  S.  of  the  Sugar  Loaf,  you  will  find  the  two  islands  of  Maricc,  situated 
nearly  one  league  from  the  sea-shore ;  they  are  not  very  high,  tlicir  southern 
shore  is  quite  perpendicular,  and  there  h  no  danger  in  going  near  them. 

At  fourteen   miles  farther  N.  77^  E.  of  these  islands,  you  meet  Cape  Negro, 


^ 

^^^. 


Wii^. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-S) 


^ 


1.0 


I.I 


11.25 


US 


Ih 


^  "^  1^'^ 


Hiotographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


^ 


v 


^. 


•ss 


^\ 


V 


,'**« 

'  V 


^-V 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WIUTM.N.Y.  143M 

(7I«)S73-4S03 


;\ 


488 


BLUNT^S 


AMERICAN  COASt  I<lLOT. 


ivhich  is  formed  by  a  hill  not  very  high,  adjoining  to  the  highest  mountaius  to 
be  met  ivith  between  Rio  Janeiro  and  Cape  Frio,  which,  with  its  dark  green 
tinge  (from  which  it  derives  its  name)  are  quite  sufficient  to  distinguish  it.  There 
is  not  the  least  danger  in  nearing  it,  for  even  at  the  distance  of  three  miles,  the 
soundings  are  from  SO  to  40  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

The  sea-shore  from  Rio  Janeiro  to  Gape  Frio  is  low  and  sandy:  the  moun- 
tains which  surround  that  bay  run  first  E.  N.  E.  until  you  reach  the  meridian  of 
Cape  Negro,  and  afterward  N.  E.  leaving  an  empty  flat  between,  over  ten  leagues 
in  extent,  which  is  to  be  seen  from  the  sea  in  fine  weather  only. 

Between  Cape  Negro  and  Cape  Frio  the  land  is  low,  and  few  small  hills  are 
to  be  perceived  at  some  distance  from  the  sea-shore,  which  is  there  sandy  and 
bushy.  On  the  top  of  one  of  these  small  hills,  nine  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  Cape 
Negro,  stands  a  church  dedicated  to  Nostra  dama  de  Nazareth.  At  no  great 
distance  from  the  shore  a  ridge  of  rocks  and  sand  are  to  be  seen  at  low  water, 
and  considered  dangerous  by  the  coasting  traders,  but  without  good  reason,  as 
there  are  30  and  40  fathoms  water  at  six  miles  distant,  muddy  bottom,  the  depth 
increasing  very  fast  toward  the  sea,  and  at  ten  leagues  distance,  from  70  to  90  fa- 
thoms, bottom  sandy,  rocky,  and  muddy. 

Though  of  little  importance,  it  is  proper  to  state  that  inside  the  beach,  a  flat 
of  water  can  be  seen.  The  depth  of  the  sea  near  Rio  Janeiro  is  very  g^eat,  va- 
rying from  76  to  90  fathoms,  at  the  distance  of  ten  or  fifteen  leagues,  diminish- 
ing gradually  toward  the  land.  The  bottom  is  a  mixture  of  coarse  sand,  grave), 
broken  shells,  rocks  and  mud.  In  some  charts,  S.  S.  E.  ft'om  Cape  Frio,  distant 
ten  or  twelve  leagues,  from  20  to  25  fathoms  have  been  marked,  but  we  believe 
it  incorrect. 

Cape  Frio  is  the  southern  end  of  an  island  lying  on  the  eastern  end  of  the 
beach  of  Maranbaya.'  -  This  island  is  rocky;  there  are  trees  only  in  some  places, 
and  no  where  is  green  grass  to  be  seen.  In  fine  weather  it  may  be  discovered 
from  fifteen  leagues  distant.  Viewed  from  east  and  north,  two  different  hills 
are  to  be  perceived  on  Cape  Frio,  the  northern  one  of  which  is  the  largest  and 
highest,  and  on  the  southern  one  a  kind  of  rock  seems  to  project  and  hang  over. 
Viewed  from  the  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  B.  E.  these  two  hills  appear  to  be  but  one  with 
tops,  and  at  a  small  distance  from  the  cape,  in  an  E.  S.  E.  direction,  lies  a  small 
island  of  a  conical  shape.  All  this  shore  is  so  bold  that  30  and  even  40  fathoms 
are  to  be  met  in  every  direction,  even  at  one  mile  distance,  bottom  almost  every 
where  mud. 

Between  the  Island  of  Frio  and  the  main  land  there  is  a  good  channel  for 
small  vessels,  and  a  good  anchorage  for  others  of  any  size.  The  channel  runs 
N.  E.  and  S.  W.  It  is  not  frequently  used,  on  account  of  its  narrowness  at  the 
southern  part,  but  the  depth  of  water  is  every  where  more  than  sufficient.  The 
northern  passage  is  very  spacious  and  safe  against  any  wind  except  N.  E.  but  by 
anchoring  more  north  toward  the  Island  dos  Porcos,  you  may  consider  yourself 
perfecdy  safe,  the  anchorage  being  firm,  and  often  resorted  to  oy  coasting  traders 
who  wait  there  for  favourable  winds,  and  for  a  chance  to  put  to  sea  through  the 
southern  or  northern  passage.  In  time  of  war  this  place  may  be  useful  to  get 
information.    Var.  S<^  S'  E.  1 8 1 9. 

The  northern  part  of  the  coast  of  Cape  Frio,  together  with  the  islands,  runs 
N.  35^  E.  up  to  Anchora  Islands,  and  forms  with  this  last  a  deep  bay,  in  the  in- 
side of  which  stand  the  numerous  islands  of  Papagaros ;  several  of  them  afford 
very  sa^^  anchorage  in  case  of  contrary  wind. 

The  Islam*  o'  Ancoras  stands  at  four  miles  E.}S.  from  Cape  Busios;  the 
eastern  one  has  the  appearance  of  a  quaker's  hat.  I  do  not  doubt,  as  reported 
by  native  mariners,  the  practicability  for  a  large  ship  to  pass  between  them  and 
the  main  land. 

North  of  Cape  Busios  lies  the  small  island  of  Branca,  from  whence  another 
beach  extends  to  the  Morro  San  Juao  or  San  Joain,  and  at  no  great  distance  the 
Island  of  Feno.  The  land  now  runs  easterly  up  to  Cape  sC  Thomas.  This 
gult,  formed  by  the  coast  between  the  Capes  Busios  and  Cape  St.  Thomas,  is  ve- 
ry near  thirty  leagues  in  extent,  and  in  the  middle  of  it,  at  three  leagues  distant 
from  the  shore,  lies  the  Island  of  Santa  Anna. 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT 


489 


Th«  Morro  San  Joam  is  easy  to  be  distiaguished,  bcin;;  entirely  separated 
from  the  chain  of  mouatains  lying  in  its  rear,  and  its  top  having  a  warlike 
appearance. 

At  twenty  miles  N.  i  W.  of  Morro  San  Joam,  another  hill  is  to  be  perceived, 
which  offers  this  particular,  that  its  northern  side  is  quite  perpendicularly  cut, 
and  its  top  ends  in  a  sharp  point.  It  is  known  by  the  name  of  Father  de  Macaye 
or  Macahe. 

The  Islands  of  St.  Ann  are  three  in  number.  Viewed  from  S.  S.  W.  and  N. 
N.  E.  they  appear'  as  one  only.  The  southern  one  is  the  highest.  The  anchor- 
age in  the  channel  is  one  of  the  safest  and  most  convenient  to  any  kind  of  re- 
pairs, and  refit  vessels  of  any  description.  Good  water  and  timber  is  to  be 
found,  and  at  the  distance  of  four  to  five  miles  from  the  shore  there  is,  in  every 
direction,  from  19  to  30  fathoms  of  water,  and  a  good  mud  bottom. 

From  the  parallel  of  the  island  of  St.  Ann  up  to  Benevente*  which  stands  in 
lilt.  20°  53'  50"  S.  a  flat  land  projects  considerably  into  the  sea.  That  low  land 
is  known  by  the  name  of  Granra.  Some  navigators  bound  to  Rio  Janeiro  state 
that  they  have  been  deceived  by  the  similar  appearance  between  the  coast  north 
of  Cape  Frio,  and  the  coast  forming  the  Bay  of  Rio  Janeiro.  Such  an  error 
appears  very  extraordinary,  for  the  entrance  of  Rio  Janeiro  is  on  the  angular 
point  of  two  chains  of  mountains,  the  eastern  side  running  E.  iN.  and  the  west- 
ern side  running  W.  S.  W.  whereas  th»'  land  north  of  Cape  Frio  runs  N.  and  S. 
which  is  quite  an  opposite  direction.  On  the  %vhole,  a  single  observation  will  re- 
lieve the  doubts  in  that  respect. 

From  the  Island  of  St.  Ann  to  Benevcnte  End,  the  land  extends  more  and 
more  to  the  sea,  and  at  Cape  Thomas  the  moimtains  appeft"  to  be  thirteen  leagues 
from  the  sea-shore.  This  p:\rt  of  the  Brazilian  coast  is  very  low ;  a  few  trees 
and  small  sand-hills  seem  as  hwried  in  the  sea-water.  This  beach  extends  far  in 
the  sea,  and  forms  what  is  called  the  Bank?  of  Cape  Thomas.  The  chart  shows 
how  far  the  shallow  water  extends ;  at  the  distance  of  five  miles  we  found  from 
10  to  21  fathoms,  increasing  regularly  towards  the  sea.  By  keeping  fifteen  miles 
from  the  shore  there  is  not  the  least  danger. 

Though  some  coasting  traders  state  that  places  on  the  banks  are  to  be  met 
with,  having  2  or  3  fathoms  of  water  only,  yet  the  pilot  we  had  on  board  thin^ 
differently,  and  nothing  has  been  perceived  by  us  to  indicate  such  a  shallowness. 
The  nature  of  the  bottom  near  Cape  Thomas  is  not  of  a  muddy  nature, 
but  white  sand  and  broken  shells.  It  should  here  be  observed,  that  this  white 
sand,  which  extends  so  far  north,  appears  to  begin  only  there,  and  is  never  met 
with  farther  south. 

At  a  short  distance  from  Benevente  you  meet,  in  succession,  the  Barra  Guara- 
paya,  (Bald  Island)  La  Rosa,  and  the  small  Islands  uf  Guarapari. 

The  river  Guarapari  empties  into  the  sea  between  two  hills  covered  with  trees ; 
on  the  top  of  the  southern  hill,  there  is  a  church  with  a  steeple,  many  houses 
and  cocoa-trees.  T\w-  other  hill  is  called  Perro  de  Cao.  To  proceed  up  the 
river,  it  is  necessary  to  k«'ep  Guarapari  hill  N.  W. 

The  surrounding  coast  is  tolerably  high,  and  every  where  covered  with  small 
trees,  and  in  several  places  a  yellow  steep  beach  not  perceived  to  the  southward 
of  Benevente.  The  mountains  in  the  interior  deserve  particular  notice,  being  of 
a  conical  shape,  and  appearing  to  incline  on  one  side,  which  is  not  to  be  observed 
to  the  south  or  north. 

The  Island  Ca!v;ula  lies  four  miles  distant  from  the  shore  ;  there  ih  no  danger 
passing  in  the  channel,  being  from  12  to  20  fathoms  water.  Outside  this  Island, 
and  off  the  Island  Rosa,  the  depth  varies  from  12  to  20  fathoms  up  to  Espirito 
Santo  Bay.  Keeping  at  the  distance  of  two  to  seven  miles  from  the  shore,  at 
nearly  two-thirds  the  distance  from  Guarapari  SantoJ  you  meet  the  rocky  island 
Jien,  and  a  little  farther  distant  the  Pacotes  rocks,  which  indicates  the  entrance  of 
the  Bay  of  Espirito  Santo.  The  particulars  which  distinguish  Espirito  Santo 
Bay,  are  Monte  Moreno  and  Mertue  Alvara  ;  Monte  Moreno  is  a  mountain  on 
the  southern  end  of  the  bay  ;  its  northern  base  forming  the  southf-rn  entrance  of 
the  river  of  Espirito  is  of  a  conical  shane,  covered  in  part  with  wood,  no  green 
grass  (o  be  seen  on  ils  eastern  side,  ana  may  be  discovered  trn  leagues  distant. 

f.2 


1 


490 


BLUMrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


^P 


Vessels  going  up  the  river,  muiit  range  along  it  at  no  great  distance.    The  two 
Pacotes  Rocks  stand  two  and  a  hHlf  oiiles,  and  are  of  unequal  size.    The  inside 

channel  is  used  only  by  small  vessels. 

Nearly  •ne  mile  distant  from  Monte  Moreno  S.  60°  W.  stands  the  Morro  de 
NozzH  (Sembora  de  Poria,)  a  rocky  hill  with  little  wood.  The  church,  which  is 
built  on  its  top,  can  be  discovered  Ave  leagues  distant.  What  distinguishes  the 
hill  called  the  Mastre  Alvaro,  is  its  great  hei{;ht  on  a  low  ground,  appearing  as 
entirely  separated  from  the  other  mountains. 

The  greatest  part  of  the  bay  of  Espirito  Santo  is  occupied  by  two  islands,  in 
a  direction  N.  N.  W.  of  Monte  Moreno ;  though  the  space  between  this  island 
and  the  mountain  appears  to  be  wholly  obstructed  by  l-Huks,  and  the  two  rocks, 
the  Balea(the  Whale)  and  the  Casello  (the  Horse,)  yet  a  veese!  not  drawing  over 
16  feet  water  may  easily  go  through  there  without  danger,  as  you  will  not  have 
less  than  18  feet  water.  The  anchorage  we  occupied  in  the  bay  of  Kspuito 
Santo  was  not  the  best  one,  because  we  had  no  knowledge  of  a  submarine  sock 
not  more  than  two  cables'  distance  from  us,  where,  from  time  to  time,  the  sea 
was  breaking.  The  safest  pl&ce  to  anchor  is  the  onu  pointed  on  the  chart,  with 
an  anchor. 

Espirito  Santo  is  of  some  importance  to  nKvly^ators.  At  one  league's  distance 
from  the  city  of  Victoria,  there  is  good  water ;  wood  and  cattle  can  be  got  in 
plenty,  and  cheap ;  the  climate  appears  unhi'althy,  being  extremely  damp. _  A 
jock  called  thePaode  Hanuar  (Sugar  Loaf)  about  2000  yards  from  the  city,  is  of 
some  service  to  mtriners,  as  you  steer  in  its  direction  after  weathering  Monte 
Moreno,  if  you  intend  to  get  into  the  river.  The  tides  are  not  more  than  4  feet, 
and  are  regular  but  iiHthe  inside  of  the  hay. 

The  coast  north  of  Espirito  Santo  is  low  and  covered  with  trees ;  and  the 
shore,  which  runs  N.  32°  p,.  fiom  the  Tubaron  (the  Shark)  up  to  the  bar  of  llio 
Doce  nearly  18  leagues  distant,  is  of  a  yellow  r^'d  colour. 

From  Rio  Doce  (soft  river)  the  coast  runs  north  and  south  up  to  the  bar  of 
San  Matheo,  a  distance  of  twenty  leagues.  The  country  in  the  interior  doe» 
not  appear  so  low  as  the  sea-shorr,  but  from  llio  Doce  to  Mount  Pascoal  the 
country  is  very  flat.  There  is  consequently  no  more  difficulty  recognizing  Es- 
pirito Santo  Bay  when  coming  from  the  south  or  from  the  north,  as  in  the  first 
instance  Mount  Mastre  Alvaro  comes  next  to  the  flat  land,  and  in  the  second  in- 
stance, it  ends  a  land  tolerably  high. 

The  shore  from  Tubarao  end  up  to  San  Matlieo,  may  be  approached  c  ery 
where  at  the  distance  oi  two  or  three  miles.  From  9  to  10  fathoms  water  are 
to  be  found  at  such  a  distance,  bottom  sandy,  sometimes  muddy  and  with  broken 
shells. 

It  is  reported  Rio  Doce  runs  far  in  the  interior,  hut  its  mouth  does  not  admit 
of  large  vessels.  It  is  to  be  obseivcd  here,  that  the  numerous  islands  pointed 
out  in  some  charts,  as  existing  at  its  mouth,  is  not  correct. 

The  bar  of  Rio  beca  lies  ten  leagues  north  of  Rio  Doce.  Rio  Secais  a  stream 
only  in  the  rainy  season.  Two  miles  east  of  Rio  Seca  we  found  no  variation  in 
the  compass,  July  1819. 

The  bar  of  San  Matheo  is  ten  leagues  distant  from  Rio  Seca.  Being  far  at 
sea,  this  bar  may  be  distinguished  by  the  breakers  of  the  sea,  which  is  greater 
than  on  the  surrounding  places.  The  shallowness  of  the  water,  the  impossibility 
for  a  ship  to  cross  over  the  bar  and  above  atl  the  little  benefit  to  be  derived  from 
this  place,  are  more  than  sufficient  reasons  to  keep  at  a  distance  from  it. 

At  a  distance  of  four  to  five  leagues  from  San  Matheo,  in  a  northern  direction, 
and  at  three  to  four  leagues  from  the  land,  the  soundings  begin  to  indicate 
the  shallow  water  of  the  Abrolhos.  This  shallow  place  may  be  considered  to 
extend  north  and  south  from  eighteen  to  twenty  leagues,  and  east  and  west  not 
less  than  twenty  leagues ;  and  though  the  whole  extent  is  not  to  be  considered 
equally  dangerous,  yet  a  vessel  not  particularly  bound  to  this  place,  will  do  well 
to  keep  away  from  it. 

The  Abrolhos  Islands,  or  Sante  Barbara  Islands,  are  four  in  number,  n«t  in- 
cluding two  or  three  flat  rocks  ;  the  two  northern  islands  are  the  highest;  tha 
western  one  is  nearly  one  hundred  and  thirty  feet  above  the  sea,  the  other  one 


,^m^  _jz- 


blunt's  americajh  coast  pilot. 


491 


iilhering  Monte 
lOre  than  4  feet, 


handred  and  fifteen :  they  may  be  perceived  from  the   top  of  a  frigate  in  fine 
fteather  from  twenty  leagues  distance. 

Nothing  is  to  be  found  on  this  Island  except  some  reeds  and  caetus ;  numerous 
tribes  of  birds  inhabit  the« ;  a  few  turtle  are  to  be  met  with ;  fishes  are  in 
plenty  and  the  fishermen  of  Porto, Secure  repair  there  to  fish,  and  dry  what 
they  call  garoujas.  This  is  consequently  the  only  thin;  a  vessel  can  expect 
thither. 

We  have  already  stated  that  the  whole  extent  assigned  to  the  shallow  wati^, 
is  not  every  where  dangerous.  In  the  same  extent,  bv  our  observations  and 
soundings,  it  appears  that,  from  the  E.  S.  E.  up  to  south  by  north,  and  west, 
large  ships  may  approach  from  one  to  eight  miles,  in  fine  weather.  The  only 
part  we  had  no  «.'han£e  of  sounding,  and  which  remains  consequently  dowbtful, 
IS  that  p.irt  comprised  between  the  S.  and  S.  S.  E. 

West  of  this  Island  there  is  a  channel,  of  nearly  three  leagues  wide,  where  the 
soundings  show  from  10  to  15  fathoms,  except  in  a  few  places  where  it  shows  only 
8  fathoms.  The  western  side  of  this  channel  is  formed  by  more  shallow  water, 
called  the  Paredas  or  (Walls,)  which  is  very  dangerous.  According  to  the 
report  of  the  native  mariners,  the  tides  are  irregular  on  the  Abrolhos;  the  current 
runs  according  to  the  wind,  and  does  not  run  over  three-tenths  of  a  mile  an  hour. 
The  sounding  shows  no  mud  over  the  whole  extent  we  ascribed  to  the  shallow 
waterof  Abrolhos,  andif  any  isto  be  perceived,  it  is  acertain  sign  you  are  nuionger 
there.  The  nature  of  the  bottom  in  the  Abrolhos  is  white  sandy  stone,  mixed 
with  broken  madrepoio*  in  a  powdered  state.  Sometimes  that  sandy  gruvel  is 
very  firm  and  combined  with  sand  and  roclc,  particularly  in  the  north-east  direc- 
tion. In  the  direction  of  S.  S.  V/.  or  N.  E.  by  West,  the  bottom  is  very  firm 
and  like  tough  mortar,  in  which  tlie  anchors  have  a  good  hold,  though  they 
enter  very  little  into  it.  We  have  no  correct  information  respecting  the  Pare- 
des,  which  are  stated  in  the  chait,  according  to  the  saying  of  the  native  mari- 
ners, beginning  at  th<'  bar  of  Portalegra,  and  ending  at  AlcobaCa. 

The  little  city  of  Pnulo  lies  on  the  mouth  of  the  river  Incurucu,  a  very  deep 
cut  amongst  the  trees,  which  are  numerous  on  the  shore,  at  the  place  where  the 
river  discharges  into  the  sea.  There  is  no  danger  near  the  mouth;  even  at  three 
miles,  there  is  from  10  to  14  fathoms  of  w.iter :  tl>is  depth  remains  the  same 
as  far  as  the  village  of  Columbiana,  situated  E.  S.  E.  of  Mount  Pascal.  Mount 
Pascal  is  to  be  peiceived  even  from  the  Abrolhos. 

E.  by  S.  £8  miles  from  Mount  Pascal,  in  a  direction  north  and  south,  and  it  12 
miles  distance  from  the  coast,  the  water  is  very  shallow,  intermixed  with  rocks. 
That  dangerous  place  is  called  the  Itacolomls,  and  runs  E.  S.  E.  and  S.by  W. 
There  is  not  the  least  danger  by  keeping  away  thirteen  miles  from  the  shore, 
and  when  north  of  Mount  Pascal  the  land  may  be  neared  to  three  miles ;  the 
depth  being  from  11  to  !24  fathoms. 

Mount  Pascal,  as  we  stated  before,  is  the  highest  of  the  mountains  perceived 
from  the  Abrolhos.  The  chain  it  belongs  to  runs  nearly  S.  E.and  N.  W.  The 
southern  part  of  this  mountain  seems  as  if  a  large  square  tower  had  been  built  on 
its  top.  Viewed  from  the  east,  3lount  Pascal  appears  of  a  conical  shape,  and 
being  the  highest  of  the  whole,  it  cannot  be  mistaken. 

The  shore  from  Villa  Prado  up  to  Mount  Pascal,  runs  N.  10^  E.  It  is  low, 
woudy,  and  its  general  appearance  is  very  much  like  the  shore  between  Itacolo- 
mls, and  Mount  Pascal ;  it  diil'ers  only  in  i>ts  yellow  red  colours.  This  red  colour 
increases  more  and  more  towards  Porto  Securo,  and  the  shore  more  high,  and 
steep,  and  the  cow-tree  is  more  numerous  amongst  the  trees  which  cover  the  land. 
If  going  along  the  coast,  you  will  pass  in  succession  the  bars  of  Gramminuan,  of 
Joasima,  of  Frade,  the  small  bay  of  Trancoso,  and  the  church  of  Mossa.  In  Sen- 
horada  Judea,  distant  only  two  miles  from  Porto  Securo ;  the  walls  of  that 
church  being  perfectly  white,  it  is  perceived  amongst  the  trees  at  some  distance : 
there  is  a  small  river  which  empties  in  the  harbour  of  Porto  Securo  ;  on  the  bar 
there  is  18  feet  at  high  water,  and  only  eleven  inside ;  moreover,  there  are  many 
banks,  extending  very  far ;  taking  the  whole  together,  Porto  Securo  is  not  a  good 
place  for  vessels  of  small  size,  and  of  no  use  for  large  ones. 

*  £vcry  kind  of  ttone  supposed  -o  be  formed  by  inBects,  is  called  by  tlioFr«neb,  maUre- 


492 


blunt's 


AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


From  Porto  Sccuro,  to  Rio  Grande,  there  are  twelve  Ie«igue8  distance ;  the  coast 
runs  N.  14°  E.  vary  woody ;  sandy  banks  and  shallow  water,  is  to  be  found  at 
three  miles  distance.  A  new^city  called  Belmonte,  stands  on  the  southern  bank 
of  Rio  Grande :  there  is  but  two  fathoms  of  water  on  the  bar. 

From  Belmonte,  *.o  Fort  San  Georges  d(.s  Ilhcos,  there  are  twenty  leagues  dis- 
tance, steep  shore  and  ecjually  woody ;  depth  of  water  from  seven  to  twenty  fa- 
thoms :  and  at  five  miles  distance,  muddy  bottom  and  broken  madrapore.  At 
half  the  distance  from  Belmonte  to  Fort  St.  Georges,  you  meet  the  Seras  de 
Itaraca,  a  group  of  mountains  on  which  terminates  the  flat  country  beginning 
after  Mount  Pascul ;  the  soutliern  mountain  bears  the  name  of  Commandatuba, 
from  which  the  small  river  derives  its  name.  From  thence,  up  the  bay  of  All 
Saints,  the  coast  offers  the  finest  prospect,  being  well  cultivated  m  the  valley,  and 
the  small  hills  covered  with  wood. 

From  Fort  St.  George,  up  to  the  two  Castclhanos  Ends,  nineteen  leagues 
distance,  the  coast  is  perfectly  secure  :  the  largest  ships  may  approach  it  within 
two  miles,  without  the  least  danger. 

The  Dos  Castelhanos  Ends,  belong  to  a  high  land  joining  to.Ponta  de  Muta,  at 
the  extremity  of  which  stands  the  small  island  of  Quipe.  The  Muta  point  and 
the  island  of  Quipe,  form  a  kind  of  bason,  into  which  empties  the  small  river 
Acarahi,  at  a  short  distance  from  the  small  town  of  Camamu.  The  breakers 
which  obstruct  the  bay,  do  not  permit  vessels  to  go  into  it. 

Beginning  at  this  place  the  coast  seem:  Jivided  into  two,  and  appears  like  two 
islands.  This  appearance  is  produced  by  the  low  land  existing  between  the  two 
hilly  parts,  and  remains  the  same,  till  you  arrive  at  cape  or  Morro  San  Paulo. 

Morro  San  Paulo,  from  the  east  end  ot  the  bar  of  Unha's  River,  may  be 
very  easily  distinguished,  though  not  very  high,  being  higher  than  the  highland, 
which  stands  on  its  sear,  in  the  northern  direction  ;  there  is  on  its  top,  two  sepa- 
rated groups  of  cow-trees  very  apparent.  Morro  San  Paulo  offers  this  particu- 
lar, that  when  near  it,  the  green  verdant  colour  of  its  top  seems  spotted  on  the 
northern  side  with  large  white  stains  :  in  fine  weather  these  white  stains  may  be 
seen  from  fifty-four  miles  distance.  Two  miles  east  of  Morro  San  Paulo  there  is 
17  fathoms,  with  good  muddy  bottom.  North  of  San  Paulo  the  coast  is  low, 
sandy,  and  a  reef  of  rocks  runs  along  within  a  short  distance  of  it.  This  coast 
appears  cit  first  connected  with  the  island  of  Tamarica ;  but  the  land  on  this  island 
is  higher :  the  space  between  the  western  side  of  Itaporica  Island,  and  the  main 
land,  forms  what  is  called  the  fahe  entrance  of  Bahia.  This  channel  is  very 
crooked,  narrow,  and  too  difficult  to  admit  vessels  to  pass. 

A  vessel  may  steer  in  a  straight  direction  from  Morro  San  Paulo  to  Cape  St. 
Antonio  ;  but  if  the  wind  bio  ts  too  strong  toward  the  land,  it  is  better  to  keep  a 
little  more  to  the  N.  W.  until  the  eastern  point  of  Tamarica  Island  stands  north 
of  you. 


Description  of  the  Bay  of  All  Saints  or  Bahia. — Instruetion  to  go  in 

and  out  of  this  Harbour. 


Vessels  bound  to  Bahia  during  the  southern  monsoon  should  make  land  near  San 
Paulo.  If  during  the  northern  monsoon  they  will  do  better  to  make  land  north 
of  Itapuan,  which  is  a  little  further  north  than  Gape  St.  Antonio.  Upon  the 
whole  this  will  depend  on  the  accuracy  of  the  day's  work,  the  actual  situation  of 
the  vessel,  and  the  wind  to  be  met  with  when  near  the  coast.  The  main  en- 
trance of  the  bay  of  Bahia,  called  likewise  St.  Salvador,  is  formed  by  the  Capo 
or  promontory  of  St.  Antonio  on  the  East,  and  by  the  Island  of  Itaparica  on  the 
West.  The  meaner  distance  from  the  Cape  St.  Antonio  to  Itaparica  Island  is 
not  less  than  four  miles,  but  the  one  half  only  of  this  channel,  which  is  towards 
tile  main  land,  is  f>afe  for  navigation  of  large  ships.  If  from  the  Morro  San  Paulo, 
you  iteer  N.  46*^  E.  with  a  favourable  wind,  you  will  pass  at  the  proper  distance 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


495 


of  the  bold  shore  of  Itaparica  IslanC,  aud  of  the  brcnkers  of  St.  Antonio,  but  if. 
you  are  obliged  to  beat,  it  requires  cnre  to  avoid  both  places. 

Nothing  is  to  be  feared  by  keeping  at  equal  distance  from  the  main  land,  on 
which  stand  San  Paulo,  Mount  Arod,  Itaparica,  until  you  discover  towaids  the 
North  the  Jaburu  Point,  which  is  the  Eastt^rn  end  of  Itaparica  Island.  Arrived 
opposite  Point  Aratuba,  you  are  now  seven  miles  from  Jaburu  and  five  miles 
S.  41°  W.  of  Cape  St.  Antonio  ;  and  nearly  three  miles  W.  of  the  southern  ex- 
tremity of  the  breakers  of  St.  Antorio.  From  that  situation  you  must  direct  your 
course  straight  towards  the  Cape  of  St.  Antonio  until  two  miles  only  from  the 
shore;  from  thence  steer  straight  towards  the  church  of  Bom  Fim,  (situated  on 
the  Point  of  Montferrate  until  you  reach  the  Fort  Do  Mars  or  Sant  Marcello 
near  which  is  the  usual  anchorage. 

The  Flat  of  St.  Antonio  lying  four  miles  S.  ^  W.  of  Cape  St.  Antonio, 
there  is  no  difficulty  to  avoid  it,  and  is  altogether  not  very  dangerous.  It  is  a  san* 
dy  bank  of  a  reddish  colour,  no  rocks  are  to  be  met  there,  and  4  fathoms  of 
water  arc  te  be  found  every  where.  Such  is  the  opinion  of  the  natives,  and  of 
the  most  experienced  men ;  but  having  perceived  some  places  where  the  sea 
breaks  on  this  bank  during  strong  wind,  I  would  suggest  to  keep  a  distance  from 
this  place  with  a  large  ship,  which  is  the  case  when  following  the  course  we  have 
described.  The  general  anchorage  for  merchant  vessels  is  inside  of  the  line  drawn 
frona  the  Fort  of  Marto  Montferrate  Point.  It  is  necessary  when  going  to  this 
anchorage  to  avoid  the  sandy  bank  of  Paneila,  which  we  had  no  chance  to  ascer- 
tain, but  it  is  reported  by  the  natives  as  a  very  shallow  water  of  3  to  5^  fathoms 
only,  lying  W.  ^  N.  W.  from  Fort  Do  Mar. 

It  13  generally  the  case,  that  the  wind  permits  you  to  come  to  anchor  in  front 
of  St.  Salvador ;  the  most  prevalent  wind  being  from  E.  and  from  S.  £.  and 
vessels  can  generally  go  in  by  plying  small  board.  During  the  night  time,  the 
breeze  comes  from  several  points  of  the  cumpass,  but  more  generally  from  th» 
land  side.  The  tides  are  perfectly  regular  from  St.  Salvador,  and  the  flood  and 
low  water  last  an  equal  time.  The  harbour  is  very  safe,  and  there  are  only  h 
few  instances  when  a  strong  wind  from  S.  W.  blows,  that  the  water  is  much 
swelled,  and  the  ships  do  not  ride  easy. 

The  course  to  follow  when  going  out  of  St.  Salvador,  is  very  near  the  re- 
verse, to  the  one  to  proceed  in.  When-  one  mile  distant  West  of  Cape  St.  An- 
tonio, and  steering  four  and  a  half  miles  S.  S.  W.  of  the  same,  the  shallow  wa- 
ter will  be  avoided,  and  afterwards  you  may  go  rouad  the  cape  into  the  open 
sea.  AH  the  lands  near  Cape  St.  Antonio  are  tolerably  high,  if  compared  to 
those  of  the  opposite  side.  They  are  of  a  pleasing  appearance,  being  covered 
with  trees,  and  a  luxurious  vegetation  of  a  green  colour.  This  shore  in  fine 
wepther  can  be  discovered  from  thirty  miles  distant.  On  the  end  of  St.  Anto- 
nio Cape,  stands  a'light-hwuse  not  very  high,  which  in  night  time  can  only  be  seen 
from  twelve  to  fifteen  miles :  in  the  day  time  when  the  light-house  hears  W.  the 
Fort  of  St.  Antonio  appears  as  separated  at  a  small  distance  from  the  main  land. 
Two  and  a  half  miles  East,  a  few  degrees  South  of  the  light-house,'  there  is 
another  land  poiut,  on  the  top  of  which  stands  the  poles  for  signals.  This  last 
point  forms  with  the  Itapuanzinho  point,  which  stands  one  mile  E.  of  a  small 
Day ;  many  houses  are  to  be  seen  along  the  sea  coast. 


Description  of  the  Coast  comprised  between  Cape  St.  Antonio,  and 
Olinda  Point,  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Francisco  River,  and  Cape  St. 
Augustine.  ' 

From  Itapuanzinho  Point  up  to  Itapuan,  the  coast  bears  no  longer  the  same 
appearance,  as  it  does  previous  to  your  arrival  at  Bahia.  Here  the  shore  is  but 
sandy  and  low,  few  trees  are  to  be  perceived  pt  a  distance,  and  from  place  to 
place  some  coco-trees.  All  along  the  shore  a  ridge  of  rocks  are  to  be  met,  and 
in  many  Instances  they  rise  above  the  level  of  the  sea ;  the  one  at  the  ItapuMi 


494 


BLONT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


point  particularly  Bceius  Mice  small  islands.  Thirty-eight  miles  farther  F(. 
450  E>  of  Itapu'in  Point,  you  are  opposite  the  Torre  de  Garcia  of  Avila,  a  kind 
of  Fort,  built  on  the  top  of  the  coast,  among  the  trees,  and  which  is  now  used  as 
a  house  for  signals.  The  coast  viewed  from  nine  to  ten  miles  distant,  appears 
like  a  wall  of  grent  magnitude  and  eq  jal  height,  except  wfsere  the  two  rivers  S»n 
Joannes  and  Jacuhype  discharge  into  the  sea,  wheri?  a  large  cut  appears  in  this 
wall.  The  depth  of  the  sea  is  very  great  opposite  this  place,  for  heing  only  ten 
miles  distant,  no  sounding  is  to  be  met.  From  Torre  of  \vila  up  to  Oiteras  of 
San  Miguel,  the  shore  is  more  high,  but  with  small  hills. 

All  the  coast  from  Rio  Real  up  to  Rio  St.  Francisco  is  low  and  sandy,  with 
small  broom  bushes,  and  small  hills  are  discovered  at  no  great  distance  in  the  in- 
terior. A  vessel  may  approach  very  near  the  land,  the  bottom  is  sandy,  with 
gravel  and  broken  rocks.  The  next  river  after  Rio  Real,  is  Rio  Sergipe,  which 
is  twenty-one  miles  distant  from  Vassa  Barris.  The  mouth  of  this  river,  when 
viewed  at  no  great  distance,  is  easily  distinguished  by  the  three  small  hills  of  an 
equal  height,  all  covered  with  briars,  lying  nine  miles  S.  W.  of  the  bar.  These 
hills  are  called  the  Ostres-Irmaos  (or  Three  Brothers.) 

At  the  mouth  of  the  Sergipe  river,  a  very  whhe  sand  beach  is  to  be  seen, 
whose  colour  strikes  with  the  green  ground  of  the  coast  all  around.  At  the  bar, 
the  sea  breaks  with  great  force  at  the  time ;  from  what  we  must  infer  a  shallow 
water.  The  rivers  which  come  next  in  succession  are  Cotomheda  river  near  the 
Miserias  Point,  and  Japaratuba  points  south  of  the  mountains  of  Pacatuba  ;  the 
country  round  Colindiba  river  is  one  of  the  most  productive  in  Sugar,  Cotton, 
Tobacco,  &J.  There  are  but  seven  feet  water  at  the  bar.  When  viewing  the 
bar  W.  the  Mount  Aracajou  stands  a  few  leagues  N.  W.  and  in  the  West  Morro 
Telha  is  discovered.  The  Mount  Arcajou  sewns  to  run  in  a  parallel  direction  with 
the  coast,  and  in  its  Northern  extremity  a  deep  cut  is  to  be  perceived.  The  second 
mount  bears  the  shape  of  a  Quaker's  Hat.  The  coast  from  Rio  Idaparatuba,  up 
to  Si.  Fraucisco  river,  is  very  dangerous  in  a  strong  S.  K.  wind  lor  vessels  going 
near  the  land,  they  having  no  good  chance  to  escape  the  wind,  and  the  bottom 
too  hard  for  the  anchor  to  have  a  good  hold  i:i  it.  Prudence  requires  to  keep  at 
«ome  distance  from  it. 

Near  St.  Francisco  rivm-  tae  land  is  very  low,  and  cannot  be  seen  even  at  a 
abort  distance,  for  which  1  eason  great  care  is  required  to  make  land  near  St.  Fran- 
cisco. The  only  mountain  to  Ke  discovered  at  a  distance  are  the  Itabayanna  and 
Pacatuba,  but  only  in  fine  cirar  weather,  and  whcne.iactiy  opposite  the  river  S(. 
Francisco.  The  entrance  tf  this  river  lies  south  of  Manguinha  Point,  which 
is  very  low  and  all  covered  with  Mongel  trees.  It  projects  E.  S.  E.  and  at 
one  and  a  half  mile  distant  from  it,  in  its  direction,  there  are  dangerous  breakers. 
The  North  of  the  entrance  is  formed  by  h  land  more  low  than  the  former,  having- 
a  white  sand,  and  in  its  projection  into  the  sta  there  are  no  less  dangerous  breakers, 
than  on  the  other  Southern  points.  It  is  between  these  breakers  you  must  cast 
anchor  until  a  Pilot  comes  on  the  bar.  There  are  from  twelve  to  th^teen  feet 
water,  the  country  is  very  populous,  well  cultivated,  and  produces  great  quanti- 
ties of  Sugar;  when  near,  the  land  from  St.  FranciscoYiver  up  to  Alagoas  is  low 
and  sandy,  and  a  ridge  of  rocks  at  no  great  distanc«^  from  the  shore  are  to  be 
seen.  Many  small  rivers  discharge  into  the  sea,  but  r.ont  of  a  sutKcient  depth  to 
be  navigated;  they  may  be  approached  very  near  without  danger. 

Opposite  Cururippe,  three  miles  distant  fr  jm  the  shore,  stands  the  rock  of  Dom 
Rodrigo  ;  this  rock,  as  well  as  several  smaller  ones  to  be  seen  only  at  low  water 
mark,  have  been  designat-d  by  some  as  the  Cosmographer  Banks  of  St.  Fran- 
cisco, and  stated  to  be  very  dangerous,  but  without  the  least  reason.  We  found 
aU  around  this  place  a  great  depth  of  water,  and  the  shallow  v/ater  will  not  ex- 
tend ovtir  three  miles.  In  supposing  it  to  extend  as  far  as  the.  I(]uia,  as  there  is 
no  reason  to  keep  so  near  the  land  one  will  do  better  at  all  events,  to  remain  at  a 
greater  distance  than  four  miles.  An  important  observation  is  to  be  made  on 
this  part  of  the  Brazil  coast,  and  agreed  to  by  the  natives  which  is  this,  that  the 
land  breeze  during  the  night  time  is  hardly  perceived,  when  four  or  Ave  miles  from 
Che  land,  but  at  day-ligh:;  it  begins  to  reach  that  distance,  and  seems  to  attract  the 
Eastern  wind  towards  the  north  until  twelve  in  the  morning ;  and  afterward! 


BLUNT^S 


AMERICAIf  COAST  PILOT. 


495 


the  Eaiitern  wind  returns  Kradtially  towards  the  East ;  from  that  Aict  Tesiels  may 
derive  some  beneilt  on  either  course  when  obliged  to  beat.  Near  San  Miguel  the 
shore  is  very  bold  and  nearly  eighty  feet  high,  and  the  top  perfectly  even  and  hori- 
zontal for  an  open  space  of  Hfteen  miles.  When  coming  from  the  southernmost, 
the  village  of  Macayo  ia  to  bo  discovered  on  the  top  of  a  highland  ;  the  church  is 
easily  distinguished  ;  and  for  this  reason  the  place  deserves  notice.  The  Jaragua 
river  empties  below  Macayo,  and  the  point  which  forms  the  northern  land  of  the 
mouih  is  covered  with  coco-trces,  and  the  very  animated  breakeru  arc  to  be 
seen  at  some  distance  in  its  direction.  North  of  Macayo  and  from  the  interior, 
the  mount  of  Marambaya  is  discovered  even  at  forty-five  '^  lies  distant.  This 
mount  oflfers  this  particular,  that  the  country  on  which  it  stands  though  high,  is 
very  level  on  every  side  of  its  base.  The  shore  north  uf  Macayo  is  sandy,  and 
from  place  to  place  of  a  reddish  colour,  low  trees  are  seen  not  distant  from  the 
shore.  The  Fort  of  Tamandare,  thouyjh  not  very  important,  deserves  some  no- 
tice, being  the  only  place  aflbrding  a  sufe  shelter  between  Bahia  and  Peruambu- 
co.  This  anchorage  is  ferm'-d  by  a  deep  cut  into  a  bold  shore,  and  is  sufficientr 
ly  large  and  deep  fur  admitting  large  vessels. 

Nine  mile?  N.  J  N.  E.  of  Tamandare  harbour,  lies  the  small  island  or  rocks  of 
Alexo,  situated  at  the  mouth  of  the  small  river  Serenhen.  Previous  to  your 
arrival  there,  the  bar  of  Rio  Fermoso  is  discovered.  When  you  observe 
the  two  rocks  of  Alexo  together,  they  stand  N.  6°  W.  then  north  of  these 
two  rocks  Monte  Do  Sella  is  discovered  in  the  interior,  which  derives  its  name 
from  its  shape  (Little  Saddle,)  and  may  be  useful  to  ascertain  the  situation  of  a 
ship. 

Being  a  few  miles  East  of  the  rocks  of  St.  Alexo,  you  will  distinctly  perceive 
the  Cape  of  St.  Augustine,  lying  sixteen  miles  N.  18*^  E.  This  Cape  is  hardly 
covered  with  wood,  and  not  very  thick ;  it  is  of  a  moderatt;  height  which  decrea- 
ses gradually  towards  tin-  sea.  It  ofl'ers  the  particular  remark,  that  a  steep  bvach 
ol  a  red  yellow  colour  is  to  be  seen  in  many  places  of  it ;  it  has  a  barren  prospect 
Avhen  nearing  it ;  on  its  tup  there  is  a  cliui'ch  ;  towards  the  north  side,  a  little  he> 
low  the  church,  furtilicatiuns  are  to  be  seen. 


Description  of  Pernambuco  Bay,  and  instructions  to  sail  ip  and  out  of  it. 

Cape  St.  Antonio  is  the  land,  vessels  bound  to  *Pernambuco,  must  endeavour 
to  make  first.  The  coast  north  of  Cape  Antonio  forms  a  bay,  in  the  centre  of 
which  lies  Pernambuco.  At  the  extreme  end  of  this  coast  N.  17°  E.  stands 
Olinda  Point;  halfway  from  Oliuda Point  to  Semambius,  the  church  of  Nossa 
Senhora  Do  Rosario  is  built  on  a  height ;  its  two  towers  are  easily  distinguished 
when  cotring  from  the  main  sea  ;  going  along  the  coast  at  two  to  four  miles  dis- 
tance, there  are  12  to  19  fathoms  water. 

When  you  have  ascertained  Cape  St.  Antonio,  you  must  keep  at  two  or  three 
miles  from  the  shore,  until  yoa  perceive  the  Fort  of  Picao,  between  the  N.  W. 
and  W.  N.  W.  and  then  steer  in  a  straight  line  to  the  Fort  built  on  the  breakers, 
and  you  will  near  it  until  the  Coco-tree  of  Olinrla  (which  stands  between  the  two 
highest  buildings  of  the  city)  appears  N.  |  E.  of  you.  In  this  situation  you  will 
stand  within  two  or  three  thousand  yards  of  the  breakers,  which  form  a  key. 
This  anchorage  is  not  of  the  best,  large  ships  ought  never  go  nearer,  and  it  is 
prudent  never  to  cast  anchor  in  bad  weather.  West  of  the  meridian  of  the  Coco- 
tree  of  Olinda,  notwithstanding  the  Cv/itrary  is  generally  prescribed  going  to 
Pernambuco  durii.g  the  northern  monsoon,  it  is  best  to  make  land  on  Olinda 
Point.  From  Olinda  Point  up  to  the  Fort  of  Picao,  there  is  a  shoal  extending 
two  miles  from  the  shore  towards  the  sea,  v.hlch  makes  it  necessary  to  keep  at 
three  miles  distance,  and  by  a  depth  of  water  from  8  to  10  fathoms,  until  the 
Fort  Picao  stands  West,  a  few  degrees  towards  the  North,  by  which  you  will 
avoid  the  English  bank,  v.hlch  is  formed  by  sandy  rocks  lying  at  the  southern 
end  of  Olinda  bank.    That  docs  not  extend  further  East  than  the  meridian  of 

*  At  the  entrance  of  Pernambuco  a  light-bouse  it  erected,  showing  a  retolvmg  light. 


«■.**,*<  *,^- 


496 


BLUWrs    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


Olinda  City,  nor  farther  south  than  the  parallel  of  Fort  Cicsco.  The  •<>•  breaki 
there  wkh  great  violence  in  heavy  wind,  tiiough  there  are  2  fathonRt  of  water. 
Small  vessels  may  turn  round  it,  going  W.  to  N.  keeping  at  half  a  mile  from  the 
main  land  from  Pernambuco  up  to  Olinda  Point,  but  this  vessel  shall  not  re- 
quire over  3  to  5  fathoms,  and  it  is  indisputable  to  have  on  board  a  Pilot  of  ibe 
place. 

The  harbour  of  Pernambuco  is  not  a  very  safe  one,  for  vessels  of  a  great  draught 
of  water  are  not  able  to  cross  the  bar ;  for  the  swell  of  the  sea  is  very  great  out- 
side, and  if  too  near  the  show,  there  will  Iw  great  danger  should  the  anchor  drag 
or  the  ship  fall  to  the  leeward,  when  getting  under  sail,  which  may  come  in- 
dispensable should  the  wind  turn  S.  S.  E.  or  B.  N.  E.  as  is  the  case  in  the  month 
of  March  and  September.  During  the  northern  monsoon  the  prevalent  windy 
are  from  the  East,  particularly  at  a  time  of  new  or  full  moon,  and  though  the 
weather  is  clear  and  fin*  generally,  yet  it  requires  to  be  carefiii  in  the  anchorage, 
and  the  surest  will  be  not  to  cast  anchor  too  near  the  shore,  the  bottom  being  very 
rocky  and  requisite  to  make  use  of  chain  cables  in  this  place  more  than  in 
any  other.  Large  vessels  will  do  well  to  be  all  times  in  readiness  to  get  under 
sail,  and  prudence  requires  to  let  fall  every  evening  a  second  anchor  for  safety 
during  the  night. 

If  there  is  any  necessity  to  remain  a  certain  time  at  Pernambuco,  the  best  way 
will  bo  to  cast  the  two  anchors  off  cat-head,  toward  the  main  sea,  with  another 
toward  the  W.  N.  W.  on  the  stern  of  the  ship,  in  order  to  prevent  the  ship  from 
swinging  during  the  calm  which  comes  after  ever}'  squall  of  wind. 

The  harbour  uf  Pernambuco  is  sufficiently  spacious  and  deep  for  vessels  from 
10  to  12  feet  draught  of  v/ater:  it  is  divided  into  two  parts;  the  interior  part 
which  is  called  the  Poco,  (the  Well)  is  an  anchorage  situated  on  the  northern  end. 
The  entrance  is  formed  by  several  rocks  or  banks  of  small  stones.  There  are 
from  17  to  30  feet  water  on  the  bar,  as  well  as  insioe.  The  shore  is  sandy,  and 
the  water  decreases  in  depth,  in  proportion  as  you  go  toward  the  land.  The  on- 
ly guard  vessels  have  from  the  winds  coming  from  the  sea,  are  the  rocks  cr 
breakers  before  stated ;  but  they  are  very  deficient  for  that  purpose,  and  during 
the  southern  monsoon  this  place  is  not  at  all  safe.  The  second  part  of  the  fort 
is  called  Recife  Port :  it  is  comprised  between  the  natural  quay  of  rocks  and  tha 
city  :  it  is  also  called  Moaqwirao.  This  harbour  is  better  guarded  than  the  for- 
mer, by  the  quay  of  rocks,  which,  at  low  water  mark,  are  from  8  to  10  feet 
above  the  sea ;  hut  to  reach  iu  the  Mosqueirao,  it  is  necessary  to  cross  the  bar, 
on  which,  at  low  water  mark,  there  are  but  7  feet  water. 

If  you  wish  to  rarry  your  vessel  in  the  Poco  harbour,  you  must  proceed  as 
follows.  Being  situated  as  we  have  already  stated,  inside  of  the  English  bank, 
the  coco-tree  of  Olinda  N.  h  E.  of  you,  you  must  see  a  small  pyramid  built  on 
the  shore,  in  a  straight  line  with  the  church  of  San  Amarao,  which  is  surrounded 
with  coco-trees;  in  this  situation  the  church  and  pyramid  stand  very  near  the 
west  of  the  wood,  and  you  must  follow  that  direction  until  you  perceive  south 
.of  you  the  Fort  Picao.  If  you  wish  to  go  into  Mosqueirao  you  will  have  to  steer 
S.  il  W.  from  that  place. 

Small  vesseh  sometimes  uaed  to  pass  through  the  south  entrance  to  reach 
Mosqueirao,  which  is  at  the  northern  end  of  the  quay  of  rocks  whereon  Fort  Pi- 
cao is  built.  The  mark  to  direct  your  course  in  this  case  is,  to  keep  the  two  cor- 
ner towers  of  tlie  southern  end  of  Fort  Brun  in  the  same  direction,  and  conse- 
quently the  one  covering  the  other,  and  true  west;  sail  in  this  direction  until  you 
see  the  Fort  Picao  south  of  you  ;  then  steer  along  the  western  side  of  the  break- 
ers, and  you  will  reach  the  harbour.  There  is  no  great  danger  in  going  near  the 
breakers;  it  is  customary  with  pilots,  when  called,  to  come  to  take  vessels  lying 
in  the  bay.  We  again  repeat,  that  vessels  trading  with  Pernambuco  must  not 
draw  over  from  10  to  12  feet  water. 

The  two  harbours  of  Pcrnamf)uco  are  s.ifer  than  l!ie  bay,  ships  being  sheltered 
from  the  too  great  swell  of  the  sea  by  the  breakers  or  quay  of  rocks  ;  but  when 
the  wind  stands  east  and  blows  hard,  it  requires  to  be  well  secured. 

The  prevalent  winds  are  as  in  the  tropical  climate,  from  S.  S.  E.  to  N.  N.  E. 
from  March  to  September  they  are  more  toward  the  south,  and  sometimes  S.  W. 
duririg  the  other  six  months  they  stand  E-  N.  E.  and  N.N. E. 


BLUNT^S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


497 


is;  but  when 


Description  of  tht  Cape  and  Banks  of  St.  Roque. 

The  Cape  of  St.  Roque  ndinits  hardly  any  description,  for  nothing  particular 
eiistfl  by  which  this  cxue  may  he  distinguished  from  tlic  sandy  heach.  Th«  e(^•. 
lour  of  thu  sand  is  white,  but  in  some  places  appears  uf  a  reddish  tin^e,  ovring 
to  the  reflection  of  the  light,  and  by  this  reaMn  is  not  a  very  certain  guide. 
From  place  to  place  bushes  arc  to  he  seen  on  the  top  of  tl>e  beach,  and  soma 
trees  can  be  discoTcred  far  in  the  interior,  which  is  not  the  case  in  coming  from 
the  south.  Cape  St.  Roque  is  not,  in  fact,  thu  most  extreme  end  of  this  great 
elbow  of  the  South  American  land,  fur  the  direction  of  the  shore  remains  near- 
ly the  same  twenty  miles  farther,  and  it  U  only  at  Calcanar  Point  that  it  changes 
its  course  to  N.  N.  W. 

From  St.  Roque  the  land  lowers  more  and  more,  and  eight  miles  distant  it 
forms  Cape  Petetinga,  which  cape  ufTers  no  more  particulars  than  St.  Roqucr 
and  the  beach  is  of  the  same  white  sand. 

The  Portuguese  cosmographer,  Pimentel,  admits  that  near  Cape  Petetinga 
there  is  a  good  watering-place  for  ships,  but  we  had  no  chance  to  ascertain  that 
fact. 

Near  Cape  Petetinga  the  soundings  begin  to  indicate  the  shallow  water  of  the 
Banks  of  St.  Roque.  This  shoal  runs  in  a  direction  parallel  with  the  shore, 
aearly  sixty  miles,  and  the  average  breadth  may  be  considered  six  miles.  The 
channel  between  them  and  the  main  land  is  from  five  to  six  miles  wide,  and  it  it 
reported  that  vessels  of  a  leas  draught  of  water  than  7  or  8  feet,  can  pass  with- 
out the  least  «:  mger.  The  greatest  distance  from  the  northern  shoal  to  St. 
Roque  is  twenty  miles. 

Notwithstanding  the  small  height  of  the  shore  near  these  shoals,  in  fine  and 
clear  weather,  it  may  be  discovered  before  you  reach  them. 

The  whole  extent  we  ascribe  to  the  shallow  water  is  not  equally  dangerouf# 
and  it  is  reported  that  places  exist  where  large  ships  may  cross  them.  Aa  the 
whole  coast  is  of  very  little  interest,  one  will  do  better  to  keep  at  a  distance 
from  it. 

The  eastern  breaker  stands  twelve  miles  distant  from  Calcanar  Point;  the 
sea  seldom  breaks  over  it.  The  next,  west  of  the  former,  and  ei^ht  miles  dis- 
tant from  dos  tres  Irmaoa  Point,  h  called  the  Lavandera,  and  the  third  one,  called 
the  Ureas,  stands  twelve  miles  N.  i  N.  E.  from  Tubaroa  Point,  and  opposite  St. 
Alberto  Bay.  The  sea  breaks  constantly  with  great  force  on  these  two  last,  par* 
ticularly  when  the  wind  blows  from  the  sea. 

By  keeping  at  a  reasonable  distance,  there  is  not  the  least  danger  to  be  appre- 
hended. We  found  the  soundings  increasing  regularly  and  very  fast,  towards 
the  sea ;  the  surest  proof  that  no  more  shallow  water  is  to  be  met,  though  in 
many  charts  another  shoal  is  marked,  E.  £0*^  N.  of  this  place :  this  we  consider 
as  an  error,  for  the  reasons  previously  stt^ted. 

The  soundings  are  of  no  service  to  indicate  the  approach  of  this  place ;  the 
nature  of  the  bottom  seems  to  be  the  same  every  where,  and  we  found  it  always 
a  mixture  of  white  madrepore?,  intermixed  witit  sand,  and  in  some  instancea 
with  gravel. 

The  green  colour  of  the  water,  like  every  shallow  water,  deserves  more  no- 
tice,  and  you  may  consider  you.tielf  safe,  as  long  as  you  have  not  reached  this 
green  water. 

The  current  runs  N.  N.  W.  and  N.  W.  at  the  rate  of  nearly  two  miles  an  hour; 
and  the  tide  rises  from  6  to  10  feet,  according  to  the  new  or  full  moon. 


Description  of  St.  Marco  Bay. 

St.  Marco  Bay  is  that  part  of  the  sea  comprised  between  the  western  coast 
of  *Maranham  and  the  main  land ;  its  entrance  lies  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.  it» 

'*'  Near  the  coast  of  Maranham  there  is  a  rock  of  the  most  dangerous  nature  which  eaa 
be  met  with  at  aea~being  a  bank  of  sharp  rocks,  intermixed  with  sand,  almost  conical  Id 
shape,  about  three  miles  in  length  firom  the  E.  |  S.  E.  to  W.  i  N.  W.  and  about  half  a  mile 
frem  north  to  south.    The  rocks  are  separated  by  interrals  more  or  less  lat^ge,  in  wUeW 

63 


498 


BLUNrS    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


length  is  orer  >eTcnty-two  miles,  and  its  width  six  miles :  every  where  the  depth 
of  water  is  flu(Kvi«nt  for  large  vessels,  even  fur  frigates,  which  may  cast  anchor 
near  the  harbour  of  St.  Luis,  situated  on  the  western  coast  of  the  island  of 
Maranham. 

The  prevalent  winds  being  from  the  east,  vessels  bound  to  Maranham  must  en- 
deavour to  make  the  ftrst  land  east  of  the  island,  except  in  case  of  a  fair  and  fa- 
voiirable  wind  from  north  to  west. 

It  has  b«en  already  st<Ucd  that  the  white  sandy  beach,  called  Laneves  Grandcs, 
is  the  first  land  a  vessel  bound  to  Maranham  must  endeavour  to  make;  but  it  is 
proper  to  observe,  that,  by  an  error  in  the  day's  work,  you  may  be  deceived, 
and  mistake  the  Laneves  Pequenas  for  the  Laneves  Grandes,  and  in  such  case 
consider  yourself  west  of  the  Perguicus,  when  in  fact  you  will  be  on  the  east  of 
this  shallow  water :  to  prevent  such  an  error,  the  surest  way  will  be  to  keep  at 
ten  or  twelve  miles  distance  from  the  shore,  with  from  6  to  10  fathoms  of  water, 
and  sail  along  the  coast  until  you  re<ich  the  green  Mangel  shore;  from  this  point 
you  must  steer  west,  and  very  soon  after  you  will  discover  the  breakers  of  St. 
Ann  Island,  and  the  island  itself.  Now  you  must  direct  your  course  round 
the  breakers  of  St.  Ann  at  two  or  three  miles  distance,  until  north  of  them, 
and  you  will  be  certain  to  have  passed  them  when  St.  Ann  Island  shall  stand 
south  a  few  degrees  east  of  you. 

We  have  already  described  St.  Ann  Island,in  page  489,  and  what  distinguishes 
it  from  the  Monigel  coast.  Having  passed  the  northern  breakers  of  St.  Ann,  you 
must  steer  again  west,  a  few  degrees  north,  until  you  discover  the  breakers  of 
Corao  Grande,  which  you  may  approach  as  near  as  the  former.  From  this 
point  you  may  proceed  to  the  harbour  by  two  different  courses  :  if  yoi^  intend 
to  follow  the  first  course,  then  you  must  steer  round  Corao  Grande,  keeping  at 
a  regular  distance,  with  10  or  l!2  fathoms  of  water ;  if  the  second,  you  coast 
along  the  western  shore  of  Maranham  Island.  We  have  already  stated,  that  Ma- 
ranham Island  is  easily  distinguished  from  Santa  Ann  Island  by  its  greater  height, 
and  its  white  shore  towards  the  north. 

The  first  point  to  be  discovered,  when  keeping  close  to  the  Maranham  Island, 
is  Cape  St.  Marcos,  from  which  the  bay  derives  its  name.  It  is  a  high  land  of 
very  great  declivity,  on  the  top  of  which  a  house  is  to  be  discovered,  with  a  mast 
for  a  signal.  This  cape  and  land  project  into  the  seu,  and  800  yards  from  the 
sea-shore,  there  are  many  rocks  and  sandy  breakers,  which  you  must  not  ap- 
proach, being  very  dangerous* 

Keeping  always  the  same  course,  S.  W.  and  S.  W.  \  S.  you  will  very  soon 
reach  the  parallel  of  the  small  fort  of  San  Antonio  de  la  Barra,  situated  at  the 
point  of  Areias,  which  forms  the  northern  point  of  St.  Luis  Harbour.  That 
point  being  part  of  the  rocks  and  sandy  bank  above  stated,  it  will  be  dangerous 
to  approach  too  near,  as  long  as  you  stand  west  of  it,  but  when  you  shall  bavtt 
sailed  beyond  this  cape,  you  may  cast  anchor. 


Maranham  to  Para. 

Para  or  Grand  Para,  is  the  northernmost  province  of  Brazil,  and  is  celebrated  for 
its  cotton,  sugar,  vanilla,'  chocolate,  and  cofiee.  The  coast,  from  the  Bay  of  J!l[a- 
ranham  to  Para,  is  generally  low  and  sandy,  and  has  many  little  isles,  of  the 
same  description,  with  numerous  coves  and  rivulets.  Pimentel  has  described 
the  whole,  but  his  description  is  not  adapted  to  the  use  of  the  modern  navigator, 
unused  to  creep  along  the  shore.     Some  of  it  may,  however,  be  useful.     A  ves- 

ttaere  is  from  8  to  10  fathoms  water,  wbila  the  summits  of  the  conical  rocks  are  above  the 
•urface.  Latitude  by  our  observation  is  52'  27"  S.  and  longitude  O'^  1'  30''  £.  of  the  meridian 
of  Fort  San  Antoni  de  luuranham,  (long-  west  of  Paris  46'^  36'  14")  or  about  twenty-fire 
leagues  north  of  the  point  of  departure  of  vessels  from  Maranham,  three  leagues  east  of  the 
small  hill  called  Itaculumi ;  variation  of  the  compass  0°  57'  E.  The  above  differs  from  Ar- 
rewsmith's  Chart  five  leagues  in  latitude,  and  seven  in  longitude,  and  sufficiently  account* 
for  the  mrny  unfortunate  accidents  which  it  has  occasioned. 

M.  de  Sylva,  of  the  Brazilian  navy,  on  his  passage  to  Java,  saw  breakers  in  lat.  0°32'  S. 
long.  44^  18'  from  Greemvicbj  it  ia  suppsied  to  b«  a  continuation  of  the  Bank  of  St.  Louii> 


DLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


499 


sel,  he  lays,  liound  from  Maranlnm  to  P:irn,  should  take  her  ilepnrture  in  the 
morning,  advance  to  tht)  anr.horaeu  off  the  Aracaji,  or  cliflf,  iilroady  dencribed, 
Ihenco  Htund  out  to  una.  to  hoyoncl  tho  Shoals  of  Cuma,  (or  Carnaveros  Banlci,) 
which  may  he  effected  in  a  run  of  eiglit  leagueH.  Havini;  parsed  thene,  you  ap- 
proach the  sand-bunk  stretching;  from  the  western  shore,  and  over  which  there 
are  6,  10,  7,  6,  5,  7,  and  C  fathoms.  Thus,  you  may  proceed  to  the  N.  N.  W.  or 
N.  W.  by  N.  to  the  distance  of  twenty-two  leagues,  when  the  ground  of  the 
bank,  white  sand  with  black  specks,  will  be  succeeded  by  coarse  sand  and  stones, 
or  brown  sand  and  broken  shells,  with  IS  to  I7  and  20  fathoms  of  water-*  Here 
you  will  he  off  the  island  of  St.  Joao,  or  St.  John,  and  near  the  parallel  of  one  de- 
gree south. 

The  island  of  St.  Joao  is  nearly  level  with  the  sea,  and  about  three  leagues 
Jong,  from  E.  N.  E.  to  W.  S.W.  Between  the  N.E.  end  of  this  island  and 
Point  Turivazo  to  the  W.  N.  W.  the  distance  is  about  nine  leagues.  The  bay 
between  affords  shelter,  and  vessels  may  anchor  on  tlic  N.  VV.  Hide  of  St.  John's 
Island,  in  from  6  to  4  fathoms,  sandy  grounu. 

At  the  distance  of  eighteen  leagues  W.  N.  W.  from  Turivazo  Point  is  Caj)e 
€iurupi,  over  which  is  a  mountain,  insulated,  and  therefore  remarkable.  This 
mount  is  several  leagues  inland,  and  near  it  is  another,  somewhat  smaller  and 
rounder.  The  coast  here,  as  in  other  parts,  is,  however,  low,  level  and  sandy, 
covered  with  a  dark  brush-wood,  and  from  the  point  a  shoal,  with  breakers,  ex- 
tends three  miles  out  to  sea. 

From  Cape  Gurupi  to  the  River  Cayte,  on  the  western  bank  of  which  is  a 
small  town  of  the  same  name,  the  distance  is  twenty-four  leagues,  on  a  course 
nearly  west.  At  the  entrance  of  this  river,  on  the  eastern  side,  are  several  low 
islets,  of  the  same  name.  Off  the  shore,  throughout  this  extent,  the  bottom  is 
generally  flat,  and  there  is  commonly  7  and  8  fathoms  at  three  leagues  off,  with 
dear  ground. 

From  the  Cayte  to  the  Inlet  of  Maraamo,  the  distance,  W.  by  N.  is  twelve  and 
a  half  leagues.  In  sailing  alimg  it  is  proper  to  keep  two  or  three  leagues  off 
shore,  in  soundings  of  7  and  8  fathoms.  The  coast  here  is  distinguished  by  a 
range  or  chain  of  white  sand-hills,  the  highest  of  which,  Piraussu  Hill,  is  about 
three  and  a  half  leagues  westward  of  Cayte  Point,  the  western  point  of  the  mouth 
of  the  Cayte.  Piraussu  Hill  appears  like  a  high,  bluff,  and  perpendicular  point, 
«lose  to  the  sea,  with  red  cliffs  on  its  eastern  side. 

At  five  and  a  half  leagues  W.  by  N.  from  Piraussu  Hill  is  Point  Ataxia,  distin- 
guished by  a  watch-tower,  having  a  gun,  which  is  occasionally  fired  when  a  ves- 
sel is  approaching.  On  making  (his,  and  keeping  a  good  look-out,  the  smoke 
may  be  seen.  At  this  place  are  two  eminences  of  white  sand,  and  immediately 
west  of  the  point  is  the  Inlet  or  Bay  of  Maracuno,  having  5  and  6  fathoms  of 
water,  and  good  ground. 

RIO  PARA. — Point  Tigioca,  the  eastern  point  of  the  mouth  of  the  Para,  Is 
nine  leagues  wesf  from  Atasia  Point :  and  within  this,  at  the  distance  of  seven 
miles  to  the  S.  W.  is  Point  Tapua.  Here  an  extensive  bank  extends  two  leagues 
from  shore  between  the  two  points,  and  to  the  northward  are  the  Tigioca  shoals 
and  breakers,  the  positions  and  nature  of  which  can  be  understood  only  by  re- 
ference to  the  charts.  The  passage  in  is  between  these  shoals,  and  has  a  depth 
of  12,  11,  and  15  fathoms,  at  about  eleven  miles  from  the  southern  shore,  in  lati- 
tude 0°  23'  S^  There  is,  also,  a  channel  for  small  vessels,  at  five  miles  from 
«hore,  and  along  the  edge  of  the  Baxo  do  Boronoco,  the  bank  which  extends  from 
Point  Tigioca,  as  already  notieed. 


Directions  for  Para. 

Vessels  bound  to  Para  should  endeavour  to  make  the  land  about  Salina  or 
Cayte,  which  lies  to  the  eastward  of  Salina,  and  is  remarkable  for  its  white 
sand  hills,  steering  to  the  westward,  keeping  the  land  in  sight  6  or  7  miles  dis- 
tant, you  will  make  the  point  Atasia,  which  has  a  house  near  its  extreme  po''^£, 

and  immediately  after  will  see  the  village  of  Salina,  which  faces  the  sea,  and 

I  •  ■  -        ■  '      .f    ■  .11 

i  *  According  to  a  late  survey. 


■i«i,**-.-- 


**%t*'N!R?/'- 


500 


RLUNT^S    AMERICAN    COAST    FILCT. 


mttly  pereeiTed  In  dear  weather  by  its  white  buildingfi.  Httra  ressels  tiiko  a 
pilot  for  PHra,  and  if  une  should  not  come  off  by  msking  u  signal,  you  will  Uhtu 
to  send  the  boat  on  shore  for  one. 

Should  you  not,  see  SHiinas,  or  find  any  difficulty  in  procuring  a  pilot,  by  at- 
tending to  the  following  directions  you  will  find  n»  diinriilty  in  passing  the  shoals, 
or  going  up  the  river. 

The  land  between  Salinas  and  Tigioca  r.ins  about  W.  by  N.  about  4  leagues. 
To  the  westward  of  Sallna  you  will  see  a  point  of  land,  S.  W.  of  which  are  two 
remarkable  white  sand  hills,  and  by  keeping  a  good  look  out  at  the  mast-head 
you  cannot  pass  them  without  seeing  them,  they  being  the  only  thing  remarka- 
ble between  Salinas  and  Tigioca,  and  is  a  good  departure  to  run  between  the 
shoals.  Tigioca  lies  about  17  miles  to  the  westwnnl  of  this  land,  and  is  a  low 
point.  You  will  have  running  along  11,  12, 14and  15  fathoms  water  channel  way, 
and  be  careful  in  sounding ;  come  no  nearer  the  land  than  9  or  10  miles,  as  you 
approach  Tigioca,  for  fear  of  getting  into  the  swell,  which  is  a  dangerous  place, 
and  oftentimes  deceives  strangers  by  supposing  it  to  be  a  good  channel  inside, 
*8  most  of  the  b.ioks  and  charts  represent,  but  should  never  be  attempted  by 
any.  The  well  (or  entrance  of  do.)  is  about  5  or  6  miles  to  the  north  and  east- 
ward of  Point  Tigioca,  and  lias  from  20  to  23  fathoms  water ;  by  getting  that 
soundings  you  may  judge  immediately  you  are  in  the  well,  for  there  is  no  such 
foundings  any  where  about  that  part  of  the  coast ;  haul  oif  as  soon  as  possible  to 
1h(i  south  and  east,  to  avoid  the  Bruganca  Bank,  for  in  that  soundings  you  are 
not  far  off  danger,  perhaps  the  next  soimdings  you  may  not  have  more  than  2 
or  S  fathoms  and  less,  as  I  have  found  it  to  be  the  case  in  going  through  that 
chaniiul  with  a  boat,  andshumled  all  the  way,  sometimes  not  6  feet,  and  break- 
ers both  sides.  I  have  been  the  more  exact  in  pointing  out  the  danger  of  this 
chaned,  that  it  may  never  be  attempted  by  any,  and  if  unfortunately  you  should 
happen  to  get  in,  and  your  water  shoalenS;  if  flood  tide,  come  to  anchor  and 
(Wait  for  the  ebb,  and  then  yuu  should  not  haul  off  the  land  too  sudden,  for  fear 
of  the  Braganca  Bank,  which  is  inside  of  you,  and  which  you  cannot  avoid  see- 
ing, as  it  breakn  constantly  unless  at  high-water,  and  the  sea  perfectly  smooth, 
which  seldom  happeiis  lo  be  the  case  that  a  vessel  can  pass  it  without  seeing. 

Runumg  for  tht  channel  betwetn  Tigioca  and  Braganca  Banks. 

When  you  make  Tigioca  Point  from  the  mast  head,  and  running  along  the 
land  so  that  you  can  see  it  plain  from  the  deck  (say  9  or  10  miles)  you  will  souii 
discover  the  Braganca  breakers  from  aloft,  which  break  very  high  on  the  lar- 
board hand  going  in,  and  is  the  best  mark  to  run  in  by.  The  tide  runs  very  ra- 
pid in  this  channel,  and  the  sea  at  times,  and  for  the  most  considerable.  The 
ripple  caused  by  the  tide  at  times  appears  to  a  stranger  like  shoal  water,  where 
there  is  probably  from  14  to  15  fathoms  water,  and  while  the  Braganca  iii  in 
«ight  you  need  not  be  apprehensive  of  any  danger,  for  the  bank  is  steep  closu  tn 
the  breakers,  and  you  should  pass  within  2  miles  of  them  or  even  less,  and  when 
Tigioca  Point  bears  about  S.  C.  by  S.  Braganca  distant  about  2  or  3  miles,  you 
««y  haul  up  about  S.  W.  to  avoid  Tigioca  shoal,  which  lies  outside  of  you, 
and  stretches  to  the  south  and  west,  and  breaks  heavy  at  the  east  part;  but 
seldom  seen  going  through  this  channel,  and  should  your  water  shoalen,  ap- 
proaching said  shoal  (which  will  not  be  tho  case  whilst  the  land  is  in  sight  plain 
from  the  deck)  haul  more  to  the  south,  and  your  water  will  deepen  immediate- 
ly ;  you  may  then  proceed  up  the  river  by  keeping  the  Braganca  in  sight,  which 
will  always  be  a  sure  guide  for  going  in,  keeping  them  at  a  distance  about  S 
miles  more  or  less,  as  the  causes  given  may  be  effected  more  or  less  by  the  tides. 

The  land  between  Tigioca  and  Point  Taiper  is  broken,  appearing  in  spots  of 
small  islands,  which  makes  them  more  remarkable,  and  near  to  Taiper  is  a  dry 
sand  bank  about  5  miles  from  the  hind,  and  to  the  south  of  which,  abreast  of 
Point  Taiper,  is  good  anchorage,  in  about  7  or  8  fathoms  water,  and  is  where 
pilots  come  to  anchor  outward-bound  to  wait  an  opportunity  of  running  out  be- 
tween the  shoali  on  account  of  being  less  exposed  to  the  heavy  sea  which  sets  In 
wvith  the  flood  tide,  and  out  of  the  strength  of  it. 

Point  Taiper  is  about  11  miles  from  Tigioca  point.  The  land  between  Taiper 


BLUNt's  AMKlllCAN    COAST    PILOT. 


6'Jl 


ween  Taiper 


and  Vigla  lies  uSout  S.  VV.  by  W.  and  N.  K.  I»y  E.  ilistiiit  about  17  miles,  be 
tween  which,  keeping  at  a  distancH  from  5  to  1  inilos^  yuu  will  iiavc  9  to  10  fa- 
thoms Wiiter,  and  as  yo:i  approach  Vij^ia  your  wattir  will  slioalen  gradually  to  8 
aud  7  fathoms.  The  point  of  Visia  is  roniarkahlo  in  comini;  from  tho  north- 
ward, and  as  yr"'  draw  to  the  southward  another  point  will  oixmi  whicli  sliows 
the  entrance  of  ii^ia.  B«^  eareful  not  to  approach  too  near  Vij^ii,  as  there  is  h 
ihoal  stretches  off  about  N.  W.  by  N.  two  miles  from  the  nortimrn  part  of  the 
land,  which  form*  the  entrance ;  and  north  from  the  soutlicrn  p:irt  wlilch  forms 
theentranceof  Vij^ia,  24  or  nearly  3  miles  hard  sanj.  Vigia  is  a  small  fishing 
town,  and  cannot  be  seen  in  passing,  as  there  is  an  i:>land  in  A-ont  of  it,  which 
stands  some  distance  from  the  c.itrancc. 

Running  alon-;  the  land,  at  the  distance  of  four  miles,  you  will  have  7,  8  and 
9  fathoms  towards  Colares,  it  being  a  small  village  which  faces  the  water,  and  is 
very  easily  distinguished  by  its  white  builduigs,  distance  from  the  S.  point  of  the 
land  6  or  7  miles :  off  this  village  or  between  it  and  Vigia,  is  good  anchorage  about 
S  miles  from  the  land,  sticky  bottom  ;  be  careful  not  to  come  too  close  to  Colares, 
as  there  is  a  reef  of  rocks  that  stretches  off  nearly  two  miles. 

If  night  is  coming  or,  it  isadviseablo  not  to  pass  Colares,  but  come  to  an  an- 
chor and  wait  until  morning,  and  to  know  when  yon  pass  Colares,  your  water 
will  deepen  very  soon  after  as  you  approach  the  Bay  de  SaI,  which  will  be  open 
to  your  view.  Bay  de  Sal  is  a  large  deep  bay,  being  about  4  or  5  miles  vtrid«  at 
the  entrance. 

Be  careful  not  to  get  into  this  bay,  as  it  is  dangerous,  being  full  of  rocks,  and 
BO  safe  anchorage,  and  has  sometimes  been  taken  for  Bay  St.  Antony.  Between 
Bay  St.  Antony  and  Colares  there  is  no  good  anchorage  that  can  be  recommend- 
ed with  safety,  the  water  being  very  deep,  particularly  abrt^ast  the  Bay  de  Sal, 
where  you  will  have  from  16  to  18  and  20  fathoms  water,  which  is  not  the  case 
any  where  else  in  the  river.  Colares  bearing  West  about  ."i  miles,  steer  from  S. 
S.  W.  to  S.  S.  W.H  W.  you  will  then  p'lss  two  small  islands  on  your  larboard  hand, 
one  abreast  of  the  land,  which  forms  the  Bay  de  Sal,  (S.  part)  the  other  about 
3  miles  to  the  S.  and  W.  In  approaching  these  islands  your  course  will  draw  you 
towards  the  land,  but  come  no  nearer  than  two  miles,  as  there  are  rocks  which 
stretch  off  about  1^  miles,  with  7  fathoms  close  to  them,  therefore  8  or  9  fatlto..id 
is  near  enough.  As  you  draw  up  with  the  S.  island  you  make  the  island  of  Ta- 
tuock  nearly  ahead;  be  careful  in  drawing  up  for  this  island,  and  not  come  too 
close  to  it,  as  there  are  rocks  stretching  off  it  to  North  Tatuock  bet>.een  2,  and  S 
miles;  leave  this  island  on  your  starboard  hand  after  passing  the  small  island 
previously  mentioned,  4  or  5  miles,  you  may  then  haul  in  for  the  land  which 
forms  the  Bay  St.  .Antony ;  the  shore  becomes  bold  and  without  danger.  The 
Bay  St.  Antony  is  a  fine  cle:ir  bay,  good  anchorage  all  through  from  5  to  7  and 
8  fathoms,  and  by  hauling  into  the  bay  if  you  want  to  anchor,  particularly  the 
southern  part  close  in,  which  forms  a  lee,  you  will  have  the  sea  perfectly  smooth, 
good  shelter  from  the  wind,  and  out  of  the  strength  of  the  tide  ;  but  if  you  want 
•to  proceed  to  town,  steer  acro.-is  the  bay,  the  wind  being  always  fair  for  going 
<up:  you  will  then  see  several  islands;  k^'ep  between  them  and  the  point  which 
forms  the  south  part  of  the  bay  (or  Point  Pinheiro,)  which  is  close  too;  you 
will  soon  see  a  small  island  called  Paraquet  Island,  open  to  your  view,  and  ap- 

E  ears  at  a  distance  to  be  close  into  the  main  land.  When  you  pass  Point  Pin- 
eiro, steer  directly  for  it,  leaving  it  on  your  larboard  hand  close  aboard,  as  it  in 
■OL'  the  very  edge  of  the  channel ;  It  is  so  bold  close  to  this  island  that  you  need  not 
be  afraid  to  pass  within  the  length  of  your  vessel  of  it,  and  it  is  requisite  you 
should  pass  close  to  it,  as  the  channel  becomes  narrow  as  ynu  pass  it,  having  a 
shoal  flat  of  sand  on  your  starboard  hand  ;  the  fort  which  stands  on  a  smalt 
is!and  will  open  plain  to  your  view.  About  two  miles  distance  from  this  island 
steer  for  it,  giving  it  a  birth  of  half  a  cable's  length  on  the  larboard  hand,  where 
you  must  send  the  boat  on  shore  with  your  papers,  or  come  to  anchor,  the  latter 
is  preferable  for  a  stranger,  as  the  channel  is  very  narrow.  When  you  weigh  an- 
chor steer  for  Para  or  city  of  Belem,  which  will  be  open  and  plain  to  your  view, 
distance  about  5  miles  from  Fort,  keeping  the  land  distant  about  one  mile  on 
J  our  larboard  hand,  and  as  you  approach  the  town  haul  in  for  the  shipping,  or 


602 


DLUNr'3    AMERICAN     COAST     PILOT. 


«ustom-house,  the  next  large  building  to  St.  Antony's  church,  which  is  the  first 
or  nearest  church  in  coming  up  the  river ;  then  you  may  anchor  abreast  the  cus- 
tom-house, where  you  will  have  to  land  your  cargo. 

N.  B.  There  is  a  shoal  of  considerable  length  runs  between  the  island  of  Ma- 
rajo  and  the  main  land  which  runs  nearly  north  and  south,  which  the  sea  constantly 
lireaks  on,  nearest  distance  of  said  shoal  from  the  main  land  being  abreast  of 
Colarcs  or  that  part  of  the  land  winch  forms  the  Bay  de  Sal,  distance  7  or  8 
miles. 

High  water  full  and  change  at  Para,  12  o'clock. 
Do.  entrance  between  the  shoals,       10    do. 

From  the  mouth  of  the  river,  within  Point  Tigioca,  the  distance  to  the  Basin, 
or  anchorage  of  Para,  is  twenty  leagues.  All  the  western  side  of  the  river  is 
shoal,  but,  on  the  eastern  side,  are  even  soundings  of  8,  7,  8,  9,  10,  7,  10,  12,  9, 
7,  and  6  fathoms.     In  the  Basin  itself  are  from  5  to  3  fathoms. 

A  vessel  direct  from  sea,  with  good  observations,  may  cross  the  equator  on 
the  meridian  of  45°,  where  soundings,  from  50  to  40  fathoms  may  be  found. 
A  course  hence,  W.  by  S.  will  lead  towards  Maracuno  Inlet,  on  the  east  of  which 
a  pilot  may  be  obtained.  The  soundings  over  the  bank  decrease  gradually,  from 
40  to  15  fathoms:  and  it  is  to  be  observed  that  the  flood-tide  sets  strongly  to 
the  west,  while  the  winds  are  from  the  east. 

The  flood  sets  into  the  Rio  Para  at  the  rate  of  four  miles  an  hour:  the  begin- 
ning from  the  eastward  is  very  rapid,  and  it  veers  gradually  to  the  N.  E.  and 
north.     The  vertical  rise  is  10  feet- 

VesseU  outward  bound,  from  Point  Tapua,  steer  according  to  the  tide,  keeping 
that  point  S.  E.  to  the  distance  of  fifteen  or  sixteen  miles.  With  Cape  Magoary 
then  in  sight,  haul  up  N.  E.  or  N.  N.  E.  taking  care  to  avoid  the  Banks  of  St. 
Rosa,  on  the  vvest.  The  wind  here  being  generally  from  the  eastward,  with 
frequent  squalls,  great  caution  is  required.  Id  thick  weather,  when  Cape  Ma- 
f  oary  cannot  be  seen,  the  approach  to  St.  Rosa's  Bank  may  be  known  by  the 
soundings  becoming  irregular,  which  is  not  the  case  to  the  eastward  of  the  chan- 
nel.   The  weather  shoals  should  be  kept  on  board  as  much  as  possible. 

Maranbaya,  at  the  western  end  of  this  sandy  tract,  is  a  single  bold  mountain, 
'about  seven  hundred  feet  high.  It  has  a  church  and  some  good  springs.  The 
Inhabitants  subsist  by  fishing,  and  the  produce  of  the  fields  which  they  cultivate, 
■witl.out  having  much  to  spare. 

The  ILHA  GRANDE,  an  island  four  leagues  in  length,  separates  the  en- 
trances of  the  extensive  harbours  of  Maranbaya  and  Gairomu,  as  shown  on  the 
Chart.  The  interior  land  is  high  ;  and  the  greater  part  of  the  coast  presents  a 
double  range  of  mountains.  On  leaving  Rio,  when  bound  this  way,  the  moun- 
tain Gavea  is  seen  at  two  leagues  to  the  westward.  A  sufficient  offing  must  be 
given  to  the  land  after  passing  this  point,  as  the  current  frequently  sets  strongly 
«n  the  shore,  to  the  westward. 

The  eastern  end  of  the  llha  Grande  Wen  at  the  distance  of  15  leagues  from 
Point  Gavea,  and  opposite  to  the  blufi"  point  of  Maranbaya  Island.  "The  chan- 
nel between  it  and  the  latter  is  very  safe,  for  ships  of  any  size,  which  may  take 
shelter  here.  Fresh  water  may  be  obtained  from  the  springs  at  the  west  end  of 
Maranbaya  Island,  and  wood  may  be  had  from  the  other  islands  in  the  bay. 

On  the  eastern  side  of  the  Ilha  Grande  is  anchorage,  in  the  first  bay,  called 
Seio  de  Abrahao,  or  Abraham's  Bosom ;  but  a  more  secure  roadsted  is  that  at  the 
western  end,  Jorge  Grego's  Isle,  which  off"  the  southern  side,  is  bold  ;  it  affords 
not  only  anchorage  for  large  ships,  but  plenty  of  wood  and  water.  On  the  north 
shore,  or  coast  of  the  main,  opposite  to  Ilha  Grande,  is  the  village  of  Angra  dos 
Revs,  where  refreshments. may  be  had. 

ST.  SEBASTIAN,  &c.— Within  the  island  of  St.  Sebastian,  which  lies  about 
twenty  leagues  W.  S.  W.  from  the  Ilha  Grande,  is  a  safe  harbour,  formed  by 
the  island  and  the  main.  Vessels  should  enter  from  the  northward  and  keep 
near  the  island,  as  there  is  a  shoal  bank  on  the  opposite  side.  Refreshments  may 
be  procured  at  the  villages,  both  on  the  island  and  the  main.  The  south  en- 
trance is  not  above  a  mile  wide,  but  it  will  admit  a  frigate  of  war,  and  afford 
«lMlter  during  a  S.  E.  gale. 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


603 


Within  the  nha  de  Puercoa,  or  Ho^  Island,  to  the  N.  E.  of  St.  Sebastian,  is 
good  anchorage,  iu  8  and  9  fathoms.  The  Bahia  de  Tabaroes,  or  Shark^a  Road, 
opposite  tu  this  isle,  has  likewise  good  and  clean  ground,  and  is  capable  of  ad- 
mitting ships  of  burth«n. 

In  passing  between  St.  Sebastian's  and  the  Harbour  of  *Santos,  the  Alcatraaaear 
or  Cormorant  Isles,  should  be  approached  with  caution,  the  ground,  about  then> 
being  foul. 

SANTOS  affords  anchorage  and  shelter  from  aVI  winds  excepting  from  the 
South  and  S.  E.     The  wholo  bay  is  perfectly  clear  and  safe. 

The  maratime  district  of  Santos  includes  some  excellent  little  harbours,  viz, 
St.  Sebastian's,  already  described,  Bertioga,  Santos,  Iguape,  Cananea,  and  Pa- 
ranagua ;  but  the  intercourse  of  these  with  the  interior  is  interrupted  by  the  Ser- 
ro  of  Cubatam,  which,  in  one  part,  approaches  close  to  the  shore.  At  Parana- 
gua,  or  Pernagoa,  and  Cananea,  many  vessels  are  built.  The  principal  whale- 
fishery  of  Brazil  has  latterly  been  off  this  coast. 


Santos  to  the  Rio  De  La  Plata. 

At  the  distance  of  ten  leagues  to  the  S.  S.  W.  of  the  entrance  to  Santos  is 
the  isle  Redonda,  a  little  round  isle,  at  about  six  leagues  from  the  nearest  shore. 
It  has  a  little  reef  within  it,  extending  about  four  miles,  in  a  direction  nearly  pa- 
rallel to  the  coast.  Those  who  may  happen  to  get  to  the  westward  of  Redonda 
should  observe  that,  with  the  isle  E.  i  N.  a  ship  may  be  within  half  a  mile  of  the 
reef. 

The  harbours  of  Icuape,  Canaea,  and  Paranagua,  have  been  already  noticed. 
They  are  all  bar-harbours,  and  in  the  rivers  within  them  small  vessels  are  built. 
In  26°  16'  S.  is  the  island  of  St.  Francisco,  which  forms  the  two  branches  of  the 
river  of  the  same  name  ;  the  only  considerable  and  important  river  hereabout. 
The  country  here,  though  rich,  is  swampy  and  unhealthy,  and  the  coast  generally 
flat.    Off  shore  are  s.everal  small  islets,  which  require  notice. 

The  MORRO  of  ST.  MARTHA'S  HILL,  is  the  termination  of  a  range 
of  inland  mountains.  About  ten  miles  to  the  northward  of  it  is  the  little  town 
and  bar  of  Sr.  Antonio,  or  Laguna,  whence  there  is  some  trade  with  Rio  de 
Janeiro.  The  distance  to  the  S.  W.  from  the  Morro  de  St.  Martha  to  the  bar  of 
the  Rio  Grande  de  St.  Pedro  is  ninety  leagues.  Between  these  places  there  is  no 
port  of  any  consequence.    The  coast,  generally,  is  low  and  sandy. 

From  the  want  of  a  regular  survey,  it  is  to  be  observed  that  the  Charts  do  not 
exhibit  soundings  on  a  great  part  of  the  Brazilian  coast ;  but  yet,  in  every  part, 
between  Rio  Janeiro  and  the  River  Plata,  soundings  may  be  found  at  a  very  con- 
siderable distance  from  the  land. 

RIO  GRANDE. — ^The  district  of  Kio  Grande  de  St.  Pedro  is  of  great  impor- 
tance to  the  northern  parts  of  Brazil ;  its  port  being  the  channel  of  communica- 
tion with  a  rich  interior,  which  supplies  pulse,  grain,  and  other  productions.  It 
includes  the  whole  of  the  great  lake  called  the  Lagoa  dos  Patos,  and  of  the 
rivers  which  fall  into  it,  from  the  north  and  west.  Mr.  Luccock,  on  proceeding 
to  this  place,  in  1809,  says, 

"  On  approaching  the  coast  of  Rio  Grande  do  Sul,  we  first  made  land  in  the 
neighbourhood  of  Estreito,  about  nine  leagues  north-east  of  the  bar  of  the  river 
whence  the  province  takes  its  name.  Little  round  iiiHocks  of  sand,  without  the 
ilightest  degree  of  vegetation,  seemed  to  rise  out  of  the  water,  to  which  a  splcn- 
ded  sun  communicated  a  dazzling  whiteness.  Soon  it  appeared  that  these  were 
only  inequalities  of  a  sandy  shore,  from  the  midst  of  which  arose  the  church  of 
Estreito,  a  small  building  m  the  usual  style  of  such  edifices  in  the  villages  of 
Brazil.  A  few  trees  and  a  scanty  portion  of  verdure  about  it  now  becoming  visi- 
ble, served  to  increase  the  forbidding  appearance  of  the  surrounding  desert. 

'*'  A  Lighthouse  is  now  building  on  the  island  of  Mocta,  at  the  entrance  of  (he  harbour 
of  Santos,  (1627.) 


501 


BLU.M's  AMi!:UiCAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Long  heforc  we  aaw  any  marks,  l)y  which  to  guide  our  course,  we  were  in 
shoal  water,  and  encompiissed  with  9;md -hanks. 

"The  captain,  having  statiunod  himself  at  the  itr»st-heail,  saw  these  shoals  nnd 
the  channels  between  them  nnMu  ch/arly  than  they  could  be  decerned  from  the 
dock,  and  gave  us  directions  how  to  steer.  At  len:;th  a  boat  came  out  to  meet 
us,  with  a  pilot  on  board,  and,  by  appro|mate  signals,  did  us  the  same  service. 
These  signals  not  only  jK>int  out  the  course  which  a  vessel  is  to  take,  but  some- 
times direct  her  to  anchor  where  she  is,  or  even  to  proceed  again  to  sea  wheo 
there  is  not  water  enough  on  the  bar  to  carry  her  safely  over.  The  first  of  these 
directions  is  given  by  holding  from  the  boat  a  sntirall  flag  in  the  direction  which 
the  vessel  ought  to  take  ;  the  two  latter  by  lowering  it  altogether.  The  sigDals 
are  explained  below. 

"  When  we  had  reached  the  boat,  she  did  not  put  the  pilot  on  board,  but  pro- 
ceeded a  little  a-bead,  siMinding  with  a  long  pafe,  which  was  dexterously  turned 
over  from  end  to  end,  as  we  proceeded  across  a  broad  and  shallow  bar,  situated 
in  a  deep  and  dangerous  bight.  We  entered  the  river  between  a  bluff  head  to 
our  left,  and  a  long  low  sandy  point  to  the  east,  through  a  passage  about  half  a 
mile  wide,  guarded  l>y  a  few  miserable  erections  called  forts  and  batteries.  Just 
within  the  passage  lie  the  vessels,  which  have  received  their  lading,  and  are  rea- 
dy to  proceed  on  their  voyages,  waiting  for  a  a  sufficient  depth  of  water. 

ST.  CATHARINES— The  entrance  of  the  excellent  harbour,  formed  by  the 
island  of  St.  Catharine,  lies  between  27°  19'  10"  and  270  21'  58".  This  harbour 
■was  visited  by  the  Russian  captain,  Krussentern,  in  1804,  and  by  captain  Peronae, 
in  1 785.  Of  this  harbour  M.  Krussentern  has  said,  "  Those  going  round  Cape 
Horn,  or  destined  for  the  whale-fishery  upon  this  coast,  caanot  desire  a  better 
harbour  than  St.  Catharine's  to  run  into.  It  is  infinitely  preferable  to  Rio 
Janeiro. 

Signals,  by  which  vessels  approaching  to  enter  the  Port  of  Rio  Grande  do 
Sul,  show  to  the  pilot-boat  the  water  which  they  draw. 

A  vessel  unacquainted  with  the  coast  should  run  down  into  7  fathoms  of  wa- 
ter, until  she  observe  a  tall  flag-staff.  This  stands  at  the  entrance  of  the  har- 
bour, and  is  the  station  of  a  man  on  the  lookout.  When  the  vesseY  heaves  in 
sight,  he  hoists  a  white  flag,  and  a  boat  goes  out  to  meet  her  on  the  bar.  So> 
soon  as  the  boat  is  observed,  the  signals  which  it  makes  with  a  small  red  fl^ag 
must  be  carefully  noted,  and  the  vessel  luff  or  bear  away,  according  to  the  direc- 
tion in  which  the  flag  is  waved.  She  must  also  declare  her  draught  of  water  in 
palms,  or  eight  parts  of  a  fathom,  by  the  following  signals  at  the  fore-mast  head> 


PALMS  or  WATER. 

10    

lOi 

11   


Hi 
12 


FLAO. 

Whita. 
B!ue. 
Red. 
White. 
Blue. 
Blue, 
bite. 


(Bli 


PALMS  OF  WATER. 

m 

13    


13^ 
14 


FLAO. 

AVhite. 
Red. 
Red. 
?  White. 
Blue. 
Red. 
Red. 
Blue. 


The  pilot,  on  being  informed  by  these  signals,  of  the  TessePs  draught  of  wa- 
ter, will  reply  either  by  keeping  his  own  flag  up,  or  by  lowering  it.  If  he  keep 
it  up,  the  vessel  off  can  enter;  if  he  lower  it,  she  must  return  to  sea,  or  anchor 
outside. 

The  foHotoing  Directions  for  sailing  to  the  Rio  Grande  were  written  by  Mr.  fVii- 
liam  Grant,  in  1802. 

Finding  yourself  in  lat.  Sl^SO'S.  and  havingN.  E.— E.N.E.  or  easterly  winds, 
(any  other  winds  may  be  dangerous,  that  is  from  the  sea)  you  may  stand  with 
security  for  the  land,  steering  W.  S.  W.  until  you  find  yourself  on  soundings;  and, 
when  you  find  yourself  in  13  fathoms,  you  will  se-  *he  land,  if  to  the  northward 
of  the  bar;  but,  if  you  have  passed  it,  you  will  net,  as  the  bank  to  the  south- 
ward stretches  out  to  a  greater  distancu ;  and  you  cannot  see  the  land  unlew 
when  you  are  in  8  fatliomB,  and  then  barely. 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


305 


le,  we  were  in 

liese  shoals  nnd 
erned  from  the 
ne  out  to  meet 
e  same  service, 
ake,  but  some- 
n  to  sea  when 
he  frrst  of  these 
lirection  which 
r.    The  signals 

hoard,  but  pro- 
tcrousiy  turned 
>w  bar,  situated 
a  bluff  head  to 
ge  about  half  a 
iiatteries.  Just 
)g,  and  are  rea- 

water. 

•,  formed  hj  the 

This  harbour 

aptain  Peronse, 

ng  round  Cape 

desire  a  better 
eferable  to  Rio 

Rio  Grande  do 

fathoms  of  wa- 
ce  of  the  har- 
sssef  heaves  in 
I  the  bar.  So 
small  red  ffag 
ng  to  the  direc- 
;ht  of  water  ia 
»re>mast  head» 

FLAG. 

White. 
Red. 
Red. 
■Whiter 
Blue. 
Red. 
Red. 
Blue. 

draught  of  wa- 
it.   If  he  keep 
sea,  or  anchor 

en  by  Mr.  Wii- 

easterly  winds, 
lay  stand  with 
oundings;  and, 
the  northward 
to  the  south- 
le  land  unlew 


The  land,  aboat  51©  40'  S.  you  will  know  by  seeing  several  tufts  of  trees,  pretty 
high  and  rounding  to  the  northward  ;  and»  standing  along  shore,  steering  S.  W. 
you  will  see  sundry  straggling  tufts,  but  not  so  high.  Here,  if  it  be  very  clear 
weather,  you  may  see  houses,  which  will  appear  in  the  opening  of  the  trees.  You 
naj  then  stand  along  shore  with  safety,  keeping  in  from  10  to  0  or  8  fathoms. 
Losing  sight  of  the  trees  and  houses,  you  will  see  some  mountains  of  sand  and 
an  entire  eandy  beach ;  and,  when  you  are  witiiin  two  leagues  of  the  bar,  you 
will  see  tufts  of  trees,  and  find  the  soundings  decrease,  with  a  bottom  of  mud  and 
red  shells.  You  must  now  keep  in  8  fathoms,  but  not  less,  as  the  water  sets 
right  on  shore  when  close  to  the  beach.  The  lead  must  now  be  kept  going  until 
Tou  find  soft  mud,  when  you  will  find  yourself  close  to  the  bar,  which  may  be 
known  by  seeing  several  stakes  along  the  beach :  you  must  then  haul  up  and 
steer  south,  to  keep  clear  of  the  bank,  and  will  see  to  the  south  two  long  poles 
on  with  a  signal-mast,  and  some  houses  which  appear  on  the  point  of  the  north 
em  shore,  between  two  high  mountains  of  sand,  which  are  on  the  south  side  of 
the  rirer ;  these  you  must  bring  to  bear  N.  W.  by  W.  and  the  signal  or  the  red  flag- 
staff W.  N.  W. :  with  these  bearings  you  may  stand  in  fdr  the  bank,  keeping  In 
8  fathoms,  until  you  see  the  pilot-boat,  which  anchors  inside  the  bar.  You  may 
easily  know  the  bank  by  the  seas  breaking  over  it,  particularly  from  the  east- 
ward:. In  crossing  the  oar  you  will  sometimes  find  two  fathoms ;  and,  at  times, 
no  more  than  nine  or  ten  feet ;  but  that  seldom  happens,  as  the  bar  of  late  years 
increases,  and  there  has  been  from  fourteen  to  sixteen  feet  found  on  it.  When 
you  cross  the  bar,  you  will  deepen  your  water  gradually  from  3,  4,  5,  6,  to  7  fa-, 
thoms,  and  no  more  until  you  get  abreast  the  houses  above  noticed.  You  may 
then  stand  over  to  the  fort  at  the  south  side,  and  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathoms. 

£.T.  PEDRO  to  the  "RIVER  PLATA — From  the  Bar  of  St.  Pedro  to  Cape 
St  Maria  or  St.  Mary,  at  the  entrance  of  the  River  Plata,  the  distance  is  60 
leagues.  The  coast  between  is  generally  low  and  flat,  having  within  it  nume- 
rous lakes  and  ponds.  In  the  parallel  of  34<^  20',  are  the  remarkable  rocks  called 
the  Castelhoa  Grandea,  9  leagues  to  the  north  of  which  are  the  Caatdhos  Chieos. 
Mr.  Luccock  says,  "  The  rocks  called  Great  Castelhos  consist  chiefly  of  three 
lurge  masses  of  naked  granite,  about  a  hundred  feet  high  from  the  water,  with 
perpendicular  sides  and  roundish  tops.  They  appear  close  to  the  shore,  and,  at 
a  distt!nce,  are  thought  to  resemble  caStles  built  on  the  beach ;  but,  if  there  be 
b:'cii  a  resemblance,  at  any  point  of  view,  it  vanishes  on  a  nearer  approach. 
They  ar?  backed  by  low  woody  hills ;  and  the  beach  to  the  northward  of  them, 
as  far  an  the  Castelhos  Chieos,  is  flat  and  sandy.  There  seems  an  expanse  of 
water  towards  the  west,  which  ought  to  be  surveyed,  as  probably  a  harbour 
might  bs  found,  useful  for  small  vessels,  when  the  wind  blows  hard  from  the 
south-east.  More  than  once  I  have  known  these  rocks  mistaken  for  Cifo.  St. 
Mary ;  the  cape,  however,  is  very  different,  being  a  flat  sandy  point.  The  coast 
between  them  is  low  and  naked,  with  inlets,  some  of  which  arc  said  to  afford 
good  anchorage. 

"  Near  to  the  Little  Castelhos  is  the  Fort  of  Santa  Teresa,  whence  the  road 
(inland)  to  Maldonado  is  very  delightful.*' 

From  the  Castelhos  Grandes  to  Cape  St.  Mary,  the  distance  is  seven  leagutb. 
The  cape,  which  is  loWi  is  described  hereafter.  From  Cape  St.  Mary  to  the  east 
point  of  Maldonado,  the  distance  is  18}  leagues,  and  tlie  true  bearing  S.  W.  by 
W.  1  W. 


I*  Shoal  off  the  Rio  de  la  Plata. — The  Laurel,  M'Donald,  from  London,  to  Valparaiso,  put 
into  the  river  of  La  Plata,  on  the  19th  of  June,  1822,  having  been  obliged  to  bear  up  to  re- 
pair lome  damaga  sustained  by  a  heavy  sea  breaking  on  board  of  her.  The  master  reported 
as  follows:— That,  on  the  15th  of  June,  he  discovered  a  shoat  in  lat.  36°  28'  S.  long.  61°  30' 
VV.  that  it  appeared  to  be  about  a  mile  long,  and  the  same  in  breadth,  with  a  sea  breaking 
very  high  over  it,  that  it  had  the  appearance  of  sand,  and  little  water  on  it.  He  passed  with- 
in half  a  mile,  and  then  hove  to,  sounded  with  90  fathoms  of  line,  and  found  no  bottom.  He 
further  states,  that  he  had  a  good  Chronometer  on  board,  and  was  six  miles  out  of  his  longK 
tude,  when  he  made  the  port  of  Montevideo. 

64 


506 


BI.LNi'S  AMERICAN  00A3T  PILOT. 


The  North  lide  of  Plata  has  been  described  b^'  Mr.  Luccock  as  foHows : 
•*  On  the  coast,  off  Maldonado,  lie  two  islands  one  of  them,  called  Lobot, 
displays  but  little  verdure ;  the  othc",  Gorit; ,  (Oorritt:,)  is  lower,  has  a  few  build- 
ings upon  it,  and  under  its  lee  is  the  harbour;  the  beach  of  which  is  exposed  to 
a  heavy  surf,  which  renders  landing  soraetimes  dangerous,  at  others  impossible. 
There  are  two  entrances  ;  that  on  the  eastern  (S.  E.)  side  of  the  island  is  very 
narrow ;  forced,  on  one  occasion,  to  go  through  it,  wo  used  some  extrordinary 
precautions,  and  succeeded  happily.  On  the  west,  the  coast  is  bold  and  stony, 
the  entranct  broad  and  deep,  and  to  small  vesseh  perfectly  safe ;  but,  about  mid- 
way, is  a  rock  with  twenty-four  feet  water  upon  it,  on  which  the  English  ship  of 
war,  Bedford,  once  touched  and  laid  a  buoy.  The  anchsring.ground  is  near  the 
centre  of  the  bay,  where  lies  the  wreck  ot  a  Briti-I^  ship,  the  AgKinemnon." 

Th*;  town  of  Maldonado,  which,  from  the  sea,  has  no  very  attractive  appear- 
ance, is  two  miles  from  the  shore,  standing  on  the  brow  of  a  hill  gently  descending 
■two  hundred  and  fifty  feet  above  the  level  of  water.  The  principal  buildings  form  a 
quadrangle,  and  include  a  fine  new  church.  The  common  habitations  are  built 
of  brick,  and  covered  with  straw.  The  houses  in  the  streets,  issuing  from  the 
square,  are  chiefly  low,  and  constructed  of  earth.  The  whole  number  is  about 
^0 ;  that  of  the  inhabitants  from  800  to  1000. 


Rio  De  La  Plata,  or  River  Plata. 


'The  following  **  Reunarks  concerning  the  Winds,  Weather,  Tides  or  Currents, 
^Soundings,  &tc.  in  the  1  iver  Plata,  with  a  few  instructions  for  navigating  therein, 
by  Captain  Peter  Heywood,  of  H.  M.  S.  Nereus,"  were  first  published  in  the 
^ear  1818,  with  the  following  Preface. 

"  Captain  P.  Htyioood  of  His  Majesty's  ship  Nereus,  having  been  for  three  years 
on  the  Brazil  station,  and  the  greater  part  of  that  time  in  the  River  Plata,  had  the 
opportunity  to  observe  that  the  loss  of  many  vessels  in  that  river  was  occasioned  by  the 
mnsters  utanting  proper  directions  for  its  intricate  and  dangerous  navigation.  Cer- 
tain Heywood,  on  his  return  to  England,  very  obligingly  transmitted  to  Iht  Comnut- 
tu  for  managing  the  affairs  at  Lloyd's,  his  observations  and  instructions  for  the  safe 
stavigation  of  the  Plata ;  which  the  Committee  are  happy  to  publish  (with  Captain 
HeyuHMfd^s permission)  for  the  benefit  of  all  persons  navigating  that  river. 

Lloyd's,  October,  1813. 

"  REMARKS,  &c.  Stc^—At  the  entrance  of  the  River  Plata,  the  prevailing 
winds  during  the  summer  months,  from  September  to  March,  are  north-easterly, 
with  tolerahly  clear  weather  over  head,  but  a  dense  atmosphere  near  the  horizon. 
These  winds  haul  gradually  to  the  eastv/ard  as  you  advance  up  the  river ;  and 
about  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  strong  breezes  from  the  south-eastward 
are  common  at  this  season,  accompanied  with  rain  and  fou!  weather.  At  Buenos 
Ayres,  during  the  summer  months,  the  S.  E.  winds  are  generally  fresh  in  the  day- 
time, hauling  round  to  the  northward  in  the  night. 

**  During  the  winter  months,  from  March  to  September,  the  prevailing  winds, 
at  the  entrance  of  the  Plata,  are  S.  W.  or  more  westerly ;  but,  up  the  river, 
more  generally  from  the  northward,  than  the  southward,  of  west. 

"  The  winter  season  is  the  best,  in  point  of  weather,  at  Buenos  Ayres  ;  for,  the 
winds  being  chiefly  from  the  N.  W.  to  S.  W.  the  water  is  smooth,  and  the  com- 
munication can  be  kept  up  between  the  shore  and  the  shipping  with  more  niciii- 
ty.  The  weather  is  sometimes,  but  not  frequently,  foggy.  Fogs  are  most  com- 
mon in  the  months  of  July,  August,  and  September,  and  prevail  more  at  the  en- 
trance of  the  river,  as  far  up  as  the  S.  E.  tail  of  the  Ortiz,  than  above  the  banks. 

•'  As  it  cannot  be  said  that  there  are  regular  tides  in  the  Plata,  but  currents  as  un- 
certain in  their  duration  as  they  are  irregular  in  their  rate  and  direction,  no  certain 
allowance  can  be  made  for  them;  therefore  a  ground-log  should  always  be 
u«ed,  to  know  the  course  made  good,  and  distance  run. 

"  The  tides,  speaking  generally,  when  the  weather  is  fine  and  settled,  and  the 


BLUNT  3    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


507 


lemnon. 


Tvinds  moderate,  do  not,  in  any  part  of  this  river^rise  or  fall  more  than  Ave  or  six 
f^et ;  thoueh,  at  Buenos  Ayres,  at  the  distance  of  eight  miles  from  the  city,  we 
found,  in  His  Majesty's  ship  Nereus,  when  the  winds  were  strong  at  N.  w.  so 
If^^tlc,  sometimes,  as  fifteen  feet  water;  while,  with  strong  breezes  from E.  S.  E. 
to  S.  S.  W.  the  depth  was  upwards  of  5  fathoms  :  but,  except  on  such  extraordi- 
nary occasions,  we  hud  between  seventeen  and  twenty-two  feet  water.  I  havfk 
heard,  however,  some  murvellous  stories  of  the  river  having  been  almost  dried 
up,  across  from  Buenos  Ayres  to  Colonia,  during  heavy  westerly  gales. 

"  The  River  Plata  has  many  singularities,  which  I  think  may,  in  a  great  mea- 
sure, be  accounted  for,  from  its  formation  being  so  different  from  any  other 
known  river.  Its  entrance  being  very  wide  and  very  shallow,  it  is  affected  by 
every  change  of  wind  in  a  most  extraordinary  manner :  so  much  so,  that  a  shift 
of  wind  may  be  predicted  almost  to  a  certainty,  by  observing  carefully  the  state 
of  the  mercurj'  in  a  barometer  and  the  set  of  the  currents,  which  usually  shift 
before  the  wind.  In  calm  weather  the  currents  are  generally  very  slack  ;  and 
then  as  regular,  almost,  as  tides ;  setting  up  and  down  the  river  alternately. 
When  the  winds  are  variable,  the  currents  are  equally  so  ;  and  I  have  known  the 
Nereus  to  be  current  rode  four  different  ways  in  less  than  six  hours.  When  the 
current  comes  in  from  the  eastward,  along  the  north  bank  of  the  Plata,  a  north- 
easterly wind  may,  generally,  be  expected  to  follow ;  and  at  the  same  time 
(should  the  wind  have  been  previously  to  the  S.  E.)  the  mercury  in  the  barome- 
ter will  fall  a  little  :  but  much  more  if  the  transition  be  quiok  from  south-west, 
without  stopping  in  the  south-eastern  quarter. 

"  When  the  wind  continues  in  the  north-east  quarter,  the  mercury  is  more  de- 
pressed (according  to  its  strength)  than  with  any  other  wind,  and  there  is  usually, 
then,  a  set  into  the  river  on  the  north  bank,  and  out  on  the  opposite.  Indeed^ 
whilst  the  winds  are  between  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  E.  the  current  generally  runs  to 
the  westward,  past  Monte  Video,  though  without  much  augmenting  the  depth  oC 
water  off  that  place,  bat  filling  the  river  above  the  banks. 

"  The  winds  between  N.  N.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.  make  the  water  lowest :  t\\» 
out-set  being  then  strongest  along  the  south  bank  of  the  river,  past  the  Points 
del  Indio  and  Memoria ;  but  very  inconsiderable  along  the  north  bank. 

•'  Before  the  setting  in  of  a  S.  W.  gale,  or  Pampero,  the  weather  is  usually 
very  unsettled,  and  the  winds  unsteady  and  variable  in  the  northern  and  north- 
western boards  ;  preceded  by  a  considerable  fall  in  the  mercury,  though  it  usually 
rises  a  little  again  before  the  wind  shifts  to  the  south-west ;  and  often  continues 
to  rise,  even  though  the  wind  may  increase  from  that  quarter. 

"  Before  these  winds  set  in  at  Buenos  Ayres,  the  current  runs  up,  and  fills  tho 
river  unusually  high  ;  at  the  same  time  as  strong  an  out-set  is  experienced  along 
the  north  bank,  which  continues  whilst  the  winds  are  strongest  from  W.  S.  W. 
to  south,  seeming  to  prove  that  these  winds  force  up,  from  the  southward,  a  large 
accumulated  body  of  water  past  Cape  St.  Antonio,  which  can  only  find  a  pas- 
sage out  again  by  the  north  shore,  where  they  increase  the  depth  of  water,  as 
well  as  up  the  river,  and  particularly  in  the  shallow  harbour  of  *Monte  Video. 
Whilst  these  S.  W.  winds  blow,  the  air  is  cold,  and  the  atmosphere  clear  and 
elastic,  in  a  degree  rarely  to  be  met  with  in  any  other  part  of  the  world.  They 
are  generally  succeeded  by  some  days  of  fine  serene  weather ;  the  wind  continu- 
ing moderate  from  the  southward,  or  varying  to  the  eastward. 

"I  have  never  known  the  velocity  of  the  tide  or  current,  in  the  River  Plata,^ 
ftiiy  where  to  exceed  three  knots  per  hour ;  but  I  have  heard  it  said,  by  somer 
that  they  have  found  it  run  at  the  rate  of  six  or  seven  miles  an  hour ! 

As  the  winds  outside  the  River  Plata,  and  particularly  about  Cape  St.  MarVr 
are  most  frequently  from  the  north-eastward  and  northward,  except  when  tn» 
S.  E.  summer  and  S.  W.  winter  gales  blow,  about  the  times  of  new  and  full 
nionn,  I  consider  it,  on  the  whole,  most  adviseable,  for  shrps  bound  into  the  river*, 
to  get  in  with  the  land  about  the  latitude  of  that  cape. 
"  In  latitude  S3<=>  S.  the  bunk  of  soundings  extends  off  the  land  full  thirty-six 

'*  There  is  a  light-house  at  Monte  Video,  the  lantetn  of  which  is  four  hundred  and  flftf 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.     [Ste  page  Sll .] 


f^- 


508 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


leagues ;  where  the  depth  of  water,  in  longitude  5(P  iV  W.  is  94  fathoms  ?  sad 
the  quality  of  the  bottom  dark  olive-coloured  mud,  or  ooze,  as  it  is  all  along  the 
ourtermost  verge  of  the  bank. 

"  In  latitude  S4P  S.  and  thirty  leagues  from  the  land,  the  bank  is  steep,  and  the 
soundiugs  decrease  quickly;  in  etanding  to  the  westward,  to  25  fathoms,  twenty 
leagues  from  land. 

In  latitude  34°  20'  S.  and  longitude  51°  50'  \v.  or  about  thirty  leagues  east  of 
the  Great  Castelhos  Hock,  the  depth  is  63  or  64  fathoms,  dark  mud.  In  stand- 
ing in  for  the  land,  between  the  Great  Castelhos  and  Cape  St.  Mary,  the  water 
shoals,  in  a  short  distance,  from  60  to  25  fathoms;  and  the  quality  of  the  bottom 
changes  to  sand,  which  grows  coarser  as  you  appn  ach  the  coast ;  and,  as  far  as 
seven  leagues  off  shore,  is  intermixed  with  shells,  'i'his  bottom  is  found  only  in, 
and  to  the  northward  of,  the  latitude  of  Cape  St.  Mary,  except  very  close  in 

with  it.  .  .     J     .  1 

"  To  the  southward  of  34°  40'  S.  the  bottom  is  chiefly  mud,  intermixed  With 
fine  sand  or  gravel ;  and  if  a  ship  happen  to  be  set  to  the  southward  of  Cape  St. 
Mary,  as  she  hauls  n  for  the  land,  yet  keeps  to  tho  northward  of  Lobos,  she  will 
get  out  of  fine  sand  into  dark  mud ;  which  is  the  quality  of  the  bottom  (chiefly) 
between  Cape  St.  Mary  and  Lobos ;  as  well  as  eight  or  nine  leagues  to  the  east- 
ward of  that  island ;  and  the  depth  of  water  between  tLem  is  generally  26  to  20 
fathoms. 

"  In  latitude  35°  S.  and  longitude  52°  W.  or  forty-two  leagues  true  east  of 
liObos,  there  are  about  90  fathoms  water,  dark  sandy  bottom ;  from  whence  the 
bank  of  soundings  takes  a  S.  W.  direction.  East  of  Lobos,  twenty-seven 
leagues,  the  depth  is  25  fathoms ;  and,  in  steering  in,  on  its  parallel,  the  same 
depth  nearly  continues  till  very  near  that  island.  But,  if  set  a  little  to  the  south- 
ward of  Lobos,  the  water  will  shoal  even  to  10  fathoms,  perhaps,  on  a  hard, 
sandy,  or  gravelly  ridge,  that  extends  all  the  way  from  the  English  Bank,  in  its 
parallel,  as  far  as  longitude  52°  SXy  west ;  or  full  eighteen  leagues  to  the  eastward 
of  the  meridian  of  Lobos. 

"  Thus  the  approach  to  this  river  cannot  be  considered  dangerous,  if  proper 
care  be  taken  in  navigating,  and  due  attention  paid  to  the  lead,  and  to  tLe  course 
steered. 

•♦  I  shall  here  insert  the  Honourable  Captain  Bouverie's  description  of  Capo 
St.  Mary,  &lc.  which  I  believe  to  be  very  correct,  and  his  directions  judicious. 

"  Cape  St.  Mary  is  a  low  point,  with  rocks  all  about  it.  The  direction  of  the 
■coast,  to  the  westward  of  this  Cape,  becomes  more  westerly  than  at  any  other 
part  northward  of  it.  About  six  m  les  north  of  it  is  a  house,  with  a  row  of  trees 
northward  of  the  house,  (probably  ^  fence  of  high  prickly  pear-bushes,)  whJch 
is  very  remarkable. 

*'  About  a  mile  south  of  the  house  is  a  bluff  point,  with  a  few  rocks  at  the 
foot,  which  is  remarkable,  being  different  from  the  rest  of  the  coast,  the  general 
character  of  which  is  a  sandy  beach.  One  cannot  fail  knowing  the  Cape  by 
these  marks,  running  down  the  coast  near  it.  If  you  are  at  any  distance  off,  you 
will  not  perceive  them.  The  water  off  Cape  St.  Mary  is  shoaler  than  to  the 
northward.  Off  the  Cape,  in  a  S.  E.  direction,  you  have  8^  fathoms  at  the  dis- 
tance of  four  or  five  miles." 

"  I  am  inclined  to  think  Captain  B.  may  have  been  somewhat  deceived  in  his 
estimation  here ;  for,  in  H.  M.  S.  Nereus,  I  found  more  water  at  the  distance  he 
mentions.  On  the  17th  of  November,  1810,  at  noon,  in  latitudv^  34^  AS,'  S.  and 
longitude  about  SP  20'  E.  of  the  Mount  Viedo,  had  light  winds  from  S.  by  W. 
and  fine  weather.  At  half-past  one  P.  M.  tacked  in  23  fkthoms,  to  stand  in  shore, 
and  carried  from  that  deptn  to  18  fathoms,  when  sights  were  taken  for  t!ie  chro- 
nometer, which  made  2^  13'  21'^  east  of  Mount  Viedo,  Cape  St.  Mary  bearing 
N.  660  W.  and  standing  on,  laying  up  west  and  W.  by  N.  tacking  in  12i  fathoms 
water,  the  prickly  pear-hedge,  (mentioned  by  Captain  Bouverie,)  being  on  with 
Cape  St.  Mary,  (which  is  formed  by  a  low  rocky  islet  nearly  joining  the  shore,) 
1)earing  north  by  compass,  and  the  breakers  stretching  to  the  S.  E.  of  the  Cape 
17.  7<^  E.  about  three  miles  was  our  distance  from  the  Cape. 

Captain  Bouverie,  in  continuation  says,  *'  To  the  northward  of  the  Cape,  be 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


509 


tween  it  and  Palina,  you  have  10  or  11  fathoms  at  alittle  distance  from  the 

shore. 

••  Ships,  in  general,  make  the  land  with  north  or  N.  E.  winds;  therefore  it  is 
best  to  keep  in  the  latitude  of  the  Cape,  or  a  little  to  the  northward  ef  it,  till 
you  get  soundings,  as  the  current  sets  to  the  S.  W.  It  is  better  not  to  make  the 
land  north  of  the  Cape ;  not  that  I  believe  there  is  any  absolute  danger ;  but  the 
water  in  many  places  is  shoal  a  long  way  off  the  land,  and  would  alarm  any  one 
not  acquainted  with  that  circumstance. 

"  In  latitude  33°  27'  S.  and  longitude  52°  9'  W.  is  a  shoal,  where  we  found  9 
fathoms  water.  I  believe  it  is  a  ridge  running  in  that  parallel  of  latitude  all  the 
way  to  the  shore.  In  latitude  34°  S.  is  some  tolerably;  high  land,  on  which  is  a 
Spanish  fortress,  called  Fort  Teresa.  It  is  a  square,  with  bastions  at  the  angles. 
It  has  *hree  guns  in  the  face  and  one  in  the  flank,  and  stands  about  a  mile  from 
the  beach.  About  six  leagues  N.  N.  E.  from  it  is  a  mark  set  up,  as  the  termina- 
tion of  the  Spanish  territories. 

"  Beinf  'i  latitude  of  Cape  St.  Mary,  and  having  got  ground  in  28  or  80  fathoms 
water,  fint  sand  and  shells,  you  may  reckon  yourself  twenty  leagues  off  shore  : 
with  from  15  to  20  fathoms,  sand  and  clay  mixed,  you  are  not  far  off  the  land. 
When  you  have  not  seen  the  land  before  night,  be  sure  to  keep  to  the  northward 
of  the  Cape  by  your  reckoning,  to  allow  for  the  current,  which  sets  to  the  south- 
ward. Tnis  the  case  with  the  above-mentioned  north  and  N.  E.  winds.  With 
south  and  S.  W.  winds  the  current  runs  strong  the  other  way. 

♦'lam  inclined  to  think  that  the  strong  north-easterly  currents,  which  are  to  be 
met  with  off  the  mouth  of  the  Plata,  when  the  wind  is  about  to  blow,  or  blow- 
ing, from  the  south-westward,  do  not  extend  much,  if  at  all,  beyond  the  bank  of 
soundings. 

"  Agreeing  in  opinion  with  Captain  Bouverie,  that  generally  speaking,  it  is  ad- 
visable to  make  the  land  about  Cape  S.  Mary,  I  would  also  recommend,  if  the 
wind  should  be  any  where  between  S.  E.  and  N.  N.  E.  to  enter  the  river  on  the 
north  side  of  the  English  Bank,  passing  Lobos,  on  either  side,  according  to  the 
wind  and  state  of  the  weather.  There  is  a  good  passage  between  Lobos  and  the 
main,  having  17  to  14  fathoms  water.    Variation  13°  Easterly  (1813.) 

"  When  within  three  or  four  leagues  of  Cape  St.  Mary,  in  17  or  18  fathoms, 
S.  S-  W.  by  compass  is  a  fair  course  to  steer  for  passing  outside  of  Lobos  in  the 
night-time ;  for,  with  the  wind  from  the  eastward,  or  N.  E.  the  set  along  shore 
into  the  river  must  be  guarded  against.  Steering  this  S.  S.  W.  course,  the  depth 
of  water  will  increase  to  20  and  22 ;  and  some  casts,  perhaps,  of  25  or  27  fa- 
thoms, (if  you  are  set  neither  to  the  westward  nor  to  the  southward  of  it,)  and 
the  bottom  will  change,  first  to  sandy  mud,  and  then  to  dark-blue  mud,  as  you 
approach  the  latitude  of  Lobos.  If  you  are  set  to  the  southward,  in  steering 
S.  S.  W.  you  will  not  deepen  so  much ;  the  bottom  will  keep  sandy ;  and  when 
you  approach  the  latitude  of  Lobos,  you  will  have  no  more  than  19,  18,  and  17, 
fathoms;  but  if  you  are  set  to  the  southward  of  Lobos  a  few  miles,  you  will  have 
hard  casts  of  from  16  to  10  fathoms,  and  may  rest  assured  of  being  on  the  parallel 
of  the  English  Bank,  and  may  therefore  make  a  west-northerly  course  true,  till 
you  find  the  bottom  soften  ;  as  it  is  all  dark-blue  or  greenish  mud,  in  the  channel, 
between  the  foul  ridge  of  the  English  Bank  and  the  north  shore,  all  the  way  up 
to  Monte  Video,  in  the  fair  way  from  Lobos.  When  off  Lobos,  if  the  weather 
threaten,  and  *t  should  be  likely  to  blow,  a  ship  will  find  safe  anchorage  in  the 
harbour  of  Maldonado,  sheltered  from  southerly  winds  by  the  Island  of  Goritti, 
which  bears  N.  42°  W.  true,^  eleven  or  twelve  miles  from  Lobos.  As  I  have 
never  been  in  Maldonado  myself,  I  shall  insert  here  what  Captain  Bouverie  says 
about  it. 

"  The  Spanish  surveys  of  this  bay  lay  down  a  sufficient  depth  of  water  for  any 
ship  between  any  part  of  the  island  and  the  main ;  however,  it  cannot  be  safely 
entered,  hut  by  small  vessels,  except  to  the  westward ;  and  you  must  not  go  far- 
ther in  than  to  bring  the  N.  W.  point  of  Goritti  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  §  W.  or  S.  W.  by 
8.  by  compass,  with  4i  or  5  fathoms,  good  strong  clay.  With  southerly  winds 
there  is,  in  the  east  passage,  a  heavy  swell ;  and  the  water,  from  the  ground  be- 
ing uneven,  breaks  almost  the  whole  way  across  in  bad  weather.  The  Diomede 
(fifty-gun  ship)  passed  through  it  to  the  anchorage  before  its  dangers  were  known. 


610 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


and  had  not  less  than  eighteen  feet :  but  there  are  places  where  there  is  so  little 
as  a  fathom  ;  and  it  is  very  irregular.  There  is  a  bed  of  rocks  to  the  south  of 
Ooritti :  the  marks  for  it  arc,  the  Tower  of  Maldonado  north,  and  the  outer  part 
of  Point  del  Este,  E.  N.  E.  i  E. 

**  In  the  direct  line  of  the  entrance  of  the  bay,  from  the  westward,  is  a  bed  of 
rocks  where  there  are  parts  having  only  3  and  quarter-less  3  fathoms.  The 
bearings,  tak'-  •  rocks,  are,  N.  E.  point  of  Goritti  E.  ^  S. — N.  W.  point  of 

ditto,  E.  by  S  o.  W.  point  of  ditto,  S.E.  by  S.— Point  Ballena,  W.  by  N.J  N. 

—the  hiil  of  Pan  dc  Azucar.  just  within  the  extreme  i;f  Point  Ballena. 

*'  In  mid-cbannci,  between  these  rocks  and  the  island,  are  6 J  and  7  fathoms : 
their  distance  from  the  island  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  There  are  7  fa- 
thoms close  to  them,  all  round  the  western  side.  The  watering-place  is  on  the 
main,  close  by  a  battery:  the  stream  loses  itself  in  the  sand,  except  when  swollen 
by  heavy  rains,  and  you  have  to  roll  your  casks  about  sixty  yards  over  the  sand: 
the  water  is  very  good." 

"  Having  Lobos  bearing  N.  by  W.  by  compass,  distance  three  or  four  miles,  you 
will  have  about  18  fathoms ;  and,  in  making  a  compass  course,  W.  }  S.  by  ground 
log,  (having  due  regard  to  the  wind  and  current  at  the  time)  you  will  make  the 
island  of  Florcs  ahead  of  you.  In  this  track  your  soundings  will  gradually  de- 
crease from  1 8  to  12  fathoms,  due  south  of  Black  Point,  and  to  7  or  8  fathoms 
when  vnu  approach  within  nine  or  ten  miles  of  Flores. 

♦•  Though  Captain  Bouverie  says,  "  You  may  run  quite  up  to  Monte  Video, 
either  by  night  or  day,  by  making  a  due  west  course,  first  trying  the  current  to 
make  allowance  for  it;"  and  though  I  have  frequently  done  it  myself,  yet  I  would 
not  recommend  it  as  a  general  rule  to  be  followed  by  strangers  to  the  River  Pla- 
ta. Great  care  and  attention  to  the  course  made  good,  and  to  the  soundinj^s, 
are  indispensably  requisite  in  those  who  attempt  to  conduct  vessels  during  the 
night,  in  any  part  of  this  river ;  and  even  these  have  been  but  too  often  insuffi- 
cient to  save  ships  fronr  destruction.  But,  in  merchant-vessels,  I  fear  we  cannot 
always  expect  to  And  those  qualities ;  and,  therefore,  I  withhold  Jny  opinion  of 
its  being  adviseable  for  them  to  run  in  the  night;  neither  can  it  be  done  by  men 
cf  war  without  some  risk. 

"  Flores  bears,  by  the  world,  \V.  4^  30'  N.  from  Lobos,  distant  fifty-two  miles. 
It  lies  nearly  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  has  a  small  hummock  in  the  middle,  and  one  at 
each  end :  that  to  the  S.  W.  being  thirty-nine  feet  high.  Between  these  the  land 
is  low  and  marshy ;  and  overflowed  sometimes  between  the  central  and  N.  £. 
hummock.  It  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  five  or  six  leagues  from  a  ship's 
deck  in  clear  weather. 

"  There  is  good  anchoi-agc  all  round  this  island,  but  a  reef  extends  in  a  N.  W. 
direction  from  the  north  point  about  a  mile.  Seals  and  sea-lions,  and  various 
aquatic  birds  resort  to  this  small  island  as  well  as  to  Lobos;  and,  in  the  months 
of  August  and  September,  great  quantities  of  very  excellent  eggs  may  be  pro- 
cured. With  the  wind  easterly,  boats  may  land  on  the  western  side  of  Flores, 
particularly  in  a  small  cove,  very  near  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  island.  From  Flo- 
res, W.  N.  W.  the  Caretas  rocks  (above  water)  are  distant  about  five  miles;  and 
there  are  5  fathoms  between  them.  True  south,  at  the  distance  of  eleven  miles 
from  Flores,  is  the  north  part  of  the  English  Bank ;  on  which,  in  that  latitude, 
35°  8'  S.  there  is  about  12  feet  water.  The  depth  of  water,  between  Flores  and 
the  English  Bank,  is  7  fathoms,  all  the  way  across,  to  within  a  very  little  distance 
of  both.  The  English  Bank,  in  latitude  35°  12',  generally  breaks;  and,  with  a 
low  river,  is  above  water  in  some  places.  Its  extent,  to  the  southward,  has  not 
yet  been  accurately  defined ;  and,  for  seventy  or  eighty  miles  to  the  south-east- 
ward of  it,  the  gi-ound  is  said  to  be  foul  and  uneven,  and  has  not  been  explored. 

"  Between  the  Archimedes  and  the  English  Bank  there  is  a  swatch  of  5  fa- 
thoms water,  (according  to  Captain  Beaufort,  of  the  Royal  Navy,  who  explored 
these  banks  in  1807)  and  as  many  miles  wide. 

"  The  shoalest  part  of  the  Archimedes  Bank,  about  23  fathoms,  is  four  miles 
in  extent,  about  north  and  south  :  and  there  are  four  fathoms  all  round  it.  The 
centre  of  it  is  in  latitude  SS©  12'  S.  and  the  Monte  Video  bears  N.  82°  W.  by 


BLUNT^S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


511 


the  world  from  it,  distance  twenty  milea.  Besides  this  bank,  there  is  a  small 
knull,  in  Isit.  95°  14'  S.  which  is  true  south  from  the  Monte  Video,  twenty-ona 
miles,  and  has  not  more  than  3}  fathoms  of  water  on  it,  and  about  4  fathoms  all 
round  it. 

"  Passing  to  the  southward  of  Flores,  at  the  distance  of  a  couple  of  miles, 
vou  have  6^  or  7  fathoms,  and  may  steer  W.  h  S>  to  pass  Point  Braba,  which 
bears  true  W.  4°  N.  distant  four  leagues  from  the  S.  W.  end  of  Flores.  This 
point  is  bolder  to  than  the  land  to  the  westward,  between  it  and  the  town  of 
Monte  Video,  and  may  be  passed  close,  in  4}  or  5  fathoms,  at  a  mile  or  a  mile 
and  a  half  distance.  The  best  anchorage  for  a  frigate,  olT  the  town  of  Monto 
Video,  is  with  Point  Braba  bearing  W.  by  N.  1  N.  the  cathedral  N.  E.  by  N.  and 
the  Mount  about  N.  W.  by  N.  in  3||  or  4  fathoms,  two  miles  or  more  from  the 
town,  with  the  harbour  quite  open.    The  bottom  is  all  soft  mud. 

"  The  harbour  of  Monte  Video  is  very  shoal,  having  only  from  14  to  19  feet 
water ;  but  the  bottom  is  so  very  soft,  that  vessels  receive  no  damage  by  ground- 
ing there.  Captain  Bouverie  says,  "A  S.  S.W.  wind,  which  blows  right  into 
the  harbour,  and  causes  a  good  deal  of  sea,  always  occasions  the  water  to  rise  a 
fathom  or  more. 

"  In  a  long  continuance  of  fine  weather,  the  tides  sometimes  assume  the  ap- 
{>earance  of  regularity ;  but  this  is  not  often  the  case.  They  are  governed  en- 
tirely by  the  winds.  The  winds  from  the  southward  cause  the  water  to  run  out 
on  the  north  shore  strongest.  Fine  weather  and  a  N.  W.  wind  make  the  water 
lowest.  It  is  usual,  in  Monte  Video  harbour,  to  have  an  anchor  to  the  S.  £.  and 
another  to  the  S.  W.  and  to  take  one  in  abaft  from  the  northward ;  for  the  wa- 
ter, forced  in  by  the  southerly  wind,  sometimes  rushes  out  with  astonishing  ra- 
pidity ;  when  the  anchorage  to  the  north  is  of  the  greatest  service. 

"  The  Mount  Video  is  in  latitude  34°  53'  S.  longitude  56°  3'  W.  of  Green- 
wich; being  1°  S4'  W.  of  the  island  of  Lobos,  and  SP  10'  E.  from  the  cathedral 
of  Buenos  Ayres.  On  the  summit  of  this  mount  is  a  fortified  building,  whose 
base  is  forty -two  feet  six  inches  by  twenty  feet,  used  sometimes  for  a  light- 
house.* The  diameter  of  the  lantern  is  ten  feet  six  inches,  and  its  elevation 
above  the  level  of  the  sea  four  hundred  and  fifty  feet.  At  the  base  of  the  mount 
are  several  runs  of  excellent  water,  particularly  in  two  small,  smooth,  sandy 
bays  on  the  S.  W.  part  of  it,  where  ships  in  the  outer  road  may  supply  them- 
selves with  ease ;  and  another  on  the  east  side  of  the  mount,  just  abreast  of  Rat 
Island,  adapted  to  ships  in  the  harbour. 

"  Giving  the  preference  to  the  passage  on  the  north  side  of  the  English  Bank, 
especially  when  the  wind  is  any  where  between  S.  S.  E.  and  N.  N.  E.  on  passing 
Lobos,  because  it  may  be  expected  most  probably  to  shift,  if  it  does  at  all,  round 
by  the  north  to  the  westward ;  though,  perhaps,  not  before  that  wind,  and  the 
inset,  together,  might  carry  a  ship  up  to  Monte  Video ;  yet  if  the  wind  should 
be  to  the  north-westward  at  the  time  of  making  the  land,  it  may  be  pretty  con- 
fidently expected  to  shift  next  to  the  westward  or  S.  W.  and  therefore  a  ship 
should  not  strive  to  beat  up,  round  Lobos  and  the  north  channel,  against  an  out- 
set, but  stand  at  once  over  towards  Cape  St.  Antonio ;  where,  by  the  time  she 
could  stretch  across,  she  would,  most  likely,  find  a  S.  S.  W.  wind  and  N.  W. 
current  to  run  up  with,  along  a  weather  shore,  to  Buenos  Ayres ;  or  to  Monte  Vi- 
deo, if  hound  thither,  passing  to  the  westward  of  the  bank  of  Archimedes,  in  about 
5  fathoms  water ;  or ,  if  the  mount  should  be  seen  in  good  time,  never  to  bring 
it  to  bear  to  the  westward  of  North,  till  within  five  leagues  of  it. 

"  Tn  standing  to  the  southward,  from  abreast  of  Cape  St.  Mary,  with  the  wind 
soutu-westcrly,  a  ship  will  have  from  18  to  S4  or  25  fathoms  when  in  the  lati- 
tude of  Lobos,  and  about  twelve  or  thirteen  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  it ;  and, 


■I*  A  lantern,  with  lamps  and  reflectors,  for  Monte  Video,  was  prepared  in  London,  by  order 
of  the  Portuguese  government,  and  shipped  in  May,  1819.  It  was  then  stated  that  the  light- 
house was  to  be  erected  on  the  Isle  Flores ;  but,  on  the  26th  of  October  following,  an  official 
notice  was  issued  from  the  British  Admiralty,  stating  that  "  the  light-house,  which  formerly 
stood  upon  the  mountain,  Mcnte  Video,  had  been  re-eatabliahed,  and  u  to  be  lighted  every 
evening."  The  light  has,  therefore,  been  materially  improved. 


512 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


making  a  S.  S.  E.  course,  the  water  will  then  shoal  to  18, 16,  It,  or  11  fathoms, 
in  crossing  the  ridge,  which  is  generally  composed  of  sdnd,  gray  speckled,  mixed 
With  stones,  hereabouts ;  after  which  the  depth  increases  gradually  to  85  or  86 
fathoms,  over  a  sandy  bottom,  in  latitude  8&o  40'  S.  and  longitude  5dO  tif  Vf. 
In  the  latitude  of  36°  S.  and  fifteen  or  twenty  miles  farther  to  the  eastward,  you 
will  deepen  off  the  br..ik  entirely.  A  ship,  having  got  as  far  to  the  southward 
•s  d6<^  8.  may  consider  herself  in  the  fair  way  for  proceeding  up  on  the  south 
side  of  the  ifnglish  Bank ;  and,  if  the  wind  serve,  a  true  west  course  may  be 
made  good. 

**  In  latitude  36^  S.  the  depth  of  water  on  the  merididn  of  Gape  St.  Mary  is 
88  fathoms ;  and  the  bottom  fine  gray  sand,  like  ground  pepper. 

*'  Keeping  still  to  the  westward,  'm  that  parallel  of  36°  S.  the  depth  decreases 
to  19  or  18  fathoms,  true  south  of  Lobos;  and  for  ton  leagues  farther  you  have 
from  that  (o  15  fathoms.  But  if  from  the  latitude  of  36°  S.  on  the  meridian  of 
L«bos,  you  make  a  W.  by  N.  or  W  by  N.  j  N.  course  true,  you  will  shoal  the 
water  to  8  or  7)  fathoms,  in  latitude  35^  45'  S.  on  the  meridian  of  the  English 
Bank.  The  quality  of  the  bottom,  generally,  in  this  track,  h  sandy,  mixed  with 
small  stones ;  and  the  nearer  you  approach  to  the  ridge  of  the  English  Bank,  it 
is  intermixed  with  bits  of  shells,  ai.d  sometimes  with  clay  or  mud. 

"  From  latitude  35°  45'  South  due  S.  of  the  English  Bank,  a  W.  N.  W.  true 
course  to  latitude  35°  33'  S.  will  bring  the  Mount  Video  to  bear  North  by  the 
world,  in  about  61  fathoma,  mud,  at  the  distance  of  thirteen  leagues  from  Point 
Piedras :  and  from  this  position  the  same  true  course  may  be  made  to  raise  the 
land  about  Point  del  Indio,  if  bound  up  to  Buenos  Ayres ;  or  N.  W.  or  more 
northerly,  to  get  sight  of  the  Mount  Video ;  having  due  regard  to  the  set  of  the 
current,  up  or  down  the  river,  that  you  may  neither  be  horsed  on  the  S.  E.  tail 
of  the  Ortiz  Flats,  nor  on  the  western  part  of  the  Archimedes'  Bank.  The  bot- 
tom above  this  is  soft  mud,  or  clay,  in  the  channels,  fit  for  safe  anchorage.  In 
latitude  85'^  30'  S.  or  thereabouts,  and  due  South  of  the  Archimides'  Bank,  or 
some  miles  further  to  the  eastward,  I  have  been  told  by  some  persons  they 
have  had  as  little  as  4  fathoms,  hard  ground. 

"  Ships  leaving  Monte  Video,  to  proceed  up  to  Buenos  Ayres,  must  be  very 
attentive  to  the  lead ;  and  the  course  steered  across  the  river  must  be  very  care- 
fully regulated  by  the  set  of  current  at  the  time.    If  the  weather  be  sufficiently 
elear,  the  Mount  is  the  most  sure  guide,  keeping  it  by  an  azimuth  compass,  on 
the  magnetic  bearing  N.  £.  by  N. ;  and  when  it  sinks  to  an  eye  in  the  top,  a 
more  westerly  course  may  be  steered  to  raise  the  land  about  Point  del  Indio. 
This  direction  is  intended  to  apply  particularly  to  frigates,  or  any  ships  drawing 
more  than  sixteen  feet  water ;  because  it  is  not  advisable  for  them  to  cross  the 
tail  of  the  Ortiz  Flats  much  farther  to  the  westward  than  a  true  S.  W.  course 
from  the  mount  will  be  take  them ;  for,  with  a  low  river,  I  have  had  barely  8| 
fathoms,  in  the  Nereus,  with  the  mount  bearing  N.  35°  E.  by  compass,  distant 
ten  leagues.    At  other  times,  I  have  sunk  the  mount  on  a  N.  53°  E.  magnetic 
bearing,  and  bad  as  much  as  8}  fathoms  water ;  but  the  river  was  then  well  filled, 
"  The  Ortiz  Bank  extends  from  lat.  34°  25'  S.  to  lat.  35°  15'  S.     Ships  pas- 
sing between  the  Ortiz  and  the  south  shore,  have  only  to  keep  the  land  in  sight, 
to  clear  the  bank.   On  the  Chico  bank  (the  smallest  of  the  Ortiz  and  most  south- 
ern) there  is  the  wreck  of  a  vessel,  the  mast  of  which  serves  as  a  Beacon,  lying 
about  twelve  miles  East  from  El  Embudo,  and  eight  or  ten  miles  West  from  the 
S.  E.  buoy  on  the  Ortiz,  and  may  be  passed  on  either  side,  as  these  are  3  fa- 
thoms very  near  it  all  around,  and  also  four  buoys.    There  is  a  good  passage  be- 
tween the  Ortiz  Bank  and  Chico,  with  nothing  less  than  4  fathoms ;  the  Ortiz 
side  is  the  deepest,  and  correctly  delineated  on  the  new  Chart  published  by 
E.  &&  G.  W.  BLUNT,  with  sailing  directions  engraved  on  it  1826. 

Soundings,  on  approaching  the  south  side  of  the  Ortiz  Bank  are  regular,  and 
shoalen  gradually.  When  you  get  hard  bottom,  keep  oflfa  little|anddee^>en  into 
8),  4  or  6  fathoms,  soft  mud.  The  approach  to  the  Chico  is  not  safe  on  the  Or- 
tiz side,  as  you  get  from  5  into  2  fathoms  directly,  in  some  places,  which  makes 
it  safest  to  keep  on  the  Ortiz  side  of  the  middle  passage.  The  middle  passage  is 
soft  mud  until  very  near  the  banks ;  the  passage  between  the  Chico  and  tlie 


BLUNT^S   AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


613 


ihnre  is  for  th«  most  pnrt  loft  mud,  but  in  roanjr  places  it  will  change  suddenlj, 
and  appears  tu  ba  formed  of  hard  and  AofUridgeH  niternatcly.  You  will  carrj  5^, 
5},  and  4  fathoms  in  the  channel,  and  tiM  passaKe  is  from  four  to  six  miles  broad. 
Tide  rises  in  the  rivrr  about  five  feet  in  settled  weather. 

"  For  the  distance  of  full  seventeen  miles  to  the  south-eastward  of  the  Ortia 
Beacon,  there  is  generally  no  more,  and  often  less,  than  3(i  fathoms ;  the  bottom 
tough  clay,  nearest  the  bank ;  and  in  some  places  farther  to  the  south-eastward, 
soft  mud,  not  more  than  Si  fathoms. 

'*  After  sinking  the  mount  about  N.  E.  by  N.  and  having  8)  fnthoms,  a  W.  S. 
W.  course  will  raise  the  land  (if  the  weather  is  clear)  about  Point  del  Indio  to 
the  eye  at  the  mast-head  ;  and  probably  you  will  not  have  more  than  Si,  or,  at 
best,  3),  fathoms.  The  mount  and  land  near  Point  del  Indio  are  sometimes  visi- 
ble at  the  same  time. 

"  Point  del  Indio  is  in  latitude  about  35^  18'  S.  and  0<3  56'  W.  of  the  Muunt 
Video,  from  which  it  bears  S.  B3<^  W.  by  the  world,  distant  fifty  miles.  There 
is  little  more  than  3  fathoms  ut  the  distance  often  or  eleven  miles,  when  the  river 
is  in  a  mean  state  ;  farther  to  the  southward,  and  ofT  Point  Piedras,  there  is  only 
that  depth  fourteen  or  fifteen  miles  off  shore.  Very  great  caution,  therefore,  fa 
re(]^uired  in  approaching  it ;  and  a  constant  look-out  should  be  kept  for  the  land, 
»s  It  is  very  low,  and  cannot  be  seen  farther  than  twelve  or  thirteen  miles,  in  any 
weather,  from  the  deck  of  a  frigate. 

"  When  the  land  is  barely  raised  to  an  eye  nineteen  or  twenty  feet  above  the 
surface  of  the  water,  a  W.  N.  W.  magnetic  course  will  lead  along-shore,  be- 
tween it  and  the  south  part  of  the  Ortiz,  which  is  distant  about  fourteen  miles 
from  it ;  and  between  them  there  is  no  where  more  water  than  3ji,  but  mostly 
Si  fathoms.  With  a  high  river,  I  have  had  a  quarter-less  4  fathoms.  The  nearer 
the  Ortiz,  the  deeper  the  water. 

"  In  steering  up  W.  N.  W.  with  the  land  seen  from  the  deck,  (if  clear  weath- 
er,) you  will  have  3i  or  Si  fathoms,  (yet  if  the  river  is  low,  perhaps  some  casts 
of  3  fathoms,)  and  raise  a  remarkable  clump  of  trees,  called  Embudo;  which 
are  much  taller  than  the  rest,  highest  at  the  west  end,  and  lie  in  latitude  35^  6'  S. 
and  in  longitude  1°  16'  30"  West  of  the  Mount  Video,  or  0^  57'.  30"  East  of  the 
'Cathedral  of  Buenos  Ayres.  At  some  distance  to  the  westward  of  the  Embudo 
trees,  there  is  another  clump  about  the  same  height ;  but  these  being  highest  at 
the  east  end,  are  sufficiently  distinguished  not  to  be  mistaken  for  the  true  Em- 
budo. 

"  When  in  3)  or  3|  fathoms,  the  Embudo  trees  bear  by  compass  W.  S.  W. 
the  S.  E.  end  of  the  Ghico  Bank  will  bear  W.  N.  W.  or  thereabouts,  ten  or 
eleven  miles  from  you ;  and  you  must  now  determine  from  the  water  that  your 
ship  draws,  and  the  then  direction  of  the  wind  and  state  of  the  weather,  whether 
you  will  pass  between  the  Chico  and  the  shore,  or  between  the  Ortiz  and  the 
Chico.  I  have  passed  up  and  down  several  times  between  the  Ghico  and  the 
south  shore  in  the  Nereus,  lightened  in  her  draft  to  eighteen  feet  three  incheii ; 
but  I  would  never  attempt  it  again  from  choice,  now  I  am  better  acquainted  with 
the  middle  channel  between  the  Chico  and  the  Ortiz,  and  have  ev  tj  reason  to 
believe  that  the  middle  ground,  some  Charts  lay  down  in  it,  does  not  exist. 

"  A  ship  not  drawing  more  than  fifteen  feet  may  take  eittier  passage ;  and,  of 
the  two,  ought  perhaps  to  prefer  that  to  the  southward  of  the  Chico  Bank,  par- 
ticularly if  the  wind  should  be  well  to  the  southward,  as  she  might  take  her 
soundings  from  the  weather  shore,  and,  keeping  in  somewhat  more  than  her 
own  draft,  run  up  along  it ;  and,  by  not  deepening  above  3  fathoms,  would  en- 
sare  being  to  the  southward  of  the  Chico. 

*'  The  S.  E.  end  of  the  Chico  Bank  bears  from  the  Embudo  trees  N.  32^  E. 
true,  distant  ten  miles,  and  E.  9^N.  thirteen  miles  from  Atalaya  church.  Its 
latitude  there  is  34'^  56'  SO"  S.  and  longitude  1°  9'  W.  of  the  Mount  Video. 
This  bank  runs  in  the  direction  of  N.  52°  W.  true,  or  N.  65°  W.  by  compass, 
about  thirteen  miles  to  its  N.  W.  end,  which  is  in  latitude  34°  48'  50''  S.  and 
qO  47'  East  of  Buenos  Ayres'  cathedral.  From  this  N.  W.  end,  in  fourteen  feet 
water,  Atalaya  church  bears  S.  14°  W'.  distant  eleven  miles ;  and  Point  Santia- 
go, forming  the  Ensenada  de  Barragan,  bears  W.  4°  N.  fourteen  miles  from  it. 

65 


514 


BLUNT  S  AM£RICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  breadth  of  the  Ghico  does  not  excoed  two  miles,  or  perhaps  a  mile  and  a 
haJf,  and  its  inner  edpe  is  about  iiiue  miles  from  the  shore.  The  water  betwci'u 
it  and  the  shore  is  no  where  more  than  3i  fathoms,  and  the  deepest  water  is 
along  the  inner  edge  of  tlie  shoal,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile  from  it,  or  less  in 
lome  places.  About  midway  between  it  and  the  shore  there  is  a  qiiarter-lcss  S 
fathoms.  On  some  parts  of  the  Chico  there  is  very  little  water,  and  within  the 
limits  I  have  assigned  to  it,  no  %vhere  more  than  fourteen  feet.  There  was,  for 
some  years,  the  mast  of  a  vessel,  called  the  Pandora,  which  was  wrecked  on  this 
shoal,  in  latitud  ;  31°  r)4'  S.  about  five  n-iles  from  its  S.  K.  end,  which  proved  an 
excellent  beacon  to  guide  ships  passing  it  on  either  side ;  but  it  has  disappeared. 
It  is  very  necessary  that  three  buoys  should  be  placed  on  this  dangerous  shoal  to 
mark  its  centre  and  each  end. 

"  To  ships  drawing  less  tiiun  fifteen  feet,  it  is  only  further  necessary  to  recom- 
mend care  and  attention  on  approaching.  Point  St.  lago,  which  forms  bushy  and 
distinct;  and  when  it  is  brought  to  bear  to  the  south-westward,  haul  out  into  the 
stream  of  3i  fathoms,  to  round  outside  the  Spit,  which  runs  about  N.  W.  by 
compass  from  Point  St.  lago  at  least  ten  or  eleven  miles  ;  its  extreme  point,  in 
S  fathoms,  being  five  miles  from  the  shore.  When  two  remarkable  trees  on  Point 
Lara  are  brought  to  bear  S.  by  E.  4  E.  or  S.  S.  E.  by  compass,  you  are  past  the 
Spit.  This  mark  will  also  lead  a  ship  of  that  draught  of  water  clear  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  Spit,  in  running  in  towards  the  Enst;nada. 

"  After  passing  the  spit  off  Point  St.  lago,  in  3i  fathoms,  a  W.  by  N.  northerlj' 
course  by  compass  will  load  up  to  the  outer  road  of  Buenos  Ayres,  where  any 
ship  may  safely  anchor  in  the  water  she  draws,  if  the  river  is  low. 

"  Frigates,  or  any  vessels  drawing  more  than  sixteen  feet'water,  should  barely 
raise  the  land  about  Point  del  ludio  to  the  eye  on  deck,  and  borrow  nearest  the  Or- 
tiz :  more  particularly  when  the  Embudo  trees  are  brought  to  beirr  as  far  as  S.VV. 
byW.  (magnetic  ;)  for,  with  the  Emiiudo  bearing  from  S.W.  to  S.S.W.  the  bot- 
tom is  flat,  off  to  3  fathoms,  full  seven  miles  from  the  shore,  and  chiefly  han! 
clay.  Therefore,  when  the  Embudo  trees  bear  W.  S.  W.  by  compass,  and  yon 
are  about  nine  or  ten  miles  offshore,  in  Sj  fathoms,  if  you  have  a  leading  wind, 
haul  to  the  N.  \V.  by  W.  or  more  northerly,  as  may  be  required  to  clear  the 
S.  E.  tail  of  the  Chico,  on  which  a  Red  Buoy  is  placed,  and  you  will  soon 
deepen  your  water  to  4  fathoms,  and  more,  in  the  middle  channel,  between  the 
Ghico  and  the  Ortiz  Shoal.  The  fair  course  through,  between  them,  is  about 
N.  W.  by  W.  4  W.  (magnetic,)  and  in  mid-channel  the  land  can  but  Just  be  dis- 
tinguished from  the  quarter-deck  of  a  frigate.  When  the  Embudo  trees  bear 
S.  20O  W.  by  compass,  you  will  be  abreast  of  the  S.  E.  end  of  the  Chico,  and 
may  either  take  your  shoal  soundings  along  its  northern  or  outer  edge,  to  about  a  ' 
quarter-less  four,  if  the  wind  is  southerly,  or  if  the  wind  be  northerly,  or  easterly, 
borrow  into  a  convenient  depth  along  the  southern  edge  of  the  Ortiz.  I  believe 
the  breadth  of  this  middle  channel  may  be  five  or  six  mi|gs,  and  the  depth  nf 
water  from  4  to  5j,  and  even  6  fathoms,  in  the  fair-way,  jffiout  the  N.  W.  part 
of  it,  and  abreast  that  end  of  the  Chico.  The  quality  of  the  grouiUl  all  the  way 
through  this  channel  is  generally  soft  mud,  and  lit  for  safe  anchorage. 

The  N.  W.  pitch  of  the  Chico  Bank,  on  which  is  a  Red  Buoy  as  before  men- 
tioned, being  passed,  and  the  depth  of  water  5  or  &4  fathoms',  you  may  stocr 
by  compass  W.  by  N.  i  N.  or  W.  by  N.  for  Buenos  Ayres,  taking  care  not  to 
shoal  under  quarter-less  four,  off  *En8enada,  till  Point  Lara  trees  boar  S.  S.  E. 
A  little  more  than  halfway  from  Point  Lara  to  Buenos  Ayres  there  ~.'e  two  other 
remarkable  trees.  When  moored  off  Buenos  Ayres,  in  the  Nereus,  in  nineteen 
feet  water,  and  the  bottom  soft  mud,  these  trees  bore  by  compass,  S.  17°  V. 
the  cathedral  S.  HT^  W.  and  the  spire  of  the  Recoleta  Convent  S.  70'^  W.  vnr. 
I5i  E.  P.  IIEYWOOI). 


'*  TU«r6  is  a  good  harbour  at  this  place. 


ULUiNTS    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


515 


CHAP.  SVXZ. 


«»»>^tii 


Thi  RIVER  PLATA  to  CAPE  HORN,  *FALKLAND  ISLANDS, 

SOUTH  SHETLAND,  ^c. 


The  Coast  of  tho  Pampas,  or  Plains  of  Buenos  Ayrea,  extentis  from  the  RiTtr 
Plata,  to  the  Colorado  or  Rod  Rivej*,  represented  in  latitude  39°  50<  S.  It  is  sn- 
(irely  flat  and  destitute  of  harliours.  Tlic  interior  is  one  vast  plain,  mostly  co- 
vered with  grass  ar.d  clover,  the  food  of  millions  of  horned  cattle.     Tiio  mari- 


*  FALKLAND'S  ISLANDS,  tlie  Maluinas  of  tho  Spaniards.— These  islamk  have  borne 
different  names,  successively  icnpurtcd  by  the  older  navigators.  Recently  they  have  been 
taken  possession  of,  in  a  formal  niaiincr,  as  belonging  to  the  United  Provinces  of  South- 
America. 

The  islands  and  islets,  in  general,  appear  equally  biciik  and  desolate,  presenting  barren 
shores  and  naked  liuic-atonc  mountains,  with  no  other  vegetution  than  heath  and  grass.  In 
the  lotv  grounds  a  stratum  of  peat,  two  feet  thick,  covers  a  bed  of  stone  or  slate.  Tho  qua- 
drupeds arc  wolves  and  foxes,  which  earth  tiicmselves  alike.  Seals  and  sea-birds  arc  innu- 
merable. The  advantages  of  the  islands  arc  their  cxtellcnt  harbours,  a  climate  commonly 
temperate  and  healthy,  but  subject  to  great  vicissitudes.  The  running  waters  arc  abun- 
dant. Though  tho  islaiids  have  no  wood,  there  is  no  want  of  fuel,  the  peat  arroi<ding  it  in 
abundance.  Large  quantities  arc  sometimes  found,  which  appear  to  come  from  the  south 
and  west. 

Our  information,  with  regard  to  the  islands,  is  yet  imperfect.  The  positions  in  the  Table 
are,  however,  given  as  nearly  as  we  could  obtain  them  :  we  believe  that  they  are  very  near 
the  truth ;  egpttcially  in  the  western  points. 

Lieutenant  Grant,  commander  of  the  I^ady  Nelson,  in  the  relation  of  his  voynge  to  New 
South-Wales,  has  given  some  useful  remarks  on  these  islands.  He  slates  that,  on  the'2lst 
January,  1802,  having  before  intended  to  touch  at  these  i.^ilands,  they  came  safely  to  an 
anchor  in  Hope  Buy,  or  Little  Wcst-Poi.it  ILubour,  in  the  N.  ^V.  ;  and  then  proceeds  as 
fullow : 

"  Our  intention  had  been  first  to  touch  at  a  cluster  of  islands  to  the  westward,  called  New 
Islands  by  the  Americans,  who  arc  tiic  most  constnat  visitors  of  Falkland's  Islands.  On 
New  Islands  are  found  plenty  of  goats  and  hogs.  Tlmy  lie  about  thirty  miff's  S  S.  W.  by 
compass  from  West  Bay,  as  a  N.  N.  I',  course  carried  us  from  them  clear  to  the  entrance  of 
^Vt!3t-Po^nt.  They  are  distinguished  by  a  particular  saddle- island  and  a  blufti  standing  se- 
parately from  each  other.  Tliey  are  a  little  to  the  northward  of  licavcr  Island,  and  maybe 
easily  found  by  the  two  remarkable  islands  just  mentioned. 

"As  it  is  of  the  greatest  consequence  to  mariners,  when  in  want  of  water  or  refresh- 
ments, to  obtain  every  possible  information  in  order  to  secure  a  port  amongst  this  foul- 
weather  group  of  islands,  wliioli  purpose  may  be  defeated  by  the  smallest  oversight,  I  think 
that  a  few  I'cmarks  inailc  in  the  run  may  not  be  unacceptable. 

"  Having  made  New  Islands,  the  westerly  wind,  wliich  generally  prevails,  blowing  very 
strong  and  in  scpialls,  would  not  permit  -is  to  anchor;  we  wcrr  ihereibre,  under  the  neces- 
sity either  of  making  the  harbour  of  West-Point,  or  running  m  the  night  through  a  pasingo 
among  tho  Jasons,  mVII  known  to  be  full  of  rocdts  and  shoals,  many  of  them  not  laid  down 
in  any  Chart.  1  have  before  observed,  that,  thirty  miles  N.  N.  F.  by  compass  brought  us  to 
the  entrance  of  West-Point  Harbour.  In  this  run  there  are,  on  the  right  hand,  a  few  small 
Hat  islands,  called  Pass  Islands :  these  ouglit  to  be  kept  on  board  near  enough  to  see  tho  surf 
hreahing  tui  tlieai ;  and,  soon  after,  a  remarkable  island,  with  a  steep  side,  will  present  itself, 
having  the  appearance  of  ii  split  in  the  middle,  which  has  given  it  the  nnmo  of  Split  Island. 
Here  we  observed  the  latitude  at  noon  to  be  51  ^  14'  S.  when  it  bore  E.  N.  E.  by  compus. 


51^ 


,.7 


BLUNT'8  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


ttme  part,  next  the  sea,  has  been  called  by  the  Spaniards,  the  Pays  del  Dkibl% 
or  Devil's  Country,  (no  very  attractive  appeliation)  yet  the  coast  may  be  ap- 
proached with  safety,  as  the  soundings  are  regular. 

distance  three  miles.  Tlie  Split  must  be  brought  to  bear  S.  by  W.  in  running  in,  and  N.  bf 
£.  in  coming  out :  observing  this,  a  vessel  will  find  itself  in  the  fair-way  ;  and,  right-a-head 
coming  in,  or  right-astern  going  c  ut,  a  sight  will  be  had  of  West-Point  entrance,  mailing  at 
first  like  three  hummocks,  to  the  right  of  which  is  the  mouth  of  the  harbour.  The  small 
harbour  on  the  left  is  preferable  to  the  larger  one  on  the  right,  though  anchorage  may  be 
found  in  both,  but  fresh  water  may  more  readily  be  had  in  the  little  harbour.  Both  theat 
together  form  nearly  an  oval,  divided  by  the  passage  which  runs  directly  through,  where 
the  tides  of  flood  and  ebb  alternately  enter.  A  vessel  must  therefore  haul  close  round  the 
rocks  on  the  south  side,  to  get  into  the  little  harbour  for  the  ebb-tide,  with  which  she  must 
go  in,  unless  it  blows  very  strong,  so  as  to  enable  her  to  stem  the  flood  ;  botb  tides  running 
here  with  great  rapidity,  and,  when  it  blows  hard,  raising  a  confused  sea.  There  is  a  sandy 
beach  at  the  top  of  the  harbour,  off  which  a  vessel  may  choose  her  depth  of  water  to  an- 
chor in.  In  going  out  of  the  harbour,  the  northern  passage  is  most  eligible  ;  and  a  westerly 
wind,  with  a  course  N.  by  E.  by  compass,  will  carry  a  vessel  out,  provided  she  get  under 
way  at  the  fir^t  of  the  ebb. 

"  Five  small  perpendicular  rocks,  called  the  Needle  Keys,  appear  when  out,  standing  to- 
gether, bearing  N.  £.  by  E.  or  thereabouts,  from  the  harbour's  mouth.  It  is  best  to  leave 
them  on  the  right ;  but,  should  there  be  little  wind,  and  the  tide  strong,  as  was  the  case  when 
we  passed  them,  a  vessel  may  go  close  to  the  right  of  them.  The  tide  must  be  attended  to, 
as  it  runs  strongly  betwixt  them.  The  water  close  to  them  is  very  deep,  as  wc  were  carried 
hy  the  tide  near  enough  to  throw  any  thing  upon  them.  The  bottom  is  very  foul,  so  that  if 
an  anchor  is  let  go,  it  is  a  chance  if  it  is  ever  recovered ;  and  should  the  wind  continue  light, 
the  tide  of  flood  making,  a  vessel  may  anchor  at  Sedge  Island,  if  she  can  get  as  far  down, 
where  ten  fathoms  water  will  be  found,  with  a  sandy  bottom,  within  two  or  three  miles  of 
the  shore.     From  Sedge  Island,  a  N.  by  E.  course  will  carry  a  vessel     jar  out  to  sea. 

"  It  is  proper  to  observe  here,  that,  if  a  vessel  is  obliged  to  leave  .^.  Needle  Keys  on  her 
left  hand,  the  nearer  she  keeps  to  them  the  better ;  and  even  to  haul  over  on  the  larboard 
side  after  she  is  past,  as  she  will  have  the  more  room  to  weather  a  ledge  of  rocks  lying  at  a 
considerable  distance  out  from  Saunders'  Point.  This  passage  is  mueh  preferable  to  runnin|; 
through  the  Jasona. 

"  Falkland's  Islands  have  been  described  by  many  voyagers,  whose  stay  there  gave  then 
better  opportunity  of  observation.  I  shall  just  observe  that  they  lie  very  convenient  for  be- 
bg  touched  at  on  long  voyages,  when. there  happens  such  a  necessity  for  a  supply  of  sea-stock 
as  we  experienced. 

"  The  soil  is  light,  producing  a  strong  grass,  known  by  the  name  of  fussach,  which,  if  set 
fire  to,  the  turf  will  burn  for  a  considerable  time ;  and,  notwithstanding  heavy  rains,  it  is  not 
to  be  extinguished.  I  saw  but  little  timber,  and  even  brush- wood  did  not  appear  to  be  ia 
plenty.    Few  birds  are  to  be  seen,  but  geese  and  penguins  are  in  great  numbers. 

"  We  found  the  geese  excellent  eating,  without  the  least  taste  of  fish,  as  they  lire  on  gra» 
and  sea-weed.  Celery  was  found  growing  plentifully.  We  used  it  freely,  as  its  antiscorbutic 
virtues  are  well  known. 

*'  We  found  an  American  ship  lying  here,  coded  the  \Vashington,  of  Nantucket :  her  com- 
mander,  Jcdediah  Fitz,  informed  me  that  the  American  sailors  have  discovered  potatoes 
eaten  raw  to  b|»  a  powerful  antiscorbutic ;  and  that  their  whaling-vessels  constantly  took  a 
quantity  with  them  to  sea,  to  eat  raw,  as  an  antidote  ngMnst  the  scurvy.  He  had  planted  a 
garden  here,  as  was  the  custom  with  vessels  visiting  this  place,  and  he  brought  some  potatoes 
fresh  dug  from  it,  which  he  recommended  me  to  taste,  after  setting  me  an  example.  I  com- 
plied, and  must  say,  that  I  have  before  taken  a  more  unpalatable  medicine.  He  made  use  of 
the  young  leaves  of  the  common  dock,  boiling  them  as  cabbage,  to  eat  with  his  meat.  He 
stripped  the  leaf  from  the  rib  or  stem  in  the  middle,  which  he  said  had  a  purgative  quality. 
He  made  no  use  of  the  celery,  as  he  thought  the  dock  was  preferable  to  it.  I  dined  with  him 
on  board  his  ship,  when  a  dish  of  the  latter  vegetable  was  served  upon  table,  and,  upon  eat- 
ing, I  thought  its  taste  not  unpleasant.'' 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  Eastern  or  Little  Island  has  never  yet  been  regularly  surveyed, 
and  its  true  figure  is  yet  unknown.  Many  dangers,  not  yet  laid  down  in  the  charts,  may, 
therefore,  exist  in  the  vicinity.  Of  this  there  has  lately  been  r.  signal  example,  in  the  sudden 
loss  of  the  French  sloop  Uranic,  which  was  wrecked  on  the,  13th  of  February,  1820,  by 
striking  on  a  sunken  rock  near  the  mouth  of  '  French  Bay.^  This  vessel,  commanded  by 
M.  Freycinct,  was  returning  from  her  voyage  around  the  world.  She  had  been  driven  by  a 
dreadful  storm  from  Good  Success  Bay,  in  Ticrra  del  Fuego.  Happily  her  people  and  stores 
were  saved,  by  an  American,  which  happened  to  be  near  the  spot.  The  account  of  this  acci- 
dent is  so  vague  that  we  cannot  gain  from  it  the  position  of  the  rock,  but  it  is  clear  that,  by 
trmeh  Bay  is  meant  the  Berkeley  Sound  of  our  charts. 


\ 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


617 


On  the  coast  of  the  Indian  country,  and  Patagonia  to  tlie  eouthvrardt  there  is 
not  a  single  place  of  trade.  The  whole  is  occupied  by  various  nomadic  or  wan- 
dering tribes,  and  the  southern  part  is  under  a  cold  and  clieerless  climatQ.  The 
latter  was  discovered  in  1519,  by  Fernando  Magalhaens,  whom  we  called  Ma- 
galian,  and  who  passed  through  the  strait  which  bears  hi»  name,  and  which  di- 
vides Patagonia  from  Terra  del  Fuego. 

IKerra  or  Terra  del  Fuego  has  been  repeatedly  described  by  dilFerent  naviga- 
tors. It  is  a  dreary  country,  distinguished  by  craggy  mountains  and  barren  isles. 
The  inhabitants  are  a  race  of  wretched  savages,  who  subsist  on  the  flesh  of  seals 
and  other  gross  substances :  their  dwellings  are  tents,  rudely  formed  with  poles, 
and  covered  with  skins  or  the  bark  of  trees.  A  chain  of  stupendous  rocks,  ex- 
tending through  a  great  part  of  the  country,  is  continually  covered  with  snow. 

The  Strait  ofLe  Maire,  between  Tierra  del  Fuego  and  Staten  Island,  was  so 
named  from  the  navigator  who  discovered  it,  in  1613.  It  is  said  tn  the  nturrativfr 
of  Anson's  voyage,  that  it  is  difficult  to  determine  exactly  where  the  strait  lies, 
though  the  appearance  of  Terra  del  Fuego  be  well  known,  without  knowing  also 
the  appearance  of  Staten  Land ;  and  that  some  navigators  have  been  deceived 
by  three  hills  on  Staten  Land,  which  have  been  mistaken  for  the  Three  Brothers 

Mr.  Wm.  Marsh,  of  the  brig  Nancy,  1813,  boa  favoured  U3  with  a  rough  sketch  of  the 
Maluinas,  by  which  it  appears  Uiat  there  ie  a  group  of  isles  at  the  S.  W.  end  of  Soledad,  or 
the  Little  Maluina,  which  form  a  convenient  harbour,  the  track  to  which  is  denoted  by  the 
Chart.    Kelp  Bay,  to  the  eastward  of  this  group,  is  full  of  weeds. 

The  late  Captain  John  M'Bride,  of  the  Royal  Navy,  kept  a  regular  journal  of  the  winds 
and  weather  at  the  Falkland  Islands,  from  Ist  of  February,  1766,  to  19th  January,  1767, 
which  was  published  in  1775,  by  Mr.  Dalrymple.  The  journal  concludes  with  the  following 
general  remarks : — 

"  From  looking  over  the  foregoing  journal  of  the  winds,  for  the  space  of  one  year,  they 
will  be  found  to  prevail  in  the  western  quarter,  and  generally  blow  a  close-reefed  topsail 
gale,  with  a  cold  air.    In  Novemlter,  the  winds  begin  to  be  more  frequent  in  the  N.  W.  quar- 
ter,  generally  hazy  weather,  and  for  the  most  part  blow  about  sixteen  or  twenty  hours,  when 
it  begins  to  rain ;  the  wind  then  regularly  shifts  into  the  westward,  and  so  on,  till  it  gets  to 
the  S.  W.  by  S.  and  S.  S.  W.  when  it  blows  fresh,  and  clears  up.    This  S.  S.  \V.  wind  con- 
tinues for  about  sixteen  hours,  then  dies  away,  when  the  wind  shifts  again  to  the  N.  W.  quar- 
ter :  this  continues  during  December,  January,  and  February,  and  changes  in  the  manner 
above-mentioned,  every  three  or  four  days.    As  March  comes  on,  you  have  these  changes 
but  seldom ;  and,  as  the  winter  advances,  they  are  seldom  in  the  N.  W.  quarter,  but  rather 
incline  to  the  £.  N.  E.  which  is  generally  accompanied  with  sleet  and  snow.   There  is  not 
the  least  proportion  in  the  gales  between  winter  and  summe**.    In  summer,  (as  I  have  before 
observed,)  as  the  winds  are  in  the  westward,  they  blow  in  such  heavy  squalls  oif  the  tops  of 
the  mountains,  that  it  is  sometintes  an  hour  before  a  cutter  can  row  to  the  shore,  although 
the  water  is  smooth,  and  the  distance  of  but  one  cable  and  a  half  off.    In  winter,  the  winds  are 
pent  up  by  a  keen  frosty  air :  the  most  lasting  gales  are  those  from  S.  by  £.  to  S.  by  W.  and 
are  extremely  cold.*» 

In  January  and  February,  the  thermometer  several  tim(  :  rose  to  59°,  but  no  higher.  In 
August,  it  once  fell  to  20°,  but  was  seldom  lower  than  32°, 

or  the  isles,  in  general,  Captain  M'Bride  said,  "  We  found  a  mass  of  islands  and  broken 
lands,  beaten  by  storms  almost  perpetual.  Yet  this  is  summer;  and,  if  the  winds  of  winter 
hold  their  natural  proportion,  those  who  lie  but  two  cables'  length  from  the  shore  must  pass 
weeks  without  having  any  communication  with  it.'' 

BERKELEY  SOUND  is  the  Puerto  de  la  Soledad  of  the  Spaniards ;  and  it  womld, 
perhaps,  be  more  proper  to  give  it  that  designation.  It  was  at  the  N.  W.  part  of  this  harbour 
that  the  French,  under  M.  de  Bougainville,  had  their  settlement  in  1764,  as  noticed  above. 
A  particular  plan  of  it  is  given  in  the  journal  of  the  voyago,  by  which  it  appears  to  be  mortt 
than  a  league  wide  at  the  entrance,  extending  east  and  west  three  leagues,  to  four  islands 
which  lie  in  the  inner  part  of  the  harbour ;  three  on  the  north,  and  one  on  the  south  side. 
The  latter  is  the  largest,  and  is  called  Penguin,  or  Burnt  Island.  The  soundings  to  the 
space  between  these  islands  decrease  from  20  to  7  fathoms  ;  and  within  the  isles  from  7  to  3 
fnthoms.  Here,  therefore,  a  convenient  shelter  may  occasionally  be  found,  and  a  day's  sport, 
if  desirable,  among  geese,  bustards,  ducks,  seals,  &c. 

L'AIGLE  SHOAL.— This  shooJ  »vas  seen  on  the  1st  of  October,  1817.  Mr.  Poole  places 
it  in  latitude  51<>  51'  S.  and  longitude  64°  50'  W.  It  extends  about  north  and  south,  break- 
ing very  high  in  an  extent  of  200  or  300  yards.  The  ship  was  then  steering  S.  £.  and  about 
three  quarters  of  a  mile  from  it  of  and  on.  Steering  south,  about  a  mile  and  a  half,  bad  sound- 
ings in  87  fathoms. 


618 


BLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


<oU  Terra  del  Fuego,  and  bo  oversh'^t  the  strait.  But  Captain  Cook  nays,  no  ship 
can  possibly  miss  tlie  strait,  that  coasts  Terra  del  Fuej^o  within  sight  of  land,  for 
it  will  then  of  Itself  be  suifici<!ntly  conspicuous;  and  Staten  Land,  which  forms 
the  eastern  side,  will  be  .still  more  manifestly  distinguished,  for  there  is  no  land 
on  Terra  del  Fuego  like  it.  The  Strait  of  Le  Maire  can  be  missed  only  by 
standing  too  hr  to  the  eastward,  without  keeping  the  land  of  Terra  del  Fuego  in 
sight;  if  this  be  done,  it  may  be  missed,  however  accurately  the  appearance  of 
the  coast  of  Staten  Land  may  have  been  exhibited ;  and  if  this  be  not  done,  it 
cannot  be  missed,  though  the  appearance  of  that  coast  be  not  known.  The  en- 
trance of  the  strait  should  not  be  attempted  but  with  a  fair  wind  and  moderate 
weather,  and  upon  the  very  beginning  of  the  tide  of  flood,  which  happens  here, 
at  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  about  one  o'clock.  It  is  always  best  to  keep 
as  near  to  the  Terra  del  Fuego  shore  as  the  winds  will  permit.  By  attending  to 
these  particulars  a  ship  may  get  quite  through  the  strait  in  ono  tide ;  or,  at  least, 
to  the  southward  of  Success  Bay,  into  which  it  would  be  more  prudent  to  put, 
if  the  wind  should  be  southerly,  than  to  attempt  the  weathering  of  Staten  Land 
with  a  wind  and  lee-current,  whiclvmay  endanger  her  being  driven  on  that  island. 
— Cook's  First  Voyage. 

The  Bay  of  Good  Success,  or  Success  Bay,  is  the  place  within  which,  in  the 
year  1769,  Mr.  Banks  and  Dr.  Solander  found  the  cold  so  intense,  that  the  latter 
inad  nearly  fallen  a  sacrifice  to  its  severity,  though  in  the  midst  of  summer.  Dr. 
Solander,  who  had  more  than  once  crossed  the  mountains  which  divide  Sweden 
from  Norway,  well  knew  that  extreme  cold,  especially  when  joined  with  fatigue, 
produces  a  torpor  and  sleepiness  ivhich  are  almost  irresistible ;  he  therefore  ad- 
vised the  company  to  keep  moving,  whatever  pain  it  might  cost  them,  and  what- 
ever relief  they  might  be  promised  by  an  inclination  to  rest — "  Whoever  sits 
down,"  says  he,  "  will  sleep ;  and  whoever  sleeps,  will  wake  no  more."  The  doc- 
tor, who  gave  this  advice,  was  the  first  who  yielded  to  tlie  sensation  which  he 
had  described,  but  by  exertion  he  was  saved :  two  other  person?  perished. 

SOUTHERN  GEORGIA— This  land  was  explored  by  Captain  Cook,  in 
January,  1775,  who  gives  the  following  description: — 

"  At  9  A.  M.  (Jan.  14)  we  saw  an  island  of  ice,  as  we  then  thought,  but  at 
noon  were  doubtful  whether  it  was  ice  or  land.  At  this  time  it  bore  E.  |  S. 
distant  thirteen  leagues.  Our  latitude  was  53°  56i',  longitude  39°  24'  W.  Seve- 
ral penguins,  small  divers,  a  snotv-petrol,  and  a  vast  number  of  blue-petrels  about 
the  ship.  We  had  but  little  wind  all  the  morning,  and  at  2  P.  M.  it  fell  calm. 
It  was  now  no  longer  doubted  that  it  was  land,  and  not  ice,  which  we  had  in 
sight.  It  was,  however,  in  a  manner  wholly  covered  with  snow.  We  were  fur- 
ther confirmed  in  our  judgment  of  its  being  land  by  finding  soundings  at  175  fa- 
thoms, a  muddy  bottom. 

•'  At  four  in  the  morning  of  the  16th,  we  wore  and  stood  to  the  east,  with  the 
wind  at  S.S.E.  a  moderate  breeze,  and  fair;  at  eight  o'clock  saw  tlie  land  ex- 
tending from  E.  by  N.  to  N.  E.  by  N.  At  noon  observed  in  latitude  540  25i'» 
longitude  38°  18'.  In  this  situation  we  had  110  fathoms  of  water,  .ind  the  land 
extending  N.  i  W.  to  east,  eight  leagues  distant.  The  irorlhorn  extreme  was 
the  same  thnt  we  first  discovered,  and  it  proved  to  uc  an  island,  which  obtained 
the  name  of  Willis'  Island,  al'ter  the  person  who  first  saw  it. 
u  "  At  this  time  we  had  a  great  swell  from  the  south,  an  indication  that  no  land 
was  near  us  in  that  direction  ;  nevertheless,  the  vast  quantity  of  snow  on  that  in 
sight  induced  us  to  think  it  was  extensive,  and  I  chose  to  begin  with  exploring 
the  northern  coast.  With  this  view  we  bore  uj)  for  Willis'  Island,  all  sails  set, 
having  a  fine  gale  at  S.  S.  W.  As  wc  advanc(;d  to  the  north,  we  porceived  ano- 
ther isle  lying  east  of  Willis',  and  between  it  and  the  main.  Seeing  tliere  was  a 
clear  passage  between  the  two  isles,  we  steered  for  it;  and  at  5  o'clock,  being  in 
the  middle  of  it,  we  found  It  about  two  miles  broad. 

*'  Willis'  Islfe  is  a  high  rock,  of  no  great  extent,  near  to  which  are  some  rocky 
islets.  It  is  slt\i:\ted  in  the  latitude  of  54°  S.  longitude  38°  23'  W-  The  other 
isle,  which  obtained  the  name  of  Bird  Isle,  on  account  of  the  vast  number  that 
were  upon  it,  is  not  so  high,  but  of  greater  extent,  and  is  close  to  the  N.  E.  point 
of  the  main  land,  which  1  called  Capo  North. 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


619 


9,  no  ship 
f  land,  for 
lich  forms 
is  no  land 
[  only  by 
Fuego  in 
■arance  of 
)t  done,  it 
The  en- 
moderate 
»pen3  here, 
ist  to  keep 
Ltending  to 
ir,  at  least, 
ent  to  put, 
taten  Land 
that  island. 

ich,  in  the 
X  the  latter 
mmer.  Dr. 
de  Sweden 
ith  ftitigiie, 
erefore  ad- 
,  and  what- 
soever sits 
"  Thedoc- 
1  which  he 
ished. 
n  Cook,  in 

ght,  but  at 
jre  E.  I  S. 
'W.  Scve- 
letrels  about 
t  fell  calm, 
we  had  in 
e  were  fur- 
s  at  175  fa- 

?t,  Avith  the 
he  land  ex- 
le  ri40  25{'» 
id  the  land 
ttreme  was 
;h  obtained 

liat  no  land 
on  that  in 

II  exploring 

III  sails  set, 
Ireived  ano- 
lliere  was  a 
Ik,  being  in 

lome  rocky 

iThc  other 

Inulier  that 

E.  point 


♦♦  The  B.  E.  coast  of  this  land,  as  far  as  we  eaw  It,  lies  In  the  direction  of  S. 
50°  E.  and  N.  50°  W.     It  seemed  to  form  several  hays  or  inlet* ;  and  we  observ- 
large  masses  of  snow  or  ice  in  the  bottomc  of  them,  especially  in  one  which 
lies  two  miles  to  the  S.  S.  E.  of  Bird  Isle. 

*'  After  getting  through  the  passage,  we  found  the  north  roast  tended  E.  b}' 
N.  for  about  nine  miles,  and  then  east  and  east-southerly  to  C'ltpe  Buller,  which 
is  eleven  miles  more.  We  ranged  the  coast  at  one  league  distance,  till  near  ten 
o'clock,  when  we  brought-to  for  the  night,  and  on  sounding  found  50  fathoms,  a 
muddy  bottom." 

Captain  Cook  prpceeded  to  examine  the  eastern  coast,  and  took  formal  pos- 
session of  the  land.  The  tide  seemed  to  rise  about  4  or  5  feet.  High  water  at 
about  llh.  full  and  change.  The  head  of  Possession  Bay,  as  well  as  two  places 
on  each  side,  was  terminated  by  perpendicular  ice-cliffs  of  considerable  height. 
Pieces  were  continually  breaking  off,  with  a  loud  explosion,  and  floating  out  to  sea. 
"  The  inner  parts  of  the  country  were  not  less  savage  and  horrible.  The 
wild  rocks  raised  their  lofty  summits  till  they  were  lost  in  the  clouds,  and  the 
valleys  lay  covered  with  everlasting  snow.  Not  a  tree  was  to  be  seen,  nor  a 
shrub  even  big  enougii  to  make  a  tooth-pick.  The  only  vegetation  we  met  with  - 
was  a  coarse  strong-bladed  grass,  growing  in  tufts,  wild  burnet,  and  a  plant  like 
moss,  which  sprang  from  the  rocks."  Seals  were  numerous.  Several  flocks  of 
large  penguins  were  seen.  The  oceanic  birds  were  albntrosses,  common  gulls, 
terns,  shags,  divers,  £ic.  The  laud-birds  were  a  few  small  larks.  No  quadruped 
was  seen.    Variation  lljQ  E. 

Cooper's  Isle,  at  the  S.  E.  end  of  Georgia,  is  a  rock  of  conslder-^'I  height, 
about  five  miles  in  circuit,  and  one  mile  from  the  main.  At  this  i  ■  ihe  main 
coast  takes  a  S.  W.  direction,  for  the  space  of  four  or  five  leagues,  to  the  point 
named  Cape  Disappointment.  Off  that  are  three  small  isles,  the  southernmost 
of  which  is  green,  low,  and  flat,  and  litis  one  league  from  the  Cape. 

"  Who  would  have  thought,  (asks  Captain  Cook,)  that  an  island  of  no  greater 
extent  than  this,  situated  between  the  latitude  of  54^  and  55°,  should,  ir.  the 
very  height  of  summer,  be,  in  a  manner,  wholly  covered,  many  fathoms  deep, 
with  frozen  snow,  but  more  especially  the  S.  W.  coast?  The  very  sides  and 
craggy  summits  of  the  lofty  mountains  were  cased  with  snoAV  and  ice ;  but  tho 
quantity  which  lay  in  the  valleys  is  incredible;  and,  at  the  bottom  of  the  bays, 
the  coast  was  terminated  by  a  wall  of  ice  of  considerable  height." 

"The  island  seems  to  abound  with  bays  and  harbours,  the  N.  E.  coast  espe- 
cially, but  the  vast  quantity  of  ice  must  render  them  inaccessible  in  the  greatest 
part  of  the  year;  or,  at  least,  it  must  be  dangerous  lying  in  them,  on  account  of 
the  breaking  up  of  the  ice-cliffs.  It  is  remarkable  that  we  did  not  see  a  river,  or 
stream  of  fresh  water,  on  the  whole  coast.  I  think  it  highly  probable  that  there 
are  no  perennial  springs  in  the  country ;  and  that  the  interior  parts,  as  being 
much  elevated,  never  enjoy  heat  enough  to  melt  the  snow  in  such  quantities  as 
to  produce  a  river  or  stream  qf  water.  The  coast  alone  receives  warmth  suffi- 
cient to  melt  the  snow,  and  this  only  on  the  N.  E.  side;  for  the  other,  be- 
sides being  exposed  to  the  cold  s'.)uth  Avinds,  is,  in  a  degree,  deprived  of  the  sun's 
rays  by  the  uncommon  height  of  the  mountains." 

Clerke's  Rocks  are  three  or  four  rocky  islets,  which  wer^  subsequently  seen 
at  the  distance  of  two  or  three  miles.  Vast  numbers  of  birds,  especially  shags, 
were  about  them. 

SANDWICH  LAND.— Mr.  Pinkerton  says,  "  These  lands  may  be  styled 
the  Southern  Throne  of  Winter,  being  a  mass  of  black  rocks,  covered  with 
ice  and  snow."  They  were  discovered  by  Captain  Cook,  in  1775,  on  proceed- 
ing to  the  eastward  from  South-Georgia.  From  the  latitude  of  59°  30'  S.,  longi- 
tude 29°  24'  W.  the  siiip  stood  to  the  N.  E.  with  a  freah  breeze  at  N.  N.  W. 
and  passed  one  of  the  largest  ice- islands  seen  in  the  voyage,  with  several  smaller. 
The  weather  was  fo-jgy  with  sleet ;  and,  with  the  wind  N.  by  W.  she  stood  to 
N.  E.  over  a  sea  strewed  with  ice. 

"  At  half  an  hour  past  six  next  morning,  as  we  were  standing  N.  N.  E.  with 
the  wind  at  west,  the  fog  very  fortunately  clearing  away  a  little,  we  discovered 
land  a-head,  three  or  four  miles  distant.    On  this  we  hauled  the  w  ind  to  the 


520 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


n 


If 


north ;  but  finding  that  we  could  not  weather  the  laod  on  this  tack,  we  soon  alter 
tacked  in  175  fathoras  water,  three  miles  from  the  shore,  and  about  half  a  league 
from  some  breakers.  The  weather  then  cleared  up  a  little  more,  and  gave  us  a 
tolerable  good  sight  of  the  land.  That  which  we  had  fallen  in  with  proved  to 
be  three  rocky  islets  of  considerable  height.  The  outermost  terminated  in  a 
lofty  peak  like  a  sugar-loaf,  and  obtained  the  name  of  Freezeland  Peak,  after 
the  man  who  first  discovered  it.  Behind  this  peak,  that  is,  to  the  cast  of  it,  ap- 
peared  an  elevated  coast,  whose  lofty  snow-clad  summits  were  seen  above  the 
clouds.  It  extended  from  N.  by  E.  te  E.  S.  E.  and  I  called  it  Cape  Bristol,  in 
honour  of  the  noble  family  of  Hervey.  At  the  same  time  another  elevated  coast 
appeared  in  sight,  bearing  S.  W.  by  S.  and  at  noon  it  extended  from  S.  E.  to  S. 
S.  W.,  from  four  to  eight  leagues  distant;  at  this  time  the  observed  latitude  was 
590  isi'  S.  longitude  27^  45'  W.  I  called  this  land  Southern  Tkule,  because  it 
is  the  most  southern  land  that  has  yet  been  discovered.  It  shows  a  surface  of 
vast  height,  and  is  every  where  covered  with  snow.  Some  thought  they  saw  land 
in  the  space  between  Tbule  and  Cape  Bristol.  It  is  more  than  probable  that 
these  two  lands  are  connected,  and  that  this  space  is  a  deep  bay,  which  I  called 
Foster's  Bay. 

"  At  one  o'clock,  finding  that  we  could  not  weather  Thule,  we  tacked  and 
stood  to  the  north ;  and,  at  four,  Freezeland  Peak  bore  east,  distant  three  or 
four  leagues.  Soon  after,  it  fell  little  wind,  and  we  were  left  to-  the  mercy  of  a 
great  westerly  swell,  which  set  right  upon  the  shore.  We  sounded,  but  a  line 
of  200  fathoras  found  no  bottom.  At  eight  o'clock,  the  weather,  which  had 
been  very  haay.  clearing  up,  we  saw  Cape  Bristol  bearing  E.  S.  E.  and  termi- 
nating in  a  point  to  the  north,  beyond  which  we  could  see  no  land.  This  disco- 
very relieved  us  from  the  fear  of  being  carried  by  the  swell  on  the  most  horriblo 
«oast  in  the  world,  and  we  continued  to  stand  to  the  north." 

In  this  manner  the  other  points  were  discovered;  but  the  cHQs  alone  was  all 
which  was  to  be  seeti  -like  land. 

On  the  2d  of  February,  the  Candlemas  Isles  were  seen.  They  appeared  to 
be  of  no  great  extent,  but  of  considerable  height,  and  covered  with  snow.  A 
small  rock  was  seen  between  them,  and  perhaps  there  may  be  more ;  for  the 
weather  was  so  hazy  that  the  sight  of  them  was  soon  lost.  At  noon  on  the  Sd, 
ithe  ship  was  in  latitude  56°  44'  S.  longitude  25°  S3'  W.  and  was  attempting  to 
stand  to  the  south,  but  a  shift  of  wind  made  it  necessary  to  tack,  and  proceed  to 
the  eastward.  On  this  course  several  ice-islands  and  some  loose  ice  were  met 
with. 

In  closing  his  remarks  on  these  lands,  Captain  Cook  adds,  "  I  concluded  that 
what  we  had  seen,  which  I  named  Sandwich  Land,  was  either  a  group  of  islands, 
or  else  a  point  of  the  continent.  For  I  firmly  believe  that  there  is  a  track  of 
land  near  the  pole,  which  is  the  source  of  most  of  the  ice  that  is  spread  over  this 
vast  Southern  Ocean.  I  also  think  it  probable,  that  it  extends  farthest  to  the 
north  oppositethe  Southern  Atlantic  and  Indian  Oceans ;  because  ice  was  always 
found  by  us  farther  to  the  north  in  these  oceans  than  any  where  else,  which  I 
judge  could  not  be  if  there  were  not  land  to  the  south ;  I  mean  a  land  of  consi- 
derable extent." 

•  SOUTH  SHETLAND.— About  twelve  months  after  the  discovery  of  South 
Shetland,  the  British  naval  commander-in-chief,  on  the  South  American  station, 

""SOUTH-SHETLAND. — Captain  Cook's  concluding  remark,  in  his  note  respecting 
Sandwich  Land,  given  in  the  preceding  note,  has  been  verified,  in  some  measure,  bytbedts- 
eovery  of  the  archipelago  now  called  South-Shetland,  For  the  first  notices  of  this  disco- 
very, the  world  is  indebted  to  Mr.  William  Smith,  commander  of  the  brig  Williams,  of  BIy  the, 
by  whom  the  land  was  first  seen  in  the  month  of  February,  I8l9.  The  Williams  was,  at  that 
time,  on  a  voyage  from  Buenos  Ayres  to  Valparaiso,  and  stretching  far  to  the  south.  On  the 
19th,  land  or  ice  was  seen  in  latitude  62°  40',  and  near  the  longitude  60°  W.  then  hearings. 
£.  by  S.  about  two  leagues.  Hard  gales,  with  flying  showers  of  snow,  and  fields  of  ice,  a 
combination  of  ad?erse  circumstances,  prevented,  at  this  time,  an  exploration  of  the  coast ; 
and,  on  the  brig's  return  to  the  River  Plata,  in  the  month  of  May,  similar  circumstances  |>re- 
vented  any  further  discovery :  but,  on  a  subsequent  voyage  from  Monte* Video  to  ValparaifOk 
IB  October  of  the  same  year,  the  Williams  again  made  tho  land.  Captain  Smith,  in  his  jour- 
nal, says,  '*  I,  to  my  groat  satUfaction,  discovered  land  on  the  15tb  of  October,  at  six  F'  M> 


■\ 


BLUNt'S  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


621 


a  soon  after 
lalf  a  league 
d  gave  us  a 
h  proved  to 
niiiated  in  a 
Peak,  after 
astofU,ap- 
1  above  toe 
)e  iSristot,  in 
evated  coast 
a  S.  E.  to  S. 
latitude  was 
[e,  because  it 
a  surface  of 
hey  saw  land 
robable  tliat 
rhich  I  called 

i  tacked  and 
stant  three  or 
le  mercy  of  a 
,ed,  but  a  line 
r,  which  had 
E.  and  termi- 
,  This  disco- 
most  horriblo 

I  alone  was  all 

y  appeared  to 
vith  snow.  A 
Inore;  for  tiie 
oon  on  the  Sd, 

attempting  to 
md  proceed  to 

ice  were  met 


:)very  of  South 
berican  station, 


directed  a  farther  exploration ;  and  for  this  purpose  a  hired  brig,  the  Sbney,  was 

sent,  under  the  command  of  Mr.  Edward  Barnsfield.    "  We  sailed,"  says  the 

reporter,  "  frow  Valpsiraiso  on  the  SOth  of  December,  1819,  but  did  not  arrive 

n  cruising  ground  till  the  16th  of  Jar.uary,  1820,  having  been  almost  constantly 

in  latitude  62°  3(y,  and  longitude  60°  W.  by  chronometer,  bearing  distance  about  three 
leagues ;  hazy  weather ;  bore  up  and  sailed  towards  it ;  at  four  miles  distant  sounded  in  l6 
fathoms,  fine  black  sand ;  an  island  bearing  £.  by  S.  At  S.  E.by  E.  bearing,  sounded  in  60 
fathoms,  same  bottom ;  hauled  oflT  during  the  night  to  the  northward ;  at  day-light  stood  in 
forthe  land  again,  at  three  leagues  distance.  From  the  body  of  the  islands  sounded  again, 
95  fathoms,  fine  sand  and  oazo ;  at  eight,  weather  clear  and  pleasant,  saw  the  main  land 
bearing  S.  S.  E.  distance  from  the  islands  about  three  leagues.  Having  ran  as  far  as  the 
Cape,  we  found  the  land  tend  off  to  the  N.  E.  Coasting  to  the  eastward,  and  sounding, 
found  it  similar  to  the  former,  fine  sand.  The  point  called  North  Foreland  bearing  £.  i  S. 
hauled  in  for  it,  got  the  island  to  bear  N.  W.  distance  half  a  league.  Soundings  regular 
from  20  to  35  fathoms,  good  bottom,  sand  and  gravel.  Finding  the  weather  favourable,  we 
down  boat,  and  succeeded  in  landing ;  found  it  barren,  and  covered  with  snow.  Seals  in 
abundance. 

"  The  boat  having  returned,  which,  when  sccnrcd,  made  sail  off  shore  for  the  ensuing 
night ;  in  the  morning  altered  the  course  so  as  to  keep  the  land  to  the  southward  in  view ; 
at  eleven  A.  M.  the  North  Foreland  bore  S.  E.  by  E.  five  leagues.  The  land  then  took  a 
south-easterly  direction,  varying  to  the  eastward ;  weather  thick  and  squally,  with  snow.  I 
thought  proper,  having  property  on  board,  and  perhaps  deviating  from  the  assurance,  to  haul 
off  to  the  westward  on  my  intended  voyage.  Strong  variable  winds.  Made  Cape  Williams ; 
could  perceive  some  high  land  to  the  westward  of  the  Cape,  and  stretching  in  aS.  W;  direc- 
tion. The  weather  becoming  thick  and  squally,  wc  nkadc  sail  to  the  westward,  having  sailed 
150  miles  to  W.  S.  W.  The  weather  moderating,  saw  another  head-land  bearing  by  obser- 
vation E.  N.  E.  distance  ten  leagues  ;  very  high.  Observed  in  latitude  62^^  53'  S.  and  longi- 
tude, by  chronometer,  63"^  40'  W.  of  Greenwich  ;  named  this  Smith's  Cape.  Found  the 
land  to  extend  from  the  Cape  in  a  southerly  direction.  Siiaped  my  course  for  Valparaiso, 
where  I  arrived  on  the  24tb  November,  after  a  passage  of  sixty  days  from  Monte  Video." 

The  extent  of  Innd  since  explored  is  shown  by  the  chartj;  and  additional  information 
has  been  communicated  by  Captain  Walker,  of  the  ship  John,  of  London.  This  vessel,  in 
1821,  arrived  from  South-Shetland,  in  9S  days,  with  12,000  seal-skins,  and  has  since  returned 
for  another  cargo.  The  John  was  blown  ofl'  in  a  gale  of  wind,  and  lost  two  anchors  and  a 
cable :  the  bottom  being  very  rocky,  other  vessel,  have  met  with  similar  misfortune. 

The  islands  at  present  known  extend  from  61'^  to  GS-i^  of  south  latitude,  and  land  has  been 
seen  to  the  southward  as  far  as  the  eye  can  reach.  Captain  Cook's  description  of  the  Isle 
Georgia  well  applies  to  South-Shetland.  The  country  already  explored  consists  of  numerous 
islands,  without  a  vestige  of  vegetation.  A  species  uf  moss  only  is  ibund  upon  the  rocks  near 
the  shore  ;  eternal  snows  covering  the  more  remote  parts,  which  arc  mountainous.  Nature 
in  these  regions  assumes  the  most  sterile  and  farbidding  features ;  the  thermometer  was  at  no 
time  below  the  freezing  point ;  but  the  melting  tiuows  near  the  shore  so  completely  saturate 
the  soil,  as  to  check  all  vegetation.  A  species  of  coal  w:us  found  in  abundance,  whiph  burnt 
very  well,  thus  affording  the  means,  if  wanted,  of  replenishing  the  fuel.  The  rise  and  fall  of 
the  tide  is  about  twelve  feet.  Shrimps  and  penguins  are  beyond  all  conception  numerous. 
The  islands,  headlands,  &c.  have  been  named,  and  tlie  observntions  ascertaining  the  latitude 
and  longitude,  from  repeated  experiments,  found  true.  Part  of  an  anchor-stock,  evidently 
Spanish,  being  bolted  with  copper,  and  bearinj^  certain  marks,  was  found  on  shore,  and  is  pre- 
sumed to  be  the  only  vestige  now  remaining  of  a  74-gun  ship,  of  that  nation,  which  sailed 
from  Spain,  bound  to  Lima,  in  1819,  and  hus  not  since  been  heard  of. 

Several  United  States'  vessels  have  visited  Shouth-hjlietland  ;  and  an  American  acrount 
states  that  some  of  the  harbours  arc  very  good,  vessels  in  them  being  land-locked.  Of  the 
first  three  months  of  the  year  1821,  the  mildest  experienced  there  was  March ;  but  the  seals 
had  mostly  retired  to  the  water.  A  solitary  spot  or  two  of  something  like  grass  were  the  only 
marks  of  vegetation.  No  field-ice  was  seen  but  innumerable  islands  were  floating  about. 
The  flesh  of  the  young  seals  was  often  oaten,  and  was  not  disagreeable.  The  r«mains  of  the 
seals  were  generally  left  on  the  beach,  after  the  skins  were  taken  off;  but,  if  convenient,  pro- 
fa  ably  much  oil  might  be  made. 

Captain  Dan.  W.  Clark,  of  the  rhip  Hcrsilia,  reports,  that  he  penetrated  to  the  sixty-sixth 
degree  of  latitude,  where  he  observed  lands  stretohino;  lartiier  to  the  south,  the  extremities  of 
which  he  could  not  ascertain.  The  whole,  even  ia  auiunier,  was  blocked  up  with  snow  and 
ice,  except  in  particular  places  frequented  by,  seals. 

The  Russian  frigate,  Wattack,  accompanied  by  a  sloop  of  war,  returned  to  Tctcrsburg, 
from  a  voyage  of  discovery,  in  1821.  The  periodical  joiu'nals  have  reported  that  these  shipr 
have  tircaiaiiHvig^ted  Sandwich  J^a'ul,  jud  discovcicd  at  the  north  part  of  it  thtcc  ■^inall  islap"* 

66 


?4>' 


r*-.- 


622 


blunt's 


AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


harraeied  with  baffling  winds  and  calms,  till  w«  arrived  in  a  high  southern  lati- 
tude. On  that  day,  however,  we  had  the  good  fortune  to  discover  the  land  to 
the  south-eastward,  extending  on  both  bows  as  far  as  the  eye  could  reach.  At 
e  distance,  its  limits  could  scarcely  be  distinguished  from  the  light  white  clouds 
which  floated  on  the  tops  of  the  mountains.  Upon  a  nearer  approach,  however, 
every  object  became  distinct.  The  whole  line  of  coast  appeared  high,  bold,  and 
rugged;  rising  abruptly  from  the  sea,  in  perpendicular  snowy  cliffs,  except  here 
and  there,  where  the  naked  face  of  a  barren  black  rock  showed  itself  among 
them.  In  the  interior,  the  land,  or  rather  the  snow^  sloped  gradually  and  gently 
upwards  into  high  hills,  which  appeared  to  be  situated  some  miles  from  the  sea. 
No  attempt  was  made  to  land  here,  as  the  weather  became  rather  threatening, 
and  a  dense  fog  came  on,  which  soon  shut  every  thing  from  our  view,  at  more 
than  a  hundred  yards  distance.  A  boat  had  been  sent  away,  in  tlie  mean  time, 
to  try  for  anchorage ;  but  they  found  the  coast  completely  surrounded  bjr  dan- 
gerous sunken  rocks,  and  the  bottom  so  foul,  and  the  water  so  deep,  that  it  was 
not  thought  prudent  to  go  nearer  the  shore  in  the  brig,  especially  as  it  was  ex- 
posed to  almost  every  wind.  The  boat  brought  off  some  seals  and  penguins, 
which  had  been  shot  among  the  rocks ;  but  they  reported  them  to  be  the  only 
animated  objects  they  had  discovered.  The  latitude  of  this  part  of  the  coast 
was  found  to  be  62°  26'  S.  and  its  longitude  to  be  60°  54'  W. 

"  Three  days  after  t'uis  we  discovered  and  anchored  in  an  extensive  bay,  about 
two  degrees  farther  '.o  the  eastward,  where  we  were  enabled  to  land  and  exa- 
mine the  country.  Words  can  scarcely  be  found  to  describe  its  barrenness  and 
sterility.  Only  one  ^mall  spor  of  land  was  discovered  on  which  a  landing  could 
be  effected  upon  the  xu?\n,  every  other  part  of  the  bay  being  bounded  by  the 
same  inaccessible  cliffs  which  we  had  met  with  before.  We  landed  on  a  shin- 
gle-beach, on  which  there  was  a  hea^'y  surf  beating,  and  from  which  a  small 
stream  of  fresh  water  ran  into  the  sea.  Nothing  was  to  be  seen  but  the  rugged 
surface  of  barren  rocks,  upon  which  myriads  of  sea-fowls  had  laid  their  eggs, 
and  which  they  were  then  hatching.  These  birds  were  so  little  accustomed  to 
the  sight  of  any  other  animd,  that^  so  far  from  being  intimidated  by  our  ap- 
preach,  they  even  disputed  our  landing,  and  we  were  obliged  forcibly  to  open  a 
passage  for  ourselves  through  them.  They  consisted  principally  of  four  species 
of  the  penguin,  with  albatrosses,  gulls,  pintadoes,  shags,  sea-swallows,  and  a 
bird  about  the  size  and  shape  of  a  common  pigeon,  and  of  a  milk-white  plu- 
mage, the  only  species  we  met  with  that  was  not  web-footed.  We  also  fell  in 
with  a  number  of  the  animals  described  in  Anson's  Voyage  as  the  sea-lion,  and 
said  by  him  to  be  so  plentiful  at  Juan  Fernandez,  many  of  w^hich  we  killed. 
Seals  were  also  pretty  numerous ;  but,  though  we  walked  some  distance  hito 
the  country,  we  could  observe  no  trace,  either  of  inhabitants,  or  of  any  terrestri- 
al animal.  It  would  be  impossible,  indeed,  for  any  but  beasts  of  prey  to  subsist 
here,  as  we  met  with  no  sort  of  vegetation,  except  here  and  there  small  patches 
of  stunted  grass,  growing  upon  the  surface  of  the  thick  coat  of  dung  which  the 
sea-fowls  left  in  the  crevices  of  the  rocks,  and  a  species  of  moss,  which  occasion- 
ally we  met  with,  adhering  to  the  rocks  themselves.  In  short,  we  traced  the 
land  nine  or  ten  degrees  east  and  west,  and  about  three  degrees  north  and  south, 
and  found  its  general  appearance  always  the  same — high,  mountainous,  barren, 
and  universally  covered  with  snow,  except  where  the  rugged  summits  of  a  black 
rock  appeared  through  it,  resembling  a  small  island  in  the  midst  of  the  ocean; 
but,  from  the  lateness  of  the  season,  and  the  almost  constant  fogs  in  which  we 
were  enveloped,  we  could  not  ascertain  whether  it  formed  part  of  a  continent, 
or  was  only  a  group  of  islands.    If  it  be  insul&r,  there  must  be  some  of  an  im- 


It  is  added,  "  They  hare  also  surveyed  theBouth  part  of  South-Shetland,  in  latitude  69°  and 
some  odd  minutes  S.  and  have  seen  an  island  at  some  distance  from  it,  or  a  large  cape  or 
bead-land ;  but,  on  account  of  the  ice,  they  could  not  approach  nearer  to  it  than  40  miles." 
An  early  account  of  South-Shetland  stated  that  sperm-whales  were  seen  about  the  coasts ; 
and  it  cannot  be  questioned  that  such  whales  may  be  occasionally  here ;  but  we  have  the  autho- 
rity of  Captain  Laureace  Frazier  for  stating,  that  the  whales  hereabout  are  mostly  finbacki. 


BLUJNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


623 


vatMB  extent,  as  we  found  a  gulf  nearly  one  hundred  and  flftj  miles  in  depth, 
out  of  which  we  had  some  difficulty  in  finding  our  way  back  again. 

The  report  concludes  with  some  general  remarks  on  the  advantages  of  the 
discovery,  and  stating  that  the  ship  was  daily  surrounded  with  whales,  multi- 
tudes of  the  finest  fur-seals,  and  sea-lions. 

SOUTH-ICELAND.— Captain  Cook's  conjecture  as  to  the  existence  of  a 
Bouthem  continent  seems  to  be  realized ;  a  very  extensive  land  having  been  dis- 
covered in  the  parallel,  and  to  the  eastward,  of  South-Shetland.  The  only  de- 
scription of  it,  which  we  have  yet  seen,  is  vague  and  imperfect,  and  the  particu- 
lars too  scanty  for  a  delineation  on  the  chart.    They  have  been  given  as  follow. 

*'  We  have  been  favoured  with  interesting  particulars  respectmg  a  southern 
continent,  by  Captain  Nathaniel  B.  Palmer,  of  the  sloop  James  Munroe,  lately 
arrived  at  Stonington,  from  South-Shetland. 

*'  Captain  Palmer  proceeded  in  the  James  Munroe  from  the  Shetland  Isles  to 
Ihe  continent,  (South-Iceland)  and  coasted  it,  from  abreast  of  the  isles  to  the 
eastward,  as  far  as  44°  W.  longitude,  keeping  as  near  to  the  shore  as  the  edge 
of  firm  ice  would  admit.  At  some  places  he  could  coast  along-shore;  at  other 
parts  he  could  not  approach  nearer  the  shore  than  from  one  to  five  or  six  leagues, 
owing  to  the  firm  and  fast  ice,  although  it  was  mid-summer  there  at  the  time, 
being  in  November,  December,  and  January. 

"  In  61°  41'  S.  latitude,  and  45°  27'  W.  longitude  from  Greenwich,  the  coast 
was  clear  of  firm  ice,  and  here  they  discovered  a  fine  harbour,  lying  about  one 
mile  within  the  entrance  of  Washington  Strait,  which  harbour  was  named  Pal- 
mer's Harbour,  where  he  came  to  anchor.  He  found  not  the  least  appearance 
of  vegetation  on  the  land  excepting  the  winter-moss.  Neither  did  he  here  dis- 
cover any  animals,  only  a  few  sea-leopards,  beautifully  spotted.  Of  birds  there 
were  penguins.  Port  Egmont  or  sea-hens,  white  pigeons,  and  gulls. 

"  There  is  no  doubt  that  there  exists  a  southern  continent,  and  that  Captain 
Cook's  Southern  Thuk  belongs  to  it.  Captain  Palmer  could  discern  mountains 
covered  with  snow,  in  the  interior,  as  he  sailed  along  the  coast." 


Directions  for  sailing  from  the  Coitst  o/*  Patagonia,  or  Falkland  Islands, 

to  New  South  Icelands. 


After  obtaining  sight  of  Statten  Land,  bring  Cape  St.  John's  to  bear  west,  five 
or  six  leagues  distant ;  then,  on  account  of  the  N.  E.  set  off  Cape  Horn,  endea^ 
Tour  to  make  a  course  good  south,  until  you  arrive  in  the  latitude  6£0  50'  S.  thea 
steer  east,  keeping  between  th^atitude  of  62*^  W  and  63°  5'  S.  until  you  make 
the  land,  which  will  be  Mount  Pisgo  Island;  when  you  have  get  sight  of  this 
island,  bring  the  centre  of  it  to  bear  S.  W.  five  league?  distant.  If,  when  in  this 
situation,  the  weather  should  set  in  thick  or  foggy,  keep  this  situation  by  lying 
by,  or  on  short  tacks,  until  the  weather  lights  up,  then  steer  N.  E.  )  E.  until  you 
make  Castle  Rock,  situated  off  the  south  chop  of  Strut  Despair ;  leave  Castle 
Rock  broad  on  your  starboard  bow,  and  keep  steering  north  and  eastward  past 
the  mouth  of  the  strait,  when  you  will  make  Ragged  Island,  which  keep  off  your 
starboard  bow  and  beam  until  you  open  the  pass  between  the  N.  W.  end  of 
Ragged  Island  and  the  Main  Island;  then  steer  into  the  pass  E.  S.  E.  keeping 
Ragged  Island  shore  nearest  on  board,  and  anchor  in  the  harbour,  around  the 
second  point  of  Ragged  Island,  in  6  or  8  fathoms.  Double  this  second  point 
well  on  board,  to  avoid  the  reefs  that  lie  off  in  the  pass  abreast  of  tlie  harbour 
of  Port  Sheffield,  m  Ragged  Island. 

There  are  some  reefs  in  the  offing  off  the  mouth  of  Ragged  Island  pass,  and  iq 
it,  but  with  care,  and  a  good  look  out,  they  are  easily  avoided,  as  the  breakers 
or  ripples  will  show  where  they  are. 

N.  B.  Mount  Pisgo  is  a  very  high  round  island,  with  a  bold  ihore  all  aroung 
it,  and  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  at  least  thirty  leagues. 


524 


blunt's 


AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


On  the  navigation  around  •Cape  Horn,  Captain  Colnett  lias  made  tlie  follow- 
ing remarks. 

<•  I  have  doubled  Cape  Horn  in  difiurent  ueaaona ;  but  were  I  to  make  another 
voyapc  to  this  part  of  the  globe,  and  could  command  ray  time,  I  would  most 
certamly  prefer  the  beginning  of  winter,  or  even  winter  itself,  with  moon-light 
nights ;  for,  in  that  season,  the  winds  begin  to  vary  to  the  eastward ;  as  I  found 
them,  and  as  Captain  Macbridc  observed  at  the  Falkland  Isles.  Another  error, 
which,  in  my  opinion,  the  commanders  of  vessels  bound  round  Cape  Horn 
commit,  is,  by  keeping  between  the  Falkland  Isles  and  the  main,  and  through  the 
strait  of  Le  3Iaire ;  which  not  only  lengthens  the  distance,  but  suWects  them  to 
a  heavy  irregular  sea,  occasioned  by  the  rapidity  of  the  current  and  tides  in  that 
channel,  which  may  be  avoided  by  passing  to  the  eastward.  At  the  same  time 
I  would  recommend  them  to  keep  near  the  coasts  of  Statten  Land  and  Terra  del 
Fuego,  because  the  winds  are  more  variable  in  with  the  Bh3re  than  at  a  long 
offing. 

"  lif  it  should  be  observed  that  a  want  of  wood  and  water  may  render  it  ne- 
cessary for  vessels  to  stop  in  the  Strait  of  Le  Maire,  I  shall  answer  that  there  is 
plenty  of  water  at  the  Falkland  Isles,  and  Statten  Land  not  only  abounds  in 
both,  but  possesses  several  excellent  harbours.  I  first  visited  this  place  with 
Captain  Cook,  in  the  year  1774;  and,  on  my  outward-bound  passage  to  the 
north-west  cc»ast  of  America,  in  the  year  1786,  as  commander  of  the  merchant 
ship  Prince  of  Wales,  I  wooded  and  watered  there,  and  left  a  party  to  kill  seals. 
For  my  own  part,  I  do  not  perceive  the  necessity,  according  to  the  opinion  of 
different  navigators,  of  going  to  60°  S.  I  ntver  would  myself  exceed  57°  SO', 
to  give  the  Isle  of  Diego  Ramirez  a  good  birth :  or,  if  winds  and  weather  would 
permit,  make  it,  for  a  fresh  departure,  had  I  not  taken  one  at  Cape  St.  John, 
3tatten  Land,  or  the  east  end  of  Falkland  Isles.  Statten  Land  is>  well  situated 
as  a  place  of  rendezvous,  both  for  men  of  war  and  merchant  ships;  while  the 
harbours  on  the  north  and  south  sides,  which  are  divided  by  a  small  neck,  would 
answer  the  purpose  of  ships  bound  out  or  home.  The  north  side  offers  the  best 
place  for  an  establishment." 

The  French  captain  La  Perouse  passed  through  the  Strait  of  Le  Maire  in 
February,  1785,  when  the  flood  carried  the  ships  violently  to  the  southward. 
The  horizon  was  so  foggy  towards  the  east,  that  Statten  Island  was  not  'seen; 
but,  on  the  shore  of  Terra  del  Fuego,  by  telescopes,  the  natives  were  seen  light- 
ing fires,  as  an  invitation  to  the  shore.  Captain  Perouse  says,  "  I  doubled  Cape 
Horn  with  much  greater  facility  than  I  expected ;  thou£:h  1  am  convinced  that 
this  navigation  is  not  more  hazardous  than  any  other  m  these  high  latitudes. 
The  dangers  we  dreaded  were  only  the  chimerical  offspring  of  an  ancient  pre- 
judice, which  ought  no  longer  to  exist,  and  which  the  reading  of  Anson's  voyage 
contributes  not  a  little  to  support." 

The  Russian  commander,  Otto  Von  Kotzebuc,  passed  Cape  Horn  in  the 
month  of  January,  1816 ;  he  proceeded  to  the  west  of  the  Falkland  Isles,  and 
eastward  of  Statten  Land.  "  The  16th  of  January,  in  latitude  49°  5'  S.  long.  63° 
81'  W.  a  fresh  north  wind,  with  beautiful  weather,  brought  us  nearer  to  Cape  Horn ; 
at  noon  we  sounded,  and  found  60  fathoms  water,  over  a  bottom  of  gray  sand. 
On  the  19th,  at  8  o'clock  A.  M.  we  descried  Cape  St.  John,  at  the  distance  of 
forty  miles ;  at  noon,  the  weather  being  very  fine,  the  frightful  country  of  Staten 
Land  appeared.    Cape  St.  John  lay  3. 12°  W.  twenty-five  miles  distant ;  the 


*  This  is  the  southern  point,  or  head-land,  of  a  group  called  Hermitc  Islands.  Captain 
Cook,  in  the  description  of  his  passage,  in  December,  1774,  brought  Cape  Hoin  to  bear  E. 
by  S.  and  smts,  it  ia  knqwn  at  a  distance  by  a  high  round  hill  over  it.  A  point  to  the  N.  W 
shows  a  surface  not  unlike  this ;  but  their  situation  alone  will  always  distinguish  the  one 
from  the  other.  On  the  N.  W.  side  of  the  Cape  are  two  peaked  rocks,  like  sugar- loaves, 
lying  N.  W.  by  N.  and  S.  E.  by  S.  from  caci.  other.  Some  other  stracgling  low  rocks  lie 
west  of  the  Cape,  and  one  south  of  it,  but  they  are  all  near  the  shore. 

In  the  direction  of  E.  N.  E.  three  leagues  from  Cape  Horn,  iit  Cape  Enganno,  the  Misia- 
ken  Cape  of  C^tain  Cook ;  it  is  a  rocky  point,  and  the  southern  point  of  the  easternmost 
of  Hennite  Isles. 


.JKSK- 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


225 


lie  the  foltow- 


current  set  strongly  to  the  E.  N.  E.  Towards  ml(lnl;;ht  wc  had  doubled  Statteu 
Land;  the  wind  hie  w  strong  from  the  north.  I  bnnt  my  course  to  the  S.  S.  W. 
in  order  for  security,  to  keep  distant  from  the  shore  ;  and,  contrary  to  the  cus- 
tom of  other  navigators,  I  took  then  a  more  westerly  course,  to  double  Capo 
Horn  as  sharp  as  possible.  On  the  22d  at  four  A.M.  we  crossed  the  meridian 
of  Cape  Horn,  in  57°  33'  S.  which  was  evidently  a  great  advantage  to  us ;  aa 
we  had  not  gone  so  far  to  the  south  as  others  used  to  do.  We  were  surrounded 
by  whales,  dolphins,  and  albatrosses.  While  we  were  doubling  Cape  Horn,  wb 
were  encountered  by  high  storms  from  S.  W.  which  continued  several  days,  and 
it  was  not  till  the  1st.  of  February  that  we  succeeded  in  passing  the  latitude  of 
Cape  Victoria.  We  triumphed ;  for  now  wc  had  no  fear  of  being  driven  back 
by  westerly  storms." 

Captain  Cook  says,  "  It  may  still  be  questioned  whether  it  is  better  to  go 
through  the  Strait  of  Le  Maire,  or  stand  to  the  eastward,  and  go  round  Statten 
Land."  The  advice  given  in  the  account  of  Anson's  Voyage  is,  "That  all  ships 
bound  to  the  South  Seas,  instead  of  passing  through  the  Strait  of  Le  Maire, 
should  constantly  pass  to  the  eastward  of  Staten  Land,  and  should  be  invariably 
bent  on  running  to  the  southward  as  far  as  the  latitude  of  61  or  62  degrees,  be- 
fore they  endeavour  to  stand  to  the  westward."  But,  in  my  opinion,  different 
circumstances  may  at  one  time  render  it  eligible  to  pass  through  the  Strait,  and 
to  keep  to  the  eastward  of  Staten  Land  at  another.  If  the  land  is  fallen  in  with 
to  the  westward  of  the  Strait,  and  the  wind  is  favourable  for  going  through,  I 
think  it  would  be  very  injurious  to  lose  time  by  going  round  Statten  Land ;  as  I 
am  confident  that,  by  attending  to  the  directions  which  I  have  given,  the  Strait 
may  be  passed  with  the  utmost  safety  and  convenience ;  but  if,  on  the  contrary, 
the  land  is  fallen  in  with  to  the  eastward  of  the  Strait,  and  the  wind  should  prove 
tempestuous  and  unfavourable,  I  think  it  would  be  best  to  go  round  Statten  Land. 
But  I  canuot,  in  any  case,  concur  in  recommending  the  running  into  the  latitude 
of  61  or  62  degrees,  before  any  endeavour  is  made  to  stand  to  the  westward. 
We  found  neither  the  current  nor  the  storms  which  the  running  so  far  to  the 
southward  is  supposed  necessary  to  avoid ;  and,  indeed,  as  the  winds  almoot  con- 
stantly blow  from  that  quarter,  it  is  scarcely  possible  to  pursue  the  advice.  The 
navigator  has  no  choice  but  to  stand  to  the  southward,  close  upon  a  wind ;  and, 
by  keeping  upon  that  tack,  he  will  not  only  make  southing,  but  ^vesting ;  and  if 
the  wind  varies  towards  the  north  of  the  west,  his  westing  will  be  considerable. 
It  will  indeed  be  highly  proper  to  make  sure  of  a  westing  sufficient  to  double  all 
the  lands,  before  an  attempt  is  made  to  the  northward,  and  to  this  every  man's 
^irudeace  will,  of  necessity,  direct  him." 


M 


526 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


OBAP.  ZVIXZ. 


SOUTH  PACIFIC  OCEAN,  from.  CAPE  HORN  to  the  EQUA- 
TOR, &tc. 


Cape  Horn  to  Valparaiso. 

In  December,  1774,  Captain  Cook,  on  his  return  from  his  second  voyage, 
made  Landfall  Island,  off  the  western  coast  of  Terra  del  Fuego,  ivhence  he  pro- 
ceeded to  the  S.  E.  and  eastward,  and  described  the  coast  as  follows: 

Cape  Glocester.— "  Cape  Glocestcr  shows  a  round  surface  of  considerable 
height,  and  has  much  the  appearance  of  being  an  island.  It  lies  S-  S.  E.  \  E.  true 
distance  seventeen  leagues  from  Landfiill  Island.  The  coast  between  forms  two 
bays,  strewed  with  rocky  islets,  rocks,  and  breakers.  The  coast  appeared  broken, 
with  many  islets,  or  rather  it  seemed  to  be  composed  of  a  number  of  islands. 
The  land  is  very  mountainous,  rocky,  and  barrun,  spotted  here  and  there  with 
tufts  of  wood.  From  Cape  Glocester,  off  which  lies  a  small  rocky  island,  the 
direction  of  the  coast  is  nearly  S.  E.  (true ;)  but  to  Cape  Noir,  (Cape  Negro  or 
Black  Cape,)  for  which  we  steered,  the  course  is  about  S.  S.  £.  (true)  distant 
about  ten  leagues. 

'•  At  S  o'clock  we  passed  Cape  Noir  which  is  a  steep  rock,  of  considerable 
height,  and  the  S.  W.  point  of  a  large  island,  that  seemed  to  lie  detached,  a 
league  or  a  league  and  a  half,  from  the  main  land.  The  land  of  the  Cape,  when 
at  a  distance  from  it,  appeared  to  be  an  island  disjoined  from  the  other;  but,  on 
a  nearer  approach,  we  found  it  connected  by  a  low  neck  pf  land.  At  the  point 
of  the  Cape  are  tv,  icku ;  the  one  peaked  lik^  a  sugar-loaf,  the  other  not  so 
high,  and  showing  a  rounder  surface;  and  S.  by  E.  (true)  two  leagues  from  the 
Cape  are  two  other  rocky  islets. 

"  After  paesing  the  two  islets,  wc  stisered  E.  S.  E.  true,  crossing  the  great  bay 
of  St.  Barbara.  We  but  just  saw  the  land  in  the  bottom  of  it,  which  could  not 
be  less  than  seven  or  eight  leagues  from  us.  There  was  a  space  lying  in  the  di- 
rection of  E.  N.  E.  (true)  from  Cape  Noir,  where  no  land  was  to  be  seen ;  this 
may  be  the  channel  of  St.  Barbara,  which  opens  into  the  strait  of  Magallen,  as 
mentioned  by  Frazier.  We  found  the  Cape  to  agree  very  well  with  his  descrip- 
tion, which  shows  that  he  laid  down  the  channel  from  good  memoirs.  At  ten 
o'clock,  drawing  near  the  S.  E.  point  of  the  bay,  which  lies  nearly  ift  the  direc- 
tion of  S.  60°  E.  (true,)  from  Cape  Noir  eighteen  leagues  distant,  we  shortened 
sail,  and  spent  the  night  standing  off  and  on. 

"  At  two  o'clock  in  the  morning  of  the  19th  December,  having  made  sail,  we 
steered  S.  E.  by  E.  (true)  along  the  coast,  and  soon  passed  the  S.  E.  point  of 
the  bay  of  St.  Barbara,  which  I  called  Cape  Desolation,  because  near  it  com- 
menced the  most  desolate  country  I  ever  saw.  Il  is  situated  in  latititude  of  54° 
55'  S.  longitude  72°  12'  W.  About  four  leagues  to  the  east  of  this  cape  is  a  deep 
inlet,  at  the  entrance  of  which  is  a  pretty  large  island,  and  some  others  of  less 
note.  At  ten  o'clock,  being  aVout  a  league  and  a  half  from  the  land,  wc  sounded, 
and  found  60  fathoms  of  water,  a  bottom  of  small  stones  and  shells. 

"  The  wind,  which  had  been  fresh  at  N.  by  W.  began  to  abate,  and  at  noon  it 
fell  calm,  when  we  observed  in  latitude  55°  20'  S.  longitude  made  from  Cape 


'fr'^  "'*'-- 


BLUNT  8  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


627 


DeseadA  8^  84'  E.  In  this  aituatfon  we  were  about  threo  leafi^es  from  the  nearest 
shore,  which  was  that  of  an  island.  This  I  named  Gilbert  Isle,  after  my  master. 
It  is  nearly  the  same  height  with  the  rest  of  the  coast,  and  shows  a  surface  com- 
posed of  several  peaked  rocks,  unequally  hip;h.  A  little  to  the  S.  E.  of  it  aro 
some  smaller  islands,  and  without  them,  breakers. 

"  I  have  before  observed  that  this  is  the  most  desolate  coast  I  ever  saw :  it  seems 
entirely  composed  of  rocky  mountains,  without  the  least  appearance  of  vegeta- 
tion. These  mountains  terminate  in  horrible  precipices,  whose  craggy  summits 
spire  up  to  a  vast  height,  so  that  scarcely  any  thing  in  nature  can  appear  with  a 
more  barren  and  more  savage  aspect  than  the  whole  of  this  country.  The 
inland  mpuntains  were  covered  with  snow,  but  those  on  the  sea-coast  were  not. 
We  judged  the  former  to  belong  to  the  main  of  Terra  del  Fuego,  and  the  latter 
to  be  islands  so  ranged,  as  apparently  to  form  a  coast. 

"  Alter  three  hours  calm  we  got  a  breeze  at  S.  E.  by  E.  and  having  made  a 
short  trip  to  south,  stood  in  for  the  land;  the  most  advanced  point  of  which,  that  we 
had  in  sight,  bore  east,  (true)  distant  ten  leagues.  This  is  a  lofty  promontory, 
lying  E.  S.  E.  nineteen  leagues  from  Gilbert  Isle,  and  is  situated  m  latitude  5h^ 
i6'  S.  longitude  70°  25'  W.  Viewed  from  the  situation  we  were  now  in,  it  termi- 
nated in  two  high  towers ;  and  within  them  a  hill  shaped  like  a  sugar-loaf.  This 
wild  rock,  therefore,  obtained  the  name  of  York  Minster.  Two  leagues  to  the 
westward  of  this  head  appeared  a  large  inlet,  the  west  point  of  which  we  fetched 
iu  with  by  nine  o'clock,  when  we  tacked  in  41  fathoms  water,  half  a  league  from 
the  shore :  to  the  westward  of  this  islet  was  another,  with  several  islands  lying 
in  the  entrance. 

'*  During  the  ni^ht  between  the  19th  and  20th,  we  had  a  little  wind  easterly, 
which  in  the  morning  veer  )d  to  N.  E.  and  N.  N.  E.  but  it  was  too  faint  to  be  of 
use ;  and  at  ten  we  had  a  calm,  when  we  observed  the  ship  to  drive  from  off  shore 
out  lo  sea.  We  had  made  the  same  observation  before.  This  must  have  been 
occasioned  by  a  current,  and  the  melting  of  the  snow  increasing,  the  inland 
waters  will  cause  a  stream  to  run  out  of  most  of  these  inlets.  At  noOn  we  ob- 
served in  latitude  55°  39'  30"  S.  York  Minster  then  bearing  N.  15°  E.  (true) 
distant  five  leagues  :  and  a  round  hill  just  peeping  above  the  horizon,  which  we 
judged  to  belong  to  the  isles  of  St.  Ildefonso,  E.25^S.  (true)  ten  or  eleven 
leagues  distant.  At  ten  o'clock  a  breeze  springing  up  at  E.  by  S.  I  took  this 
opportunity  to  stand  in  for  the  land,  being  desirous  of  going  into  one  of  the  ma- 
ny ports  which  seemed  open  to  receive  us,  in  order  to  take  a  view  of  the  coun- 
try, and  to  recruit  our  stock  of  wood  and  water. 

CHRISTMAS  SOUND.—"  In  standing  in  for  an  opening,  which  appeared 
on  the  east  side  of  York  Minster,  we  had  40,  37,  50,  and  60  fathoms  of  water, 
a  bottom  of  small  stones  and  shells.  When  we  had  the  last  soundings,  we  were 
nearly  in  the  middle  between  the  two  points  that  form  the  entrance  to  the  inlet, 
which  we  observed  to  branch  into  arms,  both  of  them  lying  in  nearly  north,  and 
disjoined  by  a  high  rocky  point.  We  stood  for  the  eastern  branch,  as  being  clear 
of  islets,  and  after  passing  a  black  rocky  one,  lying  without  the  point  just  men- 
tioned, we  sounded,  and  found  no  bottom  with  a  line  of  170  fathoms.  This  was 
altogether  unexpected,  and  a  circumstance  that  would  not  have  been  regarded,  if 
the  breeze  had  continued :  but  at  this  time  it  fell  calm,  so  that  it  was  not  possible 
to  extricate  ourselves  from  this  disagreeable  situation.  Two  boats  were  hoisted 
out  and  sent  ahead  to  tow ;  but  they  would  have  availed  little,  had  not  the  breeze 
sprung  up  about  eight  o'clock  at  S.  W.  which  put  it  in  my  power  either  to  stand 
out  to  sea  or  up  the  inlet,  prudence  seemed  to  point  out  the  formei-,  but  the  de- 
sire of  finding  a  good  port,  and  of  learning  something  of  the  country,  getting  the 
better  of  every  other  consideration,  I  resolved  to  stand  in ;  and  as  night  was  ap- 
proaching, our  safety  depended  upon  getting  to  an  anchor.  With  this  view  we 
continued  to  sound,  but  always  had  an  unfathomable  depth. 

"  Hauling  up  under  the  east  side  of  land  which  divides  the  two  arms,  and  see- 
ing a  small  cove  a-head,  I  sent  a  boat  to  sound,  and  we  kept  as  near  the  shore  aa 
the  flurries  from  the  land  would  permit,  in  order  to  be  able  to  get  in  to  this  place, 
if  there  should  he  anchorage.  The  boat  soon  returned,  and  informed  us  there 
was  30  and  %i  fathws  of  water,  a  full  cable's  length  from  tb«  shore ;  here  we 


520 


ELUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


.inchored  in  30  fathoms,  the  bottom  snnd  and  broken  shf  '.i ;  and  earned  out  a 
kcdge  and  hawser  to  steady  the  ship  for  the  nighti. 

"  The  morning  of  the  21st  was  calm  and  pleasant.  After  breakfast  I  set  out 
with  two  lioats  to  look  for  a  more  secure  station.  We  no  sooner  got  round,  or 
:ibove  th«  point,  under  which  the  ship  lay,  than  we  found  a  cove,  in  which  was  an- 
chorage in  30,  20,  and  15  fathoms,  the  bottom  stones  and  sand.  At  the  head  of 
the  cove  was  a  stoney  beach,  a  valley  covered  with  wood,  and  a  stream  of  fresh 
water ;  so  that  there  was  every  thing  we  could  expect  to  find  in  such  a  place,  or 
rather  more,  for  we  shot  three  geese  out  of  four  that  we  saw,  and  caught  some 
young  ones,  which  we  afterwards  let  go. 

"  After  discovering  and  sounding  this  cove,  I  sent  Lieutenant  Gierke,  who 
commanded  the  other  bout,  on  board,  with  orders  to  remove  the  ship  into  this 
place,  while  I  proceeded  farther  up  the  inlet.  I  presently  saw  that  the  land  we 
were  under,  which  disjoined  the  two  arms,  as  mentioned  before,  was  an  island, 
at  the  north  end  of  which  the  two  channels  united.  After  this  I  hastened  on 
board,  and  found  every  thing  in  readiness  to  weigh,  which  was  accordingly  done, 
and  alt  the  boats  sent  a-head  to  tow  the  ship  round  the  point.  But  at  that  mo- 
ment a  light  breez  canic  in  from  sea  too  scant  to  fill  our  sails,  so  that  we  were 
obliged  to  drop  the  anchor  again,  from  fear  of  falling  upon  the  point,  and  to  carry 
out  a  kedge  to  the  windward.  That  being  done,  we  hove  up  the  anchor,  warped 
tip  to  and  weighed  the  kedge,  and  proceeded  round  the  point  under  our  stay-sails. 
there  anchored  with  the  best  bower  in  20  fathoms,  and  moored  with  the  other 
bower,  which  lay  to  the  north  in  13  fathoms.  In  this  position  we  were  shut  in 
■from  the  sea  by  the  point  above-mentioned,  which  was  in  one  with  the  extremity 
of  the  inlet  to  the  east.  Some  islets,  off  the  next  point  above  us,  covered  us 
from  the  N.  W.  from  which  quarter  the  wind  had  the  greatest  fetch,  and  our  dis- 
tance from  the  shore  was  about  one-third  of  a  mile. 

"  Thus  situated,  we  went  to  work,  to  clear  a  place  to  fill  water,  to  cut  wood, 
and  to  set  up  a  tent  for  the  reception  of  a  guard,  which  was  thought  necessary, 
as  we  had  already  discovered  that,  barren  as  this  country  is,  it  was  not  without 
people,  though  we  had  not  seen  any.  Mr.  Wales  also  got  his  observatory  and 
instruments  on  shore ;  but  it  was  with  the  greatest  dilficulty  he  could  find  a  place 
of  sufficient  stability,  and  clear  of  the  mountains,  whicii  every  where  surround- 
od  us,  to  set  them  up  in ;  and  at  last  he  was  obliged  to  content  himself  with  the 
top  of  a  rock,  not  more  than  nine  feet  over. 

"  Next  day  I  sent  Lieutenants  Gierke  and  Pickersgill,  accompanied  by  some 
of  the  other  officers,  to  examine  and  draw  a  sketch  of  the  channel  on  the  other 
side  of  the  island  ;  and  I  went  myself  in  another  boat,  accompanied  by  the  ho- 
tanist,  to  survey  the  northern  parts  of  the  sound.  In  my  way  I  landed  on  the 
point  of  a  low  isle  covered  with  herbage,  part  of  which  had  been  lately  burnt: 
we  likewise  saw  a  hut;  signs  suflicient  that  people  were  in  tlic  neighbourhood. 
After  I  had  taken  the  necessary  bearings,  we  proceeded  round  thr  east  end  df 
Burnt  Is -ind,  and  over  to  what  we  judged  to  be  the  main  of  Terra  del  Fucgo, 
where  we  found  a  very  fine  harbour  encompassed  by  steep  rocks  of  vast  height, 
down  which  ran  many  limpid  streams  of  water ;  and  at  the  foot  of  the  rocks 
some  tufts  of  trees,  fit  for  little  else  but  fuel. 

"  This  harbour,  which  I  shall  distinguish  by  the  name  o(  DeviVs  Basin,  is  divi- 
ded, as  it  were,  into  two,  an  inner  and  an  outer  one,  and  the  comnumication  be- 
tween them  is  by  a  narrow  channel,  .'*  fathoms  deep.  In  the  ovter  basin  I  found 
13  and  17  fathoms  of  water,  and  in  the  inner,  17  and  23  fathoms.  Tliis  last  is 
as  secure  a  place  as  can  be,  but  nothing  can  be  more  gloomy.  The  vast  height 
of  the  savage  rock  which  encompasses  it,  deprived  great  i).irt  of  it,  even  on  this 
day,  of  the  meridian  sun.  The  outer  harbour  is  not  quite  free  from  this  incon- 
venience, but  far  more  so  than  the  other ;  it  is  also  rather  more  commodious,  and 
equally  safe.  It  lies  in  the  direction  of  norMi,  a  mile  and  a  half  distant  from 
the  east  end  of  Burnt  Island.  I  likewise  found  a  good  ancIiorinK-place  a  litilr 
to  the  westward  of  this  harbour,  before  a  stream  of  water  limt  eomes  out  oi';i 
lake  or  large  reservoir,  which  is  continually  supplied  by  a  caseade  falling  into  it 

"  Leaving  this  place,  we  proceeded  along  the  shore  to  the  westward,  inid 
found  other  harbours,  wiiich  I  had  not  time  to  look  into.    In  all  of  them  i' 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


629 


canied  out  a 

tfast  I  8et  out 
got  round,  or 
which  was  an- 
U  the  head  of 
ream  of  fresh 
ich  a  place,  or 
I  caught  some 

t  Gierke,  who 
ship  into  this 
at  the  land  wc 
was  an  island, 
i  I  hastened  on 
:ordingly  done, 
lut  at  that  mo- 
j  that  we  were 
nt,  and  to  carry 
anchor,  warped 
;r  our  stay-sails. 
with  the  other 
ye  were  shut  in 
ih  the  extremity 
s  us,  covered  us 
tch,  and  our  dis  • 

er,  to  cut  wood, 
(Ught  necessary, 
ivas  not  without 
observatory  and 
ould  find  a  place 
vhere  surround- 
limselfwith  the 


panicd  by  some 
iicl  on  the  other 
inied  by  the  bo- 
I  landed  on  tlio 
en  lately  burnt: 
neighbourhood, 
the  «ast  end  of 
rra  del  Fuego, 
of  vast  height, 
t  of  the  rocks 

'«B«ww,  isdivi- 
numication  he- 
r  basin  I  found 
.  This  last  is 
J'he  VAnt  height 
fit,  even  on  this 
lorn  this  incon- 
Inmodious,  ami 
|f  distant  from 
[ip;-place  a  Uliif 
I'omos  out  of  :i 
J  falling  into  it 
IvcstwartI,  ki"' 
Inll  of  tlnm  i' 


fresh  water,  and  wood  for  fuel ;  but  except  these  little  tufts  of  bushes,  the  whole 
country  is  a  barren  rock,  doomed  by  nature  to  everlasting  sterility.  The  low 
islands,  and  even  some  of  the  higher,  which  lie  scattered  up  and  down  the  sound, 
arc  indeed  mostly  covered  with  shrubs  and  herbage,  the  soil  of  black  rotten  turf, 
evidently  composed,  by  length  of  time,  of  decayed  vegetables. 

"  I  had  an  oportunity  to  verify  what  we  had  observed  at  sea,  that  the  sea- 
coast  is  composed  of  a  number  of  large  and  small  islands,  and  that  the  numer- 
ous inlets  are  formed  by  the  junction  of  several  channels;  at  least,  so  it  is  here. 
On  one  of  these  low  islands  we  found  several  huts,  which  had  lately  been  inhab* 
ited;  and  near  them  was  a  good  deal  of  celery,  with  which  we  loaded  our  toatt 
and  returned  on  board  at  seve«  o'clock  in  the  evening.  In  this  expedition  we 
met  with  little  game ;  one  duck,  three  or  four  shags,  and  about  that  number  of 
rails  or  sea-pies,  being  all  we  got.  The  other  boat  returned  on  board  some 
hours  before,  having  found  two  harbours  on  the  west  side  of  the  other  channel, 
the  one  large,  and  the  other  small,  but  both  of  them  safe  and  commodious ; 
though,  by  the  sketch  Mr.  Pickersgill  had  taken  of  them,  the  access  to  both  ap- 
peared rather  intricate. 

"  Having  fine  jileasant  weather  on  the  23d,  I  sent  Lieutenant  Pickersgill  in 
the  cutter,  to  explore  the  east  side  of  the  sound,  and  went  myself  in  the  pin- 
nace to  the  west  side,  with  an  intent  to  go  round  the  island  under  which  we  were 
at  anchor,  (and  which  I  shall  distinguish  by  the  name  of  Shag  Island)  in  order 
to  view  the  passage  leading  to  the  harbours  Mr.  Pickersgill  had  discovered  the 
day  before,  on  which  I  made  the  ft>llowing  observations.     In  coming  from  sea, 
leave  all  the  rocks  and  islands  lying  off  and  within  York  Minster  on  your  lar- 
board side ;  and  the  black  rock,  which  lies  off  the  south  end  of  Shag  Island,  on 
your  starboard :  and  when  abreast  of  the  south  end  of  that  island,  haul  over  for 
the  west  shore,  taking  care  to  avoid  the  beds  of  weeds  you  will  see  before  you, 
as  they  always  grow  on  rocks,  some  of  which  I  have  found  la  fathoms  under 
water ;  but  it  is  always  best  to  keep  clear  of  them.     The  entrance  to  the  largo 
harbour,  or  Port  Ckrke,  is  just  to  the  north  of  some  low  rocks  lying  off  a  point 
on  Shag  Island.    This  harbour  Mes  in  W.  by  S.  (true)  a  mile  and  a  half,  and  has 
ill  it  from  12,  to  SLi  fathoms  depth,  wood  and  fresh  water.     About  a  mile  without 
or  to  the  southward  of  Port  Clerke,  is,  or  seemed  to  be,  another,  which  I  did 
not  examine.    It  is  formed  by  a  large  island,  which  covers  it  from  the  south  and 
east  winds.     Without  this  island,  that  is,  between  it  and  York  Minster,  the  sea 
seemed  strewed  with  islets,  rocks,  and  breakers. 

'  The  festival,  which  we  celebrated  at  this'  place,  occasioned  my  giving  it  the 
name  of  Christmas  Sound.  The  entrjipce,  which  is  three  leagues  wide,  is  situat 
ed  in  the  latitude  of  55^  27'  S.  longitude  70^  IC  W.  and  in  the  direction  of  N. 
37°  W.  (true)  from  the  Isles  of  St.  Ildefonso,  distant  ten  leagues.  These  isles 
*are  the  best  land-mark  ftir  finding  the  sound.  York  Minster,  which  is  tiie  only 
remarkable  land  about  it,  will  hardly  be  known  by  a  stranger,  from  any  descrip- 
tiou  that  can  be  given  of  it,  because  it  alters  its  appearance  according  to  the  dif- 
ferent situations  it  is  viewed  from.  Besides  the  black  ruck,  which  lies  off  the 
end  of  Shag  Island,  there  is  another,  about  mid-way  between  this  and  the  east 
shore.  A  minute  description  of  this  sound  would  be  unnecessary,  as  few  would 
be  benefited  by  it.  Anchorage,  tufts  of  wood,  and  fresh  water  will  be  found 
in  all  the  coves  and  harbours.  I  would  advise  no  one  to  anchor  very  near  the 
shore  for  the  sake  of  having  a  m  derate  depth  of  wator,  because  there  I  gene- 
rally found  a  rocky  bottom. 

"  The  refreshments  to  be  got  here  arc  precarious,  as  they  consist  chiefly  of 
\vild-fuwl,  and  may  probably  never  be  found  in  such  plenty  as  to  supply  the 
crew  of  a  ship ;.  and  fish,  so  far  as  we  can  judge,  are  scarce.  Ind"ed  the  plenty 
of  wild-fowl  made  IIS  pay  less  attention  to  fishing.  Here  are,  howcvor.  plenty 
of  muscles,  n«)t  very  large,  but  well-tasted ;  and  very  good  celery  is  to  be  met 
with  on  several  of  the  low  islets,  and  where  the  natives  have  their  habitations."' 
The  STRAIT  of  MAGELLAN  was  discovered  and  explored  by  the  cele- 
brated Magalhaens,  in  the  year  1520,  and  has  since  been  passed  through  by  ma- 
ny ships.  Its  eastern  entrance  is  between  Virgin's  Cape  and  Cape  Spiritu  San- 
to, or  Queen  Catharine's  Foreland,  which  are  eight  leagues  distant  from  each 

67 


630 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


other.  Th«  Virgin's  Cape  Is  a  steep  white  cliff,  resembling  our  South-Foreland', 
Though  the  strait  possesses  many  harbours,  affording  wood,  water,  and  fish,  th« 
heavy  gales  of  wind  that  prevail  in  it,  and  the  strength  of  the  currents,  have- 
caused  it  to  be  entirely  abandoaed,  as  the  route  between  the  two  oceans  is  far 
more  safe  and  expeditious  by  way  of  Cape  Horn.  Westerly  winds  are  said  to 
be  the  most  prevalent  in  the  strait,  while  the  current  usually  sets  in  from  the 
east,  and  at  the  entrance  on  that  side  the  tide  rises  30  feet. 

WESTERN  PATAGONIA,  CHILOE,  &c.— The  general  nature  of  this 
broken  and  irregular  coast  can  be  best  understood  by  a  reference  to  the  chart: 
for,  passing  the  western  entrance  of  the  Strait  of  Magallen,  we  see  it  broken  in- 
to a  thousand  shapes,  and  into  innumerable  islands,  mostly  rocky  and  inhospita- 
ble. The  Archipelago  of  Chiloe,  and  the  large  island  of  that  napie,  appertain 
to  the  State  of  Chili,  and  here  civilization  again  commences.  The  islands  of 
Cliiloe  are  upwards  of  a  hundred  in  numbt-r,  but  the  great  Isle  alone  is  of  any 
considerable  size,  and  twenty  only  are  inhabited.  The  whole  appear  to  have 
been  formed  by  convulsions  of  nature,  which  have  broken  the  continent  to  pie- 
ces, being  generally  rugged  masses  of  rock,  separated  by  narrow  and  deep  '.an- 
nels,  the  navigation  of  which  is  rendered  dangerous  by  sunken  rocks  and  violent 
currents.  Most  of  the  islands  rise  perpendicularly  from  the  water,  and  are  so 
rocky,  that  the  proportion  of  soil  capable  of  cultivation  is  very  small ;  and  this  lit- 
tle, owing  to  a  wet  and  unfavourable  climate,  but  stilt  more  to  the  idleness  of 
the  inhabitants  and  their  imperfect  agriculture,  is  not  cultivated  to  the  greatest 
advantage.  Hon-ce  the  quantities  raised  of  wheat,  oats,  French  beans,  and  pota- 
toes, which  constitute  the  permanent  vegetable  food,  are  scarcely  adequate  to 
the  consumption  of  the  inhabitants. 

The  cultivated  fruits  of  the  province  of  Chiloe  are  apples  and  straw berrifis. 
The  most  common  trees,  and  with  which  the  hills  are  in  general  covered,  are 
the  cedar,  oak,  walnut,  plum,  cypress,  cinnamon,  laurel,  orange,  &c.  A  kind  of 
rattan  grows  spontaneously,  of  which  the  natives  mnke  cordage,  and  which  is 
also  employed  in  roofing  their  habitations.  The  Archipelago  has  neither  beast 
of  prey  nor  venomous  reptiles. 

The  v^limate  is  humid  and  stormy,  but  not  unheahhy.  The  winter  is  not  suf- 
ficiently cold  to  permit  the  snow  to  lie  long  on  the  ground,  but  this  season  is  ex- 
tremely wet,  with  heavy  gales  from  N.  N.  E.  and  N.  N.  W.  southerly  winds,  on 
the  contrary,  are  accompanied  with  fr.ir  weather.  The  traversia  is  a  transient 
storm  from  the  east.  The  Aurora  Australis  is  occasionally  seen  here.  In  mid- 
summer the  heat  is  great,  but  the  sensation  is  moderated  by  a  sea-breeze,  which 
blows  pretty  regularly  from  10  till  3  oVlock.  The  population  is  composed  of 
Creole  Spaniards  and  Indians.  The  women  are  employed  in  making  mats,  coarse 
Hnen,  and  woollen-cloths.  The  principal  exports  are  timber,  particularly  cedar^ 
and  cured  hams,  the  Archipelago  abounding  in  hogs. 

The  great  Isle  of  Chiloe  is  forty  leagues  long,  north  and  south,  and  from  ten 
to  thirteen  leagues  broad.  Its  western  coast  is  nearly  straight,  haying  no  indi'nt- 
ation  of  any  consequence,  and  only  a  few  insignificant  rivers.  The  eastern 
coast,  which  ftices  the  continent,  is  more  irregular;  and,  nearly  in  the  middle, 
forms  a  deep  bay.  The  island  contains  two  towns  and  thirty-eight  villages, 
principally  on  the  northern  and  eastern  sides,  there  being  but  one  village  on  the 
Western  co:tst,  and  the  interior  is  so  mountainous-  and  barren  as  to  be  entirely 
uninhabited. 

The  only  port  now  visited  by  shipping  is  that  of  St.  Carlos,  at  the  N.  W. 
end,  the  access  to  which  is  safe.  Tlie  town  of  St.  Carlos  contains  about  two 
hundred  wooden  houses  of  the  Spaniards,  and  some  Indian  huts,  scattered  with- 
out regularity.  Until  1768,  the  port  of  Chacao,  on  the  N.  E.  side,  was  the  chief 
{)lace,  but  this  is  now  reduced  to  a  church,  missionary-house,  and  a  few  Indian 
luta  only.  Castro,  on  the  eastern  side,  has  a  good  port,  but,  from  the  difficulty 
of  the  navigation,  i.i  never  visited  by  ships. 

The  Poi't  of  San  Carlos  is  formed  by  the  bold  peninsula  of  Lacuy.  Without 
Hs  entrance,  on  the  north  side,  is  an  island,  one  mile  and  three  quarters  long, 
connected  to  the  main  by  an  isthmus  of  sand.  A  league  and  a  half  to  the  S- 
K.  of  this  Point  Lacuy,  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  entrance^  and  two  miUs  froia 


BLUNT  3    AMERICAN  COAST    PILOT. 


551 


Point  Laucy  to  the  S.  E>  is  the  fort  and  to^vn  of  San  Carlos,  on  the  S.  E.  side. 
There  are  several  little  isles  to  the  eastward. 

Between  Point  Laucy  and  the  point  of  San  Carlos,  the  depths  arc  6,  6,  and 
12,  to  3;^,  4  and  5  fathoms;  and  within  the  harbour,  to  the  westward,  10,  7  and 
8,_  to  5  and  3  fathoms.  The  bottom  chiefly  of  soft  clay  or  ooze.  In  a  core 
within  Point  Laucy,  the  seine  may  be  hauled  with  success. 

In  a  manuscript  survey  of  this  harbour,  with  which  we  have  been  favoured  by  . 
Captain  Wm.  H.  Sraj'th,  R.  N.  Fort  S.  Curios  is  represented  in  41°  52'  20"  S. 
8nd  730  52'  55"  W.  Variation  in  1807,  19^  20'  E.  High  water  on  the  full  and 
change,  at  the  entrance,  at  12h.  50m.  The  Spanish  chart  of  the  harbour  gives 
the  high  water  in  the  port  at  ll^h.  Tides  regular,  and  vertical  rise  16}  English 
feet. 

CHILOE  to  VALDIVIA.— Between  the  island  of  Chiloe  and  Valdivia  the 
^oast  is  represented  as  generally  rocky  andjflangerous.  Of  the  harbour  of  Val- 
divia a  particular  plan  is  given  on  the  Chart. 

The  ISLE  MOCHA,  inhabited  by  Indiiins,  lies  half  way  between  Valdivia 
and  Conception,  and  serves  as  a  directing  beacon  to  vessels  on  the  coast.  Capt> 
Colnctt  has  described  i,t  as  seen  by  him  in  passing.  "  It  is  of  a  height  to  be 
«een  at  the  distance  of  fifteen  or  sixteen  leagues,  in  clear  weather,  and,  on  ap- 

f»roaching  it,  its  summit  appears  rugged.  It  is  about  three  or  four  leagues  in 
ength,  lying  in  a  north  and  smith  direction  by  the  compass.  The  northern 
{>art  of  the  island  descends  gradually  into  a  low  sandy  point,  or  long  tongue  of 
and,  on  which  is  a  rock  or  cross  that  has  the  resemblance  of  a  sail.  The  south 
point,  at  the  distance  we  were,  appeared  to  end  in  a  more  abrupt  manner,  and 
there  extends  from  it,  to  a  considerable  distance,  a  range  of  small  rugged  rocks, 
eomc  of  them  on  a  level  with  the  water,  while  others  rose  boldly  from  it,  so  that 
it  was  a  matter  of  some  doubt  with  me,  whether  they  composed  an  actual  part 
«f  the  island.  Breakers  also  run  off  from  it  a  great  way  to  the  westward,  at 
least  three  leagues.  There  is  a  bare  white  spot  on  one  part  of  the  island,  having 
the  appearance,  at  an  offing,  of  eight  or  nine  miles,  as  if  not  belonging  to  it. 
From  the  great  number  of  seals  which  I  saw  off  this  island,  I  should  suppose 
that  it  must  abound  with  them.  The  main  land  of  Chili,  within  the  isle,  is 
of  moderate  height,  and  as  it  appeared  to  me,  about  six  oi*  seven  leagues  dis- 
tant." 

CONCEPTION.— The  harbour  of  Conception  has  been  described  byM.La 
Peroase,  by  whom  it  was  visited  in  1785,  and  who  describes  it  as  follows:  "The 
Bay  of  Conception  is  one  of  the  most  ommodious  that  can  be  found  in  any 
part  of  the  world.  For  though  the  tide  rises  six  feet  three  inches,  the  water  is 
fmooth,  and  there  is  scarcely  any  current.  It  is  high  water  here,  at  the  full 
and  change  of  the  moon,  at  forty-five  minutes  past  one.  The  bay  is  open  only 
to  the  north  winds,  which  never  blow  out  in  the  winter  ;  that  is,  from  the  end  of 
May  to  October.  In  this  season  also  the  rains  fall,  and  continue  throughout  the 
monsoon,  for  so  we  may  denominate  constant  winds,  which  are  succeeded  by 
others  by  the  south,  that  continue  to  blow  for  the  rest  of  the  year,  and  are  ac- 
companied with  fine  weather.  The  only  anchorage  sheltered  from  the  N.  E. 
winds  in  the  winter,  is  before  the  village  of  Talcahuano,  on  the  S.  W.  side. 

Conception  was  visited  by  Captain  Kotzebue  in  1316;  and  this  gentleman 
nays.  '*  I  give  no  description  of  the  appearance  of  the  coast,  nor  of  the  entrance 
to  the  bay ;  La  Perouso  has  said  sufficient  on  the  subject  in  his  voyage.  The 
navigator  may  be  confident  of  always  finding,  at  this  season  of  the  year,  (llth 
February)  at  a  distance  of  two  degrees  from  the  coast,  as  well  in  this  latitude  as 
in  one  degree  more  to  the  south,  beautiful  and  serene  weather  and  south  wind; 
but,  on  the  cont«ary,  if  he  ^,0  more  to  the  west,  he  may  expect  to  find  gloomy 
weather  and  a  north  wind.  It  would,  therefore,  be  adviseable  for  ships,  that  in- 
tend sailing  up  the  coast  to  a,iproach  it  at  once  at  42°,  as  they  will  certainly  ac- 
celerate their  passage.  But  this  applies  only  to  summer;  because  in  winter 
gloomy  weather  and  north  winls  prevail. 

*'  \  think  it  not  superfluous  to  advise  every  navigator,  who  visits  this  place,  to 
caution  his  people  in  the  use  of  wine-  In  some  of  the  numerous  public  house* 
at  Talcahuano,  they  mix  with  the  wine  the  juirc  of  an  herb  unknown  to  ui. 


532 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


which  produces  the  most  horrid  effect ;  for  it  throws  people  into  a  state  horder- 
ing  ou  frenzy,  which  is  followed  by  a  general  relaxation  of  the  nerves.  Several 
sailors  of  the  Rurick  experienced  this.  The  portion  is  probably  calculated  for 
the  plunder  of  foi-eigners,  as  this  generally  follows  the  drinking  of  it.  Talca- 
huano  is,  for  the  most  part,  inhabited  by  a  mixed  race  of  Spaniards  and  Arau- 
cans,  who  have  no  mind  for  work,  and  who  therefore  try  to  gain  subsistence  by 
dishonourable  means. 

"  La  Perouse,  in  his  voyage,  has  said  so  much  about  Conception  Bay,  that  I 
could  only  make  repetitions;  the  bay,  however,  as  a  place  of  refreshment,  is  to 
be  recommended  to  narigatora,  as  provision  and  fruits  of  all  sorts  are  in  abun- 
dance. 


Directions  for  entering  Talcahuano,  the  Port  of  Conception. 

In  the  winter  reason  endeavour  to  make  the  mouth  of  the  Port,  and  when  you 
descry  land,  stand  right  in  for  the  Island  of  Quiriquina,  which  lies  in  36<^  36'  S. 
latitude  off  the  mouth  of  the  Port,  and  is  protected  from  northerly  winds. 

In  the  summer  season,  when  in  lat.  37^  2,0',  or  thereabouts,  stand  directly  for 
the  shore,  keeping  it  distant  3  leagues,  and  steering  for  Point  Carnero  which  is  the 
most  northerly  in  making  the  Island  of  Santa  Maria;  this  island  is  L.tuated  in 
37°  S.  bearing  from  Point  Carnero  S.  i  S.  W.  and  N.  i  N.  E.  distant  2  leagues ; 
from  its  North  West  Point  there  is  a  reef  which  extends  about  a  league,  on  which 
you  can  perceive  breakers.  This  reef  bears  from  the  Morro  of  Talcahuano  (or 
the  Port  of  Conception)  N.E.  and  S.W.  true,  distance  13  or  14  leagues,  advert- 
ing that  if  the  wind  is  southerly  the  current  sets  N.  W.  and  if  from  the  north- 
ward S.  W. 

When  clear  of  this  reef,  steer  E.  N.  E.  in  search  of  the  Paps  of  Biobio  8j 
leagues  distant  rom  the  mouth  of  the  Port  of  Conception.  Thest  two  hills  coai- 
mand  the  coast,  and  form  two  Paps  :  they  may  be  seen  10  leagues  off  in  clear 
weather.  At  the  N.  W.  foot  of  these  hills  there  is  a  bay  in  form  of  a  Horse  Shoe, 
called  San  Vincente,  in  which  there  is  good  anchorage,  protected  from  all  winds 
(with  an  anchor  on  the  shore  in  a  N.  E.  direction.) 

The  coast  from  Point  Biobio  to  the  shoal  ofQuiebra  Ollas  (seen  above  water) 
'^.cj  i  by  compass  S.  S.  W.  and  N.  N.  E.  distant  3  leagues.  Quiebra  Ollas  with 
the  N.  W.  point  of  Morro  of  Talcahuano,  btiars  E.  6°  S.  and  W.  6°  N.  distant 
It  league.  Quiebra  Ollas  from  the  S.  S.  W.  point  of  Quiriquina,  bears  E.;i  N.  £. 
and  W.  \  S.  W.  distant  1^  league. 

From  the  land  side  of  Quiebra  Ollas  it  is  almost  impossible  to  enter  by  that  chan- 
nel, as  there  are  numerous  shoals.  The  best  entrance  to  this  port  is  to  the  north 
side  of  Quiriquina,  and  to  accomplish  this,  you  have  to  approach  near  to  Quie- 
hras  Ollas,  because  the  Moro  of  Talcahuuno  conceals  this  island,  which  has  also 
a  shoal  on  its  N.  W.  point,  about  two  rabies  length  from  it,  on  which  there  are 
:2j  fathoms  wat«r ;  and  to  which  you  ought  to  pay  attention  when  entering  the 

1>ort.  After  passing  this  point,  which  may  be  approached  within  two  cables 
ength,  there  is  nothing  to  fear,  and  keep  standing  to  the  southward,  and  if  with 
a  southerly  wind,  luff  all  you  can  for  the  larboard  side  of  the  bay  of  the  port 
which  from  Quiriquina  within  is  perfectly  clear  on  that  side  with  the  exception  of 
a  shoal  in  front  of  the  village  of  Linquien ;  it  is  under  water,  but  covered  with 
weeds  and  distant  from  the  shore  about  one  quarter  league. 

On  th«  north  side  of  Quiriquina  there  is  a  sand  beach  distant  from  the  same 
about  three  cables  length  in  front  of  a  yellow  mound  of  earth.  If  you  can  wea- 
ther Point  Arena  (sandy)  or  more  to  windward  of  the  bay,  fd^rmed  by  this  Point, 
all  is  clear  and  may  be  approached  with  u  cable  where  you  have  10  fathoms 
waten 

On  the  south  (isist  side  «f  the  island  there  is  a  shoal  wiiich  runs  out  about  one 
quarter  of  a  league  ;  you  ought  not  to  approach  the  starboard  side  of  the  bay, 
as  it  is  very  foul.  Thure  are  two  shoals  called  Marinao,  and  to  steer  clear  of 
these  y»u  must  keep  open  the  Morro  of  Talcahuano  aivd  west  side  of  Hill  Espi- 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


533 


late  horder- 
s.  Sevtrnl 
Icukted  for 
it.  Talca- 
i  and  Arau- 
jsistence  by 

Bay,  that  I 
hment,  is  to 
ire  in  abun- 


ption. 

id  when  you 
n  36°  36'  S. 
Bvinds. 
[  directly  for 
which  is  the 
}  ticuated  ia 
nt  2  leagues ; 
ue,  on  which 
Icahuano  (or 
gues,  advert- 
n  the  north- 

i>f  Biobio  8i 
ivo  hills  coai- 
s  oif  in  clear 
Horse  Shoe, 
om  all  winds 

ibove  water) 
Ollas  with 
N*  distant 
E.iN.  E. 

r  that  chan- 
,o  the  north 
ar  to  Quie- 
ch  has  also 
there  are 
ntering  the 
two  cables 
and  if  with 
of  the  port 
jxception  of 
vered  with 


the  same 

u  can  wea- 

this  Point, 

10  fathoms 

: about  one 

)f  the  bay, 

sr  cleur  of 

Hill  Espi- 


:h 


nosa ;  if  they  are  In  one,  you  are  close  on  these  banks  r  if  going  from  Cerno 
Verde  to  Talcahuano,  although  with  a  fair  wind,  do  not  shoal  your  water  less 
than  6  fsithoms,  being  close  to  the  island  of  Rey,  you  may  take  the  ground,  as 
there  is  little  water. 

To  anchor  in  this  port  in  6  fathoms,  muHt  have  the  Castle  of  Gclvc3t0  to  bear 
S.  W.  and  the  south  point  of  Quiriquina  N.  3°  E.  by  the  compass. 


Other  Instructions  for  entering  Port  Talcahuano. 

Endeavour  to  make  the  Island  of  Santa  Maria,  keeping  a  good  look  out  for 
a  reef  Which  runs  from  its  N.  N.  W.  point,  .about  IJ  league. 

You  may  keep  the  coast  along  at  a  short  .distance,  as  any  danger  there  may  be 
seen,  steering  for  Point  Talcahuano  from  which  there  is  a  clump.  Quiebra 
OUas  are  surrounded  by  breakers;  they  may  be  approached  within  half  a  mile, 
and  standing  on  for  the  Nortli  Point  of  Quiriquina  which  has  also  two  rocks  ; 
the  most  distant  one  is  about  one  quarter  'eugue,  and  may  be  approached  within 
a  stone's  throw,  as  there  is  very  deep  water  along  side  of  it,  and  you  require  to 
do  so  in  order  to  keep  to  windward ;  having  cleared  these,  continue  steering 
close  to  the  island.  It  is  probable  you  will  have  contrary  wind  in  standing  for 
the  Port,  ia  which  case  you  should  not  approach  the  island  on  the  east  side  or  to 
the  southward  of  the  island  ;  although  the  north  and  west  side  is  very  deep  ;  on 
the  south  side  there  is  a  shoal. 

About  one-third  of  the  distance  between  the  Point  of  Talcahuano  and  Port 
Talcahuano,  and  nearly  in  a  parallel  with  them,  there  is  another  flat  which  runs 
to  the  eastward,  about  one-half  league,  and  near  it  there  is  a  shoal  surround- 
ed by  a  i-eef  which  is  seen  at  low  water,  and  due  care  ought  to  be^iad  for  this, 
reef  when  making  the  Port,  although  the  discoloured  water  apprizes  you  of  it. 
The  best  way  when  entering  the  mouth  of  the  harbour  with  the  land  breeze  is  to 
steer  directly  for  a  large  mound  of  yellow  earth,  which  is  seen  on  a  hill  of  regu- 
lar height,  and  continue  so  until  you  double  the  Cape  or  Point  Talcahuano,  af- 
terwards steering  for  the  houses  on  shore  until  distant  about  one-half  mile,  where 
you  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathoms  tvater. 

CONCEPTION  to  VALPARAISO.— From  the  Port  of  Conception,  to  that 
of  Valpariaso,  which  Is  the  sea  port  of  St.  Jago,  the  caj>ital  of  Chili,  the  true 
bearing  and  ilistrlnce  are  N.  by  E.  |  E.  seventy-seven  leagues.  The  coast  through 
the  whole  distance  is  steep-to.  In  33°  56'  S.  is  the  shoal  of  Topocalma,  a  reef 
about  four  miles  long,  and  at  about  the  same  distance  from  the  shore  ;  with  this 
exception,  the  coast  is  represented  as  generally  clear,  but  it  does  not  seem  to  have 
beeh  minutely  surveyed,  and  should,  therefore,  be  approached  with  caution.* 

Captain  Vancouver  passed  to  the  southward  of  Juan  Fernandez  in  March,  1795, 
and  he  assigns  to  the  S.  W.  point  the  !;>titude  33^  45'  S.  longitude  by  his  chrono- 
meters, kc.  78°  51'  13"  W.  He  observes,  that  its  aspect  in  this  point  of  view  is 
not  very  inviting.  The  point  terminates  in  a  high  steep  bluff.  Its  eastern  part 
Seemed  to  be  less  elevated,  and  the  whole  composed  a  group  of  broken  irregular 
hills,  forming  altogether  as  rudt  and  grotesque  a  scene  as  the  imagination  can  well 
fancy.  Variation  of  compass  13°  East.  He  thence  proceeded  easterly  for  Val- 
paraiso, and  describes  his  course  as  follows  : 

23d  March.  The  wind  seemed  now  to  be  t'lxed  in  the  northern  quarter,  and 
heing  to  the  southward  of  our  port,  our  course  was  directed  t»  regain  the  paral- 
lel of  its  latitude :  this  was  .iccomplishcd  by  Monday  noon,  beinp;  then,  by  ob- 
servation, in  latitude  32°  55'  S.  true  longitude  74^  30' ;  the  wnid  was  still  at 
N.  N.  W.  with  fair  and  pleasant  weather  :  the  thermometer  from  66°  to  68°, 
ftndthe  variation  of  the  compass  13°  42'  east.  Having  now  got  to  the  north- 
ward of  Valpariaso,  our  course  was  so  ordered  as  to  preserve  that  situation. 

*  The  highest  mountains  of  the  Chilian  Andes,  whicli  generaHy  rise  at  about  forty  leaj^ur-. 
more  or  less,  from  the  sea-coast,  are  Maujla,  in  2iP  45'  S.  Tupmgato  in  33'^  24',  Descabe- 
sadoinSfio,  Blanqiiillo  in  SS-' 4',  Lorigavi  iii  35*^  30',  Chilian  in  36  \  Corcobado  in  43^ 
The  Ruratnils  are  supposed  to  bo  nearly  twenty  thousaod  feel  above  the  sea ;  aod,  of  course, 
«rc  covered  with  perpetual  snow. 


634 


BLUNT'a*  AMERlCAlf    COAST    PILOT. 


TMs,  however,  proved  to  be  a  very  unnecessary  precaution,  as  toward  mid- 
night, in  latitude  32°  51',  the  wind  after  becoming  light  and  variable,  was  suc- 
ceeded by  a  fresh  breeze  at  south,  that  seemed  to  be  equally  steady  and  fixed  in 
its  direction  as  the  northerly  wind  had  been  before,  so  that  we  had  now  again  to 
haul  to  the  southward,  in  order  that  we  might  Ituep  to  windward  of  our  port. 

On  Tuesday  forenoon,  we  gained  a  distant  view  of  the  lofty  coast  of  Chili  to 

the  eastward.     The  observed  latitude  at  noon  wns  32°  53'  S.    The  land  at  this 

time  was  too  far  off  to  distinguish  any  of  its  particular  parts.     The  wind  blew 

fresh  from  the  south,  with  which  we  made  great  progress  towards  the  land,  and 

by  sun-feet  the  shores  were  distinctly  seen  to  extend  from  N.  50°  E.  to  S.  68°  E. 

about  ten  leagues  distant.     In  this  point  of  view,  the  sea-coast  appeared  to  be 

composed  of  hills  of  various  shapes  and  sizes,  considerably  elevated :  behind 

thfese  the  interior  country  rose  to  a  very  lofty  range  of  stupendous  mountains, 

wrapped  in  perpetual  snow.    These  are  the  Andes,  and  when  first  seen,  which 

was  shortly  after  noon,  were  at  the  distance,  I  should  imagine,  of  nearly  forty 

leagues  ;  but  we  had  not  an  opportunity  of  making  the  necessary  observations 

for  ascertaining  that  fact,  we  continued  to  stand  in  shore  until  ten  at  night,  when, 

concluding  we  were  within  three  or  four  leagues  of  the  land,  we  tacked  and 

»tood  to  the  VV.  S.  W.  under  as  much  sail  as  we  could  venture  to  carry,  for  the 

purpose  of  fetching,  if  possible,  to  windward  of  Valparaiso. 

At  two  o'clock  on  Wednesday  morning,  we  again  stood  in  for  the  land,  which 
was  very  indistinctly  seen  owing  to  a  dense  haze  in  which  it  was  enveloped.  The 
wind  at  S.  S.  E.  was  light,  and  it  was  not  until  about  ten  in  the  forenoon  that 
We  we**-^  in  with  the  shores ;  on  which  there  was  no  one  circumstance  that  could 
indie  .  our  being  in  the  neighiiourhood  of  Valparaiso,  nor  point  out  whether 
we  were  to  the  north  or  south  of  that  port,  excepting  our  x>wn  reckoning,  which 
showed  it  to  be  in  the  former  direction. 

I  did  not  think  it  prudent,  in  our  crippled  situation,  to  risk  a  disappointment,  and 
for  that  reason  we  stood  off  shorn  until  an  obsa-vation  for  the  latitude  eould  be 
procured,  "/hicb,  by  the  help  of  a  double  altitude,  was  accomplished  about  eleven 
o'clock,  when  we,  bore  away,  in  latitude  33°  10'  S.  for  a  point  n»t  far  distant 
from  the  place  where  we  expected  to  find  the  Bay  of  Valparaiso.     At  noon,  the 
above  point,  which  was  the  most  northern  part  of  the  coast,  in  sight,  and  ap- 
pearing like  a  small  rocky  island,  lying  close  to  a  low  or   moderately  elevated 
{)rojecting  point  of  land,  and  terminating  at  the  sea-side  in  a  round  hummock, 
ike  a  bell,  bore  N.  43°  E.  a  rugged  rocky  islet  lying  close  to  the  main  land,  near 
the  south  point  of  a  small  s:^;idy  l>ay,  being  tlifi  nearest  shore,  N.  64°  E.  two  or 
three  miles  distant :  and  the  southernmost  part  of  the  coast  in  sight  S.  E.  byS. 
The  view  we  had  thus  gained  of  the  coasts  of  the  kingdom  of  Chili,  present- 
ed but  little  to  attract  the  attention,  or  excite  the  curiosity  of  strangers.     Thoso 
parts  immediately  on  the  sea-shore  were  composed  of  rude  cliffs  and  rocky  pre. 
cipices,  against  which  the  western  swell  broke  with  unremitting  violence.   Above 
these  cliffs  the  country  was  variously  broken  by  irregular  eminences,  some  form- 
ed of  naked  barren  rocks,  and  others  consisting  of  a  reddish  substance  almost 
equally  unproductive,  on  which  some  verdure  appeared  here  and  there,  with  a 
few  stunted  shrubs  and  bushes,  some  of  which  were  great  distances  from  each 
other;  but  nothing  like  a  tree  was  to  be  seen,  and  the  landscape  bounded  by  the 
frozen  summits  of  the  lofty  Andes,  towering  above  the  lower  barren  mountains, 
that  descend  from  them  towards  the  sea-coast,  exhibited  an  extremely  dreary, 
desolate,  and  inhospitable  picture. 

As  we  proceeded,  a  low  steep  bluff  point  of  land,  beyond  that  which  terminat- 
ed our  northern  view  of  the  sea-coast  at  noon,  was  now  seen  lying  in  a  direction 
from  it  N.  51°  E.  about  three  leagues  distant,  and  which  proved  to  be  the  west- 
ern point  of  the  entrance  into  Valparaiso  Bay. 

Our  attention  was  now  directed  in  quest  of  the  Great  Rock,  or  Small  Island, 
described  by  Sir  Rit  hard  Hawkins,  in  1593,  as  lying  a  league  or  betttr  to  the 
south  of,  and  a,  good  mark  and  sure  sign  of  the  port.  At  first  I  was  at  a  loss  to 
discover  which  of  the  two  noticed  at  noon  was  Sir  Richard's  rock,  as  both  are 
much  farther  from  the  Bay  of  Valparaiso  than  he  describes  them  to  be  :  but,  a« 
we  advanced,  I  had  no  doubt  of  the  most  northern  being  the  "  Great  Rock  or 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


636 


Small  Islnnd."  Thb  lies  upwards  of  three  leagues,  in  a  direction  S.  51®  W.  from 
the  Point  of  Angels,  M'hich  is  the  west  point  of  Valparaiso  Bay,  and  is  rendered 
still  more  conspicuous  for  pointins;  out  the  port,  by  being  situated  close  to  a  very 
projecting  point,  called  by  the  Spaniards  Point  Quaraumiila,  from  whence  the 
shores  of  the  main  land  to  the  southward  take  a  direction  some  degrees  to  the 
eastward  of  south,  and  those  to  the  northward,  as  before  stated,  towards  Valpa- 
raiso. It  is  also  the  south-western  point  of  a  spacious  open  bay,  bounded  by  a 
sandy  beach,  where  anchorage  might  probably  be  found,  but  which  must  be  much 
exposed  ;  and  as  several  rocks  were  observed  lying  at  a  very  little  distance  from 
the  shore,  the  chance  is  that  the  bottom  may  be  composed  of  the  same  materials. 
On  the  N.  E.  side  of  this  bay,  u  house  and  some  smaller  habitations  were  seen 
near  it,  and  the  country  in  its  neighbourhood  a[>peared  to  be  less  sterile  and  for- 
bidding than  those  parts  to  which  we  were  opposite  in  tne  morning.  Its  surface, 
though  unequal,  was  less  broken  ;  and  although  it  could  not  boast  of  luxuriant 
vegetation,  yet  the  naked  rugged  precipices,  that  formed  a  barrier  against  the 
ocean,  on  each  side  of  the  bay,  were  no  longer  the  general  characteristic  of  the 
interior  country,  which  presented  a  surface  of  some  soil,  on  whose  withered  herb- 
B|;e  both  flocks  of  sheep  and  herds  of  cattle  were  seen  grazing,  on  the  sides  of 
the  hills. 

Along  these  shores,  which  seemed  to  be  bold,  we  passed  at  the  distance  of 
from  half  a  mile  to  half  a  league,  without  discovering  any  danger  which  is  not 
sufficiently  conspicuous  to  be  avoided ;  and,  with  the  assistance  of  a  Ane  southerly 
breeze,  by  two  in  the  afternoon  we  were  abreast  of  the  Point  of  Angels,  oflf 
which  some  rocks  extend  to  the  distance  of  about  half  a  cable's  length.  These 
we  passed  at  about  twice  that  distance,  without  gaining  soundings.  In  sailing 
round  this  point,  the  country  suddenly  opened  upon  us,  and  presented  a  sc(  le 
to  which  we  had  long  been  entire  strangers;  the  whole  ofthe  bay  was  now  ex- 
hibited to  our  view,  terminated  by  a  sandy  b*!ach ;  near  the  upper  margin  of 
which,  and  on  the  sides  ofthe  adjacent  hills,  was  seen  the  town  of  Valparaiso; 
and,  although,  from  its  situation,  it  could  not  boast  of  much  pleasantness,  yet  in 
this  point  of  view  it  appeared  to  be  neat,  of  considerable  extent,  and  built  with 
regularity;  the  churches  rose  above  the  other  buildings,  and  the  whole  being 
defended  by  several  forts,  all  conspired  at  once  to  announce  that  we  were  again 
approaching  towards  the  civilized  world. 

In  the  bay  and  near  to  the  shore  rode  several  sail  of  merchant-ships,  engaged 
in  their  respective  occupations,  to  and  from  which  boats  were  passing  and  re- 
passing to  the  shore,  where  a  very  lively  scene  Avas  exhibited  of  men  and  cattle; 
the  whole  exhibiting  that  sort  of  commercial  intercourse  between  distant  coun- 
tries that  the  arts  and  civilization  can  alone  carry  into  effect. 

The  wind  from  the  southward  blowing  directly  out  of  the  bay,  obliged  us  to 
make  some  trips  for  the  purpose  of  reaching  a  proper  situation  for  anchoring, 
which  was  accomplished  about  three  o'clock,  in  10  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

Ships  destined  for  the  Port  of  Valparaiso,  should  endeavour,  during  the  sum- 
mer months,  to  make  the  coast  well  to  the  southward  of  the  bay,  in  order  that 
a  fair  wind  may  be  ensured  for  entering  the  bay.  The  southerly  winds,  which, 
in  g-  eral,  extend  from  sixty  to  seventy  leagues  from  the  coast,  mostly  prevail 
until  the  month  of  May ;  and  from  the  middle  of  that  month,  during  all  the 
months  of  June,  July,  Aygust,  and  September,  I  was  given  lo  understand  the 
prevailing  winds  were  fron  the  north.  These  winds  are  commonly  attended 
with  great  quantities  of  rain  and  very  foggy  weather,  but  they  do  not  often  blow 
with  much  violence.  So  soon  as  the  wind  returns  to  the  southward,  the  dry 
season  commences,  and  so  it  continues,  with  little  variation,  during  the  remain- 
der ofthe  year.  These  winds,  however,  frequently  blow  strong,  so  as  to  break 
vessels  adrift,  though  well  secured  by  anchors  ou  the  "lore,  near  to  the  town  of 
Valparaiso.  Within  four  or  five  leagues  of  the  Point  of  Angels,  which  is  tho 
western  point  of  the  bay,  is  a  low  rocky  point,  near  to  which  is  a  detached  high 
barren  rock:  these  points  lie  from  each  other  S.  51°  W.  and  N.  51°  E.  To 
the  northward  of  the  above  low'  rocky  point  are  some  scattered  rocks,  that  lie 
about  two  miles  from  the  point,  and  about  a  fourth  of  that  distance  from  the 
•bore  I  and  to  the  northward  of  these  rocks  is  a  sandy  bay,  on  the  N.  E.  side  of 


536 


BLUNT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


uliich  is  a  hrmsi;.  In  this  hay  I  was  led  to  believe  that  anchorage  mlRlUbe  had, 
though  th(5  situHtion  is  certainly  much  exposed.  The  Point  of  Angels  (off  which 
are  also  some  rocks  lying  very  near  to  it)  may  be  approached  by  sailing  at  the 
distance  of  half  a  league  from  the  shore,  and,  as  soon  as  the  point  is  passed,  the 
town  of  Valparaiso  is  instantly  discovered.  About  seven  miles  to  the  N.  E.  of 
this  point  is  the  cluster  of  rocks  lying  at  some  distance  from  the  shore,  on  which 
the  sea  breaks  violently ;  hut  we  had  no  opportunity  of  ascertaining  their  situa- 
tion with  any  degree  of  precision.  The  bay  is  about  four  miles^  wide,  and 
about  a  mile  deep,  apparently  free  from  any  sort  of  danger ;  but,  as  it  is  greatly 
exposed  to  the  northerly  winds,  the  trading  vessels  constantly  moor  with  two 
good  anchors  and  cables  in  that  direction,  and  with  other  cables  fast  to  anchors 
on  shore,  in  5  or  6  fathoms  of  water,  soft  sandy  bottom,  near  to  the  custom- 
house ;  by  which  means  it  is  expected  that  the  oflicera  of  the  revenue  may  be 
enabled  to  prevent  auy  contraband  trade,  by  vigilantly  attending  to  their  dutyiu 
the  day-time,  and  by  a  rowing  guard  during  the  night.  The  depth  of  the  water 
gradually  increases  with  the  distance  from  the  shore  to  30  fathoms,  and  the 
bottom  becomes  more  tenacious.  In  the  depth  of  16  fathoms,  in  which  we 
took  our  station,  it  was  a  very  stiff  clay.  Here  we  moored,  a  cable  each  way, 
to  the  northward  and  to  the  southward,  the  Point  of  Angels  bearing  N.  35°  W. 
the  fort  in  the  town  N.  86^  W.  the  redoubt  on  the  hill  S.  5°  E.  the  church  of 
Almendral  S.  65°  E.  the  east  fort  N.  83°  E.  the  east  point  of  the  bay  N.  57°  E. 
and  the  nearest  shore  S.  7°  W.  a  cable's  length  distant. 

On  the  top  of  a  hill,  on  the  east  side  of  the  bay,  is  an  open  or  barbet  battery, 
of  stone  and  brick,  and  cupable  of  mounting  ten  guns;  this  battery  commands 
all  that  aide  of  the  bay,  the  beach,  and  the  village  of  Almendral.  On  the  sum- 
mit of  another  hill  is  a  stone  redoubt,  of  a  circular  form,  with  eleven  embrasures ; 
these  command  the  beach  and  village  of  Almendral  to  the  eastward,  the  bay  to 
the  northward,  and  the  town  and  harbour  of  Valparaiso  to  the  north-westward. 

From  the  western  fort,  some  rocks  extend  into  the  bay,  and  the  bottom  is  too 
foul  for  vessels  of  any  force  to  anchor  nearer  to  this  fortification  than  about  4oa 
yards ;  but  they  may  'approach  and  anchor  in  a  very  eligible  situation,  within 
about  250  yards  of  the  garrison  or  principal  fortress ;  and  neither  of  these 
places,  in  their  present  situation,  would  be  able  to  resist  a  well  directed  fire,  even 
from  two  or  three  frigates.     (April  1795.) 

The  trade  of  this  port  is  carried  on  in  ships  from  250  tons  to  700  tons  bur- 
then ;  in  which  is  annually  exported  to  Lima  about  15,000  tons  of  wheat  and 
wheat-flour,  large  quantities  of  small  cordage,  dried  salt-fish,  and  apples,  pcars^ 
and  peaches,  in  great  abundance.  All  goods  imported  are  landed  on  a  soft  sandy 
bank  lying  before  the  custom-house,  and  thence  carried  into  the  ware-houses, 
or  removed  to  distant  parts  of  the  country  on  the  backs  of  mules ;  by  which 
conveyance  the  articles  for  exportation  are,  in  like  manner,  brought  down  to  the 
shore. 

Captain  Vancouver,  from  twelve  meridian  altitudes,  gives  the  latitude  of  his 
observatory  at  Valparaiso  as  33°  1'  30''  S.  and  the  longitude,  from  thirty-nine 
sets  of  lunar  distances,  at  71°  31'  8",  which  is  nine  minutes  less  than  the  posi- 
tion given  by  tiie  Spanish  surveyors.  The  mean  vnay  be  considered  as  71°  36' 
W.     But,  probably,  the  result  of  the  Spanish  offiiers  is  to  be  preferred. 

The  variation,  from  six  sets  of  observations,  by  ;ach  of  two  compasses,  waft 
14°  49'  E.    The  mean  inclination  of  the  marine  di^iping-needle,  44°  15'. 

Valparaiso  Jias  also  been  visited  by  Lieutenant  Shillibeer.  This  gentleman 
describes  the  town  as  divided  into  two  parts,  and  known  by  the  names  of 
Port  Valparaiso,  and  the  Almendral.  "  The  Port,"  he  says,  "  is,  doubtless, 
the  most  ancient ;  and,  from  its  being  the  immediate  mart  for  every  kind  of 
merchandise  in  the  country,  it  is  of  the  greatest  consideration.  The  town  is 
built  as  regular  as  the  ground  on  which  it  stands  will  allow,  and  possesses  two 
or  three  tolerable  streets ;  the  rest,  which  is  by  far  the  greatest  part,  occupies 
the  sides  and  summits  of  those  heights,  which  run  with  great  abruptness  even  to 
the  beach.  Through  each  of  these  streets  cross  several  7Jg-zag  roads,  and 
^muUer  paths  leading  from  them  to  the  different  dwellings.  The  bouses,  with  a 
few  exceptions,  (as  throughout  the  country)  are  of  but  one  story,  apd  built  o! 


BLUiNT^S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


637 


large  unburnt  bricks,  have  rather  a  mean  appearance ;  and  those  lituated  on  the 
beach  are  occupied  by  merchants,  either  ^s  magazines  for  corn,  or  shops ;  and 
where  the  principal  part  of  their  commercial  affairs  are  transacted.  Tne  chief 
article  in  commerce  consists  in  corn,  cordage,  and  copper,  the  two  first  being 
brought  from  the  neighbouring  fertile  valley  of  Quillota,  the  latter  from  beyond 
St.  Jago. 

'*  The  custom-house  with  all  its  establishment,  is  on  the  beach ;  and  all  boats,  . 
bis  British  Majesty's  excepted,  are  obliged  to  land  there.    Both  officers  and  men 
belonging  to  this  department  appear  to  be  vigilant  in  their  stations,  and  steady 
in  the  performance  of  their  duty. 

'*  Castello  Blanco,  or  the  White  Castle,  stands  on  the  beach,  immediately  un- 
der a  high  cliff,  at  the  west  point  of  the  bay,  flanking  the  harbour  to  the  east- 
ward. The  anchorage  here  is  very  good,  but  the  most  secure  and  protected  is 
towards  the  White  Castle,  the  opposite  side  being  a  shoal,  as  well  as  having  some 
dangerous  rocKs,  which  are  at  no  period  visible  above  the  surface  of  the  water. 
The  shore  from  the  citadel  to  below  the  custom-house  is  very  bold,  and  ships 
of  considerable  burthen  can  anchor  within  a  few  yards  of  the  beach,  so  that  they 
can  conveniently  take  in  or  discharge  their  cargoes. 

"  It  is  impossible  for  ships  of  force  to  be  supplied,  at  any  time,  with  water 
from  the  port,  without  incalculable  trouble,  for  it  is  in  the  rainy  season  alone 
that  there  is  any,  but  what  is  contained  in  the  wells;  however,  at  t^ie  Almen- 
dral,  it  may  be  procured  at  all  seasons,  when  the  surf  will  permit  the  boats  to 
land." 


The  Track  of  Don  AXex.  Mala-Espina^om  Conception  arw?  Valparaiso 
in  C!iiii  to  the  Port  of  San  Bias, /or  all  seasons  of  the  year.  (Royal 
JVautical  Academy  of  Cadiz.) 

The  best  course  to  adopt  in  any  time  of  the  year,  is  to  keep  100  leagues  or 
more  to  the  westward  of  the  Gallepagos  Islands. 

On  leaving  Valparaiso,  steer  north-west  that  you  may  cross  the  Equinoctial  in 
the  meridian  of  San  Bias,  which  is  33°  13'  west  of  Valparaiso  ;  you  have  then 
only  to  luff* all  you  can  with  easterly  winds  until  you  are  in  the  parallel  of  30°  or 
thereabouts,  when  you  may  calculate  on  falling  in  with  northerly  winds,  and  the 
nearer  you  approach  the  coast  of  California,  the  winds  are  more  from  the  north- 
east. 

This  Track  requires  some  caution,  as  there  are  several  charts  which  place  the 
Islands  of  Gallepagos  near  the  line,  and  in  these  meridians,  and  to  evade  calms 
on  these  Islands,  keep  well  to  the  westward. 

In  the  months  of  September,  October,  and  November,  the  navigation  within 
the  Islands  of  Gallepagos  is  not  so  bad,  although  it  is  exposed  to  various  inci- 
dents.   Vessels  from  Lima  to  Acapuico  taking  this  track,  always  carry  a  pilot. 

The  track  to  the  westward  of  the  Gallepagos  is  unquestionably  the  best. 

The  coast  of  San  Bias  is  frightful  during  the  rains,  and  they  last  sometimes 
until  October,  which  is  the  earliest  period  you  ought  to  arrive  there. 


Track  from  Conception  in  Chili  to  San  Bias,  by  Jose  Espinosa,  of  li. 

C.  M .  Ship  Descubierta. 

From  Conception  you  will  steer  N.  5°  W.  or  N.  i  N.  W.  in  the  ordinary 
form  of  navigitiion  for  Lima,  inclining  rather  to  the  w'estward,  if  in  the  winter 
season,  in  order  to  avoid  the  northerly  winds  which  blow  very  hard  at  that  sea- 
son in  the  latitude  of  Coquimba ;  you  may  steer  for  and  make*  the  island  of 
Sangallon  inlat.  18°  15' N.  and  76°  36'  W.  from  Greenr-'ch  ,  from  whence  coast 
»long  for  the  Island  of  San  Lorenzo,  whose  western  extremity  is  12®  5'  S.  and  77° 
8'  W.  k(ieping  clear  of  the  Island  of  Hormigas,  distant  only  two  miles  from  it. 

68 


538 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN     COAST    PILOT. 


From  thence  keep  a  short  distance  from  the  coast,  steering  for  the  Point  of 
St.  Helena,  situated  in  2^  10'  S.  and  80°  48'  W.  long.  This  point  appears  in- 
sulated ;  it  is  quite  flat  on  the  top,  resembling  a  table,  and  is  seen  8  or  0  leagues 
distant ;  in  the  north-east  and  east  sides  uf  it,  there  is  good  anchorage  in  8  or  10 
fathoms  water,  in  mud  and  sand. 

From  Point  St.  Helena  steer.N.  W.  (nothing  to  the  west  of  it)  until  in  3°  3V 
north,  when  steer  N.  W.  iW.  until  you  are  in  12°  or  13°  north,  and  from  thence 
luff  all  you  can  to  the  north-west,  or  more  northerly  if  the  wind  permit  it,  when 
you  will  have  left  the  Island  of  Cocoa  on  your  starboard,  which  lies  in  5°  42'  N. 
and  87°  8'  W. 

In  crossing  the  parallel  of  18°  and  19°  north,  keep  a  look  out  for  the  Islands 
of  Socorro,  (some  of  the  charts  call  them  RevillagiRedo)  and  the  Island  of  Roca 
Partida;  the  former  Islands  of  Socorro  lies  in  18°  40'  N.  and  110°  10'  W.  of 
Oreeu^vich  ;  continue  steering  as  wtll  to  the  northward  as  you  can  until  the  22° 
of  latitude,  when  you  may  fxpoctlhe  wind  from  the  north-west,  when  you  will 
put  about  to  the  eastward,  steering  for  the  Tres  Marias,  situated  in  21°  28' N. 
and  106°  29'  W.  Having  made  the  Tres  Marias,  steer  E.  i  N.  E.  20  leagues, 
when  you  will  make  the  Port  of  San  Bhts,  in  latitmU-  21°  30'  and  104°  00'  W. 

As  soon  as  you  pass  the  easternmost  of  the  Tres  Marias,  there  will  appear  the 
mounts  of  St.  Juan,  bearing  E.  i  N.  E.  It  is  readily  known,  being  round,  and 
commands  all  the  heights  in  its  vicinity.  After  steering  a  few  leagues  E.  N.  E. 
you  will  perceive  a  white  island  resembling  a  vts'sel  under  sail  ahead :  you  will 
shortly  make  out  another  also  resembli;ig  a  vessel  under  sail ;  this  last  one  lies 
in  the  mouth  of  the  Port. 

From  the  first  white  Island  you  perceive  (which  you  always  keep  on  your 
larboard)  there  is  6  leagues  from  thence  to  San  Bias  ;  while  steering  fur  the  se- 
cond island,  you  see  the  Mount  of  St.  John's,  on  passing  which  to  the  south- 
"ward  a  short  distance,  and  sounding  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  you  drop  anchor 
two  or  three  cables  length  to  the  eastward  of  it,  your  anchors  let  go  east  and 
west;  there  is  anchorage 20  leagues  from  the  Port  of  San  Bias. 

COQUIMBO  or  LA  SERENA At  sixty-five  leagues  to  the  northward  of 

Valparaiso,  is  the  Port  of  Coquimbo  La  Serena;  the  coast  between  is  generally 
high,  bold,  precipitous,  and  destitute  of  harbours. 

The  anchorage,  in  the  southern  part  of  the  Bay  of  Coquimbo,  is  sheltered  by 
the  Pajaros  or  Bird  Islands,  three  or  four  islets,  between  which  and  the  point 
of  the  main  is  a  channel  for  ships.  Another  group,  at  the  distance  of  '-ight 
leagues  to  the  N.  W.of  Coquimbo,  bears  the  same  name;  to  the  northwarU  of 
the  latter  is  the  Isia  de  Choros,  as  represented  on  the  Chart. 

The  Great  Desert  and  Province  of  Atacama  forms  the  boundary  of  Chili  and 
Peru. 

The  River  Loa,  a  small  stream,  is  the  largest  river  of  this  coast,  and  the 
southern  boundary  of  the  province  of  Arica,  which  is  here  divided  from  Ata- 
cama. 

COASTS  of  PERU.— The  first  port  of  the  State  of  Peru,  which  can  be  con- 
sidered as  of  any  consequence,  is  Arica,  formerly  noted  as  the  loading  port  of 
the  silver  from  the  mines  of  Potosi.  It  is  noticed  in  the  history  of  Sir  Francis 
Drake,  and  of  the  bucaniers,  and  was,  in  those  days,  several  times  pillaged. 
The  produce  of  the  mines  having  latterly  been  sent  over  land,  to  Buenos  Ayres, 
Arica  has  fallen  into  insignificance,  and  its  commerce  seems  limited  solely  ta  c 
little  coasting  trade  with  Lima,  &ic. 

It  is  almost  superfluous  to  inform  the  mariner,  that  the  vast  mountains,  called 
the  Andes,  with  their  Cordilleras,  or  branches,  extend  through  the  western  part 
of  Peru,  from  north  to  south,  and  some  of  their  highest  summits  are  within  this 
region,  more  especially  in  the  north.  These  summits  are  lost  in  the  clouds,  and 
capped  with  snows  which  may  be  of  equal  duration  with  the  earth. 

The  whole  coast  of  Peru  is  destitute  of  harbours,  not  having  a  single  one 
which  can  properly  be  so  called ;  the  anchorage  in  all  the  bays  or  roads  being 
more  or  less  open,  and  therefore  insecure.  The  first  place  of  any  consequence 
to  the  nofthward  of  Arica  is  Pisco,  which  is  sheltered,  in  some  measure,  by  se- 
vend  illetft  but  its  town  is  small,  and  half  a  mile  fron*  the  beach. 


BLUNrS    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


639 


iry  of  Chili  and 


LOBOS  ISLAND. 

Lobos  Island  lies  in  the  latitude  of  14^  18'  S.  and  longitude  of  76<^  &'  W.  and 
is  about  2i  leagues  distant  Trom  the  main  land. 

It  is  high  and  steep  upon  all  sides,  except  the  S.  E.  which  descends  gradually 
into  a  low  plain,  on  which  is  a  salt  pond  of  no  great  extent. 

This  island  is  entirely  barren,  without  a  spear  of  vegetation  or  fresh  water, 
its  only  excellency  therefore,  is  its  anchorage  and  a  few  hair  seal.  T!\ere  is  a 
good  passage  quite  around  the  island,  and  no  dangers  hut  what  show  themselves. 

The  best  anchorage  is  under  the  Ice  of  a  low  stony  beach,  which  puts  off  from 
the  N.  E.  side  of  the  island,  in  7  fathoms  water,  where  is  fine  holding  ground, 
clear  bottom  and  smooth  water. 

CALLAO  and  LIMA— The  capital  of  Peru  is  the  city  of  Lima,  of  which 
the  sea-port  is  Callao. 

CALLAO,  ihc  port  of  Lima,  stands  on  a  low  narrow  neck  of  land,  near  the 
ruins  of  the  old  town,  and  almost  level  with  the  sea.  This  isthmus,  for  it  can 
be  termed  nothing  else,  with  the  island  of  San  Lorenzo,  forms  the  anchorage, 
which  is  one  of  the  most  spacious  and  beautiful  in  the  world ;  and,  as  the  wind 
is  never  tempestuous  or  strong,  except  When  indicative  of  an  earthquake,  ships 
may  anchor  or  moor  in  the  greatest  safety,  with  a  rope  or  hawser  of  a  compa- 
ratively smal)  size.  The  jetty,  or  landing-place,  is  formed  by  a  ship  which  was 
run  on  shore  for  that  purpose,  so  that  the  surf  being  completely  broken,  boats 
are  at  all  times  enabled  to  land,  and  lie  there  with  as  much  security  as  if  in  a  still 
pond.  To  this  place  there  are  several  streams  of  water  brought  for  the  conve- 
niency  of  ships,  which  can  always  be  supplied  with  the  greatest  expedition. 

The  cuBtorn-house  is  situated  at  a  little  distance  from  the  jetty  ;  it  is  an  exten- 
sive establishment,  and  here,  as  at  Valparaiso,  all  departments  are  ready  to  sa- 
crifice the  public  good,  or  rather  the  good  of  the  state,  to  gratify  their  own  insa- 
tiable thirst  for  riches.  It  has  a  governor  and  a  numerous  train  of  satellites. 
The  trade  carried  on  here  is  considerable  from  the  different  countries  of  Mexico, 
Quito,  and  Chili;  whence  they  are  supplied  with  pitch,  tar,  and  sulphur;  with 
wines,  spirits,  wood,  coco,  and  Guayaquil  hats.  Corn,  hemp,  cordage,  hides, 
kc.  k.c.  are  generally  imported  from  Chili ;  and  from  the  island  of  Chiloe  the 
woollen  manufactures  of  the  natives,  such  as  poncho,  and  rugs ;  some  of  the 
latter  are  curious  from  the  strange  figures  represented,  and  are  generally  used  as 
carpets  for  'he  ladies  to  rest  their  feet  on. 

TRUXILLO. — The  most  important  city  of  the  coast,  next  to  Lima,  is 
Truxillo,  distant  eighty-seven  leagues  to  the  N.  N.  "'V.  (true)  and  containing  a 
population  of  about  twelve  thousand.  The  chief  products  and  articles  of  com- 
merce here  are  wheat  and  sugar.  The  town  stauds  on  the  north  side  of  the  river 
Mochc,  at  about  half  a  league  from  sea  ;  but  the  channel  of  its  maritime  com- 
merce is  the  little  port  Guaachaco,  nearly  three  leagues  to  the  northward,  and 
which  is  known  by  being  under  the  highest  peaks  of  the  ridge  of  mountains  that 
lines  the  coast. 


LOBOS  DE  MER, 

Or  Weather  Lobos,  are  situated  m  the  latitude  6^  58'  south  and  longitude  80® 
M'  west,  and  are  aboui  ten  leag-ies  from  the  main  land  on  the  coast  of  Peru. 
They  are  not  high,  but  very  rugged,  and  may  be  seen  five  or  six  leagues. 

Those  two  islands  form  an  ej.cellent  harbour,  with  a  smooth  bottom,  and  good 
holding  ground. 

A  small  vessel  may  come  in  through  the  weather  passage,  to  save  the  trouble 
of  beating  up,  but  the  passage  is  so  narrow,  we  would  not  recommend  it  as  pro- 
dent,  although  there  is  sufficient  depths  of  water  for  any  ship. 

The  water  here  is  smooth,  and  a  ship  might  be  hove  out  to  the  rock>  with  all 
safety. 


640 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


geal ;  but,  like 


There  are  plenty  of  small  ftsh  about  the  ahores,  and  many 
most  other  islands  on  this  coast,  these  are  cursed  with  sterility. 

Beating  up  to  anchor,  observe  and  keep  near  the  west  shore,  and  not  stretch 
BO  far  over  to  the  eastward  as  to  shut  the  passage  until  pretty  well  up,  (when 
you  may  reach  across  from  shore  to  shore,)  by  which  means  yon  avoid  a  sunken 
rock  that  lies  midway,  with  9  feet  wafer  upon  it,  and  is  about  the  size  of  a  ship's 
hull. 

From  16  to  18  fathoms  is  the  common  depth  to  anchor  in. 


LOBOS  DE  TIERRE, 

Or  Lee  Lobos,  is  situated  in  latitude  G°  a.i'  S.  and  longitude  80^  46'  W.  on 
the  coast  of  Peru,  is  three  leagues  in  length,  and  about  five  leagues  from  the 
main  land. 

In  Shelter  Bay  is  good  anchorage  in  from  16  to  19  fathoms  water,  over  a  clear 
bottom ;  the  best  anchorage,  however,  is  to  bring  said  rock  tu  bear  S.  S.  W. 
where  is  l4  fathoms ;  farther  in  shore  the  bottom  is  rocky. 

Sea  Lion  Harbour  has  very  rocky  bottom,  otherwise  would  be  the  safest  place 
to  anchor  about  the  island. 

Weather  Bay  is  dangerous,  having  many  sunken  rocks,  and  the  whole  surge  of 
the  ocean  heaving  into  it. 

On  the  east  side  of  the  island  is  a  iine  bay,  where  there  is  good  anchorage,  in 
from  five  to  ten  fathoms,  over  a  clear  bottom  and  smooth  water. 

This  island  presents  a  most  barren  prospect,  and  is  without  fresh  water  or  ve- 
getation, and,  except  anchorage  and  seal,  is  of  no  farther  consequence.  Excel- 
lent fish  may  be  caught  with  hook  and  line  near  the  shore- 
Coming  in  to  windward  of  the  island,  it  will  be  prudent  to  give  it  a  birth,  as 
there  are  many  sunken  rocks  lying  a  considerable  distance  off. 


SECHURA  BAY. 

Sechura  Bay,  situated  in  latitude  5<^  40'  south,  on  the  coast  of  Peru,  is  very 
spacious.  After  doubling  round  Gape  Noir,  you  soon  fall  into  shoal  water,  which 
will  decrease  as  you  haul  into  the  bay,  from  18  to  S  fathoms,  sandy  bottom. 
Keeping  well  to  windward  you  will  have  more  regular  soundings,  but  the  bottom 
every  where  appears  to  be  uneven,  particularly  so  abreast  the  town  of  Se- 
chura, where  are  many  sand  spits  and  shoals,  with  a  swell  setting  in  from  sea- 
board, whereas  in  the  weather  part  of  the  bay  the  water  is  perfectly  smooth,  and 
if  a  ship  should  ground,  she  would  receive  no  damage,  and  could  easily  be  got 
off  agam. 

At  the  head  of  the  bay  are  very  extensive  salt  ponds,  which  produce  abundance 
of  salt  of  a  superior  quality,  and  which  the  inhabitants  seem  to  set  little  or  no 
store  by. 

The  land  in  sight  wears  a  most  barren  aspect,  but  back  in  the  country  are 

Elantations  which  are  very  productive.    Pumpkins  and  melons,  eggs,  &lc.  may 
e  obtained  from  the  natives,  by  paying  a  high  price. 
The  town  of  Sechura  appears  to  be  large,  and  is  situated  on  a  river.    The 
inhabitants,  who  are  all  Indians,  are  very  poor,  and  subsist  almost  entirely  by 
filing,  and  appear  to  be  industrious,  and  very  honest  people. 

GUAYAQUIL.— The  port  of  Guayaquil  is  the  finest  on  all  the  western  eoast 
of  the  southern  continent.  The  city  of  Guayaquil,  St.  Jago,  is  handsome,  and 
tiie  houses,  though  low,  have  arcades,  which  protect  pedestrians  from  the  sun 
and  rain.  The  population  is  estimated  at  twenty  thousand.  Cocao  or  choco- 
lUte  is  the  staple  commodity ;  and  good  coffee,  also,  is  produced  here. 

The  climate  of  Guayaquil,  (now  included  in  the  Republic  of  Columbia)  is  hu- 
mid and  unhealthy.    In  the  vicinity  of  the  city  is  a  marsh,  which,  at  tiroes,  in- 


BI.UNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


641 


fectsthe  city  with  pefltilential  vapours.  Tiie  streets  or  the  town  are  straight, 
and  sufficiently  wide,  but,  having  no  declivity,  the  rain-water  remains,  and  orca- 
sions  disorders,  while  the  pools  of  water  arc  made  receptacles  of  filth.  The 
water  for  drink  is  unwholesome,  the  river  beinp;  tainted  with  streams  from  the 
marshes  and  flith  of  the  town.  A  threat  advuntage  of  Guayaquil,  is  its  advan- 
tageous position  for  ship-building,  having  abundance  of  woods  in  the  vicinity,  and 
provisions  being  very  cheap. 

On  the  eastern  coast,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Gulf  of  Guayaquil,  is  tlie  River  Tum- 
6ez,  which  has  a  bar  across  the  entrance,  that  renders  its  access  dilficult ;  water 
of  good  quality  may  be  had  here.  The  town  of  Tumhez,  at  a  small  distance 
from  the  mouth  of  the  river,  is  of  inconsiderable  extent,  although  of  some  ce- 
lebrity in  the  history  of  Peru,  from  its  having  been  one  of  the  last  towns  subject' 
cd  by  the  Incas,  and  the  place  where  Pizarro  and  his  companions  landed  on 
their  first  expedition  into  Peru. 


e  it  a  birth,  as 


at  tiroes,  m- 


Tracks  from  the    Corvetts  of  H.  C.  M.  Ships,  the  Descuhierta,  and 

AtrErido. 

Track  of  the  Spanish  Corvette  Atrerido,  from  Payta  to  Guayaquil.* 

In  the  port  of  Payta  easterly  winds  prevail  through  the  night,  when  vessels 
generally  embrace  the  opportunity  of  sailing.     On  leaving  Payta  steer  about  eight 
leagues  to  the  westward,  in  order  to  clear  the  islands  called  Negritos,  which 
layoflFP<  ntde  Parina;  afterwards  stand  to  Ihe  northward,  steer  seven  leagues, 
when  you  will  find  yourself  nearly  abreast  of  Cape  Blanco,  in  latitude  4°  19'  south, 
and  longitude  81°  6'  west,   with  N.  E.  variation.     When  yeu  are  two  leagues 
north-west  of  Cape  Blauco,  steer  a  true  N.  E.  course  which  will  keep  you  at 
the  same  distance  from  the  coast,  and  make  the  anchorage  ground  off  Point 
Arena,  in  order  to  make  the  channel  for  Guayaquil,  by  keeping  the  same  course 
and  distance  from  the  coast  until  you  run  twenty-eight  leagues ;  you  will  then 
perceive  the  island  of  Santa  Clara,  distant  about  four  leagues.    This  island  you 
will  keep  on  your  larboard  side  in  taking  the  channel  about  one  and  a  half  league. 
From  Cape  Blanco  to  the  channel  of  Guayaquil  river,  there  are  several  points 
of  land,  but  the  one  highest  up  is  point  Malpelo,  from  which  the  coast  is  cover- 
ed with  mangrove  trees.    The  best  method  to  take  the  channel  of  this  river  is 
to  have  Point  Malpelo  bearing  S.  E.  or  E.  S.  E.  distant  about  three  leagues; 
from  whence  steer  N.  E.  5°  N.    If  the  tide  is  flowing,  stand  directly  for  point 
Arena,  but  if  ebbing,  and  finding  yourself  near  the  south  Clara,  you  must  then 
steer  N.  E.  as  the  tide  runs  strong  here. 

At  the  Island  of  Santa  Clara  the  tide  begins  to  run  pretty  strong,  and  you 
ought  to  advert  that  at  change  and  full  moon  it  begins  to  flood  at  10  A.  M.  and 
and  when  full  at  4  P.  M.    This  island  is  situated  in  hit.  3'^  14'  south. 

lam  of  opinion,  all  vessels  bound  for  the  port  of  Guyaquil,  that  have  not  an 
experienced  pilot  on  board,  should  make  Point  Malpelo  early  in  the  morning,  on 
purpose  to  see  the  island  of  Santa  Clara  distinctly,  or  should  you  observe  it  be- 
fore dark,  steer  right  for  it  until  you  have  it  bearing  N.  W.  one-quarter  league, 
and  steer  up  the  channel  as  already  directed.  From  point  Malpelo  the  channel 
soundings  are  all  mud,  and  when  your  soundings  change  to  gravel,  you  are  near 
the  flats,  attheraouth  of  the  river  on  the  starboard  side  called  Payana. 

Should  you  strike  these  soundings,  you  must  then  steer  N.  N.  E.  until  you 
find  mud,  afterwards  steer  N.  E.  having  due  care  to  the  tides,  and  keep  your 
lead  constantly  going  until  you  make  the  harbour  in  Puna  Island,  where  you 
will  find  a  pilot. 

*  Ga&yaquil,  situated  on  the  river  and  near  the  bay  of  that  name,  is  one  of  the  most  in- 
tereatinx,  largest,  and  finest  ports  in  all  the  western  coast  of  the  southern  continent.  It  isa 
place  of  great  resort  for  the  American  and  English  whalers,  and  commands  a  richer  country 
than  either  of  the  principal  ports  of  Coquimbo,  Valparaiso,  and  Conception  in  Chili ;  Arica 
ud  Callao  in  Peru ;  or  of  Tehuantepee,  Acapuico,  and  St.  Bias  in  Mexico. 


542 


BLUNT'3   AMERICAN   COOST  PILOT. 


When  steering  from  the  Island  of  Santa  Clara  for  Point  Arcno,  take  care  not 
tohnistake  the  Hill  of  Saliraas  for  Point  Arena. 

There  is  a  rise  and  fall  of  tides  during  the  moon,  of  11  feet  between  the  Island 
of  Santa  Clara  and  the  Point  of  Puna. 

SANTA  ELENA.— The  little  bay  or  oort  of  this  name,  on  the  coast  to  the 
west  of  Guayaquil,  is  distinguished  by  a  high  point  of  land,  that  appears  exactly 
Jike  an  island,  until  within  a  short  distance  from  the  shore. 


r. 


r#- 


GALLEPAGOS  ISLANDS. 

H'^od's  island,  the  south-easternmost  of  this  group,  lies  between  latitude  P 
16'  and  1°  32'  S.  and  longitude  89°  39'  and  89°  5 1'  W.  The  only  bay  in  this 
island  is  on  the  N.  part,  and  is  called  Com.  Rodger's  Bay.  A  small  island, 
which  lies  off,  forms  a  secure  bay,  where  vessela  can  lie  at  anchor  in  12  fathoms 
water,  clear  white  sandy  bottom.  Here  wood  is  to  be  obtained,  and  land  tor- 
toises in  great  numbers.  Off  the  N.  W.  part  of  this  island,  about  2i  miles  frora 
the  shore,  is  a  reef  of  some  extent.  This  is  tlie  only  danger  I  could  discover, 
and  breaks  with  much  riolence.* 

Charles'  Island  lies  W.  from  Hood's  Island,  about  35  miles ;  the  harbour  Is 
on  the  N.  W.  side,  and  is  formed  by  a  prqjticting  point,  off  which  lies  a  remark- 
able high  black  ragged  rock,  cilled  Rock  Dismal.  Shipping  lie  in  12  fathoms 
beyond  the  small  reef  which  shelters  the  landing  ;  the  bottom  is  sandy,  but  ves- 
sels have  had  their  cables  cut  by  f  cattering  rocks.  The  landing  here  is  very 
good.  This  is  called  Essex  Biy.  On  the  west  part  of  the  island,  about  six 
miles  from  Essex  Bay,  is  a  dark  sandy  beach,  called  the  Black  Beach  ;  from  this 
beach  is  a  pathway,  much  trodden,  which  leads  directly  to  the  springs,  which 
are  about  three  miles  from  the  shore.  The  road  here  is  the  best  on  the  island; 
though  in  many  places  steep  and  difficult. 

To  the  eastward  of  this  island,  are  several  islands,  the  largest  of  which  is 
Gardiner's  Island,  in  lat.  1°  2G'  S.  and  long.  90"^  18'  W.  Three  miles  east  from 
Gardiner's  Island  lies  a  reef,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  at  low  water. 

'.ord  Chatham's  island  lies  nearly  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W.  the  east  part  of  this 
island  is  Hobb's  Bay,  and  lies  in  lat.  0^  47'  S.  long.  89<^  9'  W.  A  reef  of  rocks  ex- 
tends from  the  south  point  of  this  bay  round  towards  the  N.  W.  about  ten  miles, 
lying  from  one  to  three  miles  from  the  shore.  Wreck  Bay  is  the  W.  part  of  the 
island,  and  lies  in  lat.  0°  55'  S.  long.  89°  44'  W.  A  small  bank  lies  off  the  mouth 
of  this  bay,  on  which  are  three  fathoms ;  inside  of  which  are  seven  fathoms. 
The  largest  bay  in  this  island  is  called  Stephen's  Bay,  and  lies  on  the  N.  W. 
side  of  the  island.  The  surest  mark  for  finding  this  bay  is  Hicker  Rock,  which 
lies  off  the  mouth.  This  rock  is  very  high,  flat  on  the  top,  and  from  some  points 
bears  strongly  the  appearance  of  a  castle.  On  the  western  side  the  rock  is  split 
from  the  summit  to  the  base  ;  and  from  its  slender  appearance  seems  as  if  ready 
to  tumble  down  at  every  breeze.  The  bay  is  capacious  and  well  sheltered  from 
the  prevailing  winds;  there  is  good  landing  on  several  small  white  sandy  beaches ; 
the  northernmost  point  of  this  island  lies  in  lat.  0°  4t'  S. 

Barrington  Island  lies  west  from  Chatham  Island,  distant  about  20  miles  from 
Wreck  Bay;  is  about  15  miles  long,  and  extends  in  the  same  direction  as  Cha- 
tham Island. 

Albemarle  Island  is  the  largest  of  these  islaeds,  and  lies  N.  and  S.  about  70 
miles.  Pert  Rendezvous,  the  only  harbour  known  in  I  his  island,  is  situated  in- 
side of  Narborough  Island;  the  entrance  to  which  is  off  the  N.  E.  point  of  Nar- 
borough,  either  through  Bank's  B:>y  or  Decatur's  Sound.  In  this  port  you  an- 
chor in  from  seven  to  ten  fathoms.  From  the  N.  point  of  the  island,  a  reef  ex- 
tends off  nearly  three  milos ;  and  from  Cape  Rose  and  Point  Essex  tlic  (two 
southernmost  points,)  the  reefs  extend  aliove  a  mile.  Off  the  S.  E.  part  of  the 
island,  (Cape  VVoodford)  are  several  smiill  islands,  the  southernmost  lies  in  lat, 
lO  3'  S.  bearing  from  Cape  Rose  E.  by  S.  distant  ten  miles. 

*  Porter's  Journal. 


BLUNT'3    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


645 


Narborough  Island  is  situated  between  the  north  and  south  head  of  Albe- 
marle, and  separates  Banks  and  Elizabeth  Buys;  a  reef  extends  round  the  south 
Kart  of  the  island,  which  forms  the  north  shore  of  Elizabeth  Bay.  Betweea 
farborou{;h  and  Albemarle  is  Decatur's  Sound,  the  length  of  which  is  15  miles, 
and  breadth  3.  The  soundings  obtained  in  niid-chaiinel,  were  80  fathoms, 
coarse  gravel.  There  appear?  no  danger  lying  any  distance  from  the  shore  on 
either  side,  with  tiie  exception  of  the  reef  off  the  S.  E.  point  of  r\  uliorough, 
and  that  does  not  extend  more  than  1  j  mile  from  th»'.  shore.  'V\ih  jjassnge  is 
as  safe  as  any  other  that  is  lial)le  to  sudden  shifts  of  wind  iind  iiipivl  currents. 

James  Island  lies  east  of  Albemarle,  towrirds  the  northernmost  point.  There 
are  two  bays  in  this  island,  Cowan's  and  Adam's ;  Cowan's  Bay  is  on  the  west 
side  of  the  island,  and  lies  from  Cape  Marshal  (the  N.  E.  point  of  Albemarle) 
S.  E.  by  E.  There  is  good  anchorage  in  this  bay  in  from  lO  to  6  fathoms,  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  from  the.bi'ach,  over  soft  sandy  bottom.  Adam's  Bay  is  oa 
the  N.  side  of  the  island ;  near  the  east  end  there  is  good  anchorage  in  13  fa- 
thoms, sandy  bottom,  about  half  a  mile  from  the  shore ;  this  bay  is  about  18 
miles  from  the  former. 

Porter's  Island  lies  to  the  S.  E.  of  James  Island  ;  it  was  discovered  by  Capt. 
PoRTKR  in  the  Essex,  and  surveyed  by  D.  P.  Ada-ms,  who  gave  it  the  above 
name.  On  the  most  careful  examination  he  could  not  discover  either  good  an- 
chorage or  fresh  water.  It  abounds  in  wood  and  land-tortoises,  and  green-turtle 
were  found  in  abundance.  From  this  island,  James,  Albemarle,  Norfolk,  Bar- 
rington,  Grossman's,  Charles,  and  many  others  were  to  be  seen. 

The  S.  W.  landing  is  in  lat.  0^  42'  14"   S.  long.  90^  £7'   9'  W. 
N.  W.     do.  0°  32'  40"  90^  23'  54' 

N.  E.     do.  OO  31'  12''  90°  12'  45' 

Between  James  Island  and  Porter's  Island,  tlic  eastern,  ijst  in  lat.  0°  22'  S.  long- 
90°  18'  W.  the  western  in  lat.  0°  25'  S.  long.  90°  31'  W. 

Abington  Island  lies  N.  E.  from  Point  Albemarle,  is  about  15  miles  long;  good 
anchorage  is  found  in  Hull's  Buy  on  the  south  side  of  the  island.  Binloes 
Island  is  E.  h  S.  from  Hull's  Bay,  distant  27  miles ;  this  island  extends  E.  and 
W.  15  miles;  affords  no  anchorage. 

About  45  miles  enst  of  Binloes  Island  lies  an  island  nearly  the  same  size;  it 
was  seen  by  Lieut.  J.  Downes.U.  S.  N.  in  1813.  The  latitude  from  the  report 
of  several  whalemen  is  0°  21'  N.  Wenam's  Island  lies  in  lat.  1°  21'  N.  is  7  or  tt 
miles  in  circuit,  and  has  two  small  inlets,  one  off  the  S.  E.  the  other  off  the  N. 
W.  points,  but  within  more  than  100  yards  from  the  island.  Its  sides  are  every 
where  inaccessible.    It  affords  no  anchorage. 

N.  W.  byN.  from  Wenam's  Island,  lies  Culpepper's  Island,  distant  24  miles. 
This  island  affords  no  anchorage. 

Redondo  Rock  lies  N.  N.  W.  from  Cape  Berkley,  distant  15  miles;  the  U. 
S.  ship  Essex  was  very  near  being  driven  on  the  reck  by  the  current  in  1313. 

There  are  a  number  of  other  small  ishiuds  or  rocks  wiiicli,  from  the  present 
state  of  knowledge  of  this  navigation,  it  would  be  impossible  to  describe  ;  they 
are  steep  and  inaccessible,  and  danj;,er  U  to  be  apprehended  from  being  sent  on 
them  by  the  currents  which  run  with  great  rapidity. 

A  BAY  in  lat.  40^  3'  S.  The  entrance  of  this  bay  is  spacious,  with  several 
small  islands  in  the  midst,  affording  good  anchorage.  The  land  about  it  is  of 
immense  height.  Near  the  water  the  woods  are  impenetrable,  and  the  tops  of 
the  mountains  covered  with  snow.  A  ship  need  not  let  go  an  anchor,  but  haul 
into  some  of  the  small  inlets,  Avhicli  are  numerous,  and  make  fast  to  the  branches 
of  the  trees ;  the  land  above  sheltering  you  from  even  a  breath  of  wind.  The 
water  in  this  bay  is  of  great  depth. 

The  Isle  Gorg-ona,  on  the  soutii  side  of  the  Gulf  of  Panama,  is  surrounded  by 
little  islets.  The  coast  hereabout  is  distinguished  by  iti»  currents.  The  Bay  of 
Choco  to  the  N.  E.  is  remarkable  for  having  a  communication  by  water  with 
the  Gulf  of  Darien,  which  is  practicable  for  canoes  loaded  with  cocao,  although 
tlie  distance  is  seveuty-flve  leagues. 

PAN.\.MA.— A  particular  plan  of  the  Bay  of  Panama  is  given  on  the  chart. 
Panama  is  still  a  strong  city,  but  was  almost  ruined  by  a  terrible  conflagration 


544 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


in  1784.  Its  present  trade  is  chiefly  with  the  villages  in  the  neighbourhood,  and 
Porto  Velo,  &;c.  The  neighbouring  mountains  produce  excellent  wood,  es- 
pecially the  finest  mahogany  and  cedar,  with  many  balsams.  The  voyage  hence 
to  Guayaquil  is  easy  and  safe. 


Track  from  Sonronate  to  Acapulco,  in  1 6°  55'  N. 

Steer  S.W.  (true)  distance  fifteen  leagues;  when  run,  you  will  find  yourself  in 
lat.  13°  4'  N.  and  long.  90°  3S'  W.  of  Greenwich ;  from  whence  steer  W.  18°  N. 
(true)  distance  one-hundred  and  forty  leagues ;  then  run  W.  20°  N.  fifty-eight 
leagues  ;  when  done,  you  ought  to  be  two  leagues  from  the  coast,  and  abreast 
of  the  Port  of  Acapulco,  which  is  in  lat.  16°  55' N.  and  100°  54'  W.  although 
some  navigators  place  it  17°  N. 

From  this  track  is  seen  that  it  is  too  near  the  coast ;  however,  endeavour  to 
near  to  the  westward,  and  keep  from  twelve  or  fifteen  leagues  from  it,  and  al- 
though you  make  as  far  west  as  94°  18',  it  is  of  little  importance,  and  as  the  coast 
to  the  westward  runs  out  to.  the  northward,  you  will  be  obliged  almost  to  steer  so. 

It  will  be  requisite  you  pay  great  care  in  the  longitude  of  94°  to  96°,  as  it 
blows  very  hard  from  94°  to  98°,  being  in  the  meridian  of  Guantcpeque  and 
the  Island  Ventoza  (or  Stormy  Island.)   This  track  is  during  the  northerly  winds. 

If  during  the  southerly  winds,  keep  about  twenty-five  leagues  from  the  coast, 
until  you  are  in  the  meridian  of  Acapulco,  and  steer  accordingly  for  the  entrance 
of  the  port  about  due  north,  keeping  in  mind  that  the  port  of  Acapulco  is  com- 
pletely land-locked,  and  sheltered  from  every  wind  by  the  high  mountains  which 
surround  it.  It  is  about  three  miles  long,  and  from  one  to  one  and  a  half  wide ; 
the  entrance  is  about  half  a  mile  wide,  and  is  defended  by  an  island,  which  forms 
two  outer  channels  to  the  main  entrance.  The  town  of  Acapulco  is  situated  at 
the  western  extreme  of  the  bay,  on  a  declivity  of  the  hill,  which  is  covered  with 
huge  rocks  and  towering  trees.  On  entering  this  harbour,  some  black  rocks  or 
hilts  are  seen,  and  the  sea  washing  them.  These  rocks  or  hills  extend  about 
five  leagues  from  N.  W.  to  S.  E.  from  the  beach  of  Citala  unto  that  of  Maqua- 
ia,  and  about  nearly  the  middle  of  these  black  hills,  is  the  Port  of  Acapulco. 
The  port  is  easily  known  on  both  sides  of  these  hills ;  the  beach  is  low  and 
sandy,  with  some  palm-trees.  The  hills  are  those  of  the  port,  and  they  run 
north  and  south  of  it. 

To  enter  the  port  of  Acapulco,  it  is  necessary  to  approach  very  near  I  e 
coast,  otherwise  it  will  be  impossible  to  discover  the  harbour:  having  the  higu- 
est  hill  to  bear  north,  the  mouth  of  the  port  will  bear  in  the  same  direction. 
Stand  well  in  as  soon  as  you  see  an  island  which  is  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  entrance, 
which  you  leave  on  the  larboard  side  going  into  port.  This  island  is  a  league 
long,  and  high;  it  is  about  half  a  league  from  the  coast,  and  there  is  a  channel 
between  it  and  the  main,  by  which  the  galleons  generally  enter,  being  clear  of 
rocks,  and  having  plenty  of  water.  The  island  is  called  Grifj  or  Rosqueta;  the 
west  side  of  the  port  has  also  a  small  reef  or  pointed  island,  which  is  also  called 
Grifo,  but  the  entrance  is  loose  and  clear. 

On  the  east  point  of  the  port,  there  is  another  port  on  the  S.  E.  side  of  it, 
called  the  Marques;  this  you  leave  on  the  right  hand  going  into  Acapulco,  and, 
when  abreast  i>f  it,  you  will  descry  the  castle  of  Acapulco,  which  is  nearly  in 
front  of  the  entrance  to  the  port. 

In  case  of  contrary  winds,  or  having  occasion  to  tack,  you  may  do  so  with 
safety  in  the  bay  :  there  is  no  danger  but  what  is  seen. 


Track  from  Acapulco  to  Realeho. 

As  soon  as  you  are  clear  of  the  point  of  the  port  of  Acapulco,  you  should 
keep  as  near  the  castle  as  possible,  in  order  to  embrace  the  sea-breeze,  which 
varies  from  W-  S.  W.  to  N.  W.  nnd  the  land-breeze  by  night  varies  from  north 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


M5 


bbourhood,  and 
Uentwood,  es- 
le  voyage  hence 


/N. 

II  find  yourself  in 
J  steer  W.  180  N. 
qO  n.  fifty-eight 
oast,  and  abreast 
54'  W.  although 

er,  endeavour  to 
from  it,  and  al- 
;,  and  as  the  coast 
iitnost  to  steer  so. 
40  to  96°,  as  it 
Juantepeque  and 
5  northerly  winds. 
Bs  from  the  coast, 
y  for  the  entrance 
Acapulco  is  com- 
i  mountains  which 
I  and  a  half  wide ; 
(land,  which  forms 
ulco  is  situated  at 
ch  is  covered  with 
me  black  rocks  or 
iiills  extend  about 
to  that  of  Maqua- 
Port  of  Acapulco. 
beach  is  low  and 
)rt,  and  they  run 

ch  very  near  1  e 
:  having  the  higu- 
e  same  direction. 
/.  of  the  entrance, 
i  island  is  a  league 
J  there  is  a  channel 
fer,  being  clear  of 
(  or  Rosqueta ;  the 
yhich  is  also  called 

S.E.  side  of  it, 
ito  Acapulco,  and 
Iwhich  is  nearly  in 

may  do  so  with 


to  N»  K.  If  by  any  accident  you  are  driven  from  the  coast  above  live  leagues, 
do  all  in  your  power  to  regain  it,  because,  between  five  and  six  leagues  from  th« 
coast,  you  may  be  certain  of  having  easterly  and  north-east  winds. 

The  coast  is  quite  clear  of  shoals,  and  within  a  mile  of  the  coast  you  have  40 
fathoms  water. 

According  to  the  above  instructions  make  the  best  of  your  way  for  Realeho, 
or  if  bound  for  Guayaquil,  until  you  make  the  Island  of  Cano  or  Golfo  Dulce, 
from  whence  you  will  luff  all  you  can,  wi4»  the  winds  from  the  teconda  qiuui- 
rante  or  S.  E.  winds,  which  commence  about  the  end  of  February,  until  you 
make  Cape  San  Francisco. 


pulco,  you  should 
lea-breeze,  which 
fvaries  from  north 


Track  from  Acapulco  to  San  Bias,  t»  21°  30'  N.— 104°  50'  W. 

Leaving  the  port  of  Acapulco,  with  N.  W.  winds,  which  are  general  along 
this  coast,  (excepting  the  months  of  June,  July,  August,  and  Septeicbeii  at 
which  time  you  have  the  wind  from  south  to  S.  W.)  you  will  steer  with  the 
winds  from  the  third  quadrante  or  S.  W.  wind,  until  you  are  seven  or  eight  de- 
grees west  of  Acapulco,  when  the  winds  prevail  from  N.  E.  and  continue  steering 
N.  N.  W.  until  you  make  23°  N.  from  whence  stand  in  towards  the  shore  al- 
though you  lose  northing  on  this  tack,  the  more  you  reduce  the  longitude,  the 
more  northerly  are  the  winds,  and  approaching  they  are  north-westerly;  if  you 
lose  northing  by  standing  E.  S.  E.  on  your  next  board  to  N.  E.  you  will  regain 
it,  and  on  this  tack  you  ought  to  pass  to  the  northward  of  the  Tres  Marias,  ei- 
ther  inside  or  outside  of  the  Island  of  Isabelas,  until  you  make  the  port  of  San 
Bias. 

N.  B.  In  20^  40'  north  and  south  with  Cape  Corrientes,  there  is  a  shoal  abov* 
water,  and  in  the  parallel  of  18^  and  19°  you  have  also  to  be  on  the  look-out  for 
the  islands  of  Socorro  or  Reviliagegido.  Variation  on  Tres  Marias  6°  SO'  N.  E< 
and  San  Bias  70  15' N.E. 

Fast  sailing  vessels  will  generally  make  a  passage  in  less  time,  by  working 
along  shore,  taking  advantage  of  the  little  variations  in  the  winds,  but  must  not 
be  discouraged  if  they  should  at  times,  lose  ground  even  for  several  days  in  sue* 
cession. 

Lord  Anian^s  description  of  Acafvlco  is  calculated  to  mislead  navigators.    For 
several  weeks  he  cruised  off  another  part  of  the  coast,  which  he  mistook  for  Aca- 
pulco ;  this  he  ascribes  to  the  incorrect  description  given  by  the  bucaniers  or 
Eirates,  who  state  that  Acapulco  is  the  only  part  of  the  coast  in  that  neighbour- 
ood  where  the  highland  extends  down  to  the  sea.     This  his  Lordship  states,  i» 
Mttht  case  ;  but  this,  in  reality,  it  the  case,  and  is  the  best  mark  by  which  it  can 
be  distinguished.     Anaon,  it  appears,  cruised  too  far  from  the  coast  to  see  tlie 
low  land.    "  Under  favourable  circumstances,"  says  an  experienced  Navigator 
well  known  to  the  Author,  "  I  made  the  latitude  of  the  anchorage  in  16°  51'  N. 
and  the  longitude  by  lunar  distances  with  the  stars,  on  each  side  of  the  moon, 
and  confirmed  by  chronometcs  to  be  100°  9'  W.    This  position,  agrees  very 
nearly  with  the  observations  of  the  Spanish  Mathematicians,  and  of  the  celebra- 
ted Captain  Basil  Hall,  of  the  British  Navy.    Arrowsmith,  whose  charts  of  the 
south  coast  of  Mexico  are  very  inaccurate,  places  it  nearly  a  degree  too  far  west, 
and  Humboldt,  who  made  some  observations  at  this  place,  makes  it  too  far  east- 
ward.   Dr.  Mackay,  who  is  most  out  of  the  way,  places  it  in  lat.  17^  10'  N.  and 
long.  lOlO  45'  W. 

Acapulco  and  San  Bias,  although  the  two  principal  Mexican  ports  in  the  Pa- 
cific, are  unnoticed ;  the  former  in  some  of  the  latest  American  globes,  and  th» 
latter  in  some  splendid  Atlasses  lately  published  in  Philadelphia. 

Although  Snn  Bias  and  the  coast  in  its  vicinity,  should  on  no  account  be  visited 
from  the  middle  of  June,  till  the  beginning  of  November,  owing  to  the  violent 
and  changeable  j;;9les  of  wind,  accompanied  by  constant  thunder  and  lightning* 
with  torrents  of  rain,  together  with  fevers  and  unparallejled  numbers  of  mot* 

69 


5W 


BLUNT'^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


qnetto*  and  Band  flies,  from  which  even  the  natkes  are  compelled  to  fly  into  the 
mountainous  country,  yet  a  ahort  distance  to  the  northward,  in  the  gulf  of  Gala- 
fornia,  the  weatller  is  fine,  and  the  navigation  is  pleasant  at  all  seasons  of  the  year, 
wth  the  exception  of  short  but  violent  gales,  which  may  be  expected  about  the 
beginning  of  October. 

QUIBO. — The  island  Quibo,  off  the  coast  Veragua,  to  the  westward  of  the 
Bay  of  Panama,  was  visited  in  1794  by  Captain  Colnett,  who  made  a  survey  of 
its  S.  E.  bay,  called  Ptterto  de  Damas.  "  Quibo,"  says  Captain  Colnett,  "is  the 
most  commodious  place  for  ci  uisers  of  any  I  have  seen  in  these  seas,  as  all  parts 
of  it  furnish  plenty  of  wood  and  water.  A  vessel  may  lie  so  near  the  shore  as 
to  haul  off  its  water;  but  the  time  of  anchoring  mast  be  considered,  as  the  flats 
run  off  a  long  way,  and  it  is  possible  to  be  deceived  in  the  distance.  The  high 
wat;,  by  my  calculation,  is  }•♦  half-past  three  o'clock  at  full  and  change;  the 
flood  comes  from  the  north,  ar  .  returns  the  same  way,  flowing  seven  hours  and 
ebbing  Ave,  and  the  perpendicuiai*  rise  of  the  tide  two  fathonrs. 

"  It  would  not  be  adviseable  for  men  of  war  and  armed  vessels,  acting  upon  the 
offensive  and  defensive,  to  anchor  far  in,  as  the  wind  throughout  the  day  blows 
fresh  from  the  eastward,  and  right  on  shore,  so  that  an  enemy  would  have  a  very- 
great  JidVantage  over  ships  in  such  a  situation.  There  is  good  anchorage  through- 
out the  bay,  at  Ave  or  six  miles  distance  from  sY  re,  in  83  and  35  fathoms,  with 
a  mud  bottom,  and  firm  holding  ground. 

"iThe  Rattler  anchored,  in  the  bay  in  19  fathoms,  with  the  north  point  in  a 
line  with  the  north  point  of  the  Isle  Sebacco,  bore  N.  N.  E.  the  watering-place 
N.  440  W.  and  the  south  point  of  the  Isla  Quibo  S.  32°  E. 

ISLANDS  OFF  VERAGUA.— ^Captain  Colnett  has,  also,  described  the  isles 
to  the  westward  and  southward  o'f  Quibo  :  namely,  Ladrones,*  Montuoso^j  and 
^uicaras.  "The  Ladrones  consist  of  small  barren  rocks.  Monti'oso  rises  to  a 
considerable  height,  and  is  five  or  six  miles  in  circumference :  its  summit  is  co- 
vered with  trees ;  the  greater  part  are  those  which  bear  the  coco-nut,  and  give 
it  a  very  pleasant  appearance,  but  islets  and  breakers  extend  off  its  east  and  west 
ends  to  the  *'istance  of  three  or  four  miles.  The  bottom  is  rocky  on  the  south 
side,  as  is  the  shore  near  the  sea.  There  is  a  beach  of  sand  behind  some  little 
creeks  that  run  in  between  the  rocks,  which  makes  a  safe  landing  for  boats.  The 
Quicaras  consist  of  two  isles ;  the  larger  one  is  about  six  or  seven  miles,  and 
the  lesser  about  two  or  three  miles  in  length ;  they  lie  north  and  south  of  each 
other,  with  but  a  small  space  between,  them,  and  distant  from  the  south  en^i  of 
Quibo  about  twelve  miles.  The  least  of  these  isies  is  entirely  covered  with  co- 
co-trees ;  and  the  larger  one  bears  an  equal  appearance  of  leafy  verdure,  but  ve- 
ry few  of  the  trees  which  produce  it  are  of  the  coco  kind." 

The  most  commanding  look-out  for  Quibo  is  the  top  of  Quii^ara,  which  is 
supposed  to  have  been  mistaken  by  Lord  Anson  for  a  part  of  that  island.  It 
commands  the  whole  coast  and  bay  which  have  been  described. 

VARIATIONS  OP  THE  COMPASS.— These  are  shown  generally  on  the 
Chart.  On  reference  it  will  be  seen  that,  at  South-Shetland,  the  variation  is 
about  24°  E.  near  Cape  Horn,  22°;  about  Cape  St.  Lucia  nearly  the  same;  near 
the  Isle  Madre  de  Dios  it  is  21°;  at  the  N.  E.  end  of  Chiloe  16°;  near  Concep- 
tion Bay,  14°;  offCoquimbo,  13°;  Isles  of  St.  Felix,  lli°;  near  Arica,  11°; 
near  Callao,  10°;  off  Patibilca,  9J°;  off  Truxillo,  9°;  Gulf  of  Guayaquil,  10^; 
near  Cape  St.  Lorenzo,  9°;  off  Point  Guascania,  Ci°;  Bay  of  Panama,  9°;  near  j 
Quibo,  9°  50'  E. 


Misspelt,  Zcdzonei. 


I  Misspelt,  Mcntuosa. 


BLUiNx's    AMERICAN    C0A8T    PILOT. 


517 


CHAP.  XXX. 


COAST  OF  NEWFOUNDLAND. 

# 

lit  waa  the  intention  of  the  Author  to  omit  part  of  the  Coast  of  Newfoundland,  at  %• 
time  ho  commenced  l...j  work,  but  being  requested  by  some  of  his  friends  to  insert  it  entire, 
is  his  reason  for  introducing  it  nearly  at  the  close  of  the  Book.] 


Remarks  made  hetiveen  the  Island  of  Groias  and  Cj\pe  Bonavista* 

*  ■^  ■ 
The  island  Groiaa  lies  2  leagujs  from  tl  e  main,  is  about  5  leases  round.  The 
north  end  of  it  lies  in  the  latitude  of  51°  N.  off  from  which,  at  rJJ  mile  distance, 
are  several  rocks,  high  above  water,  silso  off  from  the  N.  W.  part;  otherwise 
this  island  is  bold-to  all  round.  Between  it  and  the  main  is  from  £0  to  40  fa- 
thoms water. 

The  harbours  of  Great  and  Little  St.  Julien's  and  Grandsway,  lie  within  the 
island  of  St.  Julien,  which  bears  N.  W.  I  N.  distant  8§  miles  from  the  north  end 
of  Groias.     The  S.  W.  end  of  it  is  but  very  little  separated  from  the  ipain,  and  is 
not  to  be  distinguished  as  an  island,  till  you  are  near  it..    There  is  no  passage  at 
the  S.  W.  end  but  for  boats.     To  sail  into  these  harbours,  youonay  keep  close 
to  the  N.  E.  end  of  the  island,  as  you  pass  which  the  harbours  will  appear  open 
to  you.    There  is  no  danger  in  the  way  to  Great  St.  Julien's,  which  is  the  east- 
ernmost harbour,  until  you  are  within  the  entrance,  then  the  starboard  side  is 
shoal  near  J  ov^r ;  when  you  are  past  the  first  stages,  you  may  anchor  from  8  to 
4  fathoms  water:  To  sail  into  Little  St.  Julien's,  you  must,  (to  avoid  a  Btinken 
rock,  which  lies  directly  before  the  mouth  of  the  harbour,)  first  steer  directly 
for  Great  St.  Julien's,  till  you  are  abreast  of  the  entrance  of  Grandsway  :  then 
yon  may  steer  directly  into  Little  St.  Julien's,  and  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms 
water.     Ships  in  both  these  'narbours  commonly  moor  head  and  stern. 
Grandsway  is  not  a  harbour  for  ships ;  but  very  convenient  for  fishing  craft. 
Croque  harbour  lies  4  miles  to  the  southward  of  St.  Julien's  islacd,  and  is 
after  described. 

Four  miles  and  a  half  to  the  southward  of  Groias  lies  Belle  Isle,  Avhich  <s 
above  2U  miles  round  ;  there  is  a  little  harbour  at  the  south  part  of  this  island  fit 
for  fishing  craft,  but  it  is  too  difficult  for  shipping.  There  are  some  other  coves 
about  this  island,  where  shallops  may  shelter  occasionally. 

S.  S.  W.  7  miles  from  Croque  harbour  lies  Carougc  harbour,  -irbich  bears  W. 
\  N.  from  the  south  end  of  the  island  Groias.  Immediately  wit.iin  the  entrance 
of  this  harbour  it  divides  into  two  arms,  one  to  the  N.  W.  the  other  to  the  S.  W. 
Directly  in  the  middle  of  the  S.  W.  arm  is  a  shoal,  on  which  is  only  7  or  8  feet 
water  at  low  water;  you  m'y  pass  on  either  side  of  it,  and  anchor  from  20  to  8 
fathoms  water,  in  good  holdmg  ground  :  There  is  also  good  anchoring  in  the  N. 
W.  arm;  but,  in  general  is  not  so  good  as  in  the  S.  W.  arm« 

S.  S.  W.  3  miles  from  the  south  point  of  Carouge  harbour  lies  Fox  head,  round 

Avhich,  to  the  N.  W.  lies  Conch  harbour,  in  which  is  good  anchorage,  well  up 

to  the  head  of  it,  in  good  holding  ground,  in  11  fathoms  water.    It  Is  open  to 

•the  S.  S.  E. 

About  iU  leagues  to  tho  S.  W.  from  Conch,is  Ililliard's  harbour,  by  the  French 


543 


BLDNT'3  AMERICAN'  COAST  PILOT. 


called  B'jittot;  this  is  but  a  rerj  IndifTerent  place  for  shipping,  but  conrenient 
for  fish'irig  craft. 

Four  miles  and  a  half  further  to  the  S.  S.  W.  is  the  harbour  of  Englee.  This 
harbour  is  situated  on  the  north  side  of  Canada  bay.  To  sail  into  this  place, 
you  must  pass  a  remarkable  low  white  point  on  Englee  island,  whii.h  forms  the 
north  entrance  of  Canada  bay  t  then  keep  near  the  shore,  until  you  are  abreast 
of  the  next  point  which  makes  the  hnrbour ;  then  haul  roimd  to  the  S.  E.  taking 
care  not  to  borrow  too  near  ttie  point,  it  being  shoal  a  cable's  length  off;  and  you 
may  anchor  from  15  to  7  fathoms,  very  good  holding  ground ;  but  this  is  well  up 
in  the  cove,  which  is  too  small  to  lie  in,  unless  moored  head  and  stern.  In 
Bidc*3  arm,  which  runs  up  north  from  Englee,  near  2  leagues,  there  is  no  good 
anchorage,  it  being  very  deep  water :  Within  the  south  end  of  Englee  island 
there  is  a  good  harbour  for  shallops ;  but  there  is  no  passage  even  for  boats, 
from  thence  to  the  place  where  the  ships  lie,  except  at  high  water,  or,  at  least, 
half  tide. 

Canada  bay  lies  up  N.  N.  W.  from  Point  Canada,  (which  is  the  south  point 
that  forms  the  entrance  of  Canada  bay)  upwards  of  4j  leagues.  This  bay  can- 
not be  oi  any  use  for  shipping,  otherwise  than  as  a  place  of  shelter  in  case  of 
necessity.  On  being  caught  near  the  shore  in  a  hard  gale  of  easterly  wind,  ships 
-may  with  the  greatest  safety,  run  up  and  anchor  in  this  bay,  free  from  all  danger. 
In  auch  case,  when  you  are  above  two  small  rocky  isles,  which  lie  near  Bide's 
he:^,  called  the  Cross  islands,  you  will  observe  a  low  white  point,  and  another 
low  black  on#a  little  above  It.  Ofi'  the  latter  a  sunken  rock  lies  about  S  cables* 
length;  therefore  keep  the  middle  of  the  bay,  and  you  will  meet  with  no  danger, 
except  a  rock  above  water,  which  lies  a  mile  below  the  point  of  the  narrows ; 
'  leave  this  rock  on  the  larboard  hand,  keeping  the  middle  of  the  water,  and  you 
will  carry  18  fathoms  through  the  narrowest  part;  soon  after  you  are  above 
which,  the  bay  widens  to  upwards  of  a  mile  across  ;  and  you  may  anchor  in  18 
and  £0  fathoms  water,  good  holding  ground,  and  secure  from  all  winds. 

Three  miles  south  from  Canada  point  is  Canada  head.  It  is  pretty  high,  and 
▼ery  distinguishable,  either  to  the  northward  or  to  the  southward ;  but  when 
you  are  directly  to  the  eastward  pf  it,  it  is  rather  hid  by  the  high  lands,  in  the 
country,  called  the  Clouds.  "  "^"^ 

Upwanis  of  4  miles  to  the  S.  W.  fiom  Canada  head  is  Hooping  harbour,  by 
the  Frenci:  called  S«ipdford.  This  place  has  two  arms,  or  rather  bays,  the  one 
lying  up  the  northward,  and  the  other  to  the  westward.  There  is  very  deep 
water  in  4.he  north  i^rm,  until  you  approach  near  the  head ;  iCis  a  loose  sandy 
bottom,  entirely  open  tp  southerly  winds,  and  not  a  place  of  safety  for  ship- 
ping. In  the  westward  arm  a  ship  may  safely  anchor  in  a  moderate  depth  of 
water. 

About  4  miles  to  the  southward  of  Hooping  harbour  is  Fouchee.  There  is 
no  anchorage  in  this  place  until  you  approach  near  the  head,  where  there  is  a 
cove  on  the  north  side.  The  land  is  extremely  high  on  both  sides,  and  deep 
water  close  to  the  shore.  This  cove  is  about  2  or  3  miles  from  the  entrance,  in 
which  there  is  anchorage  in  1 8  fathoms  water,  but  so  small,  that  a  ship  must 
rooor  head  and  stern.  There  is  another  arm,  which  runs  near  two  miles  above 
this ;  it  is  extremely  narrow,  and  so  deep  water,  that  it  is  never  used  by  ship- 
ping. 

Three  leagues  to  the  S.  W.  from  Fouchee,  is  Great  harbour  deep,  by  the 
French  called  Bay  Orange  :  It  may  be  known  from  any  other  place,  by  the  land 
at  its  entrance  being  much  lower  than  any  land  on  the  north  side  of  White's 
bay,  and  bears  N.  W.  i  N.  from  Partridga  point.  This  is  a  large  bay.  A  little 
within  the  entrance  there  is  a  small  cove  on  eaph  side,  generally  used  by  tho 
fishing  ships,  though  very  dangerous  for  a  ship  to  lie  in :  They  always  moor 
head  and  stern ;  notwithstanding,  if  a  gale  of  wind  happens  to  the  eastward, 
they  are  in  the  greatest  danger.  Near  three  miles  within  tnc  entrance  of  this  bay, 
It  branches  out  in  three  arms.  In  the  north  arm,  which  is  much  the  largest,  there 
is  so  deep  water,  you  will  have  no  anchorage  until  you  approach  near  the  head; 
the  middle  arm  is  the  best  place  for  ships  to  andior,  in  7  fathoms  water,  and  a 
(ood  bottom. 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


649 


ut  conrenlent 


From  Orange  bay,  2  leagues  to  the  S.  W.  is  GraDdfather's  cove,  by  the  French 
called  TAnce  TUnion.  This  is  an  inlet  of  about  2  miles,  directly  open  to  the  S. 
E.  winds ;  it  may  be  known  when  near  the  shore,  by  the  north  point  of  it  appear- 
ing like  an  island,  and  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  h  W.  from  Partridi^e  point.  It  is  but 
an  indifferent  harbour  for  shipping.  Scarcely  2  miles  further,  is  another  inlet, 
called  Little  harbour  deep,  by  the  Frnnch,  la  Vachr.  This  is  also  directly  open  to 
the  S.K.  winds;  off  the  norlirpoint  of  this  inlet,  are  some  rocks,  half  a  mile  from 
the  shore,  whicli  always  show  above  water,  aI)out  which  is  f^ood  fishing  ground  ; 
the  water  is  not  very  d^ep  in  any  partof  this  inlet,  and  when  you  are  halfway 
from  the  entrance  to  the  head,  it  becomes  quite  shoal.  ^ 

About  2  leagues  furth*  r  to  the  S.  W.  is  Little  cat  arm,  which  is  an  inlet  that 
lies  up  west  2  miles.  TLis  inlet  is  about  2  miles  from  Great  cat  arm.  Off  the 
north  head  there  are  some  rocks,  which  show  above  Avater;  to  avoid  which,  in 
sailing  in,  keep  nearest  to  the  south  side  ;  but  you  will  find  no  anchorage  till  you 
approach  near  the  head  of  this  arm,  where  you  will  be  securely  land-locked. 

Upwards  of  3  leagues  to  the  S.  S.  W.  from  Great  cat  arm,  is  Coney  arm  head. 
This  is  the  most  remarkable  land  on  the  west  side  of  White  bay  :  it  bears  W. 
S.  W.  distance  3  leagues  from  Partridge  point.  The  land,  all  the  way,  runs 
nearly  straight,  until  you  come  to  this  head,  which  projects  out  nearly  1i  mile, 
forming  a  deep  bight,  which  is  called  Great  Coney  arm.  There  is  no  kind  of 
shelter  for  shipping  at  this  place.  N.  W.  from  the  head,  is  Little  Coney  arm, 
which  is  a. convenient  little  place  for  fishing  craft,  but  at  the  entrance  it  i^  too 
shalloiw  for  a  ship. 

From  Coney  Head  about  four  miles  further  up  the  bay,  is  a  cove  called  French- 
man's cove,  in  which  a  ship  might  safely  anchor. 

From  Frenchman's  cove,  about  a  league  further  to  the  south,  round  a  low  rag- 
ged point,  is  Jackson's  arm,  in  which  is  pretty  deep  water,  except  in  a  small  cove 
on  the  starboard  hand,  where  a  ship  may  moor  liead  and  stern.  This  place 
affords  the  largest  timber  in  White's  bay. 

From  Jackson's  arm,  four  miles  further  to  the  southward,  is  the  north  end  of 
Sop's  island,  which  Wears  S.  W.  J  W.  distance  about  ten  and  a  half  miles  from 
Partridge  point.  This  island  is  eleven  miles  in  circuit,  by  which,  and  Goat 
Island,  is  formed  a  long  passage,  or  arm,  called  Sop's  arm ;  in  the  north  of  which 
a  ship  may  safely  anchor,  just  within  the  north  end  of  Sop's  Island.  The  best 
passage  into  this  i  r.oi  is  by  the  north  side  of  Su/s  Island.  JThere  is  also  anchor- 
age between  Sop's  Island  and  the  main,  before  you  cornl  the  length  of  Goat 
Island,  but  the  Avater  is  deep;  there  is  a  cove  at  the  north  end  of  this  island  call- 
ed Sop's  cove,  and  two  other  small  coves  opposite  on  the  main,  calU  d  i  lart's 
Coves,  in  all  of  which  a  fishery  is  carried  on,  but  ships  generally  anchor  in  the 
upper  part  of  the  arm,  within  Goat  Island.- 

From  the  north  end  of  Sop's  Island,  to  the  river  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  the 
distance  is  upwards  of  six  leagues.  This  place  is  called  Gold  Cove.  Here  the 
river  branches  out  into  several  small  streams  of  w^ter. 

Near  five  leagues  down  from  the  river  head,  and  nearest  the  S.  E.  side  of  the 
bay,  lies  Granby's  island,  by  some  called  Mid-bay  island.  This  island  affords 
no  cove  nor  shelter  for  boats.  On  the  south-east  part,  about  two  cables'  length 
off,  there  is  a  shoal,  whereon  is  not  above  li  fathoms  water.  Nearly  abreast,  or, 
rather  beiow  this  island,  on  the  south-east  side  of  White  bay,  is  Purwick  cove, 
in  which  shipping  may  safely  anchor,  and  good  conveniencies  for  the  fishery. 
About  five  miles  to  the  N.  E.  of  this  cove,  and  W.  by  S.  i  S.  from  the  north 
end  of  Sop's  Island,  lies  Westward  arm.  This  arm  lies  up  about  S.  E.  four 
miles,  in  which  ships  may  safely  anchor,  in  about  18  fathoms  water:  there  is  a 
cove  on  each  side  of  this  arm,  at  its  entrance :  that  on  the  N.  E.  side,  called 
Bear  cove,  is  much  the  best,  where  small  ships  may  securely  moor,  sheltered 
from  all  winds,  in  12  fathoms  water ;  the  other  cove,  which  is  called  Wild  cove, 
is  but  an  indifferent  place,  being  open  to  the  northwest  winds,  and  a  foul  rocky 
bottom;  the  point  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  Western  arm,  is  called  Hauling  point. 

Two  leagues  to  the  N.  E.  of  Hauling  point,  is  another  arm,  lying  up  about 
S.  E.  by  S.  three  or  four  miles,  called  Middle  arm.  At  the  entrance  of  this  arm 
h  a  rocky  island,  from  which,  quite  home  to  both  shores,  is  a  shoal,  whereon  is 


.550 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


from  1  to  fl,  and  In  some  places  9  fathotna  water.  The  best  pnesage  Into  this  arm 
13  to  keep  the  larboard  shore  on  board  ;  but  this  is  not  proper  for  larpje  shipping. 
Between  this  arrii  and  Hauling  point  lie  the  Pigeon  Islands,  about  which  is  good 
fishing  ground. 

Abe  't  one  and  half  mile  to  the  N.  E.  from  Middle  arm,  is  another,  called 
Southward  arm,  in  which  a  ship  may  safely  anchor  in  17  fathoms  water,  entire- 
ly land-locked  ;  here  she  will  be  nearly  three  miles  within  the  heads,  but  there  is 
good  anchorage  in  any  part  below,  frem  20  to  25  f-ithoras,  before  your  are  near 
so  far  up.  A  little  above  the  inner  point,  on  the  north  side,  is  a  mussel  bank  en- 
tirely across  tlje  arm,  wbich  is  nearly  dry  at  low  water ;  and  above  this  bank  you 
will  again  have  1 1  and  12  fathoms,  und  continues  deep  to  the  riv«r  head.  This  arm 
is  nearly  five  leagues  above  Partridge  point,  and  may  be  known,  when  sailing  up 
the  S.  K.  side  of  the  White  bay,  by  its  being  the  first  inlet,  and  bears  W.  by  S. 
from  Coney  arm  head,  which  lies  on  the  other  side  of  the  bay,  and  which  head 
is  alwiiys  very  conspicuous. 

Near  a  league  from  Southward  arm,  towards  Partridge  point,  is  Lobster  Har- 
bour. This  is  a  'small  round  harbour,  with  a  shoal  narrow  entrance ;  at  low 
water,  at  some  places  in  the  entrance,  there  is  not  above  8  or  0  feet  water,  but 
after  you  are  in,  you  will  have  12  and  13  fathoms  all  over  the  harbour.  Small 
ships  mayente*"  at  proper  times  of  tide. 

It  flows  on  full  and  change  days,  nearest  E.  by  S.  and  W.  by  N.  in  all  places  in 
White  bay.  From  Canada  head  the  current  generidly  sets  up  the  White  bay,  on 
the  N.  W.  sidi5,  and  down  the  bay  on  the  other  side ;  and  between  Partridge 
point  and  capo  John,  it  generally  runs  about  S.  E.  by  E.  It  is  observed  that 
the  flood  or  ebb,  scarce  ever  makes  any  alteration  in  the  course  of  the  current. 

From  Canada  head  to  Flcur  de  Lys,  the  course  is  south  nearly  ten  leagues. 
This  harbour  is  situated  aboi .'  four  miles  to  the  S.  E.  from  Partridge  point,  and 
bears  S.  W.  by  W.  J  W.' distance  about  10  miles  from  the  west  end  of  the 
westernmost  of  the  Ilorse  Islands.  The  entrance  of  this  harbour  is  not  distin- 
guishuble,  until  you  come  pretty  near  the  shore :  but  it  may  be  known  at  a  dis- 
tance by  a  mountain  over  it  appearing  something  like  a  top  of  a  fleur  de  lys,  from 
which  it  takes  its  name.  There  is  no  danger  in  sailing  into  this  harbour,  until 
you  come  within  2  cables'  length  of  the  harbour  island,  which  is  on  the  south 
side,  at  which  distance  there  lies  a  rock,  whereon  there  is  not  above  6  feet  at 
low  water?  it  is  shoal  from  this  rock  home  to  the  island;  to  avoid  which  keep 
the  starboard  or  north  shore  on  board,  and  you  may  come  too  in  any  part  of 
this  harbour  above  the  said  island,  in  4J  and  5  fathoms  water,  Sheltered  from  all 
winds. 

The  two  Horse  islands  are  situated  between  Partridge  point  and  cape  John. 
The  west  end  of  the  Avesternmost  Horse  inland  bears  E.  3  N.  distance  10  or  11 
miles  from  Partridge  point ;  and  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  easternmost  island  beai" 
N.  W.  by  W.  from  cape  John,  distance  near  5  leagues.  These  islands  are  about 
6  leagues  in  circuit,  and  tolerable  high  ;  there  are  3  rocks  above  water,  lying  to 
the  northAvard  of  the  easternmost,  and  on  the  east  side  of  the  said  island  are 
sunken  rocks,  at  some  places  near  a  mile  from  the  shore.  There  is  a  small 
harbour,  fit  for  shallops,  at  the  S.  E.  part  of  this  island. 

Bay  Verte  and  Mynx  lie  to  the  S.  E.  from  Fleur  de  Lys,  are  small  places  not 
fit  for  shipping.  At  Mynx  it  is  impossible  for  more  than  one  ship  to  lie,  which 
is  between  a  small  rock  island  and  the  main,  moored  head  and  stern.  Between 
these  places  is  the  bay  of  Verte  or  Little  bay,  which  runs  up  S.  E.  full  3  leagues; 
and  towards  the  head  there  is  plenty  of  good  timl)er.  Bay  of  Pine,  or  Mynx, 
is  an  inlet  of  about  five  miles,  affords  no  anchorage,  except  at  Mynx,  which  is 
at  the  entrance  as  before-mentioned. 

.  Near  5  leagues  to  S.  E.  from  Fleur  de  Lys,  is  the  harbour  of  Pacquet,  at  half  a 
mile  within  the  entrance.  This  fr^rbour  divides  into  2  arms,  the  one  extending  to 
the  N.  W.  and  the  other  to  the  S.  W.  The  N.  W.  arm  is  a  very  good  place  for 
shipping  to  lie  in  entirely  land-locked  ;  the  S.  W.  arm  is  a  mile  long,  but  narrow, 
yet  is  a  safe  snug  harbour.  This  harbour  is  not  very  distinguishable  until  you 
approach  pretty  near;  it  bears  S.  3  W.  h-om  the  passage  between  the  Horse  isl- 
ands, and  may  be  known  by  the  south  liead,  it  being  a  high  rock  mountain ;  the 


BLUNT's     \MERIOArf    COAST    PILOT. 


65F 


Ik  mountain ; 


north  point  ts  rather  low,  off  which  He  8  rock  Isles;  both  shores  ore  bold-to.- 
Steer  directly  in,  and  anchor  in  the  N.  W.  arm,  in  about  14  fathoms  wator. 

About  two  leagues  from  Pacquet,  to  the  S.  E.  ia  Great  Round  Haibour. 
This  is  a  convenient  little  harbour  for  fishing-ships  ;  there  is  no  danger  in  sailing 
into  it;  both  shores  being  bold-to,  you  may  anchor  within  the  two  inner  points, 
in  4  and  5  fathoms,  entirely  land-locked.  Little  llouov'  Harbour,  which  is  about 
one  and  a  half  mile  round  a  point  to  the  N.  E.  from  ll.i,,  is  not  fit  for  shipping; 
it  is  only  a  cove,  wherein  is  but  two  fathoms,  and  a  ii  jse  sandy  bottom. 

About  four  miles  to  the  S.  W.  from  Cape  John,  is  the  small  harbour  of  La 
Cey.  Tills  place  is  open  to  the  N.  N.  W.  There  is  no  danger  in  sailing  in  ; 
you  may  anchor  in  any  depth  you  please,  from  3  to  3  fathoms  water. 

Cape  John  is  a  lofty  ragged  point  of  land.  It  lies  in  lat.  50°  6'N.  and  may 
be  known  by  the  Bull  Isle,  which  is  a  small,  high,  round  island,  bearing  nearly 
east,  about  four  miles  from  the  pitch  of  the  cape. 

From  Cape  John  to  the  Bay  of  Twilingate,  the  course  is  S.  E.  by  E.  distance 
eleven  or  twelve  leagues.  This  is  but  an  indifferent  place  for  shipping,  it  being 
directly  open  to  the  N.  E.  winds,  Avhich  heave  in  a  very  great  seal  N.  iW. 
about  Amr  miles  from,  the  entrance  of  tiiis  bay,  there  is  a  bank,  on  which,  in  the 
winter,  the  sea  has  been  seen  to  break,  between  which  and  the  shore  there  are 
from  50  to  80  fathoms  water. 

Wire  Cape  Cove,  which  lies  on  the  west  side  of  the  westernrij  st  Twilingate 
Island,  that  makes  Twilingate  Bay,  is  a  place  for  fishing  craft  only. 

From  Capo  John  to  Fogo  Head,  the  course  is  E.  by  S.  i  S.  distance  seven- 
teen or  eighteen  leagues.  Immediately  to  the  eastward  of  this  head  is  Fogo  Har- 
bour. This  is  a  pretty  t,ood  harbour  for  fishing-ships,  &,c.  but  the  entrance  13 
intricate  and  dangerous.  To  sail  into  this  harbour  with  a  westerly  wind,  and 
coming  from  the  westward,  keep  close  on  board  of  Fogo  Head;  it  is  very  bold- 
to,  and  nothing  to  fear  until  you  open  a  narrow  entrance,  scarcely  half  a  cable's 
length  wide.  Steer  directly  in,  keeping  right  in  the  middle,  and  you  will  carry 
from  8  to  4  fathoms  wafer  through.  When  you  are  through  this  passage,  which 
is  commonly  called  the  West  Tickle,  if  you  intend  to  anchor  in  the  westward 
bight,  steer  to  the  S.  E.  t'll  you  bring  t!ie  point  between  the  bights  to  bear  W. 
by  N.  to  avoid  the  harbour  rock,  which  is  a  sunken  rock,  that  scarcely  ever 
shows  but  at  dead  low-water  spring-tides ;  then  you  may  haul  up  to  the  west- 
ward, and  anchor  in  from  6  to  5  fathoms,  good  holding  ground,  and  sheltered 
from  all  winds. 

Coming  fro m^  the  westward,  you  must  not  be  afraid  to  make  bold  with  Fogo 
Head,  otherwise  you  will  miss  the  West  Tickle  :  and  as  there  is  generally  (more 
particularly  with  a  westerly  wind)  a  strong  current  running  to  the  eastward,  ships 
waking  that  mistake  seldom  can  work  up  again.  Coming  from  the  eastward, 
and  bound  into  Fogo,  to  avoid  Dean's  Rock,  (which  is  a  sunken  rock,  in  the 
passage  between  Joe  Batt's  Point  and  Fogo  Harbour)  when  abreast  of  Joe  Batt's 
Point  you  must  steer  AV.  N.  W.  until  a  remarkable  round  hill,  called  Brimstone 
Hill,  appears  in  the  hollow  of  the  harbour.  Then  you  may  steer  directly  for 
the  East  Tickle,  which  may  be  known  by  the  lantern  on  the  top  of  Sim's  Isle, 
which  raskes  the  west  side  of  the  Tickle ;  as  you  approach,  yon  will  discover 
the  entrance.  Give  birth  to  the  point  on  the  starboard  hand,  which  is  that  on 
Sim's  Isle,  and  steer  directly  up  the  harbour,  keeping  nearest  the  south  side,  and 
you  will  carry  from  5  to  3  fathoms  water  through  :  immediately  when  you  are 
round  the  point,  steer  S.  S.  W.  to  avoid  the  harbour  rock,  and  follow  the  above 
directions  for  anchoring.  As  there  are  two  entrances  to  this  harbour,  and  both, 
narrow,  you  mjiy  choose  according  to  the  wind.  The  Middle  Tickle  is  only  fit, 
and  even  intricate  for  shallops,  though  it  appears  the  widest. 

About  seven  miles  to  the  N.  E.  from  the  entrance  of  Fogo  Harbour  lies  Lit- 
tle Fogo  Island;  from  which,  above  two  leagues  distance,  to  the  northward, 
eastward,  and  westward,  lies  a  great  number  of  small  rocks,  above  and  under 
water,  which  makes,  this  part  of  the  coast  exceeding  dangerous,  especially  in 
foggy  weather. 

Between  the  Bay  of  Twilingate  and  Fogo  Head,  nearly  midway,  lies  the  Isle 
of  Bacalean.  To  the  S.  W.  from  this  island,  near  three  miles,  is  the  harbour  of 
Herrinj^  Neck,  which  is  a  fine  harbour^  ."iifficicnt  for  any  ships. 


653 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAif  PILOT. 


[;!* 


From  the  round  head  of  Fogo,  ^vbich  h  the  N.  E.  part  of  the  Island,  to  the 
outermost  Wadham's  Island,  the  course  is  S.  E.  by  E.  distance  fourteen  or  fifteen 
miles.  Tiieif,  is  a  very  good  passage  between  these  islands,  often  used  by  ship- 
ping. This  passage  is  above  a  mile  wide,  and  is  between  the  second  and  third 
island;  that  is,  you  are  to  leave  two  of  the  islands  without,  or  to  the  northward 
of  you.  Those  islands  are  about  five  leagues  in  circuit,  and  lie  nearly  two  leagucD 
from  the  main  land. 

'  From  the  outermost  of  Wadham's  Islands,  that  is  the  N.  E.  isle  to  the  Gull 
Isles  off  Cape  Freels,  the  course  is  S.  E.  distance  ten  leagues.  Gull  Isle  is  a 
small  rock  island,  and  lies  about  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  pitch  of  Cape  Freels, 
which  is  a  low  point  of  land ;  between  thifl  cape  and  Green's  Pond  Island  are 
several  small  islands  and  sunken  rocks  along  shore.  There  is  no  passage  from 
the  cape  towards  Green's  Pond  for  shipping  within  the  Stinking  Isles,  without 
being  very  well  acquainted. 

The  Stinking  Islands  lie  S.  S.  E.  two  leagues  from  Gull  Island,  and  N.  N.  W. 
thirteen  leagues  from  Cape  Bonavista. 

N.  i  E.  from  Cape  Bonavista,  and  N.  27°  E.  about  ten  leagues  from  Cape 
Freels,  lies  Funk  Island.  This  island  lies  in  the  latitude  of  49°  52'  N.  it  is  but 
small  and  low,  not  to  be  seen  above  four  or  five  leagues  in  clear  weather.  There 
are  two  small  isles,  or  rather  rocks,  at  a  small  distance  from  the  N.  W.  part. 
This  island  is  much  frequented  by  sea-birds  of  various  kinds. 

About  W.  N.  W.  distance  seven  leagues  from  Funk  Island,  He  the  dangerous 
rocks,  called  Darel's  Ledge,  upon  which  the  sea  almost  always  breaks. 

Green's  Pond  Harbour  is  situated  on  the  west  side  of  Bonavista  Bay,  and 
bears  from  the  Stinking  Isles  S.  63°  W.  distance  upwards  of  four  leagues.  It 
may  be  known  by  the.  Copper  Islands,  which  lie  to  the  southward  of  the  har- 
bour, and  are  pretty  high,  and  sugar-loaf  topped.  This  harbour  is  formed  by 
several  islands,  that  are  detached  about  half  a  mile  from  the  main  land,  the  larg- 
est of  which  is  called  Pond  Isle,  and  makes  the  north  side  of  the  harbour. 
This  island  is  tolerably  high,  and  near  five  miles  in  circuit.  The  other  islands, 
making  the  south  side,  are  but  small.  This  is  but  a  small  harbour.  Towards 
the  upper  part  two  ships  can  scarcely  lie  abreast.  There  is  no  danger  in  sailing 
into  this  harbour,  until  you  approach  its  entrance,  where  you  must  be  careful  of 
a  shoal ;  it  is  but  of  very  small  extent,  whereon  is  not  above  6  or  7  feet  at  low 
water ;  you  may  pass  on  either  side  of  this  shoal,  but  the  north  side  is  the  widest 
and  best  passage. 

S.  70°  W.  about  four  miles  from  the  Copper  Island  is  Shoe  Cove  Point.  About 
two  miles  to  the  northward  of  this  point  lies  New  Harbour,  in  which  ships  may 
safely  anchor,  though  it  is  but  a  small  harbour.    . 

Indian  Bay  runs  up  west  about  four  leagues  above  this  harbour;  at  the  head 
of  which  there  is  plenty  of  good  timber. 

From  Copper  Island  ^o  the  Gull  Isle  of  Cape  Bonavista,  the  course  is  S.E.  i  S. 
distance  ten  and  a  half  leagues;  and  S.  20°  W.  distance  two  leagues  from  Gull 
Island,  lies  Port  Bonavista.  It  is  a  very  unsafe  place  for  ships  to  ride  in,  being 
directly  open  to  the  winds  between  the  N.  and  VV.  and  a  loose  sandy  bottom. 

Barrow  Harbour  bears  W.  j  N.  eight  leagses  from  Port  Bonavista.  This  is  a 
very  good  harbour. 

From  Port  Bonavista,  W.  i  S.  about  ten  miles,  lies  the  little  harbour  of  Keels, 
which  ia  only  fit  for  fishing-craft. 


Directions  for  navigating  from  Cape  Race  to  Cape  Bonavista,  with  re- 
marks upon  the  Fishing  Banks. 

From  Cape  Race  to  Cape  Ballard,  is  N.  N.  E.  about  3j  or  4  leagues,  between 
which,  about  half  way^  is  Clam  cove,  which  is  only  for  boats :  and  nejir  to  Cape 
Ballard  is  another  cove,  called  Chain  cove,  where  are  several'roeks  lying  before 
it  (but  there  is  no  harbour,  or  bay,  for  ships  to  ride  in)  and  fiish  between  the  two 
capei. 


BLUNT'3  AMERICAN  COAIT  PILOTt 


563 


But  to  the  northward  of  Cape  Ballard  is  another  core  for  boats ;  and  about  4 
tnfles  from  the  cHp«  ia  Freshwater  bay,  near  half  way  between  Cape  Ballard 
and  Renowes,  the  latter  being  the  Bouthernmost  harbour  the  English  have  in 
Newfoundland. 

Prom  Cape  Ballard  to  the  south  point  of  Renowes,  the  course  is  N>  N.  E. 
about  two  leagues.  Renowes  is  but  a  bad  harl)Our,  by  reason  of  sunken  rocks 
going  in,  lying  off  the  fairway,  besides  other  rocks  on  each  side,  but  it  is  a  good 
place  for  fishing. 

Those  who  go  in  there  should  be  very  well  acquainted ;  when  you  are  in, 
where  ships  usually  ride,  you  have  net  ab-u'c  15  feet  water,  and  but  small  drift, 
by  reason  of  shoals  about  you,  and  a  S.  S.  E.  wind  brings  in  a  great  sea,  so  that 
it  is  very  bad  riding,  and  only  used  in  summer  time  :  the  harbour  lies  N.  W. 
about  a 'league  in;  but  you  must  keep  the  south  side  going  in,  for  that  is  the 
clearest. 

Off  the  south  point  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbour  is  an  island,  a  small  dis* 
tance  from  the  shore ;  and  off  the  said  south  point  uf  the  harbour,  S.  £.  by  E. 
about  half  a  league,  is  a  great  rock  high  above  water,  called  Renowes  Rock, 
which  you  may  see  at  least  3  leagues  off  in  fair  weather,  but  the  rock  is  bold  to 
go  on  either  side. 

From  Renowes  point  to  Fermowes  is  li  leagues  N.  E.  by  N.  N.  E.  and  N. 
tending  about,  but  being  a  little  without  Renowes,  the  course  will  be  N.  N.  E. 
till  you  come  open  of  the  harbour  of  Fermowes.  Between  the  said  two  har- 
bours is  a  cove,  called  Bears'  Cove :  a  place  only  for  boats  to  stop  at  if  the  wind 
be  contrary,  but  no  inhabitants. 

Fermowes  is  a  very  good  harbour,  and  bold  going  in,  no  danger  but  the  shore 
itself;  it  lies  in  N.  W.  and  N.  W.  by  W.  Being  past  the  entrance,  there  are 
several  coves  on  each  side  of  the  harbour,  where  ships  may  and  often  do  ride ; 
the  first  cove  on  the  starboard  side  (going  in)  or  north  side,  is  called  Clear's  Cove, 
where  ships  seldom  (but  may)  ride;  tho  next  within  it,  a  little  distance  on  the 
north  side,  is  the  Admiral's  Cove  (where  lives  a  planter;)  in  this  cove  you  lie 
land-locked  from  ail  winds,  and  ride  in  7  or  8  fathoms,  good  ground. 

The  Vice- Admiral's  Cove  (so  called)  is  on  the  south  side,  farther  in,  or  more 
westerly,  and  is  a  very  good  place  to  ride  in  for  many  ships,  good  ground,  and 
above  the  said  cove,  on  the  south  side,  farther  in,  is  another  arm  or  cove,  wherp 
also  you  lie  secure.  You  have  about  20  fathoms  water  in  tlie  entrance  of  the 
harbour;  but  within  you  have  from  14  to  12,  lO,  0,  8,  7,  and  6  fathoms,  as  ypu 
please,  and  the  head  runs  up  at  least  4^  miles. 

From  Fermowes  to  Agua  Fort,  the  course  is  N.  by  E.  about  a  league,  between 
which  are  two  heads,  or  )>oint3  of  land,  about  a  mile  from  each  other,  the  south- 
ernmost, or  next  to  Fermowes,  is  called  Bald  Head,  about  a  mile  from  the 
harbour's  mouth  of  Fermowes  ;  between  which  is  a  pretty  deep  bay,  but  all  full 
of  rocks,  and  no  safety  for  boats  to  cpme  on  shore  at  in  a  storm ;  it  is  but  a  mile 
from  the  harbour,  which  is  safe  for  ships  or  boats,  and  not  above  Z  miles  to  the 
entering  of  Agua  Fort. 

The  next  head  to  the  northward  of  Bald  Head  is  Black  Head,  lying  N.  and  S. 
one  from  the  other,  about  a  mile  asunder ;  and  from  Black  Head  to  the  point  of 
Agua  Fort  harbour,  is  N.  W.  by  N.  one  mile,  which  harbour  is  very  good,  and 
safe  for  ships ;  it  lies  in  W.  N.  W.  There  is  a  great  rock  above  water  going  in 
on  the  south  side,  which  is  bold  too  ;  you  run  up  about  2  miles  within  the  har- 
bour's mouth,  and  ride  on  the  north  side,  and  lie  land-locked,  as  it  were  a  pond, 
like  to  Ferryland  Pool,  but  larger,  where,  with  a  piece  of  timber,  you  may  make 
a  stage  from  your  ship  to  your  stage  on  shore,  being  an  excellent  harbour,  and 
water  deep  enough. 

From  Agtia  Fort  to  Ferryland  Head  (the  south  part  of  the  head)  the  course 
is  east,  about  three  miles.  Crow  Island,  being  about  a  mile  from  Agua^ort, 
iiesE.N.E.  from  the  harbour's  mouth,  and  from  the  S.  E.  end  of  Crow  Island' 
lies  a  shoal  about  a  cable's  length. 

From  the  north  part  of  Ferryland  Head  to  Ferryland,  the  course  is  W.  by  N. 
about  two  miles ;  to  go  into  Ferryland  port  or  harbour,  you  must  sail  betweep 
the  north  part  of  Ferryland  Head  and  Buoy  Island ;  it  is  not  very  broad,  but 

70 


551 


BLUNT  8  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


r  ^■  ' 


I 

t 

1 1 


tber*  H  water  enouRfa,  and  clean  ground ;  betn^  wtthin  the  aaid  Buoy  hknd^  you 
may  run  in  and  anchor  where  you  please,  it  being  of  a  good  handsonae  breadth ; 
or  you  may  go  into  the  Pool,  which  is  a  place  on  the  larboard  fiide  (gnin^-  in) 
with  a  point  of  beacliv  where  you  ride  in  12  feft  water  at  luw  u;it»T,  and  where 
the  Admiral's  ships  generally  ride,  (the  stages  lu'inj?  nt-ar,  several  plnnttrs,  inha- 
bitants, lire  in  this  place.)  From  Buoy  Island,  aluioiit  in  to  the  land  to  the 
westward,  are  small  islands  and  rocks,  which  make  Ffrrylaiu!  harbour  or  port, 
and  divide  it  from  Caplin's  Bay  ;  between  the  said  rocks,  in  some  places,  is  a 
passage  for  boats,  and  the  water  rises  hereabouts  3^,  4,  and  sometimes  5  feet, 
and  sometimes  3  feet,  and  so  it  does  generally  in  all  the  harbours  of  this  land. 

From  Ferryland  Head  to  Cape  Broyle  Head,  is  N.  by  E.  almost  4  miles,  be- 
tween which  are  three  islands,  which  lie  before  Caplin's  Bay ;  there  are  chan- 
nels to  sail  between  them  to  Caplin's  Bay,  that  is,  between  Buoy  Island,  which 
is  thesternmost  and  greatest ;  and  Goose  Island,  wliich  is  the  middlemost,  and 
is  the  second  in  bigness  next  to  Buoy  Island  ;  also  you  may  sail  through  between 
Goose  Island,  which  is  the  middlemost,  and  Stone  Island,  which  is  the  northt^rn- 
most;  but  these  passages  are  large  enough  for  ships  to  sail  or  turn  in  or  out; 
1)01  between  Stone  Islaud  and  the  north  shore  (that  is.  Cape  Broyle)  there  is  no 
passage  for  a  ship,  only  for  boats,  there  being  a  great  rock  between  Stone  Island 
and  the  north  shore. 

Caplin's  Bay  is  large  and  good,  and  runs  in  a  great  -,v:iy  W.  N.  W.  at  least  C 
miles  within  the  said  islands,  where  many  ships  may  ride  in  good  ground,  and 
where  sometimes  the  Newfoundland  ships  meet  that  are  bound  with  convoy  to 
the  Streights,  but  generally  rendezvous  at  the  bay  of  Bulls. 

From  Cape  Broyle  head  (the  north  part  of  it)  which  lies  in  the  bay  or  har- 
bour of  Cape  Broyle,  W.  N.  W.  and  N.  W.  by  W.  about  7i  miles,  and  from  the 
Bouth  point  of  the  entrance  to  the  north  point  or  head,  is  about  2  miles  broad, 
and  lies  N.  by  W.  and  S.  by  E.  one  from  the  other. 

Cape  Broyle  is  the  most  remarkable  land  on  all  the  south  coast  of  Newfound- 
land, for  coming  out  of  the  sea  either  from  the  southward  or  northward,  it 
makes  a  swamp  in  the  middle  and  appears  like  a  saddle.  E.  S.  E.  from  the 
north  point  of  Cape  Broyle,  about  J  or  I  of  a  mile,  lies  a  sunken  rock  called 
Old  Harry,  on  which  is  but  18  feet  water;  the  sea  breaks  upon  it  in  bad  wea- 
ther, but  between  the  shore  and  it,  is  water  enough  of  12  and  13  fathoms,  and 
without  it  is  a  ledge  of  about  the  same  depth,  where  they  used  to  fish,  but  off 
the  ledge  is  deep  water  of  40  or  50  fathoms  and  deeper.  In  very  bad  weather 
the  sea  breaks  home  almost  to  the  shore  from  Old  Harry,  by  reason  of  the  cur- 
Tent  that  sets  strong  generally  to  the  southward. 

From  Cape  Broyle  to  Brigus  by  south  (so  called  to  distinguish  it  from  another 
'Brigu3  in  the  Bay  of  Conception)  is  a  league,  but  from  the  north  head  of  Cape 
Broyle  bay  to  Brigus  is  but  a  little  more  than  a  mile,  and  lies  in  N.  W.  and  N. 
W.  by  W.  Brigus  is  a  place  only  for  small  ships  of  not  above  7  or  8  feet  draught 
of  water  to  ride  in  the  cove,  which  is  not  altogether  safe  neither  ;  it  is  a  place 
for  fishing,  where  live  two  planters  ;  there  is  an  island  so  called,  where  they  build 
their  stages,  and  make  their  fish  upon,  who  come  there  fishing,  but  the  water 
comes  not  quite  round,  unless  in  a  great  storm  or  rage  :  it  is  a  place  of  little  con- 
sequence. 

From  Cape  Broyle  to  Cape  Neddick,  the  course  is  N.  by  E.  northerly,  5 
leagues ;  and  from  Brii^us  point  to  Cape  Neddick,  is  N.  E.  almost  li  mile  be- 
tween which  is  Freshwater  bay,  but  of  no  note.  Cape  Neddick  is  a  high  point, 
■flat  at  top,  and  straight  down  to  the  water. 

From  Cape  Neddick  to  Baline  Head  is  about  i  a  league  N.  E.  by  E.  between 
which  is  Lamanche.  Lamanche  is  only  a  cove  in  the  bay,  where  is  no  safe  ri- 
ding for  any  ship. 

From  Baline  Head  to  Baline  Cove  is  near  |  of  a  mile ;  it  is  a  place  where 
chips  use  to  keep  2  or  8  boats  with  a  stage  for  fishing,  where  one  j)lanter  lives ; 
the  place  is  not  for  ships,  only  small  vessels  may  come  in  to  lade,  and  lie  within 
the  rock  called  the  Whale's  Back,  which  rock  breaks  off  any  sea,  and  there  are  2 
rocks  above  water,  one  on  each  aide  going  in,  and  the  Whale's  Back  in  the  mid- 
4Ia,  but  without  the  said  rocks  that  are  above  water. 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


5oa 


>y  hknd,  you 
orae  breadth ; 
ide  (goin^m) 
w,  and  w litre 
)l:tntt!»,  inha- 
c  land  to  the 
ibour  or  port, 
ne  places,  is  a 
•times  5  feet, 
[)f  this  land. 
ist  4  miles,  be- 
bere  are  cban- 
Island,  which 
iddlemost,  and 
rough  betweea 
s  tiie  north«!rn- 
urn  in  or  out; 
>'le)  there  is  no 
in  Stone  Island 


it  from  another 
1  head  of  Cape 
n  N.  W.  and  N. 
»r  8  feet  draught 
;  it  is  a  place 
vhere  they  build 
but  Ihe  water 
ace  of  little  con- 

E.  northerly,  5 
nost  14  mile  be- 
s  a  high  point, 

by  E.  between 
ere  is  no  safe  ri- 

a  place  where 
le  planter  lives; 
e,  and  lie  within 
,  and  there  are  2 
lack  in  the  mid- 


Against  Baline  Cove  lies  Goose  Island,  about  a  ralle,  or  half  a  league  to  th» 
seaward  of  Baline.     Ooose  Island  is  a  pretty  large  island,  |  or  near  a  mile  lon& 

From  Baline  Head  to  Isle  de  Spear  is  N>  N.  B.  a  mile  within  the  greatest  ox 
the  said  islands,  which  is  the  northernmost.  Sbij^s  every  year  llsh  there  ;  on  this 
island  is  a  stage  on  the  inside,  that  is,  on  the  west  side,  and  good  riding  in  suov- 
mer  season,  the  island  being  pretty  large,  but  the  northernmost  island  is  only  a 
round  hill  fit  for  no  use. 

The  next  to  the  Isle  de  Spear  is  Toad's  Cove,  where  a  planter  Uvea,  a  plac» 
for  boat's  to  fish,  but  not  for  ships  to  ride. 

A  little  without  Toad's  Cove  (or  to  the  eastward)  is  Boxes  Island,  between 
which  and  it  is  no  passage,  but  only  for  boats  to  go  through  at  high  water. 

From  Baline  Head  to  the  Momables  Bay  is  N.  by  E.  about  four  miles, 
and  lies  N.  W.  near  two  miles ;  it  lies  open  to  the  sea,  yet  is  a  good  place  for 
fishing. 

From  Baline  Head  to  the  north  point  of  Momables  Bay  (which  is  the  south 
point  of  Whitless  Bay)  th»!  course  Is  N.  N.  E.  northerly,  four  miles  off,  which 
point  is  a  shoal  of  rocks  that  lie  a  great  way  olT,  so  that  men  must  bo  well  ac- 
quainted to  go  with  ships  between  the  said  point  and  Green  Island,  which  is  a 
small  island  right  ofif  against  the  said  point,  a  little  more  than  a  mile;  for  if  you 
intend  to  come  through  between  them,  then  it  is  best  to  keep  the  island  side, 
which  is  clearest. 

From  the  said  shoal  point,  or  south  point  of  Whitless  Bay,  the  land  on  the 
south  side  of  the  bay  lies  in,  first  part  N.  N.  W.  and  after  more  westerly. 

From  the  south  point  of  Whitless  Bay  to  the  north  point  of  the  said  '»ay  is 
N.  E.  by  N.  about  a  league,  so  that  it  is  a  large  going  into  the  bay,  and  ab;iut  a 
league  within  Gull  Island  to  the  head  of  the  bay,  there  is  turning  in  or  out,  but 
about  half  way  into  the  bay,  on  the  north  side,  (where  the  planters  live  and  the 
Admiral's  stage  is)  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  which  you  must  avoid :  the  most 
part  of  them  may  be  seen  above  water:  yoij  may  lie  but  little  without  the  ou*- 
crmost,  which  appears  dry.  This  is  a  far  better  bay  than  Momables,  by  reasoa 
of  the  Gull  and  Green  Islands  lying  without  before  it;  you  may  sail  between  the 
islands,  or  between  Green  Island  and  the  south  point  of  Bay  Bulls,  yet  ships, 
after  the  beginning  of  September,  will  not  care  to  ride  in  Whitless  Bay,  but 
rather  come  to  Bay  Bulls,  which  is  but  one  and  a  half  league  by  sea  to  it,  and 
not  above  two  and  a  half  miles  over  land. 

From  Cape  Broyle  to  Bay  Bulls  is  N.  N.  E.  half  easterly,  five  leagues  from 
the  south  head  of  Bay  Bulls  to  the  north  head,  called  Bull  Head,  the  course  is 
N.  E.  northerly,  one  and  a  quarter  mile,  or  thereabouts,  between  which  two 
heads  go  in  the  Bay  Bulls,  lying  W.  N.  W.  for  at  least  two  miles,  and  after  that 
N.  W.  for  about  a  mile,  to  the  river  head.  In  this  bay  is. good  riding,  from  20 
fathoms  at  the  first  entrance  between  the  heads,  to  18,  16,  fcc.  after  you  are  shot 
within  Bread  and  Cheese  Point,  which  is  a  point  half  the  bay  in,  on  the  north 
side,  where  there  is  a  cove  in  which  the  Admirals  keep  their  stage.  You  must 
give  this  point  a  little  birth,  for  a  sunken  rock  that  lies  off  that  point  not  half  a 
cable's  length,  else  all  the  bay  is  bold-to,  and  nothing  to  hurt  you  but  what  you 
see.  Being  past  that  point,  run  up  and  anchor  (or  turn  up)  against  the  high  bills 
called  Joan  Clay's  Hill,  (bring  it  N.  E.)  in  13  or  14  fathoms,  which  you  will 
have  there  almost  from  side  to  side;  but  merchantmen  run  farther  in,  and  an- 
chor, some  in  10,  9,  or  8  fathoms,  not  above  a  point  open,  and  others  not  above: 
half  a  poirif.  Men  of  war  ride  not  three  points  open.  Hero,  generally,  the 
fl«et  is  made  up;  that  is,  here  they  nn-bt  peudy  to  sail  (commonly  for  the 
Streights)  by  the  15th  or  20lh  of  September.  It  is  from  side  to  side  against 
Joan  Chiys  Hill,  as  aforesaid,  430  fathoms,  so  that  it  wants  but  10  fathoms  of 
half  in  i:u-!iih  mile  broad. 

Fronfi  Bay  Bulls  to  Petty  Harbour,  the  course  is  N.  E.  by  N.  three  and  a  half 
or  four  leagues,  between  which  is  nothing  remarkable  of  bays  or  coves,  but  a 
steep  dead  shore  only.  About  midway  is  a  place  called  the  Spout,  being  a  hol- 
low place  which  the  sea  runs  iuto,  and  having  a  vent  on  the  top  of  the  land,  neat 
the  water  side,  spouts  up  the  water  in  such  a  manner  that  you  may  see  it  a  great 
way  off,  especially  if  there  be  any  sea,  which  causes  the  greater  violence. 


666 


BLUNT^S    AMBRICAIf   COAST    PtLOT. 


The  entrance  to  Potty  Harbour  Is  a  large  bay,  for  from  the  Bouth  point  to  tbe 
north  point,  is  h  league  distance,  N.  N-  E.  Mnd  S.  S.  W.  and  it  is  a  league  in, 
.Dvhere  the  ship's  ride  that  fish  there,  being  but  a  little  cove.     It  lies  in  W.  N.  W. 

From  the  mirth  point  of  Petty  Harbour  to  Cape  Spear,  the  course  is  N.  E.by  N. 
two  miles,  or  therfiabouts,  and  from  thence  the  land  tends  into  the  N.  W.  to 
Black  Hoad,  and  so  to  the  harbour  of  8t.  John's. 

From  Capo  Spear  to  the  harbour  of  St.  John's  is  N.  W.  by  N.  four  miles;  be- 
twven  whicli  :ire  three  bays ;  the  first  is  from  Cape  Spear  to  Black  Head,  and 
is  called  Caj>e  Bay ;  the  second  is  from  Black  Head  to  Low  Point,  and  is  called 
Deadmau's  Bay,  several  men  and  boats  being  formerly  lost  in  that  bay;  the 
third  is  from  Low  Point  to  St.  John's  harbour,  and  is  called  Fresh-water  Bay. 

The  harbour  of  St.  John's  is  an  excellent  good  harbour,  (though  narrow  in 
the  entrance)  and  the  chief  in  Newfoundland,  for  the  number  of  ships  used  and 
employed  in  fishing,  and  for  smacks ;  as  also  for  the  number  of  inhabitants  here 
dwelling  and  remaining  all  the  year;  ii  is  narrow  going  in,  not  above  ICO  fathoms 
broad  from  the  south  point  to  the  north  point,  but  bold  to  the  very  rocks,  on 
shore  itself,  nnd  you  have  16  or  17  fathoms,  the  deepest  between  the  two  heads; 
it  lies  N._N.  W.  but  it  is  yet  more  narrow  after  the  first  entrance,  by  reason  of 
two  roclis  lying  within,  on  each  side,  but  above  water,  between  which  you  are 
to  sail,  it  being  just  95  fathoms  broad  between  them.  But  being  past  them  you 
may  run  in  bol(ily,  (it  being  then  wider  by  a  great  deal,)  and  can  take  no  hurt 
but  from  the  shore,  only  within  the  aforesaid  rock.  On  the  south  side  of  it,  a 
point  within  Ring-noon  (which  is  a  small  bay)  there  lies  a  sunken  rock  about 
SO  fathoms  off  the  shore,  which  has  not  above  8  feet  water  on  it.  Being  in  the, 
harbour,  you  may  anchor  in  8,  7,  6,  5,  or  4  fathoms,  as  you  please,  and  be  land- 
locked from  all  winds,  for  it  lies  up  W.  S.  W.  You  must  observe  that  you  can- 
not expect  to  sail  in,  unless  the  wind  be  at  S.  W.  or  to  the  southward  of  it,  and 
then  the  wind  casts  in  between  the  two  hills,  till  you  are  quite  within  the  narrow, 
and  there  you  have  room  enough.  But  if  it  be  W.  S.  W.  or  more  westerly,  the 
wind  will  cast  out,  and  you  must  warp  in. 

But  be  sure,  if  unacquainted,  that  you  mistake  not  the  harbour  of  St.  John's 
for  a  place  called  (Qp.iddy  Viddy  or)  Kitty  Vitty,  which  is  within  a  mile  of  it, 
and  shows  an  opening  like  a  good  harbour,  as  St.  John's,  but  is  not  so,  being  a 
place  only  for  boats  to  go  in ;  it  is  narrow  and  dangerous,  even  for  boats,  at  low 
■water;  you  may  know  it  by  a  round  bare  hill  (head  like)  in  the  form  of  a  hay- 
cock, which  is  called  Cuckhold's  head,  and  is  just  at  the  south  part  of  the  en- 
trance of  this  Kitty  Vitty,  and  to  the  northward  of  St.  John's  three  quarters  of 
a  mile,  or  more:  but  besides  this  your  cour'ie  from  Cape  Spear  will  guide  you. 

From  St.  John's  to  Torbay,  the  course  is  between  N.  by  E.  (being  at  a  little 
distance  without  the  harbour)  and  N.  About  two  and  a  half  leagues  between 
St.  John's  and  Torbay,  are  several  points  which  have  names  given  them,  that 
is,  from  St.  John's  to  Cuckhold's  He^d,  going  into  Kitty  Vitty ;  the  next  is  Small 
Point,  which  lies  N.  E.  by  N.  about  two  miles  from  St.  John's;  the  third  is 
Sugar-loaf  Point,  ai.d  lies  N.  by  E.  from  Small  Point,  half  a  league ;  the  fourth 
is  Red  Head,  and  lies  north  from  Sugar-loaf;  about  twox  miles  between  which, 
that  is  Sugar-loaf  and  Red  Head,  is  a  bay  called  Logy  Bay ;  and  the  fifth  point 
is  the  south  point  of  Torbay,  and  lies  N.  by  W.  half  a  point  westerly,  from  Red 
Head,  about  2  miles.  The  point  of  Torbay  is  lower  than  all  the  rest.  From 
the  said  south  point  of  Torbay  to  the  anchoring  pkce  where  ships  usually  ride, 
the  course  is  W.  by  N.  two  miles  and  more,  where  you  anchor  in  14  fathoms 
against  Green  Cove.  But  if  you  are  open  of  the  bay,  the  course  is  W.  S.  W. 
for  the  bay  is  large,  and  at  least  one  league  from  the  south  point  to  the  north 
point,  which  north  point  is  called  Flat  Rock;  so  that  if  you  co  e  from  the  north- 
ward by  Flat  Rock,  (which  is  a  low  black  point,  with  a  flat  rock  lying  off  it,  and 
breaks  on  it)  your  course  then  into  Torbay  is  S.  W.  a  league.  There  live  two 
planters  at  Torbay.  It  is  a  bad  place  for  ships  to  ride  in  with  the  wind  out  nt 
sea,  for  being  open  to  the  ocean  there  falls  in  a  great  sea. 

From  the  north  point  of  Torbay  (called  Flat  Rock)  to  Red  Head  by  N.  the 
course  isN.  by  W.  about  half  a  league;  but  from  Flat  Rock  to  Black  Head  by 
N.  the  course  w  N.  by  W.  i  W.  two  leagues. 


BLUMrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


557 


they  belong  to  in  i'  ne. 
^villd  be  out,  for  with 
safe.     There  is  a  good 


tr6m  Black  Head  to  Cape  St.  Francis  Is  N.  W.  five  miles ;  Cape  St  Francb 
is  a  whitish  point,  and  low  in  comparison  to  the  other  laud,  but  at  sea  the  high 
land  over  it  is  taken  for  the  cape.  Within  the  point  of  the  cape  to  the  south- 
ward of  it  is  a  cove,  called  Shoe  Cove,  where  boats  used  to  come  a  tilting  (using 
the  fisherman's  expression)  that  is  to  split  and  salt  the  fish  they  catch,  when 
blowing  hard  and  in  bad  wtfjther,  cannot  get  to  places 
la  this  cove  you  may  haul  up  a  boat  to  save  her,  if  the 
northerly,  westerly,  and  southerly  winds  you  will  lie 
place  off  it  to  catch  fish. 

About  half  a  league  off,  triangular-ways,  from  Cape  St.  Francis,  lie  sunken 
rocks  ;  the  outermost  lie  E.  N.  E.  from  the  Cape,  about  one  quarter  mile.  There 
are  also  great  rocks  above  water,  like  small  islands,  the  outermost  of  which  lies 
about  three  quarters  of  a  mile  east  from  the  Cape ;  and  the  innermost  not  half  a 
mile  offshore,  between  which  rocks  (or  island)  and  the  sunken  rocks  you  may  go 
(as  has  been  done)  with  boats,  and  find  water  enough  for  any  ship ;  but  mpn  are 
unwilling  to  venture,  there  being  no  advantage  in  the  case.  These  great  rocks 
make  the  aforesaid  Shoe  Cove  the.  better  and  more  safe. 

There  is  also  another  Cove  to  the  northward  of  the  point  of  the  Cape,  for  boats 
when  the  wind  is  off  the  shore,  but  else  not  safe. 

From  Cape  St.  Francis  to  Belle  Isle  is  S.  W.  and  S.  W.  by  S.  five,  or  five  and 
a  half  leagues,  being  a  large  island,  not  above  a  league  from  the  shore,  against 
which  island,  on  the  main,  is  a  cove  called  Portugal  Cove,  where  they  used  to 
catch  and  cure  fish  in  summer  time,  and  lies  to  the  eastward.  Belle  Isle  is  about 
two  leagues  in  length,  and  about. three  miles  broad,  and  the  ships  that  fish  there 
lie  in  a  little  cove  on  the  south  side  of  the  island,  which  will  contain  five  or  sir 
ships,  according  to  the  rate  as  they  lie  in  Bay  Vcrds. 

From  Cape  St.  Frances  to  the  island  of  Bacalieu,  is  N.  by  E.  about  ten  leagues. 
Bacalieu  is  an  island  twe  leagues  long,  and  above  half  a  league  broad,  about  which 
boats  used  to  fish ;  there  arc  no  inhabitants  on  it,  but  abundance  of  fowls  of 
several  sorts,  which  breed  there  in  the  summer  time.  Between  this  island  and 
the  main  is  about  a  league,  where  you  may  sail  through  with  ships,  if  you  please. 
Bay  of  Verd's  Head  and  the  S.  W.  end  of  Bacalieu  lie  E.  by  N.  and  W.  by  S.  one 
from  the  other  about  one  and  a  half  leagues. 

From  Cape  St.  Francis  to  the  bay  of  Verd's  Head,  is  N.  about  eight  an(f  a 
half  leagues  ;  and  from  the  head,  to  the  bay  or  cove  where  ships  ride,  is  about 
three  quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  head ;  the  place  where  ships 
ride  is  not  above  a  cable's  length  from  one  point  to  the  other,  which  lie  N.  and 
S.  one  from  the  other ;  you  lay  your  anchors  in  10  fathoms,  and  your  ships  lie 
in  5  fathoms,  with  a  cable  out ;  your  stem  then  is  not  above  a  half  cable's  length 
from  the  stages.  The  ships  that  ride  there,  are  forced  to  seize  their  cable's  one 
to  another,  and  you  cannot  ride  above  seven  or  eight  ships  at  most ;  it  is  a  bad 
place,  and  hazardous  for  ships  to  ride,  except  in  the  summer  time,  by  reason  of 
the  great  plenty  of  fish,  and  they  being  so  near  them,  make  fishing  ships  desire 
that  place  the  mote,  although  there  are  several  inconveniences  in  it,  as  being  a 
very  bad  place  for  wood  and  water,  fee. 

The  ships  lie  open  to  the  S.  W.  in  the  bay  of  Consumption.  There  is  a  cove 
also  on  the  east  side  of  the  bay  Verd's  head,  about  a  musket  shot  over  from  bay 
Verd's  itself,  called  Black  cove,  where  stage's  are,  and  boats  kej)t  to  catch  fish. 

Bay  Verds  is  easily  to  be  known  by  the  island  Bacalieu,  and  also  by  another 
head  within  Bacalieu,  shooting  out,  called  Split  point,  and  also  Bay  Verds  head 
itself,  which  is  the  westernmost ;  these  thice  heads  show  very  bluff,  and  very  like 
one  asot'ier,  when  you  come  from  the  southward ;  there  is  no  danger  in  going 
into  Bay  Verds  but  what  you  see.     Here  dwell  several  planters. 

From  Bay  Verds  head  to  Split  point,  wliich  is  against  Bacalieu  island,  youjj 
course  is  E.  N.  E.  about  half  a  league. 

From  Bay  Verds  head  to  Flamborough  head,  is  S.  W  by  W.  about  two  leagues. 
Flamborou^h  head  is  a  black  steep  point,  but  no  place  of  shelter  for  a  boat,  but 
when  the  wmd  is  off  the  shore,  neither.is  there  any  safety  between  Bay  Verds  and 
Carbonera  (which  is  about  ten  and  a  half  leagues,  and  lies  S.  W.  by  S.)  only 
two  places  for  boa|p,  the  one  in  the  S.  W.  cove  of  Green  bay,  which  is  but  an  in 


66« 


SLUNT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


different  place,  and  lies  8.W.  about  four  and  a  half  leagues  from  Bay  Verds ;  the 
other  in  Salmon  cove,  which  is  about  three  leagues  to  the  northward  of  Carbonera, 

From  Bay  Verds  head  to  Green  bay  is  S.  W.  about  four  and  a  half  leagues. 
This  bay  is  above  a  league  over,  but  has  nothing  considerable  in  it,  only  the  afore- 
said S.  W.  cove,  and  a  place  in  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  where  the  Indians  come 
every  year  to  dig  ochre,  to  ochre  themselves. 

From  the  south  point  of  Green  bay  to  Black  head  is  S-  W.  a  league ;  and  from 
Black  head  to  Salmon  cove  is  S.  W.  by  W.  four  miles  ;  it  is  a  place  of  shelter  for 
boats,  an  island  lying  in  the  middle;  a  river  in  the  said  cove  runs  up,  in  which 
are  plenty  of  Salmon. 

From  Black  head  to  Carbonera  is  S.  W.  i  S.  between  four  and  five  leagues. 

From  Salmon  cove  to  Carbonera,  the  course  is  S.  W.  about  three  leagues. 
The  south  end  of  Carbonera  island  is  low,  upon  which  is  a  fort  of  20  guns, 
which  the  merchantmen  made  for  their  defence.  The  harbour  of  Carbonera  is 
very  bold  on  both  sides,  so  is  the  island,  between  which  and  the  main  are  rocks, 
which  are  just  under  water.  This  is  a  good  place  for  ships  to  ride  in,  and  for 
catching  and  curing  fish,  having  several  inhabitants,  witli  good  pasturage,  and 
about  100  head  of  cattle,  which  nfTord  good  milk  and  butter  in  the  summer  time. 
There  is  very  good  anchoring,  in  clear  ground,  fair  turning  in  or  out,  being  a 
mile  broad,  and  three  miles  in  the  river,  riding  in  5,  6,  7,  and  8  fathoms,  or 
deeper  water,  if  you  please.  But  to  the  northward  of  this  point  of  Carbonera, 
are  two  coves,  where  planters  live,  and  keep  boats  for  fishing  ;  the  northernmost 
of  these  two  coves  is  Clown  cove,  not  good  for  ships,  but  boats,  being  about  two 
miles  from  Carbonera;  the  other  is  called  Crocket's  cove,  where  live  two  families, 
and  is  but  a  little  to  the  northward  of  the  entrance  of  Carbonera  bay  or  port. 

If  you  are  bound  or  intend  for  Carbonera,  you  may  go  on  which  side  the 
island  you  please,  which  lies  without  the  bay  (or  entrance)  about  a  mile  from  the 
shore  ;  but  if  you  go  to  the  southward  of  the  island,  you  must  keep  the  middle 
between  the  point  of  the  island  and  the  south  point  of  Carbonera,  because  it  is 
foul  off  the  S.  W.  end  of  the  island,  and  off  the  south  point  of  the  main,  there- 
fore your  best  going  in  is  to  the  northward  of  Carbonera  Island,  and  so  is  the 
going  into  Harbour  Grace,  to  the  northward  of  Harbour  Grace  island ;  Carbone- 
ra lies  in  W.  S.  W.  two  and  a  half  or  three  miles,  and  from  Carbonera  to  Har- 
bour Grace  S.  S.  E.  a  league  or  more. 

Carbonera  and  Harbour  Grace  lie  N.  N.  W.  and  S.  S.  E.  one  from  the  other, 
above  a  leagvie  ;  but  Harbour  Grace  lies  from  the  entrance  W.  S.  W.  at  least 
eight  miles,  and  is  a  mile  broad.  But  between  Carbonera  and  Harbour  Grace  is 
Musketa  cove,  where  ships  may  ride,  but  seldom  use  it.  Here  live  two  planters. 
It  is  not  so  convenient  for  fishing  ships  as  other  places,  although  clean  ground, 
water  enough,  and  large. 

You  may  turn  into  llarbour  Grace  all  the  bay  over,  from  side  to  side,  and  come 
off  which  side  you  please  of  the  rock,  called  Salvages,  which  is  almost  in  the 
middle  of  the  cLannel.  But  there  is  another  rock  on  the  north  side,  called  Long 
Harry,  something  without  Salvages,  near  the  north  shore,  where  you  goibetween 
the  main  and  it  with  boats,  but  needless  for  aliips,  although  water  enough.  Both 
the  rocks  are  a  great  height  above  water.  Being  wifhin  or  to  the  westward 
of  the  rock  Sdvages,  you  may  turn  frotn  side  to  side,  by  your  lead,  till  you 
draw  towards  a  mile  of  the  point  of  the  beach  (within  which  the  ships  ride;) 
you  may  then  keep  the  north  shore,  because  there  is  a  bar  or  ledge  shoots  over 
from  the  south  side,  almost  to  the  north  HJiorc. 

'J'  )  know  when  you  are  near  the  said  liar,  or  ledge,  observe  this  mark  :  you 
will  see  two  white  rocks  on  the  land,  by  the  water  side,  in  a  bank  on  the  north 
si''^ ;  which  shows  whiter  than  any  place  el»e,  and  is  about  a  mile  below,  or  to 
the  eastward  of  the  beach,  which  is  good  to  be  known,  being  a  low  point,  notiiing 
btit  beach  for  some  distance;  keep  the  t<aid  north  shore  pretty  near,  where  y(»ii 
will  have  3i  fathoms  on  the  bar,  and  jiresently  after  4,  5,  6,  and  7  fathoms;  hut 
if  you  stand  over  to  the  southward  till  you  are  got  within  the  said  bar  or  iodge, 
you  will  not  have  above  7,  8,  and  9  feet  water;  this  sand  tends  S.  E.  I'roiq 
athwart  the  aforesaid  two  white  rocks,  and  runs  over  close  to  the  oouth  side,  but 
being  past  that  as  siforesaid,  you  may  turn  from  side  to  side,  till  within  the  beach, 


BLUIfT^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


569 


and  ride  land-locked  in  4,  5,  or  6  fathoms,  or  htgher  up  \n  7,  8,  9,  or  10  ftitlioins, 
as  you  please.  The  harbour  or  river  runs  up  S.  W.  by  W.  at  least  two  leagues 
above  the  beach,  navigable. 

Being  bound  to  Harbour  Grace,  be  sive  to  go  to  the  northward  of  Harbour 
Grace  Islands,  which  lie  before  the  harbour,  above  a  mile  ofif,  for  the  southward 
of  the  islands,  between  it  and  the  south  shore  of  the  harbour,  is  foul  ground: 
the  harbour  lies  in  W.  S.  W.  From  Harbour  Grace  to  Cape  St.  Francis,  is  east, 
northerly,  seven  and  a  half  leagues. 

From  Harbour  Grace  lo  Bryan's  cove,  is  S.  W.  about  half  a  league,  but  is  no 
place  where  ships  use :  one  planter  lives  there,  it  being  a  good  place  for  catching 
of  fish.  In  the  entrance  of  this  cove  lies  a  rock  in  the  middle,  but  above  water. 
You  may  go  in  on  either  side  with  a  ship,  and  have  4  or  5  fathoms,  and  anchor 
within  it  in  clean  ground. 

From  Harbour  Grace  to  Spaniard's  bay,  is  S.  S.  W  about  three  leagues.  This 
bay  is  deep  and  large,  almost  like  Bay  Roberts  :  but  there  are  no  inhabitants, 
neither  do  men  use  this  place  for  fishing,  but  there  is  good  anchoring  all  over  the 
bay ;   it  is  but  a  small  neck  of  land  over  Bay  Roberts. 

From  Spaniard's  Bay  to  Bay  Roberts  is  S.  E.  by  E.  southerly,  about  two 
miles.  This  bay  is  about  two  and  a  half  miles  broad,  from  the  north  point  to 
the  south  point,  which  lie  N.  W.  and  S.E.  from  one  another;  there  is  very  good 
turning  into  the  bay,  and  no  danger  but  what  you  see.  You  may  borrow  on  ei- 
ther side,  and  go  close  to  the  island,  which  lies  on  the  sta^oard  side  going  in. 
The  bay  is  at  least  three  leagues  long  from  the  first  entrance ;  it  runs  up  with 
two  arms,  after  you  are  a  league  in,  the  one  lies  up  W.  N.  W.  and  is  the  deep- 
est, and  the  other  'S.  W.  Being  past  the  island,  or  to  the  westward  of  it,  which 
is  bold-to,  you  may  run  up  about  a  mile  and  lie  land-locked  in  9  or  10  fathoms, 
within  the  island. 

From  Bay  Roberts  to  Port  Grave  is  three  or  four  miles  about  the  point;  this 
bay  is  large,  deep,  and  very  bold,  as  the  other  hays  are  ;  there  is  a  cov«j  on  the 
starboard  side  going  into  this  bay,  called  Sheep's  Cove,  where  you  may  moor 
your  ship  by  head  and  stern,  anil  ride  in  44  and  5  fathoms,  but  your  anchor  to 
the  S.  W.  lies  in  22  fathoms,  about  a  cable  and  a  quarter's  length  from  your  ship. 
From  Sheep's  Cove  to  Port  Grave,  is  W.  by  S.  one  mile,  or  somewhat  more, 
but  ships  ride  not  within  the  small  islands  which  are  by  Port  Grave,  it  being 
shoal  water  within  them,  but  ride  off  without  them. 

From  Sheep's  Cove  to  Cupid's  Cove  the  course  is  S.  S.  W.  about  4  miles:  it 
is  a  good  place  for  a  ship  or  two  to  ride  in,  in  4,  5,  or  6  fathoms,  and  not  above  a 
point  open;  the  cove  lies  in  S.  W.  and  the  south  side  of  the  bay  to  Burnt  Head 
lies  N.  E.  by  E.  and  S.  W.  by  W.  one  from  the  other,  about  a  league ;  for  Sheep's 
Cove,  and  Cupid's  Cove  are  in  the  same  bay  of  Port  Grave;  but  Cupid's  Cov» 
is  on  the  south  side,  and  the  other  on  the  north  side ;  the  bay  runs  up  VV.  S.  W. 
and  is  about  three  leagues  long. 

Burnt  Head,  which  is  the  south  point  of  the  bay  and  Port  Grave,  lies  S.  E. 
by  E.  and  N.  VV.  by  W.  two  and  a  half  or  three  miles.  Burnt  Head  is  so  called 
by  reason  the  trees  that  were  on  It  are  burnt  down. 

From  Burnt  Head  to  Brigus  is  S.  by  W.  one  league.  The  south  point  of  Bri- 
gus  is  a  high  ragged  point,  Avhich  is  good  to  know  it  by :  the  bay  of  Brigus  is 
not  above  half  the  breadth  of  Port  Grave  Buy,  and  you  run  up  S.  W.  by  W. 
»nd  W.  S.  W.  about  half  a  league,  and  anchor  on  the  north  side,  where  two 
planters  live  in  a  small  bay.  Only  small  ships  use  this  place,  it  being  so  far  up 
the  Bay  of  Conception. 

From  Brigus  to  Collier's  Boy  is  S.  S.  W.  two  and  a  half  or  three  miles :  and 
from  Collier's  Bay  to  Salmon  Cove  is  S.  about  two  and  a  half  miles,  but  no  con- 
siderable place.     It  is  sometimes  called  Salmon  Pool. 

From  Salmon  Cove  to  Harbour  Main  the  course  is  S.  S.  E.  about  two  miles. 
It  is  a  good  place  for  fishing,  but  ships  seldom  go  so  high  up  in  the  bay. 

From  Burnt  Head  to  Harbour  Main  is  about  three  and  a  half  leiigiies :  and 
from  Harbour  Main  to  Holy  Road  is  S.  E.  by  S.  about  two  miles;  then  the  land 
tends  about  to  the  eastward  towards  Belle  jsle.    Holy  Road  has  1 1  fathoms  wa- 
ter, good  ground. 
From  Bay  Verds  Head  to  Split  Point  the  course  is  E.  N.  E.  half  a  leagu*. 


560 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT* 


From  Split  Point  to  the  point  of  the  Grates,  N.  N.  W.  two  leagues. 
From  the  point  of  the  Grates  to  the  N.  W.  or  north  end  of  the  island  Beca-< 
lieii,  the  course  is  E.  by  S.  four  and  a  half  or  five  miles. 

From  the  Grates  to  Break-heart  Point,  N.  N.  W.— W.  N.  W.  and  W.  tending 
about  two  points.  Between  the  Grates  and  this  point  is  a  bay,  where  boats  may 
lie  with  a  wind  o£f  the  land  of  Break-heart  Point ;  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks,  but 
above  water. 

From  Break-heart  Point  to  Sherwick  Point,  going  into  Old  Perlican,  the 
course  is  S.  W.  by  S.  five  or  six  miles.  To  the  southward  of  Break-heart  Point 
is  a  small  island  some  little  distance  off  the  shore,  called  Scurvy  Island  ;  between 
the  said  island  and  Sherwick  Point  runs  in  a  pretty  deep  bay,  and  lies  in  S.  E. 
from  Sherwick  Point,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile. 

Sherwick  Point  is  bold,  off  which  is  a  rock  above  water ;  this  point  is  the 
north  point  of  Old  Perlican.  Those  who  are  bound  to  Old  Perlican,  cannot  go 
with  a  ship  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  that  is,  between  the  island  and  Sher- 
wick Point.  Although  it  seems  a  fair  passage,  yet  it  is  altogether  foul  ground, 
and  a  shoal  of  rocks  from  the  main  to  the  island  (which  island  is  about  a  mile 
and  a  quarter  round,  and  about  half  a  mile  in  length  ;)  therefore,  whoever  intends 
for  Old  Perlican  with  a  ship,  must  go  to  the  southward  of  the  island,  between 
that  and  the  main,  and  run  in  within  the  island,  and  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms. 
But  there  is  a  rock  just  even  with  the  water,  and  some  under  water,  that  lie 
about  the  middle  of  the  bay,  within  the  island,  or  rather  nearest  to  the  main. 
Old  Perlican  is  but  an  indifferent  road ;  if  the  wind  comes  out  at  W.  N.  W.  you 
are  forced  to  buoy  your  cables  for  the  badness  of  the  ground,  and  the  boats  go 
a  great  way  to  catch  fish,  about  five  or  six  miles,  unless  it  be  in  the  very  middle 
of  summer.     In  this  place  live  several  planters. 

From  Old  Perlican  to  Sille  Cove  is  W.  S.  W.  southerly,  about  seven  leagues; 
Sille  Cove  is  but  an  indifferent  place  for  ships,  such  as  Bay  Verds. 

From  Old  Perlican  to  New  Perlican,  the  course  is  W.  S.  W.  eight  leagues.. 
This  is  a  good  harbour,  where  you  may  lie  land-locked  In  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  or  10  fa- 
thoms.   It  is  very  bold  and  large  going  in,  so  that  if  you  can  see  the  pc  int  be- 
fore night,  you  may  safely  run  in,  nothing  to  hurt  you  but  the  shore  itst  . ;  the 
easternmost  point  going  in  is  called  Smutty-no  t  Point,  and  the  westernmost 
Gorlob  Point,  between  which  is  the  entrance,  which  is  almost  two  miles  broad, 
and  has  about  20  fathoms  water ;  and  as  you  sail  in.  it  grows  narrower  and 
shoaler,  lying  in  first  W.  S.  W.  after  runs  u|>  to  the  westward  in  a  b'^ht,  where 
you  lie  land-locked  and  above  half  a  mile  broad,  so  that  you  may  turn  in  ♦or  out, 
and  anchor  in  what  depth  you  please,  from  12,  10,  8,  6,   5,  or  4  fathoms,  A'cry 
good  ground.     From  New  Perlican  it  is  abouv.  five  leagues  over  to  Random 
Head,  and  they  lie  nearest  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  one  from  the  other.     In  the  river  or 
bay  of  Random  are  several  arms  and  harbours,  for  Random  and  Smith's  Sound 
come  all  into  one,  but  it  is  nine  or  ten  leagues  under  the  head  of  each  where 
they  meet,  and  there  is  a  little  island  at  the  head,  where  is  4  and  5  fai.ioms ;  on- 
ly at  the  island  going  through  you  have  not  above  12  feet  water,  and  it  is  not  a 
mile  broed  there.     Smith's  Sound  runs  in  W.  S.  W.  about  fift<;en  leagues  from 
Bonaventure  to  Tickle  Harbour,  the  bottom  of  Trinity  Bay  ;  but  there  is  a  buy 
called  Bay  Bulls,  which  runs  in  three  or  four  leagues,  and  is  not  over  from  thence 
to  Place»tia  Bay  (the  back  or  west  side  of  the  land)  about  two  miles;  and  the 
islands  of  Placentia  Bay  are  about  nine  or  ten  leagues  long  each,  and  five  broad, 
on  which  are  many  deer;  they  lie  N.  W.  and  S.  E. 
From  Bonaventure  to  Ireland's  Eye  is  S.  W.  two  or  two  and  a  half  leagues. 
From  Bonaventure  Head  to  Bonaventure,  the  course  is  N.  W.  half  a  point 
westerly,  about  two  miles,  or  more ;  but  being  got  a  mile  from  the  head,  then 
the  harbour  lies  N.  W.  by  N.  about  a  mile  to  the  Admiral's  Stage.     The  Port 
Bonaventure  lies  within  two  small  islands,  between  which  you  sail  in,  but  you 
may  go  on  cither  side  of  the  island  between  that  and  the  main,  if  you  have  a 
leading-wind  no  danger,  and  have  4  or  5  fathoms  at  least,  and  run  within  the 
said  islands,  and  anchor  in  that  depth,  in  good  ground.     You  have  there  a  very 
secure  place  for  boats  in  bad  weather,  running  in  within  a  point  behind,  or  to  the 
northward  cf  the  Admiral's  Stages,  like  a  great  pond,  leaving  the  planter's  housr 
on  the  larboard  aide ;  this  place  will  contain  above  one  hundred  boats  in  security. 


m 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


&ei 


There  U  an  island  which  lies  off  the  west  point  of  the  harbour,  called  Qull 
Island,  off  which  they  used  to  fish  ;  from  tlie  said  island  the  harbour  li&>  in  N. 
about  a  mile.  There  ar«  several  islands  which  are  without,  off  Bonaventurc, 
the  one  is  from  the  port  S.  S.  W.  5  or  6  miles,  called  Green  Island,  which  is  a 
pretty  large  island,  and  you  see  it  as  soon  as  you  come  out  of  Trinity  harbour, 
in  fair  weather ;  another  island  lies  S.  W.  by  S.  3  miles,  and  another  island 
without  that,  about  four  or  five  miles  from  Bonaventure :  the  course  ia  S.  W. 
byS. 

From  Bonaventure  Head  to  the  Horsochops  is  E.  N*  E.  three  and  a  half 
leagues. 

From  Bonaventure  Head  to  Trinity  harbour,  ia  N.  E.  by  N.  about  three 
leagues :  between  which  are  some  bays,  but  not  for  ships  to  ride  in,  unlesi  the 
wind  is  off  the  shore. 

The  Horsechops  and  Sherwick  point  (being  the  north  point  of  Trinity  har- 
bour) lie  W.  N.  W.  and  E.  S.  E.  one  from  the  other,  two  leagues.  Between  the 
Horsechops  and  Trinity  liarbour  are  two  places  where  ships  used  to  fish ;  the 
one  is  English  harbour,  and  is  W.  N>  W.  from  the  Horsechops  two  miles,  and 
after  you  are  about  a  point,  tends  E.  N.  E.  again ;  it  is  a  clean  bay,  and  you  rido 
in  four  or  five  fathoms  water :  a  planter  or  two  live  here. 

From  English  harbour  to  Salmon  Cove,  the  course  is  N.  W.  by  W.  westerly 
about  half  a  league ;  it  is  a  place  for  Ashing,  and  there  is  a  river  which  runs  up 
about  two  miles  to  tL    northward. 

Without  Salmon  Cove  is  a  headland,  called  Foxes  Island,  yet  joins  to  the 
main  by  the  neck  of  beach.  To  the  northward  of  the  said  island,  or  headland^ 
between  it  and  Sherwick  point,  runs  in  a  bay,  called  Robin  Hood's;  and  in  the 
said  bay  behind  a  point  which  lies  out,  small  ships  ride,  and  fish  there. 

From  the  Horsechops  to  Trinity  harbour,  the  course  is  W.  N.  W.  about  two 
leagues.  Trinity  harbour  is  the  best  and  largest  harbour  in  all  the  land,  having 
several  arras  or  coves,  where  many  hundred  ships  may  all  ride  land-locked ;  il 
is  a  plaice  which  you  may  turn  in  or  out,  being  bold-to  on  either  side,  neither  is 
there  any  danger  but  what  you  see,  only  going  into  the  S.  W.  arm,  where  the 
Admiral's  stage  usually  is,  lies  a  shoal  called  the  Muschel  Bank,  which  shoots 
off  from  the  point,  within  the  small  island,  on  the  larboard  side  going  in,  and  lies 
over  N.  W.  about  a  third  cf  the  breadth  of  that  arm,  which  you  must  avoid : 
being  within  that  bank,  which  will  discover  itself  by  the  colour  of  the  water, 
you  may  edge  close  to  the  south  shore,  if  you  please,  or  keep  your  lead  going, 
to  avoid  the  Muschel  Bank,  giving  it  a  little  distance ;  you  may  anchor  in  foMr< 
teen,  twelve  or  ten  fathoms,  and  you  may  come  so  near  to  the  stage  on  shore, 
as  to  make  a  stage  with  topmasts  to  your  stage  on  shore,  to  lade  or  ivilade  your 
ship.  It  is  a  most  excellent  harbour ;  for  after  you  are  in  this  S.  W.  arm,  there 
is  another  runs  up  Wf  N.  W.  near  two  miles,  and  near  the  head  of  that  another 
runs  up  ,S.  S.  W.  but  there  is  a  bar  or  ledge  at  the  entrance  of  this  S.  S.  W. 
arm,  but  the  former  W.  N.  W.  is  a  large  place,  and  good  anchoring  for  five  hun- 
dred sail  of  ships.  You  have  besides  these  afore-mentioned  arms,  the  main  har- 
bour, turning  or  lying  up  N.  N.  W.  and  being  within  the  harbour's  mouth,  you 
may  ride  in  a  cove,  largo  and  good  on  the  starboard  or  east  side,  and  land-locked 
in  good  ground,  where  planters  live ;  and  over  against  that  cove,  on  the  larboard 
or  west  side,  are  two  other  coves  ;•  the  northernmost  of  tlrcm  is  called  the  Vice- 
Admiral's  Cove,  for  the  conveniency  of  curing  fish  ;  and  above,  or  to  the  north- 
ward of  this,  is  a  large  cove  or  arm,  called  God  Almighty's  Cove,  where  there 
is  room  enough  for  three  or  four  hundred  sail  of  ships  to  ride,  all  in  clear  ground, 
neither  winds  nor  sea  can  hurt  you,  nor  any  tide,  in  which  place  ships  may  lay 
unn'iocovered,  until  you  run  up  so  far  as  to  bring  it  open.  Several  other  places 
there  are  in  this  excellent  harbour,  good  clean  ground,  tough  clay  in  all  the  arms 
and  coves  of  Trinity,  and  have  four  and  five  fathoms  water,  within  two  boat's 
length  off  the  shore,  any  where,  in  six,  seven,  eight,  nine,  ten,  twelve,  and  four- 
teen fathoms,  and  some  places  more,  in  the  middle  of  the  arms  and  chanuels,  as 
you  please;  you  may  turn  in  or  out  as  af-resaid,  observing  your  tide,  which 
rises  there  about  four  feet,  sometimes  more.  For  not  only  Sherwick  point  is 
bold,  which  ia  the  nurlhuramost,  but  also  Salvages  which  is  the  southernmost. 

71 


im 


BLUIfT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


From  the  HorMchops  to  tho  south  head  of  Cattallna  bay,  Js  N.  E.  by  N.  and 
N.  E-  fiVQ  leagues.  About  a  league  to  the  northward  of  the  Horaechops,  is 
Green  Bay,  whUh  runs  pretty  deep  in,  but  no  jilace  where  ships  use  to  ride  or 
fjsh.  Being  past  Green  Baj',  there  is  no  place  or  cove  for  boats,  till  you  come 
to  Ragged  Harbour,  or  Cattalina. 

From  the  south  heud  of  Cattalina  Bay  to  the  north  head,  is  N.  N.  E.  three 
leagues,  between  which  two  heads  is  Ragged  Harbour  and  Cattalina  Harbour. 
Cattalina  Harbour  lias  from  the  south  head  N.  by  E.  northerly  about  two  miles. 

Ragged  Harbour  is  so  called  by  reason  of  the  abundmce  of  ragged  and  craggy 
rocks,  which  lie  before  and  within  Ihe  harbour  ;  there  is  no  going  into  the'soutl>- 
ward  with  ships,  but  only  for  boats,  and  that  you  must  be  well  acquainted  with, 
for  there  are  very  many  rocks  above  and  under  water. 

Those  who  intend  for  Ragged  Harbour,  with  a  sliip,  must  go  to  the  northward 
of  all  the  aforesaid  ragged  rocks  or  islands,  that  lie  before  it  (which  make  the 
harbour)  and  run  so  far  to  the  northward  till  they  bring  ragged  harbour  open ; 
then  sail  in  between  a  round  island  which  lies  close  to  the  main,  and  a  great 
black  rock,  which  ties  off  the  north  end  of  all  the  ragged  islands;  sail  in  till  they 
are  about  the  middle  of  the  aforesaid  islands,  which  will  be  to  seaward  of  them, 
and  anciior  there.  There  is  a  river  of  fresh  water  at  the  head  of  the  harbour, 
but  no  inhabitants. 

Two  miles  to  the  northward  of  Ragged  Harbour,  is  the  harbour  of  Cattalina, 
which  is  a  very  good  and  safe  harbour,  and  good  ground,  not  above  8  fathoms, 
from  S  to  4,  5,  6,  7  or  8  fathoms,  as  you  please.  You  may,  with  a  leading  wind, 
Bail  between  the  small  island,  which  is  a  little  to  the  southward  of  the  harbour, 
nnd  have  4  or  5  fathoms  at  the  least  going  through,  but  it  is  not  above  a  cable's 
length  broad  ;  or  you  may  go  without  the  said  islarf'.,  to  the  eastward  of  it, 
Riving  the  island  a  small  birth,  and  so  sail  in  with  the  middle  of  the  harbour; 
•  for  about  a  mile  distance  from  the  south  point  of  the  harbour,  E.  N.  E.  is  a  shoal, 
upon  which,  if  there  be  ever  so  small  a  sea  it  breaks ;  but  you  may  sail  betw';en 
the  island  and  the  shoal,  or  you  may  go  to  the  northward  of  it,  between  the 
shoal  and  the  north  shore,  and  borrow  ofifthe  north  side  of  the  main,  off  Little 
Cattalina,  a  bay  which  lies  in. 

Being  off  Little  Cattalina,  all  the  way  to  the  harbour,  yon  have  rrot  above  10 
fathoms,  and  from  10  to  8  and  7  fathoms,  then  8  and  9  fathoms  agai».  It  is 
reported  there  is  a  rock  which  lies  about  three-fourths  of  a  cable's  length  from  the 
south  point  of  the  entering  into  the  harbour,  which  has  but  9  or  10  feet  water 
on  it ;  however,  it  is  easily  avoided,  if  any  such,  by  keeping  something  nearer  to 
the  north  shore,  till  you  are  shut  within  the  said  point;  for  all  the  harbour  over 
is  good  sounding.  Close  to  the.  shore  within  the  harbour,  you  may  anchor  in  5 
fathoms,  land-locked.  In  the  S.  W.  arm  the  har>  oar  lies  in  W.  S.  W.  or  you 
may  anchor  in  3i  fathoms  within,  to  the  southwaru  of  the  little  small  green  isl- 
and, within  the  said  harbour,  or  run  up  two  miles  towards  the  river  head,  where 
fresh  Avater  runs  down.  In  this  harbc  jr  you  may  anchor  in  7,  6,  5  or  4  fathoms. 
There  is  a  kind  of  a  boar  rises  in  this  place  very  often,  that  will  cause  the  water 
to  rise  3  feet  suddenly,  and  then  down  again,  and  you  have  it  2  or  3  times  in  3 
or  4  hours  at  certain  seasons.  It  is  a  v§ry  good  harbour,  and  abundance  of 
herb  Alexander  grows  on  that  small  island  in  the  harbour.  Here  is  store  of  sal- 
mon to  be  caught  at  the  head  of  the  harbour,  if  you  have  nets  ;  and  near  a  small 
cove  in  the  W.  N.  W.  within  the  small  island,  is  a  fire  stone,  of  a  glittering  co- 
lour, a  kind  of  mineral ;  excellent  good  wheel-locks  growing  in  the  rocks. 

Prom  Cattalina  harbour  to  Little  Cattalina  is  N.  N.  E.  about  half  a  league  i 
it  seems  to  be  a  good  sandy  bay. 

From  Cattalina  harbour  to  the  north  head  of  the  bay,  is  N.  E.  easterly  one 
and  a  half  league. 

From  the  north  head  of  Cattalina  Bay  to  Flower's  point,  the  course  is  N.  by  E. 
one  and  a  half  league,  off  which  point  are  sunken  rocks,  called  Flower's  l^)ck3: 
the  sea  breaks  upon  them  in  a  swelling  (or  great)  sea,  and  they  discover  themselves 
plain,  they  lie  about  half  a  league  ofl'  shore;  you  may  go  between  the  point  of 
the  Flower's  (which  has  some  rocks  lying  off  it)  and  the  said  sunken  rocks:  you 
hav«  a  mark,  if  iu  the  day  time,  to  go  without  tiiem,  which  is  to' keep  CapcLar- 


BJ.UNt'b  AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


sas 


J  N.and 
chops,  is 
to  vide  or 
l^ou  come 

.  E.  three 
Harbour. 
;wo  miles, 
nd  craggy 
the'sou  Hi- 
nted with, 


f  Cattalina, 
;  8  fathoms, 
sadingwind, 
he  harbour, 
»ve  a  cable's 
itward  of  it, 
he  harbour; 
E.isashoaT, 
sail  bet\V';en 
between  the 
.in,  off  Little 

lot  above  10 
again.    It  » 
gth  from  the 
[)  feet  water 
ing  nearer  to 
larbour  over 
anchor  in  5 
_,  \V.  or  j;ou 
lall  green  isl- 
)  head,  where 
|or  4  fathoms, 
ise  the  water 
3  times  in  3 
bundance  of 
store  of  sal- 
near  a  small 
[glitteriug  co- 
rocks, 
alf a  league; 


jan  opea  to  Bird's  Island*  and  that  will  carry  you  clear  without,  to  the  eastward 
of  them,  with  any  ship. 

From  Flower's  Point  to  Bird's  Island  tho  course  is  N.  by  W.  about  three  and 
a  half  miles.  Within  tho  said  Bird's  Island  is  a  large  bay,  one  arm  within  Iha 
south  point  of  the  land,  Avhich  runs  up  W.  S.  AV.  a  good  distance,  where  ships 
may  ride ;  there  is  another  arm  also  runs  up  within  some  rqcks,  which  are  above 
water;  the  bay  runs  to, Cape  Larjan.  Bird's  Island  abounds  with  wjllocks,  pi- 
geons, gulls,  &C.  which  breed  there  in  summer. 

From  Bird's  Island  to  Cape  Larjan,  the  course  is  north  easterly,  betweea^two 
and  three  miles. 

From  Flower's  Point  to  Cape  Larjan  is  N.  half  a  point  westerly  ;  Cape  Lar- 
jan is  but  a  low  point,  off  which  lies  a  great  rock,  above  water. 

From  Cape  Larjan  to  Spiller's  Point  is  N.  N.  W.  a  email  league ;  between 
which  cape  and  Spiller's  point  runs  in  a  pretty  deep  bay,  over  which  point  be- 
tween that  and  Cape  Larjan,  you  will  see  the  high  land  of  Port  Bonavista,  when 
you  are  a  good  distance  off  at  sea,  being  high  land.  Spiller's  Point  is  indifferent 
high,  steep  up  and  bold-to. 

From  Spiller's  Point  to  Cape  Bonavista,  the  course  is  N.  N.  W.  about  a  league, 
between  which  is  a  very  great  and  deep  bay,  so  that  men  unacquainted,  would 
judge  that  there  went  in  the  harbour  of  Bonavista.  It  is  but  a  small  distance  of 
two  and  a  half  miles  over,  from  the  bottom  of  the  bay  to  Port  Bonavista,  by 
land,  and  is  but  a  mere  neck  of  land.  From  Red  Head  bay  to  this  bay  is  not 
above  half  a  musket  shot.  The  head  of  Cape  Bonavista  appears  at  a  distance 
of  a  sky  colour.  About  three-fourths  of  a  mile  N.  by  W.  from  the  cape  is  a 
email  island,  called  Gull  Island,  easy  to  be  known,  being  different  heights,  and 
highest  in  the  middle,  and  makes  something  like  the  form  of  a  Fleur  de  Lys,  or 
a  hat  with  great  brims ;  you  may  see  it  four  or  five  leagues  off,  in  clear  weather ; 
aadN.  E.  about  a  league  from  Cape  Bonavista,  is  a  ledge  of  about  10  fathoma 
water  on  it,  where  boats  used  to  fish.     Cape  Bonavista  lies  in  lat.  49°  10' N- 

From  Cape  Bonavista,  to  Port  Bonavista,  the  course  is  £.  W.  about  five  miles. 
If  you  come  from  the  so*)thward,  and  intend  for  Bonavista,  you  may  sail  be- 
tween GuU  Island  and  the  cape,  they  being  bold-to,  and  about  three-fourths  of  a 
mile  asunuer,  but  you  must  leave  Green  Island  on  your  larboard  8ide,-going  to 
Bonavista,  for  between  it  and  the  main  is  but  narrow,  and  some  places  shoal 
rocks,  not  safe  for  ships  to  pass  through ;  but  you  may  sail  between  the  said 
Green  Island  and  the  Stone  Island,  with  any  ship  without  danger,  being  safe  and 
bold ;  or  you  may  go  to  the  westward  of  Stone  Island  and  run  to  the  southward 
till  you  open  the  bay  or  harbour  of  Bonavista,  and  are  past  Moses  point,  and  so 
to  the  southward  of  the  rocks,  called  the  Sweeres,  which  are  high  rocks,  within 
which  you  ride  (for  tl^^re  is  no  passage  to  the  northward  of  them)  and  lie  in  11, 
10,  9,  8,  7,  6  or  5  fathoms,  aa  you  j  'ease,  and  must  always  have  a  good  an- 
chor in  the  S.  W.  and  another  fast  in  the  Sweeres,  or  anchor  in  the  N.  W.  for 
westerly  winds  Wow  right  into  the  road.  It  flows  generally  to  »'  e  northward 
about  Bonavista,  and  the  places  adjacent,  W.  N.  W.  that  is,  a  W.  S.  W.  moon 
makes  the  highest  water,  which  most  masters  of  ships  using  these  parts  havw 
observed.  • 

With  small  vessels  you  may  go  between  Green  Island  and  the  main  (but  not 
with  great  ships)  and  so  to  Red  Head ;  but  the  bay  between  the  points  (over 
against  Green  Island)  and  Red  Head,  is  all  foul  ground  to  anchor  in.  A  littlo 
distance,  about  a  cable's  lengih  from  the  shore,  is  a  sunken  rock,  but  with  boats 
you  may  go  between  the  shore  and  it ;  the  sea  breaks  on  it.  Being  past  Red 
Read,  you  sail  S.  W.  to  Moses  point;  between  which  two  points  is  a  large  bay 
or  cove,  called  Baylis  Cove,  where  you  may  anchor  on  occasion.  There  is  ii 
Btage  kept  generally  for  fishing  every  year,  on  the  larboard  or  north  sidft  of  the 
bay. 

From  the  east  part  of  the  Grarjd  Bank  of  Newfoundland,  in  latitude  45^  00' 
to  tlie  east  part  of  the  bank  Queco,  in  lat.  44°  IG'  Is  considered  by  those  who 
who  have  run  it,  one  hundred  and  twenty  leagues  distant.  Tlie  north  part  of 
the  bank  Queco,  in  lat.  45°  06'— the  S.  W.  of  Queco.  in  44°  10'  and  the  Isle  of 
Sablea«  in  the  latitude  44^  10 ,  and  about  fourteen  leagues  to  the  wealward,  of 


564 


blurt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


bank  Queco;  the  N.  part  of  Queco,  on  a  vrcst  coiireo,  is  ahout  eighteen  kaf^M 
in  length ;  from  the  N.  W.  part  of  Queco,  to  the  harbour  of  Causo,  is  N.  W.  by 
W.  it  W.  thirtj-nine  leagues,  after  you  have  lost  soundings  off'  Queco,  «n  which 
is  commonly  about  85  fathoms,  unless  on  the  S.  E.  part,  where  (and  on  a  certain 
spot  near  the  middle^  there  is  but  18  fathoms  after  you  are  to  the  westward  of 
Queco,  and  also  before  you  have  100  and  85  fathoms  black  mud;  there  is  a 
small  narrow  bank,  about  two  leagues  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  middle  of  Queco, 
but  it  reaches  not  bo  far  to  the  northward  as  the  norlh  part  of  Queco :  about 
£0  leagues  W.  N.  W.  from  the  N.  W.  point  of  Queco  you  will  strike  ground  on 
Frenchman's  Bank,  which  is  a  narrow  bank,  that  stretches  E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N. 
W.  athwart  the  harbour  of  Causo,  about  nine  leagues  off;  you  must  keep  your 
lead  going  when  you  reckon  yourself  nigh  this  bank,  or  else  on  the  N.  W.  course 
you  will  soon  be  over  it,  being  not  past  three  leagues  broad,  and  when  over  it 
you  Vf?.\  have  100  and  95  fathoms,  black  mud;  it  is  the  best  way  to  fall  to  the 
westward  of  Causo,  because  on  the  French  coast  you  have  no  soundings,  and 
th<%  Avinds  in  the  summer  are  generally  S.  W.  ana  W.  S.  W.  and  very  often 

'I  iO  <>;roMndto  the  westward  of  Causo  rises  very  sudden,  from  100,  95,  70  to 
40  fHt  <H  13,  hard  ground ;  then  you  are  not  past  two  or  three  miles  o£fthe  land) 
be  careful  of  sailing  in  with  Causo  in  foggy  weather,  for  S.  E.  and  E.  S.  £. 
from  it  lie  sunken  rocks,  which  in  fair  weather  seldom  t.ppear  at  high  water. 

The  Virgins  are  rocks  lying  about  twenty-three  leagues  east  from  Cape 
Race ;  they  lie  E.  N.  E.  about  four  miles  in  length,  and  the  shoalest  is  about 
fiO  feet  water.  Sometimes  the  sea  breaks  very  high  upon  them,  which  renders 
them  very  dangerous,  besides  a  very  strong  current  often  sets  about  them. 
Ships  sometimes  anchor  on  them  a  Ashing,  in  about  12  and  14  fathoms. 

As  to  the  bank  of  Newfoundland,  there  are  soundings  from  the  outer  edge  of 
the  main  bank  to  the  height  of  the  ground,  where  generally  ships  lie  to  catch 
fish,  and  which  is  about  forty  leagues  distant  from  the  land,  and  then  the  soukul- 
ings  in  along,  are  uncertain.  The  bank  goes  quite  to  the  land  to  the  northward 
of  Cape  Ballard,  where  the  bank  falls  more  to  the  eastward,  and  the  water  k 
deeper,  and  so  increases  along  to  the  northward.  To  the  southward  of  Capo 
Race,  and  to  the  westward,  is  shoal  water,  two  leagues  off  the  shore,  not  above 
SO  or  2S  fathoms ;  and  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Pine  it  is  still  shoaler,  at  the 
same  distance. 

The  outer  or  false  bank  is  about  one  hundred  and  ten  or  one  hundred  and  fif- 
teen leagues  from  the  land,  and  is  thought  to  be  about  fourteen  or  fifteen  leagues 
broad  in  the  middle  ;  and  from  the  inner  edge  of  it  to  the  main  bank  are  near 
thirty  leagues,  and  no  soundings  between  them.  In  the  spring  of  the  year  many 
islands  of  ice  lie  between  these  banks,  very  dangerous,  when  foggy.  The  bast 
part  for  fishing  is  from  one  hundred  to  one  hundred  and  forty  miles  off  the  shore, 
which  is  the  shoalest  part  of  the  bank. 

From  Mistaken  Point  to  the  Powles,  or  entering  of  Trepassy,  is  W.  N.  W. 
fire  leagues ;  there  is  a  deep  bay  on  the  back  side  or  east  side  of  Powles,  and  a 
neck  of  beach,  so  that  you  see  the  ship's  masts  over  it,  but  very  dangerous  to  be 
embayed  in  that  place,  the  sea  commonly  falling  in  there,  and  no  current  to  help 
you  out ;  therefore,  if  you  intend  for  Trepassy,  stand  over  to  Cape  Pine  till  you 
iefi  the  harbour  open,  and  then  bear  into  the  harbour  according  as  you  have  the 
wind,  Cape  Pine  ueing  safe  and  bold  to  sail  alun^  that  side,  &^ 


Directions  for  navigating  part  of  the  Coast  of  Newfoundland,  from  Cape 
St.  Mary's  to  Cape  Spear,  including  St.  Mary's  and  Trepassy  Bay. 

N.  B.  All  bearinga  and  courses  hereafter  mentioned  are  the  true  bearings  and 

courses,  and  not  by  compass. 

The  entrance  of  St.  Mary's  Bay  is  formed  by  Cape  Lanes  on  the  west,  «nd 
Cape  PiiJ«  uij  the  east  side.    The  land  from  Point  Lance  lies  E.  byN.iiN' 


BLnrtT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT 


565 


throo  leagues,  to  a  high  bhiffcapfi,  from  which  Ihn  land  Jilonj^  thi?  >vo»t  side  of 
the  bay  Vms  N.  E.  by  N.  and  S.  W.  by  S.  ten  b'!ii;!;iics  up  (<»  flu*  head  of  tlje,  bay. 
From  the  afore-miMitioned  bliill"  cape,  to  Cape  Eiit^lisli,  on  tlie  east  .sliore,  llio 
course  is  S.  E.  {  E.  distance  five  leagues. 

Cape  St.  Mary's  is  a  very  high  l)hift' point,  makes,  in  all  directions',  much  liliB 
Cape  St.  Vincent  on  the  coast  of  Portugal,  and  the  land  alonj;;  shcwe  from  it,  for  :i 
considerable  distance,  appears  even,  and  nearly  of  e(pial  iici^ht  wit'-  'h.e  cape 
itself,  which  lies  due  west,  distance  between  seventeen  or  eighteen  leu  les  from, 
Cape  Chapeaurouge,  and  is  in  the  latitude  of  46°  52'  N.  A  little  to  th  Lorthward 
of  this  cape  is  a  small  cove,  where  fishing  shallops  shelter  with  sou^:ierly  and 
easterly  winds. 

From  Cape  St.  Mary's  S.  E.  by  E.  distance  five  and  a  half  miles,  lie  the  Bull 
nnd  Cow  rocks,  which  are  tAVO  flat  rocks,  and  very  near  together,  with  several 
smaller  rocks  about  them,  all  above  water ;  they  may  be  seen  four  leagues  from 
the  deck,  when  open  from  the  land,  but  when  shut  on  with  the  land,  they  are 
not  distinguishable  so  far.  They  bear  west,  distant  three  miles  from  Point 
Lance,  which  is  a  low  ragged  point  which  forms  the  entrance  on  the  west  side 
of  St.  Mary's  Bay.  The  Bull  and  Cow  lie  one  mile  from  the  nearest  part  of 
the  main  land ;  at  two-thirds  of  the  distance  from  them  to  the  main,  is  a  small 
rock  that  appears  above  water  at  half  tide  •  *here  is  10  fathoms  lietween  this  rock 
and  the  main,  and  15  fathoms  between  i  an<'  the  Bull  and  Cow.  Ships  may 
safely  pass  within  the  Bull  and  Cow  occasionai    . 

St.  Mary's  Rocks  lie  S.  by  W.  distant  ever  aiid  a  half  miles  from  Cape  St. 
Mary's,  and  S.  W.  by  W.  from  Point  Lance,  and  S.  W.  i  W.  from  the  Bull  and 
Cow.  These  are  two  rocks  which  appear  just  above  water,  upon  winch  the  sea 
almost  always  breaks  very  high.  They  1-  S.  E.  and  N.  W.  from  each  other, 
distance  about  three  cab'es'  length ;  in  the  middle,  between  them,  is  a  channel  of 
a  cable's  length  broad,  in  wMch  is  1;  'ithoms  water ;  there  is  also  15  fathoms 
at  a  cable's  length  all  round  them,  except  to  the  S.  E.  at  two  cables'  length ; 
^tance  ia  6  fathoms.  Between  these  rocks  and  Cape  St.  Mary's  is  25  and  30 
fathoms  water,  and  all  about  Cape  St.  Mary's,  at  two  and  three  leagues  distance, 
is  the  same  depth  of  water. 

Point  Lance  is  a  low  point  neart\\o  sea,  hut  the  land  within  it  is  high,  and  is 
the  west  point  of  the  entrance  into  the  bay  of  St.  Mary's.  It  lies  in  latitude 
46°  50'  N. 

From  Point  Lance  to  the  eastern  head  of  St.  Shot's  (the  east  point  of  tho 
entrance  into  St.  Mary's  Bay)  the  course  is  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  distant  twenty-two 
mileii.  This  bay  runs  nine  and  a  half  leagues  to  the  N.  E.  with  several  very 
good  harbours  in  it,  the  land  on  each  side  being  moderately  high,  and  mostly 
barren. 

From  the  eastern  head  of  St.  Shot's  to  the  western  head,  the  course  is  N.  41^ 
W.  distance  two  miles:  this  bay  is  entirely  open  to  the  sea,  and  about  one  mile 
deep. 

From  the  western  head  of  St.  Shot's  to  Gull  Island,  the  course  is  N.  20°  W. 
distant  four  miles.  This  island  is  small,  of  the  same  height  with  the  main  land, 
and  so  near  it  that  it  cannot  be  distinguished,  unless  you  are  close  in  shore. 

From  Gull  Island  to  Cape  English,  the  course  is  N.  7°  W.  distance  two  leagues ; 
this  cape  is  high  table  land,  termi  ,ating  in  a  low  rocky  point,  forming  a  bay  about 
a  mile  deep  to  the  southward  of  it ;  at  the  bottom  of  this  bay  is  a  low  stony 
beach  within  which  is  a  pond,  called  Holy  Rood  pond,  running  to  the  N.  E.  for 
about  7  leagues,  and  is  from  half  a  mile  to  2  or  3  broad;  this  pond  makes  Capo 
English  appear  from  the  southward  like  an  island. 
From  Cape  English  to  False  Cape,  the  course  is  N.  20°  E.  one  mile. 
From  Cape  English  to  Point  Le  Hayu,  the  course  is  N.  E.  three  leagues. 
This  is  a  \oYf  point,  off  from  Avhich  there  runs  a  ridge  of  rocks  of  three-quar- 
ters of  a  mile  to  the  sea,  and  above  a  mile  along  shore,  on  which  the  sea  breaks 
in  bad  weather.  This  is  the  only  danger  in  all  St.  Mary's  Bay,  that  will  take  a 
a  ship  up. 

From  Point  Le  Haye  to  the  south  point  of  the  entrance  into  St.  Mary's  Har- 
bour (called  Double  Road  Point)  the  course  is  N.  E.  distance  one  and  a  half 
mile ;  the  land  between  these  points  is  low  and  barren. 


S66 


BLUPfl's    AMERICAN    COAST  PILOT. 


From  Point  Le  Hnyo  to  the  low  point  on  thn  Btarboard  sUle  goHig  tnto  Bt. 
Mnry's  ITarhour,  called  Ellis'  Point,  the  course  is  N.  E.  by  E.  two  miles,  and 
from  Point  Lance  to  St.  Mary's  Harlmiir,  is  E.  I  N.  distance  nine  leagues.  The 
entrance  to  this  harbour  is  above  a  mile  wide.  Within  the  points  that  form  the 
entrance,  it  divides  into  two  branches,  one  to  the  E.  S.  E.  the  other  to  the  N.  E. 
When  you  are  past  Ellis'  Point,  haul  in  to  the  southward,  and  anchor  abreast  of 
the  fishing-stages  and  houses,  upon  a  flat,  in  4  or  5  fathoms.  Here  you  will  lio 
land-Jocked.  This  flat  runs  ofl*  about  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  without  it  is 
from  15  to  40  fathoms  water  over  to  the  other  side;  but  the  best  anchorage  in 
this  harbour  is  about  two  miles  aboye  the  town,  where  it  is  above  half  a  mile 
wide,  opposite  Brown's  Pond,  which  is  on  the  starboard  side,  and  may  be  seen 
over  the  low  beach;  here  you  will  lie  land-locked  in  12  fathoms,  and  excellent 
ground  all  the  way  up  to  the  head  of  the  harbour.  One  mile  above  the  said 
jioint  on  the  opposite  shore,  is  a  beach  point,  close  to  which  is  4  fathoms,  where 
ships  may  heave  down )  and  here  is  plenty  of  wood  and  water.  The  N.  fi.  arm 
of  St.  JBIary's  Harbour  runs  up  two  miles  from  the  entrance;  about  half-way 
up  it  is  a  mile  broad,  and  above  that  it  is  half  a  mile  broad,  where  ships  may 
anchor,  but  being  open  to  the  sea,  this  place  is  not  resorted  to  by  ships. 

Two  leagues  above  St.  Mary's  Harbour,  lie  two  islands,  the  largest  of  which 
is  about  two  leagues  long.  There  is  a  good  passage  for  ships  between  those  isl- 
ands, also  between  them  and  each  shore.  The  passage  on  the  west  side  is  two 
and  a  half  leagues  wide.  Above  those  islands,  are  many  good  anchoring-places 
on  each  shore,  and  at  the  head  of  the  bay  is  a  fresh  water  river,  which  is  naviga- 
ble two  or  three  leagues  up. 

Mall  Bay  lies  to  the  westward  of  North-East  Point,  and  is  about  one  mile 
broad,  and  better  than  two  miles  deep.  There  is  no  good  anchorage  in  this  bay, 
being  open  to  the  sea,  and  generally  a  heavy  swell  setting  into  it:  v^sels  may 
occasionally  anchor  near  the  head  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  good  ground. 

From  Cape  English  to  the  south  part  of  Great  Colinet  Island,  the  course  is 
N.  10<^  W.  distance  three  leagues.  This  island  is  of  a  moderate  height,  abo^ 
one  league  long,  and  oae  mile  broad.  On  either  side  of  this  island  is  a  safe  pas- 
sage up  the  bay,  taking  care  to  give  Shoal  Bay  Point  a  birth  of  a  quarter  of  a 
Miilc,  there  being  several  sunken  rocks  lying  off  this  point- 

Shoal  Bay  Point  lies  one  mile  distant  off  the  cast  side  of  Great  Colinet  Island. 
On  the  north  side  of  Great  Colinet  Island,  is  a  stony  beach,  from  off  which  lies 
a  bank  for  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile,  on  which  is  from  7  to  17  fathoms  water, 
rocky  bottom. 

Little  Colinet  Island  lies  one  and  a  half  mile  from  Great  Colinet  Island,  is 
about  a  mile  long,  and  half  a  mile  broad. 

The  entrance  into  Great  Salmon  River  lies  N.  50°  E.  distance  two  leagues 
from  the  north  point  of  Little  Colinet  Island,  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
broad,  and  runs  to  the  N.  E.  seven  or  eight  miles ;  in  it  is  very  good  anchorage ; 
the  best  is  about  three  miles  from  the  entrance  on  the  north  side,  in  a  sandy 
cove,  in  3  or  G  fathoms  water. 

North  Harbour  lies  N.  by  W.  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  north  part  of 
Little  Colinet  Island,  k  about  a  mile  broad  at  the  entrance,  and  runs  to  the  norfli- 
ward  about  three  miles ;  in  it  is  very  good  anchorage,  in  about  6  or  7  fathoms 
water,  at  about  two  miles  from  the  entrance,  where  it  is  not  above  half  a  mile 
wide ;  or  yo*i  may  run  up  the  narrows,  which  are  formed  by  two  low  sandy 
points,  about  half  a  cable's  length  asunder,  taking  care  to  keep  the  starboard 
point  close  on  board,  and  anchor  close  within  the  point  on  the  starboard  shore. 

Colinet  Bay  lies  N.  N.  E.  i  E.  5J  miles  from  the  north  part  of  Little  Colinet 
Island ;  in  it  is  very  good  anchorage  from  5  to  12  fathoms  water. 

From  the  eastern  end  of  St.  Shot's  the  land  to  the  eastward  tends  away  E.by 
S.  i  S.  for  about  one  mile,  then  E.  i  S.  one  mile  to  Cape  Freels. 

From  Cape  Freels  to  Cape  Pine,  the  course  is  E.  N.  E.  Ij  mile.  The  land 
about  Cape  Pine,  to  the  eastward  and  westward,  is  moderately  Wgh  and  barren. 

From  Cape  Pine  to  Mistaken  Point,  the  course  is  E.  i  N.  distance  four  and  a 
half  leagues.  Between  these  points  lies  Trepassey  Bay,  in  which  is  Trepassey 
Harbour. 

Tke  entrance  of  Trepassey  Harbour  lies  two  miles  to  the  N.  E.  of  Cape  Fine, 


BLDIfx'B  AMERICAN  C0A8T  PILOT. 


567 


'n  about  threo-qtiftrterB  of  a  mile  wide,  and  runs  nearly  the  same  breadth  for 
about  two  and  a  half  miles,  and  is  here  littl«  more  tlmn  a  quarter  of  u  mile  wide, 
but  afterwards  increases  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile  wide  ;  here  vessels  ycuerally 
ride.  The  dangers  in  sailing  into  this  harbour  are  a  small  rock  that  lies  on  tlio 
cast  shore,  about  a  mile  within  the  entrance,  and  is  about  one-third  of  a  cable's 
length  from  the  shore  ;  and  on  the  west  shore,  within  the  harbour,  off  a  stony 
beach,  lies  a  shoal,  and  runs  along  shore,  up  the  harbour,  to  a  Ihw  green  point. 
Baker's  Point,  on  Avith  a  low  rocky  point  in  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  will 
carry  you  clear  of  this  shoal.  When  you  are  nearly  up  with  the  low  green  point, 
you  may  borrow  more  to  the  westward,  and  anchor  either  in  the  N.  W.  or  N.  E. 
arm,  where  you  will  be  very  handy  for  wooding  and  watering. 

From  the  Powles  (the  east  point  of  the  entrance  into  Trepassey  harbour)  to 
Cape  Muttou,  the  course  is  E.  three  quarters  N.  distance  one  mile.  Between 
these  points  lies  Mutton  Bay,  and  is  ai)out  two  miles  deep ;  in  it  is  from  12  to 
3  fathoms  water,  rocky  bottom.  The  N.  \V.  part  of  the  head  of  this  bay  is  se- 
parated from  the  harbour  of  Trepassey  by  a  low,  narrow,  atony  beach,  over  which 
may  be  seen  the  vessels  in  the  harbour. 

Biscay  Buy  lies  about  one  and  a  half  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Mutton  Bay,  the 
entrance  of  which  is  about  one  mile  wide,  and  about  two  miles  deep  ;  in  it  is 
from  9  to  d  fathoms  water,  sandy  bottom,  but  is  quite  open  to  the  sea. 

From  Mistaken  Point  to  French  Mistaken  Point,  the  course  is  N.  80*^  W.  dis- 
tance two  miles. 

From  French  Mistaken  Point  to  the  Powles,  the  course  ia  W.  N.  W.  distance 
eight  miles. 

The  land  from  Mistaken  Point  to  the  eastward  tends  away  E.  N.  E.  one 
league,  then  N.  E.  by  E.  one  and  a  half  mile  to  Cape  Race,  which  is  table  land 
of  a  moderate  height,  having  a  high  black  rock  lying  close  off  the  Cape,  with 
several  small  low  rocks  to  the  northward  of  it.  This  cape  lies  in  the  latitude  of  46^ 
42' N. 

From  Cape  Race  to  Cape  Ballard,  the  course  is  N.  E.  by  N.  distance  three 
leagues ;  nearly  one  mile  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Ballard,  lies  a  high  black 
head,  called  Chain  Cove  Head.  Between  these  points  is  a  cove,  and  to  iha 
westward  of  Chain  Cove  head  lies  Chain  Cove,  before  which  lies  a  black  rock 
above  water. 

Due  east  from  Cape  Race,  and  S.  by  E.  |  E.  from  Cape  Ballard,  lies  a  fishing 
bank,  called  New  Bank,  about  five  miles  long,  and  nearly  two  miles  broad ;  on 
it  is  from  9  to  25  fathoms  water. 

From  Cape  Ballard  to  Renowe's  Rocks,  the  course  is  N.  20°  E.  distance  two 
leagues.  These  rocks  arc  small,  of  a  moderate  height,  and  lie  one  mile  from 
the  main  land,  and  are  bold  too. 

From  Renowe's  Rocks  to  the  harbour  of  Renowe,  the  course  is  N.  by  W.  ^  W. 
distance  two  and  a  half  miles.  This  is  but  a  small  harbour,  and  hath  not  above 
fifteen  or  sixteen  feet  at  low  water ;  it  is  but  an  indifferent  harbour,  having 
several  rocks  in  the  entrance,  and  the  S.  E.  winds  heave  in  a  great  sea.  To  sail 
into  it,  you  must  keep  the  north  shore  on  board. 

Fermouse  Harbour  lies  about  three  and  a  half  miles  from  Renowe's;  between 
these  harbours  lies  Bear's  Cove,  off  which  lies  a  sunken  rock,  about  a  cable's 
length  from  shore.  Fermouse  Harbour  is  an  exceeding  good  harbour,  there  be- 
ing no  danger  in  sailing  into  it.  The  entrance  is  not  more  than  a  cable's  length 
wide :  ji.  it  within  the  entrance,  on  the  r.jrth  shore,  is  a  small  cove  in  which  a 
fishery  is  carried  on,  but  no  safe  place  for  anchoring,  about  a  quarter  of  a  mUe 
farther  in,  on  the  same  side,  lies  another  cove,  called  admiral's  Cove  ;  in  this 
cove  the  merchant's  ships  generally  ride,  in  7  or  8  fathoms  water,  land-locked. 
About  one  mile  farther  uo  the  harbour  is  a  cove,  called  Vice  Admiral's  cove. 
On  the  south  side  is  the  best  anchorage  for  large  ships,  in  12  or  15  fathoms  wa- 
ter, muddy  ground ;  here  you  will  be  handy  for  wooding  and  watering.  Farther 
up  on  the  same  side  lies  a  cove,  called  Sheep's  Head  Cove.  Directly  off  this 
cove,  near  the  middle  of  the  passage  up  the  harbour,  lies  a  shoal,  on  which  ia 
only  nine  feet  water.  This  is  the  only  danger  in  Uiis  harbour. 
Bald  Head  lies  N.  30°  E.  one  mile  nearly  from  Fermouse  Harbour. 


5G8 


bldnt's 


AMERICAN    COAST    PILOI. 


Fnim  n»l\  II«n<l  to  TJI.ick  Head,  tlio  course  is  N.  by  VV.  one  mile. 
From  IJIack  Ilt-ad  to  tliu  «iritra»ico  into  the  harbour  of  Aqua  Fort,  the  couree 
is  re.  \V.  by  N.  one  milu  m-arly ;  in  th«  entrance  is  a  hi^h  rocic  above  water. 
The  jiassHj^e  into  the  liiirlionr  is  to  tlie  northward  of  this  rocit  in  which  you 
have  15  fathoms  water.  This  harliour  lies  in  west  about  three  miles;  at  about 
two  and  a  half  i»--!e3  fr-jm  the  entrance  it  is  very  narrow,  where  you  hiive  4  fa- 
thoms water;  but  just  within  the  narrows,  on  the  north  shore,  is  a  small  cove, 
in  which  you  will  have  7  fathoms  water;  thin  is  a  good  place  for  vessels  to  heave 
down,  the  shore  belnj;  steep.  To  sail  up  through  the  narrows,  take  care  to  give 
the  stony  bcacii  on  the  north  shore,  without  the  narrows,  a  birth,  it  being  a 
shoal  along  that  beach,  except  at  the  point  of  the  narrows,  wnich  is  bold  too. 

Ferryland  Head  lies  E.  N.  E.  |  E.  distant  two  miles  from  Aqua  Fort,  and  N. 
80°  E.  distant  three  and  three  quarter  miles  from  Fermouse.  Ferryland  Head 
ia  moderately  high,  having  two  nigh  rocks  above  water  lying  close  off  the  head, 
called  the  Hare's  Ears.  This  head  is  not  easily  distinguished  by  reason  of  the 
main  land  within  it  being  much  higher.  The  entrance  into  Ferryland  Har> 
hour  lies  to  the  northward  of  Ferryland  Head,  between  it  and  lalo  Bois,  and  it 
little  more  than  half  a  cable's  length  wide ;  hut  after  you  are  within  Isle  Bois,  it 
is  better  than  a  quarter  of  u  mile  Avide,  and  tolerable  good  anchorage,  in  6  or  10 
fathoms  water ;  but  the  N.  E.  winds  heave  in  a  very  great  sea  over  the  low 
rocks  that  run  from  Isle  Bois  to  the  main. 

From  IsJe  Bois  to  Goose  Island  the  course  is  N.  }  E.  distant  half  a  mile;  and 
from  Goose  Island  to  Stone  Island,  the  course  is  N.  &^  W.  distant  half  a  mile. 

Caplin  Bay  runs  in  N.  W.  by  W.  distant  two  and  a  half  miles  from  Goose  Is- 
land, IS  a  tolerable  good  bay,  with  a  safe  passage  into  it  on  either  side  of  Goose 
Island.  To  the  northward  of  Goose  Island,  between  it  and  Stone  Islands,  there 
is  not  Uie  least  danger,  the  island  being  bold  too.  If  you  pass  to  tho  southward 
of  Goose  Island,  between  it  and  Isle  Bois,  be  sure  to  keep  the  point  of  Ferryland 
Head  open  to  the  eastward  of  Isle  Bois,  in  order  to  avoid  a  sunken  lock,  on 
vrhich  is  only  2.  fathoms  water,  and  lies  nearly  midway  between  Go<^oe  Island, 
and  Cold  East  Point;  after  you  are  within  this  rock,  there  is  not  tlie  least 
danger  in  sailing  up  the  bay.  The  best  anchorage  is  abreast  of  a  cove  on  the 
larboard  hand,  about  half  a  mile  within  Scogin's  Head,  in  16  or  17  fathoms  water. 

From  the  Hare's  Ears  off  Ferryland  Head,  to  Cape  Broyle,  the  course  is  N. 
I W.  distant  two  and  three  quarter  miles.  This  cape  is  high  table  land,  and 
makes  in  a  saddle,  either  coming  from  the  northward  or  southward.  Froni  the 
north  part  of  the  cape  E.  S.  E.  three  quarters  of  a  mile,  lies  a  small  rock,  called 
Old  Harry,  on  which  is  only  S  fathoms  water ;  but  between  it  «nd  the  main  is 
upwards  of  20  fathoms  water.  About  three  quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  N.  E.  of 
the  north  part  of  Cape  Broyle  lies  a  ledge  of  rocks,  called  horse  rocks,  on  which 
you  have  from  7  to  14  fathoms  water.  In  bad  weather  the  sea  breaks  very  high 
on  these  rocks.  The  mark  for  these  rocks  is  a  white  house  on  Ferryland  downs, 
open  with  Stone  Islands,  and  the  head  of  Cape  Broyle  Harbour  open  will  carry 
you  on  them. 

From  the  north  part  of  Cape  Broyle  to  the  south  part  of  Brigus  Head,  the 
course  is  N.  W.  by  N.  distance  one  and  a  half  mile.  These  points  form  the  en- 
trance into  Cape  Broyle  Harbour,  which  runs  three  and  three  quarter  miles  U| 
About  one  and  a  quarter  mile  witbin  the  entrance  on  the  north  shore,  is  a  covt. 
called  Admiral's  Cove,  in  which  you  may  anchor  in  about  12  fathoms  water  good 
ground ;  but  here  you  will  lie  open  to  the  south-east.  The  best  anchorage  is 
above  the  narrows,  in  about  7  fathoms  water.  The  only  danger  in  sailing  up  the 
harbour  is  a  ledge,  called  Saturday's  ledge,  and  lies  about  one  and  a  half  cables' 
length  without  the  narrows,  on  the  north  shore ;  if  you  are  coming  in  from  the 
northward,  keep  the  saddle  on  Brigus  bead  open  with  the  point  of  Admiral's 
Cove,  it  will  carry  you  clear  off  this  ledge.  After  you  are  above  the  narrows, 
you  may  anchor  in  about  7  fathom^  water,  good  ground.  Here  you  will  be  very 
uandy  for  wooding  and  watering. 

Brigus  by  south  is  a  small  hurbour,  only  lit  for  boats,  and  lies  close  to  the  north- 
ward of  Brigus  head. 

Cape  Neddick  lies  N.  5  miles  from  Cape  Broyle,  and  N.  SP  W.  distance  seven 


CAPE  St.  M 

entrance  of  Pla 
W-  distant  frojn 


ULUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOTv 


569 


the  course 
ve  water, 
ivhich  you 
;  at  about 
hiive  4  fa- 
iinall  cove, 
Is  to  heavo 
arc  to  give 
,  it  being  a 
)uM  too. 
ort,  and  N. 
^land  Head 
ffthe  head, 
aaon  of  tho 
yland  Har- 
Boia,  and  is 
Isle  Bois,  it 
e,  in  6  or  10 
iver  the  low 

a  mile;  and 
lalf  a  mile, 
m  Goose  la- 
de of  Goose 
islands,  there 
k.i  southward 
of  Ferryland 
ken  rock,  on 
}of  o8  Island, 
not  the  least 
cove  on  the 
ihoma  water. 
.  course  is  N. 
lie  land,  and 
i.    From  the 
ill  rock,  called 
,  the  main  is 
,  the  N.  E.  of 
pka,  on  which 
[hka  very  high 
yland  downs, 
lenwill  carry 

tus  Head,  the 
form  the  en- 
Irter  miles  ui 
3re,  is  a  covt, 
is  water  good 
anchorage  13 
I  sailing  up  the 
ahiiU  cables' 
jig  in  from  the 
of  Admiral's 
the  narrows, 
[u  will  be  very 

|e  to  the  novth- 

iiatance  seven 


and  three-quarters  miles  from  the  Hare's  ears  off  Ferryland.    This  cape  is  table 
land,  of  a  moderate  height,  and  steep  towards  the  sea. 

From  Cape  Neddick  to  Baline  head  the  course  ia  N.  15°  E.  distance  one  and 
a  half  mile.  Baline  cove  ia  at>out  one  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Ba- 
line head.     This  is  but  a  small  cove,  fit  only  for  boats. 

From  Cape  Neddick  to  the  outer  point  of  Great  Island,  the  course  is  N.  40<3 
E.  distance  two  and  a  half  miles.  This  island  is  about  half  a  mile  in  length,  aod 
of  a  moderate  height. 

From  Baline  head  to  Isle  Spear,  the  course  is  N.  i  E.  distance  one  mile. 
Nearly  within  this  island  a  fishery  is  carried  on,  but  no  safe  anchorage,  the  bot- 
tom being  rocky. 

Toad's  cove  is  a  small  cove,  about  one  mile  to  the  northward  of  Isle  Spear, 
and  is  only  fit  for  boats. 

About  one  and  a  half  mile  from  Isle  Spear,  lies  the  south  point  of  Momable'i 
bay  ;  from  this  point  to  the  north  point  of  the  said  bay,  being  the  south  point  of 
Whitless  bay,  the  course  is  N.  E.  by  E.  distance  on6  and  three-quarters  mile. 
Momable's  bay  is  an  open  bay,  about  one  mile  deep. 

Green  Island  is  a  small  round  island,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  fVom  the 
south  point  of  Whitless  bay.  From  this  point  lies  a  ledge  of  rocks,  about 
one-third  of  the  distance  over  to  Green  island. 

The  south  point  of  Gull  island  lies  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  north-' 
ward  of  Green  Island,  and  is  about  one  mile  long,  and  one-quarter  of  a  mile 
broad,  and  is  pretty  high  laud. 

Whitless  bay  runs  in  about  two  miles  from  Gull  Island.  In  it  is  a  moderate 
depth  of  water,  good  ground  but  open  to  the  sea.  About  half  way  up  on  the 
north  shore,  lies  a  ledge  ,of  rocks ;  part  of  these  rocks  show  above  the  water  at 
about  half  tide. 

One  mile  and  a  half  to  the  northward  of  Gull  Island  lies  the  south  point  of  the 
entrance  into  the  bay  of  Bulls;  from  this  point  to  the  north  point  of  siiid  bay» 
allied  Bull  head,  the  course  is  N.  E.  d  E.  distance  one  mile.  The  best  anchor- 
age in  this  bay  for  large  vessels  is  about  half  a  mile  from  the  head,  in  about  14 
fathoms  water ;  but  small  vessels  may  anchor  higher  up,  agd  moor  to  the  north 
ahore,  and  will  then  lie  land-locked.  The  only  dangers  in  this  harbour  are,  a  small 
rock  off  Bread  and  Cheese  point,  but  is  not  above  SO  yards  off,  and  a  rock  on 
which  is  9  feet  water  lying  off  Magotty  cove,  about  half  a  cable's  length  off 
shore. 

From  Bull's  head  to  the  south  point  of  Petty  harbourt  the  course  is  N.  N.  E* 
distance  eight  and  a  half  miles.  From  this  point  runs  a  ledge  of  rocks  for  about 
one-quarter  of  a  mile. 

From  the  south  point  of  Petty  harbour  to  the  north  point,  the  course  is  N.  by 
E-  i  E.  distance  two  and  a  half  miles.  Between  these  points  lies  Petty  harboui* 
bay,  which  runs  in  about  two  miles.  At  the  bottom  is  a  small  cove,  where  a 
fishery  is  carried  on. 

From  the  north  point  of  Petty  harbour  to  Cape  Spear,  the  course  is  N.  N.  E. 
IE.  distance  two  miles.  This  point  is  rather  low  and  ragged,  and  may  be  known 
by  the  land  to  the  northward  tending  away  to  the  W.  N.  W. 


Directions  for  navigating  the  Bay  of  Placentia,  on  the  South  Const  of 
Newfoundland, /rom  Cape  Chapeaurouge  to  Cape  St.  Mary's. 

[N.  B.    The  Bearings  and  Courses  arc  true  Bearings  and  Distances,  a: ;  ',JOt  by  Compass, 
the  variation  of  the  Compass  being  19'^  30'  W.] 

CAPE  St.  Mary's  to  the  east,  and  Cape  Chapeaurouge  to  the  west,  form  the 
entrance  of  Placentia  Bay ;  they  lie  east  and  west  of  each  o  ther,  in  lat.  46°  SS* 
N.  distant  from  each  other  sixteen  leagues. 

72       ■'    ■'•-■- 


670 


BLUKt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


From  Cape  Chapeanroi^ge  to  Sokcr  head  (in^hlch  Is  a  high  hill  in  the  Bhape  of 
a  sugar  loaf)  the  course  is  E.  N.  E.  distant  three  miles ;  between  them  lie  the 
harbours  of  Great  and  Liltle  St.  Laurence. 

From  Soker  Head  to  Smalt  Point  (whicli  is  the  lo«vcst  land  hereabouts)  the 
course  is  N.  63°  E.  two  miles  :  and  from  Small  Point  to  Corbln  Head,  (which  is 
a  very  high  bluff  hend)  is  N.  E.  two  and  a  half  miles  :  There  are  many  high 
head  lands  between  them,  which  form  several  coves,  the  bottom  of  which  may 
be  seen  in  sailing  along  shore.  The  coast  is  clear  of  rocks,  and  30  fathoms  close 
to  the  shore,  but  no  shelter  for  any  thing.  From  Corbin  head  to  Shalloway 
Point,  the  course  is  N.  N.  E.  i  E.  four  and  one-fourth  miles.  Between  them,  and 
nearly  on  the  same  course,  lie  two  very  high  round  islands,  called  Corbin  and 
Little  Burin.  Corbin  Island  has  very  much  the  appearance  of  Chapeaurouge, 
when  coming  in  with  the  land,  and  seen  through  tlie  fog.  These  islands  are 
high,  and  are  little  more  than  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore. 

From  Corbin  Head  to  Cat  Island,  the  course  is  N.  E.  four  miles  nearly;  this 
is  tt  high  round  island  near  the  south  end  of  Great  Burin  Island. 

About  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Corbin  Head,  in  a  bight,  lies  Corbin  har- 
bour, which  is  very  good  for  small  vessels.  The  best  anchorage  is  iii  the  N. 
arm,  at  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  within  the  entrance,  opposite  a  cove  on  the 
starboard  side.  One  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  this  harbour,  and  two 
cable's  length  from  the  shore,  is  a  sunken  rock,  on  Avhich  the  sea  breaks  in  bad 
weather,  and  baa  not  depth  sufficient  at  low  water  for  a  boat  to  go  over  it.  Ves- 
sels bound  for  this  harbour  must  avoid  a  shoal  whicli  lies  one  quarter  of  a  mile 
to  the  east  of  the  south  point  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbour,  on  which  is  only 
two  fathoms  water.  Between  the  two  high  round  islands,  aforementioned,  and 
the  maid,  there  are  from  7  to  15  fathoms,  and  no  danger  but  what  may  be  seen : 
In  case  ships  should  fall  in  close  with  the  land  in  the  fog,  they  may  occasion- 
ally sail  within  them,  although  the  passage  is  little  more  than  a  cable's  length 
wide. 

Great  Burin  Island  lies  nearly  N.  and  S-  is  two  and  a  half  miles  in  length,  and 
high  land  :  near  tlie  north  end  is  another  high  island,  about  three-fourths  of  a 
mile  in  length,  called  Pardy'f  Island.  On  the  main,  r;'ithin  these  islands,  lie  liie 
harbours  of  Great  and  Little  Burin. 

Shalloway  Island  lies  N.  W.  i  W.  one  mile  from  Cat  Island,  and  N.  E.  byN. 
^  E.  one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  Little  Burin  Island  :  the  passage  into  Burin  har- 
bours, from  the  southward,  is  to  the  westward  of  Shalloway  Island,  between 
that  and  the  Neck  Point :  take  care  to  give  Poor  Island  a  birth  on  your  lar- 
board hand  :  After  you  are  within  Shalloway  Island,  you  may  anchor  in  safety 
between  that  and  Great  Burin  Island,  from  12  to  18  fathoms  water.  The  best 
anchorage  in  Great  Burin  harbour,  is  in  Ship  cove.  The  course  up  to  it,  after 
you  are  within  Neck  Point,  is  north  about  one  and  a  half  mile,  and  is  better  than 
one  quarter  of  a  mile  wide  ;  to  sail  up  to  it,  keep  the  west  shore  on  board,  in 
order  to  avoid  a  sunken  rock  on  the  eastern  shore  at  about  half  the  way  up,  and 
about  half  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore,  directly  off,  is  a  remarkable  hole  in 
the  rock  on  the  same  side,  and  a  remarkable  gully  in  the  land,  from  the  top  to 
the  bottom,  on  the  western  shore.  There  is  another  rock,  on  which  is  only  2i 
'fathoms  water;  it  lies  better  than  a  cable's  length  to  the  southward  of  Harbour 
Point,  which  is  a  round  green  point,  of  a  moderate  height,  joined  to  Great  Burin 
Island  by  a  low  narrow  sandy  neck. 

After  passing  Little  Burin  Island,  one  mile  north,  you  come  into  Burin  Bay, 
which  is  a  clear  bay,  aJ)out  a  mile  broad  every  way,  and  where  ships  may  occa- 
sionally anchor  safely,  being  almost  land-locked.  The  course  into  this  bay  from 
Little  Burin  Island  is  north.  All  the  land  about  this  bay  is  very  high.  In  it 
are  two  islands,  one  a  low  barren  island,  called  Poor  Island  ;  the  other  which 
runs  to  the  north,  is  high  and  woody,  and  lies  before  the  mouth  of  Burin  inlet, 
on  the  other  side  of  which  vessels  may  pass  up  the  inlet.  A  little  within  the 
entrance,  on  the  east  side,  Haifa  cabh's  length  from  the  shore,  is  a  rock  covered 
at  I  flood,  at  one  and  three-fourths  mile  from  the  entrance  ;  near  the  middle  is  an- 
other rock,  in  the  west  of  which  is  very  good  anchorage. 
The  3.  W.  entrance  into  Burin  harbour,  which  is  one  quarter  of  a  mile  wide, 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


671 


the  shape  of 
them  lie  the 

reabouts)  the 
ead,  (which  is 
re  many  high 
if  which  may 
fathoms  close 
to  Shalloway 
een  them,  and 
pd  Ijorbin  and 
;hapeaurouge, 
se  islands  are 

es nearly;  this 

es  Corbin  bar- 
ge is  in  the  N. 
•  a  cove  on  the 
irbour,  and  two 
I  breaks  in  bad 
5  over  it.  Ves- 
iarter  of  a  mile 
1  which  is  only 
mentioned,  aud 
at  may  be  seen : 
'  may  occasion- 
a  cable's  length 

>8  in  length,  and 
iree-fourths  of  a 
e  islands,  lie  the 

indN.  E.byN. 
J  into  Burin  bar- 
Island,  between 
rth  on  your  lar- 
anchor  in  safety 
ater.     The  best 
se  up  to  it,  after 
ind  is  better  than 
»re  on  board,  in 
the  way  up,  and 
narkable  hole  in 
from  the  top  to 
which  is  only  2i 
vard  of  Harbour 
d  to  Great  Burin 

into  Burin  Bay, 
ships  may  occa- 
jto  this  bay  fiom 
very  high.  In  it 
the  other  which 
;h  of  Burin  inlet, 
little  within  the 
is  a  rock  covered 
the  middle  is  an- 

r  of  a  mile  wide, 


is  formed  by  Shalloway  Island  and  the  Neck  point,  in  which  there  i»  no  danger, 
giving  a  birth  to  Poor  Island  on  the  larboard  side.  ;Vhen  in  Burin  Bay,  the 
course  through  the  S.  W.  entrance  into  the  harbour  is  E.  N.  R.  and  when  past 
the  points  that  form  the  entrance,  the  course  is  north  up  the  harbour,  which  is 
better  than  one  quarter  of  a  mile  wide,  and  one  and  a  half  mile  Ion;;  up  to 
Ship's  cove,  where  it  is  half  a  mile  wide  every  way.  This  is  the  best  an- 
chorage. 

There  are  only  two  dangers  within  Burin  harbour  that  do  not  appear  above 
water :  the  first  is  a  small  shoal  on  the  starboard  side,  about  half  way  up  the 
harbour,  directly  off  a  remarkable  hole  in  the  cliff  on  the  starboard  side,  going 
up,  called  the  Oven,  and  about  half  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore;  there  it 
also  on  the  other  side,  directly  opposite,  a  remarkable  gully  in  the  land,  from 
the  top  to  the  bottom.  The  long  mark  to  keep  to  the  westward  of  this  rock  is^ 
not  to  bring  Little  Burin  Island  to  the  eastward  of  Neck  point.  The  other  shoal, 
on  which  there  are  8  fathoms,  is  very  small,  and  lies  about  a  cable's  length  S.  S. 
W.  from  Harbour  point. 

The  east  passage  into  Burin  harbour  is  not  very  safe  to  sail  in  without  a  com- 
manding gale,  and  that  between  the  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  E.  To  sail  into  this  pas- 
sage, and  coming  from  the  westward,  come  not  within  two  miles  of  the  shore  on 
the  east  side  «f  Burin  Island,  (because  uf  several  clusters  of  rucks)  till  you 
bring  the  north  point  of  Pardy's  Island  open  to  the  northward  of  Iron  Island; 
then  sail  right  in  for  Iron  Island,  leaviiif?  it  on  your  larboard  side  going  in  ;  then 
steer  for  the  said  point  of  Pardy's  Island,  and  that  will  avoid  all  danger.  It 
must  be  observed,  with  the  afore-mentioned  winds  there  is  commonly  a  great 
swell  sets  to  the  shore  on  the  starboard  side  going  in  ;  therefore,  in  case  of  little 
winds,  (which  often  happens  when  you  are  past  Iron  Island)  endeavour  to  bor- 
row on  Pardy's  Island,  except  the  wind  be  from  the  N.  E. 

At  the  bottom  of  Burin  Bay  there  is  an  inlet,  which  runs  inland  five  miles; 
there  is  a  small  woody  island  just  before  the  entrance  ;  ships  may  sail  on  either 
side ;  the  east  side  is  the  widest.  A  little  within  the  east  head  that  forms  the 
entrance,  and  half  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore,  there  is  a  sunken  rock,  which 
is  dry  at  low  water ;  therefore,  in  sailing  into  the  inlet,  keep  the  west  shore  close 
on  board,  for  about  a  mile  up ;  it  lies  north,  and  is  about  two  cable's  length  wide, 
then  N.  N.  W.  for  a  mile,  and  is  there  half  a  mile  wide  with  a  sunken  rock  right 
in  the  middle;  to  the  westward  of  that  rock  there  is  good  room  and  good  an- 
chorage, from  7  to  12  and  15  fathoms  water  in  the  entrance,  and  in  the  middle, 
two  miles  up,  is  from  15  to  23  fathoms,  and  from  thence  up  to  the  head  is  from 
10  to  5  fathoms. 

Iron  Island  is  a  small  high  island,  lying  N.  N.  E.  ^  E.  one  league  from  the  S. 
E.  point  of  Great  Burin  Island,  and  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.  one  mile  from  Mortier  west 
head,  and  E.  one  and  a  half  mile  from  the  north  part  of  Pardy's  Island.  Vessels 
bound  for  the  harbours  of  Burin  may  pass  on  either  side  of  Iron  Island,  the  only 
danger  passing  to  the  northward  is  the  Brandys,  which  almost  always  break ; 
they  lie  near  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  a  low  rock  above  water, 
close  under  the  land  of  Mortier  west  head.  If  the  wind  should  take  youi-head 
after  you  are  within  Iron  Island,  take  care  to  keep  Mortier  west  head  open  to  the 
westward  of  Iron  Island,  in  order  to  avoid  Grigory's  rock,  on  which  is  only  2 
fathoms  water.  The  mark  to  carry  you  on  this  rock  is,  to  bring  the  flap^-staff 
01)  St.  George's  Island  (in  the  centre  of  the  passage  between  Great  Burm  and 
Pardy's  Islands  and  Mortimer  west  head)  on  with  the  west  side  of  Iron  Island ; 
this  rock  almost  always  breaks :  Vessels  may  pass  with  safety  between  this 
rock  and  Iron  Island,  taking  care  to  give  Iron  Island  a  birth  of  one  cable's 
length. 

On  the  main  within  Pardy's  Island,  are  two  remarkable  white  marks  in  the 
rocks;  the  northernmost  of  these  marks  brought  on  with  the  north  part  of  Par- 
dy's Island  and  Iron  Island,  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  will  carry  you  on  the  Galloping  An- 
drew, a  shoal  on  which  is  5  fathoms  water. 

S.  W.  one  mile  from  Iron  Island  lies  a  shoal  on  which  is  8  fathoms  WRt«r, 
called  the  White  Horae. 


572 


BLUNrS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Dodding  rock  lies  about  one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  easternmost  part  of 
Great  Burin  Island. 

Mortier  bank  lies  E.  by  S.  two  leagues  from  Iron  Island,  and  N.  25<^  E.  Ave 
leagues  from  Cape  Jude  :  the  shoal  part  of  this  bank  is  about  one  league  over. 
On  it  you  have  not  less  than  7  fathoms  water,  but,  by  the  fishermen's  account, 
there  is  not  more  than  4  fathoms  on  one  part  of  it ;  in  bad  weather,  the  sea 
breaks  very  high  on  it. 

About  three  m^Ies  to  the  N.  N.  E.  from  Iron  Island  is  the  opening  of  Mortier 
Bay,  at  the  entrance  of  which  is  a  round  island,  called  Mortier  Island,  lying  a 
third  of  the  distance  from  the  west  side.  Ships  may  sail  in  on  either  side  of  it. 
It  is  buld-to  all  around.  Close  to  the  first  point  beyond  the  island,  on  the  lar- 
board side  going  in,  is  another  little  island^  scarcely  perceptible,  as  it  lies  close 
under  the  land  ;  and,  two  cable's  length  i'rom  it»  in  a  direct  line  towards  the  outer 
island,  is  a  sunken  rock,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  in  bad  weather ;  there  is  no 
other  danger  in  this  bay.  At  the  bottom  of  it,  one  and  a  half  mile  from  Mortier 
Island,  on  the  east  side,  there  is  a  cove,  called  Fox  Cove,  wherein  is  good  an- 
chorage, and  room  for  one  ship  to  moor  in  9  fathoms,  good  holding  ground. 
They  will  lie  two  points  open  to  the  sea,  that  is,  from  S.  S.  E.  to  S.  E.  A 
ground  swell  tumbles  into  the  cove  in  bad  weather,  but  no  anchor  was  ever 
known  to  come  home  here.  Fishing  ships  sometimes  ride  here  the  season.  On 
the  west  side  of  the  bay  is  the  harbour,  which  is  small  and  narrow,  but  a  very 
good  one  for  small  vessels,  where  they  lie  moored  to  the  shore.  There  is  7  and 
8  fathoms  through  the  entrance,  and  2,  fathoms  when  in  the  harbour,  and  suffi. 
cient  room  for  fifty  shallops  at  the  head  of  it.  Off  the  starboard  point  going 
in,  is  a  rock,  which  at  high  water  is  always  covered. 

Croney  Island  lies  N.  by  E.  nearly  two  miles  from  Mortier  east  point.  Thij 
is  a  round  island,  and  lies  close  to  the  shore. 

Two  miles  and  a  half  from  Croney  Island  is  the  entrance  into  Mortier  bay ; 
at  the  entrance  on  the  west  side  is  a  small  harbour,  called  Boboy  ;  in  it  is  nine 
feet  water  at  low  water.  The  course  into  Mortier  bay  is  north,  for  about  two 
miles,  and  is  three-fourths  of  a  mile  wide,  in  which  you  have  from  50  to  70  fa- 
thoms water,  the  land  on  each  side  being  high :  it  then  "uns  to  the  westward 
about  two  miles,  and  is  aear  two  miles  wide.  In  the  S.  ^  corner  of  the  bay  is 
a  river,  which  runs  to  the  S.  W.  about  7  miles.  On  thr  st  side,  at  about  three 
miles  from  the  entrance,  is  an  exceeding  good  harbour,  tiled  Spanish  Room,  in 
which  you  may  anchor  from  4  to  6  fathoms  water,  good  bottom,  and  lie  secure 
from  all  winds.  There  is  not  the  least  danger  in  sailing  into  this  harbour,  giving 
the  low  rocks  above  water  at  the  entrance  on  the  larboard  hand,  a  birth  of  one 
cable's  length. 

I  Two  miles  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  entrance  into  Mortier  Bay  lies  Rock  Harbour, 
fit  only  for  boats  by  reason  of  the  infinite  number  of  rocks  in  it,  both  above  and 
under  water. 

From  Mortier  east  point  to  John  the  bay  point,  the  course  is  N.  25*^  E.  dis- 
tance eight  miles.  Between  John  the  bay  point  and  Rock  Harbour,  lie  two 
sunken  rocks,  half  a  mile  from  the  shore. 

Two  miles  to  the  N.  W.  of  John  the  bay  point  lies  John  the  bay,  in  which  is 
tolerable  good  anchorage,  in  about  8  fathoms  water,  with  sandy  bottom. 

The  Saddle  Back  is  a  small  island  lying  N.  47°  E.  eight  leagues  from  Corbin 
Head,  andN.  55°  E.  from  Mortier  west  point,  and  N.  83<^  E.  three  leagues  from 
John  the  bay  point.  Between  it  and  the  main  are  a  great  number  of  rocks  and 
islands,  which  render  this  part  of  the  coast  very  dangerous.  There  is  a  chain 
of  rocks  lying  one  and  a  half  mile  to  the  N.  1.  by  N.  of  the  Saddle  Back. 

Cape  Jude  is  an  isJaiul  uLoal  two  and  -i  half  m^lcs  in  length,  and  two  in  l)roadth  ; 
it  lies  one  and  a  half  miles  to  the  N.  N.  W.  of  the  Saddle  Back ;  on  the  south 
end  of  it  is  a  remarkable  round  hill,  which  is  called  the  Cape.  Between  this 
island  and  the  main  are  a  cluster  of  islands  and  low  rocks,  with  a  great  number 
of  sunken  rocks  about  them,  called  the  Flat  (slands,  the  innermost  of  which  lies 
about  one  mile  from  the  main. 

Audearn  Island  lies  half  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Cape  Jude  Island,  on  the 
west  side  of  which  is  a  tolerable  good  harbour.    Vessels  bound  for  this  harbour 


Long  Island  is 


BLUNT'S    AMlRICAIf     COAST    PILOT. 


575 


may  pass  between  Cape  Jude  Island  and  Audearn  Island,  and  between  Crow 
and  Patrick's  Island,  which  are  two  small  islands,  lying  off  the  S.  W.  point  of 
Audearn's  Island.  About  a  cable's  length  from  Audearn  Island  to  the  south' 
ward  of  the  harbour,  is  a  sunken  rock  ;  the  mark  for  avoiding  it  in  coming  from 
the  southward,  is,  not  to  haul  in  for  the  harbour  till  you  open  a  remarkable  green 
2<oint  on  the  south  side  of  the  harbour.  The  best  anchorage  is  on  the  north 
shore,  just  within  a  small  island.  There  is  a  spit  of  rocks  stretches  just  off  the 
Green  point  on  the  south  shore,  which  are  covered  at  high  water. 

Off  the  east  point  of  Audearn  Island  is  a  small  island,  called  Ford's  Island,  on 
the  west  side  of  which  Is  a  sunken  rock  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  island, 
and  another  on  the  east  side,  which  almost  always  breaks. 

Broad  Cove  lies  on  the  main,  W.  ^  N.  five  and  a  half  miles  from  Ford's  Isl- 
and; in  this  cove  is  exceeding  good  anchorage,  in  8  or  9  fathoms  water. 

Cross  Island  lies  three  miles  to  the  N.  W.  of  Ford's  Island,  is  about  one  and 
three-fourths  of  a  mile  in  length,  and  one  mile  in  breadth;  is  high  woody  land; 
between  this  island  and  the  main  are  several  other  islands.  Bane  Harbour  lies  on 
the  main.  Within  these  islands  is  an  exceeding  good  harbour  for  small  vesHels, 
the  passage  into  it  is  very  narrow,  and  hath  in  it  2  fathoms  water,  but  when  in, 
there  is  sufficient  room  to  moor  in  3  fathoms,  good  bottom. 

Boat  Harbour  lies  about  one  mile  to  the  northward  of  Cross  Island,  and  runs 
up  N.  N.  E.  one  league  Avith  deep  water  to  about  half  a  mih*  of  the  iiead  ;  close 
round  the  eastern  point  of  Boat  Harbour  lies  Bay  de  Leau,  which  runs  in  N.  N.  E. 
i  E.  better  than  a  league. 

Long  Island  is  about  four  miles  long,  and  not  half  a  milo  broad,  is  higl.  land 
making  in  several  peaks ;  the  south  point  of  it  lies  N.  .'57'^  E.  two  leagues  from 
the  Saddle  Back,  and  E.  by  S.  three  miles  from  Ford's  Island. 

N.  W.  two  miles  from  the  south  point  of  Long  Island,  and  N.  E.  by  E.  one 
and  a  half  mile  from  Ford's  Island,  lies  a  small  Green  Island,  which  has  a  shoal 
all  round  near  one  cable's  length. 

From  Green  Island  N.  W.  two  and  a  half  miles,  and  N.  19*^  E.  three  miles 
from  Ford's  Island,  lies  Great  Gallows  Harboiu'  Island,  which  is  high  land. 
Vessels  may  pass  on  either  side  of  this  island  in*^o  Great  Gallows  Harbour, 
which  lies  one  mile  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  Island.  In  this  Harbour  is  exceeding 
good  anchorage  in  7  fathoms  water  on  the  starboard  side,  just  within  a  low 
stony  point,  taking  care  to  give  the  point  a  small  birth,  in  ord  »■  to  avoid  a  rock, 
whicli  is  covered  at  high  water- 
Little  Gallows  Harbour  lies  close  round  to  the  eastward  of  Great  Gallows 
Harbour,  and  is  only  fit  for  small  vessels,  which  must  lie  meored  to  the  shore. 
Al'ove  a  rock  above  Avater,  on  the  larboard  hand,  Little  Gallows  Harbour  Island 
lies  before  the  mouth  of  the  harbour. 

Cape  Roger  Harbour  li(!S  close  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Roger,  which  is  a 
high  round  barren  head,  lying  N.  15°  W.  three  and  a  half  miles  from  the  south 
point  of  Long  Island.  'JQliere  are  several  low  rocks  and  islands  lying  off  the  east 
point  of  the  entrance.  In  the  harbour,  one  and  a  quarter  mile  within  the  en- 
trance, on  the  west  side,  lies  a  small  island ;  to  the  northward  of  it,  between  that 
and  the  main,  is  very  good  anc!<(irage  in  7  or  8  fathoms  water  ;  or  you  may  run 
further  up,  and  anchor  in  6  or  7  fatlioms. 

One  mile  and  a  quarter  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Roger  Harbour  lies  Nonsuch  ; 
there  are  several  islands  lying  in  the  mouth  of  it,  and  no  safe  anchjrage  till  you 
get  within  all  of  them. 

Petit  Fort  is  a  very  good  harbour,  having  in  it  from  14  to  7  fathoms  water, 
good  bottom.  The  entrance  into  it  is  better  than  one  quarter  of  a  mile  witic, 
and  lies  N.  N.  E.  five  miies  from  the  south  point  oC  Long  Island,  and  N.  by  VV. 
two  and  a  half  miles  from  the  north  point  of  Long  Island.  There  is  not  the  least 
danger  in  sailing  into  this  harbour;  the  best  ancliorage  is  on  the  starboard  side, 
the  S.  E.  winds  heaving  in  a  great  swell  on  the  west  shore  when  they  blow  hard. 
One  mile  to  the  eastward  «)f  Petit  Fort  lies  the  entrance  into  Paradise  sound, 
wliich  runs  up  N.  E.  by  E.  four  and  a  half  leagues,  and  is  about  one  mile  bro'id  ; 
in  it  is  very  deep  water,  and  no  safe  anchorage  till  you  get  near  the  head  of  Jt. 
Just  within  the  entrance  on  the  east  side,  is  a  cove  (in  which  are  several  rocks 


574 


BLUNT's    AM£R:CAN    COAfT    PTLOT. 


abore  water)  is  10  fathoms  water,  hut  :ic4  ffe  to  anchor  in,  th'-^  jo'loia  being 
Tockj. 

From  Corliin  Head  to  Martin  -f:  liifand,  f.he  course  is  N.  48°  E.  eleven  and  a 
half  leagues,  nearly  ;  this  course  will  '  'trrj  ysm  ju?c  without  the  Saddle  Back. 
Between  Marticot  and  the  main  h  Fox  IslunS  ;  there  is  a  safe  passage  for  ves- 
sels between  these  islands,  with  not  less  than  9  fathoms  water,  but  no  passage 
between  Fox  Island  and  the  main.  On  the  main,  within  Marticot  island,  lid  the 
harbours  of  Great  and  Little  Paradise.  The  harbour  of  Great  Paradise  's  only 
fit  for  boats.  The  harbour  of  Little  Paradise  lies  one  mile  to  the  northward  of 
the  east  point  of  Marticot  Island  :  the  only  safe  arichorage  is  in  a  cove,  at  the 
head,  on  the  larboard  side;  here  they  lie  moored  to  the  shore  and  are  entirely 
land-locked. 

One  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Little  Paradise  'es  La  Perche,  in  which  is  no 
safe  anchorage,  the  ground  being  bad,  and  lies  entirely  exposed  to  the  S.  E.  winds. 

E.  N.  E.  two  miles  from  Marticot  Island  is  a  rock  above  water,  called  the 
Black  Rock ;  one  quarter  of  a  milq,  within  this  rock  lies  a  sunken  rock;  N.  N.  E. 
J  E.  two  miles  from  this  rock  lies  Presque  ;  in  it  is  very  deep  water,  but  no  safe 
passage  into  it,  by  reason  of  a  number  of  rocks,  both  above  and  under  water, 
"     ig  before  the  entrance. 

East  four  miles  from  Presque,  and  N.  E.  by  E.  six  leagues  from  the' Saddle 
Back,  lies  the  west  point  of  Merasheen  Island.  This  island  is  high,  and  runs  to 
the  N.  E.  by  N.  better  than  six  leagues,  and  is  very  narrow,  the  broadest  part 
not  beiog  raore  than  two  miles.  At  the  south  ^part  of  the  island,  near  the  west 
€nd,  is  a  very  good  harbgur,  but  small  in  which  is  from  6  to  10  fathoms  water. 
To  sail  into  it  keep  the  starboard  shore  or  ooard,  in  order  to  avoid  a  sunken 
rock  that  lies  one  cable's  length  off  a  ras,;5«fl  rocky  point  on  the  larboard  hand 
going  in. 

Indian  Harbour  lies  on  the  east  side  of  Mo'*asheen  Island,  at  about  three  leagues 
from  the  south  point;  this  harbour  is  formed  by  a  small  island,  on  either  side  of 
which  is  a  safe  passage  into  it ;  the  oniy  anchorage  is  to  the  westward  of  the  is- 
land, and  b  tween  it  and  the  main,  aid  here  the  ground  is  uncertain. 

N.  20°  »^  two  and  a  halfmiles  from  tre  west  point  of  Merasheen  Island  is  the 
Little  Isle  of  Valen ;  this  is  high  and  riut.d,  and  lies  within  about  half  a  mile  of 
the  main  ;  one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  Liitle  Isle  of  Valen  lies  t!ie  Great  Isle  of 
Valen,  on  the  S.  E.  part  of  which  is  a  sri .!!  harbour. 

within  the  Great  Isle  of  Vnlen  lies  Clatise  Harbour ;  the  en- 
•*>out  half  a  mile  wide:  in  it  is  40  or  HO  fathoms  water.     The 
'  in  the  west  cove,   which  is  a  mile  long,  but  not  a  quarter  of  a 
.8  from  17  to  20  fathoms  water,  good  bottom. 

Grummer's  Rocks  are  low  rocks  a  hove  water,  and  lie  in  one  and  a  half  mile 
from  the  north  end  of  Great  Isle  of  Valen. 

Little  Sandy  Harbour  lies  on  the  main,  and  is  a  tolerable  good  harbour;  in  it 
you  have  6  and  7  fathoms  water,  good  bottom  ;  in  the  mouth  of  which  is  .i  low 
rock  above  water.  Vessels  bound  for  the  harbour  must  pass  to  the  northward 
of  this  rock.  This  harbour  may  be  known  Hy  the  island  railed  Bj^II  Island  wliicii 
lies  E.  S.  E.  i  E.  one  and  a  half  mile  from  the  mouth  of  it,  and  N.  by  E.  |  E. 
thirteen  miles  from  the  %vest  point  (»f  Merasheen  Island;  off  the  south  point  of  the 
island  is  a  remarkable  rock,  resembling  a  bell  with  the  bottom  upwards. 

Great  Sandy  Harbour  lies  three  quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Little 
Sandy  Harbour ;  the  passnge  into  it  is  narrow,  but  in  it  you  h«ve  6  or?  fathoms 
water.  There  are  two  arms  in  this  harbour,  f»ne  running  to  the  S.  VV.  whicli 
almost  dries  at  low  water  :  the  other  runs  to  the  N.  G.  in  which  is  tolerahh'  good 
anchorage.     There  are  several  low  rocks  and  islands  lying  before  this  hiirlioiii'. 

Barren  Island  is  about  three  and  a  half  mih's  long,  and  one  mile  broad,  is  high 
3and  and  lies  better  than  one  league  from  the  north  part  of  jVlerashcen  Island, 
and  about  half  a  mile  from  llie  main.  On  tlu;  east  side  of  this  island,  near  the 
«outh  end,  i«  a  cove  in  which  hy  tolerable  good  anchorage,  from  10  to  10  fathoms 
water.  Along  the  west  side  of  this  island,  between  it  and  the  main,  is  very  good 
anchorage. 

On  the  jnain,  opposite  the  north  end  of  Barren  Ishmd,  lies  La  Plant,  a  har- 
bour only  fit  for  boats. 


On  the  main 
trance  into  i 
best  anchor 
mile  broad ; 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


B1& 


a  half  mile 


From  Barren  Island  are  a  Btring  of  islands  quite  to  P{p«i'9  holn,  ^f*:'!ch  Jie'f 
three  leagues  from  the  north  part  of  B.irren  IsLind.  ThTie  islands  ar'-  ^b  jui.  hf-Jf 
a  mile  froin  ihe  main,  having  from  17  to  7  fathims  *.,'at2r,  good  ahchoraj^;  ail 
the  'vay  to  Piper  a  hole. 

Cape  St.  Mary's  is  the  east  point  of  the  entrance  into  Placentia  bay,  a.d  lies 
in  the  latitude  of  46°  52'  N.  is  a  pretty  high  bluff  point,  and  looks  iivlh'.  like 
Cape  St.  Vincent  on  the  coast  of  Portugal;  a  little  to  thenortlmai  '  -f  tLe 
cape  h  a  small  cove  where  fishing  shallops  shelter  from  the  easterly  ar,  '•  south- 
erly winds.  The  land  from  Cape  St.  Mary's  to  Placentia  is  pretty  h'  ,1.  a,  ik 
even.  S.  by  W.  seven  and  a  half  miles  from  the  cape,  lie  St.  Mary's  keys, 
which  are  two  rocks  just  above  water,  and  on  which  the  sea  almost  always 
breaks. 

From  the  Virgin  rocks  to  Cape  St.  Mary's  the  course  is  south,  distance  three' 
and  a  half  leagues  ;  between  Green  point  and  Cape  St.  Mary's,  there  is  no  shelter 
for  ships  or  vessels.  The  land^from  Placentia  road  to  Cape  St.  Mary's  is  of  a 
moderate,  and  appears  nearly  of  an  equal  height  all  the  way ;  but  over  Placen- 
tia, and  to  the  northward  of  it,  the  land  is  very  high  and  uneven,  with  many 
pecked  hills. 

Bull  and  Cow  rocks  are  a  cluster  of  rocks  above  water,  lying  S.  E.  by  E.  two 
leagues  from  Cape  St.  Mary's,  about  one  mile  from  the  main,  and  S.  W.  by  W.^ 
from  Point  Lance,  which  is  a  low  ragged  point,  and  is  the  west  point  of  the  en- 
trance into  St.  Mary's  bay ;  at  about  one-third  of  the  distance  from  the  main  to 
the  Bull  and  Cow  rocks  is  a  sunken  rock  which  shows  above  water  at  half  ebb. 

From  Cape  St.  Mary's  to  Point  Breme  the  course  is  N.  by  W.  J  W.  eight 
miles. 

From  Point  Breme  to  the  Virgin  rocks,  the  course  is  N.  N.  E.  distance  ten 
miles ;  these  rocks  show  above  water,  and  lie  about  one  mile  from  the  main. 

Three  leagues  south  from  Green  point,  and  a  league  from  the  shore,  lie  the 
Virgin  rocks,  which  are  a  cluster  of  rocks  above  ivater.  A  little  to  the  south- 
ward of  these  rocks  there  are  some  whitish  cliffs  in  the  land,  by  which  that  part 
of  the  coast  may  be  known,  on  coming  in  with  it  in  thick  weather. 

From  Virgin  rocks  to  Point  Verd,  the  course  is  N.  38°  E.  distance  five  ind  a 
Itaif  miles,  "rhis  is  a  low  green  point,  and  is  the  south  point  of  the  entrance  into 
llie  road  of  Placentia. 

Placentia  road  and  harbour  is  situated  on  the  east  side  of  the  ;;;rriat  bay  -if  that 

name,  at  eleven  leagues  distance  from  Cape  St.  Mary's.     To  sh'".   q'j  thd  road, 

and  coming  from  the  southward,  you  must  keep  a  league  from  *^  .  ohoie  vO  avoid 

the.  Gibralter  Rock,  which  lies  W.  S.  W.  from  Point  Verd     .s.  you  bring  the 

Castle  Hill  open  to  the  northward  of  Green  Point.    The  Cas.!»^  H;!l  "g  on  the 

north  side  of  the  road  on  which  stands  the  Castle,  and  is  di8ti;i,..;;3haf»le  far  oub 

;it  sea.     Green  Point  is  a  low  level  point,  which  forms  the  sonth  side   \  \\e.  road. 

The  Gihralter  Rock  has  sixteen  feet  wfiter     ion  it,  and  lies  W.  A  S.  ui.-?tant  two 

and  a  quarter  miles  from  Green  Point,  anu  two  miles  from  shore.     The  mark 

afore-mentioned  will  carry  you  a  quarter  of  a  mile  without  it,  and  when  yon  have 

the  said  mark  open,  you  may  steer  in  for  the  Castle,  keeping  your  iead  going ; 

there  is  regular  sound  on  both  sides.     Along  the  south  side  <s  a  fla?,  to  which 

you  may  borrow  into  4  fathoms.     The  best  anchorage  is  in  0  or  7  fathoms 

water,  under  Ihe  Castle  Hill,  at  three  quarters  of  the  distance  over  from  that  sid*, 

where  you  lie  in  good  ground,  and  open  about  four  points  to  th    sea.     At  tbe 

bottom  of  the  road  is  a  long  beach,  which  terminates  to  the  north  in  a  point,  on 

which  stand  the  inhabitants'  houses  and  a  fort.     Between  this  point  and  Castle 

Hill  is  the  entrance  into  Placentia  Harbour,  which  is  very  narrow,  in  which  is  Sj 

fathoms  water,  but  within  the  narro'-vs  it  widens  to  one  third  of  a  mile  broad,  and 

runs  up  N.  N.  E.  abovf  (ine  and  a  half  mile,  where  ships  may  lie  in  perfect  aecu- 

I'ity,  in  (>  or  7  fathoms.     To  sail  in  you  must  keep  nearest  to  the  starboard  side. 

Near  the  Ijottoi    of  Placentia  Road,  oi.  the  north  shore,  at  the  top  of  a  hill, 

staniU  a  castle ;  v     ;n  you  have  this  castle  open  to  the  northward  of  P^fin*  Verd» 

you  may  haul  in  it  r  the  road  in  safety,  taking  care  to  give  Point  Verd  a  birth  of 

near  two  cable's le    '^th.     The  best  anchorage  in  the  road  is  under  Castle  Hill,  in 

about  6  fathoms  wa  it.  The  entrance  into  the  harbour  ia  very  narrow  ;  in  it  you 


mm 


576 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT* 


fi"<'- 


hM  vc  8j  fathoms  water ;  after  you  are  within  the  narrows  it  is  about  one  tliird  of  a 
mile  broad,  and  about  one  and  a  half  mile  long ;  here  you  may  anchor  in  perfect 
safety,  in  G  or  7  fathoms  water. 

The  co;ist  is  easily  knonn  in  clear  Aveather,  by  the  Chapeaurouge,  and  other 
remarkable  head  lands.  The  best  directions  that  can  be  given  in  coming  in  with 
it  in  thick  weather,  are  to  observe  that  between  Burin  and  Laun  there  are  no 
islands  except  Ferryland  head,  which  is  very  near  the  main,  so  as  not  to  be  dis- 
tinguished as  an  island  till  very  close  to  the  shore  :  also,  that  the  islands  about 
Burin  are  large  and  full  as  high  as  the  main  land  ;  those  about  Laiin  are  small,  and 
scarce  half  the  height  of  the  main  land,  and  the  Lamelins  are  two  low  flat 
islands.  There  are  several  small  rocks  just  above  water  between  Laun  and 
Lameline,  and  there  are  none  such  any  where  else  along  the  coast.  The  land 
from  Mortier  head  up  the  bay,  is  high,  rocky,  and  uneven,  with  several  islands 
near  the  coast,  which  form  many  capes  and  ragged  points. 

From  Mortier  head  to  Red  island,  the  course  is  N.  E.  by  E.  distance  16 
leagues.  This  isiand  is  high,  and  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  twelve  leagues 
from  the  deck.  The  south  end  of  it  bears  from  Placentia  road  N.  W.  distance 
four  and  a  half  leagu(!s. 

Red  island  is  high  barren  land,  about  five  miles  long  and  three  miles  broad. 
The  south  point  lies  N.  ^V.  eleven  miles  from  Placentia  road.  On  the  east  side 
siear  the  north  end  is  a  small  harbour,  which  is  only  fit  for  shallops. 

Point  Latina  lies  about  five  miles  to  the  northward  of  Placentia  road ;  between 

these  places  the  land  is  low  and  even  near  the  sea,  but  just  within  it  high  and 

fagged,  there  are  several  sunken  rocks  lying  along  the  shore  about  half  a  mile  off. 

Point  Roche  lies  more  than  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Point  Latina;  there  is 

a  shoal  stretches  off  Point  Roche  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile. 

S.  E.  by  S.  i  E.  one  and  a  quarter  mile  from  Point  Roche  is  the  entrance  into 
the  harbour  of  Little  Placentia,  which  runs  up  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  about  one 
and  a  half  mile,  and  is  near  half  a  mile  broad  ;  there  is  exceeding  good  anchor- 
Jige  in  this  harbour,  in  a  cove  on  the  north  shore  ;  this  cove  may  be  known  by 
the  west  point  being  woody,  and  the  land  to  the  eastward  being  barren  ;  off  the 
east  point  of  \e  cove  lies  a  shoal  for  near  one-third  the  distance  over  to  the 
south  side  of  the  harbour ;  in  this  cove  is  7  and  8  lallioms  water. 

From  Point  Latina  to  Ship  harbour,  the  course  is  P..  N.  E.  distance  five  and  a 
half  miles.  This  harbour  runs  up  north  two  and  three  quarters  miles,  and  is 
about  one  quarter  of  a  mile  broad  ;  the  be3t  anchorage  is  in  a  cove  on  the  west 
sitle  in  about  10  fatlioms  water,  at  about  «ne  mile  from  the  entrance. 

Fox  Island  is  a  small  round  island,  lying  N.  by  E.  J  E.  three  miles  from  Point 
Latina,  and  W.  by  N.  one  league  from  Ship  Harbour  Point,  which  is  a  low  sto- 
ny point,  lying  about  one  and  half  mile  to  the  westward  of  Ship  Harbour;  l)e- 
tv.een  Fox  Island  and  this  point  are  a  range  of  rocks,  which  in  bad  weatlier 
break  almost  quite  across. 

N.  W.  one  and  a  half  mile  from  Fox  Island,  is  a  steep  rock  above  Avater,  called 
Fishing  Rock ;  north  one  and  a  half  mile  from  Fishing  Rock  lies  a  sunken  rock, 
which  almost  always  breaks. 

The  Ram  Islands  arc  a  cluster  of  high  islands,  lying  about  three  miles  to  the 
N.  N.  E.  fi  E.  of  Fox  Island.  E.  N.  E.  three  miles  from  the  south  point  of  Ram 
Islands  is  the  entrance  into  Long  Harbour;  there  is  not  the  least  danger  in  sail- 
ing into  it;  the  best  ancliorage  is  on  the  north  side  to  the  eastward  of  Harbour 
Island,  between  it  and  the  main ;  here  you  will  lie  secure  from  all  winds  in  7  or 
8  fathoms  water. 

From  Ram  Islands  to  Little  harbour  is  north  about  five  leagues ;  there  art^ 
severaTlow  islands  and  rocks  along  shore;  between  these  places  there  is  not  the 
least  shelter  for  vessels,  or  scarcely  for  boats,  along  that  coast.  Little  Harbour 
is  small,  with  7  fathoii.s  water;  the  ground  is  bad,  and  lies  entirely  exposed  to 
the  S.  W.  winds,  which  heave  in  a  very  ;;rrat  sea. 

From  Point  Latina  to  the  south  point  of  Long  Island,  the  course  is  N.  by  VV. 
I  W.  four  and  a  half  leagues ;  this  island  is  near  three  leagues  long,  is  high  land. 
the  south  point  being  remarkable  high  steep  rocks.  On  the  east  side  of  the  isl- 
and, about  one  lengue  from  the  south  point,  lies  Harbour  Buffet,  a  tolerable  gnoJ 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PtLOT. 


377 


harfiour ;  the  entrance  Into  It  is  narrow,  but  has  IS  fathomi  water  hi  IV  There 
are  two  arms  in  this  harbour,  one  running  to  the  westward,  the  other  to  the 
northward ;  the  best  anchorage  is  in  the  north  arm,  in  about  1 5  fathoms  water. 
This  harbour  may  be  known  by  the  islands  that  lie  in  the  mouth  and  to  the 
southward  of  it,  and  by  Harbour  Buffet  Island,  that  lies  E.  N.  E.  J  E.  one  mile 
from  the  entrance.  To  sail  into  it  you  must  pass  to  the  northward  of  the  islands 
in  the  mouth. 

About  fou«^  miles  from  the  south  point  of  Long  Island,  on  the  west  side,  lies 
Muscle  Harbour ;  vessels  bound  for  this  harbour  may  jnuig  between  Long  Island 
and  Barren  Island,  which  is  a  high  barren  island,  about  a  u^^(,  long,  and  about 
one-third  of  a  mile  from  Long  Island.  The  (entrance  into  the  hu.i>our  lies  op- 
posite the  north  end  of  Barren  Island,  and  is  between  a  low  green  point  ^n  your 
starboard  hand,  and  a  small  island  on  your  larboard  hand ;  this  harbour  is  Dc>-jr 
two  miles  long,  and  one  broad ;  in  it  is  from  10  to  22  fathoms  water,  rocky  bottom^ 

Little  South  Harbour  lies  one  mile  to  the  westward  of  Little  Harbour ;  be- 
fore the  mouth  of  it  are  several  rocky  islands :  in  sailing  into  the  harbour  you 
must  leave  all  the  islands  on  your  starboard  hand,  except  one,  on  either  side  of 
which  is  a  safe  passage  of  15  fathoms  water.  On  the  east  shore,  within  the  isl- 
ands, is  a  sunken  rock  about  one  cable's  length  from  the  shore,  which  generally 
breaks :  nearly  opposite,  on  the  west  shore,  are  some  rocks  about  half  a  cable's 
length  from  the  shore,  that  show  at  one  third  ebb.  This  harbour  is  about  one 
and  a  hstlf  mile  long,  near  half  a  mile  wide,  with  7  fathoms  water,  good  bottom. 

Great  South  Harbour  lies  about  one  mile  to  the  northward  of  Little  South 
Harbour;  there  is  no  danger  in  sailing  into  it;  near  the  head  is  very  good  an- 
chorage in  6  or  7  fathoms  water. 

One  mile  to  the  westward  of  Great  South  Harbour  is  Isle  au  Bordeaux,  a  high 
round  island  near  the  main. 

The  entrance  in  Come-by-chance,  lies  north  four  miles  from  Isle  au  Bordeaux, 
and  runs  up  N.  E.  by  N.  three  miles ;  in  it  is  from  20  to  3  fathonis  water,  sandy 
bottom ;  is  entirely  exposed  to  the  S.  W.  winds,  which  heave  in  a  very  great 
swell. 

North  Harbour  is  N.  W.  two  and  a  half  miles  from  Come-by-chance,  and  S. 
E.  by  E.  two  and  and  a  half  miles  from  Piper's  Hoie;  about  two  miles  from 
the  entrance  is  good  anchorage  in  7  fathoms  water,  and  no  danger  sailmg  into  it. 

*    ;a 


Directions  for  navigating  on  part  of  the  south  Coast  of  NewrouDdland* 

[^f•  B.  All  bearings  and  courses  hereafter  mentioned  are  the  true  bearings  and 

courses,  and  not  by  compass.} 

Cape  Cbapeaurouge,  or  the  mountain  of  the  Red  Hat,  is  situated  on  the  west 
«ide  of  Placentia  bay,  in  the  latitude  of  46°  53'  North,  and  lies  nearly  west  17  or 
18  leagues  from  Cape  St.  Maries  ;  it  is  the  highest  and  most  remarkable  land  on 
that  part  of  the  coast,  appearing  ahovt'  the  restsomewhat  like  the  crown  ofahat« 
and  may  be  seen  in  clear  "weather  12  leagues. 

Close  to  the  eastward  of  Csipe  Cbapeaurouge  are  the  harbours  of  Great  and 
Little  St.  Lawrence.  To  sail  into  Great  St.  Lawrence,  which  is  the  western- 
most, there  is  no  danger  but  what  lies  very  near  the  shore  ;  taking  care  with  wes* 
terly,  and  particularly  S.  W.  winds,  not  to  come  too  near  the  Hat  Mcmntain,  to 
avoid  the  flerrys  and  eddy  winds  under  the  high  lands.  The  course  in,  is  first 
N.  W.  till  you  open  the  upper  part  of  the  harbour,  then  N.  N.  W.  i  West ;  the 
best  pluce  for  Urge  ships  to  anchor,  and  the  best  ground  is  before  a  cove  on  the 
east  side  of  the  harbour  in  13  fathoms  water,  a  little  above  Blue  Beach  Point, 
which  is  the  first  point  on  the  west  side  ;  here  you  lie  only  two  points  open  :  you 
w.iy  anchor  any  where  between  this  point  and  the  point  of  Low  Beach,  on  the 
same  side  near  the  head  of  the  harbour,  observing  that  close  to  the  west  shore, 
the  ground  is  not  so  good  as  on  the  other  side.  Fishing  vessels  lay  at  the  head  of 
the  harbour  above  the  beaoh,  sheltered  from  all  winds. 

73 


/i 


m 


578 


blurt's  AMERICAW  C0A8T  PILOT. 


To  Bjdtlnto  Ltttle  St.  Lawrence,  you  must  keep  the  west  shore  on  board,  in 
*rder  to  avoid  a  sunlcen  rock  which  lies  a  little  without  the  point  of  the  Penin- 
sula which  stretches  off  from  the  east  side  of  the  harbour:  you  anchor  above 
this  peninsula  (which  covers  you  from  the  sea  winds)  in  S  and  4  fathoms  water,  a 
fine  sandy  bottom.  In  these  harbours  are  ^ood  fishing  conveniences,  and  plenty 
«f  wood  and  water.  Ships  may  anchor  without  the  Penmsula  m  12  fathoms  good 
ground,  but  open  to  the  S-  S.  E. 

Sanker  Head  Ires  3  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Chapeaurouge  ;  it  is  a  pret- 
ty high  round  point,  off '"ti'^h  lie  some  sunken  rocks,  about  a  cable's  length  from 
the  shore. 

Garden  P-"'Ki  whereen  is  rom  7  to  17  fathoms  water,  lies  about  half  a  mile  off 
from  T-'it'e  St.  Lawrence,  with  Blue  Beach  Point  on  with  the  east  point  of  Great 
St.  Lawrence. 

Perryland  Head  lies  S.  W.  one  mile  from  Cape  Chapeaurouge ;  it  is  a  high 
rocky  island,  just  separated  from  the  main:  this  head  and  Cape  Chapeaurouge, 
are  sufScient  marks  to  know  the  harbours  of  St.  Lawreuce. 

West,  five  miles  from  Ferryland  Head,  lies  the  bay  of  Laun,  in  the  bottom  of 
which  are  two  small  inlets,  called  Great  and  Little  Laun.  Little  Laun,  which  ia 
the  easternmost,  lies  open  to  the  S.  W.  winds,  which  generally  prevail  upon  this 
coast;  and  therefore  no  place  to  anchor  in.  Great  Laun  lies  in  about  N.  by  E. 
two  miles,  is  near  half  a  mile  wide,  whereon  is  from  14  to  3  fathoms  water.  To 
sail  into  it,  yen  must  be  careful  to  avoid  a  sunken  rock,  which  lies  about  a  quar- 
ter of  a  mile  off  from  the  east  point.  The  best  place  ta  anchor  is  on  Ihe  east 
side,  about  half  a  mile  from  the  head,  in  6  and  5  fathoms;  the  bottom  is  pretty 
good,  and  you  are  sheltered  from  all  winds,  except  S.  and  S.  by  W.  which  blow 
vight  in  and  cause  a  great  8weil.  At  the  head  of  this  place  is  a'bar  harbour,  in- 
to which  boats  can  go  at  half  tide,  and  conveniences  for  a  fishery,  and  plenty  of 
wood  and  water. 

Off  the  west  point  of  Laun  Bay  he  the  islands  of  the  same  name,  not  far  from 
the  shore ;  the  westernmost  and  outermost  of  which  lie  west,  southerly,  ten 
miles  from  Ferryland  Head  :  near  ?.  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  this 
island  is  a  rock  whereon  the  sea  breaks  in  very  bad  weather:  there  are  other 
sunken  rocks  about  these  islands,  but  they  are  no  ways  dangerous,  being  very 
near  the  shore. 

Taylor's  Bay,  which  lies  open  to  the  sea,  is  three  miles  to  the  westward  of 
Laun  Islands ;  off  the  east  point  are  some  sunken  rocks,  near  a  quarter  of  a  mile 
from  the  shore. 

A  little  to  the  westward  of  Taylor's  Bay,  there  stretches  out  a  low  jioint  of 
land,  called  Point  Aux  Gaul ;  off  which  lies  a  rock  above  water,  half  a  mile  from 
the  shore,  called  Gaul  Shag  Rock;  this  rock  lies  W.  I  S.  five  leagues  from  Fer- 
ryland Head  ;  you  have  14  fathoms  close  to  the  off  side  of  it,  but  between  it  and 
the  point  are  some  sunken  rocks. 

From  Point  Aux  Gaul  Shag  Rock  to  the  Islands  of  Lamelin,  is  W.  I  N.  one 
Iea;;ue ;  between  them  is  the  Bay  of  Lamelin,  wherein  is  very  shallow  water, 
and  several  small  islands  and  rocks,  both  above  and  under  water,  and  in  the  bot- 
toiy^  of  it  is  a  salraon  river. 

The  two  islands  of  Lamelln  (which  are  but  low)  lie  off  the  west  point  of  the 
h^y  of  the  same  name,  and  lie  W.  |  S.  six  leagues  from  the  mountains  of  the 
Red  Hat ;  but  in  steering  along  shore  making  a  W.  by  S.  course  good,  will  car- 
ry you  clear  of  all  danger.  Small  vessels  may  anchor  in  the  road  between  these 
islands  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  tolerably  well  sheltered  from  the  weather.  Nearly  in 
the  middle  of  the  passage,  going  in  between  the  two  islands,  is  a  sunken  rock, 
which  yoa  avoid  by  keeping  nearer  to  one  side  than  the  other;  'he  most  room 
is  on  th<!  east  side.  The  easternmost  island  communicates  wit'i  the  main  at  low 
water,  by  a  narrow  beach,  over  which  boats  can  go  at  high  water  into  the  N.  W. 
arm  of  Lamelln  Bay,  where  they  lie  in  safety.  Here  are  conveniences  for  a 
fishery,  but  little  or  no  Avood  of  any  sort.  Near  to  the  south  point  of  the  west- 
ernmost island  is  a  rock  pretty  high  above  water,  called  Lamelin  Shag  Rock ;  in 
going  into  the  road  between  the  islands,  you  leave  this  rock  on  your  Ivrboard  side. 
Lamelin  Ledges  lie  along  the  shore,  between  Lamelin  Islands  and  Point  May, 


BLUNT'9    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


579 


which  is  tiirec  leagaes,  and  are  very  dangerous,  some  of  them  being  three  milefi 
from  the  land.  To  avoid  these  ledges  in  the  day  time,  you  must  not  bring  tlie 
Islands  of  Lamelln  to  the  southward  of  east,  until  Point  May,  or  the  western 
extremity  of  the  land  bears  N.  by  E.  from  you;  you  may  then  steer  to  the 
northward  with  safety,  between  Point  May  and  Green  Island.  In  the  night,  or 
foggy  weather,  you  ought  to  be  very  careful  not  to  approach  these  ledges  with- 
in 30  fathoms  water,  lest  you  get  entangled  amongst  them.  Between  them  and 
the  main  are  various  soundings  from  16  to  5  fathoms. 

All  the  land  about  Cape  Chapeaurouge  and  Laun,  is  high  and  hilly  close^tothe 
sea ;  from  Laun  Islands  to  Lamelin  it  is  of  a  moderate  height ;  from  Lamelin  to 
Point  May,  the  land  near  the  shore  is  very'low,  with  sandy  beaches,  but  a  little 
way  inland  are  mountains. 

The  island  of  St.  Peter's  lies  in  the  latitude  46°  46'  north,  W.  by  S.  near 
twelve  leagues  from  Cape  Chapeaurouge,  and  W.  by  S.  ^  S.  five  leagues  ft-^m 
the  islands  of  Lamelin  ;  it  is  about  five  leagues  in  circuit,  nnd  pretty  high,  with 
a  craggy,  broken,  uneven  surface.  Coming  from  the  westward,  as  soon  as  you 
raise  Gallantry  Head,  which  is  the  south  point  of  the  island,  it  will  make  m  a 
round  hummock,  like  a  small  island,  and  aupeara'as  if  separated  from  St.  Peter's. 
On  the  east  side  of  the  island,  a  little  to  the  N.  E.  of  Gallantry  Head,  lie  three 
small  islands,  the  innermost  of  which  is  the  largest,  called  Dog  Island  ;  within 
this  island  is  the  road  and  harbour  of  St.  Peter's  ;  the  harbour  is  but  small,  and 
hath  in  it  from  12  to  20  feet  water;  but  there  is  a  bar  across  the  entrance, 
where%n  there  is  but  6  feet  at  low  water,  and  12  or  14  feet  at  high  water.  The 
road  which  lies  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  Dog  Island  will  admit  ships  of  any  bur- 
then, but  it  is  only  fit  for  the  summer  season,  being  open  to  the  N.  £.  winds; 
you  mfiy  lie  in  8,  10,  or  12  fathoms,  and  for  the  most  part  is  a  hard  rocky  bot- 
tom ;  there  is  very  little  clear  ground  ;  ships  of  war  commonly  buoy  their  ca- 
bles ;  the  best  ground  is  near  the  north  shore.  Going  in  or  out,  you  must  not 
range  too  near  the  east  side  of  Boar  Island,  which  is  the  easternmost  of  the  three 
islan'js  Bbove-mentloned,  for  fear  of  some  sunken  rocks  which  lie  east  about  one 
mile  from  it,  and  which  is  the  only  danger  about  St.  Peter's,  but  wh^t  lies  very 
near  the  shore. 

The  island  of  Columbo  is  a  small  circuit,  but  pretty  high,  and  lies  very  near 
the  N.  E.  point  of  St.  Peter's ;  between  them  is  a  very  good  passage,  one-third  of 
a  mile  wide,  wherein  is  12  fathoms  water.  On  the  north  side  of  the  island  is  a 
rock  pretty  high  above  water  called  Little  Colombo  :  and  about  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  N.  E.  from  this  rock  is  a  sunken  rock,  whereon  is  2  fathoms  water. 

The  island  of  Langly,  which  lies  on  the  N.  Vf.  side  of  St,  Pet*;r's,  is  about 
eight  leagues  in  circuit,  of  a  moderate  and  pretty  equal  height,  except  the  north 
end,  which  is  a  low  point,  with  sand  hills  along  it ;  it  is  flat  a  little  way  oft"  the 
low  land  on  both  sides  of  it ;  but  all  the  high  part  of  the  island  is  very  bold-tu, 
and  the  passage  between  it  and  St.  Peter's  (which  is  one  league  broad)  is  clear 
of  danger.  You  may  anchor  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  the  island,  a  little  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  Sand  Hills,  in  5  and  6  fathoms,  a  fine  sandy  bottom,  sheltered  from 
the  southerly,  S.  W.  and  N.  W-  winds. 

There  is  no  passage  between  the  north  point  of  Langly  and  the  south  point  af 
the  island  of  Miquelon,  which  island  is  four  leagues  iu  length  from  north  to 
south,  but  of  an  unequal  breadth ;  the  middle  of  the  island  is  high  land,  called 
the  high  land  of  Dunn  ;  but  down  by  the  shore  it  is  low,  except  Cape  Miquelon, 
which  is  a  lofty  promontory  at  the  northern  extremity  of  the  island. 

On  the  S.  E.  side  of  the  island,  to  the  southward  of  the  high  land,  is  a  pretty 
large  bar  harbour,  called  Dunn  Harbour,  which  will  admit  fishing  shallops  at 
half  flood,  but  can  never  be  of  any  utility  for  a  fishery- 

Miquelon  Rock  stretches  off  from  the  east  point  of  the  island  ndtr  the  hiRh 
land  one  and  a  quarter  mile  to  the  eastward,  some  are  abov*,  .nd  some  under 
water;  the  outermost  of  these  rocks  are  above  water,  and  you  have  12  fathonta 
close  to  them,  and  13  and  20  fathoms  one  mile  off.  N.  E.  4  N.  four  or  fire  miles 
from  thesr  rocks  lies  Miquelon  bank,  whereon  is  6  fathoms  water. 

The  road  of  Miquelon  (which  is  large  and  spacious)  lies  at  the  north  end,  and 
^1  the  east  side  of  the  island,  between  Cape  Miquelon  and  a  very  remarkable 


mp 


BLDWT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


roand  moHntaIn  near  the  shoro,  called  Chapeaux  :  off  the  south  point  of  the 
road  are  some  sunken  rocks,  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  but  every 
■where  else  it  is  clear  of  danger.  The  best  anchorage  is  near  the  bottom  of  the 
road  in  6  and  7  fathoms,  fine  sandy  bottom  ;  you  lie  open  to  the  easterly  winds, 
which  seldom  blow  in  the  summer. 

Cape  Miquelon,  or  the  northern  extremity  of  the  island,  is  high  bluff  land ; 
«nd  when  you  are  four  or  five  leagues  to  the  eastward  or  westward  of  it,  you 
would  take  it  for  an  island,  by  reason  the  land  at  the  bottom  of  the  road  is  very 
low. 

The  Seal  Rocks  are  two  rocks  above  water,  lying  one  league  and  a  half  off 
from  the  middle  of  the  west  side  of 'the  isla»d  Miquelon  ;  the  pii-«  ige  between 
them  and  the  island  is  very  safe,  and  you  have  14  or  15  fathoms  wiihin  a  cable's 
length  all  round  them. 

Green  Island,  which  is  about  three-fourths  of  a  mile  in  circuit,  and  low,  lies 
N.  E.  five  miles  from  St.  Peter's,  and  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  channel,  be- 
tween it  and  Point  May  on  Newfoundland :  on  the  south  side  of  this  island  are 
some  rocks  both  above  and  under  water,  extending  themselves  one  aile  and  a 
^quarter  to  the  S.  W.  • 

Description  of  Fortune  Bay. 

Fortime  Bay  is  very  large;  the  entrance  is  formed  by  Point  May  an^  Fas? 
Island,  which  are  twelve  leagues  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  from  each  other,  and 
it  is  about  twenty-three  leagues  deep,  wherein  are  a  great  many  bays,  harbours 
and  islands. 

The  island  of  Brunet  is  situated  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance  into 
Fortune  Bay ;  it  is  about  flvb  leagues  in  circuit,  and  of  a  tolerable  height ;  the 
east  end  appears,  at  some  points  of  view,  like  islands,  by  reason  it  is  very  low 
and  narrow  in  two  places.  On  the  N.  E.  side  of  the  island  is  a  bay,  wherein  is 
tolerable  good  anchorage  for  ships  in  14  and  16  fathoms,  sheltered  from  south- 
erly and  westerly  winds ;  you  must  not  run  too  far  in  for  fear  of  some  sunken 
rocks  in  th^  bottom  of  it,  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  thenshore  ;  opposite  this  bay, 
'  on  the  south  side  of  the  island,  is  a  small  cove,  wherein  small  vessels  and  shal- 
lops can  lie  pretty  secure  from  the  weather,  in  6  fathoms  water;  in  the  middle 
x)f  the  cove  is  a  rock  above  Water,  and  a  channel  on  each  side  of  it.  The  islands 
lyinf;  at  the  west  end  of  Brunet,  called  Little  Brunets,  afford  indifferent  shelter 
for  fihallops  in  blowing  weather ;  you  may  approach  these  islands,  and  the  island 
of  Bl  unet,  wi^in  a  quarter  of  a  mile  all  round,  there  being  no  danger  but  what 
lies  very  near  the  shore. 

Plate  islands  are  three  rocks  of  a  moderate  height  lying  S.  W.  one  lcag:ue 
from  the  west  end  of  Great  Brunet.  The  southernmost  and  outermost  of  these 
rocks  lie  W.  by  S.  |  S.  eleven  miles  from  Cape  Miquelon,  and  in  a  direct  line 
between  Point  May  and  Pass  island,  seventeen  miles  trom  the  former,  and  nine- 
teen from  the  latter ;  S.  E.  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  Great  Plate  (which  is 
the  northernmost)  is  a  sunken  rock,  whereon  the  sea  breaks,  which  is  the  only 
danger  about  them. 

There  are  several  strong  and  irregular  settings  of  the  tides  or  currents  about 
the  Plate  and  Brunet  Islands  which  seem  to  have  no  dependency  on  the  moon, 
and  the  course  of  the  tides  on  the  coast. 

The  island  of  Sagona,  which  lies  N.  N.  E.  two  leagues  from  the  east  end  of 
Brunet,  is  about  three  miles  and  a  half  in  circuit,  of  a  moderate  height,  and  bold- 
to  all  round  ;  at  the  S.  W.  end  is  a  small  creek  that  will  admit  fishing  shallops ; 
in  the  middle  of  the  entrance  is  a  sunken  rock,  which  makes  it  exceeding  nar- 
row, and  difficult  to  get  in  or  out,  except  in  fine  weather. 

Point  May  is  the  southern  extremity  of  Fortune  Bay,  and  the  S.  W.  extremity 
of  this  part  of  Newfoundland  ;  it  may  be  known  by  a  great  black  rock  nearly 
joining  to  the  pitch  of  the  point  and  something  higher  than  the  land,  which 
makes  it  look  like  a  black  hummock  on  the  point ;  near  a  quarter  of  a  mile  »"2;ht 
off  from  the  point,  or  this  round  black  rodk,  are  three  sunken  rocks  whereon  the 
«ea  always  breaks. 


BLUNT'3  AMKRICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


681 


Near  two  miles  north  from  Point  May,  Is  Little  Dantzick  Cove,  and  half  h 
league  from  Little  Dautzick  is  Great  Dantzlck  Cove;  these  coves  are  no  placeH 
of  safety,  being  open  to  the  westerly  winds  ;  the  hind  about  them  is  of  a  moderate 
height,  bold  too,  and  clear  of  wood. 

From  Dantzick  Point  (which  is  the  north  point  of  the  covos)  to  Fortune,  the 
course  is  N.  K.  near  three  leagues  ;  the  land  lictween  them  near  the  ehore  is  of  a 
moderate  heij;,l<t,  and  bold-to;  you  will  have  in  most  places  lO  and  12  fathoms 
two  cables  len^^th  from  the  shore,  30  and  40  one  mile  off,  and  70  and  CO  two 
miles  off.  Fortune  lies  north  from  the  east  end  of  Rrunet;  it  is  a  bar  place  that 
will  admit  fishing  boats  at  a  quarter  flood  ;  and  a  fishin};  villai^e  situated  in  the 
bottom  of  a  small  bay  wherein  is  anchorage  for  shipping  in  G,  8,  10  and  12  fa- 
thoms ;  the  ground  is  none  of  the  best ;  and  j'oti  lay  open  to  near  half  the  compass. 

Cape  of  Grand  Bank,  is  a  pretty  high  point,  lying  one  league  N.  E.  from  For- 
tune; into  the  eastward  of  the  cape  is  Ship  Cove,  wherein  is  good  ajjchorage  for 
shipping,  in  8  and  10  fathoms,  sheltered  from  southerly,  westerly,  and  N.  W. 
winds.  Grand  Bank  lies  E.  S.  G.  a  half  league  from  the  cape  ;  it  is  a  fishing  vil- 
lage and  a  bar  harbour,  that  will  admit  of  fishing  shallops  at  a  quarter  flood  ;  to 
this  place  and  Fortune,  resort  the  crews  of  fishing  ships,  who  lay  their  ships  up  in 
harbour  Britain.  From  the  Cape  of  Grand  Bank  to  Point  Enragee,  the  course 
is  N.  E.  i  E.  eight  leagues,  forming  a  bay  between  them,  in^  which  the  shore  is 
low,  with  several  sandy  beaches,  behind  which  are  bar  harbours  that  will  admit 
boats  on  the  tide  of  flood,  the  largest  of  which  is  Great  Garnish,  five  leagues  from 
<urand'Bank;  it  may  be  known  by  several  rocks  above  water,  lying  before  it ; 
two  miles  from  the  shore,  the  outmost  of  these  rocks  are  steep  too,  but  between 
them  and  the  shore  are  dangerous  sunken  rocks.  To  the  eastward,  and  within 
these  rocks,  is  Frenchman's  Cove,  wherein  you  may  anchor  with  small  vessels  in 
4  and  5  fathoms  water,  tolerably  well  sheltered  from  the  sea  winds,  and  seems  a 
convenient  place  for  the  cod  fishery. — The  passage  in  is  to  the  eastward  of  the 
rocks  that  are  the  highest  above  water ;  between  them  and  some  other  lower 
rocks  lying  off  to  the  eastward  from  the  east  point  of  the  cove,  there  is  a  sunken 
rock  nearly  in  the  middle  of  this  passage  which  you  must  be  aware  of.  You  may 
anchor  any  where  under  the  shore,  between  G  rand  Bank  and  Great  Garnish  in 
8  and  10  fathoms  water,  but  you  are  only  sheltered  from  the  land  winds. 

Point  Enragee  is  but  low,  but  a  little  way  in  the  country  is  high  land  ;  this 
point  may  be  known  by  two  hummocks  upon  it  close  to  the  shore,  but  you  must 
be  very  near,  otherwise  the  elevation  of  the  high  lands  will  hinder  you  from  dis- 
covering them  ;  close  to  the  point  is  a  rock  under  water. 

From  Point  Enragee  to  the  head  of  the  bay  the  course  is  first  N.  E.  i  E.  three 
leagues  to  Grand  Jcrvey  ;  then  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.  seven  and  a  half  leagues  to  the 
bead  of  the  bay  ;  the  land  in  g'-neral  along  the  south  side  is  high,  bold-to,  and 
of  an  uneven  height,  with  hills  and  valleys  of  various  extent;  the  valleys  for  the 
most  part  clothed  with  wood,  and  watered  w  ith  small  rivulets. 

Seven  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Point  Enragee,  is  the  bay  L'Argent,  wherein 
you  may  anchor  in  30  or  40  fathoms  water,  sheltered  from  all  winds. 

The  entrance  of  harbour  Mille  is  to  the  eastward  of  the  east  point  of  L'Ar- 
gent; before  this  harbour  and  the  bay  L'Argent,  is  a  remavkable  rock,  that  at  a 
distance  appears  like  a  shallop  under  sail.  Harbour  Millc  branches  into  two 
arms,  one  lying  in  to  the  N.  E.  and  the  other  towards  the  E.  at  the  upper  part 
of  both  is  good  anchorage,  and  various  sorts  of  wood.  Between  this  harbour  and 
Point  Enragee,  are  several  bar  harbours  in  small  bays,  wherein  are  sandy 
beaches,  off  which  vessels  may  anchor,  but  they  must  be  very  near  the  shore  to 
be  in  a  moderate  depth  of  water. 

Cape  Mille  lies  N.  N.  E.  i  E.  one  league  from  the  before-mentioned  Shallop 
Rock,  and  near  three  leagues  from  the  head  of  Fortune  Bay  is  a  high,  reddish 
barren  rock.  The  width  of  Fortune  Bay  at  Cape  Mille,  does  not  exceed  half  a 
league,  but  immediately  below  it,  it  is  twice  as  wide,  by  which  this  cape  m.iy 
easily  be  known :  above  this  cape  the  land  on  both  sides  is  high,  with  steep  crag- 
gy cliffs.  The  head  of  the  bay  is  terminated  by  a  low  beach,  behind  which  is  a 
large  pond  or  bar  harbour,  info  which  boats  can  go  at  quarter  flood.  In  this  and 
all  the  bar  harbours  between  it  and  Grand  Bank,  are  convenient  places  for  build- 
hg  of  stages,  and  good  beaches  for  drying  offish,  for  great  numbers  of  boats. 


^, 


^<.^. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


^ 


^ 


e  ^^% 

S' 


1.0 


LI 


US  ^" 

■^  Itt    |22 

£   1^    12.0 


U£ 


1  i^  llll.'-^  IU4 

< 

6"     

► 

HiotDgraphic 

Sdences 

Corporation 


r<\^ 


^ 


fN^-       .,«g8»'  ^m 


V 


^\^\ 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WIKSTIR.N.Y.  MStO 

(71«)«73-4S03 


582 


WLUNt'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


tf 


r 


Grand  L'Pierre  is  a  good  harbour,  situated  on  the  north  side  of  the  bay,  half  a 
league  from  the  head ;  you  can  see  no  entrance  until  you  are  abreast  of  it ;  there 
is  not  the  least  danger  in  going  in,  and  you  may  anchor  in  any  depth  from  8  to 
4  fathoms,  sheltered  from  all  winds. 

English  Harbour  lies  a  little  to  the  westward  of  Grand  L'Pierre ;  it  is  very 
small  and  fit  only  for  boats  and  small  vessels. 

To  the  westward  of  English  Harbour  is  a  small  bay  called  Little  bay  deLeau, 
wherein  are  some  small  islands,  behind  which  is  shelter  for  small  vess^ols. 

New  Harbour  is  situated  opposite  Cape  Mille,  to  the  westward  of  Bay  de  Lean ; 
it  is  but  a  small  inlet,  yet  hath  good  anchorage  on  the  west  side  in  9,  8,  7  and  5 
fathoms  water,  sheltered  from  the  S.  W.  winds. 

Harbour  Femmc.  which  lies  half  a  league  to  the  westward  of  New  Harbour, 
lies  in  N.  E.  Half  a  league,  is  very  narrow,  aud  hath  in  it  S3  fathoms  water ;  be- 
'  fore  the  entrance  is  an  island,  near  to  which  _  are  some  rocks  above  water  :  the 
passage  into  the  harbour  is  to  the  eastward  of  the  island. 

One  league  to  the  westward  of  Harbour  Femme,  is  a  small  eove  called  Brew- 
er's Hole,  wherein  is  shelter  for  fishing  boats ;  before  this  cove  is  a  small  island 
near  the  shore,  and  some  rocks  above  water. 

Harbour  le  Gonte  is  situated  one  mile  to  the  westward  of  Brewer's  Hole,  be- 
fore which  are  twoiblands,  one  without  the  other ;  the  outermost  of  which  is  the 
largest,  is  of  a  tolerable  height,  and  lies  in  a  line  with  the  coast,  and  is  not  easy 
to  be  distinguished  from  the  main  in  sailing  along  the  shore.  To  sail  into  this 
harbour,  the  best  passage  is  on  the  ivest  side  of  the  outer  island,  and  between  the 
two  ;  as  soon  as  you  begin  to  open  the  harbour,  you  must  keep  in  the  inner  is- 
land close  on  bdkrd,  in  order  to  avoid  some  stmken  rocks  that  lay  near  a  small 
island  which  you  will  discover  between  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  outer  island  and 
the  opposite  point  on  the  ihain  ;  and  likewise  another  rock  under  water,  which 
lays  higher  up  on  the  side  of  the  main ;  this  rock  appears  at  low  water.  As  soon 
as  you  are  above  these  dangers,  you  may  steer  up  in  the  middle  of  the  channel, 
until  you  open  a  fine  spacious  basin,  wherein  you  may  anchor  in  any  depth  from 
5  to  17  fathoms  water,  shut  up  from  all  winds ;  the  bottom  is  sand  and  mud.  In 
to  the  eastward  of  the  outer  island,  is  a  small  cove  fit  for  small  vessels  and  boats, 
and  conveniencies  for  the  fishery. 

Long  harbour  lies  four  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  harbour  le  Gonte,  and 
N.  E.  by  N.  five  leagues  from  Point  l^nragee ;  it  may  be  known  by  a  small  island 
in  the  mouth  of  it,  called  Gull  island ;  and  half  a  mile  without  this  island  is  a 
rock  above  water,  that  hath  the  appearance  of  a  small  boat.  There  is  a  passage 
into  the  harbour  on  each  side  of  the  ib!  nd,  but  the  broadest  is  the  westernmost. 
Nearly  in  the  middle  of  this  passage,  a  little  without  the  island,  is  a  ledge  of  rocks, 
whereon  is  two  fathoms  water :  a  little  within  the  island  on  the  S.  E.  are  some 
sunken  rocks,  abodt  two  cables'  length  from  the  shore,  lying  off  two  sandy  coves; 
some  of  these  rocks  appear  at  low  water.*  On  the  N.  W.  side  of  the  harbour 
two  miles  within  the  island  is  Morgan's  Gove,  wherein  you  may  anchor  in  15 
fathoms  water,  and  the  only  place  you  can  anchor  unless  you  run  into,  or  above 
the  Narrows,  being  every  where  else  very  deep  water.  This  harbour  rum 
five  leagues  into  the  country,  at  the  head  of  which  is  a  salmon  fishery. 

A  little  to  the  westward  of  Long  harbour  is  Bell  bay,  which  extends  three 
leagues  every  way,  and  contains  several  hays  and  harbours.  On  the  east  point 
of  this  bay  is  Hare  harbour,  which  is  fit  only  for  small  vessels  and  boats,  before 
which  are  two  small  '»ii>nd3,  and  some  rocks  above  and  under  water. 

Twc  miles  to  the  n^r^hward  of  Hare  harbour,  or  the  point  of  Bell  bay,  is  Mall 
bay,  being  a  narrow  arm,  lying  in  N.  E.  by.  N.  five  miles,  wherein  is  deep  water, 
and  no  anchorage  until  at  the  head- 
Rencontre  islands  lie  to  the  v^estward  of  Mall  bay,  near  the  shore  :  the  west- 
ernmost which  is  the  largest,  has  a  communication  with  the  main  at  low  water; 
in  and  about  this  island  are  shelter  for  small  vessels  and  bouts. 

Bell  harbour  lies  one  league  to  the  westward  of  Rencontre  islands :  the  pas- 
sage into  tho  harbour  is  on  the  west  side  of  the  island  :  in  the  mouth  of  it,  as 
soon  as  you  are  within  the  island,  you  will  open  a  small  cove  on  the  east  side, 
wherein  small  vessels  anchor,  but  large  ships  must  run  up  to  the  head  of  the  har- 
bour, and  anchor  in  SO  fathoms  water,  there  being  most  room. 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


5QS 


rre ;  it  ia  very 


lislljr  cove  lies  a  little  to  the  westward  of  Bell  harbour :  It  is  a  very  snug  p):ice 
for  small  vessels,  being  covered  from  all  winds  behind  the  island  in  the.  cove. 

Lally  head  is  the  west  point  of  Lally  cove ;  it  is  a  high  bluff  white  point: 
to  the  northward  of  the  head  is  Lally  cove  back  cove,  wherein  you  muy  andior 
in  16  fathoms  water. 

Two  miles  toi  the  northward  of  Lally  cove  head,  ks  the  bay  of  the  east,  and' 
bay  of  the  north ;  in  both  is  deep  water^  and  no  ai^chnrage,  unless  very  near  the 
shore.  At  the  head  of  tlie  north  bay  is  the  largest  river  in  Fortune  bay,  and 
seems  a  good  place  for  a  salmon  fishery. 

The  bay  of  Cinq  isles  lie  to  the  southward  of  the  North  bay ;  and  opposite  to 
Lally  cove  head  there  is  tolerable  good  anchorage  for  large  ships  on  the  Si^  W. 
side  of  the  island  in  the  bottom  of  the  bay.  The  north  arm  is  a  very  snug  place 
for  small  vessels  ;  at  the  head  of  this  arm  is  a  salmon  river. 

A  little  to  the  southward  of  the  bay  of  Cinq  isles  is  Corben  bay,  wherein  is 
good  anchorage  for  any  ships  in  £2  or  S4  fathoms  water. 

South-east  about  two  miles  from  Lally  cove  head,  aretwaislandsaboutaiaile 
from  each  other;  the  north-easternmost  is  called  Bell  Island^  and  the  other  Dog. 
Island ;  they  are  of  a  tolerable  height,  and  bold-to  all  round. 

Between  Dog  Island  and  Lord  and  Lady  Island,,  which  lies  off  the  south  point 
of  Corben  bay,  is  a  sunken  rock  (somewhat  nearer  to  Lord  and  Lady,  than  Dog. 
Island)  whereon  the  sea  breaks  m  very  bad  weather,  and  every  where  round  it 
very  deep  water.  About  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  north  end 
of  Lord  and  Lady  Island,  is  a  rock  that  appears  at  low  water. 

Bande  de  La'rier  bay  lies  on  the  west  point  of  Bell  bay  and  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  near 
three  leagues  from  Point  Enragee ;  it  may  be  known  by  a  v^y  high  mountain 
over  the  bay,  which  rises  almost  perpendicular  from  the  sea,  called  Iron  .head. 
Chappel  Island,  which  forms  the  east  siic  of  the  bay,  is  high  land  also.  *The 
harbour  lies  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay,  jv.;3t  within  the  point,  formed  by  a  nar- 
row low  beach ;  it  is  very  small,  but  a  snug  place,  and  conveniently  situated  for 
the  cod  fishery.  There  is  a  tolerable  good  anchorage  along  the  west  side  of  the 
bay,  from  the  harbour  up  towards  Iron  head,  in  18  and  20  fathoms  water.^ 

The  bank  of  Bande  de  La'rier,  whereon  is  no  less  than  7  fathoms,  lies  with- 
the  beach  of  Bande  de  La'rier  harbour.  Just  open  of  the  west  point  of  the  bay, 
and  Boxy  point  on  with  the  north  end  of  St.  Jaques  island. 

Two  miles  to  the  westward  of  Bande  de  La'rier,  is  the  harbour  of  St.  Jaques, 
which  may  be  easily  known  by  the  island  before  it.  This  island  is  high  at  each 
endt  a9<i  low  in  the  middls,  and  at  a  distance  looks  like  two  islands,  it  lies  N.  30°  E. 
eight  and  a  half  leagues  from  the  cape  of  Grand  bank,  and  N.  E.  by.  E.  seven 
leagues  from  the  east  end  of  Brunet.  The  passage  into  the  harbour  is  onHhe 
west  side  of  the  island;  there  is  not  the  least  danger  in  going  in,  or  in  any  part 
of  the  harbour- ;  you  may  anchor  in  any  depth  from  17  to  4  fathoms. 

Two  miles  to  tne  westward  of  St.  Jaques  is  the  harbour  of  Blue  Pinion ;  it  is 
not  near  so  large,  or  so  safe  as  that  of  St.  Jaques  ;  near^to  the  head  of  the  har- 
bour, on  the  west  side,  is  a  shoal,  whereon  is  two  fathoim  at  low  wat^r. 

A  little  to  the  westward  of  Blue  Pinion  is  English  cove,  which  is  very  small, 
wherein  small  vessels  and  boats  can  anchor ;  before  it  and  very  near  the  shore  is 
a  small  island. 

Boxy  point  lies  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.  two  and  a  half  leagues  from  St.  Jaaues 
island,  N.  N.  E.  near  seven  leagues  from  the  cape  of  Grand  Bank,  and  N.  E.  i  E. 
thirteen  miles  from  the  east  end  of  Brunet  island ;  it  is  of  a  moderate  height,  the 
most  advanced  to  the  southward  of  any  land  on  the  coast,  and  may  be  distin- 
guished at  a  considerable  distance ;  there  are  some  sunken  rocks  off  it,  but  they 
lay  very  near  the  shore,  and  are  no  way  dangerous. 

N.  N.  E.  three  miles  from  Boxy  point,  is  the  harbour  of  Boxy  ;  to  sail  into  it 
you  must  keep  Boxy  point  just  open  of  Freyer's  head  (a  black  head  a  little  with- 
in the  point)  in  this  direction  you  will  keep  in  the  middle  of  the  channel  between 
the  shoals  which  lay  off  from  each  point  of  the  harbour,  where  the  stages  are ; 
ns  soon  as  you  are  within  these  shoals  which  cover  you  from  the  sea  winds,  you 
may  anchor  in  5  and  4  fathoms  water,  fine  sandy  ground. 
Wsst  one  mile  from  Boxy  point  is  the  island  of  St.  John's,  which  is  of  a  tole-> 


/d4 


BLUNT'S    AMEKICAPr   COAST    PILOT. 


rablft  height,  and  steep-to,  except  at  the  N.  E.  potiit  w^here  Is  a  shoal  a  little 

way  off- 
N.  W.  hair  a  league  rrotn  St.  John's  island  is  St  'John's  head,  which  is  a 

f^igh,  steep,  craggy  point.  Bet\vren  St.  John's  head  and  Boxy  point  is  St.  John's 

bay,  in  the  bottom  of  which  is  St.  John's  harbour,  wherein  is  only  water  for 

boats. 
On  the  north  side  of  St.  John's  head  are  two  rocky  islands,  called  the  Gull 

and  Shag ;  at  the  west  end  of  these  iulands  are  some  sunken  rocks. 

One  league  and  a  half  to  the  northward  of  St.  John's  head  is  the  Great  bay 

de  Lean,  wherein  is  good  anchorage  in  various  depths  of  water,  sheltered  Crt>m 

all  winds.    The  best  passage  in,  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  island,  lying  in  thb 

mouth  of  it ;  nothing  can  enter  in  on  the  west  side  but  sm!>!«  vessclc  and  shaK 

lops. 

To  the  westward  of  Bay  de  Leau,  three  miles  N.  N.  W.  trom  St.  John's  head, 
is  liittle  Bay  Barrisway,  on  the  west  side  6t  which  is  good  anchorage  for  large 
ships  in  7,  8,  or  10  fathoms  water ;  here  is  good  fishing  conveniences,  with 
plenty  of  wood  and  water. 

Harbour  Britain  lies  to  the  (vcstward  of  Little  Bay  Barrisway,  north  one  and 
ti  half  league  from  the  island  of  Sagona,  and  N.  by  E.  from  the  east  end  of  Bru- 
net.  The  two  heads  Which  form  the  entrance  of  this  harbour  or  Imy  are  pretty 
high,  and  lay  from  each  other  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W.  above  two  miles;  near 
the  east  head  is  h  rock  above  water,  by  which  it  may  be  known ;  there  are  n» 
dangers  in  going  in  until  you  are  the  length  of  the  soiith  point  of  the  S.  W.  arm, 
which  id  moi-e  th^n  a  mile  within  the  west  head  ;  from'  off  this  point  stretches 
out  a  ledge  of  rocks  N.  E.  about  two  cable's  length;  the  only  place  for  king's 
shipsfto  anchor Is  above  this  point,  before  the  S.  W.  arm,  in  16  or  18  fdthoms 
water,  mooring  nearly  E.  and  W.  and  so  near  the  shore  as  to  have  the  east  head 
on  with  the  point  above  mentioned ;  the  bottom  is  very goodj  and  the  place  con- 
venient for  wooding  and  watering.  In  the  S.  W.  arm  is  roon)  for  a  greaC  number 
of  merchant  ships,  and  ndfany  conveniencies  for  fishing  vessefs. 

Opposite  to  the  S.  W.  arm  is  the  N.  E.  arm,  or  jersey  man's  harbourj  Which 
is  capable  of  holding  a  great  number  of  ships  secut^iy  sheltered  (Vonr  all  winds. 
To  sail  into  it  you  must  keep  the  point  of  Thompson's  beach  (which  is  thc4)each 

Eoint  at  the  entrance  into  the  S.  W.  arm)  open  of  Jers^eyman's  head  (which  is  a 
igh  bluff  head  at  the  north  entrance  into  Jerseyihan's  nbrbour)  this  mark  will 
Ifiad  you  over  the  bar  in  the  best  channel,  where  you  will  have  S  fathoitts  at  low 
water ;  as  soon  as  you  open  the  hatbour,  haul  up  north,  and  anchor  where  it  it 
Most  convenient,  in  8,  7,  or  6  fathoms  water,  gOod  ground,  and  sheltered  front 
all  winds.  In  this  harbour  are  several  convenient  places  for  erecting  mapT  stages, 
and'  good  beach  room.  Jerscymen  generally  lay  their  ships  up  in  this  harbour, 
and  cure  their  fish  at  Fortune  and  Grand  ban|(. 

From  Harbour  Briton  to  the  west  end  of  Brunei,  and  to  the  Plbte  Islands,  the 
cout^e  is  S.  W.  by  S.  Oi^lcagues  to  the  southernmost  Plate.  From  the  harbour 
Briton  to  Cape  Miquelnn  is  S.  W.  i  W.  10  leagues.  Fi'om  the  west  head  of 
harbour  Bi'itbn  to  Cannaigre  head,  the  course  is  W.  by  S.  distant  two  leagues; 
between  them  Ate  Gull  Island  and  Deadman's  Bay.  Gull  Island  lies  close  under 
the  land,  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  harbour  Briton.  Deadman's  Bay  is  to 
the  Westward  of  Gull  Island,  wherein  you  may  anchor  with  the  land  winds. 
Between  harbour  Briton  and  Cannaigre  head,  ia  a  bank  stretching  off  ft-om  the 
shore  between  two  and  three  miles,  whereon  ;?  various  depths  of  water  from  34 
to  4  fathoms.  Fishermen  sny  that  thev  have  seen  the  sea  break,  in  very  bad 
Weather,  a  good  ^'ay  without  Gull  island. 

Cannaigre  head,  which  forms  the  east  point  of  the  bay  of  the  same  ndme,  lies 
north  easterly  three  and  a  half  leagues  from  the  west  end  of  Brunet ;  it  is  a  high 
craggy  point>  easy  to  be  distinguished  from  any  point  of  view.  From  this  head 
to  Bassaterre  point,  the  course  is  W.  by  N.  i  N.  two  leagues,  and  likewise  W. 
by  N.  i  N.  three  and  a  half  leagues  to  the  rocks  of  Pass  Island ;  but  to  give  them 
a  birth,  make  a  W.  by  N.  course  good.  Between  Cannqigre  head  and  Bassa- 
terre point  is  Cannaigre  bay,  which  extends  itself  about  four  leagues  inland,  at 
the  held  of  which  is  a  salmon  river.    In  the  mouth  of  tlie  hay  lay  the  rocks  of 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


686 


)al »  little 

which  is  a 

St.  John's 

'  water  for 

d  the  Gulf 


rth  one  and 
endofBru- 
are  pretty 
miles;  near 
thcFt  are  m 
S.  W.  arm, 
nt  stretches 
:e  for  king's 
■  18  f&thoms 
tie  east  head 
le  place  con- 
reat  number 


Islands,  the 
the  harbour 
rest  head  of 
wo  leagues; 
I  close  under 
I's  Bay  is  to 
land  winds, 
off  fi"om  the 
ater  from  34 
in  very  bad 


^e  iaiiie  name  abore  water ;  you  may  approach  these  roeki  very  near,  there 
being  no  danger  but  what  disco  yers  itself.  The  channel  between  them  aad  the 
north  shore  is  something  dangerous,  by  reason  of  a  range  of  rodcs  wldch  lie 
along  shore^  and  extend  themselves  one  mile  off. 

Cannaigre  harbour,  which  h  very  small,  with  7  fathoms  water  in  it,  is  within 
a  point  on  the  south  side  of  the  bay,  Ave  miles  above  the  head ;  the  passage  into 
the  hai^ur  is  on  the  S.  E.  side  of  the  land  lying  before  it.  Nearly  jn  the 
middle  of  the  bay,  abreast  of  this  harbour,  are  two  islands  of  a  tolerable  height ; 
on  the  south  side  of  the  westernmost  island,  which  is  Che  largest,  are  some  rocks 
above  water. 

Dawson's  cove  is  oq  the  N.  W.  side  of  the  bay,  bears  north,  distance  about 
four  miles  flrom  the  head',  and  east  two  miles  from  the  west  end  of  the  Great 
island.  In  it  are  good  Ashing  conveniences,  and  anchorage  for  vessels  in  6  and 
5  fkthoms  water,  but  they  win  lay  open  to  the  southerly  winds.  Between  the  S. 
W.  point  of  this  cove  and  Bassaterre  point,  which  is  five  miles  distance,  lays  t^e 
range  of  rocks  beibre-^mentioned. 

^ssaterre  point,  which  forms  the  west  point  ef  Cannaigre  bay,  is  of  a  mode- 
rate height,  crear  of  wood,  and  bold-to,  all  the  wa^  from  it  to  Pass  island,  wliich 
bears  N.  W.  by  W.  one  league  from  BassatSftrre  point. 

The  land  on  the  north  side  of  Fortune  bay,  for  the  most  part,  is  hilly,  rising 
directly  from  the  sea,  with  craggy,  barren  hills,  which  extend  four  or  five  leagues 
inland,  with  a  great  number  of  rivulets  and  ponds.  The  land  on  the  south  side 
of  Fortune  bay,  has  a  different  ap^.jwance  to  that  on  the  north  side,  being  not  so 
full  of  craggy  mountains,  and  better  clothed  with  Tfoods,  which  are  of  a  short 
brushy  kind,  which  makef  the  face  of  the  country  look  green. 

Pass  island  lies  N.  16^  SO*  E.  seven  and  a  half  leagues  from  Cape  Miqutlon ; 
it  is  thie  N,  W>  eictremit^  ok  Fortune  bay,  an^iea  very  near  the  shore,  is  more 
than  two  miles  in  circuit,  and  is  pretty  hi^  On  the  8.  W.  side  are  several 
ttck9  above  water,  which  extend  themselves  one  mile  from  the  island ;  and  on 
itm  N.  'W.^  sidei  is  a  shaken  rock,  at  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  island :  the  pas- 
sage between  this  island  and  the  main,  which  ia  near  two  cable's  length  wide,  is 
vary  safe  for  small  vessels,  whfsrein  you  may  anchor  in  0  fathoms,  a  fine  sandy 
hettom.  .  This  island  is  well  situated  for  the  cod  fishery,  there  being  very  good 
flaUng  ground  about  it. 

I»  thie  night  time,  or  in  foggy  weather,  ships  ought  to  place  no  great  depen- 
de»6e  on  the  aoun^ngs  in  Fortune  bay,  lest  they  may  be  deceived  thereby  s 
foi  you  have  ipore  water  in  many  parts  near  the  shore,  and  in  several  of  its  con^ 
taioed  bays  and  harbours,  than  ia  the  middle  of  thu  bay  itself. 

Description  of  Bermitage  Bay* 

♦ 

From  Pasar  Island  to  Great  Jarvis  harbour,  at  the  entrance  info  the  bay  of 
Despair,  the  course  is  N.  by  E.  i  B.  near  three  leagues;  and  from  Pass  Island 
to  the  west  end  of  Long  Island,  the  course  is  N.  N.  E.  eight  miles,  between  them 
is  ^e  bay  of  Hermitage,  which  lies  in  E.  N.  E.  eight  leagues  from  Pass  Island, 
witfi  very  deep  Water  in  most  parts  of  it. 

The  two  Fox  islands,  which  are  but  small,  lie  nearly  in  the  middle  of  Hermi- 
tace  bay,  three  leagues  and  a  half  f^om  Pass  island ;  near  to  these  islands  is  good 
fisning  ground. 

Hermitage  cove  is  on  the  south  side  of  the  bay,  opposite  to  Fox's  island ;  to 
sail  into  it,  you  mmt  keep  between  the  islands  and  the  south  shore,  where 
there  is  not  the  least  danger  ;  in  this  cove  is  good  anchorage  for  shipping  in 
8  and  10  fathoms  water,  and  good  fishing  conveniencies  with  plenty  of  wood 
and  water. 

Long  island,  which  separates  the  bay  of  Despair  from  Hermitage,  is  of  a  tri- 
angular form,  abiiut  eight  leagues  in  circuit,  of  a  tolerable  height,  is  hilly,  un- 
even, and  barren.  The  east  entrance  into  the  bay  of  Despair  from  Ilermi- 
ta{||e  bay,  is  by  the  west  end  of  Long  island :  about  half  a  mile  fronn  the  S.  W. 
pomt  of  the  said  island,  are  two  rocks  above  water,  with  deep  water  all  round 
them. 

74 


-■»iy-.--,j^ 


/\ 


686 


BLUNt's    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


Long  Island  harbour  lie*  on  the  touth  side  of  Long  tsland,  two  and  a  half  miles 
from  the  west  end ;  before  which  is  an  island,  and  several  rocks  above  water ; 
there  is  a  narrow  passage  into  the  harbour  on  each  side  of  the  island ;  this  har- 
bour is  formed  by  two  arms,  one  lying  into  the  north,  and  the  other  to  the  east- 
ward ;  they  are  both  very  narrow,  and  have  in  them  from  42  to  7  fathoms  water ; 
the  east  arm  is  the  deepest  and  best  anchorage. 

Round  harbour,  wherein  is  6  fathoms  water,  lies  near  two  miles  to  the  east- 
ward of  Long  island  harbour,  and  is  also  in  Long  island ;  it  will  only  admit  very 
small  vessels,  by  re^on  the  channel  going  in  ia  very  narrow. 

Harbour  Picarre  lies  N.  by  W.  half  a  ler^gue  from  Little  Fox  island,  (which  is 
the  westernmost  of  Fox  islands;)  to  sail  into  it,  you  must  keep  near  the  west 
|>oint,  to  avoid  some  sunken  rocks  off  the  other,  and  anchor  in  the  first  cove  on 
the  east  side,  in  9  or  10  fathoms,  sheltered  from  all  winds. 

Galtaus  harbour,  which  is  but  small,  lies  near  the  east  point  of  Long  island ; 
at^the  entrance  are  several  rocky  islands.  The  best  channel  into  the  harbour 
is  on  the  west  side  of  these  islands,  wherein  is  4  fathoms  water,  but  in  the  har- 
bour is  from  15  to  24  fathoms.  Here  are  several  placet  proper  for  erecting  stages ; 
and  both  this  harbour  and  Picarre  are  conveniently  situated  for  a  fishery,  they 
lying  contiguous  to  the  fishing  grounds  about  Fox  wlands. 

Between  the  east  end  of  Long  island  and  the  main,  i»  a  very  good  passage  out 
of  Hermitage  bay,  into  the  bay  of  Despair. 

Description  of  the  Bay  of  D.  apair, 

• 

The  entrance  of  the  bay  of  Despair  lies  between  the  west  end  of  Long  island 
and  'Great  Jcrvis  island  (an  island  in  the  mouth  of  the  harbour  of  the  same 
name)  the  distance  from^ne  to^e  other  is  one  and  a  quarter  mile,  and  in  the 
middle  between  them  is  no  soundings  with  S&O  fathoms. ' 

The  bay  of  Despair  forms  two  capacious  arms,  one  extending  to  the  N.  E. 
eight  leagues,  and  the  other  to  the  northward  five  leagues ;  in  the  north  arm  is 
Tery  deep  water,  and  no  anchorage,  but  in  the  small  bays  and  cove:s  which  lay 
on  each  side  of  it.  At  the  head  of  the  bay  of  the  east,  which  is  an  arm  of  the 
i;orth  bay,  is  a  very  fine  salmon  river,  and  plenty  of  wood.  In  tibe  N.  E.  arm 
of  the  hay  of  Despair  are  several  arms  and  islands,  and  tolerable  good  anchor- 
age in  some  parts  of  it.  Little  river  and  Gonne  river  are  counted  good  places 
for  salmon  fisheries :  about  these  rivers  and  the  head  of  tiie  bay  are  peat  plenty 
of  r%ll  sorts  of  wood  common  to  this  country,  such  as  fir,  pine,  birch,  witch- 
hazle^  .iprucc,  &;c.  All  the  country  about  the  entrance  into  the  bay  of  Despair, 
and  for  a  good  way  up  it,  is  very  mountaiiious  and  barren,  but  about  the  head  of 
the  bay  it  appears  to  be  pretty  level,  and  well  clothed  with  wood. 

Great  Jervis  harbour  is  situated  at  the  wfst  entrance  into  the  bay  of  Despur, 
'is  a  snug  and  safe  harbour,  with  good  anchorage  in  every  part  of  it  in  16,  18,  tf 
30  fathoms  \  though  but  small,  will  contain  a  great  number  of  shipping,  securely 
sheltered  from  all  winds,  and  very  convenient  for  wooding  and  watering.  There 
is  a  passage  into  this  harbour  on  either  side  of  Great  Jervis  island,  the  southern- 
most is  the  safest,  there  being  in  it  no  danger  but  the  shore  itself.  To  sail  in  on 
the  north  side  of  the  island,  you  must  keep  in  the  middle  of  the  passage,  until 
.you  arc  within  two  small  rocks  above  water  near  tJ  each  other  on  your  starboard 
side,  a  little  within  the  north  point  of  the  passage ;  you  must  then  bring  the  said 
north  point  between  these  rocks,  and  steer  into  the  harbour  in  that  direction, 
which  will  carry  you  clear  of  some  sunken  rocks  which  lie  off  the  west  point  of 
the  island ;  these  rocks  appear  at  low  water.  The  entrance  into  this  harbour 
may  be  known  by  the  east  end  of  Great  Jervis  island,  which  is  a  high  steep 
craggy  point  called  Great  Jervis  Head,  and  is  the  north  point  of  the  south  en- 
trance into  this  harbour. 

Bonne  Bay  lies  one  league  to  the  westward  from  Cape  Jervis  Head,  and  north 
seven  miles  from  Pass  island,  there  are  several  islands  in  the  mouth  of  it,  the 
westernmost  of  which  is  the  largest  and  highest.  The 'best  passage  into  the  bay 
is  to  the  eastward  of  the  largest  island,  between  it  and  the  two  easternmost  isl- 
ands ;  which  two  islands  may  be  known  by  a  rock  above  water,  off  the  south 


It 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


687 


point  of  each  if  them.  The  bay  lies  in  N.  N.  W.  four  miles,  and  is  near  half  a 
mile  broad  in  the  narrowest  part ;  there  is  no  danger  going  in  but  what  shows 
itself;  you  may  go  on  either  side  of  Drake  island,  which  is  a  small  isb.nd  nearly 
in  the  middle  of  the  bay ;  between  this  island  and  two  small  islands,  lying  on 
the  west  side  of  the  bay  within  Great  island,  is  anchorage  in  20  and  SO  fathoms, 
but  the  best  place  for  large  ships  is  at  the  head  of  the  bay  in  12  or  l4  fathoms, 
clear  ground,  and  convenient  for  wooding  and  watering.  On  the  west  side  of 
the  bay,  abreast  of  Drake  Island,  is  a  very  snug  harbour  for  small  vessels,  where- 
in is  7  fathoms  water,  and  good  conveniences  for  a  fishery ;  off  the  south  point 
of  the  entrance  are  some  sunken  rocks  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore. 
On  theN.  W.  side  of  the  Oreat  island,  within  the  two  small  islands,  is  very  good 
anchorage  in  16,  SO,  and  24  fathoms  water,  sheltered  from  all  winds.  The  pas- 
sage into  this  place  to  the  westward  of  the  Great  island  from  the  sea  is  very 
dangetous,  by  reason  there  are  several  sunken  rocks  in  the  passage  and  shallow 
water ;  but  there  is  a  very  good  passage  into  it  from  the  $iy,  passing  to  the 
northward  of  the  two  small  islands  between  them  and  the  west  shore.  In  sail- 
ing in  or  out  of  the  bay  yeu  must  not  approach  too  near  the  south  point  of  the 
Great  island,  because  of  some  sunken  rocka  which  He  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from 
the  shore. 

A  little  to  the  westward  of  Bonne  Bay,  between  it  and  Facheux,  is  Musketa 
Cove,  a  small  inlet,  wherein  is  from  30  to  47  fathoms  of  water- 

The  entrance  of  the  bays  of  Facheux  and  Dragon,  lies  west  four  miles  from 
Bonne  Bay,  and  N.  W.  by  N.  near  three  leagues  from  Pass  Island ;  this  entrance 
is  very  conspicuous  at  sea,  by  which  this  part  of  the  coast  is  easily  known.  Fa- 
cheux, which  is  the  easternmost  branch,  lies  in  north,  two  leagues,  and  is  a  third 
of  a  mile  broad  in  the  narrowest  part,  which  is  at  the  entrance,  with  deep  Water 
in  most  parts  of  it.  One  mile  up  the  bay,  on  the  west  side,  is  a  cove  wherein  is 
anchorage  in  10  fathoms,  with  gradual  soundings  into  the  shore,  and  a  clear  bot- 
tom ;  and  farther  up  the  bay,  on  the  same  side,  are  two  other  coves,  wherein  is 
anchorage  and  plenty  of  wood  and  water.  Dragon  Bay  lies  in  W.  N.  W.  one 
league,  and  is  near  half  a  mile  broad,  wherein  is  60  and  70  fathoms  water,  and 
no  anchorage  till  you  come  to  the  head,  and  then  you  must  be  very  near  the 
shore  to  be  in  a  moderate  depth  of  water. 

One  mile  to  the  westward  of  Facheux  is  a  little  hole,  wherein  is  shelter  for 
shallops.  And  one  league  to  the  westward  of  Facheux  is  Richard's  Harbour,  a 
snug  place  for  small  vessels  and  fishing  shallops,  wherein  is  not  more  than  twen- 
ty-uree  fathoms.  The  east  point  of  this  harbour  is  a  very  conspicuous  high 
head,  lying  W.  }  S.  seven  miles  from  Bonne  Bay,  and  N.  W.  i  W.  three  leagues 
from  Pass  Island. 

W.  by  N.  one  and  a  half  league  from  Richard's  Harbour,  is  Hare  Bay,  which 
lies  in  north  about  five  miles,  is  abAit  a  third  of  a  mile  broad  in  the  narrowest 
^art,  with  very  high  land  on  both  sides,  and  deep  water  close  heme  to  both 
shores  in  most  parts  of  it.  Near  one  mile  up  the  bay,  on  the  east  side,  is  a  small 
core,  wherein  is  anchorage  in  20  fathoms,  with  gradual  soundings  into  the  shore, 
and  one  league  up  the  bay  on  the  west  side,  is  a  very  good  harbour,  wherein  is 
good  anchorage  in  8, 10,  12,  and  15  fathoms,  and  plenty  of  wood  and  water. 

W.  by  N.  four  miles  from  Hare  Bay,  and  one  league  N.  by  W.  from  Hare'a 
Ears  Point  is  Devil's  Bay,  a  narrow  inlet,  lying  into  the  northward  one  league, 
wherein  is  deep  water,  and  no  anchorage  till  you  come  close  to  the  head. 

The  Bay  of  Rencontre,  which  lies  to  the  northward  of  Hare's  Ear  Point  liea 
in  W.  by  N.  two  leagues ;  it  is  near  half  a  mile  broad  in  the  narrowest  part,  with 
deep  water  in  most  parts  of  it.  To  anchor  in  this  bay,  you  must  run  up  above 
a  low  woodv  point  on  the  south  side,  then  haul  under  the  south  shore,  until  you 
arc  land-locked,  and  anchor  in  SO  fathoms  water. 

Hare's  Ears  Point  is  a  pretty  large  point,  with  a  ragged  rock  upon  it,  that  from 
some  points  of  view  looks  like  the  ears  of  a  hare ;  it  lies  west,  southerly,  elevea 
miles  from  the  point  of  Richard's  Harbour,  and  W.  by  N.  i  N.  six  leagues  from 
Pass  Island :  on  thin  point  is  a  fishing  bank  that  extends  a  mile  from  the  8hore» 
whereon  is  from  tO  to  96  fathoms  water. 

One  mile  to  the  northward  of  Hare's  Ears  Point,  at  the  S.  W.  entrance  into 


568 


BI.UNT'3    AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


Rencontre,  ig  New  Harbour,  «  small  harbour,  whereb  U  anchorage  for  small 
resaels  In  16  (bthoms  waiter,  &ndgoo4  convenlencea  for  a  flihery. 

West,  two  miles  from  Hare's  Ears  Point  Is  the  Bay  of  Cbaleur*  which  lies  In 
first  N.  W.  then  more  northerly,  Ik  the  whole  two  leagues :  it  ie  about  half  a  taile 
broad,  and  has  very  deep  water  in  most  parts.  A :  the  north  entranoo  into  the 
bay,  close  to  the  raore,  is  a  small  island  of  a  tolerable  height,  ani  hal>'  a  league 
within  the  island,  i>n  the  N.  E.  side  of  the  bay,  is  a  rock  above  water;  a  little 
within  this  rock,  on  the  same  side,  is  a  small  cove  with  a  sandy  beachi  off  which 
you  may  anchor  in  28  fathoms,  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore. 

W.  S.  W.  near  half  a  league  from  the  Bay  of  Chaleur,  Is  the  Bay  Francois, 
which  is  a  small  inlet,  lying  in  N.  If.  W.  i  W.  one  mile ;  it  is  near  one  quarter  of 
a  mile  broad  at  the  entrance,  and  17  fathoms  deep;  but  just  within  is  50  and  60 
fathoms :  at  the  bead  is  from  SO  to  flO  &thoms,  good  anchoragci  and  conveniencea 
fur  a  fishery. 

W.  6.  W.  fourtMfos  from  the  Bay  Francois,  on  the  east  side  of  Cape  la  Hune 
lies  Oar  Bay;  off  ^e  east  point  of  the  entrance  is  a  low  rocky  island,  dose  to 
the  shore ;  from  this  point  to  the  entrance  into  the  Bay  of  Despair,  the  course  is 
W.  i  N.  nine  leagues.  In  the  mouth  of  this  bay  is  a  rocky  island,  and  a  pas- 
sage on  each  side  of  it :  the  bay  lies  in  first  N.  N.  £•  near  one  league,  then  N. 
two  miles ;  it  is  one-third  of  a  mile  broad  In  the  narrowest  part,  with  deep  water 
close  to  both  shores  all  the  way  up ;  the  least  water  is  at  the  entrance ;  at  the 
head  is  a  small  snug  harbour,  At  onljr  for  kmall  vessels  and  fishing  shallops,  where- 
in is  5  fathoms  water  t  at  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  into  the  bay  N.  W.  by  N. 
from  the  rocky  island  before^-mentloned,  is  a  small  snug  cove,  called  Cu}  de  Sac, 
wherein  is  8  and  4  fathoms  water  and  good  shelter  for  fishing-vessels, 

Capt)  La  Hune  h  the  southernmost  point  of  land  on  this  part  of  the  coast, 
and  liev  in  the  latitude  of  47^  91'  49,"  N.  W.  ^  N.  from  Pass  Mand,  and  N.  W. 
i  N.  ten  and  a  half  leagues  from  Cape  Miquilon ;  it  m&y  be  easily  known  by  its 
figure,  which  much  resembles  a  sugar-loaf;  but  in  order  to  distiiicuish  this,  you 
must  approach  the  shore  at  least' within  three  leagues,  (unless  ymi  are  directly 
to  the  eastward  or  westward  of  it)  otherwise  the  elevation  .>f  the  high  land  with- 
in it  will  hinder  you  from  distinguish  nr  the  sugar-ioaf  hill;  but  the  cape  may 
always  be  known  by  the  high  land  of  In  fl  me,  which  lies  one  league  to  the  west- 
ward of  it :  this  land  rises  directly  ttom  thtt  sea  to  a  tolerable  hi^ight,  appears 
pretty  flat  at  top,  and  may  be  seen  in  ciear  vi^eather  sixteen  leaigur;s. 

S.  29°  W.  three  and  a  half  leagues  fro'ii  Cape  la  Hune,  and  H.  61^  W.  near 
ten  leagues  from  Cape  Miquilon,  lies  the  Penguin  Islands,  whidi  are  a  parcel  of 
barren  rocks  lying  near  to  each  other,  and  altogether  about  two  leagues  in  cir- 
cuit ;  YOU  may  approach  these  islands  in  the  day  time  to  half  a  league  all  round, 
there  being  no  danger  at  that  distance  off.  On  the  i3«  W.  side  of  the  large  isl- 
and which  is  the  highest,  is  a  small  cove,  w#erein  is  shelter  for  fishing  shallops, 
and  good  conveniences  for  a  fishery,  and  there  is  good  fishing  round  about  the 
island. 

E.  3^  N.  seven  miles  from  the  Penguin  Islands,  and  S.  0^  E.  three  leagues 
from  Cape  la  Hune,  is  a  dangerous  rock,  called  the  Whale  Rock,  whereon  the 
sea  generally  breaks;  it  Is  about  100  fathoms  in  circuit,  with  10,  12,  and  14  fa- 
thoms water  close  to  all  round  it.  From  this  rock  stretches  out  a  nairow  bank 
one  league  to  the  westward,  and  half  a  league  to  the  eastward*  whereon  is  from 
S4  to  08  fitthoms,  a  rocky  and  gravelly  bottom.  In  the  channel  between  the 
shore  and  this  rock,  also  between  the  shore  end  Penguin  Islands  is  120  and  130 
fathoms  water,  a  muddy  bottom,  and  the  same  bottom  and  nearly  the  same 
depth  of  water  one  league  without. 

Round  the  west  piint  of  Cape  la  Hune  is  la  Hune  Bay,  which  lies  in  north 
near  two  leagues,  and  is  about  oncthird  of  a  mile  broad  in  the  narrowest:  part, 
which  is  at  the  entrance,  with  deep  water  in  most  parts  of  it.  ^  In  sailing  in  or 
out  of  the  bay,  you  must  keep  the  cape  or  east  shore  on  board,  in  order  to  avoid 
a  sunken  rock  which  lies  off  the  west  point  of  the  entrance  into  the  bay,  near 
one-third  channel  ovit.  Two  miles  up  the  bay,  on  the  east  side,  !s  Lance  Gove, 
wherein  is  anchorage  in  Hi  and  14  fathoms  Water,  Clear  ground,  and  good  con- 
vemehcea  for  a  fishury :  une  cablc'd  length  off  from  the  south  point  of  the  core 


>1( 


BLUMT  3  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


5S9 


B  for  sdmU 

hich  liei  In 
thalf  atnile 
noo  into  the 
ial<'  a  league 
ter;  a  Uttie 
b,  off  which 

if  Vtsaco\t, 
ne  quarter  of 
ii  50  aod  60 
Bonveoiencea 

3ape  la  Hune 
and,  clQie  to 
the  course  is 
I,  and  a  pas- 
igae,  then  N. 
h  deep  water 
ranee ;  at  the 
dlops,  where- 
^N.W.byN. 
idOuldeSac, 

leltt 

of  the  coast, 
id,  and  N.  W. 
r  known  by  it» 
juish  this,  you 
i»  are  directly 
liighlandwith- 
;  tt»e  cape  may 
ae  to  the  west- 
Height,  appears 

T.  61°  W.  near 
are  a  parcel  of 
leagues  in  dr- 
Bgue  all  round, 
^the  large  isl- 
ishiug  shallops, 
[und  about  the 


(which  is  low)  is  a  small  shoal,  whereon  is  1)  fathoms,  end  between  it  and  the 
point  5  fathoms  water.  To  sail  into  the  cove,  keep  the  point  of  the  cape,  or 
east  entrance  into  the  bay,  open  of  a  red  cliff  point  on  the  same  side^  {cS  which 
is  a  rock  above  water)  until  a  round  hill  you  will  see  over  the  valley  of  the  cove, 
be  brought  on  the  north  side  of  the  valley :  you  will  then  be  above  the  shoal, 
and  may  haul  into  the  cove  with  safety.  There  is  a  narrow  bank  which  stretch- 
es <}uite  across  the  bay,  from  the  south  point  of  the  cove,  to  a  point  on  the  op- 
posite shore,  wheretm  is  from  S7  to  45  fathoms. 

La  Hune  Harbour,  wherein  is  only  room  for  the  admittance  of  small  vessels- 
open  to  the  westerly  winds,  lies  l^alf  a  league  to  the  westward  of  Cape  la  TZ  me ; 
before  which  is  an  island  close  under  the  shore.  The  passage  into  the  ha.-buur 
is  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  the  island ;  there  is  no  danger  in  going  in,  and  you  must 
anchor  close  up  to  the  head,  in  10  fathoms  water.  This  harbour  is  well  situated 
for  irfishery,  there  being  good  fishing  ground  about  it,  and  other  conveniences, 
such  as  a  large  beach  quite  across  from  the  head  of  t^e  harbour  to  la  Hune  bay, 
which  is  eight  hundred  feet,  exposed  to  an  open  air,  which  is  a  great  advantage 
for  drying  of  fish. 

Between  Gape  la  Hune  and  little  River,  the  land  is  tolerable  high,  and  the 
shore  forms  a  nay,  wherein  lie  several  small  islands  and  rocks  above  water,  the 
outermost  of  which  lies  north  three  leagues  from  the  Penguin  islands ;  near  these 
rocks  and  within  them  are  sunken  rocks  and  foul  ground ;  the  passage  is  very 
safe  between  the  rocks  and  the  Penguin  Islands.    % 

W.  by  S.  four  leagues  from  Cape  la  Hune,  is  the  entrance  of  Little  River, 
which  may  be  known  by  the  land  near  it,  which  forms  a  very  conspicuous  point 
on  Hie  ooast  and  toderablv  high ;  the  river  is  about  100  fathoms  broad  at  the  en- 
trance, and  10  fathoms  dee^,  and  affords  good  anchorage  a  little  way  up  it,  in 
10,  8  and  7  fathoms  water :  its  hanks  are  tolerably  high  and  clothed  witb  wood. 
S.  i  £.  two  leagues  from  the  entrance  of  Little  River,  N.  W.  h  N.  two  and  a 
Mf  leagues  from  the  Penguin  Islands,  and  E.  S.  E.  i  E.  three  and  a  half  leagues 
from  the  isles  bf  Ramea,  lie  the  Little  River  rocks,  which  are  just  above  water, 
and  of  a  very  small  circuit,  with  very  deep  water  all  around  them. 

The  isles  of  Ramea,  which  are  of  various  extent  both  for  height  and  circuit, 
lay  N.  W.  i  N.  near  six  leagues  from  the  Penguin  Islands  and  one  league  from 
the  main ;  they  extend  E.  anl  W.  five  miles,  and  N.  and  S.  two  miles :  there  are 
several  rooks  and  breakers  about  them,  but  more  on  the  south  side  than  the  north, 
the  easternmost  island,  which  is  the  largest,  is  very  high  and  hilly ;  the  western- 
most, called  Columbe,  is  a  remarkable  high  round  island,  of  a  small  circuit,  near 
to  which  are  some  rocky  islands  and  sunken  rocks. 

The  harbour  of  Ramea  (which  is  a  small  commodious  harbour  for  fishing  ves- 
sels) ^s  formed  by  the  islands  whi'*h  lie  between  Great  Ramea  and  Columbe,  the 
entraaoe  from  the  westward  (whioi  isthe  broadest^  lies  E.  from  Columbe,  give 
the  south  point  of  the  entrance  a  small  birth,  (off  which  are  some  rocks  above  wa- 
ter) and  steer  N.  £.  into  the  harbour,  keeping  in  the  middle  of  the  channel  which 
is  more  than  a  cable*in  length  broad  in  the  narrowest  part,  and  anchor  in  Ship 
Cove,  which  h  the  second  on  the  N.  W.  side,  in  5  fathoms  clear  ground,  and  shel- 
tered from  all  winds.  To  sail  into  it  from  the  eastward,  keep  the  north  side  of 
Great  Rat  lea  on  board  until  you  are  at  the  west  end  thereof,  then  steer  S.  W, 
into  the  harbour,  keeping  in  the  middle  of  the  channel,  wherein  is  S  fathoms  at 
low  water,  and  anchor  as  above  directed.  In  this  harbour,  and  about  these  islands, 
are  several  convenient  places  for  erecting  of  stages  and  drying  of  fish,  and  seem 
well  situated  for  that  purpose. 

S.  E.  i  S.  four  miles  from  Ramea,  are  two  rocks  above  water,  close  to  each 
other,  called  Ramea  rocks :  S.  W.  one  league  from  these  rocks  is  a  small  fishing 
bank,  whereon  is  6  fathoms  water ;  it  lies,  with  the  rocks  abosr<;-mentloned,  on 
with  the  west  entrance  of  Little  B<ver,  bearing  N.  E.  and  Rumea  Columbe  on 
with  a  high  saddle  hill,  (called  Ricliard's  head)  on  the  main  within  the  isles  of 
Burges,  being  nearly  N.  W.  Nearly  in  the  middle  between  Ramea  and  the  Penguin 
Islands,  two  leagues  from  the  land,  is  a  fishing  bank,  whereon  is  from  50  to  14  fa- 
thoms. To  run  upon  the  shoalest  part  of  thii*  banki  bring  the  two  Ramea  rocks 
(which  lie  S>  £•  i  S.  from  Ramea  Islands)  on  with  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  islands, 


590 


blunt'i 


AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


or  between  them  and  Columbe,  and  the  entrance  Into  Little  River  to  bear  If. 
by  E.  i  E. 

Four  miles  to  the  westward  of  Little  River,  and  N.  E.  b^  E.  from  Ramea  la- 
iands,  is  Old  Man's  Bay,  which  lies  in  N.  seven  miles,  and  is  a  mile  broad  at  the 
entrance,  with  deep  water  in  most  parts  of  it.  N.  E.  half  a  league  up  the  bay  or 
the  east  side,  is  Aaam's  Island,  behind  which  is  anchorafz;e  in  30  and  40  fathoms, 
but  the  best  anchorage  is  at  the  head  of  the  bay  in  l4  and  16  fathoms. 

Haifa  leafiue  to  the  westward  of  Old  Man's  Bay,  and  N.  E.  from  Ramea  isles, 
is  Musketa  Harbour,  which  is  a  very  snug  and  safe  harbour,  that  will  hold  a 
great  number  of  shipping  in  perfect  security ;  but  it  is  difficult  to  get  in  or  out 
unless  the  wind  is  favourable,  by  reason  the  entrance  is  so  very  narrow  (being 
but  48  fathoms  broad)  and  the  land  high  on  both  sides ;  the  S.  E.  point  of  the 
entrance  into  the  harbour  is  a  high  white  rock ;  near  a  cable's  length  from  this 
white  rock,  or  point,  is  a  black  rock  above  water,  on  the  south  side  of  whicti  is  a 
sunken  rock,  whereon  the  sea  breaks :  from  this  black  rock  to  the  narrow  en- 
trance into  •the  harbour,  is  N.  W.  half  of  a  mile.  In  sailing  in  or  out  of  the  har- 
bour, give  the  black  rock  a  small  birth,  and  keep  the  west  side  most  on  board, 
it  being  the  safest  If  you  are  obliged  to  anchor,  you  must  be  very  brisk  in  get- 
ting a  rope  on  shore,  lest  you  tail  upon  the  rocks.  In  the  harbour  is  from  18  to 
SO  fathoms,  every  where  good  anchorage,  and  plenty  of  wood  and  water,  and 
fishing  conveniences.  In  the  Narrows  is  1£  fathoms  bold  to  both  shores  there ; 
with  southerly  and  easterly  ivinds  it  blows  right  in,  with  northerly  winds  out, 
and  with  westerly  winds  it  is  either  calm,  or  blows  in  variable  puffs. 

Fox  Island  Harbour,  wliich  is  formed  by  an  island  of  the  same  name,  lies  N. 
E.  by  N.  from  Ramea  Isles,  and  a  half  league  to  the  westward  of  Musketa  Har- 
bour ;  between  them  are  several  rocky  islandst  and  some  sunken  rocks.  This 
harbour  may  be  known  by  a  high  white  rock,  lying  south  half  a  mile  from  the 
outer  part  of  the  Island.  There  are  two  passages  into  the  harbour,  one  on  each 
side  of  the  island,  and  no  danger  in  either  of  them  but  what  di8c<  >vers  itself;  it  is 
a  small  commodious  harbour  for  the  fishery,  wherein  are  6,  8  ind  10  fathoms 
water,  and  some  beach. 

White  Bear  Bay  lies  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  Fox  Island  Harbour,  and 
N.  one  league  from  Ramea  isles ;  there  are  several  islands  in  the  mouth  of  it. 
The  best  passage  into  the  bay  is  to  the  eastward  of  all  the  islands ;  it  lies  in  N.  E. 
by  E.  i  E.  four  leagues,  and  is  near  half  a  mile  broad  in  tiie  narrowest  part,  with 
high  land  on  both  sides,  and  deep  water  close  to  both  shores  in  most  parts  of  it, 
until  you  are  eight  miles  up  it,  you  will  then  rise  the  ground  at  once  to  9  fathoms, 
and  will  afterwards  have  gradual  soundings  up  to  the  head,  and  good  anchorage. 
A  little  way  inland  from  the  he  id  of  the  bay,  you  have  a  very  extensive  pros- 
pect of  the  interior  part  of  the  country,  which  appears  to  be  all  a  barren  rock, 
of  a  pretty  even  height,  and  watered  by  a  ^eat  number  of  ponds,  with  which 
the  whole  country  very  much  abounds.    On  the  S.  W«  side  of  Bear  Island 
(whic^  is  the  easternmost  and  largest  in  the  mouth  of  the  bay)  is  a  small  har- 
bour, lying  E.  N.  E.  half  a  mile,  wherein  is  from  10  to  22  fathoms  water,  before 
the  mouth  of  which  are  sunken  rocks  that  do  not  break  but  in  bad  weather. 
At  the  west  entrance  into  White  Bear  Bay,  is  a  high  round  white  island ,  and 
S.  S.  W.  half  a  mile  from  the  White  Island  is  a  black  rock  above  water.    The 
best  passage  into  the  bay  from  the  westward,  is  on  the  west  side  of  this  rock, 
and  between  the  White  Island  and  Bear  Island  ;  there  are  sunken  rocks  half  a 
league  to  the  westward  of  the  White  Island,  some  of  which  are  above  a  mile 
from  the  shore. 

Five  miles  to  the  westward  of  White  Bear  bay,  and  N.  by  W.  |  W.  from  Ra- 
mea Columbe,  are  two  small  harbours  called  Red  island  harbours,  formed  by  an 
island  of  the  same  name,  lying  close  under  the  land ;  that  lying  to  the  westward 
of  the  island  is  the  largest  and  best,  wherein  is  from  10  to  6  fathoms,  good  an- 
chorage :  to  sail  into  it,  keep  the  island  close  aboard,  the  outer  part  of  which  is 
red  steep  cliffs. 

N.  W.  by  W.  three  leagues  from  Ramea  Columbe,  lie  the  Burgeo  isles,  which 
are  a  cluster  of  islands  extending  along  the  shore,  east  and  west  about  five  miles, 
forming  several  snug  and  commodious  harbours  among  them  for  fishing  vessels, 


:% 


BLDNT's    AMERICAIf    COAST    PILOT. 


t9l 


and  are  ./ell  situated  for  that  purpoee,  there  betng  good  flshtng  ground  about 
them.  To  sail  into  Bucgeo  from  the  eastward,  tne  safest  passage  is  on  the 
N.  E.  side  of  Boar  island,  which  is  the  northernmost,  and  lies  N.  W.  from  Ramea 
Golumbe ;  S.  E.  by  E.  half  a  league  from  this  island  is  a  rock  that  uncovers  at 
low  water,  on  which  the  sea  generally  breaks ;  you  may  go  on  any  side  of  this 
rock,  there  being  very  deep  water  all  round  it ;  as  soon  as  you  are  to  the  N.  W. 
of  it,  keep  the  north  side  of  Boar  island  on  board,  and  steer  W.  by  S. )  S.  fur 
Orandy*s  cove,  the  north  point  of  which  is  the  first  low  point  on  your  starboard 
bow,  haul  round  that  point,  and  anchor  in  the  cove  in  14  fathoms,  and  moor  with 
a  fast  on  shore :  but  the  best  place  for  great  ships  to  anchor,  is  between  Orandy's 
covf  and  a  small  island  lying  near  the  west  point  of  Boar  island,  in  SO  or  24  fa- 
thoms, good  ground  and  sheltered  from  all  winds.  To  sail  into  Grandy's  cove 
from  the  westward  within  the  islands,  it  is  dangerous,  unless  well  acquainted,  by 
reason  of  sunken  rocks  in  the  passage ;  but  there  is  a  good  passage  from  the 
southward  between  Burgo  Golombe,  which  is  a  high  round  island,  and  Rencon- 
tre (which  is  the  highest  of  all  the  islands)  you  must  steer  in  N<  W.  between  the 
rocks  above  water  lying  to  the  eastward  of  Columbe,  and  then  to  the  southward 
of  Roncontre ;  as  soon  as  you  are  within  these  I'ocks,  keep  the  islands  on  board ; 
there  are  several  safe  passages  in  from  the  southward  and  eastward,  between  the 
islands,  and  good  anchorage ;  and  in  bad  wehther  all  the  sunken  rocks  discover 
themselves,  and  you  may  run  in  any  where  without  fear ;  these  isles  do  not 
abound  with  either  wood  or  water. 

Wolfe  bay  lies  in  N.  E.  i^  N.  one  league,  the  entrance  is  N.  E.  two  miles  from 
Boar  island,  and  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  Fox  island  harbours ;  the  east 
point  of  the  entrance  is  lo  '  ragged  rocks,  off  which  is  a  sunken  rock,  one-quar< 
tcr  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  whereon  the  sea  breaks  in  bad  weather.  Near  the 
head  of  the  bay  is  tolerable  good  anchorage,  and  plenty  of  wood  and  water. 

Round  the  west  point  of  Wolfe  bay  is  King's  harbour,  which  lies  in  N.  E> 
by  N.  three-quarters  of  a .  mile,  before  the  mouth  of  which  is  a  cluster  of  little 
islands,  one  of  which  is  pretty  high :  to  sail  into  it  keep  the  east  point  of  the 
islands  on  board,  and  steer  N.  W.  bv  N.  and  N.  N.  W.  for  the  entrance  of  the 
harbour,  and  anchor  under  the  east  shore,  in  9  fathoms  water. 

On  the  south  side  of  the  islands,  before  King's  harbour,  and  N.  N.  E.  one  mile 
from  Boar  island,  is  the  entrance  into  the  Ha  Ha,  which  lies  in  west  one  mile,  ia 
about  one  quarter  of  a  mile  broad,  wherein  is  from  20  to  10  fathoms,  and  good 
anchoraj^e  in  every  part  of  it :  over  the  south  point  of  the  entrance  into  this 
harbour  is  a  high  green  hill,  and  a  cable's  length  and  a  half  from  the  point,  is  a 
sunken  rock  that  always  shows  itself:  over  the  head  of  the  Ha  Ha,  is  Richard's 
head,  mentioned  as  a  mark  for  running  upon  Ramea  shoal. 

Four  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  Burgeo  isles  is  the  Great  Barryswa^jr  point, 
which  is  a  low  white  rocky  point,  and  N.  W.  by  N.  half  a  league  from  this  point 
is  the  west  entrance  into  the  Greal  Barrysway,  wherein  is  room  and  depth  of 
water  for  small  vessels :  between  the  Burgeo  isles  and  the  Great  Barrysway 
point  are  several  sunken  rocks,  some  of  which  are  half  a  league  from  the  shore. 
N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  four  leagues  from  the  Burgeo  isles,  is  the  bay  of  Gonnoir, 
the  east  point  of  which  is  something  remarkable,  rising  with  an  easy  ascent  to  a 
moderate  height,  and  mUch  higher  than  the  laud  within  it ;  the  top  of  it  is  green, 
but  down  by  the  shore  is  white;  the  west  point  of  the  bay  is  low  and  flat,  to  the 
westward  of  which  are  several  small  islands:  the  bay  lies  in  N.byE.  one  league 
from  the  entrance  to  the  middle  head,  which  lies  between  the  two  arms,  and  is 
ha!f  a  league  broad,  with  l4,  12,  10,  and  8  fathoms  close  to  both  shores,  good 
anchorage  and  clear  ground,  open  to  the  S.  S.  W.  and  southerly  winds ;  but  the 
N.  E.  arm  affords  slielter  for  small  vessels  from  all  winds.  To  sail  into  it,  keep 
the  starboard  shore  best  on  board,  and  anchor  before  a  small  cove  on  the  same 
side  near  Uie  heild  of  the  arm,  in  31  fathoms ;  towards  the  head  of  the  arm  on 
the  N.  W.  side  is  a  bank  of  sand  and  mud,  whereon  one  might  run  a  ship  and 
receive  no  damage. 

Two  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Gonnoir,  lies  the  bay  of  Gatteau,  wherein 
is  only  shelter  and  depth  of  water  for  small  vessels  and  fishing  shallops :  in  sail- 
ing in  or  out  of  the  bay  keep  the  west  point  close  on  board,  in  order  to  avoid  the 
many  sunken  rocks  in  the  mouth  of  it.  * 


592 


BLUNT^S    4MBRICAN    COAST  PILOT. 


Round  the  weit  point  of  Gulteau  In  Cinq  Serf,  wherein  are  a  groal  many 
Islands  which  farm  several  small  snrg  harbours,  wherein  is  room  and  depth  of 
water  sufficient  for  fishing  vessels,  with  conveniences  for  fisheries.  «Right  off 
Cinq  Serf,  about  half  a  league  from  the  shore,  is  a  low  rocky  island.  The  safest 
passage  into  the  largest  harbour  is  to  the  westward  of  this  rock,  keep  in  prettj 
near  it,  and  steer  in  N.  E.  )  E.  keeping  the  S.  E.  shore  on  board,  unti)  you  are 
abreast  o."  a  small  woody  island,  which  is  the  easternn^.ost  but  one,  and  lies  about 
one  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  N.  E.  of  a  white  rock  in  the  middle  of  the  passage, 
then  haul  short  round  this  island,  and  anchor  behind  it  in  7  fathoms  water,  cover- 
ed from  all  winds,  or  you  may  continue  your  course  up  to  the  head  of  the  arm 
and  anchor  in  4  fathoms  water.  ^ 

Four  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  rocky  island  off  Cinq  Serf,  is  the  harbonr  of 
Grand  Bruit,  which  is  a  small  commodious  harbour,  and  weH  situated  for  a 
fishery :  it  may  be  known  h^  a  very  high  remarkable  mountain  over  it,  half  a 
league  inlandr  which  is  the  highest  land  on  all  the  coast,  down  whicli  runs  a  con- 
siderable brook,  which  empties  itself  in  a  cascade  into  the  harbour  of  Grand 
Bruit.  Before  the  mouth  or  the  harbour  are  several  small  islands,  the  largest  of 
which  is  of  tolerable  height  with  three  green  hillocks  upon  it  A  little  without 
this  island  is  a  round  rock,  pretty  high  above  water,  caHed  Columbe  of  Grand 
Bruit ;  and  one  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  this  rock,  is  a  low  rock ; 
in  the  direct  line  between  this  low  rock  and  the  rocky  island  off  Cinq  Serf,  half 
a  league  from  the  former, .  s  a  sunken  rock,  whereon  the  sea  doth  not  break  in 
fin«  weather.  The  safest  passage  into  Grand  Bruit  is  to  the  N.  E.  of  this  rock, 
and  off  the  islands  lying  before  tne  harbour  between  them  and  the  three  Islands 
(which  are  low  and  lay  under  the  shore)  and  after  you  are  to  the  novthward  of 
the  sunken  rock  above-mentioned,  there  is  no  danger  but  what  shows  itself.  The 
passage  into  the  harbour  is  very  narrow,  but  bold-to  both  sides.  The  harbour 
Hea  in  north  half  a  mile,  and  is  a  quarter  of  a  mile  broad  in  the  broadest  part, 
wherein  is  from  4  to  7  fathoms  water. 

To  the  westward  of  Grand  Bruit,  between  it  and  La  Foil  Ba^,  Kea  the  kiy  of 
RDtte,  wherein  are  a  ^eat.many  islands  and  sunken  rocks.  The  southemaest  is- 
land is  a  remarkable  high  round  rock,  called  Columbe  ofRotte^  andlfa^W.  by  N. 
nine  leagues  from  the  southernmost  of  the  Burgeoe.  Between  tUa  iihind'  and 
Grand  BAiit  is  a  reef  of  rocks,  some  above  and  some  uAdor  'vwdler,  but  dit  aotlay 
to  the  southward  of  the  direct  line  between  the  ishnds.  WithUir  the  islet  of 
Hotte  is  shelter  for  shipping.  The  safest  passage  in*  is  to  tlie  westinnrd  of  the 
islands  between  them  and  the  island  called  Little  Irehmd,  which  Uet  off  the  east 
point  of  La  Foil  Bay. 

The  bay  of  La  Foil,  which  is  large  and  spaciousr  with  several'  eommodioiui 
harbours,  lies  W.  10°  N.  ten  leagues  from  the  southernmost  ofthe  Burgeos;  W. 
by  N.  fourteen  leagues  from  the  isles  of  Ra^iea,  and  new  tweUre  leagues  to  the 
eastward  of  Cape  Ray.  It  may  be  known  by  the  hi|^  land  of  Grand  Bruit, 
which  is  only  five  miles  to  the  eastward  of  it ;  and  likewise  by  tlw  land  on  the 
east  side  of  the  bay  which  rises  in  remarkable  high  craggy  hiRs.  One  mile  S. 
S.  W.  from  the  east  point  lies  Little  Ireland,  a  small  low  island  environed^with 
sunken  rocks,  some  of  which  are  one  third  of  a  mile  off;  N.  N.  W.  half  tf  mile 
from  this  island,  is  a  sunken  rock  that  shows  itself  at  low  water,  which  is  the  only 
danger  gqjng  into  the  bay,  but  what  lies  very  near  the  shore.  Two  miles  within 
the  west  point  of  the  bay,  and  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  two  miles  from  Little  Ireland,  is 
Tweeds,  or  Great  Harbour,  the  south  point  of  which  is  low  ;  it  lies  in  west  one 
mile,  and  is  one  and  a  half  sable's  length  broad  in  the  narrowest  part.  To  sail 
into  it  keep  the  north  shore  on  board,  and  anchor  near  the  head  of  the  harbour, 
in  18  or  20  fathoms  clear  ground,  and  sheltered  from  all  winds.  In  this  harbour 
are  several  conveniences  for  erecting  of  stages  aii^  drying  of  fia^.  Half  a  mile  to 
the  northward  of  Great  Harbour,  is  Little  Harbour,  the  nertbpoint  of  which  is 
the  first  high  bluff-head  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay  (called  Tooth's  head)  the 
harbour  lies  in  west  one  mile,  is  not  quite  two  cable's  length  broad  in  the  broad- 
est part.  To  sail  into  it,  give  the  south  point  a  small  birth,  and  anchor  about  half 
way  up  the  harbour,  in  10  fathoms  water  before  tlie  stage,  which  is  on  the  north 
side. 
Opposite  to  Tooth's  Head,  on  the  east  side  pf  the  bay,  is  Gaily  Boys  Har- 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT* 


bm 


real  mwiy 
d  depth  of 
»Bight  off 
The  safest 
ip  in  pretty 
iti)  you  are 
id  lies  about 
he  passage, 
ater,  cover- 
of  the  arm 

•*' 
s  harbonr  of 

ituated  for  a 

;er  it,  half  a 

I  tuns  a  con- 

ur  of  Grand 

he  largest  of 

ittle  without 

he  of  Grand 

,  a  low  rock ; 

inq  Serf,  half 

not  break  in 

of  this  rock, 

three  islands 

Dovthward  of 

8  itself.    The 

The  harbour 

tiroadest  part, 

ieethehayof 
iHhemnaostis- 
lletW.byN. 
tua  ishmd  and 
hntdoaotlay 
Jn  the  isles  of 
istwardof  the 
et  off  the  east 


hour,  a  small  snu^  and  commodious  harbour  for  ships  bound  to  tlie  Ifestward : 
near  the  south  pomt  of  the  harbour  are  some  hillocks  close  to  the  flhore ;  but  the 
north  point  is  high  and  steep,  with  a  white  spot  in  the  cliff.  In  sailing  in  or  out 
of  the  harbour  keep  the  ntirth  side  on  board;  you  must  anchor  as  soon  as  you 
arc  within  the  inner  south  point,  in  9  or  10  fathums,  good  ground,  and  sheltered 
from  all  winds. 

Two  miles  to  the  northwnrd  of  Tooth's  Head,  on  the  same  side  of  the  bay,  is 
Broad  Cove,  wherein  is  good  anchorage  in  12  and  14  fathoms  water.  Off  from 
the  north  point  of  the  cove,  stretches  out  a  bank  into  the  middle  of  the  bay,  where- 
on is  from  SO  to  30  fathom^  a  stony  and  gravelly  bottom.  One  mile  to  the 
northward  of  Gaily  Boys  Harbour,  between  two  sandy  coves  on  the  east  side  of 
(he  bay,  and  near  two  cables'  length  from  the  shore,  is  a  sunken  rock  that  just 
uncovers  at  low  water. 

^  Two  leagues  up  the  bay,  on  the  east  side,  is  the  N.  E.  arm,  which  is  a  spa- 
cious, safe,  and  commodious  harbour.  To  sail  into  it  give  the  low  sandy  point 
on  the  S.  E.  side  a  small  birth,  and  anchor  above  it  where  you  please,  in  10  fa- 
thoms water,  good  holding  ground,  and  sheltered  from  all  winds,  and  very  con- 
venient for  wooding  and  watering. 

A  little  within  the  west  point  of  La  Foil  Bay,  is  Indian  Harbour,  and  de  Plate, 
two  small  coves  conveniently  situated  for  a  fishery,  and  into  which  small  vessels 
can  go  at  high  water. 

From  Little  Ireland  Island  to  Harbour  La  Cove,  and  Moine  Bay,  the  course 
is  W.  I  9.  four  leagues ;  between  them  lies  the  bay  of  Guria,  and  several  small 
coves,  wherein  are  shelter  for  small  vessels,  and  cjonveniences  for  fisheries ;  be- 
fore which  are  several  small  islands,  and  sunken  rocks  lying  along  the  shore,  but 
none  of  them  lie  without  the  above  course.  In  bad  weather  the  sunken  rocks  all 
discover  themselves.  To  sail  into  the  bay  of  Garia,  which  lies  midway  between 
Poll  and  Harbour  La  Cove,  you,  will,  in  coasting  along  the  shore,  discover  a 
white  head,  which  is  the  south  point  of  an  island  lying  under  the  land,  off  the 
east  point  of  the  bay,  a  little  to  the  westward  of  two  green  hillocks  on  the  main  : 
foa  must  bring  this  white  point  to  bear  north,  and  steer  in  directly  for  it ;  keep 
between  it  and  the  several  islands  that  lie  to  the  S.  W.  from  it.  From  this  {loint, 
the  course  into  the  bay  is  N.  W.  by  N.  keeping  the  east  point  on  board,  which  is 
low.  In  this  bajr  is  plenty  of  timber,  not  only  for  erecting  of  stages,  bdt  large 
eaough  for  buildmg  of  shipping. 

The  S.  W.  point  of  the  entrance  into  Harbour  La  Cove,  called  Rose  Blanche 
Point  (near  to  which  are  rocks  above  water)  is  tolerable  high,  and  the  land  near 
the  shore  over  Harbour  La  Cove  and  La  Moine  Bay  is  much  higher  than  any 
land  qear  them,  by  which  they  may  be  known.  La  Moine  Bay  lies  in  N.  N.  E. 
i  E.  one  and  a  half  league,  and  is  a  quarter  of  a  mile  broad  in  the  narrowest  part. 
Offthe  east  point  are  some  small  islands,  and  rocks  above  water.  To  sail  into  it, 
keep  the  west  point  on  board  until  you  have  entered  the  bay,  then  edge  over  to^ 
the  east  shore  and  steer  up  to  the  head  of  the  bay,  where  there  is  good  anchorage 
in  10  and  ll  fathoms,  and  plenty  of  wood  and  water.  Your  course  into  Harbour 
La  Cove,  which  lies  at  the  west  entrance  into  La  Moine  Bay,  is  N.  W.  between 
a  rock  above  water  in  the  mouth  of  the  harbour,  and  the  west  sliore ;  as  soon  as 
you  are  within  the  rock,  haul  to  the  westward,  into  the  harbour,  and  anchor  in 
8  or  6  fathoms  water,  and  moored  with  a  fast  on  shore ;  or  you  may  steer  into 
the  arm,  which  lies  in  N.  E.  by  N.  from  the  harbour,  and  anchor  in  20  fathoms, 
sheltered  from  all  winds.  Harbour  La  Cove  is  a  small  snug  harbour  for  small 
vessels,  and  well  situated  for  a  fishery,  where  there  has  been  one  for  several  years. 
Round  to  the  westward  of  Rose  Blanche  Point,  is  the  harbour  of  the  same 
name,  a  small  snug  harbour,  well  situated  for  a  fishery,  with  good  conveniences. 
The  channel  into  the  harbour  is  between  the  island  lying  offthe  west  point,  and 
Rose  Blanche  Point ;  you  must  give  the  island  a  good  birth,  because  of  some 
sunken  rocks  which  lie  on  the  east  side  of  it,  and  keep  the  west  side  of  a  small 
island,  which  lies  close  under  Point  Blanche,  close  on  beard,  and  anchor  within 
the  N.  E.  point  of  the  said  island,  in  9  fathoms  water.  To  sail  into  the  N.  W. 
part  of  the  harbour  is  dangerous,  unless  acquainted,  by  reason  of  several  small 
islands,  and  sunken  rocks  in  it      . 

76 


594 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


Mull  Face  is  a  smaU  cove  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  Rose  Blanche  point, 
wherein  is  anchora{;e  for  small  vessels  in  4  fathoms.  Off  the  west  {)oint  of  the 
cove  are  two  small  islands,  and  severil  sunken  rocks.  The  pussa(,8  in,  is  to  the 
eastward  of  the  islands  and  sunken  rocks. 

Two,  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Rose  Blanche  point  are  the  Burnt  isles,  which 
lie  close  under  the  shore,  and  are  not  to  bo  distinguished  from  it,  hohind  which 
are  shelter  for  small  vessels,  and  good  fishing  conveniences.  Off  these  islands 
are  sunken  rucks,  some  of  which  are  half  a  mile  from  the  shore. 

Three  leagues  and  a  half  to  the  westward  of  Rose  Blanche  point,  is  Conny 
bay,  and  Otter  bay:  in  the  latter  is  good  anchorage  for  shipping  in  7,  8,  and  8 
fathoms,  but  it  is  dangerous  going  in,  because  of  several  sunken  rocks  without 
the  passage,  which  in  fine  weather  do  not  show  themselves. 

West  three-fourths  S.  four  leagues  from  Rose  Blanche  point,  are  the  Dead  isl- 
ands, which  lay  close  under  the  shore;  in  the  passnge  between  them  and  the 
ma'n  is  good  anchorage  for  shipping,  in  6,  7,  and  8  fathoms,  sheltered  from  all 
winds,  but  it  is  very  dangerous  going  in  unless  well  acquainted,  by  reason  of  se- 
veral unken  rocks  lying  in  both  the  east  and  west  entrance.  The  entrance  from 
the  ::!aDtward  may  be  known  b}  r^  very  while  spot  on  one  of  the  islands ;  bring 
this  wliitt!  spot  to  bear  N.  W.  by  N.  and  steer  in  for  it,  keeping  the  rocks  on  the 
starboard  hand  nearest  on  board,  and  leave  the  island  on  which  th(;  white  spot 
is,  on  your  larboard  side.  The  west  entrance  may  be  known  by  a  tolerable  high 
white  pomt  on  the  main,  a  little  to  the  westward  of  the  islands  ;  on  the  west 
purt  of  this  poini*^  is  a  green  hillock  ;  keep  this  white  point  close  on  board,  until 
you  are  within  a  little  round  rock,  lying  close  to  the  westernmost  island  at  thd 
east  poiat  of  the  entrance ;  then  haul  over  to  the  eastward  for  the  Great  island, 
(on  which  is  a  high  hill)  and  steer  in  N.  £.  by  E.  a  ^>  keeping  the  little  rock  be- 
fore-mentioned in  sight. 

From  the  Dead  Isles  to  Port  aux  Basque,  the  course  ^s  west  four  miles:  be- 
tween them  lie  several  small  islands  close  under  the  shore,  and  sunken  rocks, 
Bome  of  which  are  half  a  mile  from  the  shore.     Port  aux  Basque,  which  is  a 
small  commodious  harbour,  lies  two  and  a  half  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Cape 
Ray.    To  steer  in  for  it,  bring  the  Sugar  Loaf  over  Cape  Ray  to  bear  N.  W.  j 
W.  or  the  west  end  of  the  Table  mountains   to   bear  N.  W.     Steer  in  for  the 
land,  with  either  of  them  as  above,  and  you  will  fall  directly  in  with  the  harbour, 
the  S.  W.  point  of  which   is  of  a  moderate   height,   and  white,   called   Point 
Blanche,  but  the  N.  E.  point  is  low  and  flut,  close  to  which  is  a  black  rock  above 
water;  in  order  to  avoid  the  outer  shoal  (on  which  is  S  fathoms)  and  which  lies 
east  three-fourths  of  a  mile  from  Point  Blanche,  keep  the  said  point  on  board, 
and  bring  the  flag-staff  which  is  on  the  hill,  that  is  over  the  westsideof  thehead 
of  the  harbour,  on  with  the  S.  W.  point  of  Road  island,  and  keeping  in  that  di- 
rection will  carry  you  in  the  niiddle  of  the  channel,  between  the  east  and  west 
rocks,  the  former  of  which  always  show  themselves,  and  which  you  leave  on 
vour  starboard  hand.     You  must  continue  this  course  up  to  Road  island,  and 
keep  the  west  point  on  board,  in  order  to  avoid  the  Frying-pan  rock,  which 
stretches  out  fram  a  cove  on  the  west  shore,  opposite  the  island ;  and  as  »oon 
as  you  are  above  the  island,  haul  to  the  N.  E.  and  anchor  bettveen  it  and  harbour 
island,  where  it  is  most  convenient  in  9  or  10  fathoms,  good  ground,  and  shel- 
tered trum  all  winds  ;  this  is  what  is  called  tlie  Road  or  Outer  harbour,  and  is 
the  only  anchoring  place  for  men  of  war :  but  fishing  ships  always  he  up  in  the' 
inner  harbour.     To  sail  into  it,  you  must  steer  in  between  the  west  shore  and 
the  S.  W.  end  of  Harbour  island,  and  anchor  behind  the  said  island,  in  3  or  4 
fathoms.     In  some  parts  of  this  harbour  ships  can  lie  their  broadsides  so  near 
the  shore  as  to  reach  it  with  a  plank.    This  harbour  has  been  frequented  by 
flshermem  for  many  years,  and  is  well  sitoitcd  for  that  purpose,  and  has  excellent 
coDveniencea. 

One  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Port  aux  Basque  is  Little  bay,  a  narrow  creek, 
lying  in  N.  E.  near  half  u  league,  wherein  is  room  and  depth  of  water  eutficieot 
for  small  vessels. 

Two  mites  to  the  westward  of  Port  aux  Basque  is  Graiid  bay,  in  and  befors 
vhich  «ra  several  islands  and  sunken  rocks,  the  outermost  of  w.hich  are  nol 


BLUNT*S    AMERICAN     COAST    PILOT. 


596 


anche  point, 
point  of  tlie 
» in,  is  to  the 

t  isles,  vhirh 
(pliind  wliich 
tiiesc  islands 

:mt,  is  Conny 
in  7,  8,  and  9 
ocks  without 

;  the  De«d  isl- 
tht'in  and  the 
Lcred  from  all 
'  reason  of  se- 
entrance  from 
islands;  hrini 
le  rocks  on  the 
thtf  white  spot 
1  tolerable  high 
3  ;  on  the  west 
on  board,  until 
St  island  at  the 
le  Great  island, 
le  little  rock  be- 

four  miles:  be- 
l  sunken  rocks, 
ique,  which  is  a 
jstward  of  Cape 
to  bearN.  W.  i 
Steer  in  for  the 
ith  the  harbour, 
le,  called  Point 
black  rock  above 
()  and  which  lies 
point  on  board, 
i,sideofthe^head 
epinginthatdi- 
le  east  and  west 
[i  you  leave  on 
>ad  island,  anu 
|ii\n  rock,  which 
[id ;  and  as  soon 
In  it  and  harbour 
round,  and  shel- 
I  harbour,  and  » 
ays  he  up  in  the' 
I  west  shore  and 
island,  in  3  or  4 
padsides  so  near 
n  frequented  by 
md  has  excellent 

I  a  narrow  creek, 
water  sufficient 

ly,  in  and  befors 
which  are  nol 


abote  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  ihore,  on  which  the  sea  generally  breaks. 
In  this  bay  is  anchorage  for  small  vessels,  but  not  water  sufficient  for  large  shipsu 
From  Port  aux  Basque  to  Cape  Ray,  the  course  is  west  one  league  to  point  En- 
ragee,  then  N.  W.  one  and  a  half  league  to  the  cape  ;  off  paint  Eniagee  (which 
is  a  low  point)  and  to  the  cac'  trd  of  it  are  some  sunken  rocks,  one  mile  from 
the  shore,  on  which  the  sea  l<    aks. 

Cape  Ray  is  the  S.  W.  extremity  of  Newfoundland,  situated  in  the  latitude 
47°  87'  N.    The  land  of  the  cape  is  very  remarkable  near  the  shore ;  it  is  low, 
and  three  miles  inland  is  a  very  high  Table  mountain,  which  rises  almost  perpen- 
dicular from  the  low  land,  and  appears  to  be  quite  flat  at  top,  except  a  ^mall 
hilloAk  oA  the  S.  W.  point  of  it.    This  land  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  six- 
teen or  eighteen  leagues.     Cfbse  to  the  foot  of  the  Table  mountain,  between  it 
and  the  point  of  the  cape,  is  a  high  round  hill,  resembU.ig  a  sugar  loaf  (called 
the  Sugar  Loaf  of  Cape  Ray)  whose  summit  is  something  lower  than  the  top  of  y 
the  Table  mountain  ;  and  to  the  northward  of  this  hill,  under  the  Table  moun- 
tain, are  two  other  hills  resemlding  sugar  loaves,  which  are  not  so  high  as  the 
former;  one  or  other  of  those  Snsrar  Loaf  hills  are  from  all  points  of  view  seen 
detacher  from  the  Table  mountain.     On  the  east  side  of  the  cape,  between  it 
and  point  Enragee,  is  a  sandy  bny,  wherein  shipping  may  anchor  with  N.  W. 
northerly  and  N.  E.  winds,  but  thVy  must  take  care  not  to  be  surprised  there 
with  the  S.  W.  winds,  which  blow  right  in  and  cause  a  great  sea,  and  the  ground 
is  not  the  best  for  holding,  being  all  a  fine  sard.     Towards  the  east  side  of  tl^s 
bay  is  a  small  ledge  of  rocks,  one  mile  from  the  shore,  on  which  the  sea  docs 
not  break  in  line  weather.     The  best  place  for  great  ships  to  anchor  is  to  bring 
the  point  of  the  cape  to  bear  W.  by  N.  and  the  high  white  sand  hill  in  the  bot- 
tom of  the  bay  N.  N.  E.  in  10  fathoms  water,  but  small  vessels  may  lie  much 
farther  in.    You  must  take  care  not  to  run  so  far  to  the  Eastward  as  to  bring  the 
find  of  the  Table  mountain  on  with  the  sand  hill  in  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  for 
fear  of  the  ledge  of  rocks  before-mentioned.    W.  by  N-  i  N.  near  one  mile 
from  the  point  of  the  cape,  is  a  small  ledge  of  rocks,  whereon  the  sea  always 
breaks ;  and  one  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  cape,  closie  under  the  land,  is  a 
low  rocky  island  in  the  channel  between  the  ledge  and  the  cape :  also  between 
it  and  the  island  is  14  and  15  fathoms,  but  it  is  nut  safe  for  shipping,  on  account 
of  the  tides,  which  run  here  with  great  rapidity.    The  soundings  under  100  fa- 
thoms do  not  extend  above  one  league  from  the  land  to  the  westward  and  north- 
ward of  the  cape,  nor  to  the  southward  and  eastward  of  it,  except  on  a  bank 
which  lies  off  Port  aux  Basque,  between  two  or  three  leagues  from  the  land, 
whereon  is  from  70  to  100  fathoms  good  fishin;:;  ground.    S.  E.  by  E.  i  E. 
ei|;ht,  leagues  from  Port  aux  Basque,  in  the  latitude  of  47°  14' N.  is  a  bank 
whereon  is  70  fathoms.     Note.— The  true  form  and  extent  of  these  banks  are 
BOt  yet  suflieiently  known  to  be  described  in  the  American  Coast  Pilot. 

From  Cape  Ray  to  Cape  Anguillc,  the  course  is  N.  16°  W.  distant  six  leagues; 
Gape  Anguille  is  the  northernmost  point  of  land  you  can  see.  after  passing  to 
the  northward  of  Cape  Ray.  In  the  country,  over  the  cape,  is  high  Table 
Land,  covered  with  wood ;  between  ti>e  high  land  of  the  two  capes,  the  land  is 
low,  and  the  shore  forms  a  hay,  wherein  are  the  Great  and  Little  rivers  of  Cod 
Roy;  the  Gre.'.t  river,  which  is  the  northernmost,  is  a  bar  harbour,  and  will  ad- 
mit vessels  of  8  and  10  feet  draft  at  high  water,  and  in  fine  tveather.  It  is  a 
good  place  for  ;;  salmon  fishery,  and  for  building  of  small  vessels  and  boats,  &ic. 
th«re  being  plenty  of  timber.  You  may  approach  the  shore  between  the  two 
capes  to  half  a  league,  there  being  no  danger  that  distance  off. 

The  island  of  Cod  Roy  lies  two  miles  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Anguille, 
close  under  the  high  land;  it  is  a  low,  Hat,  green  island,  of  near  two  miles  In 
compass;  it  forms  (between  it  and  the  main)  a  small  snug  harbour  for  fishing 
shnllops,  and  is  frequented  by  vessels  of  10  and  12  feet  draft,  but  they  lie  aground 
the  greatest  part  of  the  time,  tliere  being  not  much  above  that  depth  of  water 
in  the  safest  part  of  the  harbour  at  nigh  water ;  the  channel  in  is  from  the  south- 
ward, wherem  is  two  fatiioms  at  low  water.  In  that  from  the  northward,  is  not 
above  S  feet ;  this  karbour  ia  very  convenient  for  the  flnhery,  with  good  beaches 
for  drying  of  iiih. 


596 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


In  the  road  of  God  Roj  is  rery  good  anchorage  for  sliipping  In  8,  7,  and  6  tk- 
thorns,  a  clay  bottom,  sheltered  from  the  N.  W.  northerly,  and  S.  E.  winds : 
the  best  place  is  to  bring  the  south  point  of  the  island  to  bear  west,  and  the  point 
of  the  beach,  on  the  inside  of  the  island,  at  the  south  entrance  into  the  harbour 
on  with  a  point  on  the  main  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  you  will  then  be  in 
7  fathoms,  and  nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  shore.  One  league  to  the  southward 
of  Cod  Roy  is  a  high  Muff  point,  called  Stormy  Point,  off  which  stretches  out  a 
shoal  half  a  mile;  this  point  covers  the  road  from  the  S.  E.  winds,  and  it  is 
good  anchoring  any  where  along  the  shore  between  it  and  the  islands. 

The  island  of  St.  Paul  lies  S.  78°  W.  thirteen  and  a  half  leagues  from  Cape 

Ray  in  Newfoundland,  and  N.  49P  E.  three  leagues  from  the  north  cape  in  the 

island  of  Cape  Breton,  in  the  latitude  of  47°  ISllO"  N.  it  is  about  five  miles  in 

compass  (including  the  small  island  at  the  N.  E.  end  of  it)  witli  three  high  hills 

^  upon  it,  and  deep  water  close  to  the  shore  all  round. 

Cape  North  is  a  lofty  promontory  at  the  N.  E.  extremity  of  the  island  Cape 
Breton,  in  the  latitude  47°  5'  N.  The  entrance  into  the  gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 
<3  formed  bv  this  cape  and  Cape  Ray ;  they  lie  from  each  other  N.  53P  E.  and 
S.  5£<^  W.  distant  seventeen  leagues ;  in  the  channel  between  them  is  no  ground 
under  200  fathoms. 

A  south-east  moon  makes  high  water  by  the  shore  in  most  places,-  and  flows 
up  aod  down,  or  upon  a  perpendicular  7  or  8  feet;  but  it  must  be  observed,  that 
they  are  every  where  greatly  governed  by  the  winds  and  weather.  On  the  sea 
cdast  between  Cape  Chapeaurouge  and  St.  Peter's,  the  current  sets  generaHj 
to  tfiie  8.  W.  On  i  he  south  side«f  Fortune  bay  it  sets  to  the  eastward,  and  on 
the  north  side  to  the  westtvard.  Between  Cape  la  Hune  and  Cape  Ray,  the  flood 
sets  to  the  westward  in  the  offing,  sometimes  two  or  three  hours  after  it  is  high 
water  by  the  shore ;  btit  this  tidi  or  current  (which  is  no  where  strong  but  at 
Cape  Ray)  is  very  variable,  both  with  respect  to  its  course  and  velocity,  some- 
times it  sets  quite  the  contrary  to  what  might  be  expected  from  the  common 
course  of  the  tides,  and  much  stronger  at  one  time  than  another,  which  irregu- 
larities cannot  be  accounted  for  with  certainty*  but  seem  to  depend  mostly  on  the 
winds. 

N.  B.  Hie  Burgee  isles,  by  aa  observation  of  the  eclipse  of  the  sun,  on  the  5th  of  Au- 
gust, 1766,  are  "*<.  50*  4,"  or  57°  31'  W.  from  the  meridian  of  London. 

From  this  observation  the  longitude  of  the  following  places  are  deduced,  and 
their  latitudes  are  from  astronomical  observations  made  on  shore,  except  that  of 
Cape  Race,  which  was  observed  at  sea ;  some  one  of  those  places  being  gene* 
rally  the  flrst  that  ships  make  bound  to  southern  parts  of  Newfoundland,  or  into 
the  ^ulf  or  river  of  St.  Lawrence,  or  frona  which  the^  take  their  departure,  at 
leaving  those  parts ;  it  is  hoped  the  determining  their  true  position  will  provs 
useful  to  navigators.  >      ^ 

Burgeo  Isles  ...... 

Cape  Ray  ...... 

Island  of  St.  Paul  ..... 

Cape  North,  N.  E.  extremity  of  Cape  Breton 
Island  of  Scataria,  which  lies  off  the  S.  E.  point  of) 

Cape  Breton  )      * 

Island  of  St.  Peter's  ..... 

sJape  Chapeaurouge,  or  the  Mountain  of  the  Red  Hat 
Cape  Race  ....  .  . 

St  John's  ....  .  . 


Lat 

Uude. 

Longitude, 

47 

36  N. 

67    31  W. 

47 

37 

69     8 

47 

18 

69    67 

47 

B 

60     8 

46 

1 

61    67 

46 

46 

66     6 

4*6 

63 

65    17 

46 

40 

62    39 

49 

34 

62    18 

Directioru  for  navigating  the  West  Coast  of  Newfoundland. 

1^.  B.  All  the  bearings  and  omrses  hereafter  mentioned  are  the  true  bearings 

and  eourseSt  and  not  by  compass. 

Gape  Angtulle  lies  six  leagues  to  the  northward,  of  Cape  Ray,  N.  E.  by  N. 
MventMa  leafues  from  the  Island  of  St  Paul,  and  is  in  the  ktitude  of  47^  bi 


N.  it  Is  1 

lies  the 
Anguille 
two  cap€ 
the  form  I 
the  south 
good  anc, 
hour  are  i 
>ng  groun 
ly  was  m 
of  this  ba 
across  th« 
side  of  th; 
fathoms  m 
bank  two 
aandy  bot 
Cape  S 
only  by  its 
cliffs  on  thi 
derable  hei 
cape,  and  i 
and  tolerab 
the  N.  E.  e 
just  to  the  I 
where  you 
erly  and  ea 
and  N.  W. 
FromRe( 
the  course  i 
Guernsey  I 
fifteen  and  a 
N-  E.  i  N.  1 
course  is  N. 
Point  Rich, 
The  land 
rate  height,  i 
lock  (called 
Bed  Island; 
stt  four  leag 
the  Bay  of  I 
the  entrance 
n»08t  parts  oi 
point,  from  vi 
feur  miles  fro 
Md,  which  is 
«8  out  a  shoal 
the  middle  o 
{round,  on  on 
ter,  at  fow  wi 
stretching  out 
which  extendi 
ter:  from  the 
than  a  quarter 
>t.  into  which 
On  the  east  si 
•ttop,  andris 
«nd  about  five 
{ogether  with 
5»y.  «•  is  he 
«•  ^I,  sad  k 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


697 


7,  and  6  fii- 
;.  E.  winds : 
mi  the  point 
the  harbour 
U  then  be  in 
le  southward 
•etches  out  a 
Is,  and  it  is 
ds. 

s  from  Cape 
h  cape  in  the 
t  five  miles  in 
iree  high  hills 

I  island  Cape 
3t.  Lawrence 
:^.  52°  E.  and 
'  is  no  ground 

cesvand  flows 
observed,  that 
'.  On  the  set 
sets  generally 
stward,  and  on 
Ray,  the  flood 
after  it  is  high 
i  strong  but  at 
relocity,  some- 
n  the  common 
,  which  irregu- 
d  mostly  on  the 

>athe5lbof  Au- 

,  deduced,  and 
I,  except  that  of 
Ices  being  gene* 
indland,  or  into 
[i»  departure,  at 
litioo  will  prove 

Lonntude. 
67    31 W. 

59  8 
69  67 

60  8 

61  67 

66  6 

65  17 

62  33 
68  18 


lundlaiid. 
Itrue  hearingt 

rtudeof470  6* 


N«  it  is  high  land,  covered  with  wood;  two  miles  to  the  southward  of  this  cape 
lies  the  small  island  and  harbour  of  Cod  Roy,  before  described.  From  Cape 
Anguille  to  Cape  St.  George,  the  course  is  N.  |  E.  distant  eleven  Ieap;ue3 ;  these 
two  capes  form  the  Bay  of  St.  Geor<j;e,  which  lies  in  N.  E.  eighteen  leagues  from 
the  former,  and  east  fifteen  leagues  from  the  latter ;  at  the  head  of  this  bay  on 
the  south  side,  round  a  low  point  of  land,  is  a  very  good  harbour,  wherein  is 
good  anchorage  in  8,  10,  or  12  fathoms  water.  In  several  parts  about  this  har- 
bour are  convenient  places  for  fishing-works,  with  large  beaches,  and  good  fish- 
ing ground  in  the  bay,  which,  early  in  the  spring,  abounds  with  finh,  ar)d  former- 
ly was  much  frequented  ;  a  very  considerahle  river  empties  itself  into  the  head 
of  this  bay,  but  it  is  not  navigable  for  any  thing  but  boats,  by  rc^ason  of  a  bar 
across  the  entrance,  which  lies  exposed  to  the  westerly  winds.  On  the  north 
side  of  this  bay,  before  the  Isthmus  of  Port-a-Port,  is  good  anchorage  in  7  or  8 
fathoms  water,  with  northerly  winds  :  from  off  this  place  stretches  out  a  fishing- 
bank  two-thirds  across  the  bay,  whereon  is  from  7  to  18  fathoms  water,  a  dark " 
sandy  bottom. 

Cape  St.  George  lies  in  the  latitude  of  48°  28';  it  may  be  easily  known,  not 
only  by  its  being  the  north  point  of  the  bay  of  the  same  name,  but  by  the  steep 
cliffs  on  the  north  part  of  it,  which  rises  perpendicularly  from  the  sea  to  a  consi- 
derable height,  and  by  Red  Island,  which  lies  five  miles  to  the  northward  of  the 
«ape,  and  half  a  mile  from  the  shore :  this  island  is  about  one  league  in  circuit, 
and  tolerably  high,  and  the  steep  clifis  round  it  are  of  a  reddish  colour.  Under 
the  N.  E.  end  of  the  island,  and  before  a  sandy  cove  on  the  main,  which  lies 
just  to  the  northward  of  the  steep  cliffs,  is  aofshoragc  in  12  or  14  fathoms  water, 
where  you  are  covered  from  the  S.  W.  winds  by  the  island,  and  from  the  south- 
erly and  easterly  winds  by  the  main,  but  there  is  no  riding  here  with  northerly 
and  N.  W.  winds ;  this  place  formerly  was  much  frequented  by  fishers. 

From^ed  Island  to  Long  Point,  at  the  entrance  into  the  Bay  of  Port-a-Port> 
the  course  is  N.  5SP  E.  distant  seven  and  a  half  leagues.  From  Red  Island  td 
Guernsey  Island  in  the  mouth  of  the  Bay  of  Islands,  the  course  is  N.  E.  |  N. 
fifteen  and  a  half  leaguea.  From  Red  Island  to  Cape  St.  Gregory,  the  course  is 
N.  E.  i  N.  twenty  leagues.  From  Red  Island  to  the  Bay  of  Ingornachoix,  *he 
course  is  N.  N.  E.  I  E.  distant  forty-eight  leagues ;  and  from  Red  Island  to 
Point  Rich,  the  course  is  N.  29°  E.  distant  forty-eight  leagues  and  two  miles. 

The  land  between  Red  Island  and  the  entrance  into  Port-a-Port,  is  of  a  mode- 
rate height,  or  rather  low,  with  sandy  beaches,  except  one  remarkable  high  hil- 
lock (called  Round-head)  close  to  the  shore,  and  is  two  leagues  to  the  N.  E.  of 
Red  Island;  but  up  in  the  country  over  Port-a-Pdrt,  are  high  lands,  and  if  you 
are  four  leagues  at  sea  you  will  not  discern  the  long  point  of  land  which  fornn 
the  Bay  of  Port-a-Port :  this  bay  is  capacious,  being  near  five  miles  broad  at 
the  entrance,  and  lies  in  to  the  southward  four  lea"-'ies,  with  good  anchorage  in 
most  parts  of  it.    The  west  point  of  the  bay  (caiiea  Long  Point)  is  a  low  rocky 
point,  from  which  stretches  out  a  reef  of  rocks  N.  E.  nearly  one  mile ;  S.  E.  by  S. 
four  miles  from  Long  Point,  and  half  a  league  from  the  east  sliore.,  lies  Fox  Isl- 
and, which  is  small,  but  tolerably  high ;  from  the  north  end  of  this  island  stretch- 
es out  a  shoal,  near  two  miles  to  the  northward,  called  Fox's  Tails ;  nearly  in 
the  middle  of  the  bay,  between  the  island  and  the  west  shore,  lies  the  middle 
ground,  on  one  place  of  which,  near  the  S.  W.  end,  is  not  above  3  or  4  feet  wa* 
ter,  at  !ow  water;  at  the  head  of  the  bay  is  a  low  point,  called  Middle  Point, 
stretching  out  into  the  middle  of  the  bay ;  from  off  this  point  is  a  shoal  pit, 
which  extends  near  two  miles  to  the  northward,  part  of  which  dries  at  low  wa- 
ter: from  the  head  of  the  east  bay  over  to  the  Bay  St.  Geor(r«>,  is  a  little  mora 
than  a  quarter  of  a  mile :  this  isthmus  is  very  low,  with  a  pond  in  the  middle  of 
it,  into  which  the  sea  washes  in  gales  of  wind  from  the  southward  at  high  tides. 
On  the  east  side  of  the  isthmus  is  a  tolerable  high  mountain,  which  appears  flat 
at  top,  and  rises  directly  from  the  isthmus,  on  the  north  side  of  the  mountain; 
and  about  five  miles  from  the  isthmus  is  a  conspicuous  valley  or  hollow,  which, 
together  with  Fox  Island,  serves  as  a  leading  mark  for  coming  in  and  out  of  thii 
l>ay,  at  is  hereafter  described :  two  leagues  to  the  N.  E.  from  the  entrance  of 
th»  baj,  and  half  a  league  from  the  ihore  lies  Shag  Island,  which  appears  at  a 


598 


BLUNT^  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


distance  like  a  high  rock,  and  is  easy  to  be  distinguished  from  the  main ;  west, 
one  league  from  the  Shag  Island,  lies  the  middle  of  Long  Ledge,  which  is  a 
narrow  ledge  of  rocks  stretching  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  four  miles,  the  N.  E.  part  of 
them  are  above  water;  the  channel  into  the  Bay  of  Port-a-Port,  between  the  S. 
W.  end  of  this  ledge,  and  the  reef  off  the  west  point  of  the  hay  is  one  league 
wide.    To  sail  into  Port-a-Port,  coming  from  the  S.  W.  come  not  nearer  the 
pitch  of  the  Long  Point  of  the  bay  than  one  and  a  half  mile,  or  haul  not  in  for 
the  bay,  until  you  have  brought  the  valley  in  the  side  of  the  mountain  before 
mentioned  (which  is  on  the  cast  side  of  thb  isthmus)  over  the  cast  end  of  Fox 
Island,  or  to  the  eastward  of  it,  which  will  then  bear  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.  you  will  be 
then  clear  of  (he  Long  Point  Reef,  and  may  haul  into  the  bay  with  safety ;  com- 
ing from  the  N.  E.  and  without  the  Long  Ledge,  or  turning  into  the  bay  in  order 
to  keep  clear  of  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  Long  Ledge,  bringing  the  isthmus  or 
the  foot  of  the  mountain  (which  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  isthmus)  open  to  the 
westward  of  Fox  Island,  near  twice  the  breadth  of  the  island  (the  island  will 
then  hear  S.  )  E.)  you  may  haul  into  the  bay  with  this   mark,  and  when 
Shag  Island  is  brought  on  with  the  foot  of  the  high  land  which  is  on  the  south 
side  of  Coal  River,  and  will  then  bear  E.  by  N.  )  N.  you  will  be  within  the  Long 
Ledge ;  there  is  a  safe  passage  into  the  bay  between  the  Long  Ledge  and  the 
main,  passing  on  either  side  of  Shag  Island,  taking  care  to  avoid  a  small  round 
shoal  which  lies  S.  W.  one  mile  from  the  island,  on  which  is  £1!  fathoms  water. 
To  sail  up  into  what  is  called  the  West  Bay,  and  into  Head  Harbour,  (which  are 
thft  safest  anch(<  'ages,  and  the  best  places  to  wood  and  water  at)  keep  the  west 
short  on  board,  and  in  turning  between  it  and  the  middle  ground,  observe  on 
standing  over  to  the  middle  to  put  about  as  soon  as  you  shoalen  your  water  to 
8  fathoms,  you  may  stand  to  the  spit  of  the  middle  point,  to  6  or  5  fathoms. 
To  sail  up  to  what  is  called  the  East  Road,  which  lies  between  Fox  Island  and 
the  east  shore,  observe  about  one  league  N.  £•  from  the  island,  a  high  bluff  head, 
being  the  south  part  of  the  high  land  that  rises  steep  directly  from  the  shore, 
keep  this  head  bearing  to  the  southward  of  east  until  the  isthmus  is  brought  to 
the  eastward  of  Fox  Island,  which  will  then  bear  S.  S.  W.  you  will  then  be 
within  the  shoal  (called  Fox's  Tail)  and  may  then  haul  to  the  southward,  and 
anchor  any  where  between  the  island  and  the  main :  to  sail  up  the  east  bay  pass- 
ing between  the  island  and  the  east  shore,  observe  the  foregomg  directions;  and 
after  you  are  above  the  island,  come  not  nearer  the  main  than  half  a  mile  until 
you  are  abreast  of  a  bluff  point  above  the  island,  called  Road  Point,  just  above 
which,  in  IS  fathoms,  is  the  best  anchorage  with  N.  E.  winds ;  and  to  sail  up  to 
this  anchorage  between  the  middle  ground  and  the  Fox's  Tail,  bring  the  said 
point  on  with  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  island,  this  mark  will  lead  you  up  in  tiie 
fair  way  between  the  two  shoals.    What  's-called  the  West  road  lies  before  a 
high  stone  beach ;  about  two  miles  within  Long  point,  where  you  ride  secure 
with  westerly  and  N.  W.  winds  in  10  or  12  fathoms  water,  the  said  beach  is  steep- 
to,  and  \s  an  excellent  place  for  landing  and  drying  of  fish,  for  which  it  has  been 
iformerly  used ;  there  is  likewise  a  good  place  at  the  north  end  of  Fox  island  for 
the  same  purpose ;  and  the  whole  bay  and  adjacent  coast  abound  with  cod,  and 
extensive  fishing  banks  lie  along  the  sea  coast. 

From  Long  Point,  at  the  entrance  of  Port-a-Port,  to  the  bay  of  Island?,  the 
direct  course  is  N.  95°  E.  distant  eight  leagues,  but  coming  out  of  Port-a-Portt 
you  must  first  steer  north  one  or  one  and  a  half  league,  in  order  to  clear  the 
Long  Ledge,  then  N.  E.  by  N.  or  N.  E. ;  the  land  between  them  is  of  considera- 
ble height,  rising  in  craggy  barren  hills  directly  from  the  shore.— The  Bay  of  Is- 
lands may  be  known  by  the  many  islands  in  the  mouth  of  it,  particularly  the 
three  named  Guernsey  Island,  Tweed  Island,  and  Pearl  Island,  which  are  nearly 
of  equal  height  with  the  lands  on  the  main  ;  if  you  are  bound  fur  York  or  Lark 
Harbours  which  lay  on  the  S.  W.  side  of  this  bay,  and  coming  from  the  south- 
waru,  steer  in  between  Guernsey  Island  and  the  south  head,  either  of  which  you 
may  approach  as  near  as  you  please ;  but  with  S.  S.  W.  anu  southerly  winds 
come  not  near  the  south  head,  for  fear  of  calms  and  ^usts  of  wind  under  the  high 
land,  where  you  cannot  anchor  with  safety ;  you  may  sail  in  or  out  of  the  bay  by 
Mveial  other  channels,  formed  by  the  different  islancu,  there  being  no  danger  but 


BLUNT'8    4MERICAIV   COA8T    PILOT. 


599 


west, 
h  is  a 
part  of 
theS. 
league 
rer  the 
t  in  for 
before 
of  Fox 
-will  be 
J ;  com- 
in  order 
mus  or 
(1  to  the 
tnd  M'ill 
id  ivhen 
he  south 
he  Long 
and  the 
M  round 
IS  water, 
irhich  are 
the  west 
iserve  on 
water  to 
fathoms, 
iland  and 
tUiff  head* 
he  shore, 
rought  to 
I  then  be 
vard,  and 
;  bay  pass- 
ions; and 
naile  until 
lUst  above 
sail  up  to 
the  B»id 
up  in  the 
la  before  a 
^ide  secure 
ih  is  steep- 
it  has  been 
island  for 
cod,  and 


what  ehows  ttself,  except  a  small  ledge  of  rocks  which  lies  half  a  inlle  (torn  tba 
north  Shag  Rock,  and  in  a  line  with  the  two  Shag  Rocks  in  one ;  if  you  bring 
the  south  Shag  Rock  open  on  either  side  of  the  north  rock,  you  will  be  clear 
either  to  the  eastward  or  westward  of  the  ledge;  the  safest  passage  into  this  bay 
from  the  northward,  is  between  the  two  Shag  rocks,  and  then  between  Tweed 
Island  and  Pearl  Island.  From  Guernsey  Inland  to  Tortoise  Head  (which  is  the 
north  point  of  York  Harbour,  and  the  S.  E.  point  of  Lark  Harbour)  the  course 
is  S.  by  E.  five  miles;  Lark  Harbour  lies  in  S.  W.  near  two  miles,  and  is  one- 
third  of  a  mile  broad  in  the  narrowest  part,  which  is  at  the  entrance.  To  sail  in- 
to it  with  large  ships  keep  the  larboard  shore  on  board,  but  with  small  vessels 
there  is  no  danger ;  }'ou  may  anchor  with  a  low  point  on  the  starboard  side  bear- 
ing west,  N.  W.  or  north,  and  ride  secure  from  all  winds. 

From  Tortoise  head  into  York  harbour,  the  course  is  S.  W.  near  one  league ; 
between  the  said  head  and  Governor's  island,  which  lies  befont  the  harbour,  is 
good  room  to  turn,  dnd  anchorage  all  the  way,  but  regard  must  be  had  to  a  shoal 
which  spits  off  from  a  low  beach  point  (called  Sword  point)  on  the  west  end  of 
Governor's  island  ;  to  avoid  which  keep  a  good  part  of  Seal  island  open  to  the 
northward  of  Governor's  island,  until  you  are  above  this  point;  in  turning  up 
the  harbour,  stand  not  nearer  the  next  point  on  the  island  (off  which  it  is  flat) 
then  to  bring  Tortoise  head  touching  Sword  point,  the  best  anchorages  is  to  keep 
Tortoise  head  open  to  the  said  point,  and  anchor  in  10  fathoms  along  the  sandy 
beach  on  the  main  ;  farther  up  within  the  island  is  too  deep  water  for  anchoring 
•II  the  way  through  the  passage  within  the  island :  this  harbour  is  very  convenient 
to  wood  and  water  at.  W.  S.  W.  and  S.  \^^jvinds  blow  here  sometimes  Vith 
great  violence,  occ;'3ioned  by  the  nature  of  tne lands,  there  being  a  valley  or  low 
land  between  this  harbour  and  Coal  river,  which  is  bounded  on  each  side  with 
high  hills;  this  causeth  these  winds  to  blow  very  strong  over  the  low  laml. 

Harbour  island  lies  at  the  entrance  of  the  river  Humber,  and  S.  E.  seven  miles 
from  Guernsey  island  at  the  S.  W.  point  of  which  is  a  small  snug  harbour  (called 
Wood's  harbour)  wherein  is  5  and  4  fathoms  water,  but  the  entrance  is  too  nar- 
row for  strangers  to  attempt,  and  but  two  fathoms  deep. 

The  river  Humber,  at  about  five  leagues  within  the  entrance,  becomes  narrow, 
and  the  stream  is  so  rapid  in  places,  for  about  four  leagues  up,  to  a  lake,  that  it 
ii  with  great  difficulty  a  boat  can  be  got  up  it ;  and  at  sometimes  quite  impracti- 
cable; this  laket  which  stretches  N.  E.  ^  N.  is  in  length  seven  or  eight  leagues, 
and  from  two  to  five  miles  broad :  the  banks  of  this  river,  and  the  shores  of  the 
lake  are  well  clothed  with  timber,  such  as  are  common  in  this  country.  This 
river  is  said  to  abound  with  salmon,  in  which  has  liecn  fornaerly  a  very  great  sal- 
mon fishery. 

The  north  and  south  arms  are  the  only  long  inlets,  in  which  is  very  deep  water 
until  vou  come  to  their  heads. 

A  little  within  the  entrance  of  the  north  arm,  on  the  starboard  side,  is  a  small 
cove,  wherein  a  vessel  might  anchor  in  SO  fathoms  water;  one  league  within  the 
entrance  of  the  south  arm,  on  the  starboard  side,  is  a  sandy  cove  (being  the 
second  on  that  side)  wherein  is  anchorage  in  16  fathoms  water  and  a  good  place 
to  wood  and  water  at ;  haul  into  the  cove  until  the  west  point  of  it  is  brought  on 
with  the  north  point  of  the  entrance  of  this  arm,  and  there  anchor ;  if  you  miss 
laying  hold  of  this  anchoring  ground,  there  is  a  very  good  harbour  at  the  head 
of  the  S.  E.  branch  of  this  arm ;  on  the  easl  side  of  Eagle  island  between  the 
north  and  south  arms,  is  anchorage  in  8,  10,  or  12  fathoms  water:  under  the 
north  side  of  Harbour  island  is  good  anchorage  with  S.  W.  winds,  at  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  from  the  island  you  will  have  a  muddy  bottom :  opposite  to  the  S.  E. 
end  of  Harbour  island,  on  the  south  side  of  this  bay,  is  Frenchman's  cove,  where- 
in is  good  anchorage  in  20,  16  or  1£  fathoms  water;  it  is  very  probable  that  none 
of  thette  anchorages  will  ever  be  frequented  by  shipping ;  yet  it  is  necessary  to 
point  them  out,  as  it  may  happen,  that  in  coming  into  the  bay  with  a  gale  of 
wind  at  S.  W.  it  may  blow  so  hard  out  of  York  harbour,  that  no  vessel  can  carry 
■ail  to  work  into  anchoring  ground ;  at  such  times  they  will  be  glad  to  get  to  an 
anchor  in  any  place  of  safety. 
TJ)f)  Bay  of  Islands  has  been  much  frequented  formerly  for  the  cod  fishery ; 


600 


BLUWrS    AMERICAN    C0A8T    PILOT. 


^'^ 


the  best  phce  fur  Ashing  ithips  to  erect  stages  and  keep  boats,  f^  in  Mnall  harbour, 
which  lies  a  little  without  the  South  head,  and  the  large  beach  dd  Sword  point; 
on  Governor's  island  is  an  excellent  place  for  drying  of  fi^h. 

From  Guernsey  island  to  tioune  bay,  the  couree  is  first  N.  N.  E.  MX  leagues, 
then  N.  E.  three  leagues :  the  lund  near  the  shore,  from  the  north  Shag  rock  to 
Cnpe  St.  Gregory,  is  low,  along  which  lay  sunken  rocks,  some  of  which  are  one 
quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  hut  a  very  little  way  inland,  it  rises  ?nto  a  moun- 
tain terminating;  at  top  in  round  hills  :  from  Cape  St.  Gregory  to  Bonne  bay,  the 
land  rises  in  hills  directly  from  the  sea  to  a  considerable  height :  Cape  St.  Ore- 
gory  is  hi;;h,  and  the  northernmost  land  you  can  see,  when  coasting  along  shore 
between  Red  island  and  the  Bay  of  Islands. 

Bunne  bay  may  be  easily  known  if  you  are  not  above  four  or  five  leagues  c<S 
nt  sea  by  the  lands  about  it,  all  the  land  on  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  bay  being  very 
liij^h  and  hilly ;  the  land  on  the  N.  E.  side,  and  from  thence  along  the  sea  coast 
to  the  northward,  is  low  and  rtat ;  hut  about  one  league  up  inland,  are  a  range  of 
mountains  which  run  parallel  with  the  sea  coast:  you  cannot  distinguish  the  tow 
land  if  you  are  six  or  seven  leagues  OlT  at  sea.  Over  the  south  side  uf  this  bay 
is  a  very  high  mountain,  terminating  at  top  in  a  remarkable  round  hill,  which  is 
very  conspicuous  when  you  are  to  the  northward  of  the  bay.  This  bay  lies  in 
S.  E.  two  leagues,  then  branches  into  two  arms,  one  tending  to  the  southward 
and  the  other  to  the  eastward ;  the  best  r.nchon)ge  is  in  the  southern  arm ;  smalt 
vessels  must  anchor  just  above  a  low  woody  point  (which  is  on  the  starboard 
side  of  the  bay,  at  the  entrance  into  this  arm)  before  a  sandy  beach,  in  8  or  10 
fathohns  water,  about  a  cable's  IfM^'i  from  shore :  but  large  ships  must  run 
higher  up,  unless  thej'  moor  to  tlielhore,  they  cannot  anchor  in  less  than  SO  or 
40  fathoms,  but  at  the  head  of  the  a*m,  where  there  ts  but  24. fathoms  ;  notwith- 
standing  the  great  depth  of  water,  jv^u  lay  every  where  in  perfect  security,  and 
very  convenient  to  wood  and  water,  there  oC'ng  great  plenty  of  both.  To  saii 
into  the  east  arm,  keep  the  S.  £.  pointer  starboard  shore  on  board  ;  short  round 
that  point  is  a  small  snug  cove,  wherein  is  good  anchorage  in  16  or  18  fathoms 
water,  and  moor  to  the  shore ;  a  little  within  the  north  point  of  this  arm  is  a 
very  snug  harbour  for  small  vessels,  wherein  is  7  and  6  fathoms  water.  In  sail- 
ing in  or  out  of  this  bay  with  S.  W.  winds  come  not  near  the  weather  shore,  for 
fear  of  being  becalmed  under  the  high  land,  or  meeting  with  heavy  gusts  of  wind, 
which  is  still  worse,  and  the  depth  orwater  is  too  great  to  anchor. 

From  Bonne  Bay  to  Point  Rich,  the  course  along  shore  is  N.  N*E.  distance 
twenty  four  leagues;  but  in  coming  out  of  the  bay,  you  must  first  steer  N.  N»W. 
»nd  N.  by  W.  for  the  first  three  leagues,  in  order  to  get  an  ofiing.  Tea  miles  to 
ihe  northward  of  Bonne  Bay  is  a  pretty  high  white  point  (called  Martin  Point) 
three  quarters  of  a  mile  rightoff  from  this  point  is  a  small  ledge  of  rocks  whercoa 
the  sea  b-eaks:  one  league  to  the  northward  of  Martin  Point,  is  a  low  white 
rocky  point  (called  Broom  Point ;)  half  a  mile  S.  W.  from  this  lies  a  sunken  rock 
that  seldom  shows  itself.  On  the  N.  E.  side  of  Broom  Point  lies  the  bay  of  St. 
Paul,  wherein  vessels  may  anchor  with  southerly  and  easterly  winds,  but  lies 
quite  exposed  to  the  sea  winds. 

One  league  to  the  northward  of  the  bay  of  St.  Paul,  is  a  pretty  high  point  of 
land  (called  Cow  Head;)  it  will  have  the  appearance  of  an  island,  being  only 
joined  to  the  main  by  a  very  low  and  narrow  neck  of  land;  three  quarters  of  a 
mile  off  this  heap  lies  Steering  Island,  which  is  low  and  rocky,  and  the  only  is- 
land on  the  coast  between  the  Bay  of  Islands  and  Point  Rich.  On  the  south 
side  of  Cow  Head  is  Cow  Cove,  wherein  is  shelter  for  vessels  with  easterly  and 
noKherly  winds ;  and  on  the  north  side  of  this  head  is  Shallow  Bay,  wherein  is 
water  sutHicient  fur  small  vessels,  and  good  fishing  conveniences;  at  IheN.  E. 
entrance  into  this  bay  are  a  cluster  of  rocky  islands,  which  range  themselves 
N.  E.  and  S.  W.  and  at  the  S.  W.  entrance  are  two  rocks  close  to  each  other, 
which  generally  show  themselves ;  they  lay  a  full  cable's  length  from  the  shore, 
and  there  is  a  channel  into  the  bay  on  either  side  of  them.  In  sailing  in  or  out 
of  this  bay,  you  may  go  on  either  side  of  Steering  Island,  which  lies  right  before 
it,  but  come  not  too  near  the  N.  £.  end  there  being  sunken  rocks  off  that  end. 
This  place  is  the  best  situated  for  a  fishery  of  any  on  the  coasti  there  b«ing  ex- 
cellent fishing  ground  about  it. 


blunt's  auerican  coast  pilot. 


601 


ill  harbour, 
ord  point; 

jix  leagues, 
dag  rock  to 
lich  are  one 
nto  a  moun- 
nne  bay,  the 
ipe  St.  Gre- 
along  shore 

0  leagaes  off 
jr  being  very 
,he  sea  coast 
re  a  range  of 
•uish  the  low 
e  of  this  bay 
hill,  which  is 
tis  bay  lies  in 
le  souttiWard 
n  arm ;  small 
the  starboard 
ch,  in  8  or  lO 
ips  must  run 
>ss  than  SO  or 
jTiss  notwith- 
t  security,  and 
jolh.    To  sail 
i;  short  round 
>r  18  fathoms 
f  this  arm  is  a 
pater.    In  sail- 
ther  shore,  for 
[gusts  of  wind, 

»i.E.  distance 
teerN.N.W. 

Tea  miles  to 
Martin  Point^ 
rocks  whercoB 
is  a  low  white 

a  sunken  rock 
the  bay  of  St. 
nncte,  but  lies 

Y  high  point  of 
,d,  being  only 
e  quarters  of  a 
rid  the  only  is- 
On  the  south 
h  easterly  and 
ay,  wherein  is 
;  at  the  N.  E. 
ige  themselves 
to  each  other, 
roro  the  shore, 
ailing  in  or  out 
ies  right  before 
^  oflf  that  end. 
;herftb«nRe«- 


From  Steering  Island  to  Point  Rich,  the  course  is  N.  20°  45'  E.  distance 
eeventeen  lee;;ues :  from  Shallow  Bay  to  the  south  part  of  Ingomachoix  Bay  Is 
nearly  a  straight  shore  all  the  way,  and  neither  creek  or  cove  where  a  vessel  can 
shelter  herself  <rom  the  sea  winds ;  there  are  some  small  sandy  bays,  where  ves- 
sels may  anchor  with  the  land  winds ;  six  leagues  to  the  northward  of  Steering 
Island,  and  about  a  half  a  mile  inland,  is  a  remarkable  hill  (called  Portland;)  it 
makes  not  unlike  Portland  in  the  English  Channel,  and  alters  not  in  its  appear- 
ance from  any  point  of  view. 

Hawke's  Harbour  and  Port  Saunders  are  safe  and  commodious  harbours,  sit- 
uated in  the  bay  of  Ingoanachoix,  S.  E.  two  leagues  from  Point  Rich :  at  the 
entrance  of  these  harbours  lies  an  island  (called  Kepple  Island)  which  is  not  easily 
to  be  distinguished  by  strangers  from  the  main  ;  the  channel  into  Hawke's  Har- 
bour (which  is  the  southernmost)  lies  between  the  island  and  the  south  shore ; 
on  the  starboard  shore  entering  into  this  harbour,  and  opposite  to  the  west  end 
of  the  island  .begins  a  shoal,  which  stretches  up  along  that  shore  one  mile,  the 
middle  of  which  runs  out  into  the  harbour  two  thirds  the  breadth  thereof,  great 
part  of  this  shoal  dries  at  low  water :  your  course  into  the  harbour  is  east,  keep- 
ing  mid-channel,  or  rather  nearest  to  Kepple  Island,  until  the  east  end  thereof 
(which  is  a  low  stone  beach)  bears  N.  by  E.  or  N.  then  slecr  S.  E.  \  E.  for  a 
small  island  you  will  see  up  the  harbour,  keeping  the  N.  E.  or  larboard  shore 
pretty  well  on  board,  and  steer  for  the  said  little  island ;  as  soon  as  you  have 
brought  the  point  at  the  south  entrance  of  the  harbour  tu  bear  W.  by  N.  i  N.  and 
are  the  length  of  the  S.  E.  point  of  a  bay  which  is  on  the  starboard  side  of  the 
harbour,  you  will  then  be  above  the  shoal,  and  may  anchor  in  IS  fathoms  water, 
or  you  may  run  within  half  a  mile  of  the  small  island  and  there  anchor,  where 
you  will  lay  more  convenient  to  take  in  wood  and  water.  To  sail  into  Port 
Saunders,  there  is  not  the  least  danger ;  leave  Kepple  Island  on  your  starboard 
side,  and  anchor  as  soon  as  you  are  half  a  mile  within  the  entrance,  in  10  or  1|. 
fathoms  water ;  but  if  yo'.^  run  up  towards  the  head  of  this  harbour,  keep  the 
larboard  shore  on  board,  in  order  to  avoid  a  ledge  of  rocks  which  lies  nearly  in 
the  middle  of  the  harbour.  This  is  the  best  harbour  for  ships  to  lay  in  that  are 
bound  to  the  southward,  as  the  other  is  for  those  bound  to  the  northward ;  all 
the  lands  near  these  harbours  are  in  general  low,  and  covered  with  wood ;  you 
may  occasionally  anchor  without  these  harbours,  in  the  bay  of  Ingornachoix,  ac- 
cording as  the  winds  are. 

Point  Rich  lies  in  the  latitude  of  51°  41'  80":  it  is  the  S.  W.  point  of  a  penin- 
sula, which  is  almost  surrounded  by  the  sea ;  it  is  every  where  of  a  moderate  and 
pretty  equal  height,  and  is  the  most  remarkable  point  of  land  along  the  west  side 
of  Newfoundland,  it  projecting  out  into  the  sea  farther  than  any  other,  from 
whence  the  coast  each  way  takes  a  different  direction. 

Two  miles  N.  E.  from  Point  Rich  is  the  harbour  of  Port-aux-Choix ;  it  is  but 
small,  yet  will  admit  of  ships  of  large  burthen,  but  they  must  moor  head  and 
stem,  there  not  being  room  to  moor  otherwise.  To  sail  into  it,  keep  the  star- 
board shore  on  board,  and  anchor  just  above  a  small  island  which  lies  in  the  mid- 
dle of  the  harbour.  In  this  harbour,  and  in  Boat  Cove,  which  lies  a  little  to  the 
northward,  are  several  stages,  andgoo'1  places  for  drying  offish. 

Round  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  peninsula,  lie?  the  harbour  of  old  Port-aux- 
Choix,  which  is  a  small  but  safe  harbour  in  the  entrance  of  which  lies  a  small  is- 
land called  Harbour  Island,  and  between  this  island  and  the  west  point  of  the 
har^our  are  rocks,  some  above  and  some  under  water.  To  sail  into  this  harbour 
on  tLe  west  side  of  the  island,  keep  the  island  close  on  board ;  but  to  sail  on  the 
east  side,  give  the  N.  E.  point  of  this  island  a  small  birth ;  you  may  anchor  any 
where  on  the  S.  E.  or  larboard  side  of  tlie  harbour,  but  come  not  near  the  N.  W. 
or  starboard-side,  there  being  a  shoal  of  sand  and  mud  all  along  that  side. 

Prom  Point  Rich  to  the  Twin  Islands  (which  are  low,  and  the  outermost  is- 
landis  in  the  bay  of  St.  John)  the  course  is  N.  N.  E.  distance  four  leagues,  and 
from  the  Twin  Islands  to  Point  Ferolle,  the  course  is  N.  E.  i  N.  eleven  miles. 

The  bay  of  St  John  lies  between  Point  Rich  and  Point  Ferolle ;  Ihere  are  in 
it  a  great  many  islands  and  sunken  rocks ;  the  only  island  of  any  extent  is  that 
of  St.  John,  which  lies  N.  E.  three  leaguet  from  Point  Rich ;  on  the  S.  W.  side 

76 


602 


BLUNt'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


of  this  island  is  a  small  harbour,  which  seems  not  badly  situated  fur  the  cod  fish- 
cry,  and  it  hath  good  conveniencies  for  that  purpose,  but  it  is  not  a  good  place 
for  shippiri}:; — they  would  he  too  much  exposed  to  the  S.  W.  winds,  which  sen* 
in  a  {;r(<at  ocu.  On  the  S.  E.  side  of  this  island,  opposite  to  the  west  end  of  Head 
l8lan<,i,  is  a  SiTiall  bay,  wherein  is  anchorage  in  16  or  14  fathoms  water,  and  shel- 
tered irom  moat  wiiids,  and  is  th«  only  anchoring  place  in  the  whole  bay. 

From  llie  suutli  pni  t  of  Point  Ferolle  stretches  out  a  ledge  of  rocks  S.  S.  W. 
near  one  league, ;  and  along  the  shore  to  the  river  of  Casters  (which  is  in  the 
bottom  of  St.  John's  Bay)  are  sunkeo  rocks  two  miles  o(F. 

Over  the  middle  of  tbe  bay  of  St.  John,  is  high  table  land,  which  is  very  steep 
on  tbat  side  next  the,  bay,  and  terminates  that  chain  uf  mountaii.<3  which  i-uns  par- 
allel with  the  coast  from  Bonne  Bay.  The  course  of  the  tides  alonf,  this  coast 
are  generally  governed  by  the  winds,  but  when  not  interrupted  by  strong  gales  of 
long  continuance,  a  S.  E.  by  S.  or  S.  S.  E.  moon,  makes  high  watCi-,  and  flows 
up  and  down,  or  upon  a  perpendicular,  seven  or  eight  fee''. 


Directions  for  J^avis^ating  on  part  of  the  J^.  E.  side  of  Newfoundland, 
and  in  the  Streights  of  Belle-Isle,  from  Red  Bay  to  Cape  BlufT,  on 
the  Coast  of  Labrador. 

[N.  B.  All  Bearings  and  Courses  liRroafter  mentioned,  are  the  true  Bearings  and  Courses, 

and  not  by  Compass.] 

On  the  N.  E.  coast  of  Newfoundland,  about  2  leagues  from  the  main,  are  two 
islands,  the  northernmost  of  which  is  called  Groias;  the  north  end  of  this  island  is 
in  the  latitude  of  51^  00'  north  :  at  about  2  miles  diDance  from  this  north  end,  are 
some  rocks  high  above  water. 

The  harbour  of  Croc  bears  N.  W.  by  W,  i  W.  2  leagues  from  the  north  end  of 
Gruias  island  ;  the  entrance  is  not  easily  distinguished  by  strangers  till  you  draw 
near  it ;  then  you  will  discover  a  small  island,  or  rock,  close  to  the  south  head  of 
the  harbour ;  you  may  stand  boldly  in  with  the  land,  there  being  no  danger  but 
what  shows  itself,  and  lies  very  near  the  shore :  as  soon  as  you  are  within  the  heads, 
you  will  open  the  £  arms:  that  to  the  S.  W.  is  not  safe  to  anchor  in,  being  foul 
ground,  and  open  to  the  N.  E.  winds;  you  i.  ay  run  up  into  the  N.  W.  arm  until 
you  are  land-locked,  and  anchor  where  you  please,  from  16  to  10  fathon'is  water, 
every  where  very  good  ground.  This  is  an  excellent  harbouir,  very  convenient  for 
the  fishery,  and  plenty  of  wood  and  water. 

From  the  north  end  of  Groias  island,  along  the  coast  to  the  White  island,  the 
true  course  is  N.  by  E.  12  leagues,  but  to  give  these  islands  and  the  Braka  shoal  a 
proper  birth,  make  a  N.  N.  E.  course. 

Between  Croc  and  the  bay  of  Griquet,  are  several  good  harbours,  with  excellent 
fishing  conveniences,  particularly  Great  and  Little  St.  Julian's,  Grandsway,  Water- 
man's cove.  White's  arm,  Zealot,  Feshot,  Go;)se  cove,  Craimiliere,  St.  Anthonfi 
and  St.  Luiiaire,  which  are  not  yet  accurately  described  ;  there  is  no  danger  on  the 
coast  but  what  lies  very  neai  the  shore,  except  the  small  shoal  of  Braka,  which 
lies  directly  off  the  bay  of  the  same  name,  4  miles  from  the  land,  on  whicii  the  sea 
breaks  in  bud  weather. 

The  bay  of  Griquet  is  situated  on  the  N.'  E.  coast  of  Newfoundland,  in  the  lati- 
tude of  51°  32'  north  ;  it  is  formed  by  Stormy  cape  to  the  north,  and  White  cape 
to  the  south,  and  contains  several  good  harbours  for  shipping  of  all  kinds,  wherein 
are  many  fishing  conveniences. 

Camel  island  lies  in  Griquet  bay,  is  very  high  in  the  middle,  like  the  back  of  a 
camel,  and  in  sailing  along  the  shore,  is  di^cult  to  be  distinguished  from  the  main. 

The  north  harbour  lies  within  Stormy  cape,  at  the  entrance  of  which  is  a  rock 
above  water :  you  may  go  on  either  side  of  this  rock,  it  being  bold  too  all  around, 
and  anchor  near  the  head  of  the  harbour,  in  6  fathoi  it  water ;  in  the  entrance  tiiit 
leads  to  the  N.  W.  and  S.  W.  harbours,  is  a  small  rocky  island,  which  makes  the 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


603 


the  cod  fish- 
31  good  place 
,  which  8en< 
end  of  Head 
er,  and  ahel- 
bay. 

ck8  S.  S.  W. 
hich  is  in  the 

is  very  steep 
lich  '•JOS  par- 
nf  this  coast 
tron^  gales  of 
Ci,  and  flows 


iwfoundland, 
,pe  Bluff*,  on 

12S  and  Courses, 


main,  are  two 
)f  this  island  is 
)  north  endt  are 


he  north  end  of 
i  till  you  draw 
J  south  head  of 

no  danger  but 
ithin  the  heads, 

in,  being  foul 
.  W.  arm  until 

fathon-«s  water, 

convenient  for 

lite  island,  the 
Bralia  shoal  a 

,  with  excellent 

ridsway,  Water- 

,  St.  Anthonjr< 

danger  on  the 

Braka,  which 

n  whicn  the  sea 

nd,  in  the  lati- 

»nd  White  cape 

kinds,  wherein 

:e  the  back  of  a 
from  the  main, 
which  is  a  rock 
too  all  around) 
le  entrance  tuat 
hich  makes  the 


passage  into  tiiose  harbours  narrow  :  the  safest  passage  is  to  the  northward  of  this 
island,  giving  the  point  at  the  entrance  of  the  N.  W.  harbour  a  little  birth  ;  as  soon 
as  you  are  within  the  island,  you  will  open  the  two  harbours;  that  of  the  N.  W. 
wnich  is  the  largest,  runs  in  N.  W.  near  2  miles ;  to  sail  up  to  the  head  of  the  har- 
bour, the  west  side  is  the  safest ;  you  will  at  first  have  14, 16,  and  18  fathoms  water, 
and  after  you  are  a  little  within  the  point,  will  meet  with  a  bank  whereon  is  7  and 
8  fathoms;  being  over  it,  you  will  again  have  16  and  17  fathoms,  and  as  you  ap- 
proach the  head,  will  shoalen  your  water  gradually  to  5  fathoms,  every  where  good 
anchoring,  and  sheltered  from  all  winds. 

The  S.  W.  harbour  runs  in  near  2  miles  behind  Camel's  island  :  it  is  but  a  nar- 
row arm,  and  haih  in  it  from  10  to  4  fathoms  water ;  there  is  a  shoal  at  the  entrance, 
but  neither  it  r.or  the  harbour  are  yet  sufficiently  examined,  to  give  any  direction 
about  it  here. 

The  two  islands  o^  Oriquet  lay  on  the  outside  uf  CamePs  island,  and  together 
form  between  them  rdveirJ  small,  but  very  snug  harbours  for  fishing  vessels. 

From  Stormy  cape  to  Cape  de  Grat,  on  the  island  of  Quirpen,  is  N.  by  E.  dis- 
tant 3^  miles ;  between  which  is  the  harbour  of  Little  Quirpen,  formed  by  the  island 
of  that  name;  there  is  no  danger  going  in,  but  the  shore  itself;  it  is  a  small,  safe, 
snug  harbour,  where  fishing  ships  moor  head  and  stern. 

Suirpon  island,  which  is  the  S.  E.  point  that  forms  the  entrance  of  the  Streights 
elle-iile,  is  barren  and  mountainous ;  Cape  de  Grat  on  the  S.  E.  side,  and  the 
highest  part  of  this  island  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  12  leagues. 

White  islands  lav  between  Griquet  and  Cape  de  Grat,  about  2^  miles  from  the 
laud ;  thej  are  hut  small,  and  of  a  moderate  height ;  on  the  inside  of  ihem  are  some 
rockst  both  above  and  under  water,  but  not  dangerous,  as  they  discover  themselves 
even  in  fine  weather ;  and  the  passage  between  them  and  the  main,  whioh  is  half  a 
league  wide,  is  very  safe. 

De  Grat  and  Pigeon  coves  lay  on  the  S.  E.  side  of  the  island  of  Quirpen,  and  to 
the  northward  of  Cape  de  Grat,  in  the  mouth  of  which  are  some  small  islands,  and 
rocks  above  water;  behind  these  islands  aie  shelter  for  shipping,  in  4  fathoms  wa- 
ter, and  convenient  places  for  fishing. 

The  passage  into  Great  Quirpen  harbour  is  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  the  island  of  the 
same  name,  between  it  and  Grave's  island,  whiclris  an  island  in  the  mouth  of  the 
harbour;  in  approaching  the  entrance,  you  may  make  as  free  as  you  please  with 
the  island  Quirpen,  there  being  no  danger  but  what  shows  itself,  until  you  come  to 
the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  where  there  are  shoals  on  your  Inrboard  side,  which  you 
avoid  by  keeping  Black  head,  upon  Quirpen,  open  of  all  the  other  land,  until  Cape 
Raven  is  brought  over  Noddy  point;  then  haul  in  for  the  harbour,  keeping  about 
half  a  cable's  length  from  the  point  of  Grave's  island:  it  is  every  where  good  an- 
choring within  the  said  island,  and  room  and  depth  of  water  for  any  ships,  and  good 
ground  ;  the  best  place  is  in  9  fathoms  water,  up  towards  the  upper  end  of  Grave's 
island,  ubreast  of  Green  island,  which  lies  about  the  middle  of  the  harbour ;  the 
passage  to  the  inner  harbour,  on  either  side  of  Green  island,  is  very  good  for  ships 
of  a  moderate  draught  of  water,  through  which  you  will  carry  3  fathoms ;  and  above 
the  island  is  exceeding  good  anchoring,  in  7  fathoms ;  there  is  a  passage  into  this 
place  through  Little  Quirpen,  but  it  is  too  narrow  and  intricate  for  vessels4o  attempt, 
unless  well  acquainted :  v\  and  about  Quirpen  are  excellent  conveniences  for  a  great 
number  of  shipj,  and  good  fishing  grounds  about  tho^e  parts:  all  the  land  about 
Giiquet  and  Quirpen  is  mountainous,  and  appears  a  barren  rock. 

Noddy  harbour,  which  lies  a  little  to  the  westward  of  Quirpen,  runs  in  S.  S. 
W.  between  Noddy  point  and  Cape  Raven,  which  form  the  entrance  of  the  har- 
bour; there  is  no  danger  in  going  in  ;  the  passage  is  on  the  west  side  of  a  small 
isl«^nd,  that  lies  about  |  of  a  mile  within  the  heads,  and  you  anchor  as  soon  as 
above  it,  in  5  fathoms  water  ;  or  with  small  vessels  you  may  run  up  into  the  basin, 
and  anchor  in  Si  or  3  fathoms  ;  within  the  island,  on  the  east  side  of  the  harbour^ 
is  a  stage,  and  very  convenient  rooms  for  mnny  fishing  ships. 

In  turning  up  towards  Quirpen  and  Noddy  harbour,  you  may  stand  pretty  near 
to  the  Bull  rock  and  Maria  ledge,  which  are  above  water  ;  and  both  of  them  about 
<|  a  leaifue  from  the  land  of  Quirpen ;  the  passage  between  thorn  is  also  ^  a  league 
wide,  and  vevy  safC;  taking  care  only  to  keep  near  to  Gull  rock,  to  avoid  the  N.  W. 


604 


BLtJwr  s  AifiirRicArf  coast  pilot. 


)e^S?,  which  ledge  does  not  appeajr  but  in  bad  weather ;  in  the  passage  between 
the  N.  W.  ledge  and  the  main,  are  many  rocks  and  shallow  water. 

The  course  from  Bauld  cape,  which  is  the  northern  extremity  of  Quirpen,  to  the 
Great  Sacred  island,  is  west  2  leagues ;  this  course  will  carry  you  the  same  dis- 
tance without  Gull  rock.  "^  '"^u  pass  without  Bauld  cape.  Little  Sacred  island 
lies  E.  S.  E.  from  the  .  ind,  1  mile ;  the  passage  between  them  is  very  safe, 

and  you  may  sail  roun«.  i....ii  both ;  they  are  high  and  bold  ;  within  them,  to  the 
S.  W.  is  Sacred  bay,  which  is  pretty  large,  whttruin  are  a  K^^eat  number  of  small 
islands,  and  rocks  above  water ;  the  land  at  tiie  bottom  of  this  bay  is  covered  with 
wood  ;  this  place  is  only  resorted  to  fur  wood  fur  the  use  of  the  fishery  at  Quirpen, 
Oriquet,  and  places  adjacent,  where  wood  is  scarce. 

From  Great  Sacred  island  to  Cape  Norman,  the  course  is  west  13  miles,  and  to 
Cape  Onion  is  S.  W.  by  W.  2  miles ;  this  cape  is  the  nortii  point  of  Sacred  bay ; 
it  id  pretty  high  and  sleep,  near  to  which  is  a  very  remarkable  rock,  called  the 
Mewstone ;  to  the  southward  of  the  Mewstone  is  a  small  cove,  where  a  vessel  may 
lie  in  safety. 

From  Cape  Onion  to  Burnt  cape,  the  course  is  W.  S.  W.  distance  5  miles ;  the 
shore  between  them  is  bold,  and  of  a  muderate  height ;  Burnt  cape  appears  white, 
and  rises  gradually  from  the  sea  to  a  tolerable  height ;  on  the  east  side  of  the  cape 
lies  the  entrance  to  the  bay  Ha-ha,  which  runs  in  S.  S.  W.  2  miles;  when  without 
Burnt  cape,  you  may  anchor  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  open  only  to  the  N.  E.  winds ;  or 
you  may  run  up  into  the  harbour,  where  you  lie  land  locked  in  8  fathoms  ;  here 
are  good  conveniences  for  fishing  ships,  and  plenty  of  wood  for  their  use.  Cape 
Norman,  from  Burnt  cape,  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  }  W.  7  miles ;  between  them  is  the 
bay  of  Pistoleii,  which  runs  in  S.  S.  W.  and  extends  several  miles  every  way,  with 
good  anchoring  in  most  parts  of  it,  particularly  on  the  west  side,  a  little  above  the 
islands,  which  lie  on  the  same  side,  in  5  fathoms  water ;  the  shore  about  this  bay  is 
tolerably  well  covered  with  wood ;  boats  frequently  come  here  for  wood  from 
Quirpen. 

Cook's  harbour  is  small,  and  lies  within  the  islands,  at  the  N.  W.  part  of  Pis- 
toles bay,  and  2  miles  to  the  S.  E.  of  Cape  Norman ;  to  sail  into  it  you  must  take 
care  and  give  the  Norman  ledges,  which  lie  E.  N.  E.  1  mile  off  the  north  point,  a 
good  birth  ;  in  going  along  shore,  the  mark  to  keep  without  these  ledges  is,  to  keep 
all  the  land  of  Burnt  cape  open  without  the  outermost  rocks,  which  lie  on  the 
aouth  side  of  the  entrance  to  this  harbour ;  if  you  are  going  in,  as  soon  as  you 
judge  yourself  to  be  the  southward  of  the  Norman  ledges,  you  must  steer  in  for  the 
barbour,  leaving  the  islands  on  your  larboard  side ;  you  must  keep  the  south  shore 
olose  on  board  for  fear  of  a  ledge  of  rocks  which  spits  out  from  a  small  rocky 
island  on  the  other  side ;  as  soon  as  you  are  within  that  island  you  mrst  haul  over 
for  the  north  shore,  and  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water.  In  this  harbour  might  be 
made  several  very  convenient  fisiiing|rooms,and  in  the  coves  between  it  and  Cape 
JSIorman,  might  be  built  stages  for  the  boats  to  resort  to,  and  to  cure  fish. 

Cape  Norman  is  the  northernmost  point  of  land  in  Newfoundland,  lies  in  the 
latitude  of  51^^  38'  23"  N.  is  uf  a  moderate  and  even  height,  and  a  barren  rock 
for  some  miles  in  the  country ;  from  Cape  Norman,  a  W.  S.  W.  course,  between  9 
and  10  leagues,  will  carry  you  a  league  without  Green  island ;  all  the  shore  between 
thera  is  bold,  and  of  a  moderate  and  equal  height  for  several  miles  into  the  coun- 
try ;  but  a  goo<!  way  inland  is  a  chain  of  high  mountains,  lying  parallel  with  the 
coast;  between  3  and  4  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  cape  is  a  cove,  wherein  small 
vessels  and  boats  may  lie  very  secure  from  all  winds  except  N.  E. ;  from  this  place  to 
Green  island  there  is  no  shelter  on  the  coast.  In  turning  between  Cape  Norman 
and  Green  island  in  the  night,  or  in  fuggy  weather,  you  may  stand  in  for  the  land 
wii:h  great  safety,  in  25  fathoms  water,  until  you  are  nearly  the  length  of  Green 
island ;  you  will  then  have  that  depth  of  water  very  near  the  shore,  and  likewise 
on  the  outside  of  the  island  itself. 

Green  island  lies  }  of  a  mile  from  the  main,  is  |  of  a  mile  in  length,  very  low. 
narrow,  and  agreeable  in  colour  to  the  name  it  bears;  from  the  east  epd  stretcher 
out  a  ledge  of  rocks  }  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward,  whereon  the^sea  breaks  in  bad 
weather ;  th*  channel  between  the  island  and  the  main,  wherein  ift  4  and  i  fathoms 
watwr,  is  vejrj  safe,  and  where  vessels  may  anchor  if  they  find  occasion ;  the  only 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


605 


sage  between 

uirpen,  to  the 
the  tame  dii- 
Sacred  island 
n  is  very  safe, 
n  tliem,  to  the 
mber  of  small 
covered  with 
ry  at  Quirpen, 

J  miles,  and  to 
f  Sacred  bay ; 
ck,  called  the 
re  a  vessel  may 

:e  5  miles ;  the 
appears  white, 
lide  of  the  cape 
;  when  without 
[.  E.  winds ;  or 
fathoms ;  here 
leir  use.  Cape 
een  them  is  the 
every  way,  with 
:  little  above  the 
ibout  this  bay  is 
for  wood  from 


W.  part  of  Pi$- 

t  you  must  take 

B  north  point,  a 

edges  is,  to  keep 

lich  lie  on  the 

as  soon  as  you 

:  steer  in  for  the 

the  south  shore 

I  a  small  rocky 

mrst  haul  over 

irbour  might  be 

een  it  and  Cape 

'e  fish. 

land,  lies  in  the 
Id  a  barren  rock 
turse,  between  9 
shore  between 
into  the  coun- 
larallel  with  the 
!,  wherein  small 
im  this  place  to 
Cape  Norman 
in  for  the  land 
mgth  of  Green 
e,  and  likewise 

ingth,  very  low, 

Itepd  stretchei 

,  breaks  in  bad 

t  and  6  fathoms 

sioD ;  the  only 


wmds  that  can  make  a  sea  here,  are  from  the  W.  S.  W.  and  E.  N.  E. ;  to  go  in 

irom  the  westward,  keep  the  point  of  the  island  on  board  for  the  deepest  water, 
^hich  is  4  fathoms,  and  going  in  from  the  eastward,  keep  the  main  on  board.  The 
listance  from  this  island  to  the  opposite  pait  uf  the  coast  of  Labrador,  called 
Castles,  or  Red  Cliffs,  doth  not  exc*  ed  a^  leagues;  they  bear  from  each  other  N. 
W.  and  S.  E.  and  is  the  narruMest  pan  of  the  Stieightsof  Belle-isle. 

From  Green  island  to  Flower  ledge,  (which  lies  near  j^  a  league  from  the  shore,) 
a  W.  S.  W.  course,  9  le.«gues.  will  carry  >uu  ||  a  league  wittiout  the  ledge;  from 
Flower  ledge  to  the  bay  of  bt.  Baib«,  the  course  is  S.  S.  W.  5  miles,  and  tu  point 
Ferolle,  8.  W.  ^  S.  7  leagues;  5  miles  to  the  westward  of  Green  island  is  Sandy 
bay,  wherein  small  vessels  might  ride  in  3  and  4  fathoms  water,  with  southerly  and 
S.  W.  winds ;  between  Green  island  and  Sandy  bay  is  Double  ledge,  which  stretches 
off  from  the  shore  near  half  a  mile,  whereon  is  8  and  9  feet  water. 

Savage  cove,  which  is  2  miles  to  the  westward  of  Sandy  bay,  is  small,  will  admit 
only  small  vessels  and  boats,  in  the  mouth  of  which  is  a  small,  low  iHJand  ;  the 
passage  in  (which  is  very  narrow)  is  on  the  ea»i  side  of  the  island,  and  you  must 
anchor  as  soon  as  you  are  withm  it,  in  2^  and  £  tathums  water ;  one  mile  to  the 
westward  of  this  cove  is  Mistaken  cove,  which  is  something  larger  than  Savage 
cove,  but  not  near  so  good,  being  shoul  water  in  every  part  of  it.  Nameless  cove 
lies  1  mile  farther  to  the  westward,  wherein  is  very  shoal  water,  and  several  sunken 
rocks ;  one  mile  right  off*  from  the  east  point  of  this  cove  lies  Flower  ledge,  part 
of  which  just  appears  at  low  water ;  you  will  have  10  fathoms  water  close  to  the  off 
side  of  it ;  between  it  and  Mistaken  cove,  ^  a  mile  from  the  land,  lies  Grenville 
ledge,  whereon  is  6  feet  water.  Flower  cove  (wherein  is  2^  fathoms  water)  lies 
just  to  the  southward  of  Nameless  cove ;  it  may  be  known  by  some  white  rocky 
islands,  called  Seal  islands,  lying  a  little  to  the  westward  of  it ;  you  must  not  come 
too  near  the  outermost  of  these  islands,  fur  fear  of  some  sunken  rocks  near  it.  A 
little  within  the  entrance  lies  a  rock  above  water,  and  a  channel  on  each  side  of  it ; 
this  cove  lies  in  east,  as  does  Nameless  cove,  and  you  must  mind  not  to  mistake 
one  for  the  other :  between  Seal  islands  and  the  main  is  a  passage  for  boats,  and 
conveniences  for  a  seal  fishery. 

From  Seal  islands  to  Anchor  point,  which  is  the  east  point  of  the  bay  of  St. 
Barbe,  the  course  is  S.  W.  by  S.  1  league ;  there  is  no  danger  but  what  lies  very 
near  the  shore,  until  you  are  the  length  of  the  point  where  lies  a  rocky  island,  from 
which  stretches  out  a  ledge  of  rocks  S.  3.  W.  ^  of  a  mile,  which  you  nmst  be 
mindful  of  in  going  in  or  out  of  the  bay  of  St.  Barbe.  A  little  within  Anchor 
point,  is  Anchor  cove,  wherein  is  3  fathoms  water ;  it  is  so  very  small,  that  there  is 
no  room  in  it  to  bring  a  ship  up,  unless  it  be  little  wind  or  calm  ;  the  safest  way  is 
to  anchor  without,  and  warp  in ;.  there  is  room  in  it  for  one  ship,  and  is  a  very  snug 
and  convenient  place  for  one  fishing  ship,  and  for  a  seal  fishery. 

The  bay  of  St.  Barbe  lies  between  Anchor  point  and  St.  Barbe's  point,  which 
is  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  bay ;  they  lie  from  each  other  S.  by  E.  and  .\.  by  W. 
half  a  league* ;  it  lies  in  S.  E.  about  2  miles  from  Anchor  point ;  to  sail  into  the  bot- 
tom of  the  bay  or  harbour,  yo  i  must  give  Anchor  point  a  good  birth,  and  all  the 
east  side  of  the  bay,  to  avoid  th?  sunken  locks  which  lay  along  that  shore;  the  bay 
will  not  appear  to  be  of  any  de^th,  and  you  must  be  well  in  before  you  can  disco- 
ver the  entrance  into  the  harbour,  which  is  but  narrow  :  you  must  then  steer  S.  S. 
£•  keeping  in  the  middle  of  the  channel,  an<l  anchor  as  soon  as  you  are  within  the  two 
points,  in  a  si;  all  cove,  on  the  west  side,  in  5  fathoms  wiiter ;  the  bottom  is  sand 
and  mud,  and  you  lay  land-locked.  Near  this  place  branches  out  two  aims  or  ri- 
vers, one  called  the  south  and  the  other  the  east :  in  the  east  river  is  S  fathoms  wa- 
ter a  good  way  up,  but  the  other  is  shoal ;  in  these  rivers  are  plenty  of  salmon,  and 
their  banks  are  stored  with  various  sorts  of  wood.  Between  the  S.  W.  point  of 
the  bay  and  west  point  of  the  harbour  is  a  cove,  wherein  are  sunken  rocks,  which 
stretch  (Hf  a  little  without  the  luie  of  the  two  points;  in  the  open  hay  is  7,  8  and  9 
fathoms  water,  but  no  safe^npnorage,  because  of  the  N.  W.  and  W.  winds,  which 
blow  ri|;,ht  in,  and  cause  a  very  great  sea. 

About  1  league  to  tbe^  S.  W.  of  the  bay  of  St  Barbe  lies  the  bay  of  St.  Gene- 
vieve ;  in  and  before  this. bay  lie  several  small  islands,  two  only  of  which  ais  of  any 
considerable  extent ;  the  northernmost  of  these  two,  wiiich  is  the  largest,  called 


606 


ULUNT's   AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


f 


Current  island,  ia  of  a  moderate  height,  and  when  you  are  to  the  N.  E.  oCit,  tlie 
west  point  will  appear  bluff,  but  it  not  high  ;  if  to  the  westward,  it  will  appear  flat, 
and  white  like  stone  boach ;  near  half  a  mile  S.  VV.  by  S.  from  the  point  is  a  shoal, 
upon  which  is  S  fathoms  water ;  the  other  island  (called  the  Gooseberry  island) 
lying  to  the  southward  (rnd  within  Current  island)  liath  a  cross  on  the  S.  W.  point 
of  it,  from  which  point  stretches  out  a  led^e  of  rocks,  near  half  a  mile  to  the  south- 
ward;  on  the  south  point  of  this  ledge  is  a  rotk  that  just  covers  at  high  water;  the 
best  channel,  into  the  bay  is  to  the  southward  of  these  islands,  betwien  the  rocks 
above  mentioned,  and  a  small  island  lying  south  from  it  (which  island  lies  near  the 
south  shore) ;  this  channel  is  very  narrow,  and  hath  nut  less  than  5  fathoms  at  low 
water  in  it ;  the  course  is  E.  by  N. ;  before  you  come  the  length  of  the  aforemen- 
tioned rock,  you  must  be  careful  not  to  approach  too  near  the  S.  W.  end  of  Goose- 
berry island,  nor  yet  to  the  main,  but  keep  nearly  in  the  middle  between  both ;  if 
you  get  out  of  the  channel  on  either  side,  you  will  immediately  fall  into  S  and  2 
fathoms  water;  as  soon  as  you  are  within  the  small  island  above  mentioned,  you 
must  haul  to  the  southward,  and  bring  St.  Genevieve  head  (which  is  the  S.  W. 
point  of  the  bay)  between  the  small  island  and  the  main,  in  order  to  avoid  the  mid- 
dle bank;  you  may  either  anchor  behind  the  small  island  in  5  and  6  fathoms  wa- 
ter, or  steer  over  with  th«  said  mark  into  the  middle  of  the  bay,  and  anchor,  with 
the  S.  W.  arm  open,  in  7  and  8  fathoms  water;  it  is  very  good  anchoring  in  most 
parts  of  the  bay,  and  pretty  convenient  for  wooding  and  watering  ;  the  best  place 
is  in  the  S.  W.  arm,  the  channel  going  into  which  is  narrow,  and  4  fathoms  deep. 

There  is  a  channel  into  the  bay  between  Current  island  and  Gooseberry  island, 
wherein  is  not  less  than  S  fathoms  water ;  it  is  but  narrow,  and  lies  close  to  the  N. 
E.  end  of  Gooseberry  island  :  there  is  also  a  channel  for  boats  to  the  eastward  of 
all  the  islands.  The  middle  bank  is  a  shoal  lying  in  the  middle  of  the  bay,  and 
nearly  dries  at  low  water ;  it  is  pretty  large,  and  hath  not  less  than  4  fathoms  water 
all   ound  it. 

l<'our  nivles  to  the  westward  of  the  bay  of  St.  Genevieve,  is  the  harbour  of  Old 
Ferulle,  which  is  a  very  good  and  safe  harbour,  formed  by  an  island  called  Ferolie 
island,  lying  parallel  with  the  shore.  The  best  passage  into  this  harbour  is  at  the 
S.  W.  end  of  the  island,  passing  to  the  southward  of  a  small  island,  in  the  entrance, 
which  island  is  very  bold  too;  when  you  are  within  this  island  you  must  haul  up 
N.  E.  and  anchor  behind  the  S.  W.  end  of  Ferolie  island,  in  8  and  9  fathoms  water, 
where  you  lie  land-locked  in  good  ground ;  yuu  may  also  aiichor  any  where  along 
the  inside  of  the  said  island,  and  find  a  good  channel  up  to  the  N.  E.  end  thereof^ 
where  there  is  an  exceeding  good  place  for  tishing  ships  to  lie  in,  like  a  basin,  in 
5  and  6  fathoms  water,  formed  by  3  islands,  lying  at  the  N.  E.  end  of  Ferolie 
island  ;  there  is  also  a  narrow  channel  into  this  place  from  the  sea,  of  2  fathoms  at 
low  water,  between  the  northernmost  of  these  islands  and  the  main ;  here  are  con- 
venient places  for  many  fishing  ships,  and  plenty  of  wood  and  water ;  on  the  out- 
side of  these  islands  are  some  ledges  of  rocks  a  small  distance  oft'. 

From  the  S.  W.  end  of  Ferolie  island  to  Dog  island,  is  W.  S  W.  between  4 
and  5  miles;  Dog  island  is  only  divided  from  the  main  at  hij^h  water,  is  much 
higher  than  any  land  near  it,  which  makes  it  appear,  when  you  ure  a  good  way  to 
the  eastward,  to  be  some  distance  from  the  main. 

From  Dog  island  to  point  Ferolie  is  W.  S.  W.  3  miles;  between  them  is  the 
bay  of  St.  Margaret,  which  is  large  and  spacious,  with  several  arms  and  islands  in 
the  bottom  of  it,  abounding  with  great  plenty  of  timber  of  the  spruce  and  fir  kind, 
and  watered  by  small  rivers ;  it  affords  good  anchorage  in  many  parts  of  it,  particu- 
larly on  the  west  side,  which  is  the  best  place,  as  being  the  clearest  of  danger,  siind 
most  convenient  for  wood  and  water. 

Between  St.  Margaret's  bay  and  point  Ferolie,  is  a  small  bay,  called  New  Fe- 
rolie, which  lies  in  S.  S.  W.  about  1  mile,  and  is  quite  flat  all  over,  having  not 
quite  3  fathoms  in  any  part  of  it,  and  in  some  places  not  more  than  S,  and  open  tu 
the  N.  E.  winds ;  there  is  a  stage  on  each  side  of  the  bay,  and  r9om  for  as  many 
more. 

Point  Ferolie  is  situated  in  latitude  51^  02'  N.  is  2  miles  in  length,  of  a  mode- 
rate height,  and  joins  to  the  main  by  a  low  neck  of  land,  which  divides  New  Fe- 
rolie bay.  from  the  bay  of  St.  John's,  which  makes  it  appear  like  an  island  at  a  dis- 


BLUNX'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


607 


.  E.  of  it,  tlif 
II  appear  flat, 
int  ii  a  shoal, 
Bberry  island) 
B  S.  W.  point 
r  to  the  south- 
ed wat«r ;  the 
r  sen  the  rocks 
id  lies  near  the 
athonis  at  low 
the  aforemen- 
end  of  Goose- 
tween  both ;  if 
II  into  9  and  2 
nentioned,  you 
h  is  the  S.  W. 
avoid  the  mid- 
1  6  fathoms  wa- 
id  anchor,  with 
ihoring  in  most 
;  the  best  place 
[  fathoms  deep, 
loseberry  island, 
i  close  to  the  N. 
the  eastward  of 
of  the  bay,  and 
4  fathoms  water 

harbour  of  Old 
lid  called  Ferolle 
^arbour  is  at  tlic 
,  in  the  entrance, 
ou  must  haul  up 
I9  fathoms  water, 
any  where  along 
r.  E.  end  thereof, 
L  like  a  basin,  in 
,,  end  of  Ferolle 
L  of  2  fathoms  at 
Li ;  here  arc  cou- 
lter -,  on  the  oiit- 

W.  between  4 
water,  is  much 
Ire  a  good  way  to 

Iveen  them  is  the 
is  and  islands  in 
[uce  and  fir  kirtd, 
lirts  of  it,  particu- 
Pt  of  danger,  %m\ 

,  called  New  Fe- 
Bver,  having  not 
I  2,  and  open  to 
oom  for  as  many 

igth,  of  a  mode- 
iivides  New  Fe- 
fn  island  at  a  dis- 


tance ;  all  the  north  side  of  the  point  is  very  bold  too,  having  20  fathoms  water 
very  near  it ;  but  from  the  S.  VV.  part  stretches  out  a  ledge  of  rooks  into  the  bay 
of  St.  John's. 

This  part  of  the  const  may  be  easily  known  by  a  long  table  mountain,  in  the 
country  above  the  bay  of  St.  John's  :  the  west  end  of  this  mountain,  from  the  mid- 
dle of  the  point  of  Ferrnlle,  bears  S.  by  E.  and  the  east  end  S.  59<^  SO'  E. 

In  turning  between  Green  island  and  point  FeroHe,  you  ought  not  to  stand  nearer 
the  shore  (tiniil  you  are  to  the  westwaid  uf  Flower  ledge)  than  half  a  league,  unless 
well  acquainted  ;  you  will  have  for  the  most  part,  at  that  distance  oflf,  SO  and  24 
fathoms  water  ;  nTter  you  are  above  the  Iptlges  (that  is  to  the  westward  of  them)  the 
shore  is  much  bolder,  but  the  soundine;s  not  quite  so  regular  ;  you  will  have  in  some 
places  15  and  16  fathoms  water  close  to  the  shore,  and  in  others  not  above  that 
depth  2  miles  oH':  the  land  between  Green  island  and  St.  Barbe,  next  the  sea,  is 
very  low,  and  in  some  places  woody.  The  land  between  the  bay  of  St.  Barbe  and 
point  Ferolle  is  higher  and  hilly,  the  most  part  covered  with  wood,  and  watered 
with  numbers  of  ponds  and  small  rivers. 

The  tides  in  the  harbour  of  Griquet,  Quirpen,  and  Noddy  harbour,  flows  full,  and 
change  about  E.  by  N. ;  in  the  bay  of  Pistoles,  and  places  adjacent,  E.  by  S. 

In  all  which  places  it  flows  up  and  down,  or  upon  a  perpendicular,  spring  tides 
i  feet,  and  neap  tides  3  feet. 

At  Green  island  S.  E.  bay  St.  Barbe  and  bay  St.  Genevieve,  S.  S.  E.  Old  and 
New  Ferolle  about  S.  by  K. 

In  all  which  places  it  flows  up  and  down,  or  upon  a  perpendicular,  spring  tides  7 
feet,  and  neap  tides  4  feet. 

Before  Quirpon,  in  settled  weather,  the  tide  or  current  sets  to  the  southward  nine 
hours  out  of  twelve,  and  stronger  than  the  other  stream ;  in  the  streights  the  flood  in 
the  ofling  sets  to  the  westward  two  hours  after  it  is  high  water  by  the  shore,  but 
this  stream  is  subject  to  alteration  in  blowing  weather. 

071  tht  coast  of  Labrador,  a  little  way  inland  from  Labriidnr  harbour,  or  bay 
Fhillippeaux,  is  a  very  remarkable  mountain,  forming  at  the  top  three  round  hills 
called  Our  Ladies  Bubbles.  This  mountain  bears  from  the  bay  of  St.  Barbe  N. 
W.  k  N.  from  tiie  bay  of  St.  Genevieve  N.  30°  W.  and  from  Dog  island  N.  14<^ 
45'  W. 

Belle-isle,  which  lies  at  the  entrance  of  the  streights  to  .which  it  gives  name,  is 
about,?  leagues  in  circuit,  and  pretty  high  ;  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  it  is  a  very  small 
harbour,  fit  for  small  craft,  called  Lark  harbour,  within  a  little  island  that  lies  close 
to  the  shore :  and  at  the  east  point  of  the  island  is  a  small  cove,  that  will  only  admit 
fishing  shallops;  £  miles  N.  by  E.  from  this  point  lies  a  ledge  of  rocks,  part  of 
which  appears  above  water,  ancj  on  which  the  sea  always  breaks  very  high ;  you 
will  have  20  fathoms  close  to  this  ledge,  and  55  fathoms  between  it  and  the  island : 
all  about  this  island  is  irregular  soundings,  but  you  will  not  find  less  than  20  fathoms 
home  to  the  island,  excepting  on  a  small  bank  lying  N.  W.  4  miles  from  the  M.  E. 
end,  whereon  is  only  5  fathoms. 

Red  bay,  on  the  coast  of  Labrador,  about  8  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Chateau, 
is  an  exceeding  good  harbour,  with  excellent  conveniences  for  the  fishery. 

York,  or  Chateau  bay,  on  the  coast  of  Labrador,  lies  W.  N.  'iV  4  W.  5j|  leagues 
from  the  west  end  of  Belle-isle,  and  N.  W.  ^^  N.  0^  leagues  fiom  the  island  of  Quir- 
pen. In  crossing  the  streight  from  Quirpen  to  Chateau  bay,  it  is  advisable  to  fall 
in  with  the  coast  a  little  to  the  westward  of  the  bay.  unless  the  wind  be  eastwardly, 
and  clear  weather,  as  there  is  not  the  least  danger  to  the  westward,  but  to  the  east- 
ward are  several  low  rocky  isiands.  This  bay  may  be  known  by  two  very  remark- 
able rocky  hills  on  Castle  and  Henley  islands,  which  islands  lie  in  the  mouth  of  the 
bay ;  those  hills  are  flat  at  top,  and  the  steep  clifls  round  them  have  something  the 
resemblance  of  castle  walls ;  but  as  these  hills  are  not  distinguishable  at  a  distance, 
because  of  the  highland  on  the  main  within  them,  the  best  marks  for  knowing  the 
bay,  when  in  the  ofling,  is  as  follows :  all  tho  land  to  the  westward  of  it  is  high,  of  a 
uniform,  even  figure,  terminating  at  the  west  side  of  the  bay  with  a  conspicuous  nob 
or  hillock  \  about  Chateau  bay,  and  to  the  eastward  of  it,  is  hilly,  broken  lands, 
with  many  islands  along  shore,  but  there  is  no  islands  to  the  westward  of  it :  to  sail 
into  the  bay,  you  leave  both  the  islands  on  which  stand  two  castle  hills,  on  the  star- 


60d 


BLUNT  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


1)oard  side :  and  for  large  ships  to  keep  clear  of  all  danger,  they  must  keep  point 
Grenville  (which  point  is  known  by  a  beacon  upon  it)  on  with  the  west  point  of 
Henley  island  (which  point  is  a  smooth  black  rock,  and  may  be  known  by  a  small 
black  rock  just  above  water,  about  a  cable's  length  without  it)  until  you  are  abreast 
of  the  east  point  of  Whale  island  :  then  to  avoid  the  middle  rock,  on  which  is  only 
9  feet,  and  which  lies  nearly  in  the  middle  between  the  east  point  of  Whale  island 
and  the  said  black  pt>int  of  Henley  island,  you  must  haul  over  either  close  to  the 
little  black  rock,  lying  off  the  said  point  of  Henley  island,  or  else  borrow  on  the 
Whale  island,  but  not  too  near  it,  it  being  flat  a  tittle  way  off;  when  you  are  so  far 
in  as  to  open  the  narrow  passage  into  Temple  bay,  in  order  to  sail  up  into  Pitt's 
harbour,  haul  to  the  westward,  until  you  brmg  the  outer  point  of  Castle  island  a 
little  open  with  Whale  island  ;  that  mark  will  lead  you  up  into  Pitt's  harbour,  which 
is  largo  and  spacious,  with  a  good  bottom  in  every  part  of  it,  and  covered  from  all 
winds  \  you  lie  in  10  or  14  fathoms ;  here  are  excellent  conveniences  for  the  fish- 
ery, and  plenty  of  timber  at  hand  There  is  a  good  though  narrow' passage  into 
the  northward  of  Henley  island,  through  which  you  carry  dj|  fathoms  water;  1  mile 
to  the  eastward  of  Henley  islands  lie  Seal  islands ;  from  them  to  Duck  island  is  3<| 
miles ;  between  Seal  islands  and  Duck  island  is  Bad  bay,  which  is  open  to  the 
easterly  winds,  and  full  of  rocks,  some  above  and  some  under  water. 

Crossing  the  streights  from  Quirpen  to  Chateau,  you  will  meet  with  irregular 
soundings,  from  20  to  SO  fathoms  on  the  Newfoundland  side,  and  in  places  near  the 
shore  you  will  have  30  to  40  fathoms  :  in  the  middle  of  the  streights  in  the  stream 
of  Belle-isle,  is  from  20  to  SO  fathoms,  and  between  that  and  Chateau  bay  from  45 
to  80  fathoms ;  within  a  mile  of  the  coast  of  Labrador,  to  the  westward  of  Chateau 
bay,  you  will  have  25,  SO,  and  S5  fathoms ;  further  up  the  streights,  as  far  as  Cape 
Norman  and  Green  island,  you  will  have  40  and  45  fathoms  in  the  middle,  less 
towards  Newfoundland,  at)d  more  towards  the  coa«t  of  Labrador. 

Abont  7  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Seal  islands,  is  St.  Peter's  islands,  a  parcel  of 
sr  .11  barren  rocks ;  within  them  is  St.  Peter's  bay,  which  is  a  good  bay,  open  only 
to  the  S  E.  winds. 

Cape  Charles  makus  with  a  high  steep  towards  the  sea,  and  sloping  inland,  so 
that  when  you  are  to  the  westward  of  Chateau,  Cape  Charles  will  make  like  aa 
island. 

From  St  Peter's  islands  to  Cape  Charles  island,  the  course  is  N.  E.  ^  N.  dis- 
tance near  4  leagues ;  between  them  lies  Niger  sound,  which  is  an  inlet  2  leagues 
deep,  before  which  lies  several  islands  You  may  pass  to  the  northward  or  south- 
ward of  any  of  those  islands  into  the  sound ;  the  course  in  is  N.  W.;  the  best  an- 
chorage is  on  the  north  side,  in  9  fathoms  water. 

From  Cape  Charles  to  the  Battle  islands,  (which  are  the  outermost  of  the  Cari- 
bou islands)  the  course  is  N-  by  E.  ^  E.  4  miles,  and  from  the  northernmost  of  the 
Battle  islands  to  Point  Lewis,  is  N  N.  W.  |  W.  5  miles;  between  the  Battle  isl- 
ands and  the  great  Caribou  island,  is  a  good  harbour  for  small  vessels;  the  south 
entranco  is  very  narrow,  and  has  only  3  fathoms  water ;  this  entrance  is  not  easily 
distinguished, by  reason  of  a  small  island  before  it;  the  north  entrance  is  much 
wider,  passing  to  the  westward  of  the  three  small  northernmost  of  the  Battle 
islands  ;  you  may  anchor  from  5  to  iO  fathoms  water.  This  place  is  much  resort- 
ed to  by  the  savages,  and  is  by  them  named  Ca-tuc-to;  and  Cape  Charles  they  call 
Ikkegaucheacteuc. 

Between  the  Caribou  islands  and  Cape  Lewis,  lies  St.  Lewis'  bay,  in  which  are 
many  islands  and  inlets  which  have  not  yet  been  examined. 

From  the  north  part  of  Cape  Lewis,  at  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  are 
two  flat  rocks,  and  also  several  sunken  rocks,  all  which  are  within  that  distance 
from  the  shore  ;  round  this  point  is  the  entrance  of  a  small  cove,  running  in  S.  S. 
W.  i  a  mile,  named  Deep-water  creek,  but  very  narrow,  and  has  from  SO  to  40 
fathoms  water  in  it. 

From  the  north  part  of  Point  Lewis  to  the  south  head  of  Petty  harbour  bay,  the 
course  is  north  1^  mile ;  it  is  a  high  bold  shore ;  from  the  south  head  to  the  north 
head  of  this  bay,  the  course  is  N.  \  E.  lj|  mile;  this  bay  runs  up  W.  N.  W.  1  mile; 
in  it  is  20  to  40  fathoms  water.  At  the  bottom  of  it  is  Petty  harbour ;  the  entrance 
is  to  the  northward  of  a  low  point  ofland  which  shuts  the  harbour  in  from  these*, 


so  as  not  to 

fathoms  br( 

the  narrjw 

comes  wide 

way  anchor 

the  north  h 

miles ;  betw 

ward  of  the 

Spear  har 

coming  fron; 

hot  torn  of  a 

the  north  isli 

half  a  cable's 

chor  in  7  or 

cither  side  of 

from  the  sout 

will  be  shut  ii 

From  Poll] 

W.  ;  about  3 

a  mile  of  rht 

fathoms  witiii 

Three  harboii 

high  as  they  ; 

islands  are  2  s 

the  middle  of 

mostly  appear 

may  pass  on  ei 

Queen  road,  ii 

and  room  for  s 

The  first  an( 

'«"s  up  S.  by  I 

then  it  tends  ^ 

hut  thence  is  v^ 

Port  Charlo 

is  a  low  flat  isl 

a  reef  of  rocks 

the  south  side  i 

shore,  therefore 

the  entrance,  tl 

fathoms,  ordy  g 

small  reef  that 

Mecklinbnrc 
W.  N.  W  a  m 
upper  part  is  no 
keep  the  larboai 
Ijoardside,  abou 
part  of  the  harh 
chorage  is  at  thj 
From  the  islai 
course  is  N.  ^  E 
Alexis  river,  bet 
leagues,  where  t 
Jours  and  island 
There  are  4  isia 
further  up,  2  on 
which  is  about  a 
sugar-loaf,  with 
a  ledffe  of  rocks 
a"d  fi.  S.  E.  hi 
wafer,  with  a  Jed 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


609 


ep  point 
point  of 
f  a  smnli 
e  abreast 
h  is  only 
lie  island 
)se  to  the 
txt  on  the 
ate  so  far 
nto  Pitt's 
e  island  a 
)ur,  which 
d  from  all 
r  the  fish- 
ssage  into 
ter;  1  mile 
sland  is  SJ| 
pen  to  the 

h  irregular 
;es  near  the 
the  stream 
ay  from  45 
of  Chateau 
far  as  Cape 
middle,  less 

,  a  parcel  of 
y,  open  only 

ig  inland,  so 
ake  like  an 


E.  i  N.  dis- 

let  2  leagues 

ltd  or  south- 

the  best  an- 

of  the  Cari- 
nmost  of  the 
je  Battle  isl- 
9;  the  south 
is  not  easily 
ince  is  much 
if  the  Battle 
much  resort- 
rles  they  call 

lin  which  are 

the  shore,  are 
Ithat  distance 
l)ing  in  S.  S. 
torn  20  to  40 

[hour  bay,  the 

to  the  north 

W.  1  mile; 

,  the  entrance 
from  these*. 


so  as  not  to  be  seen  till  very  near  it ;  the  entrance  is  very  narrow,  it  is  not  above  50 
fathoms  broad  ;  there  is  5  fathoms  in  the  middle,  and  3  fathoms  close  to  the  sides ; 
the  narr  jw  part  is  but  short,  and  after  you  are  within  the  entrance  the  harbour  be- 
comes wider,  running  up  VV.  by  N.  l/^  mile,  and  ^  of  a  mile  broad,  wherein  ships 
may  anchor  in  any  part,  from  \'i  to  7  fathunis,  and  lie  entirely  land-lorked.  From 
the  north  head  of  Petty  harbour  bay  to  Point  Spear,  the  course  is  N.  j(  E.  Z\ 
miles ;  between  them  is  Barr^^n  bay  and  Spear  harbour ;  Barren  bay  is  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  north  head  of  Petty  harbour  bay;  in  it  is  no  shelter. 

Spear  harbour  is  to  the  southward  ot  Spear  point ;  this  is  a  very  good  harbour ; 
coming  from  the  northward,  about  Point  Spear,  you  will  open  two  islands  in  the 
bottom  of  a  small  bay;  the  best  passage  in,  i<<  between  the  2  islands,  and  to  keep 
the  north  island  close  on  board  ;  there  is  4  fathoms  along  side  of  it ;  after  you  are 
half  a  cable's  length  within  the  islands,  steer  for  the  niiddle  of  the  harbour,  and  an- 
chor in  7  or  8  fathoms,  where  is  good  room  to  moor ;  small  vessels  may  go  en 
cither  side  of  the  island;  there  is  2  fathoms  at  low  water ;  but  observe,  in  coming 
from  the  southward  you  will  only  distinguish  one  island,  for  the  northernmost  island 
will  be  shut  in  under  the  land  so  is  not  to  be  discerned  till  you  get  within  the  heads. 
From  Point  Spear  to  the  entrance  of  the  Three  harbours,  the  course  is  W.  N. 
W. ;  about  3  miles  between  them  are  several  small  high  islands  lying  within  half 
a  mile  of  tlie  shore,  called  Spear  islands ;  they  are  all  bold  too,  and  there  is  20 
fathoms  within  them  :  N.  N.  E.  .j  E.  from  the  S.  E  head  of  the  entrance  of  the 
Three  harbours,  lies  2  sm«ill  isl-inds  close  together,  called  Double  island,  about  as 
high  as  they  are  broad,  and  about  half  a  cable's  length  to  the  eastward  of  those 
islands  are  2  sunken  rocks,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  in  bad  weather.  Nearly  in 
the  middle  of  the  entrance  of  the  Turee  harbours  lie  2  islands  close  togetther,  which 
mostly  appear  as  one  island  by  being  so  close  together  ;  they  are  steep  too:  ships 
may  pass  on  eithe>-  side  of  them  in  12  and  14  fathoms,  and  anchor  within  them,  in 
Queen  road,  in  16  fathoms  ;  by  the  S.  E.  end  of  the  islands  is  the  widest  passage^ 
and  room  for  ships  to  work  in  or  out. 

The  first  and  southernmost  harbour  within  Queen  road  is  Sophia  harbour ;  it 
runs  up  S.  by  R.  li|  mile,  and  has  from  15  to  10  fathoms  water  for  that  distance; 
then  it  tends  away  round  a  low  point  to  the  eastward,  and  becomes  a  mile  broad, 
but  thence  is  very  shoal  water,  and  only  fit  for  small  vessels. 

Port  Charlotte  is  the  middle  harbour,  and  a  very  good  one  for  any  ships  ;  there 
is  a  low  flat  island  on  the  starboard  side  of  the  entrance,  and  from  this  island  runs 
a  reef  of  rocks  a  third  of  tiie  channel  over  to  the  south  side  ;  to  avoid  which  keep 
the  south  side  nearest  on  board,  for  it  is  steep  too,  having  9  fathoms  close  to  the 
shore,  therefore  keep  the  south  side  nearest  until  yon  are  a  quarter  of  a  mile  within 
the  entrance,  then  you  may  anchor  in  any  part  of  the  harbour  between  12  and  17 
fathoms,  only  giving  the  starboard  side  a  birth  of  half  a  cable's  length,  to  avoid  n 
small  reef  that  lies  along  that  side. 

Mecklinbnrg  harbour  is  the  northernmost  of  the  3,  and  lies  up  N.  W.  ^  W.  and 
W.  N.  W  S  miles;  in  the  lower  part  of  this  harbour  is  20  fathoms,  but  in  the 
upper  part  is  no  more  than  12  fathoms,  room  for  ships  to  moor ;  to  sail  up  the  head, 
keep  the  larboard  side  nearest,  to  avoid  the  ledge  of  rocks  that  lie  along  the  star- 
board side,  about  SO  fathoms  from  the  shore.  These  rocks  lie  within  the  narrowest 
part  of  the  harbour,  and  above  the  low  point  on  the  starboard  side  ;  the  best  an- 
chorage is  at  the  head  of  the  harbour. 

From  the  islands  at  the  entrance  of  the  Three  harbours  to  Cape  St.  Francis,  the 
course  is  N.  ^  E.  about  5  miles  ;  between  them  is  the  entrance  into  St.  Francis  or 
Alexis  river,  between  2  low  points  about  a  mile  across  ;  this  river  1  <  is  up  abont  10 
leagues,  where  the  wa^er  is  fresh,  and  a  very  strong  tide  ;  in  it  are  many  bays,  har- 
bours and  islands  ;  the  first  part  of  this  river  runs  up  W.  N.  W.  3  miles  and  a  half. 
There  are  4  islandr*  within  the  entrance,  2  of  which  are  on  the  larboard  side,  and 
further  up,  2  on  the  starbsard  side;  the  outermost  island  on  the  larboard  side, 
which  is  about  a  mile  within  the  entrance,  is  a  high  round  island  in  the  shape  of  a 
sugar-loaf,  with  the  top  part  cut  oil',  arul  is  a  very  good  mark  to  sail  in  by  ;  there  is 
a  ledge  of  rocks  about  half  a  cable's  length  from  the  S.  E  point  of  the  entrance ; 
and  B.  S.  E.  half  a  mile  from  the  said^  point,  there  is  a  flat  rock,  always  above 
water,  with  a  ledge  of  sunken  rocks  half  a  cable's  length  to  theN.  E.  from  it.  and 

77 


610 


blunt's  ameeican  coast  pilot. 


half  a  mile  without  this  flat  rock,  on  the  same  line  with  the  point,  there  is  another 
flat  island  with  a  ledge  of  sunken  rocks  a  cable's  length  to  the  N.  E.  from  it.    In 
sailing  into  this  river,  to  avoid  these  ledfi;es,  keep  to  the  northward  of  the  flat 
islands,  till  you  bring  the  Sugai-loaf  islam^  which  i*t  within  the  river,  a  third  of 
the  channel  over  from  the  8.  C.  point ;  that  mark  will  keep  you  clear  of  the  ledges, 
and  to  the  northward  of  them  you  may  either  sail  or  work  in,  taking  care  not  to 
shut  the  Sugar-loaf  island  in  with  the  N.  W.  point,  and  bring  it  no  nearer  the  S. 
E.  point  than  a  third  of  the  bieadth  of  the  channel ;  after  being  within  the  points, 
there  is  no  danger  but  what  is  to  be  seen  ;  there  is  ancitorage  within  the  two  islands, 
on  the  larboard  side,  in  12  and  14  fathoms,  but  you  will  lay  op^-n  to  the  N.  R- ;  the 
best  place  to  anchor  within  the  first  part  of  the  river  is  in  Ship's  harbour,  which  is 
on  the  larboard  side,  about  2^  miles  from  the  entrance,  where  the  course  into  it  is 
S.  S.  W.  1^  miles)  at  the  entrance  it  is  ^  of  a  mile  broad,  at  the  head  it  is  broader; 
there  is  1£  and  15  fathoms  water,  and  {i;ood   anchorage  in  security  against  all 
winds;  at  3^  miles  from  the  entrance  the  course  of  the  river  is  W.  by  S.  7  miles; 
in  the  middle  of  it  are  several  great  and  small  inlands ;  sailing  up  along  the  south 
side  of  the  islands  there  is  no  danger,  and  not  less  than  40  or  50  fathoms  water, 
but  on  the  starboard  or  north  side  of  the  islands,  there  is  much  less  water,  and  an- 
chorage all  the  way  up  in  12  and  17  fathoms.    The  course  up  the  third  part  of  the 
river  is  W.  S.  W.  4  milies;  here  is  only  S,  islands,  on  the  larboard  or  south  side  of 
which  is  very  good  anchoring  in  12  fathoms;  on  the  north  side  is  80  fathoms  water ; 
the  land  aboiu  here  is  very  high  and  well  covered  with  wood  ;  here  the  water  is 
fresh,  and  7  miles  further  up  is  a  bar,  on  which  there  is  not  above  S  feet  at  low 
water, the  river  above  that  ba'r  runs  W.  and  W.  N,  W.  6  miles,  but  the  h»-  j  of  it 
is  not  yet  known ;  by  the  rapid  stream,  probably  it  comes  from  great  lakes 
afar  off.  . 

One  mile  northward  of  St.  Francis  river,  there  is  a  harbour,  called  Merchant' 
men's  harbour  ;  between  the  river  and  this  harbour  there  are  2  or  3  sunken  rocks, 
lying  a  cable's  length  off  from  the  second  point  from  the  river ;  there  is  no  danger 
in  sailing  iiito  this  harbour ;  it  runs  in  first  W.  N  W.  and  then  W.  about  a  mile,  is 
3  caMe's  length  wide  at  the  entrance,  and  3  at  the  head  of  it,  where  ships  may 
anchor  in  12  fathoms  water. 

To  the  northward  of  this  harbour,  round  a  small  point,  there  is  an  inlet  which 
runs  up  W.  N.  W.  5  miles,  wliere  it  turns  to  the  southward  into  St.  Francis  river ; 
it  is  about  I-  of  a  mile  broad  at  the  entrance,  and  continues  the  same  breadth  about 
3  miles  up,  and  then  becomes  very  broad,  with  an  island  in  the  middle,  shaped 
not  unlike  a  leg  ;  there  is  no  danger  in  this  inlet  but  what  appears  above  water: 
along  the  south  side  of  Leg  island  there  is  anchorage  in  12  and   13  fathoms.    At 
about  Sj)  miles  within  the  entrance,  the  lower  part  of  Leg  island  forms  3  very  good 
harbours,  with  7  and  12  fathoms  water  in  them;  on  the  north  side  of  Leg  island 
there  is  a  large  space,  about  a  mile  broad,  and  2  miles  long  ;  in  it  is  from  60  to  80 
ftthoms  water,  from  which  to  the  N.  W.  is  a  passage  into  Gilbert's  river,  which 
runs  from  thence  W.  N.  W.  6  miles,  and  is  about  |}  a  mile  broad,  and  from  60  to 
80  fathoms  water  in  it;  then  Gilbert's  river  divides  into  2  branches,  one  to  the  W. 
N.  W.  7  or  8  miles,  the  other  S.  S.  W.  6  miles,  the  head  of  which  is  within  a  mile 
of  St^  Francis  river;  both  these  branches  are  full  of  small  islands,  rocks  and  shoals 
on  each  side,  but  in  the  middle  is  good  anchorace  all  the  way  up,  from  10  to  40 
fathoms  ;  this  river  has  also  a  passage  out  to  the  sea  to  tiie  northward  of  Cape  St. 
Francis,  between  Hare  island   and   Fishing  islands ;  from  St.    Francis'   island 
to  the  north  end  of  Hare  island,  is  W.  N.  W.  2|  miles  ;  within  Hare  island  there  is 
a  small  harbour  ;  to  sail  into  it  you  must  pass  round  the  north  end  of  Hare  island  ; 
there  is  from  12  to  5  fathoms  water  within  this  harbour,  and  iio  shoals  in  it;  but 
the  harbour  hereabouts  is  Fishing  shi|>  harboin-,  which  is  formed  bv  3  islands,  lying 
along  shore  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Hare  island  ;  the  best  passage  into  it  is  be* 
tween  the  2  westernmost  islands,  which  entrance  bears  from  Hire  island  N.  W. 
There  is  no  danger  in  this  passage :  ships  may  sail  tight  in  N.  W  up  the  head  of  the 
harbour,  and  anchor  in  12  fathoms;  there  is  good  room  ff)r  any  ships  to  moor; 
there  are  2  other  passages  to  this  harbour,  one  to  the  westward  from  the  entrance 
of  Giibert'sriver,  the  other  to  the  eastward,  passing  to  the  northward  of  all  the 
Fishing  islands,  and  hath  7  fathoms  throtigh,  but  this  is  a  very  narrow  passage,  ami 


difficult  for  tl 

St.  Michael, 

bold  too,  and 

Two  miles 

may  be  easily 

of  a  mile  with 

side  of  them ; 

W.  about  2  m 

being  steep  to 

the  winds  bett 

or  right  out. 

From  Cape 

2  capes  form  tl 

inlets,  rivers,  & 

be  seen  15  or  4 

St  MichaePs  I 

board,  then  kee 

Long  island,  ti 

12  to  20  fathom 

either  side  of  I 

within  which  ai 

The  land  fro 

makes  in  sever 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


611 


nother 

it.    In 
the  flat 
lird  of 
ledges, 
5  not  to 
r  the  S. 
points, 
islands, 
R. ;  the 
vhich  is 
into  it  is 
)roader ; 
tinst  all 
7  miles ; 
he  sonth 
IS  water, 
,  and  an- 
rt  of  the 
ih  side  of 
\s  water ; 
I  water  is 
set  at  low 
\r  J  of  it 
eat  lakes 


difficult  for  those  not  acquainted.  From  the  northernmost  Fishing  island  to  Cape 
St.  Michael,  the  course  is  N.  hy  W.  |  W.  distance  6  miles:  this  part  of  the  coast  i9 
bold  too,  and  very  high  land. 

Two  miles  to  the  s.)uthward  of  Cape  St.  Michael,  lies  Occasional  harbou<r,  which 
may  be  easily  known  by  £  large  rocks,  called  Twin  rocks,  which  lie  about  two>thirds 
of  a  mite  without  the  entrance  ;  they  he  close  together ;  ships  may  pass  on  either 
side  of  them  ;  the  entrance  to  this  harbour  is  bet^oen  il  high  lands,  and  runs  up  S. 
W.  about  2  miles,  then  W.  IV.  VV.  Tiiere  is  no  danger  in  this  harbour,  both  sides 
being  steep  too ;  and  about  2  miles  up  there  is  good  anchorage  in  7  and  10  fathoms ; 
the  winds  between  the  high  land  at  the  entrance  always  sets  right  into  the  harbour, 
or  right  out. 

From  Cape  8t.  .Michael  to  Cape  Biutf,  the  course  is  N.  by  W  4  leagues ;  these 
S  capes  form  the  great  bay  of  St.  Michael,  which  cuotains  a  ^reat  nuiuber-of  i!>lands, 
inlets,  rivers,  &ic.  which  are  notynt  known.  Cape  Bhiff  is  a  high  bluH  land,  and  may 
be  seen  15  or  16  leagues ;  the  best  place  yet  known  fur  large  ships  to  anchor  within 
St-  MichaePs  bay,  is  on  the  south  side,  that  is,  first  keep  Cape  St.  Michael  shore  on 
board,  then  keep  along  the  south  side  of  the  first  island  you  meet  with,  which  is  called 
Long  island,  till  you  come  near  as  far  as  the  west  end  of  it,  and  (here  anchor  from 
12  to  20  fathoms ;  you  will  there  lie  land-locked,  and  may  work  out  again  to  sea  on 
either  side  of  Long  island.  At  the  entrance  of  this  bay  is  a  large  square  island, 
within  which  are  many  small  islands,  which  form  several  harbours. 

The  land  from  Cape  Bluff  to  the  northward  lies  N.  N.  E.  5  or  6  leagues,  and 
makes  in  several  high  points. 


612 


BLUNT's   AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


COAST  OF  LABRADOR. 


Descr^tien  of  part  of  the  Coast  of  Labrador,  from  Grand  Point  of 

Great  IVlecatina  to  Sliecatica. 

[N.  B.     All  Bearings  and  Courses  hereafter  mentioneH,  are  the  true  Bearings  and  Courser, 

an<l  not  by  Compass.] 

The  Grand  Point  of  Great  Mecatina  Iie«  in  the  latitude  of  50°  41'  N.  and  is 
the  extreme  point  of  a  promoiituiy  which  stretches  oft'  from  the  main.  The  ex- 
treme of  this  point  is  low ;  from  thence  it  rises  gradually  to  a  moderate  height, 
and  may  he  easily  iinown  fronvseveral  adjacent  islands  and  rocks,  which  lie  oft'S. 
E  by  £.  <|  K.  from  it ;  the  nearest  of  which  is  a  small  low  rock,  and  i»  within  one 
third  of  a  cable's  length  from  the  point.  Two  of  these  islands  are  much  larger 
and  higher  than  the  others;  the  outermost  are  small  low  rocky  islands,  and  lieS^ 
miles  from  the  Grand  point. 

Fi  um  Grand  point,  E.  by  S.  i>i|  miles,  lie  the  two  Murr  islands,  which  are  the 
southernmost  islands  on  this  part  of  ttie  coast.  The  northernmost  Murr  island  lies 
from  the  other  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile.  Tliese  islands  are  very 
remarkable,  being  two  Hat  barren  rocks,  of  a  moderate  height,  and  steep  cliffs  all 
round.  About  half  a  mile  to  the  8.  K  of  the  southernmost  Murr  island,  lie  thn 
two  Murr  rocks,  which  are  above  water.  And  E  [V.  E d  E.  1|  mile  from  tho 
southenniiost  Murr  island,  lies  a  ledge  of  rocks  under  nater,  on  v/hich  the  sea 
generally  breaks. 

Fruin  Murr  i!>lands  N.  W.  by  VV.  2  leagues,  lie*  the  Bay  de  Portage.  The  land 
over  this  bay  makes  in  a  valley,  eacli  side  bein^  high  ;  at  the  entrance  lies  an 
island  of  a  nxuitrate  height,  which  foiins  the  harbuur.  You  may  sail  into  this 
harbour  on  either  side  of  the  island,  but  the  eastern  passage*  is  only  fit  for  small 
vessels,  there  being  only  2  fathoms  »vater  in  the  entrance  at  low  water.  The  wes- 
tern passage  is  sufficiently  large  and  safe  for  any  vessel  to  turn  in,  there  being  in  it 
from  6  to  8  fc.homs  at  low  water  Lary:e  vessels  bound  for  this  harbour  must  be 
careful  to  avoid  2  sunken  rocks,  on  which  there  is  'i\  fathoms  water  at  low  water. 
The.  northernmost  of  these  rocks  lies  from  Mutton  island  S.  ity  E.  1^  mile,  and 
the  southernniost  lies  from  the  Seal  rucks,  N.  by  E.  .^  F.  half  a  mile.  Vessels  may 
borrow  within  one  cable's  length  of  Mutton  island,  or  Seal  rocks. 

The  harbour  of  Great  Mecatina  lies  N.  W.  i  VV.  2  leagues  from  Murr  islands, 
and  N.  by  K.  2|  miles  from  Giand  point.  This  harbour  is  formed  by  Mecatina 
island  and  the  main,  and  is  a  safe,  but  small  harbour,  yet  will  admit  ships  of  bur- 
then, there  being  not  less  than  3  fathoms  water  in  either  passage  at  low  water  ;  but 
they  must  moor  head  and  stern,  not  being  room  to  moor  otherwise.  To  sail  into 
this  harbour  through  the  western  passage,  there  is  not  the  least  danger.  To  sail 
in  through  the  eastern  passage,  observe  the  following'  directions  :  from  the  eastern 
point  of  the  island  run  N.  Ni  W.  for  the  main,  and  keep  the  main  close  on  board, 
till  you  bring  the  western  point  of  the  island  on  with  the  point  of  Dead  cove,(this 
is  a  small  cove  on  the  main,  which  lies  open  to  the  eastward  ;  the  land  which  forms 
it  is  very  low,  with  some  brush  wood  on  it,)  and  sail  in  that  direction  till  you  are 
above  a  stony  point,  which  is  the  north  point  of  the  said  cove,  or  till  you  bring  the 


horih  point  o 
Alecatina  isl 
within  a  spit 
haul  directly 
from  the  soul 
passage  open 
eastward,  and 
ward  of  Gull 
on  beard,  in  ( 
island  and  th 
water. 

The  highesi 

over  the  harbo 

The  great  i: 

from  north  to 

land,  but  muci 

island  makes  i 

ihis  head,  to  tl 

which  is  a  goo( 

from  the  said  i: 

20  fathoms  wa 

The  great  is 

the  coast  ft  cm 

§ive  the  bearin 

and  harbours  ft 

The  harbour 

an  island  cover 

island,  but  to  tl 

island,  lies  a  let 

of  a  mile  from 

2  fathoms  watei 

island  in  7  or  (i 

Here  is  both  wo( 

tliis  harbour,  cal 

is  a  seal  fishery 

Between  the  I 

round  hill,  whic 

either  of  those  p 

Th«  bav  of  t 

mouth  of  which 

is  between  Seal 

side;  this  is  a  wi 

water.    This  ba 

are  several  islant 

«ng  places,  from 

the  eastern  shore 

'vestern  side  it  is 

»  a  high  bluff  h 

safe  harbour  for  s 

harbour  is  formei 

passage. 

After  you  leav 
tiiemain  land  (til 
nmnber  of  great 

«acho>her,thattl 
them. 

Amongst  these 
best  and  the  easie 

fiagle  harbour  i 
oHslands,  on  whi 


■-mm. 


BLUNTS    AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


613 


^oint  of 


d  Courser, 


N-  and  is 

Theex- 
:e  height, 

Tic  off  S. 
vithin  one 
uch  larger 
and  lie  ii 

ch  are  the 
island  lies 
Is  are  very 
ip  cliffs  ail 
[lid,  lie  thn 
from  the 
:h  the  sea 

The  land 
:e  lies  an 

into  this 
[t  for  small 

The  v/es- 
Ibeing  in  it 
hr  must  be 
llow  water. 

mile,  and 
lessels  may 

Irr  islands, 

Mecatina 

^ps  of  bur- 

vater ;  but 

["o  sail  into 

To  sail 

Ihe  eastern 

I  on  board, 

J  cove,  (this 

Ihich  forms 

)n  you  are 

1  bring  the 


tiotlh  point  of  Gull  isJand  (which  is  a  small  island  lying  N.  E.  by  E.  1  mile  from 
Mecatinu  island)  on  with  the  N.  E  point  of  Mecatina  island  ;  you  will  then  be 
within  a  spit  of  rocks,  which  stretches  off  from  \iecatina  island,  and  must  then 
haul  directly  over  for  Mecatina  island,  in  order  to  avoid  a  ledge  which  stretches  off 
from  the  south  point  of  Dead  cove,  and  may  anchor,  when  yoii  bring  the  western 
passage  open,  in  6  or  7  fathoms  water,  in  ureal  safety.  Vessels  coming  from  the 
eastward,  and  bound  for  the  harbour  of  Mecatina,  and  would  pass  to  the  north- 
ward of  Gull  island,  must  be  careful  either  tu  keep  Gull  island  or  the  main  close 
on  board,  in  order  to  avoid  a  sunken  rock  that  lies  i*ear  h..lf  way  between  Gull 
island  and  the  main,  on  one  part  of  which  there  is  not  above  3  feet  water  at  low 
water. 

The  highest  part  of  the  land  between  Grand  point  and  Ha-Ha  bay,  is  directly 
over  the  harbour  of  IVIecatina. 

The  great  island  of  Mecatina  lies  three  miles  fiom  the  main,  and  is  in  length, 
from  north  to  south,  3^  miles,  and  in  breadth,  from  east  to  west,  3  miles;  is  high 
land,  but  much  higher  in  the  middle  than  either  end.  The  N  E.  point  of  this 
island  makes  in  a  remarkable  bluff  head,  which  is  in  latitude  50^  46'  N.  Round 
this  head,  to  the  northward,  and  within  a  cluster  of  small  islands  (on  either  side  of 
which  is  a  good  passage)  lies  a  cove  which  runs  in  S.  by  W.  1^  W.  about  1^  mile 
from  the  said  islands ;  vessels  may  anchor  in  this  cove,  in  gieat  safety,  from  14  to 
2,0  fathoms  water,  good  grouni^.     Here  is  wood  and  water  to  be  had. 

The  great  island  of  Mecatina  being  the  most  remarkable  land  about  this  part  of 
the  coast  fioin  whence  vessels  may  best  rhape  a  course  for  other  places,  I  will  here 
^ive  the  bearings  and  distances  of  the  most  remarkable  points,  head  lands,  rocks 
.and  hatbours  from  it. 

The  harbour  of  Little  Fish  lies  in  east  and  west,  is  but  small,  and  is  formed  by 
an  island  covere<l  with  wood.  You  may  sail  into  this  harbour  on  either  side  of  the 
island,  but  to  the  northward  is  the  best  passage.  In  the  bay  to  the  southward  of  the 
island,  lies  a  ledge  of  rocks,  part  of  which  is  always  to  be  seen.  K.  by  S.  one  third 
of  a  mile  from  the  east  point  of  Wood  island,  lies  a  rock,  on  which  there  is  only 
2  fathoms  water  at  low  water.  You  may  anchor  in  this  hatbour  at  the  back  of  the 
island  in  7  or  U  fathoms  water,  good  bottom,  and  have  room  sufficient  to  moor. 
Here  is  both  wood  and  water  to  be  had.  Off  the  northern  point  of  the  entrance  into 
this  harbour,  called  Seal  point,  lies  2.  small  islands,  and  a  sandy  cove,  where  there 
u  a  seal  fishery  carried  on. 

Between  the  harbour  of  Little  Fish  and  the  bay  of  Ha-Ha,  is  a  remarkable  high 
round  hill,  which  makes  in  a  peak,  and  may  serve  as  a  good  mark  for  knowing 
either  of  those  places  by. 

Thu  bay  of  Ha-Ha  lies  from  La  Boule  point,  N.  N.  W  i  W.  SiJ  miles,  in  the 
mouth  of  which  there  are  several  islands,  which  form  several  passages,  but  the  best 
is  between  Seal  point  and  R  >und  island,  leaving  all  the  islmds  on  the  starboard 
side ;  this  is  a  wide  and  safe  passage,  there  being  no  danger  but  what  apnears  above 
water.  This  baj  runs  up  north  7  miles,  at  the  head  of  which  on  the  sta.  ^ard  side 
are  several  islands:  within  these  islands,  to  the  eastward,  are  many  good  anchor- 
ing places,  from  9  to  20  fathoms  water.  Vessels  may  occasionally  anchor  all  along 
the  eastern  shore  within  this  bay.  in  1"2  and  14  fathoms  wat«ir,  mud  ground  ;  on  the 
n'estern  side  it  is  deep  water.  N.  \  W.  S  miles  from  the  entrance  of  the  west  side, 
is  a  high  bluff  head  ;  round  this  head  W.  by  N.  \  VV.  half  a  mile,  is  a  small  but 
safe  harbour  for  small  vessels,  in  which  you  have  Vi  fathoms,  good  ground.  This 
harbour  is  formed  by  an  island,  on  either  side  of  which  there  is  a  safe  but  narrow 
passage. 

After  you  leave  the  bay  of  Ha-Ha,  procpctling  to  the  eastward,  you  lose  sight  of 
the  main  land  (till  you  come  to  the  bay  of  Shecatica)  which  is  hid  from  you  by  the 
number  of  great  and  small  islands  of  different  height,  so  numerous,  and  so  near 
each  ofther,  that  they  are  scarce  to  be  distinguished  as  islands  till  you  get  in  amongst 
them. 

Amongst  these  islands  are  a  great  many  good  roads  and  harbours;  some  of  the 
best  and  the  easiest  of  access  are  as  follow  : 

Eagle  harbour  lies  near  the  west  end  of  Long-island,  and  is  formed  by  a  cluster 
of  islands,  on  which  a  French  ship  of  war  of  that  name  was  lost.    Th':s  harbour  is 


§ 


■\ 


Hi 


614 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


cfip&ble  of  holding  a  miraber  of  shipping  with  great  secwity,  having  in  it  from  10 
(O  20  fathoms,  good  bottom,  but  it  is  not  easily  to  be  distinguished  by  strangers  ;  the 
best  way  to  find  it,  is  to  shape  a  course  as  before  directed,  from  the  great  island  of 
Mecatina,  to  Fox  islands,  which  lie  from  the  westernmost  entrance  of  the  harbour 
S.  E.  by  S.  ^  K.  1^  mile.  It  is  also  to  be  known  by  a  large  deep  bay,  which  forms 
to  the  eastward  of  it,  without  any  islnnds  in  it,  but  to  thfl  westward  is  a  vast  number. 
If  you  intend  for  the  east  pass-ij^e  into  this  harbour,  you  must  fli  st  steer  from  Fox 
islands,  N.  {^  E.  2j|  miles  into  the  bay,  when  you  will  observe  to  the  iN  W  of  you, 
a  remarkable  high  island,  round  whicii,  to  the  northward,  thert^  is  a  safe  passage, of 
S  fathoms  into  the  harbour,  where  you  may  anchor  in  j^reat  safety  from  all  winds. 
In  the  western  passage  into  this  harbour  is  2^  fathoms  water,  (it  only  for  small  ves- 
sels, being  a  narrow  passage  between  many  islands.  This  part  of  the  coast  is  very 
danger  lus  for  a  vessel  to  fall  in  with,  in  thick  weather,  by  reason  of  the  infinite 
nmnber  of  small  and  low  islands,  and  some  rocks  under  water. 

From  the  Bliiflf  head  of'  Great  Meoatina  island  to  St.  AngustineN  chain,  the 
course  is  N.  E.  8^  leagues.  The  west  island  of  St.  Augustine,  is  of  a  moderate 
height,  the  west  part  being  highest  and  quite  low  in  ttie  Hiidille,  hut  is  not  as  easy 
to  be  distinguished  at  a  distance,  by  reason  of  the  islands  within  being  much  higher. 
Haifa  mile  to  the  eastward  of  this  island  is  the  Kast  island,  something  larger,  but 
not  quite  so  high  and  is  even  at  top.  Between  these  two  islands,  after  passing  be- 
tween the  Chain  and  Square  islands,  is  a  safe  passage  for  small  vessels  into  this 
port;  they  may  anchor  between  the  West  island  and  Kotind  island,  or  they  may 
xun  to  the  northward  past  Round  island,  and  anchor  in  6  or  7.  fathoms  water,  where 
they  will  have  good  room  to  moor.  S  by  W.  |  W  about  half  a  league  to  the  west 
of  St.  Augustine's  island,  runs  a  chain  of  small  islands,  called  St.  Augustine's  chain, 
the  outermost  of  which  is  a  renvirkable  round  smooth  rock.  At  ^  of  a  mile  to  the 
westward  of  this  island  lie  rocks  under  water,  which  always  break,  and  show  above 
water  at  ^  ebb.  About  half  a  mile  to  the  S.  W.  of  these  rocks  is  a  high  black  rock, 
above  water ;  between  these  two  is  the  best  passage  for  large  vessels  into  the  port 
of  St-  Augustfne.  You  nmst  steer  from  this  black  rock,  for  a  remarkable  low  point 
which  will  bear  N.  |  W.  till  you  open  the  port  of  St.  Augustine,  and  then  hairi  in 
and  anchor  as  before ;  or  you  may  steer  up  the  passage  between  this  point  and 
Round  island,  and  anchor  as  before  directed. 

The  entrance  of  the  river  St.  Augustine,  lies  from  the  port  of  St.  Augustine  4^ 
leagues  to  the  S .  W.  with  several  large  and  small  islands  between  them.  The  ri- 
ver is  not  navigable  for  any  thing  but  boats,  by  reason  of  a  bar  across  the  entrance, 
which  dries  at  low  water.  This  river,  at  two  miles  up,  branches  into  two  arms,  both 
tending  to  the  N.  W.  14  or  16  leagues.  There  is  plenty  of  wood  to  be  had  in  this 
fiver. 

From  St.  Augustine's  chain  to  Shag  island,  the  course  is  N.  E.  j|  E.  2|  leagues. 
This  island  is  very  remarkable,  being  small,  high,  and  in  the  middle  is  a  round 
peeked  hill.  From  this  island  to  the  eastward  are  a  number  of  small  rocks  above 
water,  the  outermost  lies  E.  by  S.  ^  E.  1^  mile  from  Shag  island.  N.  W.  by  W. 
2||  miles  from  Shag  island,  lies  the  bay  and  harbour  of  Sandy  island,  which  is  a 
very  safe  harbour.  To  sail  into  this  harbour,  you  must  p^ss  to  the  eastward  of 
Murt  rocks,  and  keep  the  starboard  point  of  the  bay  on  board  ;  you  will  then  see  u 
small  rock  above  water  to  the  N.  W.  which  lies  off  the  entrance  of  the  harbour; 
you  may  pass  on  either  side  of  this  rock,  and  then  steer  in  N.  ^  W.  for  the  harbour, 
there  being  no  danger  but  what  appears  In  this  harbour  there  is  good  room  to 
moor,  in  5  and  6  fathoms  water,  and  a  good  bottom :  there  is  not  any  wood  to  be 
had,  but  plenty  of  water. 

Cumberland  harbour  lies  N.  |  W.  1  league  from  the  outer  Shag  rocks,  and  is  to 
be  known  by  a  remarkable  hign  hill  on  the  main,  which  is  the  highest  hereabouts, 
and  makes  at  the  top  like  a  castle,  being  steep  cliffs  appearing  like  walls.  This 
hill  lies  N.  W.  by  N.  abdnt  3i|  leagues  from  the  entrance  of  the  harbour.  The 
outer  islands,  named  Duke  and  '  nmberland  islands,  which  form  the  harbour,  are 
of  a  moderate  height,  the  easternmost  making  in  two  round  hills  To  sail  into  this 
harbour  there  is  no  danger  but  what  appears  above  water,  except  a  small  rock, 
which  lies  S  S  E  half  a  mile  from  the  west  head  ;  the  entrance  is  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  wide,  and  half  a  mile  long :  from  the  east  head,  steer  for  the  inner  point  on  the 


west  side;  afi 
anchor  where 
cellent  ro  .nj 
access  on  this 
bay. 

The  bay  o 

land  harbour, 

branches  and 

good  harbours 

very  well  acqt 

To  the  eastv 

outer  Shag  ror 

before  the  nion 

15  fathoms  \va  I 

you  may  pass  i 

end  between  it 

vessels.     Tlier< 

which  is  lo'i^  a 

barren,  but  ther 

to  the  eastward 

sage  for  small  V( 

miles  to  the  \ 

runs  up  north  5 

row,  bad  ground 

,  N.  B  All  the 
low  rocky  islanHs, 
JVo  wood  to  bt» 
The  course  and 
count  can  be  give 
weather  r  have  foij 
•It  iWecatina,  at  hi 


Directions 


for 
nee 


[N.n.     AUBeari, 
and  nt) 

Bowl  island  lie 

from  the  main ;  is 

About  thjf;  islan 

and  sunken  rocks, 

fresh  wind,  and  th 

From  Bowl  isia 

E.  distance  2  mile 

on  both  sides;  is  a 

western  shore  is  tli 

cable's  length  off  s 

at  about  2  miles  w 

you  may  lie  secure 

wooding  and  water 

remarkable  green 

niile  to  the  eastwat 

chorage  for  small 

g|"»achainof  isIa 

P'stant  from  the  m 

"lands;  themiddh 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


615 


from  10 
L-rs ;  the 
iland  of 
harbour 
:h  forms 
number, 
roin  Fox 
of  you, 
issagj^of 
II  winds, 
mall  ves- 
st  is  very 
e  infinite 

hain,  the 
moderate 
at  as  easy 
ch  higher, 
arger,  but 
assing  be- 
}  into  this 
they  may 
iter,  where 
o  the  west 
ne's  chain, 
aiile  to  the 
,how  above 
lilack  rock, 
to  the  port 
e  low  point 
len  hairi  in 
point  and 


igustine  4^ 
I.  Theri- 
e  entrance, 
arms,  both 
had  in  this 

2J^  leagues, 
is  a  round 
locks  above 
W.  by  W. 
which  is  a 
eastward  of 
then  see  n 
le  harbour ; 
Ihe  harbour, 
)d  room  to 
Iwood  to  be 

Is,  and  is  to 
Ihercabouts, 
\i\\s.  This 
hour.  The 
iarbour,  are 
fail  into  thU 
\mall  rock, 
Larter  of  a 
bointonthe 


west  side ;  after  you  are  the  length  of  that  point,  you  may  haul  to  the  eastward,  and 
anchor  where  you  pieane,  from  20  to  7  fnthnms  water,  in  good  ground,  and  an  ex- 
cellent ro  my  harbour,  iit  for  any  ships,  and  is  t:ie  best  harbour  and  the  easiest  of 
access  on  this  coast.  Here  is  good  water,  but  for  wood  you  must  go  up  Shecatica 
bay. 

The  bay  of  Shecatica  Iies2i  miles  to  the  N.  K  from  the  entrance  of  Cumber- 
laud  harbour,  and  runs  many  miles  up  the  c  uintrv  to  the  nnrthwaMl,  in  several 
branches  and  narrow  crooked  passages,  with  many  islands,  which  form  several 
good  harbours;  the  passages  are  too  narrow  for  vessels  to  attempt  without  being 
very  well  acquainted 

To  the  eastward  of  the  bay  of  Shec  atica,  and  N.  N  E.  |  E  2^  leagues  from  the 
outer  Shag  rocks  lies  the  island  of  VHstanogue  ;  within  it  to  the  northward,  aad 
before  the  month  of  the  bay  of  the  sau'e  name,  is  very  good  anchorage,  from  20  to 
15  fathoms  water,  good  ground,  and  s'jfficient  room  to  moor :  to  go  into  the  road 
you  may  pass  round  the  west  end  of  the  island,  which  is  bo'd  too,  or  round  the  east 
end  between  it,and  the  island  of  Shecatica,  but  this  last  passage  is  only  for  small 
vessels.  There  is  good  anchorage  quite  to  the  head  of  the  bay  of  Mistanogue, 
which  is  long  and  narrow  This  island,  and  the  main  fan^d  about  it.  is  high  and 
barren,  but  there  is  both  wood  and  water  to  be  had  in  the  bay  of  Mistanogue.  A.  little 
to  the  eastward  lies  the  island  of  Shecatica :  between  it  and  the  main  is  a  good  pas- 
sage for  small  vessels,  where  there  is  a  considerable  seal  fishery  carried  on.  Three 
miles  to  the  N*  E  of  the  island  of  Shecatica  lies  the  bay  of  Petit  Pene,  which 
runs  up  north  5  miles,  but  is  not  fit  lor  vessels  to  anchor  in,  being  deep  water,  nar- 
row, bad  ground,  and  entirely  exposed  to  the  southerly  winds. 

N.  B  All  the  islands  along  the  coast  are  quite  barren,  the  outer  ones  being  small  and 
low  locky  islands,  the  iiinnr  on«s  are  large  and  high,  roverert  mostly  with  green  moss. 

No  wooH  to  be  got  hut  at  such  places  as  are  mentioned  in  the  foregoing  directions. 

The  course  and  the  flowing  of  the  tides  along  this  coast  are  so  irregular,  no  certain  ac- 
count can  he  given  thereof;  th>y  depend  much  upon  the  winds,  but  in  settled  moderate 
weather  I  have  found  it  high  water  at  Shecaticu,  on  the  full  -ind  change,  at  11  o'clock,  and 
at  iMecatina,  at  half  past  2  o'clock,  and  rises  and  falls  upon  a  perpendicular  about  7  feet. 


Directions  for  navi^alintc  on  that  part  of  the  coast  of  Labrador  from 
Shecatica  to  Chateaux,  in  the  streights  of  Belle-I»ie. 

[N.  n.     All  Bearings  and  Courses  hereafter  mentioned,  are  the  true  Bearings  and  Courseff^ 
and  not  by  compass;   the  variation  was  26"  W.  in  the  year  1769.] 

Bowl  island  lies  E.  by  N.  2,  leagues  from  the  island  of  Shecatica,  and  1  mile 
from  the  main;  is  i  remarkable  round  island  of  a  moderate  height. 

About  thin  island,  and  between  it  and  Shecatica,  are  a  number  of  small  islands 
and  sunken  rocks,  which  render  this  part  of  the  coast  dangerous,  unless  tbsre  is  a 
fresh  wind,  and  then  the  sea  breaks  on  the  rocks. 

From  Bowl  island  to  the  entrance  of  bay  D'Omar,  the  course  is  N.  E.  by  N.  {^ 
£.  distance  2  miles.  This  bay  rims  up  N.  by  E.  nearly  three  miles,  with  high  land 
on  both  sides;  is  about  2  cables  length  offshore.  Off  the  coves  it  is  wider.  The 
western  shore  is  the  highest.  Without  the  east  p/)int  lie  two  small  islands  about  1 
cable's  length  off  shore.  In  this  bay  there  is  very  good  anchorage,  the  best  being 
al  about  2  miles  within  the  entrance,  opposite  a  woody  «'Oveon  the  west  side,  where 
you  may  lie  secure  from  all  wmds  in  14  or  16  fathoms  water,  and  be  very  handy  for 
wooding  and  watering.  About  1  mile  within  the  entrance  on  the  west  side,  lies  a 
remarkable  green  cove,  off  which  it  is  shoal  a  small  distance  from  the  shore ;  one 
mile  to  the  eastward  of  bay  D*Omar  lies  Little  Bay,  in  which  is  tolerable  good  an- 
chor«t;e  for  small  vessels  E.  N.  E.  ||  E.  distant  3  leagues  from  Bowl  island,  be- 
gins a  chain  of  islands  and  rocks,  lying  E.  N  E.  B  leagues,  and  from  3  to  5  miles 
distant  from  the  main,  the  easternmost  of  which  is  called  Outer,  or  Esquimaux 
islands;  the  middle  part  is  called  Old  Fort  islands ;  and  the  westernmost  is  called 


I 


¥l 


616 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


Doc;  islands.  Within  these  islands  on  the  inniii  are  se\'eral  good  bays  and  har- 
bours, but  are  too  difficult  to  atteuipt,  unless  very  well  acquainted,  the  passages 
beint;  very  narrow,  and  a  number  of  sunken  rocks. 

N.  i  W.  4  miles  from  the  west  side  of  the  outer  Esquimaux  islands,  is  very  good 
anchorage  for  small  vessels,  between  two  high  ishinds.  Within  these  islands  lies 
the  river  Ksquiinaux. 

From  outer  Esquimaux  island  to  Point  Belles  Amnui,  the  course  is  N.  59*  E. 
distant  13  miles.  Tiiis  point  is  low  and  green,  hut  about  1  mile  inland  is  high. 
Round  this  point  to  the  eastward  is  a  cove,  m  which  is  anchorage  for  small  vessels 
in  7  fathoms  water,  but  open  to  easterly  winds. 

From  Point  Belles  Amour  to  the  entrance  of  the  harbour  of  Bradore,  tl>e  course 
is  E.  by  N.  2  leagues  nearly.  This  harbour  is  to  be  known  by  the  land  between  it 
and  Point  Belles  Amour,  being  high  table  land,  the  land  otv  the  east  side  of  it 
being  low  near  the  sea,  and  tending  to  the  southward,  or  by  our  Ladies  Bubbles, 
which  are  three  remarkiible  round  hills,  seen  all  along  this  coast,  lying  N.  by  E.  ^ 
E.  S  leagues  from  the  island  of  Ledges,  which  forn^s  thi^  harbour.  This  island  is 
of  a  moderate  height,  having  a  great  number  of  small  islands  and  rocks  about  it. 
On  the  east  side  of  this  island  is  a  cove,  called  Bliibh;;r  cove,  wherein  is  anchorage 
in  2|i  fathoms  water,  for  small  vessels.  There  are  two  passages  into  the  harbour  of 
Bradore;  but  that  to  the  northward  of  ihe  island  of  i^edgesis  by  no  means  safe,  there 
being  a  namber  of  sunken  rocks  in  that  passage.  The  eastern  passage  is  safe, 
taking  care  to  avoid  -i  small  rock,  which  lies  S.  32°  W  i  of  a  mile  from  the  low 
point  on  the  main  where  the  houses  stand.  On  this  rock  the  sea  mostly  breaks, 
and  shows  above  water  a'  i  ebb.  On  (he  east  side,  within  the  rock,  is  a  small  cove, 
called  Shallop  cove.  From  the  point  above  the  cove,  called  Shallop  cove  head, 
stretches  off  a  shoal,  one  cable's  length  from  the  shore,  and  continues  near  the 
same  distance,  quite  to  the  head  of  the  harbour. 

From  the  island  of  Ledges  to  Green  island,  the  course  is  S.  80°  W.  distant  ;y 
miles.  On  the  east  side  of  this  island  is  a  cox'e,  wherein  a  fishery  is  carried  on. 
Between  this  island  and  the  main,  an.,  bettveen  it  and  the  island  Bois,  is  a  clear, 
safe  passage. 

The  island  of  Bois  lies  2  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Green  island,  and  is  of  a  mo- 
derate height,  and  a  safe  passage  all  round  it  To  the  northward  of  this  island 
lies  Blanche  Sablon,  m  which  is  anchorage,  but  the  ground  is  not  very  good,  being 
a  loose  sand. 

From  the  south  point  of  the  Isle  aux  Bans,  to  the  west  point  of  Forteaux  bay,  tli8 
course  is  N.  TO'^  E.  distant  8^  miles.  This  hay  is  3  miles  broad,  and  nearly  the 
same  depth,  at  the  head  of  whirh,  on  the  west  side,  is  good  anchorage,  from  10  to 
16  fathoms  water,  but  is  open  to  the  southward.  Off  the  east  point  of  this  bay  is  a 
rock,  which  makes  in  the  form  of  a  shallop  under  sail,  cither  coming  from  the  east- 
ward or  the  westward.  On  the  west  side  of  the  bay  is  a  fall  of  water,  which  may 
be  seen  in  coming  from  the  eastward. 

Wolfe  cove,  or  I'Ance  a  Loup,  lies  1  league  to  the  eastward  of  Forteaux  bay. 
The  land  between  these  bays,  being  rather  low  near  the  shore,  at  the  head  of  this 
cove  is  tolerable  good  anchorage  in  12  fathoms.  On  the  west  side  lies  Schooner 
cove,  in  which  is  very  good  anchorage  for  small  vessels  in  7  fathoms  water,  sandy 
bottom.  The  two  points  that  form  the  entrance  of  this  cove,  bear  N.  N.  E.  i  E. 
and  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.  distant  --  miles.  The  east  point  is  high  table  land,  with  steep 
cliffs  to  the  sea,  stretching  N.  E.  2  miles  nearly,  and  called  the  Red  cliffs. 

From  the  Red  cliffs  to  the  west  point  of  St.  Modeste  bay,  the  course  is  \.  38'^  E. 
distant  7  miles,  then  N.,  by  E  ^  E.  1  mile  to  St.  Modeste  island,  which  is  a  small 
low  island,  within  which  small  craft  may  anchor,  but  is  a  bad  place. 

Ship  head  lies  l|  mile  to  the  N.  by  E.  from  St.  Modeste  island.  Round  this 
head  to  the  northward,  is  Black  bay,  in  which  there  is  tolerable  good  anchorage  in 
10  fathoms  water. 

From  the  west  end  of  Red  cliffs,  to  the  west  point  of  Red  bay,  the  course  is  N. 
470  E.  distant  6  leagues.  This  is  an  excellent  harbour,  and  may  be  known  by 
Saddle  island,  which  lies  at  the  entrance  of  this  bay,  and  is  high  at  each  end,  and 
low  in  the  middle,  and  by  a  remarkable  round  hill  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay,  op- 
posite the  west  end  of  Saddle  island  ;  the  land  on  the  west  side  the  bay  is  high,  and 
on  the  cast  side  rather  low.     At  tlie  head  of  (his  bay  it  is  high  and  wnndy. 


There  is 

island,  and 

roain,  (whic 

a  cable's  leu 

the  northwa 

winds,  but  o| 

ward  of  Sad 

a  small  roc 

'jcky  island! 

The  aforerne 

on  Saddle  isl 

Two  leagu 

tolerable  gooi 

£•  winds.    F 

miles,  and  frc 

leagues. 

At  Red  bay 

At  Forteau: 

At  Bradore. 

I"  all  which 

7  feet;  neap  t 


Description  0 
[N.  B.  The  Beai 


Cape  Charles 
derate  height,  w 

From  the  nor 
W.N.W.4mil 
is  an  excbllent  h 
hour  is  very  goo( 
into  it  on  either 

From  Cape  C 
This  course  will 

eastward  of  then 
top. 

From  the  north 
•distance  7^  miles 
age  for  vessels  ii 
the  southward  of 

From  the  souti 
course  is  S.  500  V 
age  for  small  vess 

From  the  north 
course  is  N.  6 10  v 
miles;  thenN,  58 
Jow  land  for  aboi 
woody ;  at  the  he: 
fi'»  juniper,  and  sj 
4  miles  up  the  rivt 
«'gh  as  Woody  ish 

One  mile  to  the 
of  St,  Louis'  soun( 
»«'j;goodanchorai 
wndy  beach  on  the 


ULUNi'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILUT. 


617 


and  bar* 
passages 

lery  good 
lands  lies 

JJ.  59»  E. 
id  i»  high, 
all  vessels 

tl>e  course 
between  u 
;  side  of  it 
s  Bubbles, 
N. by  E.  5 
lis  island  is 
ks  about  it. 
anchorage 
I  harbour  of 
s  safe,  there 
ige  is  sflfC) 
o«ii  the  low 
»stly  breaks, 
1  small  cove, 
)  cove  head, 
;&  near  the 

V.  distant  5 

carried  on. 

is,  is  a  ciiear, 

lis  of  a  mo- 

f  this  island 

good,  being 

kaux  bay,  til! 
Id  nearly  the 
from  10  to 
this  bay  is  a 
[onj  the  east- 
[,  which  may 

[orteaux  bay. 

head  of  this 

lies  Schoonet 

1  water,  sandy 

N.E.  iE- 

with  steei* 

kffs. 

lis  N.  SS'^E. 
Vh  is  a  small 

Round  tills 
Inchorage  in 

1  course  is  N- 
be  known  by 
ach  end,  and 
[the  bay,  op- 
'  is  high,  ana 
bmlv. 


There  is  no  danger  in  sailing  into  this  bay,  passing  to  the  westtrard  of  Saddle 
island,  and  taking  care  to  avoid  u  small  ruck  that  lies  near  the  west  point  on  the 
main,  (which  shows  above  water  at  a  iebb,)  and  a  shoal  which  stretches  otf  about 
a  cable's  length  from  the  inner  side  of  Saddle  island.  The  Western  bay  lies  in  to 
the  northward  of  the  west  point,  in  which  is  very  good  anchorage  from  the  westerly 
winds,  but  open  to  the  eastward.  There  Is  no  passage,  except  for  boats,  to  ti)e  east- 
ward of  Saddle  island.  In  coming  from  the^eastward,  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid 
a  small  rock,  which  lies  1  mile  from  the  Twin  islands  (which  are  two  small  black 
rocky  islands,  lying  oil'  the  east  end  of  Saddle  island)  and  near  1  mile  oil'  shore. 
The  aforementioned  high  round  hill  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay,  on  with  the  saddle 
on  Saddle  island,  will  carry  you  on  this  rock ;  the  sea  generally  breaks  on  it. 

Two  leagues  and  a  half  to  the  eastward  of  Red  bay,  lies  Green  bay,  in  which  is 
tolerable  good  anchorage  for  small  vessels,  in  12  fathoms  water,  but  open  to  the  S. 
£.  winds.  From  Saddle  island  to  Barge  point,  the  course  is  E.  N.  E.  distant  10 
miles,  and  from  thence  to  the  entrance  of  Chateaux  bay,  is  N.  E.  by  E.  distant  5^ 
leagues. 

At  Red  bay,  the  tide  flows,  full  and  change,  at  ^  past  0  o'clock. 

At  Forteaux  bay,  at  11  o'clock. 

At  Bradore,  at  j^  past  1 1  o'clock.  * 

In  all  which  places  it  flows  up  and  down,  or  upon  a  perpendicular ;  spring  tides 
7  feet ;  neap  tides,  4  feet.  , 


Description  of  the  Coast  of  hobrador  from  Cape  Charles  /oCape  Lewis. 

[N.  B.  The  Bearings  hereafter  menlioiied,  are  the  true  Beatings,  and  not  by  Ccmpass  ;  the 
variation  wa8  27<».  W.  in  the  year  1770.] 

Cape  Charles  island  lies  E.  distance  1^  mile  from  Cape  Charles,  and  is  of  a  mo- 
derate height,  with  several  small  rocks  to  the  eastward  and  westward  of  it. 

From  the  north  point  of  Cape  Charles  island  into  Alexis  harbour,  the  course  is 
W.  N.  W.  4  miles.  This  island  is  very  small  and  rather  low.  Within  this  island 
isanexcdient  harbour,  formed  by  several  high  islands  ami  the  main;  in  this  har- 
bour is  very  good  aiichorage  from  17  to  32  fathoms  water,  muddy.  You  may  sail 
into  it  on  either  side  of  Centre  island,  but  to  the  northward  of  it  is  the  best  passage. 

From  Cape  Charles  island  to  the  Battle  islands,  the  course  is  N.  N.  E.  5<|  miles. 
This  course  will  carry  you  to  the  eastward  of  the  rocks,  which  lie  1  mile  to  the 
eastward  of  the  northernmost  Battle  island.  This  island  is  high  and  round  at  the 
top. 

From  the  northernmost  Battle  island  to  the  River  islands,  the  cciirse  is  N.  76°  W. 
-distance  7^  miles.    To  the  westward  of  the  easternmost  River  island,  is  anchor- 
age for  vessels  in  30  or  35  fathoms  water,  muddy  bottom.    Vessels  may  pass  to 
the  southward  of  these  islands,  up  the  river  St.  Lewis. 

From  the  south  point  of  the  easternmost  River  island  to  Cutter  harbour,  the 
course  is  S.  50'^  W.  distant  1  mile.  In  this  harbour  there  is  tolerable  good  anchor- 
age for  small  vessels. 

From  the  northernmost  Battle  island  to  the  entrance  of  the  river  St.  Lewis,  the 
course  isN.  61°  W.  7^  miles;  from  thence  the  course  up  the  river  is  W.  by  N.  5 
miles ;  then  N.  58°  W.  8  miles  to  Woody  island.  (The  north  point  of  the  river  is 
lowland  for  about  £  miles  up,  then  the  land  is  rather  high  on  both  sides,  and 
woody ;  at  the  head  of  the  river  is  very  fine  wood  of  dilferent  kinds,  such  as  birch, 
fir,  juniper,  and  spruce ;  this  river  seems  to  be  well  stored  with  salmon.  At  about 
4  miles  up  the  river  is  very  good  anchorage,  and  continues  so  till  you  come  up  as 
high  as  W'oody  island ;  but  above  this:  island  there  are  several  shoals. 

One  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  north  of  St.  Lewis'  river,  lies  the  entrance 
of  St.  Louis'  sound,  which  runs  up  W.  by  N.  1  league,  at  the  head  of  which  is 
very  good  anchorage,  in  taking  care  to  avoid  a  shoal  which  stretches  off  from  a 
wndy  beach  on  the  lai  board  side  at  about  2  miles  within  the  entrance. 

78 


( 


618 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


From  the  northernmost  Battle  island  to  the  entrance  of  Deer  liarbour.thecoarw 
is  N.  51°  W.  distance  3  leagues.  This  is  a  very  good  harbour,  in  which  you  an- 
chor from  18  to  10  fathoms  water,  secure  from  all  winds.  To  sail  into  this  harbour 
there  is  not  the  lea&t  danger,  and  the  best  anchorage  is  at  the  back  of  Deer  i^ai>^> 

Prom  the  northernmost  Battio  island  to  Cape  St.  Lewis,  the  course  is  N.  N.  W. 
i  W.  5  miles.  This  cape  is  high,  ragged  land ;  1-1  mile  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  cape 
lies  Fox  harbour,  which  is  but  small,  and  only  fit  for  small  vessels,  but  seems  lobe 
very  convenient  for  a  fishery. 


Description  of  the  Coast  of  Labrador  from  St.  Michael  to  Spotted 

Island. 

[N.  B.    The  Bearings  liereafter  mentioned,  are  the  true  Bearings,  and  not  by  Compass; 
the  variation  was  32"  W.  in  tlie  year  1770. J 

Cape  St.  Miohael  lies  in  the  latitude  of  OSP  46'  N.  is  high  land  and  steep  towards 
tKe  sea,  and  is  to  be  known  by  a  large  bay  which  forms  to  the  northward  of  it,  hav- 
ing a  number  of  large  and  small  islands  in  it;  the  largest  of  these  islands,  called 
Square  island,  lies  in  the  mouth  of  the  bay,  and  is  3  miles  long,  and  very  high 
land. 

The  best  anchorage  for  large  vessels  in  St.  Michael's  b&y,  is  on  the  south  side ; 
that  is,  keep  Cape  St.  Michael's  shore  on  board,  then  keep  along  the  south  side  of 
the  first  island  you  meet  with,  which  is  called  Long  island,  till  you  come  near  as 
far  as  the  west  end  of  it,  and  there  anchor  from  12  to  20  fathoms ;  you  will  there 
lay  land-locked,  and  may  work  out  again  to  sea  on  either  side  of  Long  island. 

From  Cape  St.  Michael  to  the  entrance  of  Square  island  harbour,  the  course  is 
N.  63^  30'  W.  distance  SJ  miles;  in  the  entrance  lies  a  small  island,  of  a  moderate 
height ;  the  best  passage  is  to  the  westward  of  this  island,  ther*-,  being  only  two 
fathoms  water  in  the  eastern  passage. 

The  N.  E.  point  of  Square  island  is  a  high  round  hill,  and  mi.'kes(in  coming 
from  the  southward)  like  a  separate  island,  being  only  joined  by  alow  narrow  neck 
of  land,  N.  54^  W.  distance  1  league.  From  this  point  lies  the  entri  nee  into  Dead 
island  harbour,  whrch  is  only  fit  for  small  vessels,  and  is  formed  b\  a  number  of 
islands ;  there  is  a  passage  out  to  sea  between  these  islands  and  fhe  .'and  of  Cape 
Blufi". 

Cape  Bluff  lies  N.  by  W.  distance  8  miles  from  Cape  St.  Michael,  and  is  very 
high  land,  ragged  at  top,  and  steep  towards  the  sea.  These  capes  form  the  bay  of 
St.  Michael,  in  which  are  several  arms  well  stored  with  wood. 

'Cape  Bluff  harbour  is  a  small  harbour,  fit  only  for  small  vessels.  To  sail  into 
it,  keep  Cape  Bluff  shore  on  board  till  you  come  to  a  small  island,  and  then  pass 
to  the  tvestward  uf  it  and  anchor. 

From  Cnpe  Bluff  to  Barren  island,  the  course  is  N.  J^  E.  distance  one  league. 
From  the  south  point  of  this  isbnd  to  Snug  harbour,  the  course  is  W.  distance  Ij 
mile.  This  harbour  is  small,  but  in  it  there  is  very  good  anchorage,  in  26  fathoms 
water,  and  no  danger  sailing  into  it. 

One  mile  to  the  northward  of  Barren  island  lies  Stony  island.  On  the  main 
within  these  islands  lie  Martin  and  Otter  bays,  in  the  northernmost  of  which  is 
very  good  anchoraj^e,  witii  plenty  of  wood,  and  no  danger  but  what  shows  itself. 

On  the  west  side  of  Stony  island  is  a  very  good  harbour  for  small  vessels,  called 
Duck  harbour.  Large  vessels  may  anchor  between  the  west  point  of  Stony  island 
and  Double  island,  in  20  or  24  fathoms  water,  and  may  sail  out  to  sea  again  on 
cither  side  of  Stony  island  in  great  safety. 

Hawke  island  lies  1  mile  to  the  northward  of  Stoney  island.  Within  Hawke 
island  lies  Hawke  bay,  which  runs  to  the  westward  2  leagues,  and  then  branches 
into  S  arms,  one  runnins  to  the  S.  W.  2  leagues,  and  the  other  W.  5  miles ;  these 
arms  are  well  stored  with  wood.  After  you  are  within  Pigeon  island,  there  is  very 
good  anchorage  quite  to  fhe  head  of  both  arms. 


On  the  s 
cborage  foi 
the  head  in 
On  the  n 
"es  Caplin 
the  head. 

Partridge 
anchorage, 
small  island 
may  be  easil 
and  barren; 
land  to  the  n 
From  Ca 
leagues. 

From  Seal 

This  island  i: 

a  remarkable 

From  Rou 

leagues.    Fr< 

be  several  lar 

From  Seal 

From  this  roc 

Here  is  tole 

which  lies  off  1 

sfaoweih  above 

Fi  jm  Whit 

leagues.    Thi 

island  into  Poi 

Sandy  bay  li 

distance  5  mil 

water,  sandy  b< 

Between  this 

which  makes  ti 


BLVNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


(/10 


coarse 
DU  all" 
arbour 
island. 
N.W. 
le  cape 
19  to  be 


IpotteA 


lompass ; 


)  towards 
>f  it,  hav- 
ds,  called 
very  high 

)uth  side ; 
th  side  of 
ie  near  as 
will  there 
(land, 
e  course  is 
I  moderate 
|g  only  two 

in  coming 

irrow  neck 

into  Dead 

number  of 

of  Cape 

and  is  very 
the  bay  of 

'o  sail  into 
then  pass 

one  league, 
distance  1^ 
26  fathoms 

.  the  main 
)f  which  is 
)ws  itself. 
Wis,  cpUed 
Btony  island 
lea  again  on 

thin  Hawke 

en  branches 

liles;  these 

here  is  very 


On  the  south  side  of  Hawke  island  lies  Eagle  cove,  wherein  is  very  good  an- 
chorage for  large  vessels  in  SO  or  40  fathoms  water.  Small  vessels  may  anchor  at 
the  head  in  7  or  8  fathoms. 

On  the  main,  within  Hawke  island,  about  H  miles  to  the  N  B.  of  Hawke  bay, 
lies  Caplin  bay.  Here  is  very  good  anchorage  in  this  bay,  and  plenty  of  wood  at 
the  head. 

Partridge  bay  lies  5  miles  to  the  northward  of  Hawke  island.  In  it  is  very  good 
anchorage,  but  difficult  of  Hccess,  unless  acquainted,  by  reason  of  a  number  of 
small  islands  and  rocks  tvhich  lie  before  the  mouth  of  it.  The  land  hereabouts 
may  be  easily  known.  The  south  point  of  the  bay  is  a  remarkable  high  table  hill, 
and  barren;  nil  the  land  between  this  hill  and  Cape  St.  Michael  being  high, the 
land  to  the  northward  of  it  low. 

From  Cape  St.  Michael  to  Seal  islands,  the  course  is  N.  1^  E.  distance  0 
leagues. 

From  Seal  islands  to  Round  hill  island,  the  course  is  N.  |  E.  distance  13  miles. 
This  island  is.the  easternmost  land  on  this  part  of  the  coast,  and  may  be  known  by 
a  remarkable  high  round  hill  on  the  west  part  of  it. 

From  Round  hill  island  to  Spotted  island,  the  course  is  N.  S6<^  W.  distance  S 
leagues.  From  Spotted  island  the  land  tends  away  to  the  N.  W.  and  appears  to 
be  several  large  islands. 

From  Seal  islands  to  White  rock,  the  course  is  N.  by  W.  i  W.  distance  2  leaguts. 
From  this  rock,  the  course  into  Shallow  bay  is  S.  W.  distance  2  miles. 

Here  is  tolerable  good  anchorage  in  this  bay,  and  no  danger,  except  a  small  rock 
which  lies  off  a  cove  on  the  larboard  band,  and  about  ^  of  the  bay  over ;  this  rock 
showeth  above  water,  at  low  water.    There  is  very  little  wood  in  this  bay. 

Fi  jm  White  rock  to  Porcupine  island,  the  course  is  N.  5SP  Vf.  distance  S 
leagues.  This  island  is  high  and  barren.  You  may  pass  on  either  side  of  this 
island  into  Porcupine  bay,  where  is  very  good  anchorage,  but  no  wood. 

Sandy  bay  lies  on  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  island  of  Ponds,  and  N.  W.  by  N.  ^  W. 
distance  5  miles  from  White  rock.  In  it  is  very  good  anchorage  in  10  fathoms 
water,  sandy  bottom,  and  seems  very  handy  for  a  fisnery,  except  the  want  of  wood. 
Between  this  bay  and  S|iotted  island  are  a  great  number  of  islands  and  rock:^ 
which  makes  this  part  of  the  coast  dangerous. 


h 


6^0 


BLUNrS    AMt:KlCA>    COASX    PILOT* 


ISLE  of  SABLE,  BANKS,  and  COAST  of  NOVA  SCOTIA. 


The  southermost  part  of  Sable  Island  lies  in  latitude  44<^  0'  N.  the  west  end 
lies  in  longitude  60°  32'  SO''  W.  0«i  the  days  of  the  new  and  full  moon,  it  is  high 
water  along  the  south  shore  of  the  island  ut  half  an  hour  after  8  o'clock,  and  it 
flows  till  half  an  hour  past  10  o'clock  on  the  north  side,  and  till  near  11  o'clock 
in  the  pond.  Common  spring-tides  rise  seven  feet  perpendicular,  and  neap-tides 
four.  The  flood  sets  in  from  the  S.  S.  W.  at  the  rate  of  half  a  mile  an  hour, 
but  it  alters  its  course,  and  increases  its  velocity,  near  the  end^  of  the  island. 
At  half-flood  it  streams  north,  and  south  at  half-ebb  with  great  swiftness,  across 
the  north-cast  and  north-west  bars ;  it  is  therefore  dangerous  to  approach  with- 
out a  commanding  breeze.  The  north-east  bar  runs  out  E.  N.  E.  about  four 
leagues  from  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  island,  all  which  is  very  shoal,  having 
in  few  places  more  than  Si,  3,  or  4,  fathoms  water,  whence  it  continues  E.  and  E. 
by  S.  deepening  gradually  to  13,  15,  and  18,  fathoms  water,  at  the  distance  of  8 
or  10  leagues,  and  siiapes  to  the  S.  and  S.  E.  sloping  gently  to  60 and  70  fathoms 
water.  To  the  northward  and  eastward  it  is  very  steep,  and,  in  a  run  of  three 
miles,  the  water  will  deepen  to  130  fathoms.  Abreast  the  body  of  the  isle,  the 
soundings  are  more  gradual.  The  shoal  ground  of  the  north-west  bar  shar^es  to 
the  westward,  and  deepens  gradually  to  70  fathoms  water,  at  the  dist&nce  of 
twenty  or  twenty-five  leagues  from  the  isle ;  and  winds  easterly  and  southerly, 
until  it  meets  the  soundings  of  the  north-east  bar.  The  quality  of  the  bottom,  in 
general,  is  very  fine  sand,  with  a  few  small  transparent  stones:  to  the  northward, 
and  close  to  the  north-east  bur,  the  sand  is  mixed  with  many  black  specks;  but, 
near  the  north-west  bar,  the  sand  has  a  greenish  colour.  The  north-east  bar 
breaks  in  bad  weather,  at  the  d'  <^-nce  of  eight  and  ten  leagues  from  the  island; 
but,  ill  moderate  weather,  a  ship  may  cross  it,  at  five  leagues  distance,  with  great 
safety,  in  no  less  than  8  or  9  fathoms  water ;  and,  if  the  weather  be  clear,  the 
island  may  he  seen  thence  very  distinctly  from  a  boat.  The  north-west  bar 
breaks,  in  bad  weather,  at  seven,  and  sometimes  eight  miles  from  the  island;  but, 
when  the  sea  is  smooth,  ships  may  cross  it  within  the  distance  of  four  miles,  in 
seven  fathoms  water.  • 

Along  the  north  and  south  sides  of  the  island  are  many  spits  of  sand,  nearly 
parallel  with,  and  wkhin  a  mile  from  the  shore.  Vessels  may  anchor  on  the 
north  side  of  the  island,  between  the  spits,  and  not  be  liable  to  be  driven  off  by 
southerly  winds.  On  the  south  side,  it  is  the  boldest  off  the  body  of  the  island, 
having  lu  or  IS  fathoms  water,  within  a  mile  of  the  shore;  but  towards  the  bar 
it  is  mure  shoal,  and  dangerous  to  approach  ;  for  the  currents,  which  are  uncer- 
tain, are,  in  a  great  degree,  influencea  by  the  winds  which  have  preceded.  The 
surf  beats  continually  on  the  shore,  and,  in  calm  weather,  is  heard  several  leagues 
off.  Landing  on  this  island,  with  boats,  is  practicable  on  the  nortli  side,  after  a 
continuance  of  good  weather  only.  The  whole  Island  is  composed  of  white  sand, 
much  coarser  than  any  of  the  soundings  about  it,  and  intermixed  with  small  trans- 
parent stones.  Its  face  is  very  broken,  and  hove  up  in  little  hills,  knobs,  and  cliffs, 
w|ldly  heaped  together,  within  which  are  hollows,  and  ponds  of  fresh  water: 
th  e  skirts  of  which  abound  with  cranberries  the  whole  year,  and  with  blueber- 
ries, juniper,  be.  in  their  season ;  as  also  with  ducks,  snipes,  and  other  birds. 
This  sandy  island  affords  great  plenty  of  beach-grass,  wild  peas,  and  other  herb- 
age, fpr  the  support  of  the  horses,  cows,  hogs,  be.  which  are  running  wild  upon 


Ki>vni,t,- 


TIA. 


rest  end 
it  is  high 
:k,  and  it 
1  o'clock 
eap-tides 
an  hour, 
ic  island. 
ss,  across 
ich  with- 
bout  four 
si,  having 
E.  andE> 
tance  of  8 
0  fathoms 
n  of  three 
le  isle,  the 

shapes  to 
listance  of 
southerly, 
)Ottom,  in 

orthward, 

cks;  but, 
east  bar 

[6  island; 
ith  great 

[clear,  the 
•west  bar 

[and;  but, 
miles,  in 

4,  nearly 
)T  on  the 
kn  off  by 
|he  island, 
Is  the  har 
[w,  unccr- 
Ed.    The 
al  leagues 
^e,  after  a 
liite  sand) 
ball  trans- 
and  cliffs, 
bh  water: 
blueber- 
lier  birds, 
ler  herb- 
vildupon 


M 


Vfv 


ii' 


-  it  grows 
up  along  sho 
even  choak  i 
southern  hias 
eels,  &,c.  anc 
Claras.  The 
over  in  many 
the  highest  I 
gently  to  th« 
height,  abori 
Mount  Knigh 
cliffs.  Mouni 
'n  the  land. 
126  feet  perpe 
Jnarkttble,  as  i 
From  the  offii 
cliffs,  lessenini 
The  Nova  & 
From  the  Isle 
their  inner  edg 
sected  by  nam 
andS.  E.  Bel 
deep  water  an 
Sable,  to  the  d 
ing  westward, 
extremity  of  tl 
thorns  water. 

The  south-H 
leaguesfi.  N.  E 
}^'  by  N.  thirty 
is  about  five  U 
slimy  sand  anc 
fathoms,  towarc 
This  bank  is  t 
mediately  into  9 
120  fathoms. 

About  the  yei 

money  for  the  p 

to  prevent  sliipn 

pen  to  be  c^st  as 

ing  thia  iniporhir 

ed  as  a  justice  ol 

lisi'd  by  a  warrai 

wrecks  found  tin 

of  such  proper:- 

perty  nre  to  lmv( 

vxpon  it  in  any  , 

«fl<)rdod.  and  an; 

referring  Oiv  salv; 

fitx;  but  (i,.j »!„.,.  j 

island.    Tlii-n-  w 

rials  coinpJHteJv  (i 

and  poultry,  wHh 

s»er  such  as  may 

llie  island,  and  bu 

greatest  care  has  I 

fune,  and  to  reliev 

ing  it,  by  ref.«rrinn 

respt'ctability  we  i 

nnd  deciding.    Ti 


1JLUNT*S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


<l21 


-  It  grows  no  trees ;  but  abundance  of  wreck  and  drifl-vrood  may  be  nicked 
up  along  shore  for  fuel.  Strong  northerly  winds  shift  the  spits  of  sand,  and  often 
even  choak  up  the  entrance  of  the  pond,  which  usually  opens  again  by  the  next 
southern  Mast.  In  this  pond  are  prodizious  nnmhors  of  seals,  and  some  flat-flsbt 
eels,  Sic.  and,  on  the  south-west  side,  lies  a  bed  of  remarkably  large  muscles  and 
clams.  The  south  shore  in,  between  the  cliffs,  so  low,  that  the  sea  breaks  quite 
over  in  many  places,  when  the  wind  blows  on  the  island.  The  Ram's  Head  is 
the  highest  hill  on  this  island ;  it  has  a  steep  cliff  on  the  north-west,  and  falls 
gently  to  the  south-east.  The  naked  Sand-hills  are  l46  feet  in  perpendicular 
height,  above  the  level  of  high-water  mark,  and  always  appear  very  white. 
Mount  Knight  is  in  the  shape  of  a  pyramid,  situate  in  a  hollow,  between  two  steep 
cliffs.  IVIount  Luttrell  is  a  remarkable  hummock  on  the  top  of  a  large  swelling 
in  the  land.  Gratia  Hill  is  a  knob  at  the  top  of  a  rliff,  thi*  liHi^ht  of  which  is 
126  feet  perpendicular,  above  high- water  mark.  The  Vai»>  of  Misery  is  also  re- 
markable, as  is  Smith's  Flag- Staff,  a  large  hill,  with  a  regular  ascent  every  way. 
From  the  ofling,  the  south  side  of  the  island  appears  like  a  long  ridge  of  sandy 
cliffs,  lessening  towards  the  west  end,  which  is  very  low. 

The  Nova  Scotia  Banks  extend  nearly  seventy  leagues,  in  a  westerly  direction. 
From  the  Isle  of  Sable,^  they  are  from  twenty  to  twenty-five  leagues  wide,  and 
their  inner  edges  are  from  fourteen  to  eighteen  leagues  off  shore.  They  are  inter- 
sected by  narrow  winding  channels,  (the  bottom  of  which  is  inud,)  running  N.  W. 
and  S.  E.  Between  these  banks  and  the  shore,  are  several  small  inner  banks,  with 
deep  water  and  muddy  bottom.  The  water  deepens  regularly  from  the  Isle  of 
Sable,  to  the  distance  of  2£  leagues,  in  50  fathoms,  fine  grav(>l ;  thence  proceed- 
ing westward,  the  gravel  becomes  coarser :  continuing  westward  to  the  western 
extremity  of  the  banks,  the  soundings  are  rocky,  ai  d  shualon  to  18  and  15  fa- 
thoms water.     Cape  Sahle  bearing  N.  by.  W.  distant  fifteen  leagues. 

The  south-west  extremity  of  Banouereau,  or  Bank  Quer(».  lies  seventeen 
leagues  £.  N.  E.  |  E-  from  the  east  end  of  the  isle  of  Sable.  This  bank  extends 
E.  by  N.  thirty-five  leagues,  and  is  near  eight  leagues  in  width  ;  its  shoalestpart 
is  about  five  leagues  from  its  eastern  extremity,  in  16  and  lit  fathoms  water, 
slimy  sand  and  clams :  whence  it  deepens  regularly  every  way  to  60  and  70 
fathoms,  towards  the  edges  of  the  bank. 

This  bank  is  s^eep-to ;  and,  from  its  soundings  on  the  north  side,  you  fall  im- 
mediately into  90  and  100  fathoms  water,  black  mud  ;  and,  on  the  south  side,  into 
120  fathoms. 

About  the  year  1800,  the  leginlature  of  Nova  Scotia  passed  a  liberal  vote  of 
money  for  the  purpose  of  commencing  an  establishment  on  Sable  Island,  inorder 
to  prevent  sliipwreck,  and  to  protect  all  persons  and  property  v.  hich  might  hap- 
pen to  be  CHst  asliore.     Commissioners  were  eotisetjiiently  appointed  for  execut- 
ing this  important  trust,  and  a  supcrinlend.int  to  reside  on  the  island,  empower- 
ed as  a  justice  of  pence,  surveyor  and  searcher  of  impost  and  excise,  and  autho- 
rised by  a  warrant  to  take  charge  of  the  island,  shores,  'uul  fisheries,  and  of  all 
wrecks  found  there,  in  cases  where  persons  are  not  saved  competent  to  the  care 
of  such  property.     Itu^tructions  were  given  to  him,  that  |>ersoiis  saved  with  pri)- 
perty  nre  to  have  thf  full   care,  charge,  and  po9s«'ssion.  of  it,  and  U".  allowed  to 
export  it  in  any  oi, inner  they  may  think  proper.     Every  ,iid  u:id  assistance  to  be 
Hfitmled.  and  areceijtt  pivcu  specifyioK  tlie  j.roperlj  savi  t.  lti«' -rul  received,  and 
referrinii;  the  salvage  or  reward  to  be  ascerliiine<l  hy  tin-  co:nii»insioner<  at  Hall- 
fax;  but  neiiher  fee  or  reward  is  t(»  be  taken,  or  prop««rly  disposed  of,  upou  the 
island.     There  were,   also,  ordered  four  able  men  ami  |»r.»per  lioats,  with  iiate- 
riais  coinplHtely  fitted  to  erect  a  hiuise  and  good  «tori'.     \Nu  rattle,  sheep,  goats, 
und  poultry,  with  clothing,  provisions,  &i,c.     A  ^uo  is  placed  on  the  island,  to  an- 
swer such  as  may  be  heard  from  vessels  nt  sea.     Sij^u  ii>i  wer»'  to  be  hoL^ted  on 
the  island,  and  buildings  have  been  creeled  particularly    on  rhe  west  side.     The 
greatest  care  has  been  taken  to  extend  aid  as  niiieli  as  po^sll>l( ,  to  prevent  misfor- 
tune, and  to  relieve  it ;  to  secure  property  from  loss,  and  from  extortion  for  .sav- 
in;; it,  l)y  referring  it,  in  all  cases,  to  the  commisHioners  in  Hdiiax.  from  whose 
respectability  we  are  nsaiired  that  equity  and  charity  will  he  united  in  directing 
nnd  deciding.    The  supcrintcndant  and  boatmen  arc  paid  und  subsisted,  and  «U 


&. 


"BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


necessaries  furnished  by  government,  that  no  claims  or  demands  may  bi;  made 
by  them  upon  the  unfortunate.  But,  as  extraordinary  risk,  enterprise,  and  exer- 
tion, in  so  good  a  cause,  deserve  recompense,  such  cases  are  to  be  exactly  stated 
to  the  commisioners,  who  are  to  adjust  the  measure  and  mode  of  extra  reward 
to  be  allowed  and  paid. 

It  may  be  observed,  generally,  that  the  soundings  all  along  the  Nova  Scotia 
Coast,  between  Cape  Canso  on  the  E.  N.  E.  and  Cape  Sable  to  the  W.  S.  W. 
are  very  irregular,  from  25  to  40  and  50  fathoms.  In  foggy  weather  do  not  stand 
nearer  in  shore  than  S5  fathoms,  lest  you  fall  upon  some  of  the  ledges.  By  no 
means  make  too  bold  with  the  shore  in  such  weather  unless  you  are  sure  of  the 
part  of  the  coast  you  are  on;  for  you  may,  otherwise,  when  hound  for  Halifax, 
fall  unexpectedly  into  Mahone  or  Mccklenburgh  Bay,  and  thus  be  caught  with  a 
S.  E.  wind. 

The  weather  on  tlie  coast  is  frequently  foggy  in  the  spring  and  some  part  of 
the  summer  ;  in  particular  at  the  distance  of  four  and  five  leagues  from  the  shore. 
On  approaching  nearer,  the  weather  is  found  more  clear ;  and,  with  the  wind 
from  the  land,  it  is  perfectly  clear  and  pleasant. 

M.  des  Barres  says,  '•  Here  the  tide  runs  at  the  rate  of  three  and  sometimes 
four  knots :  and  when  the  wind  blows  fresh,  a  rippling  extends  from  the  breakers 
southerly,  to  the  distance  of  nearly  three  leagues,  and  shifts  its  direction  with  the 
tide ;  with  the  flood  it  is  more  westerly,  and  inclines  to  the  eastward  with  the 
ebb." 

On  the  days  of  the  new  and  full  moon,  it  is  high  water  along  the  south  shore 
of  the  islancl  at  half  an  hour  after  8  o'clock ;  and  it  flows  till  half  an  hour  past 
10  o'clock  on  the  north  side,  and  till  near  11  o'clock  in  the  pond;  common 
spring-tides  rise  7  feet  perpendicular,  and  neap-tides  4.    The  flood  sets  in  from 
the  S.  S.  W.  at  the  rate  of  half  a  mile  an  hour ;  but  it  alters  its  course,  and  in- 
crcises  its  velocity  near  the  ends  of  the  island :  at  half  flood  it  streams  north, 
and  south  at  half  ebb,  with  great  swiftness  across  the  north-east  and  north-west 
bars,  therefore  dangerous  to  approach  without  a  commanding  breeze.    The 
north-east  bar  r^ins  out  E.  N.  E.  about  four  leagues  from  the  eastern  extremity 
of  the  island,  all  which  is  very  shoal,  having  in  few  places  more  than  2,  3,  or  4  fa- 
thoms; whence  it  continues  east  and  E.  by  S.  deepening  gradually  to  12, 15  and 
18  fathoms  at  the  distance  of  eight  or  ten  leagues,  and  shapes  to  the  south  and 
south-east,  sloping  gently  to  60  and  70  fathoms.     To  the  northward  and  east- 
ward it  is  very  steep  ;  and  in  a  run  of  three  miles,  the  water  will  deepen  to  1.30 
fathoms.     Abreast  the  body  of  the  isle  the  soundings  are  more  gradual.    The 
shoal  ground  of  the  north-west  bar,  shapes  to  the  westward,  and  deepens  gradu- 
ally to  70  fathoms,  at  the  distance  of  twenty  or  twenty-five  leagues  from  the  isle. 
and  winds  easterly  and  southerly  until  it  meets  the  soundings  of  the  north-east 
bar.    The  quality  of  the  bottom  in  general,  is  very  fine  sand,  with  a  few  small  trans- 
parent stones;  to  the  northward,  and  close  to  the  north-east  bar,  the  sand  is  mix- 
ed with  many  black  specks;  but  near  the  north-west  bar,  the  sand  has  a  greenish 
colour. .  The  north-east  bar  breaks  in  bad  weather,  at  the  distance  of  eight  and 
ten  leagues  from  the  island,  but  in  moderate  weather,  a  ship  may  cross  it  at  fire 
leagues  distance   with  great  safety,  in  no  less  than  8  or  9  fathoms  ;  and  if  the 
weather  is  clear,  tin  island  may  be  seen  thence  very  distinctly  from  a  boat.    The 
north-west  bar  breaks  in  bad  weather  at  seven  and  sometimes  eight  miles  from 
the  island ;  but  when  the  sea  is  smooth,  ships  may  cross  it,  within  the  distance 
of  four  miles,  in  seven  fathoms.     At  Cape  Sable  the  tide,  on  full  and  chanffp- 
flows  at  8  o'clock,  and  rises  9  feet. 


HALIFAX   HARBOUR  and  the  Coast  thence  westward,  to  CAPE 

SABLE. 

The  land  about  the  harbour  of  Halifax,  and  a  little  to  the  southward  of  it  i« 
in  appearance,  rugged  and  rocky,  and  has  on  it,  in  several  places,  scrubby  tvi 
fhered  wood-*,  although  it  seems  bold,  yet  it  is  not  high,  being  to  be  seen,  frwn 


the  quarter  t 

excepting  ho 

fax,  which  ai 

W.  S.  W.  fr< 

hills  of  uneqi 

over  Margart 

rather  a  long 

h.     When  be 

house  will  be; 

The  light-h 

and  the  lanter 

level  of  the  se 

S.  W.  side  of 

niarkably  rod 

There  are  ti 

the  first  is  on 

on  Cape  Rose 

he  distiaguishe 

house,  exhibit! 

the  light  on  C( 

appears  full  at 

hibits  two  lighl 

building.    The 

light-house  of 

HALIFAX 

Scotia,  is  ten  n 

Bedford  Basin, 

of  good  anchor 

On  the  eastei 

Nab's,  formerly 

harfiour,  is  an  is 

is  fortified,  md 

On  a  spit  of  | 

wich  from  Mac 

a  small  light-hoi 

clear  of  the  sho 

Northward  of 

good  anchorage, 

with  the  beach  u 

touching  the  N. 

Head,  8  miles  bi 

At  3|  miles  abov 

Herring  Cove,  o( 

piloting.     Small 

uetween  this  and 

The  village  of 

'•ehind  it  are  in  a 

Within,  and  ab 

nerally  known  un 

the  westernmost 

a  mile  S.  E.  by  0 

To  the  snuth-e 

»:alled  the  Horses 

The  S.  W.  rod 

The  Henercy  I 

"• «  miles.    To 

'2  feet.    Both  are 

\  "hort  distance. 

Y^e,  lie  to  the 

Clear  them  to  the  ( 


BLUM  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


ws 


ju  made 
Liid  exer- 
Jy  stated 
a  reward 

VII  Scotia 

w.s.w. 

not  stand 

1.  By  no 
jre  of  the 
r  Hulifax, 
ght  with  a 

nac  part  of 
the  shore. 
I  the  wind 

sometimes 
le  breakers 
on  with  the 
rd  with  the 

south  shore 
n  hour  past 
I;  common 
sets  in  from 
irse,  and  in- 
eams  north. 
I  north-west 
reeze.  The 
■n  extremity 

2,  3,  or  4  fa- 
:o  12, 15  and 
le  south  and 
■d  and  east- 
•epen  to  130 
idual.  The 
pens  gradii- 
[rom  the  isle. 

north-east 
small  trans- 
Isand  is  mix- 
(  a  greenish 
f  eight  and 
loss  it  at  five 
;  and  if  the 
boat.    The 
miles  from 
[he  distancf 
md  ch?«nRe. 


\to  CAPK 


jirdof  itl» 
tcrubby  wi 


seen, 


frwn 


ibe  quarter  deck  of  h  74  gun  ship,  at  the  distance  of  no  more  than  seven  leagues ; 
excepting  however  the  high  lands  of  Le  Have  and  Aspotogon  westward  of  Hali- 
fax, which  are  to  be  seen  nine  leagues  oif.  The  first,  which  is  twelve  leagues 
W.  S.  W.  from  Cape  Sambro,  appears  over  Cape  Le  Have,  p.nd  like  little  round 
hills  of  unequal  height.  Aspotogon,  when  hearing  N.  W.  by  N.  appears  directly 
over  Margaret's  Bay,  five  and  a  half  leagues  westward  from  Cape  Sambro ;  it  is 
rather  a  long  liigh  land,  nearly  level  at  the  top,  and  rising  above  the  land  near 
ii.  When  bearing  north  distant  between  five  and  six  leagues,  Sambro'  light- 
house will  bear  E.  ?f.  E.  distant  seven  leagues. 

The  light-house  is  on  Sambro'  Ishind,  and  is  remarkable.  It  has  seven  lamps, 
and  the  lantern  is  elevated  on  a  high  tuwcr  on  that  island  210  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea,  huilt  at  a  little  distance  to  the  S.  VV.  from  Chebucto  Head  on  the 
S*  W.  side  of  the  entrance  into  Halifax  iiarhour,  ('hcbucto  Head  has  a  re- 
markably rocky  and  barren  a))pbarancc.    Halifax  lies  8  miles  above  the  Head. 

There  are  two  other  light-houses  on  the  coast  westward  of  that  of  Sambro ; 
the  first  is  on  Coffin's  Island,  at  the  entrance  of  Liverpool  Bay;  the  second  is 
on  Cape  Roseway,  at  the  entrance  of  Shelhurne  harbour.  Of  these,  one  may 
he  distinguished  from  the  other  by  noticing  that  the  lantern  of  Sambro  light- 
house, exhibiting  h  fixed  light,  is  elevated  210  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea; 
the  light  on  Coffin's  island  is  only  75  feet  in  height;  the  light  is  revolving,  and 
appears  full  at  intervals  of  two  minutes ;  the  light-house  on  Cape  Roseway  ex- 
hibits two  lights,  there  being  a  small  liglit  at  about  one-third  from  the  top  of  the 
building.  The  latter  stands  at  about  thirty  leagues  to  the  VV.  S.  W.  from  the 
light-house  of  Sambro. 

HALIFAX  HARBOUR.— This  harbour,  the  centre  of  the  trade  of  Nova 
Scotia,  is  ten  miles  in  length,  nearly  north  and  south.  Its  upper  part  called 
Bedford  Basin,  is  a  beautiful  sheet  of  water,  containing  about  eight  square  milei- 
of  good  anchorage. 

On  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  is  the  cultivated  island  now  called  Mac 
Nab's,  formerly  Cornwallis  Island.  Above  this,  and  nearly  in  the  centre  of  the 
harl)Our,  is  an  islet,  called  George's  Island.  The  latter,  which  has  a  town  on  it, 
is  fortified,  ?nd  protects  the  city  of  Halifax. 

On  a  spit  of  gravel,  called  Maugcr's  Bench,  extending  towards  Point  Sand- 
xvich  from  Mac  Nab's  island,  is  a  tower,  called  Sherbrooke  Tower.  Near  this, 
a  small  light-house,  built  in  1818,  Ls  intended  to  direct  ships  into  the  harbour, 
clear  of  the  shoals  hereafter  described. 

Northward  of  Mauger's  Beach,  in  the  cove  now  called  Mac  Nab's  Cove,  is 
good  anchorage,  in  from  9  to  4  fathoms,  mud.  The  best  spot  is  in  7  fathoms, 
with  the  beach  and  point  Sandwich  in  a  line,  and  the  tower  on  George's  Island 
touching  the  N.  W.  part  of  Mac  Nab's  island.  The  promontory  called  Chebucto 
Head,  8  miles  below  Halifax,  bounds  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  on  the  west. 
At  3k  miles  above  this  Head,  on  the  western  side,  is  a  singular  indent,  called 
Herring  Cove,  occupied  by  about  forjfy  Irish  families,  who  subsist  by  fishing  and 
piloting.  Small  vessels  here  lie  perfectly  sheltered  in  shoal  water.  The  coast 
between  this  and  Chebucto  Head  is  wholly  of  rock. 

The  village  of  Dartmouth,  opposite  to  Halifax,  is  thinly  settled  ;  but  the  lands 
behind  it  are  in  a  very  improving  state. 

Within,  and  about  2  miles  from  the  light-house,  there  are  several  dangers,  ge- 
nerally known  under  the  name  of  the  Eastern  and  Western  Ledges.  Of  these 
the  westernmost  is  the  Bull,  a  rock  abo/e  water,  which  Ues  about  two-thirds  of 
a  mile  S.  E.  by  E.  from  Pendant  point,  u  ith  the  light-house  bearing  E.  T^  S. 

To  the  south-eastward  of  the  Bull,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,  lies  the  ledge 
called  the  Horses,  with  the  light-house  bearng  E.  by  N.  1%  mile  distant. 
The  S.  W.  rock  or  ledge  lies  with  the  ligh.-house  N.  E-  Ih  mile. 
The  Henercy  Rock,  with  8  feet  water  over  ;t,  lies  with  the  light-house  N.  by 
W.  2  miles.  To  the  E.  N.  E.  at  a  mile  from  this,  is  another,  the  Lockwood,  of 
12  feet.  Both  are  of  course  exceedingly  dangerous  to  those  approaching  within 
a  short  distance.  The  Sisters,  or  Black  Rocks,  coranconly  called  the  Eastern 
liedge,  lie  to  the  E.  by  S.  from  the  light-house,  Chebucto  head  N.  by  E.  will 
•:lear  them  to  the  eastward. 


62-4- 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Besides  the  rocks  above  described,  the  Bell,  a  rock  or  18  feet,  lies  at  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  from  shore,  with  the  uxtreniitj  of  Chebucto  Head  N.  by  E.  i  E  (north, 
true)  three-quarters  of  a  mile. 

Within  the  line  of  Chebucto  Head,  and  Devil's  Island,  are  several  rocks  and 
ledges,  but  the  situation  of  f.ac.h  is  iTiarlit<l  l»y  a  buoy. 

Of  thu^ethe  first  i=i  Rock  H<Md,  whicii  Ik'S^vIMj  Chebucto  Head  S.  W.  by  W. 
8}  miles,  and  Devil's  island  N.  K.  i  E  2;  miles. 

The  second  is  the  Thrum  Cap,  a  retjf  which  exti-nds  from  the  south  end  of 
Mac  Nab's  island,  and  which  octusidiind  the  melanchiily  loss  of  thi'  Tribune  fri- 
gate with  250  men,  on  proceeding  for  ihe  harbour  from  the  eastward.  The 
thwart-mark  to  clear  it  is  the  easternmoHt  land  kept  in  sight  from  the  deck,  a 
ship's  length  clear  to  the  southward  of  Devil's  isLtnd,  and  bearing  about  K.  N. 
E.  or  E.  by  N.' when  steering  west  or  VV.  by  S.  according  to  the  distance  of  the 
ship  from  the  island. 

The  Liclifiek!  Rock  which  lies  towards  tht:  western  side,  has  only  16  feet 
water  over  it  at  low  water.  The  marks  for  it  are  George's  island  open  to  the 
eastward  oi  Point  Sandwich,  and  the  passage  between  the  Devil's  island  and 
main  open,  bearing  R.  N.  E. 

Above  the  Lichfield  Rock,  on  the  same  side,  at  a  mile  above  it,  is  the  rock 
called  Mar's  Rock.  It  lies  with  point  Sandwich  bearing  north,  half  a  mile,  and 
nearly  in  a  line  with  it,  and  tlie  west  side  «)f  George's  island. 

4  reef  called  ihe  Horse-Shoe,  extends  from  Mmger's  beai-h,  on  the  west  side 
of  Mac  Nab's  island      It  is  dangerous,  and  imist  be  eareftiily  avoided. 

Half-»vay  between  Manger's  beach  and  Georgw's  islaad,  on  the  opposite  side, 
rs  a  shoal,  extending  to  the  S.  E.  fro.n  point  Pleasant,  nearly  one-tnird  of  the 
channel  over,  but  having  a  buoy  on  i(t>  extremity.  Thf  thwart  mark  for  the 
buoy  is  a  little  islet,  (on  the  west  shor'^  it  th'e  entrance  of  N-  VV.  arm;  with  a 
remarkable  stone  ULon  the  hill,  appearing  like  »  coach-box,  and  beuriug  VV. 
S.W. 

Between  Manger's  beach  and  point  Pbas  lot  shoal  is  a  middle  ground  of  4} 
and  5  fathoms,  distingnisihed  by  a  buoy.  This  middle  ground  ♦'Xteudn  I'orth  and 
south  a  cable's  length,  and  is  a'boiir  3o'f;it!ioms  broad  :  as  you  fall  off  to  i,!ie  east- 
ward 'f  ■',  there  may  be  found  fi'-iu  7  to  13  fathoms,  muddy  b^^ttom.  On  the 
west  i.:'!.  are  from  10  to  14  fathoms,  coarsp  and  ro«'.ky  bottom. 

Reid's  Rock,  having  12  feet  over  it,  lies  inshore,  \hout  half-way  between  point 
Pleasant  and  the  south  part  of  Hnlifax  The  thwart-mnvk  for  it  is,  a  farm-house 
in  the  wood  over  a  black  rock  on  the  shore,  bearing  VV.  by  S  Opposite  to 
Reid's  rock  is  a  buoy  on  the  spit  extending  from  the  N.  VV.'end  of  Mac  Nab's 
island. 

Directions  for  the  H'lrhour. — On  approarhing  the  Ilaibonr  of  Halifax  from  the 
westward,  advance  to  the  eastward  so  as  to  p.-'ss  the  li^ht-house  at  the  distance 
of  a  league;  taking  care  not  to  approach  too  near  to  the  Henercy  or  Locliwood 
rocks,  already  described. 

When  the  light  bears  N.  W.  I»y  N.  haul  in  N.  by  W.  then  bring  the  flag-staffs 
on  Citadel  Hill  open  of  }»oint  Sandwicli ;  and  by  keeping  them  thus  open,  you 
will  pass  clear  of  the  Lichfield  aid  Mar's  rocks  on  the  west,  ;is  well  as  uf  the 
Rock  Head  and  Thrum  Cap  iin  rhc  east.  When  nearly  up  t(»  Sandwicli  point, 
which  is  bold-to,  keep  Chebucto  Head  well  in  sight,  without  that  point ;  and  this 
direction  kept  on,  will  lead  iti  the  fair  way  up  to  George's  island,  leaving  point 
Pleasant  shoals  on  the  lett,  and  the  Horse-  Shoe,  or  shoal  of  Mac  Nab's  island  on 
the  right. 

George's  island  may  be  passed  on  either  side,  and  von  m^iy  choose  your  an' 
charade  at  pleasure,  in  from  13  to  6  fathoms,  mii.ldy  bottoin.  Prom  George'* 
island  to  the  head  of  Bedford  tiasin  there  is  no  obstructioit  to  shipping. 

Shipsuf  war  usually  anchor  ofl'tlie  naval  yard,  which  may  be  distinguished  at 
a  distance  by  the  masting  sheers.  Merchant  vessels  discharge  and  take  in  their 
cargoes  at  the  town  wharfs. 

Sniall  vessels  from  the  eastward,  occasionallT  proceed  to  Halifax  by  the  S.  £. 
passage  within  Mac  Nab's  island.  On  the  shoalest  part  of  the  oar  of  sand,  which 
obstructs  this  passage,  there  is,  however,  but  8  feet  at  low  water.  Above  0"^ 
htv  the  depth  increases  to  H  and  IQ  fathoms,  bottom  of  mud. 


.  Vhe  follow 

Backhouse,  i 

Jfaailins: 

Hight:^Whi 

three  leagues 

eastward  of  i 

S«  W.  two  ra 

already  descr 

(according  to 

the  shore,  tali 

west  shore,  ai 

will  pass  to  tl 

pointi  and  app 

distance  equal 

Mauger's  bead 

When  past  the 

and,  keeping  i 

Which  is  a  buo^ 

of  Mac  Nab's " 

either  side,  and 

two  cable's  leni 

9  orio  fathoms 

reach  the  shore 

On  entering  t 

particiilar  cautic 

proceeding  this 

your  distance  fr( 

sail's  breadth  to 

point  and  the  foi 

in  Halifax,  a  ship 

markable  one,  fn 

Pleasant  shoals, 

whence  you  may 

ifthe  wind  will  p, 

In  turning  to  y\ 

Jirth  of  one  cabi 

from  the  north  rn 

Yoix  may  stand  to 

5ng bold-to;  but  s 

Moalsj  than  keepi 

nouse  on  the  sout 

When  arrived  tl 

Thrum  Cap  l8lan<] 

«ng  this  mark  on, 

of  Mac  Nab's  islai 

CATCH  HARI 

^wch  lies  to  the  i 

MViDg  nine  feet  ov( 

»l>ore.    Within  it  a 

The  variation  of 

noase,  was  leo  30' 

VARIATIONS 

KyenbyM.desBi 

W.:CrowHarbou 

5J"['«40:  Sable] 

Sftelhurne,  isoso'. 

ound  the  variatio,; 

to  the  preceding  ma 

«'•  Lockwood  give' 

J-t'feemsthafth; 

"••present  variation 


BLt'Nt^S  AMERICAN  COAST  PlLOT- 


62$ 


uarter 
north, 

ks  and 

byW. 

1  end  of 
atic  fri- 
The 
lieck,  a 
It  K-  N. 
e  of  the 

16  feet 
a  to  the 
•and  and 

the  rock 
mile,  and 

west  side 

usite  side, 
ird  of  the 
k  for  the 
■ca,  with  a 
leujiug  W. 

rtunU  of  4i 
<  ,-.urlh  and 
Lo  i.l»e  eJist- 
,.     On  the 

tveen  point 

farm- house 

ipposi«e  to 

Klac  Nab'3 

|x  from  the 
\e  ilistance 
^ocliwood 

\  fla?-staff3 
J  .jpen.  you 
I)  as  of  the 

ficU  T)oiut, 
;;  and  this 

Iviiig  po'"*^ 
Is  island  on 

[t>  your  an' 
Geor&e'* 

Iguishedat 
[ke  in  i'aeir 

^theS.E. 
and,  which 
i.bove  tV^ 


The  following  are  the  directions  for  Bailihg  into  the  harbour,  aS  given  by  Mr. 
backhouse,  in  his  Pilot  for  Nova  Scotia,  fee.  1798. 

//  sailing  into  Halifar  Harbour  from  the  westieard,  with  a  toesterly  wind  by 
night: — When  you  have  made  the  light-house,  at  the  distance  of  about  two  or 
three  leagues,  first  steer  E.  N.  £•  or  E.  by  N.  until  you  are  sure  of  being  to  the 
eastward  of  the  extremity  of  the  S.  W.  ledges,  which  bears  from  the  lijht-house 
S.  W.  two  miles  distant.  When  past  th6  S.  W.  ledges,  steer  E.  N.  E.  and,  as 
already  described,  to  clear  the  other  dangers.  Then  haul  up  north  or  N.  by  E. 
(according  to  the  wind)  for  Chebucto  Head,  which  is  bold  within  half  a  mile  from 
the  shore,  taking  care  to  avoid  the  Bell  Rock.  Run  in,  steering  north,  along  the 
west  shore,  and  directly  for  Sandwich  point,  which  is  bold-to ;  and  thus  you 
will  pass  to  the  eastward  of  the  Lichfield  rock.  When  abreast  of  Sandwich 
pointi  and  approaching  the  fort  (York  Redoubt)  on  the  same  side,  calculate  your 
distance  equally,  from  cither  ^ide^and  keep  in  mid-way  between  the  point  'Mid 
Mauger^s  beach,  in  order  to  avoid  the  Horse-Shoe  that  stretches  from  the  beaih- 
When  past  the  JHorse-Shoe,  edge  over  towards  Cornwallis  (n6w  Mac  Nab's)  isl- 
and, keeping  in  mid-channel  between  the  island  and  point  Pleasant  shoalSj  uii 
which  is  a  buoy,  as  above-mentioned.  When  past  the  spit  that  lies  to  the  north 
of  Mac  Nab's  island,  steer  north  for  George's  island,  of  which  you  niay  go  on 
either  side,  and  run  up  to  abreast  of  the  town  of  Halifax,  about  the  distance  o( 
two  cable's  length  to  the  eastward  of  the  mooring  buoys,  and  come  to  anchor  in 
9  or  10  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  or  so  near  to  the  wharfs  that  your  hawser  tfill 
reach  the  shore. 

On  entering  the  harbour  from  the  eastward,  especially  with  an  easterly  wmd, 
particillar  caution  must  be  taken  to  avoid  the  Thrum  Cap  and  Rock  Head.  In 
proceeding  this  way  steer  west,  \V.  N.  W.  or  N.  W.  according  to  the  wind  and 
your  distance  from  the  shoals,  until  George's  island  up  the  harbour,  is  open  a 
sail's  breadth  to  the  westward  of  Mac  Nab's  island ;  then  haul  up  for  Sandwich 

!ioint  and  the  fort,  (York  Redoubt)  until  you  see  the  steeple  of  St.  Paul's  church 
D  Halifax,  a  ship's  length  open  to  the  eastward  of  Judge  Brenton's  house^  a  re- 
markable one,  fronting  the|  south.  This  mark,  kept  on,  will  lead  clear  of  point 
Pleasant  shoals,  and  in  a  fair  way  between  Manger's  beach  and  Sandwich  point ; 
whence  you  may  steer  directly  for  George's  inland,  and  pass  in  on  the  cast  side, 
If  the  wind  will  permit. 

In  turning  to  windward  give  the  upper  or  inner  part  of  Manger's  beach  a 
birth  of  one  cable's  length,  in  order  to  avoid  the  Horse-Shoe  Split,  that  runs 
from  the  north  part  of  the  beach  to  the  distance  of  one  cable  and  a  half's  length. 
toil  may  stand  to  the  Sandwich  point  side  to  within  two  ship's  length,  that  be- 
ing bold-to;  but  stand  no  farther  over  to  the  westward,  to  avoid  point  Pleasant 
ihoalsi  than  keeping  St.  Paul's  church  open  to  the  eastward  of  Judge  Brenton's- 
house  on  the  south  shore,  as  above-mentioned. 

When  arrived  thus  far,  put  in  stays ;  and  standing  to  thft  eastward,  keep  Little 
Thrum  Cap  island,  (now  Carrol's)  a  red  bluff',  open  of  Mac  Nab's  island ;  hav- 
ing this  mark  on,  put  in  stays  again,  and  you  will  thus  go  clear  of  the  N.  W.  split 
of  Mac  Nab's  island. 

CATCH  HARBOUR — ^Thc  little  harbour,  or  cove,  called  Catch  Harbour, 
which  lies  to  the  westward  of  Chebucto  Head,  has  u  bar  across  the  entrance, 
having  nine  feet  over  it  at  low  water,  with  breakers  when  the  wind  blows  on  the 
shore.    Within  it  are  S  and  3i  fathoms. 

The  variation  of  the  compas?  in  Halifax  harbour,  as  observed  by  Mr.  Back- 
hoase,  was  16°  30'  W.  in  1798.  It  has  lately  been  stated  to  exceed  17  degrees. 
VARIATIONS  OP  the  COMPASS.— In  the  year  1775,  the  variations  were 
giTcn  by  M.  des  Barres,  as  follow:  North  entrance  of  the  Gut  of  Canso  1G°  0' 
W. :  Crow  Harbour,  Chedabucto  Bay,  14°  50'  W. :  Entrance  of  Liscomb  H:>r- 
bour,  140;  Sable  Island,  13O57':  Jlalifax  light-house,  13°  35':  Entrance  of 
Shelhurne,  18°  80' :  Cape  Sable,  1 1°  15'.  In  1798,  Mr.  Backhc.uae  of  the  navy, 
found  the  v&riation  at  Halifax  to  exceed  16  degrciis;  an  addition  of  2i  degroes 
to  the  preceding  may  therefore  give  the  present  variation  very  near  the  truth. 
Mr.  Lockwood  gives  the  variation  at  Halifax  17°  28'  and  at  Cape  Sable  14°  27' ; 
hut  it  teems  that  the  needle  is  now  receding,  i^t  St.  John's,  New-Brunswick 
tho  prMent  variation  is  about  16  degrees. 

79 


636 


BLkJNT  S    AMERICAN  COASt   PILOT. 


(reneral  remarks  on  the  Coast  westward. 


From  Halifax  vrestward  to  Margaret's  Bay,  the  country  appears  from  the  off- 
ing, very  rocky  and  broken ;  the  shore  is  steep-to ;  and  bounded  with  white 
rocky  cliffs.  The  high  lands  of  Aspotogon,  on  the  eastern  side  of  Mahone,  or 
Mecklenburg  Bay,  are  very  remarkable ;  whence  proceeding  westward,  the  rocks 
which  surround  the  shore  are  black,  with  some  banks  of  red  earth.  Between 
Cape  Le  Have  (which  is  a  remarkable  promontory,  bald  on  the  top,  with  a  red 
bank  under  it,  facing  the  south-westward,)  and  Port  Medway,  or  Jackson,  there 
are  some  hummocks  within  land,  about  which  the  country  appears  low  and  level 
from  the  sea ;  and  on  the  shore,  white  rocks  and  stony  beaches,  with  several 
low  bald  points;  hence  to  Shelburne  harbour  the  land  is  woody.  About  the 
entrance  of  Port  Latour,  and  within  land,  are  several  barren  spots,  which  from 
theofling,  ar«  easily  discerned  ;  thence  to  Cape  Sable  the  land  appearslevel  and 
low,  and  on  the  shore  are  some  cliffs  of  exceedingly  white  sand,  particularly  in 
the  entrance  of  Port  Latour,  and  on  Cape  Sable,  where  they  are  very  conspicu- 
Otis  from  sea. 


Magnetic  Bearings  and  distances  of  places  hetween  Halifax  and  Caps 

Sable,  &£c. 

From  Samoro  light-house  to  Cape  Sable,  the  S.  W.  end  of  Nova  Scotia,  W. 
S.  W.  i  W.  thirty-six  leagues.  From  Hcnercy  Rock  to  Cross  Island,  at  the  en- 
trance of  Lunenburg  Harbour,  W.  by  N.  eight  and  a  half  leagues.  From  Sara- 
bro  light-house,  to  the  rock  of  Le  Have  which  is  dry  at  low  water,  W.  S.  W. 
and  W.  by  S.  twe've  leagues.  From  Le  Have  Rock  to  the  entrance  of  Liver- 
pool Harbour,  W.  S.  W.  five  and  a  half  leagues. 

From  abreast  of  Liverpool  Bay  to  Hope  Island,  a  little  low  flat  isle,  full  of 
stones,  S.  W.  f  W.  four  and  a  half  leagues. 

From  Hope  Island  to  tlie  eastern  ledges  of  Rugged  Island  Rocks,  W.  S.  W. 
six  leagues. 

From  the  Rugged  Island  Rocks  to  abreast  of  Cape  Roseway,  or  Shelburne 
tight-house,  W.  h  N.  seven  miles. 

From  Shelburne  light-house  to  abreast  of  Cape  Negro,  S.  W.  i  S.  two  and  a 
half  leagues. 

From  Cape  Negro  to  the  Brazil  Rock,  S.  W.  4  S.  ten  miles. 

From  the  Rugged  Island  Rocks  to  the  Brazil  Rock,  S.  W.  by  W.  seven  leagues. 

From  the  Brazil  Rock  to  the  Blonde  or  Seal  Island  Rock,  W.  by  N.  i  N.  eight 
and  a  quarter  leagues. 

From  the  Brazil  Rock  to  Cape  Negro,  N.  E.  ^  N.  ten  miles. 

From  the  Blonde  or  Seal  Island  Rock  to  the  Lurcher  Rock,  N.  by  W.  i  W. 
twelve  and  a  half  leagues. 

DESCRIPTION  and  DIRECTIONS. 

SAMBRO  HARBOUR.— The  Harbour  of  Sambro,  which  has  about  thirty 
families  on  its  borders,  lies  at  one  mile  and  three  quarters  to  the  N.  N.  W.  of  the  j 
light-house  island.  Off  its  entrance  is  the  Bull  Rock,  already  noticed,  and  there 
are  two  other  rocks  betv/een  the  latter  and  Sambro  Island.  The  best  channel  in- 
to it,  is  therefore  between  Pendant  Point  and  the  Bull  Rock ;  but  vessels  fr»ni 
the  eastward  may  rim  up  between  Sambro  Island  and  the  Inner  Rock.  Within 
the  entrance  is  an  islst,  called  the  Isle  of  Man,  which  is  to  be  left  when  sailio;  j 
inward,  on  the  left  or  larboard  hand.  The  anchorage  is  above  this  islet,  in  S  fa- 
thoms muddy  bottom.  This  is  a  place  cf  safety  for,  and  much  resorted  to,  hj  | 
coasters  iii  bad  weather. 


PENDANT 

choring  grountJ 

18  likewise  gooi 

BRISTOL  ] 

miles  in  breadtl 

hour,  should  b 

they  may  thus  i 

the  full  change 

PROSPECl 

from  Cape  Pros 

by  a  cluster  of  if 

tensive  and  safe : 

selves.    The  in! 

the  fishery.     Tv 

the  stages.    Thi 

and  a  rock,  nam 

thorns  over  it,  at 

in  the  harbour  tF 

sels,  in  4  fathoms 

In  the  indent, 

ward  of  Prospecl 

of  which  exceller 

sunken  rock,  hav 

Iv  one  and  a  hal, 

the  wind  on-shore 

celvcd  by  the  ripf 

pn  the  west  side 

warv.8  it,  E.  S.  E, 

The  PORT  O] 

Bay.    It  is  formei 

The  best  passage 

The  anchorage  is 

mud.    In  sailing  ii 

from  Inch-kerth. 

Between  the  hai 
and  barren :  the  9I 
Pish  however,  are 
fishery. 

MARGARET'S 

demess  Island,  whi 
lies  in  latitude  440 
harfcours,  fit  to  rec 
remarkable  at  a  cc 
«re  high  white  rock 
i)og,  (a  ledge  almoi 
8°E.true,  (or.juf 
endofHolderness  ] 
from  the  southernn 
«dcs  of  this  small  is 
.  ".In  Fitzroy  Riv« 

ingintoit,  youmus 
about  S.  W.  by  W. 
the  tide.  It  has  dee 
the  largest  ships  ma 
keep  nearest  to  the 
H  within  Hertforc 
Jous  shelter  withiu 
there  is  likewise  goo 
Mr.  Lockwood  sa 
^«ence,  in  length  n 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


627 


na  the  off- 
ith  vrhite 
Ekhone,  or 
the  rocks 
Between 
with  a  red 
:9on,  there 
1  and  level 
ith  several 
About  the 
fhich  from 
rs  level  and 
ticularly  in 
J  conspicu- 


and  Cape 

1  Scotia,  W. 
id,  at  the  en- 
From  Sam- 
r,  W.  S.  W. 
ice  of  Liver- 

t  isle,  full  of 

w,W.S.W. 

jr  Shelbume 

.  two  and  a 


even  leagues. 
IN.  iN.  eight 


by  W.  1 W. 


about  thirty 

In.  W- of  the 

ed,  and  there 

^t  channel  in- 

vessels  frsm 
kck.    Within 
[when  sailing  1 
I  islet,  in  3  fa- 
Isorted  to,  l^J  I 


PENDANT  HARBOUR,  the  next  to  the  westward  of  Sambro,  has  good  «n.- 
choring  ground.  The  islands  on  the  west  side  of  it  are  bold-to,  and  the  ground 
is  likewise  good.     The  depths  are  from  10  to  5  fathoms. 

BRISTOL  BAY,  between  Pendant  and  Shuldham  Harbours,  is  about  three, 
miles  in  breadth ;  vessels  proceeding  hence  for  the  anchorage  in  Shuldham  Har- 
bour, should  bring  Point  Mackworth,  on  the  western  side,  to  bear  north,  and 
they  may  thug  sail  in  between  the  rocks  on  either  side.  The  tide  flows  here,  on, 
the  full  change  days,  at  VII|h.  and  rises  about  eight  feet. 

PROSPECT  HARBOUR.— This  harbour  lies  about  three  miles  to  the  N.  W. 
from  Cape  Prospect,  on  the  west  side  of  Bristol  Bay,  and  its  entrance  is  formed 
by  a  cluster  of  islands ;  hence  the  appearance  is  rugged ;  but  the  harbour  iu  ex- 
tensive and  safe ;  and  in  rough  weather,  the  dangers  in  the  vicinity  show  them- 
selves. The  inhabitants  are  settled  on  the  left,  or  western  side,  and  subsist  by 
the  fishery.  Two  small  islands,  on  that  side,  form  a  little  cove,  and  on  these  are 
the  stages.  The  entrance  is  between  an  islet,  called  Hobson's  Nose,  on  the  east, 
and  a  rock,  named  Dorman  Rock  on  the  west.  There  is  a  breaker,  with  3  fa- 
thoms over  it,  at  the  distance  of  two  cable's  length  to  the  east  of  the  hitter.  With- 
in the  harbour  there  is  good  anchorage  for  the  largest  ships ;  and  for  smaller  ves- 
sels, in  4  fathoms,  where  the  bottom  is  of  stiff  blue  clay. 

In  the  indent,  named  LEITH  HARBOUR,  two  and  a  half  miles  to  the  west- 
ward of  Prospect  Harbour,  are  the  inlets  called  Shag  Bay  and  Blind  Bay,  in  both 
of  which  excellent  anchorage  may  be  found.  In  the  entrance  lies  the  Hog,  a. 
sunken  rock,  having  onlj'  six  feet  water  over  it.  This  rock  bears  E.  S.,  E.  near- 
ly one  and  a  half  mile  from  the  isle  called  Inch-keith.  In  rough  weather,  with 
the  wind  pn-shore,  the  sea  breaks  over  it;  and,  in  fair  ■weather,  it  may  be  per-, 
reived  by  the  rippling  of  the  tide.  There  is  a  good  channel  on  cither  side;  that 
pn  the  west  side  is  most  difficult,  there  being  a  ledge  extending  half  a  mile  to-;, 
vrarus  it,  E.  S.  E.  from  the  eastern  extremity  of  Inch-keith. 

The  PORT  OF  DOVER  lies  on  the  western  side  of  the  entrance,  to  Blind 
Bay.  It  is  formed  by  the  Island  called  Inch-keith,  and  several  other  islands.. 
The  best  passage  in  is  to  the  eastward  of  these,  giving  them  a  moderate  birth.. 
The  anchorage  is  within  the  body  of  Inch-keith  in  10,  9  or  7  fathoms ;  bottom  of 
mud.  In  sailing  in,  give  a  birth  to  the  reef,  which  extends  E.  S.  E.  half  a  mile 
from  Inch-keith. 

Between  the  harbour  of  Halifax  and  this  place,  the  qoasts  are  crag-gy,  brokea 
and  barren:  the  shore  iron-bound  and  steep,  and  a  tree  is  scarcely  to  be  seen.. 
Fish  however,  are  abundant,  and  the  harbours  most  conveniently  situated,  for  the 
fishery. 

MARGARET'S  BAY.— M.  des  Barres  says  "the  southernmost  point  of  Ho!  ■ 
demess  Island,  which  is  the  south-west  point  of  the  entrance  of  Margaret's  Bay, 
lies  in  latitude  44°  84'  25"  and  longitude  63°  55.'  30''.     In  this  bay  are  several 
harbours,  fit  to  receive  first-rate  ships.    The  high  lands  of  Aspotogon  are,  very 
remarkable  at  a  considerable  distance  ;  in  the  offing,  the  shores  at  the  entrance 
are  high  white  rocks,  and  steep-to  :  off*  the  west  side  coming  in,  you  perceive  thq^* 
Dog,  (aledge  almost  covered  and  surrounded  with  breakers)  which  Tms  S.  by  E.. 
8°  E.  true,  (or  .  juth  by  compass)  nearly  a  mile  and  a  half  distant  from  the  south, 
end  of  Holderness  Island,  and  v.est  3^  south  true,  (or  W.  by  N.  by  compass), 
from  the  southernnjost  point  of  Inch-keith.    You  have  good  chrmncls  on  both 
tides  of  this  small  island  which  shelters  the  S.  W.  harbour. 

"  In  Fitzroy  River,  ships  may  lie  land-locked,  in  5  or  6  fathoms.  When  sail- 
ing into  it,  you  must  carefully  avoid  the  danger  called  Black  Ledge,  which  lies 
about  S.  W.  by  W.  300  fathoms  from  Warren  Head,  and  appears  at  all  times  of 
the  tide.  It  has  deep  water  close  to  it.  In  Delaware  River  and  'Conway  Cove, 
the  largest  ships  may  also  ride  in  perfect  safety.  When  sailing  into  the  latter, 
keep  nearest  to  the  starboard  side  of  the  entrance.  On  the  eastern  side  of  the 
bay,  within  Hertford  Basin,  there  are  from  8  to  10  fathoms.  There  is  commo- 
dious shelter  within  Mecklenburg  Isle,  and  farther  up,  within  the  Strelitz  Isles, 
there  is  likewise  good  anchorage." 

Mr.  Lockwood  says,  "  Margaret's  Bay  is  about  twenty-five  miles  in  circum- 
fsrence,  in  length  nine,  and  two  miles  wide  at  th«  entrance.    In  this  beautiful- 


^v  > 


ULUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Ahoe.tof  water,  are  harbours  capable  ofreceiving  ships  of  the  line,  even  against  the 
sidcMofthe  shore." 

A  sunken  rock  lies  off  the  outer  point  of  the  bay  (May  Point,)  on  the  eastern 
si«le,  at  the  distance  of  three  hundred  yards.  At  two  miles  within  the  same  point, 
io  the  northward,  is  an  islet  two  hundred  and  eight  feet  high,  called  fiheet-in 
Island,  covered  with  w^od,  and  hold-to.  The  point  next  to  this  is  Patty  s  Point, 
and  tinere  is  a  ledge  between  of  nine  feet  water.  At  a  mile  above  Patty's  Point 
's  Luke's  Island^  (Mecklenburg)  forming  a  complete  break  to  the  sea,  and  used 
as  a  sheep-fold.  There  is  good  anchorage  on  the  N.  E..  of  it,  smooth  in  all  sea- 
suns  ;  and  this  is,  therefore,  a  useful  place  of  shelter. 

HEAD  HARBOUR  (or  Delaware  RT\'er)  is  an  anchorage  of  the  first  class, 
and  so  perfect  a  place  of  safety,  that  a  fleet  may  be  moored  in  it,  side  by  side, 
and  be  unaffected  even  by  a  hurricane.    Tho  lands  are  high  and  broken. 

HUBERT'S  COVE,  (Fitzroy  River,)  in  the  N.  W.  corner  of  the  bay,  may 
be  entered  by  a  stranger,  by  keeping  the  western  shore  on  board ;  and  a  ship 
dismasted  or  in  distress  may  here  find  perfect  shelter.  If  without  anchors,  she 
may  safely  run  aground,  and  will  be  assisted  by  the  settlers. 

At  the  entrance  of  the  cove,  towards  the  eastern  side,  is  a  ridge  of  rocks,  cal- 
led Hubert's  Ledge  (Black  Ledge ;)  this  is  about  100  fathoms  in  extent,  covered 
^t  high  water.  It  may  be  passed  on  either  side,  keeping  the  land  on  board,  the 
fihpres  being  hold. 

Between  Hubert's  Cpve  and  Head  Harbour  are  several  indents,  with  projec- 
ting rugged  points.  From  these  places  small  vessels  take  building  sand  and  lime- 
stone, tlie  latter  being  of  a  superior  quality. 

LONG  COVE,  (Egremont  Cove)  two  and  a  half  miles  to  the  southward  of 
Hubert's  Cove,  on  the  western  side  of  the  bay,  is  a  good  anchorage  with  a  west- 
erly wind.  An  excellent  stream  on  which  is  a  saw-mill  falls  into  this  place. 
Hence  southward,  the  coast  is  bold  and  rugged ;  but  there  is  no  danger,  except- 
ing one  small  rock  of  six  feet  water  close  io-shore. 

The  South-west  Isle  (Holderness  Isle)  is  a  body  of  rock,  about  fifty  feet  in 
height,  bold-to  on  all  sides.  At  a  mile  from  this  isle,  is  a  little  harbour,  called 
South-west  Harbour,  having  an  islet  before  it  that  forms  a  convenient  shelter  for 
small  vessels.     Several  families  are  settled  here. 

About  five  miles  S.  J  W.  from  the  point  of  land  which  separates  Margaret's 
|ind  Mahone  Ba^'s,  lies  Green  Island.  It  is  small,  and  lies  seven  leagues  W.  N. 
W.  I  W.  from  abreast  of  Sambru  light-house,  in  latitude  44°  27'  35",  and  longi- 
tude 68°  ."iS'  30". 

MAHONE  BAY  is  divided  from  Margaret's  Bay  by  tke  peninsula,  on  which 
stand  the  highlands  of  Aspoto/^on,  whose  appearance  in  three  regular  swellings, 
is  very  remarkable  at  a  great  distance  in  the  offinx.  Between  the  many  islairds 
tD  this  bay,  are  several  good  channels,  leading  up  into  fine  harbours. 

The  outer  breaker  lies  N.  E.  i  E.  one  mile  and  two-thirds  distant  from  the 
S.  E.  end  of  Duck  Island,  and  W.  |  N.  three  and  a  quarter  miles  distant  from 
the  N.  W.  point  of  Green  Island ;  from  this,  about  two  and  three  quarter  miles 
N.  by  W.  lies  the  Bull  (a  blind  rock,  visible  at  one-third  ebb)  bearing  W.  by  S. 
l&OO  fathoms  distant,  from  the  S.  W.  end  of  Flat  Island,  and  S.  by  £.  above  two 
raWei  distiint,  frona  the  west  point  of  Tancook  Island.  Farther  up,  N.  W.  by  W. 
400  fathoms  distant,  from  the  west  point  of  Tancook  Island,  lies  Rocky  Shoal ; 
within  which  and  Tancook  Island,  is  deep  water.  The  Coachman  is  a  blind 
ledge,  visible  at  low  water  only.  The  east  end  of  Tancook  and  Flat  Islands  in  one, 
will  lead  you  clear  on  the  east  side  of  it.  T^e  west  end  of  Iron-bound  Island,  open 
with  the  west  point  of  Little  Tancook  Island,  will  clear  you  on  the  south  side; 
and  Governor's  Island  on  with  the  west  point,  carries  you  safe  on  its  north  side. 

At  the  head  of  the  bay  is  the  town  of  Caster  which  was  settled  in  1760,  and 
is  surrounded  by  a  country  of  fine  appearance,  and  abounding  in  wood.  On  ap- 
proaching the  bay  from  the  eastward,  the  first  land  seen  will  be  Green  Island, 
which  is  round,  bold  and  moderately  high.  Hence  to  Iron-bound  and  Flat  Is- 
lands, th«  distance  is  about  two  and  three  quarters  miles ;  passing  these,  which 
are  bold-to,  you  proceed  to  and  between  the  Tancook  Islands,  which  are  in- 
liaUtcd ;  the  passage  is  good,  and  anchorage  under  the  isles,  in  from  12  to  7  fathomir 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


629 


irttth* 

eastern 
s  point, 
heet-in 
1  Point, 
s  Point 
id  used 
all  Bea- 
st class, 
\}y  side, 


On  proceeding  towards  Chester,  the  only  danger,  is  the  ledge  called  the  Coach- 
man, before  mentioned.  The  ishnds  off  the  town  render  the  harbour  smooth  and 
secure,  the  dtjpth  in  which  is  from  5  to  2  fathoms. 

Chester  church  open,  on  the  west  of  Gro.it  Tancook,  leads  clear  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  Bull  Rock,  and  down  to  Duck  Island. 

LUNENBURG  HARBOUR.— This  is  a  place  of  considerable  trade,  and  its 
population  in  1C17,  amounted  to  4,200  persons.  Vessrls  are  constantly  plying 
between  Luneul)urg  and  Halifiix,  carrying  toMie  latter  chord-Nvciod,  lumber,  hay, 
cattle,  stock,  and  all  kinds  of  vegetables.  The  harbour  is  easy  of  access,  with 
anchorage  to  its  head. 

To  sail  in,  you  may  pass  on  either  side  of  Cr(»ss  island,  but  the  channel  on  the 
west  side  of  the  island  is  best.  In  sailing  through  the.  northern  channel,  he 
careful  to  avoid  the  shoals  which  extend  from  the  north  side  of  the  island,  and 
from  Colesworth  point  on  the  opposite  side.  In  sailing  in,  through  the  channel 
to  the  westward  of  the  island,  steer  in  a  midway  betwee.n  it  and  point  Rose ;  and 
before  you  approach  Ovens'  point,  give  it  a  !»irth  of  two  or  three  cable's  length  ; 
for,  from  Oven's  point  to  the  S.  E.  runs  off  a  spit,  t(»  which  you  must  not  ap- 
proach nearer  than  7  fathoms.  From  Oven's  point  N.  E.  three-quarters  of  a 
mile  distant,  lies  the  Cat  Rock,  dry  at  low  water.  Your  leading-mark  between 
Oven's  point  and  the  Cat  Rock  is,  a  waggon  road-way  (above  the  town  of  Lu- 
nenburg) open  to  the  westward  of  Battery  point,  which  mark  will  keep  you 
clear  of  a  rock  of  4  fathoms  at  low  water.  The  best  anchoring  ground  is  on  the 
west  shore,  opposite  the  middle  farm-house,  in  7  Aithoms,  muddy  bottom.  Your 
course  in,  is  from  N.  N.  W.  to  N.  W.  by  N  In  this  bay,  with  good  ground- 
tackling,  you  may  ride  out  a  S.  E.  gale  very  safely.  The  harbour,  which  is  to 
the  northward  of  the  Long  Rock  and  Battery  point,  is  fit  only  for  small  ships  of 
war  and  merehar/i.  vessels.  Along  the  wharfs  are  12  and  13  feet  of  water ;  and, 
at  a  short  distance,  from  20  to  24  feet,  soft  mud. 

The  latitude  of  Cross  island,  according  to  the  observations  made  by  Mr.  Back- 
house, is  44°  20'.  M.  des  Barres  gives  it  as  44°  23'  25",  in  longitude  64°  5'  10''. 
This  island  is  in  a  state  of  cultivation,  and  on  the  N.  E.  is  a  small  nook,  in  which 
coasters  may  lie  securely.  The  west  and  south  sides  of  the  island  are  bold  ; 
and,  at  two  miles  from  the  south  side,  is  an  excellent  fishing-bank,  having  over 
it  from  14  to  17  fathoms. 

CAPE  LE  HAVE,  at  the  distance  of  12  leagues  W.  i  S.  from  Sambro' 
light-house,  is  an  abrupt  cliff,  107  feet  high.  At  one  mile  S.  E.  by  S.  from  this 
cape  lies  the  Black  Rock,  10  feet  high  and  100  long,  with  deep  water  around  it, 
10  to  14  fathoms.  From  this  cape,  westward  to  Cape  Medway,  the  land  which 
is  broken  and  craggy,  forms  a  deep  bight.  Within  Cape  Le  Have  is  Palmer- 
stond  bay ;  at  the  head  of  this  is  Petit  Reviere,  a  settlement  formed  by  the 
French,  and  the  farms  of  which  are  in  fine  condition. 

PORT  MEDWAY.— Admiralty  Head,  at  the  entrance  of  this  port,  lies  in 
latitude  44°  10'  30",  and  longitude  64°  29'.  The  entrance  may  be  known  by  a 
hill  on  the  head,  and  the  low  rugged  islands  on  the  eastern  side.  It  is  seven- 
eighths  of  a  mile  broad,  and  has  a  depth  of  14  to  5  fathoms. 

The  land  to  the  eastward  of  the  harbour  is  remarkably  broken  and  hilly.  The 
outer  breaker  on  tflie  starboard  side,  without  the  entrance,  lies  S.  i  W.  above 
a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  isle  called  Glover's  Isle,  ar.d  S.  E.  i  S.  about  a  mile 
and  three-quarters  from  Admiralty  Point.  The  Stone-Horse,  a  rock  dry  at  low 
water,  lies  E.  by  S.  one-third  of  a  mile  from  the  S.  W.  breaker. 

The  course  up  the  harbudr  is  N.  N.  E.  and  when  Collin's  Isle  (on  the  west 
shore)  beais  west,  and  Alicia  River  is  just  opening  of  Point  Lucy,  you  may 
steer  up  N.  W.  by  N.  to  anchor,  keeping  nearest  to  the  eastern  shore.  To  run 
up  Alicia  Fiiver,  you  must  paas  between  Grass  Isle  and  Point  Lucy,  keeping 
close  to  tbe  southern  and  western  shores,  in  order  to  avoid  a  fiat  which  extends 
from  the  northward,  leaving  a  deep  but  narrow  channel.  Barry  Branch  i9  full 
of  rocky  shoals. 

LIVERPOOL  BAY.— Bald  Point,  on  the  S.  W.  of  the  entrance  of  Liver- 
pool Bay,  lies  in  latitude  44°  4',  and  Jongitude  64°  37'. 
This  bay  has  room  sufficient  for  turning  to  windward.    The  deepest  water  is 


i630 


BLUNT's    AMERICAN       OAST    PILOT. 


on  the  vrestcrn  shore.  Bald  Pointy  at  the  entrance,  is  bold-to,  and  is  remarkable, 
having  no  trees  on  it.  The  cove  on  the  north-east  side  of  the  bay,  affords  good 
shelter  from  sea-ivinds,  in  3  fathoms,  muddy  bottom.  At  high  water  vessels  of 
two  and  three  hundred  tons  may  run  up  over  the  bar  into  the  harbour ;  but  at 
low  water  there  are  only  10  feet  over  it.  The  channel  within,  winds  with  the 
southern  shore,  and  the  settlements  of  Liverpool  upwards. 

The  entrance  bears  W.  by  S.  ITJ  leagues  from  Sambro  light-house,  and  W. 
S.  W.  i  W.  16  miles  from  Cape  Le  Have.  Coffin's  Island,  which  lies  without  it, 
is  distinguished  by  the  light-house,  already  noticed,  on  page  623,  and  which  exhi- 
bits a  light  revolving  every  two  minutes.  The  land  in  the  vicinity  of  the  har- 
bour is  generally  rocky  and  barren,  yet  the  commercial  spirit  of  the  people  have 
raised  the  town  to  respectability  and  opulence,  and  they  trade  to  every  part  of 
the  West  Indies.     The  population  is  estiinated  at  1200  persons. 

PORT  MOUTON,  or  Matoon,  is  formed  by  an  island  of  the  same  name, 
which  lies  at  the  entrance,  and,  therefore,  forms  two  diannels,  of  the  latter,  that 
on  the  western  side  of  the  island  is  so  impeded  by  islets  and  shoals,  as  to  leave 
a  small  passage  only  for  small  vessels,  and  that  close  to  the  main.  At  a  mile 
from  the  island,  on  the  east,  is  a  ridge  called  Portsmouth  or  Black  Rocks ;  and 
from  the  N.  W.  end  of  the  island,  a  shoal  extends  to  the  distance  of  more  than 
a  mile.  Within  Matoon  Island,  on  the  W.  N.  W.  are  two  islands  called  the 
Spectacles,  or  Saddle.  M.  des  Barres  says,  *'  On  both  sides  of  the  Portsmouth 
Rocks,  which  are  always  above  water,  you  have  deep  channels,  and  of  a  suffi- 
cieot  width  for  ships  to  turn  into  the  harbour."  With  a  leading  wind  you  may 
steer  up  N.  N.  W.  |  W.  (N.  W.  true)  untii  you  bring  the  Saddle  to  bear  S. 
W.  i  W.  (S.  W.  by  S.  true)  and  haul  up  S.  W.  by  W.  to  the  anchoring  ground, 
where  there  will  be  found  from  20  to  1£  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  in  security 
from  all  winds. 

At  five  miles  S.'S.  W.  i  W.  from  the  south  end  of  Mouton  Island  lies  an  islet, 
surrounded  by  a  shoal,  named  Little  Hope  Island.  It  is  very  low,  and  only 
20Q  fathoms  in  length  at  two  and  a  half  miles  from  the  shore.  A  valuable  ship 
was  lost  here,  in  1815;  and  Mr.  Lockwood  has  recommended  the  erection  of 
an  obelisk,  or  beacon,  upon  the  isle,  which  would  be  of  great  advantage  to  the 
coasters,  and  to  all  who  approach  the  coast. 

The  next  harbour,  west  of  Little  Hope  Isle,  is  Fort  Jolly,  which  extends  five 
miles  inland,  but  is  altogether  very  shoal.  The  lands  here  are  stony  and  barren, 
but  eleven  families  are  maintained  by  fishing.  Between  this  harbour  and  Hope 
Isle  are  several  ledges,  which  show  themselves,  and  there  is  a  shoal  spot  nearly 
midway  between  the  isle  and  the  main. 

PORT  HEBERT,  or  Great  Port  Jolly,  may  be  distinguished  by  the  steep 
head  on  the  west.  Its  eastern  point.  Point  Hebert,  lies  in  latitude  43°  51'  10', 
and  longitude  64°  51'  20".  At  half  a  league  tu  the  S.  W.  without  the  entrance, 
is  an  islet,  called  Green  Island,  which  is  remarkable,  and  destitute  of  wood. 
The  only  anchorage  here  for  large  vessels,  is  in  the  mouth  of  the  harbour.  Above 
are  flats,  with  narrow  winding  channels  through  the  mud.  Fifteen  families  arc 
settled  in  the  port. 

SABLE  RIVER  is  impeded  by  a  bar  which  admits  no  vessels  larger  than 
small  fishers.     The  country  is  sterile,  but  eleven  families  are  settled  here. 

RUGGED  ISLAND  HARBOUR  takes  its  name  from  its  rugged  appear- 
ance, and  the  numei  ous  sunken  rocks  and  ledges  about  it.  This  place  is  seldom 
resorted  to,  unless  by  the  fishermen,  although  within  the  anchorage  is  good,  in 
4}  and  4  fathoms.  In  a  gale  of  wind,  the  uneven  rocky  ground  at  the  entrance 
causes  the  sea  to  break  from  side  to  side.  At  a  mile  from  the  western  head  is 
a  bed  of  rocks,  named  the  Gull,  over  which  the  sea  always  breaks. 

Thomas'  Island,  to  the  east  of  the  harbour,  affol-ds  a  good  mark  for  it,  this  island 
having  high  rocky  cliffs  on  its  eastern  side.  From  its  southern  pornt,  sunken 
rocks  extend. to  the  S.  W.  nearly  a  mile,  and  within  these  is  the  Tiger,  a  rock 
of  only  4  feet,  lying  south,  half  a  mile  from  Rug  Point,  the  eastern  point  of  the 
harbour.  Having  cleared  these  on  the  outside,  haul  up  N.  N.  W.  for  the  islands 
on  the  left  or  western  side,  and  so  as  to  avoid  a  shoal  which  stretches  halfway 
oyer  from  the  opposite  side.  Pursuing  this  direction,  you  may  proceed  to  the 
anchorage  in  the  n»rth  arm  of  the  harbour. 


BLUNrS    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


631 


cable, 
good 
ela  of 
l)ut  at 
Ihthe 

t.d>y. 

lOut  it, 
i\  exlii- 
le  har- 
le  have 
part  of 

;  name, 
er,  that 
;o  leave 
t  a  mile 
ss;  .ind 
)re  than 
illcd  the 
tsmouth 
t  a  suffi- 
^ou  may 

bear  S. 
;  ground, 

security 

I  an  islet, 
and  only 
able  ship 
ection  of 
ge  to  the 

tends  five 
id  barren, 
ind  Hope 
lot  nearly 

the  steep 

^  51'  10'', 

jntrance, 

)f  wood. 

Above 

lilies  arc 

rger  than 
ire. 

appear- 
Is  seldom 
Igood,  in 
1  entrance 
head  is 

lis  island 
sunken 
,  a  rock 
it  of  the 
ke  islands 
llialf  way 
bd  to  the 


Directions  for  sailing  into  Shelburne  Harbour  or  Port  RoseWay,  N.  S.  || 

Cape  Roseway,  the  S.  E.  point  of  Roseneath  or  Macnutt's  Island,  is  a  high  clifT 
of  white  rocks,  the  top  of  which  is  partly  without  wood.  The  west  side  of  the 
island  is  low.  On  the  cape  stands  the  nohle  light-house  of  Shelburne,  which  has 
H  white  and  remarkable  appearance  in  the  day,  and  at  night  exhibits  ttoo  lights, 
the  upper  light  at  about  150  feet  above  the  level  of  ihe  sea,  and  the  other  a  small 
light  below,  at  a^out  36  feet  below  the  lantern,  by  which  it  is  distinguished,  at 
night,  from  the  light  of  Sambro'  or  Halifax. 

The  latitude  of  this  ligiit-house,  according  to  the  determinations  of  Mr.  Back- 
house, in  1792,  by  the  several  means  of  double  and  meridian  altitudes,  is  48^ 
42'  30''.  The  variation,  at  the  same  time,  was  13'^  30'  W.  Of  preceding  ob- 
servations, the  results  were,  latitude  43°  40',  and  longitude  65°  12'  west  of 
Greenwich. 

This  haiJ>our  is  altogether  the  best  in  Nova-Scotia,  but  its  town  has  long  been 
in  a  state  of  decline,  and  some  of  its  streets  are  overgrown  with  grass  and  weeds. 
When  coming  in  from  the  ocean,  after  you  have  made  the  light-house,  bring 
it  to  bear  N.  W.  or  N.  VV.  by  N.  and  steer  directly  for  it.  The  dangers  that 
lie  on  the  east  side,  going  in,  are  the  Rugged  Island  Rocks,  a  long  ledge  that 
stretches  out  from  the  shore  six  or  seven  miles,  the  Bell  Rock,  and  the  Straptub 
Rock.  On  the  west  side  is  the  Jig  Rock.  The  Bell  Rock  is  always  visible 
and  bdd-to. 

When  you  have  gotten  abreast  of  the  light-house,  steer  up  in  roid-channcl. 
Roseneath  Island  is  pretty  bold-to,  all  the  way  from  the  light-house  to  the  N.  W. 
end  of  the  island.  When  you  oome  up  half  way  between  George's  Point  and 
Sandy  Point,  be  careful  of  a  sunken  rock  that  runs  off  from  that  bight,  on  which 
are  only  3  fathoms  at  low  water ;  keep  the  west  shore  on  board  to  avoid  it ; 
your  depth  of  water  will  be  from  4,  5,  to  6  fathoms. 

Sandy  Point  is  pretty  steep-to:  rim  al)ove  this  point  about  half  a  mile,  and 
come  to  anchor  in  6  fathoms,  muddy  bottom ;  if  you  choose,  you  may  sail  up 
to  the  upper  part  of  the  harbour,  and  come  to  anchor  in  5  fathoms,  muddy  bot- 
tom, about  one  mile  and  a  half  from  the  town  below  the  harbour  flat. 

In  sailing  in  from  the  eastward,  be  careful  to  avoid  the  Rugged  Island  Rocks, 
which  are  underwater;  do  not  haul  up  for  the  harbour,  till  the  light-house  bears 
from  you  W.  by  N.  i  N.  by  that  means  you  will  avoid  every  danger,  and  may 
proceed  as  taught  above. 

In  sailing  into  Shelburne  from  the  westward,  do  not  haul  up  for  the  light-house 
till  it  hears  from  you  N.  by  E.  h  E.  to  avoid  the  Jig  Rock,  which  lies  within  one 
mile  and  a  half  of  the  light-house,  and  is  pretty  steep-to= 

Should  the  wind  take  you  ahead,  and  constrain  you  t(t  ply  to  the  windward  up 
the  harbour,  do  not  make  too  bold  with  the  eastern  shore ;  for  half  way  between 
George's  Point  and  Sandy  Point,  runs  off  sunken  rocks.  When  you  come 
abreast  of  them,  do  not  stand  above  half-channel  over,  to  avoid  them.  On  the 
west  shore,  abreast  of  Sandy  Point,  it  is  flat,  therefore  do  not  make  too  bold  in 
standing  over. 

The  ledge  of  rocks  that  the  ihip  Adamant  struck  upon,  which  lies  abreast  of 
Durfey's  House,  is  lo  be  carefully  avoided ;  do  not  stand  any  further  over  to 
tl)e  westwi^rd  than  4J  fathoms,  lest  you  come  upon  the  rock,  as  the  Adamant 
did,  and  lay  a  whole  tide  before  she  floated,  and  that  not  without  lightening  the 
iibip.  The  east  shore  has  regular  soundings  from  Sandy  Point  upwards,  from 
8  to  4  and  5  to  6  fathoms,  to  the  upper  part  of  the  harbour,  where  you  may  ride 
safely  in  5  fathoms,  good  holding  ground.  Your  course  up  from  the  light-house, 
in  a  fair  way,  is  from  N.  W.  to  JN.  W.  by  N.  and  when  you  round  Sandy  Point, 
the  course  is  thence  N.  by  W.  and  N.  as  /ou  have  the  wind.  The  entrance  of 
Shelburne  Harbour  affords  a  refuge  to  ships  with  the  wind  offshore  (which  the 
entrance  of  Halifax  does  not)  and  there  is  anchoring  ground  at  the  mouth  of  the 
harbour^  when  it  blows  too  strong  to  ply  '.o  windward. 

In  sailing  from  the  westtvardfor  Shelburne  at  night,  you  must  not  haul  up  for 
the  harbour  until  the  light  bears  N.  by  E.  h  E.  in  order  to  avoid  the  Jig  Ruck; 


653 


BLUNl  S  AMERICAN  COASf   PILO'f. 


tind  when  aailin};  in,  from  the  eaatward,  you  must  not  haul  up  for  the  harbour  till 
the  hght  bears  W.  by  N.  I  N.  in  order  to  avoid  the  ledi^es  that  lie  off  the  Hugged 
Islands,  and  bear  from  the  light-house  K'  }  S.  8  miles  distant.  You  mav  stop  a 
tide  in  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  in  from  10  to  10  fathoms,  sand,  and  some 
parts  ciay,  bottom. 

Shelburne  is  a  safe  harbour  against  any  vind,  except  a  violent  storm  from  the 
S.  S.  W.  At  the  town,  the  wind  from  S.  by  E.  does  no  harm ;  although  from 
S.  by  W.  to  S.  W.  by  S.  if  blowing  hard  fur  any  considerable  time,  it  is  apt  to 
set  the  small  vessels  adrift  at  the  wharves ;  but,  iii  the  stream^  with  good  cables 
and  anchors,  no  wind  can  injure. 

She'iburne  atfords  an  excellent  shelter  to  vessels  in  distress,  of  any  Icind,  as  a 
amall  supply  of  cordage  and  duck  can  almost  at  a  any  time,  be  had.  Carpenters 
can  be  procured  fur  repairing;  pump,  block,  and  sail-maki^rs  also.  It  affords 
plenty  of  spars,  and  generally  of  provisions.  Water  is  easily  obtained,  and  of 
excellent  quality.  The  port-charges  for  a  vessel  which  puts  in  for  supplies  only, 
is  four-pence  per  ton,  light  money,  on  foreign  bottoms.  If  a  vessel  enters  at  the 
custom-house,  the  charges  are  high  :  but  that  is  seldom  requisite. 

The  following  bearings  and  distances  were  taken  at  the  light-house. 

From  the  light-liouse  to  Berry's  or  Sunbridge  Point,  N.  40*^  E.  two  miles. 

From  ditto  to  Straptub  Rock,  off  the  above,  N.  4ft°  E.  two  miles. 

From  ditto  to  the  Bell  Rock,  E.  20°  N.  two  and  a  half  miles. 

From  ditto  to  the  south  end  of  the  westernmost  Ragged  Island  N.  84^  E.  seven 
mileB. 

From  ditto  to  the  tiasternmost  Ragged  Island,  N.  se'^  30'  £.  ten  and  a  half 
miles. 

From  ditto  to  the  south  west  breakers  of  the  Ragged  Islands,  S.  81<^  34'  E. 
eight  miles. 

From  ditto  to  Cape  Negro,  S.  39'^  W.  nine  miles. 

From  ditto  to  the  Jig  Rock  (which  almost  always  breaks,  and  lies  in  shore  of 
the  track  into  Shelburne)  S.  £8<^  W.  one  and  a  quarter  milcw 

NEGRO  HARBOUR  takes  its  name  from  Cape  Negro,  on  the  island  which 
lin  before  it,  in  latitude  43°  32'  5''  N.  and  longitude  65°  17'  50"  W.  The  island 
is  verr  low  about  the  middle,  and  appears  like  two  islands.  .  The  cape  itself  is 
remarkably  high,  dark,  rocky  and  barren,  and  bears  S.  W.  i  S.  seven  miles,  from 
Cape  Roseway,  or  Shelburne  light-house.  The  best  channel  is  on  the  eastern 
side  of  the  island ;  but  even  this  is  impeded  by  two  ledges  called  the  Gray  Rocki 
and  Budget,  the  latter  a  blind  rock,  of  only  six  feet,  at  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from 
the  island,  on  both  sides  of  which  there  is  deep  water.    The  Gray  Rocks  lie  at  a 

rirter  of  a  mile  to  the  north-eastivard  of  the  Budget,  and  serves  as  a  mark  for 
harbour. 

In  the  passage  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Budget  the  depths  are  from  14  to  10 
fathoms.  With  Shelburne  light  shut  in,  you  will  be  within  the  rocks.  There  is 
excellent  anchorage  on  the  N.  E.  of  Negro  Island,  in  from  6  to  4  fathoms,  bot- 
tom of  stiff  mud.  The  northern  part  of  the  island  presents  a  low  shingly  beach, 
and  from  this  a  bar  extends  over  the  eastern  side  of  the  harbour,  on  part  of  which 
are  only  15  feet  of  water.  The  river  above  is  navigable  to  the  distance  of  six 
miles,  having  .from  5  to  3  fathoms,  bottom  of  clay. 

The  passage  on  the  western  side  of  Negro  Island  is  very  intricate,  having  nu- 
merous rocks,  &tc.  yet,  as  these  may  be  seen,  it  may  be  attempted,  under  cautious 
decision,  by  a  stranger,  in  case  of  distress. 

PORT  LATOUR  is  separated  from  Negro  harbour  (or  Port  Amherst)  by  a 
narrow  peninsula.  The  extreme  points  of  the  entrance  are  Jeffrey  Point  on  the 
east,  and  Baccarro  Point  on  the  west.  Between,  and  within  these,  are  several 
clusters  of  rock,  which  render  the  harbour  fit  for  small  craft  only. 

BACCARO  POINT. — At  the  entrance  of  this  port,  on  the  west  side,  lies  in 
latitude  48°  29'  55''  N.  and  longitude  65°  24'  25"  W.  The  Vulture,  a  dangerous 
breaker,  lies  W.  S.  W.  nearly  two  miles  from  the  point.  The  Bampton  Rock 
half  a  league  to  the  southward  of  the  point,  has  only  4  feet  water  on  it,  at  low 
water. 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


633 


BARRiNGTOir  Bat.  With  the  exception  of  the  rocks  off  Point  Baccaro,  tlie 
Bay  of  Barrington  is  clear,  but  there  are  extensive  flats  towards  the  head  of  it, 
and  the  channel  upwards  narrows  so  much  that  it  requires  a  leading  wind  to  wind 
through  it  to  the  anclioring  ground,  where  the  depths  are  fromSe  to  18  feet.  The 
town  of  Barrinoton,  seated  at  the  head  of  the  harbour,  with  its  environs,  con- 
tained, in  1817,  a  population  of  987  persons. 

During  a  S.  W.  gale,  there  is  good  shelter  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  Sable  island,  in 
5  and  i  fathoms,  sandy  bottom. 

The  Wkstern  Passage,  or  that  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  Sable  island,  is  intri- 
cate, and,  therefore,  used  by  small  vessels  only ;  it  is  not  safe  without  a  com- 
manding bree/e,  .is  rhe  tide  sets  immediately  upon  the  rocks,  which  lie  scattered 
within  it,  and  the  ebb  is  forced  through  to  the  eastward,  by  the  bay  tide  on  the 
west,  at  the  rate  of  from  3  to  5  knots.  This  passage  is,  however,  much  used  by 
strangers. 

Brazil  Rock.  This  roi^k  has  been  variously  described,  but  we  have  no  doubt 
that  the  following  is  correct :  It  is  a  flat  rock,  covering  an  area  of  about  ten  yards, 
and  having  8  feet  over  it  at  low  water,  in  calm  weather.  Within  a  hundred  yards 
from  its  base,  are  from  6  to  8  fathoms  of  water  ;  to  the  southward,  at  about  a 
mile  from  the  rock  the  depths  are  from  30  to  35  fathoms,  but  towards  the  shore 
the  soundings  are  regular.  15  and  19  to  20  and  24  ftithoms,  sandy  bottom.  The 
tide,  by  running  strongly  over  the  shoal  ground,  causes  a  great  ripple,  and  makes 
tlie  rock  appear  larger  than  it  really  is.  From  Cape  Negro,  the  bearing  and  dis- 
tance to  the  rock  are  S.  S.  W.  true,  or  H.  W.  %  S.  by  compass,  10  miles,  and  from 
the  rock,  Cape  Sable  bears  N  W.  by  W  by  compass,  or  W.  N.  W.  j|  W.  true,  8} 
miles.  Its  position,  according  to  M.  des  Barres,  which  appears  to  be  subsequcntfy 
confirmed,  is  latitude  43°  »4'  15"  longitude  65°  22'. 


CAPE  SABLE  TO  CAPE  ST.  MARY. 

Cape  Sable  to  the  Bay  of  Fundy  and  Chignecto  Bay,  including  SU 

Johns  and  Grand  Mauan. 

An  inspection  of  the  chart  of  the  S.  W.  coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  &nd  a  consideratiotL 
of  the  relative  situation  of  that  coast,  as  exposed  to  the  ocean,  with  the  conse- 
quent and  variable  set  of  the  tides  about  it,  as  well  as  about  the  island  Manan,  &c. 
will  naturally  lead  the  mariner  to  consider,  that  its  navigation,  involving  extraor- 
dinary difficulties,  requires  extraordinary  attention.  Previous  events,  the  great 
number  of  ships  lost  hereabout,  even  within  a  feto  years,  will  justify  the  supposi- 
tion. It  is,  indeed,  a  coast  beset  with  peril ;  but  the  peril  may  be  avoided,  in  a 
great  degree,  by  the  exercise  of  skill  and  prudence.  To  the  want  of  both  is  to  be 
attributed  many  of  the  losses  which  have  occurred  here. 

In  touching  on  this  subject,  Mr.  Loc&wood  says,  that  the  necessity  of  frequently 
sounding  with  the  deep  sea  lead,  and  the  expediency  of  having  anchors  and  ca- 
bles ready  for  immediate  use,  cannot  be  too  often  urged,  or  too  often  repeated. 
Vessels  well  equipped  and  perfect  in  gear,  with  anchors  stowed,  as  in  the  middle  of 
the  Atlantic  ocean,  have  been  wrecked  in  moderate  weather,  and  so  frequently, 
that  such  gross  idleness  cannot  be  too  much  reprobated,  and,  ve  may  add,  toO 
fully  exposed.^ 

*  Inttanees.  A  valuable  coppered  ship,  with  light  airs  of  wind,  drifted  on  the  rocks,  al- 
though the  fishing  lines  were  in  use  at  the  time,  the  breakers  heard,  and  the  depth  known. 
In  the  last  extremity,  a  kedge  anchor  was  let  go.  The  ship  bilged,  and  the  passengers 
were  landed. 

On  a  point,  from  which  soundings  gradually  deepen  to  nearly  40  miles,  a  large  coppered 
(hip  ran ;  and,  having  landed  bar  passengers,  was  sold  as  usual,  for  the  benejit  of  the  un- 
denoritert.  These  are  but  two  out  «f  many.  Some  appear  almost  incredible ;  but  the 
authority  places  the  facts  beyond  doubt. 

CorbeiCs  Storm  in  the  Bay  of  Fundy.    The  following  is  not  unw«)ttby  of  a  teaman^ 

80 


634 


BLUNT's  AMERIOAir  COAST  PILOT. 


As  the  TIDES  are  most  particularly  to  be  attended  to,  we  shall  attempt  a  de< 
scription  of  them  in  the  first  instance,  before  we  proceed  to  that  of  the  coast,  and 
the  consequent  sailing  directions.  The  tide  about  Cafe  Sable,  has  been  ex- 
plained in  page  620.  From  Cape  Sable  townrd  the  IScal,  Mud,  and  Tusket-bald 
isles;  the  flood  sets  to  the  northwestward,  at  the  rate  of  from  two  to  three  miles  in 
an  hour :  in  the  channels  of  these  isies  its  rate  increases  lo  four  oi  Ave  miles.  At 
the  Seal  and  Mud  islands  the  ebb  runs  E.  by  S.  S.  E.  and  south;  varying,  how- 
ever,  with  the  figure  of  the  lands,  and  the  direction  of  the  wind. 

On  the  South  Seal  island^  the  Governor  of  Nova  Scotia  has  authorized  two  men 
to  settle,  on  condition  that  they  should  do  all  thai  is  practicable  to  render  assis- 
tance to  a.iipwrecked  mariners.  The  south  end  of  the  island  bears  W.  by  N. 
from  Cape  Sable,  distant  about  7  leagues,  between  them  there  are  17  fathoms. 
About  9||  miles  S.  ||  ii'..  from  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  South  Seal  isle,  and  W.  7 
leagues  from  Cape  Sable,  there  is  a  rock  above  watei,  which  appears  to  be  very 
smooth  ;  between  this  rock  and  the  South  Seal  islands,  there  are  9  fathoms.  Oft' 
the  west  side  of  the  island  there  are  two  small  rocky  islands;  between  them  and 
the  Seal  island  there  are  2  and  3  fathoms. 

Between  the  south  and  the  north  Senl  islands,  there  is  a  channel  of  about  2^ 
miles  wide,  with  15  fathoms  in  it.  In  going  through  this  channel,  you  should 
keep  i  !<arer  to  the  south,  than  to  the  north  island,  because  there  is  a  shoal  lies  off 
abou^  three  quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  north  island,  on  which  there  are  H  fa- 
thoms.    The  course  through  this  channel  is  about  northwest. 

The  tiannet  rock  lies  13  miles  N.  |  W.  from  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  South  Seal 
island,  and  8  miles  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  from  Cape  Fourchu.  About  5  miles  W.  ^  S. 
from  the  Gannet  rock,  14  miles  N.  N.  W.  1^  W.  irom  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  South 
Seal  island,  and  11  miles  S.  W.  ^  S.  from  Cape  Fourchu,  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks, 
which  appears  about  half  ebb.  Between  the  South  Seal  inland  and  the  Gannet 
rock,  there  are  from  8  to  2U  fathoms ;  between  the  Gannet  and  Cape  Fourchu  there 
are  23,  28,  10,  and  14  fathoms. 

From  tine  Tusket-bald  isles  the  tide  flows  to  the  northward,  taking  the  direction 
of  the  shui  J,  past  Cape  St.  Mary  ;  thence  N.  N  W.  towards  Bryer's  island.  The 
floou,  thel^:fore,  sets  but  slowly  up  St.  Mary's  bay,  yet  with  increasing  strength  up 
the  Ba>  of  Fun<'  / ;  still  greater  as  the  bay  narrows  upward  ;  so  that  the  Basin  ol 
Mines  ant*  Chignecto  bay  are  filled  with  vast  rapidity  ;  and  here  the  water  some* 
times  riseiJ  to  the  extrao-dinary  height  of  75  feet.  These  tides  are,  however,  re- 
gular; and  although  th'^  wind,  in  an  opposite  direction,  changes  the  direction  oi' 
the  rippling,  and  sometimes  makes  it  dangerous,  it  has  little  or  no  effect  on  their 
general  courses. 

Between  Bryer's  island  and  the  opposite  northern  coast,  and  for  some  distance 
up  the  bay  to  the  eastward,  the  first  of  the  flood  sets  strong  to  the  northward, 
(nearly  north,)  so  that  it  will  be  extremely  dangerous  for  a  vessel  to  run  in  the 
night  or  thick  weather,  from  any  part  of  the  southern  to  the  northern  coast,  with- 
out making  a  large  allowance  for  the  set  of  the  tide,  and  keeping  the  lead  con- 
stantly going.  The  ship  Jaseur  was  nearly  ashore,  having  been  set  by  this  tido  in 
a  fog  8A  miles  in  3  houis  and  10  minutes. 

His  B.  M.  ship  Argus,  capt.  Aiabin,  sailed  from  Musquase  harbour  at  high  wa- 
ter, and  made  the  following  courses  and  distance*,  viz  :  S.  by  W,  A  W.  HO  miles: 
S.  W.  i  W.  30  miles ;  S.  by  W.  30  miles ;  and  S.  S  E.  30  miles,  which  took  her 
within  sight  of  the  Seal  islands,  and  clear  of  the  bay. 

notice :  <*  When  1  Was  about  •ijihteen,  I  was  on  board  a  little  sloop  in  tlie  Bay  of  FuriHy. 
A  terrible  Morm  arose  at  nightfali ;  my  comrndef,  all  '>ut  four  or  five  nf  ii8,  who  were  to 
assist  the  sailnra,  were  shut  rinwn  beiow  ;  the  wind  dashed  thn  vrsspI  Hbout,  and  tossrd  it 
like  a  cork;  the  thunrler  was  iremendoui  ;  the  night  was  dark  as  pitch,  except  when  the 
lightning  came  to  show  us  the  horrid  rocks  and  breakers  with  which  we  were  surrounded. 
In  the  midst  nf  this  scene,  with  his  bnoni  carried  awny,  his  mast  snnpt  off  at  the  top,  anJ 
half  his  tackle  torn  to  ribbons,  the  captain,  whose  name  was  Whitmokb,  stood  upon  tlie 
deck,  calling  out,  every  now  and  then,  in  a  loud  and  cheerful  vnicei  *  Sleadi/  she  noti^  my 
bojfs!*  This  took  from  us,  who  were  ignorant  young  soldieis,  all  idea  of  danger  to  oiii' 
lives,  and  made  ui  able  to  abey  his  orders ;  but  when  the  storm  was  over  the  next  mornin;;, 
and  «re  had  happily  escaped,  he  smiled  and  told  us,  that  he  had  expected  every  moment  to 
go  to  the  bottom.  We  are  now  nut  in  such  peril.  The  i>toim  has  abated  in  its  fury;  h"' 
'  steadj/'  ii  still  tha  word."  , 


TheL 

as  the  S. 

west  of  t 

the  rocks 

great  rapi 

islands,  tl 

particular! 

Ships  n 

constantly 

and  shoalj 

count  of  ti 

tention  is  i 

attend  a  w. 

When  ol 

tw  to  makf 

Wght-house 

than  to  th( 

Passaquddy 

M.  des  B 

napolis  Ro) 

and  there  is 

Moegeue's  I 

gales  blow  v 

and  as  sudd( 

.  "  The  spri 

tides  rise  fr 

Moegenes  hi 

1«  o'clock. 

The  COA 

which  hears 

lies  in  latitu 

miles  in  leng 

vated  30  feet 

position  for  s 

end  lies  the  1 

name  was  los 

westward  fioi 

alarming  aspe 

causing  a  viol 

the  DeviPs  Hi, 

Mud  Islks, 

islands.     The 

island ;  betwe 

the  distance  o 

from  10  to  15 

The  course 

islands,  are  N. 

falls,  of  from  i 

tides.     The  no 

The  opposite  s 

The  TusKE 

northward  of  i 

Some  of  them 

among  them. 

Jock;  the  lati 

Barres  as  in  lati 

At  about  two  m 

on  which  the  Of 

this  danger,  whi 

"»«  Gannet. 


M.LUNt'8  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


635 


a  de- 
It,  and 
en  ex- 
it-bald 
liles  in 

»8.      At 

»,  how- 

wo  men 
!!  as»is- 
by  N. 
a  thorns. 
id  W.  7 
be  very 
OS.  Off 
[lem  and 

about  2i 
II  should 
a  lies  off 
ate  3  fa- 

nuth  Seal 

,W.  iS. 
the  South 
B  of  rocks, 
16  Gannet 
rcbu  there 

B  direction 

and.    The 

[rength  uy 

Basin  ot 

iter  some- 

wever,  re- 

rection  ot 

It  on  their 

le  distance 
lorthwaril, 
run  in  tbe 
>A»t,  witli- 
lead  con- 
^his  tido  in 

It  high  wa- 
30  miles; 
look  her 


■  of  Funriy. 
[•1)0  were  to 
L(]  tossfd  it 
It  when  the 
lurrounded. 
le  top,  BiiJ 
Id  upon  llie 

L«r  tooiir 
[t  morning) 
I  moment  tu 

ifiuy;  !"'■ 


The  Dangers  about  Grand  Manan  have  been  distinguished  by  wrtcks  as  musfa 
as  the  S.  W.  coasts  of  Nova-Scotia ;  and  the  best  passage  is  therefor*  on  th» 
west  of  that  island.  Here  the  tides  course  regularly  and  strongly ;  but  among 
the  rocks  and  ledges  on  the  S.  E.,  they  are  devious,  embi::rrassing,  and  run  with 
great  rapidity.  At  the  Bay  of  Passamaquoddy,  from  the  S.  E.  land  to  the  White 
islands,  the  flood  strikes  across  with  great  strength ;  and  in  light  winds  must  be 
particularly  guarded  against. 

Ships  navigating  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  have  to  encounter  an  atmosphere  almost 
constantly  enveloped  in  dense  fogs;  tides  setting  with  great  rapidity  over  the  rocks 
and  shoals  with  which  it  abounds,  and  a  difliculty  of  obtaining  anchorage  on  ac> 
count  of  the  depth,  so  that  under  these  circumstances,  the  most  unremitting  at- 
tention is  requisite  to  prevent  the  dl^sastrous  consequences  which  must  necessarily 
attend  a  want  of  kno«vledge  and  caution. 

When  off  Cape  Sable,  with  a  westerly  wind,  and  destined  for  the  bay,  it  is  bet- 
ter to  make  the  coast  of  the  United  States  about  the  Skuttock  hills  and  Titmanan 
light-house,  4s  you  can  pass  with  greater  safety  to  the  westward  of  Grand  Manan 
than  to  the  eastward,  having  also,  if  necessary,  sheltei  in  Petit  river,  MathiaSf 
Passaquddy,  Etang,  Beaver  harbour,  &c. 

M .  des  Barres  says,  ''  ships  bound  up  the  Bay  of  Fundy  to  St.  John's,  or  An- 
napolis Royal,  should  take  a  pilot  at  Halifax,  as  the  tides  in  this  bay  are  very  rapid, 
and  there  is  no  anchoring  ground  until  you  reach  Harbour  Delute,  or  L*£tang,  or 
Moegene's  bay.  In  the  bay,  the  weather  is  frequently  very  foggy,  and  the  S.  C. 
gales  blow  with  great  violence  for  twelve  or  fourteen  hours,  then  shift  to  the  N.  W. 
and  as  suddenly  blow  as  violently  from  the  opposite  quarter. 

"  The  spring  tides  in  the  Bay  of  Fundy  rise  to  SO  feet  perpendicular,  and  neap* 
tides  rise  from  HO  to  Si  feet;  they  flow  on  full  and  change,  at  St.  John's, 
Moegenes  bay,  Annapolis,  Harbour  Delute,  L'E'tung,  and  Grand  Manan  island,  at 
IX  o'clock.     The  tides  set  nearly  along  shore." 

The  COASTS,  ISLANDS,  &c. — The  southernmost  point  of  Sbai.  Island, 
which  bears  from  the  ledge  of  Cape  Sable  nearly  \V.  N.  W.  ^  West,  5^  leagues, 
lies  in  latitude  43°  iT,  and  longitude  65°  50'  This  island  is  more  than  two 
miles  in  length,  N.  and  S.  The  southern  part,  covered  with  scrubby  trees,  is  ele- 
vated SO  feet  above  the  sea.  This,  Mr.  Lockwood  has  observed,  is  an  excellent 
position  for  a' light  house.  At  two  miles  and  seven  tenths  soutli  from  the  south 
end  lies  the  Blonde,  a  lock,  uncovered  at  low  water,  on  which  the  frigate  iti*  that 
name  was  lost  in  1777.  Close  around  it  are  from  7  to  10  fathoms.  At  a  mils 
westward  from  the  Blonde,  are  heavy  and  dangerous  overfalls,  which  present  an 
alarming  aspect ;  4  miles  north  from  these  is  a  bed  of  shoal  ground  of  16  feet, 
causing  a  violent  ripple.  Off  the  west  side  of  the  island  is  the  rocky  islet,  called 
the  Devils  limb,  which  may  at  all  times  be  seen. 

Mud  Ulks,  sometimes  called  the  North  Seals,  consisi  of  Ave  low  rugged 
islands.  The  soatherninust  is  situated  at  S^  miles  from  the  N.  R.  part  of  Seal 
isldnd  ;  between  is  a  passage  fit  for  any  ship,  but  there  are  overfalls  of  18  feet  at 
the  distance  of  a  short  mile  from  the  southern  Mud  island.  In  the  channel  are 
from  10  to  Id  fathoms. 

The  cotirse  and  distance  to  pass  from  Cape  Sable  to  between  the  Seal  and  Mud 
islands,  are  N.  W.  by  W.  7  leagues.  In  this  track  may  be  found  several  over- 
fails,  of  from  15  to  7  fathoms,  bottom  of  gravel,  which  break  violently  in  spring- 
tides. The  north  end  of  Seal  island  is  bold  to  one  cable's  length,  10  to  7  fathoms. 
The  opposite  side  has  a  shoiil  brink,  on  which  a  ship  of  war  struck  in  1796. 

The  TusKKT  BaLd  Islks,  or  TTdskets,  is  the  group  or  cluster  lying  to  the 
northward  of  the  Mud  isles,  and  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  entinnce  of  Tusket  river. 
Some  of  them  aie  of  considerable  size,  and  there  are  many  shoals  and  ledges 
among  them.  On  the  west  of  these  isles  are  Grkcn  Island  and  the  Oannkt 
Rock.;  the  latter,  36  feet  above  the  sea  at  high  water,  is  M}up<i)t  by  M.  dea 
Barres  as  in  latitude  43"  40'  40",  and  longitude  i\Q^  a',  and  is  also  before  described. 
At  about  two  fi\Mes  from  it,  on  the  S.  W.  is  a  ledge  that  appears  at  half  ebb,  and 
on  which  the  Opossum  brig  struck,  in  1810.  Other  vessels  have  been  injured  by 
this  danger,  which  has  i)een  heretofore  represented  to  lie  at  4  miles  W.  by  N.  from 
the  Qannet, 


636 


BtUNt  S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


'PvBNico.  This  harbour,  little  known,  is  a  very  good  one ;  it  is  easy  of  access, 
vad  conveniently  situated  for  vessels  bound  to  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  which,  in  dis- 
tress, may  here  find  supplies  as  well  as  shelter.  From  the  south  end  of  Seal  isl- 
and, already  described,  to  the  entrance  of  Pubnico,  the  bearing  and  distance  are 
N.  E.  i  E.  13  miles.  The  depths  between  vary  from  iO  to  16  fatlioms,  andthence 
to  12  and  7  fathoms,  up  to  the  beach,  the  proper  anchorage  for  a  stranger ;  on  the 
western  side,  above  the  beach,  is  a  ledge,  partly  dry  at  low  water.  The  total  po- 
pulaiion  of  Pubnico,  in  iai7,  was  £85  persons,  children  nicluded. 

On  sailing  towards  Pubnico  you  pass  on  the  west  of  John'^  ishnd,  which  lies 
two  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  harbour,  and  the  north  side  of  which  affords 
good  shelter  during  a  S.  K.  gale.  Small  vessels  lie  along  the  beach,  forming  the 
eastern  part  of  this  island. 

From  the  entrance  of  Pubnico,  a  course  W.  N.  W.  j^  W.  4  leagues,  leads  clear 
to  the  southward  of  the  Tusket  bald  isles.  On  this  course,  care  must  be  taken  to 
avoid  the  Soldier's  Ledge,  bare  at  half  ebb,  which  lies  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  nor- 
thern Mud  island. 

Cafe  Fouechu,  or  the  Forked  Cape,  which  lies  accordin!<  to  M.  des  Barres, 
in  latitude  43°  51'  30",  longitude  66°  10'  80,"  is  very  remarkable,  being  rocky, 
barren,  and  high.  Within  this  cape  is  the  harbour  of  Yarmouth,  which  is  small 
but  safe.  Off* the  entrance,  S.  by  W.  <|  W.  lies  the  Bagshot,  a  blind  rock,  which 
is  dry  at  low  water,  and  runs  shoal  nearly  half  a  mile  to  the  southward.  In  sail- 
ing into  the  harbour  you  may  pass  on  either  side  of  it  1  here  are  other  rocks  in 
the  entrance,  and  the  fair  way  in  is  on  the  eastern  shore,  till  opposite  the  point 
or  isthmus  on  that  side.  At  the  top  of  the  latter  stands  the  battery,  and  under 
its  lee,  or  to  the  northward,  is  the  anchorage,  with  good  ground,  in  6  or  5  fathoms. 

Above  the  anchorage  is  the  town  of  Yarmouth,  which  contained,  with  its  envi- 
rons, S,2S7  persont  in  1816. 

S.  j^  W.  from  Cape  Fourchu  is  Point  Jegogan  ;  the  land  between  is  low,  and 
forms  a  deep  indent.  Within  the  point  is  the  little  harbour  of  Jebooue,  which  is 
^oal,  and  frequented  only  by  the  coasters.  The  lands  hereabout  are  good,  of 
moderate  height,  and  well  settled. 

With  Cape  Fourchu  bearing  S.  E.  |  E.  (E.  S.  E.  true)  13  miles  distant,  lies 
the  Lurcher,  a  sunken  ledge,  of  12  feet  at  low  water,  covering  an  area  of  about 
three  acres.  From  the  Gannet  rock  to  this  ledge,  the  bearing  and  distance  arc 
N.  N.  W.  i  W.  19i  miles;  and,  from  the  Lurcher  to  Cape  St.  Mary,  N.  E  i 
N.  19  miles.  Between  Cape  Fourchu  and  the  Lurcher  are  £8,  3K,  and  14  fathoms 
ef  water,  and  between  the  Lurcher  and  bryer's  island,  there  are  from  17  to  4i; 
fathoms. 

The  TRiiriTT  Ledob,  another  reef,  lies  S.  W.  5  W.  6^  miles  from  Cape  St. 
Ulary,  and  N.  by  W.  i  W.  17  miles  from  Cape  Fourchu.  1  his  danger  covers  a 
space  of  more  than  half  an  acre,  and  three  small  rucks  upon  it  are  seen  at  low 
tides.  The  stream  sets  rapidly  over  it.  The  depth  to  a  mile  aroimd,  is  from  IS 
to  15  fathoms. 

Between  Cape  Fourchu  and  Trinity  ledge,  there  are  from  12  to  24  fathoms; 
between  the  ledge  and  Cape  St.  Mary,  there  are  18  fathoms;  between  the  former 
and  Bryer's  island  there  are  42  fathoms ;  and  along  the  shore  between  Cape  Four- 
chu and  Cape  St.  Mary,  there  are  1 1  and  12  fathoms.  Cape  St.  Mary  bears  frotit 
Cape  Fourchu  N.  by  E.  |  E.  distant  16  miles. 

SouNDiKoa  towar-^s  the  Bay  of  Fundh.  In  the  ofling,  between  Seal  island 
and  Cape  St.  Mary,  the  soundings  extend  to  a  great  distance,  as  shown  by  tho 
charts ;  but  W.  of  Kryer's  island,  and  near  the  Manan  ledges,  are  60,  80.  and  100 
fathoms,  at  the  distance  of  three  or  four  miles.  Here,  therefore,  the  lead  should 
be  kept  constantly  going. 

Brter's  Island  is  of  small  extent.  On  its  western  side  is  aiight-house;  but 
His  so  mean  a  one,  and  has  heretofore  been  so  badly  kept,  that  it  is  by  no  means  to 
be  depended  on.     The  light  is  about  92  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

On  this  islaiui,  the  ship  Tiafalgar,  of  Hull,  whs  Init  25lh  ot  July,  j817,  at  about  hnlf 
past  eight  in  the  evening.  The  ship,  bound  for  S(.  Johns,  hud  been  running  up  ail  the 
day  ;  the  weather  being  thick,  could  not  see  any  thing.  •«  At  »even,  P.  M.  hove  the  ship 
to,  with  her  head  to  the  westward,  thinking  we  were  well  over  to  the  westward,  sounding 
fn  40  fathortit ;  the  tide  ran  with  great  strength;  and,  before  we  could  see  the  land,  we 
Htftnl  itn  9itf  fgainst  the  rocks ;  got  sail  upon  the  ship ;  but  being  to  closer  the  (trong  tide 


«LUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


««  us  upon  .he  rock,     „  ,  •     .  -'  riLOT.  g^^ 

«ff.  bu.  ill  ,0  DO  p"u7po8.    A^."^  '"«''  '^'^^^  '"hen  we  ,o.  on 

'^hich  wen.  thSgh^Cin'r  '"*'""*'''  '^'i^  ^vasS.^'i ,??''""  ""'  *  ''"'8*  *«  heave  her 

Sri""*''  '^'"'=''  »^e'e«ake„'.oS.  Jl^  »'"^'''^«^'  -'-e  s^^^^^^^  *"hr„%Mht 

"'""a.  """•  "'  »».  Jnhiii,  to  be  soJfi.  th*r-  t    ^  'aoriftl,  and  h  uar.  of  th* 

head  of  the  Bay  of  Fund/!        "^  "'^"'  "^ich  discha  !p  ,k         f"'  ^^'^^  tides, 
at  the  same  time  fh«  <^  ./'  *'®  ^«nt^eied  navieabJp      i.    ^    'hemseives  about  the 

ed  the  ^/acyfc  i?ocA      R-.    '    *""  '''^  *""th  point  of  Rrv-r»   •  . 
»n'les  JV.  W.  A  W  f    ^"*««'»  't  and  the  island  t.rLy®''  "'^"'^'  »  a  rock,  call- 
N.  W.  Ledge?    Th'T.l^' .""T^  entrance  of  Gr^ndp' " '^°^^'    ^t  about  tS 
«ho.iId  not  b^e  aHemnted  h'v' "  '^""'^  '''^'*^««»  "  and  Brie^'??f ' '.'  \'"«'''  ''""^d  the 

fathom., of  water:  and  on !^  ^  f  "^  '*'«  ^ay,  lies  a  rockv  h  '^'o««  ""der  them, 
muddy  bottom     Thl  ^*'*'  ^"'e  of  which  are  ohf/i^  ^'*"'^'  *"h  4  and  4* 

i"hoal,and  .^^hi^hasTn'"''  "^  '''^  "^-  «iss  boo  o„  tt  °'  't  '"**  '^  ^*^^o'"» 
boo  lies  the  Sandy  c?»'vV  Jf  ^^'^  '^''^""el  of  2  fatSis  wate/°"n  "^" ''^  "^«  ^V, 
«"d,  and  be  sheltered  fm.!in     '"f"'^'  " ''«"  "  blows  h^rdr;.  ^^'P°"'*  »°  Sissi 

JJe  ba>  ;  one  at  each  e .^o  lI"'^-  •  F""'''  "«  two  ptsl?onf  h^"'  ?''*'^  °» 
the  second  the  Petit  pTL  ""«  "*'and.     The  firit  i,  n  If  T  ?"**  "°"*'  S'de  of 

"orth  from  the  exuemh^  o^^f '  ?«  ^""'"  ^nS  o?  G.an'd  L'f  "'^  ^l?*^'''  »"<» 
fathoms.  The  Petit  p/  ^^''®  ^'-  ^^»y  ;  between  .^r*-  ""'^^^  ''"  »  ""les 
Passage.     This  i!  I      "^S*'  '^  '^ree  leagues  ?o Vh!         I  ^'°"'  ^^  to  30  and  a  '      • 

northern  entrance  l; J    i.'.J/  *^'*''^*  ^i^e  bold   to      n,.  \»      P*'''  ^"'^  ^as  from  20 

of  the  strea.!  rS  "  de  It  ?^^'  ^  — '-  "  pl.^'ce  forv;.'?"'  '•'^«-  "««'  the 

«-i"P  can  sten,  7  '"'''  '^'""  ^"^  -  -Pi<'i>,  that  w  l^^  ^esS  le 'h'"  '"  ''"* 

The  coast,  Uoin  the  sm.fh        .     .  '°"' ■*  t-'esh  leadmg  wind, 

-vcept  ..ear     he  G?anr  P""''^  ''^'S^' ^    ''«ir  top    a  rSutr^^  "h.ch  is  i  range 

Ecr'?o^"^':';,^rif  °  ^«''^"' '  The^sTorfon^llh^^rr '  ''"^  '"  '^'^^^'^  ^^O  45' 
paduallyVaTn  ideTble  b^T"  ***''''  ^'-age"  heels'  T^"'  "•^.  «"''"  '-" 
by  a  steep  fall.     He/e    'o„  h^*^!'  ?  ^''^  «"»^a'^«e  of  ,he  .n,   "Jl^'  ""    ''*"^  r»*ns 

'OfHthomswae^  'Poin?^  "'^ ''^'^o    ^P   t  aLai2  ^  r^'«"'  »hore. 

^horon  the  east  s  de  oHl  e  ba:^',:"""  "''  '''"^"  «'-' ^iSoms"'  t^'  '"'  ^« '" 

^"'tl'.n  the  distance  of  hi?  '  °/  •"""  "P  'o^^ards  Gmt  i,?.    i*     ?'"P'  '"•'»3'  an- 

'ela.boardshc;;r„:if;'^,«'';'^^^^^^^^^^^^ 

=e^H^"^i=^^  ".--  — u. 

"g"«  to  the  westward  ire?''".'""''  ^"  «PP'o«clnng the  g"  '  «,  «";  °"  «'   '^O  feot 

dangerous.    The  I  LSt, ;£.!•"'.'  "^"'^'^  "'"'•'«••  fefi  .res^  lnHl^""'^'"■  »  "'>'e,  2* 


«38 


BLVNt'g   AMERICAN   OOAST   PILOT. 


iontljr  from  the  tummitt  of  the  hills.  The  tide  hurries  through  the  gut  with  great 
force.  There  is  not  anchorage,  except  very  close  in  shore,  near  the  outer  western 
point.  In  some  places  the  depth  is  froin'40  to  80  fathums;  and  in  entering  Anna- 
poliis  basin,  the  srenery  is  inexpressibly  beautiful.  The  farms  are  becoming  valua- 
ble and  extensive.  The  herring  fishery  is  a  source  of  great  profit ;  the  tisti  are  so 
well  cured  that  the  merchants  of  Halifax  and  St.  Jotins  give  ttieui  a  decided  pre- 
ference for  foreign  markets." 

AiiAAPOLii  to  Basin  uw  Mi.ves.  From  the  Gut  of  Annapolis  up  the  bay  to 
Capo  Split,  the  coast  continues  straight,  and  nearly  in  the  same  direction,  with  a 
few  rocky  cliffs  near  the  gut,  and  many  banks  of  red  earth  under  higfi  lands,  which 
appear  very  even.  In  the  gut,  leading  into  the  Basin  of  iMines,  from  Cape  Split 
to  Cape  Bloniedon,  and  from  C»pe  D'Or,  on  the  north  side,  to  Partridge  island, 
the  land  rises  aln.'^n  perpendicular  from  the  shore  to  a  very  great  height.  Be> 
tween  Cupe  Blonuidon  and  Partridge  island  here  is  a  great  depth  of  water ;  and 
the  stream  of  the  current,  even  at  the  time  c!  neap  tides,  does  not  run  less  than  5 
or  6  fathoms. 

Cape  D'Or,  and  Cape  Chignecto,  are  high  lands,  with  very  steep  cliffs  of  rocks, 
«nd  red  earth,  and  deep  water  close  under  them.  You  have  nearly  the  same  kind 
of  shore  to  the  head  of  Chignecto  bay,  where  very  extensive  flats  of  mud  and 
quicksand  are  left  dry  at  low  water.  The  tides  coine  in  a  bo-t,  and  rush  in  with 
great  rapidity ;  they  are  known  to  flaw,  at  the  equinoxes,  fron  6Q  to  Ibftetptrptn* 
dicutar. 

The  Isle  of  Haute,  or  Hauto,  ir  remarkable  for  the  great  height  and  steepness  of 
the  rocky  cUlfs  which  seem  to  overhang  on  the  west  side. 

Tht;  Basin  of  Mines,  atid  Thigiiecto  bay,  are  now  surrounded  with  valuable  set- 
tlements, and  abound  in  coal,  plaster,  limestone,  and  •  ther  minerals. 


North  Coast  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy, 

The  township  of  St.  Martins,  on  the  north  shore,  to  the  N.  W  of  Cape  Chig- 
necto, is  thinly  inhabited  :  the  land  in  the  neighbourhood  is  moderately  good,  but 
is  much  broken  with  steep  declivities,  &cc.  The  weather  here  is  commonly  hurried, 
the  wind  changeable  and  blustering,  with  limited  and  short  intervals  of  sunshine. 
From  Quako,  at  about  5  leagues  westward  of  St.  Martins,  to  the.  harbour  of  St. 
Johns,  the  land,  as  already  described,  is  high;  the  inteiior  hills  rise  in  easy  iiie- 
qualities,  but  the  ravines  of  ihe  cliffs  appear  deep  and  gloomy  ;  the  indents  have 
beaches ;  and  Black  river,  at  12  miles  west  of  Quako,  although  dry  fioin  half 
tide,  i*  a  safe  inlet  for  a  small  vessel. 

At  2j^  leagues  south  from  Quako  is  a  dangerous  shoal  of  gravel,  called  the 
QuAKO  L£DOE.  It  extends  iO.  S.  E.  and  W  IN.  VV.  about  two  miles  by  half  a  auk 
in  breadth.  The  widest  and  shoalest  part  is  to  the  westward,  and  vessels  have  fre- 
quently grounded  upon  it.     The  bank  shows  at  half  tide. 

^uako  ledge  has  several  irregular  patches  of  rocks  lying  off  its  N.  E.  side ;  the 
ledge 'shows  itself  at  half  tide,  and  dries  for  about  100  yards,  having  but  12  feet  on 
it  at  high  water,  common  tides;  at  half  a  mile  to  the  N  E.  ihe  eddies  with  the 
flood  tide  are  strong  and  numerous,  the  ship's  head  going  nearly  round  the  com- 
pass in  the  space  of  half  an  hour  ;  the  ebb  is  a  true  tide,  and  sets  in  a  VV.  S.  W. 
direction  towards  the  ledge  ;  the  soundings  ^re  from  7  to  14  fathoms  at  about  two 
cables'  length  all  around,  but  they  shoal  more  gradually  from  the  N.  E. ;  the  night 
tides  here,  and  generally  through  the  hay,  are  highest;  at  iSt.  John's  they  are  su 
du'ing  the  summer,  but  the  contrary  during  the  winter  months,  or  between  tin 
equinoxes. 

The  Harbour  of  St.  John.— The  entrance  of  this  harbour  lies  N.  }  VV.  ll|! 
leagues  from  the  entrance  of  Annapolis,  and  may  be  distinguished  by  a  light- 
house, which  stands  on  Partridge  island.  The  entrance  into  the  river,  2  inib 
above  the  town  of  St.  John,  is  over  the  Falls,  a  narrow  channel  of  80  yards  in 
hreadtht  and  about  400  long.    This  passage  is  straight,  and  a  ridge  of  rockMn 


extends  aci 

flowing  here 

higher  than 

a  to  8  feet  li 

falls,  one  on 

the  ivaier  of 

'  and  this  oppt 

it  is  impassa 

After  you 

gullet,  which 

coutses,  and 

you  enter  a  f 

length,  enteri 

The  river  o 

whence  it  con 

Jor  vessels  of  J 

the  beginning 

falls  are  absoli 

rise  to  their  le 

Point  Maspe 

longitude  65° 

Directions 

HOUSE — Hhei 

tinguished  fron 

file  intelligence 

city  of  St  Johr 

any  other  obstri 

you  m.iy  sail  in 

tween  the  N.  E. 

water,  mud  and 

the  three  hills  ir 

and  the  house  oi 

"Should  the 

means)  attempt  i 

the  bar,  as  both 

(iry  at  low  water 

snow  is  dissolvet 

"OntheNovs 

50,  60,  70,  80,  to 

<Jiaw  to  the  nori 

some  small  shells 

^dge  off  to  the 

soundings." 


BLUNrS    AMERICAN   C0A9T  PILOT. 


669 


I  great 
estern 
Anna- 
valua- 
are  so 
id  pre- 

I  bay  to 
with  a 

J,  which 
pe  Split 
)  island, 
It.  B»- 
[sr ',  and 

II  than  5 

[)f  rocks, 
line  kind 
mud  and 
h  in  with 
tt  ptrptn- 

Bepness  of 

luable  set- 


Jape  Chig- 
y  good,  but 
ily  hurried, 
f  sunshine. 
)Our  of  St. 
1  easy  ine- 
dents  have 
fvom  half 

^called  the 
[half  a  niilf 
lis  have  fte- 

].  sidf,  the 

(t  12  feet  on 

3S  with  the 

U  the  com- 

w.s.vv. 

It  about  t«o 

the  night 

hhey  are  so 

jetween  ih» 

.  I  VV.  Hi 

[by  a  hght- 
let.  2  inil'S 
1 80  vard*'" 
1  of  rocks  50 


extends  across  it  as  to  retain  the  fresh  water  of  the  river.  The  common  tides 
flowing  here  about  20  feet,  at  low  water ;  the  waters  of  the  river  are  about  IC  feet 
higher  than  the  water  nf  the  sea ;  and  at  high  water,  the  water  of  tKb  sea  is  from 
a  to  8  feet  higher  than  the  waters  of  .ne  river;  so  that  in  every  tide  there  are  two 
falls,  one  outward,  and  one  inward.  The  only  time  of  passing  this  place  is  when 
the  water  of  the  river  is  level  with  the  water  of  the  sea,  which  is  twice  in  a  tide; 
and  this  opportunity  of  passing  continues  not  above  ten  minutes ;  at  all  other  times 
it  is  impassaole,  or  extiemely  dangeious. 

After  you  have  passed  through  this  place,  called  the  Falls,  you  enter  into  a 
gullet,  which  is  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide,  and  a  mile  long,  winding  in  several 
coufses,  and  having  about  16  fathoms  in  the  channel.  Having  passed  this  gullet, 
you  enter  a  fine  large  basin,  about  one  mile  and  a  half  wide,  and  seven  miles  in 
length,  entering  int->  the  main  river  of  St.  John. 

The  river  of  St.  John  has  sufficient  depih  of  water  for  large  ships  to  the  falls* 
whence  it  continues  navigable  60  miles  up  to  Fredericton,  the  seat  of  government^ 
for  vessels  of  50  tons.  At  times  of  great  freshets,  which  generally  happen  between 
the  beginning  of  April  and  the  middle  of  May,  from  the  melting  of  the  snow,  the 
falls  are  absolutely  impassable  to  vessels  bound  up  the  river,  as  the  tide  does  not 
rise  to  their  level. 

Point  Maspeck,  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance,  lies  in  latitude  45^  18'  27",  and 
longitude  65°  58'  45". 

Directions  for  St.  John's  Harbour  and  Moegene's  Bat,  by  Mr.  Back- 
house.—W  hen  you  have  made  Moegenes  island,  or  Psitridge  isle,  so  as  to  be  dis- 
tinguished from  the  light-house  on  the  latter  ;  then  make  a  signal  for  a  pilot,  and 
the  intelligence  from  Partridge  island  will  be  immediately  communicated  to  the 
city  of  St  John,  whence  a  pilot  will  join  you.  Should  the  wind  be  contrary,  or 
any  other  obstruction  meet  you.  to  prevent  your  obtaining  the  harbour  that  tjde, 
you  may  sail  in  between  the  S.  W.  end  of  Moegenes  island  and  the  main,  oi  be- 
tween  the  N.  E.  end  and  the  main,  and  come  to  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms  at  low 
water,  mud  and  sandy  bottom.  Mark  for  the  best  anchoring  ground  is,  to  bring 
the  throe  hills  in  the  country  to  the  N.  E.  in  a  line,  in  one  over  Rocky  Point  island, 
and  the  house  on  Moegenes  island  to  beai  S.  E.  by  S.  ^ 

"Should  the  tide  of  ebb  have  taken  placft  at  the  beacon,  you  must  not  (by  any 
means)  attempt  to  gain  the  harbour  thai  tide,  but  wait  the  next  half-flood,  to  go  over 
the  bar,  as  both  sides  of  the  entrance  of  this  harbour  are  nothing  but  sharp  recks, 
dry  at  low  water,  and  the  tide  of  ebb  is  so  rapid  in  the  spring,  when  the  ice  and 
snow  is  dissolved,  that  all  the  anchors  on  board  will  not  hold  the  ship  from  driving. 

"On  the  Nova -Scotia,  side  of  the  Bay^f  Fundy,  your  soundings  will  be  from 
50, 60,  70,  80,  to  95  fathoms ;  stones  like  beans  and  coarse  sand ;  and,  as  you 
diaw  to  the  northward,  the  quality  of  the  ground  will  alter  to  a&^  fine  sand,  and 
some  small  shells  with  black  specks.  Come  no  nearer  than  50  fathoms,  and  as  yon 
6dge  off  to  the  N.  W.  and  W.  N.  W.  you  will  fall  off  the  bank,  and  have  no 
soundings." 


Farther  Directions/or  Sailing  into  St.  John's  Harbour ;  6^  the  aame. 

"When  you  have  passed  Moegene's  island,  e»'ge  iii-shore  towards  Rocky  point, 
until  Moegene's  po  nt  is  in  a  line  over  the  N  W.  corner  of  Moegene's  island  :  sail- 
ing in  between  Rocky  point  and  Partridge  island,  with  these  marks  in  one,  will 
lead  you  in  the  best  water  over  the  bar,  until  you  open  Point  Maspeck  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  low  point  on  Partridge  islana  ;  then  starboard  your  helm,  and  edge 
towards  Thompson's  point,  until  the  red  store,  at  the  south  end  of  St.  John's,  is  in 
a  line  over  the  beacon ;  keep  them  in  one  until  you  pass  the  beacon  at  the  distance 
of  a  ship's  breadth  ;  then  haul  up  N.  N.  W.  up  the  harbour,  keeping  the  block- 
house at  the  upper  part  of  the  harbour  open  to  the  westward  of  the  king's  store, 
situate  close  to  the  water  side,  which  will  lead  you  in  mid-channel,  up  to  the 
^vharfs,  where  you  may  lio  agiound  dry,  at  hall-tide,  and  clean  your  ship'ibottom. 


640 


BLUNT^    AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


or  lie  afloat  in  the  stv.<>ain  at  single  anchor,  with  a  hawser  fast  to  the  posts  of  the 
wharves  on  shore  M.  B.  The  tide  of  flood  here  is  weal(,  but  the  ebb  runs  very  ra- 
pidly all  the  way  down  past  Moegene's  island. 


Remarks  on  SU  John,  &c.  by  Mr.  Lpckvfooda 


The  tides  of  the  river,  at  full  and  change,  flow  till  half  past  11.  The  vertical 
rise  is  18  feet.     Equinocri'il  spring  tides  rise  24  to  28  feet. 

After  the  first  quarter  flood,  the  tide  helow  the  surface  runs  into  the  harbour. 

During  summer  and  the  depth  of  winter,  the  tide  generally  flows  in  at  half  flood. 
In  autumn,  the  river  is  swoln  by  rains,  and  between  the  beginning  of  April  and  the 
m;ddle  of  May,  by  the  melting  of  the  ice,  and  the  quantity  of  snow  that  accumu- 
lates on  the  lands  of  this  vast  navigable  river. 

F/om  these  causes,  the  water  streams  out,  or  seaward,  continually  :  therefore 
vessels  at  that  time  seldom  enter  tlie  harbour  without  *  fresh  leading  wind.  The 
falls  are  then  imp'issable,  as  tkie  tide  does  no^  rise  to  their  level. 

The  body  of  the  river  is  17^  feet  above  low  water-mark.  Consequently  after 
the  tide  has  risen  to  that  height,  the  water  descends,  or  liteially  fal!.^  into  the 
river. 

When  the  tide  has  flowed  twelve  feet,  the  falls  are  smooth,  and  passable  for  SO 
minutes- 

Above  the  falls,  the  tide  rises  4  feet ;  and  at  Majorfleld,  60  miles  in  the  interior, 
it  rises  one  foot  and  a  half. 

After  passing  the  falls,  you  enter  a  gullet,  which  is  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide,  and 
two  miles  long,  winding  in  different  courses,  and  having  16  fathoms  in  the  channel. 
Next  to  this  gullet  is  a  fine  large  basin,  a  mile  and  a  half  wide,  and  8  miles  long, 
entering  the  main  liver. 

There  is  water  suflicient,  except  in  dry  seasons,  for  vessels  of  fifty  tons,  as  higii 
as  Fredericton,  and  in  all  the  branches  of  the  lakes. 

In  the  middle  of  May,  or  earlier  in  favourable  seasons,  the  snow  and  ice  in  the 
country  melting,  make  a  general  oveiflow  in  the  liver,  which,  in  some  years,  rises 
so  high,  as  to  inundate  all  the  low  lands. 

"  The  oveiflowingL  were  measured  in  1765,  by  the  marks  set  up  at  Majorfleld; 
the  water  was  found  to  have  flowed  17  feet  above  the  common  height  of  the  water 
in  summer." 


[Remarks  by  Charles  ^orris,  Esq.] 


The  cit7  of  St.  John  stands  on  an  irregular  descent,  with  a  sotithern  aspect ; 
and,  on  entering  the  liver,  presents  a  picturesque  appearance.  The  river's  mouth 
is  narrow  and  intricate ;  many  accidents  have  happened  to  those  who  have  at- 
tempted the  navigation  without  a  pilot. 

Partridge  island  is  abou*:  2  miles  southward  from  the  city.  It  protects  the  har- 
bour, and,  by  its  light-house,  guides  the  mariner  to  the  place  of  his  destination. 
The  lantern  is  126  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  the  light  tolerably  good. 

Southward  of  Partridge  island,  the  bottom  for  several  miles  is  muddy,  and  the 
depth  gradual,  from  7  to  20  fathoms,  excellent  for  anchoring.  On  the  bar  west 
of  the  island,  the  least  depth  is  10  feet;  but,  eastnard  of  it,  16  feet.  The  an- 
choring depth,  opposite  to  the  city,  is  in  from  22  to  7  fathonis. 

A  break- water  has  been  erected  at  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance,  below  the 
town,  for  the  purpose  of  reducing  the  inset  of  the  sea  into  the  harbour,  especially 
during  a  southern  gale.  Within  the  port,  every  possible  facility  and  convenience 
is  given  to  ships  requiring  repair ;  they  lie  upon  tbe  blocks,  and  undergo  a  tho- 
rough examination,  wifhout  incurring  the  expense,  injury,  and  loss  of  tiine>  oc- 
casioned by  heaving  down,  so  strangely  persisted  in  at  Halifax. 


CAPE  SJ 

which  run  at 
land,  and  you 
weigh  two  ht 
tide  on  the  so 
likely  to  be  c« 
very  strong  b< 
down  to  the  S( 
to  Windsor,  a 
name. 

In  running  i 

south  bearing, 

will  take  you 

low  water  by 

BlufTthe  groui 

with  a  strong  I 

'or  large  ship: 

The  Banks  ant 

is  washed  doi 

spring,  and  by 

The  great  vc 

St.  John's  in  J 

sometimes  to  t 

regularly ;  the 

minium  two  kn^ 

malely  sunk  in 

estimate  the  m; 

part  of  the  undt 

ed  by  sinking  a 

the  current  on  tl 

trary  direction. 

Macy's  Bay,  I 

age  if  bound  to  t 

W.  until  a  large 

for  the  island,  les 

hour  in  7  lathon 

Lapreau,  but  yo 

passage)  while  i;i 

two  islands,  and 

hour,  lies  a  rock, 

Lapreau  is  bold-i 

sea ;  from  thenc( 

If  you  fall  in  w 

N.  five  leagues,  \ 

In  running  fron 

current,  which  se 

Should  you  af 

tonf^e,  bring  Cam 

Will  carry  you  int 

MUSQUASH 

a  depth  of  4  fatho 

Oipper  and  TMUf. 

The  GANNET 

and  led.^es  about  i 

Islands.     .-M,..  L,H 

hght-house,  wliich 

sunken  rocks  in  th 

The  throe  islets, 

or  the  Gannet,  wi 

uiPeeandahalflej 


\i 


\ 


)f  the 
ry  ta- 


rertical 

)OUV. 

f  flood, 
and  the 
ccumu- 

lerefore 
l.    The 

itly  after 
into  the 

ie  for  SO 

interior, 

vide,  and 
channel, 
liles  long, 

s,  as  high 

ice  in  the 
ears,  rises 

[ajorfield ; 
the  water 


In  aspect; 

V's  moutb 

have  at- 

b  the  har- 
lestination. 

good. 

^,  and  the 

I  bar  west 

The  an- 

1  below  the 
I  especially 
Invenience 
rgo  a  tho- 
tim»»  p'^' 


BLUNT'l  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


641 


CAPE  SPLIT.— The  whirlpools  off  Cape  Split  are  dangerous  at  Spring  tides, 
which  run  at  about  9  knots.  If  at  anchor  between  Cape  Sharp  and  Partridge  Is- 
land, find  you  wish  to  proceed  to  Windsor  River,  it  will  be  nscessary  to  get  under 
weigh  two  houis  before  low  water,  in  order  to  get  into  the  stream  of  the  Windsor 
tide  on  the  southern  shore,  otherwise,  unless  with  a  commanding  breeze  a  vessel  is 
likely  to  be  earned  up  with  the  Cobequid  tide,  wiilch  is  the  main  stream,  and  runs 
very  strong  both  flood  and'ebb.  The  Windsor  tide  turns  off  round  Cape  Blow-me- 
down  to  the  southward,  and  then  again  in  divided,  one  p.irt  continuing  its  course  up 
to  Windsor,  and  the  other  forms  the  Cornwallis  tide,  running  up  the  river  of  that 
name. 

In  running  up  Windsor  river,  the  house  on  Horton  Bluff  should  be  kept  in  a 
south  bearing,  and  the  Gap  in  th^hmd  formed  by  Parsborough  river,  north,  thid 
will  take  you  through  the  channel  between  the  flats,  which  cannot  be  passed  at 
low  water  by  a  vessel  drawing  fifteen  feet,  much  before  half  tide.  OffHortoa 
Bluff  the  ground  is  loose  and  slnty,  and  a  ship  will  be  likely  to  dr;ig  her  anchors 
with  a  strong  breeze,  particularly  at  full  and  change  ;  perhaps  it  would  be  better 
for  large  ships  to  moor  across  the  stream,  and  full  one  third  from  the  Bl^ff. 
The  Banks  and  Flats  appear  to  be  composed  of  soft  crumbling  sand  stone,  witich 
is  washed  down  from  the  surrounding  country  in  great  quantities  during  the 
spring,  and  by  accumulating  on  them,  are  constantly  increasing  their  height. 

The  great  volume  of  fresh  water  which  constantly  flows  down  the  harbour  of 
St.  John's  in  April  and  May,  causes  a  continual  ebb  tiflo,  during  that  period, 
sometimes  to  the  depth  of  nearly  5  fathoms,  under  which  the  flood  and  ebb  flow 
regularly;  the  maximum  of  its  velocity  is  about  four  and  a  half  knots,  and  the 
minium  two  knots,  but,  as  the  log  floated  very  deep  in  the  fresi)  water,  and  ulti- 
mately sunk  into  the  salt  water  running  underneath,  it  would  not  be  much  to 
estimate  the  maximum  at  five  knots,  and  the  minium  at  two  and  a  quarter.  The 
part  of  the  under  tide  beginning  at  the  depth  of  nearly  .">  fathoms,  was  ascertain- 
ed by  sinking  a  lead  down  to  that  depth,  when  it  was  carried  the  same  way  as 
the  current  on  the  surface,  but  when  lowered  below  that,  it  was  carried  in  a  con- 
trary direction. 

Macy's  Bay,  between  Point  Lapreau  and  Beaver  harbour,  affords  good  anchor- 
age if  bound  to  the  westward,  having  pnssed  Point  Lapreau  nine  miles  steer  W.  N. 
W.  until  a  large  island  which  lies  N.  W.  from  the  point,  bears  N.  N.  E.  then  run 
for  the  island,  leaving  it  on  the  starboard  hand,  which  will  carry  you  into  the  har- 
bour in  7  fathoms  water,  good  anchorage.  There  is  also  a  small  island  off  Point 
Lapreau,  but  you  leave  both  on  the  starboard  hand  (between  which  there  is  no 
passage)  while  i;unning  into  the  harbour.  Off  the  point  which  lies  opposite  the 
two  islands,  and  which  you  leave  on  the  larboard  hand  in  running  into  the  har- 
bour, lies  a  rock,  always  hare,  about  two  cables'  length  from  the  shore.  Point 
Lapreau  is  bold-to,  but  dangerous  in  dark  weather,  as  it  projects  so  far  into  the 
sea ;  from  thence  io  St.  John's  the  course  is  free  from  danger. 

If  you  fall  in  with  the  Wolves,  and  wish  to  run  for  Macej's  Bay,  run  N.  E.  by 
N.  five  leagues,  which"  will  carry  you  to  the  same  anchorage  as  before. 

In  rumiing  from  Wolf  Islands  to  Macey'a  bay,  allowance  must  be  made  for  the 
current,  which  sets  very  strong  from  E.  by  N.  to  W.  by  S. 

Should  you  after  making  Campo-bello  wish  to  run  for  the  harbour  of  La- 
tonj!,e,  bring  Campo-bello  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  and  run  N.  N.  E.  five  leagues,  whicli 
will  carry  you  into  good  anchorage,  in  5,  6  and  7  fathoms  water. 
,  MUSQUASH  COVE,  twelve  miles  to  the  westward  of  Partridge  Island,  has 
a  depth  of  4  fathoms,  and  has  good  anchorage  at  its  entrance.  The  inlets  called 
Dipper  and  Littk  Dipper,  admit  small  crafts  and  boats  only.    - 

The  GANNET,  a  small  rock,  40  feet  high,  and  having  many  sunken  rocks 
and  ledges  about  it,  stands  at  the  distance  of  four  miles  S.  S.  W.  from  tlie  Three 
Islands.  Mr.  Loekwood  has  obsiirved  that,  this  would  he  a  fine  situation  tor  a 
light-house,  which  would,  be  the  mean  of  saving  many  ships.  Thi;  ledges  and 
sunken  rocks  in  the  vicinity  always  break. 

The  three  islets,  called  the  fVeatern  Seal  Isles,  lie  eight  miles  to  the  W.  by  N. 
of  the  Gannet,  with  the  S.  W.  head  of  Grand  Manan  bearing  E.  N.  E*  about 
three  and  a  kalf  leagues  distant. 

81 


// 


642 


BLUNT  9  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


'  -^-t- 


.  The  Eastern  Coasts  of  Manan  abound  in  iish,  and  the  interior  is  in  a  rapid 
state  of  improvement.  The  soil  is,  in  genera),  good,  and  it  produces  all  the 
species  of  fir,  beech,  birch,  and  maple,  in  size  and  quality  adequate  to  all  pur- 
poses for  ^hich  they  are  generally  used. 

The  Channel  between  Grand,  Manan  and  the  coast  of  Maine  is  from  seven  to 
eight  miles  wide  :  buth  shores  bold,  the  depths  quickly  increasing  on  each  side, 
from  12  to  70  and  75  fathoms;  the  greatest  depth  near  Manan,  where  you  haul 

Suickiy  from  10  to  75.    This  is  the  best  passage  up  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  because 
le  safest,  and  must  advantageous  with  the  prevalent  winds,  which  are  from  the 
westward. 

Bring  Campo  Bello  Island  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  and  you  will  have  SO  fa- 
thoms water,  where  you  may  anchor  and  lie  safe  from  all  wmds. 

[For  Directions  for  sailing  to  the  eastward  of  Campo  Bello,  Sic.  see  Chap.  I. 
>age£l.] 


NOTE. 

Throughout  this  work  the  given  longitude  is  the  longitude  from  Greenwich.  Tht  bear- 
ings and  coures  are  those  by  compass,  unless  where  otherwise  expressed. 


VARIATIONS  BY  COMPASS. 

Halifax  IT©  west,  St.  John's,  New-Brunswick,  about  16°.  Machias  Bay  12°.  Bay  of 
Penobscot,  9°.  Cape  Elizabeth,  8==>.  Portsmouth,  (N.  H.)  7j°'  Salem,  6°.  Boston 
•nd  Cape  Cod,  8°.     New-York  Harbour,  5J°      Ofl'  the  Delaware,  4°  West. 

The  westerly  variatio*  appears  to  cease  between  Cape  Hatteras  and  Cape  Fear,  and,  at 
Savannah,  the  variation  becomes  easterly.  At  the  head  of  the  Matenillo  Bank  it  is  3^^ 
east.  At  the  Day  of  Tortugas,  or  west  end  of  the  Florida  Reef,  it  is  6^  39  E.  in  the  Bay  of 
Spiritu  Santo,  (West  coast  of  Florida)  6° ;  near  the  entrance  of  the  Mississippi  6jo.  At 
Tampico,  8^°  and  at  Vera  Cruz,  9.  East. 

At  Nassau  (New  Povidence)  and  onihe  Bahama  Bank,  the  easterly  variation  is  6^°^  at 
Watling's  Island  5^.  South  end  of  the  Crooked  Islands,  4°  40^.  East  end  of  Cuba  6\^. 
West  end  of  Cuba,  Sjo.  At  Port  Royal,  Jamaica,  6^^.  S.  W.  end  of  Hayti,  6°  Mona- 
Passage,  Porto  Rico,  and  Virgin  Islands,  8^  to  B°.    Anegada  and  Sombrero,  2°  East. 


T 


•  \ 


WINDS  IN 

succession,  evei 

the  air,  is  found 

same  laws  of  gri 

in  every  part:  s 

the  weightier  aii 

an  equal  weight 

The  Wind!  ar 

into  General  and 

the  same  way ;  s 

Wind.    Periodic 

and  sea-breezes 

Erratic  Winds,  ai 

without  regularit 

Winds  are  gen' 

of  the  land,  accor 

position  and  stren 

rarefying  the  atm 

arises,  that  lands, 

It  IS  observed,  gen 

blown  upon  obtiqu 

prevail  in  the  exte 

PERENNIAL  c 

and  in  the  lower  la 

prevail,  which  folI< 

from  the  African  s 

vails  from  the  non 

comes  more  easterl 

ther  to  the  northw 

westward  rarefyin< 

on  the  African  Cos 

'^•le  Perennial 

to  30  degrees  of  lati 

can  side.    Likewisj 

south-cast,  extends 

of  the  ocean. 

The  general  caus 

thus  presents,  insu( 

becoming  successive 

that,  in  the  regions  i 

and  a  current  of  air 

Heat  increases  e 

quantity  of  moisture 

which  produce  a  div 

of  the  tropics  ;  for,  1 

•pecifically  lighter,  th 

Were  the  atmosphi 

«un;  for  it  would  nc 

'«  a  perennial  wind, 

•rom  accidental  caus( 

and  sometimes  light  s 

These  circurostanc 

from  the  limits  of  the 


BLUiNT'S    AUERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


643 


I  rapid 
all  th« 
ill  pur- 

>ven  to 
h  side, 
m  haul 
)ecause 
om  the 

e  SO  fa- 

Jhap.  I. 


T' 


rh«  b«ar- 


CHAP.  Z2JZ. 


WINDS. 

WINDS  IN  GENERAL. — As  the  earth,  by  its  diurnal  rotation  on  its  axis,  presents,  in 
succession,  every  part  of  its  circumference  to  the  sun,  the  heat  of  that  luminary,  by  rarefying 
the  air,  is  found,  to  be  the  chief  cause  of  winds.  For,  as  the  air  is  a  fluids  subjected  to  tha 
same  laws  of  gravitation  as  other  fluids,  it  has  a  constant  tendency  to  preserve  an  equilibrium 
in  eveiy  part :  so  that  if,  by  any  mean,  it  be  rendered  lighter  in  any  one  place  than  another, 
the  weightier  air  will  rush  in  from  every  side,  until  as  much  be  accumulated  as  makes  it  of 
an  equal  weight  with  the  rest  of  the  atmosphere.    These  currents  of  air  are  called  Winds. 

The  Winds  are  divided  into  Perennial,  Periodical,  and  Variable.  They  are  also  divided 
into  General  and  Particular.  Perennial f  or  Constant  Winds,  are  those  which  alv.  s  blow 
the  same  way;  such  is  that  easterly  wind,  between- the  tropics,  commonly  called  the  Trade- 
Wind.  Periodical  Winds  arc  those  which  constantly  return  at  certain  times:  such  are  land 
and  sea-breezes,  blowing  alternately  from  land  to  sea,  and  from  sea  to  land.  Variable,  or 
Erratic  Winds,  are  such  as  blow  now  tHs  way,  now  that,  ind  are  now  up,  now  hushed, 
without  regularity  either  as  to  time  or  place :  such  are  the  winds  prevalent  in  England,  &c. 

Winds  are  generally  found  to  vary  according  to  the  situation  of  land.  For  the  temperature 
of  the  land,  according  to  the  degree  to  ivhich  it  is  heated  by  the  sun,  always  affects  the  dis< 
position  and  strength  of  the  wind.  Thus,  it  is  found,  that  the  heated  land  of  Africa,  by 
rarefying  the  atmosphere,  produces  a  breeze  from  the  sea ;  and  from  this  circumstance  it 
arises,  that  lands,  which  would  otherwise  be  parched  up  or  burnt,  are  rendered  habitable. 
It  is  observed,  generally,  that  the  continental  coasts,  between  the  tropics,  are  almost  always 
blown  upon  obliquely,  from  seaward,  by  winds  whose  course  is  affected  by  the  winds  which 
prevail  in  the  extensive  seas  that  surround  them. 

PERENNIAL  or  TRADE-WIND.— But,  over  extensive  tracks  of  ocean,  remote  from  land, 
and  in  the  lower  latitudes,  or  toward  the  equator,  Perennial  or  Trade- Winds  are  found  to 
prevail,  which  follow  the  course  of  the  sun  :  thus,  on  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  at  about  1 00  leagues 
from  the  African  shore,  between  the  latitudes  of  10  and  26  degrees,  a  constant  breeze  pre- 
vails from  the  north-eastward.  Upon  approaching  the  American  side,  this  N.  £.  wind  be- 
comes more  easterly,  or  seldom  blows  more  than  one  point  of  the  compass  from  the  East,  ei- 
ther to  the  northward  or  southward.  This  appears  to  be  caused  by  the  heated  lands  to  the 
westward  rarefying  the  air,  and  causing  an  indraught  that  way,  as  a  contrary  wind  is  induced 
on  the  African  Coast. 

'''lie  Perennial  or  Trade-Wind,  on  the  American  side  of  the  Atlantic,  extends,  at  times, 
to  30  degrees  of  latitude,  which  is  about  4  degrees  farther  to  the  northward  than  on  the  Afri- 
can side.  Likewise,  on  the  south  of  the  equator,  the  Perennial  Wind,  which  is  here  from  the 
south-cast,  extends  3  or  4  degrees  farther  towards  the  Coast  of  Brazil  than  on  the  opositeside 
of  the  ocean. 

The  general  cause  of  this  wind  is  the  motion  of  the  earth,  in  its  diurnal  rotation,  which 
thus  presents,  in  succession,  every  part  of  its  circumference  to  the  sun  ;  and  the  atmosphere 
becoming  successively  heated,  a  constant  steam  is  thus  produced.  This  is  sufficient  to  show, 
that,  in  the  regions  near  the  equinoctial  line,  a  constant  rarcTaction  is  produced  by  the  sun, 
and  a  current  of  air  consequently  follows  that  luminary  in  his  progress  from  East  to  West. 

Heat  increases  evaporation,  and  renders  the  atmosphere  capable  of  supporting  a  greater 
quantity  of  moisture  than  it  would  do  in  a  cooler  state  :  this  is  a  powerful  agent  in  the  causa 
which  produce  a  diversity  of  winds  and  weather,  especially  to  the  northward  and  southward 
of  the  tropics  ;  for,  by  this  addition  of  moisture,  the  air  is  more  fully  expanded,  and  becomes 
apecifically  lighter,  than  it  would  be  in  the  same  degree  of  heat  in  a  drier  state. 

Were  the  atmosphere  of  one  continued  warmth,  and  its  motion  uniform,  there  would  be  no 
rain  ;  for  it  would  not  imbibe  more  moisture  in  exhalation  than  it  could  su|)poi-t ;  therefore, 
ia  a  perennial  wind,  notwithstanding  the  great  evaporation,  there  is  seldom  any  rain  ;  but, 
from  accidental  causes,  these  winds  are  alterna||^ly  stronger  and  weaker,  with  frequent  clouds, 
and  sometimes  light  showers. 

These  circumstances  are  assumed  as  prevailing  at  a  considerable  distance  from  the  land,  and 
from  the  limits  of  the  perennial  wind-,  for,  every  where  neartlie  land,  when  the  sun  has^rcat, 


/  / 


644 


BLUM'a  AMERICAN   COAST    PILOT. 


Influence,  it  occasions  land  and  sea-breezes  neartbe  shore  ;  and,  in  particular  situations,  hea- 
vy  gusts  and  squalls  of  wind.  The  Trade- Winds  are  more  steady  and  uniform  in  tlic  Pacific 
Ocean,  from  it!<  greater  extent,  and  also  in  the  Ethiopic,  than  in  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  where 
Cape  Verde  and  the  broad  part  of  Africa,  extend  so  much  to  the  westward,  and  the  northern 
part  of  Brazil,  in  America,  to  tiic  East. 

Siialiislands,  lying  lit  a  groat  distance  from  the  main  land,  operate  very  little  upon  the 
Trade-Wind.  If  clcvutcd,  tb' se  islands  are  more  subject  to  rain  than  if  low  :  this  may  be 
occasioned,  principally,  by  the  ascent  givt  .>  '.o  the  wind,  or  atmosphere,  in  rising  over  the  tops 
of  the  hills  ;  when,  being  cuolcd,  it  condenses  into  small  drizzly  rain.  This  is  an  efl'cct  pecu- 
liar to  all  mountains,  even  in  the  middle  of  continents,  when  the  atmosphere  is  sufficiently 
charged  with  moisture.  Tor  the  sun's  rays,  by  heating  the  atmosphere,  according  to  its  densi- 
ty, renders  it  much  warmer  at  the  bottom  tlian  at  the  top  of  hills.  Upon  a  mountain,  sloping 
from  the  sea  towards  the  top,  and  about  7uO  yards  in  height,  a  pleasant  breeze  has  been  ob- 
served in-shore,  and  One  clear  weather;  the  nir  in  asccmting,  (being  condensed  by  cold,)  at 
about  half-way  up,  had  the  appearance  of  fog,  or  thin  light  (lying  clouds :  but  at  the  top  was  a 
mislingrain  ;  and  this  may  fieqcently  be  seen  in  any  mountainous  country.* 

The  ciuuds,  in  the  higher  regions  of  the  air,  are  frequently  seen  to  nxivc  in  a  direction  con- 
trAry  to  the  wind  bcloiv.  The  reason  of  this  variation  is,  that  the  cool  dense  air  below  forces 
'die  warm  and  rarelicd  air  upwards,  where  it  spreads  so  as  to  preserve  tho  equilibrium;  and 
hence  the  upper  course,  or  current,  appears  in  a  contrary  direction.  Thus  circulating,  the 
N.  E.  Trade-wind  has  frequently  a  S.  VV.  wind  about  it;  and  a  S.  B.  wind  often  prcvail<«  be- 
neath one  whose  direction  is  N.  W.  It  is  consequently  found,  that,  just  without  the  limits 
of  the  Trade- wind,  the  wind  generally  blows  from  the  opposite  quarter.  The  counter-current 
of  air,  above,  is  often  seen  in  a  fresh  Trade-wind  ;  for  the  ^reut  power  of  the  sun  between 
the  tropics  so  rarefies  the  atmosphere  under  his  meridian,  that  it  has  not  so  much  influence  in 
the  upper  region,  where  the  atmosphere  is  light :  hence  the  motion  of  the  upper  part  takes  its 
direction  contrary  to  the  Trade-wind.f 

There  are  several  heights  of  clouds  on  the  coast  of  North  America ;  the  highest  and 
those  which  appear  of  the  finest  texture,  (if  I  may  be  allowed  the  expression)  float  highest 
in  the  atmosphere.  Clouds  of  this  description  always  come  from  the  westward  ;  just  before 
the  appears\nce  of  an  easterly  storm,  they  gather  in  the  S.  W.  and  S.  S.  W.  and  if  a  glim  (as 
the  sailors  call  it)  in  the  N.  E.  and  N.  N.  E.  their  appearance  in  the  sky  indicate  a  N.  £. 
storm  of  snow  or  rain.  All  great  storms,  whether  snow  or  rain,  begin  to  the  Westward  and 
advance  gradually  to  the  flastward,  along  the  coast  of  North  America.  A  strong  S.  W.  nvind, 
in  the  upper  regions  of  the  atmosphere,  attended  with  a  N.  E.  or  opposite  wind  below,  is  com- 
monly accompanied  ^vith  low  flying  clouds  which  drive  before  the  wind,  while  the  higher 
clouds  go  in  a  contrary  direction. 

Ship  IVIasters  and  Pilots,  on  leaving  the  coast,  outward  bound,  may  notice  that  so  long  as 
these  higher  clouds  do  not  gather  and  thicken  in  the  W.  or  S.  W.  so  long  a  heavy  or  long 
storm  of  snow  or  rain  will  keep  oif.  Any  rain  or  foul  weather,  that  proceeds  from  winds, 
which  rise  from  the  eastward,  and  drive  before  the  %vind  to  the  westward,  is  of  sho:t  duration. 

The  space  from  latitude  25°  to  28^  or  29^,  between  the  Variable  and  Trade-winds,  is  re- 
markable for  a  continual  change  of  winds,  with  sudden  gusts  and  c%lms,  rain,  thunder,  and  light- 
ning. This  space  has  been  called  the  Horse  Latitudes,  because  it  has  often  been  found  ne- 
cessary here  to  throw  overboard  the  horses  which  were  to  be  transported  to  the  West-In- 
dies, &c.  To  the  northward  of  these  latitudes,  upon  the  American  Coast,  and  more  than 
one-third  over  the  Atlantic,  westerly  winds  prevail  nearly  nine  months  in  the  year. 

In  the  latitudes  above  the  Trade-winds,  the  wind  from  the  VV.  S.  W.  ward  being  replete 
with  moisture,  from  the  great  exhalation  between  the  tropics,  as  it  approaches  the  cold  and 
higher  latitudes,  becomes  condensed  into  showers  of  hail,  rain,  or  snow.  For  instance,  in  the 
60th  degree  of  North  latitude,  the  wind  from  the  S.  VV.  generally  will  prevail  till  the  atmos- 
phere is  more  condensed  than  in  the  lower  latitudes  ;  the  wind  from  the  colder  regions  then 
ensues,  and  blows  till  the  equilibrium  of  the  atmosphere  is  restored,  when  a  short  calm  gener- 
ally succeeds  before  the  wind  shifts  into  another  quarter. 

*  Oriemal  Navigator,  or  Enst  India  Directory. 

t  TheCauttt  of  TomadoeSf  Hurricanes,  and  Squalls,  have  been  thus  assigned  by  Dr.  Hare,  of  I'hilailelpliisi 
».Tbe  air,  being'  a  perfectly  elastic  fluid,  its  density  U  drpendent  on  pressure,  as  well  ns  on  heat,  and  it  dnet 
not  follow  that  air,  which  may  be  heated  in  consequence  uf  its  proximity  to  the  earth,  will  give  place  to  cold- 
er air  from  above.  The  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  varying  with  the  elevation,  one  stratum  of  air  may  be  m 
much  rarer  by  (be  diminution  of  pressure  consequent  to  its  altitude,  as  denser  by  the  cold  consequent  to  its 
remoteness  from  the  earth,  ond  another  may  be  as  much  denser  by  the  increased  pressure  arising  frnni  iii 
pruxiinity  to  the  earth,  as  rarer  by  lieing  warmer.  Hence,  when  unequally  heated,  different  strata  of  the  at- 
mosphere do  not  always  (lUturh  each  other.  Yet,  after  a  time,  the  rnrttfacilon  in  the  lower  siiatuni,  hygresier 
lieat,  may  so  far  excefU  tliat  in  the  upper  stratum,  attendant  on  an  inferior  degree  of  pressure,  that  this  stratum 
may  prrBonderate  and  begin  to  uetcend.  Whenever  sucb  a  niuvunient  cumuiertces,  it  must  proceed  with in- 
treasing  velocity  ;  for  the  pressui'e  on  the  upper  stratum,  and,  of  course  its  density  and  weight,  increasei  ai 
it  falli  i  whilst,  on  the  contrary,  the  density  and  wei<;lit  of  the  lower  must  lessen  it  as  it  rises,  and  hcncr  Iki 
dMtnn  is,  at  times,  so  much  accelerated  as  to  occasion  the  furious  and  suddenly  Varying  curreuts  of  «lr  wbicli 
■USM  tomadoM,  hurricanes,  auU  squalls.-  SiUiman'i  Journal,  Kg.  13. 


There  is  on 

l»tit«des.    TI 

much  to  the  a 

There  is  gener 

opposite  direct 

In  the  limits  c 

always  to  be  co 

wind  and  the 

When  the  su 

larly  betwejn  B 

half  a  point  mo 

The  contrary 

wind.  South  of 

to  the  North. 

■  northern  tropic 

partoftheglobt 

On  the  Africa 

est  to  the  East. 

the  weather  was 

to  the  southward 

The  EftUAToii 

18  and  2t)  degree 

lish  and  French, 

by  the  annexed " 

pected  to  cease  i 

In  this  Table  t 

as  experienced  iti 

last  column  exhib 

Thus,  the  Tab! 

sometimes  to  ceas 

mean  of  its  limit  i 

cease  sometimes 

the  probable  mean 

Tdl  between  the  a; 

and  so  of  (he  rest 

TABLE   showi 
TRADE-WI 


N.  E.  1 


CEASES, 

In  January  at 
February 
March  . 
April  . 
May  . 
June      .    , 

July     .   . 

August  . 
September 
October 
November  . 
December  . 


11 


In  the  space  of 
be^n  found,  that  s 
the  sun  has  great 
enabled,  at  this  s 
tney  do,  in  some 
enced  in  every  r 
generally  in  the  v, 
quently  succeeded 
?^  many  ships  ha 
Whirlwinds  have . 
"■esutmg  atmosphi 


so 

n< 

sea 

s  d( 

moi 

vi( 

1 

have 


so 
ler 


BLUNT's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


645 


IS,  hea- 

pacifie 

where 

orthern 

)on  the 
may  he 
the  tops 
;ct  pccu- 
Hicicntly 
ts  densi- 
i,  sloping 
been  ob- 
cold,)  at 
;op  was  a 

tion  con- 
ow  forces 
ium;  and 
alinj;,  the 
rcvail'*  he- 
tho  limits 
;cr-current 
n  between 
iflucnce  in 
rt  takes  its 

liighest  and 
oat  highest 
just  before 
f  a  gUm  (as 
ite  a  N.  E. 
!s>tward  and 
S.  W.nvind, 
|low,  is  com- 
the  higher 

t  so  long  as 
avy  or  long 
rom  winds, 
,:t  duration, 
inds,  is  re- 
jr,  and  light- 
sn  found  ne- 
le  West-In- 
more  than 

eing  replete 
the  cold  and 
ance,  in  the 
the  atmos- 


egioos 


then 


calmgener- 


f  riiilntlelplita; 
k«,  and  itdoei 
y  place  to  coW- 
r  air  may  be  «« 
i)<!equent  lolW 
Irising  fram  'M 
lata  of  the  at- 
Ium,  by  grcatef 
laitbh  stratum 
loceedwitliin- 
I,  iiicreaseiai 
[and  hcncf  Ik; 
lttofalrwlutl» 


There  is  often  an  interval  of  calm  between  the  Trade-winds  and  the  opposite  winds  in  high 
Utitades.  This  is  not,  however,  nlwaya  the  case;  for,  if  the  Trade-wind  in  its  borders  be 
much  to  the  easttvard,  it  frequently  changes  p^nidually  round  without  an  interval  of  calm. — 
There  is  generally,  also,  u  calm  in  a  certain  space  between  ttvo  prevailing  winds  blowing  in 
opposite  directions,  as  between  the  Traile-wind  and  the  westerly  wind  on  the  African  Coast. 
In  the  limits  of  the  Trade-wind,  a  dead  calm  is  generally  the  prelude  to  t\  storm,  and  it  ought 
always  to  be  considered  asapro2;nostic  thereof;  fur  it  is  known  that  the  conflux  of  the  Trade- 
wind  and  the  variable  winds  is  the  cause  of  calms  and  storms  in  the  tropical  regions. 

When  the  sun  is  at  its  greatest  dei-'lination.  North  of  the  equator,  tho  S.  E.  wind,  particu- 
larly  between  Brazil  and  Africa,  varying  towards  the  course  of  the  sun,  changes  a  quarter  or 
half  a  point  more  to  the  southward,  and  the  N.  E.  Tradv,  wind  veers  more  to  the  eastward. 
The  contrary  happens  when  the  sun  is  near  the  southern  tropic  ;  for  then  the  S.  E. 
wind,  South  of  the  line,  gets  more  to  the  East,  and  the  Is'.  E.  wind,  on  the  Atlantic,  veers  more 
to  the  North.  In  June,  July,  August,  and  September,  while  the  sun  is  returning  from  the 
northern  tropic  to  the  equator,  the  action  of  its  rays  upon  the  land  and  sea,  in  the  northern 
part  of  the  globe,  renders  the  wind  less  constant  by  altering  the  state  of  the  atmosphere. 

On  the  African  side,  the  winds  arc  nearest  to  the  South,  and  on  the  American  side,  near-i 
est  to  the  East.  In  these  seas  Doctor  IL-.llcy  observed,  that,  when  the  wind  was  eastward, 
the  weather  was  gloomy,  dark,  and  rainy,  witli  hard  gales  of  wind  ;  but,  when  the  wind  veered 
to  the  southward,  the  weallicr  generally  beconics  serune,  with  gentle  breezes,  next  to  a  calm. 

The  Equatoriai-  Limits  of  the  N.  E.  I'creiini.il  or  Trade-wind  between  the  meridians  or 
18  and  2t>degrees  West,  have  betn  found,  upon  the  co-npaiison  of  nearly  400  journals,  Eng- 
lish and  French,  to  vary  considerably,  even  in  the  same  montl-is  of  the  year.  We  have  shown, 
by  the  annexed  Table,  where  the  N.  E.  Trade,  according  to  the  probable  mean,  may  be  ex- 
pected to  cease  in  the  diiicrcnt  months:  and  it  will  be  found  to  answer  the  pi'.rposc  precisely. 

In  this  Table  the  columns  of  Extremes  show  the  uncertain  termination  of  the  Trade-winds, 
as  experienced  in  ditferent  ships.  Tlie  annexed  columns  show  the  Probublv  Mean  :  and  the 
last  column  exhibits  the  mean  breadth  of  the  interval  between  the  N.  E.  and  S.  E.  winds. 

Thus,  the  Table  shows,  that,  in  the  month  of  January,  the  N.  R.  trade  has  been  found 
sometimes  tocease  in  the  parallel  of  10^,  and  sometimes  in  that  of  3°  N.  That  the  probable 
mean  of  its  limit  is  about  5-^  N. — That  tlic  S.  E.  trade,  at  the  same  time,  has  been  found  t6 
cease  sometimes  at  only  half  a  degree  North  of  the  line,  and  sometimes  at  4  degrees.  That 
the  probable  mean  of  its  limit  is,  therefore,  two  degrees  and  a  quarter.  And,  that  the  inter- 
val between  the  assumed  means  of  the  N.  E.  and  S.  E.  Trade- winds  is  equal  to  24  degrees  : 
and  so  of  the  rest. 


TABLE   showing  the  EQUINOCTIAL   LIMITS   of  the  N.  E.  and  S. 
TRADE-WINDS,  between  the  Meridians  of  18  and  26  Dkorees  West. 


E. 


N.  E.  TRADE-WIND. 

S. 

E.  TblADE-WIND. 

INTERVAL 
BETWEEfN. 

CEASES.   ,,«sr,. 

I'robablo 
Mean. 

beneral 
Extremes. 

Probable 
Mean. 

Mean  Breadth. 

In  January  at    3°  to  10^  N. 

5-.N. 

O^'^ 

to  4^  N. 

25°  N. 

24  degrees. 

February    .2    to  10   — 

4    — 

0^ 

to  3    — 

li    - 

3J 

March   •    .  2    to    8   — 

4i- 

OJ 

to  2^  — 

n  - 

34 

April     .    .  2^  to    9   — 

5     — 

0 

to  2i  — 

li   — 

3i 

May      .     .  4    to  10   — 

6.i- 

0 

to  4    — 

2i    — 

4 

June      .    .  6J  to  13   — 

8i- 

0 

to  5    — 

3      — 

54 

July       .    .  8i  to  14   — 

11     — 

to  6    — 

3i    - 

74- 

August  .      11    to  15    — - 

13     — 

to  5    — 

34    — 

9l 

September     9    to  14    — : 

la- 

to  5    — 

3      — 

8i 

October      .  7J  to  14   -— 

10    — 

to  5    — 

3      — 

7 

November  .6    to  11    — 

8    — 

to  5     — 

3      — 

44 

December  .  3    to    7    — 

5i- 

to  4J  — 

34    _ 

H 

In  the  space  of  variable  winds  between  the  trades,  exhibited  in  the  last  column,  it  has 
been  found,  that  southerly  winds  prevail  more  than  any  other ;  more  particularly  when 
the  sun  has  great  northern  declination.  Homeward-bound  East-India  ships  are  therefore 
enabled,  at  this  season,  to  cross  the  space  more  quickly  than  those  outward  bound  ;  which 
they  do,  in  some  degree,  at  all  other  times.  Yet  calms  and  variable  winds  arc  e'xperi- 
enced  in  every  month  in  the  year,  within  this  spicc;  but  the  former,  which  are  more 
geaerally  in  the  vicinity  of  the  N.  E.  trade,  seldom  continue  long.  These  calms  are  fre- 
quently succeeded  by  sudden  squalU  ;  against  which  every  precaution  should  be  taken; 
as  many  ships  have  lost  their  top-masts,  ?nd  have  been  otherwise  damaged  by  them. 
Whirlwinds  have  sometimes  accompanied  these  squalls  id  their  first  effort  against  tho 
relisting  atmosphere. 


> 


646 


BLUNT'S    AMEniCAN    COAST    PILOT. 


On  the  eastern  coast  of  North  America,  and  among  its  islands,  the  course  of  the  general 
easterly  or  trade  wind  is  uninlerruptcd,  lhou;;h  subject  to  some  modifications  in  direction  and 
force.  At  a  short  distance  from  the  land  thn  sea-breeze  culi.is  at  night  and  is  replaced  by  the 
land-breeze.  This  variation  happens  every  day,  unless  a  strong  wind  prevails  from  the  north- 
ward or  southward  ;  the  first  of  these  being  experienced  from  October  to  May,  and  the  second 
in  July,  August,  and  September. 

To  the  southward  of  Newfoundland,  shifts  of  wind  arc  very  common,  and  it  frequently  bap- 
pens  that,  after  blowing  a  gale  upon  one  point  of  the  compass,  the  wind  suddenly  shifts  to  the 
opposite  point,  and  blows  equally  strong.  It  has  been  known  that,  while  one  vessel  has  been 
lying-to,  in  a  a  heavy  gale  of  wind,  another,  not  more  than  30  leagues  distant,  has,  at  the 
very  same  time  been  in  another  gale,  equally  heavy,  and  lying  to,  with  the  wind  in  quite  an 
opposite  direction. 

In  the  year  1782,  at  the  time  the  Ville  de  Paris,  Centaur,  Ramillics,  and  several  other  ships 
ofVrar,  either  foundered,  or  were  rendered  unserviceable,  on  or  near  the  Banks,  together  with 
a  whole  fleet  of  Wcst-Indiamen,  excepthigfivc  or  six,  they  were  all  lyingto  with  a  hurricane 
from  West;  the  wind  shifted  in  an  instant  to  East,  and  blew  equally  heavy,  and  every  ship 
lying-to,  under  a  square  course,  foundered. 

The  winds  within  the  Gulf  are  not  so  liable  to  sudden  shifts  as  on  the  outside,  or  to  the  east- 
ward, of  Breton  Island,  llic  weather  to  the  southward  o(  Magdalen  Islands  between  them 
and  Prince  Edward  Island,  is  generally  mutli  clearer  than  on  tho  north.  [For  Winds,  &c. 
on  the  coast  of  South  Carolina,  see  pngc  134.] 

Bermudas'  Isles. — Near  these  islands,  hurricanes  and  trmpnsts  are  vory  frequent  ;  but 
the  prevailing  winds,  with  fine  weather,  are  from  between  the  South  and  Wcs-l.  Hakluyt,  in 
bis  voyages,  1593,  calls  the  sea  about  tlic  Bermudns  a  "Iiulliih  place  for  tbunder,  lightninj^, 
and  storms :"  and  another  w.ritcr,  in  I6l;j,  clescribiiig  the  arrival  of  tho  English  at  these 
islands  in  1609,  has  said,  "  Sir  Ccorgc  Somcrs,  sitting  ;a  the  sternc,  seeing  the  ship  desperate 
ofrclicf,  looking  every  minute  Avhen  it  av.jiiUI  sinkc,  lie  espied  land,  which,  according  Co  his 
and  Captain  Newport's  opinion  shou'd  be  tlmt  dreadlu!  coast  of  the  Bermodes,  which  islands 
were,  of  all  nations,  said  and  supposed  to  be  incliantcii,  and  inhabited  with  witches  ond  devils; 
which  grew  hy  reason  of  accustomed  monstrous  thunder,  dtorme,  and  tempests,  neerc  unto 
those  islands;  also  for  tbat  tho  whole  coast  is  so  wondrous  dmigcrous  of  rocks,  that  few  can 
approach  them  but  with  unspeakable  hazard  of  sliipwret!;.''  We  now  laugh  at  this:  knowing 
that  the  mild  and  regular  climate  of  these  islands  is  prcfcralile  even  to  that  of  Madeira,  and 
to  be  preferred  for  the  purity  of  its  air,  together  with  the  abundance  and  quality  of  fruits  and 
vegetables. 

"The  general  easterly  wind,  of  the  tropical  regions,  is  felt  on  the  coast  of  Guyana  and  on 
the  coasts  of  the  Caribbean  and  Mexican  Seas,  but  with  variations  which  may  be  denomina- 
ted diurnalaitd  annual.  The  diurnal  period  is  that  wIjI;  h  tlic  sca-breczc  causes,  and  which 
strikes  the  coast  usually  at  an  angle  of  two  points,  less  or  iiijrc,  according  to  the  locality  and 
other  circumstances  ;  and  then  the  land-vnnd,  which,  coming  from  the  interior,  always  blows 
offshore.  The  sea-breeze  comes  on  at  about  nine  or  t-tn  in  the  forenoon,  and  continue) 
while  the  sun  is  above  the  horizon,  increasing  its  force  us  that  luminary  augments  its  altitude, 
and  diminishing,  in  a  similar  proportion,  as  the  sun's  altitude  decreases.  Thus,  when  the 
sun  is  on  the  meridian,  the  sea-breeze  is  at  the  maximum  of  its  strength  ;  and  at  the  time 
that  the  sun  reaches  the  horizon,  this  breeze  has,  perceptibly,  ceased.  The  land-brccze  com- 
mences before  midnight,  and  continues  until  the  rising  of  the  sun  ;  sometimes  longer.  A 
space  of  some  hours  intervenes  between  the  land-breesc'a  ceasing  and  the  sea-breeze's  com- 
■ing  on,  during  which  there  is  a  perfect  calm. 

"  The  amxual periftd  of  the  trade-wind  here  is  produced  by  the  proximity  or  distance  of  the 
BUHj  which  occasions  the  only  two  seasons  known  in  llie  tropic  ;  the  rainy  and  the  dry  sea- 
sons. The  first  is  when  the  sun  is  in  the  tropic  of  Cancer,  and  heavy  rains  with  loud  thud- 
der  are  prevalent.  In  this  season  the  wind  is  generally  to  the  southward  of  East,  but  ia- 
terrupted  by  frequent  calms,  yet  it  occasionally  blows  with  force,  and  obscures  the  at- 
mosphere. 

"  When  the  sun  removes  to  the  tropic  of  Capricorn,  the  dry  season  commences,  and  then 
the  trade-wind,  %vhieh  is  steady  at  N.  E.  is  cool  and  agreeable.  At  this  season,  North  and 
N.W.  winds  are  sometimes  found,  blowing  with  much  force,  and,  indeed,  in  some  degree, 
they  regularly  alternate  with  the  general  wind,  as  they  arc  more  frequent  in  November  and 
December,  than  in  February  and  jMareh. 

"  In  the  change  of  the  seasons  there  is  a  remarkable  difierence  ;  for,  in  April  and  May,  no 
change  is  experienced  in  the  atmosphere,  and  the  weather  is,  in  general,  beautifully  fine  ;  but, 
in  August,  September,  and  October,  there  are  usually  calms,  or  very  light  winds  :  and  dread- 
ful hurricanes,  in  these  months,  sometimes  render  the  navigation  perilous.  From  these  per- 
ils, however,  are  exempted  the  island  Trinidad,  the  coasts  of  Colombia,  (late  Terra  Firms,) 
the  Gulfs  or  Bays  of  Darien  and  Honduras,  and  the  Bi;;ht  of  Vera  Cruz,  to  which  the  hurri- 
canes do  not  reach.  In  the  space  of  sea  between  the  Great  Antillas  and  the  coast  of  Colombia, 
Ihe  general  N.  E.  or  trade  wind  regularly  prevails  ;  but,  near  the  shore,  the  following  peculia^ 
itiea  are  found : 


•'At  the  Gar 

by  night.    The 

getting  to  tho  cf 

impossible.     A I 

no  land-breezes 

"  On  the  CoA 

experienced  be( 

from  North  to  h 

from  East  to  S.  j 

South    nd  S.  \V 

while  the  sky  i?, 

1  to  June,  the  h 

violent. 

"  On  the  CoAs 
gular  course  ;  bi 
it  blows  from  N. 
when  it  comes  to 
wsiels  to  lie-to. " 
channel  tb  withir 
njght-  On  this  c 
that  country  eali 
winds  never  pass 
sea-breeze. 

"  Upon  the  Mo 

winds  or  breezes  j 

these  months,  the) 

winds  here  are  fro 

fember,  October,  J 

ward  of  west,  with 

^  "On  the  North 

PiedracorDeseond 

wind,  interrupted  b 

does  commence  fro 

tinue  about  an  hour 

The  season  of  the  t 

breezes  unon  the  c 

Uie  sea-breeze  is  th 

September.     The  s 

gets  round  to  East 

breeze. 

"On  the  Coast  o 
8.  E.  and  East  pre^ 
on  from  South  toS. 
the  day  following,  ■ 
tember :  these  win 
(head-winds  or  rain 
therefore,  a  vessel  m 
pede  getting  out,  for 
reach  to  about  20  or 
E.  S.  E. 

"From  the  middh 
ViRA  Cruz,  for  the 
obstruction  formed  I 
norths,  render  an  at 
be  impossible  to  take 
written  by  Don  Be«-i 
the  Port,  and  who  su 

"Although  in  the 
than  the  general  bree 
north  winds'interrup 
■oos,  wet  and  dry,  or 
«  from  March  to  Sep 
M<f to  March.    Fort 

"The  first  of  them 
•nd  the  following  one 


BLuriT's 


AMERICAN     COAST    PILOT. 


647 


general 
ion  tnd 
Ibytbe 
)  north- 
I  second 

tly  hap- 
18  to  the 
IBS  been 
i,  at  the 
quite  an 

ler  ships 
her  with 
urricane 
fcry  ship 

the  east- 
ecn  them 
inds,  &c. 


ent ;  but 
akluyt,  in 
lightning, 
1  at  these 
desperate 
iiig  io  his 
ich  islands 
ind  devils ; 
[leerc  unto 
at  few  can 
:  knowing 
^deira,  and 
f  fruits  and 

ana  and  on 
denomina- 
and  which 
cality  and 
ways  blows 

continues 
|its  altitude, 

when  the 
it  the  time 
Irccze  com- 
|longer.  A 
leze's  corn- 
Lance  of  the 
\\ie  dry  sea* 

,  loud  thud- 

aist,  but  in- 
tcs  the  at- 

i,  and  then 
North  and 

|)me  degree, 
member  and 

Jid  May,  no 

|y  fine ;  but, 

and  dread- 

these  per* 

ira  Firma,) 

the  hunt 

If  Colombia, 

Ing  peculiv- 


••  At  the  Gnr  ateh  Antili.as  the  sea-brcczc  constantly  prevails  by  day,  and  the  land-breec« 
by  night.  These  land-brcczcs  arc  tlio  freshest  which  aro  known,  and  assist  vessels  much  in 
getting  to  the  cnshvard  or  rcinounting- to  windward,  which,  without  them,  would  be  almost 
impossible.  At  the  Lesser  Antillas,  us  Doniiiiica,  Martinique,  and  St.  Lucia,  &c.  there  aro 
no  land-breezes. 

"  On  the  Coasts  of  Gutana  there  arc  no  land-brcczcs,  nor  more  wind  than  is  generally 
experienced  between  the  tropic  i.  In  January,  February,  and  March,  the  winds  here  blow 
.from  North  to  E.  N.  E.,  and  the  weather  is  clear.  In  April,  May  and  June,  the  winds  are 
from  East  to  S.  E.  In  July,  Aiin;iist,  and  September,  there  are  calms,  with  tornadoes  from 
South  ,nd  S.  W,  ;  and,  in  October,  November,  and  December,  there  aro  continual  rains, 
while  the  sky  i?,  in  general,  obscured  by  clouds.  In  the  dry  season,  which  is  from  Janua- 
ry to  June,  the  heat  is  very  great;  and,  in  the  wet  season  rains  and  thunder  are  constant  and 
violent. 

"  On  the  Coasts  of  Cumana  and  CAnAccAS,  to  Cape  la  Vela,  the  breeze  follows  the  re- 
gular course  ;  but  from  tiiat  cape  to  Capo  San  Bias  the  general  wind  alters  its  direction  ;  for 
it  blows  from  N.  E.  or  N.  N.  E.  excepting  in  the  months  of  March,  April,  May,  and  June, 
when  it  comes  to  E.  N.  E.,  and  is  then  so  uncommonly  strong  as  to  render  it  necessary  for 
vessels  to  lie-to.  Thescgales,  which  are  vvpll  known  to  mariners,  extend  from  about  mid- 
channel  to  within  two  or  tlircc  leagues  of  the  coast,  where  they  become  weak,  especially  at 
night.  On  this  coast,  about  the  Gulf  of  Nicaragua,  arc  westerly  winds,  which  the  pilots  of 
that  country  call  Vendavatci,  (rainy  winds,)  in  the  n\unths  from  July  to  December;  but  these 
winds  never  pass  the  parallel  of  la'^N.  nor  do  they  blow  constantly,  but  alternate  with  the 
sea-breeze. 

"Upon  the  Mosquito  Shore,  IIonduuas,  and  Eastern  Coast  of  Yucatan,  the  general 
Windsor  breezes  prevail  in  February,  March,  April,  and  May  ;  but,  during  the  first  t*vo  ol 
tbesemontbs,  they  are  oceasioRuily  interrupted  by  norllis.  In  June,  July,  and  August,  the 
winds  here  arc  from  the  eastward  and  westward  of  Spnlh,  with  tornadoes  and  calms.  In  Sep- 
tember, October,  November,  December,  and  January,  they  are  from  the  northward  or  south- 
ward of  west,  with  frequent  "ales  from  W.  S.  W.  VV.  N.  W.  and  North. 
•  "On  the  Noutiif.rn  and  Western  Coast  of  Yucatan,  between  CapeCatoche  and  Point 
PiedracorDescondida,  and  thence  to  Canipeche,  there  is  no  other  than  the  N.  E.  or  general 
wind,  interrupted  by  hard  norths  in  the  season  of  them  ;  and,  about  the  end  of  April,  torna- 
does commence  from  N.  E.  to  S.  E.  Tiicsc  tornadoes  generally  form  in  the  afternoon,  con- 
tinue about  an  hour;  and,  by  iiifjhtfall,  the  serenity  of  the  atmosphere  is  re-established. — 
The  season  of  the  tornadoes  continues  until  September,  and  in  all  the  time  there  are  sea- 
breezes  unon  the  coast,  which  blow  from  N.  N.  W.  to  N.  E.  It  has  been  remarked  that,  as 
the  sea-breeze  is  the  more  fresh,  the  more  fierce  is  the  tornado,  especially  from  June  to 
September.  The  sea-breezes  come  on  at  about  eleven  of  the  day  ;  and  at  night  the  wind 
gets  round  to  East,  £.  S.  £.  or  S.  E.  so  that  it  may  be,  in  some  degree,  considered  as  a  land- 
breeze. 

"On  the  Coast  of  the  Mexican  Sea,  from  Vera  Cruz  to  TAMPif:o,  the  breeze  from  E. 
8.  E.  and  East  prevails  in  April,  May,  June,  and  July;  and,  at  night,  the  land-breeze  comes 
offfrom  South  to  S.  W.  :  but,  if  the  land-breeze  is  from  the  N.  W.  with  rain,  the  wind,  on 
the  day  following,  will  be  from  North,  N.  N.  E.  or  N.  E.  particularly  in  August  and  Sep- 
tember :  these  winds  arc  denominated,  in  the  country,  '  Vienlos  de  Cabezao  Vendavales* 
(head-winds  or  rainy  winds  ;)  tiicy  arc  not  strong,  nor  do  they  raise  the  sea  ;  with  them, 
therefore,  a  vessel  may  take  an  anchorage  as  well  as  with  the  general  breeze  ;  but  they  Im- 
pede getting  out,  for  which  the  land-brcczc  is  required.  The  Vientos  de  Cabeza,  or  head- winds, 
reach  to  about  20  or  30  leagues  from  the  coast,  at  which  distance  are  found  those  at  East  and 
E.  S.  E. 

"From  the  middle  of  September  until  the  month  of  March,  caution  is  necessary  in  making 
ViRA  Cruz,  for  the  norths  arc  tlien  very  heavy.  The  narrowness  of  this  harbour,  the 
obstruction  formed  by  the  shoals  at  its  entrance,  and  the  slender  shelter  it  affords  from  the 
norths,  render  an  attempt  to  make  it,  during  one  of  them,  exiremoly  dangerous,  for  it  will 
be  impossible  to  take  ih^  anchorage.  The  following  description  of  the  winds  here  has  been 
written  by  Don  Bcnardo  dn  Ortu,  a  captain  in  the  Spanish  navy,  who  has  been  captain  of 
the  Port,  and  who  surveyed  if. 

"Allhough  in  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  we  cannot  soy  that  there  is  any  other  constant  wind 
than  the  general  breeze  of  this  region,  notwilhstandingthat,  from  September  to  March,  the 
north  windsMnterrupt  the  general  course,  and,  in  some  degree,  divide  the  year  into  two  sen- 
•ons,  wet  and  dry,  or  of  the  Breezes  and  Mirths  :  the  first,  in  which  the  breezes  are  settled, 
11  from  March  to  September  ;  and  the  second,  in  which  the  norths  blow,  is  from  Septem- 
ber to  March.    For  greater  clearness  we  shall  explHiaeach  separately. 

"Thefirstof  the  norths  is  regularly  felt  in  the  month  of  September;  but,  in  this  month 
•nd  the  following  one,  October,  the  norths  do  not  blow  with  much  force.    Sometimes  It  hap- 


'~^  III 


648 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAiN   COAST  PILOT. 


pens  that  they  do  not  appear,  but,  in  that  case,  tlie  breeze  is  interrupted  by  heavy  rains  and 
tornadoes.  In  November  the nortlis  arc  csiubli:slucl,  blow  with  much  ati ci.gth,  and  continue 
a  length  of  time  during  December,  Jiuumry,  and  February.  In  these  months,  after  they  be- 
gin, Ui'^'j  increase  fast ;  and  in  four  hours,  or  a  little  more,  attain  their  utmost  sti  engih,  with 
which  they  cominuc  blowing  for  forty  oiglit  hours;  but  aficuvanls,  though  they  do  not  cease 
fof  some  days,  they  are  moderate.  In  tiicbc  months  liic  norths  are  obscure  and  north-wes- 
tci  ly,  and  they  come  on  so  ficquentiy,  that  i  hero  is,  in  p;cnoral,  not  more  tlian  four  or  six  days 
between  ihcm.  In  March  and  April  tliey  are  neitiicr  so  frequent,  nor  last  so  long,  and  are 
clearer  ;  but  yet  they  are  more  lierce  for  the  first  twenty  four  iiours,  and  have  less  north- 
vesting.  In  tlie  interval  before  November,  in  wliicli,  as  we  iiave  said,  tliejioW/js  me  establish- 
ed, the  weiither  is  beautiful,  and  the  general  bree/.e  blows  with  great  regularity  by  day ;  the 
land-breeze  as  regular  by  night. 

"  There  are  various  signs  by  which  the  coming  on  of  a  7ioW/tmay  be  foreseen;  such  are, 
the  wind  steady  at  South  ;  the  moisture  of  tiic  walls,  and  of  tlie  pavements  of  the  houses  and 
streets;  seeing  clearly  the  Peak  ofOriznbaaud  the  Mountains  of  Pcrofe  and  Villa-Rica, 
with  the  cloud  on  those  of  St.  Martin,  havina;  folds  Iikc  a  white  sheet ;  the  increase  of  heat 
and  of  dew  ;  and  a  thick  fog,  or  low  scud,  living  with  velocity  to  the  southward:  but  the 
most  certain  of  all  is  th^  barometer  ;  fortliis  instrument,  in  tlic  time  of  the  Norths  at  Vera- 
Cruz,  docs  not  vary  more,  between  its  highest  and  lowest  range,  tlian  cighttcntlis  ;  that  is 
to  say,  it  does  not  rise  higher  than  30  inches  six-tcntlis,  nor  fall  lower  than  2'J  inches  eight- 
tenths.  The  desccMt  of  the  mercury  predicts  the  Norths  ;  but  they  dot  not  begin  to  blow  the 
moment  it  sinks,  which  it  always  does  a  short  time  before  the  north  comes  on:  at  these 
times  lightnings  appear  on  the  horizon,  cpptcially  from  N.  W.  to  N.  E.  ;  the  sea  sparkles; 
cobwebs  arc  seen  on  tlie  rigging,  if  by  day:  willi  such  warnmgs  trust  not  to  the  weather,  for 
a  North  will  infallibly  come  on. 

"This  wind  generally  moderates  at  the  setting  of  the  sun  ;  that  is,  it  does  not  retain  the 
same  strength  whicii  it  had  from  nine  in  tlic  morning  to  three  in  the  afternoon,  unless  it  com- 
mences in  the  evening  or  at  night,  for  then  it  may  increase  otliorwiso.  Sometimes  it  hap- 
pens that,  after  dark,  or  a  little  before  miJnight,  it  is  foinid  to  be  the  land-wind,  from  the 
northward  and  westward  ;  in  which  case,  should  it  get  round  to  the  soutliward  of  west,  the 
north  will  be  at  an  end,  and  tlic  general  breeze  will,  (o  a  certainty,  come  on  at  its  regular  hour: 
but,  if  that  does  not  happen  at  tiic  rising  of  the  suii,  or  altcrwards,  and  at  the  turn  of  the 
tide,  it  will  return  to  blow  from  the  nortli,  with  the  same  violence  as  on  the  day  before,  and 
then  it  is  called  aJVorth  dc  JMaren,  or  jf 7i/( -Aoc///. 

"  The  Norths  also  sometimes  conclude  by  taking  to  the  northward  find  eastward,  which  is 
more  certain  ;  for,  if  the  wind  in  the  evening  gets  to  N.  K.,  although  the  sky  remain  covered 
the  day  following,  but  by  nigiit  the  land  breeze  has  been  from  the  northward  nnil  westward, 
the  regular  breeze  will  surely  ensue  in  the  evening,  good  weather  succeeding  and  continuing 
for  four  or  six  days  ;  the  latter  period  being  the  longest  that  it  will  last  to,  in  the  season  of 
the  norths  :  but,  if  the  wind  retrograde  from  N.  E.  to  N.  N.  E.  or  North,  the  weather  will 
be  still  unsettled. 

"  Examples  are  not  wanting  of  norths  happening  in  Mr.j,  .Innc,  July,  and  August,  at  which 
times  tliey  arc  most  furious,  and  are  called  .A/'ortM*/./  J\Jueso  Colorado  ;  the  more  moderate 
are  called  Cliocolatcros,  but  these  arc  rather  uncommon. 

"  The  Wet  Season,  or  Season  of  the  breezes,  is  from  March  to  September  :  the  Bree?es, 
at  the  end  of  March,  and  through  the  whole  month  of  April,  as  already  explained,  are,  from 
time  to  time,  interrupted  by  Ncnl's,  and  are  from  E.  S.  E.  very  fresh  ;  the  sky  sometimes 
clear,  at  other  times  obscure.  At  times  these  touch  from  S.  I'.,  and  continue  all  night,  with- 
out giving  place  to  the  land  breeze,  whic'i  prevail?,  in  general,  every  night,  excepting  when 
the  north  wind  is  on.     The  land-brcrze  is  freshest  iviicn  the  rains  have  begun. 

"After  the  sun  passes  the  zenith  of  Vera  Cruz,  and  until  he  returns  to  it,  tliat  is,  from  the 
_l6th  of  May  to  the  27th  of  July,  tiic  breezes  are  of  the  lightest  description  ;  almost  calms, 
with  much  mist  or  haze,  and  slight  tornadoes.  After  that  time,  the  pleasant  breezes  from  N. 
W.  to  N.  E.  sometimes  remain  fixed. 

"From  the  27th  of  July  to  the  middle  of  October,  when  the  Norths  become  established,  ihe 
tornadoes  are  fierce,  with  heavy  rains,  tlnindcr,  and  lightning  :  those  which  bring  the  heaviest 
winds  are  from  the  east,  but  they  arc  also  of  tlic  .«liorte.st  duration. 

"In  the  season  of  Breezes,  the  total  variation  cfthebaroiuctor  is  four-tent.is  ;  the  greatest 
•■cent  of  the  mercury  is  to  30  inches  thirty-live  one-liniidreiltlis,  and  its  grcate°tilcsceiitto29 
inches  nincly-six-one-liundredtlis.  The  therninni'tcr  in  July  rises  to  S7  \  nii<l  docs  not  fidlto 
83J°  :  in  December  it  rises  to  H^i"^,  but  neverfulls  bcinw  (tW,  '.  Tlii-t,  it  niunt  be  inulcrslooJ, 
was  ascertained  in  the  shade,  the  instrument  being  placed  in  one  of  the  coolest  and  best  venti- 
lated halls  in  the  castle. 

"In  th3  months  of  August  and  September,  rarely  a  year  passes  without  hurricanes  near 
Florida  and  the  nortliern  Antillas ;  but  to  Vera  Cruz,  or  any  pari;  of  the  coast  thence  to  Cam- 
peache,  they  never  arise  ;  all  that  is  felt  being  the  heavy  sco,  which  has  arisen  in  the  higher 


latitudes.    ] 

ways  go  roui 

with  thick  sq 

From  Tail 

from  the  moi 

coast  is  expo! 

out  intermiss 

In  lat.  26° 

From  Bay 

day's  enterini 

S.  W.    i„,v 

3  days.    The 

ber  and  Nove 

]fM"  can  stanc 

frequently,  est 

From  the  M 

generaljy  ft  o^ 

W.-~these  S.  1 

are  also  c^perii 

Wow  from  the 

toS.W.andW 

*her,  and  then 

From  lat.  28^ 

morning,  and  a 

Mpecially  from 

sea. 

In  the  new  cl 
norths,  and  in  si 
N-  and  conscquc 
winter,  thai  is  ft 
rive  to  lat.  27°, 
J>a«'e  calms  and' 1 
On  the  Easti 
winds  generally  j 
prevailing  winds 
The  former  of 
therlyone;  altho 
•bout  the  equino: 
These  winds  ai 
above  described,  i 
land,  or  rather  of 
particular  seasons 
IS  observed  in  the 
any  deviation ;  m 
»ancing  to  the  noi 
will  prevail  near  t 
of  it  between  the 
trade-wind  will  gei 
movement  with  !h( 
preaching  the  coas 
within  four  or  fire 
to  the  westward. 

"ithin  a  few  mi 
generally  blows  dir 

Jsnerally,  supersed 
bout  Rio  de  Janci 
and,  while  at  Perna 
The  proceeding  i 
D'Aprcs,  has  said  t 
we  from  N.  E.  and 
ly  monsoon  are  fron 
H  that  they  do  son 
Mldom  occur. 

Mr.Llndley  inh 
•hoM,atBahia,&c. 
wmhw«rd,)thowi 
•M  north-westerly 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


649 


una  and 
:ontinue 
ihey  be- 
rth, with 
ot  cease 
rth-wes- 
•  six  day» 
,  and  are 
S3  north- 
estaWish- 
day ;  the 

such  are, 
lOuses  and 
►  ilia-Rica, 
ase  of  heat 
A  :  b»it  the 
IS  atVera- 
iis  ;  that  is 
chc9  eight- 
to  blow  the 
n  :  at  these 
1   sparkles  ; 
wcatber,  for 

it  retain  the 
nless  it  coin- 
imes  it  hup- 
d,  fiom  the 
;  of  west,  the 
rcgi'lar  bour: 
c  turn  of  the 
y  before,  and 

rard,  whicb  is 
nnain  covered 
,1(1  westward, 
,ul  continuing 
the  season  of 
weather  will 

rust,  at  which 
fore  moderate 

the  Bree/es, 
|icd,  arc,  from 
^y  somcliracj 
111  night,  with- 
Icciiliiig  wUcu 


19, 


from  the 
[almost  calmJ, 
uczcs  from  N. 

Istahlished.l'fle 
|ng  the  heaviest 

;  the  greatest 

lt.\cftceiilto29 

llocs  not  fiillto 

le  timlciflnu'l' 

lundbcstvcnli- 

Jirricanes  neat 
IhencetoCam- 
1  in  the  bigh« 


latitudes.  Hurricanes  begin  to  the  northvrard  and  eastward  ;  and,  although  thej  do  not  al« 
ways  go  round  the  same  way,  yet,  ia  general,  they  next  go  to  the  southward  and  eastward, 
with  thick  squally  weather  and  rain." 

From  Tampico  to  Bay  of  St.  Bernard,  the  winds  are  continually  from  E.  to  S.  and  light 
from  the  month  of  April  to  August  ;  the  contrary  is  experienced  in  the  other  months.  1%is 
coast  is  exposed  on  account  of  the  hardness  of  gales  from  E.  and  E.  S.  E.,  whicb  blow  with* 
out  intermission  for  two  or  three  days  before  hauling  to  the  northward. 
In  lat.  26°  SC/  N.  there  are  land  breezes  at  night,  which  blow  from  midnight,  to  9  A.  M. 
From  Bay  St.  Bernard  to  the  Mississippi  there  are  land  breezes  at  daylight,  and  on  'the 
day's  entering,  the  mnds  haul  to  S.  E.  and  1'^.  S.  E.  and  in  the  afternoon  it  generally  haula 
S.  Vf.  In  winter  tne  southerly  winds  are  veiy  tempestuous,  and  blow  for  the  space  of  2  or 
3  days.  The  months  most  to  bo  feared  to  navigate  this  sea,  are  August,  September,  Oeto- 
ber  and  November,  in  which  there  are  hurricanes  and  winds  on  shore  so  heavy  that  no  can* 
tass  can  stand  them  :  upon  the  Mississippi,  and  all  its  mouths,  there  are  very  thicic  fogsTery 
frequently,  especially  in  February,  March  and  Apail,  and  in  June  and  July. 

From  the  Mississippi  to  lat.  28"^  N.  in  tlic  month  of  April  to  ,Kily,  the  reigning  winds  ar« 
generally  from  N.  to  E.  and  from  E.  toS.  in  the  morning,  and  in  the  afternoon  they  haul  S. 
W.— these  S.  VV.  winds  arc  tempestuous  in  August,  September  and  October,  an  epoch  in  whicb 
are  also  c'vpericnced  heavy  southcrs  !i.'\d  hurricanes.  From  November  to  March  the  winds 
blow  from  the  northward,  beginning  first  from  S.  E,  and  S.  with  heavy  rain,  when  it  hauls 
to  S.  W.  and  W.  and  blows  very  heavy,  till  it  hauls  to  N.  W.  and  N.  when  it  clears  the  wea- 
ther,  and  then  to  N.  E.  and  is  mild. 

From  lat.  28^  N.  to  the  southernmost  of  the  Florida  keys,  the  trade  wind  reigns  in  the 
morning,  and  at  mid-day  it  hauls  in  from  the  sea  ;  this  happens  in  summer,  but  in  winter, 
especially  from  November  to  March,  the  winds  blow  from  S.  to  W.  and  raise  a  very  heary 
sea. 

In  the  new  channel  of  Bahama,  (he  rci;];ning  wind  is  tho  trade,  interrupted  in  winter  by 
norths,  and  in  summer  by  calms.  Allhougli  tiic  northern  limits  of  this  channel  is  in  28°  Sv 
N-  and  consequently  within  the  limits  of  the  trades,  yet  it  is  necessary  to  keep  in  mind  that  in 
winter,  that  is  from  November  to  April,  you  will  meet  with  the  variables  at  or  before  you  ar- 
rive to  lat.  27°,  which  variables  are  from  E.  to  S.  and  from  S.  to  W.  and  in  ttummer  you 
have  calms  and  light.^nirs  from  S.  to  VV.  and  from  W.  to  N. 

On  thg  Eastern  Coast  of  Brazil,  between  the  months  of  September  and  March,  the 
winds  generally  prevail  from  N.  by  E.  to  N.  E.  by  E.  ;  between  March  and  September,  the 
prevailing  winds  are  from  E.  by  N.  to  E.  S.  E. 

The  former  of  these  is  generally  termed  the  Northerlt  Monsook,  and  the  latter,  the  iom- 
Ikerly  one  ;  although  there  appears,  in  fact,  to  be  no  direct  and  opposite  change  in  them  on  or 
about  the  equinoxes,  as  is  generally  the  case  with  the  winds  so  called. 

These  winds  arc  simply  a  continuation  of  the  S.  E.  trade,  lohich  changes  t(«  direction  as 
above  described,  and  as  influenced  by  the  land  on  its  approach  thereto.  The  influence  of  the 
land,  or  rather  of  its  temperature,  is  more  or  less,  according  to  tlie  action  of  the  sun  at  the 
particular  seasons  of  the  year.  When  the  sun  is  to  the  northward,  no  particular  ditference 
IS  observed  in  the  S.  E.  trade,  but  it  may  be  carried  within  sight  of  the  coast,  with  scarcely 
any  deviation  ;  nevertheless,  about  both  equinoxes,  but  more  especially  when  the  sun  is  ad- 
vancing to  the  northward,  calms  and  very  light  winds,  with  apparently  no  settled  quarter, 
will  prevail  near  the  coast ;  and  this  may  be  said  to  be  more  particularly  the  case  on  that  part 
of  it  betvveen  the  Abrolhos  and  Cope  Vrio.  As  the  sun  advances  to  the  Southward,  the 
trade-wind  will  generally  come  round  to  the  north-eastward,  and  will  have  its  retrograde 
movement  with  the  return  of  the  sun  to  the  equinox.  At  this  latter  season,  ships,  on  ap- 
proaching the  coast,  will  begin  to  observe  this  northerly  inclination  of  the  S.  E.  trade,  when 
within  four  or  fife  degrees  of  it,  and  which  they  will  find  gradually  to  increase  as  they  incline 
to  the  westward. 

Within  a  few  miles  of  tho  coast,  and  in  the  diflcrcnt  roadsteads  and  harbours,  the  wind 
generally  blows  directly  upon  it ;  and,  in  tho  deep  haniours,  and  upon    the  shore,  this  is, 

Smerally,  superseded  by  a  land-breeze  which  sometimes  lasts  the  greater  part  of  the  night, 
bout  Rio  de  Janeiro  this  landbrecze  sometimes  extends  as  far  seaward  as  Round  Isl- 
and, while  at  Pernambuco  it  rarely  reaches  the  roadstead. 

The  proceeding  remarks  are  those  of  Lieutenant  Hewett.  Pimcntel,  and,  alter  him,  M. 
D'Apres,  has  said  that  the  winds  of  the  northerly  monsoon,  between  September  and  March, 
ue  from  N.  E.  and  E.  N.  B.,  or  less  northerly  than  as  above  ;  and  that  those  of  the  souther- 
ly monsoon  are  from  E.  S.  E.  to  S.  S.  E.,  "r  more  southerly.  It  may,  therefore,  be  admit- 
ted, that  they  do  sometimes  prevail  more  from  the  south,  and  that  those  near  the  nnrtii  but 
Nidom  occur. 

Mr.  Lindlcy,  in  his  Narrative  ofa  Voyage  to  Brazil,  having  resided  a  considerable  time  on 
there,  at  Bahia,  &c.  has  described  the  in-shorc  wind  as  follows :  "  From  Cape  St.  Augustine, 
(southward,)  tho  wind  blows,  nine  months  in  tho  year,  chiefly  north-easterly  in  the  mornin|, 
tad  north-westerly  dutlng  the  evening  and  night :  this  continues  gradually  changing  along 

82 


660 


BLUNT  •    AMBRICAW   COAST    PILOT. 


ths  to%et,  till,  at  Rio  Janeiro  and  th«  Rio  Plata,  it  becomes  a  regular  land-breeze  flrom  cveii- 
ingtill  morning,  and  throughout  tbe  day  the  reverse.  During  the  three  stormy  months,  that 
is,  fk-om  the  latter  end  of  February  to  that  of  May,  the  wind  is,  generally,  southerly,  blowing 
Tcry  fresh  and  squally,  at  times,  from  the  south-west." 

Lieut.  Ilewett  has  observed  that,  the  winds  off  Cape  Frio  are  seldom  found  to  the  south- 
ward of  East  ;  and,  in  the  northern  monsoon,  they  are  generally  to  the  northward  of  N.  E. 
Heavy  and  violent  squalls  are  occasionally  met  with  in  rounding  the  Cape,  to  obviate  the  ef- 
fects of  which  every  precaution  is  required. 

The  same  officer  adds  that,  at  Riode  Janeiro,  the  sea-breez  varies  in  its  commencement 
from  ten  to  one  o'clock !»  the  forenoon,  and  osases  in  the  evening  between  the  hours  of  seven 
«nd  eleven.  At  ths  full  and  change  uf  the  moon,  violent  squalls  from  the  N.  W.,  named  by 
the  Portuguese, "  Tkrri:  Altos,''  immsdiately  supersede  the  sea  breeze,  lasting  from  four  to 
six  hours. 

Captain  Pefier  Heywood,  in  the  British  frigate  Nereus,  was  for  fhres  years  on  the  Brazil 
station,  and  the  greater  part  of  that  time  in  the  River  Plata.  This  gentleman  describes  the 
winds  Iiereabout  as  follows : 

"  At  the  Entrance  of  the  Riter  Plata,  the  prevailing  winds,  during  the  summer  months, 
from  September  to  March,  ore  norih-easterly,  with  tolerably  clear  weather  over  head,  but  a 
dense  atmosphere  near  the  horizon.  These  wimls  haul  gradually  to  the  eastward  as  you  ad- 
T&nce  up  the  river  ;  and,  about  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  strong  breezes  from  the 
south-eastward  are  common  at  this  season,  accompanied  with  rain  and  foul  weather.  At  Bue- 
nos-Ayres,  during  the  summer  months,  the  S.  £.  winds  arQ  generally  fresh  in  the  day-time, 
hauling  round  to  the  northward  in  the  night- 

"During  the  winter  months,  from  March  to  September,  the  prevailing  winds,  at  the  en- 
trace  of  the  Plata,  are  S.  W.  or  more  westerly  ;  but,  up  the  river,  more  generally  from  the 
northward,  than  from  the  southward,  of  west- 

"  The  winter  season  is  the  best,  in  point  of  weather,  at  Buenos- Ayres  ;  for  the  winds  being 
chiefly  from  N.  W.  to  S.  W.,  the  water  is  smooth,  and  the  communication  can  be  kept  up 
between  the  shore  and  the  shipping  with  more  facility.  The  weather  is  sometimes,  but  not 
frequently,  f<'ggy.  Fogs  are  most  common  in  the  months  of  July,  August,  and  September, 
and  prevail  more  at  the  entrance  of  the  river,  as  far  up  as  the  S.  E.  tail, of  the  Ortiz,  then 
above  the  banks." 

The  late  Captain  John  M'Bride,  of  the  Royal  Navy,  kept  a  regular  journal  of  the  winds 
and  weather  Ht  the  Falkland  islands,  from  1st  of  Ft-bruary,  1766,  to  19th  January,  1767, 
which  was  published  in  1775,  by  Mr.  Dalrymple.  The  journal  concludes  with  the  following 
general  remarks  : 

"  From  foregoing  over  the  following  journal  of  the  winds,  for  the  space  cf  one  year,  they 
will  be  found  to  prevail  in  the  western  quarter,  and  generally  blow  a  close  reefed  topsaD 
gale,  with  a  cool  air.  In  November,  the  winds  begin  to  be  more  frequent  in  the  N.  W. 
quarter,  generally  hazy  weather,  and  for  the  most  part  blow  about  sixteen  or  twenty  hours 
when  it  begins  to  rain  ;  the  wind  then  rcgulaiiy  shifts  into  the  westward,  and  so  on,  till  it 
gets  to  the  S.  W.  by  S.  and  S.  S.  W.  when  it  blows  fresh,  and  clears  up.  This  S.  S.  W.  wind 
continues  for  about  sixteen  hours,  then  dies  away,  when  the  wind  shifts  again  to  the  N.  W. 
quarter  ;  this  continues  during  December,  January,  ^nd  February,  and  changes  in  the  man- 
ner above-mentioned  every  three  or  four  days.  As  March  comes  on,  you  have  thege 
changes  but  seldom  ;  and,  aj  the  winter  advances,  they  are  seldom  in  the  N.  W.  quarter,  but, 
rather  incline  to  the  E.  N.  E.  which  is  generally  accompanied  with  sleet  and  snow.  There  is 
notthe  least  proportion  in  the  gales  between  winter  and  summer.  In  summer  (as  I  hav« 
before  observed)  as  the  winds  are  in  the  westward,  they  blow  in  stich  heavy  squalls  off  the 
tops  of  the  mountains,  that  it  is  sometimes  an  hour  before  a  cutter  can  row  to  the  shore,  al- 
though the  water  is  smooth,  and  the  distance  of  butonc  cable  and  a  half  off.  In  the  winter, 
the  winds  arc  pent  up  by  a  keen  frosty  air ;  the  must  lasting  galc9are  those  from  S.  by  E,  to 
B.  by  W.  and  arc  extremely  cold. 


A  CURRE^ 

Other  words,  as 

casioned  by  wir 

»f  the  tides.    I 

and  Tides  but  i 

mostly  in  those 

apparently  little 

will  be  obvious  I 

attention  to  the 

equally  apparen 

.  The  currents 

rience  has  showj 

where  he  is  to  e 

With  the  grea 

acquainted.    Its 

cd,  about  one  mi 

coast  of  Guyana 

>St  any  conside\ 

action  of  violent 

quently,  the  seas 

cur.„nt.     The  cu 

lariywhenitisol 

rocks  of  Bermuda 

from  the  islands, 

current  here  has  b 

wind;  at  other  ti 

To  continued  a 

from  Halifax  to  tl 

ned  the  bowsprit 

trance  of  Basque] 

the  products  of  Ja 

not  the  courses,  o 

eesoftimein  whi£ 

gation.    We  still  - 

The  Easterly  an 

^rWa  or  Gulf-Sti 

»»•  of  the  Azores. 

Mats  appear  to  foil 

•outhwardofthel 

JV.N.W.andWe 

Bermudas;  and,  ev( 

of  thepe  currents  h 

won,  are  still  des,v/„ 

merous,  but  they  ai 
that  theory  nhich  ( 
ation  of  the  Trade-, 
The  Currents  c 
and  combine,  in  soi 
luingo. 

The  Derro/ero  ad 
ofa  frigate,  has  con 
ofllccr,  "  the  curre 
fourth  quadrant,  (t 
^hey  are  found  setti 
Perlcctly  remcmbet. 
J211i;;jal<sthat,inJ„ 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT* 


661 


ICTCB- 


is,  tbat 
lowing 

I  south- 
fN.E. 
!  the  ef- 

icement 
of  seven 
imed  by 
a  four  to 

e  Brazil 

ribes  the 

{ monthii 
ad,  but  a 
IS  you  ad- 
from  the 
,  AtBue- 
;  day-time, 

it  the  en- 
from  the 


CURRENTS. 

A  CURRENT  is  at  present  to  be  understood  as  an  atmospherical  motion  of  the  water.  Iff 
Other  words,  as  a  stream  on,  or  a  particular  set  in  the  direction  of,  the  surface  of  the  sea,  oc- 
casioned by  winds  and  other  impulses,  exclusive  of  (but  which  may  be  influenced  by)  the  causes 
of  the  tides.  It  is  an  observation-  of  Dampier,  that  Currents  are  scarcely  ever  felt  but  at  sea, 
and  Tides  but  upon  the  coasts  ;  and  it  is  certainly  an  established  fact  that  currents  prevail 
mostly  in  those  parts  where  the  tides  are  weak  and  scarcely  perceptible  ;  or,  where  the  sea, 
apparently  little  influenced  by  the  causes  of  the  tide,  is  disposed  to  a  quiescent  state.  Thi» 
will  be  obvious  by  an  attentive  consideration  of  the  following  descriptions.  The  necessity  of 
attention  to  the  silent,  imperceptible,  and  therefore  dangerous,  operation  of  currents,  will  be 
equally  apparent. 

The  currents  of  the  Atlantic  are  all  of  a  local  and  mostly  of  a  temporary,  nature :  yet  expe- 
rience has  shown  where  and  how  they  predominate  ;  and  reason  will  inform  the  marineif 
where  he  is  to  expect  and  allow  for  their  operation. 

With  the  greatest  velocity  of  the  Equinoctial  current  ive  cannot  pretend  to  be  accurately 
acquainted.  Its  central  direction,  when  in  full  force,  is  W.  N.  VV.  and  generally,  it  is  imagia- 
cd,  about  one  mile  and  a  half  in  the  hour,  but  increasing  to  the  westward  ;  so  that  off  tho 
coast  of  Guyana  it  commonly  sets  at  the  rate  of  two  or  three  miles. 

,St  any  considerable  distance  from  the  Coast  of  America,  the  easterly  current,  caused  by  the 
action  of  violent  W.  orN.  W.  winds,  is  seldom  felt  to  the  southward  of  latitude  36°;  conse- 
quently, the  sea  about  the  Bermudas,  and  thence  southward,  is  free  from  the  influence  of  this- 
cur.-nt.  The  currents  here,  though  slow,  arc  produced  in  the  direction  of  the  wind,  partlcu' 
lariy  when  it  is  of  long  continuance.  These  currents  are  found  stronger  near  the  islands  and 
rocks  of  Bermudas  than  at  a  distance,  because  the  obstruction  whic!''.  the  water  meets  with 
from  the  islands,  causes  it  to  run  proportionably  faster  past  their  sides.  In  a  brisk  gale,  the 
currenthere  has  been  experienced  from  12  to  18  miles  in  24  hours,  in  the  direction  of  tht 
wind  ;  at  other  times,  when  the  wind  was  not  settled,  no  current  has  been  found. 

To  continued  westerly  winds  are  to  be  attributedi  the  common  occurrence  of  a  passage 
from  Halifax  to  tke  English  Channel  in  16  or  18  days*  with  such  currents  as  those  which  car- 
ried the  bowsprit  of  the  Little  Belt,  sloop  of  war,  lost  near  Halifax,  in  IS  months,  to  the  en- 
trance of  Basque  Roads.  The  currents  of  the  Atlantic,  have  sent  to  the  shores  of  the  Hebudes 
the  products  of  Jamaica  and  Cuba  and  of  the  soutiiern  parts  of  North-America ;  but  we  know 
not  the  courses,  or  tracks,  through  which  these  articles  may  have  been  impelled,  nor  the  spa- 
ces of  time  in  which  they  were  afloat :  all  this  is  conjectural,  and  furnishes  matter  for  investi- 
gation.   We  Btill  want  data,  or  a  more  extensive  knowledge  of  facts. 

The  Easterly  and  South  easterly  currents,  are  Wended  in  their  southern  regions,  with  the 
Florida  ox  Gulf-Stream,  desc-ibed  in  page  Ut.  &c.  and  they  do  not  seem  to  prevail  to  the  S. 
W.  of  the  Azores.  Qn  the  contrary,  to  the  W.  S.  W.  and  S.  W.  of  those  islands,  the  Cur- 
rents appear  to  follow  the  course  of  the  Tradc-wind«,  tov.ards  the  Caribbean  Sea  ;  and  to  the 
lOuthAvard  of  the  Tropic  they  blend  with  the  'Equatorial  Current,  which  sets  from  E.  S.  E.  to 
W.  N.  W.  and  West.  Towards  the  west,  they  occasionally  extend  to  the  northward  of  the 
Bermudas;  and,  even  unite  with  the  southern  edp;c  or  reflov)  of  the  Gulf-Stream.  The  existence 
of  thcpe  currents  has  loiig  been  known,  but  a  fiirllier  examination,  and  more  precise  informa- 
tion, arc  still  desiderata.  'I'lie  recent  examples  of  Ihcm  which  wc  have  to  adduce  are  not  nu- 
merous, but  they  are  satisfactory  ;  they  also  accord  with  natural  facts,  and  are  in  unison  with 
that  theory  which  derives  its  currents  from  the  rotary  movement  of  the  earth,  and  the  oper- 
ation of  the  Trade-winds. 

"  The  Currents  of  the  Caribbean  Sea  are  probably  varied  by  the  influence  of  the  moon, 
and  combine,  in  some  degree,  with  the  tides  ;  especially  about  Cuba,  Jamaica,  and  St.  Do- 
mingo. 

The  Derro/«ro  adds,  "  This  idea  is  confinnrd  by  what  i)ou  Torqualo  Pedrola,  the  c&ftoin 
of  a  frigate,  has  communicated  to  the  Hydrographit  Board.  Although,  generally,''  says  this 
officer,"  the  currents  between  the  Sj-tinish  Main  and  West-India  Islands  set  towards  the 
fourth  quadrant,  (that  is,  north-westerly,)  yet  it  sometimes,  though  seldom,  happens  that 
they  are  found  setting  to  the  first  quadrant,"  (or  N.  11.  :)  in  proof  of  which  he  states  that  he 
perfectly  rcmcmbets,  though  ho  cannot  give  the  elements,  in  consequence  of  having  lost  his 
journals,  that,  in  July,  I7'3r>  or  ll^d,  when  sailinp;  with  a  fresh  breeze  from  Santa  Martha  to 

"*■ — • — . _ mm 

*  rorlhe  ibuvlesl  |ia»8oge  yet  known,  see  note  ((•  page  !• 


652 


BLUIfT  8    AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


Aunaica,  in  a  schooner,  he  steered  for  Morant  Point ;  but  considering  that,  by  keeping  as 
etbse'hauled  as  that  course  required,  he  must  be  unable  to  make  it  before  the  day  was  spent, 
he  preferred  keeping  away,  to  make  the  land  to  leeward  of  it,  and  did  so  at  8  a.  m.  thus  aug- 
menting the  rate  of  the  vessel's  sailing.  At  noon  he  observed  the  latitude,  in  conjunction 
with  the  pilot,  Don  Miguel  Patina,  and  found  that  they  were  some  minutes  to  the  northward  of 
Moract Point ;  and,  keeping  away  \V.  by  S.  they  saw  it  at  two,  p.  m.  Although  they  calcu- 
lated the  direction  and  velocity  of  the  current,  he  remeTibers  only  that  it  was  to  the  N.  E. 
and  that  they  were  three  days  crossing  from  Santa  Martha  to  Jamaica. 

"  On  leaving  the  parallel  of  the  Bago  del  Coinboy  (15^  30')  the  firsttime  that  the  Spanish 
surveying  vessels  went  in  search  of  it,  and  being, to  leeward  of  the  meridian  under  which  the 
charts  placed  it,  by  12  leagues,  they  made  sail  so  that,  at  t!ic  rate  of  sailing,  they  expected  to 
join  the  brig  Merfa  next  evening,  as  they  knew  she  was  waiting  for  them  at  her  anchorage  at 
the  southernmost  of  the  Pedro  Keys.  At  8  a,  m.  next  duy,  a  vessel  was  seen  ahead,  which 
at  first  they  mistook  for  a  rock,  but  soon  made  out  that  it  was  a  vessel  at  anchor  ;  and,  by  9 
a.  m.  they  saw,  not  only  the  Alerta  at  anchor,  but  also  the  Pedro  Key,  towards  which  the  cur- 
rent carried  them  with  much  strength  ;  and,  in  spite  of  having  to  make  several  tacks,  in  or- 
der to  fetch  the  proper  channel,  they  were  anchored  beside  the  Alerta  by  mid-day.  The  com- 
mander does  not  recollect  the  longitude  he  observed  that  morning,  but  remembers  thaA  the 
current  had  carried  them  to  the  northward.  In  the  next  year,  when  surveying  the  west  end 
of  the  Pedro  shoals,  they  found  the  current  nearly  the  same  ;  and  this  ought  to  be  a  warning 
to  navigators  not  to  make  too  free  with  the  southern  edge  of  the  Pedro  Shoals  during  the 
■ight. 

"  Much  current  has  also  been  found  near  the  Baxo  ^levo,  lat.  15°  50'  and  long.  78°  40'  as 
was  remarked  by  the  brig  Alerta,  when  near  its  northern  extremity.  The  same  is  the  case  on 
it«  southern  side  ;  for,  in  prior  years,  the  schooner  St.  Gregorio,  bound  from  Garthagena  to 
Trinidad,  saw  the  south  und  of  the  shoal  at  4  p.  m.  At  5,  she  was  three  miles  from  it ;  but, 
noticing  that  the  current  set  strongly  towards  the  shoal,  they  set  all  sail  and  ran  to  the 
■outh  until  they  considered  the  vessel  nine  miles  from  the  southern  point ;  and  the  following 
morning  tacked  to  sight  it,  which  she  did  not  effect,  having  doubtless  passed  to  leeward 
ofit. 

*'  In  more  than  thirty  voyages  made  by  Captain  Pedrola,  from  the  Spanish  Main  to  Porto- 
Rico,  St.  Domingo,  and  Cuba,  sometimes  with  chronometers,  and  at  others  without  them,  he 
nrmarked  that,  between  the  last  two  islands  and  the  coast  of  the  Main,  sixteen  miles  daily  might 
be  counted  on  for  a  westerti/curent,  but  not  so  much  for  the  former.'' 

in  the  J^emoir,  3d  edition,  p.  68,  9,  was  this  passage: — "The  trade-wind  blows,  with 
■trong  and  continued  vigour,  at  certain  seasons,  particularly  in  the  winter  months,  and  roll 
the  waves,  over  a  great  extent  of  sea,  into  the  great  bay  westward  of  Cartbagena,  whicli  we 
hftve  called  the  Bay  of  Guatemala.  This  may  cause,  nt  times,  ;>n  outset,  but  no  constant  cur- 
rent is  to  be  found."  To  this  is  added,  in  the  Derrotero,  "  Amonf  the  original  papers  poi- 
lesaed  by  the  Deposito  Hidrografica,  the  following  observations,  'jy  different  officers,  have  been 
found,  which  may  tend  to  throw  some  light  upon  the  matter. 

•'  In  the  examination  of  the  coast  between  Poi'lo  Velo  (Porto  Bello)  and  the  Bocas  del  Tort, 
made  in  1787,  by  Don  Fabian  Abances,  he  found  on  that  coast,  in  the  month  of  April,  strong 
currents  setting  to  the  E.  N.  E.  at  the  rate  of  two  miles  an  hour ;  so  th:  c,  heaving-to  at  r '<>;bt, 
oiTCocle  Point,  he  found  himself,  in  the  morning,  up  at  Cliagre  :  the  winds  at  the  time  were 
either  calm  or  squally  from  tho  south-westward.  Don  Fabian  proceeded  to  the  northward, 
to  the  parallel  of  10  degrees,  and  then  met  with  winds  from  North  and«N.  N.  E.  with  which 
he  steered  West  and  W.  N.  W.  until  he  considered  himself  10  Icaguea  to  the  West  of  the  Bo- 
COS  del  Toro:  but  the  current  had  carried  him  to  the  E.  S.  h.  ;  so  that,  when  he  expected  to 
make  the  Bocas,  he  found  himself  at  the  point  of  Miguel  de  Borda  about  5  leagues  to  the 
westward  of  Cbagre.  During  the  whole  time,  from  leaving  Porto  Vnio,  he  never  gained 
an  observation,  the  weather  being  adverse.  On  the  11th  of  May  he  noticed  thut  the  waters 
of  the  Lagoon  of  Chirqui  run  out  through  the  Bocas  with  violence,  and  formed,  at  a  short 
diatance  from  the  coast,  an  angle  bending  to  the  E,  S.  E." 

Again,  "The  captain  of  the  ship  of  the  line,  Don  Pedro  de  Obregon,  in  the  month  of  July, 
was  bound  firom  the  Rio  Tinlo  (Black  River)  to  the  Havanna,  and  he  experienced  currents  to 
the  north-weitvoard,  with  winds  from  the  N.  E..  E.  N.  E.,  squalls,  and  calms,  and  in  sucha 
manner  that  he  made  the  Tortugas  Bank  of  Florida,  without  having  been  able  to  sight  Cape 
Antonio  or  west  end  of  Cuba." 

**  DonJoaoquin  de  Amnsolo  andla  Azuela,  in  July,  found  strong  currents  to  the  S.  W.  of 
CapeGracias  a  Dios,  after  having  strong  winds  from  the  E.  N.  E.  and  E.  S.  E.  with  squalls ; 
and  iVom  the  said  cnpe  to  the  westward  he  found,  also,  that  the  current  took  the  same  course; 
and  he  concludes  that,  after  he  had  made  Providence  Island,  and  until  be  arrived  at  Black 
Birer,  the  currents  were  strong  to  the  West  and  S.  W. 

*'  The  Captain  of  a  frigate,  Don  Oonzalo  Valhjo,  when  at  anchor  on  the  Mosquito  coast 
■ear  Barrancas,  orBragman'i  BlufT,  observed  that  the  current  set  to  the  north,  at  tberi^tao/ 
NAtf  mora  than  half  a  aila  irrthe  hour." 


"  Finally, 

na  to  the  Gu 

much  force  t( 

followed  no  I 

between  then 

the  channel  b 

*'ngtotheN. 

Near  the  pi 

be  imagined  t( 

Southern  Anti 

From  the  m 

to  the  Equator 

the  current  is « 

Off  the  coas 

and  another  ca 

or  in  the  depth 

perienced.    Tl 

also,  the  tide  ii 

"  In  the  soul 

seldom  under  j 

its  exact  direct! 

.    "On  the  Col 

islands,  inclinin 

running  abnut  a 

coast,  and  parti( 

at  times,  runs  to 

of  the  current  ru 

a  branch,  which 

coast  about  Cart 

degrees  of  latitud 

current  runs  to  tl 

."  On  the  Mosi 

ations  of  the  curr 

been  found  settin 

"In  crossing  fi 

fromLaGuayra,! 

ence  of  106  miles 

Derrotero  de  las  j. 

Mr.  Town,  in  1 

Island  of  Jamaica 

not  always  prevai 

miles  to  the  eastw 

rainy  season,)  the 

should  never  go  t< 

to  the  westward  oi 

land-breeze,  whic 

to  the  eastward  of 

light  winds  prevail 

will  be  between  th 

"Bei„;^offPor 

iolo,  n  11.1  being  a 

the  ship  was  set  to 

wards  placed  in  th( 

and  to  keep  close  t( 

to  make  the  la  .d  v 

Wow  very  stiongly 

miles  in  an  hour. 

"  Between  Chag 
current,  at  the  rate 
the  rainy  season  tl 
eaaterlv  winds  prev 
westerly  are  very  li 
you  will  often  have 
....'•^"tChagre.at 
«Vtward,  cndeavou 
^  are,  in  genera 


BLUNt's  AMERICArf    C0A3T    PILOT. 


653 


pingM 
J  spent, 

iU8  aug- 
unction 
iwardof 
y  calcu- 

.  N 


£. 


Spanish 
^hicb  tb© 
lected  to 
aor&ge  at 
id,  which 
and,  by  9 
li  thecut- 
iks,  in  or- 
The  com- 
,  that  the 
.  west  end 
a  warning 
during  the 

78°  40'  «8 
the  case  on 
tbagena  to 

jm  it  5  ^"ti 

ran  to  the 

ae  foilowing 

1  to  leeward 

tin  to  Porto- 
)ut  them,  he 
8  daily  might 

Wows,  with 
nths,  and'oU 
I,  wbicli  we 
lonstant  cur- 
papers  pos- 
•rs,  have  been 

teas  del  Tm, 
April,  strong 
g.toati"'«;ht, 
the  time  were 

northward, 
^.  with  which 
est  of  the  Bo- 
lecxpecledto 
Bogues  to  the 
never  gained 
lat  the  waters 

5,  at  a  short 

lonth  of  July, 
ed  currents  to 
nd  in  such  a 
|to  sight  Cape 

khe  S.  W.  of 

with  squalls  i 

J  same  course; 

fived  atBl&cli 

jsquito  cou^ 
I,  at  tb«  «•<'•«' 


ii 


**  Finally, "  Don  Ignacio  ^anjust,  commanding  the  frigate  Flora,  on  a  voyage  from  Havac- 
na  to  the  Gulf  of  Honduras,  and  being  off  Caballos  Point,  noticed  that  the  current  ran  with 
much  force  to  the  N.  £.  in  the  month  of  December  ;  and  he  adds  that,  in  this  gulf,  the  currents 
followed  no  known  rule  ;  that  neni  the  keys  they  run  with  violence,  and  into  the  channels 
between  them ;  so  that  by  them  l.  vessel,  during  a  calm,  may  soon  be  carried  on  the  reefs.  In 
the  channel  between  the  keys  and  coast  of  Honduras,  to  the  south,  the  ivater  was  found  set* 
ting  to  the  N.  £.  and,  near  the  coast,  to  the  East.'' 

Near  the  parallel  of  10*^  N.  the  Currents  produced  by  the  N.  E.  and  S.  E.  trade-winds  may 
be  imagined  to  unite  ;  and  this  united  stream,  being  divided  by  the  island  of  Trinidad  and  the 
Southern  Antillas,  thence  passes  into  the  Caribbean  Sea. 

From  the  mouths  of  the  Amazon,  Orinoco,  and  other  rivers,  avast  efflux  of  water  falls  in- 
to the  Equatorial  Sea,  more  particularly  in  the  wet  season :  what  cfiect  this  water  may  have  on 
thecurrent  is  at  present  unknown.  But  we  learn,  from  the  Derrotero  de  las  Antillas,  thtA, 
"  Off  the  coasts  of  Guyana  there  arc  two  currents  :  1st,  The  general  or  equinoctial  current, 
and  another  caused  by  the  tides  ;  the  boundary  of  the  first  is  twelve  leagues  from  shore, 
or  in  the  depth  of  9  fathoms  of  water,  from  which,  towards  the  shore,  that  of  the  tide  is  ex- 
perienced. The  ebb  sets  to  the  N.  E.  and  the  flood  towards  shore.  In  the  Gulf  of  Paria, 
also,  the  tide  inflaence's  the  currents. 

"  In  the  southern  straits,  or  channels  of  the  Antillas,  the  velocity  of  the  current  inward  is 
seldom  under  a  mile  an  hour  ;  but  its  changes  are  so  great,  that  it  is  impossible  to  point  out 
its  exact  direction,  or  to  establi_:.  any  general  rule  for  its  velocity." 

"  On  the  Colombian  coast,  from  Trinidad  to  Cape  la  Vela,  the  current  sweeps  the  frontier 
islands,  inclining  something  to  the  south,  according  to  the  Straits  which  it  comes  from,  and 
running  aboiit  a  mile  and  a  half  an  hour,  with  little  diHerencc.  Between  the  islands  and  the 
coast,  and  particularly  in  the  proximity  of  the  latter,  it  has  been  remarked  that,  the  current, 
at  times,  runs  to  the  West,  and  at  others,  to  <.hc  East.  From  Cape  la  Vela,  the  principal  part 
of  the  current  runs  W.  N.  VV.  ;  dnd,  as  it  spreads,  its  Telocity  diminishes  :  there  is,  however, 
a  branch,  which  runs  with  the  velocity  of  about  a  miln  an  hour,  directing  itself  towards  the 
coast  about  Carthagena :  from  this  pomt,  and  in  the  space  of  sea  comprehended  between  14 
degrees  of  latitude  and  the  coast,  it  has,  however,  been  observed,  that,  in  the  dry  season,  the 
current  runs  to  the  westward,  and  in  the  season  of  the  rains,  to  the  eastward. 

"  On  the  Mosquito  Shore,  and  in  the  Bay  of  Honduras,  no  rule  can  be  given  for  the  alter- 
ations of  the  current.  All  that  can  be  said  is,  at  a  good  distance  from  land,  it  has  generally 
been  found  setting  towards  the  N.  VV. 

"In  crossing  from  the  coast,  or  from  Carthagena,  to  the  islands,  it  has  been  observed,  that, 
fromLaGuayra,  to  the  eastern  part  of  St.  Domingo,  on  a  voyage  made  in  December,  a  differ- 
ence of  106  miles  to  the  westward  was  found  during  the  seven  days  the  voyage  lasted."— 
Derrotero  de  las  Antillas. 

Mr.  Town,  in  his  Directions  for  the  Colombian  coast,  has  said,  "  Although,  between  the 
Island  of  Jamaica  and  the  Spanish  Main,  westerly  currents  are  most  frequent,  yet  they  do 
not  always  prevail ;  for  ships  have  been  known  to  be  driven  by  thecurrent  from  50  to  60 
miles  to  the  eastward,  in  four  or  five  days.  From  the  beginning  of  May  till  November,  {the 
rainy  season,)  the  sea  breeze  seldom  or  never  blows  home  to  the  main :  and  ships  going  there 
should  never  go  to  the  southward  of  the  latitude  of  11"^,  until  they  are,  at  least,  40  or  50  miles 
to  the  westward  of  their  intended  port;  after  which  they  may  make  a  south  course,  as  the 
land-breeze,  which  is  generally  from  the  S.  VV.,  and  the  strong  easterly  current,  will  set  you 
to  the  eastward  of  your  intended  port,  if  great  care  be  not  taken.  When  to  the  eastward,  if 
light  winds  prevail,  you  must  stand  to  the  northward  until  you  meet  the  sea-breeze,  which 
will  be  between  the  latitudes  of  10  and  11  degrees,  and  then  run  to  the  westward. 

*'  Beinp;  off  Porto- Bello,  in  his  Majesty's  ship  Salisbury,  on  or  about  the  12th  of  August, 
1816,  nnd  being  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  that  port,  with  light  variable  winds  for  several  days, 
the  ship  was  set  to  the  eashoan/,  at  the  rate  of  fifty  miles  per  day  ;  and,  having  been  after- 
wards placed  in  the  same  situation,  I  found  it  necessary  to  make  the  land  well  to  the  westward, 
and  to  keep  close  to  it.  From  November  until  May,  (^Ihe  dry  season,)  you  should  endeavour 
to  make  the  lo  .d  well  to  the  eastward,  andj  run  along  shore  ;  as  the  sea-breezes  generally 
blow  very  stiongly,  and  the  current  sets  to  the  westward  at  the  rate  of  about  two  or  three 
miles  in  an  hour. 

"  Between  ChagreandPorto-Bello,  during  the  rainy  season,  there  is  generally  a  northerly 
current,  at  the  rate  of  from  one  and  a  half  to  two  ond  a  hiilf  miles  an  hour.  After  the  end  of 
the  rainy  season  the  current  sets  to  the  southward  and  westward,  and  strong  southerly  and 
easterly  winds  prevail  here.  From  November  until  May  (t,.;  di-y  season,)  the  southerly -and 
westerly  are  very  light  winds,  except  in  squalls,  which  end  with  heavy  rain.  Insuddsn  squalls, 
you  will  often  have  the  winds  from  all  points  of  the  compass. 

"  If  at  Chagre,  at  any  time  during  the  rainy  season,  (May  till  November,)  and  bound  to  the 
eutward,  endeavour  to  get  <'our  or  five  leagues  from  the  land,  so  soon  as  you  can ;  Cor  the 
*    '^are,  in  general,  very  light,  and  the  current  very  strong.    The  latter  sets  from  Chagre 


634 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  CCJAST  PILOT. 


directly  on  the  rocks  of  Porto-Bello,  and  thence  along  the  land  from  E.  by  N.,  E.  N.  E.,  B; 
S.  E.,  and  according  as  the  land  lie«  :  its  general  rate  being  from  one  and  a  half  to  two  and  a 
half  miles  in  an  hour.  Great  care  should  be  taken  when  near  the  land,  if  a  heavy  squall  and 
rain  appear  to  be  coming  on*  During  this  you  will  have  the  wind  from  all  points  of  the  com- 
pass, and  often  so  strong  that  all  sail  must  be  taken  in . 

"  In  crossing  the  Gulf  of  Darien,  little  or  no  current  will  be  found  j  whenever  there  is  any, 
it  sets  about  South,  S.  by  W .  or  S.  by  E.,  up  the  Gulf. 

"  Near  Carthagena  the  current  generally  goes  with  the  wind  ;  but  off  the  Islands  of  Rosarito 
it  sets  to  the  N.  VV.  and  N.  N.  ^V.  from  one  to  two  miles  an  hour. 

"  Between  Carthagena  and  the  Magdalena,  in  the  rainy  season,  you  cannot  put  any  de- 
pendence on  the  winds  or  currents ;  but,  from  November  to  May,  the  trade-wind  blows 
homo. 

"  I  should  recommend,  if  turning  to  windward,  with  strong  trade-winds,  to  keep  the  shore 
close-to  :  whereas,  by  going  off  from  the  land,  you  will  not  only  have  a  heavy  sea,  but  also  a 
strong  N.  W.  currq;it.  If  you  have  light  variable  winds,  approach  no  nearer  to  to  the  land 
than  4  or  5  leagues,  as  you  may  be  certain  of  an  easterly  current." 

Captain  Livingston  says,  "  During  five  weeks  in  which  1  remained  at  Carthagena,  in  June 
and  July,  1817,  the  current  in-Lliore  (ct  constantly  and  strongly  to  the  northward,  at  a  rate, 
I  am  convinced,  of  not  less  than  a  milo  and  a  half  an  hour,  or  nearly  as  strong  as  the  Miss- 
issippi at  New-Orleans.  I  have  seen  the.  Esk,  sloop  of  war,  cnrrent-rode  against  a  very  fresh 
sea-breeze,  when  at  anchor,  nearly  west  from  the  city,  distant  about  a  mile." 

Upon  the  Current  between  the  Gran.)  Catman  and  Cape  Antonio,  Captain  Monteath 
has  said,  "  In  the  months  of  May,  1814  and  1S15,  (two  voyages  in  which  I  was  chief-mate  of 
the  ship  Piince  Regent,  from  Kingston,)  in  June,  1S17,  in  the  ship  Fame;  ,?nd  in  April  and 
December,  1320,  in  the  ship  Mary,  Ictween  Grand  Cayman  Island  and  Cape  Antonio,  I  in- 
variably found  the  current  setting  strong  to  the  eastward,  or  E.  ti.  E.  ;  and  1  have  heard  it 
generally  remarked  that,  vessels  shaping  a  course  from  the  Caymans  for  Cape  Antonio,  have 
found  themselves  off,  or  even  to  the  eastward  of.  Cape  Corrientes  :  this  has,  in  the  tlbove  cas- 
es, invariably  happened  to  myself. 

Farther  on,  "  In  my  passage  from  Kingston,  towards  Campeche,  in  the  ship  Fame,  June, 
1817,  between  Cape  Antonio  and  Cape  Catoche,  I  found  the  Current  to  set  due  Jforth,  27 
miles  in  a  run  of  IS  hours. 

We  have  already  given,  in  the  proceeding  page,  the  remark  of  the  Spanish  navigators  on 
the  currents  of  the  Mosquito  Shore  and  Bay  of  Honduras.  We  now  add  those  of  Captains 
W.  J.  Capes,  of  London,  and  John  Burnett,  of  Port-Glasgow. 

Captain  Capes  says,,  "  Between  Jamaica  and  Bonacca  the  current  generally  sets  to  the 
northward  and  westward.  Here,  in  May,  1316,  I  was  set  60  miles  to  the  westward  by  the 
current,  and  found  that  it  set  rather  northerly,  from  one  quarter  to  half  a  mile  an  hour.  Be- 
tween Jamaica  and  Bonacca  are  the  islands  called  the  Swan  Islands,  in  latitude  17*^22',  long. 
83°  36'.  I  would  not  advise  any  one  bound  to  the  Bay  to  make  these  islands,  for  it  cannot  be 
of  service,  and  the  current  is  so  very  irregular  about  them,  that  the  attempt  serves  only  to 
bewilder  the  navigator  ;  and,  by  falling  in  with  them  in  a  dark  night,  a  ship  would  be  in  dan- 
ger of  running  on  shore,  as  the  land  is  very  low. 

"  About  the  SooxHEnN  Fonu  Keys  the  currents  are  very  uncertain.  I  have  known  three 
ships  to  be  lost  on  these  Keys  by  lying-to  for  the  night,  after  they  have  made  them  ;  for,  at 
all  times,  the  current  sets  strongly  on  them  ;  and,  in  two  of  the  cases,  the  ships  wore  every 
two  hours,  with  an  intention  to  keep  their  station.  In  one  voyage  I  took  my  departurr,  from 
Bonacca  at  four  p.  »n.  with  a  strong  breeze  from  the  East,  which  continued  till  midnight ;  it 
then  died  away,  (no  uncommon  circumstance  in  this  part,)  sathat  I  did  not  lift  the  Southern 
Four  Keys  before  four  p.  m.  the  next  day,  from  the  four-yard.  I  then  made  all  snug,  and  pli- 
ed to  windward,  under  single-reefed  topsails  and  top-gallant  sails  over  them  ;  tacked  ship 
every  three  hours,  during  ni^ht,  and,  to  my  surprise,  in  the  morning,  we  were  not  mors  than 
one  or  two  miles  to  windward  of  them  ;  so,  if  I  had  hove  the  ship  to,  I  have  no  doubt  hut  she 
would  have  been  driven  on  shore  by  the  current. 

"  If  a  ship  be  lying-to,  under  Rattax,  it  will  not  be  amiss  to  try  the  current.  It  is  my 
opinion  that  the  current  about  Bonacca  lakes  two  different  directions  ;  one  part  setting  to  the 
N.  W.,  and  the  other  part  branching  to  the  S.  S.  W.  I  have  found  it  so  on  several  trials, 
which  is  the  reason  that  I  prefer  taking  a  departure  (for  the  Bay)  from  the  middle  or  East  end 
of  Rattan  :  for,  if  a  ship  take  her  departure  from  the  West  end,  her  course  will  be  N.  N.  W. ; 
but  it  very  frequently  happens  that  >hips  get  down  on  those  retfswhen  they  take  their  depar- 
ture from  the  West  end.  The  reason  is  this  :  a  ship  steering  N.  VV.  from  the  AVest  end  has 
more  of  the  current  on  her  beam,  which  sweeps  round  the  West  end  of  Rattan  very  strong  at 
times  ;  consequently,  ships  that  taketheir  departure  from  the  East  or  middle  part  do  not  feel 
■0  much  of  the  current.'* 

Captain  Burnett,  in  his  directions  for  sailing  from  the  Bat  of  Honduras,  says,  "  when 
th«  trade-wind  prevails,  a  current,  often  very  stronjj,  r,cts  doAvn  between  Mauger  Key  and  the 


BLUJST  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


653 


I.,  B; 

and  a 

Hand 

com- 

I  any, 

)Barito 

iny  de- 
blows 

e  shore 
t  also  a 
tie  land 

in  June 
I  a  rate, 
le  Miss- 
sry  fresh 

lonteath 
'-mate  of 
Lpril  and 
lio,  I  in- 
heard  it 
nio,  have 
bove  cas- 

ic,  June, 
Korth,  27 

igatcrs  on 
'  Captains 

cts  to  the 
jrd  by  the 
our.    Be- 
22',  long, 
cannot be 
only  to 
be  in  dan- 
own  three 
for,  at 
ore  every 
turr,  from 
night ;  it 
Southern 
g,  and  pli- 
.eked  ship 
mors  than 
bt  but  she 

It  is  my 

ting  to  the 
;ral  trials, 
r  East  end 
^.N.  W.; 
leir  depar- 
t  end  has 
strong  at 
Jo  not  ft?el 

L  "when 
Icy  and  the 


Northern  Triangle ;  there,  dividing  itself,  it  sets  to  the  southward,  between  Turneff  and  th« 
Main  Reef,  and  to  the  northward  between  the  Triangle  Uccf  and  Ambergris  Key.  It  is  mo»t 
advisable,  with  the  wind  from  the  East  to  E.  S.  E.  to  sail  to  leeward  of  the  Triangle,  as  you 
will  have  a  strong  current  in  your  favour  so  soon  as  you  bring  it  to  the  eastward  of  you. 

"  In  the  channel,  between  the  island  Cosuincl  and  tlie  shore,  the  current  along  shore  runs  at 
the  rate  of  nearly  2i  mites  an  hour,  till  lost  in  the  Mexican  Sea." 

Mexican  Stream,  4"c. — It  is,  we  believe,  a  well-established,  although  a  controverted  fact, 
that  there  is  a  constant  indraught  on  the  western  side  of  the  Channel  of  Yucatan, into  the 
Mexican  Sea ;  and  that  there  is  commonly  a  rcflow  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  same  channel 
around  Cape  Antonio,  &c. 

With  the  former  in  its  favour,  his  Majesty's  ship  Resistance,  Captain  Adam,  off  the  Bank 
of  Yucatan,  made  a  course  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  nearly  SO  leagues  in  the  24  hour-,  Deccnkbcr  16 
and  17, 1806  ;  *  and  we  have  no  doubt  that  many  instances  may  be  found  to  prove  the  same 
effect ;  on  the  Cuba  side  only,  it  appears  that  vessels  have  been  set  to  the  southward  ;  and 
Captain  Manderson  has  stated  that,  when  a  strong  easterly  wind  has  been  blowing  between 
Cuba  and  Florida,  vessels  hcaving-to  off  the  South  side  of  Cape  Antonio,  at  about  two  leagues 
from  shore,  have,  in  the  course  of  one  night,  been  carried  against  a  strong  sea-breeze,  nearly 
as  high  as  Cape  Conicntes,  being  a  distance  of  10  leagues.! 

From  Cape  Antonio  the  current  sets,  at  times,  to  the  E.  S.  E.,  past  the  Isle  of  Fines. — 
Captuir.  Livingston  has  informed  us  that,  in  March,  1818,  he  found  the  current  between  the 
Great  Cayman  and  Isle  of  Pines  to  set  in  tliat  tlirection,  at  the  rate  of  full  two  miles  and  a  half 
an  hour,  or  60  miles  in  the  24  hours.  In  August,  1S17,  he  found  the  set  nearly  the  same,  but 
the  current  not  half  so  strong.  The  Spanish  Directory  says,  'From  Cape  dc  Cruz,  on  the 
South  side  of  Cuba,  it  is  noticed  that  there  is  a  constant  current  to  the  loeslward,  with  some 
inclination  to  the  southward  or  northward,  and  which  has  been  known  sometimes  to  set  20 
miles  in  a  single  day.'  In  opposition  to  this,  the  exact  words  of  Captain  Livingston  are, "  I  have 
iwice  experienced  a  stron;j;  current  setting  about  E.  S.  E.  between  the  Caymans  and  Isle  of 
Pines  ;  and,  on  the  latter  of  these  occasions,  both  my  mate  and  myself  separately  calculated  it 
to  set  about  60  miles  per  day  or  2^  per  hour.  This,  however,  I  incline  to  think  a  very  parti- 
cular case,  such  as  may  but  seldom  occur.  The  winds  at  this  time  were  light  and  westerly. 
On  the  other  occasion,  so  far  as  1  recollect,  it  set  about  12  or  14  miles  per  day  only.  All 
my  papers  on  these  subjects  have  been  lost ;  but  the  first  instance  was  too  remarkable  to  be 
foi^jotten." 

On  the  northevn  coast  of  St.  Doming-o,  and  in  the  Windward  Passages,  there  does  not  ap- 
pear to  be  any  general  current.  On  the  North  side  of  Cuba  the  case  is  nearly  the  same  ; 
but  in  the  channel  here  is  a  regular  tide  throughout  the  year,  bubject  however,  to  certain  va- 
riations. 

The  currents  of  the  Caribbean  Sea  are  probably  varied  by  the  influence  of  the  moon  and 
change  of  seasons,  and  combine,  in  some  degree,  with  the  tides  ;  especially  about  Cuba,  Ja- 
maica and  St.  Domingo. I 

In  an  old  book,  (Kelly's  Navigation,  Vol.  I.  1733,)  is  an  abstract  from  a  journal,  which 
contains  the  following  passage  : — "  Between  the  West  end  of  Hispaniola  and  the  island  of 
Jamaica,  if  I  took  my  departure  upon  a  full  or  change  of  the  moon,  I  found  that  I  made 
many  leagues  more  than  I  did  at  the  quarters  of  the  moon.  At  the  full  and  change,  I  was 
looking  out  for  the  land  long  before  1  saw  it  ;  and,  at  the  quarters,  I  was  down  '  on  itlong 
before  I  looked  for  it.  The  reasons,  as  I  found  afterwards,  were,  that  the  full  and  change 
made  a  strong  windward  current,  and  the  contrary  on  the  quarters.  This  has  been  exempli- 
fied in  many  instances.'' 

Dn  this  subject  Captain  Livingston  says,  "  It  is  a  prevailing  opinion  with  many,  that  the 
moon  governs  entirely  the  currents  among  the  West- India  Islands.  No  doubt  the  moon 
has  some  effect  on  them,  but  I  am  of  opinion  that  the  winds  have  still  a  more  powerful  in- 
fluence. 

"  It  is  rarely,  indeed,  on  the  North  side  of  the  island  of  Jamaica  that  there  is  a  westerly 
current  when  the  North  and  N.  VV.  winds  prevail ;  the  current  then  always,  or  almost  always, 
tettbg  to  the  eastward. 

"  On  the  South  side  of  Cuba,  when  the  wind  is  westerly,  which  it  often  is,  you  are  always 
certain  of  a  re-flowing  current  round  Cape  Antonio.  This  is  easily  accounted  for  ;  as,  when 
the  fresh  trade- wind  ceases,  and  the  westerly  winds  set  in,  the  barrier  is,  in  some  degree. 


*  The  northernmost  part  of  llic  track  extenil  to  24°  £0'  N.  longitude  00"  30'  W. 

t  Our  friend  Captiiin  Rowland  Dourlie,when  once  lying-to  lorthe  night,  ofl"  Cape  Antonio,  found  bimseirnext 
msniing  ofTCaiie  Corriuntcf. 

t  Captain  Colter,  of  tlie  ship  Roliert,  IVom  the  Clyde,  some  years  since  tlirew  a  liottle  overl)oard  to  flie  east 
w«rd  of  Alto-vela,  on  the  south  const  of  llayli,  and  about  thirteen  months  afterwards  he  saw  a  Charleston  news- 
Mper,  at  Kingston,  Jamaica,  which  stated  tliat  the  bottle  had  bt-ed  picked  up  on  the  shore,  near  St.  Mary'f,  in- 
Florida. 


i  .  i,il 


656 


blunt's 


•AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


remored,  irhich  confined  the  waters  in  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  they  seek  to  regain  their  leTol 
••  well  by  the  Channel  of  Yucatan  as  by  the  Strait  of  Florida." 

In  the  Windward  Channel  of  Jamaica  the  current  gin«rally  sets  with  the  wind  to  leeward  or 
S.W. ;  yet,  both  here  and  at  Jamaica,  it  is  variable.  'jSume  have  affirmed  that,  when  a  current 
runs  to  leeward,  on  the  South  side  of  Jamaica,  there  is  frequently  one  setting  eastward  on  the 
North  side  ;  and,  at  other  times,  no  current  is  to  be  perceived  ;  also  that,  when  alee-current 
runs  on  the  North  shore,  the  s^me  circumstances  may  be  perceived  on  the  South  shore  as  were 
before  observed  on  the  North. 

But  between  the  Mona  Passage  and  the  Caymans,  South  of  the  islands,  the  tendency  of  the 
curNnts  towards  shore  is  most  commonly  found  to  be  to  the  north-westward. 

In  the  Bahama  Passages  the  currents  are  devious  ;  both  weather  and  lee-currents  faaving 
beei\  found.  Theee,  also,  appear  to  be  influenced  by  the  tidal  causes ;  for  the  tides  are  oper- 
ative on  the  Banks,  and  sometimes  set  strongly. 

The  voLLov'iNG  is  an  additional  detail  of  the  best  information  we  have  been  able  to 
4:'ille<'  ,  of  Uie  Currents  in  the  Caribbean  and  Mexican  Seas,  from  the  Derrotero  de  las  ^ntOku, 
^^. 

J:.,  ih  ^V\annel  between  Trinidad  and  Grenada  the  current  hai  been  found  to  set  nearly 
V>  '  it;  c  J  '>e  South  side  half  a  point  southerly,  and  on  the  north  side  half  a  point  northerly. 
Iti^  '.jiocity  ''    a  a  mile  to  a  mile  and  a  half  per  hour. 

Between  <i/  .nda  and  St.  VincenVs,  among  the  Grenadines,  the  currents  are  devious  ;  but 
the  general  inset  appears  to  be  W.  by  N. 

Between  St.  VincenVs  and  St.  Lucia  the  current,  from  the  eastward,  sets  in  more  northerly  , 
■nd  within,  on  the  West,  it  has  been  found  setting  to  the  N.  W.  Between  these  islands  it 
seems  to  be  as  strong  as  in  any  otber  part  of  the  range. 

Between  St.  Lucia  and  Martinique  it  has  been  found  nearly^  North.  Very  variable  on  the 
western  side  of  the  latter. 

The  current  sets  nearly  in  the  same  manner  between  Martinique,  and  Dominica;' hat,  to  the 
north-westward  of  the  latter,  it  has  been  found  nearly  S.  VV.  three-fourths  of  a  mile  hourly. 
JVor/Atoard  of  Guadaloupe  it  sets  W,  \  S.  ana  heiween  Montserr at  and  Antigua  N.  W. 
Between  Redonda  and  J^evis  it  has  been  found  VV.  S-  VV.  half  a  mile  hourly. 
Without  Barbuda  and  the  northern  isles,  iffaas  set  about  VV.  by  N.  and  to  the  northward  of 
the  Virgin  Isles  and  Porto-Rico  about  W.  S.  W^.  ' 

At  the  distance  of  aboujt  one  degree,  loilhin  the  range  of  the  Caribbee  Islands,  and  to  the  Vir- 
gin Islands,  the  Current  has  been  found  setting,  in  general,  to  tbe  VV.  N.  W.  from  one  mile  to 
one  mile  and  a  half  an  hour- 

In  the  Mona  Passage,  between  Porto-Rico  and  Hayti,  the  current  has  been  marked  as  fre- 
quently setting  to  the  N.  W.and  we  have  instances  of  a  set  through  to  the  S.W.  but  Captain 
Monteath,  in  February,  1S16,  when  proceeding  southward  towards  Porto-Rico,  in  from  lati- 
tude 234°  to  22*^  and  longitude  64°'to  65^,  found  the  current  setting  N.  N.  E.  at  the  rate  of 
80  miles  in  the  24  hours  :  and  he  says  that,  off  the  N.  W.  end  of  Porto-Rico,  itinvakiablyset 
firom  the  Caribbean  Sea  to  the  North  and  N.  N.  E.  On  the  western  side  of  the  Passage  it 
■et  North,  two  miles  an  hour. 

From  Trinidad,  westward,  and  off  the  North  side  of  the  Spanish  Leeward  Isles.lhe  current 
hu  been  found  setting  West  and  S.  W.  to  the  Gulf  of  Maracaybo ;  thence  S.  W.,  also  to 
Carthagena:  but  it  varies,  as  already  described  in  pages  650  and  651. 

From  Carthagena  'towards  the  Channel  of  Yucatan,  it  has  been  found  N.  N.  W.,  N.W., 
W.  N.  W.  and  N.  W.  by  N.  from  1  to  nearly  2  miles,  and  then  decreasing  to  11  mile  per  hour. 
It  has  also  been  found  setting  to  the  eastward,  as  shown  in  the  preceding  pages. 

At  about  40  miles  northward  of  Cape  Catoche,  the  current  has  been  found  N.  W.  by  W  j 
changing  Uience  to  S.  S.  W.  ofiHhe  N.  W.  point  of  Yucatan,  nearly  at  the  same  distance  from 
Om  coast.  Rate  something  less  than  half  a  mile  an  hour.  Between  this  and  Vera  Cruz  the 
current  ceases. 

The  action  of  the  S.  E.  trade-wind,  in  the  equatorial  regions,  and  the  apparent  disposition  of 
the  waters  in  these  regions  to  retire  westward,  which  have  been  attributed  to  tbe  rotaiy 
notion  of  the  earth,  are  considered  as  the  causes  of  a  current  which  is  known  to  flow,  during 
great  part  of  the  year,  from  the  Ethiopic  Ocean  to  the  Caribbean  Sea,  and  which  has  frequent- 
er carried  ships  considerably  to  the  West  and  W.  N.  W.  of  their  reckonings,  when  off  the  N. 
W.  part  of  Brazils 

On  the  East  Coast  of  Brazil  the  currents  generally  partake  of  the  direction  of  tbe  men- 
lOOns,  as  explained  in  pagej647,  but  vary  in  velocity  according  to  the  advance  and  decline  of 
them,  as  well  as  tbe  part  of  the  coast. 

Lieutenant  Hewett  says.  During  the  Southerly  monsoon,  the  currents  to  the  southward  of 
Cape  St.  Aogustin  are  not  so  powerful  as  to  the  northward,  where  they  increase  in  strength 
unul  the  months  of  June  and  July,  and  then  gradually  decline.  On  the  contrary,  in  the  nor 
Iherly  monsoon,  they  are  generally  very  strong  to  the  southward  of  Ca|[re  St.  Augustin,  when 
they  are  weak  to  the  northward,  as  they  have  some  difficulty  in  detaching  themselves  firom  thi 
stoMun,  which  runs  firom  the  3.  E.  trade  around  Cape  St.  Roque. 


Mr.  Lindh 
commencing 
n^particBlar 
and  then  subi 

The  curren 
in  the  Descrij 

The  follow! 
degree,  its  for 

1.  In  June: 
(of  the  Canari 
degrees. 

2.  On  May 
Gained  the  S. 
to  set  W.  and 
Mth,  inSos. 

3.  May  23, 
wind  was  from 
and  the  curren 

4.  October  1 

S lined  the  S.  E 
_  razil  was  seen 
ing  too  far  to  th 
November,  on  t 
nearly  shared  th 
of,  and  attentioi 
miles  per  hour  tc 
5.  Ontjielsti 
and,  from  the  se( 
St.  Roque  was  ir 
ally  to  weather  ii 
in  order  to  regaii 
tor,  which  was,  a 
6.  In  May  anc 
Monte  Video,  by 
direction  by  the 
itude  8°  23'  S.)  j 
to  regain  Eastins 
wind.  * 

7.  It  is  a  well- 
on  their  outward- 
after  the  failure  o 


BLUNT'S     AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


«67 


r  level 

ardor 
urrent 
on  the 
lurrent 
18  were 

jr  of  the 

liaiTing 
re  oper- 
able to 
MtOlat, 

;  nearly 
Drtherly. 

us ;  but 

)rtherijr , 
islands  it 

)le  on  the 

lut,  to  the 
iO  hourly. 
V. 

'thward  of 

to  the  Vir- 
)ne  mile  to 

ked  as  fire* 
it  Captain 
ifromlati- 
the  rate  of 
atriablyset 
Passage  it 

jthe  current 
'.,  also  to 

J.,  N.W., 
leper  hour. 

^byWJ 

Itance  from 

I  Cruz  the 

^position  of 
[the  rotuy 
|ow,  during 
I  frequent- 
off  the  N. 

the  mon* 
decline  of 

juthw&rd  of 
lin  strenglb 
In  the  nor- 
fstin,  when 
esfromthi 


Mr.  Lindley  also  notices  that,  "  A  strong  current  runs  southward  fVom  Cape  St.  Augustin, 
commencing  about  the  midd'e  of  October,  and  continuing  until  January  ;  after  which  there  ie 
ni^  particalar  current  till  the  middle  of  April,  when  a  powerful  one  sets  in  northerly  till  July,, 
and  then  subsides  in  like  manner." 

The  currents  ofthe  River  Plata,  and  other  local  currents  near  the  shores,  hare  bee;  '  Miced 
in  the  Descriptions  and  Sailing  Directions,  page  306,  &c. 

The  following  facts  establish  the  existence  ofthe  combined  current ;  and  they  shoT^.  i  .  some 
degree,  its  force  and  direction  towards  the  Brazilian  coast. 

1.  In  June  and  July,  1795,  the  Bombay  Castle,  East-Indiainan,  between  the  Isle  of  Palma 
(ofthe  Canaries)  and  the  Coast  of  Brazil,  experienced  a  westerly  current,  amounting  to  6i^ 
degrees. 

2.  On  May  20,  1802,  the  Cuflnels,  East-Indiaman,  lost  the  N.  E.  trade  in  SJ°  N.  long.  22°- 
Gained  the  S.  E.  trade,  June  4,  in  5°  N.  long.  21°.  From  the  equator  the  current  was  found 
to  set  W.  and  W.  by  N.  from  30  to  52  miles  daily,  till  the  coast  of  Brazil  was  in  sight  on  th* 
14th,  in  8P  S. 

3.  May  23,  1802,  the  Sir  Edward  Hughes  lost  the  N.  E.  trade  in  6^^  N.  long.  23°,  and  the 
wind  was  from  S.  S.  E.  on  the  25th  in  5^  N.  and  23*^  30'  W.  The  trade  kept  far  at  southward^ 
and  the  current  set  strongly  to  the  West. 

4.  October  16,  1805,  the  Europe  and  fleet  lost  the  N.  E.  trade  in  1  i°  N.  long.  28°,  and 

g lined  the  S.  E.  trade  on  the  26th,  in  4°  N.  long.  29°  On  the  4th  of  November,  the  land  of 
razil  was  seen  in  lat.  6"  S.  the  wind  near  the  land  wa  itK  ^y  S.  and  E.  S.  E.  By  proceed- 
ing too  far  to  the  westward,  two  ships  ofthe  fleet  wen:  wr:  ied  in  the  morning  ofthe  1st  of 
November,  on  the  Roccas,  or  low  Keys,  in  lat.  3°  59'  3.  an"^  o  Ji°  W.  and  several  others  had 
nearly  shared  the  same  fate.  This  catastrophe  had  pk  oLably  been  avoided  by  a  due  knowledge 
of,  and  attention  to,  the  e^cts  of  the  current ;  which  was  subsequently  ascertained  to  set  2| 
miles  per  hour  to  the  westward,  near  the  Roccas. 

5.  Ont^e  Istof  June,  1793,  the  King  George,  East-.ndiaman,  crossed  the  line  in  30°  W. 
and,  from  the  second  to  the  fifth,  experienced  a  t  -isterly  current  of  1°  33'.  On  the  5th,  Caps 
St.  Roque  was  in  sight,  and  the  ship  was  kept  wc  =ng  until  the  10th,  endeavouring  ineflfeetU' 
ally  to  weather  it ;  she  then  stood  to  the  north-eastward,  closely  hauled,  to  latitude  1°  N, 
in  order  to  regain  the  variable  winds  in  North  latitude,  and  then  proceeded  to  cross  the  equa- 
tor, which  was,  at  length,  efiected. 

6.  In  May  and  June,  1807,  the  transports,  laden  with  ordnance-stores,  for  the  army  at 
Monte  Video,  by  crossing  the  equator  too  far  to  the  westward,  were  carried  so  far  in  thi* 
direction  by  the  current,  that  they  could  not  get  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Aogustin,  (lat- 
itude 8°  23'  S.)  and  were  twice  obliged  to  stand  to  the  northward,  into  variable  winds, 
to  regain  Easting,  after  having  attempted  ineiTectually  to  gain  the  regular  South  East  trade- 
wind. 

7.  It  is  a  well-known  fact,  that  several  ships  have  made  the  isle  of  Fernando  Noronha, 
on  their  outward-bound  passage  to  India,  by  the  currents  having  set  them  to  the  westward, 
after  the  failure  ofthe  N.  £.  trade- wind.    The  current  runs  strongly  about  this  island,, 


../. 


83 


658 


BLUNt's  AMERICAN  COAS'f  PILOT. 


TIDES. 

TIDE  is  a  periodical  motion  of  the  water  of  the  sea,  by  which  it  ebbs  and  flows  twice  • 
day-  The,^oto  continues  about  6  hours,  during  which  the  water  gradually  rises  till  it  arrives 
to  its  greatest  height ;  then  it  begins  to  ebb  or  decrease,  and  continues  to  do  so  for  about  6 
afiore,  till  it  has  fallen  to  nearly  its  former  level ;  then  the  flow  begins  as  before.  When  the 
water  has  attained  its  greatest  height,  it  is  said  to  be  high-water,  and  when  it  is  done  falling, 
h  is  called  low-water. 

The  cause  of  the  tides  is  the  unequal  attraction  of  the  sun  and  moon  upon  different  parts 
of  the  earth.  For  they  attract  the  parts  of  the  earth's  surface  nearest  to  them,  with  a 
greater  force  than  they  do  its  centre :  and  attract  the  centre  more  than  they  do  the  opposite 
surface.  To  restore  this  equilibrium  the  waters  take  a  spheroidal  figure,  whose  longer  axis 
is  directed  towards  the  attracting*  luminary.  If  the  moon  only  acted  upon  the  water,  the 
time  of  high  water  would  be  when  the  moon  was  upon  the  meridian,  above  or  below  the 
horizon ;  or  rather  at  an  hour  or  two  after,  (because  the  moon  continues  to  act  with  consi- 
derable  force  for  some  time  after  passing  the  meridian.)  But  the  moon  passes  the  meridian 
about  49' later  every  day;  of  course,  if  she  only  acted  on  the  tides,  they  would  be  retarded 
every  day  49',  and  it  would  be  high  water  at  the  same  distance  from  her  passing  the  meri- 
dian ;  and  it  is  upon  this  principle  that  the  time  of  high  water  is  calculated  in  most  books  of 
navigation,  although  the  time  thus  calculated  will  sometimes  difl'er  an  hour  from  the  truth, 
owing  to  the  neglect  of  the  disturbing  force  of  the  sun.  The  effect  of  the  moon  upon  the 
tides  is  greater  than  that  of  the  sun,  notwithstanding  the  quantity  of  matter  in  the  latter  is 
vastly  greater  than  in  the  former:  but  the  sun,  being  at  a  much  greater  distance  from  the 
earth  than  the  moon,  attracts  the  different  parts  of  the  earth  with  nearly  the  same  force ; 
whereas  the  moon  being  at  a  much  less  dist.incc,  attracts  the  different  parts  of  the  earth  with 
very  different  forces.  According  to  the  kitest  observations,  the  mean  force  of  the  sun  for 
raising  the  tides  is  to  the  mean  force  of  the  moon  as  1  to  2.^.  By  the  combined  effect  of 
these  two  farces,  the  tides  come  on  sooner  when  the  moon  is  in  hctfimt  and  third  quarters, 
and  later  in  the  second  and  fourth  quarters,  than  they  would  do  if  caused  only  by  the  moon's 
attraction.  The  mean  quantity  of  this  accclcraliou  and  retardation  is  given  in  the  Table  B, 
•utgoined ;  the  use  of  which  will  be  explained  hereafter. 

The  tides  are  greater  than  common  about  three  days  after  the  new  and  full  moon  ;  these 
are  celled  spring-tides.  And  the  tides  are  lower  than  cummdu  about  three  days  after  the 
tint  and  Isst  quarters ;  these  are  called  the  neap-tides.  In  the  former  case  the  sun  and  moon 
conspire  to  raise  the  tide  in  the  same  place,  but  in  the  latter  the  sun  raises  the  water  where 
the  moon  depresses  it.  When  the  moon  is  in  her  perigee,  or  nearest  approach  to  the  earth, 
the  tides  rise  higher  than  they  do,  under  the  same  circumstances,  at  other  times  ;  and  are 
lowest  when  she  is  in  her  apogee,  or  farthest  distance  from  the  earth.  The  spring-tides  are 
greatest  about  the  time  of  the  equinoxes,  in  March  nnd  September,  and  the  neap-tides  are 
iBMs.  All  these  things  would  obtain  exactly,  were  the  whole  surface  of  the  earth  covered 
with  sea ;  but  the  interruptions  caused  by  the  continents,  islands,  shoals,  &c.  entirely  alter 
the  state  of  the  tides  in  many  cases.  A  small  inland  sea,  such  as  the  Mediterranean  or 
Baltic,  is  little  subject  to  tides  ;  because  the  action  of  the  sun  and  moon  is  always  nearly 
eqdhi  at  the  extremities  of  such  seas.     In  very  high  latitudes  the  tides  are  inconsiderable. 

Flrom  the  observations  of  many  persons,  the  times  of  high-water  on  the  days  of  new  and 
fill!  moon  at  the  principal  places  in  North  and  South  America,  have  been  collected.  These 
times  are  piUt  in  a  table  against  the  names  of  the  places,  arranged  in  alphabetical  order  in 
the  Table.  The  most  common  rule  prescribed  for  finding  high-water  is  that  depending  on  the 
golden  number  and  epact,  the  tide  being  supposed  to  be  uniformly  retarded  every  day.  This 
method  will  sometimes  differ  2  hours  from  the  truth,  for  which  reason  I  shall  not  insert  it;  but 
•hall  proceed  to  explain  the  calculation  by  the  adjoined  tables  A  and  B,  and  the  Nautical  Al- 
manac ;  by  means  of  which  the  time  of  high-water  may  be  obtained  to  a  greater  degree  of 
exactness  than  from  our  common  almanacs. 

RULE. 

Find  the  time  of  the  moon's  coming  to  the  meridian  at  Greenwich  on  the  given  day,  in 
page  6th.  of  the  Nautical  Almanac.  Enter  the  Table  A,  and  find  the  longitude  of  the  given 
place,  in  tba  left  hand  column,  corresponding  to  which  is  a  number  of  minutes  to  be  applied 


to  the  time  o 

siibtracling  w 

moon  passes  i 

the  correspon 

the  place  of  ol 

To  this  cor 

he  the  time  of 

this  sum  be  gr 

'^•'1  bo  the  till 

48m.  you  musi 

water,  reckoni 


_  Required  the 
civil  account .' 

By  the  Naut'i 
31{'-  to  this  I  a> 
♦Vitli  the  sum  21 
rection  is  45' fl 
table  it  is  mark( 
end  change  days 
the  time  of  high 


Required  the  ti 
account? 

By  the  NauticE 

minutes.     The  c 

9m.  which  added 

nearly.     The  nun 

68m.  (because  im 

the  time  of  high-i 

•equently  the  hig 

May  24.     And  by 

the  time  of  high-v 

In  this  manner) 

of  accuracy.    But 

culated  times  will 

Many  pilots  rec 

« that  time,  allow 

mgh  water  at  noo; 

ipey  say  a  S.  by 

time.    But  it  is  a 

""  w.u'  ***'^P' '"  P' 
When  you  have 

he  following  tablej 
atter  may  be  usefu 
IOC  following         ' 


Enter  Table  C,  a 
month  for  which  th 
w«H  give  the  moon's 
found  in  the  left  han 
column,  which  beini 
<»ay«,  will  give  the  t 

When  the  sum  excee 
By  this  rule  I  shal 


Required  the  time 
w»U  account? 


BLUNT  S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


659 


twice  • 
,  arrive* 
about  6 
rhen  the 
i  falling, 

snt  parts 
,  with  a 
opposite 
nger  axis 
rater,  the 
jelow  the 
ith  consi- 
meridian 
}  retarded 
the  meri- 
itboolcsof 
the  truth, 
1  upon  the 
le  latter  is 
1  from  the 
ime  force ; 
earth  with 
the  sun  for 
ed  effect  of 
■({  quarters, 
the  moon'i 
le  Table  B, 


to  the  time  of  passing  the  meridian  at  Greenwich,  by  adding  when  in  west  longitude,  but 
nMracling  when  in  east  longitude  ;  the  sum  or  difference  will  be  nearly  the  time  that  the 
moon  passes  the  meridian  of  the  given  place.  With  this  time  enter  Table  B,  and  take  out 
the  corresponding  correction,  which  is  to  bu  applied  to  the  time  of  passing  the  meridian  of 
the  place  of  observation,  by  adding  or  subtracting,  according  to  the  direction  of  the  table. 

To  this  corrected  time  add  the  time  of  full  sea  on  the  full  and  change  days  ;  the  sum  will 
be  the  time  of  high-water  at  the  given  place  reckoning  from  the  noon  of  the  given  day.  If 
this  sum  be  greater  than  12h-  24m.  you  must  subtract  12h.  24m.  from  it,  and  the  remainder 
will  bo  the  time  of  high- water  nearly,  reckoning  from  the  same  noon ;  or  if  it  exceed  24h. 
48m.  you  must  subtract  24h.  4Sm.  from  that  sum,  and  the  remainder  will  be  the  time  of  high- 
water,  reckoning  from  the  name  noon  nearly. 

EXAMPLE  I. 

Required  the  time  of  high-water  at  Charleston  (S.  C.)  March  17,  1S20,  in  the  afternoon, 
civil  account .' 

By  the  Nautical  Almanac  I  find  that  the  moon  passed  the  meridian  of  Greenwich  at  8h. 
31m.  to  this  I  add  11m.  taken  from  Table  A,  corresponding  to  the  longitude  of  Charleston. 
With  the  sum  2h.  42m.  I  enter  Table  B,  and  find  (by  taking  propotional  parts)  that  the  cor- 
rection is  45'  which  is  to  be  subtracted  from  2h.  42m.  (because  immediately  over  it  in  ttie 
table  it  is  marked  Sub.)  to  the  remuinder  Ih.  57m.  I  udd  the  time  of  high  water  on  the  fliU 
end  change  days  7h.  15m.  (which  is  found  in  the  tide  table  following;)  the  sum  9h.  12m.  if 
the  time  of  high  water  on  the  afternoon  of  March  17,  1320,  civil  account. 

EXAMPLE  II. 

Required  the  time  of  high  water  at  Portland,  Maine,  May  23, 1820,  in  the  afternoon,  civil 
account  ? 

By  the  Nautical  Almanac  the  moon  will  pass  the  meridian  of  Greenwich  at  8  hours  49 
minutes.  The  correction  from  Table  A,  corresponding  to  70^"  the  longitude  of  Portland  ia 
9m.  which  added  to  8h.  49m.  gives  the  time  of  the  moon's  southing  at  Portland  8h.  58m. 
nearly.  The  number  in  Table  B  corresponding  to  8b.  58m.  is  23m.  which  is  to  be  added  to  8h. 
68m.  (because  immediately  over  it,  in  the  table,  is  marked  Add.)  To  the  sum  9h.  21m.  I  add 
the  time  of  high-water,  on  the  full  and  change  days,  lOh.  45m.  and  the  sum  is  20h.  6m.  con- 
sequently the  high-water  is  at  20h.  6m.  past  noon  of  May  23,  that  is,  at  8h.  6m.  A.  M.  of 
May  24.  And  by  subtracting  12h.  24m.  from  20b.  6m.  we  have  7h.  42m.  which  will  be  nearly 
the  time  of  high-water  on  the  afternoon  of  May  23,  1820. 

In  this  manner  we  may  obtain  the  time  of  high- water  at  any  place,  to  a  considerable  degree 
of  accuracy.  But  the  tides  arc  so  much  influenced  by  the  winds,  freshe*;,  &c.  that  the  cal- 
culated times  will  sometimes  differ  a  little  from  the  truth. 

Many  pilots  reckon  the  time  of  high-water  by  the  point  of  the  compass  the  moon  is  upon 
at  that  time,  allowing  45  minutes  for  each  point.  Thus  on  the  full  and  change  days,  if  it  is 
high  water  at  noon,  they  say  a  north  and  south  moon  makes  full  sea ;  and  if  at  lib.  15m. 
they  say  a  S.  by  E.  or  N.  by  W  moon  makes  full  sea  ;  and  in  like  manner  for  any  other 
time.  But  it  is  a  very  inaccurate  way  of  finding  the  time  of  full  sea  by  the  bearing  of  the 
moon,  except  in  places  where  it  is  high-water  &bout  noon  on  the  full  and  change  days. 

When  you  have  not  a  Nautical  Almanac,  you  may  find  the  time  of  high-water  by  means  of 
the  following  tables  C  and  D ;  and  although  the  former  method  is  the  most  accurate,  yet  the 
latter  may  be  useful  in  many  cases.  To  calculate  the  time  of  full  sea  by  this  method,  obserr« 
the  following  ,   .  ■« 


RULE. 

Enter  Table  C,  and  take  out  the  number  which  stands  opposite  to  the  year,  and  under  the 
month  for  which  the  tide  is  to  be  calculated  ;  this  number,  added  to  the  day  of  the  month, 
will  give  the  moon's  age,  rejecting  30  when  the  sum  exceeds  that  number.  Against  her  age 
found  in  the  left  hand  column  of  Table  D,  is  a  number  of  hours  and  minutes  in  the  adjoined 
column,  which  being  added  to  the  time  of  high- water  at  the  given  place  on  the  full  and  change 
days,  will  give  the  time  of  high-water  required,  observing  to  reject  12h.  24m.  or  24h  48ffl. 
when  the  sum  exceeds  either  of  those  times. 

By  this  rule  I  shall  work  the  two  succeeding  examples.  » 


len  day,  m 

ii  the  given 

be  appliw 


EXAxMPLE  III. 

Required  the  time  of  bigh<water  at  Charleston  (S.  C.)  March  17, 1820,  in  the  afternoon, 
elvil  account  7 


660 


BLUNT'g    AMERICAN    COAST    I'lLOT. 


In  the  tabUC,  opposito  1820,  and  under  March,  stand  16,  which,  added  to  the  day  of  tht 
ntenth  17,  fi;ives  33,  and  by  subtracting  30,  leaves  3,  the  moon's  age :  opposite  3  in  Table  D, 
is  Ih.  4601.  which  added  to  7h.  15m.  the  time  of  high-water  on  the  Aill  and  change  days,  gives 
9h.  Igi.  for  the  time  of  high-water ;  dKTering  eleven  minutes  from  the  former  method. 

EXAMPLE  IV. 

Required  the  time  of  high-water  at  Portland,  (Maine)  May  23,  1820,  in  the  afternoon 
civil  account  f 

In  the  Table  C,  opposito  1820,  and  under  May,  stand  18,  which  added  to  the  day  of  the 
month  23,  gives  (by  neglecting  30)  the  moon's  age  11 ;  opposito  to  this,  in  Table  D,  is  9h. 
19m.  which  added  to  lOh.  45m.  tho  time  of  high-water  on  the  full  and  change  days,  gives 
20h.  4m.  from  which  subtracting  12h.  24m.  there  remains  7h.  40m.  for  the  time  of  full  sea 
May  23, 1820 ;  this  differs  2  minutes  from  the  former  method. 

In  the  third  column  of  Table  D,  is  given  the  time  of  the  moon's  coming  to  the  meridian, 
ibr  every  day  of  her  age  ;  thus,  opposite  1 1  days  stand  8h.  57m.  which  is  the  time  of  her 
coming  to  the  meridian  on  that  day. — This  table  may  be  of  some  use  when  a  Nautical  Al- 
manac cannot  be  procured ;  but  being  calculated  upon  the  supposition  that  the  moon  moves 
uniformly  in  the  equator,  the  table  cannot  be  very  accurate.  The  numbers  in  this  Table  arc 
reckoned  front  noon  to  noon  ;  thus,  Ih.  A.  M.  is  denoted  by  13h. ;  2h.  A.  M.  by  14h.  &c. 

The  time  of  new  moon  is  easily  found,  by  subtracting  the  number  talien  from  Table  C 
fVom  30.  Ex.  Suppose  it  was  required  to  find  the  time  of  new  moon  for  May,  1820  P  By 
examining  the  table,  we  find  the  number  corresponding  to  that  timte  is  18 ;  this  subtracted 
firom  30  leaves  12 ;  therefore  it  will  be  new  moon  the  12th  May,  1820. 

When  the  time  of  high-water  is  known  for  any  day  of  the  moon's  age,  we  may  from  thence 
find  the  time  of  high-water  on  the  full  and  change  days,  by  the  following 

RULE. 

Find  the  time  of  the  moon's  coming  to  the  meridian  of  Greenwich,  in  the  6th  page  of  tha 
Nautical  Almanac :  to  this  time  apply  the  corrections  taken  from  the  tables  A  and  B,  (in  th  ^ 
game  manner  as  directed  in  the  preceding  rule  for  finding  the  time  of  high-water)  subtract 
tiiis  corrected  time  from  the  observed  time  of  high-water,  and  the  remainder  will  be  ti>.e  time 
of  high-water,  on  the  change  and  full  days. 

Note.  If  the  time  to  be  subtracted  be  greater  than  the  observed  time  of  full  sea,  you  must 
increase  the  latter  by  I2h.  24m.  or  by  24h'  48m.  nearly. 

EXAMPLE. 

Suppose  that  on  the  17th  March,  1S20,  the  time  of  high  water  at  Charleston  (S.  C.)t7u 
found  to  be  at  9h.  12m.  P.  M.  required  the  time  of  high  water  on  the  full  and  change 
days  ? 

I  find,  as  in  example  Ist.  preceding,  that  the  number  to  be  subtracted  is  Ih.  57m.— 
taking  this  from  9h.  12m.  leaves  7h.  15m.  which  is  the  time  of  high  water  on  the  full  and 
change  days. 

When  you  have  not  a  Nautical  Almanac,  you  may  find  the  time  of  high-water  on  the  full 
and  change  by  means  of  the  Tables  C  and  D.  For  in  the  present  example,  I  find  by  Table 
C,  that  the  moon's  age  was  3,  corresponding  to  which,  in  the  second  column  of  Table  D, 
is  Ih.  46m.  this  subtracted  from  9h.  7m.  leaves  7h.  21m.  for  the  time  of  high-water  on  tbe 
fun  and  change  days. 


_  In  all  the  prec« 
tion  arising  from 
from  the  different 
'Oorl2'inthot 
neglected. 


blunt's   amehican   coast   riLOT. 


661 


ofiVi* 
ible  D, 
I,  give* 


.ernoon 


r  of  the 

,  U91i. 

B,  gWes 

full  sea 


aeridian, 
le  of  her 
itlcal  Al- 
Dii  moves 
fable  are 
lb.  fcc. 

Table  C 
920?  By 
lubtracted 

am  thence 


iftge  of  the 
lB,(intb. 
sr)  subtract 
be  thetionc 


Tab 

A. 

Tah. 

B. 

T 

AD 

.  r 

Tah.  D. 

J" 
'3  . 

fl 

1 

s 

o 

«> 

bo   . 

11 

Corr 

A  TABLE 

FOR    FINDINO    THE   MOON'S    AOE. 

ISO 
< 

C 

o 
o 

i 

is 

■a, 

<• 

S  = 

2 

O 

3"^ 

Day. 

Add  the  number  taken  from  this  Ta- 

II.   M. 

H.       M. 

Deg. 

M 

n. 

Hours. 

II.  M 

bic  to   the  daj  of  the  month  ;    the 
sum  (rejecting  30  or  60  if  necessary) 

0 

0     0 

0         0 

0 

,C 

Sub. 

will  be  the  Moon's  age,  nearly. 

1 

0  35 

0    49 

0 

0     0 

2 

1   10 

1     38 

10 

i 

1 
2 
3 
4 

0  17 

0  34 

0  50 

1  3 

3 

1  46 

2  22 

3  1 
3  44 

2  2t 

3  If 

4  4 

4     5? 

so 

30 

3 
4 

Year 

s 

U4 

c 

3 

a 

•"5 

3 
< 

a. 

73 

> 

*5 

4 
5 
6 

40 

6 

5 

1     9 

1 

7 

4  35 

5    42 

60 

n 
f 

6 

7 

1     3 
0  35 

1820 

15 

17 

16 

1818 

20 

20 

22 

23 

•23 

25 

25 

H 
9 

5  39 

6  67 

6  30 

7  19 

60 
70 

s 

9 

8 

Add 
0     2 

1821 

26 

28 

26 

23^29 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

6 

10 
11 

8  16 

9  19 

8  S 
8     67 

9 

0  23 

18«? 

7 

9 

7 

910 

11 

12 

14 

15 

16 

17 

17 

12 

10  10 

9    46 

m 

90 

11 
12 

10 
11 

12 

0  24 
0  14 
0     0 

W 

18 
0 

1920 

22 

4 

22 

4 

24 
6 

26 

8 

26 

8 

28 
10 



28 

10 

13 
14 
16 

10  64 

11  33 

12  9 

10  34 

11  23 

12  12 

1823 

18 

1824 

29 

1 

Sub. 

16    12  44 

13       1 

100 
110 
120 
130 
140 

14 
15 
16 
18 
19 

13 
14 
15 
16 
17 
18 
19 

0  17 
0  34 

0  60 

1  3 
1     9 
1     3 
0  35 

Add 
0    2 

1825 

12 

13 

•  • 

24 

5 

15 

11 

23 

3 

15 

12'l3 

1 

23  24 
I6'l7 

14 

25 

6 

18 

15 

25 

7 

19 

16 
27 

8 
19 

18 
29 
10 
21 

19 
29 
10 
22 

19 

1 

12 

23 

21 

2 

12 

24 

17  13  19 

18  13  54 

13  60 

14  38 

15  27 

16  16 

17  6 

17  54 

18  42 

19  31 

1826 

22 
3 

19 
20 
21 
22 
23 
24 

14  31 

15  11 

16  66 

16  49 

17  57 

19  17 

20  32 

1827 

1828 

14 

150 

20 

20 

25 

20    20 

160 

22 

21 

0  23 

26 

21  33 

21       9 

170 

S3 

22 

0  24 

» 

27 

22  22 

21     68 

23 

0  14 

• 

28 

23    4 

23    46 

180 

24 

24 

0    0 

29 

23  42 

23     35 

29i 

24    0 

24      0 

In  all  the  preceding  calculations  of  the  time  of  high  water,  ^ve  have  neglected  the  correc- 
tion arising  from  the  variation  of  the  distances  of  the  sun  and  moon  from  the  earth,  and 
from  the  different  declinations  of  those  objects.  These  causes  might  produce  a  correction  of 
10'  or  12'  in  the  time  of  high-water,  but  in  general  will  be  much  less,  and  may,  therefore,  be 
neglected. 


HI 


G62 


ULUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PH^OT. 


TABLE, 

^ 

Shewing  the  TUIES  of  IIIGII  WATER,  at  the  full  and  change\ 

of  the  Moon,  at  the 

principal  poi 

•ts  and  Harbours  on 

the  Coast  of\ 

North  and  South  America, 

with  the  vertical  rise  of  the  Tide  in 

feet. 

riACES. 

TIMK. 

RISKS. 

I'l.ACES. 

TIME. 

RISES. 

A 

II.      M. 

FEET. 

Capo  May 

8  45 

6 

Anticosta  I.  (W,  end) 

;j  30 

Cape  llcniopcn 

8  45 

Apple  Rivcr(5>t.Laurcncc) 

11  00 

3-2 

C:ipc  Charles 

7  45 

Annapolis   (N.  America) 

11  00 

(^apc  Henry 

7  40 

4i 

Au<;iistine,  St. 

7  30 

5 

(^ape  Fear 

8  00 

Amelia  Ilnrbour 

S  30 

Cape  Hattcras 

9  00 

B 

CJape  Lookout 

9  00 

B 

Cape  Roman 

8  00 

Bristcd  Bay  (Nova  Scotia) 

7  45 

s 

Charleston  (South  Caro- 

Bay of  Shecatica 

11  00 

lina) 

7  15 

6 

Bays  of  St.  licncvicvc  and 

Chatham    Bay    to    Cape 

St.  Barbe 

11  30 

Roman  very  irregular. 

Bay  of  Pistolet 

6  45 

Cape  Antonio  (Cuba)  irre- 

Between   Cape    Chnpca- 

gular 

9  30 

1^ 

rouge   and    Cape    Ray 

Carthage  na 

12  00 

1 

generally 

9  00 

7&8 

Cayenne 

3  45 

6 

Beyond  Cape  Ray  north- 

Conomand Point 

5  00 

ward,  the  tide  is  consi- 

Cape Haytkin 

6  00 

21 

derable. 

Bcnsiamities    Point    (St. 

D 

Laurence) 

1  30 

Beaver  Harbour 

8  45 

7 

l>  laware  River  (ent.) 

9  00 

Bay  of  St.  Mary 

9  30 

16 

Dry  Tortugas 

8  30 

3 

Basin  of  Mines,  viz. 

Dcmarara  Bay 

4  50 

Windsor 

12  00 

36 

Seven  Isles  Harbour 

11  00 

31 

£ 

Cape  Split 

11  15 

40 

Elizabeth  Isles  (Tarpaulin 

Broad  Bay 

10  45 

9 

Cove) 

9  52 

9 

Boston  Light-House 

10  00 

Elizabeth    Town      Point 

Barnstable  Bay 

11  00 

9 

(New  Jersey) 

8  54 

5 

Block  Island 

7  37 

Barbadoes  (West  Indies) 

F 

scarcely  perceptible 

1 

Fort  St.  John  (Newfound- 

Berbice 

11&12 

land) 
Frying  Pan  Shoals 

9  00 
6  30 

C 

Fox  Island  (Penobscot) 

10  45 

Coast   of  Labrador    and 

Florida    Keys  (Sombrero 

Strait  of  Belle  Isle,  ge- 

Key) 

8  50 

5 

nerally 

11  00 

30 

Crane    Island  (St.   Lau- 

G 

rence) 

5  00 

Green  Island  (St.    Lau- 

Cape Chat  (St.  Laurence) 

12  00 

13 

rence) 

3  00 

•  IG 

Cocaync  to  CupeTormen- 

Gaspc     Bay     (St.     Lau- 

tin, and  thence  to  Pic- 

rence) 

3  00 

ton  Harbour 

7  00 

(i 

Gut  of  Canso 

8  00 

8 

Chedabucto  Bay 

8  30 

8 

Goldsborough 

11  00 

12 

Canso  Harbour 

8  45 

7 

George's  River 

10  45 

9 

Country  Harbour  to  White 

Guy  Head 

7  37 

7 

I.Bay 

9  00 

8 

Georgetown  Bar 

7  00 

4 

Campbell  Port 

9  00 

Gut    of   Annapolis,    (en- 

Cape Sabl6 

8  00 

9 

trance  St.  Laurence) 

10  00 

28 

Cape  St.  Mary 

9  00 

14 

Guadaloupe  (irregular) 

6  45 

li 

Cane   D'Or,  entrance   o( 
Mines  Channel 

11  00 

41 

H 

Cumberland  Basin  Fort 

12  00 

()0 

Halifax  to  St.  Margaret's 

Casco  Bay 

10  45 

Bay 

8  00 

S 

Cape  Ann     - 

11  ;m) 

11 

Hampton  Road 

8  37 

Cap*  Cod 

11   30 

6* 

Harbour  Delutc 

12  00 

JHillaborouj 

Jlsle  Vcrte  c 
pie  Bic  (S( 

jKBinouraxa 
I    rence) 

fKeniiebeck 
^ennebunk 

-•ouiabourg  i 

■  ] 

iVfatane  (St. 

JIVfaoiconagai 

Mingan  Harl 

Laurence) 
Mahone  Bay 

Harbour  ( 

Laarenee) 
Meogeney  Bo 
i>ioose  Island 
IVfount  Desert 
Machias 

jMarUehead 
iMonomoy  Poi 
iMouths  of  th( 
Martinico  (irr 
N 
New     and     ( 
(Newfoundl 
J*Newburyport 
Nantucket  She 
NantHcket  Ha 
New- Bedford 
New-London 
New-Haven 
New-York 
Nassau  Bar 
Nn-ssau  Harboi 

P 
Placentia  Harb 

Toundland) 
Piliers,    or  Pi| 

Laurence) 
Point  Deamon 

Pclees,  rSt.  I 
Point  Milie  Va 

Laurence) 
Prince  Edward  I 
lottetown(St 
Port  Hood,  (Brc 
Nova  Scotia) 
Passamaquoddy 
Penobscot  River 
Portland 
Portsmouth 
Piymouth 

•  Direcilons  for ,. 
'•led.wehnveimli. 
uated  on  the  beauiiii 
'•nUiMi  which  imtii 

P'flunlly.reepeni.ur 
ount,„r,h,,„rP„,«'^l 

B^jck  Hocki  OJt  10  K 

^•«'.«r.,of20fte.o 

wi«nth,,Wp,h,it,v 

P^^yilnngnlnof 


illG 

of 


\s 


BLUNrS    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


C^63 


4J 


1 
6 


9 

5 


iO 


.16 


)0 

8 

10 

12 

fl 

9 

n  1 

7 

00 

4 

no 

28 

45 

li 

00 

8 

37 

00 

PLACES. 


TIME. 


Hillsborough  Inlet 
I 

Isle  Vcrte  or  Green  Island 
Isle  Bic  (St.  Laurence) 

K 

Ksjnouraxa  lies  (St.  Lau- 
rence) 
Keniiebeck 
Kennebunk 

L 
Louiabourg  (Nora  Scotia) 

M 
Matane  (St.  Laurence) 
Maaiconagan  Bay 
Mingan  Harbour  (Gulf  St. 

Laurence) 
Mahone  Bay  to  Liverpool 
Harbour   (Gulf  of  St 
Laurence) 
Meogeney  Bay 
Moose  Island 
Mount  Desert 
Machias 
MarMehead 
Monomoy  Point 
Mouths  of  the  IMississippi 
Martinico  (irregular) 

N 
New     and     Old    FcroUc 

(Newfoundland) 
♦Newburyport 
Nantucket  Shoal 
NantHcket  Harbour 
New- Bedford 
New-London 
New-Haven 
New-York 
Nassau  Bar 
N^-isau  Harbour 

P 
Placentia  Harbour  (Ncw' 

foundland] 
Piliers,    or  Pillars,    (St. 

Laurence) 
Point  Deamon  or  Monts 
Pelees,  fSt.  Lawrence) 
Point  Mille  Vachas,  (St. 

Laurence) 
Prince  Edward  Isles  Char- 
lotte town(St.Laurcncr 
Port  Hood,  (Breton  Island 

Nova  Scotia) 
Passamaquoddy 
Penobscot  River 
Portland 
Portsmouth 
Plymouth 


7  30 


GO 
00 


4  00 

10  45 

11  15 

7  15 


RISES. 


12 
1 


15 

00 


9 
9 

5i 


12 


3  00       11 


8 
12 
11 
11 
11 
11 
11 


00 
00 
30 
00 
00 
30 
30 


6  4; 


11 
11 

10 
12 

7 
8 
10 
8 
7 
8 


45 
15 
30 
00 
37 
51 
10 
54 
30 
30 


8 

25 
12 
12 
11 

6 

1^ 


10 


9 

1 
15 

4 

45  i 

t 

12 

00, 

2  00  j 

10 

30 

9  00 

11 

30 

10  45 

10  45 

11 

15 

11 

30 

7 


12 


PLACES. 


Port  Royal 

Porto  Rico  (St.  Juan) 
Q 

Quebec  (St.  Laurence) 
R 

Rcstigoucliey  Harbour 

llacc  Point 

Khodclsliind  IIarl>our 

llio  .Janeiro  (South  Amc 
rica) 

S. 

Sunbury 

St-    .Fohn's     (Newfound- 
land) 

St.  Pierre   and  Miquclon 
(St.  Laurence) 

Sfivcn  Islands  Harbour 

St.  Nicolas  Harbour,  (St. 
Laurence) 

Sidney   Harbour  (Breton 
Island) 

South  Shore  of  Madame 
Island 

Ship  Harb.  inGulof  Canso 

Siiblc  Islmd 


TIME. 


Nortli 
-South 


ide 
side 
Laii' 


6 
25 
10 

9 
11 

(A 


Spry   Ilirbour,  (St 
re  lice) 

Shcpody   Bay,   (St.  Lau- 
rence) 

St.    .loiin's  (Ncu-Bruus- 
wick) 

ShcUiiirne  Hiirbour 

Sheepscut  River 

Salem 

Sandy  Hook 

St.  Simon's  Sound 

St.  Simon's  Bar 

St.  Simon's  Oiling 

St.  Mary's  Bar 

St.  Bartholomew's  (Irre 
giilar) 

Surinam,  Bram's  Point 
T 

The  Traverse   (St.  Lau- 
rence) 

The   Brandy    Pots,    (St 
Laurence) 

Torbay  (Bretoi!  Island) 
rowiisend  Harbour 

Tobago  (^Vt^t  India)  un 
certain 

Trinidad,  Port  Spain 
V 

Vineyard  Sound 

Vera  Cruz,  (Only  one  tide 
in  24  hours,)  irrrsinlar 


15 
20 


6  00 


3 

10 

6 


00 
45 
45 


4  30 


30 

30 

00 
30 


HISES. 


12  00 


9  00 


8 

8 

10 

8 


00 
00 
30 
30 


8  30 


11   30 


12 
8 
10 
11 
f) 
9 
7 
6 
7 


00 
30 
45 
30 
37 
00 
30 
45 
30 


4  30 


4  30 


6 


6&7 
18 

12 


8 

»i 

7 

8 

7.i 

48 

25 

8 

9 
11 

5 

6 

6 

7 
1 

ito  n 


18 


3  30 

H  45 

10  45 

8 
9 

4  30 

3J 
6 

11  00 


*  Direction*  for  entering  ilie  Imrbour  (if  NewhiiryiHirt,  iriiiy  lie  found  inpiice  'IH.  Hinro  lliat  wnspul). 
liilied,  we hnve  notirmi  in  li.e  "  Ucntld,''  tlie  followliijj,  wliicli  we  Iiopo  llic  inlmbilnnlsoftlml  town,  sit 
u«ted  on  the  beRUtiful  river  Merrimack,  niny  iriili/r-,  nnd  llic  nuMclinnts  in-  iiuliict-d  to  iniprovo  tlioseuil' 
nntn^ea  which  nmiire  has  so  l;oiii!<ifiilly  {ji'vrn  llicni,  ami  wlilcli  tlipy  shtulil  ilitly  iip[nvciali'. 

tfcmbtu-yportJIaihow. — Tiie  pilols  of  imr  llniliDiirsliilc  lliHt  lur  scvi'rni  moni  lis  "piist,  llic  vnlerhns  been 
^(lunil]r\reepenin(;  upon  our  linr,  iiiKllliiit  iit  tiilsllmolliiMo  is  iipwiinls  of  iiliir  ifi't  nt  lnw  title  ;  tone 
Bount  for  this  erent  clin'^BV,  \vn  iiminle  it  piuily  to  tlic  diiict  iiimiiicr  in  wliirli  tin'  iiurcnt  lins  pnsscil  <iul 
»nd  In,  since  iTils  time  Inityear.  It  tlioii  wtis  <piili'  ciirviiloiis  ni  tin-  month  of  the  river,  My  from  tlie 
Black  Ilocks  oat  to  !cu.  It  hiis  wiisIumI  nwny  the  lower  point  of  isilislmiy  liciioli.  Iiciico  liio  oourBe  of 
{otng out nndi  comlnjr  in  liuSftltercd  several  poiiila  of  the  icinip.iss  since  last  beptemln'r.  Their  is  now 
upwnnliof  20feet  ofwnlcronthe  liHrat  iiiiiii  llilo.nl  llie  full  nml  clian;^!'  of  the  moon  i  and  ifwecnn 
retain  this  (leptli,  it  will  lie  of  incalcululiie  liencfd  to  the  luiilioor,  nsaplacolo  run  ior  when  vessela  nru  in 
the  tiay,  inn  pfaleofwind  hlowiu^'  on  shore,  and  more  e.-pctially  tollie  loaMing  idoiiK  llicdhore. 


it 


\    


664 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST    PILOT. 


REMARKS. 

On  all  the  coast  of  Newfoundland,  the  tides  are  very  irregular ;  being  greatly  i-nfluencefl 
by  the  prevailing  wind.    At  the  entrance  of  St.  John's  they  set  in  a  bore. 

Between  Cape  La  Hunc  and  Cape  Ray,  the  flood  sets  to  the  westward  in  the  offing,  very 
irregularly,  but  generally  2  or  3  hours  after  high  water  on  shore. 

From  Green  Island  to  Quebec,  the  tides  rise  irregularly,  but  very  considerable  ;  from  Coudre 
to  Quebec,  the  water  fulls  4  feet  before  the  tide  makes  down.  At  the  Isle  of  Coudre,  in 
spring-tides,  the  ebb  runs  at  the  rate  of  2  knots.  The  next  strongest  ebb  is  between  Apple 
and  Basque  Isles  ;  the  ebb  of  the  River  Saguenay  uniting  Vicre  ;  it  runs  full  7  nots  in  Spring- 
tides ;  yet,  although  the  ebb  is  so  strong,  the  flood  is  scarcely  perceptible  ;  and  below  the  Isle 
of  Bic,  there  is  no  appearance  of  a  flood  tide. 

On  the  South-side  of  Prince  Edwaud  Isle,  the  tides  are  regular,  but  they  are  very  irre- 
gular on  the  north. 

The  tide  of  the  Gut  of  Canso,  generally,  sets  in  from  the  southward,  but  is  very  irregu- 
lar, being  influenced  by  the  winds.  After  strong  N.  IV.  winds,  the  water  in  the  Gulf  of 
St.  Laurence  is  rendered  low,  which  causes  the  stream  fo  run  northward,  through  the 
Gut,  at  the  rate  of  4  or  5  miles;  the  contrary  happens  with  southerly  winds.  [For  the 
Tides  and  Currents  about  Sable  Island,  see  Page  620] 

Off  Cape  Sable  the  tide  runs  at  the  rate  of  3,  and  sometimes  4,  miles  an  hour  ;  and  in 
the  Bay  of  Fundy,  the  tides  are  very  rapid. 

Cape  D'Or  and  Cape  Chiguecto  are  iiigli  lands,  wi  h  very  steep  clifls,  and  deep  water 
close  under  them.  The  s:imc  kind  of  shore  continies  to  the  head  of  Chignecto  Bay. 
where  very  extensive  flats  of  mud  am!  quicksands  areleft  to  dry  at  low  Wciter.  Here  the 
tides  come  in  a  bore,  rushing  in  witli  great  rapid.ty :  they  are  known  to  flow  at  the 
equinoxes  from  60  to  70  feet  perpendicular;  and  i.t  is  remarkable  that,  at  the  samp  time, 
they  rise  in  the  Bay  Verte,  on  the  northern  side  of  the  isthmus,  only  8  feet. 

In  the  Harbour  of  St.  John,  the  tide  of  flood  is  weik,  but  the  ebb  runs  very  rapidly. 

At  Mount  Desert  Rock,  the  stream  of  flood  divides  to  run  eastward  and  westward. 
With  the  Shuttock  Hills  about  N.  N.  E.,  and  within  4  or  5  leagues  of  those  of  Mouni  De- 
sert, the  flood-stream  sets  E.  N.  E.  and  the  ebb  W.  S.W. ;  but,  at  the  distance  of  9  or  10 
leagues  from  the  land,  the  current,  in  general,  sets  to  the  S.  VV.  and  wr-e  westward. 
From  the  Mount  Desert  Rock,  to  the  Fox  Islands,  at  the  entrance  of  tlu  Jay  of  Penob- 
scot, the  flood-stream  sets  W.  S.  W.  along  shore  ;  lut  it,  neverthcles  runs  np  to  the 
northward  into  Isle  Haute  Bay,  kc.  South  moon  makes  high  water  l  Wantucket  har- 
bour. It  is  high  water  at  Wantucket  Shoal  one  hour  and  thirty  minutes  before  south 
moon.     [For  Tides  on  Nantucket  Shoals,  see  Page  77] 

At  Sandy  Hook  the  stream  of  tide  continues  to  set  in,  at  the  rate  of  two  knots,  until 
nearl}'  9  hours. 

The  tides  in  the  river  of  the  Chesapeake  arc  varied  by  the  winds.  When  it  blows  2 
or  3  days  at  N.  or  N.  VV.  the  flood  does  not  rise  more  than  2  feet ;  but.  when  it  blows  a 
gale  from  S.  E.  or  E.  S.  E.  it  rises  4  or  5  feet.  The  Times  of  high  water  in  the  Chesa- 
peake have  been  given  as  follows  :  Lynbaven  Bay,  orsoutii  side,  10  li,  :  East  shore,  with- 
in Cape  Charles,  12 /(. :  Mouth  of  the  Rappahannock,  3 /(.:  ofl'the  Patomac3j /i.:  ofi'tho 
Patapsco,  or  Baltimore  River,  7.f  A. 

In  the  vicinity  of  Charleston  and  Savannah,  N.E.  Easterly  and  S.  E.  winds,  cause 
higher  tides  than  the  other  winds,  and,  also,  vary  their  course.  At  about  6  leagues  froni 
the  land,  ofl'Port  Royal,  in  12  fathoms  water,  the  flood  sets  strong  to  the  Southward,  and 
tlie  ebb  northward.     At  a  great  distance  from  the  slnjre  its  tide  is  perceptible. 

Although,  at  the  Bahamaji,  the  rise  and  fall  is  considerable,  the  tide  of  flood  sets 
an  indraught  on  the  northern  part  of  the  Little  Bahama  Bank,  fiom  every  point  of  the 
compass,  whicli  renders  an  ni)i)roac!i  very  dangerous. 

The  tide  sets  with  somo  force  directly  on  and  ofl"  the  western  side  of  the  Grand  Bank 
of  Bahama  ;  particularly  at  tiie  fidl  and  change  of  the  moc  i.  High  water  at  7  h.  30  m. ; 
or  thereabout.  Rise  3  to  4  feet.  On  the  Middle  Ground  of  this  Bank,  the  Tides  set  in 
every  direction, 

In  Providence  N.  W.  channel,  the  current  runa  generally  to  the  eastward,  about  two 
miles  an  hour. 

Near  Egg  Islaiul,  to  tlie  N.  W.  of  Eleuthera,  it  is,  however,  uncertain,  and  great  at- 
tcntiou  should  be  paid  to  the  lead.  In  the  passa^f!  within  Egg  Island,  the  tide  runs  at 
the  rate  of  lour  miles,  and  rises  above  foui  feet  ,  the  flood  celling  eastward,  and  strongly 
over  the  reefs. 

About  the  Berry  Islands  and  Providenre.  the  water  ri,sej  two  feet  higher  when  the  sun 
comes  to  the  northward  of  tho  lino,  than  il  Wots  when  tliu  sun  is  to  the  southward,  and  id 
streuf^th  is  in  a  singular  proportion.  Here  and  at  the  Beniini  Ifles,  the  flood  sets  to 
thf  If.  £.. 


/tear  ( 

tneasurei 

To  the  w 

through  t 

it  is  rei 

eastward  j 

*o  the  eai 

channels, 

flood  fivini 

Westwai 

and  to  son 

In  Poaet 

el»b;  next! 

channels  it 

During  a 

been  knowi 

among  the  | 

From  Car 

In  the  24  hoi 

a  dry  season 

Near  the 

currents  are 

The  pilots  at 

within  six  h< 

Among  the 

quire  notice ; 

this  coast,  a  si 

an  hour. 

About  the  Ii 

then  high  wal 

but  comes  abo 

«outh,  when  it 

portion  back  t 

trifling  diflierei 

the  north  of  tJj 

flowing  ig  18  i, 

About  Virgil 

'y,  setting  eas 

her  setting  till , 

nith  to  the  ho 

breadth  of  the 


BLURT'S    AMCKlCAIf   COAST    PILOT. 


606 


lucnced 

ig,  very 

,  Coudre 
ludre,  in 
jn  Apple 
I  Spring- 
r  the  l&le 


irery 


irre- 


•y  irregu- 

e  Gulf  of 

■ough  the 

[For  the 

r  •,  and  in 

eep  water 
ecto  Bay. 
Here  the 
low  at  the 
same  time, 

rapidly- 
westward. 
Mount  De- 
eofy  or  10 
westward. 
r  of  Penob- 
s  »ip  to  the 
tucket  har- 
fore  south 

^nots,  until 


1  it 


blows  2 
it.  blows  a 
the  Chesa- 
shore,  with- 
h.:  off  the 


(tear  Cajro  Heuio,  or  Thompson's  Island,  on  the  Florida  Reef,  tha  tides  are,  \a  some 
measure)  regular  whhin  the  reef :  the  flooAseltins  to  the  westward,  and  the  ebb  contrarj. 
To  the  westward,  between  the  Tortugas,  and  Cayo  Marques,  the  flood  sets  Tariabl^ 
through  to  (he  northward,  and  ebbs  to  the  E.  9.  E. 

ii  is  remarkable  that,  on  the  sonHi  side  of  these  Keys,  the  flood  conies  from  (he  seutli- 
eastward  ;  but,  on  (he  north  side  of  them,  all  the  way  from  Cayo  Heuso,  the  flood  rant 
to  the  eastward,  along  the  edge  of  the  bank,  and  to  the  southward,  through  the  little 
channels,  in  order  to  fill  up  the  intermediate  baya  and  lagoons,  with  the  assistance  of  the 
flood  frnm  the  southward. 

Westward  of  Cayo  Heuso  (here  is  a  general  current  to  the  south-westward  along  the  reef, 
and  to  some  distance  to  the  sooth  side  of  it. 

In  Poneeor  Chatham  Bay,  it  runs  (ide  and  balf«tide,  vix.  3  hours  flood,  (hen  3  hours 
ebb;  neit9  hours  flood,  &c«  Here,  in  sonte  places,  it  is  a  mere  fall ;  but  in  some  of  thtt 
channels  it  is  as  much  as  four  men  can  do  to  stem  the  current  with  a  boat. 

During  a  S.  E.  gale  or  storm,  the  water  in  the  bays  ami  rivers  of  West  Florida  hea 
been  known  ,to  rise  7  feet  perpendicular,  and  essels  of  burden  have  been  driven  in, 
among  the  pine-trees,  at  some  distance  from  sh  ,  e. 

From  Cape  Roman,  nor(hward  and  westward,  the  tide  seems  to  ebb  and  flow  only  once 
in  the  24  hours  ',  but  it  is  irregular,  and  much  governed  by  the  winds  Yet  the  effects  in 
a  dry  season  are  very  perceptible  in  the  rivers  at  a  distance  from  the  sea. 

Near  the  shoals  and  reefs  of  Anton  Lizardo,  between  Alvarado  and  Vera  Cruz,  the 
currents  are  often  dangerous,  and  appear  to  be  almost  entirely  influenced  by  the  winds. 
The  pilots  say  that  a  change  of  wind  hereabout  produces  an  alteration  in  the  current 
within  six  hours. 

Among  the  West  India  Islands  the  tides  are,  generally,  so  inconsiderable,  as  not  to  re- 
quire notice ;  but,  on  the  coast  of  Guayana,  they  set  with  some  degree  of  force  ;  and,  ofl" 
this  coast,  a  strong  current  commonly  sets  to  the  N.  W.  at  the  rate  of  two  to  three  miles 
an  hour. 

About  the  Island  of  St.  Bartholomew,  the  flood,  at  new  and  full  moon,  runs  S.E  and  i(  \fk 
then  high  water  at  lOh.  30n.  P.  M.  while  the  sun  is  farthest  to  the  north  of  the  equator  ;, 
but  comes  about  two  hotirs  sooner  in  th#  following  months,  till  the  sun  gets  farthest  to  the 
south,  when  it  is  high  water  at  lOh.  30m.  A.  M.  and  its  runs  afterwards  in  the  same  pro- 
portion back  again.  The  winds,  which  are  of  a  long  continuance,  sometimes  make  t^ 
trifling  difierence.  The  horizon  is  also  lowest  at  the  time  when  the  sun  is  farthest  ta 
the  north  of  the  line ',  and  so  to  the  contrary.  The  greatest  difierence  in  the  ebbing  and 
flowing  is  18  inches;  but,  in  general,  only  10  inches. 

About  Virgiu-Gorda  and  the  passages  of  the  Virgin  Islands,  the  current  runs  regular- 
ly, setting  eastward  during  the  moon's  passage  from  the  horizon  to  her  senith,  and  fron^ 
her  setting  till  she  arrives  at  nadir,  and  to  the  westward  while  the  moon  passes  from  r.»- 
nith  to  the  horizon,  and  from  nadir  till  her  rising.  The  rate  varies  according  to  the 
breadth  of  the  channels,  from  2^  to  5  knots,  and  the  rise  is  from  20  to  40  inche». 


inds,  cause 
■agues  froni 
thward,  and 

f  flood  sets 
point  of  the 

I rand  Bank 
t7/i.  30W-- 
Tides  set  in 


1,  about  two 

^nd  great  at- 

[title  runs  at 

vnd  strongly 


1^  ,*>•■ 


Ivhen  the  sun 

vHiA,  an*''" 
[flood  sets  to 


84 


666 


LATITUDES    AND    T.'^NGIT'ilJOr^S, 


[This  Tahlc  contains  the hATiTVir^iH  andh^:;r^'Ty:>KBofthe  most  re- 
niarkahle  Harbours,  Islands,  Sf'oofr.^  Cjpes,  Sfc.  i:i  this  work^  found- 
ed on  the  latest  and  most  accurate  Astronomical  ubseroations^  surveys, 
and  charts.^ 

The  Longitudes  are  reckoned  from  the  mcridiun  of  Greenwich. 


COA«T    OF    TUE    UNITED    STATES    OF 
AMERICA. 


of      St. 


Lat. 
D.    M. 


^ 


ENTRANCE 
Croix  River 

laland    of    Canipo-Bello 
(midfllc  or  \\est  pas- 
siioe  "('  Passainaquod 
dy.  .,) 

Wolves'  Islands 

Quadtly  Head 

Urand-Manan   N.  head 
do.  S.  Wesit  end  .... 

Titmanan  light 

Cross  Island 44  35 

Gouldsboro'  Harbour.. 

Mount  Desert  liock. . . . 

Isle  of  Holt,  S.  W.  Pt. 

lastine 

luntiniciis  Island  light 

Woiden  Bald  Rock.... 

Island  of  Miiuhc'<rin. .. 

Penmaquid  Poii;'    ght. 

IJantum  r-cdp;cs 

Kennebeck     River    en 
titmcc 

Soguine  Island  light.... 

Ciipe  Small  point. . ., , . 

Cr.-.hc's  Lodge  (?!'o  . 
part) 

Alden'E  Ledge,  (oft  '•    j.v 
Elizabeth) 

PORTLAND  light-hou. 

Cape  Elizabeth 

Wood  Island  L.  House 

Agamenticus  Hill 

Cape  Porpoise 

Wells  Harbour 

Bald  Head 

Cape   Neddock    Nubble 

York  River 

Boon  Island  light 

PORTSMOUTH  light- 
house  

Portsmouth 

Isles  of  Shoals  light 

NEWBURYPORT 
lights  on  Plumb  Island 

'j.swich  entrance. ...... 

.Squam  light-house 

Sandy  Cove  (or  Bay).., 

CAPE  ANN  light  lioua- 
es  on  Thatcher's  Isl- 
and   •> 

East  point  of  Cape  Ann 
Harbour 


45  OON 


44  67 
44  68 
44  48 
44  48 
44  36 
44  21 


44  23 
43  .52 
43  58 
11  22 
43  50 
13  45 
13  44 
13  48 
43  41 

43  43 
43  40 
13  4U 

143  2 

43  30 
43  35J 
43  32J 
43  26j 
43  16 
43  21 
43  19 
43  13 
43  10 
43  8 
43  8 


43  4 
43  5 
42  56 

42  49 
42  42 
12  42 


42  39 


4'^  35 


Long. 
D.  M 

67  COW 


66  58 
66  45 
66  69 
66  49 

66  55 

67  40 
67  19 

67  55 

68  1 
68  34 
63  45 
63  51 

68  49 

69  15 
69  29 
69  36 

69  46 
69  44 
69  49 

69  5 

70  6 
70  lOi 
70  10 
70  19 
70  41 
70  23 

0  33 
70  34 
70  35 
70  38 
70  29 

70  43 
70  45 
70  38 

70  49 
70  46 
70  4» 
70  35 


70  34 
70  39 


Light-houses  or  Raker's 
Island 

Beverly 

SALEM...., 

Marblehead 

Nahant  Point  (N.  E. 
Point  of  Boston  har- 
bour)   

Boston  light-house 

BOSTON 

CAMBRIDGE  (Mass.) 

Scituate  light-house 

Plymouth  lights 


Lat. 
D.     M. 


Race  Puint  lij^ht. 


-n 


00. 

\q. 
do. 
do. 


o 


CAPE  COD  light... 

Chatham  ngbt 

Sandy  I' -Am  or  Malabar 

Shoalol  r  oorge's 

Great  Suoal  S.  E.  P. . . . 

dc.     do.     W.  P 

do.     do.     N.E.  P.  ... 

North  Shoal 

Third  Shoal 

East  Shoal 

NANTUCKET      light 
house 

Sancoly  head   on  Nan' 
tucket  Island 

Tom  Nevers  head 

Nantucket  South  Shoal 

Cape  Poge,   (Vineyard) 

Squibnocket-head 
(south  westerly  part  of 
Martha's  Vineyard) 

Gay  Head  light-house, 
(Vineyard) 

Noman's  Land  Island  . 

Ncw-B«  dford 

New-Be<lford   light  hou 

Sow  and  Pigs 

Seaconnet  Pt.... 

NEWPORT 

Rhode  Island  light-house 

Point  Judith  light-house 

Watch  Hill  Point  light 

Little  Gull  light. 

Block  Island,  S.  E.  Pt.  . 
do.        do.     N.  Pt. 

New-London  (or  en- 
trance of  Thames 
river)  light-house. . . . 

NEW-HAVEN  entr'ce 

Montnck  Point  (E.  end 
of  Long-Island)  light 
houf!c 


42 
42 
42 
42 


42 
42 
42 
42 
42 
42 
42 
42 
41 
41 


33N 
34 
32 
31 


26 

20^ 

22^ 

23 

12 

1 

5 

4 
41 
34 

34 
42 
48 
53 
51 
47 


41  23 


16 

14 

4 

25 


41  17 


20 
14 
38 
35 
24 
27 
29 
264 
22^ 
20 
14 
9 
15 


21 
17 


Long; 
D.  M. 

70  48W 
70  54 
70  64 
70  51 


70  56 

70  55 

71  4 
71  3 
70  43 
70  36 
70  12 
70  4 

69  57 

70  00 

67  40 
67  59 
67  47 
67  43 
67  26 
67  19 

70    3 

69  58 
7(J  00 

69  65 

70  27 


70  48 


70  52 

70  51 

70  56 

70  55 

TO  59 

71  13 

71  21 

71  26 

71  31 

71  57 

72  16 

71  36 

71  38 

72  15 

72  58 


It. 


NE 

01 

Ban 

Littj 

Grec 

Cape 

PHII 

Ligh 

H< 

ICape 

Cape 

pidl 

R  lAnnai 

r§  ALE^ 

S  VVAS, 

|§  BALI 

■g)  Currit 

"  CAPE 

Deep 

Ocracc 

CAPE 

_-  Deepsi 

•ipid  To 

g  Beaufo 

;3  WILM 

L  Brunsfl 

?  Smithvj 

New  III 

CAPE 

Deep  St 

„  GEORC 

■5      Ditto 

jfe  Cape  Re 

f  CHARI 

I  Chariest 

*  North  E 

BtAUF 

Port  Roj 

Tybee  \i 

savan! 

St.  Cath, 
Sapellc  I 
poboy  d 
Light  on 
and,  S 
St.  Andr 
I-ight    01 
Island . 
River  Ni 
Ri?er  St. 
St.  Augui 
Island  Ar 
-S.  P... 
Muskito 

entranc 
Cape  Cant 
Outer  brci 
Los  Torti 
mocks 

Hillsborou 
i~S  P 

Mount  P{ 
HenH 


i 


u-m^!:' 


':mjM^''±, 


"-,.''•"1     ■ ,   '  '    •■»    71".,'*' 


LATITUDES  AND  LONGITUDES. 


667 


lost  re-\ 
found' 
urveysA 


Long; 
D.    M. 

70  48Wl 

70  54 
70  54 
70  51 


(4 
12 
18 
53 
51 
47 


67  40 
67  59 
67  47 
67  43 
67  26 
€7  19 


23      70    3 


16 

14 

4 

25 


69  58 

70  00 
69  55 
170  27 


17      7C  48 


20      70  52 

14      70  51 

38     70  56 

36      70  55 

24      * 

0  59 

27      71  13 

29      71  21 

264    ' 

?1  26 

22i 

71  31 

20 

71  57 

14 

72  16 

9 

71  36 

15 

71  38 

21 

72  15 

17 

72  5« 

3    7rr>s 


I 


CQ 


^ 


NEW- YORK  C'ty 
^^8w•York     lighi-Uouse 

on  Sandy  Hook 

Barnigat  Inlet 

Little  Egg  Harbour.... 
Great  Egg  Harbour. «.• 

Cape  May  light 

PHILADELPHIA 

Light-house    on     Cape 

Henlopen 

Capo  Charles 

Cape  Henry  light. . . . 

Old  Pt.  Comfort 

VorkTowh  (Virg.).. 
Annapolis  (Mar.) •  •  •  • 
ALEXANDRIA    (Vir.) 
WASHINGTON     City 

BALTIMORE... 

Currituck  Inlet 

CAPE  HATTERAS... 
Deep  soundings  off  do. 

Ocracock  Inlet 

CAPE  LOOKOUT.... 
Deep  soundings  off  do . . 

Old  Topsail  Inlet 

Beaufort  (N.  C.) 

WILMINGTON 

Brunswick 

Smithville 

New  Inlet 

CAPE  FEAR 

Deep  soundings  off  do. 
GEORGETOWN 

Ditto  light... 

Cape  Roman 

CHARLESTON...... 

Charleston  lighthouse . . 
North  Eddisto  Inlet. . . . 

BfeAUFORT  (S.  C.)... 

Port  Royal  Dar 

Tybee  light 

SAVANNAH 

St,  Catherine's  Sound.. 

Sapellc  Bar 

Doboy  do 

Light  on  St.  Simon's  Isl- 
and, S-  pt 

St.  Andrews  Sound.. .. 
Light    on    Cumberland 

Island..  ■ 

River  Nassau  entrance 
River  St.  John  entrance 
St.  Augustine  Town... 
Island  Anastasia,  N.  P. 

-S.  P....^. 

Muskito  or  N.  Smyrna 

entrance 

Cape  Canaveral 

Outer  breakers  off  d 
Las  Tortolas   or  * 

mocks 

Hiltsborough  Isl.  iS 

Mount  Pelado  or  Bi  <i\ 
I  Hetttl  ...,o. ....  ...,!27 


Lut. 
D.  M. 

40  42N 


m 


40  27) 
39  47  J 
39  30 
39  19 

38  57 

39  57 

38  47 
37  7 

36  56 

37  00 

37  13 

38  59 
38  48 

38  53 

39  17 
36  23 
35  14 
35  6 
35  5i 
34  37 
34  28 
34  41 

4  43 
34  14 
34  2 
.33  54 
33  57 
33  48 
33  35 
33  22 
33  7J 
33  00 
32  45 
32  40 
32  32 
32  25 
32  9 
32  00 
32  4 
31  41 
31  32 
31  20 

31  8 
31  00 

30  45 
30  30 
30  21 
29  53 
29  31 
29  37 

28  62 
28  18 
28  20 

27  35 
27  39 

27  13 


1 


Lonp- 
b.  M, 
74  2W 

74  2 
74  7 
74  19 
74  34^ 

74  58 

75  9 

75  5 

76  3 
76  5 
76  23^ 
76  35 

76  33 

77  6 
77  3 
76  39 
75  55 
75  30 

75  59 

76  33 

76  40 

76  40 

77  53 

78  58 

78  1 
77  55 
77  57 

79  9 
79  1 
79  14 
79  48 

79  43 

80  02 
SO  32 
80  28 
80  42 

80  58 

81  3 
81  7 
81  16 

31  29 
81  32 

81  37 

81  35 
81  33 
81  27 
81  23 
81  27 

80  56 
80  33 
80  13 

80  30 
SO  20 
HO   13 

80  11 


25 
24 
24 
24 
24 
24 

•24 
24 
24 
24 
24 
24 
24 
25 


jD. 

Grenvills's  Inlet j26 

Cooper's  Hill 26 

Sand  Hills 26 

New  Inlet 126 

Middle  River  enlrancc:26 

CAPE  FLORIDA 25 

Cayo    Largo    or   Long 
Key,  N.  E.  P 

'O*    C^t  IT*     •■••••*•••• 

Sombrero  or  Hat  Key 

Looe  Key 

Key  West,  S.W.Pt.... 
Sand  Key  or  C.  Arena 

>rtugas     Islands     and 

Banks  N.  W.  part.... 

N.  E.  do 

o*  £i*do.... .... .... 

S.W.  do 

Bush  Key  Light 

Key  Vacas 

Key  Axi 

Cape  Sable  orTancha.. 
Cape     Romano    or     P. 

Largo 

Boca     Grand    ent.     B. 

Carlos 

Spirito  Santo  Bay  ent. 

Keys  Anclote 

St.  Marcos  do  Apalaeht 

S.  W.  Cape 

St.  George's  Kcy.S.W.  P. 

Cafe  St.'^Blas 

Bay  St.  Andres 

Bay  St.  Rosa 

PENSACOLA  bar ...... 

River  Perdido |  >«) 

Mobile  Liprht \M' 

MOBILE  bar ,.-j 

Key  B:  ^ton ./ 

Entrance   of    MISSIS 

SIPPI,N.  F 

—  La  Balisa ••. 

"^  o.   £4**>  ••■•<•••  •••■ 

^~  W ■•■••»•  •■••••• 

NEW-ORLEANS 

Iron  Point  or  Point  I  i- 

erro 

Constant  Bay. 

River  Mermentao 


M. 
47N 
42 
32 
50 

7 
40 

16 
56 
34 
30 
29 
23 

36 
38 
33 
31 
33 
37 
57 
1 


2.5  42 


26 
27 

28 
30 
29 
29 
29 
30 
30 
'.0 


29 
■29 
29 
Point  ent.   river  Sabine  2'} 


41 
38 
24 

'J 
51 
34 
38 

5 
24 
18 
16 

■S 
JO 
28 

S 
7 

59 
58 
Gf, 

le 
.so 

30 
37 


rr 

%\ 

i). 

so 

2Vv 

eo 

,, 

SC 

3 

i^v* 

00 

\:-M 

00 

,1-i- 

r< 

80  22 

80  36 

81  15 

81  31 
31  55 
31  59 

83     2 

82  55 

82  56 

83  2 
S3  00 
81  12 


31 
81 


7 
9 


82  10 

82  43 

83  16 

83  28 

84  57 

85  5 
8.-  45 
186  00 
H6  12 

86  55 

87  :'7 
B"  4^ 
8«  i7 

17 
9  11 


6 

5 

13 

31 

9 


n  26 
>:!  31 

)4  93 


II.  Islands  in  Ihe'West  Indies. 


TRINIDAD, 

—  Spanish  Town 

—  Icaquc  Point 

—  Point  Cialiotc 
~  '''oint  Galenv 
Tcljago,  N.  E.  Point 

—  S.  W.  point 
(irenadit,  N.  E.  jioint 

—  S.  W.  point 

Oi'onndn  Bank,   Aii.ldle 


t'b 


668 


(.ATITVDES    AMD   LONftlTUDES. 


S 

■a 

e 


Bnrbadoes,  S.  J? 

—  K.  do. 

—  Itiiilgcto^Tn 

—  N.VV.  point 

St.    Vincents,  N.  point 

—  S.     do 

St.  T.iicin,  fi.  point 

—  N.  do 

Vliirtini':o,  S.  E.  point.. 

I  —  Diiunon<^Uock 

—  PortKoyal 

—  Macouba  Point 

Dominica,  S.  point 

—  N.  do 

The  Saints  Island 

Maringalantc,  N.  P 

—  S.do 

Guadaloiipe,  S.  W.  P... 

—  N.  VV.  do 

—  N.  E.  do 

—  S.  K.  do 

Descada 

Antigua,  E.  P 

—  VV.  point 

Monserrat,  S.  P. ..... . 

N.P 

Redondo  Island 

Nevis 

St.  Christ'rs  or  St.  Kitts 

—  S.  E.  point 17  12 

—  N.  W.4i6int 17  24 

St.  Eustatia  Town !/  29 

Snba 17  40 

A.TOS  or  Bird's  I.  about  15  40 

Barbuda,  N.  P 17  44 

St.  Burlholomcw,  E.  P.  17  64 

St.  Martin's,  E.  P 

Anguila,  S.  W.  point. .. 

"*"  iN»  Jit,  UOi  ■•••••  •••• 

Prickly  Pear 

Ule  of  Dogs,  western . . 

Sombrero 

St.CroixorSt.CruaE.P. 

—  W.P 

Ancgado,  S.  P.  of  shoni 
~  W.  P 


tatT 
D.    M. 
13    IN 
13    8 
13    5 
13  18 
13  12 
13    4 
13  30 

13  56 

14  24 
14  24 
14  36 

14  56. 

15  14 
15  39 

15  52 

16  4 
15  53 

15  59 

16  20 
16  30 
16  11 

16  21 

17  6 
17  6 
16  42 
16  50 

16  56 

17  9 


j  fc*  Virgin  Gorda,  E.  P  .... 
\f  Tortola,  E.P 

1    -  »*f    n 


W.P. 
St.  John's 

Thomas 

i.  ^Afd  Key 

'•  (pent  I.  E.  part.. 
—  Crab  I.  E.  part. 


Cape  St.  John  or  N.  E 

rollTO   RICO........ 

^  Point  Bruquen  or  N.  W, 

Point  St.  Francisco .... 

Gape  Roxo  or  8.  VV.  P, 

J.  Los  Morilloi... 

I  Point Couma 

O.MalaPasquaorS.E.P. 

Shoal 


13  4 
18  12 
18  18 
18  20 
18  19 
IS  38 
17  45 

17  42 

18  36 
18  46 
18  30 
18  28 
18  25 
18  22 
IS  2? 
18  15 
18  19 
18  10 


ilS  24 
IS  29 
18  31 
18  22 

17  68 

18  00 
17  55 
n  69 
I'i   20 


T7 

D. 

59  36W 
59  24 
59  41 

59  44 
61  21 
61  30 
61  00 

60  56 

60  66 

61  6 
61  9 
61  28 
61  28 
61  30 
61  37 
61  14 
61  15 
61  48 
61  56 
61  32 
61  15 
fil  8 

61  44 

62  00 
62  17 
62  17 
62  22 
62  33 


62  38 

62  61 
68  3 

63  16 
63  40 

61  50 

62  40 

63  1 
63  8 

62  52 

63  16 
63  20 

63  30 

64  34 
64  64 
64  9 
64  23 
64  18 
64  31 
64  42 
64  42 
64  f'S 

64  50 

65  17 
65  15 


65  3r. 

66  5 

67  7 
67  13 
67  9 
67  16 
66  27 
65  47 
65  SO 


Muertos  Island 

La  Moon  I 

Monito  I 

Zacheo  or  Dessechflo  I. 


I 

a 

I 

V. 
o 


09 


Cape  Engano 

Saona  I.  E.  part 

St.  Catherine's  I 

St.  Domingo****...... 

La  Catalina. .......... 

Cape  Beata.. ......... 

Altavela  rock  off  do.... 

Gape  Jacquemel. ••■•.. 

Island  Baca 

Point  Gravois 

Cape  Tiberon.. ....... 

Navaza  Island. 

Cape  Donna  Maria 

Jeremy 

Caymito 

Petit  Guave 

Leozane 

POIlT-AU-PRINCE:.. 
I.  Gonare,  S.  E.  P 

^^  XN»    W«   *••  •••••  ••■• 

St.  Mark 

St.  Nichola  Mole 

TortudasW.P 

—  E.  P 

CAPE  FRANCOIS.... 

Port  Dauphin. ........ 

Shoal  off*  M.  Chriite... 

Monte  Chriate 

Point  Isabella 

Old  Cape  Francois 

Cape  Samana 

Cape  Raphael 


Lat. 
D.    M 

17  62N 
IS    6 

18  9 
18  24 


I^orant,  E.  P 

KINGSTON 

Port  Royal 

Portland  Point....... 

Pedro  Blufis 

Black  River 

Savannah  la-Mar 

Cape  Negril,  S.  point. 

—  N.  do 

iVfontego  Bay 

Martha  Brae 

St.  Ann's 

Galina  Point 

Arnatta  Bay 

N.  E.  Point. 


>  •  •  •  •  •  a 


Navaza 

Morant    Keys    or   Las 

Ranaii.... 

Pedro  Shoals 

Portland  R.  N.  E.  P. 

—  Rattlesnake,  N.  W. 
P. 

—  South  part 

Formigas  Shoal,  N.EP. 

Little  Cayman,  S.  W.  P. 


18  35 
18  13 
18  18 
18  S8 
18  8 
17  42 

17  28 

18  13 
18  4 
18  00 
18  SO 
18  84 
18  38 
18  38 
18  39 
18  85 
IS  89 
18  33 
18  42 

18  66 

19  4 

19  49 

20  6 
20  8 
19  46 
19  48 
80  9 
19  S4 
19  58 
19  40 
19  16 
19  » 

17  68 
17  58 
17  59 
17  48 

17  6§ 

18  1 
IS  13 
18  15 
18  83 
18  31 
18  31 
18  31 
IB  29 

15  81 
13  13 

18  24 

17  25 

17  1 

17  5 

16  43 

18  34 

18  96 

19  36 


Lonr 
D.  M. 

66  SOW 

67  50 
67  53 

67  86 

68  80 
68  31 

68  58 

69  51 

70  11 

71  80 

71  81 
78  35 
73  38 

73  65 

74  29 

75  3 
74  87 

74  7 
73  43 
78  54 

72  38 
78  81 
78  47 

73  18 
78  45 
73  85 
78  54 
78  35 
78  13 
71  56 
71  40 
71  43 
71  10 
69  65 
69  7 
68  53 

76  9 
76  51 

76  55 

77  14 

77  55 

78  1 
78  83 
78  37 
78  35 
78  9 
77  49 
77  22 
76  59 
76  51 
76  20 

75  3 


7«  00 

77  13 

79  13 

78  26 
76  48 
75  51 

80  5 


it. 


jGra 

swa 

iNev 


rs 


|05 


'Cap< 

C.  B 

'Poin 

H« 

St.  J 
en( 
Tarqi 
'Cape 
Boca  I 
'Key  I 
Trinid 
[Bay  } 
Stone 
Los  Ju 
S.  E.  , 
IEI  Jar 
Keys  J 
L  Pine; 
Indian . 
Keys  S; 
Point  I 
CapeC( 
Cape  St 
Sancho 
Shoal  di 
Los  Col 
-N.E. 
Point  Ju 
I  Hill  Gui 
.Bay  Hoi 
Port  Ca 
PUERr 
HAVAN 
Moro) 
Point  Es 
Point  Gi 
Pan  of  i\ 
MATAN 
,»  Point  YcE 
;?  StoueKe 
^  Key  Cruz 
"©■jLas  Ciibti 
;§  Nicholas 
"E  Key  Carol 
|5  Key  Fran 
LS  Key  Willi 
n      most).. 
St.  Juan.. 
Key  Coco 
ma  char 
Key  Point 
The  Barrc 
Cayo  Con/1 
Cayo  or  K 
Guajava.. 
Point  Mate 
Point  de  ^ 
Point  de  M 
Tanamo. . . 


LATITUDES    AND    LONGITUDES. 


669 


I.  M.| 
B  30^1 
7  50 

7  53 

,7  26 

18  80 
a  31 
^  58 

69  51 

70  11 

71  20 

71  21 

72  36 

73  38 

73  55 

74  29 

75  3 
174  27 
74  7 
73  43 
72  54 
172  38 
172  21 

72  47 

73  18 

172  45 

173  25 
72  54 
72  36 
172  13 
71  66 

m  40 

71  43 
Tl  10 
[69  66 
169  7 
168  63 

176  • 
176  61 

176  66 

77  14 

177  66 

79  1 

78  23 
78  37 
78  35 
78  9 
77  49 

177  22 
76  69 
76  51 
l76  20 

175  3 

l7«  00 

\n  13 

179  13 
178  26 
l75  49 
175  51 
IsO    5 


r^ 


-*? 


Caymanbrack,  E.  P. . . . 
Grand  Cayman,  S.W.P, 

~N.E 

wan  Islands.. .« 

New  Boar  (1804).... 


% 


D. 


at. 
M. 
19  43N 
19  15 
19  22 
17  21 
15  66 


Cape  Mayze 

C.  Bueno  or  Guanos 
Point  ent.    Cumberland 

Uar 

St  JAGO  DE    CUBA, 

entrance 

Tarquin's  Peak 

Cape  Cruz 

Boca  del  este 

Key  Breton 

Trinidad  river 

Bay  Xagua 

Stone  Keys 

Los  Jardines 

S.  E.  point  of  tbc  Bank 

E!  J.irdinillo 

Keys  Jardines 

I.  Pines  S.  W.  P 

Indian  Keys 

Keys  St.  Philip 

Point  Picdras. (>• 

Cape  Corientes 

Cape  St.  Antonio 

Sancho  Pedro  Shoal . . . 
Shoal  discovered  in  1797 
Los  Colorados,  S.  W.  P, 

^.  £i*  X  ..  ....... 

Point  Juan  and  Jaunito 

Hill  Guajibon 

Bay  Honda 

Port  Cabanas 

PUERTO  del  MARIEL 
HAVANNAH       (the 

Moro) 

Point  Escqndido 

Point  Guanos 

Pan  of  Matanzas 

MATANZAS 

Point  Ycacos 

Stone  Key  off  do 

Key  Cruz  del  Padre... . 

Las  Ciibczas 

Nicholas  Shoal 

Key  Carciicio ■ 

Key  Francis 

Key  William  (northern' 
most) 

St.  Juan 

Key  Coco  S.  side  Baha- 
ma channel 

Key  Point  Paredon  do 

The  Barrel 

Cayo  Confltcs >  . 

Cayo  or  Key  Verde..  .< 

GuHJava •< 

Point  Maternillos < 

Point  de  Mangle 

Point  deMulas ^ 

Tanaino 


20  14 
20    6 


19  54 

19  57 
19  54 

19  47 

20  19 

21  6 
21  44 
21  53 
21  47 
21  37 
21  24 
21  24 
21  24 
21  22 
21  29 
21  48 
21  48 
21  43 
2i   54 


22 
22 


4 
6 


22  19 
22  58 
22  22 
22  48 

22  54 

23  3 
23     5 


23 
23 
23 

23 
23 
23 


9 

8 
9 
2 

2 
8 


23  11 
23  14 
23  16 
23  10 
22  51 
22  40 


Long. 
D.  M. 
79  52W 

81  5 

30  48 
83  38 

78  40 

74  4 

74  12 

75  11 

76  6 

76  50 

77  42 

79  8 

79  55 

80  5 

80  48 

81  45 

31  31 
81  18 
81  50 

32  4 


82 

55 

82 

56 

83 

6 

83  42 

84 

23 

34 

57 

85 

28 

85 

2 

84  44 

83 

8 

34  21 

83 

21 

83 

5 

82 

52 

82  39 

82  16 

81 

36 

81 

33 

81 

34 

22  36 
22  14 

22  29 
•22  30 
22  25 
22  11 
22  5 
21  54 
21  40 
21  13 
21  7 
20  43 


Key  Moa 

Point  Guarico. 
Baracoa 


Lut. 
D.  M 
20  44N 
20  40 
20  22 

19  56 

20  8 
20  58 
20  14 
20  32 

20  29 

21  23 
20  56 

20  53 

21  30 
21  20 
21  12 
21  7 


69  5 
68  41 

68  59 

69  29 
69  27 

69  59 

70  23 
70  28 

70  56 

71  5 


71  21 

71  58 

71  58 

72  20 
72  25 
72  7 


81  30 
81  11 
81  9 
80  55 
SO  43 
80  13 
79  49 
79  17 

78  34 
70  58 

78  17 

79  5 
77  56 
77  40 
77  37 
77  25 
76  59 
76  14 
75  34 
75  13 



Shoal  seen  in  1822 

Nativity  bank  or  E.  reef 

Superb  Shoal 

Silver  Key,  S.  E.  end.  • 
N.  E.  do 

—  W.      do 

Square      Handkerchief, 

■^^  O  •    f  V  •    Jr »  •••••••••• 

Turk's-Island,  Grand  T. 
Salt  Key c 

—  Sand  Key 

—  Endymion's  Rocks 
Great     Gaycos,     south 

E.  Part  of  the  Bank. .  21     1      71  32 

—  N.   E.  P.   or   shoal 
St.  Philip 21  42 

North  Caycos,  middle.  21  66 
Booby  Rocks  off  do  ....  21  58 
Providence   Caycos,   N 

W.P 21  50 

Little  Caycos,  S.  W.  P.  21  36 

Key  Francis 21  Z^ 

Great  Inagua  or  Hene- 

aga,  N.  E.  F 

"^  o.  £j.  Jr......  ••*...  . 

o.  W .  A............ 

N.W.P 

Little  Hencaga,  E.  P... 

—  W.P 

Hogsties  or  Corrolaes.. 
Mayaguana  E.  Reef. .  • . 

N.do 

—  S.  W.  point 

French  Keys  or  I.  Pla- 

nas 22  42 

Miraporvos  Keys 22    7 

Castle  Island,  South  of 

Ackland  Island 22    8 

Long  Island,    S.   P 22  30 

Crookedlsland,  N.  W.  P.  22  48 

—  E.  P 22  42 

N.  E.  P^  of  Acklin's  1.22  42 
Atwood's    Keys,    or    I. 

Samana,  E.  P 23    8 

—  VV.  P 23  10 

Rum  Key .23  39 

Watland'sl.  N.  E.  P...24    6 

—  S.  W.P 23  58 

Conception,  or  Little  I.  23  52 
St.  Salvador,  or  Guana- 

hari,  S.  P 23  57 

—  N.  P 24  33 

Little  St.  Salvador,  N.P.  24  32 
BIcuthcra  or  Hctera  I 

—  Powel's  Point,  S.  P.  24  38 


73  30 

74  30 


74  18 
73  59 
73  50 


73  35 

73  47 

74  48 
74  20 

74  31 

75  5 


Point  Palmeto 25  15 

25  25 
25  30 
24  33 


James  Point 

Harbour  Island  E.  P. 
Egg  Island,  Reef 


75  *9 

76  9 
76  10 

76  20  r 


76  31 


1 


76  53  i 


670 


LATITUDES    AND    LONGITUDES. 


New  Providence 

—  NASSAU 

—  E  P 

—  W.  P 

Andros  Islands,  S.  E.  P. 

■"^  i^«   *•  •••■••••••t«a 

Berry  Islands,  S.  Eastern 

Stirrup  Key 

Blackwood's  Bush  .  • . . 
Little  Isaac,  Eastern . . 

Great  Isaac 

Hen  and  Cliickens. . . . 
Bernini  Island,  northern 

fresh  water  key 

DogsKey,  N.  Pt 

Wolfs  Key  

Cat  Key • 

Riding  Rocks 

Orange  Keys,  North. . . . 

—  South 

Key  Guinchos 

Key  Lobos 

Las  Mucaras 

Key  St.  Domingo 

St.  Vincent's  Shoal 

Key  Verde  Island 

Key  Sal 

Yuma  or  Long  I.  S.  P. 

—  N.  P 

Exuma,  N.  W.  P 

THE   HOLE  IN  THE 

WALL. 
N.  E.  point  of  Abaco  . 
Linyard's  Key  N.  Pt.     . 
Man  of  War  Channel. . 
Great  Guano  Key,  N.  Pt. 
Pensacola  Keys    . 
Lit.  Bahama  Bank,  N^  P. 
Memory  Rock 
Sand  Key 

Wood  Key,  or  C.  Leno 
Great  Bahama  I.  W.  P. 

S.P.       . 

—  E.  P.      . 
Dog  Keys,  N.  P 
Double-headed 

Key,  Western  . 
Elbow  Key 
Salt  Key     . 
Anguila,  E.  P.      . 
Bermuda     . 

GEORGETOWN, 

—  Wreck  Hill,  western 
most-land 

Best  Latitude  to  run  for 
Bermuda 


Shot 


Lat 
D.     M. 

25     5N 
25     2 
25  00 

24  4 

25  24 
25  30 
25  48 
25  35 

25  58 

26  3 
26  00 

25  43 
25  31 
25  28 
25  26 
25  15 
24  57 

24  53 
22  46 
22  25 
22  10 
21  45 

21  56 

22  1 
22  12 

22  49 

23  30 

23  36 

25  51 

26  I7i 
26  23 
26  38 

26  42 

27  00 
27  50 
26  56 
26  48 
26  45 
26  42 
26  28 
26  40 

24  4 

23  57 
23  55 
23  41 
23  30 

32  22 

32  15 

32  8 


Long. 
D.  M 

77  22\V 
77  13 
77  30 

77  45 

78  3 
77  42 

77  57 

78  5 

78  48 

79  3 
79  6 

79  12 
79  13 
79  11 
79  9 


79 
79 
79 

77 


4 
6 
6 

57 


77  30 
77  12 
75  45 
75  19 
75  5 
75  41 

74  46 

75  19 

75  51 

77  9 

76  57 
76  55 

76  56 

77  4 

77  42 
79  11 
79  2 
79  1 
79  2 

78  55 

78  41 
77  48 

79  50 

80  22 
80  26 
80  20 
79  26 

64  33 

64  50 


III.  East  Coast  ofJimerica,  from  the  Gulf 
of  Mexico  to  Cape  Horn. 


point  Culebrao  E.  part 

I.  St.  Louis 
Point  St.  Francisco,  en^ 

trance  of  Bay  St.  Ber 

nard 


Lat. 
D.     M. 

29  ION 

28  58 


Long. 
D.     M. 

96    2W 

96  .'52 


Horse  Inlet  Ent.  . 
Bar  do  St.  Jago    . 
River  Bravo,  entrance   . 
River  St.  Fernando,  cnt 
Inlets  to  Laguna  Madrc 
Barra  de  St.  Ander 
Barra  del  Tordo 
Barra  de  la  Trinidad 
Barra  Ciego 
Barra  Tampico     . 
Point  de  Xeres 
Cape  Rojo  . 

River  Tuspan,  entrance 
Point  Piedras 
Boca  de  Lima 
Mount  Gordo 
River  Nauta,  ent. 
River  Palina,  ent. 
Point  Piedras 
Point  Delgada 
Point  M.  Andrea 
Xalapa 

Pic  dc  Orizaba 
Point  Gorda 
VERA  CRUZ      . 
St.  John  de  Ulloa 
River  Medellin,  ent. 
Point  Auton  Lisardo 
Bar  de  Alvarado 
Tlacotalpan 
Vigia 

Point  Roca-Partida 
Point  Morillos 
Tuxtla 

Point  Zapolitan 
Point  Xicacal 
Point  St.  John 
Barrilla 

Bar  Guazacoalios 
C^River  Tonelado 
River  St.  Ann 
River  Cupiico 
Dos  Bocas   . 
River  Chittepequ( 
River  Tabasco 
River  St.  Peter 
Point  Jicalango 
Island  Carmen 
Point  Escondido 
River  Chen 
Point  Morros 
CAMPECHE 
Point  Descondida 
Point  Gorda 
Point  Piedras 
Igil     . 
St.  Clara     . 
Bocas  de  Silan 
El  Cuyo      . 
Island  Jolvas,  N. 
Island  Contoy,  N 
Las  Areas  Islands 
Bank  Obispo 
Triangles  Islands 
New  Shoal 
Bajo  Neuva  I. 


18  40 
18  41 


18  44 
18  46 


91  14 
90  51 
90  36 
90  39 
90  30 
90  29 
90  1) 

90  l.'i 
89  lt< 
88  45 
88  2?i 
87  43 
87  11 
86  62 

91  51 

92  5 
92  7 
91  50 
91  48 


I  Chine 
•  S.  P. 
tisterio 
I'iciosi  I, 
Santanill 
South  K( 
—  Hat  h 
iLongcriff 
Reef,  i 
Sapotillas 
Rattan,  I 
-  W.  P. 
Guanaja 
Point  Ma 
Omoa 
Point  Sal 
Triunfo  d 
Utilla  I.  I 
Truxillo 
Cape  Dele 

duras 
Cape  Cam 
Cape  False 
Cape  Grac 
jCaxones, 
]—  S.  E.  P 
jCayman  oi 
Key  John  ' 
Alagarte  A 
-S.E.P. 
Serranila 
''errana  or 
-S.P. 

.Guana  Reel 

ll-S.  P. 

|Roncador 
"1  Musketeers 
Providence 
'^usquito 
Ned      Tho 
S.P, 


LATITUDES    AND    LONGITUDES, 


671 


5 

4 
2 


Island  Aronns 


W 


Lat. 
D.     M. 

22     7.\ 


i.   Bermcja,    or  N 

Shoal 
Bajo  Sisal  . 
Alacran 
N.  part  of  Bank  off  this 

coast 
N.E.do.     . 
I.  de  Mugeres,  or  Wo 

men's  L   . 
I.  Cankun,  S.  P.   . 
New  River 
River  Bacalcs 
Bay  Ascension,  cnt. 
Island  Cosuniel,   N.  P 

—  S.  E.  P. 
Rio  Hondo,  ent.  . 
I.  Ubero,  N.  P.    . 

—  S.  P.       . 
L  St.  Cruz 
Key  Jaieos 
North  Reef 
Chief  Channel 
Wallis's  River,  ent. 
El  Chinchorro,  I.  N.  I 

S.  P.  of  shoal 

Misteriosa  1. 

Viciosi  I. 

Santanilla  or  Swan  L 

South  Keys,  N.  P. 
Hat  Key,  S.  P. 

Longcriffe,    or  Glover's 
Reef,  S.  P.       . 

Sapotillas  Keys,  S.  E.  P 

Rattan,  I.  E.  P.    . 
VV.P.     . 

Guanaja  or  Bonacca  I. 

Point  Manabique 

Omoa 

Point  Sal     . 

Triunfo  de  la  Cruz 

Utilla  I.  N.  P.      . 

Truxillo 

Cape  Delegado,  or  Hon- 
duras 

Cape  Cameron     . 

Cape  False 

Cape  Gracios  a  Dios 

Caxones,  W.  P.    . 

—  S.  E.  P. 
Cayman  or  Vivorilla 
Key  John  Thomas 
Alagarte  Alia,  N.  W.  P 

—  S.E.  P.  .     .    , 
Serranila     .         . 
Serrana  or  Pearl  I.  N.  P 

—  S.  P.       . 
Guana  Reefs,  N.  P. 

—  S.  P.       . 
Roncador    . 
Musketeers 
Providence  I,  N.  P. 
Musquito  Keys,   N.   P. 
Ned      Thomas'     Keys, 

S.P,        . 


■22  36 

21  27 

22  29 

23  43 
23  27 

21  18 
20  42 
20  26 
20     5 

19  26 

20  11 
19  52 
19  4 
19  20 
18  22 
18  20 
13  14 
18  2 
17  54 

17  52 

18  5S 
18  19 
18  38 
18  00 
17  21 
17  30 
17  00 


16  21 
16  00 
16  24 
16  13 
16  32 
15  39 
15  37 
15  47 

15  41 

16  00 

15  53 

16  00 
16  2 

15  14 

14  57 

16  2 

15  4l 
15  46 
15  23 
15  21 

15  5 

16  5 
14  46 
14  23 
14  49 
13  59 
13  39 
13  27 

13  27 

14  49 

14  12 


Long. 
D.  M. 
'Jl  26VV 

91  21 
90  2 

S9  26 

88  43 
86  37 

86  42 

86  53 

87  15 

87  34 

88  3 
86  34 

86  32 
88  17 
88  3 
S7  53 

87  52 
87  52 
87  50 

87  55 

88  19 


87 
87 


11 

6 


85  25 
84  44 

84  4 
87  12 

87  8 

87  41 

88  12 

86  20 
86  57 

86  7 
88  29 

87  57 
87  29 
87  17 
87  2 
86  6 

86  11 

85  10 
83  3 

82  46 

83  11 

82  27 

83  26 

81  49 

82  5 

81  54 
80  9 
79  47 

79  51 

80  44 
80  41 
79  46 

79  46 

80  39 

82  19 

82  21 


Lat. 


D 


M. 

13  51N 
13  4 
12  19 
12  10 

58 


6 
20 
00 
29 
14 
19 
33 
40 
38 
34 
19 
8  55 
8  40 

7  57 

8  37 
S  49 


12 
11 
11 
9 
9 
9 
9 
9 
9 
9 
9 


20 

48 


:ado 


10  25 
10  48 


Bracman's  Bluff  . 
Man  of  War  Keys 
Little  Corn  Island 
Great  Corn  Island 
Bluetields,  ent.  .  .11 
I.  St.  Andrew,  mid.  .  12  33 
E.  S.  E.  Keys       .  .  12  22 

S.  S.  W,  Key,  orAlbur- 

querque 
Paxoro  Bovo 
St.  John's  Point 
Port  Boco  Toro    . 
I.  Escudo,  N.  P. 
River  Chagre,  cnt. 
PORTO  BELLO 
Farallon  I.  N.  P. 
Point  Manzanillo 
Point  St.  Bias 
Point  Conception 
Isle  of  Pines 
Cape  Tiburon     . 
River  Suniquilla,  ent.    . 
Point  Carabana    . 
Point  Arboletes    . 
Island  Fuerte 
L  St.  Bernard,  N.W.P, 
CARTHAGENA 
Galera  de  Samba 
West  ent.  River  Mag 

dalen 
St.  Martha 
Cape  Aguja 
Bank  Navio  Queb, 
Hacha 
Cape  la  Vela 
Point  Galinas 
Monges  Islands,  N 
Cape  Chichibacoa 
Point  Espada 
St.  Carlos  . 
MARACAYBO    . 
Coro 

Point  Garden  .  .11 
Point  Macolla  .  .12 
Cape  St.  Roman  .  .  12 
Island  Gruba,  N.  W.  P. 

—  S.  E.  P. 

Point  Aricula  .  .11 
Point  Savannos  .  .'11 
Point  Suldado  .  .11 
Key  Borrocho  .  .jlO  57 
Tucacas  .  .  .10  51 
PORTO  CABELLO  .10  29 
Valencia  .  .  .10  IS 
Point  St.  John  Andres  10  30 
Point  Oricaro  .  .  10  34 
Point  Trinchera  .  .  10  38 
r-A  GUAVRA  .  .  10  37 
CARRACCAS  .  .  10  30 
Centinela  L    or  VJ^hite 

Rock  .  .  .  10  60 
Cape  Codera  .  .  10  36 
Curacoa  I.  N.  P.  ■  12  24 

—  S.  E.  P.  .         .  12    2 
Little  Curaco       •         .  11  59 


11 
11 
11 
11 
11 
12 


3 
15 
21 
36 
31 
11 


12  27 
12  31 
12  17 
12  6 
11     3 

10  43 

11  24 
35 

6 
12 

12  38 
12  25 


57 
33 
14 


Long. 
D.     M. 

82  flow 
82  39 
82  6 
82  11 
82  54 
81  00 

80  41 

81  8 

82  48 
82  54 
82  5 
80  57 
80  3 
79  35 
79  3:^ 
79  20 
78  40 
77  53 
77  39 
77  29 
76  54 
76  67 
76  32 
76  13 
75  50 
75  29 
75  20 


74  56 
74  11 
74  12 
73  11 
72  56 
72  14 
71  41 

70  59 

71  17 
71  8 
71  12 
71  iV 

69  46 

70  20 
70  19 
70  7 
70  9 
69  58 
69  53 
69  10 
68  35 
63  19 
68  17 

68  4 
'   7 

,  48 
67  17 

67  4 
66  59 
66  67 

66  6 
66  3 

69  13 

68  46 
68  41 


mi 


A 


/ 


672 


LATITUDES    AND   LONGITUDES. 


Long. 
D.  M. 

68  26W 
68  18 
67  43 
67  39 
66  68 
66  33 
66  6 

64  40 

65  19 
64  27 
64  38 

63  50 

64  14 
63  48 
63  38 

63  9 

65  23 

64  46 
64  48 
64  31 
64  15 
64  30 
63  54 

63  27 
63  4 
63  44 
62  33 
61  53 

61  43 

62  43 
61  58 
60  26 
60  4 
58  20 

57  58 
57  11 
55  16 
55  15 
53  53 
52  15 
51  40 
51  20 
51  10 
50  10 
60  00 
48  33 

47  28 

48  35 
47  10 
46  33 
45  23 

43  40 

44  13 
43  18 
43  54 

43  44 

44  25 
44  16 
44  23 
44  17 


I 


Buenayre,  N.  P.  . 

—  S.  P.      . 
Bird's  or  Aves  I.  western 

—  Eastern 
ttoca,  VV.  P. 

—   £•    Pa  •  • 

Orchilla  I. 
Blanchal.  . 
Tortuga  I. 
Seven  Brothers  mid. 
Margarita,  W.  P. 

—  E.  P.       . 
I.  Cuagiia  or  Pearl  I. 
Friar's  I.     . 
I.  Sola 
Testigos   I. 
River  Orquilla  cnt. 
New  Barcelona     . 
!•  Borracho  . 
Sante  Fe 
Cumana 
Araya 

Morro  Chocoputa 
Escondido     or    Hidden 

Port 
Cape  Malapasqua 
Cape  Three  Points 
Point  Galera 
Point  Pena  or  Salina 
Dragon's  Mouth    . 
River   Gaurapiche,  ent 
Point  Morro 
Oronoco  River 
Cape  Barma 
Esscquebo  River  . 
DEMERAPA  river,  ent 

Corrobano  Poitit 
River  Berbice,  ent. 
SURINAM  River,  ent, 
Paramaribo 
R.  Marouri,  entrance 
CAYENNE 

Oyapock  River,  St.  Louis 
Cape  Orange 
R.  Cassipour,  entrance 
Cape  North  . 
Mouth  of  River  Amazon 
Cape  Magoany 
Point  Tagioca 
Para    .... 
Bay  Maracuno 
CaiteHarb.  . 
Cape  Gurapi 
Shoal   .... 
Island  of  St.  Joao  , 

Bay  of  Mt.  Luis 
Bay  de  Cabalo  de  Velha 
Point  of  B.  Alius 
Itaculumi 
Si  Marcos    . 
Va.  de  Alacantra 
St.  Luis  dc  Maranbam 
Coroa  Grande,  or  Great 

Crown  Banks,  N.  E. 

Point 


Lat. 
D.  M. 
12  21JN 
12  3 
12  00 
11  68 
11  51 
11  61 
11  49 
11  62 

10  57 

11  46 
11  2 
11  00 

10  49 

11  14 
11  20 
11  24 
10  8 
10  8 
10  20 
10  16 
10  37 
10  35 
10  43 


10  41 

10  43 

10  46 

10  45 

10  44 

10  41 

10  13 

9  54 

8  35 

8  22 

7  00 

6  48 


20 

58 

49 

60 

60  , 

51 

12 

54 

48 
0  18 
0  17S. 

0  33 

1  28 
0  37 
0  47 
0  43 

0  52 

1  17 
1  5 

1  30 

2  3 
2  9 
2  28 
2  24 
2  31 


2  13  44  14 


•» 


Fin  dos  Lancoos  Grandcs 

I.  St-Anna 

Bay  of  Rio  Perguicas 

Iquarasu  ent.  Parnhaiba 

Jericoacoara 

Coras  de  Caracu 

Mount  Melancias  Point 

Ciara 

Roccas  (dangerous) 

St.  Lorenzo 

Point  Daniel 

Baxos  de  Salino    • 

Point  Pcdras 

Cape  St.  Roque     . 

River  Parahiba,  ent. 

Pernambuco 

Capo  St.  Augustin 

Frnncisco  Rio  St. 

ST.  SALVADOR  (Capo 

St.  Antonio) 
Porto  Seguro 
Abrohios  Islands 
Espiritu  Santo 
Cape  St.  Thomas 
St.  Ann's  Islands 
John's  Is.  St.  Ann's  Bay 
Anchor  I$land 
CAPE^RIO 
Mo|wsl8landi 
Point  Negra 
Maurice  Islands    . 
Razor  I.  oif  II,  Janeiro 
Point  St.  Cruz 
RIO  JANEIRO  barb. 
Sugar  Loaf 
River  Guaraliba    . 
Point  Maranbaya     • 
I.  Grande  S.  P.      . 
Point  Jeantinga    . 
I.  S.  Sebastian,  N 
—  o.  P.        .        . 
Mount  Trigo 
St  Catharine's  Isl.N.Pt 
Porto  St.  Pedro   . 
Cape  St.  Mary 
I.  Lobos       . 
Maldonado  harbour 
MONTE  VIDEO 
BUENOS  AYRES 
Cape  St.  Antonio 
Cape  Lobos 
Cape  Corientes 
Point  de  Neuva    . 
St.  Helena 
St.    George'i 
Cordova    . 
Cape  Blanco 
Point  Desire 
t^oti  St.  Julian,  ent. 
St.  Cruz  harbour 
Cape  Fainveather 
Cape  Virgins,  ncrlhern 
point  of  cntr;mcc  to 
Magellan's  Straits 


Lat. 
D.  M 
2  23S 
2  14 
2  41 
2  44 
2  47 
48 
12 
43 
56 
57 
42 
40 
52 


P. 


Bay,  C, 


2 
3 
3 
3 
3 
4 
4 
4 

5  28 

6  43 
8  5 
8  21 

10  29 

13  1 

16  40 

17  68 

20  18 

21  59 

22  25 
22  35 

22  44 

23  1 
22  69 

22  67 

23  2 
23  3 
22  57 

22  54 
122  56 

23  4 
23  6 
23  15 
23  20 
23  44 
23  58 
23  51 
27  22 
32  9 

34  39 

35  2 
34  58 
34  55 
34  36 

36  19 

36  55 

37  59 
42  55 

44  30 

45  45 
47  15 
47  45 

49  7 

50  19 

51  34 


52  24 


Long. 
D.  M. 
43  9W 
43  39 
43  27 
41  20 
40  88 
39  44 
39  20 

38  3-^ 

33  45 
37  52 
37  24 

37  00 
36  38 

35  17 

36  10 

34  63 
34  67 
36  24 

33  32 

39  00 

38  43 

40  20 

40  40 

41  46 

42  6 

41  50 

43  4 
43  29 

42  44 

43  00 
43  16 
43  16 
43  16 
43  16 

43  42 

44  10 
44  29 
44  40 
46  25 
46  2 
46  52 
48  29 

52  2 

53  56 

54  37 
54  41 
56  5 
58  16 
56  37 

56  47 

57  40 

64  9 

65  27 

67  25 

65  57 

66  2 

67  42 

68  29 
68  69 


68  25 


9^ 
39 


38  32 

39  00 
38  43 

40  20 

40  40 

41  46 

42  5 

41  50 

42  4 
42  29 

42  44 

43  00 
43  16 
43  16 
43  16 
43  15 

43  42 

44  10 
44  29 

44  40 

45  25 

45  2 

46  52 
48  29 

52  2 

53  56 

54  37 
54  41 
56  5 
58  16 
56  37 

56  47 

57  40 

64  9 

65  27 


67  25 

65  57 

66  2 

67  42 

68  29 
68  59 


LATITUDES    AND    LOMUITUDKS. 


673 


68  25 


Lat. 

Long. 

TTT- 

Long. 
D.    k. 

D.     M. 

D.     M. 

D.     M. 

Cape     Espirito     Santo 

Point  Tames 

22  33S. 

70  lOVV 

(south  point  of    en- 

Jaguey de  Raquis* 

21  50 

70    9 

trance  to  do.)     . 

52  40  S. 

68  26W 

Pavellon  de  Pica 

20  58 

70  16 

Terra  del  Fiicgo  f.  Penas 

53  45 

67  29 

Point  Piedras 

20     5 

70  13 

—  Cape  St.  Diego 

54  37 

65     5 

Point  Pisagua 

19  26 

70  19 

Staten  Land 

Arica 

18  27 

70  19 

— C.  St.  John,  eastern- 

Point  de  Colea 

17  42 

71  14 

,^      most  land  ncarC.Horn 

54  43 

63  42 

*« 

Ho        ...         . 

17  38 

71  13 

£  —  C.    St.  Bartholomew 
"^  —  C.   del    Medio  entr. 

54  57 

64  39 

1 

Point  Cornejo 

16  41 

72  46 

Cumana 

16  17 

73  21 

■^       to  Le  Maire's  Straits 

54  49 

64  48 

Atico 

16    8 

73  47 

New  Island  E.  part 

55  17 

66  25 

R.  St.  Juan 

15  15 

75  14 

Evout's    Island,    middle 

55  32 

66  47 

Los  Amigos  Point 

14  27 

76    2 

Bcrnabelas  Islands,  E.P. 

55  44 

66  46 

Pisco 

13  46 

76  12 

CAPE    HORN,    South 

Caneta 

13     1 

76  27 

part  pf  Hermit's  Isl. 

55  58 

67  21 

P.Chilca      . 

I.  St.  Lorenzo,  W.  P. 

12  33 
12     5 

76  43 

77  8 

IV.     West   Coast  of  America  from  Cam 

Horn  to  Tres  Marias. 

M 

LIMA 

12     3 

76  56 

CALLAO,  sea  port  of 
Lima 

12     2 

77    4 

Lat. 

Long. 

, 

D.     M. 

I).     M. 

I.  Pescador,  W.  part      . 

11  46 

77  10 

g.  CAPE  HORN      . 

55  58S. 

67  21 U 

Los  Hormigas  Islands  . 

11  56 

77  48 

J  I.  Diego  Ramirez,  S.  part 

56  32 

63  36 

I.  Pelada 

11  27 

77  41 

S  —  N.  Part 

56  25 

68  45 

Island  St.  Martin . 

11     3 

77  30 

■«  I.  St.  Ildefonso  S.  P.       . 

55  56 

69  17 

Point  Santander   . 

10  39 

77  41 

^  Terra  del  Fuego    . 

Rock  seen  in  1792 

10  48 

78  48 

^  —  False  Cape  Horn 

55  42 

68    8 

Ferrol  (entrance) 

9    7 

73  30 

—  Yorkminster    , 

55  27 

70    4 

Truxillo 

8    8 

78  53 

—  C.  Gloucester 

54     7 

73  35 

L  Malabrigo  (dort) 

7  48 

79  21 

—  Cape   Pillars   S.   W. 

Isl.  Lobos  de  Mer 

6  58 

80  44 

entrance    to    Magel- 

Isl. Lobos  de  Tierre 

6  24 

80  46 

lan's  Straits 

52  45 

74  57 

Eten     .        .         .        . 

6  56 

79  49 

Evangelist  I.    VV.    ent. 

Point  de  Adjuga    . 

5  59 

81     4 

Magellan's  Straits 

52  34 

75     5 

Point  Payta 

5     3 

81     2 

Cape  Victory 

52  25 

74  57 

Cape  Blanco 

4  19 

81     6 

Cape  St.  Jago 

50  54 

75  30 

P.  Malpelo   . 

3  32 

80  17 

Cape  Three  Points 

49  46 

75  45 

GUAYAQUIL  City       . 

2  12 

79  42 

Cape  Corso 

49  26 

75  45 

I.  Puna,  S.  W.  P. 

3    4 

80    8 

I.  Campana  N.  W.  point 

48  00 

75  19 

Point  St.  Helena  . 

2  10 

80  48 

Cape  Tres  Monies 

46  59 

75  27 

I.  Pelade      . 

1  56 

80  36 

Capo  Taitaohaohuon     . 

45  51 

75  23   ■ 

Point  do!  Callo     . 

1  23 

80  34 

I.  Huafo  W.  part  . 

44  00 

74  42 

I.  de  hi  Plata,  W.  P.     . 

1  18 

80  57 

P.  Quilan      . 

43  41 

74  21 

Cape  tt.  Lorenzo 

1     4 

80  43 

P.  St.  Carlos 

41  49 

73  53 

Manta 

0  57 

80  32 

P.Quedal      • 

41     5 

74    9 

Cape  Pasado 

0  27 

30  20 

P.  de  la  Galera      . 

39  54 

73  46 

o 

Quito     .        .        .        . 

0  18 

78  18 

VALDIVIA,  entrance    . 

39  51 

73  33 

•s 

Aibol    .        .        .         , 

0  15N 

79  48 

P.  Tirua 

38  29 

73  46 

o> 

Cape  St.  Francisco 

0  39 

79  52 

I.  de  la  Mocha  W.  part 

38  20 

74    5 

P.  de  la  Galera      . 

0  48 

79  51 

.  St.  Maria  Islands  N.  P. 

36  59 

73  41 

R.  Esmeraldas  entrance 

0  58 

79  23 

■3  -  S.  P. 

37     5 

73  42 

P.  Mangles  . 

1  37 

78  52 

S  CONCEPTION,  city    . 

36  49 

73    9 

I.  Tumaeo    . 

1  47 

78  38 

ife,  Talcahuano,  port  of  do. 

36  41 

73  12 

p.  Guascama 

2  29 

78  23 

.2  Santiago 

33  27 

70  43 

I.  Gorgona  middle 

2  53 

78    7 

1  VALPARAISO,  port     . 

33     1 

71  37 

River  Cajambrie,  ent.     . 

3  19 

77    3 

U  Point  Ballena 

31  50 

71  44 

. 

I.  de  Malpelo 

3  55 

80    4 

Coquimbo     . 

29  56 

71  19 

2 

I.  de  Palmas 

3  57 

77    7 

Huasco 

28  26 

71  15 

1 

P.  Chirambira 

4  13 

77  15 

Copiapo 

27  10 

71     8 

Cape  Corientes 

5  34 

77  15 

P.  Negra      . 

26  24 

70  56 

Limones 

6    3 

77  n 

Ul.  St.    Felix,   Eastern 

26  20 

79  47 

p.  St.  Francisco  Solanu 

6  49 

77  47 

—  Western 

26  16 

80     3 

P.  Garachine 

8    8 

73  12 

I.  Blanca 

24  56 

70  36 

PANAMA    . 

8  57 

79  22 

Morro  Moreno 
1    [Morro  de  Mexilones 

23  IS 

70  32 

P.  Mala 

7  24 

79  53    1 
SO  IS    1 

23    4 

70  28 

Peurcofl  Point 

7  13 

i 

r 

1 


A 


85 


<!» 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


k 


.V 


A 


1.0 


I.I 


11.25 


■^  I&2    122 

M    12.0 


•  Id 

^U4 


6" 


PhotograiAic 

^Sdeeces 

Corporation 


A 


23  WIST  MAIN  STIIIT 

WIBSTIR.N.Y.  14S80 

(7I«)  172-4303 


Si 


4^ 


61% 


LATITUDES  AMD  LONGITUDES 


!.  Quibo,  N.  P. 

Los  Ladroncs 

Point  Eurica 

Gulfe  Dulce,  W.  P.       . 

I.  Cano  ent-  otf  Englisli 

harbour 
Cape  Herradura 
Cape  BLiico 
Mtoya 

Mono  I rcrmoso 
1*.  St.  Catharine 
St  John's  Ilnr. 
i'oint  Dcso'.ada 
Lcou 
Uea!cjo 
\serradores 
Point  Cosignina 
Point  Candadillo 
Sacatecoluia 
Point  Reinedios 

Gautimala 
Puerto  Ventosa 
\gualco 
ACAPULCO 
Cape  Corientcs 
St.  Bias 
Tres  Mnrins 


L 
D 

at  1 
M. 

7  41 N 

7  53 

3 

3 

8 

23 

8  48 

9 

37 

9  28 

9  42 

9  45 

10 

28 

11 

22 

11 

49 

12 

22 

12 

27 

12 

35 

12 

53 

13 

7 

13 

26 

13  30  1 

13 

51 

16 

6 

16 

2 

16  55  i 

20 

32 

21 

30 

21 

28 

Lorg. 
D.  iVI. 

81  37\V 

82  30 
S2  50 

83  18 

83  51 
81  21 
81  41 

84  57 

85  5 
85  42 

85  44 

86  40 

86  46 

87  5 
87  20 
87  37 
87  57 
83  47 

89  42 

90  53 

95  22 

96  52 
10 J  54 

105  35 
104  60 

106  29 


V     t'roiii  Rmr  St.  Croix  to  Cape  Cansor. 


^. 


Mccgone's  I.  (entrance 
of  St.  John's  Itiver) 

Cape  Spencer 

C.  Chignecto  (entrance 
Bason  of  mines) 

Haute  Island 

Annrpolis  Royal 

Breve  r's  IslunJ  Light    . 

St.  Mary's  Cape 

Cape  Fourchu 

Seal  Isles 

Cape  Sable 

Sable  Mand,  K.  P. 
.  W.  do.      . 


Port  Itoseway 
Port  M.\niifield 
Gambi.  r  Harbour 
LIVERPOOL       . 
U\q  of  Hope 
Port  Jackson 
Charlotte  Bay 
C.  Sambro  liglit-hovde 
HAH  FAX  Harboui 
Port  Stephens 
Sandwich  Bay     . 
Torbay  Bay 
Port  Hone 
CAPE  CANSOR 


Lat. 

D.  Al. 

15  18N. 

15  IJ 

15  19 

15  15 

14  42 

14  18 

44  7 

43  49 

13  26 

13  25 

14  5 

14  3 

13  40 

43  50 

44  00 

44  5 
13  53 
44  13 
44  31 
44  30 

44  3G 

45  00 
45  8 
45  12 
45  13 
15  18 


Long. 
D.  M. 

66  4\V 

65  59 

64  50 

64  52 

65  45 

66  22 
66  10 
66  S 
65  57 
65  35 
60  3 

60  31 

63  13 

64  52 

61  41 
61  40 
64  39 
64  27 
63  53 
63  32 
63  23 
61  59 
61  36 
61  16 
61  6 
60  56 


■o 


LOUISBURGH 
CAPE  BRETON 
Scaltery  Island 
Flint  Island 
Spanish  Bay 
Port  Dauphin 
Cape  North  Island 
Chcticun  Harbour 
iea  Wolf  Island 
Port  Hood 
Jus  an  Corp  Island 
GUT  OF  CA^SOB,  N 
entrance 

Cape  St.  George  or  St. 

Lewis 
Picton  Island 
t^ape  Tormentine 
Ricbibucto  Harbour 


St.  John's  1.  (N.  Cape) 
West  Povit 
Cape  Egmont 
Halifax  Bay 
Ea!<t  Point 
Bear  Cape 
Hilsborough  Bay 


Lat. 
D.  M. 

45  54N. 
15  57 

46  1 
46  9 
46  18 

46  23 

47  6 
46  42 
46  27 
45  53 
45  56 

45  42 


45  52 

45  51 

46  9 

46  44 

47  5 
46  37 
46  28 
46  23 
46  27 
46  3 
46  6 


P.  Escuminac 

Miscou  I.   (entrance  of 

Chaleur  Bay) 
Cape  Despair 
Island  Bonaventure      . 
Flat  Point 
Cape  Gaspe 
Cape  Rozier 
Magdalen  River 
St.  Ann's  River 
Mount  Camille 
I.  de  Bik  in  the  River  St 

Laurence 


VI.  The  Gvijof  St.  Laurence. 


Giiedabucto  Bay 
Gut  of  Cansor,  t>.  cnt. 
Capa  Hlnchiiibrct(3 
''tpa  Portland 


I  at. 
D.  M. 
45  23N 
45  28 
45  31 
45  48 


Long. 
D.  M. 
61  OOW 
61  13 
60  40 
go    3 


I.  of  Anticosta,  E.  P. 
Jupiter's  River 

—  S.  W.  ditto     . 

—  West  ditto       . 

—  North  ditto     • 
DccLdinan's  Island 
Entry  Island 
Amherst  Isl.  S.  \V.  P. 
Magdalen  Isl.  N.  E.  1 
Biron  Island 

Bird  Island 
St.  Paul's  Island 


47  3 

48  3 
48  27 
48  32 
48  33 
48  47 

48  50 

49  13 
49  8 
48  37 

48  30 

49  8' 
49  26 
49  22 
49  48 
49  53 
47  17 
47  15 
47  12 
47  41 
47  52 
47  55 
47  11 


Long. 
D.  M. 

59  65W 
59  48 
59  41 

59  48 

60  10 
60  30 
60  28 

60  58 

61  12 
61  35 
61  87 

61  27 


61  55 

62  27 

63  36 

64  36 

63  45 

64  10 
63  51 

63  36 

61  48 
12 

62  55 

64  33 

64  15 

63  58 
63  50 
63  50 
63  52 

63  54 

64  42 

66  8 

67  46 

68  24 

61  40 
63  23 

63  23 

64  16 
63  54 
61  58 
61  24 
61  44 
61  5 
61  10 
60  46 
60    4 


VII.  Jfew/oundland. 


Lat. 
D.  M. 
Limits  of  the  Great  Bank 

of  Newfoundland,  N 

point       .         .         .  SO  15N. 
—  South  point  .  41  00 

Outer  Bank  .         .  47  00 

Cape  Norman  .  .  31  42 
Seal  Islands  .  .  51  22 
Point  Ferolle  .  51     6 


Long. 
D.  M. 


49  45VV 
52  00 
45  00 

56  00 
66  50 

57  II 


[Point  1\ 

JCheape 

Mortiei 

Mortier 

Red  Is{{ 

Virgin  I 

Point  Bi 

Cape  St 

St.  Marj 

I  Cape  i'ii 

iCAPE  1 
Capo  Ra 
Cape  Bal 
Cape  Bro 
Say  of  fi 
J^ape  Spe 
it.  John'i 
Cape  St 
P-  of  Gra 
iTrinity  Bi 
ICape  Bon 
(Barronr  H 
Punk  Isia 
jCape  Free 
Woodh.im 
jGander  Ba 
Pago  Islan 
iriviHingat) 
Bay  of  No 
jCape  St.  J( 
Horse  Islai 
White  Bay 
Hooping  H 
Green  Islai 
Groais  ditt< 
Hare  Bay  c 
■St.  Anthonj 
^t  Lunaire' 
Cape  Deera 
Belie  Isle 


pUEBEC 
jCoudras  Isia 
L^t.  Pau|»,  Bb 


LATITUDES    AND   LONGITUDES. 


G?.** 


68  S4 

l6l  40 
163  25 

63  23 

64  16 
63  54 
61  58 
61  24 
61  44 
61  5 
61  10 
160  46 

»0    4 


Long 
D.  S 


,49  45VV 
52  00 
45  00 
56  00 
56  50 

67  n 


St.  John'8  Bajr 
Point  Riche 
Ingornecboix  Bay 
Bon  Bay 

Cape  St.  Gregory 
South  Head 
Cape  St.  George 
Cape  Anguille 
Cape  Ray 
Connor  Bay 
Burges  Island 
Rainea  Islands 
Penguin's  Islands 
Fortune  Head 
Burnt  Island 
Great  Miquclon 
Langley  Island 
St.  I'eters  Island 
Point  May 
Cheapeau  Rouge 
Mortier  Rocks 
Mortier  Harbour 
Red  Island,  S.  P. 
Virgin  R  )cks 
Point  Brciiin 
Cape  St  Mary 
St.  Mary's  Bay    . 
Cape  Pine 
CAPE  RACE 
Capo  Race  Rocks 
Cape  Ballard 
Cape  Broyle 
Bay  of  Bull 
Cape  Spear 
St.  John's  Harbour 
Cape  St  Francis 
P-  of  Grates 
Trinity  Bay 
Cape  Bonavista     . 
Barrow  Harbour 
Punk  Island 
Cape  Freels 
VVoodkAm  Islands 
Gander  Bay 
Fago  Island 
rtviilingite  hlands 
Bay  of  Notre  Dame 
Cape  St.  John 
Horse  Islands 
White  Bay 
Hooping  Harbour 
Green  Island 
Groais  ditto 
Hare  Bay  entrance 
St.  Anthony's  Cape 
St  Lunaire  Bay 
Cape  Degrat 
Belle  Isle 


Lat. 

D.  M 
50  52N 
50  46 
JO  39 
49  36 
49  22 
49  10 
48  30 
48  00 
47  35 
47  38 
47  33 
47  32 
47  24 
47  9 
17  16 
17  5 

46  50 
i6  45 
16  56 

16  52 

47  3 

17  10 
47  24 
17  11 
17  2 
16  52 
16  50 

46  44 
16  40 
16  30 

16  49 

47  S 
47  21 
47  30 

17  33 

47  57 
45  22 

48  30 
13  56 
43  52 
50     1 

49  34 
49  54 

49  44 
30  OD 

50  3 
50  00 
50  10 
50  24 
50  19 
50  46 
50  47 

50  56 

51  17 
51  20 
51  29 
51  43 
51  58 


Long. 
D.  M. 

.57  23  W 
28 
22 
5 

j8  22 

58  33 

59  12 
i9  18 
59  15 
58  00 
57  37 
57  25 
37  00 

55  51 
5G  00 

56  24 
56  24 
.6 
56 


15 
2 

.>5  25 
54  57 


•>5 
54 
54 

A 


oi   00 
53  '10 


53 
2 


51  30 
2  42 


3 

S 

3 

12 


i;3 
64 


35 

2y 


52  20 
52  25 
52  30 
52  32 
52  50 
i2  35 
J3  00 
52  12 

52  55 
•>3  30 

53  55 
53  64 
•)4  35 
55  30 
55  30 
55  48 
>6  15 
.56  13 
55  35 
55  38 
55  50 
55  36 
55  30 
55  30 
55  30 


Vlll.  From  ijuebecto  Huiiion  s  bay. 


(lUCBEC 
Coudrat  Island 
St.  Paul's  Bar 


Lat. 
D.  M. 

46  43  N 

47  15 
i47  16 


Long. 

D.  M. 
71     5VV 
70  19 
70  24 


Bay  of  Rocks 

t'oint  Milte  Nache 

Manicougan  Point 

Cape  Mcholas 

Cape  MontpcUes 

Trinity  Cove 

The  Seven  Islands  Tav 

St  John's  River 

Mingan  Island 

^skimaux  Islands 

.Mount  Joli 

Boat  Islands 

St.  iMary's  Islands 

Little  Mccctina  dit'o 

Great  Mecatiiia  Point 

St.  Augustine  Bay 

F.skiinaux  Bay 

Grand  Point " 

Forteau  Bay 

Red  Cliffs     . 

tilack  Bay 

'.ted  Hay 

V'ork  Point 

Cape  Charles 

^ircat  Hay  of  Eskimaux 

l^apo  Ilarison 

it  Peter's  Harbour 

inchantcd  Cope 

Saddle  Isl.inds 

.'^ast  Island 

Steel  Point 

CarJinal's  Island 

.'alse  Black  Head 

mack  Head 

Cape  Chidley 

Button's  Islnnrls 


-.1  15 
l»l  28 
t.l  24 
i.l  32 
151  36 
|51  43 

■31  46 

51  59 

52  13 
54  20 
34  f)4 
36  28 

i6  40 
u  13 
57  45 

38  7 

53  ftC 

39  20 

59  50 
<50  14 

60  47 


l.org. 
D   M. 
'j9  42 U 
(58  38 
67  42 
S7  10 
66  51 
i6  48 


IX.    Hudson's  Ihnj    a  la 
ris'  Sti-:i 


Slrjts,  and  Da- 


Capo  Resolution 
Sad.llc  I'nck  1«  aivl 
'Jpprr  Savage  Island 
Noitb  liiul' 
Capes  CInrles 
Cape  Dorset 
Cape  Pembroke 
"ape  \VuUiiigbom 
Ciipe  Digues 
Salisbury  Islands 
Vliiiisfield  Isl.  N.part 

—  S  part 

Cape  Southampton 
North  Sleepers 
West  Sleepers 
Portland  Point 
Baker's  Dozen 
Belcher's  N.  Point 
James'  Hay 

—  Cape  Henrietta 

—  Cape  Jones 

—  Bear  Iste 

—  North  Cubb 

—  The  Trins 


.6  £0 

5.5  10 
54  60 
34  34 
54  20 
S3  12 


■*2  30 
?^  64 
SI  24 
80  4.S 
"iO  35 


4 


«»76 


LATITUDES  AND  LONGITUDES. 


1 

Lat. 

Long. 

Lat. 

Long. 

D.  M. 

D.  M. 

D.  M. 

D.  M. 

—  Alban  J  Fort 

52  14N. 

82  0  W 

Cape  Bedford 

66  55N. 

68  SOW 

4^ 

Moose  Fort 

51  16 

SO  5 

i 

Waygate  Island 

70  40 

44  13 

Charlton  island 

52     3 

79  55 

Bear  Sound 

63  20 

49  10 

^ 

York  Fort 

57     2 

92  32 

i 

Maab 

62    5 

48  27 

1 

Cape  Churchill 

59  48 

93  12 

a; 

Cape  Farewell 

59  38 

42  42 

-^ 

P.  of  Wales'  Fort 

58  48 

94  14 

_•» 

Whale's  Island 

62  30 

43  16 

Marble  Island 

62  33 

91     6 

1 

Herjoisness 

66    3 

29  50 

J 

Cape  Dobbes 

65  00 

86  42 

"3 

Bontokoe  Island 

73  16 

7     6 

J5 

Cape  Walsingham 

64     6 

66  10 

^ 

Gael  Hamkes  Bay 

75  00 

6  61 

Dyer's  Cape 

66  20 

66  15 

John  Mayan's  Island    • 

71  10 

9  49 

Sanderson's  Hope 

66  18 

68  10    1 

Note  to} 

and,  off  p, 

end  of  the 

north-easte 

Note  to  p 

is  30  feet  hi 

about  75  fe< 

Note  to  p 

vernment,  a 

ling  into,  oi 

mark  for  th 

Elizabeth  ar 

Sound,  (hall 

IS  one-fourth 

level  of  the  i 

n'gh,  painte« 

which  is  blac 

From  the  colu 

beth  S,  W.  J 

To  the  outer  Grt 

To  Half-way  Re 

To  Drunkard's  I 

To  Mark  Island 

To  S.  Point  of  J 

To  Turnip  Islan 

To  Cape  Small  1 


rl.' 


Note  to  page 
ed  in  March, 
trance  of  Port 
1827)  the  sites 
present  year, 
both  exhibit^ 
Note  to  page 
1827,  for  buildi 
Island,  which  ft 
to  be  left,  in  enl 
in  the  appropria 
ly  wish,  for  the  I 
not  think  an  apf 
»  dangerous  led,'' 
wlien  entering  t 
Note  to  page  4 
Newburyport  Ci 
tMnces  to  harb( 
Mution,  as  the  d 
Note  to  page  6 

Jotheendofthe 
(described  in  png 

he  Old  Light  (d. 
island,  where  yoi 
Note  to  page  Ji 
"Snt-ship  on  the 
Note  to  page  Qjm 

Jo'nt  light.    It,™ 
^-Mt  Greenwich. 


1 1  ] 


1 


APPENDIX. 


Note  to  page  S,fi. — A  light-house  is  erected  on  Mantinicus  (or  Matinicus)  Isl- 
and, off  Penobscot  Bay,  coast  of  Maine.  There  are  two  lanterns,  one  at  each 
end  of  the  keeper's  house,  which  show  two  distinct  fixed  lights,  sailing  coastwise, 
north-easterly  and  south-westerly;  and  one  light,  sailing  N.  N.  W.  and  S.  S-  E. 

Note  to  page  SI.— A.  light-house  is  erected  on  Penmequid  Point.  The  tower 
is  30  feet  high  from  the  surface  of  the  ground  on  which  it  stands ;  the  lantern  ii 
about  75  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  exhibits  a  fixed  light. 

Note  to  page.  36. — There  has  lately  been  erected,  by  order  of  the  U.  S.  go- 
vernment, a  stone  column  on  little  Mark  Island,  as  a  land  mark  for  vessels  run- 
ning into,  or  passing  either  Harpswell  or  Broad  Sound.  It  is  also  a  conspicuous 
mark  for  the  mariner,  standing  in  from  sea,  in  any  direction  between  Cape 
Elizabeth  and  Cape  Small  Point.  This  island,  at  the  entrance  of  Harpswell 
Sound,  (half  way  between  Portland  and  the  entrance  of  the  River  Kennebec) 
is  one-fourth  of  a  mile  in  length,  without  trees,  its  elevation  forty  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea ;  the  column  is  placed  near  the  centre  of  the  island,  fifty  feet 
high,  painted  perpendicularly  in  black  and  white  stripes,  except  near  the  top, 
which  is  black  on  each  side. 


To  Whale  Rock  (out  of  water)  S.  W. 

by  W 1^  milM. 

To  Haddock  Rock  or  Island,  N.  Ft. 

N.  VV.  i  W J 

To  S.  W.  Point  of  Haskel's  Island 

N.  N.  W.         .        .        .        .1 
To  Middle  of  Eagle  Island  w!n.W. 

iW li 

To  Mackerol  Cove  E.  N.  E.      .      2 


From  the  column  to  Cape  Eliza- 
beth S.  W.  §  W.        .        .        .  13  miles. 
To  the  outer  Green  Island  S.VV.byW.  6 
To  Half-way  Rock  S.  by  W.  i  W.      4 
ToDrunkard'sLedgeS.^W.tjS.iW.  1^ 
To  Mark  Island  Ledge  S.  k.  ^  S.        | 
To  S.  Point  of  Jaquish  E.  i  S.       ,     l^ 
To  Turnip  island  £.  ^  N.     .  l| 

To  Cape  Small  Point  E.  by  S.       .10 

Course  up  Harpswell  Sound  N.  E.  ^  N. 
The  courses  are  by  compass,  and  distance  in  statute  miles. 
Note  to  page  89. — A  law  passed  the  Congress  of  the  United  States  which  end- 
ed in  March,  1827,  for  building  tico  light-houses  on  Cape  Elizabeth,  at  the  en- 
trance of  Portland  Harbour,  State  of  Maine,  but  at  the  present  time  (July  16, 
1827)  the  sites  are  not  fixed  on,  and  it  is  not  probable  they  will  he  built  the 
present  year.  We  have  authority  for  saying,  when  completed,  they  will 
both  exhibit  fixed  lights. 

Note  to  page  44.— An  Act  passed  the  Congress  of  the  United  States,  March 
1827,  for  building  a  light-house  on  the  Whalers  Back,  lying  S.  S.  W.  from  Wood 
Island,  which  forms  the  eastern  entrance  to  Portsmouth  (N.  H.)  harbour,  and  is 
to  be  left,  in  entering,  on  the  starboard  hand.  It  is  probable,  from  some  mistake 
in  the  appropriation,  that  it  will  not  be  erected  until  the  year  1 828 ;  but  we  sincere- 
ly wish,  for  the  benefit  of  all  concerned  in  navigation,  it  may  be  effected,  as|we  do 
not  think  an  appropriation  could  be  made  to  more  advantage,  being  to  point  out 
t  dangerous  ledge,  covered  at  half-tide,  near  which  the  mariner  must  approach 
when  entering  the  harbour,  leaving  it  on  the  starboard  hand. 

Note  to  page  46.— There  being  some  improvements  in  the  depth  of  water  over 
Newburyport  Bar,  we  refer  our  readers  to  page  663,  (Tide  Table)  but  as  all  en- 
trances to  harbours  obstructed  by  shoals  are  subject  to  change,  recommend 
caution,  as  the  depth  here  mentioned  cannot  continue. 

Note  to  page  61. — Line  7,  from  the  top,  after  coming  to  W.  by  S.  omitting  all 
to  the  end  of  the  paragraph,  read,  two  miles,  until  the  light  on  Long  Island  Head 
(described  in  page  62)  bears  N.W.  by  N.  then  steer  N.  W.  about  one  mile,  or  until 
the  Old  Light  (described  in  note  to  p.  61,  with  this  t  reference)  is  hid  by  George's 
Island,  where  you  may  anchor  in  from  7  to  5  fathoms,  in  safety,  in  Nantasket  Road. 
Note  to  page  75.— Appropriations  have  been  made  by  Congress  for  placing  a 
light-ship  on  the  S.  W.  part  of  Tuckernuck  Shoal,  in  the  Vineyard  Sound. 

Note  to  page  9t. — The  buoy  on  Long  Point  (East  Greenwich)  lies  at  the  en- 
tranct  of  Greenwich  Harbour,  about  a  mile  i.nd  a  half  distant  from  Warwick 
Point  light.  It  is  a  spar-buoy,  and  must  be  left  on  th«  larboard  hand  goinf  into 
Eait  Greenwich.  ,.--- 


I 


[2] 


Note  to  page  93. — Aflfir  ninninp  W.  S.  W.  nlioiit  twelve  leagues  from  Falk- 
land Island  liglit  <dfiscrih«'d  in  notr  fo  |»;<g«  93)  }'ou  may  raake  Eaton's  Neck 
Usht  (also  descrilit'd  in  nolo  to  pnp^i-  93)  on  t!io  itirltoaid  hand,  ^vliicli  is  on  Long 
Island,  and  annlluT  on  \\w.  starltoard  hand,  lu-ai  ing  above  N.  I  W.  from  it,  which 
is  on  thesoutli-wpst  of  Norwalk  (or  Shoflicld's  Island)  ofi'  the  harbour  of  Nor- 
walk,  showinj;  a  lij;lit  on  tho  nvolvins; principle,  tino  side  of  each  revolution  pro- 
ducing a  blood  red  light,  and  the  other  a  ro:nnion  white  light,  distinguishing  it 
from  any  other  lif^ht  in  Long  Island  Sound. 

There  have  likewise  recently  bi!en  placed  three  Spar-Buoys,  in  the  harbour  of 
Bridgeport,  viz.  One  on  JMarchand  I'^lats,  which  lies  a  mile  S.  J  W.  from  the 
outer  beacon.  One  on  Stony  Bar,  bearing  S.  E.  from  the  beacon,  150  yards 
distant.     One  on  Allen's  Flat,  being  inside  the  harbour. 

Vessels  bound  into  Bridgeport  must  leave  the  outer  buoy  on  the  larboard  hand, 
and  steer  direct  for  the  beacon,  leaving  the  buoy  on  Stony  Bar  on  the  starboard 
hand,  and  that  on  Allen's  Flats  on  the  larboard.  One  buoy  near  Smith's  Ledge,  off 
Darien,  four  miles  west  of  Norwalk,  placed  in  1 5  feet  at  low  water,  and  bears  S. 
by  E.  from  the  centre  of  the  ledge,  which  is  mostly  in  sight  at  low  water.  The 
huoy  is  about  60  yards  from  the  ledge.  There  is  a  ledge  S.  W.  by  W.  from  the 
light,  one  mile  distant,  with  a  black  spar-buoy  on  it,  between  which  and  the  light 
you  should  not  pass. 

The  beacon  on  W-'ill's  Point  bears  about  N.  E-  from  the  outer  beacon,  which 
is  on  the  »vest  flat,  distant  about  S50  yards. 

Note  topage  95. — Between  Hart  Island  and  Sa  id's  Point  light,  nearly  one  mile 
distant  from  the  latter,  lies  Channel  Rock,  r)n  which  is  a  black  spar-buoy  that 
must  be  left  to  the  southward  in  passing.  About  one-quarter  of  a  mile  distant 
from  Channel  Rock,  lies  S.  W.Rock,  sometimes  dry  at  low  water,  which  must 
also  be  left  to  the  southward  when  passing :  it  has  a  white  spar-buoj'-  on  it. 

Note  topage  100. — A  light-house  is  erected  on  the  west  end  of  Plumb  Island, 
which  exhibits  a  revolving  light,  elevated  C.'3  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  is 
intended  fo  show  the  passage  between  Oyster  Pond  Point  and  Plumb  Island. 
This  light  will  also  be  greatly  to  the  advantage  of  vessels  bound  io  the  eastward, 
or  round  Montauge  point,  when,  through  storms  or  foggy  weather,  it  is  not  pru- 
dent to  go  through  the  Rare.  In  this  rout  (calle^  Plumb  Gut,)  you  leave  the 
light  on  your  larboard  hand,  running  boldly  for  the  cliff  on  which  it  stands,  then 
fiteering  S.  E.  by  E.  till  the  Gull  light  bears  N.  E.  by  E.  when  you  may  shape 

Jrour  course  for  Point  Judith  or  wherever  you  may  wish.  When  passing  the 
i|;jht,  you  will  open  Gardiner's  bay,  which  is  the  passage  to  Sag  Harbour,  and 
also  leave  Oyster  Pond  Point  on  your  starboard  hand,  off  the  eastern  part  of 
which  a  shoal  extends  one  tliird  over  ioward  the  south  end  of  IMumb  Island. 

The  bearings  of  the  light'hou^e  have  been  taken  from  the  Jolloicing  places  ; — From  Oyster 
Pond  Point  and  the  reef,  N.  E.  by  E.  distant  from  the  outer  part  of  the  reef  one  and  three 
quarters  miles.  From  .Saybrook  Light  S.  E.  \  3.  distant  15  miles.  From  Tine  Point  (the 
9.  W.  part  of  Plumb  Island)  N.  \V.  by  N.  distant  three  quarters  of  a  mile.  From  Cherry 
Harbour  Point  (the  S.  W.  part  of  Gardner's  Island)  N.  N.  W.  distant  nine  miles.  From 
Gardinier's  Point  N.  W.  3  ^^^-  distant  six  miles.  From  New-London  Light  S.  W.  \  S. 
distant  thirteen  and  a  half  miles.  From  Cedar  Island  (at  the  entrance  of  Sag  Harbour) 
N.  N.  E.  \  E.  distant  twelve  miles. 

Note  topage  102. — East  from  Stanford,  one  mile  from  land,  lies  Shiphand* 
Reef,  on  which  a  buoy  is  placed,  from  which  the  light-house  on  Eaton's  Neck 
bears  S.  E.     You  must  not  go  between  the  buoy  and  main,  unless  compelled. 

Note  to  page  107.  As  two  Light-Houses  are  now  building  on  the  *Highlunds 
of  Neversink,  we  annex  the  following  Directions  for  sailing  in  by  Sandy-Hook, 
corresponding  with  a  Chart  publisiied  by  Edmund  and  Georgk  W.  Blunt, 
from  actual  survey.  No.  Voi  Water-street,  corner  of  Maiden  Lane,  New-York, 
where  nil  the  Nautical  Works  of  Edmund  M.  Blunt  are  published. 

*  There  are  two  Lighf-Hoiisps  building  on  the  Highlands  bearing  N.  23"-^  W.  and  S.  23^ f- 
from  each  other,  and  the  distance  between  each  about  100  yards.  The  southern  light- 
house will  show  a  revolving  tight,  elevated  45  feet  above  its  base.  The  northern  light- 
house ii  elevated  the  ipme,  and  will  exhibit  a  fixed  light.  They  will  be  completed  in 
the  Spring  of  1928,  and  will  be  of  groat  advantage  to  Mariners,  while  approaching 
the  eoast.  .  > 


When  J 

till  the  ligh 

Highlands 

and  the  li« 

the  S.W.  I 

lands  will  r 

the  Upper 

one.     Aftei 

when  you  n 

ter  to  7,  8, 


Sandy-Hoo 
Telegraph, 
i-'eht-Houses 
of  the  sea. 


Point  of  the 

Sandy-HooJ, 

Spar-Buoy  o 

Bay  S.  860  R. 

At  Prince's 

feet  above  tid 

Note  to  pag 

a  good  harboi 

on  the  point  v 

It,  until  within 

till  you  g«t  to 

of  water  on  tli 

proaching  the  I 

the  entrance,  t 

Note  to  pofTA 

Little  Egg  Han 
.  ^0^6  to  pao-i 
situated  about  ( 
from  Cape  Hei 
Brandy  wine  SI 
she  will  exhibit 
Brandywine  SI 
Note   to  pag,' 
pharlti,  a  Ji||, 
It  from  that  ou 
Pfg"   ni,  and 
also  exhibits  a  ^ 
Note  to  page  i 
ill  Chesapeak  B 
uegrass,  and  is  n 
patella,  ouFo 
and  shows  a  fix 
Note  to  page  I 
ttie  Patapsco  riv( 
about  two  miley  i 
onit.with4fath 
^'*l'=>  V\M)lufr( 
Pearing  aa  one  to 
Jfagothy,  S.  HO 
0  ack  and  white  a 

placed  on  the  nor 

Note  to  page  ^ 

shoiving  two  lich 

'327,  and  wu  la 


[3] 


Falk- 
Neck 
Long 
•which 
F  Nor- 
•n  pro- 
hing  it 

hour  of 
i»m  tJie 

0  yards 

rd  hand, 
tarboard 
edge,  off 
bears  S. 
-r.  The 
from  the 

1  the  light 


on,  w 


hich 


j^  one  mile 

buoy  that 

lile  distant 

hich  must 

nn  it. 

mb  Island, 

1  sea,  and  is 

imb  Island. 

e  eastward, 

13  not  pru- 

u  leave  the 

Hands,  then 
may  shape 
passing  tlic 

jarbour,  and 
lern  part  of 
[island. 
-From  Oyster 
knc  and  three 
[ne  Toint  (the 
roin  Cherry 
liles.  From 
ntS.W.jS. 
Bog  Harbour) 

Shiphand'* 
Iton's  Neck 
lompelled. 

♦  llighUindi 

iandy-Hoo*'- 

1  New -York, 

■uthern  ligh'; 

^rthfrn  ligW' 
completed  in 
'  ppproaching 


When  lip  with  the  Bar,  and  mid-way  between  the  two  buoys,  stiM-r  W.  l)y  IV* 
till  the  light-house  on  Sandy-Hook  r  iii;j;es  with  the  easternmost  of  I've  trr  es  on  ihu 
Highlands;  you  may  then  steer  W.  till  you  get  the  west  bearuu  on  the  point 
and  the  light-house  in  range,  and  so  keep  them  till  you  miike  the  black  buoy  of 
the  S.W.  Spit ;  when  you  arc  up  with  the  Spit,  the  two  light-houses  on  the  High- 
lands will  range,  when  you  may  steer  N.  by  E.  {  E.  until  you  make  the  buoy  of 
the  Upper  Middle,  when  the  east  beacon  and  Sandy  Hook  light  will  range  in 
one.  After  passing  the  Upper  Middle,  you  will  deepen  your  water  to  6  fathoms, 
when^fou  may  steer  N.  up  through  the  Narrows,  and  you  will  deepen  your  wa- 
ter to  7,  8,  10,  12,  and  16  fathonis. 

Bearings  from  the  Telegraph  at  Neversink  Hilts : — 

Sandy-Hook  LiglitHoust  N.  7^  \V.  willi  tlie  wests'ule  of  Fort  Lafayette  in  range. 

Telegraph  on  Staten  Island  N.  10^  W.  Level  of  tlie  Hill  at  tho  Telegraph,  where  the 
Light-Houses  are  erecting  205  feet,  m.iUing  the  two  lanterns  'JjO  feet  above  tiie  level 
of  the  sea. 

Bearings  from  Prince'' s  Bay  Light-House:— 

Point  of  the  Neversink  Hills  S.  5-t^  E. 
Sandy-Hook  Light-House  S.  71^  E. 

Spar-Buoy  on  the  north  side  of  the  Ilaiuid  or  Middle  Shoal,  at  the  entrance  of  Prince's 
Bay  S.  Se^*  E. 

At  Prince's  Bay,  where  the  light-house  is  erected,  the  level  of  the  Hill  is  77 
feet  above  tide-water.    .The  elevation  is  30  feet  from  its  base. 

Note  to  page  108. — Absecuni,  six  riiles}  south  of  Little  Egg  Harbour,  affords 
a  good  harbour  for  vessels  of  easy  draught.  To  enter  the  harhuur,  bring  the  house 
on  the  point  which  lies  on  the  larboard  hand,  to  bear  N.  VV.  and  steer  directly  for 
it,  until  within  one  quarter  of  a  mile  of  the  house,  wiien  you  must  steer  north 
till  you  get  to  the  marsh,  where  you  may  anchor  in  from  3  to  G  fathoms.  Depth 
of  water  on  the  bar  at  low  water,  U  feet;  common  rise  of  tide  5  feet.  In  ap- 
proaching the  harbour,  you  must  carefully  avoid' the  slioal  which  lies  E\  S.  E.  from 
the  entrance,  two  and  a  (piurter  miles  distant,  already  mentioned  (page  108.) 

Note  to  page  110.— Appropriations  have  been  made  for  placing  Jive  Buoya  at 
Little  Egg  Harbour,  but  at  the  present  time  (Sept.  20,  1  C:i7,)  it  has  not  been  done. 
Note  to  page  III. — A  light-house  is  built  on  tlie  Brandy  wine  Shoal.  It  h» 
situated  about  one  mile  above  the  lower  spit  of  the  shoal,  and  bears  N.  by  VV. 
from  Cape  Henlopen  light-house.  The  light  vessel  which  has  been  moored  at 
Brandywine  Shoal,  is  now  at  her  winter  quarter  station  (Reedy  Island)  where 
she  will  exhibit  her  light  during  the  winter.  [No  light  is  yet  exhibited  on  the 
Brandywine  Shoal,  Jan.  1828.] 

Note  to  pagr  116. — On  Smith's  /stent/,  which  lies  north-easterly  from  Cape 
Cliarles,  a  light-house  is  erected,  exhibiting  a  revolving  light,  distinguishing 
it  from  that  on  Cape  Henlopen,  which  is  a  fixed  light,  as  described  in  note  to 
page  111,  and  tho  one  on  Cape  Henry,  described  in  note  to  page  114,  which 
also  exhibits  a  fired  light. 

Note  to  page  117. — A  light  vessel  is  anchored  at  or  near  Hooper's  Straits, 
ill  Chesapeak  Bay,  and  a  light-house  is  built  on  Concord  Point,  near  Havre- 
degruss,  and  is  now  lighted.  REMARK.  The  light-house  mentionedin  note  to 
page  118,  on  Fog's  Point  (Smith's  Island)  opposite  Point  Lookout,  is  completed, 
and  shows  a  fixkd  light,  as  there  described. 

Note  to  page  121. — Navigators,  who  fre([uent  the  Swash  Channel  leading  into 
the  Patapsco  river,  will  be  pleased  to  notice  that  a  hard  knoll  or  oyster  bank  lies 
about  two  miles  above  the  mouth  of  Magothy  river,  having  less  than  7  feet  water 
on  it,  with  4  fathoms  soft  around  it,  from  which  the  Bodkin  light-house  bears 
N.  4lo  W.  bluff  off  Sandy  Point  S.  9°  W.  and  two  very  light  green  trees,  ap- 
pearing as  one  to  the  naked  eye,  standing  over  the  Red  bank  to  the  northward  of 
Magothy,  S.  84°  W.  to  the  Red  banic  two  miles.  A  small  mast  buoy,  painted 
bittck  and  white  alternately,  with  an  O  upon  it,  both  in  the  black  and  white,  is 
placed  on  the  northern  edge  of  it. 

Note  to  page  124. — ^Thc  Light-Ship,  which  has  been  moored  off  Hatteras, 
showing  two  lights,  was  driven  from  her  moorings  in  the  gale  of  August  26, 
1327,  and  wu  fear,  from  her  disabled  state,  she  will  not  be  soon  replaced.    It 


U  our  duty  to  mention  it. — \  law  ulso  passKtl  Congress  at  the  Session  of  1826-'/, 
fur  continuing  the  Ocrucock  veaael  on  ninu  feet  shual. 

Note  topai^e  128 A   light-house  is  to  be  built  on  the  Point  of  Marsh,  which 

forms  the  we.stern  entrance  to  Neuse  river;  and  a  Uf^ht  vessel  is  to  be  moor«d  on 
the  S.  VV.  point  of  Royal  Skoal,  in  Pam.ico  Sound,  Ocracor.k  Inlet. 

Note  to  page  130.  A  light-house  is  built  on  the  N.  E.  Racoon  Key,  near  Cape 
Roman,  which  exhibits  a  red  fixed  light,  lat.  33^  1'  N.  long.  79°  14'  W.  The 
pitch  or  southern  point  of  Cape  Roman  bears  E.  S.  E.  from  the  light-house  ;  the 
Old  Mill  N.  i  W.  and  the  large  Racoon  Key  W.  by  S.  [This  light-house  has 
been  erected  since  the  note  to  page  130  was  published.] 


Note  to  page  l.'»9. 
Augustine  harbour. 


Three  Buoys  are  placed  on  the  Bar  at  the  entrance  of  St. 


Note  to  page  142. — A  law  passed  the  Session  of  Congress,  which  ended  in 
March  1837,  for  building  a  light-house  on  Cat  Island,  in  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 
Cat  Island  lies  on  the  north  side  of  the  channel  into  Blind  Lake  and  Lake 
Ponchetrain. 

Note  topa^e  146.— Since  our  remarks  respecting  the  S.  W.  passage  into  the 
rirer  Mississippi,  we  are  strengthened  in  the  belief  it  has  advantages  over  the 
other  by  the  fact,  that  the  ships  Cumberland  and  Golconda,  drawing  16  feet, 
were  both  taken  out  without  touching,  whereas  ships  drawing  14||  feet  often  lie 
OD  the  S.  £.  bar  for  days. 

Note  to  page  1.50. — There  is  a  passage  through  Key  West  from  Florida  Stream 
into  the  Bay  of  Mexico,  for  vessels  drawing  12  feet,  at  low  water.  This  passage 
:s  about  6  miles  in  extent,  and  vessels,  by  passing  through  it,  save  the  danger  and 
delay  of  going  round  the  Dry  Tortugas.  Good  Pilots  can  be  obtained  at  Key  West, 
to  carry  vessels  through.    The  following  ar«  the 

Directions  for  the  A*.  W.  passive  b  Iween  Key  West  and  the  Mule  Keys,  into  the  Bay 

of  Mexico. 

Bring  the  Light<Houae  on  Key  West,  \o  bear  S.  E.  run  N.  W.  -.vhich  will  carry  you  be- 
tween the  Banks  in  the  Channel :  a ;  yoi  approach  the  Bar,  therp  is  a  small  middle  ground 
with  nine  feet  water.  Go  either  side  jt  it,  and  cross  the  bar  in  12  feet  water.  While  on 
the  bar,  the  Light-House  on  Key  Wesi,  will  bear  by  compass  S.  £.  by  S. — About  8  miles 
from  the  northern  Mule  Key,  the  N.  £.  side  of  the  bar  is  broken  ground,  having  only  9  feet 
water  on  the  knolls,  the  S.  E.  side  is  dear,  and  the  soundings  regular.  When  you  bring 
the  west  end  of  the  northern  Mule  Key  open  witli  a  Key  beuring  S.  VV.  from  it,  you  have 
passed  the  bar — and  the  latter  direction  will  enable  vessels  coming  from  the  westward  into 
Key  West  harbour,  to  enter  the  Channel  by  running  with  the  above  named  two  Islands 
open  until  you  have  24  fathoms,  and  the  Li^ht  upon  Key  West  bearing  S.  E.  then  run  for 
the  key  West  Light,  keeping  near  the  bank  which  can  be  distinctly  seen. 

Note  to  page  1^8. — Five  Buoys  are  to  be  placed  at  the  entrance  of  Mobile  Bay, 
viz. — a  spar  Buoy  on  the  S.  E.  extremity  of  the  Shoal  projecting  from  Mobile 
point,  which  you  leave  on  the  starboard  hand  entering  the  harbour.  One  on  the 
west  side  of  the  channel  from  the  bar.  One  on  the  west  side  of  the  channel  &n 
the  bar,  both  which  you  leave  on  the  larboard  hand.  One  on  the  S.  E.  side  of 
the  Spit  projecting  from  Sand  Island,  and  one  on  Dog  Point  Bar. 


=4 


a 

r 

B 


( 


Note  to  p 
point  of  C 
high  water 
ern  entranc 
Ships  in  ent 
may  safely 
main  chann 
Bello,  as  th< 
the  islands 
wards  of  a 
wards  the   _ 
and  Casco  B 
After  passin 
iht  tide  becoi 
shore. 

Note  to  pag 
Ro<j  . 

Note  to  pag 

at  the  mouth  ( 

Note  to  pag 

is  68  feet  higli 

low  the  other 

;aiips  and  ret 

cable's  length 

athoms  of  wat 

Note  to  page 

IS  not  used. 

Note  to  page 
of  eastern  poini 
ftone  menu  men 
iliver,  in  the  w 
ai  high  water, 
nisquam  River. 
Note  to  page ' 
Dennis  and  Yai 
Note  to  page 
on  the  northwes 
north  and  south 
Note  to  pase 
Point. 
Note  to  page  1 
Note  to  page  ] 
Caryafort  Reef, 
Note  to  page  I 
S.  S.  W.  from  1\' 
"'ork,  and  may  b 
A  light-house 
Bayou  La  Fourci 
'tss  no  particulai 


ttof  I8i6-t, 

'arsh,  which 
inoor«d  on 

t. 

y,  near  Cape 

14' W.  The 
t-house  -,  the 
ht-house  has 


trance  of  St. 


hich  ended  in 
f  of  Mexico, 
ce  and  Lake 

issage  into  the 
tages  over  the 
iwing  16  feet, 
J  feet  often  lie 


riorida  Stream 

This  passage 

the  danger  and 

>d  at  Key  West, 

into  the  Bay 

rill  carry  you  be- 
ill  middle  ground 
rater.     W  hile  on 

I About  8  miles 

laving  only  9  feet 

When  you  bring 

[from  it,  you  have 

te  westward  into 

led  two  Islands 

E.  then  run  for 


[)f  Mobile  Bay. 

from  Mobile 

One  on  the 

Ithe  channel  on 

S.  E.  side  of 


[5] 

ADDITIONAL  APPENDIX. 

December  i  1830. 


Note  to  page  21. — A  light-housc  has  lately  been  erected  on  the  northeast 
point  of  Campo  Beilo ;  it  is  a  fixed  light,  and  the  lanthorn  is  60  feet  above 
high  water  mirk  ;  it  ia  placed  between  the  main  ship  channel  and  the  north* 
em  entrance  into  Head  Harbour,  and  within  250  feet  of  the  extfraic  point. 
Ships  in  entering  into  th«  m  in  channel,  or  vessels  bound  to  Head  Harbour) 
may  safely  pass  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  light-house.  In  sailing  up  the 
main  channel,  care  should  be  taken  not  to  keep  far  from  the  shores  of  Capripo 
Bello,  as  the  flood  tide  sets  directly  over  fron.  the  point  at  the  light-house  to 
the  islands  and  ledges  on  the  north  side  of  the  channel,  which  is  here  up- 
wards of  a  mile  in  width  ;  and  at  tvr-o  hours  Hood  the  tide  sets  directly  to- 
wards the  Black  Rock,  which  is  a  very  dangerous  ledge,  between  Spruce 
and  Casco  Bay  Islan'is,  upon  which  several  vessels  have  been  wi'ecked. 
After  passing  up  and  leavinu[  the  light-house  about  a  mile  to  the  eastward, 
;h«  tide  becomes  moro  regular  and  sets  along  the  direction  of  Campo  Bello 
shore. 

Note  to  page  27. — A  light-house  has  been  lately  placed  on  Mount  Desert 
Roit  . 

Note  to  page  36. — A  light-house  has  been  erected  on  Hendrick's  Head, 
at  the  mouth  of  Shoepscot  River. 

Note  to  page  44. — A  light-housc  has  been  erected  on  Whale's  Back ;  it 
is  68  feet  high,  from  low  water  mark,  has  two  fixed  lights,  one  ten  feet  be- 
low the  other ;  the  upper  light  with  ten,  and  the  lower  with  five  patent 
;a  Tips  and  refiectors.  A  vessel  going  into  the  harbour  can  run  within  a 
cable's  length  of  the  light,  keeping  it  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  hav«  four 
athoms  of  water. 

N(Ae  to  page  45. — Th^  bell,  as  noticed  in  the  light-house  on  White  Island, 
IS  not  used. 

Note  to  page  51. — A  stone  monument  has  been  erected  on  the  S.  W.  head 
of  eastern  point  of  Cape  Ann,  15  feet  at  the  base  and  40  feet  high.  And  a 
rtone  monument  has  lately  been  erected  on  Lobster  Rocks,  in  Annisquam 
lUver,  in  the  west  eud,  is  12  feet  at  the  base,  17  feet  high,  and  7  feet  out 
M  high  water.  Three  buoys  have  been  placed  near  the  entrance  of  An- 
nisquam  River. 

Note  to  page  70. — A  beacon  has  been  erected  in  Bass  River  between 
Dennis  and  Yarmouth. 
Note  to  page  96.— Two  light-houses  have  been  placed  on  Block  Island, 

on  the  northwest  point,  distant  from  each  other  about  30  feet,  amd  bearing 

north  and  south  of  each  other. 
NMto  page  115. — A  revolving  light  has  been  erected  on  Back  River 

Point. 
Note  to  page  142. — A  light-house  is  building  on  Cat  Island. 
Note  to  page  151. — A  light-ship  has  proceeded  to  take  her  station  on 

Carysfort  Reef,  opposite  Sound  Point,  Key  Largo.     December  1st,  1830. 
Note  to  page  159. — A  beacon  has  been  ererteil  on  Sand  Island,  3  miles 

S.  S.  W,  from  Mobile  Point ;  n  is  30  feet  above  water,  on  a  frame  of  iron 

work,  and  mav  be  seen,  in  good  weather,  from  five  to  six  miles. 
A  light-house  has  been  erected  on  the  Timbeliers,  at  the  entrance  of 

1  Bayou  La  Fourche,  to  the  westward  of  Mississippi  River,  of  which  we  pos- 

I  tess  no  particular  information. 


[6J 

Note  to  page  IQl. — A.  light.houso  has  bcoQ  erected  at  the  entrance  of 
at.  Mark's  River,  on  the  starboard  hand  going  in. 

Directions  for  the  Brazo  dc  Santiago  and  the  Rio  del  Norte,  by  Thomas 
M.  Thompson,  Branch  Pilot. 

In  running  down  for  the  Brasses,  bttween  the  months  of  March  and  Sep* 
tember,  be  careful  to  keep  tu  the  south  of  26°  N. ;  for  should  you  fall  in  to 
the  southward  of  the  bar  you  will  find  it  very  easy  to  make  your  northing, 
as  a  continued  current  is  running  northerly  of  from  two  to  three  knots  pQr 
hour.  Should  you  fall  in  with  the  land,  not  having  had  an  observation 
previous,  so  as  to  know  if  you  are  north  or  south  of  the  bar,  by  going  to  the 
mast-heud  you  will  sec,  it  you  are  to  the  northward,  a  large  lagoon  of  water, 
and  scarcely  be  able  to  see  the  main  land. 

N.  B. — This  lagoon  extends  to  the  north  of  28<^  30'  latitude,  and  is  a  cer- 
tain sign  of  your  being  to  the  north.  If  you  are  to  the  south  of  the  river  you 
will  find  your  water  of  a  muddy  green  colour,  and  no  lake  to  be  seen  on 
the  inside,  from  the  mast  head.  If  your  ve^isel  is  in  the  Vicinity  of  the 
river,  the  water  will  be  the  same  as  approaching  the  Mississippi.  If  you 
fall  in  between  the  river  and  the  bar  of  Santiago,  you  will  be  able  to  discern 
a  large  house,  that  stands  on  an  eminence  at  the  entrance  of  Boca  Chiea, 
a  little  narrow  inlet  situated  five  miles  south  of  the  Brasses.  Vessels  bound 
here,  between  September  and  March,  will  do  well  to  keep  as  near  the  26th 
degree  of  north  latitude  as  possible,  as  the  current  is  then  altogether  govern- 
ed by  the  winds.  With  the  exception  of  an  east  wind,  the  current  is 
northerly. 

A  White  flag  will  signify  that  a  vessel  cannot  enter,  and  will  never  be 
shown  except  there  is  danger  in  entering,  and  will  be  hauled  down  when 
the  danger  ceases. 

A  Red  flag  will  be  hoisted  to  know  your  draught  of  water,  which  you  can 
answer  by  hoisting  your  flag  as  many  times  as  your  vessel  draws  feet  of 
water ; 

When  a  Blue  flag  will  tell  you  the  pilot  is  coming  out  to  take  you  in ;  or 
if  you  draw  too  much  a\  atcr,  and  will  have  to  lighten, 

A  White  and  Red  flag  will  be  hoisted  for  you  to  anchor,  with  two  flags 
in  a  range  and  in  four  or  five  fathom  water,  and  a  lighter  will  bcsent  out  to 
you  immediately. 

A  White  and  Blue  itag  signifies  that  you  may  haul  oflT  for  the  night,  as  it 
is  too  late  to  enter,  but  you  will  be  attended  to  in  the  morning. 

Any  vessel  appearing  off*  the  harbour  in  distress,  will  be  promptly  attend- 
ed to,  on  making  the  usual  signal,  viz.  the  ensign,  union  down.  I  would 
recommend  a  white  square  flag  with  a  large  black  ball  in  the  centre,  as  a 
signal  much  quicker  discerned. 

While  the  above  teas  in  press,  we  received  the  annexed  notice. 

The  Light  Ship*  is  again  moored  on  Five  Fathom  Bank  ;  bearing  of  Cape 
May  light-house  from  the  ship  is  west,  14°  N.,  distant  15  miles.  She  is 
moored  within  the  southern  part  of  the  shoal. 

Note  by  the  Editors.' — We  would  advise  shipmasters  not  to  depend  too 
much  on  finding  this  ship  in  the  above  station,  as  she  has  been  adrift  three 
times,  within  filleen  months.  " 


\Tho  one  formerly  off  Sandy  Hook. 


ntrance  oF 


»y  Thomas 

li  and  Sep- 
11  fall  in  to 
r  northing, 
3  knots  pQr 
jbservation 
ping  to  the 
n  of  water, 

id  is  a  eer- 
ie river  yoii 
>e  seen  on 
nity  of  the 
pi.  If  you 
i  to  discern 
oca  Chiea, 
ssels  bound 
ar  the  26th 
her  govern, 
current  is 

11  never  be 
down  when 

ich  you  can 
aws  feet  ol 

you  in ;  or 

h  two  flags 
{.sent  out  to 

!  night,  as  it 

iptly  attend- 
u  I  would 
centre,  as  a 


lice. 

'ing  of  Cape 

es.    She  is 

depend  too 
adrift  three 


■7 


A  2- 


/■ 


? 

7  ? 


U- 


lU 


Z '  -  '- 


I 


,^ 


;^ 


^ 


S'  %^ 


# 


^^^i^'-^tffy 


